John
Williams'
Shadow Government Statistics
Analysis Behind and Beyond Government Economic Reporting

No. 439: April Industrial Production, Housing Starts

Wednesday, May 16th, 2012


• Unusually Unstable Production Reporting
• Housing Starts Stagnation at Slightly Higher Plateau
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 438: PUBLIC COMMENT ON INFLATION MEASUREMENT

Tuesday, May 15th, 2012

 

No. 438—PUBLIC COMMENT ON INFLATION MEASUREMENT

May 15, 2012

________

Consumer Price Index Has Been Reconfigured Since Early-1980s
So As to Understate Inflation versus Common Experience

  • CPI no longer measures the cost of maintaining a constant standard of living.
  • CPI no longer measures full inflation for out-of-pocket expenditure.
  • With the misused cover of academic theory, politicians forced significant underreporting of official inflation, so as to cut annual cost-of-living adjustments to Social Security, etc.
  • Use of the CPI to adjust retirement benefits, private income or to set investment goals impairs the ability of retirees, income earners and investors to stay ahead of inflation.
  • Understated inflation used in estimating inflation-adjusted growth has created the illusion of recovery in reported GDP.

________

 

PROBLEMS WITH INFLATION ESTIMATION

This public comment reviews and updates the nature of inflation understatement by the U.S. government’s statistical agencies and the rationale and methodology used by ShadowStats.com in compiling the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measures.  While much of the following text is new, the concepts all have been explored in earlier writings.  Some of the material here has been repeated from our September 2008 Response to BLS Article on CPI Misperceptions.

 

Real-World Experience and Public Perceptions versus Academic Theories and Political Gimmicks

In 30 years as a private, consulting economist, I have noted a growing gap between government reporting of inflation, as measured by the consumer price index (CPI), and the perceptions of inflation held by the general public.  It has been my experience that the general public believes inflation is running well above official reporting, and that the public’s perceptions tend to mirror the inflation experience that once was reflected in the government’s CPI reporting.

The growing difference in perception versus reality primarily is due to changes made over decades as to how the CPI is calculated and defined by the government.  Specifically, changes made to the definition of CPI methodologies in recent decades have reflected theoretical constructs offered by academia that have little relevance to the real-world use of the CPI by the general public.  Importantly, these changes generally are not understood by the public.

 

What the Public Looks for in an Inflation Measure

Individual use of a CPI measure generally is tied to personal financial decisions or planning, in terms of wage or income growth/adjustment, contract or benefit price adjustments and/or in terms of targeting financial returns that will stay ahead of inflation.

Accordingly, I contend that individuals look to the government’s CPI as a measure of the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living, as well as measuring that cost of living in terms of out-of-pocket expenses.

While the CPI at one time was the measure desired by the public, government efforts turned the CPI away from measuring the price changes in a fixed-weight basket of goods and services to a quasi-substitution-based basket of goods, which destroyed the concept of the CPI as a measure of the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living.

The use of hedonic quality modeling in adjusting the prices of goods and services has destroyed the concept of the CPI as a measure of out-of-pocket expenses. 

 

The Way It Was

Measurement of consumer inflation traditionally reflected measuring the cost of maintaining a constant standard of living, as measured by a fixed-basket of goods.  Maintaining a constant standard of living, however, is a concept not popular in current economic literature, and certainly not within the thinking or the lexicon of the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the government’s statistical agency that estimates and reports on consumer inflation.

The changing costs of maintaining a constant standard of living were measured by pricing out a fixed-basket of goods and services—same components, same weighting—period after period.  Whatever the percentage change was in the cost of that basket of goods, that is how much income would have to rise in order for someone to maintain a fixed- or constant-standard of living over the given period.  At least it was a reasonably consistent approximation of same.

Tracking changes in the cost of a fixed-basket of goods was the approach to estimating inflation, going back to at least the 1700s,[i] and prior to 1945, the fixed-basket CPI tracked by the U.S. government actually was known as the Cost of Living Index.[ii]

In the first half of the 20th century, though, the concept of a “constant level of satisfaction” evolved in academia, as a “true cost of living” concept.  The general argument was that changing relative costs of goods would result in consumer substitution of less-expensive goods for more-expensive goods.  Allowing for a substitution of goods within the formerly fixed-basket, the maximization of the “utility” of money held by consumers would allow attainment of “constant level of satisfaction” for the consumer.  This type of inflation-measure is more appropriate for the GDP concept—where it is used today—measuring shifting weightings with actual consumption, rather than the fixed weightings needed to assess the costs of maintaining a constant standard of living.

Where the substitution-based approach was viewed as impractical for a consumer price index, the fixed-basket approach remained the preferred inflation measure.[iii]  The academic thinking in this area remains divided, even today.[iv]

The constant-level-of-satisfaction approach was contrary to the concept of measuring the cost of maintaining a constant-standard-of-living.  In the extreme current circumstance, where the average household cannot stay ahead of even the official CPI inflation rate, consider that shifting household preferences from more-expensive to less-expensive products is forced by limited income.  Maintaining a constant-standard-of-living means being able to consume the same goods in the same quantity, without having to trade-off living quality versus price.

While the average consumer may not be able to maintain his or her current standard of living at the moment, it still is of significant value to know what is needed in income growth to offset the living-standard loss from actual inflation.

 

The Way the Politicians Wanted It

In the early-1990s, political Washington moved to change the nature of the CPI.  The contention was that the CPI overstated inflation (it did not allow substitution of less-expensive hamburger for more-expensive steak).  Both sides of the aisle and the financial media touted the benefits of a “more-accurate” CPI, one that would allow the substitution of goods and services. 

The plan was to reduce cost of living adjustments for government payments to Social Security recipients, etc.  The cuts in reported inflation were an effort to reduce the federal deficit without anyone in Congress having to do the politically impossible: to vote against Social Security.  The changes afoot were publicized, albeit under the cover of academic theories.  Few in the public paid any attention. 

Sam Zuckerman of the San Francisco Examiner, noted “In the 1990s, for example, Republicans wanted to make changes in calculating inflation along the lines recommended by a special commission, including more use of quality adjustments.  By lowering the official inflation rate, such changes promised to reduce the annual cost-of-living adjustments for Social Security and other federal programs.

“[Katherine] Abraham, the Clinton bureau [of Labor Statistics] commissioner, remembers sitting in Republican House Speaker Newt Gingrich’s office:

“ ‘He said to me, If you could see your way clear to doing these things, we might have more money for BLS programs.’ ” [v]

Federal Reserve Chairman Alan Greenspan and Michael Boskin, the chairman of the Council of Economic Advisors, were very clear as to how changing or “correcting” the CPI calculations would help to reduce the deficit.  As described at the time by Robert Hershey of the New York Times, “Speaker Newt Gingrich, Republican of Georgia, suggested this week that fixing the [CPI] index, with its implications for lower spending [Social Security, etc.] and higher revenue [tax bracket adjustments], would provide maneuvering room for budget negotiators …” [vi]

“Alan Greenspan, chairman of the Federal Reserve, is among the other Government officials who have spoken optimistically about financial benefits of a more accurate [CPI] index …” [vii]

“[E]conomists believe one of the most important [CPI upside biases] is when consumers shift their buying patterns in response to changing prices, substituting one product for another. The [CPI] index is based on a fixed market basket of goods and services. But, for example, if the price on an item like steak gets too expensive, consumers may switch to hamburger.” [viii]

The Boskin Commission Report, December 4, 1996, actually used steak and chicken for its substitution example. The examples used in arguing for changing the CPI clearly were tied to prices rising and resulting consumer demand shifting to a lower-quality product.  Simply put, that was the destruction of the cost-of-maintaining-a-constant-standard-of-living issue and was the primary consideration of those seeking to change the CPI, although other issues would come into play.  The drive here was as to get a lower inflation reading, irrespective of whether the data were “more-accurate.” 

 

_____________________

 

Summary of Real-World Needs versus Theoretical Constructs of Academia

 

Maintaining Constant Standard of Living (Fixed-Basket Inflation) versus Substitution in CPI

·       Since the 1700s consumer inflation has been estimated by measuring price changes in a fixed-weight basket of goods, effectively measuring the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living.

·       Allowing substitution of lower-priced and lower-quality goods in the basket (i.e. more hamburger when steak prices rise) lowers the reported rate of inflation versus the fixed-basket measure.

·       BLS introduced: Geometric weighting—a purely a mathematical gimmick that automatically reduces the weightings of goods rising in price, and vice versa—it has no demonstrated relationship to consumer substitution of goods based on price changes.  It was explained as a surrogate for a substitution measure.

·       BLS introduced: More frequent re-weightings of the CPI index from every ten years to every two years, which moved the CPI closer to a substitution-based index, but the change was not considered a change in methodology.

·       BLS introduced: Ongoing re-weightings of sales outlets (discount/mass-merchandisers versus Main Street shops), also moving closer to a substitution-based index and creating other constant standard of living issues.

 

Out-of-Pocket Expenses versus Nebulous Quality (Hedonic) Adjustments

·       Traditionally, what a consumer pays out-of-pocket for goods and services reflected adjustments for quality changes that could be directly quantified in a monetary sense.

o   Quality adjustments that can be measured directly in price are legitimate, such as measuring the price differential of an eight-ounce candy bar that is reduced in size to six-ounces but remains priced and packaged in the same sized box as the eight-ounce version.

·       BLS expanded quality adjustments to include the concept of “hedonic” quality adjustments, altering the pricing of goods and services for nebulous quality changes that could not be priced directly and that often are not viewed or recognized by the consumer as a desired improvement.

·       Where the effect here on the pricing of goods and services cannot be quantified directly from a pricing standpoint, the pricing impact is estimated by computer statistical modeling—hedonic adjustment modeling—that has little if any relevance to real-world experience.

·       Where the quality of the product is deemed by the government to have improved (the usual circumstance), prices in the CPI calculations are adjusted lower to offset the higher quality.

·       Usually, though, the purchasing consumer only has the option of paying out-of-pocket the full price for the product, again with little or no concept of the quality improvement being acquired and/or having no chance to opt out of paying for the improvements.

o   In an early example, the government mandated the use of a gasoline formulation that purportedly would improve auto emissions.  That added ten cents per gallon to gasoline costs, but that cost was excluded from CPI calculations.  The person filling his or her gas tank, however, felt the actual out-of-pocket expense.

o   The government later abandoned excluding government-mandated “quality” improvements, such as gasoline additives, from inflation calculations, but the principles here are exactly the same for industry-generated “quality” improvements that are not optional to consumers. 

o   Text books, for example are modeled, where one pricing factor in the hedonic quality model is whether or not there are color pictures in a book.  Unless the student is an art student, the concern usually is not over colored pictures, but rather along the lines of  “What is my out-of-pocket cost for textbooks this semester?”

o   New computer features usually are deemed quality improvements, with a downside price adjustments made in the CPI for the changes, even though a consumer may not want or use the features.

o   The consumer still has to buy those features and pay full cost out-of-pocket, irrespective of what government determines those products are generating in purported hedonic quality benefits that the consumer is not considering or using.

o   I contend that significant feature changes should be treated as a new product introduction, or otherwise ignored.

·       If the use of the hedonic process were legitimate here, it would be applied to all goods and services, but a CPI, so based, soon would come meaningless to the public (as already has happened with the CPI-U).

o   For example, there has been no pricing adjustment (upside in this case) to the costs of air travel for the destruction of travel convenience with the advent of the TSA, or from the downward spiral in U.S. air traveler comfort and convenience resulting from the effects of mergers and acquisitions, and from increasing flight delays due to economizing on aircraft maintenance.

·       Consumer concerns are for his or her out-of-pocket expenses.  What am I paying for my textbooks this semester; what am I paying out-of-pocket to fly from New York to Chicago; or what am I paying out-of-pocket for a computer, even if I am looking just to use limited functions but have no choice but to buy unwanted features?

 

_____________________

 

 

Net Reduction in CPI-U inflation from Changes in Methodology
As Reflected in the CPI-U-RS versus CPI-U Series (1980 to 2010)

Year

Average
CPI-U-RS

(1)
CPI-U-RS
Yr/Yr

(2)
Average
CPI-U

CPI-U-RS
Yr/Yr

(1)-(2)
Change in
Annual
Inflation*

Cumulative
Annual
Inflation
Shortfall

1980

127.1

 

82.4

   

0

1981

139.2

9.5%

90.9

10.3%

-0.8%

-0.8%

1982

147.6

6.0%

96.5

6.2%

-0.1%

-0.9%

1983

153.9

4.3%

99.6

3.2%

1.1%

0.1%

1984

160.2

4.1%

103.9

4.3%

-0.2%

-0.1%

1985

165.7

3.4%

107.6

3.6%

-0.1%

-0.2%

1986

168.7

1.8%

109.6

1.9%

0.0%

-0.3%

1987

174.4

3.4%

113.6

3.6%

-0.3%

-0.5%

1988

180.8

3.7%

118.3

4.1%

-0.5%

-1.0%

1989

188.6

4.3%

124.0

4.8%

-0.5%

-1.5%

1990

198.0

5.0%

130.7

5.4%

-0.4%

-1.9%

1991

205.1

3.6%

136.2

4.2%

-0.6%

-2.5%

1992

210.3

2.5%

140.3

3.0%

-0.5%

-3.0%

1993

215.5

2.5%

144.5

3.0%

-0.5%

-3.5%

1994

220.1

2.1%

148.2

2.6%

-0.4%

-4.0%

1995

225.4

2.4%

152.4

2.8%

-0.4%

-4.4%

1996

231.4

2.7%

156.9

3.0%

-0.3%

-4.7%

1997

236.4

2.2%

160.5

2.3%

-0.1%

-4.8%

1998

239.7

1.4%

163.0

1.6%

-0.2%

-5.0%

1999

244.7

2.1%

166.6

2.2%

-0.1%

-5.1%

2000

252.9

3.4%

172.2

3.4%

0.0%

-5.1%

2001

260.0

2.8%

177.1

2.8%

0.0%

-5.2%

2002

264.2

1.6%

179.9

1.6%

0.0%

-5.1%

2003

270.1

2.2%

184.0

2.3%

0.0%

-5.2%

2004

277.4

2.7%

188.9

2.7%

0.0%

-5.1%

2005

286.7

3.4%

195.3

3.4%

0.0%

-5.2%

2006

296.1

3.3%

201.6

3.2%

0.1%

-5.1%

2007

304.5

2.8%

207.3

2.8%

0.0%

-5.1%

2008

316.2

3.8%

215.3

3.8%

0.0%

-5.1%

2009

315.0

-0.4%

214.5

-0.4%

0.0%

-5.1%

2010

320.2

1.7%

218.1

1.6%

0.0%

-5.1%

             
 

Aggregate Methodological CPI-U Reduction

-5.1%

 

 

What The Changes Did to Inflation

The substitution-related alterations to inflation methodologies were made beginning in the mid-1990s.  The introduction of major hedonic concepts began in the 1980s.  The aggregate impact of the reporting changes since 1980 has been to reduce the reported level of annual CPI inflation by roughly seven percentage points, where 5.1 percentage points come from the BLS’s published estimates of the effects of the individual methodological changes on inflation, shown in the preceding table and as discussed later.  The balance comes from my estimates of the changes not formally estimated by the BLS.  The effects are cumulative going forward in time.

With the support of academic expertise affirming the correctness of the new methodologies, the effects of the reduction in the pace of reported inflation and in the related spiking of reported inflation-adjusted economic growth, have been discussed openly at different times.  Consider examples from the 1999 Economic Report of the President Report (Report). [ix]

“A final reason for the slowing of reported price indexes has been methodological changes to both the CPI and the indexes used in the national income accounts.  In general, these changes have reduced the measured rate of inflation.  For the CPI, methodological changes made from 1995 through 1998 reduced the rate of inflation by about 0.44 percentage point.  Changes to be introduced in 1999 and 2000 will reduce it by an additional 0.24 percentage point.”  Again, these are cumulative changes going forward.

The Report continued, describing the benefits of reduced inflation rate reporting in adding to reported GDP growth, “The BEA [Bureau of Economic Analysis] has also recently switched [1997] from using the CPI to using the producer price index (PPI) to deflate physicians’ services and the services of government and for-profit hospitals. … Because the PPI measures of these prices have been increasing less than the comparable CPIs, the changes reduce the rate of increase of the chain-weighted price index for GDP and raise real [inflation-adjusted] GDP growth.  These changes, in addition to those passed through from the CPI, will have cumulated to raise the annual growth rate of real GDP by 0.29 percentage point by 2000.”

That cumulated GDP growth rate boost for those several years really should have been 0.54 percentage point, accounting for new hedonic adjustments.[x]

Keep in mind that the CPI changes of 0.68% were an aggregate for those years and need to be carried forward—added back in—on a cumulative basis if one wanted to remove the effects of the methodological from future data.  Against the aggregated 0.68% reduction in the reported inflation, the BLS’s related CPI-U-RS series shows an aggregated reduction in the reported inflation of 0.7%, as discussed in the next two sections.

 

Measuring the Methodological Impacts Going Back and Forward in Time

The BLS has created a CPI-U-RS (RS stands for research series) that is designed to restate inflation history as if all the current substitution and hedonic adjustment methodologies always have been in place.  Limited effects of the artificially lowered historical inflation can be seen with the following graph.

The narrow red line shows median household income, deflated by the CPI-U-RS, as having been much stronger than the series shown by the thicker blue line, which was deflated by the higher inflation in the traditional CPI-U.  The CPI-U versus the CPI-U-RS is detailed in the table.

 

 

While the difference between current methodologies, going in back in time, may appear small, that is because the recent years of the CPI-U since 2000 already include the bulk of the changes, so largely they are identical in terms of year-to-year change between the CPI-U and CPI-U-RS.  In the earlier years, the changes average less than half of a percent, but those changes reflect the incremental decline in annual inflation triggered by the various methodological changes.

Reverse engineering the CPI-U-RS to as to reconstruct the CPI-U, as if the various changes had not been made, requires carrying forward the effects of the changes on a cumulative basis.  The cumulative effect is seen in the last column of the table.

 

SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures

What we have done in creating the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures is to reverse engineer the CPI-U-RS series, adding in estimates of the inflation effects of factors not otherwise estimated by the BLS, such as more-frequent (two-years versus ten-years) reweighting of the CPI series.

The two SGS series are based on the methodologies in place as of 1980 and separately as of 1990.  The estimated lost inflation is added back in, over time, as described in the methodology (1980-based) published each month in the Commentary that covers the CPI reporting:

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that neither reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept nor measures adequately most of what consumers view as out-of-pocket expenditures.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

 

Artificially-Low Inflation Estimates Have Created the Illusion of Recovery

Separately, to varying degrees, artificially depressed inflation rates have created misleading indications of economic growth in various economic series, including the GDP, industrial production and real retail sales as otherwise deflated by the CPI-U.  This is discussed in some detail in Hyperinflation 2012, with assumptions discussed in Chapter 5, beginning on page 38.

 

 




[i] Fixler, Dennis, Bureau of Labor Statistics, “The Consumer Price Index: underlying concepts and caveats,” Monthly Labor Review, December 1993.

[ii] Schmidt, Mary Lynn, Bureau of Labor Statistics, “Comparing market basket changes and the CPI,” 1995.

[iii] Ulmer, Melville T., “On the Theory of Cost of Living Index Numbers,” Journal of the American Statistical Association, Vol. 41, No. 236 (December 1946), pp. 530-542.

[iv] National Research Council, At What Price? Conceptualizing and Measuring Cost-of-Living and Price Indexes, (2002).

[v] Zuckerman, Sam, “Government’s economic data misleading, he says,” San Francisco Chronicle, May 25, 2008.

[vi] Hershey, Robert D., Jr., “Panel Sees a Corrected Price Index as Deficit-Cutter,” New York Times, September 15, 1995.

[vii] Ibid.

[viii] Ibid.

[ix] “Inflation: Flat or Falling,” Economic Report of the President 1999, pp. 87-95.

[x] “Comparing growth in GDP and labour productivity: measurement issues,” OECD, December 2007.

No. 437: April CPI, Real Earnings, Retail Sales, Euro

Tuesday, May 15th, 2012


• “Core” CPI-U Inflation Hits Cycle High
• April Year-to-Year Inflation Softens: 2.3% (CPI-U), 2.4% (CPI-W), 9.9% (SGS)
• Real Average Weekly Earnings in Ongoing Year-to-Year Decline
• Retail Sales Were Stagnant, Statistically Insignificant
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 436: March Trade Balance, Consumer Credit, April PPI

Friday, May 11th, 2012


• Trade Deficit Deterioration Suggests Downside Pressure on GDP Revision
• PPI Contraction Due to Seasonal-Factor Suppression of Higher Energy Prices
• Net of Federal Student Loans, Consumer Credit Is Near Cycle Low
• Gold Remains Key Hedge Against Oncoming Troubles
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 435: April Employment/Unemployment, Money Supply and Velocity, Systemic Stress,

Friday, May 4th, 2012
• For Second Month, Household-Survey Employment Fell as Payroll Growth Faltered
• April Unemployment: 8.1% (U.3), 14.5% (U.6), 22.3% (SGS)
• Annual M3 Growth Weakened in April as Velocity Rose
• New Indicator Shows Intensifying Systemic Stress
• Impaired Construction Spending Continued
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 434: Unpublished Payroll Data, Household Income

Wednesday, May 2nd, 2012
• Unpublished Payroll Employment Numbers
• March Household Income Sputters
• Clarifying Some Misperceptions
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 433: Retail Sales Benchmark, March PCE Deflator, Systemic Stress

Monday, April 30th, 2012
• Retail Sales Benchmark Revision Showed Weaker Historical Growth
• March PCE Deflator Closer to Fed’s Target
• Indications of Intensifying Systemic Stress
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 432: First-Quarter 2012 GDP

Friday, April 27th, 2012
• First-Quarter GDP Growth Not Statistically Significant
• Recovery Is an Illusion Created by Use of Artificially-Low Inflation
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 431: March Durable Goods Orders and Home Sales

Wednesday, April 25th, 2012
• Drop in March Durable Goods Orders Reflected Normal Volatility, But Inflation-Adjusted Level Was 23.4% Below Pre-2007 Recession High
• Protracted Low-Level Stagnation Continued for March Home Sales
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 430: March Industrial Production and Housing Starts

Tuesday, April 17th, 2012


• Industrial Production Unchanged for Second Month
• Housing Starts in 40th Month of Historically-Low-Level Stagnation,
Following 2006-to-2008 Collapse in Activity
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

SPECIAL COMMENTARY. No. 429: Consumer Liquidity Update, March Retail Sales

Monday, April 16th, 2012
• Gain in Inflation-Adjusted March Retail Sales Was Not Statistically Significant
• First-Quarter 2012 Consumer Income Increasingly Constrained
• Sustainable Economic Growth Is Not Possible Without Underlying Growth in Income and Credit
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 428: March CPI and PPI, February Trade Balance

Friday, April 13th, 2012


• CPI Headline Inflation of 0.3% Was 0.8% Not Seasonally Adjusted
• March Year-to-Year Inflation: 2.7% (CPI-U), 2.9% (CPI-W), 10.3% (SGS)
• Broad-Based Inflation Reflected in Stronger “Core” Inflation
• February Trade Improvement Should Boost GDP Expectations
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 427: March Labor Data, M3 and February Construction Spending

Friday, April 6th, 2012
• Headline Jobs Gain and Unemployment Rate Decline Were Statistically Insignificant
• March Unemployment: 8.2% (U.3), 14.5% (U.6), 22.2% (SGS)
• Construction Spending Stuck in Bottom-Bouncing Stagnation
• QE3 Always Has Been Dependent on Systemic Crises, Not the Economy or Inflation (Economy Has Provided Fed Cover)
• M3 Money Supply Growth Slipped in March, Signaling Potential Systemic Liquidity Crisis Intensification
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

SPECIAL COMMENTARY No. 426: Economic Update: Mired in A Protracted Downturn

Friday, March 30th, 2012
• GNP Growth at 1.8% versus 3.0% GDP
• Real Durable Goods Orders 10% Below Levels Seen in 2000
• Shenanigans in Industrial Production Benchmark Masked Small Downside Revisions to Recent Activity
• Recession Deeper than Previously Estimated
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 425: February Housing Starts, New and Existing Home Sales

Friday, March 23rd, 2012
• Activity in Housing and Construction Remains Stagnant Near Historic Lows
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 424: February CPI, PPI, Real Retail Sales, Industrial Production

Friday, March 16th, 2012
• February CPI Was Shy of Reflecting Full Impact of Gasoline Prices
• February’s Consumer Inflation: 2.9% (CPI-U), 3.1% (CPI-W), 10.5% (SGS)
• Real Retail Sales Monthly Gain Was Not Statistically Meaningful
• Volatile Monthly Production Numbers Sputtered And Stalled Once Again
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 423: February Retail Sales

Tuesday, March 13th, 2012
• Rising Prices Largely Accounted for February Retail Sales Gain
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 422: February Employment, Unemployment and M3, January Trade Balance

Friday, March 9th, 2012
• Payrolls Regain Pre-2001 (Not Pre-2007) Recession Levels
• February Unemployment: 8.3% (U.3), 14.9% (U.6), 22.4% (SGS)
• Trade Deficit Deteriorates in January Reporting and Prior-Period Revisions
• Money Supply M3 Growth Stalls Anew
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 421: GDP Revision, January PCE Deflator and Durable Goods Orders

Thursday, March 1st, 2012
• GDP Revision Was Little More than Statistical Noise, Yet 4th-Quarter No Longer Is Comparable with Prior Periods
• Income Revised to Show Ongoing Surging Salaries and Wages of “Unknown” Nature
• Fed’s Inflation Target (PCE Deflator) Is A Poorly Regurgitated CPI Measure
• Durable Goods Orders Fell Net of Plunging Aircraft Orders
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 420: Monetary Base, January Home Sales

Friday, February 24th, 2012
• Monetary Base Surge to Record High Suggests Intensifying Systemic-Solvency Crisis
• January Home Sales Numbers Continued Bottom-Bouncing
• Unstable Seasonal Adjustments in Existing Home Sales?
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 419: January CPI, PPI, Real Retail Sales and Housing Starts

Friday, February 17th, 2012
• Annual “Core” Inflation Rose for 15th Straight Month
• Year-to-Year January Consumer Inflation: 2.9% (CPI-U), 3.1% (CPI-W), 10.5% (SGS)
• Headline CPI and PPI Inflation Rates Understated Due to Unstable Seasonal Factors
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

Withheld Income and Payroll Taxes - Update

Friday, February 17th, 2012

Please see our introductory pages on payroll tax receipts for some background information on this data series.

 

Analyzing the Potential for Tax Receipts Growth in 2012

Note: In all that follows, "Tax Receipts" and "Tax Deposits" refer to payments deposited by employers on the basis of payroll activity, and received by the US Treasury . The deposits consist of income tax withheld from employees, plus payroll taxes (i.e. Social Security and Medicare contributions made by both the employer and employees.) We analyze the Daily Treasury Statements and, despite any appearance to the contrary in the Treasury’s Monthly Statements, these two taxes cannot be separately identified at the time deposits are received.

Overview

The year-to-year change in tax receipts - as is to be expected -  jumped up as we moved into 2012. (See charts below.)

Using the 2011 and 2012 tax-rate structures together with broad assumptions about the working population, we have modeled expected tax growth rates for different scenarios of earnings and jobs growth.   In one scenario, based on the average earnings and jobs growth estimated by the Bureau of Labor Statistics for the twelve months to January 2012, our  model predicts a corresponding year-over-year tax receipt growth rate of between 4% and 5%.

For the four weeks to February 9th, 2012, however, we see an actual year-over-year growth in tax receipts of 3.0%.  Since we are in the midst of bonus season, which our model does not cover, we cannot yet draw a clear comparison between what would be expected from BLS reported employment growth and what currently is observed.  Clarification must wait until April, and the end of bonus season.

As pointed out in the last review in December, the annual bonus season masks the impact of regular payroll earnings on tax receipts. To make this clearer, the charts have been modified so as to highlight in different colors the periods when bonus effects are present.

 

 

 

 

Another Note on Calendar Effects

Due to the pattern of December and January national holidays this year, our proprietary series of "standardized" four-week periods has more gaps than usual.   We again urge readers to pay no attention to simple calendar-month year-to-year comparisons of the raw Treasury data.  See the introductory pages on payroll tax receipts and the last review of December, 22nd for an explanation of this.

 

Tax Growth Scenarios

If we look at the chart of year-over-year growth in tax deposits, we can see step jumps at the beginning of each calendar year.  Although bonuses vary from year to year and have some transient effect on these charts, the more important issue is the change to the IRS income tax bands, allowances and credits, and how they interact with wage rises. Also, in 2011 the introduction of FICA payroll tax "holiday" was a large factor.

For individual employees, given wage growth, tax filing status, deductions and allowances, the percentage change in the tax deposits associated with their employment can be calculated.  With no typical or average employee, however, the tax change over the whole working population cannot be calculated similarly.

Nonetheless, because of a convexity in the income tax curves, we have found that the percentage change in tax for certain percentage changes in income is remarkably similar across a wide range of taxable incomes. In addition, although the ratio of withheld income tax to payroll taxes (Social Security and Medicare) varies hugely with income, we an use the fact that for the total population, both sets of taxes (which are added together in the deposits we are analyzing) are roughly equal in size.

The table below shows the simple estimates for what year-over-year tax growth could be for various combinations of across-the-board growth in wages and job numbers.   These numbers have been calculated with the 2% payroll tax still in place.  If this tax "holiday" had not continued past February (Congress this week agreed on such a continuation) we would have added roughly another 6.7% to all of these estimates.

The ± ranges are our estimate of uncertainties about how different workers’ income tax would change, depending on their circumstances. 

 

Estimates of 2012 Year-over-Year Tax Deposit (%) Growth
(Not applicable to years other than 2012)
Wage Growth*
(Yr/Yr %)
Growth in Number
of Jobs (Yr/Yr %)
Growth in 4-Week
Tax Deposits (Yr/Yr %)
2.0 1.0 3.0 ± 0.2
2.0 1.5 3.5 ± 0.2
2.0 2.0 4.0 ± 0.2
2.5 1.0 4.0 ± 0.4
2.5 1.5 4.5 ± 0.4
2.5 2.0 5.0 ± 0.4
3.0 1.0 4.8 ± 0.5
3.0 1.5 5.3 ± 0.5
3.0 2.0 5.8 ± 0.5
(*) This is actual, not inflation-adjusted wage growth. The IRS raised all tax bands in 2012 by 2.46%,  the average CPI inflation in the twelve months to August 2011. The official CPI-U measure in December 2011 showed a 3.0% year-over-year increase.
 

Note that for the twelve months to mid-January, the Bureau of Labor Statistics reported total job growth of 1.5% and that average weekly earnings grew by 2.5% (in the private sector).  This would put us in the 4.5% ± 0.4% range of tax growth (if applied uniformly as per the model, and extended to government and farm workers).

In the four weeks to February 9th, however, the observed year-over-year growth in tax deposits was 3.0%.  This period will include some bonuses which are not accounted for in the model.  So, we must really wait until their effect is over, in April, for a complete assessment.  At this same date last year, though, tax growth was close to the level (about 1.5%) that appeared after the bonus season of 2011. This has occurred in other years past, when large swings in employment have not clouded the picture. This may be because early-February represents a pause between the two bonus "peaks" of December and March.

CAVEAT:  This analysis makes a number of assumptions about averages of distributions which may not be justified.  For example, although we may have an average earnings growth, it is may not be a good approximation to apportion this, as we have done here, across all employees.  Thus, these numbers should really be placed in the context of trying to explain the kind of large jump in tax receipts we are seeing, and which we may see more of, rather than as an accurate tool for deducing underlying payroll growth.

(Note:  We could not do a similar analysis In 2011 because the dropping of the Making Work Pay credit made the ranges on the tax growth estimates too wide, as tax-payers differed widely in how this change affected their overall tax as a percentage.)

 

No. 418: January Retail Sales and Industrial Production

Wednesday, February 15th, 2012
• Retail Sales “Growth” Remains Statistically Insignificant and Reliant on Price Increases
• Slowing Annual Growth Evident in Both Sales and Production
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 417: December 2011 and Annual Trade Deficit

Friday, February 10th, 2012
• Annual Trade Deficit Widened to $558 Billion in 2011, from $500 Billion in 2010, A Negative for Both the U.S. Dollar and the U.S. Economy
• Trade Could Pressure GDP Revision to Downside
• More Jobs Lost to NAFTA
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 416: Payrolls, Unemployment and Revisions, M3, PCE Deflator

Friday, February 3rd, 2012
• Basic Economic Outlook Unaltered by Stronger Labor Data
•  January Jobs Reading Still at Levels of 11 Years Ago
• January Unemployment: 8.3% (U.3), 15.1% (U.6), 22.5% (SGS)
• Money Supply M3 Growth Is Picking Up
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 415: Fourth-Quarter GDP, December Durable Goods and Home Sales

Friday, January 27th, 2012
• Net of Involuntary Inventory Build-Up, GDP Growth Was 0.8% Instead of 2.8%
• Durable Goods Orders and New Home Sales Still Show Stagnation
• Fed’s New PCE Inflation Target Is Inconsistent with Plans for Ongoing Easing
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 414: Hyperinflation Special Report 2012

Wednesday, January 25th, 2012

 

HYPERINFLATION 2012

SPECIAL COMMENTARY NUMBER 414

January 25, 2012

__________

 

U.S. Hyperinflationary Great Depression Moves Ever Closer

U.S. Government and the Federal Reserve Effectively Have Destroyed
Global Confidence in the U.S. Dollar

Systemic-Solvency and Economic Crises Have Not Abated

Precursors to Ultimate Dollar Disaster Are in Place;
2014 Remains the Outside Timing for Same

 

__________


Hyperinflation 2012 is the fifth in a series of related writings going back to 2006.  It updates and replaces the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) of March 15, 2011, which preceded: the U.S. government’s demonstration of a lack of political will to address the country’s long-range insolvency; the downgrade of the “AAA” rating of U.S. Treasury securities; an ensuing U.S. dollar panic, dollar support operations and extremely unstable U.S. and global financial markets; a temporary shift in market focus to Euro-era issues; and growing recognition of the ongoing and deepening economic and systemic-solvency crises.  Nonetheless, the outlook has changed little.  With the passage of 10 months since the last report (updated circumstances have been covered regularly in weekly Commentaries), events just have continued to move this pending ultimate financial crisis into much closer time proximity.    

In turn, the 2011 report updated and replaced the Hyperinflation Special Report (2010 Update) of December 2, 2009, which preceded: the Fed’s formal monetization of U.S. Treasury debt aimed at debasing the U.S. dollar; the sharpest post-World War II annual decline in broad money growth; the pronouncement of an official end to the 2007 recession despite no meaningful recovery; passage of the Administration’s health insurance legislation; and the mid-term election.  Yet, the outlook had changed little.  With the passage of 15 months since the prior report (updated circumstances were covered regularly in weekly Commentaries), again, events just had moved the hyperinflation crisis into closer time proximity.    

In turn, the 2010 report updated and replaced the Hyperinflation Special Report version of April 8, 2008, which was published post-Bear Stearns, but pre-Lehman, pre-TARP, pre-recession recognition and pre-2008 presidential election.  The April 2008 report updated and expanded upon the three-part Hyperinflation Series that began with the December 2006 SGS Newsletter, which predated public recognition of the 2007 economic and systemic-solvency crises.

This missive includes significant new material in addition to much of the same basic text that was in the 2011 edition, along with revisions and updates reflecting the still-unfolding economic and systemic-solvency crises.

__________

Contents

 

Chapter 1—Overview and Executive Summary

Events Moving at an Accelerating Pace Towards the Great Collapse

Graph 1: Federal Reserve Notes per Ounce of Gold

Background

Has the Euro Been Used as a Foil Against the Dollar?

Impact of Fed Monetization of U.S. Treasuries in QE2

Graph 2: Fed Monetization of Treasury Debt

Graph 3: Core Inflation from QE2

Crises Brewed by Federal Government and Federal Reserve Malfeasance

Saving the System at Any Cost

U.S. Economy Is Not Recovering

Hyperinflation Nears

Chapter 2—Defining the Components of a Hyperinflationary Great Depression

Deflation, Inflation and Hyperinflation

Recession, Depression and Great Depression

Chapter 3—Two Examples of Hyperinflation

Some Lessons from History

Weimar Republic

Graph 4: German Paper Marks per U.S. Dollar 1922 to 1923

Graph 5: Log Scale, German Paper Marks per U.S. Dollar 1922 to 1923

Zimbabwe

Chapter 4—Current Economic and Inflation Conditions in the United States

Economic Reality

Structural Consumer Liquidity Problems

Graph 6: Merchandise Trade Balance

Graph 7: Household Income Dispersion

Graph 8: Average Weekly Earnings (1967 CPI-W Dollars)

Graph 9: Annual Median Household Income (1967 Dollars)

Graph 10: Median Household Income Index (Monthly)

CPI No Longer Reflects Costs of Maintaining Constant Standard of Living.

Graph 11: Annual Consumer Inflation, CPI versus SGS Alternate.

Early Impact of Dollar Debasement

Graph 12: Gold versus Swiss Franc

Graph 13: Gold versus Oil

Graph 14: Gold versus Silver

Income, Credit and Willingness to Spend

Consumer Credit Still Shrinking Net of Student Loan Surge

Graph 15:  Consumer Credit Outstanding

Markets Are Flying Blind with Distorted Economic Reporting

Already in Depression, Economy Continues to Bottom Bounce

Graph 16: Real M3 versus Formal Recessions

Historical Perspective on the Economic Data

Graph 17: Year-to-Year Change Monthly Payroll Employment

Graph 18: Year-to-Year Change Quarterly Real GDP

Graph 19: Year-to-Year Change Annual Real GDP

Chapter 5—Key Economic Reporting Varies by Inflation Assumptions

Economic Reporting Free of Inflation And Inflation Corrected

Graph 20: Payroll Employment Level

Graph 21: Consumer Confidence

Graph 22: Housing Starts Beginning 2000

Graph 23: Housing Starts Post-World War II

Graph 24: Real GDP Level, Official Version

Graph 25: Inflation-Corrected Real GDP Level

Graph 26: Headline Real Retail Sales

Graph 27: Inflation Corrected Headline Real Retail Sales

Graph 28: Headline Industrial Production Level

Graph 29: Inflation-Corrected Industrial Production

Chapter 6—Historical U.S. Inflation and U.S. Dollar Debasement

Graph 30: Consumer Inflation 1665 to 2011

Graph 31: Log-Scale Consumer Inflation 1665 to 2011

Table I: Loss of U.S. Dollar Purchasing Power

Chapter 7—Federal Reserve, Systemic Solvency and Inflation versus Deflation

Preventing Systemic Collapse at All Costs

“Helicopter Ben” on Preventing Deflation

Monetary Base and Money Supply Growth

Graph 32: Monetary Base, Leve

Graph 33: Monetary Base, Year-to-Year Change

Graph 34: M3, Monthly Year-to-Year Change

Graph 35: Year-to-Year U.S. Money Supply Growth with SGS M3 Continuation

Banks Not Increasing Lending into the Regular Flow of Commerce

Graph 36: Commercial and Industrial Loans

Graph 37: Commercial Paper Outstanding

Inflation and Money Growth

Chapter 8—U.S. Government Cannot Cover Existing Obligations

Annual GAAP-Based Federal Deficits at $5 Trillion

Federal Debt and Net Present Value of Unfunded Liabilities Exceed $80 Trillion

Graph 38: Total Federal Obligations as Percent of GDP

Annual Deficits of $5 Trillion Are Not Sustainable

Table II: U.S. Government GAAP Accounting, Deficits and Obligations

Chapter 9—Hyperinflationary Great Depression

Move Towards Hyperinflation Accelerated by Current Fed and Government Actions

Lack of Physical Cash

Possible Short-Term Electronic Relief for Individuals

Barter System

Financial Hedges and Investments

Graph 39: Year-End DJIA, Current versus Constant Dollar

Graph 40: Log-Based, Year-End DJIA, Current versus Constant Dollar

Possible Official Actions and Responses/External Risks

Closing Comments—Other Issues

Political Considerations

Common Sense

Recommended Further Reading

 

 

_________

 

Chapter 1—Overview and Executive Summary

A fair amount of the text in this chapter is repetitive from the prior hyperinflation report, but conditions have not changed much.  The text reflects new developments and updated data where appropriate.

Events Moving at an Accelerating Pace Towards the Great Collapse

Little has changed in the basic outlook.  The U.S. economic and systemic-solvency crises of the last five years continue to deteriorate.  Yet they remain just the precursors to the coming Great Collapse: a hyperinflationary great depression.  The unfolding circumstance will encompass a complete loss in the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar; a collapse in the normal stream of U.S. commercial and economic activity; a collapse in the U.S. financial system, as we know it; and a likely realignment of the U.S. political environment.  Outside timing on the hyperinflation remains 2014, but events of the last year have accelerated the movement towards this ultimate dollar catastrophe.  Following Mr. Bernanke’s extraordinary efforts to debase the U.S. currency in late-2010, the dollar had lost its traditional safe-haven status by early-2011.  Whatever global confidence had remained behind the U.S dollar was lost in July and August.  That was in response to the lack of political will—shown by those who control the White House and Congress—to address the long-range insolvency of the U.S. government, and as a result of the later credit-rating downgrade to U.S. Treasury debt.

Those latter circumstances triggered something of dollar selling panic, particularly as reflected in the corresponding buying of gold and Swiss francs, but various interventions, misdirection and manipulations helped to quell the currency disorders.  Still, many financial markets were left rocking with the aftershocks of a major shift in the global view of the U.S. dollar. 

The economy has underperformed and likely will continue to underperform consensus forecasts by a significant margin.  In turn, weaker-than-expected economic growth will mean significantly worse-than-expected federal budget deficits, Treasury funding needs and banking-system solvency conditions. 

With the U.S. election just nine months off, political pressures will mount to favor fiscal stimulus measures instead of restraint.  The Fed should be forced to provide new “easing” in an effort to continue propping the banking system (the explanation will be an effort to boost the economy).  Given the Treasury’s funding needs, the easing likely will in the form of renewed buying of U.S. Treasuries, with the Fed remaining lender of last resort there.  Consistent with the precedent set in 2008, the Fed, and likely the Treasury, also will remain in place to do whatever is needed, at whatever cost, to prevent systemic collapse in the United States.  All of these actions, though, have costs in terms of higher domestic inflation and intensified dollar debasement

The U.S. dollar remains highly vulnerable to massive, panicked selling, at any time, with little or no warning.  The next round of Federal Reserve or U.S. government easing or stimulus could be the proximal trigger for such a currency panic and/or for strong efforts to strip the U.S. currency of its global reserve currency status.

As the advance squalls from this great financial tempest come ashore, the government could be expected to launch a variety of efforts at forestalling the hyperinflation’s landfall, but such efforts will buy little time and ultimately will fail in preventing the dollar’s collapse.  The timing of the early days—the onset—of full-blown hyperinflation likely will be coincident with a broad global rejection of the U.S. dollar, which, again, could happen at any time.

With no viable or politically-practical way of balancing U.S. fiscal conditions and avoiding this financial economic Armageddon, the best action that individuals can take at this point remains to protect themselves, both as to meeting short-range survival needs as well as to preserving current wealth and assets over the longer term.  Efforts there, respectively, would encompass building a store of key consumables, such as food and water, and moving assets into physical precious metals and outside of the U.S. dollar.

The following graph of Federal Reserve notes versus gold gives a suggestion of how the markets have been discounting the mounting U.S. fiscal and dollar problems since at least 2000.

 

Graph 1: Federal Reserve Notes per Ounce of Gold

Background

By 2004, fiscal malfeasance of successive U.S. Administrations and Congresses had pushed the federal government into effective long-term insolvency (likely to have triggered hyperinflation by 2018).  GAAP-based (generally accepted accounting principles) accounting then showed total federal obligations at $50 trillion—more than four-times the level of U.S. GDP—that were increasing each year by GAAP-based annual deficits in the uncontainable four- to five-trillion dollar range.  Those extreme operating shortfalls continue unabated, with total federal obligations at $81 trillion—more than five-times U.S. GDP—at the end of the 2011 fiscal year.  Taxes cannot be raised enough to bring the GAAP-based deficit into balance, and the political will in Washington is lacking to cut government spending severely, particularly in terms of the necessary slashing of unfunded liabilities in government social programs such as Social Security and Medicare.

Bankrupt governments—unable to raise adequate cash to cover obligations—invariably crank up the currency printing presses to do so, creating a hyperinflation.  The federal government and Federal Reserve’s actions in response to, and in conjunction with, the economic and financial crises of 2007, however, accelerated the ultimate process—both in terms of fiscal deterioration and global perception of the issues—moving the outside horizon for hyperinflation from 2018 to 2014.  Even so, over the last several years, the government and Fed’s actions and policies, and economic and financial-market developments have continued to exacerbate the circumstance, such that there is significant chance of the early stages of the hyperinflation breaking at any time.  Key to the near-term timing remains a sharp decline in the exchange rate value of the U.S. dollar, with the rest of the world effectively moving to dump the U.S. currency and dollar-denominated paper assets.

Has the Euro Been Used as a Foil Against the Dollar?

As the U.S. dollar came under heavy selling pressure in September 2011, the global markets suddenly shifted their focus to the euro-area solvency crises, selling euros against dollars.  That event has happened so frequently in recent years, and it appears so counterintuitive, that I suspect the euro has been used on more than occasion as a foil, distracting global currency trading from the perils of the U.S. dollar, since the United States remains the elephant in the bathtub of sovereign solvency problems.

Nonetheless, the euro area has significant sovereign-solvency concerns.  To the extent those issues could threaten the U.S. banking system, presumably the Fed has taken actions or has a plan in place to prevent a U.S. systemic collapse that could be triggered by a euro-related problem.  I do not know what will happen within the euro area, but its solvency issues likely will be worked through.  The circumstance for the more-serious U.S. solvency and the U.S. dollar issues likely will not have as happy a resolution.

Impact of Fed Monetization of U.S. Treasuries in QE2

The current U.S. financial markets, financial system and economy remain highly unstable and increasingly vulnerable to unexpected shocks.  At the same time, the Federal Reserve and the federal government are dedicated to preventing systemic collapse and broad price deflation.  To prevent any imminent collapse—as has been seen in official activities of the last several years—they will create and spend whatever money is needed, including the deliberate debasement of the U.S. dollar with the intent of increasing domestic inflation.  As shown in Graph 2, those efforts included effective full monetization of recent net Treasury debt issuance.  During the period of QE2, and prior to the debt ceiling being hit, the Federal Reserve more than fully monetized net Treasury issuance in the same period.

The effects of QE2 included debasing the U.S. dollar.  As the dollar weakened against other currencies, oil prices soared, and that spiked U.S. consumer inflation.  Although the Fed likes to tout “core” inflation, net of food and energy costs, the oil inflation also has begun to spread into the broader economy.

Graph 2: Fed Monetization of Treasury Debt

Graph 3: Core Inflation from QE2

 

 

As shown in Graph 3, annual “core” CPI-U inflation has risen for fourteen straight months, through December 2011, as a result of the Fed’s actions and remains an indication of a nascent, building inflation cycle.  The resulting inflation here is just a foretaste of consumer inflation that likely would result from ongoing Fed “easing” actions.

The efforts to stave off systemic collapse also have resulted in uncontrolled fiscal excesses by the federal government.  The deliberate monetary and fiscal abuses have resulted in de-stabilizing pressures against the U.S. currency, in generally rising gold and silver prices, and in the nascent pickup in reported U.S. consumer inflation.  That inflation has been driven by unhealthy monetary policy, instead of by healthy economic demand. 

Crises Brewed by Federal Government and Federal Reserve Malfeasance

The economic and systemic crises, triggered by the collapse of debt excesses that had been encouraged actively by the Greenspan Federal Reserve, have been centered on the U.S. financial system.  Recognizing that the U.S. economy was sagging under the weight of structural income impairment created by government trade, regulatory and social policies—policies that limited real (inflation-adjusted) consumer income growth, where the average U.S. household could not stay ahead of inflation or make ends meet—then-Federal Reserve Chairman Alan Greenspan played along with the political and banking systems.  He made policy decisions to steal economic activity from the future, fueling economic growth of the last decade largely through debt expansion (see Structural Consumer Liquidity Problems). 

The Greenspan Fed pushed for ever-greater systemic leverage, including the happy acceptance of new financial products—instruments of mispackaged lending risks—designed for consumption by global entities that openly did not understand the nature of the risks being taken.  Spreading the credit risks of banks among other industries, for example, was encouraged actively by the Fed as healthy and stabilizing for both the domestic and global financial systems.  Also complicit in this broad malfeasance was the U.S. government, including both major political parties in successive Administrations and Congresses.

As with consumers, though, the federal government could not make ends meet.  Driven by self-serving politics aimed at appeasing that portion of the electorate that could be kept docile through ever-expanding government programs and spending, political Washington became dependent on ever-expanding federal deficit spending, unfunded obligations and debt. 

Purportedly, it was Arthur Burns, Fed Chairman under Richard Nixon, who first offered the advice that helped to guide Alan Greenspan and a number of Administrations.  The gist of the imparted wisdom was that if the Fed or federal government ran into economic or financial-system difficulties, the federal budget deficit and the U.S. dollar simply could be ignored—or sacrificed.  Ignoring them would not matter, it was argued, because doing so would not cost the incumbent powers any votes. 

Back in 2005, I raised the issue of an inevitable U.S. hyperinflation with an advisor to both the Bush Administration and Fed Chairman Greenspan.  I was told simply that “It’s too far into the future to worry about.”   

Indeed, attempting to push the big problems further into the future continues to be the working strategy for both the Fed, under Chairman Ben Bernanke, and the current Administration and Congress.  

In a February 25, 2011 speech, Federal Reserve Vice Chairman Janet Yellen examined the results of the recent use of “unconventional policy tools” by the Fed: “Each of these policy tools tends to generate spillovers to other financial markets, such as boosting stock prices and putting moderate downward pressure on the foreign exchange value of the dollar.” 

While Wall Street may hail any artificial propping it can get from the Fed’s efforts to support the markets, more than “moderate” related declines in the U.S. dollar’s exchange rate destroy any illusions of stock gains and savage the U.S. consumers’ dollar purchasing power.  A declining dollar can turn U.S. stock profits into losses for those living outside the dollar-denominated world, as funds are converted back to the strengthening currency domestic to the investor.  Inflation driven by dollar weakness will do the same for those in a U.S. dollar-denominated environment, where, eventually, inflation can turn U.S. stock profits into real (inflation-adjusted) losses (see Financial Hedges and Investments).

Indeed, the U.S. dollar and the budget deficit do matter, and the future is at hand.  As the federal budget deficit spirals well beyond sustainability and containment at an accelerating pace, and as the Fed moves with great deliberation to debase and to impair the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar, to generate rising consumer inflation, the day of ultimate financial reckoning appears to be breaking.

Saving the System at Any Cost

The Federal Reserve and the U.S. Treasury moved early in the current solvency crisis to prevent a collapse of the banking system, at any cost.  It was the collapse of the banking system and loss of depositor assets in the early-1930s that intensified the Great Depression and its attendant deflation.  A somewhat parallel risk was envisioned in 2008 as the system passed over the brink.  The decision was made to avoid a deflationary great depression.

Effective financial impairments and at least partial nationalizations or orchestrated bailouts/takeovers resulted for institutions such as Bear Stearns, Citigroup, Washington Mutual, AIG, General Motors, Chrysler, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, along with a number of further troubled financial institutions.  The Fed moved to provide whatever systemic liquidity would be needed, while the federal government moved to finance corporate bailouts, to guarantee any instruments or entities it had to, and to introduce large amounts of short-lived stimulus spending.

Curiously, though, the Fed and the Treasury let Lehman Brothers fail outright, which triggered a foreseeable run on the system and markedly intensified the systemic solvency crisis in September 2008.  Whether someone was trying to play naive political games, with the public and Congress increasingly raising questions of moral hazard issues, or whether the U.S. financial wizards missed what would happen or simply moved to bring the crisis to a head, still remains to be seen.

In the still-early days of the crises, the Obama Administration pushed ahead with its social agenda, introducing major new government programs such as federal government control of healthcare and health insurance.  Irrespective of stated goals of not increasing the federal deficit further, the resulting healthcare/insurance legislation will have a severely negative impact on the federal deficit—as will most other new legislation and “stimulus” efforts, either from massive net expenses, or from losses in tax revenues in an ever-weakening economy.

The U.S. Government’s 2011 GAAP-based financial statements (see Chapter 8—U.S. Government Cannot Cover Existing Obligations) showed an ongoing annual GAAP-based deficit of about $5 trillion, a circumstance that remains uncontrollable.

Efforts to save the system at any cost likely will continue as long as possible, with the government spending whatever money it and the Federal Reserve need to create, until such time as the global financial markets rebel.  The ultimate cost here, though, will be in inflation and the increasing debasement of the purchasing power of the U.S. Dollar, and an eventual dollar collapse beyond any government or Federal Reserve control.

U.S. Economy Is Not Recovering

New in Chapter 5—Key Economic Reporting Varies by Inflation Assumptions, the effects of inflation assumptions are explored in terms of key reporting series.  Corrected for understated inflation, the GDP, real retail sales and industrial production series show patterns similar to inflation-free measures, such as payroll employment, consumer confidence and housing starts.  The adjusted data tend indicate that the economy is not in recovery.

Economic activity in the United States began to decline in 2006 or early-2007, and it plunged from late-2007 into 2009 at a pace not seen since the Great Depression.  Subsequently, economic activity has been bottom-bouncing, with some boosts from short-lived stimulus effects.  Without any fundamental turnaround in structural consumer-income problems that have been driving the downturn, and with contracting, inflation-adjusted systemic liquidity, the economy has started to slow anew.

Despite pronouncements of an end to the 2007 recession and the onset of an economic recovery, the U.S. economy still is mired in a deepening structural contraction, which eventually will be recognized as a double- or multiple-dip recession.  Beyond the politically- and market-hyped GDP reporting, key underlying economic series show patterns of activity that are consistent with a peak-to-trough (so far) contraction in inflation-adjusted activity in excess of 10%, a formal depression (see Recession, Depression and Great Depression).

Existing formal projections for the federal budget deficit, banking system solvency, etc. all are based on assumptions of positive economic growth, going forward.  That growth will not happen, and continued economic contraction will exacerbate fiscal conditions and banking-system liquidity problems terribly.

Hyperinflation Nears

As previously noted, before the systemic-solvency crisis began to unfold in 2007, the U.S. government already had condemned the U.S. dollar to a hyperinflationary grave by taking on debt and obligations that never could be covered through raising taxes and/or by severely slashing government spending that had become politically untouchable.  Also, the U.S. economy already had entered a severe structural downturn, which helped to trigger the systemic-solvency crisis. 

Bankrupt sovereign states most commonly use the currency printing press as a solution to not having enough money to cover obligations.  The alternative here would be for the U.S. eventually to renege on its existing debt and obligations, a solution for modern sovereign states rarely seen outside of governments overthrown in revolution, and a solution with no happier ending than simply printing the needed money.  With the creation of massive amounts of new fiat dollars (not backed by gold or silver) comes the eventual full destruction of the value of the U.S. dollar and related dollar-denominated paper assets.

The U.S. government and the Federal Reserve have committed the system to its ultimate insolvency, through the easy politics of a bottomless pocketbook, the servicing of big-moneyed special interests, gross mismanagement, and a deliberate and ongoing effort to debase the U.S. currency.  Yet, the particularly egregious fiscal and monetary responses to economic and solvency crises of the last five years have exacerbated the government’s solvency issues, bringing the great financial tempest close enough to making landfall that the hairs on the backs of investors necks should be standing on end.

Numerous foreign governments/central banks have offered unusually blunt criticism of U.S. fiscal and Federal Reserve policies as the crisis has expanded, but the perceived self-interests of the U.S. government and Fed always will come first in setting domestic policy.  Where both private and official demand for U.S. Treasuries had been increasingly unenthusiastic, the Fed—the U.S. central bank—effectively has been fully funded Treasury needs for most of 2011, with its “quantitative easing,” becoming a euphemism for Fed monetization of U.S. Treasury debt.    

Further easing by the Fed is likely in the months ahead, as the ongoing economic turmoil triggers significant further fiscal deterioration.  Those actions should pummel heavily the U.S. dollar’s exchange rate against other major currencies.  Looming with uncertain timing is a panicked dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated paper assets, which remains the most likely event as proximal trigger for the onset of hyperinflation in the near-term. 

The early stages of the hyperinflation would be marked simply by an accelerating upturn in consumer prices, a pattern that already was initially in response to QE2.  Also, money supply velocity (see Inflation and Money Growth) will spike, as the U.S. dollar, again, comes under heavy and even disorderly selling pressure, with both domestic and foreign holders getting rid of their dollar holdings as quickly as possible.  One factor that can contribute to rising velocity is the current circumstance where U.S. investors cannot get a safe return that beats inflation, as reported by the government.  Investors can do better by buying a store of products that are rising price, rather than by holding cash or a Treasury bill.

Given the current lack of political will by those controlling the U.S. Government to address the fiscal solvency issues, the U.S. has no way of avoiding a financial Armageddon.  Various government intervention tactics might slow the process for brief periods, and the system always is vulnerable to external shocks, such as wars and natural disasters.  Government actions could include supportive dollar intervention, restrictions on international capital flows, wage and price controls, etc.  Effects of any such moves in delaying the onset of full hyperinflation, though, would be limited and short-lived.  There is no obvious course of action or external force at this point of the process that meaningfully would put off the nearing day of reckoning. 

What lies ahead will be extremely difficult, painful and unhappy times for many in the United States.  The functioning and adaptation of the U.S. economy and financial markets to a hyperinflation likely will be particularly disruptive.  Trouble could range from turmoil in the food distribution chain and electronic cash and credit systems unable to handle rapidly changing circumstances, to political instability.  The situation quickly would devolve from a deepening depression, to an intensifying hyperinflationary great depression.

While resulting U.S. economic difficulties would have broad global impact, the initial hyperinflation should be largely a U.S. problem, albeit with major implications for the global currency system. 

For those living in the United States, long-range strategies should look to assure safety and survival, which from a financial standpoint means preserving wealth and assets. Also directly impacted, of course, are those holding or dependent upon U.S. dollars or dollar-denominated assets, and those living in “dollarized” countries.

Physical gold (sovereign coins priced near bullion prices) remains the primary hedge in terms of preserving the purchasing power of current dollars.  In like manner, silver is in this category.  Also, holding stronger major currencies such as the Swiss franc, Canadian dollar and the Australian dollar, likely are good hedges (see Financial Hedges and Investments).

In terms of survival on a day-to-day basis, U.S.-based individuals should be building a store of goods in preparation for a manmade disaster, much as they would for a natural disaster such as an earthquake.  Economic activity probably would devolve to a barter system, but such could take months to become fully functional (see Barter System).  

  

  

Chapter 2—Defining the Components of a Hyperinflationary Great Depression

Other than for the expansion on the definition of the CPI-U-RS and additions of C-CPI-U and “core” inflation, and for revised contraction detail on the “Great Recession,” the text here is little changed from the prior hyperinflation report.

Deflation, Inflation and Hyperinflation

Inflation broadly is defined in terms of a rise in general prices usually due to an increase in the amount of money in circulation.  The inflation/deflation issues defined and discussed here are as applied to consumer goods and services, not to the pricing of financial assets, unless specified otherwise.

In terms of hyperinflation, there have been a variety of definitions used over time.  The circumstance envisioned ahead is not one of double- or triple- digit annual inflation, but more along the lines of seven- to ten-digit inflation seen in other circumstances during the last century.  Under such circumstances, the currency in question becomes worthless, as seen in Germany (Weimar Republic) in the early 1920s, in Hungary after World War II, in the dismembered Yugoslavia of the early 1990s and most recently in Zimbabwe, where the aggregate pace of hyperinflation likely was the most extreme ever seen.

The historical culprit generally has been the use of fiat currencies—currencies with no hard-asset backing such as gold—and the resulting massive printing of currency that the issuing authority needed to support its spending, when it did not have the ability, otherwise, to raise enough money for its perceived needs, through taxes or other means.

Ralph T. Foster (hereinafter generally cited as Foster) in Fiat Paper Money, The History and Evolution of Our Currency (see Recommended Further Reading) details the history of fiat paper currencies from 11th Century Szechwan, China, to date, and the consistent collapse of those currencies, time-after-time, due to what appears to be the inevitable, irresistible urge of issuing authorities to print too much of a good thing.

Here are the definitions:

Deflation: A decrease in the prices of consumer goods and services, usually tied to a contraction of money in circulation.  Formal deflation is measured in terms of year-to-year change.

Inflation: An increase in the prices of consumer goods and services, usually tied to an increase of money in circulation. 

Hyperinflation: Extreme inflation, minimally in excess of four-digit annual percent change, where the involved currency becomes worthless. A fairly crude definition of hyperinflation is a circumstance, where, due to extremely rapid price increases, the largest pre-hyperinflation bank note ($100 bill in the United States) becomes worth more as functional toilet paper/tissue or wallpaper than as currency.

As discussed in Chapter 6—Historical U.S. Inflation and U.S. Dollar Debasement, the domestic economy has been through periods of both major inflation and deflation, usually tied to wars and their aftermaths.  Such, however, preceded the U.S. going off the domestic gold standard in 1933 and abandoning international gold convertibility in 1971.  The era of the modern fiat dollar generally has been one of persistent and slowly debilitating inflation.

As to the reporting of inflation, the following notes detail the various measures of consumer systemic prices referenced in this report:

 

The Consumer Price Index (CPI): The CPI is the primary consumer inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers):  The CPI-U is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers.  Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors.

C-CPI-U (Chained CPI-U):  The C-CPI-U is a fully substitution-based (as opposed to the former fixed basket of goods) inflation measure, like the deflator used for personal consumption expenditure in the GDP.  The C-CPI was designed by the government as a replacement for the CPI in calculating cost-of-living adjustments (COLA) for government programs such as Social Security.  With the C-CPI showing the lowest inflation of the CPI measures, the concept has been viewed positively by Congress as a way to reduce the federal deficit (the basic concept was used before when redefining the CPI).  Unlike the CPI reporting, which is set forever on a not-seasonally-adjusted basis, once reported, the C-CPI-U faces revisions for two years.  That could become a major issue in the C-CPI replacing the CPI in COLA adjustments.

CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers):  The CPI-W covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost-of-living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U.

CPI-U-RS (Current Methods CPI):  The CPI-U-RS is the current CPI-U with its history restated as if all the new methodologies introduced since the 1980s had been in place from day one.  The involved changes have moved the CPI away from being a measure of inflation for a fixed basket of goods and services, away from being a measure of the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living, away from fully accounting for inflation in out-of-pocket expenses. 

In government reporting, the measure has been used primarily by the Census Bureau in deflating income measures in its annual poverty survey.  The use of the resulting lower historical inflation rates shown in the CPI-U-RS, versus the CPI-U, has the effect of making current inflation-adjusted data, such as income, look relatively stronger on an historical basis.

SGS Alternate CPI-U Measure:  The SGS Alternate CPI Measure (based on 1980 reporting methodologies) is an attempt to reverse methodological changes to CPI inflation since 1980 that have changed the CPI concept from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to a measure of a cost of living that reflects a declining standard of living.  It is based primarily on a reverse engineering of the CPI-U-RS. (See Response to BLS Article on CPI Misperceptions for further details).

GNP/GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD):  The IPD is the rate of inflation for the aggregate economy (including consumer, business, housing, government and trade sectors) that is used in deflating nominal or current-dollar Gross National Product (GNP), Gross Domestic Product (GDP) and components of same, to “real,” constant-dollar or inflation-adjusted levels.

Core Inflation:  Inflation net of food and energy cost.  This is a concept popularized by the Federal Reserve in an effort to report and focus on the lowest possible inflation rate that the government could produce.  Over periods of a year or more, the use of “core” inflation is nonsensical in terms of measuring consumer inflation that has any relationship to common experience.

Recession, Depression and Great Depression

A couple of decades back, I tried to tie down the definitional differences between a recession, depression and a great depression with the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) and a number of private economists.  I found that there was no consensus on the matter, where popular usage of the term “depression” had taken on the meaning of a severe recession, so I set some definitions that the various parties (neither formally nor officially) thought were within reason.

If you look at the plot of the level of economic activity during a downturn, you will see something that looks like a bowl, with activity recessing on the downside and recovering on the upside.  The term used to describe this bowl-shaped circumstance before World War II was “depression,” while the downside portion of the cycle was called “recession,” and the upside was called “recovery.”  Before World War II, all downturns simply were referred to as depressions.  In the wake of the Great Depression of the 1930s, however, a euphemism was sought for describing future economic contractions, so as to avoid evoking memories of that earlier, financially painful time.

Accordingly, a post-World War II downturn was called “recession.”  Officially, now, the deepest post-World War II recession was from December 2007 through June 2009, with a peak-to-trough contraction in the inflation-adjusted quarterly GDP activity level of 5.1% (revised from the 4.1% in place as of the prior hyperinflation report).  That was worse than the 3.7% contraction from August 1957 through April 1958, which involved a steel strike, and a 3.2% contraction in the November 1973 to March 1975, which more commonly is viewed as the worst post-World War II recession prior to 2007.  The 2007 recession also has been declared the longest since the first down-leg of the Great Depression.  I’ll contend, though, that the 2007 downturn is ongoing and that it still is much deeper than has been indicated officially (see Chapter 4—Current Economic and Inflation Conditions in the United States).  Here are the definitions:

Recession: Two or more consecutive quarters of contracting real (inflation-adjusted) GDP, where the downturn is not triggered by an exogenous factor such as a truckers’ strike.  The NBER, which is the official arbiter of when the United States economy is in recession, attempts to refine its timing calls, on a monthly basis, through the use of economic series such as payroll employment and industrial production, and it no longer relies on the two quarters of contracting GDP rule.

Depression: A recession, where the peak-to-trough contraction in real growth exceeds 10%.

Great Depression: A depression, where the peak-to-trough contraction in real growth exceeds 25%.

On the basis of the preceding, there has been the one Great Depression, in the 1930s.  Most of the economic contractions before that would be classified as depressions.  All business downturns since World War II—as officially reported —have been recessions.  Using a somewhat narrower “great depression” definition of a contraction in excess of 20% (instead of 25%), the depression of 1837 to 1843 would be considered “great,” as would be the war-time production shut-down in 1945.

As explored in Chapter 4—Current Economic and Inflation Conditions in the United States, the current downturn would qualify as a “depression” per the above definitions, and it should evolve into a “great depression,” as normal commercial activity grinds to a halt in a hyperinflation.  Nonetheless, the term “Great Recession” has entered the popular lexicon for the current downturn.  Given the financial pain that will be attributed to the Great Recession—if that terminology holds—those naming future such events likely will be looking to come up with a different descriptor for a “recession” in the post-collapse period.

 

Chapter 3—Two Examples of Hyperinflation

Aside from the new first section, the text is little changed from the prior hyperinflation report.

Some Lessons from History

Ralph T. Foster (Foster) in Fiat Paper Money, The History and Evolution of Our Currency (see Recommended Further Reading) details the history of fiat paper currencies from 11th Century Szechwan, China, to date.  He recounts the consistent collapse of those currencies, time-after-time, due to what appears to be the inevitable, irresistible urge of issuing authorities to print too much of a good thing.  The United States is no exception, already having obligated itself to liabilities well beyond its ability ever to pay off—and the obligations continue to mount—while the currency printing presses already are running overtime.

Among numerous instances of hyperinflation in the last one hundred years, two are highlighted here.  First, the Weimar Republic hyperinflation of the early 1920s is close enough to what I envision for the United States so as to provide some cautions as to the scope of the runaway inflation.  Second, the Zimbabwe hyperinflation in the first decade of the 21st Century provides an example of an economy continuing to function through such a currency crisis, thanks to functioning black markets.  The United States does not have a back-up system for its currency, black market or otherwise.

Weimar Republic

Foster closes his book’s preface with a particularly poignant quote from a 1993 interview of Friedrich Kessler (1901-1998), a law professor whose university affiliations included, among others, Yale and the University of California Berkeley.  From firsthand experience, Kessler described the Weimar Republic hyperinflation:

“It was horrible.  Horrible!  Like lightning it struck.  No one was prepared.  You cannot imagine the rapidity with which the whole thing happened.  The shelves in the grocery stores were empty.  You could buy nothing with your paper money.”

The hyperinflation in Germany’s Weimar Republic is along the lines of what likely will unfold in the United States.  The following two graphs plot the same numbers, but on different scales. The data are the monthly averages of the number of paper German marks that equaled one dollar (gold-backed) in 1922 and 1923, with that number acting as something of a surrogate for the pace of inflation. 

Graph 4 is a simple arithmetic plot, but the earlier detail is masked by the extreme numbers of the final several months, suggestive of the extraordinarily rapid and large rise in the pace of inflation.  The second plot, Graph 5, is on a logarithmic scale, where each successive power of ten represents the next tick mark on the vertical scale.

While the hyperinflation did hit rapidly, annual inflation in January 1922 already was more than 200%, up from as low as 6% in April 1921.  The existing currency was abandoned at the end of 1923.

Graph 4: German Paper Marks per U.S. Dollar 1922 to 1923

Graph 5: Log Scale, German Paper Marks per U.S. Dollar 1922 to 1923

Milton Friedman and Anna Jacobson Schwartz noted in their classic A Monetary History of the United States that the early stages of the Weimar Republic hyperinflation was accompanied by a huge influx of foreign capital, much as had happened during the U.S. Civil War.  The speculative influx of capital into the U.S. at the time of the Civil War inflation helped to stabilize the system, as the foreign capital influx into the U.S. in recent years had helped to provide relative stability and strength to the equity and credit markets.  Following the Civil War, however, the underlying U.S. economy had significant untapped potential and was able to generate strong, real economic activity that covered the war’s spending excesses.

Post-World War I Germany was a different matter, where the country was financially and economically depleted as a penalty for losing the war.  Here, after initial benefit, the influx of foreign capital helped to destabilize the system.  “As the mark depreciated, foreigners at first were persuaded that it would subsequently appreciate and so bought a large volume of mark assets…”  Such boosted the foreign exchange value of the German mark and the value of German assets.  “As the German inflation went on, expectations were reversed, the inflow of capital was replaced by an outflow, and the mark depreciated more rapidly… (Friedman p. 76).”

Indeed, in the wake of its defeat in the Great War, Germany was forced to make debilitating reparations to the victors—particularly France—as well as to face loss of territory.  From Foster (Chapter 11):

“By late 1922, the German government could no longer afford to make reparations payments.  Indignant, the French invaded the Ruhr Valley to take over the production of iron and coal (commodities used for reparations).  In response, the German government encouraged its workers to go on strike.  An additional issue of paper money was authorized to sustain the economy during the crisis.  Sensing trouble, foreign investors abruptly withdrew their investments.

“During the first few months of 1923, prices climbed astronomically higher, with no end in sight…  The nation was effectively shut down by currency collapse.  Mailing a letter in late 1923 cost 21,500,000,000 marks.”

The worthless paper German mark became useful as wallpaper and toilet paper, as well as for stoking fires.

The Weimar circumstance, and its heavy reliance on foreign investment, was closer to the current U.S. situation than it was to the U.S. Civil War experience.  In certain aspects, the current U.S. situation is even worse than the Weimar situation.  It certainly is worse than the Civil war circumstance.  

Unlike the still largely untapped economic potential of the United States 147 years ago, today’s U.S. economy is languishing in the structural problems of the loss of its manufacturing base and a shift of domestic wealth offshore; it is mired in an economic contraction that is immune to traditional economic stimuli.  As the U.S. government has attempted in recent decades to assuage electorate discontent with ever more expensive social programs; as the Federal Reserve moved to encourage debt expansion as a remedy for lack of real, inflation-adjusted, income growth; the eventual bankruptcy of the U.S. dollar was locked in.  The problem here was taken on and created willingly by U.S. government officials—embraced by both major political parties—not imposed by a victorious and vengeful enemy of war.

In the early 1920s, foreign investors in Germany were not propping up the world’s reserve currency in an effort to prevent a global financial collapse, and they did not know in advance that they were doomed to take a large hit on their German investments.  In today’s environment, both central banks and major private investors know that the U.S. dollar is a losing proposition.  They either expect and/or hope that they can get out of the dollar in time to avoid more-severe losses than already taken, or, in the case of the central banks, that they can forestall the ultimate global economic crisis.  Such expectations and hopes have dimmed markedly in the last several years, as the untenable U.S. fiscal condition has gained much broader public and global recognition.  

Zimbabwe

Hyperinflation in Zimbabwe, the former Rhodesia, was a quadrillion times worse than it was in Weimar Germany.  Zimbabwe went through a number of years of high inflation, with an accelerating hyperinflation from 2006 to 2009, when the currency was abandoned.  Through three devaluations, excess zeros repeatedly were lopped off notes as high as 100 trillion Zimbabwe dollars. 

 

 

  http://www.shadowstats.com/imgs/2009/520/Zim_Trill_2.jpg

 

 

The cumulative devaluation of the Zimbabwe dollar was such that a stack of  100,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000 (26 zeros) two dollar bills (if they were printed) in the peak hyperinflation would have be needed to equal in value what a single original Zimbabwe two-dollar bill of 1978 had been worth.  Such a pile of bills literally would be light years high, stretching from the Earth to the Andromeda Galaxy. 

In early-2009, the governor of the Zimbabwe Reserve Bank indicated he felt his actions in printing money were vindicated by the recent actions of the U.S. Federal Reserve.  If the U.S. went through a hyperinflation like that of Zimbabwe’s, total U.S. federal debt and obligations (more than $80 trillion with unfunded liabilities) could be paid off for much less than a current U.S. penny.

This sign in a restroom facility at a South African border station with Zimbabwe speaks for itself.

 

 

  oilet Paper Only - No Zimbabwe Dollars

 

 

What helped to enable the evolution of the Zimbabwe monetary excesses over the years, while still having something of a functioning economy, was the back-up of a well-functioning black market in U.S. dollars.  The United States has no such backup system, however, with implications for a more rapid and disruptive hyperinflation than seen in Zimbabwe, when it hits.  This will be discussed later.

Chapter 4—Current Economic and Inflation Conditions in the United States

Economic Reality

Before examining how the current circumstance can evolve into a hyperinflationary great depression, it is worth assessing the nature of the present economic and inflation conditions in the United States, along with likely near-term developments in those areas.  Underlying economic activity is reviewed in this chapter based on traditional but inconsistent reporting, and it is explored in the next chapter based on adjustments to related underlying inflation reporting. 

As to the broad outlooks, they have not changed since the prior hyperinflation report.  The economic recession/depression is structural and ongoing in nature, with growth well below official estimates, and with no recovery likely in the foreseeable future.  Inflation deliberately is understated by the U.S. government, and has shown an initial increase in inflation from the Federal Reserve’s dollar debasement policies and the ensuing increase in oil prices.

It’s All in the Inflation Assumptions.  Simply put, key series such as payroll employment, housing starts and consumer confidence indicate that an economic collapse began in 2006 or 2007 and continued into 2009, with roughly a three-year period of bottom-bouncing activity following the collapse, instead of showing economic recovery during the same post-collapse period of time.

In contrast, the GDP now is reported showing full recovery, with third-quarter 2011 activity having regained the GDP level seen before the recession began.  Real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales and industrial production both show some fair rebound, but no major series has shown full recovery other than the GDP.  The difference between the two sets of series is that those showing no recovery are not otherwise affected by inflation.  Those showing recovery or some rebound, however, are dependent on underlying inflation assumptions.  Corrected for more realistic inflation numbers, the latter series show the same collapse and bottom-bouncing patterns as seen in former, more-reliable series.  This is shown in detail in the next Chapter 5—Key Economic Reporting Varies by Inflation Assumptions.

Wall Street and Political Hype on the Economy and Inflation Are Overly Optimistic.  As heavily touted on Wall Street, the official version of the current U.S. economic circumstance is that business activity is enjoying normal growth, having recovered to levels last seen before the severe recession of 2007-2009.  Reported consumer inflation is higher, but contained, with rising “core” inflation getting less headline coverage than it did the year before.

If this happy picture were real, the Federal Reserve would not be panicking, printing new money and attempting to liquefy the system at an unprecedented pace in QE2, and ongoing speculation of a new round of easing would not be floated every couple of days by Wall Street, looking for a quick fix.  If the economy really were recovering and on a positive track, the Administration and Congress would not be positioning themselves to handle an economically- and financially-impaired electorate in advance of what is likely to be a tumultuous 2012 election.

Indeed, anecdotally, Main Street U.S.A. is not seeing this near-perfect economic environment, either.  Common perception remains that the economy and labor conditions are much worse than the happy news in GDP and jobs reporting, and that inflation is running well above the price increases indicated by the government’s consumer inflation estimates. 

The SGS assessment of the current circumstance generally is in line with the common experience.  The economy still is in broad contraction, with consumer inflation—viewed from the standpoint of the cost of maintaining a constant standard of living (as the CPI initially was intended) and of reflecting out of pocket expenses—running well above official inflation.  Irrespective of the measure, consumer inflation has moved higher in response to Federal Reserve efforts to create inflation.

Suffering from a deteriorating structural shift in consumer liquidity, the U.S. economy went into a severe contraction, starting slowly in late-2006, but plunging by the end of 2007 through early-2009.  Since then the broad economy has been bottom-bouncing at a low-level plateau of activity, with spikes seen in the activity of several important series such as retail sales and industrial production from short-lived stimulus effects, bad underlying inflation assumptions and from distortions in a post-World War II economic reporting system that never was designed to handle a downturn of the present nature and severity.

Broad economic activity has remained stagnant since the collapse, bottom-bouncing and likely to slow anew, and such should painfully evident in the months ahead.  Since the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER)—official arbiter of U.S. recessions—has formally timed the recession, peak-to-trough, from December 2007 to June 2009, the renewed downturn eventually should gain official recognition as the second down-leg of a multiple-dip recession, with its onset likely timed from third-quarter 2010.

Considered in the pages ahead is the nature of the structural consumer-income problems driving the downturn; economic reporting quality issues that have arisen from an unprecedented downturn in the era of modern economic reporting.

Structural Consumer Liquidity Problems

Until structurally-impaired real (or inflation-adjusted) household income and liquidity fundamentally turn around, there can be no sustainable recovery in U.S. economic activity.  The consumer accounted for 73% of reported third-quarter 2011 U.S. GDP.

The U.S. economy is in a deepening structural change that has resulted from U.S. trade, social and regulatory policies driving a goodly portion of the U.S. manufacturing and technology base offshore.  As a result, a large number of related, high paying jobs have disappeared for U.S. workers.  Accordingly, U.S. consumers have found increasingly that their household incomes fail to keep up with inflation. Without real growth in income, there cannot be sustained economic growth.  Growth driven solely by debt expansion, as encouraged by the Greenspan Fed of recent years, ultimately is not sustainable; it is temporary, as has become painfully obvious to many in the still-evolving systemic-solvency crisis. 

Shown in the following Graph 6, the U.S. trade deficit—in general deterioration since the early-1970s— initially narrowed in the current downturn, with weaker U.S. consumption and with a short-lived collapse in oil prices.  Yet, the trade shortfall resumed its net deterioration in the last couple of years.  The brief period of deficit narrowing reflected no fundamental shift in circumstances, no healthy move in U.S. economic activity towards a basic improvement in the trade balance, or in a shift towards reinvigorating the U.S. manufacturing base. 

 

Graph 6: Merchandise Trade Balance

 

The gradual deterioration in inflation-adjusted wages and household income has resulted in a record level of the variance or dispersion in household income, as shown in the next Graph 7, and that has negative longer term economic implications.  Variance in income is low when the distribution of income levels is heavily concentrated in the middle, and it is high when more of the income distribution is pushed into the extremes of high- and low-income levels, with a weaker middle-income range.

A person earning $100,000,000 per year is not going to buy that many more automobiles than someone earning $100,000 per year.  The stronger the middle class is, generally the stronger will be consumption and the economy. 

Historically, extremes in income variance have been followed by financial panics and economic depressions, which then tend to redistribute income towards the middle.  Income variance today is higher than it was coming into 1929 and 1987, and it is nearly double that of any other “advanced” economy.  At a peak in 2006, the measure dipped as systemic crises broke in 2007.  Yet, U.S. income dispersion moved higher again in 2008, 2009 and 2010 (the most recent reporting) setting a new historic high.

Graph 7: Household Income Dispersion

Graph 8: Average Weekly Earnings (1967 CPI-W Dollars)

Graph 9: Annual Median Household Income (1967 Dollars)

Graph 10: Median Household Income Index (Monthly)

Graphs 8, 9 and 10 show officially-reported weakness in inflation-adjusted income. Graph 8 shows real average weekly earnings (production and supervisory workers), as reported and deflated by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) using the regular CPI-W.  Real wages never recovered their pre-1973 recession peak.  As wages dropped through the decades, the number of people in an average household that had to work—in order to make ends meet—increased.  If the shown wages were deflated using the SGS-Alternate CPI Measure (discussed later in this section), the wage line would continue sloping downward, subsequent to 1996.

Graph 9 reflects median (the middle measure instead of average) U.S. household income over the years.  The bottom dark-blue line shows income deflated by the regular CPI-U, a measure somewhat broader than the CPI-W used in the wage plot.  Those inflation-adjusted numbers show that median household income never recovered its pre-2001 recession peak and stood below its level of 1969, as of 2010.  Even deflated by the CPI-U-RS (current methods) used in Census Bureau reporting—discussed below—the pre-2001 recession peak also has not been recovered.  The BLS uses the CPI-U or CPI-W for deflating its official income series; the Census Bureau has been playing games with the CPI-U-RS.  I know no other use of the “RS” series in major economic reporting.

Graph 10 reflects a new series on median household income that shows a seasonally-adjusted monthly index deflated by the CPI-U.  The income index plunged through 2008 into 2011.  I expect further downturns will be seen here.  There is nothing here to support the concept, let alone the possibility of an economic recovery.

The broad point on inflation-adjusted U.S. consumer income is that it is inadequate to sustain growing, inflation-adjusted economic activity.  In the absence of income growth, debt expansion can act as a short-term prop for the economy, but that is not available at present.  The system is in the throes of a solvency crisis, with banks having reduced lending to consumers.  The consumer is in an unprecedented liquidity crisis, constrained by shrinking income and by limited credit.

CPI No Longer Reflects Costs of Maintaining Constant Standard of Living

In the last several decades, the BLS introduced a variety of new methodologies into the calculation of the CPI, with the effect of reducing the level of reported CPI inflation. The general approach was to move the CPI away from its traditional measuring of the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living.  The introduction of hedonic adjustments also has eliminated the concept of the CPI reflecting actual out-of-pocket expenditures.

The lower the rate of inflation that is used in deflating a number, the stronger will be the resulting inflation-adjusted level or growth.  The CPI-U-RS is the CPI with its history restated as if all the new methodologies had been in place from day one.  The impact of the methodological changes in calculating inflation is evident in the two lines in Graph 9: Annual Median Household Income (1967 Dollars), with the upper, red CPI-U-RS line showing stronger relative growth.

By reverse-engineering the CPI-U-RS, current inflation reporting can be estimated as though it were free of the inflation-dampening methodologies.  Such has been done with the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (based on 1980 methodologies).  The SGS measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

As plotted in following graph, the gap between the SGS measure (blue line) and the CPI-U (thinner red line) effectively is the shortfall in official inflation reporting that otherwise would have offset declining standards of living.  This is one reason why individuals who have their income tied to the CPI find it increasingly difficult to make ends meet (see Response to BLS Article on CPI Misperceptions for further details).

Graph 11: Annual Consumer Inflation, CPI versus SGS Alternate

Early Impact of Dollar Debasement

Regardless of the inflation measure, inflationary pressures surfaced from the Fed’s efforts at dollar debasement.  A weakening U.S. dollar placed upside pressure on dollar-denominated oil prices and other dollar-denominated commodity prices, including food, which in turn began pushing annual inflation higher.  This is not inflation generated by strong economic demand, but rather inflation driven by the Federal Reserve’s monetary efforts to weaken the dollar.  While global supply problems or political concerns also have affected food and energy commodity prices, movements against the dollar seem to have been the primary moving force behind getting oil prices to their current elevated levels.

 

Graph 12: Gold versus Swiss Franc

Graph 13: Gold versus Oil

Graph 14: Gold versus Silver

Shown in Graphs 12, 13 and 14 are powerful fundamentals that either drive U.S. inflation or reflect market expectations of the longer-term domestic inflation outlook.  The currency, oil and gold markets have seen extreme volatility in the last couple of years, and they likely will continue to be volatile in the year ahead.  Reflecting the inflationary pressures from a weaker dollar and higher oil prices, ongoing solvency issues for the United States, and continued dollar debasement efforts by the Federal Reserve—including the apparent recent loss of the U.S. dollar’s traditional safe-haven status, and a severe loss of global confidence in the dollar—the Swiss franc, gold and silver have hit historic or multi-decade (silver) highs in the last year, before the heavy selling and market manipulations in late-2011.

Income, Credit and Willingness to Spend

The income shortfalls experienced by many individuals and households—in terms of being able to maintain or to improve standards of living—often were met by consumer debt expansion.  Such was encouraged by a Federal Reserve that recognized the U.S. economy would face stagnation or a slowdown without a surge in consumer credit. 

Keep in mind that the Federal Reserve is not a government entity, but rather a private corporation owned by private banking interests.  Irrespective of federal government mandates that the Fed pursue polices to maintain stable economic growth and to contain inflation, the Fed’s primary mission has been to protect the banking system, to keep that system solvent and profitable.

Explosive growth in the use of credit cards and the expansion of home equity loans as sources of consumer liquidity, fueled consumer liquidity, fueled consumer spending, gave consumers a false sense of financial security and helped banking-system profitability.

As housing activity began to fall off in 2006, and as the recession and the financial and bank solvency crises became apparent to authorities in 2007 and 2008, lending to consumers dried up by mid-2008.  Impaired bank balance sheets limited banks’ lending abilities.  Income problems, which had been masked by excessive consumer debt growth, suddenly were exacerbated by collapsing credit.

Consumer Credit Still Shrinking Net of Student Loan Surge

The following Graph 15 shows total consumer credit outstanding (excluding mortgages) since 2000.  The recent downturn in consumer credit was the most severe of the post-World War II era, and followed the general pattern of the economic collapse in the ongoing downturn, with an ensuing period of bottom-bouncing. 

The recent gains in consumer credit are deceiving.  Since the near-term trough of the series in September 2010, the $54.1 billion increase in consumer credit outstanding as of November 2011 was more than accounted for by a $136.1 billion increase federal government student loans, not to lending that might fuel consumer spending.  Otherwise, consumer credit and bank lending to consumers still are contracting on a month-to-month and annual basis.

Graph 15:  Consumer Credit Outstanding

Beyond having the income and/or credit, however, consumers also need the willingness to spend.  There is something of a surrogate measure for this willingness in the Conference Board’s consumer confidence index (shown later in Graph 21: Consumer Confidence).  December 2011’s reading was more than 50% below the levels seen in the halcyon days pre-2001 recession, when debt excesses were not viewed by most as a particular problem.  At present, consumers have neither the physical ability nor the willingness to prop up the U.S. economy in the manner to which the Federal Reserve and the big-deficit spenders in Washington, D.C. have become accustomed.

Neither the federal government nor the Federal Reserve can address easily the fundamental structural problems tied to consumer liquidity.  Stimulus efforts have been limited to one-time or otherwise short-lived efforts to provide temporary boosts to consumer disposable income.  Until income growth gains sustainably relative to inflation, and/or credit is flowing freely enough to boost willing consumption, there is no chance for sustained economic growth or economic recovery in the United States.

Markets Are Flying Blind with Distorted Economic Reporting

Seasonal-Factor Warping.  A note of caution is offered here as to the quality of current and recent economic reporting.  The significance of month-to-month data has been heavily impaired by the extraordinary severity of the current economic downturn, both in terms of duration and depth.  Most modern economic reporting was put in place after World War II, designed to handle generally positive growth in the broad economy, with occasional downturns in the business cycle.

Reporting of month-to-month and quarter-to-quarter data usually were based on seasonal adjustments, where repetitive patterns tied to holiday, school year, etc. activity were removed statistically from the numbers, theoretically leaving patterns due to just shifting economic activity.  Seasonal adjustments were based on patterns of activity over a number of years, with the most-recent year receiving the heaviest weighting.  In recent years, key series such as nonfarm payrolls and retail sales have been reported using “concurrent” seasonal-factor adjustments, where the adjustments are recalculated each month, using the latest month’s data.

When the seasonal factors are meaningful, they tend to remain stable over time, with little variation in the distribution of monthly patterns from the year-to-year or even month-to-month re-estimations.   Extreme volatility of economic activity in the last several years has outweighed and distorted regular seasonal factor patterns.  As result, annual and monthly recalculations of the seasonals have been showing highly unstable patterns, which, in turn, have thrown off the significance of reported monthly and quarterly changes, well beyond previously recognized reporting error confidence intervals.

Of particular concern with the “concurrent” adjustments made to payrolls and retail sales, for example, is that the monthly revisions from the unstable seasonal-factor recalculations have been significant.  While those revisions affect data going back for years, the government only shows revisions to the last two months (with retail sales they also show the last two months from one year ago), freezing all the other data in place.

The problem in terms of analyzing these data is that reported monthly gains or losses often reflect no more than the unstable seasonal factors shifting activity patterns around during the year, not changes in economic activity.  Those analyzing the numbers, though, cannot see what is happening.  The historical data are inconsistent with the latest reporting, since the fully revised history simply is not published.   

Loss of Survey Base Inflates Reported Activity / Distorts Rules of Thumb.  In a deep and protracted downturn, companies go out business.  If a company fails to report its payrolls, sales or orders, however, the government generally assumes that the company still is active and estimates what that company should be reporting.

Also, economic activity has sunk to such low levels, that regular measures of change followed closely by the financial markets—such as new claims for unemployment insurance—are not signaling economic recovery, as they turn less negative.  Some analysts look at historical patterns and conclude that when new claims drop below a certain level that the economy is improving.  In the current circumstance, layoffs have been so severe that the universe of potential further layoffs has been meaningfully reduced.  Under such circumstances, rules of thumb may not work well.

Corporate Revenues and Profits.  Unusually severe economic times also can affect reported corporate performance.  The current downturn has not hit all sectors or all companies with equal vigor, and, as often is the case, downturn and recovery will vary sharply across the commercial spectrum.  Nonetheless, company financials are always worth a close look. 

Publicly held corporations usually enjoy the flexibility and creativity needed to show strong financial results even when the economy is down; or least they can help guide market expectations in terms of earnings, etc.  Creative accounting—often involving throwing future losses into one-time charges for downsizing or such—usually is well accepted by investors, even when that cutting of productive assets has gone beyond the fat, through the muscle and into the bone.  Asset valuations also may enjoy gimmicked accounting practices in difficult times. 

Further, companies holding assets outside the U.S. dollar can boost their dollar-based picture, when the U.S. currency is under pressure.  Also, against extremely weak prior-year profits or revenues, impressive year-to-year growth rates can help paint a happy picture for investors. 

Already in Depression, Economy Continues to Bottom Bounce

Near-Term Economic Activity. As discussed in the regular SGS Commentaries, the U.S. economy remains in a structural recession/depression that is or is going to get a great deal worse.  Due to the NBER calling a formal end to the 2007 recession, however, the ongoing difficulties here will be recognized as a double- or multiple-dip downturn.  As will be discussed shortly, the contraction in business activity so far in the extreme downturn since 2006/2007 likely would qualify as a “depression” per SGS definitions (see Recession, Depression and Great Depression).

Shown in Graph 16, inflation-adjusted, year-to-year change in broad money supply (M3) generates a reliable signal in advance of recessions, or, in the case where a recession already is underway (as in the 1973 and 2007 recessions), a pending intensification of the downturn.  The lead-time usually is six-to-nine months.  Some recessions start without a money contraction, and upturns in money do not always lead economic upturns, but whenever real, broad systemic liquidity is in contraction, the economy always will follow.  The downturn signal is generated when the inflation-adjusted annual money growth (which adjusted for the velocity of money is the theoretical equivalent of real GDP) first turns negative   (see Inflation and Money Growth).

In the current circumstance, a downside signal was generated in December 2009.  After protracted bottom-bouncing, the economy appears to have turned down anew around September/October 2010, as will be discussed in the next chapter.  The year-to-year upturn in the series as of December 2011 is of no particular meaning; again, the reliable signal only is on the downside.

Graph 16: Real M3 versus Formal Recessions

 

Historical Perspective on the Economic Data

Traditional Year-to-Year View.  The current downturn, as reported, already is the longest and the deepest business contraction since the first down-leg of the Great Depression in the early 1930s.  Such is reflected in payroll employment and GDP growth plotted in the following graphs.  The quarterly GDP numbers are available only back to 1947.  If one counts the war-production shutdown at the end of World War II as a normal business cycle, then the current downturn is the deepest since then, but still the longest since the early 1930s.  The respective depths of the Great Depression and post-war production contractions are based on annual data available back to 1929.

While the official peak-to-trough contraction in the downturn since fourth-quarter 2007 GDP now is 5.1% (second-quarter 2009 trough), most of the better economic series are showing or have shown contractions that are more consistent with a peak-to-trough GDP contraction in excess of 10% (depression range), as indicated by payroll employment, retail sales and industrial production, while others such as housing starts showing contractions of greater than 25% (great-depression range).  These issues will be covered in the next chapter, along with evidence of even greater annual down turn in major economic series.

Graph 17: Year-to-Year Change Monthly Payroll Employment

Graph 18: Year-to-Year Change Quarterly Real GDP

Graph 19: Year-to-Year Change Annual Real GDP

 

 

 

 

Chapter 5—Key Economic Reporting Varies by Inflation Assumptions

 

Economic Reporting Free of Inflation And Inflation Corrected

Economic Measures—It’s All in How Inflation is Measured.  The following ten graphs are divided between those economic series that reflect no inflation adjustments (Graphs 20 to 23), and those that are dependent on underlying inflation assumptions (Graphs 24 to 29).  The difference is that series free of inflation adjustment show that the economy turned down in 2006 or 2007, plunged into 2008 or 2009 and has not recovered meaningfully, showing something close to bottom-bouncing ever since.  The series adjusted for inflation plunge into 2009, but then recover or show some reasonable upside gains. 

I contend that the latter case is due to the use of understated inflation rates when the series are deflated, which results in overstatement of the reported, inflation-adjusted growth.  Corrected for more reasonable rates of inflation, these series in the second grouping of GDP, real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales and industrial production start to look like those in the first grouping, payroll employment, consumer confidence and housing starts. 

The Economy Has Yet to Recover.  Is the U.S. economy booming anew, or is it still bottom-bouncing in a deep contraction that now exceeds in duration the first-leg of the Great Depression?  The differences in published data that support one or the other extreme circumstance are tied to how the government handles inflation estimates, with the more-troubled economy the likely reality.

In line with common experience, I contend that the U.S. economy has been in trouble since at least 2000, when it entered a recession that dragged into 2003.  Business activity then began collapsing in 2006, hit a bottom in 2009 and has been bottom-bouncing since.  The outlook for the U.S. economy remains bleak, with continued and deteriorating bottom-bouncing ahead.  I figure there have been 60 months of recession so far, in the current downturn, which tops the 43 months officially estimated for the first down-leg of the Great Depression.

The happier, official version of U.S. business activity is that the economy went through a shallow recession between March 2001 and November 2001, with a much deeper downturn beginning in December 2007 and ending in June 2009.  Since then, U.S. economic activity has recovered fully and now exceeds pre-2007 recession levels.

Where some widely followed economic series such as real retail sales and industrial production show increasing activity, only GDP reporting shows a full recovery.  Those series also all are adjusted by inflation with gimmicked underlying assumptions.  Other series such as payrolls, household income, consumer confidence and housing starts support the more dire circumstance.  Those series, except for household income, are not subject to inflation adjustments.  The implication for household income, which is deflated by the CPI-U, is that the decline is even more severe than suggested by the official numbers (see Graph 10: Median Household Income Index (Monthly)).

Plots of these indicators are shown and discussed, and, where appropriate, viewed with different inflation assumptions.  All the graphs plot monthly or quarterly levels of activity, indexed to January 2001 or first-quarter 2001 equal to 100.  Exceptions to the indexing are real retail sales and industrial production—before inflation correction—and housing starts, which are displayed as otherwise published in the regular Commentaries.  Where used, the shaded areas represent officially pronounced periods of recession.

Payroll Employment.  Consider Graph 20 of payroll employment.  Where employment traditionally has been considered a coincident indicator of economic activity, payroll levels suggest the 2001 recession ended in 2003, not 2001, and that the 2007 recession still is not over; at least there has been no meaningful rebound in economic activity.  The payroll level in December 2011 remained below payroll levels not only pre-2007 recession, but also pre-2001 recession.

Consumer Confidence.  Graph 21 of consumer confidence reflects the 2001 recession crashing into 2003, with no full recovery.  The downturn begins before the end of 2007, and basically has been bottom-bouncing near historic lows in the post-plunge period.  

Housing Starts.  Graphs 22 and 23 show plunging activity starting in 2006 and running into 2009, with bottom-bouncing in the post-plunge era

GDP and Inflation.  Graphs 24 and 25 are based on GDP reporting.  The Graph 24 reflects official levels of real (inflation-adjusted) GDP activity (indexed to first-quarter 2000 equals 100).  It shows no clear 2001 recession, with growth generally in an uptrend until the official December 2007 to June 2009 recession, and with third-quarter 2011 business activity fully recovered from the recession.

A significant issue with official GDP reporting is the nature of the inflation rate used to deflate the series.  The lower the inflation rate used in the GDP’s implicit price deflator (IPD), the stronger will be the inflation-adjusted level and growth reported for the real GDP.  Back in the 1980s, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) introduced the concept of hedonic adjustments in determining the IPD.  Hedonic adjustments altered (usually reduced) inflation estimates, based on nebulous quality concepts that had no relationship to real-world common experience.  The effect was to reduce the IPD inflation artificially.  Other major countries initially avoided the concept in their GDP calculations, with a number of papers discussing how the U.S. hedonic methodologies gave an artificial boost to reported U.S. economic performance, productivity, etc. relative to the rest of the world.  I estimate the hedonics currently reduce the annual IPD by about two percentage points.

There is no easy way to reconcile the official GDP activity with payroll employment activity, without considering the inflation issue, and the explanation is not in sudden, miraculous gains in productivity, which simply is a residual of poor-quality numbers.  The payroll employment numbers are surveyed and eventually benchmarked.  Despite all the issues I have with the employment series, the numbers eventually become fairly solid.  In contrast, the GDP estimates are heavily guessed at and modeled, including the IPD.

Backing-out the two-percentage point IPD understatement generates the “Inflation-Corrected Real GDP” in Graph 25 graph, which is more consistent with the payroll numbers than is the “Headline GDP.”  With corrected inflation, the GDP shows the 2001 recession beginning in 2000 and extending into 2003.  The 2007 recession begins in 2006, hits a bottom in 2009 and the bottom-bounces thereafter.  A small upside bounce is turning down again.

I am attempting to make a simple point here as to how differing assumptions on inflation can throw off official reporting, meaningfully.  The inflation-corrected number in the graph is not the same measure as the SGS-Alternate GDP Measure, which also adjusts for hedonics.  There are a number of other factors involved in that measure, which complicate the discussion but show an even more-negative “corrected” GDP (see the Alternate Data and Primer tabs on www.shadowstats.com for more detail).

Retail Sales.  Graph 26 shows the official real retail sales series.  As with official real GDP reporting, reporting of real retail sales (deflated with the CPI-U by the St. Louis Federal Reserve) uses understated inflation, with the result of overstated levels of real growth and activity.  Instead of the CPI-U, I have used the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (1990) to deflate the nominal retail sales number, adding about three percentage points back into annual inflation on the recent CPI-U.  As was discussed earlier, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) has changed methodologies in recent decades so that the CPI no longer reflects the cost of living for maintaining a constant standard of living, and it no longer reflects what most people consider full out-of-pocket expenses, as a result of using hedonic adjustments.

The inflation-corrected real retail sales in Graph 27 shows a 2000 to 2003 recession, a plateau of activity into the next downturn, which begins in 2006, a trough in 2009 and bottom-bouncing thereafter.  As a result of the new deflation of retail sales, the series more closely reflects that patterns seen in consumer confidence and household income, particularly in terms of the 2003 to 2006 plateau in activity.

Industrial Production.  Graph 28 shows the official industrial production series.  The production index includes components, such as computers, where the volume is calculated from dollar amounts that are deflated by hedonically-dominated inflation estimates.  Adjusted for a 0.6% inflation differential, the inflation-corrected industrial production in Graph 29 shows the 2011 recession, a period of stagnation, a downturn beginning about mid-2007, plunging into mid 2009, with a slow uptrend to date, nothing close to a recovery.

There is no question that the government has taken actions in recent decades to depress inflation reporting artificially.  As a result, inflation-adjusted economic growth has been overstated, and that helps to account for the discrepancies seen between GDP estimates and employment patterns.  Accordingly, the employment estimates are closer to common experience.

The estimated inflation-corrected series indeed are estimates, approximations, but they show that the general softer economic growth patterns are in place irrespective of the precise level of inflation understatement by the government.  I believe the estimates used here to be reasonably conservative.

 

Graph 20: Payroll Employment Level

Graph 21: Consumer Confidence

Graph 22: Housing Starts Beginning 2000

Graph 23: Housing Starts Post-World War II

Graph 24: Real GDP Level, Official Version

Graph 25: Inflation-Corrected Real GDP Level

Graph 26: Headline Real Retail Sales

Graph 27: Inflation Corrected Headline Real Retail Sales

Graph 28: Headline Industrial Production Level

Graph 29: Inflation-Corrected Industrial Production

 

 

Chapter 6—Historical U.S. Inflation and U.S. Dollar Debasement

 

Fire and Ice

Some say the world will end in fire,
Some say in ice.
From what I’ve tasted of desire
I hold with those who favor fire.
But if it had to perish twice,
I think I know enough of hate
To say that for destruction ice
Is also great
And would suffice.

– Robert Frost

 

Updated text in this chapter includes year-end 2011 inflation data, an expanded “Loss of Purchasing Power Table,” and expanded comments on the inflation/deflation issues.   

As to the fate of the developing U.S. great depression, it will encompass the fire of a hyperinflation, instead of the ice of deflation seen in the major U.S. depressions prior to World War II.  What promises hyperinflation this time is the lack of monetary discipline formerly imposed on the system by the gold standard; a fiscally bankrupt federal government; and a Federal Reserve dedicated to debasing the U.S. dollar and to preventing a banking system collapse at all costs.  

Both the federal government and the Federal Reserve demonstrated in 2008 and in the months and years following that they will not tolerate a systemic collapse and a great deflation, as seen during the Great Depression.  As more fully discussed in Chapter 7—Federal Reserve, Systemic Solvency and Inflation versus Deflation, those risks are being fought, and will be fought, at any cost that can be covered by the unlimited creation of new money, including whatever spending, lending or guarantees are needed.  It was a devil’s choice, but the choice has been made.  Extreme systemic interventions, and formal measures to debase the U.S. dollar through the effective unlimited creation of money to cover systemic needs and the government’s obligations, pushed the timing of a systemic collapse—threatened in September 2008—several years into the future.  The cost of instant, as well as ongoing, systemic salvation, though, is inflation. 

Current efforts at systemic salvation eventually will pummel the U.S. dollar against other currencies and likely will evolve into the proximal trigger for hyperinflation.  Systemic collapse is unavoidable at this point, but it will be in a hyperinflationary great depression, instead of a deflationary one.  A direct result of Fed and U.S. government efforts to delay systemic collapse, as long as possible, the hyperinflation will have been born beyond the reach of official containment, the child of last-ditch efforts to salvage a system that had been methodically pushed to long-range insolvency by decades of federal political malfeasance.

Putting the current environment in historical perspective, the following two graphs measure the level of consumer prices since 1665 in the American Colonies and later the United States.  The first, Graph 30, shows what appears to be a fairly stable level of prices up to the founding of the Federal Reserve in 1913 (began activity in 1914) and to Franklin Roosevelt’s abandoning of the gold standard in 1933.  Then, inflation takes off in a manner not seen in the prior 250 years, and at an exponential rate when viewed using the SGS-Alternate Measure of Consumer Prices in the last several decades.  The price levels shown prior to 1913 were constructed by Robert Sahr of Oregon State University.  Price levels since 1913 either are Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) or SGS-based, as indicated.

Graph 30: Consumer Inflation 1665 to 2011

The magnitude of the increase in price levels in the last 50 years or so, however, visually masks the inflation volatility of the earlier years.  That early volatility becomes evident in the next graph, where the CPI history is plotted using a logarithmic scale.  Seeing such detail is a particular benefit of using such a plot, although the full scope of what is happening may be lost to those not used to thinking log-based.  The pattern of the rising CPI level, however, still looks rather frightening even in the modified form.  Nonetheless, since inflation ideally is something that is flat over time—not compounding like the population and related series that grow with it—I do not have any issue with using a non-log scale for the visual impact of what is happening. 

Persistent year-to-year inflation (and the related compounding effect) did not take hold until post-Franklin D. Roosevelt.  Additionally, the CPI level reflects purchasing power lost over time for those holding dollars, which is cumulative, and which has reached extremes (as will be discussed shortly) due to the late-era compounding effect.  If my assessment is correct on where this is headed, the log-based graph shortly will look like the arithmetic-based graph, as was seen the latter months of the Weimar circumstance and as shown in the Weimar Republic section.

Indicated by the visible detail in the second graph, Graph 31, are the regular periods of inflation—usually seen around wars—offset by periods of deflation, up through the Great Depression.  Particular inflation spikes can be seen at the time of the American Revolution, the War of 1812, the Civil War, World War I and World War II (which lacked an ensuing, offsetting deflation).  As a result, consumer prices at the time of the Fed’s founding in 1913 were about the same as they had been in New Amsterdam (today’s New York City) in 1665. 

Graph 31: Log-Scale Consumer Inflation 1665 to 2011

 

The inflation peaks and the ensuing post-war depressions and deflationary periods, tied to the War of 1812, the Civil War and World War I, show close to 60-year cycles, which is part of the reason some economists and analysts have been expecting a deflationary depression in the current period.  There is some reason behind 30- and 60-year financial and business cycles, as the average difference in generations in the United States is 30 years, going back to the 1600s.  Accordingly, it seems to take two generations to forget and repeat the mistakes of one’s grandparents.  Similar reasoning accounts for other cycles that tend to run in multiples of 30 years.

Allowing for minor, average-annual price-level declines in 1949, 1955 and 2009, the United States has not seen a major deflationary period in consumer prices since before World War II.  The reason for this is the same as to why there has not been a formal depression since before World War II: the abandonment of the gold standard and recognition by the Federal Reserve of the impact of monetary policy—free of gold-standard system restraints—on the economy.

The gold standard was a system that automatically imposed and maintained monetary discipline. Excesses in one period would be followed by a flight of gold from the system and a resulting contraction in the money supply, economic activity and prices.

Faced with the Great Depression, and unable to stimulate the economy, partially due to the monetary discipline imposed by the gold standard, Franklin Roosevelt used those issues as an excuse to abandon gold and to adopt close to a fully-fiat currency under the auspices of what I call the debt standard, where the government effectively could print and spend whatever money it wanted to create.

Roosevelt’s actions were against the backdrop of the banking system being in a state of collapse.  The Fed stood by twiddling its thumbs as banks failed and the money supply imploded.  A depression collapsed into the Great Depression, with intensified price deflation.  Importantly, a sharp decline in broad money supply is a prerequisite to significant goods and services price deflation.  Messrs Greenspan and Bernanke are students of the Great Depression period.  As did Mr. Greenspan before him, "Helicopter Ben" has vowed not to allow a repeat of the 1930s money supply collapse and a resulting severe deflation.

Where the Franklin Roosevelt Administration abandoned the gold standard and its financial discipline for the debt standard, twelve successive administrations have pushed the debt standard to the limits of its viability, as seen now in the continuing threat of systemic collapse.  At present, it is the Obama Administration that has to look at abandoning the debt standard (hyperinflation) and starting fresh.  Yet, the Administration and many in Congress have taken recent actions showing the lack of political will to address the nation’s long-range insolvency, hoping to push off the day of reckoning for the economic and systemic solvency crises until after the 2012 presidential election.  They likely do not have that much time.

The effect of the post-Roosevelt policies has been a slow-motion destruction of the U.S. dollar’s purchasing power, per the accompanying table, since the gold standard was abandoned in 1933.  With the dollar’s purchasing power down by 95.6% (based on the CPI) and by 98.4% (based on the SGS-Alternate) since 1933, equivalent or greater purchasing power loss was seen against the precious metals, down by 98.8% versus gold, and down 98.6% versus silver.  That means that money invested in the precious metals, since 1933 (in 1933 it became illegal to own gold privately in the United States, but it became legal again in the early 1970s after Nixon closed the gold window; holding silver was legal throughout the full period), more than preserved the purchasing power against the losses from CPI inflation, and fully preserved the purchasing power against the losses from SGS inflation.

 

Table I: Loss of U.S. Dollar Purchasing Power

 

 

                  Loss of U.S. Dollar Purchasing Power

 

               Through December 2011

 

 

Since January of

Versus

1914

1933

1970

2002

   Swiss Franc

-81.7%

-81.7%

-77.7%

    -44.1%

   CPI-U

-95.6%

-94.3%

-83.3%

   -21.5%

   Silver*

-98.5%

-98.6%

-94.6%

-85.2%

   Gold

-98.8%

-98.8%

-96.1%

-83.0%

   SGS-Alternate CPI

-98.8%

-98.4%

-95.3%

-59.4%

*December 2011 measured versus annual averages for 1914, 1933 and 1970.

 

 

Please note in the above table that gold and the Swiss franc were held constant by the gold standard versus coins in 1914 and 1933.  The data are from the Federal Reserve Board, the Bureau of Labor Statistics, Kitco and from SGS data and calculations.  The magnitude of the loss in the U.S. dollar’s purchasing in the span of almost one century could be repeated in the span of less than 12 months starting in the next year or so.  Again, fiscal and monetary malfeasance by the federal government and the Federal Reserve are to blame.

 

The table showing the loss of purchasing power of the U.S. dollar against various inflation measures and assets has been expanded to include silver in the assets, as well as to include January 2002 as a base, showing the loss of purchasing power in just the last ten years.  With most of the CPI reporting gimmicks in place by 2001, the differential between the CPI and SGS is close to maximum.

 

 

Chapter 7—Federal Reserve, Systemic Solvency and Inflation versus Deflation

Preventing Systemic Collapse at All Costs

In an ongoing effort to prevent a collapse of the banking and financial system, Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke has taken extreme efforts to liquefy the system.  The pending systemic collapse in September 2008 was real, and that forced the Fed and the U.S. government to act to save the domestic financial system at any cost.  Whatever was needed to back-up or bailout the system in terms of lending, spending and financial guarantees was supported by the Fed’s ability to create any amount of money that was needed.  The actions of the time brought short-lived stability to the system, but they did nothing fundamentally to remedy the systemic-solvency issues. 

The housing industry had begun to collapse in 2006, which pulled the broad economy into recession and helped to create a crisis with mortgage backed securities.  The ensuing financial crisis and related panics exacerbated the economic downturn but did not start the recession.  None of the actions taken by the Fed and/or the federal government have had significant impact on the worst economic downturn since the Great Depression.  As discussed in Chapter 4—Current Economic and Inflation Conditions in the United States and in Chapter 5—Key Economic Reporting Varies by Inflation Assumptions, a severe structural downturn collapsed the broad economy from late-2007 into 2009, and the economy basically has not recovered, bottom-bouncing for the two-to-three years since with no recovery in sight.

There is nothing the Fed can do to have meaningful positive impact on the economy.  There is nothing the Fed can do to make the U.S. banking system healthy.  What Mr. Bernanke has done has been little more than trying to delay a day-of-reckoning for the banks and the financial system.  Keeping the banking system sound is the Fed’s primary responsibility; fostering sustainable economic growth and contained inflation are secondary considerations.  The quantitative easings were an effort to provide the banking system with adequate liquidity, but the related actions were sold to the public and the media as an effort to boost economic activity.  Future Fed “stimulus” actions should be of a similar nature.

By preventing systemic collapse at all costs, the Fed is preventing a 1930s-style deflation.  As banks failed in the 1930s and depositors lost their funds, the money supply collapsed, as did consumer prices in the Great Depression.  In the current circumstance, so long as the bank failures are controlled and those with money in the system are made whole, that type of money supply collapse is not in the works.  The debt collapse of the current crisis did not collapse the money supply.  Instead, it impaired banks’ balance sheets, restricting lending ability.  That, in turn, slowed broad money supply growth—even fostered a period of minor contraction in money growth—but it did not created a significant deflationary environment for consumer prices, as was seen in the 1930s.

Despite the Fed’s extreme efforts at liquefying the system in the last four or five years, growth in broad liquidity (i.e., money supply M3) generally has been inadequate to support normal economic activity, although there currently are tentative signs of some pick-up in M3.  Where the Fed’s “easing” actions have generated temporary, apparent systemic stability, ongoing efforts—or jawboning of same—for still further systemic liquefaction, suggest that the systemic-solvency crisis is far from over. 

Nonetheless, formal efforts by the Federal Reserve in the last couple of years to debase the U.S. dollar have met with early “success” in exacerbating selling pressures on the U.S. dollar, and in boosting oil and gasoline prices as part of the plan to increase the pace of consumer inflation.  The misguided inflation results do not reflect increased economic activity, only rising commodity prices from monetary policies aimed at debasing the dollar.  The event of the Fed actually pushing these policies into full force would be an indication of panic on the part of the U.S. central bank and likely a measure of how close Mr. Bernanke believes the United States is to a systemic collapse.

Indeed, threats to the system remain in place, including global systemic-solvency issues tied to the euro area.  With significant time to prepare for threats to the U.S. banking or financial system from the euro-area crises, the Fed (and presumably the U.S. Treasury) again can be counted on to create whatever money, or to take whatever short-term action is needed to forestall systemic collapse in the United States.  The next round of easing or emergency actions, however, also runs a high risk of being the proximal trigger of a collapse in the value of the highly-vulnerable U.S. dollar in the global markets, and of the onset of a domestic hyperinflation.

“Helicopter Ben” on Preventing Deflation

Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke picked up his various helicopter nicknames and references as the result of a November 21, 2002 speech he gave as a Fed Governor to the National Economists Club entitled Deflation: Making Sure ‘It’ Doesn’t Happen Here.  The phrase that the now-Fed Chairman Bernanke likely wishes he had not used was a reference to “Milton Friedman’s famous ‘helicopter drop’ of money.”

Attempting to counter concerns of another Great Depression-style deflation, Bernanke explained in his remarks: “I am confident that the Fed would take whatever means necessary to prevent significant deflation in the United States …” 

As expounded upon by Bernanke, “Indeed, under a fiat (that is, paper) money system, a government (in practice, the central bank in cooperation with other agencies) should always be able to generate increased nominal spending and inflation, even when the short-term nominal interest rate is at zero.”

“Like gold, U.S. dollars have value only to the extent that they are strictly limited in supply.  But the U.S. government has a technology, called a printing press (or, today, its electronic equivalent), that allows it to produce as many U.S. dollars as it wishes at essentially no cost.  By increasing the number of U.S. dollars in circulation, or even by credibly threatening to do so, the U.S. government can also reduce the value of a dollar in terms of goods and services, which is equivalent to raising the prices in dollars of those goods and services.  We conclude that, under a paper-money system, a determined government can always generate higher spending and hence positive inflation.” 

The full text of then-Fed Governor Bernanke’s remarks can be found at: http://federalreserve.gov/boarddocs/speeches/2002/20021121/default.htm.

Faced with extreme risk of systemic collapse in the wake of the Lehman failure, Bernanke launched his first round of anti-deflation actions back in 2008, but they did not work fully as advertised.  While the systemic solvency crisis had been contained at least temporarily in key areas, and depositor funds did not suffer heavy losses, the broad money supply began to decline month-to-month in June of 2009 and turned down year-to-year in December 2009.  The deepest annual decline in the SGS-Ongoing M3 Measure in the crisis has been 6.1% in June 2010.  Although that was the worst annual decline in broad money growth since the Great Depression, as discussed earlier, that was not significant  enough to generate a 1930s-style great deflation.  In contrast, the great deflation reflected roughly a one-third contraction in money supply from bank failures and loss of depositor money.  Year-to-year change in M3 turned to the plus-side in April 2011.  As of December 2011, annual growth was at 3.2% and beginning to accelerate to the upside.

Monetary Base and Money Supply Growth

Back in September 2008, the Fed started dropping cash from helicopters, as shown in the graphs of the monetary base.  The process was repeated with the introduction of QE2 in November 2010, with the Fed monetizing Treasury debt (see the graphic in Chapter 1—Overview and Executive Summary).

As shown in the two graphs of level and year-to-year change (Graphs 32 and 33), Bernanke’s spiking of the monetary base has been extraordinary and without precedent.  The Fed’s renewed panic with QE2 provided a second spike in the monetary base.  Again, though, despite the active fleet of choppers, systemic liquidity and solvency remain in deep trouble.

The monetary base remains the Federal Reserve’s primary tool for impacting money supply growth.  As has been the case for the bulk of the extraordinary expansion of the monetary base since late-August 2008—an increase of 204%—the monetary base growth has not been reflected meaningfully in money supply growth, unless it has been holding off an even greater money contraction. 

 

Graph 32: Monetary Base, Level

Graph 33: Monetary Base, Year-to-Year Change

Fundamentally, banks are placing high levels of excess reserves with the Fed, instead of lending the funds into the normal flow of commerce.  As a result, bank lending is down, and small businesses and consumers are experiencing a horrific liquidity squeeze.  This pattern continues despite the Fed’s QE2 buying of Treasury securities.

The monetary base is not part of the money supply.  It consists of currency (which is in M1 money supply) plus bank reserves.  If the banks were lending normally, M1 and the broader measures would be growing.  The ratio of M1 to the monetary base, the monetary base multiplier simply is not a meaningful measure under this circumstance. 

As discussed earlier and as shown in Graphs 34 and 35, year-to-year change in the SGS-Ongoing M3 Measure (the Fed abandoned reporting its broadest money supply measure, M3, back in March 2006) went through a period of contraction from December 2009 through April 2011, with annual growth showing tentative signs of acceleration as of December 2011.

Recent high growth seen in M1 and M2 (M3 includes M2, which includes M1) reflected nothing more than funds shifting from M3 accounts such as institutional money funds and large time deposits into “safer” M1 and M2 accounts.

Inflation-adjusted annual M3 growth also turned negative year-to-year in December 2009, a leading indicator to an economic downturn in normal times, and a signal of deteriorating conditions in an existing economic contraction, discussed in Already in Depression, Economy Continues to Bottom Bounce.

Graph 34: M3, Monthly Year-to-Year Change


 
 


Graph 35: Year-to-Year U.S. Money Supply Growth with SGS M3 Continuation

 

Banks Not Increasing Lending into the Regular Flow of Commerce

As discussed previously in Structural Consumer Liquidity Problems, consumer credit outstanding has been in historic contraction, with recently reported growth in the series due solely to federal lending on student loans, not to traditional bank lending to consumers.  The lack of growth in bank lending to consumers has intensified liquidity constraints there, and has exacerbated the structural problems with inflation-adjusted household income.

The following two graphs show the historical levels of commercial and industrial (C&I) loans by commercial banks and commercial paper outstanding.  The first, Graph 36, shows the history of C&I lending since 2000.  While the downturn in lending in the current economic cycle has been the deepest of the post-World War II era, the upturn in the last year has been offset largely by reduced bank lending in other areas, and in reduced levels of commercial paper outstanding (see Graph 37).

As of December 2011, C&I loans were higher by 10.2% year-to-year, but total loans and leases in bank lending by commercial banks was up by just 2.1%, with C&I gains offset by consumer lending (non-mortgage) down by 1.9%, and by real estate lending down by 3.6%.  On the residential lending front, revolving home equity loans were down by 33.8% for the year, closed-end residential lending was down by 0.8%, and commercial real estate lending was down by 5.7%

 

Graph 36: Commercial and Industrial Loans

Graph 37: Commercial Paper Outstanding

 

Graph 37 of commercial paper outstanding includes both financial and nonfinancial firms, with both sub series currently in decline.

Per the Federal Reserve’s third-quarter 2011 flow-of-funds accounting, total U.S. credit market debt outstanding stood at $53.8 trillion, up by 1.7% from third-quarter 2010.  The annual increase, however, was more than accounted for by the 12.3% growth in U.S. government debt.  The balance of the system saw an outright annual contraction of 0.5% in total credit.

Unlike the initial stages of quantitative easing that focused on the Fed buying up troubled mortgage-backed securities, the QE2 round of buying Treasuries—effectively monetizing fully net Treasury issuance—should have had some positive effect on the money supply.  Funds paid out by the Treasury usually end up in private checking accounts, which are part of the money supply, and M3 recently has begun to show some upside momentum.  Banks need to increase lending, though, in order for the money supply to pick up its full and excessive potential.

Some banks are not lending, because they claim there is a lack of credit-worthy borrowers.  Anecdotal evidence and still-soft money supply growth suggest that the biggest issue remains still-impaired bank balance sheets.  The systemic-solvency crisis has constrained many banks’ ability to increase lending.

Inflation and Money Growth

The Fed’s efforts at currency debasement were reflected in a weakening of the U.S. dollar’s value in foreign exchange markets.  In theory, though, slowing or outright contraction in broad money supply growth should be reflected in slower inflation or outright deflation.  As with most economic theories, however, there often are simplifying assumptions that may not be appropriate under certain circumstances, and there often are unusual circumstances.  Money supply, for example, works best as a predictor of inflation in a closed system, as was seen with Zimbabwe.  Also, perversely, contracting money supply can spur inflation when the economy is declining faster than the money supply.

Money Supply outside the United States.  Unlike Zimbabwe, the United States has a significant amount of dollars (currency and near-cash) held outside the country, where shifting dynamics may have significant impact on U.S. inflation. To the extent that aggregate foreign holdings of U.S. dollars are static, with demand and supply in balance, then the circumstances of the simplified money supply model tend to work.  The dollar’s global position, though, is not in balance, particularly with the Fed generally working to debase the U.S. currency and to create inflation.

One distortion up front is in the U.S. currency in circulation, as reported in the narrowest money supply measure, M1.  More than half of the $1.0 trillion reflected in recent M1 (and monetary base) reporting is physically outside the United States in “dollarized” countries and elsewhere. 

Separately, as reported by the Fed in its third-quarter 2011 flow-of-funds analysis, foreign holders of U.S. assets have something in excess of $12 trillion in liquid, dollar-denominated assets that could be dumped at will into the global and U.S. markets.  In perspective, U.S. M3 is somewhat above $14 trillion.

As excess dollars get dumped into the global markets, a shift in the tide against the U.S. dollar gets reflected in a weakening exchange rate, which in turn spikes dollar-denominated commodity prices, such as oil. Increasingly, that effect has been in response to intensifying dollar-debasement efforts by the Fed.  The result is that U.S. consumer inflation has been increasing during the last year, once again, not from strong economic demand and a surging domestic money supply, but from distended monetary policies and a global glut of dollars that has been encouraged by the U.S. central bank.

Demand and supply affect the U.S. dollar.  Supply soars and demand shrinks with the increasing unwillingness of major dollar holders to continue holding the existing volume of U.S. currency and dollar-denominated assets, let alone to absorb new exposure.

Therein lies a significant threat to near-term U.S. inflation.  Heavy dumping of the U.S. dollar and dollar-denominated assets would be highly inflationary to U.S. consumer prices.  It also likely would activate heavy Fed intervention in buying unwanted U.S. Treasuries.  When the Fed moves to buy Treasuries as the lender of last resort—to monetize U.S. debt still well beyond anything seen to date—that also would tend to trigger renewed growth in the otherwise flagging broad money growth.  

In order to get the broad money supply to grow, the federal government has to spend and borrow more money, where the Fed will have to buy large quantities of the Treasury’s securities, monetizing the federal debt.  The liquidity action pre-QE2 was primarily in buying otherwise illiquid mortgage-backed securities off the balance sheets of troubled banks.  The domestic banks in turn have leant substantial excess reserves back to the Fed, rather than lending into the normal stream of commerce, which would spike the money supply and otherwise be something of an economic positive.

The Fed remains the U.S. Treasury’s lender of last resort.  Panicked dollar selling and dumping of dollar-denominated paper assets—particularly U.S. Treasuries—likely would force the Fed’s hand in an increasingly rapid monetizing of Treasury debt.

Economy Growing Slower or Shrinking Faster Than Money Supply?  As noted in the Money Supply Special Report, inflation discussed in the financial markets, financial media and SGS Commentaries, usually centers on price changes in goods and services as traditionally measured by the CPI survey.  Such, however, is not the same measure of price changes as encompassed in general monetary theory (it also is far removed from being a measure of asset inflation or deflation), where the relationship between money supply and inflation commonly is expressed as:

M x V = P x Q

In the preceding equation, M is the money supply.  V is the velocity of money, as measured by the number of times the money supply turns over in a year, relative to the economy as reflected in nominal (not-adjusted for inflation) gross national product (GNP), where V = GNP/M.  GNP is the broadest measure of U.S. economic activity and encompasses the more popularly reported gross domestic product (GDP).

In turn, nominal GNP = P x Q, where P is some measure of GNP deflator (prices/inflation) and Q represents some measure of physical quantity/volume, or a real (inflation-adjusted) GNP, as a measure of economic output.

So, the P, or inflation measure here, effectively is the GNP deflator.  The change in P is a broader inflation measure than the consumers’ CPI, since it also covers costs of consumption for businesses, government and net exports, in addition to the costs of consumer spending on goods and services.  In terms of the other variables, the price equation is:

P = (M x V) / Q,

where price level (P) equals money supply times velocity (M x V), divided by real GNP (Q).  Typically, increases in the combination of money supply and velocity, relative to Q (real GNP) result in higher prices.  A drop in Q (real GNP), as seen in recessions, also would be inflationary, in theory, if money supply times velocity increased or otherwise did not drop as quickly as real GNP.

The latter case may be happening.  Although none of the equation components can be measured accurately, the theoretical relationships can be useful.  As discussed in Chapter 5—Key Economic Reporting Varies by Inflation Assumptions, based on key underlying economic series, the inflation-adjusted broad economy does appear to be declining faster than has been suggested by official GDP reporting.  If the pace of decline in the economy is faster (or weak growth slower) than the pace of decline (or weak growth) in the money supply times velocity, then that circumstance is inflationary, even with the declining or low money growth.

Nonetheless, I expect that money supply growth and velocity will pick up at excessive rates with the hyperinflation.

Consider, too, the following variation on the monetary equation:

Q = (M/P) x V

Activity, the inflation-adjusted economy (Q), is the same thing as inflation-adjusted money supply (M/P) times velocity (V).  Such is the theoretical basis as to why a decline in year-to-year inflation-adjusted M3 signals an economic downturn, as graphed at the beginning of Already in Depression, Economy Continues to Bottom Bounce.

Money Growth and Velocity Will Increase.  The U.S. hyperinflation very much will reflect a complete loss of confidence in the U.S. dollar.  The Fed has primed the system for explosive money supply growth; all that is needed is a pickup in bank lending.

The Fed’s initial moves to debase the U.S. dollar worked, impairing the U.S. currency’s exchange rate value and triggering commodity inflation fueled by the weak-dollar policy.  This also has helped to set the stage for a global dumping of the dollar and dollar-denominated paper assets, a rapid influx of unwanted dollars from abroad that either would collapse the financial markets or would force the Fed to flood the system with the incoming liquidity, monetizing dumped U.S. Treasury securities among other assets.

As dollar selling intensifies anew and debased-dollar inflation mounts, people in the United States are going to need higher earnings to buy necessities such as gasoline and food.  Even with a weak economy and high unemployment, wages will increase.  Companies paying higher costs for labor and goods increasingly will raise their prices, and their borrowing needs will increase.  Holders of dollars increasingly will not want to hold them long, in turn, raising the velocity of money, and so the cycle of inflation will begin to accelerate, all with still-impaired economic activity.  

 

 

Chapter 8—U.S. Government Cannot Cover Existing Obligations

 

Annual GAAP-Based Federal Deficits at $5 Trillion

The continuing $5 trillion GAAP-based federal deficit remains unsustainable, uncontainable and is unstable.  Against a headline, official quasi-cash-basis and gimmicked reporting of a $1.3 trillion federal budget deficit in 2011, GAAP-based accounting (using generally accepted accounting principles) indicated that the actual 2011 deficit ran somewhat in excess of $5 trillion for the year.  The largest difference between these estimates was that the GAAP-based number includes the widening shortfall of unfunded liabilities for social insurance programs, such as Social Security and Medicare.

As shown in the accompanying table of “U.S. Government – Alternative Fiscal Deficit and Debt Numbers” (SGS Table), the various 2011 deficit estimates remained close to the same horrendous levels as estimated for 2010.  Based on the 2011 Financial Report of the United States Government the 2011 cash-based federal deficit at $1.299 trillion was little changed against the $1.294 trillion estimate for 2010.  The limited GAAP-based deficit (before consideration of changes in social insurance unfunded liabilities), narrowed to $1.313 trillion in 2011, from $2.080 trillion in 2010, but that was due almost entirely to one-time reporting/assumption changes in Veterans Benefits and U.S. government liabilities tied to Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac.  Accordingly, the operating deficits effectively were about the same level in both 2010 and 2011. 

In like manner, the indicated full GAAP-based deficits (including annual change in the net present value of social insurance programs) of $4.6 trillion in 2011 and $5.3 trillion in 2010, effectively were about $5 trillion in each of 2011 and 2010, adjusted for one-time reporting changes.

Federal Debt and Net Present Value of Unfunded Liabilities Exceed $80 Trillion

The numbers discussed in the text here are those from the GAO-Based Alternative version of the 2011 numbers as shown in the SGS Table.  Unfortunately, the government’s financial reporting has become nearly as heavily politicized as some of its economic reporting.  Unlike the economic numbers, though, the financial data are audited (where possible) by the GAO (Government Accountability Office, formerly the General Accounting Office).

In the 2010 statement, consistent year-to-year accounting was not shown, with a large, one-time reduction in reported Medicare liabilities being based on overly optimistic assumptions of the impact from the then recently enacted healthcare legislation.  Referred to in the government’s statements as the Affordable Care Act (ACA), the full GAAP-based results from the ACA accounting showed an annual surplus of $7.0 trillion in 2010, but again, that was not in terms of consistent reporting, which would have been along the lines of a $5 trillion annual deficit.

The new health-care enhanced Medicare results used in the government’s statements were prepared under the auspices of the Obama Administration, but the GAO did not fully buy into the happy numbers in 2010 or again in 2011, with disclaimers of opinion.  The GAO went so far as to run an “Illustrative Alternative Scenario” (pages 130 and 134, respectively of the 2010 and 2011 statements) to the government’s overly optimistic Medicare adjustments.  The “Alternative” versions appear to have more realistic assumptions than the politicized data used in official ACA-based data.   Unfortunately, under present accounting conditions there simply is no way of coming up with truly meaningful hard number, in terms of total government obligations.

Where the “Alternative” data used here show $80.9 trillion of U.S. government debt, obligations and the net present value of the unfunded social security liabilities, as of September 30, 2011, that likely is shy of reality.  Adding estimates of government liabilities in, and exposures to Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, the PBGC and FDIC easily could take that total into the $100 trillion range.  Publicized estimates of U.S. government exposure beyond the $100 trillion mark usually included gross unfunded liabilities, which are not adjusted for net present value (NPV).  NPV reflects the amount of cash needed in hand today to be able to cover a future obligation.  In any event, $80.9 trillion in U.S. government obligations in excess of five-times U.S. GDP.

Graph 38: Total Federal Obligations as Percent of GDP 

Annual Deficits of $5 Trillion Are Not Sustainable 

Those looking at the current $80 trillion of government debt and obligations, who think such is stable, need to consider that the circumstance is not static, but rather it is getting worse each year by at least $5 trillion.  Taxes cannot be raised enough to bring the system into balance for one year, let alone for the ongoing future.  Every penny of government spending—except for Social Security and Medicare—could be cut and the system still would be in annual deficit.  Massive cuts would have to be put in place now (an absolute necessity with the social insurance), if there were to be any hope of restoring long-term solvency for the United States government.  (Continued following table.)

 

Table II: U.S. Government GAAP Accounting, Deficits and Obligations

 


U.S. Government - Alternative Fiscal Deficit and Debt Numbers
Reported by U.S. Treasury

Sources: U.S. Treasury, Shadow Government Statistics.

(I) Fiscal
Year(1)

(II) Formal
Cash-Based
Deficit
($Billions)

(III) GAAP
Ex-SS Etc.
Deficit
($Billions)

(IV) GAAP
With SS Etc.
Deficit
($Trillions)

(V) GAAP 
Federal 
Negative
Net Worth
($Trillions)

(VI) Gross
Federal
Debt
($Trillions)

(VII) Total(2)
Federal
Obligations
(GAAP)
($Trillions)

GAO- Alternative Based(3)

2011

$1,298.6

$1,312.6

$4.6(5)

$73.5

$14.9

$80.9

2010

1,294.1

2,080.3

5.3(3)

68.9(3)

13.6

$76.3(3)

Official ACA- Assumption Based(3)

2011

$1,298.6

$1,312.6

$4.5(5)

$61.1

$14.9

$68.5

2010

1,294.1

2,080.3

(7.0)(3)

56.5(3)

13.6

64.0(3)

Pre-ACA Distortions(3)

2009(4)

1,417.1

1,253.7

4.3

63.6

11.9

70.5

2008

454.8

1,009.1

5.1

59.3

10.0

65.6

2007

162.8

275.5

1.2(5)

54.3

9.0

59.8

2006

248.2

449.5

4.6

53.1

8.5

58.2

2005

318.5

760.2

3.5

48.5

7.9

53.3

2004

412.3

615.6

11.0(6)

45.0

7.4

49.5

2003

374.8

667.6

3.0

34.0

6.8

39.1

2002

157.8

364.5

1.5

31.0

6.2

35.4

 

(1) Fiscal year ended September 30th; the numbers are subject to rounding differences. 
(2) Includes gross federal debt, not just “public” debt.  While the non-public debt is debt the government owes to itself for Social Security, etc., the obligations there are counted as “funded” and as such are part of total government obligations. 
(3) Fiscal years 2011 and 2010 are broken out into “Alternative” and “Official” measures necessitated by “Official” 2010 reporting including a large, one-time reduction in the estimated net present value of unfunded Medicare liabilities, due to unrealistically favorable assumptions tied to the passage of the Affordable Care Act (ACA) healthcare legislation.  With consistent accounting, SGS estimates the GAAP shortfall with Social Security and Medicare for 2010 to be roughly $5 trillion.  The “GAO-Alternative” numbers here are being used as a placeholder until such time as better accounting estimates are available, and reflect results using the “Illustrative Alternative Scenario” on Medicare costs shown on page 130 of the 2010 report and on page 134 of the 2011 report. 
(4) The 2009 data predate December 2009 guarantees of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac (GSEs) and do not reflect PBGC or FDIC liabilities.  Even so, accounting for neither 2010 nor 2011 reflected what might be considered direct, full faith and credit guarantees of the U.S. government in those areas.  Please note that mid-year 2009 accounting redefinitions for TARP knocked off roughly $500 billion from the reported formal cash-based estimate and contributed to a TARP “profit” in the GAAP numbers.  Accordingly, post-2008 reporting may understate annual operating shortfalls and federal debt obligations by significant amounts. 
(5) On a consistent reporting basis, net of one-time changes in assumptions (actuarial and otherwise) and accounting, SGS estimates that the GAAP-based deficit for 2011 topped $5 trillion.  In like manner, SGS estimates that the GAAP-based deficit for 2007 topped $4 trillion, with negative net worth of $57.1 trillion and total obligations of $59.8.  So as to maintain consistency with the official GAAP statements, the “official” numbers are shown. 
(6) SGS estimates a $3.4 trillion 2004 deficit, excluding one-time unfunded setup costs of the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement, and Modernization Act of 2003 (enacted December 2003).  Again, in order to maintain consistency with the official GAAP statements, the “official” numbers are shown in the table for 2004.  The 2011 GAAP statements were released on December 26, 2011: http://fms.treas.gov/fr/index.html

Sources for the SGS Table Data

Fiscal Year (Column I) – All numbers are for the indicated fiscal-year (ended September 30th), in either billions or trillions of dollars as shown.

Formal Cash-Based Deficit (Column II) – headline deficit number from Table 3 on page 7 of the 2011 report, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis” (hereinafter referred to as MDA).  Please note that the latest (November 2011) monthly statements from the U.S. Treasury show a 2011 deficit of $1,296.8 billion and a 2010 deficit of $1,294.2 billion.

GAAP ex-SS Etc. Deficit (Column III) – euphemistically referred to as “Net Operating Cost” in MDA (Table 3 on page 7).  It excludes annual change social insurance unfunded liabilities.

GAAP with SS Etc. Deficit (Column IV) – previous number (Column III) plus year-to-year change in the net present value (NPV) of social insurance unfunded liabilities, which comes from MDA (Table 8 on page 21) line “Closed Group” under “Statement of Social Insurance,” 2011 minus 2010 (for the 2011 “Official” number).  The “Closed Group” is used here for consistency, as it has been the preferred measure used by the U.S. government in its earlier statements.  The “Official” closed group NPV for fiscal 2011 and 2010 respectively are $46,273 and $43,057 billion.

The “Alternative” accounting adds in the differential to the MDA line “Closed Group” and the $12.4 trillion additional net present value of excess expenditures over income for Medicare shown in the “Illustrative Alternative Scenario,” shown in the table on page 130 of the 2010 report (for the 2010 “Alternative” estimate), and the differential between the 2011 “Illustrative Alternative Scenario,” data on page 134 of the 2011 Report, and the 2010 data, to estimate the 2011 number.  The resulting “Alternative” closed group NPV estimates for fiscal 2011 and 2010 respectively are $58,707 and $55,410 billion.

GAAP Federal Negative Net Worth (Column V) – “Net Position” from MDA Table 5 on page 11, plus the 2011 “Closed Group” “Official” and “Alternative” total net present value unfunded liabilities of social insurance as indicated and adjusted in Column IV.

Gross Federal Debt (Column VI) – from “Note 14. Federal Debt …” pages 90 to 92 of the 2011 report.  Total held by public (p. 90) plus Total intragovernmental (p. 92).

Total Federal Obligations (Column VII) – “Total Liabilities” from the MDA Table 5 on page 11, in the 2011 report, plus the 2011 “Closed Group” “Official” and “Alternative” total net present value unfunded liabilities of social insurance as indicated and adjusted in Column IV, plus total intragovernmental debt of $4,710.9 billion from (p. 92) of the 201 report.

 ___________________

(Continued from before the table.)  As seen in the debt limit and deficit negotiations of the least year, there is no political will apparent among those currently controlling the White House and Congress to restore solvency.  Accordingly, the U.S. will be doomed to an eventual hyperinflation, following the course taken by most sovereign states who have spent beyond their ability to raise money, eventually printing the money it needs to meet its obligations.  As noted earlier, that process already has started.  There is little time.  The next Fed action to help the economy (a.k.a. prop-up banking system liquidity), easily could be the one that pushes the U.S. dollar into the abyss.

 

 Chapter 9—Hyperinflationary Great Depression

MoveTowards Hyperinflation Accelerated by Current Fed and Government Actions

Even with the government’s spending, debt and obligations running far beyond the ability of the government to cover with taxes or the political willingness of the government to cut entitlement spending, the inevitable inflationary collapse, based solely on these funding needs, possibly could have been pushed well towards the end of the current decade.  Yet, the effects of various systemic crises, the extraordinary economic downturn, and the government’s responses to same, have advanced the turning of Social Security funding from being in net surplus, to net deficit, by several years, to the present day. 

Federal Reserve and government responses to those crises also have destroyed global confidence in the U.S. dollar and otherwise have rapidly accelerated the pace of movement towards a hyperinflation crisis in the United States. 

Conceivably, massive and fiscally painful action now by the federal government to restore and maintain long-range U.S. government solvency still could avoid the looming dollar collapse, but the political will to do so does not exist among those who control the federal government, at present.  That has been evident in actions by both the White House and Congress in the last six months.  

The printing presses already are running, and the Fed has been working actively to debase the U.S. dollar, effectively funding fully net U.S. Treasury debt issuance to the public during QE2.  Global rejection of the U.S. dollar and criticism of U.S. government fiscal actions and Federal Reserve monetary policy generally have been accelerating, along with calls for a new world reserve currency.  Heavy selling pressure against the U.S. dollar has been relieved at key times by the markets turning their focus to the euro.  As discussed in Chapter 1—Overview and Executive Summary, though, I contend the euro has been targeted artificially, in an effort to distract global markets from the elephant in the bathtub of sovereign-solvency concerns: the U.S. dollar.  Interventions, jawboning and manipulations of the markets tend to be short-lived in their impact.

Beyond the various actions that have failed to contain the systemic-solvency crisis or to stimulate the economy; the devastating impact of the unexpected continuation of economic weakness on tax revenues and Treasury funding needs; and some form of renewed stimulus package by the Fed aimed at helping banking-system solvency; all have helped set the stage for the ultimate dollar crisis well before the end of this decade.  Risks remain high for the prerequisites for and early stages of the hyperinflation to continue breaking in the months ahead.  The hyperinflation crisis likely cannot be avoided beyond 2014; it already may be beginning to unfold.

It is in this environment of rapid fiscal deterioration and related massive funding needs that the U.S. dollar remains open to a rapid and massive decline, along with a dumping of domestic- and foreign-held U.S. Treasuries.  The Federal Reserve would be forced to monetize further significant sums of Treasury debt, triggering the early phases of a monetary inflation.  Under such circumstances, current multi-trillion dollar deficits would feed rapidly into a vicious, self-feeding cycle of currency debasement and hyperinflation.

With the economy already in depression, hyperinflation kicking in quickly would push the economy into a great depression, since disruptions from uncontained inflation are likely to bring normal commercial activity to a halt.

What happens next is anyone’s speculation.  How long would a hyperinflation last before the government brought its fiscal house into order and established a sound currency?  I would be surprised if the hyperinflation crisis lasted beyond a year or two, since the system is not positioned to handle the crisis well and pressures for rapid resolution would be extremely strong.  All that depends, however, on what evolves out of what otherwise would be highly unstable political, economic, financial and social environments.  Accordingly, the best individuals can do is to take actions to protect themselves and their families, through the worst of foreseeable circumstances, both in terms of personal safety and in terms of the purchasing power of pre-crisis assets. 

The following is an exploration of certain problems that likely would have to be handled in a hyperinflation.

Lack of Physical Cash

The United States, in a hyperinflation, likely would experience the quick disappearance of cash as we know it.  In Zimbabwe, there was the back-up of a well-functioning black market in U.S. dollars, but no such back-up exists in the United States. 

In the last year, Congressman Ron Paul introduced legislation that would make gold a legal currency, directly convertible and exchangeable at market rates with Federal Reserve notes, and with no tax consequences.  If such a system were in place, that would provide a back-up system that conceivably would do much to mitigate the severe economic damage that otherwise would occur in the early stages of a U.S. hyperinflation.

Shy of a back-up system, and shy of the rapid introduction of a new currency and/or the highly problematic adaptation of the current electronic commerce system to new pricing realities, a barter system is the most likely circumstance to evolve for regular commerce.  Such would make much of the current electronic commerce system useless and add to what would become an ongoing economic implosion.  It also could take a number of months to become reasonably functional.

Some years back, I happened to be in San Francisco, having dinner with a former regional Federal Reserve Bank president and the chief economist for a large Midwestern bank.  Market rumors that day had been that there was a run on a major bank in the City by the Bay.  So I queried the regional Fed president as to what would be happening if the rumors were true.

He had had some personal experience with a run on banks in his region and explained how the Fed had a special team designed to handle such a crisis.  The biggest problem he had had was getting adequate cash to the troubled banks to cover depositors, having to fly cash in by helicopters to meet the local cash-flow needs.

The troubled bank in San Francisco, however, was much larger than the example cited, and the former Fed bank president speculated that there was not enough cash in the vaults of the regional Federal Reserve Bank, let alone the entire Federal Reserve System, to cover a true run on deposits at the major bank.

Therein lies an early problem for a system headed into hyperinflation: adequate currency.  Where the Fed may hold roughly $185 billion in currency outside of roughly $60 billion in commercial bank vault cash, the bulk of roughly $1.0 trillion in currency outside the banks is not in the United States.  Back in 2000, the Fed estimated that 50% to 70% of U.S. dollar cash was outside the system.  That number probably is higher today, with perhaps as less than $300 billion in physical cash in circulation in the United States, or roughly 2% of M3.  The rest of the dollars are used elsewhere in the world as a store of wealth, or as an alternate currency, free of the woes of unstable domestic financial conditions.  Those conditions would change severely in the event of a U.S. hyperinflation.

Given the extremely rapid debasement of the larger denomination notes, with limited physical cash in the system, existing currency would become worth more as kindling for a fire than as currency, and would disappear quickly as a hyperinflation broke.

For the system to continue functioning in anything close to a normal manner, the government would have to produce quickly an extraordinary amount of new cash, and electronic commerce would have to be able to adjust to rapidly changing prices.

In terms of cash, new bills of much higher denominations would be needed, but production lead time is a problem.  Conspiracy theories of recent years have suggested the U.S. Government already has printed a new currency of red-colored bills, intended for some dual internal and external U.S. dollar system.  If something like that indeed were the case, then there might be a store of “new dollars” that could be released at a 1-to-1,000,000 ratio, or whatever ratio was needed to make the new currency meaningful, but such would not resolve any long-term problems—as seen in the multiple Zimbabwe devaluations—unless it was part of an overall restructuring of the global currency system, and unless the U.S. government first put its fiscal house in order.

From a practical standpoint, however, currency would disappear, at least for a period of time in the early period of a hyperinflation.

Possible Short-Term Electronic Relief for Individuals

For those who have foreign-currency denominated bank accounts outside the United States, something along the lines of a debit or credit card against that account—let’s say a Swiss franc account—could help, in theory.  In the U.S., one could buy $100,000 worth of groceries with the credit card, and 50 Swiss francs would be deducted overnight from the account in Zurich, based on the then-current exchange rate.  Such presumes, though, the ongoing functioning of a system in the U.S. that could handle the transaction.

Where the vast bulk of today’s money is not physical, but electronic, however, chances of the system adapting there are virtually nil.  Think of the time, work and effort that went into preparing computer systems for Y2K, or even problems with the recent early shift to daylight savings time.  Systems would have to be adjusted for variable, rather than fixed pricing, credit card lines would need to be expanded daily, the number of digits used in tallying dollar-denominated transactions would need to be expanded sharply.  I have had assurances from some in the computer field, though, that a number of businesses have accounting software that can handle any number of digits.

From a practical standpoint, however, the electronic quasi-cashless society of today likely also would shut down early in a hyperinflation.  Unfortunately, this circumstance rapidly would exacerbate an ongoing economic collapse.  

Barter System

With standard currency and electronic payment systems non-functional, commerce quickly would devolve into black markets for goods and services and a barter system.  Gold and silver both are likely to retain real value and would be exchangeable for goods and services.  Silver would help provide smaller change for less costly transactions.  One individual indicated to me that he had found airline bottles of high-quality scotch to be ideal small change in a hyperinflationary environment.

Other items that would be highly barterable would include full bottles of liquor or wine, or canned goods, for example.  Similar items that have a long shelf life can be stocked in advance of the problem, and otherwise would be consumable if the terrible inflation never came.  Separately, individuals, such as doctors and carpenters, who provide broadly useable services, already have services to barter.

A note of caution was raised once by one of my old economics professors, who had spent part of his childhood living in a barter economy.  He told a story of how his father had traded a shirt for a can of sardines.  The father decided to open the can and eat the sardines, but he found the sardines had gone bad.  Nonetheless, the canned sardines had taken on a monetary value.

Howard J. Ruff, who has been writing about these problems and issues since Nixon closed the gold window, rightly argued that it would take some time for a barter system to be established, and suggests that individuals should build up a six-month store of goods to cover themselves and their families in the difficult times.  Such is within the scope of normal disaster planning in some areas of the country (for example, I sit almost on top of the Hayward Fault).  Stories out of the great Japanese earthquake just reinforce those common-sense principles.

Financial Hedges and Investments

During these times, safety and liquidity remain key concerns for investments, as investors look to preserve their assets and wealth through what likely are going to be the most difficult of times.  Those who can preserve their wealth and maintain liquidity will have the ability to take advantage of extraordinary investment opportunities during and after the crises.

The nature of what lies beyond the onset of the hyperinflation cannot be predicted by anyone with much confidence, given the extreme systemic and economic disorder and political instability that likely would follow.  Any number of outcomes is possible, and the following comments reflect concepts that should offer some asset protection given the reality of a hyperinflation, or where certain behavior can be anticipated.  Beyond that point, whether there are functioning stock markets or financial institutions, or how society, the economy and government would function are open questions.  I’m an economist, not an investment advisor.  Individuals simply have to use their own common sense in preparing for and handling whatever may arise. 

Gold and Silver.  In a hyperinflation, holding physical gold and silver would be primary hedges for maintaining the purchasing power of assets.  The precious metals would retain real value and also be portable in the event of possible civil turmoil.  Sovereign coins have the greatest liquidity.  At some point, the failure of the world’s primary reserve currency will lead to the structuring of a new global currency system.  I would not be surprised to find gold or silver as part of the new system, structured in there in an effort to help sell a new non-fiat currency system to the public.

Real Estate.  Real estate also would provide a basic long-range inflation hedge, but it lacks the portability and liquidity of gold.  That could become an issue if the political environment shifted so radically that ownership of private property became impossible.

Allowing for periods of possible illiquidity, over the long-term, real estate in general should tend to retain much of the purchasing of the dollars invested into it.  Depending on location and function, agricultural, residential and commercial real estate could appreciate relative to each other in that sequence through a hyperinflation, but nothing is set.  As before, individual common sense has to be applied to particular circumstances.

Currencies.  Having some funds invested offshore—outside of the U.S. dollar—would be a plus in circumstances where the government might impose currency or capital controls.  I still look at the Swiss franc, the Canadian dollar and the Australian dollar as currencies likely to maintain their purchasing power against the U.S. dollar.  Any suggestions here in terms of currencies, gold and silver, etc. are for holding same over the long term.  Extreme near-term price volatility remains a risk in most markets.  The current intervention by the Swiss National Bank to provide a quasi-fixed exchange rate versus the euro, effectively propping both the euro and the U.S. dollar, should prove to be short-lived.

Taking on Debt.  Inflation is supposed to be the debtor’s friend, where debtors, like the U.S. government, end up paying off their obligations in cheap dollars.  A note of caution is offered here.  The current circumstances are extraordinary.  Borrowers should consider their ability to carry debt through extremely difficult economic times, including possible loss of employment, etc., before high inflation might kick in.  Consider, too, the U.S. government recently has intervened in altering terms and conditions of mortgages.  Could a radical political change end up recasting the terms of personal obligations?

Bonds.  If inflation increases, so too should bond yields.  Yields would continue to rise in a situation with rising inflation.  That would reduce the value of bonds already held at lower yields.

TIPS.  The U.S. Treasury offers securities where yields and principal get adjusted regularly for the rate of inflation.  In a hyperinflation, price changes can be so rapid that the principal and/or yield adjustment would lag enough so as to make the adjustments worthless.  The reporting lag in calculating the adjusting CPI index—if it even could be calculated—still would wipe out investors, unless the Treasury became particularly creative and began benchmarking to spot gold or such, but nothing like that is in place.

As to the potential rapidity of price change, consider some anecdotal evidence.  One story out of Weimar Germany involved buying an expensive bottle of wine for dinner.  The empty bottle was worth more as scrap glass the next morning than it had been worth as a full bottle of wine the night before.  Another story involved negotiating the price and paying for a meal, before sitting down, as the price of the meal would be higher by the time it was finished.

 

Graph 39: Year-End DJIA, Current versus Constant Dollar

Graph 40: Log-Based, Year-End DJIA, Current versus Constant Dollar

Equities.  While equities do provide something of a traditional inflation hedge—revenues and profits get expressed in current dollars—they also tend to reflect underlying economic and political fundamentals.  I still look for U.S. stocks to take an ultimate 90% hit, peak-to-trough, net of inflation, during this period.  Where all stocks are tied to a certain extent to the broad market—to the way investors are valuing equities—such a large hit on the broad market would tend to have a dampening effect on nearly all equity prices, irrespective of the quality of a given company or a given industry.

The preceding graphs show the year-end Dow Jones Industrial Average (DJIA) in current terms, as well as adjusted for the CPI-U and the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation.  While stocks may rally based on high inflation, in inflation-adjusted terms, a bear market remains a good shot.  An early-hyperinflation DJIA at 100,000 could be worth 1,500 in today’s terms.

Possible Official Actions and Responses/External Risks

As consumer prices begin to spike, as the Fed moves to accommodate funding needs for ever-exploding federal fiscal shortfalls, and as the U.S. dollar comes under ever-heavier global selling pressures—all at high risk in the coming months—the federal government and the Federal Reserve could react with a variety of measures that could delay the hyperinflation’s onset for brief periods.  Those possible actions, though, would not alter the hyperinflation outlook fundamentally or meaningfully.  Potential official responses or external events include, but are not limited to:

Currency and Other Market Interventions.  The U.S. Treasury can have the New York Federal Reserve Bank intervene in the currency markets in support of the dollar.  Even when coordinated with other central banks, intervention usually is counter to fundamental pressures, and does nothing to turn a currency beyond the period of intervention.  Intervention becomes expensive and usually fails in a short period of time.  Unless underlying fundamentals are changed at the same time (i.e. interest rates are raised against the rest of the world), supportive intervention provides a selling opportunity for those looking to dump dollars.  At present, the Swiss National Bank has been intervening and artificially propping both the euro and U.S. dollar.

Intervention often is preceded by jawboning, which usually fails even faster than the intervention.

Then there is the President’s Working Group on Financial Markets (aka the “Plunge Protection Team”), which has been directed to do what it has to do in order to keep financial markets orderly.  Actions here, however, usually have been worked through what formerly were investment banks, and are short-lived in impact, as with the currency interventions.  Action here appears to have been taken in advance of S&P’s downgrade of U.S. Treasuries. 

Also, as argued earlier, someone has been focusing market concerns on the euro as a foil for distracting from U.S. dollar problems.

Wage and Price Controls.  The federal government can freeze wages and prices or limit the pace of increase in same, but such tends to distort economic activity, creating product shortages and black markets.  Fundamental inflation pressures are not relieved.

Nationalization of the Banking System.  One “solution” to ongoing and likely deepening systemic insolvency within the banking system would be a nationalization of the banks by the U.S. government.  Such likely would accelerate dollar debasement and the onset of the hyperinflation, but it most certainly would be fought by the banking system and the Federal Reserve.

Restricted Capital Flows.  The federal government can impose restrictions on capital outflows from the United States, impairing the ability of those in the United States to seek financial safe-haven elsewhere.  This likely would exacerbate a global dollar panic. 

Release of Strategic Petroleum Reserves.  Administrations irregularly have tapped U.S. strategic oil reserves in order to help provide relief from rising oil or gasoline prices.  Effects from those actions usually have been temporary, and usually have been short-sighted from a supply standpoint, given the political problems still festering in the Middle East and North Africa.  Oil price problems increasingly will be difficult to contain when they are driven by weakness in the U.S. dollar

Balanced-Budget Effort.  The government could move to balance its fiscal condition, to restore long-range fiscal solvency.  With those currently controlling the U.S. government demonstrating a lack of political will to address the serious issues, any budget deals in the near-term likely would be dominated by accounting gimmicks stretched over many years.  With limited actual impact on both near- and long-term fiscal solvency, such deals likely would do more damage than good to global confidence in the U.S. dollar.

Return to Gold Standard.  Suggestions have been floated as to returning the U.S. dollar to full gold backing.  While something like that is likely—probably a necessity—in the aftermath of the hyperinflation ahead, the problem (perhaps the desired effect) is that the gold standard would restrict the government’s deficit spending.  As such, in order for the new system to work, the government first would have to balance its GAAP-based spending—which I contend is not politically feasible at present.  Unless fiscal circumstances are in balance, a new gold-based system would see continuous devaluations of the dollar against gold, as unsupportable money was created.  On the other hand, if fiscal conditions were in balance, returning to a gold standard likely would not be under serious consideration at present. 

Government Seizure of Privately Held Gold.  A question commonly raised by subscribers is the potential for the federal government to seize privately held gold, today, as it did back in 1933, when President Franklin Roosevelt abandoned the domestic gold standard.  While there is little the federal government might do that would be too surprising in the current environment, seizure of privately-held gold most likely would be tied to some reform of the monetary system, not just as an action aimed at punishing gold investors.

Back in 1933, the use of gold continued for the settlement of international accounts between sovereign states, and the U.S. government’s needs under that circumstance were used as an excuse for the seizure of the public’s gold holdings.  While there were some exceptions to the seizure, such as coin collections and jewelry, U.S. investors ended up shifting funds into gold stocks as surrogates for the precious metal.

Private U.S. ownership of physical gold became legal, again, after President Richard Nixon closed the gold window on international settlements in 1971.  The shift in private-gold-ownership policy, then, also was tied to the international monetary system’s backing, or lack of same, in gold. 

Meaningful reform of the global monetary system and creation of a new U.S. currency, of whatever form, most likely would be post-hyperinflation events. 

Major Natural Disasters.  The catastrophic earthquake in Japan is a reminder of unpredictably of the natural disasters that can befall a nation.  Physical damages are not adjusted in GDP, although insurance payments can have positive impact when the payments are made by a foreign-based insurer or reinsurer.  Disruptions in normal commerce are a GDP negative, but rebuilding activity is a positive.  To the extent the federal government funds rebuilding efforts with deficit spending or pays out unfunded government insurance, such actions add to the deficit and inflation issues.

Military Action.  Beyond their horrors, wars historically have roots in economic problems, and they usually have the effect of spiking economic activity and inflation, as well as distracting public attention from other concerns.  Orders for military goods at the outbreak of World War II in Europe, for example, helped to pull the United States out of the Great Depression.  

Today, defense accounts for just six-percent of durable goods orders in the consumer-driven U.S. economy.  A major new military conflict—beyond conflicts already impacting U.S. economic activity and fiscal planning—might provide the economy with some boost, but that would be at the expense of an offsetting further sharp deterioration in fiscal conditions and inflation prospects. 

Some production gains also might be problematic, where the United States has lost significant manufacturing capacity to offshore competition.  When the big gun on the U.S.S. Iowa exploded in 1989, the machine tools needed to manufacture a replacement gun no longer were available in the United States.  They were available, however, in China.  At the extreme, the outbreak of a global conflict of the magnitude of World War II, today, would be at the horrific risk of becoming nuclear. 

Back to the Fed: A New Round of Easing and Other Non-Effective Policies.  The Federal Reserve fairly easily can have negative impact on the economy and inflation, but positive results are not so simple.  The Fed can kill economic activity by shrinking systemic liquidity, and it can increase inflation by “printing” money.  Efforts to stimulate economic growth or to reduce inflation, however, historically have been much more difficult to accomplish.  At present, though, Fed policies perversely have been creating new inflation at the same time that an ongoing systemic liquidity squeeze is intensifying the economic downturn.  Continued efforts to debase the dollar should be successful, but not in stimulating economic activity, only in triggering an accelerating pace of inflation.

Significant efforts to cut back on, or to reverse, the so-called quantitative easing actions are not likely.  The liquidity that the Fed has put into the system has been deemed necessary by the Fed, likely more from the standpoint of helping banking-system liquidity than really expecting the measures would boost economic activity.  As discussed throughout this report, the economic and systemic-solvency crises appear to be worsening, not improving, suggesting more, not less, quantitative easing is likely.

Volcker-Like Inflation Containment.  Back in the oil-based inflation of the late-1970s, early-1980s, Federal Reserve Chairman Paul Volcker earned a reputation as an effective inflation fighter.  What he did was to raise interest rates so high as to drive the economy into the ground, creating one of the worst (double-dip) recessions of the post-World War II era.  He killed economic demand enough so as to offset oil-price distortions, at least partially.  With current economic activity already in severe contraction—even more severe than that of the early-1980s—chances of such a policy being pursued or even having the potential of working, at present, are slim.  

Restraining the Federal Reserve.  Efforts in Congress to restrain government spending could contain federal spending activity when the system next moves to the brink of collapse.  As long as the Federal Reserve remains independent, however, it still likely would do whatever it had to in order to prevent systemic collapse into a deflationary great depression.  If the Fed were reined-in, then whether the system ended in fire or ice, or somehow bought new life with a miraculous political shift that allowed for fiscal balance, would be in the hands of the President and Congress.

Closing Comments—Other Issues

Political Considerations

What lies ahead for the economy and inflation will have significant impact on the U.S. political process, as economic woes did on the 2010 mid-term election.  Historically, the concerns of the electorate have been dominated by pocketbook issues.  Prior to gimmicked methodologies making the reporting of disposable personal income largely meaningless, that measure was an excellent predictor of presidential elections.

In every presidential race since 1908, in which consistent, real (inflation-adjusted) annual disposable income growth was above 3.3%, the incumbent party holding the White House won every time. When income growth was below 3.3%, the incumbent party lost every time.  Again, with redefinitions to the national income accounts in the last two decades, a consistent measure of disposable income as reported by the government has disappeared.  Yet, even with the upside biases in official reporting, third-quarter 2011 annual growth in real disposable income was 0.1%, well below the traditional 3.3% limit.  This cannot be a happy prospect for the incumbent party holding the White House in 2012.

As was suggested would be the case in the 2008 hyperinflation report, the economy contributed to the Republicans losing the White House in 2008.  In the 2010 report, it was suggested that, “Present economic conditions are bleak enough to impair re-election prospects severely for incumbents in the 2010 mid-term election.”

As noted in the 2011 report, “A wide variety of possibilities would follow or coincide politically with a hyperinflationary great depression, but the political status quo likely would not continue.  Times would be financially painful enough to encourage the development of a third party that could move the Republicans or Democrats to third-party status in the 2012 presidential and congressional elections.”

That circumstance remains true, given current and likely deteriorating economic conditions, irrespective of the hyperinflation’s timing. 

Where I always endeavor to keep my political persuasions separate from my analyses, for purposes of full disclosure, my background is as a conservative Republican with a libertarian bent.

Common Sense

A U.S. hyperinflationary great depression would be extremely disruptive to the lives, businesses and economic welfare of most individuals.  Such severe economic pain could lead to extreme political change and/or civil unrest. 

What has been discussed here remains well shy of a comprehensive overview of all possible issues, but rather at least has raised some questions and touched upon some likely consequences.  No one can figure out better than you the peculiarities of this circumstance and how you, your family and/or your business might be affected and best be protected.  Using common sense remains the best advice I can give.

These matters will continue to be expanded upon in the SGS regular Commentaries and Special Commentaries, as circumstances and subscriber interests dictate.  As always, I extend by deep thanks to the various readers who have raised questions and provided ideas, comments and material.  Please feel free to offer your thoughts or raise your questions by e-mail to johnwilliams@shadowstats.com. 

Recommended Further Reading

As mentioned elsewhere in the text, and as recommended to subscribers for years, there is:

Fiat Paper Money, The History and Evolution of Our Currency
by Ralph T. Foster (Privately Published)
2189 Bancroft Way, Berkeley, CA 94704
E-mail: tfdf@pacbell.net

To my knowledge, Ralph Foster’s extraordinary volume is the most comprehensive and informative analysis available on the history of fiat currencies.  Continually updated and expanded, the privately printed book is offered with a novel binding that incorporates authentic worthless fiat currency notes.

No. 413: December CPI, PPI, Production, Housing Starts, Real Retail Sales

Thursday, January 19th, 2012
• Patterns of Slowing Growth Have Re-Emerged
• Inflation from High Oil Prices Still Impacting Broad Economy


• 2011 Average Annual Consumer Inflation: 3.2% (CPI-U), 3.6% (CPI-W), 10.7% (SGS)
• 2011 Average Annual Wholesale Inflation: 6.1% (PPI)
• Perils of Poor-Quality Inflation Data and Bad Assumptions
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 412: December Retail Sales, November Trade Balance

Friday, January 13th, 2012
• Make-or-Break Month for Retailers Was Flat-to-Minus, Both Before and Likely After Adjustment for Inflation
• Worse-Than-Expected Retail Sales and Trade Data Should Dampen 4th-Quarter GDP Growth Outlook
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 411: December Employment and Unemployment

Friday, January 6th, 2012
• Seasonal-Adjustment Problems Spiked Jobs Growth, Seasonal-Adjustment Revisions Artificially Lowered Unemployment Rates
•  December Jobs Reading Remained Well Below Pre-2007 and Pre-2001 Recession Levels
• December Unemployment: 8.5% (U.3), 15.2% (U.6), 22.4% (SGS)
• Money Supply M3 Annual Growth Tops 3.0% for First Time in 28 Months
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

FLASH UPDATE: December Payroll Seasonal-Adjustment Problem

Friday, January 6th, 2012
• Seasonal-Adjustment Problem Inflated December’s 200,000 Payroll Gain by 42,000
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 410: Special Commentary, GAAP-Based 2011 U.S. Financial Data

Wednesday, December 28th, 2011
• Actual 2011 Federal Deficit Topped $5.0 Trillion
• U.S. Government Debt and Obligations Top $80 Trillion
• Long-Term U.S. Insolvency/Hyperinflation Remain Virtual Certainty
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 409: Revised GDP, November Durable Goods, New Home Sales

Friday, December 23rd, 2011
• GDI Indicates No U.S. Economic Growth in Either Second- or Third-Quarter 2011
• Durable Goods Orders and New Home Sales Show Stagnation
• Treasury Releases 2011 GAAP-Based Financial Report on U.S. Government
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 408: November Housing Starts and Existing Home Sales

Wednesday, December 21st, 2011
• 3.5 Million Home Sales Just Disappeared
• Housing Starts Still Bottom Bouncing
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 407: November CPI, PPI, Real Retail Sales Industrial Production

Friday, December 16th, 2011


• Consumer Financial Distress Hampered Retail Sales and Production
• Nonsensical Hype Over Regularly Mis-Adjusted Jobless Claims
• High Oil Prices Still Inflating Broad Economy
• November’s Annual Inflation: 3.4% (CPI-U), 3.8% (CPI-W), 11.0% (SGS)
• Gold Remains the Ultimate Hedge
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 406: November Retail Sales, Payroll Tax Receipts

Tuesday, December 13th, 2011
• Faltering Tax Receipts Show Consumer Income Taking A New Hit
• November Retail Sales Change Not Meaningful
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 405: October Trade Balance

Friday, December 9th, 2011
• October Trade Deficit Suggests Positive Contribution to Fourth-Quarter GDP
• Nonmonetary Gold Trade Patterns Are Not Easily Tied to Gold Price Variations
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 404: Special Notice

Monday, December 5th, 2011
• Treasury Delays Release of Government’s GAAP-Based Financial Statements Until Christmas Eve
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 403: Labor Data, Consumer Confidence, M3, Systemic-Solvency and Euro Crises

Sunday, December 4th, 2011
• There Is No Sudden Economic Recovery, Just Bad-Quality Numbers and Deteriorating Labor Conditions
• Latest Jobs Level Still Well Below Pre-2007 and Pre-2001 Recession Levels
• November Unemployment: 8.6% (U.3), 15.6% (U.6), 22.6% (SGS)
• Money Supply M3 Annual Growth at 2.7% in November
• Potential Euro Disintegration Is Nothing Like the Looming Dollar Collapse
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

NOTICE: Commentary No. 403 to be published December 3rd.

Friday, December 2nd, 2011
The Economy Is Not Suddenly Recovering / November M3 up About 2.7%
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 402: GDP Revision, October Durable Goods and Existing Home Sales

Wednesday, November 23rd, 2011
• Headline Gross Domestic Income (GDP Equivalent) Growth Collapsed with Suggestion of 0.8% Contraction for Third-Quarter
• Slowing Annual Growth in Durable Goods Orders
• Existing Home Sales Bottom-Bounce
• Once Again, U.S. Government Signals Lack of Fiscal Concerns
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 401: Underlying Economic Reality, October Housing Starts

Thursday, November 17th, 2011


• Housing Starts Continued Three-Year Pattern of Bottom-Bouncing
• Economic Recovery Never Happened; Hyped Gains Were Based on Gimmicked Inflation Adjustments
• Current Downturn Already Exceeds Duration of Great Depression’s First Down-Leg
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 400: Budget Deficit Reality, October CPI, Industrial Production

Wednesday, November 16th, 2011
• GAAP-Based 2011 Federal Deficit Likely Within Five- to Seven-Trillion Dollar Range
• Effects of High Oil Prices Still Spreading in Broad Economy
• October’s Annual Inflation: 3.5% (CPI-U), 3.9% (CPI-W), 11.1% (SGS)
• Real Retail Sales and Industrial Production Gained in October But the Series Share Inflation-Adjustment Issues
The content you have asked to look at is currently only available to SGS subscribers.


You are most welcome to view the publicly available background articles on government statistics and other material on the Home and Archives pages. The Archives contain past subscription-only material which are now open to the public.
If you are an SGS subscriber, then simply login to view this article.
 

Lost your password?
Click here to learn about subscription offers

No. 399: October Retail Sales, PPI

Tuesday, November 15th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 399
October Retail Sales, PPI

November 15, 2011

__________

 

Retail Sales Gain Not Statistically Meaningful

PPI Inflation Showed High Oil Price Effects
Still Spreading in Broad Economy

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for tomorrow, Wednesday, November 16th, covering October CPI and industrial production.  That will be followed by a Commentary on the 17th covering October housing starts.  The November 16th and 17th issues also will include Special Commentaries, discussing respectively the actual U.S. budget deficit and underlying U.S. economic reality.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  With two pending Special Commentaries, tomorrow (November 16th) on U.S. budget deficit reality, and November 17th on underlying economic reality, today’s comments are limited.   The general outlooks for the economy, inflation and for systemic solvency are not changed from those discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) and in recent Hyperinflation Watch sections.  The Hyperinflation Watch section will be published next and fully updated in the November 17th Special Commentary.

October Retail Sales.  The 0.5% headline monthly gain in October retail sales was not statistically meaningful, as has been the case in five of the last six months.  Seasonal-adjustment distortions also continue, with the severe downturn having warped regular patterns of seasonal activity.  There have been no indications of an improvement in consumer liquidity conditions that could support a sustainable rebound in consumer spending.  That said, monthly retail sales likely will remain in positive territory, when deflated by the October CPI-U (due for releases tomorrow, November 17th). 

October Producer Price Index (PPI).  Headline October PPI inflation declined by 0.3% for the month, reflecting a short-lived monthly decline in oil prices.  Having jumped by 0.8% for the month in September, this series tends to be highly volatile.

Unadjusted annual inflation in finished goods declined from 6.9% in September to 5.9% in October.  Yet, reflecting the continued spread of the effects of higher oil prices into the broad economy, annual “core” inflation—net of food and energy—rose from 2.5% in September to 2.8% in October.

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

RETAIL SALES (October 2011)

October Retail Sales Gain Not Statistically Meaningful, Distortions Continued from Poor-Quality Seasonal Adjustments.  As has been the case in five of the last six months, even before adjustment for inflation, the monthly change in October retail sales was not statistically meaningful.  Further, concurrent seasonal factor issues, and broader distortions seen otherwise in current seasonal factors, as discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), continued.  The stability of the seasonal-adjustment process has been disrupted severely by the unprecedented depth and length of the current economic downturn in the post-World War II era (the period of modern economic reporting).

As noted recent Commentaries, monthly changes reported in series such as payroll employment and new orders for durable goods—in addition to the retail sales series—remain within the realm of statistical meaninglessness, which leave the markets effectively flying blind as to actual underlying economic activity.  In such circumstances, looking at broad underlying fundamentals may be useful.  As discussed in Commentary No. 394 and Commentary No. 398, consumer income and credit remain structurally impaired, continuing to signal economic deterioration, not recovery.  The broad economy remains in serious trouble, as will be discussed anew in the November 17th Special Commentary.

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Retail SalesToday’s (November 15th) report on October 2011 retail sales—issued by the Census Bureau—indicated a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.54% (up by 0.55% before prior-period revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval).  October’s increase was on top of a revised 1.14% (previously 1.13%) monthly increase in September.

On a year-to-year basis, October 2011 retail sales were reported up by 7.25%, a somewhat slower pace than seen in the revised year-to-year September 2011 gain of 7.95% (previously 7.94%).    

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Retail Sales.  Details on real retail sales for October will be published in tomorrow’s November 16th Commentary, along with details on the October 2011 CPI-U release.  While October CPI-U inflation likely will flat-to-positive (see Week Ahead), the monthly gain should not top the 0.5% nominal growth reported in monthly sales.  As a result, real retail sales for October most likely will show a month-to-month gain, although any gain still will not be statistically meaningful.

Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, “core” retail sales—consistent with the Federal Reserve’s preference for ignoring food and energy prices when “core” inflation is lower than full inflation—are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: October 2011 versus September 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues—was up by 0.54%, versus an official gain of 0.54%.

Version II: October 2011 versus September 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gas stations—was up by 0.45%, versus an official gain of 0.54%.

 

PRODUCER PRICE INDEX—PPI (October 2011)

Monthly Wholesale Inflation Fell by 0.3% in October, Up 5.9% Year-to-Year.  As reported today, November 15th, by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) for October declined by 0.3% (also down by 0.3% unadjusted) month-to-month, following a month-to-month seasonally-adjusted gain of 0.8% (up by 0.5% unadjusted) in September.  October’s monthly inflation drop primarily reflected a short-lived dip in monthly oil and gasoline prices.

Unadjusted and year-to-year, October 2011’s PPI inflation eased to 5.9% from 6.9% in September.  The relatively high level of annual PPI inflation generally has reflected ongoing impact of the Fed’s dollar-debasement policies, not surging economic demand.  Annual changes now are going against the year-ago period when Mr. Bernanke was jawboning QE2 and meeting with some early success in debasing the U.S. Dollar. 

October finished goods inflation increasingly reflected ongoing inflation pressures from the spreading impact of higher oil prices outside the energy sector.  The “core” finished goods inflation—net of food and energy inflation—rose to 2.8% year-to-year (unadjusted) in October from 2.5% in September.

Separately, on a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted October 2011 intermediate goods prices fell by 1.1%, versus a gain of 0.6% in September, with October crude goods prices down by 2.5%, following a 2.8% increase in September.  Year-to-year inflation in unadjusted October intermediate goods was 8.3%, versus 10.5% in September, with October’s annual inflation in crude goods at 12.6%, versus September’s 20.9% pace.

 

Week Ahead.  Although still not widely recognized, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and an escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Consumer Price Index—CPI (October 2011).  The October CPI is scheduled for release on Wednesday, November 16th.  Whatever increase is seen in month-to-month October consumer inflation likely will be from areas other than energy.  Gasoline prices still get something of a seasonal-adjustment boost in October, but not enough to turn the unadjusted 4.4% decline in October’s monthly gasoline prices (per Department of Energy) to the plus side in the CPI.  Nonetheless, spreading systemic inflation should add upside risk to this month’s reporting versus what generally have been published as flat consensus estimates.

Year-to-year total CPI-U inflation would increase or decrease in October’s reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.25% gain in the adjusted monthly level reported for October 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual unadjusted inflation rate for October 2011, the difference in October’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from September 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 3.87%.  For example, if the monthly October CPI-U were unchanged, the annual inflation rate would ease back to roughly 3.6%.

Industrial Production (October 2011).  The release of October industrial production is scheduled for Wednesday, November 16th, and should be flat-to-minus.  That would be weaker than published consensus estimates of the headline number at around a 0.4% monthly gain.

Residential Construction (October 2011).  The release of October housing starts on Thursday, November 17th, should show a continued downside bottom-bouncing trend.  Any upside surprise likely would not be statistically meaningful.

 

__________

No. 398: September Trade Deficit

Thursday, November 10th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 398
September Trade Deficit

November 10, 2011

__________

 

September Trade Data Suggest
Minimal Upside Contribution to Pending GDP Revision

U.S. Fiscal Disaster Surpasses Any Problems Seen With Major Trading Partners

Pending Special Commentaries

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Tuesday, November 15th, covering October retail sales and PPI.  That will be followed by Commentaries on the 16th and 17th covering, respectively, October CPI and industrial production, and October housing starts.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  Wild market gyrations around the latest news out of the euro-area simply highlight extreme instability and danger present in the current global and domestic financial systems and the rapid explosion of systemic solvency issues.  The continued faltering of broad U.S. economic activity is in the process of intensifying.  These factors, in combination, promise continued market instabilities, and likely extraordinary financial and fiscal measures by central banks and governments.  New action most likely will be forthcoming from the Federal Reserve and even from the extremely-politicized Congress and White House, if the politicians get scared enough.  The general outlook is not changed from what has been discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) and in recent and the current Hyperinflation Watch section, but a number of issues are likely to come to a head in the next several months, not the least of which is what will come out of the Congressional Super Committee that is in the process purportedly of making minimal cuts to the federal budget deficit.

Special Commentaries—Revisiting and Reviewing the Systemic Solvency and Economic Crises. Today’s Commentary is relatively brief, as result of a week light in major economic releases.  In contrast, next week’s calendar provides for five major October economic releases in three Commentaries, including what are planned as two Special Commentaries, one on Wednesday, November 16th, that will address the current GAAP-deficit of the United States and ways it could be addressed; and one on Thursday, November 17th, addressing underlying U.S. economic reality and what would have to happen to return to economic growth.  The story has not changed, but the issues and systemic limitations are worth revisiting.

Subsequent to next week’s Special Commentaries, and following the release of the federal government’s GAAP-based (using generally accepted accounting principles) financial statements for fiscal 2011 (scheduled for publication on December 15th), I plan to publish a fully revamped Hyperinflation Report.

September Trade Deficit.  The shortfall in September U.S. trade narrowed from August’s estimate, which was reduced in revision.  With three months of reporting now in hand, the third-quarter trade deficit is improved slightly from what had been estimated by the Bureau of Economic Analysis for the initial third-quarter GDP reporting.  Accordingly, the net export account could offer a small, positive contribution to the pending November 22nd first revision of third-quarter GDP.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—U.S. Issues Should Trump Euro Concerns.  As will be discussed in next week’s Special Commentaries, the 2011 GAAP-based U.S. deficit likely fell in the $5-trillion to $7-trillion range, a circumstance that is beyond control and appears to be uncontainable in the current political circumstance.  With the economy in ongoing crisis, with no prospect of a turnaround in the foreseeable future, the implications for the federal budget deficit, U.S. Treasury funding needs and prospective banking-system stability, in the year and years ahead, are horrendous.  The current, relatively happy forecasts for each of those areas are based on assumptions of solid economic growth going forward.  That growth simply will not be forthcoming. 

The sovereign solvency crisis in the United States easily could move to the center of global financial-market attention in the weeks ahead, depending on how the federal deficit reduction negotiations evolve.   The systemic solvency crisis that continues to unfold in the U.S. is of a relative magnitude that eclipses the rolling financial crises in the euro area.

Repeated from the prior Commentaries, there are no happy solutions available here to remedy the crises, only tools—devil’s choices—for the Fed and the U.S. government to buy a little extra time.  From the Fed’s standpoint, keeping the banking system afloat remains its primary concern, although needs for economic growth and contained inflation will be given as the rationale behind any overt change in policy.  The ultimate cost in propping the system, however, remains inflation.  The economic and systemic-solvency crises and the broad inflation and economic issues detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) and in recent Commentaries, continue to unfold with outlooks that remain unchanged.

The root source of current global systemic instabilities largely has been the financially-dominant United States, and it is against the U.S. dollar that the global markets ultimately should turn, massively.  The Fed and the U.S. Treasury likely will do whatever has to be done to prevent crises in the euro-area from triggering a systemic collapse in the United States.  Accordingly, it is not from a euro-related crisis, but rather from within the U.S. financial system and financial-authority actions that an eventual U.S. systemic failure likely will be triggered, seen initially in a rapidly accelerating pace of domestic inflation—ultimately hyperinflation.

The financial markets still are roiled by deepening crises of confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the long-term outlook for U.S. financial, economic, systemic and political instability.  For those living in a U.S. dollar-denominated world, regardless of any ongoing near-term extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar—in either direction—versus the stronger major currencies and gold, the stronger currencies and precious metals remain the fundamental hedges against what lies ahead.

Massive, fundamental dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated assets may start at anytime, with little or no further warning.  With a U.S. government unwilling to balance or even to address its uncontainable fiscal condition; with the federal government and Federal Reserve standing ready to prevent a systemic collapse, so long as it is possible to print, spend, loan or guarantee whatever money is needed; with the U.S. dollar at increasing risk of losing its global reserve currency status; much higher inflation lies ahead, in a circumstance that rapidly could evolve into hyperinflation.

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

TRADE BALANCE (September 2011)

September Trade Data Suggest Small Upside Contribution to GDP Revision.  The September trade deficit narrowed slightly versus the August trade shortfall, which also narrowed in revision versus its initial reporting.  Adjusted for inflation, the resulting annualized third-quarter deficit showed a minimal improvement against what had been suggested for the third-quarter based on July and August reporting.  Where the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) initially estimated the third-quarter GDP net-exports account using just two months of data, today’s reporting suggested a small positive contribution to the revision of third-quarter GDP due on November 22nd.  The small improvement in the revised trade numbers is on top of an already-positive contribution made to the existing GDP estimate from the previously estimated third-quarter trade deficit.  Going forward, though, underlying fundamentals still suggest an ongoing deterioration in the U.S. trade balance.

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Trade Deficit.  The BEA and the Census Bureau reported today (November 10th) that the nominal, seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services for September 2011 narrowed to $43.1 billion from a revised $44.9 billion (previously $45.6 billion) in August.  The September 2011 deficit also was slightly smaller than the $44.0 billion reported for September 2010.

Heavy distortions appear to be playing out in seasonal adjustments, much as has been seen in other economic releases, such as retail sales, where the headline number reflects month-to-month change.  As has been discussed frequently (see the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) for example), the extraordinary length and depth of the business downturn have disrupted regular seasonality patterns.  Accordingly, the markets should not be relying heavily on the accuracy of monthly headline data, at present.

Against the revised August data, the reported seasonally-adjusted September trade balance showed gains in both exports and imports, with the pace of increase in exports rising faster than for imports.  That pattern was true for the reporting of the trade flow in goods, although the adjusted services sector showed a declining surplus, with lower exports and higher imports.  Services data are inadequate for the BEA and Census to report that heavily gimmicked series with separate seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted estimates. 

For the goods sector, though, the not-seasonally-adjusted numbers also showed that exports rose, but the import numbers fell, reflecting both a decline in oil prices and in physical oil import volume.  Specifically, for the month of September 2011, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil eased to $101.02 per barrel, down from $102.62 in August, but up from $72.33 in September 2010.  In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, September 2011 volume averaged 9.338 million barrels per day, down from 9.757 million in August 2011, and down from 9.754 million in September 2010.  After seasonal adjustment, oil imports gained slightly. 

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit.  Adjusted for seasonal factors and net of oil price swings and other inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the reported September merchandise trade deficit came in at $45.4 billion, narrowed from a revised $46.3 (previously $47.0) billion in August.

With full initial reporting now in place for third-quarter 2011, the annualized trade deficit for third-quarter 2011 is $550.1 billion (previously estimated at $557.6 billion based on reporting of the first two months of the quarter), and against a revised annualized real second-quarter 2011 merchandise deficit of $566.1 billion (previously $567.4 billion).  The new data could contribute a small upside revision to the second estimate of third-quarter GDP, due for publication on November 22nd.

 

Week Ahead.  Although still not widely recognized, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and an escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Retail Sales (October 2011).  October retail sales are scheduled for release on Tuesday, November 15th, with inflation-adjusted details available on November 16th, in conjunction with November’s consumer inflation data.  Given the underlying broad weakness in consumer financial conditions and confidence, and the unstable nature of concurrent seasonal-factor adjustments for this series, a downside surprise is a fair bet against what likely will be a relatively soft consensus estimate.  Increasingly, reported retail sales gains will reflect nothing more than rising prices, with declining sales volume as measured by physical consumption of goods and services.

Producer Price Index—PPI (October 2011).  The October PPI is scheduled for release on Tuesday, November 15th.  Seasonal adjustments should keep the impact of October oil prices in positive territory (monthly average for Brent down 2.7%, West Texas Intermediate up 0.9%, based on St. Louis Fed data).  With the continued spread of the impact of higher oil costs throughout the U.S. economy, there is some risk of an upside surprise to a likely flat consensus estimate of the otherwise highly volatile series.

Consumer Price Index—CPI (October 2011).  The October CPI is scheduled for release on Wednesday, November 16th.  Whatever increase is seen in month-to-month October consumer inflation likely will be from areas other than energy.  Gasoline prices still get something of a seasonal-adjustment boost in October, but not enough to turn the unadjusted 4.4% decline in monthly gasoline prices in October (per Department of Energy) to the plus side in the CPI.  Nonetheless, spreading systemic inflation should add upside risk to this month’s reporting versus what likely will be a flat-to-minus consensus outlook.

Year-to-year total CPI-U inflation would increase or decrease in October’s reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.25% gain in the adjusted monthly level reported for October 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual unadjusted inflation rate for October 2011, the difference in October’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from September 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 3.87%.  For example, if the monthly October CPI-U were unchanged, the annual inflation rate would ease back to roughly 3.6%.

Industrial Production (October 2011).  The release of October industrial production is scheduled for Wednesday, November 16th, and should be flat-to-minus, net of revisions.  That likely will be weaker than consensus.

Residential Construction (October 2011).  The release of October housing starts on Thursday, November 17th, should show a continued downside bottom-bouncing trend.  Any upside surprise likely would not be statistically meaningful.

 

__________

No. 397: October Employment and Unemployment

Friday, November 4th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 397
October Employment and Unemployment

November 4, 2011

__________

 

Monthly Payroll and Unemployment Changes Were Not Statistically Meaningful

October Payroll Employment Not Only Was 6.5 Million Below the Pre-2007 Recession High, But Also Was 1.0 Million Below the Pre-2001 Recession High

October Unemployment: 9.0% (U.3), 16.2% (U.6), 22.9% (SGS)

Annual Growth in October Money Supply M3 Held at About 2.6%

 

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Thursday, November 10th.  It will cover reporting of the September 2011 trade balance.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  The U.S. economy remains deep in a severe contraction, experiencing a protracted period of bottom-bouncing that followed the sharpest decline in business activity seen since the Great Depression.  Economic series that have shown any marked upside bounce reflect little more than understated inflation used in deflating such series (use of understated inflation results in overstated inflation-adjusted growth) and/or the transient effects of government stimulus efforts.  As discussed in the prior Commentary No. 396, rather than using the heavily biased and politicized GDP numbers for guidance on broad economic activity, series such as payroll employment give a much more stable and meaningful picture of general business activity.  This is despite numerous problems with payroll employment reporting, which are discussed in the appropriate sections.  How can the economy be healthy and expanding when current payrolls are below where they were coming into the 2001 recession?

Contrary to popular hype, employment is a coincident, not a lagging, economic indicator.  Traditionally, it was deemed coincident in the government’s leading, coincident and lagging indicator series, and it is used by the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) to time the monthly onset of a recession.  Employment has been mislabeled as a lagging indicator in the last decade or two, because the NBER called ends to the last two recessions well before those downturns ended.  Those miscalls resulted from evolving methodological understatement of inflation and resulting reporting distortions in various series.

That said, consider that on a seasonally-adjusted basis, nonfarm payrolls for October 2011 stood at 131.516 million.  That was 6.5 million below the pre-2007 recession high of 137.996 million (January 2008).  It also was 1.0 million below the pre-2001 recession high of 132.530 million (February 2001).  The series shows the economic plunge in 2008 and 2009 and the ongoing bottom-bouncing thereafter.  Despite the 192,000 upside benchmark estimated by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) for March 2011, later revisions likely will eliminate the gentle upside slope seen in current reporting.  The small spike in 2010 was due to temporary hiring (and reversal of same) related to conducting the 2010 census.

 

 

Employment and Unemployment (October 2011).  Neither October’s headline 80,000 monthly jobs gain, nor the headline decline in unemployment to 9.0% from September’s 9.1%, were statistically meaningful.  The reported 80,000 employment increase also is more than accounted for by what appears to have be an upside shift in the monthly Birth-Death Model add-factors of 50,000 jobs per month, on top of major job shifting between periods due to the ongoing concurrent seasonal factor distortions.

The headline seasonally-adjusted October U.3 unemployment rate of 9.0% was against 9.1% in September, and U.6 was 16.2% in October versus 16.5% in September.  The SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure was 22.9% in October versus 23.1% in September, declining less than U.6, as more unemployed continued rolling out of the short-term discouraged worker status in U.6 into the long-term discouraged worker status in the SGS estimate.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Economic Woes Threaten Systemic Stability.  With the economy in ongoing crisis and with no prospects of a turnaround in the foreseeable future, the implications for the federal budget deficit, U.S. Treasury funding needs and prospective banking-system stability, in the year and years ahead, are horrendous.  The current, relatively happy forecasts for each of those areas are based on assumptions of solid economic growth going forward.  That growth simply will not be forthcoming.

Money Supply M3 (October 2011).  Bank lending remains impaired and broad money growth is not picking up as it would with a healthy banking system.  Based on roughly three weeks of data, the preliminary estimate of the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate for October 2011 will be published in the Alternate Data section on November 5th.  October M3 is on track to show year-to-year growth of about 2.6%, the same level as in September and still below the official rate of CPI inflation.  These numbers reflect the latest benchmark revisions by the Fed to its money and banking data.  The seasonally-adjusted, month-to-month change estimate for M3 likely will be on the minus-side of unchanged, which would be the first monthly decline since January 2011.  The estimated month-to-month M3 changes, however, remain less reliable than the estimates of annual growth.

A flattening in the relative monthly estimates of annual growth, and slowing month-to month gains, also are likely for the narrower M1 and M2 measures (M2 includes M1, M3 includes M2).  M2 for October is on track to show year-to-year growth of about 9.9%, versus 10.0% in September, with month-to-month growth estimated at roughly 0.3% in October versus 0.5% in September.  The early estimate on M1 for October shows year-to-year growth of roughly 20.6%, the same level as in September, with month-to-month growth estimated at roughly 0.5% in October, versus 1.2% in September.  The relatively stronger annual growth rates in M1 and M2 still reflect the recent shifting of funds out of M3 accounts into M1 and M2 accounts.

Broad Systemic, Economic and Inflation Outlooks Are Unchanged.  The markets remain unstable and highly volatile, with the financial system still vulnerable to potential negative surprises in areas ranging from economic data to domestic and global political instabilities. 

Repeated from the prior Commentaries, there are no happy solutions available here to remedy the crises, only tools—devil’s choices—for the Fed and the U.S. government to buy a little extra time.  From the Fed’s standpoint, keeping the banking system afloat remains its primary concern, although needs for economic growth and contained inflation will be given as the rationale behind any overt change in policy.  The ultimate cost in propping the system, however, remains inflation.  The economic and systemic-solvency crises and the broad inflation and economic issues detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) and in recent Commentaries, continue to unfold with outlooks that remain unchanged.

The root source of current global systemic instabilities largely has been the financially-dominant United States, and it is against the U.S. dollar that the global markets ultimately should turn, massively.  The Fed and the U.S. Treasury likely will do whatever has to be done to prevent crises in the euro-area from triggering a systemic collapse in the United States.  Accordingly, it is not from a euro-related crisis, but rather from within the U.S. financial system and financial-authority actions that an eventual U.S. systemic failure likely will be triggered, seen initially in a rapidly accelerating pace of domestic inflation—ultimately hyperinflation.

The financial markets still are roiled by deepening crises of confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the long-term outlook for U.S. financial, economic, systemic and political instability.  For those living in a U.S. dollar-denominated world, regardless of any ongoing near-term extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar—in either direction—versus the stronger major currencies and gold, the stronger currencies and precious metals remain the fundamental hedges against what lies ahead.

Massive, fundamental dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated assets may start at anytime, with little or no further warning.  With a U.S. government unwilling to balance or even to address its uncontainable fiscal condition; with the federal government and Federal Reserve standing ready to prevent a systemic collapse, so long as it is possible to print, spend, loan or guarantee whatever money is needed; with the U.S. dollar at increasing risk of losing its global reserve currency status; much higher inflation lies ahead, in a circumstance that rapidly could evolve into hyperinflation.

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

EMPLOYMENT AND UNEMPLOYMENT (October 2011)

Constant Recalculation of Payroll Seasonal Factors Is Boosting 2011 Payrolls.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics’ (BLS) practice of using “concurrent” seasonal-factor adjustments artificially shifted previously reported jobs into October 2011 and contributed to boosting the reported monthly gain versus September.  Net of that and an upswing of 50,000 jobs in the adjusted monthly Birth-Death Model add-factor for October, monthly payroll change would have been on the downside of “unchanged,” instead of plus 80,000, but that still would have had a 95% confidence interval around it of plus-or-minus 129,000 jobs.

Heavily distorted seasonal factors, and the plus-or-minus 0.23% confidence interval around the 0.07% easing in the unemployment rate, left the rounded 0.1% headline drop in unemployment as meaningless as the reported 80,000 jobs gain in October.

PAYROLL SURVEY DETAIL.  The BLS reported today (November 4th) a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted October 2011 month-to-month jobs gain of 80,000 (a gain of 182,000 jobs before prior-period revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval).  September payrolls showed a revised 158,000 gain (previously a gain of 103,000), while August’s monthly gain revised to 104,000, versus last month’s estimate of a 57,000 gain.  Monthly changes for July 2011 and before also were revised, but those revisions were not reported by the BLS so as to avoid confusing payroll employment data users.

In terms of year-to-year change, the unadjusted October 2011 growth rate slowed minimally to 1.15% versus the revised 1.23% (previously 1.12%) reported for September, and against 1.11% (previously 1.09%) annual growth reported for August.  Although the graphs of long-term year-to-year unadjusted payroll change had shown a rising trend in annual growth, which primarily reflected the still-protracted bottom-bouncing in the payroll series, that pattern has flattened out in recent months, as shown in the first graph following of the near-term detail in year-to-year change.  These numbers still reflect some short-lived year-to-year distortions as a result of the year-ago hiring surge and full layoffs of temporary census workers.

 

 

 

As shown in the next, longer-term graph (historical detail back to World War II), with the bottom-bouncing of recent years, current annual growth has recovered from the post-World War II record 5.06% decline in August 2009, which was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II (a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945).  Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the August 2009 annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression, yet the current level of employment is far from any recovery.

 

 

The regular graph of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels is shown in the Opening Comments and Executive Summary section.

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Distortions.  As discussed in prior writings (see the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), for example), seasonal-factor estimation for most economic series has been distorted severely by the extreme depth and duration of the economic contraction.  These distortions are exacerbated for payroll employment data based on the BLS’s monthly seasonal-factor re-estimations and lack of full reporting.

Where the BLS recalculates the monthly seasonal factors each month for payroll employment, going back a number of years, it only publishes revised data for the last two months of reporting (August and September 2011 with the October 2011 report).  Shown in the following graph, the latest “concurrent” seasonal factor changes upped October 2010 relative to September 2010, with implied greater adjusted gain for October 2011. 

Clearly seen in the most recent plot (heavy blue line) is a shifting of reported seasonally-adjusted jobs from 2010 into 2011.  With just two months of prior reporting shown as revised in the official BLS release, pre-August 2011 revisions were not published so as to avoid “confusing” people using the data.  

 

 

As discussed repeatedly in recent employment Commentaries, meaningful seasonal-adjustments tend to be stable over time, without wild fluctuations every time the seasonals are re-estimated.  This is true particularly for series like payroll employment and retail sales, where the seasonal factors are concurrent—recalculated each month for the current month’s raw data.  If the payroll seasonals were stable, the lines in the graph would be flat and coincident.  Instead, the variations intensify with each successive month.  The monthly recalculations of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels show irregular revisions, with monthly swings now of plus or minus 90,000 jobs shifting over time.  To the extent the numbers affect current reporting, the differences are enough potentially to alter financial-market perceptions and reactions. 

A further big issue remains that the month-to-month seasonally-adjusted payroll data have become increasingly worthless, with reporting errors likely now well beyond the official 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000 jobs in the reported monthly payroll change.  Yet the media and the markets tout the data as meaningful, usually without question or qualification.

The inconsistency differences in the graph were calculated based on the raw unadjusted data and the seasonal-adjustment program available to the public on the BLS Web site.  Using the BLS data, we have calculated the seasonally-adjusted numbers as the BLS should be showing them, as of the current reporting, and the differences between official reporting and the consistent seasonally-adjusted series.

Payroll Benchmark Revision and Gimmicked Upside Biases.  Where, traditionally, the BLS does not adjust payroll reporting for the annual benchmark revisions before the January release of the following year, the Birth-Death Model appears to have been adjusted for the quarter beginning October 2011, so as to add an additional 50,000 jobs per month (600,000) per year to compensate for the pending 192,000 annual benchmark revision (see next section).  On September 29th, the BLS published a preliminary upside benchmark estimate for March 2011 unadjusted nonfarm payrolls.  The announced192,000 positive revision suggested there had been a monthly-average understatement of 16,000 jobs in the period from April 2010 to March 2011.  Official reporting history will not be revised until the February 2012 release of the January 2012 payrolls.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  Despite the ongoing and regular overstatement of monthly payroll employment—as evidenced usually by regular and massive, annual downward benchmark revisions—the BLS nonetheless generally upped its monthly biases in post-benchmark reportings of recent years.  In the wake of the purported upside benchmark preliminary revision for March 2011 (see previous section), the monthly bias factor used in October 2011—the first month of fourth-quarter reporting—was revamped to a more-positive monthly add-factor of 102,000 than the 71,000 used in October 2010.  That followed a more-negative subtraction of of 43,000 jobs for September 2011, versus a 25,000 subtraction in September 2010.  The resulting monthly swing of 50,000 jobs—an upswing of 600,000 annual jobs—substantially over-compensates for the purported 192,000 upside benchmark revision.

The aggregated upside annual bias reflects an ongoing assumption of a net positive jobs creation by new companies versus those going out business.  Such becomes a self-fulfilling system, as the upside biases boost reporting for financial-market and political needs, with relatively good headline data, while often also setting downside benchmark revisions for the next year, which traditionally are ignored by the media and the politicians.  Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business, on a timely basis (within at least five years, if ever), such information is estimated by the addition of a bias-factor generated by the Birth-Death Model (a model of the effects of new business creation and old business bankruptcies).  The fundamental defects of the Birth-Death Model are discussed as usual in the ensuing paragraphs.

Positive assumptions—commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling—can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with “stronger” economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates, or underlying assumptions of ongoing economic recovery.  Indeed, historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels—to understate employment declines—during recessions.   There is a faulty underlying premise here that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business.  So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, the presumed net additional “surplus” jobs created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor.  These add-factors have averaged 40,000 jobs per month over the last 12 months and appear now to have been upped to about 90,000 jobs per month.  With the economy continuing to falter, I expect a significant downside benchmark revision for next year (March 2012), given current details of the BLS’s happy estimates.

HOUSEHOLD SURVEY DETAILS.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (counting multiple job holders more than once), showed a October 2011 employment gain of 277,000 versus a 398,000 gain in September.  Severe issues with monthly seasonal factors still meaningfully cloud the significance of the reported monthly levels in the adjusted headline U.3 unemployment rate and other adjusted household-survey numbers.  Again, adjusted data have been shifted by highly unstable seasonal factors that are artifacts of the severe and extraordinarily protracted downturn in U.S. economic activity (as well as distortions created by last year’s census hiring and firing effects), not by the regular and stable seasonal patterns that were in place before the current economic crisis.

The reported October 2011 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate was little changed, with a statistically-insignificant 0.07 percentage point decline to 9.01% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from 9.08% in September.  Not-seasonally-adjusted, October’s U.3 unemployment rate was 8.5%, down from 8.8% in September.

Also heavily skewed by the seasonals, the October U.6 unemployment rate fell to a seasonally-adjusted 16.2% from 16.5% in September.  The unadjusted U.6 rate declined to 15.3% in October from 15.7% in September.  The broadest unemployment rate published by the BLS, U.6 includes accounting for those marginally attached to the labor force (including short-term discouraged workers) and those who are employed part-time for economic reasons (they cannot find a full-time job).

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, “discouraged workers”—those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had—were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been “discouraged” for less than a year.  This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers.  The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

 

Adding the SGS estimate of excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed and labor force, unemployment—more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure—eased to 22.9% in October from 23.1% in September.  The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting, and tends to follow its relative monthly movements. Accordingly, it will suffer some of the current seasonal-adjustment woes afflicting the base series. 

Nonetheless, there has been a noticeable divergence in the SGS series versus U.6.  The reason for this is that U.6, again, only includes discouraged workers who have been discouraged for less than a year.  As the discouraged worker status ages, those that go beyond one year fall off the government counting, as new workers enter “discouraged” status.  Accordingly, with the continual rollover, the discouraged workers counted in U.6 continue are not changing much in aggregate, at present, but the long-term discouraged worker component in the SGS estimate continues to increase, as few of those that have dropped out of U.6 are gaining active employment.  See the Alternate Data tab for more detail.

As discussed in previous writings, an unemployment rate near 23% might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%.  The SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession.  The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms.  Today, less that 2% work on farms.  Accordingly, for purposes of Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

 

Week Ahead.  Although still not fully acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and an escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

U.S. Trade Balance (September).  The September monthly trade deficit is due for release on Thursday, November 10th.  The general trend here should remain one of deterioration, with reporting risk favoring greater trade deficit widening than likely will be estimated by consensus forecasters.  A significant variation against consensus expectation would have implications for the first-revision to third-quarter GDP (due for release on November 22nd), since the September numbers will complete the otherwise guesstimated third-quarter trade data currently used in the GDP estimate.  A much worse-than-expected deterioration in the deficit, for example would be indicative of a downward revision to estimated third-quarter GDP growth, and vice versa.

 

__________

No. 396: 3rd-Quarter GDP, October Confidence, September Durables Orders and Home Sales

Thursday, October 27th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 396
3rd-Quarter GDP, October Confidence, September Durables Orders and Home Sales

October 27, 2011

__________

 

Consumer Confidence and Sentiment Sink to Levels Never Seen Outside of the Worst Recessions

No Economic Recovery Is in Place or in the Works

Third-Quarter GDP Gain Not Statistically Meaningful

GDP Nonsense:  Consumption Surged 1.7% While Disposable Income Collapsed 1.7%?

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, November 4th.  It will cover October 2011 unemployment and payroll employment reporting.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  The U.S. economy is sinking anew, not rebounding.  Such is contrary to the media hype around this morning’s (October 27th) headline 2.5% second-quarter GDP growth, which was up from the 1.3% growth estimate of the first-quarter.  Officially the broadest measure of U.S. economic activity published by the U.S. government, the widely-followed gross domestic product (GDP) nonetheless remains the most-heavily-biased, the most-heavily-guessed-at, the most-heavily politicized and the most-worthless major indicator of domestic business activity.  Today’s numbers out of the Bureau of Economic Analysis are outright nonsense.

Consider that latest numbers showed that the level of inflation-adjusted third-quarter 2011 GDP broke above the pre-recession high of fourth-quarter 2007: a full recovery.  That is absurd.  No other major economic indicator, including payrolls, real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales, industrial production, trade deficit or housing starts is showing that.  The GDP previously had been reported as breaking above its pre-recession high in fourth-quarter 2010, but that happy news revised away with July 2011’s benchmark revisions to the GDP series.  Downside revisions also should erase today’s nonsensical news, eventually.

Consider that personal consumption contributed 1.72%, or 70%, of the annualized real 2.46% quarterly growth rate attributed to third-quarter GDP.  Yet, consumer liquidity problems intensified in the third-quarter, with real disposable income (effectively inflation-adjusted take-home pay) falling at an annualized pace of 1.73%.  Year-to-date, since fourth-quarter 2010, real disposable income has been flat (up 0.02%), while real personal consumption has gained 1.3%, which accounted for more than the total 1.0% growth in real GDP in the same period.

As discussed in recent Commentaries (see the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) and Commentary No. 394 for example), sustained positive real growth in consumption is not possible without sustained positive real growth in income.  Where short-term growth can be borrowed from the future with debt expansion or liquidation of savings, those options, at present, however, are constrained at their practical limits.

More-Reliable Indicators of Economic Activity.  Among some of the more-reliable economic indicators of business activity, payroll employment shows no sign of economic recovery and the consumer confidence measures have fallen to levels never seen outside of the worst recessions and indicate an unfolding a double-dip downturn.

Despite the seasonal-factor and monthly-upside-reporting-bias issues with the birth-death model, the nonfarm payroll employment series probably is the best-quality government series published as an indicator of broad economic activity.  It is a coincident indicator of business activity.  Its pattern in the current economic downturn has been one of initial collapse and then bottom-bouncing, while recent monthly “gains” have lacked statistical significance.  Payrolls as of September 2011 still were 4.8% shy of topping the pre-2007 recession peak.  What is more, the current payroll employment is 0.9% below the payroll levels of December 2000, the pre-2001 recession peak!  With employment below where it was a decade ago, there is no economic recovery in the works here.  The payroll circumstance will be updated in next week’s Commentary

Consumer confidence and sentiment also tend to be coincident indicators of economic activity that tie to the consumer (some will contend these series lead retail sales, etc., reflecting consumer willingness to purchase goods and services).  As shown in the following graphs, both the University of Michigan sentiment series, which is not seasonally adjusted, and the Conference Board confidence series, which is seasonally adjusted (the unadjusted series is not made available), are suggesting double-dips in business activity.

In the case of Consumer Sentiment, the sentiment level historically has dropped to the current level only three times since the series was established in 1952.  Those periods were during the worst economic downturns of the post-World War II era: the 1973-1975 recession, the double-dip recession in the early-1980s, and in the 2007 recession, when the risk of systemic failure came to a head in 2008 and 2009.  The current level now has fallen back to that 2008 level.

Consumer Confidence hit the lowest levels ever recorded in 2008 and 2009, and although not quite back to the trough of the current cycle, the latest reading on consumer confidence still is below anything ever seen outside of the current economic collapse.

No Surprises in Durable Goods Orders or Home Sales.  New orders for durable goods (not adjusted for inflation) fell by 0.8% in September, but that was well within the normal volatility of the series.  The small 3.0% decline in existing home sales and the 5.7% gain in new home sales also were within the ranges of normal monthly volatility, as home sales continued a protracted period of bottom-bouncing.  One developing trend worth watching, though, is that year-to-year change has started to slow markedly in both the durable goods orders and home sales series.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—As Circumstances Unfold, the Outlook Remains the Same.  As discussed frequently in this section, the euro crisis has appeared frequently as a likely foil, distracting global market attention from the potential financial-system-busting crises unfolding with the U.S. dollar and the related, effective long-term U.S. government insolvency.  As we go to press, the markets are hyperventilating over the latest solution to the Greek crisis—at least temporarily—with U.S. equities soaring.  Those equity gains, however, largely are being offset for those outside the U.S. dollar by renewed heavy selling of the U.S. dollar against the other major Western currencies.  U.S. economic activity continues to falter, with increasingly negative implications for financial-market stability and systemic solvency.  The financial system remains highly vulnerable to potential negative surprises. 

Repeated from the prior Commentaries, there are no happy solutions available here to remedy the crises, only tools—devil’s choices—for the Fed and the U.S. government to buy a little extra time.  From the Fed’s standpoint, keeping the banking system afloat remains its primary concern, although needs for economic growth and contained inflation will be given as the rationale behind any overt change in policy.  The ultimate cost in propping the system, however, remains inflation.  The economic and systemic-solvency crises and the broad inflation and economic issues detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) and in recent Commentaries, continue to unfold with outlooks that remain unchanged.

The root source of current global systemic instabilities largely has been the financially-dominant United States, and it is against the U.S. dollar that the global markets ultimately should turn, massively.  The Fed and the U.S. Treasury likely will do whatever has to be done to prevent a euro-area crisis from triggering a systemic collapse in the United States.  Accordingly, it is not from a euro-related crisis, but rather from within the U.S. financial system and financial-authority actions that an eventual U.S. systemic failure likely will be triggered, seen initially in a rapidly accelerating pace of domestic inflation—ultimately hyperinflation.

The financial markets still are roiled by deepening crises of confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the long-term outlook for U.S. financial, economic, systemic and political stability.  For those living in a U.S. dollar-denominated world, regardless of any further near-term extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar—in either direction—versus the stronger major currencies and gold, the stronger currencies and precious metals remain the fundamental hedges against what lies ahead.

Massive, fundamental dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated assets may start at anytime, with little or no further warning.  With a U.S. government unwilling to balance or even to address its uncontainable fiscal condition; with the federal government and Federal Reserve standing ready to prevent a systemic collapse, so long as it is possible to print and spend whatever money is needed; and with the U.S. dollar at risk of losing its global reserve currency status; much higher inflation lies ahead, in a circumstance that rapidly could evolve into hyperinflation.

 

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

Confidence Interval Around Reported GDP Change Allows for Contraction as well as Expansion.  As discussed in the Opening Comments and Executive Summary the reported gain in third-quarter GDP ran counter to better-quality reporting in underlying fundamental series.  The headline 2.5% “advance” third-quarter GDP growth hit the consensus forecast, but it was statistically insignificant for the third consecutive quarter.  The BEA often targets the consensus estimate in initial reporting, because the underlying data rarely are more than guesstimates.  With more-reliable indicators suggesting ongoing, severe economic contraction, there is no economic rebound or recovery other than in political or Wall Street hype.  The GDP series remains the most heavily politicized of the government’s popularly followed economic reports.

GDP.  Published today, October 27th, by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the “advance” or first estimate of third-quarter 2011 gross domestic product (GDP) showed annualized real quarterly growth of 2.46% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), versus an estimated annualized gain of 1.33% for second-quarter 2011.  Not annualized, third-quarter GDP growth was 0.61%, against 0.33% in the second-quarter.  In this most worthless of major economic series, the reported annualized growth rates for the last three quarters are little more than statistical noise around the unchanged level.  They possibly have been massaged to keep the quarterly growth rates in minimally-positive as opposed to minimally-negative territory.   The quarterly GDP gain purportedly was dominated by personal consumption, business investment in computers and an improved trade deficit, with some offset from inventory liquidation.

Year-to-year real change in third-quarter 2011 GDP slowed minimally to 1.62%, effectively flat versus the 1.63% annual growth in the second-quarter.  Current annual growth remained well off the near-term peak in reported growth of 3.51% during third-quarter 2010.

The estimate of the third-quarter GDP implicit price deflator (IPD) was 2.52%, versus 2.59% in the second-quarter.  In contrast, annualized seasonally-adjusted quarterly inflation for the CPI-U in the third-quarter eased to 3.07% from 4.09% in the second-quarter.  On a year-to-year basis, the third-quarter IPD was up by 2.40%, versus 2.10% in the second-quarter.  In contrast, annual growth in third-quarter CPI-U jumped to 3.76% versus 3.43% in the second-quarter.

The lower the inflation rate used in deflating the GDP, the stronger is the resulting inflation-adjusted number and vice versa.  A slightly more realistic inflation number would have flattened the reported third-quarter GDP growth rate.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for third-quarter 2011 is an approximate annual contraction of 2.9% versus the official estimate of a 1.6% gain.  Such is slightly more negative than the alternate 2.8% annual contraction (1.6% official gain) estimate for the second-quarter (see the Alternate Data tab).  While annualized real quarterly growth is not estimated formally on an alternative basis, a quarter-to-quarter contraction appears to have been realistic for the third-quarter, as it was in both the first- and second-quarters, in what generally has been a protracted period of business bottom-bouncing.

 

GNP and GDI.  Third-quarter estimates of the gross national product (GNP) and gross domestic income (GDI) will not be published until the second estimate of the third-quarter GDP, next month.  The series traditionally are delayed due to lack of meaningful data.  The same principles minimally should be applied to the heavily guesstimated GDP, with initial reporting delayed until more-complete information is available.

 

NEW ORDERS FOR DURABLE GOODS (September 2011)

Annual Growth Slowed Sharply for September Durable Goods Orders.  The Census Bureau reported yesterday, October 26th, that the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods fell by 0.8% (down 0.7% before prior-period revisions) for the month of September 2011, following an unrevised 0.1% monthly decline reported for August.  September’s monthly contraction included a 25.5% decline in irregular, long-term nondefense aircraft orders, a category that showed a revised 25.2% (previously 23.5%) jump in August.  Airplane orders usually are placed years in advance of delivery and rarely impact near-term economic activity.  Current durable goods reporting remains subject to many of the same sampling and concurrent-seasonal-adjustment problems that are seen with retail sales and payroll reporting.  The numbers are not adjusted for inflation.

Unadjusted, year-to-year growth in total September 2011 new orders slowed sharply to 4.3%, versus a revised 14.2% (previously 14.1%) annual gain in August.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders declined in September by 2.3% (down by 2.7% before prior-period revisions) for the month, versus a revised monthly 5.0% (previously 5.2%) increase in August.  For September, the unadjusted year-to-year growth in the series also softened markedly, a gain of 3.7%, versus August’s revised 24.2% (previously 25.4%) annual growth estimate.

 

EXISTING AND NEW HOME SALES (September 2011)

Home Sales Continued Bottom-Bouncing in September.  Combined existing and new home sales in September 2011 basically remain the same level they were in August 2008 (first month following the initial housing-stimulus enactment), and also as averaged over the intervening period.  As noted in last month’s analysis (see Commentary No. 392), whatever sales were borrowed from the future by stimulus measures have been lost back fully in the depressed activity that followed the stimulus expirations, with the monthly sales numbers averaging out to what otherwise would have been three-years of bottom-bouncing.

Existing Home Sales Decline A Little.  The October 20th release of September existing-home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly loss of 3.0%, versus August’s revised gain of 8.4% (previously up by 7.7%).  On a year-to-year basis, September sales rose by 11.3%, versus a revised 19.3% (previously 18.6%) annual gain in August.  The volatility in annual growth still reflects a waning of the variability a year ago of the end-of-stimulus effects.

Foreclosure activity remained a major distorting factor for home sales, with "distressed" activity accounting for an estimated 30% of existing sales in the NAR’s September reporting, down from the 31% estimated in August.

New Home Sales Gain Was Statistically Insignificant.  Consistent with the long-term negative trends in housing starts (see the prior Commentary No. 395 for September details), the October 26th release of September new-home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) showed an ongoing pattern of a bottom-bouncing, despite a monthly gain.  September’s monthly gain of 5.7% (up 6.1% before prior-period revisions) +/- 21.5% (95% confidence interval) versus August was statistically insignificant.  In turn, August’s decline was revised to a 0.4% decline (previously down by 2.3%) versus July.  The year-to-year change in September 2011 new-home sales turned down, with a statistically-insignificant 0.9% +/- 19.0% (95% confidence interval) decline.  August’s annual gain was revised to 6.5% (previously 6.1%). 

As with existing homes sales, the large volatility in change is due to the effects of the lapsing of housing stimulus efforts a year ago.  As with existing home sales, part of the new sales volume is due to foreclosure activity, but the Census Bureau does not provide an estimate of foreclosure volume. 

 

 

 

 

Week Ahead.  Although still not fully acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and an escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Unemployment Rate and Payroll Employment (October 2011).  Nonfarm payrolls and the unemployment rate for October 2011 are due for release on Friday, November 4th.  This first major indicator of October economic activity likely will confirm ongoing deterioration in broad economic conditions.  A pattern of weaker-than-expected reporting, against likely somewhat stronger consensus expectations for the labor market, is a fair bet for October reporting.

Payrolls remain at risk of showing an outright monthly contraction, with the unemployment rate notching higher.  Yet, as seen with last month’s change in headline payrolls and unemployment rate, whatever is reported likely will include a payroll contraction and higher unemployment rate within the 95% statistical reporting confidence intervals (+/- 129,000 for payroll change, +/- 0.2% for the unemployment rate).   As has been the case for some time, unstable seasonal adjustments can distort the reported monthly changes in these series meaningfully.

 

__________

No. 395: September CPI, PPI, Real Retail Sales, Housing Starts, Industrial Production

Wednesday, October 19th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 395
September CPI, PPI, Real Retail Sales, Housing Starts, Industrial Production

October 19, 2011

__________

 

Consumer and Wholesale Inflation Jumped in September

September’s Annual Inflation: 3.9% (CPI-U), 4.4% (CPI-W), 11.5% (SGS)

Annual PPI Inflation Hits 6.9% in September

Third-Quarter Real Retail Sales, Production and Housing Starts Outpaced
Second-Quarter Activity, but Economy Remains in Severe Downturn

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Thursday, October 27th.  It will cover the “advance” estimate of third-quarter 2011 GDP and September new orders for durable goods.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  The pace of annual inflation rose in September at both the consumer and wholesale levels.  Also holding up is the pace of annual inflation in the so-called “core” measure, net of food and energy prices.  Rising prices continue to be boosted by the effects of the Federal Reserve’s efforts at dollar-debasement, not by strong economic activity.  At the same time, the economy remains in severe contraction, despite some upside monthly reporting in recent economic series.

CPI and PPI.  The September producer price index jumped by 0.8% for the month and 6.9% for the year, versus August’s unchanged monthly reading and 6.5% annual inflation.

Annual inflation in the September consumer price index again hit the highest level for the CPI-U series since September 2008.  The CPI-U gained 0.3% for the month and 3.9% for the year, while the narrower CPI-W gained 0.4% for the month and 4.4% for the year.

The chained-CPI-U (C-CPI) showed annual growth of 3.8%.  The miscreants in Washington, D.C., would like to change CPI reporting, once again, so as to cut cost-of-living adjustments artificially.  By shifting COLA adjustments from a CPI-W base to the C-CPI base, the politicians can cut the federal deficit without anyone having to vote formally to cut Social Security costs. 

If the C-CPI were in place now for such purposes, it would have lowered the coming Social Security COLA adjustment by 0.6 percentage point.  It would be better for the general public if the government just came out and said it could not afford to pay a full COLA, rather than put out an understated inflation rate that neither reflects the costs of maintaining a constant standard of living, nor reflects actual out-of-pocket expenses.  As a result of the deception, the general public often ends up using understated inflation numbers for purposes such as wage and salary adjustments and for targeting investment returns.

The SGS-Alternate-CPI measures reflected annual inflation for September at 7.2% (1990-based) and at 11.5% (1980-based)

Although at slower pace of increase in September, the CPI-U’s annual “core” inflation rate has risen now for 11 straight months, since the Fed introduced QE2.  As shown in the following graph, the annual core rate rose to 1.97% in September versus 1.95% in August, and was up from 0.61% in October 2010.

 

Real Retail Sales, Industrial Production and Housing Starts.  Monthly gains reported in September for real retail sales, industrial production and housing starts, which have helped to boost the third-quarter outlook a little, generally appeared to be tied to seasonal-adjustment problems that should reverse out in the month ahead (see the discussion on seasonal-adjustment reporting quality in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011)).  With extraordinarily negative underlying fundamentals still in play, there is no shift in economic outlook and no chance of a near-term economic recovery

Given relatively better current quarterly reporting, versus the second-quarter, for the trade deficit, real retail sales, industrial production and housing starts, however, next week’s (October 27th) initial estimate of third-quarter GDP growth likely will be somewhat above that of the 1.3% last estimated for annualized, real (inflation-adjusted) quarterly growth in the second-quarter.  Nonetheless, as with the second-quarter, the initial third-quarter headline GDP estimate likely will not be statistically meaningful, encompassing both a potential contraction as well as expansion within its 95% confidence interval of plus-or-minus three percentage points. 

Also, where the Bureau of Economic Analysis’s (BEA) “advance” estimate tends to target the consensus forecast, weaker than widely recognized underlying fundamentals tend to favor a downside surprise for the initial GDP reporting.  As discussed in the prior Commentary No. 394, the underlying structural issues impairing consumer activity are getting worse, not better. 

Indeed, the fundamental factors that drive U.S. consumption show the broad economy still to be in decline, with the lack of real consumer income growth and restricted credit availability at the core of U.S. the economic problems.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Outlook Remains the Same.  The U.S. economic and systemic-solvency crises are ongoing.  The systemic-solvency crisis reflects both domestic and global banking-system and sovereign solvency issues, as well as related extreme instability in the domestic and global financial markets and financial and economic systems.  The systemic problems are exacerbated by the still-faltering economy, in something of a self-feeding cycle.

Repeated from the prior Commentaries, there are no happy solutions available here to remedy the crises, only tools—devil’s choices—for the Fed and the U.S. government to buy a little extra time.  From the Fed’s standpoint, keeping the banking system afloat remains its primary concern, although needs for economic growth and contained inflation will be given as the rationale behind any overt change in policy.  The ultimate cost in propping the system, however, remains inflation.  The economic and systemic-solvency crises and the broad inflation and economic issues detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) and in recent Commentaries, continue to unfold with outlooks that remain unchanged.

The root source of current global systemic instabilities largely has been the financially-dominant United States, and it is against the U.S. dollar that the global markets ultimately should turn, massively.  The Fed and the U.S. Treasury likely will do whatever has to be done to prevent a euro-area crisis from triggering a systemic collapse in the United States.  Accordingly, it is not from a euro-related crisis, but rather from within the U.S. financial system and financial-authority actions that an eventual U.S. systemic failure likely will be triggered, seen initially in a rapidly accelerating pace of domestic inflation—ultimately hyperinflation.

The financial markets still are roiled by deepening crises of confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the long-term outlook for U.S. financial, economic, systemic and political stability.  For those living in a U.S. dollar-denominated world, regardless of any further near-term extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar—in either direction—versus the stronger major currencies and gold, the stronger currencies and precious metals remain the fundamental hedges against what lies ahead.

Massive, fundamental dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated assets could start at anytime, with little or no further warning.  With a U.S. government unwilling to balance or even to address its uncontainable fiscal condition; with the federal government and Federal Reserve standing ready to prevent a systemic collapse, so long as it is possible to print and spend whatever money is needed; and with the U.S. dollar at risk of losing its global reserve currency status; much higher inflation lies ahead, in a circumstance that rapidly could evolve into hyperinflation.

The impact of recent extreme market turmoil and volatility is evident in the usual gold graphs that follow.  Again, the precious metals and stronger currencies remain the best long-term hedges against the extreme decline ahead in the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar.

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

CONSUMER PRICE INDEX—CPI (September 2011)

Higher Oil Prices Continue Permeating Broad Economic Activity.  Once again, despite a seasonally-adjusted boost to otherwise weak gasoline prices, September CPI reporting showed the continued spread of inflationary pressures well beyond the energy and food sectors, with the annual “core” inflation rate still on the rise.  Topping August’s numbers, full September CPI-U reporting showed the highest level of annual consumer inflation since September 2008.

 

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported today (October 19th) that the seasonally-adjusted September 2011 CPI-U rose by 0.30% (up by 0.15%, unadjusted) for the month.  That followed a gain of 0.37% (up by 0.28%, unadjusted) in August.  The September reporting reflected an unadjusted 0.7% drop in monthly average gasoline prices (the Department of Energy reported an unadjusted 0.8% decline), but the unadjusted BLS estimate was turned into a seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 2.9%.  Gasoline-price seasonal-adjustments still are in a price-boosting mode, catching up on depressed adjusted gasoline inflation as reported in the first half of the year. 

September’s unadjusted year-to-year CPI-U inflation rose to 3.87%, from August’s 3.77%, the strongest pace of annual inflation since September 2008.

The annualized quarterly gain in seasonally-adjusted CPI-U inflation was 3.07% for third-quarter 2011, versus 4.09% in the second quarter.  Unadjusted year-to-year inflation rose to 3.76% in the third-quarter versus from 3.43% in the second-quarter.

The September report also showed still-greater inflationary pressures from the spread of higher energy prices into the broad economy (see the graph and comments in Opening Comments and Executive Summary).  On an annual basis, “core” CPI-U inflation moved higher, albeit marginally, for the 11th straight month, up to 1.97% in September, versus 1.95% in August.  When Fed Chairman Bernanke used his jawboning in an effort to debase the U.S. dollar in the global markets, in advance of announcing QE2 in November 2010, annual “core” inflation was at 0.61%.

Year-to-year total CPI-U inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s October 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.25% gain in the adjusted monthly level reported for October 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual unadjusted inflation rate for October 2011, the difference in October’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from September 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 3.87%.

CPI-W.  The narrower, seasonally-adjusted CPI-W, which has greater weighting for gasoline than does the CPI-U, rose by 0.37% (up by 0.16% unadjusted) in September, following August’s gain of 0.42% (up by 0.29% unadjusted). 

Unadjusted, September 2011’s year-to-year CPI-W inflation was 4.38%, against a 4.26% annual increase in August.

The annualized quarterly gain in seasonally-adjusted CPI-W inflation was 3.31% for third-quarter 2011, versus 4.55% in the second quarter.  Unadjusted year-to-year inflation rose to 4.25% in the third-quarter from 3.94 % in the second-quarter.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U—the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists, including the recent presidential deficit commission and some members of Congress, as the replacement for the CPI in COLA adjustments—is reported only on an unadjusted basis.  Year-to-year inflation increased to 3.71% in September, up from 3.61% in August.

Unadjusted C-CPI-U year-to-year inflation for the third-quarter was 3.86%.   If this gimmicked measure were utilized for this year’s Social Security cost of living adjustment (COLA), instead of the CPI-W, the adjustment would be lowered by 0.39%.  Therein is the political motivation for changing the COLA-adjustment mechanism to the C-CPI-U, as a deficit-reduction tool. 

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 7.2% in September 2011, up from 7.1% in August, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to about 11.5% (11.45% for those using the extra digit) in September, up from about 11.4% in August. 

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation.  Despite the September 5th historic-high gold price of $1,895.00 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix), and despite the multi-decade high silver price of $48.70 per troy ounce (London fix of April 28th), gold and silver prices have yet to re-hit their 1980 historic levels, adjusted for inflation.  The earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 would be $2,479 per troy ounce, based on September 2011 CPI-U-adjusted dollars, $8,677 per troy ounce based on SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (all series not seasonally adjusted). 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org), although approached earlier this year, still has not been hit since 1980, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars.  Based on September 2011 CPI-U inflation, the 1980 silver price peak would be $144 per troy ounce and would be $505 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (again, all series not seasonally adjusted).

As shown on page 43 of the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), over the decades, the price of gold has compensated for more than the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the dollar based on the SGS-Alternate Consumer Price Measure (1980 Methodologies Base).

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Retail Sales.   Based on the September 2011 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted September 2011 retail sales rose by 0.81% for the month, where, before inflation adjustment, the current number was up by 1.13% (see Commentary No. 394 for details of the nominal reporting).  Real August retail sales revised to a monthly decline of 0.09% (previously down by 0.33%), where nominal (not-adjusted for inflation) sales in August revised to a gain of 0.28% (previously up by 0.04%). 

Real retail sales in third-quarter 2011 were up by a 0.34% from the second-quarter, which, in turn, was up by 0.14% from the first-quarter.

September’s real retail sales rose at a year-to-year pace of 3.87%, versus a revised 3.63% (previously 3.28%) annual gain reported for August. 

The ongoing “recovery” in real retail sales is reflected in the following graphs, which show the latest monthly levels of inflation- and seasonally-adjusted activity.  The first of these shows close historical detail for the period beginning in 2000; the second shows the same data in historical context since World War II.

 

As noted in earlier writings, using the SGS Alternate-CPI Inflation estimates for deflation of the retail series would not have shown an ongoing rise in activity for the last year or so.  It is my preference here, and wherever otherwise possible, to use the official estimates (the series here is as calculated by the St. Louis Fed), since that eliminates a level of argument over what is being reported.  As official consumer inflation picks up, and as overall retail sales suffer from the ongoing consumer liquidity squeeze, these data should turn down meaningfully in what eventually will become a formal double-dip recession. 

There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity—no recovery—just general bottom-bouncing.  Accordingly, real retail sales levels in the months ahead should become increasingly negative (see the household income comments in Commentary No. 394).

 

 

Real Money Supply M3.  The signal of the unfolding double-dip recession, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), continues and is graphed above.  Based on the September CPI-U report and the latest September SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate, the annual contraction in real M3 for September 2011 was 1.2%, somewhat shallower than the revised 1.3% (1.5%) annual contraction in August.  The August revision was in the context of benchmark revisions to underlying data published by the Fed.

The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn or its duration.  The current downturn signal was generated in December 2009.  The broad economy tends to follow in downturn or renewed deterioration roughly six-to-nine months after the signal, as has appeared to have started in recent months.  Weakness in a number of series have surfaced in recent months, and the downturn likely will accelerate in the months ahead, eventually leading to recognition of a double-dip recession.

 

PRODUCER PRICE INDEX—PPI (September 2011)

Monthly Wholesale Inflation Jumped to 0.8% for September, Up 6.9% Year-to-Year.  As reported yesterday, October 18th, by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) for September up by 0.8% (up by 0.5% unadjusted) month-to-month, following an unchanged month-to-month reading (down by 0.4% before seasonal adjustment) in August.

Unadjusted and year-to-year, September 2011’s PPI inflation rose to 6.9% from 6.5% in August.  The recent run-up in annual PPI inflation generally has reflected ongoing impact of the Fed’s dollar-debasement policies, not surging economic demand. 

Separately, on a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted September 2011 intermediate goods prices rose by 0.6%, versus a decline of 0.5% in August, with September crude goods prices up by 2.8%, following a 0.2% gain in August.  Year-to-year inflation in September intermediate goods was 10.5%, versus a 10.3% level in August, with September’s annual inflation in crude goods at 20.9%, versus August’s 18.4% pace.

 

RESIDENTIAL CONSTRUCTION—HOUSING STARTS (September 2011)

Housing Starts Bottom-Bounced in September.  The regularly volatile housing starts series continued its bottom-bouncing in September, having seen nearly three years of activity at 75% below 2006’s record construction level, and no relief in sight.  The Census Bureau reported this morning (October 19th) a marginally-statistically-significant monthly gain in seasonally-adjusted September 2011 housing starts of 15.0% (a gain of 15.2% before prior-period revisions) +/- 14.9% (all confidence intervals are at the 95% level).  August starts were revised to a 7.0% (previously a 5.0%) monthly decline.  The bulk of September’s monthly gain was due to a 52.4% jump in the highly volatile apartment units component, with single unit starts up by 1.7% for the month.

As a result of the September reading, housing starts in the third quarter were 7.5% ahead of the second-quarter, which, in turn was 1.7% below first-quarter activity.

The year-to-year change in September starts was a statistically-insignificant increase of 10.2% +/- 15.5%, following a revised annual 5.6% (previously 5.8%) decline in August.  The recent swings in the direction of annual change reflect comparisons with volatile year-ago monthly activity that was exaggerated in both directions by stimulus and post-stimulus effects.

With housing starts well into their third year of post-housing-market-crash bottom-bouncing, there remain no indications of a reprieve for the industry or the otherwise deteriorating broader economy.  Indeed, the pattern of housing starts has remained one of stagnation at an historically low-level plateau of activity, over the last 34 months.  Since December 2008, housing starts have averaged a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 575,000.  In that period, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the aggregate series around that average, with the 658,000 September 2011 monthly reading at 14.4% above average.  Again, such is within the normal reporting range of this extremely volatile series.

As shown in the following graphs, current monthly housing starts activity remains near the record monthly low seen for the present series in April 2009.  The current number also is well below any level reported in the predecessor nonfarm housing starts series, which was introduced in 1946.  The first graph shows recent detail for current housing starts activity, the second graph shows the same data within the historical context of the post-World War II period.

 

 

INDEX OF INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTION (September 2011)

Third-Quarter Industrial Production Had a 1.3% Quarterly Gain.  Monday’s (October 17th) Federal Reserve Board release of seasonally-adjusted September 2011 industrial production showed a monthly gain of 0.19% (0.15% net of prior-period revisions) versus August.  In turn, the monthly change in August production was flat (a 0.0045% gain), revised lower from initial reporting of a 0.18% monthly gain. 

Third-quarter industrial production gained 1.26% versus the second-quarter, which in turn was up by a revised 0.11% (0.13%) from the first-quarter.  The relatively stronger third-quarter growth would suggest stronger third-quarter GDP growth in the second-quarter.  For some reason, though, where a quarterly gain in industrial production often follows through to GDP reporting, a quarterly decline in production often does not.

Year-to-year growth in September 2011 production was 3.22%, down from a revised 3.32% (previously 3.35%) August increase, and down from the recent relative peak annual growth of 7.75% in June 2010.  The year-to-year contraction of 14.83% seen in June 2009, at the end of second-quarter 2009, was the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II.

The “recovery” in industrial production is reflected in the following graphs.  Both graphs show the monthly level of the production index.  The first of these shows close historical detail for the period beginning in 2000, the second shows the same data in historical context since World War II.

 

 

Week Ahead.  Although still not fully acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and an escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Existing and New Home Sales (September 2011).  September existing home sales (National Association of Realtors) are due for release tomorrow, Thursday, October 20th, while September new home sales (Census Bureau) are due for release on Wednesday, October 26th.  Once again, as with the ongoing bottom-bouncing seen in today’s housing starts release, both home sales series should remain extremely weak, with any positive monthly change lacking statistical significance (especially for the highly volatile new home sales series).  Also, as usual, given the extreme volatility, reporting error and revisions in both these series, given the poor-quality seasonal adjustments, given continuing negative anecdotal evidence, and given ongoing massive distortions from irregularly volatile foreclosure activity, the reported monthly movements in these numbers (particularly to the upside) generally are meaningless.

New Orders for Durable Goods (September 2011).  Due for release on Wednesday, October 26th, the highly volatile new orders for durable goods likely will not show a meaningful monthly change in September, with odds slightly favoring a monthly decline in new orders.

Gross Domestic Product—GDP (Third-Quarter 2011, First Estimate).  The “first” or “advance” estimate of third-quarter GDP is due for release from the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) on Thursday, October 27th.  With the existing trade, production, retail sales and housing starts data suggestive of a somewhat relatively stronger quarter-to-quarter GDP performance than in the second-quarter, the headline, annualized inflation-adjusted third-quarter GDP growth rate likely will be above the last-estimate of 1.3% for the second-quarter.  Yet, given widely weaker-than-recognized underlying economic fundamentals, reporting risk is to the downside of whatever consensus forecasters are likely to estimate.

 

__________

No. 394: September Retail Sales, August Trade Deficit

Friday, October 14th, 2011
 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 394
September Retail Sales, August Trade Deficit

October 14, 2011

__________

 

The Great Downturn Deepens as Household Incomes Collapse

September Retail Sales Gain Exaggerated by Poor-Quality Seasonal Adjustments

Trade Deficit Still Suggests A Positive Contribution to Third-Quarter GDP

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Wednesday, October 19th.  It will cover September CPI, PPI, housing starts, real retail sales and industrial production.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  Fundamental factors that drive U.S. consumption show the broad economy still to be in decline, with no near-term chance of the prospective economic recovery that regularly gets hyped by Wall Street.  Structural problems tied to the lack of real (inflation-adjusted) consumer income growth, and to restricted credit availability, remain at the core of the economic problems, as discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011).

Household Income Collapse.  On the consumer income front, household income is continuing to collapse, per a just-released private study by Gordon Green and John Coder.  Green and Coder, respectively, were the former Chiefs of the Governments Division and of the Income Statistics Branch at the U.S. Census Bureau, and, at one time, produced the government’s annual poverty survey, from which I pull details on annual household income (see Commentary No. 389).  The new study was publicized in an October 9th New York Times story: “Recession Officially Over, U.S. Incomes Kept Falling.”

Using raw data available from the Census Bureau’s Current Population Survey (the unemployment survey used by the Bureau of Labor Statistics), Green and Croder concluded that monthly median household income, adjusted for CPI-U inflation, fell by 9.8% from the official beginning of the recession in December 2007 through June 2011.  This is near-depression territory (see the definitions section of the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011)).  Further, the collapse in household income accelerated after the purported end of the recession in June 2009, suggesting that the recession never really ended.

Per Green and Croder, “Real [adjusted for inflation] median annual household income has fallen significantly more during the economic recovery period from June 2009 to June 2011 than during the recession lasting from December 2007 to June 2009.  During the recession, real median annual household income fell by 3.2 percent, from $55,309 in December 2007 to $53,518 in June 2009.  During the economic recovery, real median annual household income fell by an additional 6.7 percent, from $53,518 in June 2009 to $49,909 in June 2011.”

The declines in real median household income in all mentioned periods were greater than the appropriate CPI inflation, which means that the median household incomes also declined in nominal terms (not adjusted for inflation).  The latest reading on real median household income appears to be at the low of the cycle, and, as deflated by the CPI-U, should be at the lowest level seen since before 1970, based on the Census Bureau’s historical annual series.

Growth in real consumption and real GDP cannot be sustained without sustained growth in real income.  Short-term consumption growth, however, can be borrowed from the future—through debt expansion—assuming consumers have the ability and willingness to take on new debt.

Credit and Confidence.  On the consumer credit front, the Fed’s reporting of August 2011 consumer credit outstanding showed a 1.9% increase versus the third-quarter 2010 level.  That also is less than the official annual increase in consumer inflation of 3.8% (CPI-U) to 4.3% (CPI-W) in August.  Net of consumer debt held by the federal government, however, nominal August consumer credit was down by 3.1% over the same period.  The banks still are not lending, and without credit expansion available to the consumer to make up for the shortfall in his or her living standards, real consumption and GDP again have no prospects for sustainable expansion.

As to consumer confidence, both the Conference Board’s confidence measure and the University of Michigan’s sentiment measure remain deep in territory usually not seen outside of historical recessions (except for the current period, where, again, the 2007 recession really never ended).

Retail Sales.  Despite all the factors hampering consumer activity, headline September retail sales rose by 1.1% in the month.  Even after inflation adjustment, that should remain in positive territory.  The monthly changes here are warped by poor-quality seasonal adjustments.  The sales gain here would have been roughly 0.5%, based on 2010 adjustments.  The underlying fundamentals, as discussed above, do not support any form of near-term consumer recovery, and real contractions in monthly retail sales should be common in the key holiday-shopping-season months ahead.

Trade Deficit.  The August trade deficit was unchanged versus July, but with July now showing a wider deficit in revision.  The net narrowing in the quarterly deficit initially suggested by the July report now is smaller, but the effect still should be the same.  The net export account likely will make a positive contribution to the “advance” third-quarter GDP estimate due for release on October 27th.

An update on the broad outlook for inflation and the economy will be included in the Commentary scheduled for October 19th.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Outlook Unchanged.  The U.S. economy continues to falter.  With the added pressures of systemic-solvency stresses, the domestic and global financial markets and financial system remain extremely unstable.

Repeated from the prior Commentaries, there are no happy solutions available here to remedy the economic and systemic-solvency crises, only tools—devil’s choices—for the Fed and the U.S. government to buy a little extra time.  From the Fed’s standpoint, keeping the banking system afloat remains its primary concern, although needs for economic growth and contained inflation will be given as the rationale behind any overt change in policy.  The ultimate cost in propping the system, however, remains inflation.  The economic and systemic-solvency crises and the broad inflation and economic issues detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) and in recent Commentaries, continue to unfold with outlooks that remain unchanged.

The root source of current global systemic instabilities largely has been the financially-dominant United States, and it is against the U.S. dollar that the global markets ultimately should turn, massively.  The Fed and the U.S. Treasury likely will do whatever has to be done to prevent a euro-area crisis from triggering a systemic collapse in the United States.  Accordingly, it is not from a euro-related crisis, but rather from within the U.S. financial system and financial-authority actions that an eventual U.S. systemic failure likely will be triggered, seen initially in a rapidly accelerating pace of domestic inflation—ultimately hyperinflation.

The financial markets still are roiled by deepening crises of confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the long-term outlook for U.S. financial, economic, systemic and political stability.  For those living in a U.S. dollar-denominated world, regardless of any further near-term extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar—in either direction—versus the stronger major currencies and gold, the stronger currencies and precious metals remain the fundamental hedges against what lies ahead.

Massive, fundamental dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated assets could start at anytime, with little or no further warning.  With a U.S. government unwilling to balance or even to address its uncontainable fiscal condition; with the federal government and Federal Reserve standing ready to prevent a systemic collapse, so long as it is possible to print and spend whatever money is needed; and with the U.S. dollar at risk of losing its global reserve currency status; much higher inflation lies ahead, in a circumstance that rapidly could evolve into hyperinflation.

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

RETAIL SALES (September 2011)

September Retail Sales Boosted by Poor-Quality Seasonal Factors.  With anything close to stable monthly seasonal adjustments relative to last year, September’s 1.1% adjusted monthly sales gain would have been around 0.5%.  The concurrent seasonal factor issues, and broader distortions seen otherwise in current seasonal factors, as discussed in Commentary No. 393 and in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), continue.  The stability of the seasonal-adjustment process has been disrupted by the unprecedented depth and length of the current economic downturn in the post-World War II era (the period of modern economic reporting).

As a result, monthly changes being reported in series such as payroll employment and new orders for durable goods—in addition to the retail sales series—remain within the realm of statistical meaninglessness.  Distorted monthly reporting in these and other key series, leave the markets effectively flying blind as to actual underlying economic activity.  In such circumstances, looking at broad underlying fundamentals may be useful.  As discussed in the Opening Comments and Executive Summary, the underlying consumer fundamentals continue to signal economic deterioration, not recovery.  The broad economy remains in serious trouble.

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Retail Sales.  Today’s (October 14th) report on September 2011 retail sales—issued by the Census Bureau—indicated a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 1.13% (up by 1.53% before prior-period revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval).  September’s jump was against a revised 0.28% (previously 0.04%) monthly increase in August.  The July monthly gain also was revised higher, to 0.42% from 0.27% in last month’s reporting.

On a year-to-year basis, September 2011 retail sales were reported up by 7.94%, versus the revised year-to-year August 2011 gain of 7.53% (previously 7.16%).    

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Retail Sales.  Details on real retail sales for September will be published in the October 19th Commentary, along with details on the September 2011 CPI-U release.  While September CPI-U inflation likely increased (see Week Ahead), the gain should be well below 1.1%.  As a result, real retail sales for September most likely will show a month-to-month gain.  Despite the upside revisions to August and July’s nominal monthly gains, though, both months continue to show monthly real contractions, with August now down by 0.09% (previously down by 0.33%) and July down by 0.07% (previously down by 0.23%).

Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, “core” retail sales—consistent with the Federal Reserve’s preference for ignoring food and energy prices when “core” inflation is lower than full inflation—are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: September 2011 versus August 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues—was up by 1.3%, versus an official gain of 1.1%.

Version II: September 2011 versus August 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gas stations—was up by 1.0%, versus an official gain of 1.1%.

 

TRADE BALANCE (August 2011)

August Trade Data Still Suggest A Positive Contribution to Third-Quarter GDP.  The July trade deficit widened in revision, with the August number then reported as unchanged.  These two months of reporting, which will be used to estimate the net-export contribution in the initial third-quarter GDP report (due for release October 27th), appear to have narrowed against first-quarter reporting, suggesting a positive contribution to the quarterly GDP number.  Going forward, though, look for ongoing monthly trade deterioration.

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Trade Deficit.  The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported yesterday (October 13th) that the nominal, seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services for August 2011 held at $45.6 billion, the same level as the revised July deficit, which widened from the initial reporting of $44.8 billion.

Against the revised July data, the August trade balance showed offsetting minimal $0.1 billion monthly declines in both exports and imports.  The import numbers reflected a decline in oil prices, but also a surge in physical oil import volume.  Specifically, for the month of August 2011, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $102.62 per barrel, down from $104.27 in July 2011, but up from $73.47 in August 2010.  In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, August 2011 volume averaged 9.757 million barrels per day, up from 9.067 million in July 2011, but down from 9.905 million in August 2010.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit.  Adjusted for seasonal factors and net of oil price swings and other inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the reported August merchandise trade deficit came in at $47.0 billion, up from a revised $46.0 (previously $45.3) billion in July.

Based on the two months of reporting that will be used in estimating the net export component of third-quarter GDP, the annualized deficit for the third-quarter would be $557.6 billion (previously estimated at $543.3 billion from the initial one month’s reporting).  Although widened from the initial estimate, it still is narrower than the full reporting of an annualized real second-quarter 2011 merchandise deficit of $567.4 billion.  The likely estimate of a quarterly narrowing of the trade deficit would be a positive for the GDP’s net export account and, accordingly, a positive contribution to the initial estimate of third-quarter GDP growth.

 

Week Ahead.  Although still not fully acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and an escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Industrial Production (September 2011).  The September 2011 industrial production release is scheduled for Monday, October 17th.  The consensus estimate for the headline monthly change in September production likely will be for modest growth, above the 0.2% increase initially reported for August.  Reporting risk, however, generally will be to the downside of consensus, with a flat-to-minus result, as a formal double-dip recession begins to unfold in the numbers.

Producer Price Index—PPI (September 2011).  The release of the September 2011 PPI is scheduled for Tuesday, October 18th.  Finished goods inflation should top a likely flat-to-minus consensus outlook, due to the effects of still-spreading broader inflationary pressures from earlier higher oil prices.

Consumer Price Index—CPI (September 2011).  The release of the September 2011 CPI is scheduled for Wednesday, October 19th.  Headline consumer inflation, once again, is at fair risk of topping a likely relatively soft consensus.  At work here remains the continued boost to gasoline prices from seasonal adjustments (catch-up from depressed reporting of gasoline prices from earlier in the year), while further inflationary pressures from the recent Fed-induced jump in oil prices continue spreading beyond direct energy cost measures in the general, broad economy.

Specifically, in terms of retail gasoline, unadjusted prices fell on average by 0.8% in September 2011 per the Department of Energy.  Suggestive of the likely seasonal-adjustment impact on 2011 reporting, an unadjusted 1.4% monthly decline in September 2010 gasoline prices was boosted to a 1.6% increase, after seasonal adjustments.

Year-to-year total CPI-U inflation would increase or decrease in September 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.16% gain in the adjusted monthly level reported for September 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual unadjusted inflation rate for September 2011, the difference in September’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly headline change should be added to or subtracted directly from August 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 3.77%.  For example, if the headline CPI-U gained 0.3% in September, annual CPI-U inflation should move to about 3.9%.

Housing Starts (September 2011).  September residential construction data are due for release on Wednesday, October 19th.  The historic weakness in housing starts should continue, again, with an intensifying downtrend.  As seen generally in the last several years, any upside movement likely will not be statistically meaningful.

 

__________

No. 393: September Employment, Unemployment, M3, Special Commentary

Friday, October 7th, 2011


COMMENTARY NUMBER 393
September Employment, Unemployment, M3, Special Commentary

October 7, 2011

__________

September Payroll Gain Was Statistically Meaningless

Broadest Government Unemployment Rate Jumped by 0.3% to 16.5%

September Unemployment: 9.1% (U.3), 16.5% (U.6), 23.1% (SGS)

Annual Money Supply M3 Growth Inched Higher in September

Economic and Systemic-Solvency Crises Intensify

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, October 14th.  It will cover September retail sales and the August trade deficit.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

SPECIAL COMMENTARY

Do Not Blame Europe.  Broad systemic and economic instabilities have been ongoing in the United States for more than three years, and the crises appear headed for a near-term crescendo.  All the extreme monetary and fiscal measures taken by the Federal Reserve and the U.S. government in 2008, and later, aimed at preventing a collapse of the U.S. financial system, and ostensibly intended to stimulate the economy, have done little to fix either the banking system or the economy.  Sovereign and systemic issues in the euro area, however, are receiving heavy blame from the Obama administration and some market analysts both for mounting questions on systemic problems and for concerns of an intensifying U.S. economic downturn.  The problems, however, always have been primarily U.S.-based and due to domestic economic, monetary and regulatory policies.  Blaming the euro area for U.S. problems is little more than a foil aimed at distracting attention from the catastrophic fiscal and Fed-policy issues threatening long-term U.S. solvency and the U.S. dollar.

The U.S. markets have been extraordinarily violent and unstable since the U.S. government demonstrated its inability and unwillingness to control its sovereign finances in early-August 2011.  As the dollar entered a tailspin, various actions by governments and financial regulators were undertaken, aimed at quelling the instabilities.  The euro crisis suddenly intensified anew (distracting the markets from the great overhanging crisis with the U.S. dollar).  Yet, the underlying negative U.S. dollar fundamentals persist and cannot be altered easily.  Accordingly, near-term relative U.S. dollar strength against gold, silver and the stronger currencies should prove to be short-lived.

As was established with the 2008 crisis, central banks (primarily the Fed) and various governments (primarily the U.S. government—even though more politically splintered at present) will do whatever is necessary to prevent a collapse of the banking and financial systems.  The Fed and the U.S. government still will provide whatever guarantees are needed, whatever money has to be created, spent or loaned out, in order to prevent systemic failure.  This includes any sovereign or non-U.S.-bank bailouts required to prevent systemic collapse.  The costs of such actions remain inflation or U.S. dollar debasement.  They can continue only so long as the global markets allow them, until the U.S. dollar comes under massive, sustained selling pressure.

SYSTEMIC ISSUES.  When the Treasury Secretary has to deny vehemently (in response to Congressional questioning) that any major U.S. banks are at risk of failure, systemic instability is beginning to break into the light of day.   Per Dow Jones of October 6th:  “When asked at a Senate Banking Committee whether the euro-zone sovereign debt crisis could bring down Morgan Stanley or another major financial institution, Geithner said, ‘Absolutely not.’”

Banks generally are not increasing lending.  Per the Fed’s recent second-quarter Flow of Funds report, total bank credit issued by U.S chartered banks, seasonally-adjusted for second-quarter 2001, was down by 0.8% quarter-quarter, unchanged on an unadjusted basis, and down by 0.4% year-to-year.  While there certainly are issues as to credit-worthy borrowers, I contend that the weakness in lending is due more to still-impaired bank balance sheets than to any other factor.  As a result, broad money growth remains tepid.

Money Supply M3 (September 2011).  Based on roughly three weeks of data, the preliminary estimate of the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate for September 2011 will be published in the Alternate Data section on October 8th.  September M3 is on track to show year-to-year growth of about 2.6%, up from 2.4% in August and 2.5% in July.  These numbers reflect the latest regular benchmark revisions by the Fed to its money and banking data.  The seasonally-adjusted, month-to-month change estimate for M3 likely will be on the plus-side of unchanged, as it was in August and July.   The estimated month-to-month M3 changes, however, remain less reliable than the estimates of annual growth.

Similar flattening in the relative monthly estimates of annual growth, as well as in month-to month changes, also is likely for the narrower M1 and M2 measures (M2 includes M1, M3 includes M2). M2 for September is on track to show year-to-year growth of about 10.1%, versus 10.3% in August, with month-to-month growth estimated at roughly 0.3% in September versus 2.5% in August.  The early estimate on M1 for September shows year-to-year growth of roughly 20.0% versus 20.8% in August, with month-to-month growth estimated at roughly 0.6% in September, versus 5.1% in August.  The relatively stronger annual growth rates in M1 and M2 reflect the recent shifting of funds out of M3 accounts into M1 and M2 accounts.

Fed Easing Remains Likely.  With ongoing economic and systemic-solvency crises, the Fed remains likely to institute some new form of liquidity injection for the banking system, soon, despite protestations to the contrary.  That action, though, should continue under the guise of trying to stimulate the economy.  Neither the Fed nor the Administration is in a position to put forth meaningful economic stimulation, although action by both entities remains expected or hoped for by the markets and/or the electorate.  As a point of clarification, I am not advocating any specific actions, only offering my opinion as to what likely will unfold.

U.S. ECONOMY: Employment and Unemployment (September 2011).  The stronger-than-expected 103,000 gain reported in September payrolls was, as usual, statistically meaningless.  Even with a 45,000 one-time boost from Verizon strikers returning, the 95% statistical confidence interval around the monthly jobs increase allowed for an outright monthly payroll contraction, as well as for monthly growth.  Also, as commonly has been the case, changes in seasonal factors, which are recalculated each month, have shifted growth into the current period from revised prior reporting.  Those revisions, however, are not published.  The overall patterns in payroll employment were little changed, with current payroll levels below where they were 10 years ago. 

Also, as usual, the unchanged 9.1% headline U.3 unemployment rate could have reflected a 0.2% increase or decrease, within the official statistical confidence interval.  The government’s broader U.6 rate, however, jumped to 16.5% in September from 16.3% in August, and the SGS Alternate Unemployment rate rose in tandem to 23.1% from 20.8%.  The unemployment rates are heavily skewed by seasonal-adjustment issues, with the resulting adjusted data currently of little meaning.

As can be seen with the U.S. payroll employment data, shown below, the U.S. economy entered a free-fall in late-2007 and then began to flatten-out—bottom-bounce—by late-2009, early-2010.  The plot of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels shows a recent slowing of growth and certainly no recovery to pre-recession highs.  The data continue to bottom-bounce along a plateau of low-level activity, with the latest payroll level still well below where it was a decade ago, even though the U.S. population has increased by more than 10% in the same period. 

The economic downturn is worsening, fueled as it was in 2007 by structural problems in consumer income, where the average household could not keep its income growing fast enough to cover inflation, and where consumer credit quickly dried up, preventing the use of debt expansion to cover the shortfall in income (see the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) and Commentary No. 389 for greater detail).

 

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Economic and Systemic Solvency Crises Continue to Unfold. Repeated from the prior Commentaries, there are no happy solutions available here, only tools—devil’s choices—for the Fed and the U.S. government buying a little extra time.  From the Fed’s standpoint, keeping the banking system afloat remains its primary concern, although needs for economic growth and contained inflation will be given as the rationale behind any overt change in policy.  The ultimate cost in propping the system, however, remains inflation.  The economic and systemic-solvency crises and the broad inflation and economic issues detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) and in recent Commentaries, continue to unfold with outlooks that remain unchanged.

The root source of current global systemic instabilities largely has been the financially-dominant United States, and it is against the U.S. dollar that the global markets ultimately should turn, massively.  The Fed and the U.S. Treasury likely will do whatever has to be done to prevent a euro-area crisis from triggering a systemic collapse in the United States.  Accordingly, it is not from a euro-related crisis, but rather from within the U.S. financial system and financial-authority actions that an eventual U.S. systemic failure likely will be triggered, seen initially in a rapidly accelerating pace of domestic inflation—ultimately hyperinflation.

The financial markets still are roiled by deepening crises of confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the long-term outlook for U.S. financial, economic, systemic and political stability.  For those living in a U.S. dollar-denominated world, regardless of further near-term extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar—in either direction—versus the stronger major currencies and gold, the stronger currencies and precious metals remain the fundamental hedges against what lies ahead.

Massive, fundamental dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated assets could start at anytime, with little or no further warning.  With a U.S. government unwilling to balance or even to address its uncontainable fiscal condition; with the federal government and Federal Reserve standing ready to prevent a systemic collapse, so long as it is possible to print and spend whatever money is needed; and with the U.S. dollar at risk of losing its global reserve currency status; much higher inflation lies ahead, in a circumstance that rapidly could evolve into hyperinflation.

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

EMPLOYMENT AND UNEMPLOYMENT (SEPTEMBER 2011)

Constant Recalculation of Payroll Seasonal Factors Boosted September Payrolls.  The BLS practice of using “concurrent” seasonal-factor adjustments artificially shifted previously reported jobs growth into September 2011, and that resulted in boosting the reported September monthly gain.  Also the revised July month-to-month payroll gain was inflated to 107,000, from the 99,000 that would have been seen with consistent reporting.

As discussed in prior writings (see the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), for example), seasonal-factor estimation for most economic series has been distorted severely by the extreme depth and duration of the economic contraction.  These distortions are exacerbated for payroll employment data based on the BLS’s monthly seasonal-factor re-estimations and lack of full reporting.

While the BLS recalculates the monthly seasonal factors each month for payroll employment, going back a number of years, it only publishes revised data for the last two months of reporting (July and August 2011 with the September 2011 report).  Shown in the following graph, the latest “concurrent” seasonal factor changes upped September 2010 (with implied stronger seasonals and a boost for the September 2011 reporting).  With just two months of prior reporting shown as revised, the changes pre-July 2011 were not published by the BLS, so as to avoid “confusing” people who use the data.  

As discussed repeatedly in recent employment Commentaries, meaningful seasonal-adjustments tend to be stable over time, without wild fluctuations every time the seasonals are re-estimated.  This is true particularly for series like payroll employment and retail sales, where the seasonal factors are concurrent—recalculated each month for the current month’s raw data.  If the payroll seasonals were stable, the lines in the graph would be flat and coincident.  Instead, the variations intensify with each successive month.  The monthly recalculations of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels show irregular revisions, with monthly swings now of plus or minus 90,000 jobs shifting over time.  To the extent the numbers affect current reporting, the differences are enough potentially to alter financial-market perceptions and reactions. 

The big issue remains that the month-to-month seasonally-adjusted payroll data have become increasingly worthless, with reporting errors likely now well beyond the official 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000 jobs in the reported monthly payroll change.  Yet the media and the markets tout the data as meaningful, usually without question or qualification.

 

 

The inconsistency differences in the graph were calculated based on the raw unadjusted data and the seasonal-adjustment program available to the public on the BLS Web site.  Using the BLS data, we have calculated the seasonally-adjusted numbers as the BLS should be showing them, as of the current reporting, and the differences between official reporting and the consistent seasonally-adjusted series.

Payroll Survey Detail.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported today (October 7th) a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted September 2011 month-to-month jobs gain of 103,000 (a gain of 202,000 jobs before prior-period revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval).  August payrolls showed a revised 57,000 gain (previously unchanged), while July’s monthly gain also increased in revision, to 107,000, versus last month’s estimate of an 85,000 gain.  As noted in the comments on concurrent seasonal adjustment, the revised monthly gain for July really was 99,000, based on the BLS seasonal-factor detail, but revisions for June 2011 and before are not reported by the BLS.  Accordingly, the revised “official” July monthly gain was against an unrevised and inconsistent June number.

September’s monthly gain of 103,000 reflected the return to work of 45,000 striking Verizon workers, reversing downside pressures of same on prior reporting.  The estimated level of September’s payroll employment still was below the level reported 10 years ago.

In terms of year-to-year change, the unadjusted September 2011 growth rate was at 1.12%, versus the revised 1.09% (previously 0.99%) reported in August, and against 0.97% (previously 0.94%) annual growth reported for July.  Although the graphs of long-term year-to-year unadjusted payroll change had shown a rising trend in annual growth, which primarily reflected the still-protracted bottom-bouncing in the payroll series, that pattern has flattened out in recent months, as shown in the first graph following of the near-term detail in year-to-year change.  These numbers still reflect some short-lived year-to-year distortions as a result of the year-ago hiring surge and full layoffs of temporary census workers.

 

 

 

As shown in the next, longer-term graph (historical detail back to World War II), with the bottom-bouncing of recent years, current annual growth has recovered from the post-World War II record 5.06% decline in August 2009, which was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II (a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945).  Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the August 2009 annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression, yet the current level of employment is far from any recovery.

 

 

 

The regular graph of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels is shown in the Special Commentary section.

Payroll Benchmark Revision.  On September 29th, the BLS published a preliminary upside benchmark revision to March 2011 unadjusted nonfarm payrolls.  The estimated 192,000 positive revision suggests there was a monthly-average understatement of 16,000 jobs in the period from April 2010 to March 2011.  Reporting history will not be revised until the February 2012 release of the January 2012 payrolls. The relatively small preliminary upside revision follows three consecutive larger downside annual revisions, and it should not affect current reporting.  In the final accounting, the BLS will distribute the revision going back a year from the March 2011, as well as carrying forward a relatively more positive monthly reporting through January 2012.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  Despite the ongoing and regular overstatement of monthly payroll employment—as evidenced usually by regular and massive, annual downward benchmark revisions—the BLS generally has upped its monthly biases in post-benchmark reporting.  Reversing patterns, in the wake of the upside benchmark preliminary revision for March 2011 (see previous section), however, the monthly bias used in September 2011 was a more-negative subtraction of 43,000 jobs, versus a 25,000 subtraction in September 2010.  That followed an add factor for August 2011 of 87,000 jobs, somewhat less positive than the 91,000 monthly upside bias used in August 2010.   The net aggregate annual upside biases used at present, however, still well exceed the 192,000 tentative upside benchmark revision and remain suggestive of ongoing in stabilities in the Birth-Death Model.

The aggregated upside annual bias reflects an ongoing assumption of a net positive jobs creation by new companies versus those going out business.  Such becomes a self-fulfilling system, as the upside biases boost reporting for financial-market and political needs, with relatively good headline data, while often also setting downside benchmark revisions for the next year, which traditionally are ignored by the media and the politicians.  Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business, on a timely basis (within at least five years, if ever), such information is estimated by the addition of a bias-factor generated by the Birth-Death Model (a model of the effects of new business creation and old business bankruptcies).  The fundamental defects of the Birth-Death Model are discussed as usual in the ensuing paragraphs.

Positive assumptions—commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling—can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with “stronger” economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates, or underlying assumptions of ongoing economic recovery.  Indeed, historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels—to understate employment declines—during recessions.   There is a faulty underlying premise here that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business.  So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, the presumed net additional “surplus” jobs created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor.  These add-factors have averaged 40,000 jobs per month over the last 12 months.  I still estimate this monthly bias should be significantly on the negative side, on average, but I am re-assessing the 200,000 negative bias estimate based on updated survey information.  I do not expect a significant change in the estimate and will update it in a future Commentary.  I do expect a significant downside benchmark revision for next year (March 2012), given current details of the BLS’s happy estimates.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (counting multiple job holders more than once), showed a September 2011 employment gain of 398,000 versus a 331,000 gain in August and a 38,000 decline in July.  Issues with seasonal factors still meaningfully cloud the significance of the reported monthly levels in the adjusted headline U.3 unemployment rate and other adjusted household-survey numbers.  Again, adjusted data have been shifted by highly unstable seasonal factors that are artifacts of the severe and extraordinarily protracted downturn in U.S. economic activity (as well as distortions created by last year’s census hiring and firing effects), not by the regular and stable seasonal patterns that were in place before the current economic crisis.

The September 2011 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate was virtually unchanged for a second month, with a statistically-insignificant 0.01 percentage point decline to 9.08% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), versus 9.09% both August and July.  Not-seasonally-adjusted, September’s U.3 unemployment rate was 8.8%, down from 9.1% in August and 9.3% in July.

The September U.6 unemployment rate jumped to a seasonally-adjusted 16.5%, from 16.2% in August and 16.1% in July.  The unadjusted U.6 rate eased to 15.7% in September, down from 16.1% in August and 16.3% in July.  The broadest unemployment rate published by the BLS, U.6 includes accounting for those marginally attached to the labor force (including short-term discouraged workers) and those who are employed part-time for economic reasons (they cannot find a full-time job).

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, “discouraged workers”—those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had—were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been “discouraged” for less than a year.  This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers.  The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the SGS estimate of excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed and labor force, unemployment—more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure—rose to 23.1% in September, up from 22.8% in August and 22.7% in July.  The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting, and tends to follow its relative monthly movements. Accordingly, it will suffer some of the current seasonal-adjustment woes afflicting the base series.  See the Alternate Data tab for more detail.

 

 

As discussed in previous writings, an unemployment rate near 23% might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%.  The SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession.  The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms.  Today, less that 2% work on farms.  Accordingly, for purposes of Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

 

Week Ahead.  Although still not fully acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and an escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

U.S. Trade Balance (August).  The August trade deficit is due for release on Thursday, October 13th.  The general trend here should remain one of general deterioration against recent month-to-month volatility, with reporting risk favoring greater trade deficit widening than likely will be estimated by consensus.  The August report will be the last one available to the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) for its first guess at third-quarter GDP.  Accordingly, a much worse-than-expected deterioration in the deficit would be suggestive of weaker third-quarter growth than had been suggested by initial improved July trade reporting, and vice versa.

Retail Sales (September).  The first estimate of September retail is scheduled for Friday, October 14th.  Risk remains to the downside of a likely positive consensus outlook.  As generally has been the case year-to-date, any reported monthly growth likely will be flat-to-negative after accounting for September’s consumer price inflation.

 

__________

No. 392: Benchmark Payroll and GDP Revisions, August Durable Goods and Home Sales

Thursday, September 29th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 392
Benchmark Payroll and GDP Revisions, August Durable Goods and Home Sales

September 29, 2011

__________

 

GDP Revised Higher, GDI Revised Lower,
Growth Remained Statistically Indistinguishable from a Contraction

Average Monthly Understatement of 16,000 Jobs for
Year-Ended March 2011 (per BLS)

Home Sales Keep Bottom-Bouncing
Despite Having Covered Sales Lost to Stimulus Efforts

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, October 7th.  It will cover the September employment and unemployment data. A Special Commentary likely will be included, if it has not been published earlier in response to escalating systemic instability.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  Economic reporting of the last week held few surprises with no change in the general economic outlook.  As discussed in recent Commentaries and the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), the U.S. economy remains in its deepest and most-protracted downturn since the Great Depression, and chances for any meaningful improvement in broad economic activity remain nil for the foreseeable future.  The systemic solvency crisis and the structural issues with consumer income and liquidity continue to constrain broad consumption patterns as well as the demand for housing.

Payroll Benchmark Revision.  One surprise this week was today’s (September 29th) Bureau of Labor Statistics’ (BLS) preliminary upside benchmark revision to March 2011 unadjusted nonfarm payrolls.  The estimated 192,000 positive revision means a monthly-average understatement of 16,000 jobs since the March 2010 count.  I had expected a downside revision and will discuss that further in the Commentary of October 7th, which will cover the September 2011 payroll release.  The final benchmark will be published in February 2012.  The relatively small preliminary upside revision follows three consecutive larger downside annual revisions, and it should not affect current reporting (see Week Ahead section).

Online Help-Wanted Advertising.  Sending out negative signals on the labor market is the Conference Board’s online help-wanted advertising measure.  The no-longer-published newspaper help-wanted advertising index was one of the best leading indicators to employment and general economic activity.  The online measure still has a limited track record (since 2005) and may have some upside bias built into it from still-growing usage of the online medium for help-wanted ads.

That said, seasonally-adjusted total online help-wanted advertising fell for the fourth consecutive month in September, down by 11.2% or 524,000 job offerings since May.  September’s new ads, contracting in two of the last four months, were down 6.1% from May.  While I consider the new ads to be the better economic indicator, the pattern here is a negative one, in any event, for upcoming payroll reporting.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance.  Despite repeated writings on the worthlessness of the individual weekly claims numbers (except for creating stock-market gyrations and financial-media frenzies), I constantly get queries as to what a big gain or loss in weekly jobless claims means.  Big weekly movements usually have no significance, because they most often are tied to the Department of Labor’s inability to make meaningful weekly seasonal adjustments, particularly around holidays, etc.

To make sense of the numbers, one has to look at some type of smoothing, such as a moving average, and the four-week moving average is the popular measure.  Based on today’s reporting (with a market-spiking sharp weekly decline), the four-week moving average was 417,000.  Going back to the beginning of the year, the first weekly reporting of January 2011 showed the four-week moving average at 418,000.

Further, in a depressed labor market, where payrolls stand below where they were 10 years ago, one cannot expect “benchmarks” from less-severe economic circumstances to be meaningful in the current environment.  Some analysts, for example, tout as a “rule of thumb” that weekly new claims below 400,000 signal growing employment.  That is simplistic at best, given the extraordinary magnitude of jobs already lost and in the context of underlying labor conditions such demand for new hires.

One needs to consider the balancing factor to new claims for unemployment insurance (basically layoffs): hiring.  The best indicator of current demand for labor is help-wanted advertising (see previous section), which has been in contraction for the last four months.

GDP.  With second-quarter growth still statistically indistinguishable from a quarterly contraction, the latest revision to second-quarter gross domestic product (GDP) took the headline growth rate back to the initial reporting of 1.3%, versus 1.0% in the first revision.  That was against 0.4% growth in the first-quarter.  Year-to-year growth slowed in the second-quarter to 1.6% from 2.2% in the first-quarter.

At the same time, gross domestic income (GDI)—the GDP’s theoretical equivalent—was revised lower.  The boost in GDP came from an upward revision estimated for vacation spending.  Only in the national income accounts (GDP, GDI, etc.) is that likely to happen alongside a downward revision in income.

New Orders for Durable Goods.  The 0.1% decline reported for August new orders for durable goods was no more than statistical noise, well within the scope of regular volatility for this series.

New Home Sales.  Enough time has passed for the short-lived gains from the housing stimulus measures—home sales borrowed from future activity—to have run their course, and the cost to future activity appears largely to have been paid.  Although such should be relatively positive for home sales, sales numbers continued bottom-bouncing in August, with new home sales in a new downtrend.  The housing issues remain tied to the systemic solvency crisis and to the structural liquidity issues hampering consumers and homeowners.

Combined existing and new home sales in August 2011 are now basically at the same level they were in August 2008 (the first month following the initial housing-stimulus enactment), and also as averaged over the intervening period.  The ensuing stimulated sales boosts and countervailing stimulus-expiration losses have averaged out to what otherwise would have been three-years of bottom bouncing (as seen in housing starts, Commentary No. 391). 

In August 2008, the first full month following enactment of the initial stimulus, total monthly (not the annualized pace used in the headline data), seasonally-adjusted home sales were 447.1 thousand (410.8 thousand existing homes, 36.3 thousand new homes).   The August 2011 number was 443.8 thousand (419.2 thousand existing homes, 24.6 thousand new homes), while the intervening average through all the sales gyrations was 444.9 thousand (416.1 thousand existing homes, 28.8 thousand new homes).  The greater relative weakness has been with the new home sales and related construction, which impact GDP directly.

As was widely recognized at the time, stimulus efforts to encourage home buying through tax breaks did little more than borrow activity from the future, moving it into the period of the stimulus.  Since August of 2008, following enactment of the first new homebuyer tax credit, home sales repeatedly surged and sank along with various stimulus efforts and expirations of same.  That volatility, perhaps, is most visible in the existing home sales graph among the three charts that follow.

Note in the two graphs of home sales that the downturns start in 2005, while the downturn in housing starts began to reflect the underlying market in early-2006, nearly two years before the official onset of the recession.  It is this weakness that led to the debt crisis in 2007, which, in turn, exacerbated the downturn.  It was not the debt crisis that triggered the recession.

 

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Financial System Instabilities Continue.  The financial markets and systemic conditions remain in turmoil and are extremely dangerous.  Various heads of state, finance ministers, central bankers, Treasury Secretary Geithner and Fed Chairman Bernanke continue to behave and talk as though the system is at risk.  It well may be, although Mr. Bernanke took no meaningful overt action last week to create new systemic liquidity.  A Special Commentary on the systemic liquidity crisis will be published before or with the October 7th Commentary on September labor conditions.

Repeated from the prior Commentary, there are no happy solutions available here, only tools—devil’s choices—for buying a little extra time.  From the Fed’s standpoint, keeping the banking system afloat remains its primary concern, although needs for economic growth and contained inflation will be given as the rationale behind any overt change in policy.  The ultimate cost in propping the system, however, remains inflation.  The economic and systemic-solvency crises and the broad inflation and economic issues detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) and recent Commentaries, continue to unfold with outlooks that remain unchanged.

The root source of current global systemic instabilities largely has been the financially-dominant United States, and it is against the U.S. dollar that the global markets ultimately should turn, massively.  The Fed and the U.S. Treasury likely will do whatever has to be done to prevent a euro-area crisis from triggering a systemic collapse in the United States.  Accordingly, it is not from a euro-related crisis, but rather from within the U.S. financial system and financial-authority actions that an eventual U.S. systemic failure likely will be triggered, seen initially in a rapidly accelerating pace of domestic inflation—ultimately hyperinflation.

The financial markets still are roiled by deepening crises of confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the long-term outlook for U.S. financial, economic, systemic and political stability.  For those living in a U.S. dollar-denominated world, regardless of further near-term extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar—in either direction—versus the stronger major currencies and gold, the stronger currencies and precious metals remain the fundamental hedges against what lies ahead.

Massive, fundamental dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated assets could start at anytime, with little or no further warning.  With a U.S. government unwilling to balance or even to address its uncontainable fiscal condition; with the federal government and Federal Reserve standing ready to prevent a systemic collapse, so long as it is possible to print and spend whatever money is needed; and with the U.S. dollar at risk of losing its global reserve currency status; much higher inflation lies ahead, in a circumstance that rapidly could evolve into hyperinflation.

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

NONFARM PAYROLLS (March 2011 Benchmark Revision, Preliminary Estimate)

BLS Estimated Average Understatement of 16,000 Jobs per Month for Year-Ended March 2011. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) published its preliminary estimate of the 2011 nonfarm payroll benchmark revision this morning (September 29th).  The initial not-seasonally-adjusted benchmarking for March 2011 indicated that payrolls had been understated by 192,000 (an average of 16,000 per month) since the prior benchmarking of March 2010.  The latest revision follows three years of larger downside benchmark revisions.

Final benchmarking detail will be published on February 3, 2012 (the January 2012 employment release).  The benchmarking should have no impact on monthly payroll reporting, prior to the January 2012 release, assuming traditional reporting patterns are followed.

 

GROSS DOMESTIC PRODUCT—GDP (Second-Quarter 2011, Third Estimate, Second Revision)

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

Reported GDP Growth Still Is Statistically Indistinguishable from Contraction.  As discussed in the Opening Comments and Executive Summary, the revised second-quarter GDP growth estimate remained statistically insignificant, while the revision itself was little more than statistical noise.  The consumption-side GDP revised higher by 0.3%, thanks largely to stronger personal consumption (recreation services—vacations), but the income-side-equivalent GDI revised lower by 0.2%.  Revisions at the same time for stronger consumption and weaker income are suggestive of possible internal discrepancies in the GDP model.

GDP.  Published today, September 29th, by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the third-estimate or second-revision of second-quarter 2011 gross domestic product (GDP) showed annualized real quarterly growth of 1.33% (versus the second estimate of 0.99% and initial reporting of 1.28%) +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), versus an estimated annualized gain of 0.36% for first-quarter 2011.  Not annualized, second-quarter GDP growth revised to 0.33%, against a second estimate of 0.25% and initial reporting of 0.32%, and up from 0.09% in the first-quarter.  In this most worthless of major economic series, the reported annualized growth rates for the last two quarters are little more than statistical noise around the unchanged level.  They possibly have been massaged to keep the quarterly growth rates in minimally-positive as opposed to minimally-negative territory.

Year-to-year real change in second-quarter 2011 GDP retained its slowing trend, up by a revised 1.63%, versus a second estimate of 1.55% (that rounds to 1.5%) and initial reporting of 1.62%, and versus 2.24% in the first-quarter.  Such remained well off the near-term peak in reported growth of 3.51% in third-quarter 2010.

The estimate of the second-quarter GDP implicit price deflator (IPD) was revised to 2.59%, up from the second-estimate of 2.50% and initial reporting of 2.39%, versus 2.73% in the first-quarter.  In contrast, annualized seasonally-adjusted quarterly inflation for the CPI-U in the second-quarter eased to 4.09% from a seasonally-adjusted 5.22% in the first-quarter.  On a year-to-year basis, the second-quarter IPD was up by 0.64%, versus 0.67% in the first-quarter.  In contrast, second-quarter CPI-U surged to 3.43%, versus 2.14% in the first-quarter.

The lower the inflation rate that is used in deflating the GDP, the stronger is the resulting inflation-adjusted number and vice versa.  A slightly more realistic inflation number would have pushed the second-quarter GDP quarterly growth rate into negative territory.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for second-quarter 2011 remains an approximate annual contraction of 2.8% versus the official revised estimate of a 1.6% gain.  Such is more negative than the alternate 2.6% annual contraction (2.2% official gain) in the first-quarter (see the Alternate Data tab).  While annualized real quarterly growth is not estimated formally on an alternative basis, a meaningful quarter-to-quarter contraction appears to have been realistic for the second-quarter, in what generally has been a protracted period of business bottom-bouncing.

GNP.  GDP is Gross national product (GNP) net of international flows in factor income (dividend and interest payments).  Although boosted by money-flow distortions from the ongoing systemic-solvency crisis, GNP growth still is statistically insignificant, with annualized real quarterly growth reported at a revised 2.16% (initially 1.70%) in the second-quarter, versus 1.45% in the first-quarter (0.54% [initially 0.42%] versus 0.36%, not annualized).   Year-to-year growth revised to 2.01% (initially 1.89%), versus 2.59% in the first-quarter.

GDI.  Gross domestic income (GDI) is the theoretical income-side equivalent to the GDP’s consumption-side.  Reflecting revised income reporting, the statistically-insignificant, annualized real quarterly growth in GDI revised lower to 1.34% (initially 1.55%) in the second-quarter, versus 2.45% in the first.  Year-to-year change revised to 1.94% (initially 2.00%) in the second-quarter, versus 2.55% in the first-quarter.

 

NEW ORDERS FOR DURABLE GOODS (August 2011)

August Durable Goods Orders Decline Still Included Strong Airplane Orders.  The Census Bureau reported September 28th that the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods fell for the month by 0.1% (rose by 0.2% before prior-period revisions) in August 2011, following a revised 4.1% (previously 4.0%) gain reported for July.  August’s monthly contraction was despite a 23.5% jump in irregular, long-term nondefense aircraft orders, a category that showed a revised 49.9% (previously 43.4%) surge in July.  Airplane orders usually are placed years in advance of delivery and rarely impact near-term economic activity.

Unadjusted, year-to-year growth in total August 2011 new orders was 14.1%, versus a revised 9.5% (previously 9.2%) annual gain in July.  Current durable goods reporting remains subject to many of the same sampling and seasonal-adjustment problems that are seen with retail sales and payroll reporting.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders increased in August by 5.2% (up by 7.4% before prior-period revisions), versus a revised monthly 4.3% (previously 2.4%) increase in July.  For August, the unadjusted year-to-year growth in the series was 25.4%, up from July’s revised 13.8% (previously 12.5%) annual growth estimate.

 

EXISTING AND NEW HOME SALES (August 2011)

Three Years Later, All Housing Stimulus Gains Having Evaporated in Offsets.  Combined existing and new home sales in August 2011 are basically the same level they were in August 2008 (first month following the initial housing-stimulus enactment), and also as averaged over the intervening period.  The ensuing stimulated sales boosts and countervailing stimulus-expiration losses have averaged out to what otherwise would have been three-years of bottom bouncing.  Enough time has passed that paying for the “borrowed” sales has run its course.  While that could be a positive for home sales, ongoing weakness continues, reflecting the residential market still taking a full hit from the fundamental and ongoing consumer structural income problems and illiquidity (see discussion and graphs in Opening Comments and Executive Summary.

Existing Home Sales Bounce A Little Higher.  The September 21st release of August existing-home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 7.7%, versus July’s unrevised decline of 3.5%.  On a year-to-year basis, August sales jumped by 18.6%, versus an unrevised 21.0% in July.  The relatively strong annual growth still reflects the lapsing of year-ago end-of-stimulus effects.

Foreclosure activity remained a major distorting factor for home sales, with "distressed" activity accounting for an estimated 31% of existing sales in the NAR’s August’s reporting, up from the 29% estimated for July.

August New Home Sales Showed a Further, Downtrending Bottom-Bounce. Consistent with the long-term negative trends in housing starts (see the prior Commentary No. 391 for August details), the September 26th release of August new-home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) showed an ongoing pattern of a bottom-bounce at a slowing pace, nearing last year’s historic low.  August’s decline of 2.3% (down 1.0% before prior-period revisions) +/- 16.2% (95% confidence interval) from July was statistically insignificant.  In turn, July’s decline was revised to a 0.3% drop (previously down by 0.7%) versus June.  The year-to-year gain in August 2011 new-home sales was a statistically-insignificant 6.1% +/- 22.0% (95% confidence interval).  July’s annual gain was revised to 8.2% (previously 6.8%). 

As with existing homes sales, the positive annual change is due to the effects of the lapsing of housing stimulus efforts a year ago.  Also, part of the new sales volume is due to foreclosure activity, but the Census Bureau does not provide an estimate of foreclosure volume. 

The following graphs reflect a level of finer monthly detail than seen in the charts of the Opening Comments and Executive Summary.

 

Week Ahead.  Although still not fully acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and an escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Unemployment Rate and Payroll Employment (September 2011).  Nonfarm payrolls and the unemployment rate for September 2011 are due for release on Friday, October 7th.  This first major indicator of September economic activity likely will show continued deterioration in broad economic conditions.  A pattern of weaker-than-expected reporting, against likely soft consensus expectations for the labor market, is a fair bet to be seen with the September numbers.

Payrolls remain at risk of showing an outright monthly contraction, with the unemployment rate notching higher.  Yet, as seen with last month’s (August) zero monthly change in headline payrolls and unemployment rate, whatever is reported likely will include a payroll contraction and higher unemployment rate within the 95% statistical reporting confidence intervals (+/- 129,000 for payroll change, +/- 0.2% for the unemployment rate).   As has been the case for some time, unstable seasonal adjustments can distort the reported monthly changes in these series meaningfully.

The preliminary estimate of the 2011 payroll benchmark revision should have no bearing on near-term reporting.  The weakness in online help-wanted advertising (see Opening Comments and Executive Summary), though, is suggestive of outright monthly payroll contractions in near-term payroll reporting.

 

__________

No. 391: August Housing Starts

Tuesday, September 20th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 391
August Housing Starts

September 20, 2011

__________

Following a 75% Crash in Housing Industry,
Housing Starts Near Three-Years of Bottom-Bouncing

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Thursday, September 29th.  It will cover August home sales, new orders for durable goods and the second revision to second-quarter GDP.  A Special Commentary would be published, as appropriate, in response to any unusual market or economic developments.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  The U.S. economy remains in its deepest and most-protracted downturn since the Great Depression, and chances for any meaningful improvement in broad economic activity remain nil for the foreseeable future.  Constraining activity are the systemic solvency crisis and, most fundamentally, the structural problems with consumer income, where household income cannot keep up with inflation (see the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) and Commentary No. 389).

One of the more heavily hit industries has been housing, where residential activity is a major driver behind such economic and financial elements as consumer and banking-system liquidity; retail sales ranging from home-decorating and yard-work needs to durable goods production and sales (washers, dryers, dishwashers, furniture, etc.); sales of lumber, wiring, concrete, construction equipment, etc.; and the full range of employment tied to those industries and of course to construction, real estate, banking, etc.  The economy, in turn, has taken secondary and tertiary hits on consumption and production from reduced spending by those whose financial circumstances have been impaired by housing industry woes.

As reflected by housing starts, industry activity peaked in 2005/early-2006 and then crashed by 75% through the end of 2008.  For nearly three years since December 2008—thirty-three months—industry activity has been bottom-bouncing, and the recent trend has been towards a renewed period of decline.

In a week light in major economic releases, this morning’s publication of the August 2011 housing starts data showed a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly decline of 5.0% (down 5.8% year-to-year), to an annualized level of 571,000 starts.  The monthly average around which activity has been fluctuating since December 2008 is 572,000.  The monthly historical high for the series was 2,273,000 starts in January 2006, with the levels of the industry average since December 2008 and in August 2011 both down by 75% from that peak activity.

As shown in the following graphs, current monthly housing starts activity remains near the record monthly low seen for the present series in April 2009.  The current number also is well below any level reported in the predecessor nonfarm housing starts series, which was introduced in 1946.  The first graph shows recent detail for current housing starts activity, the second graph shows the same data within the historical context of the post-World War II period.

 

 

Hyperinflation Watch—No Way Out.  In efforts to forestall systemic collapse, central bankers, finance ministers and the U.S. Treasury Secretary openly have been discussing, proposing and announcing emergency funding/liquidity measures.  The U.S. Federal Reserve will make some form of policy-change announcement tomorrow, if market expectations are to be met, and Mr. Bernanke does his best not to disappoint the markets.  As discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), there are no happy solutions available here, only tools—devil’s choices—for buying a little extra time.  From the Fed’s standpoint, keeping the banking system afloat remains its primary concern, although needs for economic growth and contained inflation will be given as the rationale behind any change in policy.  The ultimate cost in propping the system, however, remains inflation.

The root source of current global systemic instabilities largely has been the financially-dominant United States, and it is against the U.S. dollar that the global markets ultimately should turn, massively.  The Fed and the U.S. Treasury likely will do whatever has to be done to prevent a euro-area crisis from triggering a systemic collapse in the United States.  Accordingly, it is not from a euro-related crisis, but rather from within the U.S. financial system and financial-authority actions that an eventual U.S. systemic failure likely will be triggered, seen initially in a rapidly accelerating pace of domestic inflation—ultimately hyperinflation.

The economic and systemic-solvency crises and the broad inflation and economic issues detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) and recent Commentaries, continue to unfold with outlooks that remain unchanged.

Repeated from the prior Commentary, the financial markets still are unstable and extremely volatile, roiled by deepening crises of confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the long-term outlook for U.S. financial, economic, systemic and political stability.  For those living in a U.S. dollar-denominated world, regardless of further near-term extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar—in either direction—versus the stronger major currencies and gold, the stronger currencies and precious metals remain the fundamental hedges against what lies ahead.

Massive, fundamental dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated assets could start at anytime, with little or no further warning.  With a U.S. government unwilling to balance or even to address its uncontainable fiscal condition; with the federal government and Federal Reserve standing ready to prevent a systemic collapse, so long as it is possible to print and spend whatever money is needed; and with the U.S. dollar at risk of losing its global reserve currency status; much higher inflation lies ahead, in a circumstance that rapidly could evolve into hyperinflation.

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

RESIDENTIAL CONSTRUCTION—HOUSING STARTS (AUGUST 2011)

Housing Starts Well into Third Year of Bottom-Bouncing.  The regularly volatile housing starts series continued its downside bottom-bouncing in August, having seen nearly three years of activity at 75% below 2006’s record construction level, with no relief in sight.  The Census Bureau reported this morning (September 20th) a statistically-insignificant monthly drop in seasonally-adjusted August 2011 housing starts of 5.0% (a decline of 5.5% before prior-period revisions) +/- 12.5% (all confidence intervals are at the 95% level).  July starts were revised to a 2.3% (previously a 1.5%) monthly decline. 

The year-to-year change in August starts was a statistically-insignificant decrease of 5.8% +/- 14.0%, following a revised annual 9.3% (previously 9.8%) increase in July.  The recent swings in the direction of annual change reflect comparisons with volatile year-ago monthly activity that was exaggerated in both directions by stimulus and post-stimulus effects.

With housing starts well into their third year of post-housing-market-crash bottom-bouncing, there remain no indications of a reprieve for the industry or the otherwise deteriorating broader economy.  Indeed, the pattern of housing starts has remained one of stagnation at an historically low-level plateau of activity, over the last 33 months.  The six-month moving-average of seasonally-adjusted housing starts was 580,000 in July, 10.2% above the historic low six-month moving-average seen in May 2009.  Significantly weaker monthly numbers remain likely in the months ahead.  Since December 2008, housing starts have averaged a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 572,000.  In that period, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the aggregate series around that average, with the 571,000 August 2011 monthly reading at 0.2% below average.  Again, such is within the normal volatility of the series.

The regular graphs for the housing starts survey are included in the Opening Comments and Executive Summary section.

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Generally, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Home Sales (August 2011).  August existing home sales (National Association of Realtors) are due for release tomorrow, Wednesday, September 21st, while August new home sales (Census Bureau) are due for release on Monday September 26th.  As with the ongoing historic weakness seen in today’s housing starts release, both home sales series should remain extremely weak, with any positive monthly change lacking statistical significance (especially for the highly volatile new home sales series).  Also, as usual, given the extreme volatility, reporting error and revisions in both these series, given the poor-quality seasonal adjustments, given continuing negative anecdotal evidence, and given ongoing massive distortions from irregularly volatile foreclosure activity, the reported monthly movements in these numbers (particularly to the upside) generally are meaningless.

New Orders for Durable Goods (August 2011).  Due for release on Wednesday, September 28th, the highly volatile new orders for durable goods likely will not show a meaningful monthly change in August, with odds slightly favoring a renewed monthly decline in new orders.

Gross Domestic Product—GDP (Second-Quarter 2011—“Third” Estimate, Second Revision).  The “third” estimate of second-quarter GDP is due for release from the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) on Thursday, September 29th.  Any revision at this point likely will be little more than statistical noise around the otherwise statistically-insignificant, previous headline estimate of 1.0% annualized real growth.

 

__________

No. 390: August CPI, Real Retail Sales, Industrial Production

Thursday, September 15th, 2011


COMMENTARY NUMBER 390
August CPI, Real Retail Sales, Industrial Production

September 15, 2011

__________

 

Consumer Inflation at Three-Year High 

August’s Annual Inflation: 3.8% (CPI-U), 4.3% (CPI-W), 11.4% (SGS)

“Core” Inflation Jumped Again with Some Acceleration

Real Retail Sales Fell 0.3% in August

August’s 0.2% Production Gain Was a 0.1% Loss Against Initial September Reporting

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Tuesday, September 20th.  It will cover August housing starts.  A Special Commentary would be published, as appropriate, in response to any unusual market, systemic or economic developments.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.   Inflation continues to increase, while the economy falters.  In today’s (September 15th) reporting, consumer inflation hit a three-year high, while annual “core” inflation—net of food and energy—rose for the 10th straight month and at an accelerating pace.  The inflation problem has been triggered by federal government fiscal malfeasance and Federal Reserve actions, with Fed policies aimed specifically at debasing the U.S. dollar.  The rising pace of inflation is due to perverse monetary policies; it does not reflect strong economic demand.

In current business activity, real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales contracted for August and are on track to contract for third-quarter 2011.  August industrial production slowed markedly, and showed a monthly gain only because of relative downside revisions to prior periods.

August CPI.  The seasonally-adjusted CPI-U rose by 0.37% for the month, up 3.77% year-to-year (versus 3.63% in July), while the seasonally-adjusted CPI-W rose by 0.42% for the month, up 4.26% year-to-year (versus 4.11% in July).  The SGS-Alternate Consumer inflation measures in August were 7.1% (1990-base) and 11.4% (1980-base).

As was seen last month, despite a seasonally-adjusted boost to otherwise weak gasoline prices, August CPI reporting reflected an ongoing spread of inflationary pressures well beyond the energy and food sectors, with the annual “core” inflation rate picking up at an accelerating pace, nearing 2.0%, as shown in the graph that follows.  This circumstance has to be distressing to Fed Chairman Ben Bernanke, who has taken official refuge in the “core” inflation concept, ignoring food and energy inflation.  Keep in mind that rising “core” inflation still reflects upside pricing pressures from the spreading effects of higher oil prices (driven by the Fed’s dollar-debasement policies), not from economic demand.  The Fed’s primary function remains keeping the banking system solvent.  Containing inflation and boosting economic activity are secondary goals.  The Fed, however, has not had much success in any of these areas, recently.

 

 

August Real Retail Sales.  With nominal (not adjusted for inflation) sales basically flat in August, the increase in the CPI-U caused a 0.33% monthly decline in the real retail series.  Annual growth slowed to 3.28% in August from 4.57% in September.  Given the pace of currently reported July and August sales, third-quarter 2011 is on track to show a quarterly decline versus the second-quarter, a pattern that easily could be followed by GDP reporting, as the double-dip becomes formalized.  There effectively has been no growth in retail sales in the last six months, other than what can be accounted for by rising prices, that is no growth in physical economic activity.   Continued weakening in the series is likely

August Industrial Production.  The August production number showed a 0.18% increase, versus a 0.90% increase in September, but the August level of activity was down by 0.12% from the initial reporting of September activity.  Revisions showed lower activity in the period since April 2011.  Continued weakening in this series also is likely in the months ahead.

 

Hyperinflation Watch.  With the still-unfolding economic and systemic solvency crises—as discussed in the recent Commentaries and repeated here—the broad inflation and economic outlooks detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue to unfold and are unchanged.  To the extent that euro-area problems threaten to trigger a global or U.S. systemic collapse, the Fed—most likely with other parties—will create, spend, loan, or guarantee whatever money is needed to prevent a collapse.  This has been the case for some time, but the cost to the system is inflation, as discussed previously (Hyperinflation Report and Commentary No. 388, for example, links are elsewhere in this section).

The financial markets still are unstable and extremely volatile, roiled by deepening crises of confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the long-term outlook for U.S. financial, economic, systemic and political stability.  For those living in a U.S. dollar-denominated world, regardless of further near-term extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar—in either direction—versus the stronger major currencies and gold, the stronger currencies and precious metals remain the fundamental hedges against what lies ahead.

Massive, fundamental dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated assets could start at anytime, with little or no further warning.  With a U.S. government unwilling to balance or even to address its uncontainable fiscal condition; with the federal government and Federal Reserve standing ready to prevent a systemic collapse, so long as it is possible to print and spend whatever money is needed; and with the U.S. dollar at risk of losing its global reserve currency status; much higher inflation lies ahead, in a circumstance that rapidly could evolve into hyperinflation.

The usual graphs of gold versus the Swiss franc, oil and silver follow.  The effects of what likely will be short-lived Swiss National Bank intervention to prop the euro, and effectively the U.S. dollar, are evident in the first graph.  That circumstance is discussed in the Hyperinflation Watch of Commentary No. 388.

 

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

CONSUMER PRICE INDEX—CPI (AUGUST 2011)

Higher Oil Prices Permeating Broad Economic Activity.  Once again, despite a seasonally-adjusted boost to otherwise weak gasoline prices, August CPI reporting showed a continued spread of inflationary pressures well beyond the energy and food sectors, with the annual “core” inflation rate picking up at an accelerating pace.  Full CPI-U reporting in August showed the highest level of annual consumer inflation since September 2008.

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported today (September 15th) that the seasonally-adjusted August 2011 CPI-U jumped by 0.37% (up by 0.28%, unadjusted) for the month.  That followed a gain of 0.50% (up by 0.09%, unadjusted) in July.  The August reporting reflected an unadjusted 0.5% drop (the Department of Energy reported an unadjusted 0.2% decline) in monthly average gasoline prices, but the unadjusted BLS estimate was turned into a seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 1.9%, with gasoline-price seasonal-adjustment factors in a price-boosting mode.

August’s unadjusted year-to-year CPI-U inflation rose to 3.77%, from July’s 3.63%, the strongest pace of annual inflation since September 2008.

The August report also showed accelerating inflationary pressures from higher energy prices spreading further into the broad economy (see the graph and comments in Opening Comments and Executive Summary).  On an annual basis, “core” CPI-U inflation moved higher for the 10th straight month, up to 1.95% in August, versus 1.77% in July and 1.64% in June.  When Fed Chairman Bernanke used his jawboning in an effort to debase the U.S. dollar in the markets, in advance of announcing QE2 in November 2010, annual “core” inflation was at 0.61%.

Year-to-year total CPI-U inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s September 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.16% gain in the adjusted monthly level reported for September 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual unadjusted inflation rate for September 2011, the difference in September’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from August 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 3.77%.  Annual CPI-U inflation should move to top 4% in the next couple of months.  The CPI-W broke that barrier in May and stood at 4.26% for August in today’s reporting.

CPI-W.  The narrower, seasonally-adjusted CPI-W, which has greater weighting for gasoline than does the CPI-U, rose by 0.42% (up by 0.29% unadjusted), following July’s gain of 0.59% (up by 0.07% unadjusted). 

Unadjusted, August 2011’s year-to-year CPI-W inflation was 4.26%, against a 4.11% annual increase in July.  The July and August annual CPI-W are the first two of three months to be averaged into the next Social Security cost of living adjustment (COLA), net of any residual deflation from recent years.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U—the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists, including the recent presidential deficit commission and some members of Congress, as the replacement for the CPI in COLA adjustments—is reported only on an unadjusted basis.  Year-to-year inflation increased to 3.61% in August, up from 3.47% in July.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 7.1% in August 2011, up from 7.0% in July, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to to about 11.4% (11.35% for those using the extra digit) in August, from about 11.2% in July. 

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation.  Despite the September 5th historic-high gold price of $1,895.00 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix), and despite the multi-decade high silver price of $48.70 per troy ounce (London fix of April 28th), gold and silver prices have yet to re-hit their 1980 historic levels, adjusted for inflation.  The earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 would be $2,475 per troy ounce, based on August 2011 CPI-U-adjusted dollars, $8,639 per troy ounce based on SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (all series not seasonally adjusted). 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org), although approached recently, still has not been hit since 1980, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars.  Based on August 2011 CPI-U inflation, the 1980 silver price peak would be $144 per troy ounce and would be $503 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (again, all series not seasonally adjusted).

As shown on page 43 of the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), over the decades, the price of gold has compensated for more than the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the dollar based on the SGS-Alternate Consumer Price Measure (1980 Methodologies Base).

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Retail Sales.  Based on the August 2011 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted August 2011 retail sales declined by 0.33% for the month, where, before inflation adjustment, the current number was virtually unchanged, up by 0.04% (see Commentary No. 389).  Real July retail sales revised to a monthly decline of 0.23% (previously down by 0.03%, basically unchanged), where nominal (not-adjusted for inflation) sales in July revised to a gain of 0.27% (previously up by 0.47%). 

The average real retail sales level for July and August (the first two months of the third-quarter) was down by 0.18% (annualized real quarterly decline of 0.73%) versus the average for second-quarter 2011, a negative indicator at this point in time for third-quarter GDP.  Second-quarter real retail sales were up by 0.14% (0.58% annualized) from first-quarter 2011.

August’s real retail sales rose at a year-to-year pace of 3.28%, versus a revised 4.57% (previously 4.77%) annual gain reported for July. 

The ongoing “recovery” in real retail sales is reflected in the following graphs, which show the latest monthly levels of inflation- and seasonally-adjusted activity.  The first of these shows close historical detail for the period beginning in 2000; the second shows the same data in historical context since World War II.

 

 

As noted in earlier writings, using the SGS Alternate-CPI Inflation estimates for deflation of the retail series would not have shown an ongoing rise in activity for the last year or so.  It is my preference here, and wherever otherwise possible, to use the official estimates (the series here is as calculated by the St. Louis Fed), since that eliminates a level of argument over what is being reported.  As official consumer inflation picks up, and as overall retail sales suffer from the ongoing consumer liquidity squeeze, these data have started to turn down in what will become eventually an official and formal double-dip recession. 

There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity—no recovery—just general bottom-bouncing.  Accordingly, real retail sales levels in the months ahead should become increasingly negative.

Real Money Supply M3.  The signal of the still unfolding double-dip recession, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), most recently discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), continues and is graphed below.  Based on the August CPI-U report and the latest August SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate, the annual contraction in real M3 for August 2011 was 1.5%, somewhat deeper than the 1.2% annual contraction in July.

The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn or its duration.  The current downturn signal was generated in December 2009.  The broad economy tends to follow in downturn or renewed deterioration roughly six-to-nine months after the signal, as has appeared to have started in recent months.  Weakness in a number of series should become increasingly evident in the months ahead, eventually leading to recognition of a double-dip recession.

 

 

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTION (AUGUST 2011)

August Industrial Production Received a Relative Boost from Earlier Downside Revisions.  Today’s (September 15th) Federal Reserve Board release of seasonally-adjusted August 2011 industrial production showed a monthly gain of 0.18% (a loss of 0.12% net of prior-period revisions) versus July.  In turn, the monthly change in July production was revised to a 0.90% (previously a 0.91%) gain.  The slower growth rate reflected the lack of or reversal of one-time events seen in July (an unusual-heat-induced utility spike and some catch up in auto assembly, as assembly parts from Japan re-entered the system).

Year-to-year growth in August 2011 production was 3.35%, down from a revised 3.39% (previously 3.70%) July increase, and down from the recent relative peak annual growth of 7.75% in June 2010.  The year-to-year contraction of 14.83% seen in June 2009, at the end of second-quarter 2009, was the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II.

 

 

The “recovery” in industrial production is reflected in the preceding graphs.  Both graphs show the monthly level of the production index.  The first of these shows close historical detail for the period beginning in 2000, the second shows the same data in historical context since World War II.

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Generally, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Housing Starts (August 2011).  August residential construction data are due for release on Tuesday, September 20th.  The historic weakness in housing starts should continue, again with an intensifying downtrend.  As seen generally in the last several years, any upside movement likely will not be statistically meaningful.

 

 

__________

No. 389: August Retail Sales, PPI, 2010 Household Income

Wednesday, September 14th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 389
August Retail Sales, PPI, 2010 Household Income

September 14, 2011

__________

Flat August Retail Sales Most Likely Were Down Net of Inflation

Real Median Household Income Drops to 15-Year Low (Below 1969 Level, CPI-U Adjusted)

Volatile PPI Reporting Flat for Month, Up 6.5% for Year

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for tomorrow, Thursday, September 15th.  It will cover the August CPI and industrial production.  A Special Commentary would be published, as appropriate, in response to any unusual market or economic developments.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  The U.S. consumer remains in an intensifying, structural liquidity squeeze, where household income cannot keep up with inflation, and where there is inadequate credit availability to make up the difference.  In such a circumstance, consumer spending cannot show sustained expansion in real (inflation-adjusted) terms and neither can the broader economy.  This largely is responsible for the “developing” double-dip, or ongoing downside bottom-bouncing, in the protracted and extraordinarily deep economic downturn of the last five years or so.

August Retail Sales, PPI.  The general inflation and economic overview will be updated in tomorrow’s (September 15th) Commentary, subsequent to the CPI and industrial production releases.

August retail sales were reported flat month-to-month (plus or minus 0.6%), today.  The monthly sales number most likely will be negative after inflation-adjustment.  That would result from the reporting of any positive inflation in tomorrow’s August CPI.

The somewhat randomly volatile producer price index (PPI) also was reported today as flat in August, with year-to-year PPI inflation at 6.5%.

2010 Poverty Report.  The government’s poverty reporting is not particularly meaningful, given a wide variety of definitional and surveying issues.  The included household income numbers, however, usually are of significance and of interest.  That said, poverty and household income conditions deteriorated sharply, as shown in yesterday’s (September 13th) 2010 annual report.

Both the mean (average) and median (middle) household income measures, deflated for inflation, fell sharply, dropping to 15-year lows.  The variance measures in household income (the relative distribution of income between low, middle and high levels) rose and are at or near record levels, which usually is a signal of extremely difficult and volatile economic times ahead.  Median income generally is the more meaningful measure in times of extreme income variance.

 

The preceding chart shows median household income deflated using two Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) inflation measures, the CPI-U and the CPI-U-RS.  In both instances, 2010 levels have not recovered their pre-2001 recession highs. 

The CPI-U-RS, an "experimental" series used by the Census Bureau, enables reporting with reduced historical inflation levels.  The result is a stronger inflation-adjusted pattern of income change (red line), than what usually would be the official weaker picture (blue line) based on the traditional CPI-U reporting and deflation.

The CPI-U (All Urban Consumers) is the headline consumer inflation number published by the BLS and the one most commonly used in deflating consumer-related dollars.  The Census Bureau appears to have used the CPI-U in its annual poverty reports up until 2003.

The CPI-U-RS (Current Methods) is a special version of the CPI-U with its history restated so as to reduce earlier-year inflation by imputing what it would have been, using today’s “advanced” CPI reporting methodologies.  The CPI-U-RS is the index used by the Census Bureau in deflating income numbers in the Poverty Report since 2003.  It also is the series reverse-engineered by ShadowStats.com for constructing the SGS Alternate CPI estimates.

The difference in reporting is that traditional CPI-U deflation shows that the level of 2010 median household income is below where it was in 1969.  These issues are discussed more fully in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011).

 

Hyperinflation Watch.  With the still unfolding economic and systemic solvency crises—as discussed in the recent Commentaries and repeated here—the broad inflation and economic outlooks detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue to unfold and are unchanged.  The general outlook will be reviewed in tomorrow’s September 15th Commentary. 

The financial markets still are unstable and extremely volatile, roiled by deepening crises of confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the long-term outlook for U.S. financial, economic, systemic and political stability.  For those living in a U.S. dollar-denominated world, regardless of further near-term extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar—in either direction—versus the stronger major currencies and gold, the stronger currencies and precious metals remain the fundamental hedges against what lies ahead.

Massive, fundamental dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated assets could start at anytime, with little or no further warning.  With a U.S. government unwilling to balance or even to address its uncontainable fiscal condition; with the federal government and Federal Reserve standing ready to prevent a systemic collapse, so long as it is possible to print and spend whatever money is needed; and with the U.S. dollar at risk of losing its global reserve currency status; much higher inflation lies ahead, in a circumstance that rapidly could evolve into hyperinflation.

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

RETAIL SALES (AUGUST 2011)

Flat August Retail Sales Likely Fell Net of Price Increases.  With August retail sales reported as flat versus July, the 95% confidence interval around that would allow for a monthly gain or contraction within a range of plus 0.6% to minus 0.6%, with the actual monthly change falling outside that range one-in-twenty times.  Nonetheless, with August inflation most likely in upside territory, the monthly change in August retail sales should have been a contraction, net of rising prices.  The physical volume of the goods and services consumed appears to have contracted for a second month, and quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) growth is on track for a flat-to-minus third quarter, following a flat second-quarter.  The broad economy remains in serious trouble.

Additionally, as previously discussed (see the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) for example), the retail sales numbers undergo concurrent seasonal-factor adjustment, where current and historical seasonal factors are revised every month.  The stability of the seasonal-adjustment process, however, has been disrupted by the unprecedented depth and length of the current economic downturn in the post-World War II era (the period of modern economic reporting).  These issues have distorted monthly reporting for a number of key series, leaving the markets effectively flying blind on actual underlying economic activity. 

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Retail Sales.  Today’s (September 14th) report on August 2011 retail sales—issued by the Census Bureau—indicated that seasonally-adjusted August retail sales effectively were unchanged, up by 0.04% (down by 0.24% before prior-period revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval).  August’s flat monthly performance was against a revised 0.27% (previously 0.47%) monthly increase in July.

On a year-to-year basis, August 2011 retail sales were reported up by 7.16%, a pace slower than that of the revised year-to-year July 2011 gain of 8.32% (previously 8.53%).    

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Retail Sales.  Details on real retail sales for August will be published in the September 15th Commentary, along with details on the August 2011 CPI-U release.  Given likely higher CPI-U inflation (see Week Ahead), real retail sales for August likely contracted month-to-month.

Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, “core” retail sales—consistent with the Federal Reserve’s preference for ignoring food and energy prices when “core” inflation is lower than full inflation—are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: August 2011 versus July2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues—was down by 0.1% (down by 0.07% before rounding) versus an official unchanged reading (up by 0.04% before rounding).

Version II: August 2011 versus July 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gas stations—was down minimally by 0.1% (down by 0.05% before rounding) versus an official unchanged reading (up by 0.04% before rounding).

 

PRODUCER PRICE INDEX—PPI (AUGUST 2011)

Monthly Wholesale Inflation Reported Flat for August, Up 6.5% Year-to-Year.  As reported this morning, September 14th, by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) for August 2011 was unchanged (down by 0.4% before seasonal adjustment) month-to-month, following a monthly increase of 0.2% (up by 0.4% before seasonal adjustment) in July.  The adjusted, monthly August PPI finished goods number was boosted by oil-price seasonal adjustments, and the 0.1% monthly gain in “core” inflation was below consensus.  Again, this series is regularly and randomly volatile.

Unadjusted and year-to-year, August 2011’s PPI inflation eased to 6.5% from 7.2% in July.  The recent run-up in annual PPI inflation generally has reflected ongoing impact of the Fed’s dollar-debasement policies, not surging economic demand. 

Separately, on a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted August 2011 intermediate goods declined by 0.5%, versus a gain of 0.2% in July, with August’s crude goods prices up by 0.2%, after falling 1.2% in July. Year-to-year inflation in August intermediate goods was 10.3%, versus an 11.6% gain in July, with August’s annual inflation in crude goods at 18.4%, versus July’s 22.6% gain.

 

HOUSEHOLD INCOME (2010 POVERTY SURVEY)

Household Income and Liquidity Deteriorated Sharply in 2010.  Some of the text that follows is repetitive from prior years; the story varies little.  The U.S. Census Bureau published Income, Poverty, and Health Insurance Coverage in the United States: 2010 (Poverty Report), yesterday, September 13th.  The value of this report is in its estimates of household income and income variance, not in its poverty estimates.  Annual poverty reporting per se is not too meaningful, where the structure of the reporting is highly subjective.  Not too surprisingly, more people were reported in poverty as of 2010 than as of 2009.

Measuring “poverty” is difficult, at best, when few can agree on a definition.  There are many who do not consider themselves to be poor, even though they meet the government’s standards, while others think they are poor but are not so defined.  Separately the whole process has been heavily influenced by politics, with even some short-term efforts at impacting the numbers.  For example, the survey’s inner-city sampling size was reduced (with Congressional oversight) during the Clinton Administration, and then re-expanded at the end of the Clinton era. 

The actual survey usually is piggy-backed on the March household unemployment survey of the year following the reported data.  So the March 2011 survey of 2010 data is what was published yesterday. What follows is brief update of the numbers.

Rising Income Dispersion Usually Foreshadows Economic and Financial Market Turmoil.  Measures of income dispersion, or variance, indicate how income is distributed within a population.  A low level of income dispersion indicates that income tends to be concentrated in the middle, while a high level of dispersion indicates heavier income concentrations in the extremes of low and high income, with less in the middle.  The higher the variance of income is, as shown in the graph, the greater is the income dispersion.

Generally, the more moderate the income variance is, the stronger the middle class is, and the healthier the economy will be.  Conversely, the greater the variance in income is, the more negative are the longer term economic implications.  A person earning $100,000,000 per year is not going to buy proportionately more automobiles than someone earning $100,000 per year.  

 

Conditions surrounding extremes in income variance usually help to fuel financial-market bubbles, followed by financial panics and economic depressions.  The sequence of those factors tends to redistribute income in a manner that usually lowers income variance.   Other than for a brief dip following the 1987 stock-market crash, however, U.S. income variance since 1987 has been higher than has been estimated for the economy going into the 1929 stock-market crash and the Great Depression, and its current reading remains nearly double that of any other "advanced" economy.  Variance increased further in 2010.

Shown in the preceding graph are the Gini Index of Income Inequality and the Mean Logarithmic Deviation of Income (MLD), two of the more popular income dispersion series.  Some of the finer points and mathematics behind several of the income variance measures are covered in the Census Bureau’s article: The Changing Shape of the Nation’s Income Distribution.

The increase of income dispersion in 2010 to record or near-record highs for both series, despite the ongoing economic and systemic liquidity crises, suggests that the greatest negative impact of the systemic turmoil, so far, has been on those in the middle-income area.  It also is suggestive of even greater financial crises still ahead.

Household Income Fell in 2010; Real Household Income Has Fallen Back to 1996/1997 Levels (1969 Level Deflated Using CPI-U).  Consumer liquidity remained in contraction during 2010, with both household income and consumer credit tumbling in nominal and real terms (not adjusted and adjusted for inflation).  Constrained consumer liquidity usually results in restrained personal consumption, as suggested by today’s August 2011 retail sales report.

The next two graphs show inflation-adjusted median and mean levels of household income from 1967 through 2010.  The median measure is the middle measure of the survey and likely is a better reflection of how most households are doing.  When the income dispersion measure is high, the mean, or average, measure tends to be skewed (in this case to the upside).  Nonetheless, both measures showed sharp declines in 2010, adjusted for inflation.  On a real basis, neither series has topped the annual high levels seen before the 2001 recession, with real median and mean household incomes hitting their respective tops in 1999 and 2000.  As discussed in the Opening Comments, on a real basis using the CPI-U, median household income in 2010 was below its level of 1969.

 

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Generally, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Consumer Price Index—CPI (August 2011).  The release of the August 2011 CPI is scheduled for tomorrow, Thursday, September 15th, and it again is at fair risk of topping a relatively soft 0.2% (Briefing.com) consensus outlook for the headline monthly.  At work here will be a continued boost to gasoline prices from seasonal adjustments, while further inflationary pressures from the recent Fed-induced jump in oil prices continues to spread in the general, non-“core” economy.

Specifically, in terms of gasoline, unadjusted retail prices fell on average by 0.2% in August 2011 (Department of Energy).  Paralleling what should be similar seasonal impact in 2011 reporting, a 0.4% unadjusted monthly gain in August 2010 was boosted to a 3.9% increase after seasonal adjustments.

The reported, unadjusted, total year-to-year CPI-U inflation would increase or decrease in August 2011, dependent on the reported seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.21% gain in the adjusted monthly level reported for August 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for August 2011, the difference in August’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be directly added to or subtracted from July 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 3.63%.  For example a consensus 0.2% gain in the monthly CPI-U inflation would yield annual August inflation at around the 3.6% July level; a 0.4% gain would push annual inflation up to about 3.8%.

Industrial Production (August 2011).  The release of August 2011 industrial production also is scheduled for release on Thursday, September 15th.  One-time factors (relatively extreme utility usage and the resumption of Japanese car assemblies in the United States) that boosted the initial estimate of July production by 0.9% are not likely to be repeated in the latest numbers.  The consensus estimate for the monthly change in production activity for August is flat (Briefing.com).  A flat-to-minus result is reasonable, as the broad economy begins its formal double-dip recession.

Housing Starts (August 2011).  August residential construction data are due for release on Tuesday, September 20th.  The historic weakness in housing starts should continue, again with an intensifying downtrend.  As seen generally in the last several years, any upside movement likely will not be statistically meaningful.

 

 

__________

No. 388: July Trade Deficit, Turmoil in Financial Markets

Thursday, September 8th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 388
July Trade Deficit, Turmoil in Financial Markets

September 8, 2011

__________

July Trade Deficit Suggests Possible Positive Contribution to Third-Quarter GDP

Swiss Intervention Unlikely to Have Lasting Impact

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Wednesday, September 14th.  It will cover the release of the 2010 poverty report, and August 2011 retail sales and PPI.  A subsequent Commentary on Thursday, September 15th, will cover the August CPI and industrial production.  A Special Commentary would be published, as appropriate, in response to any unusual market or economic developments.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  In a relatively quiet week for economic releases, today’s (September 8th) estimate of July’s trade deficit had positive implications for an otherwise increasingly bleak outlook for third-quarter GDP.  The sharp monthly narrowing in the July number reflected a gain in exports and a contraction in imports; the latter category was helped by lower oil prices and physical import volume.  Revisions showed minimally smaller monthly deficits for January through June 2011 than previously had been reported.

The trade series, however, has been showing unusual volatility recently, and a repetition of the July number in August is not a good bet.  A significant widening in the August deficit would eliminate the possible positive impact on GDP offered by today’s number.

Areas of ongoing greatest concern, at the moment, are financial-market and financial system instabilities.  Economic and inflation conditions will be updated with next week’s economic releases and associated Commentaries.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Market Turmoil Reflects Systemic Instabilities and Dangers.  The U.S. and global financial markets remain extraordinarily volatile and unstable, with systemic instabilities offering the potential, again, of systemic failure.  Following the collapse of Lehman in 2008, the U.S. Treasury and the Federal Reserve committed to preventing a systemic collapse at any cost.  They created and spent, loaned or guaranteed whatever money was needed to forestall systemic failure, kicking the proverbial can down the road.  Most of the actions taken then and since, however, were stopgap measures; little was done to address the systemic and economic crises fundamentally.  At present, the system has moved enough further along the road that the can likely will be kicked again.  Now, though, the road ahead drops off a cliff, well within current kicking distance.

To the extent that the systemic-solvency crisis in the euro area threatens a global and/or U.S. systemic collapse, or where the ongoing U.S. systemic-solvency crisis comes to a head, the Federal Reserve likely will stand ready as the lender or liquidity-provider of last resort—overtly or covertly—to prevent such an event, as it did in 2008/2009 and beyond.  For the Fed, systemic failure is not an option. 

Facing what looks to be a strongly anti-incumbent 2012 election, those controlling the federal government likely will push hard for some form of new stimulus to counter an unfolding and unavoidable double-dip recession, irrespective of deficit-reduction talk.  President Obama is due to offer a new jobs program in a speech tonight.

As with the earlier emergency measures, any further stimulus or liquidity actions now by the federal government and/or the Federal Reserve likely will have limited positive impact on the crises, but they will have an ultimate cost to the United States in inflation.  Accordingly, legitimate investor fears have been reflected in safe-haven flight of capital into gold and the Swiss franc, particularly since the debt-ceiling/ deficit-reduction deal at the beginning of August. 

With the Swiss franc soaring against other currencies—particularly against the U.S. dollar and the euro—the Swiss National Bank took a number of actions, including jawboning, to quell the pro-franc speculation.  On Tuesday (September 6th), in an act of desperation, the SNB announced something akin to a fixed exchange rate for the franc versus the euro, where the SNB actively would support a floor value of the euro versus the franc.

It is highly unlikely that the SNB really wants to destroy the franc or to disrupt Switzerland’s long history of fiscal prudence.  If they wanted to do that, they would have joined with the euro a long time ago, and now would be suffering the same trials and tribulations as the Bundesbank in the euro crisis.  Instead, as has happened at other times when the franc has been “too strong,” short-term action has been taken to psych-out the markets, to discourage those wanting to hold francs.  Intervention against market demand, however, as is required here, quickly becomes extremely expensive and disruptive to the intervener’s financial system.  Accordingly, the quasi-franc-euro-fix should prove to be short-lived, and the SNB knows that.  Intervention and other measures are discussed on page 62 of the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011).

As discussed in the recent Commentaries and repeated here, the broad inflation and economic outlooks detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue to unfold and are unchanged.  The financial markets still are unstable and extremely volatile, roiled by deepening crises of confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the long-term outlook for U.S. financial, economic, systemic and political stability.  For those living in a U.S. dollar-denominated world, regardless of further near-term extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar—in either direction—versus the stronger major currencies and gold, the stronger currencies and precious metals remain the fundamental hedges against what lies ahead.

Massive, fundamental dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated assets could start at anytime, with little or no further warning.  With a U.S. government unwilling to balance or even to address its uncontainable fiscal condition; with the federal government and Federal Reserve standing ready to prevent a systemic collapse, so long as it is possible to print and spend whatever money is needed; and with the U.S. dollar at risk of losing its global reserve currency status; much higher inflation lies ahead, in a circumstance that rapidly could evolve into hyperinflation.

 

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

TRADE BALANCE (JULY 2011)

July Trade Data Suggest A Potential Positive Contribution to Third-Quarter GDP Growth.  The monthly narrowing of July’s reported trade shortfall would be a plus for third-quarter GDP reporting, should it be repeated next month.  The series, however, has been showing unusual volatility in recent months, tied to the Japanese earthquake, and to oil and gold price variations, and I still expect the general trend in the U.S. trade deficit to be one of net deterioration.  Revisions showed minimally smaller monthly deficits for January through June 2011 than previously had been reported.

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Trade Deficit.  The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported this morning (September 8th) that the nominal, seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services for July 2011 narrowed to $44.8 billion from a revised $51.6 (previously $53.1) billion in June.  The narrower July deficit and the revised June number were in the context of general revisions that reduced the magnitudes of trade deficits reported previously in first- and second-quarter 2011.  The July 2011 deficit widened from an unrevised $41.8 billion in July 2010.

Against June, the July trade balance showed a gain in exports and a decline in imports.  Lower oil prices and physical import volume helped to dampen import activity for the month.  Specifically, for the month of July 2011, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $104.27 per barrel, down from $106.00 in June 2011, but up from $72.09 in July 2010.  In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, July 2011 volume averaged 9.067 million barrels per day, down from 9.889 million in June 2011, and down from 9.937 million in July 2010.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit.  Adjusted for seasonal factors and net of oil price swings and other inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the reported July 2011 merchandise trade deficit came in at $45.3 billion, down from a revised $50.3 (previously $50.9) billion in June, and down from a monthly average of $47.3 billion in second-quarter 2011.

Based on just one-month’s reporting, the annualized deficit for the third-quarter would be $543.3 billion, down from the full reporting of a revised annualized real second-quarter 2011 merchandise deficit of $567.4 (previously $569.7) billion.  The potential quarterly narrowing of the deficit would be a positive for the GDP’s net export account and, accordingly, for third-quarter GDP reporting.

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Generally, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Annual Poverty Report (2010).  Due for release on Tuesday, September 13th, the 2010 annual poverty survey should show some deterioration in most measures of poverty and household income.  Look for ongoing declines in inflation-adjusted median and mean household income, as well as movement to a new extreme in income variance (shifting of income to lower and higher levels from the middle).

Retail Sales (August 2011).  Due for release on Wednesday, September 14th, the August 2011 retail sales report is at fair risk of coming in below likely strong consensus estimates.  In any event, consistent with reporting of recent months, any reported monthly retail sales gain should result primarily from higher prices, with a flat-to-minus showing for the month, net of inflation effects.

Producer Price Index—PPI (August 2011).  The release of the August 2011 PPI is scheduled for Wednesday, September 14th.  Finished goods inflation should top a likely soft consensus outlook, due to supportive seasonal factors for gasoline prices, and to the effects of still-spreading broader inflationary pressures from higher oil prices.

Consumer Price Index—CPI (August 2011).  The release of the August 2011 CPI is scheduled for Thursday, September 15th, and it again is at fair risk of topping what likely will be a relatively soft consensus outlook.  At work here will be a continued boost to gasoline prices from seasonal adjustments, while further inflationary pressures from the Fed-induced jump in oil prices continues to spread in the general, non-“core” economy.

Specifically, in terms of gasoline, unadjusted retail prices fell on average by 0.2% in August 2011 (Department of Energy).  Paralleling what should be similar seasonal impact in 2011 reporting, a 0.4% unadjusted monthly gain in August 2010 was boosted to a 3.9% increase after seasonal adjustments.

The reported, unadjusted, total year-to-year CPI-U inflation would increase or decrease in August 2011, dependent on the reported seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.21% gain in the adjusted monthly level reported for August 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for August 2011, the difference in August’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be directly added to or subtracted from July 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 3.63%.  For example a 0.4% gain in the monthly CPI-U inflation should push annual August inflation up to about 3.8%.

Industrial Production (August 2011).  The release of August 2011 industrial production also is scheduled for release on Thursday, September 15th.  One-time factors (relatively extreme utility usage and the resumption of Japanese car assemblies in the United States) that boosted the initial estimate of July production by 0.9% are not likely to be repeated in the latest numbers.  Accordingly, August’s monthly change could be flat to minus, as the broad economy begins its formal double-dip recession.

 

__________

No. 387: August Employment, Unemployment, M3

Friday, September 2nd, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 387
August Employment, Unemployment, M3

September 2, 2011

__________

August Payrolls Were 58,000 Below the July Payroll Levels Reported One Month Ago

Concurrent Seasonal-Factor Adjustments Mute Bad News

August Unemployment Rates: 9.1% (U.3), 16.2% (U.6), 22.8% (SGS)

Money Supply M3 Growth Slowed in August

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Thursday, September 8th.  It will cover the release of U.S. trade balance details for July 2011.  A Special Commentary would be published, as appropriate, in response to any unusual market or economic developments.

—Best wishes to all for an enjoyable holiday weekend, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  The U.S. employment picture is much worse than reported, thanks partially to the Bureau of Labor Statistics’ (BLS) use of gimmicked revisions, which are a natural fallout of the “concurrent” seasonal-factor adjustment concept used in the payroll survey (also used by other statistical bureaus in reporting series such as retail sales and new orders for durable goods).  The effect has been to mute the reported impact of layoffs, with the result that today’s (September 2nd) seasonally-adjusted downside revisions to recent employment levels were shy by at least 85,000 jobs. 

Teacher Layoffs.  Consider new teacher layoffs reported for July.  Presumably better information led to today’s 116,000 downside revision to July’s not-seasonally-adjusted level of teacher payrolls.  As of July 2011 reporting—with many teachers on regular seasonal holiday—seasonal factors added roughly 17% to aggregate unadjusted July teacher payroll numbers. The unadjusted 116,000 downside revision to those payrolls would have been translated into a seasonally-adjusted 135,000 reduction, based on the original July 2011 seasonal adjustments.

With old-line seasonal-adjustment approaches, monthly seasonal adjustments were stable and not constantly recalculated.  Yet, with “concurrent” calculations, readjustments are made every month.  The unusually large layoff revisions were recalculated in August’s system as part of the “new normal,” with the effect of upping July’s seasonal adjustments for aggregate teacher payrolls and reducing the impact from the newly reported layoffs to an adjusted 50,000.  Non-regular teacher layoffs of 135,000 based on July’s initial adjustments were muted to 50,000 (a difference of 85,000 jobs) simply by the recalculation of seasonal factors in a system that treats current layoffs as part of the ongoing normal business cycle.

Prior-Period Revisions—Inaccurate Data Published in BLS Reporting.  Other, related reporting issues for the headline jobs-growth number were evident in today’s estimated monthly payroll change of 0 +/- 129,000 for August 2011.  Consider that the headline number published last month reflected July 2011 payrolls at 131.190 million, a monthly gain of 117,000.  With today’s August payrolls at 131.132 million, one might think that payrolls contracted by 58,000 for the month, but with a fortuitous downside revision of July’s payrolls to 131.132 million, the August number was unchanged.

Along with those revisions, July’s initial gain of 117,000 jobs revised to 85,000, and June’s gain of 46,000, as reported last month, revised to 20,000.

That June number, however, deliberately was misleading.  The BLS recalculates the seasonally-adjusted payroll levels each month, but it only publishes the last two months of revised estimates, so as not to “confuse” users of the data.  The recalculated level for May payrolls was about 131.003 million, not the published 131.027 million.  So June’s gain of 20,000 really was 44,000, but May was weaker than currently published.  May’s monthly gain now is 30,000, instead of the 51,000 indicated officially by the BLS (see the first section under Employment and Unemployment (August 2011) in the Reporting Detail.

August Employment and Unemployment Show Economic Bottom-Bouncing.  Although the BLS might be signaling a toss-up between improving and deteriorating labor market conditions, the U.S. economy continues in a downtrending bottom-bounce, with the odds strongly favoring ongoing deterioration in employment and in the unemployment rate.

There is enough rounding and guesstimating made with the BLS estimate of payroll levels to bring in the monthly payroll change at a small gain or small contraction, as opposed to exactly unchanged.  With a 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000 around zero growth, the BLS is suggesting equal odds for employment growing or declining.  Whatever employment is doing, though, it is doing such from a lower level (see revisions discussion) than it was last month. 

Not only was the monthly employment gain unchanged, but so too was headline unemployment rate, at the second decimal point, 9.09% +/- 0.23%.  Again even-money is suggested as to actual improvement or deterioration, per the BLS.

With the biases and distortions built into the BLS reporting, ongoing actual deterioration remains a solid bet.  There also are suggestions of weakening labor conditions, from ongoing monthly contractions in the Conference Board’s still-nascent measure of online help-wanted advertising (the newspaper index has been discontinued), and from patterns of slowing employment (approaching contraction) in recent purchasing managers surveys.

Most important, though, the consumer’s structural liquidity problems are ongoing.  Actual income growth continues to lag rising inflation, while many consumers still lack the ability to expand their debt in order to make up shortfalls in maintaining standards of living.  Without positive growth in real income and/or debt, chances remain nil of any meaningful uptick in business activity.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Money Supply Growth Is Not Picking Up.  As the U.S. economic crisis continues to deepen, so too does the U.S. solvency crisis.  Aggregate bank lending is flat, likely much more heavily due to balance sheet issues with banks than due to a lack of credit-worthy borrowers.

Money Supply M3 (August 2011).  Based on three weeks of data, the preliminary estimate of the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate for August 2011 will be published in the Alternate Data section on September 3rd.  August M3 likely showed year-to-year growth of about 2.2%, down from 2.4% in July.  Seasonally-adjusted month-to-month change in M3 likely will be around unchanged, after a 0.4% monthly gain in July.  As discussed previously, declines in large time deposits and institutional money funds (M3 components) largely are offsetting surging growth reported for M2.  The M2 growth is due to cash in M3 being shifted into M2 and M1 accounts.  The estimated month-to-month M3 changes, however, remain less reliable than the estimates of annual growth.

An early estimate on M2 for August suggests year-to-year growth of about 10.1%, versus 8.2% in July.  Month-to-month M2 growth is estimated at roughly 2.3% in August, versus 2.2% in July.  The early estimate on M1 for August shows year-to-year growth of 20.2% versus 16.2% in July.  Month-to-month M1 growth is estimated at roughly 4.6% in August, versus 3.0% in July.

Fed Easing Remains Likely.  With ongoing economic and systemic solvency crises, the Fed remains likely to institute some new form of liquidity injection for the banking system, soon.  That action, though, should continue under the guise of trying to stimulate the economy.  Neither the Fed nor the Administration is in a position to put forth meaningful economic stimulation, although action by both entities increasingly is expected by the markets and/or the electorate.  As a point of clarification, I am not advocating any actions, only offering my opinion as to what likely will unfold.

As discussed in the regular Commentaries, the broad inflation and economic outlooks detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue to unfold and are unchanged.  The financial markets still are unstable and extremely volatile, roiled by deepening crises of confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the long-term outlook for U.S. financial, economic, systemic and political stability.  For those living in a U.S. dollar-denominated world, regardless of further near-term extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar—in either direction—versus the stronger major currencies and gold, the stronger currencies and precious metals remain the fundamental hedges against what lies ahead.

Massive, fundamental dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated assets could start at anytime, with little or no further warning.  With a U.S. government unwilling to balance or even to address its uncontainable fiscal condition; with the federal government and Federal Reserve standing ready to prevent a systemic collapse, so long as it is possible to print and spend whatever money is needed; and with the U.S. dollar at risk of losing its global reserve currency status; much higher inflation lies ahead, in a circumstance that rapidly could evolve into hyperinflation.

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

EMPLOYMENT AND UNEMPLOYMENT (AUGUST 2011)

Constant Recalculation of Payroll Seasonal Factors Boosts Adjusted Payrolls.  As discussed in the Opening Comments and Executive Summary, and in prior writings (see the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), for example), seasonal-factor estimation for most economic series has been distorted severely by the extreme depth and duration of the economic contraction.  These distortions are exacerbated for payroll employment data based on the BLS’s monthly seasonal-factor re-estimations and lack of full reporting.

 

While the BLS recalculates the monthly seasonal factors each month for payroll employment, going back a number of years, it only publishes revised data for the last two months of reporting (June and July 2011 with the August 2011 report).  Shown in the preceding graph, the latest “concurrent” seasonal factor changes upped July and August of 2010 (with implied stronger seasonals for the July and August 2011 reporting, beyond the opening discussion on teacher payrolls).  With just two months of prior reporting shown as revised, the changes pre-June 2011 were not published by the BLS, so as to avoid “confusing” people who use the data.  

As discussed repeatedly in recent employment Commentaries, meaningful seasonal-adjustments tend to be stable over time, without wild fluctuations every time the seasonals are re-estimated.  This is true particularly for series like payroll employment and retail sales, where the seasonal factors are concurrent—recalculated each month for the current month’s raw data.  If the payroll seasonals were stable, the lines in the preceding graph would be flat and coincident.  Instead, the variations intensify with each successive month.  The monthly recalculations of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels show irregular revisions, with monthly swings now of plus or minus 90,000 jobs shifting over time.  To the extent the numbers affect current reporting, the differences are enough potentially to alter financial-market perceptions and reactions. 

The big issue remains that the month-to-month seasonally-adjusted payroll data have become increasingly worthless, with reporting errors likely now well beyond the official 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000 jobs in the reported monthly payroll change.  Yet the media and the markets tout the data as meaningful, usually without question or qualification.

The inconsistency differences in the graph were calculated based on the raw data and the seasonal-adjustment program available to the public on the BLS Web site.  Using the BLS data, we have calculated the seasonally-adjusted numbers as the BLS should be showing them, as of the current reporting, and the differences between official reporting and the consistent seasonally-adjusted series.

Payroll Survey Detail.  The BLS reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted August 2011 month-to-month jobs change of zero (a loss of 58,000 jobs before prior-period revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval).  July payrolls showed a revised 85,000 (previously 117,000) gain while June’s monthly gain also was reduced in revision to 20,000 (see Opening Comments), from last month’s estimate of a 46,000 gain. 

In terms of year-to-year change, the unadjusted August 2011 growth rate was at 0.99%, versus the revised 0.94% (previously 1.04%) reported in July, and against 0.94% (previously 0.95%) annual growth reported in June.  Although the graphs of long-term year-to-year unadjusted payroll change had shown a rising trend in annual growth, which primarily reflected the still-protracted bottom-bouncing in the payroll series, that pattern has flattened out in the last several months, as shown in the first graph following of the near-term detail in year-to-year change.  These numbers still reflect some short-lived year-to-year distortions as a result of the year-ago hiring surge and full layoffs of temporary census workers.

 

 

As shown in the preceding, longer-term graph (historical detail back to World War II), with the bottom-bouncing of recent years, current annual growth has recovered from the post-World War II record 5.06% decline in August 2009, which was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II (a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945).  Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the August 2009 annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression, yet the current level of employment is far from any recovery.

 

 

In the above plot of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels (as reported by the BLS) the current level of nonfarm payrolls also shows a recent flattening and certainly no recovery to pre-recession highs.  The data continue to bottom-bounce along a plateau of low-level activity, with the latest payroll level still well below where it was a decade ago, even though the U.S. population has increased by more than 10% in the same period. 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  Despite the ongoing and regular overstatement of monthly payroll employment—as evidenced by regular and massive, annual downward benchmark—the BLS generally has upped its monthly biases in post-benchmark reporting.  For August 2011, however, the monthly bias used was an addition of 87,000 jobs, somewhat less than the 91,000 monthly upside bias used in August 2010.  In July 2011, a downside bias of 18,000 was used. 

The aggregated upside biases reflect an ongoing assumption of a net positive jobs creation by new companies versus those going out business.  Such becomes a self-fulfilling system, as the upside biases boost reporting for financial-market and political needs, with relatively good headline data, while also setting up the next year’s downside benchmark revisions, which traditionally are ignored by the media and the politicians.  Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business, on a timely basis (within at least five years, if ever), such information is estimated by the addition of a bias-factor generated by the Birth-Death Model (a model of the effects of new business creation and old business bankruptcies).  The fundamental defects of the Birth-Death Model are discussed as usual in the ensuing paragraphs.

Positive assumptions—commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling—can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with “stronger” economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates, or underlying assumptions of ongoing economic recovery.  Indeed, historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels—to understate employment declines—during recessions.   There is a faulty underlying premise here that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business.  So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, presumed additional “surplus” jobs, created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor.  These add-factors have averaged 40,000 jobs per month over the last 12 months.  I still estimate this monthly bias should be negative by roughly 200,000 or so, on average.  Since it is not, the BLS overestimates monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 240,000 jobs.  Much of that misreporting was not picked up in the 2010 benchmarking, and now will not be corrected until at least the 2011 benchmark revision.  In theory, the pending benchmark revision for March 2011 data (preliminary results to be announced on September 29th, with full details in February 2012) should correct for some of the current, regular monthly overstatement in jobs growth.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (counting multiple job holders more than once), showed an August 2011 employment gain of 331,000 versus a 38,000 employment drop in July.  Issues with seasonal factors still cloud the significance of the reported monthly levels in the adjusted headline U.3 unemployment rate and other adjusted household-survey numbers.  Again, adjusted data have been moved by highly unstable seasonal factors that are artifacts of the severe and extraordinarily protracted downturn in U.S. economic activity (and particularly of distortions created by census hiring and firing effects from last year), not by the regular and stable seasonal patterns that were in place before the current economic crisis.

The August 2011 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate was unchanged, with a statistically-insignificant 0.00 percentage point difference versus July, holding at 9.09% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval).  Not-seasonally-adjusted, August’s U.3 unemployment rate was 9.1%, down from 9.3% in July.

The August U.6 unemployment rate notched higher to a seasonally-adjusted 16.2%, from 16.1% in July.  The unadjusted U.6 rate eased to 16.1% in August, from 16.3% in July.  The broadest unemployment rate published by the BLS, U.6 includes accounting for those marginally attached to the labor force (including short-term discouraged workers) and those who are employed part-time for economic reasons (they cannot find a full-time job).

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, “discouraged workers”—those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had—were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been “discouraged” for less than a year.  This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers.  The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

 

 

Adding the SGS estimate of excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed and labor force, unemployment—more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure—notched higher to 22.8% in August, up from 22.7% in July.  The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting, and tends to follow its relative monthly movements. Accordingly, it will suffer some of the current seasonal-adjustment woes afflicting the base series.  See the Alternate Data tab for more detail.

As discussed in previous writings, an unemployment rate nearing 23% might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%.  The SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession.  The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms.  Today, less that 2% work on farms.  Accordingly, for purposes of Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Generally, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Trade Balance (July 2011).  Due for release on Thursday, September 8th, the July 2011 monthly trade deficit likely continued to widen in both real (inflation-adjusted) and nominal (not adjusted for inflation).

A meaningful swing either way versus second-quarter 2011 reporting would provide some suggestion of the direction of the trade deficit’s impact on the third-quarter gross domestic product (GDP) growth estimate  (through the net exports account), due for release the end of October.   A deteriorating real trade deficit reduces estimated GDP activity.

 

__________

No. 386: GDP Revision, July Durable Goods Orders and New Home Sales

Friday, August 26th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 386
GDP Revision, July Durable Goods Orders and New Home Sales

August 26, 201

__________

Revised Second-Quarter GDP Change Remained Statistically Insignificant
—Could Have Been a Contraction as Easily as a Gain

Money Supply M2 Surge Reflects Shift from Large M3 Accounts

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, September 2nd.  It will cover the release of employment and unemployment data for August 2011.  A Special Commentary would be published, as appropriate, in response to any unusual market or economic developments.

—Best to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.   The economic data of the last week held no real surprises, although the smallest variation against the consensus outlook often is hyped to move the broadly irrational U.S. stock market.  The small decline in July new home sales and the gain in July new orders for durable goods were within the normal volatility of those series, and did not signal any change in the general economic outlook.  The downside revision to the estimate of second-quarter GDP growth was no more than statistical noise in a generally worthless series.

There has been a pattern developing in the Federal Reserve’s weekly money supply reporting, however, that is worthy of note, with surging M2 growth being reported in the Fed’s now-broadest money measure.  The growth largely can be accounted for by an apparent flight from large time deposits and institutional money funds (officially ignored components of the Fed’s once-broadest money measure, M3).  The cash flows here are suggestive of concerns over banking-system solvency (see Hyperinflation Watch).

Indeed, the U.S. systemic-solvency and economic crises remain in broad deterioration, with banking-system solvency issues likely to drive the Federal Reserve into some form of QE3, soon, despite Fed Chairman Bernanke’s qualified protestations to the contrary in today’s (August 26th) speech.  Any further liquefaction of the system, though, likely will be under the guise of propping a weakening economy.

The global financial markets remain unstable and highly volatile.  The cautions of recent Commentaries remain in place, as do the general outlooks for the U.S. economy, inflation, systemic-solvency and dollar. 

GDP Revision.  The reported growth in the revised second-quarter 2011 GDP was statistically meaningless, as usual, with the 95% confidence interval around the reported growth easily encompassing a possible quarterly contraction.  The revision itself was little more than statistical noise.

Annualized real (inflation-adjusted) quarterly growth in second-quarter GDP was lowered to 0.99% from 1.28%, versus an annualized growth rate of 0.36% in the first-quarter.  Year-to-year growth slowed further to 1.55% (previously 1.62%), versus 2.24% reported for the first-quarter.

The downside revision reflected a weakening trade picture (see Commentary No. 384) and a downward revision to inventories, offset by an upside revision to healthcare and commercial construction.  None of those components are measured meaningfully by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), in this most heavily followed, most heavily massaged and most worthless of government economic series. 

Initial reporting of second-quarter gross national product (GNP) and gross domestic income (GDI) showed stronger annualized real quarterly growth rates than reported for the GDP.  Neither alternate measure was statistically meaningful.  Money flow distortions from the ongoing systemic-solvency crisis have boosted GNP, with revamped income estimates impacting GDI. 

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Unusual Money Supply Activity.  Just a month ago, the markets recoiled in revulsion and disbelief to the U.S. government’s unwillingness and inability to address its long-term fiscal insolvency.  In response, rapid flight was seen from the U.S. dollar into gold and the Swiss franc, although the Swiss National Bank moved fairly quickly to discourage the franc’s safe-haven status, with jawboning and direct policy action.  Such discouragement should prove to be short-lived.

At the same time, M2—the broadest money supply measure currently published by the Fed—exploded, with the average for the week-ended August 1st rising by $159 billion from the week before, as the debt crisis was in its final resolution.  Not seasonally adjusted, the gain was $176 billion.  The two-week gain (week-ended August 8th) was $201 billion ($252 billion unadjusted).

One advantage to looking at the broadest money measure available (formerly M3) is that it encompasses a broader view of the flows in the financial system than do narrower measures.  The SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate includes as components M2 (which includes M1), plus large time deposits and institutional money funds, which are published by the Fed on a weekly basis.  Some monthly adjustment to the large time deposit numbers and estimates of also-included Eurodollar deposits and repos are modeled by SGS.

The surge in M2 did not reflect a sudden increase in the money supply; it largely reflected a shift out of M3 accounts to checking and savings accounts in M2 (and the included M1), which bloated the M2 reporting.  Of the unusually large $201 billion gain reported for two weeks of seasonally adjusted M2, roughly $200 billion was accounted for in Fed reporting by declining former-M3 components, large time deposits (down about $90 billion) and institutional money funds (down $110 billion).  The big move out of the M3 accounts likely was due to nervousness about banking-system solvency.

For the week-ended August 15th, the pace of weekly increase in M2 slowed to more-normal volatility (up $5 billion for the week, adjusted, up $20 billion unadjusted).  Unless there is something startling in today’s (August 26th) after-market release on bank assets and liabilities, the preceding data will be updated in the next regular Commentary.

The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue to unfold and are unchanged.  As noted in recent Commentaries, the financial markets remain unstable and extremely volatile, roiled by crises of confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the long-term outlook for U.S. financial, economic, systemic and political stability.  For those living in a U.S. dollar-denominated world, regardless of further near-term extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar—in either direction—versus the stronger major currencies and gold, the stronger currencies and precious metals remain the fundamental hedges against what lies ahead.

Massive, fundamental dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated assets could start at anytime, with little or no further warning.  With a U.S. government unwilling to balance or even address its uncontainable fiscal condition; with the federal government and Federal Reserve standing ready to prevent a systemic collapse, so long as it is possible to print and spend whatever money is needed; and with the U.S. dollar at risk of losing its global reserve currency status; much higher inflation lies ahead, in a circumstance that rapidly could evolve into hyperinflation.

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

GROSS DOMESTIC PRODUCT—GDP (Second-Quarter 2011, Second Estimate, First Revision)

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

Reported GDP Growth Remained Statistically Indistinguishable from Contraction.  As discussed in the Opening Comments and Executive Summary, the revised second-quarter GDP growth estimate remained statistically insignificant, while the revision itself was little more than statistical noise.  The sharp deterioration in the reported June trade deficit was a major contributor to the downside revisions, as was a downside revision to inventories.  Offsets from upside revisions to healthcare spending and commercial construction rounded out the revisions, but the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) tracks none of these series accurately, at least in the first or second year following the initial estimates.

GDP.  Published today, August 26th, by the BEA, the second-estimate or first-revision of second-quarter 2011 gross domestic product (GDP) showed annualized real quarterly growth of 0.99% (initially estimated at 1.28%) +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), versus an estimated annualized gain of 0.36% for first-quarter 2011.  Not annualized, second-quarter GDP growth revised to 0.25% from 0.32%, up from 0.09% in the first-quarter.  In this most worthless of major economic series, the reported annualized growth rates for the last two quarters are little more than statistical noise around the unchanged level.  They possibly have been massaged to keep the quarterly growth rates in minimally-positive as opposed to minimally-negative territory.

Year-to-year real change in second-quarter 2011 GDP continued its slowing trend, up by a revised 1.55% (that rounds to 1.5%) versus initial reporting of 1.62%, and against 2.24% in the first-quarter.  Such remained well off the near-term peak in reported growth of 3.51% in third-quarter 2010.

The estimate of the second-quarter GDP implicit price deflator was revised to 2.50% (initially at 2.39%), versus 2.73% in the first-quarter.  In contrast, annualized seasonally-adjusted quarterly inflation for the CPI-U in the second-quarter eased to 4.09% from a seasonally-adjusted 5.22% in the first-quarter.  The lower the inflation rate that is used in deflating the GDP, the stronger is the resulting inflation-adjusted number and vice versa.  A slightly more realistic inflation number would have pushed the second-quarter GDP quarterly growth rate into negative territory.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for second-quarter 2011 remains an approximate annual contraction of 2.8% versus the official revised estimate of a 1.5% gain.  Such is more negative than the alternate 2.6% annual contraction (2.2% official gain) in the first-quarter (see the Alternate Data tab).  While annualized real quarterly growth is not estimated formally on an alternative basis, a meaningful quarter-to-quarter contraction appears to have been realistic for the second-quarter, in what generally has been a protracted period of business bottom-bouncing.

GNP.  GDP is Gross national product (GNP) net of international flows in factor income (dividend and interest payments).  Although boosted by money flow distortions from the ongoing systemic-solvency crisis, GNP growth still is statistically insignificant, with annualized real quarterly growth reported at 1.70% in the second-quarter, versus 1.45% in the first (0.42% versus 0.36%, not annualized). 

GDI.  Gross domestic income (GDI) is the theoretical income-side equivalent to the GDP’s consumption-side.  Reflecting revamped income reporting, the statistically-insignificant, annualized real quarterly growth in GDI was 1.55% in the second-quarter, versus 2.45% in the first (0.38% versus 0.61%, not annualized). 

 


NEW ORDERS FOR DURABLE GOODS (JULY 2011)

Jump in July Durable Goods Orders Reflected Regular Volatility and Likely Ongoing Impact of Bad Seasonals.  The Census Bureau reported August 24th that the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods rose by 4.0% (up by 4.9% before prior-period revisions) month-to-month in July 2011, following a revised 1.3% (previously 2.1%) decline reported for June.  July’s monthly gain included a 43.4% surge in irregular, long-term nondefense aircraft orders, a category that showed a revised 24.0% (previously 28.9%) plunge in June.  Airplane orders usually are placed years in advance of delivery and rarely impact near-term economic activity.

Unadjusted, year-to-year growth in total July 2011 new orders was 9.2%, versus a revised 7.9% (previously 7.4%) annual gain in June.  Current durable goods reporting remains subject to many of the same sampling and seasonal-adjustment problems that are seen with retail sales and payroll reporting.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders increased by 2.4% (up by 4.2% before prior-period revisions) in July, versus a revised monthly 2.6% (previously 4.1%) decline in June.  For July, the unadjusted year-to-year growth in the series was 12.5%, up from the revised 7.6% (previously 6.3%) annual growth estimated for June.

 

NEW HOME SALES (JULY 2011)

July New Home Sales Showed an Ongoing, Downtrending Bottom-Bounce.  Consistent with the long-term negative trends in housing starts and existing home sales (See the prior Commentary No. 385 for July details), the August 23rd release of July new-home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) showed an ongoing pattern of bottom-bouncing near historic lows, with a statistically-insignificant monthly decline of 0.7% (down 4.5% before prior-period revisions) +/- 15.1% (95% confidence interval) from June.  In turn, June’s decline was revised to a 2.9% drop (previously down by 1.0%) versus May.  The year-to-year gain in July 2011 new-home sales was a statistically-insignificant 6.8% +/- 14.7% (95% confidence interval).  What previously had been reported as a 1.6% annual gain in June revised to a 2.3% annual contraction. 

The high volatility in annual change remains due to the lapsing of stimulus effects a year ago.  As with existing home sales, part of the new sales volume is due to foreclosure activity, but the Census Bureau does not provide an estimate of foreclosure volume.

 

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Generally, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Unemployment Rate and Payroll Employment (August 2011).  Nonfarm payrolls and the unemployment rates for August 2011 are due for release on Friday, September 2nd, and this first major indicator of August economic activity likely will confirm deteriorating economic conditions.  Data published in recent months have indicated slowing economic activity and generally have disappointed overly-optimistic consensus forecasts, except for July’s numbers, where the “surprises” were slightly in a more-positive direction.  That pattern of disappointed expectations likely will renew itself in August’s reporting.

Payrolls remain at risk of showing an outright monthly contraction, with the unemployment rate notching higher.  Also, as seen with last month’s July numbers, any reporting in a more-positive direction likely would include a payroll contraction and higher unemployment rate within the 95% statistical reporting confidence intervals (+/- 129,000 for payroll change, +/- 0.2% for the unemployment rate).   As has been the case for some time, unstable seasonal adjustments can distort the reported monthly changes in these series meaningfully.

 

__________

No. 385: July CPI, PPI, Industrial Production and Housing Starts

Thursday, August 18th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 385
July CPI, PPI, Industrial Production and Housing Starts

August 18, 2011

__________

Inflation Spreads Throughout Economy as Annual “Core” Inflation Jumps Again

Consumer Inflation at 33-Month High 

July’s Annual Inflation: 3.6% (CPI-U), 4.1% (CPI-W), 11.2% (SGS)

Retail Sales Gain Vanishes, Net of Inflation

Unusual Heat and Japanese Auto Assembly Parts Boosted Production

Housing Activity Remains Moribund

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, August 26th.  It will cover the first revision to the second-quarter 2011 GDP estimate, July 2011 new orders for durable goods and new home sales.  A Special Commentary would be published, as appropriate, in response to any unusual market or economic developments.

—Best to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.   The U.S. economy continues to falter as the pace of inflation picks up.  With the Fed and the U.S. government twiddling their thumbs as they contemplate devil’s choices, the financial markets remain unstable and the U.S. dollar is viewed increasingly as the investment currency of last choice.  The U.S. political situation remains untenable.  Those currently controlling Washington lack the ability or the political will to address the country’s fiscal insolvency and/or ongoing economic depression.  Any cosmetic actions taken pre-2012 election likely only will add to the long-term inflation and dollar-debasement problems.

The Federal Reserve, however, still has the ability to act, but it has no happy choices.  As the systemic solvency crises comes to another head (both domestically and globally), along with a fall-off in economic activity, financial-market upheaval and an escalating global flight from the U.S. dollar, either the Fed can let the system go once again to the brink of collapse and let the system fail, or the Fed can attempt once again to liquefy the system (both domestically and globally).  The latter choice would exacerbate the U.S. dollar crisis and inflationary pressures, but it would be consistent with prior policy that appears to have been aimed at forestalling systemic collapse, for as long as possible, irrespective of the ultimate cost to U.S. credibility or financial stability.  The Fed can continue to prop the system over the short-term, by creating as much money as needed, but only until such time as domestic and foreign holders alike abandon the increasingly-worthless U.S. dollar.

Assuming the Fed moves to avoid systemic collapse, some form of QE3 (covert and/or overt) is likely in the near future, under the cover of a weakening economy and/or financial market woes.

July CPI, PPI.  Both the consumer and producer price indices for July surprised consensus forecasts on the upside, with the inflationary impact of the Fed’s dollar-debasement policies spreading beyond oil and gasoline prices, to the general U.S. economy.

As seen in the updated graph, the current rise in annual “core” inflation started following Mr. Bernanke’s efforts, first at jawboning, and then actually moving to debase the U.S. dollar with the announcement of QE2 on November 3, 2010.  The annual “core” CPI-U was at 0.61% in October 2010, and it was reported at 1.77% in July 2011, up from 1.64% in June, and up for the ninth consecutive month.

The full CPI and PPI annual inflation rates—including the food and energy components consumed by most everyone—are at or near respective 33-month highs of 3.63% and 7.19%.  Other than any short-lived effects from oil-price volatility in the unstable financial markets, annual inflation will be headed higher in the months ahead.  In the wake of a possible U.S. dollar panic, that inflation could be much higher.

July Real Retail Sales, Industrial Production and Housing Activity.  The entire gain in July retail sales was accounted for by rising prices, not by rising physical demand for consumer goods and services.  The 0.5% monthly gain in July consumer prices entirely offset the 0.5% sales gain.  Such is not a happy indicator for consensus forecasts of an economic recovery surfacing in the second-half of the year.

July industrial production, however, did show relatively good monthly growth of 0.9%.  The biggest factors behind the gain—a spike to utility usage from an unseasonably severe heat wave, and increased auto assemblies due to a restart of parts supplies from earthquake-damaged Japan—will not be repeated, necessarily.

Housing starts and existing home sales both saw small monthly contractions in July.  The industry kept bottom-bouncing in a slow, downward trend, with starts still down 75% from peak business seen in 2006.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Gold Signals Instability and Inflation.  As we go to press with today’s (August 18th) Commentary, gold continues to soar, hitting a record London afternoon fix of $1,824.00 per troy ounce.  For those in the U.S. dollar, soaring gold prices can signal—and likely are signaling—looming inflation, as well as domestic and global political instabilities.  Irrespective of official efforts to contain the price of gold, or of any short-lived heavy selling/profit taking, the signal is sound.  Gold prices should head much higher over the longer-term as the U.S. dollar faces ongoing and severe debasement.

The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue to unfold and are unchanged.  As noted in recent Commentaries, the financial markets remain unstable and extremely volatile, roiled by crises of confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the long-term outlook for U.S. financial, economic, systemic and political stability.  For those living in a U.S. dollar-denominated world, regardless of further near-term extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar—in either direction—versus the stronger major currencies and gold (as noted above), the stronger currencies and precious metals remain the fundamental hedges against what lies ahead.

Massive, fundamental dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated assets could start at anytime, with little or no further warning.  With a U.S. government unwilling to balance or even address its uncontainable fiscal condition; with the federal government and Federal Reserve ready to prevent a systemic collapse, so long as it is possible to print and spend whatever money is needed; and with the U.S. dollar at risk of losing its global reserve currency status; much higher inflation lies ahead, in a circumstance that rapidly could evolve into hyperinflation.

 

The preceding, usual graphs of gold, versus the Swiss franc, oil and silver, are updated for today’s early market activity.  Efforts by the Swiss National Bank to contain the Swiss franc’s rally have met with some success, albeit likely short-lived.  The markets remain extremely unstable, with unusual crosscurrents and likely manipulations in some areas.

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

CONSUMER PRICE INDEX—CPI (JULY 2011)

Persistent Annual Inflation Increases Seen in “Core” Inflation.  Despite a seasonally-adjusted boost to otherwise weak gasoline prices, July CPI reporting showed a continued spread of inflationary pressures well beyond the energy and food sectors.  Such has to be distressing to those, such as Fed Chairman Ben Bernanke, who take refuge in the “core” inflation concept, ignoring food and energy inflation.  Keep in mind that rising “core” inflation reflects upside pricing pressures from the spreading of the effects of higher oil prices (driven by the Fed’s dollar-debasement policies), not from economic demand.  It is graphed in the Opening Comments and Executive Summary section.

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

CPI-U.
  The BLS reported today (August 18th) that the seasonally-adjusted July 2011 CPI-U jumped by 0.50% (up by 0.09%, unadjusted) for the month.  That followed a decline of 0.22% (down by 0.09%, unadjusted) in June.  The July reporting reflected an unadjusted 1.5% drop in monthly average gasoline prices, which was turned into a seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 4.7% by the shifting of gasoline-price seasonal-adjustment factors to a price-boosting mode.

July’s unadjusted year-to-year CPI-U inflation rose to 3.63%, from June’s 3.56%, the strongest pace of annual inflation since October 2008.

The July report also showed inflationary pressures from higher energy prices spreading further into the broad economy (see the graph and comments in Opening Comments and Executive Summary).  On an annual basis, “core” CPI-U inflation notched higher for the ninth straight month, up to 1.77% in July from 1.64% in June.  When Fed Chairman Bernanke used his jawboning in an effort to debase the U.S. dollar in the markets, in advance of announcing QE2 in November 2010, annual “core” inflation was at 0.61%.

Year-to-year total CPI-U inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s August 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.21% gain in the adjusted monthly level reported for August 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for August 2011, the difference in August’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from July 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 3.63%.  Annual CPI-U inflation should move to top 4% in the next couple of months.  The CPI-W broke that barrier in May, hitting 4.1% (4.12%), where it held at 4.1% (4.06%) in June, and again at 4.1% (4.11%) in today’s reporting.

CPI-W.  The narrower, seasonally-adjusted CPI-W, which has greater weighting for gasoline than does the CPI-U, rose by 0.59% (up by 0.07% unadjusted), following June’s decline of 0.34% (down by 0.19% unadjusted). 

Unadjusted, July 2011’s year-to-year CPI-W inflation was 4.11%%, against a 4.06% annual increase in June.  The July annual CPI-W is the first of three months to be averaged into the next Social Security cost of living adjustment (COLA), net of any residual deflation from recent years.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U—the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists, including the recent presidential deficit commission and some members of Congress, as the replacement for the CPI in COLA adjustments—is reported only on an unadjusted basis.  Year-to-year inflation increased to 3.47% in July, up from 3.37% in June.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 7.0% in July 2011, up from 6.9% in June, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, notched higher to about 11.2% (11.21% for those using the extra digit) in July, from about 11.1% in June. 

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation.  Despite today’s (August 18th) historic-high gold price of $1,824.00 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix), and despite the multi-decade high silver price of $48.70 per troy ounce (London fix of April 28th), gold and silver prices have yet to re-hit their 1980 historic levels, adjusted for inflation.  The earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 would be $2,468 per troy ounce, based on July 2011 CPI-U-adjusted dollars, $8,594 per troy ounce based on SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (all series not seasonally adjusted). 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org), although approached recently, still has not been hit since 1980, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars.  Based on July 2011 CPI-U inflation, the 1980 silver price peak would be $144 per troy ounce and would be $500 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (again, all series not seasonally adjusted).

As shown on page 43 of the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), over the decades, the price of gold has compensated for more than the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the dollar based on the SGS-Alternate Consumer Price Measure (1980 Methodologies Base).

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Retail Sales.  Based on the July 2011 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly July 2011 retail sales eased by 0.03%, where, before inflation adjustment, the current number was up by 0.47% (see Commentary No. 384).  Real June retail sales revised to a gain of 0.51% (previously up by 0.36%), where nominal (not-adjusted for inflation) sales in June revised to a gain of 0.28% (previously up by 0.14%).  The real retail sales level for July (first month of the third-quarter) was up by 0.13% versus the average level for second-quarter 2011.

July’s real retail sales rose at a year-to-year pace of 4.77%, versus a revised 4.74% (previously 4.48%) annual gain reported for June. 

The ongoing “recovery” in real retail sales is reflected in the following graphs, which show the latest monthly levels of inflation- and seasonally-adjusted activity.  The first of these shows close historical detail for the period beginning in 2000; the second shows the same data in historical context since World War II.

 

 

As noted in earlier writings, using the SGS Alternate-CPI Inflation estimates for deflation of the retail series would not have shown an ongoing rise in activity for the last year or so.  It is my preference here, and wherever otherwise possible, to use the official estimates (the series here is as calculated by the St. Louis Fed), since that eliminates a level of argument over what is being reported.  As official consumer inflation picks up, and as overall retail sales suffer from the ongoing consumer liquidity squeeze, these data have started to turn down in what will become eventually an official and formal double-dip recession. 

There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity—no recovery—just general bottom-bouncing.  Accordingly, real retail sales levels in the months ahead should become increasingly negative.

Real Money Supply M3.  The signal of the still unfolding double-dip recession, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), most recently discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), continues and is graphed below.  Based on the July CPI-U report and the latest July SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate, the annual contraction in real M3 for July 2011 was 1.2%, a notch narrowed from the 1.3% annual contraction in June.

The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn or its duration.  The current downturn signal was generated in December 2009.  The broad economy tends to follow in downturn or renewed deterioration roughly six-to-nine months after the signal, as has appeared to have started in recent months.  Weakness in a number of series should become increasingly evident in the months ahead, eventually leading to recognition of a double-dip recession.

 

 

PRODUCER PRICE INDEX—PPI (JULY 2011)

Wholesale Inflation Continues to Reflect Impact of Higher Oil Costs in Broad Economy.   As reported yesterday, August 17th, by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) for July 2011 rose by 0.2% (up by 0.4% before seasonal adjustment) month-to-month, following a monthly decrease of 0.4% (down by 0.7% before seasonal adjustment) in June.  The adjusted, monthly July PPI finished goods number was depressed by oil-price seasonal adjustments, which will reverse next month, and it once again reflected above-consensus “core” inflation, up by 0.4%, versus a 0.3% gain in June, with inflationary pressures from higher energy costs spreading further into the broad economy. 

Reflecting a short-lived dip in oil prices, annualized, seasonally-adjusted PPI inflation for the three months ended July 2011 slowed to flat from 2.4% reported in June.  Unadjusted and year-to-year, July 2011’s PPI inflation rose to 7.2%, from 7.0% in June, and versus 7.3% in May (the highest level since September 2008).  The recent run-up in annual PPI inflation generally has reflected ongoing impact of the Fed’s dollar-debasement policies, not surging economic demand. 

Separately, on a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted July 2011 intermediate goods rose 0.2%, versus unchanged in June, with July’s crude goods prices down by 1.2%, after falling 0.6% in June. Year-to-year inflation in July intermediate goods was 11.6%, up from 11.0% in June, with July’s annual inflation in crude goods up by 22.6%, versus June’s 26.2% gain.

 

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTION (JULY 2011)

July Industrial Production Boosted by Extreme Heat.  Tuesday’s (August 16th) Federal Reserve Board release of seasonally-adjusted July 2011 industrial production showed a monthly gain of 0.91% (a gain of 1.13% net of prior-period revisions) versus June.  In turn, the monthly change in June production was revised to a 0.37% (previously a 0.19%) gain.  Such was in the context of major downside revision in April, more than offset by upward revisions to May and June production.  The gain reported in July production reflected one- or limited-time events, such a surging utility usage from unusually hot weather, and some catch up in auto assembly, as assembly parts from Japan re-entered the system.

Year-to-year growth in July 2011 production was 3.70%, versus the revised 3.68% (previously 3.41%) in June, and down from the recent relative peak year-to-year change of 7.75% in June 2010.  The year-to-year contraction of 14.83% seen in June 2009, at the end of second-quarter 2009, was the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II.

 

The “recovery” in industrial production is reflected in the preceding graphs.  Both graphs show the monthly level of the production index.  The first of these shows close historical detail for the period beginning in 2000, the second shows the same data in historical context since World War II.  The July “surge” likely will prove to be short-lived, with a downside move or revisions to be reported next month.

 

HOUSING STARTS (JULY 2011)

July Housing-Starts Starts Turn Down Again.  The regularly volatile housing starts series continued bottom-bouncing in July, continuing a slow, general downtrend.  The Census Bureau reported on Tuesday, August 16th, a statistically-insignificant monthly decrease in seasonally-adjusted July 2011 housing starts of 1.5% (a decline of 4.0% before prior-period revisions) +/- 12.5% (all confidence intervals are at the 95% level).  June starts were revised to a 10.8% (previously a 14.6%) monthly gain. 

The year-to-year change in July starts was a statistically-insignificant increase of 9.8% +/- 12.6% (95% confidence interval), following a revised annual 13.7% (previously 16.7%) increase in June.  The recent swing to annual gain reflects the continued year-ago drop-off in post-stimulus activity.

There still are no indications of a reprieve for the housing industry or the otherwise deteriorating broader economy.  Indeed, the pattern of housing starts has remained one of stagnation at an historically low-level plateau of activity, over the last 32 months.  The six-month moving-average of seasonally-adjusted housing starts was 572,000 in July, 8.7% above the historic low six-month moving-average seen in May 2009.  Significantly weaker monthly numbers remain likely in the months ahead.  Since December 2008, housing starts have averaged a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 572,000.  In that period, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the aggregate series around that average, with the 604,000 July 2011 monthly reading at 5.6% above average.  Again, such is within the normal volatility of the series.

As shown in the following graphs, current monthly housing starts activity remains near the record monthly low seen for the present series in April 2009.  The current number also is well below any level reported in the predecessor nonfarm housing starts series, which was introduced in 1946.  The first graph shows recent detail for current housing starts activity, the second graph shows the same data within the historical context of the post-World War II period.

 

 

 

 

EXISTING HOME SALES (JULY 2011)

Existing Home Sales Weaken Anew.  Today’s (August 18th) release of July existing-home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly decline of 3.5%, versus June’s revised gain of 0.6% (previously a 0.8% contraction).  On a year-to-year basis, July sales jumped by 21.0%, versus a revised 7.5% (previously an 8.8% decline) in June.  The swing to annual growth from contraction reflects year-ago stimulus effects.

Foreclosure activity remained a major distorting factor for home sales, with "distressed" activity accounting for an estimated 29% of existing sales in the NAR’s July reporting, down from the 30% estimated for June.

 

 

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Generally, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

New Home Sales (July 2011).  July existing home sales (National Association of Realtors) were released today, August 18th, and are covered above.  July 2011 new home sales (Census Bureau) are due for release on Tuesday, August 23rd.  As with the ongoing historic weakness in housing starts and existing sales, the volatile new home sales series should remain extremely weak, with any positive monthly change again lacking statistical significance.  Also, as usual, given the extreme volatility, reporting error and revisions in both these series, given the poor-quality seasonal adjustments, given continuing negative anecdotal evidence, and given ongoing massive distortions from irregularly volatile foreclosure activity, the monthly movements in these numbers (particularly to the upside) remain meaningless.

New Orders for Durable Goods (July 2011).  Due for release on Wednesday, August 24th, July’s new orders for durable goods likely will not show a meaningful monthly change, with odds slightly favoring ongoing decline in this irregularly volatile series.

Gross Domestic Product—GDP (Second-Quarter 2011—“Second” Estimate, First Revision).  The “second” estimate of second-quarter GDP is due for release from the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) on Friday, August 26th.  Based on the June trade data (see Commentary No. 384), a downside revision to the initial 1.3% estimate of real, annualized quarterly GDP growth is a fair possibility.

__________

No. 384: Markets, July Retail Sales, June Trade Balance

Friday, August 12th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 384
Markets, July Retail Sales, June Trade Balance

August 12, 2011

__________

Financial Circumstances Remain Unstable and Threatening

U.S. Dollar Is in Serious Trouble

Retail Sales Gain Was Statistically Meaningless and Largely Reflected Inflation

Trade Data Suggest Downside Pressure on Upcoming GDP Revision

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Thursday, August 18th.  It will cover July 2011 CPI, PPI, industrial production and housing starts.  A Special Comment would be published, as appropriate, in response to any unusual market or economic developments.

—Best to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.   The U.S. markets have not reacted well to the significant loss of global confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the U.S. government, and to the growing concerns of intensifying economic and systemic-solvency crises.  The unfolding crises of the last couple weeks have been exacerbated by comments out of the Fed and the Administration, who have no realistic, short-term positive options to offer to the system and the markets. 

The extreme volatility in a number of markets has reflected massive crosscurrents, shifting positions and covert and overt interventions by governments and central banks.  Ahead will be still further extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar against the stronger currencies and against gold.  At such time as intervention eases and somewhat normal market pressures come into play, the dollar should lose out.  The U.S. currency increasingly will come under broad selling pressure, regularly setting historic lows against the Swiss franc, the Canadian dollar and the Australian dollar, while the gold price will move higher, setting successive historic highs.  Oil prices—in dollar terms—also likely will rally sharply against the weakening dollar.  Again, this is the longer-term picture, beyond the current, panicked markets.

There have been heavy intervention, jawboning and overt actions to prop the U.S. dollar.  After the dollar pushed to successive historic lows against the Swiss franc—despite near-term efforts by the Swiss National Bank (SNB) to debase the franc—the SNB went so far as to threaten to peg the franc to the euro.  Such actions against market forces tend to be short-lived at best.  If the franc were pegged to the euro, the intervention needed to maintain that relationship would become prohibitively expensive, very quickly, for the SNB, as the Swiss central bank effectively would be intervening to prop the euro.  

Beyond the currency markets, it has been decades since the U.S. financial markets could have been considered free and open.  Accordingly, when major overt and covert interventions come into play, it is nonsensical for the financial media to hype fundamental interpretations to those rigged movements.  The President’s Working Group on the Financial Markets (PWGFM) is active, and official interventions and market machinations have been at play to stabilize the markets, although the specifics usually are not announced.

Suspect actions have seen at least twice in U.S. stock market trading during the last week.  First was the late-afternoon rally on Friday, August 5th, in advance of the S&P announcement of the downgrade to the U.S. sovereign debt rating.  The U.S. government knew the downgrade was coming.  If, as indicated by Allen Greenspan that the PWFGM intervened in the markets as the news was breaking on the planned invasion of Iraq, it most likely also would have acted in advance for something as market-rattling as the downgrade.  Second was the stock rally following the FOMC announcement on August 9th.  Interventions purportedly are worked through purchases of stock futures, handled by large, former investment banks, on behalf of the PWGFM, as directed by the New York Fed. 

As to the Treasury market, the Federal Reserve has held that under tight control for some time, having increased its net holdings of U.S. Treasuries, since the onset of QE2, by more than the Treasury’s net issuance of securities for public holding during that same period.  Given the Fed’s interrelationship with the banking system, it can move Treasury yields at will.  Treasuries increasingly will be the last place private investors would want to hold their money.

Fed Has Little Choice But to Put Forth Some Form of QE3.  Beyond the pabulum fed to the public about the Fed’s mandate to contain inflation and to maintain ongoing economic growth, the Fed’s primary mission remains to keep the banking system afloat.  Politically, the economy follows that in priority, and then inflation.  The statement following Tuesday’s Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC) meeting indicated nothing of policy substance.  Extending the low-interest-rate environment into 2013 (no support for the U.S. dollar here) is a policy that could be changed at a moment’s notice.  There was no hint of a QE3.

The tone of the FOMC’s comments, however, shifted significantly towards the view of an unfolding double-dip recession.  The ongoing system-liquidity crisis will require the Fed to provide more liquidity to the banking system.  To the extent that action comes forward as an overt QE3, it will be touted as justified by the weakening economy.  If the action is covert, the Fed can just keep doing whatever it wants to do.

July 2011 Retail Sales.  The 0.5% monthly gain estimated for July retail sales was not meaningful, where the 95% confidence interval around the reported change also allowed for an outright monthly contraction.  Separately, most—if not all—of the monthly gain was accounted for by higher prices, not by a rising volume in physical consumption of goods and services.  Net of increases in gasoline-station and grocery-store revenues (surrogates for gasoline and food inflation), monthly retail sales rose by 0.2%. 

June 2011 Trade Deficit.  The June deficit widened “unexpectedly” to $53.1 billion from $50.8 billion in May, hitting its worst level since October 2008.  The number also widened net of inflation, with a now-complete second-quarter trade estimate suggesting a downside revision (August 26th) to the “advance” estimate of second-quarter 2011 GDP, which was based on only two months of trade reporting for the second quarter.  Other GDP components, however, also could be revised and offer some offset to the new trade numbers.

 

Hyperinflation Watch.  The financial markets have been roiled by crises of confidence in the U.S. dollar and in the long-term outlook for U.S. financial, economic, systemic and political stability.  For those living in a U.S. dollar-denominated world, regardless of any further near-term extreme volatility in the U.S. dollar, versus the stronger major currencies and gold, the stronger currencies and precious metals remain the fundamental hedges against what lies ahead.

Massive, fundamental dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated assets could start at anytime, with little or no further warning.  With a U.S. government unwilling to balance or even address its uncontainable fiscal condition; with the federal government and Federal Reserve ready to prevent a systemic collapse, so long as it is possible to print and spend whatever money is needed; and with the U.S. dollar at risk of losing its global reserve currency status; much higher inflation lies ahead, in a circumstance that rapidly could evolve into hyperinflation.

The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue to unfold and are unchanged.  An updated economic and inflation outlook will follow in the August 18th Commentary.

   

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

RETAIL SALES (JULY 2011)

July Retail Sales Gain Largely Was Due to Inflation Gains, Not to Gains in Physical Demand.  The 95% confidence interval around the month-to-month reported July retail sales gain of 0.5% also allows for an outright contraction.  Accordingly, the reported gain in sales was not statistically meaningful.  Nonetheless, the bulk of, if not the entire reported monthly gain in retail sales was due to rising prices, not to increased physical volume of the goods and services consumed.

Additionally, as previously discussed (see the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) for example), the retail sales numbers undergo concurrent seasonal-factor adjustment, where current and historical seasonal factors are revised every month.  The stability of the seasonal-adjustment process, however, has been disrupted by the unprecedented depth and length of the current economic downturn in the post-World War II era (the period of modern economic reporting).  These issues have distorted monthly reporting for a number of key series, leaving the markets effectively flying blind on actual underlying economic activity.  That said, the latest seasonal recalculations appear to have contributed to the reported, but statistically meaningless, monthly July retail sales gain.  Further, ongoing positive biases in the retail sales surveys should be corrected in downside revisions to the historical data in next year’s benchmark revisions.

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Retail SalesToday’s (August 12th) report on July 2011 retail sales—issued by the Census Bureau—indicated a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly increase of 0.47% (up by 0.68% before prior-period revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised June increase of 0.28% (previously up by 0.14%).

On a year-to-year basis, July 2011 retail sales were reported up by 8.53%, versus a revised year-to-year June 2011 gain of 8.33% (previously 8.06%).    

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Retail Sales.  Details on real retail sales for July will published in the August 18th Commentary, along with details on the July 2011 CPI-U release.  Given seasonal factors that will boost reported gasoline prices, higher food prices and the spreading impact of the higher oil prices through the broad economy, real retail sales for July likely were flat, month-to-month, and may have contracted.

Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, “core” retail sales—consistent with the Federal Reserve’s preference for ignoring food and energy prices when “core” inflation is lower than full inflation—are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: July 2011 versus June 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues—was up by 0.3% versus an official aggregate gain of 0.5%.

Version II: July 2011 versus June 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gas stations—was up by 0.2% versus an official aggregate gain of 0.5%.

 

TRADE BALANCE (JUNE 2011)

Full Quarterly Trade Data Suggest Downside Revision to Second-Quarter GDP.  As suggested by the two months of second-quarter trade data available for the “advance” second-quarter GDP estimate, the relative improvement in the second-quarter trade deficit helped to prop up the 1.3% inflation-adjusted, annualized quarterly growth rate.  With the June 2011 trade balance report, however, the second-quarter trade deficit largely is set, and the more-complete, quarterly trade deficit deteriorated enough, in revision, potentially to offset the better part of the 0.6 percentage point positive contribution to the initial GDP estimate.  Of course there will be other revisions to GDP components, and some may offset the trade data, at least partially.  The GDP revision is due on August 26th. 

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Trade Deficit.  The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported Thursday (August 11th) that the nominal, seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services for June 2011 widened to $53.1 billion from a revised $50.8 (previously $50.2) billion in May.  The June 2011 deficit also widened from $47.9 billion a year ago and was the largest monthly deficit reported since October 2008.

Against May, the June trade balance showed a greater decline in exports than was seen in imports.  Oil prices dampened import values in the month.  Specifically, for the month of June 2011, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $106.00 per barrel, down from $108.70 in May 2011, but up from $72.39 in June 2010.  In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, June 2011 volume averaged 9.889 million barrels per day, up from 8.879 million in May 2011, but down from 10.443 million in June 2010.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit.  Adjusted for seasonal factors and net of rising oil prices and other inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the reported June 2011 merchandise trade deficit came in at $50.9 billion, up from a revised $47.9 (previously $47.8) billion in May.

Based on the initial full reporting for the quarter, the real second-quarter 2011 merchandise deficit annualized out to $569.7 billion (up from $550.2 billion based on two months), versus a revised $603.1 (previously $604.9) billion in the first-quarter.  The $19.5 billion net deterioration in the data is enough to suggest a greater trade shortfall in the GDP’s net export account, along with some resulting downside revision to second-quarter GDP growth.

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Generally, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Residential Construction (July 2011).  The release of July 2011 housing starts is scheduled for Tuesday, August 16th.  The historic weakness in housing starts should continue, with an intensifying downtrend.  Any upside movement likely will not be statistically meaningful.

Industrial Production (July 2011).  The release of July 2011 industrial production also is scheduled for Tuesday, August 16th.  July production could be flat to minus, as the broad economy begins its formal double-dip.

Producer Price Index—PPI (July 2011).  The release of the July 2011 PPI is scheduled for Wednesday, August 17th.  Finished goods inflation should top a likely soft consensus outlook, due to a swing into supportive seasonal factors for gasoline prices, and to spreading, broader inflationary pressures.

Consumer Price Index—CPI (July 2011).  The release of the July 2011 CPI is scheduled for Thursday, August 18th, and it is at fair risk of topping what likely will be a soft consensus outlook.  At work here will be a strong reversal in gasoline seasonal-factors that will boost gasoline prices, as further inflationary pressures from the Fed-induced jump in oil prices continues to spread in the broad, non-“core” economy.

Year-to-year total CPI-U inflation would increase or decrease in the July 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.35% gain in the adjusted monthly level reported for July 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for July 2011, the difference in July’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from June 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 3.56%.  Annual CPI-U inflation should move to top 4% in the next couple of months. 

 

__________

No. 383: Dollar, Deficit and Downgrade Crises, July Employment and M3

Sunday, August 7th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 383
Dollar, Deficit and Downgrade Crises, July Employment and M3

August 8, 2011

__________

Dollar Debasement Accelerates Dangerously

U.S. Rating Downgrade Will Have Unhappy Ripple Effects

QE3 Likely Will Be Indicated This Week

Payroll and Unemployment Improvements Were Not Statistically Meaningful

July Unemployment Rates: 9.1% (U.3), 16.1% (U.6), 22.7% (SGS)

Broad Money Supply Increased in July

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, August 12th.  It will cover July 2011 retail sales and June trade balance reporting. Special Commentaries will be published, as appropriate, in response to unusual market or economic circumstances.

—Best to all, John Williams

 

SPECIAL COMMENTARY

 

Global Confidence in U.S. Dollar Crumbles at Accelerating Pace.  As this Commentary goes to press in the early trading hours of Monday, August 8th, well in advance of the opening of the U.S. Markets, U.S. stock futures have opened sharply lower and gold prices sharply higher.  While those movements seem reasonable, given the events of the last several days and couple weeks, governments, central banks and the global equivalents of the President’s Working Group on Financial Markets all are poised to “stabilize” global markets, propping stocks, supporting the U.S. dollar against other currencies and to do their best at suppressing gold prices.  Irrespective of the success, or lack of same, by both the overt and covert interventionists in what should be highly volatile Monday markets, a week from now, a month from now, the U.S. dollar most likely will be sharply weaker than it is today against currencies such as the Swiss franc, Australian dollar and the Canadian dollar, as well as against gold and silver.

In the wake of the erosion of global confidence in the U.S. dollar caused by the Fed’s second-round of quantitative easing (QE2) in late 2010, the dollar lost its traditional safe-haven stratus.  As turmoil erupted in the Middle East and North Africa earlier this year, safe-haven money flowed into the Swiss franc and gold.  The flight was out of the dollar, with the U.S. currency dropping to new historic lows against the stronger Western currencies and gold.

Lack of confidence in the U.S. dollar has been pushed to a new and more dangerous nadir in the last two weeks.  Dollar selling has been exacerbated by the contentious and virtually meaningless debt deal negotiated by the President and Congress, by Standard & Poor’s downgrading the rating on U.S. Treasuries to “AA+” from “AAA,” and by mounting market recognition of the ongoing U.S. economic and systemic-solvency crises.  Pending still is the Fed’s move to QE3.

The dollar’s back is close to being broken.  Despite near-term interventions and extreme volatility, the heavy dollar selling that follows will be highly inflationary, and the broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue to unfold and are unchanged. 

Deficit-Cutting Deal Was a Complete Disaster.  The extraordinarily contentious negotiation process involving the President and the Congress accomplished little other than focusing global attention on the U.S. government’s untenable fiscal circumstances and lack of political stability.  Not only did the elected leaders of the U.S. government demonstrate the lack of any political will whatsoever to address the longer-range solvency issues of the United States, but also they trumpeted their lack of concern to the rest of the world, thumbing their noses at the near- and long-term interests of both the American public and those investors who have been buying the U.S. Treasuries used to fund the exploding U.S. fiscal deficit.

In turn, the global markets offered their opinion on the deficit-reduction/debt-ceiling-increase deal with heavy stock and U.S. dollar selling, along with heavy gold buying.

The process also invited a rating downgrade by S&P, with Moody’s and Fitch appearing to back off earlier threats of downgrade.  Pressures by the administration and major clients of the rating agencies had to be extreme.  The package put forth by the government certainly was not of much substance.  It is hard to imagine that it could have satisfied any rating agency that really was looking to base a rating on that package.  The deficit “cuts” all were tied to slowing the pace of already-planned, unsustainable spending increases.

Further, the deficit projections are based on assumptions of ongoing positive economic growth, not a double-dip recession that would reduce tax revenues to below planned levels.  The difference is that with a contracting economy, the real deficits (and borrowing needs) would be worse than they had been estimated initially before the cuts were put in place.

Downgrading the “AAA” Benchmark.  Given the extreme political and business pressures countering the move, S&P’s downgrade of the U.S. sovereign debt rating was courageous, but also disruptive and dangerous for the system.  Consider that some holders of U.S. Treasuries will be forced to sell them.  Consider that a number of Treasury Securities holders simply will want to sell them.  Consider that there are issues that could lead to downgrades of some business entities that currently have “AAA” ratings that are higher than their sovereign state, or companies that get will be downgraded because of their heavy holdings of Treasuries. 

While these factors all are negatives for the U.S. dollar, the U.S. dollar losing its global reserve currency status could break the dollar’s back.  How can the world’s reserve currency—the benchmark for the “riskless” rating of “AAA”—not be rated “AAA?”  Not surprisingly, China already is raising the alarm.

Double-Dip Spooks the Markets.  Despite stock-market hype, one economic report does not make or break the substance of an economic cycle, and the U.S. economy has been in the process of rolling into a double-dip recession for some time.  Some in the markets were rattled by a sharp decline in the manufacturing and services surveys published by the purchasing managers (ISM).  As discussed previously (see the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) for example), the ISM surveys have been warped by terrible distortions to their seasonal factors as a direct result of the extraordinary length and depth of the economic downturn.  The July ISM numbers indeed were weaker, but they also reflected some catch up from previous overstatement.

July Employment and Unemployment.  Last Friday’s (August 5th) report on July labor conditions surprised the financial markets on the upside, but the numbers were meaningless as to any improvement, with no suggestion of the double-dip disappearing, as some analysts in the markets have hyped.

The headline July payroll employment number showed a gain of 117,000, up from a revised 46,000 (previously an 18,000) gain reported in June.  Beyond the normal reporting distortions discussed in the Reporting Detail section, however, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) estimates a 95% confidence around the headline number of 129,000.  To be considered statistically meaningful, the jobs gain or loss has to break 129,000 in a given month.  With the July estimate, the confidence interval included not only the consensus estimate, but also it allowed for an outright contraction in the number.

The same was true with the headline unemployment for July, which narrowed to 9.1% from 9.2% in June, with a 95% confidence interval of +/- 0.2%.

QE3 Symptomatic of Failing System.  The Federal Reserve likely will intensify the current dollar crisis, deliberately, with QE3 likely to be announced after Tuesday’s (August 9th) FOMC meeting.  Yes, the economy and the system are that weak, meeting the Fed Chairman’s pre-stated qualifications.  With U.S. Treasuries facing some likely selling pressure as a result of the downgrade, and with looming Treasury auctions likely to face weak demand in the post-debt ceiling crisis environment, QE3 would provide an excuse for expanded Fed monetization of Treasury debt.

Faced with a flight from the U.S. dollar that was making the Swiss National Bank uncomfortable with the strength of the Swiss franc, the SNB lowered interest rates.  In normal times, the Fed correspondingly would raise rates to strengthen the dollar.  Yet, if the Fed raised rates now, it likely would crash the stock market.  In modern decades, the Fed has demonstrated a preference to stimulating U.S. equity values as opposed to strengthening the dollar.  Mr. Greenspan abandon the dollar to save stocks in 1987, Mr. Bernanke did the same with QE1, QE2, and he likely will continue doing so with QE3.

SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate for July Likely Showed Some Pick Up.  The preliminary estimate for the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate for July 2011 (published in the Alternate Data section), showed year-to-year growth of about 2.6%, up from 2.3% in June and 2.2% in May.  Prior history on key elements were revised by the Federal Reserve Board during the last month, with June’s annual growth coming in initially at about 2.0%.  Seasonally-adjusted month-to-month change in M3 had stalled in June at roughly plus 0.1%, but it appears to be on the rise again, up about 0.5% in July, with declines in large time deposits and institutional money funds largely offsetting an increase in M2.  The estimated month-to-month M3 changes, however, remain less reliable than the estimates of annual growth.

An early estimate on M2 for July shows year-to-year growth of 7.9% in July, versus 6.0% in June.  Month-to-month M2 growth is estimated at roughly 2.0% in July, versus 1.0% in June.  The early estimate on M1 for July shows year-to-year growth of 15.2% in July, versus 13.0% in June.  Month-to-month M1 growth is estimated at roughly 2.2% in July, versus 0.8% in June

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

EMPLOYMENT AND UNEMPLOYMENT (JULY 2011)

Constant Recalculation of Payroll Seasonal Factors Help to Boost June Upside Revision.  As discussed in prior writings (see the Hyperinflation Report, for example), seasonal-factor estimation for most economic series has been distorted severely by the extreme depth and duration of the economic contraction.  These distortions are exacerbated for payroll employment data based on the BLS’s monthly seasonal-factor re-estimations and lack of full reporting.

 

 

While the BLS recalculates the monthly seasonal factors each month for payroll employment, going back a number of years, it only publishes revised data for the last two months of reporting (May and June 2011 with the July 2011 report).  Shown in the preceding graph, the latest “concurrent” seasonal factor changes again upped June and July of 2010 (with implied stronger seasonals for the June and July 2011 reporting).  With just two months of prior reporting shown as revised, the changes pre-May 2011 were not published by the BLS, so as to avoid “confusing” people who use the data.  

As discussed repeatedly in recent employment Commentaries, meaningful seasonal-adjustments tend to be stable over time, without wild fluctuations every time the seasonals are re-estimated.  This is true particularly for series like payroll employment and retail sales, where the seasonal factors are concurrent—recalculated each month for the current month’s raw data.  If the payroll seasonals were stable, the lines in the preceding graph would be flat and coincident.  Instead, the variations intensify with each successive month.  The monthly recalculations of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels show irregular revisions, with monthly swings now of plus or minus 90,000 jobs shifting over time.  To the extent the numbers affect current reporting, the differences are enough potentially to alter financial-market perceptions and reactions. 

The big issue remains that the month-to-month seasonally-adjusted payroll data have become increasingly worthless, with reporting errors likely now well beyond the official 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000 jobs in the reported monthly payroll change.  Yet the media and the markets tout the data as meaningful, usually without question or qualification.

The inconsistency differences in the graph were calculated based on the raw data and the seasonal-adjustment program available to the public on the BLS Web site.  Using the BLS data, we have calculated the seasonally-adjusted numbers as the BLS should be showing them, as of the current reporting, and the differences between official reporting and the consistent seasonally-adjusted series.

Payroll Survey Detail.  The BLS reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted July 2011 month-to-month jobs gain of 117,000 (a jobs gain of 173,000 jobs before prior-period revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval).  June payrolls showed a revised 46,000 (previously 18,000) gain. 

In terms of year-to-year change, the unadjusted July 2011 growth rate was at 1.04%, versus the revised 0.95% (previously 0.89%) annual growth reported in June.  Although the graphs of long-term year-to-year unadjusted payroll change had shown a recent rising trend in annual growth, which primarily reflected the still-protracted bottom-bouncing in the payroll series, that pattern had flattened out in the last several months and now has begun to soften, as shown in the first graph following of the near-term detail in year-to-year change.  These numbers still reflect some short-lived distortions as a result of the year-ago hiring surge and full layoffs of temporary census workers.

As shown in the following, longer-term graph (historical detail back to World War II), with the bottom-bouncing of recent years, current annual growth has recovered from the post-World War II record 5.06% decline in August 2009, which was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II (a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945).  Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the August 2009 annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression, yet the current level of employment is far from any recovery.

 

 

In the above plot of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels (as reported by the BLS) the current level of nonfarm payrolls shows a recent flattening and certainly no recovery to pre-recession highs.  The data continue to bottom-bounce along a plateau of low-level activity, with the latest payroll level still well below where it was a decade ago, even though the U.S. population has increased by more than 10% in the same period. 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  Despite the ongoing and regular overstatement of monthly payroll employment—as evidenced by the regular and massive, annual downward benchmark revisions to the reported payroll numbers—the BLS generally has upped its monthly biases in post-benchmark reporting.  For July 2011, the monthly bias used was a subtraction of 18,000 jobs, a less-negative number than the 38,000 subtraction In July 2010.  In June 2011, the upside bias was 131,000.  These upside biases reflect an ongoing assumption of a net positive jobs creation by new companies versus those going out business.  Such becomes a self-fulfilling system, as the upside biases boost reporting for financial-market and political needs, with relatively good headline data, while also setting up the next year’s downside benchmark revisions, which traditionally are ignored by the media and the politicians.

Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business, on a timely basis (within at least five years, if ever), such information is estimated by the addition of a bias-factor generated by the Birth-Death Model (a model of the effects of new business creation and old business bankruptcies).  The fundamental defects of the Birth-Death Model are discussed as usual in the ensuing paragraphs.

Positive assumptions—commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling—can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with “stronger” economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates, or underlying assumptions of ongoing economic recovery.  Indeed, historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels—to understate employment declines—during recessions.   There is a faulty underlying premise here that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business.  So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, presumed additional “surplus” jobs, created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor.  These add-factors have averaged 40,000 jobs per month over the last 12 months.  I still estimate this monthly bias should be negative by roughly 200,000 or so, on average.  Since it is not, the BLS overestimates monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 240,000 jobs.  Much of that misreporting was not picked up in the 2010 benchmarking, and now will not be corrected until at least the 2011 benchmark revision (based on the upcoming March 2011 benchmarking) to be published in February 2012.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (counting multiple job holders more than once), showed a July 2011 employment drop of 38,000 versus June, which in turn had plunged by 455,000 in from May.  Issues with seasonal factors still cloud the significance of the reported monthly levels in the adjusted headline U.3 unemployment rate and other adjusted household-survey numbers.  Again, adjusted data have been moved by highly unstable seasonal factors that are artifacts of the severe and extraordinarily protracted downturn in U.S. economic activity, not by the regular and stable seasonal patterns that were in place before the current economic crisis.

The July 2011 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate eased by a statistically-insignificant 0.09 percentage point to 9.09% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from 9.18% in June.  Not-seasonally-adjusted, July’s U.3 unemployment rate was 9.3%, the same as in in June.

The July U.6 unemployment rate eased to a seasonally-adjusted 16.1%, from 16.2% in June.  The unadjusted U.6 rate eased to 16.3% in July, from 16.4% in June.  The broadest unemployment rate published by the BLS, U.6 includes accounting for those marginally attached to the labor force (including short-term discouraged workers) and those who are employed part-time for economic reasons (they cannot find a full-time job).

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, “discouraged workers”—those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had—were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been “discouraged” for less than a year.  This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers.  The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

 

 

Adding the SGS estimate of excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed and labor force, unemployment—more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure—held at about 22.7% in July, the same level as in June.  The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting, and tends to follow its relative monthly movements. Accordingly, it will suffer some of the current seasonal-adjustment woes afflicting the base series.  See the Alternate Data tab for more detail.

As discussed in previous writings, an unemployment rate nearing 23% might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%.  The SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession.  The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms.  Today, less that 2% work on farms.  Accordingly, for purposes of Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

 

Week Ahead.  Gaining increasing recognition, though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Generally, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Trade Balance (June 2011).  Due for release on Thursday, August 11th, the June 2011 monthly trade deficit likely widened in both real (inflation-adjusted) and nominal (not adjusted for inflation).  A meaningful swing either way could impact the first revision to the second-quarter 2011 GDP estimate due for release August 26th.  Significant trade deterioration in real terms would suggest a downside revision to the GDP estimate, and vice versa.

Retail Sales (July 2011).  Due for release on Friday, August 12th, the July 2011 retail sales report is at fair risk of coming in below consensus estimates (a monthly gain of 0.5% per Breifing.com).  In any event, retail sales should be flat-to-minus for the month, net of inflation effects.

 

 

__________

No. 382: Second-Quarter GDP and Revisions, Durable Goods Orders

Friday, July 29th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 382
Second-Quarter GDP and Revisions, Durable Goods Orders

July 29, 2011

__________

GDP Growth Slows Markedly

Official Downturn Much Deeper In Revision

Latest GDP No Longer Has Recovered Pre-Recession High

2009 Annual GDP Drop Now Worst Since 1932
— Outside of World War II Production Shutdown

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, August 5th.  It will cover the employment and unemployment data for July 2011.

—Best to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.   In late-2006, the U.S. economy unofficially entered its worst economic downturn since the Great Depression.  After an extreme plunge in activity in 2008 and 2009, business activity entered a protracted period of bottom-bouncing.  Beyond brief, stronger bounces from short-lived stimulus factors, the economy has started to weaken anew. 

Officially, the recession was timed from fourth-quarter 2007 to second-quarter 2009, and it was the deepest since the Great Depression.  Activity now is slowing anew per GDP reporting, and when GDP turns negative again, later this year, an official double-dip recession should be in place.  Earlier growth, though, never was as strong as initially reported, and meaningful downside benchmark revisions to gross domestic product (GDP) history and second-quarter reporting, as published today (July 29th) by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) now show:

  • Reported annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) GDP growth rates since third-quarter 2010 have been reported as positive, but they have not been statistically meaningful in terms of being positive as opposed to being in contraction.
  • Annual real GDP growth is slowing faster than it did going into the official 2007 recession.
  • The latest real GDP no longer has recovered its pre-2007 recession peak in activity, as had been the case since fourth-quarter 2010 in prior reporting.
  • With the exception of the post-World War II production shutdown—which usually is not viewed as an economic cycle—the decline in real 2009 GDP growth now is reported as the deepest annual economic collapse since 1932.

In other economic reporting this week, both new orders for durable goods and new home sales turned down slightly, but the changes were not meaningful.  Home sales continued a pattern of bottom-bouncing.

Second-Quarter GDP and Revisions.  The “advance” second-quarter GDP estimate of annualized real growth was below consensus, at 1.3%.  While that was a slowing from the first-quarter’s 1.9% growth, reported last month, first-quarter growth was revised lower to 0.4% in today’s report, and that made the initial second-quarter estimate appear as an improvement.  Reflecting all the benchmark revisions, the real level of first-quarter 2011 GDP was revised lower by 1.6% from prior reporting.

As usually has been the case—and consistent with recent negative revisions to related nonfarm payrolls, retail sales, trade, industrial production and new orders for durable goods—the annual benchmark revisions to U.S. GDP reflected sharp downside changes to recent history.  Per the BEA, “The percent change in real GDP was revised down 0.3 percentage point for 2008, was revised down 0.9% percentage point for 2009, and was revised up 0.1 percentage point for 2010.”  As seen in the benchmarks of the underlying series, where better information was available (2008 and 2009), the downside revisions were sharp.  Where relatively little new information was available (2010), the overestimated BEA guesstimates continued, subject to downside revisions in next year’s benchmarking.

The following graph shows how the reporting has unfolded for the economic downturn that began officially as of fourth-quarter 2007.  The plot shows reporting as it was, subsequent to the 2009 benchmark, the 2010 benchmark and subsequent reporting, and the 2011 benchmark and second-quarter 2011 reporting (just released).  In the last two revisions, the overly optimistic assumptions out of the BEA were moved a little closer to reality.

Note that the pre-recession high in real GDP activity was revised lower, and that the first-quarter 2011 GDP level, which had been 1.3% above that fourth-quarter 2007 peak, now is 0.7% below it.

 

 

 

The second graph shows the revised real GDP levels in historical perspective since the beginning of the reported series in 1947.  The current downturn clearly is the most significant in the history of the series.

The next series of graphs show the revised annual or year-to-year rates of change in both quarterly and annual real GDP.  The first graph shows the near-term quarterly data since 2006.  The latest year-to-year real GDP growth as of second-quarter 2011 slowed to 1.6%, down from 2.2% in the first-quarter, and down from the near-term peak of 3.5% in third-quarter 2010.  Annual growth is dropping off sharply, which often leads to annual and quarterly contractions.  Coming into the 2007 recession, annual growth was flat to positive.

 

 

The following graph shows the year-to-year change in the revised quarterly real numbers since 1948.  The revised annual decline in second-quarter 2009 GDP of 5.0% (previously a 4.1% contraction), remains the deepest contraction in the history of the quarterly GDP series.

As shown in the subsequent graph of annual change (year-to-year change in the annual average GDP), the revised real 3.5% contraction for the full year of 2009, now is the worst annual economic contraction seen since since 1932.  The big drop in 1946 was from the shutdown of war production and generally is not considered an economic cycle.

 

 

Rounding out the ways of looking at the GDP, the above graph shows the most-followed but least-meaningful of the measures, where the real quarter-to-quarter growth rate is annualized to become the headline number that moves the financial markets.  Not annualized, the quarter-to-quarter growth rates in the first- and second-quarters were 0.09% and 0.32%, respectively, little more than statistical noise around being unchanged.  They possibly have been massaged a little bit to keep the quarterly growth rates in minimally positive as opposed to negative territory.

The one thing to note is that the trend in the revised quarter-to-quarter reporting generally is towards a slowing in recent economic activity.

 

Hyperinflation Watch.  The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue to unfold and are unchanged.  The debate in Washington as to an effort at limited reduction in the long-term U.S. federal deficit, in conjunction with an increase in the federal debt limit, continues as we go to press.  The points raised in Commentary No. 381 remain my current view on the matter.  Any surprising developments would be addressed in a Special Commentary.

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

GROSS DOMESTIC PRODUCT (Benchmark Revisions, “Advance” Second-Quarter 2011)

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

Still Heavily Overstated, Official GDP Growth Shows Some Meaningful Slowing.  The combination of annual benchmark revisions and initial second-quarter 2011 GDP reporting showed a deeper historical downturn and slower current growth pattern (as redistributed) than previously reported.  Although some methodological revisions went back to first-quarter 2003, and GDP levels were revised slightly lower back to 1929, the revisions to standard reporting had their biggest downside impact in 2008 and 2009.  Full details on the benchmark will be made available by the BEA in the month ahead, and unusual twists will be covered in subsequent Commentaries.  The GDP graphics and some of the broad benchmark revision details are covered in the Opening Comments and Executive Summary section. 

GDP.  Published today, July 29th, by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the initial or “advance” estimate of second-quarter 2011 gross domestic product (GDP) showed annualized quarterly growth of 1.28% (down by 4.49% before prior-period benchmark revisions) +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised estimate of a 0.36% (previously 1.91%) gain for first-quarter 2011.  In this most worthless of major economic series, the reported annualized growth rates for the last two quarters are little more than statistical noise around the unchanged level.  They possibly have been massaged a little to keep the quarterly growth rates in minimally-positive as opposed to minimally-negative territory.

Year-to-year change in second-quarter 2011 over second-quarter 2010 continued a slowing trend in annual growth, up by 1.62% versus 2.24% (previously 2.33%) in the first-quarter.  Such was well off the near-term peak in reported growth of 3.51% (previously 3.25%) in third-quarter 2010.

The second-quarter GDP implicit price deflator was estimated at 2.39%, versus a revised 2.73% (previously 2.05%) in the first-quarter.  In contrast, annualized seasonally-adjusted quarterly inflation for the CPI-U in the second-quarter eased to 4.09% from a seasonally-adjusted 5.22% in the first-quarter.  The lower the inflation rate that is used in deflating the GDP, the stronger is the resulting inflation-adjusted number and vice versa.  A slightly more realistic inflation number would have pushed the “advance” quarterly growth rate into negative territory.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for second-quarter 2011 is an approximate annual contraction of 2.8% versus the official estimate of a 1.6% gain.  Such is more negative than the alternate 2.6% annual contraction (2.2% official gain) in the first-quarter (see the Alternate Data tab).  The benchmark revision, once again, has brought official reporting somewhat closer to the SGS estimates.  While annualized real quarterly growth is not estimated formally on an alternative basis, a meaningful quarter-to-quarter contraction appears to have been realistic for the second-quarter, in what generally has been a protracted period of business bottom-bouncing.

GNP and GDI.  Historical revisions here will be assessed in a subsequent Commentary.  Second-quarter estimates of the gross national product (GNP) and gross domestic income (GDI) will not be published until the second estimate of the second-quarter GDP.

 

NEW ORDERS FOR DURABLE GOODS (JUNE 2011)

Decline in June Durable Goods Orders and Gain in May Likely Were Exacerbated by Bad Seasonals.  The Census Bureau reported July 27th that the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods fell for the month of June 2011 by 2.1% (down by 1.8% before prior-period revisions), after an unrevised 1.9% gain was reported for May.  June’s monthly decline reflected a 20.5% plunge in in irregular, long-term aircraft orders, a category that showed a revised 31.4% (previously 36.5%) surge in May.  Some of the Paris Air Show orders appear to have been booked in May, with poor-quality seasonal adjustments of same likely skewing the recent monthly aircraft-order patterns.

Unadjusted, year-to-year change in total June 2011 new orders slowed to 7.4% from a revised 11.4% (previously 10.8%) annual gain in May.  Current durable goods reporting remains subject to many of the same sampling and adjustment problems that are seen with retail sales and payroll reporting.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders declined by 4.1% (down by 4.3% before prior-period revisions) in June, versus a revised month-to-month 5.2% (previously 5.8%) gain in May, with both months also affected by the wild swings in order activity for nondefense aircraft.  For June, the unadjusted year-to-year growth in the series was 6.3%, down sharply from the revised 17.2% (previously 16.4%) annual growth estimated for May.

 

NEW HOME SALES (JUNE 2011)

June New Home Sales Showed Ongoing Bottom-Bouncing.  Consistent the long-term trends in housing starts and existing home sales (See Commentary No. 382 for June details), the July 26th release of June new-home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) showed an ongoing pattern of bottom-bouncing near historic lows, with a statistically-insignificant monthly decline of 1.0% (down 2.2% before prior-period revisions) +/- 14.6% (95% confidence interval) from May.  May’s decline was revised to 3.4% (previously down by 2.1%) against April.  The year-to-year gain in June 2011 new-home sales was a statistically-insignificant 1.6% +/- 16.5% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 12.1% (previously 13.5%) annual May gain. 

The high volatility in annual change is due to the lapsing of stimulus effects a year ago.  As with existing home sales, part of the new sales volume is due to foreclosure activity, but the Census Bureau does not provide an estimate of foreclosure volume.

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Generally, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Unemployment Rate and Payroll Employment (July 2011).  Nonfarm payrolls and the unemployment rates published in recent months have indicated slowing economic activity and have disappointed generally overly-optimistic consensus forecasts.  That pattern should repeat itself in the reporting for July, due for release on Friday, August 5th.   Payrolls are at risk of showing an outright monthly contraction, with the unemployment rate notching higher once again.  As seen also in recent months, any reporting in the other direction likely still would include a payroll contraction and higher unemployment rate within the 95% statistical reporting confidence intervals (+/- 129,000 for payroll change, +/- 0.2% for the unemployment rate).   As has been the case for some time, unstable seasonal adjustments can distort the reported monthly changes in these series meaningfully.

 

__________

No. 381: Debt, Deficit and Sovereign Rating

Monday, July 25th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 381
Debt, Deficit and Sovereign Rating

July 25, 2011

__________

Dollar and Deficit Do Matter

Downgrade Almost as Damaging as Default

__________

 

This brief Commentary touches upon some of the issues being bandied about, as Washington remains mired in deficit-reduction and debt-ceiling negotiations.  The next regular Commentary remains scheduled for Friday, July 29th.  It will cover the “advance” estimate of second-quarter GDP and benchmark revisions, June new orders for durable goods and June new home sales.  See the prior Commentary No. 380 for detail on the pending economic releases.

—Best to all, John Williams

 

SPECIAL COMMENT

 

Downgrade Could Be Death Knell for U.S. Dollar.  If I were to script a scenario as to how the United States quickly could debase the U.S. dollar with maximum impact, impairing the dollar’s reserve status and dwindling global credibility, and accelerating the movement towards a U.S. hyperinflation, it would be extremely difficult to come up with a more destructive course of action than what already is taking place in Washington, D.C.  The chances of a U.S. debt default remain nil, but risk of a U.S. sovereign credit rating downgrade—though small—is increasing, as discussed below.  In terms of the efforts by Congress and the President to reduce the government’s long-term fiscal shortfalls, the numbers being discussed would not come close to bringing the system into balance.  The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue to unfold and are unchanged.

Contrary to the policies of most administrations since the days of Franklin D. Roosevelt, the U.S. dollar and the federal deficit do matter.  Following eight decades of deliberate fiscal abuse and dollar neglect, devaluations and debasements, the day-of-reckoning began to unfold in the 2007/2008 economic and systemic-liquidity crises, and it continues to play out and evolve, today.

A default on U.S. debt and/or a credit-rating downgrade should lead to—among other severe financial-system problems—heavy selling of the U.S. dollar and dollar-denominated paper assets, such as U.S. Treasuries.  Given the recent behavior of the President and Congress, it is hard to imagine anyone eagerly looking to invest his or her cash in U.S. dollars, as opposed to exiting or to avoiding the U.S. currency.

While it remains beyond belief that the President and Congress deliberately would cause a default on U.S. debt (default here would be deliberate), the ongoing battle over raising the debt ceiling has gone beyond the pale, already focusing global attention on the long-term fiscal insolvency of the United States and raising the potential of a downgrade to the “AAA” credit rating of the United States and its debt.

Agencies rating sovereign debt usually give a “AAA” credit rating to debt denominated in the sovereign currency, in the context of that sovereign currency, simply because the sovereign state usually has the ability to print the money needed to pay its obligations.  In the case of the United States, its sovereign currency—the U.S. Dollar—also is the global reserve currency, and the “AAA” rating of U.S. Treasury debt is the rating industry’s benchmark for the near-riskless “AAA” category.  A downgrade would not happen without significant discussion and advance warning from the rating agency to the U.S. Treasury.

How could a rating agency downgrade its benchmark?  While extreme fiscal irresponsibility by the U.S. government has caused negative comment by most of the rating agencies, it is the existence of the debt ceiling and the controversy over raising same that creates the risk of an actual default now, as well as in the future, as this process gets repeated.  With Treasuries moving out of the “riskless” category, on that basis, the concept of a U.S. rating downgrade has moved to the fore.

The administration claims the U.S. will default if the debt ceiling is not raised by August 2nd.  There are those who suggest there is more time beyond that, if only the government selectively pays its bills, giving priority to interest and debt payments.  With other government obligations not paid as due, though, that circumstance likely would trigger the rating downgrades and intensify dollar dumping and abandonment.

As to near-term market conditions, the President’s Working Group on Financial Markets has a mandate to maintain orderly financial markets.  It would get advance warnings on breakdowns in negotiations, a rating downgrade, or a default, and could move to mitigate early negative market reactions.  In the event of a downgrade or default—or perceptions of same moving into the realm of the probable—any artificially-positive (or less-negative) market reaction would be limited and short-lived.  What is afoot here is more dangerous than the actions around the Lehman failure, where regulatory people thought that circumstance would not trigger a run on the U.S. banking system.  A U.S. default or a downgrade would savage the market value of the U.S. dollar and be extraordinarily disruptive to the financial system.

__________

No. 380: June Housing Starts and Existing Home Sales, Liquidity, GDP Outlook

Wednesday, July 20th, 2011


COMMENTARY NUMBER 380
June Housing Starts and Existing Home Sales, Liquidity, GDP Outlook

July 20, 2011

__________

Housing Starts Boosted by Apartment Starts

Existing Home Sales Suffer From Liquidity Crunch

Solvency Crisis: Banks Are Not Increasing Aggregate Lending

Downside GDP Revisions Loom

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, July 29th.  It will cover the “advance” estimate of second-quarter GDP and benchmark revisions, June new orders for durable goods and June new home sales.

—Best to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  June housing-industry data dominated this week’s otherwise light economic calendar, and the outlook for residential real estate activity remains bleak.  Consumer liquidity issues and lack of growth in aggregate bank lending remain at least partially at fault for the continuing housing woes.  The liquidity issues are addressed in the Hyperinflation Watch section.

Underlying economic fundamentals generally are weaker than as assessed by consensus forecasters.  The consensus viewpoint, however, may soften a little following likely downside GDP benchmark revisions that will be published next week.

June Housing Starts and Existing Home Sales.  The regularly-volatile housing starts series showed a statistically-significant 14.6% seasonally-adjusted monthly gain in June, thanks to prior-period revisions and to a 31.8% surge in the erratic and extremely volatile starts for apartment buildings.  May starts were unchanged in revision (previously up by 3.5%).  Nonetheless, the changes were well within normal volatility for this still-bottom-bouncing series.

Seasonally-adjusted existing home sales declined for the third straight month, falling 0.8% in June after a 3.8% drop in May, hitting a seven-month low.  The National Association of Realtors (NAR) press release, accompanying the data, cited an “unusual” surge in sales contract cancellations that likely was due to too-tight credit and to appraisals coming in too low to support needed mortgages.

GDP Revisions.  Both the “advance” estimate of second-quarter 2011 GDP and the annual benchmark revisions to the GDP series are due for release on Friday, July 29th.  With a flattening of quarterly growth in second-quarter 2011 relative to first-quarter reporting of industrial production and real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales (see Commentary No. 379), second-quarter GDP growth—net of a reported trade-deficit improvement and a possible further involuntary buildup in inventories—should have been weaker than growth currently estimated for the first-quarter.  Consensus estimates should be reasonably soft.  Although the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) usually targets its “advance” estimate at the consensus, a downside surprise is a fair shot here, given the also-pending downside historical revisions.

Although some methodological revisions will go back to first-quarter 2003, and GDP levels likely will be revised higher back to 1929, the revisions to standard reporting should have their biggest impact in 2008 and 2009.  Benchmark revisions this year to the trade data, payroll employment, retail sales, industrial production all indicated that recent GDP history has overstated economic growth.  Offsetting these fundamental revisions to key underlying data will be upside revisions to gimmicked capitalization of software, and use of the Fed’s new hedonic price adjustments (as in lower inflation, higher real growth) to communication equipment.

The net effect of the revisions should be to show that the 2007 recession was longer and deeper than previously reported, and that GDP levels—contrary to current reporting—have not recovered their pre-recession highs.  

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Systemic Liquidity Problems Continue.  The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue to unfold and are unchanged.  The following updates several measures related to the ongoing systemic-liquidity crisis.

Systemic Liquidity.  Despite the extreme level of liquidity pumped into the U.S. financial system by the Federal Reserve, aggregate bank lending has not picked up since the banking system was pushed to the brink of collapse in 2008.

As noted in the minutes of the last FOMC meeting in June 2011: “Bank credit was flat, on balance, in April and May.  Core loans—the sum of C&I [commercial and industrial], real estate, and consumer loans—continued to contract modestly, pulled down by the ongoing decline in commercial and residential real estate loans.  In contrast, C&I loans increased at a brisk pace in April and May.”

In the series of graphs that follow, growth in the broad money supply (SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate) began to show some pick-up in May, but that faltered in June.  This was despite the record level of the monetary base (cash in circulation, which is part of M1, plus the now-dominant component of bank reserves, largely excess reserves, which is not part of the money supply).  The monetary base has continued to increase despite the recent official end of QE2.

Consumer debt outstanding (the monthly level is plotted in historical perspective since World War II, and also in finer detail in the last decade or so) has shown some increase in recent months, but that increase is due entirely to federal government lending of student loans, not to bank lending.  Commercial and industrial loans (the monthly level also is plotted in historical perspective since World War II, and also in finer detail in the last decade or so) did jump as advertised by the FOMC, but new lending has faltered in June and early July.

Where some bank lending may be limited by borrower credit worthiness, the bulk of the problem still appears to be ongoing bank balance sheet issues.  Despite the systemic salvation in 2008, the systemic-solvency and economic crises continue.  As a result, some form of QE3 remains likely soon, and, despite protestations to the contrary, some further form of attempted economic stimulus remains likely before the 2012 election.

 

 

__________

 

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

HOUSING STARTS (JUNE 2011)

June Housing-Starts Gain Reflected Prior-Month Revisions and a Jump in Extremely Volatile Apartment Structures Category.  The regularly volatile housing starts series continued bottom-bouncing in June, albeit with a monthly gain that was enhanced by erratic and extreme volatility common to the “5-units or more” category (apartment buildings).  The Census Bureau reported yesterday, July 19th, a statistically-significant monthly increase in seasonally-adjusted June 2011 aggregate housing starts of 14.6% +/- 12.7% (all confidence intervals are at the 95% level); the June gain was 12.3% before prior-period revisions.  May starts were revised to unchanged from a previously-indicated 3.5% monthly gain. 

None of the gains in the June series’ components was statistically meaningful (month-to-month or year-to-year), but, as aggregated by the Census Bureau, the total gain for the series was determined to be statistically meaningful.  Broken out by type of structure, the seasonally-adjusted “1-unit” starts (72.0% of the volume) were up a statistically-insignificant 9.4% +/- 13.0% for the month, up 0.4% +/- 9.7% for the year; the seasonally-adjusted numbers for “2-to-4 units” starts were so limited in scope as to be deemed “unreliable” (but implied at 1% of the volume); the seasonally-adjusted “5-units or more” starts (27.0% of the volume) were up a statistically-insignificant 31.8% +/- 38.8% for the month, up 104.8% +/- 111.3% for the year.  

Still, the year-to-year change in aggregate June housing starts was a statistically-significant increase of 16.7% +/- 13.8% (95% confidence interval), following a revised annual 5.3% (previously 3.4%) decline in May.  The swing to annual gain reflected both the surging apartment starts, the continued year-ago drop-off in post-stimulus activity, and the continuation of a generally downwardly-sloped trend of bottom-bouncing since.    

There still are no indications of a reprieve for the housing industry or the otherwise deteriorating broader economy.  Indeed, the pattern of housing starts has remained one of stagnation at an historically low-level plateau of activity, over the last 31 months.  The six-month moving-average of seasonally-adjusted housing starts was 579,000 in June, 10.0% above the historic low six-month moving-average seen in May 2009.  Significantly weaker monthly numbers remain likely in the months ahead.  Since December 2008, housing starts have averaged a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 571,000.  In that period, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the aggregate series around that average, with the 629,000 June 2011 monthly reading at 10.2% above average.  Again, such is within the normal volatility of the series.

 

 

As shown in the preceding graphs, current monthly housing starts activity remains near the record monthly low seen for the present series in April 2009.  The current number also is well below any level reported in the predecessor nonfarm housing starts series, which was introduced in 1946.  The first graph shows recent detail for current housing starts activity, the second graph shows the same data within the historical context of the post-World War II period.

 

EXISTING HOME SALES (JUNE 2011)

“Unusual Spike” in Sales Contract Cancellations Hits Existing Home Sales.  Today’s (July 20th) release of June existing-home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly decline of 0.8%, versus May’s unrevised 3.8% monthly decline.  On a year-to-year basis, June sales were down by 8.8%, versus a 15.3% annual decline in May.  The narrowing of the pace of annual reflects the year-ago diminution of stimulus effects.

Foreclosure activity remained a major distorting factor for home sales, with "distressed" activity accounting for an estimated 30% of existing sales in the NAR’s June reporting, down from the 31% estimated for May.

The NAR’s press release on the June data suggested that the “unusual” surge in contract cancellations could be due to too-tight credit and to low appraisals that were hurting the ability to support needed mortgages.

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

New Home Sales (June 2011).  June existing home sales (National Association of Realtors) were released today, July 20th, and are covered above.  New home sales (Census Bureau) are due for release on Tuesday, July 26th.  As with the ongoing historic weakness in housing starts and existing sales, the volatile new home sales series should remain extremely weak, with any positive monthly change again lacking statistical significance.  Also, as usual, given the extreme volatility, reporting error and revisions in both these series, given the poor-quality seasonal adjustments, given continuing negative anecdotal evidence, and given ongoing massive distortions from irregularly volatile foreclosure activity, the monthly movements in these numbers (particularly to the upside) remain meaningless.

New Orders for Durable Goods (June 2011).  Due for release on Wednesday, July 27th, June’s new orders for durable goods could show a spike from Paris Air Show orders, but it likely will not show a meaningful monthly change otherwise, with odds slightly favoring a decline in in non-aircraft orders in this irregularly volatile series.

Gross Domestic Product—GDP (Second-Quarter 2011—“Advance” Estimate, Benchmark Revision).  The “advance” estimate of second-quarter GDP is due for release from the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) on Friday, July 29th.  Benchmark revisions to the data will be released at the same time, with some of the numbers to be restated back to 1929.

The second-quarter GDP headline, annualized quarterly real growth rate should come in somewhat below a likely soft consensus expectation, although the BEA tries to target its initial quarterly guesstimate at the consensus growth estimate.  GDP growth of the last several years should be revised lower, in line with earlier benchmark revisions to trade, payroll employment, real retail sales, industrial production and new orders for durable goods.  See the Opening Comments and Executive Summary for more detail.

 

__________

No. 379: June CPI, Industrial Production

Friday, July 15th, 2011
 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 379
June CPI, Industrial Production

July 15, 2011

__________

Economy Falters as Key Indicators Put in Worst Performances
Since “End” of the Recession in June 2009

Higher Energy Prices Create Broad Inflationary Pressures Across the Economy

Despite Short-Lived Dip in Gasoline Prices
June Annual Consumer Inflation Held at 32-Month High 

June’s Annual Inflation: 3.6% (CPI-U), 4.1% (CPI-W), 11.1% (SGS)

Annual “Core” Inflation in a Steady Upside Move Since QE2

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Wednesday, July 20th.  It will cover June housing starts, the outlook for upcoming GDP second-quarter 2011 reporting and benchmark revisions, and a review of systemic liquidity measures.

—Best to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  Economic activity has slowed sharply.  At the same time, higher oil costs have started to create broad inflationary pressures that neither are in the direct “energy” sector, nor driven by strong economic demand.  These patterns are based on official government reporting, with all the biases and current seasonal-factor distortions that are in that reporting.  Underlying reality is even worse: an inflationary double-dip recession.  The implications are horrendous in terms of the federal budget deficit, Treasury funding needs and banking-system solvency, where the current not-so-happy projections are overly optimistic, based on underlying assumptions of positive economic growth and contained inflation.  This circumstance also likely is why Fed Chairman Bernanke suddenly started hemming and hawing about having another round of “stimulus,” some form of a QE3.  Yes, the economy is that weak.

June CPI.  The June CPI-U showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly decline of 0.2%, although the annual, year-to-year inflation rate held at 3.6%, its highest level since October 2008.  The monthly decline in adjusted gasoline prices still was exacerbated slightly by seasonal factors, but that will reverse sharply in July, as the seasonal-adjustment effects flip to the other side.

As seen in both today’s (July 15th) CPI reporting and yesterday’s PPI reporting, the broad economy is experiencing pass-through upside inflationary pressures from higher oil costs.  Significant here is that higher inflation does not reflect a strengthening economy, but rather it is tied to the dollar-debasement efforts of the Fed, the resulting weakness in the U.S. dollar and the related strength in oil prices.

As seen in the graph above, the current rise in annual “core” inflation started following Mr. Bernanke’s efforts first at jawboning, and then actually moving to debase the U.S. dollar with the announcement of QE2 on November 3, 2010.  While the Fed prefers to ignore food and energy inflation, its targeted “core” inflation rate showed 2.5% annualized inflation in second-quarter 2011, up from 1.7% in first-quarter 2011.  The second-quarter inflation pace is one that should forestall a QE3, if the Fed were being forthright in explaining its actions to date.  Systemic solvency issues (under cover of a weakening economy), though, should force QE3 shortly.  At such time as the Fed might introduced the next easing, the U.S. central bank effectively will have signaled abandonment of any plans at near-term inflation containment.

June Industrial Production and Real Retail Sales.  I disagree with the use of annualized rates for expressing quarterly GDP change, since those numbers rarely are consistent in any consecutive four-quarter period.  That said, using annualized rates is the U.S. convention, and I shall use it here for some comparative measures. 

With second-quarter reporting now in place for real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales and for industrial production, those results may offer a little guidance on what to expect with the July 29th “advance” estimate on annualized, inflation-adjusted second-quarter 2011 GDP growth.

Annualized growth in both the retail and production series collapsed in second-quarter 2011.  Industrial production showed annualized growth of 4.82% in first-quarter 2011, but that plunged to 0.8% in the second-quarter.  In like manner, real retail sales growth collapsed from 5.02% in the first-quarter to 0.32% in the second-quarter.  For both series, the results were the weakest seen since outright contractions in second-quarter 2009, at the official “end” to the 2007 recession.

Other than an improvement in net exports and possible inventory gains, there is not much out there to suggest a second-quarter GDP number that would be stronger than the first-quarter’s estimate of 1.9%.  A formal forecast here will be offered with the next Commentary, along with an assessment of the likely benchmark revisions that also will be published July 29th.   

 

Hyperinflation Watch.  The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue to unfold and are unchanged.  Beyond the potential default and/or U.S. debt downgrade issues discussed in yesterday’s Commentary No. 378, any new considerations were covered in the previous section.  A detailed review of systemic liquidity will be included in the next Commentary.

The regular gold, silver, Swiss franc and oil charts follow.

 

 

 

__________

 

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

CONSUMER PRICE INDEX (JUNE 2011)

Annual Inflation Rates Hold Despite Monthly Dip in Gasoline Prices.  June CPI reporting showed a stall in annual inflation growth, as a short-lived dip in gasoline prices had some impact.  What has to be distressing, though, to those such as the Fed Chairman, who likes to ignore food and energy inflation, is that “core” inflation steadily has continued to rise.  The rising “core” inflation reflects upside pricing pressures from higher oil prices, not from economic demand, and is graphed in the Opening Comments and Executive Summary.

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported today (July 15th) that the seasonally-adjusted June 2011 CPI-U eased by 0.22% (down by 0.09%, unadjusted) for the month.  That followed an increase of 0.17% (up by 0.47%, unadjusted) in May.  The June reporting reflected an unadjusted 5.8% drop in monthly average gasoline prices, which was turned into a monthly contraction of 6.8% by ongoing vestiges of the happy seasonal adjustments of the BLS, which usually turn neutral for gasoline at this time of year.  Those gasoline-price-suppressing adjustments should have run their course for a while, though, with the seasonals boosting adjusted gasoline prices starting in July.   

With the short-lived dip in June’s gasoline prices, the pace of annualized, seasonally-adjusted CPI-U inflation slowed slightly in second-quarter 2011 to 4.09%, from 5.22% in first-quarter 2011.

June’s unadjusted year-to-year CPI-U inflation held at 3.56%, virtually unchanged from May’s 3.57% and still the strongest pace of annual inflation since October 2008.

The June report also showed, though, that the inflationary pressures from higher energy prices have spread to the broad economy (see the Opening Comments and Executive Summary).  On an annual basis, “core” CPI-U inflation notched higher again in June, up to 1.64%, from 1.51% in May.  When Fed Chairman Bernanke used his jawboning in an effort to debase the U.S. dollar in the markets, in advance of announcing QE2 in November 2010, annual “core” inflation was at 0.61%.

Year-to-year total CPI-U inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s July 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.35% gain in the adjusted monthly level reported for July 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for July 2011, the difference in July’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from June 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 3.56%.  Annual CPI-U inflation should move to top 4% in the next couple of months.  The CPI-W broke that barrier in May, hitting 4.1% (4.12%), and it held at 4.1% (4.06%) in today’s reporting.

I apologize to readers for using the wrong number for the June 2010 monthly change indicated in last month’s version of the previous paragraph.  The month-to-month change in last June’s CPI-U was a decline of 0.21% (not a 0.17% gain), which is why—with a 0.22% monthly decline reported today for June 2011—the annual inflation rate virtually was unchanged.

CPI-W.  The narrower, seasonally-adjusted CPI-W, which has greater weighting for gasoline than does the CPI-U, fell in June 2011 by 0.34% (down by 0.19% unadjusted), following May’s adjusted monthly increase of 0.14% (up 0.55% unadjusted). 

The pace of annualized, seasonally-adjusted CPI-W inflation slowed in second-quarter 2011 to 4.55%, from 6.04% in first-quarter 2011.

Unadjusted, June 2011’s year-to-year CPI-W inflation was 4.06%, against a 4.12% annual increase in May.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U—the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists, including the recent presidential deficit commission, as the replacement for the CPI—is reported only on an unadjusted basis.  Year-to-year inflation increased to 3.37% in June 2011, versus 3.28% in May.

The C-CPI-U is the measure being contemplated in the current deficit-reduction negotiations in Washington to replace the CPI-W in cost of living adjustments (COLA).  Specifically, reducing Social Security COLA is being touted as a major cost reduction.  The issues here were discussed in Commentary No. 376.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 6.9% in June 2011, at the same level as in May, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, eased slightly, due primarily to rounding, to about 11.1% (11.13% for those using the extra digit) in June, from about 11.2% in May. 

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation.  Despite the yesterday’s (July 14th) historic-high gold price of $1,590.50 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix) and the multi-decade high silver price of $48.70 per troy ounce (London fix of April 28th), gold and silver prices have yet to approach their 1980 historic levels, adjusted for inflation.  The earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 would be $2,466 per troy ounce, based on June 2011 CPI-U-adjusted dollars, $8,545 per troy ounce based on SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (all series not seasonally adjusted). 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org), although approached recently, still has not been hit since 1980, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars.  Based on June 2011 CPI-U inflation, the 1980 silver price peak would be $144 per troy ounce and would be $497 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (again, all series not seasonally adjusted).

As shown on page 43 of the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), over the decades, the price of gold has compensated for more than the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the dollar based on the SGS-Alternate Consumer Price Measure (1980 Methodologies Base).

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Retail Sales.  Real retail sales stalled in second-quarter 2011.  Based on the June 2011 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly June 2011 retail sales rose by 0.36%, where, before inflation adjustment, the current number was up by 0.24%.  Real May sales revised to a decline of 0.28% (previously a drop of 0.40%).  The shrinkage in the May decline was due primarily to a downside revision to April’s data.

June’s real retail sales rose at a year-to-year pace of 4.48%, versus a revised 4.20% (previously 4.13%) annual gain reported for May. 

Second-quarter 2011 real retail sales virtually were unchanged (up less than 0.1% [0.08%]) from first-quarter sales.  Annualized quarterly real growth dropped from 5.02% in the first-quarter to 0.32% in the second quarter.  That was the weakest quarterly performance since an outright contraction in second-quarter 2009, the official “end” of the 2007 recession (see Opening Comments and Executive Summary).

The ongoing “recovery” in real retail sales is reflected in the following graphs, which show the latest monthly levels of inflation- and seasonally-adjusted activity.  The first of these shows close historical detail for the period beginning in 2000; the second shows the same data in historical context since World War II.

Using the SGS Alternate-CPI Inflation estimates for deflation of the retail series would not have shown an ongoing rise in activity for the last year or so.  It is my preference here, and wherever otherwise possible, to use the official estimates (the series here is as calculated by the St. Louis Fed), since that eliminates a level of argument over what is being reported.  As official consumer inflation picks up, and as overall retail sales suffer from the ongoing consumer liquidity squeeze, these data have started to turn down in what will become eventually an official and formal double-dip recession. 

There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity—no recovery—just general bottom-bouncing.  Accordingly, real retail sales levels in the months ahead should become increasingly negative.

 

 

Real Money Supply M3.  The signal of the still unfolding double-dip recession, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), most recently discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), continues and is graphed below.  Based on the June CPI-U report and the latest June SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate, the annual contraction in real M3 for June 2011 was 1.3%, versus a 1.4% annual contraction in May.

 

 

The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn or its duration.  The current downturn signal was generated in December 2009.  The broad economy tends to follow in downturn or renewed deterioration roughly six-to-nine months after the signal, as has appeared to have started in recent months.  Increasing weakness in a number of series should become evident in the months ahead, with the July 29th benchmark revisions to GDP likely to show much weaker economic activity for the last year or two than currently is reported.  Such eventually will lead to recognition of a double-dip recession.

 

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTION (JUNE 2011)

Industrial Production Stalled in Second Quarter 2011.  June’s production was spiked by relative downside revisions to prior reporting, with activity in second-quarter 2011 flattening out.  This morning’s (July 15th) Federal Reserve Board release of seasonally-adjusted June 2011 industrial production showed a monthly gain of 0.19% (a gain of 0.10% net of prior-period revisions) versus May.  In turn, monthly change in May production was revised to a 0.08% contraction (previously a 0.10% gain).

Year-to-year growth in June 2011 production was 3.41%, versus the revised 3.32% (previously 3.42%) in May, and down from the recent relative peak year-to-year change of 7.75% in June 2010.  The year-to-year contraction of 14.83% seen in June 2009, at the end of second-quarter 2009, was the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II.

Second-quarter 2011 industrial production basically was flat (up just 0.20%) against first-quarter production.  Annualized quarterly growth dropped from 4.82% in the first-quarter to 0.80% in the second quarter.  That was the weakest quarterly performance since an outright contraction in second-quarter 2009, the official “end” of the 2007 recession (see Opening Comments and Executive Summary).

 

 

The “recovery” in industrial production is reflected in the preceding graphs.  Both graphs show the monthly level of the production index.  The first of these shows close historical detail for the period beginning in 2000, the second shows the same data in historical context since World War II.

For the last 34 months, the production index has averaged 88.9, around which the series has fluctuated. Although it had been moving higher, it has started to flatten out in recent months.  The June reading was at 93.1, just 0.5% above where it was in December 2010.

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Residential Construction (June 2011).  Due for release on Tuesday, July 19th, June’s housing starts likely continued a general declining trend, still pushing towards or setting new historic lows.  As has been the case for many months, any reported upside monthly movement likely will remain statistically indistinguishable from a monthly contraction.

 

__________

No. 378: June Retail Sales, PPI, May Trade Deficit

Thursday, July 14th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 378
June Retail Sales, PPI, May Trade Deficit

July 14, 2011

__________

At Best, Inflation-Adjusted Retail Sales Showed No Growth in Second-Quarter 2011

Trade Data Should Offer a Positive Contribution to Second-Quarter GDP Growth

Wholesale Inflation Spreading to Broad Economy,
Despite Short-Lived Dip in Oil and Gasoline Prices

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for tomorrow, Friday, July 15th.  It will cover June CPI and industrial production.

—Best to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.   The general outlook for an intensifying downturn in U.S. economic activity, along with an escalating pace of consumer inflation, remains in place despite June reporting of a minimal monthly gain in retail sales and a monthly inflation decline for finished goods in the producer price index.  A full economic and inflation update will follow in tomorrow’s (July 15th) Commentary, following the releases of the June consumer price index and industrial production.

June Retail Sales.  The reported 0.1% seasonally-adjusted monthly gain in June 2011 retail sales was statistically indistinguishable from a monthly contraction.  It also is at fair risk of being offset by June CPI-U inflation in tomorrow’s reporting.  Where consensus expectations appear to be for a 0.1% monthly contraction in the seasonally-adjusted CPI-U, reporting risk is to the upside of that consensus.  Even with a consensus CPI, real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales would be flat, quarter-to-quarter, for second-quarter 2011.  That is not a positive indicator for the upcoming “advance” estimate of second-quarter GDP on July 29th.  At best, real consumer spending has stalled, along with officially-estimated real disposable income.

May Trade Deficit.  With negative implications for the exchange-rate value of the U.S. dollar, the monthly trade deficit widened to $50.2 billion in May 2011, up from $43.6 billion in April 2011, and up from $42.2 billion in May 2010.  The May 2011 reading was the largest monthly trade shortfall reported since October 2008.  Where April 2011 imports had been depressed by an earthquake-induced reduction in U.S. imports of auto parts from Japan, the May number showed little catch-up in that area.

The deterioration in May’s trade shortfall reflected both a decline in exports as well as a surge in imports.  The import gain included some strength from higher oil prices as well as from increased physical volume of imported oil.  With the April and May reporting, the seasonally- and inflation-adjusted numbers now are in place for the guesstimated net-export account contribution to the “advance” estimate of second-quarter GDP growth (July 29th).  The trade data suggest a positive contribution to that GDP estimate.

June PPI.  The seasonally-adjusted producer price index fell by 0.4% month-to-month in June 2011, due largely to the short-lived dip in oil and gasoline prices.  Nonetheless, the so-called “core” monthly measure picked up to 0.3% from 0.2% in May, as the impact of higher energy costs spread into the broad economy.  Year-to-year finished-goods inflation softened to 7.0% in June, from 7.3% in May, but annual inflation rates jumped to 11.0% for intermediate goods and to 26.2% for crude goods.    

 

Hyperinflation Watch—U.S. Default and/or Downgrade Still Unlikely.  A deficit-reduction gridlock in Washington and increasing threats of a U.S. default and/or downgrades to U.S. debt only encourage flight from the U.S. dollar and rapidly diminish already already-impaired global confidence in the world’s reserve currency.  Although an actual U.S. default or rating downgrade remains unlikely, the damage from the ongoing fiscal catastrophe, and from hints of a possible QE3 (yes, the economy will be that weak) by Fed Chairman Bernanke, to U.S. dollar confidence should endure.  In the event of an actual default or downgrade, the United States’ position as the elephant in the bathtub of sovereign risk likely would cause the U.S. dollar to plummet against all major currencies, irrespective of any ongoing concerns related to euro-area debt.

The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue to unfold.  A more complete review will follow in tomorrow’s Commentary.

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

RETAIL SALES (JUNE 2011)

Quarterly Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Retail Sales Likely Were No Better than Flat in Second-Quarter.  As with the nonfarm payroll numbers, the retail sales numbers undergo concurrent seasonal-factor adjustment, where current and historical seasonal factors are revised every month.  The stability of the seasonal-adjustment process, however, has been disrupted by the unprecedented depth and length of the current economic downturn in the post-World War II era (the period of modern economic reporting), as discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011).  These issues have distorted monthly reporting for a number of key series, leaving the markets effectively flying blind on actual underlying economic activity.  That said, the latest seasonal recalculations appear to have boosted June retail sales from what would have been a statistically meaningless and small decline, to a statistically meaningless and small gain.  While the monthly gain was statistically indistinguishable from a contraction, it was enough to have had some impact on the financial markets.

Depending on June CPI-U reporting, due tomorrow (July 15th), real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales in second-quarter 2011 likely fared no better than an unchanged level versus the first-quarter.  An upside CPI surprise could generate a contraction in quarterly real retail sales.  What looms here is not a plus for pending second-quarter GDP reporting (July 29th).

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Retail SalesToday’s (July14th) report on June 2011 retail sales—issued by the Census Bureau—indicated a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly increase of 0.14% (up by 0.17% before prior-period revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised May decline of 0.12% (previously down by 0.24%).  Most of the narrowing in the reported monthly decline in May was due to a 0.09% downward revision to April’s sales level.

On a year-to-year basis, June 2011 retail sales were reported up by 8.06%, versus a revised year-to-year May 2011 gain of 7.79% (previously 7.73%).    

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Retail Sales.  Details on real retail sales for June will be published in tomorrow’s (July 15th) Commentary, along with detail on the June 2011 CPI-U reporting.  Even with a consensus seasonally-adjusted 0.1% monthly contraction in the June CPI-U, quarterly real retail sales would be unchanged for second-quarter 2011.  Odds favor an upside CPI surprise for June, and a possible real retail sales quarterly contraction.

Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, “core” retail sales—consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when “core” inflation is lower than full inflation—are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: June 2011 versus May 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues—was up by 0.3% versus an official aggregate gain of 0.1%.

Version II: June 2011 versus May 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gas stations— was up by 0.3% versus an official aggregate gain of 0.1%.

 

PRODUCER PRICE INDEX (JUNE 2011)

Despite Short-Lived Dip in Oil and Gasoline Prices, Inflation Is Spreading into the Broad Economy.   As reported this morning, July 14th, by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) for June 2011 fell by 0.4% (down by 0.7% before seasonal adjustment) month-to-month, following a monthly increase of 0.2% (up by 0.6% before seasonal adjustment) in May.  The adjusted, monthly June PPI finished goods number, once again reflected above-consensus “core” inflation, up 0.3%, versus a 0.2% gain April, with inflationary pressures from higher energy costs spreading into the broad economy.  

Annualized, seasonally-adjusted PPI inflation for the three months ended June 2011 slowed to 2.4% from 7.0% reported in May.  Unadjusted and year-to-year, June 2011’s PPI inflation was 7.0%, versus 7.3% in May.  Year-to-year inflation in intermediate and crude gods, though, rose (see below).  The recent run-up in prices generally has reflected ongoing impact of the Fed’s dollar-debasement policies, not surging economic demand.  With both oil and gasoline prices appearing to have bottomed in the last month, and with seasonal factors pushing reported energy prices higher in the next several months, the PPI should resume its pattern of seasonally-adjusted monthly increases with the July’s reporting.

Separately, on a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted June 2011 intermediate goods were unchanged, versus a 0.9% gain in May, with June’s crude goods prices down by 0.6%, after falling 4.1% in May. Year-to-year inflation in June intermediate goods was 11.0%, up from 10.3% in May, with June’s annual inflation in crude goods at 26.2%, up from May’s 22.8% gain.

 

TRADE DEFICIT (MAY 2011)

Combined April and May Trade Numbers Suggest a Positive Contribution to “Advance” Second-Quarter GDP.  Although the May trade deficit was the worst monthly showing since October 2008, the narrowed deficit in April (due largely to reduced imports of Japanese auto parts) and adjustment for inflation—including rising oil prices—left the partial second-quarter numbers as likely positive contributors to the initial estimate of second-quarter 2011 GDP growth (due for release on July 29th).

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Trade Deficit.  The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported Tuesday (July 12th) that the nominal, seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services for May 2011 widened to $50.2 billion from a revised $43.6 (previously $43.7) billion in April.  The May 2011 deficit also widened from $42.2 billion a year ago.

Against April, the May trade balance showed a decline in exports as well as an increase in imports.  Oil helped to boost the imports, where the effect of still-rising oil prices was enhanced by increasing physical import volume.  Specifically, for the month of May 2011, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $108.70 per barrel, up from $103.18 in April 2011, and up from $76.95 in May 2010.  In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, May 2011 volume averaged 8.879 million barrels per day, up from 8.408 million in April 2011, but down from 9.082 million in May 2010.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit.  Adjusted for seasonal factors and net of rising oil prices and other inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the reported May 2001 merchandise trade deficit came in at $47.8 billion, up from a revised $43.9 (previously $44.2) billion in April.

Based on the average of the two months’ reporting, the real second-quarter 2011 merchandise deficit annualizes out to $550.2 billion, versus $604.9 billion in the first-quarter, and against $557.0 in fourth-quarter 2010.  The net export account guesstimate for the “advance” estimate of second-quarter GDP will be based on the two months of reporting, and the latest data suggest a positive contribution to the initial GDP growth estimate.

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Consumer Price Index—CPI (June 2011).  Due for release tomorrow, Friday, July 15th, June’s CPI headline number is at risk surprising a negative consensus expectation (a 0.1% contraction per Briefing.com) on the upside.  Although the monthly average gasoline price in June was down by 5.7% (per the Department of Energy), seasonal factors in June move to neutral there, having depressed adjusted gasoline prices in May.  The seasonals will begin to boost adjusted gasoline prices in July.  Higher food prices and otherwise spreading inflationary pressures in the broad economy should keep the CPI-U in positive territory, again, stronger than expectations.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in June 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.17% gain in the adjusted monthly level reported for June 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for June 2011, the difference in June’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from May 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 3.57%.  For example an adjusted 0.2% monthly gain in the June CPI-U would keep annual CPI-U inflation at about 3.6%, a consensus 0.1% contraction would lower the annual inflation pace to about 3.3%.  In any event, that inflation pace should move to top 4% in the next couple of months.  The CPI-W broke that barrier, hitting 4.12%, in last month’s reporting.

Industrial Production (June 2011).  Due for release tomorrow, Friday, July 15th, June’s industrial production could show an outright monthly contraction, as the “stall” in recent activity rolls into renewed downturn.  In any event, a downside reporting surprise again is a fair bet against moderately positive consensus expectations.

Residential Construction (June 2011).  Due for release on Tuesday, July 19th, June’s housing starts likely continued a general declining trend, pushing towards or setting new historic lows.  As has been the case for many months, any reported upside monthly movement likely will remain statistically indistinguishable from a monthly contraction.

__________

No. 377: June Employment, Unemployment and M3

Friday, July 8th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 377
June Employment, Unemployment and M3

July 8, 2011

__________

Payroll Survey Employment Down by 26,000, Before Revisions

Household Survey Employment Plunged by 445,000

June Unemployment Rates: 9.2% (U.3), 16.2% (U.6), 22.7% (SGS)

Broad Money Supply Flattened in June

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Thursday, July 14th, covering June retail sales and PPI and the May trade deficit.  A subsequent Commentary on Friday July 15th will cover June CPI and industrial production.

—Best to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  Economic reporting continues to show a renewed faltering in business activity, but there is nothing new about ongoing economic troubles.  The weak data—now rattling the markets and consensus expectations—reflect some catch-up from the extremely poor quality of economic reporting in recent months.  The poor-quality numbers largely were due to heavily distorted seasonal-factor adjustments.  The current intensification of the economic downturn is real, but the happier news of late-2010 simply was not as strong as earlier indicated.  The reporting distortions continue.

June Employment and Unemployment.  Today’s (July 8th) employment and unemployment reporting disappointed market expectations.  On the jobs front, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) payroll survey indicated June 2011 employment increased by 18,000 from May.  That would have been a 26,000 monthly jobs loss, except for the 44,000 downside revision to the seasonally-adjusted May payroll level, which also was posted today.  Against the historical employment picture known to the markets yesterday, today’s report of June payroll employment was up by just 28,000 from April.  None of those changes, though, were statistically meaningful.

Payroll levels have flattened out and have shown no significant recovery, and employment remains below levels of 10 years ago, despite 10% growth in the U.S. population during the same timespan.  Year-to-year change rose by 0.9% in June, versus a 0.7% gain in May (those growth rates were distorted by last year’s temporary census hiring). 

The household survey, which generates the unemployment rate, showed a month-to-month seasonally-adjusted employment plunge of 445,000 for June 2011.  The household survey measures the number of people who are employed; the payroll survey measures the number of nonfarm jobs (reflecting a count of individuals that is duplicated for those who hold multiple jobs).

The June 2011 headline U.3 unemployment rate (9.2%, up from 9.1% in May) and the broader U.6 unemployment rate (16.2%, up from 15.8%) both hit six-month highs, while the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure rose to about 22.7% in June (up from 22.3% in May), the highest level seen in the current, protracted economic downturn.

SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate for June Likely Will Show Flattening Growth.  The preliminary estimate for the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate for June 2011 will be published tomorrow (July 9th) in the Alternate Data section.  At present, the series is on track for year-to-year growth of about 2.0%, the same level as seen in May.  Seasonally-adjusted month-to-month change appears to be close to nil, with declines in large time deposits and institutional money funds largely offsetting an increase in M2.  The estimated month-to-month changes, however, are less reliable than the estimates of annual growth.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Weakening Business Activity Suggests New Stimulus And QE3.  The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue to unfold.  Federal budget deficit projections and prospects for banking-system solvency are based on assumptions of ongoing, positive economic growth.  Continued and intensifying economic weakness likely will push the federal government to new pre-2012 election stimulus, irrespective of near-term deficit reduction discussions.  Similarly, the Fed likely will find the markets and the banking system pressuring it into some form of QE3, despite current protestations to the contrary.  The broad inflation and economic outlooks continue unabated.   

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

EMPLOYMENT AND UNEMPLOYMENT (JUNE 2011)

Constant Recalculation of Payroll Seasonal Factors Continues to Exacerbate Reporting Distortions.  As discussed in prior writings (see the Hyperinflation Report, for example), seasonal-factor estimation for most economic series has been severely distorted by the extreme depth and duration of the economic contraction.  These distortions are exacerbated for payroll employment data based on the BLS’s monthly seasonal-factor re-estimations and lack of full reporting.

 

 

While the BLS recalculates the monthly seasonal factors each month for payroll employment, going back a number of years, it only publishes revised data for the last two months of reporting (April and May 2011 with the June 2011 report).  Shown in the preceding graph, the latest “concurrent” seasonal factor changes reduced the level of payrolls again in April 2010, upped June and July of 2010 (with implied stronger seasonals for the June 2011 reporting, along with downside changes to first-quarter 2011 data).  With just two months of prior reporting shown as revised, the changes pre-April 2011 were not published by the BLS, so as to avoid “confusing” people who use the data.  

Meaningful seasonal-adjustments tend to be stable over time, without wild fluctuations every time the seasonals are re-estimated.  This is true particularly for series like payroll employment and retail sales, where the seasonal factors are concurrent—recalculated each month for the current month’s raw data.  If the payroll seasonals were stable, the lines in the preceding graph would be flat and coincident.  Instead, the variations intensify with each successive month.  The monthly recalculations of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels show irregular revisions, with monthly swings now of plus or minus 90,000 jobs shifting over time.  To the extent the numbers affect current reporting, the differences are enough potentially to alter financial-market perceptions and reactions. 

The big issue remains that the month-to-month seasonally-adjusted payroll data have become increasingly worthless, with reporting errors likely now well beyond the official 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000 jobs in the reported monthly payroll change.  Yet the media and the markets tout the data as meaningful, usually without question or qualification.

The inconsistency differences in the graph were calculated based on the raw data and the seasonal-adjustment program available to the public on the BLS Web site.  Using the BLS data, we have calculated the seasonally-adjusted numbers as the BLS should be showing them, as of the current reporting, and the differences between official reporting and the consistent seasonally-adjusted series.

Payroll Survey Detail.  The BLS reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted June 2011 month-to-month jobs gain of 18,000 (a jobs loss of 26,000 jobs before prior-period revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval).  May payrolls showed a revised 25,000 (previously 54,000) gain. 

As discussed earlier, some of the continued softening in growth was due to minor catch up in the ongoing statistical distortions from the monthly recasting of seasonal-adjustment factors, which shift seasonally-adjusted jobs around with earlier months, but where the BLS does not publish the earlier revisions.  Once again, it is not so much that jobs growth suddenly is slowing—although the economy indeed continues to falter into a renewed downturn—it is that previously reported jobs growth never was as strong as advertised.

In terms of year-to-year change, the unadjusted June 2011 growth rate was at 0.89%, versus the revised 0.69% (previously 0.73%) annual growth reported in May.  Although the graphs of long-term year-to-year unadjusted payroll change had shown a recent rising trend in annual growth, which primarily reflected the still-protracted bottom-bouncing in the payroll series, that pattern had flattened out in the last several months and now has begun to soften, as shown in the first graph following of the near-term detail in year-to-year change.  These numbers reflect short-lived muting as a result the year-ago hiring surge of temporary census workers.

 

 

As shown in the preceding longer-term graph (historical detail back to World War II), with the bottom-bouncing of recent years, current annual growth has recovered from the post-World War II record 5.06% decline in August 2009, which was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II (a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945).  Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the August 2009 annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression, yet the current level of employment is far from any recovery.

 

 

In the above plot of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels (as reported by the BLS) the current level of nonfarm payrolls shows a recent flattening and certainly no recovery to pre-recession highs.  The data continue to bottom-bounce along a plateau of low-level activity, with the latest payroll level still well below where it was a decade ago, even though the U.S. population has increased by more than 10% in the same period. 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  Despite the ongoing and regular overstatement of monthly payroll employment—as evidenced by the regular and massive, annual downward benchmark revisions to the reported payroll numbers—the BLS generally has upped its monthly biases in post-benchmark reporting.  For June 2011, however, the positive monthly bias used was 131,000, the same revised bias as used in June 2010.  June was the first month this year where the bias was not increased from the year before.  In May 2011, the upside bias was 206,000.  These upside biases reflect an ongoing assumption of a net positive jobs creation by new companies versus those going out business.  Such becomes a self-fulfilling system, as the upside biases boost reporting for financial-market and political needs, with relatively good headline data, while also setting up the next year’s downside benchmark revisions, which traditionally are ignored by the media and the politicians.

Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business, on a timely basis (within at least five years, if ever), such information is estimated by the addition of a bias-factor generated by the Birth-Death Model (a model of the effects of new business creation and old business bankruptcies).  The fundamental defects of the Birth-Death Model are discussed as usual in the ensuing paragraphs.

Positive assumptions—commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling—can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with “stronger” economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates, or underlying assumptions of ongoing economic recovery.  Indeed, historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels—to understate employment declines—during recessions.   There is a faulty underlying premise here that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business.  So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, presumed additional “surplus” jobs, created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor.  These add-factors have averaged 40,000 jobs per month over the last 12 months.  I still estimate this monthly bias should be negative by roughly 200,000 or so, on average.  Since it is not, the BLS overestimates monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 240,000 jobs.  Much of that misreporting was not picked up in the 2010 benchmarking, and now will not be corrected until at least the 2011 benchmark revision (based on the upcoming March 2011 benchmarking) to be published in February 2012.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (counting multiple job holders more than once), showed a June 2011 employment plunge of 445,000 versus May, which in turn was up by 105,000 from April.  Issues with seasonal factors still cloud the significance of the reported monthly levels in the adjusted headline U.3 unemployment rate and other adjusted household-survey numbers.  Again, adjusted data have been moved by highly unstable seasonal factors that are artifacts of the severe and extraordinarily protracted downturn in U.S. economic activity, not by the regular and stable seasonal patterns that were in place before the current economic crisis.  Accordingly, what is seen here is some catch-up in data that never were as “strong” as indicated by the BLS; significant further catch-up should be seen in the months ahead.

The headline U.3 unemployment rate and the BLS’s broadest U.6 measure both moved to their highest readings since December 2010, in the June 2011 reporting.  The SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure moved to its highest reading of the current downturn.

The June 2011 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate rose by a statistically-insignificant 0.13 percentage point to 9.18% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from 9.05% in May.  Not-seasonally-adjusted, June’s U.3 unemployment rate was 9.3%, versus 8.7% in May.

The June U.6 unemployment rate jumped to a seasonally-adjusted 16.2%, from 15.8% in May.  The unadjusted U.6 rate rose to 16.4% in June, from 15.4% in May.  The broadest unemployment rate published by the BLS, U.6 includes accounting for those marginally attached to the labor force (including short-term discouraged workers) and those who are employed part-time for economic reasons (they cannot find a full-time job).

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, “discouraged workers”—those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had—were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been “discouraged” for less than a year.  This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers.  The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the SGS estimate of excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed and labor force, unemployment—more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure—rose to about 22.7% in June, up from 22.3% in May.  The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting, and tends to follow its relative monthly movements. Accordingly, it will suffer some of the current seasonal-adjustment woes afflicting the base series.  See the Alternate Data tab for more detail.

 

 

 

 

As discussed in previous writings, an unemployment rate nearing 23% might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%.  The SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession.  The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms.  Today, less that 2% work on farms.  Accordingly, for purposes of Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Trade Balance (May 2011).  The May trade deficit is due for release on Tuesday, July 12th.  Monthly deterioration is likely both before and after adjustment for inflation.  The April and May shortfalls, in theory, will provide the reporting basis for official guessing of the second-quarter net export account in the July 29th “advance” estimate of second-quarter 2011 GDP.

Retail Sales (June 2011).  Due for release on Thursday, July 14th, June retail sales continue to face a downside reporting risk versus what likely will be soft expectations.  Whatever gain may be reported likely will be offset by June CPI-U inflation.

Producer Price Index—PPI (June 2011).  Due for release on Thursday, July 14th, the headline number from the regularly volatile PPI series should be muted by the temporary reduction in oil prices, which still will see minor exacerbation from oil-price-dampening seasonal-factor adjustments.  Nonetheless, there is some risk for an upside surprise versus likely tepid consensus expectations, as inflationary pressures increasingly move outside the direct energy sector.

Consumer Price Index—CPI (June 2011).  Due for release on Friday, July 15th, June’s CPI headline number also is at risk of surprising likely muted consensus expectations on the upside.  Although the monthly average gasoline price in June was down by 5.7% (per the Department of Energy), seasonal factors in June move to neutral, having depressed adjusted gasoline prices in May.  The seasonals begin to boost gasoline prices in July.  Higher food prices and otherwise spreading inflationary pressures in the broad economy should keep the CPI-U in positive territory and likely above expectations.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in June 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.17% gain in the adjusted monthly level reported for June 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for June 2011, the difference in June’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from May 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 3.57%.  For example an adjusted 0.2% monthly gain in the June CPI-U would keep annual CPI-U inflation at about 3.6%.  That inflation pace should move to top 4% in the next couple of months.  The CPI-W broke that barrier, hitting 4.12% last month’s reporting.

Industrial Production (June 2011).  Due for release on Friday, July 15th, June’s industrial production could show an outright monthly contraction, as the “stall” in recent activity rolls into renewed downturn.  In any event, a downside reporting surprise again is a fair bet for what likely will be moderately positive consensus expectations.

 

__________

No. 376: General Update

Thursday, June 30th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 376
General Update

June 30, 2011

__________

Real Disposable Income on Track for Second-Quarter Contraction

An Unlikely U.S. Default Would Hit Dollar and Accelerate Inflation

New Action to Depress Officially Reported Inflation?

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: Today’s Commentary reviews general conditions in a week devoid of major economic releases.  Accordingly there is no Reporting Detail section, although the general implications of items such as reported disposable income and consumer confidence—often of poor quality or limited significance—are included in the general assessment of consumer conditions.

The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, July 8th.  It will cover details of the June employment and unemployment report.

—Best wishes for a Happy Fourth of July!  —John Williams

 

Opening Comments.  The economy continues to falter, while—at the same time—inflation continues to increase.  Consumer liquidity problems are worsening, while the inflation problem persists.  Despite near-term volatility in oil prices, the effects of higher oil costs increasingly permeate the broad economy, and the U.S. dollar continues under selling pressure.  Accordingly, any relative weakness in oil or other U.S. dollar-based commodity prices likely should be short-lived. 

At the same time, talk mounts of allowing an unnecessary default on U.S. debt (see the Hyperinflation Watch section).  Such a default would be a serious mistake, and it most likely will be avoided as political games push the limits of brinksmanship.  An outright default likely would trigger massive dumping of the U.S. dollar, and it would accelerate movement to much higher U.S. inflation and, ultimately, to hyperinflation.  The deficit cuts being discussed are too small to save the system, and they may include a new redefinition of the consumer price index (CPI) solely for purposes of creating artificial reductions in official inflation reporting and in related cost-of-living adjustments for Social Security, etc.

Structural Consumer Income and Liquidity Issues Prevent Sustainable Economic Rebound.  U.S. consumers are unable to support sustained economic expansion at present and for the foreseeable future.  Personal consumption and residential investment accounted for 71.3% of the gross domestic product (GDP, the government’s not-too-meaningful broad measure of economic activity) as estimated for first-quarter 2011.  Aside from the 20.6% of GDP attributed to federal- and local-government consumption, the bulk of the remainder of GDP activity ultimately is based on underlying personal consumption.

U.S. households have faced an increasingly difficult structural impediment to income during the last 40 years, with income growth failing to keep pace with inflation.  The problems have accelerated in the last decade, where real (inflation-adjusted) median household income (adjusted by the heavily gimmicked CPI-U-RS series) as reported in the latest Poverty Report, was lower in 2009 than it was before the 2001 recession.  Adjusted for the more commonly used CPI-U headline inflation, 2009 median household income also was below what it was in 1973.  The loss of higher paying production jobs to offshore competition has been a primary cause here of declining income.  This topic is discussed more fully in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011).

Even with Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) regular overstatement of income, and understatement of inflation, reported real disposable income (effectively take-home pay) is shrinking per official reporting.  The BEA’s Personal Income and Outlays: May 2011 (released June 27th) showed real disposable income in May 2011 to be virtually unchanged versus December 2010 (a five-month increase of less than 0.1%), with the two-month average, so far, for second-quarter 2011 below the average of the first-quarter 2011. Usually, when official real disposable income turns negative, the GDP is not far behind.

Indeed, without sustained positive real growth in income, sustained positive real growth in the broad economy is not possible.  Short-term growth, however, can be borrowed from the future with debt expansion.  Former Federal Reserve Chairman Alan Greenspan encouraged excessive debt expansion for more than a decade, at least partially for that reason.  In the wake of the current credit collapse and systemic solvency crisis, though, most consumers no longer have that option.

Consumer credit outstanding recently has shown some seasonally-adjusted monthly growth, but all the gain has been in government lending to students, not from banks lending to purchasing consumers.  Even if debt expansion were available for general consumption, the consumer would have to be willing to borrow and to spend.  That willingness is lacking, to a certain extent, based on the latest consumer confidence and sentiment numbers plotted in the following graphs (the June number on consumer sentiment is the preliminary estimate).   

While these confidence numbers tradtionally are viewed as leading indicators, they tend to be more coincident or even lagging to economic activity.  Based on the nature of the surveys conducted, the results tend to reflect what consumers are hearing in the popular media.  Nonetheless, both series continue at levels never seen outside of recessions.

No sustainable economic recovery is possible until the structural problems limiting consumer liquidity are resolved.  There is nothing on the horizon—no activity by the federal government or by the Federal Reserve—that offers any near-term prospect even for addressing the structural issues.  With the economy falling into another dip in a double- or multiple-dip recession, the federal deficit will spike much more than expected (all deficit projections, including those for the next 10 years, are based on positive economic growth).  With the politicians already posturing for the 2012 election, efforts for new near-term stimulus likely will arise, irrespective of current political sensitivities related to deficit spending.  A failing economy also intensifies the systemic solvency crisis, and the Fed most likely will be there with some form of overt or covert QE3.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Pending Default on U.S. Treasuries?  The U.S. government always has avoided and can avoid defaulting on its debt due to the debt ceiling.  The Congress and the President simply act to raise the debt ceiling, although political games often are played right down to the wire.  Whatever comes of the deficit-reduction talks linked to the current circumstance, it likely will not be too meaningful.  With GAAP (generally accepted accounting principles) accounting showing an actual annual shortfall in government operations of $4 to $5 trillion per year, a cut of $4 trillion over a period of 10 years or so is a plus, but not particularly significant.  To the extent there is any precedent with the current Congress, the last attempt at budget negotiations was little more than hype and accounting gimmicks in the end.  Accounting gimmicks can do wonders with such agreements, including the use of overly-optimistic economic assumptions.

A formal default on U.S. debt is unlikely.  It would reflect malfeasance at the highest levels of the government.  If there were a default, it most likely would be a disaster for the financial markets, with the potential for crashing the U.S. dollar, spiking interest rates and rapidly accelerating the pace of inflation.

One thing to watch for in any deficit-reduction deal is a rumored switch from using the CPI-W in calculating cost-of-living adjustments for Social Security, etc., to using the Chained-CPI-U (C-CPI).  The C-CPI is a fully substitution-based inflation measure, and would complete the process, accelerated in the 1990s by the Boskin Commission, to change the CPI from a measure of the cost-of-living of maintaining a constant-standard-of-living to a substitution-based measure.  In the new measure, if steak prices rise sharply, and people shift to buying hamburger as a result, inflation is reduced accordingly by that switch (see the Response to BLS …). 

The BLS may have some logistical problems with such a change.  For example the BLS revises the C-CPI regularly, which it never does with the unadjusted CPI because of use of the CPI in contracts, etc.  Where this type of change would have some distorting impact on the public’s view of the actual inflation rate for purposes of income maintenance or targeted investment returns, it would be better generally for the system if the politicians just admitted that they were cutting Social Security payments and put forth meaningful inflation numbers. 

The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue unabated.

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Employment and Unemployment (June 2011).  The report on June labor conditions is due for release on Friday, July 8th.  Consensus forecasts may be less positive than seen in recent months, based on last month’s “surprise” weakness and ongoing indications of a softening economy.  Nonetheless, reporting risks still favor negative surprises versus likely market expectations.  At work here is not only a renewed downturn in economic activity, but also some likely catch-up from recent poor-quality reporting that resulting from heavily distorted seasonal-factor adjustments.  A resumption of outright monthly contraction in nonfarm payrolls and an upside spike in the headline U.3 unemployment rate remain fair bets to surface within the next month or two.  Indeed, those results are possible in the upcoming June report.   

 

__________

No. 375: GDP Revision, May Durables Goods Orders and Home Sales

Friday, June 24th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 375
GDP Revision, May Durables Goods Orders and Home Sales

June 24, 2011

__________

Bernanke Befuddled by Weak Economy?

Major Downside Revisions to GDP Revisions Loom
As Economy Slowly Slides into a Double-Dip

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, July 1st, with a general review of economic and liquidity conditions in an otherwise quiet week for major economic releases.  June labor data are scheduled for release on July 8th.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  “ ‘We don’t have a precise read on why this slower pace of growth is persisting,’ the Fed Chairman Ben S. Bernanke, said Wednesday [June 22nd] at a news conference.  ‘Some of the headwinds that have been concerning us, like the weakness in the financial sector, problems in the housing sector, balance sheet and deleveraging issues, may be stronger and more persistent than we thought.’ ”  [“Fed to Defer New Efforts for Growth,” New York Times, June 23, 2011.] 

It is hard to believe that Mr. Bernanke, the presidents of the regional Federal Reserve Banks and the extensive staff of fine economists throughout the Federal Reserve System do not understand why the economic and systemic-liquidity crises persist.  If indeed the problems really are not understood, Mr. Bernanke should not be Fed Chairman.  More likely, the problems are understood, but Bernanke’s admitting that would entail his admitting that circumstances are beyond control, and that the Fed lacks the ability to address the issues effectively.

Such an admission likely would be destabilizing to the financial markets, although it is hard to see how the markets could take Mr. Bernanke’s comments in a positive light.  In either circumstance, Mr. Bernanke’s remarks make a strong case for the Federal Reserve Chairman not to hold press conferences. There is the possibility, though, that the comments were deliberate, intended as a warning of things to come, as discussed in the Hyperinflation Watch.

My explanation as to why the various crises continue is detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011).

This Week’s Data Held No Surprises.   The second revision to first-quarter GDP was little more than statistical noise, with the revised 1.9% (previously 1.8%) annualized, inflation-adjusted first-quarter growth rate still largely accounted for (1.4%) by an involuntary build-up in inventories.

Benchmark revisions in GDP back to 2003 will be published on July 29th.  The economic downturn, in revision, should be much more severe than currently is reported.

New orders for durable goods rose by 1.9% in May, failing to offset April’s revised 2.7% decline.  Reporting volatility was well within the normal range.  May new- and existing-home sales both were lower, showing ongoing bottom-bouncing consistent with the downtrend in the bottom-bouncing in housing starts.  There is no recovery in play here.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Fed and Administration Preparing for More Trouble?  Given Bernanke’s unusual comments that the financial and economic systems have not improved as expected, he could have been giving a warning of intensified financial/economic problems ahead.  Nonetheless, the just-published downside revisions to the Fed’s economic forecasts, and the upside revisions to inflation forecasts, likely were no more than the usual overly-optimistic guesstimates.  Further downside surprises in the systemic and economic performance are virtual certainties, and the Fed most likely will respond accordingly with some form of QE3, either overtly or covertly, irrespective of current official protestations to the contrary. 

Key to what lies ahead remains the general commitment by the Fed and the U.S. federal government to prevent systemic collapse, as was seen in the crisis of September 2008.  That commitment translates into creating and spending any amount of money or making any financial guaranty needed (whether domestic or foreign) in order to prevent a collapse of the financial system, so long as is possible.  The Fed can act here, at present, even if the federal government gets tied up in a political impasse.

Tapping the U.S. Strategic Petroleum Reserve.  A day after Mr. Bernanke’s comments, the U.S. tapped is strategic petroleum reserve, in conjunction with the International Energy Agency, presumably to hit oil prices and to help reduce politically-sensitive gasoline prices in the United States.  Dipping into the reserves at this point likely was pure politics.  It also, however, could be front-running a pending crisis on the economic, financial or military front.  Whatever is afoot, the impact of the U.S. and IEA’s actions on oil and gasoline prices likely will be short-lived.   

As noted last week, the crises facing the United States and the U.S. dollar dwarf those in the euro system, and should tend to dominate the financial markets, as the issues with Greece, and any other troubled states that could threaten systemic collapse, are stabilized.  The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue unabated.

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

GROSS DOMESTIC PRODUCT (FIRST-QUARTER 2011, SECOND REVISION)

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

Major Downside Revisions Ahead for GDP.  The first-quarter 2011 GDP second revision was minimal, with annualized real growth at 1.9% versus the 1.8% in both the first and second estimates.  On July 29th, however, annual revisions will be reported for the GDP for 2008 through first-quarter 2011, with some special revisions in GDP back through 2003, along with the “advance” estimate of second-quarter 2011 GDP.  Based on benchmark revisions already published for nonfarm payrolls, retail sales, new orders for durable goods, industrial production and the trade deficit, the revised GDP growth should show the economic downturn to have been more severe than currently is reported.  More detailed comments on the upcoming benchmarking will follow in a later Commentary.

GDP.  Published today, June 24th, by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the third estimate of, or second revision to, first-quarter 2011 gross domestic product (GDP) showed annualized quarterly growth of 1.91% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval) versus a first estimate of 1.84%, and an initial estimate of 1.75%.  As with the first revision, today’s changes to this most worthless of major economic series were little more than statistical noise.  First-quarter growth was down from 3.11% in fourth-quarter 2010. 

Of the reported annualized 1.91% GDP growth, 1.40% was due to an involuntary build-up in inventories.  Also, the patterns of net exports in first-quarter GDP still show no obvious relationship to the sharp deterioration otherwise reported in the first-quarter trade deficit (an otherwise uncounted reduction in GDP level).

While the dollar level of first-quarter GDP should revise sharply lower in the upcoming benchmark revisions, the 1.9% annualized quarterly real growth rate likely will be little changed.  The BEA usually tries to keep the annualized quarterly growth rate of the last quarter before the revisions (first-quarter 2011 GDP in this case) as close to the prior reporting as possible.  Such helps divert media attention from earlier downside changes, and the reduced level of overall activity.

Year-to-year change in first-quarter 2011 over first-quarter 2010 still continued the slowing trend in annual growth, revising to 2.33%, from 2.31% (initially 2.28%), down from 2.78% in the fourth-quarter, and well off the peak reported growth of 3.25% purportedly seen in third-quarter 2010.

The first-quarter GDP implicit price deflator estimate was revised up a notch at an annualized 2.05% from the prior estimate of 1.91% (initially 1.90%), versus 0.35% in the fourth-quarter.  In contrast, annualized seasonally-adjusted quarterly inflation for the CPI-U in the first-quarter spiked to a seasonally-adjusted 5.22%, from 2.62% annualized inflation in the fourth-quarter (see Commentary No. 363).  The lower the inflation rate that is used in deflating the GDP, the stronger is the resulting inflation-adjusted number and vice versa.  A slightly more realistic inflation number would have pushed the “advance” quarterly growth rate into negative territory.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for first-quarter 2011 remains an approximate annual contraction of 2.6% versus the official estimate of a 2.3% gain.  Such is more negative than the alternate 2.1% annual contraction (2.8% official gain) in the fourth-quarter (see the Alternate Data tab).  While annualized real quarterly growth is not estimated formally on an alternative basis, a meaningful quarter-to-quarter contraction appears to have been realistic for the first-quarter, in what generally has been a protracted period of business bottom-bouncing.

 

 

Reflecting the latest reporting, the preceding graph shows year-to-year percent change in the official inflation-adjusted quarterly GDP for the history of the series.  The record annual contraction for the series was 4.11%, seen in second-quarter 2009.  When the GDP and related series go through their annual benchmark revisions on July 29, 2011, that record contraction likely will deepen in revision.

GNP.  Reflecting distorted positive flows in global interest and dividend payments—induced partially by the ongoing systemic crises—the revised estimate of annualized real quarterly growth for first-quarter 2011 gross national product (GNP) was 3.44%, up from the initial estimate of 3.10%, and up from 2.75% in the fourth-quarter.  Year-to-year growth, however, revised to 2.57% from 2.49% in the first-quarter, still lower than the 2.82% of the fourth-quarter.

GDI.  Gross domestic income (GDI), the income-side equivalent to the consumption-side GDP, showed revised annualized real quarterly growth of 1.89% (initially 1.23%) for first-quarter 2011, versus 3.85% in the fourth-quarter.  Year-to-year growth revised to 2.41% (initially 2.24%) in the first-quarter, versus 2.96% in the fourth-quarter.

 

NEW ORDERS FOR DURABLE GOODS (MAY 2011)

May Durable Goods Orders Gain Was Within Normal Month-to-Month Volatility.  The Census Bureau reported today (June 24th) that the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted May 2011 new orders for durable goods increased by 1.9% (up by 3.0% before prior-period revisions) month-to-month, after a revised 2.7% (previously a 3.6%) decline in April.  The monthly increase reflected a 36.5% surge in irregular, long-term aircraft orders, a category that showed a revised 29.0% (previously 30.0%) monthly plunge in April.  June orders likely will show highly volatility, as well, as orders from the Paris air show are booked.

Unadjusted, year-to-year change in total May 2011 new orders was a gain of 10.8%, which was up from the revised annual 4.8% (previously 3.4%) gain in April.  Current durable goods reporting remains subject to many of the same sampling and adjustment problems that are seen with retail sales and payroll reporting.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders rose by 5.8% (up by 7.7% before prior-period revisions) in May, versus a revised month-to-month 5.6% (previously 7.3%) decline in April.  For May, the unadjusted year-to-year growth in the series was 16.4%, up sharply from the 4.9% (previously 3.5%) annual growth estimated for April.

 

EXISTING AND NEW HOME SALES (MAY 2011)

Home Sales Continued Bottom-Bouncing.  May home sales continued to show no recovery, generally consistent with the still down-trending bottom-bouncing of May housing starts (see Commentary No. 374).  Existing- and new-home sales both declined in May 2011, although the movement in new home sales was not statistically significant on either a monthly or an annual basis.  The pattern of bottom-bouncing in industry sales continued, with the distressed or foreclosed portion of existing-home sales declining further.  The downtrend in foreclosure sales, though, appeared to be due to factors other than improving consumer or homeowner conditions.

Thursday’s (June 23rd) reporting of May new-home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) showed a statistically-insignificant monthly decline of 2.1% (down 1.2% before prior-period revisions) +/- 15.8% (95% confidence interval) from April.  April’s gain was revised to 6.5% (previously up by 7.3%) versus March.  The year-to-year gain in May 2011 new-home sales was a statistically-insignificant 13.5% +/- 15.9% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 22.6% (previously 23.1%) April decline.  The high volatility in annual change is due to the lapsing of stimulus effects a year ago.

The June 21st release of May existing-home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) showed a monthly drop of 3.8% (down by 4.8% net of prior-period revisions), versus April’s revised 1.8% (previously 0.8%) monthly decline.  On a year-to-year basis, May sales were down by 15.3%, versus a 13.8% (previously 12.7%) annual decline in April.

Foreclosure activity remained a major distorting factor for home sales, with "distressed" activity accounting for an estimated 31% of existing sales in the NAR’s May reporting, down from the 37% estimated for April.

Separately, the Census Bureau acknowledges that a portion of new home sales also is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimate as to the scope of the issue.  Some in the construction trade have difficulty competing with the pricing of foreclosed properties.  Until the foreclosure problems get worked out in the system, monthly changes in these home sales numbers cannot be taken as meaningful positive indicators (when the numbers are positive) of underlying activity in homeowner real estate, as it relates to general economic activity.

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

There are no major economic releases in the week ahead.  Any unusual results in consumer confidence reporting or in the purchasing mangers surveys will be discussed in the next Commentary.

 

 

__________

No. 374: May Housing Starts

Thursday, June 16th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 374
May Housing Starts

June 16, 2011

__________

Housing Starts Remain in Downhill Bottom-Bouncing

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regularly scheduled Commentary is for Friday, June 24th, covering the second revision to first-quarter GDP, May new orders for durable goods and May home sales.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  The May housing starts release held no surprises this morning (June 16th), with the reported 3.5% monthly gain in this highly volatile series virtually indistinguishable from a monthly contraction, in terms of statistical significance.  Housing activity continues to bottom-bounce in a downtrend.  Activity remains at historically low levels, down roughly 75% from the markets seen just five years ago. 

With the collapsed real estate markets, and financing for same, major factors behind the U.S. systemic-solvency woes, and with housing activity feeding into demand for furnishings, appliances, etc., the ongoing story here offers no near-term good news for either the solvency or economic crises.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Greece.  To the extent that Greece’s solvency crisis threatens systemic collapse, short-term funding solutions almost certainly will be found by the interested sovereign states and central banks, including particularly the U.S. Government and the Federal Reserve.  As seen in 2008, systemic failure will be avoided so long as it is possible to do so with the spending of whatever money needs to be created, or with the extension of whatever financial guarantees are needed.  Due to domestic political concerns, U.S. activity here likely will be covert—worked through a third party—or otherwise downplayed as much as possible.

The crises facing the United States and the U.S. dollar dwarf those in the euro system, and should tend to dominate the financial markets as the issues with Greece and others tend to be stabilized.  The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue unabated.

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

HOUSING STARTS (MAY 2011)

May Gain Was Statistically Meaningless.  The regularly volatile housing starts series continued its pattern of weakening bottom-bouncing in May, albeit with a small monthly uptick, but with no indications of a reprieve for the housing industry or the otherwise deteriorating broader economy.  The Census Bureau reported this morning, June 16th, a statistically-insignificant monthly increase in seasonally-adjusted May 2011 housing starts of 3.5% +/- 14.5% (95% confidence interval); the gain was 7.1% before prior-period revisions.  April starts were revised to an 8.8% (previously 10.6%) monthly decline. 

Year-to-year change in May housing starts was a statistically-insignificant decline of 3.4% +/- 10.2% (95% confidence interval), following a revised annual 21.3% (previously 23.9%) decline in April.  The sharp narrowing in annual decline reflected the May 2010 drop-off in post-stimulus activity, and the continuation of a downwardly-sloped trend of bottom-bouncing since.  

Indeed, the pattern of housing starts has remained one of stagnation at an historically low-level plateau of activity, over the last 30 months, with recent activity turning down anew.  The six-month moving-average of seasonally-adjusted housing starts held at 562,000 in May, 6.8% above the historic low six-month moving-average seen in May 2009.  Significantly weaker monthly numbers remain likely in the months ahead.  Since December 2008, housing starts have averaged a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 569,000.  In that period, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, with the 560,000 May 2011 monthly reading at 1.6% below average. 

 

As shown in the preceding graphs, current monthly housing starts activity remains near the record monthly low for the present series seen in April 2009.  The current number also is well below any level reported in the predecessor nonfarm housing starts series, which was introduced in 1946.  The first graph shows recent detail for current housing starts activity, the second graph shows the same data within the historical context of the post-World War II period.

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Home Sales (May 2011).  May existing home sales (National Association of Realtors) are due for release on Tuesday, June 21st, followed by new home sales (Census Bureau) on Thursday, June 23rd.  As with the continuing historic weakness in housing starts, these volatile series should remain extremely weak, with any positive monthly change (new homes) again lacking statistical significance.  Also, as usual, given the extreme volatility, reporting error and revisions in these series, given the poor-quality seasonal adjustments, given continuing negative anecdotal evidence, and given ongoing massive distortions from increasingly volatile foreclosure activity, the monthly movements in these numbers (particularly to the upside) remain meaningless.

Gross Domestic Product—GDP (First-Quarter 2011—Second Revision or Third Estimate).  The second revised estimate of first-quarter GDP is due for release from the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) on Friday, June 24th.  Changes at the second revision usually are no more than statistical noise around the first revision, which in this case showed headline, annualized real growth of 1.8%.  Annual GDP revisions, however, are due on July 29th, along with the “advance” estimate of second-quarter GDP.  A lowered level of first-quarter GDP is likely in the pending major downside revisions to previously-reported GDP activity.  The BEA, however, usually tries to keep the annualized quarterly growth rate of the last quarter before the revisions (first-quarter 2011 GDP in this case) as close to the prior reporting as possible.  Such helps divert media attention some from earlier downside changes, and the reduced level of overall activity.

New Orders for Durable Goods (May 2011).  Due for release on Friday, June 24th, May’s new orders for durable goods likely will not show a meaningful monthly change, with odds slightly favoring a decline in this irregularly volatile series.

 

 

__________

No. 373: May Inflation, Retail Sales, Production

Wednesday, June 15th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 373
May Inflation, Retail Sales, Production

June 15, 2011

__________

Economy Falters as Inflation Surges

May’s Annual Consumer Inflation: 3.6% (CPI-U), 4.1% (CPI-W), 11.2% (SGS)

Real Retail Sales Contracted in Both April and May

Stalled Industrial Production Continued

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regularly scheduled Commentary is for tomorrow, Thursday, June 16th, covering May housing starts.  Next week’s Commentary will be on Friday, June 24th, covering the second revision to first-quarter GDP, May new orders for durable goods and May home sales.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  U.S. economic data continue to show contracting or stalling activity, while reported annual inflation quickly is moving toward the 2008 near-term peak.  The high inflation levels of the 1970s are not far behind and could be seen officially by year-end.  With the deepening economic crisis intensifying the systemic-solvency and federal-fiscal crises, the Federal Reserve remains highly likely to move, overtly or covertly, into QE3 before the end of third-quarter 2011, with a Treasury funding crisis likely to follow the eventual lifting of the federal debt ceiling in August. 

While the debt-ceiling crisis likely will go down to the wire, as it has before, it is difficult to imagine either side allowing an actual default on U.S. Treasury debt.  If there were a default, such could accelerate the collapse and abandonment of the U.S. dollar, and would accelerate the onset of a U.S. hyperinflation.

Inflation Jumps.  Muting the reported, seasonally-adjusted CPI inflation rate in recent months have been the downside seasonal adjustments to gasoline prices.  For example, although today’s news reports (June 15th) tout declining gasoline prices for helping to keep inflation in check, gasoline prices actually rose in May by 3.6% (the common experience), but that was turned into a monthly decline of 2.0% by the seasonals.  These seasonal factors turn neutral in next month’s reporting and then begin to inflate reported gasoline prices starting with July’s reporting.

Even with “declining” gasoline prices, today’s CPI report was not good news for those hoping for contained inflation.  The 0.2% adjusted monthly increase in the May CPI-U included a 0.3% increase in “core” inflation (net of food and energy prices), the inflation concept so heavily touted by the Fed.  The more meaningful annual inflation rates, though, were the story. 

The May PPI gained 0.8% month-to-month, despite an actual monthly decline oil prices that was exacerbated by related seasonal factors.  Nonetheless, annual PPI inflation rose to a post-2008 high of 7.3%.  The decline in oil prices appears to have been limited, with prices now above May’s averages.  Heavy selling against the U.S. dollar would tend to provide further upside pressures on oil prices and other commodities denominated in the dollar.  

Consumer Activity Falters.  With their liquidity squeezed by rising costs and lack of income and credit growth, consumers have cut back on consumption.  Based on government reporting, both May and revised April real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales contracted on a monthly basis.  Likely further weakness in June would lead to a quarterly contraction in real retail sales for the second quarter.

May industrial production gained 0.1% for the month, but with revisions, this series has shown little growth in 2011.  Activity in the production sector has stalled.  The Fed blamed April and May weakness on earthquake-induced disruptions to the supply chain of assembly-parts from Japan for U.S. “production.”  At one time, the United States produced its own parts, which was a much healthier economic circumstance than today’s more-common assembly operations of parts manufactured outside the U.S.  While the “disruptions” were a factor in soft activity, they also conveniently helped to bring down unwanted inventory levels.  With consumption down and inventories up, reduced production usually follows irrespective of any “disruptions.” 

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Watch the Dollar.  The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue unabated, with the economy and reported inflation playing out about as expected.  The regular gold-related graphs follow.  Various short-term market moves against oil, gold and silver and in favor of the dollar, along with official encouragement of such moves, appear to have run their courses, at least temporarily.  As discussed in the Report, key to near-term developments for gold, silver and oil is the U.S. dollar, which remains vulnerable to a massive sell-off with little or no further warning.  Over the long haul, precious metals and the stronger major currencies remain the strongest hedges against the ultimate collapse of U.S. dollar’s purchasing power.

 

 

 

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

CONSUMER PRICE INDEX (MAY 2011)

Annual CPI-W Inflation Tops 4%, CPI-U Inflation Jumps by 0.4% to 3.6%, with Consumer Purchasing Power Taking the Hit.  Reflecting the ongoing effects of the Federal Reserve’s actions to debase the U.S. dollar, official annual consumer inflation jumped by 0.4% to 0.5% in May, as the impact of inflation driven by recent Federal Reserve activity reportedly began to spread outside of the Fed’s gimmicked “core” concept.  Headline news that dropping gasoline prices kept inflation tame in May was the usual Fed/Wall Street hype and nonsense.  Although average oil prices temporarily were lower in May, gasoline prices actually rose; it was just the BLS’s seasonal adjustments that turned gasoline prices lower in the monthly inflation calculation.

Likely disquieting to those who concentrate on inflation net of food and energy prices, the monthly “core” CPI-U rose by 0.3% in May, versus a 0.2% gain in April, with annual “core” inflation rising to 1.5% in May versus 1.3% in April.  Where oil permeates U.S. economic activity, higher oil prices will lead to increase inflationary pressures across many levels of economic activity, from transportation costs to the prices of fertilizers and pharmaceuticals.

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

CPI-U. The BLS reported today (June 15th) that the seasonally-adjusted May 2011 CPI-U rose by 0.17% (up by 0.47%, unadjusted) for the month.  That followed an increase of 0.42% (up by 0.64%, unadjusted) in April.  The May reporting reflected an unadjusted monthly increase in gasoline prices of 3.6%, which was turned into a monthly contraction of 2.0% by the ongoing happy seasonal adjustments of the BLS.  Those gasoline-price-suppressing adjustments have run their course for a while, though.  The seasonals turn neutral in June and begin boosting adjusted gasoline prices in July.   

The pace of annualized, seasonally-adjusted CPI-U inflation slowed slightly in the most recent three months (ended May) to 5.67%, versus 6.01% in the three months ended April. 

May’s unadjusted year-to-year CPI-U inflation surged once again, to 3.57%, the strongest pace of annual inflation since October 2008.  May’s annual inflation rate was up from 3.16% in April.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s June 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.17% gain in the adjusted monthly level reported for June 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for June 2011, the difference in June’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from May 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 3.57%.  Annual CPI-U inflation should move to top 4% in the next couple of months.  The CPI-W broke that barrier, hitting 4.12% in today’s reporting.

CPI-W.  The narrower, seasonally-adjusted CPI-W, which has greater weighting for gasoline than does the CPI-U, rose in May 2011 by 0.14% (up 0.55% unadjusted), following April’s adjusted monthly increase of 0.50% (up 0.78% unadjusted). 

The pace of annualized, seasonally-adjusted CPI-W inflation also slowed slightly, due gasoline-price-suppressing seasonals, to 6.56% in the most recent three months (ended May), versus 7.01% in the three months ended April.  

Unadjusted, May 2011’s year-to-year CPI-W inflation was 4.12%, against a 3.64% annual increase in April.

The Chain-Weighted CPI-U—the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists, including the recent presidential deficit commission, as the replacement for the CPI—is reported only on an unadjusted basis.  Year-to-year inflation increased to 3.28% in May 2011 versus 2.92% in April.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 6.9% in May 2011, up from 6.5% in April, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to about 11.2% (11.15% for those using the extra digit) in May, from about 10.7% in April. 

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation. Despite the June 6th historic-high gold price of $1,549.00 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix) and the multi-decade high silver price of at $48.70 per troy ounce (London fix of April 28th), gold and silver prices have yet to approach their 1980 historic levels, adjusted for inflation.  The earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 would be $2,469 per troy ounce, based on May 2011 CPI-U-adjusted dollars, $8,442 per troy ounce based on SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (all series not seasonally adjusted). 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org), although approached recently, still has not been hit since 1980, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars.  Based on May 2011 CPI-U inflation, the 1980 silver price peak would be $144 per troy ounce and would be $491 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (again, all series not seasonally adjusted).

As shown on page 43 of the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), over the decades, the price of gold has compensated for more than the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the dollar based on the SGS-Alternate Consumer Price Measure (1980 Methodologies Base).

  The signal of the still unfolding double-dip recession, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), most recently discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), continues and is graphed below.  Based on the May CPI-U report and the latest May SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate, the annual contraction in real M3 for May 2011 was 1.8%, versus a 2.5% annual contraction in April.

 

 

The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn or its duration.  The current downturn signal was generated in December 2009.  The broad economy tends to follow in downturn or renewed deterioration roughly six-to-nine months after the signal, as has appeared to have started in recent months.  Increasing weakness in a number of series should become evident in the months ahead, with the scheduled July benchmark revisions to GDP likely to show much weaker economic activity for the last year or two than currently is reported.  Such eventually will lead to recognition of a double-dip recession.

 

PRODUCER PRICE INDEX (MAY 2011)

Annual PPI Inflation Rose to 7.3% in May.   As reported yesterday, June 14th, by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) rose in May 2011 by 0.2% (up by 0.6% before seasonal adjustment) month-to-month, following a monthly increase of 0.8% in April (up by 1.2% before seasonal adjustment).  The adjusted monthly PPI finished goods reflected “core” inflation, also up 0.2%, with upside pressures from energy (despite declining oil prices and negative seasonals) offset largely by declining food prices.

Annualized, seasonally-adjusted PPI inflation for the three months ended May 2011 dropped to 7.0% from 13.1% reported in April.  Unadjusted and year-to-year, May 2011’s PPI inflation jumped to 7.3%—the highest level since September 2008—up from 6.8% in April.  The higher prices generally reflected ongoing impact of the Fed’s dollar-debasement policies.  With reported monthly inflation heavily reduced by seasonal adjustments to energy costs, the heaviest impact from rising oil prices is still ahead, despite recent gyrations in oil market prices.

Separately, on a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted May 2011 intermediate goods rose by 0.9% (up by 1.3% in April), with May’s crude goods prices down by 4.1%, after rising by 4.0% in April. 

Year-to-year inflation in May intermediate goods was up by 10.3% (a 9.4% gain in April), with May’s annual inflation in crude goods at 22.8%% (up by 23.7% in April).

 

RETAIL SALES (MAY 2011)

With Revisions, Real Retail Sales Were Down for a Second Month.  Given downside revisions to prior estimates of March and April 2011 monthly retail   Any further real weakness in June should tip second-quarter real retail sales into contraction versus the first-quarter, a circumstance that would not bode well for quarterly GDP reporting.

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Retail Sales.  Yesterday’s (June 14th) May 2011 retail sales report—issued by the Census Bureau—indicated a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly decline of 0.24% (down by 0.57% before prior-period revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised April monthly gain of 0.28% (previously a 0.51% increase).  At work here remain extreme seasonal-factor distortions as discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011).

On a year-to-year basis, May 2011 retail sales were reported up by 7.73% from May 2010, versus a revised year-to-year April 2011 gain of 7.27% (previously 7.57%).    

  Based on the May 2011 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly May 2011 retail sales declined by 0.40%, where, before inflation adjustment, the current number was down by 0.24%.  Real April sales revised to a decline of 0.14% (previously a gain of 0.09%).

May’s real retail sales rose at a year-to-year pace of 4.14%, versus a revised 4.02% (previously 4.32%) annual gain reported for April. 

The ongoing “recovery” in real retail sales is reflected in the following graphs, which show the latest monthly levels of inflation- and seasonally-adjusted activity.  The first of these shows close historical detail for the period beginning in 2000, the second shows the same data in historical context since World War II.

 

 

 

 

Using the SGS Alternate-CPI Inflation estimates for deflation of the retail series would not have shown an ongoing rise in activity for the last year or so.  It is my preference here, and wherever otherwise possible, to use the official estimates (the series here is as calculated by the St. Louis Fed), since that eliminates a level of argument over what is being reported.  As official consumer inflation picks up, and as overall retail sales suffer from the ongoing consumer liquidity squeeze, these data have started to turn down in what will become eventually an official and formal double-dip recession. 

There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity—no recovery—just general bottom-bouncing.  Accordingly, real retail sales levels in the months ahead should become increasingly negative.

.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, “core” retail sales—consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when “core” inflation is lower than full inflation—are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: May 2011 versus April 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues—was down by 0.3% versus an official aggregate decline of 0.2%.

Version II: May 2011 versus April 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gas stations—was down by 0.2% versus the aggregate decline of 0.2%.

 

PRODUCTION

Industrial Production Remained Stalled in May.  This morning’s (June 15th) Federal Reserve Board release of seasonally-adjusted May 2011 industrial production showed a monthly gain of 0.10% (a decline of 0.12% net of prior-period revisions) versus April.  In turn, monthly change in April production was virtually flat, down a revised 0.03% (previously down by 0.01%).  The Fed blamed earthquake-induced disruptions to the supply chain of assembly-parts from Japan for U.S. “production.”  While this was a factor, the “disruptions” also help to bring down unwanted inventory levels. 

Year-to-year growth in May 2011 production was 3.42%, slower than the revised 4.71% (previously 4.95%) in April, and down from the recent relative peak year-to-year change of 7.75% in June 2010.  The year-to-year contraction of 14.83% seen in June 2009 was the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II.

The “recovery” in industrial production is reflected in the following graphs.  Both graphs show the monthly level of the production index.  The first of these shows close historical detail for the period beginning in 2000, the second shows the same data in historical context since World War II.

For the last 33 months, the production index has averaged 89.0, around which the series has fluctuated. Although it had been moving higher, it has started to flatten out in recent months.  The May reading was at 93.0, just 0.4% above where it was in December 2010.

 

 

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Residential Construction (May 2011).  Due for release tomorrow, Thursday, June 16th, May should continue to decline, still pushing towards or setting new historic lows.  As has been the case for many months, any reported upside monthly movement likely will remain statistically indistinguishable from a monthly contraction.

Home Sales (May 2011).  May existing home sales (National Association of Realtors) are due for release on Tuesday, June 21st, followed by new home sales (Census Bureau) on Thursday, June 23rd.  As with the likely continuing broad deterioration in housing starts, these volatile series should remain extremely weak, with any positive monthly change (new homes) again lacking statistical significance.  Also, as usual, given the extreme volatility, reporting error and revisions in these series, given the poor-quality seasonal adjustments, given continuing negative anecdotal evidence, and given ongoing massive distortions from increasingly volatile foreclosure activity, the monthly movements in these numbers (particularly to the upside) remain meaningless.

Gross Domestic Product—GDP (First-Quarter 2011—Second Revision or Third Estimate).  The second revised estimate of first-quarter GDP is due for release from the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) on Friday, June 24th.  Changes at the second revision are not likely to be much more than statistical noise around the first revision, which showed headline, annualized real growth of 1.8%.  Annual GDP revisions, however, are due on July 29th, along with the “advance” estimate of second-quarter GDP.  A lowered level of first-quarter GDP is likely as an artifact of the pending major downside revisions to previously-reported GDP activity.  The BEA, however, usually tries to keep the annualized quarter-to-quarter growth rate of the last quarter before the revisions (first-quarter 2011 GDP in this case) as close to the prior reporting as possible.  Such helps divert media attention some from earlier downside changes.

New Orders for Durable Goods (May 2011).  Due for release on Friday, June 24th, May’s new orders for durable goods likely will not show a meaningful monthly change, with odds slightly favoring a decline in this irregularly volatile series.

 

__________

No. 372: April Trade Deficit, Bernanke Shift

Thursday, June 9th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 372
April Trade Deficit, Bernanke Shift

June 9, 2011

 

__________

Earthquake-Diminished Imports of Auto Parts Narrowed April Deficit

Trade Revisions Showed Somewhat Deeper Historical Shortfalls

Mr. Bernanke Begins to Unfurl His Warning Flag

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regularly scheduled Commentary is for Wednesday, June 15th.  It will cover the May CPI, PPI, retail sales and industrial production.  A further Commentary on Thursday, June 16th will assess May housing starts data.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke’s remarks to the International Monetary Conference in Atlanta on June 7th took a marked shift towards a cautionary note on the U.S. economy.  Despite the mixed language in his comments on how well Fed policy has been working, I take the more-negative economic tone as an early warning of an eventual QE3 (third-quarter 2011).  Included in Mr. Bernanke’s thoughts were such items as:

“U.S. economic growth so far this year looks to have been somewhat slower than expected.”

“Until we see a sustained period of stronger job creation, we cannot consider the recovery to be truly established.”

He also gave an interesting example of how today’s “recovered” economy still is worse off than the worst of the unusually severe 1981-82 recession:

“Developments in the labor market will be of particular importance in setting the course for household spending.  As you know, the jobs situation remains far from normal.  For example, aggregate hours of production workers—a comprehensive measure of labor input that reflects the extent of part-time employment and opportunities for overtime as well as the number of people employed—fell, remarkably, by nearly 10 percent from the beginning of the recent recession through October 2009.  Although hours of work have increased during the expansion, this measure still remains about 6-1/2 percent below its pre-recession level.  For comparison, the maximum decline in aggregate hours worked in the deep 1981-82 recession was less than 6 percent.  Other indicators, such as total payroll employment, the ratio of employment to population, and the unemployment rate, paint a similar picture.  Particularly concerning is the very high level of long-term unemployment—nearly half of the unemployed have been jobless for more than six months.  People without work for long periods can find it increasingly difficult to obtain a job comparable to their previous one, as their skills tend to deteriorate over time and as employers are often reluctant to hire the long-term unemployed.”

The pattern described there likely mirrors what the now “fully-recovered” GDP reporting will look like after major downside revisions to historical GDP are published in the July 29th annual revisions.

The Fed Chairman’s comments on Wednesday were followed by the Fed’s Beige Book on Thursday (June 8th).  The Fed’s regular anecdotal reporting of business activity opened with news that the economy had begun to falter anew in certain districts:

“Reports from the twelve Federal Reserve Districts indicated that economic activity generally continued to expand since the last report, though a few Districts indicated some deceleration.  Some slowing in the pace of growth was noted in the New York, Philadelphia, Atlanta, and Chicago Districts.  In contrast, Dallas characterized that region’s economy as accelerating [oil-price related].  Other Districts indicated that growth continued at a steady pace.”

April Trade Numbers Skewed by Japanese Earthquake.  The effects of the Japanese earthquake reduced U.S. imports of parts for automobile assembly, and the April trade deficit narrowed unexpectedly as a result.  The data were released in the context of various annual revisions, which showed the trade deficits of first-quarter 2011 and the years 2010 and 2009 to have been somewhat deeper than previously reported.  Assuming no quick bounce-back in auto-part imports in May, the April and May trade numbers—supposedly used by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) in its “advance” estimate of second-quarter 2011 GDP—would offer an upside growth contribution to the “advance” GDP.

With next week’s reporting covering most of the major economic and inflation data remaining to be reported for May, next week’s Commentaries will offer a full update to the generally-unchanged economic and inflation outlooks.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Third-Quarter QE3 Remains Likely.  As discussed above, with official economic data indicating new troubles, Mr. Bernanke appears to be laying the groundwork for acknowledging that the economy is not in a sustainable recovery.  He would use that story as cover for a new round of quantitative-easing aimed at supporting systemic liquidity.  Market reaction to or anticipation of such action would tend to accelerate dollar depreciation, rising oil prices, and flight to gold and silver.  The weakening economy also still has horrendous implications for U.S. fiscal conditions and for U.S. Treasury funding needs.  On top of that, the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate appears to be picking up as Treasury spending ends up deposited in recipients’ bank accounts.  Even so, bank-lending still shows no serious improvement, reflective of the ongoing systemic-solvency crisis.  The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue unabated.

 

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

Temporary April Trade Deficit Improvement Suggests Possible Boost to Second-Quarter GDP “Advance” Estimate.  The April report on the U.S. trade balance included revisions back through 2009.  While prior-period revisions show the historical trade shortfall to have been somewhat greater than previously report, those revisions likely will not impact GDP reporting other than in the July 29th annual revisions, at which time the “advance” estimate of second-quarter 2011 GDP also will be published. 

The April data are the first of only two months of information that will be used in guesstimating second-quarter GDP growth.  Given that the reported inflation- and seasonally-adjusted April merchandise trade deficit improved versus the revised first-quarter data, such suggests an initial, relatively positive trade contribution to the second-quarter GDP.  That assumes that GDP reporting will resume reflecting the trade data (reported trade patterns were not reflected in the first-quarter GDP estimate).  As surrogate Japanese auto production in the United States returns to normal, the related trade numbers should prove to be unusually volatile.

Indeed the narrowing of the April deficit was due largely to the reduced imports of Japanese auto parts.  As that circumstance rights itself, those imports will surge anew, assuming there actually is any meaningful unfilled demand for new automobiles. 

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Trade Deficit.  The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported this morning, Thursday (June 9th) that the nominal, seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services for April 2011 narrowed to $43.7 billion from a revised $46.8 (previously $48.2) billion in March.  The April 2011 deficit also widened from a revised $41.5 (previously $40.6) billion a year ago.  The revised numbers were in the context of one of a series of regular annual revisions.  The revised summary goods and services deficits are: $140.8 (previously $140.6) billion for first-quarter 2011; $500.0 (previously $495.7) billion for 2010; $381.3 ($374.9) billion for 2009.

Against a revised March 2011, the April trade balance showed higher exports but weaker imports, with after-effects of the Japanese earthquake reducing imported auto parts.  Oil did not help to boost imports, either, where higher oil prices were offset by reduced volume.  Specifically, for the month of April 2011, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $103.18 per barrel, up from $93.76 in March 2011, and up from $77.13 in April 2010.  In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, April 2011 volume averaged 8.408 million barrels per day, down from 9.520 million in March 2011 and down from 9.829 million in April 2010.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit.  Adjusted for seasonal factors and net of rising oil prices and other inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the reported April 2011 merchandise trade deficit came in at $44.2 billion, down from a revised $49.7 (previously $50.1) billion in March.

Based on one month’s reporting, the real second-quarter 2011 merchandise deficit annualizes out to $530.8 billion, versus a revised $604.9 (previously $598.4) billion in the first-quarter, and against a revised $557.0 (previously $545.0) billion in fourth-quarter 2010.  Again, revisions likely will not be reflected in GDP reporting until the July 29th annual GDP revisions.

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Retail Sales (May 2011).  Due for release on Tuesday, June 14th, May retail sales face a downside reporting risk versus what likely will be relatively soft expectations.  Whatever gain may be reported likely will be more than offset by May CPI-U inflation.

Producer Price Index—PPI (May 2011).  Due for release on Tuesday, June 14th, the headline number from the regularly volatile PPI series should be relatively soft, given a temporary reduction oil prices that will be exacerbated by oil-price-dampening seasonal-factor adjustments.  Nonetheless there is some risk for an upside surprise versus likely tepid consensus expectations, as inflationary pressures increasingly pass outside the direct energy sector.

Consumer Price Index—CPI (May 2011).  Due for release on Wednesday, June 15th, the CPI headline number also is at risk of surprising likely muted consensus expectations on the upside.  Despite the temporary decline in average monthly oil prices in May, gasoline prices still averaged 2.8% higher versus April, per the Department of Energy.  While that will be turned negative by the government’s gasoline-price-muting seasonal-factors, higher food prices and otherwise spreading inflationary pressures in the broad economy should keep the CPI-U in positive territory.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in May 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.14% contraction in the adjusted monthly level reported for May 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for May 2011, the difference in May’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from April 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 3.16%.  A month-to-month gain of 0.3% in the May 2011 CPI-U, for example, would move annual CPI-U inflation to the 3.4% to 3.5% range.  Annual CPI-U inflation should move above 4% in the next several months.  The narrower CPI-W already was at 3.64% in April’s reporting. 

Industrial Production (May 2011).  Due for release on Wednesday, June 15th, May’s industrial production could show an outright monthly contraction, as the apparent “stall” in recent activity rolls into renewed downturn.  A downside reporting surprise again is a fair bet for what likely will be moderately positive consensus expectations.

Residential Construction (May 2011).  Due for release on Thursday, June 16th, May housing starts should continue to decline, still pushing towards or setting new historic lows.  As has been the case for many months, any reported upside monthly movement likely will remain statistically indistinguishable from a monthly contraction.

 

__________

No. 371: May Employment and Unemployment

Friday, June 3rd, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 371
May Employment and Unemployment

June 3, 2011

__________

Softer Employment Picture Reflected Minor Catch Up In Distorted Data –
Much Weaker Data Loom Despite Ongoing Reporting Quality Issues

Annual Growth in May Payrolls Slowed Anew

May Unemployment Rates: 9.1% (U.3), 15.8% (U.6), 22.3% (SGS)

Broad Money Supply Growth Jumps Again

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regularly scheduled Commentary is for Thursday, June 9th.  It will cover the U.S. trade balance reporting for April 2011.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  So, suddenly the economy is grinding to a halt?  A more realistic case is that the economy never was as strong as advertised, and that the sharp plunge in the May purchasing managers survey and the sudden slowing in May employment growth reflected some catch up in recent (and still ongoing) poor-quality reporting that has been warped heavily by seasonal-factor distortions.  These early May indicators are on the heels of April data that suggested a stalling economy.  Where some of the April data also may have reflected some reversal of recent reporting distortions, actual business activity continues to suffer severely, and much-more-extreme reporting “catch up” looms in the month and months ahead.  There simply is and has been no underlying fundamental circumstance at hand that could sustain positive growth in the broad U.S. economy.

Labor Conditions. Separate from the seasonal-factor distortions, the year-to-year gain in unadjusted May payroll employment softened for the first time since 2009.  Otherwise, this morning’s (June 3rd) jobs report showed a headline 54,000 monthly payroll increase that was statistically indistinguishable from a monthly contraction.  Even that small gain was accounted for by downside revisions to prior-period reporting and an upped Birth-Death Model bias factor.  The headline May unemployment rate rose to 9.1% from 9.0% in April, with the broader U.6 measure easing back to 15.8% from 15.9%.  Where part of the decline in U.6 was due to short-term discouraged workers rolling into the long-term discouraged worker category, the SGS Alternate-Unemployment Measure held at 22.3%.

Seasonal Factors Mauled by Disruptions to Normal Business from the Severe Length and Depth of the Economic Downturn.  As discussed extensively in prior writings (see Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) for example), seasonal factors can work well in normal economic conditions to remove regular fluctuations in economic activity that result from factors such the holiday shopping season or timing of the school year.  The economic contraction of the last four or five years, however, has been the most severe and protracted in the period of modern economic reporting (post-World War II).  Patterns of the economic collapse overwhelmed the statistical modeling of normal seasonal patterns, destabilizing the seasonal factors and making month-to-month comparisons of monthly series virtually meaningless. 

An example of this was shown in Commentary No. 349, involving the purchasing managers survey.  In normal times, good-quality seasonal factors are reasonably stable from one year to the next.

The extreme shifts seen in the employment-component seasonal factors for the purchasing managers manufacturing survey between 2010 and 2011 were not stable, as shown in the above graph.  Where the factor is divided into the number to be adjusted, the higher the adjustment is, the lower will be the adjusted number.  Hence, the relatively high seasonal-adjustment factor for May 2011 partially was responsible for the size of the downside swing from the seasonally-adjusted April (62.7, unadjusted 64.5) employment component to the May (58.2, unadjusted 61.0) component, catching up from earlier overstatement in the series.  Where this series is revised annually, neither the 2011 nor the 2010 seasonal adjustments are or were stable and meaningful, with result that widely followed month-to-month comparisons simply are unreliable, effectively useless, at present.

The distortions to reporting are intensified when the seasonal-adjustment revisions are done monthly (as with payrolls and retail sales).  Reporting accuracy is sacrificed further, when the reporting (BLS or Commerce Department) shows only seasonally-adjusted revisions to current months, while the revisions actually go back for years.  Some specifics on payrolls are shown in the Reporting Details section.

No Chance of Sustainable Economic Growth until Underlying Structural Consumer Income Problems Are Resolved.  Following the initial plunge in economic activity from late-2007 into 2009, and an ensuing, protracted period of bottom-bouncing, I contend that the broad U.S. economy began to turn down anew in the latter part of 2010.  The reporting of current economic weakness likely reflects some catch up in reporting of a new down-leg in a double- or multiple-dip recession, which increasingly should gain broad market recognition.  Although numbers in the months ahead still will be subject to the volatility and distortions from the ongoing reporting-quality issues, upcoming economic reporting likely will tend towards accelerating deterioration.  Quarter-to-quarter real GDP change could turn negative in  second- or third-quarter 2011 reporting   

Fundamentally, with consumer income not growing faster than inflation and with debt-expansion potential still severely restricted, broad economic activity has no basis for entering a period of sustained growth.  At best, various short-lived stimulus gimmicks may have short-lived impact. 

Consider the recent 13-month reduction in social security withholding taxes that took effect in January 2011.  The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) regularly overstates income estimates using imputations and upside biases, and it understates inflation (fully-substitution based with hedonic adjustments), with resulting overstated inflation-adjusted income growth rates.  Even so, the BEA reported (May 27th) that seasonally- and inflation-adjusted monthly disposable income (effectively consumer take-home pay) was down or unchanged month-to-month in February, March and April 2011 (the latest number).  Indeed, the reported April 2011 level was even with the pre-stimulus level of December 2010.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—QE3 Nears with Weakening Economic Data.  As discussed in recent Commentaries, the Fed’s various “quantitative-easing” programs appear to have been specifically aimed at trying to prevent a banking-system collapse.  Systemic-solvency and federal-fiscal problems all intensify with a weak economy, but the Fed has no ability at present to turn the economy around.  Economic weakness, however, does provide the Fed with cover for its programs, and QE3 likely will not be far off (by third-quarter 2011), if official data continue to show the economy faltering anew.  Dollar selling and gold buying pressures already seem to be reflecting some anticipation of the Fed’s next round of actions. The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue unabated.

SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate for May on Track to Show Increasingly Solid Annual and Monthly Growth.  The preliminary estimate for the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate for May 2011 will be published tomorrow (June 4th) in the Alternate Data section.  At present, the series is on track for year-to-year growth of about 1.8%, versus a 0.6% gain in April and a 0.9% annual decline in March.  A month-to-month pick up appears to be in the works for May, as well, for the fourth consecutive month, up by about 0.7%, following a 0.8% estimated gain in April.  The estimated month-to-month changes are less reliable than the estimates of annual growth.

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

Constant Recalculation of Payroll Seasonal Factors Intensifies Reporting Distortions.  As discussed in the Opening Comments, seasonal-factor estimation has been severely distorted by the extreme depth and duration of the economic contraction.  These distortions are exacerbated for payroll employment data based on the BLS’s monthly seasonal-factor re-estimations and lack of full reporting.

 

While the BLS recalculates the monthly seasonal factors each month for payroll employment, going back a number of years, it only publishes revised data for the last two months of reporting (March and April 2011 with the May 2011 report).  Shown in the preceding graph, the latest “concurrent” seasonal factor changes reduced the level of payrolls in April 2010 (with a downside change in April 2011), which helped to provide a small relative spike to the May 2011 number.  With just two months of prior reporting shown as revised, the downward revision to April 2010 is not published by the BLS, so as to avoid “confusing” people who use the data.  

Meaningful seasonal-adjustments tend to be stable over time, without wild fluctuations every time the seasonals are re-estimated.  This is true particularly for series like payroll employment and retail sales, where the seasonal factors are concurrent—recalculated each month for the current month’s raw data.  If the payroll seasonals were stable, the lines in the preceding graph would be flat and coincident.  Instead the variations appear to be intensifying with each successive month.  The monthly recalculations of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels show irregular revisions, with monthly swings of plus or minus 70,000 jobs shifting over time.  To the extent the numbers affect current reporting, the differences are enough potentially to alter financial-market perceptions and reactions. 

The big issue remains that the month-to-month seasonally-adjusted payroll data have become increasingly worthless, with reporting errors likely now well beyond the official 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000 jobs in the reported monthly payroll change.  Yet the media and the markets tout the data as meaningful, usually without question or qualification.

The inconsistency differences in the graph were calculated based on the raw data and the seasonal-adjustment program available to the public on the BLS Web site.  Using the BLS data, we have calculated the seasonally-adjusted numbers as the BLS should be showing them, as of the current reporting, and the differences between official reporting and the consistent seasonally-adjusted series.

Payroll Survey Detail.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted May 2011 jobs gain of 54,000 (an increase of 15,000 jobs before prior-period revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval).  April payrolls showed a revised 232,000 (previously 244,000) gain.  Yet, as discussed earlier, some of the softening in growth was due to minor catch up in the ongoing statistical distortions from the monthly recasting of seasonal adjustment factors, which shift seasonally-adjusted jobs from earlier months, but where the BLS does not publish the earlier revisions.  It is not so much that jobs growth suddenly is slowing, it is that previously reported jobs growth never was as advertised.

In terms of year-to-year change, the unadjusted May 2011 growth rate slowed to 0.73%, down from the revised 1.06% (previously 1.07%) annual growth reported in April.

Although the graphs of long-term year-to-year unadjusted payroll change had shown a recent rising trend in annual growth, which primarily reflected the still-protracted bottom-bouncing in the payroll series, that pattern had flattened out in the last several months and now has begun to soften, as shown in the first graph following of the near-term detail in year-to-year change. 

 

 

As shown in the preceding longer-term graph (historical detail back to World War II), with the bottom-bouncing of recent years, current annual growth has recovered from the post-World War II record 5.06% decline in August 2009, which was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II (a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945).  Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the August 2009 annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression, and the current level of employment is far from any recovery.

 

 

In the above plot of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels (as reported by the BLS) the current level of nonfarm payrolls shows a flattening and certainly no recovery to pre-recession highs.  The data continue to bottom-bounce along a plateau of low-level activity, with the latest payroll level still well below where it was a decade ago, even though the U.S. population has increased by more than 10% in the same period. 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  Despite the ongoing and regular overstatement of monthly payroll employment—as evidenced by the regular and massive, annual downward benchmark revisions to the reported payroll numbers—the BLS keeps upping its monthly biases in post-benchmark reporting.  For May 2011, there was a positive monthly bias used of 206,000 jobs, up from the revised estimate of 192,000 used in May 2010.  In April, the net bias was a boost of 175,000 jobs.  These upside biases reflect an ongoing assumption of a net positive jobs creation by new companies versus those going out business.  Such becomes a self-fulfilling system, as the upside biases boost financial-market and political needs with relatively good headline data, while also setting up the next year’s downside benchmark revisions, which traditionally are ignored by the media and the politicians.

Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business, on a timely basis (within at least five years, if ever), such information is estimated by the addition of a bias-factor generated by the Birth-Death Model (a model of the effects of new business creation and old business bankruptcies).  The fundamental defects of the Birth-Death Model are discussed as usual in the ensuing paragraphs.

Positive assumptions—commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling—can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with “stronger” economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates, or underlying assumptions of ongoing economic recovery.  Indeed, historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels—to understate employment declines—during recessions.   There is a faulty underlying premise here that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business.  So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, presumed additional “surplus” jobs, created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor.  These add-factors have averaged 40,000 jobs per month over the last 12 months.  I still estimate this monthly bias should be negative by roughly 200,000 or so, on average.  Since it is not, the BLS overestimates monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 240,000 jobs.  Much of that misreporting was not picked up in the 2010 benchmarking, and now will not be corrected until at least the 2011 benchmark revision (based on the upcoming March 2011 benchmarking) to be published in February 2012.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (counting multiple job holders more than once), showed a May 2011 employment gain of 105,000 versus April, which in turn, was down by 190,000 from March.  Unfortunately, issues with seasonal factors also cloud the significance of the reported monthly levels in the adjusted headline U.3 unemployment rate and other adjusted household-survey numbers.  Again, adjusted data have been moved by highly unstable seasonal factors that are artifacts of the severe and extraordinarily protracted downturn in U.S. economic activity, not by the regular and stable seasonal patterns that were in place before the current economic crisis.

The May 2011 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate rose by a statistically-insignificant 0.09 percentage point to 9.05% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from 8.96% in April.  Not-seasonally-adjusted, May’s U.3 unemployment rate held even with April’s at 8.7%.

The May U.6 unemployment rate notched lower to a seasonally-adjusted 15.8% from 15.9% in April, still suffering from seasonal-maladjustment, with some close to 150,000 of the unadjusted short-term discouraged workers in U.6 likely rolling into the nether world of the long-term discouraged worker category in the SGS measure.  The unadjusted U.6 rate fell to 15.4% in May, from 15.5% in April.  The broadest unemployment rate published by the BLS, U.6 includes accounting for those marginally attached to the labor force (including short-term discouraged workers) and those who are employed part-time for economic reasons (they cannot find a full-time job).

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, “discouraged workers”—those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had—were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been “discouraged” for less than a year.  This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers.  The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the SGS estimate of excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed and labor force, unemployment—more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure—held at about 22.3% in May, unchanged from.  The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting, and tends to follow its relative monthly movements. Accordingly, it will suffer some of the current seasonal-adjustment woes afflicting the base series.  See the Alternate Data tab for more detail.

 

 

As discussed in previous writings, while an unemployment rate around 22% might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession.  The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms.  Today, less that 2% work on farms.  Accordingly, for purposes of Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

 

Week Ahead.  Though still not widely acknowledged, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations fully catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Trade Balance (April 2011).  The April trade deficit is due for release on Thursday, June 9th.  Further monthly deterioration is likely both before and after adjustment for inflation.  The deficit reporting remains likely to continue offering worse-than-expected results versus likely consensus estimates.

 

__________

No. 370: GDP Revision, Revised Durable Goods, Home Sales

Thursday, May 26th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 370
GDP Revision, Revised Durable Goods, Home Sales

May 26, 2011

__________

Major Downside Revisions to GDP Loom in Upcoming Benchmark

Durable Goods Orders Revised Lower by 8% in Trough-Year 2009

Housing Activity Disaster Exacerbates Systemic Solvency Issues

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regularly scheduled Commentary is for Friday, June 3rd.  It will cover the unemployment rate and payroll employment reporting for May 2011.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  Most major economic reports in April disappointed consensus expectations and either were flat or negative for the month—including real retail sales, industrial production, housing starts and durable goods orders.  Where first-quarter GDP growth slowed versus the fourth-quarter, the stage is set for the GDP to turn negative, again, sometime in the next two quarters, reflecting what would become an official double-dip recession.  Unfortunately, though, key economic reporting such as retail sales and payroll employment remain so heavily distorted by seasonal-factor gimmicks as to be almost meaningless, at present.  Still, with the July 29th GDP benchmark revisions (and second-quarter GDP “advance estimate”), heavy downside changes to historical data may help to lock-in a renewed downturn pattern for the GDP.

In terms of the latest on that most worthless of series, the small upside revision of 0.09 percentage point (not visible at the first decimal-point level) left reported annualized growth at 1.8%.    Net of the inventory build-up, which eventually should get worked off in reduced production, the GDP growth rate was at an annualized pace of just 0.6%.

April’s new orders for durable goods fell by 3.6%, reflecting the high volatility of the series, but such was in the context of major downward historical revisions from the annual benchmarking process.  The level of new orders in 2009—the purported cycle trough and the end of the recession—was reduced by 8.1%. 

Similar patterns have been seen in revised payrolls, retail sales and industrial production, and all suggest pending hefty downside revisions to the GDP in the benchmark.  These related revisions indicate that the recession has been much deeper than previously reported.  The resulting likely shift in GDP levels should show a deeper trough, with current economic activity having not regained the levels seen before business activity began to plunge.  Current GDP reporting shows that the earlier activity peak has been topped.  Along with the pending shifts in reported GDP should be a shift to even slower growth, or outright contraction, coincident with “advance” second-quarter 2011 GDP estimate.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Housing Woes Impair Systemic-Solvency Resolution.  As shown in the accompanying table, housing activity peaked in 2005.  The ensuing housing slowdown helped drive an economic downturn and systemic solvency crisis, both of which I contend are ongoing.  It was the economy that triggered the mortgage crisis, not the other way around, although the credit and related financial crises certainly exacerbated what became the most severe and protracted economic downturn of the post-Great Depression era.  If the banking system were adequately solvent, credit would be flowing much more easily.  If the banking system were adequately solvent, Mr. Bernanke would not have put forth QE1 and QE2.  There may be those at the Fed and/or in the Administration who hope that a recovery in real estate will resolve the systemic solvency crisis, but such a circumstance is not in the offing.

 

                   Housing Activity–Annual Rate in Thousands of Units

 
             
       

Avg

 

Peak-

 

Peak

   

2011

Last

to-

 

2005

2009

2010

YTD

Apr ‘11

Latest

Housing Starts (1)

2,064

554

587

566

523

-75%

New Home Sales (2)

1,283

375

323

303

323

-75%

Existing Home Sales (2)

7,076

5,156

4,907

5,115

5,050

-29%

             

(1) Trough in annual activity for current cycle was 2009.  (2) Trough in annual activity for current cycle was 2010. 

 

Monthly data are seasonally-adjusted.  Sources: SGS, HUD, Census, NAR.

 

 

Consider that housing starts and new home sales are down 75% from the 2005 peak and are at levels that statistically are indistinguishable from historic lows.  Consider that existing home sales are down 29% from their 2005 peak; that 37% of the April 2011 sales volume was in foreclosure activity; where those buying often are doing so for cash and where mortgage availability is heavily restricted.  Consider the broad economy, which is not recovering and seems to be stagnating at, or turning down anew from a relatively low level of activity.  Consider the lack of consumer liquidity, with household income unable to keep up with rising inflation, and with debt expansion possibilities generally not available.

The Federal Reserve is a private corporation owned by commercial banks or banking interests.  The Fed’s primary job is not to generate sustainable economic growth, nor to contain inflation, but rather to keep the banking system sound and healthy.  Accordingly QE1 and QE2 likely were targeted primarily at addressing systemic solvency issues, with the Fed using the weak economy as cover.

As the systemic solvency crisis continues and/or intensifies, an overt or covert QE3 likely will be in place by third-quarter 2011, under the cover of a deteriorating economy.   The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue unabated.

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

__________________

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

Though Aggregate Growth Appeared Unchanged, Underlying First-Quarter GDP Trends Shifted to the Negative in Revision.  The first-quarter 2011 GDP revision was minimal, with annualized 1.8% real growth unchanged at the first decimal point.  The updated reporting to this most worthless of major economic series, however, reflected weaker personal consumption than initially estimated, offset by a greater, involuntary build-up in inventories.  Net of the increased nonfarm inventories, growth was a revised annualized 0.56% (previously 0.75%); on a straight quarter-to-quarter basis that was a non-annualized quarterly gain of 0.14%.  Further, the sharp deterioration reported in the inflation-adjusted first-quarter 2011 trade deficit still did not surface in the first-quarter GDP estimate.   

Nonetheless the growth pattern likely is being set for the “broadest” measure of U.S. economic activity to slip slowly into double-dip recession status.  That pattern should be exacerbated in the months ahead as key underlying series continue to slow, and as the July 29th annual GDP revisions show recent economic history to have been weaker than currently assumed by the markets (see Opening Comments). 

GDP.  Published today, May 26th, by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the second estimate of, or first revision to, first-quarter 2011 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) showed annualized quarterly growth of 1.84% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval) versus an initial estimate of 1.75%.  Due to rounding, the annualized growth rate increased by nearly 0.1-percentage point, but it remained unchanged at the first decimal point level of 1.8%.  First-quarter growth was down from 3.11% in fourth-quarter 2010.

Year-to-year change in first-quarter 2011 over first-quarter 2010 still continued the slowing trend in annual growth, revising to 2.31% (previously 2.28%), down from 2.78% in the fourth-quarter, and well off the peak reported growth of 3.25% purportedly seen in third-quarter 2010.

The first-quarter GDP implicit price deflator estimate was little changed at an annualized pace of 1.91% (previously 1.90%), versus 0.35% in the fourth-quarter.  In contrast, annualized seasonally-adjusted quarterly inflation for the CPI-U in the first-quarter spiked to a seasonally-adjusted 5.22%, from 2.62% annualized inflation in the fourth-quarter (see Commentary No. 363).  The lower the inflation rate that is used in deflating the GDP, the stronger is the resulting inflation-adjusted number and vice versa.  A slightly more realistic inflation number would have pushed the “advance” quarterly growth rate into negative territory.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for first-quarter 2011 remains an approximate annual contraction of 2.6% versus the official estimate of a 2.3% gain.  Such is more negative than the alternate 2.1% annual contraction (2.8% official gain) in the fourth-quarter (see the Alternate Data tab).  While annualized real quarterly growth is not estimated formally on an alternative basis, a meaningful quarter-to-quarter contraction appears to have been realistic for the first-quarter, in what generally has been a protracted period of business bottom-bouncing.

Reflecting the latest reporting, the following graph shows year-to-year percent change in the official inflation-adjusted quarterly GDP for the history of the series.  The record annual contraction for the series was 4.11%, seen in second-quarter 2009.

 

GNP.  Reflecting distorted positive flows in global interest and dividend payments—induced partially by the ongoing systemic crises—the initial estimate of first-quarter 2011 gross national product (GNP) was for annualized real quarterly growth of 3.10%, up from 2.75% in the fourth-quarter.  Year-to-year growth, however, slowed to 2.49% in the first-quarter, from 2.82% in the fourth-quarter.

GDI.  Gross domestic income (GDI), the income-side equivalent to the consumption-side GDP, showed annualized real quarterly growth of 1.23% (0.51% before prior-period revisions) in initial first-quarter reporting, versus 3.85% in the fourth-quarter.  Year-to-year growth slowed to 2.24% in the first-quarter, from 2.96% in the fourth-quarter.

 

Durable Goods Orders Revised Sharply Lower.  Continuing the patterns seen in benchmark revisions to payroll employment, retail sales and industrial production, the May 13th benchmark revisions to new orders for durable goods showed sharp downside revisions to 2009 levels, with the monthly patterns following the 2009 reductions largely continuing as previously reported, but at reduced levels.  The big hits in the various series’ revisions to 2008 and 2009 are based on new and improved information, such as the 2009 Annual Survey of Manufactures as it relates to durable goods.  Where the post-2009 data have no new information available, other than some paperwork catch-up in late reporting, the underlying assumptions that boosted relative activity in 2010 remain in place, with significant downside revisions likely for 2010 in next year’s benchmark.

Following are the revised data graphed against prior reporting.  The first graph shows seasonally-adjusted monthly data, which can be highly volatile.  The second graph smooths out some of that volatility, using a six-month moving average.  As reported by the Census Bureau, the net revisions to annual levels of new orders for durable goods were as follows:  2007 down by 2.6%; 2008 up by 0.3%; 2009 down by 8.1%; 2010 down by 6.7% (dollar amounts of 2009 and 2010 revisions were the same; percentage changes were against different bases).        

 

 

 

Monthly Durable Goods Orders Take a Hit.  The Census Bureau reported yesterday (May 25th) that the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted April 2011 new orders for durable goods fell by 3.6% (down by 8.9% before prior-period and benchmark revisions) month-to-month, after a revised 4.4% (previously a 2.5%) gain in March.  The monthly decline reflected a 30.0% plunge in irregular, long-term aircraft orders, a category that showed a revised 2.3% (previously 0.9%) monthly increase in March.  Unadjusted, year-to-year change in total April 2011 new orders was a gain of 3.4%, which was sharply lower than the revised annual gain in March of 14.4% (previously 12.2%).  Despite the new 2008 and 2009 numbers, current durable goods reporting remains subject to many of the same sampling and adjustment problems seen with retail sales and payroll reporting.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders fell by 7.3% (down by 7.7% before prior-period and benchmark revisions) in April, versus a revised month-to-month gain of 5.0% (previously up by 3.2%) in March.  For April, the unadjusted year-to-year growth in the series was 3.5%, down sharply from the 20.7% annual growth estimated initially for March.

 

Home Sales Reflect Ongoing Housing-Industry Disaster.  Generally consistent with the down-trending bottom-bounce seen in April housing starts (see Commentary No. 369), April home sales showed no meaningful movement towards recovery.  As discussed in the Opening Comments, the ongoing crises in the real estate markets remain unhappy underpinnings to the still-evolving systemic solvency crisis, with housing starts and new home sales (including related foreclosures) down 75% from their 2005 peak.  The 29% decline in existing home sales from 2005 includes an April 2011 sales level encompassing 37% foreclosures.

Existing- and new-home sales moved in different directions in April 2011, but the reported monthly gain in new homes was not statistically significant, although the reported year-to-year decline continued to be meaningful.  The pattern of bottom-bouncing in industry sales continued, with the distressed or foreclosed portion of existing-home sales shy of March’s 40%.   

Wednesday’s (May 24th) reporting of April new-home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) showed a statistically-insignificant monthly gain of 7.3% (up 7.7% before prior-period revisions) +/- 19.4% (95% confidence interval) from March.  March’s revised level was up by 8.3% (previously up by 11.1%) from February.  The year-to-year decline in April 2011 new-home sales was a statistically-significant 23.1% +/- 11.3% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 21.6% (previously 21.9%) decline in March.  The April release included minimal annual revisions to the seasonally-adjusted series.

The May 19th release of April existing-home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) showed a 0.8% monthly decline (down by 1.0% net of prior-period revisions), versus March’s revised 3.5% (previously 3.7%) monthly increase.  On a year-to-year basis, April sales were down by 5.0%, versus a 6.1% (previously 5.9%) annual decline in March.

Foreclosure activity remained a major distorting factor for home sales, with "distressed" activity accounting for an estimated 37% of existing sales in the NAR’s April reporting, down from the 40% estimated for March (that was the highest portion seen since Spring 2009).

 

Separately, the Census Bureau acknowledges that a portion of new home sales also is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimate as to the scope of the issue.  Some in the construction trade have difficulty competing with the pricing of foreclosed properties.  Until the foreclosure problems get worked out in the system, monthly changes in these home sales numbers cannot be taken as meaningful positive indicators (when the numbers are positive) of underlying activity in homeowner real estate, as it relates to general economic activity.

 

Week Ahead.  Though not yet commonly recognized, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions. 

Employment and Unemployment (May 2011).  The first major economic release for May is the report on labor market conditions, scheduled for publication on Friday, June 3rd.  With most major economic reporting having come in on the downside of expectations in April, odds are increased for negative surprises to what likely will be relatively positive consensus forecasts for payrolls and unemployment.  Given the ongoing monthly concurrent-seasonal-factor distortions in payroll reporting, an outright payroll contraction could be reported any time, although most reporting here likely will be without significance.  The headline unemployment rate is due for further upside movement.

 

__________

No. 369: April Housing Starts, Industrial Production

Tuesday, May 17th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 369
April Housing Starts, Industrial Production

May 17, 2011

__________

Housing Starts Under Downside Pressure

April Production Stalled Amid Hefty Negative Revisions

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regularly scheduled Commentary is for Thursday, May 26th.  It will cover the first revision to first-quarter GDP, April new orders for durable goods and home sales.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  The U.S. economy is not in recovery, and what ever upside bouncing there was in retail sales and industrial production increasingly appears to have been transient in nature.  In this morning’s (May 17th) reporting, April 2011 housing starts continued their broad downtrend, bouncing downhill in renewed deterioration.  More important than the statistically-insignificant monthly decline of 10.6%, the annual decline of 23.9% was significant, and the six-month moving-average has declined for the last three months, pushing the historic low level seen in April 2009.

Along with meaningful downside revisions to prior reporting (all post-benchmark), the Fed reported April 2011 industrial production to have been flat for the month, with the manufacturing component down by 0.4%.  Without economic weakness being shifted in revision to earlier periods, the aggregate production index would have fallen by 0.5% for the month in April, with manufacturing production down by 1.1%. 

In tandem with last week’s reporting of retail sales activity gaining less than 0.1%, net of higher prices (see Commentary No. 368), production activity appears to have stalled, with housing and consumer liquidity issues leading general economic activity into what eventually should be recognized as a double-dip recession.  A note of caution continues as to the seasonal-factor distortions in, and the related reporting quality of retail sales.  Nonetheless, the broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue unabated.

__________

 

REPORTING DETAIL

April Housing Starts Were Consistent with a Deteriorating Economy.  The regularly volatile housing starts series remained in a down-trending bottom-bounce, after minimal seasonal-factor revisions back through January 2009.  The Census Bureau reported this morning, May 17th, a statistically-insignificant monthly decline of 10.6% +/- 15.2% (95% confidence interval) in seasonally-adjusted April 2011 housing starts; the decline was 5.7% before prior-period revisions.  March starts were revised to a 12.9% (previously a 7.2%) monthly gain.  Year-to-year change in April housing starts was a statistically-significant decline of 23.9% +/- 8.2% (95% confidence interval), following a revised annual 6.5% (previously 13.4%) decline in March.

Although the pattern of housing starts remains one of bottom-bouncing at an historically low-level plateau of activity, as seen over the last 29 months, recent activity has started to turn down anew, meaningfully.   The six-month moving-average of seasonally-adjusted housing starts has declined for the last three months; it is at its lowest level since August 2009, and it is closing in on the historic low average seen in April 2009.  Significantly weaker monthly numbers remain likely in the months ahead.  Since December 2008, housing starts have averaged a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 569,000.  In that period, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, with the 523,000 April 2011 monthly reading at 8.1% below average.

As shown in the following graphs, current monthly housing starts activity remains near the record low for the present series seen in April 2009.  The current number also is well below any level reported in the predecessor nonfarm housing starts series, which was introduced in 1946.  Housing starts appear to be rolling downhill, anew, and that should be reflected with increasing clarity in the next several months of reporting.  The first graph shows current housing starts activity within the historical context of the post-World War II period.  The second graph shows recent detail for the same data.

 

 

 

April Industrial Production Stalled As Prior Months Were Revised Lower.  This morning’s (May 17th) Federal Reserve Board release of seasonally-adjusted April 2011 industrial production showed aggregate production to be unchanged (down 0.5% net of prior-period revisions) versus March, with manufacturing tumbling by 0.4% in April.  In turn the aggregate March index was revised to a 0.7% (previously 0.8%) monthly gain.  The revisions the April report all were post-benchmark revisions, with the largest change showing the previously reported 0.1% monthly gain in February 2011 now being a 0.3% contraction.

Year-to-year change in April 2011 production was 5.0%, down from a revised 5.3% (previously 5.9%) gain in March.  The year-to-year contraction of 14.9% seen in June 2009 was the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II.

The “recovery” in industrial production is reflected in the following graphs.  Both graphs show the monthly level of the production index.  The first graph shows the data in historical context since World War II.  The second graph shows the same numbers in clearer detail for the current period beginning in 2000.

For the last 30 months, the production index has averaged 88.9, around which the series has fluctuated, although it generally has been moving higher in recent months.  The April reading was at 93.1.

 

 

 

Week Ahead.  Though not yet commonly recognized, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions, benchmark or otherwise. 

Home Sales (April 2011).  April existing home sales (National Association of Realtors) are due for release on Thursday, May 19th, followed by new home sales (Census Bureau) on Tuesday, May 24th.  As with the continuing broad deterioration seen in housing starts, these volatile series should remain extremely weak, with any positive monthly change (new homes) again lacking statistical significance.  Also, as usual, given the extreme volatility, reporting error and revisions in these series, given the poor-quality seasonal adjustments, given continuing negative anecdotal evidence, and given ongoing massive distortions from increasingly volatile foreclosure activity, the monthly movements in these numbers (particularly to the upside) remain meaningless.

New Orders for Durable Goods (April 2011).  Due for release on Wednesday, May 25th, April’s new orders for durable goods likely will not show a meaningful monthly change, with odds slightly favoring a decline in this irregularly volatile series.

Gross Domestic Product—GDP (First-Quarter 2011—First Revision or Second Estimate).  The first revised estimate of first-quarter GDP is due for release on Thursday, May 26th.  A major revision is not apparent from late reporting of underlying series, although a full accounting of first-quarter trade data should have had the prior “advance” estimate in contraction, rather than at the reported 1.8% annualized real growth rate.  

 

__________

No. 368: April Inflation, Retail Sales, Trade Deficit

Friday, May 13th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 368
April Inflation, Retail Sales, Trade Deficit

May 13, 2011

__________

April Year-to-Year Consumer Inflation: 3.2% (CPI-U), 3.6% (CPI-W), 10.7% (SGS)

Fed’s Dollar Debasement Efforts Boost Three-Month CPI Inflation
into 6% to 7% Range

 Official Double-Digit Consumer Inflation Possible in Third-Quarter

With Rising Prices Dominating Sales Gains,
“Core” Retail Sales Were Unchanged in April

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regularly scheduled Commentary is for Tuesday, May 17th.  It will cover April housing starts and industrial production.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Warnng:  Due to a technical issue, the charts on this web-page are smaller than we wish them to be.  We are working to remedy the situation, and meanwhile ask for your patience.  We recommend using the PDF file (available via link above) which contains larger images.

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  Inflation fears are mounting quickly, as consumers feel a tightening financial squeeze and as the government’s statistics show an increasingly serious problem with consumer and wholesale prices.  The extreme monetary and fiscal actions taken by the federal government and the Federal Reserve to prevent a systemic collapse in September 2008 all had an ultimate cost: inflation.  Yet in mid-2011 the systemic liquidity crisis still is ongoing and the bottom-bouncing economy has started to teeter anew into the abyss of a “double-dip” for the most severe and protracted economic downturn since the Great Depression.  It is these concerns—particularly the banking-system’s liquidity issues—that have forced the Fed into QE2 and likely have the Fed set for some form of QE3 in the not-too-distant future.

It is these actions by the Fed to debase the U.S. dollar that have been primarily responsible for pushing annual inflation in the headline CPI-U measure above 3% for the first time since September 2008.  When Mr. Bernanke began to destabilize the U.S. dollar with his jawboning, before introducing QE2 in late-2010, annual headline inflation was around 1.1%.  That hit 3.2% in today’s (May 13th) reporting for April 2011.  (The wage-earner-based CPI-W hit 3.6%.)  Annualized consumer inflation for the last three months (versus the prior three-month period) has moved into the 6% to 7% range, making annualized double-digit inflation a good bet by the end of third-quarter 2011, despite near-term extreme volatility in U.S. dollar-based oil and gasoline prices.  Even “core” inflation (net of food and energy) is creeping higher.

Where consumer incomes generally are not rising at pace that will keep up with officially reported inflation, many households are suffering a liquidity squeeze and increasingly have been forced to cut back on less-necessary spending.  That was reflected in April’s retail sales, where all the reported gains were in sales at grocery stories and gas stations, reflecting the gains in food and gasoline prices, not in generally greater physical consumption of goods and services.

Keep in mind that official consumer inflation numbers no longer reflect what an individual needs in income or investment return to maintain a constant standard of living.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS)—under Congressional direction—has altered the CPI in recent years so as no longer measure the cost of maintaining a constant standard of living.  Those issues are addressed in the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures, where, based on reporting of 1990, the April 2011 official annual inflation rate of 3.2%, would have been about 6.5% without altered methodologies, and where, based on reporting of 1980, the April 2011 annual inflation rate would have been about 10.7%.

At the wholesale level, annualized three-month PPI inflation is in double-digits, up by 13.1% as of April’s reporting.  Annual inflation rose to 6.8%, a post-September 2008 high, with “core” inflation on the rise.

In other reporting of the last week, the March trade deficit widened sharply, due at least partially to higher prices for imported oil.  The net trade deficit deterioration should add to the fundamental selling pressures against the U.S. dollar.  Net of inflation, however, the first-quarter’s deficit was about as suggested last month, so there likely will be no major change from the trade factors in the May 26th revision to the first-quarter 2011 GDP estimate.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Underlying Fundamentals Unchanged As Inflation Woes Mount.   The broad inflation and economic outlooks discussed in Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue unabated.  The underlying pace of official inflation is accelerating, and could move into double-digits in third-quarter 2011.  Preceding or coincident with that likely will have been some move to QE3 by the Fed and intense—if not panicked—selling of the U.S. dollar and dollar-denominated assets.  Such a circumstance could be a base from which a hyperinflation might begin to unfold with some rapidity.

The wild market gyrations in certain commodity prices during the last week or two should stabilize at some point, with oil, gold and silver fully resuming their long-term uptrends.  The underlying fundamentals here of persistent U.S. dollar debasemen; a federal government with its fiscal conditions out of control; a U.S. economy not in recovery but heading into renewed contraction; all remain in play.  

 

 

 

__________

 

 

REPORTING DETAIL

 

Annual CPI-U Inflation Tops 3%, Straining Consumer Finances.  The ongoing effects of the Federal Reserve’s actions to debase the U.S. dollar have been the primary force behind pushing headline annual consumer inflation above 3% to a two-plus year high.  When Mr. Bernanke began jawboning the U.S. dollar down against other currencies, before introducing QE2 in late-2010, annual headline inflation was around 1.1%.  That hit 3.2% in today’s (May 13th) reporting for the April 2011 CPI-U, along with a slow upturn in “core” inflation (net of food and energy prices).  With annualized consumer inflation for the last three months (versus the prior three-month period) having moved into the 6% to 7% range, double-digit inflation is a good bet by the end of third-quarter 2011, despite near-term extreme volatility in U.S. dollar-based oil and gasoline prices.  The fundamental pressures against the U.S. currency, and non-economic-demand-driven inflationary pressures, are likely to accelerate in the months ahead. 

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported today (May 13th) that the seasonally-adjusted April 2011 CPI-U rose by 0.42% (up by 0.64%, unadjusted) for the month.  That followed an increase of 0.55% (up by 0.98%, unadjusted) in March.  The April reporting reflected an unadjusted monthly increase in gasoline prices of 7.5%, which was reduced to a 3.3% monthly gain by ongoing happy seasonal adjustments.    

The pace of annualized, seasonally-adjusted, CPI-U inflation continued to accelerate in the most recent three months (ended April) to 6.01% inflation, versus 5.22% in first-quarter 2011. 

April’s unadjusted year-to-year CPI-U inflation surged once again, to 3.16%, the strongest pace of annual inflation since September 2008.  April’s annual inflation rate was up from 2.68% in March.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s May 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.14% contraction in the adjusted monthly level reported for May 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for May 2011, the difference in May’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from April 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 3.16%.  Annual CPI-U inflation should move to top 4% in the next several months.  The CPI-W already was at 3.64% as of today’s reporting.

CPI-W.  The narrower, seasonally-adjusted CPI-W, which has greater weighting for gasoline than does the CPI-U, rose in April 2011 by 0.50% (up 0.78%% unadjusted), following March’s adjusted monthly increase of 0.62% (up 1.14% unadjusted). 

The pace of annualized, seasonally-adjusted, CPI-W inflation continued to accelerate in the most recent three months (ended April) to 7.01% inflation, versus 6.04% in first-quarter 2011.   

Unadjusted, April 2011’s year-to-year CPI-W inflation was 3.64%, against a 3.04% annual increase in March.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U—the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists, including the recent presidential deficit commission, as the replacement for the CPI—is reported only on an unadjusted basis.  Year-to-year inflation increased to 2.92% in April 2011 versus 2.46% in March.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 6.5% in April 2011, up from 6.0% in March, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to about 10.7% (10.69 % for those using the extra digit) in April, from about 10.2% in March. 

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation. Despite the May 4th historic-high gold price of $1,541.00 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix) and a new multi-decade high silver price of at $48.70 per troy ounce (London fix of April 28th), gold and silver prices have yet to approach their 1980 historic levels, adjusted for inflation.  The earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 would be $2,457 per troy ounce, based on April 2011 CPI-U-adjusted dollars, $8,386 per troy ounce based on SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (all series not seasonally adjusted). 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org), although approached recently, still has not been hit since 1980, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars.  Based on April 2011 CPI-U inflation, the 1980 silver price peak would be $143 per troy ounce and would be $488 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (again, all series not seasonally adjusted).

As shown on page 43 of the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), over the decades, the price of gold has compensated for more than the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the dollar based on the SGS-Alternate Consumer Price Measure (1980 Methodologies Base).

Real Money Supply M3.  The signal of the still unfolding double-dip recession, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), most recently discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), continues and is graphed below.  Based on the April CPI-U report and the latest April SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate, the annual contraction in real M3 for April 2011 was 2.6%, versus a 3.6% annual contraction in March.

 

 

The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn or its duration.  The current downturn signal was generated in December 2009.  The broad economy tends to follow in downturn or renewed deterioration roughly six-to-nine months after the signal, as has appeared to have started in recent months.  Increasing weakness in a number of series should become evident in the months ahead, with the scheduled July benchmark revisions to GDP likely to show much weaker economic activity for the last year or two than currently is reported.  Such eventually will lead to recognition of a double-dip recession.

 

PPI Gain in April Muted Again by Seasonal Adjustments.   As reported yesterday, May 12th, by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) rose in April 2011 by 0.8% (up by 1.2% before seasonal adjustment) month-to-month, following a monthly increase of 0.7% in February (up by 1.3% before seasonal adjustment).  The adjusted monthly PPI finished goods again largely reflected upside pressures from energy and increasing “core” prices, with a renewed gain indicated for food prices.  The higher prices generally reflected ongoing impact of the Fed’s dollar-debasement policies.  With reported monthly inflation heavily reduced by seasonal adjustments to energy costs, the heaviest impact from rising oil prices is still ahead, despite recent gyrations in oil market prices.

Annualized, seasonally-adjusted PPI inflation for the three months ended April 2011 held at 13.1% the same level as in first-quarter 2011.  Unadjusted and year-to-year, April 2011’s PPI inflation jumped to 6.8%—the highest level since September 2008—up from 5.8% in March. 

Separately, on a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted April 2011 intermediate goods rose by 1.3% (up by 1.5% in March), with April’s crude goods prices up by 4.0%, after falling by 0.5% in March. 

Year-to-year inflation in April intermediate goods was up by 9.4% (an 8.9% gain in March), with April’s annual inflation in crude goods at 23.7% (up by 16.4% in March).

 

“Core” Real Retail Sales Were Unchanged.  As discussed in Commentary No. 366, the benchmark retail sales revision showed a weaker pattern of activity in recent years, in line with other downside benchmark revisions to nonfarm payrolls and industrial production.  The most recent reporting patterns remained in play, however, continuing what had been overly optimistic upside biases that otherwise were shown to be wrong by the better-quality and more-complete data for 2009.  Accordingly, similar downside revisions are likely again next year for 2010’s results. 

The reported monthly gain in April retail sales was due largely to rising prices.  As noted below, the “core” pace retail sales—net of food and energy sales—was unchanged for the month.     

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Retail SalesYesterday’s (May 12th) April 2011 retail sales report—issued by the Census Bureau—indicated a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.51% (unchanged versus prior-period benchmark revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised March monthly gain (post-benchmark reporting and prior-period reporting) of 0.87%.  March initially was reported with an increase of 0.39%.  At work here remain extreme seasonal-factor distortions as discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011).

On a year-to-year basis, April 2011 retail sales were reported up by 7.57% from April 2010, versus a benchmark-revised year-to-year March 2011 gain of 7.63%. 

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Retail Sales.  Based on the April 2011 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly April 2011 retail sales increased by 0.09%, where, before inflation adjustment, the current number was up by 0.51%.  Real March sales revised to an increase of 0.32% (a revamped gain of 0.87% before inflation adjustment).

April’s real retail sales rose at a year-to-year pace of 4.32%, slowing from a revised 4.81% annual gain reported for March. 

 

 

 

 

The ongoing “recovery” in real retail sales is reflected in the preceding graphs.  The first graph is updated to show the recent benchmark revision adjusted for the latest monthly estimate and monthly revisions.  The two subsequent plots both show the latest monthly levels (including all revisions) of seasonally-adjusted activity.  The first of those shows the data in historical context since World War II.  The second shows the same numbers in clearer detail for the current period beginning in 2000.  

Using the SGS Alternate-CPI Inflation estimates for deflation of the retail series would not show an ongoing rise in activity for the last year or so.  It is my preference here, and wherever otherwise possible, to use the official estimates (the series here is as calculated by the St. Louis Fed), since that eliminates a level of argument over what is being reported.  As official consumer inflation picks up, and as overall retail sales suffers from the ongoing consumer liquidity squeeze, these data also should turn down, confirming what will become eventually an official and formal double-dip recession. 

There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity—no recovery—just general bottom-bouncing.  Accordingly, real retail sales levels in the months ahead should turn increasingly negative.

Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, “core” retail sales—consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when “core” inflation is lower than full inflation—are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: April 2011 versus March 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues—was unchanged (up by 0.03%) versus an official aggregate gain of 0.5%.

Version II: April 2011 versus March 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gas stations—was unchanged (up by 0.02%) versus the aggregate gain of 0.5%.

 

March Trade Deficit Appears Neutral for GDP Revision.  While the greater-than-expected increase in the March trade deficit was fundamentally negative for the foreign-exchange value of the U.S. dollar, some of the gain was from higher oil prices, which muted the net trade deterioration in real or inflation-adjusted terms.  Accordingly, the inflation-adjusted number was in line with last month’s estimates, with likely negligible impact on the first-revision to the first-quarter 2011 GDP estimate.   

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Trade Deficit.  The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported Wednesday (May 11th) that the nominal, seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services for March 2011 widened to $48.2 billion from a revised $45.4 (previously $45.8) billion in February.  The March 2011 deficit also widened from $39.7 billion a year ago.

Against February 2011, the March trade balance showed gains in both exports and imports, with the import jump much larger than that for exports.  Part of the import gain was in oil, reflecting both higher prices and rising physical volume.  Specifically, for the month of March 2011, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $93.76 per barrel, up from $87.17 in February 2011, and up from $74.32 in March 2010.  In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, March 2011 volume averaged 9.520 million barrels per day, versus 8.656 million in February 2011, but it was down from 9.660 million in March 2010.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit.  Adjusted for seasonal factors and net of rising oil prices and other inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the reported March 2011 merchandise trade deficit came in at $50.1 billion, up from a revised $49.3 (previously $49.5) billion in February.

The real first-quarter 2011 merchandise deficit now annualizes out to $598.4 billion ($598.3 billion was the estimate based only on initial January and February reporting available for the “advance” GDP).  That remains up meaningfully from the fourth-quarter goods deficit, which was at a revised annualized pace of $545.0 (previously $543.3) billion.  Recent net-export accounting in the GDP appears to have ignored the underlying monthly trade data as reported here, with the reported quarterly trade deterioration suggesting the advance GDP estimate for first-quarter 2011 should be weaker than has been estimated officially.  The full first-quarter trade numbers, however, are not enough different from earlier reporting to suggest a major revision.

 

Week Ahead.  Though not yet commonly recognized, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions, benchmark or otherwise. 

Residential Construction (April 2011).  Due for release on Tuesday, May 17th, April housing starts should continue to decline, pushing towards or setting new historic lows.  As usual, any reported upside movement likely will remain statistically indistinguishable from a contraction.

Industrial Production (April 2011).  Due for release on Tuesday, May 17th, April industrial production increasingly should reflect a slowing economy, with a downside reporting surprise a fair bet for what likely will reasonably strong consensus expectations.

__________

No. 367: April Labor Numbers, Money Supply, Dollar and Precious Metals

Friday, May 6th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 367
April Labor Numbers, Money Supply, Dollar and Precious Metals

May 6, 2011

__________

Increasingly Misleading Seasonal-Factors
Continued to Pummel Accuracy of Jobs Data

April Household Survey Showed 190,000 Employment Drop

April Unemployment Rates: 9.0% (U.3), 15.9% (U.6), 22.3% (SGS)

Broad Money Supply Gains in April

Underlying Inflation, Dollar and Precious Metals Fundamentals Unchanged

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regularly scheduled Commentary is for Friday, May 13th.  It will cover April inflation (CPI and PPI) and retail sales, and the March trade deficit.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Opening Comments and Executive Summary.  The extreme volatility seen in the price of silver—exacerbated by tightened margin requirements—and the large swings in the price of gold, price of oil and in certain U.S. dollar exchange rates, do not in any way change the long-term outlooks for the U.S. dollar or for the long-term hedges against a collapse in U.S. dollar purchasing power.  The current markets leave open the potential for near-term jawboning (official or through market intermediaries) and government intervention (overt or covert) to encourage relative U.S. dollar strength.  Despite whatever volatility there may be, the U.S. dollar remains on track for an eventual complete collapse in a hyperinflation, and the roots of that hyperinflation remain imbedded in the system.  The primary hedge against losing U.S. dollar purchasing power remains physical gold (and silver), with some funds outside the U.S. dollar.  As discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), I still like the Swiss franc, Canadian dollar and Australian dollar.   

Labor Data.  On the economic front, the broad outlook is unchanged.  The nonsensical market gyrations and hype around yesterday’s (May 5th) jump in jobless claims speaks to the manipulations, ignorance or insanity in the current markets.  As I have discussed frequently and as is recognized fairly widely, big weekly swings in jobless claims commonly reflect nothing other than the Department of Labor’s demonstrated inability to seasonally-adjust these numbers around holidays.  The period in question encompassed Easter and followed Good Friday.

Today (May 6th), stocks are soaring as we go to press, purportedly due to an upside surprise in April nonfarm payroll growth, a gain of 244,000.  As has been the case for months, though, reported changes in the monthly labor data usually are not statistically significant, and they were not so today.

Given the increasing level of concurrent seasonal-factor adjustment distortions, and the sharp upside adjustment to April’s birth-death model bias-factor, the reported payroll gain was not meaningful.  Following the plunge in payrolls in the early part of the economic downturn, a protracted period of bottom-bouncing commenced.  Year-to-year change in the reported bottom-bouncing now has flattened out at about one-percent, and nonfarm payrolls still are below where they were ten years ago.

In contrast to the 244,000 gain in payrolls, the household (unemployment) survey showed a 190,000 decline in monthly employment, but that also was not meaningful.

Heavily warped by its own poor-quality seasonal adjustments, the headline U.3 unemployment rate rose to 8.96% in April, from 8.83% in March, an increase that was not statistically significant.  The adjusted broader U.6 unemployment rate rose to 15.9% in April, versus March, while the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure picked up some disappearing short-term discouraged workers, rising to 22.3% from 22.0% in March.   

 

Hyperinflation Watch—QE2 and M3.   In Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke’s April 27th news conference, he confirmed the FOMC announcement of the same date that the Fed would cease QE2—buying U.S. Treasury securities—as planned in June.  Shown in the accompanying graph, thanks to QE2, the Fed effectively has monetized more than the entire net issuance of U.S. Treasury debt (to be held by the public) during the last five months.  Ostensibly, the Fed has done this in an effort to stimulate the economy and to debase the U.S. dollar (create inflation).  While the Fed has little chance of turning the economy to sustainable economic growth, it has been successful in triggering an upturn in consumer inflation.  That has been seen in recent months and likely will be reconfirmed in the week ahead.

I contend that the Fed’s liquidity actions are tied more banking system solvency concerns than to the economy, which continues to stagnate, where elements such as construction are showing renewed economic contraction, after a period of extensive bottom-bouncing.  Disappointing economic activity likely will provide the public excuse for QE3, although, again, systemic solvency likely will continue as the Fed’s primary concern.  From a monetization standpoint, a hiatus in net Treasury issuance could be in place for the next five months or so, so long as action is forestalled on raising the federal debt ceiling.

 

The Fed’s effective full monetization of U.S. Treasury debt could be expected to trigger some increase in broad money supply (M3) growth.  Whether the Treasuries are bought directly from the Treasury or from holding institutions, the effective cash flows through the Treasury to the public and generally are deposited in the banking system.  Whether or not the banking system increases lending in response to the deposits, however, is another issue.  In any event, the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate has started to grow.

The general outlooks on inflation, systemic solvency and the broad economy, as discussed in Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) continue unabated.

SGS Ongoing-M3 April Estimate on Track to Show Annual and Monthly Gains.  The preliminary estimate for the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate for April will be published tomorrow (May 7th) in the Alternate Data section.  At present, the series is on track for year-to-year growth of about 0.5%, versus a 0.9% annual decline in March.  The April result would be the first annual increase since November 2009.  Monthly change also is headed for a likely gain, possibly the strongest monthly pick-up since May 2009.

Net of inflation adjustment, annual growth will remain negative at present, and the early pick-up here does not change the economic outlook whatsoever.  If nominal (not adjusted for inflation) growth accelerates in the months ahead, however, that could raise a caution signal on inflation, depending on what is happening with the U.S. dollar.

 

__________


REPORTING DETAIL

Increasingly Distorted Seasonal Factors Shift Jobs from 2nd- and 3rd-Quarter 2010 to More-Current Reporting.  As discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), the extreme severity of the current economic downturn—both in terms of depth and duration—distorted regular month-to-month reporting of seasonally-adjusted series, including the headline U.3 unemployment rate and particularly the nonfarm payroll employment, which is adjusted using concurrent seasonal-factor calculations. 

 

While the BLS recalculates the monthly seasonal factors each month for payroll employment, going back a number of years, it only publishes revised data for the last two months of reporting (February and March 2011 with the April 2011 report).  What is shown in the preceding graph is that these concurrent seasonal factor changes increasingly have reduced levels of payrolls in the second- and third- quarter of 2010, shifting adjusted jobs to the most recent period.  The most recent boosted number gets reported as the base for current reporting, while the downward revisions to mid-2010 are not published, so as to avoid “confusing” people who use the data.  

Meaningful seasonal-adjustments tend to be stable over time, without wild fluctuations every time the seasonals are re-estimated.  This is true particularly for series like payroll employment and retail sales where the seasonal factors are concurrent—recalculated each month for the current month’s raw data.  If the payroll seasonals were stable, the lines in the preceding graph would be flat and coincident. 

Instead, the monthly recalculations of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels show irregular revisions, with monthly swings of plus or minus 60,000 jobs shifting over time.  To the extent the numbers affect current reporting, the differences are enough potentially to alter financial-market perceptions and reactions. 

Again, what has happened here is largely a distortion created by the extreme severity of the economic downturn, which disrupted regular seasonal patterns and calculations of related seasonal adjustments.  The big issue remains that the month-to-month seasonally-adjusted payroll data have become increasingly worthless, with errors likely now well beyond the 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000 jobs in the reported monthly payroll change.  Yet the media and the markets tout the data as meaningful, usually without question or qualification (see Commentary No. 355 for greater detail).

The inconsistency differences in the graph were calculated based on the raw data and the seasonal-adjustment program available to the public on the BLS Web site.  Using the BLS data, we have calculated the seasonally-adjusted numbers as the BLS should be showing them, as of the current reporting, and the differences between official reporting and the consistent seasonally-adjusted series.

Payroll Survey Detail.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted April 2011 jobs gain of 244,000 (an increase of 290,000 jobs before prior-period revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval).  March payrolls showed a revised 221,000 (previously 216,000) gain.  Yet, as discussed earlier, much of the gain and upside revision was only to a recasting of seasonal adjustment factors that borrowed seasonally-adjusted jobs from earlier months, where the downside monthly revisions were not published by the BLS.

In terms of year-to-year change, the unadjusted April 2011 number was reported up by 1.07% from the year before, little changed from the revised 1.04% (previously 1.03%) year-to-year change reported for March.

Although the graphs of long-term year-to-year unadjusted payroll change had shown a recent rising increase in annual growth, which primarily reflected the still-protracted bottom-bouncing in the payroll series, that pattern has flattened out in the last several months, as shown in the first graph following of the near-term detail in year-to-year change. 

 

 

 

As shown in the preceding longer-term graph (historical detail back to World War II), with the bottom-bouncing of recent years, current annual growth has recovered from the post-World War II record 5.06% decline in August 2009, which was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II (a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945).  Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the August 2009 annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression, and the current level of employment is far from any recovery.

 

In the above plot of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels (as reported by the BLS) the current level of nonfarm payrolls shows no recovery to pre-recession highs.  The data continue to reflect bouncing along a plateau of low-level activity, with the latest payroll level still well below where it was a decade ago, even though the U.S. population has increased by 10% in the same period. 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  Despite the ongoing and regular overstatement of monthly payroll employment—as evidenced by the regular and massive, annual downward benchmark revisions to the reported payroll numbers—the BLS keeps upping its monthly biases in post-benchmark reporting.  For April 2011, there was a positive monthly bias used of 175,000 jobs, up from the revised estimate of 141,000 used in April 2010.  In March, the net bias was a boost of 119,000 jobs.  These upside biases reflect an ongoing assumption of a net positive jobs creation by new companies versus those going out business.  Such becomes a self-fulfilling system, as the upside biases boost financial-market and political needs with relatively good headline data, while also setting up the next year’s downside benchmark revisions, which traditionally are ignored by the media and the politicians.

Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business, on a timely basis (within at least five years, if ever), such information is estimated by the addition of a bias-factor generated by the Birth-Death Model (a model of the effects of new business creation and old business bankruptcies).  The fundamental defects of the Birth-Death Model are discussed as usual in the ensuing paragraphs.

Positive assumptions—commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling—can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with “stronger” economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates, or underlying assumptions of ongoing economic recovery.  Indeed, historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels—to understate employment declines—during recessions.   There is a faulty underlying premise here that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business.  So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, presumed additional “surplus” jobs, created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor.  These add-factors likely are running now above 30,000 per month (seasonally-adjusted).  I still estimate this monthly bias should be negative by 200,000 or so, on average.  Since it is not, the BLS continues regularly to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 230,000 jobs.  Much of that misreporting, which was not picked up in the 2010 benchmarking, now will not be corrected until at least the 2011 benchmark revision (based on the upcoming March 2011 benchmarking) to be published in February 2012.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (counting multiple job holders more than once), showed an April 2011 employment decline of 190,000 from March.  In turn, March had been reported up by 291,000 from February.  Nonetheless, issues with seasonal factors also cloud the significance of the reported monthly levels in the adjusted headline U.3 unemployment rate and other adjusted household-survey numbers.  Again, adjusted data have been moved by highly unstable seasonal factors that are artifacts of the severe and extraordinarily protracted downturn in U.S. economic activity, not by the regular and stable seasonal patterns that were in place before the current economic crisis.

The April 2011 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate rose by a statistically-insignificant 0.14 percentage point to 8.96% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from 8.83% in March.  Not-seasonally-adjusted, April’s U.3 unemployment fell to 8.7% from 9.2% in March.

The April U.6 unemployment rate rose to a seasonally-adjusted 15.9% from 15.7% in March, still suffering from seasonal-maladjustment, with some of the unadjusted short-term discouraged workers in U.6 rolling into the long-term discouraged worker category in the SGS measure.  The unadjusted U.6 rate fell to 15.5% in April, from 16.2% in March.  The broadest unemployment rate published by the BLS, U.6 includes accounting for those marginally attached to the labor force (including short-term discouraged workers) and those who are employed part-time for economic reasons (they cannot find a full-time job).

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, “discouraged workers”—those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had—were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been “discouraged” for less than a year.  This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers.  The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the SGS estimate of excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed and labor force, unemployment—more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure—moved higher to about 22.3% in April, from 22.0% in March.  The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting, and tends to follow its relative monthly movements.  Accordingly, it will suffer some of the current seasonal-adjustment woes afflicting the base series.  See the Alternate Data tab for more detail.

 

As discussed in previous writings, while an unemployment rate around 22% might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession.  The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms.  Today, less that 2% work on farms.  Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

 

Week Ahead.  Though not yet commonly recognized, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions, benchmark or otherwise. 

SGS Ongoing M3 Estimate (April 2011).  The preliminary estimate of the April 2011 SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate will be posted in the Alternate Data section, tomorrow, May 7th.  As discussed earlier, year-to-year and month-to-month gains are likely.

Trade Balance (March 2011).  Due for release on Wednesday, May 11th, any unexpected improvement or deterioration in the March trade deficit should impact the first revision to first-quarter 2011 GDP scheduled for May 26th.  I expect a possible widening deficit (negative GDP implications) for this highly volatile series.

Retail Sales (April 2011).  Due for release on Thursday, May 12th, reporting risk is to the downside of what likely will be reasonably strong expectations.  A fair bet is that whatever gain may be reported will be more than offset by CPI-U inflation in the month.

Producer Price Index—PPI (April 2011).  Due for release on Thursday, May 12th, this volatile series once again is due to have reported energy inflation muted by seasonal factors.  Nonetheless there is some risk for an upside surprise versus what likely will be somewhat tepid expectations.

Consumer Price Index—CPI (April 2011).  Due for release on Friday, May 13th, the series is at risk of surprising likely muted expectations on the upside.  In April 2010, seasonal adjustments turned an unadjusted 2.9% monthly gain in gasoline prices to a 2.4% adjusted monthly decline.  With gasoline prices up about 7% for the month of April 2011, that likely still will be a gain after seasonal adjustment.  The spreading effects of higher oil and food prices should be picking up in reported “core” (net of food and energy) inflation, which is where an upside surprise is a fair bet.

Year-to-year CPI-U inflation would increase or decrease in April 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the unchanged adjusted monthly level seen in April 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for April 2011, the difference in April’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from March 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 2.68%.  A monthly gain of 0.3% in monthly CPI-U, for example, would push annual CPI-U inflation to 3%.

 

__________

No. 366: First-Quarter GDP, Retail Sales Revisions, Hyperinflation Watch

Friday, April 29th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 366
First-Quarter GDP, Retail Sales Revisions, Hyperinflation Watch

April 29, 2011

__________

Historical Retail Sales Revised Lower

First-Quarter GDP “Growth” Statistically Indistinguishable from Contraction

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regularly scheduled Commentary is for Friday, May 6th.  It will cover the release of the April 2011 unemployment rate and payroll employment estimates.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

With Lowered Retail Sales, Economy Also Slowed Anew in Otherwise Questionable GDP Reporting.  Confirming a deeper than previously estimated downturn, today’s (April 29th) annual benchmark revisions to retail sales showed weaker levels of activity, primarily from 2008 on.  In combination with major downside benchmark revisions this year in the payroll-employment and industrial-production series, the lowered retail sales numbers suggest that major downside revisions loom for the heavily politicized, massaged and gimmicked GDP reporting, come the scheduled July 29th annual revisions to the national income accounts.

That said, the poor-quality GDP reporting continued, with yesterday’s (April 28th) GDP estimate showing slowing annualized real (inflation-adjusted) quarterly growth in first-quarter 2011, down to 1.8% from 3.1% in the fourth-quarter.  In the popular press, the slowing was blamed on factors such as bad weather, higher oil prices due to Middle East turmoil, declining housing activity and military spending.  Bad weather had negligible impact.  Higher food, oil and gasoline prices did have meaningful impact, but the issue there was more Federal Reserve debasement of the U.S. dollar than global political tensions.  The sharp deterioration in underlying trade data as reported last month by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) appears largely to have been ignored.  Those numbers purportedly are used by the BEA in estimating the GDP’s net export account.  GDP data anywhere close to the official trade reporting would have taken the GDP growth estimate into negative territory.  As a result of the trade issues, and the wide error margins for GDP reporting (see detail following), the first-quarter growth estimate was of unusually poor quality and just as easily could have been reported as a contraction, as it was a small gain.

 

Retail Sales Benchmark Shows Weaker Recent Economic History.  As shown in the accompanying graph, recent retail sales activity was lowered by roughly one-percent from previous reporting.  Adjusted for inflation, real retail still troughed in March 2009, but at a level 1.05% below where it last had been estimated.  The level of real retail sales for December 2010—peak of the holiday season—was revised lower by 1.15%, with the most recent March 2011 estimate revised lower by 1.10%.

 

 

The following graphs of real retail sales, both of post-World War II historical perspective and the nearer-term detail, have been updated for the latest revisions.

 

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

“Advance” Estimate of First-Quarter 2011 GDP Showed Slowing Growth.  The “advance” estimate of slower first-quarter 2011 GDP, though not statistically meaningful either as to the slowing or even as to  being in positive territory, nonetheless likely has set the pattern for the “broadest” measure of U.S. economic activity, as it slowly slips into double-dip recession status.

GDP.  Published yesterday, April 28th, by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the “advance” or first estimate of real (inflation-adjusted) first-quarter 2011 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) showed annualized quarterly growth of 1.75% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), down from 3.11% in fourth-quarter 2010.  Net of an unwanted buildup in nonfarm inventories, growth would have been 0.75%.

Year-to-year change in first-quarter 2011 over first-quarter 2010 continued the slowing trend in annual growth, coming in at 2.28%, down from 2.78% in the fourth-quarter, and well off the peak reported growth of 3.25% purportedly seen in third-quarter 2010.

The first-quarter GDP implicit price deflator estimate was at an annualized pace of 1.90%, versus 0.35% in the fourth-quarter.  In contrast, annualized seasonally-adjusted quarterly inflation for the CPI-U in the first-quarter spiked to a seasonally-adjusted 5.22%, from 2.62% annualized inflation in the fourth-quarter (see Commentary No. 363).  The lower the inflation rate that is used in deflating the GDP, the stronger is the resulting inflation-adjusted number and vice versa.  A slightly more realistic inflation number would have pushed the “advance” quarterly growth rate into negative territory.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for first-quarter 2011 is an approximate annual contraction of 2.6% versus the official estimate of a 2.3% gain.  Such is more negative than the alternate 2.1% annual contraction (2.8% official gain) in the fourth-quarter (see the Alternate Data tab).  While annualized real quarterly growth is not estimated formally on an alternative basis, a meaningful quarter-to-quarter contraction appears to have been realistic for the first-quarter, in what generally has been a protracted period of bottom-bouncing.

 

 

Reflecting the latest reporting, the preceding graph shows year-to-year percent change in the official inflation-adjusted quarterly GDP for the history of the series.  The record annual contraction for the series was 4.11%, seen in second-quarter 2009.  Again, the GDP and related series will go through their annual benchmark revisions on July 29, 2011.

GNP and GDI.  Due to the paucity of meaningful data (the “advance” GDP itself is just a guesstimate),  the initial estimates of Gross National Product (GNP) and Gross Domestic Income (GDI) will not be released until next month.

 

Hyperinflation Watch—Why Fed Chairman/Finance Ministers, Etc. Traditionally Avoid Having Press Conferences.   In troubled times, finance ministers, Treasury secretaries and central bankers commonly have to lie about what is happening.  Anything negative said by a Fed Chairman usually will be used against him and the central bank by the markets, making crisis resolution all the more difficult.  Accordingly, most people in Mr. Bernanke’s position traditionally shun public exposure and comments as much as possible.

Fed Chairman Bernanke, however, opted to have a press conference on Wednesday (April 27th).  His wording was very careful.  He explained how everything was working out perfectly.  He also was clear that the Federal Reserve was not responsible for any of the problems upsetting the public, including higher gasoline prices or a weaker dollar.  The U.S. stock market was happy, but the Fed Chairman’s comments were far from honest, and the precious metals and currency markets did not buy all the happy news.

U.S. inflation is on the rise, due primarily to the Fed’s successful efforts at starting to debase the U.S. dollar.  It is the dollar’s weakness that primarily has driven oil prices higher, more so than political tensions in the Middle East and North Africa, or Mr. Bernanke’s suggestions of surging global oil demand.  As a result of Fed activity, the U.S. dollar has lost its safe-haven status and is hitting all-time lows against a number of major currencies.  As noted in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) (page 7), even the Fed’s Vice-Chairman has acknowledged current Fed policy is weakening the U.S. dollar.

Next week, this section will assess what may be the beginning of an upturn in the broad money supply (SGS-Ongoing-M3 Estimate).

The economic and systemic solvency crises are ongoing.  The inflation and currency circumstance (U.S. dollar versus the stronger major currencies and precious metals) continues to deteriorate.  The broad economic and inflation outlooks discussed in the Hyperinflation Report continue unabated.

Week Ahead.  Though not yet commonly recognized, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions, benchmark or otherwise. 

Employment and Unemployment (April 2011).  The estimates of the April unemployment rate and payroll employment are due for release on Friday, May 6th.  Once again, they will be clouded by major quality issues with seasonal adjustments (see Commentary No. 361).  Against what likely will be reasonably strong expectations for headline payrolls and the unemployment rate, underlying reality remains suggestive of a much weaker environment: contracting employment and rising unemployment.  Shifting distortions in the seasonal factors can offer the financial markets an unhappy surprise here at any time.

 

__________

No. 365: March Home Sales, Durable Goods Orders

Wednesday, April 27th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 365
March Home Sales, Durable Goods Orders

April 27, 2011

__________

Pending Benchmarks to Retail Sales and Durable Goods Orders
Should Show Economy to Have Been Weaker

Home Sales Remain Troubled

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regularly scheduled Commentary is for Friday, April 29th.  It will cover the April 28th release of the first-estimate of first-quarter 2011 GDP.  Dependent on the timing of the release of full details of the retail sales benchmark revision, that revision will be covered in the GDP Commentary or shortly thereafter.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

No Ongoing Recovery Evident in Latest Economic Data.  The continued stagnant activity in home sales at historically low levels is not suggestive of ongoing economic “recovery.”  Although this morning’s (April 27th) report on new orders for durable goods was positive and near or above consensus, it was within the normal range of high volatility for the series, including upside revisions to long-term commercial aircraft orders.  The general economic outlook will be reviewed in the next Commentary along with the initial estimate of activity in first-quarter 2011 GDP.  There has been no fundamental shift in underlying activity to suggest any change in the broad economic outlook and the evolving double-dip recession discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011).

Separately, with the markets expecting slower GDP growth in tomorrow’s first-quarter GDP announcement, any suggestion today (April 27th) by the Fed of ending quantitative easing would be a surprise.  The circumstance will be discussed in Friday’s Commentary.

Durable Goods Orders Subject to May 13th Benchmark Revision.  The Census Bureau reported this morning (April 27th) that the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted March 2011 new orders for durable goods increased by 2.5% (up by 4.2% before prior-period revisions) month-to-month, after a revised 0.7% gain (previously a 0.9% decline) in February.  The monthly increase reflected a 0.9% increase in irregular, long-term aircraft orders, a category that showed a revised 35.1% (previously 26.7%) monthly surge in February.  Unadjusted, year-to-year change in total March new orders was a gain of 12.2%, versus a revised annual gain in February of 7.3% (previously 6.5%).  Subject to many of the same sampling and adjustment problems seen with retail sales and payroll reporting, the durable goods series will be subject to a benchmark revision on May 13, 2011.  Major downside revisions to reported activity of recent years are likely.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders rose by 3.2% (up by 6.0% before prior-period revisions) in March, versus a revised month-to-month gain of 5.2% (previously up by 2.5%) in February.  For March, the unadjusted year-to-year growth in the series was 20.7%, up from a revised 7.8% (previously 6.5%) gain in February.

 

 

The preceding graphs are not adjusted for inflation and show the monthly volatility in the seasonally-adjusted durable goods new orders series from airplane orders.  Aircraft orders are irregular in timing and usually are booked years in advance, with resulting minimal impact on near-term economic activity.  The first graph shows commercial aircraft orders on both a monthly and on a six-month moving-average basis, where the second graph shows seasonally-adjusted monthly total new orders for durable goods (NODG), as well as NODG net of aircraft orders. 

The recent uptrend in the aggregate series has been influenced heavily by the positive news in aircraft sales, as well as from last year’s benchmark revision that built an upside bias into the monthly data.  Due to the latter, downside revisions are likely in the pending benchmark.  The plotted data are not adjusted for inflation, because there is no particularly meaningful inflation index that makes sense as the deflator.   Net of inflation, however, the pattern of monthly increases—seen on average since 2009—would be shallower, much shallower.

 

Home Sales Problems Are Ongoing.  Both existing and new home sales moved somewhat higher on a monthly basis in March 2011, but not meaningfully.  With the same pattern seen in March housing starts (see Commentary No. 364), the reported monthly gain was not statistically significant, although the reported year-to-year decline continued to be meaningful.  The pattern of bottom-bouncing in industry sales continues, with the distressed or foreclosed portion of home sales on the rise, while new construction (as eventually reflected in the GDP) broadly has turned to a pattern of renewed aggregate decline. 

Tuesday’s (April 25th) reporting of March new-home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) showed a statistically-insignificant monthly gain of 11.1% (up 20.0% before prior-period revisions) +/- 25.3% (95% confidence interval) from February.  February’s revised level was down by 13.5% (previously down by 16.9%) from January.  The year-to-year decline in March 2011 new-home sales was a statistically-significant 21.9% +/- 12.0% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 22.2% (previously 28.0%) decline in February.

The April 20th release of March 2011 existing-home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) showed a 3.7% monthly increase (up by 4.5% net of prior-period revisions), versus February’s revised 8.9% (previously 9.6%) monthly decline.  On a year-to-year basis, March sales were down by 5.9% from March 2010.

Foreclosure activity remained an intensifying distorting factor for home sales, with "distressed" activity accounting for an estimated 40% of existing sales in the NAR’s March reporting, the highest portion seen since Spring 2009, and up from 39% in February. 

 

 

Separately, the Census Bureau acknowledges that a portion of new home sales also is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimate as to the scope of the issue.  Some in the construction trade have difficulty competing with the pricing of foreclosed properties.  Until the foreclosure problems get worked out in the system, monthly changes in these home sales numbers cannot be taken as meaningful positive indicators (when the numbers are positive) of underlying activity in homeowner real estate, as it relates to general economic activity.

 

 

Week Ahead.  Though not yet commonly recognized, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions, benchmark or otherwise. 

Gross Domestic Product—GDP (First-Quarter 2011 “Advance” or First Estimate).  The “advance” estimate of first-quarter GDP is due for release tomorrow, Thursday, April 28th.  Briefing.com indicates a consensus estimate for the headline annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) growth rate of 1.7%, while online.wsj.com is showing 2.0%, both lower than the 3.1% last reported for fourth-quarter 2010.  “Advance” estimates usually are targeted by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) to match the consensus forecast.  Even with consensus consideration of the weakening trade picture, underlying reality is weaker than the consensus, and reporting risk accordingly should be to the downside of consensus.  Due to travel, this release will be covered in a Commentary on Friday, April 29th.   

Retail Sales (Annual Benchmark Revision).  The annual benchmark revision to retail sales is due for release on Friday, April 29th.  Look for major downside revisions to previously reported economic history of the last several years.  A separate Commentary will be published at such time as the fully revised historical data become available.

 

 

__________

No. 364: Housing Starts, Hyperinflation Watch

Tuesday, April 19th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 364
Housing Starts, Hyperinflation Watch

April 19, 2011

__________

Housing Starts Keep Bouncing Down Hill

Upcoming Numbers Should Show a Stalling and Much Weaker Economy

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regularly scheduled Commentary is for Wednesday, April 27th.  It will cover March home sales and new orders for durable goods.  The release of the first-estimate of first-quarter 2011 GDP on April 28th will be covered in a Commentary on Friday, April 29th, due to travel.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Mounting Fears of U.S. Insolvency as “Recovery” Dissipates.  As discussed in the Week Ahead, reporting in the next week or so should show softening GDP growth (expectations are for annualized real growth to slow to 1.7% for first-quarter 2011, from 3.1% in fourth-quarter 2010).  While that likely will make headlines, the pending downside revisions to historical retail sales of recent years probably will go unreported by the financial media, even though the new data will show the recession to have been longer and deeper than popularly assumed, and correspondingly that the “recovery” will appear to have been increasingly ephemeral.   Today’s housing starts report was consistent with such developments.

At the same time, Standard & Poor’s (S&P) placing a negative outlook on the sovereign debt rating of the United States has helped to move financial-market concerns for U.S. solvency towards center stage.  This circumstance should tend to exacerbate U.S. Treasury funding problems and to push the Federal Reserve more towards expanded QE2 or QE3, while at the same time encouraging accelerating flight from the U.S. dollar (see Hyperinflation Watch).

 

March Housing Starts Consistent With Intensified Economic Deterioration.  Like a ball bouncing down a hill, the regularly volatile housing starts series remained in downtrend despite a statistically meaningless one-month bounce.  The Census Bureau reported this morning, April 19th, a statistically-insignificant monthly gain of 7.2% +/- 21.1% (95% confidence interval) in seasonally-adjusted March 2011 housing starts; the gain was 14.6% before prior-period revisions.  February starts were revised to an 18.5% (previously a 22.5%) monthly decline.  Year-to-year change in March housing starts was a statistically-significant decline of 13.4% +/- 10.6% (95% confidence interval), following a revised annual 15.4% (previously a 20.8%) decline in February.

Although the pattern of housing starts generally remains one of bottom-bouncing at an historically low-level plateau of activity, as seen over the last 28 months, recent activity has started to slow anew, meaningfully.   The six-month moving average of the seasonally-adjusted housing starts has declined for two months and is closing in on the historic low seen in mid-2009.  Significantly weaker monthly numbers remain likely in the months ahead.  Since December 2008, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 569,000.  In those 28 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, with the March 2011 monthly reading of 549,000 3.5% below average.

 

 

 

As shown in the preceding graphs, current activity is near the record low for the present series seen in April 2009 and is well below any level reported in the predecessor nonfarm housing starts series, which was introduced in 1946.  Housing starts appear to have begun rolling down hill, anew, and that should be reflected with increasing clarity in the next several months of reporting. 

 

Hyperinflation Watch—U.S. Sovereign Debt Rating.   Near-term inflation and monetary circumstances generally have continued to deteriorate in line with expectations detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), with risks continuing to mount for the near-term development of the early stages of a hyperinflation.  The process received a nudge forward yesterday (April 18th), when S&P placed a negative outlook on the sovereign debt rating of the United States.  The warning has raised new caution in the financial markets and likely will add to heavy dollar selling pressure, as the outlook for U.S. fiscal conditions worsens rapidly in response to renewed economic decline and to deteriorating political conditions in the U.S. capital.  Nonetheless, an actual downgrade of the U.S. debt rating is not likely, so long as the U.S. dollar remains the world’s reserve currency, and so long as U.S. debt issuance remains denominated in U.S. dollars.   

The comments on page 55 of the March 15th Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) remain in place: “If not for the special position the United States holds in the world, its debt—U.S. Treasuries—likely would be rated as below investment grade, instead of triple-A.  Major rating agencies have hinted at possible longer-term rating downgrades on Treasury securities.  A downgrade by U.S. rating agencies, though, is not likely, so long as U.S. Treasuries are denominated in U.S. dollars and as long as they are used as the benchmark for the triple-A rating.  Such ratings usually are an opinion as to the risk of default.  Treasuries denominated in U.S. dollars are not likely to face actual default, so long as the Treasury and Fed can create dollars to pay off the face amounts of the obligations.”   

 

Week Ahead.  Though not yet commonly recognized, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlyingv reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions, benchmark or otherwise. 

Home Sales (March 2011).  March existing home sales (National Association of Realtors) are due for release on Wednesday, April 20th, followed by new home sales (Census Bureau) on Monday, April 25th.  As with the broad deterioration still seen in housing starts, these volatile series should remain extremely weak, with any positive monthly change (new homes) again lacking statistical significance.  Also, as usual, given the extreme volatility, reporting error and revisions in these series, given the poor-quality seasonal adjustments, given continuing negative anecdotal evidence, and given ongoing massive distortions from increasingly volatile foreclosure activity, the monthly movements in these numbers remain particularly meaningless.

New Orders for Durable Goods (March 2011).  Due for release on Wednesday, April 27th, March’s new orders for durable goods likely will not show a meaningful monthly change, with odds slightly favoring an increase in this irregularly volatile series, tied to irregular gains in long-range orders for commercial airplanes.

Gross Domestic Product—GDP (First-Quarter 2011—“Advance” or First Estimate).  The “advance” estimate of first-quarter GDP is due for release on Thursday, April 28th.  Briefing.com indicates an early consensus estimate for the headline annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) growth rate of 1.7%, down from the 3.1% last reported for fourth-quarter 2010.  “Advance” estimates usually are targeted by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) to match the consensus forecast.  Even with consensus consideration of the weakening trade picture, underlying reality is weaker than the consensus, and reporting risk accordingly should be to the downside of consensus.  Due to travel, this release will be covered in a Commentary on Friday, April 29th.   

Retail Sales (Annual Benchmark Revision).  The annual benchmark revision to retail sales is due for release on Friday, April 29th.  Look for major downside revisions to previously reported economic history of the last several years.  A separate Commentary will be published at such time as the fully revised historical data become available.

 

 

__________

No. 363: Inflation, Retail Sales, Production

Friday, April 15th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 363
Inflation, Retail Sales, Production

April 15, 2011

__________

Real Monthly Retail Sales Fell by 0.2% in March

Fed’s Dollar Debasement Has Boosted Quarterly CPI Inflation to More than 5%

 March Year-to-Year Consumer Inflation: 2.7% (CPI-U), 3.0% (CPI-W), 10.2% (SGS)

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regularly scheduled Commentary is for Tuesday, April 19th.  It will assess the March housing starts release.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Inflation Pace Accelerates.  The pace of consumer inflation is accelerating rapidly, with annual CPI-U at 2.7% and CPI-W at 3.0%, while the annualized quarterly, seasonally-adjusted inflation rates have hit 5.2% for the CPI-U and 6.0% for the CPI-W.  These higher inflation numbers are tied directly to the Federal Reserve’s successful and ongoing efforts to debase the U.S. dollar, which in turn have boosted dollar-denominated commodity prices such as oil.  The inflation pace here normally would be of concern to the Fed, except the U.S. central bank officially ignores inflation tied to food and energy prices, even though, again, those debilitating price increases for consumers are a direct result of Fed policy.  Of particular discomfort to consumers, this inflation has not resulted from booming economic activity and wages, but rather from Fed monetary policy in the context of stagnant/declining broad economic activity.

Inflation has gained the upper hand in retail sales, with sales gains now more than accounted for by rising prices.  A pending benchmark revision (April 29th) should show a much weaker recent history for retail sales activity, as the just-published benchmark revision to industrial production did for that series.

 

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

Inflation Above 3% Tends to Rattle Consumers.  Where consumers look at inflation in terms of out-of-pocket expenses, the threshold of pain has been crossed, with popularly used consumer price indices at or within one month of topping 3% annual inflation.   Further, for those who do not get paid in seasonally-adjusted dollars, the 0.5% adjusted CPI-U monthly gain felt more like the 1.0% unadjusted gain.

This is separate from considering what a consumer needs in income or investment return to maintain a constant standard of living.  The BLS—under Congressional direction—has altered the CPI in recent years so as no longer to reflect any sense of maintaining a constant standard of living.  Those issues are addressed in the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure below.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported today (April 15th) that the seasonally-adjusted March 2011 CPI-U rose by 0.55% (up by 0.98%, unadjusted) for the month.  That followed an increase of 0.55% (up by 0.49%, unadjusted) in February.  The March reporting reflected an unadjusted monthly increase in gasoline prices of 11.7%, which was reduced to a 5.6% monthly gain by happy seasonal adjustments.     

The pace of annualized quarterly, seasonally-adjusted, CPI-U inflation continued to accelerate in first-quarter 2011, up by 5.22%, versus 2.62% in fourth-quarter 2010, and versus1.43% in third-quarter 2010. 

March’s unadjusted year-to-year CPI-U inflation surged once again, to 2.68%, up from 2.11% in February and up from a 1.63% annual increase in January.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s April 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the unchanged adjusted monthly level seen in April 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for April 2011, the difference in April’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from March 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 2.68%.  Annual CPI-U inflation should top 3% next month, as the CPI-W did in today’s reporting.

CPI-W.  The narrower, seasonally-adjusted CPI-W, which has greater weighting for gasoline than does the CPI-U, rose in March 2011 by 0.65% (up 1.14% unadjusted), following February’s adjusted monthly increase of 0.62% (up 0.52% unadjusted). 

The pace of annualized quarterly, seasonally-adjusted, CPI-W inflation for first-quarter 2011 continued to accelerate, up by 6.04%, versus 3.09% in fourth-quarter 2010 and 1.71% in the third-quarter. 

Unadjusted, March 2011’s year-to-year CPI-W inflation was 3.04%, against a 2.35% annual increase in February.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U—the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists, including the recent presidential deficit commission, as the replacement for the CPI—is reported only on an unadjusted basis.  Year-to-year inflation increased to 2.46% in March 2011 versus 1.97% in February.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 6.0% in March 2011, up from 5.5% in February, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to about 10.2% (10.20% for those using the extra digit) in March, from about 9.6% in February. 

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation. Despite today’s (April 15th) historic high gold price of $1,476.75 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix) and a new multi-decade high silver price of at $42.61 per troy ounce (London fix), gold and silver prices have yet to approach their historic high levels, adjusted for inflation.  The earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 would be $2,441 per troy ounce, based on March 2011 CPI-U-adjusted dollars, $8,331 per troy ounce based on SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (all series not seasonally adjusted). 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org) has not been hit since, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars.  Based on March 2011 CPI-U inflation, the 1980 silver price peak would be $142 per troy ounce and would be $485 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (again, all series not seasonally adjusted).

As shown on page 43 of the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), over the decades, the price of gold has compensated for more than the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the dollar based on the SGS-Alternate Consumer Price Measure (1980 Methodologies Base).

Real Money Supply M3.  The signal of the still unfolding double-dip recession, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), most recently discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), continues and is graphed below.  Based on the March CPI-U report and the latest March SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate, the annual contraction in real M3 for March 2011 was 3.6%, versus a 4.3% annual contraction in February.

 

The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn or its duration.  The current downturn signal was generated in December 2009.  The broad economy tends to follow in downturn or renewed deterioration roughly six to nine months after the signal, as has appeared to have started in recent months.  Increasing weakness in a number of series should become evident as benchmark revisions to retail sales and GDP—following patterns in the recent payroll and industrial production revisions—show weaker than currently assumed economic activity for the last year or two, and as current reporting turns increasingly negative.  Such eventually will lead to recognition of a double-dip recession.

 

March PPI Gain Muted by Seasonal Adjustments.   As reported yesterday, April 14th, by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) rose in March 2011 by 0.7% (up by 1.3% before seasonal adjustment) month-to-month, following a monthly increase in February of 1.6% (up by 1.4% before seasonal adjustment).  The adjusted monthly PPI finished goods largely reflected upside pressures from energy and increasing “core” prices, with some offset from a purported decline food prices.  The higher prices generally reflected ongoing impact of the Fed’s dollar-debasement policies.  With reported monthly inflation heavily muted by seasonal adjustments of energy costs, the heaviest impact from rising oil prices is still ahead.

Annualized, seasonally-adjusted PPI inflation for first-quarter 2011 was 13.1%, up from an annualized pace of 9.2% in fourth-quarter 2010.  Unadjusted and year-to-year, Match 2011’s PPI inflation was 5.8% versus 5.6% in February, and at the highest level in one year. 

Separately, on a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted March 2011 intermediate goods rose by 1.5% (up by 2.0% in February), with March’s crude goods prices falling by 0.5%, after jumping up by 3.4% in February. 

Year-to-year inflation in March intermediate goods was up by 8.9% (a 7.8% gain in February), with March’s annual inflation in crude goods at 16.4% (up by 15.9% in February).

 

Real Retail Sales Series Likely Has Seen Its Reported Peak Level for a While.  The reported 0.4% gain in March 2011 retail sales was more than accounted for by inflation, with sales—net of inflation impact—contracting by 0.2%.  In two weeks, on April 29th, the series also will undergo its annual benchmark revision.  Consistent with the downside patterns common to most benchmark revisions, and in line with recent downside revisions to nonfarm payrolls and to industrial production, the pending retail sales revisions likely will show a much weaker recent economic history and a much lower level of “recovery” than commonly is discussed by most economic and financial analysts.

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Retail SalesWednesday’s (April 13th) March 2011 retail sales report—issued by the Census Bureau—indicated a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.39% (up 0.57% net of prior-period revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 1.08% February monthly gain (previously an increase of 0.97%).

On a year-to-year basis, March 2011 retail sales were reported up by 7.10% from March 2010, versus a revised year-to-year February 2011 gain of 9.10% (previously 8.87%). 

The Census Bureau continues to play games with the monthly seasonal factors and revisions to year-ago data, where only a limited number of the revisions are published.  That leaves the monthly data in the published historical series inconsistent, month-over-month, for the last several years.  Shifting patterns of seasonals can shift adjusted growth from earlier periods into the current reporting, without the earlier revisions being published.  Ongoing distortions basically are from the same concurrent seasonal-factor adjustment problems (unprecedented business-cycle effects overwhelming the traditional seasonal patterns of activity) and sampling issues (companies out business that no longer are reporting, but still are being counted) with sales or employees on payrolls.  These should be among the issues adjusted in the upcoming benchmark revision.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Retail Sales.  Based on the March 2011 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly March 2011 retail sales fell by 0.16%, where, before inflation adjustment, the current number was up by 0.39%.  Real February sales revised to an increase of 0.53% (initially a 0.42% gain).

March real retail sales rose at a year-to-year pace of 4.29%, slowing from a revised 6.79% (previously 6.57%) annual gain reported for February. 

 

 

 

The “recovery” in real retail sales is reflected in the preceding graphs.  Both graphs show the monthly level of the seasonally-adjusted activity.  The first graph shows the data in historical context since World War II.  The second graph shows the same numbers in clearer detail for the current period beginning in 2000.

Since November 2008, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $164.9 billion (the deflated March number was $174.2 billion).  With the likely benchmark revisions, the series should be topping out.  There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity—no recovery—just general bottom-bouncing.  Accordingly, real retail sales levels in the months ahead should turn increasingly negative.

Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, “core” retail sales—consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when “core” inflation is lower than full inflation—are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: March 2011 versus February 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues—was up by 0.1% versus an official aggregate gain of 0.4%.

Version II: March 2011 versus February 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gas stations—was a gain of 0.1% versus the aggregate gain of 0.4%.

 

March Industrial Production Gained for Month, With Overall Level Reduced Significantly by the Benchmark Revisions.  Current reporting is in an environment of restated economic history that shows much weaker economic activity in recent years than reported initially (see Commentary No. 360).

 

 

In the context of the revised historical data, this morning’s (April 15th) Federal Reserve Board release of seasonally-adjusted March 2011 industrial production showed a monthly gain of 0.80%, following a 0.07% increase in February.  Year-to-year change in March 2011 production was 5.88%, up from a 5.61% gain in February.  The year-to-year contraction of 14.86% seen in June 2009 was the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II.

The “recovery” in industrial production is reflected in the following graphs.  Both graphs show the monthly level of the production index.  The first graph shows the data in the historical context since World War II.  The second graph shows the same numbers in clearer detail for the current period beginning in 2000, including the benchmark revision and the March 2011 release.

For the last 29 months, the production index has averaged 88.54, around which the series has been fluctuating, although it consistently still has been moving higher in recent months.  The March reading is at 93.59.

 

{{end}

Hyperinflation Watch—QE2/QE3.  As noted in the prior Commentary No. 362, near-term inflation and monetary circumstances generally have continued to deteriorate in line with expectations detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), with risks continuing to mount for the near-term development of the early stages of a hyperinflation.  I also suggested that, “Much weaker-than-expected economic data should be seen in the months ahead.  Not only are the implications here horrendous for U.S. fiscal conditions, but the Federal Reserve likely will expand its rapidly expiring QE2 (broad money supply still has shown no major impact from QE2), or introduce QE3.  In turn, this should intensify U.S. dollar selling as well as U.S. consumer inflationary pressures.”

Several subscribers asked for some clarification on the Fed’s likely actions.  As indicated in prior writings, although the Fed officially credits its QE2 program to continued lackluster growth in economic activity and to no “core” inflation, the Fed’s real concern remains in the realm of banking-system solvency.  The continued weakness in broad money supply activity is suggestive of ongoing systemic solvency issues.  Accordingly, until broad money growth and bank lending pick-up sharply, the “QE” programs likely will continue, although they still likely will be explained away as being necessary to combat the weak economy.

As to whether the Fed will play politics with a brief pause in the “QE” programs remains to be seen, but I would doubt there will much, if any break, given the ongoing systemic solvency crisis being juggled by the U.S. central bank.  Weakness in the dollar likely will continue, in any event, given the rapid deterioration of global perceptions of U.S. political stability, etc.

 

Week Ahead.  Though not yet commonly recognized, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions, benchmark or otherwise. 

Residential Construction (March 2011).  Release of March 2011 housing starts is scheduled for Tuesday, April 19th.  This highly volatile series likely will continue to show a deepening new downturn in activity.  To the extent there is an upside surprise to housing starts, any such result should lack statistical significance.  

 

__________

No. 362: Trade, Liquidity, Hyperinflation Watch

Tuesday, April 12th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 362
Trade, Liquidity, Hyperinflation Watch

April 12, 2011

__________

Near-Term Hyperinflation Risk Continues to Progress

Trade Deficit Should Be a Negative for First-Quarter GDP

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regularly scheduled Commentary is for Friday, April 15th.  It will assess the latest CPI, PPI, Retail Sales and Industrial Production.

With this Commentary we add as a new feature the Hyperinflation Watch section, which will be updated regularly for near-term developments as they relate to the unfolding, or lack of same, of the hyperinflation scenario discussed in Hyperinflation Special Report (2011).

 —Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Hyperinflation Watch.  In line with expectations detailed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), near-term circumstances generally have continued to deteriorate.  As measured by the consumer price index and as reflected in the dollar’s recent record-low values against the stronger major Western currencies and gold, the U.S. dollar is losing its purchasing power at an accelerating pace.  On the political front, vitriolic tactics used during the recent fight over minimal budget cuts offer no hope of the current political powers being able to save the federal government from its long-term insolvency.  Yet, there seems to be enough aggressive new blood in the system that the issues may get at least a good public airing.  What has happened and is happening remains consistent with the general outlook detailed in the hyperinflation special report.

The primary driving force behind the intensifying U.S. dollar weakness and mounting global avoidance of the U.S. currency remains the Federal Reserve’s accelerating efforts at dollar debasement.  Also hitting the dollar, though, are increasing instabilities in and ineffectiveness of political Washington, D.C., as viewed by the rest of the world. 

Reverberations from the great Japanese earthquake and the ongoing political turmoil in the Middle East and North Africa have added to global financial instabilities and oil price volatility, yet the dollar still is being shunned as a safe-haven.  That status increasingly appears to have been lost.  Accordingly, dollar weakness still remains the primary driving force behind rising oil prices.

Higher Gasoline Prices Are Not Due to Economic Recovery.  Last night, I heard comments on a national broadcast news program that blamed higher gasoline prices on the economic recovery.  That is nonsense and is a form of economic propaganda suggestive of the increasing level of desperation in political Washington.  Again, the primary problem behind higher oil and gasoline prices is the Fed’s efforts at dollar debasement, but few in the media are willing to blame the Fed.

As seen in recent benchmark revisions (payrolls, industrial production), and as likely will be seen in upcoming reporting and pending benchmark revisions (retail sales, GDP), the “recovery” has started to evaporate.  Much weaker-than-expected economic data should be seen in the months ahead.  Not only are the implications here horrendous for U.S. fiscal conditions, but the Federal Reserve likely will expand its rapidly expiring QE2 (broad money supply still has shown no major impact from QE2), or introduce QE3.  In turn, this should intensify U.S. dollar selling as well as U.S. consumer inflationary pressures.

 

Following are the updated graphs of gold versus the Swiss franc, oil and silver.

 

 

 

 

Trade Deficit Remains a Big Negative for First-Quarter GDP Estimate.  Since the February trade deficit is the last trade number reported before the BEA attempts to guesstimate growth in first-quarter GDP, the impact of net exports on that initial estimate should be set.  A quarterly narrowing of the deficit is a plus for GDP growth, a quarterly widening of the deficit is a negative for GDP growth.

Per the trade report, the annualized merchandise trade deficit—deflated and seasonally-adjusted consistent with GDP reporting—narrowed from $596.1 billion in third-quarter 2010, to $543.3 billion in fourth-quarter 2010.  Based on today’s numbers, that fourth-quarter gain has been wiped out fully, with a widening in the first-quarter 2011 deficit to $598.3 billion.  While other data games played by the BEA may alter the results, it would be difficult to massage these numbers into positive impact for the quarter. 

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Trade Deficit.  The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported today (April 12th) that the nominal, seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services for February 2011 narrowed to $45.8 billion from a revised $47.0 (previously $46.3) billion in January 2011.  The February 2011 deficit widened, though, from $39.7 billion a year ago.

Against January 2011, the February trade balance showed declines in both exports and imports, with the import decline steeper than that for exports.  Oil imports softened, reflecting lower physical import volume and a small pickup in reported import prices.  Specifically, for the month of February 2011, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $87.17 per barrel, up from $84.34 in January 2011, and up from $72.92 in February 2010.  In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, February 2011 volume averaged 8.656 million barrels per day, versus 9.376 million in January 2011 and 8.689 million in February 2010.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit.  Adjusted for seasonal factors and net of rising oil prices and other inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the reported February 2011 merchandise trade deficit came in at $49.5 billion, the same level as initial reporting for January, although January widened sharply to $50.3 billion in revision.  The January and February estimates are all that will be available to the BEA when it estimates the “advance” annualized quarterly growth rate for real first-quarter 2011 GDP, on April 28th.

The January and February deficits annualize out to $598.3 billion ($594.1 billion was the estimate based only on initial January reporting).  That is up meaningfully from the fourth-quarter goods deficit, which was at an annualized pace of $543.3 billion, and it suggests significant downside pressure on the advance GDP estimate, effectively offsetting fully the reported fourth-quarter GDP gains that resulted from a narrowing in the fourth-quarter trade balance.

 

Week Ahead.  Though not yet commonly recognized, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions, benchmark or otherwise. 

Retail Sales (March 2011).  Release of March 2011 retail sales is scheduled for Wednesday, April 13th.  Beyond the ongoing fundamental weakness in consumer liquidity, the Japanese earthquake and unrest in the Middle East and North Africa have distracted consumer spending in the last month or so, with people sitting at home watching television rather than going out and hitting the malls.  Even so, reporting likely will be softer than already-tepid consensus expectations of a 0.5% monthly gain (Briefing.com), versus the 1.0% gain reported initially for February.

Of greater significance, the consensus forecasters also are looking at 0.5% for March CPI, which means that real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales in the month are not expected to have grown at all.  More likely, real retail sales will be down for March, when both the actual retail and CPI reports are in place.

Watch for probable major downside revisions to the last couple of years of reported retail sales activity, when the annual benchmark revision to the series is published on April 29th.

Producer Price Index—PPI (March 2011).  Release of the March 2011 PPI is scheduled for Thursday, April 14th.  In the real world, wholesale inflation in March was worse than in February.  Any reporting to the contrary—in the seasonally-adjusted headline series—simply would be a distortion of the seasonal-adjustment process.  

Consumer Price Index—CPI (March 2011).  Release of the March 2011 CPI is scheduled for Friday, April 15th.  Gasoline prices rose on average by more than 10% in March, per the Department of Energy.  By itself, such a gain would add roughly 0.6% to the unadjusted monthly CPI-U, but seasonal adjustments will temper the reported adjusted gain.  Separately, though, given the unusual nature of March’s spiked gasoline prices, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) could use its “intervention analysis” option to mitigate the otherwise relatively meaningless seasonal reduction in reported gasoline price inflation. 

Given ongoing inflation problems with food and the spreading impact of higher oil-related costs in the broad economy, reporting risk is to the upside of consensus expectation, which is at 0.5% for the headline CPI-U monthly gain, per Briefing.com.  

Year-to-year CPI-U inflation would increase or decrease in March 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the virtually flat 0.02% adjusted monthly gain seen in March 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for March 2011, the difference in March’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from February 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 2.11%.  A consensus monthly gain of 0.5% in March would result in an annual inflation rate of about 2.6%.  In any event, CPI-U annual inflation is a fair bet to top 3% in April’s reporting.

Industrial Production (March 2011).  Release of March 2011 industrial production is scheduled for Friday, April 15th.  The consensus estimate for a headline gain of 0.6% (Briefing.com), versus a benchmark-revised unchanged level in February, is at some risk of offering a downside surprise. Upcoming reporting is in an environment of restated economic history that shows weaker economic activity in recent years than reported initially (see Commentary No. 360).

 

__________

No. 361: March Employment and Unemployment

Friday, April 1st, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 361
March Employment and Unemployment

April 1, 2011

__________

Reporting Quality Remains Abysmal for Monthly Employment and Unemployment

March Unemployment Rates: 8.8% (U.3), 15.7% (U.6), 22.0% (SGS)

Upped Birth-Death Bias Factors Both Assume and Create Jobs Growth

Broad Money Supply in an Uptick?

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regularly scheduled Commentary is for Friday, April 8th, which will review general economic and liquidity conditions in a week otherwise bereft of meaningful economic releases.

 —Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Openly Misleading Reporting Continues from the Bureau of Labor Statistics.  As discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), the extreme severity of the current economic downturn—both in terms of depth and duration—has distorted regular month-to-month reporting of seasonally-adjusted series, particularly the nonfarm payroll employment and the headline U.3 unemployment rate numbers.

Consider the following artifact of a broken reporting process.  In today’s (April 1st) reporting of March labor conditions, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) showed a seasonally-adjusted gain of 152,000 for December 2010 versus November 2010, with January 2011’s adjusted monthly increase at 68,000.  Based on the BLS’s monthly “concurrent seasonal adjustment” process, however, the Bureau really is looking at a 126,000 jobs gain for December, and at a 58,000 jobs gain in January; it just is not reporting the numbers, so as to avoid “confusing” people who use the data. 

Meaningful seasonal-adjustments tend to be stable over time, without wild fluctuations every time the seasonals are re-estimated.  This is true particularly for series like payroll employment and retail sales where the seasonal factors are concurrent—recalculated each month for the current month’s raw data.  If the payroll seasonals were stable, the lines in the following graph would be flat and coincident.  

 

 

Instead, the monthly recalculations of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels show irregular revisions, with swings of plus or minus 50,000 shifting over time.  To the extent the numbers affect current reporting, the differences are enough potentially to alter financial-market perceptions and reactions.  The big issue, remains that the month-to-month data have become increasingly worthless, well beyond the 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000 jobs in the reported monthly payroll change, yet the media and the markets tout the data as meaningful, usually without question or qualification.

As discussed last month in greater detail (see Commentary No. 355), when the concurrent seasonal-factor adjustments are made each month, history—consistent with current reporting—is revised back a number of years in internal BLS calculations, yet only revisions for the prior two months—January and February in today’s report—are published.  December 2010 and all earlier months have been locked in place until next year’s benchmark revisions.  Even so, the seasonal factors have manufactured non-existent jobs in the last calendar year.  Official reporting shows a seasonally-adjusted gain of 940,000 jobs in between December 2009 and December 2010.  The concurrent history shows the gain to be 918,000.  The unadjusted data, which are the closest to the real world, show a gain of 872,000 (though these numbers still are heavily biased, per the Birth-Death Model comments).

The inconsistency differences can be calculated based on the raw data and the seasonal-adjustment program available to the public on the BLS Web site.  Using the BLS data, we have calculated the seasonally-adjusted numbers as the BLS should be showing them, as of the current reporting, and the differences between official reporting and the consistent seasonally-adjusted series—seasonal-factor instabilities from just two and three months of revisions—are plotted the preceding graph.

Payroll Survey Detail.  The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted March 2011 jobs gain of 216,000 (an increase of 223,000 jobs before prior-period revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval).  February payrolls showed a revised 194,000 (previously 192,000) gain.  In terms of year-to-year change, the unadjusted March 2011 number was reported up by 1.03% from the year before.  Despite the small upside revision to the seasonally-adjusted February numbers, though, the unadjusted numbers revised lower, with the annual change for February a revised 0.97% (previously 0.98%) increase.

 

 

 

 

 

The graphs of long-term year-to-year unadjusted payroll change show a recent increase in annual growth, which primarily reflects the still-protracted bottom-bouncing in the payroll series.  With the bottom-bouncing, current annual growth has recovered from the post-World War II record 5.06% decline in August 2009, which was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II (a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945).  Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the August 2009 annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression, and the current level of employment is far from any recovery.

As shown in graph of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels (as reported by the BLS), however, the current level of nonfarm payrolls shows no recovery to pre-recession highs.  The data continue to reflect bouncing along a plateau of low-level activity, with the latest payroll level still well below where it was a decade ago, even though the U.S. population has increased by 10% in the same period. 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  Despite the ongoing and regular overstatement of monthly payroll employment—as evidenced by the regular and massive, annual downward benchmark revisions to the reported payroll numbers—the BLS keeps upping its monthly biases in post-benchmark reporting.  For March 2011, there was a positive monthly bias used of 117,000 jobs, up from the revised estimate of 81,000 used in March 2010.  In February, the net bias was a boost of 112,000 jobs.  These upside biases reflect an ongoing assumption of a net positive jobs creation by new companies versus those going out business.  Such becomes a self-fulfilling system, as the upside biases boost financial-market and political needs with relatively good headline data, while also setting up the next year’s downside benchmark revisions, which traditionally are ignored by the media and the politicians.

Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business, on a timely basis (within at least five years, if ever), such information is estimated by the addition of a bias-factor generated by the Birth-Death Model (a model of the effects of new business creation and old business bankruptcies).  The fundamental defects of the Birth-Death Model are discussed as usual in the ensuing paragraphs.

Positive assumptions—commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling—can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with “stronger” economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates, or underlying assumptions of ongoing economic recovery.  Indeed, historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels—to understate employment declines—during recessions.   There is a faulty underlying premise here that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business.  So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, presumed additional “surplus” jobs, created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor.  These add-factors likely are running now above 30,000 per month (seasonally-adjusted).  I still estimate this monthly bias should be negative by 200,000 or so, on average.  Since it is not, the BLS continues regularly to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 230,000 jobs.  Much of that misreporting, which was not picked up in the 2010 benchmarking, now will not be corrected until at least the 2011 benchmark revision (based on the upcoming March 2011 benchmarking) to be published in February 2012.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (counting multiple job holders more than once), showed a March 2011 employment gain of 291,000 from February.  In turn February had been reported up by 250,000 from January.  Nonetheless, issues with seasonal factors also cloud the significance of the reported monthly levels in the adjusted headline U.3 unemployment rate and other adjusted household-survey numbers.  Again, adjusted data have been moved by highly unstable seasonal factors that are artifacts of the severe and extraordinarily protracted downturn in U.S. economic activity, not from changing seasonal patterns.

The March 2011 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate declined by a statistically-insignificant 0.09 percentage point to 8.83% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from 8.92% in February.  Not-seasonally-adjusted, March’s U.3 unemployment fell to 9.2% from 9.5% in February.

The March U.6 unemployment rate declined to a seasonally-adjusted 15.7% from 15.9% in February, again suffering from seasonal-maladjustment, and seeing some of the unadjusted short-term discouraged workers in U.6 rolling into the long-term discouraged workers in the SGS measure.  The unadjusted U.6 rate fell to 16.2% in March, from 16.7% in February.  The broadest unemployment rate published by the BLS, U.6 includes accounting for those marginally attached to the labor force (including short-term discouraged workers) and those who are employed part-time for economic reasons (they cannot find a full-time job).

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, “discouraged workers”—those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had—were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been “discouraged” for less than a year.  This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers.  The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the SGS estimate of excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed and labor force, unemployment—more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure—notched lower to about 22.0% in March, from 22.1% in February.  The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting, and tends to follow its relative monthly movements.  Accordingly, it will suffer some of the current seasonal-adjustment woes afflicting the base series.  See the Alternate Data tab for a graph and more detail.

As discussed in previous writings, while an unemployment rate around 22% might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession.  The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms.  Today, less that 2% work on farms.  Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

 

SGS Ongoing-M3 March Estimate Could Show an Uptick.  The preliminary estimate for the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate for March will be published tomorrow (April 2nd) in the Alternate Data section, following late data releases.  The measure appears to be on track for the strongest monthly gain in at least seven months, and for a narrowing of the annual rate of contraction to about 1.0%, from a 2.2% year-to-year contraction in February. 

This does not change the economic outlook at all.  The nature of the Fed’s QE2—monetizing U.S. Treasury debt—could be expected to boost broad money growth, but the numbers here are too tentative and early to confirm such a shift.  As shown in the following graph, the monetary base (which is not part of the money supply see Money Supply Special Report) has exploded in line with the promised “easing” as the Fed works hard at propping up the banking system.  Current liquidity circumstance will be updated in the next Commentary.

 

 

Week Ahead.  Though not yet commonly recognized, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions, benchmark or otherwise. 

There are no meaningful economic releases in the week ahead.

 

__________

No. 360: Industrial Production Revisions

Friday, March 25th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 360
Industrial Production Revisions

March 25, 2011

__________

Revised Industrial Production Shows Much Deeper Recession

February’s Production Level Lowered by 2.6%

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: This brief Commentary provides summary detail of the industrial production revisions.  The next regular Commentary remains scheduled for Friday, April 1st, covering the release of March unemployment and payroll employment, along with an indication of the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for March.  —Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

It Was Much Worse Than They Were Reporting.  The Federal Reserve published its annual benchmark revision to industrial production (IP) today, March 25th.  As noted by the Fed, “measured from fourth quarter to fourth quarter, total IP is now reported to have declined 1.4 percentage points and 1.7 percentage points more sharply in 2008 and 2009, respectively, and to have risen 0.5 percentage point more rapidly in 2010.”  The Fed also noted that the peak-to-trough contraction the series (2007 recession) was now 17.1%, 2.0 percentage points worse than previously reported. 

The year-to-year contraction of 12.86% (now 14.72%) previously reported for May 2009 has been supplanted by a 14.86% year-to-year decline in June 2009 as the steepest monthly annual decline in production since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II.

With all the revisions in place, the level of production for February 2011 (see Commentary No. 358) was revised down by 2.6%.  February 2011 production now is unchanged from January 2011, instead of down 0.08% as initially reported.  Year-to-year, February 2011 is up by 5.81% (previously 5.55%).

Although the upside monthly pattern from 2009 remains in place, it is from a lower level and is flatter than the older series in the most recent months.  The revision pattern here has been common in recent years, where earlier years that were benchmarked to more-significant surveys revised downward the most.  The most recent period, with little against which to benchmark, tended to be relatively stronger, but they were subject to later downside revisions in the ensuing two benchmarks.

 

 

The revisions here should be repeated somewhat in upcoming revisions to retail sales, new orders for durable goods, and the GDP.  Within the next four months, these pending benchmarks should continue to confirm that the downturn in the U.S. economy has been longer and deeper than previously indicated in official reporting.  The downturn also is ongoing, albeit in what officially will become recognized as a double- or multiple-dip recession, as discussed Section 4 of Hyperinflation Special Report (2010).

 

__________

No. 359: GDP Revision, February Home Sales and New Orders for Durable Goods

Friday, March 25th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 359
GDP Revision, February Home Sales and New Orders for Durable Goods

March 25, 2011

__________

Unlike Reported GDP, GNP and GDI Have Not Recovered Pre-Recession Highs

GDP Revision Reflected Weaker Consumption and Higher Inventories

Home Sales Plunged Anew in Tandem with Housing Starts

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, April 1st, covering the release of March unemployment and payroll employment, along with an indication of the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for March.  An interim Commentary will follow after the publication of full historical data for the benchmark revisions to industrial production.  While the press release on the benchmark is scheduled for noon ET today (March 25th), the release of full historical data sometimes is delayed.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

Economy Slows Anew.  Economic growth is slowing, while the pace of inflation pick-up is accelerating.  Continuing a trend of economic reporting that has been weaker than consensus estimates, the February housing numbers and new orders for durable goods disappointed market expectations.  That pattern, however, is building on top of a pattern of inflation reporting that has exceeded market expectations.  These trends likely will continue in the months ahead, at an accelerating pace of decline in business activity and increase in inflation.

This morning’s (March 25th) GDP revision was to the upside, but it was little more than statistical noise and reflected weaker consumption and higher inventories than previously reported.  GDP reporting remains the least meaningful and most heavily gimmicked/politicized of the major economic series, at least in the first year or so of reporting.  The next round of GDP annual benchmark revisions, which should show downside revisions to recent economic history, is due for publication on July 29th.

Of some interest in the GDP report, though, were the initial estimates of GNP and GDI for fourth-quarter and annual 2010.  As discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) (see Section 4, Historical Perspective on the Economic Data on page 28), reported GDP had fully recovered its pre-recession high as of initial and current fourth-quarter 2010 reporting.  Not only have the GNP and GDI not recovered their pre-recession highs, but they also have shown the recession to have been deeper than suggested by the GDP.  Further, the GDI shows the onset of the recession to have been a full year earlier than is indicated by the GDP. 

The GNP or Gross National Product, which actually is the broadest economic measure, includes GDP plus the trade balance in factor income, the flows of interest and dividend payments.  Where current reporting shows a peak-to-trough GDP contraction of 4.1% from 4q2007 to 2q2009, with the 4q2010 GDP level now 0.13% above the level of 4q2007, the GNP contracted by 4.7% in the same period and stands 0.17% below its 4q2007 level.

The GDI or Gross Domestic Income, which in theory is the equivalent income measure to the GDP’s consumption measure, is surveyed and estimated separately from the GDP.  The GDI is forced to GDP equivalence with the addition or subtraction of a “statistical discrepancy.”  Again, where current reporting shows a peak-to-trough GDP contraction of 4.1% from 4q2007 to 2q2009, with the 4q2010 GDP level now 0.13% above the level of 4q2007, the GDI (net of the statistical discrepancy) contracted by 4.9% in the same period and stands 0.30% below its 4q2007 level.  The GDI also shows same overall contraction from 4q2006 through 3q2009, suggestive of a much longer official downturn.  All these numbers should see significant downside revisions in the pending benchmark revisions.

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

BEA’s “Third” Guesstimate on Fourth-Quarter 2010 GDP Was Weaker Though Stronger.  The second-revision to the estimate of fourth-quarter 2010 GDP, though to the upside, was largely statistical noise.  To the extent the growth was stronger (annualized 3.1% versus 2.8%), the news was not positive.  It reflected a downward revision to consumption with a more-than-offsetting upside revision to inventory change.  Unwanted inventory buildup usually is offset at some point with lower production.

GDP.  Published this morning, March 25th, by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the "third" estimate (second revision) of real (inflation-adjusted) fourth-quarter 2010 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) annualized quarterly growth revised to 3.11% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), up from the second estimate of 2.79%, but still down from the initial estimate of 3.17%.  The third-quarter 2010 growth estimate was 2.56%.  For the year, average 2010 GDP versus 2009 was revised to 2.85% from 2.83% (initially 2.86%), versus a 2.63% decline in 2009 against 2008, while year-to-year change in fourth-quarter 2010 over fourth-quarter 2009 was revised to 2.78% from 2.70% (initially 2.79%), higher than the 1.95% year-to-year gain in fourth-quarter 2009, but still lower than the 3.25% seen in third-quarter 2010.

The fourth-quarter GDP implicit price deflator estimate was revised to an annualized pace of 0.35% from 0.38% (initially 0.26%), versus 2.03% annualized quarterly inflation for third-quarter 2010.  In contrast, annualized seasonally-adjusted quarterly inflation for the CPI-U in the fourth-quarter spiked to a seasonally-adjusted 2.62%, from 1.43% annualized inflation in the third-quarter (see Commentary No. 353).  The lower the inflation rate that is used in deflating the GDP, the stronger is the resulting inflation-adjusted number and vice versa.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for fourth-quarter 2010 remains an approximate annual contraction of 2.1% versus the official estimate of a 2.8% gain.  Such is more negative than the alternate 1.4% annual contraction (3.2% official gain) in the third-quarter (see the Alternate Data tab).  While annualized real quarterly growth is not estimated formally on an alternative basis, a flat-to-minus quarter-to-quarter change still appears to have been realistic for the fourth-quarter, in what generally has been a protracted period of bottom-bouncing.

Reflecting the latest revisions, the following graph shows year-to-year percent change in the official inflation-adjusted quarterly GDP for the history of the series.  The record annual contraction for the series was 4.11%, seen in second-quarter 2009.  The GDP and related series will go through their annual benchmark revisions on July 29, 2011.

 

 

GNP.  The initial estimate for annualized real growth in fourth-quarter GNP (Gross National Product)—GDP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments)—was 2.75% versus 2.31% in the third-quarter, with year-to-year growth slowing to 2.82% in the fourth-quarter from 3.35% in the third-quarter.  For the year, average 2010 GNP versus 2009 was a gain of 3.11% versus a 3.18% decline in 2009 against 2008.

GDI.  The initial estimate for annualized real growth in fourth-quarter GDI (Gross Domestic Income)—the economy’s income-side theoretical equivalent measure to the consumption side’s GDP measure—was 4.60% versus 1.21% in the third-quarter, with year-to-year growth slowing to 3.15% in the fourth-quarter from 3.66% in the third-quarter.  For the year, average 2010 GDI versus 2009 was a gain of 3.10% versus a 3.80% decline in 2009 against 2008.

 

{{durable_goods February Decline was Within Normal Series Volatility.}}February Durable Goods Orders Decline was Within Normal Series Volatility.  The Census Bureau reported yesterday (March 24th) that the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods declined by 0.9% (down by 0.3% before prior-period revisions) month-to-month in February 2011, after a revised 3.6% (previously 2.7%) increase in January.  The monthly decline was despite a 26.7% jump in irregular, long-term aircraft orders.  Unadjusted, year-to-year change in total February new orders was a gain of 6.5%, down from the revised 8.7% (previously 8.2%) annual increase reported for January.  Subject to many of the same sampling and adjustment problems seen with retail sales and payroll reporting, the durable goods series will be subject to a benchmark revision on May 13, 2011.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders rose by 2.5% (up by 4.2% before prior-period revisions) in February, versus a revised monthly gain of 6.6% (previously up by 4.6%) in January.  For February, the unadjusted year-to-year growth in the series was 6.5%, down from a revised 13.5% (previously 12.4%) gain in January.

The following graphs are not adjusted for inflation and show the monthly volatility in the seasonally-adjusted durable goods new orders series from airplane orders.  The first graph shows commercial aircraft orders on both a monthly and on a six-month moving-average basis, and the second graph shows seasonally-adjusted monthly total new orders for durable goods (NODG), as well as NODG net of aircraft orders. 

 

The series appear possibly to be topping out.  This is despite last year’s benchmark revision that built an upside bias into the monthly numbers.  The plotted data are not adjusted for inflation, because there is no particularly meaningful inflation index that would make sense as the deflator (I deliberately exclude any inflation measures used in the national income series, such as GDP, which have been modeled and massaged in such a fashion as to have little relationship to the real world.)   Net of inflation, however, the pattern of monthly increases—seen on average since 2009—would be shallower, much shallower.

 

Home Sales Problems Intensify.  Both existing and new home sales moved sharply lower in February 2011, down 9.6% and 16.9% on a monthly basis, paralleling the 19.6% monthly decline reported last week for February housing starts, see Commentary No. 358.  New home sales hit an historic low for the series, while housing starts had been reported at a post-World War II low.  Annual declines generally were statistically significant, with existing and new home sales down by 2.8% and 28.0%, respectively, versus the annual decline in housing starts of 20.8%.  The pattern of bottom-bouncing in the industry has turned to one of renewed aggregate decline, with the distressed portion of home sales increasing markedly. 

Wednesday’s (March 23rd) reporting of February new-home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) showed a statistically-insignificant monthly decline of 16.9% (down 12.0% before prior period revisions) +/- 22.3% (95% confidence interval) from January.  January’s revised level was down by 9.6% (previously a 12.6%) from December.  The year-to-year decline in February 2011 new-home sales was a statistically-significant 28.0 +/- 17.3% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 13.8% (previously 18.6%) decline in January.

Monday’s (March 21st) release of February existing-home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) showed a 9.6% monthly decline (down 9.0% net of prior-period revisions), versus January’s revised 3.4% (previously 2.7%) gain.  On a year-to-year basis, February sales were down by 2.8% from February 2010.

Foreclosure activity remained an intensifying distorting factor for home sales, with "distressed" activity accounting for an estimated 39% of existing sales in the NAR’s February reporting, the highest portion seen since Spring 2009, and up from 37% in January. 

 

 

Separately, the Census Bureau acknowledges that a portion of new home sales also is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimate as to the scope of the issue.  Some in the construction trade have difficulty competing with the pricing of foreclosed properties.  Until the foreclosure problems get worked out in the system, monthly changes in these home sales numbers cannot be taken as meaningful positive indicators (when the numbers are positive) of underlying activity in homeowner real estate, as it relates to general economic activity.

 

 

 

Week Ahead.  Though not commonly recognized, there is both an intensifying double-dip recession and a rapidly escalating inflation problem.  Until such time as financial-market expectations catch up with underlying reality, reporting generally will continue to show higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic results in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions, benchmark or otherwise.  

Payroll Employment, Unemployment (March 2011).  The publication of March 2011 labor conditions is scheduled for Friday, April 1st.  Per Briefing.com (as we go to press), the consensus estimates are for March nonfarm payrolls to gain 170,000 versus a 192,000 gain in February, and for the headline U.3 unemployment rate to hold at 8.9%.  The reporting here is of particularly poor quality at the moment, as discussed in Commentary No. 355, and those issues will be updated in next week’s payroll Commentary.  That said, underlying reality would be consistent with a much-weaker-than-consensus jobs outlook and with a spike in the headline unemployment rate.

SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate (March 2011).  An indication of the preliminary estimate for the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate for March will be published with the April 1st Commentary, with formal posting of the estimate in the Alternate Data section over the ensuing weekend.  Early-March reporting so far has been consistent with some month-to-month increase, with a narrowing of the year-to-year pace of decline.

 

__________

No. 358: February CPI, PPI, Production, Housing Starts, Real Retail Sales, Real M3

Thursday, March 17th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 358
February CPI, PPI, Production, Housing Starts, Real Retail Sales, Real M3

March 17, 2011

__________

Economy Slumps Anew as Inflation Soars

Fed’s Dollar Debasement Efforts Begin to Yield Their Poisoned Fruit

February Annual Consumer Inflation: 2.1% (CPI-U), 2.3% (CPI-W), 9.6% (SGS)

Housing Starts Fall Back to Post-World War II Historic Low

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, March 25th, covering revised fourth-quarter GDP, February Homes Sales and New Orders for Durable Goods.  Also scheduled for release on March 25th is the annual benchmark revision to industrial production.  The revisions will be analyzed in a Commentary after full data have been made available.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Inflation and Deepening Recession.  Reporting of the last two days has shown a sharp acceleration in the pace of reported inflation, exceeding consensus expectations, while economic reporting has been negative and worse than consensus estimates.  At the same time, the U.S. dollar has hit a new record low against the Swiss franc, with ongoing turmoil seen in various markets, resulting at least partially from ongoing difficulties from the Japanese earthquake.  Where both the broad economic and inflation outlooks were updated fully in Tuesday’s (March 15th) Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), and where the outlook has not changed a bit, I am not going rehash those areas here, other than to update some graphics.

 

 

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

CPI-U’s 0.5% Monthly Gain Would Have Been 0.6% but for Understated Gasoline.   Surging inflation has continued in response to the Federal Reserve’s dollar-debasement efforts, as higher food prices have begun to show up in official reporting, and despite the Bureau of Labor Statistics’ (BLS) underestimation of the increase in February’s gasoline prices.  Accordingly, further acceleration in reported inflation is a good bet for March, and annual CPI inflation soon should top 3%.  With the U.S. economy shrinking anew, this environment of rising inflation reflects the Fed’s monetary distortions; none of the inflation reflects strong U.S. economic demand, which is nonexistent.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported today (March 17th) that the seasonally-adjusted February 2011 CPI-U rose by 0.55% (up by 0.49%, unadjusted) for the month.  That followed an increase of 0.40% (up by 0.48%, unadjusted) in January.  The February reporting reflected an unadjusted monthly increase in gasoline prices of 2.2%, which was 4.7% after seasonal adjustment.  Independent and more-reliable reporting from the Department of Energy (DOE) showed an unadjusted monthly gain of 3.7%.  If the DOE number were used, February CPI-U would have been up by 0.62%, instead of the 0.55% reported.    

Annualized, seasonally-adjusted, CPI-U inflation for the three months ended February 2011, versus the three months ended November 2010, continued to accelerate, with respective gains of 4.26% versus 2.53%.  Last month, annualized inflation was up by 3.10% for the three months ended January 2011, versus 2.26% for the three months ended October 2010.  For fourth-quarter 2010, the annualized inflation was 2.62% versus1.43% in the third-quarter. 

February’s unadjusted year-to-year CPI-U inflation surged to 2.11%, from a 1.63% annual increase in January.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s March 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the virtually flat 0.02% adjusted monthly gain seen in March 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for March 2011, the difference in March’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from February 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 2.11%.  Annual CPI inflation should top 3% within the next two months.

CPI-W.  The narrower, seasonally-adjusted CPI-W, which has greater weighting for gasoline than does the CPI-U, rose in February 2011 by 0.62% (up 0.52% unadjusted), following January’s adjusted monthly increase of 0.45% (up 0.53% unadjusted).  Reflecting DOE gasoline prices increases, the adjusted monthly CPI-W gain would have been 0.72% instead of the reported 0.62% 

Annualized, seasonally-adjusted, CPI-W inflation for the three months ended February 2011, versus the three months ended November 2010, continued to accelerate, with respective gains of 4.93% versus 3.02%.  Last month, annualized inflation was up by 3.56% for the three months ended January 2011, versus 2.73% for the three months ended October 2010.  For fourth-quarter 2010, the annualized inflation was 3.09% versus1.71% in the third-quarter. 

Unadjusted, February 2011’s year-to-year CPI-W inflation was 2.35%, against a 1.80% annual increase in January.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U—the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists, including the recent presidential deficit commission, as the replacement for the CPI—is reported only on an unadjusted basis.  Year-to-year inflation increased to 1.97% in February 2011, from 1.45% in January.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 5.5% in February 2011, up from 5.0% in January, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to about 9.6% (9.62% for those using the extra digit) in February, from about 9.1% in January. 

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation. Despite March 7th’s historic high gold price of $1,437.50 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix) and the multi-decade high silver price of $36.60 per troy ounce (London fix), gold and silver prices have yet to approach their historic high levels, adjusted for inflation.  The earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 would be $2,418 per troy ounce, based on February 2011 CPI-U-adjusted dollars, $8,215 per troy ounce based on SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (all series not seasonally adjusted). 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org) has not been hit since, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars.  Based on February 2011 CPI-U inflation, the 1980 silver price peak would be $141 per troy ounce and would be $478 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (again, all series not seasonally adjusted).

As shown on page 43 of the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), over the decades, the price of gold has compensated for more than the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the dollar based on the SGS-Alternate Consumer Price Measure (1980 Methodologies Base).

Real Money Supply M3.  The signal of the still unfolding double-dip recession, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), most recently discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report (2011), continues and is graphed below.  Based on the February CPI-U report and the latest February SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate, the annual contraction in real M3 for February 2011 deepened anew (due primarily to rising inflation), down by 4.3%, versus a 3.9% annual contraction in January.

The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn or its duration.  The current downturn signal was generated just over one year ago, in December 2009.  The broad economy tends to follow in downturn or renewed deterioration roughly six to nine months after the signal, as has appeared to have started in recent months.  Increasing weakness in a number of series should become evident as benchmark revisions to industrial production, retail sales and GDP show weaker than currently assumed economic activity for the last year or two, and as current reporting turns increasingly negative.  Such eventually will lead to recognition of a double-dip recession.

 

 

Real Retail Sales.  Based on the February 2011 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly February 2011 retail sales rose by 0.42%, where, before inflation adjustment, the current number was up by 0.97%.  With apparent understatement of February gasoline price inflation, the bulk of nominal reported growth in February should have been covered by inflation.  Real January sales revised to an increase of 0.31% (initially a 0.06% contraction).  See Commentary No. 356 for other February 2011 retail sales detail.

February real retail sales rose at a year-to-year pace of 6.57%, versus the revised 6.32% (previously 6.01%) annual gain reported for January. 

 

 

The “recovery” in real retail sales is reflected in the preceding graphs.  Both graphs show the monthly level of the seasonally-adjusted activity.  The first graph shows the data in historical context since World War II.  The second graph shows the same numbers in clearer detail for the current period beginning in 2000.

Since November 2008, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $164.6 billion (the deflated February number was $174.2 billion).  With likely benchmark revisions (due April 29th), the series should be topping out.  There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity—no recovery—just general bottom-bouncing.  Accordingly, real retail sales levels in the months ahead should turn increasingly negative.

 

February PPI Showed Largest Jump Since June 2009.  As reported yesterday, March 16th, by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) rose in February 2011 by 1.6% (up by 1.4% before seasonal adjustment) month-to-month, following a monthly increase in January of 0.8% (up by 0.8% before seasonal adjustment ).  The monthly PPI finished goods increase largely reflected upside pressures on both food and energy that were induced by the Fed’s dollar-debasement policies.  The heaviest impact from rising oil prices is still to come.

 Annualized, seasonally-adjusted PPI inflation for the last three months (ended February) accelerated to 14.0%, up from an annualized pace of 6.6% in the prior three months ended November.  Unadjusted and year-to-year, February 2011’s PPI inflation was 5.6% versus 3.6% in January, and at the highest level in 11 months. 

Separately, on a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted February 2011 intermediate goods rose by 2.0% (up by 1.1% in January), with February’s crude goods prices jumping up by 3.4% (up by 3.3% in January).  Year-to-year inflation in February intermediate goods was up by 7.8% (a 6.0% gain in January), with February’s annual inflation in crude goods at 15.9% (up by 10.0% in January).

 

February Industrial Production Continued Topping Out.  Subject to pending benchmark revisions next Friday, March 25th, this morning’s (March 17th) Federal Reserve Board release of seasonally-adjusted February 2011 industrial production showed a monthly contraction of 0.08% (up by 0.36% before prior-period revisions.  January’s initially-reported 0.06% decline was revised to a gain of 0.31%.  Where the monthly decline was exacerbated by a decline in utility usage from unseasonable weather, the series still appears to be topping out.

Year-to-year change in February 2011 production was 5.55%, down from a revised 5.61% (previously 5.15%) gain in January, and down from the revised near-term peak of 8.35% in June.  The year-to-year contraction of 12.86% seen in May 2009 was the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II.

 

The “recovery” in industrial production is reflected in the preceding graphs.  Both graphs show the monthly level of the production index.  The first graph shows the data in the historical context since World War II.  The second graph shows the same numbers in clearer detail for the current period beginning in 2000, including the February 2011 downtick.

For the last 26 months, the production index has averaged 90.62, around which the series has been fluctuating, although it consistently has been moving higher in recent months.  Production activity had leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that at one point effectively wiped out the last eight years of growth in industrial production.  Keep in mind that these data all will be recast in the pending benchmark revision (March 25th).  Despite ongoing upside gains generated by short-lived stimulus and seasonal-factor distortions, the series likely still is bottom-bouncing and should begin to soften anew, consistently and significantly, in the oncoming months.

 

February Housing Starts Drop Back to April 2009 Historic Low.  The Census Bureau reported yesterday, March 16th, a statistically-significant monthly decline of 22.5% +/- 11.4% (95% confidence interval) in seasonally-adjusted February 2011 housing starts; the decline was 19.6% before prior-period revisions.  January starts were revised to an 18.4% (previously a 14.6%) gain.  The February annualized level of 479,000 was effectively the same as the April 2009 historic low of 477,000. 

Year-to-year change in February starts was a statistically-significant decline of 20.8% +/- 10.5% (95% confidence interval), following a revised annual 1.0% increase (previously a 2.6% decline) in January.

Although the pattern of housing starts generally remains one of bottom-bouncing at an historically low-level plateau of activity, as seen over the last 26 months, recent activity has started to slow anew, meaningfully.  Significantly weaker monthly numbers remain likely in the months ahead.  Since December 2008, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 568,000.  In those 26 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, with the February 2011 monthly reading of 479,000 not only 16% below average, but again also effectively at the historic low of 477,000 seen in April 2009.  The April 2009 low, as shown in the first graph, also was well below any level reported in the predecessor series of nonfarm housing starts series, which was introduced in 1946.  Housing starts appear to have begun rolling down hill, anew, and that should be reflected quite clearly in the next several months of reporting. 

 

 

 

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period benchmark revisions.  

Home Sales (February 2011).  February existing home sales (National Association of Realtors) are due for release on Monday, March 21st, followed by new home sales (Census Bureau) on Wednesday, March 23rd.  As with the sharp deterioration seen in housing starts, these volatile series should remain extremely weak, with any positive monthly change (new homes) again lacking statistical significance.  Also, as usual, given the extreme volatility, reporting error and revisions in these series, given the poor-quality seasonal adjustments, given continuing negative anecdotal evidence, and given ongoing massive distortions from increasingly volatile foreclosure activity, the monthly movements in these numbers remain particularly meaningless.

New Orders for Durable Goods (February 2011).  Due for release on Thursday, March 24th, February’s new orders for durable goods likely will not show a meaningful monthly change, with odds slightly favoring a decline in this irregularly volatile series.

Gross Domestic Product—GDP (Fourth-Quarter 2010—Third Estimate, Second Revision).  The second revision (third estimate) of fourth-quarter GDP is due for release on March 25th.  The revision likely will be no more than statistical noise around the prior, revised annualized real growth level of 2.8%.  Initial reporting of Gross National Product (GNP) and Gross Domestic Income (GDI), however, could offer a surprise.

Index of Industrial Production (Annual Benchmark Revisions).  The annual benchmark revision to the index of industrial production is due for release at noon on Friday, March 25th.  Availability of full historical data sometimes lags the press release.  Look for the revisions to restate recent economic history to the downside.

 

__________

Hyperinflation Special Report (2011)

Tuesday, March 15th, 2011

Update: February 27th, 2012.

A fully updated, "2012" version of this Hyperinflation Report was published on January 25th, 2012. 

It is now open to non-SGS-subscribers: 

 

Hyperinflaton Special Report (Update 2012)

 

The 2011 version remains available, below.

 

 

 HYPERINFLATION SPECIAL REPORT (2011)

SPECIAL COMMENTARY NUMBER 357

March 15, 2011

__________

United States Nears Hyperinflationary Great Depression

Federal Reserve and Government Have Exploded the U.S. Fiscal Crisis,
Shattered Global Confidence in the U.S. Dollar but Not Resolved
Ongoing Economic and Systemic-Solvency Crises

High Risk of Ultimate Dollar Disaster Beginning to Unfold in Months Ahead
2014 Remains the Outside Timing for Same

Contracting Money Supply Can Be Inflationary
When Real Economy Contracts Even Faster

Major Economic Series Suggest Formal Depression in Place

__________

 

Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) is the fourth in a series of related writings going back to 2006.  It updates and replaces the Hyperinflation Special Report (2010 Update) of December 2, 2009, which preceded: the Fed’s formal monetization of U.S. Treasury debt aimed at debasing the U.S. dollar; the sharpest post-World War II annual decline in broad money growth; the pronouncement of an official end to the 2007 recession despite no meaningful recovery; passage of the Administration’s health insurance legislation; and the mid-term election.  Nonetheless, the outlook has changed little.  With the passage of 15 months since the last report (updated circumstances have been covered regularly in weekly Commentaries), events just have moved this pending ultimate financial crisis into much closer time proximity.     

In turn, the 2010 report updated and replaced the Hyperinflation Special Report version of April 8, 2008, which was published post-Bear Stearns, but pre-Lehman, pre-TARP, pre-recession recognition and pre-2008 presidential election.  The April 2008 report updated and expanded upon the three-part Hyperinflation Series that began with the December 2006 SGS Newsletter, which predated public recognition of the 2007 economic and systemic-solvency crises.

This missive includes new material in addition to much of the same text that was in the 2010 edition, with revisions and updates reflecting the still-unfolding economic and systemic-solvency crises.  It expands upon some areas in previous reports; and answers to questions and issues raised by subscribers have been incorporated into the text.  Subscriber questions not directly answered here will be addressed in personal correspondence.

 __________

 

Contents

Section 1—Overview.

  

__________

Great Collapse Nears

The U.S. economic and systemic-solvency crises of the last four years only have been precursors to the coming Great Collapse: a hyperinflationary great depression.  Such will encompass a complete collapse in the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar; a collapse in the normal stream of U.S. commercial and economic activity; a collapse in the U.S. financial system as we know it; and a likely realignment of the U.S. political environment.  Outside timing on the hyperinflation remains 2014, but there is strong risk of the currency catastrophe beginning to unfold in the months ahead.  It may be starting to unfold as we go to press in March 2011, but moving into a full blown hyperinflation could take months to a year, beyond the onset, depending on the developing global view of the dollar and reactions of the U.S. government and the Federal Reserve.

Prerequisites to the crisis unfolding include: the Federal Reserve moving to monetize U.S. Treasury debt; the U.S. dollar losing its traditional safe-haven status; the U.S. dollar losing its reserve status; the federal budget deficit and Treasury funding needs spiraling out of control.  The Fed moved to monetize Treasury debt in November 2010.  A much-diminished U.S. dollar safe-haven status has become evident in early March 2011, along with serious calls for a new global reserve currency.  The economy is not in recovery and should display significant new weakness in the months ahead, with severely expansive implications for the federal deficit, Treasury funding needs and requisite Fed monetization of debt.

As the advance squalls from this great financial tempest come ashore, the government could be expected to launch a variety of efforts at forestalling the hyperinflation’s landfall, but such efforts will buy little time and ultimately will fail in preventing the dollar’s collapse.  The timing of the onset of full blown hyperinflation likely will be coincident with a broad global rejection/repudiation of the U.S. dollar.   

With no viable or politically-practical way of balancing U.S. fiscal conditions and avoiding this financial economic Armageddon, the best that individuals can do at this point is to protect themselves, both as to meeting short-range survival needs as well as to preserving current wealth and assets over the longer term.  Efforts there, respectively, would encompass building a store of key consumables, such as food and water, and moving assets into physical precious metals and outside of the U.S. dollar.

Background

By 2004, fiscal malfeasance of successive U.S. Administrations and Congresses had pushed the federal government into effective long-term insolvency (likely to have triggered hyperinflation by 2018).  GAAP-based (generally accepted accounting principles) accounting then showed total federal obligations at $50 trillion—more than four-times the level of U.S. GDP—that were increasing each year by GAAP-based annual deficits in the uncontainable four- to five-trillion dollar range.  Those extreme operating shortfalls continue unabated, with total federal obligations at $76 trillion—more than five-times U.S. GDP—at the end of the 2010 fiscal year.  Taxes cannot be raised enough to bring the GAAP-based deficit into balance, and the political will in Washington is lacking to cut government spending severely, particularly in terms of the necessary slashing of unfunded liabilities in government social programs such as Social Security and Medicare.

Bankrupt governments—unable to raise adequate cash to cover obligations—invariably crank up the currency printing presses to do so, creating a hyperinflation.  The federal government and Federal Reserve’s actions in response to, and in conjunction with, the economic and financial crises of 2007, however, accelerated the ultimate process—both in terms of fiscal deterioration and global perception of the issues—moving the outside horizon for hyperinflation from 2018 to 2014.  Even so, over the last year or two, the government and Fed’s actions and policies, and economic and financial-market developments have continued to exacerbate the circumstance, such that there is significant chance of the early stages of the hyperinflation breaking in the months ahead.  Key to the near-term timing remains a sharp break in the exchange rate value of the U.S. dollar, with the rest of the world effectively moving to dump the U.S. currency and dollar-denominated paper assets.

The current U.S. financial markets, financial system and economy remain highly unstable and increasingly vulnerable to unexpected shocks.  At the same time, the Federal Reserve and the federal government are dedicated to preventing systemic collapse and broad price deflation.  To prevent any imminent collapse—as has been seen in official activities of the last several years—they will create and spend whatever money is needed, including the deliberate debasement of the U.S. dollar with the intent of increasing domestic inflation.  As shown in the following graph, those efforts include effective full monetization of recent net Treasury debt issuance.  During the three full calendar months since the November 3, 2010 announcement of its purchase program of U.S. Treasury debt, the Federal Reserve more than fully monetized (109%) net Treasury issuance in the same period.

 

The efforts to stave off systemic collapse also have resulted in uncontrolled fiscal excesses by the federal government.  The deliberate monetary and fiscal abuses have resulted in de-stabilizing selling pressures against the U.S. currency, in rising gold and silver prices, and in a nascent pickup in reported U.S. consumer inflation.  That inflation has been driven by unhealthy monetary policy instead of healthy economic demand, and it should continue to increase in the months ahead. 

The damage to U.S. dollar credibility has spread at an accelerating pace.  Not only have major powers such as China, Russia and France, and institutions such as the IMF, recently called for the abandonment of the U.S. dollar as the global reserve currency, but also the dollar appears to have lost much of its traditional safe-haven status in the last month.  With the current spate of political shocks in the Middle East and North Africa (a circumstance much more likely to deteriorate than to disappear in the year ahead), those seeking to protect their assets have been fleeing to other traditional safe-havens, such as precious metals and the Swiss franc, at the expense of the U.S. currency.  The Swiss franc and gold price both have hit historic highs against the dollar in early-March 2011, with the silver price at its highest level in decades, rapidly closing in on its speculative historic peak of January 1980.  

Crises Brewed by Federal Government and Federal Reserve Malfeasance

The economic and systemic crises, triggered by the collapse of debt excesses that had been encouraged actively by the Greenspan Federal Reserve, have been centered on the U.S. financial system.  Recognizing that the U.S. economy was sagging under the weight of structural income impairment created by government trade, regulatory and social policies—policies that limited real (inflation-adjusted) consumer income growth, where the average U.S. household could not stay ahead of inflation or make ends meet—then-Federal Reserve Chairman Alan Greenspan played along with the political and banking systems.  He made policy decisions to steal economic activity from the future, fueling economic growth of the last decade largely through debt expansion.  (See Structural Consumer Liquidity Problems.

The Greenspan Fed pushed for ever-greater systemic leverage, including the happy acceptance of new financial products—instruments of mispackaged lending risks—designed for consumption by global entities that openly did not understand the nature of the risks being taken.  Spreading the credit risks of banks among other industries, for example, was encouraged actively by the Fed as healthy and stabilizing for both the domestic and global financial systems.  Also complicit in this broad malfeasance was the U.S. government, including both major political parties in successive Administrations and Congresses.

As with consumers, though, the federal government could not make ends meet.  Driven by self-serving politics aimed at appeasing that portion of the electorate that could be kept docile through ever-expanding government programs and spending, political Washington became dependent on ever-expanding federal deficit spending, unfunded obligations and debt. 

Purportedly, it was Arthur Burns, Fed Chairman under Richard Nixon, who first offered the advice that helped to guide Alan Greenspan and a number of Administrations.  The gist of the imparted wisdom was that if the Fed or federal government ran into economic or financial-system difficulties, the federal budget deficit and the U.S. dollar simply could be ignored—or sacrificed.  Ignoring them would not matter, it was argued, because doing so would not cost the incumbent powers any votes. 

Back in 2005, I raised the issue of an inevitable U.S. hyperinflation with an advisor to both the Bush Administration and Fed Chairman Greenspan.  I was told simply that “It’s too far into the future to worry about.”   

Indeed, attempting to push the big problems further into the future continues to be the working strategy for both the Fed, under Chairman Ben Bernanke, and the current Administration and Congress.  

In a February 25, 2011 speech, Federal Reserve Vice Chairman Janet Yellen examined the results of the recent use of “unconventional policy tools” by the Fed: “Each of these policy tools tends to generate spillovers to other financial markets, such as boosting stock prices and putting moderate downward pressure on the foreign exchange value of the dollar.” 

While Wall Street may hail any artificial propping it can get from the Fed’s efforts to support the markets, more than “moderate” related declines in the U.S. dollar’s exchange rate destroy any illusions of stock gains and savage the U.S. consumers’ dollar purchasing power.  A declining dollar can turn U.S. stock profits into losses for those living outside the dollar-denominated world, as funds are converted back to the strengthening currency domestic to the investor.  Inflation driven by dollar weakness will do the same for those in a U.S. dollar-denominated environment, where, eventually, inflation can turn U.S. stock profits into real (inflation-adjusted) losses (see Financial Hedges and Investments. ).

Indeed, the U.S. dollar and the budget deficit do matter, and the future is at hand.  As the federal budget deficit spirals well beyond sustainability and containment at an accelerating pace, and as the Fed moves with great deliberation to debase and to impair the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar, to generate rising consumer inflation, the day of ultimate financial reckoning appears to be breaking.

Saving the System at Any Cost

The Federal Reserve and the U.S. Treasury moved early in the current solvency crisis to prevent a collapse of the banking system, at any cost.  It was the collapse of the banking system and loss of depositor assets in the early-1930s that intensified the Great Depression and its attendant deflation.  A somewhat parallel risk was envisioned in 2008 as the system passed over the brink.  The decision was made to avoid a deflationary great depression.

Effective financial impairments and at least partial nationalizations or orchestrated bailouts/takeovers resulted for institutions such as Bear Stearns, Citigroup, Washington Mutual, AIG, General Motors, Chrysler, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, along with a number of further troubled financial institutions.  The Fed moved to provide whatever systemic liquidity would be needed, while the federal government moved to finance corporate bailouts, to guarantee any instruments or entities it had to, and to introduce large amounts of short-lived stimulus spending.

Curiously, though, the Fed and the Treasury let Lehman Brothers fail outright, which triggered a foreseeable run on the system and markedly intensified the systemic solvency crisis in September 2008.  Whether someone was trying to play naive political games, with the public and Congress increasingly raising questions of moral hazard issues, or whether the U.S. financial wizards missed what would happen or simply moved to bring the crisis to a head, still remains to be seen.

In the still-early days of the crises, the Obama Administration pushed ahead with its social agenda, introducing major new government programs such as federal government control of healthcare and health insurance.  Irrespective of stated goals of not increasing the federal deficit further, the resulting healthcare/insurance legislation will have severely negative impact on the federal deficit—as will most other new legislation and “stimulus” efforts, either from massive net expenses, or from losses in tax revenues in an ever-weakening economy.

While the U.S. Government’s 2010 GAAP-based financial statements (see GAAP-Based U.S. Government Finances. ) suggested a one-time large improvement in Medicare unfunded liabilities, due to the healthcare legislation, the GAO viewed the Administration’s claims there skeptically, offering an alternative accounting that showed net fiscal damage, not a one-time improvement, from the legislation.

Efforts to save the system at any cost likely will continue as long as possible, with the government spending whatever money it and the Federal Reserve need to create, until such time as the global financial markets rebel.  The ultimate cost here, though, will be in inflation and the increasing debasement of the purchasing power of the U.S. Dollar, and an eventual dollar collapse beyond any government or Federal Reserve control.

U.S. Economy Is Not Recovering

Economic activity in the United States began to decline in 2006 or early-2007, and it plunged from late-2007 into 2009 at a pace not seen since the Great Depression.  Subsequently, economic activity has been bottom-bouncing with some boosts from short-lived stimulus effects.  Without any fundamental turnaround in structural consumer-income problems that have been driving the downturn, and with contracting, inflation-adjusted systemic liquidity, the economy has started to slow anew.  Popularly followed economic series should be showing convincing renewed contractions in the months ahead.

Despite pronouncements of an end to the 2007 recession and the onset of an economic recovery, the U.S. economy still is mired in a deepening structural contraction, which eventually will be recognized as a double- or multiple-dip recession.  Beyond the politically- and market-hyped GDP reporting, key underlying economic series show patterns of activity that are consistent with a peak-to-trough (so far) contraction in inflation-adjusted activity in excess of 10%, a formal depression (see Recession, Depression and Great Depression.).  The apparent gains of the last year, reported in series such as retail sales and industrial production, should soften meaningfully in upcoming benchmark revisions.  The revised patterns should tend to parallel the recent downside benchmark revision to payroll employment, while the July 2011 annual GDP revisions also are an almost certain bet to show a much weaker economy in recent years than currently is recognized in the markets.  (See Section 4—Current Economic and Inflation Conditions in the United States.)

Existing formal projections for the federal budget deficit, banking system solvency, etc. all are based on assumptions of positive economic growth, going forward.  That growth will not happen, and continued economic contraction will exacerbate fiscal conditions and banking-system liquidity problems terribly.

Hyperinflation Nears

As previously noted, before the systemic-solvency crisis began to unfold in 2007, the U.S. government already had condemned the U.S. dollar to a hyperinflationary grave by taking on debt and obligations that never could be covered through raising taxes and/or by severely slashing government spending that had become politically untouchable.  Also, the U.S. economy already had entered a severe structural downturn, which helped to trigger the systemic-solvency crisis. 

Bankrupt sovereign states most commonly use the currency printing press as a solution to not having enough money to cover obligations.  The alternative here would be for the U.S. eventually to renege on its existing debt and obligations, a solution for modern sovereign states rarely seen outside of governments overthrown in revolution, and a solution with no happier ending than simply printing the needed money.  With the creation of massive amounts of new fiat dollars (not backed by gold or silver) comes the eventual full destruction of the value of the U.S. dollar and related dollar-denominated paper assets.

The U.S. government and the Federal Reserve have committed the system to its ultimate insolvency, through the easy politics of a bottomless pocketbook, the servicing of big-moneyed special interests, gross mismanagement, and a deliberate and ongoing effort to debase the U.S. currency.  Yet, the particularly egregious fiscal and monetary responses to economic and solvency crises of the last four years have exacerbated the government’s solvency issues, bringing the great financial tempest close enough to making landfall that the hairs on the backs of investors necks should be standing on end.

Numerous foreign governments/central banks have offered unusually blunt criticism of U.S. fiscal and Federal Reserve policies as the crisis has expanded, but the perceived self-interests of the U.S. government and Fed always will come first in setting domestic policy.  Where both private and official demand for U.S. Treasuries had been increasingly unenthusiastic, the Fed—the U.S. central bank—effectively has been fully funding Treasury needs since December 2010, with its latest version of “quantitative easing,” a euphemism for Fed monetization of U.S. Treasury debt.    

The so-called “QE2” likely will be expanded, or supplemented by “QE3,” in the months ahead, as the ongoing economic turmoil triggers significant further fiscal deterioration.  Those actions should pummel heavily the U.S. dollar’s exchange rate against other major currencies.  Looming with uncertain timing is a panicked dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated paper assets, which remains the most likely event as proximal trigger for the onset of hyperinflation in the near-term. 

The early stages of the hyperinflation would be marked simply by an accelerating upturn in consumer prices, a pattern that already has begun to unfold in response to QE2.  Also, money supply velocity (see IInflation and Slowing/Contracting Money Growth.) will spike, as the U.S. dollar, again, comes under heavy and even disorderly selling pressure, with both domestic and foreign holders getting rid of their dollar holdings as quickly as possible.


Although the U.S. has no way of avoiding a financial Armageddon, various government intervention tactics might slow the process for brief periods, and the system always is vulnerable to external shocks, such as wars and natural disasters.  Government actions could include supportive dollar intervention, restrictions on international capital flows, wage and price controls, etc. (see 
Possible Official Actions and Responses/External Risks. ).  Effects of any such moves in delaying the onset of full hyperinflation, though, would be limited and short-lived.  There is no obvious course of action or external force at this point of the process that meaningfully would put off the nearing day of reckoning. 

What lies ahead will be extremely difficult, painful and unhappy times for many in the United States.  The functioning and adaptation of the U.S. economy and financial markets to a hyperinflation likely will be particularly disruptive.  Trouble could range from turmoil in the food distribution chain and electronic cash and credit systems unable to handle rapidly changing circumstances, to political instability.  The situation quickly would devolve from a deepening depression, to an intensifying hyperinflationary great depression.

While resulting U.S. economic difficulties would have broad global impact, the initial hyperinflation should be largely a U.S. problem, albeit with major implications for the global currency system. 

For those living in the United States, long-range strategies should look to assure safety and survival, which from a financial standpoint means preserving wealth and assets. Also directly impacted, of course, are those holding or dependent upon U.S. dollars or dollar-denominated assets, and those living in “dollarized” countries.

Physical gold (sovereign coins priced near bullion prices) remains the primary hedge in terms of preserving the purchasing power of current dollars.  In like manner, silver is in this category.  Also, holding stronger major currencies such as the Swiss franc, Canadian dollar and the Australian dollar, likely are good hedges (see Financial Hedges and Investments. ).

In terms of survival on a day-to-day basis, U.S.-based individuals should be building a store of goods in preparation for a manmade disaster, much as they would for a natural disaster such as an earthquake.  Economic activity probably would devolve to a barter system, but such could take months to become fully functional (see Barter System.).

Section 2—Defining the Components of a Hyperinflationary Great Depression

Deflation, Inflation and Hyperinflation

Inflation broadly is defined in terms of a rise in general prices usually due to an increase in the amount of money in circulation.  The inflation/deflation issues defined and discussed here are as applied to consumer goods and services, not to the pricing of financial assets, unless specified otherwise.

In terms of hyperinflation, there have been a variety of definitions used over time.  The circumstance envisioned ahead is not one of double- or triple- digit annual inflation, but more along the lines of seven- to 10-digit inflation seen in other circumstances during the last century.  Under such circumstances, the currency in question becomes worthless, as seen in Germany (Weimar Republic) in the early 1920s, in Hungary after World War II, in the dismembered Yugoslavia of the early 1990s and most recently in Zimbabwe, where the pace of hyperinflation likely was the most extreme ever seen.

The historical culprit generally has been the use of fiat currencies—currencies with no hard-asset backing such as gold—and the resulting massive printing of currency that the issuing authority needed to support its spending, when it did not have the ability, otherwise, to raise enough money for its perceived needs, through taxes or other means.

Ralph T. Foster (hereinafter cited as Foster) in Fiat Paper Money, The History and Evolution of Our Currency (see Recommended Further Reading.) details the history of fiat paper currencies from 11th century Szechwan, China, to date, and the consistent collapse of those currencies, time-after-time, due to what appears to be the inevitable, irresistible urge of issuing authorities to print too much of a good thing.  The United States is no exception, already having obligated itself to liabilities well beyond its ability ever to pay off, and the currency printing presses already are running overtime.

Here are the definitions:

Deflation: A decrease in the prices of consumer goods and services, usually tied to a contraction of money in circulation.  Formal deflation is measured in terms of year-to-year change.

Inflation: An increase in the prices of consumer goods and services, usually tied to an increase of money in circulation. 

Hyperinflation: Extreme inflation, minimally in excess of four-digit annual percent change, where the involved currency becomes worthless. A fairly crude definition of hyperinflation is a circumstance, where, due to extremely rapid price increases, the largest pre-hyperinflation bank note ($100 bill in the United States) becomes worth more as functional toilet paper/tissue than as currency.

As discussed in Section 5—Historical U.S. Inflation: Why Hyperinflation Instead of Deflation, the domestic economy has been through periods of both major inflation and deflation, usually tied to wars and their aftermaths.  Such, however, preceded the U.S. going off the domestic gold standard in 1933 and abandoning international gold convertibility in 1971.  The era of the modern fiat dollar generally has been one of persistent and slowly debilitating inflation.

As to the reporting of inflation, the following notes detail the various measures of consumer systemic prices referenced in this report:

The Consumer Price Index (CPI): The CPI is the primary consumer inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers):  The CPI-U is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers.  Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors.

CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers):  The CPI-W covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost-of-living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U.

CPI-U-RS (Current Methods CPI):  The CPI-U-RS is the current CPI-U with its history restated as if all the new methodologies introduced since the 1980s had been in place from day one.  The involved changes have moved the CPI away from being a measure of inflation for a fixed basket of goods and services, away from being a measure of the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living.

SGS Alternate CPI-U Measure:  The SGS Alternate CPI Measure (based on 1980 reporting methodologies) is an attempt to reverse methodological changes to CPI inflation since 1980 that have changed the CPI concept from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to a measure of a cost of living that reflects a declining standard of living.  It is based primarily on a reverse engineering of the CPI-U-RS. (See Response to BLS Article on CPI Misperceptions for further details).

GNP/GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD):  The IPD is the rate of inflation for the aggregate economy (including consumer, business, housing, government and trade sectors) that is used in deflating nominal or current-dollar Gross National Product (GNP), Gross Domestic Product (GDP) and components of same, to “real,” constant-dollar or inflation-adjusted levels.

Recession, Depression and Great Depression

A couple of decades back, I tried to tie down the definitional differences between a recession, depression and a great depression with the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) and a number of private economists.  I found that there was no consensus on the matter, where popular usage of the term “depression” had taken on the meaning of a severe recession, so I set some definitions that the various parties (neither formally nor officially) thought were within reason.

If you look at the plot of the level of economic activity during a downturn, you will see something that looks like a bowl, with activity recessing on the downside and recovering on the upside.  The term used to describe this bowl-shaped circumstance before World War II was “depression,” while the downside portion of the cycle was called “recession,” and the upside was called “recovery.”  Before World War II, all downturns simply were referred to as depressions.  In the wake of the Great Depression of the 1930s, however, a euphemism was sought for describing future economic contractions, so as to avoid evoking memories of that earlier, financially painful time.

Accordingly, a post-World War II downturn was called “recession.”  Officially, now, the deepest post-World War II recession was from December 2007 through June 2009, with a peak-to-trough contraction in the inflation-adjusted quarterly GDP activity level of 4.1%.  That was somewhat worse than the 3.7% contraction from August 1957 through April 1958, which involved a steel strike, and a 3.2% contraction in the November 1973 to March 1975, which more commonly is viewed as the worst post-World War II recession prior to 2007.  The 2007 recession also has been declared the longest since the first downleg of the Great Depression.  I’ll contend, though, that the 2007 downturn is ongoing and much deeper than is indicated officially (see Section 4—Current Economic and Inflation Conditions in the United States.).  Here are the definitions:

Recession: Two or more consecutive quarters of contracting real (inflation-adjusted) GDP, where the downturn is not triggered by an exogenous factor such as a truckers’ strike.  The NBER, which is the official arbiter of when the United States economy is in recession, attempts to refine its timing calls, on a monthly basis, through the use of economic series such as payroll employment and industrial production, and it no longer relies on the two quarters of contracting GDP rule.

Depression: A recession, where the peak-to-trough contraction in real growth exceeds 10%.

Great Depression: A depression, where the peak-to-trough contraction in real growth exceeds 25%.

On the basis of the preceding, there has been the one Great Depression, in the 1930s.  Most of the economic contractions before that would be classified as depressions.  All business downturns since World War II—as officially reported —have been recessions.  Using a the somewhat narrower “great depression” definition of a contraction in excess of 20% (instead of 25%), the depression of 1837 to 1843 would be considered “great,” as would be the war-time production shut-down in 1945.

As explored in Section 4—Current Economic and Inflation Conditions in the United States., the current downturn would qualify as a “depression” per the above definitions, and it should evolve into a “great depression,” as normal commercial activity grinds to a halt in a hyperinflation.  Nonetheless, the term “Great Recession” has entered the popular lexicon for the current downturn.  Given the financial pain that will be attributed to the Great Recession—if that terminology holds—those naming future such events likely will be looking to come up with a different descriptor for a “recession” in the post-collapse period.

 

 

Section 3—Two Examples of Hyperinflation

Weimar Republic

Ralph Foster closes his book’s preface with a particularly poignant quote from a 1993 interview of Friedrich Kessler, a law professor whose university affiliations included, among others, Yale and University of California Berkeley.  From firsthand experience, Kessler described the Weimar Republic hyperinflation:

“It was horrible.  Horrible!  Like lightning it struck.  No one was prepared.  You cannot imagine the rapidity with which the whole thing happened.  The shelves in the grocery stores were empty.  You could buy nothing with your paper money.”

The hyperinflation in Germany’s Weimar Republic is along the lines of what likely will unfold in the United States.  The following two graphs plot the same numbers, but on different scales. The data are the monthly averages of the number of paper German marks that equaled one dollar (gold-backed) in 1922 and 1923, with that number acting as something of a surrogate for the pace of inflation. 

The first plot is a simple arithmetic plot, but the earlier detail is masked by the extreme numbers of the last several months, suggestive of an extraordinarily rapid and large rise in the pace of inflation.  The second plot is on a logarithmic scale, where each successive power of ten represents the next tick mark on the vertical scale.

 

 

While the hyperinflation did hit rapidly, annual inflation in January 1922 already was more than 200%, up from as low as 6% in April 1921.  The existing currency was abandoned at the end of 1923.

Milton Friedman and Anna Jacobson Schwartz noted in their classic A Monetary History of the United States that the early stages of the Weimar Republic hyperinflation was accompanied by a huge influx of foreign capital, much as had happened during the U.S. Civil War.  The speculative influx of capital into the U.S. at the time of the Civil War inflation helped to stabilize the system, as the foreign capital influx into the U.S. in recent years has helped to provide relative stability and strength to the equity and credit markets.  Following the Civil War, however, the underlying U.S. economy had significant untapped potential and was able to generate strong, real economic activity that covered the war’s spending excesses.

Post-World War I Germany was a different matter, where the country was financially and economically depleted as a penalty for losing the war.  Here, after initial benefit, the influx of foreign capital helped to destabilize the system.  “As the mark depreciated, foreigners at first were persuaded that it would subsequently appreciate and so bought a large volume of mark assets…”  Such boosted the foreign exchange value of the German mark and the value of German assets.  “As the German inflation went on, expectations were reversed, the inflow of capital was replaced by an outflow, and the mark depreciated more rapidly… (Friedman p. 76).”

Indeed, in the wake of its defeat in the Great War, Germany was forced to make debilitating reparations to the victors—particularly France—as well as to face loss of territory.  From Foster (Chapter 11):

“By late 1922, the German government could no longer afford to make reparations payments.  Indignant, the French invaded the Ruhr Valley to take over the production of iron and coal (commodities used for reparations).  In response, the German government encouraged its workers to go on strike.  An additional issue of paper money was authorized to sustain the economy during the crisis.  Sensing trouble, foreign investors abruptly withdrew their investments.

“During the first few months of 1923, prices climbed astronomically higher, with no end in sight…  The nation was effectively shut down by currency collapse.  Mailing a letter in late 1923 cost 21,500,000,000 marks.”

The worthless German mark became useful as wall paper and toilet paper, as well as for stoking fires.

The Weimar circumstance, and its heavy reliance on foreign investment, was closer to the current U.S. situation than it was to the U.S. Civil War experience.  In certain aspects, the current U.S. situation is even worse than the Weimar situation.  It certainly is worse than the Civil war circumstance.  

Unlike the still largely untapped economic potential of the United States 146 years ago, today’s U.S. economy is languishing in the structural problems of the loss of its manufacturing base and a shift of domestic wealth offshore; it is mired in an economic contraction that is immune to traditional economic stimuli.  As the U.S. government has attempted in recent decades to assuage electorate discontent with ever more expensive social programs; as the Federal Reserve has moved to encourage debt expansion as a remedy for lack of real, inflation-adjusted, income growth; the eventual bankruptcy of the U.S. dollar was locked in.  The problem here was taken on and created willingly by U.S. government officials—embraced by both major political parties—not imposed by a victorious and vengeful enemy of war.

In the early 1920s, foreign investors in Germany were not propping up the world’s reserve currency in an effort to prevent a global financial collapse, and they did not know in advance that they were doomed to take a large hit on their German investments.  In today’s environment, both central banks and major private investors know that the U.S. dollar will be a losing proposition.  They either expect and/or hope that they can get out of the dollar in time to avoid losses, or, in the case of the central banks, that they can forestall the ultimate global economic crisis.  Such expectations and hopes have dimmed markedly in the last several years, as the untenable U.S. fiscal condition has gained more public and global recognition.  

Zimbabwe

Hyperinflation in Zimbabwe, the former Rhodesia, was a quadrillion times worse than it was in Weimar Germany.  Zimbabwe went through a number of years of high inflation, with an accelerating hyperinflation from 2006 to 2009, when the currency was abandoned.  Through three devaluations, excess zeros repeatedly were lopped off notes as high as 100 trillion Zimbabwe dollars. 

The cumulative devaluation of the Zimbabwe dollar was such that a stack of  100,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000 (26 zeros) two dollar bills (if they were printed) in the peak hyperinflation would have be needed to equal in value what a single original Zimbabwe two-dollar bill of 1978 had been worth.  Such a pile of bills literally would be light years high, stretching from the Earth to the Andromeda Galaxy. 

  http://www.shadowstats.com/imgs/2009/520/Zim_Trill_2.jpg

 

In early-2009, the governor of the Zimbabwe Reserve Bank indicated he felt his actions in printing money were vindicated by the recent actions of the U.S. Federal Reserve.  If the U.S. went through a hyperinflation like that of Zimbabwe’s, total U.S. federal debt and obligations (roughly $76 trillion with unfunded liabilities) could be paid off for much less than a current penny.

This sign in a restroom facility at a South African border station with Zimbabwe speaks for itself.

 

  oilet Paper Only - No Zimbabwe Dollars

 

What helped to enable the evolution of the Zimbabwe monetary excesses over the years, while still having something of a functioning economy, was the back-up of a well-functioning black market in U.S. dollars.  The United States has no such backup system, however, with implications for a more rapid and disruptive hyperinflation than seen in Zimbabwe, when it hits.  This will be discussed later.

 

Section 4—Current Economic and Inflation Conditions in the United States

Economic Activity and Inflation

Before examining how the current circumstance can evolve into a hyperinflationary great depression, it is worth assessing the nature of the present economic and inflation conditions in the United States, along with likely near-term developments in those areas.

As heavily touted on Wall Street, the official version of the current U.S. economic circumstance is that business activity is enjoying normal growth, having recovered to levels last seen before the severe recession of 2007-2009.  Reported consumer inflation is below two percent, with “core” inflation holding near zero. Such follows a short but shallow bout with formal deflation.

If this happy picture were real, the Federal Reserve would not be panicking, printing new money and attempting to liquefy the system at an unprecedented pace.  If the economy were recovering and on a positive track, the Administration and Congress would not be panicking with extreme fiscal reactions, hoping to assuage an economically- and financially-impaired electorate in advance of a likely tumultuous 2012 election.

Indeed, anecdotally, Main Street U.S.A. is not seeing this near-perfect economic environment, either.  Common perception remains that the economy and labor conditions are much worse than the happy news in GDP and jobs reporting, and that inflation is running well above the price increases indicated by the government’s consumer inflation estimates. 

The SGS assessment of the current circumstance generally is in line with the common experience.  The economy still is in broad contraction, with consumer inflation—viewed from the standpoint of the cost of maintaining a constant standard of living (as the CPI initially was intended)—running well above official inflation.  Irrespective of the measure, consumer inflation has started to spike in response to Federal Reserve efforts to create inflation.

Suffering from a deteriorating structural shift in consumer liquidity, the U.S. economy went into a severe contraction, starting slowly in late-2006, but plunging by the end of 2007 through early-2009.  Since then the broad economy has been bottom-bouncing at a low-level plateau of activity, with spikes seen in the activity of several important series such as retail sales and industrial production from short-lived stimulus effects, and from distortions in a post-World War II economic reporting system that never was designed to handle a downturn of the present nature and severity.

Broad economic activity is slowing anew, and such should painfully evident in the months ahead.  Since the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER)—official arbiter of U.S. recessions—has formally timed the recession, peak-to-trough, from December 2007 to June 2009, the renewed downturn eventually should gain official recognition as the second downleg of a multiple-dip recession, with its onset likely timed from third-quarter 2010.

Considered in the pages ahead is the nature of the structural consumer-income problems driving the downturn; economic reporting quality issues that have arisen from an unprecedented downturn in the era of modern economic reporting; an assessment of recent GDP reporting against what can be supported by reporting in the underlying employment, retail sales, industrial production and housing series; pending revisions to economic series; political implications; and the near-term outlook for the economy and inflation.

Structural Consumer Liquidity Problems

Until structurally-impaired real (or inflation-adjusted) household income and liquidity fundamentally turn around, there can be no sustainable recovery in U.S. economic activity.  The consumer accounted for 73% of reported fourth-quarter 2010 U.S. GDP.

The U.S. economy is in a deepening structural change that has resulted from U.S. trade, social and regulatory policies driving a goodly portion of the U.S. manufacturing and technology base offshore.  As a result, a large number of related, high paying jobs have disappeared for U.S. workers.  Accordingly, U.S. consumers have found increasingly that their household incomes fail to keep up with inflation. Without real growth in income, there cannot be sustained economic growth.  Growth driven solely by debt expansion, as encouraged by the Fed in recent years, ultimately is not sustainable; it is temporary, as has become painfully obvious to many in the still-evolving systemic-solvency crisis. 

Shown in the following graph, the U.S. trade deficit—in general deterioration since the early-1970s— initially narrowed in the current downturn, with weaker U.S. consumption and with a short-lived collapse in oil prices.  Yet, the trade shortfall resumed its net deterioration in the last year or so.  The brief period of deficit narrowing reflected no fundamental shift in circumstances, no healthy move in U.S. economic activity towards a basic improvement in the trade balance, or in a shift towards reinvigorating the U.S. manufacturing base. 

 

 

The gradual deterioration in inflation-adjusted wages and household income has resulted in a record level of the variance or dispersion in household income, as shown in the next graph, and that has negative longer term economic implications.  Variance in income is low when the distribution of income levels is heavily concentrated in the middle, and it is high when more of the income distribution is pushed into the extremes of high- and low-income levels, with a weaker middle-income range.

 

 

A person earning $100,000,000 per year is not going to buy that many more automobiles than someone earning $100,000 per year.  The stronger the middle class is, generally the stronger will be consumption and the economy. 

Historically, extremes in income variance have been followed by financial panics and economic depressions, which then tend to redistribute income towards the middle.  Income variance today is higher than it was coming into 1929 and 1987, and it is nearly double that of any other “advanced” economy.  At a peak in 2006, the measure dipped as systemic crises broke in 2007.  Yet, U.S. income dispersion moved higher again in 2008 and 2009 (the most recent reporting) setting a new historic high.

The next two graphs show officially-reported weakness in inflation-adjusted income. The first graph shows real average weekly earnings (production and supervisory workers), as reported and deflated by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) using the regular CPI-W.  Real wages never have recovered their pre-1973 recession peak.  As wages dropped through the decades, the number of people in an average household that had to work—in order to make ends meet—increased.  If the shown wages were deflated using the SGS-Alternate CPI Measure (discussed later in this section), the wage line would continue sloping downward, subsequent to 1996.

 

 

The second graph reflects median (the middle measure instead of average) U.S. household income over the years.  The bottom dark-blue line shows income deflated by the regular CPI-U, a measure somewhat broader than the CPI-W used in the wage plot.  Those inflation-adjusted numbers show that median household income never recovered its pre-2001 recession peak and stood below its level of 1973, as of 2009.  Even deflated by the CPI-U-RS (current methods) used in Census Bureau reporting—discussed below—the pre-2001 recession peak also has not been recovered.  The BLS uses the CPI-U or CPI-W for deflating its official income series; the Census Bureau has been playing games with the CPI-U-RS.

For average or mean household income (not graphed), the same patterns hold in terms the latest real income level falling and remaining below the pre-2001 peak, irrespective of the inflation measure used to adjust the numbers.  Due to the sharp rise in income variance from shifts to extreme high income levels, however, the average number for 2009 is above 1973, based on the CPI-U but would be below 1973 using the SGS-Alternate measure for deflation (see CPI No Longer Reflects Costs of Maintaining Constant Standard of Living.).

The broad point on U.S. consumer income is that it is inadequate to sustain growing, inflation-adjusted economic activity.  In the absence of income growth, debt expansion can act as a short-term prop for the economy, but that is not available at present.  The system is in the throes of a solvency crisis, with banks having reduced lending to consumers.

CPI No Longer Reflects Costs of Maintaining Constant Standard of Living

In the last several decades, the BLS introduced a variety of new methodologies into the calculation of the CPI, with the effect of reducing the level of reported CPI inflation. The general approach was to move the CPI away from its traditional measuring of the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living.  The lower the rate of inflation that is used in deflating a number, the stronger will be the resulting inflation-adjusted level or growth.  The CPI-U-RS is the CPI with its history restated as if all the new methodologies had been in place from day one.  The impact of the methodological changes in calculating inflation is evident in the two lines in the Median Household Income graph, with the upper, red CPI-U-RS line showing stronger relative growth.

By reverse-engineering the CPI-U-RS, current inflation reporting can be estimated as though it were free of the inflation-dampening methodologies.  Such has been done with the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure.  The SGS measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

As plotted in following graph, the gap between the SGS measure (blue line) and the CPI-U (thinner red line) effectively is the shortfall in official inflation reporting that otherwise would have offset declining standards of living.  This is one reason why individuals who have their income tied to the CPI find it increasingly difficult to make ends meet (see Response to BLS Article on CPI Misperceptions for further details).

 

 

 

Income, Credit and Willingness to Spend

The income shortfalls experienced by many individuals and households—in terms of being able to maintain or to improve standards of living—often were met by consumer debt expansion.  Such was encouraged by a Federal Reserve that recognized the U.S. economy would face stagnation or a slowdown without a surge in consumer credit. 

Keep in mind that the Federal Reserve is not a government entity, but rather a private corporation owned by private banking interests.  Irrespective of federal government mandates that the Fed pursue polices to maintain stable economic growth and to contain inflation, the Fed’s primary mission has been to protect the banking system, to keep that system solvent and profitable.

Explosive growth in the use of credit cards and the expansion of home equity loans as sources of consumer liquidity, fueled consumer liquidity, fueled consumer spending, gave consumers a false sense of financial security and helped banking-system profitability.

As housing activity began to fall off in 2006, and as the recession and the financial and bank solvency crises became apparent to authorities in 2007 and 2008, lending to consumers dried up by mid-2008.  Impaired bank balance sheets limited banks’ lending abilities.  Income problems, which had been masked by excessive consumer debt growth, suddenly were exacerbated by collapsing credit.

The following two graphs show total consumer credit outstanding (excluding mortgages).  The first graph shows historical perspective since World War II; the second shows detail since 2000.


In the first graph, it is visually obvious that the recent downturn in consumer credit was the most severe of the post-World War II era.  In the second graph, the levels of consumer credit have followed the general pattern of the economy in the ongoing downturn, a plunge in activity followed by a period of bottom-bouncing.  The recent slight gains in consumer credit are somewhat deceiving, in that they are accounted for more than fully by recent increases in federal lending for student loans.  Otherwise, consumer credit still is contracting on a month-to-month basis.

Beyond having the income and/or credit, however, consumers also need the willingness to spend.  There is something of surrogate measure for this willingness in the University of Michigan’s Consumer Sentiment Index.

 

Though off the downturn’s lows, the sentiment level not only still is recession territory, but also still is more than 30% below the levels seen in the halcyon days of the late-1990s, when debt excesses were not viewed by most as a particular problem. At present, consumers have neither the physical ability nor the willingness to prop up the U.S. economy in the manner to which the Federal Reserve and the big-deficit spenders in Washington, D.C. have become accustomed.

Neither the federal government nor the Federal Reserve can address easily the fundamental structural problems tied to consumer liquidity. Stimulus efforts have been limited to one-time or otherwise short-lived efforts to provide temporary boosts to consumer disposable income. Until income growth gains sustainably relative to inflation, and/or credit is flowing freely enough to boost willing consumption, there is no chance for sustained economic growth or economic recovery in the United States.

Markets Are Flying Blind with Distorted Economic Reporting

Seasonal-Factor Warping.  A note of caution is offered here as to the quality of current and recent economic reporting.  The significance of month-to-month data has been heavily impaired by the extraordinary severity of the current economic downturn, both in terms of duration and depth.  Most modern economic reporting was put in place after World War II, designed to handle generally positive growth in the broad economy, with occasional downturns in the business cycle.

Reporting of month-to-month and quarter-to-quarter data usually were based on seasonal adjustments, where repetitive patterns tied to holiday, school year, etc. activity was removed statistically from the numbers, theoretically leaving patterns due to just shifting economic activity.  Seasonal adjustments were based on patterns of activity over a number of years, with the most-recent year receiving the heaviest weighting.  In recent years, key series such as nonfarm payrolls and retail sales have been reported using “concurrent” seasonal-factor adjustments, where the adjustments are recalculated each month, using the latest month’s data.

When the seasonal factors are meaningful, they tend to remain stable over time, with little variation in the distribution of monthly patterns from the year-to-year or even month-to-month re-estimations.   Extreme volatility of economic activity in the last several years has outweighed and distorted regular seasonal factor patterns.  As result, annual and monthly recalculations of the seasonals have been showing highly unstable patterns, which, in turn, have thrown off the significance of reported monthly and quarterly changes, well beyond previously recognized reporting error confidence intervals.  Greater detail and examples can be found in SGS Commentaries No. 349 and No. 355.

Of particular concern with the “concurrent” adjustments made to payrolls and retail sales, for example, is that the monthly revisions from the unstable seasonal-factor recalculations have been significant.  While those revisions effect data going back for years, the government only shows revisions to the last two months (with retail sales they also show the last two months from one year ago), freezing all the other data in place.

The problem in terms of analyzing these data is that reported monthly gains or losses often reflect no more than the unstable seasonal factors shifting activity patterns around during the year, not changes in economic activity.  Those analyzing the numbers, though, cannot see what is happening.  The historical data are inconsistent with the latest reporting, since the fully revised history simply is not published.   

Year-to-Year Change Becomes Less Meaningful after the First Year of Ongoing Decline.  In a normal business cycle, looking at year-to-year change is useful in terms of signaling shifting economic activity.  In the current business cycle, though, where the severe plunge in activity went beyond one year and was followed by a period of bottom-bouncing, looking at the relative level of business activity may offer a clearer picture of current activity.

Other comparisons of period-to-period levels activity also lose some significance, such as seen with the purchasing managers series.  Those series measure whether various indicators of business activity are up or down from the prior month.  A generally up month in a period of bottom-bouncing can look as strong as an up month during an economic boom.

Loss of Survey Base Inflates Reported Activity / Distorts Rules of Thumb.  In a deep and protracted downturn, companies go out business.  If a company fails to report its payrolls, sales or orders, however, the government generally assumes that the company still is active and estimates what that company should be reporting.

Also, economic activity has sunk to such low levels, that regular measures of change followed closely by the financial markets—such as new claims for unemployment insurance—are not signaling economic recovery, as they turn less negative.  Some analysts look at historical patterns and conclude that when new claims drop below a certain level that the economy is improving.  In the current circumstance, layoffs have been so severe that the universe of potential further layoffs has been meaningfully reduced.  Under such circumstances, rules of thumb may not work well.

Corporate Revenues and Profits.  Unusually severe economic times also can affect reported corporate performance.  The current downturn has not hit all sectors or all companies with equal vigor, and, as often is the case, downturn and recovery will vary sharply across the commercial spectrum.  Nonetheless, company financials are always worth a close look. 

Publicly held corporations usually enjoy the flexibility and creativity needed to show strong financial results even when the economy is down; or least they can help guide market expectations in terms of earnings, etc.  Creative accounting—often involving throwing future losses into one-time charges for downsizing or such—usually is well accepted by investors, even when that cutting of productive assets has gone beyond the fat, through the muscle and into the bone.  Companies holding assets outside the U.S. dollar can boost their dollar-based picture, when the U.S. currency is under pressure.  Further, against extremely weak prior-year profits or revenues, impressive year-to-year growth rates can help paint a happy picture for investors. 

Already in Depression, Economy is Declining Anew as Inflation Spikes

Near-Term Economic Activity. As discussed in the regular SGS Commentaries, the U.S. economy remains in a structural recession/depression that is going to get a great deal worse.  Due to the NBER calling a formal end to the 2007 recession, however, the ongoing difficulties here will be recognized as a double- or multiple-dip downturn.  As will be discussed shortly, the contraction in business activity so far in the extreme downturn since 2006/2007 likely would qualify as a “depression” per SGS definitions (see Recession, Depression and Great Depression. ).

Shown in the next graph, inflation-adjusted, year-to-year change in broad money supply (M3) generates a reliable signal in advance of recessions, or, in the case where a recession already is underway (as in the 1973 and 2007 recessions), a pending intensification of the downturn.  The lead time usually is six-to-nine months.  Some recessions start without a money contraction, and upturns in money do not always lead economic upturns, but whenever real, broad systemic liquidity is in contraction, the economy always will follow.  The downturn signal is generated when the inflation-adjusted annual money growth (which adjusted for the velocity of money is the theoretical equivalent of real GDP) first turns negative.  (See Inflation and Slowing/Contracting Money Growth. ).

In the current circumstance, a downside signal was generated in December 2009.  After protracted bottom-bouncing, the housing market appears to have turned down anew around September/October 2010.  After major downside benchmark revisions, nonfarm payrolls and household employment have been bottom-bouncing and should show downside movement shortly.  Recent gains in real retail sales and industrial production appear to be topping out.

One subscriber queried why I continued to use “bottom-bouncing” in my language describing series such as industrial production and retail sales, where activity levels have been increasing on average for some months.  I keep using the term bottom-bouncing, because I believe that is what is happening, what the “upturns” will prove to be when the revised data are in, and what will be seen after a couple of months of further reporting.

If there were, or at such time as I believe there is, meaningful evidence of a turn in activity, I would not hesitate to indicate same.  There just is nothing there, yet, within the reporting accuracy of the up series, or within the scope of underlying fundamentals, to suggest any meaningful move to the upside. 

But for the reported improvement in the fourth-quarter trade deficit, fourth-quarter 2010 GDP would have shown an annualized real quarterly contraction of 0.56%, instead of the reported 2.79% gain.  Based on the reporting of January 2011’s trade deficit, however, deterioration in the first-quarter 2011 could offset fully the GDP impact from the trade gain seen in fourth-quarter 2010.

The GDP series has heavy upside biases built in to its reported growth, but with recent downside benchmark revision to payrolls, and with likely parallel downside revisions pending in industrial production on March 25th and retail sales on April 29th, the annual revisions to the GDP on July 29th should show that the GDP has been significantly weaker in recent years than indicated in current official estimates.

Historical Perspective on the Economic Data

Traditional Year-to-Year View.  The current downturn, as reported, already is the longest and the deepest business contraction since the first downleg of the Great Depression in the early 1930s.  Such is reflected in payroll employment and GDP growth plotted in the following graphs.  The quarterly GDP numbers are available only back to 1947.  If one counts the war-production shutdown at the end of World War II as a normal business cycle, then the current downturn is the deepest since then, but still the longest since the early 1930s.  The respective depths of the Great Depression and post-war production contractions are based on annual data available back to 1929.

 

 

 

While the official peak-to-trough contraction in the downturn since fourth-quarter 2007 GDP is 4.1% (second-quarter 2009 trough), most of the better economic series are showing or have shown contractions that are more consistent with a peak-to-trough GDP contraction in excess of 10% (depression range), as indicated by payroll employment, retail sales and industrial production, while others such as housing starts showing contractions of greater than 25% (great-depression range).

Historical Level of Activity.  Following is series of six sets of graphs (two graphs per set) for key economic series: GDP, Payroll Survey Employment, Household Survey Employment, Real Retail Sales, Housing Starts and Industrial Production.  In each set, the first graph plots the level of activity since World War II, and the second graph shows detail in the period since 2000.

Per the official inflation-adjusted GDP reporting, the recent downturn was the most severe since World War II, but the fourth-quarter 2010 number shows the series having just recovered its pre-recession high.  There is no other major series that shows that, which suggests major downside GDP revisions in the upcoming benchmark.  Even with the “recoveries” seen in retail sales and industrial production (also subject to downside benchmark revisions), the best the underlying economic series are suggesting is that real GDP is still about 5% below its pre-recession peak, and that the peak-to-trough contraction was in excess of 10%.

All underlying series show the current downturn to be the most severe one of the post-World War II era, and most of the series have bottom-bounced after their initial plunges.  Payroll employment had a brief 2010 spike from the hiring of temporary census workers, and remains below levels of 10 years ago, despite 10% growth in the population in that period.  Retail sales and industrial production show signs of topping out.  All the underlying series suggest the downturn started before December 2007, with housing starts having started to decline in early-2006, leading into (not following) the financial crises.


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Political Considerations

What lies ahead for the economy and inflation will have significant impact on the U.S. political process, as recent economic woes did on the 2010 mid-term election.  Historically, the concerns of the electorate have been dominated by pocketbook issues.  Prior to gimmicked methodologies making the reporting of disposable personal income largely meaningless, that measure was an excellent predictor of presidential elections.

In every presidential race since 1908, in which consistent, real (inflation-adjusted) annual disposable income growth was above 3.3%, the incumbent party holding the White House won every time. When income growth was below 3.3%, the incumbent party lost every time.  Again, with redefinitions to the national income accounts in the last two decades, a consistent measure of disposable income as reported by the government has disappeared.  Yet, even with the upside biases in official reporting, 2010 annual growth in real disposable income was 3.1%, below the traditional 3.3% limit.  The mid-term election results would suggest that the actual growth number was somewhat less. 

As was suggested would be the case in the 2008 report, the economy contributed to the Republicans losing the White House in 2008.  In the 2010 report, it was suggested that, “Present economic conditions are bleak enough to impair re-election prospects severely for incumbents in the 2010 mid-term election.”

A wide variety of possibilities would follow or coincide politically with a hyperinflationary great depression, but the political status quo likely would not continue.  Times would be financially painful enough to encourage the development of a third party that could move the Republicans or Democrats to third-party status in the 2012 presidential and congressional elections. 

Where I always endeavor to keep my political persuasions separate from my analyses, for purposes of full disclosure, my background is as a conservative Republican with a libertarian bent.

Early Impact of Dollar Debasement

Inflationary pressures have started to surface from the Fed’s efforts at dollar debasement.  A weakening U.S. dollar has placed upside pressure on dollar-denominated oil prices and other dollar-denominated commodity prices, including food, which in turn have begun pushing annual inflation higher.  This is not inflation generated by strong economic demand, but rather inflation driven by the Federal Reserve’s monetary efforts to weaken the dollar.  While global supply problems or concerns also have affected food and energy commodity prices, movements against the dollar seem to be the primary moving force behind the spiked dollar prices, at present.

Shown in the next three graphs are powerful fundamentals that either drive U.S. inflation or reflect market expectations of the longer-term domestic inflation outlook. The currency, oil and gold markets have seen extreme volatility in the last couple of years, and they likely will continue to be volatile in the year ahead.  Reflecting the inflationary pressures from a weaker dollar and higher oil prices, ongoing solvency issues for the United States, and continued dollar debasement efforts by the Federal Reserve—including the apparent recent loss of the U.S. dollar’s traditional safe-haven stats—the Swiss franc, gold and silver have hit historic or multi-decade (silver) highs in early-March 2011.

 

 

 

 



 

Section 5—Historical U.S. Inflation: Why Hyperinflation Instead of Deflation

 

Fire and Ice

Some say the world will end in fire,
Some say in ice.
From what I’ve tasted of desire
I hold with those who favor fire.
But if it had to perish twice,
I think I know enough of hate
To say that for destruction ice
Is also great
And would suffice.

– Robert Frost

 

As to the fate of the developing U.S. great depression, it will encompass the fire of a hyperinflation, instead of the ice of deflation seen in the major U.S. depressions prior to World War II.  What promises hyperinflation this time is the lack of monetary discipline formerly imposed on the system by the gold standard; a fiscally bankrupt federal government; and a Federal Reserve dedicated to debasing the U.S. dollar.

Both the federal government and the Federal Reserve have demonstrated that they will not tolerate a systemic collapse and a great deflation, as seen during the Great Depression.  As discussed in Section 6—Federal Reserve, the Money Supply and Fighting Deflation. , those risks are being fought, and will be fought, at any cost that can be covered by the unlimited creation of new money.  It was a devil’s choice, but the choice has been made.  Extreme systemic interventions, and formal measures to debase the U.S. dollar through the effective unlimited creation of money to cover systemic needs and the government’s obligations, pushed the timing of a systemic collapse—threatened in September 2008—several years into the future.  The cost of instant salvation, though, was inflation.  Eventual systemic collapse is unavoidable at this point, but it will be in a hyperinflationary great depression, instead of a deflationary one.  

Putting the current environment in historical perspective, the following two graphs measure the level of consumer prices since 1665 in the American Colonies and later the United States.  The first graph shows what appears to be a fairly stable level of prices up to the founding of the Federal Reserve in 1913 (began activity in 1914) and to Franklin Roosevelt’s abandoning of the gold standard in 1933.  Then, inflation takes off in a manner not seen in the prior 250 years, and at an exponential rate when viewed using the SGS-Alternate Measure of Consumer Prices in the last several decades.  The price levels shown prior to 1913 were constructed by Robert Sahr of Oregon State University.  Price levels since 1913 either are Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) or SGS-based, as indicated.

The magnitude of the increase in price levels in the last 50 years or so, however, visually masks the inflation volatility of the earlier years.  That early volatility becomes evident in the second graph, where the CPI history is plotted using a logarithmic scale.  Seeing such detail is a particular benefit of using such a plot, although the full scope of what is happening may be lost to those not used to thinking log-based.

The logarithmic scale was used here at reader request. The pattern of the rising CPI level, however, still looks rather frightening even in the modified form.  Further, since inflation ideally is something that is flat over time—not compounding like the population and related series that grow with it—I do not have any issue with using a non-log scale for the visual impact of what is happening. 

Persistent year-to-year inflation (and the related compounding effect) did not take hold until post-Franklin D. Roosevelt.  Additionally, the CPI level reflects purchasing power lost over time for those holding dollars, which is cumulative, and which has reached extremes (as will be discussed shortly) due to the late-era compounding effect.  If my assessment is correct on where this is headed, the log-based graph shortly will look like the arithmetic-based graph, as was seen the latter months of the Weimar circumstance and as shown in the Weimar Republic. section.

Indicated by the newly visible detail in the second graph are the regular periods of inflation—usually seen around wars—offset by periods of deflation, up through the Great Depression.  Particular inflation spikes can be seen at the time of the American Revolution, the War of 1812, the Civil War, World War I and World War II (which lacked an ensuing, offsetting deflation).  As result, consumer prices at the time of the Fed’s founding in 1913 were about the same as they had been in New Amsterdam (today’s New York City) in 1665. 

 

The inflation peaks and the ensuing post-war depressions and deflationary periods, tied to the War of 1812, the Civil War and World War I, show close to 60-year cycles, which is part of the reason some economists and analysts have been expecting a deflationary depression in the current period.  There is some reason behind 30- and 60-year financial and business cycles, as the average difference in generations in the United States is 30 years, going back to the 1600s.  Accordingly, it seems to take two generations to forget and repeat the mistakes of one’s grandparents.  Similar reasoning accounts for other cycles that tend to run in multiples of 30 years.

Allowing for minor, average-annual price-level declines in 1949, 1955 and 2009, the United States has not seen a major deflationary period in consumer prices since before World War II.  The reason for this is the same as to why there has not been a formal depression since before World War II: the abandonment of the gold standard and recognition by the Federal Reserve of the impact of monetary policy—free of gold-standard system restraints—on the economy.

The gold standard was a system that automatically imposed and maintained monetary discipline. Excesses in one period would be followed by a flight of gold from the system and a resulting contraction in the money supply, economic activity and prices.

Faced with the Great Depression, and unable to stimulate the economy, partially due to the monetary discipline imposed by the gold standard, Franklin Roosevelt used those issues as an excuse to abandon gold and to adopt close to a fully-fiat currency under the auspices of what I call the debt standard, where the government effectively could print and spend whatever money it wanted to create.

Roosevelt’s actions were against the backdrop of the banking system being in a state of collapse.  The Fed stood by twiddling its thumbs as banks failed and the money supply imploded.  A depression collapsed into the Great Depression, with intensified price deflation.  Importantly, a sharp decline in broad money supply is a prerequisite to significant goods and services price deflation.  Messrs Greenspan and Bernanke are students of the Great Depression period.  As did Mr. Greenspan before him, "Helicopter Ben" has vowed not to allow a repeat of the 1930s money supply collapse.

Where the Franklin Roosevelt Administration abandoned the gold standard and its financial discipline for the debt standard, twelve successive administrations have pushed the debt standard to the limits of its viability, as seen now in the continuing threat of systemic collapse.  At present, it is the Obama Administration that has to look at abandoning the debt standard (hyperinflation) and starting fresh.  Yet, the Administration and many in Congress have taken recent actions suggestive of hoping only to push off the day of reckoning for the economic and systemic solvency crises until after the 2012 presidential election.  They do not have that time.

The effect of the post-Roosevelt policies has been a slow-motion destruction of the U.S. dollar’s purchasing power, per the accompanying table, since the gold standard was abandoned in 1933.  The magnitude of purchasing power lost over the decades can be lost again in a matter of weeks or months.

 

Loss of U.S. Dollar Purchasing Power

Through February 2011

 

Since January of

Versus

1914

1933

1970

 Swiss Franc

-81.4%

-81.4%

-77.3%

 CPI-U

-95.5%

-94.2%

-83.0%

 Gold

-98.6%

-98.6%

-95.5%

 SGS-Alternate CPI

-98.7%

-98.3%

-95.0%

 

Please note in the above table that gold and the Swiss franc were held constant by the gold standard versus coins in 1914 and 1933.  The data are from the Federal Reserve Board, Bureau of Labor Statistics and from SGS data and calculations.  The magnitude of the loss in the U.S. dollar’s purchasing in the span of almost one century could be repeated in the span of less than 12 months starting in the next year or two.  Again, fiscal and monetary malfeasance by the federal government and the Federal Reserve are to blame.



 

Section 6—Federal Reserve, the Money Supply and Fighting Deflation

The Fed’s recent efforts at liquefying the system have been extreme, yet broad liquidity generally has been in monthly and annual decline.  Where the Fed’s systemic actions have generated temporary apparent systemic stability, the continued weakening annual growth in the broad money supply, and continued extreme Fed efforts at systemic liquefaction, suggest that the systemic solvency crisis is far from over.  The extraordinary formal efforts by the Federal Reserve to debase the U.S. dollar, however, have started to boost consumer inflation.  The event of the Fed actually pushing this policy into full force is an indication of panic on the part of the U.S. central bank and likely a measure of how close Mr. Bernanke believes the United States still is to a systemic collapse.

“Helicopter Ben” on Preventing Deflation

Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke picked up his various helicopter nicknames and references as the result of a November 21, 2002 speech he gave as a Fed Governor to the National Economists Club entitled Deflation: Making Sure ‘It’ Doesn’t Happen Here.  The phrase that the now-Fed Chairman Bernanke likely wishes he had not used was a reference to “Milton Friedman’s famous ‘helicopter drop’ of money.”

Attempting to counter concerns of another Great Depression-style deflation, Bernanke explained in his remarks: “I am confident that the Fed would take whatever means necessary to prevent significant deflation in the United States …” 

As expounded upon by Bernanke, “Indeed, under a fiat (that is, paper) money system, a government (in practice, the central bank in cooperation with other agencies) should always be able to generate increased nominal spending and inflation, even when the short-term nominal interest rate is at zero.”

“Like gold, U.S. dollars have value only to the extent that they are strictly limited in supply.  But the U.S. government has a technology, called a printing press (or, today, its electronic equivalent), that allows it to produce as many U.S. dollars as it wishes at essentially no cost.  By increasing the number of U.S. dollars in circulation, or even by credibly threatening to do so, the U.S. government can also reduce the value of a dollar in terms of goods and services, which is equivalent to raising the prices in dollars of those goods and services.  We conclude that, under a paper-money system, a determined government can always generate higher spending and hence positive inflation.” The full text of then-Fed Governor Bernanke’s remarks can be found at: http://federalreserve.gov/boarddocs/speeches/2002/20021121/default.htm.

Faced with extreme risk of systemic collapse in the wake of the Lehman failure, Bernanke launched his first round of anti-deflation actions back in 2008, but they did not work fully as advertised.  While the systemic solvency crisis had been contained at least temporarily in key areas, and depositor funds did not suffer heavy losses, the broad money supply began to decline month-to-month in June of 2009 and turned down year-to-year in December 2009.  The deepest annual M3 decline seen so far in this crisis was 6.0% in June 2010.  Although that was the worst decline in broad money since the great Depression, it still was not deep enough to generate a 1930s-style great deflation.  In contrast, the great deflation reflected roughly a one-third contraction in money supply from bank failures and loss of depositor money.

 

Back in September 2008, the Fed started dropping cash from helicopters, as shown in the graphs of the monetary base.  The process was repeated with the introduction of QE2 in November 2010, with the Fed monetizing Treasury debt (see the graphic in Background).

As shown in the two graphs of level and year-to-year change, Bernanke’s spiking of the monetary base has been extraordinary and without precedent.  The Fed’s renewed panic with QE2 has started a new spike in the monetary base that currently is setting successive record levels.  Despite the active fleet of choppers, though, systemic liquidity and solvency remain in deep trouble.

The monetary base remains the Federal Reserve’s primary tool for impacting money supply growth.  As has been the case for the bulk of the extraordinary expansion of the monetary base since late-August 2008—an increase of 169%—the monetary base growth has not been reflected meaningfully in money supply growth, unless it has been holding off even greater money contraction. 

Fundamentally, banks are placing high levels of excess reserves with the Fed, instead of lending the funds into the normal flow of commerce.  As a result, bank lending is down, and small businesses and consumers are experiencing a horrific liquidity squeeze.  This pattern continues despite the Fed’s QE2 buying of Treasury securities.

The monetary base is not part of the money supply; it consists of currency (as in M1) plus bank reserves.  If the banks were lending normally, M1 and the broader measures would be growing.  The ratio of M1 to the monetary base, the monetary base multiplier simply is not a meaningful measure under this circumstance. 

 

 

The SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate (the Fed abandoned reporting its broadest money supply measure, M3, back in March 2006) has been contracting year-to-year since December 2009, with annual growth slowing as shown in the M3 graph.  Inflation-adjusted annual M3 growth also turned negative year-to-year in December 2009, a leading indicator to an economic downturn in normal times, and a signal of a significant turn for the worse in the current, severe economic contraction (see Already in Depression, Economy is Declining Anew as Inflation Spikes. ).

Banks Not Increasing Lending into the Regular Flow of Commerce

As shown previously in Structural Consumer Liquidity Problems, consumer credit outstanding has been in historic contraction, intensifying liquidity constraints on consumers and exacerbating the structural problems with inflation-adjusted household income.  Again, recent small gains have been due to an increase in government student loans, not to increases in regular consumer bank lending. 

The following two graphs show the historical levels of commercial and industrial loans by commercial banks.  The first graph shows the history since World-War II.  The second graph shows detail since 2000.  With recent revisions to the series, recent small monthly increases have been seen.  Nothing more than bottom-bouncing, so far, but the first positive sign for bank lending in some time.

Unlike the early stages of quantitative easing that focused on the Fed buying up troubled mortgage-backed securities, the current round of buying Treasuries—effectively monetizing fully net Treasury issuance—should have some positive effect on the money.  Funds paid out by the Treasury usually end up in private checking accounts, which are part of the money supply.  Banks need to increase lending, though, in order for the money supply to pick up its full and excessive potential.

Some banks are not lending, because they claim there is a lack of credit-worthy borrowers.  Anecdotal evidence and troubled money supply growth suggest that the biggest issue is in still-impaired bank balance sheets.  The systemic-solvency crisis has constrained many banks’ ability to increase lending.

 

 

 

 

Inflation and Slowing/Contracting Money Growth

The Fed’s efforts at currency debasement have been reflected in a weakening of the U.S. dollar’s value in foreign exchange markets.  In theory, though, slowing or outright contraction in broad money supply growth should be reflected in slower inflation or outright deflation.  As with most economic theories, however, there often are simplifying assumptions that may not be appropriate under certain circumstances, and there often are unusual circumstances.  Money supply, for example, works best as a predictor of inflation in a closed system, as was seen with Zimbabwe.  Also, perversely, contracting money supply can spur inflation when the economy is declining faster than the money supply.

Money Supply outside the United States.  Unlike Zimbabwe, the United States has a significant amount of dollars (currency and near-cash) held outside the country, where shifting dynamics may have significant impact on U.S. inflation. To the extent that foreign holdings of U.S. dollars are in stasis, with demand and supply in balance, then the circumstances of the simplified money supply model tend to work.  The dollar’s global position, though, is not in balance, particularly with the Fed working to debase the U.S. currency and to create inflation.

One distortion up front is in the U.S. currency in circulation, as reported in the narrowest money supply measure, M1.  More than half of the $930 billion reflected in recent M1 (and monetary base) reporting is physically outside the United States in “dollarized” countries and elsewhere. 

Separately, as reported by the Fed in its fourth-quarter 2010 flow-of-funds analysis, foreign holders of U.S. assets have something in excess of $12 trillion in liquid dollar-denominated assets that could be dumped at will into the global and U.S. markets.  In perspective, U.S. M3 is somewhat shy of $14 trillion.

As excess dollars get dumped into the global markets, a shift in the tide against the U.S. dollar gets reflected in a weakening exchange rate, which in turn spikes dollar-denominated commodity prices, such as oil. Increasingly, that effect has been in response to intensifying dollar-debasement efforts by the Fed.  The result is that U.S. consumer inflation has started to increase, once again, not from strong economic demand and a surging domestic money supply, but from distended monetary policies and a global glut of dollars that has been encouraged by the U.S. central bank.

Demand and supply affect the U.S. dollar.  Supply soars and demand shrinks with the increasing unwillingness of major dollar holders to continue holding the existing volume of U.S. currency and dollar-denominated assets, let alone to absorb new exposure.

Therein lies a significant threat to near-term U.S. inflation.  Heavy dumping of the U.S. dollar and dollar-denominated assets would be highly inflationary to U.S. consumer prices.  It also likely would activate heavy Fed intervention in buying unwanted U.S. Treasuries.  When the Fed moves to buy Treasuries as the lender of last resort—to monetize U.S. debt still well beyond anything seen to date—that also would tend to trigger renewed growth in the otherwise flagging broad money growth.  

In order to get the broad money supply to grow, the federal government has to spend and borrow more money, where the Fed will have to buy large quantities of the Treasury’s securities, monetizing the federal debt.  The liquidity action pre-QE2 has been primarily buying otherwise illiquid mortgage-backed securities off the balance sheets of troubled banks.  The domestic banks in turn have leant substantial excess reserves back to the Fed, rather than lending into the normal stream of commerce, which would spike the money supply and otherwise be something of an economic positive.

The Fed remains the U.S. Treasury’s lender of last resort.  Panicked dollar selling and dumping of dollar-denominated paper assets—particularly U.S. Treasuries—likely would force the Fed’s hand in an increasingly rapid monetizing of Treasury debt.

Economy Shrinking Faster Than Money Supply?  As noted in the Money Supply Special Report, inflation discussed in the financial markets, financial media and SGS Commentaries, usually centers on price changes in goods and services as traditionally measured by the CPI survey.  Such, however, is not the same measure of price changes as encompassed in general monetary theory (it also is far removed from being a measure of asset inflation or deflation), where the relationship between money supply and inflation commonly is expressed as:

M x V = P x Q

In the preceding equation, M is the money supply.  V is the velocity of money, as measured by the number of times the money supply turns over in a year, relative to the economy as reflected in nominal (not-adjusted for inflation) gross national product (GNP), where V = GNP/M.  GNP is the broadest measure of U.S. economic activity and encompasses the more popularly reported gross domestic product (GDP).

In turn, nominal GNP = P x Q, where P is some measure of GNP deflator (prices/inflation) and Q represents some measure of physical quantity/volume, or a real (inflation-adjusted) GNP, as a measure of economic output.

So, the P, or inflation measure here, effectively is the GNP deflator.  The change in P is a broader inflation measure than the consumers’ CPI, since it also covers costs of consumption for businesses, government and net exports, in addition to the costs of consumer spending on goods and services.  In terms of the other variables, the price equation is:

P = (M x V) / Q,

where price level (P) equals money supply times velocity (M x V), divided by real GNP (Q). Typically, increases in the combination of money supply and velocity, relative to Q (real GNP) result in higher prices.  A drop in Q (real GNP), as seen in recessions, also would be inflationary, in theory, if money supply times velocity increased or otherwise did not drop as quickly as real GNP.

The latter case may be happening.  Although none of the equation components can be measured accurately, the theoretical relationships can be useful.  As discussed in Historical Perspective on the Economic Data., based on key underlying economic series, the inflation-adjusted broad economy does appear to be declining faster than has been suggested in GDP reporting.  If the pace of decline in the economy is faster than the pace of decline in the money supply times velocity, then that circumstance is inflationary, even with declining money growth.

Nonetheless, I expect that money supply growth and velocity will pick up at excessive rates with the hyperinflation.

Consider, too, the following variation on the monetary equation:

Q = (M/P) x V

Activity the inflation-adjusted economy (Q) is the same thing as inflation-adjusted  money supply (M/P) times velocity (V).  Such is the theoretical basis as to why a decline in year-to-year inflation-adjusted M3 signals an economic downturn, as graphed at the beginning of Already in Depression, Economy is Declining Anew as Inflation Spikes..

Money Growth and Velocity Will Increase.  The U.S. hyperinflation very much will reflect a complete loss of confidence in the U.S. dollar.  The Fed has primed the system for explosive money supply growth; all that is needed is a pickup in bank lending.

The Fed’s moves to debase the U.S. dollar have started to worked, impairing the U.S. currency’s exchange rate value and triggering commodity inflation fueled by the weak-dollar policy.  This also has helped to set the stage for a global dumping of the dollar and dollar-denominated paper assets, a rapid influx of unwanted dollars from abroad that either would collapse the financial markets or would force the Fed to flood the system with the incoming liquidity, monetizing dumped U.S. Treasury securities among other assets.

As the debased-dollar inflation mounts, people in the United States are going need higher earnings to buy necessities such as gasoline and food.  Even with a weak economy and high unemployment, wages will increase.  Companies paying higher costs for labor and goods increasingly will raise their prices, and their borrowing needs will increase.  Holders of dollars increasingly will not want to hold them long, in turn, raising the velocity of money, and so the cycle of inflation will begin to accelerate, all with still-impaired economic activity.  

 

Section 7—U.S. Government Cannot Cover Existing Obligations

The U.S. Treasury publishes annual financial statements of the United States Government, prepared using generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), audited by the General Accountability Office (GAO) and signed off on by the U.S. Treasury Secretary.  The 2010 statements were published December 15, 2010 (see Special Commentary No. 340).

GAAP-accounting is what major U.S. corporations use.  Such statements usually include liabilities for retired employees’ pensions and health care obligations.  Yet successive administrations have argued that unfunded Social Security and Medicare obligations should remain off the government’s balance sheet, claiming that the government always has the option of changing the Social Security and Medicare programs.  That said, there still is no political will in Washington to go public with the concept of eliminating or substantially cutting those programs.

GAAP-Based U.S. Government Finances

The broad GAAP-based federal deficits, including the Social Security and Medicare unfunded liabilities, have been in the $4 trillion to $5 trillion range in 2008 and 2009, and 2010’s deficit again likely was near $5 trillion, remaining both uncontainable and unsustainable.  The federal government cannot cover such an annual shortfall by raising taxes, as there are not enough untaxed wages and salaries or corporate profits to do so.  On the spending side, all government spending, except Social Security and Medicare could be cut, but the broad GAAP results still would be in deficit.  As demonstrated by recent Administration and Congressional reaction to the deficit cutting measures put forth by the president’s deficit commission, there is no political will to slash Social Security and Medicare severely.  

The estimate of a broad 2010 GAAP-based deficit at $5 trillion is mine.  At issue with the published report, consistent year-to-year accounting was not shown, with a large, one-time reduction in reported 2010 Medicare liabilities, based on overly optimistic assumptions of the impact from recently enacted healthcare legislation.  Referred to in the statements as the Affordable Care Act (ACA), the broad GAAP-based results from the ACA accounting show an annual surplus of $7.0 trillion in 2010, but again, that is not in terms of consistent reporting.  Looking at what the annual change would have been in Medicare liabilities, consistently viewed either on the 2009 base versus a 2010 number on the 2009 basis, or the 2009 number on the 2010 basis versus the 2010 base, should result in net deterioration on a relative year-to-year basis.

Separately, the one-time ACA-based reduction in the net present value of unfunded social insurance liabilities (closed group), from $52.1 trillion in 2009, to $43.1 trillion in 2010, all was due to the Medicare restatement; Social Security liabilities actually rose.

The new health-care enhanced Medicare results used in the statements were prepared under the auspices of the Administration, but the GAO—the U.S. government’s auditor and the auditor of the GAAP-based financials—did not buy into the happy numbers.

Per the covering letter of Robert F. Dacey, Chief Accountant, U.S. Government Accountability Office, the GAO would not express an opinion on the financial statements (see pages 221-233 of the statements).  Specifically, consider the following excerpts from pages 226 and 227:

“DISCLAIMER OF OPINION ON THE STATEMENT OF SOCIAL INSURANCE FOR 2010 AND UNQUALIFIED OPINIONS FOR 2009, 2008, AND 2007

“Because of significant uncertainties (discussed in Note 26 to the consolidated financial statements), primarily related to the achievement of projected reductions in Medicare cost growth reflected in the 2010 Statement of Social Insurance, we were unable to obtain sufficient evidence to support the amounts presented in the 2010 Statement of Social Insurance.  Consequently, we are unable to, and we do not, express an opinion on the 2010 Statement of Social Insurance.  The Statement of Social Insurance presents the actuarial present value of the federal government’s estimated future revenue to be received from or on behalf of participants and estimated future expenditures to be paid to or on behalf of participants, based on benefit formulas in current law and using a projection period sufficient to illustrate the long-term sustainability of the social insurance programs. …”

“As a result, readers are cautioned that amounts reported in the 2010 Statement of Social Insurance and related Notes may not fairly present, in all material respects, the financial condition of the federal government’s social insurance programs, in conformity with GAAP. The uncertainties related to the 2010 Statement of Social Insurance also affect the projected Medicare and Medicaid costs reported in the Fiscal Projections for the U.S. government, which is presented in Supplemental Information and is summarized in Management’s Discussion and Analysis and other accompanying information.”

The GAO went so far as to run an “Illustrative Alternative Scenario” (page 130) to the government’s happy Medicare adjustments, with the net effect of showing a net present value of unfunded Medicare liabilities (open group) $12.4 trillion higher than that used in the Administration’s formal accounting.  The alternative assumptions appear more realistic than the politicized data used in getting ACA enacted.  Accordingly, under present accounting conditions there simply is no way of coming up with precise, meaningful hard numbers, in terms of total government obligations.

The results are summarized in the accompanying table, showing various deficit, debt and obligation measures.

 


U.S. Government - Alternative Fiscal Deficit and Debt
Reported by U.S. Treasury

Sources: U.S. Treasury, Shadow Government Statistics.

Fiscal
Year(1)

Formal
Cash-Based
Deficit
($Billions)

GAAP
Ex-SS Etc.
Deficit
($Billions)

GAAP
With SS Etc.
Deficit
($Trillions)

GAAP 
Federal 
Negative
Net Worth
($Trillions)

Gross
Federal
Debt
($Trillions)

Total(2)
Federal
Obligations
(GAAP)
($Trillions)

 

Alternative

 

 

 

 

 

 

2010

$1,294.1

$2,080.3

$5.3(3)

$68.9(3)

$13.6

$76.3(3)

 

Official

 

 

 

 

 

 

2010

$1,294.1

$2,080.3

($7.0) (3)

$56.5(3)

$13.6

$64.0(3)

2009(4)

1,417.1

1,253.7

4.3

63.6

11.9

70.5

2008

454.8

1,009.1

5.1

59.3

10.0

65.6

2007

162.8

275.5

1.2(5)

54.3

9.0

59.8

2006

248.2

449.5

4.6

53.1

8.5

58.2

2005

318.5

760.2

3.5

48.5

7.9

53.3

2004

412.3

615.6

11.0(6)

45.0

7.4

49.5

2003

374.8

667.6

3.0

34.0

6.8

39.1

2002

157.8

364.5

1.5

31.0

6.2

35.4

 

(1) Fiscal year ended September 30th; the numbers are subject to rounding differences.  (2) Includes gross federal debt, not just "public" debt.  While the non-public debt is debt the government owes to itself for Social Security, etc., the obligations there are counted as "funded" and as such are part of total government obligations.  (3) The official reporting includes a large, one-time reduction in the estimated net present value of unfunded Medicare liabilities, due to generally favorable underlying assumptions tied to the passage of healthcare legislation.  With consistent accounting, SGS estimates the GAAP shortfall with Social Security and Medicare for 2010 to be roughly $5 trillion. The Alternative numbers here are being used as a placeholder until better accounting estimates are available, and reflect results using the "illustrative alternative scenario" on Medicare costs shown on page 130 of the 2010 report.  (4) The 2009 data predate December 2009 guarantees of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac and do not reflect PBGC or FDIC liabilities. Please note that mid-year accounting redefinitions for TARP knocked off roughly $500 billion from the reported formal cash-based estimate and contributed to a TARP "profit" in the GAAP numbers.  (5) On a consistent reporting basis, net of one-time changes in actuarial assumptions and accounting, SGS estimates that the GAAP-based deficit for 2007 topped $4 trillion, with negative net worth of $57.1 trillion and total obligations of $59.8.  So as to maintain consistency with the official GAAP statements, the "official" numbers are shown.  (6) SGS estimates $3.4 trillion, excluding one-time unfunded setup costs of the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement, and Modernization Act of 2003 (enacted December 2003).  Again, in order to maintain consistency with the official GAAP statements, the "official" numbers are shown in the table for 2004.  The 2010 GAAP statements were released on December 21, 2010: http://fms.treas.gov/fr/index.html.  The initial SGS analysis of same is found in Commentary No. 340.

 

Sources for the SGS Table Data

Fiscal Year (Column 1) – All numbers are for the indicated fiscal year (ended September 30th), in either billions or trillions of dollars as shown.

Formal Cash-Based Deficit (Column 2) – headline deficit number from page xi of the 2010 report, "Nation by the Numbers Table," hereinafter referred to as NBN, line: "Unified Budget Deficit."

GAAP ex-SS Etc. Deficit (Column 3) – euphemistically referred to as "Net Operating Cost" in NBN.  It excludes social insurance unfunded liabilities.

GAAP with SS Etc. Deficit (Column 4) — previous number (2) plus year-to-year change in the net present value of social insurance unfunded liabilities, which comes from NBN (page xi) line "Closed Group" under "Statement of Social Insurance," 2010 minus 2009 (for the 2010 number).  The "Closed Group" is used here as it has been the preferred measure used in earlier government statements.

The Alternative accounting adds in the differential to the NBN line "Closed Group" and the $12.4 trillion additional net present value of excess expenditures over income for Medicare shown in the "Illustrative Alternative Scenario," shown on page 130.

GAAP Federal Negative Net Worth (Column 5) — "Total net position" from NBN (page xi), plus the 2010 "Closed Group" total net present value unfunded liabilities of social insurance from NBN.  The Alternative is adjusted for the alternative Medicare example.

Gross Federal Debt (Column 6) – from "Note 14. Federal Debt …" pages 88 to 90 of the 2010 report.  Total held by public (p. 88) plus Total intragovernmental (p. 90).

Total Federal Obligations (Column 7) – Total liabilities from the NBN (page xi) line in the 2010 report, plus the 2010 "Closed Group" total net present value unfunded liabilities of social insurance from NBN, plus total intragovernmental debt from (p. 90) of the 2010 report.

The Alternative accounting adds in the NBN line "Closed Group" adjusted for the $12.4 trillion additional net present value of excess expenditures over income for Medicare shown in the "Illustrative Alternative Scenario," shown on page 130.

 

U.S. Debt and Obligations at Five Times GDP

As shown in the following graph, U.S. federal obligations are so huge versus the national GDP that the country’s finances look more like those of a banana republic than the world’s premiere financial power and home to the world’s primary reserve currency, the U.S. dollar.  Total federal debt and obligations at the end of the September 30, 2010 fiscal year were likely close to $76 trillion, or more than five times total U.S. GDP.  The $76 trillion includes roughly $14 trillion in gross federal debt, with the balance reflecting the net present value of unfunded obligations.

If not for the special position the United States holds in the world, its debt—U.S. Treasuries—likely would be rated as below investment grade, instead of triple-A.  Major rating agencies have hinted at possible longer-term rating downgrades on Treasury securities. 

A downgrade by U.S. rating agencies, though, is not likely, so long as U.S. Treasuries are denominated in U.S. dollars and as long as they are used as the benchmark for the triple-A rating.  Such ratings usually are an opinion as to the risk of default.  Treasuries denominated in U.S. dollars are not likely to face actual default, so long as the Treasury and Fed can create dollars to pay off the face amounts of the obligations.

 

 


 

 Section 8—Hyperinflationary Great Depression

Even with the government’s spending, debt and obligations running far beyond the ability of the government to cover with taxes or the political willingness of the government to cut entitlement spending, the inevitable inflationary collapse, based solely on these funding needs, possibly could have been pushed well towards the end of the current decade.  Yet, the effects of extraordinary economic downturn and the government’s response to same, have advanced the turning of Social Security funding from being in net surplus, to net deficit, by several years, to the present day.

The printing presses already are running, and the Fed is working actively to debase the U.S. dollar, effectively funding fully net U.S. Treasury debt issuance to the public.  Global rejection of the U.S. dollar and criticism of U.S. government fiscal actions and Federal Reserve monetary policy are accelerating, along with calls for a new world reserve currency.

Actions already taken to contain the systemic solvency crisis and to stimulate the economy (which have not worked), plus what should be renewed devastating impact of unexpected ongoing economic contraction on tax revenues, have set the stage for a much earlier crisis.  Risks are high for the hyperinflation beginning to break in the months ahead; it likely cannot be avoided beyond 2014; it already may be beginning to unfold.

It is in this environment of rapid fiscal deterioration and related massive funding needs that the U.S. dollar remains open to a rapid and massive decline, along with a dumping of domestic- and foreign-held U.S. Treasuries.  The Federal Reserve would be forced to monetize further significant sums of Treasury debt, triggering the early phases of a monetary inflation.  Under such circumstances, current multi-trillion dollar deficits would feed rapidly into a vicious, self-feeding cycle of currency debasement and hyperinflation.

With the economy already in depression, hyperinflation kicking in quickly would push the economy into a great depression, since disruptions from uncontained inflation are likely to bring normal commercial activity to a halt.

What happens next is anyone’s speculation.  How long would a hyperinflation last before the government brought its fiscal house into order and established a sound currency?  I would be surprised if the hyperinflation crisis lasted beyond a year or two, since the system is not positioned to handle the crisis well and pressures for rapid resolution would be extremely strong.  All that depends, however, on what evolves out of what otherwise would be highly unstable political, economic, financial and social environments.  Accordingly, the best individuals can do is to take actions to protect themselves and their families, through the worst of foreseeable circumstances, both in terms of personal safety and in terms of the purchasing power of pre-crisis assets. 

The following is an exploration of certain problems that likely would have to be handled in a hyperinflation.

Lack of Physical Cash

The United States in a hyperinflation, likely would experience the quick disappearance of cash as we know it.  In Zimbabwe, there was the back-up of a well-functioning black market in U.S. dollars, but no such back-up exists in the United States.  Shy of the rapid introduction of a new currency and/or the highly problematic adaptation of the current electronic commerce system to new pricing realities, a barter system is the most likely circumstance to evolve for regular commerce.  Such would make much of the current electronic commerce system useless and add to what would become an ongoing economic implosion.  It also could take a number of months to become reasonably functional.

Some years back, I happened to be in San Francisco, having dinner with a former regional Federal Reserve Bank president and the chief economist for a large Midwestern bank.  Market rumors that day had been that there was a run on a major bank in the City by the Bay.  So I queried the regional Fed president as to what would be happening if the rumors were true.

He had had some personal experience with a run on banks in his region and explained how the Fed had a special team designed to handle such a crisis.  The biggest problem he had had was getting adequate cash to the troubled banks to cover depositors, having to fly cash in by helicopters to meet the local cash-flow needs.

The troubled bank in San Francisco, however, was much larger than the example cited, and the former Fed bank president speculated that there was not enough cash in the vaults of the regional Federal Reserve Bank, let alone the entire Federal Reserve System, to cover a true run on deposits at the major bank.

Therein lies an early problem for a system headed into hyperinflation: adequate currency.  Where the Fed may hold roughly $150 billion in currency outside of roughly $50 billion in commercial bank vault cash, the bulk of roughly $930 billion in currency outside the banks is not in the United States.  Back in 2000, the Fed estimated that 50% to 70% of U.S. dollar cash was outside the system.  That number probably is higher today, with perhaps as little as $300 billion in physical cash in circulation in the United States, or roughly 1.7% of M3.  The rest of the dollars are used elsewhere in the world as a store of wealth, or as an alternate currency, free of the woes of unstable domestic financial conditions.  Those conditions would change severely in the event of a U.S. hyperinflation.

Given the extremely rapid debasement of the larger denomination notes, with limited physical cash in the system, existing currency would become worth more as kindling for a fire than as currency, and would disappear quickly as a hyperinflation broke.

For the system to continue functioning in anything close to a normal manner, the government would have to produce quickly an extraordinary amount of new cash, and electronic commerce would have to be able to adjust to rapidly changing prices.

In terms of cash, new bills of much higher denominations would be needed, but production lead time is a problem.  Conspiracy theories of recent years have suggested the U.S. Government already has printed a new currency of red-colored bills, intended for some dual internal and external U.S. dollar system.  If such indeed were the case, then there might be a store of “new dollars” that could be released at a 1-to-1,000,000 ratio, or whatever ratio was needed to make the new currency meaningful, but such would not resolve any long-term problems—as seen in the multiple Zimbabwe devaluations—unless it was part of an overall restructuring of the global currency system, and unless the U.S. government first put its fiscal house in order.

From a practical standpoint, however, currency would disappear, at least for a period of time in the early period of a hyperinflation.

Possible Short-Term Electronic Relief for Individuals

For those who have foreign-currency denominated bank accounts outside the United States, something along the lines of a debit card against that account—let’s say a Swiss franc account—could help, in theory.  In the U.S., one could buy $100,000 worth of groceries with the debit card, and 50 Swiss francs would be deducted overnight from the account in Zurich, based on the then-current exchange rate.  Such presumes, though, the ongoing functioning of a system in the U.S. that could handle the transaction.

Where the vast bulk of today’s money is not physical, but electronic, however, chances of the system adapting there are virtually nil.  Think of the time, work and effort that went into preparing computer systems for Y2K, or even problems with the recent early shift to daylight savings time.  Systems would have to be adjusted for variable, rather than fixed pricing, credit card lines would need to be expanded daily, the number of digits used in tallying dollar-denominated transactions would need to be expanded sharply.  I have had assurances from some in the computer field, though, that a number of businesses have accounting software that can handle any number of digits.

From a practical standpoint, however, the electronic quasi-cashless society of today likely also would shut down early in a hyperinflation.  Unfortunately, this circumstance rapidly would exacerbate an ongoing economic collapse.  

Barter System

With standard currency and electronic payment systems non-functional, commerce quickly would devolve into black markets for goods and services and a barter system.  Gold and silver both are likely to retain real value and would be exchangeable for goods and services.  Silver would help provide smaller change for less costly transactions.  One individual indicated to me that he had found airline bottles of high-quality scotch to be ideal small change in a hyperinflationary environment.

Other items that would be highly barterable would include full bottles of liquor or wine, or canned goods, for example.  Similar items that have a long shelf life can be stocked in advance of the problem, and otherwise would be consumable if the terrible inflation never came.  Separately, individuals, such as doctors and carpenters, who provide broadly useable services, already have services to barter.

A note of caution was raised once by one of my old economics professors, who had spent part of his childhood living in a barter economy.  He told a story of how his father had traded a shirt for a can of sardines.  The father decided to open the can and eat the sardines, but he found the sardines had gone bad.  Nonetheless, the canned sardines had taken on a monetary value.

Howard J. Ruff, who has been writing about these problems and issues since Nixon closed the gold window, rightly argues that it would take some time for a barter system to be established, and suggests that individuals should build up a six-month store of goods to cover themselves and their families in the difficult times.  Such is within the scope of normal disaster planning in some areas of the country (for example, I sit almost on top of the Hayward Fault).  Stories out of the great Japanese earthquake just reinforce those common-sense principles.

Financial Hedges and Investments

During these times, safety and liquidity remain key concerns for investments, as investors look to preserve their assets and wealth through what likely are going to be the most difficult of times.  Those who can preserve their wealth and maintain liquidity will have the ability to take advantage of extraordinary investment opportunities during and after the crises.

The nature of what lies beyond the onset of the hyperinflation cannot be predicted by anyone with much confidence, given the extreme systemic and economic disorder and political instability that likely would follow.  Any number of outcomes is possible, and the following comments reflect concepts that should offer some asset protection given the reality of a hyperinflation, or where certain behavior can be anticipated.  Beyond that point, whether there are functioning stock markets or financial institutions, or how society, the economy and government would function are open questions.  I’m an economist, not an investment advisor.  Individuals simply have to use their own common sense in preparing for and handling whatever may arise. 

Gold and Silver.  In a hyperinflation, physical gold and silver would be primary hedging tools that would retain real value and also be portable in the event of possible civil turmoil.  At some point, the failure of the world’s primary reserve currency will lead to the structuring of a new global currency system.  I would not be surprised to find gold or silver as part of the new system, structured in there in an effort to help sell a new non-fiat currency system to the public.

Real Estate.  Real estate also would provide a basic long-range inflation hedge, but it lacks the portability and liquidity of gold.  That could become an issue if the political environment shifted so radically that ownership of private property became impossible.  A subscriber queried as to the relative merit of different types of real estate.

Again, allowing for periods of possible illiquidity, over the long-term, real estate in general should tend to retain much of the purchasing of the dollars invested into it.  Depending on location and function, agricultural, residential and commercial real estate could appreciate relative to each other in that sequence through a hyperinflation, but nothing is set.  As before, individual common sense has to be applied to particular circumstances.

Currencies.  Having some funds invested offshore—outside of the U.S. dollar—would be a plus in circumstances where the government might impose currency or capital controls.  I still look at the Swiss franc, the Canadian dollar and the Australian dollar as currencies likely to maintain their purchasing power against the U.S. dollar.  Any suggestions here in terms of currencies, gold and silver, etc. are for holding same over the long term.  Extreme near-term price volatility remains a risk in most markets. 

Taking on Debt.  Inflation is supposed to be the debtor’s friend, where debtors, like the U.S. government, end up paying off their obligations in cheap dollars.  A note of caution is offered here.  The current circumstances are extraordinary.  Borrowers should consider their ability to carry debt through extremely difficult economic times, including possible loss of employment, etc., before high inflation might kick in.  Consider, too, the U.S. government recently has intervened in altering terms and conditions of mortgages.  Could a radical political change end up recasting the terms of personal obligations?

Bonds.  If inflation increases, so too should bond yields.  Yields would continue to rise in a situation with rising inflation.  That would reduce the value of bonds already held at lower yields.

TIPS.  The U.S. Treasury offers securities where yields and principal get adjusted regularly for the rate of inflation.  In a hyperinflation, price changes can be so rapid that the principal and/or yield adjustment would lag enough so as to make the adjustments worthless.  The reporting lag in calculating the adjusting CPI index—if it even could be calculated—still would wipe out investors, unless the Treasury became particularly creative and began benchmarking to spot gold or such, but nothing like that is in place.

As to the potential rapidity of price change, consider some anecdotal evidence.  One story out of Weimar Germany involved buying an expensive bottle of wine for dinner.  The empty bottle was worth more as scrap glass the next morning than it had been worth as a full bottle of wine the night before.  Another story involved negotiating the price and paying for a meal, before sitting down, as the price of the meal would be higher by the time it was finished.

 

Equities.  While equities do provide something of a traditional inflation hedge—revenues and profits get expressed in current dollars—they also tend to reflect underlying economic and political fundamentals.  I still look for U.S. stocks to take an ultimate 90% hit, peak-to-trough, net of inflation, during this period.  Where all stocks are tied to a certain extent to the broad market—to the way investors are valuing equities—such a large hit on the broad market would tend to have a dampening effect on nearly all equity prices, irrespective of the quality of a given company or a given industry.

The preceding graphs show the year-end Dow Jones Industrial Average (DJIA) in current terms, as well as adjusted for the CPI-U and the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation.  While stocks may rally based on high inflation, in inflation-adjusted terms, a bear market remains a good shot.  An early-hyperinflation DJIA at 100,000 could be worth 1,500 in today’s terms.

Possible Official Actions and Responses/External Risks

As consumer prices begin to spike, as the Fed moves to accommodate funding needs for ever-exploding federal fiscal shortfalls, and as the U.S. dollar comes under ever-heavier global selling pressures—all at high risk in the coming months—the federal government and the Federal Reserve could react with a variety of measures that could delay the hyperinflation’s onset for brief periods.  Those possible actions, though, would not alter the hyperinflation outlook fundamentally or meaningfully.  Potential official responses or external events include, but are not limited to:

Currency and Other Market Interventions.  The U.S. Treasury can have the New York Federal Reserve Bank intervene in the currency markets in support of the dollar.  Even when coordinated with other central banks, intervention usually is counter to fundamental pressures, and does nothing to turn a currency beyond the period of intervention.  Intervention becomes expensive and usually fails in a short period of time.  Unless underlying fundamentals are changed at the same time (i.e. interest rates are raised against the rest of the world), supportive intervention provides a selling opportunity for those looking to dump dollars.

Intervention often is preceded by jawboning, which usually fails even faster than the intervention.

Then there is the President’s Working Group on Financial Markets (aka the “Plunge Protection Team”), which has been directed to do what it has to do in order to keep financial markets orderly.  Actions here, however, usually have been worked through what formerly were investment banks, and are short-lived in impact, as with the currency interventions.

Wage and Price Controls.  The federal government can freeze wages and prices or limit the pace of increase in same, but such tends to distort economic activity, creating product shortages and black markets.  Fundamental inflation pressures are not relieved.

Nationalization of the Banking System.  One “solution” to ongoing and likely deepening systemic insolvency within the banking system would be a nationalization of the banks by the U.S. government.  Such likely would accelerate dollar debasement and the onset of the hyperinflation.

Restricted Capital Flows.  The federal government can impose restrictions on capital outflows from the United States, impairing the ability of those in the United States to seek financial safe-haven elsewhere.  This likely would exacerbate a global dollar panic. 

Release of Strategic Petroleum Reserves.  As we are go press, there are active suggestions that the Administration tap U.S. strategic oil reserves in order to help provide relief from rising gasoline prices.  Such effects would be temporary, and could be short-sighted from a supply standpoint, given the political problems still festering in the Middle East and North Africa.

At the same time, there is talk of OPEC looking to increase oil production to offset any market supply disruptions from those mounting political disorders, but such has not provided much immediate price relief, so far, although the potential economic impact of the Japanese earthquake has had some effect.  Nonetheless, the persistently high prices suggest that underlying oil-price strength largely continues to reflect weakness or failing global confidence in the U.S. Dollar.

Balanced-Budget Effort.  The government could move to balance its budget—heavily talked about at present—but any such efforts likely would span a number of years, be based on overly optimistic economic assumptions and be focused on the cash-based as opposed to the GAAP-based deficit (see Section 7—U.S. Government Cannot Cover Existing Obligations.).  Efforts on that basis would have limited impacts on both near- and long-term fiscal solvency.

Return to Gold Standard.  Suggestions have been floated as to returning the U.S. dollar to full gold backing.  While something like that is likely—probably a necessity—in the aftermath of the hyperinflation ahead, the problem (perhaps the desired effect) is that the gold standard would restrict the government’s deficit spending.  As such, in order for the new system to work, the government first would have to balance its GAAP-based spending—which I contend is not politically feasible at present (see Section 7—U.S. Government Cannot Cover Existing Obligations.).  Unless fiscal circumstances are in balance, a new gold-based system would see continuous devaluations of the dollar against gold, as unsupportable money was created.  On the other hand, if fiscal conditions were in balance, returning to a gold standard likely would not be under serious consideration at present. 

Government Seizure of Privately Held Gold.  A question commonly raised by subscribers is the potential for the federal government to seize privately held gold, today, as it did back in 1933, when President Franklin Roosevelt abandoned the domestic gold standard.  While there is little the federal government might do that would be too surprising in the current environment, seizure of privately-held gold most likely would be tied to some reform of the monetary system, not just as an action aimed at punishing gold investors.

Back in 1933, the use of gold continued for the settlement of international accounts between sovereign states, and the U.S. government’s needs under that circumstance were used as an excuse for the seizure of public’s gold holdings.  While there were some exceptions to the seizure, such as coin collections and jewelry, U.S. investors ended up shifting funds into gold stocks as surrogates for the precious metal.

Private U.S. ownership of physical gold became legal, again, after President Richard Nixon closed the gold window on international settlements in 1971.  The shift in private-gold-ownership policy, then, also was tied to the international monetary system’s backing, or lack of same, in gold. 

Meaningful reform of the global monetary system and creation of a new U.S. currency, of whatever form, most likely would be post-hyperinflation events. 

Major Natural Disasters.  The catastrophic earthquake in Japan is a reminder of unpredictably of the natural disasters that can befall a nation.  Physical damages are not adjusted in GDP, although insurance payments can have positive impact when the payments are made by a foreign-based insurer or reinsurer.  Disruptions in normal commerce are a GDP negative, but rebuilding activity is a positive.  To the extent the federal government funds rebuilding efforts with deficit spending or pays out unfunded government insurance, such actions add to the deficit and inflation issues.

Military Action.  Beyond their horrors, wars historically have roots in economic problems, and they usually have the effect of spiking economic activity and inflation, as well as distracting public attention from other concerns.  Orders for military goods at the outbreak of World War II in Europe, for example, helped to pull the United States out of the Great Depression.  

Today, defense accounts for just six-percent of durable goods orders in the consumer-driven U.S. economy.  A major new military conflict—beyond the wars already impacting U.S. economic activity and fiscal planning—might provide the economy with some boost, but that would be at the expense of an offsetting further sharp deterioration in fiscal conditions and inflation prospects. 

Some production gains also might be problematic, where the United States has lost significant manufacturing capacity to offshore competition.  When the big gun on the U.S.S. Iowa exploded in 1989, the machine tools needed to manufacture a replacement gun no longer were available in the United States.  They were available, however, in China.  At the extreme, the outbreak of a global conflict of the magnitude of World War II, today, would be at the horrific risk of becoming nuclear. 

Back to the Fed: QE2, QE3 and Other Non-Effective Policies.  The Federal Reserve fairly easily can have negative impact on the economy and inflation, but positive results are not so simple.  The Fed can kill economic activity by shrinking systemic liquidity, and it can increase inflation by “printing” money.  Efforts to stimulate economic growth or to reduce inflation, however, historically have been much more difficult to accomplish.  At present, though, Fed policies perversely are creating new inflation at the same time that a systemic liquidity squeeze is intensifying the economic downturn (see Section 6—Federal Reserve, the Money Supply and Fighting Deflation.  Continued efforts to debase the dollar should be successful, but not in stimulating economic activity, only in triggering an accelerating pace of inflation.

Significant efforts to cut back on, or to reverse, the so-called quantitative easing actions are not likely.  The liquidity that the Fed has put into the system has been deemed necessary by the Fed, likely more from the standpoint of helping banking-system liquidity than really expecting the measures will boost economic activity.  As discussed throughout this report, the economic and systemic-solvency crises appear to be worsening, not improving, suggesting more, not less, quantitative easing.

Volcker-Like Inflation Containment.  Back in the oil-based inflation of the late-1970s, early-1980s, Federal Reserve Chairman Paul Volcker earned a reputation as an effective inflation fighter.  What he did was to raise interest rates so high as to drive the economy into the ground, creating one of the worst (double-dip) recessions of the post-World War II era.  He killed economic demand enough so as to offset oil-price distortions, at least partially.  With current economic activity already in severe contraction—even more severe than that of the early-1980s—chances of such a policy being pursued or even having the potential of working, at present, are slim.  

Restraining the Federal Reserve.  Efforts in Congress to restrain government spending could contain federal spending activity when the system next moves to the brink of collapse.  As long as the Federal Reserve remains independent, however, it still likely would do whatever it had to in order to prevent systemic collapse into a deflationary great depression.  If the Fed were reined-in, then whether the system ended in fire or ice, or somehow bought new life with a miraculous political shift that allowed for fiscal balance, would be in the hands of the President and Congress.

 

Section 9—Closing Comments

Other Issues

A U.S. hyperinflationary great depression would be extremely disruptive to the lives, businesses and economic welfare of most individuals.  Such severe economic pain could lead to extreme political change and/or civil unrest; the timing would be right for the emergence of a successful third party for the 2012 election.  

What has been discussed here remains well shy of a comprehensive overview of all possible issues, but rather at least has raised some questions and touched upon some likely consequences.  No one can figure out better than you the peculiarities of this circumstance and how you, your family and/or your business might be affected.  Using common sense remains the best advice I can give.

These matters will continue to be expanded upon in the regular SGS Commentaries, as circumstances and subscriber reactions dictate.  

I extend by deep thanks to the various readers who have raised questions and provided ideas, comments and material.  As always, please feel free to offer your thoughts or raise your questions by e-mail to johnwilliams@shadowstats.com.

 

Recommended Further Reading

This section will be updated shortly (advised by e-mail to subscribers), populated with additional significant titles, with volumes ranging from dealing with hyperinflation, to the history behind the money system and today’s crises.

As mentioned elsewhere in the text, and as recommended to subscribers for years, there remains:

Fiat Paper Money, The History and Evolution of Our Currency
by Ralph T. Foster (Privately Published)
2189 Bancroft Way, Berkeley, CA 94704
E-mail: tfdf@pacbell.net

To my knowledge, Ralph Foster’s extraordinary volume is the most comprehensive and informative analysis available on the history of fiat currencies.  Continually updated and expanded, the privately printed book recently has been offered with a novel binding that incorporates authentic worthless fiat currency notes.

No. 356: February Retail Sales, January Trade Deficit

Friday, March 11th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 356
February Retail Sales, January Trade Deficit

March 11, 2011

_________

February Retail Sales Gain of Questionable Reporting Quality

January Trade Deficit Suggests Downside Pressure on First-Quarter GDP Growth

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The posting of this Commentary was delayed somewhat by a member of staff receiving a tsunami warning here in California.  The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Thursday, March 17th, following releases of February CPI and Industrial Production, including assessments of the prior day’s Housing Starts and PPI reports.  The Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) should be published on Monday (March 14th; updated circumstances will be posted at www.shadowstats.com, left column, above the current Commentaries.

—Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Markets Are Flying Blind.  In terms of meaningful economic reporting, the financial markets continue to be flying blind, at the moment.  Economic data of questionable significance continue to flow from the government’s statistical bureaus, including this morning’s (March 11th) report of February retail sales.  There will be a full review of the economic outlook in the Hyperinflation update, and the constant-dollar February retail sales will be assessed in the March 17th Commentary, following the CPI release.

On its surface, the February retail sales report was positive on a nominal (not-adjusted for inflation) basis, as well as likely in real (inflation-adjusted) terms.  The reporting-quality problems remain in unstable monthly seasonal-factor adjustments.  Seasonal patterns have been warped by the depth and duration of an economic downturn that is unprecedented in the post-World War II era of modern economic reporting.  The retail data will be revised in a pending annual benchmark revision, scheduled for April 29th.  At that time, retail sales levels and growth of at least the last year should be subject to major downside revisions, showing a weaker economy than has been recognized previously.  As with the recent, major downside revisions to payroll employment, and the pending downside revisions to industrial production later in March, the retail sales downgrade will be a precursor to major downside revisions in GDP history of the last several years, which are due for release in late July.

While there also are seasonal-adjustment issues with the trade data, the reported January 2011 deficit has set up a potential dampening of growth to be reported in first-quarter 2011 GDP, at the end of April. 

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Retail SalesToday’s (March 11th) February 2011 retail sales report—issued by the Census Bureau—indicated a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.97% (up 1.46% net of prior-period revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 0.71% January monthly gain (previously an increase of 0.34%).

On a year-to-year basis, February 2011 retail sales were reported up by 8.87% from February 2010, versus a revised year-to-year January 2011 gain of 8.08% (previously 7.76%). 

The Census Bureau plays games with the monthly seasonal factors and revisions to year-ago data, where only a limited number of the revisions are published.  That leaves the monthly data in the published historical series inconsistent, month-over-month, for the last several years.  Shifting patterns of seasonals can shift adjusted growth from earlier periods into the current reporting, without the earlier revisions being published.  Ongoing distortions basically are from the same concurrent seasonal-factor adjustment problems (unprecedented business-cycle effects overwhelming the traditional seasonal patterns of activity) and sampling issues (companies out business that no longer are reporting, but still are being counted) with sales or employees on payrolls.  (See Commentary No. 349 and Commentary No. 355).

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Retail Sales.  While much of February’s reported monthly retail sales gain was due to inflation, real retail sales for the month most likely were positive.  Chances are good for next Thursday’s (March 17th) report on February CPI-U to show monthly inflation greater than the 0.4% consensus estimate (see Week Ahead).  Inflation-adjusted February retail sales will be assessed following that release.

Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, “core” retail sales—consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when “core” inflation is lower than full inflation—are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: February 2011 versus January 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues—was up by 1.0% versus an official aggregate gain of 1.0%.

Version II: February 2011 versus January 2011 seasonally-adjusted retail sales—net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gas stations—was a gain of 0.8% versus the aggregate gain of 1.0%.

 

Widening of January 2011 Trade Deficit Suggests Downside Pressure on First-Quarter 2011 GDP.  The January 2011 trade deficit widened sharply against the December and fourth-quarter 2010 trade shortfalls.  The deterioration in both real and nominal terms was enough that if February and March came in at the same level, the fourth-quarter trade gains currently in the GDP would be reversed completely.  The significance there is that the purported fourth-quarter trade gains accounted for more than the entire growth reported for fourth-quarter GDP. 

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Trade Deficit.  For January 2011, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported yesterday (March 10th) that the nominal, seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services in January 2011 widened to $46.3 billion from a revised $40.3 (previously $40.6) billion in December 2010.  The January 2011 deficit also widened from $34.6 billion a year ago.

Against December 2010, the January trade balance showed gains in both exports and imports, with the import pick-up much stronger than the export increase, due partially to oil activity.  Oil imports reflected both higher prices and physical import volume.  Specifically, for the month of January 2011, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $84.34 per barrel, up from $79.78 in December 2010, and up from $73.89 in January 2010.  In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, January 2011 volume averaged 9.376 million barrels per day, versus 9.115 million in December 2010 and 7.912 million in January 2010.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit.  Adjusted for seasonal factors and net of rising oil prices and other inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the reported January 2011 merchandise trade deficit still widened sharply to $49.5 billion, from $46.0 billion in December.  The first reporting from first-quarter 2011, the January deficits annualizes out to $594.1 billion.  That is up meaningfully from the fourth-quarter goods deficit, which was at a revised annualized pace of $543.3 (previously $543.2 billion).

If the January deficit pace were to hold for the balance of the first-quarter, that effectively would offset fully the fourth-quarter GDP gains that resulted from a narrowing in the fourth-quarter trade balance.

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.  

Residential Construction (February 2011).  February housing starts are due for release on Wednesday, March 16th.  They likely will continue to show a pattern of renewed contraction, with any unexpected gain unlikely to be statistically significant.

Producer Price Index—PPI (February 2011).  The February PPI is due for release on Wednesday, March 16th.   There is a fair shot of an upside reporting surprise (0.6% consensus estimate per Briefing.com), as this regularly-volatile series should begin to show mounting inflationary pressures beyond the direct impact of rising oil prices.

Consumer Price Index—CPI (February 2011).  The February CPI is due for release on Thursday, March 17th.  Briefing.com indicates a consensus expectation of a 0.4% headline number, the same as in January.  Reporting risks are to the upside.  While the biggest portion of impact from recent rising gasoline prices should show up in the March CPI, “core” inflation also should start to show upside movement.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in February 2011 CPI-U reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.05% adjusted monthly gain seen in February 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for February 2011, the difference in February’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from January 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.63%.  A consensus result of a 0.4% monthly increase would yield an annual CPI inflation rate of about 2.0%.

Industrial Production (February 2011).  February’s index of industrial production is due for release on Thursday, March 17th.  Expectation (Briefing.com) is for a 0.6% increase, following January’s 0.1% decline.  Reporting risk should be to the downside.  Irrespective of the initial reporting, the entire series will go through a benchmark revision on March 25th.

 

 

__________

No. 355: February Employment and Unemployment

Friday, March 4th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 355
February Employment and Unemployment

March 4, 2011

__________

Crisis with Unstable Seasonal-Factors Diminishes Significance of Adjusted Labor Data

February Unemployment: 8.9% (U.3), 15.9% (U.6), 22.1% (SGS)

Contracting M3 and Rising Inflation

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, March 11th, following release of February Retail Sales and will include an assessment of the previous day’s January Trade Deficit.  The Hyperinflation Special Report (2011) will be published by Monday afternoon (March 7th).

Also, please the note at the end of this Commentary for detail on the new Web site pages for the Withholding-Tax Series. —Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Openly Misleading Reporting from the Bureau of Labor Statistics.  In today’s (March 4th) press release on February labor conditions, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported that, “The change in total nonfarm payroll employment for December was revised from +121,000 to +152,000, …”  While that new December number was published that way, today, the December gain really was 120,000, and the BLS knows that.  The difference is in the concurrent seasonal-factor adjustments made each month, where history, consistent with current reporting, is revised back a number of years in internal BLS calculations, yet only revisions for the prior two months—December and January in today’s report—are published.  November has been locked in place at last month’s reporting level, until next year’s benchmark revisions.  Based on what should have been the seasonally-adjusted revision to November in BLS calculations, December’s revised monthly gain was 120,000, not 152,000.  

Reporting of Employment and Unemployment Continues to Be Distorted by Unstable Seasonal Factors.  As discussed in Commentary No. 349, the extreme severity of the current economic downturn—both in terms of depth and duration—has distorted regular month-to-month reporting of seasonally-adjusted series, particularly the nonfarm payroll employment and the headline U.3 unemployment rate numbers.

Meaningful seasonal-adjustments tend to be stable over time, without wild fluctuations every time the seasonals are re-estimated.  This is true particularly for series like payroll employment and retail sales where the seasonal factors are concurrent, that is, the seasonal factors are recalculated each month for the current month’s reporting based on the current month’s raw data. 

In the case of nonfarm payrolls, those monthly seasonal-adjustment recalculations alter the seasonally-adjusted series going back a number of years.  The BLS, however, only shows the revisions back two months, in an effort not to “confuse” data users.  The problem arises where unstable seasonal factors—in this case resulting from extreme and non-seasonal shifts in economic activity—sharply shift the patterns of previously reported growth, related to current monthly activity, but the prior-period revisions are not reported to the public.  As a result, current increases or decreases in activity may reflect nothing more than a shift in seasonal patterns that is not being reported by the BLS.  The currently published seasonally-adjusted data are not consistent with the officially reported history, although the BLS has the consistent history available.

Once a year, with the annual benchmark revision, the reported history is brought current, almost.  In last month’s benchmark, for example, the historical series was revised for updated survey information and for seasonal factors as well, through December 2010.  Still, those numbers were not consistent with what was reported for January 2011, where the January concurrent seasonal adjustments left even the historical benchmark revision data inconsistent with the January numbers reported at that time.  In the current post-benchmark cycle, the February jobs estimate is the second concurrent seasonal-factor adjustment.

The inconsistency differences can be calculated based on the raw data and the seasonal-adjustment program available to the public on the BLS Web site.  Using the BLS data, we have calculated the seasonally-adjusted numbers as the BLS should be showing them, as of the current reporting, and the differences between official reporting and the consistent seasonally-adjusted series—seasonal-factor instabilities from just two months of revisions—are shown in the following graph.

As can be seen in the plot (the difference is the consistent adjusted series less the official numbers), the latest reporting shows that the instability in the concurrent seasonal factors has shifted previously-reported relative economic strength in the general February to August period, to the September through January period.  The differences will tend to shift over time, and we plan to publish this detail on a monthly basis, until such time as the BLS begins reporting the full monthly revisions to its seasonally-adjusted data.  The shifting patterns go both ways, where one month becomes relatively weaker, another will become relatively stronger, and vice versa, including the relative strength or weakness of the latest number.

 

While minor differences in reporting will move the financial markets, these shifting variations, in combination with the BLS’s recognized inability to assess the Birth-Death effects accurately (see the Birth-Death Model section), and an otherwise estimated 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000 jobs in the reported monthly payroll change, means that the headline reporting usually seen for payrolls should not be taken too seriously.  Issues with seasonal factors also cloud the significance of the reported monthly levels in the seasonally-adjusted headline U.3 unemployment rate. 

Payroll Survey Detail.  The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted February 2011 jobs gain of 192,000 (an increase of 250,000 jobs before prior-period revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval).  January payrolls showed a revised 63,000 (previously 36,000) gain.  In terms of year-to-year change, the unadjusted February 2011 number was up by 0.98% from the year before, which was up from January’s revised 0.69% (previously 0.68%) increase.

The graphs of long-term year-to-year payroll change show a recent increase in annual growth, which primarily reflects recent, protracted bottom-bouncing in the payroll series.  Current annual growth has recovered from the post-World War II record 5.06% decline in August 2009, which was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II (a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945).  Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the August 2009 annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

As shown in the preceding graphs of seasonally-adjusted payroll levels (as reported by the BLS), however, the current data continue to reflect bottom-bouncing, with the payroll level still below where it was a decade ago, despite a 10% increase in the U.S. population in the same period.  

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  Despite the ongoing and regular overstatement of monthly payroll employment—as evidenced by the regular annual downward benchmark revisions to the reported payroll numbers, including the benchmark published last month—the BLS has upped its monthly biases in post-benchmark reporting.  For February 2011, there was a positive monthly bias used of 112,000, up from the revised estimate of 97,000 used in February 2010.  In January 2011, the net bias was a contraction of 339,000, narrowed from the 427,000 contraction now estimated for January 2010

Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business, on a timely basis (within at least five years, if ever), such information is estimated by the addition of a bias-factor generated by the Birth-Death Model (a model of the effects of new business creation and old business bankruptcies).  The fundamental defects of the Birth-Death Model are discussed as usual in the ensuing paragraphs.

Positive assumptions—commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling—can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with “stronger” economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates, or underlying assumptions of ongoing economic recovery.  Indeed, historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels—to understate employment declines—during recessions.   There is a faulty underlying premise here that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business.  So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, presumed additional “surplus” jobs, created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor.  These add-factors likely are running now above 30,000 per month (seasonally-adjusted).  I still estimate this monthly bias should be negative by 200,000 or so, on average.  Since it is not, the BLS continues regularly to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 230,000 jobs.  Much of that misreporting, which was not picked up in the 2010 benchmarking, now will not be corrected until at least the 2011 benchmark revision (based on the upcoming March 2011 benchmarking) to be published in February 2012.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (counting multiple job holders more than once).  February 2011 showed a 250,000 employment gain from January, which was reported up by 117,000 (estimated as a 589,000 gain, adjusted for breaks in the reporting consistency of the series) from December.

As noted in the opening comments, the U.3 unemployment still likely has been affected by highly unstable seasonal factors that are artifacts of the severe and extraordinarily protracted downturn in U.S. economic activity, not from changing seasonal patterns.

The February 2011 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate declined by a statistically-insignificant 0.13 percentage point to 8.92% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from 9.05% in January.  Not-seasonally-adjusted, February’s U.3 unemployment fell to 9.5% from 9.8% in January.

The February U.6 unemployment rate declined to a seasonally-adjusted 15.9% from 16.1% in January, again suffering from seasonal-maladjustment.  The unadjusted rate fell to 16.7% in February, down from 17.3% in January.  The broadest unemployment rate published by the BLS, U.6 includes accounting for those marginally attached to the labor force (including short-term discouraged workers) and those who are employed part-time for economic reasons (they cannot find a full-time job).

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, “discouraged workers”—those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had—were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been “discouraged” for less than a year.  This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers.  The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the SGS estimate of excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed and labor force, unemployment—more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure—notched lower to about 22.1% in February, from 22.2% in January 2011.  The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting, and tends to follow its relative monthly movements.  Accordingly, it will suffer some of the current seasonal-adjustment woes afflicting the base series.  See the Alternate Data tab for a graph and more detail.

As discussed in earlier writings, while an unemployment rate around 22% might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession.  The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms.  Today, less that 2% work on farms.  Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

 

February M3 Likely Down Year-to-Year, With the Monthly Level Little Changed versus January.  The preliminary estimates for the February money supply will be published over the coming weekend, on the Money Supply page at the Alternate Data tab of www.shadowstats.com.  The SGS Ongoing M3 Estimate for the February 2011 monthly average is on track to show a 2.1% year-to-year contraction, versus a 2.2% contraction in January.  Seasonally-adjusted, the February number appears likely to show little change from January, with recent gains in M2 largely offset by, and reflecting a shift in funds from, declining institutional money funds and large time deposits.  

As will be discussed in some detail in the upcoming Hyperinflation Report (2011), declining money supply can be consistent with rising inflation, if the pace of contraction in constant-dollar GDP is more severe than the money supply contraction.  Given the current nature of the overstatement of GDP growth, this unusual circumstance may be in play.

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the month and months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

Trade Balance (January 2011).  The January trade deficit is scheduled for release on Thursday, March 10th.  Odds favor ongoing deterioration in the U.S. trade position.

Retail Sales (February 2011).  February retail sales are due for release on Friday, March 11th.  Briefing.com is indicating a consensus forecast of a 0.4% monthly gain, following a 0.3% increase in January.  Odds favor not only another downside reporting surprise versus consensus, but also an outright monthly contraction net of rising prices.

 

NOTE: New Pages for the Withholding-Tax Series.
The new Withholding-Tax Series, which was discussed in last week’s Commentary, now has its own set of pages.   An overview page with two frequently updated charts at:

http://www.shadowstats.com/charts/employment/federal-withholding-taxes,

and links to a more detailed description of the data, and to occasional comments and updates as the data shows features of interest.  We hope to elicit feedback from subscribers and non-subscribers alike, which will help guide our decisions on what further work is undertaken in this area.

 

__________

No. 354: GDP Revision, Durable Goods Orders, Home Sales, Tax Receipts, Political Crises

Friday, February 25th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 354
GDP Revision, Durable Goods Orders, Home Sales, Tax Receipts, Political Crises

February 25, 2011

__________

Safe-Haven Flight from Mounting Political Turmoil in North Africa and Mid-East
Favors Precious Metals and Swiss Franc over U.S. Dollar

Payroll-Tax-Deposit Series to Offer New Economic and Fiscal Insights

4th-Quarter GDP Growth Revised Lower
But Quality Issues Continue

Home Sales Remain Troubled

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, March 4th, following release of the February employment and unemployment data.

The Hyperinflation Special Report (Update 2011) should be published by early next week (targeted for Monday afternoon, February 28th).  Its posting on the Web site will be advised by e-mail.

— Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

U.S. Dollar Losing Its Safe-Haven Status?  With political upheaval surfacing in the Mid-East and North Africa, global capital increasingly has been moving into traditional safe-haven investments such as precious metals, or into safe-haven currencies such as the Swiss franc.  What is of particular significance here is that flight capital has been seeking shelter outside of the U.S. dollar, which for decades had been the favored safe-haven currency.  Against the U.S. dollar, the Swiss franc – another traditional safe-haven currency – hit a record high in the last day or so.  Other than for the British pound, the U.S. currency has been losing exchange-rate value against the other major currencies (Australian dollar, Canadian dollar, Japanese yen and even the euro) during this period of mounting political instabilities.   Gold has neared its all-time high, while silver recently has set a multi-decade high.

Oil prices have spiked in response to the various crises, adding further upside pressure to U.S. consumer inflation from oil supply fears and ongoing dollar weakness.  As with the dollar-debasement efforts of the Fed, these inflation pressures reflect factors other than strong economic demand.

At the same time, the fragility of the faux U.S. economic recovery is becoming more obvious to the markets, with economic data increasingly surprising consensus forecasts on the downside, as seen in this week’s home sales and GDP revision reporting.  In the months ahead, an intensifying “renewed” decline in broad economic activity should gain increasing market recognition.

Irrespective of whether the political turmoil spreads or dies down, irrespective of Saudi efforts to help contain panicked oil price rises, irrespective of short-lived fluctuations in exchange rates and precious  metals prices, the U.S. now stands at a point where it is particularly vulnerable to an evolving global loss of confidence in the U.S. dollar.  Heavy selling of the U.S. currency and panicked dumping of dollar-denominated paper assets, which could trigger U.S. financial market upheaval and the early stages of a hyperinflation, is possible at any time with little or no warning.  It could be triggered by an unhappy economic or political surprise, or otherwise.  Where risks remain high of U.S. financial turmoil unfolding in the months ahead, the onset of a hyperinflation still has an outside timing estimate of 2014.

A full review on the economy, inflation and systemic-solvency issues follows in next week’s update to the Hyperinflation Inflation Report.  The broad outlook and potential hyperinflation timing remain consistent with last year’s missive, and regular readers of the SGS Commentaries should find few surprises in the revamped report.

 

New Withholding-Tax Series Should Provide Insights to Employment, Earnings and Fiscal Conditions.  Although still a work in progress, we are pleased to introduce a new analysis of a highly meaningful but not widely tracked statistic: federal receipts of payroll withholding taxes.  Several subscribers have requested that we cover the series as an economic indicator, where withholding-tax receipts should rise and fall with employment, earnings and tax law changes.  This series has two advantages over the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) payroll survey, where the tax data become available one day after they are deposited to the U.S. Treasury, and where the series covers all employers.  It is not a sample, and filing accuracy by employers is mandatory.

Unfortunately, though, working backwards from the data to get a clear picture of what is happening in the labor market is unusually complex, but much of that complexity can be overcome.  At present, we can get some useful quantitative signals and checks against other statistics; ultimately we hope to provide a more timely and accurate indication of changes in the employment picture than currently is available from the BLS. 

The complexity generally results from the tax deposits with U.S. Treasury being concentrated on days arising from interacting payroll calendar cycles and deposit schedules. This makes the significance of daily or weekly totals, and even their comparison with prior years, difficult.  Further, since withholding tax is a non-linear function of wages, and there is a distribution of wages and personal tax situations across the population, conclusions about overall job and wage levels or growth cannot be reached easily.

Our contribution here has been to create a process for standardizing tax receipts during a four-week period – comparable with the four-week period the year before – enabling year-to-year comparison with some meaning.  Further detail on this series and our approach will be posted on the SGS Web site in the next week, with subscribers being advised of that posting by e-mail.

The graph following reflects the raw standardized data, without any adjustment for seasonal variation.  Formal recessions are marked by the shaded areas.  Again, keep in mind that numbers are driven by employment, earnings and tax laws.  The regular peaks in activity tend to be tied to the payment of year-end bonuses.

 

 

Year-to-Year Change in Payroll-Tax Receipts – Volatility Ahead of Sustained Impact from Lowered Social Security Withholdings.  The next graph shows the year-to-year change in payroll-tax deposits at the U.S. Treasury, with the latest data showing a particularly sharp drop in the past week, extending a general trend of slowing or contracting annual growth in the last month.  Individual data can be highly volatile, and not too much should be read into any individual data point.  That said, an annual decline could be expected from this year’s temporary two-percentage point cut in Social Security withholding taxes, and such should be affecting tax deposits soon, if it has not already started to do so.  Also the effects of the relative timing and accounting strategies for year-end bonus payments, which have affected data of the last couple of months, also have a few weeks to play out.  After that, it should be possible to extract some meaningful information on the developing trends for 2011 U.S. fiscal conditions.

 

 

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

BEA’s “Second” Guesstimate on Fourth-Quarter 2010 GDP Was Increasingly Flimsy.  The downside revision to fourth-quarter GDP growth reflected slower growth in personal consumption and in spending by local governments than had been estimated in initial reporting.  The trade deficit – as reflected in the net export account – actually narrowed, despite the extraordinary divergence between the GDP estimates and the trade deficit reporting as of December 2010.  The December trade report suggested a much smaller quarterly improvement in the fourth-quarter trade deficit than was reflected in the GDP accounting (see Commentary No 350.)

Of the 2.79% annualized real growth now estimated for fourth-quarter GDP, the purported improvement in the trade deficit accounted for 3.35 percentage points of growth (the GDP contracted net of the trade gains), while much slower growth reported for inventories knocked 3.70 percentage points off what otherwise would have been reported.  Given the unreliability of these underlying series, current GDP is less meaningful than usual.  This number will go through one more regular revision at the end of March, and then it will be subject to annual benchmark revisions in July, when economic history of the last couple of years will be revised, likely showing a much weaker economic environment than currently is perceived by the financial markets.  

GDP — The Detail.  Published this morning, February 25th, by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the "second" estimate (first revision) of real (inflation-adjusted) fourth-quarter 2010 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) annualized quarterly growth was 2.79% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), down from an initial estimate of 3.17% but still marginally higher than the 2.56% growth estimated for the third-quarter.  For the year, average 2010 GDP versus 2009 was revised to 2.83% (initially 2.86%), versus a 2.63% decline in 2009 against 2008, while year-to-year change in fourth-quarter 2010 over fourth-quarter 2009 was up by a revised 2.70% (initially 2.79%), higher than the 1.95% year-to-year gain in fourth-quarter 2009, but lower than the 3.25% seen in third-quarter 2010.

The fourth-quarter GDP implicit price deflator was estimated at a revised annualized pace of 0.38% (initially 0.26%), versus 2.03% annualized quarterly inflation for third-quarter 2010.  In contrast, annualized seasonally-adjusted quarterly inflation for the CPI-U in the fourth-quarter spiked to a recently-revised seasonally-adjusted 2.62%, from 1.43% annualized inflation in the third-quarter (see Commentary No. 353).  The lower the inflation rate used in deflating the GDP, the stronger is the resulting inflation-adjusted number and vice versa.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for fourth-quarter 2010 remains an approximate annual contraction of 2.1% versus the official estimate of a 2.8% gain. Such is more negative than the alternate 1.4% annual contraction (3.2% official gain) in the third-quarter (see the Alternate Data tab).  While annualized real quarterly growth is not estimated formally on an alternative basis, a flat-to-minus quarter-to-quarter change still appears to have been realistic for the fourth-quarter, in what generally has been a protracted period of bottom-bouncing.

Reflecting the latest revisions, the following graphs show, first, year-to-year percent change in the official inflation-adjusted quarterly GDP for the history of the series.  The record annual contraction for the series was 4.11%, seen in second-quarter 2009.  The second graph shows the average annual real growth by year for the history of the series.  The record annual contraction there, following the World War II production shutdown, was 2.63% in 2009.

 

 

 

GNP and GDI.  The initial estimates for fourth-quarter GNP (Gross National Product) and GDI (Gross Domestic Income) will not be published until the “third” estimate of fourth-quarter GDP on March 25th, since the actual data underlying these national income aggregate numbers remains of such little substance – sometimes educated and sometimes hopeful guesses – that the BEA recognizes these data would not be meaningful at present.  What the markets and the financial media do not realize is that today’s aggregated GDP report is as worthless as the aggregated GDI and GNP measures would have been had they been reported also.

 

January Durable Goods Bounced Higher Within Normal Series Volatility.  The Census Bureau reported yesterday (February 24th) that the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods rose by 2.7% (up by 5.0% before prior-period revisions) month-to-month in January 2011, after a revised 0.4% (previously 2.5%) decline in December.  The monthly gain was more than accounted for by a sharp jump in irregular, long-term aircraft orders.  Unadjusted, year-to-year change in total January new orders was a gain of 8.2%, up from the revised 7.7% (previously 6.2%) annual increase reported for December.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders rose by 4.6% (up by 8.0% before prior-period revisions) in January, versus a revised monthly decline of 3.4% (previously down by 6.3%) in December.  For January, the unadjusted year-to-year growth in the series was 12.4%, up from a revised 9.3% (previously 6.2%) gain in December.

 

Home Sales Problems Mount.  Both existing and new home sales continued a pattern of bottom-bouncing in early 2011, with distressed sales increasing. 

Yesterday’s (February 24th) reporting of January new-home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) showed a marginally, statistically-insignificant monthly decline of 12.6% (up 13.7% before prior period revisions) +/- 13.1% (95% confidence interval) from December.  December’s revised level was up by 15.7% (previously 17.5%) from November.  The year-to-year decline in new-home sales in January 2011 was a statistically-significant 18.6% +/- 18.0% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 8.7% (previously 7.6%) decline in December.

Wednesday’s (February 23rd) release of January existing-home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) showed a 2.7% monthly increase (a decline of 0.1% net of prior-period revisions), versus December’s revised 12.5% (previously 12.3%) increase.  On a year-to-year basis, January sales were up by 5.3% from the year before.

Foreclosure activity remained a major distorting factor for home sales, with "distressed" activity accounting for an estimated 37% of existing sales in the NAR’s January reporting, up from 36% in December.

Separately, the Census Bureau acknowledges that a portion of new home sales also is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimates as to the scope of the issue.  Some in the construction trade have difficulty competing with the pricing of foreclosed properties.  Until the foreclosure problems get worked out in the system, monthly changes in these home sales numbers cannot be taken as meaningful positive indicators (when the numbers are positive) of underlying activity in homeowner real estate, as it relates to general economic activity.

 

 

 

 

 

The preceding graphs reflect different measures of home sales activity since February 2009.  The updated numbers, through January 2011, reflect the seasonally-adjusted level of monthly sales, rather than the annual rates usually published by the industry.

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

Unemployment and Payroll Employment (February 2011).  Detail on February labor conditions is due for release on Friday, March 4th.  Briefing.com indicates consensus forecasts of a 172,000 gain in February payrolls, versus a 36,000 increase in January, with the headline U.3 unemployment rate rising to 9.1% from 9.0%.  Once again, with economic activity generally below market expectations, the payroll employment growth likely will disappoint the consensus outlook (possible outright monthly contraction), and the unemployment rate is at risk of an upside jump to 9.4% or more, if seasonal factor distortions begin to reverse out.

 

 

__________

No. 353: January Inflation

Thursday, February 17th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 353
January Inflation

February 17, 2011

__________

January Annual Inflation Rose to 1.6% (CPI-U), 1.8% (CPI-W), 9.1% (SGS)

Accelerating December and January Inflation Was Muted by Unstable Seasonal Adjustments

C-CPI-U Revisions Generated "Needed" Lower Inflation Reporting

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, February 25th, following release of the first revision to fourth-quarter 2010 GDP, along with detail on new orders for durable goods and for new and existing home sales released earlier in the week.

The Hyperinflation Special Report (Update 2011) is on target for publication next week but most likely towards the end of the week/weekend.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Surging Inflation Continues in Response to Fed’s Dollar-Debasement Efforts.  Consumer prices again rose by more than was expected by the markets, both in aggregate and in the nonsensical "core" inflation number hyped by the Fed and Wall Street’s inflation apologists.  The Federal Reserve’s ongoing efforts at debasing the U.S. dollar have placed direct downside pressure on the exchange-rate value of the U.S. dollar and upside pressure on commodities priced in same.  At work here not only is in the impact of higher prices in dollar-denominated commodities such as oil and food, but also is in the spreading of those cost pressures into the broad economy.

This morning’s (February 27th) inflation report also included revisions to the seasonally-adjusted CPI data, but the unadjusted data remained unchanged.  As seen with yesterday’s PPI reporting, revised and unstable seasonal adjustments reduced adjusted monthly inflation reporting in both January 2010 (which also means a dampening of the January 2011 number) and December 2010.  January and December 2010 adjusted monthly gains respectively revised from 0.2% to 0.1% and from 0.5% to 0.4%.  January 2011’s gain likely would have been 0.5%, following December’s initially-reported monthly gain of 0.5%, had the seasonal "recalculations" not taken place.  See Commentaries No. 349 and No. 352 for background detail on the seasonal-factor distortion issues.

Separately, the Chained or Chain-Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) was revised on an unadjusted basis, so that reported year-to-year inflation now appears to be showing lower inflation than the CPI-U on a consistent basis.  This fully substitution-based inflation measure was touted by the President’s deficit commission as the preferred measure for calculating cost of living adjustments (COLA) for Social Security and other programs.  Such would lower COLA adjustments, as the C-CPI fully would reflect substitution-based spending patterns, such as people buying more hamburger because steak had gotten too expensive.  This is directly counter to the CPI’s initial usage and purpose as a measure of the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living, a concept that many people wrongly assume still is the basis of the government’s inflation reporting.

The regular graphs on gold, silver, oil and the Swiss franc follow.

 

 

 

As will be highlighted in the pending update to the Hyperinflation Special Report, global investors increasingly will shun the U.S. dollar, as its purchasing power gets hammered by Mr. Bernanke et al, and as U.S. political and fiscal stability rapidly deteriorates.  As investors flee the dollar and dollar-denominated paper, the precious metals and stronger major currencies will continue to be the primary beneficiaries in U.S. dollar terms, irrespective of any near-term market volatility, extreme or otherwise.  More-prudent economic and fiscal actions taken by major U.S. trading partners will tend to make the U.S. dollar look all the worse on a relative basis.

 

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

Consumer Inflation Reshaped Slightly by Revisions.  As discussed in the opening comments, revisions to CPI seasonal adjustments back through January 2006 have shown instabilities consistent more with data distortions than with stable seasonal smoothing of an economic series.  The unadjusted series (except for the C-CPI-U) were not revised, and that supports the traditional concept of using the CPI on an unadjusted instead of an adjusted basis.  Some effects of the revisions (including the regular recasting of the unadjusted C-CPI) follow in the regular CPI text.

CPI-U.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported that the seasonally-adjusted January 2011 CPI-U rose for the month by 0.40% (up by 0.48%, unadjusted).  Such followed a revised 0.43% (previously a 0.50%) gain (up 0.17% unadjusted) in December. 

Annualized, seasonally-adjusted, quarter-to-quarter CPI-U was revised to 2.62% (originally 2.57%) in fourth-quarter 2010, versus a revised 1.43% (was 1.47%) in the third-quarter.  The annualized inflation pace, though, is accelerating, up by 3.10% for the three months ended January 2011, versus 2.26% for the three months ended October 2010.

Unadjusted, January’s year-to-year CPI-U inflation was 1.63%, against a 1.50% annual increase in December.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s February 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.05% adjusted monthly gain seen in February 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for February 2011, the difference in February’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from January 2011’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.63%.

CPI-W.  The narrower, seasonally-adjusted CPI-W, which has greater weighting for gasoline than does the CPI-U, rose in January by 0.45% (up 0.53% unadjusted) for the month, following a revised 0.53% (previously 0.63%) gain (up 0.47% unadjusted) in December. 

Annualized, seasonally-adjusted, quarter-to-quarter CPI-W was 3.09% (revised from 3.10%) in fourth-quarter 2010, versus 1.71% (revised from 1.76%) in the third-quarter.  As with the CPI-U, however, the annualized inflation pace is accelerating, up by 3.56% for the three months ended January 2011, versus 2.73% for the three months ended October 2010.

Unadjusted, January 2011’s year-to-year CPI-W inflation was 1.80% against a 1.68% annual increase in December.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists, including the recent presidential deficit commission, as the replacement for the CPI — is reported only on an unadjusted basis.  It was revised going back to January 2009.

Unadjusted year-over-year, average 2010 over 2009 annual C-CPI-U inflation was revised to 1.46% from the 1.56% indicated last month, versus a contraction of 0.05% (revised from a 0.06% contraction) in 2009 over 2008.

C-CPI-U year-to-year inflation increased to 1.45% in January 2011, versus an unrevised 1.35% in December 2010.

The following series of graphs show the C-CPI revisions.  The first graph shows the C-CPI-U and revisions, against the CPI-U (re-indexed to December 1999 = 100, the C-CPI-U base).  The next three graphs show the revisions in year-to-year change.  As a result of the re-estimation, the C-CPI now shows annual inflation rates below the CPI in most cases.  That pattern was the purpose behind creating the C-CPI-U series.  Eventually the C-CPI will be used artificially to reduce COLAs for Social Security, etc.  Please note that earlier reporting (Prior versus CPI-U) had strayed from underlying theory, hype and political needs.

 

 

 

 

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 5.0% in January 2011, up from 4.8% in December, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to about 9.1% (9.07% for those using the extra digit) in January, from about 8.9% in December. 

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation.  Despite November 9th’s historic high gold price of $1,421.00 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix) and the multi-decade high silver price of $30.77 per troy ounce (London fix) yesterday (February 16th), gold and silver prices have yet to approach their historic high levels, adjusted for inflation.  The earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 would be $2,406 per troy ounce, based on January 2011 CPI-U-adjusted dollars, $8,047 per troy ounce based on SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (all series not seasonally adjusted). 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org) has not been hit since, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars.  Based on January 2011 CPI-U inflation, the 1980 silver price peak would be $140 per troy ounce and would be $468 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (again, all series not seasonally adjusted).

As shown on page 22 in the Hyperinflation report, over the decades, the price of gold has compensated for more than the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the dollar based on the SGS-Alternate.

Real Money Supply M3.  The signal of the still unfolding double-dip recession, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), most recently was discussed graphed in Special Commentary No. 342, continues and is graphed below.  Based on the January CPI-U report and the latest January SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate, the annual contraction in January 2011 real M3 was 3.8%, versus a 4.3% contraction in December 2010.

The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn or its duration.  The current downturn signal was generated just over one year ago, in December 2009.  The broad economy tends to follow in downturn or renewed deterioration roughly six to nine months after the signal, as has appeared to have started in recent months, with flat-to-down nonfarm payrolls, flattening industrial production, flattening real retail sales (see the following section), and renewed contraction in the already severely-constrained real estate market.  Increasing weakness in a number of series should become evident as benchmark revisions to industrial production, retail sales and GDP show weaker than currently assumed economic activity for the last year or so, and as current reporting turns increasingly negative.  Such eventually will lead to recognition of a double-dip recession.

 

 

Real Retail Sales.  Based on the January 2011 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly January 2011 retail sales declined by 0.06%, where, before inflation adjustment, the current number was up by 0.34%.  Real December sales notched higher by 0.09% in revision, revised from a prior 0.1% contraction thanks to the seasonal-factor revisions in the CPI-U.  See Commentary No. 351 for other January 2011 retail sales detail.

January real retail sales rose at a year-to-year pace of 6.01%, versus the revised 6.17% (previously 6.45%) annual gain reported for December. 

Since November 2008, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $164.3 billion (the deflated January number was $172.6 billion).  The first graph following reflects the relatively volatile monthly levels of real retail sales, as reported. The monthly levels for December 2010 and January 2011 appear to be topping out, but that is not shown in the six-month-moving-average pattern in the second graph, yet.

 

 

 

Smoothed on a six-month moving-average basis, the pattern of activity here has been one of bottom-bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales.  The recent upturn/bounce from short-lived stimulus factors and warped-seasonals still lingers in seasonal-adjustment problems, which likely await the April seasonal-factor and benchmark revisions for catch-up.  There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity — no recovery — just general bottom-bouncing.  Accordingly, real retail sales levels in the months ahead likely will be increasingly negative.

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

New and Existing Homes Sales (January 2011).  January existing home sales (National Association of Realtors) are due for release on Wednesday, February 23rd, followed by new home sales (Census Bureau) on Thursday, February 24th.  As with the underlying weakness in housing starts, these volatile series should remain extremely weak, with any monthly change (new homes) again lacking statistical significance.  As usual, given the extreme volatility, reporting error and revisions in these series, given the poor-quality seasonal adjustments, given continuing negative anecdotal evidence, and given ongoing massive distortions from increasingly volatile foreclosure activity, the monthly movements in these numbers remain particularly meaningless.

New Orders for Durable Goods (January 2011).  Due for release on Thursday, February 24th, January new orders for durable goods also likely will not show meaningful monthly change, again, even with the upside biases built into these numbers in the last benchmark revision.  This series remains irregularly volatile.

Gross Domestic Product — GDP ("Second Estimate" Fourth-Quarter 2010).  The Bureau of Economic Analysis’ second estimate (first revision) of fourth-quarter 2010 GDP is due for release on Friday, February 25th.   Based on the December trade reporting, some downside revision is possible (see Commentary No. 350).  Due to inadequate annual data (an unstated problem also with the GDP) the Gross Domestic Income and Gross National Product initial estimates are not likely to be published until next month.

 

 

__________

No. 352: January PPI, Production, Housing Starts

Wednesday, February 16th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 352
January PPI, Production, Housing Starts

February 16, 2011

__________

PPI Gain Was Stronger than Expected with Mounting "Core" Problems,
Yet Increase Was Muted by Revised Seasonal Factors

Industrial Production Likely Faces Major Downward Revisions in March

Housing Starts Still Bottom-Bouncing/Weakening

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: This morning’s update on PPI, production and housing will be followed by a major Commentary tomorrow, Thursday, February 17th, after the release of the January Consumer Price Index.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Seasonal-Factor Issues Continue to Plague Monthly Reporting.  Despite generally weak economic results and stronger-than-expected inflation, ongoing distortions with seasonal-adjustments, resulting from the extreme severity of the economic downturn discussed in recent writings (see Commentary No. 349), helped to overstate industrial production activity and to understate inflation in the producer price index (PPI) in today’s (February 16th) reporting.  Good-quality seasonal adjustments are characterized by general stability, whether re-estimated monthly or annually, where the adjustments are supposed to smooth out regular seasonal variations in activity tied to holidays, etc.  When the seasonals instead are attempting to smooth irregularly volatile activity due to economic upheaval (or extreme oil price swings), the seasonals are unstable, and the resulting, adjusted month-to-month reporting is of little meaning. 

The PPI went through its annual seasonal-factor revisions (and survey redefinitions) with the January report, and the revisions showed anything but stability.  December 2010 monthly PPI inflation revised from 1.1% to 0.9%, while January 2010 number (related to January 2011 seasonals) revised from 1.3% to 1.1%.  The monthly revisions and reporting for December 2010 and January 2011 reflected distortions from unstable seasonals, particularly in the areas of food and energy.

The PPI will not go through another annual revision for a year.  Industrial production, however, will go through a major revision on March 25th, with history revised back to 1972.  The upcoming data should show significant downside revisions to prior reporting, suggesting a longer and deeper economic contraction than popularly is recognized, along with a shallower bounce or short-lived "recovery" in the current numbers.     

 

January PPI Gain Likely Would Have Been 1.0% Instead of 0.8% But For New and Unstable Seasonal Factors.  As reported this morning by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) in January 2011 rose by 0.8% (up 0.8% before seasonal adjustment) month-to-month, following seasonal-adjustment revisions that reduced initial December monthly inflation from 1.1% to 0.9% (up by 0.6% before seasonal adjustment — the unadjusted number was not affected by revisions).  Nonetheless, the annualized, seasonally-adjusted PPI inflation for the last three months (ended January) accelerated to 10.0%, up from an annualized pace of 6.1% in the prior three months ended October.  Unadjusted and year-to-year, January 2011’s PPI inflation was 3.6% versus 4.0% December. 

The monthly PPI finished goods increase reflected the Fed’s dollar-debasement-induced upside pressures on gasoline prices, although subdued reporting of food inflation continued to run counter to anecdotal evidence of Fed-induced spikes there.  The 0.5% "core" PPI inflation rate for January (up from an unrevised 0.2% in December) also was an upside surprise for the markets, as the effects of higher oil prices spread into broader areas of economic activity.

Separately, on a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted January 2011 intermediate goods rose by 1.1% (up by a revised 0.9% — initially 1.0% — in December), with January crude goods prices jumping up by 3.3% (up by a revised 6.5% — initially 4.0% — in December).  Year-to-year inflation in January intermediate goods was up by 6.0% (a 6.5% gain in December), with January annual inflation in crude goods at 10.0% (up by 15.5% in December).

 

January Industrial Production Continued Topping Out.  As noted in the opening comments, seasonal adjustments in the industrial production series remain unstable, and the series likely faces major revisions next month.  Consistent and stable adjustments would have shown much weaker production growth late in 2010, with January 2011 virtually flat against December, instead of showing an upward revision to December production with the small January contraction reported this morning.  The severe unseasonable-weather spike to December 2010 industrial production from reported utilities activity was partially offset in today’s January reporting.

As to the specific production data, the Federal Reserve Board reported that seasonally-adjusted January 2011 industrial production declined for the month by 0.06% (a 0.28% gain before revisions to December’s initial reporting, which were in the context of revisions to a number of prior months).  December’s revised production showed a 1.16% (previously 0.84%) gain.

Year-to-year change in January 2011 production was 5.15%, down from a revised 6.27% (previously 5.91%) in December, and down from the revised near-term peak of 8.35% in June.  As with retail sales, the relatively high volatility in annual growth is due largely to the pattern of collapsing activity a year ago (a May 2009 trough), followed by cash-for-clunkers-boosted production.  The year-to-year contraction of 12.86% seen in May 2009 was the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II.

The graph following shows recent monthly detail, with a fair shot that the September or October numbers, after revisions, still will have marked the turning point of renewed decline in the production series, despite the year-end jump in reported activity.

 

 

 

The "recovery" in production is shown in the preceding graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average.  For the last 25 months, the production index has averaged 90.42, around which the series has been fluctuating, although it consistently has been moving higher in recent months.  January’s six-month moving average was at 94.3 versus 95.1 for the single month.  Production activity had leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that at one point effectively wiped out the last eight years of growth in industrial production. 

The bump up in December likely will reverse-out in the benchmark revision to the series on March 25th.  Despite ongoing upside gains generated by short-lived stimulus and seasonal-factor distortions, the series likely still is bottom-bouncing and should begin to soften anew, significantly, in the oncoming months.

 

January Housing Starts Gain Was Not Statistically Meaningful And Reflected Downside Prior-Period Revisions.  The housing market is showing no rebound, despite a "positive" monthly report on January housing.  The gain was within the normal reporting volatility of the series and received a relative boost from negative prior-period revisions.   

As to specific details, the Census Bureau reported today a statistically-insignificant gain in January 2011 housing starts, up by 14.6% (up by 12.7% before prior-period revisions) +/- 18.3% (95% confidence interval) on a seasonally-adjusted month-to-month basis.  December’s starts were revised to a 5.1% (previously 4.3%) decline. 

Year-to-year change in January starts was a statistically-insignificant decline of 2.6% +/- 11.4% (95% confidence interval), following a revised annual decline of 9.7% (previously 8.2%) in December.

Although the pattern of housing starts generally remains one of bottom-bouncing at an historically low-level plateau of activity, as seen over the last 25 months, recent activity has started to slow anew, meaningfully. Significantly weaker monthly numbers remain likely in the months ahead.  Since December 2008, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 570,000.  In those 25 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, with the January 2011 monthly reading of 596,000, above average.  More significantly, the six-month moving-average for the series, as of January, stood at 569,000, slightly below the average level of the more than two years of bottom-bouncing.  Housing starts appear to have begun rolling down hill, once again, and such should be reflected quite clearly in the next several months of reporting. 

The "recovery" in housing is shown in these graphs.  The first graph reflects the level of monthly activity in terms of the annualized monthly rate of housing starts, which is randomly volatile and subject to large revisions on a monthly basis.  The second graph shows the six-month moving average, which tends to smooth out that monthly volatility. 

 

 

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

Consumer Price Index — CPI (January 2011)Due for release tomorrow, Thursday, February 17th, the January 2011 CPI once again should reflect not only higher gasoline prices, but also upside inflation pressures from other dollar-denominated commodity prices spiked by the Federal Reserve’s U.S. dollar-debasement policy, as well as from some spreading oil-price impact into the broad "core" economy.  Odds favor a possible upside reporting surprise, where the consensus estimate is for 0.3% per Briefing.com.

The monthly numbers also will undergo annual seasonal-adjustment revisions, which can shift around inflation patterns of the last year.

Not-seasonally-adjusted, year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in the January 2011 reporting, dependent on the reported seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.17% adjusted monthly gain seen in January 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for January 2011, the difference in January’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from December 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.50%.  A monthly increase of 0.3%, for example, would yield a year-to-year January 2011 inflation rate of about 1.6%.

 

__________

No. 351: January Retail Sales

Tuesday, February 15th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 351
January Retail Sales

February 15, 2011

__________

Retail Gains Were Offset Fully by Inflation for Second Month

"Core" Retail Sales Activity (Net of Gasoline Stations and Grocery Stores) Was Unchanged

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: This morning’s brief update on retail sales will be followed by a Commentary tomorrow, Wednesday, February 16th, after release of the details on January Producer Prices, Housing Starts and Industrial Production.  The final and most extensive Commentary of the week will on Thursday, February 17th, after the release of the January Consumer Price Index.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

"Rebounding" Retail Sales Have Stalled.  Broad economic activity generally is viewed in real (inflation-adjusted) terms, as seen in headline Gross Domestic Product (GDP) reporting, for example.  With sales numbers stripped of inflation gains, or of pricing effects from distortions in monetary policy, the residual growth is a measure of straight economic activity.  Accordingly, when retail sales increase by the same amount as the underlying prices in those sales, underlying demand is flat.

The reported monthly gain of 0.3% in January 2011 retail sales matched the consensus estimate of the headline 0.3% inflation gain for January CPI-U (due for release on Thursday, February 17th; see the Week Ahead below).  Along with January’s retail estimate came a downside revision to December’s monthly retail sales growth, from an initial 0.6% to 0.5%, where the December CPI-U was reported up by 0.5%.  (The CPI-U is the inflation measure usually used to deflate retail sales.) 

 

Subject to actual January CPI reporting and seasonal-adjustment revisions to the CPI series, the best estimates in hand show that seasonally-adjusted monthly retail sales growth has been unchanged for the last two months, including the retail industry’s all-important month of December. 

In like manner, the "core" retail sales growth for January — net of gasoline-station and grocery-store sales, which tend to move with gasoline and food prices — was unchanged (see Core Retail Sales below).

The real retail numbers should turn negative monthly, in revision, and in new reporting of the months ahead.

The annual benchmark revision for retail sales has been scheduled for April 29th.  At that time, retail sales levels and growth of at least the last year should be subject to major downside revisions, showing a weaker economy than has been recognized previously.  As with the recent, major downside revisions to payroll employment, and the pending downside revisions to industrial production in March, the retail sales downgrade will be a precursor of major downside revisions to GDP history of the last several years, which are due for release in late July.

Nominal Retail SalesToday’s (February 15th) January 2011 retail sales report — issued by the Census Bureau — indicated a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.34% (up 0.12% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 0.52% December gain (previously an increase of 0.61%).

On a year-to-year basis, January 2011 retail sales were reported up by 7.76% from January 2010, versus a revised year-to-year December 2010 gain of 7.65% (previously 7.93%).  Annual changes still have been unstable due to year-ago comparisons ranging from a severe trough in activity to last year’s cash-for-clunkers stimulus effects. 

At the same time, the Census Bureau still plays games with the monthly seasonal factors and revisions to year-ago data.  Continuing at work in retail sales reporting are ongoing major distortions from basically the same concurrent seasonal-factor adjustment problems (unprecedented business-cycle effects overwhelming the traditional seasonal patterns of activity, see Commentary No. 349) and sampling issues (companies out business that no longer are reporting, but still are being counted) with sales or employees on payrolls.

Real Retail Sales.  With the now-estimated monthly gains in December 2010 and January 2011 retail sales at 0.5% and 0.3%, respectively, and with the monthly gains in the December CPI-U at 0.5% and in January expected at 0.3%, real retail sales appear to have flattened out.  Such will be reviewed in Thursday’s (February 17th) Commentary, when the actual January CPI and any seasonal-adjustment revision to the December CPI are published.

 Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, "core" retail sales — consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation — are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: January 2011 versus December 2010 seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — was flat at 0.0% (0.04%) versus official aggregate gain of 0.3%.

Version II: January 2011 versus December 2010 seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gas stations — was flat at 0.0% (0.03%) versus the aggregate gain of 0.3%.

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

Residential Construction (January 2011)Due for release on Wednesday, February 16th, January housing starts likely will continue to weaken, with any upside surprise unlikely to be of no statistical significance.

Industrial Production (January 2011)Due for release on Wednesday, February 16th, January industrial production — aside from the continued effects of unseasonably bad weather spiking utility usage — should be down for the month, again, likely weaker than consensus forecasts. 

Producer Price Index — PPI (January 2011)Due for release on Wednesday, February 16th, the January 2011 PPI should tend to be on the upside of expectations, although the series is irregularly volatile.

Consumer Price Index — CPI (January 2011)Due for release on Thursday, February 17th, the January 2011 CPI once again should reflect not only higher gasoline prices, but also upside inflation pressures from other dollar-denominated commodity prices spiked by the Federal Reserve’s U.S. dollar-debasement policy, as well as from some spreading oil-price impact into the broad "core" economy.  Odds favor a possible upside reporting surprise versus the consensus estimate, which is for a 0.3% monthly gain per Briefing.com.

The monthly numbers also will undergo the annual seasonal-adjustment revisions, which can shift around inflation patterns of the last year.

Not-seasonally-adjusted, year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in the January 2011 reporting, dependent on the reported seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.17% adjusted monthly gain seen in January 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for January 2011, the difference in January’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from December 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.50%.  A monthly increase of 0.3%, for example, would yield a year-to-year January 2011 inflation rate of about 1.6%.

 

__________

No. 350: December Trade Deficit

Friday, February 11th, 2011

COMMENTARY NUMBER 350
December Trade Deficit

February 11, 2011

__________

December Trade Data Suggest Softer 4th-Quarter GDP in Revision

Deficits Deepen with Biggest Trading Partners

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is planned for Tuesday, February 15th, following release of January Retail Sales data. Subsequent Commentaries next week are scheduled for Wednesday, February 16th, following release of the details on January Producer Prices, Housing Starts and Industrial Production; and for Thursday, February 17th, following release of the January Consumer Price Index.

The Hyperinflation Special Report (Update 2011) tentatively is scheduled for release on Tuesday February 22nd, with a significant quantity of subscriber-raised issues and questions that will be addressed in the text.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Widening of December 2010 Trade Deficit Suggested Some Downside GDP Revision.  The December trade deficit widened against the revised November trade shortfall, in the context of monthly and annual trade reporting and revisions.  The total fourth-quarter 2010 trade data, however, showed a somewhat narrower deficit than did the third-quarter, both on a nominal (not adjusted for inflation) and a real (inflation-adjusted) basis.  Where a smaller deficit or larger surplus is a positive for broad economic growth, a positive contribution to fourth-quarter GDP would be expected. 

Looking at the hard numbers, though, the December reporting suggested a contribution of roughly 1.6 percentage points to fourth-quarter GDP growth, which included a contribution of 3.2 percentage points from the goods trade in the initial or advance fourth-quarter annualized GDP growth estimate, based just on October and November reporting.  Since the total "advance estimate" annualized growth rate for the GDP also was 3.2%, there is potential here for significant downside GDP revision, when the "second estimate" of fourth-quarter GDP is published on February 25th.  Such assumes, of course, a relationship between trade and GDP reporting, which sometimes fails to materialize in the GDP.

On an annual basis, the trade deficit resumed its historical deterioration (in both nominal and real terms), with trade deficits widening anew with major U.S. trading partners. 

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Trade Deficit.  For December 2010, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported today (February 11th) that the nominal, seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services widened to $40.6 billion from an unrevised $38.3 billion in November 2010.  The December 2010 deficit also widened from $37.1 billion a year ago.

On an annual basis, the 2010 trade deficit in goods and services (balance of payments basis) widened to $497.8 billion versus $374.9 billion in 2009, reflecting a more rapid increase in imports than exports.  In 2008, the deficit was $698.8 billion.

Against November 2010, the December trade balance showed gains in both exports and imports, with the import pick-up stronger than the export increase, due partially to oil activity.  Oil imports reflected both higher prices and physical import volume.  Specifically, for the month of December 2010, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $79.78 per barrel, up from $76.81 in November 2010, and up from $73.14 in December 2009.  In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, December 2010 volume averaged 9.115 million barrels per day, versus 8.606 million in November 2010 and 9.010 million in November 2009.

For the year, imported oil prices averaged $74.66 per barrel, up 31.1% from $56.93 in 2009.  In 2010, physical oil import volume average 9.254 million barrels per day, up from 9.082 million in 2009.  

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit.  With annual revisions and December reporting in place, as reported by the BEA, adjusted for seasonal factors and inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the fourth-quarter goods deficit was at an annualized pace of $543.2 billion.  That was down from the third-quarter annualized goods deficit estimate of $594.7 billion.  The implied $53 billion improvement would be enough to account for roughly 1.6 percentage points in fourth-quarter GDP growth, but the initial estimate of 3.2% annualized fourth-quarter GDP real growth included 3.2 percentage points based on the goods deficit guessed from just October and November data (yes, the "advance estimate" GDP growth was accounted for fully by the guessed trade number).  Accordingly, there is some downside-revision risk for the upcoming fourth-quarter GDP revision on February 25th.  

On an annual basis the real trade deficit in goods (the services components is largely a guess, with little hard data behind it, so the BEA does not publish hard estimates of its surplus adjusted for inflation) in 2010 was $555.3 billion (2005 chain-weighted dollars) versus $486.6 billion in 2009, again reflecting stronger import than export growth.  The deficit in 2008 was $604.0 billion.

 

 

 

The preceding graphs show the historical annual trade deficit.  The first graph shows both the total goods and services balance, as well as the traditional merchandise trade balance.  The services component was added to the merchandise reporting so as to help reduce the reported total deficit.  While the services component is a legitimate concept, very little of it actually can be measured, so it largely is a guessed number.

The second graph shows the merchandise trade deficit both before and after adjustment for inflation.  The unadjusted number is of greatest significance to the currency markets, while the inflation adjusted number is used in calculating GDP growth, at least some of the time.

2010 Merchandise Trade Deficits Jumped Minimally 20% with Top Trading Partners.  The U.S. 2010 trade deficits generally worsened with traditionally larger-deficit trading partners or groups: 

(1) The deficit with China widened 20.4% to $273.1 billion in 2010 from $226.9 billion in 2009. 

(2) With OPEC, the 2010 deficit widened by 54.9% to $95.6 billion from $61.7 billion in 2009. 

(3) The deficit with NAFTA widened by 35.4% to $94.0 billion in 2010 from $69.4 billion in 2009.  The deficit with Mexico increased by 38.7%, to $66.3 billion from $47.8 billion in 2009, with the Canadian deficit up by 28.1% in 2010 to $27.7 billion from $21.6 billion in 2009.

(4) The deficit with Japan increased by 33.8% to $59.8 billion in 2010 from $44.7 billion in 2009.

(5) The deficit with Germany was up by 22.3% to $34.5 billion in 2010 from $28.2 billion in 2009.

2010 U.S. Merchandise Trade Surpluses. The top five U.S. trade surpluses in 2010 were mixed versus 2009:

(1) The surplus with Hong Kong was $22.3 billion, up by 27.4% from $17.5 billion in 2009.  This should be viewed in the context of the deficit with China.

(2) The surplus with the Netherlands was $16.0 billion, down 0.6% from $16.1 billion in 2009.

(3) The surplus with Australia was $13.2 billion, up by 13.8% from $11.6 billion in 2009.

(4) The surplus with Singapore was $11.7 billion, up by 80.0% from $6.5 billion in 2009.

(5) The surplus with Brazil was $11.4 billion, up by 90.0% from $6.0 billion in 2009.


Week Ahead. 
Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

Retail Sales (January 2011)Due for release on Tuesday, February 15th, January retail sales remain subject to warped seasonal-factor effects, as discussed in Commentary No. 349.  Given possible reporting catch-up and greater underlying weakness than broadly is recognized, odds favor a weaker report than a likely relatively positive consensus forecast.  Higher inflation well could take the monthly change negative on an inflation-adjusted monthly basis.

Residential Construction (January 2011)Due for release on Wednesday, February 16th, January housing starts likely will continue to weaken, with any upside surprise unlikely to be of no statistical significance.

Industrial Production (January 2011)Due for release on Wednesday, February 16th, January industrial production — aside from the continued effects of unseasonably bad weather spiking utility usage — should be down for the month, again, likely weaker than consensus forecasts. 

Producer Price Index — PPI (January 2011)Due for release on Wednesday, February 16th, the January 2011 PPI should tend to be on the upside of expectations, although the series is irregularly volatile.

Consumer Price Index — CPI (January 2011)Due for release on Thursday, February 17th, the January 2011 CPI again should reflect not only higher gasoline prices, but also upside inflation pressures from other dollar-denominated commodity prices spiked by the Federal Reserve’s U.S. dollar debasement policy, as well as from some spreading oil-price impact into the broad "core" economy.

The monthly numbers also will undergo the annual seasonal-adjustment revisions, which can shift around inflation patterns of the last year.

Not-seasonally-adjusted, year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in the January 2011 reporting, dependent on the reported seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.17% adjusted monthly gain seen in January 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for January 2011, the difference in January’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from December 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.50%.  A monthly increase of 0.3%, for example, would yield a year-to-year January 2011 inflation rate of about 1.6%.

 

__________

No. 349: Crisis in Economic Reporting, Systemic Liquidity

Monday, February 7th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 349
Crisis in Economic Reporting, Systemic Liquidity

February 7, 2011

__________

Seasonal Adjustment Crisis:
Month-to-Month Comparisons Have Become Meaningless for Key Series

Broad Money Supply Appears to Be Contracting Month-to-Month

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: This morning’s brief Commentary covers areas that were intended for Friday’s Commentary No. 348, but which were delayed by time constraints related to assessing the payroll benchmark revisions.  The next regular Commentary is planned for Friday, February 11th, following release of December trade deficit data.  

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Crisis in Seasonal Adjustments — Monthly Economic Reporting in Unprecedented Turmoil.  Due to repetitious patterns in business activity — ranging from the impact of holidays and the school year to the effects of seasonal weather patterns — most economic series are seasonally-adjusted when viewed in terms of month-to-month or quarter-to-quarter change.  That is, the reporting agencies attempt to remove regular non-economic patterns of activity, so that what is left in reported period-to-period change generally is reflective of changes in regular economic activity.  While this process has worked reasonably well in the post-World War II era of modern economic reporting, it has fallen apart in the last several years due to the effects of the extraordinarily protracted and severe economic contraction. 

 

 

Simply put, the severe decline in economic activity has overwhelmed traditional patterns of seasonal activity, destabilizing the calculation of seasonal-adjustment factors using the traditional mathematical models that are based on a number of years of activity, with the greatest weighting given to the most recent period’s patterns.  As a result, key economic series such as retail sales and the purchasing managers surveys, at present, are not showing meaningful month-to-month reporting.  The issue here is separate from problems in surveying businesses that no longer are participating in the surveys due to going out of business or other factors.

The issue can be demonstrated with the relatively simple ISM purchasing managers survey.  Each of its indices (except prices) is seasonally-adjusted and has a problem similar to the one shown here with the employment index.  If seasonal adjustments were stable and working as expected, that stability should be evident year-to-year.  Looking at the two graphs preceding, the first shows the initial seasonal-factor estimates for 2005 and 2006, before the recent economic upheaval.  The patterns are reasonably stable year-to-year, when contrasted with the second graph, which shows the initial seasonals for 2010 and 2011 with significant differences.

Along with the 2011 seasonal-factor estimates, however, the 2010 seasonals were revised so as to be more consistent with the new pattern estimated for 2011.  The monthly unadjusted index is divided by the seasonal-adjustment factor to come up with the adjusted number.  Consider the following graph, which shows the unadjusted employment index for 2010.  

 

 

The next graph shows the unadjusted data seasonally-adjusted both for the initial seasonal factors as reported through December 2010 (light-blue line) and for the seasonal factors as revised along with the production of the initial 2011 estimate of seasonal factors (dark-blue line) and as currently reported.

So, did the employment picture weaken or strengthen in May?  How about November?  The answers depend on the seasonal adjustments used.  There has been no change whatsoever to the underlying raw, unadjusted data.  Unfortunately, there is no consistency or stability to the adjustment patterns at present.

In many respects, the financial markets and analysts, and policy makers, are partially blind as to what is happening in the economy.  Such can be extraordinarily dangerous, particularly when the mind starts filling in missing details as to what is not there.  These are times to assess the numbers carefully, to use common sense and to consider the underlying fundamentals.  If consumption is picking up, how is the consumer paying for it?  Beyond short-term stimulus giveaways, is consumer income up, is consumer debt expanding meaningfully?

 

Sharp Declines in Seasonally-Adjusted January U.3 and U.6 Unemployment Rates Revisited.  As noted in Friday’s Commentary No. 348, the January 2011 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate declined to 9.0% from 9.4% in December, while, unadjusted, it rose to 9.8% in January from 9.1% in December.  In like manner the broader January U.6 unemployment rate (including short-term discouraged workers and those forced to work part-time for economic reasons) dropped to a seasonally-adjusted 16.1% from 16.7% in December.  Not seasonally-adjusted, though, U.6 rose to 17.3% in January from 16.6% in December.

As noted in the Commentary, the seasonally-adjusted unemployment rates appear to have been affected by highly unstable seasonal factors that are artifacts of the severe and extraordinarily protracted downturn in U.S. economic activity, not from changing seasonal patterns, as discussed in today’s opening section.

While I’m still reviewing seasonal adjustment detail over time in the series — particularly with part-employment — two other issues here are worthy of note.  Some in the financial media noted that the participation rate (labor force as a percent of population) hit a new low in January.  This is an important area, where a declining pattern of participation tends to reflect a growing population of both short- and long-term "discouraged" workers, who have not sought work in the last four weeks.  While excluded from the labor force, these individuals otherwise meet all the qualifications of being unemployed, with short-time (less than a year) discouraged workers in U.6, and the long-term (more than year) in the SGS Alternate Unemployment Rate.

The decline in the participation in January was not real, however, just a result of the adjustments made to population estimates, as revamped each January.  The new series, which is not comparable with earlier reporting (i.e. December), does show the lower participation rate on an inconsistent basis, so perhaps a special adjustment might be due for the SGS measure.

Also, the short-term discouraged worker measure, which is included in U.6 and never is seasonally adjusted, was reported to have fallen by an unusually large 325,000 in January, versus December.  As the counted discouraged workers gain in seniority, once they pass one year on the government’s rolls, they no longer are counted or tracked by the BLS.  They do enter the realm of the long-term discouraged worker, however, which is estimated in the SGS measure.  Such likely was at work in January, along with possible other unusual effects from the population re-estimates.  This all is under review, but the January U.3 and U.6 data never may move beyond the phase of simply reflecting poor-quality reporting.

 

M3 Fails to Pick-Up, Despite QE2.  With 24-plus days of reporting in place for January 2011, the initial SGS Ongoing M3 estimate for the seasonally-adjusted monthly average shows a continuing year-to-year contraction, down 2.2% in January versus a 2.8% contraction in December, as shown in the graph following.  Such contrasts with estimated year-to-year gains in M1 of 9.9% in January versus 8.2% in December, and in M2 of 4.3% in January versus 3.4% in December.

 

In month-to-month terms, the monetary data can be subject to similar seasonal-adjustment distortions seen in the economic data, although the Fed is aware of the problem and has been working to adjust for same.  That said, and with the usual cautions about the month-to-month numbers, M3 contracted month-to-month in January 2011 for the fourth straight month, down roughly 0.3% in January versus December, which in turn was down by about 0.2% from November.  The respective monthly gains in M1 in January and December were 0.9% and 0.6%, and in M2 were 0.3% and 0.2%.  The monthly gains in M2 that have received some touting in the financial press have been more than offset by declines in the M3 components still published by the Fed: institutional money funds and large time deposits.

Accordingly the recent monthly increases in M1 and M2 reflected nothing more than cash flowing out of M3 accounts into M1 accounts.  The M1 and M2 increases were not a direct result of the Fed’s monetization of Treasury debt or of renewed growth in the monetary base, yet.  Such can seen, though, only using a broader money measure than M2.

The lack of growth in the M3 measure — traditional broadest money supply measure used by the Fed until its abandonment in March 2006 — suggests a re-intensifying systemic solvency crisis, as does the continued lack of growth in bank lending.  The implications here remain extremely negative for broad economic activity.  On the inflation front, however, where there is an overhang of $7 trillion or so outside the United States — being held at the whim of dollar investors — that has to be considered in the U.S. monetary picture.  Higher prices already are being seen in a number of dollar-denominated commodities, ranging from oil to food.  The higher prices are anticipating and fueling the early stages of Mr. Bernanke’s desired debasement of the dollar.  This area has been discussed previously and will be detailed anew in the forthcoming updated Hyperinflation Special Report.    

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

Trade Balance (December 2010).  The estimated December 2010 trade deficit is scheduled for release on February 11th.  Anything shy of a significant improvement in the inflation-adjusted deficit should have significant downside revision implications for the next estimate of fourth-quarter 2010 GDP (due for release on February 25th).   Consensus expectations (per Briefing.com) are for a widening in the December deficit, not for a sharp improvement, which is reasonable.

 

 

 

__________

No. 348: Labor Conditions and Revisions

Friday, February 4th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 348
Labor Conditions and Revisions

February 4, 2011

__________

"Recovery" Since April 2010 Just Evaporated

500K Payroll Jobs Disappeared in Benchmark Revision

January Payrolls Were Down 52K But for Upped Bias-Factor

Unemployment Rate Distorted by Seasonal-Adjustment Crisis

Unemployment: 9.0% (U.3), 16.1% (U.6), 22.2% (SGS)

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: Given the time involved in assessing this morning’s employment and unemployment data, and benchmark revisions to same, today’s Commentary will be split in two.  The update on systemic liquidity (it is deteriorating again), and a review of specific examples of the temporary loss of credible month-to-month reporting due to flaws in certain seasonal-adjustment methodologies, will follow over the weekend.  The next regular Commentary is planned for Friday, February 11th, following release of December trade deficit data.

Hyperinflation: The 2011 update to the Hyperinflation Report remains planned for around mid-month.  Many thanks for the influx of requests for particular issues or questions to be addressed.  This is the last call for such requests.  Please e-mail details to johnwilliams@shadowstats.com as soon as possible.  

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Benchmark Revision Showed a Longer and Deeper Economic Downturn.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) today (February 4th) released the January labor data, along with the annual benchmark revision to payroll employment.  The changes showed a weaker economy than previously reported, with January 2011’s seasonally-adjusted payroll level of 130,265,000 rolling back to what had been the reported level of activity in April 2009, as recently as last month. 

In last month’s release, the BLS proclaimed, "Since December 2009, total payroll employment has increased by 1.1 million, or an average of 94,000 per month."  As a result of the revisions, the previous payroll trough of December 2009 now has been replaced by February 2010, and the gain in payrolls from December 2009 to December 2010 eased back to 909,000.

From peak-to-trough (the peak month now is January 2008 [previously December 2007]; February 2010 [previously December 2009] is the short-lived official trough of the current cycle), payroll employment declined by a seasonally-adjusted 8,750,000 jobs, or 6.3% (previously 8,363,000 jobs, or 6.1%).  As of January 2011 reporting, payrolls purportedly have regained 0.8% or 1,019,000 jobs since the February 2009 trough.

 

 

As shown in the above graph, the current seasonally-adjusted payroll level, which is represented by the thick blue line, really is not showing an economic recovery as much as it is ongoing bottom-bouncing at a low level of activity.  The biggest bounce shown there is from the short-lived effects of the 2010 federal census.  Please note that all graphs reflect not only the revisions through December 2010, but also the new reporting of January 2011.

The red line shows the pre-2010 benchmark level, and the green line shows the pre-2009 benchmark level.  Meaningful downside revisions have been the norm over the years, and they result from excessive upside biases added into the monthly numbers as part of the Birth-Death Model discussed in that section.  Incredibly, despite ongoing regular overstatement of payrolls by the BLS, the BLS appears to have upped, not lowered, the excessive biases in its latest rendition.  Without the higher bias, the reported January 2011 payroll gain of 36,000 would have been a decline of 52,000.

The graph following shows the benchmarked payrolls with the effects of the temporary census hiring removed.  Despite all the recent market hype on economic recovery, the good times are not apparent in the payroll data — a coincident indicator of economic activity — where payrolls remain below levels seen a decade ago.  This is despite the U.S. population growing by more than 10% in the same period.  The structural impairments to U.S. economic activity continue to constrain normal commercial activity, preventing any meaningful recovery in business activity, as discussed in Special Commentary No. 342.

 

 

The benchmark revision affected seasonally-adjusted data back through 2006.  The revisions to the unadjusted numbers started with a 32,000 downside revision in April 2009 and ranged up to a 538,000 drop in September 2010.  Affected by regular "revisions" December’s (last month’s) payroll level was reduced by 483,000.

As shown in the next graph, year-to-year change softened during the benchmark period, and appears to have flattened out with the new January reporting.

 

At Crisis Level, Seasonal Factor Distortions Warped January’s Unemployment Rate.  As has been discussed recently, and as will be explored more extensively in this weekend’s Commentary, the extraordinary severity and duration of the economic duress in the United States during the last three to four years has destabilized traditional seasonal-factor adjustments and the related monthly reporting of certain economic series.

The unemployment rate rose in January 2011, not seasonally adjusted.  The 0.4% decline reported in the headline January unemployment rate appears to be a seasonal-factor issue.  My late-friend Alfred Sindlinger — surveyor of consumer conditions — always would get a twinkle in his eyes when he discussed the absurdity of seasonal adjustments and the individual, particularly with respect to people who were unemployed in reality, unable to benefit from those seasonally-adjusted jobs that the government said they were holding.  More follows over the weekend.

Payroll Survey Detail.  The BLS reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted January 2011 jobs gain of 36,000 (a drop of 447,000 before prior-period and benchmark revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval).  December payrolls showed a revised 121,000 gain (previously 103,000), after total December payrolls were lowered by 483,000 in revision.  In terms of year-to-year change, the unadjusted January 2011 number was up by 0.67% (0.43% net of prior-period revisions) from the year before, but that was flat-to-down from December’s revised 0.68% year-to-year gain (previously 0.82%).

 

 

The graph of long-term year-to-year payroll change reflects the numbers as reported in the benchmark revisions, with no adjustments for census hiring variations.  Thanks to recent, protracted bottom-bouncing in the payroll series, current annual growth  has recovered from the post-World War II record 5.06% decline in August 2009 (before the benchmark, the record was a 4.96% decline in July 2009).  The August 2009 decline was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II, which reflected a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945.  Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the August 2009 annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  Despite the ongoing and regular overstatement of monthly payroll employment — as evidenced by the regular annual downward benchmark revisions to the payroll numbers — the BLS appears to have upped its monthly bias in initial reporting of the post-benchmark period.  In January 2010, there was a negative monthly bias used of 427,000, yet today’s January 2011 bias was less negative, at minus 339,000.  But for the relatively positive change in the bias, January 2011’s 36,000 payroll gain would have been a decline of 52,000.

Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business on a timely basis (within at least five years, if ever), such information is estimated by the addition of a bias-factor generated by the Birth-Death Model (a model of the effects of new business creation and old business bankruptcies). 

Effective with today’s release, the BLS is estimating its monthly bias factors on a quarterly basis, instead of on an annual basis, but the change does not appear to have addressed the fundamental flaws of the Birth-Death Model, discussed as usual in the ensuing paragraphs.

Positive assumptions — commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling — can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with "stronger" economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates, or underlying assumptions of ongoing economic recovery.  Indeed, historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels — to understate employment declines — during recessions.   There is a faulty underlying premise here that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business.  So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, presumed additional "surplus" jobs, created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor.  These add-factors likely are running now at about above 50,000 per month (seasonally-adjusted).  I still estimate this monthly bias should be negative by 200,000 or so, on average.  Since it is not, the BLS continues regularly to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 250,000 jobs.  Much of that misreporting, which was not picked up in the 2010 benchmarking, now will not be corrected until at least the 2011 benchmark revision (based on the upcoming March 2011 benchmarking) to be published in February 2012.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (counting multiple job holders more than once), went through annual revisions to its seasonally-adjusted data last month, while this month, population estimates were adjusted, leaving January 2011 reporting inconsistent with and not comparable to prior reporting.

From the household survey, January 2011 showed an employment gain of 117,000 as published, but such is the non-comparable number.  The BLS indicates the gain really was 589,000, before the population alterations, versus a seasonally-adjusted monthly employment gain of 297,000 reported for December.

As noted in the opening comments, the U.3 unemployment has been affected by highly unstable seasonal factors that are artifacts of the severe and extraordinarily protracted downturn in U.S. economic activity, not from changing seasonal patterns.  As shown with unadjusted data detail that follows, the January U.3 unemployment rate rose; it is just that the poor-quality seasonal factors were inadequate to boost the adjusted series.  

The January 2011 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate declined by a statistically-significant 0.37 percentage point to 9.05% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from 9.42% in December.  The official number was 9.0498%, just 333 unemployed people (within rounding error on the reporting detail) of coming in at 9.1%, but the "comparable" number was 8.9993%. Not seasonally adjusted, January’s U.3 unemployment rose to 9.8% from 9.1% in December. 

The January U.6 unemployment rate dropped to a seasonally-adjusted 16.1% from 16.7% in December, again suffering from seasonal-maladjustment.  The unadjusted rate rose to 17.3% in January from 16.6% in December.  The broadest unemployment rate published by the BLS, U.6 includes accounting for those marginally attached to the labor force (including short-term discouraged workers) and those who are employed part-time for economic reasons (they cannot find a full-time job).

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year.  This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers.  The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the SGS estimate of excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed and labor force, unemployment — more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — declined to about 22.2% in January 2011 from 22.4% in December.  The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting and tends to follow its relative monthly movements and will suffer some of the current seasonal-adjustment woes afflicting the base series.  See the Alternate Data tab for a graph and more detail.

As discussed in earlier writings, while an unemployment rate around 22% might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession.  The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms.  Today, less that 2% work on farms.  Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

Trade Balance (December 2010).  The estimated December 2010 trade deficit is scheduled for release on February 11th.  Anything shy of a significant improvement in the inflation-adjusted deficit should have significant downside revision implications for the next estimate of fourth-quarter 2010 GDP (due for release on February 25th).

 

__________

No. 347: 4th Quarter GDP, December Durable Goods, Home Sales

Friday, January 28th, 2011

 

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 347
4th Quarter GDP, December Durable Goods, Home Sales

January 28, 2011

__________

"Advance" 4th-Quarter GDP Estimate Was Meaningless

Durable Goods Orders Fell Fourth Straight Month and for Fourth-Quarter

Housing Market Conditions Remain Bleak

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is planned for Friday, February 4th, following release of January Payroll and Unemployment data, including payroll benchmark revisions.  It also will include an update on monetary conditions, where recent M2 growth has reflected or been offset by declines in M3 components (such as institutional money funds), despite an upturn in the monetary base.

Hyperinflation: The 2011 update to the Hyperinflation Report is planned for around mid-February.  If you have particular issues or questions you would like to see addressed, please e-mail the details to johnwilliams@shadowstats.com in the next week.   I shall do my best to address all queries in the report.  

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

GDP Estimate Was of Unusually Poor Quality.  This morning’s "advance" estimate of annualized 3.17% real (inflation-adjusted) GDP growth was nonsensical, even though it was somewhat shy of consensus.  Most of the reporting was based on guesses; hard data simply are not available this early.  Consider that more than the total reported fourth-quarter growth was accounted for by a narrowing of the trade deficit.  The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) indicated that 3.44 percentage points of growth was generated by an improved net export account.  That estimate, however, was based on just the two months of available data (October and November) for the quarter.  December’s data will not be available until February.

As noted in Commentary No. 345, the relative improvement suggested in the trade deficit for the fourth-quarter (based on the October and November reporting) could have added 1.3 annualized (0.3 quarterly) percentage points to fourth-quarter real GDP growth, but not 3.44 percentage points.  That differential required extremely optimistic assumptions on the part of the BEA as to the December trade results.  Accordingly, the upcoming trade release will be particularly interesting in terms of its implications for GDP revisions.

Separately, after quarters of a significant inventory build-up, a reduced pace of relative inventory increase reduced the reported real fourth-quarter GDP growth rate by 3.70 percentage points.  Inventories at this point in time are even less reliable than the trade data.  Nonetheless, inventory build-up still accounted for half the annual average GDP growth in 2010.  

Also, despite the 30% annualized (8% quarterly) quarter-to-quarter contraction in housing starts, residential investment rose at a 3.4% annualized pace. 

The point here is that reported 3.17% annualized growth, with the regular +/- 3.0% 95% confidence interval, along with such unusually large swings in unreliable components, should not be taken as a serious or meaningful measure of quarterly economic growth.  I believe that realistic growth would have been flat-to-minus and eventually that should prove out in long-range revisions.   

Where early GDP reporting generally is of extremely poor quality, some catch-up should be seen in the annual benchmark revisions due for release on July 29th.  At that time — as will be seen with the payroll employment reporting due for revision a week from now — the revisions to prior economic growth generally will be to the downside, showing a more-protracted and deeper economic contraction in place than officially is recognized at present.

With quarterly weakness in the housing starts and in new orders for durable goods, the indications remain in place for a re-intensifying economic downturn, as discussed in Special Commentary No. 342.

 

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

"Advance" Guesstimate on Fourth-Quarter 2010 GDP Was Unusually Flimsy.  The opening comments covered several unusual issues with the current GDP report.  A more traditional problem lies in how inflation was handled.  On a one-to-one basis, the lower the inflation rate used to deflate the GDP, the higher will be the real or inflation-adjusted GDP growth rate.  Annualized GDP inflation — the GDP Implicit Price Deflator — was reported showing annualized inflation of 0.3% in the fourth-quarter, down from 2.0% in the third, while annualized CPI inflation rose to 2.6% in the fourth-quarter, up from 1.5% in the third. 

GDP — The Detail.  Published this morning, January 28th, by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the "advance" or first estimate of fourth-quarter 2010 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) was 3.17% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), up from an estimated 2.56% in the third-quarter.  For the year, average 2010 GDP versus 2009 was up by 2.86%, versus a 2.63% decline in 2009 against 2008, while year-to-year change in fourth-quarter 2010 over fourth-quarter 2009 was up by 2.79%, higher than the 1.95% year-to-year gain in fourth-quarter 2009, but lower than the 3.25% seen in third-quarter 2010.

The fourth-quarter GDP implicit price deflator was estimated at an annualized pace of 0.26%, versus 2.03% annualized quarterly inflation for third-quarter 2010.  In contrast, annualized seasonally-adjusted quarterly inflation for the CPI-U in the fourth-quarter spiked to 2.57%, following 1.47% annualized inflation in the third-quarter.  The lower the inflation rate used in deflating the GDP, the stronger will be the inflation-adjusted number and vice versa.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for fourth-quarter 2010 is an approximate annual contraction of 2.1% versus the official estimate of a 2.8% gain. Such is more negative than the alternate 1.4% annual contraction (3.2% official gain) in the third-quarter (see the Alternate Data tab).  While annualized real quarterly growth is not estimated formally on an alternative basis, a flat-to-minus quarter-to-quarter change still appears to have been realistic for the fourth-quarter in what generally has been a protracted period of bottom-bouncing.

The following graphs show, first, year-to-year percent change in the official inflation-adjusted quarterly GDP for the history of the series.  The record annual contraction for the series was 4.11%, seen in second-quarter 2009.  The second graph shows the average annual real growth by year for the history of the series.  The record annual contraction there, following the World War II production shutdown, was 2.63% in 2009.

 

 

 

 

 

GNP and GDI.  The initial estimates for fourth-quarter GNP (Gross National Product) and GDI (Gross Domestic Income) likely will not be published until the third release of fourth-quarter GDP on March 25th, since the actual data underlying these national income aggregate numbers are of so little substance — sometimes educated and sometimes hopeful guesses — that the BEA recognizes these data would not be meaningful at present.  Where a one-month reporting delay is typical, two months appears to be standard when annual data are involved.  What the markets and the media do not realize is that today’s aggregated GDP report is about as worthless as the aggregated GDI and GNP measures would have been had they been reported also.

 

December Durable Goods Orders Fell for Fourth Straight Month and Contracted Quarter-to- Quarter.  The Census Bureau reported yesterday (January 27th) that the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods declined by 2.5% (down by 1.4% before prior-period revisions) month-to-month in December 2010, after a revised 0.1% (previously 1.3%) decline in November orders.  Unadjusted, year-to-year change in December new orders was a gain of 6.2%, softer than the revised 11.6% (previously 10.3%) annual increase reported for November.  Adjusted for seasonal factors, but not for inflation, orders fell by 1.2% (4.8% annualized) in the fourth-quarter 2010 versus the third-quarter, which, in turn, was up by 2.0% (8.2% annualized) from the second-quarter.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders fell by 6.3% (down 7.2% before prior-period revisions) in December, versus a revised monthly decline of 8.1% (previously down by 6.8%) in November.  For December, the unadjusted year-to-year growth in the series was 6.2%, down from a revised 20.4% (previously 19.0%) gain in November.

 

Ongoing Housing Problems.  December housing starts were covered in the prior Commentary No. 346, and I received a couple of comments, which are addressed here.  First was a question as to why building permits were so strong, despite the collapsing housing starts.  While I look at permits, reporting distortions in recent years have impaired the value of the series as a leading indicator, and December’s reporting reflected one of those circumstances.  The reporting of a 16.7% monthly increase (all numbers are significant unless otherwise indicated) in December building permits was accompanied by the following caution:  "Increases in the numbers of housing units authorized by building permits in the Northeast and West in December 2010 may be related to changes to state building codes for new residential construction effective in January 2011 in California, Pennsylvania, and New York [builders were acting in order to beat the changing building codes]."  Indeed, permits were reported up by 80.6% in the Northeast, up by 43.9% in the West, but up a statistically-insignificant 3.3% in the Midwest, and down by 7.6% in the South.

The second was a suggestion that I not give in to annualizing growth rates the way the government does.  I understand the sentiment and shall do my best also to report growth on a simple quarter-to-quarter basis when appropriate.  Where the data are reported on an annual basis (such as the housing numbers), the changes often are viewed on an annualized basis as used in the GDP reporting and for comparison or contrast with the GDP numbers.

December Home Sales Reflected Increasing Numbers of Foreclosures.  Both existing and new home sales continued a pattern of bottom-bouncing.  Wednesday’s (January 26th) reporting of December new-home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) showed a statistically-insignificant monthly gain of 17.5% (up 13.4% before prior period revisions) +/- 20.7% (95% confidence interval) from November.  November’s revised level was unchanged from October, where it previously had been a 5.5% monthly decline.  The year-to-year decline in the new home sales series in December 2010 was a statistically-insignificant 7.6% +/- 19.9% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 23.9% (previously 21.2%) decline in November.

Last week’s (January 20th) release of December existing-home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) showed a 12.3% increase in monthly activity versus November’s revised 6.1% (previously 5.6%) increase, thanks to surging foreclosure sales.  The increase included a 22.6% jump in foreclosures, with standard sales up by 7.3%.  On a year-to-year basis, December sales were down by 2.9% from the year before, which was an annual decline of 8.7% net of foreclosures.

Foreclosure activity remained a major distorting factor for home sales, with "distressed" activity accounting for an estimated 36% of existing sales in the NAR’s December reporting, up sharply from 33% in November.  Short-lived foreclosure moratoriums still likely are having some impact here.

Separately, the Census Bureau acknowledges that a portion of new home sales also is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimates as to the scope of the issue.  Some in the construction trade have difficulty competing with the pricing of foreclosed properties.  Until the foreclosure problems get worked out in the system, monthly changes in these home sales numbers cannot be taken as meaningful positive indicators (when the numbers are positive) of underlying activity in homeowner real estate, as it relates to general economic activity. 

 

 

 

 

The preceding graphs reflect different measures of home sales activity since February 2009.  The updated numbers, through December 2010, reflect the seasonally-adjusted level of monthly sales, rather than the annual rates usually published by the industry.

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

Payroll Employment and Unemployment (January 2011).  The January 2011 report on labor conditions is due for release on Friday, February 4th.  It will include the annual benchmark revisions to payrolls, which should show major downside revisions to payroll levels, along with revamped seasonal adjustments, as well as imposition of new population estimates on unemployment reporting, which will leave the January 2011 household survey data inconsistent with and not comparable to the December 2010 data.

The most important details from the upcoming report will be tied to the payroll revisions, which should show a deeper and longer economic contraction than previously recognized.  Eventually, GDP revisions will move in tandem.  With a catch-up in seasonal factors, as well, there is a fair shot of disappointing what likely will be a positive consensus estimate, with weaker numbers, even declining monthly numbers for payrolls, and with some upturn likely in the headline unemployment rate.

 

__________

No. 346: December Housing Starts

Wednesday, January 19th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 346
December Housing Starts

January 19, 2011

__________

Housing Starts Collapse Accelerates Anew
Down an Annualized 30% in 4th- versus 3rd-Quarter

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is planned for Friday, January 28th, following release of the "advance" fourth-quarter 2010 GDP estimate, with analyses also of December Home Sales and New Orders for Durable Goods scheduled for released earlier in the week.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Quarterly Housing Starts Should Be a GDP Negative.  The housing market is taking a renewed hit.  After housing starts took an historic plunge of 79% from January 2006 through January 2009, the series effectively bottom-bounced at an historically low-level plateau for two years.  A renewed downturn, however, now appears to have taken hold, with fourth-quarter 2010 housing starts falling at an annualized pace of 29.9% versus an 8.8% annualized decline in the second quarter.  This is bad news for broad economic activity, for the banking industry and for the systemic solvency crisis.  It also should take a small notch out of the positive economic growth anticipated by the markets for the fourth-quarter GDP (see Week Ahead below).  This week’s Commentary is brief, due to the limited amount of new economic information.  Next week’s Commentary, with the "advance" fourth-quarter GDP, will review the broad economic outlook, which remains unchanged from that described in Special Commentary No. 342.   

December Housing Starts Level Hits 14-Month Low.  The Census Bureau reported today, January 19th, a statistically-insignificant decline for December 2010 housing starts, down by 4.3% (down by 4.7% before prior-period revisions) +/- 16.5% (95% confidence interval) on a seasonally-adjusted month-to-month basis.  November’s starts were revised to a 3.8% (previously a 3.9%) increase. 

Year-to-year change in December starts was a statistically-insignificant decline of 8.2% +/- 16.8% (95% confidence interval), following a revised annual decline of 6.1% (previously 5.8%) in November.

Although the pattern of housing starts generally remains one of bottom-bouncing at an historically low-level plateau of activity, as seen over the last 24 months, the recent activity has started to slow anew, meaningfully.  Even-weaker monthly numbers remain likely in the months ahead.  Since December 2008, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 569,900.  In those 24 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, with the November 2010 monthly reading of 529,000 below average.  More significantly, the six-month moving-average for the series, as of December, stood at 563,300, also below the average level of the 24-month period of bottom-bouncing.  Housing starts have begun rolling down hill, once again. 

The "recovery" in housing is shown in these graphs.  The first graph reflects the level of monthly activity in terms of the annualized monthly rate of housing starts, which is randomly volatile and subject to large revisions on a monthly basis.  The second graph shows the six-month moving average, which tends to smooth out that monthly volatility. 

 

 

 

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

New and Existing Homes Sales (December 2010).  December existing home sales (National Association of Realtors) are due for release on Thursday, January 20th, followed by new home sales (Census Bureau) on Wednesday, January 26th.  As with the weakness seen in housing starts, these volatile series should remain extremely weak, with any monthly change (new homes) again lacking statistical significance.  As usual, given the extreme volatility, reporting error and revisions in these series, given the poor-quality seasonal adjustments, given continuing negative anecdotal evidence, and given ongoing massive distortions from increasingly volatile foreclosure activity, the monthly movements in these numbers remain particularly meaningless.

New Orders for Durable Goods (December 2010).  Due for release on Thursday, January 27th, December new orders for durable goods likely will not show meaningful monthly change, again, even with the upside biases built into these numbers in the last benchmark revision.  This series remains irregularly volatile.

Gross Domestic Product — GDP ("Advance Estimate" Fourth-Quarter 2010).  The Bureau of Economic Analysis’  "advance" guesstimate of fourth-quarter 2010 GDP is due for release on Friday, January 28th.  Per Briefing.com, the early consensus estimate for annualized real (inflation-adjusted) quarterly growth is at 3.8%, up from the 2.6% reported for the third-quarter.  While reporting in a number of series (see Commentary No. 345) are running on the plus-side for the GDP, industrial production is slowing and housing is down.  Where the consensus 3.8% growth is stronger than average historical growth, I would look for something much weaker.  On the other hand, the BEA does tend to target the consensus outlook for its "advance" estimate.

 

__________

No. 345: December Inflation, Retail Sales, Production

Friday, January 14th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 345
December Inflation, Retail Sales, Production

January 14, 2011

__________

Monthly December Inflation Surged (Annualized Rates):
CPI-U Gained 6.2%, CPI-W Jumped 7.8%, PPI Soared 14.0%

December Retail Sales Increase Was Due to Price Increases

Industrial Production Was Spiked by Unseasonable Weather

Initial Trade Deficit Should Help 4th-Quarter GDP

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is planned for Wednesday, January 19th, following release of the December 2010 Residential Construction (Housing Starts) data.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Inflation Is Calm?!  There are numskulls in the financial media — toadies to the Federal Reserve — who would like to think that energy and food inflation do not count.  Simply put, the monthly December inflation releases for the CPI-U (annualized 6.2% inflation), CPI-W (annualized 7.8% inflation) and PPI (14.0% annualized inflation) were disasters, with December inflation far from being calm, as touted in one widespread media report.  The sharp increases in December energy and food prices were not due to normal price volatility in those areas, instead, they were created directly by Federal Reserve Chairman Bernanke’s ongoing push to debase the U.S. dollar — to destroy the purchasing value of the U.S. currency.  As Mr. Bernanke moves to prove his contention that a central bank and central government can create inflation at will, by debasing their currency, the bad news for the Fed remains that the inflation created here reflects monetary policy distortions, not strong economic demand, as naively advertized.  Then again, since much of this inflation mostly is food and energy, not yet "core," the problem of rising gasoline prices may not even be a concern for the U.S. central bank.  Nonetheless, these problems are serious and are problems specifically of the United States and for the U.S. dollar.   

There is little happening here that I have not written about recently (see for example Special Commentary No. 342).  Since I am traveling and am heavily under the weather with a seasonal malady, this morning’s comments will be brief, but the inflation issue will be reviewed in the pending update to the Hyperinflation Special Report and supplements to same.

In the economy, it looks like the "advance" fourth-quarter GDP (January 28th) will be positive, given the numbers discussed below.  Significantly, though, major negative revisions to data, such as payrolls and production, loom post-GDP reporting.  As to retail sales, keep in mind that the December increase was due to higher prices, not to underlying strong demand.  There remains no recovery at hand.

Increasingly, global investors will shun the U.S. dollar, as its purchasing power increasingly gets hammered by Mr. Bernanke et al.  The regular gold, silver, oil and Swiss franc graphs are shown below.  As investors flee from the dollar, the precious metals and stronger major currencies will continue to be the primary beneficiaries in U.S. dollar terms, irrespective of any near-term market volatility, extreme or otherwise.  More-prudent economic and fiscal actions taken by major U.S. trading partners will tend to make the U.S. dollar look all the worse on a relative basis.

 

  

 

 

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

Dollar Debasement Hits Commodities and Consumer Prices Begin to Rise.  As discussed briefly in the opening comments, the reported CPI has started to reflect net rising prices for consumer goods and services.  The higher inflation is not due to surging economic demand, but rather to official U.S. dollar debasement.  The effects of the Fed’s actions on prices will not be fleeting.  Keep in mind that higher oil prices eventually permeate much of U.S. economic activity, intensifying price pressures in the non-"core" areas, even when there is a lack of strong economic demand.    

CPI-U.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported this morning (January 14th) that the seasonally-adjusted December 2010 CPI-U rose for the month by 0.50% (up by a statistically-significant 0.17%, unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval, not seasonally adjusted).  Such followed a 0.12% gain (up 0.01% unadjusted) in November. 

Annualized, seasonally-adjusted, quarter-to-quarter CPI-U was 2.57% in fourth-quarter 2010, versus 1.47% in the third-quarter.

Unadjusted, year-over-year, average 2010 over 2009 annual CPI-U inflation was 1.64%, versus a contraction of 0.36% in 2009 over 2008.

Unadjusted, December’s year-to-year CPI-U inflation was 1.50% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) against a 1.14% annual increase in November, and against a December 2009 year-to-year inflation rate of 2.72%.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s January 2011 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.17% adjusted monthly gain seen in January 2010.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for January 2011, the difference in January’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from December 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.50%.

CPI-W.  The narrower, seasonally-adjusted December CPI-W, which has greater weighting for gasoline than does the CPI-U, rose by 0.63% (up 0.47% unadjusted) for the month, following a gain of 0.04% (up 0.06% unadjusted) in November. 

Annualized, seasonally-adjusted, quarter-to-quarter CPI-W was 3.10% in fourth-quarter 2010, versus 1.76% in the third-quarter.

Unadjusted, year-over-year, average 2010 over 2009 annual CPI-W inflation was 2.07% versus a contraction of 0.67% in 2009 over 2008.

Unadjusted, December’s year-to-year CPI-W inflation was 1.68% against a 1.30% annual increase in November, and against a December 2009 year-to-year inflation rate of 3.36%.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists, including the recent presidential deficit commission, as the replacement for the CPI — is reported only on an unadjusted basis. 

Unofficial, unadjusted year-over-year, average 2010 over 2009 annual C-CPI-U inflation was 1.56%, versus a contraction of 0.06% in 2009 over 2008.

C-CPI-U year-to-year inflation increased to 1.35% in December 2010, versus 0.96% in November.  The year-to-year change for December 2009 was 2.98%.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 4.8% in December 2010, up from 4.4% in November, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to about 8.9% (8.91% for those using the extra digit) from about 8.5% in November. 

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation.  Despite November 9th’s historic high gold price of $1,421.00 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix) and the multi-decade high silver price of $30.67 per troy ounce (London fix) on January 4th, gold and silver prices have yet to approach their historic high levels, adjusted for inflation.  The earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 would be $2,395 per troy ounce, based on December 2010 CPI-U-adjusted dollars, $7,943 per troy ounce based on SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (all series not seasonally adjusted). 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org) has not been hit since, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars.  Based on December 2010 CPI-U inflation, the 1980 silver price peak would be $139 per troy ounce and would be $462 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (again, all series not seasonally adjusted).

As shown on page 22 in the Hyperinflation report, over the decades, the price of gold has compensated for more than the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the dollar based on the SGS-Alternate.

Real Money Supply M3.  The signal of the still unfolding double-dip recession, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), most recently was discussed graphed in Special Commentary No. 342, continues and is graphed below.  Based on today’s CPI-U report and the latest estimate on the December SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate, the annual contraction in December 2010 deepened to 4.3%, from 4.0% in November.

 

The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn or its duration.  The current downturn signal was generated one year ago, in December 2009.  The broad economy tends to follow in downturn or renewed deterioration roughly six to nine months after the signal, as has appeared to have started in recent months, with flat-to-down nonfarm payrolls (with pending benchmark revisions), flattening industrial production, and renewed contraction in the already severely-constrained real estate market.  New weakness in a number of series should become evident as annual numbers get locked-in and concurrent seasonally-adjusted series get fully published with updated as "revised" data.  Such eventually will lead to recognition of a double-dip recession.

 

December PPI Jump Also Reflected Intensifying Impact from Fed’s Dollar Debasement.  As reported yesterday (January 13th) by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) in December 2010 rose by 1.1% (up by 0.6% before seasonal adjustment) month-to-month, following a 0.8% (0.4% unadjusted) monthly gain in November.  The annualized, seasonally-adjusted PPI inflation for fourth quarter 2010 was 7.2%, up from 1.0% in the third-quarter, and 0.1% contraction in the second-quarter.  Unadjusted and year-to-year, December 2010’s PPI inflation was 4.0%, up from an annual inflation rate of 3.5% in November, but down from the 4.3% year-to-year change in the December 2009 PPI.  Average 2010 PPI versus 2009 was up by 4.3%, following a 2.6% contraction 2009. 

As noted in the opening comments, food and gasoline inflation directly reflected recent weakness in the U.S. dollar, which in turn reflected Federal Reserve efforts to impair the U.S. dollar’s purchasing power meaningfully.  Ironically and nonsensically, the Fed does not view food or energy inflation as real inflation, hyping instead the non-food-and energy "core" inflation rate, which was a seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.2% in December, versus 0.3% in November.

Also on a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted December intermediate goods rose by 1.0% (up by 1.1% in November), with December crude goods prices jumping up by 4.0% (up by 0.6% in November).  Year-to-year inflation in December intermediate goods was up by 6.5% (a 6.3% gain in November), with December annual inflation in crude goods at 15.5% (up by 12.8% in November).

In terms of annualized quarterly inflation, intermediate goods rose by 11.5% in fourth-quarter 2010 after declining by an annualized 1.7% in the third-quarter.  On the same basis, crude goods inflation soared by 27.8%, following an annualized 6.3% increase in the third-quarter.

 

December Retail Sales Increase Due Primarily to Price Increases.  When retail sales increase by the same amount as the underlying prices in those sales, then underlying demand is flat.  Such is largely what happened in December 2010, traditionally the pre-eminent sales month of the year.  Retail sales gained 0.61% for the month, the CPI-U rose 0.50% in December, and the CPI-W rose by 0.63%.  The CPI-U usually is used to deflate retail sales.

Also at work in the December reporting was a downside revision to the initial estimate of November 2010 sales, and ongoing major distortions from basically the same concurrent seasonal-factor adjustment problems (unprecedented business-cycle effects overwhelming the traditional seasonal patterns of activity) and sampling issues (companies out business that no longer are reporting, but still are being counted) with sales or employees on payrolls.  If the seasonal factors were proper, they would be relatively stable over time.  They would not swing violently when factors were recalculated the next month.  In the December retail sales report, unstable seasonals altered past history.  For example, where last month, December 2009 showed a 1.1% increase, this month the increase was reduced to 0.2%.  As a result, current reporting now shows that there was virtually no increase in December 2009 sales, either, net of inflation.

This series will face massive revisions in the year ahead.  Accordingly, even at best, these data have to be viewed as of highly questionable substance.   

Nominal Retail SalesToday’s (January 14th) December 2010 retail sales report — issued by the Census Bureau — indicated a marginally statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.61% (up 0.57% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), versus an unrevised 0.83% November gain.

On a year-to-year basis, December 2010 retail sales were reported up by 7.93% from December 2009, versus a revised annual November gain of 7.48% (previously 7.66%).  Annual changes still have been unstable due to year-ago comparisons ranging from a severe trough in activity to last year’s cash-for-clunkers stimulus effects.  At the same time the Census Bureau still plays games with the monthly seasonal factors and revisions to year-ago data.

Real Retail Sales.  Based on the December 2010 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly December retail sales increased by 0.10%, where, before inflation adjustment, the current number was up by 0.61%, versus an unrevised real monthly gain of 0.71% in November.

December real retail sales rose at a year-to-year pace of 6.45%, versus the revised 6.36% (previously 6.54%) annual gain reported for November.

Real retail sales showed an annualized quarterly pace of increase in fourth-quarter 2010 of 2.7%, versus no change in the third-quarter.  This is suggestive of positive growth in personal consumption in the "advance" estimate of fourth-quarter 20010 GDP, but the relationship is not a strong one. 

Since November 2008, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $164.0 billion (the deflated December number was $172.9 billion).  The first graph following reflects the relatively volatile monthly levels of real retail sales, as reported. The monthly level for December 2010 may show some topping out, but that is not shown in the six-month-moving-average pattern in the second graph, yet.

Smoothed on a six-month moving-average basis, the pattern of activity here has been one of bottom-bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales.  The recent bounce/upturn from short-lived stimulus factors and warped-seasonals still lingers in seasonal-adjustment problems, which likely await seasonal-factor and benchmark revisions for catch-up.  Nonetheless, there has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity — no recovery — just general bottom-bouncing.  Accordingly, real retail sales levels in the months ahead likely will be increasingly negative.

 

 

Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, "core" retail sales — consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation — are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: December versus November 2010 seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — gained by 0.7% versus the official aggregate gain of 0.6%.

Version II: December versus November 2010 seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gas stations — increased by 0.5% versus the aggregate gain of 0.6%. 

Somewhat surprisingly, neither the grocery store nor the gasoline station sales reflected the type of increases suggested by the December CPI numbers.

 

Industrial Production Still Is Topping Out.  Even with a severe unseasonable-weather spike to December 2010 industrial production, annualized fourth-quarter growth for production slowed to 2.4% from 6.5% in the third-quarter.  Such would be suggestive of slowing growth in fourth-quarter GDP, but the relationship is no longer particularly strong with that most-heavily-politicized, worst-quality of series.

Due to unusually cold weather in December, more than half of the 0.8% purported monthly increase in December production was due to a spike in utility usage.  Industrial production is a series that pre-dates World War II and modern economic reporting, and it has some unusual residual features.  For example, there are series that are estimate based on the electricity consumption by the involved factories.  If electricity consumption is up because of unseasonably cold weather, such also will spike the estimated production at the relevant factories.  Utility usage alone accounted for 0.4 percentage points of the 0.8% reported production increase.

As to the specific production data, the Federal Reserve Board reported today (January 14th) that seasonally-adjusted December 2010 industrial production rose by 0.84% (1.04% before revisions to November’s initial reporting, which were in the context of revisions to a number of prior months).  November’s revised production showed a revised 0.26% (previously a 0.42%) gain.

Year-to-year change in December production was 5.91%, up from a revised 5.59% (previously 5.38%) in November, and down from the revised near-term peak of 8.35% in June.  As with retail sales, the relatively high volatility in annual growth is due largely to the pattern of collapsing activity a year ago (a May 2009 trough), followed by cash-for-clunkers-boosted production.  The year-to-year contraction of 12.86% seen in May 2009 was the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II.

The graph following shows recent monthly detail, with a fair shot that the September or October numbers, after revisions, still will have marked the turning point of renewed decline in the production series.

 

 

 

The "recovery" in production is shown in the preceding graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average.  For the last 24 months, the production index has averaged 90.21, around which the series has been fluctuating, with December’s six-month moving average reading at 94.0, versus 94.9 for the single month.  Production activity had leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that at one point effectively wiped out the last eight years of growth in industrial production. 

The bump up in December likely will reverse-out in a seasonal-factor catch-up before the March benchmark revision to the series.  Despite ongoing intermittent upside gains generated by short-lived stimulus and seasonal-factor distortions, the series likely still is bottom-bouncing and should begin to soften anew, significantly, in the oncoming months.

 

Initial October and November Trade Data Could Add 0.3 Percentage Points to "Advance" 4th-Quarter GDP Growth.  Against October, the November 2010 trade deficit narrowed slightly in nominal terms, but it widened slightly in real (not-adjusted-for inflation and inflation-adjusted) terms.  The two months of fourth-quarter reporting that will be used to estimate the "advance" estimate of fourth-quarter GDP — due for release on January 28th — suggest that the trade deficit’s impact will positive in terms of reported growth in the broad economy for the quarter.  The trade series remains volatile on a monthly basis and is subject to occasional large revisions. 

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Trade Deficit.  For November 2010, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported yesterday (January 13th) that the nominal, seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services narrowed to $38.3 billion, versus a revised $38.4 (previously $38.7) billion in October, but that it widened from the $35.3 billion monthly deficit of November 2009.

Against October 2010, the November trade balance showed minor gains in exports and imports, with the export gains minimally stronger.  As to oil import activity, both prices and import volume increased.  Specifically, for the month of November 2010, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $76.81 per barrel, up from $74.18 in October 2010, and up from $72.57 in November 2009.  In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, November 2010 volume averaged 8.606 million barrels per day, versus 8.209 million in October 2010 and 8.198 million in November 2009.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit.  A narrowing trade deficit directly increases GDP growth and vice versa.  As reported by the BEA with the November number, adjusted for seasonal factors and inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the fourth-quarter goods deficit was running at an annualized pace of $545.7 billion.  That was based on only two of three months of reporting, but it is all that will be used in the upcoming initial estimate of fourth-quarter GDP growth.  Such was against a third-quarter annualized goods deficit estimate of $597.7 billion.  The implied $42 billion improvement would be enough to add 0.3 percentage points to the GDP reporting, but the Bureau of Economic Analysis adds in a number of other guesstimates (such as services trade), which will impact the final guess. 

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

Residential Construction –Housing Starts (December 2010).  Due for release on Wednesday, January 19th, December housing starts likely will continue their general downtrend, with any monthly gain reported likely to be statistically indistinguishable from a month-to-month contraction.

 

__________

No. 344: December Employment and Unemployment

Friday, January 7th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 344
December Employment and Unemployment

January 7, 2011

__________

December Jobs Increase Was Statistically Indistinguishable from Decline

December Unemployment: 9.4% (U.3), 16.7% (U.6), 22.4% (SGS)

Seasonal Factor Issues "Improved" Both Payroll and Unemployment Reporting

Watch Out for Next Month’s Revisions

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is planned for Friday, January 14th, following release of the December CPI, Retail Sales and Industrial Production, along with analysis of the prior day’s release of the November Trade Deficit.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Next Month’s Revised Labor Data Should Confirm a Weaker Economy.  The payroll employment data will go through major revisions in the next reporting (February 4th), with a weaker than previously recognized economy coming out of the revamped reporting.  On the unemployment front — separate from the seasonal-adjustment revisions published with today’s (January 7th) December report — next month’s data will reflect population re-estimates that will make the January household survey data inconsistent with and not comparable to previous reporting.  While the new information will move the employment picture closer to reality, seasonal-factor distortions in the unemployment area did not undergo meaningful revisions in today’s release, and next month’s population changes likely will not affect reporting meaningfully.  Accordingly, patterns of headline seasonally-adjusted U.3 number reporting likely will remain irregular in the year ahead.    

That said, the December numbers were mixed, with weaker payroll growth but a better unemployment rate than expected.  Serious seasonal-adjustment problems again were exacerbated by the effects of the severe depth and length of the economic downturn, creating about 30,000 of phantom payrolls and knocking at least 0.1 percentages points off the headline unemployment rate.  The issues are discussed below and were detailed last month (see Commentary No. 337).

Payroll Survey Detail.  The BLS reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted December 2010 jobs gain of 103,000 (a gain of 173,000 before prior-period revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval).  November payrolls showed a revised 71,000 increase (previously 39,000) with October payrolls up a phony 210,000 in revision (previously 172,000).  The October revision would have been reported as a gain of 190,000, if the BLS consistently reported its monthly recasting of seasonal factors.  While the BLS readjusts all the data from recent years, each month, with the unstable monthly seasonal factor recalculations, it only reports the current and two prior months on the revised basis.

Doing this "concurrent" monthly seasonal factor adjustment, the BLS created something over 30,000 phantom jobs in today’s report, simply by shifting them into the current period from the second-quarter 2010, without publishing the downside revisions to the second-quarter’s jobs.  All these data should be recast in next month’s benchmark reporting, with relative aggregate employment strength being reduced in the February to April 2010 period, and with shifts into third-quarter 2010 reporting already in place.  All that is before benchmark corrections to the unadjusted data.

As shown in the following two graphs, the level of payroll employment still stands below where it was a decade ago, despite the U.S. population growing by more than 10% in the same period.  The structural impairments to U.S. economic activity continue to constrain normal commercial activity, preventing any meaningful recovery in business activity, as discussed in Special Commentary No. 342.

The first of the graphs reflects payrolls net of temporary census hires, with the red line reflecting the likely benchmark revision due for publication on February 4th.  Such shows no meaningful recovery or upturn in the economy.  Current housing, industrial production, consumer confidence numbers and the likely revisions to the payroll data suggest that the onset of timing for an official double-dip in this contraction will be in the August/October 2010 timeframe.  The second graph is similar to the first one, except it includes the census hires, as officially reported.

 

 

 

 

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; December 2009 is the short-lived official trough of the current cycle), payroll employment declined by a seasonally-adjusted 8,363,000 jobs, or 6.1%.  As of December 2010 reporting, payrolls purportedly had regained 0.9% or 1,124,000 jobs since the December 2009 trough, if one uses the published seasonally-adjusted payroll estimate for December 2009.  Those numbers, however, are politically happy data that likely will not survive the benchmark revision.  The current December 2009 trough should shift into 2010 with the upcoming revisions, along with a reduction in current employment levels by more than 600,000.

In terms of year-to-year change, the unadjusted December 2010 number was up by 0.82% versus November’s revised 0.69%, (initially 0.64%).  Net of likely benchmark revisions, annual change was about 0.5%.

 

 

The preceding graph of long-term year-to-year payroll change reflects the numbers as reported, with no adjustment for census hiring variations or the pending benchmark revision.  Thanks to recent, protracted bottom-bouncing in the payroll series, current annual growth has recovered from the post-World War II record 4.96% decline in July 2009.  The July 2009 decline was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II, which reflected a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945.  Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the current annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression, and should deepen further, net of the pending benchmark revision.

The next graph shows the year-to-year detail both with and without the census hires, but still without benchmark considerations.

 

 

Again, while the patterns of year-to-year change have recovered their pre-collapse levels, such is due only to the particularly protracted nature of the downturn, with year-ago comparisons against the bottom-bouncing.  In the above graph, keep in mind that the level of payrolls in December 2010 still was 4.3% below the level seen when annual growth in payrolls began to tumble.    

Benchmark Revision — About Minus 640,000 and Counting.  Announced along with the September 2010 payroll release was an early estimate for the 2010 benchmark revision, which indicated the not-seasonally-adjusted March 2010 payrolls were overstated by 366,000.  As the data are re-worked for that estimate, changes will be carried back to the prior revision as of March 2009, as well as carried forward to present reporting.  Such suggests that the overstatement of the level of payrolls as of December 2010 reporting was around 640,000 jobs, along with a full restatement of seasonal-factor adjustments.  The formal benchmark revision and restated economic history will be published on February 4, 2011, along with the January 2011 employment report.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business on a timely basis (within at least five years, if ever), such information is estimated by the addition of a bias-factor generated by the Birth-Death Model (a model of the effects of new business creation and old business bankruptcies).  The unadjusted December 2010 bias factor was a monthly addition of 24,000 jobs, versus 25,000 jobs added in December 2009, and against a monthly subtraction of 8,000 jobs in November 2010. 

Such was the first time in this survey year (beginning April 2010) that the monthly bias adjustment was weaker than in the prior year.  Such could reflect changes pending with the upcoming benchmark.

The BLS announced recently that it would begin estimating its monthly bias factors on a quarterly basis, instead of on an annual basis, along with the publication of the 2010 benchmark revision in February.  This appears intended to provide more frequent and accurate adjustments to the biases, reflecting data from the BLS Quarterly Census of Employment and Wages.  While such has to be taken as a positive move, it does not appear to address the fundamental flaws of the Birth-Death Model, discussed as usual in the ensuing paragraphs, and it is not likely to improve the quality of current reporting meaningfully.

Positive assumptions — commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling — can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with "stronger" economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates, or underlying assumptions of ongoing economic recovery.  Indeed, historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels — to understate employment declines — during recessions.   There is a faulty underlying premise here that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business.  So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, presumed additional "surplus" jobs, created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor.  These add-factors are running at about 50,000 per month (seasonally-adjusted), at present.  I still estimate this monthly bias should be negative by 200,000 or so, on average.  Since it is not, the BLS continues regularly to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 250,000 jobs.  Much of that misreporting — not picked up in the 2010 benchmarking — now will not be corrected until at least the 2011 benchmark revision (based on the upcoming March 2011 benchmarking) to be published in February 2012.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (counting multiple job holders more than once), went through annual revisions to its seasonally-adjusted data, and it faces further revisions next month, as the population data are tweaked.  While no monthly unemployment rate was revised by more than 0.1 percentage point (to the first decimal point) in the five-year revision period, the new seasonal patterns did tend to lower slightly the reported December headline unemployment rates, contributing to the reported decline in the December 2010 headline number.  For example, the U.3 unemployment rate in December 2009 initially was reported at 10.0%; after the revised seasonal factors, it now stands at 9.9%.

From the household survey, December showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly employment gain of 297,000, following a revised employment loss of 175,000 (previously 173,000) in November.

The December 2010 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate declined by a statistically-significant 0.34 percentage point to 9.43% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from a revised 9.77% (previously 9.82%) U.3 in November.  Not seasonally adjusted, December’s U.3 unemployment eased to 9.1% from 9.3% in November. 

The December U.6 unemployment rate dropped to a seasonally-adjusted 16.7% from 17.0% in November, but the unadjusted rate rose to 16.6% in December from 16.3% in November.  The broadest unemployment rate published by the BLS, U.6 includes accounting for those marginally attached to the labor force (including short-term discouraged workers) and those who are employed part-time for economic reasons (they cannot find a full-time job).

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year.  This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers.  The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the SGS estimate of the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed and labor force, unemployment — more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — declined to about 22.4% in December from 22.6% in November.  The November reading was the highest of the current cycle.  The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting and tends to follow its relative monthly movements.  See the Alternate Data tab for a graph and more detail.

As discussed in earlier writings, while 22.4% unemployment might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession.  The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms.  Today, less that 2% work on farms.  Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

SGS Ongoing M3 Estimate (December 2010).  A preliminary M3 estimate for December 2010 will be published over this weekend (January 8th) on the Alternate Data Tab.  The series appears to be on track to show a 2.9% year-to-year contraction for the month, the same as in November, with the narrowing of annual decline flattening out.  The M3 series also appears to have contracted month-to-month for the second month.  The monthly gain in M2 — the Fed’s current broadest money supply measure — has been more than offset by monthly contractions in the larger non-M2 components of M3: institutional money funds and large time deposits.  An update of liquidity conditions will be included in the next Commentary.

Trade Balance (November 2010).  The November trade deficit is due for release on Thursday, January 13th.  I expect the monthly deficit to widen enough to push the "net export" component of the upcoming "advance" estimate of fourth-quarter 2010 GDP (due for release on January 28th) into the minus column as a contributor to fourth-quarter economic activity.  Such would require a reported November deficit deterioration beyond likely consensus expectations.

Consumer Price Index (December 2010)Due for release on Friday, January 14th, the December 2010 CPI should begin to tick upwards, reflecting the effects of higher oil, food and other commodity prices, and offering some possible upside surprise to likely consensus forecasts.  Gasoline prices rose by 4.6% in the month, and the impact of that should be enhanced by seasonal adjustments in reporting.  At work here is the Fed’s effort at debasing the U.S. dollar.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in December 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.17% adjusted monthly gain seen in December 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for December 2010, the difference in December’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from November 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.14%.  A result of 0.3% to 0.4% reported in monthly inflation would push year-to-year December 2010 inflation to roughly 1.3% to 1.4%.

Retail Sales (December 2010)Due for release on Friday, January 14th, December retail sales should show much less in holiday sales than has been touted by the recovery-at-hand cheerleaders.  Assuming an upturn in inflation, real (inflation-adjusted) sales well could be negative on a monthly basis.

Industrial Production (December 2010)Due for release on Friday, January 14th, December industrial production — aside from the effects of unseasonably bad weather spiking utility usage — should be down for the month, increasing the odds that production peaked in September/October, subject to upcoming revisions.  This likely also would be a negative surprise for consensus forecasts.

 

__________

No. 343: Updated December Jobs Report Outlook

Wednesday, January 5th, 2011

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 343
Updated December Jobs Report Outlook

January 5, 2011

__________

Employment and Unemployment Increasingly Should Disappoint Recovery Expectations

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is planned for Friday, January 7th, following release of December payroll employment and unemployment release.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Employment/Unemployment (December 2010) – This morning’s Commentary provides a brief update of the outlook for the December payroll employment and unemployment data release on Friday, January 7th.  Consensus forecasts have been turning more positive since Commentary No. 342, when Briefing.com was indicating consensus forecasts for a December total nonfarm payroll gain of 111,000 versus a 39,000 jobs gain reported for November, with unemployment holding at November’s level of 9.8%.  As of this morning (January 5th), the consensus reportedly had moved to a 135,000 or 140,000 jobs gain (Briefing.com/Reuters), with expectations for the headline U.3 unemployment dropping to 9.7%. 

Payroll expectations likely will strengthen further, given this morning’s ADP estimate of private payrolls gaining a much-stronger-than-expected 297,000 in December.  I have not found, however, much predictive ability in the ADP estimates versus the formal Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reporting.

Generally, I still expect the numbers to be weaker than consensus, where the consensus seems to be embracing — at least temporarily — expectations of a developing recovery.  During the first-quarter of 2011, those expectations should begin to shift rapidly back towards a double-dip recession.  Keep in mind that there is a 95% confidence interval for the monthly payroll employment change of +/- 129,000, so any result within that range is statistically indistinguishable from zero growth. 

Given that the annual payroll benchmark revision (a large downside revision already has been estimated by the BLS) is due with the January 2011 payroll release on February 4th, the BLS likely will massage the initial reporting of the December 2010 payroll number so that it does not show significant month-to-month revision in the benchmark reporting.  If so, that should add some downside pressure to the upcoming December monthly payroll number.

The December unemployment rate remains anyone’s guess, since the annual seasonal-adjustment revisions to that series also will be published on Friday (the unadjusted unemployment rate does not get revised except for population re-estimates).  December’s seasonally-adjusted headline U.3 unemployment will be estimated in the context of those revisions, where unemployment patterns can be shifted within the year, including a possible change to the November unemployment rate, against which December’s number will be compared.  Odds favor some shifting of the adjusted unemployment into more recent reporting.  If that happens, chances for an increase in the December versus November U.3 unemployment are reasonably good.  The broader U.6 and SGS-Alternate unemployment rates should continue to increase.

In the reporting of related series, deteriorating to stagnant labor conditions are suggested.  The ISM’s purchasing managers survey (manufacturing) showed the December employment diffusion index dropping to 55.7 versus 57.5 in November.  The December reading was the lowest since March 2010.  The ISM’s purchasing managers survey (services) also showed the December employment diffusion index declining, from 52.7 in November to 50.5 in December.  The December reading was the lowest since September 2010.  With the diffusion indices, a reading above 50.0 indicates expansion.

On the help-wanted advertising front, the Conference Board’s online index for December showed an overall decline, although the new ads — which I view as the more meaningful indicator — gained for the month.  Total ads (includes those carried forward from prior months) declined by 0.2% in December, after increasing by 1.1% in November.  New ads rose by 2.5% in December, after dropping by 2.5% in November.  The December new-ads reading remained below October’s level.  This relatively new series will be upgraded and fully revised with next month’s reporting.  As this Commentary is posted, the November newspaper help-wanted advertising index was not available.

   

__________

No. 342: Economic, Market and Systemic Outlook for 2011

Thursday, December 30th, 2010

 

SPECIAL COMMENTARY NUMBER 342
Economic, Market and Systemic Outlook for 2011

December 30, 2010

__________

2010: A Year of Depressed Economic Stagnation

2011: A Year of Increasing Economic and Systemic Difficulties

Gold Outperforms Dow for Seventh Straight Year (2010)

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is planned for Friday, January 7th, following release of December payroll employment and unemployment release.

Best Wishes for a Happy, Healthy and Prosperous New Year!
– John Williams and the ShadowStats.com staff

 

SUMMARY OUTLOOK

Nothing has changed fundamentally to improve the outlook for the U.S. economy.  It remains in a protracted downturn that has started to deepen anew and that shows no signs of sustainable economic recovery in the year ahead.  Due to spikes in certain business activity from short-lived stimulus effects, the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) declared June 2009 to be the end of the recession, so what now is unfolding eventually should gain recognition as a double-dip recession, with the second dip likely having commenced in the August to October 2010 period.  The comments here both supplement and update Special Commentary No. 333 and, as general background, the fundamentals discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report, which is due for a full update in the month ahead.

Even allowing for consumer spending absorbing the temporary cut in Social Security tax withholdings, the economy in 2011 should remain much weaker than generally is expected, with ongoing negative implications for systemic solvency, for the federal budget deficit and for U.S. Treasury fundings.  Such also implies a likely accelerating expansion of the Federal Reserve’s "quantitative easing," reflecting active monetization of U.S. Treasury debt and debasement of the U.S. dollar. 

The Fed has to have a fair sense of its abilities and inabilities by this point of time.  It always can force an economic downturn by contracting broad liquidity, but its ability to expand the economy is problematic.  It always can create inflation by debasing the U.S. dollar, but bringing inflation under control can be quite difficult when the inflation is not driven by strong economic demand.  The inflation being pursued by the Fed, at present, is of the "difficult" kind.  The nascent inflation is driven by distorted monetary policy, with resulting foreign-exchange weakness in the U.S. dollar and upside pressure on dollar-denominated prices for certain commodities, such as oil.  Here, the higher prices do not reflect increasing economic demand.   

As demonstrated in actions of the last several years, the U.S. Treasury, and particularly the independent Federal Reserve, will do anything, spend or create any amount of money necessary, in order to prevent a collapse of the financial system in the United States. The Fed and the Treasury actions since 2007 bought some temporary stability, but they did not revitalize or heal the system, and the risk of a systemic collapse remains high (hence the proactive dollar debasement efforts by the Fed).

All these factors favor an environment that should see significant selling of the U.S. dollar — eventually an outright dumping of the U.S. dollar and dollar-denominated paper assets — and the onset of an increase in consumer inflation that likely will open the door to hyperinflation.  Risks are particularly high of this dollar selling and early consumer inflation pressures breaking by mid-2011.  The outside timing remains 2014.  Keep in mind that the inflation outlook described here is defined in terms of prices for consumer goods and services.  Some analysts are arguing at present for deflation in the near future.  Where they are looking at an asset deflation, such as a stock market sell-off, such is not inconsistent with this outlook. 

In the ongoing dollar debasement process, the U.S. equity, credit, currency and commodity (including precious metals) markets can be highly unstable and likely will be quite volatile, particularly when central banks try to affect activity.  Looking at the long-term, though, strategies aimed at preserving wealth and assets continue to make sense.  For those who have their assets denominated in U.S. dollars, physical gold and silver remain primary hedges, as do stronger currencies such as the Canadian and Australian dollars and the Swiss franc, which recently broken parity with the U.S. dollar, again.  Holding assets outside the United States also likely will have benefits.

 

The Economy.  Since plunging from late-2007 into early-2009, the U.S. economy largely has been bottom-bouncing at a low level of activity, with 2010 being a year of depressed stagnation for key series such as employment and housing (see Commentaries: No. 337 for employment, No.341 for housing), series which appear to be turning down, again.  The relative strength seen in series such as retail sales and industrial production (see Commentary No.339) likely will prove fleeting in the months ahead, particularly as benchmark revisions reduce the levels of previously indicated economic activity and as reported economic activity in those areas begins to falter anew.

The problem with the economy remains structural, where household income is not growing fast enough to beat inflation, and where debt expansion — encouraged for many years by former Fed Chairman Alan Greenspan as a way to get around the economic growth problems inherent from a lack of income growth — generally is not available, as a result of the systemic solvency crisis.  Accordingly, individual consumers, who account for more than 70% of the gross domestic product (GDP), do not have the ability, and increasingly lack the willingness, to fuel the needed growth in consumption, on which the U.S. economy is so dependent.

Although viewed by many as leading indicators to consumer activity (I contend they are more coincident or lagging), the most popular consumer confidence numbers are suggestive of a renewed economic downturn.  The Conference Board’s Consumer Confidence measure, which is seasonally adjusted, is plotted in the following graph through December 2010 reporting.  The pattern here shows bottom-bouncing after the economic crash.  The bold line has been smoothed with a six-month moving average, in order to reduce the month-to-month volatility.  Monthly data are plotted with the thin line.  The pattern seen here is closest to the patterns seen in payroll employment and housing starts

 

 

The second graph plots the University of Michigan’s Consumer Sentiment measure, through November 2010, and is plotted in the same manner as the consumer confidence number, but the sentiment measure is not seasonally adjusted.  The sentiment measure shows a pattern more reminiscent of the retail sales and industrial production patterns of activity.  If this series were a leading indicator to retail sales for example, then the retail sales series would be expected to turn lower in the not-too-distant future.

 

 

Ongoing Market Hype and Reliance on Meaningless Numbers.  Not widely recognized, most media hype on economic reporting usually focuses on changes in data that consistently are worthless, standalone numbers.  Often, published statistical confidence intervals show the reported changes to be statistically insignificant, or, as seen increasingly in recent months, the reporting of certain numbers has been warped by the unusual nature of economic weakness.

This morning’s hype over a sharp drop in weekly new claims for unemployment to a "two year low" is typical of the misdirection frequently promoted by Wall Street shills trying to show an economic recovery at hand, where there is none to be had.  As has been discussed in numerous Commentaries, the Department of Labor seasonally adjusts these numbers, but the results around holiday periods (in this case Christmas) rarely, if ever work well.  As a result, unexpectedly large swings are typical in the weekly numbers around holidays, with offsetting movement usually seen in subsequent reporting.

From the standpoint of statistical significance, quarterly GDP and monthly housing starts and new home sales rarely show gains that are statistically distinguishable from contractions, and vice versa.  The same often is true with changes in monthly nonfarm payrolls and in the unemployment rate.

Unique to the current period, however, are the severe data distortions created by the deepest and most-protracted economic downturn post-World War II, the most intense economic contraction in the history of modern economic reporting.  As discussed in Commentaries No.339 and No. 337 the extraordinary disruptions to the normal flow of commerce in the United States have so warped seasonal-adjustment factors as to cast serious doubt on the significance of key reporting, ranging from payrolls to retail sales and industrial production.  Separately, the recent high level of business failures cannot be accommodated within the standard surveying assumptions and reporting adjustments used with series such as payrolls, new orders for durable goods, retail sales, etc., with the effect of overstating reported economic activity.

Accordingly, in 2011, look for meaningful benchmark revisions to various series. Those numbers should tend to show that economic activity in the last year or two has been weaker than previously reported.  In particular, watch for the benchmark revisions in payroll employment (February 4th), industrial production (month of March), GDP (July 29th) and retail sales (timing not available).

 

Systemic Risk.  If the U.S. financial system were healthy and no longer at risk of collapse, banks would be lending increasing amounts of money into the normal stream of commerce, the money supply would be growing, and the Fed would not be monetizing federal debt.  Instead, despite the Fed pumping extraordinary amounts of cash into the system, bank lending for consumer credit and commercial and industrial loans still is contracting month-to-month and year-to-year, due at least partially to impaired balance sheets at a number of banks.  Broad money supply, as measured by the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate has been contracting year-to-year for more than a year, and while the monthly change had flattened out and started moving higher in May 2010, November and an early approximation on December levels suggest a resumption of month-to-month decline.  Early December reporting suggests that all three money supply measures displayed below (through November 2010) will show weaker or more-negative patterns of year-to-year change in December than they did in November.  These factors are symptomatic of ongoing systemic solvency issues.

 

 

 

The weakening in broad money growth is despite the initial Treasury-debt monetization in the second round of "quantitative easing."

 

As shown in the preceding graph, the signal for an intensified downturn, given a year ago by the year-to-year change in real (inflation-adjusted) M3, remains in place.  The background here was discussed most recently in Commentary No.339.  The economy has started to slow again, with an early hit likely being seen in the real estate market, nonfarm payrolls and industrial production.  Such is ongoing bad news for the banking system and is likely to intensify the systemic solvency crisis in the year ahead.

 

The Markets.  Continued deterioration in the worst economic contraction since the Great Depression and ongoing instabilities in the financial system, along with an ineffective Fed doing its best to flood the system with liquidity in an effort to salve the system and to create inflation, are not happy news for the traditional U.S. financial markets in 2011. 

Market fears of rising U.S. consumer prices already have affected interest rates, currencies and precious metals, with the price of gold outperforming the Dow Jones Industrial Average (DJIA) for the seventh year in a row, barring extraordinary market movements tomorrow, December 31st.  Based on December 30, 2010 closing prices (London afternoon fix for gold — Kitco.com), the price of gold gained 29.2% versus 11.1% for the DJIA, this year.  For the full-year 2009, gold gained 25.0% versus 18.8% for the DJIA, the same numbers respectively: for 2008 were 4.3% versus -33.8% ; for 2007 were 31.9% versus 6.4%; for 2006 were 23.2% versus 16.2%; for 2005 were 17.8% versus -0.6%; for 2004 were 4.6% versus 3.1%.  In 2003, gold was up by 19.9%, but that was topped by a 25.3% gain in the Dow.

A day shy of year’s end, the S&P 500 was up by 12.8%, the Wilshire 5000, up by 15.8% and the NASDAQ Composite up by 17.4%.  Again gold was up by 29.2% and silver up by 80.7%.  On the currency front for the year, against the U.S. dollar, the Japanese yen gained 14%, the Australian dollar gained 13%, the Swiss franc gained 10% and the Canadian dollar rose by 5%.  The euro and the British pound fell respectively by 7% and 5% versus the U.S. currency.

As the markets in the New Year deal with the extremely negative fundamentals for stocks and bonds, highly unstable conditions are likely.  Again, at some point, extremely negative underlying fundamentals will catch up with the U.S. dollar.  Relative currency exchange rates tend to reflect relative economic strength, trade deficit, inflation, interest rates, fiscal stability and political stability.  All of those areas already are negative for the United States versus most of its major trading partners, and relative U.S. conditions are likely to deteriorate further in the year ahead.

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

Employment/Unemployment (December 2010) – The December payroll employment and unemployment reports are due for release on Friday, January 7th.  As this Commentary is posted, Briefing.com is suggesting consensus forecasts of a total nonfarm payroll gain of 111,000 versus a 39,000 jobs gain reported for November, with unemployment holding at November’s level of 9.8%.

Generally, I would expect the numbers to be weaker than consensus, where the consensus seems to be embracing — at least temporarily — expectations of a developing recovery.  During the first-quarter of 2011, those expectations should begin to shift rapidly back towards a double-dip recession.  The 95% confidence interval for payroll change is +/- 129,000, which encompasses the consensus, so a contraction of 28,000 would be within the consensus range with the confidence interval. 

Given that the annual payroll benchmark revision (a large downside revision already has been estimated by the BLS) is due with the January 2011 payroll release on February 4th, the BLS likely will massage the initial reporting of the December 2010 number so that it does not show significant month-to-month revision in the benchmark reporting.  If so, that should add downside pressure on the upcoming monthly payroll number.

The December unemployment rate is anyone’s guess, since the annual seasonal-adjustment revisions to that series also will be published (the unadjusted unemployment rate does not get revised except for population re-estimates).  December’s seasonally-adjusted headline U.3 unemployment will be estimated in the context of those revisions, where unemployment patterns can be shifted within the year.  Odds favor some shifting of the adjusted unemployment into more recent reporting.  If that happens, chances for an increase in the December versus November U.3 unemployment are reasonably good.  The broader U.6 and SGS-Alternate unemployment should continue to increase.

Any significant patterns that arise in the reporting of related series — prior to next Friday’s release — will be discussed in a brief Commentary before the labor numbers are published.   

 

__________

No. 341: November Durable Goods Orders, Housing, GDP Revision

Thursday, December 23rd, 2010

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 341
November Durable Goods Orders, Housing, GDP Revision

December 23, 2010

__________

Automobile Orders Sink for Fourth Month

Annualized GDP Growth at 2.6%, GDI Growth at 1.1%

Housing Crisis Appears to Be Intensifying

Year-to-Year Decline in Home Sales Is Meaningful
Even after Netting out Year-Ago Tax Credit Spikes

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is planned for Thursday, December29th, with an updated general overview on the economy, systemic stability and the financial markets in 2011.

– Merry Christmas! — John Williams and the ShadowStats.com staff.

 

Little Holiday Cheer in This Week’s Numbers.  The average consumer remains liquidity-impaired, and that means there is no hope for any significant economic rebound in the months ahead.  New orders for automobiles (in durable goods) have fallen for four straight months.  Housing starts have begun to turn down anew, and home sales are showing meaningful annual declines, even with last year’s tax-credit-driven sales boosts backed out.  The GDP should turn down again, shortly, as the double-dip recession takes clear hold.  Payrolls and industrial production — allowing for revisions coming early in 2011 — appear already to have peaked or turned down anew as of the August to October 2010 period.  Retail sales — also subject to significant revisions — should begin to show outright monthly declines, net of inflation, in the months ahead.  This will be detailed in next week’s Commentary, which will address the outlook for 2011, a year that should be one of the most treacherous and unstable ever seen for the U.S. economy, systemic solvency and financial markets.  The general outlook as discussed in Special Commentary No. 333, however, has not changed.

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

Decline in November Durable Goods Orders Was Dominated by Continuing Declines in Automobile and Airplane Orders.  The Census Bureau reported today (December 23rd) that the regularly volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods declined by 1.3% (down by 1.2% before prior-period revisions) month-to-month in November 2010, after a revised 3.1% (previously 3.3%) decline in October orders.  Unadjusted, year-to-year change in November new orders was a gain of 10.4%, versus the revised 8.8% (previously 9.5%) annual increase reported for October.

New orders for automobiles declined for the fourth consecutive month, while the highly volatile new orders for nondefense aircraft plunged by 53.1%, down for the second month.

Accordingly, the widely followed nondefense capital goods orders fell by 6.8% (down 6.6% before prior-period revisions) in November, versus a revised monthly decline of 4.2% (previously down by 4.5%) in October.  For November, the unadjusted year-to-year growth in the series was 19.0%, versus a revised 24.9% (previously 24.5%) gain in October.

Second Revision to Third-Quarter GDP Revision was Statistical Noise.  The second revision of third-quarter 2010 annualized real GDP growth, from 2.5% to 2.6%, was no more than statistical noise in an otherwise largely worthless series.  The change was a matter of rounding, with growth revising from 2.53% to 2.56%. At the same time that the annualized, consumer-side GDP notched higher in its latest revision, its theoretically-equivalent, income-side twin, the GDI, revised lower from initial reporting last month of 1.6% to 1.1%.

GDP — The Detail.  Published yesterday, December 22nd, by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the "third" estimate or second revision of third-quarter 2010 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) showed a revised but still statistically-insignificant annualized real growth rate of 2.56% (previously 2.53%, initially 2.01%) +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), up from an estimated 1.72% in the second-quarter.  The year-to-year change in real third-quarter GDP revised to 3.25% (previously 3.24%, initially 3.11%), up from 3.00% in the second quarter.

The GDP implicit price deflator was estimated at an annualized pace of 2.03% (revised from 2.21%, 2.17% in initial reporting) inflation for third-quarter 2010, up from 1.96% in the second-quarter.  In contrast, annualized seasonally-adjusted quarterly inflation for the CPI-U in the third-quarter spiked to 1.47%, following a 0.72% contraction in the second-quarter.  The lower the inflation rate used in deflating the GDP, the stronger will be the inflation-adjusted number and vice versa.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for third-quarter 2010 remains an approximate annual contraction of 1.4% versus the official estimate of a 3.2% gain, more-negative than the alternate 1.3% annual contraction (3.0% official gain) estimated in the second-quarter (see the Alternate Data tab).  While annualized real quarterly growth is not estimated formally on an alternative basis, a flat-to-minus quarter-to-quarter change still appears to have been realistic for the third-quarter.  The recent relative upturn in annual change reflects the bottom-bouncing at low levels of activity seen for much of the last year in key underlying economic series, not an economic recovery.  As discussed in Special Commentary No. 333 and as will be updated in next week’s Commentary, an intensified downturn, now in the form of a double-dip recession, continues to unfold.

The following graph shows the annual percent change in the official inflation-adjusted quarterly GDP for the history of the series.  The record annual contraction for the series was 4.11%, seen in second-quarter 2009.

 

GNP.  The first revision of the third-quarter GNP (Gross National Product) also was just statistical noise, showing real annualized quarterly growth of 2.31% versus the initial estimate of 2.33%, and versus 1.81% in the second-quarter.  Year-to-year change in the third-quarter was an unrevised 3.35% versus 3.43% in the second-quarter.

GDI.  As discussed in the opening GDP comments, the first revision to third-quarter 2010 GDI — the income-side equivalent to the consumption-side GDP — showed an annualized real quarter-to-quarter growth rate of 1.12%, down from 1.61% in initial reporting.  Such suggested weaker growth than the 2.56% reported for the latest GDP.  This third-quarter GDI growth was down from the 2.70% annualized GDI growth reported in the second quarter.  Year-to-year GDI change in the third-quarter was 3.64%, versus the initial estimate of 3.76%, and against 3.35% in the second-quarter.

 

November Housing Starts Change Was Statistically Insignificant.  The Census Bureau reported December 16th a statistically-insignificant increase for November 2010 housing starts, up by 3.9% (up by 6.9% before prior-period revisions) +/- 14.0% (95% confidence interval) on a seasonally-adjusted month-to-month basis.  October’s starts were revised to a 9.2% (previously 11.7%) decline. 

Year-to-year change in November starts was a statistically-insignificant decline of 5.8% +/- 14.0% (95% confidence interval), following a revised annual gain of 0.9% gain (previously a 1.9% decline) in October.

Although the pattern of housing starts generally remains one of bottom-bouncing at an historically low-level plateau of activity, as seen over the last 23 months, the recent activity has started to slow anew, meaningfully.  Even-weaker monthly numbers remain likely in the months ahead.  Since December 2008, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 571,800.  In those 23 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, with the November 2010 reading of 555,000 below average.  More significantly, the six-month moving-average for the series, as of November, stood at 565,500, below the average level of the 23-month period of bottom-bouncing.  Housing starts have begun rolling down hill, once again. 

The "recovery" in housing is shown in these graphs.  The first graph reflects the level of monthly activity in terms of the annualized monthly rate of housing starts, which is randomly volatile and subject to large revisions on a monthly basis.  The second graph shows the six-month moving average, which tends to smooth out that monthly volatility. 

 

 

 

November Homes Sales Continue Bottom Bouncing Near Historic Low Levels of Activity.  Both existing and new November home sales were reported with insignificant monthly gains, continuing a pattern of bottom-bouncing near historic lows hit earlier in 2010, along with continuing deep annual contractions in sales activity.  Although part of the current year-to-year decline can be accounted for by a sales spike last year driven by expiring tax credits, net of the that effect, year-to-year sales still are down sharply, as can be eyeballed in the graphs at the end of this section.  The lack of a home sales pick-up is consistent with a re-intensifying downturn in the already-crippled residential construction industry.

Today’s (December 23rd) reporting of November new-home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) showed a statistically-insignificant monthly gain of 5.5% (up 2.5% before prior period revisions) +/- 18.9% (95% confidence interval) from October.  October showed a revised 10.7% (previously 8.1%) monthly decline.  The year-to-year decline in the new home sales series in November 2010 was a statistically-significant 21.2% +/- 15.5% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 30.6% (previously 28.5%) decline in October.

Yesterday’s (December 22nd) release of November existing-home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) showed a 5.6% increase in monthly activity versus October’s unrevised 2.2% decline.  On a year-to-year basis, November sales fell by 27.9% against November 2009, with October sales down by 25.9% from the year before.

Foreclosure activity remained a major distorting factor for home sales, with "distressed" activity accounting for an estimated 33% of existing sales in the NAR’s November reporting, down from an estimated 34% in October.  Short-lived foreclosure moratoriums likely are having some impact here.

Separately, the Census Bureau acknowledges that a portion of new home sales also is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimates as to the scope of the issue.  Some in the construction trade have difficulty competing with the pricing of foreclosed properties.  Until the foreclosure problems get worked out in the system, monthly changes in these home sales numbers cannot be taken as meaningful positive indicators (when the numbers are positive) of underlying activity in homeowner real estate, as it relates to general economic activity. 

The following updated graphs reflect different measures of home sales activity since February 2009.  The numbers, through November 2010, reflect the seasonally-adjusted level of monthly sales, rather than the annual rates usually published by the industry.

 

 


 



 

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.  That said, there are no major economic releases in the week ahead.

 

 

__________

No. 340: 2010 Financial Statements of the U.S. Government

Wednesday, December 22nd, 2010

 

SPECIAL COMMENTARY NUMBER 340
2010 Financial Statements of the U.S. Government

December 22, 2010

__________

Actual 2010 Annual GAAP Deficit in $5 Trillion Range

"Uncertain" Impact of Health Care Law Roils the Accounting

No U.S. Guarantee behind Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac?

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: This Commentary is a brief summary of the numbers from the government’s 2010 GAAP accounting released yesterday afternoon (December 21st).  Further analysis will be prepared, either as a standalone Commentary, or as part of the pending update to the Hyperinflation Special Report.  The next regular Commentary will be tomorrow, Thursday, December 23rd, following release of the November New Orders for Durable Goods, along with assessments of the November housing and home sales numbers, and the third-estimate of third-quarter GDP.

– Best wishes to all for a most joyous holiday season! — John Williams

 

2010 GAAP Accounting Shows Ongoing Unsustainable and Uncontainable Annual Federal Deficits.  Against an official quasi-cash-basis reporting of a $1.294 trillion 2010 federal budget deficit, which narrowed from a $1.417 trillion shortfall in 2009, the 2010 Financial Report of the United States Government showed a GAAP-based 2010 deficit of $2.080 trillion, which widened from $1.254 trillion in 2009. 

The latter set of numbers reflects GAAP accounting (generally accepted accounting principles), which, at present, excludes the level of and annual changes in the net present value of unfunded liabilities for Social Security and Medicare in balance sheet and income-statement accounting.  Those numbers, however, are footnoted and discussed in the financial statements.           

Broader GAAP-based federal deficits, including the Social Security and Medicare unfunded liabilities, have been in the $4 trillion to $5 trillion range in 2008 and 2009, and 2010’s deficit again likely was near $5 trillion, remaining both uncontainable and unsustainable.  The federal government cannot cover such an annual shortfall by raising taxes, as there are not enough untaxed wages and salaries or corporate profits to do so.  On the spending side, all government spending, except Social Security and Medicare could be cut, but the broad GAAP results still would be in deficit.  As demonstrated by recent Administration and Congressional reaction to the deficit cutting measures put forth by the deficit commission, there is no political will to slash Social Security and Medicare severely.  The implications from this are discussed in the Hyperinflation ReportAlthough that report will be updated in the next month, the underlying fundamentals there have not unchanged.       

The Problems in Accounting for Healthcare.  The estimate of a broader GAAP-based deficit at $5 trillion is mine.  At issue with the published report, consistent year-to-year accounting was not shown, with a large, one-time reduction in reported 2010 Medicare liabilities based on overly optimistic assumptions of the impact from recently enacted healthcare legislation.  Referred to in the statements as the Affordable Care Act (ACA), the broad GAAP-based results from the ACA accounting show an annual surplus of $7.0 trillion in 2010, but again, that is not in terms of consistent reporting.  Looking at what the annual change would have been in Medicare liabilities, consistently viewed either on the 2009 base versus a 2010 number on the 2009 basis, or the 2009 number on the 2010 basis versus the 2010 base, should result in net deterioration on a relative year-to-year basis.

Separately, the one-time ACA-based reduction in the net present value of unfunded social insurance liabilities (closed group), from $52.1 trillion in 2009, to $43.1 trillion in 2010, all was due to the Medicare restatement; Social Security liabilities actually rose.

The new health-care enhanced Medicare results used in the statements were prepared under the auspices of the Administration, but the GAO — the U.S. government’s auditor and the auditor of the GAAP-based financials — did not fully buy into the happy numbers.

Per the covering letter of Robert F. Dacey, Chief Accountant, U.S. Government Accountability Office, the GAO would not express an opinion on the financial statements (see pages 221-233 of the statements).  Specifically, consider the following excerpts from pages 226 and 227:

"DISCLAIMER OF OPINION ON THE STATEMENT OF SOCIAL INSURANCE FOR 2010 AND UNQUALIFIED OPINIONS FOR 2009, 2008, AND 2007

"Because of significant uncertainties (discussed in Note 26 to the consolidated financial statements), primarily related to the achievement of projected reductions in Medicare cost growth reflected in the 2010 Statement of Social Insurance, we were unable to obtain sufficient evidence to support the amounts presented in the 2010 Statement of Social Insurance.  Consequently, we are unable to, and we do not, express an opinion on the 2010 Statement of Social Insurance.  The Statement of Social Insurance presents the actuarial present value of the federal government’s estimated future revenue to be received from or on behalf of participants and estimated future expenditures to be paid to or on behalf of participants, based on benefit formulas in current law and using a projection period sufficient to illustrate the long-term sustainability of the social insurance programs. …"

"As a result, readers are cautioned that amounts reported in the 2010 Statement of Social Insurance and related Notes may not fairly present, in all material respects, the financial condition of the federal government’s social insurance programs, in conformity with GAAP. The uncertainties related to the 2010 Statement of Social Insurance also affect the projected Medicare and Medicaid costs reported in the Fiscal Projections for the U.S. government, which is presented in Supplemental Information and is summarized in Management’s Discussion and Analysis and other accompanying information."

What’s An Extra $12.4 Trillion or So? The GAO went so far as to run an "Illustrative Alternative Scenario" (page 130) to the government’s happy Medicare adjustments, with the net effect of showing a net present value of unfunded Medicare liabilities (open group) $12.4 trillion higher than that used in the formal accounting.  The alternative assumptions appear more realistic than the politicized data used in getting ACA enacted.

Unfortunately, under present accounting conditions there simply is no way of coming up with meaningful hard numbers, in terms of total government obligations.

 

SGS Alternative Fiscal Deficit and Debt Table.  Given the unusual accounting uncertainty, I have prepared two versions of the 2010 data in the table that follows.  The "Official 2010" line represents the numbers as published in the financial statements.  The "Alternative 2010" line represents the official data with an added $12.4 trillion in the net present value of Medicare unfunded liabilities in 2010, as modeled by the GAO.  I’m using the latter version as a placeholder for what eventually should be more accurate accounting.  

For 2010, gross federal debt was 94% of GDP, and total federal obligations were 443% (official) or 529% (alternative) of GDP, depending on the number used.  The difference, though, is not material, as either ratio leaves the U.S. government insolvent over the long haul.

Further from the 2010 statements, per the GAO, the federal government still does not guarantee the securities issued by Freddie Mac and Fannie Mae.  Accordingly, the financials of those entities are not consolidated into the federal government’s numbers.  The money put into those entities by the government, however, is counted as an expense.  If the debt of Freddie Mac and Fannie Mae were consolidated into the U.S. government’s statements, such would add almost 50 percentage points to the debt-to-GDP ratios mentioned in the preceding paragraph.

 

U.S. Government - Alternative Fiscal Deficit and Debt
Reported by U.S. Treasury

Sources: U.S. Treasury, Shadow Government Statistics.

Fiscal
Year(1)

Formal
Cash-Based
Deficit
($Billions)

GAAP
Ex-SS Etc.
Deficit
($Billions)

GAAP
With SS Etc.
Deficit
($Trillions)

GAAP 
Federal 
Negative
Net Worth
($Trillions)

Gross
Federal
Debt
 ($Trillions)

Total(2)
Federal
Obligations
(GAAP)
($Trillions)

Alternative

 

 

 

 

 

 

2010

$1,294.1

$2,080.3

$5.3(3)

$68.9(3)

$13.6

$76.3(3)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Official

 

 

 

 

 

 

2010

$1,294.1

$2,080.3

($7.0) (3)

$56.5(3)

$13.6

$64.0(3)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2009(4)

1,417.1

1,253.7

4.3

63.6

11.9

70.5

2008

454.8

1,009.1

5.1

59.3

10.0

65.6

2007

162.8

275.5

1.2(5)

54.3

9.0

59.8

2006

248.2

449.5

4.6

53.1

8.5

58.2

2005

318.5

760.2

3.5

48.5

7.9

53.3

2004

412.3

615.6

11.0(6)

45.0

7.4

49.5

2003

374.8

667.6

3.0

34.0

6.8

39.1

2002

157.8

364.5

1.5

31.0

6.2

35.4

 

(1) Fiscal year ended September 30th; the numbers are subject to rounding differences.  (2) Includes gross federal debt, not just "public" debt.  While the non-public debt is debt the government owes to itself for Social Security, etc., the obligations there are counted as "funded" and as such are part of total government obligations.  (3) The official reporting includes a large, one-time reduction in the estimated net present value of unfunded Medicare liabilities, due to generally favorable underlying assumptions tied to the passage of healthcare legislation.  With consistent accounting, SGS estimates the GAAP shortfall with Social Security and Medicare for 2010 to be roughly $5 trillion. The Alternative numbers here are being used as a placeholder until better accounting estimates are available, and reflect results using the "illustrative alternative scenario" on Medicare costs shown on page 130 of the 2010 report.  (4) The 2009 data predate December 2009 guarantees of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac and do not reflect PBGC or FDIC liabilities. Please note that mid-year accounting redefinitions for TARP knocked off roughly $500 billion from the reported formal cash-based estimate and contributed to a TARP "profit" in the GAAP numbers.  (5) On a consistent reporting basis, net of one-time changes in actuarial assumptions and accounting, SGS estimates that the GAAP-based deficit for 2007 topped $4 trillion, with negative net worth of $57.1 trillion and total obligations of $59.8.  So as to maintain consistency with the official GAAP statements, the "official" numbers are shown.  (6) SGS estimates $3.4 trillion, excluding one-time unfunded setup costs of the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement, and Modernization Act of 2003 (enacted December 2003).  Again, in order to maintain consistency with the official GAAP statements, the "official" numbers are shown in the table for 2004.  The 2010 GAAP statements were released on December 21, 2010: http://fms.treas.gov/fr/index.html

Sources for SGS Table Data

Fiscal Year (Column 1) – All numbers are for the indicated fiscal year (ended September 30th), in either billions or trillions of dollars as shown.

Formal Cash-Based Deficit (Column 2) – headline deficit number from page xi of the 2010 report, "Nation by the Numbers Table," hereinafter referred to as NBN, line: "Unified Budget Deficit."

GAAP ex-SS Etc. Deficit (Column 3) – euphemistically referred to as "Net Operating Cost" in NBN.  It excludes social insurance unfunded liabilities.

GAAP with SS Etc. Deficit (Column 4) — previous number (2) plus year-to-year change in the net present value of social insurance unfunded liabilities, which comes from NBN (page xi) line "Closed Group" under "Statement of Social Insurance," 2010 minus 2009 (for the 2010 number).  The "Closed Group" is used here as it has been the preferred measure used in earlier government statements.

The Alternative accounting adds in the differential to the NBN line "Closed Group" and the $12.4 trillion additional net present value of excess expenditures over income for Medicare shown in the "Illustrative Alternative Scenario," shown on page 130.

GAAP Federal Negative Net Worth (Column 5) — "Total net position" from NBN (page xi), plus the 2010 "Closed Group" total net present value unfunded liabilities of social insurance from NBN.  The Alternative is adjusted for the alternative Medicare example.

Gross Federal Debt (Column 6) – from "Note 14. Federal Debt …" pages 88 to 90 of the 2010 report.  Total held by public (p. 88) plus Total intragovernmental (p. 90).

Total Federal Obligations (Column 7) – Total liabilities from the NBN (page xi) line in the 2010 report, plus the 2010 "Closed Group" total net present value unfunded liabilities of social insurance from NBN, plus total intragovernmental debt from (p. 90) of the 2010 report.

The Alternative accounting adds in the NBN line "Closed Group" adjusted for the $12.4 trillion additional net present value of excess expenditures over income for Medicare shown in the "Illustrative Alternative Scenario," shown on page 130.

 

__________

No. 339: November Inflation, Retail Sales, Production

Wednesday, December 15th, 2010

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 339
November Inflation, Retail Sales, Production

December 15, 2010

__________

Beware Unstable Economic Reporting!

Inconsistent Seasonal Factors Depressed CPI

Bulk of Gain in November Retail Sales Was from Higher Prices

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The U.S. Treasury has delayed release of the U.S. government’s 2010 GAAP-Based financial reporting, until Tuesday, December 21st (tentative), from what was scheduled for today (December 15th).  The decision to delay the release apparently was made Monday afternoon (December13th).  Since the statements likely already were set at that point, one has to wonder if there is any political timing at work here.  An initial assessment of the financial statements will be made in a Special Commentary, at such time as the data are published.

Otherwise, the next regular Commentary will be on Thursday, December 23rd, following release of November’s New Orders for Durable Goods, along with assessments of the November housing and home sales numbers, and the third-estimate of third-quarter GDP.

– Best wishes to all for a most joyous holiday season! — John Williams

 

Unstable Economic Reporting Misleads the Public and the Markets.  Picking up on a theme discussed in Commentary No. 337, the severity of the current economic contraction — both in duration and depth — largely has destroyed the usefulness of current, seasonally-adjusted monthly economic data.  The reasoning behind the seasonal adjustment of data was to remove regularly-repeating patterns of activity from a series (such as the regular boost to retail sales from holiday-season shopping), so that month-to-month comparisons of the data would tend to reflect changes in economic activity, not the recurring patterns.  The concept worked reasonably well in normal economic times.  Yet, regularly recurring patterns of activity, used as the basis for the seasonal adjustments, have been shattered in recent years, as business activity plunged and bottom-bounced, as the housing market collapsed, as the auto industry and production patterns were disrupted by bankruptcies, as short-lived stimulus factors altered consumption patterns, as financial panic and gyrations in the exchange rate of the U.S. dollar were reflected in extreme and non-seasonal movement in oil prices, etc.

By their nature, seasonal-factor patterns should be stable over time.  This is true, particularly, of the concurrent seasonal-adjustment patterns used in series such as nonfarm payrolls and retail sales.  If the monthly seasonal patterns — as already established with the prior month’s reporting — gyrate wildly with each new monthly recalculation, the reported series is unstable.  Further, publication of only the last two months of revised seasonally-adjusted data on this basis is misleading in the extreme, where sharply revised seasonal patterns, each month, can yield reported month-to-month changes that reflect nothing more than the shifting of previously-reported adjusted data to or from the current month, versus a prior month where the related revisions are not being published for public consumption.

Payrolls, Retail Sales and CPI Inflation Are Warped.  These distortions have been seen recently with reported nonfarm payrolls (see No. 337 cited above), as well with the retail sales and CPI reporting of this week.  A look at the retail sales reporting, for example, shows a good gain in November and a sharp upside revision to the October data, enhanced meaningfully by shifting seasonal factors.

This morning’s CPI came in below expectations, thanks partially to gasoline inflation that was reduced by seasonal adjustment (concurrent adjustment is not used here, but "intervention analysis" is).  The issue here is that in November 2009, gasoline inflation was boosted by seasonal adjustments, but it was reduced in November 2010.  Specifically, a not-seasonally-adjusted 4.1% monthly gain in November 2009 gasoline prices ended up as a seasonally-adjusted gain of 6.4%.  In contrast, a not-seasonally-adjusted 2.0% monthly gain in November 2010 gasoline prices ended as a seasonally-adjusted gain of 0.7%.  There is no consistency or stability suggested in those patterns. 

 

Broad Economic, Inflation, Systemic and Market Outlooks Have Not Changed.  Reflected in monthly retail sales and PPI reporting, but not yet in CPI reporting, consumer inflation is on the rise.  Mr. Bernanke’s efforts at debasing the U.S. dollar and stimulating inflation have met with some success, already, in terms of a weaker U.S. currency and related increases in dollar-denominated commodity prices, particularly oil.

The general outlook as discussed in Special Commentary No. 333 has not changed.  Currency values and precious metals prices can be volatile, but the long-term weakness in the U.S. dollar and relative purchasing-power-preservation attributes of gold and silver, and the stronger currencies outside the dollar, remain in place.  As with systemic risks in the United States, risks in other areas of the world — such as among the countries using the euro — likely will be addressed by the spending or creation of whatever money is needed (indications of any needed U.S. backing are in place) in order to prevent systemic failure.  Keep in mind that the U.S. remains the proverbial elephant in the bathtub in terms of pending effective sovereign bankruptcies. 

The various European crises remain an intermittent foil for the U.S. dollar, pulling market attention away from the unfolding solvency crisis in the United States and a likely move to massive selling against the U.S. currency.  Accordingly, high risk of the early stages of a hyperinflation (see Hyperinflation Special Report) beginning to unfold by mid-2011 continues.

The regular graphs of gold, silver and oil prices, and the U.S. dollar exchange rate versus the Swiss franc, are shown below.  Based on market reactions, the dollar-debasement efforts appear to be progressing along the lines desired by the Fed.

 

 

 

 

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

Softer-Than-Expected November CPI Was Dominated by Inconsistent Seasonal Adjustments.  As discussed in the opening comments, inconsistent seasonal-adjustments helped to reduce reported gasoline inflation in this morning’s CPI report.  The CPI reporting also ran counter to the inflation pressures reflected in the November retail sales report and in the November PPI.  Both seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted CPI inflation reporting are due for some catch-up in the months ahead.  Rising inflation should become increasingly broad, reflecting an increasingly serious problem in the first-half of 2011.

CPI-U.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported this morning (December 15th) that the seasonally-adjusted November 2010 CPI-U rose for the month by 0.12% (up by a statistically-insignificant 0.01%, unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval, not seasonally adjusted).  Such followed a 0.23% gain (up 0.12% unadjusted) in October.  Unadjusted, November’s year-to-year inflation was 1.14% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) against a 1.17% annual increase in October.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s December 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.17% adjusted monthly gain seen in December 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for December 2010, the difference in December’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from November 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.14%.

CPI-W.  The narrower, seasonally-adjusted November CPI-W, which has greater weighting for gasoline than does the CPI-U, rose by 0.04% (up 0.06% unadjusted) for the month, following a gain of 0.31% (up 0.15% unadjusted) in October.  Unadjusted year-to-year CPI-W inflation rose by 1.30% in November, versus a 1.45% October increase.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists, including the recent presidential deficit commission, as the replacement for the CPI — is reported only on an unadjusted basis.  C-CPI-U year-to-year inflation eased to 0.96% in November 2010, from 1.00% in October.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 4.4% in November 2010, down a notch from 4.5% in October, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, continued to hold at about 8.5% (8.54% for those using the extra digit) in November, as seen in October and September. 

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation.  Despite November 9th’s historic high gold price of $1,421.00 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix) and the multi-decade high silver price of $30.50 per troy ounce (London fix) on December 7th, gold and silver prices have yet to approach their historic high levels, adjusted for inflation.  The earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 would be $2,391 per troy ounce, based on November 2010 CPI-U-adjusted dollars, and would be $7,840 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (all series not seasonally adjusted). 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org) has not been hit since, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars.  Based on November 2010 CPI-U inflation, the 1980 silver price peak would be $139 per troy ounce and would be $456 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (again, all series not seasonally adjusted).

As shown on page 22 in the Hyperinflation report, over the decades, the price of gold has compensated for more than the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI-U inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the U.S. dollar based on the SGS-Alternate CPI.

Real Money Supply M3.  The signal of the still unfolding double-dip recession, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), most recently was discussed graphed in Special Commentary No. 333, continues and is graphed below.  Based on today’s CPI-U report and the latest estimate on the November SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate, that annual contraction in November 2010 was 4.0%, narrower than October’s 4.5% contraction, and May’s post-World War II record annual decline of 7.9%.

The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn or its duration.  The current downturn signal was generated in December 2009.  The broad economy tends to follow in downturn or renewed deterioration roughly six to nine months after the signal, as has appeared to have started in recent months, with flat-to-down nonfarm payrolls (with pending benchmark revisions), flattening industrial production, and renewed contraction in the already severely-constrained real estate market.  New weakness in a number of series should become evident as annual numbers get locked-in and concurrent seasonally-adjusted series get fully published with updated as "revised" data.  Such eventually will lead to recognition of a double-dip recession.

 

 

 

November PPI Inflation Jump Reflected QE2-Stimulated Food and Energy Prices — with Other Prices Rising, Too.  As reported yesterday (December 14th) by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) in November 2010 rose by 0.8% (up by 0.4% before seasonal adjustment) month-to-month, following a 0.4% (0.6% unadjusted) monthly gain in October.  The annualized, seasonally-adjusted PPI inflation over the last three months has been 6.6%, up from a revised 5.3% (was 4.9%) in October.  Unadjusted and year-to-year, November’s annual PPI inflation was up 3.5% from November 2010, versus a 4.3% annual inflation rate in October. 

The reported seasonally-adjusted 0.8% monthly gain in November encompassed more than headlined inflation in oil and food prices boosted by the weaker U.S. dollar that was engendered by the Federal Reserve’s jawboning and early stages of Treasury-debt monetization.  Notable outside of food and energy, Automobile prices rose by 1.7% seasonally adjusted in the month.

Also on a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted November intermediate goods rose by 1.1% (up by 1.2% in October), with November crude goods prices jumping up by 0.6% (up by 4.3% in October).  Year-to-year inflation in November intermediate goods was up by 6.3% (a 6.4% gain in October), with November annual inflation in crude goods at 12.8% (up by 17.0% in October).

 

November Retail Sales Gain Driven Primarily by Inflation.  On the surface, most of the 0.8% seasonally-adjusted monthly gain in November retail sales was accounted for by higher food and gasoline prices, while food and gas prices — higher than previously indicated — also contributed to the upside revisions in reported October sales.  With higher automobile prices (PPI), and retail store sales — where seasonal factors should be muting the inflation impact of regular holiday-season discounting — November retail sales likely contracted net of the actual inflation effect, although such was not supported by today’s  CPI report. 

As discussed in the opening comments, monthly retail sales reporting reflects distortions from basically the same concurrent seasonal-factor adjustment problems (unprecedented business-cycle effects overwhelming the traditional seasonal patterns of activity) and sampling issues (companies out business that no longer are reporting, but still are being counted with sales or employees on payrolls). Accordingly, even at best, these data have to be viewed as of highly questionable substance.

Nominal Retail SalesYesterday’s (December 14th) November 2010 retail sales report — issued by the Census Bureau — indicated a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.83% (up 1.50% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 1.66% (initially 1.23%) increase in October.

On a year-to-year basis, November 2010 retail sales were reported up by 7.66% from November 2009, versus a revised annual October gain of 7.96% (previously 7.31%).  Annual changes still have been unstable due to year-ago comparisons ranging from a severe trough in activity to last year’s cash-for-clunkers stimulus effects.  At the same time the Census Bureau still plays games with the monthly seasonal factors and revisions to year-ago data.

Real Retail Sales.  Based on the November 2010 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly November retail sales increased by 0.71%, where, before inflation adjustment, the current number was up by 0.83%, versus a revised real monthly gain of 1.42% (was 1.04%) in October.

November real retail sales rose at a year-to-year pace of 6.54%, versus the revised 6.72% (previously 5.92%) annual gain reported for October.

Since November 2008, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $163.6 billion (the deflated November number was $172.8 billion).  The graph below reflects the relatively volatile monthly levels of real retail sales, as reported.

 

 

Smoothed for the monthly volatility on a six-month moving-average basis, as shown in the second graph, the pattern of activity here has been one of bottom-bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales.  The recent bounce/upturn from short-lived stimulus factors and warped-seasonals still lingers in seasonal-adjustment problems, which may await seasonal-factor and benchmark revisions for catch-up.  Nonetheless, there has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity — no recovery — just general bottom-bouncing.  Accordingly declining real sales levels remain likely in the months ahead, particularly when the all-crucial December sales are in hand. 

 

 

Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, "core" retail sales — consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation — are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: November versus October 2010 seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — gained by 0.4% versus the official aggregate gain of 0.8%.

Version II: November versus October 2010 seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gas stations — increased by 0.3% versus the aggregate gain of 0.8%.

 

Industrial Production Still Seems to Be Topping Out.  With production now reported down in October, with some bounce in November, the peak of monthly industrial production in the current cycle may settle in at October.  If not, the peak should be imminent.  Auto production was down in November, and the overall index was spiked by unseasonably bad weather having spiked utility usage and related reporting, where certain production is estimated by electricity consumption.

As to the production numbers, the Federal Reserve Board reported today (December 15th) that seasonally-adjusted November 2010 industrial production rose by 0.42% (0.54% before revisions to October’s initial reporting, which were in the context of revisions to a number of prior months).  October’s revised production showed a 0.20% contraction (previously a 0.01% gain).

Year-to-year change in November production eased back to 5.38%, from a revised 5.50% (previously 5.35%) in October, and down from the revised near-term peak of 8.35% (was 8.30%) in June.  As with retail sales, the relatively high volatility in annual growth is due largely to the pattern of collapsing activity a year ago (a May 2009 trough), followed by cash-for-clunkers-boosted production.  The year-to-year contraction of 12.86% seen in May 2009 was the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II. 

 

The preceding graph shows recent monthly detail, with a fair shot that the October number, after revisions, will have marked the turning point of renewed decline in the production series.

The "recovery" in production is shown in the second graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average.  For the last 23 months, the production index has averaged 89.97, around which the series has been fluctuating, with November’s six-month moving average reading at 93.46, versus 93.90 for the single month.  Production activity had leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that effectively wiped out the last eight years of growth in industrial production; the current rally has topped the pre-2001 recession high, reclaiming levels last seen in 2004 (six-month moving average). 

Despite the near-term upside gains generated by short-lived stimulus and seasonal-factor distortions, the series likely still is bottom-bouncing and should begin to soften anew, significantly, in the oncoming months.  The six-month moving-average series remains 6.88% below its December 2007 historic high.

 

 

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

Residential Construction (November 2010).  November housing starts are due for release on Thursday, December 16th.  Residential construction appears to be turning down anew, following a protracted period of bottom-bouncing at historically-low levels of activity.  While the reported monthly change for November likely will not be statistically meaningful, if it is, it more likely will be on the downside than on the upside.

New and Existing Homes Sales (November 2010).  November existing home sales (National Association of Realtors) are due for release on Wednesday, December 22nd, followed by new home sales (Census Bureau) on Thursday, December 23rd.  As with housing starts, theses volatile series should remain extremely weak, with any monthly change (new homes) again lacking statistical significance.  Given the extreme volatility, reporting error and revisions in these series, given the poor-quality seasonal adjustments, given continuing negative anecdotal evidence, and given ongoing massive distortions from increasingly volatile foreclosure activity, the monthly movements in these numbers remain particularly meaningless.

Gross Domestic Product — GDP ("Third Estimate" Third-Quarter 2010).  Due for release on Wednesday, December 22nd, the "third" estimate and second revision of third-quarter 2010 annualized real GDP growth is expected to notch higher to 2.6%, from the 2.5% reported in the last revision, per Briefing.com.  Any revision likely will be no more than statistical noise.

New Orders for Durable Goods (November 2010).  Due for release on Thursday, December 23rd, November new orders for durable goods likely will not show meaningful monthly change, even with upside biases built into these numbers in the last benchmark revision.  This series remains irregularly volatile.
 

 

__________

No. 338: October Trade Deficit, Tax Games

Friday, December 10th, 2010

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 338
October Trade Deficit, Tax Games

December 10, 2010

__________

Narrower October Trade Deficit Is Positive Indication for Fourth-Quarter GDP

Proposed Tax Deal Would Not Forestall the Double-Dip

Federal Government’s Fiscal Woes Would Be Exacerbated

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary will be on Wednesday, December 15th, following release of the November CPI and Industrial Production, plus an assessment of the prior day’s November PPI and Retail Sales releases.  Also scheduled for release on December 15th is the U.S. Treasury’s GAAP-Based 2010 Financial Report of the U.S. Government.  If there is no delay in its publication (last year it was delayed by two months), a separate, standalone Commentary on the government’s financial statements will be published on December 15th as well.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Last-Minute Tax Deal Would Damage Fiscal Conditions, While Helping But Fundamentally Not Turning the Economy.  As this Commentary is posted, the fate of the tax-and-spend deal recently announced by President Obama and Republican members of Congress is uncertain, due to opposition from Congressional Democrats.

Whatever ends up being continued from the expiring Bush income tax cuts is a non-negative for the economy.  The same is true for any extension of unemployment benefits.  Where continuation of those items would maintain the status quo, expiration of same would be economic negatives.

On the plus-side for individuals and the economy, a one year’s elimination of two percentage points in the Social Security withholding tax would boost, directly, the disposable income of individuals currently paying those taxes.  As a result, there should be some consumption pick-up, but — as with stimulus measures of the recent past — gains will tend to be short-lived, with a reverse-effect after the one-time giveaway expires.

The positive effects on the economy would show up in general business activity being less-negative than it would have been otherwise.  The proposed package would not trigger a recovery, and it would not forestall the intensification of the double-dip recession.

The federal deficit, however, would reflect full impact of all measures, as ongoing deficit projections usually would include the scheduled expiration of the Bush tax measures and non-extension of unemployment benefits.  The fiscal effects of the short-term Social Security tax reduction also would not have been in any pre-existing official deficit projections.  

Nothing here alters the broad outlook on the U.S. economy, financial markets and systemic liquidity, as discussed in Special Commentary No. 333.  Aside from today’s (December 10th) trade data, this has been a quiet reporting week, yet next week will be anything but quiet (see the Week Ahead section). 

The factors and catch-up reporting that helped to generate a weaker-than-expected report on November’s labor market also should help bring in a downside surprise or two in next week’s key reporting of November retail sales, production and housing.  Also, the intensifying impact of the Fed’s preemptive move to debase the U.S. dollar increasingly should be reflected in some upside surprises to monthly inflation reporting.

Further, the U.S. Treasury’s publication of the federal government’s 2010 GAAP-based financial statements may offer some surprises, depending on how residual stimulus programs, the healthcare program and Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac are handled on the books.

Next week’s Commentaries will update and review U.S. economic, inflation and solvency issues tied to those various economic and financial releases.

 

October Trade Deficit Narrowed.  The October trade deficit narrowed both in nominal and real (not-adjusted-for inflation and inflation-adjusted) terms.  This and next month’s reporting (still shy the third month in the quarter) will be primary information used in determining the initial estimate of net exports in fourth-quarter GDP, due for release on January 28th.  The first indication from today’s trade data is that the net export account will contribute positively to fourth-quarter economic activity.  This series remains volatile on a monthly basis and is subject to occasional large revisions. 

Nominal (Not-Adjusted-for-Inflation) Trade Deficit.  For October 2010, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported that the nominal, seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services narrowed to $38.7 billion, versus a revised $44.6 (previously $44.0) billion in September, but it widened from the $32.3 billion monthly deficit of October 2009.

Against September 2010, the October trade balance showed a gain in exports and a decline in imports.  The lower imports were influenced by oil activity, where unadjusted oil imports reflected the dominant effect of lower physical volume against higher prices.  Specifically, for the month of October 2010, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $74.18 per barrel, up from $72.36 in September 2010, and up from $67.37 in October 2009.  In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, October 2010 volume averaged 8.209 million barrels per day, versus 9.656 million in September 2010 and 8.336 million in October 2009.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit.  A widening trade deficit directly reduces GDP growth and vice versa.  As reported by the BEA with the October number, adjusted for seasonal factors and inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the third-quarter goods deficit was running at an annualized pace of $542.0 billion.  Again, that is based on only one of three months of reporting.  Such was against a revised third-quarter annualized goods deficit estimate of $597.7 (previously $596.1) billion.

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are anticipated by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

Retail Sales (November 2010).  November retail sales data are due for release on Tuesday, December 14th, and are sensitive to seasonal factor distortions similar to those seen in recent payroll employment reporting.  Where Briefing.com indicates a consensus outlook of 0.8% monthly growth for November, versus initial reporting of 1.2% growth in October, risks are fairly strong for a downside reporting surprise.  Such should be particularly so, net of inflation effects.

Producer Price Index — PPI (November 2010).  November PPI is due for release on Tuesday, December 14th, and it should show some increase due to the recent dollar-debasement induced spike in oil prices.  This series is randomly volatile, but likely will top a 0.5% consensus (Briefing.com), following October’s 0.4% gain.

Consumer Price Index — CPI (November 2010).  November CPI is due for release on Wednesday, December 15th.  With food and gasoline prices on the rise and seasonal factors likely to boost the effects of same, reporting risk should be to the upside of a consensus monthly gain of 0.2% (Briefing.com), versus a 0.2% increase in October.  The nascent inflation here, again, has been fueled by the Fed’s dollar-debasement efforts.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in November 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.23% adjusted monthly gain reported for November 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for November 2010, the difference in November’s headline monthly change (or forecast for same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted from October 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.17%.  A consensus result of a 0.2% monthly gain in November would leave annual CPI-U inflation at about the 1.2% rounded level reported for October.

Industrial Production (November 2010).  November industrial production is due for release on Wednesday, December 15th, and it likely will continue to be flat-to-minus on a monthly basis, versus an unchanged level in October and a contraction in September.  Revisions could be meaningful.

GAAP-Based Financial Statements for U.S. Government (Fiscal-Year 2010).  The annual, GAAP (generally accepted accounting principles) -based financial statements of the U.S. Government for fiscal-year ended September 30, 2010 are schedule for released by the U.S. Treasury on Wednesday, December 15th.  It will be particularly interesting to see how the accounting is handled for Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac.  A separate Commentary will follow that data release.

Residential Construction (November 2010).  November housing starts are due for release on Thursday, December 16th.  Residential construction appears to be turning down anew, following a protracted period of bottom-bouncing at historically-low levels of activity.  While the reported monthly change for November likely will not be statistically meaningful, if it is, it more likely will be on the downside rather than the upside.

 

__________

No. 337: November Employment and Unemployment

Friday, December 3rd, 2010

 

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 337
November Employment and Unemployment

December 3, 2010

__________

November Jobs Increase Was Statistically Indistinguishable from Decline

Recent Payroll Gains "Borrowed" Strength from Earlier Reporting

Unemployment: 9.8% (U.3), 17.0% (U.6), 22.6% (SGS)

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary will be on Friday, December 10th, following release of the monthly Trade Balance for October.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Misleading Payroll Employment Reporting Has Resulted from Unpublished Revisions of Concurrent-Seasonal-Factor Adjustments.  Further to Commentaries No. 336 and No. 331, this morning’s (December 3rd) reporting of November 2010 payrolls included misleading data, where historical revisions inherent in the Bureau of Labor Statistics’ (BLS) concurrent-seasonal-adjustment process are not published, even though they are related meaningfully to the published, seasonally-adjusted headline data.

As cited in No. 336, the BLS’s stated reasons for not publishing these revisions are tied to publication costs and to a desire not to confuse data users, although it is the non-publishing of the data that has caused misperceptions and confusion.  The BLS, however, does make available enough material for anyone interested to run the concurrent-seasonal-adjustment process on the raw payroll data, and we have done so, along with historical revisions and with results that are within single digits of official reporting.  Some detail from today’s run follows.

Reported Payroll Employment Trough in December 2009 Dragged into Early 2010.  The BLS Web site shows the trough of seasonally-adjusted nonfarm payrolls in the current cycle to have been December 2009.  The revised data from the November 2010 concurrent-seasonal-adjustment run now show January 2010 to have been slightly weaker, with a bottoming process running from December 2009 to February 2010, with roughly 6,000 jobs separating the adjusted monthly totals.  Importantly, this does not include adjustments from the downside benchmark revision to the unadjusted data that will be released in February 2011.  That revision — which will recast the historical seasonally-adjusted as well as the unadjusted series — already was likely to move the near-term seasonally-adjusted trough into 2010.  

Concurrent-Seasonal-Factor Adjustments Boosted September and October 2010 Payrolls at Expense of February to April 2010 Reporting.  Abnormal concurrent seasonal adjustments boosted last month’s reporting of September and October payroll levels, and the resulting revised historical seasonal factors reduced the levels of previously-reported payroll levels in February, March and April as an offset.  The problem is that the revisions to the earlier numbers have not been published, so that the September and October jobs gains appear falsely to be standalone results.  With today’s reporting, those September and October excesses remained, but November’s muted gain appears to have been something of an offset or catch-up, bringing the seasonals more into balance.  Again, these numbers are independent of the pending benchmark.

Extraordinary Downturn Has Damaged Reporting Quality Severely.  When first introduced in 2004, the BLS’s use of concurrent seasonal factors may have made some sense.  As with the Birth-Death Model that was torn apart by the severe loss of jobs, however, the extraordinary duration and depth of the economic contraction, and resulting disruptions to the normal cycles of commerce, have made recalculating seasonal factors every month a fruitless exercise with unstable results.  Modern economic reporting never was designed to handle an ongoing economic catastrophe.  Unfortunately, the collapse of reporting quality with a number of key series has coincided with a period where accurate and meaningful economic reporting could not be more important.

 

November Labor Data Were Consistent with a Weakening Economy.  With results weaker than consensus — a payroll gain that is statistically indistinguishable from a contraction and a jump in unemployment that is borderline significant — today’s labor report generally was more consistent with a weakening than a strengthening economic environment.  

Payroll Survey Detail.  The BLS reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted November 2010 jobs gain of 39,000 (a gain of 77,000 before prior-period revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval).  October payrolls showed a revised 172,000 increase, which had been reported initially as a gain of 151,000.

As shown in the next two graphs, the level of payroll employment still stands below where it was a decade ago, despite the U.S. population growing by more than 10% in the same period.  The structural impairments to U.S. economic activity continue to constrain normal commercial activity, preventing any meaningful recovery in business activity, as discussed in Special Commentary No. 333.

 

 

 

 

The first of the preceding graphs reflects payrolls net of temporary census hires, with the red line reflecting the likely benchmark revision due for publication with the January data in February 2011.  The magnitude of the revision was estimated by the BLS along with September reporting.  Such shows no meaningful recovery of upturn in the economy.  Industrial production numbers and likely revisions to the payroll data suggest that the onset of timing for an official double-dip in this recession will be in the August/September 2010 timeframe.  The second graph is similar to the first one, except it includes the census hires, as officially reported.

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; December 2009 is the short-lived official trough of the current cycle), payroll employment declined by a seasonally-adjusted 8,363,000 jobs, or 6.1%.  As of November 2010 reporting, payrolls purportedly have gained 0.7% or 951,000 jobs since the December 2009 trough, if one uses the published seasonally-adjusted payroll estimate for December 2009.  Distortions from the concurrent-seasonal-factor process are discussed in the opening comments.  Separately, the current December 2009 trough should shift into 2010 with the upcoming benchmark revision, along with a reduction in current employment levels by more than 600,000.

In terms of annual change, November 2010 was up by 0.64%, versus October’s revised 0.54%, (initially 0.48%).  Net of likely benchmark revisions, annual change was about 0.2%.

 

 

The preceding graph of long-term year-to-year payroll change reflects the numbers as reported, with no adjustment for census hiring variations or the pending benchmark revision.  Thanks to recent, protracted bottom-bouncing in the payroll series, current annual growth has recovered from the post-World War II record 4.96% decline in July 2009.  The July 2009 decline was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II, which reflected a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945.  Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the current annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression, and should deepen further, net of the pending benchmark revision.

The next graph shows the year-to-year detail both with and without the census hires, but still without benchmark considerations.

 

 

Again, while the patterns of year-to-year change have recovered their pre-collapse levels, such is due only to the particularly protracted nature of the downturn, with year-ago comparisons against the bottom-bouncing.  In the above graph, keep in mind that the level of payrolls in November 2010 still is 5.4% below the level seen when annual growth in payrolls began to tumble.    

Benchmark Revision — About Minus 610,000 and Counting.  Announced along with the September 2010 payroll release was an early estimate for the 2010 benchmark revision, which indicated the not-seasonally-adjusted March 2010 payrolls were overstated by 366,000.  As the data are re-worked for that estimate, changes will be carried back to the prior revision as of March 2009, as well as carried forward to present reporting.  Such suggests that the overstatement of the level of payrolls as of November 2010 reporting is about 610,000 jobs.  The formal benchmark revision and restated economic history will be published with the January 2011 employment report, due for release on February 4, 2011.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business, on a timely basis (within at least five years, if ever), such information is estimated by the addition of a bias factor generated by the Birth-Death Model (a model of the effects of new business creation and old business bankruptcies).  The unadjusted November 2010 bias factor was a monthly subtraction of 8,000 jobs, versus 23,000 jobs subtracted in November 2009, and against a monthly addition of 61,000 jobs in October 2010.

The BLS announced in last month’s release that it would begin estimating its monthly bias factors on a quarterly basis, instead of on an annual basis, along with the publication of the 2010 benchmark revision in February.  This appears intended to provide more frequent and accurate adjustments to the biases, reflecting data from the BLS Quarterly Census of Employment and Wages.  While such has to be taken as a positive move, it does not appear to address the fundamental flaws of the Birth-Death Model, discussed as usual in the ensuing paragraphs, and it is not likely to improve the quality of current reporting meaningfully.

Based on the unsupportable assumption of sustainable economic recovery, the bias factors used in the last eight months of payroll reporting have been 31.3% ahead of what they were reset to after the most recent and disastrous 2009 benchmark revision.  Positive assumptions — commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling — can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with "stronger" economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates, or underlying assumptions of ongoing economic recovery.

Historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels — to understate employment declines — during recessions.   There is a faulty underlying premise here that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business.  So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, presumed additional "surplus" jobs, created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor.  These add-factors are running at about 50,000 per month (seasonally-adjusted), at present.  I still estimate this monthly bias should be negative by 200,000 or so, on average.  Since it is not, the BLS continues regularly to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 250,000 jobs.  Most of that misreporting, however, now will not be corrected until at least the 2011 benchmark revision to be published in February 2012.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (counting multiple job holders more than once), showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly employment decline of 173,000 in November, following a reported loss of 330,000 in October.

The November 2010 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate increased by a statistically-insignificant 0.18 percentage point to 9.82% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), up from the 9.64% U.3 in October.  Not seasonally adjusted, November’s U.3 unemployment rose to 9.3% from 9.0% in October. 

The November U.6 unemployment rate held at a seasonally-adjusted 17.0% versus October, but the unadjusted rate rose to 16.3% in November from 15.9% in October.  The broadest unemployment rate published by the BLS, U.6 includes accounting for those marginally attached to the labor force (including short-term discouraged workers) and those who are employed part-time for economic reasons (they cannot find a full-time job).

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year.  This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers.  The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the SGS estimate of the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed and labor force, unemployment — more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — notched higher to about 22.6% in November, versus 22.5% in October.  The November reading was the highest of the current cycle.  The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting and tends to follow its relative monthly movements.  See the Alternate Data tab for a graph and more detail.

As discussed in earlier writings, while 22.6% unemployment might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession.  The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms.  Today, less that 2% work on farms.  Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness should show up in prior-period revisions.

SGS Ongoing M3 Estimate (November 2010).  A preliminary M3 estimate for November 2010 will be published over this weekend (December 4th) on the Alternate Data Tab.  The series appears to be on track to show a 2.8% year-to-year contraction for the month.  A review of liquidity conditions will be included in the next Commentary.

Trade Balance (October 2010).  The October trade deficit is due for release on Friday, December 10th.  While expectations are for no meaningful monthly change (per Briefing.com), any major movement in the monthly data would give the first indication of reporting pressure on fourth-quarter GDP from the standpoint of trade activity.  I expect continued monthly trade deficit deterioration, with corresponding early downside indications for fourth-quarter GDP reporting.

 

__________

No. 336: November Jobs Outlook, Deficit Commission, Euro Foil

Wednesday, December 1st, 2010

 

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 336
November Jobs Outlook, Deficit Commission, Euro Foil

December 1, 2010

 

__________

 

November Jobs Data Due for Some Downside Catch-Up

Deficit Commission’s Primary Target Is Cash-Based Not GAAP-Based Deficit

U.S. Remains the Dominant Sovereign-Solvency Problem

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary will be on Friday, December 3rd, following release of November employment and unemployment reporting.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

November Unemployment Rate and Payroll Employment Reporting Should Be Weaker Than Consensus Estimates.  This morning’s brief Commentary updates the outlook for the November 2010 labor-market report and gives a heads-up on pending fiscal issues/developments closely tied to the long-term insolvency of the U.S. government and the eventual U.S. hyperinflationary great depression (the outlook and timing — high risks of the hyperinflation beginning to unfold by mid-2011, outside timing of 2014 — are unchanged).

Due for release on Friday, December 3rd, both the monthly change in November 2010 nonfarm payrolls (especially net of revisions) and the level of the headline U.3 unemployment remain at fair risk of showing deteriorating economic activity (an outright contraction in payrolls and an increase in the headline unemployment rate), disappointing market expectations.  Briefing.com currently indicates a consensus monthly payroll gain of 130,000 (which is borderline statistically insignificant with a 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000 jobs), versus an initial reporting of a 151,000 seasonally-adjusted gain in October.  The Briefing.com consensus for the November U.3 unemployment rate is at 9.6%, unchanged from October’s reported level.

Concurrent Seasonal Adjustment Distortions. The payroll data are due for some downside catch-up in revisions and/or seasonal-factor adjustments.  That said, last month’s reported jobs gain was boosted directly by unusual seasonal-adjustment patterns, where nonfarm payroll seasonal factors were re-calculated for the month, as they have been since 2004, on a concurrent basis.  Such games could have similar impact on November’s reporting.

In November reporting, for example, November 2010’s numbers will be used in determining November’s seasonal adjustments, and prior seasonals all will be recalculated.  Yet only November and the revised September and October seasonally-adjusted results will be published.  Earlier data — revised with the new concurrent seasonal-adjustment calculations — will not be changed in the published data.  As explained by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), this is done so as not to "confuse" data users and because of publication costs (From: Employment and Earnings, January 2004, Tiller, Richard B. and Evans, Thomas D., "Revision of Seasonally Adjusted Labor Force Series in 2004," page 2.):

"While all previous-month seasonally adjusted estimates are revised in this [concurrent seasonal adjustment] process, BLS policy is not to revise previous months’ official seasonally adjusted estimates as new data become available during the year…" 

"Numerous revisions during the year, however, should be avoided, because they tend to confuse data users and substantially increase publication costs."  

This reporting basis allows for the concurrent seasonal-factor process to borrow jobs from earlier months and to boost current headline reporting, while not showing the revised hit taken in the earlier period.  While this misleading reporting gets corrected in annual revisions, misperceptions of ongoing economic activity often have been generated by the inflated headline number.  If the November 2010 data appear to be skewed meaningfully, such will be discussed further in Friday’s Commentary.     

New Online Help-Wanted Advertising Declined in November.  My continuing outlook for weaker employment and unemployment numbers is based on what appears to be a still-unrecognized intensifying downturn in broad economic activity.  Where the November labor report is the first major indicator of November’s economic activity, most reporting today did not support a stronger labor number.

The Conference Board reported this morning (December 1st) that new online help-wanted advertising fell by 2.6% in November versus October, where October had gained 2.3% from September.  The November reading was the weakest in five months.  Total ads (includes those still running from prior months) were up by 1.1% in November, following a 2.6% gain in October.  The new ads number is the more meaningful one.  Newspaper help-wanted advertising in October continued to hold at 10, one point off its historic low of 9.

Today’s purchasing managers (ISM) manufacturing survey showed a slightly weaker employment index for November, versus October, although the level remained above 50.0, in expansion territory.

While this morning’s ADP report on private payrolls was stronger than expected, the series — which attempts to mimic BLS reporting — appears to have limited predictive value against the BLS series, but it is nonetheless touted as one of the drivers of this morning’s stock-market rally.

Last Wednesday, the market rally was credited to a low weekly jobless claims number.  With several queries from subscribers, it appears worthwhile to revisit the weekly unemployment claims briefly.  Generally, the weekly claims data have no meaning other than for market hype, since they are seasonally adjusted, and the Department of Labor never has been able to adjust the weekly data so they make sense.  More often than not, big weekly changes are due to inappropriate adjustments for seasonal variations to current-period or prior-year holidays, such as Veteran’s Day or Thanksgiving.  Using a 17-week moving average helps in terms of assessing the series.

A lower jobless claims level could be expected, at present, in this most-protracted of post-World War II economic contractions, where fresh layoffs have tended to dwindle as the system largely has adjusted to a severe downturn that went into a bottom-bouncing mode.  A renewed downturn is beginning to surface.  The offset to the recent jobs losses, of course, is hiring, which is not measured directly, but which generally has not been strong enough to show solid jobs growth.  Help-wanted advertising (above) is something of a surrogate for new hiring.

 

The President’s Deficit Commission Goes to Press.  The National Commission on Fiscal Responsibility and Reform published its recommendations this morning (December 1st), before taking a formal vote of its members.  If 14 of the 18 Commission members back the recommendations in a vote reportedly set for Friday, the report purportedly will be taken up by Congress.  There appears to be limited political will for 14 positive votes and little political will in Congress to follow through on the major recommendations. 

The apparent lack of political will to resolve the extreme fiscal imbalances in the operations of the U.S. government only will reinforce the position of the United States as the dominant sovereign-solvency risk.  Market concerns on various European difficulties, to certain extent, appear to be a foil aimed at distracting the global markets from the still-unfolding systemic and ongoing economic disaster in the United States. 

The particulars of the Commission’s report will be addressed here as the political process moves forward, but a couple of observations based on a cursory look at the report are offered.  First, the main focus of the Commission was to rein-in and eventually to balance the cash-based federal deficit (except for interest payments).  Unfortunately the Commission’s forecasts for cash-based containment appear to be based on the same overly optimistic economic assumptions used in official deficit forecasts.

It is the GAAP-based deficit, however, that has to be balanced.  The effective bankruptcy of the United States is evident when the federal deficit and obligations are viewed on a GAAP (generally accepted accounting principles) basis.  Any effort to avoid an inevitable printing of dollars to meet unfundable government obligations has to slash both the Social Security and Medicare programs.  Where the Commission has recommended cuts in those areas, some of the language is quite vague, and some proposals (such as raising the retirement age for Social Security) may have unintended and possibly counter-productive effects.  Accordingly, it is not clear that fully-adequate cuts have been suggested.

One suggestion that is quite specific, that has been planned for a number of years, and that likely will be put into place by Congress, is the switch from the use of the CPI-W or CPI-U inflation measures for cost-of-living adjustments, etc., to the use of the Chain-Weighted-CPI-U.  As recommended by the Commission:  

"As with the rest of the mandatory budget and the tax code, we recommend relying on the “chained CPI” to calculate the Cost of Living Adjustment (COLA) in Social Security, rather than the standard CPI.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics has stated that the chained CPI is designed to more closely approximate a cost-of-living index than the standard CPI, and experts on both sides of the aisle have supported this technical improvement to the index."

The C-CPI-U (covered regularly in the monthly inflation Commentary) is fully substitution-based (i.e. the reported "cost-of-living" reflects people switching to consuming more hamburger, because steak has gotten too expensive).  Moving to the C-CPI completes the process started decades ago by then-Fed Chairman Alan Greenspan and Congressional leaders, whereby the consumer’s cost-of-living measure will have been severed completely from the original concept of the CPI being the measure of the cost-of-living for maintaining a constant-standard-of-living.  The redefinition of "cost-of-living" is of no value to anyone who looks to the inflation measure as a guide for income increases or investment returns.  The redefinition is a gimmick aimed primarily at reducing the government’s cost-of-living adjustments to Social Security payments, etc.

The difference between cash-based and GAAP-based accounting for the federal deficit is detailed in the 2009 GAAP-Deficit Report.  The 2010 Financial Report of the United States Government is due for release by the U.S. Treasury on Wednesday, December 15th.  (Although the 2009 report was scheduled similarly, it was delayed until February 2010.)  The GAAP deficit details and Hyperinflation Special Report will be updated following the release of the 2010 report.  Special Commentary No. 333 also is referenced here for general background in this area and the near-term risks for hyperinflation. 

 

 

__________

No. 335: GDP Revision, October Durable Goods Orders and Home Sales

Wednesday, November 24th, 2010

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 335
GDP Revision, October Durable Goods Orders and Home Sales

November 24, 2010

__________

GDP at 2.5% But "Equivalent" GDI at 1.6%

Weaker Durable Goods Orders Reflect Stressed Consumer

Home Sales Weakness Intensified by Systemic-Solvency Issues

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary will be on Friday, December 3rd, following release of November employment and unemployment reporting.  An interim Commentary will update the outlook for that release.

– Best wishes to all for a Happy Thanksgiving! —  John Williams

 

Economy Remains in Serious Trouble.  Little can or should be read into a 0.5 percentage point upside revision to an annualized quarterly GDP growth rate.  The change was little more than statistical noise in what is probably the most-widely-followed, yet worst-quality and most-heavily-politicized economic series published by the U.S. government.  Consider the GDI (Gross Domestic Income) just reported for third-quarter 2010.  GDP accounting is like double-entry bookkeeping, with the categories totaled on the GDP’s consumption side of the ledger exactly offsetting the GDI’s categories on the income side.  The two sides, though, are surveyed separately and are made equal by a statistical-discrepancy category added into the GDI side.  The difference in third-quarter reporting: the GDP was reported up by 2.5% in revision, with a 95% confidence interval that included a GDP growth range that could have been either a contraction or a gain.  As to the GDI — a series not as heavily politicized as the GDP — its initial reporting showed annualized quarterly growth of 1.6%.  Again, these numbers are worthless, at least in their early incarnations.

Signs of mounting consumer problems, however, were suggested in other reporting of the last several days.  Greater-than-expected weakness in October new orders for durable goods was seen largely in categories dominated by consumer buying.  Likewise, October home sales continued to reflect constrained consumer liquidity — on both an income and credit front — with suggestions of some of the restricted consumer lending being tied directly to bank solvency issues as opposed to being just a matter of consumer credit worthiness.

The general outlook as discussed in Special Commentary No. 333 has not changed.  The release of November labor market numbers next week will be the first major economic report on November, and the broad economic outlook will be reviewed in the Commentary at that time.

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

Third-Quarter GDP Revision was Statistical Noise.  The revision of third-quarter 2010 annualized real growth from 2.0% to 2.5% was not statistically meaningful.  It reflected somewhat stronger personal consumption, somewhat slower inventory building, higher government spending and a less-negative impact from the net export account.  Initial reporting on GNP (2.3%) and GDI (1.6%) suggested a somewhat slower aggregate growth rate than was reported for the GDP.

GDP — The Detail.  The "second" estimate or first revision of third-quarter 2010 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) showed a revised but still statistically-insignificant annualized real growth rate of 2.53% (initially 2.01%) +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), up from an estimated 1.72% in the second-quarter.  The year-to-year change in real third-quarter GDP revised to 3.24% (previously 3.11%), up from 3.00% in the second quarter.

The following graph shows the annual percent change in inflation-adjusted quarterly GDP for the history of the series. The record annual contraction for the series was 4.11%, seen in second-quarter 2009.

The GDP implicit price deflator was estimated at an annualized pace of 2.21% (revised from 2.17%) inflation for third-quarter 2010, up from 1.96% in the second-quarter.  In contrast, annualized seasonally-adjusted quarterly inflation for the CPI-U in the third-quarter spiked to 1.47%, following a 0.72% contraction in the second-quarter.  The lower the inflation rate used in deflating the GDP, the stronger will be the inflation-adjusted number and vice versa.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for third-quarter 2010 remains an approximate annual contraction of 1.4% versus the official estimate of a 3.2% gain, more-negative than the alternate 1.3% annual contraction (3.0% official gain) estimated in the second-quarter (see the Alternate Data tab).  While annualized real quarterly growth is not estimated formally on an alternative basis, a flat-to-minus quarter-to-quarter change still appears to have been realistic for the second-quarter.  The recent relative upturn in annual change reflects the bottom-bouncing at low levels of activity seen for much of the last year in key underlying economic series, not an economic recovery.  As discussed in Special Commentary No. 333 an intensified downturn, now in the form of a double-dip recession, continues to unfold.

 

GNP.  Before adjusting GDP for trade in factor income, initial reporting of the third-quarter GNP (Gross National Product) showed real annualized quarterly growth of 2.33% versus 1.81% in the second-quarter.  Year-to-year change in the third-quarter was 3.35% versus 3.43 in the second-quarter.

GDI.  As mentioned in the opening comments, initial reporting of the third-quarter 2010 GDI, the income-side equivalent to the consumption-side GDP, was reported with annualized real quarter-to-quarter of 1.61%, instead of the 2.53% reported for the GDP.  Such was against revised annualized quarterly growth in the second quarter of 2.70% (previously 1.30%).  Year-to-year change in the third-quarter was 3.76% versus a revised 3.35% (previously 2.99%) in the second-quarter.

 

 

 


Decline in October Durable Goods Orders Driven by Weakening Appliance and Computer Demand.  The Census Bureau reported today (November 24th) that the regularly volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods fell by 3.3% (down by 1.6% before prior-period revisions) month-to-month in October 2010, after a revised 5.0% (previously 3.3%) increase in September orders.  Unadjusted, year-to-year change in October new orders was a gain of 9.5%, softer than the revised 14.7% (previously 12.7%) annual increase reported for September.

One of the larger factors accounting for the irregular volatility in this series remains commercial airplane orders.  While such orders accounted for the bulk of the growth in September’s durable goods orders, and were revised higher with October reporting, October airplane orders remained near September levels.  Accordingly, the decline reported in October’s orders — enhanced somewhat by the relative upward revisions in September’s previously-reported orders — reflected heavy declines in orders for appliances (see homes sales) and in computer and electronic products.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders fell by 4.5% (down 1.5% before prior-period revisions) in October, versus a revised monthly gain in September of 11.7% (previously up by 8.6%).  For October, the unadjusted year-to-year change in the series was 24.5%, versus a revised 30.6% (previously 27.0%) gain in September.

 

October Home Sales Reflect Intensifying Systemic-Solvency Issues.  The residential retail sales environment continues to bounce downhill, as the record collapse in activity and subsequent bottom-bouncing have turned again to the downside, pushing new historic lows.  The impact of a re-intensifying systemic-solvency crisis is in evidence here, partially explaining why Mr. Bernanke is panicking again (in an effort to salvage the banking system).  In the October existing-home sales news release, NAR president Ron Phipps, noted, "We’ll likely see some impact from the foreclosure moratorium in the months ahead, but overly tight credit is making it difficult for some creditworthy borrowers to qualify for a mortgage…"

Such is anecdotal evidence of a continuing solvency crisis in the banking system, which remains the most likely reason for the Fed’s pre-emptive debasement of the U.S. dollar by monetizing U.S. Treasury debt, the so-called "QE2," as discussed in Special Commentary No. 333.   

Indeed, a liquidity crisis — inadequate income and constrained credit — remains in play for many potential home buyers.  That condition, in conjunction with low consumer confidence, still holds no near-term prospect of helping to boost broad economic activity.  Instead, liquidity-constrained consumers likely still will not fuel sustainable economic growth, further impairing broad personal consumption and residential construction and sales.   New orders for durable goods, which usually benefit from home sales activity (appliance sales, etc.) in more-positive times, also should continue to be impacted negatively.

Today’s (November 24th) reporting of October new-home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) showed a statistically insignificant monthly decline of 8.1% (down 7.8% before prior period revisions) +/- 18.8% (95% confidence interval) from September.  September showed a revised 12.0% (previously 6.6%) monthly gain, due to a sharp downward revision to August’s reporting.  The year-to-year decline in the new home sales series in October 2010 deepened to 28.5% from a revised 21.2% (previously 21.5%) decline in September.

Tuesday’s (November 23rd) release of October existing-home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) showed a 2.2% decline in monthly activity versus September, which was up an unrevised  10.0% from August.  The October level of activity remained near historically-low levels.  On a year-to-year basis, October sales fell by 25.9% against October 2009, with September sales down by 19.1% from the year before.

Foreclosure activity remained a major distorting factor for home sales, with "distressed" activity accounting for an estimated 34% of existing sales in the NAR’s October reporting, back to August’s level, after a spike to 35% in September.  Short-lived foreclosure moratoriums appear to be coming into play.

Separately, the Census Bureau acknowledges that a portion of new home sales also is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimates as to the scope of the issue.  Some in the construction trade have difficulty competing with the pricing of foreclosed properties.  Until the foreclosure problems get worked out in the system, monthly changes in these home sales numbers cannot be taken as meaningful positive indicators (when the numbers are positive) of underlying activity in homeowner real estate, as it relates to general economic activity. 

The following updated graphs reflect different measures of home sales activity since February 2009.  The numbers, through October 2010, reflect the seasonally-adjusted level of monthly sales, rather than the annual rates usually published by the industry.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness will show up in prior-period revisions.

Payroll Employment, Unemployment Rate (November 2010).  Due for release on Friday, December 3rd, both the change in nonfarm payrolls (especially net of revisions) and the level of the headline U.3 unemployment are at high risk of showing outright contractions economic activity and in disappointing what likely will be reasonably positive consensus forecasts.  Such is based on what appears to be a still-unrecognized intensifying downturn in broad economic activity.  This outlook will be revised in a Commentary before the scheduled data release, as consensus the outlook firms, and as reporting of related economic series become available.

__________

No. 334: October Inflation, Retail Sales, Production, Housing Starts

Wednesday, November 17th, 2010

 

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 334
October Inflation, Retail Sales, Production, Housing Starts

November 17, 2010

__________

 

Fed’s Monetization Jawboning Spiked Energy Inflation

Fed Prefers to Ignore Energy Costs, Concentrating on "Core" Inflation Measures

Retail Sales Still Heavily Distorted

Production Appears to Have Topped

Housing Starts Resume Meaningful Decline

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary will be on Wednesday, November 24th, following release of October New Orders for Durable Goods, along with assessments of the first-revision (second estimate) of third-quarter GDP and October New and Existing Home Sales.

ERRATUM: The second paragraph of main text in Special Commentary No. 333 included a typo that misstated a year as 2001 instead of 2011 in the initial postings.  Although it was corrected in the postings quickly, early readers would have seen the erroneous text. I thank the numerous subscribers who sent us notes on the mistake, and I apologize for any confusion created by the typo.  The corrected opening paragraphs follow (full text is found at link above):

"Fed Moves Preemptively to Debase U.S. Dollar.  In announcing the effective monetization of U.S. Treasury funding needs through mid-2011, the Federal Reserve not only has begun a process from which it will be increasingly difficult to withdraw, but also has begun a process that likely will have to be accelerated in the months ahead, in response to mounting U.S. fiscal and systemic-solvency problems intensified by a still-unexpected "double-dip" recession, as well as in response to intensifying selling and dumping of the U.S. dollar and dollar-denominated paper assets in the global markets. 

"Such locks-in one of the underlying prerequisites for the U.S. economic environment to evolve into an unthinkable hyperinflationary great depression.  The U.S. government effectively is bankrupt and remains extremely likely to resolve this ultimate sovereign insolvency by printing money to meet its obligations.  As global pressures force the Fed into further Treasury debt monetization, as global confidence in the world’s reserve currency evaporates, risks remain particularly high of a U.S. hyperinflation beginning to unfold in the first-half of 2011 [corrected from 2001], along with severe economic, social and political consequences that will follow.  The outside timing for this manmade financial catastrophe remains 2014."

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Inflation Reporting Begins to Reflect Dollar-Debasement Efforts.  When Mr. Bernanke first outlined his approach to fighting a possible deflation with debasement of the U.S. dollar (see page 22 of the Hyperinflation Special Report), he indicated that some debasement likely could be had simply through jawboning of same.  Such was confirmed by market activity in the last couple months, with broad and general weakness in the U.S. dollar and higher oil and related gasoline prices resulting from mounting suggestions by the Fed that dollar-debasement was in the offing.  The higher energy costs began to take a toll in October CPI and PPI reporting.  Purported lack of seasonally-adjusted inflation outside of the energy sector should not last long, if anecdotal evidence has any relationship to the numbers, which it usually does, though often with a lag.  Nonetheless, annual inflation started creeping higher in October, albeit slowly, in both the CPI and PPI.  That problem will begin to intensify quickly.

Ironically, the initial energy inflation that consumers are seeing from the Fed’s actions is the type of inflation the U.S. central bank usually likes to ignore, focusing instead on the reporting of "core" inflation — inflation net of food and energy costs — which is a worthless measure over the longer term.  The effects of volatile food and energy cost cannot be ignored in aggregate over extended periods, and certainly they are not ignored by anyone who consumes food and/or energy.

The general outlook as discussed in Special Commentary No. 333 has not changed.  Currency values and precious metals prices can be volatile, but the long-term weakness in the U.S. dollar and relative purchasing-power-preservation of gold and silver and the stronger currencies outside the dollar remain in place.  As with systemic risks in the United States, risks in other areas of the world — such as among the countries using the euro — likely will be addressed by the spending or creation of whatever money is needed (very possibly with U.S. backing) in order to prevent systemic failure.  Keep in mind that the U.S. remains the proverbial elephant in the bathtub in terms of pending effective sovereign bankruptcies.

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

Softer-Than-Expected October CPI Still Was Dominated by Rising Gasoline Prices.  As discussed in the opening comments, the softer-than-expected October inflation numbers were dominated by energy costs, which the Fed prefers to ignore, while anecdotal evidence suggests increasing problems with food prices that somehow did not make it into this month’s consumer price inflation measures.  Gasoline was up 3.5% not-seasonally-adjusted in October, per the Department of Energy, the BLS used 3.3%, which became 4.4% after seasonal adjustment.  Whether or not the Fed ignores food and energy prices, its recent actions can be tied directly to the higher energy costs.  Rising inflation, increasingly broad and increasingly strong, should be a serious problem in the months ahead.

CPI-U.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported this morning (November 17th) that the seasonally-adjusted October 2010 CPI-U rose for the month by 0.23% (up by a borderline-statistically-significant 0.12%, unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval, not seasonally adjusted).  Such followed a 0.10% gain (up 0.06% unadjusted) in September.  Unadjusted, October’s year-to-year inflation was 1.17% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) against a 1.14% annual increase in September.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s November 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.23% adjusted monthly gain seen in November 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for November 2010, the difference in November’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from October 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.17%.

CPI-W.  The narrower, seasonally-adjusted October CPI-W, which has greater weighting for gasoline than does the CPI-U, rose by 0.31% (up 0.15% unadjusted) for the month, following a gain of 0.15% (up 0.05% unadjusted) in September.  Unadjusted year-to-year CPI-W inflation rose by 1.45% in October, versus a 1.41% September increase.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — is reported only on an unadjusted basis.  C-CPI-U year-to-year inflation picked up to 1.00% in October 2010, versus a 0.94% gain in September.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 4.5% in October 2010, up a notch from 4.4% in September, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, held at about 8.5% (8.51% for those using the extra digit) in October versus September. 

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation.  Despite November 9th’s historic high gold price of $1,421.00 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix) and multi-decade high silver price of $28.55 per troy ounce (London fix), gold and silver prices have yet to approach their historic high levels, adjusted for inflation.  The earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 would be $2,390 per troy ounce, based on October 2010 CPI-U-adjusted dollars, and would be $7,824 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (all series not seasonally adjusted). 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org) has not been hit since, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars.  Based on October 2010 CPI-U inflation, the 1980 silver price peak would be $139 per troy ounce and would be $455 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (again, all series not seasonally adjusted).

As shown on page 22 in the Hyperinflation report, over the decades, the price of gold has compensated for more than the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI-U inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the U.S. dollar based on the SGS-Alternate CPI.

Real Money Supply M3.  The signal of the still unfolding double-dip recession, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), most recently was discussed and graphed in Special Commentary No. 333 the real contraction in October M3 (SGS-Ongoing) estimated for that Commentary was 4.6%.  Based on today’s CPI-U report and the latest estimate on the October SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate, that annual contraction was 4.5%, narrower than September’s 4.9% contraction, and May’s post-World War II record annual decline of 7.9%.

The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn or its duration.  The current downturn signal was generated in December 2009.  The broad economy tends to follow in downturn or renewed deterioration roughly six to nine months after the signal, as has appeared to happen in recent months, with what formally should become recognized as a double-dip recession.

October PPI Reflected Higher Gasoline Prices.  As reported yesterday (November 16th) by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) in October 2010 rose for the third consecutive month by 0.4% (up by 0.6% before seasonal adjustment) month-to-month, following unadjusted gains in September and August respectively at 0.3% and a contraction of 0.1%.  The annualized, seasonally-adjusted PPI inflation over the last three months has been 4.9%.  Unadjusted and year-to-year, October’s annual PPI inflation was up 4.3% from October 2009, continuing on an upswing from 4.0% in September and from an annual inflation rate of 3.1% reported for August.  

The reported seasonally-adjusted 0.4% monthly gain in October encompassed a 3.7% adjusted monthly increase in gasoline prices, which was reflective of higher oil prices and a weaker U.S. dollar engendered by the Federal Reserve’s jawboning on pending treasury debt monetization.

Also on a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted October intermediate goods rose by 1.2% (up by 0.5% in September), with October crude goods prices jumping by 4.3% (down by 0.5% in September).  Year-to-year inflation in October intermediate goods was up by 6.4% (a 5.6% gain in September), with October annual inflation in crude goods up by 17.0% (up by 20.3% in September).

 

Retail Sales Had a Meaningful But Distorted Gain.  Boosted predominantly by auto sales — reported using seasonal factors that still are in uncharted waters following the bankruptcies of GM and Chrysler and the cash-for-clunkers program — October sales were up with statistical significance.  Other retail sales gains seemed surprisingly light for gas stations and grocery stores, given rising gasoline and food prices.  With the bulk of actual annual retail sales ahead in November and December, reporting in those months should give a more-meaningful picture on what is happening with the liquidity strapped consumer.

Nominal Retail SalesMonday’s (November 15th) October 2010 retail sales report — issued by the Census Bureau — indicated a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 1.23% (up 1.48% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 0.71% (initially 0.62%) increase in September.

On a year-to-year basis, October 2010 retail sales were reported up by 7.31% from October 2009, versus a revised annual September gain of 7.40% (previously 7.34%).  Annual changes still have been unstable due to year-ago comparisons ranging from a severe trough in activity to last year’s cash-for-clunkers stimulus effects.  At the same time the Census Bureau still continues to play games with the monthly seasonal factors and revisions to year-ago data.

Real Retail Sales.  Based on the October 2010 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly October retail sales increased by 1.04%, where before inflation adjustment the current number was up by 1.23%, versus a revised real monthly gain of 0.60% (was 0.53%) in September.

October real retail sales rose at a year-to-year pace of 5.92%, versus the revised 6.23% (previously 5.97%) annual gain reported for September.

Since November 2008, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $163.2 billion (the deflated October number was $170.5 billion).  The first graph below reflects the relatively volatile monthly levels of real retail sales, as reported.

 

 

Smoothed for the monthly volatility on a six-month moving-average basis, as shown in the second graph, the pattern of activity here has been one of bottom-bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales.  The recent bounce from short-lived stimulus factors and warped-seasonals still lingers in seasonal-adjustment problems, which should tend to run their course very shortly, with lower real sales levels still likely in the months ahead.  There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity — no recovery — just general bottom-bouncing.

 

 

Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, "core" retail sales — consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation — are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: October versus September 2010 seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — gained by 1.5% versus the official aggregate gain of 1.2%.

Version II: October versus September 2010 seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gas stations — increased by 1.1% versus the aggregate gain of 1.2%.

 

Industrial Production Seems to Be Topping Out.  With production reported down in September and little changed in October, the peak of monthly industrial production in the current cycle may have passed; if not, such likely is imminent.  Although October utility usage was down due to unseasonable weather, and such not only contributed downside pressure directly to the industrial production index but also to production estimates of certain industries that are still guessed at based electricity consumption, production of consumer goods was unchanged.  Production increasingly should move into decline, as excess inventories are worked down in an environment of soft real "inflation-adjusted" consumption. 

As to the production numbers, the Federal Reserve Board reported Tuesday (November 16th) that seasonally-adjusted October 2010 industrial production was virtually flat at a gain of 0.01% (up by 0.20% before revisions to September’s initial reporting, which were in the context of revisions to a number of prior months), versus a revised 0.16% (previously 0.22%) decline in September.

Year-to-year change in October production continued to ease back, to 5.35%, from a revised 5.62% (previously 5.42%) in September, and down from the revised near-term peak of 8.30% (was 8.27%) in June.  As with retail sales, the relatively high volatility in annual growth is due largely to the pattern of collapsing activity a year ago (a May 2009 trough), followed by cash-for-clunkers-boosted production.  The year-to-year contraction of 12.86% seen in May 2009 was the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II. 

 

 

The preceding graph shows recent monthly detail, with a growing probability that the August number indeed marked the turning point of renewed decline in the production series.

The "recovery" in production is shown in the second graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average.  For the last 22 months, the production index has averaged 89.76, around which the series has been fluctuating, with October’s six-month moving average reading at 93.12, versus 93.37 for the single month.  Production activity had leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that effectively wiped out the last eight years of growth in industrial production; the current rally has topped the pre-2001 recession high, reclaiming levels last seen in 2004 (six-month moving average). 

Despite the near-term upside gains generated by short-lived stimulus and seasonal-factor distortions, the series likely still is bottom-bouncing and should begin to soften anew, significantly, in the oncoming months.  The six-month moving-average series remains 7.21% below its December 2007 historic high.

 

 

October Housing Starts Tumble Deepened by Revisions.  The Census Bureau reported today (November 17th) a statistically-significant decline for October 2010 housing starts, down 11.7% (down by 14.9% before prior-period revisions) +/- 10.3% (95% confidence interval) on a seasonally-adjusted month-to-month basis.  September’s starts were revised to 4.2% contraction (previously a 0.3% gain). 

Year-to-year change in October starts was a statistically-insignificant decline of 1.9% +/-11.2% (95% confidence interval), following a downwardly revised annual gain of 0.3% (previously 4.1%) in September.

Although the pattern of housing starts generally remains one of bottom-bouncing at an historically low-level plateau of activity, as seen over the last 22 months, recent activity has started to slow anew, meaningfully.  Even-weaker monthly numbers remain likely in the months ahead.  Since December 2008 housing starts have been bottom-bouncing, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 571,300.  In those 23 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, although October 2010’s reading of 519,000 is pushing the downside limit. 

The "recovery" in housing is shown in these graphs.  The first graph reflects the level of monthly activity in terms of the annualized monthly rate of housing starts, which is randomly volatile and subject to large revisions on a monthly basis.  The second graph shows the six-month moving average, which tends to smooth out that monthly volatility. 

 

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness will show up in prior-period revisions.

Gross Domestic Product — GDP ("Second Estimate" Third-Quarter 2010).  Due for release on Tuesday, November 23rd, the "second" estimate and first revision of third-quarter 2010 GDP is expected to reflect 2.3% annualized inflation-adjusted quarterly growth, up from 2.0% in the "advance" estimate, per Briefing.com.  A significant revision (a 0.3% revision in annualized growth is largely statistical noise) is not likely and the revision could go either way.

New and Existing Homes Sales (October 2010).  October existing home sales (National Association of Realtors) are due for release on Tuesday, November 23rd, followed by new home sales (Census Bureau) on Wednesday, November 24th.  As with housing starts, theses volatile series should remain extremely weak, with any monthly change (new homes) again lacking statistical significance.  With extreme volatility, reporting error and revisions in these series, with poor-quality seasonal adjustments, with extremely negative anecdotal evidence, and with massive distortions from increasingly volatile foreclosure activity, the monthly movements in these numbers remain particularly meaningless.

New Orders for Durable Goods (October 2010).  Due for release on Wednesday, November 24th, October new orders for durable goods could be expected to see some weakness, following strong aircraft orders in September, but this irregularly volatile series likely will not show meaningful monthly change, even with upside biases built into these numbers in the last benchmark revision.


 

__________

No. 333: Updated Outlook: U.S. Economy, Inflation, Markets, Liquidity and Systemic Stability

Wednesday, November 10th, 2010

SPECIAL COMMENTARY NUMBER 333


Updated Outlook: U.S. Economy, Inflation, Markets, Liquidity and Systemic Stability

November 10, 2010

__________

Economic and Systemic-Stability Crises Continue

Promised Fed Actions Pummel Dollar versus Major Currencies and Precious Metals
As Global Markets Anticipate Higher U.S. Inflation

Fed Policies Will Trigger Inflation but Not Recovery

Hyperinflationary Great Depression Looms
Irrespective of Shifting Political Environment

September Trade Deficit Should Have Little Impact on GDP Revision

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: This Special Commentary focuses on updating the outlook for the U.S. economy, inflation, financial markets and systemic liquidity and stability (update to No. 323), and it includes details of today’s (November 10th) September Trade Balance.  Due to the timing of upcoming travel, the next regular Commentary will be on Wednesday, November 17th, following release of the October CPI and Residential Construction numbers.  It will include assessments of the October reports on Retail Sales (to be released on Monday, November 15th) and Industrial Production and the PPI (to be released on Tuesday, November 16th).

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

SUMMARY OUTLOOK

Fed Moves Preemptively to Debase U.S. Dollar.  In announcing the effective monetization of U.S. Treasury funding needs through mid-2011, the Federal Reserve not only has begun a process from which it will be increasingly difficult to withdraw, but also has begun a process that likely will have to be accelerated in the months ahead, in response to mounting U.S. fiscal and systemic-solvency problems intensified by a still-unexpected "double-dip" recession, as well as in response to intensifying selling and dumping of the U.S. dollar and dollar-denominated paper assets in the global markets. 

Such locks-in one of the underlying prerequisites for the U.S. economic environment to evolve into an unthinkable hyperinflationary great depression.  The U.S. government effectively is bankrupt and remains extremely likely to resolve this ultimate sovereign insolvency by printing money to meet its obligations.  As global pressures force the Fed into further Treasury debt monetization, as global confidence in the world’s reserve currency evaporates, risks remain particularly high of a U.S. hyperinflation beginning to unfold in the first-half of 2011, along with severe economic, social and political consequences that will follow.  The outside timing for this manmade financial catastrophe remains 2014.

What the Fed has done is in line with the prior Special Commentary No. 323 and Hyperinflation Special Report, referenced here for broad background.  The general outlook is not changed; again, certain elements have just started locking into place.

The U.S. central bank will succeed in creating consumer inflation, but it will be the worst sort of inflation, inflation that is driven by monetary policy distortions instead of by booming economic demand — inflation combined with declining business activity.  Given the Fed’s recent jawboning of the now-announced Treasury debt monetization policy, the inflation process already has started.  U.S. dollar weakness in response to the Fed’s jawboning helped to spike oil and gasoline prices, which, in turn, will help to fuel somewhat stronger inflation reporting as early as next week (see Week Ahead). 

Not only are Mr. Bernanke’s actions unlikely to stimulate domestic economic activity, but, as seen with the dollar weakness and soaring gasoline prices in 2008, the unfolding "inflation creation" likely will exacerbate the current downturn in U.S. business activity, where liquidity-strapped consumers likely will be forced to ration other consumption in order to pay for necessary gasoline.

Rest of the World Protests.  Heavy selling of the U.S. dollar against most major currencies and heavy buying of gold and silver followed the Fed’s action, clearly signaling that the global investment community believed that the Fed would succeed in debasing the U.S. dollar and creating U.S. inflation.  Prices and exchange rates have been volatile coming into tomorrow’s G20 meeting.  Irrespective of near-term swings, however, including central bank intervention, precious metals and the stronger major currencies should continue to do well, over the long haul, against the U.S. dollar, preserving the purchasing power that otherwise will be lost in a debased U.S. currency.

Consider in the following graphs that the "Latest November" prices were about even with the indicated October averages before the Fed’s announcement.  The "Latest November" points are the prices as I am putting this Commentary to bed and effectively represent net market actions post-FOMC announcement, versus the October averages.

 

 

 

 

Beyond precious-metal- and currency-market reactions, severe criticism of the Fed’s action came quickly from major trading partners and global political rivals, including Germany, China and Russia, as well as from a number of politicians in the United States.  Consider the following from China’s Dagong credit rating agency, which downgraded the United States’ sovereign rating from AA to A+, with a negative outlook.  Dagong noted that the downgrade reflected the United States’ "deteriorating debt repayment capability and drastic decline of the government’s intention of debt repayment.

"The serious defects in the United States economic development and management model will lead to the long-term recession of its national economy, fundamentally lowering the national solvency.  The new round of quantitative easing monetary policy adopted by the Federal Reserve has brought about an obvious trend of depreciation of the U.S. dollar, and the continuation and deepening of credit crisis in the U.S.  Such a move entirely encroaches on the interests of the creditors, indicating the decline of the U.S. government’s intention of debt repayment.  Analysis shows that the crisis confronting the U.S. cannot be ultimately resolved through currency depreciation.  On the contrary, it is likely that an overall crisis might be triggered by the U.S. government’s policy to continuously depreciate the U.S. dollar against the will of creditors."

As an aside, while creditors may not like it, the U.S. always has the ability to repay its debts by printing the needed currency.

Does A Solvency Crisis Still Terrorize the Fed?  Everything is just fine and dandy, if you believe the shills for Wall Street.  The economic and financial crises of the last several years have been contained and stabilized.  The economy is growing, albeit still somewhat slowly, but business activity is in an upswing.  The Administration and the Federal Reserve tell pretty much the same story, but with a caveat, which has been intensified in the post-mid-term election period, that unemployment is too high and still needs to be brought down.  The Fed also frets that inflation is too low.

Yet, as just discussed, the Fed’s ability to stimulate inflation usually is not tied to commensurate growth in the economy, and Mr. Bernanke is a good enough economist to know that.  He also was painfully aware of the global criticism his actions would draw.  So, why did the Federal Open Market Committee announce on November 3rd that it would monetize nearly one trillion dollars of U.S. Treasury debt ($600 billion new buying and $250 to $300 billion in reinvested mortgage-backed securities), buying enough U.S. Treasury notes through mid-2011 to cover the total anticipated borrowing needs of the U.S. government for the same period? 

Perhaps the Fed did not want to worry about there being enough foreign investment to fund the government’s operations?  More likely, the action was aimed at trying to front-run an intensifying systemic liquidity crisis that has been smoldering for the last couple of years — never extinguished — and that has been reignited in an economic environment of continued downturn and turmoil.

 

 

As shown in the above graph, the SGS-Ongoing M3 Measure continues to show year-to-year contraction (down 3.4% in October), although the pace of decline has narrowed, as the broad money measure has seen slow month-to-month growth recently, against monthly contractions a year ago.  Nonetheless, the indication here remains one of ongoing systemic instability, particularly in the banking system. 

Please note the following graphs on the monetary base.  Broad money did not grow in response to the surge in excess bank reserves from prior "quantitative easing," largely because the banks did not lend the money into the normal stream of commerce, which would have spiked the money supply.  Also the bulk of prior "quantitative easing" was in the purchase of mortgage-backed securities.

 

 

 

The monetary base is not a money supply measure, per se; it consists of bank reserves (not counted in any money supply measures) and currency in circulation (in money supply M1).  It still is, in theory, the Fed’s primary tool for adjusting the money supply.

The graphs show roughly what the monetary base would look like by mid-2011, given the promised stimulus.  While there is no guarantee that banks will increase their lending — part of the restraint still seems to be balance-sheet issues with certain banks — the nature of the Fed buying so much in the way of Treasuries from banks or otherwise should be enough to have some minimal flow-through to the money supply.

As shown in the following graphs, bank lending to consumers and businesses remains abysmal, although the monthly declines have flattened out in the latest monthly reporting.  In the area of commercial paper outstanding, after short-lived small bumps, both the aggregate (shown) and nonfinancial outstandings again have turned down.

 

 

 

 

 

 

The Fed’s primary function — as a private corporation owned by commercial banks — is to protect the banking system.  Supporting economic growth and containing inflation are secondary concerns, but the renewed economic threat now also can shatter the fragile appearance of banking-system stability.  Indeed, the banking system is far from stable, which is one reason lending is down and likely is the primary reason the Fed has launched its new program.

 

Mid-Term Election Shifts Control of Congress But Not the Outlook for Hyperinflation.  Also last week, the U.S. mid-term elections changed the composition of Congress.  While the actual federal deficit and economic structural problems are likely to get a good airing, particularly before the House, little is likely to change that could alter the course of the government’s effective bankruptcy or the short-range prospects of the structurally impaired economy, where the latter issue requires a major overhaul of U.S. trade policy.

Most who talk about "balancing" the budget are talking about the cash-based-accounting budget, which Bill Clinton was able to get into a reported "surplus."  The actual deficit, based on GAAP-based accounting, including the annual change in the net present value of the unfunded liabilities for Social Security and Medicare, however, did not show a surplus during the Clinton Administration.  Currently running in the $4 to $5 trillion range, the actual deficit is uncontainable from a practical standpoint.  Taxes cannot be raised enough to offset it, and every penny of spending could be cut, except for the "entitlement" programs and the federal government still would be in deficit.

Accordingly, meaningful resolution of the actual deficit problem means severe slashing of the Social Security and Medicare programs, in addition to whatever other government costs can be slashed.  Even with the shift in Congress, I do not see any political chance of the types of cuts needed being made in Social Security and Medicare.  Further detail on this, again, is covered in the Hyperinflation Special Report

 

U.S. Economy Still Faces Double-Dip Recession.  The longest and deepest economic contraction of the post-World War II era, the 2007 to 2009 U.S. recession, is far from over.  The downturn in the U.S. economy is re-intensifying, with no near-term stability or recovery on the forecast horizon.  After an initial plunge, broad-based business activity bottom-bounced at a low-level plateau for more than year.  Shy of short-lived bumps in activity from stimulus measures, there has been no meaningful recovery.  Nonetheless, with the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) having called an end to the recession in June 2009, the current downturn eventually will be recognized as a double-dip recession

Reflecting an intense real (inflation-adjusted) annual contraction in broad systemic liquidity (SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate), the economy has started to contract anew, as reflected in the accompanying graph.  As discussed in numerous Commentaries this year (see Commentaries No. 323 and 328, for example), declining year-to-year change in real (inflation-adjusted) M3 signals a pending economic downturn or pending intensification of an existing economic contraction, with contracting broad liquidity invariably constraining broad economic activity.  The signal is generated when real M3 first turns negative year-to-year, which occurred in December 2009 in the current economic cycle.  The signal is not generated by, nor dependent on, either the length or the depth of the M3 downturn.  The downside shift in business activity usually follows within six to nine months.  Due to the NBER’s current business cycle timing, the current downturn will be classified as a double-dip recession. 

The following updated graph plots annual real M3 growth versus periods of recession formally recognized by the NBER.  It includes an approximate annual real contraction in the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate as of October 2010.  The inflation-adjusted October M3 estimate used here is an annual contraction of roughly 4.6%, versus a 4.9% contraction in September.

 

 

Structural problems tied to lack of real consumer income growth — and worsened now by the credit-intensified contraction in consumer liquidity — pushed the economy into recession by early 2007, almost a year before the officially-clocked onset of December 2007.  Such helped to trigger the credit collapse, which exacerbated the unfolding downtown and threatened systemic collapse.  Despite extraordinary efforts to prevent a failure of the banking system, the structural consumer liquidity issues have not been addressed.  Until they are, sustainable growth in U.S. business activity will be lacking.

The current double-dip contraction likely will meet my definition of depression (a greater than 10% real decline in peak-to-trough activity).  In response to a likely hyperinflation, the current circumstance would evolve into a great depression (a greater than 25% real decline in peak-to-trough activity).  Ongoing contractions in the world’s largest economy have sharply negative implications for global economic growth, but the hyperinflation risk for the United States likely will not spread to the more-stable major U.S. trading partners.

U.S. Financial Markets.  The domestic equity market have shown some initial euphoric insanity in response to the Fed’s promised activity, but the stock market is not recognizing an ongoing systemic solvency crisis, yet.  The domestic equity and credit markets also both should be hit eventually by the looming U.S. dollar selling panic, which would encompass the selling of U.S. dollar-denominated stocks as well as credit instruments.

In the ongoing dollar debasement process, markets likely will be highly unstable and volatile, particularly when central banks try to affect activity.  Looking at the longer term, though, strategies aimed at preserving wealth and assets continue to make sense.  For those who have their assets denominated in U.S. dollars, physical gold and silver remain primary hedges, as do stronger currencies such as the Canadian and Australian dollars and the Swiss franc, which recently having hit or broken parity with the U.S. dollar.  Holding assets outside the U.S. also likely will have some benefits.

 

LATEST ECONOMIC REPORTING

September Trade Deficit Should Have Negligible Impact on Third-Quarter GDP Revision.  Back in the realm of day-to-day economic reporting, the September trade deficit, though slightly narrower than expected before inflation adjustment, widened minimally in the context of the inflation-adjusted level for the third-quarter deficit.  Correspondingly, the impact of today’s report on the November 23rd revision to the third-quarter GDP estimate could go slightly in either direction.

Nominal (Not Adjusted for Inflation) Trade Deficit.  For September 2010, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported today (November 10th) that the nominal seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services narrowed to $44.0 billion, versus a revised $46.5 (previously $46.3) billion in August, and widened sharply from the $35.2 billion monthly deficit of September 2009.

Against August 2010, the September trade balance showed a small gain in exports and a small decline in imports.  The lower imports partially were influenced by oil activity.  Unadjusted oil imports reflected both lower physical volume and lower prices.  Specifically, for the month of September 2010, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $72.36 per barrel, down from $73.47 in August 2010, but up from $68.17 in September 2009.  In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, September 2010 volume averaged 9.656 million barrels per day, versus 9.900 million in August 2010 and 9.540 million in September 2009.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit.  A widening trade deficit directly reduces GDP growth and vice versa.  As reported by the BEA with the September number, adjusted for seasonal factors and inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the second-quarter goods deficit was at a revised annualized pace of $575.7 (previously $575.1) billion.  Based on full third-quarter reporting, the annualized third-quarter deficit was running at a pace of $596.1 billion ($590.9 billion was the initial estimate based on just July and August reporting, but revised detail would take that July and August estimate to $594.5 billion).  What portion, if any, of the inflation-adjusted trade data revisions will make it into the pending GDP revision is an open question.

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness will show up in prior-period revisions.

Retail Sales (October 2010).  October retail sales are due for release on Monday, November 15th, with the consensus looking for a 0.7% seasonally-adjusted monthly gain (Briefing.com), versus a 0.6% monthly increase in September.  A downside reporting surprise is a fair bet.

Industrial Production (October 2010).  October industrial production, due for release on Tuesday, November 16th, is expected to show a 0.3% monthly gain (Briefing.com), versus a 0.2% monthly contraction in September.  Again, a downside reporting surprise is a fair bet.

Producer Price Index — PPI (October 2010).  The October PPI is due for release on Tuesday, November 16th, with higher oil prices expected to push monthly wholesale inflation higher than September’s 0.4% gain.  The series is somewhat randomly volatile, but higher inflation is likely here, on both a monthly and annual basis, reflecting early "success" in the Fed’s efforts to debase the U.S. dollar.

Consumer Price Index — CPI (October 2010).  Due for release on Wednesday, November 17th, the October CPI is expected to start showing some pick-up in seasonally-adjusted monthly consumer inflation.  The consensus estimate for the monthly CPI-U gain is 0.3%, up from a 0.1% gain in September, per Briefing.com.  Such is supported partially by a combination of a 3.5% monthly jump in not-seasonally-adjusted gasoline prices and seasonal factors that will tend to exacerbate same.  The pick-up in consumer inflation also reflects an early victory for Mr. Bernanke’s desired inflation creation (dollar debasement), based on distortions in monetary policy, or jawboning of same.  Reporting risk is to the upside of expectations.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease the October 2010 CPI-U reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.21% adjusted monthly gain seen in October 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for October 2010, the difference in October’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from September 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.14%.  So a consensus result of a 0.3% monthly increase would move annual inflation to something over 1.2%.

Residential Construction — Housing Starts (October 2010).  October housing starts are due for release on Wednesday, November 17th.  They should remain near historic lows, with any monthly change likely not to be statistically meaningful.

 

__________

No. 332: October Employment and Unemployment, Dollar Debasement, Election

Friday, November 5th, 2010

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 332
October Employment and Unemployment, Dollar Debasement, Election

November 5, 2010

__________

Baloney Payroll-Employment Data:
Seasonal Adjustments Become Primary Driver of Jobs Creation?

October Household-Survey Employment Fell 330,000

October Unemployment Rates: 9.6% (U.3), 17.0% (U.6), 22.5% (SGS)

—————

Fed Move to Debase U.S. Dollar Will Generate Higher Inflation But No Recovery

Election Results Do Not Alter Basic Economic or Inflation Outlooks

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: Today’s Commentary focuses on the October labor report.  A Special Commentary is planned for Tuesday, November 9th, updating the outlook for the U.S. economy, inflation, financial markets and systemic liquidity and stability.  Although the broad outlook is unchanged, developments with the Federal Reserve’s active debasement of the U.S. dollar and the impact of the mid-term elections will be assessed, well beyond the summary comments here.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Double-Dip Continues Despite Best Gimmicks of the Bureau of Labor Statistics.  The Federal Reserve’s efforts at debasing the U.S. dollar already have triggered higher inflation, as seen in higher priced dollar-based commodities such as oil.  The announced "quantitative easing," though, likely will have minimal impact in terms of stimulating economic activity.  The mid-term election results and the shift in control of the House of Representatives should lead to more-open discussion of the structural U.S. economic problems and threats to the system from the actual federal deficit, but solutions to the economic issues will take years to have major impact, if they are addressed, while the issues with the actual federal deficit (not the cash-based shortfall Washington plays with) remain intractable.

As the double-dip recession and the federal deficit and related Treasury funding horrors get worse — irrespective of today’s (November 5th) happy report on payroll employment — the Fed’s monetization of Treasury debt will be increased out of necessity, as part of an ongoing effort at systemic salvation.  These circumstances and the updated broad outlook will be more fully explored in the Special Commentary pending for Tuesday, November 9th.  The preliminary estimate of the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for October will be posted over the weekend at the Alternate Data page for M3.  Annual growth appears headed for roughly a 3.3% year-to-year contraction, versus a 3.7% contraction in September. 

Employment Was Demonstrably Gimmicked — Seasonal-Factor Games Added 200,000 to October Payrolls. My predictions of a monthly decline in October nonfarm payrolls and an increase in the headline unemployment rate were wrong.  Not only were October payrolls reported with a statistically-meaningful gain, but prior periods enjoyed upside revisions.  Of the major significance, though, those large revisions and the October gain largely were the result of seasonal-adjustment gimmicks; they were not reflected in the underlying unadjusted numbers.  As to the U.3 unemployment rate, it held once again at 9.6%, 8,700 unemployed shy of rounding up to 9.7%.

At issue with the payroll employment data is the use of "concurrent" seasonal-factor adjustments, where the current and recent seasonal adjustment factors are created and changed on a monthly basis.  The use of this process enables the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) to report almost anything desired in terms of monthly payroll change. 

In general, seasonal adjustments are used to redistribute recurring patterns of employment activity, such as seen with the school-year or holiday-shopping periods, so that the adjusted monthly changes tend to reflect economic changes as opposed to just the regular variations in employment activity.  Key to the entire seasonal-adjustment concept is that the total year’s activity remains the same, whether adjusted or unadjusted; the adjustments just shift and rebalance activity between certain months.  If the aggregated levels of adjusted and unadjusted activity were different over a year, then the adjustments inappropriately would be increasing or decreasing the reported level of actual annual activity.   

Such no longer is the case.  While touted by the BLS as the more-accurate approach to seasonally adjusting data, the concurrent adjustment process can distort the annual reporting and, as happened in today’s payroll reporting, it can allow for jobs creation solely from seasonal-factor adjustments, without regard to underlying reporting.

Current Seasonal Factors Created Roughly 200,000 Phantom Jobs.  The "happy" news in the October jobs report was not just that seasonally-adjusted payrolls gained 151,000, but that the previously-reported seasonally-adjusted payrolls were revised higher by 110,000 in September, including an upside revision to August of 56,000.  If the revisions were based on new jobs data, usually there would be parallel upside revisions in the unadjusted numbers.  Instead, the unadjusted September total was revised upward by 32,000 and the unadjusted August was revised lower by 1,000, far shy of the aggregate revisions, and suggestive of the new jobs coming largely from a recasting of the monthly seasonal-adjustment factors. 

Even with concurrent adjustments, the adjusted and unadjusted changes usually are reasonably consistent.  In the period October 2008 to October 2009, for example, adjusted payrolls fell by 6,096,000 versus an unadjusted loss of 6,084,000.  In last month’s reporting for the period of September 2009 to September 2010, the adjusted gain was 344,000 versus an unadjusted gain of 321,000.  As of the October reporting, those September numbers changed respectively to an adjusted gain of 454,000 versus an unadjusted 353,000, while the period from October 2009 to October 2010 reflected an adjusted 829,000 gain versus an unadjusted 626,000 gain, a creation of roughly 200,000 reported jobs from nothing more than the tweaking of seasonal-adjustment factors.

Payroll Survey Detail.  The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted October 2010 jobs gain of 151,000 (a gain of 261,000 before prior-period revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval).  September payrolls showed a revised 41,000 (was 95,000) jobs loss, of which 77,000 was tied to the layoff of temporary census workers.  One thousand census workers still will lose their jobs following the October payroll survey, which reflected census layoffs of 5,000.

As shown in the next two graphs, the level of payroll employment still stands below where it was a decade ago, despite the U.S. population growing by more than 10% in the same period.  The structural impairments to U.S. economic activity will be reviewed in the upcoming Special Commentary.

 

The preceding graph reflects payrolls net of temporary census hires, with the red line reflecting the likely benchmark revision due for publication with the January data in February 2011.  The magnitude of the revision was estimated along with September reporting.  The following graph similar, except it includes the census hires, as officially reported.  I expect that the upside blips seen in the most recent reporting eventually will revise away.

 

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; December 2009 is the short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment declined by a seasonally-adjusted 8,363,000 jobs, or 6.1%.  As of October 2010 reporting, payrolls purportedly have gained 0.7% or 874,000 jobs since the December 2009 trough.  That trough, though, will shift into 2010 with the upcoming benchmark revision, along with a reduction in current employment levels by more than 500,000.

In terms of annual change, October 2010 was up by 0.48%, versus September’s revised 0.27% (previously 0.25%) gain.  Net of likely benchmark revisions, annual change was virtually flat.

Thanks to recent, protracted bottom-bouncing in the payroll series (see benchmark-lines in the preceding graphs), current annual growth has recovered from the post-World War II record 4.96% decline in July 2009.  The July 2009 decline was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II, which reflected a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945.  Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the current annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression, and should deepen further, net of the pending benchmark revision. 

The following graph of long-term year-to-year payroll change reflects the numbers as reported, with no adjustment for census hiring variations or the pending benchmark revision.  The next graph shows the year-to-year detail both with and without the census hires, but also without benchmark considerations.  

 

 

Benchmark Revision — About Minus 580,000 and Counting.  Announced along with the September 2010 payroll release was an early estimate for the 2010 benchmark revision, which indicated the not-seasonally-adjusted March 2010 payrolls were overstated by 366,000.  As the data are re-worked for that estimate, changes will be carried back to the prior revision as of March 2009, as well as carried forward to present reporting.  Such suggests that the overstatement of the level of payrolls as of October 2010 reporting is about 580,000 jobs.  The formal benchmark revision and restated economic history will be published with the January 2011 employment report, due for release on February 4, 2011.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment — Model Change. Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business, on a timely basis (within at least five years, if ever), such information is estimated by the addition of a bias factor generated by the Birth-Death Model (a model of the effects new business creation and old business bankruptcies).  The unadjusted October 2010 bias factor was a monthly addition of 61,000 jobs, versus 50,000 jobs in October 2009, and against a monthly addition of 11,000 jobs in September 2010.

The BLS announced in today’s release that it would begin estimating its monthly bias factors on a quarterly basis, instead of on an annual basis, along with the publication of the 2010 benchmark revision in February.  This appears to be intended to provide more frequent and accurate adjustments to the biases, reflecting data from the BLS Quarterly Census of Employment and Wages.  While such has to be taken as a positive move, it does not appear to address the fundamental flaws of the Birth-Death Model, discussed as usual in the ensuing paragraphs, and it does not improve the quality of current reporting.

Based now on the unsupportable assumption of economic recovery, the bias factors used in the last six months of payroll reporting have been 27.4% ahead of what they were reset to after the most recent and disastrous 2009 benchmark revision.  Positive assumptions — commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling — can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with "stronger" economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates, or underlying assumptions of ongoing economic recovery.

Historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels — to understate employment declines — during recessions.   There is a faulty underlying premise here that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business.  So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, presumed additional "surplus" jobs, created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor.  These add-factors are running at about 50,000 per month (seasonally-adjusted), at present.  I still estimate this monthly bias should be negative by 200,000 or so, on average.  Since it is not, the BLS continues regularly to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 250,000 jobs.  Most of that misreporting, however, now will not be corrected until at least the 2011 benchmark revision to be published in February 2012.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (counting multiple job holders more than once), showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly employment loss of 330,000 in October, following a reported gain of 141,000 in September, and an unchanged headline unemployment rate.

The October 2010 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate increased by a statistically-insignificant 0.06 percentage point to 9.64% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), a level just shy of rounding up to 9.7%.  Such was up from the 9.58% U.3 in September.  Not seasonally adjusted, October’s U.3 unemployment rate eased to 9.0% from 9.2% in September. 

October U.6 unemployment notched lower to a seasonally-adjusted 17.0% (eased to 15.9% unadjusted) from 17.1% (16.2% unadjusted) in September.  The broadest unemployment rate published by the BLS, U.6 includes accounting for those marginally attached to the labor force (including short-term discouraged workers) and those who are employed part-time for economic reasons (they cannot find a full-time job).

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year.  This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers.  The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding my estimate of the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed and labor force, unemployment — more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — held at about 22.5% in October, remaining at the highest reading of the current cycle.  The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting and tends to follow its relative monthly movements.  See the Alternate Data tab for a graph and more detail.

As discussed in earlier writings, while 22.5% unemployment might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession.  The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms.  Today, less that 2% work on farms.  Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness will show up in prior-period revisions.

Trade Balance (September 2010).  The September trade deficit is due for release on Wednesday, November 10th.  While expectations are for no meaningful change (per Briefing.com), any major movement in the monthly data would impact the upcoming second-estimate (first-revision) of third-quarter 2010 GDP due for release on November 23rd.  My betting would be on monthly deterioration, with a corresponding downward revision to the GDP estimate.

 

 

__________

No. 331: Third-Quarter GDP, Quantitative-Easing Games, Homes Sales, New Orders

Friday, October 29th, 2010

COMMENTARY NUMBER 331
Third-Quarter GDP, Quantitative-Easing Games, Homes Sales, New Orders

October 29, 2010

__________

Third-Quarter GDP Growth Statistically Indistinguishable from Zero

Official Economic Activity Is Virtually Flat Other Than for Inventory Building

Fed Will Be Forced to Monetize Treasury Debt
Irrespective of Current Jawboning, Games Playing and Hand Wringing

October Employment Data Likely Will Disappoint Market Expectations

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, November 5th, following the release of the October’s payroll employment and unemployment data.  Intervening Commentaries will be published as needed to address unusual market or other circumstances.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Systemic Conditions Will Force Federal Reserve Monetization of Treasury Debt.  As noted by then-Federal Reserve Governor Ben Bernanke in his infamous "helicopter" speech of November 21, 2002:

"Indeed, under a fiat (that is, paper) money system, a government (in practice, the central bank in cooperation with other agencies) should always be able to generate increased nominal spending and inflation, even when the short-term nominal interest rate is at zero."

"Like gold, U.S. dollars have value only to the extent that they are strictly limited in supply.  But the U.S. government has a technology, called a printing press (or, today, its electronic equivalent), that allows it to produce as many U.S. dollars as it wishes at essentially no cost.  By increasing the number of U.S. dollars in circulation, or even by credibly threatening to do so, the U.S. government can also reduce the value of a dollar in terms of goods and services, which is equivalent to raising the prices in dollars of those goods and services.  We conclude that, under a paper-money system, a determined government can always generate higher spending and hence positive inflation."

While the above is lifted from the Hyperinflation Special Report (page 22), it may be somewhat revealing as to the now-Fed Chairman’s thinking.  Consider the comment: "By increasing the number of U.S. dollars in circulation, or even by credibly threatening to do so…."

Much of what has been seen recently in terms of pending "quantitative easing" (monetization of Treasury debt) by the Fed has been nothing more than jawboning, posing a "credible threat."  Such has had some of its desired impact on the markets, weakening the U.S. dollar and spiking the price of gold along with boosting inflationary expectations.  Now, however, the markets are expecting the Fed actually to do something other than further rumination.

I am not going to guess at what the Fed is going to do next week.  The games-playing and market manipulation here has gotten so clever that it just might backfire, with too little monetization possibly crashing stocks, or too much monetization boosting gold and crashing the U.S. dollar and stocks.

What is not yet widely recognized is that the Fed will have to monetize Treasury debt soon enough, regardless of any action taken or not taken next week by the U.S. central bank to rearrange the proverbial deck chairs on the Titanic.  Monetization will be forced in an effort to prevent a systemic collapse, as discussed variously in the  Hyperinflation Special Report and in Special Commentary No. 323, as the unexpectedly weak U.S. economy spikes the federal deficit, impairs Treasury fundings and the combination of factors pushes the U.S. dollar into a likely selling panic.

The general outlook described in No. 323 is unchanged.  The economic outlook will be reviewed and updated in the Commentary addressing the October labor market conditions.

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

Third-Quarter GDP Growth Matched Late-Consensus Outlook.  The consensus forecast for annualized real growth in third-quarter GDP softened from 2.4% last week, to 2.0% this week, per Briefing.com.  Missing significant data for its initial estimation and placing unwarranted faith in consensus estimates, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) tends to target its "advance" reporting of GDP at the consensus estimate, which it hit in today’s reporting.  Accordingly, the pre-election report showed the GDP growing at a faster (albeit minimally faster) pace than in the quarter before, with a number that in theory should not rock the financial markets.

Inventory Building Accounted for 72% of Third Quarter Growth, 63% of 2010 Year-to-Date GDP Gains.  Despite underlying reporting that showed slowing consumption, contracting orders and slowing production in the third-quarter, reported inventory build-up continued to surge, generating the bulk of the estimated broad economic growth in the third-quarter.  Of the 2.01% "advance" estimate of third-quarter growth, 1.44% was due to inventory building, leaving final sales (GDP net of inventories) at an annualized 0.57% growth rate.  If the quarterly GDP growth were viewed in terms of just quarter-to-quarter change — the way the rest of the world tends to report GDP — that non-annualized quarterly growth rate in final sales would round to 0.1%, which is minimal growth, virtually flat,  by most any standards.

For the year-to-date, of the 2.48% annualized growth estimated for the first three quarters of 2010, 63% of the reported growth was in inventories, leaving annualized final sales year-to-date 2010 at an annualized growth rate of 0.92%.  With continued weak consumption, the official GDP reporting at some point should begin to reflect liquidation of unwanted inventories — perhaps in the current fourth-quarter — with a resumption of the reporting of regular quarterly contractions in broad economic activity.

GDP - The Detail.  The "advance" estimate of third-quarter 2010 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) showed a statistically-insignificant annualized real growth rate of 2.01% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), up from an estimated 1.72% in the second-quarter.  The year-to-year change in real third-quarter GDP notched higher to 3.11% from 3.00% in the second quarter.

The following graph shows the annual percent change in inflation-adjusted quarterly GDP for the history of the series. The record annual contraction for the series was 4.11%, seen in second-quarter 2009.

The GDP implicit price deflator was estimated at an annualized pace of 2.17% inflation for third-quarter 2010, up from 1.96% in the second-quarter.  In contrast, annualized seasonally-adjusted quarterly inflation for the CPI-U in the third quarter spiked to 1.47%, following a 0.72% contraction in the second-quarter.  The lower the inflation rate used in deflating the GDP, the stronger is the inflation-adjusted number and vice versa.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for third-quarter 2010 was an approximate annual contraction of 1.4% versus the official estimate of a 3.1% gain, more-negative than the alternate 1.3% annual contraction (3.0% official gain) estimated in the second-quarter (see the Alternate Data tab).  While annualized real quarterly growth is not estimated formally on an alternative basis, a flat-to-minus quarter-to-quarter change would have been realistic for the second-quarter.  The recent relative upturn in annual change reflects the bottom-bouncing at low levels of activity seen for much of the last year in key underlying economic series, not an economic recovery.  As discussed in Commentary No. 328, an intensified downturn, now in the form of a double-dip recession, continues to unfold.

 


GNP and GDI (see Notes on GDP-Related Nomenclature and Definitions Sidebar).  The initial reporting of third-quarter GNP and GDI will not be until November 23rd, because — as with the GDP — data are so heavily guesstimated at this point in reporting, the BEA recognizes GNP and GDI detail largely would be meaningless.

Durable Goods Orders Spiked Again by Airplane Orders.  The Census Bureau reported Wednesday (October 27th) that the regularly volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods rose by 3.3% (up by 4.1% before prior-period revisions) month-to-month in September 2010, after a revised 1.0% (previously 1.3%) decline in August.  Unadjusted, year-to-year change in September new orders was a gain of 12.7%, up from a revised 12.8% (previously 12.1%) annual increase reported for August.

One of the larger factors accounting for the irregular volatility in this series is commercial airplane orders, and such orders accounted for more than the total gain in the durable goods accounting.  While the aircraft orders are good news in terms of long-range economic activity, the nature of multi-year delivery schedules does not impact the broad economy immediately.  Net of the increase in orders for nondefense aircraft and parts, new orders for durable goods declined by 0.1% in September.

Widely followed nondefense capital goods surged by 8.6% (up 11.8% before prior-period revisions) in September.  Net of airplanes, though, orders were down by 1.3%.   In August, orders gained a revised 1.0% for the month (previously a contraction of 0.9%).  For September, the unadjusted year-to-year change in the series was 27.0%, versus a revised 23.9% (previously 22.6%) gain in August.

Home Sales Remain Seriously Impaired, With Higher Foreclosures in September.  The residential sales environment remains abysmal at the moment, as shown in industry reporting and as suggested by anecdotal evidence.  Even in this morning’s GDP report, residential investment tanked.  Boosted by expiring home-buyer tax credits, purchases of new homes had contributed 0.6 percentage points to the 1.7% GDP growth rate reported in the second-quarter, but third-quarter residential activity drained 0.8 percentage points of growth from the third-quarter GDP. 

With a liquidity crisis in play for many potential home buyers, in conjunction with low consumer confidence, home sales still hold no near-term prospects of helping to boost broad economic activity.  Instead, they likely will continue sapping strength from the economy, further impairing residential construction and new orders for durable goods, which usually benefit from home sales activity (appliance sales, etc.) in more-positive times.

Wednesday’s (October 27th) reporting of September new home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) showed a statistically meaningless monthly gain of 6.6% +/- 19.8% (95% confidence interval) from August.  August showed a revised 1.1% monthly gain (previously unchanged).  The year-to-year decline in the new home sales series in September 2010 narrowed to 21.5% from a 28.9% decline in August.

Monday’s (October 25th) release of September existing home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) showed a 10.0% gain in activity from August (up 9.7% before prior period revisions), but still at historically-low levels.  August gained a revised 7.3% (previously 7.6%) versus July.  On a year-to-year basis, sales were down by 19.1% in September versus a revised 28.8% (previously 29.0%) annual decline in August.

Foreclosure activity remained a major distorting factor for home sales, with "distressed" activity accounting for 35% of existing sales in the NAR’s September reporting, up from 34% in August.  Such is despite some press of certain financial institutions putting foreclosures on temporary hold, in response to mounting legal issues.

Separately, the Census Bureau acknowledges that a portion of new home sales also is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimates as to the scope of the issue.  Some in the construction trade have difficulty competing with the pricing of foreclosed properties.  Until the foreclosure problems get worked out in the system, monthly changes in these home sales numbers cannot be taken as meaningful positive indicators (when the numbers are positive) of underlying activity in homeowner real estate, as it relates to general economic activity. 

The following updated graphs reflect different measures of home sales activity since February 2009.  The numbers, through September 2010, reflect the seasonally-adjusted level of monthly sales, rather than the annual rates usually published by the industry.

  

 

 

 

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness will show up in prior-period revisions.

Employment and Unemployment (October 2010).  October jobs and unemployment data are due for release on Friday, November 5th.  Consensus estimates are for a gain of 45,000 in payrolls versus a 95,000 jobs loss in September, and for the U.3 unemployment rate to hold again at 9.6%, per Briefing.com.  Of the 95,000 jobs reported lost in September, 77,000 were due to layoffs of temporary census workers.  The effect from census layoffs has run its course, with no more than the aggregate remaining total of 6,000 as of September to be lost in October and in any subsequent periods.

I expect a monthly contraction in October payrolls, as was seen last month even net of census layoffs, with the headline unemployment rate increasing, along with continued upside movement in the broader unemployment rate measures.  To the extent that meaningful signals are generated next week — in advance of the government’s reporting — by underlying and related series, a brief update on the employment reporting outlook will be published.

 

 

__________

No. 330: September Production and Housing Starts

Tuesday, October 19th, 2010

COMMENTARY NUMBER 330
September Production and Housing Starts

October 19, 2010

__________

Third-Quarter Production Growth Slowed and Housing Contracted

Third-Quarter GDP Should Have Slowed
But the Heavily-Politicized and Guesstimated Series Virtually Is Worthless

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, October 29th, following the release of the "advance" estimate of third-quarter GDP.  Analysis also will cover September New Orders for Durable Goods and Home Sales data.  Intervening Commentaries will be published as needed to address unusual market or other circumstances.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Third-Quarter GDP Growth At Least Should Have Slowed.  As with third-quarter real retail sales, annualized quarterly growth in third-quarter industrial production slowed versus annualized second-quarter growth.  Third-quarter housing starts contracted again on a quarterly basis.  The third-quarter trade deficit was a drain on broad economic activity, and inventory build-up, which accounted for the bulk of second-quarter GDP growth, should have seen some work-off, not further building in the third-quarter.

In combination, these factors suggest some slowing — if not an outright contraction — in third-quarter GDP growth, versus the second-quarter’s real (inflation-adjusted) 1.7% quarterly growth rate (see Week Ahead).  Yet, consensus expectations are for a stronger third-quarter GDP result, and the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) tends to target consensus expectations for their "advance" releases.  Keep in mind that the "advance" third-quarter GDP release will be published less than a week before the election.  It seems increasingly likely that this most-heavily politicized of major economic releases once again also will be the most meaningless of major series in terms of reflecting underlying economic activity.

September Production Contraction Partially Reflected Upside Prior-Period Revisions.  In September reporting, monthly levels of seasonally-adjusted industrial production were notched higher in revision for April through August.  Before those revisions, the reported level of September production would have been on the downside of flat, month-to-month, still below consensus expectations of ongoing production growth.  The Federal Reserve Board reported Monday (October 18th) that seasonally-adjusted September 2010 industrial production fell by 0.22% (down 0.02% before revisions to August’s initial reporting, versus a revised 0.18% (previously 0.16%) gain in August.

For the third-quarter, seasonally-adjusted industrial production reportedly grew at annualized pace of 4.77%, down from a 6.99% pace in the second-quarter.

Year-to-year change in September production continued to ease back, to 5.42%, from a revised 6.43% (previously 6.21%) in August, and down from the near-term peak of 8.27% in June.  The relatively high volatility in annual growth is due largely to the pattern of collapsing activity a year ago (a May 2009 trough), followed by cash-for-clunkers boosted production.  The year-to-year contraction of 12.86% seen in May 2009 was the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II. 

 

The first graph preceding shows recent monthly detail, with a fair chance that the August number indeed marked the turning point of renewed decline in the production series.

The "recovery" in production is shown in the second graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average.  For the last 21 months, the production index has averaged 89.57, around which the series has been fluctuating, with September’s six-month moving average reading at 92.73, versus 93.19 for the single month.  Production activity had leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that effectively wiped out the last eight years of growth in industrial production; the current rally has topped the pre-2001 recession high, reclaiming levels last seen in 2004 (six-month moving average). 

Despite the near-term upside gains generated by short-lived stimulus and seasonal-factor distortions, the series likely still is bottom-bouncing and should begin to soften anew, significantly, in the next several months.  The six-month moving-average series remains 7.62% below its December 2007 historic high.

September Housing Starts in Third-Quarter Contraction.  The Census Bureau reported a statistically-insignificant monthly gain for September 2010 housing starts, this morning, October 19th, locking in another quarterly contraction for the housing starts component of residential construction.

As reported, September housing starts were on the plus-side of flat, up for the month by a statistically-insignificant 0.3% (up by 2.0% before prior-period revisions) +/- 12.0% (95% confidence interval).  August’s starts were up an unrevised 10.5% for the month. 

For the third-quarter, seasonally-adjusted housing starts contracted at an annualized pace of 8.16%, versus a 9.38% annualized contraction in the second-quarter.

Year-to-year change in September starts was a statistically-insignificant gain of 4.1% +/-14.0% (95% confidence interval), following an upwardly revised annual gain of 3.9% (previously 2.2%) in August.

Activity has started to slow anew, although the pattern of housing starts generally remains one of bottom-bouncing at an historically low-level plateau of activity, as seen over the last 22 months.  Much weaker monthly numbers remain likely in the months ahead.  Since December 2008 housing starts have been bottom-bouncing, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 574,400.  In those 22 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, including September 2010’s reading of 608,000. 

The "recovery" in housing is shown in these graphs.  The first graph reflects the level of monthly activity in terms of the annualized monthly rate of housing starts, which is randomly volatile and subject to large revisions on a monthly basis.  The second graph shows the six-month moving average, which tends to smooth out that monthly volatility.  

 


 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness will show up in prior-period revisions.

New and Existing Homes Sales (September 2010).  September existing home sales (National Association of Realtors) are due for release on Monday, October 25th, followed by new home sales (Census Bureau) on Wednesday, October 27th.  As with housing starts, theses volatile series should remain extremely weak, with any monthly change (new homes) again lacking statistical significance.  Briefing.com is showing consensus estimates of gains in both series.  Yet, with extreme volatility, reporting error and revisions in these series, with poor-quality seasonal adjustments, with extremely negative anecdotal evidence, and with massive distortions from what should be volatile foreclosure activity in an increasingly difficult legal environment, monthly movements in these numbers are particularly meaningless.

New Orders for Durable Goods (September 2010).  Due for release on Wednesday, October 27th, September new orders for durable goods are expected to show a 0.8% monthly gain (Briefing.com) versus a 1.3% monthly decline reported in August.  This irregularly volatile series likely will not show meaningful monthly change, despite upside biases built into these numbers in the last benchmark revision.

Gross Domestic Product — GDP ("Advance Estimate" Third-Quarter 2010).  Due for release on Friday, October 29th, the "advance" estimate of third-quarter 2010 GDP is expected to reflect 2.4% annualized inflation-adjusted quarterly growth, up from 1.7% in the first-quarter.  As discussed in the opening comments, key underlying series are more consistent with slowing or contracting growth.  The Bureau of Economic Analysis will tend to target consensus expectations as they stand on Friday, October 22nd.  Reporting risk remains for something of a downside surprise to those expectations.

 

__________

No. 329: Inflation, Retail Sales, Trade Deficit and Debased Money

Friday, October 15th, 2010

COMMENTARY NUMBER 329
Inflation, Retail Sales, Trade Deficit and Debased Money

October 15, 2010

__________

Dollar Debasement Fears Mount

September Consumer Inflation: 1.1% (CPI-U), 8.5% (SGS)

Retail Sales Gain Reflected Seasonal Distortions from Year-Ago Clunkers
 More Than It Did a Happier Consumer

August Trade Deficit Took 0.5% from Third-Quarter GDP

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Tuesday, October 19th, following the release of the September Housing Starts and including analysis of September Industrial Production.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

And So It Begins.  In an apparent effort to prop up the stock market, the Fed is sending out all sorts of signals that it is about to launch a round of "quantitative easing" — a euphemism for Fed monetization of U.S. Treasury debt — in an effort to expand money supply and to increase U.S. inflation.  In short, the Fed openly is moving to debase the U.S. dollar.  

While the Fed will find that it can debase the U.S. dollar much further, spiking inflation, its efforts to stimulate economic activity will continue to fall flat due to structural issues limiting consumer activity.

The more-sober markets have taken note of the promised inflation, with yields on the 30-Year Treasury Bonds rising in tandem with intensified selling of the U.S. dollar and buying of gold and silver. 

Yet, raised on the false precepts that neither the dollar nor the budget deficit matters, Wall Street hypesters are touting the Fed’s pending largesse to equity investors.  Such efforts are consistent, perhaps, with former Federal Reserve Chairman Alan Greenspan’s recent suggestion that the "most effective" economic stimulus would be a rallying stock market (see USA Today, September 27, 2010). 

While a fundamentally strong stock market would be good news, a healthy market usually is based on solid underlying business.  Unfortunately, except for the Fed’s funny money, the underlying fundamentals for the economy and stocks just could not be much worse, as discussed in Special Commentary No. 383.

Euphoric Inflation Insanity.  Buying U.S. stocks because the Fed says it will proactively debase the U.S. dollar is like sitting on the beach in order to get a great view of an incoming tsunami.  Any pleasure so derived should be short-lived, when the terror of underlying reality quickly takes hold. 

If one were to view movement in the price of gold as a surrogate for anticipated inflation, for example, the issues begin to come into focus.  Consider that last night’s (October 14th) respective S&P 500, Dow Jones Industrial Average and NASDAQ Composite closing levels were up by 7.5%, 10.8%, 12.1% from a year ago, but the price of gold was up by 29.6% in the same period.  Relative to gold, which tends to hold its purchasing power over time — albeit sometimes in an anticipatory manner — the S&P 500, Dow Jones Industrial Average and NASDAQ Composite have declined respectively by 22.1%, 18.8% and 17.5% year-to-year.  This is against the prospective inflation environment being discounted by the gold market.

While stock prices do tend to rise in an inflationary environment — where revenues and profits are inflated — rising stock prices do not always stay ahead of inflation.  On a constant-dollar or real, inflation-adjusted basis, stocks go through bull and bear markets, just as they do otherwise.  If prices do not stay ahead of inflation, investors lose value in terms of the purchasing power of their assets.  The equity markets may rally in the upcoming inflation, but the systemic implications and current gold behavior suggest that the circumstance will not give investors a positive real return, as discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report.

Given the current systemic distortions and extreme irrationality in the equity markets, a severe and violent sell-off in stocks would not be a shock, and it could come with minimal, if any, warning.  It also might be coincident with a U.S. dollar-selling panic. 

There is particular risk of recent dollar selling — which has been closing in on historic lows — turning into an outright dollar-dumping panic, which not only would roil the domestic U.S. markets, but also would set the stage for a rapid acceleration of domestic consumer inflation.  Irrespective of any near-term market volatility, gold and silver, as well as the stronger currencies, remain the best long-term liquid hedges against loss in purchasing power of the U.S. dollar.  

 

 

Dollar Debasement Fears Spike Gold and Trigger Some Early Escape for the U.S. Dollar.  As shown in the preceding graphs, all the Fed’s rumblings about quantitative easing have had some impact in the area of U.S. dollar debasement against precious metals and most major currencies, while dollar-denominated commodity-based inflation — driven by U.S. dollar weakness — should begin showing up in higher U.S. consumer prices in the next several months.  Such will reflect just monetarily-driven higher prices, not inflation driven higher by strong economic demand.

Although Mr. Bernanke’s ongoing comments may be just be his jawboning phase, the Fed’s actions will forced in the same direction soon enough, as discussed in Special Commentary No. 383 and in the Hyperinflation Special Report.

Third-Quarter GDP Reporting is Looking Flatter.  As discussed below, real quarterly growth in third-quarter retail sales came in slightly to the plus-side in today’s reporting, but the trade deficit was much worse than expected.  Net of temporary census workers and pending benchmark revision, last week’s payroll reporting left the quarterly employment levels about unchanged.  Next week’s housing starts and industrial production are the last major reports before the October 29th "advance" estimate of third-quarter GDP. 

Where I have been giving fair odds to reporting of an outright quarterly contraction for the upcoming real GDP growth, such is now closer to "unchanged," given the retail sales report and the likelihood that the payroll benchmark revision will not be considered in the Bureau of Economic Analysis’s (BEA) considerations at this time.   I shall update the outlook after next week’s reporting.

Where the BEA targets its "advance" estimate at the consensus guess, I would expect the current positive consensus to move more towards flat, as the later data come in.  Where the GDP "advance" estimate will be published in the week before the election, other than for market impact and political hype, it has minimal, if any, value.  It rarely is a meaningful indicator of recent economic activity.

In general, the broad outlook for economic, systemic and financial-market stability is unchanged, again, as last reviewed in Special Commentary No. 383.

 

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

Softer-Than-Expected September CPI And No COLA Increase for Social Security.  Although annual inflation in the CPI-W averaged 1.5% in the third-quarter — the quarter’s inflation is used in the annual cost-of-living-adjustment for Social Security payments — there will be no adjustment this year, shy of an act of Congress, which apparently is being advertised before the election as up for consideration after the election.  The problem remains that last year’s CPI-W was lower in third-quarter 2009 than it was in third-quarter 2008.  Although the inflation was negative, the COLA was unchanged — not reduced — and the COLA will not kick in again until the base period once more exceeds third-quarter 2008.  That did not happen in 2010.  In order for the COLA to increase Social Security payments next year, the CPI-W annual inflation for third-quarter 2011 would have to top 0.6%

CPI-U.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported this morning (October 15th) that the seasonally-adjusted September CPI-U rose for the month by 0.10% (up by a statistically-insignificant 0.06%, unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval, not seasonally adjusted), about 0.1 percentage point less-than-expected by consensus forecasters.  Such followed a 0.25% gain (up 0.14% unadjusted) in August.  Seasonally-adjusted, the annualized rate of inflation for third-quarter 2010 CPI-U was 1.47%, against the second-quarter’s annualized contraction of 0.72%.  With the annualized rates heavily influenced by seasonal-adjustment patterns, consumers experienced "deflation" in the second-quarter only if they lived seasonally-adjusted lives; otherwise, the experience was one of inflation, not deflation.

Unadjusted, September’s year-to-year inflation was 1.14% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) against a 1.15% annual increase in August.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s October 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.21% adjusted monthly gain seen in October 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for October 2010, the difference in October’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from September 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.14%.

CPI-W.  The narrower, seasonally-adjusted September CPI-W rose by 0.15% (up 0.05% unadjusted) for the month, following a gain of 0.35% (0.14% unadjusted) in August.  Seasonally-adjusted, the annualized rate of CPI-W inflation for third-quarter 2010 was 1.76%, against the second-quarter’s annualized contraction of 1.37%.  Again, these numbers were distorted heavily by seasonal-adjustment patterns.

Unadjusted year-to-year CPI-W inflation rose by 1.41% in September, versus a 1.44% August increase.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — is reported only on an unadjusted basis.  C-CPI-U year-to-year inflation picked up to 0.94% in September 2010, versus a 0.90% gain in August.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 4.4% in September 2010, down a notch from 4.5% in August, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was about 8.5% (8.48% for those using the extra digit) in September, versus 8.5% in August. 

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation.  Despite yesterday’s (October 14th) historic high gold price of $1,373.25 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix) and multi-decade high silver price of $24.49 per troy ounce (London fix), gold and silver prices have yet to approach their historic high levels, adjusted for inflation.  The earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 would be $2,387 per troy ounce, based on September 2010 CPI-U-adjusted dollars, and would be $7,785 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (all series not seasonally adjusted). 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org) has not been hit since, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars.  Based on September 2010 CPI-U inflation, the 1980 silver price peak would be $139 per troy ounce and would be $453 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (again, all series not seasonally adjusted).

As shown on page 22 in the Hyperinflation report, over the decades, the price of gold has compensated for more than the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI-U inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the U.S. dollar based on the SGS-Alternate CPI.

Real Money Supply M3.  The signal of the still unfolding double-dip recession, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), most recently was discussed and graphed in Commentary No. 328The real contraction in September M3 (SGS-Ongoing) estimated for that Commentary was 5.1%.  Based on today’s CPI-U report and the latest estimate on the September SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate, that annual contraction was 4.9%, narrower than August’s 5.3% contraction, and May’s post-World War II record annual decline of 7.9%.

The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn or its duration.  The current downturn signal was generated in December 2009.  The broad economy tends to follow in downturn or intensification roughly six to nine months after the signal, as has appeared to happen in recent months, with what formally should become recognized as a double-dip recession.

September PPI Topped Consensus Expectations.  Seasonally-adjusted inflation at the wholesale and production level rose month-to-month in September at twice the 0.2% expected monthly gain, with a broad pattern of stronger annual inflation. As reported yesterday (October 14th) by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) in September rose by 0.4% (up by 0.3% before seasonal adjustment) month-to-month, following August’s gain of 0.4% (down by 0.1% unadjusted).  Unadjusted and year-to-year, August’s annual PPI inflation was 4.0%, on the upswing versus the annual inflation rate of 3.1% reported for August.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted September intermediate goods rose by 0.5% (up by 0.3% in August), with September crude goods declining by 0.5% (up by 2.3% in August).  Year-to-year inflation in September intermediate goods was up by 5.6% (a 5.0% gain August), with September annual inflation in crude goods up by 20.3% (up by 18.3% in August).

Including Seasonal Adjustment Distortions, Reported Retail Sales Gain and Revisions Boosted Third-Quarter.  As published on a seasonally-adjusted basis, before inflation adjustment, the reported 0.6% monthly retail sales gain in September was statistically indistinguishable from no growth.  Yet, that gain and an upside revision to August’s reporting were enough to push the relative quarter-to-quarter change in real (inflation adjusted) sales from what had been shaping up as a quarter-to-quarter contraction, to a small gain, albeit much weaker than the quarterly growth reflected in the second-quarter’s current reporting of real retail sales.

At work in the September reporting likely were severe seasonal factor distortions based on the unusual trading patterns of 2009, particularly including impact from last year’s "cash for clunkers" program.  Net of seasonal-factor adjustments, September 2010 retail sales declined by 4.7% for the month.

Nominal Retail SalesToday’s (October 15th) September 2010 retail sales report — issued by the Census Bureau — indicated a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.62% (up 1.09% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 0.71% (initially 0.42%) increase in August.

On a year-to-year basis, September 2010 retail sales were reported up by 7.34% from September 2009, versus a revised annual August gain of 4.07% (previously 3.64%).  Annual changes, again,  have been gyrating monthly due to year-ago comparisons ranging from a severe trough in activity to last year’s cash-for-clunkers stimulus effects, while at the same time the Census Bureau has continued to play games with the monthly seasonal factors and revisions to year-ago data.

Real Retail Sales.  Based on the September 2010 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly September retail sales increased by 0.52%, where before inflation adjustment the current number was up by 0.62%, versus a revised real monthly gain of 0.45% (was 0.16%) in August.

September real retail sales rose at a year-to-year pace of 5.97%, versus the upwardly revised 2.95% (previously 2.47%) annual gain reported for August.

On a quarter-to-quarter basis, real retail sales in second-quarter 2010 expanded at a 5.3% annualized pace, down from annualized growth of 6.6% in the first-quarter.  Adjusted for inflation, seasonally-adjusted monthly retail sales in the third-quarter grew at an annualized pace of 0.9% (up a straight 0.23% quarter-to-quarter not annualized).  The third-quarter’s quarterly pace just as easily could have been a contraction, allowing for confidence intervals and seasonal-factor issues.

Since November 2008, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $162.9 billion (the deflated September number was $168.4 billion).  The first graph below reflects the relatively volatile monthly levels of real retail sales, as reported.

Smoothed for the monthly volatility on a six-month moving-average basis, as shown in the second graph, the pattern of activity here has been one of bottom-bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales.  The recent bounce from short-lived stimulus factors and warped-seasonals appears largely to have run its course, with the average close to rolling over, and with lower real sales levels still likely in the months ahead.  There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity — no recovery — just general bottom-bouncing.

Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, "core" retail sales — consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation — are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: September versus August 2010 seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — gained by 0.7% versus the official aggregate gain of 0.6%.

Version II: September versus August 2010 seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gas stations — increased by 0.5% versus the aggregate gain of 0.6%.

August Trade Deficit Had Negative Implications for Third-Quarter GDP Growth.  Widening well beyond consensus expectations, the August trade deficit — the last reporting before the "advance" estimate of third-quarter GDP on October 29th — was bad enough to reduce the upcoming estimate by roughly 0.5% annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth from what it would have been otherwise (see below).

Nominal (Not Adjusted for Inflation) Trade Deficit.  For August 2010, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported yesterday (October 14th) that the nominal seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services widened to $46.3 billion, versus a revised $42.6 (previously $42.8) billion in July, and widened sharply from the $31.1 billion monthly deficit of August 2009.

Against July 2010, the August trade balance showed a small gain in exports but a larger gain in imports.  The higher imports were not heavily influenced by oil.  Unadjusted oil imports reflected lower physical volume but higher oil prices.  Specifically, for the month of August 2010, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $73.47 per barrel, versus $72.09 in July 2010 and $64.78 in August 2009.  In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, August 2010 volume averaged 9.900 million barrels per day, versus 10.056 million in July 2010 and 8.673 million in August 2009.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit.  A widening trade deficit directly reduces GDP growth and vice versa.  As reported by the BEA, adjusted for seasonal factors and inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the second-quarter goods deficit was an annualized of $575.1 billion.  Based on July and August reporting, the annualized third-quarter deficit is running at a pace of $590.9 billion, a quarterly deterioration of about $15 billion, or roughly 0.5% in annualized real GDP growth.

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness is showing up in prior-period revisions.

Industrial Production (September 2010).  Due for release on Monday, October 18th, September industrial production is expected to increase 0.3% for the month, per Briefing.com, following a 0.2% gain in August.  Seasonal factor catch-up and weaker economic activity than viewed by consensus forecasters suggest some downside reporting risks against market expectations.

Residential Construction (September 2010).  Due for release on Tuesday, October 19th, September Housing Starts generally should show further deterioration, although any monthly decline still may lack statistical significance.

__________

No. 328 September Employment and Unemployment,

Friday, October 8th, 2010

COMMENTARY NUMBER 328
September Employment and Unemployment, M3

October 8, 2010

__________

Outright Contraction in September Payrolls
Net of Temporary Census Workers

Current Payroll Level Overstated by Roughly 550,000
Based on Announced Benchmark Revision

Broad Unemployment Rates Soar

September Unemployment Rates:
U.3 at 9.6%, U.6 at 17.1%, SGS at 22.5%

M3 Annual Decline Narrows

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, October 15th, following the release of the September CPI and Retail Sales releases, including analysis of September PPI and August Trade data, as well as a review of the inflation and systemic-liquidity outlooks.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

September Payrolls Suggest Weaker Data Ahead.  On its surface, the September employment report was miserable.  Monthly payrolls showed an outright contraction both before and after consideration of the census-worker layoffs.  With published revisions and the announcement of revisions to come, the report was horrendous, showing the economy to be in renewed contraction, and showing that economic activity has been overstated during the last year and a half.  Consistent with today’s reporting, weaker-than-expected data likely are ahead for other September reporting, such as retail sales, industrial production and housing starts.

As discussed in Special Commentary No. 323, this intensified downturn should lead to extreme stimulus and liquidity actions by the U.S. government and the Federal Reserve.  Fear of same at least partially is driving market activity pushing the U.S. dollar towards historic lows and the price of gold to historic highs.  Though possibly a little early for such, next week’s inflation reporting could begin to offer some upside surprises.  This will be discussed more fully in the next Commentary.

Payroll Survey.  The BLS reported today (October 8th) a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted September 2010 jobs loss of 95,000 (a decline of 110,000 before prior-period revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval).  Net of the included layoffs of 77,000 intermittent and temporary census hires, September payrolls lost a statistically-insignificant 18,000 jobs.  The Wall Street canard of looking just at private employment — without considering regular gains and losses in the government sector — showed a gain in private-sector payrolls of 64,000 for the month, which was swamped by 82,000 regular jobs lost at the government (76,000 lost at the local government level), leaving the total payroll decline at 18,000, net of census distortions. 

Against September’s total jobs loss of 95,000, a jobs loss net of census impact of 18,000, a jobs gain of 64,000 in the private sector, and a jobs loss of 82,000 in the government sector (net of census), August showed a revised monthly total jobs loss of 57,000 (previously a loss of 54,000), a jobs gain net of census impact of 57,000 (previously a gain of 60,000), a jobs gain in the private sector of 97,000 (previously a 67,000 gain), and loss of 36,000 in government, ex-census (previously a 7,000 loss). 

As of the September payroll survey, the number of temporary census workers still facing lay-offs was down to 6,000.  This factor effectively has worked its way out of the employment data, with no likely further major impact in the months ahead.

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; December 2009 is the short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment declined by a seasonally-adjusted 8,363,000 jobs, or 6.1%.  As of September 2010 reporting, net of temporary census hiring, payrolls have gained 0.5% or 613,000 jobs since the December 2009 trough.  That trough, though, will shift into 2010 with the upcoming benchmark revision, discussed below.

In terms of annual change, year-to-year growth in September nonfarm payrolls was 0.25% (0.25% net of surviving census hires), up from August’s revised 0.20% gain (previously a 0.21% gain), and a revised 0.14% (previously 0.15%) annual gain for August net of census effects.   Net of likely benchmark revisions, annual change was a small contraction both before and after census effects.

 

 

 

Thanks to recent, protracted bottom-bouncing in the payroll series (see the benchmark-level graphs that follow), current annual growth has recovered from the post-World War II record 4.96% decline in July 2009.  The July 2009 decline was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II, which reflected a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945.  Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the current annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression, and should deepen further net of the pending benchmark revision. 

The preceding graph of long-term year-to-year payroll change reflects the numbers as reported, with no adjustment for census hiring variations or the pending benchmark revision.  The second graph shows the year-to-year detail both with and without the census hires, but also without benchmark considerations.     

Benchmark Revision — About Minus 550,000 and Counting.  Announced along with today’s payroll release was an early estimate for the 2010 benchmark revision, which indicated the not-seasonally-adjusted March 2010 payrolls were overstated by 366,000.  As the data are re-worked for that estimate, changes will be carried back to the prior revision as of March 2009, as well as carried forward to present reporting.  Such suggests that the overstatement of the level of payrolls as of September 2010 reporting is about 550,000 jobs.  The formal benchmark revision and restated economic history will be published with the January 2011 employment report, due for release on February 4, 2011.

The following two graphs reflect the likely impact of the benchmark.  The second graph, which also has the temporary effects of the census hires removed, shows the benchmarked economy turning lower, following a sharp plunge, bottom bouncing, and short-lived stimulus impact.  It also helps to make the case that the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) was too early, again, in calling the end of a recession, as discussed in Commentary No. 326.

 

 

 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business, on a timely basis (within at least five years, if ever), such information is estimated by the Birth-Death Model.  Unusual birth-death activity continued in September 2010, with the monthly birth-death adjustment adding 11,000 more jobs than it did in September 2009, a pattern that continues to run contrary to the 2009 BLS reporting difficulties that understated declines in payroll employment, and by today’s indications of still further downside benchmark revisions for 2010 data.

Based now on the unsupportable assumption of economic recovery, the bias factors used in the last six months of payroll reporting have been 28.0% ahead of what they were reset to after the most recent and disastrous 2009 benchmark revision.  Positive assumptions — commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling — can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with "stronger" economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates, or underlying assumptions of ongoing economic recovery.

Historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels — to understate employment declines — during recessions.   The unsupportable premise that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business, continues.  So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, presumed additional "surplus" jobs, created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor.  These add-factors are running at about 50,000 per month (seasonally-adjusted), at present.  I still estimate this monthly bias should be negative by 200,000 or so, on average.  Since it is not, the BLS continues regularly to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 250,000 jobs.  Most of that misreporting, however, now will not be corrected until at least the benchmark revision to be published in February 2012.

That said, the unadjusted September 2010 bias was a monthly addition of 11,000 jobs, versus no addition in September 2009, and against a monthly addition of 115,000 jobs in August 2010.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (counting multiple job holders more than once), showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly employment gain of 141,000 in September, following a reported gain of 290,000 in August.  As has been discussed in the last several months of household reporting, the series still appears to be experiencing distortions from inappropriate seasonal-adjustments for temporary census worker employment.   In the payroll survey, the census impact is quantified and properly is not seasonally adjusted.  

Broad Unemployment Measures Surge.  The September 2010 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate eased by a statistically-insignificant 0.06 percentage point to 9.58% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from 9.64% in August.  Not seasonally adjusted, September’s U.3 unemployment rate declined to 9.2% from 9.5% in August. 

Increasing numbers of longer-term unemployed, previously counted in U.3 unemployment, appear to be rolling into the short-term discouraged worker category, with a portion of the short-term discouraged workers rolling into the long-term discouraged worker category.  Also increasing numbers of "employed" can get only part-time work, despite wanting full-time jobs.

September U.6 unemployment soared to a seasonally-adjusted 17.1% (eased to 16.2% unadjusted) versus 16.7% (16.4% unadjusted) in August.

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year.  This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers.  The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding my estimate of the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed and labor force, unemployment — more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — rose in September to about 22.5%, from about 22.0%  in August, the highest reading of the current cycle.  The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting and tends to follow its relative monthly movements.  See the Alternate Data tab for a graph and more detail.

As discussed previously, while 22.5% unemployment might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession.  The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms.  Today, less that 2% work on farms.  Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

Updated Real-M3 Signal for Intensifying Downturn.  As discussed in numerous Commentaries this year (see Commentaries No. 323 and 326, for example), declining year-to-year change in real (inflation-adjusted) M3 signals a pending economic downturn or pending intensification of an existing economic contraction, with contracting broad liquidity invariably constraining broad economic activity.  The signal is generated when real M3 first turns negative year-to-year, which occurred in December 2009 in the current economic cycle.  The signal is not generated by, nor dependent on, either the length or the depth of the M3 downturn.  The downside shift in business activity usually follows within six to nine months, which encompasses the current period.  Due to the NBER’s current business cycle timing, the current downturn will be classified as a double-dip recession. 

The following updated graph plots annual real M3 growth versus periods of recession formally recognized by the NBER.  It includes an approximate annual real contraction in the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate as of September 2010.  The inflation-adjusted September M3 estimate used here is an annual contraction of roughly 5.1% versus a 5.3% contraction in August.    The formal preliminary estimate for the SGS Ongoing M3 Measure for September will be posted this weekend of October 9th on the Alternate Data page for M3.  At present, the nominal annual change in M3 for September is on track for a 3.8% decline, versus a 4.2% drop in August.  Such will be addressed in next Friday’s (October 15th) Commentary on inflation and systemic liquidity.

 

 

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness is showing up in prior-period revisions.

Trade Balance (August 2010).  Due for release on Thursday, October 14th, reporting of the August trade deficit will be the key determinant in how the change in net exports will add to or subtract from the "advance" estimate of third-quarter GDP growth to be released on October 29th.  With July trade reporting relatively neutral versus the second-quarter, a large deterioration in the August deficit would push trade activity into negative territory for reported GDP growth.  Such is my expectation.  A sharply improved monthly number would tend to boost GDP reporting.  

Producer Price Index — PPI (September 2010).  Due for release on Thursday, October 14th, the September PPI has a fair shot of surprising expectations on the upside (0.3% expected per Briefing.com), given the regular volatility of the series, and as suggested by reporting such as the purchasing managers September survey of manufacturers.

Consumer Price Index — CPI (September 2010).  Due for release on Friday, October 15th, the September CPI-U likely will show higher seasonally-adjusted monthly inflation than the consensus 0.2% indicated by Briefing.com, against the 0.3% reported for August.  Although seasonally-unadjusted gasoline prices were down 0.9% in September versus August (Department of Energy), the seasonal adjustments remain positive, and other elements, including food, should see some upside movement.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in the September 2010 CPI-U reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.06% adjusted monthly gain seen in September 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for September 2010, the difference in September’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from August 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.15%.  A consensus report of 0.2% monthly inflation would yield an annual inflation rate of about 1.3%.

Retail Sales (September 2010).  Due for release on Friday, October 15th, September retail sales are expected to increase by 0.3%, after a 0.4% increase in August, per Briefing.com.  Downside revisions to August reporting are a fair bet, with general downside reporting risk likely due to market underestimation of the intensifying economic downturn.  Importantly, the monthly data likely will be in contraction, net of inflation, the same way the GDP levels of activity is viewed (that is net of inflation effects).

 

__________

No. 327: Second-Quarter GDP Revision, September Employment Outlook

Thursday, September 30th, 2010

COMMENTARY NUMBER 327
Second-Quarter GDP Revision, September Employment Outlook

 

September 30, 2010

__________

2nd-Quarter GDP at 1.7%, GDI at 1.3%

Census Jobs Reduce September Payrolls by Roughly 78,000

New Online Help-Wanted Advertising Drops 2.6%

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, October 8th, following the release of the September payroll and unemployment data.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

September Reporting Should Show Marked Business Deterioration.  In an otherwise statistically quiet week, the third-estimate of second-quarter GDP was just statistical noise in a generally worthless and heavily politicized series.  Nonetheless, as noted in the prior Commentary No. 326, risk continues to mount for reporting of a quarterly contraction in third-quarter GDP, particularly, if the monthly economic reporting for September turns sharply lower, which is my expectation. 

The first big report is on September labor market conditions, due on October 8th.  Not only should the data show deterioration in employment — net of revisions and temporary census hires — and a good boost in at least the broader unemployment measures, but also a indication of pending downside revisions to 2010 payroll data, with an initial 2011 benchmark revision estimate (see Week Ahead).  A general update to economic condition will be included in next Friday’s Commentary on the labor numbers.  The broad, general outlook remains unchanged (see Special Commentary No. 323).

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

GDP Revision Little More Than Statistical Noise — Except for GDI.  The second revision to second-quarter 2010 GDP had annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth notching higher to 1.7%.  Nearly half of the quarter’s growth still was in inventory (growth in final sales — GDP net of inventory changes — was 0.9%), which will help set up a possible contraction for third-quarter GDP, as production is cut back to help work off excess inventories in an general environment of softening to negative consumption.

Showing perhaps a little more honest, less politicized picture of what is happening in the national income data related to the GDP, the GDP’s income-side equivalent, GDI, had its initial second-quarter annualized real growth rate shrink from 2.3% to 1.3%, in revision.

GDP.  Published today (September 30th) by the BEA, the second revision, or third estimate, of second-quarter 2010 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) was a statistically-insignificant annualized real growth rate of 1.72% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), up from the second estimate of 1.61%, but down from the "advance" estimate of 2.39%, and down from the estimated growth rate of 3.73% in the first-quarter.  The year-to-year change in real second-quarter GDP revised to 3.00% from the first revision of 2.98%, and from initial reporting of 3.17%.  Such was higher than the year-to-year 2.39% growth estimated for the first-quarter.

The GDP implicit price deflator — inflation measure — showed an unrevised annualized pace of inflation in second-quarter 2010 of 1.96% versus initial reporting of 1.83%, which was up from 1.05% in the first-quarter.  In an unusual divergence, annualized inflation for the CPI-U in the second-quarter was a contraction of 0.72% versus a positive 1.53% in the first-quarter.  The higher the inflation rate used in deflating the GDP, the weaker is the inflation-adjusted number and vice versa.  In this case, lower prices for imported oil spiked the implicit price deflator, because imports are subtracted from the GDP, which reverses the impact of the oil price changes in the aggregate number.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for second-quarter 2010 remained an approximate annual contraction of 1.3% versus the official estimate of a 3.0% gain, less-negative than the annual 1.5% contraction (2.4% official gain) estimated in the first-quarter (see the Alternate Data tab).  While annualized real quarterly growth is not formally estimated on an alternative basis, a flat-to-minus quarter-to-quarter gain likely would have been realistic for the second-quarter.  The relative upturn in annual change reflects the bottom-bouncing at low levels of activity seen for much of the last year in key underlying economic series, not an economic recovery.  As discussed in Commentary No. 326, an intensified downturn, now in the form of a double-dip recession, continues to unfold.

GNP and GDI (see Notes on GDP-Related Nomenclature and Definitions Sidebar).  Second estimates of Gross National Product (GNP) and Gross Domestic Income (GDI) for second-quarter 2010 GDP also were published with today’s release.

The first revision to annualized second-quarter 2010 real GNP growth notched growth higher to 1.81% from initial reporting of 1.65%.  The second-quarter growth rate was down from 4.41% in the first-quarter.  Year-to-year change in the second-quarter was reported at a revised 3.43% (previously 3.39%), up from 2.84% in the first-quarter.

The first revision to annualized second-quarter 2010 real GDI growth was estimated at 1.30%, down sharply from the initial 2.31% estimate, and down from 4.11% in the first-quarter.  Year-to-year growth in the second-quarter was revised to 2.99% (previously 3.25%), and up from 2.24% in the first-quarter.

The following graph shows the annual percent change in quarterly GDP for the history of the series. The record annual contraction for the series was 4.11%, seen in last year’s (2009’s) second-quarter.

 

 

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness is showing up in prior-period revisions.

Employment and Unemployment (September 2010).  Due for release on Friday, October 8th, reporting of both the September payroll employment change and unemployment rate likely will disappoint market expectations.  Further, the preliminary estimate of the benchmark revision as of March 2010 will be published, and odds favor a meaningful downside revision.

The Census Bureau reported yesterday (September 29th) that its temporary and intermittent hires for the 2010 census were reduced by roughly 78,000 in September, based on the payroll-survey weeks, with only 6,000 census hires left to be discharged.  Where Briefing.com shows a consensus estimate of a 15,000 decline in September payroll employment, versus a 54,000 decline in August, such suggests that the consensus is looking for a gain in payrolls — net of temporary census hiring — of about 63,000.

The "public sector" employment estimates are not the same thing as payrolls ex-census workers, since regular changes in federal, state and local employment are excluded from the public sector count.  At the state and local level, government employment trends have been negative.

I expect the September ex-census number to show outright contraction (at least net of prior-period revisions), and for the headline U.3 unemployment number to rise above the consensus (Briefing.com) 9.7%, versus 9.6% in August.

Importantly, though, these expectations are against an environment where statistical significance at the 95% level is +/- 129,000 for the monthly payroll change, and +/- 0.2% in the monthly headline unemployment rate change.  On that basis, my estimates are within the scope of consensus estimates, but the markets ignore the relative meaninglessness of the initial reporting.

The outlook for the labor report will be updated next week, as needed, if detail from related series alters the outlook.  The Conference Board’s August help-wanted advertising index (newspapers), which leads September employment reporting, was reported, again, at 10 — unchanged for a number of months — and one point above its historic low.  The Conference Board’s help-wanted advertising index (online) for September, however, rose by 1.4% for the month for total ads, but it fell by 2.6% for new ads, reversing a rising trend.  I view the "new ads" series here to be the more significant one.

 

__________

No. 326: Double-Dip, Housing, Durable Goods

Sunday, September 26th, 2010

COMMENTARY NUMBER 326
Double-Dip, Housing, Durable Goods

 

September 26, 2010

__________

Officially It Will Be a Double-Dip Recession

Third-Quarter Contraction Suggested by
Housing and Durable Goods Orders Data

Stock Market Hypesters Grasping at Straws

Gold Strength and Dollar Weakness
Signal Problems Ahead

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Thursday, September 30th, following the release of the third estimate (second-revision) of second-quarter GDP.
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

What’s in a Name?  NBER Declares Recession Ended in June 2009. Speaking to her beloved Romeo, Juliet declares, "What’s in a name?  That which we call a rose, by any other name would smell as sweet." There is a corollary here involving economic contractions, recessions, double-dips and recoveries, but the final descriptive would involve something other than a sweet fragrance. 

On September 20th, the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) — official arbiter of the timing of the U.S. business cycle — declared the December 2007 recession to have ended in June 2009.  Officially, the economy has been in recovery ever since.  The official call of the recession’s end does not in any way alter the economic outlook, either as to existing underlying business activity or as to the course of likely future economic activity; only the nomenclature that will be used in describing current activity has been changed.  The re-intensifying economic downturn — already underway — simply will be called the second-dip of a double-dip recession, at such time as the NBER gets around to recognizing the "new" contraction in economic activity.

Once again, the NBER has been too early in timing the end of a recession (in recent cycles and the current cycle, the NBER also has tended to time the onset of recessions too late).  Nonetheless, from the official December 2007 peak, when seasonally-adjusted nonfarm payrolls began a long series of month-to-month contractions, through the now-official June 2009 trough, with monthly payrolls still tumbling, the 18- month official recession was the longest since the first down-leg of the Great Depression (43 months, August 1929 to March 1933), eclipsing the second down-leg of the Great Depression (13 months, May 1937 to June 1938).

Happy days once again are upon us, per the NBER.  With less than two months until the mid-term election, official recovery and economic good times purportedly have been in place now for 15 months.  Yet, today’s ongoing "recovery" is not evident in most economic data, and, like the mid-Great Depression recovery, most people will not recognize the "good times."  Main Street U.S.A. usually has a pretty good sense of what is happening in the real world, and the pain of today’s pocketbook issues still we be felt heavily at the polls, irrespective of any happy announcements or heavy political hype to the contrary.

In this last week’s economic reporting of August housing starts, new and existing home sales, and new orders for durable goods, every series was reported with a pattern of monthly activity suggestive of a quarterly contraction for the current quarter: third-quarter 2010.  Based on the average of July and August 2010 reporting, versus the average monthly level reported for second-quarter 2010, the annualized rates of quarterly-to-quarter contraction in place at the moment for these series are: housing starts down by 19.9%, new home sales down by 46.0%, existing home sales down by 73.8%, new orders for durable goods down by 1.2%.  The rates here are annualized, the same way the GDP is, at an effective compounded annual rate of change.  Keep in mind that the home sales contractions were exacerbated by the expiration of tax credit incentives, and the durable goods contraction is before adjustment for inflation.  These numbers are on top of the prior week’s data, which suggested a quarterly contraction in inflation-adjusted retail sales and slowing quarterly growth in industrial production (see Commentary No. 325).

The NBER usually attempts to wait long enough on its timing calls of peaks and troughs in business activity so that they do not get revised.  The NBER also does not necessarily wait until a "recovery" regains the prior peak in activity to make its call.  That considered, the heavily relied-on nonfarm payroll series likely faces major, near-term downside revisions, with the next benchmark revision’s order-of-magnitude be announced with the October 8th release of September’s payroll and unemployment data.

Further, a key factor in determining the end-of-recession timing call was recent GDP reporting.  That seems nonsensical, given the extreme short-term unreliability of and regular massive revisions in that series.  Such factors lend weight to speculation of political considerations in the timing of this call. 

 

 

  

The preceding graphs are updated from Special Commentary No. 323, revised only in terms of the shaded official recession areas.  The first graph shows official recession timing in dark blue, with my estimate of recession timing in light blue, plotted versus the levels of monthly payroll employment.  Note that both the 2001 and 2007 recessions began coincident with regular contractions in monthly payrolls, yet both ended well before the bottoming in payrolls, which is a key benchmark.  The concept of payrolls as lagging a lagging indicator was a creation largely of Wall Street hypesters, based on the much-too-early call of the 2001 recession.  As to current payrolls, beyond the pending likely major downside revisions to last year’s history, the recent up- and down-ticks in the graph reflect the hiring and firing of temporary census workers.

The second graph shows the relationship between the year-to-year change in real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply M3 (SGS-Ongoing Measure).  Whenever annual growth has turned negative, a recession (or an intensified recession) always has followed, usually within six-to-nine months. 

The signal for an economic downturn is independent of the depth or the duration of the annual contraction in real M3.  A number of contractions have taken place without the M3 signal.  M3 rising to the upside does not necessarily signal and economic upturn.  Yet, every time annual growth in real broad liquidity turns negative, the economy follows.

Real M3 generated a signal in December 2009 for a downturn.  Due to the new NBER timing call, the M3 signaled now has signaled a new recession within six-to-nine months, around the current time frame.  The difference here, again, is semantics and not of substance.

With the economy turning down again, following a protracted period of bottom-bouncing and a short-lived stimulus bounce being interpreted as "recovery," the current weakness eventually will gain official recognition as the second down-leg of a double-dip recession.  Eventually, that likely will be timed to have started before September 2010, before last week’s announcement of the prior recession’s end.

Gold and Dollar Signal ProblemsBeyond the games being played with semantics by economist- politicians, the continued rally in precious metal prices and renewed weakness in the U.S. dollar appear to be signaling growing global concern of the implications of an actual re-intensification of the downturn in U.S. economic activity.  Particularly destabilizing to the markets are fears of the likely responses of the Federal Reserve and the federal government to forestall systemic collapse through significant debasement of the U.S. dollar, as discussed in Special Commentary No. 323

The current circumstances are of a nature that could trigger further central bank activity — overt or covert — in terms of slamming the price of gold or attempting to prop the value of the U.S. dollar with short-lived actions ranging from direct intervention in the markets to jawboning.  As dollar-defensive efforts get more serious, such will signal an intensification of dollar-dumping desires by holders of the U.S. currency, and the rapid nearing of the ultimate crisis-of-confidence in the dollar.  The broad outlook for the economy, for the financial markets and for systemic stability is unchanged.

August Housing Starts Still Suggest Third-Quarter Contraction.  The Census Bureau reported a statistically-insignificant monthly gain for August 2010 housing starts, on September 21st.  The monthly data had the average July and August seasonally-adjusted monthly level lower than the monthly average for the second-quarter, consistent with a 19.9% annualized quarterly contraction, third-quarter versus second quarter.

As reported, August housing starts rose by a statistically-insignificant 10.5% (up by 9.5% before prior-period revisions) +/- 13.9% (95% confidence interval).  July’s starts were revised to a 0.4% (previously 1.7%) monthly gain.  Activity has started to slow anew, although the pattern of housing starts generally remains one of bottom-bouncing at an historically low-level plateau of activity, as seen over the last 21 months.  Much weaker monthly numbers remain likely in the months ahead.

Year-to-year change in August starts was a statistically-insignificant gain of 2.2% +/-11.3% (95% confidence interval), following a downwardly revised annual decline of 7.8% (previously 7.0%) in July.

Since December 2008, as noted, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing at an historically low level, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 571,800.  In the past 21 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, including August 2010’s reading of 598,000. 

 

 

The "recovery" in housing is shown in these graphs.  The graph above reflects the level of monthly activity in terms of the annualized monthly rate of housing starts, which is randomly volatile and subject to large revisions on a monthly basis.  The second graph shows the six-month moving average, which tends to smooth out that monthly volatility.

 

 

Home Sales Distorted by Increasing Number of Foreclosures.  Even allowing for the exacerbated drop-off in home sales activity post-tax break incentives (see quarterly decline rates in the opening economic comments), the residential sales environment is abysmal at the moment, both from an anecdotal standpoint and as shown in industry reporting.  Hit by consumer confidence and liquidity woes, home sales hold no near-term prospects of helping to boost broad economic activity; rather they likely will continue sapping strength from broad business activity, further impairing residential construction and new orders for durable goods, which benefit from home sales activity in more-positive times.

Friday’s (September 24th) reporting of August new home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) were unchanged (up 4.3% before prior-period revisions) +/- 19.5% (95% confidence interval) from July.  The 0.0% change in August was statistically indistinguishable from nearly a 20% plunge or 20% jump.  Such followed a revised decline of 7.7% in July (previously a 12.4% drop).  The year-to-year decline in the new home sales series in August 2010 narrowed to 28.9% from a revised 29.4% (previously 32.4%) decline in July.

Thursday’s (September 23rd) release of August existing home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) showed a little rebound in activity from July, but basically still at historically-low levels.

August sales gained 7.6% (7.8% before prior-period revisions), following a revised 27.0% (previously 27.2%) decline in July.  On a year-to-year basis, sales were down by 29.0% in August versus a revised 25.3% (previously 25.5%) annual contraction in July.

Foreclosure activity remains a major distorting factor for home sales, with "distressed" activity accounting for 34% of existing sales in August, up from 32% in June and July.  With other reporting showing foreclosures on the rise, and with forced or distressed sales not likely to soften in proportionate tandem with regular sales, one might expect that foreclosure levels will continue rise in the months ahead, at least as a portion of monthly sales.  Separately, the Census Bureau acknowledges that a portion of new home sales also is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimates as to the scope of the issue.  Some in the construction trade have difficulty competing with the pricing of foreclosed properties.  Until the foreclosure problems get worked out in the system, monthly changes in these home sales numbers cannot be taken as meaningful positive indicators (when the numbers are positive) of underlying activity in homeowner real estate, as it relates to general economic activity. 

The following updated graphs reflect different measures of home sales activity since February 2009.  The numbers, through August 2010, reflect the seasonally-adjusted level of monthly sales, rather than the annual rates usually published by the industry.

 

 

 

 

New Orders for Durable Goods Suggest Quarterly Contraction.  Friday’s stock market hype partially was centered on reports of surging capital goods orders.  When the market hypesters beginning pick at scattered straws of "good" news, the broad business environment likely is not good.  Keep in mind that the durable goods series and its components are highly volatile and often randomly so, month-to-month.  In July, capital orders were boosted by the success of Boeing’s salespeople in booking significant business.  With airplane orders down in August, the hypesters viewed capital goods net of aircraft in order to come up with a monthly gain of 4.1% in capital goods orders.  While that is good news in its limited scope, that gain was shy of offsetting July’s 5.3% decline in the same capital goods category, net of aircraft.

The Census Bureau reported Friday (September 24th) that the regularly volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods fell by 1.3% (down by 1.0% before prior-period revisions) month-to-month in August 2010, after a revised 0.7% (previously 0.3%) decline in July.  Unadjusted, year-to-year change in August new orders was a gain of 12.1%, up from a revised 9.1% (previously 8.6%) annual increase reported for July.

While recent benchmark revisions appear to have built-in something of an upside sampling bias to the monthly numbers, the three most recent reports have shown flat-to-negative pressures on total new orders before consideration of the effects of inflation, which would make data appear weaker.  As discussed in the opening economic comments, third-quarter 2010 new orders for durable goods are on track for an annualized quarterly contraction of 1.2% versus the second-quarter. 

Widely followed nondefense capital goods declined by 0.9% (up 1.2% net of revisions), seasonally-adjusted, for the month in August, after a revised 0.7% (previously 2.8%) decline in July.  For August, the unadjusted year-to-year change in the series was 22.6%, versus a revised 12.3% (previously 9.7%) gain in July.

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of an intensifying double-dip recession and more-serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness is showing up in prior-period revisions.

Gross Domestic Product — GDP (Second-Quarter 2010 — Third Estimate).  Due for release on Thursday, September 30th, the second revision to second-quarter GDP is expected to be nil (Briefing.com), with annualized real quarterly growth holding at 1.6%.  While nothing more than statistical noise is likely at this point, the last trade data would allow for a minor downward revision to reported growth.

 

__________

No. 325 CPI, PPI, Production, Household Income

Friday, September 17th, 2010

COMMENTARY NUMBER 325
CPI, PPI, Production, Household Income

 

September 17, 2010

__________

August Annual Consumer Inflation:  1.1% (CPI-U), 8.5% (SGS)

Production Down Except for Boost from Prior-Period Revisions

Households Face Mounting Financial Stress

Income Variance at Record High

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, September 24th (posting may be on the 25th, depending on timing of planned travel), following the release of August new orders for durable goods and including the week’s various August housing data, from starts to new and existing home sales.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

U.S. Economy Continues to Falter as Investor Concerns Mount as to Soundness of U.S. Dollar.  Relative economic, political and fiscal strength and stability are key supports for any currency, and the U.S. dollar increasingly is in trouble.  The latest numbers show faltering economic activity and mounting criticism of the sitting government (weak presidential approval ratings often lead dollar weakness). Presumptions of ongoing economic "recovery" are vanishing, and fears are increasing as to what the federal government and the Federal Reserve will have to do in order to maintain systemic stability.  While actions taken may provide short-lived relative stability, the cost of same will be an extreme inflation problem.  The broad outlook remains as outlined in Commentary No. 323.

Although possibly independent of Fed Policy, money supply M2 — the broadest money measure now formally tracked by the Fed — has begun rising regularly (seasonally-adjusted) on a weekly basis since the 4th of July, at an annualized pace of 7.8%.  The impact on M3 has been positive but muted, with year-to-year M3 change down 4.3% as of August.  Going forward, the Fed will have no choice but to liquefy the system massively, as the federal government will have no choice but to spend well beyond its means in supporting the political, social and financial infrastructure threatened by ongoing economic collapse. 

Selling pressure against the U.S. dollar, with a resulting dollar-supportive intervention by the Bank of Japan, and rallying gold and silver prices all suggest a shift in sentiment against the U.S. currency that has started to pick up momentum.  A long-term debasement of the U.S. dollar remains inevitable, despite any near-term market volatility (possibly extreme) in the currencies and precious metals that could be triggered and/or encouraged by central banks.

 

As suggested by the graphs, the gold market continues to look beyond short-term volatility in the financial markets and consensus hype, with the upside distortions in the U.S. dollar’s exchange rate beginning to reverse.  The downside distortions to oil prices are likely to begin reversing, too, in tandem with any significant new weakness seen in the U.S. dollar.

 

Fantasy Inflation Data Help Census Bureau to Obfuscate Ugly Income Story.  The U.S. Census Bureau published Income, Poverty, and Health Insurance Coverage in the United States: 2009 (Poverty Report), yesterday, September 16th.  The value of this report is in its estimates of household income and income variance, not in its poverty estimates.  Annual poverty reporting per se is not too meaningful, where the structure of the reporting is highly subjective.  Measuring "poverty" is difficult, at best, when few can agree on a definition.  There are many who do not consider themselves to be poor, even though they meet the government’s standards, while others think they are poor but are not so defined.  Separately the whole process has been heavily influenced by politics, with even some short-term efforts at impacting the numbers.  For example, the survey’s inner-city sampling size was reduced (with Congressional oversight) during the Clinton Administration, and re-expanded at the end of the Clinton era. 

The actual survey usually is piggy-backed on the March household unemployment survey of the year following the reported data.  So the March 2010 survey of 2009 data is what was published yesterday. The household income data from the 2008 Poverty Report were used in last year’s SGS Consumer Liquidity Special Report.  What follows is brief update of the numbers and related text in the Special Report. The full report will be updated eventually, but the story told last year has not changed.

Rising Income Dispersion Usually Foreshadows Economic and Financial Market Turmoil.  Measures of income dispersion, or variance, indicate how income is distributed within a population.  A low level of income dispersion indicates that income tends to be concentrated in the middle, while a high level of dispersion indicates heavier income concentrations in the extremes of low and high income, with less in the middle.  The higher the deviation of income is as shown in the graph, the greater is the income dispersion.

Generally, the more moderate the income variance is, the stronger the middle class is, and the healthier the economy will be.  Conversely, the greater the variance in income is, the more negative are the longer term economic implications.  A person earning $100,000,000 per year is not going to buy proportionately more automobiles that someone earning $100,000 per year.  

Conditions surrounding extremes in income variance usually help to fuel financial-market bubbles, followed by financial panics and economic depressions.  The sequence of those factors tends to redistribute income in a manner that usually lowers income variance.   Other than for a brief dip following the 1987 stock-market crash, however, U.S. income variance since 1987 has been higher than has been estimated for the economy going into the 1929 stock-market crash and the Great Depression, and its current reading remains nearly double that of any other "advanced" economy.

Shown in the preceding graph are the Gini Index of Income Inequality and the Mean Logarithmic Deviation of Income (MLD), two of the more popular income dispersion series.  Some of the finer points and mathematics behind several of the income variance measures are covered in the Census Bureau’s article: The Changing Shape of the Nation’s Income Distribution.

The increase of income dispersion in 2009 (to a record high for the MLD), despite the ongoing economic and systemic liquidity crises, suggests that the greatest negative impact of the systemic turmoil, so far, has been on those in the middle-income area.  It also is suggestive of even greater financial crises still ahead.

Income Fell in 2009; Real Household Income Never Has Recovered Its Pre-2001 Recession Peak.  Consumer liquidity remained in contraction during 2009, with both household income and consumer credit (a later topic) both tumbling in nominal and real terms (not adjusted and adjusted for inflation). 

The next two sets of graphs show inflation-adjusted median and mean levels of household income from 1967 through 2009.  The median measure is the middle measure of the survey and likely is a better reflection of how most households are doing.  When the income dispersion measure is high, the mean, or average, measure tends to be skewed (in this case to the upside).  Nonetheless, both measures showed sharp declines in 2009, on both nominal and real bases.  On a real basis, neither series has topped the annual high levels seen before the 2001 recession, with real median and mean household incomes hitting their respective tops in 1999 and 2000.  On a real basis using the CPI-U, median household income in 2009 was below its peak going into the 1973 to 1975 recession.

Please note in the second of each graph series, that both median and mean income are shown with household income deflated using two Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) inflation measures, the CPI-U and the CPI-U-RS.  By using the CPI-U-RS, an "experimental" series, the Census Bureau is able to reduce historical inflation levels in its official reporting, with the result of showing a stronger inflation-adjusted pattern of income change (red line), than what usually would be the official weaker picture (blue line) based on the traditional CPI-U reporting.

The CPI-U (All Urban Consumers) is the headline consumer inflation number published by the BLS and the one most commonly used in deflating consumer-related dollars.  The Census Bureau appears to have used the CPI-U in its data up until 2003.

The CPI-U-RS (Current Methods) is a special version of the CPI-U with its history restated so as to reduce earlier-year inflation by imputing what it would have been using today’s "advanced" CPI reporting methodologies.  The CPI-U-RS is the index used by the Census Bureau in deflating income numbers in the Poverty Report since 2003.  It also is the series reverse-engineered by ShadowStats.com for constructing the SGS Alternate CPI estimates.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

No Increase in Social Security COLA Likely, Again, Despite Higher Inflation.  Although annual inflation in the CPI-W has averaged around 1.5% for July and August (two of the three months used in the annual cost-of-living-adjustment for Social Security payments) there likely will be no adjustment this year, shy of an act of Congress.  The problem is that last year’s CPI-W was lower in third-quarter 2009 than it was in third-quarter 2008.  Although the inflation was negative, the COLA was unchanged — not reduced — and the COLA will not kick in again until the base period once more exceeds third-quarter 2008.  As best I can figure it, the CPI-W would have to jump about 2%, seasonally-adjusted, from August to September, just to get the CPI-W measure to par, and such a monthly change is not likely at present.  Nonetheless, August CPI reporting was a little stronger than consensus.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported Friday (September 17th) that the seasonally-adjusted August CPI-U rose by 0.25% (up by a statistically-significant 0.14%, unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval, not seasonally adjusted) for the month, after a 0.31% gain (up 0.02% unadjusted) in July.  Seasonally-adjusted, the CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended August 2010 (August versus May) was 1.72%, against July’s virtually flat gain of 0.03%.  As the three-month spread crossed the changeover in monthly seasonal-adjustment impact on gasoline prices, unadjusted, the CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended August 2010 was 0.25%, against July’s flat reading.

Unadjusted, August’s year-to-year inflation was 1.15% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) against a 1.24% annual increase in July.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s September 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.06% adjusted monthly gain seen in September 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for September 2010, the difference in September’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from August 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.15%.

CPI-W.  The narrower, seasonally-adjusted August CPI-W rose by 0.35% (up 0.14% unadjusted) for the month, following a gain of 0.37% (0.03% unadjusted) in July.  Seasonally-adjusted, the annualized rate of CPI-W inflation for the three months ended August 2010 (August versus May) was a gain of 2.15%, versus a contraction of 0.37% in July.  Unadjusted, the CPI-W annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended August 2010 was a gain of 0.15%, against a July loss of 0.11%.

Unadjusted year-to-year CPI-W inflation rose by 1.44% in August, versus a 1.60% July increase.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — is reported only on an unadjusted basis.  Unadjusted, the C-CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended August 2010 (August versus May) was a 0.31% contraction, against July’s 0.54% contraction.  Year-to-year, or annual inflation, was plus 0.90% in August 2010, versus a 1.02% gain in July.

Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 4.5% in August 2010, the same level as in July, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was about 8.5% (8.50% for those using the extra digit) in August, versus 8.6% in July.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated).  Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept.  Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation.  Despite today’s (September 17th) historic high gold price of $1,274.00 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix), gold and silver prices have yet to approach their historic high levels, adjusted for inflation.  The earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 would be $2,385 per troy ounce, based on August 2010 CPI-U-adjusted dollars, and would be $7,758 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (all series not seasonally adjusted). 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org) has not been hit since, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars.  Based on August 2010 CPI-U inflation, the 1980 silver price peak would be $139 per troy ounce and would be $451 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (again, all series not seasonally adjusted).

As shown on page 22 in the Hyperinflation report, over the decades, the price of gold has compensated for more than the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI-U inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the U.S. dollar based on the SGS-Alternate CPI.

Real Money Supply M3.  The signal of the still unfolding intensification of the economic downturn, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), most recently was discussed and graphed in Commentary No. 323.  The real contraction in August M3 (SGS-Ongoing) estimated for that Commentary was 5.5%.  Based on today’s CPI-U report and final estimate on the August SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate, that annual contraction was 5.4%, narrower than July’s 6.6% contraction, and May’s post-World War II record annual decline of 7.9%.

The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn or its duration.  The current downturn signal was generated in December 2009.  The broad economy tends to follow in downturn or intensification roughly six to nine months after the signal.

Real Retail Sales.  Based on August 2010 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly August retail sales increased by 0.16%, where before inflation adjustment the current number was up by 0.42%, versus a revised real monthly 0.03% contraction (was a gain of 0.10%) in July.  Despite the small monthly real gain in August retail sales — other than July’s weakened reporting — the August level of activity was the lowest since March 2010.

August real retail sales rose at a softer year-to-year pace of 2.47%, versus the downwardly revised 4.07% (was 4.15%) annual gain initially reported for July.

On a quarter-to-quarter basis, real retail sales in second-quarter 2010 expanded at a 5.3% annualized pace, down from annualized growth of 6.6% in the first-quarter.  Adjusted for inflation, seasonally-adjusted monthly retail sales in July and August were down at annualized pace of 1.1% versus the second-quarter, increasing the odds of a quarterly contraction in third-quarter retail sales.

Since November 2008, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $162.4 billion (the deflated August number was $166.7 billion).  The first graph below reflects the relatively volatile monthly levels of real retail sales, as reported.

Smoothed for the monthly volatility on a six-month moving-average basis, as shown in the second graph, the pattern of activity here has been one of bottom-bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales.  The recent bounce from short-lived stimulus factors and warped-seasonals appears largely to have run its course, with the average close to rolling over, and with continued lower real sales levels likely in the months ahead.  There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity — no recovery — just general bottom-bouncing.

 

 

 

August PPI Inflation Boosted as Energy Seasonal Factors Reverse.  Seasonally-adjusted inflation at the wholesale and production level also rose month-to-month in August, slightly above expectations, helped by catch-up in seasonal factors that now are spiking monthly energy inflation, instead of suppressing same, as seen in recent months.

As reported yesterday (September 16th) by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) in August rose by 0.4% (down by 0.1% before seasonal adjustment) month-to-month, following July’s gain of 0.2% (up by 0.3% unadjusted).  Unadjusted and year-to-year, August’s annual PPI inflation was 3.1%, somewhat softer than the annual inflation rate of 4.2% reported for July.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted August intermediate goods rose by 0.3% (down by 0.4% in July), with August crude goods rising by 2.3% (up by 2.7% in July).  Year-to-year inflation in August intermediate goods was up by 5.0% (a 6.4% gain July), with August annual inflation in crude goods up by 18.3% (up by 20.5% in July).

Downside Revisions Dominate August Production Reporting.  As was seen in August industrial production and retail sales reporting, weaker economic activity increasingly is being revised into prior-period reporting, with the effect that the current month’s headline number gets a relative boost it would not have had otherwise.  Similar reporting patterns were seen when the current downturn began to deepen seriously but went unrecognized by consensus forecasters.  While this pattern of activity helps the data come in closer to generally overly-optimistic economic consensus estimates, at fault likely are underlying assumptions of ongoing economic "recovery," assumptions that provide an upside bias in initial reporting, with some correction in near-term revisions.  Specifically, with headline August production growth of 0.2% for the month, it was a contraction of 0.2% before the revisions to July and earlier.  In like manner, August’s headline retail sales gain of 0.4% was 0.3% before revisions to July and earlier.  These patterns likely will become increasingly common in the months ahead.

The Federal Reserve Board reported Wednesday (August 15th) that seasonally-adjusted August 2010 industrial production rose by 0.16% (down by 0.21% before revisions to July’s initial reporting), versus a downwardly revised monthly gain of 0.63% (previously a 0.99% increase) for July.

The year-to-year change in August production eased back to 6.21% from July’s downwardly revised 7.35% (previously a 7.74% pace).  The relatively high volatility in annual growth is due largely to the pattern of collapsing activity a year ago (a May 2009 trough), followed by cash-for-clunkers boosted production.  The year-to-year contraction of 12.86% seen in May 2009 was the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II. 

The first graph following shows recent monthly detail, with a fair chance that the August number — net of eventual revisions — will mark the turning point of renewed decline in the production series.

The "recovery" in production is shown in the second graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average.  For the last 20 months, the production index has averaged 89.35, around which the series has been fluctuating, with August’s six-month moving average reading at 92.26 versus 93.21 for the single month.  Production activity had leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that effectively wiped out the last eight years of growth in industrial production; the current rally almost reclaimed the pre-2001 recession high (six-month moving average). 

 

 

 

 

Despite the near-term upside gains generated by short-lived stimulus and seasonal-factor distortions, the series likely still is bottom-bouncing and should begin to soften anew, significantly, in the next several months.  The six-month moving-average series remains 9.19% below its December 2007 historic high.

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more-serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness is showing up in prior-period revisions.

Residential Construction (August 2010).  Due for release on Tuesday, September 21st, August housing starts likely will remain extremely weak, with any reported seasonally-adjusted monthly change likely to be statistically insignificant — indistinguishable from no change at the 95% confidence interval.

New and Existing Homes Sales (August 2010).  August existing home sales (National Association of Realtors) are due for release on Thursday, September 23rd, followed by new home sales (Census Bureau) on Friday, September 24th.  As with housing starts, theses volatile series should remain extremely weak, with any monthly change (new homes) again lacking statistical significance.  Briefing.com is showing consensus estimates of gains in both series.  Yet, with extreme volatility, reporting error and revisions in these series, with poor-quality seasonal adjustments, with extremely negative anecdotal evidence, and with massive distortions from what should be increasing foreclosure activity.  Any significant market reaction to these otherwise meaningless numbers likely would be little more than the unthinking response of some heavily addicted numbers junkies.   

New Orders for Durable Goods (August 2010).  Where September’s new orders for durable goods included a one-time spike from airplane orders, odds favor a monthly contraction in aggregate orders for August, due for release on Friday, September 24th.  This somewhat randomly volatile series, however, remains at general risk of surprising consensus forecasts on the downside.

 

__________

No. 324: August Retail Sales

Tuesday, September 14th, 2010

COMMENTARY NUMBER 324
August Retail Sales

 

September 14, 2010

__________

Boosted by Downside Revisions to July Retail Sales,
August’s 0.4% Gain Still Was Not Statistically Meaningful

Net of Higher Food and Gas Prices, "Core" Retail Sales Increased Less Than 0.1%

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, September 17th, following the release of the August CPI, including detail on the August PPI, August industrial production and the 2010 Poverty Report (2009 data).

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Inflation Begins to Move Retail Sales.  As published on a seasonally-adjusted basis, before inflation adjustment, the reported 0.4% monthly retail sales gain in August was statistically indistinguishable from no growth or from an outright contraction.  The reported monthly gain also was enhanced by downward revisions to prior-period retail sales estimates.

Separately, though, the bulk of the reported 0.4% gain was attributable to rising seasonally-adjusted food and energy prices, as reflected in sales at grocery stores and gasoline stations.  The rising food and gasoline costs reflected some catch-up in seasonal factors that have been depressing reported consumer inflation in recent months.  Net of all inflation, August’s real sales likely were flat versus the downwardly revised July estimate.  Net of all seasonal factors, August retail sales contracted by 0.3% for the month.

Real retail sales still appear to be on track for a third-quarter contraction, which would be consistent with a quarterly contraction in third-quarter GDP.

Nominal Retail SalesToday’s (September 14th) August 2010 retail sales report — issued by the Census Bureau — indicated a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.42% (up 0.28% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 0.28% (initially 0.41%) increase in July.

On a year-to-year basis, August 2010 retail sales were reported up by 3.64% from August 2009, versus a revised annual July gain of 5.44% (previously 5.52%).  Annual changes have been gyrating monthly due to year-ago comparisons ranging from a severe trough in activity to last year’s cash-for-clunkers stimulus effects, while at the same time the Census Bureau plays games with the monthly seasonal factors and revisions to year-ago data.

Real Retail Sales.In contrast to the nominal (not-adjusted for inflation) numbers, the real monthly retail sales numbers (net of the effects of rising prices) likely were flat, consistent with a still-developing quarter-to-quarter contraction in the data.  Details will be published in Friday’s (September 17th) Commentary, following the release of August consumer inflation data.

Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, "core" retail sales — consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation — are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: August versus July 2010 seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — gained by 0.1% (0.06% to the next decimal) versus the official aggregate gain of 0.4%.

Version II: August versus July 2010 seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gasoline stations — also increased by 0.1% (0.08% to the next decimal) versus the official aggregate gain of 0.4%.

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more-serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness will be evident in prior-period revisions.

Industrial Production (August 2010).  Due for release on Wednesday, September 15th, August industrial production should be due for partial reporting catch-up, where some recently reported strength was due to irregular auto production patterns (and resulting seasonal adjustment distortions).  Briefing.com shows the consensus expectation for seasonally-adjusted monthly gain to have softened to 0.3% from 0.4% last week, versus an initial 1.0% gain reported for July.  Reporting risk still favors a downside reporting surprise.

Producer Price Index — PPI (August 2010).  Due for release on Thursday, September 16th, the August PPI has a fair shot at topping a consensus estimate of a 0.3% (upped from 0.2% last week) seasonally-adjusted monthly increase (Briefing.com), versus 0.2% in July.  Reversal of seasonal factor biases that depressed adjust PPI reporting earlier this year likely will add upside pressure to this somewhat randomly volatile series.

Consumer Price Index — CPI (August 2010).  Due for release on Friday, September 17th, the August CPI-U and related series also will receive seasonal-factor boosts to gasoline price inflation.  Separately, in August 2009, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) did not include the government’s cash-for-clunker payments as part of auto pricing at the time.  Such artificially knocked off about 0.3% from the CPI-U in August 2009, although it was recovered in later, post-clunker reporting.  Nonetheless, those events may affect the seasonal-adjustment of August 2010 prices.  In combination, the gasoline and auto circumstances offer a good bet for an upside surprise to the 0.2% (upped from 0.1% last week) consensus seasonally-adjusted monthly gain for the CPI-U (Briefing.com).  The August retail sales report also would support a stronger CPI number.  July CPI-U reporting showed a 0.3% increase.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in August 2010’s CPI-U reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.37% adjusted monthly gain seen in August 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for August 2010, the difference in August’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from July 2010’s annual inflation rate of 1.24%.  A consensus result of 0.2% would leave annual CPI-U at about 1.1%.

 

__________

No. 323: Updated Outlook on Economy, Systemic Stability and Financial Markets

Monday, September 13th, 2010

 

SPECIAL COMMENTARY NUMBER 323
Updated Outlook on Economy, Systemic Stability and Financial Markets

 

September 13, 2010

__________

Protracted Economic Downturn Re-Intensifies

Systemic Stability: "Tap-Dancing on a Land Mine"

Risks of U.S. Dollar Instability and Systemic-Salvation Efforts
Pose Severe Inflation Threat

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: This Special Commentary is intended to provide a brief summary and update of the extraordinary economic and systemic conditions that have dominated public, political and central bank concerns of the last three years and that continue to unfold in a manner that promises even greater difficulties ahead.  The general outlook is unchanged. 

The week ahead will see a regular Commentary tomorrow, Tuesday, September 14th, following release of August retail sales data.  A Commentary also will be published on Friday, September 17th, following the release of the August CPI, with detail also on the August PPI and industrial production, as well as the 2010 Poverty Report (2009 data), which is due for release on Thursday, September 16th.

 – Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

SUMMARY OUTLOOK

Systemic Turmoil is Unthinkable, Unacceptable but Unavoidable.  Pardon the use of the Aerosmith lyrics in the opening headers, but the image of tap-dancing on a land mine pretty much describes what the Federal Reserve and the U.S. Government have been doing in order to prevent a systemic collapse in the last couple of years.  Now, as business activity sinks anew, much expanded supportive measures will be needed to maintain short-term systemic stability.  Such official actions, however, in combination with global perceptions of limited U.S. fiscal flexibility, likely will trigger massive flight from the U.S. dollar and force the Federal Reserve into heavy monetization of otherwise unwanted U.S. Treasury debt.  When that land mine explodes — probably within the next six-to-nine months, the onset of a U.S. hyperinflation will be in place, with severe economic, social and political consequences that will follow.  The Hyperinflation Special Report is referenced for broad background.  The general outlook is not changed.

U.S. Economy.  Already the longest and deepest economic contraction of the post-World War II era, the current downturn in the U.S. economy is re-intensifying, with no near-term stability or recovery on the forecast horizon.  After an initial plunge, broad-based business activity bottom-bounced at a low-level plateau for more than year.  Shy of short-lived bumps in activity from stimulus measures, there has been no recovery.  Reflecting an intense real (inflation-adjusted) annual contraction in broad systemic liquidity (SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate), the economy has started to contract anew.  In the popular media, where the hype of a recovery-at-hand readily was accepted, the renewed downturn already is being called a "double-dip," but underlying reality is that of an extremely protracted, deep and ongoing contraction.  If there is a double-dip, it is in the combination of the two major economic downturns of the last decade (see graphs).

Structural problems tied to lack of real consumer income growth — and worsened now by a credit-intensified contraction in consumer liquidity — pushed the economy into recession by early 2007, almost a year before the officially-clocked onset of December 2007.  Such helped to trigger the credit collapse, which exacerbated the unfolding downtown and threatened systemic collapse.  Despite extraordinary efforts to prevent a failure of the banking system, the structural consumer liquidity issues have not been addressed.  Until they are, sustainable growth in U.S. business activity will be lacking.

The current contraction likely will meet my definition of depression (a greater than 10% real decline in peak-to-trough activity).  In response to a likely hyperinflation, the current circumstance would evolve into a great depression (a greater than 25% real decline in peak-to-trough activity).  Ongoing contractions in the world’s largest economy have sharply negative implications for global economic growth, but the hyperinflation risk for the United States likely will not spread to the more-stable major U.S. trading partners.

U.S. Inflation.  Risk remains exceptionally high in the next six-to-nine months for a combination of massive U.S. dollar selling and heavy Federal Reserve monetization of Treasury debt to boost inflation, and to open the early stages of a U.S. hyperinflation.  As discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report, runaway inflation is a virtual certainty by mid-decade.

Defining inflation (deflation) in terms of annual change in the prices of consumer goods and services, consumer prices currently are about as contained as they have been since before the financial crises began to break in 2007, even as measured by the SGS-Alternate CPI measures.  Tied to wild swings in oil and related gasoline prices, the CPI began to pick-up sharply in 2008, as oil prices soared, but prices then retreated to a period of short-lived official deflation in 2009, as oil prices collapsed.  The current "contained" circumstance will not last, and the problem ahead very likely is not going to be deflation, partially because the Fed has indicated that it will act to prevent deflation, and it has the ability to do so.

First, though, again, as point of clarification, I define inflation in terms of changes in consumer prices, not in terms limited purely to changes in money supply growth (annual broad nominal growth is negative), nor in terms of asset inflation or deflation (a stock market crash does not necessarily lead to contracting consumer prices).

A sharp annual contraction in money supply, as seen at present in annual M3 (the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate) legitimately can and has raised fears of deflation.  Federal Reserve Chairman Bernanke has noted (see his 2002 comments in the Hyperinflation Special Report) and effectively confirmed in his recent Jackson Hole, Wyoming speech that a central bank in conjunction with its central government always can debase its currency (create inflation) in order to prevent deflation. 

A central bank indeed can do that, if it so desires.  The quantitative easing undertaken by Japan never was designed to debase the yen.  Similarly, Mr. Bernanke’s quasi-effort at dollar debasement in the trillion-dollar-plus expansion of excess bank reserves was aimed specifically at banking system stability, not at creating inflation, per se.  The deflation fight, though, is at hand and will be discussed further in the Systemic Stability section.

Current projections on the federal budget deficit, U.S. Treasury funding needs, banking industry solvency stress tests, etc. all have been predicated on some form of economic recovery.  There is and will be no recovery for the foreseeable future; and the negative implications of that for U.S. funding needs and for systemic stability should act as eventual triggers for massive dumping of the U.S. dollar.  Those circumstances also should lead to funding difficulties for the U.S. Treasury, putting the Federal Reserve in the position as lender of last resort to the Treasury.  Such lending would be direct monetization of U.S. Treasury debt, which would feed directly into the money supply. 

Actions already taken by the Fed and the U.S. Government in the ongoing crises have pushed major U.S. lenders to the brink of abandoning the U.S. dollar as the world’s reserve currency, and to the brink of dumping dollar-denominated assets.  Keep in mind that a weak U.S. dollar can be extremely inflationary, particularly when dollar-denominated oil prices rise in response to such weakness, as has been seen in the last several years.

Systemic Stability.  Threatened with systemic collapse at the time of the 1987 stock crash, then-Federal Reserve Chairman Alan Greenspan began serious efforts to forestall an eventual day-of-reckoning for the economy and financial system, through encouraging massive debt expansion, with leverage built upon leverage.  As the economy faltered in early 2007, the system began to fall apart.  The financial system did face collapse, and the Fed and the U.S. government did all in their powers — spent whatever money they thought they had to — to prevent it.  A systemic collapse would have represented a complete functional failure of the U.S. government and the Federal Reserve.  Such had to be, and still has to be, avoided at all costs, as far as the government and Fed are concerned.  The big problem is there are no viable solutions.

The federal government effectively is bankrupt, unable to meet its long-range obligations or even to cover physically its annual shortfall in operations (see the Hyperinflation Special Report).  Accordingly, the efforts at fiscal stimulus rapidly are approaching their practical limits, the point at which the U.S. Treasury will have difficulty raising needed funds.  There are three options open to the government for meeting its impossible fiscal needs: balancing its books, reneging on its obligations or printing the money it cannot possibly raise through taxation.  

The option for balancing the books would mean the U.S. government reversing its ever-evolving social-system policies of the last 75-plus years, abandoning the concept of federal government social programs supporting the income, retirement and health needs of the broad public.  The economy cannot expand enough, taxes cannot be raised enough and other expenses cannot be cut enough otherwise to balance the books. 

Specifically needed are slashing of the Social Security, Medicare and Medicaid programs, as well as the nascent fiscal shortfalls already building up as a result of the healthcare system control recently seized by the federal government.  Such change is an extremely unlikely political possibility in the current system and circumstance, which leaves open the general options of government default on its obligations or government printing of money to meet its obligations.  The latter option is the usual and likely one to be taken. 

With no easy or politically-practical solutions, the available options all are bad; the choices being made and likely to continue being made are aimed at delaying systemic turmoil as long as possible.  Ironically, it likely will be the efforts at saving the system that push the system into its ultimate day-of-reckoning in a hyperinflationary great depression.  The general background material provided in the Hyperinflation Special Report again is referenced here, as I do not want to get overly repetitive with key points of the broad picture.

Consider, though that the "quantitative easing" entered into by the Fed had minimal impact on the money supply, as it involved mostly the purchase of mortgage-backed securities, with the created excess bank reserves being deposited with Fed, earning interest.  As result, bank lending into the normal flow of commerce has been in contraction, and the broad money supply has followed.  Now the Fed is considering the possibility of inducing banks to lend, by cutting the interest rate it pays on reserve balances.

The Fed’s primary function — as a private corporation owned by commercial banks — is to protect the banking system.  Supporting economic growth and containing inflation are secondary concerns, but the renewed economic threat now also can shatter the fragile appearance of banking-system stability.  Indeed, the banking system is far from stable, which is one reason lending is down.

Separately, a number of states will need financial bailouts, insolvent pension funds will seek government backing, the unemployed will be looking for greater support, etc., and all these pressures will be on top of a renewed decline in federal tax revenues.   The most likely course of action here remains ongoing efforts to spend or create whatever money is needed to keep the system from collapsing.  Where the options are for devil’s choices, the one that buys the most time and is least politically painful usually is the one chosen. 

Greenspan abandoned the U.S. dollar for a while following the 1987 stock crash.  The dollar and foreign investment likely will become secondary concerns for political Washington against a U.S. populace looking to kick out the political miscreants — both sides of the aisle — who have lead the U.S. system into this crisis over decades.  The ultimate cost in domestic inflation will be horrendous.

U.S. Financial Markets.  In these circumstances, the financial markets likely will be highly unstable and volatile.  Looking at the longer term, strategies aimed at preserving wealth and assets continue to make sense.  For those who have their assets denominated in U.S. dollars, physical gold and silver remain primary hedges, as do stronger currencies such as the Canadian and Australian dollars and the Swiss franc.  Holding assets outside the U.S. also may have some benefits.

 Graphs.  The first of the following graphs shows the seasonally-adjusted monthly level of payroll employment since 2000, with no adjustments made for census hiring in 2000 or in 2010.  The shaded areas of "unofficial recession" are as suggested by shifts in payroll employment.  The 2000 recession was longer and deeper than officially reported, and it could be considered an initial downleg in a 2000/2007 double-dip recession.

The second graph is the latest version of the year-to-year change in real M3 growth, where the series turning negative always has signaled an economic downturn or an intensifying recession.  The downturn in December 2009 signaled the current re-intensification of the recession/depression.

 

 

 

 

__________

No. 322: July Trade Deficit

Thursday, September 9th, 2010

COMMENTARY NUMBER 322
July Trade Deficit

 

September 9, 2010

__________

July Trade Deficit Suggests Minor Impact for Third-Quarter GDP

Year-Ago Reporting Games May Affect Upcoming Data

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Tuesday, September 14th, following release of August retail sales data.  A Commentary also will be published on Friday, September 17th, following the release of the August CPI, with detail as well on the August PPI and industrial production.

A Special Commentary, reviewing and updating the broad outlook on the U.S. economy, systemic stability and the financial markets, will be published tomorrow, September 10th, or over the ensuing weekend.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

Beware of Distorted Economic Reporting.  In this holiday-shortened week, July’s monthly trade-balance report is the only major release available for comment.  The large monthly trade deficit volatility reported in the last two months likely was due more to poor-quality seasonal adjustments than to actual violent swings in trade activity.  The nature of reporting distortions triggered by the severity and extreme duration of this economic contraction has been discussed previously, and will be discussed again in some detail in the upcoming Special Commentary.  At work in the trade data, and as seen in some of the recent unusual volatility in weekly new claims for unemployment insurance, likely are seasonal distortions created by unusual and irregular patterns of activity in the financially-stressed and largely reorganized U.S. automotive industry, and from short-lived year-ago stimulus activity.  Related issues could impact next week’s reporting of August retail sales, industrial production and CPI inflation (see Week Ahead below).  As a separate issue, today’s market-moving large drop in new claims likely resulted from the Department of Labor’s inability to adjust the weekly data meaningfully for regular seasonal variations in activity, particularly around holiday periods such as Labor Day, and not from a sudden shift in weekly economic activity.

July Trade Deficit Reporting Suggests Minor GDP Revisions and Minimal Third-Quarter Impact, So Far.  With a minor downside revision to the size of the previously reported June 2010 trade deficit, the July trade release suggested a possible small, upside revision to estimated real second-quarter GDP growth, due for re-estimation at the end of the month.  Despite the sharp month-to-month reduction reported in the July monthly deficit, though, the inflation-adjusted monthly shortfall still was in line with the second-quarter average, suggesting, so far, no major swing in third-quarter 2010 trade data that would have meaningful impact on the "advance" third-quarter GDP estimate, due at the end of October.

Nominal (Not Adjusted for Inflation) Trade Deficit.  For July 2010, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported today (September 9th) that the nominal seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services narrowed to a better-than-expected $42.8 billion, versus a revised $49.8 (previously $49.9) billion in June, but widened sharply from the $31.1 billion monthly deficit of July 2009.  Monthly nominal data were revised back to January 2010.

Against June 2010, the July trade balance showed a gain in exports and drop in imports, reversing the trends of June.  The lower imports were impacted minimally by trade activity in oil, although unadjusted oil imports reflected both lower physical volume and oil prices.  Specifically, for the month of July 2010, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $72.09 per barrel, versus $72.44 in June 2010 and $62.52 in July 2009.  In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, July 2010 volume averaged 10.056 million barrels per day, versus 10.398 million in June 2010 and 9.504 million in July 2009.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit.  A narrowing trade deficit directly boosts GDP growth and vice versa.  The July revisions in the trade data set up a possible minor revision to the goods element of the net-export component of the GDP, which would be a small positive for the upcoming, second revision to second-quarter GDP (due September 30th).  While earlier monthly nominal data were revised, the real monthly numbers were not.  The real July number, itself, largely was neutral (slightly positive) in terms of its implications, so far, on the pending "advance" estimate of third-quarter GDP, due October 29th.

As reported by the BEA, adjusted for seasonal factors and inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the second-quarter deficit was ran at an annualized pace of $575.1 billion, revised lower from the $577.1 billion reported last month.  The annualized real July deficit, as reported, was $572.3 billion, but that will be supplemented by the August estimate before the third-quarter GDP estimate is put together. 

Due to underlying assumptions used by the BEA in its GDP estimate, something shy of the full differential in the revised second-quarter number is likely to flow through to the GDP revision.  Important here is that this particular series is just the merchandise sector, which eventually has a paper trail behind it, from reporting by U.S. Customs.  It does not include the services area, which largely is a guesstimate by the BEA, and which traditionally runs a smaller offsetting surplus to the merchandise deficit.  

Week Ahead.  Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more-serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Increasingly, previously unreported economic weakness will be evident in prior-period revisions.

Retail Sales (August 2010).  Due for release on Tuesday, September 14th, August’s monthly retail sales number is expected to show a seasonally-adjusted 0.2% monthly gain (Briefing.com), versus a 0.4% gain initially reported for July.  Anecdotal evidence of continuing weakness in consumption and possible seasonal-factor distortions from last year’s "cash-for-clunkers" program suggest a fair shot at a downside surprise in reporting.  The monthly change also is a fair bet to be negative, after inflation adjustment.  Broad economic activity, such as reported in the GDP, usually is measured net of inflation, so that changes in sales levels reflect changes in physical volume as opposed to changes in prices.

Industrial Production (August 2010).  Due for release on Wednesday, September 15th, August industrial production should be due for some reporting catch-up, where some recent strength was due partially to irregular auto production patterns (and resulting seasonal adjustment distortions), as mentioned in the opening comments.  Briefing.com reports a consensus expectation for seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.4% versus an initial 1.0% gain for July.  Again, reporting risk favors a downside reporting surprise.

Producer Price Index — PPI (August 2010).  Due for release on Thursday, September 16th, the August PPI has a fair shot at topping a consensus estimate of a 0.2% seasonally-adjusted monthly increase (Briefing.com), the same level as in July.  Reversal of seasonal factor biases that depressed adjust PPI reporting earlier this year likely will add upside pressure to this somewhat randomly volatile series.

Consumer Price Index — CPI (August 2010).  Due for release on Friday, September 17th, the August CPI-U and related series also will receive seasonal-factor boosts to gasoline price inflation.  Separately, in August 2009, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) did not include the government’s cash-for-clunker payments as part of auto pricing at the time.  Such artificially knocked off about 0.3% from the CPI-U in August 2009, although it was recovered in later, post-clunker reporting.  Nonetheless, those events may affect the seasonal-adjustment of August 2010 prices.  In combination, the gasoline and auto circumstances offer a good bet for an upside surprise to the 0.1% consensus seasonally-adjusted monthly gain for the CPI-U (Briefing.com).  July reporting showed a 0.3% increase.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in August 2010’s CPI-U reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.37% adjusted monthly gain seen in August 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed.  To approximate the annual inflation rate for August 2010, the difference in August’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from July 2010’s annual inflation rate of 1.24%.  A consensus result of 0.1% would leave annual CPI-U at about 1.0%.

 

__________

No. 321: August Employment and Unemployment

Friday, September 3rd, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 321
August Employment and Unemployment

September 3, 2010

__________

August Unemployment: U.3 = 9.6%, U.6 = 16.7%, SGS = 22.0%

August Payrolls Fall 54,000, Gain 60,000 Ex-Census Workers

Better-Than-Expected Payroll Changes Were Not Statistically Meaningful

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Thursday, September 9th, following release of the July trade data. A Special Commentary, reviewing and updating the broad outlook on the U.S. economy, systemic stability and the financial markets, will be published separately in the week ahead.

– Best wishes to all for a most enjoyable Labor Day weekend, John Williams

 

More-Positive Payroll Indications, But Not Statistically Significant. Contrary to my forecasts, the August labor data met or exceeded market expectations. Although the government’s broadest unemployment rate rose sharply for the month, the notch higher in the headline unemployment rate came in at the consensus level. The payroll employment data generally were stronger than expected, and included upside revisions to prior-period reporting. As cautioned in yesterday’s comments (Commentary No. 320), however, none of the headline numbers were statistically meaningful. 

Sharp deterioration in the U.S. labor market conditions should be seen in next month’s reporting. An early indication of such was reported today — subsequent to the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reporting — where the purchasing managers nonmanufacturing (services) survey for August showed a plunge in its employment component. A diffusion index, a reading above 50.0 indicates expansion. The employment index fell to 48.2 (indicating outright jobs contraction) in August, from 50.9 in July. The August index leads the September payroll reporting.

The broad outlook is unchanged, and a review and update of the specific economic, systemic-stability and financial-market outlooks will be published next week in a Special Commentary.

Separately, unusual variations in and revisions to seasonal factors, an unsustainable pattern of increases in the monthly birth-death model upside biases and some masking of the deteriorating broader unemployment conditions were at work in generating today’s employment and unemployment results. 

There are two types of political manipulation of data. The first and more infrequent case is that of direct intervention (externally or internally) to produce a desired number. The second and more common case is the use of gimmicked methodological changes over-time that tend to build-in regular positive biases to economic data and negative biases into inflation numbers. The handling of discouraged workers (no longer tracking long-term discouraged workers) and the handling of the birth-death model are examples of the second case. The birth-death biases are discussed in the Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment section below.   

As to direct manipulation, seasonal factor gimmicks and simply the use of rigged numbers have been utilized at different times to alter reported data for political purposes. Rigged results usually have been tied to pending elections and/or financial market needs. There is no direct evidence of this type of manipulation going on at present, although there was some unusual seasonal-factor activity in the latest jobs report.

The Wonders of Seasonal Adjustment. Consider that the not-seasonally-adjusted data last month showed June payrolls at 131,345,000. With updated information, the unadjusted June payrolls gained 1,000, revising to 131,346,000 in August’s reporting. The seasonally-adjusted June number, however, revised from 130,373,000 to 130,419,000, a gain of 46,000, with 45,000 being created out of thin air by the monthly revision to seasonal factors. There was a time when seasonal factors were set for a whole year in advance. 

The ability to play monthly games with seasonals, the nature of assumptions in the handling of hard data and revisions to same, and a 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000 jobs around the reported payroll number change, provide significant reporting leeway should someone choose to target payroll reporting in the context say of consensus expectations tied to the financial markets, or of related media hype that could impact public political perceptions.         

Long-Term Unemployed Rolling into Discouraged Category, versus Labor Force Participation. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) noted for August that "the number of long-term unemployed (those jobless for 27 weeks and over) declined by 323,000 over the month…" That number was seasonally-adjusted, a practice that seems questionable given the duration of the measure. Unadjusted, the ranks of the long-term unemployed were reported down by 268,000. Most likely, the bulk of those individuals rolled into the government’s tallying of the short-term discouraged worker category (used in unemployment rates U.4, U.5 and U.6), which was reported to have declined, too, by 75,000 in the month (unadjusted).   Balancing out a not-so-happy picture would be a portion of the short-term discouraged workers also rolling into the long-term discouraged worker category (included in the SGS-Alternate Unemployment measure), which is not tracked by the BLS. 

I have been working with the historical data in terms of the employed and labor force numbers versus the working-age population. Indeed, as has been suggested by others, the declining ratios of employed to population, and labor force participation rates, appear to reflect significant movement of individuals into the discouraged-worker categories (discouraged workers are not counted as part of the official labor force). If one were to assume that all the ratio changes were due to this factor (as opposed to changes in retirement patterns, etc.), holding the participation rate constant across the population would generate an implied broad unemployment of about 22%, where the SGS-Alternate Unemployment measure stands at present. A separate article on this will be published shortly.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported today (September 3rd) a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted August 2010 jobs loss of 54,000 (a gain of 69,000 before prior-period revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval). Net of the included layoffs of 114,000 intermittent and temporary census hires, August payrolls gained a statistically-insignificant 60,000 jobs. The reported gain in private-sector payrolls was 67,000 for the month, which more than covered a 7,000 decline in other government jobs that brought the total ex-census gain to the 60,000 figure. 

Against August’s total jobs loss of 54,000, a jobs gain net of census impact of 60,000, and a jobs gain of 67,000 in the private sector, July showed a revised monthly total jobs loss of 54,000 (previously a loss of 131,000), a jobs gain net of census impact of 89,000 (previously a gain of 12,000), and a jobs gain in the private sector of 107,000 (previously a 71,000 gain). 

As of the August payroll survey, 84,000 temporary census workers still faced lay-offs, with the bulk of the remaining impact on payroll reporting likely in September reporting.

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; December 2009 is current, but likely short-lived, trough of the current cycle), payroll employment declined by a seasonally-adjusted 8,363,000 jobs, or 6.1%. As of August 2010 reporting, net of temporary census hiring, payrolls have gained 0.5% or 639,000 jobs since the December 2009 trough.

In terms of annual change, year-to-year growth in August nonfarm payrolls was 0.21% (0.15% net of surviving census hires), up from July’s revised 0.08% gain (previously a 0.01% contraction), and a revised 0.07% (previously 0.16%) annual contraction for July net of census effects.

Thanks to recent, protracted bottom-bouncing in the payroll series, current annual growth has recovered from the post-World War II record 4.96% decline in July 2009. The July 2009 decline was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II, which reflected a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945. Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the current annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression. 

The long-term graph of year-to-year payroll change reflects the numbers as reported, with no adjustment for census hiring variations. The second graph, however, shows the year-to-year detail both with and without the census hires.

 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business, on a timely basis (within five years), such information is estimated by the Birth-Death Model. Unusual birth-death activity continued in August 2010, with the monthly birth-death adjustment adding 17,000 more jobs than it did in August 2009, a pattern that continues contrary to what would be suggested by 2009 BLS reporting difficulties that understated declines in payroll employment, and by recent indications of a another downside benchmark revision for 2010 data, as discussed in yesterday’s Commentary.

Based now on the "assumption" of economic recovery, the bias factors used in the last five months of payroll reporting have been 25.9% ahead of what they were reset to after the most recent and disastrous benchmark revision. Positive assumptions — commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling — can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with "stronger" economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates, or underlying assumptions of ongoing economic recovery.

Historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels — to understate employment declines — during recessions. These flaws were confirmed by the nature of the BLS’s massive downside benchmark revision to 2009 data published with the January 2010 jobs report, where the BLS had indicated that underlying assumptions to the Birth-Death Model were missing significant jobs losses due to business failures that the BLS could not measure. 

Although the upside bias had been scaled down some as a result of 2009’s reporting errors, the Birth-Death Model survives and remains a major distorting factor in monthly payroll reporting. The unsupportable premise that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business, continues. So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, presumed additional "surplus" jobs, created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor. These add-factors are running at about 50,000 per month (seasonally-adjusted), at present. I estimate this monthly bias should be negative by 200,000 or so, on average. Since it is not, the BLS continues regularly to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 250,000 jobs. Such misreporting, however, will not be corrected until the next benchmark revision is published in February 2011, well after the November elections. Again, as mentioned yesterday, that revision likely will be negative, and its magnitude, as of the benchmark month of March 2010, should be estimated along with next month’s payroll reporting.

That said, the unadjusted August 2010 bias was a monthly addition of 115,000 jobs, versus an addition of 98,000 jobs in August 2009, and against a monthly addition of 6,000 jobs in July 2010.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (counting multiple job holders more than once), showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly employment gain of 290,000 in August, following a reported decline of 159,000 in July. 

As with the last several months’ data, the series appears to be experiencing distortions from inappropriate seasonal-adjustments for temporary census worker employment.   In the payroll survey, the census impact is quantified and properly is not seasonally adjusted. Since some portion of the part-time census workers, however, already would be counted as employed due to other part-time or full-time employment, accurately quantifying the impact of census employment variations on unemployment is not possible. As a result, no separate accounting is made, and the census-worker impact has been seasonally adjusted as though the census hiring and firing patterns are annual events.

Where I have expected that some portion of the census layoffs would have pushed the unemployment rate minimally higher in the last three months, such has not happened, despite the original hires having had noticeable impact on reducing the reported headline unemployment rate. Nonetheless, sharp upside movements in the unemployment rate remain likely in the months ahead as the seasonal pattern distortions eventually reverse out.

Also, as discussed earlier, increasing numbers of longer-term unemployed previously counted in U.3 unemployment appear to be rolling into the short-term discouraged worker category, with a portion of the short-term discouraged workers rolling into the long-term discouraged worker category.

Just 4,000 Shy of Rounding to 9.7% Unemployment. The August 2010 seasonally-adjusted headline (U.3) unemployment rate rose by a statistically-insignificant 0.13 percentage point to 9.64% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from 9.51% in July. The U.3 unemployment count was just 4,000 shy of rounding to 9.7%. With upside pressure on the unemployment rate in September, such makes an apparent 0.2 percentage point jump in next month’s rounded U.3 rate an easy increase. Not seasonally adjusted, August’s U.3 unemployment rate declined to 9.5% from 9.7% in July. 

August U.6 unemployment rose to a seasonally-adjusted 16.7% (fell to 16.4% unadjusted) versus 16.5% (16.8% unadjusted) in July.

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers. The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding my estimate of the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed, unemployment — more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — rose in August to about 22.0% from 21.7% in July. Developing trends here were discussed in the opening comments. The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting and tends to follow its relative monthly movements. See the Alternate Data tab for a graph and more detail.

As discussed previously, while 22.0% unemployment might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession. The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms. Today, less that 2% work on farms. Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

Updated Real M3 Signal for Intensifying Downturn. As discussed in frequent Commentaries this year(see Commentary No. 316 for example), declining year-to-year change in real (inflation-adjusted) M3 signals a pending economic downturn or pending intensification of an existing economic contraction, with contracting broad liquidity invariably constraining broad economic activity. The signal is generated when real M3 first turns negative year-to-year, which occurred in December 2009 in the current economic cycle. The signal is not generated by, nor dependent on, either the length or the depth of the M3 downturn. The downside shift in business activity usually follows within six to nine months, which encompasses the current period. 

The following updated graph plots annual real M3 growth versus periods of recession formally recognized by the NBER. It includes approximate annual real contraction in the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate as of August 2010. The August M3 estimate used here is an annual real contraction of roughly 5.6% versus a 6.6% contraction in July. Details will be discussed in next week’s Special Commentary, which will include a review of the broad liquidity outlook and the money supply circumstance. The formal preliminary estimate for the SGS Ongoing M3 Measure for August will be posted this weekend of September 4th on the Alternate Data page for M3.

At present, the pace of annual contraction in nominal August M3 is on track to hit 4.3%, versus 5.4% in July, reflecting a flattening/upturn in month-to-month change, with annual comparison against a pace of declining monthly growth in the year-ago period. 

 

 

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Increasingly, such is being seen in economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Trade Balance (July 2010). Due for release on Thursday, September 9th, reporting of the July trade deficit will help to set the tone for the first reporting of third-quarter GDP at the end of October. Even a monthly shortfall close to the same amount seen in June — as likely will be the consensus — would be an early signal favoring quarterly contraction. Ongoing deterioration in the patterns of both the nominal and real (unadjusted and adjusted for inflation) monthly trade deficits should become fairly regular and are a fair bet for the upcoming report.

 __________

 

No. 320: Updated August Labor Market Outlook

Thursday, September 2nd, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 320

 

Updated August Labor Market Outlook

September 2, 2010
 
__________

August Payroll and Unemployment Reporting Likely to Disappoint Expectations

__________
 

PLEASE NOTE: This morning’s Commentary offers a brief update to the outlook for the August employment and unemployment data, with the next regular Commentary scheduled to follow that release tomorrow, Friday, September 3rd.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

Evidence Mounts of Overstatement of Payroll Data So Far in 2010. Once a year, in March, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) benchmarks its payroll estimates against state unemployment insurance filings, with the result — more often than not in recent years — that previously-reported payroll employment levels and monthly changes to same are revised lower. In the benchmark revision based for March 2009, and published in 2010, the effect was a revised additional jobs loss of magnitude 1,000,000 jobs. In next month’s labor report (not tomorrow’s), the BLS should publish its initial estimate of the benchmark revision for March 2010, to be published in February 2011. Other reporting out this week, though, suggests that looming payroll revisions will be to the downside, once again. 

The July 2010 personal income report published on Monday, August 30th, incorporated revised wages and salaries data from the BLS’s quarterly census of employment and wages for first-quarter 2010. The net revisions were negative, and such would be suggestive of lowered employment levels.

August Payroll Reporting. August 2010 payroll reporting is a fair bet to disappoint market expectations. To extent there may be eventual downward revisions to this year’s payroll revisions, recognition of such by the BLS potentially could lead to the softening of overly positive assumptions currently being used in the monthly payroll reporting, particularly in the monthly upside bias factors, otherwise known as birth-death model adjustments. That area will be looked at closely in tomorrow’s Commentary.     

The Census Bureau has reported that its temporary and intermittent hires for the 2010 census were reduced by roughly 116,000 in August, based on the payroll-survey weeks (84,000 census workers still remain to be discharged). The consensus estimate of Briefing.com has held at a total jobs loss of 120,000 jobs, with a Reuters survey estimate at a 100,000 jobs loss, and the WSJ.com consensus at an 80,000 total jobs decline. Implied there are consensus estimates of payroll changes, net of temporary census hiring effects, ranging from a decline of 4,000 to a gain of 36,000 jobs.   I look for an outright payroll contraction in August, net of census impact, with the total jobs loss at good risk of exceeding the 135,000 to 150,000 range. 

There are two cautions on tomorrow’s reporting. First, keep in mind that the BLS’s 95% confidence interval in reporting of monthly change is +/- 129,000 jobs. A change within that range really is nothing more than statistical noise. Second, once again, the ex-census number being touted by the markets and Administration is the "private sector" jobs change. That is not the same as total payrolls net of census hires, since regular government employment is ongoing, but it also tends to be in monthly contraction for the moment. Accordingly, the total payroll change ex-census — the number closest to reflecting economic activity — likely will be weaker than the private-sector jobs change.

Unemployment rate consensus estimates for the August headline U.3 rate seem to be holding at 9.6%, up from 9.5% in July. The jump in unemployment should be more severe, particularly when short-term (U.6) and long-term (SGS) discouraged workers are counted. The U.3 data are due for some catch-up in poor-quality seasonal factors that likely have contributed recently to dampening the unemployment rate level and for corrective adjustments for census perturbations.

Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards weaker-than-expected economic reporting. Increasingly, such will be seen in economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

In terms of related, underlying series, the Conference Board’s July help-wanted advertising index (newspapers), which leads August employment reporting, was reported again at 10 — unchanged for a number of months — and one point above its historic low. The help-wanted advertising (online) survey showed total ads declined slightly in August versus July (down 1.3%), while newly placed ads increased slightly (2.8%) for the month.

The August 2010 purchasing managers (ISM) manufacturing survey showed stronger employment numbers, with the August diffusion index reading (50.0 and above considered expansion) at 60.4, up from 58.6 in July. The employment component of the ISM services sector, which will be reported after the BLS numbers tomorrow, is a fair bet to show a softer August reading. Where the August surveys tend to lead September payrolls, the July numbers — which lead August payrolls — showed minimal strengthening. 

 

__________

No. 319: Second-Quarter GDP Revision

Friday, August 27th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 319
Second-Quarter GDP Revision

August 27, 2010

__________

Second-Quarter GDP Revised to 1.6% from 2.4%

Deteriorating Economic Data Eventually
Should Disrupt
U.S. Financial Markets

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, September 3rd, following release of the August employment and unemployment release. An interim Commentary will update the labor situation outlook.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

Economic Data Will Get Much Worse. The kindest thing I can say about a stock market that rallies on the "stronger than expected" news that annualized growth in second-quarter GDP was revised from 2.4% to just 1.6%, instead of to the expected 1.4% (keep in mind those numbers are quarterly growth rates raised to the fourth power), or that gyrates over meaningless swings in seasonally-distorted weekly new unemployment claims, is that it is irrational, unstable and terribly dangerous. 

As the renewed tumbling in the U.S. economy throws off statistics suggestive of a continuing collapse in business activity, as a looming contraction in third-quarter GDP becomes increasingly evident to all except Wall Street and Administration hypesters, who professionally never admit to such news, it would be quite surprising if the financial markets did not react violently, with a massive sell-off in the U.S. dollar contributing to and coincident with massive sell-declines in both the U.S. equity and credit markets. 

Recognition is growing rapidly of the re-intensifying economic downturn. Yet, little analysis so far has been put forth to public as to some of the unfortunate systemic implications of this circumstance. The problems range from extreme growth in the federal government’s operating deficit, tied to reduced tax revenues and to bailout expenditures for the unemployed, bankrupt states and continuing banking industry solvency issues, to U.S. Treasury funding needs to pay for same. The latter issue promises eventual heavy Federal Reserve monetization of Treasury debt, with resulting inflation problems and eventual hyperinflation (see the Hyperinflation Special Report).

Accordingly, the general outlook is unchanged, but it will be reviewed and updated in next Friday’s Commentary along with the analysis of August’s labor conditions. An update on systemic liquidity conditions also will be included. The month-to-month hemorrhaging of the M3 money supply (SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate) appears to have been contained — at least temporarily — with major M3 components having flattened out or turned positive in weekly reporting of the last month, although annual change remains deep in negative territory. 

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

Widened Trade Deficit Accounted for Bulk of Negative GDP Revision. The revision to second-quarter 2010 GDP had annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth dropping from an initial estimate of 2.4% to 1.6%. Eighty-percent of the downside revision came from June’s reported trade deficit deterioration, where the "advance" estimate of second-quarter GDP had been guesstimated by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) based on only the available April and May trade data (see Commentary No. 316). The remaining portion of the downside revision was a reduction in reported inventory build-up that mostly was offset by an upside revision to reported personal consumption. GDP inventory revisions commonly are offset by consumption revisions.

 GDP.  Published today (April 27th) by the BEA, the first revision, or second estimate, of second-quarter 2010 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) was a statistically-insignificant annualized real growth rate of 1.61% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), down from the "advance" estimate of 2.39%, and down from an estimated growth rate of 3.73% in the first-quarter. The year-to-year change in real second-quarter GDP revised to 2.98%, from initial reporting of 3.17%, but it still was higher than the year-to-year 2.39% growth estimated for the first-quarter.

The GDP implicit price deflator — inflation measure — showed a revised annualized pace of inflation in second-quarter 2010 of 1.96% (previously 1.83%), which was up from 1.05% in the first-quarter. In an unusual divergence, annualized inflation for the CPI-U in the second-quarter was a contraction of 0.72% versus a positive 1.53% in the first-quarter. The higher the inflation rate used in deflating the GDP, the weaker is the inflation-adjusted number and vice versa. In this case, lower prices for imported oil spiked the implicit price deflator, because imports are subtracted from the GDP, which reverses the impact of the oil price changes in the aggregate number.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for second-quarter 2010 remains an approximate annual contraction of 1.3% versus the official estimate of a 3.0% gain, less-negative than the annual 1.5% contraction (2.4% official gain) estimated in the first-quarter. While annualized real quarterly growth is not formally estimated on an alternative basis, a flat-to-minus quarter-to-quarter gain likely would have been realistic for the second-quarter. The relative upturn in annual change reflects the bottom-bouncing at low levels of activity seen for much of the last year in key underlying economic series, not an economic recovery. As discussed in the opening comments, an intensified downturn continues to unfold (see the Alternate Data tab).

GNP and GDI (see Sidebar). Initial estimates of Gross National Product (GNP) and Gross Domestic Income (GDI) for second-quarter 2010 GDP were published with today’s release. Neither series had a second-quarter growth estimate that was heavily divergent from the GDP’s growth estimate.

Annualized second-quarter 2010 real GNP growth was estimated at 1.65%, down from 4.41% in the first-quarter. Year-to-year change in the second-quarter was reported at 3.39%, up from 2.84% in the first-quarter.

Annualized second-quarter 2010 real GDI growth was estimated at 2.31% (1.93% before prior-period revisions), down from 4.11% (previously 4.50%) in the first-quarter. Year-to-year change in the second-quarter was reported at 3.25%, up from a revised 2.24% (was 2.34%) in the first-quarter.

The following graph shows the annual percent change in quarterly GDP for the history of the series. The record annual contraction for the series was 4.11%, seen in last year’s (2009’s) second-quarter.

 

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Increasingly, such is being seen in economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Employment and Unemployment (August 2010). Due for release on Friday, September 3rd, reporting of both the August payroll employment change and unemployment rate likely will disappoint market expectations. 

The Census Bureau has reported that its temporary and intermittent hires for the 2010 census were reduced by roughly 116,000 in August, based on the payroll-survey weeks. Consequently, the current consensus estimate (Briefing.com) of a total 120,000 jobs loss — which includes jobs gains other than census — likely will narrow to about a 90,000 jobs loss, in the week ahead. I look for an outright payroll contraction in August, net of census impact, with the total jobs loss likely to exceed 135,000. 

Briefing.com shows a consensus for the August headline U.3 unemployment rate at 9.6%, up from 9.5% in July. The jump in unemployment should be more severe, particularly when short-term (U.6) and long-term (SGS) discouraged workers are counted.

The outlook for the labor report will be updated next week, as detail comes in from related series. The Conference Board’s July help-wanted advertising index (newspapers), which leads August employment reporting, was reported, again, at 10 — unchanged for a number of months — and one point above its historic low.

__________

No. 318: July Home Sales, Durable Goods Orders

Wednesday, August 25th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 318
July Home Sales, Durable Goods Orders
 

August 25, 2010

__________

Housing Market Stress Deepens Irrespective of Wild Reporting

Durable Goods Orders Almost Flat Despite Aircraft Boost

Census Payrolls Down 116,000 in August

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, August 27th, following release of the first revision to and second estimate of Second-Quarter 2010 GDP.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

Intensifying Depression Increasingly Evident. Falling new home sales and lack of nominal growth (before inflation adjustment) in new orders for durable goods are the latest indicators of a renewed decline in economic activity.  Such is after adjusting for the likely effects of previous and current reporting that may have been distorted by the nature of the downturn

The extraordinary length and depth of the current economic contraction, and disruptions to regular patterns of production and/or commercial activity in markets ranging from automobiles to housing, have skewed economic reporting terribly, particularly in the area of seasonal-adjustment factors. Keep in mind that modern economic reporting (generally created and/or introduced post-World War II) — structured on generally positive underlying assumptions — never was designed to handle a downturn of the present severity. 

One such element was seen last week in the unexpected jump in weekly new claims for unemployment. Putting aside considerations such as the weekly numbers having little significance, the higher claims likely resulted from seasonal factors worked against unusual production patterns in the auto industry. Related distortions may show up in August unemployment and industrial production.

With such issues considered, again, the evidence continues to mount of intensifying economic contraction, with an increasing likelihood of a third-quarter GDP contraction.

New Orders for Durable Goods Stalled Anew. The Census Bureau reported this morning (August 25th) that the regularly volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods rose by 0.3% (up by 1.3% before prior-period revisions) month-to-month in July 2010, after a revised 0.1% (previously 1.0%) decline in June. Unadjusted, year-to-year change in July new orders was a gain of 8.6%, somewhat less vigorous than the revised 17.2% (previously 15.9%) annual increase reported for June. 

The reported minimal gain in July orders was dampened by prior-period upward revisions, as indicated above, but it also encompassed a surge in airplane orders. Surging airplane orders is a long-term positive for the economy, where delivery time usually is stretched out over a number of years. July’s new orders for nondefense aircraft and parts rose by 75.9% for the month, against a 25.3% decline in June. Excluding transportation new orders, durable goods orders fell by 3.8% in July, after a 0.2% gain in June.

While recent benchmark revisions appear to have built in something of an upside sampling bias to the monthly numbers, the three most recent reports have shown flat-to-negative pressures on total new orders before consideration of the effects of inflation, which would make data appear weaker. 

Widely followed nondefense capital goods declined by 2.8%, seasonally-adjusted, for the month in July, after a revised 1.2% (previously 0.6%) increase in June. For July, the unadjusted year-to-year change in the series slowed to a gain of 9.7%, versus a revised June annual gain of 24.7% (previously reported at 18.8%).

Despite Reporting Issues, Collapsing Home Sales Appear Consistent with Re-Intensifying Economic Downturn. Allowing for some catch-up in poor-quality seasonal-adjustment factors that likely helped to inflate recent home sales reporting; allowing for the lingering effects of the April 30th expiration to the home-buyer tax credit; allowing for the worthlessness and usual statistical insignificance of near-term new home sales reporting; and considering the large prior-period revisions for both new and existing home sales that surfaced in July 2010; the decline in residential real estate activity is intensifying anew. Such is consistent with the decline in July housing starts (see Commentary No. 317), where the pattern of activity in residential real estate appears to have moved beyond the impact of short-lived stimulus, with renewed or re-intensifying economic contraction unfolding.

This morning’s (August 25th) reporting of July new home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) showed a statistically insignificant monthly sales decline of 12.4% (down 16.4% net of prior-period revisions) +/- 12.6% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a downwardly revised gain of 12.1% in June (previously a 23.6% jump). The year-to-year decline in the new home sales series deepened in July 2010, down by 32.4% from July 2009. In June, the annual decline was a revised 20.5% (previously a 16.7% drop).     

Yesterday’s (August 24th) release of July existing home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) showed plunging sales that likely reflected some catch-up in poor-quality seasonal-adjustments in addition to a renewed collapse in residential real estate activity.

July sales tumbled by a seasonally-adjusted monthly 27.2% (down 28.7% before prior-period revisions), following a revised 7.1% (previously 5.1%) decline in June. On a year-to-year basis, sales were down by 25.5% in July versus a revised 7.6% (previously 9.8%) annual gain in June.

A questionable number in the July report was the estimated portion of existing home sales that were in foreclosure holding constant at 32% versus June. With other reporting showing foreclosures on the rise, and with forced or distressed sales not likely to have dropped in proportionate tandem with regular sales, one might expect that foreclosures would have accounted for a greater portion of the reported smaller universe of sales. 

Even as estimated, though, foreclosure activity remains a major distorting factor for home sales. As noted, the NAR percentage estimate should be jumping sharply as overall sales activity slows markedly. Separately, the Census Bureau acknowledges that a portion of new home sales also is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimates as to the scope of the issue. Some in the construction trade have difficulty competing with the pricing of foreclosed properties. Until the foreclosure problems get worked out in the system, monthly changes in these home sales numbers cannot be taken as meaningful positive indicators (when the numbers are positive) of underlying activity in homeowner real estate, as it relates to general economic activity. 

The following updated graphs reflect different measures of home sales activity since February 2009. The numbers, through July 2010, reflect the seasonally-adjusted level of monthly sales, rather than the annual rate usually published.

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Increasingly, such is being seen in economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Gross Domestic Product — GDP (Second-Quarter 2010, Second Estimate). Due for release on Friday, August 27th, the second estimate (first revision) to second-quarter 2010 annualized real GDP growth faces an unusually large downward revision, from initial reporting of 2.4% to 1.4%, per the consensus estimate at Briefing.com. Realistically, the quarter should have been flat-to-minus, and data revisions taking reported growth to such a state always remain a possibility, though not likely at present. 

That said, the downside impact of sharply weaker June trade data and some expectation of lowered inventory levels on official reporting may be overdone. A downside revision is a good bet, but I’d look for something closer to a revised growth level of 1.8%, given the propensities of the Bureau of Economic Analysis to offset inventory changes with adjustments to consumption.

Of interest will be initial reporting of second-quarter 2010 Gross Domestic Income (GDI) and Gross National Product (GNP), which are official alternate indicators of GDP activity.

Employment and Unemployment (August 2010). Due for release on Friday, September 3rd, both the estimates of the August payroll employment change and unemployment rate likely will disappoint market expectations. 

The Census Bureau reported today (August 25th) that its temporary and intermittent hires for the 2010 census were reduced by roughly 116,000 in August, based on the payroll-survey weeks. Consequently, the current consensus estimate (Briefing.com) of a total 120,000 jobs loss — which includes jobs gains other than census — likely will narrow to about a 90,000 jobs loss, in the week ahead. I look for an outright payroll contraction in August, net of census impact, with the total jobs loss likely to exceed 135,000. 

Briefing.com shows a consensus August headline U.3 unemployment rate of 9.6%, up from 9.5% in July. The jump in unemployment should be more severe, particularly when short-term (U.6) and long-term (SGS) discouraged workers are counted.

 

__________

 

No. 317: July Housing Starts, Production and PPI

Tuesday, August 17th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 317
July Housing Starts, Production and PPI

August 17, 2010

__________

July Housing Starts Below Initial June Reporting,
Suggestive of Third-Quarter GDP Contraction

July Industrial Production Boosted by Seasonal Disruptions

Annual PPI Inflation Rose to 4.2% in July

__________ 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Wednesday, August 25th, following release of July New Orders for Durable Goods, along with analyses of New and Existing Home Sales data.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

 Signals Continue to Build for Third-Quarter GDP Contraction. Developing third-quarter contractions in housing starts and real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales, likely third-quarter inventory liquidations, likely continued deterioration in the trade deficit, and slowing, albeit still-positive, growth suggested for industrial production in the third-quarter have started to suggest a renewed quarterly contraction in GDP for the current quarter. As the government plays the numbers, such would be touted as double-dip recession. As Shadow Government Statistics looks at its alternative economic indicators, the circumstance is a re-intensifying depression, as signaled by a December 2009 downturn in real annual growth for the SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate (see Commentary No. 316.)

Economic reporting in the months ahead increasingly should confirm this pattern, with reporting of business statistics generally coming in below consensus estimates.

July Housing Starts Indicate Third-Quarter Contraction. The Census Bureau reported a soft July 2010 residential construction report for housing starts, today (August 17th). The small monthly gain would have been a contraction but for a large downward revision to June’s initial reporting. Further, the July housing starts level was below the average level for the second-quarter, suggesting, as with last week’s real retail sales, the potential of a third- versus second-quarter contraction that should be paralleled in related GDP components.

As reported, July housing starts rose by a statistically-insignificant 1.7% (down by 0.5% net of revisions) +/- 8.2% (95% confidence interval). June’s starts were revised to an 8.7% (previously 5.0%) monthly decline. Activity has started to slow, anew, although the pattern of housing starts generally remains one of bottom-bouncing at an historically low-level plateau of activity, as seen over the last 20 months.  Much weaker monthly numbers are likely in the months ahead.

Year-to-year change in July was a statistically-insignificant contraction of 7.0% +/-8.1% (95% confidence interval), following a downwardly revised annual drop of 7.9% (previously 5.8%) in June.

Since December 2008, as noted, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing at an historically low level, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 570,600. In the past 20 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, including July 2010’s reading of 546,000. 

Chart of Housing Starts

Chart of Housing Starts 

The "recovery" in housing is shown in the above graphs. The first graph reflects the level monthly of activity in terms of the annualized monthly rate of housing starts, which is randomly volatile and subject to large revisions on a monthly basis. 

For purposes of looking at the broader trend in activity — net of random and often extreme month-to-month reporting volatility seen in many series, and net of recent month-to-month seasonal factor distortions also common recently to many series — I have smoothed the data for certain graphs using a six-month moving average, including retail sales, industrial production and housing starts. 

The second graph shows the six-month moving average in housing starts, which has turned down in the latest reporting. Irrespective of any level of smoothing, though, in the current cycle, housing starts remain at least 25% below any levels seen since before the end of World War II. Along with the activity in the broad economy, a renewed downturn in housing appears to be underway.

Auto Industry Disruptions Boosted July Industrial Production with Warped Seasonal Factors. The irregular patterns in U.S. auto production in the last two years from insolvencies and pending insolvencies with GM and Chrysler, and from collapsing economic activity, have resulted in a relative economic boom for the seasonally-adjusted auto industry, which was the primary driver of a 1.0% monthly gain in seasonally-adjusted July industrial production, which shrank by 1.0% before seasonal adjustments. Surprisingly, despite extremely unseasonable weather across the country, seasonally-adjusted utility usage was up just 0.1%, not a major factor in the aggregate change. Prior-period revisions boosted reporting by 0.1% from what would have been seen otherwise

Unlike July’s real retail sales and housing starts, July industrial production was higher than the second-quarter average, at an annualized pace of 5.9%. While such is relatively good news for third-quarter GDP, it is at a slower pace than the second-quarter’s 6.7% annualized growth, and there is good reason to expect downside movement in the production series in the months ahead.

The Federal Reserve Board reported today (August 17th) that seasonally-adjusted June 2010 industrial production rose by 0.99% (up by 0.94% before revisions to June’s initial reporting), versus a 0.05% contraction (previously a 0.07% monthly gain) reported for June.

The year-to-year change in July production eased back to 7.74% from June’s revised 8.16% (previously 8.22% pace). The relatively high level in annual growth is due largely to the pattern of collapsing activity a year ago, which troughed in June 2009. After last month’s benchmark revision, the deepest year-to-year decline seen in the current cycle was a year-to-year contraction of 12.86% for May 2009 (previously a decline of 13.31% in June 2009). The May 2009 drop was the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II. 

Chart of Industrial Production

Chart of Industrial Production

The first graph above shows recent monthly detail, with a fair chance that the August number will mark the turning point to renewed decline in the production series.

The "recovery" in production is shown in the second graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average. For the last 19 months, the production index has averaged 89.17, around which the series has been fluctuating, with July’s six-month moving average reading at 91.87 versus 93.40 for the single month. Production activity had leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that effectively wiped out the last eight years of growth in industrial production; the current rally almost has reclaimed the pre-2001 recession high. 

Despite the near-term upside gains generated by short-lived stimulus and seasonal-factor distortions, the series likely still is bottom-bouncing and should begin to soften anew, significantly, in the next several months.  The six-month moving-average series remains 9.15% below its December 2007 historic high.

July PPI Inflation Hit by Negative Seasonal Factors for Gasoline. Seasonally-adjusted inflation at the wholesale and production rose month-to-month in July, slightly above expectations, despite energy prices again being suppressed by seasonal adjustments. Those adjustments usually start turning sharply to the plus-side for energy prices at this time of year.

As reported this morning (August 17th) by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) in July rose by 0.2% (up by 0.3% before seasonal adjustment) month-to-month, following June’s decline of 0.5% (down 0.6% unadjusted).

Unadjusted and year-to-year, July’s annual PPI inflation rose to 4.2%, up from an annual inflation rate of 2.8% reported for June.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted July intermediate goods fell by 0.4% (down by 0.9% in June), with July crude goods rising by 2.7% (down by 2.4% in June). Year-to-year inflation in July intermediate goods was up by 6.4%, the same as in June, with July annual inflation in crude goods up by 20.5% (up by 13.3% in June).

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Increasingly, that is being seen in economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Home Sales (July 2010).  July Existing Home Sales due for release on Tuesday, August 24th, and New Home Sales due for release on Wednesday, August 25th, are both at risk of disappointing already-soft market expectations. As discussed in earlier Commentaries, both series are distorted meaningfully by the foreclosure debacle, and any change in the heavily volatile new home sales category is likely to be statistically insignificant.

New Orders for Durable Goods (July 2010). Due for release on Wednesday, August 25th, July new orders should show a solid spike, due to strong, multi-year aircraft orders. Net of aircraft orders — which likely will not have immediate impact on the near-term economy — the other randomly volatile data have a fair chance of being weaker than already-soft expectations.

Gross Domestic Product — GDP (Second-Quarter 2010, Second Estimate). Due for release on Friday, August 27th, the second estimate (first revision) to second-quarter 2010 annualized real GDP growth faces an unusually large downward revision, from initial reporting of 2.4% to 1.4%, per the consensus estimate at Briefing.com. Realistically, the quarter should have been flat-to-minus, but the downside impact of sharply weaker June trade data and some expectation of lowered inventory levels on official reporting may be overdone. A downside revision is a good bet, but I’d look for something closer to a revised growth level of 1.8%, given the propensities of the Bureau of Economic Analysis to offset inventory changes with adjustments to consumption.

 

__________

No. 316: CPI Inflation, Retail Sales, Trade and Liquidity

Sunday, August 15th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 316
CPI Inflation, Retail Sales, Trade and Liquidity

August 15, 2010

__________

July Annual Consumer Inflation: 1.2% (CPI-U), 8.6% (SGS)

Retail Sales Hint at Third-Quarter GDP Contraction

Widening Trade Deficit Will Dampen GDP in Revision

Economic and Liquidity Crises Continue

__________ 

PLEASE NOTE: This Commentary supplants the Special Notice posted Friday (August 13th), where more-complete analysis had been delayed by some technical problems.  The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Tuesday, August 17th, following release of July Industrial Production, Housing Starts and PPI.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

Intensified Economic and Liquidity Crises Continue. Economic reporting of this last week indicated that second-quarter GDP may suffer some downside revision (see Trade Deficit section), and that the third-quarter GDP might see renewed quarterly contraction (see Retail Sales section). After a plunge in activity and then a period of bottom-bouncing, with an upside blip from short-lived economic stimulus efforts, the U.S. economy has entered a period of re-intensified contraction. The renewed downturn had been signaled by the annual contraction of real (inflation-adjusted) annual M3 growth, back in December 2009 (see Real Money Supply in Retail Sales section).

With current projections for the federal budget deficit and related U.S. Treasury funding needs, as well the banking system’s solvency tests, all based on underlying assumptions of economic recovery and ongoing growth, the implications of continued economic downturn are horrendous in terms systemic risks and needed systemic liquidity.

Fed Gives Early Signal It Will Debase Currency to Prevent Systemic Collapse and/or Great Deflation. Those predicting deflation have reasons to do so, but I believe they are missing the nature of the U.S. government and central bank. To have a great deflation (in terms of consumer prices for goods and services), there needs to be some form of systemic collapse that helps to implode the money supply. (Issues in terms of inflation/deflation definitions and why collapsing debt does not trigger a quick onset of deflation all are discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report.)

The Fed and the federal government did everything in their power in 2008 to spend or to create whatever money was needed to prevent systemic collapse, and they prevailed, at least for a brief period. Yet, the same risks face the system in the near future. Despite the relative stability seen in the financial markets and financial system, at present, little has been accomplished fundamentally to help the economy or to provide long-term stability to most of the banking sector. Such should become painfully obvious to the markets in the months ahead, as the economy renews its tumbling and the system reflects the impact of same.

The nature of the Fed and the federal government is to prevent systemic collapse. A collapse is unthinkable; it would mean a complete failure by the Fed and the federal government in their primary functions. Accordingly, irrespective of political or election-year niceties, the Fed and the federal government will spend or create whatever further money is needed to forestall systemic collapse. Faced with devil’s choices — a hyperinflation also leads to systemic collapse — the course of action selected likely will be the one that buys the most time (printing money and hyperinflation).

Due to ongoing structural banking problems, the broad domestic money supply has been in contraction, the economy is turning down again, and the Fed is scared. It signaled that this week when it agreed to start monetizing some Treasury debt. Ultimately, the U.S. dollar should face massive dumping as foreign investors flee dollar-denominated paper assets, and the Fed appears to be doomed ultimately to become lender of last resort for the U.S. Treasury. Such monetization and the flood of dumped foreign-held dollars into the U.S. will lead to higher inflation. As promised by Mr. Bernanke in 2002 (again, see detail in the Hyperinflation report), a central bank always can debase its currency, creating inflation. Critics of that concept offer that the process did not work in Japan, but the Japanese were not out to debase the yen.

As risks for a likely U.S. dollar panic and Treasury debt monetization near — high risk of same in the next six-to-twelve months — the general outlook for the economy and the markets is unchanged. For those with soft assets denominated in U.S. dollars, circumstances continue to suggest looking at actions for long-range wealth preservation. Despite any severe near-term volatility in the markets, physical gold and silver, assets outside the U.S. dollar (such as the Canadian dollar, the Australian dollar and Swiss franc) and assets outside the United States, offer long-term hedges against the severe loss looming in U.S. dollar’s purchasing power.  

Chart of Gold versus Swiss Franc

Chart of Gold versus Oil

Chart of Gold versus Silver

As suggested by the above graphs, the gold market continues to look beyond short-term volatility in the financial markets, with the upside distortions in the U.S. dollar’s exchange rate and the downside distortions to oil prices perhaps starting to reverse.

 

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

Reversal of Gasoline-Price-Depressing Seasonal Factors Spiked July CPI and Will Do So Again in August. After a number of months where seasonal adjustment factors reduced reported gasoline-price inflation — depressing the level of adjusted headline CPI-U inflation — July’s seasonal-factor adjustments spiked gasoline prices, along with the various adjusted monthly CPI series. The shift in seasonals took a 0.1% monthly drop in unadjusted gasoline prices and turned it into an adjusted 4.6% monthly increase. Unadjusted August gasoline prices are running higher than July prices, promising a further spike in adjusted August inflation.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported Friday (August 13th) that the seasonally-adjusted June CPI-U rose by 0.31% (up by a statistically-insignificant 0.02%, unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval, not seasonally adjusted) for the month, after a 0.14% decline (down 0.10% unadjusted) in June. Seasonally-adjusted, the CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended July 2010 (July versus April) was virtually flat with a gain of 0.03%, against June’s decline of 1.46%. As the three-month spread crossed the changeover in monthly seasonal-adjustment impact on gasoline prices, unadjusted, the CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended July 2010 also was flat, against June’s gain of 0.62%.

Unadjusted, July’s year-to-year inflation was 1.24% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) against a 1.05% annual increase in June.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s August 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.37% adjusted monthly gain seen in August 2009. I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for August 2010, the difference in August’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from July 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.24%.

CPI-W. The narrower, seasonally-adjusted July CPI-W rose by 0.37% (up 0.03% unadjusted) for the month, following a decline of 0.19% (0.13% unadjusted) in June. Seasonally-adjusted, the annualized rate of CPI-W inflation for the three months ended July 2010 (July versus April) was a contraction of 0.37%, versus a decline of 2.39% in June. Unadjusted, the CPI-W annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended July 2010 was a decline of 0.11%, against a June gain of 0.59%.

Unadjusted year-to-year CPI-W inflation rose by 1.60% in July, versus a 1.36% June increase.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — is reported only on an unadjusted basis. Unadjusted, the C-CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended July 2010 (July versus April) was a 0.54% contraction, against June’s 0.27% gain.  Year-to-year, or annual inflation, was 1.02% in July 2010, versus 0.82% in June.

Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 4.5% (corrected from the 5.4% reported in the Special Notice) in July 2010, versus 4.3% in June, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was about 8.6% (8.57% for those using the extra digit) in July, versus 8.4% in June.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS (the series is not recalculated). Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the annual impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation. Despite the June 28th historic high gold price of $1,261.00 per troy ounce, gold and silver prices have yet to approach their historic high levels, adjusted for inflation. TheLondon afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 would be $2,382 per troy ounce, based on July 2010 CPI-U-adjusted dollars, and would be $7,727 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (all series not seasonally adjusted).  earlier all-time high of $850.00 (

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org) has not been hit since, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on July 2010 CPI-U inflation, the 1980 silver price peak would be $139 per troy ounce and would be $450 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars (again, all series not seasonally adjusted).

As shown on page 22 in the Hyperinflation report, over the decades, the price of gold has compensated for more than the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI-U inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the U.S. dollar based on the SGS-Alternate CPI.

Real Money Supply M3. The signal of the now unfolding intensification of the economic downturn, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), most recently was discussed and graphed in Commentary No. 315. The annual real contraction in June M3 (SGS-Ongoing) estimated for that Commentary was 6.7%. Based on today’s CPI-U report and final estimate on the July SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate, that annual contraction was 6.6%, narrower than June’s 6.9% contraction, and May’s post-World War II record annual decline of 7.9%. Updated below is the graph, which plots the year-to-year change in real M3 growth versus periods of official recession (as determined by the National Bureau of Economic Research).

 Chart of Real Inflation Adjusted M3

 

The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn or its duration. The current downturn signal was generated in December 2009. The broad economy tends to follow in downturn or intensification roughly six to nine months after the signal.

Retail Sales Generate Early Signal for Third-Quarter 2010 GDP Contraction. Consistent with an intensifying downturn — what popularly is being called a "double dip" recession — a renewed quarterly contraction in real (inflation adjusted) third-quarter 2010 GDP increasingly is a good bet, even as to be reported by the Bureau of Economic Analysis. The 0.4% seasonally-adjusted monthly gain reported for July retail sales was statistically indistinguishable from zero growth. After inflation adjustment, the real monthly gain was 0.1% percent. Even with some upside revisions to prior periods, the real July retail sales number was below the average for second-quarter 2010, opening up early indications of a quarterly contraction in third-quarter retail sales. Where the bulk of economic growth in the first-half of 2010 was due to inventory build-up (see Commentary No. 313), attempted inventory adjustments, in conjunction with contracting personal consumption, provide the fodder for a likely renewed GDP contraction. 

Reported Nominal Retail SalesFriday’s (August 13th) July 2010 retail sales report — issued by the Census Bureau — indicated a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.41% (up 0.70% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 0.28% (initially 0.51%) decline in June.

On a year-to-year basis, July 2010 retail sales were reported up by 5.52% from July 2009, versus a revised annual June gain of 5.18% (previously 4.80%). Annual changes still are working off the effects of the severe trough in activity seen somewhat over a year ago, while the Census Bureau plays games with the monthly seasonal factors and revisions to year-ago data.

Real Retail Sales.  Based on July 2010 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly July retail sales notched higher by 0.1%, where before inflation adjustment the current number was up by 0.4%, versus a revised 0.1% (was 0.4%) real monthly contraction in June. July real retail sales rose at a 4.2% year-to-year pace — up from June’s revised 4.0% (was 3.7%) annual pace — versus a 5.5% annual gain in July, before inflation adjustment.

On a quarter-to-quarter basis, real retail sales in second-quarter 2010 expanded at a 5.3% annualized pace, down from annualized growth of 6.6% in the first-quarter. Adjusted for inflation, seasonally-adjusted monthly retail sales in July are down at annualized pace of 1.1% versus the second-quarter, opening up the potential for a quarterly contraction in third-quarter retail sales.

Since November 2008, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $162.4 billion (the deflated July number was $166.7 billion). The first graph below reflects the relatively volatile monthly levels of real retail sales, as reported.

Smoothed for the monthly volatility on a six-month moving-average basis, as shown in the second graph, the pattern of activity here has been one of bottom-bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales. The recent bounce from short-lived stimulus factors and warped-seasonals appears largely to have run its course, with the average close to rolling over, and with continued lower real sales levels likely in the months ahead. There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity — no recovery — just general bottom-bouncing.

Chart of Inflation-Adjusted Retail Sales

Chart of Inflation-Adjusted Retail Sales

Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, "core" retail sales — consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation — are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: July versus June seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — gained by 0.2%, versus the official aggregate gain of 0.4%.

Version II: July versus June seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gasoline stations — also increased by 0.2% versus the official aggregate gain of 0.4%.

Please Note: Our Chart Library section on Retail Sales also shows charts of the various sub-sectors making up the overall Retail Sales figure. 

June Trade Deficit Surge Should Damage Second-Quarter GDP in Revision. A surge in the monthly trade deficit for June far exceeded the guesstimate made by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) in putting together its "advance" estimate of second-quarter 2010 GDP. Accordingly, that one item should knock off roughly 0.6 percentage points from the annualized real (inflation-adjusted) 2.4% initial guesstimate of annualized second-quarter real GDP growth. While other factors may come into play in further downside revisions to the GDP — the surplus in services trade may be revised lower, and some analysts in the popular financial media have suggested downside inventory adjustments — I caution that inventory revisions in the GDP by the BEA often have been offset by counter-revisions in consumption estimates.

Nominal (Not Adjusted for Inflation) Trade Deficit. For June 2010, the BEA and the Census Bureau reported (August 11th) that the nominal seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services rose to a much worse than expected $49.9 billion — the largest monthly trade shortfall since October 2008 — up from a revised $41.9 (previously $42.3) billion in May, and up sharply from the $27.1 billion monthly deficit in June 2009.

Against May 2010, the June trade balance showed a drop in exports and surge in imports, with the higher imports largely independent of seasonally-adjusted oil activity. Unadjusted oil imports reflected higher physical volume but lower oil prices. Specifically, for the month of June 2010, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $72.44 per barrel, versus $76.93 in May 2010 and $59.18 in June 2009. In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, June 2010 volume averaged 10.398 million barrels per day, versus 9.033 million in May 2010 and 9.402 million in June 2009.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit. A widening trade deficit directly reduces the reported level of and growth in GDP. The June trade number set-up a negative revision to the goods element of the net export component, in the upcoming the first revision to the second-quarter GDP (due August 27th).

As reported by the BEA, adjusted for seasonal factors and inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the first-quarter 2010 annualized merchandise trade deficit was a revised $509.8 (previously $507.3) billion. As indicated in the previous trade report, the second-quarter deficit was running at an annualized pace of $541.3 billion, but that stands now at $577.1 billion. Due to underlying assumptions used by the BEA in its GDP estimate, something shy of the full differential is likely to flow through to the revision. Important here is that this particular series is just the merchandise sector, which eventually has a paper trail behind it, from reporting by U.S. Customs. It does not include the services area, which largely is a guesstimate by the BEA, and which traditionally runs a smaller offsetting surplus to the merchandise deficit.    

Six-Month U.S. Trade Deficit Widened 35% versus Year Ago. Not seasonally adjusted, the U.S. trade deficit in goods and services widened by 35.0% to $293.756 billion in first-half 2010 versus $217.545 billion in first-half 2009. Much of the shortfall in trade was accounted for by the deficits with China, OPEC, NAFTA, the Euro Area and Japan.

The U.S. deficit with China, for the six months in 2010, widened by 15.9% to $119.452, from $103.075 billion the year before. Offsetting those numbers by the reported U.S. trade Surplus with Hong Kong left the net six-month 2010 deficit at $109.061 billion versus $95.104 billion, an increase of 14.7%.

The first-half 2010 U.S. deficit with OPEC rose 121.7% to $48.754 billion, from $21.994 billion the year before. The surge reflected an average 61.5% higher imported oil price in the 2010 versus 2009 period.

The U.S. deficit with NAFTA rose to $47.537 billion (Canada at $16.416 billion, Mexico at $31.121 billion) in first-half 2010, up 59.1% from $29.880 billion (Canada at $8.645 billion, Mexico at $21.235 billion). Some of the variability here was due to solvency problems in the U.S. auto industry.

The first-half 2010 U.S. deficit with the Euro Area rose 46.6% to $30.165 billion, from $20.580 billion the year before.

The first-half 2010 U.S. deficit with Japan rose 48.1% to $26.635 billion, from $17.986 billion the year before.

Broad Money Growth Down 5.4% Year-to-Year in July, Flattened Out Monthly in June and July. Having shown a pattern of deepening annual contraction since December 2009, the SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate showed a slightly narrower annual decline in July than in June. Reflecting a series of major revisions in the last month by the Federal Reserve to underlying data, and reflecting flattening monthly growth in the current period against year-ago monthly declines, the SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate for July 2010 showed an annual contraction of 5.4%, versus a post-World War II record trough of a 5.9% contraction in June, which had deepened slightly from a 5.8% contraction in May. While the recent annual contractions were narrowed minimally by the data revisions, the basic patterns remained very much intact.

The data are based on seasonally-adjusted estimates of the Federal Reserve for key components, but even when the Fed reported the full M3, the seasonals often were suspect. Accordingly I view minor month-to-month changes in the estimated monthly M3 level to be flat. The patterns of year-to-year change in the latest M1, M2 and M3 numbers are shown in the accompanying graph.  Reflected in the slight narrowing of the annual M3 contraction is the flattening of the monthly M3 numbers, not an improvement, but also not further monthly deterioration, at the moment.

 

 Chart of Money Supply Growth. M1, M2 and M3

Credit Squeeze Continues. As shown in the graphs below, the contraction in short-term credit continues. In the first two graphs, both Consumer Credit Outstanding and Commercial and Industrial Loans still are contracting month-to-month. The slight narrowing shown in the annual paces of contraction, again, reflects only a less-severe pace of downturn at the moment, versus the year-before month. The numbers remain in historic contraction.

A subscriber properly noted that the Total Commercial Paper Outstanding number includes financial institutions (and asset-backed securities), as well as non-financial institutions, so I have also added a plot on the non-financial sector, where the monthly volatility has been greater and changes more positive, recently, than in the total sector. The non-financial sector monthly improvements, though, are more in line with bottom-bouncing than a significant upturn, and annual change remains negative, though it is becoming less so. Commercial and industrial loans dominate the non-financial sector commercial paper in terms of volume, and when the two series are combined in an aggregate business loan series, the pattern of ongoing credit contraction is intact.

 

Chart of Total Consumer Credit Outstanding

Chart of Total Commercial and Industrial Loans

Chart of Total Commercial Paper Outstanding

Chart of Non-Financial Commercial Paper Outstanding

Please Note: The charts above are taken from the new "Credit" section.of our Chart Library. 

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Increasingly, that will be seen in economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Industrial Production (July 2010).  Due for release on Tuesday, August 17th, July production is expected by the consensus to increase by 0.6%, per Briefing.com. Shy of an unseasonable surge in utility usage from unusual weather patterns, which also would spike certain manufacturing production components estimated from utility usage, and dependent on how the Fed seasonally adjusts unusual auto production patterns versus last year, look for weaker-than-expected monthly production. Properly adjusted, monthly production should be flat to minus.

Residential Construction — Housing Starts (July 2010). Housing starts data, due for release on Tuesday, August 17th, are likely to show their usual random volatility, with a monthly change that is not statistically meaningful.

Producer Price Index — PPI (July 2010). Due for release on Tuesday, August 17th, the PPI is due for a boost from a reversal in seasonal factors that recently have depressed oil-related inflation. Accordingly, an upside surprise to expectations is a fair bet for this somewhat randomly volatile series.

 __________

Special Notice

Friday, August 13th, 2010

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

SPECIAL NOTICE — August 13, 2010

________________

 Retail Sales Hint at Third-Quarter GDP Contraction

________________

 

Brief Observations on Today’s Data. As noted below, posting of the full Commentary planned for today has been pushed into this weekend. Nonetheless, here are a couple of observations on this morning’s CPI and retail sales reporting, which respectively were slightly stronger and weaker than consensus estimates.

July’s rebounding seasonally-adjusted month-to-month 0.31% CPI-U inflation (versus down 0.14% in June) and July’s unadjusted year-to-year 1.24% gain (versus 1.05% in June), partially reflected a swing in seasonal factors that now will be boosting adjusted gasoline prices for several months. The SGS alternative estimates for July annual inflation are 4.5% (1990-base, Pre-Clinton), 8.6% — 8.57% to the second digit — (1980-base).

The 0.41% seasonally-adjusted monthly gain reported for July Retail Sales was statistically indistinguishable from zero growth. After inflation adjustment, the real monthly gain was 0.10% percent. Even with some upside revision to prior periods, the inflation-adjusted July number was below the average for second-quarter 2010. That opens up a fair chance of real third-quarter retail sales contracting versus the second-quarter, with a suggestion that third-quarter GDP could show an outright quarterly contraction, even as reported by the government. Full details will follow in the Commentary. 

 

Brief Delay for Commentary No. 316. Due to technical problems with Internet access and related timely processing of this morning’s economic information, posting of today’s scheduled Commentary would have been delayed until after the New York markets had closed. With the availability of new banking data late today (i.e. final July SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate), I have decided to incorporate same in the report and will publish the Commentary over this weekend, including analysis of this week’s retail sales, trade deficit and CPI reporting, as well as an update to the broad liquidity circumstance, bank lending and the general inflation outlook.

The SGS Alternate-CPI data and graphs, as well as the CPI calculator have been updated to reflect today’s reporting. I apologize for the delay and any inconvenience it may cause.

Best wishes to all, John Williams

No. 315: Updated Outlook, July Employment and Unemployment

Friday, August 6th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 315
Updated Outlook, July Employment and Unemployment

August 6, 2010

__________

Re-Intensifying Depression Foreshadows Great Crises

July Payrolls Fell 131,000, Gained 12,000 Ex-Census Layoffs

June’s 100,000 Ex-Census Payroll Gain Revised to 4,000

July Employment Dropped by 159,000 (Household Survey)

July Unemployment: 9.5% (U.3), 16.5% (U.6), 21.7% (SGS)

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for, Friday, August 13th, following release of July retail sales and CPI data. An intervening Commentary on liquidity is likely around mid-week.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

Crises Loom, as Longer and Deeper Downturn Re-Intensifies. Recent data have confirmed that the current downturn not only has been deeper than previously thought (see Commentary No. 313), but also that it started in first-quarter 2007, some three quarters before its official onset (see GDI comments) and before the onset of the systemic solvency crisis. As long contended, the recession was one of the proximal triggers of the solvency crisis, which, in turn, exacerbated the downturn. 

The unfolding renewed decline in economic activity now is likely to be one of the proximal triggers for an even greater systemic solvency crisis, one that will pummel the U.S. dollar, threaten the solvency of the U.S. government and set the stage for a hyperinflation in the United States. In turn, such a crisis would exacerbate the intensifying downturn into a hyperinflationary great depression (see Hyperinflation Special Report).   

As suggested by the deterioration and revisions in today’s labor market report, the recently-hailed economic recovery has all but evaporated. Increased impairment of broad U.S. business activity reflects contracting real (inflation-adjusted) liquidity and the ongoing structural impairment of consumer income. Annual contraction in the SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate nine months ago signaled renewed economic contraction would be underway by around this time. 

Market recognition of the re-intensified downturn is spreading, along with recognition of sharply negative implications for the federal budget deficit, for Treasury funding needs, for banking system solvency, etc. In response, the U.S. dollar should come under heavy selling pressure, with eventual heavy dumping of U.S. dollar denominated assets. Coincident with those dollar pressures, the Federal Reserve likely also will find itself the lender of last resort to a U.S. Treasury having difficulties meeting its funding needs. Direct monetization of Treasury debt would result. 

Fears of deflation, of renewed recession, of renewed banking troubles already are pushing some to call for new and direct Fed action. That should come, overtly or otherwise, as likely will new bailouts from the federal government of the system, ranging from the unemployed and insolvent states to the banking system, again. As the markets increasingly move away from the dollar in response, however, the risks will be for inflation, not deflation, in terms of consumer prices. With the timing of the renewed economic decline and nascent movement away from the dollar apparently, at hand, I view the next six months to one year to be of particularly high risk for a U.S. dollar panic and resulting spike in domestic inflation, which, in turn, should feed into hyperinflation.

The broad outlook is unchanged, but the timing of the onset of the U.S. dollar crisis is coming into better focus as it moves closer. Holding physical gold and silver, holding assets outside the U.S. dollar (I still like in particular the Australian and Canadian dollars and the Swiss franc), and holding some assets physically outside the U.S. continue to be the primary hedges for those looking to preserve their wealth and assets, to preserve the purchasing power of their U.S. dollars in the extraordinary times ahead. 

Revisions and More Long-Term Discouraged Workers Do Not Suggest Happy Labor Conditions. Against what the markets saw in place with the June employment report, July payrolls fell by 85,000, net of the effects of the volatility in temporary 2010 census hires. As a result of weakness being revised into prior-period reporting, though, July’s ex-census payrolls were reported with a 12,000 jobs gain.  With those revisions, reported seasonally-adjusted payrolls have been virtually flat for three months, where ex-census jobs changes were up by 21,000 in May, up by 4,000 (up 100,000 before revisions) in June, and up by 12,000 in July.   With likely revisions in the months ahead and with the benchmark revisions to be published in February 2011, those monthly changes almost certainly will turn negative, with the last vestiges of an overly hyped and desperately hoped for "recovery" disappearing.

July’s headline U.3 unemployment rate held at a seasonally-adjusted 9.5%, but not because of a stable employment environment. To the contrary, continued shrinkage of the labor force (as tallied for U.3) in absolute terms, as well as proportionate to the population, reflects an increasing number of longer-term unemployed giving up looking for work and moving from the headline U.3 category into the short-term discouraged worker category included in the broader U.6 unemployment rate. The July U.6 unemployment rate, however, also held even with June, at a seasonally-adjusted 16.5%.  What appears to be happening here is that as short-term discouraged workers pass their first year as such, they are dropping off the unemployment rolls into the officially-ignored long-term discouraged worker category, where the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Rate notched higher to 21.7% in July (see discussion in Commentary No. 308).   I still am working on a series of charts detailing the universes of both the short- and long-term discouraged workers. At such time as those charts are introduced, I also plan to review the substantial negative impact of illegal immigration on the national employment and unemployment circumstance.

Payroll Survey. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported today (August 6th) a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted July 2010 jobs loss of 131,000 (down by 228,000 before prior-period revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval). Net of the included layoffs of 143,000 intermittent and temporary census hires, July payrolls gained a statistically-insignificant 12,000 jobs (a loss of 85,000 before prior-period revisions). The reported gain in private sector payrolls was 71,000 (up by 37,000 before prior-period revisions) for the month, which masked a plunge in other government jobs that brought the total ex-census gain to that 12,000 figure. 

Against July’s total jobs loss of 131,000, a jobs gain net of census impact of 12,000, and a jobs gain of 71,000 in the private sector, June showed a revised monthly total jobs loss of 221,000 (previously a loss of 125,000), a jobs gain net of census impact of just 4,000 (previously 100,000), and a jobs gain in the private sector of 31,000 (previously an 83,000 gain).

Based on the patterns of hiring and firing temporary workers for the 2000 census, census layoffs from the 2010 census will continue to have major negative impact on reported payroll changes through September.

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; December 2009 is the likely short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment declined by a seasonally-adjusted 8,363,000 jobs, or 6.1%.

The pace of reported monthly change has turned relatively less negative versus year-ago comparisons of sharp month-to-month declines. The year-to-year contraction in total nonfarm payrolls flattened to a decline of 0.01% (a contraction of 0.16% net of surviving census hires), from June’s revised 0.14% (previously 0.05%) aggregate annual contraction, and a revised 0.39% (previously 0.30%) annual contraction for June net of census effects.

The current annual declines have narrowed from the post-World War II record 4.96% decline in July 2009. The July 2009 decline was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II, which reflected a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945. Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the current annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression. 

The long-term graph of year-to-year payroll change reflects the numbers as reported, with no adjustment for census hiring variations. The second graph, however, shows the year-to-year detail both with and without the census hires.   

 

 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business, on a timely basis (within five years), such information is estimated by the Birth-Death Model. Unusual birth-death activity continued in July 2010, with the monthly birth-death adjustment adding 16,000 more jobs relative to what it did in July 2009, a pattern contrary to what would be suggested by recent BLS reporting difficulties that understated declines in payroll employment.

Based now on the "assumption" of economic recovery, the bias factors used in the last four months of payroll reporting have been 27.8% ahead of what they were reset to after the most recent and disastrous benchmark revision. Positive assumptions — commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling — can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with "stronger" economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates.

Historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels — to understate employment declines — during recessions. These flaws were confirmed by the nature of the BLS’s massive downside benchmark revision published with the January 2010 jobs report, where the BLS had indicated that underlying assumptions to the Birth-Death Model were missing significant jobs losses due to business failures that the BLS could not measure. 

Although the upside bias had been scaled down some from the year before as a result of the reporting errors, the Birth-Death Model survives and remains a major distorting factor in monthly payroll reporting. The unsupportable premise that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business, continues. So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, presumed additional "surplus" jobs, created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor. These add-factors are running at about 50,000 per month, at present. I estimate this monthly bias should be negative by 200,000 or so, on average. Since it is not, the BLS continues regularly to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 250,000 jobs. Such misreporting, however, will not be corrected until the next benchmark revision is published in February 2011, well after the November elections.

That said, the unadjusted July 2010 bias was a monthly addition of 6,000 jobs, versus a subtraction of 10,000 jobs in July 2009, and against a monthly addition of 147,000 jobs in May 2010.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (which includes multiple job holders), showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly employment contraction of 159,000 in July, following a reported decline of 301,000 in June, irrespective of census jobs impact. As with last month’s data, the series appears to be experiencing major distortions from inappropriate seasonal-adjustments for temporary census worker employment.   Since a number of the part-time census workers already would be counted as employed due to other part-time or full-time employment, accurately quantifying the impact of census employment variations on unemployment is not possible.

Where I fully expected that some portion of the census layoffs would have at least pushed the unemployment rate minimally higher in the last two months, such did not happen. Nonetheless, sharp upside movements in the unemployment rate in the next several months still should be seen as these distortions are reversed, and as the intensifying economic downturn takes its toll. Also, as discussed earlier, an increasing numbers of longer-term unemployed counted in U.3 unemployment are rolling into the short-term discouraged worker category, with a portion thereof rolling into the long-term discouraged worker category.

The July 2010 seasonally-adjusted headline U.3 unemployment rate held at 9.51% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval). July’s unchanged level from June’s 9.51% just as easily could have come in at 9.3% or 9.7%, given the statistical-confidence interval of the series. Not seasonally adjusted, July’s U.3 unemployment rate rose to 9.7% from 9.6% in June. 

July U.6 unemployment held at a seasonally-adjusted 16.5% (fell to 16.4% unadjusted) versus 16.5% (16.8% unadjusted) in June.

In 1994, during the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers. The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding my estimate of the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed, unemployment — more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — notched higher to about 21.7% in July, from 21.6% in June, reflecting some of the unemployed who became short-term discouraged workers a year ago disappearing into the long-term discouraged category. The SGS estimate generally is built on top of the official U.6 reporting and tends to follow its relative monthly movements. See the Alternate Data tab for a graph and more detail.

As discussed previously, while 21.7% unemployment might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession. The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms. Today, less that 2% work on farms. Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.{{end}

 

Gross Domestic Income Revisions Suggest Onset of Recession in First-Quarter 2007, not in Fourth-Quarter 2007. Further review of the July 30th annual revisions to the GDP and related accounts, as well as of the "advance" estimate of second-quarter 2010 GDP has led to several additional observations. The broad picture detail is covered in Commentary No. 313.

GDP Inflation Spike in Second-Quarter GDP. For those readers who queried as to why the GDP inflator for second-quarter GDP was up at an annualized 1.8%, versus an annualized 0.7% contraction in the CPI-U for the same period, the answer is in declining prices for imported oil, exacerbated by seasonal adjustments. In the GDP calculation, exports are added on top of the other consumption numbers, while imports are subtracted as an economic negative. This process reverses the impact of inflation or deflation in the import category, where declining imported oil prices ended up spiking GDP inflation.

GDI Revisions Show Earlier Onset to the Recession.  In the double-entry bookkeeping of national income reporting, Gross Domestic Income (GDI) is the income-side equivalent to the consumption-side Gross Domestic Product (GDP). Since GDI and GDP are surveyed separately, though, they rarely are the same, with equality forced by the addition or subtraction of a "statistical discrepancy" to the GDI side of the equation. Where the GDP is the headline number so carefully massaged to meet financial-market and political needs, I like to use the cleaner GDI, net of the statistical discrepancy, as a tool for assessing what really is being picked up in the national income numbers.

Following are three graphs. The first two show annualized quarterly growth rates first of GDP and then GDI, both before and after the annual revisions. The third graph shows the current reporting of the annualized quarterly growth rates for GDI and GDP. Please note that second-quarter 2010 GDI will not be estimated until next month.

While the GDI had been showing a pattern of more protracted and weaker growth than the GDP, revisions to the GDI now clearly show recession beginning in first-quarter 2007, instead of fourth-quarter 2007 as formally timed by the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), official arbiter of U.S. recessions.

 

Signal for Intensification of the Economic Downturn. As discussed in frequent Commentaries this year (see Commentary No. 308 for example), declining year-to-year change in real (inflation-adjusted) M3 signals a pending economic downturn or pending intensification of an existing economic contraction, with contracting broad liquidity invariably constraining broad economic activity. The signal is generated when real M3 first turns negative year-to-year, which occurred in December 2009 in the current economic cycle. The signal is not generated by, nor dependent on either the length or the depth of the M3 downturn. The downside shift in business activity usually follows within six to nine months, which encompasses the current period. 

The following updated graph plots annual real M3 growth versus periods of recession formally recognized by the NBER. It includes approximate annual real contraction in the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate as of July 2010. The July M3 estimate used here is an annual real contraction of roughly 6.7% versus a 6.9% contraction in June and a 7.9% contraction in May. Such reflects a combination of softer inflation rates as well as year-ago comparisons with weakening broad money growth. Details will be discussed in the next Commentary, which will review the broad liquidity outlook and the money supply circumstance. The formal preliminary estimate for the SGS Ongoing M3 Measure for July will be posted this weekend of August 7th on the Alternate Data page for M3.

At present, the pace of annual contraction in nominal July M3 is on track to hit 5.4%, versus 5.9% in June, reflecting a flattening of month-to-month change and annual comparison against a pace of slowing growth in the year-ago period. Such is qualified by the ongoing choppy nature of recent weekly reporting in the major M3 components.

 

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Increasingly, that will be seen in economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Trade Balance (June 2010). Due for release on Wednesday, August 11th, the June trade balance would affect the first revision to second-quarter GDP, if results showed unusually large improvement or deterioration. I would look for deterioration, with a possible downside revision to GDP growth.

Retail Sales (July 2010). Due for release on Friday, August 13th, July retail sales are likely to disappoint what should be relatively soft expectations, again reflecting the re-intensifying economic downturn. Month-to-month change should be negative after adjustment for inflation, confirming contracting economic activity.

Consumer Price Index — CPI (July 2010). Due for release on Friday, August 13th, the July CPI-U should surprise likely consensus expectations on the upside. Although gasoline prices were flat month-to-month for July (per the Department of Energy), a major swing in seasonal factors will give gasoline prices and the CPI a monthly boost, beginning to catch up on energy-based inflation that had been muted by seasonal factors of recent months. 

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in July 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.10% adjusted monthly gain seen in July 2009. I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for July 2010, the difference in July’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from June 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.05%.

__________

No. 314: Updated July Employment Outlook

Thursday, August 5th, 2010
 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 314

Updated July Employment Outlook

August 5, 2010
__________

Labor Conditions Likely Worse than Consensus

Timing for Next Phase of Crises Coming into Better Focus

__________
 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for tomorrow, Friday, August 6th, following the release of the July employment and unemployment data.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 
General Outlook is Unchanged, as Timing NarrowsAs speculation begins to mount of renewed economic downturn and of new actions by the Fed to intensify systemic liquidity, as the President’s approval rating (historically a key reflection of confidence in the U.S. dollar) continues to soften, as the U.S. dollar begins to move to the center stage for investors concerned about sovereign solvencies, the timing of the looming U.S. financial Armageddon is coming into better focus, with increasingly high risk of it breaking within the next six months to a year. While the timing is narrowing, the general outlook has not changed, as will be discussed in some detail in tomorrow’s Commentary.

This morning’s brief missive just updates the outlook for the July 2010 payroll employment change and unemployment rate. Any further analysis of the July 30th annual GDP revisions will be included along with the analysis of the labor market conditions and the general review of the broad economic and financial conditions tomorrow.

As noted in the last Commentary, the July labor numbers — due for release on Friday, August 6th — remain a good bet to be more negative than an already-soft consensus. Briefing.com reports that last week’s expectations of a 116,000 decline in monthly payrolls have narrowed to a contraction of 87,000. That number includes layoffs of temporary and intermittent census workers in July, which will be roughly 144,000 (per Census reporting; payroll-survey week includes the 12th of the month), implying an expected monthly gain for nonfarm payrolls at about 57,000, ex-census workers. In June, payrolls declined by 125,000, gaining 100,000 ex-census. "Private sector" data largely are being hyped as surrogates for the ex-census counts, but such ignores a general trend of contraction otherwise in government employment, particularly at the state and local level. Total ex-census includes the changes in other government employment.

Briefing.com continues to report a consensus July U.3 unemployment rate at 9.6%, up from June’s 9.5%.   

Increasingly reflecting softening economic activity, along with some reversals of distortions from recent reporting issues, July nonfarm payrolls should show an outright monthly contraction, ex-census workers, with the unemployment rate jumping more than expected, to perhaps 9.7% or 9.8%. A 10.0% unemployment rate is not out of the question, depending on how much catch-up there is reversing prior reporting problems.

Please keep in mind that any monthly change in payrolls ex-census within a range of plus or minus 129,000, or any change in the unemployment rate within plus or minus 0.2 percentage points, is not statistically meaningful at the 95% confidence interval. That means that such a gain or loss is statistically indistinguishable from no change or from a move in the direction opposite from that reported.    

Data from related underlying economic series generally have been flat to slightly positive in reporting of the last week. The Conference Board’s help-wanted advertising (newspapers) continued bottom-bouncing in June (which leads July reporting), holding at 10 for the eighth straight month, while help-wanted advertising (online) in July — which leads August — gained 4.3% for the month. Due to the relative newness of the latter series, it is hard to assess the meaningfulness yet of monthly changes (other factors for example include shifting Internet dynamics). The July online gain followed a monthly gain of 2.6% in June.

Both purchasing managers surveys (manufacturing and non-manufacturing) had somewhat higher readings in July, with the diffusion index (a reading above 50.0 indicates expansion) rising from 57.8 in June to 58.6 in July for manufacturing, and rising from 49.7 in June to 50.9 July. Giving leading relationships to payroll reporting, the numbers relevant here for the July payrolls are the June surveys, which had shown sharp monthly declines in the two employment indices.

 
__________

 

No. 313: Second-Quarter GDP and Revisions

Friday, July 30th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 313
Second-Quarter GDP and Revisions

July 30, 2010
__________

Worst Economic Downturn Since World War II Just Got Worse

Bulk of First-Half GDP Growth Due to Inventories,
Setting Up Likely Third-Quarter Contraction

Lingering Market Hopes for Recovery Should Fade Quickly

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, August 6th, following the release of the July employment and unemployment data.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

A Business Downturn of Intensifying Severity. GDP revisions back to first-quarter 2007 confirmed that the economic downturn has been more severe than previously reported, while rising inventories and slowing growth — indicated in the "advance" estimate of second-quarter 2010 GDP — have set the stage for renewed quarterly GDP contraction in third-quarter 2010. While such likely will be recognized as a "double-dip" recession in the popular media, this particularly deep and protracted contraction — the worst of the post-World War II era — has been an ongoing economic disaster, with no intervening recovery to delineate between two periods of sharp decline. 

The initial plummet in activity was followed by a protracted period of economic bottom-bouncing along a low-level plateau of business activity, with a slight upside bounce in statistics reflecting a combination of short-lived impact from stimulus activity and data distortions due to the extreme nature of the downturn in the context of an economic reporting environment never designed to handle such a circumstance. In December 2009, a downturn in real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (SGS Ongoing M3 Estimate) signaled that low-level-of-activity stagnation would turn to intensified or renewed downturn in roughly six-to-nine months (see Commentary No. 308). In the appropriate timeframe, that signal now has started to prove out in the reporting of a number key economic series.

This cartoon from Jim Sinclair’s jsminset.com pretty much catches where we are in the current business cycle. The economy remains in a ski-jump-shaped downturn, as traced out by the path of a novice skier, and, indeed, the economy is tumbling into an unhappy freefall. I thank Mr. Sinclair and his organization for allowing our use of the image.

This pattern of economic growth increasingly should be confirmed in the regular economic reporting of the next several months. Such also should help Federal Reserve Chairman Bernanke to clarify his views on the "unusually uncertain" economic environment. Contracting broad liquidity is a direct cause of reduced business activity. As a separate issue, the chronic structural problems driving this downturn have not been addressed either by the government or the Fed. Accordingly, this re-intensifying economic contraction should not be a shock to any of the policymakers in Washington.

As discussed with last month’s GDP analysis, decades of unsound U.S. fiscal, monetary, financial-regulatory and trade policies — policies known by the various Administrations, Congresses and Fed Chairmen to have been unsound but that catered to political and/or special-interest needs — have culminated in the current crises. The United States led the global financial system into the current systemic solvency crisis and into the current severe economic downturn.

Only politicians and Federal Reserve officials without viable options and Wall Street hypesters would claim that the current structural economic depression could be turned fundamentally by short-lived stimulus measures. Now, as the unaddressed structural issues reassert themselves, the problems at home are at the base of the renewed systemic woes, not European market concerns.

As discussed in the Hyperinflation and Consumer Liquidity Special Reports, U.S. households suffer contracting real income. This is a structural issue that has evolved over decades as an offshoot of domestic trade policies. Where consumers accounted for 72.8% of the just-estimated second-quarter 2010 GDP (including housing), sustained real economic growth — sustained positive real growth in personal consumption — is impossible without positive real growth in consumer income. Temporary economic growth can be generated with the debt expansion — as Mr. Greenspan encouraged when he was Federal Reserve Chairman — but the recent systemic solvency crisis has triggered a severe debt contraction.

The intensifying economic contraction has serious consequences that generally do not seem to have surfaced yet in financial-market concerns — consequences that are unexpected — including unexpected additional explosive growth in the federal deficit, an unexpected further surge in Treasury funding needs, and unexpected renewed solvency concerns for the banking system. Such conditions are bad news for the U.S. equity and credit markets.

The broad outlook is unchanged. The economy still is in a particularly severe and protracted downturn. The consequences of that and the extreme fiscal abuses practiced by the U.S. government over decades promise a shift in global market concerns to the U.S. dollar, with an eventual massive flight from the U.S. currency and a U.S. inflation surge that should lead into hyperinflation. Over the long haul, those with dollar-denominated paper assets would do well to consider preserving their wealth and assets. Irrespective of possibly extreme near-term volatility in the various markets, gold, silver, stronger currencies (such as the Canadian and Australian dollars and Swiss franc) and assets outside the U.S. dollar and even outside the United States should be the best bets for accomplishing that long-term wealth preservation.  

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

Slowing Growth in Second-Quarter GDP. This morning’s (July 30th) first reporting of second-quarter 2010 GDP and annual revisions in the GDP series back to first-quarter 2007 showed slowing growth in the latest quarter, following upwardly revised growth in first-quarter 2010, despite a broad downward revision to the earlier data, and a net aggregate downward revision to the size of the GDP as of first-quarter 2010. The historical revisions are discussed in a later section. GDP inflation for the second-quarter showed an unusual and sharp pick-up.

The upside revision to first-quarter 2010 growth from 2.74% to 3.73% was due largely to upped estimates in inventory growth, which accounted for 71% of the first-quarter’s total gain. Revised real growth was 1.09% for first-quarter final sales, or GDP net of inventory changes. Inventory gains also accounted for 44% of the 2.39% total growth in the second-quarter, with real final sales growth of 1.34%. 

If consumption continues to contract, as has been seen in retail sales of the last couple of months, the recent build-up in inventories would be subject to normal business-cycle fluctuations, with production cut-backs, reduced inventories and a contracting GDP a fair bet for third-quarter 2010.

GDP.  Published today by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the "advance" or first estimate of second-quarter 2010 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) was estimated at a statistically-insignificant annualized real growth rate of 2.39% (down at an annualized 0.67% net of benchmark revisions) +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised 3.73% (previously 2.74%) estimate of real annualized growth in the first-quarter. The year-to-year change in real second-quarter GDP was estimated at 3.17%, up from a downwardly revised 2.39% (previously 2.42%) in the first-quarter.

The GDP implicit price deflator — inflation measure — showed an annualized pace of inflation in second-quarter 2010 of 1.83%, up from a revised 1.05% (was 1.12%) in the first-quarter.  In an unusual divergence, annualized inflation for the CPI-U in the second-quarter was a contraction of 0.72% versus a positive 1.53% in the first-quarter. The higher the inflation rate used in deflating the GDP, the weaker is the inflation-adjusted number and vice versa.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for second-quarter 2010 is an approximate annual contraction of 1.3% versus the official estimate of a 3.2% gain, less-negative than the annual 1.5% contraction (2.4% official gain) estimated in the first-quarter. While annualized real quarterly growth is not formally estimated on an alternative basis, a small quarter-to-quarter gain likely would have been realistic for the first-quarter. The relative upturn in annual change reflects the bottom-bouncing at low levels of activity seen for much of the last year in key underlying economic series, not an economic recovery. As discussed in the opening comments, an intensified downturn appears to be unfolding (see the Alternate Data tab).

GNP and GDI (see Sidebar). Estimates of Gross National Product (GNP) and Gross Domestic Income (GDI) for second-quarter 2010 GDP will not be published until next month, at the earliest, due to the lack significance in early national income estimations. The GDP estimate is largely worthless at this point in time, as well, yet it receives heavy media hype. 

Historical Revisions Showed Steeper GDP Decline. The following covers primarily the annual revisions to GDP data from first-quarter 2007 to first-quarter 2010. The GDP’s implicit price deflator, nominal data, and the GDI and GDP all were revised for the same period. Those numbers and the impact of some unusual methodological changes will be reviewed over this weekend. Anything of interest will be discussed in the next Commentary

Annual growth (or contraction) rates for both the real and nominal numbers were lower (more negative) in each year, 2007 to 2009, after the revisions. While there were some shifting patterns of relative strength and weakness, the directions of quarterly changes were not reversed in any instance. In terms of annual change, fourth-quarter 2008 nominal GDP turned negative from flat, as did third-quarter 2008 real GDP.

At the end-point of first-quarter 2010, the aggregate of all revisions left nominal GDP 1.00% lower than previously reported and left real GDP 0.90% lower.

The following graphs show the level and the quarterly and annual growth changes in real GDP from the revisions. These patterns are typical for annual GDP revisions, where near-term GDP usually is overstated due to upside biases in the system, some of which get reversed out over the years. Accordingly, strength still reflected in the most recent quarters should evaporate significantly in next year’s revisions.

The fourth graph shows the year-to-year growth pattern of real quarterly GDP for its entire reporting history. The record annual contraction as of second-quarter 2009 GDP held in place, deepening to a 4.11% contraction from prior reporting of a 3.83% contraction.

 

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Increasingly, that will be seen in economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Payroll Employment and Unemployment Rate (July 2010). Due for release on Friday, August 6th, the July labor numbers remain a good bet to be more negative than an already-soft consensus. Briefing.com reports expectations of a 116,000 decline in monthly payrolls. That number includes layoffs of temporary and intermittent census workers in July, which will be roughly 144,000 (per Census reporting), implying a minimal monthly gain for nonfarm payrolls, expected at about 28,000, ex-census workers. In June, payrolls declined by 125,000, gaining 100,000 ex-census. Briefing.com also reports a consensus July U.3 unemployment rate at 9.6%, up from June’s 9.5%. 

I expect July nonfarm payrolls to show an outright monthly contraction, ex-census workers, with the unemployment rate jumping more than expected. 

The Conference Board’s help-wanted advertising (newspapers) continued bottom-bouncing in June (which leads July reporting), holding at 10 for the eighth straight month. The outlook for the reporting of July labor conditions will be updated next week, as other data from related underlying series become available.    

 

__________

No. 312: Durable Goods, Home Sales, Upcoming GDP Revisions

Wednesday, July 28th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 312

 

Durable Goods, Home Sales, Upcoming GDP Revisions

July 28, 2010
__________

Restated Downturn Should Be More Severe

Nonsense Home-Sales Reporting

Roughly 144,000 Census Jobs Lost in July

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, July 30th, following the release of the "advance" estimate of second-quarter 2010 GDP and the annual GDP revisions, which will restate economic history back to the first-quarter 2007.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

U.S. Economy Slows Anew. With a weakening labor market, softer consumer confidence, softening housing activity and retail sales, and an intensifying trade deficit, the early stages of a renewed economic decline — what likely will be popularized as a "double-dip" recession — have begun to unfold. Accordingly, most business reporting in the months ahead will tend to show patterns of accelerating contraction. A detailed economic review will be included the Commentary on Friday (July 30th), following the "advance" estimate of second-quarter GDP and annual GDP revisions.

GDP Revisions Should Show More Severe Contraction. Based on a review of benchmark revisions that have been published this year for various series, including payrolls, retail sales, trade balance and industrial production, the pending annual GDP revisions should tend to show a deeper and possibly longer recession than previously reported, with the contraction most noticeably more-severe in 2008 and early-2009. There appears to be an effort to show more of a recovery, beginning in the second-half of 2009, but any relative gains that appear there likely will disappear in the next round of annual revisions in 2011.  

New Orders for Durable Goods Stalled Again. The Census Bureau reported this morning (July 28th) that the regularly volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods fell by 1.0% (down by 0.8% net of revisions) in June, after a revised 0.8% (previously 1.1%) decline in May. Unadjusted, year-to-year change in June 2010 new orders was a gain of 15.9%, following a revised 15.9% (previously 15.3%) increase in May. The recent benchmark revision appears to have built in something of an upside sampling bias to the monthly numbers. Nonetheless, the two most recent reports have shown monthly pullbacks in new orders. In this extremely variable series, however, next month’s reporting likely will see a heavy boost from long-term, multi-year airplane orders. 

The widely followed nondefense capital goods declined by 1.6%, seasonally-adjusted, for the month in June, after a revised 0.6% (previously 2.8%) decline in May. For June, the unadjusted year-to-year change in the series was up by 18.8%, versus a revised May annual gain of 21.7% (previously reported at 18.9%).

Meaningless Home Sales Numbers Serve as Fodder for Irrational Stock Market. The monthly new home sales data simply cannot be taken at face value.  The numbers are of such poor quality and of such minimal statistical significance that one has to wonder why the Census Bureau even bothers to report them. Census might consider holding back the data six months, or so, until the regular and volatile revisions stabilize. The only value for the June new home sales numbers was in the realm of Wall Street hypesters trying to support irrationally high stock prices for a couple of hours.

Monday’s (July 26th) release of May new home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) showed sales soaring by 23.6% (up just 10.0% net of prior-period revisions) +/- 17.9% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a revised 36.7% collapse (a 40.1% decline before prior-period revisions, and, as initially reported, a 32.7% drop). 

Aside from rarely having any statistical significance at the 95% confidence level, the monthly new homes sales numbers tend to suffer extreme revisions. Consider that April 2010’s sales were revised downward from initial reporting of 504,000, to 446,000 with May’s report, and to 422,000 with the June report. May’s sales initially were reported at 300,000 (a record low) and were revised to 267,000 (a new record low) with the June report. June’s monthly "surge" was off the downwardly-revised May data. The June level of 330,000 annualized sales is the lowest on record, except for the current reporting on May.

The July 22nd report of June existing home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) was more stable than the new home sales reporting, but not too much more meaningful. June sales fell by a seasonally-adjusted 5.1%, versus an unrevised 2.2% monthly contraction in May.

Foreclosure activity remained a major distortion in these numbers, with NAR estimating 32% of new home sales for June in the "distressed" category (the May estimate was 31%, but the number of foreclosures still has been fairly steady). That percentage should jump sharply in the next couple of months, as overall sales activity starts to slow markedly. The Census Bureau acknowledges that a portion of new home sales is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimates. Purportedly, foreclosure activity is on the rise, and some in the construction trade have difficulty competing with the pricing of foreclosed properties. Until the foreclosure problem works itself out, monthly changes in these home sales numbers cannot be taken as meaningful indicators of trends in underlying activity in homeowner real estate, as it relates to general economic activity. 

Both the new and existing home sales series have seen recent volume vary, tied to the April 30th expiry of the home-buyer tax credit, where a sales contract had to be in place by April 30th.  Beyond the unstable reporting of new home sales and heavy distortions from foreclosure activity, and consistent with June housing starts (see Commentary No. 311), the pattern of activity in residential real estate appears to have moved beyond the impact of that short-lived stimulus, with renewed or re-intensifying economic contraction beginning to unfold.

The following updated graphs reflect different measures of home sales activity since February 2009. The numbers, through June 2010, reflect the seasonally-adjusted level of monthly sales, rather than the annual rate usually published. 

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Increasingly, that will be seen in economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Gross Domestic Product — GDP (Second-Quarter 2010 "Advance Estimate" and Annual Revisions). What had been an early consensus for some relative pick-up in annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) growth in the largely guesstimated "advance" second-quarter 2010 GDP — due for release on Friday, July 30th — has softened to some slight relative slowing growth. Briefing.com is showing a consensus estimate of 2.5% for the second-quarter, down from the 2.7% as currently reported for the first-quarter. As discussed in Commentary No. 310, a slower growth rate would be consistent with recent underlying economic reporting. Even though consensus estimates often are targeted for setting the "advance" GDP growth rate, risks are fairly high that the reported growth will surprise the consensus on the downside.

As discussed in early comments, a pattern of generally weaker-than-previously-reported economic growth is a good bet for the annual revisions back through first-quarter 2007. The 2007 recession should appear to be more severe, post revisions.

Payroll Employment and Unemployment Rate (July 2010). Due for release on Friday, August 6th, the July labor numbers are a good bet to be more negative than an already soft consensus. Briefing.com reports expectations of a 116,000 decline in monthly payrolls. That number includes layoffs of temporary and intermittent census workers in July, which will be roughly 144,000 (per Census reporting), implying a minimal monthly gain expected for nonfarm payrolls of about 28,000, ex-census workers. In June, payrolls declined by 125,000, gaining 100,000 ex-census. Briefing.com also reports a consensus July U.3 unemployment rate at 9.6%, up from June’s 9.5%. 

I expect nonfarm payrolls to show an outright monthly contraction, ex-census workers, with the unemployment rate jumping more than expected. Further detail will follow in the July 30th Commentary

__________

 

 

No. 311: June Housing Starts

Tuesday, July 20th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 311
June Housing Starts

July 20, 2010
__________

Housing Starts Show Bottoming-Bouncing
Approaching Renewed Decline

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Wednesday, July 28th, after release of the June new orders for durable goods data. Included in that Commentary will be some assessment of the changes likely in the July 30th annual revisions to GDP. A Commentary on July 30th will follow the release of the "advance" estimate of second-quarter 2010 GDP and the annual GDP revisions, which will restate economic history back to the first-quarter 2007.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

Monthly Decline in June Housing Starts Was Muted by Effects of Prior-Period Revisions. The Census Bureau reported a soft June residential construction report for housing starts, today (July 20th). Though down, the June and May numbers appeared stronger than they would have otherwise, due to the relative downward revisions to the data in last month’s report of May and April starts. As reported, today, June housing starts fell by a statistically-insignificant 5.0% (down by 7.4% net of revisions) +/- 15.4% (95% confidence interval). May’s starts were revised to a 14.9% (previously 10.0%) monthly decline. While activity has started to slow, anew, the pattern of housing starts generally remains one of bottom-bouncing at an historically low-level plateau of activity, as seen over the last 19 months.  I expect much weaker monthly numbers in the quarter ahead.

Year-to-year change in June was a statistically-insignificant contraction of 5.8% +/-12.3% (95% confidence interval), following a downwardly revised annual gain of 5.1% (previously 7.8%) in May. The recent variation in annual growth patterns is due to the collapsing and troughing (April 2009 was the trough) of data a year ago, combined with the ongoing extreme volatility seen in these data in the current contraction. 

Indeed, since December 2008, as noted, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing at an historically low level, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 572,000. In the past 19 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, including June 2010’s reading of 549,000. 

 

The "recovery" in housing is shown in the above graphs. The first graph reflects the level monthly of activity in terms of the annualized monthly rate of housing starts, which is randomly volatile and subject to large revisions on a monthly basis. 

For purposes of looking at the broader trend in activity — net of random and often extreme month-to-month reporting volatility seen in many series, and net of recent month-to-month seasonal factor distortions also common recently to many series — I have smooth the data for certain graphs using a six-month moving average, including retail sales, industrial production, new orders for durable goods and housing starts. 

The second graph shows the six-month moving average in housing starts. Irrespective of any level of smoothing, though, in the current cycle, housing starts remain at least 25% below any levels seen since before the end of World War II. Along with the activity in the broad economy, a renewed downturn in housing likely is underway.

In response to a query and suggestions posed by a subscriber, I shall attempt to clarify my usage of the six-month moving average in graphs. There are different ways of showing the plot of a moving average. One is to plot it centered on the middle month of the average; another is to plot it using the last month in the average. I use the latter style, here, because, in the current instance, the six-month average through June includes June information that was not available as of March/April, the mid-point. Where the June average also includes the trailing five months of data back to January, however, this type of plot of the average will appear to lag the pattern of activity shown in coincident monthly data, when changes in monthly activity reflect more than random volatility (as seen in recent retail sales and industrial production reporting).  The recent bottom bouncing in housing starts has tended more to be a pattern of random volatility. I hope this clarifies what is shown with the six-month moving-average graphs and welcome any questions or comments: johnwilliams@shadowstats.com.

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Increasingly, that will be seen in economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Home Sales (June 2010). Due for release on Thursday, July 22nd (existing), and on Monday, July 26th (new), home sales should continue to show depressed levels in the wake of the home buyer tax credit expiration. Beyond the hits that will provide a one-shot lowering in the levels of home sales, patterns of bottoming-bouncing should continue, quickly falling into a renewed downtrend that will tend to confirm slowing broad activity in the months ahead. Keep in mind that the month-to-month change in new home sales rarely is statistically significant, and market distortions from heavy foreclosure rates continue as a major impairment to getting data that indicate actual underlying market conditions.

Consumer Confidence and Sentiment (July 2010). Unexpected weakness in the preliminary University of Michigan Consumer Sentiment number for July was given credit for roiling the markets last Friday. That particular number has little statistical meaning, given the limited surveying behind it. Nonetheless, given an increasing number of stories in the popular media on the slowing economy, some drop in the monthly numbers for July is a reasonable expectation for both the Conference Board’s Consumer Confidence (Tuesday, July 27th) and full-month Consumer Sentiment (Friday, July 30th) measures. Given seasonal adjustments to the Conference Board numbers (seasonal factors are not disclosed), a surprise always is a possibility.

New Orders for Durable Goods (June 2010). Due for release on Wednesday, July 28th, June new orders for durable goods can go either way, given the random volatility of the series. Boeing’s big pick-up in orders at the air show in Farnborough, England, however, should show up as a healthy spike in next month’s reporting of July orders.

Gross Domestic Product — GDP (Second-Quarter 2010 "Advance Estimate" and Annual Revisions). Early consensus estimates appear to be for some relative pick-up in annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) growth in the largely guesstimated "advance" second-quarter GDP, due for release on Friday, July 30th. As discussed in the prior Commentary No. 310, a slower growth rate would be consistent with recent underlying economic reporting. An analysis of likely revisions will follow in the Commentary scheduled for July 28th. A pattern of generally weaker than previously-reported economic growth is a good bet for the revisions.

__________

 


No. 310: Inflation and Production

Friday, July 16th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 310
Inflation and Production

July 16, 2010

__________

Annual Consumer Inflation: 1.1% (CPI-U), 8.4% (SGS)

Lower Gasoline Tempered June Inflation,
But Watch Out for July’s Data

June Industrial Production Flattened Out

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Tuesday, July 20th, after release of the June housing starts data.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

Timing Begins to Narrow, with the Broad Outlook Unchanged: Intensified Economic and Solvency Crises, Higher Inflation and Hyperinflation. The last month or so generally has seen economic reporting turn to the downside, and, importantly, the concept of an intensified economic downturn, or a "double-dip" recession, appears to be gaining broader acceptance. Weak reports on retail sales, industrial production and trade activity this week all showed that broad economic activity has slowed in the second quarter, suggesting not only a slowing of GDP growth in the second- versus first-quarter of 2010, but also an increasing the likelihood of renewed quarterly GDP contraction in the third-quarter. Consensus forecasters, though, appear at present to be looking for a stronger second-quarter, with continuing growth for the balance of the year. 

Accordingly, as the recession intensifies anew, the implications of worse-than-expected ballooning federal deficits, Treasury fundings, banking industry solvency issues, etc., increasingly will bring the issues of U.S. solvency and U.S. dollar soundness to the fore. As suggested perhaps by some recent rebound in the euro, market concerns already may be shifting from European solvency issues to those of the United States. At such time as U.S. solvency become the focus of global financial-market concerns, it is hard to imagine the U.S. dollar and the U.S. equity and credit markets not being pummeled. 

As reported today (July 16th) by the Bureau of Labor Statistics, consumer inflation appears to be contained. That should change quickly and sharply at such time as the U.S. dollar comes under heavy selling pressure, along with broad dumping of dollar-denominated paper assets. Not only will oil prices spike in response to the dollar weakness, but the Fed will find itself forced to become lender of last resort to the U.S. Treasury, with a resulting sharp jump in Fed monetization of Treasury debt and related money supply issues. Both the dollar weakness and monetization developments are of increasing probability within the next year, with the time-horizon beginning to come in. These developments should result in a rapid increase in consumer inflation, with the base then being set for a hyperinflation, as discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report.

The general outlook for the economy and the markets is unchanged. For those with assets at risk, circumstances continue to suggest looking at actions for long-range wealth preservation. Despite any severe near-term volatility in the markets, physical gold and silver, assets outside the U.S. dollar (such as the Canadian dollar, the Australian dollar and Swiss franc) and assets outside the United States, offer long-term hedges against the severe loss looming in U.S. dollar’s purchasing power.  

 

As suggested by the above graphs, the gold market continues to look beyond short-term volatility in the financial markets and in current inflation reporting, with the upside distortions in the U.S. dollar’s exchange rate and the downside distortions to oil prices perhaps starting to reverse.

 

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

Reversal of Gasoline-Price-Depressing Seasonal Factors Should Spike July CPI. After a number of months where seasonal adjustment factors reduced reported gasoline price inflation — depressing the level of the adjusted headline CPI-U inflation — June’s seasonal factor adjustments turned neutral. Gasoline prices, though, actually fell in the month of June, dampening reported CPI inflation. 

The seasonals, however, turn sharply in the other direction in July and August, spiking reported gasoline prices and the headline inflation number, even when there is a fair monthly decline in actual gasoline costs (July gasoline prices appear to be holding relatively flat versus June). July’s CPI-U inflation rates are strong bets to pick-up on monthly (both adjusted and unadjusted) and annual bases.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported this morning that the seasonally-adjusted June CPI-U eased by 0.14% (down by a statistically-insignificant 0.10%, unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, after a 0.16% decline (a gain of 0.08% unadjusted) in May. Seasonally-adjusted, the CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended June 2010 (June versus March) was a decline of 1.46%, against May’s decline of 0.67%. The lack of inflation in the latest three months largely was due to seasonal adjustments. Unadjusted, the CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended June 2010 (June versus March) was a gain of 0.62%, against May’s 2.68%.

Unadjusted, June’s year-to-year inflation was 1.05% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) against a 2.02% annual increase in May.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s July 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.10% adjusted monthly gain seen in July 2009. I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for July 2010, the difference in July’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from June 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 1.05%.

CPI-W. The narrower, seasonally-adjusted June CPI-W declined by 0.19% (down 0.13% unadjusted) for the month, following a decline of 0.28% (a gain of 0.08% unadjusted) in May. Seasonally-adjusted, the annualized rate of CPI-W inflation for the three months ended June 2010 (June versus March) was a contraction of 2.39%, versus a decline of 1.42% in May. As with the CPI-U, the lack of inflation in the latest three months again was due to seasonal adjustments. Unadjusted, the CPI-W annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended June 2010 (June versus March) was a gain of 0.59%, against May’s 3.01%.

Unadjusted year-to-year CPI-W inflation rose by 1.36% in June, versus a 2.56% May increase.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — is reported only on an unadjusted basis. Unadjusted, the C-CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended June 2010 (June versus March) was 0.27%, against May’s 2.73%. Year-to-year, or annual inflation, was 0.82% in June 2010, versus 1.99% in May.

Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 4.3% in June 2010, versus 5.4% in May, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was about 8.4% (8.37% for those using the extra digit) in June, versus 9.2% in May.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation. Despite another recent all-time high in the price of gold in the current cycle, gold and silver prices have yet to approach their historic high prices, adjusted for inflation. Even with the June 28th historic high gold price of $1,261.00 per troy ounce, the earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 has not been breached in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on inflation through June 2010, the 1980 gold price peak would be $2,382 per troy ounce, based on not-seasonally-adjusted-CPI-U-adjusted dollars, and would be $7,689 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars. 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org) has not been hit since, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on inflation through June 2010, the 1980 silver price peak would be $139 per troy ounce, based on not-seasonally-adjusted-CPI-U-adjusted dollars, and would be $447 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars.

As shown on page 22 in the Hyperinflation report, over the decades, the price of gold has more than compensated for the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI-U inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the U.S. dollar based on the SGS-Alternate CPI.

Real Money Supply M3. The signal of what now appears to be an unfolding intensification of the economic downturn, based on annual contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (M3), most recently was discussed and graphed in Commentary No. 307. The annual real contraction in June M3 (SGS-Ongoing) estimated for that Commentary was 7.2%. Based on today’s CPI-U report, that annual contraction was 7.1%, narrower than May’s 7.9% contraction. The signal for a downturn or an intensified downturn is generated when annual growth in real M3 first turns negative in a given cycle; the signal is not dependent on the depth of the downturn (currently a post-World War II record) or its duration. The current downturn signal was generated in December 2009. The broad economy tends to follow in downturn roughly six to nine months after the signal.

Real Retail Sales.  Based on June 2010 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly June retail sales fell by 0.4%, where before inflation adjustment the current number was down by 0.5%, versus a revised 0.9% (was 1.0%) real retail sales contraction in May. June real retail sales rose at a 3.7% year-to-year pace — slower than in May’s revised 4.8% (was 4.9%) annual pace — versus a 4.8% gain in June, before inflation adjustment.

On a quarter-to-quarter basis, real retail sales in second-quarter 2010 expanded at a 4.8% annualized pace, down from annualized growth of 6.6% in the first-quarter. Adjusted for inflation, seasonally-adjusted monthly retail sales in May and June fell at an annualized pace of 7.6%. If that pattern continued in the current quarter, a quarterly contraction in real third-quarter 2010 GDP would be a good bet.

Since November 2008, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $162.1 billion (the deflated June number was $166.0 billion). The first graph below reflects the relatively volatile monthly levels of real retail sales, as reported.

Smoothed for the monthly volatility on a six-month moving-average basis, as shown in the second graph, the pattern of activity here has been one of bottom-bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales. The recent bounce from short-lived stimulus factors and warped-seasonals appears largely to have run its course, with the average close to rolling over, and with continued lower real sales levels likely in the months ahead. There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in personal consumption or in general economic activity — no recovery — just general bottom-bouncing.

 

June PPI Inflation Hit by Lower Food and Gasoline Prices. Seasonally-adjusted inflation at the wholesale and production level declined month-to-month in June, reflecting short-lived declines in food and gasoline prices.  As reported yesterday (July 15th) by the BLS, the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) in June dropped by 0.5% (down 0.6% unadjusted), following May’s decline of 0.3% (a gain of 0.3% before seasonal adjustment).

Unadjusted and year-to-year, June’s annual PPI inflation rate eased to 2.8% from the 5.3% annual gain reported for May.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted June intermediate goods fell by 0.9% (up by 0.4% in May), with crude June goods falling by 2.4% (down by 2.8% in May). Year-to-year inflation in June intermediate goods was up by 6.4% (up by 8.5% in May), with June annual inflation in crude goods up by 13.3% (up by 21.2% in May).

June Industrial Production Boosted by Continuing Utilities Surge. The growth in seasonally-adjusted monthly industrial production flattened out in June. While the report actually was on the plus-side of flat, it would have been on the minus side of flat, except for revisions to the initial benchmark revision, which was published between the May and June reporting. More significantly, net of unseasonably-warm weather spiking utility usage again — which also spiked manufacturing production estimates imputed from electricity consumption — production contracted (manufacturing production was reported down by 0.4% for the month). 

The benchmark revision had noticeable impact on the numbers as far back as 1971. As a result of the changes, the 2001 recession now appears to have been a little more severe. In the current downturn, 2007 now is relatively stronger and 2008 relatively weaker, with a suggested stronger than previously estimated "recovery" starting in 2009. The new series was reset with the index of industrial production at 100 for 2007; the old series had been set at 100 for 2002. 

The Federal Reserve Board reported yesterday that seasonally-adjusted June 2010 industrial production rose by 0.07% (down by 0.2% against the initial benchmark revision, up by 0.45% versus pre-benchmark reporting) for the month, versus a benchmark-revised 1.3% (1.2% pre-benchmark) monthly gain reported for May.  

For the second-quarter 2010, industrial production rose at a 6.6% annualized pace, versus 7.0% in the first-quarter 2010.

The year-to-year change in June production rose to 8.22% from May’s benchmark-revised 7.90% (previously 7.62%). The spike in annual growth was due largely to the pattern of collapsing activity a year ago, which troughed in June 2009. After the benchmark revision, the deepest year-to-year decline seen in the current cycle is a year-to-year contraction of 12.86% for May 2009 (previously a decline of 13.31% in June 2009). The May 2009 drop now is the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II. 

The following two graphs reflect both new and old reporting, with the old series plotted on the new base, for comparison purposes.

 

 

The first graph shows recent monthly detail, with a fair chance that the June number will mark the turning point to renewed decline in the production series.

The "recovery" in production is shown in the second graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average. For the last 18 months, the production index has averaged 88.93, around which the series has been fluctuating, with June’s six-month moving average reading at 91.36 versus 92.54 for the single month. Production activity had leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that effectively wiped out the last eight years of growth in industrial production. Despite the near-term upside gains generated by short-lived stimulus and seasonal distortions, the series likely still is bottom-bouncing and should continue to soften anew, significantly, in the next several months.  

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Increasingly, that will be seen in economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Housing Starts (June 2010). Due for release on Tuesday, July 20th, the report on June residential construction should show continued bottom-bouncing moving towards renewed downturn. Despite a likely month-to-month contraction in June housing starts, the change may lack statistical significance.

 

__________

No. 309: Retail Sales and Trade Deficit

Wednesday, July 14th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 309
Retail Sales and Trade Deficit

July 14, 2010

__________

Retail Sales Signaled Renewed Business Downturn, Again, in June

Sales Falling at Roughly 7% Annualized Pace, Net of Inflation

Trade Deficit’s Merchandise Component Should Sap 1.0% from GDP Growth

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, July16th, after release of the June CPI data and will include assessments of the PPI and industrial production releases of July 15th.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Intensified Downturn or "Double-Dip" Indications Continue to Solidify. The signs of a renewed or intensifying economic downturn continued to mount, with weaker than expected reporting of June retail sales and a worse than expected May trade deficit. 

June retail sales fell for a second straight month, and, dependent on Friday’s CPI reporting, the May and June numbers showed an annualized real (inflation-adjusted) contraction of about 7% (+/- 1%). While the relatively strong gains reported in March and April will keep the real series from turning negative on a quarter-to-quarter basis (second-quarter 2010 versus first-quarter 2010), quarterly real growth will have slowed for retail sales, deflated by the CPI, to be detailed following the CPI report.

Such a retail sales pattern suggests somewhat slower quarterly growth in the GDP’s personal consumption component in the upcoming second-quarter GDP "advance" estimate (due July 30th).   The sharp deterioration in May’s trade deficit also suggests a meaningful widening (a negative for the GDP) in the GDP’s net export account.  The "advance" GDP largely is guessed at by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), where, for example, the quarter’s trade performance will be based on only two (April and May) of three months for the quarter.

More often than not, though, the GDP does not follow the patterns of underlying reporting, particularly when that underlying news is negative.  Irrespective of the month-end GDP reporting — the outlook for which will be addressed late next week — upcoming underlying upcoming reports should continue coming in on the downside of expectations, as the fall-off in business activity begins to accelerate.

The patterns here are consistent with and partially are driven by the contraction in broad systemic liquidity, as has been discussed frequently in recent writings (see Commentary No. 308 for example).

The general outlook on the economy, inflation and systemic stability (or lack of same) is unchanged. An inflation update will follow in the CPI Commentary.

Prior-Period Downside Revisions Helped to Narrow Reported 0.5% Monthly Contraction. As seen in this month’s retail sales reporting, late responses to the government’s economic surveys again are tending to come in weaker than the relatively positive assumptions used in putting together the initial monthly reports on key data. Previously reported levels of activity tend to be revised lower as a result. This pattern likely will be repeated in the months ahead, until such time as the assumptions used in reporting, catch up with the underlying weakness in the economy.

Reported Nominal Retail Sales.  Receiving a relative boost from weaker levels of activity being revised into earlier reports of monthly data, today’s (July 14th) June 2010 retail sales report — issued by the Census Bureau — indicated a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly decline of 0.51% +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval). Reported June sales were down by 0.65% versus initial May reporting, before the impact of prior-period revisions. Similarly, May’s initial contraction of 1.20% was revised to 1.09%, but against April data, as published last month, May sales declined 1.34% before today’s prior-period revisions.  

On a year-to-year basis, June 2010 retail sales were reported up by 4.80% from June 2009, continuing a trend of slowing annual growth, versus a revised annual May gain of 6.86% (previously 6.91%) and a revised 8.71% (previously  8.98%) annual increase in April. Annual changes still are working off the effects of the severe trough in activity seen somewhat over a year ago.

Real Retail Sales.  Estimates of real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales will be published on Friday, July 16th, in the Commentary following the release of the June CPI data. Month-to-month real change in retail sales for June likely remained in contraction, with real annual growth coming in around a positive 3.5%.

Core Retail Sales.  Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, "core" retail sales — consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation — are estimated using two approaches:

Version I: June versus May seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — eased by 0.3%, versus the official aggregate loss of 0.5%.

Version II: June versus May seasonally-adjusted retail sales — net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gasoline stations — declined by 0.2% versus the official aggregate loss of 0.5%. 

May Trade Deficit Hits 18-Month High, a 16-Month High Net of Inflation (Oil Price) Impact. For May 2010, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported yesterday (July 13th) that the nominal (not-adjusted-for-inflation) seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services rose to $42.3 billion — the largest monthly trade shortfall since November 2008 — up from an unrevised $40.3 billion in April, and up sharply from the $24.9 billion monthly deficit in May 2009.

Against April 2010, the May trade balance showed both higher imports and exports, with a sharper increase in imports, largely independent of oil impact. May oil imports reflected both lower physical volume and oil prices. Specifically, for the month of May 2010, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $76.93 per barrel, versus $77.13 in April 2010 and $51.30 in May 2009. In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, May 2010 volume averaged 9.033 million barrels per day, versus 9.804 million in April 2010 and 8.429 million in May 2009.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit. A widening trade deficit directly reduces the reported level of and growth in GDP. The May trade deficit magnified April’s bad news for the upcoming "advance" second-quarter estimate, with the pick-up in the merchandise trade shortfall likely to reduce GDP growth by 1.0% from what it would have been otherwise.

As reported by the BEA, adjusted for seasonal factors and inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the January, February and March 2010 respective merchandise trade deficits were not revised, holding at $39.5, $43.2 and $44.1 billion, an annualized pace in first-quarter 2010 of $507.3 billion. On the same basis, the April deficit revised to $44.2 (previously $44.3 billion), with May reported at $46.0 billion. The annualized merchandise deficit for second-quarter 2010, based on April and May reporting, was $541.3, a net deterioration of $34 billion, which, by itself would reduce the upcoming annualized real GDP growth rate by 1.0%. Important here is that this series is just merchandise sector, which eventually has a paper trail behind it, from reporting by U.S. Customs. It does not include the services area, which largely is a guesstimate by the BEA, and which traditionally runs a smaller offsetting surplus to the merchandise deficit.   

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Increasingly, that will be seen especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Industrial Production (June 2010). Due for release on Thursday, July 15th, June industrial production is expected to be flat, with the consensus having softened from a 0.2% monthly gain, last week (Briefing.com), versus an initial estimate of a 1.3% gain in May. As with most economic series — until the consensus begins to catch up with weakening reality — reporting risk is to the downside of expectations.

Producer Price Index — PPI (June 2010). Reflecting the spread of inflationary pressures from earlier oil-price strength and otherwise, and from shifting seasonal adjustment factors, expectations are for a monthly decline of 0.1% in the June PPI, which has dropped from a consensus last week of a 0.1% gain (Briefing.com), versus a 0.3% contraction in May. The series is irregularly volatile, but has some upside reporting risk.

Consumer Price Index — CPI (June 2010). A small gain in monthly oil prices, but a decline in gasoline prices should dampen the seasonally-adjusted monthly change in the June CPI-U, due for release on Friday, July 16th, while the seasonal-factor biases on gasoline prices turn from negative to flat/positive. Briefing.com reports a consensus expectation of a 0.1% contraction, down from 0.0% last week, versus the 0.2% monthly decline reported in May. The reported number could go either way against the consensus, but with risk somewhat to the upside. The shifting seasonal factors will begin spiking adjusted gasoline prices sharply to the upside in July.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in June 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.71% adjusted monthly gain seen in June 2009. I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for June 2010, the difference in June’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from May 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 2.02%. Hence a consensus, 0.1% contraction in month-to-month seasonally-adjusted CPI-U would result in an annual inflation rate of roughly 1.2%.

PLEASE NOTE:  Our "Chart Library" has now been updated to include sections on both Retail Sales, and the Trade Deficit.  The charts in the library are generated from official statistics as released.  We will be releasing additional charts and new areas in the coming weeks. 

__________

No. 308: Economic and Liquidity Update

Friday, July 9th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 308
Economic and Liquidity Update

July 9, 2010

__________

Shills for Wall Street Are Busy

Broad Liquidity Measures Remain Abysmal

Unemployment Trends Show Severity of the Depression

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Wednesday, July 14th, following the release of June retail sales. A subsequent Commentary will be published on Friday, July16th, after release of the June CPI data. The latter Commentary also will assess the PPI and industrial production releases of July 15th.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

The Recovery Hucksters Are Working Overtime. Following the sharpest and longest economic contraction since World War II, and after nearly a year of bottom-bouncing at a low-level plateau of business activity, the economy has entered a phase of re-intensifying downturn, a circumstance that may be referred to more popularly as renewed recession, or a double-dip recession. Such has begun to surface in a broad range of economic reports, and it is consistent with signals of pending business deterioration that have been seen in collapsing measures of broad systemic liquidity. 

Recognition of this circumstance should become more commonplace in the months ahead, as more confirmation is seen in underlying economic reporting. Consensus forecasts for regular economic releases (see the Week Ahead section) already are softening to levels that would have been inconceivable three months ago within much of the popular financial press.

Quality Issues. Complicating the outlook, though, are some seriously flawed monthly reports, which have become victims of reporting-system distortions resulting from the severity of the contraction. Modern economic reporting — that of the post-World War II era — was structured using assumptions and modeling for a system enjoying regular, sustainable economic growth, with occasional downticks from inventory-driven business cycles. The system never was designed to handle a structural downturn of the current length and depth. Such has thrown off seasonal factors and even traditional year-to-year comparisons used in assessing the economic environment, let alone fundamental misdirection as discussed below in the unemployment comments.

Wall Street Shills. Further complicating the outlook is a more traditional issue: pronouncements by some economists on Wall Street and financial reporters in the popular media, who act as shills for the needs of Wall Street and political Washington. While there are a number of fine and honest economists and financial reporters in their respective fields, there also are those — often very heavily publicized — who spew Pollyannaish nonsense aimed at affecting public sentiment and/or the financial markets during troubled economic times.   

Let me recount two personal experiences. Back in late-1989, I contended that the U.S. economy was in or headed into a deep recession. CNBC had me in to discuss my views along with a senior economist for a large New York bank, who was looking for continued economic growth. Before the show, the bank economist and I shared our views in the Green Room. I outlined my case for a major recession, and, to my shock, his response was, "I think that pretty much is the consensus."

We got on the air, I gave my recession pitch, and he proclaimed a booming economy for the year ahead. He was a good economist and knew what was happening, but he had to put out the story mandated by his employer, or he would not have had a job.

More recently, following an interview on a major cable news network (not CNBC), I was advised off-air by the producer that they were operating under a corporate mandate to give the economic news a positive spin, irrespective of how bad it was.

I know from other personal experiences that these circumstances are commonplace. A simple example of recent distortion was yesterday’s positive hype over an unexpectedly-low weekly jobless claims number. Widely known — at least I have discussed the matter frequently — is that the Department of Labor cannot adjust the weekly claims numbers meaningfully for regular seasonal variations. Accordingly, reporting around holidays invariably results in unusually large and unexpected swings in the weekly numbers. Yesterday’s data covered the onset of the Fourth of July weekend. It would not be at all unusual to see a similarly-meaningless reverse-gyration in next week’s release.

Consumer Liquidity Squeeze Continues.  The Federal Reserve publishes a number of widely followed economic series that are broadly based in sampling and reporting. Nonetheless, the Fed’s series go through major revisions quite frequently, with the money supply and consumer credit outstanding going through major revisions this last week. The revisions to money supply measures M1 and M2 went back decades, but the year-to-year patterns of change still were intact. The same was true with revisions to institutional money funds, which, along with M2, is a major component of the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate. Following tonight’s release of banking data, we shall publish the preliminary estimate for June’s monthly M3, as well as all revisions necessitated by the Fed’s revisions, on the Alternate Data page for M3.

Plotted below is the year-to-year change in real (inflation-adjusted) M3 (updated for the Fed’s revisions) versus U.S. recessions, as recognized by the National Bureau of Economic Research. Whenever annual real change in M3 has turned negative, the economy always has fallen into recession, or if already in recession, the economy has entered a period of intensified downturn, usually within six to nine months of the initial M3 downturn. The signal for economic trouble ahead is the annual real M3 growth first turning negative, as happened in December 2009.

Chart of Real (Inflation Adjusted) M3

 

The pattern in the recent money supply growth, to a large extent, is due to contracting credit.  Growth in credit is needed to expand money growth. Contracting credit leads to a slow leak in the money supply, as some existing loans do not get rolled over, and new extensions of credit are too limited.

The three graphs following reflect the extension of short-term credit to consumers and to businesses. All continue to show ongoing record contractions. Of some interest were the revisions published along with yesterday’s (June 8th) publication of May consumer credit outstanding. What had been reported as a small monthly gain in April’s consumer credit revised to a sharp monthly contraction, along with a subsequent contraction in May. Such might be suggestive of a pending downside revision in recent retail sales reporting. 

Chart of Consumre Credit

Chart of Commercial Loans

Chart of Commercial Paper Outstanding

 

The structural problem driving the current business downturn — a liquidity-impaired consumer — shows no signs of improvement (see the Consumer Liquidity Special Report). Real household income remains too weak to support sustained positive real economic growth, by itself, and consumer debt expansion that could help make up the consumption shortfall generally is not available.

Time to Move Headline Reporting from U.3 to U.6 or a Broader Measure. A number of subscribers wrote to me about the reported decline in the U.3 unemployment rate from 9.7% in May to 9.5% in June, which reflected a drop in the labor force due to a large number of unemployed giving up looking for a job.  These people are disappearing from the numbers only because the headline U.3 number does not account for discouraged workers. The pattern is one that generally is an ongoing artifact of the severity of the current economic contraction. While mentioned in Commentary No.307’s text as to the indication of an increasing number of discouraged workers, I did not go into great detail because I believed the June data were distorted meaningfully by the handling of the volatile employment of the temporary and intermittent 2010 census workers.

Nonetheless, there is a big-picture element involved, where those disappearing from the U.3 unemployment roles are moving into the broader U.6 and SGS unemployment measures. Where U.6 includes short-term discouraged workers (those who have not looked for work in the last four weeks, but have looked in the last year), the SGS measure includes U.6 plus the long-term discouraged workers (those who have not looked for work for more than a year, a category defined out of existence by the Bureau of Labor Statistics [BLS] in 1994). The severity and impact of the current downturn needs to be measured, which the U.3 does not, but the broader unemployment estimates do to a certain extent. 

With relatively briefer and shallower downturns in the past, the BLS rarely faced a public outcry over the use of U.3. With increasing recognition by the public of the reporting inadequacies, however, the time appears to be at hand for the BLS to put aside political convenience and, perhaps, to headline its U.6 measure as a better reflection of what is happening to the unemployment circumstance in the United States.

The following charts are snapshots taken from our new "Chart Library," and tend to tell the same story, irrespective of how they are viewed. The charts in the library are generated from official statistics as released (and in some cases, when noted, augmented by SGS Alternate Data). The library currently holds a number of Employment and Unemployment charts, as well as the long-running Money Supply and Monetary Base charts. We will be releasing new charts and new areas in the coming weeks. 

Chart: U.3 Unemployment Duration

Chart: U.3 Unemployment Duration

Chart: U.3 Unemployment Duration

As a testament to the severity and extreme duration of the current downturn, the first three graphs reflect, in particular, the volume and portion of persons who have been unemployed for 15 weeks or more. Whether viewed in terms of number of people, as a percent of the labor force, or as a percent of unemployed people, the current circumstance is the worst ever seen in the history of the data. The current circumstance is without modern precedent.

These numbers, however, reflect only those individuals counted in the U.3 unemployment numbers and U.3 labor force. Reflecting discouraged workers would make the situation look even worse — much worse — which is the unfortunate reality.

The next two graphs reflect patterns of declining participation of the population in the workforce during the last decade. The first shows the household labor force as a percent of the working age population. Again, this just the U.3 labor force, the total of U.3 employed plus U.3 unemployed. Even allowing for shifting retirement patterns with an ageing baby-boomer population, a fair portion of the lost workforce likely has just moved into the broader U.6 and SGS-Alternate workforces.

The second graph reflects an even greater drop in participation as measured by using payroll employment versus the working age population. Although the numerator and denominator are not fully compatible, the pattern nonetheless is interesting. Both of the charts are broadly in line with what is suggested by the SGS Alternate Unemployment Rate.

  Chart: U.3 Labor Force Participation Rate

Chart: U.3 Unemployment Population Ratios

 I plan to have in place — before the July employment and unemployment reporting — charts that will reflect the detail of the above graphs with the inclusion of the universes of both the short- and long-term discouraged workers. I also plan to review at that time the impact of illegal immigration on the national employment and unemployment circumstance.

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Retail Sales (June 2010). Due for release on Wednesday, July 14th, June retail sales are expected to show a 0.2% monthly contraction (per Briefing.com), following an initial 1.2% drop reported in May sales. Reporting risk is to the downside of expectations.

Industrial Production (June 2010). Due for release on Thursday, July 15th, June industrial production is expected to slow to a 0.2% monthly gain (Briefing.com), versus an initial estimate of a 1.3% gain in May. As with most economic series — until the consensus begins to catch up with weakening reality — reporting risk is to the downside of expectations.

Producer Price Index — PPI (June 2010). Reflecting the spread of inflationary pressures from earlier oil-price strength, and otherwise, and from shifting seasonal adjustment factors, expectations are for a monthly increase of 0.1% in the June PPI (Briefing.com), versus a 0.3% contraction in May. The series is irregularly volatile, but has some upside reporting risk.

Consumer Price Index — CPI (June 2010). A small gain in monthly oil prices, but a decline gasoline prices should dampen the seasonally-adjusted monthly change in the June CPI-U, due for release on Friday, July 16th, while the seasonal-factor biases on gasoline prices turn from negative to flat/positive. Briefing.com reports a consensus expectation of 0.0%, versus the 0.2% monthly decline reported in May. The reported number could go either way against the consensus, but with risk somewhat to the upside. The shifting seasonal factors will begin spiking adjusted gasoline prices sharply to the upside in July.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in June 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.71% adjusted monthly gain seen in June 2009. I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for June 2010, the difference in June’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from May 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 2.02%. Hence a consensus, unchanged month-to-month seasonally-adjusted CPI-U would result in an annual inflation rate of roughly 1.3%.

 

__________

 

 

 

No. 307: June Employment and Unemployment, Liquidity Update

Friday, July 2nd, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 307
June Employment and Unemployment, Liquidity Update

July 2, 2010

__________

June Payroll Jobs Fell 125,000,
Gained 100,000 Net of Census Layoffs

June Household-Survey Employment Dropped by 301,000

June Unemployment: 9.5% (U.3), 16.5% (U.6), 21.6% (SGS)

Payroll and Unemployment Changes
Were Statistically Indistinguishable from Zero

__________ 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, July 9th.  With the holiday-shortened week ahead lacking major economic reporting, the Commentary will provide a general review and update of the broad outlook for the U.S. economy and systemic stability.

– Happy 4th of July to all!  John Williams 

Jobs Data Struck Close to Consensus. The June payroll data were fortuitously close enough to consensus outlook so as not to roil the financial markets. I was wrong in my assessment of likely reporting, where both the seasonally-adjusted June payroll gain of 100,000 — net of census layoffs — and the decline in U.3 unemployment rate to 9.5% were counter in direction to my expectations. Nonetheless, neither the payroll reporting nor the unemployment rate changed enough to be statistically meaningful. The same also would have been true, if my expectations of weaker reporting had been met. Irrespective of today’s report, signs of a renewed or intensifying economic contraction should continue to mount.

The labor numbers are the first major economic report of the month. I look for most other upcoming statistical reports for June and July either to disappoint consensus economic forecasts on the downside, or for economic expectations to soften sharply in advance of the reporting. The underlying structural problems for the economy have not changed, and the continuing and underlying economic troubles will be caught up soon enough in the labor data. The results just were not definitive today.

A full review of current economic conditions and the broad outlook on the economy and financial system and markets will follow in next Friday’s (July 9th) regular Commentary.

Reporting of the June Labor Environment. Payroll Survey. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 125,000 (down by 100,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for June 2010. Net of the included layoff of 225,000 intermittent and temporary census hires, June payrolls gained a statistically-insignificant 100,000 (a gain of 125,000 net of prior-period revisions). Thanks to a reported jump in other federal government hiring, private sector payrolls rose by 83,000 in the month. Against June’s total jobs loss of 125,000, a jobs gain net of census impact of 100,000, and a jobs gain of 83,000 in the private sector, May showed a revised monthly total jobs gain of 433,000 (previously 431,000), a jobs gain net of census impact of 22,000 (previously 20,000), and a jobs gain in the private sector of 33,000 (previously a 41,000 gain).

Based on the patterns of hiring and firing temporary workers for the 2000 census, census layoffs from the 2010 census will continue to have major negative impact on reported payroll changes for the months of July through September.

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; December 2009 is the likely short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment declined by a seasonally-adjusted 8,363,000 jobs, or 6.1%.

The pace of reported monthly change has turned relatively less negative versus year-ago comparisons of sharp month-to-month declines. The year-to-year contraction in total nonfarm payrolls narrowed to 0.05% (a contraction of 0.30% net of census hires) in June, from May’s revised annual contraction of 0.36% (previously 0.37%) in aggregate and a revised 0.74% (previously 0.75%) contraction net of census hires. 

The current annual declines have narrowed from the post-World War II record 4.96% decline in July 2009. The July 2009 decline was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II, which reflected a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945. Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the current annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression. 

The long-term graph of year-to-year payroll change reflects the numbers as reported, with no adjustment for census hiring variations. The second graph, however, shows the year-to-year detail both with and without the census hires.   

 

 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.Where the BLS cannot measure the impact of jobs loss and jobs creation from employers starting up or going out of business, on a timely basis (within five years), such information is estimated by the Birth-Death Model. Unusual birth-death activity continued in June 2010, with the monthly birth-death adjustment adding 14,000 more jobs than it did in June 2009, a pattern contrary to what would be suggested by recent BLS reporting difficulties that understated declines in payroll employment.

Based now on the "assumption" of economic recovery, the bias factors used in the last three months of payroll reporting have been 23.6% ahead of what they were reset to after the most recent and disastrous benchmark revision. Positive assumptions — commonly built into government statistical reporting and modeling — can become self-fulfilling prophesies, with "stronger" economic data being reported as a result of happy guesstimates.

Historically, the Birth-Death Model biases have tended to overstate payroll employment levels — to understate employment declines — during recessions. These flaws were confirmed by the nature of the BLS’s massive downside benchmark revision published with the January 2010 jobs report, where the BLS had indicated that underlying assumptions to the Birth-Death Model were missing significant jobs losses due to business failures that the BLS could not measure. 

Although the upside bias had been scaled down some from the year before as a result of the reporting errors, the Birth-Death Model survives and remains a major distorting factor in monthly payroll reporting. The unsupportable premise that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business, continues. So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. 

Further, presumed additional "surplus" jobs, created by start-up firms, get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor. Although these add-factors were revised lower in the most-recent benchmark — the only portion of the model that was scaled back — to roughly an extra 36,000 seasonally-adjusted jobs per month, such now seems to have been upped to about 50,000 per month. I estimate this monthly bias should be negative by 200,000 or so, on average. Since it is not, the BLS continues regularly to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 250,000 jobs. Such misreporting, however, will not be corrected until the next benchmark revision is published in February 2011, well after the November elections.

That said, the unadjusted June 2010 bias was a monthly addition of 147,000 jobs, versus an addition of 133,000 jobs in June 2009, and against a monthly addition of 215,000 jobs in May 2010.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly employment contraction of 301,000 in June, following a reported decline of 35,000 in May, irrespective of census jobs impact.  As with last month’s data, the series appears to be suffering major distortions from inappropriate seasonal-adjustments made to the changes in temporary census worker employment. 

The problem remains that since a number of the part-time census workers already would be counted as employed due to other part-time or full-time employment, accurately quantifying the impact of census employment changes on unemployment is not possible.

Where I fully expected that some portion of the census layoffs would have at least pushed the unemployment rate minimally higher, such did not happen. Nonetheless, sharp upside movements in the unemployment rate in the next several months should be seen as these distortions are reversed, and as the intensifying economic downturn takes a firmer grip on the labor data.

The June 2010 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate was reported at 9.51% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval). The 0.19 percentage-point decline versus May’s U.3 estimate of 9.70%, however, was statistically insignificant. Not seasonally adjusted, June’s U.3 unemployment rate rose to 9.6% from 9.3% in May. 

The broader unemployment measures also appear to have suffered distortions from the ongoing census employment gyrations. June U.6 unemployment eased to an adjusted 16.5% (rose to 16.7% unadjusted) from 16.6% (16.1% unadjusted) in May. The shallower decline in the adjusted (sharper increase in the unadjusted) U.6 versus U.3 unemployment rate suggests a growing number of short-term discouraged workers. Nonetheless, with the census distortions in play, not too much should be read from the current numbers.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers. The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding my estimate of the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed, unemployment — more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — notched lower to about 21.6% in June from 21.7% in May. While the some of the heavy jobs loss of a year ago is moving to the long-term discouraged workers category, the SGS estimate is built on top of the official U.6 reporting and tends to follow its relative monthly movements. See the Alternate Data tab for a graph and more detail.

As discussed in general, previously, while 21.6% unemployment might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession. The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms. Today, less that 2% work on farms. Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

Signal Continues for Intensification of the Economic Downturn. As discussed in recent Commentaries (see Commentary No. 301, for example), declining year-to-year change in real (inflation-adjusted) M3 signals a pending economic downturn or pending intensification of an existing economic contraction, with contracting broad liquidity invariably constraining broad economic activity. The signal is generated when real M3 first turns negative year-to-year, which occurred in December 2009 in the current economic cycle. The downside shift in business activity usually follows within six to nine months. 

The following updated graph plots annual real M3 growth versus periods of recession formally recognized by the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER). It includes approximate annual real contraction in the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate as of June 2010. The June M3 estimate used here is an annual contraction of roughly 7.9% versus a 7.9% contraction in May. Such reflects a likely softer June annual inflation rate offsetting some further deterioration in the nominal annual M3 decline. Details will be discussed in the next Commentary (July 9th), which will review the broad outlook and the money supply circumstance. The formal preliminary estimate for the SGS Ongoing M3 Measure for July will be posted the weekend of July 10th on the Alternate Data page for M3.

At present, the pace of annual contraction in nominal June M3 is on track to hit 6.1% versus 5.9% in May, a more-modest relative pace of deterioration than has been seen in recent months. This reflects annual comparison against a pace of slowing growth in the year-ago period and is qualified by the unusually choppy nature of recent weekly reporting in the major M3 components.

 

__________

No. 306: Update on Jobs Outlook for June

Thursday, July 1st, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 306
Update on Jobs Outlook for June

July 1, 2010

__________

June Census Jobs Loss Revised to 230,000

Another 94,000 Lost in Subsequent Week

Employment Reporting Likely to Disappoint Expectations

__________ 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for tomorrow, Friday, July 2nd, following the release of the June employment and unemployment reporting.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

Tomorrow’s Employment and Unemployment Reporting Could Signal Intensifying Downturn. This morning’s Commentary is a brief update on the outlook for tomorrow’s (July 2nd) report on June labor market conditions. If the numbers disappoint already softening market expectations — I believe they have a good chance of doing that — such could be significant in meaningfully shifting consensus forecasts towards a "double-dip" or intensifying economic downturn. I look for a good shot at an outright contraction in payrolls, net of census impact, with the headline jobs loss at 250,000 or more, and for some rise in the headline U.3 unemployment rate, possibly pushing as high as 10.0%. In any event, consensus expectations are at high risk of a negative surprise or two in tomorrow’s reporting.

Last Friday, Briefing.com was reporting consensus expectations of a 70,000 jobs loss for June payrolls. As of this morning, that had widened to a 100,000 deficit, after a 413,000 gain in May. As discussed in Commentaries No. 304  and No. 305, the layoffs of temporary and intermittent workers hired for the 2010 census will dominate the headline payroll employment change for June. In the last week, the Census Bureau revised its own payroll reporting from net layoffs of 240,000 to 230,000. There is no certainty, though, as to which number the Bureau of Labor Statistics will pick-up in its monthly payroll survey.

Looking forward to next month, July payrolls also will take a heavy hit from census lay-offs. Where the payroll survey count of temporary census workers (survey week includes the 12th of the month) now stands at 573,779 for May and 344,157 for June (a drop of 229,622), an additional 94,255 workers were discharged in the week following the payroll survey. All of those temporary census employees will disappear from the numbers in the next couple of months.

If 230,000 is the number for June census layoffs, then a consensus forecast for an aggregate jobs loss of 100,000 implies an expected payroll gain, net of census effects, of about 130,000 jobs (perhaps a 150,000 gain in the private sector). In May, payrolls increased by 413,000, by 20,000 net of census effects, and by 41,000 in the private sector. 

Hypesters on Wall Street are pushing the private-sector number concept, instead of the payroll change net of changes in census worker count, because the private-sector number likely will be the stronger of two. In the regular government sector, there also have been heavy layoffs, due to budget cutbacks, etc., not due to temporary one-time circumstances like the census.  Those "normal" economic adjustments to government payrolls were enough so knock off 21,000 jobs from the net May numbers. Layoffs of a similar magnitude could be seen in June. Accordingly, the economic number to look at for assessing payrolls is total payroll change net of census impact.

Last Friday, Briefing.com was reporting an early consensus for the June unemployment rate to hold even with May, at 9.7%. Today the consensus is 9.8%. Census impact on the unemployment rate is difficult to quantify, since some portion of the recent census hires already were counted as employed with other part-time or full-time jobs. Nonetheless, census hiring certainly was a factor in May’s unemployment rate dropping to 9.7% from 9.9% in April. In like manner, the census layoffs in June should push the unemployment rate to at least the now-consensus 9.8%. With potential catch-up in distorted seasonal factors, that jump could take unemployment to 10.0% for the month.

In related reporting, the Conference Board’s May newspaper help-wanted advertising index, which leads June payrolls, held at 10 for the seventh straight month, off the record-low readings of 9 seen in September and October 2009. The Conference Board’s online help-wanted advertising statistically was flat for the month of June (total old and new advertising), with a small monthly gain in new online advertising, which I consider to be the better series. 

This morning’s reported drop in June’s manufacturing purchasing managers survey (ISM) left the key diffusion indices in positive territory (50.0 and above), with the employment index dropping to 57.8 in June from 59.8 in May.

__________

No. 305: Economic Update, GDP Revision, Durable Goods

Friday, June 25th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 305
Economic Update, GDP Revision, Durable Goods

June 25, 2010

__________

69% of First-Quarter GDP Growth Was Inventory Build-Up
Annualized Final Sales Growth Slowed to 0.86%

Unusually Large Late-GDP Changes in
Advance of Next Month’s Annual GDP Revisions

Softer than Advertised "Recovery" Data Should
Accompany Onset of Renewed Downturn

__________ 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, July 2nd, following the release of the June employment and unemployment reporting.

- Best wishes to all, John Williams 

Double-Dip Begins to Surface in Market Fears.  A number of recent economic releases have shown slowing or contracting monthly activity, often surprising consensus expectations on the downside. From the standpoint of conventional wisdom in the financial markets and the happy hype from Wall Street and the Administration, the patterns here are suggestive of two unfolding and troubling developments. First, the recent "recovery" was weaker than touted and not much more than short-lived impact from temporary stimulus measures and/or seasonal-factor reporting distortions. Second, the economic downturn is intensifying anew, as was signaled in advance six months ago by annual real (inflation-adjusted) growth in broad liquidity turning negative. Broad liquidity here is defined as money supply M3 and the SGS Ongoing M3 Measure (see Commentary No. 301).  

With hints of renewed economic weakness surfacing in the numbers, and as financial analysts increasingly have mentioned the possibility of a U.S. "double-dip" recession, the Fed began playing language games with its latest FOMC statement (June 23rd), which opened with:

"Information received since the Federal Open Market Committee met in April suggests that the economic recovery is proceeding and that the labor market is improving gradually.  Household spending is increasing but remains constrained by high unemployment, modest income growth, lower housing wealth, and tight credit. Business spending on equipment and software has risen significantly; however, investment in nonresidential structures continues to be weak and employers remain reluctant to add to payrolls.  Housing starts remain at a depressed level.  Financial conditions have become less supportive of economic growth on balance, largely reflecting developments abroad [my italics].  Bank lending has continued to contract in recent months. Nonetheless, the Committee anticipates a gradual return to higher levels of resource utilization in a context of price stability, although the pace of economic recovery is likely to be moderate for a time."

The italicized text places blame for a negative shift in the economic environment — a shift unforeseen by the Fed — upon the sovereign solvency crisis in Europe. The Administration already is hinting also that European austerity measures could kill the U.S. economic "recovery." Such is nonsense; the problems are not abroad, but at home. 

Decades of unsound U.S. fiscal, monetary, financial-regulatory and trade policies — policies known by the various Administrations, Congresses and Fed Chairmen to have been unsound but that catered to political and/or special-interest needs — have culminated in the current crises. The United States led the global financial system into the current systemic solvency crisis and into the current severe economic downturn.

Only politicians and Federal Reserve officials without viable options and Wall Street hypesters would claim that the current structural economic depression would be turned fundamentally by short-lived stimulus measures. The structural issues never were addressed.  Now, as the structural fundamentals reassert themselves, it is the problems at home that still are at the base of the systemic woes.

As discussed in the Hyperinflation and Consumer Liquidity Special Reports, U.S. households suffer contracting real income. This is a structural issue that has evolved over decades as an offshoot of domestic trade policies. Where consumers accounted for 73.4% of the just-revised first-quarter 2010 GDP (including housing), sustained real economic growth — sustained positive real growth in personal consumption — is impossible without positive real growth in consumer income. Temporary economic growth can be generated with the debt expansion — as Mr. Greenspan encouraged when he was Federal Reserve Chairman — but the recent systemic solvency crisis has triggered a severe debt contraction.

The intensifying economic contraction has serious consequences that do not seem to have surfaced yet in financial-market concerns — consequences that are unexpected — including unexpected additional explosive growth in the federal deficit, an unexpected further surge in Treasury funding needs, and unexpected renewed solvency concerns for the banking system. Such conditions are not happy news for the U.S. equity or credit markets.

The broad outlook is unchanged. The economy still is in a particularly severe and protracted downturn. The consequences of that and the extreme fiscal abuses practiced by the U.S. government over decades promise a shift in global market concerns to the U.S. dollar, with an eventual massive flight from the U.S. currency and a U.S. inflation surge that should lead into hyperinflation. Over the long haul, those with dollar-denominated paper assets would do well to consider preserving their wealth and assets. Irrespective of possibly extreme near-term volatility in the various markets, gold, silver, stronger currencies (such as the Canadian and Australian dollars and Swiss franc) and assets outside the U.S. dollar and even outside the United States should be the best bets for accomplishing that long-term wealth preservation.   

 

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

Pending GDP Revisions Likely Will Show a More Severe Downturn. This morning’s (June 25th) second round of revisions to first-quarter 2010 GDP showed weaker growth than previously reported, with a greater boost in inventories more than offset by softer consumer spending and a deeper trade deficit than previously reported.  An upwardly revised surge in corporate profits, however, generated an upside revision to first-quarter GDI growth (see below).

The revisions in this report were unusually large for a third estimate — so late in the reporting cycle — and likely reflected efforts at positioning the first-quarter numbers in the upcoming annual GDP revisions, so as to have minimal revisions to the first-quarter growth patterns next month, when the "advance" estimate of second-quarter GDP is released along with the series revisions on July 30th.

Those revisions will restate GDP history back to first-quarter 2007, a period that encompasses the official timing for the recession being clocked from fourth-quarter 2007. Based on patterns of already-published revisions to other series — such as payroll employment — the revised GDP data likely will show weaker than previously reported growth. The new data should show a more severe downturn, a more shallow "recovery" and perhaps indications that the economic contraction started before fourth-quarter 2007.  

GDP.  Published today by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the third estimate (second revision) of first-quarter 2010 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) was estimated at an annualized real growth rate of 2.74% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), versus the previous estimate of 3.04% and an initial estimate of 3.24%. Such followed a 5.55% annualized gain reported for fourth-quarter 2009 GDP. The year-to-year change in real first-quarter GDP revised to 2.42%, down from prior reporting of 2.50% and an initial estimate of 2.55%, versus an annual gain of 0.06% reported for the fourth-quarter. 

A greater than previously reported build-up in inventories accounted for 1.88 percentage points of or 68.6% of the 2.74% total annualized GDP growth rate. Inventories built in excess of demand usually trigger inventory-balancing production cut backs in later quarters. Annualized real growth in first-quarter final sales, which is GDP net of the change in inventories, slowed to 0.86% in revision, down from 1.38% in previous reporting and down from 1.67% in initial reporting.

The GDP implicit price deflator — inflation measure — showed a revised annualized pace of inflation in first-quarter 2010 of 1.12% versus the previous estimate of 1.08% and an initial estimate of 0.88%, up from 0.50% in fourth-quarter 2009. In contrast, annualized inflation for the CPI-U in the first-quarter was 1.53% versus 2.62% in the fourth-quarter. The higher the inflation rate used in deflating the GDP, the weaker is the inflation-adjusted number.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for first-quarter 2010 remains an approximate annual contraction of 1.5% versus the official estimate of a 2.4% gain, less-negative than the annual 4.6% contraction (0.1% official gain) estimated in the fourth-quarter. While annualized real quarterly growth is not formally estimated on an alternative basis, a small quarter-to-quarter contraction likely would have been realistic for the first-quarter. The relative upturn in annual change reflects the bottom-bouncing at low levels of activity seen for much of the last year in key underlying economic series, not an economic recovery.  As discussed in the opening comments, an intensified downturn appears to be unfolding (see the Alternate Data tab).

The graph shows official year-to-year change. The "recovery" in year-to-year growth still reflects the nature of the protracted recent bottom-bouncing in the economy. The pattern should flatten out and turn negative, once again, in long-range revisions and in future quarters. While widely followed, the GDP series probably is the worst in quality and most heavily politicized of the major economic series. Reporting over the near-term largely is guesstimated and usually is targeted at consensus forecasts.

 

Chart of GDP

GNP. The second estimate of first-quarter Gross National Product (GNP) showed annualized real growth of 3.45%, down from initial reporting of 3.87%, and versus 5.05% in the fourth-quarter. Year-to-year growth revised to 2.62% from the initial estimate of 2.72%, and versus 0.42% in the fourth-quarter. Where GDP is GNP net of the trade balance in transfer payments (interest and dividend payments), the GNP continues suffering distortions from the effects of unusual capital flows in the global solvency crisis.

GDI.  The Gross Domestic Income (GDI) underwent a massive upward revision from its initial estimate, reflecting an upwardly revised surge in reported corporate profits. The national income account estimates of corporate profits are so heavily massaged and modeled that they rarely reflect real world activity. The second estimate of GDI for first-quarter 2010 showed annualized real growth of 4.18%, revised from an initial estimate of 2.89%, and versus a fourth-quarter growth rate of 5.21%. Year-to-year change was 2.21% in the first-quarter, revised from initial reporting of 1.89%, versus a 0.84% annual contraction in the fourth-quarter.

Volatile Aircraft Orders Soften May Durable Goods Reporting. As noted in Commentaries No. 298 and No. 299, the entire historical series for durable goods orders was revamped in a massive benchmark revision last month. The net effect on reported growth patterns over the last several years was to accelerate the pace of declining orders activity into the benchmark year of 2008, with an accelerating pace of recovery in modeled and guesstimated data coming up to the present. The legitimacy of the current upside bias will be determined in the next several years of revisions. Accordingly, the current data are presented here with a note of caution.

The Census Bureau reported yesterday (June 24th) that the regularly volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods fell by 1.1% (1.0% net of revisions) in May, after a revised 3.0% (previously 2.9%) gain in April. Unadjusted, year-to-year change in May 2010 new orders was a gain of 15.3%, following a revised 21.5% (previously 21.6%) jump in April. 

The decline in May new orders was more than accounted for by a 29.6% decline in new orders for nondefense aircraft and parts, which otherwise had spiked recent reporting (April orders were up by 215.7% from March). Given the high month-to-month volatility in and long lead-time for airplane orders, developments here are much longer-term in their implications on broad economic activity than are items such as new orders for automobiles (up 0.7% monthly for May).

The widely followed nondefense capital goods declined by 2.8%, seasonally-adjusted, for the month in May, after gaining a revised 8.2% (previously 9.2%) in April. Also heavily influenced by aircraft orders, the unadjusted year-to-year change in the series was up by 18.9% for May, a somewhat less-torrid pace than the revised April annual gain of 42.6% (previously reported at 43.4%). {{end}}

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Employment/Unemployment (June 2010).  As discussed in Wednesday’s Commentary No. 304, the layoffs of roughly 240,000 temporary and intermittent census workers will dominate the headline payroll employment change for June, due for release on Friday, July 2nd. Per Briefing.com, expectations still are for total jobs loss of 70,000 in June (implying a 170,000 jobs gain net of census), versus the census-job-spiked 413,000 gain of May (the May jobs gain net of census impact was 20,000). Expectations are for the unemployment rate holding at 9.7%.

Contrary to consensus forecasts, I look for June payrolls to contract net of the census impact, which would mean a reported total payroll decline of 250,000 or more versus current expectations of a 70,000 decline. Where a portion of the reported decline in the May unemployment rate to 9.7% from 9.9% in April was due to the census circumstance, an uptick in the June unemployment rate is a good bet. Given distortions in recent seasonal adjustments, and with reporting catch-up, the June unemployment rate could hit 10.0% or more. 

In related reporting, the Conference Board’s May newspaper help-wanted advertising index, which leads June payrolls, held at 10 for the seventh straight month, off the record-low readings of 9 seen in September and October 2009. An updated assessment on the pending jobs and unemployment report will be published next week — before the release — as late numbers from other related economic series become available.

 __________

No. 304: Census Jobs Loss, Home Sales

Wednesday, June 23rd, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 304
Census Jobs Loss, Home Sales

June 23, 2010

__________

Census Firings Cost June Payrolls Roughly 240,000 Jobs

May New Home Sales Down 40.5% in Month
After Major Downside Revisions to Earlier Reporting

__________ 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, June 25th, following the release of the third estimate (second revision) of first-quarter 2010 GDP, and will include an assessment of the May new orders for durable goods due for release tomorrow (Thursday, June 24th).

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Ongoing Activity Slows Anew, as Reported Economic "Recovery" Weakens in Revision, This morning’s (June 23rd) brief Commentary addresses the weaker-than-consensus homes sales reported yesterday and today, along with a first glance at hard data for part of the June payroll reporting, which is due for release on Friday, July 2nd. 

What appears to be happening in the sudden "unexpected" weakening of a number of business statistics is a combination of reporting catch-up and a re-intensification of the economic downturn. This area will be covered more deeply in a broader update of economic activity in this Friday’s upcoming Commentary No. 305.

Census Bureau Reports Firing of 243,000 Temporary Census Workers in June. Key to the significance of the upcoming reported change in June payrolls will be the change in payrolls net of the change in temporary census workers employed. The Census Bureau reported its weekly payroll of temporary workers, today, for the week including June 12th (inclusion of that day defines the Bureau of Labor Statistics’ [BLS] payroll survey period). The June number was 330,737 versus 573,779 in May, a drop of 243,042, which should be very close to the number reported by the BLS, say roughly 240,000.

Forget the private sector payroll change that will get the press headlines, the total payroll change net of census firings is the number to watch. It includes the private sector as well as other government payrolls, a sector that has been seeing downside pressure recently, particularly at the state and local levels.

I would look for an outright contraction of June payrolls, net of temporary census impact. Such would mean an aggregate monthly loss in excess of 250,000 jobs. The early consensus from Briefing.com is an aggregate loss of 70,000 jobs in June, versus May’s census-spiked gain of 431,000, with the June U.3 unemployment rate unchanged at 9.7%. I would be surprised if the consensus estimates do not turn more negative.

As to unemployment, an increase from both census catch-up and underlying economic weakness could push the U.3 unemployment rate to 10% or higher.

Looking ahead, there still are 330,737 temporary census hires who will lose their jobs in the next couple of months, depressing reported payroll change in July and August, etc.

Downside Surprises and Major Revisions in Home Sales. Yesterday’s (June 22nd) report of May existing home sales (counted based on actual closings, National Association of Realtors [NAR]) shocked the markets with a seasonally-adjusted monthly contraction of 2.2% (1.9% net of revisions), where a strong upside gain had been expected from the residual effects of the expiring home-buyer tax credit, where a sales contract had to be in place by April 30th. 

On a similar basis, today’s May new home sales (counted based on contract signings, Census Bureau) tumbled much more than expected, down by a statistically-significant 32.7% (40.5% net of prior period revisions) +/- 11.6% (95% confidence interval). The record low-level of an annualized 300,000 unit May sales pace was down from 446,000 in April, but April’s level was revised downward from 504,000, and March’s new level of 389,000 was revised downward from the benchmark revision level of 439,000.

Beyond the highly unstable nature of recent housing reports (see also the housing starts assessment in Commentary No. 303, the pattern — as the boosts from short-term stimulus measures pass — is that the "rebound" in these numbers was not as great as previously advertised, and weaker-than-expected economic activity again is taking hold.

Foreclosure activity also remains a major distortion in these numbers, with NAR estimating 31% of new home sales for May in the "distressed" category (the April estimate was 33%, but the number of foreclosures still has been fairly steady). That percentage should jump sharply in the next couple of months, as overall sales activity slows further. Census acknowledges that a portion of new home sales is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimates. Purportedly, foreclosure activity is on the rise, and some in the construction trade have difficulty competing with the pricing of foreclosed properties. Until the foreclosure problem works itself out, monthly changes in these numbers cannot be taken as meaningful indicators of trends in underlying activity in homeowner real estate, as it relates to general economic activity. 

The following updated graphs reflect different measures of home sales activity since February 2009. The numbers, through May 2010, reflect the seasonally-adjusted level of monthly sales, rather than the annual rate usually published.

Chart of Foreclosures as % of existing home sales

Chart of Existing Home Sales with Foreclosures

Chart of Existing Home Sales

Chart of New Home Sales

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

New Orders for Durable Goods (May 2010).  May durable goods orders are due for release tomorrow, Thursday, June 24th. The recent benchmark revisions appear to have put an upside recovery-bias into the monthly reporting.   Nonetheless, the series should remain randomly volatile, with softer monthly numbers seen over time. Briefing.com shows a consensus forecast of a monthly contraction of 1.4% for May, versus the 2.8% gain reported initially for April.

Gross Domestic Product — GDP (First-Quarter 2010 — Third Estimate).  The second revision to the first-quarter 2010 GDP estimate is due for release on Friday, June 25th. Likely to hold near the prior estimate of 3.0% annualized real growth, any GDP revision more than statistical noise would be surprise at this point in the reporting cycle.

 

__________

No. 303: Inflation Update, Housing and Production

Thursday, June 17th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 303
Inflation Update, Housing and Production

June 17, 2010

__________

May Annual Consumer Inflation:
2.0% (CPI-U), 9.2% (SGS)

Seasonal Factors Depressing Monthly CPI
Reverse in June and July

Early Signs Continue of Intensifying Business Contraction

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, June 25th, following the release of the third estimate (second revision) of first-quarter 2010 GDP, and will include an assessment of the May new orders for durable goods and existing and new home sales released earlier in that week.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

The Outlook Remains for Intensified Economic and Solvency Crises, Higher Inflation and Hyperinflation. The last two weeks have seen several early and still-tentative indications of an intensified downturn in economic activity, including a weak employment report (net of census hires) and monthly contractions in retail sales and housing starts that were not expected by consensus forecasters. Those data were for May. As discussed in Commentary No. 301 and numerous previous writings, an annual contraction in real (inflation-adjusted) broad liquidity (SGS-Ongoing M3) has been signaling the renewed economic difficulties since December 2009.

The primary exception to these negative market surprises was May industrial production, but production, too, should soften in the months ahead, along with most other numbers on business activity. Watch in particular for some negative surprises in the upcoming June employment and unemployment report, due for release on July 2nd. Significant jobs loss among the temporary census workers likely set the tone for the balance of the economy, along with an upturn in the unemployment rate. 

As mounting signs of renewed economic deterioration push consensus forecasts towards the concept of an intensifying downturn or double-dip recession, the implications for same should have significant impact on the largely unsuspecting financial markets. Consensus forecasts for the federal budget deficit, U.S. Treasury funding needs and banking-system solvency all are based on assumptions of economic growth in 2010, not renewed contraction.

As the deficit and funding needs explode well beyond expectations, currency market focus likely will shift from the euro’s woes to those of the U.S. dollar, with massive selling of dollars and dollar-denominated paper forcing the Fed to act as lender of last resort to the U.S. Treasury. Those actions would spike the domestic money supply, from Treasury debt monetization, in conjunction with heavy dollar selling, triggering an early round of unusually high inflation.   That, in turn, likely would evolve into hyperinflation. Once more, this is as previously discussed (see Hyperinflation Special Report, the opening comments in Commentary No. 297 and, again Commentary No. 301); it is just that some of the finer detail is beginning to come into focus.

The general outlook on the economy and the markets is unchanged. For those with assets at risk, circumstances continue to suggest looking at actions for long-range wealth preservation. Despite any severe near-term volatility in the markets, physical gold and silver, assets outside the U.S. dollar (such as the Canadian dollar, the Australian dollar and Swiss franc) and assets outside the United States, offer long-term hedges against the severe loss ahead in U.S. dollar’s purchasing power.  

 

 

 

As suggested by the above graphs, the gold market continues to look beyond the short-term upside distortion in the U.S. dollar’s exchange rate and the downside distortion to oil prices.

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

Inflation-Depressing Seasonal Factors Reverse in June and July. The May CPI and PPI reports again were depressed by seasonal factors that reduce reported seasonally-adjusted energy inflation at this time of year. For example, the BLS reported that May gasoline prices rose by 0.7% (Department of Energy reports a 0.9% drop), before seasonal adjustment. After seasonal adjustments, though, gasoline prices fell by 5.2% for the month. As discussed last month, seasonally-adjusted inflation numbers have little meaning for individuals who have to fill their gasoline tanks with real-time dollars, which are not seasonally adjusted (Commentary No. 297).

Those energy-related seasonal distortions, however, start to reverse in June, becoming neutral in that month, with reported energy inflation getting spiked sharply by the seasonals in July, irrespective of whatever is happening at the gas pump. Accordingly, the recent pattern of minimal monthly contractions in the seasonally-adjusted CPI should be at an end, at least for several months.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported this morning (June 17th) that the seasonally-adjusted May CPI-U eased by 0.16% (up by 0.08% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, after a 0.07% decline (a gain of 0.17% unadjusted) in April. Seasonally-adjusted, the CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended May 2010 (May versus February) was a decline of 0.67%, against April’s unchanged level. The lack of inflation in the latest three months, once again, was due to seasonal adjustments. Unadjusted, the CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended May 2010 (May versus February) was 2.68%, against April’s 2.46%.

Unadjusted, May’s year-to-year inflation was 2.02% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) against a 2.24% annual increase in April.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s June 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.71% adjusted monthly gain seen in June 2009. I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for June 2010, the difference in June’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from May 2010’s reported annual inflation rate of 2.02%.

CPI-W. The narrower, seasonally-adjusted May CPI-W declined by 0.28% (gained 0.08% unadjusted) for the month, following a decline of 0.14% (a gain of 0.20% unadjusted) in April. Seasonally-adjusted, the annualized rate of CPI-W inflation for the three months ended May (May versus February) was a contraction of 1.42%, versus a decline of 0.03% in April. As with the CPI-U, the lack of inflation in the latest three months again was due to seasonal adjustments. Unadjusted, the CPI-W annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended May 2010 (May versus February) was 3.01%, against April’s 2.64%.

Unadjusted year-to-year CPI-W inflation rose by 2.56% in May, following a 2.90% April increase.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — is reported only on an unadjusted basis. Year-to-year or annual inflation was 1.99% in May 2010, versus 2.33% in April.  Unadjusted, the C-CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended May 2010 (May versus February) was 2.73%, against April’s 2.40%.

Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI inflation was roughly 5.4% in May 2010, versus 5.6% in April, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was about 9.2% (9.22% for those using the extra digit) in May, versus 9.5% in April.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation. Despite another recent all-time high in the price of gold, in the current cycle, gold and silver prices have yet to approach their historic high prices, adjusted for inflation. Even with the June 8th historic high gold price of $1,246.00 per troy ounce, the earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 was not breached in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on inflation through May 2010, the 1980 gold price peak would be $2,384 per troy ounce, based on not-seasonally-adjusted-CPI-U-adjusted dollars, and would be $7,595 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars. 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org) has not been hit since, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on inflation through May 2010, the 1980 silver price peak would be $139 per troy ounce, based on not-seasonally-adjusted-CPI-U-adjusted dollars, and would be $442 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars.

As shown on page 22 in the Hyperinflation report, over the decades, the price of gold has more than compensated for the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI-U inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the U.S. dollar based on the SGS-Alternate CPI.

Real Money Supply M3. The signal of pending intensification of the economic downturn, based on the annual contraction in the inflation-adjusted broad money supply (M3) most recently was discussed in Commentary No. 301.  The annual real contraction in May M3 (SGS-Ongoing) estimated for that Commentary was 7.9%. Based on today’s CPI-U report, that annual contraction was 7.9%, deepened from April’s 7.0% contraction.

Real Retail Sales.  Based on May 2010 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly May retail sales fell by 1.0%, where before inflation adjustment the current number was down by 1.2%, versus a 0.6% monthly real retail sales gain in April, the same as before inflation adjustment.  May real retail sales rose at a 4.9% year-to-year pace — slower than in April — versus a 6.9% gain before inflation adjustment. Real April sales were up 6.6% year-to-year, versus a 9.0% gain before inflation adjustment.

Since November 2008, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $162.0 billion (the deflated May number was $166.9 billion). Smoothed for monthly volatility on a six-month moving-average basis, as shown in the accompanying graph, the pattern of activity here has been one of bottom-bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales. The recent bounce from short-lived stimulus factors and warped-seasonals appears to have run its course, with the average close to rolling over, with lower real sales levels likely in the months ahead. There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in economic activity — no recovery — just general bottom-bouncing.

 

 

May PPI Inflation Depressed Again by Seasonal Adjustments. Seasonally-adjusted inflation at the wholesale and production level in May eased slightly, month-to-month, as a decline in energy prices was exaggerated after seasonal adjustment. As reported yesterday (June 16th) by the BLS, the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) in May declined by 0.3%. Before seasonal adjustments, however, the May PPI rose by 0.3%. Such followed April’s 0.1% monthly decline (unadjusted gain of 0.2%).

Unadjusted and year-to-year, May’s annual PPI inflation rate eased to 5.3% from the 5.5% annual gain reported for April.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted May intermediate goods rose by 0.4% (up by 0.8% in April), with crude May goods falling by 2.8% (down by 1.2% in April). Year-to-year inflation in May intermediate goods was up by 8.5% (up by 8.6% in April), with May annual inflation in crude goods up by 21.2% (up by 28.8% in April).

{{end}}

May’s Monthly Decline in Housing Starts Was Not Statistically Meaningful. Yesterday’s (June 16th) May housing starts report turned lower, along with a downward revision to April’s number. Yet, the headline number again showed no statistically-meaningful month-to-month change, continuing the pattern of bottom-bouncing seen since December of 2008.  The Census Bureau reported that May 2010 housing starts fell month-to-month by a statistically-insignificant 10.0% (down 11.8% net of revisions) +/- 12.0% (95% confidence interval). April’s starts were revised to a 3.9% (previously 5.8%) gain.

Year-to-year change in May was a statistically insignificant gain of 7.8% +/-11.3% (95% confidence interval), following a revised annual gain of 38.2% (previously 40.9%) in April. The extreme variation in annual growth patterns is due to the collapsing and troughing (April 2009 was the trough) of data a year ago, combined with the ongoing extreme volatility seen in these data in the current contraction. 

Since December 2008, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing at an historically low level, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 573,056. In the past 18 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, including May 2010’s reading of 593,000. 

 

 

The "recovery" in housing is shown in the above graph. The data are smoothed using a six-month moving average to remove the extreme month-to-month volatility seen in this series. Regardless of any level of smoothing, though, in the current cycle, housing starts remain at least 25% below any levels seen since before the end of World War II. Along with the activity in the broad economy, a renewed downturn in housing likely is underway, with weaker data being reported in the months ahead.

May Industrial Production Boosted by Utilities Surge.  Running counter to the downturns or weaker-than-consensus results for May employment, retail sales and housing starts, May industrial production showed its third consecutive monthly gain. The Federal Reserve Board reported yesterday (June 16th) that seasonally-adjusted May 2010 industrial production rose by 1.24% (1.24% net of revisions) for the month, versus a revised 0.69% (previously 0.80%) monthly gain reported for April (March was revised higher). Utility usage surged by an unusually large 4.8% for the month. Such gains most often reflect unseasonable weather patterns. Where some components of manufacturing production still are estimated by electricity usage, large gains in utilities often translate into some bloated manufacturing numbers.  

The year-to-year change in May rose to 7.62% from April’s unrevised annual gain of 5.18%. The spike in annual growth was due largely to the pattern of collapsing activity a year ago, which troughed in June 2009. The cycle-low reading in June 2009 of 95.75 reflected a 13.3% year-to-year contraction, the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II. 

For the last 17 months, the production index has averaged 99.34, around which the series has been fluctuating, with May’s six-month moving average reading at 101.70 versus 103.54 for the single month.

 

The "recovery" in production is shown in the above graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average. Production activity had leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that effectively wiped out the last eight years of growth in industrial production. Despite the near-term upside bump generated by short-lived stimulus and seasonal distortions, the series likely still is bottom-bouncing and should begin to soften anew, significantly, in the next several months.

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Home Sales (May 2010).  May 2010 existing home sales are due for release on Tuesday, June 22nd, with new home sales scheduled for Wednesday, June 23rd. Given the expiration of home-buyer tax credits, these series should begin to fall-off sharply, reflecting sales lost to earlier periods. Both series will continue to suffer major distortions due to massive foreclosure rates, and reporting risk is to the downside of expectations.

New Orders for Durable Goods (May 2010).  May durable goods orders are due for release on Thursday, June 24th. The recent benchmark revisions appear to have put an upside recovery bias into the monthly reporting.   Nonetheless, the series should remain randomly volatile, with softer monthly numbers seen over time. Briefing.com shows a consensus forecast of a monthly contraction of 1.4% for May, versus the 2.8% gain reported initially for April.

Gross Domestic Product — GDP (First-Quarter 2010 — Third Estimate).  The second revision to the first-quarter 2010 GDP estimate is due for release on Friday, June 25th. Likely to hold near the prior estimate of 3.0% annualized real growth, any revision likely will be no more than statistical noise.

  

___

No. 302: Retail Sales, Trade Deficit

Friday, June 11th, 2010

  JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 302
Retail Sales, Trade Deficit

June 11, 2010

_________

Ski-Jump-Shaped Depression

May Retail Sales Drop: Tentative Confirmation of
Intensified Business Downturn

April Trade Deficit: A Negative for Second-Quarter GDP

__________

 PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Thursday, June 17th, following the release of the May consumer price index, and will include an assessment of the prior day’s May producer price index, housing starts and industrial production reports.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

"Double-Dip" Begins to Surface in Response to Impaired Liquidity. Consensus, Wall Street, Administration and Federal Reserve hype of a "V" shaped economic recovery should begin to fade, as data in the next several months tend to confirm a re-intensifying economic contraction. I would describe the shape of this recession/depression as one tracing out the path of an inept skier trying out a ski jump: sharp decline, then some leveling out with a brief up-blip, followed by a renewed plunge with the potential for an unexpectedly disastrous landing. A renewed economic downturn is not anticipated in financial market expectations or in the happy economic assumptions underlying consensus or official estimates of the federal budget deficit, Treasury funding needs and banking system solvency. The implications for inflation here were discussed in Commentary No. 301.

Following last Friday’s soft May payroll survey, May retail sales showed an outright monthly contraction this morning (June 11th), providing still-tentative confirmation of U.S. economic activity having passed an inflection point, entering a period of intensified or renewed downturn. Also discussed in Commentary No. 301, linked above, an annual contraction in broad liquidity — measured by real (inflation-adjusted) M3 (SGS Ongoing M3 Measure) — in turn, has signaled the ongoing economic woes and is strangling consumption and normal business activity.      

Reported Nominal Retail Sales. The May 2010 retail sales report — issued by the Census Bureau — indicated a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted monthly decline of 1.20% (down 1.06% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a revised 0.59% (previously 0.42%) monthly gain in April. On a year-to-year basis, May 2010 retail sales were reported up by 6.91% from May 2009, slower than the revised 8.98% (was 8.82%) annual gain in April. Annual changes still are distorted by the severe trough seen a year ago.

Real Retail Sales.  Estimates of real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales will be published on Thursday, June 17th, in the Commentary following the release of the May CPI data. Month-to-month real change in retail sales for May likely was in contraction, with real annual growth somewhat shy of 5%.

Core Retail Sales.  The "core retail sales" methodology was revamped recently, where the net relative monthly increases and/or decreases in gasoline station and grocery store sales were subtracted from the full monthly retail sales number, instead of the total of gasoline station and grocery store revenues each month. Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, the revamped reported "core" change more closely reflects the actual retail sales experience. In April a reported month-to-month decline in grocery store sales slightly more than offset a gain in sales at gasoline stations. 

This approach remains a work in progress and eventually will be used in the development of additional SGS alternative economic measures. The "core" retail sales is reported in two versions, where Version I uses the original methodology, and Version II version appears to provide a more balanced picture of the impact food and energy inflation have in the standard retail sales reporting.

Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales were:

Version I: May retail sales — net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 1.2%, the same as the official aggregate loss of 1.2%.

Version II: May retail sales — net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gasoline stations — declined by 0.9% versus the official aggregate loss of 1.2%. 

April Trade Deficit Hits 15-Month High — Even Net of Inflation (Oil Price) Impact. For April 2010, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported yesterday (June 10th) the nominal (not-adjusted-for-inflation) seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit in goods and services rose to $40.3 billion — the largest monthly trade shortfall since December 2008 — up from a benchmark-revised $40.0 (previously $40.4) billion deficit in March, and up sharply from the $28.4 billion monthly deficit in April 2009.

Against March 2010, the April trade balance reflected both lower imports and exports, with a sharper decline in exports. Higher April oil imports reflected both higher physical volume and oil prices. Specifically, for the month of April 2010, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $77.13 per barrel, versus $74.32 in March 2010 and $46.68 in April 2009. In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, April 2010 volume averaged 9.804 million barrels per day, versus 9.660 million in March 2010 and 9.699 million in April 2009.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Trade Deficit. The April data reflected annual revisions (including restatement of monthly imports and exports for corrected paperwork flows) and redefinitions of some services components as goods components, with revisions stretching back to 1999. The recent-period revisions were not excessive, but the data, as reported for goods, on both a seasonally- and inflation-adjusted basis, suggest a small downward revision is due for first-quarter 2010 GDP. Such, however, likely will not show up until the annual GDP revisions, which usually are released at the end of July (July 30th), along with the advance estimate of second-quarter GDP. To the extent there are any more-serious implications for revisions to earlier GDP reporting, such will be discussed in a later Commentary.

The April trade deficit release was not good news for the upcoming estimate of second-quarter GDP. Adjusted for seasonal factors and inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the January, February and March 2010 respective merchandise trade deficits were revised to $39.5 (previously $40.9), $43.2 (previously $42.3) and $44.1 billion (previously $43.8), or an annualized pace in first-quarter 2010 of $507.3 billion. On the same basis, the April deficit was at its highest level since January 2009, at $44.3 billion, or at an annualized pace of $531.9. If the April shortfall should hold for May and June, the widening trade deficit would have a net negative impact on reported second-quarter GDP growth.

 __________

 

No. 301: Money Supply Update

Monday, June 7th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 301
Money Supply Update

June 7, 2010

__________

5.9% M3 Annual Decline Deepest
 Since Early-1930s Banking Crisis

Post-World War II Record Drop in Inflation-Adjusted M3
Signals Intensifying Business Contraction

Renewed Recession Will Set Stage for
U.S. Solvency Crisis and Severe Inflation Threat

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, June 11th, following the release of the May retail sales report, and will include an assessment of the prior day’s April trade deficit report.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

Correction to Prior Commentary. In Commentary No. 300, somehow we lost the last line in the last paragraph in the opening comments. I apologize for the incomplete thought, which has been corrected in the original posting. The paragraph should have read:

"If this first significant economic report for May 2010 is a harbinger of the intensified downturn in business activity, such will be confirmed by other reporting in the next month or so. Next week’s retail sales report has a fair shot of providing such confirmation."

M3 Contraction Continues. The most common questions I am receiving at the moment are: (1) Why is M3 contracting, particularly with the Fed pumping tremendous liquidity into the markets; and (2) How can you be looking at inflation, let alone a hyperinflation, when M3 is contracting? Those issues have been covered in prior writings, but they are reviewed anew in this Commentary.

As shown in both the shorter- and longer- range graphs of nominal (not adjusted for inflation), year-to-year change in the SGS-Ongoing M3 Measure sank to a post-World War II record contraction of roughly 5.9%, following a 5.0% contraction in April.  Data detail and other graphs are available from the Alternate Data page for M3.

Annuall Money Supply Growth

Chart of Long-term M3  Growth

Although the M3 downturn still is relatively small versus the 1930s banking crisis, the May 2010 annual contraction was the deepest money shrinkage since a 7.3% annual drop of the broadest money supply measure in January 1934 (comparative data from Milton Friedman and Anna Jacobson Schwartz’s A Monetary History of the United States, 1867-1960). Keep in mind that the May 2010 annual drop was against a 7.1% annual gain in May 2009, while the 7.3% annual decline in January 1934, was on top of annual declines of 4.5% in January 1933, 11.9% in January 1932, 1.6% in January 1931 and 1.5% in January 1930, a cumulative contraction over five years of 24.4%.

As to what is shrinking in M3, the roughly $871 billion drop in the estimated seasonally-adjusted May 2010 M3 largely was due to a $642 billion decline in institutional money funds (reported by the Fed), and $126 billion drop in Fed-reported large time deposits with commercial banks, although the balance on large time deposits, repos and Eurodollars, which are modeled, also are estimated to be contracting on an annual basis. Where nominal M2 remains up by roughly $142 billion, or 1.7% year-to-year, as with M3, real annual M2 growth has turned negative, again using the CPI-U for deflation.

The contractions in M3 are despite the explosive growth in and continued high levels of the monetary base, which remains the Federal Reserve’s traditional tool for changing money supply growth. Consisting of currency in circulation and bank reserves, the $1 trillion-plus increase in excess bank reserves has the potential to have added more than $10 trillion dollars to roughly $14 trillion in existing M3, today, but it has not.

Chart of Monetary Base

As to why M3 is in decline, the answer lies in declining lending by banks. Instead of lending their massive excess reserve into the regular flow of commerce, banks are leaving them on deposit with the Fed. Where the Fed has become something like a commercial lender, in terms of fostering purported stability in the mortgage and commercial paper markets, any funds that have gotten into the system are reflected in the usual money supply components.

Updated credit numbers (including today’s — June 7th — release of April consumer credit) continue to show lending in contraction, as indicated by declining levels of short-term credit in the graphs that follow. In terms of year-to-year change, consumer credit (April) is down by 3.2%, commercial and industrial loans (May) are down by 17.6%, and commercial paper outstanding (May) is down by 17.0%.

 

Chart: Consumer Credit Outstanding

 Chart: Consumer and Industrial Loans

Chart:Commectial Paper Outstanding

 

One misperception is that a debt collapse triggers a money supply collapse. That is not accurate; it is reduced lending that can reduce money supply. If a bank lends a customer $10,000,000, and the customer defaults, the bank likely is not going to recover the $10,000,000 that has been distributed into the broad money supply system by the customer’s spending. Instead, the bank takes the loss on its balance sheet and suffers in terms of the amount of lending it can offer. It is as bank loans are retired and lending declines, due to balance sheet or other restrictions, that money supply begins to shrink.

Another common misperception is that money contractions may reflect investors moving their assets into stocks, etc. Usually that is not the case, since the buyer writes a check against his or her checking account, while basically the same amount gets deposited into the seller’s checking account, with the transaction being money-supply neutral.

Transactions that are not money-supply neutral involve the Fed selling (taking assets out of the money supply) or buying (adding cash into the money supply) assets such as Treasury securities, where the funds end up having impact on privately held accounts in the money supply.

Implications for the U.S. Economy and Inflation. The graph below shows real, or inflation-adjusted, annual M3 growth plotted against the timing of formal recessions, as determined by the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER). M3 is deflated here by the government’s consumer price index CPI-U.

Whenever real annual M3 growth has turned negative, the economy has followed. Although there have been recessions that were not triggered by contracting real liquidity, every time real M3 has contracted, the economy has fallen into recession shortly thereafter, or, as in the case of the 1973 to 1975 recession, where the M3 contraction took place after recession had started, the existing downturn has intensified.

In the present circumstance, the end of the particularly long and deep recession has not been called by the NBER. In the event the NBER calls an end to the downturn as of some point in 2009, then the real annual M3 contraction that began in December 2009 should prove to be a signal for a double-dip recession, as opposed to ongoing recession and the intensified downturn that appears to be getting underway.

 

Chart: Real M3 vs Formal Recessions

 

For those who define inflation in terms of changes in money supply, the current environment is one of deflation. The inflation I discuss, however, is defined in terms of prices for consumer goods and services, and costs there seemed to be reasonably well contained as measured by the CPI-U. Where many people sense that their actual inflation is running higher than that reported by the government, such is covered by the SGS-Alternate CPI, yet the magnitude of inflation problems ahead will dwarf any issues as to how the CPI is measured.

Inflation fears from a post-World War II record decline in broad domestic money supply certainly are counter-intuitive, but that is because the inflation problem is two steps removed from inadequate liquidity strangling business activity. As suggested by the discussion above of contracting real M3, the economy is headed into an intensifying downturn or double-dip recession, which should blow apart forecasts of the federal budget deficit and related Treasury funding needs, as well as trigger massive selling of the U.S. Dollar. Those issues — resulting from the effects of the liquidity squeeze — are what threaten an early breaking of the ultimate inflation crisis. Otherwise, I refer you to the Hyperinflation Special Report for a longer term outlook on the pending hyperinflation.

Formal estimates of the federal budget deficit, as well as results of the stress tests applied to banking-system solvency, are dependent on assumptions of positive economic growth in 2010, not renewed contraction. Ahead lie likely increased federal bailouts of banks, the unemployed, insolvent states, etc., which will balloon the deficit and Treasury funding well beyond current market expectations. 

As U.S. solvency issues once again move to center stage for the global markets, the U.S. dollar should come under broad, heavy selling pressure. With global and domestic investors increasingly balking at funding the Treasury’s needs, the Federal Reserve will have little option but to become the lender of last resort, monetizing federal debt in a manner that will start to inflate the domestic money supply. Money created by the Fed though buying of Treasuries will flow directly to the checking accounts, etc., of those receiving the Treasury’s checks. The Fed and Treasury are likely to act accordingly, since the alternatives involve high risks of systemic collapse, financial-market collapse and cessation of normal government functioning. It is the nature of the political system to buy as much time, to push intractable problems as far into the future, as possible.  

As to the total money supply of dollars, it is important to consider the effective U.S. dollar money supply that also is held outside the United States. The Federal Reserve reports that more than half (purportedly about 70%) of the U.S. dollar currency in circulation, otherwise reported in the domestic M1, is physically outside the United States. Beyond that, there are at least another $7 trillion dollars in cash or near-cash instruments, not counted in the domestic money supply, which could be dumped overnight, if those holding the dollars so chose. Dumping of U.S. dollars and dollar denominated assets would pummel the dollar’s exchange rate, triggering inflation pressures and exploding domestic money supply growth, depending on Federal Reserve actions. 

A weakening dollar usually triggers higher oil prices (and vice versa), denominated in U.S. dollars. That pattern has been seen consistently in the last several years of crisis. Oil is the dominant commodity in terms of impacting costs of consumer goods and services, ranging from energy, fuel and transportation costs, to raw material in many chemicals, fertilizers, pharmaceuticals, plastics, etc.

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Trade Balance in Goods and Services (April 2010).  The April trade deficit is scheduled for release on Thursday, June 10th. Briefing.com currently shows a consensus forecast of a widening to $41.2 billion, from $40.4 billion reported in March (the consensus increase has been shrinking over time). The higher consensus expectation probably is due to higher oil prices in April. Reporting risk, however, remains for a worse-than-expected deficit, given likely still-pending catch-up in paperwork flows for imports.

Retail Sales (May 2010).  The May retail sales report is scheduled for release on Friday, June 11th. Despite the relative weakness of April’s 0.4% monthly gain being blamed on an early Easter pulling sales into March, Briefing.com showed a consensus monthly gain of 0.5% earlier last week for May retail sales. Since Friday, the consensus reportedly has been at 0.2%. As key data begin to reflect the intensifying downturn in business activity, reporting will tend to be weaker than expectations. Reporting risk accordingly is in that direction for May’s retail report.

__________

No. 300: May Employment and Unemployment

Friday, June 4th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 300
May Employment and Unemployment

June 4, 2010

__________

May Nonfarm Payrolls Rose 20,000 Net of 411,000 Temporary Census Hires
And Fell by 31,000 after Revisions and Birth-Death Model Shenanigans

May Household-Survey Employment Fell by 35,000
Irrespective of Census Hires

Unemployment Rates Were Artificially Low Due to Census Effects:
9.7% (U.3), 16.9% (U.6), 21.7% (SGS)

M3 Signal for Double-Dip Downturn Intensifies

__________ 

PLEASE NOTE: Due to the unusual features of today’s employment/unemployment reporting and the time spent in assessment of same, the extended comments planned for today on the nature of the M3 contraction and its implications for the economy and inflation will be addressed in a standalone Commentary on Monday, June 7th.  The preliminary estimate of May M3 will be posted this weekend on the Alternate Data page for M3. The next regular Commentary thereafter is scheduled for Friday, June 11th, following the release of the May retail sales report, and will include an assessment of the prior day’s April trade deficit report.

NEW FEATURE: See details at the end of the Commentary as to the introduction of new economic charts available on the SGS Web site.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

Early Signs of an Intensifying Downturn? This morning’s (June 4th) employment and unemployment reporting for May showed renewed underlying weakness in nonfarm payrolls, after two months of statistically-significant monthly gains (although payrolls have risen monthly since January, only March and April’s gains were significant by Bureau of Labor Statistics standards). While the reported May payroll surge of 431,000 was statistically meaningful, the gain was just 20,000, and not significant, net of temporary census hiring. After revision and birth-death model gimmicks, jobs contracted by 31,000 for the month. The secondarily-headlined private payroll gain of 41,000 was above the 20,000 net-of-census-hires figure because of a decline in other government employment.

While there may be some catch-up here from earlier overstatement of jobs growth, the timing is right for the onset of the intensified recession/depression, which has been signaled since late-2009 by annual contractions in real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (see below). Anecdotal evidence suggests that upcoming May retail sales reporting also might be below expectations.

Where the census hiring impact was definable for the payroll survey, and properly was not seasonally adjusted, the effect on the unemployment rate is difficult to assess, although it certainly contributed to the reported decline in the headline U.3 unemployment rate. To the extent that new census employees already had other part-time work, their hiring by the Census Bureau would not have moved the unemployment number. 

The numbers suggest that the census hiring effect has been, at least to a certain extent, seasonally adjusted in the household survey reporting, distorting a variety of unemployment measures. Consider (all numbers are seasonally adjusted) that the payroll survey showed overall government employment increased by 390,000, but the household survey (unemployment rate survey) showed those employed by the government fell by 170,000. One might expect the census hires to fall into the category of those working part-time, but those working part-time for economic reasons (part of the U.6 unemployment rate calculation) fell by 171,000, while those working part time for non-economic reasons fell by 211,000. As a separate issue, short-term discouraged workers fell by 114,000, with the bulk of those likely moving into the long-term discouraged worker category, as year-ago massive jobs loss became ancient history to the BLS statisticians. These factors contributed to the reported decline in the broader U.6 unemployment rate.  

If this first significant economic report for May 2010 is a harbinger of the intensified downturn in business activity, such will be confirmed by other reporting in the next month or so. Next week’s retail retail sales report has a fair shot of providing such confirmation.

Reporting of the May Labor Environment. Payroll Survey. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs gain of 431,000 (up by 409,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for May 2010. Net of 411,000 intermittent and temporary census hires, however, the May jobs gain was a statistically-insignificant 20,000 (a contraction of 2,000 net of prior period revisions). Although the April jobs gain held at 290,000, as initially reported, payroll levels were revised lower by 22,000 for both March and April 2010.

Based on the patterns of hiring and firing temporary workers for the 2000 census, layoffs from the 2010 census will begin meaningfully in June 2010, with next month’s total payroll reporting very likely to show a large jobs loss as a result. Payrolls likely will be in monthly contraction, as well, net of census discharges.  

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; December 2009 is the likely short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment has declined by a seasonally-adjusted 8,363,000 jobs, or 6.1%.

The pace of reported monthly change has turned relatively positive versus year-ago comparisons of sharp month-to-month declines, yet the year-to-year change in not-seasonally-adjusted payrolls has remained in negative territory, even with the May’s peak in temporary census hiring. The year-to-year contraction in total nonfarm payrolls narrowed to 0.37% (a contraction of 0.75% net of census hires) in May, from a 0.97% (1.00% net of census hires) annual contraction in April. 

The current annual declines have narrowed from the post-World War II record 4.96% decline in July 2009. The July 2009 decline was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II, which reflected a trough of a 7.59% annual contraction in September 1945. Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the current annual decline remains the worst since the Great Depression. 

The long-term graph of year-to-year payroll change reflects the numbers as reported, with no adjustment for census hiring. The second graph, however, shows the year-to-year detail both with and without the census hires.   

 

 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  Unusual activity repeated in May 2010, with the monthly birth-death adjustment adding 29,000 more jobs than in May 2009, a pattern contrary to what would be suggested by recent reporting difficulties that have understated declines in payroll employment. The Birth-Death Model biases tend to overstate payroll employment levels — to understate employment declines — during recessions. These flaws were confirmed by the nature of the BLS’s massive benchmark revision published with the January 2010 report, where the BLS had indicated that the underlying assumptions to the Birth-Death Model were missing significant jobs losses due to business failures that the BLS could not measure on a timely basis.

Although the upside bias has been scaled down some from last year as a result of the reporting errors, the Birth-Death Model survives and remains a major distorting factor in monthly payroll reporting, likely adding in excess of 230,000 phantom jobs per month at present. That now could be roughly 250,000 to 300,000, given the unusual April and May data. Such misreporting, however, will not be corrected until the next benchmark revision is published in February 2011, after the November 2010 elections.

The unsupportable premise that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business, continues. So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. The "surplus" jobs created by start-up firms, which get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor, were revised lower in the most-recent benchmark — the only portion of the model that was scaled back — averaging at present roughly an extra 36,000 seasonally-adjusted jobs per month. This monthly bias should be negative by 200,000 or so, on average. Since it is not, again, the BLS continues regularly to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 230,000 jobs, plus.

That said, the unadjusted May 2010 bias was a monthly addition of 215,000 jobs, versus an addition of 186,000 jobs in May 2009, and against a monthly addition of 188,000 jobs in April 2010.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly employment contraction of 35,000 in May, irrespective of any census pick-up, versus an estimated gain in April of 550,000. As discussed in the opening comments, however, the series appears to have suffered major distortions by the inappropriate seasonal-adjustment of the surge in temporary census workers. Such action assures sharp upside movements in the unemployment rate in the next several months as these distortions are reversed.

The May 2010 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate was reported at 9.70% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval). The 0.16% monthly contraction versus April’s estimate of 9.86%, however, was statistically insignificant. Unable to account for temporary census jobs in its survey, the BLS is unable to account for the impact of the census hires, although it had to help lower the headline U.3 unemployment rate. As noted in the yesterday’s Commentary, the May unemployment rate would have declined to 9.6% if all the people hired for the census were counted as newly employed. Unadjusted U.3 was reported at 9.3% in May, down from 9.5% in April.   

The broader unemployment measures also appear to have suffered distortions from the census employment swing (see opening comments). May U.6 unemployment eased to an adjusted 16.6% (eased to 16.1% unadjusted) from 17.1% (16.6% unadjusted) in April.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers. The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed, unemployment — more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — eased back to about 21.7% in May from 22.0% in April. While the some of the heavy jobs loss of a year ago is moving to the long-term discouraged workers category, the SGS estimate is built upon the official U.6 reporting and tends to follow its relative monthly movements. See the Alternate Data tab for a graph and more detail.

As discussed in general, previously, while 21.7% unemployment might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession. The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms. Today, less that 2% work on farms. Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

Signal Continues to Intensify for Renewed Economic Downturn. As discussed in recent Commentaries (see Commentary No. 296, for example), declining year-to-year change in real (inflation-adjusted) M3 signals a pending economic downturn or pending intensification of an existing economic contraction, with contracting broad liquidity invariably constraining broad economic activity. The following updated graph reflects both the annual payroll change and the approximate annual real contraction in the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate as of May 2010. The M3 plot is shifted forward on the time scale by six months so as to show the leading relationship of its annual contractions to payroll activity. The May M3 estimate is an annual contraction of roughly 7.9% versus a 7.0% contraction in April. Details will be discussed in the next Commentary (June 7th), which will be dedicated to the money supply circumstance. The formal preliminary estimate for the SGS Ongoing M3 Measure for May will be posted this weekend on the Alternate Data page for M3.

 

 

Week Ahead. Given the unfolding reality of a weaker economy (or re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Trade Balance in Goods and Services (April 2010).  The April trade deficit is scheduled for release on Thursday, June 10th. Briefing.com shows a consensus forecast of a widening to $41.5 billion, from $40.4 billion reported in March. The higher consensus expectation probably is due to higher oil prices in April. Reporting risk, however, remains for a worse-than-expected deficit, given likely still-pending catch-up in paperwork flows for imports.

Retail Sales (May 2010).  The May retail sales report is scheduled for release on Friday, June 11th. Despite the relative weakness of April’s 0.4% monthly gain being blamed on an early Easter pulling sales into March, Briefing.com showed a consensus monthly gain of 0.5% earlier this week for May retail sales. As of today, the consensus reportedly is at 0.2%. As key data begin to reflect the intensifying downturn in business activity, reporting will tend to be weaker than expectations. Reporting risk accordingly is in that direction for May’s retail report.

NEW SGS WEB-SITE FEATURE: We are pleased to announce publication of a set of charts, which display various data-sets within the official Payroll and Household Surveys of the Bureau of Labor Statistics. These charts reflect only official reporting, with no SGS adjustment or assessment, but they often can tell interesting stories. They will be updated automatically whenever the monthly surveys are published.    We plan to expand coverage to other aspects of employment, and to other areas of economic and market activity. As usual, all feedback is welcomed. (Use this link to find the new pages, or go to the Alternate Unemployment Chart page and follow links from there. Full navigation links will be introduced on the site soon.)

 __________

No. 299: Employment Report Outlook and Some Updates

Thursday, June 3rd, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 299
Employment Report Outlook and Some Updates

June 3, 2010

__________

420,000 May Census Hires Assure "Strong" Jobs Report

Consensus Estimates May Be Disappointed

Continued Data Distortions Generated by
Severity of the Economic Downturn

__________ 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for tomorrow, Friday, June 4th, following the release of the May payroll and unemployment reporting.  Today’s Commentary updates the outlook for that reporting, along with some details of recent homes sales reporting and the benchmark revision to new orders for durable goods. In addition to the May employment/unemployment assessment, tomorrow’s Commentary will review why M3 is in contraction and the implications of same for the economy and inflation.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Consensus Jobs Estimate at Risk of Disappointment. Of the 500,000 (Briefing.com) to 520,000 monthly gain expected in tomorrow’s seasonally-adjusted May 2010 payroll employment, close to 420,000 will be from the hiring of temporary and intermittent census workers. I expect payroll gains, net of census workers, to be well below the 80,000 to 90,000 balance needed to meet consensus, perhaps even showing outright contraction. At work here increasingly will be an intensifying economic downturn, as well as some likely catch-up from distortions created by bad-quality seasonal factors.   

Keep in mind that the 95% confidence interval around the monthly change in payrolls (the census jobs are a separate issue) is +/- 129,000, and the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) has the ability to bring in any given monthly report as it desires. Nonetheless, with the headline jobs number dominated by the census hires, President Obama’s expectations of "another strong" jobs report tomorrow likely will be met, probably exceeding the 290,000 jobs gain reported initially for April. What is not being discussed in all the happy media hype is that the census layoffs should show up heavily in the June payroll survey, with a large monthly payroll contraction almost assured for next month’s reporting.

On the unemployment front, a number of the census hires have other part-time employment and already are counted as "employed" in the household survey, so a fully proportionate drop in the unemployment rate for the census hires is not likely. If all 420,000 census hires came from the unemployed, such would reduce the unemployment rate from 9.9% in April, to 9.6% in May, by itself (consensus is 9.8% for May per Briefing.com). To the extent the unemployment rate is moderated by census hires, such, too, would reverse in the months ahead, beginning with a sharp reversal in June. In April, despite 66,000 census hires, the unemployment rate rose to 9.9% from 9.8% in March. Due to catch-up in poor-quality seasonal factors, the May unemployment rate could notch higher, still, despite the census hiring. 

Where the payroll survey counts the number of jobs (someone with a regular part-time job plus short-term census work is counted as two jobs), the household survey, which generates the unemployment rate, counts the number of people with jobs (each person is counted only once, irrespective of the number of jobs worked).

The Census Bureau was kind enough yesterday to publish its weekly payroll data of temporary census employment, which corresponds closely to the census jobs published by the BLS (the weekly payroll involved is the one including the 12th of the month). Keep in mind that the monthly levels of census employment have to be subtracted from the subsequent month’s levels in order to estimate month-to-month change.

In terms of other indicators of employment activity, help-wanted advertising was mixed in recent reporting, with flat to positive indications. In the Conference Board measures, the newspaper advertising index held at 10 in April, for the sixth month, following a revised March reading of 10 (previously 9). The online index, after having shown a 5.7% monthly gain in April, was flat in May for total ads, which include ongoing ads from prior months plus new ads. I believe the new ads number will prove to be a the better indicator for this series. New ads were up monthly by 2.7% in May, following a 1.0% contraction in April. The seasonally adjusted data here are highly suspect for such a new series, and the short history makes it difficult to gauge the significance of monthly gains (how much is due to changing Internet activity, for example).

The employment components of both the manufacturing and non-manufacturing purchasing managers surveys gained in May. The manufacturing employment index rose to 59.5 in May from 58.5 in April, and the non-manufacturing employment index rose to 50.4 in May from 49.5 in April. These are diffusion indices, where readings above 50.0 indicate expansion. There appears to be a warping of the purchasing managers data, which has developed, due to the loss of participants as a result of the severe economic downturn (see comments in the durable goods benchmark revision section).  

Home Sales Jump in Advance of Tax credit Expiration. As shown in the accompanying graphs, both new home sales (Census Bureau) and existing home sales (National Association of Realtors — NAR) showed some pick-up in activity in April relative to March. Once again, such appears to have been due primarily to the April 30th expiration of tax breaks for home buyers. A similar, but larger spike was evident for existing home sales with the November 2009 expiration of initial tax incentives; the April 2010 spike appears higher than November for new home sales. To the extent this stimulus has pulled in sales from the future, monthly sales should fall off in the months ahead, starting with May 2010 reporting.

Foreclosure activity remains a major distortion in these data, with NAR estimating 33% of new home sales for April in the "distressed" category (the March estimate was 35%, but the number of foreclosures still has been picking up slightly). Census acknowledges that a portion of new home sales is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimates. Purportedly, foreclosure activity is on the rise, and some in the construction trade have difficulty competing with the pricing of foreclosed properties. Until the foreclosure problem works itself out, monthly changes in these numbers cannot be taken as meaningful indicators of trends in underlying activity in homeowner real estate, as it relates to general economic activity. 

The following updated graphs reflect different measures of home sales activity since February 2009. The numbers, through April 2010, reflect the seasonally-adjusted level of monthly sales, rather than the annual rate usually published.

 

Benchmark Revisions Reshape Durable Goods Orders — Part II.As discussed in Commentary No. 298, the Census Bureau published a massive benchmark revision to the new orders for durable goods series on March 14th. The most significant portion of revisions came from new information reflecting benchmarks to shipments and inventory data tied to the 2007 Economic Census and the 2008 Annual Survey of Manufactures. Accordingly, the 2007 and 2008 revisions were based on hard numbers. Everything subsequent to that, showing an accelerating pick-up in new orders, was based on guesstimates or on mathematical models that are of equivalent quality to their underlying guesstimates.

As shown in the accompanying three graphs, the 2007 and 2008 revisions were unusually large, with stronger than previously estimated orders coming into and in the early official stages of the recession, and with a sharper relative decline in 2009 than reported previously. Beyond that, I would not read much of significance into the reporting. It appears likely that recent durable goods reporting and revisions to same — subject to future benchmark revisions — have been overstated due to distortions from the severity of the economic downturn. 

Specifically, the reporting includes estimates of new orders for companies that have failed to report their information. Prior levels and general trends in the non-reporting company’s industry are used to estimate the firm’s orders. As with the payroll survey, however, the government has no timely basis for determining whether a modeled company just failed to report or if it went out of business. In the current circumstance, failed companies have become a meaningful issue. 

Separately, but in a related area, the purchasing managers survey also likely has seen some upside reporting distortions resulting from the severity of the economic downturn. Companies reporting the weaker numbers would tend to be those that failed and that would drop out of the survey. The stronger companies remaining in the survey would tend to pick up business from the lost competition.

In terms of the new orders revisions, the first graph shows both the new and old data smoothed with a six-month moving average. The second and third graphs reflect the seasonally-adjusted new orders level and year-to-year percent change, respectively. None of the graphs are adjusted for inflation.

 

 __________

No. 298: GDP and New Orders for Durable Goods Revisions

Thursday, May 27th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 298
GDP and New Orders for Durable Goods Revisions

May 27, 2010

 _________

Gross Domestic Income Continues Showing Slower Growth
Than Gross Domestic Product

Massive Revisions to Durable Goods Orders

Employment Set to Retrench Anew
(Net of Census Impact)

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, June 4th, following the release of the May payroll and unemployment report. There also will be an interim Commentary updating the outlook for the employment report, as well as updating housing conditions and the durable goods revisions (see below).

– Best wishes to all for an enjoyable Memorial Day weekend, John Williams

 

Economy on Brink of Renewed Decline — Don’t Blame It on Europe. The broad money supply continues to tumble on a year-to-year basis, with May data likely to show deepening annual contraction both before (nominal) and after (real) inflation adjustment. The lead-time between the signal for economic downturn (annual decline in real M3) and the actual softening of economic data suggests that the downturn is close, and it could surface in the first major economic release for May: next Friday’s (June 4th) employment/unemployment report (see Commentary No. 296 for detail on the signal). There is potential for May payrolls to contract net of the temporary census boost.

Some on Wall Street and/or the Administration may be anticipating a double-dip recession, since stories already are surfacing of how the systemic solvency problems in Europe could push the U.S. economy back into recession. While politically it may be worth the effort to divert blame abroad, the problem remains a liquidity squeeze at home, where the Fed and the Administration have been unable to provide long-term stability to the system or adequate liquidity to consumers and businesses. 

Ironically, as discussed in the prior Commentary No. 297, the weakness in the money supply foreshadows the economic renewed downturn, which in turn should set the stage for a serious inflation problem. The systemic crises of the last couple years may be contained, temporarily, but they are not resolved. Renewed economic downturn would threaten whatever systemic stability has been in place.  The worst is still is ahead in the ongoing economic and systemic solvency disasters. Details will be updated in the next several Commentaries

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

Gimmicked Gross Domestic Income? Gross Domestic Income (GDI), with fair consistency, has shown a longer and deeper recession than has Gross Domestic Product (GDP). In the 13 quarters reported beginning with first-quarter 2007, real (inflation-adjusted) GDI has shown nine quarter-to-quarter contractions, while GDP has contracted in just four quarters.  

Where the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) announced today (May 27th) its first revision to annualized real first-quarter 2010 GDP growth, with growth slowing to 3.04% from initial reporting of 3.24%, the first estimate of GDI growth for the quarter was 2.89%. First-quarter GDI growth, however, would have been reported at 1.95%, but for an unusually-late downward revision to fourth-quarter 2009 GDI. The GDI revision actually reflected an increase in the "statistical discrepancy" between the GDI and GDP. One might expect a narrowing, not a widening in the discrepancy, as later and presumably better-quality data become available.

The differences in reported growth are despite GDP and GDI being defined as equivalent measures of broad economic activity. As noted in the sidebar, GDP measures the consumption-side of the economy, while GDI is the income-side. If the two series do not equal each other after the data are gathered, GDI is reconciled to GDP with an adjustment for "statistical discrepancy." At present, that discrepancy is $276.6 billion, meaning that the surveyed level of the GDI — net of the statistical discrepancy — is 1.9% below that of the GDP. Where the standalone GDI does not receive the media and Wall Street focus of the GDP, and its reporting lags GDP reporting by a quarter or two, it is not subject to the same political pressures and financial market needs that impact GDP reporting. Accordingly, I view the GDI series as better-quality indicator than GDP of broad business activity.

GDP.  The BEA’s second estimate (first revision) of first-quarter 2010 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) was an annualized real growth rate of 3.04% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), versus an initial estimate of 3.24%. Such followed a 5.55% annualized gain reported for fourth-quarter 2009 GDP. The year-to-year change in real first-quarter GDP revised to 2.50% from an initial 2.55%, versus an annual gain of 0.06% reported for the fourth-quarter. The downside revision — though within the realm of statistical noise — reflected weaker personal consumption and a larger trade deficit than previously estimated.

Annualized real growth in first-quarter final sales, which is GDP net of the change in inventories, revised to 1.39% from 1.67% in initial reporting.

Real Quarterly GDP

The graph shows official year-to-year change. The "recovery" in year-to-year growth still reflects the nature of the protracted recent bottom-bouncing in the economy. The pattern should flatten out and turn negative, once again, in long-range revisions and in future quarters. 

The GDP implicit price deflator — inflation measure — showed a revised annualized pace of inflation in first-quarter 2010 of 1.08%, versus an initial estimate of 0.88%, up from 0.50% in fourth-quarter 2009. In contrast, annualized inflation for the CPI-U in the first-quarter was 1.53% versus 2.62% in the fourth-quarter. The higher the inflation rate used in deflating the GDP, the weaker is the inflation-adjusted number. The 0.20% upward revision to the first-quarter’s implicit price deflator exactly offset the 0.20% down revision in the revised real growth for the quarter.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for first-quarter 2010 is an approximate annual contraction of 1.5% versus the official estimate of a 2.5% gain, less-negative than the annual 4.6% contraction (0.1% official gain) estimated in the fourth-quarter. While annualized real quarterly growth is not formally estimated on an alternative basis, a small quarter-to-quarter contraction likely would have been realistic. The relative upturn in annual change reflects the bottom-bouncing at low levels of activity seen for much of the last year in key underlying economic series, not an economic recovery. As discussed in the opening comments, an intensified downturn appears to be in the offing.

GNP. The initial estimate of first-quarter Gross National Product (GNP) showed annualized real growth of 3.87%, versus 5.05% in the fourth-quarter, with year-to-year growth of 2.72%, versus 0.42% in the fourth-quarter. Where GDP is GNP net of the trade balance in transfer payments (interest and dividend payments), the GNP continues suffering distortions from the effects of the global solvency crisis.

GDI.  As noted in the opening GDP comments, the initial estimate of Gross Domestic Income (GDI) for first-quarter 2010 showed annualized real growth of 2.89% (1.95% net of revisions), versus a revised fourth-quarter growth rate of 5.21% (previously 6.17%). Year-to-year change was 2.72% in the first-quarter, versus a revised 0.84% (previously 0.61%) annual contraction in the fourth-quarter.

Massive Benchmark Revisions Reshape Durable Goods Orders. The Census Bureau reported yesterday (May 26th) that the regularly volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods rose by 2.9% in April, after an unchanged level of activity in March. Unadjusted, year-to-year change in April 2010 new orders was a gain of 21.6%. The entire historical series was revamped in a massive benchmark revision on May 14th, which made current data and previously reported data inconsistent and may have doomed the series to the scrap bin of once-meaningful leading indicators.

Starting late in 2006, the level of new orders was upped at an accelerating pace, up by a peak of 9.9% as of November 2007, with sharply decelerating upside revisions then through March 2009 (level revised upward by 1.6%), followed by a re-acceleration to the upside in revisions through March 2010 (level revised upward by 6.6%). The changes were crafted carefully to show a deeper contraction in economic activity than previously reported, but also with recent stronger upside. I’ll write separately on the implications of the changes — assuming adequate explanation is available — as to the surviving quality of this series as a leading indicator to broad economic activity.

The widely followed, but also seriously revamped, nondefense capital goods reportedly rose by 9.2% in April, after falling by 6.8% in March, with unadjusted year-to-year change up by 43.4%.

 Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (or likely re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Payroll Employment, Unemployment Rate (May 2010).  The May jobs and unemployment data are due for release on Friday, June 4th. Per Briefing.com, consensus expectations are for a 500,000 gain in May payrolls (primarily temporary census hires), versus a 290,000 gain initially reported for April, and a 9.8% unemployment rate, down from 9.9% reported last month.

The economy should be starting to decline anew, into a double-dip downturn or a re-intensified contraction. Accordingly, May payroll employment is at fair risk of showing a month-to-month contraction, net of the temporary census gains, which otherwise will reverse fully in the several months that follow. 

In the similarly-timed 2000 census, part-time and intermittent census hiring totaled 181,000 through April of 2000, with peak monthly hiring of 348,000 in May. The peak aggregate of census hiring was in May, at 530,000 (the BLS numbers do not add up presumably due to rounding), with 225,000 jobs subsequently lost in June 2000, as the layoffs of census hires began.

As of April 2010, cumulative census hires had reached 154,000, with a total of 600,000 or so being suggested as an approximate peak. Again, whatever is picked up in May for the census will disappear quickly in the ensuing months.

The specific impact of the census hiring on unemployment will be difficult to determine, as a number of the part-time census hires already are counted as employed at other part-time work. The headline U.3 unemployment rate could increase, but the broader U.6 measure is a better bet to do so. Nonetheless, U.3 should be topping 10% meaningfully in the months ahead.

An updated jobs report outlook will be published mid-week, next week, as details on related series become available.

__________

No. 297: Inflation, Housing Starts

Wednesday, May 19th, 2010

COMMENTARY NUMBER 297
Inflation, Housing Starts

 May 19, 2010

__________

Market Fears of European Financial Instability
Should Shift to Fears of
U.S. Financial Instability

Annual Inflation: 2.2% (CPI-U), 9.5% (SGS)

Perils of "Core" and Seasonally-Adjusted Inflation

Housing Starts Keep Bottom Bouncing

 __________ 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Thursday, May 27th, following the release of the second estimate (first revision) of first-quarter GDP, along with analysis of April new orders for durable goods, which will be released earlier in the week (see Week Ahead).  

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

U.S. Remains the Proverbial Elephant in the Bathtub. The reporting of contained CPI inflation by the U.S. government should be relatively short-lived, as global financial market concerns eventually shift from systemic solvency issues in Europe to those in the United States. Concerns for U.S. stability eventually should dominate most other market issues. 

Over the short-term, elements of "flight to safety" in the U.S. dollar will help to contain short-term U.S. inflation. As the dollar strengthens or weakens against the currencies of the major U.S. trading partners, those foreign exchange moves respectively help to reduce or increase the price of oil, which is denominated in U.S. dollars. Oil is the most significant commodity in terms of impacting U.S. inflation, where prices drive not only energy and transportation costs, but also raw material costs for a variety of chemicals, including those used in fertilizers, pharmaceuticals and plastics. As the euro has come under sharp selling pressure in May against the dollar, oil prices have dropped in tandem. As long as such pressures continue, they will act as a depressant to U.S. inflation. 

 

Eventually, I expect the euro will be broken up, at least partially. That system likely was doomed from the start, with little realistic chance of countries with such widely varying fiscal traditions coming into required financial harmony. Nonetheless, risks to global systemic solvency from current instabilities are significant, and it remains likely that anything necessary to keep the system together for the short-term likely will be pursued, specifically in ongoing efforts and arm-twisting by the Fed and the Administration.

There also, however, have been elements of "flight to safety" in gold and silver, the prices of which have rallied recently in U.S. dollar terms. Beyond the euro crisis, such suggests some anticipation of the problems ahead for the U.S. dollar and U.S. inflation.    

Indeed, the greatest risk to global markets and systemic stability and solvency remains the United States. Already in the midst of an intractable fiscal disaster (see the Hyperinflation report), the U.S. economy is on the brink of an intensified/renewed economic downturn. Such is signaled by annual contraction in real (inflation-adjusted) M3, a solid leading indicator to U.S. economic activity (see Commentary No. 296). Projections ranging from federal and state budget deficits to banking solvency have been predicated on 2% to 3% GDP growth in 2010, not a continued contraction.

As the federal budget deficit and Treasury funding needs explode in the year-ahead, eventually domestic and foreign balking at buying U.S. Treasuries should become widespread, with Fed becoming the buyer of last resort, monetizing that federal debt. Coincident with that likely will be heavy dumping of the U.S. dollar and dollar-denominated paper assets. Such should spike U.S. money supply and dollar-based oil prices. The pace of inflation would tend to pick up significantly in response to these circumstances, setting the stage for the hyperinflation referenced earlier.

The general outlook on the economy and the markets is unchanged, and circumstances suggest looking at actions for long-range preservation of wealth and assets. Despite any severe near-term volatility in the markets, physical gold and silver, assets outside the U.S. dollar (I like the Canadian dollar, the Australian dollar and Swiss franc) and assets outside the United States, offer long-term hedges against the severe loss ahead in U.S. dollar’s purchasing power.  

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

April Consumer Prices Dropped A Notch, Providing Your Life Is Seasonally Adjusted. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported a downtick in monthly CPI-U inflation, thanks to seasonal adjustments that continue to depress the reported inflation contribution from rising gasoline prices. Month-to-month, seasonally-adjusted gasoline prices were reported down by 2.4%, but the BLS indicated gasoline costs actually rose by 2.9% for the month (the Department of Energy estimated a 2.7% monthly gain), before the numbers were seasonally adjusted. 

For the individual who has to fill his or her gas tank with cash from not-seasonally-adjusted take-home pay, the unadjusted monthly inflation rate is the most relevant one. The most meaningful inflation measure overall is unadjusted on a year-to-year basis, with April CPI-U up by 2.2% and April gasoline prices up by 38.3%.

Traditionally, the CPI has been reported with the emphasis on the unadjusted number, but the Obama Administration’s BLS shifted its reporting emphasis to the seasonally-adjusted monthly number in the reporting of August 2009 inflation.

The opening two lines of text in the July 2009 CPI release, the last use of a template that goes as far back as the BLS publishes its historic press releases, were:

"The Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers (CPI-U) decreased 0.2 percent in July before seasonal adjustment[my emphasis], the Bureau of Labor Statistics of the U.S. Department of Labor reported today. Over the last 12 months the index has fallen 2.1 percent…"

Since August 2009, the opening two lines of text have been based on a new template, as used in the April 2010 release:

"On a seasonally adjusted basis [my emphasis], the Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers (CPI-U) declined 0.1 percent in April, the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics reported today. Over the last 12 months, the index increased 2.2 percent before seasonal adjustment."

Core Inflation Nonsense. Ostensibly, Federal Reserve Chairman Arthur Burns popularized the concept of "core" inflation — price inflation net of changes in food and energy prices — during the Nixon Administration, as a way to obfuscate the inflationary pressures generated by the oil crisis of the time. The concept has been embraced ever since by Fed chairmen faced with ongoing inflation problems exacerbated by oil prices. Although the BLS had tended to distance itself from the core inflation concept, it embraced the "core" numbers in the April CPI release: "The continuing stability of the index for all items less food and energy has resulted in an increase over the last 12 months of 0.9 percent, the smallest 12-month increase since January 1966."

Where core inflation has its value is in assessing a monthly (or other short-term) number to see how other inflation is doing during times of volatile oil or food prices. Extending core inflation to an annual basis, however, is meaningless in terms of assessing anyone’s cost of living, and, correspondingly, in terms of an inflation basis for Federal Reserve targeting. Energy and food are major components of consumer expenditures (22.3% of current CPI-U weighting). Even Fed Chairman Bernanke consumes food and energy. Using the BLS numbers — assuming they were accurate (see alternative measures, below) — a core-inflation 0.9% cost-of-living adjustment would be somewhat shy of what the average consumer would be looking for, with CPI-U annual inflation (including food and energy) running at 2.2%.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported this morning (May 19th) that the seasonally-adjusted April CPI-U eased by 0.07% (up by 0.17% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, after a 0.06% (0.41% unadjusted) gain in March. Seasonally-adjusted, the CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended April 2010 (April versus January) was zero, against March’s 0.93%. The lack of inflation in the latest three months, again, was due to seasonal adjustments. Unadjusted, the CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended April 2010 (April versus January) was 2.46%, against March’s 3.15%.

Unadjusted, April’s year-to-year inflation was 2.24% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) against a 2.31% annual increase in March.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s May 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.11% adjusted monthly gain seen in May 2009. I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for May 2010, the difference in May’s headline monthly change (or forecast of same) versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from April 2010’s annual inflation rate of 2.24%.

CPI-W. The narrower, seasonally-adjusted April CPI-W notched lower by 0.14% (gained 0.20% unadjusted) for the month, following a gain of 0.06% (up 0.46% unadjusted) in March. Seasonally-adjusted, the annualized rate of CPI-W inflation for the three months ended April (April versus January) was a contraction of 0.03%, versus a gain of 1.62% in March. As with the CPI-U, the lack of inflation in the latest three months again was due to seasonal adjustments. Unadjusted, the CPI-W annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended April 2010 (April versus January) was 2.64%, against March’s 3.49%.

Unadjusted year-to-year CPI-W inflation rose by 2.90% in April, following a 3.04% March increase.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — is reported only on an unadjusted basis. Year-to-year or annual inflation was 2.33% in March 2010, versus 2.45% in March. Unadjusted, the C-CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended April 2010 (April versus January) was 2.40%, against March’s 3.19%.

Where C-CPI-U inflation continues being reported somewhat higher than CPI-U inflation, and where the C-CPI-U in theory should be showing lower inflation, the inconsistencies suggest some ongoing reporting difficulties with the CPI series.

Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI rose to roughly 5.6% growth in April 2010, the same level as in March, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to about 9.5% (9.46% for those using the extra digit) in April, versus 9.5% in March.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation. Despite recent all-time highs in the price of gold, in the current cycle, gold and silver prices have yet to approach their historic high prices, adjusted for inflation. Even with the week-ago (May 12th) historic high gold price of $1,237.50 per troy ounce, the prior all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 was not breached in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on inflation through April 2010, the 1980 gold price peak would be $2,382 per troy ounce, based on not-seasonally-adjusted-CPI-U-adjusted dollars, and would be $7,576 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars. 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org) has not been hit since, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on inflation through April 2010, the 1980 silver price peak would be $139 per troy ounce, based on not-seasonally-adjusted-CPI-U-adjusted dollars, and would be $441 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars.

As shown on page 22 in the Hyperinflation report, over the decades, the price of gold has more than compensated for the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI-U inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the U.S. dollar based on the SGS-Alternate CPI.

Real Money Supply M3. The signal of pending intensification of the economic downturn, based on the annual contraction in the inflation-adjusted broad money supply (M3), was discussed in the prior Commentary No. 296. The annual real contraction in April M3 (SGS-Ongoing) estimated for that Commentary was 6.9%. Based on today’s CPI-U report, that annual contraction was 7.0%, deepened from March’s 6.0% contraction.

Real Retail Sales.  Based on April 2010 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly April retail sales rose by 0.5%, where before inflation adjustment the current number was up by 0.4%, versus a 2.1% monthly real retail sales gain in March, the same as before inflation adjustment. April real retail sales rose by 6.41% year-to-year, versus an 8.8% gain before inflation adjustment. Real March sales were up 6.0% year-to-year, versus an 8.5% gain before inflation adjustment.

Since November 2008, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $161.7 billion (the deflated March number was $168.4). Smoothed for monthly volatility on a six-month moving-average basis, as shown in the accompanying graph, the pattern of activity here has been one of bottom-bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales. The recent bounce from short-lived factors and warped-seasonals remains likely to turn much lower in the months ahead. There has been no change in underlying fundamentals that would support a sustainable turnaround in economic activity — no recovery — just general bottom-bouncing, as should be confirmed anew in subsequent reportingv

April PPI Inflation Also Softened by Seasonal Adjustments. Seasonally-adjusted inflation at the wholesale and production level in April eased slightly, month-to-month, as higher energy prices turned negative after seasonal adjustment, in conjunction with a purported decline in food prices. As reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), yesterday (May 18th), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) decline by 0.1%. Before seasonal adjustments, however, the April PPI rose by 0.2%. Such followed March’s 0.7% (1.1% unadjusted) monthly increase.

Unadjusted and year-to-year, April’s annual PPI inflation rate eased to 5.5% from the 6.0% annual gain reported for March.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted April intermediate goods rose by 0.8% (up by 0.6% in March), with crude goods falling by 1.2% (up by 3.2% in March). Year-to-year inflation in April intermediate goods was up by 8.6% (up by 7.7% in March), with April annual inflation in crude goods up by 28.8% (up by 33.4% in March).

April’s Monthly Gain in Housing Starts Was Not Statistically Meaningful. Yesterday’s (May 18th) April housing starts report, once again, showed no statistically-meaningful month-to-month change, continuing the pattern of bottom-bouncing seen since December of 2008.  The Census Bureau reported, along with annual revisions, that April 2010 housing starts rose month-to-month by a statistically-insignificant 5.8% (up by 7.3% net of annual revisions) +/- 17.7% (95% confidence interval). March’s starts were revised so as to show a 5.0% (previously 1.6%) gain.

Year-to-year change in April was a gain of 40.9% +/- 23.1% (95% confidence interval), following a revised annual gain of 22.1% (previously 20.2%) in March. The extreme variation in annual growth patterns is due to the collapsing and troughing (April 2009 was the trough) of data a year ago combined with the extreme volatility seen in these data in the current contraction. 

Since December 2008, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing at an historically low level, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 572,650. In the past 17 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, including April 2010’s reading of 672,000.  

The "recovery" in housing is shown in the above graph. The data are smoothed using a six-month moving average to remove the extreme month-to-month volatility seen in this series. Regardless of any level of smoothing, though, in the current cycle, housing starts remain at least 25% below any levels seen since before the end of World War II. Along with the activity in the broad economy, a renewed downturn in housing remains in the offing. 

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (or likely re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

New Orders for Durable Goods (April 2010).  April new orders for durable goods are scheduled for release on Wednesday, May 26th. As usual, the monthly change in this randomly volatile series is not likely to be meaningful, with a broad pattern of bottom-bouncing likely to continue.

Gross Domestic Product — GDP (First-Quarter 2010, Second Estimate). Due for release on Thursday, May 27th, the first revision to first-quarter GDP is expected to show slightly stronger annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth, 3.3% versus the initial reporting of 3.2%, per Briefing.com. Such is no more than statistical noise. If anything, the widening of the March trade deficit and the benchmark revision to retail sales would suggest a small downside revision, but the retail sales revisions likely will not surface until the annual GDP revision, due in July.

Of interest, though, will be the initial reporting of first-quarter Gross National Product (GNP), which is GDP net of the trade balance in transfer (interest and dividend) payments, and Gross Domestic Income (GDI) which is the theoretical income-side equivalent to the consumption-side GDP. The GDI tends to be less politicized. 

__________

No. 296: Retail Sales, Production and the Deficits

Friday, May 14th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 296
Retail Sales, Production and Deficits

 May 14, 2010

__________

Retail Gain Statistically Indistinguishable from Contraction

Revisions Enhance Production Reporting

Trade Deficit Remains Economic Negative

Budget Deficit Widens Despite Gimmicks

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Wednesday, May 19th, following the release of the April consumer price index.  

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

What Correlation? The prior Commentary’s graph of real (inflation-adjusted) M3 versus payrolls is used again, because it is currently the most important near-term signal on the economy, and I want to make sure that it is understood. One reader questioned why the graph was published, where the full correlation between the two series is not consistent over time. The graph is intended to help establish only the relationship between year-to-year contractions in M3 and year-to-year contractions in the broad economy, as represented here by payrolls.

There are times when the economy has fallen into recession without money supply contracting first. Rising year-to-year growth in M3 not always is followed by increasing economic activity (the proverbial Fed pushing on a string), and a growth in the economy not always is preceded by growth in real M3.

Whenever real M3 has contracted on a year-to-year basis, however, the economy always has followed, either falling into recession, or if already in recession, intensifying. Such makes sense. If liquidity is strangled enough, the broad economy will suffer, every time. The present contraction in broad liquidity is the deepest of the post-World War II era. The lead time between the liquidity signal and economic activity is roughly six-to-nine months (the plot of M3 in the graph is shifted six months ahead on the time scale versus the payrolls).  

The lead-time appears to be shorter in an existing recession, and evidence of an intensifying downturn should be imminent. This morning’s (May 14th) reporting of April retail sales and industrial production, however, had no downside surprises, showing somewhat stronger-than-consensus results (although the retail sales gain was statistically indistinguishable from a contraction).

Nonetheless, near-term economic activity will turn down, with major negative implications for the federal budget deficit, U.S. Treasury fundings, systemic solvency and the U.S. dollar. Such developments should place significant upside pressure on domestic inflation. U.S. difficulties eventually should dwarf the European sovereign solvency concerns currently helping to roil the markets. Accordingly, the long-term outlook for the U.S. dollar and U.S. equity and credit markets remains bleak, while the long-term outlook for gold and silver remains extremely strong.

The inflation outlook and the financial markets will be reviewed in greater depth with next week’s Commentary following the CPI release.   

 

Retail Sales Revisions Could Impact First-Quarter GDP Revision Negatively. Despite the stronger near-term retail sales reporting, benchmark revisions recast the relative strength of first-quarter 2010 reporting versus fourth-quarter 2009. Net of inflation, the annualized growth rate for first-quarter retail sales slowed in revision to 5.7% from 6.3%. That, in turn, should be reflected in somewhat slower than previously estimated first-quarter GDP growth. That GDP revision, however, may not surface until the annual GDP revisions due in July.     

Reported Nominal Retail Sales. Today’s (May 14th) retail sales report for April 2010 — issued by the Census Bureau — indicated a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.42% (up 0.88% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a revised 2.12% (previously 1.60%) monthly gain in March. On a year-to-year basis, April 2010 retail sales were reported up by 8.82% from April 2009, versus an upwardly revised 8.52% (was 7.62%) annual gain in March, with the April and March annual changes exacerbated by the severe trough seen a year ago and downside benchmark revisions to same.

Benchmark Revision. An annual benchmark revision, published on April 30th, revamped seasonal factors and encompassed detail from the 2008 economic census. The revisions were more significant in shifting monthly patterns than they were in altering annual levels. The contraction in annual 2009 retail sales deepened from 6.2% to 6.5%, with particular downside revisions to sales reported for February through May of 2009. April 2009 revised downward by 0.45%. Such had the effect of boosting April 2010 on a relative year-to-year basis and possibly may have shifted the seasonal factor distortions arising from the unusual length and depth of the current downturn.

For all of 2009, the level of annual sales was revised lower by 0.2%. The level of inventories also was revised lower, by 0.9% for the year. Lower sales and inventory would suggest lower levels of production than previously reported, or revisions to trade activity.

Real Retail Sales.  Estimates of real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales will be published on Wednesday, May 19th, in the Commentary following the release of the April CPI data. Month-to-month real growth in retail sales for April likely was minimal, with annual growth somewhat over 6%.

Core Retail Sales.  The "core retail sales" methodology was revamped recently, where the net relative monthly increases and/or decreases in gasoline station and grocery store sales were subtracted from the full monthly retail sales number, instead of the total of gasoline station and grocery store revenues each month. Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, the revamped reported "core" change more closely reflects the actual retail sales experience. In April a reported month-to-month decline in grocery store sales slightly more than offset a gain in sales at gasoline stations. 

This approach remains a work in progress and eventually will be used in the development of additional SGS alternative economic measures. The "core" retail sales is reported in two versions, where Version I uses the original methodology, and Version II version appears to provide a more balanced picture of the impact food and energy inflation in the standard retail sales reporting.

Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales:

Version I — April retail sales net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — rose by 0.6% versus the official aggregate gain of 0.4%.

Version II — April retail sales net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gasoline stations — rose by 0.4% versus the official aggregate gain of 0.4%. 

April Industrial Production Received Relative Boost from Revisions. The Federal Reserve Board reported today (May 14th) that seasonally-adjusted April 2010 industrial production rose by 0.80% (0.65% net of revisions) for the month, versus a revised 0.21% (previously 0.09%) monthly gain reported for March. Helping the relative reported monthly gains in April and March (revised), the level of industrial production in March was revised lower by 0.15%, with February revised lower by an even greater 0.26%.   

The year-to-year change in April rose to 5.18% from a revised March annual gain of 3.80% (was 3.95%). The spike in annual growth was due largely to the pattern of collapsing activity a year ago, which bottomed out in June 2009. 

The cycle-low reading in June 2009 of 95.75 reflected a 13.3% year-to-year contraction, the steepest annual decline in production growth since the shutdown of war-time production following World War II. For the last 16 months, the production index has averaged 99.07, around which the series has been fluctuating, with April’s six-month moving average reading at 101.01 versus 102.27 for the single month.

 

The "recovery" in production is shown in the above graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average. Production activity had leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that effectively wiped out the last eight years of growth in industrial production. Despite the near-term upside bump generated by short-lived stimulus and seasonal distortions, the series generally still appears to be bottom-bouncing and should begin to soften anew, significantly, in the next several months.

March Trade Deficit Deterioration Should Have Minimal Impact on GDP Revision. For March 2010, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported the nominal (not-adjusted-for-inflation) seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit at $40.4 billion, up from a revised $39.4 (previously $39.7) billion deficit in February, and up sharply from the $28.8 billion monthly deficit in March 2009. 

Against February 2010, the March trade balance — as with February against January — reflected both higher imports and exports, with a sharper increase in imports. Higher March oil imports reflected both higher physical volume and oil prices.  Specifically, for the month of March 2010, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $74.32 per barrel, versus $72.92 in February 2010 and $41.36 in March 2009. In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, March 2010 volume averaged 9.660 million barrels per day, versus 8.689 million in February 2010 and 9.345 million in March 2009.

Adjusted for seasonal factors and inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the January, February and March 2010 respective merchandise trade deficits were $40.9, $42.3 (previously $42.5) and $43.8 billion (new), or an annualized quarterly rate in first-quarter 2010 of $508.3 billion, worse than the annualized fourth-quarter shortfall of $492.5 billion (previously $492.2). The GDP includes trade in services in addition to merchandise, and the first-quarter’s "advance" estimate of 3.2% annualized real GDP growth was a guesstimate, including deteriorating net exports based on two of three months of trade deficit. With the March deficit near consensus estimates, the net effect of the hard number on the May 27th first-quarter GDP revision should be neutral to slightly negative.

{[federal_deficit Federal Budget Deficit Deteriorates Despite Accounting Gimmicks.}}Federal Budget Deficit Deteriorates Despite Accounting Gimmicks. Just a year ago, the Monthly Treasury Statement of the monthly receipts and outlays (monthly fiscal deficit or surplus) for April 2009, announced, "TARP [the bailout package] purchases are now being accounted for on a net present value basis, taking into account market risk."  That accounting knocked an immediate $175 billion off the already reported deficit and likely reduced the overall reported 2009 cash-based deficit by about $500 billion. Keeping the preceding in mind, here is how the latest numbers line up.

The rolling twelve-month "cash" deficit through April 2010 was $1.413 trillion, up 28.0% from the $1.104 trillion rolling deficit as of April 2009. The deficit for the fiscal year ended September 30, 2009 was $1.416 trillion.

In contrast, gross federal debt, per Treasury reporting, stood at $12.949 trillion as of April 30, 2010, up $175.6 billion from March 31, 2010, and up by $1.710 trillion from April 30, 2009. April 30, 2009 was up by $1.861 trillion from the year before. In the last two years, gross federal debt has grown by 38.1% or $3.571 trillion, against a "cash" deficit basis of just $2.517 trillion. Such is one of the wonders of a little gimmicked accounting. 

 Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (or likely re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Housing Starts (April 2010).  April housing starts are due for release on Tuesday, May 18th. The bottom-bouncing of the last year or so should continue, with the reported month-to-month change not likely to be statistically meaningful but still to the downside of consensus expectations.

Producer Price Index — PPI (April 2010). The April PPI is due for release on Tuesday, May 18th. Seasonal factors will dampen the impact of higher oil prices in this regularly volatile series. Nonetheless, as the broader impact of higher oil prices spreads through the system, there likely will be some upside reporting risk to consensus forecasts.

Consumer Price Index — CPI (April 2010).  The April CPI is due for release on Wednesday, May 19th. As with the PPI, seasonal factors will dampen the impact of higher gasoline prices. Still, as the broader impact of higher oil prices spreads through the system, there also likely will be some upside reporting risk to consensus forecasts.

Year-to-year CPI-U inflation would increase or decrease in April 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.09% adjusted monthly gain seen in April 2009. I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for April 2010, the difference in April’s headline monthly change versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from March 2010’s annual inflation rate of 2.31%.

 __________

No. 295: April Employment/Unemployment, Systemic Risks

Friday, May 7th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 295
April Employment/Unemployment, Systemic Risks

May 7, 2010

 _________

Happy Assumptions and Census Hiring Help Payrolls

April Unemployment: 9.9% (U.3), 17.1% (U.6), 22.0% (SGS)

Real Annual Money Supply Contraction Deepens

Worst Is Ahead for Economic and Solvency Crises

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, May 14th, following the release of the April retail sales and industrial production.  

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Strong Data, Yet Worst of Economic and Systemic Crises Lies Ahead. Despite this morning’s (May 7th) happy employment report, the economy remains at the brink of an intensified or renewed downturn, and broad liquidity problems signal ongoing serious systemic risks. While reported April payroll data were strong — with significant upside revisions to prior payroll reporting in February and March — the suggested jobs surge reflected overly optimistic assumptions and census hiring, as well as likely ongoing seasonal distortions. Further, the gains ran counter to several important and politically-independent related series. For example, the Conference Board’s March help-wanted advertising (newspapers), which leads April employment, fell for the first time in six months, dropping from 10 to 9, matching the record low reading for the series last year. Also from the Conference Board, April new online help-wanted advertising declined for the first time in five months, down by 1.0%. While the manufacturers purchasing managers survey for April showed rising employment, the broader services index showed contracting employment.

At work in the government’s employment and unemployment reporting likely still are severe seasonal factor distortions, continuing from the impact of the extraordinary month-to-month declines seen in jobs a year ago (seasonal adjustments are weighted most heavily by year-ago patterns), in conjunction with some very happy assumptions. The latter circumstance was evidenced by the April Birth-Death Model adjustments. As described below and in earlier writings, the entire birth-death (of companies) concept and resulting monthly fudge factors reflect guesstimates. Yet, usually, the add-factors in a given month are reasonably close to what was used the year before. In April 2010, however, the monthly add-factors were upped to an aggregate 188,000 jobs for the month, from the 126,000 used in April 2009. Considering that the change reflects nothing more than happy assumptions, someone decided to create an additional 62,000 jobs for April 2010 out of thin air. 

In April of 2000, census hiring had accumulated to 181,000. As of April 2010, cumulative hiring was 154,000, of which 66,000 was in April alone. Apparently the biggest short-term boost from the addition of the temporary and intermittent census workers will be in next month’s reporting (also discussed below). On the unemployment front, big swings in the labor force data also are suggestive of seasonal factor distortions (the distortions go both ways). 

There is no easy way of determining what other "assumptions" have been worked into the current numbers, but given the latest data, the underlying outlook by the Bureau of Labor Statistics appears to have shifted sharply from recession to recovery. Add in political needs and the tendency towards positive biases in economic reporting, and there is a fair bet of overly-optimistic reporting here. With the likely ongoing seasonal issues, I would put little credence in what was reported either for April payrolls or for April unemployment. The payrolls will face later benchmark revisions, the unemployment picture eventually should stabilize along with the seasonal-adjustment factors.

Also discussed below is continued deterioration in broad money growth on an annual basis, both before and after inflation adjustment. The real annual decline remains a solid signal for intensified economic downturn in the near future. A down economy in 2010 will blow apart current projections for the federal deficit and Treasury funding needs, as well as any confidence in banking-system solvency. Where the U.S. equity markets appear to be shifting to a more volatile and negative tone, such movement likely would be exacerbated meaningfully by broad market recognition of a renewed downturn in business activity.

The systemic risks here are of such a scope as to be considered a threat to national security. Such was the case in the wake of the 1987 stock-market crash, and trade data were manipulated late that year and early in 1988, in conjunction with massive central bank intervention, as part of an effort to stabilize the U.S. dollar. I mention this only as a caution that unusual government actions and event-driven data manipulations are possible in extraordinary circumstances. Most political manipulation of economic data has been systematic, with the introduction of new methodologies and related reporting biases over time. There have event-driven manipulations other than the 1987/1988 trade data that have been discussed in the Primer Series on our Web site.

Reporting of the April Labor Environment. Payroll Survey. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs gain of 290,000 (up by 411,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for April 2010, following a revised 230,000 (previously 162,000) jobs gain in March. 

Net of the temporary hiring of census workers, which will reverse out fully in the second half of the year, the April payroll gain was a statistically-significant 224,000 gain. Purportedly, census hiring will hit nearly 600,000 by the end of May. With 154,000 in place as of April, presumably roughly 450,000 census hires could be added in the month ahead. Based on employment patterns for the 2000 census, nearly all such gains should reverse out of the data by the end of September, with June payrolls reflecting the first outright contraction in the reversal of current hiring.

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; January 2010 is the likely short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment has declined by a seasonally-adjusted 8,349,000 jobs, or 6.1%.

The pace of reported monthly change has turned positive versus year-ago comparisons of sharp month-to-month declines. The year-to-year contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls narrowed accordingly to 1.0% in April versus a 1.7% annual contraction in March, and narrowed from the post-World War II record 5.0% decline in July 2009. The July 2009 decline was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II, which reflected a trough of a 7.6% annual contraction in September 1945. Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the current annual decline would be the worst since the Great Depression. The payroll graph reflects the numbers as reported, with no adjustment for census hiring impact, which remains minimal, so far, on a year-to-year basis.   

 

Non-farm Payroll Year to Year Growth 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  As mentioned in the opening comments, unusual activity in the April 2010 birth-death adjustment added 62,000 more jobs than in April 2009, a pattern contrary to what would be suggested by recent reporting difficulties that have understated declines in payroll employment. The Birth-Death Model biases tend to overstate payroll employment levels — to understate employment declines — during recessions. These flaws were confirmed by the nature of BLS’s massive benchmark revision published with the January 2010 report, where the BLS had indicated that the underlying assumptions to the Birth-Death Model were missing certain jobs losses.

Although the upside bias had been scaled down some from last year as a result of the reporting errors, the Birth-Death Model survives and remains a major distorting factor in monthly payroll reporting, likely adding in excess of 230,000 phantom jobs per month at present. That now could be roughly 300,000, given the unusual April data. Such misreporting, however, will not be corrected at all until the next benchmark revision is published in February 2011, after the November 2010 elections.

The unsupportable premise that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business, continues. So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. The "surplus" jobs created by start-up firms, which get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor, were revised lower in the most-recent benchmark — the only portion of the model that was scaled back — averaging at present roughly an extra 33,000 seasonally-adjusted jobs per month. This monthly bias should be negative by 200,000 or so, on average. Since it is not, again, the BLS continues regularly to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 230,000 jobs, plus.

That said, the unadjusted April 2010 bias was a monthly addition of 188,000 jobs, versus an addition of 126,000 jobs in April 2009, and against a monthly addition of 81,000 jobs in March 2010.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly employment gain in April of 550,000, versus an estimated March gain of 264,000.

The April 2010 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate was reported at 9.86% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval). The 0.11% monthly gain versus March’s estimate of 9.75%, however, was statistically insignificant. Unadjusted U.3 was reported at 9.5% in April, down from 10.2% in March. Recently distorted seasonal factors that tended to understate the unemployment rate may be playing some catch-up. 

If all the temporary census hiring were of people who previously were unemployed, then the U.3 unemployment rate net of census would just round up to 10.0% instead of 9.9%. Yet a number of the census hires likely already were counted previously, as employed on a part-time basis, which means the headline U.3 rate, net of census impact probably still would have rounded to 9.9%.

Removed from the media and market focus of the headline U.3 unemployment number, the broader unemployment measures do not seem to be suffering the same level of recent seasonal issues, and are even less impacted by census issues, with their non-U.3 components. April U.6 unemployment rose to an adjusted 17.1% (eased to 16.6% unadjusted) from 16.9% (17.5% unadjusted) in March.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers. The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed, unemployment — more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — rose to about 22.0% in April from 21.7% in March. See the Alternate Data tab for a graph and more detail.

As discussed in general, previously, while 22.0% unemployment might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession. The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms. Today, less that 2% work on farms. Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

Signal Continues to Intensify for Renewed Economic Downturn. As discussed in recent Commentaries (see Commentary No. 290, for example), declining year-to-year change in real (inflation-adjusted) M3 signals a pending economic downturn or pending intensification of an existing economic contraction. The following updated graph reflects both the annual payroll change and the approximate annual real contraction in the SGS Ongoing-M3 Estimate as of April 2010. The M3 plot is shifted forward on the time scale by six months so as to show its leading relationship to payrolls. The April real M3 estimate is based on approximations of 4.8% annual nominal M3 contraction and 2.1% annual CPI-U, for a total 6.9% contraction, versus a 5.0% contraction in March. Assuming the April estimate holds, such would be a new record annual decline in the modern reporting of real M3. A formal preliminary estimate for the SGS Ongoing M3 measure for April will be published over this weekend.

 

M3 Money Supply Griowth vs Payroll Growth

 

As the deepening credit contraction continues to squeeze personal and business consumption, most major economic series should begin to soften "unexpectedly" in upcoming reports and in economic releases of the next several months.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (or likely re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

U.S. Trade Balance (March 2010).  The March trade deficit is due for release on Wednesday, May 12th. Any large swing in the monthly deficit would have implications for the first revision to estimated first-quarter GDP growth. Reporting risk likely will favor a worse-than-expected deficit, which would put some downside pressure on the May 27th GDP revision.

Retail Sales (April 2010). The April retail sales series is due for release on Friday, May 14th, and the recovery-now apologists already are suggesting that March and April retail sales should be added together for purposes of analysis, because an early Easter stole business from April and helped to spike March data. Of course, the Census Bureau’s seasonal adjustments are supposed to offset the impact of such factors.  While weakness in the April numbers likely would include some reversal in recent poor-quality seasonal adjustments, it also should reflect early signs of a renewed downturn in economic activity. My bet would be for a weaker-than-expected result, with a fair shot at negative monthly and annual changes, net of inflation.    

Industrial Production (April 2010).  The April index of industrial production is due for release on Friday, May 14th. Possible catch-up in bad-quality seasonal adjustments and renewed slowing in economic activity place downside risk on the reporting this series versus whatever will be the consensus outlook.

__________

 

_

No. 294: First-Quarter GDP, Mounting Systemic Risks

Friday, April 30th, 2010

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 294
First-Quarter GDP, Mounting Systemic Risks

April 30, 2010

__________

GDP Growth Lacks Sustainability

Economic and Systemic Risks Intensify

__________

PLEASE NOTE: Effective tomorrow, we will be in a new office in downtown San Francisco. The formal name of my company, which publishes the ShadowStats.com Web site, is American Business Analytics & Research, LLC. Our new address is The Hearst Building, 5 Third Street, Suite 1301, San Francisco, California 94103. The telephone number will be (415) 512-7701.

The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, May 7th, following the release of the April payroll employment and unemployment data.  

As a point of clarification, where the Fed may try to send secret signals with changes in the wordings of its pronouncements, I do not play those games. If my view has shifted, I shall say so directly. Accordingly, if I have left anything out of the wording of my comments on the broad outlook, that is not a signal, just an oversight in my writing or an item that otherwise will be covered shortly in an upcoming Commentary.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Economic and Market Fantasies versus Underlying Reality. The fantasy of economic recovery received questionable support with the report of 3.2% annualized growth in real (inflation-adjusted) first-quarter GDP.  Surging inventories gave a temporary boost to the number, but underlying fundamentals still do not support the growth reported in the dominant personal consumption category. 

The signal for a renewed, major deterioration in the economic downturn (a double-dip for those buying the economic "recovery) was generated at the end of 2009. That signal not only is continuing but also is intensifying. In this "happy" environment, where the economy and systemic stability are sharply at odds with market perceptions, the rallying equity markets appear to be removed from underlying reality in the extreme. The liquidity and market circumstances are reviewed following the GDP analysis.

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

First-Quarter GDP Showed "Normal" Growth. First-quarter GDP growth of 3.24%, if accurate, would be about average, showing normal growth for the series, but economic circumstances are anything but normal. Looking at the major first-quarter GDP accounts that were on the plus side, personal consumption expenditures accounted for 2.55 percentage points of the reported gain, and business investment accounted for 1.67 percentage points, of which 1.57 percentage points were due to a continuing relative buildup in inventories. Such put the total growth contribution from expanding GDP accounts at 4.22 percentage points.

On the downside, with a widening trade deficit, net exports sapped away 0.61 percentage points of growth, while declining government consumption reduced growth by a further 0.37 percentage points. Total major GDP account contractions of minus 0.98 percentage points, offset against the positive 4.22 percentage points of gain, yield the official 3.24% annualized growth rate. Consider the following.

Personal Consumption Expenditure. Sustainable growth in personal consumption requires sustained growth in personal disposable income. When such is lacking, short-term consumption growth can be borrowed from the future through debt expansion or savings liquidation, but those alternative funding sources are short-term and not sustainable. In monthly reporting for January and February 2010, real disposable income was contracting versus the fourth-quarter. Today’s GDP report showed first-quarter real disposable income to be unchanged from the fourth-quarter. While such implies either an uptick in the March income numbers to be released on Monday, or upside revisions to the January and February data, the government still showed no growth in real disposable income in the first-quarter versus the fourth-quarter.

Real consumer credit, which has been reported only for January and February, also was contracting in the first-quarter versus the fourth-quarter. In combination, these numbers show no basis for sustainable growth in personal consumption and even throw into question the credibility of the government’s first-quarter consumption reporting (see Commentary No. 290).  

Inventories. Relative inventory growth, which has supported recent GDP reporting, eventually will turn to liquidation without adequate support from growing consumption. Final sales, which is GDP net of inventory change, measures the base consumption in the economy. As a result of relative increasing inventories, final sales grew at an annualized pace of 1.67% (versus 3.24% GDP) in the first-quarter, against 1.77% (versus 5.55% GDP) in the fourth-quarter.

Trade Deficit. For once, the quarterly change in net exports was in the same direction as indicated by the underlying monthly trade reports. As a cautionary note on the "advance" GDP, though, most of the estimates are guesstimates. For example, only two of three months of trade data for the first-quarter were available for this morning’s report.  

Government Spending. The decline in government spending was at the state and local levels, where, unlike the federal government, those government entities do not have the ability to print money. At the state and local levels, the quarterly contraction in spending was at an annualized pace of 14.9%. Federal spending was reported up at an annualized 3.5%.    

GDP.  The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) released its "advance" or first estimate of first-quarter 2010 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) this morning, April 30th, and the report showed an annualized real growth rate of 3.24% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a 5.55% annualized gain reported for real fourth-quarter 2009 GDP. The year-to-year change in real first-quarter GDP rose to 2.55% from a gain of 0.06% reported for the fourth-quarter. Specifics are discussed above.

 Chart of Real Gross Domestic Product

The graph shows official year-to-year change. The "recovery" in year-to-year growth reflects the nature of the protracted recent bottom-bouncing in the economy. The pattern should flatten out and turn negative, once again, in revision and in future quarters.  

The GDP implicit price deflator — inflation measure — showed an annualized pace of inflation in first-quarter 2010 of 0.88%, up from 0.50% in fourth-quarter 2009. In contrast, annualized inflation for the CPI-U in the first-quarter was 1.53% versus 2.62% in the fourth-quarter. The higher the inflation rate used in deflating the GDP, the weaker is the inflation-adjusted number.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for first-quarter 2010 is an approximate annual contraction of 1.5% versus the official estimate of a 2.5% gain, less-negative than the annual 4.6% contraction (0.1% official gain) estimated in the fourth-quarter. While annualized real quarterly growth is not formally estimated on an alternative basis, a small quarter-to-quarter contraction likely would have been realistic. The relative upturn in annual change reflects the bottom-bouncing at low levels of activity seen for much of the last year in key underlying economic series, not an economic recovery. As discussed below, an intensified downturn appears to be in the offing.

GNP and GDI. Given the lack of meaningful data available for the "advance" estimate of first-quarter 2010 economic activity, the Bureau of Economic Analysis will not attempt even to guesstimate the Gross National Product (GNP) or Gross Domestic Income (GDI) for first-quarter 2010 until next month’s (May 27th) "second" estimate, or first revision, of the first-quarter GDP.

Pace of Money Supply Contraction Accelerates. With somewhat over two weeks of reporting in on April money supply, weekly contractions in M2, institutional money funds and large time deposits suggest that the pace of decline in the broad M3 (SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate) is accelerating, with the nominal year-to-year change reflecting a record annual decline of roughly 4.8% in April, versus a decline of roughly 3.7% in March, if weekly reporting showed no further changes for the balance April. Real year-to-year change appears likely to deteriorate from a 5.8% contraction in March to an unprecedented reading pushing a 7% annual contraction. As discussed in numerous Commentaries (see for example Commentary No. 290), contracting annual growth in broad money supply signals contracting economic activity.

Not only is the money supply signaling worse economic times, once again the nominal contraction suggests mounting systemic difficulties in the banking system. It appears that most of what has been accomplished by the extraordinary actions of the Federal Reserve and the U.S. Treasury in the last two years or so has been tied to short-term stabilization of the system and to buying time, not to establishing long-term stability and health to the financial system or the economy. If the U.S. banking system were able to function normally, it would be lending increasing amounts of money, not contributing to a slow downward spiral in consumer and business credit outstanding and a pending renewed decline in economic activity.

The mounting sovereign solvency issues in Europe have parallels in the way the U.S. banking crisis engulfed the world. Shy of letting Lehman Brothers fail, the Fed and Treasury did everything — spent every dollar they had to — to prevent systemic collapse at the worst of the banking crisis. Such was and is irrespective of severe and mounting popular political opposition. The crisis in Europe also is one that threatens systemic collapse, but I expect that everything possible will be done to contain it, regardless of long-term costs and consequences or near-term vociferous political opposition.

U.S. fiscal instability, however, remains the primary global systemic risk. If Europe blows up in the near-term, short-term impact likely would be flight to the U.S. dollar, as seen in some of this week’s turmoil. Such should be relatively short-lived, however, as the deteriorating economic, fiscal and systemic circumstances in the United States likely will engulf the domestic and global markets in the not-too-distant future.

My outlook for a hyperinflationary great depression in the United States is unchanged; all that is unfolding now is some of the detail that should lead to that ultimate financial/economic disaster. Gold remains the best long-term hedge here, along with some silver, and cash outside the U.S. dollar and the United States. I still like the Canadian and Australian dollars and the Swiss franc. Again, the outlook is for the long haul, irrespective of any near-term extreme volatility in the various markets. As to the U.S. stock market, the term "insanity" comes to mind as I watch some of the day-to-day movements.

From an anecdotal standpoint, given the unusual level and nature of communications I have been receiving in the last several days from long-time, conservative clients — individuals who have been in these markets for decades — I would not be surprised to see a major event in the markets, soon. Again, underlying reality does not support the happy hype fueling higher equity prices.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (or likely re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Employment and Unemployment (April 2010).  The April employment and unemployment numbers are due for release on Friday, May 7th. I have not yet seen any public, consensus estimates for the data, but I presume Wall Street will be looking for a gain in payrolls, net of census hires. The bulk of the likely monthly gain will be in temporary hiring by the government of census workers, and those numbers will be detailed in the reporting. Whatever jobs gains are seen there will be reversed — lost completely — by the end of the third-quarter. 

Census hiring impact on the unemployment rate, however, will be hard to quantify, since some of the hiring will be of people who already have part-time jobs and are not now counted as unemployed in the headline U.3 unemployment rate.

Newspaper help-wanted advertising (Conference Board) fell to 9 in March, from 10 in February. Such leads April payrolls and is the first indicator of a possible downside surprise on the non-census payroll change. As other indicators are released next week, the reporting outlook will be updated, along with consensus estimates.

 

__________

No. 293: Inflation and Gold, March PPI, Durable Goods, Home Sales

Friday, April 23rd, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 293
Inflation and Gold, March PPI, Durable Goods, Home Sales

April 23, 2010

__________

PPI Showed Broadening Inflation Base

Durable Goods Orders Suggest Bottom-Bouncing

Home Sales Remain in Serious Trouble

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, April 30th, following the release of the "advance" estimate of first-quarter 2010 GDP.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

General Outlook Unchanged. The U.S. economy remains in an economic depression, which is about to intensify anew (see Commentary No. 290). Today’s (April 23rd) durable goods orders and home sales releases are discussed below in that context. 

The cost of preventing a full banking system collapse in last couple of years — although the banking system still is far from stable — is higher inflation; it just has not surfaced yet. Yesterday’s PPI release, however,  showed some early signs of spreading inflationary impact from higher oil prices and a weakened U.S. dollar, but such is not feeding into a hyperinflation, yet. The PPI and precious metals prices are reviewed in that context.

U.S. hyperinflation is inevitable and likely will move to center stage with a massive dumping of U.S. dollars and dollar-denominated paper assets — a potential $7 trillion liquidation — and/or with a failed Treasury auction against a backdrop of soaring funding needs. In either case, the Fed would face the unhappy prospect of having to be the lender of last resort and massive monetizer of Treasury debt (see the Hyperinflation Special Report [Update 2010]). I look for hyperinflation in the next five years, with particularly high risks of the just mentioned currency/funding crises breaking within the year ahead. Elements of this will be reviewed in the weeks ahead.   

March PPI Inflation Bounce Showed Hints of Broader Inflation. Seasonally-adjusted inflation at the wholesale and production level rose in March, reflecting higher food costs (energy costs were muted by seasonals) at the finished goods level, as well as higher costs for steel mill and paper products at the intermediate level, and higher costs for scrap iron and steel at the crude level.  As reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), yesterday (April 22nd), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) rose month-to-month by 0.7%, again, with the impact of higher oil prices masked by the seasonal adjustments. Before seasonal adjustments, the March PPI rose by 1.1%. Such followed February’s 0.6% (0.6% unadjusted) monthly decline. Year-to-year, March’s annual PPI inflation rose to 6.0%, up from the 4.4% annual inflation reported for February. The March 2010 annual inflation rate was the highest since the 8.8% annual rate in September 2008, when the systemic solvency/financial crisis reached panicked levels. 

Reflecting the broadening base of rising commodity prices — 13 of 15 major commodity price indices were higher month-to-month (data are reported not seasonally adjusted) — the PPI All Commodities Price Index was up year-to-year in March 2010 by 9.0%, versus a 6.9% annual gain in February, and also was at its highest growth rate since September 2008. In like manner the March purchasing managers surveys had shown their highest prices-paid index readings since August 2008 for manufacturing and since September 2008 for non-manufacturing industries.

As shown in the following graph, aside from the oil-price-spike period in 2008, the year-to-year PPI finished goods inflation now has reached a level where it likely will break shortly to the highest inflation level seen since the inflation-troubled 1970s and early 1980s.

Chart of Producer Price Index 

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted March intermediate goods rose by 0.6% (up 0.1% in February), with crude goods rising by 3.2% (down by 3.5% in February). Year-to-year inflation continued to rise, with March intermediate goods up by 7.7% (up by 5.6% in February) and March crude goods up by 33.4% (up by 28.6% in February).

Higher Inflation Prospects Remain Bullish for Gold. The PPI, though highly volatile on a monthly basis, is a leading indicator to broad consumer inflation. The prices of precious metals, particularly gold and silver, also tend to lead broad consumer inflation, reflecting inflationary expectations in addition to acting as safe-havens against political and financial market uncertainties. Over the near-term, both gold and silver prices also remain highly volatile, as shown in the updated accompanying graphs.

Chart of Gold and Swiss Franc

Chart of Gold and Oil

Chart of Gold and Silver 

As discussed in the opening comment, my outlook for a U.S. hyperinflation within the next five years, with particularly high risk of the crisis beginning to break in the year ahead, remains unchanged. In such an environment, holding some gold and silver as a stores of wealth over the long haul makes sense, irrespective of near-term gold-price volatility. Gold will tend to preserve the purchasing power of the dollars invested in it, again as discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report [Update 2010].

As reflected in the graph of Gold versus Swiss franc, recent relative dollar strength has not been heavily mirrored in gold price movement. Where concerns of European sovereign solvencies have rattled the currency markets, the ultimate sovereign solvency crisis with the United States keeps smoldering in the background. At some point, not too far down the road, a U.S. dollar crisis looms.  When the dollar starts to tank, watch out for inflation impact. Dollar weakness translates directly into higher oil prices in the United States.

Oil is the most significant commodity in terms of impacting U.S. inflation. Oil prices drive not only energy and transportation costs, but also raw material costs for a variety of chemicals, including those used in fertilizers, pharmaceuticals and plastics. Accordingly, it is not unusual to see a high correlation between movements in the price of oil and in gold and silver prices.

Durable Goods Orders Suggest Ongoing Bottom-Bouncing in the Economy. The Census Bureau reported today that the regularly volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods fell by 1.3% (down by 0.8% net of revisions) for the month of March, following an upwardly revised monthly gain of 1.1% (previously a 0.5% gain) in February. Unadjusted, year-to-year change in March 2010 new orders was a gain of 11.9% following a revised 12.8% (previously 12.5%) gain in February. The entire series will be revamped in a massive benchmark revision on May 14th.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders fell by 7.5% for the month, following a revised 6.1% gain (previously a 5.2%) gain in February. Year-to-year orders were up by 12.4% in March, following a revised 25.6% (previously a 25.1%) annual gain in February.

The high level of aircraft sales remained — though somewhat softer in the month — continuing to support the aggregate new orders level. Aircraft sales usually are erratic and get stretched out in years, in terms of delivery. Automobile orders, which have a more immediate impact on the economy, rose by 2.5% for the month after dropping by 1.0% in February.

Chart of New Orders for Durable Goods

 

Allowing for the recent strength in the heavily volatile, long-term aircraft orders, the general pattern of the broad series — before adjustment for inflation — remains one of bottom-bouncing. Against an average monthly level of $167.2 billion since last December, the March 2010 level of $176.7 billion remained within the realm of normal month-to-month volatility and ongoing bottom-bouncing, again, if considered in the context of the long-term aircraft sales. Nonetheless, as a longer-term positive (measured in years), the aircraft orders continue to push the six-month moving average higher, and it is now above the level of March 2009. 

Still Heavily Warped by Foreclosures, Homes Sales Get Brief Support from Expiring Tax Incentives. March housing starts continued to bottom-bounce at historically-low levels (see Commentary No. 292), but March home sales did show some uptick. As noted last month, though, other than activity related to construction, and builders’ profits from new home sales, home sales sale do not impact GDP reporting directly, although they can signal increased pending economic activity related to demand for appliances, furniture, etc.

Both new home sales (Census Bureau) and existing home sales (National Association of Realtors — NAR) showed some uptick in activity in March, relative to February. Such appears to have been due primarily to the nearing April 30th expiration of tax breaks for home buyers. A similar, but larger spike was evident with November 2009 expiration of the initial tax incentives. To the extent this stimulus pulls sales in from the future, monthly sales should fall off in the months ahead.

New home sales, reported today, gained 26.9% for the month. Although that was barely significant with a 95% reporting confidence interval of +/- 24.6%, it was nonetheless the first time in many months that the monthly change actually exceeded the confidence interval. Yesterday’s existing homes were reported up by 6.8% for the month, yet the two series still suffer serious distortions, both in terms of unit sales and price levels, by the extreme nature of the current economic depression in housing. 

In particular, consider the impact of foreclosure activity. At a magnitude never before seen in the history of these series, the NAR is publishing monthly estimates of foreclosures as a portion of existing home sales reporting (35% for March). Census acknowledges that a portion of new home sales is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimates. Purportedly, foreclosure activity is on the rise, and some in the construction trade have difficulty competing with the pricing of foreclosed properties.

The following updated graphs reflect different measures of home sales activity since February 2009. The numbers, through March 2010, reflect the seasonally-adjusted level of monthly sales, rather than the annual rate usually published.

Chart of Foreclosures as % ExistingHome Sales

Chart of Existing Home Sales broken out by Foreclosures

Chart of Existing Home Sales 

Chart of New Home Sales 

The first graph shows the portion of existing home sales estimated by the NAR to have been distressed (basically in some form of foreclosure activity). The February 2009 number was estimated at between 40% and 50%, the March 2009 number was estimated at slightly over half, but all the later estimates were given as specific percentages. The recent uptrend in the percent of sales in foreclosure is not a happy sign, although part of the increase could be due to a seasonality in foreclosures that varies from the seasonally weaker sales at this time of year, depending on how the seasonal adjustments are worked through.  The foreclosure proportion should spike in the months ahead, as aggregate volume slows down.

The second graph shows the level of regular existing home sales versus the foreclosure numbers. The trend of a relatively-softening level of regular sales versus firm foreclosures again is not a particularly strong picture.

Home sales activity rose to a near-term peak as the November 2009 expiration of the first-time home buyer tax credit neared. Given the way the series are defined, new some sales are recorded earlier in the sales cycle (contract) than the existing home sales (closing), so the peak seen in existing home sales would tend to lag that of new home sales, as seen the last two graphs. The related aggregate April 2010 peak is likely to be lower than that seen in November. Keep in mind that monthly new home sales only account for about 7% of total home sales activity.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Gross Domestic Product — GDP (First-Quarter 2010).  The "advance" or "first" estimate of first-quarter 2010 GDP is due for release on Friday, April 30th. Briefing.com reports a consensus expectation for annualized inflation-adjusted quarterly growth of 3.5%, down from the fourth-quarter’s 5.6% pace.  The Bureau of Economic Analysis has limited data available to it for the "advance" estimate and tends to target its initial guess to be in line with the consensus outlook. 

Even so, I would be surprised to see growth reported as strong as 3.5%, which is somewhat above the historical average. If, however, the consensus annualized quarterly growth rate is met, annual real GDP growth would be reported at roughly 2.6%, up from 0.06% in the fourth-quarter.

 

__________

No. 292: March Housing Starts, Industrial Production

Friday, April 16th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 292
March Housing Starts, Industrial Production

April 16, 2010

__________

Housing Still Bottom-Bouncing

Production Set to Soften

__________ 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, April 23rd, following the release of March new orders for durable goods, with analyses also of the March PPI and home sales data.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

March’s Monthly Gain in Housing Starts Not Statistically Meaningful. Today’s March housing starts report, once again, showed no statistically-meaningful month-to-month change, continuing the pattern of bottom-bouncing seen for the last 16 months.  The Census Bureau reported this morning, April 16th, that March 2010 housing starts rose month-to-month by a statistically-insignificant 1.6% (up by 8.9% net of revisions) +/- 17.7% (95% confidence interval). February’s starts were revised so as to show a 1.1% gain, which previously had been a 5.9% decline. Random volatility for this series on a monthly basis is high, which is why the monthly changes rarely are statistically significant. There likely was some one-time pick-up in March activity, which reflected catch-up from February activity that had been depressed by extreme weather.

Year-to-year change was a gain of 20.2% in March, following a revised annual gain of 7.3% (previously 0.2%) in February. The extreme variation in annual growth patterns is due to the collapsing and troughing of data a year ago. 

Since December 2008, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing at an historically low level, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 565,400. In the past 16 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, including March 2010’s reading of 626,000. 

 Chart of Housing Starts

The "recovery" in housing is shown in the above graph. The data are smoothed using a six-month moving average to remove the extreme month-to-month volatility seen in this series. Regardless of any level of smoothing, though, in the current cycle, housing starts remain at least 25% below any levels seen since before the end of World War II. Along with the activity in the broad economy, a renewed downturn in housing appears to be in the offing. 

Industrial Production Appears Set for Renewed Downturn. Although there likely was some relative monthly boost to March production that countered the dampening of February activity by bad weather, the reported March monthly gain was minimal and likely would have been in contraction but for the February distortions. That said, despite upside prior-period revisions to the data, many of the recent production reporting problems appear to be out of the way, with industrial production likely to resume monthly declines in the months ahead. That outlook likely will be supported by a continued lack of growth in new orders that impact new production, as should be reflected in next week’s release of March new orders for durable goods (see below).

The Federal Reserve Board reported yesterday (April 15th) that seasonally-adjusted March 2010 industrial production rose by 0.09% (0.62% net of revisions) for the month, versus a revised 0.30% (previously 0.08%) monthly gain reported for February. The year-to-year change in March rose to 3.95% from a revised February annual gain of 2.19% (was 1.66%). The spike in annual growth was due largely to the pattern of collapsing activity a year ago. 

The June 2009 reading of 95.75 remained the record low for annual production growth since the shutdown of war-time production that followed World War II. For the last 15 months, the production index has averaged 98.87, around which the series has been fluctuating, with March’s six-month moving average reading at 100.50, versus 101.61 for the single month.

 

Chart of Industrial Production 

The "recovery" in production is shown in the above graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average. Production activity has leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that effectively has wiped out the last eight years of growth in industrial production. Despite the near-term upside bump generated by short-lived stimulus and seasonal distortions, the series generally still is bottom-bouncing and should begin to soften anew, significantly, in the next several months.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Producer Price Index — PPI (March 2010).  The March producer price inflation estimate is due for release on Thursday, April 22nd. Briefing.com reports a consensus expectation of a 0.5% seasonally-adjusted monthly gain. This series tends to be volatile in terms of monthly reporting, and the higher oil prices seen in March suggest some upside reporting risk to expectations. The PPI was reported down by 0.6% seasonally-adjusted month-to-month in February, with the average oil price (West Texas Intermediate) down by 2.3% in February. March oil was up by 6.3% for the month, although March’s seasonal adjustments will tend to soften the impact of higher oil prices.

New Orders for Durable Goods (March 2010).  Due for release on Friday, April 23rd, March durable goods orders are expected to be flat month-to-month (Briefing.com) versus a 0.5% monthly gain in February. This series also tends to be irregularly volatile month-to-month and any reported gain or loss likely will not be meaningful, although the numbers should start trending lower in the near term.

Home Sales (March 2010). As discussed in Commentary No. 288, these series are heavily impacted at present by an extraordinarily high level of foreclosure activity, which seriously impairs the meaningful use of these series as indicators of regular activity in residential sales. Existing home sales are due for release on Thursday, April 22nd, and new homes sales are due for release on Friday, April 23rd. While the markets may be expecting somewhat stronger numbers on a monthly basis, the monthly change in new home sales activity likely will not be statistically significant. There may be some gains reflecting tax incentives, but watch out for a rising portion of existing home sales being reported for existing home sales.

 

__________

No. 291: March CPI, Retail Sales, Trade

Wednesday, April 14th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 291
March CPI, Retail Sales, Trade

April 14, 2010

__________

Annual Inflation: 2.3% (CPI-U), 9.5% (SGS)

"Strong" Retail Sales Should Prove Fleeting

Trade Deficit Widened

Recession Is Not Over

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, April 16th, with analyses of the March Industrial Production and Residential Construction data.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

No Official Call Yet on Recession’s End.  Of some interest, the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) — official arbiter of U.S. recessions — did not call an end to the recession it had been timing from the NBER-determined December 2007 onset. To its credit, despite all the market and political hoopla, the Dating Committee met on April 8th and concluded that determining the latest recession’s "trough date on the basis of current data would be premature." Assuming that position holds and that the economic downturn intensifies, as currently signaled by the deepening downturn in real (inflation-adjusted) annual change in broad money supply, the current recession simply may gain popular recognition as the longest and deepest post-Great Depression downturn, as opposed to a double-dip recession.

Today’s numbers suggested contained inflation and good growth in retail sales, but such happy reporting will prove fleeting. On the side of business activity, consumers lack the income and credit growth needed to support expanding consumption (see Commentary No. 290). Such is a basic, and beyond short-lived weather, stimulus and seasonal factor distortions, personal consumption and retail sales face plunging activity in the months ahead.

On the inflation front, the effects of higher oil prices again are pushing through the system, with U.S.-dollar-denominated oil still feeling some upside pressure from sporadic weakness in the U.S. currency and from ongoing global political tensions. Key to explosive inflation growth ahead remains a savage sell-off in the U.S. dollar and dollar-denominated paper assets and/or heavy monetization of U.S. Treasury debt by the Federal Reserve. Both factors are likely to come into play in the next year, as an intensified economic downturn — ironically signaled by declining annual real growth in the broad money supply — blows apart projections for the federal budget deficit and related U.S. Treasury funding needs. This area will be reviewed in more detail a Commentary next week.

Headline CPI Contained by Seasonal Adjustments. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) blamed the uptick reported in March CPI-U inflation on fruits and vegetables, having turned its estimate of a 4.5% (Department of Energy reported 4.6%) monthly increase in gasoline prices into a 0.8% contraction with seasonal adjustments. Such adjustment patterns tend to reverse in the second half of the year. Until the last year or so, CPI traditionally was reported by the BLS primarily on an unadjusted basis, where the March 2009 CPI was up 0.4% instead of the headline 0.1%. The headline number dominates the media and Wall Street, however, and few pay attention to the patterns of the surveyed price changes, except for those unfortunate enough to have to pay out of pocket to fill up a gas tank.

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported this morning (April 14th) that the seasonally-adjusted March CPI-U rose by 0.06% (up by 0.41% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, after being unchanged (up by 0.02% unadjusted) in February. Seasonally-adjusted, the CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended March 2010 (March versus December) was 0.93%, against January’s 1.36%. The annualized quarter-to-quarter change for the average first-quarter 2010 CPI-U versus fourth-quarter 2009 was 1.53%, against 2.62% quarterly change in the fourth-quarter.

Unadjusted, March’s year-to-year inflation was 2.31% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) against a 2.14% annual increase in February.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s April 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.09% adjusted monthly gain seen in April 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for April 2010, the difference in April’s headline monthly change versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from March 2010’s annual inflation rate of 2.31%.

For those interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I continue to refer you to CPIwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

CPI-W. The narrower, seasonally-adjusted March CPI-W also rose by 0.06% (up 0.46% unadjusted) for the month, following an unchanged (down by 0.01% unadjusted) reading in February. Seasonally-adjusted, the annualized rate of CPI-W inflation for the three months ended March (March versus December) was 1.62%, versus 2.33% in February. The annualized quarter-to-quarter change for the average first-quarter 2010 CPI-W versus fourth-quarter 2009 was 2.42%, against 3.25% quarterly change in the fourth-quarter.

Year-to-year CPI-W inflation rose by 3.04% in March, following a 2.82% February increase.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — is reported only on an unadjusted basis. Year-to-year or annual inflation was 2.45% in March 2010, versus 2.23% in February.

Where C-CPI-U inflation continues being reported somewhat higher than CPI-U inflation, and where the C-CPI-U in theory should be showing lower inflation, the inconsistencies suggest some ongoing reporting difficulties with the CPI series.

Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI rose to roughly 5.6% growth in March 2010 from 5.5% growth in February, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to about 9.5% (9.47% for those using the extra digit) in March, versus 9.4% in February.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation. In the current cycle, gold and silver prices have yet to approach their historic high prices, adjusted for inflation. Even with the recent December 2, 2009 historic high gold price of $1,212.50 per troy ounce, the prior all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 was not breached in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on inflation through March 2010, the 1980 gold price peak would be $2,377 per troy ounce, based on not-seasonally-adjusted-CPI-U-adjusted dollars, and would be $7,559 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars. 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org) has not been hit since, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on inflation through March 2010, the 1980 silver price peak would be $138 per troy ounce, based on not-seasonally-adjusted-CPI-U-adjusted dollars, and would be $440 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars.

As shown on page 22 in the Hyperinflation Special Report, over the decades, the price of gold has more than compensated for the loss of the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar as reflected by CPI-U inflation, while it has effectively fully compensated for the loss of purchasing power of the U.S. dollar based on the SGS-Alternate CPI.

Real Money Supply M3. The signal of pending intensification of the economic downturn, based on the annual contraction in the inflation-adjusted broad money supply (M3), was discussed in the prior Commentary No. 290. The annual real contraction in March M3 (SGS-Ongoing) estimated for that Commentary was 5.8%. Based on today’s CPI-U report, that annual contraction was 6.0%.

March Retail Sales Put in a Strong Showing, on the Surface. Reported strong automobile sales and upside revisions to earlier auto sales reporting helped to spike reported March retail sales and to produce upside revisions to February and March data. Year-ago March 2009, however, was the trough of the seasonally-adjusted reporting, and there well may be ongoing seasonal factor distortions at play here. With the monthly re-jiggering that goes on with these numbers, it is interesting to note that the retail sales level for March 2009 was revised lower. It may take the looming benchmark revision to recast these data more accurately. Also, it is worth noting that the Census Bureau relies on its own independent sampling survey of auto sales, not on industry reporting, which is complete, not sampled. 

To the extent that the March data reflected any pick-up following bad weather in February, such was a one-time shot. The problem remains that underlying consumer income and credit conditions cannot sustain growth in retail sales, as discussed in the opening comments. Separately, the retail sales data will be going through a major benchmark revision on April 30th, which may show a much weaker historical series than is in place now. Nonetheless, this morning’s report (April 14th) was a positive one on the surface and likely will help keep reported first-quarter real GDP growth in positive territory.

Reported Nominal Retail Sales. Today’s (April 16th) retail sales report for March 2010 — issued by the Census Bureau — indicated a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 1.60% (up 2.15% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a revised 0.52% (previously 0.34%) monthly gain in February. On a year-to-year basis, the March 2010 retail sales were reported up by 7.62% from March 2009, versus an upwardly revised 4.37% (was 3.85%) annual gain in February, with the March exacerbated by the severe trough seen a year ago.

Real Retail Sales.  Based on March 2010 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly March retail sales rose by 1.5%, where before inflation adjustment the current number was up by 1.6%, versus a 0.5% monthly real retail sales gain in February, the same as before inflation adjustment. March real retail sales rose by 5.1% year-to-year, versus a 7.6% gain before inflation adjustment. Real February sales were up 2.1% year-to-year, versus a 4.4% gain before inflation adjustment.

For the last 16 months, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $161.2 billion (the deflated March number was $166.8). Smoothed for monthly volatility on a six-month moving-average basis, as shown in the accompanying graph, the pattern of activity here has shifted to bottom-bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales. The recent bounce from short-lived factors and warped-seasonals appears likely to turn much lower in the months ahead. There has been no fundamental turnaround in economic activity — no recovery — just general bottom-bouncing, as should be confirmed anew in subsequent reporting

 Chart of Retail Sales (Inflation Adjusted)

Core Retail Sales.  The "core retail sales" methodology was revamped recently, where the net relative monthly increases and/or decreases in gasoline station and grocery store sales were subtracted from the full monthly retail sales number, instead of the total of gasoline station and grocery store revenues each month. Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, the revamped reported "core" change more closely reflects the actual retail sales experience. This remains a work in progress and eventually will be used in the development of additional SGS alternative economic measures.

For the near-term, the "core" retail sales is reported in two versions, where Version I uses the original methodology, and Version II version appears to provide a more balanced picture of the impact food and energy inflation in the standard retail sales reporting.

Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales:

Version I — March retail sales net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — rose by 2.1% versus the official aggregate gain of 1.6%.

Version II — March retail sales net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gasoline stations — rose by 1.6% versus the official aggregate gain of 1.6%. 

Wider February Trade Deficit Suggests 1st-Quarter 2010 Deterioration versus 4th-Quarter 2009, Net of Inflation. For February 2010, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported the nominal (not-adjusted-for-inflation) seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit at $39.7 billion, up from a revised $37.0 (previously $37.3) billion deficit in January, and up sharply from the $26.5 billion monthly deficit in February 2009. 

Against January 2010, the February trade balance reflected both higher imports and exports, with a sharper increase in imports, due partially to higher physical volume (not higher prices) in oil imports. Against February 2009, the sharp annual deterioration reflected largely an 86% annual increase in oil prices.

Adjusted for seasonal factors and inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the January and February 2010 respective merchandise trade deficits were $40.9 and $42.5 billion, which annualize to a real (inflation-adjusted) annual deficit of $500.3 billion. With $500.3 billion of annualized deficit in place so far for first-quarter 2010 (there will be no further trade data released before the April 30th "advance" estimate of first-quarter GDP), and with the annualized real pace of the merchandise deficit in the fourth-quarter at $492.2 billion, the trade deficit appears likely to provide a net drag on first-quarter 2010 GDP, after having helped to boost reported GDP growth in the third- and fourth-quarters of 2009.

For the month of February 2010, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $72.92 per barrel, versus $73.89 in January 2010 and $39.22 in February 2009. In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, February 2010 volume averaged 8.689 million barrels per day, versus 7.912 million in January 2010 and 9.103 million in February 2009.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Industrial Production (March 2010).  March industrial production is due for release tomorrow, Thursday, April 15th. Some seasonal-factor catch-up and early signs of intensified downturn offer the risk of some downside reporting surprise to consensus estimates of a 0.7% monthly gain (per Briefing.com), versus the 0.1% gain reported for March. Any "rebound" from negative impact of severe February weather would be a one-shot event.

Residential Construction (March 2010).  Due for release on Friday, April 16th, March housing starts are not likely to show a statistically-significant monthly change, although levels of activity are at fair risk of starting to fall-off sharply, again. While a small monthly gain may be expected, again, any "rebound" from negative impact of severe February weather would be a one-shot event.

__________

No. 290: Updated Liquidity and Economic Outlook

Friday, April 9th, 2010

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 290
Updated Liquidity and Economic Outlook

April 9, 2010

__________

Mounting Liquidity Squeeze
Constrains Broad Business Activity

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Wednesday, April 14th, following the release of March 2010 CPI and Retail Sales estimates. Further Commentary will be published on Friday, April 16th, with analyses of the March Industrial Production and Residential Construction data.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

The Rosy Scenario’s Missing Basic Element: Systemic Liquidity. Despite heavy revisions by the Fed to money supply-related data in the last two weeks, the pattern of the worst annual contraction in modern economic reporting of real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply continues, signaling looming deterioration in U.S. business conditions, an intensified economic downturn or "double-dip recession" in popular terminology. The implications here remain for severely exacerbated government (federal and state) fiscal and funding crises, for exacerbated banking system problems and for eventual severe selling pressure against the U.S. dollar.

The broad money measure used here is M3 (and the SGS Ongoing Estimate of same), which, before inflation adjustment, contracted at an estimated modern record pace of 3.7% year-to-year, where 4.0% had appeared likely before the recent data revisions. Net of inflation, the annual contraction is estimated now at 5.8%. On a seasonally-adjusted, month-to-month basis, the March 2010 nominal (not adjusted for inflation) decline was roughly $144 billion, or 1.0% — an accelerating pace of decline — where the major contributing components were monthly declines of roughly $84 billion in institutional money funds, $30 billion in large time deposits and $30 billion in M2. With year-to-year growth in M2 revised higher, due to new estimates of retail money market funds, March’s estimated 1.4% monthly gain will be negative after inflation, the second M2 real annual decline in three months.

The first graph reflects the latest estimates of the nominal annual growth rates in M1, M2 and M3. The broadest measure, M3, generally is the most meaningful measure for analysis, where changes in the narrower M1 and M2 estimates often reflect nothing more than cash flowing between different accounts in the various measures.

As discussed in recent Commentaries (see Commentary No. 277, for example), declining year-to-year change in real M3 signals a pending economic downturn or pending intensification of an existing economic contraction. The second graph shows the annual payroll change versus the approximate annual real contraction in the SGS Ongoing M3 Estimate for March 2010, as revised and updated. The M3 plot is shifted forward on the time scale by six months so as to show its leading relationship to payrolls.    

 

M3 Money Supply Growth

 

M3 - Industrial Production

 

Again, as the ongoing credit contraction squeezes personal and business consumption, most major economic series should begin to soften "unexpectedly" in upcoming reports and in economic releases of the next several months. 

Short-Term Credit Measures Continue to Falter. Shown in the three graphs following are seasonally-adjusted monthly levels of consumer credit outstanding, commercial and industrial loans and commercial paper outstanding. Not only is each series at its lowest point of the current cycle, but also year-to-year contractions continue deep in recession territory.

For consumer credit, February 2010 was down by 4.0% year-to-year, the same level as in January. Commercial and industrial loans are estimated to be down year-to-year by 19.7% in March 2010, versus a 19.9% annual contraction in February. Commercial paper outstanding was down year-to-year by 26.7% in March, versus an annual decline of 23.5% in February.

 Chart of Consumer Credit Outstanding

Chart of Commercial and Industrial Loans

Chart of Total Commercial Paper Outstanding

 

The Consumer Remains in Trouble. Based on the average of January and February 2010, real consumer credit in the first-quarter is down at a seasonally-adjusted annualized pace of 3.0% from the fourth-quarter. Similarly, real disposable income (as reported by the Bureau of Economic Analysis, both series deflated by the personal consumption expenditure or PCE deflator) is down at a seasonally-adjusted annualized pace of 0.5%. Contracting income and contracting debt do not support expanding real consumer consumption for long, and the consumer accounts for the bulk of GDP. Accordingly, do not be shocked by any near-term downside surprises in economic reporting.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Trade Balance (February 2010).The February trade deficit is due for release on Tuesday, April 13th. Significant catch-up still is due in trade-flow paper work, which opens the possibility of a much wider deficit for the month than otherwise might be expected.

Consumer Price Index – CPI (March 2010). Due for release on Wednesday, April 14th, the seasonally-adjusted March 2010 CPI-U should show a monthly increase, thanks to higher oil and gasoline prices, as well as to the slowly spreading broad impact of higher energy costs. Odds favor something on the plus-side of likely consensus expectations.

March 2010’s reported year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease versus February, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.11% adjusted monthly decline seen in March 2009. I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for March 2010, the difference in March’s headline monthly change versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from February 2010’s annual inflation rate of 2.14%. If March 2010 monthly CPI-U were unchanged (an increase is likely), year-to-year CPI would rise to 2.2% or 2.3%.

Retail Sales (March 2010).March retail sales activity is due for release on Wednesday, April 14th. Auto and same-store sales purportedly have been strong. Nonetheless, there should be some downside reporting risk to what likely will be strong expectations, particularly after seasonal adjustments, and after adjustment for inflation. 

Industrial Production (March 2010).March industrial production is due for release on Thursday, April 15th. Again, some seasonal-factor catch-up and early signs of intensified downturn offer the risk of some downside reporting surprise.

Residential Construction (March 2010).Due for release on Friday, April 16th, March housing starts are not likely to show a statistically-significant monthly change, although levels of activity are at fair risk of starting to fall-off sharply, again.

 

__________

No. 289: March Employment and Unemployment, Liquidity Crisis

Friday, April 2nd, 2010
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 289
March Employment and Unemployment, Liquidity Crisis

April 2, 2010

__________

March Unemployment Rose to 9.8% Net of Census Hiring

Official Reporting: BLS U-3 Held at 9.7%, U-6 Rose to 16.9%,
SGS Rose to 21.7%

March Employment Gain of 162,000 Was 114,000
Net of Temporary Census Hiring

Economic-Deterioration Signal Intensifies

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, April 9th, following a week of limited new economic information, but that missive may be supplanted by a general outlook update earlier in the week.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

March Employment Report Looks Stronger on the Surface. Net of the temporary hiring of part-time and intermittent workers for the 2010 census, March payrolls were reported up by 114,000. The latest data also included upside revisions totaling 62,000 to prior January and February reporting. While the gains were not statistically significant, part of the relatively stronger March report has been attributed to rebound effects from February’s blizzards. While I would contend that blizzard effects were minimal, any impact there would be non-recurring in April. As discussed in the Birth-Death/Bias Factor section, however, I estimate that the government currently overestimates monthly payroll growth by at least 250,000, which suggests that more-accurate current reporting still would be very much in negative territory. On the unemployment-rate side, the broader measures increased, and the headline U.3 number would have too, but for some rounding and census hiring.

Real (adjusted for inflation), broad systemic liquidity, as reflected in M3 (SGS Continuing Estimate), continues to shrink year-to-year. As of March, the series appears to be down by the largest percentage in modern reporting. The negative effects of this liquidity squeeze on the economy should become increasingly obvious in the next month or so, including subsequent employment data, ex-census. More will follow next week in next week’s Commentary. The general outlook remains unchanged.

Payroll Survey. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported this morning (April 2nd) a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs gain of 162,000 (up by 224,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for March 2010, following a revised 14,000 (previously 36,000) jobs loss in February. 

Net of the temporary hiring of census workers, which will reverse out fully in the second half of the year, the March payroll gain was a statistically-insignificant 114,000 gain versus a 29,000 jobs loss in February. Census hiring will become an increasingly major factor boosting relative payroll levels in the next several months.

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; February 2010 is the still-short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment has declined by a seasonally-adjusted 8,363,000 jobs, or 6.1%.

The pace of reported monthly decline has continued to slow sharply against year-ago comparisons, symptomatic of an increasing shift to bottom-bouncing in the payroll series. The year-to-year contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls narrowed to 1.7% (1.8% net of census effects) in March, versus an unrevised 2.5% decline in February, and from a post-World War II record 5.0% decline in July 2009. The July 2009 decline was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II, which reflected a trough of a 7.6% annual contraction in September 1945. Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the current annual decline would be the worst since the Great Depression.  The payroll graph reflects the numbers as reported, with no adjustment for census hiring impact.    

Non-Farm Payroll Employment

 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  As discussed in previous writings, the Birth-Death Model biases tend to overstate payroll employment levels — to understate employment declines — during recessions. The flaws were confirmed by the nature of BLS’s massive benchmark revision published with the January 2010 report, where the BLS had indicated that the underlying assumptions to the Birth-Death Model were missing certain jobs losses.

Although the upside bias was scaled down some from last year as a result of the reporting errors, the Birth-Death Model survives and remains a major distorting factor in monthly payroll reporting, likely adding in excess of 250,000 phantom jobs per month at present. Such misreporting, however, will not be adjusted at all until the next benchmark revision is published in February 2011, after the November 2010 elections.

The unsupportable premise that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business, continues. So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. The "surplus" jobs created by start-up firms, which get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor, were revised lower in the most-recent benchmark — the only portion of the model that has been scaled back — averaging at present roughly an extra 50,000 seasonally-adjusted jobs per month. This monthly bias should be negative by 200,000 or so, on average. Since it is not, again, the BLS continues regularly to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment by roughly 250,000 jobs.

That said, the unadjusted Marc 2010 bias was a monthly addition of 81,000 jobs, versus a pre-benchmark addition of 114,000 jobs in March 2009, and against a monthly addition of 97,000 jobs in February 2010.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly employment gain in March of 264,000, versus an estimated February gain of 308,000.

The March 2010 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate was reported at 9.75% (rounds to 9.7%) +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval). The 0.06% gain (rounds to 0.1%), however, was statistically insignificant versus February’s estimate of 9.69%. Unadjusted U.3 was reported at 10.2% in March, down from 10.4% in February. Distorted seasonal factors appear to be an ongoing issue, but that should be resolved in the next month, as a seasonal factor catch-up reverses some of the recent relatively happy news with an exaggerated jump to a higher U.3 unemployment rate, net of census hiring impact.

The temporary census hiring of 48,000 in March would add only 0.03% to the March unemployment rate, if all the hired individuals were reflected as newly employed in the household survey (as opposed to already holding other part-time employment in the survey). The reported March 2010 seasonally-adjusted unemployment rate was extremely close to rounding up to 9.8% (9.7492%). Accordingly, if just 2,000 of the 48,000 new census workers were reflected as newly employed in the March household survey (a virtual certainty), then, net of census impact, the March U-3 unemployment rate rounded up to 9.8%, an increase over February’s 9.7%.

Removed from the media and market focus of the headline U.3 unemployment number, the broader unemployment measures do not seem to be suffering the same level of seasonal issues, and are much less impacted by census issues, with their non-U.3 components. March U.6 unemployment rose to an adjusted 16.9% (eased to 17.5% unadjusted), from 16.8% (17.9% unadjusted) in February.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers. The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed, unemployment — more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — rose to about 21.7% in March from 21.6% in February. See the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com for a graph and more detail.

While 21.7% unemployment might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession. The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms. Today, less that 2% work on farms. Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

Signal Deepens for Intensified Economic Downturn.  As discussed in recent Commentaries (see Commentary No. 277, for example), declining year-to-year change in real (inflation-adjusted) M3 signals a pending economic downturn or pending intensification of an existing economic contraction. The following updated graph reflects both the annual payroll change and the approximate annual real contraction in the SGS Ongoing M3 Estimate as of March 2010. The M3 plot is shifted forward on the time scale by six months so as to show its leading relationship to payrolls. The March real M3 estimate is based on approximations of 4.0% annual nominal M3 contraction and 2.1% annual CPI-U, for a total 6.1% contraction, versus a 5.2% contraction in February. Assuming the March estimate holds, such would be the sharpest annual decline of real M3 in modern reporting. A formal M3 estimate for March will be published over this weekend.

Chart of M3 Money Supply versus Non-Farm Payroll Employment  

As the ongoing credit contraction squeezes personal and business consumption, most major economic series should begin to soften "unexpectedly" in upcoming reports and in economic releases of the next several months.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead.  Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions. That said there are no major economic releases due in the week ahead.

_________

No. 288: Healthcare, GDP, Durables, Home Sales

Thursday, March 25th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 288
Healthcare, GDP, Durables, Home Sales

March 26, 2010

__________

Government’s Healthcare Takeover
Will Depress Economy, Exacerbate Deficit and Inflation Woes

Downside Revisions Loom for 2009 GDP

Durable Goods Orders Gains Are Long-Term not Near-Term

Home Sales Heavily Influenced by Foreclosures

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, April 2nd following release of the March employment and unemployment reporting.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

Healthcare Legislation Will Hurt the Economy and Deficit. Early indications on the SGS-Alternate M3 Measure for March are for a deepening of the year-to-year real (inflation-adjusted) contraction in the series. The annual contraction in real M3 since late-2009 has been signaling a near-term intensification (a renewed downturn for those accepting the Wall Street hype of recent recovery) of the extraordinarily protracted and deep economic contraction pummeling U.S. business activity. Accordingly, weaker-than-consensus data should begin surfacing in the next month or so of economic reporting. (See Commentary No. 284.)

Implications of a down U.S. economy in 2010 include a much worse-than-expected federal deficit, including a likely new round of federal bailouts of entities or institutions that otherwise could threaten systemic collapse (i.e., states and the banking system). Such means much heavier than expected borrowing by the U.S. Treasury and heightened risk of a massive sell-off in the U.S. dollar and related dollar denominated paper. As Treasury auctions begin to fail, the Fed remains the lender of last resort to the federal government, with heavy monetization of Treasury debt a likely result. Therein lie some of the near-term risks that could move the U.S. into the early phases of hyperinflation in the months ahead. (See the Hyperinflation Special Report.)   

The just-enacted, effective government takeover of the healthcare and health insurance industry will damage the economy, widen the federal deficit and likely contribute directly to consumer inflation. The full impact of the new legislation will become more obvious in the months ahead, but clearly higher costs to businesses, higher taxes or premiums for individuals and the building of a new massive government support structure for the healthcare industry will reduce disposable income for individuals and businesses, drawing available funds away from productive economic activity. U.S. companies increasingly will find government regulations impairing their global competitiveness, with the effect of driving more U.S. business activity offshore. The net effect will be seen in slowing broad U.S. economic activity and some spiking of prices for those entities able to recoup higher costs.

Government projections on deficit impact are loaded with happy assumptions, including positive economic growth. As the program reaches its full economic impact, it will have meaningful effect on widening both the cash- and GAAP-based deficits. I do not think anyone has enough information to work through hard numbers, but the direction of overall impact is set, and the economy should be seeing added downside pressures as a result by year-end 2010. This issue will be explored more deeply in the near future.{{end}

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

Gross Domestic Income (GDI) Revisions Show Vanishing Recovery? The GDI suggests the third-quarter "recovery" in GDP never took place. As discussed in the sidebar, the GDP and the GDI are supposed to equal each other, with the GDP representing the consumption side of the economy, and the GDI representing the income side of the economy. The GDP always is the headline number and gets the heaviest attention from the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) in terms of a targeted, market-friendly growth rate. Ask the BEA as to why they publish the first estimate and subsequent revisions of GDI with a one-month lag to the GDP (a two-month lag for the fourth-quarter number), and the answer is tied to the lack of having reliable underlying data (they don’t have it in the early GDP reporting either).

So, the first-estimate of fourth-quarter GDI was published this morning (March 26th). The interesting number, though was a downward revision last month to the already reported third-quarter GDI (third-quarter GDP revisions were cut off two months prior). The third-quarter GDI was revised from a real, annualized quarterly growth rate of 2.2% to a contraction of 0.4%. The economic "recovery" touted for the third-quarter GDP disappeared, as measured by the GDI. Where the GDI had been reasonably consistent with the 2.2% growth previously reported for the GDP, a downward revision to the third-quarter GDP number is a fair bet, come the July 2010 annual GDP revisions. The just-reported 6.2% annualized GDI fourth-quarter growth is likely to revise lower in the months ahead (monthly fourth-quarter GDP revisions now are cut off), as better-quality information becomes available.       

GDP.  The BEA’s "third" estimate (second revision) of fourth-quarter 2009 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) showed an annualized real growth rate of 5.55% (versus a first revision of 5.93% and an initial estimate of 5.73%) +/- 3% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a 2.24% gain reported for third-quarter GDP. The year-to-year change in real fourth-quarter GDP revised to a gain of 0.06% (previously up by 0.15% and initially up by 0.10%), following a 2.64% contraction in the third-quarter.

The second revision to fourth-quarter 2009 GDP was little more than statistical noise, with relatively stronger nonfarm inventories accounting for 3.79 percentage points, or 68.3% of the revised 5.55% annualized quarterly growth (previously inventories accounted for 4.09 percentage points, or 69.0%, of the 5.93% annualized growth rate reported for fourth-quarter GDP). Before differences are exaggerated by the quarterly growth being raised to the fourth power, the quarter-to-quarter growth rate revised from 1.45% to 1.36% (both rates round to 1.4%). As discussed in earlier writings, without demand to support production (see durable goods orders), inventories eventually would be wound down, sapping growth from future GDP reporting.

The downside revision was reflected partially in an upside revision to GDP inflation (the implicit price deflator). The annualized fourth-quarter GDP deflator revised to 0.50% from 0.36%, following an initial estimate of 0.60%. Seasonally-adjusted CPI-U data show annualized CPI inflation in the fourth-quarter at 2.62%. The annualized third-quarter GDP implicit price deflator was 0.35%, while the annualized third-quarter CPI revised was 3.69%. Generally, the weaker the inflation rate used in deflating the GDP, the stronger is the resulting "real" GDP growth. In the current instance, slightly higher inflation was reflected in slightly lower real growth.

The small overall quarterly revision had minimal impact on the annual GDP numbers. For 2009, real GDP fell by a revised 2.44% (previously 2.42%, initially 2.43%), following a 0.44% gain 2008. The 2009 real decline remained the deepest since the war-end production shutdown in 1946, which showed a 10.94% annual contraction. In nominal terms — the way companies usually track their sales and people count their income — 2009’s revised 1.28% (previously and initially 1.27%) annual decline was the worst since a 6.31% decline in 1938, during the second dip of the Great Depression. Nominal GDP rose by 2.58% for the year in 2008.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for fourth-quarter 2009 remains an annual contraction of 4.6% versus the official estimate of a 0.1% gain, less-negative than the annual 5.7% (2.2% official) estimated contraction in the third-quarter. While annualized real quarterly growth is not formally estimated on an alternative basis, a flat quarter-to-quarter circumstance, plus or minus, likely would have been realistic, reflecting the bottom-bouncing at low levels of activity seen for much of the last year in key underlying economic series. Given the fourth-quarter inventory problems discussed earlier, renewed quarter-to-quarter contraction in the GDP as of first-quarter 2010 remains a good bet against overly optimistic consensus expectations of near-average positive growth.

GNP. The initial estimate of annualized real quarterly growth in Gross National Product (GNP) for fourth-quarter 2009 was 5.05%, up from 3.03% in the third-quarter. Year-to-year, fourth-quarter 2009 GNP was up by 0.42% versus a 2.87% annual contraction in the third quarter. For the full year 2009, GNP fell by 2.67% in 2009 versus a 0.60% gain in 2008 (GDP fell 2.44% in 2009 versus a gain of 0.44% in 2008).

GDI. The initial estimate of annualized real quarterly growth in Gross Domestic Income (GDI) for the fourth-quarter 2009 was 6.17% (3.48% net of revisions).  As discussed in the opening comments of this section, third-quarter GDI growth was revised to a 0.37% contraction from 2.22% positive growth. Year-to-year, fourth-quarter 2009 GDI was still in negative territory, down by 0.61% versus a revised 3.92% (previously 3.30%) annual contraction in the third quarter. For the full year 2009, GDI fell by 3.19% in 2009 versus a 0.37% decline in 2008 (GDP fell 2.44% in 2009 versus a gain of 0.44% in 2008).

Durable Goods Orders: Autos Sink as Aircraft Boom. The Census Bureau reported Wednesday (March 24th) that the regularly volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods rose by 0.5% (1.3% net of revisions) for the month in February, following an upwardly revised monthly gain of 3.9% (previously a 3.0% gain) in January. Unadjusted, year-to-year change in February 2010 new orders was a gain of 12.5% following a revised 10.3% (previously 9.9%) gain in January.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders rose by 5.2% for the month, following a revised 4.4% gain (previously a 4.7%) gain in January. Year-to-year orders were up by 25.1% in February, following a revised 15.4% (previously a 17.7%) annual gain in January.

All of the gain in total new orders for both February and January was due to increased aircraft sales, which usually are erratic and get stretched out in years, in terms of delivery. Orders rose in the nondefense aircraft sector on a monthly basis by 32.7% and 134.9%, respectively, in February and January. In contrast, the auto industry — so heavily relied on as a base for the economic "recovery" — suffered declining monthly sales of 1.9% and 2.3% respectively in February and January. Automobile orders are more immediate in terms of economic impact.

 Chart of New Orders for Durable Goods

Allowing for the recent strength in the heavily volatile, long-term aircraft orders, the general pattern of the broad series — before adjustment for inflation — remains one of bottom-bouncing.  Against an average monthly level of $166.5 billion since last December, the February 2010 level of $178.1 billion remained within the realm of normal month-to-month volatility and ongoing bottom-bouncing, again, if considered in the context of the long-term aircraft sales. Nonetheless, as a longer-term positive (measured in years), the aircraft orders have pushed the six-month moving average higher, though it still is below the level of February 2009. 

Homes Sales Activity Heavily Warped by Foreclosures. The housing starts measure, which continues to bottom-bounce at historically-low levels (see Commentary No. 286), and related construction measures, including builders’ profits from new home sales, directly impact GDP reporting. Otherwise, home sales do not impact GDP directly, although they can signal increased pending economic activity related to demand for appliances, furniture, etc.

As discussed in recent writings, both new home sales (Census Bureau) and existing home sales (National Association of Realtors — NAR) have been seriously distorted, both in terms of unit sales and price levels, by the extreme nature of the current economic depression in housing. One area of distortion has been the impact of foreclosure activity of a magnitude never before seen in the history of these series. The NAR is publishing monthly estimates of foreclosures as a portion of existing home sales reporting. Census acknowledges that a portion of new home sales is from foreclosure activity but offers no estimates. 

The following graphs reflect different measures of home sales activity for the last year. The numbers, through February 2010, reflect the seasonally-adjusted level of monthly sales, rather than the annual rate usually published. I view as nonsensical publishing annual rates on highly volatile numbers that usually show monthly changes that are not statistically meaningful.

Chart of Foreclosures as percentage of Existing Home Sales

Chart of Existing Home Sales with Foreclosures

 Chart of  Existing Home Sales

Chart of New Home Sales 

The first graph shows the portion of existing home sales estimated by the NAR to have been distressed (basically in some form of foreclosure activity). The February 2009 number was estimated at between 40% and 50%, the March 2009 number was estimated at slightly over half, but all the later estimates were given as specific percentages. The recent uptrend in the percent of sales in foreclosure is not a happy sign, although part of the increase could be due to a seasonality in foreclosures that varies from the seasonally weaker sales at this time of year, depending on how the seasonal adjustments are worked through.

The second graph shows the level of regular existing home sales versus the foreclosure numbers. The trend of a relatively softening level of regular sales versus firm foreclosures again is not a particularly happy picture.

Home sales activity rose to a near-term peak as the November 2009 expiration of the first-time home buyer tax credit neared. Given the way then series are defined, new some sales are recorded earlier in the sales cycle (contract) than the existing home sales (closing), so the peak seen in existing home sales would tend to lag that of new home sales, as seen the last two graphs. 

Both graphs show a slowing trend in sales, with new home sales just hitting an historic low. This is not a pattern consistent with expanding economic activity. Against the average annual sales peaks seen in 2005, February 2010 existing home sales were down by 29.1%, new home sales were down by 76.0%

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn in the coming months) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Employment and Unemployment (March 2010). Estimates of March payrolls and unemployment are due for release on Friday, April 2nd. Key to the reporting — irrespective of any market hype to the contrary — will be how the data look net of the temporary and intermittent hiring of workers for the 2010 census. Most of the jobs will be part-time, and whatever hiring takes places in the next several months — hundreds of thousands — will be lost completely in the period immediately following. Net of the short-term census impact, the employment and unemployment picture should deteriorate.

Briefing.com shows consensus expectations for a March payroll gain of 200,000, with the unemployment rate holding at 9.7%. The bulk of the March payroll is pick-up is expected to be from census hiring. In February, initial reporting had monthly payrolls shrinking by 36,000, down by 51,000 net of early census hiring. Where some of those retained for the census already likely will have other part-time employment, the impact in terms of reducing or depressing the headline unemployment rate would be proportionately less than that suggested by the increase reported in payrolls.

Economic activity remains weak and is in the process of entering a phase of intensified contraction, as discussed in recent writings. Accordingly, contrary to expectations, I would expect a monthly decline in March payrolls and an increase in the unemployment rate net of census effects. The actual level of census hiring should be large and will increase in the next couple of months.

 __________

 

No. 287: February CPI and PPI

Thursday, March 18th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 287
February CPI and PPI

March 18, 2010

__________

February’s Annual Inflation: CPI-U (2.1%), SGS (9.4%)

Oil Price Gyrations Contained February Inflation
But Promise March Spike

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, March 26th following release of the third estimate (second revision) of fourth-quarter 2009 GDP.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

CPI to Jump in Next Month’s Reporting. Although oil and oil-related prices continue to dominate CPI and PPI inflation reporting, anecdotal evidence continues to mount of higher prices across a much broader spectrum of products and services. A short-lived dip in February energy prices has been followed by higher prices in March, and, accordingly, the CPI and PPI should show fairly strong gains in March’s reporting, following February’s “contained” inflation. Without other issues, such as dollar weakness, eventually — within six-to-nine months — the broader inflation issues also should surface in official reporting. Upside risks for near-term inflation, however, remain severe, coincident with any heavy or panicked selling of the U.S. dollar and dollar-denominated paper assets.

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

CPI-U.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported this morning (March 18th) that the seasonally-adjusted February CPI-U was unchanged (up by 0.02% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, after a 0.17% (0.34% unadjusted) gain in January. Seasonally-adjusted, the CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended February 2010 (February versus November) was 1.36%, against January’s 2.19%. Unadjusted, February’s year-to-year inflation was 2.14% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) against a 2.63% annual increase in January.

A temporary monthly dip in February average gasoline prices (down 2.8% unadjusted per the BLS, down 2.5% per the Department of Energy) was the primary depressant in the monthly inflation number, which also lowered year-to-year inflation against higher prices in February of 2009. Resurgent oil and gasoline prices in March 2010 (against weaker inflation in March 2009) promise some upside swing in both the monthly and annual inflation rates for March.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in next month’s March 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.11% adjusted monthly decline seen in March 2009. I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for March 2010, the difference in March’s headline monthly change versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from February 2010’s annual inflation rate of 2.14%.

For those interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I continue to refer you to CPIwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

CPI-W. The narrower, seasonally-adjusted February CPI-W also was unchanged (down by 0.01% unadjusted) for the month, following an increase of 0.36% (up by 0.41% unadjusted) in January. Seasonally-adjusted, the annualized rate of CPI-W inflation for the three months ended February (February versus November) was 2.33%, versus 3.32% in January. Year-to-year CPI-W inflation rose by 2.82% in February, following a 3.34% January increase.

The comment in CPI-U section on gasoline prices applies with even greater force in the CPI-W effects, given the latter series’ heavier weighting of gasoline consumption in the index’s calculation.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — is reported only on an unadjusted basis. Year-to-year or annual inflation was 2.23% in February 2010, versus 2.84% in January.

Where recent C-CPI-U inflation now is being reported somewhat higher than CPI-U inflation, and where the C-CPI-U in theory should be showing lower inflation, the inconsistencies suggest some reporting difficulties with the CPI series.

Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI eased to roughly 5.5% growth in February 2010 from 6.0% growth in January, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, eased to about 9.4% (9.39% for those using the extra digit) in February, versus 9.8% in January.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation. Even with the December 2, 2009 historic high gold price of $1,212.50 per troy ounce, the prior all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 has not been hit in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on inflation through February 2010, the 1980 gold price peak would be $2,368 per troy ounce, based on not-seasonally-adjusted-CPI-U-adjusted dollars, and would be $7,494 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars. 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org) has not been hit since, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on inflation through February 2010, the 1980 silver price peak would be $138 per troy ounce, based on not-seasonally-adjusted-CPI-U-adjusted dollars, and would be $436 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars.

Real Money Supply M3. The signal of pending intensification of the economic downturn based on the annual contraction in the inflation-adjusted broad money supply (M3) was discussed most recently in Commentary No. 284. The annual real contraction in February M3 (SGS-Ongoing) estimated for that Commentary was 5.3%. Based on today’s CPI-U report, that annual contraction was 5.3%.

Real Retail Sales.  Based on February 2010 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly February retail sales rose by 0.3%, where before inflation adjustment the current number also was up by 0.3%, versus flat (down 0.02%) monthly real retail sales in January, against a 0.1% gain before inflation adjustment. February real retail sales rose by 1.6% year-to-year, versus a 3.9% gain before inflation adjustment. Real January sales were up 1.4% year-to-year, versus a 4.1% gain before inflation adjustment. As discussed in Commentary No. 285, there remain distortions in the monthly retail sales reporting that should "catch-up" in the next several months along with renewed actual underlying weakness in the series.

For the last 15 months, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $160.8 billion (the deflated February number was $163.4). Smoothed for monthly volatility on a six-month moving-average basis, as shown in the accompanying graph, the pattern of activity here has shifted to bottom-bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales. The recent bounce from short-lived stimulus effects and warped-seasonals appears to be topping out. There remains no fundamental turnaround in economic activity — no recovery — evident here, just bottom-bouncing, as should be confirmed in the next several months’ reporting

Chart of Inflation Adjusted Real Retail Sales 

 

Oil Softened February PPI. As reported by the BLS, yesterday (March 17th), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) fell month-to-month by 0.6% (down 0.6% unadjusted) in February, following January’s 1.4% (1.2% unadjusted) monthly gain. The February monthly decline primarily reflected a short-lived downward move in oil and energy-related prices. Year-to-year, February’s annual PPI inflation softened to 4.4%, following January’s 4.6% annual gain. 

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted February intermediate goods rose by 0.1% (up 1.7% in January), with crude goods falling by 3.5% (up by 9.6% in January). Year-to-year inflation continued to rise, with February intermediate goods up by 5.6% (up by 4.6% in January) and February crude goods up by 28.6% (up by 25.3% in January).

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn in the coming months) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Home Sales (February 2010, New and Existing). Both the existing (due for release Tuesday, March 23rd) and new (due for release Wednesday, March 24th) home sales data for February remain heavily warped by the unprecedented post-World War II volume of foreclosures. Accordingly, the numbers are not too meaningful in terms of reflecting normal market dynamics and activity. The new home sales monthly change likely will remain in the range of statistical insignificance.

New Orders for Durable Goods (February 2010).  Scheduled for release on Wednesday, March 24th, the new orders series is randomly volatile, month-to-month, and the monthly change in either direction likely will be without much significance. The general result should be a continuing pattern of bottom-bouncing.  

Gross Domestic Product — GDP (Fourth-Quarter 2009, Third Estimate). Scheduled for release on Friday, March 26th, the second revision to the fourth-quarter GDP likely will be little more than statistical noise against the second-estimate, first revision, of 5.9% annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth. The wild card here is in the initial reporting of fourth-quarter gross national product (GDP) and gross domestic income (GDI), either of which may offer a growth rate somewhat divergent from the economic boom currently reported for the quarter’s GDP.

 __________

No. 286: February Production and Housing

Tuesday, March 16th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 286
February Production and Housing

March 16, 2010

__________

Bottom-Bouncing Continues

Fault Lines in "Recovery" Begin to Show

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Thursday, March 18th following release of the February CPI.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Downside Revisions to Prior History Enabled Positive Monthly Retail Sales and Industrial Production Reporting in February. As discussed in Commentary No. 285, February’s seasonally-adjusted retail sales level would have been down by 0.1%, instead of up by 0.3%, had it been measured against headline January sales as initially reported to the financial markets. Similarly, February’s seasonally-adjusted industrial production index would have been down by 0.1% instead of up by 0.1%, had it been measured against initially-reported January production. 

In both instances, the headline monthly reports were positive, thanks in part to downward revisions to prior reporting. This pattern of revision is most typical during periods of economic contraction, and the resumption of this pattern may suggest some early cracks in the facade of the consensus economic "recovery," consistent with indications of a pending intensification of the economic downturn as signaled by the year-to-year contraction in real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply (SGS-Ongoing Measure of M3, see Commentary No. 284). Both the retail and production series had seen some near-term monthly gains due to the short-lived impact of stimulus gimmicks. Also, as discussed in recent writings, both series — particularly retail sales — have seen unusual boosts from likely distortions in seasonal factors resulting from the unusual duration and depth of the current economic contraction. Those near-term gains increasingly should prove to have been very fleeting. Real retail sales for February will be addressed in the Thursday (March 18th) Commentary.

Today’s February housing starts report, once again, showed no statistically-meaningful month-to-month change, continuing the pattern of bottom-bouncing seen for the last 15 months.

February Housing Starts Continued Bottom-Bouncing. The Census Bureau reported this morning, March 16th, that February 2010 housing starts fell month-to-month by a statistically-insignificant 5.9% (down by 2.7% net of revisions) +/- 11.7% (95% confidence interval). January’s starts were revised so as to show a 6.6% gain, up from an initial estimate of a 2.8% gain. Random volatility for this series on a monthly basis is high, which is why the monthly changes rarely are statistically significant. Year-to-year change was up by 0.2% in February, following a revised annual gain of 25.2% (previously 21.1%) in January. There likely was some negative impact on the series in February from extreme weather.

Since December 2008, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing at an historically low level, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 558,700. In the past 15 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, including February 2010’s reading of 575,000.

 Chart of Housing Starts

The "recovery" in housing is shown in the above graph. The data are smoothed using a six-month moving average to remove the extreme month-to-month volatility seen in this series. Regardless of any level of smoothing, though, in the current cycle, housing starts remain at least 25% below any levels seen since before the end of World War II. 

Industrial Production Lost Some Steam in February. Although there likely was some dampening of production due to bad weather, the Federal Reserve Board reported yesterday (March 15th) that seasonally-adjusted February 2010 industrial production rose by 0.08% (fell by 0.06% net of revisions) for the month, following a 0.89% (previously a 0.93%) gain in January. The December monthly gain revised from 0.66% to 0.47%, while the November gain revised from 0.56% to 0.67%. The year-to-year change in February rose to 1.66%, from a revised 0.79% (previously a 0.94%) gain in January. 

The June 2009 reading of 95.75 remained the record low for annual production growth since the shutdown of war-time production that followed World War II. For the last 14 months, the production index has averaged 98.61, around which the series has been fluctuating, with February’s six-month moving average reading at 99.84, versus 100.99 for the single month.

 Chart of INdustrial Production

The "recovery" in production is shown in the above graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average. Production activity has leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that effectively has wiped out the last eight years of growth in industrial production. Despite the near-term upside bump generated by short-lived stimulus impact, the series generally still is bottom-bouncing and should begin to soften significantly in the next several months.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn in the coming months) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions. The following text is the same as included in Commentary No. 285.

Producer Price Index — PPI (February 2010). Scheduled for release tomorrow, Wednesday, March 17th, the regularly volatile PPI could offer some upside surprise to expectations. Briefing.com suggests a consensus estimate of a 0.1% monthly contraction following January’s 1.4% gain.

Consumer Price Index — CPI (February 2010). Scheduled for release on Thursday, March 18th, the February CPI-U also may offer some upside surprise to expectations, given the monthly gains shown in February gasoline station and grocery store sales. Seasonally-adjusted monthly CPI-U could pick-up 0.1% to 0.2% for the month, following a 0.3% gain in January.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in February 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.43% adjusted monthly gain seen in February 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for February 2010, the difference in February’s headline monthly change versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from January 2010’s annual inflation rate of 2.63%. So a result of an adjusted 0.1% monthly gain would suggest annual CPI-U inflation for February of roughly 2.3%.

 

__________

No. 285: Outlook Update, Retail Sales, Trade Deficit

Friday, March 12th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 285
Outlook Update, Retail Sales, Trade Deficit

March 12, 2010
__________

Retail Sales Revisions Boosted January Headline Gain
But Reduced Reported Sales Levels

Sales Still Bottom-Bouncing Net of Inflation

January Trade Deficit Was GDP-Neutral

Fleeting Census Jobs Creation Will Have Offsetting Losses

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Tuesday, March 16th, following the release of the February residential construction (housing starts) report, with a further Commentary on Thursday, March 18th following release of the February CPI.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

Census Hype Boosts Employment Forecasts. The outlook for the broad economy is unchanged, with a period of intensified downturn or renewed economic dip likely to become apparent in the next couple of months. Such, however, does not discourage certain hypesters on Wall Street or within the political realm from declaring a looming economic boom (such already is in place per fourth-quarter GDP reporting), no matter how much the information has to be slanted.

Consider the pending census. In the last week, I have seen heavy public hype of the large jobs gains ahead (with census impact not mentioned), comments to the effect that census hiring will jump-start the economy, even a wire-service story referring to the census as a government economic-stimulus plan. 

The U.S. census to be conducted as of April 1, 2010 will have fleeting impact on employment and negligible impact on the economy. While hundreds of thousands of part-time census jobs will spike payroll employment in March through May 2010, they all will be lost in sharp (hundreds of thousands) payroll losses in June through September. That, at least, is the pattern of jobs change around the 2000 census, which also was conducted as of April 1st. Details of temporary census jobs patterns seen around the last two census periods are available from Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS).

I would not take seriously anyone who is touting the pending jobs surge but not adding some qualification as to the temporary nature of census impact.

By nature, the census jobs will be very short-lived and intermittent, and generally on a part-time basis. While any increase in gainful employment is a positive, the effects here should be so limited as to be hardly noticeable as a blip in the economy.

The census is not an economic stimulus package being put forth by the Obama administration. It is a decennial survey mandated by the U.S. Constitution and has been conducted accordingly every 10 years since 1790.


Revisions and Gasoline and Food Prices Boosted February Retail Sales. As of last month’s report, retail sales for the seasonally-adjusted three months ended January 2010 totaled $1,064.6 billion. That number was revised to $1,062.6 billion in the February release, with the three months through February 2010 totaling $1,063.7 billion. The small relative gain in the latest period is due to prior-period downward revisions. The latest data show a weaker retail sales environment that did the initial January numbers. This is before adjustment for inflation, which continues to show the broad series bottom-bouncing along a low-level plateau of activity. 

Rising gasoline and food prices — as suggested by increased gasoline station and grocery store revenues — accounted for 58% of the reported monthly gain in February sales. Where gas and food prices accounted for 27% of initially-reported January sales, such revised to 113% of January sales in the latest reporting. Inflation issues extend beyond food and energy, and any relatively positive news in retail sales in the year ahead should reflect primarily inflated prices, not higher physical volume of sales.

As discussed in earlier writings, the February data likely still were spiked some by the unusual seasonal-adjustment patterns generated in this extremely protracted and deep economic downturn, the most severe disruption in business activity since modern economic reporting was established in the post-World War II period. There is a good chance that a combination of catch-up in poor-quality seasonals plus an actual renewed deterioration of activity will generate a meaningfully-negative "surprise" in next month’s retail sales report.

There also may be questions on sampling that parallel the surveying issues seen in the Bureau of Labor Statistics Birth Death Model, as discussed in Commentary No. 276, where companies that have gone out of business are assumed to be continuing as they were. Anecdotal evidence continues to mount of a large number of small retail business closings early in 2010. If there is a surveying problem in this area, such could become evident in the benchmark revision to the series due for release on April 30th.

Reported Nominal Retail Sales. Today’s (March 12th) retail sales report on February 2010 — issued by the Census Bureau — indicated a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.34% (down 0.06% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a revised 0.15% (previously 0.48%) monthly gain in December. Although the February numbers likely reflected some dampening effect of severe blizzards, the monthly gain was spiked by downward revisions to prior reporting as well as ongoing inflation. On a year-to-year basis, the February 2010 retail sales were reported up by 3.85% from February 2008, versus a downwardly revised 4.08% (4.71%) annual gain in January.

Real Retail Sales. Removing the effects of inflation, February 2010 retail sales activity likely will show both monthly and annual gains, although the revised real January number has turned negative month-to-month in revision.  The pattern of ongoing, inflation-adjusted activity, however, remains one of bottom-bouncing/plateauing at extremely low levels. Details will be updated and graphed with the Commentary following the March 18th release of the February CPI.

Core Retail Sales.  The "core retail sales" methodology was revamped recently, where the net relative monthly increases and/or decreases in gasoline station and grocery store sales were subtracted from the full monthly retail sales number, instead of the total of gasoline station and grocery store revenues each month. Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, the revamped reported "core" change more closely reflects the actual retail sales experience. This remains a work in progress and eventually will be used in the development of additional SGS alternative economic measures.

For the near-term, the "core" retail sales is reported in two versions, where Version I uses the original methodology, and Version II version appears to provide a more balanced picture of the impact food and energy inflation in the standard retail sales reporting.

Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales:

Version I — February retail sales net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — rose by 0.2% versus the official aggregate gain of 0.3%.

Version II — February retail sales net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gasoline stations — rose by 0.1% versus the official aggregate gain of 0.3%.


January Trade Deficit Held with 4th-Quarter 2009, Net of Inflation.  For January 2010, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau reported the nominal (not adjusted for inflation) seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit at $37.3 billion, down from a revised $39.9 (previously $40.2) billion deficit in December, but up from a revised $36.9 billion in January 2009. Against December, the January trade balance reflected both lower imports and exports, with a sharper decline in imports. 

The report included revised guesstimates on services and some methodological changes in data estimation, which redistributed the monthly deficits within 2009 and reduced the total deficit for 2009 to $378.6 billion from the $380.7 billion previously estimated. The deficit for 2008 was reported at $695.9. The bulk of the decline in the nominal 2009 versus 2008 deficits reflects lower oil prices. Shifts in quarterly trade patterns resulting from revisions were not significant.

Adjusted for seasonal factors and inflation (2005 chain-weighted dollars as used in reporting real GDP), the January 2010 merchandise trade deficit was $41.04 billion versus an average of $41.02 billion in fourth-quarter 2009. With the January number, the first of two that will be used in the "advance" estimate in first-quarter 2010 GDP due for release at the end of April, a neutral impact of net exports on the initial GDP reading is suggested, so far.

For the month of January 2010, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $73.89 per barrel versus $73.20 in December 2009 and against $39.81 in January 2009. In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, January 2010 volume averaged 7.912 million barrels per day, versus 8.938 million in December 2009 and 9.682 million in January 2009.


Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn in the coming months) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Industrial Production (February 2010). Due for release on Monday, March 15th, February industrial production should be flat month-to-month, per the consensus reading of Briefing.com, against a gain of 0.9% in January. Some bad-weather impact should be reflected. Net of revisions, risks should be to the downside of expectations.

Housing Starts (February 2010). The February report on housing starts is scheduled for release on Tuesday, March 16th. Some bad-weather impact is likely here, as well, but the monthly change likely will remain statistically meaningless, with the series continuing to bottom-bounce.

Producer Price Index — PPI (February 2010). Scheduled for release on Wednesday, March 17th, the regularly volatile PPI could offer some upside surprise to expectations. Briefing.com suggests a consensus estimate of a 0.1% monthly contraction following January’s 1.4% gain.

Consumer Price Index — CPI (February 2010). Scheduled for release on Thursday, March 18th, the February CPI-U also may offer some upside surprise to expectations, given the monthly gains shown in February gasoline station and grocery store sales. Seasonally-adjusted monthly CPI-U could pick-up 0.1% to 0.2% for the month, following a 0.3% gain in January.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in February 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.43% adjusted monthly gain seen in February 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for February 2010, the difference in February’s headline monthly change versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from January 2010’s annual inflation rate of 2.63%. So a result of an adjusted 0.1% monthly gain would suggest annual CPI-U inflation for February of roughly 2.3%.


__________

 

No. 284: February Employment and Unemployment

Friday, March 5th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 284
February Employment and Unemployment

 March 5, 2010

 __________

 Payroll Drop of 36,000 was 51,000 Net of Census Hiring

Broader February Unemployment Measures Rose:
U.6 at 16.8% (up 0.3%), SGS at 21.6% (up 0.4%)

Economy Remains Headed into Deepening Downturn

 __________ 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, March 12th, following the release of the February retail sales report.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

 

Data Distortions Still Playing Out. With an unchanged unemployment rate and a near-consensus payroll number reported this morning (March 5th) by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), I certainly misread the nature of Larry Summers’ employment comments, as discussed in yesterday’s Commentary No. 283. Historically, at least with earlier administrations, it has been unusual for individuals in positions such as Mr. Summers’ to offer comments on employment in the week before a pending release, without having a specific political or market-related purpose.  

Distortions to economic reporting — in seasonal factors and in other methodologies not designed to handle a protracted and severe economic downturn — appear to be continuing. Where seasonals have warped the U.3 unemployment rate reporting (non-headline U.6 components seem less affected), such should reverse out shortly (next month or so), as the factors face eventual catch-up. The issues for the payroll data — aside from monthly swings of less than 129,000 jobs being statistically not meaningful — remain with the continued upside biases created in monthly reporting by the birth-death model, discussed below.

As economic activity shows renewed or intensified downside movement in the months ahead, the unemployment rate should rise and payroll declines should intensify (net of short-lived census hiring), regardless of the reporting distortions.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 36,000 (down by 1,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for February 2010, following a revised 26,000 (previously 20,000) jobs loss in January. With the 2010 federal census nearing, temporary hiring in that area has begun to pick-up, with 15,000 reported for February, versus a 9,000 gain in January. Accordingly, net of the temporary census-related spike, seasonally-adjusted February payrolls declined by 51,000. The census hiring will become a major factor boosting relative payroll levels in the next several months.

The BLS also announced an unusual correction to April to July 2009 data, revamping estimates as to how many people had been hired by the federal government in preparation for the census. Payrolls for April 2009 were upped by 54,000, in the largest monthly revision. The complexity of the federal government accurately counting its employees pales in comparison to the issues involved for counting those employed in the private sector. 

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; the current month of February 2010 is the short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment has declined by a seasonally-adjusted 8,425,000 jobs, or 6.1%.

As the pace of reported monthly decline has continued to slow sharply against year-ago comparisons, year-to-year contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls narrowed to 2.5% in February from an unrevised 3.0% in January, and from a post-World War II record 5.0% decline in July. The July 2009 decline was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II, which reflected a trough of a 7.6% contraction in September 1945. Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the current annual decline would be the worst since the Great Depression.    

 Chart of Nonfarm Payroll Employment Year to Year Change

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias (CSFB).  The pattern of impossible biases built into the headline monthly payroll employment of recent years appears to have ended, and, accordingly, I am ceasing reporting on it, unless it becomes a major factor again either in terms of upside or downside biases built into the payroll survey.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  As discussed in previous writings, the Birth-Death Model biases tend to overstate payroll employment levels — to understate employment declines — during recessions. The flaws were confirmed last month by the nature of BLS’s massive benchmark revision, where the BLS had indicated that the underlying assumptions to the Birth-Death Model were missing certain jobs losses.

Although the upside bias is scaled down some from last year, the Birth-Death Model survives and remains a major distorting factor in monthly payroll reporting. Such the misreporting, however, will not be adjusted at all until the next benchmark revision in February 2011, following the November 2010 elections.

The unsupportable premise that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business, continues. So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry. The "surplus" jobs created by start-up firms, which get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor, have been revised lower, which is the only portion of the model that has been scaled back, averaging at present roughly an extra 50,000 seasonally-adjusted jobs per month. This monthly bias should be negative, on average. Since it is not, the BLS continues regularly to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment.

That said, the unadjusted February 2010 bias was a monthly addition of 97,000 jobs, versus a pre-benchmark addition of 134,000 jobs in February 2009, and against a subtraction of 427,000 in January 2010 (January is the one month of big subtraction on an unadjusted basis).

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed a monthly employment gain in February of 308,000, versus an estimated January-over-December gain of 784,000 gain.

The February 2010 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment of 9.69% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval) was unchanged from the January estimate of 9.69%. Unadjusted U.3 was reported at 10.4% in February, down from 10.6% in January. Distorted seasonal factors appear to be an ongoing issue, but that should be resolved in the next month or so, as a seasonal factor catch-up reverses some of the recent relatively happy news with an exaggerated jump to a higher U.3 unemployment rate.

Removed from the headline U.3 unemployment number, the broader unemployment measures do not seem to be suffering the same level of seasonal issues with their non-U.3 components. February U.6 unemployment rose to an adjusted 16.8% (eased to 17.9% unadjusted), from 16.5% (18.0% unadjusted) in January.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers. The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed, unemployment — more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — rose to about 21.6% in February from 21.2% in January. While there likely were some ongoing seasonal aberrations in the February reporting, the SGS measure is based on the reported U.6 measure and usually varies with it. See the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com for a graph and more detail.

While 21.6% unemployment might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession. The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms. Today, less that 2% work on farms. Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

Signal for Intensified Downturn Continues. As discussed in recent Commentaries (see Commentary No. 277 for example), declining year-to-year change in real (inflation-adjusted) M3 signals a pending economic downturn or pending intensification of an existing economic contraction. The following updated graph reflects both the annual payroll change and the approximate annual real contraction in the SGS Ongoing M3 Estimate as of February 2010. The M3 plot is shifted forward on the time scale by six months so as to show its leading relationship to payrolls. The February real M3 estimate is based on approximations of 3.1% annual nominal M3 contraction and 2.2% annual CPI-U (total 5.3% contraction). A formal M3 estimate for February will be published over this weekend.

 Chart of Nonfarm Payroll Employment vs Real M3 Year to Year Change

As the ongoing credit contraction squeezes personal and business consumption, most major economic series should begin to soften "unexpectedly" in the next several months of reporting.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn in the coming months) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Trade Balance in Goods and Services (January 2010). Due for release on Thursday, March 11th, the January trade deficit should widen further, against a relatively flat consensus (Briefing.com), setting an early, more-negative tone for reporting of first-quarter 2010 GDP growth at the end of April.

Retail Sales (February 2010). The February retail sales report is scheduled for release on Friday, March 12th. Briefing.com reports a consensus estimate of retail sales rising 0.1% month-to-month, following an initially-reported monthly gain of 0.5% in January. Unusual seasonal factor swings should kick-in here in the next month or so, showing weaker-than-expected growth, compounded by an actual slowing in economic activity beyond any blizzard effects. There are downside reporting risks to the consensus outlook, with both monthly and annual growth rates likely to flutter around zero, after inflation-adjustment.

 __________

No. 283: Updated February Employment Outlook

Thursday, March 4th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 283
Updated February Employment Outlook

March 4, 2010
__________

Don’t Blame the Weather

__________

 

 

PLEASE NOTE: Today’s Commentary is just a brief update on the outlook for tomorrow’s (Friday, March 5th) February jobs and unemployment reporting. A regular Commentary will follow tomorrow’s release, along with detail on next week’s scheduled reporting.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

February’s Heavy Snowstorms Had Some Negative Economic Impact. Severe weather that shutdown normal day-to-day activity in areas of the East for a number of days during February had to take some toll on regional retail sales, industrial production and housing starts, dampening activity that already was headed into new decline (more on that tomorrow). The impact on payroll employment and unemployment results, however, should have been minimal, despite the blizzards of the survey week and comments by Larry Summers, economic advisor to President Obama. People generally do not lose their jobs due to snow days.

Reuters reported that Larry Summers, in a CNBC interview (Monday, March 1st), claimed "winter blizzards were likely to distort February jobless figures." I take such comments from an Administration official — in the week of the employment report release — as an effort to alter market expectations and to soften potential negative market impact from worse than expected results. Of course, no one outside the Bureau of Labor Statistics — including the President and the Fed Chairman — is supposed to have access to the employment data before the markets close later today. Against expectations of 9.8% unemployment for February, up from 9.7% unemployment in January, I’d take Mr. Summers’ comments as an indication of a 10% or worse unemployment rate in the offing, if I am correct in my interpretation as to the nature of the public comment. I easily could be misreading this. 

Where Briefing.com showed no increase in the consensus outlook for the February unemployment rate (still 9.8%), subsequent to the Summers’ comments, the expected decline in nonfarm payrolls widened from 20,000 last week to a decline of 65,000 as of this morning’s estimate.

Again, the impact on employment and unemployment from the bad weather should be nil, and significantly deteriorated employment results would reflect not only potential renewed weakening in the economy, but also catch-up from distortions in recent seasonal adjustments that were otherwise of poor quality.

Census Hiring Will Help Jobs Data. With the 2010 federal census scheduled for measuring everyone in place in the United States as of April 1st, some minimal hiring by the government for the process took place in January. Based on hiring patterns reported by the BLS for the 2000 census, February hiring should pick, perhaps in the 20,000 range, with March hiring likely to top 100,000, and with even greater gains in April and May. Such hiring, though, will be temporary and monthly data likely will be cited in the next several months both in aggregate and ex-census.

Seasonal Warping Leaves Near-Term Reporting Uncertain. Separate from any games being played by the Administration with the markets, I still expect both a higher unemployment rate and deeper payroll decline than the consensus forecasts, given catch-up in bad seasonal factors and renewed slowing in the general economy. While the depression’s impact on skewing seasonal factors may not have run its course, yet,  in "improving" reported employment-related data, it should be close to having done so, with some overstatement in the other direction likely in reporting of the next couple of months.

The weekly new claims for unemployment insurance number appears to have stabilized well off its peak at around an average of 470,000 per week, a level last seen as the current economic downturn was formally underway in early 2008. As mentioned in earlier writings, there has been some flattening out in activity, where a certain layer of layoffs has tended to run its course. Layoffs should start to rise again in the next couple of months. On the offsetting hiring side, the Conference Board’s seasonally-adjusted January help-wanted advertising (newspapers) was unchanged month-to-month at 10, while the seasonally-adjusted help-wanted advertising (online) declined. The online index is too new to read much into, where the seasonally-adjusted data most certainly are skewed by limited historical data, and where the unadjusted numbers are not made available for analysis.

The February purchasing managers surveys showed gains in both the manufacturing (53.3 in January, 56.1 in February) and nonmanufacturing (44.6 in January, 48.6 in February) employment indices, although, as diffusion indices, a reading below 50.0 shows February services employment still to be in contraction). Poor-quality seasonal factors remain at play with these surveys.

__________

 

No. 282: Federal Government 2009 GAAP-Accounting

Monday, March 1st, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 282
Federal Government 2009 GAAP-Accounting

March 1, 2010

__________

2009 GAAP-Deficit Narrowed to $4.3 Trillion

Total GAAP-Based Obligations of $71 Trillion at
Five-Times GDP Level

Accounting for Government Bailouts Showed TARP Profit 

__________

PLEASE NOTE: This Commentary is intended as just a brief summary of the numbers from the government’s 2009 GAAP accounting, while a more comprehensive report is prepared. The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, March 5th, following the release of the February employment and unemployment report.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams  

 

Government’s Fiscal Condition Deteriorated Despite Happy Accounting. The GAAP-based deficit from U.S. Treasury reporting — including the year-to-year change in the net present value of unfunded liabilities in various social programs — narrowed to $4.3 trillion in 2009, from $5.1 trillion in 2008. On a similar basis, total federal obligations as of September 30, 2009, stood at $70.7 trillion, up from $65.6 trillion the year before, with the 2009 number 4.94-times the $14.3 trillion level of GDP reported for the 2009 fiscal year. Other numbers are included in the summary table. 

The numbers underreport the severity of the U.S. government’s fiscal circumstance. Even as reported, though, the numbers are not just unsustainable, they remain uncontainable. Taxes cannot be raised enough to put the annual results in the black, and the level of program slashing needed in Social Security, Medicare, etc. to reduce costs appears to be well beyond the scope of any foreseeable political will in Washington.

Unfortunately, with Treasury Secretary Timothy Geithner’s cover letter sounding like it was drafted by one of President Obama’s speech writers, the 2009 Financial Report of the U.S. Government appears to have entered the realm of political expediency, reflecting accounting that might be considered questionable if it were used in the private sector. The relatively "positive" 2009 results reflected capitalization of much of the government’s bailout efforts, a late "profit" from TARP, questionable handling of some post-fiscal year liabilities and changes in actuarial assumptions.     

Consider the report’s covering Statement of the Comptroller of the United States, the overseeing accounting authority, where "material" questions are raised in terms of the valuation of the bailout liabilities and assets. Per Gene L. Dodaro, Acting Comptroller General:

"The economic recession and the federal government’s unprecedented actions intended to stabilize the financial markets and to promote economic recovery have significantly affected the federal government’s financial condition. The resulting substantial investments and increases in liabilities, net operating cost, the unified budget deficit, and debt held by the public are reported in the U.S. government’s consolidated financial statements for fiscal year 2009. Because the valuation of these assets and liabilities is based on assumptions and estimates that are inherently subject to substantial uncertainty arising from the uniqueness of certain transactions and the likelihood of future changes in general economic, regulatory, and market conditions, actual results may be materially different from the reported amounts. Further, the ultimate cost of these actions and their impact on the federal government’s financial condition will not be known for some time."

 

 

U.S. Government - Alternate Fiscal Deficit and Debt
Reported by
U.S. Treasury
Dollars are in either billions or trillions, as indicated.
Sources:
U.S. Treasury, Shadow Government Statistics.
Fiscal
Year(1)
Formal
Cash-Based
Deficit
($Bil)
GAAP
Ex-SS Etc.
Deficit
($Bil)
GAAP
With SS Etc.
Deficit
($Tril)
GAAP 
Federal 
Negative
Net Worth
($Tril)
Gross
Federal
Debt
($Tril)
Total(2)
Federal
Obligations
(GAAP)
($Tril)
2009(3)
$1,417.1
$1,253.7
$4.3
$63.6
$12.0
$70.7
2008
454.8
1,009.1
5.1
59.3
10.0
65.6
2007
162.8
275.5
1.2(4)
54.3
9.0
59.8
2006
248.2
449.5
4.6
53.1
8.5
58.2
2005
318.5
760.2
3.5
48.5
7.9
53.3
2004
412.3
615.6
11.0(5)
45.0
7.4
49.5
2003
374.8
667.6
3.0
34.0
6.8
39.1
2002
157.8
364.5
1.5
31.0
6.2
35.4
(1) Fiscal year ended September 30th. (2) Includes gross federal debt, not just "public" debt. While the non-public debt is debt the government owes to itself for Social Security, etc., the obligations there are counted as "funded" and as such are part of total government obligations. (3) This is the official reporting. It reflects government bailout programs as investments, predates December 2009 guarantees of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac and does not reflect PBGC or FDIC liabilities. Please note that mid-year accounting redefinitions for TARP knocked off roughly $500 billion from the reported formal cash-based estimate and contributed to a TARP "profit" in the GAAP numbers. Further commentary will follow. (4) On a consistent reporting basis, net of one-time changes in actuarial assumptions and accounting, SGS still estimates that the GAAP-based deficit for 2007 topped $4 trillion, with negative net worth of $57.1 trillion and total obligations of $59.8. So as to maintain consistency with the official GAAP statements, the "official" numbers are shown. (5) SGS estimates $3.4 trillion, excluding one-time unfunded setup costs of the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement, and Modernization Act of 2003 (enacted December 2003). Again, in order to maintain consistency with the official GAAP statements, the "official" numbers are shown in the table for 2004. The 2009 GAAP statement were release on February 26, 2010. Link to the 2009 statements: http://www.fms.treas.gov/fr/09frusg/09frusg.pdf
 

 

Where the SGS Table Numbers Come from. All numbers are for the indicated fiscal year (ended September 30th), in either billions or trillions of dollars as shown.

Formal Cash-Based Deficit (1) –headline deficit number from page xiii of the 2009 report, "Nation by the Numbers Table," hereinafter referred to as NBN, line: "Unified Budget Deficit."

GAAP ex-SS Etc. Deficit (2) – euphemistically referred to as "Net Operating Cost" in NBN. It excludes social insurance unfunded liabilities.

GAAP with SS Etc. Deficit (3) — previous number (2) plus year-to-year change in the net present value of social insurance unfunded liabilities, which comes from NBN line "Closed Group" under "Statement of Social Insurance," 2009 minus 2008. The "Closed Group" is used here as it has been the preferred measure used in earlier government statements.

GAAP Federal Negative Net Worth (4) — "Total net position" from "Balance Sheets" on age 49 of the 2009 report, plus the 2009 "Closed Group" total net present value unfunded liabilities of social insurance from NBN.

Gross Federal Debt (5) –from "Note 14. Federal Debt …" pages 87-89 of the 2009 report. Total held by public (p. 87) plus Total intragovernmental (p. 89)

Total Federal Obligations (6) –Total liabilities from "Balance Sheets" on age 49 of the 2009 report, plus the 2009 "Closed Group" total net present value unfunded liabilities of social insurance from NBN, plus total intragovernmental debt from (p. 89) of the 2009 report.

 

Please Note: A significant expansion of this Commentary will follow with analysis of the 2009 report in government’s accounting for standard business, the bailouts and the unfunded social insurance liabilities.

__________

 

No. 281: General Update, GDP, Durable Goods

Friday, February 26th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 281
General Update, GDP, Durable Goods

February 26, 2010

__________

69% of 4th-Quarter’s 5.9% "Boom" Due to Nonfarm Inventories

Economic and Financial Crises Are Not Over

Fed Still Panicking Despite Happy Talk

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The planned brief economic general update for Tuesday is incorporated in today’s text. With near-term writing disrupted somewhat by a heavy-hitting new seasonal malady, a full update on the markets is planned tentatively for early next week, with one on the economy for the week following (post-February jobs report).  The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, March 5th, following the release of that February employment/unemployment report. The report on the U.S. Treasury’s 2009 GAAP-based financial statements for the U.S. government is scheduled for release around "four-ish" this afternoon (Eastern Time), after the markets in New York close for the week and the month. Assuming it is so released, a special Commentary will follow over the weekend.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

It Is Not Over. Underlying economic and financial fundamentals signal and suggest ongoing economic contraction and continued financial system instability. Despite the relatively happy talk out of the Fed in the last several weeks as to systemic stability, Mr. Bernanke continues to behave as though he has a serious problem. Consider the latest surge in the monetary base.

Chart of Monetary Base

Shown is the St. Louis Fed’s Adjusted Monetary Base, seasonally-adjusted, where the base surged by $90 billion dollars (an annualized 198% pace of increase) in the two weeks ended February 24th, to a record $2.184 trillion. The prior record high had been in the prior two-week period. 

The monetary base — currency in circulation plus bank reserves — is the Fed’s primary tool for adjusting broad systemic liquidity, as measured by the money supply. Yet, the SGS Ongoing M3 Estimate — M3 once was the Fed’s broadest money measure — still is on track for a deepening annual contraction in February 2010. Since November 2009, annual real M3 (net of CPI-U inflation) has been in a deepening contraction, signaling an intensifying economic downturn in the months ahead (see Commentary No. 277).

As a result, economic reporting increasingly will surprise the markets to the downside. Recent surprises in weaker home sales, new jobless claims and consumer confidence have not been of substance, but negative market reactions to those numbers likely foreshadow significant negative market reaction as the general outlook shifts, from one of ongoing economic growth and recovery, to one of renewed recession.

As discussed in recent Commentaries, the best picture from the better quality series is one of ongoing bottom-bouncing. Consumers account for more than 70% of GDP, yet growth in personal consumption cannot be sustained without growth in inflation-adjusted income. Short-term gain can be had, however, through debt expansion, but consumer credit is contracting, and actual, disposable consumer income is not keeping up with inflation.  This is a long-term structural problem, and, until it is addressed, there can be no economic recovery. 

Short-Lived Boom Times. Six-percent growth is considered an outright economic boom, but few believe the current economy is booming, despite the revised report of official 5.9% annualized growth in the fourth-quarter GDP. As discussed later, most of the reported growth was due to relatively stronger nonfarm inventories, yet the inventory improvement is not supported by strong orders. When consumption fails to support production and inventories build-up, manufacturers tend to cut back production, and GDP falls. While I do not find the reported current quarterly gain credible, it is in place, and it sets up renewed quarterly contractions beginning as early the current quarter. Such would be viewed popularly as a double-dip recession.

Consensus economists, Wall Street and political Washington nonetheless continue touting the end of the recession. Yet, the longest and deepest economic downturn since the first downleg of the Great Depression still has some time to run. Although a continuing (renewed) downturn quickly may gain popular recognition as a double-dip recession, not popularly recognized is my contention that that the "brief" 2000 recession, from March to November 2001, which has been revised away in GDP reporting, was much longer and deeper than officially claimed, and that the current downturn already is the second-dip of a multiple-dip depression than began in late-2000. 

More-protracted-than-official-recession timing is evidenced by the ongoing recessionary behavior of industrial production and payrolls — coincident indicators of broad economic activity — from late-2000 until well into 2004. Those same indicators were showing recessionary activity again by early-2007, where the official timing of the current recession started with December 2007. This area will be explored further in the upcoming full economic update planned for the week of March 8th.

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

Inventories Generated "Boom" Growth. Relatively stronger nonfarm inventories accounted for 4.09 percentage points, or 69.0%, of the revised 5.93% annualized growth rate reported for fourth-quarter GDP. That was up from 3.61 percentage points (63.0%) of the 5.73% growth rate reported initially. As discussed in the opening comments, without demand to support production, inventories eventually would be wound down, sapping growth from future GDP reporting.

GDP.  The "second" estimate (first revision) of fourth-quarter 2009 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) released this morning (February 26th) by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) showed an annualized real growth rate of 5.93% (initial estimate of 5.73%) +/- 3% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a 2.24% gain reported for third-quarter GDP. The year-to-year change in real fourth-quarter GDP revised to a gain of 0.15% (previously up by 0.10%), following a 2.64% contraction in the third-quarter. The numbers are of such poor quality at this point that the BEA still is not publishing initial estimates of Gross National Product (GNP) or Gross Domestic Income (GDI) for the quarter or for the year.

The aggregate revision was little more than statistical noise, with the upside revision reflected fully in a downside revision to GDP inflation (the implicit price deflator). The annualized fourth-quarter GDP deflator revised to 0.36% from 0.60% in the initial estimate. Just-revised seasonally-adjusted CPI-U data showed reduced annualized CPI inflation in the fourth-quarter at 2.62%, versus 3.69% in original reporting (inflation was thrown back into the second quarter; see Commentary No. 280), but any related impact on GDP reporting should not show up until the July 2010 annual GDP revisions, since the adjustments affect multiple quarters. The annualized third-quarter GDP implicit price deflator effectively was zero (-0.02%), while the annualized third-quarter CPI revised to 3.69% from 3.60%. Generally, the weaker the inflation rate used in deflating the GDP, the stronger is the resulting "real" GDP growth.

The GDP series remains largely worthless in its early reporting and heavily gimmicked in both short- and long-term reporting. Consider the net export account mentioned in recent commentaries. Last month’s "advance" estimate lacked December trade data to complete the fourth-quarter estimate of net exports, where a wider deficit is a net negative for GDP reporting. Despite the October and November data — seasonally- and inflation-adjusted by the BEA — suggesting a deteriorating fourth-quarter deficit in goods trade, the "advance" estimate of GDP reflected an annualized $12.2 billion improvement in the goods deficit in "net exports." When the December trade data were reported, the quarterly goods data indeed showed an annualized deterioration, one of $20.0 billion, but such translated not into a decline, but only to a smaller $5.5 billion improvement in the goods portion of the net exports account. Had the net exports deteriorated by the otherwise reported $20.0 billion, the 5.93% GDP growth rate would have been 5.11%. Only the goods data can be assessed here, because the services side of the trade data basically is a guess.

In any event, the small overall quarterly revision had minimal impact on the annual GDP numbers. For 2009, real GDP fell by a revised 2.42% (previously 2.43%), following a 0.44% gain 2008. The 2009 real decline remained the deepest since the war-end production shutdown in 1946, which showed a 10.94% annual contraction. In nominal terms — the way companies usually track their sales and people count their income — 2009’s 1.27% (unrevised) annual decline was the worst since a 6.31% decline in 1938, during the second dip of the Great Depression. Nominal GDP rose by 2.58% for the year in 2008.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for fourth-quarter 2009 remains an annual contraction of 4.6% versus the official estimate of a 0.1% gain, less-negative than the annual 5.7% (2.2% official) estimated contraction in the third-quarter. While annualized real quarterly growth is not formally estimated on an alternative basis, a flat quarter-to-quarter circumstance, plus or minus, likely would have been realistic, reflecting the bottom-bouncing at low levels of activity seen for much of the last year in key underlying economic series. Given the fourth-quarter inventory problems discussed earlier, renewed quarter-to-quarter contraction in the GDP as of first-quarter 2010 remains a strong bet.

GNP and GDI. The initial estimated of Gross National Product and Gross Domestic Income for the fourth quarter should be published at the end of March, along with the third-estimate of fourth-quarter GDP. Since this reporting closes out the year, and since the early estimates are without substance, the BEA tends to hold off as long as possible with these numbers, even though they are tied to the GDP estimates.

Despite Some Gains, New Orders for Durable Goods Still Bottom Bouncing. The Census Bureau reported yesterday (February 25th) that the regularly volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods jumped by 3.0% in January, versus December, following an upwardly revised monthly gain of 1.9% (initially a 0.3% gain) in December. Unadjusted, year-to-year change in January new orders was a gain of 9.9% following a revised 2.0% decline (previously down by 3.1%).

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders rose by 4.7% for the month, following a revised 2.5% gain (previously a 0.2% decline) in December. Year-to-year orders were up by 17.7%, following a revised 0.6% (previously 2.5%) annual decline.

All of the January gain in total new orders and part of the December revisions were due to increased aircraft sales, which usually are erratic and get stretched out in years, in terms of delivery. Net of the aircraft sales, January orders fell by 0.6%. The volatility in aircraft orders is one reason for viewing the series smoothed over a six-month moving average.

Motor vehicle production has been a major contributor to recent positive economic reporting, yet January new orders here fell by 2.2% for the month, and were only 1.0% ahead of where they were a year ago. The gain in December motor vehicle orders, however, revised higher to 5.5% from an initial 3.6% increase.

Chart of New Orders for Durable Goods

 

The general pattern of the series — before adjustment for inflation — remains one of bottom-bouncing. Against an average monthly level of $165.6 billion since last December, the January 2010 level of $175.7 billion remains within the realm of normal month-to-month volatility, if considered in the context of the long-term aircraft sales.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn in the coming months) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

GAAP-Based Financial Statements of the U.S. Government (Fiscal-Year 2009). The Treasury’s GAAP financial statements are scheduled for release this afternoon, February 26th, around 4 p.m. New York time. The statements were delayed, without explanation, from the regularly scheduled release date of December 15, 2009 to mid-February, and then again due to weather disruptions. A Reporting Focus Commentary will follow after I have had a chance to assess the report. A table of what I expect in the summary reporting is available in the Hyperinflation Special Report.

Employment/Unemployment (February 2010). The February employment and unemployment estimates are scheduled for release on Friday, March 5th. Briefing.com reports consensus estimates of the unemployment rate rising to 9.8% in February from 9.7% in January, with payroll employment expected to lose 20,000 jobs for a second month. I would expect both a higher unemployment rate and deeper payroll decline than the consensus forecasts, given among other issues catch-up in bad seasonal factors and renewed slowing in the general economy. An updated outlook on the employment/unemployment report will be published next week as detail from related series becomes available.

 

__________

No. 280: January CPI, PPI, Housing Starts, Production

Friday, February 19th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 280
January CPI, PPI, Housing Starts, Production

February 19, 2010

__________

Annual Inflation 2.6% (CPI-U), 3.3% (CPI-W), 9.8% (SGS)

Quarterly Inflation Shifted from Fourth- to Second-Quarter 2009

Economy Keeps Bottom-Bouncing as
Intensified Contraction Nears

__________

 PLEASE NOTE: Due to the time consumed in reviewing the various CPI revisions, today, a special Commentary reviewing current conditions is planned for Tuesday, February 23rd. The next regular Commentary is scheduled for Friday, February 26th, following the release of the second estimate (first revision) of fourth-quarter GDP. The Treasury’s 2009 GAAP-based financial statements for the U.S. government also are scheduled for release on the 26th, and a special Commentary will follow, likely over the weekend.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

Discount Rate Increase. The Fed yesterday raised the discount rate it charges for lending to troubled banks by 25 basis points (0.25%), to 0.75%. The tightening certainly was intended as a signal of the Fed’s inherent "restraint" to markets that increasingly are balking at Treasury fundings, but the signal likely was mostly bluff and bluster. As will be discussed in Tuesday’s (February 23rd) Commentary, the Fed has virtually no room to tighten credit in a system where the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply is in severe annual contraction, and where general bank lending into the flow of commerce is not adequate to maintain economic growth.

Thank Goodness for Seasonal Factors. The January CPI report showed unusually large shifts in revised seasonal inflation patterns for 2009, with late-year inflation being redistributed to earlier months. Such could affect GDP reporting (upping more recent quarterly growth rates), and it resulted in more-than-the-normal upside blip in the real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales graph shown later. Those revisions make a strong case for concentrating on the unadjusted data, best viewed in terms of year-to-year change. Until recently, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) emphasized the unadjusted data, which never are revised, shy of an outright calculation error. Going forward, however, expenditure weightings in the CPI series now get revised every two years, as happened with the January reporting. Those revisions once took place every 10 years. The shift to greater frequency has been part of the movement to make the CPI a substitution-based measure, one that no longer reflects the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

 

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported this morning (February 19th) that the seasonally-adjusted January CPI-U rose by 0.17% (up by 0.34% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, after rising a revised seasonally-adjusted 0.17% gain, previously up by 0.13% (down by 0.18% unadjusted) in December. November’s previously reported seasonally-adjusted 0.40% monthly gain was revised to 0.23%.

In addition to recasting expenditure weightings for January 2010 forward, revisions to the CPI-U included an unusually sharp recasting of seasonal-adjustment patterns back through 2005, which threw significant fourth-quarter 2009 inflation back into the second-quarter. The historical not-seasonally-adjusted data were not affected. What had been annualized CPI-U inflation of 3.44% in fourth-quarter 2009 now stands at 2.62%, while second-quarter 2009 inflation of 1.33% now stands at 1.86%. The third-quarter 2009 (3.60% changed to 3.69%) and first-quarter 2009 (changed from -2.37% to -2.24%) revisions were minimal. These changes impact the patterns of recent real retail sales activity (see below), and while these changes could be used to increase reported growth in inflation-adjusted fourth-quarter GDP (weaker inflation means stronger inflation-adjusted growth), such revamping usually would be done in the upcoming July 2010 annual GDP revisions, not in the monthly revision due next week.

Seasonally-adjusted, the CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended January 2010 (January versus October) was 2.29%, against December’s 2.45% (revised from 3.28%). 

Unadjusted, January’s year-to-year inflation was 2.63% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) against a 2.72% annual increase in December.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in February 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.43% adjusted monthly gain seen in February 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for February 2010, the difference in February’s headline monthly change versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from January 2010’s annual inflation rate of 2.63%.

CPI-W.  Revised in tandem with the CPI-U, the narrower, seasonally-adjusted January CPI-W rose by 0.34% (up by 0.41% unadjusted), following an increase of 0.24% (revised from 0.16%, and down by 0.14% unadjusted) in December. Seasonally-adjusted, the annualized rate of CPI-W inflation for the three months ended January (January versus October) was 3.32%, versus a revised 3.00% (was 4.18%) for December. The seasonally-adjusted annualized quarter-to-quarter inflation was revised to 3.25% from 4.22% in the fourth-quarter versus a revised 4.05% (previously 4.55%) in the third.    

Year-to-year CPI-W inflation rose by 3.34% in January, following a 3.36% increase in December.

C-CPI-U.  The Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — underwent massive revisions, including series reweightings. The series, which is reported only on an unadjusted basis, now shows higher annual inflation than had been previously reported. Where recent C-CPI-U inflation now is higher than the CPI-U, in revision, and where the C-CPI-U purportedly should be showing weaker inflation, these mounting inconsistencies suggest reporting difficulties with the CPI series.

Year-to-year or annual inflation was 2.84% in January 2010, versus revised 2.98% annual growth (previously 2.76%) in December. In revision, the average C-CPI-U for 2009 versus 2008 moved to flat (down by 0.06%) from a preliminary contraction of 0.52%, compared with an upwardly revised 3.73% annual inflation rate (previously 3.37%) in 2008 versus 2007.

Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI eased to roughly 6.0% growth in January from to 6.1% in December, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to about 9.8% (9.76% for those using the extra digit) in January, versus 9.7% in December.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Gold and Silver Highs Adjusted for CPI-U/SGS Inflation. Even with the December 2, 2009 historic high gold price of $1,212.50 per troy ounce, the prior all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix, per Kitco.com) of January 21, 1980 has not been hit in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on inflation through January 2010, the 1980 gold price peak would be $2,367 per troy ounce, based on not-seasonally-adjusted-CPI-adjusted dollars, and would be $7,378 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars. 

In like manner, the all-time high price for silver in January 1980 of $49.45 per troy ounce (London afternoon fix, per silverinstitute.org) has not been hit since, including in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on inflation through January 2010, the 1980 silver price peak would be $138 per troy ounce, based on not-seasonally-adjusted-CPI-adjusted dollars, and would be $429 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate-CPI-adjusted dollars.

Real Money Supply M3. The signal of pending intensification of the economic downturn based on the annual contraction in the inflation-adjusted broad money supply (M3) was discussed in Commentary No. 277. The annual real contraction in January M3 (SGS-Ongoing) estimated for that Commentary was 5.2%. Based on today’s CPI-U report, the annual contraction was 5.3%. Further details will follow in the next Commentary.

Based on January 2010 CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly January retail sales rose by 0.3%, where the current number was up by 0.5% before inflation adjustment, and where real retail sales fell by 0.3% in December, against a 0.1% decline before inflation adjustment. January real retail sales rose by 2.0% year-to-year, versus a 4.7% gain before inflation adjustment. Real December sales were up 2.7% year-to-year, versus a 5.5% gain before inflation adjustment. As discussed in Commentary No. 279, there remain distortions in the monthly retail sales reporting that should "catch-up" in the next several months with weaker reporting.

For the last 14 months, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $160.7 billion (the deflated January number was $163.5). Smoothed for monthly volatility on a six-month moving-average basis, as shown in the accompanying graph, the pattern of activity here has shifted to bottom-bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales. The revamped seasonal patterns in CPI reporting have given the plot a late upside bounce, in conjunction with some serious late-year seasonal factor distortions. There remains no fundamental turnaround in economic activity — no recovery — evident here, just bottom-bouncing, as should be confirmed in the next several months’ reporting

Chart of Retails Sales

 

PPI Surges Anew. As reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) yesterday (February 18th), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted finished-goods producer price index (PPI) rose month-to-month by an unexpectedly sharp 1.4% (up 1.2% unadjusted) in January, following December’s revised 0.4% (up 1.7% unadjusted, previously a 0.2% adjusted) monthly gain. The seasonally-adjusted monthly data went through their annual revisions, shifting some of November’s previously reported inflation into December. Year-to-year, January’s annual PPI inflation rose to 4.6%, following December’s 4.4% annual gain. 

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted January intermediate goods rose by 1.7% (up by a revised 0.6%, previously 0.5%, in December), with crude goods jumping by 9.6% (up by a revised 0.8%, previously 1.0%, in December). Year-to-year inflation continued to rise, with January intermediate goods up by 4.6% (up by 3.0% in December) and January crude goods up by 25.2% (up by 12.3% in December).

Industrial Production Jumped with Auto Production. The Federal Reserve reported on February 17th that seasonally-adjusted January industrial production rose by 0.93% for the month, following a 0.66% (previously a 0.64%) gain in December. The year-to-year change as of January moved to a positive 0.94% from a revised 2.20% (previously 2.01%) contraction in December. The June 2009 reading of 95.75 remained the record low for annual production growth since the shutdown of war-time production that followed World War II. For the last 12 months, the production index has averaged 98.3, around which the series has been fluctuating, with January’s six-month moving average reading at 99.4, versus 101.1 for the single month.

A gain in automobile production was a major contributor to January’s industrial production surge, but auto sales contracted per January retail sales reporting. Strong production that is unresponsive to weak sales tends to lead to inventory build-up and subsequent inventory liquidation. A significant weakening in auto sales is likely in the next several months, as the economy enters its double- or multiple-dip downturn.

 Chart of Industrial Production

The "recovery" in production is shown in the above graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average. Production activity has leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that effectively has wiped out the last 10 years of growth in industrial production.  Despite the near-term upside bump generated by short-lived stimulus impact and unusual weather, the series generally still is bottom-bouncing and should soften significantly in the next several months.

January Housing Starts Continued Bottom-Bouncing. The Census Bureau reported on February 17th that January housing starts rose month-to-month by a statistically-insignificant 2.8% (up by 6.1% net of revisions) +/- 13.7% (95% confidence interval). December’s starts were revised so as to show a 0.7% decline, narrowed from an initial estimate of a 4.0% drop. Year-to-year change was up by 21.1% in January, following a revised annual gain of 3.4% (previously 0.2%) in December.   

Since December 2008, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing at an historically low level, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 556,300. In the past 14 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, including January’s reading of 591,000, which effectively was at the same levels seen in June (590,000) and July (593,000) of 2009.

 Chart of Housing Starts

The "recovery" in housing is shown in the above graph. The data are smoothed using a six-month moving average to remove the extreme month-to-month volatility seen in this series. Regardless of any level of smoothing, though, in the current cycle, housing starts remain at least 25% below any levels seen since the end of World War II. 

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn in the coming months) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

New Orders for Durable Goods (January 2010). The January durable goods orders, due for release on Thursday, February 25th, likely will continue bottom bouncing, with month-to-month change remaining within the range of normal, random volatility.     

Gross Domestic Product — GDP (Fourth-Quarter 2009, Second Estimate). Due for release on Friday, February 26th, the consensus forecast per Briefing.com for fourth-quarter 2009 GDP revised real quarterly growth is 5.6%, versus the initial 5.7% estimate. By itself, the December trade deficit — adjusted for inflation — was enough worse than Bureau of Economic Analysis initial assumptions to knock 1.1% off the quarterly GDP growth estimate. There likely will be other offsetting revisions, but the reporting risk is high of a more-negative aggregate revision than commonly is expected.

GAAP-Based Financial Statements of the U.S. Government (2009). The Treasury’s GAAP financial statements appear set for release on Friday, February 26th, with the Treasury now posting that release date on its Web site. The time of day has not been posted. The statements were delayed, without explanation, from the regularly scheduled release date of December 15, 2009 to mid February, and then again due to weather disruptions. A Reporting Focus Commentary will follow after I have had a chance to assess the report. A table of what I expect in the summary reporting is available in the Hyperinflation Special Report.

 

__________

No. 279: January Retail Sales

Friday, February 12th, 2010
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
COMMENTARY NUMBER 279
January Retail Sales
 
February 12, 2010
 
__________
 
January Retail Sales Gain Reflected Inflation and Seasonals
 
__________
 

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is scheduled for February 19th, following the release of the January CPI report. The government’s statistical release schedules, however, remain subject to weather disruptions. As we go to press, the Treasury’s 2009 GAAP-based financial statements for the U.S. government have been delayed until Friday, February 26th (from February 16th). That release date remains subject to further change.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Gasoline and Food Prices, and Seasonals, Helped Boost January Retail Sales. Rising gasoline and food prices — as suggested by increased gasoline station and grocery store revenues — accounted for 27% of the reported gain in monthly January retail sales, while increases in other prices likely accounted for a fair portion of the reported balance.  

What is not clear with the January retail numbers, yet, is the net impact from seasonal factors that have been heavily distorted by the longest and deepest economic contraction in the post-World War II era of modern economic reporting. Seasonal factors are estimated from trading patterns of recent years, with the heaviest emphasis on the trading patterns of the prior year. There is no question that the factors have distorted by the heavy downtrend a year ago in sales, and such raises significant issues as to the significance of the current, seasonally-adjusted monthly reporting. The seasonality issues should begin to work themselves out in the next several months of reporting. 

That said, before seasonal adjustment, the latest revisions to December and November retail sales were to the downside, yet after seasonal adjustment, the revisions were to the upside. Concurrent seasonal factor adjustments are being applied here as they are in other series such as the payroll series, where the seasonal factors get re-jiggered each month for the most recent reporting. Unadjusted, December 2009 retail sales revised from initial reporting of $409,231 billion to $408,991 billion, but seasonally-adjusted revised from $352,985 to $354,085 billion, a net positive swing of 0.4%. Unadjusted, November 2009 retail sales revised from initial reporting of $353,951 billion to $354,467 billion, but seasonally-adjusted revised from $352,985 to $354,085 billion, a net positive swing of 0.2%. While not large, these revised seasonally-adjusted data will add some upside pressure to the upcoming GDP revision — possibly some offset to the negative impact of the trade data discussed in Commentary No. 278 — instead of the downside pressure suggested by the unadjusted retail numbers.

Viewed differently, if consistent year-to-year changes (unadjusted year-to-year change in the latest reporting applied to the prior year’s seasonally-adjusted level) were used with both the unadjusted and the seasonally-adjustment numbers, January 2010 retail sales would have fallen by roughly 0.8% month-to-month, from $353.7 to $350.7 billion, instead of having gained 0.5%. Such an approach has limits to its meaningfulness, given comparative monthly variations in trading days (minimal for the months involved), which otherwise legitimately change the seasonal adjustment patterns.  

There also may be questions on sampling that parallel the surveying issues seen in the Bureau of Labor Statistics Birth Death Model, as discussed in Commentary No. 276, where companies that have gone out of business are assumed to be continuing. From an anecdotal standpoint, I know of at least five nearby retailers who have folded recently, including my barbershop and newsstand.

Given the signals for a softening economy generated by the year-to-year contraction in the real (inflation-adjusted) broad money supply, and by likely seasonal-factor distortions, the next couple of retail sales reports are at high risk of showing much weaker results.

Reported Nominal Retail Sales. Today’s (February 12th) January 2010 retail sales report — issued by the Census Bureau — indicated a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.48% (up 0.79% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a revised 0.11% (previously 0.27%) monthly decline in December. The monthly gain was in line with early consensus estimates. On a year-to-year basis, the January 2010 retail sales were reported up by 4.71% from January 2009, versus a revised 5.54% (previously 5.36%) year-to-year gain in December 2009.

Real Retail Sales. Removing the effects of inflation, January 2010 retail sales activity likely will show both monthly and annual gains. The pattern of ongoing, inflation-adjusted activity, however, remains one of bottom-bouncing/plateauing at extremely low levels. Details will be updated and graphed with the Commentary following the tentatively scheduled February 19th release of the January CPI.

Core Retail Sales.  A change in "core retail sales" methodology was introduced five months ago, where the net relative monthly increases and/or decreases in gasoline station and grocery store sales were subtracted from the full monthly retail sales number, instead of the total of gasoline station and grocery store revenues each month. Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, the revamped reported "core" change more closely reflects the actual retail sales experience. This remains a work in progress and eventually will be used in the development of additional SGS alternative economic measures.

For the near-term, the "core" retail sales is reported in two versions, where Version I uses the original methodology, and Version II version appears to provide a more balanced picture of the impact food and energy inflation in the standard retail sales reporting.

Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales:

Version I — January retail sales net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — rose by 0.4% versus the official aggregate gain of 0.5%.    

Version II — January retail sales net of the monthly change in revenues for grocery stores and gasoline stations — rose by 0.3% versus the official aggregate gain of 0.5%. 

Week Ahead. CAUTION: Due to the weather-related disruptions to federal government operations, scheduled economic release dates remain at some risk of being delayed.  Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn in the coming months) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Housing Starts (January 2010). The January housing starts, due for release on Wednesday, February 17th, likely will continue bottom bouncing, with a likely statistically-insignificant month-to-month change.     

Industrial Production (January 2010). Due for release on Wednesday, February 17th, reporting risk for January industrial production generally is to the downside of a strong 0.8% consensus per Briefing.com.

Producer Price Index (January 2010). The PPI is due for release on Thursday, February 18th. January inflation data usually takes a fair hit from seasonal adjustments, since a number of companies tend to time price changes for January 1st. Nonetheless, the surging price component of the purchasing managers manufacturers survey suggests positive movement in this otherwise somewhat randomly volatile series.  

Consumer Price Index (January 2010). The CPI is due for release on Friday, February 19th. As with the PPI, January CPI inflation data usually takes a fair hit from seasonal adjustments. The rising prices indicated from the monthly strength in gasoline and grocery sales in the retail sales numbers also suggest a positive reading for the seasonally-adjusted monthly CPI, with some upside reporting risk to a consensus forecast of 0.3% (Briefing.com).

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in January 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.28% adjusted monthly gain seen in January 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for January 2010, the difference in January’s headline monthly change versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from December 2009’s annual inflation rate of 2.72%. A consensus result would leave annual inflation near 2.7%

DELAYED — GAAP-Based Financial Statements of the U.S. Government (2009). The Treasury’s GAAP financial statements tentatively now are scheduled for release on Friday, February 26th. The statements were delayed, without explanation, from the regularly scheduled release date of December 15, 2009. A Reporting Focus Commentary will follow after I have had a chance to assess the report. A table of what I expect in the summary reporting is available in the Hyperinflation Special Report.

 __________

No. 278: Annual and December Trade Deficit

Wednesday, February 10th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 278
Annual and December Trade Deficit

February 10, 2010

__________

December Trade Deficit Should Knock 1.1 Percentages Points
Off 4th-Quarter GDP Growth

Storm-Delayed Economic Reports

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next Commentary will be coincident with the release of January retail sales report, originally scheduled for Thursday, February 11th, now delayed to Friday, February 12th, due to disruptions from extreme weather. With the federal government closed down for three-plus business days, additional or other delays in scheduled releases would not be surprising.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 

Trade Deficit Deterioration Pummels 4th-Quarter GDP Guesstimates. As noted in Commentary No. 277 and Commentary No. 274 U.S. trade deficit reporting for October and November indicated a deterioration in the seasonally- and inflation-adjusted fourth-quarter 2009 trade deficit against the third- quarter number. A deteriorating trade deficit is a net negative for GDP as reflected in the Net Exports category. Yet, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) assumed in its "advance" guesstimate of fourth-quarter GDP that the yet-to-be-reported December deficit would show an improvement, and generated 0.5 percentage points of the 5.7% annualized quarter-to-quarter real GDP growth in estimated for the fourth-quarter from that assumption. Today (February 10th), the BEA and Census Bureau reported the December deficit showed significant deterioration, with the effect — by itself — of wiping out roughly 1.1% of the gimmicked 5.7% GDP growth, suggesting a downward revision to a still incredible (as in unbelievable) 4.6% annualized real growth rate.

Inflation-adjusted monthly estimates on the goods trade balance are available in Exhibit 11 of the trade report. Working through the annualized quarterly changes versus the GDP estimates suggests a negative swing (greater deficit, weaker GDP) in real net exports of about $36 billion or about 1.1% in annualized real GDP. While the estimate does include the impact of the trade balance in services, that guesstimated category usually shows minimal volatility. There also will be other revisions to the GDP estimate.

For December 2009, the BEA and Census Bureau reported the nominal (not adjusted for inflation) seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit at $40.2 billion, up from an unrevised $36.4 billion deficit in November, but down from the $41.9 billion deficit of December 2008. The reported deficit shrank in 2009 by 45.3%, to an estimated $380.7 billion from $695.9 billion in 2008. The drop in the deficit was 20.1% after the effects of inflation were taken into account. The inflation impact largely reflected a sharp decline in the average price of oil. 

For the month of December, the not-seasonally-adjusted average price of imported oil was $73.20 per barrel versus $72.54 in November 2009 and against $49.87 in December 2008. For 2009, the average price of oil was $56.92, versus $95.22 in 2008. In terms of not-seasonally-adjusted physical oil imports, December 2009 volume averaged 8.938 million barrels per day, versus 8.182 million in November and 10.324 million in December 2008. For 2009, the average volume of oil imported was 9.074 million barrels per day, versus 9.810 million in 2008.

In terms of the three largest U.S. trade deficits with its trading partners, the deficits with China and Mexico (of NAFTA) had the smallest declines. The largest deficit remained with China (excluding transshipments through other countries), although it shrank by about 15% to $226.8 billion in 2009, versus $268.0 billion in 2008. 

The U.S. deficit with NAFTA shrank by 53% (down 74% versus Canada, down 27% versus Mexico), to $67.8 billion ($20.2 billion Canada, $47.5 billion Mexico) in 2009, from $143.1 billion ($78.3 billion Canada, $64.7 billion Mexico) in 2008. Much of the decline in the deficit related to NAFTA appears to have been due to systemic disruptions from the bankruptcies of General Motors and Chrysler.

The third largest annual U.S. trade deficit was with Japan, although it shrank by 40% to $44.8 billion in 2009, down from $74.1 trillion in 2008.

The narrower nominal deficit was due primarily to the impact of the severe economic contraction and lower average oil prices, not due to a sudden new competitiveness of U.S. industry.

Week Ahead. CAUTION: Due to the ongoing weather-related shutdown of the federal government, scheduled economic release dates are at fair risk of being delayed. The outlook for January CPI, PPI, Industrial Production and Housing Starts — all tentatively scheduled for the holiday shortened next week — will be covered in Friday’s Commentary. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn in the coming months) and more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions. 

Retail Sales (January 2010). Now due for release on Friday, February 12th, January’s monthly retail sales are expected to show a 0.5% gain, following a 0.3% contraction in December (per Briefing.com). Reporting risk is to the downside, and inflation-adjusted growth likely will be flat-to-minus on both a month-to-month and year-to-year basis.

GAAP-Based Financial Statements of the U.S. Government (2009). The Treasury’s GAAP financial statements tentatively are scheduled for release on Tuesday, February 16th. The statements were delayed, without explanation, from the regularly scheduled release date of December 15, 2009. A Reporting Focus Commentary will follow after I have had a chance to assess the report. A table of what I expect in the summary reporting is available in the Hyperinflation Special Report    

__________

No. 277: Liquidity Crisis Update, Money Supply

Monday, February 8th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 277
Liquidity Crisis Update, Money Supply

 February 8, 2010

__________

Plunge in Broad Liquidity Continues

Intensified Business Downturn Looms

Monetary Base Surges to Near-Record High

U.S. Economic and Financial Woes
Remain Worse Than Rest of World 

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Commentary is for Thursday, February 11th, following the release of January 2010 retail sales report.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Plunging Inflation-Adjusted Annual M3 Change Generates Intensified Signal of Renewed Economic Downturn. Commentary No. 268 of December 30, 2009 discussed the leading relationship between real (inflation-adjusted) year-to-year contractions in the broad money supply (M3 and the SGS-Ongoing M3) and the economy, and a signal for a double-dip downturn. In modern economic history, every time there has been such a year-to-year liquidity contraction, the economy subsequently has turned down, or if already in recession, the economic downturn has intensified. A signal for such an intensification of economic contraction was generated in November and December, and the signal got significantly stronger in January.

Real M3 vs Nonfarm Payrolls

The above graph of year-to-year change in real M3 versus year-to-year change in payroll employment, updates the one shown in Commentary No. 268 in several areas. First, the plot of M3 has been shifted six months into the future so as better to show the correlation between annual real M3 contractions and annual payroll-employment contractions. Accordingly, the point for January 2010 M3 growth is plotted over the timeline on the axis for July 2010. Second, the graph incorporates subsequent benchmark revisions to both the money supply and payroll data. Third, it includes January estimates, (January 2010 real M3 fell an estimated 5.2% versus January 2009, following an annual contraction of 3.3% in December 2009 and 0.3% in November. The January 2010 number is based on a conservative estimate of annual 2.6% CPI-U inflation in January.

Not-So-Happy Implications. This particular signal on looming economic activity rarely is seen, but once it is generated, it is solid. The weaker economy ahead will be particularly disruptive to a system that assumes positive economic growth will be seen in all of 2010.

Consider that the Administration’s latest budget deficit projections are based on an assumed 3.0% year-to-year (fourth quarter) and a 2.7% annual-average real GDP growth rate in 2010. Reality should be a 2010 GDP contraction, and there is nothing in play to support significant if any GDP expansion in 2011. Not only will federal and state tax revenues fall well short of expectations, but also increased support for failing economic and financial infrastructure and likely financial bailouts for some states will balloon the federal deficit — and corresponding Treasury funding needs — well beyond consensus estimates and credit market tolerance.

Consider too that projections of recovery and stability within the U.S. banking system are dependent on positive economic growth in the year ahead.  

Global Implications. The economic and systemic-solvency problems in the United States remain severe in scope and depth. The U.S. difficulties also are much worse than those of its main trading partners, and the eventual recognition of same should have negative impact on the U.S. dollar’s exchange rate versus most major currencies. A significant break in the dollar also should begin to disrupt the abnormal relationship seen currently between the various financial markets in the United States, where a weak dollar is countered by strong stock prices and vice versa. A weak U.S. economy and faltering fiscal conditions should result in U.S. dollar weakness, which in turn should be reflected in tightening domestic liquidity, higher interest rates and a lower equity prices. In such a circumstance, the dollar’s intensified weakness also should be reflected in mounting inflation pressures and much higher gold and silver prices.

The timing on this is open, but I would be surprised if the recognition of the onset of a largely unexpected new major dip in a double- or multiple-dip economic downturn does not roil the markets significantly in the year ahead. The renewed economic weakness should become increasingly evident in the next couple of months. More will follow.

Money Supply Contraction Intensifies. Based on more than three weeks of data reported for January, the preliminary estimate of seasonally-adjusted year-to-year change in the January 2010 SGS-Ongoing M3 is a nominal contraction of 2.6%, following a 0.6% annual contraction in December. Month-to-month change was roughly a 0.9% contraction in January, following a 0.4% decline in December.

Year-to-year change in M2 is estimated at a 1.9% gain in January — a contraction after inflation adjustment — following a 3.4% annual gain in December. Month-to-month, January M2 dropped about 0.8%, following a 0.2% gain in December. Year-to-year change in M1 is estimated at a 6.3% gain in January, a notch higher than the 6.2% annual reported gain for December. Month-to-month, January M1 fell by roughly 1.2%, following a 0.4% gain in December.

Monetary Base Resurgent. The Fed again is pushing the monetary base higher. With slowing growth in M2 (the broadest money measure published by the Fed) and continued credit contraction, the Fed has to know that conditions are not healthy or appropriate for economic expansion. These conditions also are suggestive of ongoing difficulties in the U.S. banking system. Continuing to act as though such were the case, the Fed pushed the St. Louis Fed’s Adjusted Monetary Base measure to $2.059 trillion in the two weeks ended January 27th — its second highest level ever — 1.0% shy of the December 2, 2009 period peak and up at an annualized 56.1% rate of growth since the near-term trough in the August 12, 2009 period.   

 Adjusted Monetary Base

The monetary base is currency in circulation plus bank reserves. At present, banks are leaving extreme levels of excess reserves on deposit with the Fed, instead of lending those funds into the normal stream of commerce.

Week Ahead. The following text is not changed from the prior Commentary No. 276 except for an updated consensus estimate on retail sales. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn in the coming months) and a more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions. 

Trade Balance, Goods and Services (December 2009)The December trade deficit is due for release on Wednesday, February 10th. Briefing.com shows a consensus estimate for some narrowing of the monthly deficit, and such would be necessary to prevent a downside revision to the initial estimate of 5.7% annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth in fourth-quarter GDP. My betting is for some further deterioration in the deficit, which would knock a little growth off the estimated GDP, due for revision at the end of this month. The reported fourth-quarter "improvement" in trade guesstimated by the Bureau of Economic Analysis added 0.5 percentage points to the quarterly GDP growth rate.

Retail Sales (January 2010). Due for release on Thursday, February 11th, January’s monthly retail sales are expected to show a 0.5% (up from 0.4% last week) monthly gain, following a 0.3% contraction in December (per Briefing.com). Reporting risk is to the downside, and inflation-adjusted growth likely will be flat-to-minus on both a month-to-month and year-to-year basis.

Heads Up: 2009 GAAP-Based Financial Statements of the U.S. Government. The Treasury’s Financial Management Service advises that the GAAP statements are scheduled for release on Tuesday, February 16th. The statements were delayed, without explanation, from the regularly scheduled release date of December 15, 2009. A Reporting Focus Commentary will follow after I have had a chance to assess the report.   

 __________

No. 276: Reporting Focus: January Employment and Benchmark Revision

Friday, February 5th, 2010

 

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 276
Reporting Focus: January Employment and Benchmark Revision

February 5, 2010

__________

1.36 Million Jobs Knocked off December Payrolls
Depression’s Job Loss Increased by 19%

January Unemployment: 16.5% (U-6), 21.2% (SGS)

Serious Jobs and Unemployment Deterioration
In Months Ahead

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Commentary is for Thursday, February 11th, following the release of January 2010 retail sales report, although there will be at least one interim Commentary, updating M3 (likely on Monday, February 8th).

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Mixed January Employment and Unemployment Signals. The Bureau of Labor Statistics’ (BLS) payroll benchmark revision showed a 19% greater jobs loss for this downturn than previously reported, along with an unexpected, albeit small, decline in January 2009 payrolls. At the same time, the BLS reported that the headline U.3 unemployment rate declined by 0.3% to 9.7% in January, an unexpectedly strong positive result.

The "improved" unemployment rate likely was helped by seasonal-adjustment distortions, which can be meaningful at this time of year. Holiday Season layoffs can be difficult to assess, even in normal economic times, and the severity of the current business downturn has skewed seasonals in other data. The unadjusted U.3 rose from 9.7% in December to 10.6% in January, but the seasonally-adjusted rate fell from 10.0% to 9.7%, a positive swing in change of 1.2 percentage points due to seasonals. In a more normal period, such as December 2005/January 2006, unadjusted U.3 rose from 4.6% to 5.1%, with the adjusted rate falling from 4.9% to 4.7%, a positive swing of 0.7 percentage points. How much the difference in results reflects distortions from the higher unemployment rate and severe contraction that mark the current period is hard to tell. To the extent there are seasonal distortions at work, such will become obvious in the months ahead, as mis-adjustments to the unemployment rate balance out over time.

In any event, the signal from the annual contraction in inflation-adjusted M3 for renewed downturn is intensifying, as will be discussed in the next Commentary. Accordingly employment and unemployment are highly likely to show significant deterioration in the months ahead, irrespective of any relative strength or minimal weakness seen in current reporting.

Payroll Employment Benchmark Revision. The benchmark revision lowered the previously-reported seasonally-adjusted payroll employment level in December 2009 by 1.363 million (1.390 million unadjusted), roughly 1.1%, and the lowered unadjusted payrolls in the benchmark month of March 2009 by 902,000, versus an initial BLS downside estimate of 824,000. The heaviest downside revision was concentrated in the August to November 2008 months, with an average monthly downward revision to the month-to-month change of about 150,000 jobs. Even so, downside revisions to the month-to-month changes in 2009 (all but November were in negative territory) averaged 50,000.

Related downside revisions to historical GDP will not be published until July 2010.

The accompanying graphs reflect the revised data (the first two show changes from the current as well as the prior benchmark revisions), both in terms of level and year-to-year percent change, as well as the revised month-to-month and net changes in the month-to-month reporting over the last two years.

Nonfarm Payrolls

Nonfarm Payrolls

Nonfarm Payrolls

Nonfarm Payrolls

Nonetheless, the BLS continues to overstate the payroll employment level and to understate the month-to-month declines in the seasonally-adjusted payroll levels, much as it did following the prior benchmark revision (see the first graph). As discussed in the Birth-Death Model section below, although the upside monthly bias has been reduced, it should be negative. I estimate that after these revisions the BLS still is underestimating monthly jobs loss by about 150,000. More will follow.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 20,000 (down by 1,383,000 net of benchmark revision) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for January 2010, following a revised 150,000 (previously an 85,000) jobs loss in December. Details of the benchmark revision are discussed above.

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; the current month of January 2010 is the short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment has declined by a seasonally-adjusted 8,424,000 jobs, or 6.1%. That had been a decline of 7,242,000 jobs, or by 5.2%, in pre-benchmark December reporting. While the benchmark did not go as far as it likely should have, what is in place now will not go through major revision again until this time next year.

As the pace of reported monthly decline continued to slow against year-ago comparisons, year-to-year contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls narrowed to 3.0% in January from a revised 3.6% (previously 3.0%) decline in December, and from a post-World War II record 5.0% decline in July. The July 2009 decline was the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown at the end of World War II, which reflected a trough of a 7.6% contraction in September 1945. Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the current annual decline would be the worst since the Great Depression.    

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias (CSFB).  The pattern of impossible biases built into the headline monthly payroll employment of recent years may have ended with the benchmark revision, after mixed results in the last six to seven months. The January 2010 distortion was minimal. Instead of the headline jobs loss of 20,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what I call the concurrent seasonal factor bias (CSFB) — would have shown a monthly jobs gain of 8,000, which is nothing but minimal statistical noise.

The biggest distortions shown by the CSFB were in the November 2008 to February 2009 timeframe, the period in which the BLS initially indicated its biggest problem for the now just-published benchmark revision. The BLS, however, shifted the most hefty downside revisions to the August to November 2008 period. A worksheet on this is available upon request. (See SGS Newsletter No. 50, for further background.)

Nonfarm Payrolls

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  As discussed in previous writings, the Birth-Death Model biases tend to overstate payroll employment during recessions. The flaws here initially were confirmed when the BLS first announced the massive 2009 benchmark revision, with the BLS indicating that the underlying assumptions to the Birth-Death Model were missing certain jobs losses.

Nonetheless, the Birth-Death Model survives, albeit scaled down minimally. The unsupportable premise that jobs created by start-up companies in this downturn have more than offset jobs lost by companies going out of business, continues. So, if a company fails to report its payrolls because it has gone out of business, the BLS assumes it still has its previously-reported employees and adjusts those numbers for the trend in the company’s industry.

The "surplus" jobs created by start-up firms, which get added on to the payroll estimates each month as a special add-factor, have been revised lower. Prior to the benchmark revision, the Birth-Death Model appears to have been adding an average of about 72,000 extra jobs per month (roughly 861,000 per year), but that appears to have been revised now to an average of about 42,000 per month (roughly 509,000 per year). This monthly bias should be negative, on average. Since it is not, the BLS continues to overestimate monthly growth in payroll employment.

That said, the unadjusted January 2010 bias was a monthly subtraction 427,000 (January is the one month of big subtraction) versus a pre-benchmark 356,000 subtraction the year before, and a revised 25,000 (pre-benchmark 59,000) addition for December 2009.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders) was restated in January for new population estimates. Given the series change, the BLS estimates a consistent January-over-December Change in employment of a 784,000 gain, versus the 589,000 monthly employment decline reported in December before the annual population adjustments.

Also due to the new population controls, the January 2010 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment of 9.69% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval) was not strictly comparable to the 9.97% unemployment rate reported in December. Yet, given the BLS estimates of impact from the controls, a reported decline of roughly 0.3% would be statistically meaningful. Unadjusted U.3 was reported at 10.6% in January, up from 9.7% in December.

The broader January U.6 unemployment rate fell to an adjusted 16.5% (rose to 18.0% unadjusted), from 17.3% (17.1% unadjusted) in December.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers. The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed, unemployment — more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — dropped to about 21.2% in January from 21.9% in December. While there likely were some seasonal aberrations in the January reporting, the SGS measure is based on the reported U.6 measure and usually varies with it. See the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com for a graph and more detail.

While 21.2% unemployment might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession. The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms. Today, less that 2% work on farms. Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy (and likely re-intensifying downturn in the coming months) and a more serious inflation problems than generally are expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions. 

Trade Balance, Goods and Services (December 2009)The December trade deficit is due for release on Wednesday, February 10th. Briefing.com shows a consensus estimate for some narrowing of the monthly deficit, and such would be necessary to prevent a downside revision to the initial estimate of 5.7% annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth in fourth-quarter GDP. My betting is for some further deterioration in the deficit, which would knock some growth off the estimated GDP, due for revision at the end of this month. The reported fourth-quarter "improvement" in trade guesstimated by the Bureau of Economic Analysis added 0.5 percentage points to the quarterly GDP growth rate.

Retail Sales (January 2010). Due for release on Thursday, February 11th, January’s monthly retail sales are expected to show a 0.4% monthly gain, following a 0.3% contraction in December (per Briefing.com). Reporting risk is to the downside, and inflation-adjusted growth likely will be flat-to-minus on both a month-to-month and year-to-year basis.

Heads Up: 2009 GAAP-Based Financial Statements of the U.S. Government. The Treasury’s Financial Management Service advises that the GAAP statements are scheduled for release on Tuesday, February 16th. The statements were delayed, without explanation, from the regularly scheduled release date of December 15, 2009. A Reporting Focus Commentary will follow after I have had a chance to assess the report.    

__________

No. 275: Employment Outlook Update, New Site Feature

Wednesday, February 3rd, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 275
Employment Outlook Update, New Site Feature

February 3, 2010

__________

Revisions Allow for Unusual January Jobs Reporting

Meaningful Payroll and Unemployment Deterioration Ahead

New Site Feature: Content-Index Navigation Tool

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Commentary is for Friday, February 5th, following the release of January 2010 employment and unemployment. It will include detail of the benchmark revision to payroll employment.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Payroll Employment and Unemployment Rate (January 2010). This brief Commentary is the promised update to the outlook for the January employment and unemployment data, due for release by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) on Friday, February 5th. Briefing.com shows consensus expectations of roughly a 13,000 jobs gain (down from a 50,000 jobs gain expected a week ago), following an 85,000 jobs loss in December, with the unemployment rate holding at 10.0%. Generally, I still look for weaker-than-expected numbers, with a rising unemployment rate and a negative payroll change, although revisions pending to both series in Friday’s release allow for unusual variability and volatility in the headline numbers. 

As to seasonally-adjusted monthly payroll-employment change, keep in mind that the 95% confidence interval for the headline jobs change is +/- 129,000, so anything between a jobs loss of 116,000 and a gain of 142,000 statistically would be consistent with the consensus outlook. Suggestive of unusual activity in the reporting system, however, the headline jobs-change number usually comes in amazingly close to consensus.

Key to the payrolls in Friday’s report is the annual benchmark revision, which has been promised as a big negative for early 2009 reporting. Usually those changes to total payroll employment would be carried forward and enlarged in current reporting. Something close to a 2 million downside revision in currently estimated payrolls would not be unusual, with the last reported monthly change (an 85,000 jobs loss in December) pretty much holding in revision. Anything is possible, however, in this volatile political environment.  The reporting errors discussed by the BLS earlier in 2009 suggest a major overhaul or scrapping of the Birth-Death Model would be appropriate, but such does not appear to be in the works.

The unemployment rate went through its annual seasonal-adjustment revisions last month, and new population estimates will be introduced in Friday’s report and used for the January 2010 unemployment rate estimate. As a result of the population changes, the January 2010 unemployment rate will not be consistent or directly comparable with the reported December unemployment rate of 10.0%. Nonetheless, the January unemployment rate likely will be somewhat higher than December’s number. 

Irrespective of January’s reporting, as the economy turns increasingly to a new downside in the months ahead, monthly payroll changes can be expected to show a pattern of deepening contraction, and the unemployment rate can be expected to rise sharply.

Seasonals Again Bloat Monthly Gains in Purchasing Managers Survey. The seasonally-adjusted January 2010 ISM purchasing managers manufacturing survey surged in Monday’s (February 1st) reporting, with the seasonally-adjusted diffusion index (50.0 and above is positive) rising to 58.4 from a revised 54.9 (was 55.9) in December. Much of January’s reported gain relative to December was due to the annual revision of seasonal factors provided by the Commerce Department, which shifted some relative economic strength from late in the year to earlier in the year. For example, what had been a reading of 52.0 for December’s employment index revised to 50.2 with the new seasonal factors, making the December to January gain look much stronger than it would have been otherwise. Nonetheless, the January index did show a stronger manufacturing sector than did the December survey.

This morning’s (February 3rd) nonmanufacturing survey showed the January index rising to 50.5 from 49.8 in December, but December had been 50.1 before the new seasonal factors. The nonmanufacturing employment index rose to 44.6 (still in contraction territory) from a revised 43.6 (previously 44.0).

Of some significance in both the manufacturing and nonmanufacturing sectors were rising price indices and related comments suggesting mounting inflationary pressures in most areas except foods. In the manufacturing sector, where the price index is not seasonally adjusted and not revised, the index rose to 70.0 from 61.5.

Other Employment Indicators. Beyond the ISM’s January employment indices, which tend to be leading to the government’s February, not January data, reporting was mixed.

While the seasonally-adjusted December help-wanted advertising continued to bottom-bounce one point above its historic low, the Conference Board’s help-wanted advertising (online) exploded in January versus December. At work in the online index likely is severe seasonal-factor distortion, where the seasonals are based on a very limited history that has not seen much in the way of positive economic growth. While these data are seasonally adjusted, the unadjusted data are not available. Accordingly the impact of seasonal distortion cannot be quantified, but it likely was a major contributing factor. The online index’s limited history also make it difficult to assess what portion of any reported growth might be attributed to the growing use of the Internet media.

As to seasonally-adjusted weekly new claims for unemployment, the pace of reported decline has slowed or reversed recently (declining claims is an economic positive), but the series remains heavily distorted by warped seasonal factors, as discussed last month (see Commentary No. 269).

While upcoming economic reports may be unusually volatile, the trend towards renewed economic downturn should begin to surface in reporting of January and February data as they become available this month and next.

New Site Feature: Content Index Designed to Improve Navigation around ShadowStats.com. We are pleased to present a new "Content Index" feature on the ShadowStats.com website. You can find this via the new "Content Index" link towards the left on the main navigation bar at the top of the Web pages (where "Latest & Archives" tab used to be).

The new index encompasses four pages:

- Commentaries by Date. This is similar to the old "Latest & Archives" page in that it lists, by publication date, summaries of and links to all current and past Commentaries. The Commentaries, however, now are sectioned and searchable by calendar month, stretching back over five years.

- Topics & Data Releases. This is an entirely new feature which allows you to find those sections within Commentaries which address specific topics.  So, for example, should you wish to find analysis of the latest Employment report, go to the "Topics & Data Releases" page, and you will find that the fifth row, "Employment" offers both a link to the latest analysis and a drop-down menu giving links to previous analyses.

This "cross-indexing" of the Commentaries’ analyses should be of benefit in finding particular areas of interest and in referring back to prior analyses.

Please note also that the top row, "The Week Ahead" is a handy means of quickly referencing what is previewed for the coming few days’ data releases.

- Primers & Reports. This page simply combines, in one place, sets of links to all Primers, Special Reports and Reporting/Market Focus Reports.

- Search Text. There is no change to the existing Search page except for its integration with the three pages above as part of the expanded features in "Content Index."

We hope that you will find this useful and, of course, welcome and invite your comments and suggestions on the Site.

 __________

No. 274: State of the Real World, Fourth-Quarter GDP

Friday, January 29th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 274
State of the Real World, Fourth-Quarter GDP

January 29, 2010

__________

4th-Quarter GDP "Boom" Sets Stage for Double-Dip

2009 Downturn Worst Since Great Depression

Watch-Out for 2010 Federal Deficit!

Durable Goods Orders Keep Bottom-Bouncing

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Commentary is for Friday, February 5th, following the release of January 2010 employment and unemployment. An intervening Commentary will update the outlook for the jobs report. Detail on the still-pending newsletter, reviewing 2009 and previewing 2010, and planned updates to same, are covered in the continuing note at the end of this Commentary

 

The State of the Real World: No Economic Boom in the United States; No Happy Deficit Outlook. As discussed in recent writings, the U.S. economy is headed into an intensified downturn/double-dip depression (see Commentary No. 268), with significant risk this year for a massive sell-off in the U.S. dollar and the onset/early stages of a hyperinflation (see Hyperinflation, Commentary No. 263). Some major themes for the year ahead, which will be discussed in the pending newsletter (see Note at end of this Commentary), include:

- Double-Dip/Intensified Depression. The annual downturn in inflation-adjusted M3 appears to have continued and deepened in January, showing an intensified signal for imminent economic downturn. Popularly followed series such as employment/unemployment, retail sales, housing, etc. should show intensified deterioration within the next couple months. President Obama’s recent proposals to stimulate the economy will have limited impact.

- Federal Deficit Set to Explode.  The Congressional Budget Office estimates 2010 federal deficit at $1.35 trillion, virtually unchanged from 2009. Such assumes 2% GDP growth in 2010, which is not going to happen. President Obama’s recent deficit limiting proposals will have minimal impact. Intensifying economic contraction not only blows apart federal-deficit estimates, but it does the same to the fiscal planning for most states, projected banking system stability, etc.

- Fed Increasingly Likely to Monetize Debt. The political/fiscal problems from intensifying economic contraction and worse-than-projected borrowing needs for the U.S. Treasury likely will trigger increasing flight from the U.S. dollar. At such time as that moves to a panicked level, and U.S. Treasuries increasingly are dumped or otherwise shunned, the Fed will have little choice but to monetize the Treasury debt, becoming the buyer of last resort for Treasuries. Those circumstances should lead to mounting inflation woes and flight-to-safety outside the U.S. dollar, particularly to hard assets such as gold and silver, and to currencies such as the Canadian dollar, the Australian dollar and the Swiss franc.

Fourth-Quarter GDP Likely Will Mark Interim Peak in Double-Dip. Despite this morning’s reported "advance" estimate of 5.7% annualized real (inflation-adjusted) fourth-quarter 2009 GDP growth, the U.S. economy is not booming, although growth near 6% normally would be classified as such, versus 3.2% average GDP growth seen over the last 30 years. To the extent the fourth-quarter’s reported surge in economic activity holds up to future revisions, it most likely will serve as the delineating point in a double-dip depression. When consumption is weak, relative inventory gains, as seen today, often reverse in subsequent quarters, exacerbating the pace of economic decline.

Although it is the broadest economic measure of the U.S. economy published by the government, the GDP also is the worst quality and the most heavily politicized economic release, at least in its early estimates. An "advance" or initial estimate, as seen in today’s reporting, is practically worthless, since most of information is guessed at, and the resulting quarterly growth rate then is annualized for release of the happy headline number to the public and to the popular media.

Consider that the seasonally- and inflation-adjusted balance of trade deficit in October and November (December has not been published), worsened relative to the third quarter. A deteriorating deficit is a net negative for GDP, yet the net export account — based on guesstimates — reportedly accounted for 0.5 percentage points of the 5.7% GDP gain. Worth 3.6 percentage points, and by far the biggest contributor to the reported 5.7% growth rate, was a largely guesstimated improvement in nonfarm inventories, where reporting generally is of short-term poor quality. Personal consumption expenditures — heavily boosted by warped seasonal factors — accounted for 1.4 percentage points of the 5.7% (see Commentaries No. 269, 271). The booming numbers, however, have to be good news for the politically distraught Administration and incumbent members of Congress.

Modern Economic Reporting Was Never Designed to Handle a Massive Economic/Systemic Failure. Current reporting issues are exacerbated further, at the moment, by severe distortions to the reporting system itself from the effects of the extreme economic downturn. Those problems include lack of data due to companies going out of business, a downturn so protracted that seasonal factors that have started to reflect economic contraction as a normal seasonal variation, and government statistical agencies that appear to be oblivious to the estimation problems. Include unusual features, such as one-in-three home sales being a foreclosure, the federal government taking effective control of some major auto makers, banks and the largest insurance company, and the chances that the traditional economic models will yield an accurate picture of current economic activity are nil.

The downturn has been the longest and deepest of the post-World War II era, which also is the period in which most modern economic reporting was designed and introduced. Where the post-war environment generally has been one of growth, most reporting has been structured based on an underlying and politically-friendly assumption of ongoing economic growth, not on a deep, protracted contraction. 

This bias is evident, for example, in the Bureau of Labor Statistics’ birth-death model which adds a regular upside biases into the monthly payroll data. To prevent the underreporting of monthly jobs growth, an upside bias factor was added into the monthly numbers starting back in the 1980s. That evolved into the birth-death model, which assumes first that any payrolls not reported by companies because they have gone out of business are more than offset by jobs created by start-up companies. Second, the excess jobs creation from start-ups is estimated from five years of earlier data, which usually encompasses periods of regular economic growth. This system fell apart in 2008/2009, and, as a result, the BLS will publish next week a downward revision to May 2009’s previously reported payroll level of about 824,000 (BLS estimate). 

Historical Perspective: Worst Year of Post-World War II Era. While the joyous news out of Washington today pushed year-to-year change in fourth-quarter GDP into likely short-lived and marginally-positive territory, the annual declines reported in both real (inflation-adjusted) and nominal (not adjusted for inflation) numbers for full-year 2009 are without post-World War II precedent, as shown in the following graphs.

 

Real Quarterly Gross Domestic Product

Real Annual Gross Domestic Product

Nominal Annual Gross Domestic Product

For 2009, real GDP fell by 2.43%, following a 0.44% gain 2008. The 2009 real decline was the deepest since the war-end production shutdown in 1946, which showed a 10.94% annual contraction. In nominal terms — the way companies usually track their sales and people count their income — 2009’s 1.27% annual decline was the worst since a 6.31% decline in 1938, during the second dip of the Great Depression. Nominal GDP rose by 2.58% for the year in 2008.

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 


GDP.  The "advance" estimate of fourth-quarter 2009 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) released this morning (January 29th) by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) showed a statistically-significant annualized real growth rate of 5.73% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a 2.24% gain reported for third-quarter GDP.  The year-to-year change in real fourth-quarter GDP turned positive, up by 0.10%, following a 2.64% contraction in the third-quarter.

The annualized fourth-quarter GDP inflation measure (implicit price deflator) was 0.71% versus 0.56% in the third-quarter.  In contrast, reported 3.44% annualized fourth-quarter CPI-U inflation was down from an annualized positive inflation rate of 3.60% in the third-quarter. Generally, the weaker the inflation rate used in deflating the GDP, the stronger is the resulting "real" GDP growth.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for fourth-quarter 2009 is for an annual contraction of 4.6% versus the official estimate of a 0.1% gain, less negative than the annual 5.7% (2.2% official) estimated contraction in the third-quarter. While annualized real quarterly growth is not formally estimated on an alternative basis, a flat quarter-to-quarter circumstance, plus or minus, likely was realistic, reflecting the bottom-bouncing at low levels of activity seen for much of the last year in key underlying economic series. Given the fourth-quarter distortions discussed earlier, renewed quarter-to-quarter contraction in the GDP as of first-quarter 2010 is a strong bet.

GNP and GDI. The initial estimated of Gross National Product and Gross Domestic Income for the fourth quarter likely will not be published until the third-estimate of fourth-quarter GDP at the end of March 2010. Since this reporting closes out the year, and since the early estimates are without substance, the BEA tends to hold off as long as possible with these other year-end estimates.

New Orders for Durable Goods Still Bottom Bouncing. The Census Bureau indicated it had found a "processing" error in the November report on durable goods that had understated November’s monthly contraction and now is publishing revised data. Although the net effect of all the revisions was to up current reporting (November was relatively weaker than previously reported), the general pattern of the series — before adjustment for inflation — remains one of bottom-bouncing. Against an average monthly level of $164.8 billion since last December, the December 2009 level of $167.9 billion remains within the realm of normal month-to-month volatility. With December’s level lower than September’s, the six month-moving-average plot in the graph should dip with next month’s reporting.

 New Orders for Durable Goods

For the regularly volatile, seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods series, orders rose by 0.3% for the month, following a revamped 0.4% contraction in November. Year-to-year, December orders fell by 3.1%, following a 6.9% annual contraction in November. Orders declined by 20.2% for the full year.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders fell by 0.2% in December, after a 3.0% decline in November. Year-to-year orders fell by 2.5%, and were down by 24.2% for the full year.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions. 

Payroll Employment and Unemployment Rate (January 2010)The January employment and unemployment data are is due for release on Friday, February 5th. Briefing.com shows consensus expectations of roughly a 50,000 jobs gain, following an 85,000 loss in December, with the unemployment rate holding at 10.0%. Generally I would look for weaker-than-expected numbers, with a rising unemployment rate and a negative payroll change.

Key to the payrolls is the annual benchmark revision, which has been promised as a big negative for early 2009 reporting. Usually those changes would be carried forward and enlarged in current reporting, but anything is possible in the volatile political environment.  A quick update on the employment report outlook will be put out by the middle of next week, as more data become available from underlying series.

 __________

 

(…continued) NOTE ON NEWSLETTER AND PLANNED CHANGES: My apologies for the publication delay on the pending full newsletter, as well as for my delay in answering a large number of e-mails and queries. I have been severely under the weather with an unusually debilitating cough/cold since early December. I think have beaten it, but I still am operating well shy of normal energy levels. In indicating timing of the full newsletter, I overestimated where I was in recovery as the symptoms receded. I am a one-man operation in terms of the writing. As a result, the newsletter will not be published before next week. The bullet-point summary in the above Commentary text covers some of the key elements I see affecting 2010.

All the key points in my current analysis, however, have been discussed in recent Commentaries, which I always keep updated with my latest thinking and regular research.

As will be discussed further in the upcoming newsletter, long-promised new formatting and scheduling will be introduced in the months ahead for the newsletter. Separate Economic Overview and Market Perspective Commentaries will be published monthly. Further, a separate aggregation and summary of all the most recent economic reporting and expanded graphics will be available to subscribers, continuously updated. While I am a lone writer, I am fortunate to have extremely good technical support, which will enable the expanded availability of material with quasi-automation of some of the involved reporting processes.

I thank you in advance for your forbearance and always am happy to discuss with subscribers any issues desired, at the phone number indicated in the covering e-mail notifying you of the posting of this Commentary, or by e-mail at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com. As always your comments and suggestions are welcome.

Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

__________

No. 273: December PPI, Housing Starts, GDP Outlook

Wednesday, January 20th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 273
December PPI, Housing Starts, GDP Outlook

January 20, 2010

__________

Annual PPI Inflation Hits 4.4%

Housing Starts Keep Bottom-Bouncing

Strong 4th Quarter GDP Report
Would Set Base for Double-Dip Downturn

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Commentary is for Friday, January 29th, following the "advance" estimate of fourth-quarter 2009 GDP. Such will be independent of the pending newsletter reviewing 2009 and previewing 2010, which is in the works but has slid back in timing now for likely publication over the January 23rd weekend.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 


A Strong Fourth-Quarter GDP Report Looms, Setting Base for Double-Dip. Briefing.com shows a 4.2% consensus estimate for next Friday’s (January 29th) "advance" estimate of annualized, real (inflation-adjusted) fourth-quarter 2009 GDP, with some forecasts ranging up to 6%. Such is up from 2.2% in the latest reporting for third-quarter GDP and sharply against my early expectations of a renewed contraction, although renewed contraction still looms for the official GDP series. The consensus estimate usually sets the tone for the initial estimate of reported quarterly GDP growth, so the report likely will be strong, although I would look for something weaker than consensus in actual reporting. Going against a 5.4% annualized drop in fourth-quarter 2008, some seasonal factors — as seen in fourth-quarter retail sales reporting — likely will be skewing adjusted growth to upside, offsetting negative economic patterns instead of regular seasonality patterns.

A number of series have bottomed out, showing activity bouncing along a low-level plateau of activity, as just seen in the December housing starts, discussed below. Shy of bad seasonals, real retail sales would not be showing any quarterly gain, mirroring fully instead the housing starts pattern. Industrial production was up for the quarter, but without offsetting demand, that means unwanted inventories are building up. With two months of the fourth-quarter trade deficit in hand, that factor should be a small negative for the GDP. Employment still is in contraction and subject to massive downside benchmark revision, but the implications there for GDP likely will not be seen until the annual GDP revision in July.

Irrespective of whatever growth is reported initially for fourth-quarter GDP, the U.S. economy is not booming, and the fourth-quarter GDP likely will be the base against which a second- or double-dip downturn will be measured (see Commentary No. 268 of December 30th).  GDP, as with key underlying series, should be showing some bottom-bouncing at present — flat for both the third- and fourth-quarter 2009 — and it is poised for a renewed downturn. 

Average real annualized quarterly GDP growth over the last 30 years has been 3.2%, which is considered a normal and healthy level. Consensus growth of 4.2% would be considered strong, and forecasts being touted near 6% for the quarter would be considered an economic boom. Even with bad seasonal factors boosting fourth-quarter retail sales, such growth is not in place. The only factor that conceivably could support such growth rates would be an extraordinary involuntary buildup in inventories, meaning that stronger production has not been matched by stronger consumption, but even so, production has not been that strong. A sharp inventory buildup, however, would be consistent with renewed economic downturn in the first-quarter 2010.

Also keep in mind, though, that the headline numbers here are annualized.  The 2.2% gain reported for third-quarter was roughly 0.5% not annualized. Likewise a 4.2% to 6.0% fourth-quarter GDP would be in 1.0% to 1.5% range not annualized.

The GDP is the most heavily rigged and politicized series put out by the government. One reason this happens is that the data in early reporting are not hard; they simply are guesstimates and easily influenced. The tendency of the Bureau of Economic Analysis is to target the consensus forecast in its advance reporting. Consensus GDP forecasts in times of uncertainty, however, rarely have a good track record of accuracy net of later historical revisions.

Annual PPI Inflation Surged Still Further into Positive TerritoryAs reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) this morning (January 20th), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted producer price index (PPI) for finished goods rose month-to-month by 0.2% (unchanged on an unadjusted basis) in December, following November’s 1.8% (1.2% unadjusted) monthly gain.

Year-to-year, December’s annual PPI inflation jumped sharply, again, to 4.4%, the highest annual inflation rate since October 2008, following November 2009’s 2.4% annual gain. Going against the pressures of collapsing oil prices in fourth-quarter 2008, year-to-year change in PPI inflation has returned to positive territory and should continue to increase in the months ahead.

Annual PPI inflation averaged a 2.5% contraction in 2009 against a 6.3% average gain in 2008. December over December inflation, again, was 4.4% in 2009, versus a 0.9% annual contraction for December 2008.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted December intermediate goods rose by 0.5% (up by 1.4% in November), with crude goods up by 1.0% (up by 5.7% in November). Year-to-year inflation was up across-the-board, with December intermediate goods up by 3.0% (down by 1.6% in November) and December crude goods up by 12.3% (up by 4.7% in November).

Bottom-Bouncing Continued in December Housing Starts. The Census Bureau reported today (January 20th) that December housing fell month-to-month by a statistically-insignificant 4.0% (down by 3.0% net of revisions) +/- 11.1% (95% confidence interval). November’s starts were revised (along with a downside revision to October) so as to show a 10.7% monthly gain, after initially having been reported up by 8.9%. Going against December 2008’s monthly collapse of 15.1%, year-to-year change was up by 0.2% in December (consistent with protracted bottom-bouncing), following a revised annual contraction of 11.5% (previously 12.4%) in November.   

Since December 2008, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing at an historically low level, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 552,300. In the past 13 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, including December’s reading of 557,000, which remained below the monthly readings of June through September, inclusive.

 Housing Starts Chart

The "recovery" in housing is shown in the above graph. The data are smoothed using a six-month moving average to remove the extreme month-to-month volatility seen in this series. Regardless of any level of smoothing, though, housing starts remain well below any levels seen since the end of World War II.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions. As discussed in Commentary No. 269, key series appear to have been distorted by seasonal factors warped by the extraordinary length and depth of the current downturn, one which is unprecedented in the period of modern economic reporting of the post World War II era. Particular issues are mentioned with individual series. 

New Orders for Durable Goods (December 2009)The December new orders for durable goods is due for release on Thursday, January 28th. The consensus estimate is for a 1.6% monthly gain in orders per Briefing.com, versus the 0.2% monthly gain reported for November. As has been the case for some time, however, whatever the reported month-to-month gain or loss, it likely will not be outside the usual month-to-month volatility of the series, which should continue to bottom-bounce at a low-level plateau of activity.

Gross Domestic Products (Advance Estimate of Fourth-Quarter 2009 GDP). Due for release on Friday, January 29th, possible GDP reporting is discussed above in the opening comments.

__________

No. 272: December CPI, Industrial Production

Friday, January 15th, 2010

  JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 272
December CPI, Industrial Production

January 15, 2010

__________

December Annual Inflation 2.7% (CPI-U), 9.7% (SGS)

Unusually Cold Weather Boosted December Production

Fed Shows Recession Ended Mid-2009
But Double-Dip Is in Place

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Commentary is for Wednesday, January 20th, following the release of the December PPI and housing starts. Such will be independent of the pending newsletter reviewing 2009 and previewing 2010.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams


The Recession Is Over? Both the Federal Reserve Board (FRB) and the St. Louis Fed are reflecting a mid-2009 end to the recession, which I refer to variously as the ongoing severe economic downturn, depression, etc. The FRB shows an April or May 2009 end in its industrial production graphs, and the St. Louis Fed shows the last month of recession as of July in its graphics. A call to the FRB for comment as to precise timing and as to whether the Fed had consulted with the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), official arbiter of U.S. recession timing, was not answered before my going to press. As of this writing, the NBER has not declared the recession to be over, although such could follow at any time. If one recession is completed, then the intensified downturn that will follow in early 2010 (see Commentary No. 268 of December 30th) will be viewed as a double-dip. If the intensified economic problems become evident soon enough, however, the NBER might forestall the happy news that the economy is in a faux recovery that will be shockingly brief.

With the trade data slightly negative for the fourth-quarter GDP, the heavily distorted retail sales (strong positive bias from late-year seasonal factor distortions) and the reported gains in industrial production are consistent with a positive quarter-to-quarter growth rate in the pending "advance" estimate of the fourth-quarter GDP. Something in the 4% to 4.5% annualized inflation-adjusted growth range would be ridiculous, but some forecasts are in that area. A full breakout of what the key economic indicators are showing will follow in the pending newsletter.

On the inflation front, the CPI-U annual inflation rate jumped to 2.7% (3.4% for the CPI-W). The CPI-U rate was enough to generate a 3.5% annual contraction in real M3, which, again, is signaling an intensified downturn ahead (I had used a conservative initial estimate of a 3.2% contraction for Commentary No. 268). As the real annual decline in M3 continues to deepen, the annual pace of contraction could be greater than 5% for January 2010. At the same, as shown below, the Fed has pulled back a little from the panicked level of systemic liquefaction in place a month ago. The latest monetary developments, seasonal-factor issues and Fed policy limitations also will be reviewed in the forthcoming newsletter.

Annual Inflation Jumped Again. With the December 2009 CPI reporting in place, the inflationary and deflationary problems surrounding the surge and subsequent collapse of oil prices in 2008 has worked its way through the system, leaving annual CPI-U inflation somewhat shy of 3%. What follows in the months ahead will be still higher annual inflation, with the pace picking up in response to Mr. Bernanke’s efforts at formal U.S. dollar debasement, a further weakening of the U.S. dollar and a resulting continued spike in oil and energy prices, as a well as in other dollar-denominated commodities. That inflation will come from monetary policy decisions, not from strengthening economic demand in the United States,

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported this morning (January 15th) that the seasonally-adjusted December CPI-U rose by 0.13% (down by 0.18% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, after rising by 0.40% (up by 0.07% unadjusted) in November. Seasonally-adjusted, the CPI-U annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended December was 3.28%, versus 3.43% for the three months ended November. The seasonally-adjusted annualized quarter-to-quarter inflation was 3.44% in the fourth-quarter versus 3.60% in the third.  

Unadjusted, December year-to-year inflation turned increasing positive, up by 2.72 +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) against a 1.84% annual increase in November. The average CPI-U for 2009 versus 2008 showed a contraction of 0.36% compared with a 3.84% gain in 2008 versus 2007.

Year-to-year inflation would increase or decrease in January 2010 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.28% adjusted monthly gain seen in January 2009.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for January 2009, the difference in January’s headline monthly change versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from December 2009’s annual inflation rate of 2.72%.

For those interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I continue to refer you to CPIwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

CPI-W.  The BLS reported that the narrower, seasonally-adjusted December CPI-W rose by 0.16% (down by 0.14% unadjusted), following an increase of 0.51% (up by 0.21% unadjusted) in November. Seasonally-adjusted, the annualized rate of CPI-W inflation for the three months ended December was 4.12%, versus 4.18% for the three months ended November. The seasonally-adjusted annualized quarter-to-quarter inflation was 4.22% in the fourth-quarter versus 4.55% in the third.   

Year-to-year CPI-W inflation rose by 3.36% in December, following a 2.27% increase in November. The average CPI-W for 2009 versus 2008 showed a contraction of 0.67% compared with a 4.09% gain in 2008 versus 2007.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for the Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — also was increasingly positive, rising by 2.76% in December, versus a 1.61% increase in November.  The average C-CPI-U for 2009 versus 2008 showed a preliminary contraction of 0.52% compared with a 3.37% gain in 2008 versus 2007.

Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth rose to 6.1% in December, versus 5.1% in November, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to about 9.7% (9.68% for those using the extra digit) in December, versus 8.8% in November.

The average pre-Clinton (1990-base) inflation for 2009 versus 2008 was 3.0% compared with 7.2% in 2008 versus 2007. The average SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (1980-base) showed inflation for 2009 versus 2008 at 7.0% compared with 11.6% in 2008 versus 2007.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact not otherwise published by the BLS.

Real Retail Sales.  Based on December CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted monthly December retail sales fell by 0.4%, where the current number was down by 0.3% before inflation adjustment, and where real retail sales rose by 1.4% in November against a 1.8% gain before inflation adjustment. Year-to-year, December real retail sales rose by 2.5%, versus a 5.4% annual gain, before inflation adjustment. November real retail sales rose by an annual 0.7%, versus a 2.5% gain before inflation adjustment. (See Commentary No. 271 as to serious seasonal factor distortions in current retail sales reporting.)

For the last 13 months, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $160.5 billion (the deflated December number was $162.3). Smoothed for monthly volatility on a six-month moving-average basis, as shown in the accompanying graph, the pattern of activity here has shifted to bottom-bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales.  Other than for some serious late-year seasonal factor distortions, there is no turnaround in economic activity — no recovery — evident here, just bottom-bouncing.

 Inflation-Adjusted Retail Sales

 

Monthly Industrial Production Jump Reflected Severe Weather Distortions.  The Federal Reserve reported that seasonally-adjusted December industrial production rose by 0.64% for the month, following a downwardly revised 0.58% (previously a 0.83%) gain in November.  The year-to-year contraction in December narrowed to 2.01%, from a revised 4.86% (was 5.08%) contraction in November. The June 2009 reading of 95.75 remains the record low for annual production growth since the shutdown of war-time production that followed World War II.  For the last 11 months, the production index has averaged 98.1, around which the series has been fluctuating, with the December’s six-month moving average reading at 98.9, versus 100.3 for the single month.

December’s reported monthly gain was due largely to weather distortions, not to bad seasonal factors. Despite the problems with the purchasing managers manufacturing production survey’s seasonal factors, which turned a negative December number positive, the Fed’s estimate of seasonal adjustments appeared to be reasonable. Due to the severe cold, however, utility usage surged by 5.9% for the month. Where a portion of manufacturing production is determined directly from surveyed electricity usage, the 0.1% contraction reported for manufacturing production accordingly was overstated. Such monthly distortions tend to balance out in subsequent monthly reporting.

Industrial Production Index

 

The "recovery" in production is shown in the above graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average. Production activity has leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that effectively has wiped out the last 10 years of growth in industrial production. Despite the near-term upside bump generated by short-lived stimulus impact and unusual weather, the series generally still is bottom-bouncing and should soften anew shortly.

Fed’s Liquefaction Panic Has Eased Somewhat. As shown in the accompanying graph, the latest numbers on the St. Louis Fed’s Adjusted Monetary Base (seasonally adjusted) show the monetary base off its peak. As of the two-week period ended January 13th, the level of cash and bank reserves in the system stood at $1.972 trillion, down from the peak level of $2.081 trillion for the period ended December 2nd, but still up at an annualized pace of 46.5% from the near-term trough of $1.677 trillion in the period ended August 12, 2009.

 St Louis Fed Adjusted Monetary Base 

 

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions. As discussed in Commentary No. 269, key series appear to have been distorted by seasonal factors warped by the extraordinary length and depth of the current downturn, one which is unprecedented in the period of modern economic reporting of the post World War II era. Particular issues are mentioned with individual series. 

Producer Price Index (December 2009)The December PPI is due for release on Wednesday, January 20th. The consensus estimate is for an unchanged monthly inflation rate, per Briefing.com, versus the 1.8% monthly gain reported for November. Regardless of surprises in this regularly volatile series, annual PPI inflation should pick-up sharply in December.

Housing Starts (December 2009)The consensus for December housing starts, due for release on Wednesday, January 20th, is to the plus-side of flat, per Briefing.com. As has been the case for some time, however, whatever the reported month-to-month gain or loss, it likely will not be statistically significant. The series should continue to bottom-bounce at a low-level plateau of activity.

 __________

No. 271: December Retail Sales

Thursday, January 14th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 271
December Retail Sales

 January 14, 2010

__________

Bad Seasonals Continue to Bloat
Reported Retail Sales

2009 Holiday Season Was a Bust
Both Before and After Inflation Adjustment
Using
Normal Seasonal Factors

__________

 PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Commentary is for tomorrow, January 15th, following the release of the December CPI and industrial production. Implications for fourth-quarter GDP reporting from this week’s economic reporting also will be discussed in tomorrow’s missive. An extended newsletter reviewing 2009 and previewing 2010 should follow over the weekend.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 


Depression-Warped Seasonal Factors Continue. Bloated again by seasonal factors that have been heavily distorted by the longest and deepest economic contraction in the post-World War II era of modern economic reporting, today’s (January 14th) December retail sales report — issued by the Census Bureau — indicated a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted monthly decline of 0.27% (up 0.26% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval). Such followed an upwardly revised 1.82% (previously 1.29%) monthly gain in November.  Based on traditional seasonal factors outside of the current sharp economic contraction, even with the November revisions, the monthly changes for both November and December retail sales — the peak period of annual retail sales — would have been negative.  Those declines hold both before and after adjustment for inflation. See Commentaries Nos. 265 & 269 for further discussion.

On a year-to-year basis, the December year-ago comparison was against not only a bottoming price collapse in gasoline and related activity in gasoline station sales, but also sharp contractions in a number of other areas of retail sales activity. Accordingly, December 2009 retail sales were reported up by 5.36% from December 2008, and also should show as a short-lived spike into positive territory for inflation-adjusted year-to-year change, following what now is larger upside inflation-adjusted annual growth rate for November. Indeed, the December annual gain followed an upwardly-revised annual gain of 2.54% (was 1.90%) in November. 

Since those annual gains are based on the seasonally adjusted data, they also are distorted by the economically-impacted portion of the seasonals. The seasonally-adjusted data are used for year-to-year comparisons here, since the portion of adjustments made for variations in trading-days and holidays are meaningful and not distorted by extreme economic conditions. 

Real Retail Sales. Removing the effects of inflation, December 2009 retail sales activity should show a monthly contraction, but the annual change will be positive (with November’s revisions) briefly, for a second month, given distorted seasonal factors and the particularly severe monthly contraction seen in December 2008 reporting. The pattern of ongoing, inflation-adjusted activity remains one of bottom-bouncing/plateauing at extremely low levels. Details will be updated and graphed with the Commentary following tomorrow’s (January 15th) release of the December CPI.

Core Retail Sales.  A change in "core retail sales" methodology was introduced four months ago, where the net relative monthly increases and/or decreases in gasoline station and grocery store sales were subtracted from the full monthly retail sales number, instead of the total of gasoline station and grocery store sales each month. Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, the revamped reported "core" change more closely reflects the actual retail sales experience. This remains a work in progress and eventually will be used in the development of additional SGS alternative economic measures.

For the near-term, the "core" retail sales is reported in two versions, where Version I uses the original methodology, and Version II version appears to provide a more balanced picture of the impact food and energy inflation in the standard retail sales reporting.

Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales:

Version I — December retail sales net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 0.4% (zero growth net of revisions) versus the official aggregate decline of 0.3%.    

Version II — December retail sales net of the monthly change in grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 0.3% (up 0.9% net of revisions) versus the official aggregate loss of 0.3%.

{trade_deficit  November 2009}}

Reported November Trade Deficit Widened. The Census Bureau and Bureau of Economic Analysis reported that the seasonally-adjusted November trade deficit widened to $36.4 billion (by 9.6%) from a revised $33.2 (previously $32.9) billion in October. Imports rose faster than exports, with the trade deterioration partially reflecting an increase in the average price of imported oil, from $67.39 per barrel in October, to $72.54 in November, while physical oil imports remained soft at 8.2 million barrels per day, down from 8.7 million In November 2008. 

Net of oil-price changes and other inflation factors, the November deficit widen by 6.2% against October, with the pace of the fourth-quarter’s inflation-adjusted deficit (as used in the GDP) running slightly worse than in the third-quarter. Such is a minor negative for fourth-quarter GDP.

On top of likely seasonal-factor distortions, it still appears as though irregular paperwork flows through Customs are impairing the reporting accuracy of imports.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions. As discussed in Commentary No. 269, key series appear to have been distorted by seasonal factors warped by the extraordinary length and depth of the current downturn, one which is unprecedented in the period of modern economic reporting of the post World War II era.  Particular issues are mentioned with individual series. 

Next week’s December PPI and housing starts reporting will be discussed in tomorrow’s Commentary. The CPI and industrial production comments that follow are unchanged from the Commentary No. 270.  

Consumer Price Index (December 2009)Due for release tomorrow, Friday, January 15th, the consensus for the CPI-U is for a 0.2% seasonally-adjusted monthly gain, per Briefing.com, versus 0.4% reported for November. The consensus usually tends to overestimate December CPI, but even here, unusual seasonal factors could offer a surprise either way.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in December 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.79% adjusted monthly decline seen in December 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for December 2009, the difference in December’s headline monthly change versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from November 2009’s annual inflation rate of 1.84%. A consensus report of a seasonally-adjusted 0.2% monthly gain would result in year-to-year or annual December 2009 CPI-U inflation rate of roughly 2.8%.

Industrial Production (December 2009)Due for release tomorrow, Friday, January 15th, December production could be skewed heavily to the upside by bad seasonal factors, as shown in the purchasing managers manufacturing survey discussed in Commentary No. 269. The Fed, however, has been sensitive to the general problem of current seasonal factors and production may come in below consensus estimates of a 0.6% monthly gain (Briefing.com), against November’s 0.8% increase.

 __________

No. 270: December Employment Report

Friday, January 8th, 2010

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 270
December Employment Report

January 8, 2010

__________

Broader December Unemployment Rates Notched Higher
U-6 at 17.3%, SGS at 21.9%

December Household Employment Reported Down by 589,000

December Payroll Employment Probably Shrank by
About 500,000

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Commentary is planned for Thursday, January 14th, following the release of the December retail sales report. There will be a subsequent Commentary on the 15th, following release of December CPI and industrial production. An extended newsletter reviewing 2009 and previewing 2010 should follow over the ensuing weekend.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams


Employment/Unemployment Reporting Remains Heavily Distorted. As discussed in Wednesday’s Commentary 269, unusual distortions in seasonal factors likely are skewing current employment and unemployment data, with ongoing patterns of economic weakness creating artificial positive spikes in seasonally-adjusted current reporting. Accordingly, the latest employment reporting likely is of particularly poor quality, with bad seasonal factors suppressing the headline unemployment rate and narrowing the reported decline in payroll employment. Net of these factors, payrolls likely declined by about 500,000 (85,000 decline reported) in December, of which roughly 250,000 was attributable to a terribly flawed Birth-Death Model, roughly 135,000 was due to the concurrent seasonal factor bias which only reflects seasonal distortions between 2008 and 2009, and the balance of roughly a further 100,000 is tied to seasonal-factor problems from long-term distortions of the down-trend which will be detailed in a forthcoming  newsletter. The headline U.3 unemployment rate likely was closer to 10.2% than the 10.0% reported, as discussed below.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 85,000 (down by 86,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for December 2009, following a revised 4,000 jobs gain (previously an 11,000 jobs loss) in November. The upside revision to November’s change was due to a downside revision to October payroll levels.

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; the current month of December 2009 is the short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment has declined by a seasonally-adjusted 7,242,000 jobs, or by 5.2%. Net of the pending benchmark revision, the peak-to-trough decline likely has been closer to 10 million jobs or 7.2%.

 Non-farm Payroll Employment Chart

As the pace of reported monthly decline has slowed against year-ago comparisons, year-to-year contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls narrowed to 3.0% in December from an unrevised 3.4% decline in November and a 60-year low of a 4.4% decline in August. Adjusted for the benchmark revision due for release next month, however, December’s annual decline likely was around 5.4%, still the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown following World War II, which hit a record trough of a 7.6% contraction in September 1945. Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the current annual decline would be the worst since the Great Depression.    

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias (CSFB).  The pattern of impossible biases built into the headline monthly payroll employment of recent years resumed with the December report, after three months in reversal, with an upside bias of 50,000 jobs in December 2009 reporting. Instead of the headline jobs loss of 85,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what I call the concurrent seasonal factor bias (CSFB) — would have shown a monthly jobs contraction of 135,000.  The CSFB has generated an upside reporting bias seen in seven of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 189,000. A worksheet on this is available upon request. (See SGS Newsletter No. 50, for further background.)

 Employment Changes Chart 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  As discussed in previous writings, the Birth-Death Model biases tend to overstate payroll employment during recessions. The flaws here were confirmed with the BLS estimate of an 824,000 downside benchmark revision for May 2009, announced three months ago, with a suggested ongoing monthly understatement of 200,000 to 250,000 or more in jobs losses per month. That benchmark revision will be published next month. The BLS initially indicated that the underlying assumptions to the Birth-Death Model were missing certain jobs losses, but that view apparently is reversing at the BLS, per reporting of John Crudele of the New York Post. Nonetheless, the Birth-Death model does not work in a recession, let alone a severe downturn, as will be detailed shortly in the pending full newsletter.

Unable to measure what is happening on a timely basis, the BLS assumes jobs lost by companies going out of business are offset by start-up enterprises. So, when a company that has been reporting payrolls ceases to do so, because it has gone out of business, the BLS assigns it a level of employment commensurate with its prior reporting and industry trends.

On top of those flawed assumptions the model then adds a fairly consistent upside bias to the payroll levels of roughly 900,000 each year, currently averaging about 74,000 jobs per month. The unadjusted December 2009 bias was a monthly addition of 59,000 jobs versus 60,000 the year before, and up from 30,000 in November 2009.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders) showed employment fell by 589,000 in December, following a revised 139,000 (previously reported 227,000) gain in November.

The household survey went through its annual seasonal factor revisions in the latest reporting. The revamped seasonals appear to have exacerbated the current seasonal-factor distortions, throwing more-negative numbers into the past and muting the December U.3 unemployment rate by 0.2 percentage points. The seasonal factor revisions should wash out in any given year. With 0.1% upside revisions to U.3 in each of January, February and March, offset by only one 0.1% downside revision in October, that leaves a balance of 0.2% that was subtracted out of December’s reporting, which means it otherwise would have come in at about 10.2% instead of the post-revision report of 10.0%.  

Also, again, where unemployment seasonal factors should balance out over the period of a year, with the new seasonals, the January and February 2010 numbers appear due for some unusual catch-up spikes in the U.3 unemployment rate.

The December 2009 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment held at 9.97% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval) versus a 9.98% (previously 9.99%) unemployment rate in November.

The broader December U.6 unemployment rose to an adjusted 17.3% (17.1% unadjusted), from an unrevised 17.2% (16.4% unadjusted) in November.

The following graphs show the revised U.3 and U.6 unemployment rates, as published today by the BLS, along with the prior reporting. The revisions did not alter past history significantly, other than allowing for relatively happier December 2009 reporting than would have been seen otherwise.

 

U.3 Unemployment Revisions Chart

U.6 Unemployment Revisions Chart

 

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers. The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed, unemployment — more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — eased to about 21.9% in December from 21.8% in November. See the Alternate Data  - Employment page for a graph and more detail including fully revised data.

While 21.9% unemployment might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession. The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms. Today, less that 2% work on farms. Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions. As discussed in Commentary No. 269, a number of series appear to have been distorted by seasonal factors warped by the extraordinary length and depth of the current downturn, one which is unprecedented in the period of modern economic reporting of the post World War II era. Particular issues are mentioned with individual series. 

Each of the following reports will impact consensus forecasts for fourth-quarter GDP, which seem to be bordering on a nonsensical pending economic boom. Against consensus forecasts, a wider trade deficit, weaker retail sales and industrial production, and higher inflation all would portend a downside shift in consensus economic forecasts and vice versa.

Trade Balance (November 2009)Due for release on Tuesday, January 12th, some widening in the November trade deficit is likely, but pending catch-up in import paperwork flows is not likely until monthly data revisions are published in the next couple of months.

Retail Sales (December 2009)Due for release on Thursday, January 14th, expectations are for a monthly gain of 0.4%, following November’s 1.3% increase, per Briefing.com. Underlying reality appears to be much weaker and offers some downside reporting risks, and most "gains" can be tied to higher inflation. Nonetheless, bad seasonals once again could spike the monthly number beyond consensus.  

Consumer Price Index (December 2009)Due for release on Friday, January 15th, the consensus for the CPI-U is for a 0.2% seasonally-adjusted monthly gain, per Briefing.com, versus 0.4% reported for November. The consensus usually tends to overestimate December CPI, but even here, unusual seasonal factors could offer a surprise either way.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in December 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.79% adjusted monthly decline seen in December 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for December 2009, the difference in December’s headline monthly change versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from November 2009’s annual inflation rate of 1.84%. A consensus report of a seasonally-adjusted 0.2% monthly gain would result in year-to-year or annual December 2009 CPI-U inflation rate of roughly 2.8%.

Industrial Production (December 2009)Due for release on Friday, January 15th, December production could be heavily skewed to the upside by bad seasonal factors, as shown in the purchasing managers manufacturing survey discussed in Wednesday’s Commentary No. 269. The Fed, however, has been sensitive to the general problem of current seasonal factors and may come in below consensus estimates of a 0.6% monthly gain (Briefing.com), against November’s 0.8% increase.

__________

No. 269: Distorted Seasonals, Employment Outlook

Wednesday, January 6th, 2010

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 269
Distorted Seasonals, Employment Outlook

January 6, 2010

__________

Depression-Induced Seasonal Factor Distortions
Alter Recession’s Impact in Key Reporting

Bad Seasonals Could Spike December Payrolls

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Commentary is planned for Friday, January 8th, following the release of the December employment and unemployment data. The outlook for next week’s reporting will be discussed at that time.

An extended newsletter reviewing 2009 and previewing 2010 is planned for the latter part of next week, most likely over that weekend.

– Happy New Year!  John Williams

 


Seasonal Factors Are Removing Economic Weakness from Key Data. The purpose of seasonally adjusting data is to remove regular, recurring patterns of business activity tied to holiday seasons, school years, trading days, etc., so that remaining changes in monthly (or other period less than annual) activity reflect relative changes in economic activity. Perversely, current seasonal-factor adjustments now are driven by and are removing or warping patterns of economic activity, where the length and depth of the current downturn are unprecedented in modern economic reporting (post-World War II). Seasonal-factor modeling (most heavily weighted towards recent years’ patterns) never was designed to account for repetitive annual declines in activity due to an ongoing downturn. With the economy tumbling at the end of 2007 and end of 2008, anything less severe at the end of 2009 can become an outright rebound after seasonal adjustment.   

Accordingly, we may have entered a period of particularly volatile and heavily distorted, unreliable economic reporting. This is the brief Commentary promised as an updated outlook for Friday’s report on December employment and unemployment. Unusually positive swings in the underlying and generally better-quality employment-related series suggest major impact from depression-induced distortions in seasonal factors used to adjust the series. Such an issue was discussed with November’s reported seasonally-adjusted retail sales gain, which would have been a contraction if seasonal factors from before the economic downturn had been used.

With all series, except for payroll employment, the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series should equal each other at the end of a year. Accordingly, what may be distorted to the upside in November or December will be distorted to the downside in another period.

Bloated Purchasing Managers Survey. The December 2009 ISM purchasing managers manufacturing survey surged in yesterday’s (January 5th) reporting, with the seasonally-adjusted diffusion index (50.0 and above is positive) rising to 55.9 from 53.6 in November. Set annually by the Department of Commerce, however, the seasonal adjustments have changed meaningfully during and due to the recession. If the pre-recession seasonal factors used in 2007 (based on 2006) were applied, the November index would have been at 53.3 instead of 53.6, but December would have been 54.0 instead of 55.9. 

Although the index still gained in December using the 2007 seasonals, the gain was 0.8 versus the 2.3 points reported. The employment component officially increased from 50.8 in November to 52.0 in December, but using the 2007 seasonals, the increase was from a contractionary 49.8 to 51.1.

In other component indices, official new orders rose from 60.3 to 65.5, but the 2007-based sub-index increased from 60.0 to 62.4. Diverging in direction was the production index, where the official index rose from 59.9 in November to 61.8 in December, but with 2007 seasonals, the index fell from 59.6 to 57.8.

The non-manufacturing survey, which has little meaning outside of its employment and price indices, has minimal seasonal adjustment to the employment number, which was reported at a contractionary 44.0 in December, up from 41.4 in November.

Employment Indicators. Beyond the ISM’s December employment indices, which tend to be leading to the government’s January, not December, reporting and generally were less negative or slightly positive versus November, the Conference Board’s help-wanted advertising indices rose both for newspapers and online. While these data are seasonally adjusted, the unadjusted data are not available. Accordingly the impact of seasonal distortion cannot be quantified, but it likely was a major contributing factor. 

The seasonally-adjusted November newspaper index rose to 10 after two months at its historic low of 9. The series was down by 23.1% year-to-year. Seasonally-adjusted new online advertising in December was up 13.2% from November, but down 6.3% from a year ago. In November, ads were down 0.8% for the month and down 23.9% for the year. If seasonal factors were bad here, such impacted both the monthly and annual rates of change. Again, it is the November numbers that tend to be leading to the broad December employment/unemployment reporting.

As to the seasonally-adjusted weekly new claims for unemployment, using 2006 pre-recession seasonal factors would have generated a four-week average as of the latest reporting (December 26th) of 541,000 instead of the official 460,000. Also, as discussed a month ago, new claims reflect only the jobs lost, not the pace of hiring, which usually would be signaled by activity in help-wanted advertising. Unfortunately, anecdotal evidence does not support the reported surging seasonally-adjusted online advertising.

Payroll Employment and Unemployment Rate (December 2009). Due for release on Friday, January 8th, expectations for the December employment and unemployment data are reasonably optimistic, with expectations for an unchanged level of payroll employment, versus an 11,000 jobs loss in November, and a 10.1% unemployment rate, versus 10.0% in November (Briefing.com). Irrespective of economic reality and high risks of big surprises in either direction, my betting is that payroll reporting could be somewhat more positive and unemployment could be more negative than consensus estimates.

Anecdotal evidence suggests ongoing economic woes, and economic reality likely remains much more negative than what will be reported. Given the upside seasonal biases in other reporting, risks are fair that payroll employment reporting could be stronger than expected, showing an actual gain on a monthly basis. That all could disappear in the next month’s benchmark revisions. John Crudele of the New York Post reported yesterday (January 5th), however, that the Bureau of Labor Statistics is backing away from revamping its terribly flawed birth-death model. More on this will follow in the coming weeks.

The December unemployment survey has the best chance for reflecting something close to reality, with recent unemployment rates being revised for new seasonal adjustments with this week’s report. To the extent that human intelligence is applied to the revisions, some of this year’s bumps should disappear, such as the 9.8% September unemployment rate rising to 10.2% in October and then falling back to 10.0% in November. The revised pattern of rising unemployment should be more regular, with some upside risk of the December rate coming in at 10.2%, above the 10.1% consensus.

Updated M3. Further to last week’s Commentary No. 268, the preliminary estimate for year-to-year change in the SGS-Ongoing M3 monthly average for December 2009 is an annual contraction of roughly 0.9% (versus the 0.7% contraction estimated for purposes of the Commentary). This is before adjustment for inflation and confirms the negative signal for domestic economy activity discussed. The usual detail has been posted on the Alternate Data - Money Supply page.

__________

No. 268: Double-Dip in Place

Wednesday, December 30th, 2009

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 268
Double-Dip in Place

December 30, 2009

__________

Tumbling Real M3 Promises Intensified Depression

Major Double-Dip Downturn Should Be Obvious
By Mid-Year 2010

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Commentary is planned for Friday, January 8th, following the release of the December employment and unemployment data. A brief interim Commentary updating the employment reporting outlook will be published as the consensus estimates harden and as later detail in related series become available.

An extended newsletter reviewing 2009 and previewing 2010 is planned for the week following the employment report.

– Best wishes to all for a very healthy, happy and prosperous New Year!  John Williams

 


Inflation-Adjusted Contraction in Broad Liquidity Always Pummels the Economy. Not all economic downturns are triggered by liquidity crises, but all liquidity crises trigger or intensify economic downturns.  In modern economic reporting, year-to-year growth in inflation-adjusted money growth has turned negative only four times before November 2009, and each earlier occurrence signaled either the onset of a major recession or the sharp deterioration in a pre-existing downturn. A renewed fall-off in U.S. economic activity is in place.

This relatively brief Commentary during the holiday hiatus in economic releases is one of the most important pieces put out during the current economic and systemic solvency crises. It begins, using now-available hard data, to lay the base for a severe second downleg in what already is the longest and deepest economic contraction since the first-downleg of the Great Depression in the early-1930s. This story will be explored in greater depth in the upcoming economic review of 2009 and preview of 2010. 

While consensus forecasters and the hypesters on Wall Street and in the Administration already have pronounced the economy to be in recovery, the best case I can make for recent economic reporting is that broad business activity in some areas has flattened out at a low-level plateau of activity, even accounting for one-time upside blips from government economic stimulus gimmicks. Whether coming off a short-lived upside bump or an extended period of bottom-bouncing, what lies ahead should be a renewed plunge in economic activity that will be recognized by all.

Using the SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate as the broadest measure of money supply or systemic liquidity (the story will soon be repeated in the narrower M2 measure still published by the Federal Reserve), year-to-year change in the nominal (not adjusted for inflation) seasonally-adjusted monthly average turned negative, down roughly 0.7% (a formal preliminary estimate will be published next week) in December 2009, for only the second time in modern reporting of M3 (since 1959). It is in inflation-adjusted terms, however, that the story lies. On a year-to-year inflation-adjusted basis, November 2009 was down minimally by 0.3%. Using conservative estimates for December M3 and CPI, real December M3 was down roughly 3.2% year-to-year.  

Inflation-adjusted money supply long has been used as a leading economic indicator. Indeed, it should have some relationship to real (inflation-adjusted) economic growth, where the formula expressing basic relationships in monetary theory is:

M x V = P x G

Where M = money supply, V = velocity, P = price inflation and G = the level of GDP or economic activity net of inflation (see: http://www.shadowstats.com/article/money-supply).   Holding V constant and dropping it, which sometimes is done to simplify economic concepts, the formula can be restated as:

G = M / P

The plot in the following graph is not intended to show high correlations between the series, other than at every time year-to-year change in real money supply has turned negative, year-to-year change in nonfarm payrolls has followed, albeit with varied lead/lag times. Using the cycle growth troughs in real M3 and employment (employment is a coincident indicator of GDP activity) the lead time between M3 and employment averages six months (1970 was nine months, 1974 was seven months, 1981 was two months, and 1991 was six months). 

 Real M3 vs Nonfarm Payroll Employment

From the real M3 series first turning negative year-to-year, to the official onset of recession, the lead time was five months in the 1969/1970 recession, five months in the 1980 recession and 15 months with the 1990/1991 recession (employment data suggest an earlier start to the 1990/1991 downturn) . 

The 1973 to 1975 recession, however, is the closest to the current circumstance, where the real M3 annual contraction did not begin until May 1974. Sporadic GDP contractions were seen following the oil crisis that triggered the recession at its official onset in October 1973. Following the downturn in M3, though, the quarterly contractions became regular and severe, and, as shown the graph, annual employment change turned negative.

GDP usually is the last major series to show a downturn, and GDP reporting tends to follow consensus forecasts. The consensus forecasters will begin to get battered by unexpected weakness in series such as retail sales, housing, industrial production and employment in the next several months, before their outlook likely turns once again to the downside. Nonetheless, the next major movement in broad economic activity already is in play, and it is a big one to the downside.

The general outlook is unchanged.  The renewed deterioration in U.S. economic activity will intensify the systemic liquidity crisis (keep in mind that all fiscal projections from the federal government on down, projections for the soundness of the banking system, etc. all are based on the presumed resumption of U.S. economic growth in the year ahead). This circumstance also will help to trigger the eventual dumping of the U.S. dollar and dollar-denominated paper assets that will begin to feed into a hyperinflation, as discussed in the December 2nd hyperinflation report update.

Week Ahead. With holidays forcing early release of some data, the economic calendar in the week or so ahead remains thin. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the months ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Payroll Employment and Unemployment Rate (December 2009)Due for release on Friday, January 8th, the employment/unemployment data are at high risk of disappointing what are likely to be fairly optimistic consensus estimates. Extreme seasonal factor distortions may generate unexpected results in this last report before the benchmark and seasonal adjustment revisions are published in February. The outlook for the jobs and unemployment report will be updated next week.

__________

No. 267: Third-Quarter GDP Revision

Tuesday, December 22nd, 2009

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 267
Third-Quarter GDP Revision

December 22, 2009

__________

GDP Growth Still Overstated

Economic and Liquidity Crises Face New Down-Legs

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Commentary is planned for Wednesday (December 30th).

– Best wishes to all for a most joyous holiday season and for a healthy, happy and prosperous New Year!  John Williams

 


Minor GDP Revisions Leave Reported Economic Growth Heavily Overstated. As discussed in Commentary No. 266, severe seasonal-adjustment distortions are being created by the intense economic downturn, unprecedented for its length and depth in the post-World II era of modern economic reporting. Already acknowledged problems with payroll employment reporting helped to spike the second- and third-quarter GDP-related reporting with last month’s unusual upside revisions to wages and salaries in the GDI. Annual revisions to the GDP series, scheduled in July 2010, could turn the third-quarter 2009 GDP quarterly growth estimate flat to negative, and likely will show an outright quarterly contraction in fourth-quarter 2009 GDP. 

The "advance" estimate of the fourth-quarter growth is scheduled for release on January 29th. Consensus estimates at the moment still are for continued, positive quarter-to-quarter real growth. How the consensus estimates and initial reporting evolve, however, will depend heavily on initial reporting of December employment, retail sales, industrial production and housing data due for release in January. Severe downside adjustments to the employment data, which will be published in February, likely will not be reflected in current GDP estimates until the annual revisions of July.

Economic and Liquidity Woes Appear Ready to Intensify Anew. Nonetheless, as shown in the following graph of official year-to-year change in real GDP (not the annualized quarter-to-quarter growth rate of the headline number), the annual decline in the U.S. economy during the third quarter generally remained at or below the annual contraction troughs of the other post-World War II recessions. The economic depression continues, albeit with some sectors showing some bottom-bouncing, but clean data are not showing any upturns, shy of non-recurring, short-lived spikes from temporary stimulus measures. 

 Gross Domestic Product Chart

The ongoing weakening of annual growth in M3 — highly likely to have turned negative year-to-year in December (on both a nominal and real basis) — would, in normal times, indicate a looming recession in 2010. Ahead lie a deepening depression and likely new efforts by the Fed and the Administration to address the ongoing and still-intensifying liquidity and economic woes. These issues will be explored in some depth in the next Commentary due on December 30th.

The broad economic and inflation outlooks are unchanged. Irrespective of near-term volatility in the markets, over the long haul the outlook remains particularly dim for U.S. equities, the U.S. credit market, and the U.S. dollar, while gold and silver prices should rally strongly. 

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 


GDP.  The third estimate of, and second revision to third-quarter 2009 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) released this morning (December 22nd) by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) showed a downwardly-revised and statistically-insignificant annualized real growth rate of 2.24% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), reduced from the second estimate of 2.78% and initial estimate of 3.53%. Such followed a 0.74% decline reported for second-quarter GDP. While the latest revision was somewhat more than statistical noise, it still was minor. Keep in mind that the reported quarterly growth rates are annualized, so a 0.1% downward revision gets reported as a 0.4% downward revision. The vast bulk of the growth in the quarter remained dependent on short-lived stimulus impact.

Net of the effect of a further downward revision to the third-quarter GDP implicit price deflator, to an annualized quarterly inflation rate 0.35% from the second estimate of 0.50% and an initial estimate of 0.76%, the quarterly GDP growth rate would have revised to 2.09% instead of to 2.24%. Inflation estimation is central to real GDP reporting and gimmicking. The weaker the inflation rate used for deflating the GDP, the stronger will be the inflation-adjusted growth rate. The revised 0.35% annualized third-quarter GDP inflation was up from an annualized contraction of 0.02% in the second quarter. In contrast, reported 3.60% annualized third-quarter CPI-U inflation was up from an annualized positive inflation rate of 1.33% in the second quarter. As noted last month, if the reported GDP inflator moved in tandem with CPI, which is not too farfetched a concept, the bulk of the reported real growth in third-quarter GDP would disappear.

The year-to-year contraction in real third-quarter GDP deepened again, in revision, to 2.64% from the second estimate of 2.51% and the initial reporting of 2.33%. Such still is a smaller annual contraction, however, than the record 3.83% decline reported for the second-quarter. As shown in the graph and mentioned above, the latest year-to-year decline generally is below or in line with annual-growth troughs of the major post-World War II recessions.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for third-quarter 2009 remains an annual contraction of 5.7% versus the 2.6% official estimate, narrowed from an annual 5.9% (3.8% official estimate) contraction in the second quarter. While annualized real quarterly growth is not formally estimated on an alternative basis, a flat quarter-to-quarter circumstance, plus or minus, likely was realistic. I still look for a renewed quarter-to-quarter contraction in the GDP as of fourth-quarter 2009, barring extreme seasonal factor distortions in December economic reporting. 

GNP. The second estimate of Gross National Product for third-quarter 2009 showed annualized real growth revised sharply lower to 3.03% from the initial estimate of 3.76%, but up from a 0.96% contraction reported for the second-quarter. Year-to-year decline widened anew, in revision, to 2.87% from the initial 2.70% contraction reported in the third-quarter, though it still was improved from the 4.04% contraction in the second-quarter. Further significant downside revision awaits this series, as estimates of third-quarter factor income (interest and dividend payments) stabilize in the quarters ahead.

GDI. The second estimate of Gross Domestic Income for third-quarter 2009 showed annualized real growth of 2.22%, revised up from the initial 1.98% estimate, and up from a 0.07% contraction in the second-quarter. The quarterly GDI growth is unusually close to the GDP growth, at the moment, thanks to unusual stability in the quarterly levels of statistical discrepancy. Year-to-year change narrowed slightly to a still historically severe 3.30% contraction, versus the initial 3.36% contraction reported in the third-quarter, and narrowed from a 4.09% contraction in the second-quarter.

The extreme prior-period upside revisions to second-quarter wages and salaries last month reflected the impact of the terribly flawed payroll survey out of the Bureau of Labor Statistics. Corrections to the GDP are not likely before the July 2010 annual revisions.

Week Ahead. With holidays forcing early release of some data, the economic calendar in the week or so ahead is particularly thin. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the month ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

New Orders for Durable Goods (November 2009)Due for release on Thursday, December 24th, the November monthly change again should be insignificant versus the regular month-to-month volatility seen in the series, with the level of activity continuing to bottom-bounce at a low-level plateau of activity.

__________

No. 266: November CPI, PPI, Production and Housing

Wednesday, December 16th, 2009

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 266
November CPI, PPI, Production and Housing

December 16, 2009

__________

Bad Seasonals Turn Data Topsy-Turvy

Annual CPI-U Inflation Jumps to 1.8% (SGS 8.8%)

November versus October Annual Inflation
Swings Positive by 2.0% for the CPI, 4.3% for the PPI

November Annual Real Retail Sales Were Unchanged

November Housing "Gain"
Statistically Not Different from Zero

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Commentary is planned for Tuesday (December 22nd), following release of the third estimate (second revision) of third-quarter GDP.

– Best wishes to all for a most joyous holiday season!  John Williams

 

Recovery Hopes Based on Seriously Twisted Data. Reporting of some widely followed series, particularly out of the Departments of Commerce and Labor, appear to be generating false positive signals for a number of headline month-to-month numbers, including retail sales and the payroll and unemployment series. The problem could extend to the purchasing managers survey, where the seasonal factors are calculated annually by the Commerce Department.

The problem is recognized within the agencies, but it has not been put before the public.  The Fed has talked of the problem with some of its statistical releases, and it appears to have addressed those issues, at least partially. As noted in the discussion in prior Commentary No. 265, no government statistical agency has had to handle such an extreme economic circumstance in the history of modern economic (meaning post-World War II) reporting. Accordingly, the issues are not simple to address, but they are helping to create an unrealistic optimism in some areas as to a faux economic recovery. Generally, the economy continues to sink or bottom-bounce; no recovery is in place.

Following up on data distortions created by the severity of the economic downturn, for example, John Crudele of the New York Post made the point to me that the seasonally-adjusted 1.3% monthly gain reported for November retail sales was based on virtually zero monthly growth in the unadjusted series. In normal times, and with normal seasonal patterns, one would expect sales to increase in November versus October, when the retail industry’s dominant period — the holiday shopping season — begins. 

The purpose of seasonal adjusting data is to remove the impact of regular trading-day variations and regular variations of commercial activity from economic reporting, so that the results reflect changes in underlying economic activity, not from regular sales patterns that recur at the onset of each the holiday shopping season.  

Indeed, a check of historical not-seasonally-adjusted data tends to confirm the pattern of rising unadjusted sales in November versus October, so normal seasonal adjustments for November should tend to dampen the relative seasonally-adjusted activity. Seasonal factors are updated regularly, with the heaviest weightings based on the last year’s activity patterns. Due to the patterns of plunging economic activity in the last year or two — regular in pattern only to the extent of protracted, continual decline — the effects of the economic collapse, not the normal patterns of commercial activity for which the seasonal adjustments were intended, have so warped the adjustments as to spike reported adjusted November retail sales, as though October sales now regularly outperform November sales.

Such is nonsense and highlights the problem. Irrespective of the government’s reporting, there still is a holiday shopping season, albeit muted. Applying the average seasonal adjustments for October and November used in last two "normal" years of the retail sales series, 2006 and 2007, to the 2009 data, seasonally-adjusted November retail sales fell by 1.3% instead of rising by 1.3%.

A similar approach with the housing data does not change the pattern of statistically meaningless month-to-month changes (see below), suggestive of truly ongoing bottom-bouncing.

In contrast, the Federal Reserve’s industrial production series would have risen by 1.0% in November instead of the reported 0.8%. Such suggests that the Fed has been working to address the seasonal-factor problems. 

These alternative estimates are very crude, but they give a suggestion as to what is happening and highlight some issues that very properly should be seeing more of the light of day.

Inflation Resurgent. The formal CPI deflation (year-to-year decline) generated by last year’s oil-price collapse has ended, thanks largely to some rebound in oil prices. As result, annual CPI-U inflation swung 2.0% to the positive in November versus October (November plus 1.8% versus October minus 0.2%), and annual PPI inflation swung 4.3% to the positive in November versus October (November plus 2.4% versus October minus 1.9%). The annual inflation pace will pick-up sharply again in December. Much of the rebound in oil prices this year can be attributed to a generally weaker U.S. dollar, which has been pressured by Mr. Bernanke’s efforts at formal U.S. dollar debasement.

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported this morning (December 16th) that the seasonally-adjusted November CPI-U rose by 0.40% (up by 0.07% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, after rising by 0.28% (up by 0.10% unadjusted) in October. Seasonally-adjusted, the annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended November was 3.43%, versus 3.62% for the three months ended October. The impact of higher monthly gasoline prices in November appears to have been underplayed in the latest report.

Unadjusted, year-to-year inflation turned positive, up by a statistically insignificant 1.84% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) in November, versus a 0.18% annual contraction in October.

The eight-month period through October 2009 of annual declines (formal deflation) in CPI-U inflation was the worst since 1949 and 1950. I estimate, however, that CPI reporting methods used in 1950 would have generated inflation rates that did not drop below 5%, at worst, in the current cycle (see Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures below). The brief and shallow formal deflation that now is at an end — based on official CPI-U reporting — appears to have been about half the depth and half the length of the negative inflation bout in the 1949 to 1950 circumstance.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in December 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.79% adjusted monthly decline seen in December 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for December 2009, the difference in December’s headline monthly change versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from November 2009’s annual inflation rate of 1.84%.

For those interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I continue to refer you to CPIwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

CPI-W.  The BLS reported that the narrower, seasonally-adjusted November CPI-W rose by 0.51% (up by 0.21% unadjusted), following an increase of 0.33% (up by 0.11% unadjusted) in October.  Year-to-year CPI-W inflation rose by 2.27% in November, following a 0.30% decline in October.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for the Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — also turned positive, rising by 1.61% in November, versus a 0.46% drop in October.

Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth rose to 5.1% in November, versus 3.2% in October, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to about 8.8% (8.77% for those using the extra digit) in November, versus 7.1% in October.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact, not otherwise published by the BLS.

Real Retail Sales.  Based on November CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted November retail sales rose by 0.9%, where the current number is up 1.3% before inflation adjustment, and where real retail sales also rose by 0.9% in October against a 1.1% gain before inflation adjustment. Year-to-year, November real retail sales were unchanged versus a 1.9% annual again before inflation adjustment. October real retail sales fell by 1.8% year-to-year, versus a 2.0% decline before inflation adjustment. (See the opening comments about seasonal-factor distortions.)

For the last 12 months, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $160.3 billion. Smoothed for monthly volatility on a six-month moving-average basis, as shown in the accompanying graph, the pattern of activity here has shifted to bottom-bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales. Again, there is no turnaround in economic activity — no recovery — evident here, just bottom-bouncing.

Inflation adjusted retail sales 

Annual PPI Inflation Surges into Positive Territory. As reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) yesterday (December 15th), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted producer price index (PPI) rose month-to-month by an unexpectedly sharp 1.8% (up 1.2% unadjusted) in November, following October’s 0.3% (0.4% unadjusted) monthly gain.

Year-to-year, November’s annual PPI inflation jumped sharply to 2.4%, following October’s 1.9% annual contraction. Going against the pressures of collapsing oil prices in fourth-quarter 2008, year-to-year change in PPI inflation has returned to positive territory and should intensify on the upside with reporting of December’s data.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted November intermediate goods rose by 1.4% (up by 0.3% in October), with crude goods jumping by 5.7% (up by 5.4% in October). Year-to-year inflation was mixed, with November intermediate goods down by 1.6% (down by 7.5% in October) and November crude goods up by 4.7% (down by 14.1% in October). Annual inflation in intermediate goods will turn positive in December, along with a general surge in annual inflation for the broad PPI measures.

November Housing Starts Continued Bottom-Bouncing. The Census Bureau reported today (December 16th) that November housing starts rose month-to-month by a statistically-insignificant 8.9% (up by 8.5% net of revisions) +/- 12.0% (95% confidence interval). October’s starts were revised so as to show a 10.1% decline, after initially having been reported down by 10.6%. Year-to-year change was down by 12.4% in November, following a revised annual contraction of 30.9% (previously 30.7%) in October.   

Since December 2008, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing at an historically low level, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 551,700. In the past 12 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, including November’s reading of 574,000, which remained below the monthly readings of June through September, inclusive.

 Housing Starts Graph

The "recovery" in housing is shown in the above graph. The data are smoothed using a six-month moving average to remove the extreme month-to-month volatility seen in this series. Regardless of any level of smoothing, though, housing starts remain well below any levels seen since the end of World War II.

Monthly Industrial Production Jumped, Despite Weak Utilities.  The Federal Reserve reported that seasonally-adjusted November industrial production rose by 0.83% for the month to a level of 99.44, following a downwardly revised 0.02% decline (previously a 0.05% gain) in October.  Year-to-year contraction in November narrowed to 5.08%, from an unrevised 7.10% contraction in October. The revised June 2009 reading of 95.75 set a record low for annual production growth since the shutdown of war-time production that followed World War II.  For the last 10 months, the production index has averaged 97.8, around which the series has been fluctuating, with the November’s six-month moving average reading at 97.9, versus 99.4 for the single month.

November’s reported monthly gain was due largely to increased production of durable goods, despite declining orders in same. Usually, that pattern remains short-lived. As discussed in the opening comments and in the prior Commentary No. 265, unusual distortions of monthly seasonally adjustments also may be in play, due to the particular severity of the current economic downturn. The Fed appears, however, to be making an effort at adjusting for same in its industrial production series.

 Industrial Production Graph

The "recovery" in production is shown in the above graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average. Production activity has leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that effectively has wiped out the last 10 years of growth in industrial production. Despite the near-term upside blip from short-lived stimulus impact, the series generally still is bottom-bouncing.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the month ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) (Third-Quarter 2009 — Third Estimate)Due for release on Tuesday, December 22nd, the second revision (and last revision until next July’s annual revision) of third-quarter GDP should show little more than statistical noise.

New Orders for Durable Goods (November 2009)Due for release on Thursday, December 24th, the November monthly change again should be insignificant versus the regular month-to-month volatility seen in the series, with the level of activity continuing to bottom-bounce at a low-level plateau of activity.

 __________

No. 265: November Retail Sales, Inflation Surge, Data Distortions

Sunday, December 13th, 2009

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 265
November Retail Sales, Inflation Surge, Data Distortions

December 13, 2009

__________

Renewed Caution on Depression-Warped Data

November Retail Sales Annual Gain of 1.9%
Reflected Return of Inflation

November Annual CPI Inflation
Should Jump by About 2%

 __________

PLEASE NOTE: Traveling on Friday, I found that the full data needed for this Commentary were not available on a timely basis, hence the weekend posting. I apologize for any inconvenience. The next scheduled Commentary is planned for Friday (December 16th), following release of the November CPI and housing starts, including the prior day’s release of the November PPI and index of industrial production. The preliminary SGS Ongoing M3 estimate for November and the November U.S. dollar indices have been updated on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com.

– Best wishes to all for a most joyous holiday season!  John Williams


Depression Distortions of Economic Reporting Intensify. A continued note of caution is offered on all current economic reporting as data distortions generated by the unusual length and depth of the ongoing economic downturn. The economic crisis has been of a severity that is unprecedented in the post-World War II era of modern economic reporting. None of the government’s statistical reporting agencies have been through this before.

Beyond special factors in various series, such as an extreme level of foreclosure activity impacting housing data, one-time stimulus gimmicks (i.e., cash-for-clunkers boosting auto sales), or the GM and Chrysler bankruptcies throwing off regular automobile production cycles, basic models are crumbling and methodologies such as seasonal-factor adjustments are generating distorted headline numbers.

Adjustments for seasonal factors are designed to remove the impact of regular patterns of activity that tend to repeat each year. The seasonal factors usually are most heavily weighted by the prior year’s activities, but what was happening in the big swings tied to the economic free-fall last year were not seasonal in nature. The effect on current economic data, though, will tend to reflect a weaker seasonal patterns one year ago, which will boost artificially the adjusted data being reported at present. The Fed and the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) have acknowledged difficulties in these areas. Separately, the BLS effectively has acknowledged that its birth-death model — used in setting the reported levels of and month-to-month changes in payroll employment — is broken.

The retail sales and trade series are among those subject to these general issues, but the distortions often are not obvious.

Series Revisions and Surging Inflation Clouded November Retail Sales Reporting. Boosted by higher monthly gasoline prices, and an annual surge in same, Friday’s (December 11th) November retail sales report — issued by the Census Bureau — indicated a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted  monthly increase of 1.29% (1.32% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a downwardly revised 1.14% (previously 1.37%) monthly gain in October. 

On a year-to-year basis, the November year-ago comparison was against collapsing gasoline prices and gasoline station sales, the opposite of current trends.  Accordingly, November 2009 retail sales were reported up by 1.90% from November 2008, but that was thanks also to a boost from an unusually large downward revision to the November 2008 numbers.  Against the November 2008 retail sales in place with last month’s report, the November annual gain was 1.26%. The November annual gain followed a downwardly-revised annual decline of 2.01% (was 1.74%) in October.   In any event, with the impact of inflation removed, even the spiked November annual gain should be flat to minimally minus.

New Sampling Leaves Monthly and Annual Data Somewhat Non-Comparable. Every 30 months, or so, the Census Bureau revamps its sampling universe for the "advance" retail sales report, which is what provides the headline number on the series. Without a chance of seeing how earlier reporting would have fared with the new sampling, there is no way of telling to what extent the new universe may be impacting or biasing the headline monthly and annual changes.

Real Retail Sales. Removing the effects of inflation, November retail sales activity should show a monthly gain, but an annual change that is flat or in contraction. The pattern of ongoing, inflation-adjusted activity remains one of bottom-bouncing/plateauing at extremely low levels. Details will be updated and graphed with the Commentary following the November CPI release on Wednesday (December 16th).

Core Retail Sales.  A change in "core retail sales" methodology was introduced three months ago, where the net relative monthly increases and/or decreases in gasoline station and grocery store sales were subtracted from the full monthly retail sales number, instead of the total of gasoline station and grocery store sales each month. Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, the revamped reported "core" change more closely reflects the actual retail sales experience. This remains a work in progress and eventually will be used in the development of additional SGS alternative economic measures.

For the near-term, the "core" retail sales is reported in two versions, where Version I uses the original methodology, and Version II version appears to provide a more balanced picture of the impact food and energy inflation in the standard retail sales reporting.

Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales:

Version I — November retail sales net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — rose by 0.8% (0.9% net of revisions) versus the official aggregate gain of 1.3%.    

Version II — November retail sales net of the monthly change in grocery store and gasoline station revenues — rose by 0.6% (0.7% net of revisions) versus the official aggregate gain of 1.3%.

Reported October Trade Deficit Narrowed. The Census Bureau and Bureau of Economic Analysis reported that the seasonally-adjusted October trade deficit narrowed to $32.9 billion from a revised $35.7 (previously $36.5) billion in September. The trade improvement reflected a fall in the average price of imported oil from $68.17 per barrel in September to $67.39 in October, while physical imports showed an unseasonably sharp decline from 9.5 million barrels per day in September to 8.3 million barrels per day in October. In 2008 the daily barrels-per-day import rate soared from 8.4 million in September to 10.3 million in October, a pattern that certainly cannot be easy to stabilize in terms of regular seasonal activity. On top of seasonal factor distortions, it still appears as though irregular paperwork flows through Customs are impairing the reporting accuracy of imports.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the month ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Industrial Production (November 2009)Due for release on Tuesday, December 15th, the consensus estimate for November, per Briefing.com, is for a gain of roughly 0.5%, following a 0.1% pick-up in October. Reality is to the downside of expectations, with downside revisions to early periods a possibility. With distorted seasonals, however, almost anything is possible in the headline reporting.

Producer Price Index (November 2009)Due for release on Tuesday, December 15th, the November PPI is subject to the regular random volatility common to the series. Reporting risk generally is to the upside of expectations, though, which are around 0.8% per Briefing.com, versus 0.3% the month before.

Consumer Price Index (November 2009)Due for release on Wednesday, December 16th, consensus estimates for the seasonally-adjusted November CPI-U are around 0.4% per Briefing.com, versus 0.2% in October. Given the implied relative strength of gasoline and food prices in the November retail sales reporting, an upside surprise to consensus reporting is a fair possibility. A consensus report would boost year-to-year CPI-U inflation from minus 0.2% in October to roughly a positive 1.9% in November, a violent inflation spurt that will end the recent short-and-shallow period of formal deflation (negative year-to-year inflation).

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in November 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 1.67% adjusted monthly decline seen in November 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. To approximate the annual inflation rate for November 2009, the difference in November’s headline monthly change versus the year-ago monthly change should be added to or subtracted directly from October 2009’s annual inflation rate of negative 0.18%.

Housing Starts (November 2009)Due for release on Wednesday, December 16th, November housing starts likely will show monthly variation that remains statistically insignificant, within the series’ 95% confidence interval, which was +/- 10.2% for the October report. The level of activity likely will continue bouncing along its plateau of historically low-level activity.

 __________

No. 264: November Employment, Monetary Base

Friday, December 4th, 2009

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 264
November Employment, Monetary Base

December 4, 2009

 __________

 Employment and Unemployment Not Improving
Despite Distortions from Seasonal Factors and Revisions

Unemployment Rate U.3 at 10.0% (SGS 21.8%)

Fed Boosts Monetary Base Anew

 __________

PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Commentary is planned for Friday (December 11th), following release of the November retail sales report.

CORRECTION: A correction has been made to the TIPS comments in the hyperinflation update, as detailed at the end of this Commentary.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams 


Updated Outlook: The Economic Downturn Is Ongoing. Just in time to boost the confidence of Holiday Season shoppers, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) announced a 0.2% downturn in the November Unemployment rate, with November payroll employment virtually unchanged. Those results are nonsense, if taken literally. As discussed in Commentary 262, the better-quality series that underlie the government’s employment and unemployment reporting are showing ongoing deterioration, in particular the various help-wanted advertising and purchasing managers surveys.

Important to keep in mind is that the severity and duration of the current economic downturn — unprecedented in the post World War II era — has led to serious data distortions, particularly tied to seasonal adjustments. Such was noted recently by the Federal Reserve for some of its series, where patterns of sharp variations in reporting of activity a year ago — now being built into current seasonal-adjustment factors — are anything but regular seasonal patterns. Giving the BLS the benefit of the doubt on the unemployment rate, October’s above-consensus reported 0.4% surge in the headline unemployment rate likely was spiked by bad seasonals, which reversed in the November reporting. Such was touched upon in Commentary 262 on the outlook for today’s report. The upturn in the unemployment rate should return with December’s reporting. 

As discussed at the time, the earlier drop in the reported unemployment from 9.5% in July 2009, to 9.4% in August, was due to a seasonal-factor distortion tied to irregular timing for retooling of automobile production lines. Those distortions reversed in September, with the unemployment rate jumping to 9.7%.  Until stability returns to the unemployment-rate reporting, using a three-month moving average makes sense in terms of assessing direction.  The seasonally-unadjusted series does not get revised, except for changes to population estimates. The seasonally-adjusted series, however, has its seasonal factors restated annually, and the next revision there likely will smooth out some of the recent variability.   

On the other hand, the magnitude of today’s reported swing in the unemployment rate is reminiscent of another series in another time. In late-1987 and early-1988, a similar pattern (not tied to seasonals) of sharp deterioration and sudden improvement was orchestrated for the trade deficit. Such was an effort to support massive central bank intervention in favor of the U.S. dollar.

What happened with the November payroll survey is another matter. Despite the announcement of a pending 824,000 downward benchmark revision to May 2009, which means a likely ongoing downward revision of 200,000 jobs per month to current monthly payroll estimates, September and October data were revised upwards, sharply. The benchmark revisions and current corrections will not be published until February 2010. In the interim, the unadjusted payroll levels revised upward in October by 103,040, and the October adjusted level was revised higher by 159,000, well beyond the government’s 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000 jobs, and again warped by monthly revisions to the concurrent seasonal adjustment factors, which get reset each month. Such reverses the pattern seen in the last two years. Where the jobs-loss data were consistently being understated, now the losses are being overstated, if the numbers are to be believed.

There are serious flaws evident in the payroll employment survey, ranging from the inability of the birth-death model to handle a recession, to the use of a concurrent seasonal factor adjustment, which allows outright gaming of the numbers, should someone choose to do so. The short-term reporting of payroll data is misleading — virtually worthless — at the moment. Eventually, with revisions, a more accurate accounting will follow.        

The broad outlook on the economy and the market is unchanged. Greater detail there is explored in the updated hyperinflation report.

November Employment/Unemployment Reporting Heavily Distorted. As discussed in the opening comments, depression-warped seasonal factors likely were much more responsible for the improved Numbers employment and unemployment than any actual turn in economic activity.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 11,000 (up by 148,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for November 2009, following a revised 111,000 (previously 190,000) jobs loss in October.

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; the current month of November also is the short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment has declined by a seasonally-adjusted 7,156,000 jobs, or by 5.2%. Net of the pending benchmark revision, the peak-to-trough decline likely has been closer to 9 million jobs or 6.5%.

Non-fram Payroll Employment Chart

As the pace of reported monthly decline has slowed against year-ago comparisons, year-to-year contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls narrowed to 3.4% in November, from a revised 3.9% (was 4.0%) in October, and a 60-year low of a 4.4% decline in August. Adjusted for the benchmark revision due for release in February 2010, however, November’s annual decline likely was around 5.6%, still the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown following World War II, which hit a record trough of a 7.6% contraction in September 1945. Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the current annual decline would be the worst since the Great Depression.    

Underlying economic series (such as the purchasing managers and help-wanted advertising surveys, and new claims for unemployment insurance) remain consistent with a monthly jobs loss of roughly 500,000. Such reflects what should be close to current reporting, with near-term revisions, and with aggregated birth-death model understatement of roughly 200,000 jobs per month. The current report, however, is well removed from other indications of underlying reality.

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias.  The pattern of impossible biases being built into the headline monthly payroll employment continued its reversal for the fourth month in the last five, with a downside bias of 98,000 jobs in November 2009 reporting. Instead of the headline jobs loss of 11,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what I call the concurrent seasonal factor bias (CSFB) — would have shown an outright monthly jobs gain of 87,000. This factor has generated an upside reporting bias seen in seven of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 312,000. The recent reversals appear to reflect a shift in the nature payroll reporting, which will be assessed in shortly in a future Commentary. A worksheet on this is available upon request. (See SGS Newsletter No. 50, for further background.)

 Headline Unemployment Changes Chart

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  As discussed in recent months and in SGS Newsletter No. 51, Birth-Death Model biases tend to overstate payroll employment during recessions. The flaws here were confirmed with the BLS estimate of an 824,000 downside benchmark revision for May 2009, reported two months ago, with a suggested ongoing monthly understatement of 200,000 or more in jobs losses per month. The BLS indicated that their underlying assumptions to the Birth-Death Model were missing certain jobs losses. Specifically, if a company fails to report its payroll employment, the BLS assumes the company did not go out of business and assigns it a level of employment commensurate with its prior reporting and industry trends.

Never designed to handle the downside pressures from an economic contraction — in addition to the flawed underlying assumptions — the model adds a fairly consistent upside bias to the payroll levels each year, currently averaging about 74,000 jobs per month. The unadjusted November 2009 bias was a monthly addition of 30,000 jobs, up from 19,000 the year before, but down from 86,000 in October 2009.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed employment rose by 227,000 in October, versus a decline of 589,000 in September. As discussed in the opening comments, these data likely have been distorted by the depression’s impact on seasonal-adjustment factors. Looking at a three-month moving average of the seasonally-adjusted headline numbers likely is a worthwhile venture, until the seasonal factor adjustments are stabilized. On a three-month moving-average basis, November employment was down by 382,000, versus a decline of 589,000 (same as the monthly number) in October.

The October 2009 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-insignificant decrease to 9.99% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from 10.20% in October.  Unadjusted U.3 eased to 9.4% in November from 9.5% in October. The three-moving average for the seasonally-adjusted series was 10.01% in November versus 9.90% in October.  

The broader November U.6 unemployment eased to an adjusted 17.2% (16.4% unadjusted), from 17.5% (16.3% unadjusted) in October.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers. The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed, unemployment — more in line with common experience as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — eased to about 21.8% in November, from 22.1% in October. See the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com for a graph and more detail.

While 21.8% unemployment might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession. The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms. Today, less that 2% work on farms. Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

Fed Renews Monetary Base Surge as Broad Money Growth Continues to Falter.  Despite some suggestions of the Fed preparing to ease back on its extraordinary systemic-liquefaction efforts of the last year, the monetary base jumped to a new high in the two-week period ending December 2nd. Such followed a minor pullback in the prior period.

 St Louis Fed Adjusted Monetary Base

As shown in the above graph of the St. Louis Fed’s Adjusted Monetary Base (seasonally adjusted), the level of the monetary base has been pushed to a record high, at an annualized rate of growth since the series’ near-term trough in the two-week period ended August 16th, more than three months ago, of 102%. Such was up from an annualized pace of 96% in the prior two week period, but down from the 126% annualized pace in the November 4th period. The monetary base consists of currency in circulation plus bank reserves, and it is the Fed’s traditional tool for targeting money supply growth.

The money supply measures, however, continue to be immune to the surge in bank reserves, with banks leaving heavy excess reserves on deposit with the Fed, rather than lending into the normal stream of commerce. Formal initial monthly average and year-to-year percent change estimates for M1, M2 and the SGS-Ongoing M3 for November will be published this weekend on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com

While M1 and M2 (which includes M1) appear to have risen again month-to-month for November, year-to-year growth has softened further. November M3, however, appears likely to show its fifth consecutive month-to-month decline, with year-to-year change slowing to around 1.5% from an estimated 1.9% in October. There have large declines in institutional money funds and large time deposits, which more than have offset small growth in M2, and which should pull annual M3 growth into negative territory come December.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will tend towards higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the month ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Trade Balance (October 2009)Due for release on Thursday, December 10th, the October trade deficit should continue to widen, perhaps beyond consensus expectations of minor deterioration (Briefing.com), adding some downside pressure to fourth-quarter GDP growth estimates. The magnitude of deterioration depends to a certain extent on catch-up reporting on what appears to be some lagging paperwork flows on import activity.

Retail Sales (November 2009)Due for release on Friday, December 11th, November retail sales are expected to show a monthly gain of 0.5%, per Briefing.com, against October’s 1.4%. Reporting risks are to the downside of consensus, and, net of inflation adjustment, retail sales should show no meaningful monthly growth, with ongoing year-to-year remaining in contraction.

Correction to TIPS Comments in Hyperinflation Special Report (Update 2010). Text in the hyperinflation update wrongly stated that the principal of U.S. Treasury’s inflation adjusted notes and bonds (TIPS) was not adjusted for inflation; principal is adjusted. Such, however does not change the nature of the related comments. The corrected and slightly expanded text has been changed in the html and PDF copies of the report available on www.shadowstats.com and follows here:

TIPS (Corrected Text). The U.S. Treasury offers securities where yields and principal get adjusted regularly for the rate of inflation. In a hyperinflation, price changes can be so rapid that the principal and/or yield adjustment would lag enough so as to make the adjustments worthless. The reporting lag in calculating the adjusting CPI index — if it even could be calculated — still would wipe out investors, unless the Treasury became particularly creative and began benchmarking to spot gold or such, but nothing like that is in place.

As to the potential rapidity of price change, consider some anecdotal evidence. One story out of Weimar Germany involved buying an expensive bottle of wine for dinner. The empty bottle was worth more as scrap glass the next morning than it had been worth as a full bottle of wine the night before. Another story involved negotiating the price and paying for a meal, before sitting down, as the price of the meal would be higher by the time it was finished.

__________

Hyperinflation Special Report (Update 2010)

Wednesday, December 2nd, 2009

 

Update: March 15th, 2011: 

A fully updated, "2011" version of this Hyperinflation Report has been published:  Hyperinflaton Special Report (Update 2011)

 

 

HYPERINFLATION SPECIAL REPORT (UPDATE 2010)

Commentary Number 263

December 2, 2009

__________

 Economy and Financial System Face Eventual Great Collapse

Government and Fed Actions Have Narrowed Timing for
 Hyperinflationary Great Depression to Next Five Years

High Risk of Ultimate Dollar Crisis Unfolding in Year Ahead

__________

Please Note: Given less than one month before the New Year and the possible breaking of the hyperinflation crisis in the year ahead, I have entitled this "Update 2010." The report is intended to replace the Hyperinflation Special Report of April 8, 2008, which was published post-Bear Stearns but pre-Lehman, pre-TARP, pre-recession recognition and pre-2008 election. Nonetheless, the outlook has changed little. In turn, the April 2008 report updated and expanded upon the three-part Hyperinflation Series that began with the December 2006 SGS Newsletter.

The new missive includes much of the text in the prior edition, with revisions and updates reflecting the still-unfolding economic and systemic solvency crises, and it expands upon some areas touched upon in the previous report. SGS Special Reports published subsequent to April 2008 have supplemented the hyperinflation story and are incorporated by reference in this update: Money Supply Special Report (August 3, 2008), Depression Special Report (August 1, 2009), Consumer Liquidity Special Report (September 14, 2009).

 

Overview

A Great Collapse. The U.S. economic and systemic solvency crises of the last two years are just precursors to a Great Collapse: a hyperinflationary great depression. Such will reflect a complete collapse in the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar, a collapse in the normal stream of U.S. commercial and economic activity, a collapse in the U.S. financial system as we know it, and a likely realignment of the U.S. political environment. The current U.S. financial markets, financial system and economy remain highly unstable and vulnerable to unexpected shocks. The Federal Reserve is dedicated to preventing deflation, to debasing the U.S. dollar. The results of those efforts are being seen in tentative selling pressures against the U.S. currency and in the rallying price of gold. 

Crises Brewed by Federal Government and Federal Reserve Malfeasance. The crises have been generated out of and are centered on the United States financial system, triggered by the collapse of debt excesses actively encouraged by the Greenspan Federal Reserve. Recognizing that the U.S. economy was sagging under the weight of structural changes created by government trade, regulatory and social policies — policies that limited real consumer income growth — Mr. Greenspan played along with the political and banking systems. He made policy decisions to steal economic activity from the future, fueling economic growth of the last decade largely through debt expansion. 

The Greenspan Fed pushed for ever-greater systemic leverage, including the happy acceptance of new financial products, which included instruments of mis-packaged lending risks, designed for consumption by global entities that openly did not understand the nature of the risks being taken. Complicit in this broad malfeasance was the U.S. government, including both major political parties in successive Administrations and Congresses.

As with consumers, the federal government could not make ends meet while appeasing that portion of the electorate that could be kept docile by ever-expanding government programs and increasing government spending. The solution was ever-expanding federal debt and deficits. 

Purportedly, it was Arthur Burns, Fed Chairman under Richard Nixon, who first offered the advice that helped to guide Alan Greenspan and a number of Administrations. The gist of the wisdom imparted was that if you ran into problems, you could ignore the budget deficit and the dollar. Ignoring them did not matter, because doing so would not cost you any votes. 

Back in 2005, I raised the issue of a then-inevitable U.S. hyperinflation with an advisor to both the Bush Administration and Fed Chairman Greenspan. I was told simply that "It’s too far into the future to worry about." 

Indeed, pushing the big problems into the future appears to have been the working strategy for both the Fed and recent Administrations. Yet, the U.S. dollar and the budget deficit do matter, and the future is at hand. The day of ultimate financial reckoning has arrived, and it is playing out.

Saving the System at Any Cost. The Federal Reserve and the U.S. Treasury moved early in the current solvency crisis to prevent a collapse of the banking system, at any cost. It was the collapse of the banking system and loss of depositor assets in the early-1930s that intensified the Great Depression and its attendant deflation. A somewhat parallel risk was envisioned in 2008 as the system passed over the brink. The decision was made to avoid a deflationary great depression.

Effective financial impairments and at least partial nationalizations or orchestrated bailouts/takeovers resulted for institutions such as Bear Stearns, Citigroup, Washington Mutual, AIG, General Motors, Chrysler, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, along with a number of further troubled financial institutions. The Fed moved to provide whatever systemic liquidity would be needed, while the federal government moved to finance corporate bailouts and to introduce significant stimulus spending.

Curiously, though, the Fed and the Treasury let Lehman Brothers fail outright, which triggered a foreseeable run on the system and markedly intensified the systemic solvency crisis in September 2008. Whether someone was trying to play political games, with the public and Congress increasingly raising questions of moral hazard issues, or whether the U.S. financial wizards missed what would happen or simply moved to bring the crisis to a head, remains to be seen.

In the midst of the crises, the Obama Administration has introduced major new government programs, ranging from carbon tax plans to a national health care and insurance program. Irrespective of any stated goals of not increasing the federal deficit further, these programs will have severely negative impact on the federal deficit, either from massive net expenses, or from losses in tax revenues in a weaker economy. The various initiatives generally will act as major depressants on business activity. The U.S. Treasury has delayed publishing the U.S. Government’s 2009 GAAP-based financial statements for two months, until February 2010. With my estimate of a GAAP-based 2009 annual deficit of roughly $9 trillion, there may some method in pushing off unhappy accounting until after the health-care package is resolved.        

While the system will be saved at any cost, and the government will spend whatever it can spend until the financial markets rebel, the ultimate cost here will be in inflation and the increasing debasement of the purchasing power of the U.S. Dollar.

Hyperinflation Nears. Before the systemic solvency crisis began to unfold in 2007, the U.S. government already had condemned the U.S. dollar to a hyperinflationary grave by taking on debt and obligations that never could be covered through raising taxes and/or by severely slashing government spending that had become politically untouchable. The U.S. economy also already had entered a severe structural downturn, which helped to trigger the systemic solvency crisis. 

The intensifying economic and solvency crises, and the responses to both by the U.S. government and the Federal Reserve in the last two years, have exacerbated the government’s solvency issues and moved forward my timing estimation for the hyperinflation to the next five years, from the 2010 to 2018 timing range estimated in the prior report. The U.S. government and Federal Reserve already have committed the system to this course through the easy politics of a bottomless pocketbook, the servicing of big-moneyed special interests, gross mismanagement, and a deliberate and ongoing effort to debase the U.S. currency. Accordingly, risks are particularly high of the hyperinflation crisis breaking within the next year.  

Numerous foreign governments have offered unusually blunt criticism of U.S. fiscal and Federal Reserve policies in the last year. Both private and official demand for U.S. Treasuries increasingly is unenthusiastic. Looming with uncertain timing is a panicked dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-denominated paper assets. Such is the most likely event to trigger the onset of hyperinflation in the year ahead. 

The U.S. has no way of avoiding a financial Armageddon. Bankrupt sovereign states most commonly use the currency printing press as a solution to not having enough money to cover obligations. The alternative would be for the U.S. to renege on its existing debt and obligations, a solution for modern sovereign states rarely seen outside of governments overthrown in revolution, and a solution with no happier ending than simply printing the needed money. With the creation of massive amounts of new fiat dollars (not backed by gold or silver) will come the eventual destruction of the value of the U.S. dollar and related dollar-denominated paper assets.

What lies ahead will be extremely difficult, painful and unhappy times for many in the United States. The functioning and adaptation of the U.S. economy and financial markets to a hyperinflation likely would be particularly disruptive. Trouble could range from turmoil in the food distribution chain to electronic cash and credit systems unable to handle rapidly changing circumstances. The situation quickly would devolve from a deepening depression, to an intensifying hyperinflationary great depression.

While the economic difficulties would have global impact, the initial hyperinflation should be largely a U.S. problem, albeit with major implications for the global currency system. For those living in the United States, long-range strategies should look to assure safety and survival, which from a financial standpoint means preserving wealth and assets. Also directly impacted, of course, are those holding or dependent upon U.S. dollars or dollar-denominated assets, and those living in "dollarized" countries.

The balance of this special report is broken into the following sections:

  • Defining the Components of a Hyperinflationary Great Depression
  • Two Examples of Hyperinflation
  • Current Economic and Inflation Conditions in the United States
  • Historical U.S. Inflation: Why Hyperinflation Instead of Deflation
  • U.S. Government Cannot Cover Existing Obligations
  • Hyperinflationary Great Depression
  • Closing Comments

  

Defining the Components of a Hyperinflationary Great Depression

Deflation, Inflation and Hyperinflation. Inflation broadly is defined in terms of a rise in general prices due to an increase in the amount of money in circulation. The inflation/deflation issues defined and discussed here are as applied to goods and services, not to the pricing of financial assets.

In terms of hyperinflation, there have been a variety of definitions used over time. The circumstance envisioned ahead is not one of double- or triple- digit annual inflation, but more along the lines of seven- to 10-digit inflation seen in other circumstances during the last century. Under such circumstances, the currency in question becomes worthless, as seen in Germany (Weimar Republic) in the early 1920s, in Hungary after World War II, in the dismembered Yugoslavia of the early 1990s and most recently, in Zimbabwe where the pace of hyperinflation may have been the most extreme ever seen.

The historical culprit generally has been the use of fiat currencies — currencies with no hard-asset backing such as gold — and the resulting massive printing of currency that the issuing authority needed to support its spending, when it did not have the ability, otherwise, to raise enough money for its perceived needs, through taxes or other means.

Ralph T. Foster (hereinafter cited as Foster) in Fiat Paper Money, The History and Evolution of Our Currency (see recommended further reading at the end of this report) details the history of fiat paper currencies from 11th century Szechwan, China, to date, and the consistent collapse of those currencies, time-after-time, due to what appears to be the inevitable, irresistible urge of issuing authorities to print too much of a good thing. The United States is no exception, already having obligated itself to liabilities well beyond its ability ever to pay off.

Here are the definitions:

Deflation: A decrease in the prices of goods and services, usually tied to a contraction of money in circulation. Formal deflation is measured in terms of year-to-year change.

Inflation: An increase in the prices of goods and services, usually tied to an increase of money in circulation. 

Hyperinflation: Extreme inflation, minimally in excess of four-digit annual percent change, where the involved currency becomes worthless. A fairly crude definition of hyperinflation is a circumstance, where, due to extremely rapid price increases, the largest pre-hyperinflation bank note ($100 bill in the United States) becomes worth more as functional toilet paper/tissue than as currency.

As discussed in the section on "Historical U.S. Inflation," the domestic economy has been through periods of both major inflation and deflation, usually tied to wars and their aftermaths. Such, however, preceded the U.S. going off the domestic gold standard in 1933 and abandoning international convertibility in 1971. The era of the modern fiat dollar generally has been one of persistent and slowly debilitating inflation.

Recession, Depression and Great Depression. A couple of decades back, I tried to tie down the definitional differences between a recession, depression and a great depression with the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) and a number of private economists. I found that there was no consensus on the matter, where popular usage of the term "depression" had taken on the meaning of a severe recession, so I set some definitions that the various parties (neither formally nor officially) thought were within reason.

If you look at the plot of the level of economic activity during a downturn, you will see something that looks like a bowl, with activity recessing on the downside and recovering on the upside. The term used to describe this bowl-shaped circumstance before World War II was "depression," while the downside portion of the cycle was called "recession," and the upside was called "recovery." Before World War II, all downturns simply were referred to as depressions. In the wake of the Great Depression of the 1930s, however, a euphemism was sought for future economic contractions so as to avoid evoking memories of that earlier, financially painful time.

Accordingly, a post-World War II downturn was called "recession." Officially, the worst post-World War II recession was from November 1973 through March 1975, with a peak-to-trough contraction of 5%. Such followed the Vietnam War, Nixon’s floating of the U.S. dollar and the Oil Embargo. The double-dip recession in the early-1980s may have seen a combined contraction of roughly 6%. I contend that the current double-dip recession that began in late-2000 already has surpassed the 1980s double-dip as to depth.  (See the Reporting/Market Focus of the October 2007 SGS and the Depression Special Report for further detail.) Here are the definitions:

Recession:Two or more consecutive quarters of contracting real (inflation-adjusted) GDP, where the downturn is not triggered by an exogenous factor such as a truckers’ strike. The NBER, which is the official arbiter of when the United States economy is in recession, attempts to refine its timing calls, on a monthly basis, through the use of economic series such as payroll employment and industrial production, and it no longer relies on the two quarters of contracting GDP rule.

Depression:A recession, where the peak-to-trough contraction in real growth exceeds 10%.

Great Depression:A depression, where the peak-to-trough contraction in real growth exceeds 25%.

On the basis of the preceding, there has been the one Great Depression, in the 1930s.  Most of the economic contractions before that would be classified as depressions.  All business downturns since World War II — as officially reported — have been recessions. Using a the somewhat narrower "great depression" definition of a contraction in excess of 20% (instead of 25%), the depression of 1837 to 1843 would be considered "great," as would be the war-time production shut-down in 1945, at least technically.

Two Examples of Hyperinflation

Weimar Republic. Ralph Foster closes his book’s preface with a particularly poignant quote from a 1993 interview of Friedrich Kessler, a law professor whose university affiliations included, among others, Harvard and University of California Berkeley. From firsthand experience, Kessler described the Weimar Republic hyperinflation:

"It was horrible. Horrible! Like lightning it struck. No one was prepared. You cannot imagine the rapidity with which the whole thing happened. The shelves in the grocery stores were empty. You could buy nothing with your paper money."

The hyperinflation in Germany’s Weimar Republic is along the lines of what likely will unfold in the United States. The following two graphs plot the same numbers, but on different scales. The data are the monthly averages of the number of paper German marks that equaled one dollar (gold-backed) in 1922 and 1923, with that number acting as something of a surrogate for the pace of inflation. 

The first plot is a simple arithmetic plot, but the earlier detail is masked by the extreme numbers of the last several months, suggestive of an extraordinarily rapid and large rise in the pace of inflation. The second plot is on a logarithmic scale, where each successive power of ten represents the next tick mark on the vertical scale.

While the hyperinflation did hit rapidly, annual inflation in January 1922 already was more than 200%, up from as low as 6% in April 1921. The existing currency was abandoned at the end of 1923.

Milton Friedman and Anna Jacobson Schwartz noted in their classic A Monetary History of the United States that the early stages of the Weimar Republic hyperinflation was accompanied by a huge influx of foreign capital, much as had happened during the U.S. Civil War.  The speculative influx of capital into the U.S. at the time of the Civil War inflation helped to stabilize the system, as the foreign capital influx into the U.S. in recent years has helped to provide relative stability and strength to the equity and credit markets.  Following the Civil War, however, the underlying U.S. economy had significant untapped potential and was able to generate strong, real economic activity that covered the war’s spending excesses.

Post-World War I Germany was a different matter, where the country was financially and economically depleted as a penalty for losing the war.  Here, after initial benefit, the influx of foreign capital helped to destabilize the system. "As the mark depreciated, foreigners at first were persuaded that it would subsequently appreciate and so bought a large volume of mark assets …"  Such boosted the foreign exchange value of the German mark and the value of German assets.  "As the German inflation went on, expectations were reversed, the inflow of capital was replaced by an outflow, and the mark depreciated more rapidly … (Friedman p. 76)."

Indeed, in the wake of its defeat in the Great War, Germany was forced to make debilitating reparations to the victors — particularly France — as well as to face loss of territory. From Foster (Chapter 11):

"By late 1922, the German government could no longer afford to make reparations payments. Indignant, the French invaded the Ruhr Valley to take over the production of iron and coal (commodities used for reparations). In response, the German government encouraged its workers to go on strike. An additional  

German Paper Marks per U.S. 1922-1923

German Paper Marks per U.S. Dollar 1922-1923

 

issue of paper money was authorized to sustain the economy during the crisis. Sensing trouble, foreign investors abruptly withdrew their investments.

"During the first few months of 1923, prices climbed astronomically higher, with no end in sight… The nation was effectively shut down by currency collapse. Mailing a letter in late 1923 cost 21,500,000,000 marks."

The worthless German mark became useful as wall paper and toilet paper, as well as for stoking fires.

The Weimar circumstance, and its heavy reliance on foreign investment, was closer to the current U.S. situation than it was to the U.S. Civil War experience. In certain aspects, the current U.S. situation is even worse than the Weimar situation. It certainly is worse than the Civil war circumstance.  

Unlike the untapped economic potential of the United States 145 years ago, today’s U.S. economy is languishing in the structural problems of the loss of its manufacturing base and a shift of domestic wealth offshore; it is mired in an economic contraction that is immune to traditional economic stimuli. As the U.S. government has attempted in recent decades to assuage electorate discontent with ever more expensive social programs; as the Federal Reserve has moved to encourage debt expansion as a remedy for lack of real, inflation-adjusted, income growth; the eventual bankruptcy of the U.S. dollar was locked in. The problem here was taken on and created willingly by U.S. government officials — embraced by both major political parties — not imposed by a victorious and vengeful enemy of war.

In the early 1920s, foreign investors in Germany were not propping up the world’s reserve currency in an effort to prevent a global financial collapse, and they did not know in advance that they were doomed to take a large hit on their German investments.  In today’s environment, both central banks and major private investors know that the U.S. dollar will be a losing proposition.  They either expect and/or hope that they can get out of the dollar in time to avoid losses, or, in the case of the central banks, that they can forestall the ultimate global economic crisis. Such expectations and hopes have dimmed markedly in the last two years, as the untenable U.S. fiscal condition has gained more public and global recognition.  

Zimbabwe. Hyperinflation in Zimbabwe, the former Rhodesia, was a quadrillion times worse than it was in Weimar Germany. Zimbabwe went through a number of years of high inflation, with an accelerating hyperinflation from 2006 to 2009, when the currency was abandoned. Through three devaluations, excess zeros repeatedly were lopped off notes as high as 100 trillion Zimbabwe dollars. 

 

The cumulative devaluation of the Zimbabwe dollar was such that a stack of 100,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000 (26 zeros) two dollar bills (if they were printed) in the peak hyperinflation would have be needed to equal in value what a single original Zimbabwe two-dollar bill of 1978 had been worth. Such a pile of bills literally would be light years high, stretching from the Earth to the Andromeda Galaxy. 

In early-2009, the governor of the Zimbabwe Reserve Bank indicated he felt his actions in printing money were vindicated by the recent actions of the U.S. Federal Reserve.  If the U.S. went through a hyperinflation like that of Zimbabwe’s, total U.S. federal debt and obligations (roughly $75 trillion with unfunded liabilities) could be paid off for much less than a current penny.

This image of a sign in a restroom facility at a South African border station with Zimbabwe speaks for itself.

 Toilet Paper Only - No Zimbabwe Dollars

What helped to enable the evolution of the Zimbabwe monetary excesses over the years, while still having something of a functioning economy, was the back-up of a well functioning black market in U.S. dollars. The United States has no such backup system, however, with implications for a more rapid and disruptive hyperinflation than seen in Zimbabwe, when it hits. This will be discussed later.

 

Current Economic and Inflation Conditions in the United States

Economic Activity and Inflation. Before examining how the current circumstance can evolve from a severe recession, with a recent short and shallow bout with formal deflation, into a hyperinflationary great depression, it is worth defining the nature of the current economic and inflation conditions in the United States and likely near-term developments. 

As discussed in the regular SGS Commentaries, the U.S. economy remains in a structural recession/ depression, where recession recognition as of December 2007 became official following the prior hyperinflation report. At the same time, due to extreme fluctuations in oil prices, where an oil-price collapse eliminated oil-induced inflation pressures building at the time of the prior report, consumer inflation experienced a brief and shallow dip into official (year-to-year) deflation, through the October 2009 CPI. The November CPI will resume positive annual inflation, partially due to a renewed upturn in oil prices.

The current downturn, as reported, already is the longest and the deepest business contraction since the first downleg of the Great Depression in the early 1930s. Such is reflected in payroll employment and GDP growth plotted in the following graphs. The payroll graph adjusts for the size of the recently announced pending benchmark revision to the series. The quarterly GDP numbers are published only back to 1947. If one counts the war production shutdown at the end of World War II as a normal business cycle, then the current downturn is the deepest since then, but still the longest since the early 1930s. The respective depths of the Great Depression and post-war production contractions are based on annual data available back to 1929.

While the official peak-to-trough contraction in the current downturn, per official real GDP is 3.8% (second-quarter 2009), most of the better economic series are showing contractions of greater than 10% (depression range), such as retail sales and industrial production, while others are showing contractions of greater than 25% (great depression range), such as new orders for durable goods and various statistics indicating the level of housing activity. Revisions to the GDP over several years eventually should show the current level of GDP activity to have been at depression level. The evolving depression quickly will move to great depression status, at such time as the hyperinflation hits, since that will be extremely disruptive to the conduct of normal commerce.

Net of gimmicked methodologies that have inflated GDP reporting over the decades, the U.S. economy has been in recession since late-2006, entering the second down-leg of a multiple-dip economic contraction, where the first downleg was the recession of 2001, which actually began back in late-1999. The current downturn may evolve into a further multiple-dip circumstance. The Great Depression was a double-dip contraction. (See the Reporting/Market Focus of the October 2007 SGS and the Depression Special Report for further detail.)

The current economic downturn has been so protracted and severe that regular year-to-year comparisons and the seasonal adjustment process have forced new types of analyses and have led to major warping of regular economic reporting. Where a number of series, again, such as retail sales and industrial production, have leveled off at low-level plateaus of economic activity, year-ago comparisons have become less negative, but there has been no meaningful pick-up in economic activity.

 Nonfarm Payroll Employment

Gross Domestic Product

Economic activity has sunk to such lows that regular measures of change that are followed closely by the financial markets — such as new claims for unemployment insurance — are not signaling economic recovery, as they turn less negative, only that activity is beginning to plateau at an unusually low level. With stimulus packages having had their initial impacts, with broad domestic liquidity (see money supply discussion) contracting at a pace that would promise an economic downturn in the best of times, and with consumers’ liquidity problems intensifying, the contraction in U.S. economic activity likely will accelerate anew in the early months of 2010.  

Consumer Liquidity Structural Problems. The U.S. economy is in a deepening structural change that has resulted from U.S. trade, social and regulatory policies driving a goodly portion of the U.S. manufacturing and technology base offshore. As a result, a large number of related, high paying jobs have disappeared for U.S. workers. Accordingly, U.S. consumers have found increasingly that their household incomes fail to keep up with inflation. Without real growth in income, there cannot be sustained economic growth. Growth driven by debt expansion, as encouraged by the Fed in recent years, ultimately is not sustainable, as has become painfully obvious to many in the current systemic solvency crisis. Greater detail on these and related comments are found in the Consumer Liquidity Special Report.

As shown in the next graph, the U.S. trade deficit has narrowed in the current downturn, with lowered U.S. consumption and with a brief collapse in oil prices. There has been, however, no fundamental shift in circumstances to suggest a healthy move in U.S. economic activity towards a fundamentally improved trade balance or a shift towards reinvigorating the U.S. manufacturing base. 

The deterioration in median household income has resulted in greater variance in income, as shown in the second graph, which has negative longer term economic implications. A person earning $100,000,000 per year is not going to buy that many more automobiles that someone earning $100,000 per year. The stronger the middle class is, generally the stronger will be the economy. Historically, extremes in income variance usually are followed by financial panics and economic depressions. Income variance today is higher than it was coming into 1929 and 1987, and it is nearly double that of any other "advanced" economy.

The next two graphs show official weakness in inflation-adjusted income. The top plot of the solid line shows real average weekly earnings, as reported and deflated by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) using the regular CPI-W. Real wages never have recovered their pre-1973 to 1975 recession peak. As wages dropped over the decades, the number of people in an average household that had to work, in order to make ends meet, increased.

The second graph reflects median household income over the years. The thicker line shows income deflated by the regular CPI-U, a measure somewhat broader than the CPI-W. Those inflation-adjusted numbers show that median household income, as of 2008, never recovered its pre-2001 recession peak and stood below its level of 1973. Deflated by the CPI-U-RS (current methods), discussed below, the pre-2001 recession peak also still has not been recovered.

In the last several decades, the BLS introduced a variety of new methodologies into the calculation of the CPI, with the effect of reducing the level of reported CPI inflation. The general approach has been to move the CPI away from its traditional measuring of the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living. The lower the rate of inflation used in deflating a number, the stronger is the resulting inflation-adjusted growth. The CPI-U-RS is the CPI with its history restated as if all the new methodologies had

U.S. Trade Balance 

Income Dispersion

Real Average Weekly Earnings

Median Household Income

 

been in place from day one. The impact of the changes is evident in the two lines, with the thinner CPI-U-RS deflated line showing stronger relative growth. It would run higher than the top line if the years set equal were 1967 instead of 2008. 

The broad point on income is that it is inadequate to sustain positive, inflation-adjusted economic activity. In the absence of income growth, debt expansion can act as a short-term prop for the economy, but that is not available at present. The system is in the throes of a solvency crisis, with banks reducing lending to consumers.

The broad point on the inflation measure is that by reverse-engineering the CPI-U-RS, current inflation reporting can be estimated as though it were free of the inflation-dampening methodologies. Such has been done with the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure. In the plot of the real average weekly earnings, the dotted line reflects the series deflated by the SGS-Alternate CPI, and that shows the consumers’ liquidity squeeze to be more severe for those hoping to maintain a constant standard of living, than as indicated otherwise by official reporting.

Inflation. Inflationary pressures have started to surface from the Fed’s efforts at dollar debasement. A weakening U.S. dollar has placed upside pressure on dollar-denominated oil prices, which in turn have begun pushing annual inflation higher. This is not inflation generated by strong economic demand, but rather inflation driven by Federal Reserve efforts to weaken the dollar.   

 Annual Consumer Inflation

 

Though still well shy of the peak levels seen in 2008, oil and gasoline prices have soared since their near-term lows at the end of last year. The relative collapse, in latter 2008, of gasoline and oil prices triggered a period of year-to-year decline — formal deflation — in the CPI-U. Now with relatively high prices going against falling prices in year-ago comparisons, annual CPI inflation will turn positive, once more, as of November. As reported by the BLS, annual CPI-U inflation for October 2009 was not statistically distinguishable from zero; the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure was about 7.1%. 

For all of 2009, CPI-U average annual inflation should be less than a 0.5% contraction (deflation), with the SGS-Alternate at something shy of 7%. As measured December 2009 over December 2008, official annual CPI-U inflation should be close to 2% with the SGS-Alternate around 9%. A strengthening pick-up in official annual CPI inflation should be evident in early 2010. 

The recent annual declines in CPI inflation were the biggest since 1949 to 1950. CPI reporting methods used in then, however, would have generated current inflation rates that did not drop below 5%, at worst, in the current cycle. The brief and shallow formal deflation that now is at an end — based on official CPI-U reporting — appears to have been about half the depth and half the length of the negative inflation bout in the 1949 to 1950 circumstance.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact, not otherwise published by the BLS (see SGS-Alternate CPI discussion).

Political Considerations. What lies ahead for the economy and inflation will have significant impact on the U.S. political process, as recent economic woes did on the 2008 election.  Historically, the concerns of the electorate have been dominated by pocketbook issues.  Prior to gimmicked methodologies making the reporting of disposable personal income largely meaningless, that measure was an excellent predictor of presidential elections.

In every presidential race since 1908, in which consistent, real (inflation-adjusted) annual disposable income growth was above 3.3%, the incumbent party holding the White House won every time. When income growth was below 3.3%, the incumbent party lost every time.  Again, with redefinitions to the national income accounts in the last two decades, a consistent measure of disposable income as reported by the government has disappeared. Yet, even with official reporting, 2008 annual growth in real disposable income was 0.5%, well below the traditional 3.3% limit. As was suggested would be the case in the prior report, such contributed to the Republicans losing the White House in 2008. Where I always endeavor to keep my political persuasions separate from my analyses, for purposes of full disclosure, my background is as a conservative Republican with a libertarian bent.

A wide variety of possibilities would follow or coincide politically with a hyperinflationary great depression, but the political status quo likely would not continue.  Times would be financially painful enough to encourage the development of a third party that could move the Republicans or Democrats to third-party status in the 2012 presidential and congressional elections. Present economic conditions are bleak enough to impair re-election prospects severely for incumbents in the 2010 mid-term election.

Untenable Positions for the Federal Government and the Federal Reserve. The effect of the structural income problems on the economy has been that most consumers have been unable to sustain adequate income growth beyond the rate of inflation, unable to maintain their standard of living.  The only way that personal consumption — the dominant component of GDP — can grow in such a circumstance is for the consumer to take on new debt or to liquidate savings.  Both those factors are short-lived and have reached unsustainable extremes. Debt expansion and savings liquidation both were encouraged by the investment bubbles created by Alan Greenspan; he knew that economic growth could not be had otherwise. Part of what is happening today is payback for those policies. 

This circumstance places both the federal government and the Federal Reserve in untenable positions, where they cannot easily or rapidly address the underlying problems, even if standard economic stimuli would work.  From the standpoint of the federal government, traditional fiscal stimulus in the form of tax cuts or increased federal spending have reached their practical limits, with the actual annual budget deficit running out of control at roughly $9.0 trillion per year. Yet, that likely will not keep political Washington from pushing its deficit spending until the markets rebel. After all, there is an election in 2010. It is that market rebellion, however, that will set the hyperinflation stage.

From the Fed’s standpoint, it can neither stimulate the economy nor contain inflation.  Lowering rates has run its course and done little to stimulate the structurally-impaired economy, and raising rates may become necessary in defense of the dollar.  Similarly, raising rates will do little to contain a non-demand driven inflation, such as seen developing in the current circumstance so heavily affected by oil prices. Continued efforts to debase the dollar should be successful, but not in stimulating economic activity, only in triggering an accelerating pace of inflation.

With the economy in depression, hyperinflation kicking in quickly should pull the economy into a great depression, since uncontained inflation is likely to bring normal commercial activity to a halt.

 

 

Historical U.S. Inflation: Why Hyperinflation Instead of Deflation

 

Fire and Ice

Some say the world will end in fire,
Some say in ice.
From what I’ve tasted of desire
I hold with those who favor fire.
But if it had to perish twice,
I think I know enough of hate
To say that for destruction ice
Is also great
And would suffice.

– Robert Frost

 

As to the fate of the developing U.S. great depression, it will encompass the fire of a hyperinflation, instead of the ice of deflation seen in the major U.S. depressions prior to World War II.  What promises hyperinflation this time is the lack of monetary discipline formerly imposed on the system by the gold standard, a fiscally bankrupt federal government and a Federal Reserve dedicated to debasing the U.S. dollar. The Fed’s efforts at liquefying the system have been extreme, yet broad liquidity is in monthly — soon to be annual — decline. Where the Fed’s systemic actions have generated temporary apparent systemic stability, the weakening annual growth in the broad money supply, and continued extreme Fed efforts at systemic liquefaction, suggest that the systemic solvency crisis is far from over.

The following two graphs measure the level of consumer prices since 1665 in the American Colonies and later the United States.  The first graph shows what appears to be a fairly stable level of prices up to the founding of the Federal Reserve in 1913 (began activity in 1914) and Franklin Roosevelt’s abandoning of the gold standard in 1933.  Then, inflation takes off in a manner not seen in the prior 250 years, and at an exponential rate when viewed using the SGS-Alternate Measure of Consumer Prices in the last several decades.  The price levels shown prior to 1913 were constructed by Robert Sahr of Oregon State University.  Price levels since 1913 either are Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) or SGS based, as indicated.

The magnitude of the increase in price levels in the last 50 years or so, however, visually masks the inflation volatility of the earlier years.  That early volatility becomes evident in the second graph, where the CPI history is plotted using a logarithmic scale. Seeing such detail is a particular benefit of using such a plot, although the full scope of what is happening may be lost to those not used to thinking log-based.

The logarithmic scale was used here at reader request. The pattern of the rising CPI level, however, still looks rather frightening even in the modified form. Further, since inflation ideally is something that is flat

 

Consumer Inflation in the American Colonies - United States 

Consumer Inflation in the American Colonies - United States

over time — not compounding like the population and related series that grow with it — I do not have any issue with using a non-log scale for the visual impact of what is happening. 

Persistent year-to-year inflation (and the related compounding effect) did not take hold until post-Franklin D. Roosevelt. Additionally, the CPI level reflects purchasing power lost over time for those holding dollars, which is cumulative, and which has reached extremes (as will be discussed shortly) due to the late-era compounding effect. If my assessment is correct on where this is headed, the log-based graph shortly will look like the arithmetic-based graph, as was seen the latter months of the Weimar circumstance.

Indicated by the newly visible detail in the second graph are the regular periods of inflation — usually seen around wars — offset by periods of deflation, up through the Great Depression.  Particular inflation spikes can be seen at the time of the American Revolution, the War of 1812, the Civil War, World War I and World War II (which lacked an ensuing, offsetting deflation). 

The inflation peaks and the ensuing post-war depressions and deflationary periods, tied to the War of 1812, the Civil War and World War I, show close to 60-year cycles, which is part of the reason some economists and analysts have been expecting a deflationary depression in the current period.  There is some reason behind 30- and 60-year financial and business cycles, as the average difference in generations in the U.S. is 30 years, going back to the 1600s.  Accordingly, it seems to take two generations to forget and repeat the mistakes of one’s grandparents.  Similar reasoning accounts for other cycles that tend to run in multiples of 30 years.

Allowing for minor, average-annual price-level declines in 1949, 1955 and likely 2009, the United States has not seen a major deflationary period in consumer prices since before World War II.  The reason for this is the same as to why there has not been a formal depression since before World War II: the abandonment of the gold standard and recognition by the Federal Reserve of the impact of monetary policy — free of gold-standard system restraints — on the economy.

The gold standard was a system that automatically imposed and maintained monetary discipline.  Excesses in one period would be followed by a flight of gold from the system and a resulting contraction in the money supply, economic activity and prices.

Faced with the Great Depression, and unable to stimulate the economy, partially due to the monetary discipline imposed by the gold standard, Franklin Roosevelt used those issues as an excuse to abandon gold and to adopt close to a fully-fiat currency under the auspices of what I call the debt standard, where the government effectively could print and spend whatever money it wanted to.

Roosevelt’s actions were against the backdrop of the banking system being in a state of collapse.  The Fed stood by twiddling its thumbs as banks failed and the money supply imploded.  A depression collapsed into the Great Depression, with intensified price deflation.  Importantly, a sharp decline in broad money supply is a prerequisite to goods and services price deflation.  Messrs Greenspan and Bernanke are students of the Great Depression period. As did Mr. Greenspan before him, "Helicopter Ben" has vowed not to allow a repeat of the 1930s money supply collapse.

Where the Franklin Roosevelt Administration abandoned the gold standard and its financial discipline for the debt standard, twelve successive administrations have pushed the debt standard to the limits of its viability, as seen now in the continuing threat of systemic collapse.  Now the Obama Administration has to look at abandoning the debt standard (hyperinflation) and starting fresh.

The effect of the post-Roosevelt policies has been a slow-motion destruction of the U.S. dollar’s purchasing power, per the accompanying table, since the gold standard was abandoned in 1933. The magnitude of purchasing power lost over the decades can be lost again in a matter of days.

 

Loss of U.S. Dollar Purchasing Power

Through October 2009

 

Since January of

Versus

1914

1933

1970

 Swiss Franc

-80.0%

-80.0%

-75.6%

 CPI-U

-95.4%

-94.1%

-82.6%

 Gold

-98.1%

-98.1%

-94.1%

 SGS-Alternate CPI

-98.5%

-98.1%

-94.3%

 

Please note in the above table that gold and the Swiss franc were held constant by the gold standard versus coins in 1914 and 1933. The data are from the Federal Reserve Board, Bureau of Labor Statistics and from SGS data and calculations.

"Helicopter Ben" on Preventing Deflation. Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke picked up his various helicopter nicknames and references as the result of a November 21, 2002 speech he gave as a Fed Governor to the National Economists Club entitled "Deflation: Making Sure ‘It’ Doesn’t Happen Here." The phrase that the now-Fed Chairman Bernanke likely wishes he had not used was a reference to "Milton Friedman’s famous ‘helicopter drop’ of money."

Attempting to counter concerns of another Great Depression-style deflation, Bernanke explained in his remarks: "I am confident that the Fed would take whatever means necessary to prevent significant deflation in the United States …" 

As expounded upon by Bernanke, "Indeed, under a fiat (that is, paper) money system, a government (in practice, the central bank in cooperation with other agencies) should always be able to generate increased nominal spending and inflation, even when the short-term nominal interest rate is at zero."

"Like gold, U.S. dollars have value only to the extent that they are strictly limited in supply.  But the U.S. government has a technology, called a printing press (or, today, its electronic equivalent), that allows it to produce as many U.S. dollars as it wishes at essentially no cost.  By increasing the number of U.S. dollars in circulation, or even by credibly threatening to do so, the U.S. government can also reduce the value of a dollar in terms of goods and services, which is equivalent to raising the prices in dollars of those goods and services.  We conclude that, under a paper-money system, a determined government can always generate higher spending and hence positive inflation." The full text of then-Fed Governor Bernanke’s remarks can be found at: http://federalreserve.gov/boarddocs/speeches/2002/20021121/default.htm.

Bernanke initiated his anti-deflation actions back in 2008, but they have not worked fully as advertised. While the systemic solvency crisis has been contained at least temporarily in key areas, and depositor

St. Louis Fed Monetary Base

St. Louis Fed Monetary Base

Money Supply Annual Growth

funds have not suffered heavy losses, the broad money supply now is in monthly decline, soon to be year-to-year decline, but not yet in collapse. Back in September 2008, the Fed started dropping cash from helicopters, as shown in the graphs of the monetary base. As shown in the two graphs of level and year-to-year change, Bernanke’s spiking of the monetary was extraordinary and was without precedent. As seen in the recent renewed spike in the monetary base to historic levels, the Fed has been panicking anew. The fall-off in year-to-year growth is just due to year-ago comparisons where growth also was spiking sharply. Despite a still active fleet of choppers, systemic liquidity and solvency remain in deep trouble.

The monetary base remains the Federal Reserve’s primary tool for impacting money supply growth. As has been the case for the bulk of the extraordinary expansion of the monetary base since late-August 2008 — an increase of 129% — the monetary base growth, however, has not been reflected meaningfully in money supply growth. Such remains due to banks placing high levels of excess reserves with the Fed, instead of lending the funds into the normal flow of commerce.

The SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate (the Fed abandoned reporting its broadest money supply measure, M3, back in March 2006) has been contracting month-to-month for five months through November 2009, with annual growth slowing as shown in the M3 graph. M3 appears destined to turn negative year-to-year in December 2009, on both a nominal (as displayed in the graph) and inflation-adjusted basis. Such would be a leading indicator for an economic downturn in normal times and would foreshadow a significant turn for the worse in the current, severe economic contraction during first-half 2010. As discussed in the Money Supply Special Report, the Fed always can drive the economy into a downturn, with contracting money supply, but the reverse does not always work.

Inflation and Slowing/Contracting Money Growth.  The Fed’s efforts at currency debasement have been reflected in a weakening of the U.S. dollar’s value in foreign exchange markets. In theory, though, slowing or outright contraction in broad money supply growth should be reflected in slower inflation or outright deflation. As with most economic theories, however, there often are simplifying assumptions that may not be appropriate under certain circumstances. Money supply, for example, works best as a predictor of inflation in a closed system, as was seen with Zimbabwe.

In the case of the United States, however, significant dollars are held outside the country, where shifting dynamics may have significant impact on U.S. inflation. To the extent that foreign holdings of U.S. dollars are in stasis, with demand and supply in balance, then the circumstances of the simplified money supply model tend to work. The dollar’s global position, though, is not in balance, particularly with the Fed working to debase the U.S. currency: to create inflation.

One distortion up front is in the U.S. currency in circulation, as reported in the narrowest money supply measure, M1. More than half of the $860 billion reflected in recent M1 reporting is physically outside the United States in "dollarized" countries and elsewhere. 

Separately, as reported by the Fed in its second-quarter 2009 flow-of-funds analysis, foreign holders of U.S. assets have something in excess of $10 trillion in liquid dollar-denominated assets that could be dumped at will into the global and U.S. markets. In perspective, U.S. M3 is somewhat over $14 trillion.

Helping to fuel those holdings, the Fed has been using the excess reserves deposited with it by U.S. banks to buy troubled mortgage-backed securities from financially stressed institutions, and some of the institutions benefitting likely are located outside the United States.

As excess dollars get pumped into the global markets, a shift in the tide against the U.S. dollar gets reflected in a weakening exchange rate, which in turn spikes dollar-denominated commodity prices, such as oil. That effect has been seen in recent months, with the result that U.S. consumer inflation has started to resurface, not from strong economic demand and a surging domestic money supply, but from distended monetary policies and a global glut of dollars encouraged by the U.S. central bank.

Demand and supply affect the U.S. dollar. Supply soars and demand shrinks with the increasing unwillingness of major dollar holders to continue holding the existing volume of U.S. currency and dollar-denominated assets, let alone to absorb new exposure.

Therein lies a significant threat to near-term U.S. inflation. Heavy dumping of the U.S. dollar and dollar-denominated assets would be highly inflationary to U.S. consumer prices. It also likely would activate heavy Fed intervention in buying unwanted U.S. Treasuries. When the Fed moves to buy Treasuries as the lender of last resort — to monetize U.S. debt well beyond anything seen to date — that also would tend to trigger renewed growth in the otherwise flagging broad money growth.  

In order to get the broad money supply to grow, the federal government has to spend and borrow more money, where the Fed will have to buy large quantities of the Treasury’s securities, monetizing the federal debt.  The liquidity action to date has been primarily buying otherwise illiquid mortgage-backed securities off the balance sheets of troubled banks. The domestic banks in turn have leant substantial excess reserves back to the Fed, rather than lending into the normal stream of commerce, which would spike the money supply and otherwise be something of an economic positive.

The Fed remains the U.S. Treasury’s lender of last resort. Panicked dollar selling and dumping of dollar-denominated paper assets — particularly U.S. Treasuries — likely would force the Fed’s hand in a rapid monetizing of Treasury debt.

Early Impact of Dollar Debasement. Shown in the next three graphs are powerful fundamentals that either drive U.S. inflation or reflect market expectations of the longer-term domestic inflation outlook. The currency, oil and gold markets have seen extreme volatility in the last year or so. After seeing significant selling, the dollar soared during the breaking solvency crisis, due to massive manipulation and largely covert central bank intervention, position liquidations that required U.S. dollars and some surviving safe-haven status of the U.S. currency. In tandem with the dollar’s strength, oil and gold prices fell sharply.

Now, as reflected in the monthly average value of the U.S. dollar in Swiss francs, gains seen since the historic dollar low in early-2008 have evaporated. In turn, oil prices have rebounded from their recent lows, though they still are well shy of last year’s historic high. Reflecting the inflationary pressures from a weaker dollar and higher oil prices, ongoing solvency issues for the United States, and continued dollar debasement efforts by the Federal Reserve, the price of gold has recovered recent losses and is pushing new highs. Irrespective of any near-term volatility, both dollar weakness and gold strength remain solid long-term bets.

 Swiss Franc versus U.S. Dollar

Oil Price

Gold Price

 

U.S. Government Cannot Cover Existing Obligations

The U.S. Treasury publishes annual financial statements of the United States Government, prepared using generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), audited by the General Accountability Office (GAO) and signed off on by the U.S. Treasury Secretary. The 2009 statements, originally scheduled for publication this month, have been delayed to February 2010.

GAAP-accounting is what major U.S. corporations use. Such statements usually include liabilities for retired employees’ pensions and health care obligations. Yet, the Bush Administration (as likely will continue to be the case with the Obama Administration) argued that unfunded Social Security and Medicare obligations should remain off the government’s balance sheet, claiming that the government always has the option of changing the Social Security and Medicare programs.  That said, there still is no political will in Washington to go public with the concept of eliminating or substantially cutting those programs.

The federal government’s GAAP-based financial statements show the actual annual fiscal deficit careening wildly out of control. Including the annual changes in the net present value of unfunded liabilities, the fully-GAAP-based annual 2008 deficit was $5.1 trillion dollars, versus the official cash-based $455 billion. The 2009 actual shortfall likely was around $8.8 trillion, instead of the official cash-based $1,417 billion. Again, the largest portion of GAAP-based versus the cash-based difference is in accounting for the net present value, and the year-to-year changes in same, for unfunded Social Security and Medicare liabilities, etc. The results are summarized in the accompanying table, showing various deficit, debt and obligation measures.

The government’s finances not only are out of control, but the actual deficit is not containable.  Put into perspective, if the government were to raise taxes so as to seize 100% of all wages, salaries and corporate profits, it still would be showing an annual deficit using GAAP accounting on a consistent basis.  In like manner, given current revenues, if it stopped spending every penny (including defense and homeland security) other than for Social Security and Medicare obligations, the government still would be showing an annual deficit. Further, the U.S. has no potential way to grow out of this shortfall.

As shown in the first of three graphs following the table, U.S. federal obligations are so huge versus the national GDP that the country’s finances look more like those of a banana republic than the world’s premiere financial power and home to the world’s primary reserve currency, the U.S. dollar. Total federal debt and obligations at the end of the 2009 fiscal year on September 30th, likely were close to $75 trillion, or more than five times total U.S. GDP. The $75 trillion includes roughly $12 trillion in gross federal debt, with the balance reflecting the net present value of unfunded obligations.

If not for the special position the United States holds in the world, its debt — U.S. Treasuries — likely would be rated as below investment grade, instead of triple-A.  Major rating agencies have hinted at possible longer-term rating issues on Treasury securities. 

A downgrade, though, is not likely, as long as U.S. Treasuries are denominated in U.S. dollars and as long as they are used as the benchmark for the triple-A rating. Such ratings usually are an opinion as to the risk of default. Treasuries denominated in U.S. dollars are not likely to face actual default, so long as the Treasury and Fed can create dollars to pay off the face amounts of the obligations. While a three-month

U.S. Government - Alternate Fiscal Deficit and Debt
Reported by U.S. Treasury

Dollars are in either billions or trillions, as indicated.
Sources: U.S. Treasury, Shadow Government Statistics.

Fiscal
Year(1)

Formal
Cash-Based
Deficit
($Bil)

GAAP
Ex-SS Etc.
Deficit
($Bil)

GAAP
With SS Etc.
Deficit
($Tril)

GAAP 
Federal 
Negative
Net Worth
($Tril)

Gross
Federal
Debt
($Tril)

Total(2)
Federal
Obligations
(GAAP)
($Tril)

2009(3)

$1,417.1

$2,800.0

$8.8

$68.1

$11.9

$74.6

2008

454.8

1,009.1

5.1

59.3

10.0

65.5

2007

162.8

275.5

1.2(4)

54.3

9.0

59.8

2006

248.2

449.5

4.6

53.1

8.5

58.2

2005

318.5

760.2

3.5

48.5

7.9

53.3

2004

412.3

615.6

11.0(5)

45.0

7.4

49.5

2003

374.8

667.6

3.0

34.0

6.8

39.1

2002

157.8

364.5

1.5

31.0

6.2

35.4

(1) Fiscal year ended September 30th. (2) Includes gross federal debt, not just "public" debt. While the non-public debt is debt the government owes to itself for Social Security, etc., the obligations there are counted as "funded" and as such are part of total government obligations. (3) Except for the formal cash-based deficit and for the gross federal debt, which are government estimates, fiscal 2009 data are estimated by SGS. Please note that mid-year accounting redefinitions for TARP knocked off roughly $500 billion from the reported formal cash-based estimate. (4) On a consistent reporting basis, net of one-time changes in actuarial assumptions and accounting, SGS still estimates that the GAAP-based deficit for 2007 topped $4 trillion, with negative net worth of $57.1 trillion and total obligations of $59.8. So as to maintain consistency with the official GAAP statements, the "official" numbers are shown. (5) SGS estimates $3.4 trillion, excluding one-time unfunded setup costs of the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement, and Modernization Act of 2003 (enacted December 2003). Again, in order to maintain consistency with the official GAAP statements, the "official" numbers are shown in the table for 2004. The 2009 GAAP statement were due for release in mid-December 2009, but they have been delayed until February 2010. Link to the 2008 statements: http://www.fms.treas.gov/fr/08frusg/08frusg.pdf

 

Treasury at the moment may be safe, I would not want to bet on receiving anything close to full value on a 10-year Treasury note or 30-year Treasury bond.

As shown in the second of the three graphs, most U.S. Treasury issuance of recent years, thorough 2007, has been purchased by investors outside the United States. Not only have these investors been taking a hit in terms of the value of the U.S. dollar, but also they face meaningful devaluation risk in the near future.

 

Federal Obligations as Percentage of GDP 

Foreign Purchases of U.S. Treasury Issuance

Rest of World Holdings of U.S. Treasuries, GSEs and Agencies

As issuance has increased along with rising hesitancy in holding U.S. Treasuries, post-crises, the portion of new issuance covered by foreign investors has started to drop off sharply. Again, the Fed remains the buyer of last resort for U.S. Treasuries, and it has the ability to operate through surrogates at home and abroad.

The graph above gives some scope of as to the size of foreign held assets issued by the U.S. Treasury, or questionably guaranteed by it. They are among a pool of over $10 trillion dollars that could be dumped in a panicked dollar selling environment.

 

 Hyperinflationary Great Depression

Even with the government’s spending, debt and obligations running far beyond the ability of the government to cover with taxes or the political willingness of the government to cut entitlement spending, the inevitable inflationary collapse, based solely on these funding needs, possibly could have been pushed well into the next decade. Yet, the printing presses already are running, and the Fed is working actively to debase the U.S. dollar. Actions already taken to contain the systemic solvency crisis and to stimulate the economy, plus the ongoing devastating impact of a severe economic contraction on tax revenues, have set the stage for a much earlier crisis. Risks are high for the hyperinflation beginning to break in the year ahead; it likely cannot be avoided beyond 2014.

It is this environment of rapid fiscal deterioration and related massive funding needs, the U.S. dollar remains open to a rapid and massive decline and to the dumping of U.S. Treasuries. The Federal Reserve would be forced to monetize significant sums of Treasury debt, triggering the early phases of a monetary inflation.  Under such circumstance multi-trillion dollar deficits rapidly would feed into a vicious, self-feeding cycle of currency debasement and hyperinflation.

Lack of Physical Cash. The United States in a hyperinflation would experience the quick disappearance of cash as we know it.  In Zimbabwe, there was the back-up of a well-functioning black market in U.S. dollars, but no such back-up exists in the United States. Shy of the rapid introduction of a new currency and/or the highly problematic adaptation of the current electronic commerce system to new pricing realities, a barter system is the most likely circumstance to evolve for regular commerce.  Such would make much of the current electronic commerce system useless and add to what would become an ongoing economic implosion.  It also could take a number of months to become reasonably functional.

Some years back, I happened to be in San Francisco, having dinner with a former regional Federal Reserve Bank president and the chief economist for a large Midwestern bank.  Market rumors that day had been that there was a run on a major bank in the City by the Bay.  So I queried the regional Fed president as to what would be happening if the rumors were true.

He had had some personal experience with a run on banks in his region and explained how the Fed had a special team designed to handle such a crisis.  The biggest problem he had had was getting adequate cash to the troubled banks to cover depositors, having to fly cash in by helicopters to meet the local cash flow needs.

The troubled bank in San Francisco, however, was much larger than the example cited, and the former Fed bank president speculated that there was not enough cash in the vaults of the regional Federal Reserve Bank, let alone the entire Federal Reserve System, to cover a true run on deposits at the major bank.

Therein lies an early problem for a system headed into hyperinflation: adequate currency. Where the Fed may hold roughly $200 billion in currency outside of roughly $50 billion in commercial bank vault cash, the bulk of roughly $860 billion in currency outside the banks is not in the United States.  Back in 2000, the Fed estimated that 50% to 70% of U.S. dollar cash was outside the system.  That number probably is higher today, with perhaps as little as $250 billion in physical cash in circulation in the United States, or roughly 1.7% of M3. The rest of the dollars are used elsewhere in the world as a store of wealth, or as an alternate currency free of the woes of unstable domestic financial conditions. Those conditions would change severely in the event of a U.S. hyperinflation.

Given the extremely rapid debasement of the larger denomination notes, with limited physical cash in the system, existing currency would disappear quickly as a hyperinflation broke.

For the system to continuing functioning in anything close to a normal manner, the government would have to produce rapidly an extraordinary amount of new cash, and electronic commerce would have to be able to adjust to rapidly changing prices.

In terms of cash, new bills of much higher denominations would be needed, but production lead time is a problem.  Conspiracy theories of recent years have suggested the U.S. Government already has printed a new currency of red-colored bills, intended for some dual internal and external U.S. dollar system.  If such indeed were the case, then there might be a store of "new dollars" that could be released at a 1-to-1,000,000 ratio, or whatever ratio was needed to make the new currency meaningful, but such would not resolve any long-term problems — as seen in the multiple Zimbabwe devaluations — unless it was part of an overall restructuring of the domestic and global financial and currency systems and unless the U.S. government could put its fiscal house in order.

From a practical standpoint, however, currency would disappear, at least for a period of time in the early period of a hyperinflation.

Where the vast bulk of today’s money is not physical, but electronic, however, chances of the system adapting there are virtually nil.  Think of the time, work and effort that went into preparing computer systems for Y2K, or even problems with the recent early shift to daylight savings time.  Systems would have to be adjusted for variable, rather than fixed pricing, credit card lines would need to be expanded daily, the number of digits used in tallying dollar-denominated transactions would need to be expanded sharply. I have had assurances from some in the computer field that a number of businesses have accounting software that can handled any number of digits.

From a practical standpoint, though, the electronic quasi-cashless society of today likely also would shut down early in a hyperinflation.  Unfortunately, this circumstance rapidly would exacerbate an ongoing economic collapse.  

Barter System.  With standard currency and electronic payment systems non-functional, commerce quickly would devolve into black markets for goods and services and a barter system.  Gold and silver both are likely to retain real value and would be exchangeable for goods and services. Silver would help provide smaller change for less costly transactions. One individual I met indicated that he had found airline bottles of scotch to be ideal small change in a hyperinflationary environment.

Other items that would be highly barterable would include bottles of liquor or wine, or canned goods, for example.  Similar items that have a long shelf life can be stocked in advance of the problem, and otherwise would be consumable if the terrible inflation never came.  Separately, individuals, such as doctors and carpenters, who provide broadly useable services, already have services to barter.

A note of caution was raised once by one of my old economics professors, who had spent part of his childhood living in a barter economy.  He told a story of how his father had traded a shirt for a can of sardines.  The father decided to open the can and eat the sardines, but he found the sardines had gone bad. Nonetheless, the canned sardines had taken on a monetary value.

Howard J. Ruff, who has been writing about these problems and issues since Nixon closed the Gold window, rightly argues that it will take some time for a barter system to be established, and suggests that individuals should build up a six-month store of goods to cover themselves and their families in the difficult times. Such is within the scope of normal disaster planning in some areas of the country (for example, I sit almost on top of the Hayward Fault).

Financial Hedges. During these times, safety and liquidity remain key concerns for investments, as investors look to preserve their assets and wealth through what are going to be close to the most difficult of times. Those who can preserve their wealth and maintain liquidity will have the ability to take advantage of extraordinary investment opportunities after the crises pass.

Gold and Silver. In a hyperinflation, gold and silver would be primary hedging tools that would retain real value and also be portable in the event of possible civil turmoil.  At some point, the failure of the world’s primary reserve currency will lead to the structuring of a new global currency system. I would not be surprised to find gold as part of the new system, structured in there in an effort to sell the new system to the public.

Real Estate. Real estate also would provide a basic inflation hedge, but it lacks the portability and liquidity of gold.  That could become an issue if the political environment shifted so radically that ownership of private property became impossible. 

Currencies. Having some funds invested offshore — outside of the U.S. dollar — would be a plus in circumstances where the government might impose currency or capital controls. I look at the Swiss franc, the Canadian dollar and the Australian dollar as currencies likely to maintain their purchasing power against the U.S. dollar. Any suggestions here in terms of currencies, gold and silver, etc. are for holding same over the long term. Near-term price volatility remains a risk in most markets. 

Taking on Debt. Inflation is supposed to be the debtor’s friend, where debtors, like the U.S. government, end up paying off their obligations in cheap dollars. A note of caution is offered here. The current circumstances are extraordinary. Borrowers should consider their ability to carry debt through extremely difficult economic times, including possible loss of employment, etc., before high inflation might kick in. Consider, too, the U.S. government recently has intervened in altering terms and conditions of mortgages. Could a radical political change end up recasting the terms of personal obligations?

TIPS (Corrected Text). The U.S. Treasury offers securities where yields and principal get adjusted regularly for the rate of inflation. In a hyperinflation, price changes can be so rapid that the principal and/or yield adjustment would lag enough so as to make the adjustments worthless. The reporting lag in calculating the adjusting CPI index — if it even could be calculated — still would wipe out investors, unless the Treasury became particularly creative and began benchmarking to spot gold or such, but nothing like that is in place.

As to the potential rapidity of price change, consider some anecdotal evidence. One story out of Weimar Germany involved buying an expensive bottle of wine for dinner. The empty bottle was worth more as scrap glass the next morning than it had been worth as a full bottle of wine the night before. Anther story involved negotiating the price and paying for a meal, before sitting down, as the price of the meal would be higher by the time it was finished.

Equities. While equities do provide something of an inflation hedge — revenues and profits get expressed in current dollars — they also reflect underlying economic and political fundamentals. I still look for U.S. stocks to take an ultimate 90% hit, peak-to-trough, net of inflation, during this period. Where all stocks are tied to a certain extent to the broad market — to the way investors are valuing equities — such a large hit on the broad market will tend to have a dampening effect on nearly all equity prices, irrespective of the quality of a given company or a given industry.

The following graph shows the year-end Dow Jones Industrial Average in current terms, as well as adjusted for SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation. While stocks may rally based on high inflation, in inflation-adjusted terms, a bear market remains a good shot. An early-hyperinflation DJIA at 100,000 could be worth 1,500 in today’s terms.

 

 Year-End DJIA

  

Closing Comments

Other Issues.  A hyperinflationary great depression would be extremely disruptive to the lives, businesses and economic welfare of most individuals.  Such severe economic pain could lead to extreme political change and/or civil unrest.  What has been discussed here remains well shy of a comprehensive overview of all possible issues, but rather at least has raised some questions and touched upon some likely consequences. No one can figure out better than you the peculiarities of this circumstance and how you, your family and/or your business might be affected. Using common sense remains the best advice I can give.

These matters will continue to be expanded upon in SGS Commentaries, as circumstances and subscriber reactions dictate.  

I extend by deep thanks to the various readers who have raised questions and provided ideas and material. As always, please feel free to offer your comments or raise your questions by e-mail to johnwilliams@shadowstats.com.

 

 

Recommended Further Reading

- Related SGS Special Reports:

Money Supply Special Report (August 3, 2008)

Depression Special Report (August 1, 2009)

Consumer Liquidity Special Report (September 14, 2009)

 

- Recommended Outside Reading:

As mentioned elsewhere in the text, and as recommended to subscribers last year:

Fiat Paper Money, The History and Evolution of Our Currency
by Ralph T. Foster (Privately Published)
2189 Bancroft Way, Berkeley, CA 94704
E-mail: tfdf@pacbell.net

Ralph Foster continually is updating and expanding his volume.

 

No. 262: U.S. GAAP Accounting Delayed, Employment Report Outlook

Wednesday, December 2nd, 2009
 
 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 262
U.S. GAAP Accounting Delay, Employment Report Outlook

December 2, 2009

__________

Treasury Delays 2009 GAAP Statement for Two Months

Employment Conditions Remain Bleak

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: This is just a quick update on the outlook for the November employment and unemployment report and a note on U.S. government financial statement. A full Commentary is planned for Friday (December 4th), following release of employment data, including an update on the economic outlook and reporting of the last week.

The Hyperinflation Special Report (Update 2010) is in production and will be posted later today.

 – Best wishes to all, John Williams


Release of GAAP-Based 2009 Financial Statements of the United States Government Delayed. With no related formal announcement that I can find, the U.S. Treasury has posted on its Web site, http://www.fms.treas.gov/fr/index.html, that the 2009 GAAP-based U.S. Government financial statements — mandated by Congress — will not be published until February 2010. They had been scheduled initially for release in mid-December 2009.

My estimate remains that full GAAP-based accounting will show the actual 2009 annual deficit to be about $8.8 trillion, up from $5.1 trillion in 2008. Those details will be found in the updated hyperinflation report. While there certainly have been a number of complicating events for the government’s accountants to assess in the last year, having accurate and timely information this month would be useful to those debating current conditions and issues. Delayed until February, any unhappy accounting results may not surface now until after the health care package and related fiscal concerns have been put to bed by Congress and the Administration.  

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting generally will favor higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the month ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Unemployment and Payroll Employment (November 2009)Due for release on Friday, December 4th, November payroll employment is expected to have declined by roughly 120,000, less than the initial 190,000 employment drop in October, while the November unemployment rate is expected to hold at 10.2%, per Briefing.com.

Ongoing weakness indicated by underlying economic series would suggest a greater jobs loss than the consensus estimate and a rising unemployment rate, but the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) has the ability to bring in the headline numbers anywhere it chooses to.

In terms of help-wanted advertising, the Conference Board’s newspaper index for October held at September’s historic low. The online help-wanted advertising measure showed that new online ads in November were down 24.0% year-to-year, compared with a 24.6% annual decline October. For the newly seasonally-adjusted numbers (a difficult adjustment to make for a new series in such a volatile environment) the November new online postings fell 0.8% from October, which, in turn, was down 1.2% from September.  The seasonally-adjusted series has been in steady month-to-month decline since August 2009.

The purchasing managers surveys are showing deterioration in employment conditions.  The November manufacturing survey saw the glow fade from the cash-for-clunkers spike, with the diffusion index easing to 50.8, down from 53.1 in October, which, in turn was up from 46.8 in September. A reading below 50.0 indicates outright jobs contraction. The latest non-manufacturing report was for October, where a clunkers-free environment had the October index falling to 41.1 from 44.3 in September.

New claims for unemployment insurance have been declining on average in the last several months, but such does not mean a turnaround in the employment picture. With the extreme economic contraction — unprecedented as to duration and depth in the post-World War II era — what is being seen here most likely is the beginning of some bottom-bouncing, where heavy lay-offs may have run their courses to a certain extent, at least temporarily, but where the pace of hiring is declining, too. Weakness in help-wanted advertising confirms the downside pressures in hiring.  

In terms of ongoing monthly payroll jobs loss, the actual November number likely continued to hold around 500,000, of which 200,000 is pending formal recognition in the February 2010 benchmark revision to the series. The other 300,000 loss could be seen in Friday’s reporting, particularly with the effects of prior-period revisions taken into account.

Suggestive of a flattening or even minor decline in the unemployment rate, the October rate surged well beyond consensus to 10.2%, from 9.8% in September. To the extent the surge was due to poor quality seasonal factors, any distortion could be reversed in November’s reporting. Indeed, any happy surprises with this number likely would be due to that circumstance, not to improving employment conditions.

 

 

__________

No. 261: Third-Quarter GDP Revision

Tuesday, November 24th, 2009

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 261
Third-Quarter GDP Revision

November 24, 2009

__________

Lower GDP Growth Still Heavily Overstated

3rd-Quarter GDP at 2.8%, GDI at 2.0%

"Reduced" Inflation Bloated Reported Activity

Revised Salaries and Wages Soared as
Employment Collapsed?

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regularly scheduled Commentary is planned for Friday (December 4th), following release of the November employment and unemployment data. An intervening Commentary, however, will be published early next week to address the outlook for the employment/unemployment  report, as well as to assess reporting results on new orders for durable goods (October), on both new and existing home sales (October) and on both consumer confidence and sentiment (November) .

– Happy Thanksgiving! Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

GDP Data Quality Remains Seriously Impaired. Though formally followed by the media and analysts as the government’s broadest measure of economic activity, the GDP remains absolutely the worst-quality and most-heavily-politicized major economic report. Over the near-term, GDP reporting largely is based on government guesses, not on hard data. Accordingly, as seen today, major revisions to the previously published data are not unusual. Over the long-term, the GDP is structured with seriously-flawed concepts. One issue involves chain-weighted inflation used in deflation, with the effect that the subsidiary series never add up to the aggregate series. Another includes imputations such as what homeowners would pay to rent from themselves the homes that they otherwise own. Absurdities such as the imputations may be theoretical necessities to make the national income accounting work, but they have little, if any, relationship to the real world, and they face extreme distortions in extreme economic circumstances such as the current depression.

In contrast, despite all the reporting issues I have with the employment and unemployment data, those series are the best, broadest measures of economic activity published by the government. While those data suffer seasonal-factor distortions for both series and short-term surveying problems for the payroll data, the numbers are based on actual surveys, and, at least after revisions, give a much more realistic picture than the GDP of what is happening in domestic economic activity. As will be discussed early next week, the employment environment continued to deteriorate in November.

 

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 


GDP.  The "second" guesstimate of, and first revision to third-quarter 2009 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) released this morning (November 24th) by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) showed a downwardly-revised annualized real growth rate for the quarter of 2.78% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), reduced from an initial estimate of 3.53%. Such followed a 0.74% decline reported for second-quarter GDP.

The largest adjustments to the first estimate of third-quarter GDP were deteriorations in the net export account and in personal consumption expenditure, the latter category reflecting a less-robust boost than previously estimated from the cash-for-clunkers automobile rebate program.  

Net of the impact of a downward revision to the third-quarter GDP implicit price deflator, from an annualized quarterly inflation pace of 0.76% to 0.50%, the quarterly GDP growth rate would have revised to 2.52% instead of to 2.78%. Inflation estimation is central to real GDP reporting and gimmicking. The weaker the inflation rate used for deflating the GDP, the stronger will be the inflation-adjusted growth rate. The revised 0.50% annualized third-quarter GDP inflation was up from an annualized contraction of 0.02% in the second quarter. In contrast, reported 3.60% annualized third-quarter CPI-U inflation was up from an annualized positive inflation rate of 1.33% in the second quarter. If the reported GDP inflator moved in tandem with CPI, which is not too farfetched a concept, the bulk of the reported real growth in third-quarter GDP would disappear.

The year-to-year contraction in real third-quarter GDP widened to 2.51% from an initial reporting of 2.33%. That still was a smaller annual contraction than the record 3.83% decline reported for the second-quarter. As shown in the above graph, the latest year-to-year decline generally is in line with annual-growth troughs of the major post-World War II recessions.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for third-quarter 2009 remains an annual contraction of 5.7% versus the 2.5% official estimate, narrowed from an annual 5.9% (3.8% official estimate) contraction in the second quarter. While annualized real quarterly growth is not formally estimated on an alternative basis, a flat quarter-to-quarter circumstance, plus or minus, likely was realistic. I look for a renewed quarter-to-quarter contraction in the GDP as of fourth-quarter 2009.  

GNP. The initial estimate of gross national product for third-quarter 2009 showed annualized real growth of 3.76%, up from a 0.96% contraction in the second-quarter. Year-to-year change narrowed to a 2.70% contraction in the third-quarter from a 4.04% contraction in the second-quarter. 

This number indicates a fair trade surplus in third-quarter factor income (interest and dividend payments), which likely is heavily distorted by the systemic solvency crisis and extremely poor-quality reporting of payment flows in the current extraordinary circumstances. I would expect to see significant revision to this series in the year ahead.

GDP. The initial estimate of gross domestic income for third-quarter 2009 showed annualized real growth of 1.98%, up from a revised 0.07% (previously 2.57%) contraction in the second-quarter. Year-to-year change narrowed to a still historically severe 3.36% contraction in the third-quarter from a 4.09% contraction in the second-quarter.

The GDI reporting included an extraordinary upside revision to second-quarter wages and salaries of 1.32%. While there likely will be some more detail in tomorrow’s (November 25th) reporting of October personal income, this change is extraordinary in that it runs completely opposite to the massive downward revision pending in nonfarm payrolls — due for release in February 2010 — based on the May 2009 (second quarter) downside benchmark revision estimated by the Bureau of Labor Statistics at 824,000 jobs. The GDI salaries and wages are calculated based on employment levels.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will favor higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the month ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

New Orders for Durable Goods (October 2009)Due for release tomorrow on Wednesday, November 25th, October’s new orders for durable goods likely will continue recent patterns, with the randomly volatile series showing a statistically insignificant month-to-month change, with orders holding at a low-level plateau of activity. Year-to-year change will remain sharply negative, although the pace of annual contraction will turn less negative, against year-ago comparisons that were entering something close to freefall at the time.

  

_________

No. 260: Monetary Base and Contracting M3

Sunday, November 22nd, 2009

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 260
Monetary Base and Contracting M3

November 22, 2009

__________

Monetary Base Surge Stalls Near Record High

Annual M3 Growth Could Turn Negative in December

Continuing Liquidity Contraction Foreshadows
Deepening Economic Downturn

__________

PLEASE NOTE: This is the quick commentary promised on monetary base activity. Due to illness, the hyperinflation update is pushed into the upcoming holiday week (most likely over the next weekend), but some key points are discussed below. The next regular Commentary is planned for Tuesday (November 24th), following release of the first revision ("second estimate") of third-quarter 2009 GDP.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Monetary Base Growth Takes a Breather. After six consecutive two-week periods of growth, the U.S. monetary base took a breather in the most recent reporting. The seasonally-adjusted St. Louis Fed Adjusted Monetary base eased to a level of $2.010 trillion in the two weeks ended November 18th, versus a record-high $2.024 trillion in the prior period ended November 4th, as plotted in the accompanying graph. Accordingly, the annualized rate of growth in the Fed’s primary tool for adjusting money supply in the last three months, since the near-term trough of the two weeks ended August 12th, slowed to 96% from 126% in the period two-week period. On a straight November 14, 2009 versus August 12, 2009 comparison, the Fed has pushed the monetary base higher by 20%. The Fed has been behaving as though it still has a major systemic liquidity problem.

 

 

Broad Money Growth Continues to Falter. As has been the case for the bulk of the extraordinary expansion of the monetary base since late-August 2008 — an increase of 129% — the monetary base growth has not been reflected meaningfully in money supply growth. Such remains due to banks placing high levels of excess reserves with the Fed, instead of lending the funds into the normal flow of commerce.

Based on less than two weeks of reporting for November, the monthly contraction seen in the seasonally-adjusted SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for the last four months appears to be continuing. Based on the current trend, year-to-year change in M3 would turn negative in December 2009. Such would be a leading indicator for an economic downturn in normal times; it would foreshadow a significant turn for the worse in the current, severe economic contraction. As discussed in the Money Supply Special Report of August 3, 2008, the Fed always can drive the economy into a downturn, with contracting money supply, but the reverse does not always work.

Inflation and Slowing/Contracting Money Growth. In theory, slowing or outright contraction in broad money supply growth should be reflected in slower inflation or outright deflation. As with most economic theories, however, there often are simplifying assumptions that may not be appropriate under certain circumstances. Money supply, for example, works best as a predictor of inflation in a closed system, as was seen with Zimbabwe.

In the case of the United States, however, significant dollars are held outside the country, where shifting dynamics may have significant impact on U.S. inflation. To the extent that foreign holdings of U.S. dollars are in stasis, with demand and supply in balance, then the circumstances of the simplified money supply model tend to work. The dollar’s global position, though, is not in balance, particularly with the Fed working to debase the U.S. currency to create inflation.

One distortion up front is in the U.S. currency in circulation, as reported in M1. Something more than half of the $860 billion reflected in the latest M1 reporting is physically outside the United States in "dollarized" countries and elsewhere. 

Separately, as reported by the Fed in its second-quarter flow-of-funds analysis, foreign holders of U.S. assets hold something in excess of $10 trillion in liquid dollar-denominated assets, assets that could be dumped at will into the global and U.S. markets. In perspective, U.S. M3 is somewhat over $14 trillion. (The flow-of-funds analysis has serious data flaws, but the magnitude here likely is reasonably close to reality.)

Helping to fuel those holdings, the Fed has been using the excess reserves deposited with it by U.S. banks to buy troubled mortgage-backed securities from financially stressed institutions, and some of the institutions benefitting likely are located outside the United States.

As excess dollars get pumped into the global markets, a shift in the tide against the U.S. dollar gets reflected in a weakening exchange rate, which in turn spikes dollar-denominated commodity prices, such as oil. That effect has been seen in recent months, with the result that U.S. consumer inflation has started to resurface, not from strong economic demand and a surging domestic money supply, but from distended monetary policies and a global glut of dollars encouraged by the U.S. central bank.

Demand and supply affect the U.S. dollar. Supply soars and demand shrinks with the increasing unwillingness of major dollar holders to continue holding the existing volume of U.S. currency and dollar-denominated assets, let alone to absorb new exposure.

Therein lies a significant threat to near-term U.S. inflation. Heavy dumping of the U.S. dollar and dollar-denominated assets would be highly inflationary to U.S. consumer prices. It also likely would activate heavy Fed intervention in buying unwanted U.S. Treasuries. When the Fed moves to buy Treasuries as the lender of last resort — to monetize U.S. debt well beyond anything seen to date — that also would tend to trigger renewed growth in the otherwise flagging broad money growth.   

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will favor higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the month ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) (Third-Quarter 2009 — Second Estimate)Due for release on Tuesday, November 24th, the first revision to third-quarter GDP could be a negative one, as discussed in Commentary No. 258, due to new data on the trade deficit and retail sales. Last Wednesday’s (November 17th) reporting on October industrial production, however, showed a slight upside revision to third-quarter activity, which could provide some offset to the other factors. Nonetheless, my betting still would be for some downside revision to the initial estimate of 3.5% annualized, inflation-adjusted, quarter-to-quarter growth, possibly coming in weaker than the consensus estimate of 2.9% now being reported by Briefing.com.

 

__________

No. 259 General Outlook, October CPI, PPI, Production, Housing

Wednesday, November 18th, 2009

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 259
General Outlook, October CPI, PPI, Production, Housing

November 18, 2009

__________

Annual October CPI-U Inflation -0.18% (+7.1% SGS)

Formal Deflation Has Run Its Course

Bottom-Bouncing Continued in
Real Retail Sales, Housing and Production

 __________

PLEASE NOTE: The next regular Commentary is planned for Tuesday (November 24th), following release of the first revision ("second estimate") of third-quarter 2009 GDP. A quick comment also will be published subsequent to the next reporting of monetary base activity.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Beware of Central Bankers Jawboning for a Stronger U.S. Dollar. When the Fed Chairman starts talking about "watching" the U.S. dollar, the greenback is in serious trouble. Where the concern is dollar weakness, beyond the short-lived impact of jawboning, the Fed usually has two options for firming the dollar’s value: intervention or raising interest rates. 

Intervention, usually under the direction of the U.S. Treasury, and most likely coordinated with other central banks, probably has been used covertly in the last two years as part of the process aimed at stabilizing the financial system. Dollar-supportive intervention has been noted in the last year for the central banks of Japan and Switzerland. Intervention can be used at any time, but usually it proves to be ineffective and short lived, particularly against powerful selling forces.

Raising interest rates is one of the few fundamental shifts the Fed could pursue, but such is not too likely at present, given the fragility of the economy and the financial markets.

Separately, contradicting Mr. Bernanke’s expressed concerns, the Fed has been working to debase the U.S. currency, by flooding the system with dollars. Such has been a major contributing factor to recent selling pressures against the dollar. As will be explored in some detail in the forthcoming Hyperinflation Special Report Update (2009), monetary theory works most simply in explaining inflation in a closed system, such as was seen largely with Zimbabwe. For the U.S. dollar, beyond the majority of physical currency reported in the U.S. money supply being held outside the United States, there has been a significant flow of electronic dollars to institutions outside the country. A fair portion of mortgage-backed securities now on the Fed’s balance sheet likely came off the books of banks outside the United States.

As those excess dollar’s get dumped, the dollar’s value sinks, spiking oil and other dollar-denominated commodity prices, which in turn creates a non-economic-demand-driven inflation in the United States. From a domestic U.S. inflation standpoint, the global perspective of dollars in circulation and foreign willingness to hold same are major factors.

General Outlook Unchanged. The most severe economic downturn since the onset of the Great Depression continues, as does the systemic liquidity crisis. At best, activity in key areas such as retail sales, housing and production has flattened out at extremely low levels, as discussed below. Those levels saw recent short-lived support from one-time stimulus gimmicks that have run their courses. There are no quick fixes for the economy, since the downturn is structural, tied to consumer income growth failing to keep up with inflation. The traditional offset to weak income issues in recent years has been encouragement of consumer debt expansion. Such debt expansion, however, is not available at present, at least not in quantities that would support an expanding economy.  

The Fed has continued in panic mode, spiking the monetary base at annualized pace not seen since the "worst" of the crisis a year ago. Such detail will be updated following the monetary-base reporting Thursday (November 19th). At the same time, broad money supply is contracting at a pace that even in the best of times would promise a recession in the months ahead.

The broad outlook remains unchanged. I cannot remember stock market prices ever being so far removed from reflecting underlying economic and financial-system reality. Irrespective of near-term market gyrations, the long-term outlook remains extremely bearish for U.S. equities and the U.S. dollar, and extremely bullish for gold and silver. The economy still faces an eventual hyperinflationary great depression, with high risk of that circumstance beginning to unfold in the year ahead.

Also as a result of the financial markets being removed from reality, surprises in economic reporting should tend to continue on the downside, as seen this week in industrial production and housing (retail sales would have been weaker but for downside revisions to prior-period reporting), while inflation will tend to surprise on the upside, as seen in the CPI reporting.

Notes on Different Measures of the Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index (CPI) is the broadest inflation measure published by U.S. Government, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), Department of Labor:

The CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) is the monthly headline inflation number (seasonally adjusted) and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers. Its standard measure is not seasonally adjusted, and it never is revised on that basis except for outright errors,  

The CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. Otherwise its background is the same as the CPI-U. 

The C-CPI-U (Chain-Weighted CPI-U) is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based. It generally shows lower annual inflation rate than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The latter two measures once had fixed weightings -- so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living -- but now are quasi-substitution-based. 

The SGS Alternative CPI-U measures are attempts at adjusting reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living.

Deflation is Over: October Annual Inflation Statistically Indistinguishable from Zero. Though still shy of the peak levels seen last year, oil and gasoline prices have soared since their near-term lows at the end of last year. The relative collapse then in gasoline and oil prices triggered a period of year-to-year decline — formal deflation — in the CPI-U. Now with relatively high prices going against falling prices in year-ago comparisons, annual CPI inflation will turn positive, again, as of November. As reported by the BLS, annual CPI-U inflation for October was not statistically distinguishable from zero.  

CPI-U.  The BLS reported this morning (November 18th) that the seasonally-adjusted October CPI-U rose by 0.28% (up by 0.10% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, after rising by 0.17% (up by 0.06% unadjusted) in September. Seasonally-adjusted, the annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended October was 3.62%, versus 2.51% for the three months ended September.

Unadjusted, year-to-year inflation was far less negative (though still formal deflation), down by a statistically insignificant 0.18% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) in October, versus a 1.29% annual contraction in September. With the negative annual inflation having bottomed in July, year-to-year inflation should turn positive in November. Annual CPI-U inflation could break above the positive two-to-three percent range by year-end.

Recent annual declines in CPI-U inflation have been the biggest since 1950. I estimate, however, that CPI reporting methods used in 1950 would have generated current inflation rates that did not drop below 5%, at worst, in the current cycle (see Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures below). The brief and shallow formal deflation that now is at an end — based on official CPI-U reporting — appears to have been about half the depth and half the length of the negative inflation bout in the 1950 circumstance.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in November 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 1.67% adjusted monthly decline seen in November 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from October’s annual inflation rate of negative 0.18%.

For those interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I continue to refer you to CPIwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

CPI-W.  The BLS reported that the narrower, seasonally-adjusted October CPI-W rose by 0.33% (up by 0.11% unadjusted), following an increase of 0.18% (up by 0.08% unadjusted) in September.  Year-to-year, CPI-W inflation declined by 0.30% in October, following a 1.68% drop in September. As with the CPI-U, annual inflation in the CPI-W should turn positive in November’s reporting.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for the Chain-Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — fell by 0.46% in September, versus a 1.37% drop in September. The deeper decline in the C-CPI-U annual inflation rate versus the CPI-U is the normal relationship for the two series, but even here, annual inflation should turn positive next month.  

Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth rose to 3.2% in October, versus 2.1% in September, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to about 7.1% (7.13% for those using the extra digit) in October, versus 6.1% in September.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact, not otherwise published by the BLS.

Real Retail Sales.  Based on October CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted October retail sales rose by 1.1% (by 0.6% net of revisions), where the current number is up 1.4% before inflation adjustment. In contrast, real retail sales fell in September by a revised 2.2% (previously down 1.5%) that now is down by 2.3% before inflation adjustment. Year-to-year, October real retail sales fell by 1.5% (down by 1.7% before inflation adjustment), while September real retail sales fell by 5.1% (down 6.3% before inflation adjustment).

For the last 11 months, monthly real retail sales (CPI-U deflated) have been fluctuating around an average of $160.1 billion. Real sales levels ($ billions) for the past six months were: October 160.6, September 158.9, August (clunkers) 162.4, July 159.7, June 159.9, May 159.7. Smoothed for monthly volatility on a six-month moving-average basis, as shown in the accompanying graph, the pattern of activity here has shifted to bottom bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales. Again, there is no turnaround in economic activity — no recovery — evident here, just bottom-bouncing.

  

Annual PPI Inflation Should Turn Positive in November. As reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) yesterday (November 17th), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted producer price index (PPI) rose by 0.3% (up 0.4% unadjusted) in October, following September’s 0.6% (0.5% unadjusted) monthly decline.

Year-to-year, the annual contraction in PPI inflation narrowed sharply, with October prices down by 1.9% from the year before, versus a 4.8% annual contraction in September. Going against the pressures of collapsing oil prices in fourth-quarter 2008, year-to-year change in PPI inflation should turn positive, once again, with next month’s (November) reporting.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted October intermediate goods rose by 0.3% (up by 0.2% in September), with crude goods jumping by 5.4% (down by 2.1% in September). The decline in year-to-year inflation continued to narrow, with October intermediate goods down by 7.5% (down by 11.7% in September) and October crude goods down by 14.1% (down by 31.5% in September).

Weak October Housing Starts Continued Bottom-Bouncing. The Census Bureau reported today (November 18th) that October housing starts fell month-to-month by a statistically-significant 10.6% (down by 10.3% net of revisions) +/- 10.2% (95% confidence interval). September’s starts were revised so as to show a 1.9% gain, after initially having been reported up by 0.5%. Year-to-year change was down by 30.7% in October, following a revised annual contraction of 28.0% (previously 28.2%) in September.   

Since December 2008, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing at an historically low level, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 550,400. In the past 11 months, all monthly readings have been within the normal range of monthly volatility for the series around that average, including October’s reading of 529,000, which was down from 592,000 in September. The higher level in September reflected the now-expired first-time home buyers tax credit program.

 

The "recovery" in housing is shown in the above graph. The data are smoothed using a six-month moving average to remove the extreme month-to-month volatility seen in this series. Regardless of any level of smoothing, though, housing starts remain well below any levels seen since the end of World War II. 

Industrial Production Slowed, Except for Utility Usage.  Month-to-month October production fell by 0.1% in manufacturing, by 0.2% in mining (including oil and natural gas production), but utility usage jumped by 1.6%, increasing the overall index of industrial production by 0.1%. The clunkers-related production jump seen in September was not repeated, but the elevated level of September production largely held. Large swings in reported utility usage often impact reported manufacturing production, as electricity consumption is used as a surrogate for measuring production of a number of goods. Production should back off sharply in the months ahead as the irregular volatility in utilities (often tied to unusual weather) reverses, and as inventory build-up wanes in the light of continued weakness in inflation-adjusted retail sales.

The Federal Reserve reported that seasonally-adjusted October industrial production rose by 0.05% for the month to a level of 98.63, following a revised 0.64% (previously 0.7%) gain in September.  Year-to-year contraction in October widened to 7.10% from a revised 6.0% (previously 6.1%) contraction in September. The June 2009 reading of 95.78 had set a record low for annual production growth since the shutdown of war-time production that followed World War II.  For the last nine months, the production index has averaged 97.6, around which the series has been fluctuating.

 

The "recovery" in production is shown in the above graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average. Production activity has leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that effectively has wiped out the last 10 years of growth in industrial production. Despite the near-term upside blip from short-lived stimulus impact, the series generally still is bottom-bouncing.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will favor higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the month ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) (Third-Quarter 2009 — Second Estimate)Due for release on Tuesday, November 24th, the first revision to third-quarter GDP could be a negative one, as discussed in Commentary No. 258, due to new data on the trade deficit and retail sales. Yesterday’s reporting on October industrial production, however, showed a slight upside revision to third-quarter activity, which could provide some offset to the other factors. Nonetheless, my betting still would be for some downside revision to the initial estimate of 3.5% annualized, inflation-adjusted, quarter-to-quarter growth.

 

__________

No. 258: October Retail Sales

Monday, November 16th, 2009

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 258
October Retail Sales

November 16, 2009

__________

Reported October Retail Sales Boosted by Revisions and Inflation

Third-Quarter GDP Growth May See Some Downward Revision

 __________

PLEASE NOTE: This Commentary provides a brief update of today’s October retail sales reporting. A subsequent Commentary, including an updated economic outlook, will be published on Wednesday (November 18th), following the release of the October CPI and housing starts and tomorrow’s (November 17th) reporting of October PPI and industrial production.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

Third-Quarter GDP May Face Some Downside Revision. In conjunction with the greater-than-expected widening of the third-quarter trade deficit, today’s downside revision to third quarter retail sales has added a little more pressure for a downside revision in the "second" estimate of third-quarter GDP, due on November 24th. Part of the problem with the widening third-quarter trade deficit was an increase in automobile imports. To the extent that any retail sales boost in recent months attributed to the cash-for-clunkers program was from the sale of imported vehicles, the import of those automobiles should be directly offset in GDP accounting by deteriorating net exports.  

  

October Retail Sales Boosted by Downside Prior-Period Revisions. This morning’s (November 16th) Census Bureau report showed a statistically-significant monthly increase of 1.37% (0.81% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval) in seasonally-adjusted October retail sales. Such followed a downwardly revised 2.29% (previously 1.49%) monthly decline in September. 

Suggestive of reporting-quality issues, the magnitude of the downside revisions to September (heavily in motor vehicle sales) exceeded the 95% confidence interval. 

On a year-to-year basis, the October year-ago comparison was against collapsing gasoline prices and gasoline station sales. October 2009 retail sales were reported down by 1.74% from October 2008, following a revised annual decline of 6.31% (was 5.67%) in September.

Real Retail Sales. Removing the effects of inflation, October retail sales activity should show a monthly gain, but an annual contraction. The pattern of ongoing, inflation-adjusted activity remains one of bottom-bouncing/plateauing at extremely low levels. Details will be updated and graphed with the Commentary following the CPI release on Wednesday (November 18th).

Core Retail Sales.  A change in "core retail sales" methodology was introduced two months ago, where the net relative monthly increases and/or decreases in gasoline station and grocery store sales were subtracted from the full monthly retail sales number, instead of the total of gasoline station and grocery store sales each month. Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, the revamped reported "core" change more closely reflects the actual retail sales experience. This remains a work in progress and eventually will be used in the development of additional SGS alternative economic measures.

For the near-term, the "core" retail sales is reported in two versions, where Version I uses the original methodology, and Version II version appears to provide a more balanced picture of the impact food and energy inflation in the standard retail sales reporting.

Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales:

Version I — October retail sales net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — rose by 1.7% (1.0% net of revisions) versus the official aggregate gain of 1.4%.    

Version II — October retail sales net of the monthly change in grocery store and gasoline station revenues — rose by 1.3% (0.8% net of revisions) versus the official aggregate gain of 1.4%. 

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will favor higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than expected economic reporting in the month ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Index of Industrial Production (October 2009)Due for release tomorrow (Tuesday, November 17th), October industrial production is expected to rise by 0.3% for the month (Briefing.com), versus a 0.7% gain reported in September. Risk is fairly high of a downside surprise here, particularly including a possible downward revision to the September estimate.

Producer Price Index (PPI) (October 2009).  Due for release tomorrow (Tuesday, November 17th), the monthly PPI change is irregularly volatile. Expectations appear to be on the negative side of flat for the month-to-month number, but annual inflation should see some pick-up (less negative) in October, turning positive in November or December reporting.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) (October 2009). Due for release on Wednesday (November 18th), the month-to-month CPI-U is expected to show a 0.2% increase, per Briefing.com. Due to the sharp reversal of oil and gasoline price trends — in collapse one year ago — annual CPI-U inflation should come close to flattening out in October reporting, though remaining in negative territory. With an upside surprise to the monthly inflation number, which is possible, annual inflation could turn positive, once again, as early as the October report.

More likely, though, annual CPI-U will surge back into positive territory with November’s reporting. For October 2009, gasoline prices were down about 16% year-to-year, per Department of Energy estimates. November is shaping up as a 20% year-to-year gain. Even with no month-to-month inflation in November 2009 (a positive monthly number is likely), the annual CPI-U inflation should jump from slightly negative territory in October to more than a 1% annual gain in November.      

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in October 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.82% adjusted monthly decline seen in October 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from September’s annual inflation rate of negative 1.29%. Consensus results would push annual inflation to roughly a negative 0.3% in October from the negative 1.3% reported in September.

Housing Starts (October 2009). Due for release on Wednesday (November 18th), the pattern of statistically meaningless monthly changes, with the level of activity holding at historically low levels, should continue.

   

__________

No. 257: Updated Trade Deficit, Credit, CPI Outlook

Friday, November 13th, 2009

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 257
Updated Trade Deficit, Credit, CPI Outlook

November 13, 2009

 __________

Jump in September Trade Deficit
Places Downside Pressure on GDP Revision

Annual CPI Inflation to Surge
Turning Positive by November

Credit Squeeze Intensifies

 __________

PLEASE NOTE: Active on our site (www.shadowstats.com) this morning is a search function that enables readers to find desired topics in current writings and the archives. A more complete description of this new feature follows at the end of the Commentary.

The next planned Commentary is for Monday, November 16th, following the release of October retail sales, with a subsequent Commentary (including an updated economic outlook) on Wednesday, November 18th, following the release of the October CPI and housing starts and the prior day’s reporting of October PPI and industrial production.

An estimate of annual change in and level of the SGS-Ongoing M3 for October based on full data for the month will be posted over this weekend on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com. No significant changes from last week’s posting are expected.

Involved in intense writing and research, I have again delayed the pending update of the Hyperinflation Report. Barring any internal surprises, I expect to have that long-promised missive out over the weekend of November 21st. My apologies to all for not meeting the indicated deadline.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams


Updated Outlook: Inflation Is on the Rebound. Formal CPI-U deflation, defined as negative year-to-year change in consumer prices of goods and services, and as reported for the last seven months, has about run its course. The deflation numbers were driven by a collapse in oil and related energy prices in the latter part of 2008. Annual inflation has been ticking higher (less negative) since July, as oil prices bottomed and then began to rise anew in response to Mr. Bernanke’s efforts to debase the U.S. dollar and to impair the dollar’s foreign exchange rate. Positive annual inflation will be in place by next month’s reporting of the November CPI. Inflation induced by a weakening dollar tends to reflect higher import and commodity prices that are not driven by a pick-up in U.S. economic demand.

Recent reporting indicates continuing credit contraction and a widening trade deficit. Both factors have negative implications for broad economic activity, as discussed below. The economy remains in its most severe economic downturn since the onset of the Great Depression, and the systemic liquidity crisis is ongoing. As mentioned in the prior Commentary, the general outlook is unchanged. Equity markets remain highly vulnerable to minor shocks, potentially with extreme instability. Such is due partially to market expectations being removed so severely from underlying economic and financial-system reality. 

Irrespective of near-term market gyrations, the long-term outlook remains extremely bearish for U.S. equities and the U.S. dollar, and extremely bullish for gold and silver. The economy still faces an eventual hyperinflationary great depression, with high risk of that circumstance beginning to unfold in the year ahead.



Trade Deficit Offers Downside Pressure on Pending 3rd-Quarter GDP Revision. This morning (November 13th) the Census Bureau and Bureau of Economic Analysis reported that the seasonally-adjusted September trade deficit widened to $36.5 billion, from a negatively revised $30.8 billion (was $30.7 billion) in August. Where the nominal September deficit was 18.5% wider than the August shortfall, the net deterioration adjusted for inflation (part of the differential was in higher prices of imported oil) still was 10.2%.

Where the "advance" estimate of third-quarter GDP was based on just July and August trade reporting, the reported September deficit deterioration, net of inflation, was enough to offer some downside revision pressure to the upcoming "second estimate" (first revision) of third-quarter GDP growth, which is due for release on November 24th.

In nominal terms (not adjusted for inflation) September exports rose by less than imports did. Oil imports increased, based on higher oil prices ($68.17 average per barrel in September versus $64.75 in August) as well as on some catch-up reporting of higher physical import volume (9.5 million barrels per day in September versus 8.7 million in August). It still appears as though irregular paperwork flows through Customs are impairing the reporting accuracy of imports



Credit Contraction Pulverizes Recovery Hopes. The latest numbers on consumer and business borrowing all are declining month-to-month and year-to-year and are getting worse, offering no immediate prospects of an economic recovery. Income growth generally is not keeping up with inflation, and without more-than-offsetting debt expansion, the chances of near-term real growth with any short-term sustainability are nil. 

As shown in the following graph, year-to-year change in consumer credit outstanding fell at a 4.8% annual pace, the deepest annual decline of the post-World War II era. Such followed annual declines of 4.1% in August and 3.9% in July.

 

The year-to-year contraction in September commercial and industrial (C&I) loans also set a post-World War II record decline, and October’s drop will be even worse. Based on 28 days of reporting, October C&I loans fell by about 16.2% year-to-year, following annual contractions of 10.6% in September and 7.1% in August.

Commercial paper outstanding, which has been in the throes of negative volatility for more than a year, with some resulting year-ago annual distortions, fell 24.8% year-to-year in October, against a 21.2% annual contraction in September, a 34.8% contraction in August, and a peak annual decline of 37.9% in July.


Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will favor higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than expected economic reporting in the month ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Retail Sales (October 2009). Due for release on Monday, November 16th, October retail sales are expected to jump month-to-month by 0.9% (Briefing.com), following September’s 1.5% monthly decline. Monthly growth likely will not exceed the pace of inflation, so the headline number is of some risk of a downside reporting surprise. 

Index of Industrial Production (October 2009)Due for release on Tuesday, November 17th, October industrial production is expected to rise by 0.3% for the month (Briefing.com), versus a 0.7% gain reported in September. Risk is fairly high of a downside surprise here, too, including a possible downward revision to the September estimate.

Producer Price Index (PPI) (October 2009).  Due for release on Tuesday, November 17th, the monthly PPI change is irregularly volatile. Expectations appear to be on the negative side of flat for the month-to-month number, but annual inflation should see some pick-up (less negative) in October, turning positive in November or December reporting.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) (October 2009). Due for release on Wednesday, November 18th, the month-to-month CPI-U is expected to show a 0.2% increase, per Briefing.com. Due to the sharp reversal of oil and gasoline price trends — in collapse one year ago — annual CPI-U inflation should come close to flattening out in October reporting, though remaining in negative territory. With an upside surprise to the monthly inflation number, which is possible, annual inflation could turn positive, once again, as early as the October report.

More likely, though, annual CPI-U will surge back into positive territory with November’s reporting. For October 2009, gasoline prices were down about 16% year-to-year, per Department of Energy estimates. November is shaping up as a 20% year-to-year gain. Even with no month-to-month inflation in November 2009 (a positive monthly number is likely), the annual CPI-U inflation should jump from slightly negative territory in October to more than a 1% annual gain in November.      

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in October 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.82% adjusted monthly decline seen in October 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from September’s annual inflation rate of negative 1.29%. Consensus results would push annual inflation to roughly a negative 0.3% in October from the negative 1.3% reported in September.

Housing Starts (October 2009). Due for release on Wednesday, November 18th, the pattern of statistically meaningless monthly changes, with the level of activity holding at historically low levels, should continue.  

 

Shadow Government Statistics New Site Feature: Search Function. We now have our own "search engine" available at the top-right hand corner of each web-page. Searching is a difficult thing to make both simple and effective, and so we provide some "Search Tips" (see link at top of Search Page) and we ask for your patience and comments on your experience with using it.

One tip to stress is that in searching for common terms, such as "GDP" and "unemployment" it is best to use some other key words or a date range, in order to narrow down the search results. So, if you are trying to find comments on, say, the 1st Qtr 2008 GDP report, you might narrow the search to content published between April 1, 2008 and December 31, 2008.

We also have ideas at the planning stage for a further index of data series reports which we hope to provide soon.

 

_________

 

No. 256: Updated General Outlook, Employment/Unemployment, Money Supply

Friday, November 6th, 2009
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 256
Updated General Outlook, Employment/Unemployment, Money Supply

November 6, 2009

__________

Annual Payroll Loss Rivals
End of World War II Production Shutdown

Unemployment Jumps to 10.2% (22.1% SGS)

Systemic Liquidity Problems Still Intensifying

Fed Continues to Explode Monetary Base

 __________

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Commentary is for Friday, November 13th, following the release of September’s monthly trade balance in goods and services. A preliminary estimate of annual change in and level of the SGS-Ongoing M3 for October will be posted over this weekend on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

Updated Outlook: Economic Contraction Continues. The most severe economic downturn since the onset of the Great Depression continues, as does the systemic liquidity crisis. The employment and unemployment numbers remain coincident, not lagging indicators of broad economic activity, and their ongoing deterioration in October means that the economy is not recovering. At best, activity in key areas such as retail sales, housing and production has flattened out at extremely low levels. Those levels also have enjoyed short-lived support from one-time stimulus gimmicks that largely have run their courses.

Regardless of deficit issues, with the mid-term election just one year away, the Administration likely will move quickly to introduce further economic stimulus, in hopes of moderating the impact of consumer pocketbook pain at the polls, and correspondingly helping to maintain Democrat control of Congress. There are no short-term stimuli available that will have other than fleeting impact, since the downturn is structural, tied to consumer income growth failing to keep up with inflation. The traditional offset to weak income issues in recent years has been encouragement of consumer debt expansion. Such debt expansion, however, is not available at present, at least not in quantities that would support an expanding economy.  

Happy Wall Street hype of the last day or so has included rising year-to-year same-store retail sales and sharply improving productivity. Those retail store sales likely will prove negative, after adjustment for inflation. Economic activity usually is measured with the effects of inflation removed from growth estimates.

Long-term subscribers may have noted that I rarely discuss productivity; this is because the published numbers are of such poor quality that they are worthless. Generally, productivity is measured — with modifications — as the ratio of GDP to payroll employment, two seriously flawed series. The GDP is so heavily gimmicked and politicized as to be worthless in its own right, while the payroll series currently is overstating employment levels meaningfully (see below). Taking the ratio of two bad numbers usually does not generate a result more meaningful than seen in the individual series.

In the current circumstance, where reported GDP growth is surging as payrolls plummet (even as reported), of course reported productivity would surge. Given the poor quality of related government data, however, a more meaningful issue might be whether GDP growth really surged. Again, payroll employment is a coincident, not a lagging indicator of broad economic activity. 

The Fed continues in panic mode, spiking the monetary base at annualized pace not seen since the "worst" of the crisis a year ago. At the same time, broad money supply is contracting at a pace that even in the best of times would promise a recession in the months ahead.

The broad outlook remains unchanged. I cannot remember stock market prices ever being so far removed from reflecting underlying economic and financial-system reality. Irrespective of near-term market gyrations, the long-term outlook remains extremely bearish for U.S. equities and the U.S. dollar, and extremely bullish for gold and silver. The economy still faces an eventual hyperinflationary great depression, with high risk of that circumstance beginning to unfold in the year ahead. Such will be discussed in the forthcoming Hyperinflation Special Report Update (2009).


October Employment/Unemployment Reporting Showed Ongoing Recession. As discussed last month in the Flash Update of October 2, 2009, I contend that the household survey (unemployment, measuring the employment status of individuals) is statistically sounder than the establishment survey (payroll employment, measuring the number of nonfarm jobs). The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) attributes narrower statistical confidence intervals around the payroll numbers, claiming a broader-based survey.

Specifically, while the payroll survey is more broadly based, the BLS never knows what it really is receiving in data (did a company just not get its report in on time, or did it go out of business?), and revisions over the last year or two have been well outside the bounds of the estimated confidence intervals. The household survey, however, is one where the sampling universe is fairly well established, and the unadjusted raw data are not revised. The issues with the household survey usually are more in the area of how survey questions are defined, rather than problems with the nature of survey’s universe. That said, accounting for all definitional differences, the BLS never has been able to reconcile fully the numbers in the two surveys. 

The issues here are significant, because last month, the BLS found it had a flaw in its payroll surveying that was going to require a very large annual benchmark revision. Current underestimation of monthly jobs loss likely exceeds 200,000. In October, employment was down by 589,000 per the household survey, versus a 190,000 jobs loss reported in the payroll survey. Underlying employment series are more consistent with the reported household survey than the payroll survey, which is known to be flawed at the moment.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 190,000 (down 99,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for October 2009, following a revised 219,000 (previously 263,000) jobs loss in September.

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; the current month of October also is the short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment has declined by a seasonally-adjusted 7,304,000 jobs, or by 5.3%. Net of the pending benchmark revision, the peak-to-trough decline likely has been closer to 9 million jobs or 6.5%.

As the pace of reported monthly decline has slowed against year-ago comparisons, year-to-year contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls narrowed to 4.0% in October from an unrevised 4.2% in September, and a 60-year low of a 4.4% decline in August. Adjusted for the benchmark revision due for release in February 2010, however, October’s annual decline likely was around 6.0%, the most severe annual contraction seen since the production shutdown following World War II, which hit a record trough of a 7.6% contraction in September 1945. Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the current annual decline would be the worst since the Great Depression.    

Underlying economic series (such as the purchasing managers and help-wanted advertising surveys, and new claims for unemployment insurance) are consistent with a monthly October jobs loss of roughly 500,000. Such reflects the current reporting, likely near-term revisions and aggregated birth-death model understatement of roughly 200,000 jobs per month.

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias.  The pattern of impossible biases being built into the headline monthly payroll employment continued to reverse for the third month in the last four, with a downside bias of 107,000 jobs in October 2009 reporting. Instead of the headline jobs loss of 190,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what I call the concurrent seasonal factor bias (CSFB) — would have shown a less-severe monthly jobs loss of about 83,000. This factor has generated an upside reporting bias seen in eight of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 755,000.  The recent reversals may reflect a shift in payroll reporting, which will be assessed in a future Commentary. A worksheet on this is available upon request. (See SGS Newsletter No. 50, for further background.)

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  As discussed last month and in SGS Newsletter No. 51, Birth-Death Model biases tend to overstate payroll employment during recessions. The flaws here were confirmed with last month’s BLS estimate of an 824,000 downside benchmark revision for May 2009, with a suggested ongoing monthly understatement of 200,000 or more in jobs losses per month. The BLS indicated that their underlying assumptions to the Birth-Death Model were missing certain jobs losses. Specifically, if a company fails to report its payroll employment, the BLS assumes the company did not go out of business and assigns it a level of employment commensurate with its prior reporting and industry trends.

Never designed to handle the downside pressures from an economic contraction — in addition to the flawed underlying assumptions — the model adds a fairly consistent upside bias to the payroll levels each year, currently averaging about 74,000 jobs per month. The unadjusted October 2009 bias was a monthly addition of 86,000 jobs, down from 94,000 the year before, but up from 34,000 in September 2009.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey (see above), which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed employment dropped by 589,000 in September, versus a decline of 785,000 in September.

The October 2009 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-significant increase to 10.20% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from 9.83% in September.  Unadjusted U.3 held at 9.5% in October versus September.  The broader October U.6 unemployment rose to an adjusted 17.5% (16.3% unadjusted), from 17.0% (16.1% unadjusted) in September.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers. The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed, unemployment more in line with common experience — as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — rose to about 22.1% in October, up from 21.4% in September. See the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com for a graph and more detail.

While 22.1% unemployment might raise questions in terms of a comparison with the purported peak unemployment in the Great Depression (1933) of 25%, the SGS level likely is about as bad as the peak unemployment seen in the 1973 to 1975 recession. The Great Depression unemployment rate was estimated well after the fact, with 27% of those employed working on farms. Today, less that 2% work on farms. Accordingly, for purposes of a Great Depression comparison, I would look at the estimated peak nonfarm unemployment rate in 1933 of 34% to 35%.

Broad Money Growth Continues to Falter as Monetary Base Explodes.  Irrespective of the niceties of wording an FOMC statement so as not to disrupt the financial markets, the Fed still is panicking, flooding the system with liquidity. The monetary base surged again in the two-week period ended November 4th. 

As shown in the above graph of the St. Louis Fed’s Adjusted Monetary Base (seasonally adjusted), the level of the monetary base has been pushed to a record high, at annualized rate of growth since the series’ near-term trough in the two-week period ended August 16th, nearly three months ago, of 126.1%. The monetary base consists of currency in circulation plus bank reserves, and it is the Fed’s traditional tool for targeting money supply growth.

The money supply measures, however, still are not reflective of the surge in bank reserves, with banks leaving heavy excess reserves on deposit with the Fed, rather than lending into the normal stream of commerce. Formal monthly estimates for M1, M2 and the SGS-Ongoing M3 will be published this weekend on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com. While M1 and M2 (which includes M1) appear to risen month-to-month for October, year-to-year growth has softened. October M3, however, appears likely to show its fourth consecutive month-to-month decline, with year-to-year change slowing to around 2% from an estimate 2.3% in September. There have large declines in institutional money funds and large time deposits, which more than have offset any small growth in M2. There is nothing in the data of the last two months that would alter the content of the September 2nd Alert.


Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks to reporting will favor higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than expected economic reporting in the month ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Trade Balance (September 2009). Due for release on Friday (November 13th), reporting of the September trade deficit is expected to show minor deterioration per Briefing.com. With rising oil prices and potential catch-up reporting in import paperwork flows, a widening in the deficit beyond consensus is a reasonable prospect. Any significant worsening of the deficit beyond expectations, however, has the potential for dampening estimated growth in the upcoming first-revision (second estimate) to third-quarter GDP on November 24th.

__________

No. 255: Brief Update - Friday’s Employment/Unemployment Release

Wednesday, November 4th, 2009

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

COMMENTARY NUMBER 255
Brief Update - Friday’s Employment/Unemployment Release

November 4, 2009

 

__________

Employment Situation Continues to Deteriorate

 __________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Commentary is for Friday, November 6th, following the release of the October employment and unemployment report.
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

Brief Update: Some Risk of Worse-Than-Expected Data for October Employment Conditions.  As discussed in Commentary 254, the U.S. economy remains in a protracted and deep economic contraction, one that will continue to be unresponsive to traditional stimuli. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally expected by the financial markets, risks will favor higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than expected economic reporting in the month ahead.  Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Payroll Employment and Unemployment (October 2009).  Due for release on Friday, November 6th, expectations appear to be for a smaller decline in October payrolls than seen in September and for a minimal notch upwards in unemployment. Briefing.com reports a consensus expectations of a 175,000 (little changed from last week’s consensus of 166,000) jobs loss in October, following a 263,000 jobs decline in September, with the October unemployment rate increasing to 9.9% from September’s 9.8% level. Given that the economy remains much weaker than the consensus outlook, reporting risk here continues to be for worse-than-expected numbers. 

Adjusting for prior-period revisions, an October jobs loss of 300,000 is within reason. Add to that a further 200,000 monthly jobs loss that is not being counted in the survey, and the total jobs loss likely is around 500,000 for the month. While that generally is consistent with the broad weakness in related series, the formal reporting of same is not likely until the benchmark revision publication in February 2010.

September’s headline unemployment rate to the second decimal point was 9.83%, just 0.02% shy of rounding up to 9.9%. As a result, with continued deterioration in official unemployment, 9.9% appears fairly safe for October, and 10.0% is within easy reach. With yesterday’s off-year election having gone generally against the Democrats, a substantial new stimulus package from the federal government — one aimed at helping the economy before next-year’s mid-term election — likely will be proposed shortly. The headlines surrounding the odometer event of the unemployment rate rolling up to 10.0% would help a new stimulus push. Accordingly, that 10.0% (9.95% or a statistically insignificant gain of 0.12% from September would do the trick) might be offered up to the public on Friday, instead of a month from now.

As to related underlying reporting, help-wanted advertising is contracting. The Conference Board’s newspaper help-wanted advertising index for September (a leading indicator to October’s employment report) fell to a new record low of 9, from the prior low of 10 that had held for the preceding four months. This new 58-year low is a very negative signal for background employment conditions. While some of the weakness in this index of recent years has been due to ads shifting from newspapers to the Internet, near-term relative changes remain significant indicators of pending employment activity.

Confirming the declining trend in print advertising, the Conference Board’s online help-wanted advertising also has been in monthly decline, with year-to-year change for new ads down 24.6% in October, versus an annual decline of 25.7% in September. The declining online data are leading indicators of activity to both the October and November employment reports.

The October purchasing managers surveys were negative for Friday’s reporting but mixed in their employment signals for next month. On the manufacturing side, the employment diffusion index (a reading of 50.0 or above is expansion) jumped from 46.2 in September (leading indicator to October employment reporting) to 53.1 in October (leading indicator to November reporting). On the non-manufacturing side, the index fell from 44.3 in September (leading indicator to October employment reporting) to 41.1 in October (leading indicator to November reporting).

The overall strong results for the manufacturing series are suspect and should prove to be fleeting, since consumption is not growing, which means that any production gain is feeding an involuntary but temporary buildup in inventories.

New claims for unemployment insurance have been fluctuating around 530,000 per week for the last six weeks, well off the 650,000 peak average seen back March and April of 2009. The current base level, however, is around where it was in fourth-quarter 2008, when monthly payroll jobs losses were averaging about 550,000. That number, though, was before the first-quarter 2009’s big reporting error developed, per last month’s BLS announcement of the pending major downward revisions to data that will be forthcoming when the March 2009 benchmark revision is published in February 2010. The pending benchmark adjustments suggest a 200,000 shortfall per month in current accounting for monthly jobs loss.

As a point of clarification, the weekly new claims number has only a partial relationship to the reported monthly payroll jobs change. The monthly payroll employment change reflects the prior payroll balance, less jobs lost, plus jobs gained.

These underlying related economic series, again, are leading indicators to the government’s employment and unemployment reports. The employment and unemployment numbers are "coincident" (not the popularly touted "lagging") indicators of broad economic activity. The U.S. economy remains in recession/depression.


__________

No. 254: Updated Economic Outlook, GDP, Durable Goods, Home Sales

Thursday, October 29th, 2009

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 254
Updated Economic Outlook, GDP, Durable Goods, Home Sales

October 29, 2009

__________

Recession Is Not Over

Quarterly GDP Growth Is Not Sustainable
With 92% of Growth in Nonrecurring Factors

Annual GDP Down 2.3% (5.7% SGS)

4th-Quarter GDP Should Resume
Quarter-to-Quarter Decline

Durable Goods Orders at 1997 Level

Help-Wanted Advertising at New 58-Year Low

 __________

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Commentary is for Friday, November 6th, following the release of the October employment and unemployment report.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

Economic Outlook Update: Economy Remains in Severe Recession.  The general outlook for the U.S. economy continues to be for severe contraction, with the worst still ahead. The downturn will remain generally unresponsive to traditional stimuli, other than as seen in occasional blips from government giveaway gimmicks. The business contraction is structural in nature, tied to a lack of real growth in consumer income and liquidity constraints from contracting consumer credit. As a hyperinflation unfolds, the current circumstance will evolve into a hyperinflationary Great Depression. The Consumer Liquidity and the Depression special reports of September 14th of August 1st, respectively, hold and are included here by reference (available at www.shadowstats.com).

All U.S. recessions in the last four decades have had at least one positive quarter-to-quarter GDP reading, followed by renewed downturn. Such likely will be the case with the growth reported in the initial estimate of third-quarter 2009 GDP, that is, a quarterly GDP contraction for fourth-quarter 2009.  With broad money supply in near-term contraction and with no relief to the structural problems impairing household liquidity, there is no economic recovery on the horizon.

As expected, the positive quarter-to-quarter change in third-quarter activity reflected one-time impacts from the clunkers and the first-time homebuyers programs, and a buildup in business inventories that will face liquidation in the fourth quarter.

The estimate of 3.5% annualized real growth for third-quarter GDP included a 1.7% gain from auto sales, a 0.6% gain from new residential construction, and a 0.9% gain from a largely-involuntary inventory buildup, which appears to be understated. In aggregate, those one-time stimulus or inventory items represented 92% of the reported quarterly growth. The nature of the stimulus-related gains was that they tended to steal business activity from the future. The months ahead are the future.  Accordingly, fourth-quarter quarterly GDP change likely will turn negative, again.

Separately, in recent reporting, new orders for durable goods (see below) are continuing to bottom-bounce, not to recover. Also, the Conference Board just released its September help-wanted advertising number, showing a sharp monthly deterioration to a new historic low level (see Week Ahead employment detail). The mixed picture for housing starts is not a good one, either, given distortions currently distorting those series (see below).  

 

  

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

As shown in the accompanying graph, year-to-year GDP change remained deep in recession territory, and it remains likely to continue in negative territory well the into next year. With a quarterly contraction in the fourth-quarter GDP, the pace of annual decline would pick up, again. In the unlikely event that the Bureau of Economic Analysis can keep its fourth-quarter GDP estimated quarter-to-quarter growth in positive territory, the pattern unfolding here soon would become recognized as a double-dip recession. The worst of the U.S. economic contraction still is to come. 

GDP Set for Renewed Contraction Next Quarter. The "advance" guesstimate for third-quarter 2009 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) released this morning (October 29th) by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) suggested annualized real growth for the quarter of 3.53% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), following a 0.74% decline reported for the second quarter. 

The year-to-year contraction in real third-quarter GDP narrowed to 2.33% from a record annual contraction of 3.83% in the second quarter. As shown in the graph above, the latest year-to-year decline generally is in line with annual-growth trough levels of major post-World War II recessions.

The BEA tends to target the consensus outlook for its "advance" estimate, and the consensus was at 3.2% coming into this morning, per Briefing.com. This targeting is due partially to the bulk of the data in the "advance" estimate being guesses, where hard information on the quarter just is not available. For example, the trade data, where net exports resumed their widening (an economic negative), are based on only two months of data for the quarter. Given the relative insignificance of the BEA’s first guesstimates here, no attempt is made by the BEA to estimate either Gross National Product (GNP) or Gross Domestic Income (GDI) for the quarter. Those first estimates should follow along with the first set of revisions to third-quarter GDP in next month’s reporting.

As discussed in the opening comments, nearly all the reported quarter-to-quarter gain in third-quarter GDP was due to auto sales and housing (boosted by now-expired one-time stimulus giveaways) and a largely involuntary inventory build-up (likely to be expanded in later revisions). As personal consumption and housing decline anew, lacking stimulus props, and as excess inventories get worked off, a renewed quarter-to-quarter decline in real fourth-quarter GDP is a fair bet.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate for third-quarter 2009 is an annual contraction of 5.7% versus the 2.3% official estimate, narrowed from 5.9% (3.8% official estimate) in the second quarter. While annualized real quarterly growth is not formally estimated on an alternative basis, a flat quarter-to-quarter circumstance, plus or minus, likely is realistic.


September Durable Goods Have Lost 12 Years of Growth. The Census Bureau reported yesterday (October 28th) that the regularly-volatile new orders for durable goods rose by 1.0% (up by 0.7% net of revisions) month-to-month in September, versus a revised 2.6% (was 2.4%) decline in August. In terms of year-to-year change, before any accounting for inflation, September’s new orders were down by 17.4%, following August’s revised annual decline of 19.3% (previously 19.1%). Adjusted for inflation, the series would have shown even sharper contractions. 

As shown in the accompanying graph, the level of new orders for durable goods (smoothed for a six-month moving average), remains in territory last seen in 1997. Again, this is before inflation adjustment. I avoid deflating this series, due to the lack of a reasonable deflator measure available for durable goods. This is a similar pattern to that seen in real retail sales, industrial production and housing starts.

From the durable goods orders series peak in 2006, the September 2009 order level was down by 28.1%, within great depression territory per SGS definition of a greater than 25% peak-to-trough decline in economic activity. Since January 2009, the seasonally-adjusted series has flattened out at an extremely low level, averaging $162 billion per month. Against that, the September reading of $165.7 billion was within the normal range of volatility for reporting of this series. 

The widely followed new orders for nondefense capital goods also gained in September, up by 2.5% (up 1.7% net of revisions) on a month-to-month basis, following August’s revised 7.7% (previously 7.1%) monthly decline. Year-to-year, September orders were down by 19.1%, versus a revised August annual decline of 23.5% (previously down by 22.9%). New orders for automobiles fell by 0.1% in September, suggesting some lack of follow-through from August’s clunkers-program-induced spike.    

These new orders series are leading indicators to economic activity and are not showing any pending economic rebound.


New Homes Sales Remain Weak. With major distortions to both new and existing home sales reporting from rising foreclosures and the expiring first-time-homebuyer tax credit, September’s reporting results were mixed and not particularly meaningful. With the tax credit program having run its course, some fall-off in monthly sales is likely in the next month or two.

The Census Bureau reported yesterday (October 28th) that September new home sales fell by a statistically insignificant 3.6% (down 6.3% net of revisions) +/- 12.0% (95% confidence interval) month-to-month, following a revised 1.0% (previously 0.7%) gain in August. There was a large downward revision to the data before August. Year-to-year, September was down by 7.8%, following a revised 6.1% (previously 3.4%) decline in August.

Likely spiked by the tax credit expiration, existing home sales in September rose by 9.4% month-to-month, 9.2% year-to-year, to a two-year-high level of activity. Still heavily warped by foreclosures (estimated at 29% of sales in September), again, some downside volatility would be likely in the next couple of months.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than generally is expected by the financial markets, risks will favor higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than expected economic reporting in the month ahead.  Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Payroll Employment and Unemployment (October 2009).Due for release on Friday, November 6th, expectations appear to be for a smaller decline in payrolls and a minimal notch upwards in unemployment. Briefing.com reports a consensus expectation of a 166,000 jobs loss in October, following a 263,000 jobs decline in September, with the October unemployment rate increasing to 9.9% from September’s 9.8% level. The economy remains much weaker than consensus, and reporting risk here continues to be for worse-than-expected numbers.

This morning’s release by the Conference Board of newspaper help-wanted advertising for September (a leading indicator to October’s employment report) showed the index fell to a new record low of 9, from the prior low of 10 that held for the preceding four months. This new 58-year low is a very negative signal for background employment conditions. As the various related employment series are updated in the next several days, a Commentary with a quick update on the pending employment/unemployment numbers is planned before the release.

The underlying related economic series still are consistent with roughly 500,000 of jobs loss per month, of which 300,000 or more should be reported for October, once the re-jiggering of prior-period monthly revisions is taken into account. An additional 200,000 is being missed completely, due to survey problems. The reporting risk for the unemployment rate is that it could break to 10.0% or above, but political pressures have to be substantial to push that odometer event as far off into the future as possible.

As indicated in last month’s employment report estimating the pending benchmark revision based on March 2009 (to be published in February 2010), the payroll survey has been missing about 200,000 in jobs loss per month, this year. Such will be corrected partially with revised data to be released in February 2010 and again in February 2011.

   

__________

 

No. 253: GDP Outlook, Surging Monetary Base

Tuesday, October 27th, 2009

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 253
GDP Outlook, Surging Monetary Base

October 27, 2009

 __________

 Fed Pushes Monetary Base to Record High

Recession Not Over Despite a Positive GDP Quarter

 __________

 PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Commentary is for Thursday, October 29th, following the release of the "advance" estimate of third-quarter GDP. Such will include an update to the broad economic outlook.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

This morning’s brief Commentary provides the promised update to the outlook for Thursday’s third-quarter GDP estimate, as well as an update to recent reporting of the money supply and monetary base.

Monetary Base Surge Continues to Suggest a Response to Systemic Problems. As shown in the accompanying graph, Mr. Bernanke and company continue to spike the monetary base at a pace not seen since panicked efforts to avoid a systemic implosion 13-plus months ago. 


Plotted is the level of the St. Louis Fed’s Adjusted Monetary Base (seasonally adjusted), which rose to a record-high $1.96 trillion in the two weeks ended October 21st, up 4.2% from the prior two-week period. Since the near-term trough seen in the August 12th period, the monetary base has been growing at an annualized pace of 96.6%. The Fed appears to be panicking again, acting as though it has a worsening systemic problem.

The monetary base consists of currency in circulation plus bank reserves and remains the Fed’s primary tool for increasing or decreasing money supply growth.  The money supply has not responded to the surge in liquidity of the last year. This is due to the bulk of the increase in the monetary base having been in excess bank reserves, which banks are leaving on deposit with the Fed instead of lending into the normal flow of commerce. 

The pattern of weekly and monthly reporting with the still-published components of M3 money supply — specifically M2, institutional money funds and large time deposits — generally remains one of contraction. In the current circumstance, a contracting money supply is consistent with mounting liquidity issues in the banking system.  Such a contraction in money supply also would tend to throw a healthy economy into recession in the year ahead.  Of course, far from being healthy, current economic activity is bottom-bouncing in the longest and deepest economic contraction since the onset of the Great Depression.   

Fourth-Quarter GDP Contraction Should Follow Any Third-Quarter Gain. The "advance" estimate for third-quarter 2009 gross domestic product (GDP) is due for release on Thursday (October 29th). As has been discussed previously, annualized real (inflation-adjusted) quarterly growth is being touted as returning to near-average growth of around 3%.  Briefing.com reports a consensus estimate solidifying around 3.2% annualized growth, versus a 0.7% contraction in the second quarter. Such would imply a year-to-year contraction of 2.4% for the third quarter, versus a 3.8% decline in the second quarter.

The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) will tend to target the consensus outlook for its first guesstimate of third-quarter GDP activity, but the reporting still is of fair risk to fall short of what appears to be an overly optimistic consensus.  Any positive quarter-to-quarter change in activity likely will reflect one-time impacts from the clunkers and the first-time homebuyers programs, and a buildup in business inventories that will face liquidation in the fourth quarter. Accordingly, fourth-quarter quarterly GDP change likely will turn negative again.

As previously discussed, at least one quarter of quarterly GDP gain has been normal during recessions of the last four decades and does not necessarily signal a recession’s end, irrespective of any happy hype out of Wall Street. With broad money supply in near-term contraction and with no relief to the structural problems impairing household liquidity, there is no economic recovery on the horizon.

In the event that BEA can keep its fourth-quarter GDP estimate in positive territory, the pattern unfolding here soon would become recognized as a double-dip recession. The worst of the U.S. economic contraction still is to come.

 

Still in the Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than expected by the financial markets, risks generally will remain for higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than expected economic reporting in the month ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

New Orders for Durable Goods (September 2009). Market expectations are for a small monthly gain (1.0% per Briefing.com) in September durable goods orders, due for release on Wednesday, October 28th (corrected from today). Whatever the monthly change is (plus or minus) in this highly volatile series, it likely will be indistinguishable from unchanged in terms of statistical significance, while the year-to-year contraction will remain meaningful for this bottom-bouncing series.

 __________

No. 252: General Outlook, Housing, Production and PPI

Tuesday, October 20th, 2009

  JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 252
General Outlook, Housing, Production and PPI

October 20, 2009

__________

Key Indicators Continue Bottom-Bouncing
At Low-Level Plateaus of Business Activity

10 Years of Production Growth Has Evaporated,
All Post-World War II Housing Growth Is Gone

Positive Quarterly 3rd-Qtr GDP Growth
Would Not Mean Recession’s End

PPI Annual Inflation Should Turn Positive by Year-End

  __________

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Commentary is for Thursday, October 29th, following the release of the" advance" estimate of third-quarter GDP, although there will be a brief intervening update of likely GDP reporting. The Hyperinflation Special Report — 2009 Update is planned for release by the end of the first weekend in November, with a new-format full newsletter following immediately thereafter.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams
 

Broad Outlook Unchanged. As discussed in Commentary No. 251, the worst remains ahead for the economic and systemic-solvency crises. Economic reporting has shown no meaningful signs of business recovery, with the current depression likely to evolve into a great depression, in conjunction with the collapse of the value in the U.S. dollar and a hyperinflation. Risks are high for these crises to explode in the year ahead. The general outlook is not changed.

A full review of the economic outlook will follow with next week’s third-quarter GDP commentary. In the interim, some selling pressure has continued against the U.S. dollar, along with continued strength in oil and gold prices, generally reflective of the Federal Reserve’s ongoing efforts to debase the U.S. currency.

Rarely have market expectations (economic recovery, contained inflation, contained solvency crisis) been so far removed from underlying economic and financial-system fundamentals and reality. That circumstance leaves open the possibility of extreme, negative market reactions, with highly volatile and disorderly markets possible. Such is true particularly for U.S. equities and the U.S. dollar. 

September Housing Starts Continued Bottom-Bouncing. The Census Bureau reported today (October 20th) that September housing starts rose month-to-month by a statistically-insignificant 0.5% (down by 1.3% net of revisions) +/- 12.1% (95% confidence interval). August’s starts were revised so as to show a 1.0% decline, after initially having been reported up by 1.5%. Year-to-year change was down by 28.2% in September, following a revised annual contraction of 30.5% (previously 29.6%) in August.   

Annual contractions continue to moderate here and in a number of other series, due to year-ago comparisons that were against extreme annual downturns at the time. Since December 2008, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing at an historically low level, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 553,000. September’s reading of 590,000 was within the range of normal monthly volatility.

 

The "recovery" in housing is shown in the above graph. The data are smoothed using a six-month moving average to remove the extreme month-to-month volatility seen in this series. Regardless of any level of smoothing, though, housing starts remain well below any levels seen since the end of World War II. 

As noted last month, new and existing home sales data remain very difficult to assess in terms of the implications for underlying economic activity. September reporting will continue to be warped by a large portion of activity tied to foreclosures, with an increasing number of new foreclosures reportedly hitting the market. Also, to the extent there has been any prop to housing-market activity from the first-time home buyers tax credit program, such will be gone from the numbers within the next month.

Temporary Production Growth Not Matched by Consumption. Not only was September industrial well above expectations, but it surged on top of an upside revision to August’s activity. Beyond the one-time nature of the clunkers activity, the problem for the economy is that there is no evidence of gains in consumption adequate to absorb the production. That means inventories are being built up, and the involuntary increase in inventories will help to produce the much expected quarter-to-quarter upturn in third-quarter GDP (see Week Ahead). Liquidation of those inventories will help to return the reported GDP to a quarter-to-quarter contraction in the fourth-quarter, a pattern common to prior recessions.   

The Federal Reserve reported that seasonally-adjusted September industrial production rose by 0.7% (1.1% net of revisions) for the month, following a revised 1.2% (previously 0.8%) gain in August.  Year-to-year contraction in September narrowed to 6.1% from a revised 10.4% (previously 10.8%) contraction in August. The June 2009 reading had set a record low for annual production growth since the shutdown of war-time production that followed World War II.   

 

The "recovery" in production is shown in the above graph, where month-to-month volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average. Production activity has leveled off at a low-level plateau of activity that effectively has wiped out the last 10 years of growth in industrial production. Despite the near-term gains (as will tend to become evident as inventories are worked off in the months ahead), the series generally still is bottom-bouncing.

Brief Softening of Oil Prices Contained September PPI Inflation. As reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) this morning (October 20th), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted producer price index (PPI) eased by 0.6% (down by 0.5% unadjusted) in September, following August’s 1.7% (1.0% unadjusted) monthly increase. September oil prices softened some, on average, with the West Texas Intermediate (WTI) spot at $69.46 per barrel, down from August’s average of $71.06. WTI is trading somewhat shy of $80 per barrel as this goes to press.

Year-to-year, the annual contraction in PPI inflation intensified slightly, with September prices down by 4.8% from the year before, versus a 4.3% annual contraction in August. Going against the pressures of collapsing oil prices in fourth-quarter 2008, year-to-year change in PPI inflation should turn positive, once again, by year-end 2009.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted September intermediate goods rose by 0.2% (up by 1.8% in August), with crude goods falling by 2.1% (up by 3.6% in August). The decline in year-to-year inflation continued to narrow, with September intermediate goods down by 11.7% (down by 12.3% in August) and September crude goods down by 31.5% (down by 35.2% in August).

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than expected by the financial markets, risks generally will remain for higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than expected economic reporting in the month ahead. Such is true especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

New Orders for Durable Goods (September 2009).Market expectations are for a small monthly gain (0.5% per Briefing.com) in September durable goods orders, due for release on October 27th (next Tuesday). Whatever the monthly change is (plus or minus) in this highly volatile series, it likely will be indistinguishable from unchanged in terms of statistical significance.

Gross Domestic Product — GDP (Advance Estimate, Third-Quarter 2009). Due for release on October 29th (a week from Thursday), third-quarter GDP is being touted as returning to near-average growth of around 3%. The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) will tend to target the consensus outlook for its first guesstimate of third-quarter GDP activity, but the reporting should fall short of consensus, if indeed the consensus is that strong. Any positive quarter-to-quarter change in activity likely will reflect one-time impacts from the clunkers and the first-time homebuyers programs, and a buildup in business inventories that will face liquidation in the fourth-quarter. Accordingly, fourth-quarter quarterly GDP change likely will turn negative again. Once public consensus numbers are published, the GDP reporting assessment will be updated. As previously discussed, one-quarter of quarterly GDP gain is usual during recessions and does not necessarily signal a recession’s end, irrespective of any happy hype out of Wall Street.

__________

 

 

No. 251: General Outlook, CPI and Retail Sales

Thursday, October 15th, 2009

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 COMMENTARY NUMBER 251
General Outlook, CPI and Retail Sales

October 15, 2009

__________

September Annual Inflation -1.3% (CPI-U), 6.1% (SGS)

CPI-U Inflation Spike Due by Year-End

No Recovery: September Real Retail Sales Continued Bottom-Bouncing
At Low-Level Plateau

10 Years of Retail Sales Growth Gone

 __________

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Commentary is for Tuesday, October 20th, following the release of September housing starts and PPI. The final SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for September will be published over the coming weekend.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams


Broad Outlook Unchanged Since Last Commentary. As discussed in Commentary No. 250, the worst is still ahead for the economic and systemic-solvency crises. Economic reporting has shown no meaningful signs of business recovery, with the current depression likely to evolve into a great depression, in conjunction with the collapse of the value in the U.S. dollar and a hyperinflation. Risks are high for these crises to explode in the year ahead. The general outlook is not changed.

With revisions considered, this week’s economic reporting was in line with expectations, yet it added some information to the big picture. Annual CPI-U inflation for example, increasingly appears to have bottomed out in July. Against oil-price-collapse driven massive drops in the CPI in during the fourth quarter, today’s spiking oil prices promise positive inflation no later than November, with year-end inflation likely to push above three-percent.

Typical of the patterns seen in housing starts, industrial production and new orders for durable goods, the September retail sales report showed ongoing bottom-bouncing at an extremely low-level plateau of business activity. Adjusted for inflation, there are no signs of recovery, just monthly swings that stay within a narrow range.

The reported monthly decline in retail sales followed a downward revision to the previously reported clunkers-related sales gains in August. With clunkers gone, and with the tax credit for first-time home buyers effectively expired, bottom-bouncing seen recently in both retail sales and housing data likely will turn into renewed monthly declines in the quarter ahead.

Retail Sales

Shown in the accompanying graph is the "recovery" in retail sales. The monthly volatility is smoothed using a six-month moving average, but the pattern generally is the same using just raw monthly data. The inflation-adjusted dollar reading for September was the lowest since June and below average for the last eight months. As seen in the graph, and in the numbers at any level of smoothing, the current level of activity is about the same as it was 10 years ago. Virtually 10 years worth of real retail sales growth has been destroyed in the still unfolding depression.

September CPI Restrained by Falling Food Prices? September’s CPI picked up some new-car inflation that had been masked in the prior month by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) not counting clunker rebates as part of new-car pricing. Such was offset in today’s reporting with an extremely suspect decline in food inflation. The CPI-U reflected both month-to-month and year-to-year declines in food prices, yet, seasonally-adjusted retail sales showed higher grocery store sales both month-to-month and year-to-year.  

A note on the different CPI measures: The CPI-U is the monthly headline inflation number and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers.   The CPI-W covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. The C-CPI-U is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based, and generally shows lower annual inflation than the CPI-U and CPI-W. The two latter measures once had fixed weightings — so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living — but now are quasi-substitution-based. The SGS alternative measures are attempts at adjusting the reported CPI-U inflation for the impact of methodological change of recent decades designed to move the concept of the CPI away from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living. 

CPI-U.  The BLS reported this morning (October 15th) that the seasonally-adjusted September CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) rose by 0.17% (up by 0.06% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, after rising by 0.45% (up by 0.22% unadjusted) in August. Seasonally-adjusted, the annualized rate of inflation for the third-quarter average CPI-U versus the second-quarter (same way the GDP price deflator inflation is calculated) was 3.60% versus 1.33%.

Unadjusted, year-to-year inflation was less negative (formal deflation), again, down by 1.29% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) in September, versus a 1.48% annual contraction in August. With the negative annual inflation having bottomed in July, year-to-year inflation should turn positive again in November, perhaps even as early as in October’s reporting. Annual CPI-U inflation could break above the positive two-to-three percent range by year-end 2009.

Recent annual declines in CPI-U inflation have been the biggest since 1950. I estimate, however, that CPI reporting methods used in 1950 would generate a reported current inflation rate of roughly 6% (see Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures below). The brief and shallow formal deflation that now is coming to an end — based on official CPI-U reporting — appears to have been about half the depth and half the length of the negative inflation bout in the 1950 circumstance.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in October 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.82% adjusted monthly decline seen in October 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from September’s annual inflation rate of negative 1.29%.

For those interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I continue to refer you to CPIwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

CPI-W.  The BLS reported that the narrower, seasonally-adjusted September CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) rose by 0.18% (up by 0.08% unadjusted), following an increase of 0.55% (up by 0.30% unadjusted) in August.  Year-to-year, CPI-W inflation declined by 1.68% in September, following a 1.90% drop in August.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — fell by 1.37% in September, versus a 1.48% drop in August. The deeper decline in the C-CPI-U annual inflation rate versus the CPI-U is the normal relationship for the two series.  

Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth held at 2.1% in September, versus 2.1% in August, reflecting the differences in SGS versus BLS handling of clunkers pricing in August, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to about 6.1% (6.11% for those using the extra digit) in September, versus 6.0% in August.

The SGS alternative estimates for August included a one-time added 0.28 percentage point adjustment to reflect the clunkers program pricing impact. The September SGS estimates reverted back to their regular methodology, where the base BLS CPI-U numbers for September presumably picked up any continuing higher new-car prices that otherwise had been masked in August’s numbers.  

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact, not otherwise published by the BLS.

September Retail Sales Declined Following Downside Revision to Clunkers-Induced August Sales Boost. Yesterday’s (October 14th) Census Bureau report showed a statistically-significant monthly decline of 1.49% (1.92% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval) in seasonally-adjusted September retail sales. Such followed a downwardly revised 2.16% (previously 2.67%) monthly gain in August, which was dominated by a large boost in auto sales from the cash-for-clunkers program. Indeed, the bulk of the August downside revision was in auto sales. On a year-to-year basis, September retail sales were down by 5.67%, versus a revised 5.77% (previously 5.31%) decline in August. 

The pattern of narrowing declines in year-to-year change here is not a sign of improving economic activity. Rather it is an artifact of the extremely protracted decline in the current economic downturn, where year ago comparisons are against more rapidly declining activity. While the pace of decline in activity generally has slowed, it is not recovering. As discussed in the opening comments, a period of renewed deterioration is likely in the months ahead.

Even with the one-time clunkers spike in August, and removing the effects of inflation, retail sales activity remains one of bottom-bouncing/plateauing at extremely low levels. As noted and graphed earlier, the level of inflation-adjusted sales for September dropped to a level below that seen in September 1999. Effectively, a decade of real retail sales growth has evaporated, so far, in this economic contraction.

Core Retail Sales.  A change in "core retail sales" methodology was introduced last month, where the net relative monthly increases and/or decreases in gasoline station and grocery store sales were subtracted from the full monthly retail sales number, instead of the total of gasoline station and grocery store sales each month. Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, the revamped reported "core" change more closely reflects the actual retail sales experience. This remains a work in progress and eventually will be used in the development of additional SGS alternative economic measures.

For the near-term, the "core" retail sales will be reported in two versions, where Version I uses the original methodology, and Version II version appears to provide a more balanced picture of the impact food and energy inflation in the standard retail sales reporting.

Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales:

Version I — retail sales net of total grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 2.2% versus the official aggregate decline of 1.5%.    

Version II — retail sales net of the monthly change in grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 1.7% versus the official aggregate decline of 1.5%. 

Real Retail Sales.  Based on September CPI-U reporting, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted September retail sales fell by 1.4% (down 1.5% before inflation adjustment). In contrast, real August retail sales rose by 1.4% for the month (up 2.2% before inflation adjustment). Year-to-year, September real retail sales fell by 4.4% (down by 5.7% before inflation adjustment), while August real retail sales fell by a revised 4.7% (was 4.2%), which was a 5.8% contraction before inflation adjustment.

Smoothed for monthly volatility on a three-month moving-average basis, the September and August real annual declines were 4.5% and 5.9% respectively. As discussed and graphed earlier, the pattern here has shifted to bottom bouncing in terms of the level of inflation-adjusted sales. Again, there is no turnaround in economic activity — no recovery — evident here, just bottom-bouncing.

Correction to Table "U.S. Government — Alternate Fiscal Deficit and Debt" in Commentary No. 250: The 2009 entry in the fourth data column "GAAP Federal Negative Net Worth ($Tril)" should be $68.1, not $64.1. The table in the electronic version of the Commentary on www.shadowstats.com has been corrected. I apologize for any problems caused by the mis-posting.

Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than expected by the financial markets, risks generally remain for higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than expected economic reporting in the week ahead, especially for economic reporting net of prior-period revisions.

Industrial Production (September). Due for release tomorrow (Friday, October 16th), September industrial production is expected to show a 0.1% monthly gain (Briefing.com). While such is a reasonable swing following a 0.8% clunkers-spiked gain in August, again, reporting risk again is to the downside of expectations.

Housing Starts (September). September housing starts reporting is due for release on October 20th (Tuesday). Expectations appear to be for relatively flat month-to-month change. Indeed, any monthly increase or decrease likely will be statistically insignificant, as this series continues to bounce along an historically low-level plateau of activity.

Producer Price Index (September). Due for release on October 20th (Tuesday), the September PPI is expected to show a 0.1% monthly increase, per Briefing.com. This highly volatile series remains at some risk of upside surprises to monthly reporting for both September and October.

 __________

No. 250: General Outlook and Trade Data Update

Friday, October 9th, 2009

 .

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

COMMENTARY NUMBER 250
General Outlook and Trade Data Update

October 9, 2009

 __________

Bernanke Pushes Monetary-Base Panic Button

M3 Headed for Still Weaker Growth

Substance Behind U.S. Dollar Concerns and Gold Rally

FY2009 Government Obligations Likely Hit $75 Trillion

Trade Deterioration Should Be Minor Drag on 3q09 GDP

Economic and Solvency Crises Continue
Inflation Risk Ahead

 __________

PLEASE NOTE: There has been a change in nomenclature with this communication, which otherwise would have been referred to as a Flash Update. Hereafter, all communications will be referenced as Commentaries, numbered sequentially from the onset of the SGS Newsletter in late-2004, and specifying the nature of the communication as to updates to specific economic series and/or the general outlook (such as today’s missive), unusual market or economic circumstances (an alert), full newsletter or special report. As I have become more reliant on using the weekly writings for broad comment, discussion of the general outlook will be more heavily emphasized in at least one weekly communication.

The next planned Commentary is for Thursday, October 15th. Due to travel, that update will cover the release of both September retail sales on October 14th, as well as the September CPI on October 15th. Firm dates for posting of both the Hyperinflation Special Report (2009 Update) and next full newsletter will posted with the October 20th Commentary covering September housing starts and PPI. The preliminary SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for September will be published over the coming weekend.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Worst Still Ahead for Economic and Systemic-Solvency Crises. The U.S. economy continues in its longest and deepest downturn since the first downleg of the Great Depression in the early 1930s. This structural contraction already shows characteristics of a depression. Particularly protracted and deep, it will remain unresponsive to traditional economic stimuli. 

Last week’s announcement of the pending payroll benchmark revision (see the Flash Update of October 2nd) indicated that a failure of the birth-death model had undercounted jobs losses by 824,000, largely in first-quarter 2009. Such would have been an ongoing problem up to present. The benchmark detail had to have been enough worse than expected to force both the Administration and the Federal Reserve to make negative adjustments to their internal economic forecasts.

 

The above graph reflects the likely benchmark revision to payrolls carried forward through September. Year-to-year percent contraction in payrolls now likely is worse than at any time since the shutdown of war-time production at the end of World War II.  Even so, the current annual payroll contraction is close to rivaling that record decline seen at the end of the war.

In terms of current economic growth, payrolls still are in contraction, but inflation-adjusted retail sales, housing data, industrial production and new orders for durable goods have leveled off at record- or extremely- low levels of activity. They are not recovering and can tumble anew as short-lived boosts such as the cash-for-clunkers and the tax credit for first-time home buyers expire. With a six-to-nine month lead-time between stimulus efforts and any economic impact, the time is at hand for the politicians to generate any new stimulus package that they hope might mitigate impact on next November’s mid-term election from the negative economy.

Coincident with the economic crisis — but also related to the structural issues driving the economic contraction — a systemic-solvency crisis has unfolded during the last two years that has triggered extraordinary liquidity actions by the Federal Reserve and U.S. Treasury, in conjunction with extreme efforts at fiscal economic stimulus, all aimed at preventing a outright collapse of the banking system and the economy. Indications of current contraction in domestic liquidity suggest these actions have not had their desired impact. Instead, the systemic-solvency crisis appears to be intensifying anew.

Pre-crises fiscal malfeasance set the United States on course for a hyperinflationary great depression before the end of the coming decade. The severe economic contraction, and federal government and Federal Reserve’s efforts to debase the U.S. dollar, however, already have had impact and meaningfully have exacerbated the government’s solvency problems. As a result, the hyperinflation risk has moved nearer in timing, by 2014, with particularly high risk for this ultimate monetary crisis to unfold in the year ahead. I contend that the worst of the economic and systemic solvency-crises still lie ahead of us.

U.S. Dollar and Gold Activity. The last week has seen unusual activity tied to U.S. dollar weakness and higher gold prices. An October 6th article by Robert Fisk, published in the The Independent, reported secret talks, where "… Gulf Arabs are planning — along with China, Russia, Japan and France — to end dollar dealings for oil, moving instead to a basket of currencies including the Japanese yen and Chinese Yuan, the euro, gold and a new, unified currency planned for nations in the Gulf Cooperation Council, including Saudi Arabia, Abu Dhabi, Kuwait and Qatar."

Almost all purported parties to these talks denied the story.

William Engdahl, a political risk consultant and author with significant contacts in the oil industry, indicated on October 7th that, "I have confirmed from very senior and well-informed Gulf sources that the talks are in fact real."

I have known Bill for years, and have found his information to be highly reliable. He may be reached via his website: www.engdahl.oilgeopolitics.net.

Irrespective of what really is going on at the moment, the concept makes sense for the parties involved. It could be initiated quickly, if desired, not over decades as some are contending. As discussed in recent newsletters, such a move would be highly detrimental to the U.S. dollar and highly inflationary for the United States. It also could be a proximal trigger for heavy dollar dumping and dumping of dollar-based assets. Despite near-term volatility and intervention in the gold and currency markets, the long-term outlook remains extremely bearish for the U.S. currency and extremely bullish for gold and silver.

Broad Money Growth Contracted Again in September.  Although last night’s (October 8th) reporting on M3 components (seasonally adjusted) M2 and institutional money funds showed some weekly rebound, annual growth appears to have slowed across-the-board for M1, M2 and the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate. Formal monthly estimates will be published this weekend on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com, following the release of updated banking statistics tonight.

On a year-to-year basis, September M1 growth slowed to about 14.2% from 18.6% in August; September M2 growth slowed to about 6.6% from 7.8% in August; September SGS-Ongoing M3 growth slowed to roughly 2.3% from 3.9% in August. On a month-to-month basis, both M1 and M2 rose, while the M3 estimate appears to have contracted for the third consecutive month. These patterns continue to signal an intensifying systemic liquidity crisis, and there is nothing in the current data that would alter the content of the September 2nd Alert.

Fed Chairman Bernanke noted yesterday, that "… the quantity of bank reserves held at the Federal Reserve has risen dramatically as the Federal Reserve’s balance sheet has expanded, and reserves are likely to continue to grow as the Federal Reserve purchases additional agency-backed securities. Currency and bank reserves together are known as the monetary base; as reserves have grown, therefore, the monetary base has grown as well.  However, because banks are reluctant to lend in current economic and financial circumstances, growth in broader measures of money has not picked up by anything remotely like the growth in the base. For example, M2, which comprises currency, checking accounts, savings deposits, small time deposits, and retail money fund shares, is estimated to have been roughly flat over the past six months."

Of some significance, he did not mention in his last comment that the Federal Reserve reports seasonally-adjusted M2 has contracted an annualized pace of 2.3% for the past three months. Mr. Bernanke has a systemic problem, and he is boosting monetary base at a pace not seen since the stock market sell-off earlier this year.

Monetary Base Pushed to Record High.  Reflecting action that could be described as near-panic, the Fed boosted the monetary base to a record high $1.88 trillion in the two weeks ended October 7th, at an annualized 112.8% rate of growth in the last two months, a pace not seen in six months. Such is reported in the St. Louis Fed’s Adjusted Monetary Base (seasonally-adjusted), as shown in the accompanying graph. Year-to-year growth in the monetary base has started to slow, down to 85.3% in the October 7th period, from 93.5% and 104.3% in the two prior periods. The slowing annual growth here reflects nothing more than year-ago comparisons against the post-Lehman crisis and the Fed’s initial panicked spiking of the monetary base.

GAAP-Based Federal Deficit Likely Hit $8.8 Trillion in 2009. Based on an estimate by the Congressional Budget Office (CBO), the official federal deficit rose to roughly $1.41 trillion in 2009 (fiscal year-end September 30, 2009), up from $455 billion in 2008. Accounting gimmicks, introduced mid-fiscal year, knocked off roughly $500 billion of additional 2009 deficit reporting tied to the government’s economic stimulus package.   

Gross federal debt in 2009 rose by $1.9 trillion to $11.9 trillion, having risen by $1 trillion in 2008.

I estimate that GAAP-based accounting (generally accepted accounting principles), including annual changes in the net present value of unfunded liabilities (such as in Social Security and Medicare) will show an actual 2009 deficit of about $8.8 trillion, up from $5.1 trillion in 2008, with total federal obligations, including debt and net present value of unfunded liabilities at roughly $75 trillion. Such is more than five times the level of U.S. GDP. Taxes cannot be raised enough to balance spending. One-hundred percent taxation still would leave the U.S. fiscal condition in deficit.  I’ll also contend that the political establishment in Washington lacks the will to slash its programs by an amount necessary to contain the extreme excesses of spending. As was discussed in last year’s Hyperinflation Report (and as will be reiterated in the pending update), it is this circumstance that assures the ultimate debasement of and hyperinflation in the U.S. dollar.

 

U.S. Government - Alternate Fiscal Deficit and Debt
Reported by
U.S. Treasury
Dollars are in either billions or trillions, as indicated.
Sources:
U.S. Treasury, Shadow Government Statistics.
Fiscal
Year(1)
Formal
Cash-Based
Deficit
($Bil)
GAAP
Ex-SS Etc.
Deficit
($Bil)
GAAP
With SS Etc.
Deficit
($Tril)
GAAP 
Federal 
Negative
Net Worth
($Tril)
Gross
Federal
Debt
($Tril)
Total(2)
Federal
Obligations
(GAAP)
($Tril)
2009(3)
$1,409.0
$2,800.0
$8.8
$68.1
$11.9
$74.6
2008
454.8
1,009.1
5.1
59.3
1c0.0
65.5
2007
162.8
275.5
1.2(4)
54.3
9.0
59.8
2006
248.2
449.5
4.6
53.1
8.5
58.2
2005
318.5
760.2
3.5
48.5
7.9
53.3
2004
412.3
615.6
11.0(5)
45.0
7.4
49.5
2003
374.8
667.6
3.0
34.0
6.8
39.1
2002
157.8
364.5
1.5
31.0
6.2
35.4
(1) Fiscal year ended September 30th. (2) Includes gross federal debt, not just "public" debt. While the non-public debt is debt the government owes to itself for Social Security, etc., the obligations there are counted as "funded" and as such are part of total government obligations. (3) Except for the formal cash-based deficit (preliminary) and for the gross federal debt, which are government estimates, fiscal 2009 data are estimated by SGS (Net Worth corrected). Please note that mid-year accounting redefinitions for TARP knocked off roughly $500 billion from the reported formal cash-based estimate. (4) On a consistent reporting basis, net of one-time changes in actuarial assumptions and accounting, SGS still estimates that the GAAP-based deficit for 2007 topped $4 trillion, with negative net worth of $57.1 trillion and total obligations of $59.8. So as to maintain consistency with the official GAAP statements, the "official" numbers are shown. (5) SGS estimates $3.4 trillion, excluding one-time unfunded setup costs of the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement, and Modernization Act of 2003 (enacted December 2003). Again, in order to maintain consistency with the official GAAP statements, the "official" numbers are shown in the table for 2004. The 2009 GAAP statement is due for release in mid-December 2009. Link to the 2008 statements: http://www.fms.treas.gov/fr/08frusg/08frusg.pdf
 
 

 

Third-Quarter Trade Deficit Shapes Up as a Negative for GDP. This morning (October 9th) the Census Bureau and Bureau of Economic Analysis reported that the seasonally-adjusted August trade deficit narrowed slightly to $30.7 billion, from a revised $31.9 billion (was $32.0 billion) in July. As the BEA adjusts for inflation (also as not adjusted for inflation), both the July and August deficits were worse than the average for second-quarter 2009. The "advance" estimate of third-quarter GDP (due for release on October 29th) will be based on just the two months of trade reporting. The net export account, which had provided a relative boost to GDP reporting in recent quarters, accordingly should be a net negative contributor to the third-quarter GDP estimate, despite consensus forecasts for a quarterly GDP pickup.

August exports declined by less than imports did. Oil imports fell, based on higher oil prices ($64.75 average per barrel in August versus $62.48 in July) being more than offset by reported lower physical volume (8.7 million barrels per day in August versus 9.6 million in July). Once again, irregular paperwork flows through Customs may be impairing the reporting accuracy of imports.

  

More Disappointed Market Expectations in the Week Ahead. Given the underlying reality of a weaker economy and a more serious inflation problem than expected by the financial markets, risks generally are for higher-than-expected inflation and weaker-than expected economic reporting in the week ahead.

Retail Sales (September). Due for release on Wednesday (October 14th), September retail sales should be down on a monthly as well as a year-to-year basis, both before and after adjustment for inflation. With the reversal of the cash-for-clunkers program that spiked August auto sales, expectations of a 2.0% September monthly decline (Briefing.com) in retail sales, versus a 2.7% gain in August, are reasonable but are at some risk of a downside surprise.

Consumer Price Index (September). Due for release on Thursday (October 15th), a monthly increase of 0.2% is expected (Briefing.com) for the seasonally-adjusted CPI-U, versus a monthly gain of 0.4% in August. An upside surprise here likely would reflect higher new auto prices, which were depressed artificially by the poor-quality handling of the cash-for-clunkers impact in the August CPI calculations. Negative year-to-year inflation in the CPI-U should narrow from August’s pace.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in September 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the "flat" (0.04% increase) adjusted monthly change seen in September 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from August’s annual inflation rate of negative 1.48%. CPI-U annual inflation likely hit its trough for the current cycle in July 2009, with accelerating upticks in annual inflation likely in the months ahead, particularly in October.

Industrial Production (September). Due for release on Friday (October 16th), September industrial production is expected to show a 0.1% monthly gain (Briefing.com). While such is reasonable following a 0.8% clunkers-spiked gain in August, again, reporting risk again is to the downside of expectations.

          ______________

 

Flash Update

Friday, October 2nd, 2009

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

October 2, 2009

 __________

BLS Revision Nightmare: March 2009 Payrolls Overstated by 824,000

Birth-Death Model Falsely Boosted Jobs Reporting in Recession Environment

Monthly Jobs Loss of 263,000 (Payroll Survey) versus
Monthly Employment Decline of 710,000 (Household Survey)

September Unemployment Rates:
U.3 = 9.8%, U.6 = 17.0%, SGS = 21.4%

  __________

 PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update is for Friday, October 9th, following release of the August trade deficit.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 


Employment/Unemployment Overview Remains Bleak. The U.S. economy continued in an ongoing recession, which has been deeper than previously estimated, per today’s Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reporting of its labor-related coincident indicators of economic activity for September. Further, the limited value of headline monthly payroll reporting as a short-term indicator of underlying economic conditions was confirmed in several areas. The preliminary estimate of a pending massive downward annual benchmark revision was announced for the payroll series; the discrepancies between the payroll and what I consider the statistically-sounder (the BLS disagrees on this point) household series have pushed to an extreme; and unusual revision patterns to recent months were increasingly evident, clouding the substance of the current monthly payroll report.

Benchmark Revision and Overly Optimistic Payroll Reporting.  The BLS announced a preliminary estimate of its annual benchmark revision, due on February 5, 2010, indicating that the not-seasonally-adjusted March 2009 employment level would be reduced by 824,000. Such was based on benchmarking the payroll data against state unemployment tax records in March. As this revision pattern gets redistributed across time by the BLS in its benchmarking, current-period reporting could be revised lower by as much as 2,000,000 jobs. The full revisions also should show that the annual percentage decline in nonfarm payrolls already has been the worst of the post-World War II era.

While still shy of reality, the preliminary March 2009 benchmark number largely is confirms the underreporting of jobs losses in the last two years, as indicated by the concurrent seasonal factor bias (CSFB) discussed below. It also serves as a broad confirmation that the assumptions underlying the birth-death model (the old monthly bias factor) are not valid in times of a severe economic downturn. The birth-death model currently adds a net gain of about 900,000 jobs per year to payroll employment reporting, on top of BLS assumptions that jobs lost from companies going out of business are offset equally by the number of jobs created by new businesses.  

Unusual Revisions. While the concurrent seasonal factor bias (CSFB) reversed its usual trend in the September report, suggesting that consistently applied seasonal factors would have produced a smaller-than-headline jobs loss, such was against an unusual pattern of prior monthly revisions. On a not-seasonally-adjusted basis, total August payroll employment was not revised (seasonally adjusted it was revised higher by 15,000), yet July’s unadjusted level was revised lower by 55,000, following a 136,000 downside revision to July in the reporting of the month before. Seasonally adjusted, July’s initial estimate of a 247,000 jobs, revised subsequently to losses of 276,000 and today’s estimate of 304,000, which still is 134,000 shy of the downside revisions to the raw data. While these numbers showed unusual revision and seasonal-factor patterns, they were a month removed from being reflected in the CSFB, which deals only with the prior month’s revisions.  

Household versus Payroll Series. I long have contended that the household survey (unemployment, measuring the employment status of individuals) is statistically sounder than the establishment survey (payroll employment, measuring the number of nonfarm jobs). (See the Employment and Unemployment Primer on www.shadowstats.com.) The BLS attributes narrower statistical confidence intervals around the payroll numbers, claiming a broader-based survey. While the payroll survey is broader based, the BLS never knows what it really is receiving in data (did a company just not get its report in on time, or did it go out of business?), and revisions over the last year or two have been well outside the bounds of the estimated confidence intervals. The household survey, however, is one where the sampling universe is fairly well established, and the unadjusted raw data are not revised. The issues with the household survey usually are more in the area of how survey questions are defined, rather than problems with the nature of survey’s universe.

That said, accounting for all definitional differences, the BLS never has been able to reconcile fully the numbers in the two surveys. In September, the number of employed individuals (household) dropped by 785,000 versus a payroll employment drop of 263,000.

More Disappointed Market Expectations Ahead. The consensus outlook and continued hype from Wall Street and political Washington on improving economic conditions remain irrationally optimistic. As underlying reality continues to surface in most upcoming economic reporting, consensus economic expectations should soften anew. With the constraints on broad systemic liquidity still tightening, unhappy surprises are likely in that area as well. Accordingly, as the lead-time (six-to-nine months) between any stimulus action and potential economic impact starts to push against the 2010 mid-term elections, some renewed activity by the Administration, Treasury and/or Fed to boost the economy and systemic liquidity is a good bet, irrespective of current strong protestations to the contrary.

Accordingly, there should come a point where more-traditional relationships should begin to resurface in the markets, where a weaker U.S. economy has negative impact on the U.S. dollar’s foreign exchange rate, and where a weakening U.S. dollar begins to restrict domestic liquidity, hitting both the equity and credit markets.     

September Employment/Unemployment — Percent Jobs Loss Worst Since Great Depression:

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 263,000 (down 276,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for September 2009, following a revised 201,000 (previously 216,000) jobs loss in August.

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; the current month of September also is the short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment has declined by a seasonally-adjusted 7,205,000 jobs, or by 5.2%. Net of the pending benchmark revision, the peak-to-trough decline likely has been closer to 9 million jobs or 6.5%.

Year-to-year contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls narrowed a notch or so to 4.2% in September versus a 60-year low of a 4.4% decline in August. Adjusted for the benchmark revision, however, September’s annual decline likely was around 5.2%, the most severe contraction seen since the production shutdown following World War II. That extreme likely was passed by May 2009. Disallowing the post-war shutdown as a normal business cycle, the annual decline would be the worst since the Great Depression.    

Underlying economic series (such as the purchasing managers and help-wanted advertising surveys, and new claims for unemployment insurance) are consistent with a monthly September jobs loss in excess of 500,000. Such reflects likely revisions and aggregated birth-death model understatements of roughly 200,000 jobs per month.

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias.  The pattern of impossible biases being built into the headline monthly payroll employment reversed again, with a downside bias of 146,000 jobs in September 2009 reporting. Instead of the headline jobs loss of 263,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what I call the concurrent seasonal factor bias (CSFB) — would have shown a less-severe monthly jobs loss of about 117,000. This factor has generated an upside reporting bias seen in 9 of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 935,000. Distorting factors are discussed in the Overview, above.  A worksheet on this is available upon request. (See SGS Newsletter No. 50, for further background.)

 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  As discussed in SGS Newsletter No. 51, Birth-Death Model biases tend to overstate payroll employment during recessions. Never designed to handle the downside pressures from an economic contraction, the model adds a fairly consistent upside bias to the payroll levels each year, currently averaging about 74,000 jobs per month. The unadjusted September 2009 bias was an addition of 34,000 jobs, up from 18,000 the year before, and down from 118,000 in August 2009.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey (see Overview comments), which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed September employment dropped by 785,000 in September, versus a decline of 392,000 in August.

The September 2009 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-insignificant increase to 9.83% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from 9.66% in August.  Unadjusted U.3 eased to 9.5% in September, from 9.6% in August.  The broader September U.6 unemployment rose to an adjusted 17.0% (16.1% unadjusted), from 16.8% (16.5% unadjusted) in August.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers. The remaining short-term discouraged workers (less than one year) are included in U.6. 

Adding the excluded long-term discouraged workers back into the total unemployed, unemployment more in line with common experience — as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — rose to about 21.4% in September, up from 21.1% in August. See the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com for a graph and more detail.

Broad Money Growth Continues to Falter.  Last night’s (October 1st)weekly reporting on M3 components (seasonally adjusted) M2 and institutional money funds showed continued weekly contractions. While I am still a week shy of publishing a formal estimate of September’s SGS-Ongoing M3, annual growth in the measure likely will slow again, nearing 2% annual growth versus the 3.9% estimated at present for August. There is nothing in the data of the last month that would alter the content of the September 2nd Alert.

Week Ahead. August Trade Balance. Due for release on Friday (October 9th), reporting of the August trade deficit is at some risk of deterioration, assuming the catch-up reporting seen in the July report carries through into the current number. Such will be the last trade deficit estimate before the "advance" estimate on third-quarter GDP is published at the end of October. Significant deterioration in the deficit could soften some of the stronger forecasts surfacing for the current quarter’s GDP growth.

 

__________

Flash Update

Wednesday, September 30th, 2009
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

September 30, 2009

__________

2nd-Q GDP Decline Narrowed in Revision (to -0.8% from -1.0%)
But GNP and GDI Contractions Deepened
(GNP to -1.0% from -0.8%, GDI to -2.6% from -2.1%)

Annual GDP Contraction Remained Worst of Post-World War II Era 

 __________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update is for Friday, October 2nd, following release of the September employment and unemployment data.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 


GDP Outlook. The U.S. economy remains in ongoing recession. The U.S. gross domestic product (GDP) series, while heavily relied on by economists, the markets and the media, as the government’s broadest measure of economic activity, remains the worst-quality and most-heavily-politicized economic indicator published. Early reporting is based on significant guesstimation and usually is targeted at consensus economic forecasts. Given the nature of the reporting, annual growth rates are more meaningful indicators than are the highly volatile annualized quarterly rates. The latest revisions tend to signal mounting reporting discrepancies in the series, with the carefully-crafted GDP series continuing to diverge from its theoretically-equivalent but less-widely-followed GDI sibling.

Market expectations continue to build for a positive quarterly GDP number in the third quarter. Such is possible, given a buildup of excess inventories and the one-time impact from the cash-for-clunkers program. Yet, market expectations for an economic recovery are unrealistic. Weaker-than-expected economic reporting in the next month should tend to dampen third-quarter GDP expectations. That said, an occasional positive quarter-to-quarter GDP number is common in recessions, with liquidations of excessive inventories usually turning subsequent quarterly reporting negative again. Such is the likely circumstance here, even given the series’ serious quality problems.

GDP-Related Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language in the following text, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:

"Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.

"Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.

"Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it rarely is followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world tend to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.

"Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.

"Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.

" GDP Implicit Price Deflator (IPD)" is the inflation measure used to convert GDP data from nominal to real. The adjusted numbers are based on "Chained 2005 Dollars," at present, where the 2005 is the base year for inflation, and "chained" refers to the methodology which gimmicks the reported numbers so much that the total of the deflated GDP sub-series misses the total of the deflated total GDP series by nearly $40 billion in "residual" as of second-quarter 2010.

"Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power, a compounded annual rate of growth. While some might annualize a quarterly growth rate by multiplying it by four, the BEA uses the compounding method, raising the quarterly growth rate to the fourth power. So a one percent quarterly growth rate annualizes to 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 x 1.01 = 1.0406 or 4.1%, instead of 4 x 1% = 4%.

"Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before. 

GDP versus GNP and GDI, Some Contradictions. The third-estimate revision to second-quarter 2009 GDP growth, published this morning (September 30th) by the BEA, showed a narrowing in the pace of real annualized quarterly contraction to 0.74% (previously down by 1.01%) +/- 3% (95% confidence interval). Such followed respective real quarterly contractions of 6.43% and 5.37% in first-quarter 2009 and fourth-quarter 2008. The revised year-to-year contraction also narrowed minimally to 3.83% (previously down by 3.90%) in the second-quarter, versus respective annual contractions of 3.30% and 1.86% in the first and fourth quarters. The bulk of the reported revision appears to have been accounted for in an upside revision to investments in computer software. The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate remains at an annual contraction of 5.9% versus the 3.8% official estimate.

The second-quarter annual GDP contraction remained the worst since the quarterly GDP series was first published in 1947, with the current recession the longest and deepest since the first-dip (early 1930s) of the Great Depression. That circumstance is discussed in greater detail in the Depression Special Report of August 1st (available in the right-hand column of the SGS home page: www.shadowstats.com).   

Other national revisions published today, however, showed even deeper quarterly and annual contractions in second-quarter GNP and GDI, both against initial reporting and against the current GDP quarterly contraction of 0.8% and annual contraction of 3.8%.

GDI showed a revised 2.6% quarterly contraction (versus initial reporting of a 2.1% downturn) in the second quarter, down from 7.7% and 7.3% respectively in the first and fourth quarters. The more-significant annual change was a 4.7% contraction (revised from 4.6%) in the second quarter, versus 4.1% and 2.1% respectively in the first and fourth quarters.       

With a revamped deteriorating trade balance in interest and dividend payments, GNP showed a revised 1.0% quarterly contraction (previously a 0.8% contraction) in the second quarter, down from 6.6% and 6.7% respectively in the first and fourth quarters. The more-significant annual change was an unrevised (at the first decimal point) 4.0% contraction in the second quarter, versus 3.8% and 2.4% respectively in the first and fourth quarters.

Week Ahead. September Payrolls and Unemployment Rate. Due for release on Friday (October 2nd), reporting of September payroll employment and the unemployment rate remain at some risk of disappointing expectations. Per Briefing.com, payroll losses are expected at 180,000 for the month (versus a 216,000 jobs loss reported in July), with the unemployment rate rising from 9.7% to 9.8%.

Underlying employment-related reporting remains consistent with a 500,000-plus monthly payroll jobs loss (200,000 hidden in the full birth-death modeling, not just the monthly net number add-on) with an added aggregate 300,000 evident in seasonal-adjustment and prior-period-revisions games played with the headline number. The unemployment rate easily could come in at 9.9%.  The payroll employment and unemployment rates are coincident indicators of broad economic activity.

In terms of related, underlying reporting, the help-wanted measures published by the Conference Board show either continued severe bottom-bouncing, with the August newspaper index holding at its historic low of 10 for the fourth month, or a deepening annual downturn, with an annual contraction of 25.6% in new ads online in September, versus a 23.9% annual contraction in August. New claims for unemployment insurance have been skewed in recent weeks by poor-quality seasonal adjust around the Labor Day holiday. Allowing for that, this series also appears to be bottom-bouncing. Both the August ISM Purchasing Managers Surveys (manufacturing and non-manufacturing) indicated ongoing employment contraction, though minimally less negative than in July. These series are leading indicators of activity in official broad employment and unemployment series.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, September 25th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - September 25, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

September 25, 2009

 

__________

 

Economic and Liquidity Crises Remain Ongoing

No Recovery in New Orders or Housing

Fed Pushes Monetary Base to Record High

 

 __________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update is for Wednesday, September 30th, following the third-estimate revision of second-quarter GDP, with a further update due on Friday, October 2nd, following release of the September employment and unemployment data. Intervening Flash Updates or Alerts would be determined by developing market or economic conditions.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Expirations of One-Shot Programs Promise New Downlegs in Key Industries.  The broad economic data remain deep in recession territory, even with the temporary impacts from the cash-for-clunkers program and the first-time home-buyers tax credit running their courses. The clunkers program has expired, and given closing periods on home sales, so, too, has the bulk of the tax credit. With consensus estimates and related Wall Street and Administration hype having created irrationally-optimistic expectations for a near-term economic recovery, economic reports in the months ahead increasingly should disappoint expectations. 

The new orders for durable goods series has been bottom-bouncing at extremely low levels since the beginning of 2009, yet it still showed a 19% annual contraction as of August 2009. The housing industry has been in a longer and deeper slump, but housing starts also have been bottom-bounce at historic low levels of activity since last December. 

Even a careful reading of recent comments by the Federal Open Market Committee or Fed Chairman Bernanke picks up an underlying tone of economic bottom-bouncing, not recovery. With the expiry of the one-shot programs that provided any relative boosts to auto and home sales — pulling activity from future months into recent months — downlegs in the affected industries are likely to intensify anew. As discussed in the recent SGS Consumer Liquidity Special Report, consumers do not have the ability to expand GDP (dominated by personal consumption and housing investment), due to constrained income and credit. Intensifying employment problems (coincident, not lagging indicators to broad economic activity) continue here in something of a self-feeding, downward cycle.

The latest monetary numbers from the Fed suggest continued slowing of annual growth and continued monthly contraction in the broad money supply, which likely are indicative of intensifying systemic liquidity issues. Having the Fed push the monetary base to a record high in the most recent period does little to dispel suspicions of brewing crisis. 

August New Orders for Durable Goods Remained in Great Depression Territory. The Census Bureau reported this morning (September 25th) that the regularly-volatile new orders for durable goods fell by 2.4% (also down by 2.4% net of revisions) month-to-month, versus a revised 4.8% (was 4.9%) gain in July. In terms of year-to-year change, before any accounting for inflation, August’s new orders were down by 19.1%, following July’s revised annual decline of 20.0% (previously 20.4%). Adjusted for inflation the series would have shown even sharper contractions. 

From the series peak in 2006, the current order level is down by 28.6%, within great depression territory per SGS definition of a greater than 25% peak-to-trough decline in economic activity.  Since January 2009, the seasonally-adjusted series has flattened out at an extremely low level, averaging $160 billion per month. Against that, the August reading of $164.4 billion was within the normal range of volatility for reporting of this series. 

The widely followed new orders for nondefense capital goods also fell in August, down by 7.1% (down by 8.2% net of revisions) on a month-to-month basis, following July’s revised 7.0% (previously 8.6%) monthly gain. Year-to-year, August orders were down by 22.9%, versus a revised July annual decline of 21.3% (previously down by 21.2%). As to the "cash-for-clunkers" program impact on new orders for motor vehicles and supporting industries, whatever blip there was largely should have worked its way through the system. An initial monthly increase in motor vehicle orders of 0.9% in July was revised upward to 1.6%, with August orders up another 0.4%. Anecdotal evidence is strong for a lack of follow-through auto sales after August’s program-induced spike.     

These new orders series are leading indicators to economic activity and are not showing any pending economic rebound.

Housing Activity Continued Bottom-Bouncing in August. The Census Bureau reported on September 17th that housing starts rose month-to-month by a statistically insignificant 1.5% (up by 2.9% net of revisions) +/- 9.6% (95% confidence interval) in August. Such followed a revised 0.2% (previously 1.0%) monthly contraction in July. Year-to-year, August’s starts were down by 29.6%, following a revised annual contraction of 36.9% (previously 37.7%) in July.   

Annual contractions are moderating here and in a number of other series due to year-ago comparisons that were against extreme annual downturns at the time. Since December 2008, housing starts have been bottom-bouncing at an historically low level, averaging a seasonally-adjusted annual rate of 550,000. August’s reading of 598,000 was within normal monthly volatility.

New and existing home sales data remain very difficult to assess in terms of the implications for underlying economic activity. August reporting continued to be warped by a large portion of activity tied to foreclosures, and such is before an increasing number of new foreclosures are expected to hit the market. The National Association of Realtors (NAR) estimated 31% of August existing home sales were of distressed properties, with about the same portion of sales being attributed to those purchasers drawn into the expiring first-time-buyer tax credit. Accordingly, although the most recent reporting tended to disappoint market expectations, mounting foreclosures and the loss of tax-incentive-induced buying do not bode well for happy news in reporting of the months ahead.   

New residential sales in August rose by 0.7% (fell by 0.9% net of revisions) +/- 19.7% (95% confidence interval) and, once again, the monthly gain was not statistically significant. Such followed a revised 6.5% monthly increase (previously 9.6%) in July. Year-to-year, sales were down 3.4% in August, versus a 14.8% decline in July. Existing Home sales in August fell 2.7% month-to-month, following an unrevised 7.2% gain in July. Year-to-year, August sales were up by 3.4%, following a 5.0% gain in July.

Monetary Base at Historic High. In the last three two-week reporting periods, the Federal Reserve has spiked the monetary base by 9.6% (an annualized pace of 120.9%), reflecting a level of activity by the central bank not seen since the stock-market trough back in March. The St. Louis Fed’s Adjusted Monetary Base (seasonally adjusted) spiked to a record-high $1.837 trillion in the two-week period ended September 23rd, just topping the prior record high of $1.836 trillion seen in the two-week period ended May 20th of this year. Year-to-year growth in the latest period slowed to 93.5%, from 104.3% the prior period, as the year-ago comparison was against the first spiked period of the post-Lehman collapse.

The monetary base consists basically of currency in circulation plus bank reserves. Traditionally, it is the tool used by the Fed to address the money supply and broad systemic liquidity. Due to the extreme growth in excess reserves (a 14-fold increase over the year), the Fed’s largesse has not flowed through to bank lending in the normal stream of commerce, with the most-recent broad money growth continuing to slow on an annual basis and contracting on a weekly basis (if this changes as result of tonight’s banking data release, a further update shall follow over the weekend). These conditions remain suggestive of an intensifying systemic liquidity crisis.

Week Ahead. Revision to Second-Quarter GDP. Due for release on Wednesday (September 30th), the third-estimate revision to second-quarter GDP growth should be little more than statistical noise.

September Payrolls and Unemployment Rate. Due for release next Friday (October 2nd), reporting of September payroll employment and the unemployment rate are at some risk of disappointing expectations. Per Briefing.com, payroll losses are expected at 188,000 for the month (versus a 216,000 jobs loss reported in July), with the unemployment rate rising from 9.7% to 9.8%. Underlying employment-related reporting remains consistent a 500,000-plus monthly payroll jobs loss (200,000 hidden in the full birth-death modeling, not just the monthly net number added in) with an added aggregate 300,000 evident in seasonal-adjustment and prior-period-revisions games played with the headline number. The unemployment rate easily could come in at 9.9%. Again, these series are coincident indicators of broad economic activity. This outlook will be updated in the next Flash Update (scheduled for September 30th).

 

__________

Flash Update

Wednesday, September 16th, 2009

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

September 16, 2009

__________

U.S. Recession Is Not Over

With Clunker Rebates in New Car Prices
Monthly CPI Gained 0.7% Instead of 0.4%

CPI-U Annual Inflation -1.5% (SGS +6.0%)

Industrial Production Boosted by Clunkers and Weather

 __________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update is for Friday, September 25th, following the August report on new orders for durable goods. Intervening Flash Updates or Alerts would be determined by developing market or economic conditions.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 


Recession Is Ongoing. In a replay of a month-old speech, Federal Reserve Chairman Bernanke yesterday updated his outlook from an economy that was bottoming-out to one where the recession "very likely" was over. If you look at his broad comments, though, he was not touting a near-term economic recovery; rather he was looking for ongoing bottom-bouncing. For those talking recession shapes, Mr. Bernanke sounded like he is in the "L"-shaped camp. 

As contentions of a pending or ongoing economic rebound make their rounds in the popular media, there remains the issue of how personal consumption (more than 70% of the economy) can grow, when consumers do not have the financial ability to expand consumption (see the Consumer Liquidity Special Report of September 14th).

Consensus talk of positive growth in third-quarter GDP well may be disappointed. Even if the cash-for-clunkers program along with some excess inventory building pushes the heavily gimmicked number into positive territory, such would not necessarily signal a recession’s end. To the contrary positive GDP quarters are normal in a recession. In each of the last six recessions (back to the mid-1970s), including the current downturn, at least one positive GDP quarter was reported, followed by a negative one.

Separately, the likelihood of a severe double- or multiple- dip recession, as seen in the Great Depression and as seen in the early 1980s, has been discussed in earlier writings, including the Depression Special Report of August 1st.


Auto Dealers Boosted Margins with Clunker Rebates. About 0.28 percentage points shy of where it should have been, this morning’s (September 16th) August CPI-U still was reported showing a larger-than-expected monthly increase, reflecting higher gasoline prices boosted by favorable seasonal factors.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) confirmed again, this morning, that its estimate of new car pricing for August was net of all rebates under the government’s cash-for-clunkers program. Based on reported rebates, auto sales and auto prices, I estimate that the BLS approach underestimated the overall August CPI by roughly 0.28%. Assuming all other new car price factors being neutral, the CPI should have been reduced by 0.28% by the rebates. Instead, the BLS reported the impact of lower auto prices reducing the seasonally-adjust CPI by just 0.06%. The likely difference is that auto dealers either used higher base prices or were able to offer smaller other discounts, in conjunction with the government’s programs, thereby boosting profit margins. 

Where the August retail sales included automobiles with the clunker rebates are part of the new car pricing, the CPI should reflect same. Accordingly, I have added 0.28 percentage points to the monthly level of the SGS alternative consumer inflation measures, and have accounted for that differential in the real retail sales estimates below. The government’s inflation numbers shown below are as reported by the BLS, with clunkers pricing excluded. The official numbers should reflect some catch-up in the month ahead, as September new car sales proceed without the government’s rebates. The alternative measures will be revised to reflect any later data.

A note on the different CPI measures: The CPI-U is the monthly headline inflation number and is the broadest in its coverage, representing the buying patterns of all urban consumers.  The CPI-W covers the more-narrow universe of urban wage earners and clerical workers and is used in determining cost of living adjustments in government programs such as Social Security. The C-CPI-U is an experimental measure, where the weighting of components is fully substitution based, and generally shows lower annual inflation than the CPI-U and CPI-W, which once had fixed weightings — so as to measure the cost of living of maintaining a constant standard of living — but now are quasi-substitution-based. The SGS alternative measures are attempts at adjusting the CPI-U inflation for the impact of changes to reporting methodologies in recent decades. 

CPI-U.  The BLS reported that the seasonally-adjusted August CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) rose by 0.45% (up by 0.22% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, versus a flat reading (down by 0.16% unadjusted) in July. Seasonally-adjusted, the annualized rate of inflation for the three months ended August was 4.9%, up from 3.9% as of July.

Unadjusted year-to-year inflation turned less negative (formal deflation), down by 1.48% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) in August, versus a 2.10% contraction in July.

If the BLS had included the clunker rebates in new car pricing, the seasonally-adjusted monthly CPI-U would have gained roughly 0.7% (instead of 0.4%), with annual inflation a negative 1.2% instead of minus 1.5%. 

Recent annual declines in CPI-U inflation have been the biggest since 1950. I estimate, however, that CPI reporting methods used in 1950 would generate a reported current inflation rate of roughly 6% (see Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures below).

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in September 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the "flat" (0.04% increase) adjusted monthly change seen in September 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from August’s annual inflation rate of negative 1.48%. CPI-U annual inflation likely hit its trough for the current cycle in July 2009, with accelerating upticks in annual inflation likely to continue in the months ahead, particularly in October.

For those interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I continue to refer you to CPIwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

CPI-W.  The BLS reported that the narrower, seasonally-adjusted August CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) rose by 0.55% (up by 0.30% unadjusted), following a flat reading (a 0.31% unadjusted decline) in July.  Year-to-year, CPI-W inflation declined by 1.90% in August, following a 2.67% decline in July.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — fell by 1.48% in August, versus a 1.89% decline in July. The same-level C-CPI-U annual inflation rate versus the CPI-U suggests reporting problems within the various CPI series.  

Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth rebounded to roughly 2.1% in August, versus 1.2% in July, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to about 6.0% (5.99% for those using the extra digit) in August, versus 5.4% in July. As discussed in the opening inflation comments, both alternative measures include an extra 0.28% adjustment to reflect pricing impact from the clunkers program (not included by the BLS) on reported inflation. Such will be updated and revised as necessary along with the next CPI reporting. See the Alternate Data tab and Inflation Calculator at www.shadowstats.com, for graphs and data.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact, not otherwise published by the BLS.

Real Retail Sales.  Updating yesterday’s (September 15th) Flash Update, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted August retail sales rose by 1.9% (up 2.2% before inflation adjustment), while real growth net of the clunkers program was just 0.1% (up 0.9% before inflation adjustment). The seasonally-adjusted CPI-U used in deflation here was adjusted for the 0.28% clunkers pricing impact ignored by the BLS. In contrast, real July retail sales fell by 0.2% for the month (also down 0.2% before inflation adjustment). Year-to-year, August real retail sales fell by 4.2% (down by 5.9% ex-clunkers), while July real retail sales fell by a revised 6.7% (was 6.5%), which was an 8.5% contraction before inflation adjustment.

Smoothed for monthly volatility on a three-month moving-average basis, the August and July real annual declines were 6.2% and 7.8%, respectively. From December 2008 through June 2009, annual decline in the moving average had held around 9%, a record low for the two historical retail series of the post-World War II era. The pattern here of annual growth moving off its historically low level in recent months reflects bottom-bouncing of the series at a low level of activity compared with a period of rapid monthly decline the year before. The monthly level of real retail sales has been virtually flat for the last eight months, plus or minus 0.4%, including the impact of August’s spike from the clunkers program. There is no turnaround in economic activity evident here, just bottom-bouncing.

"Core" Retail Sales Methodology. The methodological changes in calculating the "core" retail sales number, discussed briefly in yesterday’s (September 14th) Flash Update will be detailed in the next update.

Industrial Production Boosted by Autos and Weather.  Contrary to my assessment of the weather, the Fed indicated that August was unseasonably warm, and that increased not only utility usage, but also reported industrial production that is indexed to same. Auto production, spiked by the cash-for-clunkers program, accounted for 25% of the reported production increase in August, having accounted for 70% of the production increase in July.

Overall, the Federal Reserve reported that seasonally-adjusted August industrial production rose by 0.8% (1.5% net of revisions) for the month, following a revised 1.0% (previously 0.5%) gain in July.  Year-to-year contraction in August narrowed to 10.8% from a revised 12.4% (previously 13.1%) contraction in July. June’s reading had set a record low for annual production growth since the shutdown of war-time production that followed World War II.   

The series generally is bottom-bouncing, with July and August running about 0.7% ahead of the second-quarter, but about 2.1% below the first-quarter. With a likely lack of follow-through gain for auto sales, September production should see some pull back.

With annual change down 10.8% and with a peak-to-trough (June remains the current trough) contraction at a revised 14.8% (was 14.6%), the industrial sector of the economy (including manufacturing, mining and utilities) continued in depression. A depression is defined (SGS) as a recession where the peak-to-trough economic contraction exceeds 10%.

Week Ahead. Housing Starts. The assessment on tomorrow’s housing data is unchanged: August housing starts detail is due for release on Thursday (September 17th). The series should continue to show bottom-bouncing at a low-level plateau, with reported seasonally-adjusted month-to-month change likely to lack statistical significance.

New Orders for Durable Goods. Due for release a week from Friday (September 25th), reporting on August’s new orders for durables likely will follow recent patterns of bottom-bouncing, with a monthly change well within the normal scope of the series’ random volatility, while the pace of annual decline should remain severe.

 __________

Flash Update

Tuesday, September 15th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - September 15, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

September 15, 2009

 

__________

 

2.7% Retail Sales Jump Reflected Inflation and
One-Time Clunker Spikes

"Core" Retail Sales Up 2.0% (0.2% Net of Clunkers)

Wholesale Inflation Soared with Oil

 

 __________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update is for tomorrow, Wednesday, September 16th, following the August CPI and industrial production reports.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 


August Retail Sales Gain Primarily Reflected Clunkers and Inflation. This morning’s (September 15th) Census Bureau report indicated a statistically-significant monthly increase of 2.67% (2.66% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval) in seasonally-adjusted August retail sales. Such followed a revised 0.18% (previously 0.05%) monthly decline in July. On a year-to-year basis, August retail sales were down by 5.31%, versus a revised 8.51% (previously 8.31%) decline in July. Allowing for the one-time spike from the clunkers program and the effects of inflation, this pattern of annual change remains one of bottom-bouncing/plateauing at historic low levels.

The bulk of the August monthly gain was generated by the government’s cash-for-clunkers program. Assuming that auto sales otherwise would have been unchanged (as opposed to a more likely contraction), retail sales net of the increase in sales due to the rebate program would have been reported up by 0.87%, which largely was accounted for otherwise by higher food and gasoline prices (see the "core" estimates below).

With strong anecdotal evidence of automobile dealers seeing no follow-through in September sales from the government-spiked August auto sales gains, something of a sharp reversal in next month’s retail sales report could be expected.

Core Retail Sales.  Please note a change in methodology here, where the relative monthly increases and/or decreases in gasoline station and grocery store sales are subtracted from the full monthly retail sales number, instead of the total of gasoline and retail sales each month. Assuming that the bulk of non-seasonal variability in food and gasoline sales is in pricing, instead of demand, the revamped reported "core" change more closely reflects the actual retail sales experience. The methodology and historical differences will be detailed more fully in tomorrow’s Flash Update.

Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of the net change in grocery store and gasoline station revenues — rose by 2.01% (0.21% net of clunkers), versus a 0.76% gain in July. Those numbers contrasted with the official aggregate gain of 2.67% (0.87% net of clunkers) in August, and a decline of 0.18% in July.    

Real Retail Sales.  Inflation- and seasonally-adjusted August retail sales likely were positive on a monthly basis (given the auto-related spike) and remained sharply lower in terms of annual contraction. Those numbers also will be detailed in tomorrow’s Flash Update, following the release of the August CPI-U. They likely will require special adjustment to handle the Bureau of Labor Statistics’ (BLS) indication that the government-backed rebates would be treated as a reduction to new car prices. See the Week Ahead comments below on CPI expectations.

PPI Inflation Rebounded with Oil and Seasonal Adjustments. As reported by the BLS this morning (September 15th), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted producer price index (PPI) rose by 1.7% (1.0% unadjusted) month-to-month in August, following a 0.9% (0.9% unadjusted as well) monthly contraction in July. Year-to-year, the annual contraction in PPI inflation narrowed, with August prices down by 4.3%, versus a 6.8% annual contraction in July. The August PPI reflected both higher oil prices and a boost to energy costs from friendly seasonal adjustments.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted August intermediate goods rose by 1.8% (down by 0.2% in July), with August crude goods increasing by 3.8% (falling by 4.5% in July). The decline in year-to-year inflation narrowed, with August intermediate goods down by 12.3% (down by 15.1% in July) and August crude goods down by 35.2% (down by 44.8% in July).

Week Ahead. The assessments published in the September 12th Flash Update basically are unchanged:

Consumer Price Index (CPI). The August CPI is due for release on Wednesday (September 16th). Consensus expectations have softened to a 0.3% monthly gain per Briefing.com.   Reporting risk is to the downside of expectations, due to clunkers pressures, but, even so, year-to-year inflation for August should be no worse than in July, with July/August setting the trough in the annual CPI inflation rate for the current cycle.

Given higher gasoline prices and favorable seasonal factors, a stronger-than-consensus number would be in the works, but for the cash-for-clunkers program. Despite dealers (in theory) receiving full cash payment for the consumers’ government rebates, as reflected in retail sales reporting; and despite some states assessing sales tax on those rebates; and despite the clunkers turned in by consumers having some monetary value; the BLS will reduce the prices of new automobiles in the August CPI for the rebates. The impact of this reporting could be enough to knock 0.3% off the monthly CPI, although it should reverse in September.

Allowing for an unchanged monthly CPI in August 2009, the year-to-year CPI inflation rate still would be around July’s level. Annual inflation would increase or decrease, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the "flat" (0.02% decline) adjusted monthly change seen in August 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from July’s annual inflation rate of negative 2.10%.

Industrial Production. August industrial production is due for release on Wednesday (September 16th). Relatively strong expectations (a monthly gain of 0.7% per Briefing.com) are at some risk of disappointment here, given a lack of follow-through auto sales and continued cooler-than-usual weather depressing utility usage and production measures indexed to utility activity. The series likely will continue bottom-bouncing, beyond any temporary clunkers blip.  

Housing Starts. August housing starts detail is due for release on Thursday (September 17th). The series should continue to show bottom-bouncing at a low-level plateau, with reported seasonally-adjusted month-to-month change likely to lack statistical significance.

 

__________

Flash Update

Saturday, September 12th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - September 12, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

September 12, 2009

 

__________

 

Annual Broad Money Growth Slowed Sharply in August

Fed’s Beige Book Generally Indicated Severe Bottom Bouncing

Irregular Cash-for-Clunkers Impact in
Pending Economic and Inflation Numbers

 

 __________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The Consumer Liquidity Special Report should follow within a day or so (Sunday, September 13th is planned), assessing new details available on consumer income and liquidity conditions (they are not good news). The next planned Flash Update is for Tuesday, September 15th, following reporting of the August PPI and retail sales. A further update will follow on Wednesday, September 16th, following the August CPI and industrial production reports.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Solvency and Economic Crises are Ongoing. Despite extraordinary hype from Wall Street and the Administration that the recession is over and that all is right again with the banking and financial services system, strong evidence of ongoing and deepening crises continues, with the purported good news rarely more than fluff. 

No Rebound in Business Activity. The fluffy evidence for rebounding economic activity usually includes reporting of short-term period-to-period changes, where occasional seasonally-adjusted gains get touted beyond their statistical significance. Further, key data have been severely warped by the effects of the economic depression, with bankruptcies and effective bankruptcies (conservatorships, etc.) of large commercial and financial institutions such as General Motors and AIG, with high levels of foreclosures impacting home sales data, and with disruptions to normal commerce often skewing traditional patterns of activity beyond recognition in the seasonal-adjustment patterns so key to the significance of the regular month-to-month or week-to-week economic reporting process.

What rarely get coverage in the financial media are patterns of year-to-year change or levels of activity indicated by a given series. So far, the current economic downturn is the longest since the first downleg of the Great Depression in the early 1930s. Where year-to-year comparisons now are against severely negative patterns the year before, year-to-year percent declines have started to show some bottom bouncing, such as seen in retail sales and in housing, but there the level of activity has plateaued at extremely low, often at record low levels. These series are showing severe bottom-bouncing, not economic recovery.

Other series such as payroll employment and even the latest heavily politicized GDP reporting have continued to sink in terms of year-to-year growth, in both cases, despite their recent less-negative monthly and quarterly performances. 

Bottom-Bouncing per the Fed.  Consider the headline from the White House’s blog page, "Good News from the Beige Book." Touting that the Fed’s latest survey "indicated an improving economy," the White House went on to quote from major wire reporting, such as the Associated Press, where the AP lead indicated that the "recession is ending and the economy finally is growing again." The Fed’s report, however, was one that indicated primarily economic bottom-bouncing, not a growing economy. 

The opening comments of the Fed’s anecdotal Beige Book of September 9th (keep in mind there is a bias for a positive spin here, and period-to-period comparisons are not seasonally adjusted):

"Reports from the 12 Federal Reserve Districts indicate that economic activity continued to stabilize [bottom-bounce] in July and August. Relative to the last report, Dallas indicated that economic activity had firmed, while Boston, Cleveland, Philadelphia, Richmond, and San Francisco mentioned signs of improvement. Atlanta, Chicago, Kansas City, Minneapolis, and New York generally described economic activity as stable or showing signs of stabilization [bottom-bouncing]; St. Louis remarked that the pace of decline appeared to be moderating. Most Districts noted that the outlook for economic activity among their business contacts remained cautiously positive."

From Dallas, the one district with firming activity:

"Economic activity in the Eleventh District [Dallas] firmed somewhat over the past six weeks, with contacts in several industries suggesting a pickup in demand. [The only area discussed was electronics for automobiles, and likely was clunkers related]. Despite the slight improvement, several contacts expressed disappointment that conditions had not improved more. While outlooks are less gloomy than earlier in the year, most contacts are hesitant to predict a significant turnaround in the near term."

More typical were comments such as these:

"Construction-related manufacturers said orders held steady at extremely low levels [bottom-bouncing]. A few respondents noted disappointment that prior expectations of recovery had not been met. There has been a sluggish start to the ’shovel-ready’ projects covered under the stimulus plan, and funding has been slow to materialize. Most contacts expressed uncertainty in their outlooks as both residential and commercial construction activity remain depressed, and there is little evidence that conditions will improve in the near-term."

"Retailers report that consumers remain cautious, keeping overall sales flat at low levels [bottom-bouncing]. Value-based respondents noted sales were not as robust as expected given the back-to-school season."

Clunkers. As discussed in the Week Ahead section, below, the temporary effects of the government’s cash-for-clunkers automobile rebate program will surface in the economic releases of the week ahead, but any heavily puffed and fluffed positive impacts expected by consensus forecasters will be fleeting, and the positives even may prove to be less than expected. The program had little noticeable effect on July retail sales or on July new orders for durable goods, but it did help to spike the August purchasing managers manufacturing survey. There is some evidence that the auto sales induced by the rebates effectively just shifted retail sales activity away from other areas of the economy, while the best case is that resulting higher auto sales in July in August basically were sales borrowed from future months. 

As will be discussed in the Consumer Liquidity Special Report, government economic stimulus aimed at ending the current economic downturn generally is gimmicked to trigger occasional short-lived spikes in activity, with little aimed at attacking the structural problems tied to consumer liquidity that doom the current contraction to extreme depth and duration, extremes that have not been reached, yet.   

Continued Signals of Systemic Instability. The fluffy evidence for a healthy and stable financial system has been summarized by Treasury Secretary Geithner as being based on "a steady revival in the financial markets and in the economy [New York Times, September 11th]."  The economic revival is discussed above.  

As to the financial markets, recent weakness in the U.S. dollar and strength in gold might be suggestive of foreign investors being increasingly less willing to buy into the U.S. markets (with resulting downside market liquidity risk, upside U.S. interest rate risk as seen in 1987). Indeed, the stock market has been relatively strong, but it certainly it his heavily hyped and manipulated. Underlying economic fundamentals could not be much worse. Further, with regular bank loans to businesses and consumers in record contraction, with the broad money supply measures in monthly contraction, and with the Fed attempting to spike systemic liquidity with near-record growth in the monetary base, there are solid signals in place that the systemic solvency crisis once again may be intensifying, irrespective of the happy talk out of Treasury Secretary Geithner, President Obama and Fed Chairman Bernanke.

Monthly Data Show Slowing/Contracting Broad Money Growth. Confirming the indications in the September 2nd Alert, growth in broad money supply has continued to falter. With all Federal Reserve reporting in place for the month, the seasonally-adjusted monthly-average SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for August showed annual growth slowing to 3.9% from 5.2% in July. Month-to-month, the decline was 1.1% in August, versus 0.4% in July, the first back-to-back monthly declines since October and November of last year.

Seasonally adjusted, year-to-year M1 growth rose to 18.5%, from 17.4% in July, but it declined month-to-month by 0.3%, after gaining 0.3% in July. Such was the first monthly decline since February. Monthly change in M1 can have something of a leading relationship to stocks prices. Year-to-year M2 growth eased to 7.9% in August from 8.1% in July. As with the M3 estimate, it contracted month-to-month for the second month, down 0.6% in August versus a 0.4% decline in July.

During the two years of the systemic solvency crisis, slowing annual growth rates, let alone month-to-month declines in the M3 estimate, have suggested an intensifying liquidity crisis, with Fed and/or Treasury action following in due course. The Fed has spiked the monetary base in the last two reporting periods.

The seasonally-adjusted St. Louis Fed’s adjusted monetary base jumped another 0.9% in the two weeks ended September 9th against the prior period, following a 5.5% surge in the two weeks ended August 26th. The latest level is within 1.8% of the record high level set in the April 22, 2009 week, with annual growth at 104.3%, up from 102.0% in prior period.

The monetary base remains the Fed’s primary tool for targeting money supply, but it has proven to be of limited impact in boosting money growth, where banks have been leaving their cash with the Fed instead of lending into the normal stream of commerce. Nonetheless, the Fed appears to be continuing to push here, with consumer and business credit extremely constrained — not a fully "revived" system.

Week Ahead. Producer Price Index (PPI). The August PPI is due for release on Tuesday (September 15th). The series is regularly volatile, but it should see some strong upside pressure from higher oil prices. The cash-for-clunkers program should have no direct impact on the results.

Consumer Price Index (CPI). The August CPI is due for release on Wednesday (September 16th). Consensus expectations have softened to a 0.3% monthly gain per Briefing.com.   Reporting risk is to the downside of expectations, due to clunkers pressures, but, even so, year-to-year inflation for August should be no worse than in July, with July/August setting the trough in the annual CPI inflation rate for the current cycle.

Given higher gasoline prices and favorable seasonal factors, a stronger-than-consensus number would be in the works, but for the cash-for-clunkers program. Despite dealers (in theory) receiving full cash payment for the consumers’ government rebates, as should be reflected in retail sales reporting; and despite some states assessing sales tax on those rebates; and despite the clunkers turned in by consumers having some monetary value; the Bureau of Labor Statistics will reduce the prices of new automobiles in the August CPI for the rebates. The impact of this reporting could be enough to knock 0.3% off the monthly CPI, although it should reverse in September?

Allowing for an unchanged monthly CPI in August 2009, the year-to-year CPI inflation rate still would be around July’s level. Annual inflation would increase or decrease, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the "flat" (0.02% decline) adjusted monthly change seen in August 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from July’s annual inflation rate of negative 2.10%.

Retail Sales. August retail sales data are due for release on Tuesday (September 15th). Consensus expectations, per Briefing.com, are for a 1.9% monthly increase, of which 1.5% would be attributed to auto sales. Reporting risk is to the downside of expectations, given evidence of heightened auto activity taking sales away from other areas of the retail trade. Net of consistent adjustment for inflation and any temporary blip from the clunkers program, retail sales should continue a pattern of bottom-bouncing.

Industrial Production. August industrial production is due for release on Wednesday (September 16th). Expectations also are at some risk of disappointment here, given a lack of follow-through auto sales and continued cooler-than-usual weather depressing utility usage and production measures indexed to utility activity. The series likely will continue bottom-bouncing, other than any temporary clunkers blip.  

Housing Starts. August housing starts detail is due for release on Thursday (September 17th). The series should continue to show bottom-bouncing at a low-level plateau, with reported seasonally-adjusted month-to-month change likely to lack statistical significance.

 

______

Flash Update

Thursday, September 10th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - September 10, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

September 10, 2009

 

__________

 

Widening July Trade Deficit Played Some Catch-Up

Structural Limitations:
Consumer Unable to Support or Sustain Economic Growth

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: Later today, the Census Bureau will release its annual poverty survey, along with updated detail of household income and national income distribution. A subsequent Consumer Liquidity Special Report will follow within a day or so, assessing new detail available on consumer conditions. A further Flash Update, planned for Saturday, September 12th, will update the money supply circumstance along with a preview of key economic reports in the week ahead. A brief overview of this morning’s trade report follows below.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Special Report Follows. As discussed in the above note, a Consumer Liquidity Special Report will be published within the next couple of days, detailing new information on conditions reflecting the structural nature of the current economic downturn. Without adequate income to stay ahead of inflation, consumers have not had, and do not have the ability to sustain positive growth in personal consumption and in the broad economy, shy of significant renewed debt expansion. As suggested by the deepening annual contraction in consumer credit — the worst of the post-World War II era — renewed debt expansion is not a current prospect. These and other concerns will be covered, with the key issues feeding into to the Hyperinflation Special Report, which will follow shortly thereafter.   

July Trade Deficit Reversed Some Earlier Automobile Distortions. As discussed previously, the still-unfolding U.S. depression has been of such severity in terms of declining economic activity and in terms of systemic disruptions that reporting on a number of economic series has faced serious distortions. The bankruptcies of Chrysler and General Motors, for example, had such impacts in a number of areas, including reported trade flows. Separately, delays in trade-flow paperwork continue to appear to be warping import data on oil, although the July numbers suggested some catch-up in both reporting of oil prices and in terms of imported physical volume. 

The July release also reflected widened trade deficits in revision for both the first and second quarters, which means the recent quarterly GDP contractions were somewhat understated. The second-quarter GDP numbers, though subject to one more near-term revision, likely will not reflect the new information until next year’s annual revision, when the first-quarter GDP also will be revised.

This morning, (September 10th), the Census Bureau and Bureau of Economic Analysis reported that the seasonally-adjusted July trade deficit widened to $32.0 billion from a revised $27.5 (previously $27.0) billion in June and from a revised $26.4 (previously $26.0) billion in May. Such is not a good a start for consensus forecasts looking for positive GDP growth in the third quarter.

Once again, exports picked up by less than imports. Oil imports jumped based both on higher oil prices ($62.48 average per barrel in July versus $59.17 in June) and on slightly higher physical volume (9.6 million barrels per day in July versus 9.3 million in June).  

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, September 4th, 2009

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

September 4, 2009

__________

Economic Downturn Deepens Anew

Annual Payroll Decline Is Worst of Downturn

Monthly Payroll Decline Was 300,000
Net of Renewed Seasonal Factor Games

Broad Unemployment Jumped 0.5% to
16.8% (U-6), 21.1% (SGS)

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Flash Update is for Thursday (September 10th), following release of the July trade deficit.

– Best wishes to all for a most happy Labor Day Weekend, John Williams

August Unemployment Rate Played Catch-Up; Seasonal-Factor Gaming Understated Monthly Payroll Decline. The August payroll and unemployment reporting showed the economic downturn to be very much alive and festering. Keep in mind that these statistics are coincident indicators of economic activity, not lagging indicators as hyped by Wall Street. As discussed in prior writings, July’s reporting had been distorted to the positive side because of seasonal-adjustments that had been pushed out of sync by the bankruptcies of Chrysler and General Motors. The reversal of those distortions plus ongoing deterioration brought about a worse-than-consensus increase in the unemployment rate. But for the gimmicks tied to the use of the Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias (see that section), the monthly drop in payrolls also would have been worse-than-consensus, down 300,000 instead of the reported 216,000. Reality likely was in the range of a 500,000-plus monthly payroll loss.

Consider that the seasonally-unadjusted payroll level in July was revised lower by 136,000. If July’s seasonal factors had been left intact, as would be the case in most economic series, then the seasonally-adjusted series would have been revised downward also by roughly 136,000. Instead, where the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) recasts the seasonal factors every month, the adjusted numbers revised downward by just 49,000, understating the relative decline between the adjusted July and August numbers.

- Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 216,000 (down 265,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for August 2009, following a revised 276,000 (previously 247,000) jobs loss in July.

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; the current month of August is the short-lived trough awaiting worse September numbers), payroll employment has declined by a seasonally-adjusted 6,929,000 jobs, or by 5.0%. Year-to-year contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls deepened in reporting and in revision, down by 4.38% in August (the worst annual decline of this cycle), versus a revised 4.28% (was 4.18%) drop in July.

The unadjusted 4.4% annual decline in August payrolls was the deepest since the 4.9% trough seen in the 1949 downturn. When the 1949 annual low growth is broken in the next couple of months, the annual percentage contraction in payrolls will be the most severe since the production shutdown following World War II. Disallowing that as a normal business cycle, the decline would be the worst since the Great Depression.    

Underlying economic series (such as the purchasing managers and help-wanted advertising surveys, and new claims for unemployment insurance) are consistent with a monthly August jobs loss in excess of 500,000.

- Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias.  The pattern of impossible biases being built into the headline monthly payroll employment resumed, following a one-month reversal, with an upside bias of 84,000 jobs in August 2009 reporting. Instead of the headline jobs loss of 216,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what I call the concurrent seasonal factor bias (CSFB) — would have shown a more-severe monthly jobs loss of about 300,000. This factor has generated an upside reporting bias seen in 10 of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 1,146,000. A worksheet on this is available upon request. (See SGS Newsletter No. 50, for further background.)

- Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  As discussed in SGS Newsletter No. 51, Birth-Death Model biases tend to overstate payroll employment during recessions. Never designed to handle the downside pressures from an economic contraction, the model adds a fairly consistent upside bias to the payroll levels each year, currently averaging about 74,000 jobs per month. The unadjusted August 2009 bias was an addition of 118,000 jobs, up from 92,000 the year before, and up from 32,000 in July 2009.

- Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed August employment dropped by 392,000 in August, versus a decline of 155,000 in July.

The August 2009 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-significant increase to 9.66% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from 9.36% in July.  Unadjusted U.3 eased to 9.6% from 9.7% in July.  The broader August U.6 unemployment rose to an adjusted 16.8% (16.5% unadjusted), from 16.3% (16.8% unadjusted) in July.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers. Adding them back into the total unemployed, unemployment more in line with common experience — as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — rose to about 21.1% in August, up from 20.6% in July. See the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com for a graph and more detail.

Broad Money Growth Continues to Falter.  Last night’s (September 3rd) weekly reporting on M3 components (seasonally adjusted) M2 and institutional money funds showed continued sharp weekly contractions. Over the coming weekend, following the release of tonight’s banking data by the Fed, I’ll post a preliminary estimate of August’s SGS-Ongoing M3. There is nothing in the latest data that would alter the content of the September 2nd Alert. Many thanks to the various subscribers who have forwarded ideas and details to what is afoot. I shall address the matter further next week.

Week Ahead. July Trade Balance. Due for release on Thursday, September 10th, the July trade deficit should widen somewhat and would offer a significant negative surprise, if reporting lags on imports were brought current. The catch up more likely still is a month or two down the road, given the passing of the summer holiday season this week.

 __________

 

Alert

Wednesday, September 2nd, 2009

ALERT - September 2, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

A L E R T

September 2, 2009

 

__________

 

Something Brewing in Systemic Solvency Crisis?

No Substance to "Economic Recovery"

U.S. Taxpayer-Subsidized Deflation

Worse-Than-Expected Labor Statistics?

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Flash Update is for Friday (September 4th), following release of the August employment and unemployment data.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Revived Crisis Brewing? A confluence of signals has aroused my gut instincts of an intensifying systemic liquidity crisis, and possible pending reaction by the Federal Reserve and/or the U.S. Treasury. Since this only is at the gut level, I am just waving a cautionary flag and publishing this as an Alert

First, growth in broad money supply has continued to falter. Although it will be another week or two before I have the data to publish a preliminary SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate, weekly reports by the Fed have shown the major M3 components (all seasonally adjusted) of M2, institutional money funds and large time deposits to be in general decline, suggesting that August will show a second consecutive monthly decline — at an accelerating pace — and that year-to-year growth is likely to slow from July’s level of 5.2% to something closer to 4% in August. Beyond being a negative for the economy, in the ongoing systemic solvency crisis, slowing broad money growth often has signaled rising systemic stress, foreshadowing intensification in the crisis that in turn has led to Federal Reserve or Treasury response.

Second, the seasonally-adjusted St. Louis Fed’s adjusted monetary base surged by 5.5% in the two weeks ended August 26th, versus the prior two-week period. The latest level is the highest in nearly three months and is 3.8% shy of the record high set in the two-week period ended May 20th. Year-to-year growth jumped to 102.0% in the latest reporting period, versus 91.8% in the prior one. The monetary base remains the Fed’s primary tool for targeting money supply, but it has proven to be of limited impact in boosting money growth, where banks have been leaving their cash with the Fed instead of lending into the normal stream of commerce. Nonetheless, the Fed appears to be pushing here, with consumer and business credit extremely constrained.

Third, President Obama has nominated Ben Bernanke for a second term as Federal Reserve Chairman. As to the merits or demerits of the nomination, the depository system has survived the crisis, so far, without a full banking system collapse or great deflation. The Fed has held the system together, while debasing the U.S. dollar and fighting to forestall a financial collapse triggered primarily by the malfeasance of Alan Greenspan’s actions (otherwise continued by Mr. Bernanke). Given the not-so-politically-popular Fed chairman and earlier expressions of Administration plans to replace him, however, something else may be at work. If a renewed/intensified systemic solvency crisis were brewing, having the question of the Fed chairmanship succession so resolved would be a plus not only for the financial markets, but also for the incumbent Fed Chairman in his ability to navigate the renewed crisis. It is this last consideration that makes the most sense to me as to what was behind Bernanke’s nomination.

Cash-for-Clunker Deals to Lower CPI/PCE Deflator. Conversations with individuals at both the Bureau of Labor Statistics and the Bureau of Economic Analysis (the BEA has published a notice), indicate that both the consumer price index (CPI) and the personal consumption (PCE) deflator will reflect new car prices net of the cash-for-clunkers rebates. As a result, lower inflation than would have been seen otherwise is in the works for August. The treatment here seems to be unusual, where automobile dealers are not cutting their profits by offering an added discount. The cars are being sold by dealers at regular prices, it is just that part of the cost of the automobile — up to $4,500 — is being paid for by a third party: U.S. taxpayers. I shall publish an estimate of the impact on CPI reporting prior to the August CPI release.

The one-time impact of the cash-for-clunkers program has started to distort other reporting, too. Any net boost in economic data from this program is not a signal of economic rebound or of any fundamental shift in economic activity. It spiked elements of the August manufacturers purchasing managers survey, for example, but pickups in new orders and production were not matched with increased hiring. For most series, severe year-to-year contractions and historically low levels remain in place, despite any month-to-month gains that either are clouded by lack of statistical significance (statistically not different from zero) or by depression-related special distortions tied to home foreclosures, difficulties for new home buyers in closing their transactions, business distortions from extremely large corporations that have passed through or still are in receivership or conservatorship, etc.

Week Ahead. August Employment/Unemployment. Negative surprises here are a good bet. Due for release on Friday, September 4th, both a decline in payroll employment and an increase in the unemployment rate should be worse than consensus expectations. Bad quality seasonal factors that generated better-than-expected numbers last month should more than reverse. Further, help-wanted advertising both in newspapers and online, new claims for unemployment insurance and the purchasing managers survey (ISM) manufacturing employment all show annual growth or activity levels that are historically negative enough to support much weaker than the expected results for the August numbers.

Briefing.com shows expected payroll loss of 225,000 (versus a loss of 247,000 in July), with expected unemployment of 9.5% versus 9.4% in July.

 

__________

Flash Update

Thursday, August 27th, 2009

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

August 27, 2009

__________

Gross Domestic Income Down 2.1% in 2nd Quarter
With Record 4.6% Annual Decline

Housing and Durable Goods Not Signaling Recovery

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next scheduled Flash Update is for next Friday (September 4th), following release of the August employment and unemployment data. There also will be an interim communication updating the money supply situation, the systemic solvency crisis and the outlook for the employment report.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Economy Remains in Deepening Downturn. Aside from a one-time upside blip from the Cash-for Clunkers Program, which has still to surface meaningfully in series such as retail sales and durable goods orders, there is little on the horizon promising improved economic data. Highly touted monthly gains seen in new and existing home sales and in new orders for durable goods either were statistically meaningless (the Census Bureau release on the 9.6% monthly July gain in new home sales again included the caution that "The Census Bureau does not have sufficient statistical evidence to conclude that the actual change is different from zero.") Further, distortions from the extreme nature of the current downturn have made meaningful interpretation of data from series such as home sales extremely difficult. The National Association of Realtors, for example touted a strong monthly gain in July existing home sales, but stopped reporting its estimate of sales generated by foreclosures, which purportedly accounted for nearly a third of the activity in June. The durable goods numbers are covered below. The nature of the ongoing downturn and still-deepening systemic solvency crisis will be reviewed in the next update.     

Definitions. For purposes of clarity and the use of simplified language, here are definitions of key terms used related to GDP reporting:
- "Gross Domestic Product (GDP)" is the headline number and the most widely followed broad measure of U.S. economic activity. It is published quarterly by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), with two successive monthly revisions and with an annual revision the following July.
- "Gross Domestic Income (GDI)" is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP, but it is not followed by the popular press. Where GDP reflects the consumption side of the economy and GDI reflects the offsetting income side. When the series estimates do not equal each other, which almost always is the case, the difference is added to or subtracted from the GDI as a "statistical discrepancy." Although the BEA touts the GDP as the more accurate measure, the GDI is relatively free of the monthly political targeting the GDP goes through.
- "Gross National Product (GNP)" is the broadest measure of the U.S. economy published by the BEA. Once the headline number, now it is rarely followed by the popular media. GDP is the GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). GNP growth usually is weaker than GDP growth for net-debtor nations. Games played with money flows between the United States and the rest of the world have tended to mute that impact on the reporting of U.S. GDP growth.
- "Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.
- "Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records revenues or an individual views day-to-day income and expenses.
- "Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power.
- "Annual growth"
refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before.  

GDI and GNP Reporting Show Deeper Annual Contractions.  The BEA reported this morning (August 27th) unrevised real growth in its second estimate of second-quarter 2009 GDP. The annualized quarterly contraction held at 1.01% (previously 1.02%) +/- 3% (95% confidence interval). Such followed respective real contractions of 6.43% and 5.37% in first-quarter 2009 and fourth-quarter 2008. The year-to-year contraction held at 3.90% in the second-quarter, versus respective annual contractions of 3.30% and 1.86% in the first and fourth quarters.   

The annual contraction remains the worst since the quarterly GDP series has been published (1947), with the current recession now the longest and deepest since the first-dip (early 1930s) of the Great Depression. That circumstance is discussed in greater detail in the Depression Special Report of August 1st (available in the right-hand column of the SGS home page: www.shadowstats.com). Even deeper annual contraction, however, is suggested for the second-quarter in the first estimates of GNP and GDI reporting for the quarter.

The SGS Alternate-GDP estimate remains at an annual contraction of 5.9% versus the 3.9% official estimate.

GDI showed a 2.1% quarterly contraction (GDP was 1.0% contraction) in the second quarter, down from 7.7% and 7.3% respectively in the first and fourth quarters. The more significant annual change was a 4.6% contraction (GDP was 3.9% contraction) in the second quarter, versus 4.1% and 2.1% respectively in the first and fourth quarters.       

GNP showed a 0.8% quarterly contraction (GDP was 1.0% contraction) in the second quarter, down from 6.6% and 6.7% respectively in the first and fourth quarters. The more significant annual change was a 4.0% contraction (GDP was 3.9% contraction) in the second quarter, versus 3.8% and 2.4% respectively in the first and fourth quarters.

July New Orders for Durable Goods Remain in Severe Annual Contraction. The Census Bureau reported yesterday (August 26th) that the regularly-volatile new orders for durable goods rose by 4.9% (6.2% net of revisions) month-to-month, versus a revised 1.3% (was 2.5%) decline in June. In terms of year-to-year change, before any accounting for inflation, July’s new orders were down by 20.4%, following June’s revised annual decline of 24.5% (previously 25.0%). Adjusted for inflation the series would have shown even sharper contractions. Nominal year-to-year change in the series has been holding at a 25% decline, plus or minus a percent or two, since February, having pushed into great depression territory, per SGS definition of a greater than 25% peak-to-trough decline in economic activity. The slight narrowing in July annual decline is within the bounds of the randomly volatile monthly variations. 

The widely followed new orders for nondefense capital goods also rose in July, up by 8.6% (12.1% net of revisions) on a month-to-month basis, following June’s revised 0.4% (previously 3.4%) monthly decline. Year-to-year, July orders were down by 21.2%, versus a revised June annual decline of 25.1% (previously down by 26.7%). These series are leading indicators to economic activity and are not signaling a pending economic rebound.

Week Ahead. August Employment/Unemployment. Due for release on Friday, September 4th, both a decline in payroll employment and an increase in unemployment rate should be worse than consensus expectations. Bad quality seasonal factors that generated better-than-expected numbers last month should reverse. Late detail here, with updated data from supporting series will be discussed along with the money supply circumstance in a separate Flash Update by next Wednesday.

 

__________

Flash Update

Tuesday, August 18th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - August 18, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

August 18, 2009

 

__________

 

July Housing Starts Showed Ongoing Depression

Volatile PPI Reflected Unusual Seasonal Factors

Journalists Too Overworked to Handle Poverty Report?

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next Flash Update is planned for next Thursday (August 27th), following release of the second estimate of second-quarter GDP. Any interim Flash Update or Alert would be published as dictated by economic, market or political developments.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

No Change in Outlook. This week’s relatively light economic reporting had no meaningful surprises. The PPI was worse than expected, but such was not outside the range of regular volatility for the series. The monthly decline in housing starts was not meaningful, but the continued bottom-bouncing at a plateau of low-level activity was significant. The economy continues in a severe, deepening downturn, with no meaningful signs of a pending upturn.   Based on continued weakness in weekly money supply reporting, the systemic solvency crisis is intensifying and also is far from resolution. More will follow on the systemic crisis in the next update.

Unusual Numbers Pending in the Poverty Survey? The annual poverty report, which includes estimates not only of poverty, but also national income distribution and national health insurance coverage, is based on a survey that is piggy-backed on the March household survey (unemployment, etc.). The report usually is released in mid-August, but the Census Bureau advised on July 31st that, "National income and poverty data from the CPS [household survey] will be released the week of Labor Day [September 10th].  This is in response to feedback that releasing the data in late August was not optimal for data users and journalists reporting on the findings."

I never have known competent data users or journalists to request data later rather than earlier. Given the current healthcare program being pushed by the Administration, one has to wonder if there are any politically uncomfortable results in the pending survey, where a delay could result in the data being excluded from the debate. Another possibility is that the delay would give the Census Bureau time to "get it right," a phrase purportedly used by President Lyndon Johnson when he sent drafts of initial GNP (now GDP) reporting he did not like back to the Commerce Department, for revision.

July Housing Starts Continued Bottom-Bouncing. The Census Bureau reported this morning that seasonally-adjusted July housing starts fell by a statistically insignificant 1.0% (down 0.2% net of revisions) +/- 10.0% (95% confidence interval) month-to-month and fell year-to-year by 37.7% +/- 6.0% (95% confidence interval). Such contrasted with June’s revised monthly decline of 6.5% (previously 3.6%, reflecting a large downward revision to May’s number) and annual contraction of 45.5% (previously 46.0%, but such was closer to a 39.1% decline, adjusting for the inconsistent numbers published in June 2008). The July 45.0% pace of annual contraction on a three-month moving-average basis is down from a revised 47.7% (was 44.8%) in June, and it reflected bottom-bouncing along both a plateau of historically-low growth as well as historically-low count of new starts.

For the month, seasonally-adjusted July building permits fell by a statistically significant 1.8% (down 3.8% net of revisions) +/- 1.6% (95% confidence interval), following June’s revised 10.0% (was 8.7%) gain. Permits fell by 39.4% in July, following a revised year-to-year decline in June of 51.4% (previously down by 52.0%, but it was down roughly 41.8% net of problems with June 2008 reporting).

With ongoing distortions from seasonal factors warped by the depression and by significant levels of home foreclosures, reporting quality (particularly of seasonally-adjusted monthly changes) will continue to be extremely low in upcoming estimates existing and new home sales in July.

Unusual Seasonals Depress PPI Inflation. As reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) this morning (August 18th), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted producer price index (PPI) fell by 1.8% (down by 0.9% unadjusted), following June’s 1.8% (1.9% unadjusted) monthly increase. Last year, the reported seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted monthly changes (0.6% and 0.7% gains, respectively) showed significantly less seasonal distortion than did today’s reporting.

Year-to-year, the intensification of the annual contraction in PPI inflation resumed, with July prices down by 6.8% from the year before, versus a 4.6% annual contraction in June.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted July intermediate goods eased by 0.2% (up by 1.9% in June), with crude goods falling by 4.5% (up by 4.6% in June). The decline in year-to-year inflation deepened, with July intermediate goods down by 15.1% (down by 12.5% in June) and July crude goods down by 44.8% (down by 40.0% in June).

Week Ahead. July New Orders for Durable Goods. Due for release on Tuesday, August 25th, this regularly volatile series should show continued bottom bouncing, with annual change at or near a record low. The reported seasonally-adjusted monthly change likely will not be meaningful.

Second Estimate of Second-Quarter GDP. Due for release next Thursday, August 27th, the first revision to second-quarter 2009 GDP should show little change from the initially-estimated annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) contraction of 1.1%. When advance reporting on GDP surprises consensus forecasts in one direction or the other (in this case the surprise was in the direction of a stronger number), however, the direction of that surprise often continues in the second reporting.

Not an issue, yet, although it has become one outside the United States, a reported positive quarter-to-quarter change in real GDP does not mean necessarily that a recession has ended. Most recessions reflect quarterly contractions interspersed by quarters of positive growth. The current U.S. recession is far from over.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, August 14th, 2009

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

August 14, 2009

__________

Official July CPI-U Annual Inflation of -2.1% (SGS +5.4%)

Monthly and Annual CPI Should Jump in August

Net of Bad Auto Seasonals, July Industrial Production Contracted

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next Flash Update is planned for Tuesday (August 18th), following release of the PPI and residential construction (housing starts) series.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Thank Goodness for Seasonal Adjustments. Seasonal adjustments to government economic series generate misleading results during unusual times. In the best of circumstances, seasonally-adjusted data present patterns of economic activity with the effects of regular seasonal variations removed with some degree of significance. Even so, those results often are misleading. In unusual times, when regular business patterns are disrupted seriously by economic collapse, for example, the resulting patterns of reported seasonally-adjusted monthly activity can be very wrong. Such was the case in today’s (August 14th) reporting of industrial production and (possibly) the consumer price index (CPI).  

As discussed in the August 7th Flash Update, irregular auto production line closures — for what usually has been regular re-tooling for the new model year — warped key seasonal adjustments for August reporting, artificially spiking the purchasing managers manufacturing survey and the payroll employment levels, and artificially depressing new claims for unemployment insurance and the unemployment rate. The same problem accounted for all of the reported increase in August industrial production. On the inflation front, seasonal factors boosted reported gasoline prices with less vigor than usually is seen at this time of year. Nonetheless, as discussed below, the annual decline in CPI-U inflation likely is at its near-term nadir. 

As the bad seasonals reverse, look for much weaker production (and employment, etc.) and much higher inflation in the next round of monthly reports.  

Dominated Again by Gasoline Prices, CPI Faces August Upswing. Due to a short-lived July dip in oil and gasoline prices, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported an unadjusted monthly decline of gasoline prices in July of 3.4%. Such narrowed to a 0.8% decline after seasonal adjustment. In July 2008, a 0.7% unadjusted monthly gain translated to a 4.1% gain on an adjusted basis, a magnitude of gasoline pricing alteration that was not reflected fully in the 2009 numbers. Nonetheless, oil and gasoline prices have rebounded again in August, and they will be going against an August 2008 pattern of an unadjusted 7.4% decline in gasoline narrowing to a 4.2% decline after adjustment. With higher (not lower) gasoline prices in August 2009, the reported CPI should show a monthly gain as well as a narrowing of the annual decline in the CPI, setting a July trough for the current cycle of inflation reporting.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported that the seasonally-adjusted July CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) was unchanged (down by 0.16% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, versus a gain of 0.74% (up by 0.86% unadjusted) in June. Unadjusted year-to-year inflation declined further (formal deflation), down by 2.10% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) in July, versus a 1.43% contraction in June. Seasonally-adjusted, the compound annual rate of inflation for the three months ended July was 3.4%, per the BLS.

The reported June CPI-U year-to-year decline was largest since January 1950. I estimate, however, that CPI reporting methods used in 1950 would generate a reported current inflation rate of roughly 5% (see Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures below).

For those interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I continue to refer you to CPIwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in August 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the "flat" (0.02% decline) adjusted monthly change seen in August 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from July’s annual inflation rate of negative 2.10%. CPI-U annual inflation should be at its trough for the current cycle, with accelerating upticks in annual inflation likely starting next month.

CPI-W.  The BLS reported that the narrower, seasonally-adjusted July CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) rose by 0.03% (down by 0.21% unadjusted), following a 0.92% (1.05% unadjusted) increase in June.  Year-to-year, CPI-W inflation declined by 2.67% in July, following a 1.98% decline in June.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — fell by 1.89% in July, versus a 1.26% decline in June. Less-negative C-CPI-U annual inflation rate versus the CPI-U suggests reporting problems within the various CPI series.  

Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth dropped to roughly 1.2% in July versus 1.9% in June, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, weakened to about 5.4% (5.44% for those using the extra digit), versus 6.1% in June. See the Alternate Data tab and Inflation Calculator at www.shadowstats.com, for graphs and data.  The alternative numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where SGS has estimated the impact, not otherwise published by the BLS.

Real Retail Sales.  Updating yesterday’s (August 13th) Flash Update, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted June retail sales declined by 0.06% (down by 0.05% before inflation adjustment) for the month, versus a revised 0.03% (previously 0.09%) gain in June (up by 0.77% before inflation adjustment). Year-to-year, July real retail sales fell 6.54% (8.31% before inflation adjustment), versus a revised 7.83% (previously 7.89%) decline in June, which was a drop of 8.92% before inflation adjustment.

Smoothed for monthly volatility on a three-month moving-average basis, the July and June real annual declines were 7.75% and 8.72%, respectively. Since December 2008, annual decline in the moving average had held around 9%, a record low for the two historical retail series of the post-World War II era. The pattern here of annual growth moving off its historically low level reflects bottom-bouncing of the series at a low level of activity compared with a period of rapid monthly decline the year before. The monthly level of real retail sales has been virtually flat for the last six months. There is no turnaround in economic activity evident here.

Industrial Production Impacted by Auto and Weather Distortions. As noted in the opening comments, depression-related seasonal-factor distortions spiked auto production data artificially. Net of the reported faux auto surge, the 0.5% monthly total production gain was a 0.1% monthly contraction. Distorting in the other direction was unusually cool weather in July, which depressed utility usage, as well as the production of certain products, which is estimated as a function of utility activity.

Overall, the Federal Reserve reported that seasonally-adjusted July industrial production rose by 0.5% (0.6% net of revisions) for the month, following an unrevised 0.4% decline in June.  Year-to-year contraction in July activity narrowed to 13.1%, from a revised 13.5% (was 13.6%) in June. June’s reading had set a record low for annual production growth since the shutdown of war-time production that followed World War II.

With annual change down 13.1% and with a peak-to-trough (June remains the short-lived current trough) contraction at 14.6%, the industrial sector of the economy (including manufacturing, mining and utilities) continued in depression. A depression is defined (SGS) as a recession where the peak-to-trough economic contraction exceeds 10%.

As previously noted, since the index of industrial production was introduced in 1919, there have been four down cycles worse than what has been seen so far in the current downturn. In each instance, the trough reflected an annual decline somewhat in excess of 30%. Those four cycles were: (1) the post-war production shut-down following World War II; (2) and (3) the double dip of the Great Depression; (4) the post-World War I and post-Panama Canal production shutdowns in the early 1920s.

Week Ahead.  July Housing Starts. Due for release on Tuesday, August 18th, the reported monthly change in housing starts is not likely to be statistically significant. The level of starts, however, should show continued bottom-bouncing, with severe year-to-year decline.

Producer Price Index (PPI). Due for release on Tuesday, August 18th, expectations are for a 0.2% monthly decline per Briefing.com, but the energy-price-boosting seasonal adjustments still offer some risk of an upside surprise, despite the weaker seasonals in the CPI reporting.

 

__________

Flash Update

Thursday, August 13th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - August 13, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

August 13, 2009

 

__________

 

July Retail Sales Continued Historic Bottom-Bouncing

Monthly "Core" Retail Sales Gained 0.22% versus Aggregate 0.05% Contraction

12-Month "Official" Federal Deficit Topped $1.3 Trillion,
Gross Federal Debt Up $2.1 Trillion

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next Flash Update is planned for tomorrow, Friday (August 14th), following the CPI and industrial production releases.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

July Retail Sales Notched Lower Despite Inflation and Cash-for-Clunkers. This morning’s (August 13th) Census Bureau report indicated a statistically-insignificant monthly decline of 0.05% (a gain of 0.05% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval) in seasonally-adjusted July retail sales. Such followed a revised 0.77% (previously 0.65%) monthly gain in June. On a year-to-year basis, July retail sales fell by 8.31%, versus a revised 8.92% (previously 8.99%) plunge in June. This pattern of annual change remains one of bottom-bouncing/plateauing at historic low levels.

What is not clear at the moment is how the pricing of automobiles in the cash-for-clunkers program will be handled in the government’s economic bookkeeping. Are the added discounts to be treated as lower automobile prices or as transfer payments from the government to the involved individuals or automobile dealers? While handling such as transfer payments seems appropriate, the matter now is complicated by government ownership in and control of General Motors.

Core Retail Sales.  Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — rose by 0.22% (0.25% net of revisions) in July, following a revised 0.23% (previously 0.26%) increase in June. Those numbers contrasted with the official aggregate loss of 0.05% in July and gain of 0.77% in June. Although gasoline prices declined on average in July, they were higher in June and are rebounding anew, so far, in August. Seasonal adjustments in July and August should have spiked July reporting and should further spike the August numbers.    

Real Retail Sales.  Inflation- and seasonally-adjusted June retail sales likely were little changed on a monthly basis and remained sharply lower in terms of annual contraction. Those numbers will be detailed in tomorrow’s Flash Update, following the release of the July CPI. The July CPI-U currently is expected to be unchanged for the month, per Briefing.com (see comments below).

June Trade Deficit Should Not Generate Significant GDP Revisions. Yesterday (August 12th), the Census Bureau and Bureau of Economic Analysis reported that the seasonally-adjusted June trade deficit widened to $27.0 billion from an unrevised $26.0 billion in May. Exports picked up by less than imports. Oil imports jumped based both on higher oil prices ($59.17 average per barrel in June versus $51.21 in May) and on higher physical volume (9.3 million barrels per day in June versus 8.4 million in May). The first estimate of trade balance activity for the third month of the second quarter was not different enough from consensus estimates to have meaningful impact on the upcoming first revision to estimated second-quarter GDP growth.

Distorting current trade data appear be ongoing systemic disruptions from merchandise flows affected by the auto industry’s reorganization. Also, as was seen in 2008 reporting, significant distortions from less than timely paperwork flows likely is affecting results, again. An import transaction is tallied as of the month that the paperwork makes it into the trade data reporting, not when the import actually occurs. While revisions are made regularly for one month back in time, last year’s reporting showed significant lags (more than one month) that caused a large negative revision to 2008 reporting.  

For 12 Months Ended July, Federal Deficit Topped $1.3 Trillion; Debt Gained $2.1 Trillion. Understated by accounting gimmicks used to mute the impact of the banking bailout program, the 12-month moving deficit through July 2009 was $1,333.1 billion, versus $1,255.2 billion in June, $1,127.3 billion in May and $1,103.6 billion in April. Those numbers contrasted with 12-month rolling deficits for July, June, May and April 2008, respectively, of $375.5 billion, $309.2 billion, $332.5 billion and $334.2 billion.

Accounting changes introduced in April reduced the reporting of outlays for the government’s banking bailout program and continue on an ongoing basis. Before restatement for the new accounting gimmicks, April’s 12-month moving deficit was $1,278.6 billion, instead of the now-estimated $1,103.6 billion. Net of that gimmick, the current 12-month moving deficit would top $1.5 trillion. 

Viewing the change in the level of gross federal debt bypasses most of the regular reporting manipulations of the government’s financial results and provides a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than does the official deficit reporting. Gross federal debt stood at $11.669 trillion as of July 31, 2009, up by $124 billion for the month, and up by $2.084 trillion from July 2009, which in turn was up by $653 billion from July 2007. The Treasury expects borrowing to break the current $12.1 trillion debt limit in October. 

Gross federal debt stood at $11.545 trillion as of June 30, 2009, up by $224 billion for the month, and up by $2,053 billion from June 2008, which in turn was up by $634 billion from June 2007. Gross federal debt stood at $11.322 trillion as of May 31, 2009, up by $83 billion for the month, and up by $1,933 billion from May 2008, which in turn was up by $560 billion from May 2007. As of the end of September 2008, the close of the government’s last fiscal year, gross federal debt stood at $10.025 trillion, up $379 billion for the month and up by $1.017 trillion from September 2007, which in turn was up $501 billion from September 2006.

As noted in the most recent newsletter, fiscal stresses are going remain severe in the next several years, given the Obama Administration’s budget and economic stimulus package boosts to government outlays, and given the sharp hit on tax receipts from the continuing, severe recession.

The official 2008 federal deficit was $454.8 billion, against a $161.8 billion deficit in 2007. These are the officially-gimmicked numbers (counting Social Security revenues, but not liabilities, not fully counting the costs of the Iraq War, etc.), using a variation on cash-based accounting, not GAAP reporting. The 2009 official budget deficit should top $2 trillion, with commensurate funding in excess of that required by the U.S. Treasury.

The 2008 GAAP-based deficit (counting unfunded Social Security and Medicare liabilities, etc.), using accrual accounting, was $5.1 trillion, up from $1.2 trillion ($4 trillion-plus, using consistent annual assumptions and accounting) in 2007. The 2009 GAAP-based deficit likely will top $9 trillion (more than 60% of annual U.S. GDP).

Irrespective of wishful pronouncements by the FOMC, rapidly increasing market reluctance to hold U.S. Treasuries eventually will pummel the U.S. dollar and force heavy Fed monetization (overt or covert) of the Treasury’s soaring obligations, along with dire consequences for broad money growth and domestic inflation.

Tomorrow’s Reporting. The following generally is repeated from the August 7th Flash Update:

July Consumer Price Index (CPI). Due for release on Friday (August 14th), July CPI-U is expected to be unchanged per Briefing.com, but despite dips in monthly average oil and gasoline prices, there is some upside risk against market expectations.

Given the significant reversal in seasonal factors that now will spike energy inflation sharply in the third quarter, and given rising relative year-to-year comparisons against last year’s collapsing oil prices (July excepted), July CPI inflation and monthly inflation the next several months should offer upside surprises to consensus expectations. Longer-range impact from likely intensified dollar weakness, a likely continued upswing in oil prices and an eventual upturn in broad money growth should tend to generate upside CPI pressures well into 2010.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in July 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.72% adjusted monthly increase seen in July 2008.  The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from June’s annual inflation rate of negative 1.43%.

July Industrial Production. Also due for release on Friday (August 14th), July industrial production may be spiked by poor-quality seasonal factors, warped by auto industry disruptions as seen in the July employment/unemployment numbers and the purchasing managers manufacturing index. Unusually cool weather, however, could offset such distortions to a certain extent, where utility activity could decline and that would reduce estimates of production that are based on electricity consumption. Beyond near-term monthly volatility, annual growth should continue at or close to historic lows.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, August 7th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - August 7, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

August 7, 2009

 

__________

 

Depression-Warped Seasonal Factors Improved Reporting of July
Employment and Unemployment, Purchasing Managers Manufacturing

Watch Out for Sharply Negative Economic Surprises Next Month

Broad Money Growth Continues Signaling Ongoing Crises

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The first estimate of the SGS-Ongoing M3 Measure for July will be published on the "Alternate Data" tab at www.shadowstats.com, over this weekend. The next Flash Update is planned for Thursday (August 13th), following release of the July retail sales report, with a subsequent Flash Update on Friday (August 14th), following the CPI and industrial production releases. Any interim updates or alerts would be published as dictated by developing economic or financial-market circumstances.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Auto Industry Turmoil Distorted Key Reporting. The economy remains in a deepening downturn, irrespective of the better-than-expected news out of today’s (August 7th) employment and unemployment reporting from the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). As suggested as a possibility in the SGS Newsletter No. 51 and in the July 31st Flash Update, heavily distorted seasonal adjustments that artificially reduced the levels of new claims for unemployment insurance appear to have flowed through not only to July unemployment and payroll reporting, but also to the July purchasing managers manufacturing survey. 

July usually sees a regular pattern of planned automobile production line shutdowns to accommodate retooling for the new model year, but recent disruptions to the auto industry have changed pattern this year. Without the usual pattern of shutdowns, the government’s computers nonetheless responded by creating the usual offsetting boost in jobs, not only in the auto industry, but in supporting industries as well. The auto industry itself was alone among durable goods manufacturing industries in showing a reported, seasonally-adjusted monthly gain in July, up by 28,000 jobs.

The seasonal-factor distortions also appear to have played through to the Institute for Supply Management’s (ISM) purchasing managers surveys, where a reading below 50.0 in the diffusion indices indicates contracting activity. The seasonally-adjusted employment index for manufacturing rose from 40.7 in June to 45.6 in July, still in contraction but a better reading. In contrast, the nonmanufacturing employment index, which would have reflected minimal impact from the auto industry distortions, fell from 43.4 in June to 41.5 in July. There is the possibility that these distortions also may impact the reporting of July industrial production (see below).

As further noted in SGS Newsletter No. 51, the severity of the ongoing economic contraction has started to generate other distortions in data reporting: (1) Year-to-year comparisons will begin to see a flattening in annual declines, as year-ago numbers used in comparisons were in severe contraction. (2) Extreme economic disruptions have distorted patterns of regular activity and related seasonal-adjustment processes. (3) The birth-death model overstates payroll levels during recessions. (4) Short-term discouraged workers begin to disappear from the broader BLS unemployment measures as their "discouragement" extends beyond one year (those discouraged for more than a year — since July 2008 or before — have disappeared from the rolls of the government’s "alternative measures of labor underutilization," but are estimated in the SGS-Alternate Unemployment measure).

While Wall Street likely will hype the July employment results as confirmation that economy has turned the corner, such hype and resulting overly optimistic expectations should be slammed in the months ahead, when the positive reporting distortions reverse out in a normal catch-up process.

July Payroll Reporting Showed Upside Revisions to Prior Data; Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias Reversed in July. Reversing recent trends, the July payroll reporting showed upside prior-period revisions, but, as discussed above, it also was subject to major reporting distortions tied to seasonal factors and a deepening downturn.

- Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 247,000 (down 204,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for July 2009, following a revised 443,000 (previously 467,000) jobs loss in June.

From peak-to-trough (the peak month was December 2007; the current month of July also is the short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment has declined by a seasonally-adjusted 6,664,000 jobs, or by 4.8%. Year-to-year contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls flattened out in July, down 4.18% in June versus a revised 4.19% (was 4.22%) in June.

The unadjusted annual declines in the June and July payrolls remain the deepest since a similar decline at the trough of the 1958 recession, but still shy of the 4.9% trough seen in the 1949 downturn. When the 1949 annual low growth is broken, most likely next month, the annual percentage contraction in payrolls will be the most severe since the production shutdown following World War II.    

Underlying economic series, shy of the related seasonal distortions in new claims for unemployment and the ISM manufacturing index, are consistent with a monthly July jobs loss in excess of 600,000, and a further increase in the unemployment rate.

- Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias.  The pattern of impossible biases being built into the headline monthly payroll employment reversed, with a downside bias of 134,000 jobs in July 2009 reporting. Instead of the headline jobs loss of 247,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what I call the concurrent seasonal factor bias (CSFB) — would have shown a less-severe monthly jobs loss of about 113,000. This factor has generated an upside reporting bias seen in 10 of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 1,106,000. A worksheet on this is available upon request. Due to technical issues, the CSFBd graph usually published with this report will not be shown today. (See SGS Newsletter No. 50, for further background.)

- Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  As discussed in SGS Newsletter No. 51, Birth-Death Model biases tend to overstate payroll employment during recessions. Never designed to handle the downside pressures from an economic contraction, the model adds a fairly consistent upside bias to the payroll levels each year, currently averaging about 76,000 jobs per month. The unadjusted July 2009 bias was 32,000, up from 25,000 the year before, but down from 185,000 in June.

- Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed July employment fell by 155,000, after falling by a reported 374,000 in June. At work here continue to be poor quality seasonal adjustments.

The July 2009 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-insignificant decrease, to 9.36% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), from 9.51% in June.  Unadjusted U.3 held at 9.7% in July.  The broader June U.6 unemployment rate eased to an adjusted 16.3% (16.8% unadjusted), from 16.5% (16.8% unadjusted) in June.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the long-term discouraged workers. Adding them back into the total unemployed, unemployment in line with common experience — as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure — held at about 20.6% in July. See the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com for a graph and more detail.

July M3 Annual Growth Likely Below 5.5%.  Despite some weekly pick-up in M3 components (seasonally adjusted) M2, institutional money funds and last week’s partial estimate on large time deposits, the seasonally-adjusted SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for July still appears headed for a month-to-month decline, with annual growth slowing to below 5.5%, versus the 6.4% annual growth estimated for June. Annual growth rates in monthly M1 and M2 appear to have slowed slightly in July, to 17.1% and 8.3%, respectively, from 18.4% and 9.0% in June. Monthly changes in July M1 and M2 appear to be flat. Formal preliminary estimates for the July numbers will be posted over the coming weekend (August 8th or 9th) on the "Alternate Data" tab at www.shadowstats.com.

As noted in the July 31st Flash Update, the continued slack in broad money growth highlights an intensifying systemic solvency crisis and an intensifying downturn in economic activity (irrespective of any recovery mania being generated by Wall Street and the popular media).

Week Ahead: June Trade Deficit.  Due for release Wednesday (August 12th), the June trade deficit should deteriorate, assuming oil imports reflect some catch-up in monthly paperwork flows. A major surprise in the data (a small deterioration appears to be expected) would impact the first revision of the second-quarter GDP estimate. A bigger deficit would mean a weaker GDP; a smaller deficit would mean a stronger GDP in revision.  

July Retail Sales. Due for release on Thursday (August 13th), July retail sales are expected to show a 0.3% gain, per Briefing.com, but the bulk of any increase should be due to inflation. Accordingly, look for continued month-to-month and year-to-year contractions net of inflation.

July Consumer Price Index (CPI). Due for release on Friday (August 14th), July CPI-U is expected to be unchanged per Briefing.com, but despite dips in monthly average oil and gasoline prices, there is upside risk against market expectations.

Given the significant reversal in seasonal factors that now will spike energy inflation sharply in the third quarter, and given rising relative year-to-year comparisons against last year’s collapsing oil prices (July excepted), July CPI inflation and monthly inflation the next several months should offer upside surprises to consensus expectations. Longer-range impact from likely intensified dollar weakness, a likely continued upswing in oil prices and an eventual upturn in broad money growth should tend to generate upside CPI pressures well into 2010.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in July 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.72% adjusted monthly increase seen in July 2008.  The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from June’s annual inflation rate of negative 1.43%.

July Industrial Production. Due for release on Friday (August 14th), July industrial production may be spiked by poor-quality seasonal factors, warped by auto industry disruptions, as discussed earlier. Unusually cool weather, however, could offset such distortions to a certain extent, where utility activity could decline and that would reduce production estimates based on electricity consumption. Beyond near-term monthly volatility, annual growth should continue at or close to historic lows.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, July 31st, 2009

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 FLASH UPDATE

July 31, 2009

__________

GDP Shows Most Severe Recession Since Great Depression

Second-Quarter GDP Annual Contraction Was Worst Ever

Recession Is Not Ending

Annual Durable Goods Plunge Continued
In
GreatDepressionTerritory

Broad Money Growth Still Slowing

Unemployment Skew Next Week?

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The GDP Special Report on the restated GDP and related accounts will follow within a day or so. The next Flash Update is planned for next Friday (August 7th), following release of the July employment/unemployment report. Any interim Flash Update or Alert would be published as dictated by developing economic or financial-market circumstances.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 Following is a brief summary of the "advance" estimate of second-quarter GDP released along with the grand-benchmark revision of the national income accounts (including the GDP) released this morning (July 31st) by the Bureau of Economic Analysis. A much more detailed analysis, accompanied by graphs, will follow shortly in a special report.

So as to simplify the language, here are definitions of key terms used:

  • "Real" means growth has been adjusted for inflation.
  • "Nominal" means growth or level has not been adjusted for inflation. This is the way a business normally records its revenues.
  • "Quarterly growth," unless otherwise stated, is in terms of seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarter-to-quarter growth, i.e., the growth rate of one quarter over the prior quarter, raised to the fourth power.
  • "Annual growth" refers to the year-to-year change of the referenced period versus the same period the year before.

GDP Benchmark Revisions Showed Weaker Recent Growth, New Upside Growth Biases, Lowered Inflation Rates. The benchmark revision was pretty much as expected, showing a much deeper and longer recession in place than previously had been reported. The GDP now more closely tracks the timing of the recession’s official December 2007 onset, as previously proclaimed by the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER).

Now showing five of the last six quarters in quarterly contraction, the revised official real GDP quarterly growth rates (and prior estimates of growth) are: 1q08 was down 0.7% (previously up 0.9%); 2q08 was up 1.5% (previously up 2.8%); 3q08 was down 2.7% (previously down 0.5%); 4q08 was down 5.4% (previously down 6.3%); 1q09 was down 6.4% (previously down 5.5%); 2q09 was down 1.0% in its "advance" estimate.

In like manner, recent real annual growth now shows a steeper pattern of slowing/contracting growth: 3q07 (near-term peak) was up 2.7% (previously up 2.8%); 4q07 was up 2.5% (previously up 2.3%);1q08 was up 2.0% (previously up 2.5%); 2q08 was up 1.6% (previously up 2.1%); 3q08 was up 0.0% (previously up 0.8%); 4q08 was down 1.9% (previously down 0.9%); 1q09 was down 3.3% (previously down 2.5%); 2q09 was down 3.9% in its "advance" estimate.

As noted in the SGS Newsletter No. 51, July marks the 19th month of economic contraction, the longest downturn (based on NBER timing) since the first downleg of the Great Depression. The new string of quarterly GDP contractions, as well as the annual declines of 3.3% and 3.9%, respectively, in the first and second quarters of 2009, are the worst showings in the history of the quarterly GDP series, which goes back to 1947. There was a steeper annual real economic contraction in GDP (annual average series for 1946) reflecting the shutdown of war-time production following World War II, but such is not considered a normal business cycle, and it did not last as long as the current economic downturn has, so far.

As reflected in the better economic indicators (see the most recent newsletter), the recession is ongoing. The second-quarter GDP "improvement" was only in terms of relative quarter-to-quarter growth (1.0% contraction versus a 6.4% contraction in the first quarter), and was needed badly for political and financial-market hype. Keep in mind that this "advance" estimate is roughly 90% guesstimate (only two of three months of trade data are available, for example), and it is the most heavily politicized of the major economic series.

The relatively narrower quarterly contraction in the second quarter reflected the impact of greater weakness being thrown back into the first quarter, in revision, and the use of artificially reduced inflation. The implicit price deflator for the second quarter was 0.2% versus a revised 1.9% (was 2.8%) in the first quarter. The general deterioration in the recent numbers was despite general downside revisions to reported inflation and a general pattern of accelerating growth in revised nominal GDP levels versus prior levels, revisions that reflect the Pollyanna Creep of the latest methodological shifts in the GDP reporting. Details of this will be discussed the special report.

June New Orders for Durable Goods Showed No Signs of Pending Economic Rebound. The general pattern of downside revisions to prior reporting by the Census Bureau was an ongoing feature of the June numbers. The regularly-volatile new orders for durable goods fell by 2.5% (down 3.3% net of revisions) month-to-month, versus a revised 1.3% (was 1.8%) gain in May. In terms of year-to-year change, before any accounting for inflation, June’s new orders were down by 25.0%, following May’s revised annual decline of 25.3% (previously 24.5%). Adjusted for inflation the series would have shown even sharper contractions. Nominal year-to-year change in the series has been holding at a 25% decline, plus or minus a percent or two, since February, having pushed into great depression territory, per SGS definition of a greater than 25% peak-to-trough decline in economic activity. 

The widely followed new orders for nondefense capital goods fell anew in June, down 3.4% (down 4.8% net of revisions) on a month-to-month basis, following May’s downwardly revised monthly gain of 9.1% (was 10.0%). Year-to-year, June orders were down by 26.7%, versus a revised May annual decline of 29.6% (previously down by 28.6%).

These series are leading indicators to economic activity and signal no pending rebound.

July Broad Money Supply Growth Continues to Stall.  Based on data available so far for the month (somewhat shy of three weeks), the seasonally-adjusted SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for July appears headed for a month-to-month decline, with annual growth slowing to below 5.5%, versus the 6.4% annual growth estimated for June. Such particularly reflects declining weekly levels of M2 and of institutional money funds. The continued slack in broad money growth continues to highlight an intensifying systemic solvency crisis and an intensifying downturn in economic activity (irrespective of any recovery mania generated by poor-quality GDP reporting.

In terms of the monetary base — the Fed’s primary tool, in theory, for affecting the money supply — year-to-year change eased minimally to 94.6% in the two-week period ended July 29th, down from 95.7% in the prior two-week period. The monetary base consists basically of currency in circulation plus bank reserves. Annual growth in required reserves, however, continued to rise, up by 53.2% in the latest period, versus 49.7% in the prior two-week period. These data are a week advanced on money supply reporting.

Week Ahead: July Employment and Unemployment.  Due for release next Friday (August 7th), the July employment and unemployment surveys are expected to show a respective monthly decline of 333,000 (versus a 467,000 drop in June), with unemployment rising to 9.6% from 9.5%, per Briefing.com. Underlying series would suggests significantly worse results, but unusual seasonal-factor distortions could bring a reported — albeit false — reported decline in the unemployment rate.

As discussed in SGS Newsletter No. 51, disrupted patterns of regular auto-industry shutdowns for model-year-change retooling terribly skewed seasonally-adjusted new claims for unemployment insurance, reducing levels to a point of triggering "economic recovery" hype. The worst of the distortions took place in the same week as the household (unemployment) survey, and the same seasonal-pattern distortions may play out in the July unemployment rate and could affect payroll employment to a lesser extent. If it does, look out for sharp negative movements in the August data.

Otherwise, underlying data are consistent with a monthly July jobs loss in excess of 600,000, and a further increase in the unemployment rate. The only new data of significance since the publication of the last newsletter was yesterday’s (July 30th) release of June newspaper help-wanted advertising (Conference Board), which held at its record-low reading of 10. June was down by 41.5% year-to-year on a three-month moving average basis, versus a 42.6% decline in May. Any meaningful change in the prospects for the July reporting of employment conditions will be advised by a separate Flash Update.

 ____

Flash Update

Tuesday, July 28th, 2009

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 FLASH UPDATE

July 28, 2009

__________

Depression Data Distortions Fuel Recovery Mania

Statistically Insignificant Monthly Changes amidst Severe Bottom Bouncing

Foreclosures Warp New and Existing Home Sales

Shy of a Political Fix, Second-Quarter GDP Consensus Is Too Optimistic

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next posting should be a Flash Update following Friday morning’s (July 31st) release of "advance" second-quarter GDP and the GDP grand benchmark revisions. A special report on the restated GDP will follow within a day or so of the published revisions. Any interim Flash Update or Alert would be published as dictated by developing economic or financial-market circumstances.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

The Depression Continues to Unfold, Including Housing. In line with the discussion in the "Depression-Induced Economic Reporting Distortions" of the Opening Comments section of last week’s newsletter, the recent reports of surging home sales are little more than Wall Street, Administration and media hype, overplaying results of limited-quality series plateauing at historic lows. 

Consider the "recovery mania" surrounding new houses sold in June, for example (see also hyped expectations below on second-quarter GDP in the Week Ahead section). First, in this highly volatile series, the monthly gain of 11.0% was not statistically meaningful, +/- 13.6% (90% confidence interval as published in the Census Bureau release) or with the 95% confidence interval as usually cited by SGS of +/- 16.1%. 

Despite all the hoopla of the monthly home sales growth being the strongest in nearly nine years, the Census Bureau’s release noted that the "90% confidence interval includes zero. The Census Bureau does not have sufficient statistical evidence to conclude that the actual change is different from zero."

Second, at work here is a case of severe bottom bouncing. In 2004 and 2005, average new home sales were over 1.2 million per year. The annual rate for the last eight months has averaged 70% less, 356,000 +/- 30,000; that is also the three-month moving average for June (the moving average helps to smooth the volatile monthly numbers). June was 384,000 on a standalone basis.  The accompanying graph shows the monthly level of new house sold since 2004.

 

 

The month-to-month June gain of 11.0% (12.3% net of revisions) followed a revised 2.4% gain (previously a -0.6% contraction) in May. Year-to-year contraction narrowed to 21.3% from a revised 32.0% (was 32.8%) decline in May. Third, reflecting depression-induced distortions, annual contraction was so severe a year ago, that current year-to-year contractions reflect only a plateauing of housing activity at historic lows, not an upturn or turnaround in economic activity.

 Fourth, the numbers reported for new houses sold have been disrupted by foreclosure activity.

Foreclosures Warp Reporting of New and Existing Home Sales. As shown in the second graph, the fall-off in existing home sales also is plateauing (has been for over a year). In 2005, existing home sales averaged 7.1 million. In the last eight months, sales have averaged 34% less at 4.7 million +/- 200,000. July sales were reported up by 3.6% month-to-month, down 0.2% year-to-year (again reflecting plateauing).

 

The reporting entity here, the National Association of Realtors (NAR), however, also has attempted recently to estimate the portion of sales forced by foreclosure activity. With foreclosures running between 30% and somewhat over 50% of total activity in recent months, the monthly and annual changes in existing home sales are particularly difficult to assess in terms of economic activity, as sales likely would have been less without the foreclosures. The short red line on the existing home sales graph reflects the imputed homes sales based on the NAR estimates, but I would hesitate to draw any more of a conclusion from the numbers than existing home sales, net of foreclosures, would be in the annualized two-to-three million range.

Separately, the Census Bureau acknowledges that there also is a portion of new home sales that reflects foreclosures, but the impact of same is not surveyed and likely is relatively smaller than the impact on new home sales.

In summary, given the patterns of ongoing low activity, year-to-year distortions, and the warping influence of foreclosures, there is little in the housing numbers, at present, that can be used to anchor claims of rebounding economic activity.

 

Consumer Confidence Remains Deep in RecessionTerritoryConsumer confidence continues to be swayed easily by the tone of the popular media towards the state of economy and the financial markets, so the July monthly declines are not good news for the recovery mania. While year-to-year change has turned more positive/less negative, such is due only to the extreme lows seen last year. The monthly levels remain deep in traditional recession territory.

This morning’s (July 28th) Conference Board July 2009 Consumer Confidence measure fell by 10.2% on top of an unrevised 10.0% decline in June. Year-to-year change for the three-month moving average was a decline of 6.4% versus a drop of 15.7% in June.

The Reuters/University of Michigan’s Consumer Sentiment measure fell by 6.8% in July, following a 3.1% increase in June. Year-to-year change in the Sentiment three-month moving average was up by 15.8% in July, versus a 14.3% gain in June.

As noted in last week’s newsletter, annual comparisons here still are against extremely weak readings the year before, tied to soaring gasoline prices. As renewed economic and inflation concerns get aired before the public, and as the stock market’s luster fades anew, the confidence numbers are likely to tumble even more sharply, again, in the months ahead.

Week Ahead: New Orders for Durable Goods.  Due for release on tomorrow (Wednesday, July 29th), the highly volatile new orders for durable goods series should show a continued sharp fall-off, irrespective of the direction of the month-to-month change.

Gross Domestic Product. As discussed in the GDP (Reporting Perspective) section of last week’s newsletter, a grand-scale benchmark revision to the national income accounts (which include the GDP) will accompany the release of the "advance" estimate of second-quarter GDP growth on Friday (July 31st). While economic history for the last couple of years should be rewritten to show a longer and deeper GDP downturn than previously reported, the media and the markets likely will concentrate on the headline second-quarter number, which is expected to show an annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) contraction of 1.5% (per Briefing.com), much narrowed from the first quarter’s 5.5% decline.

Key underlying economic series suggest some narrowing of the annualized contraction rate, but not by that magnitude. Since a 1.5% contraction is well within the statistical margin of error of reporting of the series, some even are suggesting a positive quarter-to-quarter change. A 1.5% quarterly contraction, let alone positive growth, would have to be a political fabrication, which has happened before. 

Quarterly contractions in payrolls and real retail sales were of roughly the same magnitude in the second quarter as in the first quarter, and while second-quarter contraction rates narrowed for industrial production and housing starts. Those declines would support a much deeper quarterly contraction than the consensus estimate. Nonetheless, the consensus estimate will be targeted by the Bureau of Economic Analysis for its "advance" guesstimate.

If there were no prior period revisions to account for (they should be major), and the second quarter showed an annualized 1.5% quarterly contraction rate, the year-to-year real contraction in the second-quarter would hit a post-World War II record low of 3.5%, making the current downturn not only the longest, but also the deepest recession since the Great Depression. As special report will follow Friday’s Flash Update, as soon as is practicable.   

 

______

 

 

Newsletter (Issue No. 51)

Monday, July 20th, 2009

Issue Number 51

July 20, 2009

The usual four sections of the Newsletter are available as separate web-pages as well as individual PDF documents.  The Newsletter also remains  available in its entirety as a single, large PDF document.

We strongly recommend that when making a printed copy of the newsletter (in part or whole) you use the PDF version.  If your computer does not yet handle PDFs, we urge you to download the free, Adobe Acrobat reader.

Newsletter as a Single PDF

Newsletter by Section:

Section 1. Overview   (PDF)  (HTML)

Section 2. Markets Perspective  (PDF)  (HTML)

Section 3. Reporting Perspective    (PDF)  (HTML)

Section 4. Reporting/Market Focus   (PDF)  (HTML)

 ___________________________________________

 

CHANGES TO THE NEWSLETTER AND UPDATES: Shortly, we will advise specifics of some planned changes to the SGS newsletter and updates, including enhanced features on data and market updates. We will invite subscriber input and thoughts. Subscribers will receive an e-mail with details.

PLEASE NOTE: An SGS special report will follow as soon as practicable after the grand-benchmark revisions to the GDP planned for Friday, July 31st. Also pending is an update to the Hyperinflation Special Report of April 8, 2008.  Intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted in response to key economic and/or financial-market developments or as otherwise needed to note any update to the broad general outlook.

Earlier editions of the SGS writings and Special Reports referenced in the text can be found on the Archives tab at www.shadowstats.com.

 
 
 
___________________________________________

 State-by-State Unemployment Rate Estimates for June 2009

Headline (U-3), BLS Broadest (U-6) and SGS Alternative Measures
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
State Ranked by
Unemployment Rate (%)
 
 
Unemployment Rate (%)
SGS-Alt/U-6
U-3
U-6
SGS-Alt
 
State
U-3
U-6
SGS-Alt
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Michigan
15.2
26.3
32.9
 
Alabama
10.1
16.1
20.0
Oregon
12.2
22.0
27.5
 
Alaska
8.4
13.9
17.4
Nevada
12.0
20.9
26.1
 
Arizona
8.7
15.3
19.1
California
11.6
20.9
26.0
 
Arkansas
7.2
13.7
17.0
South Carolina
12.1
20.3
25.4
 
California
11.6
20.9
26.0
Rhode Island
12.4
20.2
25.2
 
Colorado
7.6
13.7
17.2
Florida
10.6
19.2
23.9
 
Connecticut
8.0
13.9
17.4
Ohio
11.1
18.8
23.5
 
Delaware
8.4
14.3
17.9
Tennessee
10.8
18.5
23.1
 
D.C.
10.9
16.0
20.0
North Carolina
11.0
18.4
23.0
 
Florida
10.6
19.2
23.9
Indiana
10.7
18.0
22.4
 
Georgia
10.1
17.3
21.6
West Virginia
9.2
17.9
22.4
 
Hawaii
7.4
15.2
19.0
Illinois
10.3
17.5
21.9
 
Idaho
8.4
15.3
19.1
Kentucky
10.9
17.5
21.9
 
Illinois
10.3
17.5
21.9
Georgia
10.1
17.3
21.6
 
Indiana
10.7
18.0
22.4
Washington
9.3
16.8
21.0
 
Iowa
6.2
11.0
13.7
National Average
9.5
16.5
20.6
 
Kansas
7.0
11.8
14.7
Alabama
10.1
16.1
20.0
 
Kentucky
10.9
17.5
21.9
D.C.
10.9
16.0
20.0
 
Louisiana
6.8
10.3
12.8
Wisconsin
9.0
15.8
19.7
 
Maine
8.5
15.5
19.3
New Jersey
9.2
15.7
19.6
 
Maryland
7.3
12.2
15.3
Maine
8.5
15.5
19.3
 
Massachusetts
8.6
14.1
17.6
Arizona
8.7
15.3
19.1
 
Michigan
15.2
26.3
32.9
Idaho
8.4
15.3
19.1
 
Minnesota
8.4
14.6
18.2
Hawaii
7.4
15.2
19.0
 
Mississippi
9.0
14.5
18.1
Missouri
9.3
14.8
18.5
 
Missouri
9.3
14.8
18.5
New York
8.7
14.6
18.3
 
Montana
6.4
11.3
14.1
Minnesota
8.4
14.6
18.2
 
Nebraska
5.0
9.2
11.4
Mississippi
9.0
14.5
18.1
 
Nevada
12.0
20.9
26.1
Delaware
8.4
14.3
17.9
 
New Hampshire
6.8
13.2
16.4
Massachusetts
8.6
14.1
17.6
 
New Jersey
9.2
15.7
19.6
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
State-by-State Unemployment Rates for June 2009 (continued)
Headline (U-3), BLS Broadest (U-6) and SGS Alternative Measures
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
State Ranked by
Unemployment Rate (%)
 
 
Unemployment Rate (%)
SGS-Alt/U-6
U-3
U-6
SGS-Alt
 
State
U-3
U-6
SGS-Alt
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Pennsylvania
8.3
14.0
17.5
 
New Mexico
6.8
13.3
16.6
Alaska
8.4
13.9
17.4
 
New York
8.7
14.6
18.3
Connecticut
8.0
13.9
17.4
 
North Carolina
11.0
18.4
23.0
Colorado
7.6
13.7
17.2
 
North Dakota
4.2
7.7
9.6
Texas
7.5
13.7
17.1
 
Ohio
11.1
18.8
23.5
Arkansas
7.2
13.7
17.0
 
Oklahoma
6.3
10.4
12.9
New Mexico
6.8
13.3
16.6
 
Oregon
12.2
22.0
27.5
New Hampshire
6.8
13.2
16.4
 
Pennsylvania
8.3
14.0
17.5
Virginia
7.2
13.0
16.3
 
Rhode Island
12.4
20.2
25.2
Vermont
7.1
12.6
15.8
 
South Carolina
12.1
20.3
25.4
Maryland
7.3
12.2
15.3
 
South Dakota
5.1
9.6
12.0
Kansas
7.0
11.8
14.7
 
Tennessee
10.8
18.5
23.1
Montana
6.4
11.3
14.1
 
Texas
7.5
13.7
17.1
Iowa
6.2
11.0
13.7
 
Utah
5.7
9.6
12.0
Wyoming
5.9
11.0
13.7
 
Vermont
7.1
12.6
15.8
Oklahoma
6.3
10.4
12.9
 
Virginia
7.2
13.0
16.3
Louisiana
6.8
10.3
12.8
 
Washington
9.3
16.8
21.0
South Dakota
5.1
9.6
12.0
 
West Virginia
9.2
17.9
22.4
Utah
5.7
9.6
12.0
 
Wisconsin
9.0
15.8
19.7
Nebraska
5.0
9.2
11.4
 
Wyoming
5.9
11.0
13.7
North Dakota
4.2
7.7
9.6
 
National Average
9.5
16.5
20.6
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes: U-3 is the headline unemployment rate. U-6 is the broadest BLS measure and includes
marginally-attached workers (encompassing short-term discouraged workers) and those
employed part time for economic reasons. SGS-Alt is the alternative unemployment rate
estimated by ShadowStats.com. It includes an estimate of long-term discouraged workers
(those who have not looked for work in more than one year), who were defined out of
existence in the 1994 overhaul of unemployment surveying. Data are seasonally adjusted.
The break out by state for U-6 and SGS-Alt are estimates made by ShadowStats.com
 
Sources: ShadowStats.com, Bureau of Labor Statistics.
 
 
 
(c) 2009 ShadowStats.com, American Business Analytics and Research LLC
 
 

Flash Update

Wednesday, July 15th, 2009

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

July 15, 2009

 __________

Inflation Accelerates (Annualized June Rate of 9.3%)

June CPI-U Annual Deflation of 1.4%
Versus SGS-Alternate Estimate of 6.1% Inflation

Quarterly Production and Real Retail Sales Contractions
Confirm Ongoing Recession

__________

 PLEASE NOTE: The next posting should be the full SGS Newsletter, within the next several business days. Any interim Flash Update or Alert would be published as dictated by developing economic or financial-market circumstances.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 Ongoing Recession and Inflation. On the economic front, quarterly contractions continued in key series. Annualized quarter-to-quarter change (the way headline GDP growth is reported) was negative for both industrial production and real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales. The contraction in second-quarter industrial production was 11.6%, versus a 19.1% contraction in the first quarter. The contraction in real second-quarter retail sales was 3.0%, versus a 3.1% contraction in the first quarter. While recent GDP reporting never fully reflected what was happening in these underlying series, upcoming benchmark revisions should show the current downturn to have been much longer and deeper than has been reported, so far. A narrowing quarter-to-quarter contraction but a deepening year-to-year downturn are fair bets for the gimmicked second-quarter GDP "advance" estimate, due for release on July 31st, along with the benchmark revisions.

On the inflation front, annualized quarter-to-quarter change in the CPI-U rose to 3.3% in the second quarter, from 2.2% in the first quarter. The annualized seasonally-adjusted inflation rate for June was 9.3%.

Oil Price Gyrations Promise Higher Inflation Ahead. The slight upside reporting surprise (0.7% versus 0.6% consensus per Briefing.com) in the June CPI was not enough to reverse the slide in the declining year-to-year change in the CPI-U, but it slowed it. There were quirks in the reporting. The downward trend in the annual decline in the Chain-Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) actually reversed, so that the C-CPI-U now shows less-negative annual inflation than the CPI-U. Also, unusual distortions in the monthly seasonal adjustments suggest the seasonally-adjusted CPI-U should have risen by 0.8% instead of the reported 0.7%.

Irrespective of unusual number crunching in the latest reporting, ongoing shifts in oil prices promise higher reported inflation in the months ahead. While oil prices have pulled back some in July, and gasoline prices have backed off their late-June highs, such also happened last year. Oil hit a record-high closing price of $145.66 on July 11, 2008 (West Texas Intermediate spot closing price), and the ensuing price collapse has muted inflation reporting ever since. Although oil is off its recent near-term highs, it likely does not face the relative magnitude of losses seen in the last half of 2008. With heavy selling pressure on the U.S. dollar still in the offing, a general upside pressure on dollar-denominated oil prices also should be seen in the months ahead. As a result, stronger relative year-to-year performance in oil prices and related energy costs would tend to spike year-to-year inflation measures. Where the regular seasonal adjustments that have reduced the impact of rising gasoline prices in recent months largely washed out in June, they will spike monthly inflation in the next several months, even in the absence of significant gasoline price increases.

 CPI-U.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported this morning (July 15th) that the seasonally-adjusted June CPI-U (Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers) rose by 0.74% (up by 0.86% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, versus a gain of 0.10% (up by 0.29% unadjusted) in May.  Unadjusted year-to-year inflation declined further (formal deflation), down by 1.43% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) in June, versus a 1.28% contraction in May. 

The reported June CPI-U year-to-year decline was largest since January 1950.  I estimate, however, that CPI reporting methods used in 1950 would generate a reported current inflation rate of roughly 6% (see Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures below).

For those interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I continue to refer you to CPIwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in July 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.72% adjusted monthly increase seen in July 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from June’s annual inflation rate of negative 1.43%. Annual CPI-U should be near or at its trough for the current cycle, with accelerating upticks in annual inflation likely starting in the next month or two.

CPI-W.  The BLS reported that the narrower, seasonally-adjusted June CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) rose by 0.92% (1.05% unadjusted), following a 0.13% (0.41% unadjusted) increase in May.  Year-to-year, CPI-W inflation declined by 1.98% in June, following a 1.89% decline in May.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — fell by 1.26% in June, versus a 1.38% decline in May. The narrowing of the annual negative inflation rate and a less-negative annual inflation rate than shown in the CPI-U suggest reporting problems within the various CPI series.   

Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth eased to roughly 1.9% in June versus 2.0% in May, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, held even or softened slightly at about 6.1% (6.05% for those using the extra digit), versus 6.1% (6.15% with a rounding difference to the first decimal point) in May. The new numbers have been updated on the Alternate Data tab and Inflation Calculator at www.shadowstats.com.  The alternative numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where estimated impact has not been published by the BLS.

Real Retail Sales.  Updating the July 14th Flash Update, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted June retail sales declined by 0.09% (up by 0.65% before inflation adjustment) for the month, versus a revised 0.37% (previously 0.36%) gain in May (up by 0.47% before inflation adjustment). Year-to-year, June real retail sales fell 7.89% (8.99% before inflation adjustment), versus a revised 8.83% (previously 8.63%) decline in May, which was a drop of 9.75% before inflation adjustment.

Smoothed for monthly volatility on a three-month moving-average basis, the June and May real annual declines were 8.73% and 9.13%, respectively. Since December 2008, annual decline in the moving average has held around 9%, a record low for the two historical retail series of the post-World War II era. The pattern here of annual growth leveling off at an historically low level is being repeated in other series, such as housing starts. Such reflects the effects of a protracted period of economic decline, not a turnaround in economic activity.

Depression in Industrial Production Continues. The Federal Reserve reported that seasonally-adjusted June industrial production fell by 0.4% for the month, after a revised 1.2% (previously 1.1%) decline in May.  Year-to-year contraction in activity deepened to 13.6% in June from the revised 13.5% (was 13.4%) tumble in May. Such set a new record low for annual production growth since the shutdown of war-time production after World War II.

With annual change down 13.6% and with a peak-to-trough (June is the short-lived current trough) contraction at 15.1%, the industrial sector of the economy (including manufacturing, mining and utilities) continued in depression. A depression is defined (SGS) as a recession where the peak-to-trough economic contraction exceeds 10%.

As previously noted, since the index of industrial production was introduced in 1919, there have been four down cycles worse than what has been seen so far in the current downturn. In each instance, the trough reflected an annual decline somewhat in excess of 30%. Those four cycles were: (1) the post-war production shut-down following World War II; (2) and (3) the double dip of the Great Depression; (4) the post-World War I and post-Panama Canal production shutdowns in the early 1920s.

__________

Flash Update

Tuesday, July 14th, 2009

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

July 14, 2009

__________

June Retail Sales Gain Due to Rising Inflation

"Core" Monthly Retail Sales Rose 0.26% versus Total 0.65%

PPI Inflation Surge Reflects More Than Oil Prices
Annual Change Reverses Direction of 10-Month Downtrend

Gross Federal Debt Up More Than $2 Trillion Year-to-Year

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update is tomorrow, Wednesday, July 15th, following the release of the June CPI and industrial production reports. The pending newsletter will follow within a day or so of the CPI report, fully updated for the latest economic releases.  

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 June Retail Sales Gain Primarily Due to Inflation. As reported this morning (June 14th) by the Census Bureau, seasonally-adjusted June retail sales showed a borderline-statistically-significant monthly increase of 0.6% (0.65% to the second decimal point, 0.63% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a revised 0.47% (previously 0.46%) monthly gain in May. On a year-to-year basis, June retail sales fell by 8.99%, versus a revised 9.75% (previously 9.56%) plunge in May. With monthly volatility smoothed by a three-month moving average, the nominal (not-adjusted for inflation) June year-to-year contraction of 9.6% remained close to its nadir for post-World War II reporting. As noted below, with consensus expectations (Briefing.com) for roughly a 0.6% monthly gain in the June CPI-U, any reporting close to that would wipe out the bulk of the reported nominal monthly gain in retail sales, after adjustment for inflation.

Core Retail Sales.  Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — rose by 0.26% (0.23% net of revisions in June, following a revised 0.04% (previously 0.15%) increase in May. Those numbers contrasted with the official aggregate gain of 0.65% in June and a gain of 0.47% in May.  

Real Retail Sales.  Inflation- and seasonally-adjusted June retail sales likely were flat or possibly declined on a monthly basis, and they certainly declined on both a quarterly and annual basis. The details will be published in tomorrow’s Flash Update following release of the June CPI-U. Keep in mind that GDP growth is measured in real (inflation-adjusted) terms.

Producer Price Surge Included More Oil Price Rise. Consistent with upturns in the June purchasing managers surveys’ prices-paid indices, June producer prices rose sharply for the month, while a pattern of softening gains and deepening declines in annual price changes reversed for the first time since last July. As reported today (July 14th) by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted producer price index (PPI) rose in June by 1.8% (1.9% before seasonal adjustment), following a gain of 0.2% (0.5% before seasonal adjustment) in May. The so-called "core" inflation rate — net of food and energy costs — also spiked, up by 0.5% for the month, versus a 0.1% contraction in May. Year-to-year, what had been an intensifying contraction in PPI inflation began to reverse, with June prices down by 4.6% from the year before, versus an annual decline of 5.0% in May.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted June intermediate goods rose by 1.9% (up by 0.3% in May), with crude goods up by 4.6% (up by 3.6% in May). The decline in year-to-year inflation held even or narrowed slightly, with June intermediate goods down by 12.5% (down by 12.5% in May) and June crude goods down by 40.0% (down by 41.1% in May).

June 30th Federal Debt Up by $244 Billion for the Month, by $2.1 Trillion Year-to-Year. The pace of growth in both federal debt and the gimmicked federal deficit has continued to accelerate, with prospects for both remaining bleak. Rapidly increasing market reluctance to hold U.S. Treasuries eventually will pummel the U.S. dollar and force heavy Fed monetization (overt or covert) of the Treasury’s soaring obligations, along with dire consequences for broad money growth and domestic inflation. 

On the deficit front, the recession continued to take its toll on federal tax revenues, which were down by 17.1% in June 2009 versus June 2008, following a 5.7% annual contraction for May. For the nine months fiscal year-to-date, revenues for 2009 were down by 17.9% from the year before.

Understated by accounting gimmicks used to mute the impact of the banking bailout program, the twelve-month moving deficit through June 2009 was $1,255.2 billion, versus $1,127.3 billion in May and $1,103.6 billion in April. Those numbers contrasted with twelve-month rolling deficits for June, May and April 2008, respectively, of $309.2 billion, $332.5 billion and $334.2 billion.

Accounting changes introduced in April reduced the reporting of outlays for the government’s banking bailout program and continue on an ongoing basis. Before restatement for the new accounting gimmicks, April’s twelve-month moving deficit was $1,278.6 billion, instead of the now-estimated $1,103.6 billion. 

Viewing the change in the level of gross federal debt bypasses most of the regular reporting manipulations of the government’s financial results and provides a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the official, gimmicked deficit reporting. Gross federal debt stood at $11.545 trillion as of June 30, 2009, up by $224 billion for the month, and up by $2,053 billion from June 2008, which in turn was up by $634 billion from June 2007. Gross federal debt stood at $11.322 trillion as of May 31, 2009, up by $83 billion for the month, and up by $1,933 billion from May 2008, which in turn was up by $560 billion from May 2007.

Week Ahead. Repeating the comments of the Flash Update of July 10th, following are the major economic releases still due this week:

Consumer Price Index: Due for release Wednesday (July 15th), the June CPI-U has a shot at seeing a flattening or minor uptick in the annual inflation rate. June’s monthly average gasoline price rose by 15.8% (per the Department of Energy), more than double the 7.6% monthly increase seen in June 2008. The energy-price-depressing seasonal adjustments of recent months washout in June and strongly reverse direction in July and August. Per Briefing.com, where consensus expectations are for about a 0.6% monthly CPI-U gain, there is some upside reporting risk to expectations.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in June 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.93% adjusted monthly increase seen in June 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from May’s annual inflation rate of negative 1.28%.

Industrial Production: Due for release Wednesday (July 15th), June industrial production should show a further monthly decline as well as a deepening annual downturn. The annual 13.4% decline in May was the deepest since war production was shut down at the end of World War II.

Housing Starts: Due for release Friday (July 17th), June housing starts are highly volatile on a month-to-month basis. Any such reported gain or loss likely will not be statistically significant, unless it exceeds plus or minus 20%. Annual decline, however, should remain close to its historic low.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, July 10th, 2009
 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

July 10, 2009

 __________

No Abatement in U.S. Economic or Solvency Crises

May Trade Data Suggest U.S. Business Activity Suffering
More Than Rest of World

Broad Money Growth Slows Anew

New Stimulus and Bailout Packages Likely

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The SGS Newsletter is planned for next week. Irrespective of its actual publication date, a Flash Update is planned for Tuesday, July 14th, after releases of the June retail sales and producer price index reports, as well as for Wednesday, July 15th, following releases of the June consumer price index and industrial production reports. As will be discussed further in the newsletter, an updated hyperinflation report will follow shortly, and there also will be a special report following the July 31st grand benchmark revision to the gross domestic product.

As discussed below, monthly average estimates for June M1, M2 and M3 will be posted over the weekend on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Economic and Solvency Woes Continue. Other than for some patterns of declining annual economic activity plateauing at historically low levels — an artifact of prolonged and severe contractions in business activity, not of an economic bottoming process — those who had been seeing green shoots increasingly are looking at wilted stems or thriving weeds. Nonetheless, while talk of a second economic stimulus package is gaining momentum in Washington, efforts to show and to sell the concept of a stabilizing economy should continue at full force, in a doomed effort to prop consumer and investor confidence artificially. At the same time, slowing growth in the broad money supply suggests that the systemic solvency crisis remains dangerously unsettled.

This morning’s (July 10th) report of an improved trade deficit for the month of May will help in generating a happier "advance" estimate of second-quarter GDP on July 31st. While that estimate, issued in conjunction with a grand-scale benchmark revision of the series back to 1929, should be in the context of a longer and deeper recession than previously reported, the markets rarely are moved by prior-period revisions. Headlines and the markets likely will concentrate on a purported narrowing of the pace of quarterly contraction in the second-quarter GDP.

Likewise, market hype over any spurious short-term "positive" reporting also should remain intense, while the longer term trends should continue to deteriorate. For example, as frequently discussed in previous writings, weekly new claims for unemployment insurance are extremely volatile and usually suffer heavy distortion around holidays, since the Department of Labor cannot adequately adjust same for seasonal variations. Such was the reason behind the sharp weekly drop in claims reported yesterday (July 9th), for the week ended July 4th.

In contrast, next week’s reporting on retail sales, industrial production and housing starts are likely to show historic low-level plateauing or further declines in annual activity, consistent with a deepening economic contraction.

Separately, if the May trade data were to be believed, rising exports and falling imports are suggestive of relatively worse economic activity in the United States versus activity in the economies of the United States’ major trading partners. Such would add heavily to downside market pressures on the U.S. dollar.

The combination of the economic and solvency issues likely will push U.S. politicians into new stimulus and bailout packages, regardless of criticism from major holders of U.S. dollars and dollar-denominated assets. Given the traditional six-to-nine month lead time between fiscal stimulus and economic activity, the first stimulus package should be starting to have impact only in the next several months. Nonetheless, a second package likely will be pushed by Congress as members begin to panic over the economy’s likely impact on the 2010 mid-term elections.

With no serious addressing of the structural issues currently impairing business activity, this downturn will be particularly deep and protracted, and it will continue generally to be unresponsive to traditional stimuli. With the credit system still in deep freeze, intensified efforts at systemic liquefaction by the Federal Reserve likely will follow, soon. Heavy Fed monetization of Treasury borrowing for the stimulus packages would have the greatest impact on broad money growth. The Fed’s desire to prevent systemic collapse should trump concerns of waning foreign investment in dollar assets or of looming inflation problems, although ostensibly the Fed is trying to stimulate inflation with its ongoing dollar debasement.

My general outlook remains unchanged.

May Trade Deficit Narrowed Sharply. The Census Bureau and Bureau of Economic Analysis reported this morning (July 10th) that the seasonally-adjusted May trade deficit narrowed to $26.0 billion from a revised $28.8 (was $29.2) billion in April. Exports picked up, while imports eased, despite rising oil prices. Stronger exports suggest strengthening economies abroad, while falling imports suggest weakening demand at home. At work here may be unusual disruptions to merchandise flows from the auto industry’s reorganization.  Also, as was seen in 2008 reporting, significant distortions from less than timely paperwork flows likely is affecting results, again. An import transaction is tallied as of the month that the paperwork makes it into the trade data reporting, not when the import actually occurs. While revisions are made regularly for one month back in time, last year’s reporting showed significant lags (more than one month) that caused a large negative revision to 2008 reporting. As mentioned above, the reported deficit narrowing will be a boost to the initial reporting of the pending second-quarter GDP estimate.  

Annual M3 Growth Likely Slipped into the Mid-6%RangeThe Fed’s information on the banking system remains far from perfect, given the regular major revisions published for the monetary aggregates, and given the large gaps and inconsistencies seen in many series reported with the Fed’s quarterly flow-of-funds data. Revisions and unusual volatility in the last month’s reporting of weekly money supply data have delayed my publishing an initial calculation for the monthly average SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate, which will be posted this weekend on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com, following numbers due for release after the close of the markets, today (July 10th).

Based on available data for the month, M1 should show sharp spikes in both monthly and annual growth, with June annual growth at about 18.4%, versus a revised 15.4% (was 16.2%) in May. M2 showed a small monthly gain, with annual growth rising to about 9.0% in June, versus a revised 8.8% (was 9.0%) in May. M3 likely will be flat month-to-month, with June annual growth around 6.4%, down from 7.1% (previously 7.2%) in May. Such slowing in annual M3 growth often has signaled intensifying systemic liquidity issues. Since M1 is part of M2, and M2 is part of M3, differences in annual growth rates often reflect nothing more than shifts between accounts in the different components. For example declining large time deposits and institutional money funds reflected in June’s non-M2 components of M3 may have shifted to checking accounts, where they would be reflected in stronger relative M1 and M2 growth rates.

In terms of the monetary base — the Fed’s primary tool, in theory, for affecting the money supply — year-to-year change slipped to 89.9% in the two-week period ended July 1st, down from 102.7% in prior two-week period. The monetary base consists basically of currency in circulation plus bank reserves, and the drop in annual growth reflected a decline in excess reserves. Annual growth in required reserves, however, held at 40.9% in the latest period versus 41.4% in the prior two-week period. These data are a week advanced on money supply reporting. It will be interesting to see how the reported decline in excess reserves plays out against recent Treasury auctions.

Week Ahead. Retail Sales: Due for release on Tuesday (July 14th), any monthly gain reported in June retail sales likely will be due entirely to inflation. Accordingly, net of inflation, monthly retail sales should have contracted, with the annual decline holding at its historic low.

Producer Price Index: Due for release Tuesday (July 14th), the June PPI should be boosted by higher oil prices and costs of related goods. As with the CPI, energy-price-depressing seasonal factors of the last several months start to disappear in June. Accordingly, there is some upside risk to expectations (around 0.8% per Briefing.com).

Consumer Price Index: Due for release Wednesday (July 15th), the June CPI-U has a shot at seeing a flattening or minor uptick in the annual inflation rate. June’s monthly average gasoline price rose by 15.8% (per the Department of Energy), more than double the 7.6% monthly increase seen in June 2008. The energy-price-depressing seasonal adjustments of recent months washout in June and strongly reverse direction in July and August. Per Briefing.com, where consensus expectations are for about a 0.6% monthly CPI-U gain, there is some upside reporting risk to expectations.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in June 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.93% adjusted monthly increase seen in June 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from May’s annual inflation rate of negative 1.28%.

Industrial Production: Due for release Wednesday (July 15th), June industrial production should show a further monthly decline as well as a deepening annual downturn. The annual 13.4% decline in May was the deepest since war production was shut down at the end of World War II.

Housing Starts:Due for release next Friday (July 17th), June housing starts are highly volatile on a month-to-month basis. Any such reported gain or loss likely will not be statistically significant, unless they exceed plus or minus 20%. Annual decline, however, should remain close to its historic low.

 

__________

Flash Update

Thursday, July 2nd, 2009

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

July 2, 2009

__________

June Jobs Loss Was 513,000 Net of Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias
Likely Topped 700,000 with Birth-Death Machinations

Payroll Employment Growth Overstatement Could Top 2.5 Million
Per Year with Birth-Death Modeling

Annual Payroll Decline Deepened to 4.2%
Equal to 1958 Trough and Near 1949 Trough

SGS-Alternate Unemployment at 20.6%

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update is for Friday, July 10th, after the release of the May trade report. Any interim Flash Update or Alert would be published as dictated by developing economic or financial-market circumstances.

Happy 4th of July!  – John Williams

June Employment Reporting Showed Ongoing Economic Deterioration. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) released ongoing indications of deteriorating U.S. employment/unemployment conditions in June, with a worse-than-expected 467,000 drop in June payrolls, but a narrower-than-expected rise in unemployment to 9.5%. Net of the Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias (discussed below) and net of distortions built into the reporting by the Birth-Death Model (discussed below), the June jobs loss likely exceeded 700,000.

The severe recession continues to deepen. My broad outlook has not changed; the worst of the financial and economic crises remain ahead of us. Before getting into the detail of the June report, a variety of special considerations are detailed, as directly related to the reporting of employment conditions as well as to broader implications for economic reporting in general.

Birth-Death Model Gives Faulty Upside Boost to Payroll Reporting During Recessions. The Birth-Death Model used by the BLS to adjust for employment changes due to jobs gained or lost by new business creations and failures is structured on a non-recession environment. As a result, it spuriously adds upside monthly biases into the payroll employment reports during economic downturns, enough, perhaps to spike current reported annual payroll growth by more than 2.5 million jobs. This system was introduced in the early 2000s to upgrade the "bias adjustment" system created in the mid-1980s. 

In the wake of underestimated payroll growth coming out of the 1980 to 1982 double-dip recession, the BLS introduced upside bias adjustments to its monthly payroll employment reporting. Blaming its inability to catch jobs created in the formation of new companies, the BLS began adding 120,000 to 160,000 jobs to each month’s seasonally-adjusted report, with the monthly bias level recast every quarter or so. Bad estimates made of payroll growth, in theory, would be corrected in the next year’s benchmark revisions.

The system was not designed to accommodate recessions, but the benchmark revisions tended to show a pattern of fairly consistent overstatement with the annual revisions, regardless of the business cycle. During the reporting cycle covering the 1990 to 1991 recession, a particularly large downward benchmark revision in previously reported payrolls levels was blamed partially on the BLS assuming that companies that had stopped reporting during the recession still were in business, with proportionate payroll employment attributed to them by the BLS. The problem was that much of the non-reporting reflected companies going out of business.

Amidst growing public criticism, the BLS moved to justify the bias factors with the introduction of a "Birth-Death Model." The BLS continued to assign proportionate employment and trends consistent within industry groups to non-reporting companies. It justified not counting jobs losses from business deaths, assuming that they were offset by gains from business creations. The net difference between business births and deaths and related employment changes were estimated based on an average sampling of the prior five years of data. 

The bulk of that modeling was based on periods of economic growth. In recessions, however, more jobs tend to be lost with failed companies than are gained with generally smaller start-up firms. As a result, the average net birth-death adjustment should be a contraction, during a recession, not a positive monthly bias factor. At present, the seasonally-adjusted payroll change starts with an average 75,000-plus upside bias — more than 900,000 per year — before any of the regular monthly sampling of payroll employment is added in. In the present economic downturn, a monthly net loss (with a requisite required net negative bias) of 75,000 jobs from the birth-death impact per month likely would be more appropriate. Such an estimate could be quite conservative, with the 1,800,000 annual swing suggested by the reversal of a 75,000 upside bias to a downside bias, most likely topping 2.5 million. No one can tell for sure, since the numbers available from the BLS just are not that meaningful. Future benchmark revisions eventually should show a more realistic picture.        

Although the published monthly biases are added to the unadjusted numbers, seasonal adjustments have been changed over time to move the monthly impact towards the average seasonally-adjusted 76,000 bias. Had this not happened, monthly changes would be more clearly skewed by the biases, as was evident during the early days of the Birth-Death Model’s use.

Impact of Protracted Economic Contraction on Employment Reporting. As the severe economic contraction rolls into multiple years, various areas of reporting have been or will be affected that could be misinterpreted as signs of economic improvement or that might not be showing the full extent of deteriorating conditions.

Discouraged Workers. Discouraged workers are those who meet all the qualifications for being unemployed, except they have not looked for work in the last four weeks, because there are no jobs to be had where they live. In 1994, this definition was amended to limit discouraged workers to only those who had looked for work in the last year (as opposed to no duration limitation in prior reporting). Accordingly, anyone who has been discouraged now for more than a year — since June 2008 or before — has disappeared from the rolls of the government’s "alternative measures of labor underutilization." The SGS-Alternate Unemployment measure adds in an estimate for those no longer included in the government’s broader reporting.

Ongoing Claims for Unemployment Insurance. Benefits eventually expire, and while the numbers may gyrate with changing government programs, a decline in ongoing unemployment benefits is not an economic positive in the current circumstance.

Furloughed Workers. As seen recently for many State of California employees, for example, an increasingly common circumstance is for employees to be forced to take off days without pay. Such does not impact payroll employment reporting, but it is measured in the broader unemployment measure, U.6, in the category of "total employed part time for economic reasons."    

Year-to-Year Change. As year-to-year numbers shift to assessment against collapsing economic numbers a year ago, year-to-year percent changes will start to show a pattern of plateauing at extremely negative levels. Such is not a sign of pending economic rebound so much as it is an artifact of protracted economic contraction.

Seasonal Adjustments. The extreme economic disruption has altered a variety of traditional seasonal patterns, with a resulting cautionary note that seasonally-adjusted data may be skewed unusually. Year-to-year comparisons help to mitigate such distortions.

June Reporting Showed Minimal Revisions. This morning’s (July 2nd) report showed minimal revisions, but it may have been subject to unusual seasonal-factor distortions, given the impact of the severe recession, the normal sharp swings in employment tied to the end of the school year, and the BLS’s inability to adequately adjust for same.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 467,000 (down 459,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for June 2009, following a revised 322,000 (previously 345,000) jobs loss in May.

From peak-to-current (the peak month was December 2007; the current month of June also is the short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment has declined by a seasonally-adjusted 6,460,000 jobs, or 4.7%. Year-to-year contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls continued to deepen, down 4.22% in June versus a revised 3.96% (was 4.00%) in May.

The unadjusted annual decline in June payrolls was the deepest since a similar decline at the trough of the 1958 recession, but still shy of the 4.9% trough seen in the 1949 downturn. When the 1949 annual low growth is broken, possibly next month, the annual percentage contraction in payrolls will be the most severe since the production shutdown following World War II (see the accompanying graph).  

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias. The pattern of impossible biases being built into the headline monthly payroll employment continued, with an upside bias of 46,000 jobs in June 2009 reporting (see the accompanying graph). Instead of the headline jobs loss of 467,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what I call the concurrent seasonal factor bias (CSFB) — would have shown a more-severe monthly jobs loss of about 513,000. This pattern has generated an upside reporting bias seen in 10 of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 1,210,000. A worksheet on this is available upon request. (See SGS Newsletter No. 50, for further background.)

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. As discussed in the prior Birth-Death Model section, the biases from this process tend to overstate monthly jobs gains. Never designed to handle the downside pressures from a recession, the model adds a fairly consistent upside bias to the payroll levels each year, currently averaging about 76,000 jobs per month. The unadjusted June 2009 bias was 185,000, up from 165,000 the year before, but down from 220,000 in May.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed June employment fell by 374,000, after falling by a reported 437,000 in May. At work here continue to be poor quality seasonal adjustments.

The June 2009 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-insignificant increase, to 9.51% +/- 0.23%, from 9.36% in May.  Unadjusted U.3 rose to 9.7% in June, from 9.1% in May.  The broader June U.6 unemployment rate rose to an adjusted 16.5% (16.8% unadjusted), from 16.4% (15.9% unadjusted) in May. The less-than-proportionate seasonally-adjusted increase in the U.6 measure, versus the U.3 measure, again reflected seasonal factor distortions.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the bulk of the discouraged workers. Adding them back into the total unemployed — unemployment in line with common experience — as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure, rose to about 20.6% in June, versus 20.5% in May. Updated graph and data have been posted to the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com.

Week Ahead. Trade Deficit: Consensus expectations are for minor deterioration in the May trade deficit versus April, per Briefing.com, due for release next Friday (July 10th). Chances remain fair for a worse-than-expected number, given a likely accelerating catch-up in rising oil price costs and the impact of same on imports.

 

_______

Flash Update

Tuesday, June 30th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - June 30, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

June 30, 2009

 

__________

 

Leading Employment Indicators Suggest Continued Deterioration

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next Flash Update is planned for Thursday (July 2nd), following the release of the June employment/unemployment data. Any other interim Flash Update or Alert would be published as dictated by developing economic or financial-market circumstances.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Based on Underlying Indicators, June Employment /Unemployment Should Disappoint Market Expectations.  Due for release on Thursday (July 2nd), the June employment situation report is expected to show moderating deterioration, per Briefing.com, with the monthly payroll loss widening to about 370,000 versus a 345,000 loss reported in May, and further widening in the unemployment rate to 9.6%, versus 9.4% in May. From the standpoint of political and financial-market needs, results near or better-than consensus would be consistent with the current hype that "the economy has turned." The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) can bring in the headline numbers anywhere that it desires, so odds have to favor such reporting, net of any prior-period revisions.

That said, underlying employment indicators continue to show deteriorating circumstances, consistent with a payroll jobs loss of much greater than 500,000 and an unemployment rate increase of more than 0.2%. Complicating this month’s reporting is the end of the school year, which the BLS traditionally has had difficulty with, in terms of adjusting for regular seasonal variations.   

Further, the Birth-Death Model, which adds in a seasonally-adjusted average upside monthly bias of 90,000 jobs, likely will show a monthly upside gain of about 209,000 against 165,000 last year, on an unadjusted basis. With continuing indications of seasonal-factor problems in the BLS reporting, the impact of that adjusted monthly upside bias could be significantly higher than the 90,000 average, moderating the reported level of monthly decline in payrolls. The nature of the Birth-Death Model, and why it tends to mitigate reported jobs losses during recessions, will be detailed in Friday’s update.  

Employment Environment. The better-quality underlying employment series are discussed below. All are leading indicators to the June jobs report, and most are leading indicators to the ensuing July report. All are showing an extremely negative and still-deteriorating employment environment. Keep in mind that the plateauing of annual change at extremely negative levels just reflects the length of the current downturn, where year-ago comparisons are against numbers that already were in a state of rapid deterioration.  

May newspaper help-wanted advertising (Conference Board) returned to its record-low reading of 10, following an upside revision from 10 to 11 in the April index (March remained at its 58-year low reading of 10). May was down by 42.6% year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis, with the revised annual decline in for April at 43.1%. 

A similar annual fall-off pattern was seen again in the Conference Board’s nascent online help-wanted advertising measure for June, down 36.5% year-to-year, versus a 36.6% annual decline in new online help-wanted ads in May.

Annual growth (positive growth here is an economic negative) in new claims for unemployment insurance has remained near a record level, with the 17-week moving average up by 71.2% as of June 20th, down from the near-term high of 77.0% hit in the period ended May 9th. A year ago, growth was 17.8%. So far, the annual rate of increasing claims has remained just shy of the historical peak growth rate of 78.8% seen in March 1975. 

The June purchasing managers surveys will be published in the week ahead and generally should be weaker than expected by the markets. As reported for May, the employment readings continued deep in recession territory for the manufacturing (May was 34.3 versus 34.4 in April, where readings of 50.0 and above are considered positive) and non-manufacturing (May was 39.0 versus 37.0 in April) purchasing managers surveys.

 

__________

Flash Update

Thursday, June 25th, 2009

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

June 25, 2009

__________

GDP Revisions Little More Than Statistical Noise
But Watch Out for July 31st Benchmark Revisions

Annual Plunge in Durable Goods Orders Continued

Worst of the Downturn Still is Ahead
__________ 

 

 PLEASE NOTE: Other than a brief update to the jobs outlook on Monday or Tuesday (June 29th or 30th), the next Flash Update is planned for Thursday, July 2nd, following the release of the June employment/unemployment data. Any other interim Flash Update or Alert would be published as dictated by developing economic or financial-market circumstances.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Weak Year-Ago Numbers Make Annual Comparisons Look a Little Better. A number of series have started to show some flattening of year-to-year decline, albeit at record low levels. Such can be seen in housing starts, retail sales, durable goods orders and new claims for unemployment insurance, for example. This is the nature of looking at collapsing series, when year-to-year comparisons start going against periods of intense collapse the year before. There still is no signal for rebounding economic activity, only bottom bouncing at historic lows. Even minor relative upturns in annual change are mathematical artifacts of an economy in ongoing decline; they do not reflect an upturn in activity.    

GDP Revisions Were Minimal. This morning’s (June 25th) "final estimate" revision to first-quarter 2009 gross domestic product (GDP) was no such thing. On July 31st, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) will revamp GDP history going back to 1929. The pending revisions will be discussed in the Reporting/Market Focus of the upcoming newsletter (planned within the next couple of weeks). Generally, weaker than previously reported economic activity should surface in the "corrected" data, showing declining quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) GDP that is more coincident with the official recession call by the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), which dates the onset of the downturn to December 2007. At present, reported GDP began contracting in third-quarter 2008. Assuming historical benchmarking patterns are repeated, methodological changes will tend to increase the relative strength and size of earlier historical GDP data.       

Less-Negative Inventory and Trade Changes Give GDP Minimal Relative Boost. The BEA reported the "final" estimate revision of first-quarter 2009 GDP showed an annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) contraction of 5.49% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), narrowed minimally from the "preliminary" estimate of a 5.72% contraction and the "advance" estimate of a 6.14% contraction. Year-to-year change revised to a decline of 2.45%, from the "preliminary" 2.51% and the "advance" 2.62% contractions. The latest first-quarter contraction rate followed a reported annualized decline of 6.34% in fourth-quarter 2008 and a 0.51% contraction in the third quarter. In terms of year-to-year change, the fourth-quarter saw a contraction of 0.84%, following a gain of 0.75% in the third quarter. The first quarter’s annual contraction was the deepest since the third quarter of 1982, while the third-consecutive quarterly contraction was the longest string of consecutive quarterly declines since the 1973/1975 recession. 

The minimal revisions to the data included another increase (less-negative change) in business inventories. Higher than expected inventories often are unwanted and usually lead to production cutbacks and lower future GDP growth, although, once again, the changes and revisions here were not that large. Also the net export account was less negative in revision, despite recent trade data revisions that showed a weaker, not stronger, trade circumstance. Recent downside revisions to key indicators of economic activity generally should be reflected in the upcoming benchmark revisions.

The first-quarter GDP inflation rate (GDP deflator) eased back, again, in revision to an annualized 2.77%, from the "preliminary" 2.80% and the 2.85% in initial reporting. Such contrasted with a 0.61% increase in the fourth quarter and a 3.88% inflation rate in the third quarter.

Based on removal of the effects of some reporting gimmicks and unfortunate methodological changes of recent decades, the SGS-Alternate GDP estimate for first-quarter 2009 is for an annual (not annualized) contraction of roughly 5.1% versus a 4.1% contraction in the fourth quarter, against official respective annual estimated declines of 2.5% and 0.8%. Against reporting of underlying economic series, the annualized quarterly contraction likely was in excess of 8% for the first quarter. Nonetheless, GDP reporting remains virtually worthless and is little more than political propaganda.

Nominal GDP Also Showed Minor Upside Revision. The annualized decline in nominal GDP — GDP not adjusted for inflation, reflective of the way companies book actual sales volume — revised to 2.87%, versus the "preliminary" 3.08% and "advance" 3.47% declines. Such followed a 5.77% annualized contraction in the fourth quarter (the relative improvement reflected higher inflation — see deflator comments above). As noted in prior comments, for the first time since the severe impact of a steel strike in 1957 and 1958, nominal GDP declined for a second consecutive quarter. Year-to-year change in nominal GDP turned negative in the first quarter, down a revised 0.38%, versus earlier estimated contractions of 0.43% (preliminary) and 0.53% (advance). This was the first annual contraction since the second quarter of 1958. Annual growth in fourth-quarter 2008 was a positive 1.21%.     

GDP-Like Measures Revised.  Revised estimates of the BEA’s GDP-like measures for first-quarter 2009, Gross National Product (GNP) and Gross Domestic Income (GDI), were released with this morning’s report.

GNP is the broadest measure of U.S. economic activity (GNP is GDP plus trade in factor income, or interest and dividend payments). First-quarter GNP was reported showing a revised annualized real quarterly contraction of 5.62% (was 5.72%), still deepening slightly versus the fourth-quarter estimate of a 5.59% contraction. Year-to-year, first-quarter GNP declined by a revised 2.38% (was 2.42%), versus a 0.93% contraction in the fourth quarter.

GDI is the income-side equivalent of the GDP’s consumption estimate. As estimated in last month’s reporting, reflecting a sharp reversal in "statistical discrepancy," first-quarter GDI was reported showing an annualized real quarterly contraction of 3.64%, versus a fourth-quarter estimated contraction of 7.78%. Today’s reporting and revision reflected something of a reversal in other trends, showing a deeper 4.31% annualized quarterly contraction in the first quarter. Year-to-year, first-quarter GDI declined by 3.11% (previously down 2.94%), versus a 2.16% contraction in the fourth quarter.

Annual Change in New Orders for Durable Goods Remains in Historic Plunge. Continuing the general pattern of downside revisions to prior reporting by the Census Bureau, the regularly-volatile new orders for durable goods rose by 1.8% (up 1.5% net of revisions) month-to-month in May. Yesterday’s (June 24th) May data followed a revised 1.8% (previously 1.9%) monthly increase in April. In terms of year-to-year change, before any accounting for inflation, May’s new orders were down by 24.5%, following April’s revised annual decline of 26.9% (previously 26.6%). Adjusted for inflation the series would have shown even sharper contractions. Year-to-year change in the series has been holding at a 25% decline, plus or minus a percent or two, since February, having pushed into great depression territory, per SGS definition of a greater than 25% peak-to-trough decline in economic activity.  

The widely followed new orders for nondefense capital goods rebounded in May with a 10.0% (8.8% net of revisions) monthly gain, after falling by a revised 2.9% (was 2.0% in April). Year-to-year, May orders were down by 28.6%, versus a revised April annual decline of 36.2% (previously down by 35.5%).

Home Sales Also Remain in Annual Plunge. With housing starts holding at a record 50% annual contraction, new home sales are not doing much better. The Census Bureau and HUD reported yesterday (June 24th) that May new home sales were down by a statistically insignificant 0.6% (down by 2.8% net of revisions) +/- 21% (95% confidence interval) for the month, following a revised 2.7% (previously 0.3%) increase in April. May homes sales declined by 32.8%, following a revised 35.5% (previously 34.0%) decline in April.

The National Association of Realtors (NAR) estimated that 33% of existing home sales in May (down from 45% in April and down from somewhat more than 50% in March) were distressed (in foreclosure). Such still makes the reported 2.4% monthly gain and 3.6% annual decline in the May sales difficult to assess related to underlying economic activity. There is no easy way to estimate what portion of the foreclosed properties would have otherwise translated into normal home sales, had the forced sales not been present in the market. Safely, the net annual pace of decline would have been much steeper. The NAR also noted a significant problem with pending home sales not closing, due to appraisals coming in too low to support needed financing.

Week Ahead.  June Employment/Unemployment. Due for release on Thursday, July 2nd, the May employment situation should show some widening in monthly payroll loss (345,000 loss reported in May) and further deterioration in the unemployment rate (9.4% in May). Jobs loss should rebound to more than 500,000, but that remains hostage to a difficult financial-market and political circumstance. I have not seen published consensus expectations, yet, but they likely will be consistent the "recovery has started" hype. With little new in related underlying series, I shall put out a quick update on this pending release on Monday or Tuesday of next week.  

 ________

Flash Update

Wednesday, June 17th, 2009

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 FLASH UPDATE

June 17, 2009

__________

May CPI-U Annual Deflation of 1.3%
Versus SGS-Alternate Estimate of 6.1% Inflation

Seasonal Adjustments Continue to Skew Inflation Reporting

May Annual Production Fell at Fastest Pace
Since Post-World War II Production Shutdown

May Annual Decline in Housing Starts Continued Record Fall-Off
Monthly Gain Lacked Statistical Significance

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next Flash Update is planned for Thursday, June 25th, following the "final" estimate revision to first-quarter 2009 GDP. Any interim Flash Update or Alert would be published as dictated by developing economic or financial-market circumstances.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

It’s Largely in the Seasonal Adjustments. The CPI-U through May 2009 has risen at an annualized 4.2% year-to-date, not adjusted for seasonality. Seasonally adjusted, the annualized inflation rate has been 1.5%. Seasonally adjusting inflation remains highly questionable. As noted previously, I never have favored the media’s emphasis on seasonally-adjusted consumer inflation (as opposed to the Bureau of Labor Statistics’ emphasis on the unadjusted series). The adjusted monthly results do not reflect common experience, such as out-of-pocket spending. For example, the Department of Energy reported that May gasoline prices rose by 10.2% from April. Ignoring the difference where BLS surveying concluded that gasoline prices were up 9.6% for the month, the BLS estimate translated into a 3.1% gain, after seasonal adjustment. 

This adjustment pattern, however, tends to washout in June and to reverse in July. Assuming upside pressure continues on gasoline prices for the next several months, which appears likely, seasonally-adjusted monthly CPI-U inflation will begin to pick up sharply in the next several months. 

Also, since February, oil prices have been rising at a higher percent rate of change than they were at the same time last year. Accordingly, the annual decline in the CPI-U should be near a bottom, despite the deepening downturn reported for the last two months.

Serious Inflation — Hyperinflation — Still Ahead. The Fed’s efforts at U.S. dollar debasement have been instrumental in recent dollar weakness, which in turn has contributed to the upside pressure on dollar-denominated oil prices. Irrespective of near-term currency market gyrations and central bank intervention, the dollar ultimately is headed much lower against the major currencies. Such helps to generate inflationary pressures in the United States that are not reflective of strong economic activity.

While the excessive growth in the monetary base (100%-plus year-to-year) only has begun to trickle slowly into the broader money measures, the flow can accelerate sharply and quickly. The weakening dollar and Fed activity aimed at dollar debasement have contributed to declining demand for U.S. Treasuries. With low fundamental investor demand for Treasury securities, the Fed increasingly will have to monetize U.S. Treasury borrowings, whether directly or by stealth (such as Federal Reserve largesse flowing to the Treasury through banks now obligated to and/or controlled by the government), despite official protestations to the contrary. The effect of such monetization flows directly into the money supply, where recipients of the resulting Treasury checks either cash them or put them on deposit in depository institutions. At the same time, there is no offset to the money supply from the funds flowing into the Treasury, because those funds are not coming out of private depository accounts or from bank reserves being used to support same.

As non-demand-driven inflation and money growth begin to pick-up, so too should the velocity of money (see Money Supply Special Report at www.shadowstats.com) and inflation. Risks never have been higher for the onset of a U.S. hyperinflation within a one-year period. While my timing forecast for such an event remains in the range of 2009 to 2014, given where we sit on the calendar, early 2010 looks increasingly dangerous.  

CPI-U.  After two monthly declines in the CPI-U, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported this morning (June 17th) that the seasonally-adjusted May CPI-U turned higher by 0.10% (up by 0.29% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, versus a decline of 0.02% (up by 0.25% unadjusted) in April. For the third month, unadjusted year-to-year inflation declined (formal deflation), down by 1.28% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) in May, versus a 0.74% contraction in April. 

The reported May CPI-U year-to-year decline was largest since April 1950.  I estimate, however, that CPI reporting methods used in 1950 would generate a reported current inflation rate of roughly 6% (see Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures below).

For those interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I continue to refer you to CPIwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in June 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.93% adjusted monthly increase seen in June 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from May’s annual inflation rate of negative 1.28%. Again with heavy upside pressure continuing on oil and gasoline prices, and general selling pressure remaining on the U.S. dollar, annual CPI-U should be nearing its trough for the current cycle, with accelerating upticks in annual inflation likely starting in the next month or two.

CPI-W.  The BLS reported that the narrower, seasonally-adjusted May CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) rose by 0.13% (gained 0.41% unadjusted), following a 0.02% drop (gain of 0.34% unadjusted) in April.  Year-to-year, CPI-W inflation declined by 1.89% in May, following a 1.32% decline in April.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — fell by 1.38% in May, versus a 1.06% decline in April. 

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth eased to roughly 2.0% in May, versus 2.6% in April, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, softened to roughly 6.1% (6.15% for those using the extra digit — there is a rounding difference here to the first decimal point), versus 6.7% in April. The numbers have been updated on the Alternate Data tab and Inflation Calculator at www.shadowstats.com.  The alternate numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where estimated impact has not been published by the BLS.

Real Retail Sales.  Updating the June 11th Flash Update, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted May retail sales increased by 0.36% (up by 0.46% before inflation adjustment) versus a revised 0.21% (previously 0.35%) decline in April (down 0.24% before inflation adjustment). Year-to-year, May real retail sales fell 8.63% (9.56% before inflation adjustment) versus a 9.43% decline in April (10.00% before inflation adjustment).

Smoothed for monthly volatility on a three-month moving-average basis, the May and April annual real declines were 9.05% and 8.85%, respectively. Since December 2008, annual decline in the moving average has held around 9%, a record low for the two historical retail series of the post-World War II era.

Oil Price Impact on Producer Price Index Also Muted by Seasonals. Rising wholesale energy prices were dampened again by BLS seasonal adjustments in May, as released yesterday (June 16th), with the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted producer price index (PPI) rising just 0.2% (0.5% before seasonal adjustment) for the month. Such was against April’s monthly gain of 0.3% (up by 0.6% unadjusted). The BLS data showed an intensifying contraction in year-to-year PPI inflation, with May down by 5.0% versus a 3.7% annual decline in April.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted May intermediate goods rose by 0.3% (down by 0.5% in April), with crude goods up by 3.6% (up by 3.0% in April). The decline in year-to-year inflation intensified, with May intermediate goods down by 12.5% (down by 10.5% in April) and May crude goods down by 41.1% (down by 40.0% in April).

Depression in Industrial Production Deepened. The Federal Reserve reported that seasonally-adjusted May industrial production fell by 1.1% (down 1.3% net of revisions) for the month, after a revised 0.7% (previously 0.5%) decline in April.  Year-to-year contraction in activity deepened to 13.4% in May, from a revised 12.7% (was 12.5%) decline in April, and from a 12.5% decline in March. Such set a new record low for annual production growth since war-time production was shut down after World War II.

With annual change down 13.4% and with a peak-to-trough (May is the short-lived current trough) contraction at 14.8%, the industrial sector of the economy (including manufacturing, mining and utilities) is in depression. A depression is defined (SGS) as a recession where the peak-to-trough economic contraction exceeds 10%.

Since the index of industrial production was introduced in 1919, there have been four down cycles worse than what has been seen so far in the current downturn. In each instance, the trough reflected an annual decline somewhat in excess of 30%. Those four cycles were: (1) the post-war production shut-down following World War II; (2) and (3) the double dip of the Great Depression; (4) the post-World War I and post-Panama Canal production shutdowns in the early 1920s.

Annual Housing Starts Decline Holding at Record 50%. Yesterday’s (June 16th) release of seasonally-adjusted housing starts by the Census Bureau continued to show no meaningful improvement in housing-market conditions.  The highly volatile series showed a statistically insignificant 17.2% (16.2% net of revisions) monthly gain +/-17.6% (95% confidence interval) in May, following a revised 12.9% (was 12.8%) decline in April.  Year-to-year, May housing starts fell by 45.2% +/- 7.3% (95% confidence interval), following April’s 54.6% drop.

Smoothing the series for the reporting volatility seen each month, the three-month moving-average for May was down year-to-year by 49.2% versus 49.9% in April. Since January, the annual decline on the three-month moving average has held between 49% and 50%, the weakest performance in the history of the series. The SGS definition of a great depression is a recession with a peak-to-trough inflation-adjusted contraction in excess of 25%. Peak-to-trough this series stands at an 80.0% contraction, with January 2006 the peak, and the April 2009 reading a short-lived trough. On a moving-average basis, the peak-to-trough decline through the short-lived May 2009 trough is 76.6%.   

Week Ahead.  New Orders for Durable Goods. Due for release on Wednesday, June 24th, the regularly volatile new orders for durable goods series is not likely to show a statistically meaningful month-to-month change, but the year-to-year contraction likely will continue deep in depression/great depression territory.

Gross Domestic Production (GDP). The "final" estimate revision for first-quarter 2009 GDP (due on Thursday, June 25th) is a misnomer, since reporting on July 31st will revise the entire series (including first-quarter 2009) back to 1929. While annual and benchmark revisions to retail sales, industrial production and the trade balance all have suggested weaker first-quarter GDP growth than currently reported, major revisions likely will be seen only as part of next month’s benchmark process. Accordingly, any revisions next week should be little more than statistical noise.

 

__________

Flash Update

Thursday, June 11th, 2009

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

June 11, 2009

 __________

Annual Retail Sales Plunge Worst of Post-World War II Era

May "Core" Monthly Retail Sales Gained 0.15% versus 0.46% Total

Corrected Merchandise Trade Data Added $20 Billion to 2008 Deficit

Annual Surge in Gross Federal Debt Nears $2 Trillion
Spiking Treasury Yields

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update is for Wednesday, June 17th, after the release of the May CPI report. Any interim Flash Update or Alert would be published as dictated by developing economic or financial-market circumstances.  

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

The economy remains in a deep recession, as was confirmed by this morning’s (June 11th) retail sales report. Inflation, however, has started to resurface, as oil and related gasoline prices jump partially in response to a weaker dollar and ongoing dollar debasement by the Federal Reserve. These and other recently reported numbers suggest that the economic assumptions underlying the projections for the federal budget deficit and U.S. Treasury fundings are overly optimistic, with greater than expected budget deficits and Treasury fundings ahead. Accordingly, the broad outlook, as outlined in the last newsletter, remains intact. The weeks ahead will see the next newsletter, as well as an updated Hyperinflation Special Report. Odds continue to mount for an extremely serious inflation problem to unfold within the next year.

Retail Sales Annual Decline (3-Month Moving Average) Worst Ever. As reported by the Census Bureau, seasonally-adjusted May retail sales showed a statistically insignificant monthly increase of 0.46% (0.69% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a revised 0.24% (previously a 0.37%) monthly decline in April. On a year-to-year basis, May retail sales fell by 9.56%, versus a revised 10.00% (previously 10.10%) plunge in April. With monthly volatility smoothed by a three-month moving average, the nominal (not-adjusted for inflation) May year-to-year contraction of 9.68% was worst decline of post-World War II reporting.

Core Retail Sales.  Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — rose by 0.15% (down by 0.01% net of revisions) in May, following a revised 0.21% (was 0.05%) decline in April. Those numbers contrasted with the official aggregate gain of 0.46% in May and decline of 0.24% in April. 

May’s accelerating pace of rising gasoline prices (gasoline station sales) again was muted partially by seasonal-factor adjustments. Such also should be seen in the pending May CPI-U release.  

Real Retail Sales.  Inflation- and seasonally-adjusted May retail sales may have declined on a monthly basis and certainly declined on an annual basis. The details will be published in the Flash Update following the June 17th release of the May CPI-U.

April Trade Balance Deteriorates Amidst Major Revisions. As reported by Bureau of Economic Analysis/Census Bureau, the seasonally-adjusted April trade deficit widened to $29.2 billion from a revised $28.5 (was $27.6 billion) in March. Such reflected some upturn in oil imports, as prices and volume showed minimal catch-up.

Revisions, redefinitions and methodological changes revamped the reported trade deficit back to the beginning of the decade, in advance of the looming, massive benchmark revision to the gross domestic product (GDP) and the national income accounts on July 31st. Implications for GDP revisions will be covered in a separate analysis (generally GDP growth of recent years should be weaker in revision).

Of particular interest, annual revisions recast "carryover" trade flows back into the months they actual took place, from the months in which they were reported. This is an issue I have been mentioning as a likely factor in the recent understatement of the deficit. The corrections restated the 2008 trade deficit from $681.1 billion to $695.9 billion, with the 2008 deficit in merchandise trade revising from $820.8 billion to $840.3 billion. The services sector largely is a guesstimated gimmick that usually overstates the continual surplus shown there, and that is used to offset the merchandise trade deficit to a certain extent.

May 31st Federal Debt Up $1.933 Trillion Year-to-Year. Rapidly mounting federal debt and prospects for an acceleration of same have contributed to increasing market reluctance to hold U.S. Treasuries and the U.S. Dollar. The resulting ongoing rise in long-term interest rates eventually will pull the Federal Reserve further in as the U.S. Treasury securities buyer of last resort, with an accelerating pace of Fed monetization of federal debt, despite Mr. Bernanke’s recent protestations to the contrary.   

Fiscal conditions continued deteriorating in May 2009, following collapsing revenues in April, the traditional big tax collection month. Annual change in revenues for May — traditionally the second softest revenue collection month of the year (after February) — were down by 5.7%, following the annual 34.1% year-to-year decline in April. For the 12 months through May 2009, revenues were down 13.6% from the prior 12-month period, thanks primarily to the intensifying effects of the recession. 

The twelve-month moving deficit through May 2009 was $1,127.3, versus $1,103.6 billion in April and $923.4 billion in March. Those numbers contrasted with twelve-month rolling deficits for May, April and March 2008, respectively, of $332.5 billion, $334.2 billion and $217.1 billion.

Accounting changes in April that reduced reporting of outlays for the government’s banking bailout program were reflected in the preceding data. Before restatement for the new accounting gimmicks, April’s twelve-month moving deficit was $1,278.6 billion, instead of the now-estimated $1,103.6 billion.

Viewing the change in the level of gross federal debt bypasses most of the regular reporting manipulations of the government’s financial results and provides a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the official, gimmicked deficit reporting. Gross federal debt stood at $11.322 trillion as of May 31, 2009, up by $83 billion for the month, and up by $1,933 billion from May 2008, which in turn was up by $560 billion from May 2007.

Week Ahead. Three major series are due for release on Tuesday, June 16th: Housing Starts. This series is highly volatile. Any monthly gain likely will be statistically insignificant, with the annual contraction holding deep in great-depression (down more than 25%) territory. Industrial Production. Expected to show a monthly decline (per Briefing.com), the annual contraction should fall deeper into depression (down more than 10%) territory. Producer Price Index. This highly volatile series should start to show significant upside pressures from rising oil prices.

Consumer Price Index. The May CPI-U is due for release on Wednesday, June 16th. Expectations likely will be for an increased, but still small, monthly gain in inflation, thanks to seasonal adjustments to gasoline prices. There is some upside reporting risk to likely expectations.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in May 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.49% adjusted monthly increase seen in May 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from April’s annual inflation rate of negative 0.74%. With continued heavy upside pressure on oil and gasoline prices, annual CPI-U should be near its trough for the current cycle, although it likely will be June before the annual CPI starts moving higher, once again.

 

__________

Flash Update

Monday, June 8th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - June 8, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

June 8, 2009

 

__________

 

May M3 Money Supply Annual Growth Showed Minimal Uptick

Fed’s Dollar Debasement Continues and Should Intensify

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update is for Thursday, June 11th, after the release of the May retail sales report. Any interim Flash Update or Alert would be published as dictated by developing economic or financial-market circumstances.  

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

May’s SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate at 7.3% Annual Growth. Although annual growth in the broad money supply appears to be on the rise again, the pace of growth still does not reflect the extreme liquefaction of the system attempted by the Fed in its recent doubling of the monetary base. Erratic weekly sluggishness in the major money supply M3 components suggests a continuing severe crisis in the systemic solvency arena, despite what may be an early signal that the system has begun to absorb the orchestrated surge in bank reserves.   

Rising M3 growth is a harbinger of inflation, but earlier and more severe signals of pending price woes have been generated by developing weakness in the U.S. dollar. Largely as result of the Fed’s efforts to debase the U.S. currency, the weak greenback has helped to reignite oil prices and the prospects of higher domestic inflation driven by exogenous factors, not by strong economic activity that might otherwise be responsive to Federal Reserve policies.        

Suggesting the possibility of a near-term April trough in annual M3 money supply growth, the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for May showed year-to-year growth of 7.3%, up from 7.1% in April and versus 8.2% in March. The M1 and M2 monetary aggregates still published by the Federal Reserve Board, and the SGS-Ongoing M3 aggregate based largely on ongoing Fed reporting of major M3 components, all showed upturns in May on both year-to-year and month-to-month bases.  (Note: the May monthly averages are estimated from 25 of 31 days per FRB H.6, and from 27 of 31 days in FRB H.8. Estimates based on full-month reporting will be posted next weekend.)   

May year-to-year growth in M1 is estimated to have risen to 16.4% from 15.9% in April and from 13.8% in March. Year-to-year growth in M2 is estimated to have risen to 9.2% from 8.5% in April and from 9.0% in March. Details have been posted the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com.

The broadest available money supply measure (M3) tends to be the best monetary leading indicator to inflation. The narrowest measure (M1) tends to be a near-term leading indicator to the stock market. (See the Money Supply Special Report available in the right-hand column of www.shadowstats.com for a more detailed discussion).

Fed Maintains Its Dollar Debasement. Despite Mr. Bernanke’s recent protestations that the Fed would not monetize federal debt, and despite misplaced market expectations that the "strengthening" economy will cause the Fed to tighten, draining liquidity from the system, the monetization of federal debt and deliberate dollar debasement continue. Contrary to Wall Street and Administration hype, the worst of the economic downturn and systemic liquidity crisis is ahead of us, not behind us. Out of perceived political and systemic-stability necessity, so, too, is the worst of the Fed’s efforts at dollar debasement. 

In the two weeks ended June 3rd, the St. Louis Fed’s adjusted monetary base (seasonally adjusted) was up 107.7% from the year before, down slightly from the 113.4% annual growth in the prior two-week period. The monetary base (currency plus bank reserves) is the Fed’s primary tool for affecting the money supply. The current surge is due primarily to explosive growth in bank reserves. With 1813.4% annual growth in excess reserves, banks generally are not lending their funds into the normal flow of commerce. Nonetheless, required reserves, which are reflective of certain deposit accounts, still are up 35.1% year-to-year in the June 3rd period, versus 33.4% in the prior period.    

Week Ahead (Details are unchanged from the June 5th Flash Update)Trade Deficit: Consensus expectations are for minor deterioration in the deficit versus March, per Briefing.com, due for release Wednesday (June 10th). Chances are fair for a worse-than-expected number, given the pending catch-up reporting of rising oil price costs and the impact of same on imports.

Retail Sales: Consensus expectations appear to be for a small monthly gain in May retail sales, due for release Thursday (June 11th). Such a result is possible given some eventual bottom-bouncing and rising inflation. The year-to-year contraction, however, will continue to be severe in both nominal and real (unadjusted and adjusted for inflation) terms, with the monthly change a fair bet to be in contraction, net of inflation and reporting revisions.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, June 5th, 2009

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

June 5, 2009

__________

May Jobs Loss Was About 538,000 Net of Biases
Versus 345,000 Official Decline

Birth-Death Model Upside Bias Increased by 27%

Annual Payroll Decline Deepened to 4.0%

SGS-Alternate Unemployment at 20.5%

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: Following a brief update this weekend on the money supply (annual M3 growth still appears likely to increase in May versus April), the next planned Flash Update is for Thursday, June 11th, after the release of the May retail sales report. Any interim Flash Update or Alert would be published as dictated by developing economic or financial-market circumstances.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Employment Reporting Assumptions Shift? The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) released a "mixed" report of U.S. employment/unemployment conditions in May, with a better-than-expected 345,000 drop in May payrolls, which appeared to be aimed at supporting "the recession is over" hype, but a worse-than-expected rise in unemployment to 9.6% told a different story. The recession continues to deepen. It is not over and my broad outlook has not changed. 

The jobs report also reflected upward revisions to March and April reporting, but such were due largely to the gimmicked recasting of seasonal factors each month on top of slightly improved unadjusted data. The concurrent seasonal factor bias (CSFB) narrowed the reported jobs contraction by about 89,000, while the revamped birth-death model likely narrowed the contraction by at least another 104,000 (60,000 usual adjusted average plus 44,000 in new biases). (See separate discussions below.) 

Accordingly, net of these gimmicks, the May nonfarm monthly payroll loss would have been about 538,000, still improved versus a similarly adjusted April, but not within the scope of purported statistical significance. On the downside, year-to-year payroll loss continued to deepen, and the unemployment report showed meaningful deterioration in the broad employment environment. 

There has been a shift in reporting patterns to show upside prior-period revisions in the establishment (payroll) survey, including upside changes to March reporting, which had been revised lower in April’s reporting (successive revisions for a given month usually continue in the same direction). This suggests that the BLS may have shifted internal reporting assumptions, with the effect of generating less-negative numbers. Assumptions include, for example, the handling of companies that fail to report payrolls in the current month (are they out of business or just late in handling paperwork?). There certainly has been a shift to the upside in terms of birth-death model assumptions.

While the household (unemployment) survey easily gets distorted by seasonal factors and definitional quirks, the seasonal factors are not recast every month, as they are in the payroll numbers, and the household survey is a scientifically designed sampling. The BLS claims better sampling accuracy for the household survey, but reporting and revisions of the last year clearly show that not to be the case.  Accordingly, the ongoing deterioration in the household survey should not be ignored by those proclaiming a resurgent economy. The employment and unemployment numbers are coincident, not lagging indicators of broad economic activity.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 345,000 (down 263,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for May 2009, following a revised 504,000 (previously 539,000) jobs loss in April and a revised 652,000 (previously 699,000) jobs loss in March.

From peak-to-current (the peak month was December 2007; the current month of May also is the short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment has declined by a seasonally-adjusted 6,001,000 jobs, or 4.3%. Year-to-year contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls continued to deepen, down 4.00% in May versus a revised 3.78% (was 3.82%) in April. The seasonally-adjusted series also continued contracting year-to-year, down by 3.90% in May versus a revised 3.75% (was 3.81%) in April.

The unadjusted annual decline in May payrolls was the worst since May 1958, as shown in the accompanying graph of year-to-year change in payroll growth. At the current pace of deepening annual decline, by the July 2009 employment report (due for release in August), the annual percentage contraction in payrolls will be the most severe since the production aftershocks following World War II. 

 

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias. The pattern of impossible biases being built into the headline monthly payroll employment resumed, following a one-month lapse, with an upside bias of 89,000 jobs in May 2009 reporting (see the accompanying graph). Instead of the headline jobs loss of 345,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what I call the concurrent seasonal factor bias — would have shown by itself a more-severe monthly jobs loss of about 434,000. This pattern has generated an upside reporting bias in 10 of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 1,254,000. A worksheet on this is available upon request. (See SGS Newsletter No. 50, for further background.)

 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. An increasing distortion that overstates monthly jobs gains is the monthly upside bias factor (birth-death model). Never designed to handle the downside pressures from a recession, the model adds a fairly consistent upside bias to the payroll levels each year, having averaged about 60,000 jobs per month in the year-ended March 2009 (benchmark revision month), assuming that the BLS adequately seasonally adjusts for same. Historically, however, the BLS has had problems with the related seasonals, when there has been a shift in bias amounts. 

Given that the most-recent annual benchmark revision was unusually benign and showed an overstatement of previously reported jobs growth, one would have expected 2009 to 2010 the jobs biases to have been reduced. Instead, the April 2009 bias was 226,000, up from 176,000 the year before, and the May 2009 bias was 220,000, up from 176,000 the year before. Such suggests that the monthly birth-death bias has been increased by roughly 27% from last year, to an average upside bias of about 76,000 jobs per month. 

Accordingly, I have estimated a monthly upside bias for May of 60,000 (the monthly average in place after seasonal adjustment) plus 44,000 (the added bias for May 2009, which likely has not been redistributed over all the months with appropriate seasonal adjustment), for a total of 104,000. I have no argument with those looking to net out the total 220,000 monthly bias; the only issue is seasonal adjustment, and those monthly factors are being played with and revised every month.      

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed May employment fell by 437,000, after rising by a reported 120,000 in April and falling by 861,000 in March. At work here continue to be poor quality seasonal adjustments.

The May 2009 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed another statistically-significant increase, to 9.36% +/- 0.23%, from 8.87% in April and from 8.54% in March.  Unadjusted U.3 rose to 9.1% in May, from 8.6% in April and versus 9.0% in March.  The broader May U.6 unemployment rate rose to an adjusted 16.4% (15.9% unadjusted), from 15.8% (15.4% unadjusted) in April and versus 15.6% (16.2% unadjusted) in March. The less than proportionate seasonally-adjusted increase in the U.6 measure, versus the U.3 measure, again reflected seasonal factor distortions.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the bulk of the discouraged workers. Adding them back into the total unemployed — unemployment in line with common experience — as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure, rose to about 20.5% in May, versus 20.0% in April and 19.8% in March. Updated graph and data have been posted to the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com.

Employment Environment. Based on the better-quality underlying series discussed below (all are leading indicators to the May jobs report and the upcoming June report), and updated for new data since the May 29th Flash Update, the May jobs loss should have exceeded 600,000. It still may end up reflecting such a loss in subsequent revisions.

April newspaper help-wanted advertising held at its record-low reading of 10 for the second consecutive month, down by 44.8% year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. The annual decline in March was a record 45.2%. Similar, deepening annual fall-offs were seen in the nascent online help-wanted advertising measures for April, with the Conference Board reporting a 36.6% annual decline in new online help-wanted ads in May.

Annual growth (positive growth is an economic negative) in new claims for unemployment insurance has remained near a record level, with the 17-week moving average up by 76.1% as of May 30th, down a notch from 76.8% the week before. Such still was shy of the historical peak growth rate of 78.8% seen in March 1975. A month ago, annual growth was 75.8%; a year ago growth was 14.8%.

Mixed versus April reporting, employment readings continued deep in recession territory for the May manufacturing (May was 34.3 versus 34.4 in April, where readings of 50.0 and above are considered positive) and non-manufacturing (May was 39.0 versus 37.0 in April) purchasing managers surveys.

Week Ahead. Trade Deficit: Consensus expectations are for minor deterioration in the deficit versus March, per Briefing.com, due for release next Wednesday (June 10th). Chances are fair for a worse-than-expected number, given the pending catch-up in rising oil price costs and the impact of same on imports.

Retail Sales: Consensus expectations appear to be for a small monthly gain in May retail sales, due for release next Thursday (June 11th). Such a result is possible given some eventual bottom-bouncing and rising inflation. The year-to-year contraction, however, will continue to be severe in both nominal and real (unadjusted and adjusted for inflation) terms, with the monthly change a fair bet to be in contraction, net of inflation and reporting revisions.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, May 29th, 2009

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

May 29, 2009

 __________

Dollar Debasement Progresses

GNP Shows Intensifying Recession

Most Economic Data Show Deepening Annual Plunges
And Downside Prior-Period Revisions

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update is for Friday, June 5th, following the release of the May employment/unemployment report. Any interim Flash Update or Alert would be published as dictated by developing economic or financial-market circumstances.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

U.S. Dollar Remains Key Driver of What Lies Ahead. The U.S. economy and systemic-solvency issues are getting worse, and so are Federal Reserve efforts to debase the U.S. Dollar. Inflation fears appear to be surfacing anew, with the U.S. dollar under selling pressure, with oil prices (and related gasoline prices) spiking partially in response to the dollar, with gold prices rising (partially dollar and safe-haven effect), and with mounting global concerns over the credit worthiness of the United States.

Irrespective of any near-term volatility or short-lived central bank interventions or market manipulations in the pricing of the U.S. currency, oil and gold, the long-term outlook remains for a much weaker dollar, and much higher oil and gold prices. Mr. Bernanke’s dollar-debasement program is helping to fuel the near-term pressure on the greenback, and the resulting higher oil prices are setting the stage for serious non-demand-driven inflation in the United States.

For the two weeks ended May 20th, the St. Louis Fed’s adjusted monetary base was up a record 113.4% from the same period last year, versus a 102.8% gain in the prior two-week period. The monetary base –basically currency plus bank reserves — is the Fed’s primary tool for affecting growth in the money supply. The weekly pace of growth in the still-published components of M3 (M2, institutional money funds, partial large time deposits) has slowed since the comments were published in the May 20th Flash Update, but it has remained strong enough for the year-to-year change in the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for May 2009 to have a fair shot at increasing from the 7.1% pace estimated for April.

The U.S. dollar and U.S. Treasuries effectively are the benchmarks against which sovereign ratings are determined. So long as this remains the case, and so long as the U.S. issues its debt in U.S. dollars, a rating downgrade from "AAA" status is not likely. Ratings usually reflect the risk of default, and so long as the government can run the printing presses to pay its debts, risks of formal default are nil.

Nonetheless, investors increasingly will not want to purchase or hold U.S. Treasuries as federal debt explodes and the hyperinflation threat nears. Ultimately, the Fed will serve as the lender of last resort to the U.S. government, monetizing government debt at an accelerating pace, which in turn will accelerate the pace of decline in the greenback and the pace of increase in U.S. inflation.

Less-Negative GDP Reporting Is Mixed. Gross national product (GNP) is the broadest measure of U.S. economic activity (GNP is GDP plus trade in factor income, or interest and dividend payments). For decades, GNP was the common measure followed on the U.S. economy, until the United States gained the dubious stature of a net debtor. Net-debtor nations tend to show stronger growth in GDP than in GNP, since net payments to creditors do not subtract from reported economic activity. This morning’s (May 29th) initial reporting of first-quarter GNP showed a relative deepening of the recession fourth-quarter 2008 to first-quarter 2009 (annualized GNP contraction deepened from 5.59% to 5.78%), rather than the relative improvement indicated in GDP (annualized GDP contraction narrowed from 6.34% to 5.72%). While magnitudes of the quarterly declines are subject to horrendously large confidence intervals, relative changes have some meaning. Similar assumptions underlie both the GNP and GDP series, but the GDP is the most heavily politicized series, since it is the headline number. In terms of year-to-year change, both GNP and GDP show a deepening recession.    

GDP Reporting Still Underestimates the Economic Downturn. The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) reported the "preliminary" estimate revision of first-quarter 2009 gross domestic product (GDP) showing an annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) contraction of 5.72% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), narrowed from the "advance" estimate of a 6.14% contraction. Year-to-year change revised to a decline of 2.51% versus an initial estimate of a 2.62% drop. The latest first-quarter contraction rate followed a reported annualized decline of 6.34% in fourth-quarter 2008 and a 0.51% contraction in the third quarter. In terms of year-to-year change, the fourth-quarter saw a contraction of 0.84%, following a gain of 0.75% in the third quarter. The first quarter’s annual contraction was the deepest since the third quarter of 1982, while the third-consecutive quarterly contraction was the longest string of consecutive quarterly declines since the 1973/1975 recession. 

The largest revision to the data was an increase (less-negative change) in business inventories. Higher than expected inventories often are unwanted and usually lead to production cutbacks and lower future GDP growth, although the changes and revisions here were not that large. As with the "advance" estimate, today’s revision understated the depth of the downturn. Current reporting likely will suffer negative revisions in the grand benchmark revision due the end of July. Lowered estimates of personal consumption expenditure and business investment would be consistent with the recent showings of more-reliable underlying economic series such as retail sales, industrial production and new orders for durable goods.

The first-quarter GDP inflation rate (GDP deflator) eased back in revision to an annualized 2.80%, versus 2.85% in initial reporting. Such contrasted with a 0.61% increase in the fourth quarter and a 3.88% inflation rate in the third quarter.

Based on removal of the effects of some reporting gimmicks and unfortunate methodological changes of recent decades, the SGS-Alternate GDP estimate for first-quarter 2009 is for an annual (not annualized) contraction of roughly 5.1% versus a 4.1% contraction in the fourth quarter, against official respective annual estimated declines of 2.5% and 0.8%. Against reporting of underlying economic series, the annualized quarterly contraction likely was in excess of 8% for the first quarter. Nonetheless, GDP reporting remains virtually worthless and is little more than political propaganda.

Nominal GDP Also Improved Slightly in Revision. The annualized decline in nominal GDP — GDP not adjusted for inflation, reflective of the way companies book actual sales volume — revised to 3.08%, versus initial reporting of 3.47%. Such followed a 5.77% annualized contraction in the fourth quarter (the relative improvement reflected higher inflation — see deflator comments above). As noted in prior comments, for the first time since the severe impact of a steel strike in 1957 and 1958, nominal GDP declined for a second consecutive quarter. Year-to-year change in nominal GDP turned negative in the first quarter, down a revised 0.43% (previously down 0.53%). Such was the first annual contraction since the second quarter of 1958. Annual growth in fourth-quarter 2008 was a positive 1.21%.     

GDP-Like Measures Reported.  Initial estimates of the BEA’s GDP-like measures for first-quarter 2009, GNP (see above) and Gross Domestic Income (GDI) — the income-side equivalent of the GDP’s consumption estimate — were released along with the "preliminary" GDP estimate.

Running contrary in direction to the reported pattern of quarterly GDP changes, first-quarter GNP was reported showing an annualized real quarterly contraction of 5.72%, deepening slightly versus the fourth-quarter estimate of a 5.59% contraction. Year-to-year, first-quarter GNP declined by 2.42%, versus a 0.93% contraction in the fourth quarter.

Reflecting a sharp reversal in "statistical discrepancy," likely as part of the preparation for the upcoming benchmark revision, first-quarter GDI was reported showing an annualized real quarterly contraction of 3.64% (3.90% net of revisions), versus a revised fourth-quarter estimated contraction of 7.78% (previously 7.54%). Year-to-year, first-quarter GDI declined by 2.94%, versus a revised 2.16% (was 2.10%) contraction in the fourth quarter.

Pending Benchmark Revision.  As previously noted, the BEA plans a grand benchmark revision on July 31st, along with the "advance" estimate of second-quarter GDP. The revisions will include the introduction of new methodologies. The pending changes will be assessed in a separate update. What is likely is that recent economic history — as reported for the GDP — should appear to have been relatively weaker than initially published. Minimally, the new data should reflect quarterly GDP contractions that go back to at least first-quarter 2008, consistent with the National Bureau of Economic Research’s recession timing. Further back in time, however, prior history from 1929 through the late-1990s likely will be revised higher, reflecting the "benefits" of new methodologies. 

Hype and Revisions Distract from Ongoing Annual Deterioration in New Orders for Durable Goods. Continuing a pattern of downside revisions to prior reporting by the Census Bureau, the regularly-volatile new orders for durable goods rose by 1.9% (up just 0.2% net of revisions) month-to-month in April. Such followed a revised 2.1% (previously 0.8%) monthly decline in March. In terms of year-to-year change, before any accounting for inflation, April’s new orders were down by a great-depression-like 26.6%, following March’s revised annual decline of 24.7% (previously 23.6%). Adjusted for inflation the series would have shown even sharper contractions.

The widely followed new orders for nondefense capital goods fell by 2.0% (down 4.8% net of revisions) in April, following a revised 0.9% contraction (previously a 1.9% increase) in March. Year-to-year, April orders were down by 35.5%, versus a March decline of 30.8% (previously down by 29.4%).

Home Sales Also Are in Annual Deterioration. Following last week’s reporting of a record 54.2% annual contraction in April housing starts, home sales are not presenting a much happier picture, despite mixed or qualified reporting.

The National Association of Realtors estimated that 45% of existing home sales in April (down from somewhat more than 50% in March) were distressed (in foreclosure). Such makes the reported 2.9% monthly gain and 3.5% annual decline in the April sales difficult to relate to underlying economic activity. There is no easy way to estimate what portion of the foreclosed properties would have otherwise translated into normal home sales, had the forced sales not been present in the market. Safely, the net annual pace of decline would have been much steeper.

The Census Bureau and HUD reported that April new home sales were up by a statistically insignificant 0.3% (down by 1.1% net of revisions) +/- 17% (95% confidence interval) for the month, following a revised 3.0% (previously 0.6%) decline in March. April homes sales declined by 34.0%, following a revised 31.0% (previously 32.1%) decline in March   

Consumer Confidence Rallies on Positive Financial Media.  As discussed in the last newsletter, reported consumer confidence easily is swayed by the tone of the popular media towards the state of economy and the financial markets. Such was established some years back by David Fan of the University of Minnesota. Accordingly, recent happy spins out of Washington and Wall Street, which have been reflected widely in the popular media, placed upside pressures on both the April and May consumer confidence numbers. Keep in mind that these measures usually are lagging, not leading indicators of economic activity. As the talk of economic recovery begins to wear thin with the public, and the stock market falters anew, these series should turn sharply lower again.

May consumer confidence numbers bounced sharply, but at a slightly slower pace than in April. The Conference Board’s May 2009 Consumer Confidence measure rose by 34.6%, versus a revised 51.7% (was 45.7%) month-to-month increase. Year-to-year decline in the three-month moving average as of May narrowed sharply to 34.4% from a decline of 54.7% in April.

The Reuters/University of Michigan’s Consumer Sentiment measure rose by 5.5% for the month of May, versus a 13.6% gain in April.  Year-to-year decline in the Sentiment three-month moving average also narrowed sharply to a drop of 0.4% from April’s 11.9% contraction.

Week Ahead. Employment/Unemployment for May: Due for release on Friday, June 5th, May payrolls are expected to fall by 550,000, following a 539,000 monthly decline in April, with May’s U.3 unemployment rate rising to 9.2% from 8.9% in April, per Briefing.com. Such expectations are not unreasonable, although the better quality indicators below remain weak enough to support a monthly payroll contraction well in excess of 600,000, as well as a higher unemployment rate. From the standpoint of political/financial market needs, after revisions and other reporting gimmicks, the headline payroll number is more likely to come in on the sunny side of expectations, with the annual year-to-year contraction continuing to deepen.

Keep in mind that these data are coincident indicators of broad economic activity, not lagging indicators as hyped by Wall Street. The next month’s June payroll data should show the worst annual contraction since the shutdown of production at the end of World War II.

Employment Environment. Significant weakness and deterioration has continued in the better-quality employment-environment indicators, which not only lead the May report, but also are leading indicators to the June report:

April newspaper help-wanted advertising held at its record-low reading of 10 for the second consecutive month, down by 44.8% year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. The annual decline in March was a record 45.2%. Similar, deepening annual fall-offs were seen in the nascent online help-wanted advertising measures for April.

Annual growth (positive growth is an economic negative) in new claims for unemployment insurance has continued to surge, with the 17-week moving average up by 76.8% as of May 23rd, still shy of the historical peak growth rate of 78.8% in March 1975. A month ago, annual growth was 75.8%; a year ago growth was 14.8%.

Although stronger than in March, employment readings continued deep in recession territory for the April manufacturing and non-manufacturing purchasing managers surveys.

__________

Flash Update

Wednesday, May 20th, 2009

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 FLASH UPDATE

May 20, 2009

 __________

Green Shoots of Inflation

April Housing Starts in Great Depression-Like 54% Annual Tumble

 __________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update is for Friday, May 29th, following the release of the "preliminary" estimate revision of first-quarter GDP. Any interim Flash Update or Alert would be published as dictated by developing economic or financial-market circumstances. Best wishes to all for an enjoyable Memorial Day Weekend! 

– John Williams

 

Signals Mount of Non-Demand-Driven U.S. Inflation Threat. Fed Chairman Bernanke’s "green shoots" are sprouting, but only for inflation, not for a turnaround in collapsing economic activity. At work here are increasing dollar weakness and a possible developing positive shift in money supply growth. Thanks at least partially to the Fed’s efforts to debase the U.S. dollar, the greenback has been in gradual decline recently, dropping today to trade-weighted levels against the major currencies not seen since mid-December. Largely reflecting the dollar’s weakness, oil prices are their highest since early November, and gasoline prices appear likely to be up 12% to 13% in May, versus April, nearly double the rate of the monthly gain seen last year.

The accelerating increase in gasoline prices is due largely to factors other than rising economic demand, again primarily due to pressures related to U.S. dollar weakness. Oil remains the dominant commodity affecting U.S. inflation. Irrespective of any near-term market volatility, long-range weakness in the dollar should be reflected in long-range upside pressures on U.S. dollar-denominated commodity prices (particularly oil) and on related upside pressures on U.S. consumer inflation. 

The recent strength in gold prices also reflects growing dollar-based inflation fears, as well safe-haven flight from the still ongoing instabilities in the financial markets and the financial system.

Positive Shift in Money Growth. There also has been a positive shift in the recent seasonally-adjusted weekly growth patterns of the still-published or largely published M3 components (Federal Reserve Board Publication): M2 (H.6), institutional money funds (H.6) and large time deposits (H.8). One has to consider the possibility here that the Fed’s weekly seasonal adjustments may have been thrown off by the extreme reduction in tax receipts seen in April due to the recession. The tax payments around the April 15th tax date usually have regular seasonal impact on the money supply.

Nonetheless, where broad money growth — as indicated by the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate — slowed on a year-to-year basis in March and April (April growth slowed to 7.1%, from 8.2% in March, and from 9.5% in February), a continuation of current weekly patterns would suggest a rebound in annual growth in May, possibly back above 8% (money supply details based on full-month reporting for April are available at the Alternate Data tab on www.shadowstats.com.)   

Where the slowing in M3 annual growth generally has suggested an intensification of the ongoing systemic solvency crisis, a reversal of trends here would suggest some improvement in conditions, as well as mounting inflationary pressures. As cash comes out from under the mattresses and re-enters the depository system, the velocity of money (turnover of the money supply in the GDP, see Money Supply Special Report on www.shadowstats.com) also should begin to increase.  

As of the week ended April 13th (for H.6, April 15th for H.8) the published M3 components showed an annualized contraction for the week of 1.5%, and an annualized contraction for four weeks of 10.2%. Similarly, for the week ended April 20th, the annualized weekly growth rate was 19.8%; the annualized change over four weeks was a 4.3% contraction.  For the week ended April 27th, the annualized weekly growth rate was 19.3%; the annualized growth over four weeks was 3.3%. For the week ended May 4th, the annualized weekly growth rate was 38.0%; the annualized growth over four weeks was 18.1%.

The Fed’s efforts at extreme liquefaction of the system and debasement of the U.S. currency have continued. Although the year-to-year change in the seasonally-adjusted St. Louis Fed’s adjusted monetary base slowed minimally to 103% in the two-week period ended May 6th, from a record 112% in the prior period, annual growth in unadjusted required reserves jumped to 45.6% in the latest period, from 34.5% in the prior period, consistent with the surge in the report M3 components during the same timeframe.

Annual Housing Starts Contraction Continued at Record Pace in April. Yesterday’s (May 19th) release of seasonally-adjusted housing starts by the Census Bureau showed no improvement in housing-market conditions. Annual revisions had little impact on the annual totals. The highly volatile series showed a 12.8% decline +/-15.8% (95% confidence interval) in April, following a revised 9.2% decline in March. While the economic green-shootists hyped a monthly increase of 2.8% +/-19.9% (95% confidence) in single family homes, neither the aggregate monthly decline nor the single family increase was statistically significant on a monthly basis. Year-to-year, April housing starts fell by 54.2% +/- 7.3% (95% confidence interval), versus a 47.1% decline in March. Single family home sales in April fell 45.6% +/-7.4%. April’s 54.2% annual hit for total housing starts was the steepest decline in the history of the series, except for a 54.9% drop in January. On a three-month moving-average basis, the April year-to-year contraction was 49.7% versus a record 50.0% plunge in March. The SGS definition of a great depression is a recession with a peak-to-trough inflation-adjusted contraction in excess of 25%. Peak-to-trough this series stands at a 79.9% contraction, with January 2006 the peak, and the current April 2009 reading a short-lived trough. Single family homes are down peak-to-trough by 80.4%, with a temporary trough in February 2009.      

 

Week Ahead. New Orders for Durable Goods: Due for release on May 28th (Thursday), the highly volatile durable goods orders series should show continued sharp annual contraction in April, while the monthly change could go either way.

Gross Domestic Product: The "preliminary" estimate revision of first-quarter 2009 GDP is expected to show an annualized, inflation-adjusted decline of 5.5% (per Briefing.com), narrowed from the "advance" estimate of a 6.1% decline. Revisions to retail sales and industrial production suggest that the contraction should be more severe than reported initially, but the heavily-massaged reporting tends to move in the direction of the consensus forecasts. Look for major downward revisions to the series to surface with the July benchmark revision.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, May 15th, 2009

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 FLASH UPDATE

May 15, 2009

__________

April CPI-U Annual Deflation of 0.7%
Versus SGS-Alternate Estimate of 6.7% Inflation

Seasonal Factors Mask Rising Monthly Energy Costs

Peak-to-April Industrial Production
Is Down a Depression-Like 16%

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: Aside from April housing starts, which should continue showing great-depression-like annual contractions, next week’s economic reporting calendar is light. The next Flash Update likely will be on Wednesday — possibly earlier — addressing the latest housing and money supply figures, as well as other hot topics of the moment.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Consumer Price Deflation Nears Bottom.   I never have favored the media’s emphasis on seasonally-adjusted consumer inflation (as opposed to the BLS’s emphasis on the unadjusted series), since the monthly results do not reflect common experience. In April reporting, for example, a 5% monthly increase in gasoline prices was turned into a 3% seasonally-adjusted decline. Consumers, however, see their expenses and day-to-day cash outlays in actual money, not some happy hypothetical government statistical construct of what it should be. The offset to the current seasonal-factor depression of gasoline price reporting is the usual flip to the upside in adjusted reporting in the second half of the year. Nonetheless, the sharp rally in oil and gasoline prices so far in May — in conjunction with other rising costs — could be enough to generate an upside adjusted monthly inflation rate in May, as well as a less-negative pace of annual decline in May the CPI-U, perhaps setting the April annual deflation rate as the bottom of the current cycle.

As discussed in the SGS Newsletter No. 50, the risk going forward is for severe inflation, not deflation. The current downturn in consumer prices is dominated by oil-related costs and should be brief and shallow, as seen sporadically in the late-1940s and early 1950s, not catastrophically long and deep as seen in the Great Depression. If inflation today were calculated the way it was back in 1955 — the time of the last minor deflation run — the April 2009 CPI-U annual inflation rate likely would have topped 6%, as discussed below.  

CPI-U.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported this morning (May 15th) that the seasonally-adjusted April CPI-U declined by 0.02% (up by 0.25% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, versus a decline of 0.14% (a 0.24% unadjusted gain) in March. For a second month, unadjusted year-to-year inflation declined (formal deflation), down by 0.74% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval) in April, versus a 0.38% contraction in March.  For those interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I continue to refer you to CPIwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in May 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.49% adjusted monthly increase seen in May 2008.  I use the adjusted change here, since that is how consensus expectations are expressed. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from April’s annual inflation rate of negative 0.74%. Again with heavy upside pressure on oil prices, annual CPI-U should be near its trough for the current cycle, although another month of minor official deflation appears likely.

CPI-W.  The BLS reported that the narrower, seasonally-adjusted April CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) declined by 0.02% (gained 0.34% unadjusted), following a 0.14% decline (a 0.25% unadjusted gain) in March.  Year-to-year inflation declined by 1.32% in April, following a 0.92% decline in March.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — fell by 1.06% in April, versus a 0.81% decline in March. 

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth eased to roughly 2.6% in April versus 2.9% in March, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, softened to roughly 6.7% (6.74% for those using the extra digit), versus 7.3% in March, and has been updated on the Alternate Data tab and Inflation Calculator at www.shadowstats.com.  The alternate numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made by the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where impact has not been formally published by the BLS.

Real Retail Sales.  Updating the May 13th Flash Update, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted April retail sales declined by 0.35% (down 0.37% before inflation adjustment) versus a revised March decline of 1.18% (previously down by 1.01%), against a 1.31% March decline before inflation adjustment. Year-to-year, April real retail sales fell by 9.54% (10.10% before inflation adjustment) versus a 9.18% decline in March (9.58% before inflation adjustment).

Reflecting benchmark revisions, the pace of annualized decline in the inflation-adjusted retail series widened in the first-quarter 2009 revision to 3.2% (previously 2.5%), which should have a negative impact on honest revisions to estimated first-quarter GDP growth. 

On a three-month moving-average basis, the April and March annual real declines were 8.91% and 8.72%, respectively. Along with the declines of the last several months, the April annual decline in the moving-average remains at the low for the two historical retail series of the post-World War II era.

Producer Price Index Rose Despite Rising Oil Prices. Rising energy prices were more than offset by the BLS’ seasonal adjustments in April. Nonetheless, the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted producer price index (PPI) increased. For April, the PPI increased by 0.3% (up by 0.6% unadjusted), after falling by 1.2% (0.7% before seasonal adjustment) in March. The BLS data showed April’s year-to-year PPI inflation contracted by 3.7%, versus a 3.5% decline in March, the fifth month of formal PPI deflation (year-to-year price decline).

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted April intermediate goods fell by 0.5% (down by 1.5% in March), but crude goods rose by 3.0% (down by 0.3% in March). The decline in year-to-year inflation continued, with April intermediate goods down 10.5% (down by 8.9% in March) and April crude goods down by 40.0% (down by 39.0% in March).

Industrial Production Is in Depression. The Federal Reserve reported that seasonally-adjusted April industrial production fell by 0.5% (down 0.3% net of revisions) for the month, after a revised 1.7% (previously 1.5%) decline in March.  The year-to-year decline in activity held at 12.5% for April, versus 12.5% (previously 12.8%) decline in March. Such remained the weakest showing for the series since war-time production was shut down after World War II.

With annual change down 12.5% and with a peak-to-trough (April is the short-lived current trough) contraction at 16.0%, the industrial sector of the economy (including manufacturing, mining and utilities) is in a depression. A depression is defined (SGS) as a recession where the peak-to-trough economic contraction exceeds 10%.

__________

Flash Update

Wednesday, May 13th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - May 13, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

May 13, 2009

 

__________

 

New Accounting Fraud for
Monthly Federal Deficit Reporting

Annual Retail Sales Plunge a Depression-Like 10.1%

Monthly "Core" Retail Sales Down 0.1%
Versus Official 0.4% Decline

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update will follow the release of the April CPI report on Friday, May 15th.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Obama Administration Changes Rules in Order to Reduce Reported Deficit Level.   Under mounting global criticism for its fiscal excesses, and with Treasury auctions looking like they are going to need heavier Federal Reserve support, the Obama Administration has taken some "corrective" action, by changing the accounting rules for the reporting of federal deficit. The changes only reduce the reported level of the federal deficit; they do not impact the Treasury’s excessive funding needs. The "Highlight" of yesterday’s (May 12th) Monthly Treasury Statement for April 30, 2009 was:

"The administration has reclassified prior month expenditures related to the Emergency Economic Stabilization Act (EESA- also known as TARP). Consistent with statutory requirements of the Federal Credit Reform Act and EESA, TARP purchases are now being accounted for on a net present value basis, taking into account market risk. Accordingly, budget outlays have been reduced and direct loan financing activity correspondingly increased by $175 billion."

While this gimmick already was in play in the Administration’s budget forecasts, going forward (more than halving the projected "outlays" for a likely second TARP package), the funds expended indeed are outlays and impact directly the U.S. Treasury’s borrowings. While such gimmicking would be lucky to skirt along the boundaries of generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP)-based accounting — given the inability of the government to assess "market risk" within the bounds of reality — such has not been the nature of the monthly deficit reporting. On this basis, other questions arise, too, as to the monthly accounting tied to the handling of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac. 

Then, of course, there is the surging net present value of unfunded liabilities for Social Security and Medicare, but the government is not about to alter its supposedly otherwise cash-based accounting in a manner that would show a larger (by more than $4 trillion), rather than a smaller, reported annual federal deficit.  

Rolling 12-Month Federal Deficit Hits $1.3 Trillion or $1.1 Trillion (New Accounting); Federal Debt Up by $1.9 Trillion Year-to-Year. Fiscal conditions continued collapsing in April 2009, as the big tax collection month had a sharp enough fall-off in revenues (down 34.1% year-to-year) to generate the first April deficit in a quarter century. The severe, deepening recession and surging government outlays have continued to pummel the government’s finances.

The twelve-month moving deficit through April 2009 rose to $1,278.6 billion from $1098.8 billion in March, based on last month’s accounting rules. Based on Mr. Geithner’s new bookkeeping, the April number was $1,103.6 billion in April, versus $923.4 billion in March. Those numbers contrasted with unrevised twelve-month rolling deficits for April and March 2008, respectively, of $334.2 billion and $217.1 billion.

Viewing the change in the level of gross federal debt bypasses several of the regular reporting manipulations of the government’s financial results and is a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the official, gimmicked deficit reporting. Gross federal debt stood at $11.239 Trillion as of April 30, 2009, up by $112 billion for the month, and up by $1.861 trillion from April 2008, which in turn was up by $537 billion from April 2007.

Annual Retail Sales Plunged Again. Incorporating annual revisions that knocked a percent or two off reported sales levels of the last two years, the annual 10.1% decline in April 2009 retail sales was the worst seen in post-World II history, other than for a 10.6% decline in December 2008.

As reported by the Census Bureau, seasonally-adjusted April retail sales showed a monthly decline of 0.37% (down 1.95% net of all revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a revised 1.31% (previously a 1.14%) monthly decline in March. On a year-to-year basis, April retail sales fell by 10.10% (down 11.32% net of all revisions), versus a revised 9.58% (previously 9.41%) plunge in March. By a wide historical margin, the three-month moving average of the nominal (not-adjusted for inflation) year-to-year contraction continued the worst levels of post-World War II reporting.

Core Retail Sales.   Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 0.05% (down 1.53% net of revisions) in April, following a revised 1.34% (previously a 1.35%) drop in March. Those numbers contrasted with the official aggregate decreases of 0.37% in April and 1.31% in March.  On an annual basis, April core retail sales fell by 7.55% versus a revised 7.46% (was 7.00%) in March.

April’s monthly increase in gasoline prices (gasoline station sales) was reversed partially by seasonal-factor adjustments. Such also should be seen in the pending April CPI-U release.  

Real Retail Sales.  Inflation- and seasonally-adjusted April retail sales should have declined on both a monthly and annual basis. The details will be published in the Flash Update following Wednesday’s release of the April CPI-U.

March Trade Balance Narrowed Slightly. As reported by Bureau of Economic Analysis/Census Bureau, the seasonally-adjusted March trade deficit widened slightly to $27.6 billion from a revised $26.1 (was $26.0 billion) in February. The reported deterioration was not enough to have significant impact on the pending "preliminary" estimate revision to first-quarter GDP. Reported oil prices turned slightly higher, up to $41.36 per barrel, from $39.22 per barrel in February. As reported oil prices rise in the next month or two, such should lead to greater deficit deterioration in April and May reporting.

Week Ahead. Still pending this week are the reports assessed previously in the May 8th Flash Update:

Industrial Production:Due for release on Friday, May 15th, April industrial production also should continue showing record post-World War II year-to-year contraction. Consensus (per Briefing.com) is for a 0.6% monthly contraction. Reality likely is somewhat worse, despite recent bottom-bouncing in the purchasing managers survey.

PPI: Due for release tomorrow, Thursday, May 14th, the April producer price index should reflect some upside pressure from rising oil prices, although much of that may be tempered by seasonal adjustments. The series is regularly volatile and was underestimated in March, suggesting the potential for some upside catch-up in April.

CPI:Due for release on Friday, May 15th, the April seasonally-adjusted consumer price index (CPI-U) is expected to be unchanged month-to-month, per Briefing.com. The 4.5% monthly average increase in April gasoline prices (per Department of Energy) largely will be muted by seasonal adjustments.

If the monthly CPI-U is unchanged, the pace of annual deflation should deepen a little. Annual inflation would increase or decrease in April 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.15% monthly increase seen in April 2008.  The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from March’s annual inflation rate of negative 0.38%.

Nonetheless, the continued rise in oil prices — in response partially to near-term softness in the U.S. dollar — increasingly should begin to fuel a non-demand-driven increase in the pace of consumer inflation in the months ahead.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, May 8th, 2009

  

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 FLASH UPDATE

May 8, 2009

 __________

 Better-Than-Expected April Jobs Report Had A Bad Odor to It

539,000 Jobs Loss was 605,000 Net of Revisions, 491,000 Net of CSFB

Birth-Death Bias Showed Unusual Jump in April

 __________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update will follow the release of the April retail sales report on Wednesday, May 13th, with a subsequent update following the April CPI report on Friday, May 15th.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

CBS news radio this morning (May 8th) was headlining and hyping a likely improvement in the jobs picture, well before the April employment report was released. Where the White House formally received the employment detail after the markets closed on Thursday (and probably had a good sense of the number a week before), today’s reporting looked very much like an orchestrated event. News organizations usually are pretty conservative about touting market-moving reports in advance of a release.

Continuing a pattern seen in the last seven monthly payroll reports, today’s estimates included negative revisions to the previously-report February and March payroll changes (see the Reporting/Market Focus in the most recent SGS Newsletter No. 50, for further background on this indication of flawed reporting), but the Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias (CSFB) reversed in April (see below). There also was an unusual surge in birth-death modeling bias. Separately, unusual seasonal adjustments were apparent in the unemployment report, which, unlike the payroll reporting, was exactly as bad as expected by consensus forecasts.   

As indicated in the May 4th Flash Update, "Something shy of the consensus jobs decline — a decline less severe than the month before — would meet both political and short-lived financial-market needs…" The consensus outlook had been for a 620,000 jobs loss, and it narrowed to a 600,000 jobs loss (per Briefing.com) following the sharp narrowing in the April jobs decline estimated by ADP, on Wednesday (May 6th). The ADP results generally have not been overly predictive of government reporting, and appear to be of suspect quality. Reinforced by the ADP report, however, the government’s better-than-expected 539,000 April payroll decline happily will be touted as "confirmation" of the Administration’s recent shift to a rosy scenario for the economy and of Wall Street’s sales pitch that the worst is behind us.

Unfortunately, later reporting should confirm that the worst is not behind us. As discussed below, even if today’s data were accurate, the news in the April report remained bleak, with steep ongoing monthly and annual deterioration. Despite the pabulum put out for public and market consumption by the Fed, Federal Reserve Chairman Bernanke should have a pretty good understanding by now of both the ongoing and deepening economic and systemic-solvency crises. Accordingly, the chances should be very close to nil for any near-term Fed tightening.   

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 539,000 (down 605,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for April 2009, following a revised 699,000 (previously 663,000) jobs loss in March and a revised 681,000 (previously 651,000) jobs loss in February.

From peak-to-current (the peak month was December 2007; the current month of April also is the short-lived trough of the current cycle), payroll employment has declined by a seasonally-adjusted 5,738,000 jobs, or 4.2%. Year-to-year contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls continued to deepen, down 3.82% in April, versus a revised 3.57% (was 3.56%) in March. The seasonally-adjusted series also continued contracting year-to-year, down by 3.81% in April versus a revised 3.53% (was 3.48%) in March.

The unadjusted annual decline in April payrolls was the worst since July 1958. At the current pace of deepening annual decline, by the June 2009 employment report (due for release in July), the annual percentage contraction in payrolls will be the most severe since the production shutdown following World War II.  

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias. The pattern of impossible biases being built into the headline monthly payroll employment reversed with April 2009 reporting, for the first time since last July (see the accompanying graph). Instead of the headline jobs loss of 539,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what I call the concurrent seasonal factor bias — would have shown a less-severe monthly jobs loss of about 491,000. Beyond this month’s reverse result, this pattern has generated an upside reporting bias in 10 of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 1,255,000. A worksheet on this is available upon request. (See the most recent SGS Newsletter No. 50, for further background.)

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. An element that helped to improve the April jobs report was the monthly upside bias factor (birth-death model). Never designed to handle the downside pressures from a recession, the model adds a fairly consistent upside bias to the payroll levels each year, averaging about 60,000 jobs per month, assuming the BLS adequately seasonally adjusts for same. The seasonally-adjusted numbers, however, likely were skewed by a large increase in the unadjusted April 2009 bias factor to 226,000 from 176,000 jobs in April 2008. With a relatively small benchmark revision in place for 2008, one would have expected the April bias adjustment to have narrowed, not widened, as shown in the current report. The upside bias factor for March 2009 was 114,000 jobs.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed April employment rose by an unbelievable 120,000 versus a decline of 861,000 in March. At work here were poor quality seasonal adjustments.

The April 2009 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate, however, still showed another statistically-significant increase, to 8.87% +/- 0.23%, from 8.54% in March.  Unadjusted U.3 eased to 8.6% in April from 9.0% in March.  The broader April U.6 unemployment rate rose to an adjusted 15.8% (fell to 15.4% unadjusted) from 15.6% (16.2% unadjusted) in March. The less than proportionate seasonally-adjusted increase in the U.6 measure, versus the U.3 measure, again reflected seasonal factor distortions. The adjusted U.3 unemployment rate likely should have been reported higher than 8.9% and should catch-up in the reporting of the next month or two.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the bulk of the discouraged workers. Adding them back into the total unemployed, unemployment in line with common experience, as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure, rose to about 20.0% in April versus 19.8% in March.

Employment Environment. Based on the better-quality underlying series discussed below (all are leading indicators to the jobs report) and updated for new data since Monday’s (May 4th) Flash Update, the April jobs loss should have exceeded 750,000. It still may end up reflecting such a loss in subsequent revisions.

New Claims for Unemployment Insurance:Despite the regular weekly volatility of the series, the ongoing rapid rise in initial claims for unemployment insurance has continued to reflect the severe deterioration in labor market conditions, where a rising growth trend in new claims is an economic negative. On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended May 2nd, as reported yesterday (May 7th), year-to-year growth hit 76.8%, its highest level since the 1975 recession and still closing in on its historical peak growth rate of 78.8% in March 1975. The latest annual growth was up from 75.8% the prior week, up from 73.2% as of the 17 weeks ended April 4th, and up from 66.9% in the 17 weeks ended February 28th. A year ago (May 3, 2008) claims were increasing at an annual pace of 12.2%.

Help-Wanted Advertising (HWA):The March help-wanted advertising index (newspapers) collapsed to an historic low of 10 (lowest since the creation of the series in January 1951), from the prior record low of 12 that had held for three months through February. The Conference Board measure was down year-to-year by a record 47.4% in March, versus a 42.9% decline in February. 

Despite some of the historic weakness in the newspaper series being due to the loss of ads to the Internet, the HWA newspaper index remains a solid leading indicator to the broad economy and to the monthly employment report. It has continued to signal severe deepening in the recession and ongoing deterioration in labor-market conditions. The nascent online surveys are telling a similar story. The deepening annual fall-off in new online help-wanted advertising (Conference Board) has continued, down 38.6% in April, versus a 36.0% year-to-year decline in March. The Monster.com online survey estimated that online jobs offerings were down 29% year-to-year in March, versus a 26% decline in February.

Purchasing Managers Surveys:The April manufacturing employment index rose to 34.4 from 28.1, but it did not show an improving economy so much as it indicated one where deterioration had eased. Rapidly declining activity eventually tends to bottom-bounce, as business falls to a low-level plateau of activity. In the employment number, survey participants indicated employment conditions in April as follows: higher 7%, same 58%, lower 35%. Such contrasted with March’s: higher 8%, same 41%, lower 51%. The reported improvement came from a reduction in those reporting lower employment (shifting to same or higher), but the higher percentage also dropped. So, as would be typical with bottom-bouncing, part of the downside turned to unchanged, even the though the upside still deteriorated. Separately, seasonal adjustments distort the reporting, which best is viewed on a three-month moving-average basis in terms of assessing significant changes. On that basis, the April employment reading was 29.5 versus 28.0 in March. The March reading was the lowest since the series was started in January 1948.

Covering the real estate and banking industries, among others, the April services-sector employment component showed patterns similar to the manufacturing sector, rising to 37.0 from 32.3 in March. The services series only has a history back to 1997.

Week Ahead. Trade Deficit:With potential impact on the next revision to the first-quarter GDP estimate, the March trade deficit is due for release on Tuesday, May 12th. Some widening is likely, as per consensus, due simply to an upturn in oil prices. This increasingly volatile and distorted series, however, is due for significant deterioration in catch-up reporting. Results significantly worse than expected would suggest some downside revision pressures on the next GDP update, and vice versa.

Retail Sales:Due for release on Wednesday, May 13th, April retail sales should continue showing record or near-record year-to-year contraction. Reported month-to-month change, despite market hype of a rebounding economy, likely will not be statistically significant either as an increase or as a decline. 

Industrial Production:Due for release on Friday, May 15th, April industrial production also should continue showing record post-World War II year-to-year contraction. Consensus (per Briefing.com) is for a 0.6% monthly contraction. Reality likely is somewhat worse, despite recent bottom-bouncing in the purchasing managers survey.

PPI: Due for release on Thursday, May 14th, the April producer price index should reflect some upside pressure from rising oil prices, although much of that may be tempered by seasonal adjustments. The series is regularly volatile and was underestimated in March, suggesting the potential for some upside catch-up in April.

CPI:Due for release on Friday, May 15th, the April seasonally-adjusted consumer price index (CPI-U) is expected to be unchanged month-to-month, per Briefing.com. The 4.5% monthly average increase in April gasoline prices (per Department of Energy) largely will be muted by seasonal adjustments.

If the monthly CPI-U is unchanged, the pace of annual deflation should deepen a little. Annual inflation would increase or decrease in April 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.15% monthly increase seen in April 2008.  The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from March’s annual inflation rate of negative 0.38%.

Nonetheless, the continued rise in oil prices — in response partially to near-term softness in the U.S. dollar — increasingly should begin to fuel a non-demand-driven increase in the pace of consumer inflation in the months ahead.

 __________

Flash Update

Monday, May 4th, 2009

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

May 4, 2009

 __________

 No Recovery, As Employment Conditions Weaken

Systemic Solvency Crisis Intensifies
As Broad Money Growth Softens Further

U.S. Dollar Selling Could Pick Up
Along with Fed’s Ongoing Dollar Debasement Efforts

 __________

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update will follow the release of the April employment report on Friday, May 8th.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Recovery Is Not in Play. The Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC) noted in its April 29th press release, that "the economy has continued to contract, though the pace of contraction appears to be somewhat slower…" The FOMC also indicated that "the economic outlook has improved modestly…" The Fed remains extremely cautious in the wording of its statements, and saying that the "outlook has improved" is not the same thing as saying the "economy has improved or is improving," irrespective of the ensuing hype on Wall Street. Again, the FOMC’s opening comment was one indicating continued economic contraction. Indeed, the evidence remains of ongoing economic contraction, despite some continued bottom-bouncing in series such as the purchasing managers survey (see discussion in the employment section).

As to the daily hype hitting the markets as to "better-than-expected numbers," keep looking at year-to-year change smoothed over several months, rather month-to-month change that usually lacks statistical significance. As to anything involving existing or pending homes sales, keep mind that the numbers are skewed very heavily by foreclosure activity, as discussed in the most recent SGS Newsletter (No. 50), in the housing starts comments in the Reporting Perspective section. 

Employment Conditions Remain Dismal. Contrary to some recent stories in the popular press, employment is a coincident indicator of broad economic activity, not a lagging indicator. As such it is used by the Conference Board as one of its coincident indicators in the series of leading, coincident and lagging economic indicators taken over from federal government reporting, some years back. The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) — official arbiter of U.S. recessions — also uses payroll employment as one element in setting the precise timing of the onset of a recession. Perversely, however, the NBER ignored ongoing employment contractions in order to call early ends to the 1990/1991 and 2001 recessions, and such may have become the basis for citing employment as a lagging indicator.

That said, the April employment report is due for release on Friday (May 8th), and expectations (per Briefing.com) are for a month-to-month payroll employment decline of about 620,000 (versus a 663,000 decline in March), with the U.3 unemployment rate rising to roughly 8.9% from 8.5%. Something shy of the consensus jobs decline — a decline less severe than the month before — would meet both political and short-lived financial-market needs, even if it resulted from continued obfuscation of headline-number reality, through prior-period revisions and/or questionable seasonal-factor adjustments. Based on the better-quality underlying series discussed below (all are leading indicators to the jobs report), the jobs loss should exceed 750,000 (at least in later revisions).    

New Claims for Unemployment Insurance: Despite the regular weekly volatility of the series, the ongoing rapid rise in initial claims for unemployment insurance has continued to reflect the severe deterioration in labor market conditions, where a rising growth trend in new claims is an economic negative. On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended April 25th, year-to-year growth hit 75.7%, its highest level since the 1975 recession and closing in on its historical peak growth rate of 78.8% seen in March 1975. The latest annual growth was up from 72.4% as of the 17 weeks ended March 28th, and up from 66.9% in the 17 weeks ended February 28th. A year ago (April 26, 2008) claims were increasing at an annual pace of 23.6%.

Help-Wanted Advertising (HWA):The March help-wanted advertising index (newspapers) collapsed to an historic low of 10 (lowest since the creation of the series in January 1951), from the prior record low of 12 that had held for three months through February. The Conference Board measure was down year-to-year by a record 47.4% in March, versus a 42.9% decline in February. 

Despite some of the historic weakness in the newspaper series being due to the loss of ads to the Internet, and despite its looming abandonment by the Conference Board, the HWA newspaper index remains a solid leading indicator to the broad economy and to the monthly employment report. It continues to signal severe deepening in the recession and ongoing deterioration in labor-market conditions. The nascent online surveys are telling a similar story.

The deepening annual fall-off in new online help-wanted advertising (Conference Board) continued, down 38.6% in April, versus a 36.0% year-to-year decline in March. The Monster.com online survey estimated that online jobs offerings were down 29% year-to-year in March, versus a 26% decline in February.

Purchasing Managers Survey (Manufacturing): The April purchasing managers survey’s composite index rose to 40.1, from 36.3 in March, still well below the 50.0 that signals a contraction in manufacturing (and recession per SGS), and below the 41.8 that the Institute for Supply Management (ISM) formally considers as a recession indicator. The index components are diffusion indices that are compiled as the percentage of survey respondents indicating improving conditions plus one half of those who indicate conditions are unchanged.

The April employment index rose to 34.4 from 28.1, but it did not show an improving economy so much as it indicated one where deterioration had eased. Rapidly declining activity eventually tends to bottom-bounce, as business falls to a low-level plateau of activity. What happened with the April employment component is instructive, as well as indicative of what happened to other key indices, such as new orders (rose to 47.2 from 41.2), production (rose to 40.4 from 36.4) and prices paid (rose to 32.0 from 31.0).

As to the employment number, survey participants indicated conditions in April as follows: higher 7%, same 58%, lower 35%. Such contrasted with March’s: higher 8%, same 41%, lower 51%. The reported improvement came from a reduction in those reporting lower employment (shifting to same or higher), but the higher percentage also dropped. So, as would be typical with bottom-bouncing, part of the downside turned to unchanged, even the though the upside still deteriorated. Separately, seasonal adjustments distort the reporting, which best is viewed on a three-month moving-average basis in terms of assessing significant changes. On that basis, the April employment reading was 29.5 versus 28.0 in March. The March reading was the lowest since the series was started in January 1948.

Covering the real estate and banking industries, among others, the March services-sector employment component eased to a near record-low 32.3, from 37.3 in February.  The series, however, only goes back to 1997.

Consumer Confidence Reflects Happy Talk.  Reported consumer confidence easily is swayed by the tone of the popular media towards the state of economy and the financial markets. Such was established some years back by David Fan of the University of Minnesota. Accordingly, recent happy spins put on a variety of economic releases likely added some upside pressures to the April numbers.

April consumer confidence numbers bounced sharply, with mixed results year-to-year. The Conference Board’s April 2009 Consumer Confidence measure rose by 45.7% month-to-month, up from a 6.3% increase in March, and up from a 32.4% decline in February, which had set the historic low for the series (lowest since the Lyndon Johnson Administration). Year-to-year change for the three-month moving average as of April was still deep in recession territory, down 55.4%, following a record 61.0% decline in March.

The Reuters/University of Michigan’s Consumer Sentiment measure rose by 13.6% for the month of April, following a 1.8% gain in March, following an 8.0% decline in February. Year-to-year change in the Sentiment three-month moving average was down by 11.9% in April, narrowing sharply from the 20.1% decline in March.

As the talk of economic recovery begins to wear thin with the public, and the stock market falters anew, these series should turn sharply lower again. As lagging, not leading indicators, they confirm that the economy has been in a deep recession.

Money Supply Growth Slows Despite Fed’s Accelerating Efforts to Debase the Dollar. Based on 20/22 of 30 days of reporting in key components of M3, the SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate appears headed for a small month-to-month contraction, with annual growth slowing from roughly 8.2% in March to around 7% in April. A hard estimate on the monthly number will be published next weekend.   Continued slowing growth of the broad money measure indicates an intensifying systemic solvency crisis, as also suggested by recent Fed monetary activity.

Reflecting intensified systemic liquefaction efforts by the Fed, annual growth in the St. Louis Fed’s Adjusted Monetary Base jumping to a record high 112.5% in the two weeks ended April 22nd, up from 105.9% in the prior two-week period. Such was up sharply from the recent trough of 81.9% in the two weeks ended February 11th and topped the prior record growth of 107.2% seen in the two weeks ended January 14th. The bulk of volatility in the series has been due to variations in excess reserves. The monetary base (basically currency plus bank reserves) is the Fed’s primary tool for targeting growth in the money supply.

Of continued significance to the broader money measures, annual growth in required reserves (seasonally-unadjusted) held at 34.4%, down minimally from 34.8% in the prior two weeks.   Such still remains shy of the record 57.6% annual growth reported for the two weeks ended February 11th.

U.S. Dollar Remains Key to Inflation Pick-Up. Perhaps reflecting the Fed’s increasing efforts at U.S. dollar debasement, the U.S. currency has been under some minor selling pressure in the last week or two. As the Fed’s efforts begin to "succeed," and investors increasingly lose confidence in the greenback, intense dollar selling/dumping should kick-in. Dollar-denominated commodities such as oil should see dollar-based pricing spikes, as a result, with that circumstance beginning to fuel a non-demand driven inflation in the United States, much as was seen last year.

 __________

Flash Update

Wednesday, April 29th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - April 29, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

April 29, 2009

 

__________

 

Not Adjusted for Inflation,
Annual GDP Decline Is First Since 1958

Adjusted for Inflation,
Annual Decline in Gimmicked GDP Falls to 1982 Levels

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update will follow the release of the April employment report on Friday, May 8th. There well may be an intervening Flash Update or Alert, depending on financial-market or political developments.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Real GDP Contracts for Third Consecutive Quarter. First-quarter 2009 GDP was reported down by 6.14% annualized quarter-to-quarter, down 2.62% year-to-year. In the longest string of consecutive quarterly declines since the 1973/1975 recession, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) reported the "advance" estimate of real (inflation-adjusted) annualized growth for first-quarter 2009 gross domestic product (GDP) tumbled 6.14% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a reported decline of 6.34% in fourth-quarter 2008 and a 0.51% contraction in the third quarter. In terms of year-to-year change, the real first-quarter GDP declined by 2.62%, versus a fourth-quarter contraction of 0.84%, and a gain of 0.75% in the third quarter. The first quarter’s annual contraction was the deepest since the third quarter of 1982.

As the "advance" estimate for the quarter, today’s (April 29th) report was based on roughly 90% guesstimated data. Underlying assumptions would have been targeted at the more-optimistic consensus expectations, so it is likely that the "advance" number understated the depth of the downturn and that it will suffer negative revisions in the months ahead.

The annualized real changes in certain GDP components were unusual, as often is the case. Personal consumption, for example, rebounded by 2.1%, following a 4.3% contraction in the fourth quarter. Yet underlying reporting (i.e., retail sales) suggested ongoing quarterly contraction. 

Also on the plus-side was a small improvement in net exports. Offsetting the gains were sharp declines in business investment (including inventories) and housing, and a short-lived drop in government spending.

The first-quarter GDP inflation rate (GDP deflator) surged at an annualized 2.85% pace, reflecting dropping oil prices (which get counted as a double-negative, or a positive, with imports being subtracted from GDP). Such contrasted with a 0.61% increase in the fourth quarter and a 3.88% inflation rate in the third quarter.

Based on removal of the effects of some reporting gimmicks and unfortunate methodological changes of recent decades, the SGS-Alternate GDP estimate for first-quarter 2009 is for an annual (not annualized) contraction of roughly 5.1% versus a 4.1% contraction in the fourth quarter, against official respective annual estimated declines of 2.6% and 0.8%. Against reporting of underlying economic series, the annualized quarterly contraction likely was in excess of 8% for the first quarter. Nonetheless, GDP reporting remains virtually worthless and is little more than political propaganda.

Nominal GDP Contracts for Second Consecutive Quarter. For the first time since the severe impact of a steel strike in 1957 and 1958, nominal GDP — GDP not adjusted for inflation, reflective of the way companies book actual sales volume — declined for a second consecutive quarter. The annualized decline was reported at 3.47%, following the fourth quarter’s 5.77% contraction (the relative improvement reflected higher inflation — see deflator comments above). Year-to-year change in nominal GDP turned negative in the first quarter, down 0.53%, for the first time since the second-quarter of 1958. Annual growth in the fourth quarter was 1.21%.      

Pending GDP. GDI and GNP Release Due Next Month: The BEA’s GDP-like measures for first-quarter 2009; Gross National Product (GNP), where GDP is GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments); and Gross Domestic Income (GDI), which is the income-side equivalent of the GDP’s consumption estimate; will not be estimated until next month’s release, due to the usual unreliability of the data compiled for the "advance" estimate.

Major GDP Benchmark Revision Scheduled:The BEA plans a grand benchmark revision on July 31st, along with the "advance" estimate of second-quarter GDP. The revisions will include the introduction of new methodologies. The pending changes will be assessed shortly. What remains likely is that recent economic history — as reported for the GDP — should appear to have been relatively weaker than initially published. Minimally, the new data should reflect quarterly GDP contractions that go back to at least first-quarter 2008, consistent with the National Bureau of Economic Research’s timing of the current recession.   Further back in time, however, prior history back to 1929 likely will be revised higher, reflecting the "benefits" of new methodologies. 

Week Ahead.  Employment/Unemployment: The April employment report is due for release next Friday (May 8th). The outlook remains as discussed in the most recent newsletter. With continuing deterioration in underlying economic activity, the April payroll survey should plunge again, by more than 700,000 jobs, along with a further spike in the unemployment rate. Political/financial-market considerations, however, might favor actual reporting that is somewhat more positive than whatever the consensus outlook is a week before the release.

 

__________

Flash Update

Monday, April 27th, 2009

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

April 27, 2009

 

__________

 

"Adverse" Stress Test Assumptions Close to Standard CBO Projections

Economy Is Not in Recovery

More than Half of Existing Home Sales Are "Distressed"

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next planned Flash Update will follow the release of the "advance" estimate of first-quarter 2009 GDP on Wednesday, April 29th.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

While the broad outlook remains unchanged, as discussed in most recent newsletter (No. 50), a couple of developments during the last week have had or may have some impact on both the economy and the financial markets. Stories of China building up its gold reserves and renewing its call for an overhaul of the U.S. dollar’s reserve currency status appear to have had some positive impact on gold prices and negative impact on the foreign exchange value of the U.S. dollar. Continued prodding of the U.S. dollar by China likely will accelerate the process of other major U.S. trading partners moving to abandon their dollar support.  The fate of the greenback and the timing of the loss of global confidence in it remain key to the timing of resurgence in U.S. consumer inflation.

Beyond the potential human tragedy, the unfolding story of a possible swine-flu pandemic could hit economic activity hard. If the perceived threat to public health becomes severe enough, it quickly could impact the normal course of commerce, particularly in terms of travel and conditions where heavy person-to-person contact is usual, including day-to-day operations of many businesses. Even with a minimal threat, there likely will be ongoing heavy media coverage over the near-term, and such tends to slow personal consumption, as people sit at home watching television instead of going out to the malls to shop. Such also might provide some temporary distraction for the public from the still-mounting economic and financial system woes.

As discussed in the sections below, other circumstances surrounding the broad economic outlook and the systemic solvency crisis have not improved  

Stress Tests Were Not Too Stressful.  The Federal Reserve published on Friday (April 24th) the economic assumptions used in stress-testing the capital adequacy of U.S. banks. The "adverse" assumptions used for the process, however, were not particularly adverse. For example, the assumptions all had some form of recovery in 2010, instead of allowing for ongoing economic contraction.

The upfront numbers for 2009 are the most important in terms of current stresses on the banks. The baseline numbers were based on various consensus forecasts, which usually are of minimal value in times of recession. Moreover, the "alternative more adverse" numbers for the stressing were close to the current "baseline" projections already bring used by the Congressional Budget Office (CBO). As with the consensus numbers, CBO estimates tend to be overly optimistic.

Specifically, the stress testing used a baseline 2009 GDP contraction of 2.0%, with an "alternative more adverse" circumstance of a 3.3% contraction. The CBO is projecting a 2009 contraction of 3.0%. The stress testing used a baseline 2009 unemployment rate of 8.4%, with an "alternative more adverse" circumstance of 8.9%. The CBO is projecting a 2009 unemployment rate of 8.8%.

It is not likely that the stress-testing process here came close to assessing the existing or potential capital needs of the various banks involved in the process.

Home Sales Remain in Trouble. Seasonally-adjusted March new home sales were reported by the Census Bureau to have eased month-to-month by 0.6% (up by 5.6% net of revisions) +/- 22% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a revised 8.2% (4.7%) gain February. Year-to-year, March sales fell by 30.6%, versus a revised 37.4% (previously 41.1%) in February.

The highly volatile new home sales series (the recently reported small monthly changes are not statistically significant) may be suffering some seasonal factor distortions. Year-to-year contraction remains severe. 

Seasonally-adjusted March existing home sales were reported by the National Association of Realtors (NAR) as down by 3.0% (3.2% net of revisions), after a revised 4.9% (previously 5.1%) gain in February. Year-to-year, March sales fell by 7.1%, following a 4.8% (previously 4.6%) annual contraction in February.

The existing home sales series is heavily skewed by foreclosures, which do not reflect normal supply and demand circumstances. The NAR estimated that more than half the March sales were "distressed," which was up from an estimate of 40% to 45% of sales in February. Such indicates an ongoing, severely troubled housing circumstance.

New Orders for Durable Goods. Continuing a pattern of downside revisions to prior reporting by the Census Bureau, the regularly-volatile new orders for durable goods fell by 0.8% (by 2.6% net of revisions) month-to-month in March. Such followed a revised 2.1% (previously 3.4%) monthly gain in February. In terms of year-to-year change, before any accounting for inflation, March’s new orders were down by 23.9%, following February’s revised record annual decline of 29.7% (previously 28.9%). Adjusted for inflation the series would have shown even sharper contractions.

The widely followed new orders for nondefense capital goods rose by 1.9% (down by 1.5% net of revisions) in March, following a revised 4.9% (was 7.4%) in February. Year-to-year, March orders were down by 29.4%, following a revised annual decline in February of 37.4% (previously 35.5%).

Week Ahead: GDP. Expectations for the "advance" estimate of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth in the first-quarter GDP appear to be favoring a less severe pace of contraction than was seen in the fourth quarter. Such also happily would coincide with the developing market hype that the economy is turning. Briefing.com reports a consensus estimate of a 4.9% annualized contraction versus the "final" estimate of a 6.3% contraction in the fourth quarter. The GDP estimate at the "advance" level is around 90% guesstimate and at least is targeted partially at consensus forecasts.

Aside for some boost from government spending and minor improvement in net exports, most of the first-quarter GDP components should be in contraction. Based on the patterns of deepening annual contraction for the broad payroll and industrial production series, which tend to be coincident with the GDP, the first-quarter’s contraction should be more severe than the fourth-quarter’s (see SGS Newsletter No. 50). Nonetheless, the advance reporting is most likely to come in around the consensus, subject to downward revisions in the next two monthly updates, along with significant downside revisions to all of recent GDP history with the grand benchmark revision due at the end of July.      

 

__________

Newsletter (Issue No. 50)

Monday, April 20th, 2009

Issue Number 50

April 20, 2009

The usual four sections of the Newsletter are available as separate web-pages as well as individual PDF documents.  The Newsletter also remains  available in its entirety as a single, large PDF document.

We strongly recommend that when making a printed copy of the newsletter (in part or whole) you use the PDF version.  If your computer does not yet handle PDFs, we urge you to download the free, Adobe Acrobat reader.

Newsletter as a Single PDF

Newsletter by Section:

Section 1. Overview   (PDF)  (HTML)

Section 2. Markets Perspective  (PDF)  (HTML)

Section 3. Reporting Perspective    (PDF)  (HTML)

Section 4. Reporting/Market Focus   (PDF)  (HTML)

 ___________________________________________

 

 
 
 
___________________________________________
 

PLEASE NOTE: The next SGS Newsletter currently is targeted for late-May.  Intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted in response to key economic and/or financial-market developments.

Earlier editions of the SGS writings and Special Reports referenced in the text can be found on the Archives tab at www.shadowstats.com.
 

 

Flash Update

Wednesday, April 15th, 2009

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 FLASH UPDATE

April 15, 2009

__________

March Annual CPI-U Declined by 0.38% (SGS Gained 7.3%)

First Official Deflation in 54 Years
(But They Don’t Calculate CPI Like They Did in 1955)

Annual Industrial Production Collapse Worst
Since Shutdown Following WWII

First Quarter Industrial Production Plunged an Annualized 20%

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The full newsletter is about to enter the production process and should be posted in the next couple of days. It will be up-to-date in terms of today’s (April 15th) economic releases.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Annual CPI-U Inflation Turns Negative.  As oil prices rebounded from recent lows, "declining" monthly energy prices pushed the March CPI-U into its first formal deflation (year-to-year decline) since August 1955. As measured by the monthly average spot price of West Texas Intermediate, crude oil prices rose by 22.5% in the month of March 2009, a pace faster than the 10.7% monthly gain see in March 2008. Energy prices in the March CPI-U, however, reportedly dropped on a monthly basis by a seasonally-adjusted 3.0% (down 0.7% unadjusted). Part of the inflation hit was due to seasonal adjustments that largely are ignored by inflation purists (the Bureau of Labor Statistics itself reports the CPI-U, upfront, on a not-seasonally-adjusted basis, both in terms of monthly and annual inflation).

Barring a new, extreme collapse in oil prices, the current consumer price deflation — like the sporadic annual deflation seen in the late 1940s and 1950s — should be brief and shallow, unlike the catastrophically long and deep deflation of the Great Depression. As a significant aside, if inflation today were calculated the way it was back in 1955, the March 2009, CPI-U annual inflation rate likely would have topped 7% (see the Alternative Consumer Inflation Measures section below). As is discussed in the pending newsletter, the Federal Reserve’s efforts at debasing the U.S. dollar are likely to succeed, damaging the greenback’s value against other currencies, spiking oil prices and boosting domestic consumer price inflation.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported this morning (April 15th) that the seasonally-adjusted March CPI-U declined by 0.14% (up by 0.24% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, versus a 0.39% (0.50% unadjusted) gain in February.  Year-to-year inflation (unadjusted) in March turned negative, down by 0.38% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval), versus a 0.24% gain in February.  For those interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I continue to refer you to CPIwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in April 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.15% monthly increase seen in April 2008.  The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from March’s annual inflation rate of negative 0.38%. With upside pressure on oil prices, annual CPI-U should be near its trough for the current cycle, although another month or two of minor official deflation now appears likely.

Real Retail Sales.  Updating the April 14th Flash Update, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted March retail sales fell by 1.01% (down 1.14% before inflation adjustment), versus a February decline of 0.09% (a 0.30% gain before inflation adjustment). Year-to-year, March real retail sales fell by 9.01% (9.41% before inflation adjustment) versus a 7.95% (7.89% before inflation adjustment) decline in February. The annual real change here continued to be skewed by unusual patterns in the seasonally-adjusted CPI-U used for deflation of the series. 

The pace of annualized decline in the inflation-adjusted retail series narrowed sharply in first-quarter 2009 to 2.5%, from 18.78% in the fourth quarter. The series is subject to a benchmark revision at the end of April, which should result in downside revisions to prior reporting. 

On a three-month moving-average basis, the March and February annual real declines were 8.58% and 9.07%, respectively. Along with annual declines of the last several months, the March annual decline in the moving-average remains is at the low for the two historical retail series of the post-World War II era.

CPI-W.  The BLS reported that the narrower, seasonally-adjusted March CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) declined by 0.14% (gained 0.25% unadjusted), following a 0.44% (0.49% unadjusted) gain in February.  Year-to-year inflation declined by 0.92% in March, following a 0.26% decline in February.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — fell by 0.81% in March, versus a decline of 0.26% in February. 

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth eased to roughly 2.9%, versus 3.6% in February, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to roughly 7.3% (7.25% for those using the extra digit), versus 7.7% in February, and has been updated on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com.  The alternate numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data.

The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure adjusts on an additive basis for the cumulative impact on the annual inflation rate of various methodological changes made the BLS. Over the decades, the BLS has altered the meaning of the CPI from being a measure of the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, to something that no longer reflects the constant-standard-of-living concept. Roughly five percentage points of the additive SGS adjustment reflect the BLS’s formal estimate of the impact of methodological changes; roughly two percentage points reflect changes by the BLS, where impact has not been formally published by the BLS.

Industrial Production Plunged. Incorporating an annual benchmark revision, which showed weaker historical production growth than previously reported, the Federal Reserve reported that seasonally-adjusted March industrial production fell by 1.5% (down 2.3% net of revisions [pre-benchmark]) for the month, after a revised 1.5% (previously [pre-benchmark] 1.4%) decline in February. The year-to-year decline in March deepened to a contraction of 12.8%, the weakest showing since war-time production was shut down after World War II. Such followed February’s 11.8% (previously [pre-benchmark] 11.2%) drop. 

Consistent with the still-deepening recession/depression, first-quarter 2009 production showed an annualized quarterly contraction of 20.0%, following and 12.7% contraction in the fourth quarter. A depression is defined (SGS) as a recession where the peak-to-trough economic contraction exceeds 10%, a level exceeded not only by current year-to-year contraction, but also in annualized terms by both fourth-quarter 2008 and first-quarter 2009 industrial production.

 

__________

Flash Update

Tuesday, April 14th, 2009

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 FLASH UPDATE

April 14, 2009

__________

Annual Retail Sales Contraction Remains
At Post-World War II Era Lows

"Core" March Retail Sales Down 1.4%

PPI Takes Energy Cost Hit Despite Rising Oil Prices

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The full newsletter is about to enter the production process and should be posted in the next couple of days. A Flash Update will follow tomorrow’s (Wednesday, April 15th) CPI release. 

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

Retail Sales Subject to Upcoming Revisions. The Census Bureau reported that seasonally-adjusted March retail sales fell by 1.14% (down 0.70% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a revised 0.30% monthly gain (previously a 0.11% contraction) in February. On a year-to-year basis, March retail sales fell by 9.41%, versus a revised 7.89% (previously 8.58%) plunge in February. By a wide historical margin, the three-month moving average of the nominal (not-adjusted for inflation) year-to-year contraction continued the worst levels of post-World War II reporting. 

The latest reporting saw upside revisions to February and January, along with mixed revisions to earlier data. The series is subject to a benchmark revision on April 30th, and some of the current revisions may be positioning the relative monthly changes in near-term data for that update. In general, though, the benchmark revisions should show that retail sales of recent years have been weaker than reported previously. Further detail will be discussed in the newsletter.

Core Retail Sales.  Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 1.35% (down 1.02% net of revisions) in March, following a revised 0.11% gain (previously a 0.31% drop) in February. Those numbers contrasted with the official aggregate decrease of 1.14% in March and a revised 0.30% gain in February.  On an annual basis, March core retail sales fell by 7.00%, versus a revised 5.25% (was 6.54%) decline in February.

Real Retail Sales.  With minimally higher gasoline prices, and with a small gain (Briefing.com consensus at 0.2%) expected in the March CPI-U release, March’s real retail sales should have been negative on both a monthly and annual basis. Details will follow in tomorrow’s Flash Update after the CPI release.

Producer Price Index Drop Exacerbated by Seasonals. Despite rebounding oil and gasoline prices, energy costs tanked the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted producer price index (PPI). For March, the PPI fell by 1.2% (fell by 0.7% before seasonal adjustment). Such followed a 0.1% gain (0.1% unadjusted loss) month-to-month in February.   The BLS data showed March’s year-to-year PPI inflation contracted by 3.5%, versus a 1.3% drop in February. 

Such was the fourth month of formal PPI deflation (year-to-year price decline), subsequent to a 0.4% gain reported for November.  Since 1980, the finished goods PPI has shown formal deflation in 1986, 1994, 1997/1998 and 2001/2002, without the CPI-U ever following suit. As with the current circumstance, those declines and related index volatility often were tied to large swings in oil prices.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted March intermediate goods fell by 1.5% (down by 0.9% in February), and crude goods eased by 0.3% (down by 4.5% in February). The decline in year-to-year inflation continued to deepen, with March intermediate goods down 8.9% (down by 5.2% in February) and March crude goods down by 39.0% (down by 34.7% in February).

 

__________

 

Flash Update

Thursday, April 9th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - April 9, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

April 9, 2009

 

__________

 

Reported Trade Deficit Narrowing Suggests U.S. Recession
Is Worse than Downturn in Rest of World

 

__________

PLEASE NOTE: Publication of the pending full newsletter is planned for Monday, April 13th. Its posting on www.shadowstats.com will be advised by e-mail.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Imported Oil Prices Hold at Bottom. To the extent that this morning’s (April 9th) Census Bureau report of a sharp narrowing in the February U.S. trade deficit can be believed, it suggests that U.S. demand (reflected in imports) is slowing faster than demand in the rest of the world (reflected in exports). On a seasonally-adjusted basis, U.S. monthly purchases from the rest of the world (imports) fell by 5.1% in February, while U.S. sales to the rest of the world (exports) actually increased by 1.6%.

As reported, the seasonally-adjusted February deficit narrowed to $26.0 billion from a revised $36.2 (was $36.0) billion in January. Even as officially adjusted for inflation, the deficit improved, with the January and February levels suggesting that the net export account in gross domestic product will make a net positive contribution in the upcoming "advance" estimate of first-quarter GDP.

The price of imported oil was reported at $39.22 per barrel for the month, down from January’s $39.81. The recent upturn in oil prices should widen the trade deficit anew in the months ahead.

Erratic reporting in the trade data, particularly tied to oil imports, leaves these numbers highly suspect. Distortions of paperwork flows through the Customs Service can generate meaningful distortions in the monthly reporting.

Week Ahead: Perhaps due to the holidays, I am not finding anything in the way of publicly published consensus expectations for next week’s economic releases. That said, aside from some possible minor month-to-month bottom-bouncing at a low level of activity, economic conditions still are deteriorating. Irrespective of reported month-to-month changes, year-to-year contraction in each of the economic series should deepen.

Nonetheless, March reports on Retail Sales (due Tuesday, April 14th), Industrial Production (due Wednesday, April 15th) and Housing Starts (due Thursday, April 15th) have a shot of coming in on the soft side of expectations for monthly changes. Consensus estimates will have been influenced heavily by some prior-month bottom-bouncing and some suspect reporting (i.e. prior-month results that received relative boosts from downward revisions to previous reporting or from unusual seasonal factors). Some downside catch-up is a fair possibility for retail sales and housing, in particular.

On the March inflation front, the PPI (due Tuesday, April 14th) is regularly volatile, but it should show some upside pressure from the recent rebound in oil prices.

Consumer prices are not surging anew, yet. Annual inflation as measure by the CPI-U (due Wednesday, April 15th) likely will continue to hover above zero, with a minor month-to-month boost from higher gasoline prices.

Annual CPI-U inflation would increase or decrease in March 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.38% monthly increase seen in March 2008.  The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from February’s annual inflation rate of 0.24%.

Flash Updates will follow the retail sales and CPI releases, regardless of the timing of the pending newsletter’s publication.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, April 3rd, 2009

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

April 3, 2009

 __________

Seriously Flawed BLS Payroll Reporting

March Payroll Loss Was 750,000 Net of Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias,
749,000 Net of Reporting Revisions

SGS-Alternate Unemployment Rate at 19.8%

__________

BLS Jobs Reporting Is Seriously Flawed, at Best. This morning’s (April 3rd) reported March jobs loss of 663,000 again was close to consensus expectations, but, as has been common in recent releases, major downward revisions to prior reporting helped to mute the current headline jobs loss significantly. In each of the six most recent monthly payroll reports, the prior month’s payroll level was revised lower. For October 2008 to March 2009 reporting, the downward revisions to the prior month’s seasonally-adjusted payroll level were respectively: 179,000, 199,000, 154,000, 311,000 (still significant net of benchmark revisions), 161,000 and 86,000.   Five of the six revisions exceeded the Bureau of Labor Statistics’ (BLS) 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000 jobs for monthly change.

Net of revisions, the March jobs loss would have been 749,000. Net of the Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias (CSFB), which reflects the reporting problems, the loss would have been 750,000, in line with my estimate in the March 29th Flash Update.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 663,000 (down 749,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for March 2009, following an unrevised 651,000 jobs loss in February, but January’s jobs loss was revised from 655,000 to 741,000. Annual contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls continued to deepen, down 3.56% in March, versus a revised 3.10% (was 3.12%) in February. The annual decline in March was the deepest since July 1958. The seasonally-adjusted series also continued contracting year-to-year, down by 3.48% in March versus a revised 3.08% (was 3.02%) contraction in February.

 Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias. The pattern of impossible biases being built into the headline monthly payroll employment continued with March 2009 reporting (see the opening section above and the Reporting/Market Focus in SGS Newsletter No. 43 of June 10, 2008). Instead of the headline jobs loss of 663,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what I call the concurrent seasonal factor bias — would have shown a more-severe monthly jobs loss of about 750,000. This upside reporting bias has been seen in 11 of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 1,345,000. A worksheet on this is available upon request.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. An element that helped to soften the reported March jobs loss was the monthly upside bias factor (birth-death model). Never designed to handle the downside pressures from a recession, the model adds a fairly consistent upside bias to the payroll levels each year, averaging about 60,000 jobs per month, assuming the BLS adequately is seasonally adjusting for same. The upside adjustment to unadjusted March 2009 payrolls was 114,000, versus 134,000 in February.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed March employment down by 861,000, where February had been down by 351,000.

The March 2009 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed still another statistically-significant increase, to 8.54% +/- 0.23%, from 8.08% in February.  Unadjusted U.3 rose to 9.0% in March from 8.9% in February.  The broader March U.6 unemployment rate jumped to an adjusted 15.6% (16.2% unadjusted) from 14.8% (16.0% unadjusted) in February.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the bulk of the discouraged workers. Adding them back into the total unemployed, unemployment in line with common experience, as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure, rose to about 19.8% in March, from 19.1% in February.

Employment Environment. The continued significant deterioration in March’s employment environment broadly was in line with deterioration in the better-quality employment-environment indicators, which not only led the March report, but also are leading indicators to the April report:

- February newspaper help-wanted advertising (Conference Board) held at its historic low level for a third month, with year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis down by a record 44.6%. The deepening annual fall-off in online help-wanted advertising (Conference Board) also continued, down 36.0% year-to-year in March, versus an annual decline of 34.3% in February. The Monster.com online survey estimated that online jobs offerings were down 29% year-to-year in March, versus a 26% decline in February.

- New claims for unemployment insurance have continued to surge, with the 17-week moving average up by 72.4% as of March 28th (the highest since the 1975 recession), versus 66.9% as of February 28th.

- Employment readings continued in the deepest recession territory for the February and March manufacturing and non-manufacturing purchasing managers surveys.

Money Supply Growth Slower in March. With little impact in hand from the Fed’s expanded dollar debasement activities on data reported through March 23rd, the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for March 2009 likely will show minimal month-to-month change in the seasonally-adjusted level, with year-to-year change likely slowing from about 9.9% in February to 8.5% to 8.7% in March, despite probable higher annual growth in M2.   Growth in large time deposits and institutional money funds has been slowing.

A preliminary M3 estimate for May will be post on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com over the weekend, following tonight’s banking report from the Fed. I expect the broad money measure to expand sharply in the months ahead. 

Week Ahead: Trade Deficit: The markets purportedly are looking for a slight widening of January’s monthly trade deficit (briefing.com), due for release next Thursday (April 9th). Oil prices have bottomed in the trade data, so the recent upturn in oil prices should again result in bigger deficits in the months ahead. This series continues be to be subject to heavy distortions.

The broad outlook is unchanged. The next full newsletter remains pending, and its likely publication date will be advised early next week.

 

__________

Flash Update

Monday, March 30th, 2009

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

March 29, 2009

 __________

Broad Money Growth Still Slowing

March Employment Conditions Deteriorated Sharply

March Jobs Number Open to Positive Massaging

 __________

 

PLEASE NOTE: Due to unexpected travel needs, the full newsletter has been pushed back until next week. The general outlook is unchanged and any needed intervening communications will be in the form of Flash Updates (one is scheduled for Friday, April 3rd, following the release of the March employment report) or an Alert. Also planned in April is an updated and expanded Hyperinflation Special Report. Details will follow with the newsletter. 

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Annual M3 Growth Still Slowing. With M3 components that are reported on a weekly basis (M2, institutional money funds and partial large time deposits) updated through March 16/18, annual growth in the SGS-Ongoing M3 measure appears set for some further slowing, likely to ease from February’s 9.9% pace of year-to-year growth. Impact from the Fed’s recently announced increase in debt monetization, however, has not impacted these numbers, yet.

In terms of bank reserves and the monetary base for the two weeks ended March 25th, though, the pace of annual growth has picked up again. Year-to-year change in the St. Louis Fed’s Adjusted Monetary Base (seasonally adjusted) rose to 99.5% from 82.6% in the two-week period ended March 11th. Consisting primarily of currency in circulation and bank reserves, the monetary base is the Fed’s primary tool for attempting to control growth in the money supply. The current annual growth upturn was due to higher growth in excess reserves, while growth in required reserves (related to some depository accounts) slowed.

The Fed’s efforts at debasing the U.S. dollar (creating inflation) eventually will meet with success, and it will be reflected early on in a weakening of the exchange rate for the U.S. currency, along with rising prices for oil and other dollar-denominated commodities.

Week Ahead: Employment/Unemployment: The March employment report is due for release on Friday (April 3rd), with a Flash Update following. Consensus expectations (Briefing.com) are running around a 656,000 decline for March nonfarm payrolls (February declined 651,000), with unemployment expected to rise to 8.5% from 8.1% in January. While the unemployment expectations are not unreasonable, the jobs loss should top 750,000, barring massaged results. 

Given recent financial-market turmoil and the Administration’s political needs, a reported jobs loss smaller than February’s 651,000 probably would be preferred on both fronts. There has been a growing trend in recent economic reporting of suspect positive surprises in month-to-month change against consensus expectations. Irrespective of such a possibility in the upcoming employment report, the annual contraction in employment should continue to deepen.

Other factors have indicated that March’s employment environment deteriorated versus February. Consider that each of the following series is a leading indicator to upcoming March and April employment/unemployment reporting:

- February newspaper help-wanted advertising (Conference Board) held at its historic low level for a third month, with year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis down by a record 44.6%. The deepening annual fall-off in online help-wanted advertising (Conference Board) also continued, down 36.0% year-to-year in March, versus an annual decline of 34.3% in February. 

- New claims for unemployment insurance have continued to surge, with the 17-week moving average up by 71.1% as of March 21st (the highest since the 1975 recession), versus 64.7% as of February 21st.

- Employment readings continued in the deepest recession territories for the February manufacturing and non-manufacturing purchasing managers surveys. 

 

__________

Flash Update

Thursday, March 26th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - March 26, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

March 26, 2009

 

__________

 

U.S. Dollar Moving Towards the Brink, Again

4th-Qtr Gross Domestic Income Down 7.5%

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: Today’s brief Flash Update addresses the "final" GDP estimate revision for fourth-quarter 2008 and touches upon the shifting environment for the U.S. dollar. Greater detail will follow in the next newsletter, which remains on track for publication over the coming weekend.

 – Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Dollar Issues Surface as Economy Sinks. The last couple of days have seen renewed Fed monetization of longer-term Treasury debt, a Treasury auction that did not go well, the U.S. Secretary of the Treasury stumbling in defense of U.S. dollar’s reserve-currency status, and mounting global criticism of U.S. fiscal and monetary excesses.   Add to this background deepening systemic-solvency and economic crises, a new U.S. administration that rapidly is losing credibility, ongoing massive trade deficits and interest rates about as low as they can go, and circumstances are in place for renewed heavy selling of the U.S. dollar. At such time as heavy dumping of the U.S. dollar and dollar-denominated assets begins, the flight from the dollar quickly should turn to flight-to-safety outside the dollar, and the Fed will find itself having to monetize a great deal more U.S. Treasury debt than currently promised. As will be discussed in the newsletter due for publication over this weekend, these developments could set the trigger for the ultimate hyperinflation that will consume the U.S. currency. The U.S. dollar remains burdened by $65 trillion in federal debt and in the net present value of unfunded federal liabilities. That total is growing rapidly.

Major GDP Benchmark Revision Scheduled. The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) plans a grand benchmark revision in late-July, including the introduction of new methodologies. The pending changes will be assessed as details become available.  What remains likely is that recent economic history — as reflected in the GDP — should appear to have been relatively weaker than initially published. Minimally, the new data should reflect quarterly GDP contractions that go back to at least first-quarter 2008, consistent with the National Bureau of Economic Research’s timing of the current recession.  

GDP Revisions No More Than Statistical Noise. The BEA’s "final" estimate revision of real (inflation-adjusted) annualized growth in the fourth-quarter 2008 GDP was a statistically-significant decline of 6.34% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), little changed from the "preliminary" estimate of 6.25% and deeper than the initial "advance" estimate of a 3.80% contraction. Such was against a 0.51% downturn reported in the third quarter. In terms of year-to-year change, the fourth quarter contraction now stands at 0.84%, versus the "preliminary" 0.82% and "advance" 0.18% contractions, and versus the third quarter’s annual gain of 0.75%. The latest revisions were no more than statistical noise.

The fourth-quarter GDP inflation rate (GDP deflator) revised minimally to 0.61% from 0.51%, accounting for the minor downward revision to the real GDP change. The nominal (not-adjusted-for-inflation) GDP, was unrevised in aggregate. The "advance" fourth-quarter deflator estimate was a 0.26% contraction, versus an indicated annualized third-quarter inflation rate of 3.88%.

Based on earlier reporting methodologies and removal of some reporting gimmicks, the SGS-Alternate GDP estimate for the fourth quarter remains an annual (not annualized) contraction of roughly 4.1% versus a 3.3% contraction in the third quarter, against official respective estimates of a 0.8% decline and 0.7% gain. Against reporting of underlying economic series, the annualized quarterly contraction likely was in excess of 7% for the fourth quarter, but the latest revised 6.3% estimate remains the closest to reality reported by the BEA in a long time. Nonetheless, GDP reporting remains virtually worthless and is little more than political propaganda.

GDI Shows Greater Economic Weakness Than GDP: The BEA’s GDP-like measures for fourth-quarter 2008; Gross National Product (GNP), where GDP is GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments); and Gross Domestic Income (GDI), which is the income-side equivalent of the GDP’s consumption estimate; were estimated for the first time in the "final" fourth-quarter report.

Annualized real GNP growth for fourth-quarter 2008 was reported as a 5.49% contraction, down from a 0.17% contraction in the third quarter. Year-to-change also contracted, down 0.93%, following a 0.83% gain in the third-quarter.

With a widening discrepancy versus GDP, the theoretically-equivalent GDI showed a real fourth-quarter annualized contraction of 7.54%, following a 0.86% contraction in the third quarter. Such was the fifth quarter-to-quarter contraction in real GDI in the last eight quarters of reporting. Year-to-change was a contraction of 2.10%, following a 0.36% contraction in the third-quarter. The latest GDI data reflect several quarters of revisions.

 

__________

Flash Update

Wednesday, March 25th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - March 25, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

March 25, 2009

 

__________

 

Durable Goods Orders Tumble in Record Annual Decline

Pattern of Happy Spins Being Given to Volatile Monthly Data

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: Today’s brief Flash Update addresses the durable goods report, which likely will be heavily and misleadingly hyped as a harbinger of economic rebound, given the reported month-to-month gain. The newsletter is on track for publication over the coming weekend.

 – Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Beware of Market Hype on Volatile Data. As with the recent housing starts report, reported month-to-month changes in highly volatile series can surprise market expectations. Also, as discussed in recent writings, some month-to-month bottom-bouncing can be expected in a number of series, as business conditions hit a plateau of low-level activity, before moving lower again. With the Administration, Fed and Wall Street all pushing for improved economic reporting, a note of caution is appropriate. Generally, the best indicator as to how an economic series is performing is to look at the pattern of its year-to-year change. Such mutes much of the impact of revisions and eliminates a number of problems with seasonal-factor adjustments. Such an assessment of this morning’s (March 25th) durable goods report shows little reason for market elation.

Durable Goods Annual Growth at Record Low. The regularly-volatile new orders for durable goods reportedly rose by 3.4% month-to-month in February, as reported by the Census Bureau. Given the high volatility of the series, such a seasonally-adjusted monthly increase is of little significance, particularly where most of the gain was due to downside prior period revisions. Net of revisions, the February orders rose by 1.1%. January’s previously reported monthly contraction of 5.2% revised to a contraction of 7.3%. The same pattern of revisions was seen in the prior release.

More importantly, before any accounting for inflation, February’s new orders were down by 28.9% from February 2008, setting a record annual decline for the current series, which goes back to 1992 (the reading is the worst of the current downturn). January’s annual decline was revised to 27.9% (previously 26.4%). Adjusted for inflation the series would have shown even sharper contractions.

The widely followed new orders for nondefense capital goods rose by 7.4%, again heavily distorted by prior-period revisions. Net of revisions, February orders rose by just 0.4%. In January, orders fell by a revised 8.9% (previously down by 2.7%). Year-to-year, February orders were down by 35.5%, following a revised 35.4% (was 31.4%) in January.

 

__________

Alert

Monday, March 23rd, 2009

ALERT - March 23, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

A L E R T

 

March 23, 2009

__________

 

Fed’s Effort at Dollar Debasement Had Some Immediate "Success"

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: Developments of the last week have started to firm-up possible timing and likely triggers for a major U.S. dollar crisis and the onset of a U.S. inflation cycle that should climax in a hyperinflation. Such will be more fully addressed in the upcoming newsletter, which, as result, has been pushed back a week to this coming weekend. Any intervening Flash Update or Alert will follow, as indicated by systemic or economic developments.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Outlook Darkens for U.S. Inflation and U.S. Dollar. With a still-intensifying U.S. economic downturn, with the Fed moving as rapidly as it can to debase the U.S. currency, and with the outlook for the U.S. fiscal condition spiraling out of control, the outlook and timing for a massive U.S. dollar sell-off and eventual U.S. hyperinflation have taken turns for the worse.

Debt Monetization and Dollar Debasement Accelerate. The Federal Open Market Committee pushed ahead last Wednesday (March 18th) with Fed Chairman Bernanke’s program to debase the U.S. dollar, ostensibly to prevent consumer deflation by creating inflation.  One reason likely behind the timing of the FOMC move was the apparent ongoing deterioration in the systemic solvency crisis, as suggested by the still-continuing lack of meaningful weekly growth in the major components of the broad money supply M3 (see Alert of March 9th). 

That unfolding solvency crisis also pushed Treasury Secretary Geithner to release detail of the latest banking bailout package, today (March 23rd), where the government and private sector will invest together to relieve troubled banks of bad assets. The Treasury and the private sector will leverage the needed funds from the remnants of the initial bailout package, using lending by the Fed and the FDIC, further expanding monetary and fiscal risks. The package does not appear to have too much new. The Fed’s Term Auction Facility (TAF), which was designed at least to mask so-called toxic assets on bank balance sheets, may be expanded in an effort to provide cash for the "bailout," but it could be worth noting that the TAF auctions have fallen short of potential, with only $117 billion of an available $150 billion borrowed in the latest auction.   

Getting back to the Fed, the FOMC announced that the U.S. central bank would expand its debt monetization by more than $1 trillion of government and quasi-government debt in the months ahead, including $300 billion of longer-term U.S. Treasury securities. The reintroduced precedent of buying Treasury notes and bonds formally has opened the door for rapid monetization of unwanted new Treasury issuance as well as of any Treasuries dumped into the markets by disgruntled foreign central banks and other investors.

The announced Fed purchases also included $750 billion of agency-backed (Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac) mortgage-backed securities and up to $100 billion of agency debt. Despite broad market presumptions to the contrary, the U.S. government’s latest annual financial statements — as signed off on by the U.S. Treasury and the GAO — indicate (post-conservatorships) that "Their [Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac] debt is not guaranteed by the Federal Government." Such protestations likely are moot, as the U.S. government has little choice but to back or buy those securities; it just does not want to book them on its already severely-impaired balance sheet.

In response to the FOMC action, the markets immediately stripped the global purchasing power of the U.S. dollar by 4% to 5% and more, as measured against major currencies, the price of gold and key commercial commodity prices, such as in dollar-denominated oil prices. Eventual follow-through should be reflected in strong broad money growth and in higher U.S. consumer inflation — Mr. Bernanke’s ultimate target.  

With growing global grumbling over the lack of U.S. fiscal and monetary restraint, Reuters reported (March 18th) that "A U.N. panel will next week recommend that the world ditch the dollar as its reserve currency in favor of a shared basket of currencies." Any such move, and/or any rebasing of dollar-denominated commodity prices, such as oil, in something other than the U.S. dollar, would tend to be highly negative for the greenback and highly inflationary for the United States.

CBO Budget Deficit Projections Explode. Reflecting President Obama’s budget and a worsening economic outlook, the Congressional Budget Office (CBO) has projected fiscal-year deficits for 2009, 2010 and 2011 at $1.8 trillion, $1.4 trillion and $1.0 trillion, respectively. These numbers, however, remain overly optimistic, particularly for 2010 and 2011. I still look at fiscal 2009 topping $2.0 trillion, with commensurate new Treasury funding required. Circumstances are not likely to get any better in 2010 or 2011. With funding of same a near-impossibility in the open markets, again, the Fed’s latest actions effectively confirmed its status as lender of last resort to the U.S. Treasury.   

The CBO revised its forecast for 2009 to an average annual real (inflation-adjusted) GDP contraction of 3.0%, from an earlier 2.2% estimated downturn. Yet, the CBO estimated a return to near-normal 2.9% GDP growth in 2010, and booming growth of 4.0% in 2011, mirroring the overly optimistic tone of earlier Administration economic assumptions. As an aside, the CBO forecast of a 3.0% GDP decline in 2009 would be the deepest economic contraction seen in a regular U.S. business cycle since the 3.4% decline estimated for 1938, which was the trough of the second dip of the Great Depression. A greater 11.0% contraction in 1946 reflected the shutdown of war production and was not a regular business cycle.

Week Ahead: New Orders for Durable Goods.  Look for the regularly volatile durable goods orders (due for release on Thursday, March 25th) to show continued deterioration in year-to-year activity.

GDP. Market expectations are for some further downward revision in the "final" estimate of real (inflation-adjusted) fourth-quarter GDP growth, at 6.6%, versus a prior 6.2% annualized contraction, per Briefing.com. Whatever transpires is not likely to be much more that statistical noise.

 

__________

Flash Update

Wednesday, March 18th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - March 18, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

March 18, 2009

 

__________

 

Annual CPI-U Inches Higher to 0.24% (SGS 7.7%)

Housing Starts Annual Plunge at Historic Extreme

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: A full newsletter should follow over this coming weekend. Any intervening Flash Updates or Alerts would be published as dictated by economic or financial developments. 

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

CPI-U Inflation Bounces Minimally.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported this morning (March 18) that February’s annual CPI-U (CPI for All Urban Consumers) inflation rebounded slightly from January’s near-brush with official deflation (year-to-year decline in the inflation measure), while annual deflation in both the CPI-W and C-CPI-U measures narrowed to 0.3% from the 0.5% deflation reported in January. Annual inflation formally is measured in terms of not-seasonally-adjusted, year-to-year-change, but, curiously, the seasonally-adjusted CPI-U is showing weaker annual inflation (0.2% deflation in January, 0.1% inflation February) than the unadjusted series. That suggests some unusual seasonal-factor games playing here by the BLS, which will be explored in the upcoming newsletter.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported that the seasonally-adjusted February CPI-U rose by 0.39% (up by 0.50% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, versus a 0.28% (0.44% unadjusted) gain in January.  Year-to-year inflation (unadjusted) in February rebounded to 0.24% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval), from 0.03% in January.  For those interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I continue to refer you to CPIwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in March 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.38% monthly increase seen in March 2008.  The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from February’s annual inflation rate of 0.24%. With upside pressure on oil prices, continued avoidance of official deflation is a fair bet for March. Shy of a renewed collapse in oil prices, annual CPI-U should be near its trough for the current cycle.

Real Retail Sales.  Updating the March 12th Flash Update, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted February retail sales fell by 0.50% (down 0.11% before inflation adjustment), versus a January gain of 1.53% (1.82% before deflation adjustment). Year-to-year, February real (inflation adjusted) retail sales fell by 8.64% (8.58% before inflation adjustment) versus an 8.84% (8.97% before inflation adjustment) decline in January. The annual real change here has been skewed by the unusual patterns in the seasonally-adjusted CPI-U, mentioned earlier.

On a three-month moving-average basis, the February and January annual real declines were 9.30% and 9.53%, respectively. The January annual decline in the moving-average was the deepest in the history of the two historical retail series, making the current results still the worst of the post-World War II era.

CPI-W.  The BLS reported that the narrower, seasonally-adjusted January CPI-W (CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers) rose by 0.44% (0.49% unadjusted) following a 0.35% (0.43% unadjusted) gain in January.  Year-to-year inflation in February declined by 0.26%, versus a drop of 0.51% in January.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — also fell by 0.26% in February, following a decline of 0.54% in January. 

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth rose to roughly 3.6% in February, versus 3.3% in January, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to roughly 7.7%, versus 7.5% in January, and has been updated on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com.  The alternate numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data.

Producer Price Index Rises for Second Month. Despite a short-lived relapse in declining oil prices, the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted producer price index (PPI) for February rose by 0.1% (fell by 0.1% unadjusted). Such followed a 0.8% (0.9% unadjusted) month-to-month gain in January.   The BLS data showed February’s year-to-year PPI inflation contracted by 1.3%, versus a 1.0% drop in January. 

Such was the third month of formal PPI deflation (year-to-year price decline), subsequent to a 0.4% gain reported for November.  Since 1980, the finished goods PPI has shown formal deflation in 1986, 1994, 1997/1998 and 2001/2002, without the CPI-U ever following suit. As with the current circumstance, those declines and related index volatility often were tied to large swings in oil prices.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted February intermediate goods fell by 0.9% (down by 0.7% in January), and crude goods fell by 4.5% (down by 2.9% in January). The decline in year-to-year inflation continued to deepen, with February intermediate goods down 5.2% (down by 3.5% in January) and February crude goods down by 34.7% (down by 29.1% in January).

Annual Housing Starts Contraction Still Worst Since Great Depression. Wall Street hypesters got excited yesterday over a reported 22.2% (25.1% net of revisions) +/- 13.4% (95% confidence interval) monthly jump in February housing starts, another highly volatile and irregular series. The previously reported January monthly decline of 16.8% was revised to a decline of 14.5%. 

The February surge was not a signal for a turnaround in the housing market. The Census Bureau report showed all the gain to be in structures with five units or more (apartment buildings, condominiums), and the data were subject to the usual weather, seasonal-factor and reporting distortions. An element of bottom bouncing at a plateau of low-level activity also could be, or soon will be, in play. Importantly, building permits, which tend to lead starts, have not shown any confirming indication of a 79.9% monthly surge in such units, where again, month-to-month volatility often can be attributed to extreme weather, etc.

Volatile series, such as housing starts, generally are best viewed in terms of year-to-year change on a three-month moving-average basis. The three-month moving-average for housing starts as of February 2009 was down by 49.0% from February 2008, the deepest decline ever seen in the two historical housing starts series, going back to post-World War II. Such was versus a revised 47.9% (previously 48.2%) decline in January. For the individual months, February was down by 47.3% year-to-year, versus a revised 55.2% (was 56.2%) annual contraction in January.

 

__________

Alert

Monday, March 16th, 2009

ALERT - March 16, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

A L E R T

 

March 16, 2009

__________

 

Swiss Franc’s Relative Strength Persists
Despite Official Debasement Efforts

"Absolute Confidence in Soundness" of U.S. Treasuries Is Hype

Far From Over, U.S. Economic Downturn Still Is Unfolding

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: This Alert primarily is intended as a review of the Swiss franc circumstance. It also touches briefly upon new themes being put forth by the spinmeisters in Washington and on Wall Street, as to how the economy has bottomed and really was not as bad as the Fed, the Treasury and President Obama had been advertising, and as to the soundness of U.S. Treasury securities. The new themes will be addressed in detail in the pending newsletter (due later this week/next weekend). A Flash Update will follow the release of the February CPI report on Wednesday, March 18th.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Broad Outlook Remains Unchanged. The U.S. economy remains in a severe, deepening recession, which likely will attain depression status this year (depression defined by SGS as a peak-to-trough contraction in inflation-adjusted GDP of more than 10%). Recent strength in the U.S. dollar has been due largely to systemic stresses on dollar demand, not to underlying economic fundamentals. In the months ahead, efforts by the Federal Reserve to debase the U.S. dollar likely will take hold, resulting in much-higher inflation and eventual heavy dumping of the dollar and dollar-denominated assets. Such ultimately should evolve into a hyperinflation, with the U.S. dollar and U.S. Treasuries effectively becoming worthless. Over the long haul, the best hedges against this circumstance remain physical gold and assets outside the U.S. dollar, in currencies such as the Swiss franc and the Canadian dollar.

Usually, when government officials find themselves having to make public assurances as to the strength of a currency, financial market or economy, the area being jawboned is in serious trouble and facing imminent turmoil.  Last week, U.S. President Barrack Obama publicly had to assure Chinese Premier Wen Jiabo that China’s investments in U.S. Treasuries and other dollar-denominated assets were sound. Accordingly, the U.S. fiscal crisis may be coming to a head in the global markets. Where China is looking for reassurances on U.S. fiscal activity, Mr. Obama’s happy comments may be about all that is forthcoming. It is not likely that an administration dedicated to the rapid unfunded growth of the federal government would undertake a serious effort at actual deficit containment. The U.S. also is not likely to issue debt in other currencies. Any appeasement of China’s legitimate financial concerns most likely will be, or is being handled in the context of compromising global political needs.

Also last week, official commentary on the U.S. economy shifted to the plus-side, with suggestions that the economy not only had bottomed, but that the economy really was not that bad to start with, and/or that the recession will end this year. The underlying economic fundamentals remain as bleak today as they were two weeks ago. Consider, for example, this morning’s report of an 11.2% annual contraction in February 2009 industrial production (deepest downturn in 51 years). Nothing has changed other than the Administration has decided to attempt to boost public confidence in the economy. 

Accordingly, there is increased risk of massaged, happier economic data in the months ahead. In the event of surprisingly strong month-to-month reporting in a given series, assessing the impact of prior-period revisions and considering the magnitude and patterns of year-to-year change should help keep the numbers in appropriate perspective.

Swiss National Bank Moves to Debase the Franc. As discussed the in the March 9th Alert, "the worst elements to date of the systemic-solvency and economic crises may be about to unfold." Possibly foreshadowing that was the March 12th announcement by the Swiss National Bank (SNB) of its latest efforts to debase the value of the Swiss franc, including direct market intervention to weaken the franc against the euro. Citing recession and deflation risks, SNB cut interest rates and announced it would purchase private-sector Swiss-franc bonds in an effort to boost systemic liquidity and to weaken the franc versus the euro. According to the Financial Times (March 13), currency traders confirmed Swiss central bank selling of francs, and the U.S. dollar rallied by more than three-percent as a result.

Swiss trade may be dominated by the euro sector, but on a pure currency volume basis in 2007 (Bank for International Settlements), 43% of Swiss franc currency transactions were against the U.S. dollar, 22% of the transactions were versus the euro. As the systemic-solvency crisis intensifies anew, the U.S. Federal Reserve is poised to begin direct monetization of U.S. Treasury debt in an effort to boost money supply growth and U.S. inflation. Having previously raised that possibility, the Fed could be planning to announce imminent monetization fromt this week’s FOMC meeting. If so, the Swiss action might be a preemptive effort to minimize some flight-to-safety boost of the franc from expanded dollar-debasement efforts.

The Swiss franc is a currency I have used regularly as an example of a good, ultimate hedge against the terrible collapse eventually looming for the U.S. dollar. Despite the actions of the SNB, the Swiss franc remains a primary hedge against all the issues plaguing the U.S. currency and eventual hyperinflation. The franc’s relative strength versus other major currencies has been weakened, but its relative ranking still remains at or near the top of major currencies versus the U.S. dollar. As a direct indicator of such, the SNB has had to intervene in the markets in order to depress the franc. Intervention against the pressures of underlying fundamentals usually is a losing proposition, with limited long-term effect. Indeed, the fundamentals still strongly favor the Swiss franc over the U.S. dollar.

As discussed in the March 9th Alert, the U.S. economic, fiscal and systemic conditions generally are relatively much worse than among its major trading partners. As to Switzerland, consider that it runs both fiscal and trade surpluses, versus the horrific budget and trade deficits of the United States. On the fiscal side, Swiss Confederation debt runs about 4% of GDP and is shrinking (hence the buying of private sector debt), while U.S. gross federal debt is about 77% of GDP and likely will top 90% by calendar year-end 2009. As of January 2009, year-to-year growth in broad money supply M3 was 2.8% in Switzerland and 12.0% (SGS) in the United States. (SGS February estimate is 9.9%).

[Corrected Text] Dollar touts have been talking up the risks of the banking crisis versus Switzerland’s smaller GDP. While the bank liabilities indeed are significant, usually there is at least some offset in assets. As of December 2008, Swiss banks were reported with total assets of CHF 3.12 trillion versus liabilities of roughly CHF 2.95 trillion, with liabilities roughly six-times the level of GDP. In contrast, in December 2008, commercial banks in the United States were reported with total assets of USD 12.2 trillion versus liabilities of USD 11.1 trillion, with liabilities roughly 78% of GDP.  Although the Swiss liabilities-to-GDP ratio is much higher, again, assets do more than offset the liabilities.

Underlying currency fundamentals for the Swiss franc not only outshine those of the United States, but also those of most of other major currencies. Accordingly, the Swiss franc continues to hold its relative top ranking versus the greenback, euro and pound sterling. Dampening intervention by the SNB likely will have limited lasting impact.

Of great importance to the ultimate strength of other currencies relative to the U.S. dollar is that the U.S. government effectively was bankrupt coming into the current systemic and economic crises, with $65 trillion of obligations, including outstanding debt and the net present value of its unfunded liabilities. The extreme fiscal imbalance was built up over years of deliberate fiscal abuse by U.S. politicians. With its obligations standing at more than four-times the size of U.S. GDP, and greater than total global GDP, the U.S. faces few practical options beyond meeting its debts by running the currency printing press. The eventual hyperinflation will be seen primarily in the United States, which not so coincidentally also is ground zero for both the systemic-solvency and economic crises.

Week Ahead: CPI. The key report this week is Wednesday’s (March 18th) release of February CPI. With gasoline prices up for the month, expectations (Briefing. com) are running around a 0.3% seasonally-adjusted monthly gain. Such should be enough to keep the annual CPI-U inflation rate hovering above zero. Annual inflation would increase or decrease in February 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.17% monthly increase seen in February 2008. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from January’s annual inflation rate of 0.03%.

A weaker than expected showing could intensify pressures on the Fed to accelerate its monetization of U.S. Treasuries. The next FOMC meeting concludes the day of the CPI release.

 

__________

Flash Update

Thursday, March 12th, 2009

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 FLASH UPDATE

March 12, 2009

 __________

 Annual Retail Sales Contraction Remains Worst of Post-World War II Era

"Core" February Retail Sales Down 0.3%

February 12-Month Rolling Federal Deficit at $955 Billion

 __________

PLEASE NOTE: A full newsletter should follow next week (week of March 16th). Any intervening Flash Updates or Alerts would be published as dictated by economic or financial developments. 

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Retail Sales Monthly Bottom-Bouncing Continued. The Census Bureau reported that seasonally-adjusted February retail sales eased by 0.11% (rose by 0.63% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval). Such followed a revised 1.82% (previously 1.05%) monthly gain in January. On a year-to-year basis, February retail sales fell by 8.58%, versus a revised 8.97% (previously 9.70%) plunge in January. By a wide margin, the three-month moving average of the nominal (not-adjusted for inflation) year-to-year contraction remained the deepest of post-World War II historical reporting. 

The latest reporting saw an upside revision to January, which reversed the recent trend of downward revisions to prior headline reporting. The series is subject to a benchmark revision on April 30th, and some of the current revisions may be positioning the relative monthly changes in near-term data for that update.

What appears to be in place for the second month is the bottom-bouncing suggested in the Flash Update of February 3rd. Economic series usually do not collapse in perpetual freefall, but can bottom-bounce when they hit a low-level plateau of activity. Annual growth patterns, however, tend to remain deep in recession territory, before the next down-leg in activity begins. Also at work may be unusual seasonal-factor adjustments for February, influenced by a sharp one-month monthly contraction in February 2008. The not seasonally adjusted annual growth (adjusted just for calendar differences) was a contraction of 9.2%, which would have resulted in a seasonally-adjusted monthly decline of 0.8% for February 2009.

Core Retail Sales.  Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when "core" inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 0.31% (up 0.62% net of revisions) in February, following a revised 1.71% (previously 0.70%) gain in January. Those numbers contrasted with the official aggregate decrease of 0.11% in February and a revised 1.82% gain in January.  On an annual basis, February core retail sales fell by 6.54%, versus a revised 6.83% (was 7.75%) decline in January.

Real Retail Sales.  With higher gasoline prices, and with a small gain (Briefing.com consensus at 0.3%) expected in the February CPI-U release, February’s real retail sales should have been negative on both a monthly and annual basis. Details will follow in a Flash Update after the CPI release next Wednesday, March 18th.

2009 Federal Deficit Should Top $2 Trillion. Fiscal conditions continued deteriorating in the latest Treasury reporting, with the 12-month rolling federal deficit through February 2009 rising to $954.8 billion from January’s $934.8 billion, which was up from December’s $833.2 billion, November’s $701.3 billion, October’s $635.1 billion and September’s (fiscal 2008) $454.8 billion. In contrast, the 12-month rolling deficit through February 2008 was $263.9 billion.

Viewing the change in the level of gross federal debt bypasses several of the regular reporting manipulations of the government’s financial results and is a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the official, gimmicked deficit reporting. 

Gross federal debt stood at $10.877 trillion ont February 28, 2009, up by $245 billion for the month, and up by $1.519 trillion from February 2008, which in turn was up by $580 billion from February 2007. Gross federal debt stood at $10.632 trillion at January 31, 2009, down by $68 billion for the month, but up by $1.394 trillion from January 31, 2008, which in turn was up $620 billion from January 2007. 

As of the end of September 2008, the close of the government’s fiscal year, gross federal debt stood at $10.025 trillion, up $379 billion for the month and up by $1.017 trillion from September 2007, which in turn was up $501 billion from September 2006.

The official deficit easily should top $2 trillion in the current fiscal year, with related Treasury funding needs likely to facing difficulties, except for buying by the Federal Reserve, lender of last resort to the federal government. On a GAAP-basis (using generally accepted accounting principles), the 2009 deficit likely will top $8 trillion, up from $5.1 trillion in 2008.

 ___

Alert

Monday, March 9th, 2009

 

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

A L E R T

March 9, 2009

__________

Broad Money Supply Growth Slows in February,
Suggesting Intensifying Systemic-Solvency Issues

Fed Likely to Monetize Treasury Debt

Other Than Crisis-Driven Dollar Demand,
U.S. Dollar Fundamentals Are Sharply Negative and Deteriorating

 __________

 

The worst elements to date of the systemic-solvency and economic crises may be about to unfold. Such is suggested not only by the accelerating economic freefall, but also by a sharp slowing in broad money growth. The latter element suggests an intensifying crisis in the U.S. financial system that could lead to a rapid and near-term monetization of U.S. Treasury debt by the Federal Reserve. Despite any near-term market volatility and systemic instabilities, the long-range outlook for much higher U.S. inflation and a much weaker U.S. dollar remains in place.

Based on slightly more than three weeks (out of four) of reported data, the Shadow Government Statistics Ongoing M3 Measure for February 2009 suggests annual broad money growth slowed to roughly 9.9%, from 12.0% in January, with the seasonally-adjusted month-to-month change effectively flat, if not slightly negative. Slowing in February’s annual growth rates of the narrower M1 and M2 measures also appears likely, with M1 growth slowing to about 13.4% (from 15.1% in January) and M2 growth slowing to 9.7% (from 10.5% in January).   Monthly change in M1 was roughly a 1.3% contraction (same as in January), with monthly M2 growth slowing to an estimated 0.3% (versus 1.1% in January)

Where periods of slowing annual M3 growth in the last 18 months have marked transitions into consistently deeper phases of the systemic-solvency crisis, the current slowing of annual growth may reflect the onset of a fourth and even more-severe leg of the financial system’s disorders. 

Annual growth in the SGS-M3 measure had risen fairly sharply and regularly from 4.6% in May 2005, to over 12.7% in May 2007. The increase in annual growth stalled around that level into July. In August, the Fed announced the existence of the systemic solvency/liquidity crisis, against which the U.S. central bank would provide liquidity, as needed, and M3 growth resumed. 

In December 2007, the pace of annual M3 growth slowed again, and the Fed’s liquidity provision evolved into the Term Auction Facility (TAF), the first of numerous vehicles whereby the Fed would become the absorber of bad assets held by commercial banks and other institutions, and become the effective systemic lender of last resort. In response to the easing of bad-asset pressures on troubled banks, banking lending resumed some semblance of normalcy, although at a still-slowing pace, and annual growth in the broad money supply — as measured by the SGS-Alternate M3 Measure — soared to an historic high of 17.2% in February 2008. Such broke the prior peak growth rate of 16.4% in June 1971, two months before President Nixon closed the gold window and imposed wage and price controls.

As the systemic solvency crisis intensified sharply into its second phase, broad money supply growth began to slow, again. As the Fed announced the March 2008 bailout of Bear Stearns, plunge-protection teams on a global scale appeared to go to work selling gold and buying dollars (as suggested by leaks out of the Bank of Japan), where gold was at an all-time high, and the greenback was setting new lows against a number of currencies. 

The Fed needed a stable dollar, and the drop in the gold price not only reflected and reinforced new dollar strength, but it also hit those investors who had been so bold as to use gold to hedge their wealth against the rapidly escalating malfeasance of the central banks. As the systemic crisis widened and deepened sharply, forced liquidations of various dollar-denominated positions, and ongoing needs to liquidate dollar indebtedness created a temporary dollar demand that still fuels some the strength seen in the dollar today.

The second phase of the systemic bailout did not go well, and broad money growth continued to slow at an accelerating pace as the third phase of the crisis broke open in September 2008, when Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and AIG were seized/bailed out, but Lehman Brothers was allowed to fail. The Lehman failure triggered on run on the system, which, in turn, panicked the U.S. central bank and U.S. Treasury. As an emergency systemic bailout package was put together by the government, the Fed began flooding the system anew with liquidity, moving for the first time in the crisis to spike the monetary base (currency plus bank reserves). Where the monetary base is the Fed’s traditional tool for affecting money supply, annual growth rose from roughly 2% to over 100%, with a 20-fold increase in bank reserves.

As such began to seep into the system, annual growth in broad money bottomed at 9.9% in November and rose to 12.0% in January, before the current slowing.

Nationalization and Monetization?   As the system tumbles into the fourth phase of the systemic turmoil, the bottom lines for the Treasury and the Fed remain the same as when the crises first surfaced: maintaining a functioning depository system and avoiding consumer price deflation, at any cost.

The depository system has remained reasonably stable following the extended government guarantees that followed the Lehman crisis. Nonetheless, there are few large depositors that happily would sit by and watch their depository bank go under. With continued and mounting evidence of solvency issues with some large banks, and with the Obama Administration touting the need for another $700 billion bank-bailout package, the Treasury is under increasing pressure for further nationalization of major financial institutions. Market pressures ultimately are fair bet to force the enhanced nationalization route. 

The Fed is looking to debase (create inflation in) the U.S. dollar as a cure for possible deflation. Such an approach was outlined by Federal Reserve Chairman Bernanke back in 2002, when he was a Federal Reserve governor. So far, the Fed has been following the course he prescribed back then. Some critics of the Fed’s approach cite the example of Japan’s failed efforts to stimulate its economy for over a decade, but as noted by Mr. Bernanke back in 2002, Japan was not actively seeking to debase the yen.

If a central bank wants to debase its currency, it can find a way to do so. If the recent, extreme expansion of the monetary base does result in a significant growth surge in broad money supply and the attendant inflation risks, there is a more direct option open to the Fed: monetization of new federal debt. 

As the Treasury issues new debt tied to expanded funding needs from the Obama stimulus package and faltering tax revenues, the Fed can buy same directly, monetizing the new issuance. The cash then would flow directly to the bank accounts of those receiving the government’s checks, without an offsetting drain of cash on the system that otherwise would be lending the same money to the government. Such action might give the money supply a more direct boost than has been seen with banks parking their excess reserves with the Fed, where they can earn some interest without lending the funds into the normal flow of commerce.

Whatever looms, both the Treasury and the Fed will keep doing whatever they have to do in order to preserve the depository system and to debase the dollar. The cost of systemic salvation ultimately remains much higher U.S. inflation and a much weaker U.S. dollar.

Fundamentals Weigh Against the U.S. Dollar. A number of subscribers have been asking why the dollar is so strong. The strength seen in the broad dollar measures in the year since the Bear Stearns crisis has involved several factors, none of which normally should survive long-term. Beyond the systemic liquidity demand for dollars and the early (and likely ongoing intermittent) central bank interventions, there has been some flight to safety (quality) in the U.S. dollar and U.S. Treasuries, as well has a broad market hype that circumstances are much better in the United States than elsewhere.

The liquidity distortions eventually will run their course. The flight-to-safety concept already is beginning to lose its credence, as the rest of the world closely views the collapse of U.S. fiscal discipline that had and has engulfed both the Bush and Obama administrations. As the freefall in U.S. economic activity and the intensified systemic solvency crisis continue to batter U.S. business activity, and consumer and investor confidence, it should be increasingly clear to the global markets that the United States is ground zero for these crises. The greatest impact will be seen in the U.S., irrespective of collateral damages in the rest of the world. Perceptions to the contrary are due largely to some governments and central banks being more open or honest about their problems than are the U.S. government and the Federal Reserve.

The traditional, underlying dollar fundamentals continue to be bleak and are deteriorating. Eventually, the U.S. dollar faces a broad, major sell-off, which also will have significant impact on accelerating the pace of consumer inflation.

The following paragraphs (in italics) are from the last newsletter, and are repeated here for the benefit of those who may have missed them. There has been no change in outlook:

Those touting the U.S. dollar and U.S. Treasuries as bastions of safety in an increasingly insolvent world severely overestimate relative U.S. economic and systemic stability. Quite to the contrary, the world’s largest economy is tumbling into the deepest post-World War II downturn, with no end in sight. Further, the world’s largest financial system likely is largely insolvent, and may not be salvageable shy of significant nationalization of key firms. The solutions offered to these crises just add significant further unfunded liabilities to total U.S. government obligations that were at $65 trillion pre-crises. At more than four times U.S. GDP, and at a level greater that total global GDP, that debt means the U.S. government faces eventual insolvency, which most likely will be covered by the currency printing presses. The resulting hyperinflation will lead to a full debasement of the U.S. dollar and an overhaul of the global currency system.

Central bankers have a pretty good sense of what lies ahead for the U.S. currency, and no one can be particularly happy with heavy holdings of the greenback. Luo Ping, a director-general of the China Banking Regulatory Commission was cited by the Financial Times (FT.com, "China to stick with US bonds," February 11, 2009) as bemoaning the lack of options as to holding dollars and U.S. Treasuries:

"We hate you guys [United States]. Once you start issuing $1 trillion-$2 trillion … we know the dollar is going to depreciate, so we hate you guys but there is nothing much we can do."

I would not bet against the Chinese central bank finding other options. In a related area, any demand on the U.S. to issue its debt denominated in something other than dollars would place severe strains on the U.S. dollar as well as on the United States‘ sovereign credit rating.

General background note: The long-term outlook for the dollar remains for a massive sell-off, with flight from the dollar eventually evolving into a flight to safety outside the dollar. The U.S. dollar’s portfolio of underlying fundamentals generally could not be much worse. Relative to major trading partners, the U.S. economy is much weaker; interest rates are lower; inflation has been and will be higher; fiscal and monetary conditions are worse in the extreme; relative trade-balance conditions are horrendous; and relative political/systemic concerns are high, although the Obama Administration likely will enjoy some grace period with markets [the grace period seems to have ended].

Inflation Remains The Long-Term Problem. The second most common question I get from subscribers is as to the ongoing outlook for inflation. Thanks primarily to the short-term impact of sharp declines in oil and related gasoline prices in the second half of 2008, annual inflation in consumer prices (as measured by the CPI-U for January) effectively was zero. Such would be in the 3% to 8% range based on earlier reporting methodologies.  Although both oil and gasoline prices rose in January, oil fell in February, while gasoline prices continued to rise. Both oil and gasoline seem headed for fair gains in March, as global political tensions mount anew. Any heavy dollar selling also would tend to intensify upside price pressures on oil and other U.S. dollar-denominated commodities. Such factors can have significant but usually short-lived impact on reported consumer inflation.

The long-term problem for inflation is in strong growth in the broad money supply. Even with the current slowing of annual growth to around 9.9%, such is inflationary, particularly where monetary velocity (money growth turnover relative to nominal GDP) likely is neutral at present. Beyond the intensifying systemic solvency crisis, however, another factor may be at work.

The slowing in nominal (not adjusted for inflation) annual growth reported in the fourth quarter GDP, and in the quarterly contraction reported for that period, may be accelerating and dragging on M3 growth in the first-quarter, with lowered loan demand. Where money supply times velocity equals GDP, by definition, and GDP is composed of inflation and inflation-adjusted growth. It is possible to have rising inflationary pressures with inflation-adjusted GDP contracting versus a growing money supply, which appears to be happening. 

Eventually, as discussed earlier, the Fed should succeed in boosting broad money growth significantly. That, and an eventual dollar sell-off, still should have inflation at unusually high levels by year-end. If dollar has turned to an outright dollar panic by then, the groundwork would be in place for the onset of a hyperinflation. More will follow in the upcoming newsletter.

 __________

 

Flash Update

Friday, March 6th, 2009

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

March 6, 2009

 __________

February Payroll Loss Was 899,000
Net of Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias

Annual Percentage Contraction in Jobs at 50-Year Low

SGS-Alternate Unemployment Rate at 19.1%

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: An Alert is planned for over this weekend to cover: ongoing developments in the still-unfolding systemic solvency crisis; what appears to be a sudden slowing in broad money growth (February); a review of why the U.S. dollar has been relatively strong despite miserable and deteriorating underlying fundamentals; and where the U.S. currency is headed over the longer-term (the outlook for a massive decline is unchanged).

The next regular Flash Update is planned following the release of the February retail sales report on Thursday (March 12th). The next full newsletter should follow early in the week of March 15th. Any intervening Flash Updates or Alerts would be published as dictated by economic or financial developments. 

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Concurrent Seasonal Factors Go Awry. This morning’s (March 6th) reported February jobs loss of 651,000 was suspiciously close to revamped consensus expectations of a 650,000 loss, yet the loss would have been 812,000 without revisions to January’s level, and would have been 899,000 net of the Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias (CSFB), as also discussed in a separate section below.

Where month-after-month, the prior month’s reporting consistently has been revised much lower, along with the reporting of latest monthly headline payroll number, what is at work here, is more than just an initial overestimation of the seasonally-adjusted headline numbers, it involves monthly revisions to the concurrent seasonal factor adjustments. The concurrent adjustments allow for unusual monthly revisions that would not have been possible in earlier years, when monthly seasonal factors were set in advance for at least six months at a time.

Consider the latest payroll reporting. The 651,000 seasonally-adjusted jobs loss reflected a drop in reported payroll employment level to 133.768 million in February, from a revised 134.419 million in January. January, however, initially had been reported at 134.580 million, and had that not been revised, February’s seasonally-adjusted monthly decline would have been 812,000, instead of the market-soothing, near-consensus 651,000.

So, where did the 161,000 downward revision to the January employment level come from? One would expect the change was in raw data from more complete information, but the rawest data published for January — the not-seasonally-adjusted series — revised upward minimally by just 6,000, from 132.341 million to 132.347 million, suggesting that the January revisions were tied primarily to monthly revisions in the seasonal-adjustment factors.

Nonfarm Unemployment May Have Hit 34% During Great Depression. While the official estimate of peak total unemployment during the Great Depression was 25% in 1933, such was in an economy where agricultural employment accounted for roughly 27.7% of the total (1930 federal census). Nonfarm unemployment has been estimated for 1933 at about 34% (Social Security Administration). Where today’s nonfarm employment (household survey) accounts for roughly 1.4% of the total, with nonfarm employment at 98.6%, the 1933 nonfarm unemployment estimate might be the more appropriate number for comparison purposes with today’s economy. 

Keep in mind, though, that the Great Depression unemployment rates were estimated after the fact, without adequate data or surveying. Regular unemployment surveying did not start until the early 1940s and then was subjected to methodological revisions over the decades. As discussed below, the SGS-Alternate unemployment rate now tops 19%, and such would be my best estimate of a rate that would be comparable to the Great Depression readings.  

Latest Reporting Showed Rapidly Sinking Economic Activity. Putting aside any games the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) may be playing with the data, the official numbers indicate broad economic activity still is sinking rapidly.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 651,000 (down 812,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval) for February 2009, following a revised 655,000 (previously 598,000) jobs loss in January. Annual contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls continued to deepen, down 3.12% in February, versus a revised 2.57% (previously 2.58%) in January. The annual decline in February was the deepest in 50 years, since August 1958. The seasonally-adjusted series also continued contracting year-to-year, down by 3.02% in February, versus a revised 2.65% (was 2.53%) contraction in January.

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias. The pattern of impossible biases being built into the headline monthly payroll employment continued with February 2009 reporting (see the opening section above and the Reporting/Market Focus in SGS Newsletter No. 43 of June 10, 2008). Instead of the headline jobs loss of 651,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what I call the concurrent seasonal factor bias — would have shown a more-severe monthly jobs loss of about 899,000. This upside reporting bias has been seen in 11 of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 1,325,000. A worksheet on this is available upon request.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. An element that may have helped to soften the reported February jobs loss was the monthly bias factor (birth-death model). Never designed to handle the downside pressures from a recession, the model adds a fairly consistent upside bias to the payroll levels each year, but with a seasonal distribution that has one month of negative bias: January. The downside adjustment to unadjusted January 2009 payrolls was 356,000, but the February bias moved into positive territory, a monthly add of 134,000, a net month-to-month positive swing of 490,000 jobs.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed February employment down by 351,000, where January had been down by roughly 832,000 adjusted for population changes.

The February 2009 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed still another statistically-significant increase, to 8.08% +/- 0.23%, from 7.56% in January.  Unadjusted U.3 rose to 8.9% in February from 8.5% in January.  The broader February U.6 unemployment rate jumped to an adjusted 14.8% (16.0% unadjusted) from 13.9% (15.4% unadjusted) in January.

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those who had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the bulk of the discouraged workers. Adding them back into the total unemployed, actual unemployment, as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure, rose to about 19.1% in February, from 18.0% in January.

Employment Environment. The continued broad deterioration in February’s employment environment broadly was in line with deterioration in the better-quality employment-environment indicators: January newspaper help-wanted advertising hit another successive historic low, with a deepening annual fall-off in February online help-wanted advertising (Conference Board); new claims for unemployment insurance have continued to surge sharply; and employment readings continued in the deepest recession territories for both the February manufacturing and nonmanufacturing purchasing managers surveys.

Week Ahead: Retail Sales: Expectations (Briefing.com) are for roughly a 0.4% monthly decline in seasonally-adjusted February retail sales, due for release next Thursday (March 12th). Net of inflation-adjustment, the series likely contracted on a monthly basis, with the pace of annual contraction deepening to a new low for the historical series dating back to the period following World War II.

Trade Deficit: While the markets may be looking for a slight narrowing of January’s monthly trade deficit, due for release next Friday (March 13th), recent heavy reporting distortions and likely revisions allow for a significant deterioration.

__________

Flash Update

Friday, February 27th, 2009

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

February 27, 2009

__________

Budget Containment and a Normal 2010 Economy Are Nonsense

Economic Data Remain Consistent with
10%-Plus Hit to Business Activity

Upward Revision to GDP Inflation

Major Downward Revisions Likely to 2008 GDP

Intensifying Systemic Solvency Crisis

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next Flash Update is planned following the release of the February employment report next Friday (March 6th). The next full newsletter should follow early in the week of March 15th. Any intervening Flash Updates or Alerts would be published as dictated by economic or financial developments. 

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

The new Brothers Grimm, Bernanke and Obama spun their fairy tales this week. Contrary to the happy news out of the Fed and the Administration, the U.S. economy is in a protracted and rapidly deteriorating recession. While there are no signals for a rebound in place before year-end 2009, there also is nothing on the horizon that would suggest a return to economic normalcy in 2010. At best there may be occasional bottom-bouncing at low levels of activity, as discussed in the SGS Newsletter No. 49. There also are suggestions that the banking solvency crisis is intensifying, once more. As to the formal budget deficit, look for it still to top $2 trillion in 2009, with new Treasury funding needed to cover that. The cost of the Federal Reserve and Administration’s actions remains inflation, much higher inflation in the year ahead.

While the Fed Chairman would like the markets to believe that he can reverse his extreme systemic liquefaction at will, that the markets happily will continue to buy U.S. Treasuries, and that the recession could be over next year, such is little more than wishful thinking aimed at trying to salve extraordinarily dangerous financial markets.

Multiple-year budget packages usually are little more than political hype, and the Obama Administration’s effort is a great deal of hype, wishful thinking, and creative definitions. Consider that the underlying economic assumptions are for a 1.2% annual contraction in inflation-adjusted GDP in 2009, versus the Congressional Budget Office’s projected 2.2% contraction. In the assumptions, the GDP is back to average growth in 2010 and is booming by 2011. Even so, the projected annual deficit does not fall below $500 billion through 2019, a level that officially was unthinkable before 2008.

Overly optimistic economic assumptions appear likely to limit the amount of stress that bank balance sheets will see in the current purported stress testing. Also, the tax and spending changes suggested in the budget package appear specifically to be unfriendly to business and economy activity.

These areas will be much more fully explored in the next newsletter. The financial markets, however, should be able to read through the fairy tales pretty quickly.

As Revised Annualized GDP Closes in on Reality, Annual Growth Still Is Shy of Same. While the revised annualized real (inflation-adjusted) fourth-quarter GDP contraction moved much closer to real-world experience, extreme overstatement of prior 2007 and 2008 GDP growth (including an understatement of the third-quarter 2008 contraction) still left the year-to-year contraction in real fourth-quarter GDP well shy of reality. While annual real fourth-quarter GDP growth was the weakest since annual GDP last turned negative in 1991, most comparative statements for other GDP measures and underlying economic series reflect the weakest growth patterns in 27 to 50 years. Accordingly, the July 2009 GDP benchmark revisions now are likely to show a much steeper pace of GDP decline in 2008 than currently reported.

Annualized Real GDP Still Weakest Since First-Quarter 1982. The Bureau of Economic Analysis’s (BEA) "preliminary" estimate revision of real annualized growth in the fourth-quarter 2008 GDP was a statistically-significant decline of 6.25% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), following an initial estimate of a 3.80% contraction. Such was against a 0.51% downturn reported in the third quarter. In terms of year-to-year change, the fourth quarter contraction deepened in revision, down by 0.82%, versus initial reporting of a 0.18% contraction and versus the third quarter’s annual gain of 0.75%.

The revisions reflected higher GDP inflation, where the fourth-quarter GDP deflator showed prices rising at an annualized 0.51% in the fourth quarter, against the advance estimate of a 0.26% contraction. The higher the pace of inflation used in the deflation process, the weaker is the resulting "real" growth estimate. The GDP deflator indicated annualized third-quarter inflation of 3.88%. Significant downward revisions were seen in personal consumption expenditures, gross private domestic investment (largely lower inventories), and net deterioration in the trade deficit as reflected in the net exports account.

Based on earlier reporting methodologies and removal of some reporting gimmicks, the SGS-Alternate GDP estimate for the fourth quarter was an annual (not annualized) contraction of roughly 4.1% versus a 3.3% contraction in the third quarter, against official respective estimates of a 0.8% decline and 0.7% gain. Against reporting of underlying economic series, the annualized quarterly contraction likely was in excess of 7% for the fourth quarter, but the revised 6.2% estimate is the closest to reality reported by the BEA in a long time.

The BEA’s GDP-like measures for fourth-quarter 2008; Gross National Product (GNP), where GDP is GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments); and Gross Domestic Income (GDI), which is the income-side equivalent of the GDP’s consumption estimate; will not be published until the March 26th "final" estimate revision. Such is due still to significant lack of hard data and that the numbers are annual and more heavily relied on than partial-year data.

Nominal GDP Annualized Contraction Worst Since 1958.  With a relatively low fourth-quarter GDP inflation rate of 0.51% (previously a 0.26% contraction), the decline in real GDP was based on a contraction in nominal GDP. Nominal GDP is not adjusted for inflation and reflects sales and revenues the way a company would book them for accounting purposes (except they usually would not be annualized). 

On that basis, fourth-quarter nominal GDP dropped at a seasonally-adjusted annualized pace of 5.77% (previously 4.05%), still the sharpest decline since first-quarter 1958. Such was against at 3.35% annualized gain in third-quarter 2008. On a year-to-year basis, nominal growth in fourth-quarter GDP softened to 1.21% (previously 1.66%). That still was the weakest growth since first-quarter 1961, and was down from 3.31% in the third quarter.

Durable Goods Continued to Tumble.  The regularly-volatile new orders for durable goods continued collapsing on both a month-to-month and year-to-year basis in January, per the Census Bureau. January’s seasonally-adjusted monthly decline of 5.2% (7.4% net of revisions) followed a revised drop of 4.6% (previously 2.6%) in December. Before any accounting for inflation, January’s new orders were down by 26.4% from January 2008, against December’s revised 20.1% (previously 19.7%) annual decline. Adjusted for inflation the series would have shown even sharper contractions.

The widely followed new orders for nondefense capital goods fell by 2.7% (down 7.8% net of revisions) for the month of January, following December’s 10.2% (previously 5.9%) drop. Year-to-year, January orders were down by 31.4%, following a 25.6% decline in December.

Consumer Confidence Took Unusual Hit. Suggestive of a rapidly accelerating decline in economic activity, both the February 2009 consumer confidence numbers took heavy hits. In particular, the Conference Board’s Consumer Confidence measure, which already was at its lowest level in history (since the Lyndon Johnson Administration), plummeted by 33.2% for the month, and fell a record 67.3% year-to-year. January was down 3.1% (previously 2.3%) for the month and down 57.2% year-to-year. Year-to-year change for the three-month moving average was a record decline of 60.3%, versus a 54.6% fall in January.

The Reuters/University of Michigan’s Consumer Sentiment measure fell by 8.0% for the month of February, following a 1.8% increase in January. Year-to-year change in Sentiment was a decline of 20.5% for February, versus a drop of 21.9% in January. The three-month moving average was down year-to-year by 21.0%, versus a decline of 23.2% in January.

Where recent low-level stability may have reflected hopes for change with a new administration, the current readings suggest a significant shift to the downside in consumers’ views.  These lagging, not leading indicators confirm that the economy has taken a deepening hit in recent months.

Broad Money Growth Stalling Again? The latest monetary reporting by the Fed suggests the banking solvency crisis may be intensifying, once again. With two weeks-plus of some M3 components now available for February, slowing weekly growth in M2 and in institutional money funds are suggestive of some slowing growth in the SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate. Unless there are sharp weekly pick-ups in the above mentioned accounts, and in estimates of large time deposits, year-to-year growth in monthly average M3 could slip back into the 10% to 11% range. After bottoming at 9.9% in November 2008, annual growth rose to an estimated 11.4% in December and 12.0% in January 2009. A first-cut estimate on February M3 will follow next weekend.

In the latest reporting of bank reserves and the monetary base, both total reserves and the monetary base rose, but the growth was in excess reserves, while required reserves fell. Annual growth patterns remained strong but were mixed in what can be volatile period-to-period reporting. In the two weeks ended February 25th, year-to-year change in the St. Louis Fed’s Adjusted Monetary Base (seasonally adjusted) rose to 88.4%, versus 81.9% in the prior two-week period. Annual growth in required reserves (not seasonally adjusted), however, slowed to 27.8% from 58.7% in the prior period. 

Week Ahead: Employment/Unemployment: Expectations (Briefing.com) are running around a 615,000 decline in February’s nonfarm payrolls (January was a loss of 598,000), with unemployment expected to rise to 7.9% from 7.6% in January. The report is due for release next Friday (March 6th). While the expectations are not unreasonable, the jobs loss could top 700,000.

February’s employment environment appears to have deteriorated versus January’s. Each of the indicators is a leading indicator to the employment/unemployment reporting. January newspaper help-wanted advertising hit another successive historic low, with a deepening annual fall-off in January online help-wanted advertising (Conference Board); new claims for unemployment insurance have continued to surge sharply, with the 17-week moving average up by 64.6% as of February 21st, versus 55.4% a month before; and employment readings continued in the deepest recession territories for both the January manufacturing and nonmanufacturing purchasing managers survey.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, February 20th, 2009
 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

February 20, 2009

 __________

 CPI-U Just Escaped Formal Deflation, Again

Housing and Real Retail Sales Annual Contractions at Historic Lows

Industrial Production Annual Contraction Hit 10%

 __________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next Flash Update is planned following the "preliminary" estimate revision to fourth-quarter 2008 GDP next Friday (February 27th).

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Depression-Like Numbers Continue to Surface. My (SGS) definition of a depression is a recession, where the peak-to-trough contraction in economic activity exceeds 10%. Numbers suggestive of that threshold continue to surface, with industrial production down 10% year-to-year, with inflation-adjusted retail sales rounding to a 10% annual contraction, and with housing and new orders for durable goods numbers showing much steeper declines.

With the exception of industrial production, which dates back to 1919, most popularly-followed economic series of today were started after World War II. While the war itself was highly disruptive to the economy, such was not a normal business cycle and rarely is considered in historical economic comparisons. So, when an economic series starts showing its worst performance of the post-World War II period, describing same as the worst since the Great Depression is a reasonable assessment. On that basis, housing starts is the second major series (real retail sales was first) to hit its lowest annual percent growth of the post-World War II era, or since the Great Depression.

In terms of the latest money supply reporting, little weekly change was seen in last night’s (February 19th) reporting of M3 components M2 and institutional money funds. A more complete update on near-term money supply changes will follow in the next Flash Update.

CPI-U Inflation Hovers Above Zero. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported that January’s annual CPI-U (CPI for All Urban Consumers) inflation held in minimally-positive territory, again, avoiding a possible shallow but brief bout with official deflation. Due to instabilities of the seasonally-adjusted numbers, year-to-year inflation traditionally, and quite properly, is measured on an unadjusted basis. Formal deflation would reflect a year-to-year decline in the inflation measure.

The non-deflation result remains somewhat suspect, though, given the ongoing strong desire by the Fed to avoid formal deflation. Not only has the seasonally-adjusted CPI-U been in annual decline for two months (down 0.08% in December and down 0.15% in January), but also near-0.5% year-to-year contractions continued in both the January CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers (CPI-W) and the substitution-based Chain-Weighted-CPI-U (C-CPI-U). Viewed from the perspective of the SGS-Alternate CPI measures, however, annual deflation still was not on the horizon. The Fed also, of course, ideally would like to keep inflation reporting (and inflationary expectations) contained, while also avoiding deflation.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported that the seasonally-adjusted January CPI-U rose by 0.28% (up by 0.44% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval not seasonally adjusted) for the month, versus a revised decline of 0.79% (previously down by 0.74%) in December. The seasonally-adjusted inflation numbers were revised for revamped seasonals; the unadjusted numbers do not get revised.  Year-to-year inflation (unadjusted) in January softened further to 0.03% +/- 0.20% (95% confidence interval), from 0.09% in December.  For those interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I continue to refer you to CPIwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in February 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change, versus the 0.17% monthly increase seen in February 2008.  The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from January’s annual inflation rate of 0.03%. With continued upside pressure on gasoline prices, an upside movement in annual inflation remains an increasingly good possibility for February 2009 reporting. Shy of a further significant collapse in oil prices, annual CPI-U should be at or very near its trough for the current cycle.

Real Retail Sales.  Updating SGS Newsletter No. 49 and the February 12th Flash Update, and reflecting the revised, seasonally-adjusted CPI-U inflation, inflation- and seasonally-adjusted January retail sales rose by 0.76% (1.05% before inflation adjustment), versus a monthly decline of 2.27% (3.94% before inflation adjustment) in December. Year-to-year, January real (inflation adjusted) retail sales fell by 9.56% (9.70% before inflation adjustment), and by 10.40% (10.47% before inflation adjustment) in December.

On a three-month moving-average basis, the January and December annual declines were 9.76% and 9.41% (previously 9.39%), respectively. The January annual decline in the moving-average displaced December’s as the deepest in the history of the two most recent historical retail series, making the results the worst of the post-World War II era.

CPI-W.  The BLS reported that the narrower, seasonally-adjusted January CPI-W rose by 0.35% (0.43% unadjusted) for the month, following a revised 0.98% (previously 0.91% decline).  Year-to-year inflation in January declined by 0.51%, following a 0.47% drop in December.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for Chain Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — fell by 0.54% in January, following a revised 0.55% decline (previously 0.54%) in December. The series underwent its annual revision.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth eased to roughly 3.3% in January versus 3.4% in December, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, dropped back to roughly 7.5% in January, from 7.8% in December.  The alternate numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data.

Producer Price Index Shows First Monthly Gain Since July. Reflecting some bottoming in energy prices, the regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted producer price index (PPI) also turned positive, gaining 0.8% (0.9% unadjusted) for the month. Such followed a 1.9% month-to-month decline in December. The BLS data showed January’s year-to-year PPI inflation contracted by 1.0%, versus 0.9% in December. 

Accordingly, such was the second month of formal PPI deflation (year-to-year price decline), subsequent to a 0.4% gain reported for November.  As noted last month, since 1980, the finished goods PPI has shown formal deflation in 1986, 1994, 1997/1998 and 2001/2002, without the CPI-U ever following suit. Those declines and related index volatility often were tied to large swings in oil prices.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted January intermediate goods fell by 0.7% (down by 4.2% December), and crude goods fell by 2.9% (down by 5.3% December). The decline in year-to-year inflation deepened, with January intermediate goods down 3.5% (down by 1.7% December) and January crude goods down by 29.1% (down by 25.0% December).

Largest Annual Contraction in Industrial Production since 1975. The Federal Reserve reported that seasonally-adjusted January industrial production fell by 1.8% (down 2.2% net of revisions) for the month, after a revised 2.4% (previously 2.0%) decline in December. The year-to-year decline in January deepened to 10.0%, the weakest showing since July 1975, following a revised annual contraction in December of 8.2% (previously 7.8%).

Annual Growth in Housing Starts Worst Since Great Depression. The second major economic series to suffer its deepest annual percent contraction (three-month moving average) since World War II, housing starts fell by 16.8% (15.3% net of revisions) +/- 13.4% (95% confidence interval) month-to-month in January. The Census Bureau also revised December housing starts to show a 14.5% (previously 15.5%) monthly contraction. Year-to-year, January housing starts fell by 56.2%, versus a revised December contraction of 44.0% (was 45.0%). 

Based on a three-month moving average, the 48.2% annual contraction as of January 2009 was the worst showing of the two historical series going back to immediately post-World War II. Outside of war disruptions, housing starts were at their weakest annual growth level since the Great Depression.

Week Ahead.  New Orders for Durable Goods: The January report on new orders for durable goods, due next Thursday (February 26th), despite the series’ irregular volatility, it likely will continue to show continued monthly and annual declines, with the pace of annual decline still deepening.

GDP:Expectations (Briefing.com) are for a sharp downward revision in the already-negative estimate of annualized quarterly real GDP for the fourth quarter (due Friday, February 27th). Initially reported with a contraction of 3.8%, expectations for the "preliminary" estimate revision have moved to a contraction of roughly 5.4%. Such is not unreasonable, given recent trade deficit revisions (which often do not show up in current GDP reporting), but the estimated contraction remains far short of reality.

 

__________

Newsletter (Issue No. 49)

Monday, February 16th, 2009

Issue Number 49

February 16, 2009

The usual four sections of the Newsletter are available as separate web-pages as well as individual PDF documents.  The Newsletter also remains  available in its entirety as a single, large PDF document.

We strongly recommend that when making a printed copy of the newsletter (in part or whole) you use the PDF version.  If your computer does not yet handle PDFs, we urge you to download the free, Adobe Acrobat reader.

We would be grateful for any comments and suggestions about your prefered format for the Newsletter.

Newsletter as a Single PDF

Newsletter by Section:

Section 1. Overview   (PDF)  (HTML)

Section 2. Markets Perspective  (PDF)  (HTML)

Section 3. Reporting Perspective    (PDF)  (HTML)

Section 4. Reporting/Market Focus   (PDF)  (HTML)

 ___________________________________________

PLEASE NOTE: The next SGS Newsletter currently is targeted for early March, likely post-February payroll reporting.  Intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted in response to key economic and/or financial-market developments.

Earlier editions of the SGS writings and Special Reports referenced in the text can be found on the Archives tab at www.shadowstats.com.

 

Flash Update

Thursday, February 12th, 2009
FLASH UPDATE - February 12, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

February 12, 2009

__________

 

Reflecting Revisions and Inflation,
January Retail Sales Bottom-Bounced at Low-Level Plateau

"Core" Retail Sales up 0.7% versus Official 1.0%

December Trade Deficit Suggested 4th-Qtr GDP Downward Revision

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The newsletter will be published in the next couple of days. This brief Flash Update touches upon this morning’s January retail sales report and yesterday’s December trade report.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Monthly Retail Sales Gain Due to Revisions and Inflation. The Census Bureau reported this morning (February 12th) that seasonally-adjusted retail sales for the month of January 2009 rose by 1.05% (0.41% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval). Such was after the month-to-month sales decline for December 2008 — the selling climax of the holiday season — was revised to 3.04%, having been reported initially to have fallen by 2.66%. On a year-to-year basis, January retail sales plunged by 9.70%, versus a revised 10.47% (previously a 9.81%) collapse in December.

With several months of falling gasoline prices having exacerbated recently reported monthly and annual retail sales declines, an upturn in January 2009 gasoline prices helped with the monthly January gain. As will be detailed following January CPI-U reporting next Friday (February 20th), the monthly change in real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales should hold in positive territory, but the severe annual contraction in real retail sales should have held near December’s severe decline and near-term cycle low.

The January retail sales results reflected the bottom-bouncing suggested in the Flash Update of February 3rd. Economic series usually do not collapse in perpetual freefall, but can bottom-bounce when they hit a low-level plateau of activity. Annual growth patterns, however, tend to remain deep in recession territory, before the next down-leg in activity begins.

Core Retail Sales.  Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices when core inflation is lower than full inflation, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — rose by 0.70% (down 0.01% net of revisions) in January, following a revised 1.73% (previously 1.39%) decline in December. Those numbers contrasted with the official aggregate increase of 1.05% in January and the revised 3.04% decline in December.  On an annual basis, January  "core" retail sales fell by 7.75%, versus a revised 8.68% (was 7.88%) decline in December.

Worse Than Expected Trade Deficit. The Bureau of Economic Analysis and the Census Bureau reported that the seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for December narrowed slightly from revised November numbers, but it was enough worse than expected, with surging oil import volume, to suggest a GDP revision showing a greater contraction in fourth-quarter 2008 than initially was reported.

The seasonally-adjusted December 2008 deficit in goods and services trade was reported at $39.9 billion, narrowed from a revised $41.6 billion (previously $40.4 billion) in November, which in turn had shrunk sharply from a revised $57.2 billion (previously $56.7 billion) in October.  The seasonally-adjusted monthly deficits were revised back to January 2008. The reported "improvements" in the December and November deficits (most of the November improvement) were due to catch-up reporting of collapsing oil prices. That process now has run the bulk of its course.

For all of 2008, the total deficit on a balance of payments basis narrowed to $677.1 billion, from $700.3 billion in 2007. The reported improvement was due to a purported increase in the "services" surplus, which is little more than a guesstimate. The "goods" deficit actually widened minimally for the year.

On the oil front, the average price of imported oil declined to $49.93 per barrel in December, down from $66.72 in November. Continuing to show extreme non-seasonal volatility, crude oil imports jumped to 10.3 million barrels per day, up from 8.7 million in November. For the year, physical volume dropped 2.7%, from 3.69 billion barrels in 2007 to 3.59 billion barrels in 2008.

Further detail on these and other series will follow in the pending newsletter.

 

__________

Flash Update

Tuesday, February 10th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - February 10, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

February 10, 2009

__________

 

Pending Relief Packages of Limited Positive Impact

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The full newsletter is well advanced and will be published in the next couple of days, pending some further detail, likely out today, on a revamped banking system bailout and the Obama stimulus package (see below). This brief Flash Update touches upon that environment and a quick review of the December trade deficit and January retail sales due for release this week.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

The details of the bailout and stimulus packages will affect the specifics of what is written in the pending SGS Newsletter.  Based, however, on what already has been leaked or published, the new programs likely will have limited positive impact and will not alter the broad outlook on the re-intensifying systemic solvency crisis or the deepening structural depression. Nonetheless, the details need to be reviewed carefully for a fair assessment.  

On the solvency side, as circumstances stand, the banking system appears headed for eventual nationalization, at least for some of the larger banks. 

Where the Administration appears to recognize that the economic downturn is at least partially a structural problem, the crux of the issues related to household income stress — tied to U.S.-unfriendly trade policies — are not addressed meaningfully. Separately, the heavy Treasury funding needed to cover the stimulus package likely will provide the segue to increasingly heavy monetization of U.S. debt by the Federal Reserve, and to mounting issues on the U.S. dollar-debasement/inflation front. Again, details will follow in the newsletter.

Week Ahead. Trade Deficit: Consensus expectations are for a further sharp improvement in the December trade deficit, due for release Wednesday (February 11th). While almost anything is possible with this release, the relative bottoming in oil prices and the potential reversal of possible recent irregular flows of import paperwork could generate an unexpected deterioration. However the number is reported, a major surprise should impact the "preliminary" revision to the fourth-quarter GDP estimate (a wider deficit means a more negative GDP report and vice versa).

Retail Sales: Due for release on Thursday, February 12th, January retail sales should continue showing a pattern of month-to-month and year-to-year contraction, but with softening deterioration on a monthly basis. Before adjustment for inflation, some relative month-to-month bottom bouncing is increasingly likely in the next couple of months, as seasonally-adjusted activity hits a low-level plateau.  Net of inflation adjustment, however, the pace of annual contraction likely will continue to deepen, reflecting a deepening, severe economic contraction.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, February 6th, 2009
 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

February 6, 2009

__________

January Jobs Loss Was 716,000 Net of
Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias (Instead of Official 598,000 Loss)

Downside Benchmark Growth-Pattern Revisions
Were Mostly Pre-Election

Alternate-Unemployment Rate Hits 18%

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: A full newsletter is targeted for Monday, February 9th. The initial estimate of the SGS-Ongoing M3 for January will be posted over the weekend on the Alternate Data tab, with detail following in the newsletter.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Stimulus of $900 Billion Would Be $69,200 Per Officially Unemployed Individual. Beyond the impact of the annual benchmark revisions, payroll employment continued to sink faster than initially reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). Monthly revisions continued to sharp downside revisions to prior months, and the Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias (CSFB) continued to show major ongoing distortions to the headline reporting of payrolls, as detailed in the accompanying graph and as discussed below. Nonetheless, the year-to- year percentage decline in January 2009 payrolls tumbled further, now rivaling the employment-contraction trough seen in the double-dip recession of the early 1980s.

As to the annual benchmark revision, it was worse than had been advertised, with unadjusted payrolls for the benchmark month of March 2008 being revised lower by 89,000, instead of the initial estimate of a 21,000 downward adjustment to payrolls. In terms of seasonally-adjusted monthly payroll levels, that translated into a downward adjustment in payroll levels in excess of 200,000 for each month from May 2008 on. The effect was to suggest weaker growth patterns in place before the 2008 election. The annualized quarter-to-quarter contraction in seasonally-adjusted payrolls deepened to 1.3% in the second quarter of 2008, versus the earlier estimate of 0.6%; the annualized quarter-to-quarter contraction deepened to 1.5% in the third quarter, versus the earlier estimate of 1.1%; but the annualized quarter-to-quarter contraction narrowed to 3.6% in the fourth quarter, versus the earlier estimate of 3.7%. A more complete analysis of the benchmark revision will follow in the newsletter.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 598,000 (down 909,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for January 2009, following a revised 577,000 (previously 524,000) jobs loss in December. Annual contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls continued to deepen, down 2.58% in January — the weakest since a 2.67% decline in October 1982) — versus a revised 2.11% (was 2.03%) annual contraction in December. The seasonally-adjusted series also contracted year-to-year, down by 2.53% in January, versus a revised 2.15% (was 1.88%) contraction in December.

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias. The pattern of impossible biases (see the Reporting/Market Focus in SGS Newsletter No. 43 of June 10, 2008) being built into the headline monthly payroll employment continued with January 2009 reporting. Instead of the headline jobs loss of 598,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what I call the concurrent seasonal adjustment bias — would have shown a more-severe monthly jobs loss of about 716,000. This upside reporting bias has been seen in 11 of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 1,185,000. A worksheet on this is available upon request.

 

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. An element that may have intensified the reported January jobs loss was the monthly bias factor (birth-death model). Never designed to handle the downside pressures from a recession, the model adds a fairly consistent upside bias to the payroll levels each year, but with a seasonal distribution that has one month of negative bias: January. The downside adjustment to unadjusted January 2009 payrolls was 356,000, versus a subtraction from employment of 378,000 in January 2008. The impact on the adjusted monthly level supposedly is neutered by seasonal adjustments.

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), went through further regular revisions in the latest reporting, in order to adjust for new population estimates. 

Accordingly, with reported December 2008 and January 2009 employment levels not comparable, the BLS did not report the usual month-to-month changes in key data. The BLS, however, estimated that net of the population changes, household employment would have dropped by 832,000 in January, versus a decline of 806,000 in December.

On the new population basis, the official unemployment count was 11,616,000 (it would have been 42,000 worse without the population adjustment). As noted in the opening heading, the proposed $900 billion stimulus package works out to $69,200 per formally unemployed individual, but that is based on the not-seasonally-adjusted unemployment count of 13,009,000. There are 1.4 million unemployed people who are "not unemployed" on a seasonally-adjusted basis, due solely to the illusions of the government’s statistical adjustments. The above unemployed count does not [corrected] include discouraged workers or those considered to be only marginally attached to the workforce.

The January 2009 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed another statistically-significant increase, to 7.56% +/- 0.23% from 7.19% in December.  Unadjusted U.3 rose to 8.5% in January from 7.1% in December.  The broader January U.6 unemployment rate jumped to an adjusted 13.9% (15.4% unadjusted) from a revised 13.5% (13.5% unadjusted) in December.  

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the bulk of the discouraged workers. Adding them back into the total unemployed, actual unemployment, as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure, rose to 18.0% in January, from 17.5% in December.

Employment Environment. The continued broad deterioration in January’s employment environment broadly was in line with deterioration in the better-quality employment-environment indicators: December newspaper help-wanted advertising was at an historic low, with a deepening annual fall-off in January online help-wanted advertising (Conference Board); new claims for unemployment insurance have continued to surge sharply, setting a 28-year high in annual growth; and employment readings continued in the deepest recession territories for both the January manufacturing and nonmanufacturing purchasing managers survey. Since the employment and unemployment indicators tend to be coincident markers of broad economic activity, weaknesses in these series are signaling an ongoing and deepening recession in place.

 

 

__________

Flash Update

Tuesday, February 3rd, 2009

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

February 3, 2009
__________
 

Unusual Features in Upcoming Employment Report

Annual Broad Money Growth Continues to Expand

Economic Freefall Eventually Sees Some Bottom-Bouncing

 __________
 

PLEASE NOTE: I have shifted the full newsletter to next Monday, February 9th. It will include the January employment and benchmark revision detail, a first cut on the January SGS-Ongoing M3 monthly average and annual growth, as well as some historical perspectives on money supply growth, consumer inflation and economic activity surrounding and during the Great Depression. A Flash Update will follow the payroll report release on Friday, February 6th. As always, unusual developments would trigger earlier commentary.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Bottom Bouncing Does Not Signal Pending Good Times. Underlying economic fundamentals have continued in freefall, but such will not continue indefinitely. Some bottom-bouncing is normal in periods of sharp business decline and such may be seen in economic reporting of the months ahead. That will not mean looming economic recovery. It will just be some bottom-bouncing as the broad economy keeps rolling down hill — albeit with occasional bumps — in a further downleg of a multiple-dip recession/depression. Despite near-term volatility and unusual seasonal-factor revisions, yesterday’s (February 2nd) purchasing managers manufacturing survey was something of an example, where a variety of measures ranging from new orders to prices paid bounced off historic or near-historic lows, but where the underlying indications of economic activity were not changed. (Details of the purchasing managers surveys and annual revisions will be covered in the upcoming newsletter.)

With political pressures shifting towards getting the Obama stimulus package enacted, and with the Administration and markets acknowledging a bad recession in place, some reporting pressure, or at least the hype, has shifted to the downside, although anecdotal evidence suggests that most numbers are coming in weak of their own accord. Weakness recognized now could be used to set as low a base as possible, against which future "Obama-generated" activity can be measured.

Political hype indeed is exaggerating some negative conditions, although economic reality likely is not too far behind catching up with the hype. Consider references to jobs losses or employment drops as being the worst ever, or worst since the Great Depression. While such may be true for a purely physical count, that is not so on a percentage basis, where the total number of employed after World War II was less than a third of today’s level. Accordingly, the "worst since …" comments on recent payroll declines and related employment measures more appropriately should be applied to the double-dip recession of the early 1980s. That soon will move to the 1973/1975 recession, and then post-World II/Great Depression.

In the other direction, Messrs. Bernanke and Geithner need to maintain a stable or relatively strong U.S. dollar in the still-evolving systemic solvency crisis, and such requires contained inflation numbers and stronger economic data than might be expected in the now recognized recession. With the systemic crisis remaining a threat to national security, almost anything remains possible in the arena of data and market manipulations. Data and market manipulations remain extremely inexpensive and effective policy tools, but their use presumably depends to a certain degree on perceived financial-market vulnerability. 

Absent manipulation, and against market expectations that have shifted sharply to the downside, most near-term economic reporting still should tend to surprise the markets on the downside. With inflation expectations having tanked and likely bottomed along with oil prices, most inflation reporting going forward should tend to surprise expectations on the upside.

As will be discussed in the upcoming newsletter, the broad economic and financial outlook remains unchanged.

Annual January M3 Growth Likely to Top 12%. Based on 19 to 21 (of 31) days of reporting for January, annual growth in the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate is likely to top 12%, versus the 11.4% estimated in December.   Weekly growth in M2 and institutional money funds has continued to pick up. Within the M2 and M1 components, balances in demand deposits (checking accounts) are declining, while savings accounts are gaining. As a result, M1 growth is slowing slightly, while M2 growth is surging. Monthly estimates of average level and annual growth for January 2009 will be published over the next weekend and in the upcoming newsletter.

January Payroll Reporting Subject to Unusual Pressures. Key indicators of employment activity continue to deteriorate and suggest that further deterioration is likely in both the upcoming January payroll employment and unemployment reporting. Annual benchmark revisions and unusual seasonal-factor pressures from the birth-death model, however, leave the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) with unusual leeway as to what could be reported with payrolls.

Due along with the January jobs reporting is the publication of an annual benchmark revision that will restate payroll levels back for several years, due to a benchmarking of March 2008 payroll employment estimates with state employment tax filings. The BLS has previously estimated that it will revise the unadjusted March 2008 payrolls downward by an estimated 21,000 jobs. The BLS then will change recent growth patterns based on the revamped estimate.

Also, the birth-death model, which adds an upside bias to monthly employment levels over the year, will experience its once-a-year contraction in January. This circumstance reflects a traditional peak in business closings in December, at year-end. In January 2008, the birth-death model subtracted 378,000 jobs from the total. After several years of missteps, the BLS recently has been adjusting for the downside bias with appropriate seasonal factor offsets. Nonetheless, the bias has the potential of exacerbating the reported monthly decline.  

Employment Environment. The January employment environment continued to deteriorate in terms of the better-quality employment indicators. December help-wanted advertising (Conference Board, newspapers) sank to a new historic low (lowest since the series was started in January 1951), along with indications of a sharp annual fall-off in January online help-wanted advertising (Conference Board, online). While the online series is too limited historically to be used in formal forecasting, the deteriorating year-to-year decline of 39.1% for new help-wanted ads in January cannot be a good sign. Since help-wanted advertising is a leading indicator to the employment report, the signals are negative for both January and February reporting.

The ongoing rapid rise in initial claims for unemployment insurance (also a leading indicator) continued to reflect the severe deterioration in labor market conditions, where a rising growth trend in new claims is an economic negative. On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended January 24th, annual growth hit 55.3%, its highest level since August 1980 (1980 peak growth was 59.4%; 1975 peak growth was 78.8%). The January 24th growth rate was up from 52.1% annual growth as of the 17 weeks ended December 27th.

With the reporting of the February purchasing managers manufacturing survey (also a leading indicator), the employment component held even with January’s reporting, at its lowest level since November 1982, the reporting trough for that series during the double-dip recession of the early 1980s.

Pending Reporting. Consensus expectations (Briefing.com) for roughly a 500,000 payroll jobs loss (versus a 524,000 loss in December), and for an increase the U.3 unemployment rate to 7.5% from December’s 7.2%, are not unreasonable. 

The employment indicators discussed above are more consistent with a 700,000 payroll jobs loss, but recent reporting patterns suggest this might be realized with a softer decline reported in January, in conjunction with sharp downward revisions to prior reporting. Again, however, some of the usual monthly revisions may disappear into the changes made in the benchmark revision

As to unemployment, the broader U.6 unemployment rate is likely again to show a disproportionate increase relative to any deterioration reported in U.3, with the so-called marginally attached workers increasing at an accelerating pace. Such is symptomatic of rapidly declining economic activity.

 

More detailed analysis of these and other economic data follows in the upcoming full newsletter.

 

__________

 

Flash Update

Friday, January 30th, 2009
 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

January 30, 2009

__________

 Nominal GDP Contraction Worst in 50 Years

Depression-Like Annualized Quarterly Contraction for
Durable Goods (43.3%)

Monetary Base Growth Flattens Out (at 103%)

 __________

 PLEASE NOTE: A full newsletter is targeted for over this weekend, most likely to be published on Monday, February 2nd. The next Flash Update will follow the January 2009 payroll report, with payroll benchmark revisions, due on Friday, February 6th. As always, unusual developments would trigger earlier commentary.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

Official GDP Reporting Shows Recession.   Given the heavy upside growth biases built into official GDP reporting, it almost was a shock to see this morning’s (January 30th) official reporting of a GDP recession. Not only did the real (adjusted for inflation) fourth-quarter GDP contract for the second consecutive quarter, but also year-to-year change turned negative. In the 2001 recession — the prior formal downturn recognized by recession arbiter National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) — three consecutive quarterly contractions and year-to-year declining growth did not appear in the Bureau of Economic Analysis’ (BEA) reporting until the ensuing benchmark revisions of 2002. In subsequent revisions, however, both the 2001 annual and consecutive quarterly contractions disappeared.  The NBER called the current recession just after the election.

Real GNP Weakest Since First-Quarter 1982. The BEA’s "advance" estimate of real annualized growth in the fourth-quarter 2008 GDP was a statistically significant decline of 3.80% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), reflecting a deepening pace of contraction versus the 0.51% downturn reported in the third quarter. In terms of year-to-year change, the fourth quarter turned negative, down by 0.18%, versus the third quarter’s annual gain of 0.75%.

As usual, the data published for the GDP are of little meaning — other than for political or financial market purposes — given the paucity of hard numbers available at this time for the fourth quarter, and given the heavily rigged nature of GDP reporting in general. Consider, for example, that Personal Consumption Expenditure (PCE), which represents roughly 71% of GDP — improved from an annualized contraction of 3.8% in the third quarter, to 3.5% in the fourth, while the annualized contraction in seasonally-adjusted real retail sales sank from an 11.1% downturn in the third quarter to a 17.1% contraction in the fourth. Key series such as housing, industrial production and new orders for durable goods all are showing annualized quarterly percent declines in excess of 10%.

Based on earlier reporting methodologies and removal of some reporting gimmicks, the SGS-Alternate GDP estimate for the fourth quarter was an annual (not annualized) contraction of roughly 4.1% versus a 3.3% contraction in the third quarter, against official respective estimates of a 0.2% decline and 0.7% gain. Against reporting of underlying economic series, an annualized quarterly contraction in excess of 7% for the fourth quarter would have been more realistic than the published 3.8% estimate.

The BEA’s GDP-like measures for fourth-quarter 2008; Gross National Product (GNP), where GDP is GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments); and Gross Domestic Income (GDI), which is the income-side equivalent of the GDP’s consumption estimate; likely will not be published until the second revision in March, due to the lack of hard data available for the advance estimate, and given that the numbers are annual and more heavily relied on than partial-year data.

Nominal GDP Growth Plunged.  Thanks to a small annualized contraction in the fourth quarter GDP’s inflation rate (implicit price deflator) of 0.26%, versus an inflation gain of 3.88% in the third quarter, nominal GDP contracted at a faster pace than real GDP. Nominal GDP is not adjusted for inflation and reflects sales and revenues the way a company would book them for accounting purposes (except they usually would not be annualized). On that basis, fourth-quarter nominal GDP dropped at a seasonally-adjusted annualized pace of 4.05%, the sharpest decline since first-quarter 1958. Such was against at 3.35% annualized gain in third-quarter 2008. On a year-to-year basis nominal growth in fourth-quarter GDP softened to 1.66% (weakest since first-quarter 1961), from 3.31% in the third quarter.

Durable Goods Orders Keep Plunging. The regularly-volatile new orders for durable goods continued collapsing on both a month-to-month and year-to-year basis in December. December’s seasonally-adjusted monthly decline of 2.6% (5.4% net of revisions) followed a revised drop of 3.7% (previously 1.0%) in November. Before any accounting for inflation, December’s new orders were down 19.7% from December 2007, against November’s revised 19.1% (previously 17.6%) tumble from November 2007. Following an annualized third-quarter contraction of 8.1%, new orders in the fourth quarter fell at an annualized pace of 43.3%.

The widely followed new orders for nondefense capital goods also fell, down by 5.9% for the month of December, after a revised 4.6% (previously 0.8%) decline in November. Year-to-year, orders fell by 24.0%, following a 22.5% (previously 20.8%) annual drop in November.

Annual Monetary Base Growth at 103.3% in Latest Two-Week Period. Yesterday’s release of bank reserve data showed the annual growth in the St. Louis Fed’s Adjusted Monetary Base easing to 103.3% in the two weeks ended January 28th, down from 107.2% in the prior period. Such primarily reflected a decline in excess reserves, with required reserves (seasonally-unadjusted) easing slightly in terms of annual growth to 45.0% in the latest two weeks, from 50.4% in the prior period. This suggests continued growth in depository accounts and the broader money measures, as will be updated in the full newsletter, incorporating Federal Reserve reporting on large time deposits later today.

More detailed analysis of these and other economic data follows in the upcoming full newsletter.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, January 23rd, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - January 23, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

January 23, 2009

__________

 

Major Revisions Show Stronger Broad Money Growth

Depression-Like Annualized Quarterly Contraction for
Housing Starts (68.5%)

Sharp Nominal Contraction Pending for 4th-Quarter GDP

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: A full newsletter is targeted for over next weekend, most likely to be published on February 2nd. The next Flash Update will follow the "advance" estimate of fourth-quarter GDP on Friday, January 30th. As always, unusual developments would trigger earlier commentary.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Resurging Inflation and Accelerating Contraction in Business Activity. President Obama and Congress face extraordinarily troubled times, and I wish them well in the difficult years ahead. The consensus outlook is that the new Administration’s primary problem is the economy, but as discussed in various prior writings, the biggest threat to long-term U.S. economic health and social stability is inflation. Such should become apparent in the year ahead, as funding for stimulus efforts runs head-on into increasingly unwilling investors. With the Federal Reserve the practical buyer of last resort for U.S. Treasuries, increased monetization of U.S. Debt will flow through to accelerating growth in broad money and to what will become rapidly rising inflationary expectations.      

Despite a relatively quiet week of economic releases, the unfolding near-term view of economic conditions remains one of economic collapse combined with renewed inflation pressures. On the inflation front, the recent monthly declines in seasonally-adjusted CPI-U and slowing growth in annual inflation were due primarily to the plunge in oil and related gasoline prices. In January, oil prices appear to have bottomed and are slightly higher, so far, than they were in December. Gasoline prices as of the January 19th week averaged 13.6% higher than in the last week of December (Department of Energy). Annual growth in broad money supply appears to have bottomed in November, rebounding sharply in December, with even higher annual growth suggested by last night’s (January 22nd) issuance of major benchmark revisions by the Federal Reserve.

Following last week’s reporting of an 11.5% annualized contraction in fourth-quarter industrial production and a 17.1% and an annualized contraction in fourth-quarter real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales of 17.1%, fourth-quarter housing starts were reported yesterday (January 22nd) as contracting at an annualized pace of 68.5%. These contraction rates are at levels consistent with my definition of depression (a peak-to-trough contraction in excess of 10%). Not only is the economy showing no signs of moderation or pending upturn, but it is in a state of free-fall that suggests an annualized real fourth-quarter GDP contraction well in excess of the consensus 5.0%. Nonetheless, given the financial market and media’s blind acceptance of worthless "advance" reporting, the GDP charade should continue, with "advance" growth coming in near consensus, simply because the advance estimate usually is targeted at consensus forecasts.   

Major Benchmark Revisions Show Recent M3 Growth to Have Been Stronger. "The Federal Reserve has revised the measures of the money stock and its components to incorporate the results of its annual review of seasonal factors and a new benchmark revision," advised the U.S. central bank in its most recent release of money stock measures (H.6). Such always serves as a reminder as to the reporting quality issues that beset Federal Reserve reporting, just as they do the government’s statistical agencies. Given the ongoing banking solvency crisis, one might hope that the Fed had better-quality statistics on the banking system.

Based on the revisions, annual growth in M1 was little changed, up 17.0% (was 17.1%) in December, up 11.5% (was 11.5%) in November and up by 7.5% (was 7.6%) in October. For M2, however, annual growth revised to 9.9% (was 9.5%), November was up by 8.0% (was 7.6%), and October was up by 7.7% (7.4%).

Given the large upward revisions to M2 and to institutional money funds, but reflecting no further revisions to large time deposits (H.8), annual growth in the SGS-Alternate M3 estimate for December would revise to 11.4% from 10.7%, November’s growth trough would revise upward to 9.8% from the most recent reporting of 9.1%, with October’s annual growth up by 11.7% versus last reporting of 10.9%. The all-time peak growth in M3 back in March would revise to 17.2% from its prior estimate of 17.2%.

These numbers will be finalized after tonight’s (January 23rd) H.8 reporting, with detailed annual growth rates and estimated monthly average levels to be updated on the Alternate Data tab over this weekend.

In conjunction with the published revisions, however, the latest weekly data suggested stalled weekly growth in the M3 components, which could be a signal of pressures rebuilding in the banking solvency crisis. The weeks ahead will tell.

Housing Starts Growth Deteriorates Further. The Census Bureau reported that seasonally-adjusted December housing starts contracted by 15.5% month-to-month and by 45.0% year-to-year. Such contrasted with November’s revised monthly decline of 15.1% (previously 18.9%) and annual contraction of 44.8% (previously 47.0%). The current pace of annual contraction is on a par with the trough declines seen in the series during post-World War II recessions.

Week Ahead. GDP:With consensus estimates (per Briefing.com) around a real (inflation adjusted) 5.0% annualized quarterly contraction, and with the consensus GDP inflation around 0.9%, nominal (before inflation adjustment) GDP should show an annualized contraction of roughly 4.1%. Nominal GDP quarter-to-quarter contractions are reasonably rare, seen in the post-World War II era only in the worst of recessions.

If consensus estimates are met (odds favor this, as the "advance" estimate usually is targeted at the consensus estimate), then real annual GDP growth would turn negative by roughly 0.5%, versus 0.8% growth in the third quarter.  Negative year-to-year growth, which is typical during recessions, actually was revised away for the 2001 recession, in this heavily manipulated and politicized series.

Underlying economic fundamentals favor a much weaker than consensus showing for the fourth-quarter GDP. The only plus for this series is the highly questionable, sharp narrowing of the November trade deficit (see last newsletter).

New Orders for Durable Goods: Due Thursday, January 29th, the regularly volatile new orders for durable goods should show continued monthly and annual contractions in December, with the year-to-year contraction deepening.

Consumer Confidence: With the Conference Board’s Consumer Confidence due on Tuesday (January 27th) and the Reuters/University of Michigan Consumer Sentiment due on Friday (January 30th), both measures should show continued low readings, with any short-lived stability or gain likely due to what was the pending change in administrations at the time of the surveys.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, January 16th, 2009

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

January 16, 2009

__________

 CPI-U Dodges Deflation Bullet

Depression-Like Annualized Quarterly Contractions for
Real Retail Sales (17.1%) and Industrial Production (11.5%)

Broad Money Growth Surge Intensifies

Money Supply Velocity Also Likely in Upturn

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The next Flash Update will be next Friday with updated housing numbers, further detail on money supply and any post-Inaugural analysis.  Unusual market developments could trigger earlier commentary.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

With Rising Gasoline Prices, Surging Money Growth, December Annual Inflation Likely Was Near-Term Trough. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported this morning (January 16th) that December’s annual CPI-U (CPI for All Urban Consumers) inflation held in positive territory, avoiding a possible shallow but brief bout with official deflation. The CPI for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers (CPI-W) and the substitution-based Chain-Weighted-CPI-U (C-CPI-U), however, did contract year-to-year. December’s annual CPI-W was down by 0.5%, as was the C-CPI-U. Using the SGS-Alternate CPI measures, however, annual deflation still was not on the horizon.

Nearly all of the recent slowing/decline in reported annual inflation has been tied to collapsing oil and related gasoline prices. Of significance, recent retail gasoline prices have turned higher, with the average weekly price for all grades of gasoline averaging 9.9% higher in the January 12th week than at year-end 2008.

The greatest threat for resurgent inflation, however, is the rapid growth increasingly evident in the broad money supply (SGS-Ongoing Estimate of M3), as discussed later. Significantly higher inflation looms later in 2009, despite the accelerating collapse in business activity.

CPI-U.  The BLS reported seasonally-adjusted December CPI-U declined by 0.74% (down by 1.03% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, versus a decline of 1.68% (down by 1.92% unadjusted) in November.  Year-to-year or annual inflation in December narrowed to 0.09% from 1.07% in November, remaining minimally in positive territory.  For those interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I continue to refer you to CPIwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in January 2009 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change versus the 0.39% monthly increase seen in January 2008.  The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from December’s annual inflation rate of 0.09%. With seasonal factors boosting the January reporting, an upside movement in annual inflation is possible. Shy of a further significant collapse in oil prices, annual CPI-U should be at or very near its trough for the current cycle.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — turned negative in December, to a 0.54% decline, following to 0.69% gain in November.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth eased to roughly 3.4% in December, down from 4.4% in November, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, dropped back to roughly 7.8% in December, from 9.3% in November.  The alternate numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data.

Annual Averages. The 2008 annual average inflation rate for the CPI-U was an 18-year high of 3.84%, versus 2.85% in 2007. The 2008 annual average inflation rate for the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (1980 methodologies) was a 28-year high of roughly 11.6%, versus 10.5% in 2007.

Real Retail Sales.  Real (inflation-adjusted) December retail sales fell by 1.94% on a monthly basis, following a revised 0.45% (previously 0.08%) decline in November, deflated using the CPI-U. Annual real retail sales fell by 9.09% in December, versus a 9.11% contraction in November, the steepest annual declines since 1952. On a three-month moving-average basis the December and November declines were 8.88% and 7.87%, respectively. The December annual moving-average decline was the deepest in the history of the two most recent retail series, making the results the worst of the post-World War II era. The annualized real contraction for fourth-quarter 2008 retail sales was 17.1%.

The inflation-adjusted retail sales series tends to lead activity in the broad economy. The patterns of declining monthly, quarterly and annual real retail sales remain consistent with a severely deepening recession and continue not to yield any hint or sign of a pending economic bottom or upturn.

Producer Price Index Continues Following Oil. The regularly volatile Producer Price Index (PPI) for finished goods turned negative year-to-year as it absorbed still another severe hit from the recent collapse in oil prices. As reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), yesterday (January 15th), the December PPI declined by a seasonally-adjusted 1.9% (1.9% unadjusted) versus a 2.2% (2.9% unadjusted) drop in November. December PPI year-to-year inflation contracted by 0.9% — formal deflation — following a 0.4% gain in November.  Since 1980, the finished goods PPI has shown formal deflation (year-to-year decline) in 1986, 1994, 1997/1998 and 2001/2002, without the CPI ever following suit. Those declines and related index volatility often were tied to large swings in oil prices.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted December intermediate goods fell by 4.2% (down 4.3% November), crude goods fell by 5.3% (down 12.5% November). Year-to-year inflation declined, with December intermediate goods down 1.7% (up by 2.6% November) and December crude goods down by 25.0% (down by 19.4% November).

M3 Growth Surges. With full reporting in place for the month of December, annual growth was higher across the board for M1, M2 and the SGS-Alternate Measure of M3. For December, annual M3 growth surged to roughly 10.7% from its recent trough of 9.1% in November. The latest reporting of M3 components suggests a likely further surge in the January 2009 average, but a estimate on that will not be formalized for a couple of weeks.

Annual growth for M2, in December, also surged, rising to 9.5% from 7.6% in November. Thanks to rapid growth particularly in demand deposits (checking accounts), annual M1 growth in December exploded to 17.1%, from 11.5% in November.

Bank reserves and the monetary base (reserves plus cash in circulation) have continued to show unprecedented growth in the latest reporting (two weeks ended January 14th), with required reserves (unadjusted) up by 40% year-to-year, and the St. Louis Fed’s adjusted monetary base up by 110%. The historic systemic liquefaction by the Fed has started to trigger increased bank lending and some return to normalcy in the markets, and it promises accelerated growth in the broader money measures.

As individuals continue to pull the cash out from under their mattresses, money supply velocity also should be increasing (see the Money Supply Special Report of August 23, 2008 for background). Such, in conjunction with the rising M3 growth, promises significantly higher consumer inflation in the year ahead.

Annual Change in Industrial Production at 33-Year Low. The Federal Reserve reported this morning (January 16th) that seasonally-adjusted December industrial production fell by 2.0% (down 2.4% net of revisions) for the month, after a revised 1.3% (previously 0.6%) decline in November. The year-to-year decline in December fell to a contraction of 7.8%, the weakest showing since September 1975. Such followed November’s revised 5.9% (previously 5.5%) drop. Consistent with the still-deepening recession, fourth-quarter 2008 production showed an annualized quarterly contraction of 11.5%, following an 8.9% contraction in the third quarter.

A depression is defined (SGS) as a recession where peak-to-trough contraction exceeds 10%, a level currently exceeded in annualized terms by both fourth-quarter real retail sales and industrial production.

 

__________

Flash Update

Wednesday, January 14th, 2009

FLASH UPDATE - January 14, 2009

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

January 14, 2009

__________

 

Retail Sales Plummet Worse Than Headline Number

Pattern Continues of Downward Revisions to
Previously Stronger Headline Economic Numbers

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: A Flash Update will follow Friday’s (January 16th) release of the December CPI. With consensus expectations still running near a gasoline-driven 1.0% monthly drop for the CPI-U (Briefing.com), a shallow but short-lived annual deflation may show in the December reporting.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Nominal or Real, Monthly or Annual, Retail Sales Plunge Deepened. As seen with considerable consistency in many economic series — most recently in the reporting trends of nonfarm payrolls and this morning’s (January 14th) retail sales report — horrendously negative numbers would have been even worse but for the muting effects of downward revisions to prior-period reporting. What is suggested here is that there are upside (perhaps simply non-recession) biases built into the assumptions of the initial reporting of a number of key series, where full data are not available immediately. Subsequent reporting with greater detail then has shown weaker than initially-reported results, time and again. Politically, it is safer to have erred showing a stronger than actual result, as opposed to showing a weaker than actual result.

The Census Bureau reported seasonally-adjusted retail sales for the month of December — the selling climax of the holiday season — to have fallen by 2.66% +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), but that would have been an even more severe monthly contraction of 3.49%, without a downward revision to the November estimate. Previously reported as 1.76% decline, the November monthly contraction now stands at 2.13%. On a year-to-year basis, December retail sales collapsed by 9.81%, versus a revised 8.21% (previously a 7.41%) drop in November.     

The monthly and annual declines, once again, were exacerbated by a fall in gasoline prices, which have started to turn higher, so far in January. Yet, allowing for the anticipated drop in December’s CPI-U inflation, both the monthly and annual retail sales declines will remain severe in "real" terms, net of inflation adjustment. Real growth rates will be published along with CPI Flash Update on Friday.

Core Retail Sales.  Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 1.39% (down 1.86% net of revisions) in December, following a revised 0.24% (previously 0.30%) decline in November. Those numbers contrasted with the official aggregate drops of 2.66% in December and the revised 2.13% in November.  On an annual basis, December "core" retail sales fell by 7.88%, versus a revised 7.41% (was 6.92%) decline in November.

Rolling 12-Month Federal Deficit Hits $833.2 Billion in December.   Fiscal conditions continue to deteriorate as "solutions" to the financial system’s solvency crisis and the deepening recession take their respective tolls. In the first three months of fiscal 2009 (year-end September 30th), the official deficit widened to $485.2 billion from $105.5 billion the year before. Accordingly, the 12-month rolling deficit through December rose to $833.2 billion, up from November’s $701.3 billion, October’s $635.1 billion and September’s $454.8 billion. In contrast, the 12-month rolling deficit through December 2007 was just $187.9 billion.

In line with the discussion in the January 9th Flash Update, the 2009 official budget deficit is highly likely to top $2 trillion, with commensurate funding required by the U.S. Treasury.

Trade Deficit in Unusual Plunge. The Bureau of Economic Analysis and the Census Bureau reported that the seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for November narrowed sharply to $40.4 billion, from a revised $56.7 billion (was $57.2 billion). Despite part of the reported improvement coming from lower oil prices on imported oil, the inflation-adjusted number still showed significant enough improvement to soften the anticipated upcoming contraction in fourth-quarter GDP growth, meaningfully.

Still with some downside potential, the average price of imported oil dropped to $66.72 per barrel in November, down from $92.02 in October.   Physical oil imports, however, also showed an unusual and unseasonal plunge, dropping to 8.7 million barrels per day in November, from 10.5 million in October. In 2007, imports ran 10.0 million barrels per day in November, versus 10.2 million in October. 

Those numbers, plus the extreme drop-off seen otherwise in imports suggest there may have been some irregular flow of import paperwork in current reporting. Revisions in the next two months should determine that. Reporting of this series has been otherwise troubled during the last year. Removing the impact of oil, trade flows rarely shift as sharply and as quickly as indicated here, particularly in response to a deepening recession.  

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, January 9th, 2009

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

January 9, 2009

__________

 

December Jobs Loss Was 697,000 Net of
Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias (Instead of Official 524,000 Loss)

Congressional Budget Office Estimates Depression Era-Like GDP Drop

__________

PLEASE NOTE: An updated estimate of the SGS-Ongoing M3 will be posted over the weekend on the Alternate Data tab. Based on last night’s weekly reporting on M2 and institutional money funds, there are not likely to be any meaningful revisions to the December monthly estimates.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

CBO Budget and GDP Estimates Without Precedent. Even politically neutral government entities such as the Congressional Budget Office (CBO) tend to be overly optimistic with their assumptions and projections. As such, it was something of a surprise to see an estimate of a 2.2% annual contraction in real (inflation-adjusted) U.S. gross domestic product for 2009.   Such would be the worst full-year annual GDP contraction since the special circumstance of the shutdown of war production at the end of World War II. Beyond that, the comparisons go back to the Great Depression. 

The worst year in that period of economic collapse was a drop of 10.8% in 1932. The Great Depression, however, like the current circumstance, was a multiple-dip downturn. The worst annual GDP decline during the second-dip of the Great Depression was 3.4% in 1938.

The CBO also estimated that the official "gimmicked" 2009 federal budget deficit would hit $1.2 trillion, in this less-than-happy environment, and such was without including the full cost of the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan, and before including the costs of the stimulus package being promised by the incoming Obama Administration. The estimates of a $2 trillion 2009 deficit and related U.S. Treasury funding needs, used in SGS Newsletter No. 48 of January 3rd, appear to be somewhat on the light side of what is unfolding.   

Employment Circumstance Continues to Be Worse Than Initial Reporting. — Payroll employment continued to sink faster than had been reported initially by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), with monthly revisions consistently showing sharp downside revisions to prior months, and with the Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias (CSFB) continuing to show major ongoing distortions to the headline reporting of payrolls, as shown in the accompanying graph and as discussed below. Even so, the year-to- year percentage decline in December 2008 payrolls was the weakest since 1982.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 524,000 (down 678,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for December, following a revised 584,000 (previously 533,000) jobs loss in November. Annual contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls continued to deepen, down 2.03% in December, versus a revised 1.49% (was 1.47%) in November. The seasonally-adjusted series also contracted year-to-year, down by 1.88% in December, versus 1.47% (was 1.35%) in November.

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias. The pattern of impossible biases (see the Reporting/Market Focus in SGS Newsletter No. 43 of June 10, 2008) being built into the headline monthly payroll employment continued with December reporting. Instead of the headline jobs loss of 524,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what I call the concurrent seasonal adjustment bias — would have shown a more-severe monthly jobs loss of about 697,000. This upside reporting bias has been seen in 11 of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 1,150,000. A worksheet on this is available upon request.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. An element that muted the reported December jobs loss was the monthly bias factor (birth-death model). Never designed to handle the downside pressures from a recession, the model added a 72,000 upside jobs bias to December 2008 (versus an upside bias of 70,000 in December 2007), and followed a net upside bias of 30,000 jobs in November 2008. The process boosted financial-activities by 18,000, but subtracted 8,000 from construction. Although the adjustments are made to the unadjusted series, they flow through at roughly the same magnitude in the seasonally-adjusted series. 

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed household employment fell by 806,000 (947,000 net of revisions) in December, after a revised 513,000 (previously 673,000) decline in November. The series suffered its annual revision to seasonally adjusted data. Such showed that the rise in unemployment had been underreported consistently in the last half of 2008.

The December 2008 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-significant increase to 7.17% +/- 0.23% from a revised 6.78% (previously 6.68%) in November.  Unadjusted U.3 rose to 7.1% in December from 6.5% in November.  The broader December U.6 unemployment rate jumped to an adjusted 13.5% (13.5% unadjusted) from a revised 12.6% (12.2% unadjusted) in November.  

During the Clinton Administration, "discouraged workers" — those had given up looking for a job because there were no jobs to be had — were redefined so as to be counted only if they had been "discouraged" for less than a year. This time qualification defined away the bulk of the discouraged workers. Adding them back into the total unemployed, actual unemployment, as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure, rose to 17.5% in December from 16.6% in November.

Employment Environment. The continued broad deterioration in December’s employment environment broadly was in line with the better-quality employment-environment indicators: November help-wanted advertising was at an historic low, with indications of sharp annual fall-off in November online help-wanted advertising; new claims for unemployment insurance have continued to surge sharply in terms of annual growth; and generally deepening and recession-level employment readings continued in both the December manufacturing and nonmanufacturing purchasing managers survey. Since the employment and unemployment indicators tend to be coincident markers of broad economic activity, weaknesses in these numbers are signaling an ongoing and deepening recession in place.

Week Ahead. CPI: As discussed in the January 3rd newsletter, annual inflation would increase or decrease in next Friday’s (January 16th) reporting of the December 2008 CPI-U, dependent on the reported seasonally-adjusted monthly change versus the 0.36% monthly increase seen in December 2007. The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from November’s annual inflation rate of 1.07%.

With average monthly gasoline prices dropping by roughly another $0.19 per gallon in December (per the Department of Energy), the seasonally adjusted CPI could fall by roughly 0.9%. Consensus estimates are for a monthly decline of 1.0% (Briefing.com). If the CPI so declined, annual inflation would turn negative by 0.2% to 0.3%. Albeit minimal and likely fleeting, such would represent formal deflation and the first outright decline in the CPI-U since a 0.4% drop in August 1955. Of course, if the CPI today were calculated the same way it was back then, annual inflation December would be near 8%, instead of showing a fractional decline.

Retail Sales: December retail sales, due for release on Wednesday (January 14th) should contract more than the consensus expectations, which seem to running in the vicinity of a one-percent decline. Negative CPI inflation would tend to mute the real (inflation-adjusted) impact, but both before and after inflation, monthly and annual retail sales should continue in deepening downturn.

Industrial Production: December industrial production (due Friday, January 16th) also should contract sharply, in tandem with the plummeting purchasing managers survey’s indications. Worse-than-expected monthly and annual contractions are a fair bet.

 __________

Newsletter (Issue No. 48)

Saturday, January 3rd, 2009

Issue Number 48

January 3, 2009

The usual four sections of the Newsletter are available as separate web-pages as well as individual PDF documents.  The Newsletter also remains  available in its entirety as a single, large PDF document.

We strongly recommend that when making a printed copy of the newsletter (in part or whole) you use the PDF version.  If your computer does not yet handle PDFs, we urge you to download the free, Adobe Acrobat reader.

We would be grateful for any comments and suggestions about your prefered format for the Newsletter.

Newsletter as a Single PDF

Newsletter by Section:

Section 1. Overview   (PDF)  (HTML)

Section 2. Markets Perspective  (PDF)  (HTML)

Section 3. Reporting Perspective    (PDF)  (HTML)

Section 4. Reporting/Market Focus   (PDF)  (HTML)

 ___________________________________________

 PLEASE NOTE: The next SGS Newsletter currently is targeted for the end of January.  Intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted in response to key economic and/or financial-market developments.

Earlier editions of the SGS writings and Special Reports referenced in the text can be found on the Archives tab at www.shadowstats.com.

Flash Update

Wednesday, December 31st, 2008
 
 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

December 31, 2008

__________

M3 Growth Is Accelerating

 __________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The full SGS newsletter is close to publication, likely on Friday, January 2nd.  What follows is a brief preview of the developing story of the Fed’s extreme liquefaction of the system and the nascent upside movement in the broad money supply, as a result.

– Best Wishes for a Happy, Healthy and Prosperous New Year!   John Williams

 

Corner Turned on Slowing M3 Growth? Based on a continued weekly pickup in key M3 components, slowing annual growth in the SGS-Ongoing M3 Measure may have bottomed at 8.9% in November, with December likely to show renewed acceleration in annual growth. M3 components that still are published by the Fed (M2 and large time deposits) and that are largely still reported by the Fed (large time deposits), in aggregate account for roughly 90% of M3. On a seasonally-adjusted (as well as unadjusted) basis, they have shown sharp weekly growth in recent weeks, with the trend continuing. 

In the most recent reporting of the Fed’s H.6 and H.8 on December 29th (for weeks ended December 15th and 17th respectively), annualized weekly growth in the seasonally adjusted aggregated numbers was 33.7%, down from 62.0% the week before. Nonetheless, the annualized rate of growth for the last four weeks has held at 38.3%, a pace suggestive of the Federal Reserve’s massive systemic liquefaction of the last several months beginning to work its way into broad money reporting.

For December, annual growth rates likely will exceed 17% for M1 (versus 11.5% in November), exceed 9% for M2 (versus 7.6% in November), and exceed 10% for M3 (versus 8.9% in November). These numbers are reflected in the accompanying graph, but will not be published on the Alternate-Data tab at www.shadowstats.com until the monthly estimates are more solid. It is cautioned that these numbers are but an early indication of possible annual growth rates for the money supply measures in December. The estimates will be refined over the next several sets of weekly reports in Flash Updates, with a hard-number estimate of M3 level for December likely to be reported in the next weekly analysis.

If the indicated trends continue to hold, the financial crisis would appear to have calmed to the point that investors are starting to take cash out from under their mattresses, and that banks are beginning to lend somewhat more normally. Given the recent excesses of Fed activity, however, annual growth in the broad money supply — as reflected in the SGS-Ongoing M3 Measure — likely will surge to the highest levels seen since before the creation of the Federal Reserve in 1913. Implications are for a significant pickup in consumer inflation by mid-2009 — despite a severe economic contraction — with likely negative impact on the exchange rate for the U.S. dollar, and likely positive impact on precious metals prices and prices for dollar-denominated commodities such as oil.

 

Flash Update

Tuesday, December 23rd, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - December 23, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

December 23, 2008

__________

 

"Final" 3rd-Quarter GDP Estimate Showed Higher Inflation

Big Contraction in Nominal 4th-Quarter GDP?

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The full SGS newsletter now is targeted for next Tuesday (December 30th) and will include an update to the unfolding picture for the broad money supply in the context of the latest weekly reporting.  
– Best Wishes for the Most Joyous of Holiday Seasons and for a Happy, Healthy and Prosperous New Year!   John Williams and the ShadowStats.com team

 

Inflation-Adjusted GDP Was Unchanged, But Other Numbers Shifted. Matching market expectations in troubled financial times, the Bureau of Economic Analysis’s (BEA) "final" estimate revision (it gets revised again in July 2009) of real (inflation-adjusted) annualized growth in the third-quarter GDP was a statistically insignificant contraction of 0.51% +/- 3% (95% confidence interval), unchanged from the "preliminary" estimate. That calculation, however, reflected a combination of an upward revision to nominal (not adjusted for inflation) annualized growth of 3.57%, from a preliminary 3.35%, and an offsetting upwards revision to GDP inflation (implicit price deflator) to 4.11% from a preliminary 3.88%.

The third quarter’s contraction of 0.51% was against a second quarter growth rate of 2.83%. In terms of year-to-year change, the third quarter’s annual growth revised to 0.75% (previously 0.74%), against second quarter annual growth of 2.05%.   The SGS-Alternate GDP estimate remains an annual contraction of roughly 3.3% versus an annual (not annualized) contraction of 2.9% in the second quarter. Against reporting of underlying economic series, an annualized quarterly contraction in excess of 2% for the third quarter would have been more realistic than the 0.51% estimate.

The BEA’s GDP-like measures for third-quarter 2008 also were revised in the latest reporting: Gross National Product (GNP), where GDP is GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments); and Gross Domestic Income (GDI), which is the theoretical income-side equivalent to the GDP’s consumption-side measure.

GNP. Third-quarter GNP contracted at an annualized rate of 0.17% (previously 0.43%), versus a 2.10% gain in the second quarter. Year-to-year change was 0.83% (previously 0.77%) in the third-quarter, versus 2.43%, in the second.

GDI. Third-quarter GNP contracted at an annualized rate of 0.57% (previously 0.56%), versus a 0.46% gain in the second quarter, but the current contraction was the third quarterly contraction in the last four quarters. Year-to-year change was a contraction of 0.45% (previously 0.43%) in the third quarter, following a 0.30% annual gain in the second.

4th-Quarter GDP. Looking forward to the "advance" estimate of fourth-quarter GDP on January 30, 2009 — the first estimate due to be published by the incoming Obama Administration (the bulk of the data will be prepared under the Bush Administration) — some forecasts being floated in the markets are for a 5% annualized contraction. Such is not an unreasonable number and even might be desirable as a political tool in helping to sell the promised massive stimulus package. Less-negative numbers then would tend to be reported in the post-stimulus period. In order to get a real 5% annualized contraction in the current quarter, though, nominal growth likely would have to turn negative as well, a characteristic of only the deepest historical downturns.

Given the recent collapse in energy prices, the fourth-quarter GDP implicit price deflator’s inflation rate should be lower than the 4.11% used in the third quarter. (GDP inflation subtracted from nominal GDP growth yields real GDP growth.)   Since the importation of lower priced oil in the fourth-quarter should work as an inflation booster (imports are get subtracted from economic activity, which reverses the inflation impact in the GDP), offsetting some of the impact of lower prices of consumed gasoline, etc., the pace of slowing GDP inflation should not be quite as severe as seen in the CPI. Even so, nominal GDP growth could see its sharpest annualized decline since the Eisenhower Administration.   

More complete detail on current economic and inflation conditions will follow in next week’s full SGS Newsletter.

 

__________

Alert

Saturday, December 20th, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - December 20, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

December 20, 2008

__________

 

Growth Surges/Accelerates in Broad Money Components

Monetary Base Up 97.5% Year/Year

Fed Actions Begin to Kick In — For Better and Worse

U.S. Dollar Remains Key to Markets

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The full SGS newsletter currently is targeted for Tuesday (December 23rd), although it could slip to the Tuesday following Christmas (December 30th). In any event, there will be an update and advice early next week.  
– Best Wishes for the Most Joyous of Holiday Seasons!  John Williams

 

Bulk of M3 Components Surge an Annualized 63.4% in Latest Week. The seasonally adjusted data on M2, institutional money funds and large time deposits at commercial banks (M3 components that account for roughly 90% of the total measure) have shown a pattern of accelerating growth for the last three weeks (see the Fed’s H.6 and H.8 reports). In the three weeks ended December 8th/10th, annualized growth was 39.3%, the annualized growth for the last two weeks was 49.8%, and the annualized growth in the most recent week was 63.4%.

The growth here reflects a surge in demand deposits (checking accounts), savings accounts, institutional money funds and resumed growth in large time deposits. While these measures may reflect some impact from movement of personal funds out of Treasury bills back into the money supply accounts, greater impact is likely from some flow-through of the extreme systemic liquefaction launched by the Federal Reserve, and of increased bank lending, into the normal stream of commerce.  Loans and leases in commercial bank credit have grown at an annualized 14.6% in the last three weeks, 9.3% in the last two weeks, and by 28.0% in the most recent week.

The good news is that the system may be starting to return to more-normal functioning. The bad news is that the cost of systemic salvation remains higher inflation, irrespective of the sharp, short-term impact of collapsing oil prices on consumer prices. 

Although it is too early for a good approximation of the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for the month December, increasingly it appears as though the estimated annual growth of 8.9% in November will prove to be the low of the current cycle. If trends of the last several weeks continue — still a big "if" — the December annual growth rate could surge to over 15% or 16%, nearing recent historic highs. Outside of the current cycle, the last time M3 growth was that high was in 1971, months before President Nixon closed the gold window and imposed wage and price controls. The next round of money reports has been delayed until Monday (December 29th) due to Christmas.

With the broad numbers barely impacted, yet, by the monetary base, the upside potential for broad money growth remains extremely dangerous for inflation conditions.

Monetary Base and Reserves Continue to Explode. The St. Louis Fed’s Adjusted Monetary Base in the two weeks ended December 17th was up 97.5% from the year before, versus a 74.9% annual increase in the prior two-week period. Those numbers were up from less than 3% annual growth in August, before the Fed began its latest panicked operations. When cutting the targeted fed funds to a range of 0.00% to 0.25%, Fed Chairman Bernanke and the FOMC continued to indicate they would do whatever it took to stimulate systemic liquidity — broad money supply.

As previously discussed in the Money Supply Special Report (www.shadowstats.com, right hand column), the effects of money supply growth can be problematic as to economic activity. The Fed always can drive the economy into recession and deflation by contracting broad money growth. The reverse, however, is not true. Excessive money growth does not assure economic growth, although it always will assure higher inflation.

The surging monetary base — the traditional central bank tool for controlling the money supply — continued to reflect exploding growth in total reserves of depository institutions. Required reserves (seasonally adjusted) in the latest two week period were down 1.2% from the prior period, but up 32.4% (32.1% unadjusted) year-to-year, versus 29.7% (31.3% unadjusted) in the prior period, and against 5.0% at the end of August, before recent Fed actions. Growth in required reserves indicates growth in accounts that have reserve requirements. Excess reserves continued accounting for nearly all the near-term growth in total reserves, however, indicative of major ongoing lending issues with banks.

U.S. Dollar Volatility Suggests Changing Environment. Heavy dollar selling in the last week was countered partially by some jawboning — if not outright intervention — by the Bank of Japan and others. Nonetheless, the global financial community is showing increased wariness in holding what eventually will be a worthless currency.  Even with year-end market distortions, the global system may be stabilizing enough to allow for increased flight to safety outside the U.S. currency. Beyond extreme near-term volatility and central bank machinations, the U.S. dollar ultimately is headed much lower, with resulting upside pressure on the dollar price of gold and on the dollar price of oil. While oil consumption will decline as a result of global recession, OPEC appears ready to continue offsetting much of the demand decline with production cutbacks.

As the flight to safety outside the U.S. dollar intensifies, such will pressure both the U.S. equity and credit markets to the downside. The general outlook remains unchanged.

 

__________

Flash Update

Tuesday, December 16th, 2008
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

December 16, 2008

__________

 Annual CPI Slowed to 1.1% (9.3% SGS) in November

November Real Retail Sales Down 8.3% Year-to-Year

Production Falling at 10% Annualized Quarterly Pace

Money Growth Beginning to Spike?

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The next full SGS newsletter should be posted over the coming weekend.  
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

CPI Likely Has Absorbed Bulk of Impact from Collapsing Energy Prices. The sharp hits in November’s reported monthly and annual inflation rates were about as expected, due to the continued collapse in oil-related prices, particularly in gasoline. With oil and gasoline prices perhaps near a bottom, however, annual CPI inflation likely is near a bottom, too, and not likely to turn negative in a formal deflation. 

CPI-U.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported seasonally-adjusted November CPI-U declined by 1.68% (down by 1.92% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, versus a 0.96% drop (down by 1.01% unadjusted) in October.  Year-to-year or annual inflation in November fell to 1.07% in November, from 3.66% in October, still remaining in positive territory.  For those of you interested in exploring the various facets of official CPI-U reporting, I refer you to cpiwatch.com, a site prepared by one of my SGS colleagues.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in December 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change versus the 0.36% monthly increase seen in December 2007.  The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from November’s annual inflation rate of 1.07%.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — also eased sharply, to 0.69% in November, from 3.28% in October.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures.  Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth eased to roughly 4.4% in November from 6.9% in October, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, dropped back to roughly 9.3% in November from 11.6% in October.  The alternate numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data.

Real Retail Sales. Following up on November retail sales reporting (see the Flash Update of December 12th), real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales fell by 0.08% on a monthly basis, versus a 2.01% contraction in October, based on CPI-U inflation. Annual real retail sales fell by 8.33% in November versus 8.00% in October, while the annual contractions on a three-month moving-average basis were 7.47% and 5.99%, respectively, in November and October.

Industrial Production Down 5.5% Year-to-Year. The Federal Reserve reported that seasonally-adjusted November industrial production fell by 0.6% (down 1.1% net of revisions) for the month, after a revised 1.5% (previously 1.3%) gain in October. The year-to-year decline in November production was 5.5%, following a revised 4.5% (was 4.0%) drop in October. Consistent with the still-deepening recession, fourth-quarter 2008 production is on track for roughly a 10% annualized quarterly contraction, following an 8.9% contraction in the third quarter.

Housing Starts Plunge Anew. Also showing no signs of a bottoming economy was the November report on housing starts. The Census Bureau reported that seasonally-adjusted November housing starts fell by 18.9% (down 21.0% net of revisions) for the month, following a revised 6.4% (previously 4.5%) decline in October. On a year-to-year basis, starts were down by 47.0%, after a revised 39.5% (previously 38.0%) drop in October.

SGS-Ongoing M3 Estimate for November Annual Growth at 8.9%, a Near-Term Bottom? With detail posted on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com, the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate of annual growth in November was 8.9%, down from 10.8% in October.

The most recent weekly money supply report, however, showed an ongoing pick-up in M2 and institutional money funds, and a stabilizing pattern in what had been plunging large time deposits. If (a big "if") those weekly current trends continued for the month of December, annual M3 growth could rebound to over 13% in December, from 8.9% in November. As with the CPI, it is possible that the near-term trough in slowing annual growth in the broad money supply has been seen. Details will follow in subsequent weekly reports.

Due to weak oil prices, near-term inflation is muted, but a resumed surge in money growth would tend to counter that. Also clouding the inflation outlook would be a related decline in the U.S. dollar and renewed upside pressure on oil prices.

Greater detail on the latest data will follow in the full newsletter.

 

_______

Alert

Monday, December 15th, 2008

ALERT - December 15, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

A L E R T

 

December 15, 2008

__________

 

Treasury Reports 2008 Federal Deficit of $1.009 Trillion (GAAP-Based),
$5.1 Trillion Including Social Security/Medicare

Total U.S. Government Obligations at $66 Trillion

__________

 

Against what had been the recently publicized, cash-based "official" fiscal 2008 (year-ended September 30th) federal deficit of $454.8 billion, and similar $161.8 billion deficit in 2007, the U.S. Treasury reported this afternoon (December 15th) that the 2008 deficit [change in net position] was $1,009.1 billion, versus $275.5 billion in 2007, using generally-accepted accounting principles (GAAP). Since 2002, the Treasury has been reporting the government’s finances using annual statements prepared using accounting standards similar to those used in corporate America, but the statements typically have minimal, if any, following in the popular financial media.

The new numbers, however, still do not account for the annual change in the net present value of unfunded Social Security and Medicare liabilities. Counting those changes, as a corporation would for its pension and healthcare liabilities for retirees, the 2008 annual deficit was $5.1 trillion, versus $1.2 trillion in 2007. Such showed total U.S. obligations — gross federal debt outstanding plus the net present value of unfunded liabilities — at $66 trillion, roughly 4.6 times the level of reported U.S. GDP, and greater than total estimated global GDP.

These numbers remain unsustainable, already are deteriorating severely for fiscal 2009, and eventually will doom the U.S. dollar to hyperinflation, as discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report at www.shadowstats.com.

I have not had a chance to review the statements in careful detail, yet, and there apparently have been some minor accounting changes that do not alter the picture meaningfully. A more complete analysis will follow in the upcoming newsletter. The full financial statements, including the GAO’s auditing comments, are available at:

http://www.fms.treas.gov/fr/08frusg/08frusg.pdf

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, December 12th, 2008
 
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
December 12, 2008
__________

 

Recent Economic Growth Overstatements Evident
In Post-Election Revisions

Retail Sales Series Signals Worse Times Ahead

November Inflation to Take Heavy Oil-Related Hit

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The U.S. Treasury is scheduled to publish its generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) based financial statements on the U.S. government sometime on Monday (December 15th). A Flash Update will advise key details when available, with a further Flash Update on Tuesday (December 16th) covering the November CPI release.  Greater detail will follow shortly thereafter with the full newsletter.  
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Recent Economic Overstatements Continue to Surface Post-Election.  As seen with last week’s payroll report and in this week’s trade deficit and retail sales reporting, the depth of the recently declared recession has been greater than indicated by earlier, pre-election reporting. Such appears to be the nature of statistical estimates reported under the auspices of the Executive Branch. Some of the reporting problem likely is due to upside assumptions built into key series, where any guesstimates made generally do not allow for the possibility of an economic downturn. Some of the reporting, however, well may involve more direct data massaging.

Real Retail Sales Contraction Deepens, Despite Collapsing Gasoline Prices. The Census Bureau reported this morning (December 12th) that seasonally-adjusted sales for the month of November — the opening month of the holiday shopping season — fell by 1.76% (by 2.21% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), versus a revised decline of 2.95% (previously 2.77%) in October. The declines, once again, were exacerbated by a fall in gasoline prices, but as indicated in November’s "core" measure, they still were significant.  The extreme volatility in monthly gasoline prices has been enough to affect levels of consumption.  Based on Department of Energy reporting, average gasoline prices in November were down by roughly 30%, versus a not-seasonally-adjusted decline in gasoline station sales of 23.6%, and a seasonally-adjusted 14.7% drop.

On a year-to-year basis, November retail sales (before inflation adjustment) were negative for a third month, down by 7.41%, versus a revised 4.63% (previously 4.11%) decline in October.  

Real Retail Sales.  Real (inflation-adjusted) November retail sales still should show a small month-to-month decline, after a likely sharp monthly decline in the November CPI, while the pace of real year-to-year decline should continue to deepen. Details will follow the CPI reporting on Tuesday (December 16th). The retail sales series tends to lead activity in the broad economy. The patterns of declining monthly, quarterly and annual real retail sales remain consistent with a deepening recession, and they are not yielding any hint or sign of a pending economic bottom or upturn.

Core Retail Sales.  Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 0.30% (down 0.81% net of revisions) in November, following revised 1.82% (previously 1.65%) decline in October. Those numbers contrasted with the official aggregate drop of 1.76% in November and the revised 2.95% in October.  On an annual basis, November "core" retail sales fell by 6.92%, versus a revised 6.53% (was 5.95%) decline in October.

Annual PPI Inflation Slowed to 0.4%. Absorbing a further severe hit from the recent collapse in oil prices, the regularly volatile Producer Price Index (PPI) for finished goods contracted by a seasonally-adjusted 2.2% (2.9% unadjusted) in November, versus a 2.8% (2.6% unadjusted) decline in October, as reported this morning (December 12th) by the Bureau of Labor Statistics.  Going against a 2.6% monthly spike in the November PPI of last year, the current November’s PPI year-to-year inflation fell to 0.4% from 5.2% in October.

If the monthly PPI should decline by 1% or more in December’s reporting, a year-to-year deflation number would be likely for the series. Since 1980, the finished goods PPI has shown formal deflation (year-to-year decline) in 1986, 1994, 1997/1998 and 2001/2002, without the CPI ever following suit. Those declines and related index volatility often were tied to large swings in oil prices.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted November intermediate goods fell by 4.3% (down 3.9% October), crude goods fell by 12.5% (down 18.6% October). Year-to-year inflation slowed sharply, with November intermediate goods up by 2.6% (10.2% October) and November crude goods down by 19.4% (down by 1.4% October).

Other Reporting. Trade Deficit: The seasonally-adjusted October trade deficit widened to $57.2 billion from a revised $56.6 billion (previously $56.5 billion) in September, reflecting a sharper decline reported in exports than in imports. Unusual in the data was a renewed surge in the physical volume of October oil imports, which was suggestive of catch-up reporting. Prior data had helped to limit the scope of the reported third-quarter GDP contraction. Seasonally-unadjusted October oil entered the U.S. at a pace of 10.5 million barrels per day, up from 8.4 million in September, contrasted with last year’s respective October and September import rates of 10.2 million and 10.1 million.

New Claims for Unemployment Insurance: The weekly surge in the latest (week-ended December 6th) new claims for unemployment insurance was little more than the regular volatility seen around a holiday period (Thanksgiving), thanks to the Department of Labor’s inability to adjust the reported activity adequately for seasonal variations. Smoothed using the 17-week moving average, new claims are up by 48.1% year-to-year (a positive reading here is an economic negative), versus 43.3% just a month ago.

SGS-Ongoing M3 Measure: The initial SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for annual growth in the November monthly average is roughly 8.8%, down from 10.8% in October. Final numbers will be posted on the Alternate Data tab over the weekend. Annual M2 growth increased from 7.4% in October to 7.6% in November, while M1 growth jumped from 7.6% to 11.5%. The relative gains in the much smaller M1 and M2 measures are due primarily to the shifting of funds out of M3, not to growth in the monetary base. 

Federal Deficit, Etc: Details on the federal budget deficit ($401.6 billion for the first two months of fiscal 2009, versus $154.1 billion in the same period of fiscal 2008) and data out of the quality-impaired Federal Reserve’s latest flow-of-funds data (third-quarter 2008) will be assessed in the Reporting/Market Focus of the upcoming SGS Newsletter, in conjunction with the Treasury’s 2008 GAAP-based financial statements (see opening note).

Week Ahead. Industrial Production: Expectations (Briefing.com) are for roughly a 0.5% decline in November industrial production.  Something worse than consensus, with a deepening pace of annual contraction, is likely.

CPI: With a further severe hit from gasoline prices (see Retail Sales comments), consensus estimates (Briefing.com) are for roughly a 1.5% month-to-month decline in the seasonally-adjusted CPI. Given the vagaries of how gasoline prices are handled, a slightly steeper contraction is possible.

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in November 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly change relative to the 0.90% monthly increase seen in November 2007.  The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from October’s annual inflation rate of 3.66%. Accordingly, November’s annual CPI-U inflation could fall to near 1.0%. With oil likely near a low and the December 2007 CPI showing a monthly increase of 0.36%, the annual CPI inflation rate likely will be close to a near-term bottom after this reporting. I still look for higher inflation in 2009 and do not expect to see year-to-year contraction — formal CPI deflation — in the months ahead, as will be discussed in the upcoming newsletter.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, December 5th, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - December 5, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

December 5, 2008

__________

 

November Jobs Plummet 732,000 Net of Revisions,
Down 873,000 Net of Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias

Official Recession Start Is Late, As Usual

Required Reserves Surge Anew

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: Any major systemic, market or economic surprises will be addressed in the days ahead with a Flash Update or Alert. Otherwise, the next planned update is for Friday, December 12th, following the release of the November retail sales report. The U.S. Treasury plans to release it 2008 GAAP-Based financial statements on the U.S. government on Monday, December 15th. Quick detail will be advised by Flash Update, and the full newsletter will follow shortly thereafter.  
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

NBER Proclaims Economy in Recession Since December 2007. The Business Cycle Dating Committee of the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) — official arbiter of whether or not the U.S. economy is in recession — has determined that the U.S. economy peaked in December 2007 and has been in recession since. The December 2007 peak in payroll employment appears to have been the key factor in setting the official timing.  As typically has been the case, however, the NBER is late in its recession start date, and it likely will call the end of the recession too early, as it has in the past. Consider, for example, a year before the now-formal recession onset, real (inflation-adjusted) growth in first-quarter 2007 GDP was flat, but it was in contraction for both Gross Domestic Income and Gross National Product.  The recession preceded, and indeed helped to trigger, the systemic solvency crisis that formally surfaced in August 2007. This topic will be looked at more closely in the upcoming newsletter.

Employment Picture Deteriorated Faster than Indicated by Headline Numbers. As bad as the headline November jobs numbers appeared to have been, the data indicate that consistent reporting would have shown an even bleaker picture. Perhaps someone in the incoming Congress or Administration might raise a question with the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) as to the nature of the increasingly obvious positive biases built into the monthly headline payroll numbers. The problem is evidenced by ongoing massive revisions to prior history (exceeding the 95% statistical confidence interval for monthly change), after the markets have absorbed much happier headline numbers published the month before,  as well as by the consistent, overly positive nature of the headline jobs numbers indicated by the Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias (CSFB) discussed below.

For example, the pre-election headline estimate of September payrolls was a decline of 159,000 +/- 129,000, but the CSFB suggested the reporting should have been a decline of about 219,000. In the first post-election revision, September’s decline deepened to 284,000; in today’s revision, it dropped to a decline of 403,000. October’s headline jobs loss was 240,000, while the CSFB suggested it should have been about 308,000. October’s jobs loss revised to 320,000 today. The headline November jobs loss was 533,000, but the CSFB suggested it should have been a loss of about 873,000.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 533,000 (down 732,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for November, following a revised 320,000 (previously 240,000) jobs loss in October. Annual contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls continued to deepen, down 1.47% in November, versus a revised 0.79% (previously 0.85%) decline in October. The seasonally-adjusted series also contracted year-to-year, down by 1.35% in November, versus a decline of 0.93% (previously) 0.78% in October.

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias. The pattern of impossible biases (see the Reporting/Market Focus in SGS Newsletter No. 43 of June 10, 2008) being built into the headline monthly payroll employment changes intensified sharply with November reporting. Instead of the headline jobs loss of 533,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what I call the concurrent seasonal adjustment bias — would have shown a more-severe monthly jobs loss of about 873,000. This upside reporting bias has been seen in 11 of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 955,000.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. A minor element that added upside pressure to the latest payroll number was the monthly bias factor (birth-death model). Never designed to handle the downside pressures from a recession, the model added a 30,000 upside jobs bias to November 2008 (versus an upside bias of 17,000 in November 2007), and followed a net upside bias of 71,000 jobs in October 2008. The process boosted financial-activities by 5,000, but subtracted 7,000 from construction. The largest benefactor was the trade, transportation and utilities sector, which picked up an extra 17,000 jobs. Although the adjustments are made to the unadjusted series, they flow through at roughly the same magnitude in the seasonally-adjusted series. 

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed household employment fell by 673,000 in November, following a 297,000 decline in October.

The November 2008 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-insignificant increase to 6.68% +/- 0.23% from 6.50% in October.  Unadjusted U.3 rose to 6.5% in November, versus 6.1% in October.  The broader November U.6 unemployment rate jumped to an adjusted 12.5% (12.2% unadjusted) from 11.8% (11.1% unadjusted) in October.  Refigured for the bulk of the "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment, as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure, rose to 16.5% from 15.8% in October.

Note of Caution. Keep in mind that any comments in the popular media as to historical comparisons of current unemployment data to 1994, are going against the first month published in the current series.   Accordingly, any reference to the "worst level since 1994," could well be against a much earlier period, if only the data were comparable.

In 1994, the BLS completely redesigned and redefined the unemployment series and all its measures, broad and narrow, so that the new series going forward could not be compared with the old series. I still am struggling to take my alternate measure back before 1994, where finding consistent and good data is a major problem. That said, the U.6 broad measure of 12.8% unemployment is the highest since before January 1994. 

Monetary Base Annual Growth Holds at 75%. The reporting for the two weeks ended December 3rd showed that the seasonally-adjusted St. Louis Fed’s adjusted monetary base "stabilized" in the most recent period, holding at 74.9% year-to-year growth, versus 75.4% annual growth in the prior two-week period. The sharp growth in the monetary base has been due to the recent sharp expansion in total reserves of depository institutions. That growth also stalled in the most recent period, showing a minor contraction.

Key here, however, is required reserves. Most growth in reserves has been in excess reserves, where banks have deposited funds with the Fed — earning interest — instead of lending the funds into the normal stream of commerce. In the latest two-week period, however, average daily required reserves increased sharply on a seasonally-adjusted basis, where annual growth in the last four periods has varied from 18.4% to 28.9% to 17.9% to 29.8%. Such growth, though erratic, still is at the highest level of the post-World War II era and suggests some minor movement toward a more normally functioning system.

As to reported seasonally-adjusted M3 components, the Federal Reserve’s latest H.6 weekly data (week ended November 24th) showed M2 rose by $16.3 billion to $7,945.7 billion (up by $22.3 billion the prior week), and institutional money funds rose by $13.9 billion to $2,251.2 billion (up by $14.3 billion the prior week). Tonight’s H.8 data (week-ended November 26th) will indicate, however, if declining large time deposits have continued to offset other gains.

If the weekly data related to M3 continue their recent patterns, the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for the November monthly average would show continued slowing year-to-year growth, down to roughly 9% in November, versus 10.8% in October, with the month-to-month change flat-to minus. Annual M2 growth likely will increase from 7.4% in October to something just shy of 8% in November, while M1 growth likely will jump from 7.6% to something over 11%. The relative gains in M1 and M2 are due primarily to the shifting of funds out of M3, not to growth in the monetary base. 

Assuming there are no shocks in tonight’s H.8 reporting. These volatile weekly data will be updated next weekend, along with the monthly average for the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate of annual growth.    

Other Reporting. Both the manufacturing and nonmanufacturing purchasing managers surveys took further hits in November levels, sinking deeper into recession territory (36.2 manufacturing, 37.3 nonmanufacturing), where the diffusion-index measures suggest contraction when readings are below 50.0. Key components fell to new cycle lows: employment (34.2 manufacturing, 31.3 nonmanufacturing), new orders (27.9 manufacturing); including extremely sharp declines in the levels of prices paid components (25.5 manufacturing, 36.6 nonmanufacturing). The data confirm both a contracting economy and a decline in monthly inflation pressures. These and other economic series will be explored in more depth in the upcoming full newsletter.

Week Ahead. Trade Deficit: Due December 11th (Thursday), the October trade number could show some narrowing in nominal terms, as it increasingly picks up declining oil prices. PPI: Due December 12th (Friday), the November PPI will take a further hit due to collapsing oil prices, but annual inflation should remain strong. Retail Sales: Due December 12th (Friday), November retail sales likely will sink by more than the already-negative consensus expectations. Net of inflation, it also should remain negative on both a monthly and annual basis, despite what will be another sharp monthly decline in the upcoming CPI report.

 

__________

Flash Update

Sunday, November 30th, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - November 30, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

November 30, 2008

__________

 

Employment Outlook Sinks

3rd-Qtr Gross Domestic Income Contracted Year-to-Year

Broad Money Growth Stagnant in Latest Week

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: Any major systemic, market or economic surprises will be addressed in the days ahead with a Flash Update or Alert. Otherwise, the next planned update is for Friday, December 5th, following the release of the November employment/unemployment report.
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

Inflationary Recession Continues to Intensify. Gross Domestic Income (GDI) is in recession. The GDI is the equivalent to the GDP (income-side versus consumption-side), in theory. The two series, however, rarely are equal. At best, this is due to the inability of the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) to measure economic activity adequately. At worst, the BEA is not able to offset fully the upside biases massaged into the popularly-reported GDP number.

The just-reported real (inflation-adjusted) growth in GDI showed not only an annualized quarterly contraction of 0.56% — the third quarterly contraction in the last four quarters — but also an annual contraction of 0.43%, following a 0.30% annual gain in the second quarter. Quarterly contractions in three out of four quarters, and/or an annual contraction, never have been seen outside of a formal recession.

There was nothing otherwise in the reporting of the last week — or likely in the week ahead — that would suggest anything other than a continuing and deteriorating inflationary recession for at least the next six-to-nine months. Any massive fiscal stimulus as promised by the incoming Obama Administration — even enacted at the time of the Inauguration — would not have noticeable impact on activity until the second half of 2009. It takes six-to-nine months to move broad economic activity. 

Even then, the impact from fiscal stimulus would be fleeting, as the underlying structural employment and income problems — discussed in the prior newsletter — would remain. If the structural problems were addressed, the positive impact there would be seen in years, not months. As to massive fiscal stimulus, such would tend to spike money growth and inflation prospects that likely already will be viewed as a serious problem by the global markets of the time.

GDP Revision Was Minimal, Well Shy of Reality.  The BEA estimated a revised contraction of 0.51% (previously 0.25%) +/- 3% (95% confidence interval) for the "preliminary" estimate revision of annualized real growth in third-quarter GDP. The revision was little more than statistical noise. Annualized real growth in the second quarter had been estimated at 2.83%.

Year-to-year change slowed sharply, with annual third-quarter GDP growth slowing to 0.74% (previously 0.81%), from 2.05% in the second quarter. The SGS-Alternate GDP estimate is for an annual contraction of roughly 3.3% versus an annual (not annualized) contraction of 2.9% in the second quarter. Against reporting of underlying economic series, an annualized quarterly contraction in excess of 2% would have been more realistic than the 0.51% estimate.

Against the heavy upside biases built into GDP reporting, the BEA had to allow an inflation surge in order to show the GDP in real contraction. The GDP implicit price deflator (GDP inflation rate) revised to 4.11% from 4.09%, still an at 18-year high, versus the multiple-year low of 1.26% used to keep second-quarter GDP growth in positive territory (the lower the GDP inflation rate used, the higher the reported real growth).

The BEA’s GDP-like measures were estimate for third-quarter 2008 in the latest reporting: Gross National Product (GNP), where GDP is GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments); and Gross Domestic Income (GDI), which is the theoretical income-side equivalent to the GDP’s consumption-side measure (see above).

GNP. Third-quarter GNP contracted at an annualized rate of 0.43%, versus a 2.10% gain in the second quarter. Year-to-year change was 0.77% in the third-quarter, versus 2.43%, in the second.

GDI. Third-quarter GNP contracted at an annualized rate of 0.56%, versus a 0.46% gain in the second quarter. Nonetheless, that represented the third quarterly contraction in the last four quarters. As a result, year-to-year change turned negative by 0.43% in the third quarter, following a 0.3% annual gain in the second. Such patterns never are seen outside of a formal recession.

Durable Goods Orders Indicated Severe Economic Contraction. The regularly-volatile new orders for durable goods plunged on both a month-to-month and year-to-year basis in October. October’s seasonally-adjusted monthly decline of 6.2% (7.1% net of revisions) followed a revised 0.2% decline in September, previously reported as a 0.8% monthly increase. Year-to-year change continued to decline in a pattern suggestive of severe recession. Before any accounting for inflation, October’s new orders were down 10.6% from October 2007, against September’s 4.6% annual decline. Following an annualized third-quarter contraction of 16.2%, new orders in the fourth quarter were falling at an initial annualized pace of roughly 23%.

The closely followed new orders for nondefense capital goods were down by 3.6% for the month, versus a 1.0% contraction in September, and fell 11.3% year-to-year, following a 7.8% annual drop in September.

Consumer Confidence Continued to Show Deep Recession. After extreme declines in October, the November consumer confidence measures flattened out some, though mixed, perhaps influenced somewhat by plunging gasoline prices and/or election results. The Conference Board’s Consumer Confidence measure rebounded by 15.7% month-to-month in November, after dropping by 36.8% in October. Year-to-year change for the three-month moving average eased to a decline of 48.6% in November, versus a 47.1% decline in October.

The Reuters/University of Michigan’s Consumer Sentiment measure dropped by 4.0% in November, following an 18.1% decline in October. Year-to-year change in the Sentiment three-month moving average eased to a decline of 23.8%, versus a 22.9% drop in October.

These lagging, not leading indicators confirm that the economy has been in a deepening recession.

Annual Broad Money Growth May Slow Further. As noted in the previous Flash Update, for the two weeks ended November 19th (reporting of the next two-week period is due on December 4th), the seasonally-adjusted St. Louis Fed’s adjusted monetary base showed explosive growth, reflecting increased total bank reserves. Against the prior two-week period, the St. Louis Fed measure gained 19.1%. Year-to-year growth rose to 75.5% from 48.2% in the period before. Where the Fed’s primary tool for controlling money supply is the monetary base, the recent surge in annual growth has not yet passed through to broad money measure. Such awaits the banking system moving towards more-normal growth in commercial and consumer lending.

If the weekly data related to M3 continue their recent patterns, the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate for the November monthly average would show continued slowing year-to-year growth, down to roughly 9% in November, versus 10.8% in October, with the month-to-month change flat-to minus.  

In terms of reported seasonally-adjusted M3 components, the Federal Reserve’s latest H.6 weekly data (week ended November 17th) showed M2 rose by $22.5 billion to $7,929.4 billion (up by $29.1 billion the prior week), and institutional money funds rose by $14.3 billion to 2,337.3 billion (up by $10.0 billion the prior week). Although the H.8 data (week-ended November 19th) suggested some rebound in bank repos (down sharply the week before), the decline in large time deposits continued, down about $32 billion in the latest week, versus roughly a $37 billion weekly decline the week before. In aggregate, seasonally-adjusted M3 likely was little changed in the most recent week. 

The SGS-Ongoing M3 monthly measure includes modeled estimates of monthly-average large time deposits, repos and euro deposits, based on Fed reporting, proprietary econometric modeling and quarterly benchmarking with flow-of-funds data published by the Fed.

Deteriorating November Employment/Unemployment Outlook. With the November employment report due for release by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) on Friday (December 5th), market expectations (per Briefing.com) are for payrolls to drop by 300,000 month-to-month and for the unemployment rate to rise 0.3 percentage points to 6.8%. While such expectations are not unreasonable, reality likely is somewhat worse, as suggested by other employment indicators shown below. From the standpoint of salving the financial markets, however, massaged reporting — showing somewhat better than consensus results — is a fair bet.

Sharp deterioration has continued in key series that tend to lead the monthly jobs and unemployment reports. October help-wanted advertising fell to a new historic low of 14, from 15 in September. Such was down 36.4% year-to-year, versus a 37.5% annual decline in September. Allowing for the exacerbating impact of Internet advertising, the current index level still is suggestive of extreme deterioration in employment conditions.

The year-to-year change in the 17-week moving average of new claims for unemployment insurance has continued to surge (an economic negative), up by 45.7% in the week ended November 22nd, versus an annual growth rate of 39.4% a month earlier, as of the week ended October 25th.

The employment components of both the October manufacturing and non-manufacturing purchasing managers surveys, which tend to lead payroll employment by a month, plunged deep into recession territory in the last reporting. 

The purchasing managers manufacturing survey for November (due Monday, December 1st) likely will show continued decline, particularly in the highly significant new orders category, and again in the employment area. The services survey, due Wednesday, December 3rd, likely also will show continued deterioration in its employment component.

  

__________

Flash Update

Sunday, November 23rd, 2008

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

November 23, 2008

__________

 Monetary Base Annual Growth Now at 75.5%

Systemic Solvency Crisis Intensifies Anew

Increased Nationalization of U.S. Banks Ahead?

 __________

 PLEASE NOTE: Any major systemic, market or economic surprises will be addressed in the week ahead with a Flash Update or Alert. Otherwise, the next update will follow on Monday, December 1st.
– Happy Thanksgiving to all!  John Williams

Fed’s Extreme Liquefaction Has Moved Neither Lending Nor Broad Money Growth Meaningfully. Both Bloomberg and Reuters reported late Friday that Citigroup may be propped further by additional government or Fed action. Such tends to confirm the picture shown in latest money and reserve data (Federal Reserve publications H.3, H.6, H.8). Despite extreme banking system liquefaction by the Fed, neither bank lending nor broad money growth has started to show meaningful positive movement. Instead, the systemic solvency crisis appears to be intensifying, once again.

Irrespective of changing administrations, the U.S. Treasury and the Federal Reserve still have to do — and will do — everything within their ability to prevent a collapse of a functional financial services industry. The ongoing crisis cannot be put on hold for two months, awaiting the Obama Administration. Creative funding seems to be nearing its practical limits, but lack of confidence in the system continues. Any number of surprises could be forthcoming. Such might include something where the government not only puts its full faith and credit behind the functioning of the banking and financial system, but also where it takes partial or direct control, with some form of increased nationalization.

For the seasonally-adjusted daily average for the two weeks ended November 19th, total reserves of depository institutions surged again, to $652.9 billion, up from $415.7 billion in the prior period. The latest numbers are up nearly 15-fold from August’s monthly average of $44.6 billion, prior to the Fed’s extreme liquefaction in response to the current intensification of the systemic solvency crisis.

The surge was reflected in excess reserves (increase of $241.1 billion, from $363.6 to $604.7 billion), which grew faster that total bank borrowings from the Fed (increase of $49.9 billion from $675.3 to $725.2 billion). This suggests some regression in banks moving towards more normal functioning.

Required reserves (seasonally-adjusted) eased to $48.1 billion in the two weeks ended November 19th, from $52.1 in the prior two-week period, which in turn had been up from $46.9 billion in the period before. While year-to-year growth in required reserves was an historically strong 18.0% in the November 19th period, it was down from the prior period’s 28.9%. Again, this was suggestive of some regression in bank lending versus what had been in place two weeks ago.

The Fed’s primary tool for controlling money supply is the monetary base, and the St. Louis Fed’s adjusted measure (seasonally adjusted) continued its explosive growth, reflecting the increase in total reserves. Against the prior two-week period, the St. Louis Fed measure gained 19.1%. Year-to-year growth rose to 75.5% from 48.2% in the period before.

In terms of reported seasonally-adjusted M3 components, where the latest data (H.6) are for the week ended November 10th (more than a week shy of the reserve data), M2 rose by $29.5 billion to $7,907.1 trillion and institutional money funds rose by $10.0 billion to $2,223.0 billion, but the (H.8) data (through November 12th) indicated a roughly $37 billion weekly decline in large time deposits and a sharp fall-off in bank repos. Consistent with a re-intensify solvency crisis, there is nothing so far in the early November data to suggest a surge in broad money growth.

Have you ever been in the circumstance where you thought you had lit a charcoal fire, successfully, but then flames disappeared and the smoldering died down without the coals turning white? Although it can work, I do not advocate throwing a glass-full of lighter fluid on smoldering coals (such can be very dangerous). If you should do so, and the fire does not ignite, there likely arises a cloud of highly flammable fumes, where a thrown match will trigger an explosion something akin to a fuel-air bomb. The Fed has dumped the fuel. The fumes are there; what is needed is for someone to toss a lit match. 

Falling Consumer Prices Largely Tied to Oil. The recent sharp monthly drop in the official CPI has been heavily touted as deflation at hand. In that monthly CPI levels swing plus or minus regularly, even on a seasonally-adjusted basis, inflation in the prices of goods and services traditionally is measured on a year-over-year basis, which remains far from turning negative.

The monthly October decline in the adjusted CPI-U was due to the effects of collapsing oil prices, as shown in the accompanying graph, courtesy of CPIwatch.com. The broad categories that showed monthly contractions — transportation and housing — showed upon further drill-down that the declines primarily were due to declining energy-related cost components.

 

 

Produced by a colleague who works with me on ShadowStats.com, CPIwatch.com is intended as a helpful tool in accessing the official government CPI-U data. Those who like to play with numbers and to look at them from different angles will find the available detail quite interesting.

The sharp drop in oil prices reflects a great deal more than slowing global demand, which is being offset to a certain extent by oil cartel production cuts. As discussed in the most recent newsletter, some of the oil/gasoline price decline may have been encouraged by pre-election politics. More important, though, has been the impact of a stronger U.S. dollar. At such time as the dollar resumes its major, long-term downtrend, upside pressure on dollar-denominated oil prices also should resume.

U.S. Dollar Remains Key to Next Phase of Crisis. The U.S. financial system remains unstable and continues in crisis. The U.S. financial markets remain in turmoil, and are highly unstable and often appear irrational. Crosscurrents from systemic deleveraging and forced liquidations have been and remain in play. At such time as the U.S. system begins to stabilize, as U.S. banks begin to lend more normally, as individuals begin to take their cash out from underneath their mattresses, broad money growth will begin to pick-up sharply, spiking annual M3 growth from its 10.8% October level. At the same time, U.S. dollar selling should resume, with related upturns in precious-metals and oil prices.

As dollar selling intensifies, dumping of the U.S. currency and dollar-denominated assets should follow, with flight from the dollar turning into a flight-to-safety outside the dollar.   Such will increase the downside stress on U.S. financial markets and will pressure the Fed to monetize U.S. Treasuries otherwise not wanted by the investing world. As recently seen, these markets can turn sharply overnight. The timing on renewed dollar selling is an open question. The dollar could turn at any time, with little or no warning, but it may take months before the U.S. currency begins to move once again in tandem with its underlying economic and political fundamentals.

Week Ahead. GDP.  Market expectations (per Briefing.com) are for the "preliminary" estimate revision of third-quarter GDP to hold at a 0.3% annualized real (inflation-adjusted) contraction, due on Tuesday (November 25th). While recent trade data would suggest stronger growth, retail sales and industrial production numbers would suggest weaker growth.   The Bureau of Economic Analysis can bring in the number anywhere it wants to, with a likely eye on not being market-disruptive.

Consumer Confidence. The November Conference Board (Tuesday, November 25th) and Reuters/University of Michigan (Wednesday, November 26th) series likely both will sink further, particularly on a year-to-year basis.

New Orders for Durable Goods. Due for release on Wednesday (November 26th), this regularly-volatile series could show a sharper October monthly contraction than the 2.2% consensus (Briefing.com). Annual change in durable goods orders should show a deepening decline, consistent with the intensifying economic downturn.    

 

__________

Flash Update

Wednesday, November 19th, 2008
 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 FLASH UPDATE

November 19, 2008

__________

Annual CPI Inflation Slowed to 3.7% (11.6% SGS) in October

Inflation/Deflation Traditionally Measured in Terms of Annual Change

Industrial Production, Housing Starts Showed Deepening Downturn

 __________

PLEASE NOTE: The updated SGS-Alternate CPI has been posted to the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com. The next planned Flash Update is for Friday or Saturday, addressing the latest money supply indicators.
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

Consumer Inflation Absorbs Collapsing Oil Prices. Seasonally-adjusted, month-to-month changes in the Consumer Price Index (CPI) rise and fall, as do the monthly changes in the broad measure of the money supply. While a monthly contraction technically is monthly deflation, deflation (as with inflation) in the prices of goods and services generally and traditionally is measured on a year-over-year basis. So measured, annual CPI and broad money growth remain strong, although the rates of growth have slowed recently, and may do so for another month or two, as part of the bottoming process in the current oil-price-drop cycle.

Indeed, October CPI inflation slowed markedly on an annual basis, and contracted sharply on a monthly basis, as falling oil and gasoline prices again were absorbed with heavy impact.  Incredibly, so-called "core" inflation — net of food and energy — also contracted in October by 0.1% for the CPI-U, after showing slowing monthly gains of 0.1% in September, 0.2% in August, and 0.3% in July. Such is despite significant anecdotal evidence of still rising non-energy and food inflation. Also curious in the current full CPI calculation was that normal seasonal patterns — that would have softened the impact of declining gasoline prices — disappeared.

CPI-U.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported seasonally-adjusted October CPI-U declined by 0.96% (down by 1.01% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, versus a 0.03% (down by 0.14% unadjusted) easing in September.  Year-to-year or annual inflation in October backed off to 3.66% from 4.94% in September, remaining in strongly positive territory.  

Annual inflation would increase or decrease in November 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the 0.90% monthly increase seen in November 2007.  The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from October’s annual inflation rate of 3.66%.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — also softened sharply to 3.28% in October, from 4.34% in September.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures.  Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth eased to roughly 6.9% in October from 8.3% in September, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, dropped back to roughly 11.6% in October from 12.9% in September.  The alternate numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data.

Real Retail Sales. Following up on October retail sales reporting (see last newsletter), real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales fell by 1.79% on a monthly basis, versus a 1.26% contraction in September, based on October’s CPI-U inflation. Annual real retail sales fell by 6.85% in October, versus 6.04% in September, while the annual contractions on a three-month moving-average basis were 5.60% and 4.44%, respectively, in October and September.

PPI Also Took Heavy Oil Hit. The regularly volatile Producer Price Index (PPI) for finished goods contracted by a seasonally-adjusted 2.8% (2.6% unadjusted) in October, versus a 0.4% decline (down 0.1% unadjusted) in September, as reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics. The monthly drop was dominated by the continued sharp decline in oil prices, as well as unusual seasonal-factor adjustments.  Year-to-year PPI inflation in October slowed to 5.2% from 8.7% in September.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted October intermediate goods fell by 3.9% (down 1.2% September), crude goods fell by 18.6% (down 7.9% September). Year-to-year inflation slowed or turned negative, with October intermediate goods up by 10.2% (15.4% September) and October crude goods down by 1.4% (up by 26.0% September).

Industrial Production Keeps Tumbling. Despite positive impact from the end of the Boeing strike and diminishing negative effects of the hurricane season, the broad contraction in industrial production has not ended. Although the Federal Reserve reported a 1.3% monthly gain for October, the October index level was unchanged net of revisions — against September’s initial reporting. In revision, September showed a monthly contraction of 3.7% (previously a 2.8% contraction). October year-to-year change was a deep contraction of 4.1%, following a 5.7% annual drop (previously 4.5%) in September. The third-quarter’s quarterly contraction was an annualized 7.6%, against a 3.4% contraction in the second quarter.

Deepening Annual Contraction in Housing Starts. The Census Bureau reported that the level of seasonally-adjusted October housing starts fell by 4.5% (down 3.8% net of revisions) for the month, versus a 3.0% (previously 6.3%) monthly contraction in September. October starts fell by 38.0% year-to-year, deepening against the 30.1% (previously 31.1%) annual contraction reported in the September numbers.

As seen with nearly all industry-specific series of the last month or two, annual and quarterly rates of contraction are deepening, in tandem with a rapidly deteriorating broad economic recession. There are no series, at present, signaling a bottom or any potential turnaround for the current downturn.

 

__________

Newsletter (Issue No. 47)

Friday, November 14th, 2008

Issue Number 47

November 14, 2008

The usual four sections of the Newsletter are available as separate web-pages as well as individual PDF documents.  The Newsletter also remains  available in its entirety as a single, large PDF document.

We strongly recommend that when making a printed copy of the newsletter (in part or whole) you use the PDF version.  If your computer does not yet handle PDFs, we urge you to download the free, Adobe Acrobat reader.

We would be grateful for any comments and suggestions about your prefered format for the Newsletter.

Newsletter as a Single PDF

Newsletter by Section:

Section 1. Overview   (PDF)

Section 2. Markets Perspective  (PDF)

Section 3. Reporting Perspective    (PDF)

Section 4. Reporting/Market Focus   (PDF)

 

 
___________________________________________
 

PLEASE NOTE: The next SGS Newsletter currently is targeted for the week of December 8th, following the release of the November employment/unemployment report.  Intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted in response to key economic and/or financial-market developments.

Earlier editions of the SGS writings and Special Reports referenced in the text can be found on the Archives tab at www.shadowstats.com.

Flash Update

Friday, November 7th, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - November 7, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

November 7, 2008

__________

 

Bureau of Labor Statistics Plays Post-Election Catch-Up

October 240K Payroll Loss: 419K Loss Net of Revisions,
308K Loss Net of Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias

Broad Unemployment Rate Highest of Current Series

Monetary Base Surge Continues: Up 48.2% Year/Year

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: More complete detail on the recent economic releases follows, along with a broad review of prospects for U.S. economic activity and inflation, in the upcoming full SGS newsletter
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

Political Gimmicks or Happy Coincidence? Against a background of a rapidly deepening recession and intensifying weakness in other key employment/unemployment indicators, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported this morning (November 7th) that October seasonally-adjusted payrolls plunged and that the unemployment rate soared, a picture much closer than usual to reality, but still something shy of it.

September’s employment report — the last before the election — showed a less severe than expected drop in employment and an unchanged unemployment rate.  Now, with October’s reporting (the first since the election), September’s payroll data underwent extreme negative revisions, and October showed a much larger than expected surge in unemployment. History would suggest this pattern is more a function of catch-up following political manipulation of the data, than it is of normal variation in monthly reporting. Also, as suggested by the ongoing upside concurrent seasonal bias, misreporting of the data continues.

As a separate matter to be discussed in the upcoming newsletter, the BLS has announced that its annual benchmark revision will adjust for an unbelievably low 29,000 jobs overstatement as of March 2008.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 240,000 (down 419,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for October, following a revised 284,000 (previously 159,000) jobs loss in September. Annual contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls continued to deepen, down 0.85% in October, versus a revised 0.52% (previously 0.43%) in September. The seasonally-adjusted series also contracted year-to-year, down by 0.78% in October, versus a 0.51% (previously 0.38%) contraction in September.

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias. The pattern of impossible biases (see the Reporting/Market Focus in the June 10, 2008 SGS Newsletter) being built into the headline payroll employment changes intensified with October reporting. Instead of the headline jobs loss of 240,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what we are calling the concurrent seasonal adjustment bias — would have shown a more-severe monthly jobs loss of about 308,000. This upside reporting bias has been seen in 11 of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 678,000.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. A minor element in October that added upside pressure to the payroll number was the monthly bias factor (birth-death model). Never designed to handle the downside pressures from a recession, the model added a 71,000 upside jobs bias to October 2008 (same amount as in October 2007), and following a net upside bias of 42,000 jobs in September 2008. The process boosted financial-activities and construction jobs by 13,000 and 7,000, respectively, for the month. Although the adjustments are made to the unadjusted series, they generally flow through at the same magnitude in the seasonally-adjusted series. 

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed household employment fell by 297,000 in October, following a 222,000 loss in September.

The October 2008 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-significant increase to 6.50% +/- 0.23% from 6.12% in September.  Unadjusted, U.3 rose to 6.1% in October, versus 6.0% in September.  The broader October U.6 unemployment rate jumped to an adjusted 11.8% (11.1% unadjusted) from 11.0% (10.6% unadjusted) in September.  Refigured for the bulk of the "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment, as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure, rose to 15.8% in October, up from 15.0% in September.

In 1994, the BLS completely redesigned and redefined the unemployment series and all its measures, broad and narrow, so that the new series going forward could not be compared with the old series. I still am struggling to take my alternate measure back before 1994, where finding consistent and good data is a major problem. That said, the U.6 broad measure of 11.8% unemployment is the highest since the same reading in January 1994 (that was the first reading under the new definitions, during a period of unofficial recession).   

Reserves and Monetary Base Surge, Broad Money Measures Still Lag. Based on Federal Reserve Board (FRB) reporting last night (H.3) and related St. Louis Fed calculations, reflecting daily averages for the two-week period ended November 5th, the seasonally-adjusted St. Louis Fed Monetary Base — the traditional tool for adjusting money supply growth — rose by 7.0% (annualizes to over 3200%) between the two-week periods ended October 22nd and November 5th. Year-to-year growth for the latest two week period was 48.2%, up from 38.0% year-to-year in the prior period.

Total reserves of depository institutions (FRB, not seasonally adjusted) surged again, rising to $415.7 billion from $327.6 billion in the prior two-week period, and it was up from $44.2 billion as recently as September 10th. Of significance, required reserves rose to $52.1 billion in the latest period, up from $45.9 billion in the prior period and from $41.9 billion in the two weeks ended September 10th. This suggests that the excess reserves have started entering the system, albeit slowly.

FRB reporting (H.6) on the money supply (M2 and institutional money funds are M3 components), lags in time, with information up through October 27th. With large time deposit estimates released at the end of today, a rough estimate of SGS Ongoing-M3 annual growth for October will be included in the newsletter, but it likely will be near 11%, down from 13.1% in September. That growth rate should prove to be the trough of the current cycle, as the Fed’s extreme easing begins to loosen credit and allows cash increasingly to flow into bank accounts.

This area will be discussed in greater depth in the newsletter. Despite the monthly decline looming in October CPI from a collapse in gasoline prices, and despite a rapidly deteriorating recession, the general outlook over the next six months to a year remains highly inflationary.  

 

__________

Flash Update

Thursday, November 6th, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - November 6, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

November 6, 2008

__________

 

October Employment Conditions Should Show Marked Deterioration

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: With the pending full newsletter shifted to this coming weekend, the outlook for tomorrow’s employment report is discussed briefly, below. A further Flash Update will follow with detail of tomorrow’s data release, along with analysis of the money supply data due for publication tonight by the Federal Reserve. A broad review as to where U.S. economic activity and inflation stand and are headed will follow in this weekend’s newsletter. – Best wishes to all, John Williams

Jobs and Unemployment Due for Big Hits.   With both the October manufacturing and nonmanufacturing purchasing managers surveys showing their employment measures falling deep into recession territory, with September help-wanted advertising holding at its historic low and online advertising still tumbling year-to-year, and with a new claims for unemployment insurance continuing to rise sharply year-to-year, October payrolls should have dropped by over 200,000, along with a continued sharp rise in the unemployment rate.

The October report is due for release tomorrow morning (November 7th). Consensus expectations are running at roughly a 200,000 payroll loss and a 0.2% increase in the unemployment rate to 6.3%, per briefing.com. They are not unreasonable, but still appear to be somewhat shy of reality. Election pressures are gone, but financial market pressures for rigged data remain. With the markets still far from stable conditions, a slightly better than expected payroll number might be a fair bet.

Details will follow in a Flash Update following the employment report.

 

__________

Flash Update

Thursday, October 30th, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - October 30, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

October 30, 2008

__________

 

Gimmicked GDP Overstatement Continues, Despite Reported Contraction

GDP Inflation Hits 18-Year High

"Recession" Dates Back to 4th-Quarter 2006

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The following is a brief update on this morning’s "advance" estimate on third-quarter GDP growth. The full newsletter will follow over the weekend. The markets and the global financial system remain in a state of extreme flux, but the long-range outlook is unchanged.  
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

Narrower-Than-Expected GDP Contraction Is Nonsense.   The difference between the reported 0.3% annualized Gross Domestic Product (GDP) and the consensus expectation of a 0.5% contraction is no more than statistical noise, yet the reported result most certainly was manufactured so as to allow the hypesters on Wall Street and in Washington to spin their fairy tales of a "less-severe recession" in order to help draw the gullible back into stocks, at least for a day or two before next week’s election. This follows earlier economic scare tactics aimed at the public to help sell the "bailout" package.

The 0.3% contraction was a plug number, as its calculation included significant "guesstimates."   For example, the "advance" estimate is based on only two out of three highly volatile and suspect monthly trade reports. The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) could have brought in the reported growth at a small plus, just easily as a small minus, but the credibility of ongoing GDP growth may have reached its limits and was abandoned publicly by the White House, last week. The reported "advance" growth estimate usually is massaged so as to come in close to consensus, in this case a little bit better. Keep in mind that the 0.25% contraction is an annualized rate, only 0.06% ($7.4 billion out of $11,720.0 billion) quarter-to-quarter, a magnitude well within the scope of regular monthly revisions and statistical noise.

With a 95% confidence interval of +/- 3% around this morning’s estimate of an annualized 0.25% contraction in real (inflation-adjusted), annualized quarterly third-quarter GDP growth, the number was not even statistically indistinguishable from growth or contraction in the 3% range. A quarterly contraction in excess of 2% would have been more realistic. With the sharp reversal, though, in current quarterly growth against the unbelievable annualized 4.8% quarterly growth reported for third-quarter 2007, year-to-year change slowed sharply. Year-to-year real GDP growth dropped to 0.81% in the latest quarter, from 2.05% in the second quarter. The SGS-Alternate GDP estimate (which will be updated on the Alternate-Data tab at www.shadowstats.com later today) is for an annual contraction of roughly 3.3% versus an annual (not annualized) contraction of 2.9% in the second quarter.

Against the heavy upside biases built into GDP reporting, the BEA had to allow an inflation surge in order to get real GDP into contraction. The GDP implicit price deflator (GDP inflation rate) exploded to an annualized 18-year high of 4.09%, versus the multiple-year low of 1.26% used to keep second-quarter GDP growth in positive territory (the lower the GDP inflation rate used, the higher the reported real growth).

U.S. Economy Is in a Severe Recession. With real retail sales, housing, nonfarm payrolls, new orders for durable goods and industrial production all showing quarterly and annual growth patterns never seen outside of a recession still in deterioration, GDP reporting eventually should show a string of quarterly contractions, with the recession dating back to fourth-quarter 2006, long before the exacerbation of the current systemic solvency crisis. As discussed in recent newsletters, official GDP surrogates such as Gross National Product (GNP) and Gross Domestic Income (GDI) have shown varying patterns of quarterly contractions. GDP is the theoretical equivalent of GDI (consumption side versus income side) and is GNP net of the trade balance in interest and dividend payments.

Based on existing GDP, GDI and GDP reporting, the following quarters have shown inflation-adjusted quarterly contractions: 1Q07 (GNP/GDI), 4Q07 (GDP/GDI), 1Q08 (GDI), 3Q08 (GDP). [This text has been corrected from the initial posting, where 1Q08 incorrectly was indicated as GDP.]

The broad nature of the ongoing structural downturn (including the double-dip nature of the 2000 recession) will be explored anew in the upcoming newsletter.

Consumer Confidence Tanked. Given the magnitude of recent market turmoil and economy-bashing out of Washington, there should have been no surprise that the Conference Board’s Consumer Confidence measure suffered the largest percentage declines, ever, on both a monthly and annual basis, with confidence falling to its lowest level, ever. Tomorrow’s (October 31st) Consumer Sentiment measure likely will not fare much better.

In other reporting, although the regularly-volatile new orders for durable goods reportedly rose by 0.8% in September, year-to-year change continued to decline in a recessionary pattern, down 2.4% from September 2007, versus August’s 8.9% annual decline. Annual patterns in housing activity generally remain deep in recession territory, irrespective of month-to-month reporting volatility. Issues with existing home sales reporting and included foreclosures data continue to mount.

More complete detail on the various series will follow in the full newsletter.

 

__________

Flash Update

Sunday, October 26th, 2008

 

  

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

October 26, 2008

__________

 

Bank Lending Picks Up

Monetary Base Up 38.0% Year-to-Year

Near-Term U.S. Debt Default Unlikely,
 Unless Lenders Request Non-Dollar Issuance

Administration Signals Reporting of 3rd-Qtr GDP Contraction

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The following is a brief update on the money numbers and pending economic reporting. The full newsletter will follow next weekend with the third-quarter advance GDP estimate and pre-election considerations. The markets and the global financial system remain in a state of flux, but the long-range outlook is unchanged.   — Best wishes to all, John Williams

The Cost Is Money Growth and Inflation. The global financial system remains in turmoil, ongoing panic and a state of flux. Messrs. Bernanke and Paulson will continue to do whatever they have to do to prevent a functional collapse of the U.S. financial services industry, at any cost.  The eventual cost to the U.S. financial and economic system will be much higher inflation.

As shown in the accompanying graphs the monetary base has seen an unprecedented surge, reflecting total reserves of depository institutions jumping from an average of $47.1 billion (seasonally-adjusted) in the two weeks ended September 10th, to $328.6 billion in the period ended October 22nd.

 

 

Using the St. Louis Fed’s Adjusted Monetary Base (effectively total reserves plus M1 cash in circulation), the year-to-year growth in the latest period was an unprecedented 38.0%. In the period since 1919, the previous high growth rate was 28% in September 1939, as the U.S. was building up industry for the evolving war in Europe. 

Back in the days when the Federal Reserve targeted money supply growth, the monetary base was the measure it adjusted.   The current surge in the base is a direct result of the ongoing, extraordinary actions taken by the Federal Reserve and the U.S. Treasury aimed at preventing a collapse of the U.S. financial system. The higher monetary base growth will result in sharp spikes to domestic money supply growth and will intensify inflationary pressures in the year ahead, irrespective of wild gyrations and sell-offs in oil and of strength in the U.S. dollar, that otherwise should prove very short-lived going forward.   The key to expanded money growth in this environment is growth in bank lending, and the difficulties there seem to be easing.

Commerical Bank Lending (Federal Reserve Board H.8)
Seasonally-Adjusted


 
Week Ended
 
Oct 15 2008
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Loan Category
Oct 17
2007
Sep 3
2008
Oct 15
2008
 
Six Weeks
Annualized
Year-to-
Year
 
($ Bill)
($ Bill)
($ Bil)
 
Growth
Growth
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Commercial & Industrial
1393.3
1510.7
1597.1
 
62.1%
14.6%
Real Estate
3548.7
3634.3
3794.2
 
45.4%
6.9%
   Revolving Home Equity
476.0
527.4
578.4
 
123.0%
21.5%
   Other Residential
1504.1
1434.8
1498.7
 
46.0%
-0.4%
   Commercial
1568.5
1672.1
1717.1
 
26.0%
9.5%
Consumer
788.7
846.8
872.3
 
29.4%
10.6%
   Credit cards / other revolving
334.8
358.5
382.3
 
74.8%
14.2%
   Other
453.9
488.3
490.0
 
3.1%
8.0%
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Total Commercial & Consumer Bank Lending
5730.7
5991.8
6263.6
 
47.0%
9.3%

 

As shown in the accompanying table of current commercial bank lending (latest reporting is through October 15th), annualized growth in the six weeks since the Fed started re-infusing the system with extraordinary liquidity has been 47% for total commercial and consumer lending, versus a year-to-year rate of growth of about 9%. These numbers do not reflect the sharp fall-off in commercial paper outstanding, which has triggered some growth in back-up commercial and industrial lending, but the Fed will be addressing the commercial paper market in the weeks ahead, as lender, backer and market creator of last resort.

As discussed in the Money Supply Special Report of August 3, 2008, there is no perfect measure of money growth. Generally, the broader the measure (M3 being the broadest until discontinued by the Fed in 2006, still estimated by the SGS-Ongoing M3), the better it is as a predictor of inflation. Discontinued in 1998 by the Fed was a still-broader measure known as "L" for liquid assets. It contained individual holdings of Treasury bills. 

In the recent panic, the Treasury issued bills to help keep that market liquid, but had the effect of drawing cash out of the system and out of the reported money supply. The most recent reporting (week ended October 13th) showed M3 components M2 and institutional money funds rising sharply, but reporting on large time deposits (October 15th) showed continued decline. The weekly numbers are in a state of flux and heavy week-to-week revision. In the weeks ahead, the money numbers should stabilize, and should start to spike sharply in terms of annual growth in the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate.    

Fed apologists offer assurances that the U.S. central bank will dry up excess liquidity when the crisis passes, with no net impact on money supply growth or inflation prospects. Assurances also are being put forth that the surge in government borrowing will be absorbed happily by the usual forced lenders, and that the Fed will not have to monetize Treasury debt further. Do not count on that!

Risks of a U.S. Default. Several readers have sent me articles suggesting that the explosive growth in U.S. federal debt portends a U.S. debt default as early as next year. Such is not likely, unless foreign lenders start making not-so-unreasonable demands that the United States issue its debt in yen, pounds, euros, etc. While the government’s gross debt level is exploding, the United States had no prospects of ever honoring the obligations that already were in place before the current crisis (see the Hyperinflation Special Report of April 8, 2008). Under such circumstances, most governments would opt to use the printing press to hyperinflate their way out of debt, rather than to go through a formal debt default.

If, however, the U.S. had to start covering new obligations in something other than the U.S. dollar, then the risk of default would become meaningful, and sovereign ratings on non-dollar U.S. Treasury debt easily could fall below investment grade.

Third Quarter GDP to Contract. With all that has happened in recent weeks and with official Washington trying to convince the public that the sky was falling, the issue of whether the economy is headed into recession became something of a moot point. In an unusual move, the Administration announced (October 23rd), "We expect our [GDP] number next week not to be a good one, and the next quarter could probably be tough as well."

Such a statement closer to announcing a contraction (and recession) than most administrations would get. Most administrations would try to keep the estimate in positive territory less than a week before an election. Yet, a week in advance (release scheduled for October 30th), the Administration has a pretty good idea of what will be reported for the "advance" growth estimate for real (inflation-adjusted) third-quarter GDP. With consensus forecasts moving from flat to a 0.5% annualized quarterly contraction (per Briefing.com), such is a likely target for the Bureau of Economic Analysis estimate.

As will be discussed in the upcoming newsletter (and has been discussed in prior newsletters), the recession likely started late in 2006, and it is the second downleg of a much longer and deeper 2000 recession than officially is recognized, at present.

Durable Goods and Consumer Confidence Should Suffer. Given the market turmoil and economy-bashing out of Washington, both the October Consumer Confidence and Sentiment measures should take tremendous hits (due respectively October 28th and 31st). The regularly-volatile new orders for durable goods should see a continued decline on a year-to-year basis (due October 29th).

U.S. Dollar, Gold and Oil. With the financial panic continuing, the markets are not close to being in balance. Recent U.S. dollar strength and gold weakness have been heavily influenced by forced liquidations, position squaring, etc. by troubled entities. At such time as the markets return to some level of stability, heavy dollar selling and gold buying likely will resume. As the dollar tumbles anew, that should add some upside pressure to oil prices, irrespective of slowing global demand. More detail follows in the newsletter.

Special Update

Thursday, October 16th, 2008
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
SPECIAL UPDATE
 
October 16, 2008
__________

 

Inflationary Recession Remains Intact and Intensifies

Federal Debt Jumps $1.25 Trillion Year/Year, $650 Billion in Six Weeks

Inflation Holds Despite Oil Sell-Off

3rd-Quarter Real Retail Sales Plunge
Annualized 10.1%, 4.2% Year/Year

3rd-Quarter Industrial Production Down
for Second Consecutive Quarter, Year/Year 

 

__________

 

In response to reader requests, this Special Update provides a preliminary but brief assessment of the impact from the financial system solvency crisis and ongoing turmoil in the global financial markets on the outlook for the continuing inflationary recession and my prediction of a hyperinflationary great depression. These comments are provided in advance of more detailed analysis in the next full SGS Newsletter, targeted for publication over the weekend of October 25th. In general, the economic and inflation outlooks — other than intensified — are little changed.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams  

 

Fed/Treasury Actions Should Stabilize Banking System
U.S. Equities, U.S. Dollar and U.S. Economy Face Significant Downsides

With the partial nationalization of the banking system, full FDIC backing to demand deposits and various other bank liabilities, extraordinary liquidity facilities offered by the Federal Reserve and indications of further flexibility as needed, the federal government and the Federal Reserve have taken actions or otherwise should have the ability to stabilize the functioning of financial services industry. As discussed previously, however, those actions will not prevent an already ongoing and deepening recession and will not provide a long term-prop to U.S. equities or to the U.S. dollar.  The ultimate cost of systemic salvation remains inflation, driven by excessive monetary creation, irrespective of the short-term collapse in oil prices.

It is important to keep in mind that the current recession has been in place for some time, since before the systemic solvency crisis broke in August of 2007. It reflects a structural impairment in the U.S. economy that has prevented sustainable income growth from exceeding that of inflation (see the Hyperinflation Report of April 8, 2008 for further detail). The recent systemic and market turmoil only have exacerbated the downturn, they did not trigger it. As discussed below, reporting of retail sales and industrial production show an ongoing and deepening recession.  

While those underlying economic numbers would be consistent with a third-quarter real (inflation-adjusted) GDP contraction, the Bureau of Economic Analysis so far has masked most of the GDP’s contraction in the current recession with heavily politicized reporting. The BEA has the ability to do so, again, in the upcoming "advance" estimate of the third-quarter GDP, due out on October 30th, the Thursday before the election. On the other hand, the concept of the U.S. economy being in recession is now so widespread that further obfuscation could just intensify the public’s distrust of government reporting, with little if any political gain. If consensus forecasts coming into the end of next week are for a GDP contraction, such would enhance the odds of an actual contraction being reported.

In recent weeks, the government and Wall Street talked up the "collapsing" economy in an effort to gain public support for the "bailout" package.   The fear mongering has had its impact in hitting the economy harder than would have been seen otherwise from the liquidity crisis, accelerating the fall into an economic depression (see the Hyperinflation Report of April 8, 2008 for further definitions).

From the standpoint of inflation, the current level of oil prices, below $90 per barrel, has and will ease some of the immediate-term commodity-driven inflation pressures. Such will be more than offset in the next six-to-nine months as the impact from increased money supply growth starts to surface in inflation reporting. I still look for double-digit official CPI reporting in early 2009.

As to recent strength in the dollar, weakness in oil prices, and softness in gold prices, much has been distorted by the systemic solvency crisis, where forced liquidations of related financial instruments have caused prices movements well beyond or counter to underlying fundamentals. In particular, as the markets begin to stabilize, the U.S. dollar should come under intense selling pressures. Regardless of the global nature of some actions taken to stabilize the system, the primary solvency crisis and the fiscally and monetarily destructive corrective actions are predominantly U.S. issues, ones that materially have weakened the already miserable underlying fundamentals for the U.S. dollar.

When dollar selling resumes, eventually evolving into a massive flight-to-safety outside the dollar, that should put upside pressure on the prices of precious metals. Oil prices should surge in dollar terms, too, irrespective of any softening oil demand due to slower U.S. or global economic activity.

The hyperinflation forecast remains intact, but it may be moved closer to the present, depending on developments with the U.S. dollar. This shall be discussed in further detail in the upcoming SGS Newsletter.

Federal Debt and Deficit Explode. Quick impact from the solvency crisis has been seen in the U.S. government’s deteriorating fiscal condition. Against official expectations two months ago of a $389 billion deficit, the official fiscal 2008 (year-ended September 30th) shortfall came in at $454.8 billion, up from $161.5 billion in 2007. These are the officially-gimmicked numbers, not GAAP reporting, which will show a much larger deficit. Reflecting the recession that was in place long before the solvency crisis exploded, government revenues in 2008 fell by 15.3% versus 2007.

As of October 14, 2008, gross federal debt stood at $10.294 trillion, up by $1.250 trillion or 13.8% year-to-year, and up by $650 billion or 8.8% since the first of September.    

CPI Continued to Absorb Oil Sell-Off Shock.  Reported September consumer inflation eased back again on both a monthly and annual basis, as the CPI continued to absorb the impact of an ongoing tumble in oil prices. Yet, "core" inflation also eased (CPI-U core up by 0.1% in September, 0.2% in August, and 0.3% in July) despite significant anecdotal evidence of surging non-energy and food inflation.

CPI-U.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported seasonally-adjusted September CPI-U eased by 0.03% (down by 0.14% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, versus a 0.14% (0.40% unadjusted) decline in August.  Year-to-year or annual inflation in September backed off to 4.94% from 5.37% in August.  

Annual inflation would increase in October 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the 0.26% monthly increase seen in October 2007.  The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from September’s annual inflation rate of 4.94%.

CPI-W. Annual inflation for the narrower CPI-W — targeted at the wage-earners category where gasoline takes a bigger proportionate bite out of spending — eased to 5.4% in September from 5.9% in August and 6.2% in July.  The CPI-W is used for making the annual cost of living adjustments to Social Security payments, and the 2009 adjustment — based on the July to September 2008 period — should be about 5.8%, two-and-a-half times the 2.3% adjustment for 2008.  Such is not good news for federal budget deficit, discussed elsewhere.

C-CPI-U.  Year-to-year or annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — eased to 4.34% in September from 4.70% in August.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures.  Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth declined to roughly 8.3% in September from 8.7% in August, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, eased back to roughly 12.9% in September from 13.2% in August.  The alternate numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data.

PPI Also Absorbed Oil Selling. The regularly volatile Producer Price Index (PPI) for finished goods contracted by a seasonally-adjusted 0.4% (0.1% unadjusted) in September, versus 0.9% (1.6% unadjusted) in August, as reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics. The decline largely reflected the continued sharp decline in oil prices.  Year-to-year PPI inflation in September eased to 8.7% from 9.6% in August.

Retail Sales Plunge Month-to-Month and Year-to-Year, Before Inflation Adjustment. September retail sales showed a still-deepening economic contraction. The Census Bureau reported that seasonally-adjusted sales fell for the month by 1.16% (down 1.49% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), following a revised 0.45% (previously 0.27%) decline in August.  On a year-to-year basis, September retail sales growth turned negative, down by 1.03%, versus a revised gain of 1.50% (previously 1.56%) in August.  

Real Retail Sales. Deflated by the September CPI-U, seasonally-adjusted real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales contracted by 1.13% for the month of September (down 1.16% before inflation adjustment), following a 0.31% decline in the month of August (down 0.45% before inflation adjustment).  On a year-to-year basis, September retail sales fell by 5.69% (down 1.03% before inflation adjustment), versus a 3.66% decline in August (up by 1.50% before inflation adjustment). The series now has suffered its fourth consecutive quarter-to-quarter real contraction (an annualized decline of 10.1% in the third quarter versus a 1.2% drop in the second quarter) and the third consecutive quarter of annual contraction (down 4.2% for the third quarter versus a 1.6% decline for the second quarter).  Such ongoing negative growth patterns never have been seen outside of formal recessions. 

Core Retail Sales.  Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 1.47% (down 1.76% net of revisions) in September, versus a revised 0.21% (was 0.06%) decline in August.  Those numbers contrasted with the official aggregate drop of 1.16% in September and the revised 0.45% decline in August.  On an annual basis, September "core" retail sales fell by 4.26% versus a revised August decline of 1.67% (previously down by 1.73%).

Industrial Production Contracts in 3rd Quarter, Net of Strike and Hurricane Impacts. The Federal Reserve reported a 2.8% monthly contraction in September industrial production, following a revised 1.0% (previously 1.1%) drop in August.  September’s weakness was attributable to a strike at Boeing and to oil and gas related shutdowns in the Gulf of Mexico region due to hurricanes.  September year-to-year change plunged by 4.5%, after a 1.4% annual contraction in August. Adjusting for strike and hurricane impacts, however, third-quarter production still was down on both a quarterly and an annual basis.

Not adjusted for the special factors, following a 3.1% annualized quarter-to-quarter contraction reported in the second quarter, industrial production suffered its second consecutive quarterly downturn in the third quarter at an annualized 6.0% rate of decline.  In conjunction with a 2.7% contraction in year-to-year growth for the third quarter, the series is showing growth patterns not seen outside of recessions.

Trade Deficit Reportedly Narrowed in August. Still showing likely paperwork flow distortions as discussed in the last newsletter, the Census Bureau and the Bureau of Economic Analysis reported the seasonally-adjusted August trade deficit narrowed to $59.8 billion from a revised $61.3 (previously $62.2) billion in July. With apparent renewed games-playing in reported oil imports, these data could be used to help keep the "advance" third-quarter GDP estimate in positive territory for its pre-election debut.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, October 10th, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - October 10, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

October 10, 2008

__________

 

Latest Monetary Base Jumped 16.8% Year-to-Year

September M3 Growth Expanded Year-to-Year and Month-to-Month

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The following is just the promised brief update on the money numbers. Barring extraordinary intervening events, my plan is to publish a Special Update on market and economic/ inflation conditions late next week, in advance of the full newsletter. The broad outlook is unchanged.   — Best wishes to all, John Williams

The ongoing, extraordinary actions by the Federal Reserve and the U.S. Treasury — aimed at preventing a collapse of the U.S. financial system and halting what has become a slow-motion crash in the U.S. equity markets (this morning’s trading is off to an unusually volatile start) — will result in sharp spikes to domestic money supply growth and will intensify inflationary pressures in the year ahead, irrespective of wild gyrations and sell-offs in oil and of strength in the U.S. dollar that should prove very short-lived going forward.  

Almost any official action could be forthcoming at this point; the only thing I would find a shock would be the Fed and the Treasury allowing the financial system to fail.  The Fed and Treasury have all the tools in hand they need to stabilize the functioning of the system. Panicked new actions each day in response to stock-market selling do not help the market and actually may intensify investor unease. Shy of the Fed becoming the equity-market buyer of last resort, there is little that can be done at present to turn stock prices fundamentally higher, other than what would be seen in normal trading activity and bottom bouncing on the downhill slope of a severe bear market.  Indeed underlying equity fundamentals remain about as bad as underlying U.S. dollar fundamentals.

September M3 Annual Growth About 13.3%. Based on partial Fed reporting through September 29th for the monetary aggregates (Federal Reserve Board H.6), it looks like the SGS Ongoing M3 Estimate for September will be up by roughly 13.3% year-to-year (August was 14.0%) and 0.9% month-to-month, but such reflects massive revisions just published to the series and is based on incomplete data. The numbers will be updated over the weekend, on the Alternate Data tab of www.shadowstats.com, as more complete information becomes available. October likely will see an upside spike in annual M3 growth. 

In terms of bank reserves and monetary base for the two weeks ended October 8th, they surged (Federal Reserve Board H.3). Total bank reserves (seasonally adjusted) rose to $179.9 billion in the latest two weeks, up from $109.5 billion and $47.1 billion in the prior two periods, with non-borrowed reserves now at a negative $363.1 billion. The monetary base (effectively currency plus bank reserves) rose to $985.9 billion, which was up 16.8% from the average level of October 2007. September’s year-to-year change was up 10.0%, versus 2.0% in August. The broader monetary aggregates should start to catch up in the weeks ahead.

 

__________

Alert

Wednesday, October 8th, 2008
 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

A L E R T

October 8, 2008

__________

Fed and Treasury Continue Propping the System
At All Costs (Particularly Inflation)

Intensifying Inflationary Recession Concerns
Overshadowed by Systemic Risks

__________

Following last week’s extreme measures by the Fed to flood the system with liquidity, passage of the "bailout" package on Friday (October 3rd), enabled further, unfettered Federal Reserve actions. The legislative package increased the debt ceiling and allowed the Fed to start paying interest on bank reserves deposited with the Federal Reserve Banks (lack of same had inhibited reserve expansion).  This week, the Fed set up a new facility to buy commercial paper. Despite these extraordinary actions, as well as actions taken by other central banks and finance ministries — including this morning’s coordinated interest rate cut — the systemic solvency crisis continues to intensify, with the financial markets remaining as unstable and volatile as anyone has ever seen. 

The Fed and administration will do anything to prevent a systemic collapse, the risk of which is as great a threat to national security as any the United States has faced in recent times. Accordingly, the Fed and Treasury will continue to create and spend any money necessary, to bail out any entities threatening stability, to twist any arm and to manipulate any market, medium, statistic or commodity price. That said, they indeed have the ability to support depositor safety, to prevent a functional collapse of the related financial services industry, and to prevent a deflation in the prices of goods and services. The cost of this systemic salvation, however, remains higher inflation in terms of prices for goods and services.

If the underlying system does not start to stabilize soon, almost any government action might be placed on the table. Such action could include anything from a banking holiday, and/or an all-inclusive FDIC guaranty, to some form of nationalization of the banking system.

The New York Times ["36 Hours of Alarm and Action as Crisis Spiraled," October 2, 2008, page 1] reported at least one pre-"bailout" consideration: "Although there were suggestions for a ‘bank holiday’ — a temporary nationwide closing of banks, which had not been done since 1933, to stem panicky withdrawals — Mr. Bernanke and Mr. Paulson dismissed the idea, fearing it would do far more harm than good."

Where systemic preservation is of utmost concern to the administration and the central bank, upside inflation risks exacerbated by the extraordinary systemic props, and recession problems already in play before the crisis and related exacerbation since, simply will be ignored or talked around, at present.

The U.S. stock market has been experiencing something akin to a controlled crash. What the Fed and Treasury are unlikely to accomplish in saving the system include any long-term artificial prop for the U.S. equity markets, as well as any long-term artificial support for the U.S. dollar. The Fed also cannot prevent an already ongoing and deepening recession or a continued, significant upturn in inflation. From Mr. Bernanke’s standpoint, concerns as to containing inflation or stimulating the economy are but secondary or tertiary to concerns as to preventing systemic collapse.

The general outlook remains the same. Recent dollar strength reflects a variety of factors ranging from outright supportive intervention, to flight to safety, to crosscurrents from trading forced by related derivatives held by troubled institutions, to general misperceptions that the systemic and economic conditions are relatively better in the United States than among major U.S. trading partners. Reality on the last point is starting to surface. With the underlying U.S. dollar fundamentals otherwise remaining as negative as they can be, the other factors mentioned should prove to be relatively short-lived.  

Beyond the current severe market instabilities, the long range outlook remains for heavy equity selling, for higher long-term treasury yields, and for heavy dollar selling and dumping of dollar-denominated assets, which eventually will evolve into flight to safety outside the dollar. When serious dollar selling begins anew, such should add some upside pressure to oil and gold prices. In any event, over the long-term, gold should rally sharply, reflecting its nature as a fundamental hedge against inflation and as a traditional flight-to-safety investment.

Barring extraordinary intervening events, my plan is to publish a brief Flash Update on Friday (October 10th) to look at this week’s money supply and trade numbers, with a special update on market and economic/ inflation conditions to be published late next week, in advance of the full newsletter.

 

__________

Alert

Friday, October 3rd, 2008

ALERT - October 3, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

A L E R T

 

October 3, 2008

__________

 

Fed Began Sidestepping No "Bailout" Before First House Vote

M1 and M2 Annualized Surges of 800% and 200% 
Are Panic Distortions (Offset in M3)

Jobs Plunged by 219,000 Net of Concurrent-Seasonal-Factor Bias

"Core" Inflation Turned Higher

 

__________

 

TAF Expansion Accomplishes Much 
Of the Proposed Bailout’s Immediate Relief

Regardless of the near-term fate of the expanding and increasingly politicized "bailout" package, Messrs. Bernanke and Paulson will continue doing everything they have to do in order to prevent systemic collapse. The initial, expressed purpose of the bailout was to allow the U.S. Treasury to buy troubled assets from impaired banks, enabling the banks to lend money — and thus to create money supply — in a more-normal fashion. Using its crisis-created Term Auction Facility (TAF), The Fed had been generating roughly the same result by lending liquid assets (U.S. Treasuries) to the troubled banks, accepting, in return, collateral that otherwise was illiquid. 

Broad money growth surged in response to the initial $75 billion TAF, and again as the TAF was expanded to $150 billion, but money growth slowed recently as the Fed kept rolling the loans and did not add fresh liquefaction to the system. That changed on Monday (September 29th), as the $700 billion "bailout" package was heading for defeat. At that time, the Fed doubled the TAF facility, once again, to $300 billion, and added an extended $150 billion to covered liquidity over the year-end period. These actions were in addition to an expansion of currency swaps by $330 billion (to $620 billion total) with foreign central banks, which needed the swapped dollars to maintain dollar-liquidity in their systems. 

The Fed can keep creating whatever electronic liquidity it needs to — irrespective of Congress — until such time as it has to beef up its balance sheet enough to force the Treasury into seeking an increase in the federal debt ceiling. 

If Only the Fed Still Reported M3. Money supply M2 has been the broadest money measure published by the Federal Reserve, since M3 reporting was abandoned in March 2006. At that time M3 was deemed too costly to produce and otherwise was useless, per the Fed. In last night’s (October 2nd) H.6 Money Stock Measures, seasonally-adjusted M2 — the currently official broad money measure — reportedly exploded in the week-ended September 22nd by $165.5 billion to $7,900.0 billion, an annualized growth rate of 200%. M1 rose at an annualized 800%, up $60.9 billion to $1,272.2 billion. Rather than signaling the onset of hyperinflation, though, these numbers make the case for ongoing reporting of M3 and show the benefit of being able to look at the broadest money measure.

The period involved reflects the renewed investor panic in the ongoing systemic solvency crisis, but it does not yet reflect the impact of the heavy systemic liquefaction that the Federal Reserve and U.S. Treasury implemented to counter the unfolding run on the system. The broader M3 measure helps to explain what was happening, where the seasonally-adjusted non-M2 institutional money funds account plunged by $156.4 billion, to $2,098.2 billion, in the same period, with the funds apparently flowing into checking accounts (M1 [in M2]) and savings accounts (M2). Not considered yet, however, is what happened in the other non-M2 components of M3 (such as large time deposits), which will be indicated in Federal Reserve reporting at the close of business today.

Broad U.6 Unemployment Jumped to 11.0% (15.0% SGS). Against a background of a rapidly deepening recession and intensifying weakness in the key employment/unemployment indicators, the Bureau of Labor Statistics reported this morning (October 3rd) that seasonally-adjusted payrolls plunged and that the unemployment rate increased (see below), but the reported deterioration remained well shy of reality.  Monthly, quarterly and annual payroll contractions continued and deepened, showing patterns never seen outside of recessions.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a statistically-significant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 159,000 (down 155,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for September, following a revised 73,000 (previously 84,000) jobs loss in August. Annual contraction (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls continued to deepen, down 0.43% in September, versus a revised 0.21% (previously 0.29%) in August. The seasonally-adjusted series also contracted year-to-year, down by 0.38% in September, versus a 0.20% (previously 0.21%) contraction in August.

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias. The pattern of impossible biases (see the Reporting/Market Focus in the June 10, 2008 SGS Newsletter) being built into the headline payroll employment changes intensified with September reporting. Instead of the headline jobs loss of 159,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what we are calling the concurrent seasonal adjustment bias — would have shown a more-severe monthly jobs loss of about 219,000. This upside reporting bias has been seen in 11 of the last 12 months, with a rolling 12-month total upside headline-number bias of 648,000.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. A minor element in September that added upside pressure to the payroll number was the monthly bias factor (birth-death model). Never designed to handle the downside pressures from a recession, the model added a 42,000 upside jobs bias to September 2008 (versus the prior September’s 29,000 upside bias), and following a net upside bias of 125,000 jobs in August 2008. The process boosted financial-activities and construction jobs by 8,000 and 12,000, respectively. 

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed household employment fell by 222,000 in September, following a 342,000 loss in August.

The August 2008 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-insignificant increase to 6.12% +/- 0.23% from 6.05% in August.  Unadjusted, U.3 eased to 6.0% in September, versus 6.1% in August.  The broader September U.6 unemployment rate, however, jumped to an adjusted 11.0% (10.6% unadjusted) from 10.7% (10.7% unadjusted) in August.  Refigured for the bulk of the "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment, as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure, rose to 15.0% in September, up from 14.7% in August.

Background Employment Statistics. Signaling rapidly deteriorating employment conditions have been related reporting in help-wanted advertising, the purchasing managers survey and new claims for unemployment. Seasonally-adjusted August help-wanted advertising (Conference Board) plunged to 15, down from a revised 16 in (was 17) in July, and 18 in June, a fall of 16.7% in two months, down 34.8% year-to-year (versus a 36.0% annual decline in July), and at a new historic low for the series first estimated during Harry Truman’s Administration. Allowing for the impact of Internet advertising (which continued down year-to-year in August, per the Conference Board), these numbers show plummeting employment activity.

The September purchasing managers survey of manufacturing showed its seasonally-adjusted employment measure plunging to 41.8 from 49.7 in August, the sharpest monthly decline in the series in 20 years. Purchasing managers results are diffusion indices, where the percent of positive responses are added to half the unchanged responses. Hence a reading of below 50.0 indicates a series in contraction and vice versa. (The nonmanufacturing survey is not available as this goes into the production process.)

The new claims for unemployment insurance series also is getting much worse, very quickly. On the basis of a 17-week moving average, new claims were up year-to-year (an increase here is an economic negative) by 34.4% for as of the week ended September 27th.   Such is likely to keep rising, with the same week on a four-week moving average basis showing a year-to-year increase of 48.8%.

Purchasing Managers Index Show Sharp Deterioration in Economic Activity. Beyond collapsing employment, the overall September manufacturing survey fell to 43.5 from 49.9 in August, the weakest showing since the last recession. New orders fell to 38.8 from 48.3, a level only seen historically at the deepest part of recessions. Production fell to 40.8 from 52.1, and prices tumbled sharply to 53.5 from 77.0, helping to lock in a sharp third-quarter industrial production contraction on both a quarterly and annual basis. The decline in the price index, though still in inflation territory above 50.0, was unusually severe, even allowing for the recent sharp decline in oil prices.

"Core" Inflation Pick-Up.  In other inflation reporting, the August 2008 personal income report showed unusual upside movement in the "core" PCE deflator, the inflation rate used to deflate the personal consumption component of GDP, net of any food and energy inflation. Where the year-to-year "core" rate has held around 2.2% for an extended period of time, June notched higher to 2.3%, then to 2.5% in July and to 2.6% in August. While still well shy of reality, the numbers suggest that the broad impact of energy inflation finally is beginning to make its way into official reporting. Anecdotal evidence suggests that many firms that have held back price increases now are feeling such a profit squeeze that they have no choice but to pass along higher costs.

General Outlook Unchanged. [What follows is repeated from the September 29th SGS Newsletter and recent Alerts.] It is not likely that the systemic solvency crisis is behind us, and it is too late to prevent a recession. The inflationary recession was well underway before the housing/mortgage crisis, and little can be done to stimulate economic activity, to contain inflation or to provide a long-term prop to equity values. The government, however, does have the ability to support depositor safety, to prevent a collapse of the related financial services industry and to prevent a deflation in the prices of goods and services. Indeed, the cost of systemic salvation is higher price inflation.  

The various markets are about as volatile and dangerous as they can get. With extraordinary crosscurrents from the solvency crisis and various governmental and global central bank interventions in the markets and marketplace, volatility likely will continue, sometimes in directions that may seem irrational. The gold and currency markets, in particular, remain subject to jawboning and both covert and overt central bank intervention, aimed at discouraging investors from seeking safety in gold or outside the greenback. 

All factors considered, the broad outlook remains the same: further intensification of the inflationary recession and a continued deepening systemic and banking solvency crisis.  Growing market recognition of these issues and mounting global political tensions have intensified the risks for continued unstable market conditions, markedly.

Over the near-term, negative major market displacements should follow or be accompanied by intense, broad selling of the U.S. dollar, which may be beginning anew.  An eventual, increasing flight-to-safety outside of the U.S. dollar also should include flight-to-safety into gold.  Despite continuing softness in oil prices, current levels (anything above $90 per barrel) remain highly inflationary. Over the longer term, U.S. equities, bonds and the greenback should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom.

 

__________

Newsletter (Issue No. 46)

Monday, September 29th, 2008

Issue Number 46

September 28, 2008

The usual four sections of the Newsletter are available as separate web-pages as well as individual PDF documents.  The Newsletter also remains  available in its entirety as a single, large PDF document.

We strongly recommend that when making a printed copy of the newsletter (in part or whole) you use the PDF version.  If your computer does not yet handle PDFs, we urge you to download the free, Adobe Acrobat reader.

We would be grateful for any comments and suggestions about your prefered format for the Newsletter.

Newsletter as a Single PDF

Newsletter by Section:

Section 1. Overview   (PDF)

Section 2. Markets Perspective  (PDF)

Section 3. Reporting Perspective    (PDF)

Section 4. Reporting/Market Focus   (PDF)

 

 
___________________________________________
 

PLEASE NOTE: The next SGS Newsletter currently is targeted for the week of October 19th.  Intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted in response to key economic or financial-market developments.

Earlier editions of the SGS writings referenced in the text can be found on the Archives tab at www.shadowstats.com.

Occasionally, important, brief updates are communicated directly by e-mail.  If you are not receiving e-mail communications from us, please let us know at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or by using the "Contact Us" option on www.shadowstats.com.

Alert

Friday, September 26th, 2008

ALERT - September 26, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

A L E R T

 

September 26, 2008

__________

 

Money Supply Begins to Reflect Intensifying Solvency Crisis

Recession Deepens Despite Still-Bogus GDP Reporting

Financial Storm Likely to Worsen, Risks Mount of Systemic Instability

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: As of this Alert, posted Friday morning (September 26th), legislation on a financial-system rescue package has not been agreed upon. The financial system remains in a state of flux and Treasury and Federal Reserve reactions remains fluid, already responding overnight to counter increased selling pressure on the U.S. dollar. Almost anything can happen here, including extreme instability in the financial markets and extreme reactions from the government to maintain systemic stability. 

The full SGS newsletter follows this weekend. Given likely continued rapid evolution of the systemic solvency crisis and government response to same, any issues that need to be addressed in update generally will be covered in subsequent Alerts. My general outlook is unchanged.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Banks Reserves Surge 132%,
Monetary Base Jumps 8% in Latest Two Weeks

Based on the Federal Reserve’s releases (H.6, H.3 and H.4.1) of last night (September 25th) the public resurfacing of the solvency crisis has started to surface in the monetary releases. All the numbers that follow are seasonally adjusted unless otherwise noted (the unadjusted data tend to show similar same patterns). The reporting period in latest weekly money supply report lagged the latest bi-weekly reserves and monetary base reporting by roughly one week. 

For the week ended September 15th, reported M2 rose by $20.6 billion to $7,734.4 billion. In terms of the broader M3 measure, however, the non-M2 component of institutional money funds declined by $30.4 billion to $2,254.6. Tonight’s report on bank assets and liabilities (H.8) will give an indication as to what happened in the week to the non-M2 component of large-time deposits. What appears to have been possibly a flat-to-down week in broad money growth, however, likely will change sharply in the reporting of subsequent weekly data.

The extraordinary actions of the Fed and Treasury in the last week or so are reflected in the data for the two week period end September 24th (Wednesday). The daily average of total reserves of depository institutions surged to $109.516 billion in the two weeks ended September 24th, up from $47.112 billion in the two weeks ended September 10th. In like manner, the monetary base, which basically includes currency and bank reserves, jumped to $911.350 billion from $843.825 billion. These data reflect a significant pick-up in the formal creation of money and are without recent precedent as to the magnitude of the short-term increase. Total borrowings from the Fed (unadjusted) also showed an extreme surge, rising from a daily average in the two weeks ended September 10th of $169.481 billion to $267.861 billion in the latest period.

Impact from the recent Fed and Treasury activity should begin to surface in the next several weeks of broad money reporting, which will be advised when the data become available.

New Orders for Durable Goods Keep Sinking Quarter-to-Quarter, Year-to-Year. Seasonally-adjusted new orders for consumer goods contracted by 4.5% (4.9% net of revisions) for the month of August, following a revised 0.8% (previously 1.3%) monthly gain in July for this regularly volatile series. Annual change continued in contraction, with August orders down 8.1% year-to-year, following a 2.2% annual contraction in August. This protracted pattern of quarterly and annual contractions (before inflation adjustment) is common to reporting during formal recessions and suggests that the current economic downturn is intensifying.

New orders for nondefense capital goods fell by 7.5% for the month, and slumped by 35.5% year-to year, following a monthly gain of 3.5% and annual decline of 6.6% in July.

GDP Revises Downward Despite "Weaker" Inflation.   As suggested in the September 12th Flash Update, recent data, which showed the "improving" trade deficit was not quite as positive as previously indicated, helped to trigger some downward revision in today’s "final" estimate of second-quarter GDP growth. Also contributing to the weaker report were downward revisions to the largely guesstimated services-sector component of personal consumption expenditure.

Though revised in an appropriate direction, the nonsense continued with GDP reporting, with the "final" estimate revision for the second quarter showing annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth of 2.83% +/- 3%, down from the "preliminary" estimate of 3.28%, but still up from the "advance" estimate of 1.89%, and up from the first quarter’s 0.87%. Year-to-year growth revised to 2.05%, from the "preliminary" 2.17% and "advance" 1.82%, and still was down from the first quarter’s 2.54%.   The SGS-Alternate GDP estimate of annual change remains a contraction of roughly 2.9%.

The numbers also reflected a downward revision in the second-quarter inflation rate for the GDP deflator to 1.26%, versus the "preliminary" 1.33% and "advance" 1.11%, and against 2.56% in the first quarter. The lower the inflation rate used in the GDP deflator, the stronger will be the reported, inflation-adjusted growth.

The latest economic data will be covered more fully in the pending newsletter.      

General Outlook Is Unchanged. [The following is repeated from the April 22nd Alert.] It is not likely that the systemic solvency crisis is behind us, and it is too late to prevent a recession. The inflationary recession was well underway before the housing/ mortgage crisis, and little can be done to stimulate economic activity, to contain inflation or to provide a long-term prop to equity values. The government, however, does have the ability to support depositor safety, to prevent a collapse of the related financial services industry and to prevent a deflation in the prices of goods and services. Indeed, the cost of systemic salvation is price inflation.  

The various markets are about as volatile and dangerous as they can get. With extraordinary crosscurrents from the solvency crisis and various governmental and global central bank interventions in the markets and marketplace, volatility likely will continue, sometimes in directions that may seem irrational. The gold and currency markets, in particular, remain subject to jawboning and both covert and overt central bank intervention, aimed at discouraging investors from seeking safety in gold our outside the greenback. 

All factors considered, the broad outlook remains the same: further intensification of the inflationary recession and a continued deepening systemic and banking solvency crisis.  Growing market recognition of these issues and mounting global political tensions have intensified the risks for continued unstable market conditions, markedly.

Over the near-term, negative major market displacements should follow or be accompanied by intense, broad selling of the U.S. dollar, which may be beginning anew.  An eventual, increasing flight-to-safety outside of the U.S. dollar also should include flight-to-safety into gold.  Despite continuing softness in oil prices, current levels (anything above $90 per barrel) remain highly inflationary. Over the longer term, U.S. equities, bonds and the greenback should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom.

 

__________

Washington Journal, C-SPAN

Thursday, September 25th, 2008

From the C-SPAN video library website: "John Williams talked about his assertion that the federal government’s manipulation and misreporting of government economic data has led current day problems within the financial services markets, which in turn has led to the federal government assisting those markets. He responded to telephone calls and electronic mail."

John Williams on C-SPAN TV
Watch the interview and questions at the CSPAN Video Library

Alert

Monday, September 22nd, 2008

ALERT - September 22, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

A L E R T

 

September 22, 2008

__________

 

Government Actions Will Spike Money Supply

Highly Unlikely That the Financial Storm Has Passed

 Recession Was Well Underway Before the Housing/Mortgage Crisis Broke

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: As of this Alert, posted Monday morning (September 22nd), pending legislation on a financial-system rescue package is far from being finalized, while the system remains in a state of flux and Treasury and Federal Reserve reactions remains fluid. The markets appear lulled, at least temporarily. The full SGS newsletter will follow soon, but given likely continued rapid evolution of the systemic solvency crisis and government response to same, any issues that need to be addressed in update will be covered in further Alerts. My general outlook is unchanged.
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

They Will Do Anything to Keep the System from Collapse

In response to a mounting run on the U.S. financial system and high risk of a systemic implosion, the U.S. Treasury and Federal Reserve put forth a plan to purchase up to $700 billion in illiquid assets from U.S. and foreign financial institutions that have "significant operations" in the United States. Congressional authorization of this plan (including a boost in the federal debt ceiling from $10.6 trillion to $11.3 trillion) purportedly is likely by the end of this week. Nothing is certain, though, given ongoing instability in the markets and system. Further, it is not clear that $700 billion is adequate, or that the Congress will allow this package without oversight, as requested by the Treasury. The actions taken and promised will increase money supply growth and ultimately add upside pressure to inflation.

A stock market crash by itself does not implode money supply and trigger deflation any more than a stock market boom expands money growth and triggers inflation. It is the loss or creation of money in the monetary aggregate accounts that alters money growth. Deposits wiped out by failed banks, or cash taken out of banks and put under a mattress contract the money supply. It is in such areas that the various systemic-supportive actions by the Fed and the Treasury have been aimed (such as the guaranty program to back money market funds), in addition to efforts to prop the equity market (such as banning short selling of certain financial stocks). Other efforts, such as the bailout and takeover of AIG and the proposed $700 billion package, will have the effect of increasing money, as discussed below.  

One can hope that the legislative package being developed by the Administration and Congress will restore calm and confidence to the U.S. financial markets and financial system, but actions taken by the Fed and Treasury, Sunday night, suggest that circumstances remain far from stabilized. The Treasury expanded its guaranty of money market funds, but only on those existing as of Friday. Reportedly, the time limit was imposed to destroy the incentive for bank depositors to transfer bank deposits (protected by more-limited FDIC coverage) to the now better-insured funds. Presumably, if forced by increasing bank runs, a Federal guaranty on all bank deposits (irrespective of size) could be next. Last night, the Fed allowed investment banks Goldman Sachs and Morgan Stanley to become bank holding companies, in an effort to enhance their funding abilities.

It is worth noting that the prior weekend’s implicit message from the Fed and Treasury on Lehman’s collapse — that there were no institutions too large to fail — might have helped to trigger or at least to exacerbate the systemic panic that reached a near-term crescendo during the ensuing week.   That said, beyond spending or promising whatever money the Treasury and the Fed need to create, in order to prop the system, much continues to go on beyond the scenes, including extraordinary arm-twisting ("encouraged" takeovers), market and likely data interventions/manipulations, etc.  These sub rosa crosscurrents and interventions leave short-term market conditions extraordinarily unpredictable, dangerous and volatile.

Inflation Implications. The two most frequent questions I have been getting from readers over the last several days: (1) How do the government’s actions impact money supply? (2) Does the current circumstance accelerate my hyperinflation outlook?

Money Supply Boosts.  As discussed in the prior Alert (September 17th), the Fed and the Treasury created new money to handle the AIG circumstance. Whether a check is written by the Treasury or funded by the Fed, the new cash supplied to AIG likely will go initially into a demand deposit, a component of M1, and initially enjoy the multiplicative effect of the fractional reserve system, adding directly to broad money growth. 

Separately, a bank with an impaired balance sheet also has an impaired ability to lend money. To the extent the $700 billion being designated to buy illiquid assets from financial institutions may help to stabilizebalance sheets, aided banks presumably will resume lending money in a more-normal fashion. Freeing up lending is Treasury Secretary Paulson’s expressed reason for putting forth the finance package, and the renewed bank lending will expand money growth in a very traditional manner.

The weekly money supply numbers likely will show some unusual patterns, as the current weeks get reported. Broad money supply, as reflected in the SGS ongoing M3 measure, which showed still highly-inflationary annual growth of roughly 14% in August, could soften to perhaps a 13% annual pace in September, but that annual growth rate likely will be surging anew come October reporting.

Hyperinflation Outlook Remains. In saving the system, the cost to the American public from this effort — aside from rapidly expanding federal debt — is inflation. My outlook for double-digit inflation, as reported by the government, remains in place for early 2009. The broad timeframe of 2010 to 2018 suggested for the hyperinflation discussed in the April 8th Special Report, certainly has not been pushed back in time by current events, but the final shape of the systemic bailout still is fluid. The more the government spends, the sooner the hyperinflation is likely to hit. 

Key to the timing of the hyperinflation remains the U.S. dollar and the ongoing willingness of foreign institutions to hold it and dollar-denominated assets. At such time as massive dollar selling kicks in and dumping of dollar-denominated assets starts to overwhelm the Fed, the hyperinflation timing would begin to firm and move closer in time.

General Outlook Is Unchanged. It is not likely that the systemic solvency crisis is behind us, and it is too late to prevent a recession. The inflationary recession was well underway before the housing/ mortgage crisis, and little can be done to stimulate economic activity, to contain inflation or to provide a long-term prop to equity values. The government, however, does have the ability to support depositor safety, to prevent a collapse of the related financial services industry and to prevent a deflation in the prices of goods and services. Indeed, the cost of systemic salvation is price inflation.   

[The following is repeated from the April 17th Alert.] The various markets are about as volatile and dangerous as they can get. With extraordinary crosscurrents from the solvency crisis and various governmental and global central bank interventions in the markets and marketplace, volatility likely will continue, sometimes in directions that may seem irrational. The gold and currency markets, in particular, remain subject to jawboning and both covert and overt central bank intervention, aimed at discouraging investors from seeking safety in gold our outside the greenback. 

All factors considered, the broad outlook remains the same: further intensification of the inflationary recession and a continued deepening systemic and banking solvency crisis.  Growing market recognition of these issues and mounting global political tensions have intensified the risks for continued unstable market conditions, markedly.

Over the near-term, negative major market displacements should follow or be accompanied by intense, broad selling of the U.S. dollar, which may be beginning anew.  An eventual, increasing flight-to-safety outside of the U.S. dollar also should include flight-to-safety into gold.  Despite continuing softness in oil prices, current levels (anything above $90 per barrel) remain highly inflationary. Over the longer term, U.S. equities, bonds and the greenback should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom.

 

__________

Alert

Wednesday, September 17th, 2008
   
 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

A L E R T

September 17, 2008

__________

 

Treasury and Fed Rev Up the Currency Printing Presses

Has a Run on the System Begun?

The Problem Remains Inflation, Not Deflation

 

__________

 

Treasury and Fed Create New Money. The news continues to be bleak for U.S. monetary discipline and the inflation, but it certainly is not unexpected. After the $85 billion bailout announced last night for AIG, the Fed and the U.S. Treasury today began creating serious new money in the system, a process that eventually will end in a hyperinflation and complete debasement of the U.S. dollar. As announced by the U.S. Treasury this morning:

September 17, 2008
HP-1144

Treasury Announces Supplementary Financing Program

Washington- The Federal Reserve has announced a series of lending and liquidity initiatives during the past several quarters intended to address heightened liquidity pressures in the financial market, including enhancing its liquidity facilities this week.  To manage the balance sheet impact of these efforts, the Federal Reserve has taken a number of actions, including redeeming and selling securities from the System Open Market Account portfolio.

The Treasury Department announced today the initiation of a temporary Supplementary Financing Program at the request of the Federal Reserve.  The program will consist of a series of Treasury bills, apart from Treasury’s current borrowing program, which will provide cash for use in the Federal Reserve initiatives.

Announcements of and participation in auctions conducted under the Supplementary Financing Program will be governed by existing Treasury auction rules.  Treasury will provide as much advance notification as possible regarding the timing, size, and maturity of any bills auctioned for Supplementary Financing Program purposes.

Whether the resulting cash is placed into the system by the Fed (which seems to be trying to dodge showing an increase in bank reserves while making its assets look a little better) or by the U.S. Treasury, the effect will be the same: increased growth in broad money supply.

Following the announcement, the price of gold jumped by about $50 per troy ounce.

Negative T-Bill Yields Can Signal Run on the Banking System. In the banking crisis of the 1930s, Treasury bill yields actually turned negative. Investors were more comfortable paying the U.S. Treasury to hold their cash than they were leaving their money in the banking system. There apparently are stories in the financial media indicating effective negative Treasury bill yields (presumably based on transaction costs for those dealing through an intermediary) and implications for same. 

For those buying one-month Treasury bills directly from the New York Fed, the constant maturity annual yield stood at 0.23% on Tuesday (September 15th), down from 0.37% on Monday and 1.37% on Friday, more than might be accounted for by any expectations building for a Fed rate cut that did not come. The yield was down further as we go to press. This is an area to watch, at present, as a direct barometer of systemic stability.    

General Outlook Remains Unchanged (Inflation, Not Deflation). First, let me reiterate the concept that the U.S. system faces an inflation problem in terms of prices for goods and services, not a deflation problem. Recession and asset deflation are not at all inconsistent with price inflation, as was seen in the 1970s. There will be no price deflation without a sharp drop in the broad money supply (as in a year-to-year decline). 

Such a decline was not in the works, and current Fed and Treasury activity is promising even stronger money growth in the immediate future.   Messrs Bernanke and Paulson tacitly have confirmed that they will create whatever money they have to create in order to prevent a systemic collapse.

The various markets are about as volatile and dangerous as they can get. With extraordinary crosscurrents from the solvency crisis and various governmental and global central bank interventions in the markets and marketplace, volatility likely will continue, sometimes in directions that may seem irrational. The gold and currency markets, in particular, remain subject to jawboning and both covert and overt central bank intervention, aimed at discouraging investors from seeking safety in gold our outside the greenback. 

All factors considered, the broad outlook remains the same: further intensification of the inflationary recession and a continued deepening systemic and banking solvency crisis.  Growing market recognition of these issues and mounting global political tensions have intensified the risks for continued unstable market conditions, markedly.

Over the near-term, negative major market displacements should follow or be accompanied by intense, broad selling of the U.S. dollar, which may be beginning anew.  An eventual, increasing flight-to-safety outside of the U.S. dollar also should include flight-to-safety into gold.  Despite continuing softness in oil prices, current levels (anything above $90 per barrel) remain highly inflationary. Over the longer term, U.S. equities, bonds and the greenback should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom.

 

Flash Update

Tuesday, September 16th, 2008
 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

September 16, 2008

__________

 

Annual August CPI-U at 5.4% (13.2% SGS)

Industrial Production Tumbles Like We’re in a Recession

CPI Locks in August and Annual Real Retail Sales Contractions

 

__________

 

Again, ongoing economic data show an intensifying inflationary recession. While the housing and systemic solvency crises are exacerbating the current economic downturn, it is important to remember that current recession was in play well before the headline crises hit. As to today’s FOMC meeting, anything is possible. The system and the markets continue to be unstable, and the Fed’s primary mission remains preventing a systemic collapse. All other factors, specifically inflation and economic activity, remain secondary considerations for the U.S. central bank, at the moment.

CPI Absorbs the Oil Selling Shock. Reported consumer inflation eased back on both a monthly and annual basis, as the CPI absorbed the impact of a sharp decline in oil prices. The 0.1% seasonally adjusted monthly decline in August CPI-U reflected a 7.4% unadjusted decline in gasoline prices. Such compared with a monthly 5.9% decline estimated from Department of Energy data. The difference would have resulted in an unchanged CPI.

Outside of the 5.6% annual CPI-U inflation reported for July, the 5.4% annual inflation for August still was at a 17-year high. Annual inflation for the narrower CPI-W — targeted at the wage-earners category where gasoline takes a bigger proportionate bite out of spending — eased to 5.9% in August, from 6.2% in July. The CPI-W is used for making the annual cost of living adjustments to Social Security payments. The 2009 adjustment — based on the July to September 2008 period — remains a good bet to top 5%, more than double last year’s 2.3% adjustment for 2008. Such is not good news for federal budget deficit projections.

CPI-U. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported that the seasonally-adjusted August CPI-U declined by 0.14% (0.40% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, versus a 0.82% (0.53% unadjusted) gain in July.  Year-to-year or annual inflation in August eased to 5.37%, from 5.60% in July.  Annual inflation would increase in September 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the 0.37% monthly increase seen in September 2007.  The difference in growth would directly add to or subtract from August’s annual inflation rate of 5.37%.

C-CPI-U. Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — eased to 4.70% in August from 4.76% in July.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth declined to roughly 8.7% in August from 8.9% in July, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, eased back to roughly 13.2% in August from 13.4% in July.  The alternate numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data. The SGS-alternate data tab will be updated later today a www.shadowstats.com.

Real Retail Sales. Deflated by the August CPI-U, seasonally-adjusted real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales contracted by 0.13% for the month of August (down 0.27% before inflation adjustment), following a 1.30% decline in the month of July (down 0.49% before inflation adjustment). On a year-to-year basis, August retail sales fell by 3.60% (up 1.56% before inflation adjustment), versus a 3.23% decline in July (up by 2.62% before inflation adjustment).

Industrial Production Showed Ongoing and Deepening Recession. The Federal Reserve reported a 1.1% (1.3% net of revisions) monthly contraction in August industrial production, following a revised 0.1% (previously 0.2%) gain in July. Weakness was attributed to the auto sector, with a 0.1 percentage point of decline estimated due to oil production shutdown due to Hurricane Gustav. August year-to-year change plunged by 1.5%, after a 0.4% annual contraction in July.

Following a 3.1% annualized quarter-to-quarter contraction in the second quarter, industrial production is set for a likely second consecutive quarterly downturn in the third quarter. In conjunction with likely contracting annual growth for the third quarter, the series is showing growth patterns not seen outside of recessions.

__________

 

The next full SGS Newsletter will follow in the next several days, likely over the coming weekend.

 

Alert

Monday, September 15th, 2008

ALERT - September 15, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

A L E R T

 

September 15, 2008

__________

 

Systemic Risk Appears Intensified by Abandonment of Lehman

Markets Face Extreme Volatility and Distortions, with Heavy Intervention

 

__________

 

The inflationary recession and systemic solvency crises continue to intensify, with the solvency crisis breaking over the seawall, once again, this past weekend.  Federal Reserve and U.S. Treasury management of developments in the last three days appears likely to have deepened the systemic liquidity crisis, rather than to have eased same. By allowing the loss of Lehman, the Fed and the Treasury either believed they could contain the resulting negative systemic impacts, and/or they were playing to presidential election year politics by trying to look tough on the "moral hazard" issue. Irrespective of moral hazard, the solvency crisis has evolved too far — under pre-existing lax oversight by the Fed and Treasury — for the overseers now to start denying help to entities that could threaten the system. Playing politics with systemic solvency significantly increases the risks of systemic collapse and/or the cost of preventing same.

With no help offered by the Fed and Treasury to Lehman, and the politically-correct implication that there are no financial institutions too big to fail, risk has increased for an intensified crisis of confidence in the U.S. banking system, with possible flight to safety out of (a run on) the U.S. banks. Such is despite the liberalized and expanded liquidity facilities just offered by the Fed, and increasing speculation of renewed Fed easing, and despite any $70 billion fund being created by private global banks. I still expect that the Fed and the Treasury will do whatever they have to do, will create whatever money they have to create, in order to prevent an unthinkable systemic collapse. The costs and difficulty of doing same have just been increased by this weekend’s activities.

Former Federal Reserve Chairman Alan Greenspan was widely quoted from a Sunday television appearance, where he described the current crisis as "a once in a half century, probably a once in a century event."  Slightly over a century ago, the 1907 banking/financial panic triggered a depression and resulted in the founding of the Federal Reserve, which was supposed to prevent banking crises such as seen later in the 1930s, 1980s and 1990s, and today. Where Fed actions in recent years encouraged and fostered some of the financial system abuses that have led to today’s circumstance, the Fed’s practical role now has evolved into one primarily of financial-crisis containment.

The President’s Working Group on Financial Markets (PWG), popularly called the Plunge Protection Team, was created following the 1987 stock market crash, with an eye towards the Treasury, the Fed and various market regulators preventing disorderly, and maintaining orderly, financial markets. Direct intervention/manipulation of the equity, credit, currency, oil and gold markets has been seen at different times since 1987. Most recently, intervention often has been coordinated with foreign central banks. Although PWG activity, by its nature, usually is not disclosed, in the current banking solvency crisis, interventions have been a virtual certainty, such as with the extraordinary market gyrations seen at the time of the Bear Stearns failure.

The PWG certainly will be at work in today’s market place, given the fundamental market displacements from the evolving banking solvency crisis, as well as pressures in different markets from the unwinding of various Lehman positions. Accordingly, the various markets remain subject to extreme volatility and distortions, where short-term market movements may appear to be irrational.

The options open to the Fed and the Treasury in keeping the system afloat all involve creating new money and liquidity, with implications for higher inflation, regardless of any near-term, violent and heavily suspect moves in oil pricing. My longer-term outlook remains the same, for a deepening bear market in equities, an eventual spike in long-term interest rates, heavy selling of the U.S. dollar and much higher prices for precious metals. 

__________

 

A Flash Update will follow tomorrow’s CPI release.

Flash Update

Friday, September 12th, 2008
 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

September 12, 2008
__________
 

"Core" Retail Sales Down 0.1% Month-to-Month, 1.7% Year-to-Year

PPI Absorbed Oil Selling with Minimal Annual-Inflation Impact

Trade Revisions Show Delayed Import Reporting, Suggest Downward GDP Revisions

 __________

Inflationary Recession Instensifies. Despite recent heavy oil selling, the monthly pattern of oil-price decline is not unlike the one seen last year, with the effect that year-to-year annual PPI inflation was little changed in August. Similarly, year-to-year CPI inflation, due for reporting next week (Tuesday, September 16), could hold at or even notch a little higher from July’s 17-year high.

On the economic front, real (inflation-adjusted) August retail sales appear, once again, to have contracted on both a monthly and annual basis, with real third-quarter 2008 growth almost assured of showing a quarterly contraction. Such would be the fifth consecutive quarter-to-quarter contraction and the third consecutive quarter of annual contraction. Such ongoing growth patterns never have been seen outside of formal recessions. 

Key to the recent, unbelievably positive growth reported for both first- and second-quarter GDP has been an equally incredulous improvement in the monthly trade data. The July trade deficit report, however, showed a deteriorating deficit, some catch-up in lagging oil import reporting and revisions to the services data for the last six months. A downward revision to first-quarter GDP should result from the new trade numbers, but not enough to turn the annualized 0.9% currently-reported growth negative, yet. The first-quarter GDP, however, will not be touched in revision until the next annual/benchmark revision, sometime in July 2009 or later. If the first-quarter turns negative, such would mean two consecutive quarterly contractions in real GDP, which remains the popular definition of a recession. The second-quarter GDP, however, has one revision to go, and the trade revisions could knock 0.3 percentage points off the 3.3% annualized growth currently reported. Despite any near-term deterioration reported in the trade picture, however, the third-quarter "advance" and "preliminary" estimates — the last estimates before the November election — are good bet to remain in heavily politicized positive territory.

Retail Sales Show Deepening Economic Downturn. The Census Bureau reported that seasonally-adjusted August retail sales fell by 0.27% (down by 0.90% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval) for the month, following a revised 0.49% (previously 0.12%) decline in July.  On a year-to-year basis, August retail sales growth softened to 1.56% from a revised July gain of 2.12% (previously 2.63%).  In terms of real growth, both the monthly and annual rates of change likely continued in contraction, dependent upon the upcoming CPI report (see below).

Core Retail Sales.  Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 0.06% (down 0.70% net of revisions) in August, versus a revised 0.73% (was 0.33%) decline in July. Those numbers contrasted with the official aggregate drop of 0.27% in August and the revised 0.49% decline in July. On an annual basis, August "core" retail sales fell by 1.73% versus a revised July decline of 1.06% (previously down by 0.53%).

Trade Deficit Shows Lagging Oil Reporting. The Bureau of Economic Analysis and Census Bureau reported yesterday that the seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for July widened to $62.2 billion from a revised $58.8 (previously $56.8 billion) in June. Other major revisions were published on the services sector, showing deeper than previously reported deficits going back to January. Potential impact of those revisions on GDP is discussed in the opening comments.

The current reporting also showed a rising level of import carryover (imports included in the current month that actually took place in earlier periods, when they should have been reported), with July carryover at $2.2 billion up from $0.2 (previously $1.4 billion) in June. Given also that physical oil import volume showed an unusually large and unseasonal surge in average barrels per day (bpd), the evidence for an understatement of oil imports in recent months continued to mount. July 2008 showed 11.033 million bpd of imports versus 9.918 million bpd in June; the same numbers in 2007 were 10.018 million bpd in July versus 10.735 million bpd in June. 

August PPI Annual Inflation Eased to 9.6% from 9.8%. The regularly volatile Producer Price Index (PPI) for finished goods contracted by a seasonally-adjusted 0.9% (1.6% unadjusted) in August, as reported today by the Bureau of Labor Statistics, thanks largely to the recent sharp decline in oil prices, against a reported July adjusted increase of 1.2% (1.4% unadjusted). Since the August monthly price swing pattern was about the same as last year, however, the annual rate of PPI inflation slowed only by 0.2 percentage points, to 9.6% from 9.8% in July.

CPI Outlook. Consensus estimates for Tuesday’s (September 16th) August CPI are for no change (briefing.com), reflecting recent declines in energy prices. Such is not unreasonable, although likely higher "core" inflation and strong seasonal-factor boosts to gasoline add some upside reporting risk to expectations.

It is important to note that even allowing for the effect of volatile gasoline prices on the physical volume of gasoline consumption, that the 2.5% decline in August gasoline station sales (retail sales) is less than my estimate (based on Department of Energy data) of a 5.9% decline in gasoline prices for August, reflecting the positive seasonal-factor effect that will help to mitigate the impact of lower energy costs on reported inflation. The question is as to the degree of that mitigation in the CPI.

Annual inflation would continue its upturn in August 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the negligible 0.02% monthly increase seen in August 2007. While any increase likely will be small, an increase remains a fair shot.  The actual monthly difference would directly add to or subtract from July’s annual inflation rate of 5.60%.

 

__________

Flash Update

Wednesday, September 10th, 2008
 
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
September 10, 2008
__________

 

August M3 Estimated up 14% Year-to-Year, 0.4% Month-to-Month

Bailouts Should Intensify Inflationary Pressures

Unusual Systemic Instabilities

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The monthly estimates of the money supply data have been updated on the Alternate Data page of ShadowStats.com. New to the money supply data, per subscriber request, are monthly levels in the downloadable data file, as well as graphs of the various monthly M levels, for the period since the Fed ceased publishing its M3 estimates. The monthly dollar and alternate-unemployment graphs and data also have been updated.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics published "Addressing misconceptions about the Consumer Price Index" in its August 2008 Monthly Labor Review, and we have posted a public Special Comment on same. This has pushed publication of the next newsletter to over the coming weekend.

– Best regards to all, John Williams

 

Treasury bailouts of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, Congress talking with U.S. automobile manufacturers about government loans, and wild markets that remain far from rational, highlight increasing systemic instability of a nature rarely seen. When I offer that my general outlook is unchanged, which it remains, I am not at all insensitive to the massive short-term hit taken by precious metals or the significant strength seen recently in the U.S. dollar. My outlook generally is for the long-term and is based on the underlying fundamentals of an intensifying inflationary recession, intensifying systemic solvency crisis and eventually a hyperinflationary great depression. The underlying fundamentals remain place and, if anything, are getting worse. The markets eventually will catch-up with the fundamentals

The Federal Reserve, in conjunction with the U.S. Treasury, is doing its best to prevent a systemic collapse. The efforts have been successful so far, and likely will continue to be for a while. The Fed and the Treasury will do whatever is necessary to save any entity that might otherwise implode the system. They will create and spend any money needed, they will arm-twist anyone they have to, they will manipulate any market, financial statistic or news medium that will help contain the still-intensifying crisis. Failure here is not an acceptable option.

Under such circumstances, activity in the financial markets can be extremely volatile and appear irrational to the investing public, while various forms of covert crisis management are going on behind the scenes. The cost of the system’s salvation eventually will be in higher money growth and debasement of the U.S. dollar: inflation. The current instabilities, including the rapidly deteriorating fiscal condition of the U.S. government, will be explored more deeply in the upcoming newsletter.  

August M3 Continued to Grow, Albeit at Slower Paces than in July.  Based on roughly 25 out of 31 days of data, the SGS estimate of ongoing M3 annual growth slowed to about 14.0% in August versus 15.4% in July. With monthly growth slower than it was a year ago, annual growth continued to soften for the fifth consecutive month, although it remained at an historically high and inflationary level. Seasonally-adjusted, month-to-month change slowed to roughly 0.4% in August, from 0.6% in July, although the monthly change numbers should not be relied upon too heavily, given incomplete data and the usual problems with the Fed’s seasonal adjustments.

As to M1 and M2, preliminary estimates are for August annual rates of change of roughly 1.6% and 5.5%, respectively, down from 2.4% and 6.3% in July. Estimated on a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted M1 change was a drop of 0.6%, versus a 1.1% gain in July. M2 was down a rounded 0.0% in August, versus a 0.5% gain in July.

To the extent that the U.S. Treasury directly lends cash to private entities, or purchases otherwise illiquid assets from troubled banks, such actions should spike money growth directly, eventually adding to upside inflationary pressures.

Week Ahead.  Trade Deficit. Due Thursday (September 11th), market expectations are for some deterioration in the July deficit. Such is not unreasonable, given what appears to have been the underreporting of the trade shortfall in recent months, and what still should be a further rise in reported oil prices. The "improving" trade numbers were key to generating the reported strong growth in second-quarter GDP. Since this report will be the first of two used in the "advance" estimate of third-quarter GDP — the last such GDP estimate before the election — do not be too surprised with any continuation of better-than-expected numbers.

Retail Sales. Expectations are for a small increase in August retail sales, due for release on Friday (September 12th). Reporting risk generally should be to the downside of expectations, but, more importantly, monthly and annual changes likely will continue to show contractions, after adjustment for inflation.

PPI. Consensus forecasts suggest a 0.5% monthly contraction the August PPI, per briefing.com, thanks to the sharp decline in oil prices. This series is randomly volatile, but shifting seasonal-adjustment factors could offer a little upside reporting risk to the consensus outlook.

 

__________

Flash Update

Friday, September 5th, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - September 5, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

September 5, 2008

__________

 

Employment/Unemployment Data Confirm Deepening Recession

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias Suggests 123,000 July Jobs Loss

M3 Growth Remains Positive but Slowing

 

__________

 

Pattern of Monthly, Quarterly and Annual Payroll Contractions Not Seen Outside of Recessions. Once again, the monthly employment report showed an intensifying recession, with increasing payroll losses and rising unemployment. Monthly, quarterly and annual payroll contractions continued, showing patterns never seen outside of recessions. Once again, however, the reported payroll and unemployment deteriorations appear to have been shy of reality, with payroll data revisions pushing greater weakness into prior history.

Payroll Survey.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 84,000 (down 142,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for August, following a revised 60,000 (previously 51,000) jobs loss in July.  Annual change (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls continued to be negative, down 0.29% in August versus a revised 0.15% (previously 0.13%) decline in July.  The seasonally-adjusted series also remained negative year-to-year, down 0.21% in August versus a revised 0.09% (previously) 0.05% drop in July.

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias.  The pattern of impossible biases (see the Reporting/Market Focus in the June 10, 2008 SGS Newsletter) being built into the headline payroll employment changes resurfaced with the August reporting.  Instead of the headline jobs loss of 84,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what we are calling the concurrent seasonal adjustment bias — would have shown a more-severe monthly jobs loss of about 123,000.  Including last month’s pattern reversal, the upside reporting bias has been seen in 10 of the last 12 months.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment.  Another element that added upside pressure to the monthly payroll numbers was the monthly bias factor (birth-death model). Never designed to handle the downside pressures from a recession, the model added a 125,000 upside jobs bias to August 2008 (versus last August’s 102,000 upside bias), following a net upside bias of 4,000 jobs in July 2008. 

Household Survey.  The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including multiple job holders), showed household employment fell by 342,000 in August, following a 72,000 decline in July.

The August 2008 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-significant increase to 6.05% +/- 0.23% from 5.68% in July.  Unadjusted, U.3 increased to 6.1% in August, versus 6.0% in July.  The broader U.6 unemployment rate jumped to an adjusted 10.7% (10.7% unadjusted) in August from 10.3% (10.8% unadjusted) in July.  Refigured for the bulk of the "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment, as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment measure, rose to about 14.7% in August, up from 14.3% in July.

Employment Environment. The deterioration in August’s employment reporting continued in line with, but still shy of reality, per trends indicated by the better-quality employment-environment indicators: July help-wanted advertising fell again, retesting its historic low; new claims for unemployment insurance continued to surge sharply in terms of annual growth; and recession-level employment readings were seen in both the August manufacturing and nonmanufacturing purchasing managers survey. In combination, these factors suggest that an ongoing jobs loss running in excess of 100,000 jobs per month would be closer to reality than the officially-reported changes.

Since the employment and unemployment indicators tend to be coincident markers of broad economic activity, weaknesses in these numbers are signaling an ongoing recession in place.

M3 Growth Continues to Soften. Based on incomplete numbers for August, the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate of annual growth in seasonally-adjusted M3 could slow to roughly 14% from 15.4% in July. Such reflects continued slowing monthly growth in the major M3 components, including what may be a flat M2 in August versus July. Nonetheless, monthly growth in total M3 should remain in positive territory for August, and annual growth remains at a highly inflationary level. Further detail will follow in the pending newsletter, with numbers based on more complete information.  

General Outlook Remains Unchanged. As will be discussed in the next newsletter, some of the recent wild price swings seen in the U.S. dollar, oil and gold likely have been encouraged by very some large players in the market, some with actions taken or interests in tandem with certain central banks. The high volatility in the various markets likely will continue, with the gold and currency markets remaining subject to jawboning and both covert and overt central bank intervention. It remains unlikely that we have seen the near-term high in oil prices, and neither has gold topped nor the dollar bottomed. 

All factors considered, the broad outlook remains the same: further intensification of the inflationary recession and a deepening systemic and banking solvency crisis.  Fluctuating, near-term market recognition of these issues and mounting global political tensions intensify the risks for unstable market conditions.

Over the near-term, negative major market displacements likely will follow or be accompanied by intense, broad selling of the U.S. dollar.  An eventual, increasing flight-to-safety outside of the U.S. dollar also should include flight-to-safety into gold.  Despite continuing softness in oil prices, current levels (anything above $90 per barrel) remain highly inflationary. Over the longer term, U.S. equities, bonds and the greenback should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom.

 

__________

 

The next SGS Newsletter is targeted for the coming week (week of September 8th).  The posting of the newsletter and all intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be advised by

Flash Update

Thursday, August 28th, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - August 28, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

August 28, 2008

__________

 

Gross Domestic Income (GDP Equivalent) Is in Formal Recession

New Orders for Durables Goods Sank Year-to-Year

 

__________

 

Best wishes to all for a most enjoyable Labor Day weekend. – John Williams

 

Real GDI Has Contracted for Two Consecutive Quarters. The nonsense continued with GDP reporting, today, with the "preliminary" estimate revision for the second quarter showing annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth of 3.28% +/- 3%, up from the "advance" estimate of 1.89% and up from the first quarter’s 0.87%. Year-to-year growth revised to 2.17% from 1.82%, which still was down from the first quarter’s 2.54%.   The numbers reflected an equally unbelievable low second-quarter inflation rate for the GDP deflator of 1.33% (revised from 1.11%), versus 2.56% in the first quarter.  The revisions were dominated by highly questionable trade data.

This heavily propagandized series now shows near-average economic growth, despite signals of recession in nearly every other economic series, as discussed in the most recent newsletter.  

All news on the GDP front, however, was not so happy. The Gross Domestic Income (GDI) measure, which is the income-side equivalent (in theory equal, but rarely so in practice) to the consumption-side GDP measure, now is in recession. Deflated by the GDP inflation rate, revised GDI contracted at an annualized real rate of 0.8% in fourth-quarter 2007, contracted at an annualized 0.1% in first-quarter 2008, and grew at an annualized 0.5% in the second quarter. Annual growth slipped from 0.8% in the fourth quarter, to 0.7% in the first quarter, and to 0.3% in the second quarter. Traditionally, two consecutive quarterly contractions in GDP (the same for GDI) have constituted a formal recession. The GDI contracted in the fourth and first quarters.

New Orders for Durable Goods Tumble 4.5% Year/Year. As suggested in the Monday’s (August 25th) Flash Update, the seasonally-adjusted durable goods report is volatile on a random basis, but that the year-to-year change (before inflation) likely would remain in contraction, continuing its deepening recession signal. Accordingly, the reported 1.3% (1.8% net of revisions) monthly gain for the series in July was nothing more than statistical noise, following a revised 1.3% (previously 0.8%) gain in June. In terms of annual change before any adjustment for inflation, however, the series contracted for the fifth straight month, down 4.5% from July 2007, after a 0.7% (previously 1.3%) decline in June. Such a pattern never is seen outside of a recession.

The closely followed nondefense capital goods orders rose by 6.3% for the month of July, following a 2.6% decline in June, but this series, too, was down 5.2% year-to-year in July, following a 6.8% decline in June. 

General Outlook Remains Unchanged.Large price swings and high volatility are likely to continue for gold, as well as for the U.S. dollar and domestic equities. It remains unlikely that we have seen the near-term high in oil prices (a major hit by Gustav in the Gulf area could double gasoline prices), and neither has gold topped nor the dollar bottomed. All factors considered, the broad outlook remains the same: further intensification of the inflationary recession and a deepening systemic and banking solvency crisis.  Near-term market recognition of these issues and growing global political tensions intensify the risks for unstable market conditions.

Over the near-term, negative major market displacements likely will follow or be accompanied by intense, broad selling of the U.S. dollar.  An eventual, increasing flight-to-safety outside of the U.S. dollar also should include flight-to-safety into gold.  Despite recent relative softness in oil prices, current levels (anything above $90 per barrel) remain highly inflationary. The gold and currency markets also remain subject to extreme near-term volatility, jawboning and both covert and overt central bank intervention.  Over the longer term, U.S. equities, bonds and the greenback should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom.

 

__________

 

The next SGS Newsletter is targeted for the week of September 8th, following the release of the August employment/unemployment report. The posting of the newsletter and all intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be advised by e-mail.

Flash Update

Monday, August 25th, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - August 25, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

August 25, 2008

__________

 

Financial Storm Continues, per Bernanke

Pending GDP Upward Revision Surge Still Nonsense

 

__________

 

A Bad Typo in "Inflation and Deflation Good for Gold."  In last Thursday’s (August 21st) Flash Update, there was a misstatement created by leaving out an important "not," as caught by at least one reader. I apologize for any resulting lack of clarity or confusion. The original text has been corrected; the two paragraphs under "Inflation and Deflation Good for Gold" should have read as follows:   

"The purported ‘collapsing M3,’ has triggered excitement in the deflationist camp, which is touting a deflation in financial assets and a credit-collapse-induced implosion of the money supply. It would be helpful if deflationist commentaries differentiated between deflation and inflation in terms of financial assets, versus in terms of prices paid by consumers for goods and services. Deflation in financial assets does NOT require collapsing money growth and has been underway for some time. Indeed, it likely will get much worse (particularly for equities). 

"Inflation in goods and services, however, has been picking up and accelerating for some time and also should get much worse. The two deflation/inflation concerns are not inconsistent, and investor nervousness about instabilities in the first case, and the need for protection from the second, feed into both the safe-haven and wealth-preservation demand for gold."

Expanding on that corrected thought, using the term "deflation" in terms of investment values is something of a misnomer, since declining asset values do not necessarily reflect a change in money supply. While money supply growth patterns can influence the factors key to asset valuations, such as economic activity, goods and services inflation, U.S. dollar value and interest rates, the impact usually is not direct.  

Neither the Financial Storm nor Money Expansion Have Run Their Courses. Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke noted in Friday’s address at Jackson Hole, Wyoming, that, "Although we have seen improved functioning in some markets, the financial storm that reached gale force some weeks before our last meeting here in Jackson Hole has not yet subsided, and its effects on the broader economy are becoming apparent in the form of softening economic activity and rising unemployment.  Add to this mix a jump in inflation, in part the product of a global commodity boom, and the result has been one of the most challenging economic and policy environments in memory."

Mr. Bernanke indicated that the banking solvency crisis that broke open last August "has not subsided." Indeed, patterns of money growth (as discussed in the last newsletter) and significant anecdotal evidence suggest that the crisis is deepening. Accordingly, over the next several months, I would expect to see new Fed activity aimed at flooding the system with fresh liquidity.

As discussed regularly in the newsletters of the last year, the Fed and the Administration will do whatever has to be done, create whatever money has to be created, in order to prevent a systemic collapse. Where the Fed has the will and the wherewithal to prevent such collapse, the cost for same is, and will be, in much higher money supply growth and in surging inflation.

While the key components of M3 have seen slower growth in recent months (M3 change has not been negative measured over any recent time span), the most-recent, seasonally-adjusted weekly reporting (Federal Reserve reports H.6, H.8) is showing some short-term pickup in growth. Where M3 growth began to surge with the breaking of the crisis last August, however, current money growth is slower than it was last year, and, barring a renewed growth surge in the next couple of week’s reporting, annual M3 growth for August will slow to below 15.0%, from 15.4% in July.

Week Ahead: GDP. Market expectations are for the "preliminary estimate" revision of second-quarter GDP to show 2.7% annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth (briefing.com), up from the "advance" estimate of 1.9%. The report is due in Thursday (August 28th). As discussed in the last newsletter, an upward revision will reflect the reporting of an improved trade deficit in March and April, numbers that were unbelievable in their own right. While no recession reporting is likely before the November election, the consensus guesstimates on the GDP revision seem a little high.

New Orders for Durable Goods.  Irrespective of any monthly change in July’s seasonally-adjusted durable goods report on Wednesday (August 27th), a series that is regularly volatile on a random basis, year-to-year change (before inflation) likely will remain in contraction, continuing its deepening recession signal.

Consumer Confidence. Expectations are for some monthly improvement in consumer confidence (Tuesday, August 26th) and consumer sentiment (Friday, August 29th). Those expectations likely are in the correct direction, given the influence of a more-positive tone in the popular media. Yet, year-to-year contractions in the series should remain near recent record levels, despite softening numbers a year ago, when the systemic solvency crisis began to unfold.

General Outlook Remains Unchanged.Large price swings and high volatility continued for gold, as well as for the U.S. dollar and domestic equities. It remains unlikely that we have seen the near-term high in oil prices, and neither has gold topped nor the dollar bottomed. All factors considered, the broad outlook remains the same: further intensification of the inflationary recession and a deepening systemic and banking solvency crisis.  Near-term market recognition of these issues and growing global political tensions intensify the risks for unstable market conditions.

Over the near-term, negative major market displacements likely will follow or be accompanied by intense, broad selling of the U.S. dollar.  An eventual, increasing flight-to-safety outside of the U.S. dollar also should include flight-to-safety into gold.  Despite recent relative softness in oil prices, current levels (anything above $90 per barrel) remain highly inflationary. The gold and currency markets also remain subject to extreme near-term volatility, jawboning and both covert and overt central bank intervention.  Over the longer term, U.S. equities, bonds and the greenback should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom.

 

__________

 

The next SGS Newsletter is targeted for the week of September 8th, following the release of the August employment/unemployment report. The posting of the newsletter and all intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be advised by e-mail.

Flash Update

Thursday, August 21st, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - August 21, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

August 21, 2008

__________

 

July M3 Expanded Month-to-Month, Year-to-Year

Inflationary Recession Continues to Intensify

Broad Outlook Unchanged

 

__________

 

Monthly July M3 Gained $81 billion. In the last several days, I have received a large number of subscriber requests for comment on monthly M3 growth, given a popular-media story of a private estimate out in the U.K. of a $50 billion monthly contraction in July U.S. M3 money supply. Based on my regular estimation of ongoing M3, no such contraction took place in the series as traditionally defined by the Federal Reserve (methodology discussed in the August 2006 SGS Newsletter); to the contrary, monthly M3 increased by roughly $81 billion.

As reported in last week’s newsletter (August 13th, page 31), the Shadow Government Statistics Ongoing M3 estimate for July 2008 increased by roughly $71 billion from June, a number that subsequently has revised to about $81 billion, based on the latest week’s Fed reporting. That estimate is for the month-to-month change in the seasonally-adjusted, monthly-average M3. For the month, the largest M3 component increase was in M2, reported up by $38.9 billion per the Fed. The other M3 component that still is published fully by the Fed — institutional money funds — was shy of flat, with an $800 million monthly contraction. Large time deposits, repos and Eurodollars — all modeled to a certain extent with a backing in other Fed reporting — increased for the month.

While interesting, month-to-month money supply changes can be misleading, given the vagaries of Fed reporting. Year-to-year change, as discussed in the August 3rd Money Supply Special Report, provides more-reliable, long-term indications of monetary trends.

On a year-to-year basis, annual M3 growth slowed to around 15.4% in July, from 15.8% in June and was down from the all-time high annual growth rate of 17.4% seen in April. Nonetheless, the current M3 annual growth remains highly inflationary, rivaled outside the current period only by the events preceding Richard Nixon’s closing the gold window and imposing wage and price controls in August 1971. The current pattern of slowing annual growth appears to be an artifact of the still-deepening banking solvency crisis, which likely will see still further Fed accommodation and liquidity expansion in the near future.

Inflation and Deflation Good for Gold. The purported "collapsing M3," has triggered excitement in the deflationist camp, which is touting a deflation in financial assets and a credit-collapse-induced implosion of the money supply. It would be helpful if deflationist commentaries differentiated between deflation and inflation in terms of financial assets, versus in terms of prices paid by consumers for goods and services. Deflation in financial assets does not require collapsing money growth and has been underway for some time. Indeed, it likely will get much worse (particularly for equities). 

Inflation in goods and services, however, has been picking up and accelerating for some time and also should get much worse. The two deflation/inflation concerns are not inconsistent, and investor nervousness about instabilities in the first case, and the need for protection from the second, feed into both the safe-haven and wealth-preservation demand for gold.

If You Offer Them Money, They Will Borrow. Bank loans are not part of the money supply, although the proceeds from same are in the money supply. Accordingly, loan losses, defaults and such do not contract the money supply, since the cash already has been disbursed and otherwise continues to exist within the system. Slowing loan growth, however, can impact new money supply growth to the extent that the creation of new loans is impaired. Yet, that is what the Fed is fighting in maintaining systemic solvency, and the Fed has no choice but to do everything it has to in order to prevent a systemic collapse, irrespective of the resulting cost in inflation. 

Mr. Bernanke has argued that he always can create money growth and inflation by running the currency printing presses or the electronic equivalent of same. Some argue, though, that loan demand will dry up and that the Fed will not be able to expand credit. Loan demand is as strong, if not greater in recessions than it is in booms; it is just not as healthy in recessions, when banks tend to cut back lending. If the Fed, however, makes available whatever cash is needed for lending, there always will be someone willing to borrow, with the proceeds helping to support money growth.

The inflation/deflation and money supply arguments have been ongoing in the markets for over a year, and I have published two reports intended to address the various issues and related background: Hyperinflation Special Report (April 8, 2008), Money Supply Special Report (August 13, 2008). Ongoing issues also have been addressed in the August 13, 2008 SGS Newsletter. For subscribers with questions in these areas or otherwise, please contact me at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or through the Contact Us tab on the home page www.shadowstats.com. The referenced Special Reports and newsletters are available on the Archives tab on the home page.

Data Keep Signaling Intensifying Inflationary Recession. I am on the road this week and will publish a further Flash Update over the coming weekend, with greater detail on recent economic reporting and the latest money supply data from the Federal Reserve.

Industrial Production. In terms of general economic activity, seasonally-adjusted July industrial production reportedly rose by 0.2% (0.1% net of revisions), versus a revised 0.4% (previously 0.5%) gain in June.  Symptomatic of a recession, however, year-to-year change turned negative in July, down by 0.1%, after a 0.2% gain in June.

Housing Starts.  The housing recession continues, but the housing starts data remained heavily distorted and misleading due to building code changes in New York a month or two back. The 11.0% seasonally-adjusted monthly July housing starts contraction was overstated, as was the revised June gain of 10.4%. Year-to-year declines of 29.6% and 25.7%, respectively for July and June were understated. An attempt at adjusting these numbers to correct for the distortions will be included in the next newsletter.

Producer Price Index. On the inflation front, continuing a string of upside surprises against consensus forecasts of the popularly followed inflation series, the seasonally-adjusted July PPI rose by 1.2% for the month, following a 1.8% increase in June. July year to-year inflation rose to a 27-year high of 9.8% from 9.2% the month before.

General Outlook Unchanged.Large price swings with high volatility have continued for gold, as well as for the U.S. dollar and domestic equities. It remains unlikely that we have seen the near-term high in oil prices, and neither has gold topped nor the dollar bottomed. All factors considered, the broad outlook remains the same: further intensification of the inflationary recession and a deepening systemic and banking solvency crisis.  Near-term market recognition of these issues and growing global political tensions intensify the risks for unstable market conditions, albeit erratically.

Over the short- to near-term, negative major market displacements likely will follow or be accompanied by intense, broad selling of the U.S. dollar.  An eventual, increasing flight-to-safety outside of the U.S. dollar also should include flight-to-safety into gold.  Despite recent relative softness in oil prices, current levels remain highly inflationary. The gold and currency markets also remain subject to extreme near-term volatility, jawboning and both covert and overt central bank intervention.  Over the longer term, U.S. equities, bonds and the greenback should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom.

Flash Update

Thursday, August 14th, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - August 14, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

August 14, 2008

__________

 

Annual CPI-U Inflation Rose to 5.6% (13.4% SGS)

Annual CPI-W Rose to 6.2%

Real July Retail Sales Fell 0.9% Month/Month, Down 2.7% Year/Year

 

__________

 

Reported consumer inflation continued to surge on both a monthly and annual basis, once again topping consensus expectations. The July CPI-U jumped to a 17-year high of 5.6% in July, while annual inflation for the narrower CPI-W — targeted at the wage-earners category where gasoline takes a bigger proportionate bite out of spending — annual inflation jumped to 6.2%. The CPI-W is used for making the annual cost of living adjustments to Social Security payments. The 2009 adjustment — based on the July to September 2008 period — remains a good bet to top 5%, more than double last year’s 2.3% adjustment for 2008.  Such is not good news for federal budget deficit projections.

CPI-U.  The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported that the seasonally-adjusted July CPI-U gained 0.82% (0.53% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, versus the 1.06% (1.01% unadjusted) gain in June.  Year-to-year or annual inflation in July jumped to 5.60% from 5.02% in June.  Annual inflation will continue its upturn in August 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the negligible 0.02% monthly increase seen in August 2007, which appears highly likely.  The difference would directly add to or subtract from July’s annual inflation rate of 5.60%.

The adjusted monthly inflation continued to reflect some catch-up from the underreporting of energy-related inflation in recent months. The continued lack of significant pick-up in the gimmicked concept of "core" inflation remains beyond belief.

C-CPI-U. Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U — the fully substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — rose to 4.76% in July from 4.24% in June.

Alternate Consumer Inflation Measures. Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth rose to roughly 8.9% in July from 8.3% in June, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to a 28-year high of roughly 13.4% in July, up from 12.6% in June.  The alternate numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data. The SGS-alternate data tab will be updated later today a www.shadowstats.com.

Real Retail Sales. Deflated by the July CPI-U, seasonally-adjusted real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales contracted by 0.93% for the month of July (down 0.12% before inflation adjustment), following a 0.70% contraction in June (up by 0.35% before inflation adjustment).  On a year-to-year basis, July retail sales fell by 2.47% (up 2.63% before inflation adjustment), versus a 1.46% decline in June (up by 3.35% before inflation adjustment).

Newsletter (Issue No. 45)

Wednesday, August 13th, 2008

Issue Number 45

August 13, 2008

The usual four sections of the Newsletter are now available as separate web-pages as well as individual PDF documents.  The Newsletter also remains  available in its entirety as a single, large PDF document.

We strongly recommend that when making a printed copy of the newsletter (in part or whole) you use the PDF version.  If your computer does not yet handle PDFs, we urge you to download the free, Adobe Acrobat reader.

We would be grateful for any comments and suggestions about your prefered format for the Newsletter.

Newsletter as a Single PDF

Newsletter by Section:

Section 1. Overview   (PDF)

Section 2. Markets Perspective  (PDF)

Section 3. Reporting Perspective    (PDF)

Section 4. Reporting/Market Focus   (PDF)

___________________________________________

PLEASE NOTE: The next SGS Newsletter currently is targeted for the week of September 8th, following the release of the August employment report on September 5th.  Intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted in response to key economic or financial-market developments.
Earlier editions of the SGS writings referenced in the text can be found on the Archives tab at www.shadowstats.com.
Occasionally, important, brief updates are communicated directly by e-mail.  If you are not receiving e-mail communications from us, please let us know at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or by using the "Contact Us" option on www.shadowstats.com.

Flash Update

Wednesday, August 13th, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - August 13, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

August 13, 2008

__________

 

Real July Retail Sales Continue Monthly and Annual Contractions

Monthly "Core" Retail Sales Down 0.33% versus 0.12% Aggregate Contraction

 

__________

 

Giving every indication of an ongoing and deepening recession, the Census Bureau reported this morning that seasonally-adjusted July retail sales fell by 0.12% (up 0.11% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), following a revised 0.35% (previously 0.07%) increase in June.  On a year-to-year basis, July retail sales rose by 2.63%, following a revised June gain of 3.35% (previously 3.04%).  In terms of real growth, however, both the monthly and annual rates of change continued in contraction, given the likely reporting of tomorrow’s July 2008 CPI-U estimate.

Core Retail Sales.  Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 0.33% (up 0.03% net of revisions) in July versus a revised 0.27% (was 0.68%) decline in June, against the official aggregate drop of 0.12% in July and the revised 0.35% gain in June.  It is important to note that the physical volume of gasoline consumption has started to decline in response to high gasoline prices, so the inflation-adjusted retail sales number should take a bigger hit than seen in the "core" rate. On an annual basis, July "core" retail sales fell by 0.53% versus a revised June increase of 0.44%, previously a 0.09% contraction.

Tomorrow’s CPI Report. Consensus estimates for tomorrow’s (August 14th) release of the seasonally-adjusted monthly inflation rate in the July CPI-U are running near 0.4%, per briefing.com. Any seasonally-adjusted monthly increase exceeding the 0.22% monthly gain seen in July 2007 would directly add to June 2008’s annual inflation rate of 5.02% in setting the July 2008 annual inflation rate. Where underlying fundamentals favor an upside surprise to market expectations, targeted manipulation remains of very high risk. A Flash Update will follow the release.

ALERT

Tuesday, August 12th, 2008

ALERT - August 12, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

A L E R T

 

August 12, 2008

__________

 

U.S. Dollar Strength Has No Fundamental Basis Other Than Temporary War Effects

U.S. Dollar Has Not Bottomed

Gold and Oil Prices Have Not Topped

 

__________

 

The ongoing powerful rally in the U.S. Dollar and related heavy sell-offs in the oil and precious metals markets have no basis in the underlying fundamentals that usually drive activity in those arenas.  Accordingly, irrespective of extreme near-term volatility in the various markets, the broad long-term outlook remains unchanged: along with further intensification of the inflationary recession and a deepening systemic and banking solvency crisis, the U.S. dollar, equities and bonds should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom. As with the longer range outlook for the markets, however, key to the current circumstance is the performance of the U.S. dollar.

Despite orchestrated media and market hype to the contrary, there has been absolutely no positive shift in underlying fundamentals driving the still-unfolding economic, financial-market and systemic-stability crises. The U.S. dollar’s sharp gains reflect instead uncertainties tied to the outbreak of and rapid intensification in war in the Caucasus, with the greenback taking on its traditional flight-to-safety role. Those effects should be relatively short-lived, shy of the circumstance evolving into World War III. If anything, the slightly longer-term impact of that conflict should be bullish for both oil and gold.

Per the financial media, though, the dollar’s strength reflects improving economic conditions in the United States versus the rest of the world.  That is nonsense. Shy of gimmicked GDP reporting that few believe, the U.S. continues to see a deepening recession as evidenced in most other economic reporting. Usually, when the U.S. economy contracts the rest of the world follows. There is little news there.

The other factor at play is related, seen in the nature of finance ministers and central bankers to lie. There has been some heavy, but effective, spinmeistering and jawboning and possibly supportive covert intervention in support of the dollar. Central banks often do their best to trigger or enhance a desired move in currencies. Such factors exaggerate near-term volatility but do not have lasting impact.

Not reflecting any lasting change in real-world conditions, the dollar’s happy gains should prove to be fleeting. Related to dollar buying has been the heavy selling of oil and gold, which also has not been driven by fundamental changes. Oil markets are volatile by nature, and, despite recent sharp swings, prices remain highly inflationary at current levels. The markets and financial system remain vulnerable to the least surprise and are highly unstable, at present. The inflationary recession continues to intensify, and gold remains the best long-term hedge against all the real risks facing investors and the system.

These matters are discussed more completely in the full newsletter, which is near going to press. The markets are moving faster than my writing, which is being finished here at the Outer Banks of North Carolina, hence this quick update in an Alert.   Posting of the newsletter will be within the next day or so and will be advised by e-mail.

Best wishes to all,

John Williams  

Flash Update

Friday, August 1st, 2008
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
August 1, 2008
__________
 
July Payrolls Sink Year-to-Year
Broad Unemployment Rate Surges to 10.3% from 9.9% (SGS 14.3%)
Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias Flips
 
__________
 

No Signs of a Booming Economy Here

Despite happy propaganda out of the Bureau of Economic Analysis yesterday on the GDP, there remained little good news for the economy in the latest employment report. Year-to-year change in the July 2008 payrolls showed a second month of a deepening contraction in the unadjusted numbers, any event never seen outside of a recession. The reported seventh consecutive decline in monthly payrolls, as of July, also continued to indicate a recession in place, as likely will be recognized eventually (post-election) by the National Bureau of Economic Research (official arbiter of recessions). The continued deterioration in the unemployment rate — particularly the surge in the broadest official unemployment measure (U.6) — also signaled intensifying business difficulties.

Of particularly note for SGS readers, the concurrent seasonal factor bias I have been writing about in recent months reversed in the July reporting, suggesting a less-negative headline payroll jobs change number than officially was reported. The reversal of the pattern seen previously in 11 out of 12 months of reporting was subsequent to a request from within the BLS for my calculations (the worksheet is available to anyone upon request).

Nonetheless, unusual revision patterns still were seen in the July report, where the unadjusted June payrolls was revised upward by 70,000, but that only translated into a 26,000 upward revision to the adjusted numbers. While such raised the level of the previously reported payroll employment, it resulted in a relatively weaker base against which the June to July adjusted change was calculated.

The deterioration in July’s employment environment continued running in the right direction, but still was shy of reality per trends indicated by some of the better-quality employment-environment indicators: June help-wanted advertising bottom-bounced near the prior month’s historic low; new claims for unemployment insurance have continued to surge sharply in terms of annual growth; and a recession-level employment reading was seen in both the June manufacturing and nonmanufacturing purchasing managers survey (leading indicators of July employment). The just-released July manufacturing survey showed the employment component moving into positive territory. Those numbers would suggest an ongoing jobs loss running in excess of 100,000 jobs per month.

The employment and unemployment indicators tend to be coincident markers of broad economic activity and thus are signaling an ongoing recession in place.

Payroll Survey. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 51,000 (down 25,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for July, following a revised 51,000 (previously 62,000) jobs loss in June. Annual change (unadjusted) in total nonfarm payrolls was negative, down 0.13% in July versus a revised 0.07% (was 0.12%) decline in June. The seasonally-adjusted series also turned negative year-to-year, down 0.05% in July, versus a 0.14% gain in June.

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias. The pattern of impossible biases (see the Reporting/Market Focus in the latest SGS Newsletter) being built into the headline payroll employment changes reversed with the July reporting. Instead of the headline jobs loss of 51,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what we are calling the concurrent seasonal adjustment bias — would have shown a less-severe monthly jobs loss of about 17,000.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. Another element that usually adds upside pressure to the numbers, but was muted in July, as it has been in recent years, was the monthly bias factor (birth-death model). Such never was designed to handle the downside pressures from a recession. The July 2008 bias was a net addition of 4,000 jobs (versus the prior July’s 3,000 upside bias), following a net addition of 177,000 jobs in June 2008. 

Household Survey. The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including those of multiple job holders), showed household employment fell by 72,000 in July following a 155,000 decline in June.

The July 2008 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-insignificant increase to 5.68% +/- 0.23% from 5.50% in June. Unadjusted, U.3 increased to 6.0% in July versus 5.7% in June. The broader U.6 unemployment rate jumped to an adjusted 10.3% (10.8% unadjusted) in July versus 9.9% (10.3% unadjusted) in June. Refigured for the bulk of the "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment, as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment measure, rose to 14.3% in July from 13.9% in June (the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com will be updated over the weekend).

Further detail will follow in the upcoming newsletter.

 

__________

Flash Update

Thursday, July 31st, 2008

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 FLASH UPDATE

July 31, 2008

__________

GDP Report is Political Garbage

Lowest GDP Inflation in 10 Years Generates Strong Growth Report

Downward Revisions Put 4th-Quarter in Contraction

__________

Official Line: Never Was a Recession, At Least Not Before the Election

Despite sharp quarterly contractions in employment, industrial production, new orders, real retail sales and residential construction, among other series, the second-quarter 2008 GDP was reported as booming (net of inventory reductions, the inflation-adjusted economy expanded at an above-average annualized 3.9% rate). With fourth-quarter 2007 revised into a 0.17% contraction (was a gain of 0.58%), the story now will go along the lines that the economy dipped a little in the fourth quarter — not enough to be called a recession — and has been in recovery ever since. Such is an absurdity, given the reporting of better quality surveys (see yesterday’s, July 30th, Flash Update) and extremely strong anecdotal evidence to the contrary, but the reporting will enable the pushing off of any recession recognition until after the election.

Key to the unbelievable report was the use of artificially low inflation in deflating the GDP. In theory, the GDP is first estimated in nominal, or not-inflation-adjusted, terms, and then deflated using the GDP’s implicit price deflator (IPD). The IPD was at an incredible annualized 1.1% for the quarter, down from 2.56% in the first quarter, and at the lowest level seen since second-quarter 1998. The lower the IPD inflation, the stronger will be the inflation-adjusted growth. With annualized CPI inflation up by 5.04% in the same quarter, there is enough room in the price adjustments for the second-quarter GDP to be in contraction.

In the context of a mildly weaker historical GDP — overall downward revision of 0.5% spread over three years — the Bureau of Economic Analysis reported that the "advance" estimate of annualized, seasonally-adjusted real (inflation-adjusted) growth rate for the second-quarter GDP was 1.89% (-0.02% net of revisions) +/- 3%, up from a revised 0.87% (previously 0.96%) in the first quarter. Year-to-year annual change in second-quarter GDP fell to 1.82% from a revised 2.54% (previously 2.55%) in the first quarter.

Further detail will follow in next week’s newsletter.

 __________

Flash Update

Wednesday, July 30th, 2008

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

July 30, 2008

  __________
  

Systemic Instability Continues

Durable Goods and Consumer Confidence Show No Turnaround

Pending Nonsensical GDP Growth Surge?

 __________

  
NOTE TO SUBSCRIBERS: The week ahead will see a fair number of postings to www.shadowstats.com, all of which will be advised to you by e-mail, upon posting, unless otherwise noted:

- The transcript of my prepared testimony before the House Committee on Financial Services on "Implications of a Weaker Dollar for Oil Prices and the U.S. Economy" has been posted to the web-site.
- Money Supply Special Report will be posted this week.
- Flash Update
July 31, 2008 (tomorrow, Thursday) on the "advance" estimate of second-quarter GDP and the annual revisions to the series.
-
Flash Update
August 1, 2008 (Friday) on the July employment/unemployment report.
- Updated Alternate-Data series on GDP, Unemployment and the U.S. Dollar will be updated over the weekend (not separately advised).
- The regular, full
SGS Newsletter will be posted next week.
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

__________

Wall Street continues spinning that the economy is on the upswing, that a recession was dodged. The financial and economic propagandists have been grasping at straws and using "better-than-expected results" strategies in mitigating not only impaired corporate profit reports, but also ongoing, negative economic data. The game is to hype expectations to the downside and then to turn euphoric when terrible results beat expectations. On the economic data front, new orders for durables and consumer confidence are the latest series to be so used from an economic standpoint (see below). Nonetheless, a very clear inflationary recession is in place, despite any incredible — as in unbelievable — GDP reporting tomorrow.

The U.S. financial system remains at risk, and the Federal Reserve — with support from the Administration and Congress — will continue to do whatever is necessary, to spend whatever cash needs to be created, in order to keep the system from crashing. The Fed, the Administration and Congress have no choice. The bailouts of Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac were the biggest actions, so far. Bailouts will follow of the FDIC (and or/increasing insured account sizes) or any major banks or other financial services entities, as needed, where a failure would threaten a run on the system or a systemic collapse. This morning’s enhancement by the Federal Reserve of its emergency liquidity facilities emphasises the continuing nature of the still-intensifying banking solvency crisis. The monetary cost of ongoing, short-term systemic stability remains higher long-term inflation. Further detail follows in the upcoming newsletter.

Durable Goods Orders Sink Year-to-Year. The regularly volatile new orders for durable goods series was reported by the Census Bureau as up by 0.8% (0.8% net of revisions) for the month of June on a seasonally-adjusted basis. Such followed an upwardly revised 0.1% (previously unchanged) monthly gain in May. Minor fluctuations in monthly growth for this high volatile series are meaningless, especially against consensus estimates. What is of significance, however — and what follows is before any adjustment for inflation — is that series contracted on a year-to-year basis for the fourth straight month (down 0.8% March, down 3.8% April, down 1.4% May, down 1.1% June), and contracted year-to-year for the second quarter. The second quarter also was the third consecutive quarter-to-quarter contraction for the series, an event not seen historically outside of recessions.    

Annual Change in Consumer Confidence Sets Historic Record Low. Also volatile are the consumer confidence measures, where the Conference Board’s Consumer Confidence measure gained 1.8% in July (versus down 12.2% in June) and the Reuters/University of Michigan’s Consumer Sentiment measure rose by 8.5% in July (versus down 5.7% in June). Similar monthly patterns were seen last year, however, and of greater significance was the pattern of annual change.

Consumer Confidence in July fell by the largest annual amount in the history of the series, down by 53.6% year-to-year, breaking the prior month’s record annual contraction of 51.7%. July Consumer Sentiment fell by 32.3% year-to-year, the steepest annual contraction shy of June’s record 33.9% drop. These lagging, not leading indicators confirm that the economy has been in a deepening recession.  

Expectations Rise to 2.3% Second-Quarter GDP Growth. Consensus forecasts for the "advance" estimate of second-quarter 2008 annualized real growth (due July 31st, tomorrow) has risen from 1.8% a week ago, to 2.3%, per briefing.com. Any such growth likely would be seen in guesstimated components such as personal consumption services or business inventories, and/or in government spending and in an "improved" trade deficit, the likely largest single plus-factor.

The trade estimate will be based on two of three months of reporting of highly questionable trade deficit data. The last two months have shown a sudden surge in auto exports and collapsing oil imports, areas that do not tie into underlying anecdotal evidence, and where other series such as production and new orders do not support same on the export side. For example, while the purchasing managers manufacturing survey has shown increasing new export orders, for some time, the overall new orders measure is in contraction, suggesting that export gains are not more than offsetting lost domestic business activity.

Key series that show or suggest an ongoing and deepening recession, with data through the second quarter, include:

(1) Nonfarm Payrolls - two consecutive quarterly contractions with year-to-year change in contraction as of June.
(2) Industrial Production - current quarterly contraction and near-zero year-to-year growth.
(3) New Orders for Durable Goods - three consecutive quarterly contractions and current-quarter year-to-year contraction in nominal terms (not adjusted for inflation), with worse results net of inflation.
(4) Purchasing Mangers Manufacturing New Orders - two consecutive quarterly contractions.
(5) Retail Sales - four consecutive quarterly contractions and two consecutive quarters of year-to-year contraction.

Such activity in any of those areas is not seen outside of formal recessions.

Benchmark Revision Cautions. Keep in mind that tomorrow’s GDP release will include annual revisions back to first-quarter 2005. While historical GDP likely will be weaker in revision, the "advance" estimate usually is targeted against consensus forecasts, which, again, are running near 2.3%.

July Employment Report. Consensus expectations continue at roughly a 70,000 monthly decline for July payrolls and a small increase in the unemployment rate. The report is due for release on August 1st (Friday). While jobless claims, help-wanted advertising and the purchasing managers surveys all suggest a monthly employment contraction in excess of 100,000, something close to or slightly better than consensus estimates likely would be preferred by the Fed. Shy of unexpected surging jobs growth, a deepening year-to-year decline in payrolls could be a headline grabber.  

General Outlook Unchanged. Large price swings with high volatility have been seen in recent weeks for oil and gold prices, as well as for the U.S. dollar and domestic equities. It is not likely that we have seen the near-term high in oil prices, and neither has gold topped nor the dollar bottomed. All factors considered, the broad outlook remains the same: further intensification of the inflationary recession and a deepening systemic and banking solvency crisis. Near-term market recognition of the issues and risks for unstable market conditions are intensifying, albeit erratically.

Over the shorter term, negative major market displacements likely will follow or be accompanied by intense, broad selling of the U.S. dollar. An increasing flight-to-safety outside of the U.S. dollar also should include flight-to-safety into gold. Despite the ongoing volatility in oil prices, current levels remain highly inflationary. The gold and currency markets also remain subject to extreme near-term volatility, jawboning and both covert and overt central bank intervention. Over the longer term, U.S. equities, bonds and the greenback should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom.

 

 

House Financial Services Hearing

Monday, July 28th, 2008

The following link is to the July 24, 2008 prepared testimony given before the House Financial Services Committee by Walter J. (John) Williams of ShadowStats.com.  The testimony addressed specific issues outlined by Committee Chairman Barney Frank and was structured so that the oral presentation would run no more than the allotted five minutes.

http://www.house.gov/financialservices/hearing110/walter_j_williams_testimony072408.pdf

We have been advised that a podcast of the full hearing will become available, and such will be linked here at such time as it is available.

 

Flash Update

Tuesday, July 22nd, 2008
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
July 22, 2008
__________
 
Broad Money Growth Remains Inflationary
Deepening Recession Should Be Evident in Pending Payrolls, New Orders
No Recession per GDP Expectations, But …
 
__________
 

Special Note to Subscribers: Congressional Testimony

I have been invited to testify before the United States House of Representatives Committee on Financial Services on "Implications of a Weaker Dollar for Oil Prices and the U.S. Economy." The hearing is scheduled for 2:00 p.m. on July 24th (Thursday). Anyone who is a regular reader of the newsletter and Flash Updates (see the June 30th update in particular) will have a fair sense of what I shall be discussing. For anyone interested, a live webcast of the event should be available at: http://financialservices.house.gov/schedule.html

Let me update you as to what is happening with the newsletter in terms of the pending regular full missive, as well as some product development. First, I apologize for the delay in publishing the pending newsletter. I research and write the various missives by myself and unexpected developments, such as one the above, can throw off my writing schedule. A variety of nonrecurring events in the last couple of months have contributed to pushing the current writing back to the point where I am close to overlapping the next newsletter’s timing. 

Here is what will happen in the next several weeks. What had been planned in the pending newsletter as a Reporting/Market Focus on monetary theory and its practical measurement and analytical uses in today’s environment, has been expanded and will be published as a Special Report in the week of July 28th. Special reports on a variety of topics will be published with increasing frequency in the year ahead, but not with regular timing.

The next full newsletter will be something of a double-issue, planned for the week of August 4th. The included Reporting/Market Focus will review the GDP benchmark revisions (due for release on July 31st), as well as the July employment report on the 1st of August (see separate discussions below).

Flash Updates and Alerts are used to keep key economic and market developments up to date, in between newsletters. Irrespective of where we were in the publication cycle, if there were a meaningful change in outlook, such would be advised immediately using an Alert. Separately, subscribers who have questions on particular issues, or who just would like to communicate in general, are invited to contact me directly either by e-mail at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com, or by phone at (510) 836-0272. I do my best to get questions answered.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

__________

 

June Broad Money Growth at 15.8%

Money seems to be moving from some of the broader money supply accounts to cash or checking accounts. For June 2008, annual change for monthly M1 was reported at an annual growth rate of 1.5%, a significant positive swing versus a 0.6% contraction in May. June M2 annual growth slowed to 6.1% from 6.4% in May.

Annual growth in seasonally-adjusted SGS-Ongoing M3 is estimated at 15.8% in June, also slower, down from 15.9% in May, 16.4% in April and a record-high 17.4% in March. Despite positive month-to-month change (unlike M2), the continued slowing in annual M3 growth during June likely was tied to intensifying problems in the banking system, and well may foreshadow needed further liquidity expansion by the Fed in the near future.  

Outside of the last several months, the prior historic high of 16.4% was seen in June of 1971, two months before President Nixon closed the gold window and imposed wage and price controls. While June growth remains shy of the 1971 high, it still promises significant upside inflation pressure in the next several months and into first-half 2009.

 

               Shadow Government Statistics Ongoing M3 (r)
    (Estimated seasonally-adjusted monthly average, $ Trillions)
 
Feb 06
10.311
 
Oct
10.979
 
Jun
11.950
 
Feb
13.390
 
Mar
10.364
 
Nov
11.094
 
Jul
12.055
 
Mar
13.575
 
Apr
10.425
 
Dec
11.226
 
Aug
12.261
 
Apr
13.646
 
May
10.504
 
Jan 07
11.314
 
Sep
12.443
 
May
13.764
 
Jun
10.575
 
Feb
11.436
 
Oct
12.651
 
Jun (p)
13.835
 
Jul
10.672
 
Mar
11.563
 
Nov
12.823
 
 
 
 
Aug
10.755
 
Apr
11.720
 
Dec
12.931
 
 
 
 
Sep
10.852
 
May
11.872
 
Jan 08
13.088
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(r) Revised, based on extensive FRB historical revisions. (p) Preliminary.     
NOTE OF CAUTION: The estimates of monthly levels best are used for comparisons with other dollar amounts, such as nominal GDP. While the estimates are based on seasonally-adjusted Federal Reserve data, great significance cannot be read into the month-to-month changes, as was the case even when the Fed published the series. The most meaningful way to view the data is in terms of year-to-year change.



Housing Starts Data Compromised. The Census Bureau’s measures of building permits and housing starts have been seriously distorted by changes in New York City construction codes that led to a surge in reported activity that was little more than renewed paperwork. Where seasonally-adjusted June housing starts was reported up by 9.1% for the month, such would appear to have been a contraction net of the New York City activity. May’s monthly change revised to a 0.4% decline from an initial report of a 1.8% drop. Annual change likewise was distorted, down 26.9% versus May’s revised 35.7% decline. I am working on a temporary adjustment to the series so to as allow for more-meaningful, period-to-period comparisons. 

Upcoming Reports. With consensus forecasters tending to overestimate current economic activity, reporting in most upcoming economic series should offer some downside surprises.

Durable Goods Orders Should Show Continued Annual Contraction.Expectations are for a small monthly contraction in the regularly volatile new orders for durable goods series, due July 25th (Friday). The best bet is for continued annual contraction, a feature common to recessions.

GDP Benchmark Revisions Should Show Weaker Historical Economy.With consensus expectations running around 1.8% (briefing.com) for the "advance" estimate of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) second-quarter GDP growth — up from 1.0% in the first quarter — such likely will be targeted by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA). The report, due on July 31st (next Thursday), however, will include annual revisions back through the first quarter of 2005. The revisions should show historically weaker growth in the GDP than previously reported by the BEA. The current recession even could show up in the detail.

Nonetheless, despite nearly every economic series — except the GDP — showing quarterly contractions, the politicized nonsense being generated for this series likely will continue through initial third-quarter reporting and the November election.

July’s Annual Payroll Contraction Should Deepen.Consensus expectations for roughly a 70,000 monthly decline in July payrolls and a small increase in the unemployment rate are in the right direction. The report is due for release on August 1st (next Friday). While jobless claims, help-wanted advertising and the purchasing managers surveys all suggest a monthly employment contraction in excess of 100,000, something close to or slightly better than consensus estimates likely would be preferred by the Fed.

Without significant revisions, a consensus payroll contraction would take annual growth clearly negative for both seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series (the unadjusted series went negative last month). Payrolls never have contracted year-to-year without a recession being in place.  

General Outlook Unchanged: All factors considered, the broad outlook remains the same: further intensification of the inflationary recession and a deepening systemic and banking solvency crisis. Near-term market recognition of same and risks for unstable market conditions are intensifying, albeit erratically.

Over the shorter term, major market displacements likely will follow or be accompanied by intense, broad selling of the U.S. dollar. An increasing flight-to-safety outside of the U.S. dollar also should include flight-to-safety into gold. Despite volatility ongoing in oil prices, current levels remain highly inflationary. The gold and currency markets also remain subject to extreme near-term volatility, jawboning and both covert and overt central bank intervention. Over the longer term, U.S. equities, bonds and the greenback should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom.

 

__________

Flash Update

Wednesday, July 16th, 2008
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
July 16, 2008
__________

 

 Dire Implications for U.S. Markets, U.S. Budget Deficit

Annual CPI-U Surges to 5.0% (SGS 12.6%)

"Core" Inflation Numbers Not Believable

Retail Sales and Industrial Production in Sharp Quarterly Contractions

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Alternate CPI for June will be posted today on the Alternate Data tab of www.shadowstats.com. The pending full newsletter will follow in due course updated with all the latest data releases. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

__________

 

Inflationary Recession Implications Should Start to Roil Markets. Reporting of the last couple of days should result in mounting market recognition of an intensifying inflationary recession and of the resulting unhappy implications for the broad financial markets. One area in particular that is likely to receive more intense analysis is the federal government’s fiscal condition. 

The federal budget deficit should increase well beyond expectations in the current and next fiscal years, thanks to the deepening recession and rapidly increasing inflation, factors that are not reflected in the government’s underlying assumptions for its budget estimates. Such will mean increases in Treasury borrowings well beyond what already is expected, with likely negative pressures on the credit markets and the U.S. dollar. This is separate of any consideration of mounting financial system bailout efforts or talk of further tax rebates. 

Consumer inflation surged to 17-year high annual rate of 5.0% in June, as measured by the CPI-U all-urban-consumers measure. Even worse, for the narrower CPI-W — targeted at the narrower wage-earners category where gasoline takes a bigger proportional bite out of spending — annual inflation jumped to 5.6%. The measure used for making the annual cost of living adjustments to Social Security payments is the CPI-W, and the 2009 adjustment that will be based on the July to September 2008 period now is a good bet to top 5%, more than double last year’s 2.3% adjustment for 2008.

Although annual SGS-Alternate M3 growth has stalled just shy of 16%, such still is highly inflationary, and likely new liquidity moves by the Fed/Treasury should spike annual growth further in the months ahead. In conjunction with high oil prices and renewed weakening in the dollar, the rapid money expansion suggests double-digit inflation — as officially reported in the CPI — by early 2009.

On the recession front, real (inflation-adjusted) second-quarter retail sales contracted for the fourth consecutive quarter, while second-quarter industrial production showed a sharp quarterly contraction. In conjunction with consecutive quarterly contractions in payroll employments, these numbers should remove any doubt of the economy being in recession. Whether or not such is reflected in upcoming GDP revisions and reports, tax revenues will fall off sharply, again intensifying the government’s fiscal problems.

Inflation Explosion Likely to Continue. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported that the seasonally-adjusted June CPI-U gained 1.06% (1.01% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, versus the 0.65% (0.84% unadjusted) gain in May. Year-to-year or annual inflation in June jumped to 5.02% from 4.18% in May. Annual inflation will continue its upturn in July 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the 0.22% monthly increase seen in July 2007, which appears highly likely. The difference would directly add to or subtract from June’s annual inflation rate of 5.02%.

The adjusted monthly inflation gain reflected negligible catch-up from the underreporting of energy-related inflation in recent months; such should intensify some in the next report. The lack of significant pick-up in the gimmicked concept of "core" inflation is beyond belief and is addressed in the pending newsletter.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) — the fully substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — jumped to 4.24% in June, up from 3.62% in May.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth rose to roughly 8.3% from 7.5% in May, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, rose to a 27-year high of roughly 12.6% in June, up from 11.8% in May. The alternate numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data.

Real (Inflation-Adjusted) Retail Sales Fell Monthly, Quarterly and Annually. Based on June CPI-U inflation, the 0.1% monthly gain reported for June retail sales was a 1.0% contraction after inflation adjustment. Despite the positive impact of tax-rebate checks, real second-quarter retail sales contracted for the fourth consecutive quarter, at an annualized 1.1% pace, following a 3.4% drop in the first quarter. Real June retail sales were down year-to-year by 1.8%, versus a 1.9% decline in May).  

Industrial Production Down Sharply for Quarter. As reported by the Federal Reserve, monthly seasonally-adjusted June industrial production rose by 0.5% (0.7% net of revisions that stretched back over six months). Such followed an unrevised 0.2% decline in May. The monthly gain was attributed to surging auto production following the end of a strike.

Despite the revisions erasing the annualized 0.1% quarterly contraction previously reported for the fourth quarter (now up by 0.5%), the second quarter was reported with an annualized 3.1% contraction. Year-to-year growth was 0.3% in June, up from a revised 0.2% gain (was a 0.1% contraction) in May. Year-to-year change in the second quarter dropped sharply to 0.3% from 1.8% in the first quarter.

These reports will be discussed in greater detail in the pending newsletter.

__________

 

Flash Update

Tuesday, July 15th, 2008

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

July 15, 2008

__________

 

"Core" June Retail Sales Fell 0.7% versus 0.1% Reported Total Gain

Tax Rebate Benefit Evaporates

June PPI Gain of 1.8% Remained Well Shy of Reality

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The pending full newsletter will follow in due course after tomorrow’s Flash Update on the June CPI. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

__________

 

Market Tranquility Abates A Bit. The banking solvency crisis has been ongoing, but the markets are seeing it resurface in the midst of data releases that are reconfirming a rapidly intensifying inflationary recession. This is not happy circumstance for the U.S. equity, credit or dollar markets. As discussed in previous writings, the Fed and the Administration will do whatever is necessary to prevent a systemic collapse. The Fed has the will, the perceived mandate and the ability to create whatever money is needed to keep the system afloat. The cost to the system of this salvation remains much higher inflation  

All factors considered, the broad outlook remains the same: further intensification of the inflationary recession and a deepening systemic and banking solvency crisis. Near-term market recognition of same and risks for unstable market conditions are intensifying.

Over the shorter term, major market displacements likely will follow or be accompanied by intense, broad selling of the U.S. dollar. An increasing flight-to-safety outside of the U.S. dollar also should include flight-to-safety into gold. The gold and currency markets remain subject to extreme near-term volatility and both covert and overt central bank intervention. Over the longer term, U.S. equities, bonds and the greenback should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom. Full details will be covered in the pending newsletter.

Annual 9.2% PPI Still Understated. The seasonally-adjusted June producer price index (PPI) increased by 1.8% (1.6% unadjusted) for the month, up minimally from May’s 1.4% (1.6% unadjusted), and above consensus forecasts. Annual inflation for June jumped to 9.2% from May’s 7.2% rate, per the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS).

Unfortunately, both food and energy inflation continued to appear to be understated, meaningfully, while the monthly "core" inflation rate continued at the unbelievable monthly rate of 0.2%.

On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted June intermediate goods rose by 2.1% (2.9% May), crude goods gained 3.7% (6.7% May). Year-to-year inflation, remained hairy, but still shy of a real world that has seen a doubling in oil prices year-to-year, with June intermediate goods up by 14.5% (12.6% May) and with crude goods up by 45.5% (41.5% May). Crude energy materials rose by a modest 72.1%.

Retail Sales Tumble Net of Inflation. The Census Bureau reported seasonally-adjusted June retail sales rose by 0.07% (down 0.32% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), following a revised 0.83% (previously 1.02%) gain in May. On a year-to-year basis, June retail sales rose by 3.04%, following a revised May gain of 2.06% (previously) 2.45%. The real (inflation-adjusted) annual and monthly changes should be significantly in the negative column, after tomorrow’s CPI report. With the revisions and June’s reporting, much of the short-lived gain in activity generated by the tax rebates has disappeared.

Core Retail Sales. Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 0.68% (down 1.23% net of revisions) in June versus a revised 0.78% (was 0.86%) gain in May, against the official aggregate gain of 0.07% in June and the revised 0.83% in May. On an annual basis, June "core" retail sales fell by 0.05% versus a revised May contraction of 0.09% (previously a 0.39% gain).

Given anecdotal evidence of automobile driving patterns changing in the wake of soaring gasoline prices, the drop in real retail sales should exceed that of the core number, suggesting the possibility of a higher-than-consensus gain in the upcoming June CPI report.

Tomorrow’s CPI. Elements in both the PPI and retail sales reports would tend to favor something above consensus forecasts of about a 0.7% gain for tomorrow’s (July 16th) CPI report. As previously discussed, annual CPI inflation is due for a surge.

These reports will be discussed in greater detail in the pending newsletter.

Flash Update

Thursday, July 10th, 2008

 

FLASH UPDATE - July 10, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

July 10, 2008

__________

 

Spike in Annual Inflation Due Next Week

The Problem Remains Inflation, Not Deflation

Monetary Theory and Limits of Hard Data

 

__________

 

PLEASE NOTE: The regular monthly lull in economic reporting provides an opportunity to address, at subscriber request, issues tied to inflation during a recession as well as issues tied to measuring the key components of monetary theory in terms of money supply, velocity, inflation and the physical volume of economic output. Some of what follows also is a preview of material that will be expanded upon in the upcoming newsletter’s Reporting/Market Focus.

Due to some family matters and travel, the pending full newsletter has been pushed back to around Tuesday or Wednesday of next week (July 15th/16th). Any intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted as needed. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

__________

 

  

Recognition Grows of Severe Economic Downturn

Market wisdom suggests that recessions mean low inflation, but as seen with the current circumstance and in at least two historical recessions in the last several decades (specifically the 1973/1975 and 1980 recessions), recessions with significant inflation are a great deal more common than is spun by Wall Street.

As the severity of the current downturn has gained broader recognition, some in the deflationist camp are starting to argue that the underlying fundamentals driving the economy into the ground also will lead to lower prices, actually triggering a deflation. Quite to the contrary, despite deteriorating economic and financial conditions, my outlook remains for rising inflation into 2009 and for a situation that eventually will evolve into a hyperinflationary great depression, as outlined in the April 8th Hyperinflation Special Report.

Slowing economic activity, by its nature, tends to reduce inflation pressures generated by strong economic demand. The current circumstance, however, is one where inflation pressures have been dominated by commodity price distortions (primarily oil) and increasingly a weakening U.S. dollar and surging money supply growth, not from strong economic demand. The current circumstance is somewhat similar to the recession officially clocked from November 1973 to March 1975, which has been the deepest standalone economic contraction, so far, of the post-World War II era. The period was one of soaring oil prices in the wake of the Arab oil embargo, a generally weak dollar and double-digit annual growth in money supply M3.

The severe downturn of 1973/1975 was accompanied by high inflation, per official CPI reporting, with annual inflation averaging 5.2% for the year leading up to the recession, 10.7% during the 16 months of the downturn, and 7.9% in the year following.

The next recession, from January through July 1980, saw even higher inflation, with annual CPI averaging 11.6% in the year leading up to the downturn, 14.3% during the six months of economic contraction, and 11.4% in the 12 months that followed, through to the onset of the next recession.  This was a period that again saw significant oil price increases, near-double-digit annual growth in M3 and mixed dollar pressures.

The 1981/1982 recession saw inflation drop sharply (7.5% average annual inflation, down from 11.4% in the 12 months leading up to the recession, and against 3.2% in the year following the recession), along with declining oil prices and some dollar recovery. The 1990/1991 recession (5.8% average annual inflation) and 2001 recession (2.8% average annual inflation) took place in somewhat milder inflationary environments, or at least under circumstances where reported CPI inflation increasingly was being suppressed by methodological changes (see the SGS Alternate-CPI measure on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com).

No Deflation. The U.S. has not seen annual CPI deflation since several periods of minimally lower prices in the late-1940s through the mid-1950s (the latter being outside of a recession). Of the nine official recessions since 1950, none of them were deflationary. The last significant deflation seen in the U.S. was during the Great Depression, thanks to a sharp contraction in the money supply, which, in turn, was due to a large number of bank failures and lost deposits.

As discussed in the February 11th newsletter, and partially repeated here, Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke addressed deflation risk in a November 21, 2002 speech he gave as a Fed Governor to the National Economists Club entitled "Deflation: Making Sure ‘It’ Doesn’t Happen Here."

Attempting to counter concerns of another Great Depression-style deflation, Bernanke explained in his remarks: "I am confident that the Fed would take whatever means necessary to prevent significant deflation in the United States …"

"Indeed, under a fiat (that is, paper) money system, a government (in practice, the central bank in cooperation with other agencies) should always be able to generate increased nominal spending and inflation, even when the short-term nominal interest rate is at zero."

"Like gold, U.S. dollars have value only to the extent that they are strictly limited in supply. But the U.S. government has a technology, called a printing press (or, today, its electronic equivalent), that allows it to produce as many U.S. dollars as it wishes at essentially no cost. By increasing the number of U.S. dollars in circulation, or even by credibly threatening to do so, the U.S. government can also reduce the value of a dollar in terms of goods and services, which is equivalent to raising the prices in dollars of those goods and services. We conclude that, under a paper-money system, a determined government can always generate higher spending and hence positive inflation."

The Fed has the will, the perceived mandate and the ability to create as much new money as is needed to prevent a deflation in the prices of goods and services, as measured by the CPI.

Low Treasury Yields Reflect Demand Distortions, Not Inflationary Expectations. Some will argue that Treasury yields are good indicators of what the markets are expecting in terms of inflation, and that the current negative real (inflation-adjusted) yields are suggesting deflation ahead. That generally would be true, if there were not major distortions in the Treasury market.

The primary distortion in the Treasury market of recent years has been the incredible influx of forced investment from abroad by U.S. trading partners stuck with holding excess dollars from the monstrous U.S. trade deficit. With the bulk of net Treasury issuance absorbed by this foreign investment, yields have been severely depressed by factors other than the market’s inflationary expectations. The Treasury market also recently has been picking up some flight-to-safety from disturbances in the financial system, which has placed further downside pressure on yields. 

Heavy dollar dumping, which will be seen eventually, will tend to eliminate the current market distortions, spiking yields sharply.

Money Supply. The above discussion on inflation and deflation has centered on price changes in goods and services as traditionally measured by the CPI survey. Such, however, is not the same measure of price changes as encompassed in general monetary theory, where the relationship between money supply and inflation commonly is expressed as:

M x V = P x Q

In the above equation, M is the money supply. V is the velocity of money, as measured by the number of times the money supply turns over in a year, relative to the economy as reflected in nominal (not-adjusted for inflation) gross national product (GNP), where V = GNP/M.  GNP is the broadest measure of U.S. economic activity and encompasses the more popularly reported gross domestic product (GDP).

In turn, nominal GNP = P x Q, where P is some measure of GNP deflator (prices/inflation) and Q represents some measure of physical quantity/volume, or a real (inflation-adjusted) GNP, as a measure of economic output.

So, the P or inflation measure here, effectively is the GNP deflator, the change in which is a broader inflation measure than the CPI, since it covers costs of consumption for businesses, government and net exports, in addition to the costs of consumer spending on goods and services. In terms of the other variables,

P = (M x V) / Q

price level equals money supply times velocity, divided by real GNP. Typically, increases in the combination of money supply and velocity, relative to Q (real GNP) result in higher prices. A drop in Q (real GNP), as seen in recessions, also would be inflationary, in theory, if money supply times velocity increased or otherwise did not drop as quickly as real GNP.

There’s More to Money Inflation than Money Supply (i.e. Velocity). The crude equations shown above are meant to provide a sense of some the basics of general monetary theory. Unfortunately putting meaningful hard numbers into the equations is impossible, since none of the variables are measured adequately by extant money supply, inflation or other national income (GNP) data, but the theory can help explain what likely will be happening.

While there is ongoing argument as to what should be included or not included in money supply (M), no measure constructed so far, be it the monetary base or M3, is adequate. For reasons discussed shortly, I prefer to use the broadest measure when assessing the inflation outlook.

Velocity (V) is just the ratio of nominal GNP to the money supply, no better or worse in quality than the numbers used in the numerator and denominator of the calculation. Velocity is important, though. For those looking at the small annual growth in the monetary base — claiming that there is no inflation there — they can be befuddled by a sharp increase in velocity, which tends to happen when interest rates are low, and particularly when inflation -adjusted interest rates are negative, as they are now.  In like manner, declining velocity could provide an offset to the inflation suggested by surging annual growth apparent in M3, but, again, circumstances suggest that increasing, not declining, velocity is more likely at present, which tends to exacerbate the inflation issues suggested by M3 growth.

Current measurements of GNP, both real (Q) and nominal and the related implicit price deflator (P) are virtually worthless, as discussed in various newsletters and the Primer Articles available at www.shadowstats.com. In general, real GNP is meaningfully overstated, the GNP implicit price deflator is meaningfully understated, and the nominal GNP measure does not come close to measuring actual economic activity (i.e. the underground economy).

Accordingly, anyone hoping to calculate actual monetary inflation, derived from the equations used above, faces a very difficult, if not impossible, task, given the current state of the data.

Practical Inflation Forecasting. I have spent the last 25-plus years attempting to generate meaningful and useable forecasts of future economic and inflation activity. Those that have followed my newsletter for some time know that my indicators had been signaling well in advance an inflationary recession, which increasingly appears to be in place in a broad spectrum of economic data (GDP/GNP excepted). One of the top indicators of CPI inflation is money growth. Over time, the broadest measure (M3) has worked as the best inflation predictor.

Although M3 growth has stalled in recent week-to-week and month-to-month reporting, a similar pattern was seen last year, and year-to-year change appears to be holding at about 15.9% as of the June 2008 average. That signals a highly inflationary environment moving into early 2009. These issues will be explored further in the upcoming newsletter.

Week Ahead: The week ahead will see a number of key economic releases for the month of June, with surprises more likely to be on the upside for inflation and on the downside for business activity, than the other way around. On the inflation front, PPI (due Tuesday, July 15th) and the CPI (due Wednesday, July 16th) are expected to show monthly gains of 1.3% and 0.7%, respectively (briefing.com). Shifting seasonal factors and underlying fundamentals would favor upside surprises, the Fed’s systemic-stability needs would favor consensus or something weaker.

From the standpoint of the CPI, year-to-year annual inflation will continue its upturn in June 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the 0.26% monthly increase seen in June 2007, which appears quite likely. The difference would directly add to or subtract from May’s annual inflation rate of 4.18%, with a consensus gain of 0.7% for June pushing the annual inflation rate to about 4.6%, and the real 30-year Treasury-bond yield negative. Such an annual inflation result would be just shy of the last near-term peak in official inflation reporting of 4.7%, seen in September 2005, and within a hair’s breadth of hitting a 17-year high.

On the economic side, retail sales (due Tuesday, July 15th), industrial production (due Wednesday, July 16th) and housing starts (due Thursday, July 17th), all are expected to show small monthly gains. Any gain in retail sales will reflect tax-rebate impact and higher inflation, with monthly and annual gains net of inflation likely to be in contraction. Based on continuing weakness in the components of the June purchasing managers survey and in new orders for durable goods, industrial production should contract month-to-month, quarter-to-quarter and year-to-year. The housing numbers remain volatile, but year-to-year change should remain deep in recession territory.  

Broad Outlook Remains Unchanged. All factors considered, the broad outlook remains for an intensifying inflationary recession and deepening systemic and banking solvency crisis. Near-term market recognition of same and risks for unstable market conditions, however, appear to be intensifying, erratically.

Over the shorter term, any major market displacements likely will follow or be accompanied by intense, broad selling of the U.S. dollar. An increasing flight-to-safety outside of the U.S. dollar also should include flight-to-safety into gold. The gold and currency markets remain subject to extreme near-term volatility and both covert and overt central bank intervention. Over the longer term, U.S. equities, bonds and the greenback should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom. Full details will be covered in the pending newsletter.

 

Flash Update

Thursday, July 3rd, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - July 3, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

July 3, 2008

__________

 

June Payrolls Turned Negative Year-to-Year

Monthly Payrolls Dropped by 147,000 Net of Concurrent Seasonal Adjustment Bias

Broadest Unemployment Rate Jumps by 0.2%

Purchasing Managers Manufacturing Index "Gain" Due to Reweightings

 

__________

 

Employment Circumstance Shows Deepening Downturn. There was little good news for the economy in this morning’s June 2008 employment report. Year-to-year change in payrolls turns negative only during recessions, and the June numbers showed the first such decline of the current recession, in unadjusted payroll levels. The reported sixth consecutive decline in monthly payrolls, as of June, continued to indicate a recession in place, as likely will be recognized by the National Bureau of Economic Research (official arbiter of recessions), while May’s sharp unemployment rate deterioration remained in place, with June’s level holding at May’s reading. Even so, the weaknesses in the June employment report appear to be understated, as discussed in the various sections below.

Payroll Survey. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 62,000 (114,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for June 2008, following a revised 62,000 (previously 49,000) jobs loss in May. Annual change in total nonfarm payrolls turned negative, down 0.12% in June, versus a revised gain of 0.06% (was 0.08%) in May.

Concurrent Seasonal Factor Bias. The pattern of impossible biases (see the Reporting/Market Focus in the latest SGS Newsletter) being built into the headline payroll employment changes was seen once again with the June report. Instead of the near-consensus headline June jobs loss of 62,000, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors — net of what we are calling the concurrent seasonal adjustment bias — would have shown a monthly jobs loss of about 147,000. The implication here is of some ongoing political manipulation of the data, where the cumulative 12-month-rolling upside headline bias increased from 595,000 in May to 659,000 in June and has been seen in 11 of the past 12 months. A worksheet on this is available upon request.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. Another element continuing to add upside pressure to the numbers was the monthly bias factor (birth-death model), which never was designed to handle the downside pressures from a recession. The June 2008 bias was a net addition of 177,000 jobs (up from the prior June’s 155,000 upside bias), following a net addition of 217,000 jobs in May 2008. The June add-factor mindlessly continued to spike construction jobs (up by 29,000) and financial activities jobs (up by 8,000), irrespective of ongoing anecdotal evidence of trouble in those areas.  

Household Survey. The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including those of multiple job holders), showed household employment fell by 155,000 in June, after falling by 285,000 in May.

The June 2008 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-insignificant firming to 5.50% +/- 0.23% from 5.49% in May. Unadjusted, U.3 increased to 5.7% in June versus 5.2% in May. The broader U.6 unemployment rate rose to an adjusted 9.9% (10.3% unadjusted) in June versus 9.7% (9.4% unadjusted) in May. Refigured for the bulk of the "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment, as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment measure, rose to 13.9% in June from 13.7% in May.

Employment Environment. The employment deterioration in June ran in the right direction but again still was shy of reality, per trends indicated by some of the better-quality employment-environment indicators: May help-wanted advertising declined anew, setting a new historic low for the series that dates back to Harry Truman’s era; new claims for unemployment insurance have continued to surge sharply in terms of annual growth; and a deepening recession-level employment reading was seen for the June manufacturing purchasing managers survey.

Purchasing Managers Manufacturing Index Shows Recession and Explosive Inflation. The June purchasing managers manufacturing index continued showing recession and galloping inflation, despite a quirk in the numbers. As discussed in the Reporting/Market Focus of the February 11, 2008 SGS Newsletter, the ISM re-weighted its composite indices back in January, so that they would reflect better the government’s GDP reporting. Unfortunately, the GDP is a particularly poor-quality series, and the ISM reweightings effectively debased the quality of an otherwise very fine survey.

As reported, the composite purchasing managers survey index for manufacturing rose to 50.2 in June, from 49.6 in May. A reading above 50.0 signals an expanding manufacturing sector. Based on the pre-January 2008 weightings, however, the composite index for June would have been 49.8, still in contraction territory. 

Nonetheless, the key components of the index, shy of questionable seasonal adjustments, were not directly affected by the January reweightings. The new orders component eased to 49.6 in June, from 49.7 in May, while the employment component sank to 43.7, down from 45.5. Again readings below 50.0 indicate contraction.

On the inflation front, the prices paid component jumped to its highest level since May 2004, at 91.5 in June 2008, up from 87.0 the month before.

__________

 

As discussed in Monday’s (June 30th) Flash Update, the broad outlook is unchanged. Further detail will follow in the pending newsletter.

__________

 

The SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure will be updated this weekend on the Alternate Data tab of www.shadowstats.com

Publication of the next regular newsletter should follow this Fourth of July weekend. Intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted as needed. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

–Best wishes to all for a great Fourth of July!  John Williams

Flash Update

Monday, June 30th, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - June 30, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

June 30, 2008

__________

 

Abysmal Business Data Continue

Unprecedented Plunges in Consumer Confidence Measures

Good Time for the Rest of the World to Dump the Dollar

 

__________

 

Beyond gimmicked GDP reporting, most economic data have been consistent with severe economic contraction. The continued spike in oil prices has reached a level that could threaten systemic stability, and the financial markets have started to reflect same. The broad, general outlook is unchanged.

Oil, Inflation and the Dollar. Overhanging the markets for a number of years has been the question as to when the major holders of excess U.S. dollars in the global financial system might look to dump those holdings. An opportunity for that dumping is at hand. Most central banks know that their unwanted dollar hoards are going to generate long-term losses, but the oil markets have opened up an opportunity to mitigate some of those losses. For the rest of the world, dollar dumping now would reduce inflation risks outside the United States.

With oil trading above $140 per barrel, serious inflation consequences are in store for those economies that have been propping the greenback against their own domestic currencies, either by not selling unwanted dollar holdings or by intervening in the markets to maintain the dollar’s market value. From a perspective outside the United States, an offset to oil-price-based inflation risk is available in dollar depreciation, which reduces the cost of oil in the currency of the purchasing country. The effects of a declining dollar, however, do tend to spike dollar-based oil prices further, but not fully, in something of a self-feeding cycle.

The system, though, tends to be self-correcting. The current oil price problem in many ways is a dollar problem — tied to the weakness of the U.S. currency. At some point, oil producers likely will be forced to abandon oil pricing based in U.S. dollars. The broad effect of that would be an intensified inflation spike in the United States, with the energy-inflation impact much mitigated in the non-U.S. dollar world,

The current circumstance results from years of deliberate debasement and neglect of the U.S. currency by the political miscreants in that former malarial swamp on the Potomac. Contrary to the popular policies of political gratification of the moment — seen for a number of administrations and various Fed chairmen — the dollar does matter, and so does the budget deficit. The dollar issues are coming to a head. The deficit issues are related but still are smoldering in the background.       

FOMC: No Inflationary Recession Here. Rehashing the basics, the primary driver of current Federal Reserve activity and policy is preventing the collapse of the U.S. financial system. All other concerns — specifically inflation and recession — are secondary or tertiary (see dollar comments below). Discussion of prospects for stable economic growth and contained inflation in the June 25th FOMC statement was nothing but window dressing for use by Wall Street shills in selling the Fed’s near-term cessation of cutting interest rates.

As to the economy, the FOMC declared, "Recent information indicates that overall economic activity continues to expand, partly reflecting some firming in household spending." The references there were to the gimmicked positive growth in first-quarter GDP and to the recent gain reported in monthly retail sales, which largely could be attributed to the impact of the one-time tax rebate checks working their way through the system (see Disposable Income comments below). The annual contraction in inflation-adjusted retail sales nonetheless is deepening, and the effects of the tax rebates will prove to be extremely short-lived.

The FOMC continued, "The Committee expects inflation to moderate later this year and next year." Few competent and honest economists would back either the summary economic or inflation outlooks proffered by the Fed.

Of significant (secondary with the potential of moving into a co-primary category) concern to the Fed is the value of the U.S. Dollar. If selling of the greenback intensifies sharply, the effects on the domestic financial system and markets could be severely negative. The influx of foreign capital enjoyed by the U.S. markets in recent years has kept the domestic system flush with liquidity, funding Treasury debt issuance as well as a significant portion of new corporate capital needs.

A reversal of those flows would drain liquidity from the system. Such would have the potential of crashing the various U.S. markets, if the Fed did not move otherwise to re-liquefy the system. Messrs Bernanke and Paulson continue to have a serious interest in major holders of the U.S. dollar not dumping same. Recent criticism of Fed policy by certain major dollar holders are rumored to have forced the recent shift in Fed policy, but the continued spike in oil prices may be close to pushing the system out of control, as discussed earlier.

First-Quarter GNP Growth revised to 0.2% from 1.1%. In line with market expectations, the "final" estimate revision to annualized real (inflation-adjusted) first-quarter 2008 growth in gross domestic product (GDP) came in at 0.96% +/- 3%, versus the preliminary estimate of 0.90% and "final" fourth-quarter growth of 0.58%. Year-to-year change for the first quarter was 2.55%, versus 2.53% in the prior estimate and against 2.46% in the fourth quarter. The revisions were little more than statistical noise.

Suggesting sharp deterioration in data related to the net-debtor status of the United States, however, the estimated annualized first-quarter growth in gross national product (GNP) revised to 0.18% from the initial estimate of 1.08%, and versus reported fourth-quarter growth of 1.87%. GNP is the broadest measure of the economy, that is GDP plus the trade balance in factor income (interest and dividend payments).

Annualized growth in gross domestic income (GDI), the income-side theoretical equivalent to the consumption-side GDP, revised to 0.48% from the first estimate of 0.33%, versus a 0.19% contraction in the fourth quarter. The statistical discrepancy between the nominal GDP and GDP narrowed to $130 billion from $133 billion in the first estimate.

All the             national income data are subject to annual revisions from first-quarter 2005 to date. The revision is scheduled for release by the Bureau of Economic Analysis on July 31st. Such will be discussed in the upcoming newsletter.

May Disposable Income Jumped by $577 Billion! That was thanks to $48 billion in tax rebate checks. The program to rebate a total of $107 billion to taxpayers is scheduled to run though mid-July. If any of the monthly numbers seem off in the reported income data, such is due to the annualization of monthly numbers, which include some features — such as one-time tax rebates — that really should not be annualized.

Durable Goods Orders Continued to Sink Year-to-Year. The usually volatile news orders for durable goods series was on the plus-side of unchanged in May, per the Census Bureau. The seasonally adjusted numbers showed an official 0.0% (down 0.4% net of revisions) change, following a revised 1.0% (was 0.5%) monthly decline in April. Year-to-year, May orders fell by 2.8%, following a 1.8% annual decline in April activity. These declining annual growth patterns generally are not seen outside of recessions.

Consumer Confidence Contractions at Historic Nadirs. Despite tax rebates, the June consumer confidence measures continued to tank, with both the Conference Board and Michigan numbers showing the sharpest annual plunges in the 40- to 50-year histories of the respective series. The Conference Board’s June Confidence measure fell by 13.3% for the month and by a record 52.1% year-to-year, versus respective monthly and annual contractions in May of 7.5% and 46.5%. The Reuters/University of Michigan’s June Sentiment measure fell by 5.7% for the month and by a record 33.9% year-to-year, versus respective monthly and annual contractions in May of 4.5% and 32.3%.

Although these tend to be lagging, not leading indicators, they do not bode well for near-term retail sales activity or for conditions in the housing market.

Home Sales Remain Troubled. On the heels of last week’s negative housing starts report, seasonally-adjusted May home sales fell by 2.5% (2.7% net of revisions) for the month and by 40.3% year-to-year. Such compared with a 4.8% (previously 3.3%) monthly increase and a 42.1% (previously 42.0%) annual decline in April, per the Census Bureau.

The National Association of Realtors reported that seasonally-adjusted existing home sales for May rose by 2.0% for the month but fell 15.9% year-to-year. In April, sales reportedly eased by 1.0% for the month and by 17.5% year-to-year. This series includes reporting of a rising but undetermined number of home foreclosures.

Week Ahead. The big release in this holiday-shortened week is Thursday’s (July 3rd) June employment/unemployment report. Consensus forecasts appear to be holding around a 50,000 payroll loss (49,000 monthly loss reported for May), with some reduction in the unemployment rate. Pressures from a harried Fed would tend to favor reporting of consensus-or-better results, while underlying reality and better-quality indicators suggest general ongoing deterioration, with a greater than 100,000-plus jobs loss likely. The unemployment rate surge last month (adjusted U-3 jumped from 5.0% to 5.5%) may have reflected regular problems with seasonally adjusting the school year. If such were the case, the unemployment rate could ease back some, otherwise, unemployment should deteriorate as well.

Barring large revisions and assuming some consistency in the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted annual change in payrolls — both very big "ifs" — year-to-year change in payrolls has a shot of turning negative in June, with any statistically-significant jobs decline of 130,000 or more. While the first such annual decline of this recession may still be off another month or two in reporting (currently-reported, seasonally-adjusted May 2008 payrolls of 137,754,000 are less than August 2007’s 137,756,000 and September’s 137,837,000), it is near. Annual payroll levels do not contract outside of recessions.

In other reporting, the ISM’s purchasing managers survey (manufacturing), due tomorrow (Tuesday, July 1st), should continuing showing a contracting manufacturing sector in conjunction with surging inflationary pressures. The ISM services measure (due Thursday, July 3rd) has significance primarily in its inflation and employment indicators, which should be relatively strong and weak.

Broad Outlook Remains Unchanged as Near-Term Market Stability Waivers. All factors considered, the broad outlook remains for an intensifying inflationary recession and deepening systemic and banking solvency crisis. Near-term market recognition of same and risks for unstable market conditions, however, appear to be intensifying.

Over the shorter term, any major market displacements likely will follow or be accompanied by intense, broad selling of the U.S. dollar. An increasing flight to safety outside of the U.S. dollar also should include flight to safety in gold. The gold and currency markets remain subject to extreme near-term volatility and both covert and overt central bank intervention. Over the longer term, U.S. equities, bonds and the greenback should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom. Full details will be covered in the next newsletter.

 

__________

 

Publication of the next regular newsletter should follow the upcoming Fourth of July weekend, with final market data for second-quarter 2008 as well as results of the June employment report. A Flash Update will follow the employment release, and other intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted as needed. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

–Best wishes to all, John Williams

Flash Update

Sunday, June 22nd, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - June 22, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

June 22, 2008

__________

Industrial Production Contracts Year-to-Year

Housing Starts in Steepest Annual Decline since Depths of 1990/1991 Recession

No Signs of Abatement in Inflationary Recession

 

__________

 

Key Data Show Behavior Never Seen Outside of Recessions

Last week’s May industrial production and housing starts showed recession — a deepening recession — while inflation pressures continued to mount. Those data also were consistent with a second-quarter GDP contraction, as they were for the otherwise gimmicked first-quarter GDP reporting.

On the inflation front, the May PPI surged somewhat in parallel with the prior week’s CPI report. Oil prices have remained high, despite official harrumphing by entities that really do not want to see much of a decline in oil prices.

Money growth — though somewhat soft on a week-to-week and month-to-month basis — showed the possibility (based on 9 of 30 days of reporting) of annual growth in June’s monthly average SGS-Ongoing M3 measure turning higher — possibly topping 16.0% — following 15.9% annual growth in May and 16.4% in April. June 2008 M3 is going against smaller monthly growth seen in June 2007.

The largest component of M3 is M2, and it is faltering. The near-term slowing in M2 growth (down at an annualized 5.7% pace in the last two weeks on a seasonally adjusted basis) may be an indication of resurgent difficulties in the banking solvency crisis, or it may be just an artifact of poor-quality seasonal adjustments (the adjusted numbers were up at an annualized 22.4% pace). Time will tell, but annual M3 growth remains at a level signaling surging monetary inflation in the second half of 2008, into 2009.

A Fed Pause? Nonetheless, with Mr. Bernanke spouting nonsense about the lessened risk of a serious recession (it already is in place) and taking the position of the new champion of the U.S. dollar and defender against inflation, the markets are expecting no change in the targeted Fed funds rate out of Tuesday’s FOMC meeting. Accordingly, such is the likely result.

Anecdotal evidence remains strong, however, of ongoing difficulties in the banking system. Thus, it is worth reiterating that the primary driver of Fed policy and activity remains the salvation and stability of the banking system. In the continuing banking solvency crisis, inflation and recession concerns remain secondary or tertiary matters for the Fed. The U.S. dollar usually is also of secondary concern, unless dumping of the greenback poses risk to domestic systemic liability. Such a crisis remains in the offing.

Under such circumstances, having the potential to influence the reporting of key headline economic data remains an extremely powerful and inexpensive tool for the Fed. 

Annual Contractions in Industrial Production Do Not Happen Outside of Recessions. As reported by the Federal Reserve, seasonally-adjusted industrial production fell by 0.2% in May, following an unrevised 0.7% monthly plunge in April. Year-to-year change turned negative in May, down by 0.1%, the first annual decline in this series for the current recession. Such followed a revised 0.1% (previously 0.2%) annual increase in April. Annual contractions in industrial production are not seen outside of recessions.

The latest reporting was consistent with the continued manufacturing contraction seen in the purchasing managers surveys and in the ongoing weakness in new orders for durable goods. It also virtually assures a second consecutive quarterly contraction in second-quarter production, an occurrence rarely seen outside of a recession. 

Housing Starts Sink Anew. The regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted housing starts measure fell by a statistically insignificant 3.3% (a 5.5% decline net of revisions) +/- 13% (95% confidence interval) for the month of May, and fell by 32.1% against the same measure a year ago, per the Census Bureau. Such followed a downwardly revised monthly gain in April of 2.0% (previously an 8.2% increase), with a year-to-year contraction of 32.2% (previously 30.6%).

On a three-month moving-average basis, the year-to-year contraction in housing starts has hit its lowest level so far in the current business cycle, down 32.7%. Such is the weakest showing for the series since the trough of the 1990/1991 recession. Current numbers suggest a sharp quarterly contraction for second-quarter 2008 housing, the fourth consecutive quarterly contraction in housing starts, and a performance not otherwise seen outside of formal recessions.

PPI Annual Inflation: Finished Goods 7.2%, Intermediate Goods 12.6%, Crude Goods 41.5%. Despite some pick-up in monthly producer price index (PPI) inflation, both food and energy prices were understated, once again, meaningfully. The seasonally-adjusted May PPI increased by 1.4% (1.6% unadjusted) for the month, with an annual gain of 7.2%, per the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). Such followed a 0.2% (0.7% unadjusted) monthly gain in April, which had seen a 6.5% annual inflation rate. On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted May intermediate goods were up by 2.9% (0.9% April), crude goods up by 6.7% (3.2% April). Year-to-year inflation, however, has gotten a little hairy, with May intermediate goods up by 12.6% (10.5% April) and with crude goods up by 41.5% (34.3% April).

Week Ahead. The "final" estimate revision of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) GDP is due on Thursday (June 26th). The number, though, will be far from final, with a major benchmark revision due on June 27th. Consensus forecasts are for a minor upward revision in the growth rate. Revisions, this time, should be little more than statistical noise.

May’s new orders for durable goods (due Wednesday, June 25th) likely will continue to be volatile, but look for annual change to remain negative after adjustment for inflation.

Outlook Remains Unchanged. All factors considered, the broad general outlook remains for an intensifying inflationary recession and deepening banking solvency crisis. Over the long term, U.S. equities, bonds and the dollar should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom. Full details will be covered in the next newsletter.

 

__________

 

The U.S. economy remains in an intensifying inflationary recession, while the banking solvency issues fester. Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government jawboning and intervention (particularly in the currency and gold markets), increasing economic data distortions and ongoing systemic shocks remain within the general outlook.

Publication of the next regular newsletter should be around the end of the month. Intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted as needed. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

–Best wishes to all, John Williams

Flash Update

Friday, June 13th, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - June 13, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

June 13, 2008

__________

 

Annual Inflation Surge Begins (4.2% BLS, 11.8% SGS-Alternate)

Monthly Inflation Still Understated

General Outlook Unchanged

 

__________

 

The SGS-Alternate CPI and SGS-Ongoing M3 for May will be updated and posted to the Alternate Data tab of www.shadowstats.com, over the weekend.
 – Best wishes to all, John Williams

As discussed in the June 9th SGS Newsletter, the recent surge in oil prices has been far beyond normal seasonal variations. Accordingly, current seasonally-adjusted monthly CPI inflation continued to understate inflation in May, beyond the biases adjusted for in the SGS-Alternate CPI measure. Nonetheless, the gasoline seasonal adjustments were as promised for the month, and, where the muting effects of seasonal adjustments have been keeping monthly CPI unusually low, that pattern should reverse next month. The seasonal-adjustment reversals, in combination with still-soaring energy prices, promise an ongoing surge in annual inflation for at least the next three months. The upturn in annual inflation seen in May’s reporting was the first since January.

Particularly unbelievable in today’s report was the continued lack of increase in the annual "core" inflation measures, where there is strong anecdotal evidence of spreading inflation pressures and price increases permeating the broader economy. These inflation measures — net of underreported food and energy inflation — increasingly appear to be pure fantasy, aimed at helping Mr. Bernanke in his "inflation fight."

Annual CPI at 4.2% (11.8% SGS-Alternate). The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported that the seasonally-adjusted May CPI-U gained 0.65% (0.84% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, versus the 0.21% (0.61% unadjusted) gain in April. With the CPI-U calculated now to three decimal points, the seasonally-adjusted monthly number was indistinguishable at that level from one that would have rounded up to 0.7% (against expectations of 0.5%). May’s annual CPI inflation rose to 4.18% from April’s 3.94%.

Year-to-year annual inflation will continue its upturn in June 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the 0.26% monthly increase seen in June 2007, which now appears likely. The difference would directly add to or subtract from May’s annual inflation rate of 4.18%.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) — the fully substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by CPI opponents and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — was 3.62% in May, up from 3.45% in April.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual May CPI growth rose to 7.5%, from 7.3% in April, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was at roughly 11.8% in May, versus 11.5% in April. The alternate numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data.

In terms of yesterday’s retail sales report, real monthly (inflation-adjusted) growth for May was 0.37% (unadjusted 1.02%), versus 0.20% (0.41% unadjusted) in April. Real annual retail sales growth continued in contraction, down by 1.73% (up 2.45% unadjusted) in May, versus a decline of 0.97% (up 2.97% unadjusted) in April.

Week Ahead. Wednesday (June 17th) sees the release of May PPI, housing starts and industrial production. The PPI is randomly volatile, but, based on the CPI reporting, it could hit expectations of about 1.0% monthly inflation for May. Underlying fundamentals would suggest something a good deal stronger.  

The housing starts series also is randomly volatile on a month-to-month basis, but it should continue showing historic levels of annual decline otherwise not seen outside of recessions.

Industrial production remains likely to come in shy of expectations of a small gain, contracting again, month-to-month, and very possibly turning negative year-to-year. Such would be the first annual contraction of this recession, and it would be consistent with the continued manufacturing contraction seen in the purchasing managers surveys and ongoing weakness in new orders for durable goods.

Outlook Unchanged. All factors considered, the broad general outlook remains for an intensifying inflationary recession and deepening banking solvency crisis. Over the long term, U.S. equities, bonds and the dollar should suffer terribly, while gold and silver prices should boom. Full details will be covered in the next newsletter.

 

__________

 

The U.S. economy remains in an intensifying inflationary recession, while the banking solvency issues fester. Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government jawboning and intervention (particularly in the currency and gold markets), increasing economic data distortions and ongoing systemic shocks remain within the general outlook.

Publication of the next regular newsletter should be near the end of June. Intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted as needed. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

Flash Update

Thursday, June 12th, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - June 12, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

June 12, 2008

__________

 

Core Retail Sales Up 0.86%

Unusual Revisions and Seasonal Factors in Data

 

__________

 

A Flash Update will follow tomorrow’s release of May 2008 CPI.
 – Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

When Mr. Bernanke made his recent comments about the economy showing somewhat better prospects, he likely had been given a heads-up on today’s retail sales report. With unusual revisions and unusual seasonal adjustments helping to spike the number, this particular series may have slipped into the netherworld of political/financial market massaging. Where there may have been some limited effect from tax rebates, such will prove fleeting. The unusually strong retail sales number followed what appeared to be ongoing underreporting of the monthly trade deficit, on Tuesday.

The general outlook remains unchanged, with the inflationary recession in place. The contents of the retail sales report would tend to suggest a weaker- rather than a stronger-than-consensus (around 0.5%) result for tomorrow’s (June 13th) May CPI report. Arguing in the other direction would be the Fed Chairman’s new-found desire to contain inflation. Further details will be discussed in a Flash Update following the CPI release.

Unusual Retail Sales Revisions and Seasonals. The Census Bureau reported seasonally-adjusted May retail sales rose by 1.02% (1.93% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), following a revised 0.41% increase (previously a 0.19% decline) in the April data. On a year-to-year basis, May retail sales rose 2.45%, versus a revised 2.97% (previously 2.03%) gain in April. The real (inflation-adjusted) annual change continued negative, real monthly growth awaits the CPI report.

The monthly upside revisions were unusually large (pushing the 95% confidence interval) and, in addition to automobiles and mail-order houses, included some increases in gasoline station and grocery store sales, suggestive of further catch-up in underreporting of food and energy price increases that never will show up in CPI reporting. Unusual seasonal factors also were in play. Where unadjusted gasoline prices rose by 8.8% in May, per the Energy Information Administration (Department of Energy), seasonally-adjusted gasoline station sales rose by 2.6%. With seasonal factors supposed to take 3.4% away from gasoline prices in May, and where changes in seasonally-adjusted gasoline sales are a surrogate for gas price changes, something appears to be out of alignment here.  

Core Retail Sales. Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — rose by 0.86% in May, versus a revised 0.70% gain (previously a 0.27% decline) in April, against the official aggregate gain of 1.02% in May and the revised gain of 0.41% in April. May "core" retail sales rose by 0.70% year-to-year, versus a revised 0.39% gain (was a 0.30% contraction) in April. Once again, food and energy inflation results appear to have been artificially contained.

Trade Deficit Revisions Still Shy of Reality. The seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for April was reported to have increased to $60.9 billion from a revised $56.5 (previously $58.2 billion) in March. Despite benchmark revisions, the data appear unreliable, with unusual paperwork flows from the ports distorting current reporting. The reported average unit price for imported oil rose in April to $96.81 per barrel, from $89.85 in March, and the average barrels per day reported as imported for April recovered to somewhat more normal levels, but the March number that clearly was so shy of reality (see the June 9, 2008 newsletter) was unrevised in the benchmark data. Accordingly, the current monthly trade deficit appears to remain understated.

In terms of the benchmark revisions, the overall quality of recent reporting does not appear to have improved. The revised monthly data suggest some minor downside revisions to fourth- and first-quarter GDP (currently 0.6% and 0.9% respectively) in the July 27th GDP benchmark revisions, with an added spike to third-quarter 2007 GDP, which already is at an unbelievable 4.9% annualized real growth rate.

Full details will be covered in the next newsletter.

 

__________

 

The U.S. economy remains in an intensifying inflationary recession, while the banking solvency issues fester. Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government intervention (particularly in the currency and gold markets), increasing economic data distortions and ongoing systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged.

Publication of the next regular newsletter should be near the end of June. Intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted as needed. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

May 2008 Newsletter

Tuesday, June 10th, 2008

Issue Number 43

June 9th, 2008

This month we are pleased to provide the Newsletter in a format which we hope will prove more convenient to readers. The Newsletter has grown in size to the point where presenting it as a single web-page has become rather unwieldy.

The usual four sections of the Newsletter are now available as separate web-pages as well as individual PDF documents.  The Newsletter also remains  available in its entirety as a single, large PDF document.

We strongly recommend that when making a printed copy of the newsletter (in part or whole) you use the PDF version.  If your computer does not yet handle PDFs, we urge you to download the free, Adobe Acrobat reader.

We would be grateful for any comments and suggestions about your prefered format for the Newsletter.

Newsletter as a Single PDF

Newsletter by Section:

Section 1. Overview   (PDF)

Section 2. Markets Perspective  (PDF)

Section 3. Reporting Perspective    (PDF)

Section 4. Reporting/Market Focus   (PDF)

___________________________________________

PLEASE NOTE: The next SGS Newsletter is targeted for around the end of June. Intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted in response to key economic or financial-market developments.

Earlier editions of the SGS Newsletter, referenced in the text, can be found on the Archives tab at www.shadowstats.com.

OCCASIONALLY, BRIEF UPDATES ARE COMMUNICATED DIRECTLY BY E-MAIL. IF YOU ARE NOT RECEIVING E-MAIL COMMUNICATIONS FROM US, PLEASE LET US KNOW at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or by using the "Feedback" option on www.shadowstats.com.

 

 

 

 

Flash Update

Friday, June 6th, 2008

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

June 6, 2008

__________

May Payrolls Plunged 134,000 Net of Concurrent Seasonal Adjustment Bias

Employment and Unemployment Reports Consistent with Deepening Recession

__________

 

The SGS-Alternate Unemployment measure will be posted to the Alternate Data tab later today.
 – Best wishes to all, John Williams

 Headline Monthly Payroll Changes Suggest Data Massaging

The pattern of impossible biases being built into the headline payroll employment changes — as detailed in the June 2nd Flash Update — continued with the May employment report. Instead of the headline jobs loss of 49,000, which was at or better than consensus, consistent application of seasonal-adjustment factors would have generated results showing a monthly jobs loss of 134,000. The implication here is of intensifying political manipulation of the data, where the cumulative 12-month-rolling upside headline bias increased from 507,000 in April to 595,000 in May.

The reported fifth consecutive decline in monthly payrolls as of May indicated a recession in place, with annual payroll growth on the brink of turning negative. The sharp upturn in unemployment also was consistent with a contracting economy. Still, as has become the standard pattern — with fairly predictable gimmicks — the weakness in the jobs report was understated, even beyond the apparent manipulation of seasonal factors.

Payroll Survey. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported a statistically-insignificant, seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 49,000 (64,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for May 2008, following a revised 28,000 (previously 20,000) jobs loss in April. Annual growth in total nonfarm payrolls slowed further to a recessionary 0.08% in May from 0.29% April.

Birth-Death/Bias Factor Adjustment. One element continuing to add upside pressure to the numbers was the monthly bias factor (birth-death model), which never was designed to handle the downside pressures from a recession. The May bias was a net addition of 217,000 jobs (up from the prior May’s 174,000 upside bias), following a net addition of 257,000 jobs in April. The May add-factor mindlessly continued to spike construction jobs (up by 42,000) and financial activities jobs (up by 9,000), irrespective of ongoing anecdotal evidence of trouble in those areas.  

Seasonal-Factor Gimmicks. As mentioned above (see the June 2nd Flash Update for detailed background), year-to-year growth should be virtually identical in both the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series, and applying the unadjusted annual change to the seasonally-adjusted year-ago numbers for April and May suggests that the seasonally-adjusted month-to-month change should have been a contraction of 134,000, instead of 49,000. This reporting gimmick is made possible by the "recalculation" each month of the monthly seasonal factors ("concurrent" seasonal adjustment). If the process were honest, the suggested differences would go in both directions. Instead, the differences almost always (11 out of the last 12 months) suggest that the seasonal factors are being used to overstate the current month’s headline payroll change, and the bias increasing.

Household Survey. The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including those of multiple job holders), showed household employment fell by 285,000 in May, after a 362,000 increase in April.

The May 2008 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-significant increase to 5.49% +/- 0.23% from 4.95% in April. Unadjusted, U.3 increased to 5.2% in May versus 4.8% in April. The broader U.6 unemployment rate rose to an adjusted 9.7% (9.4% unadjusted) in May, versus 9.2% (8.9% unadjusted) in April. Adjusted for the "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment, as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment measure, rose to 13.7% in May from 13.1% in April.

Employment Environment. The employment deterioration in May ran in the right direction, but still shy of reality, per trends indicated by some of the better-quality employment-environment indicators: April help-wanted advertising remained at an historic low, new claims for unemployment insurance have surged sharply in terms of annual growth, and a recession-level employment reading was seen once again for the May manufacturing purchasing managers surveys, while the May nonmanufacturing survey employment measure dropped into recession territory.

Full details will be covered in the pending newsletter.

 

__________

 

The U.S. economy remains in an intensifying inflationary recession, while the banking solvency issues fester. Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government intervention (particularly in the currency and gold markets), increasing economic data distortions and ongoing systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged.

Publication of the next regular newsletter should be over this coming weekend. Any intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted as needed. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

Flash Update

Tuesday, June 3rd, 2008

FLASH UPDATE - June 3, 2008

 

 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 

FLASH UPDATE

 

June 3, 2008

__________

 

A Case for Manipulation of Headline Payroll Employment Numbers

 

__________

 

The pending newsletter has been pushed back until this coming weekend. Nothing in the general outlook has changed. Today’s Flash Update, however, offers a preview of one area of focus in the coming missive: manipulation of key headline economic statistics, as it relates to payroll employment. Issues tied GDP and CPI reporting will be covered in the newsletter.
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Headline Monthly Payroll Changes Suggest Data Massaging

In the May 2nd Flash Update, I asserted, "Apparently the Administration and the Fed have moved to a rig-the-data mode, in order to avoid appearances of the economy falling into recession." That pattern of reporting appears to be ongoing. Contending that the government is manipulating current economic reporting is not a position I take lightly, hence this Flash Update. With the May payroll data due this Friday (June 6), the following analysis details of some of the unusual reporting seen in recent headline reports of jobs data — specifically the first estimates of monthly change in seasonally-adjusted payrolls — numbers so closely followed by the financial markets and media.

There are two types of manipulation that distort economic reporting. Manipulation of the first kind includes long-term methodological changes to the definition, gathering, analysis or reporting of key data, with the impact of building in a reporting bias that generates overly positive results. As a result, government reporting increasingly strays from common experience. Examples of this type of manipulation include the creation of the monthly bias-factor/birth-death model adjustment added into payroll employment, or the elimination of accounting for millions of "discouraged workers" due to redefinitions.

Manipulation of the second kind involves direct adjustment of targeted, current economic reporting for near-term political or financial market needs. An example would be Lyndon Johnson’s reviewing the GNP reports before they were published, and his sending them back to the Commerce Department for "correction," if he did not like the result.

The current matter involves manipulation of the second kind. If indeed it is taking place, it offers some political buffer to the Bush Administration from the inflationary recession that otherwise would help political opposition in November. It also would be an inexpensive alternative to other policy tools that might be considered by the Federal Reserve and the Administration in their efforts to support troubled financial markets and related institutions.

While there have been several instances of the second kind of manipulation in earlier administrations that I have been able to document (see the Primer Series available at www.shadowstats.com), the current contention is based on significant circumstantial evidence; there is no whistleblower or other direct proof at present of what appears to be happening.

In the case of Payroll Employment, published monthly by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the data that go into the monthly calculations and seasonal adjustments are massive and complex. Out of necessity, very few individuals would be involved or have direct knowledge of what was happening where the numbers might be getting a political massaging. Indeed, in some earlier documented cases, the manipulations were orchestrated by the Fed or a given administration from outside the statistical agency that did the reporting.

When irregular changes are made within a complex reporting system, however, such sometimes leaves unintended evidence of the manipulation that can be found in careful examination of the available data. During the Clinton Administration, for example, an examination of monthly revisions to payroll employment reporting showed that seasonally-adjusted monthly jobs growth was being targeted for an extended period of time at exactly 250,000 jobs per month or exactly 500,000 jobs per two months (a target of 3,000,000 jobs per year). After the BLS was questioned on the matter, those patterns disappeared from further reporting.

 

 

Impossible Seasonal Adjustments. A generally unrecognized issue with current payroll reporting is highlighted in the above graph, a circumstance that has been enabled by the BLS’s "concurrent" seasonal adjustment practices, which calculate current-month and recalculate recent-month seasonal adjustments each month. Over the period of a year, seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series should be equal to each other. Instead, unusual seasonal-adjustment patterns appear to have "created" 517,000 jobs in the headline employment numbers in the last year, with nearly 300,000 of those being generated in January through April.

The purpose of seasonally-adjusting payrolls is to redistribute reported employment activity throughout the year, so as to smooth out monthly activity for regular variations tied to calendar events, holiday-season employment, school year, etc. At the end of a year, both the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series should equal each other. Using seasonal adjustments should not end up creating the reporting of new jobs, only redistributing the numbers over the period of a year.

One way of avoiding having to use seasonal adjustments in order to assess current monthly trends is to look at the year-to-year change in the monthly series, as such neutralizes the bulk of seasonal variation. The exception would be where calendar variations, such as an early or late Thanksgiving, might result in some irregular (when viewed year-to-year) month-to-month shifting of jobs.

That said, under most circumstances, the year-to-year percent change in monthly payrolls should be virtually identical for both the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series. One of the regular cross-checks I run on the monthly employment data is to look at the adjusted and unadjusted year-to-year change in the employment levels that generate the headline jobs creation number. Therein lies a situation that cannot be happening with honest reporting.

For each headline employment number in the last year (subsequent revisions are not relevant here, as the headline number is what would be targeted and what is followed by the markets and media), the year-to-year unadjusted change was calculated and used to work out an implied seasonally-adjusted set of numbers. For example, for April 2008 jobs report, the unadjusted employment levels for March and April 2008 were divided by the same numbers for 2007. If the year-to-year percent changes in the numbers on an unadjusted basis were the same as the adjusted, then applying the unadjusted annual rates of growth from the unadjusted series to the adjusted March and April 2007 numbers would yield the same March and April 2008 as officially published.

That, however, does not work out. As reported, April payrolls of 137,818,000 fell by 20,000 from March’s 137,838,000. Estimating the adjusted series using the unadjusted growth patterns shows April at 137,742,000, down by 57,000 from 137,799,000.

The problem is that this pattern has been repeated in 11 of the last 12 months, suggestive of some intelligent intervention in what otherwise should be something of a random process. While the math may be somewhat convoluted (a worksheet on the data is available on request), and comparative adjusted and unadjusted annual growth rates will vary some month-to-month, the variations should lead to irregular patterns of higher and lower implied change versus reported headline jobs change (adjusted and unadjusted series should equal each other over time).

Instead, with the exception of September 2007 (which may have involved unusual Administration versus Fed pressures on the approach to the banking crisis), every month in the last year has shown an implied upside bias in the headline reporting. The total upside bias over the last 12 months was 517,000 (just headline, not net of revisions), with monthly biases in January through April 2008 running respectively 79,000, 104,000, 63,000 and 37,000.

As with the Clinton Administration’s apparent 250,000 per month jobs targeting, this circumstance likely will disappear as it gets exposure.

The circumstantial case for massaged jobs data considers the preceding, in conjunction with potential political/financial-market motivation and with other employment-related data, such as help-wanted advertising, jobless claims and purchasing managers surveys, all of which suggest recent monthly employment declines should have been six-digit.

As to Friday’s reporting of May employment, expectations seem to be around a 50,000 monthly jobs loss. Recent reporting trends would suggest a fair risk of a politicized number coming at a more positive level than consensus. Other employment indicators suggest reality would be closer to 100,000-plus monthly jobs decline.

Full details on the various economic reporting will be covered in the pending newsletter.

 

__________

 

The U.S. economy remains in an intensifying inflationary recession, while the banking solvency issues fester. Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government intervention (particularly in the currency and gold markets), increasing economic data distortions and ongoing systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged.

Publication of the next regular newsletter should be over the coming weekend. Any intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted as needed. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

Hyperinflation Special Report

Monday, June 2nd, 2008

Update: March 15th, 2011: 

A fully updated, "2011" version of this Hyperinflation Report has been published and is available here:  Hyperinflaton Special Report (Update 2011)

 

UPDATE — COMMENTARY

"How has the hyperinflation outlook changed since the Hyperinflation Special Report was published in April 2008?"  Such is the most frequently asked question I receive these days.

The answer is that the outlook is little changed, since the following report outlines the basic issues and limited options for the U.S. government that were in play well before the current crises broke.  The actions taken since by the federal government, U.S. Treasury and the Federal Reserve, in response to the still-deepening recession and ongoing systemic solvency woes, just exacerbated the long-range problems described in the report.  The official actions likely have advanced the timing of the hyperinflation to the much nearer future, perhaps within the next year or two.  Since September 2008, the Federal Reserve has been attempting to debase the U.S. dollar at an extraordinary pace, and such now is recognized widely among the major U.S. trading partners.

The current issues are discussed regularly and those analyses are available to subscribers in the Shadow Government Newsletter and related Flash Updates and Alerts.  An updated Hyperinflation Special Report should be posted in the next several months.

Thank you for your interest.

Best wishes,

John Williams
www.shadowstats.com
June 2, 2009

HYPERINFLATION SPECIAL REPORT

 

Issue Number 41

April 8, 2008

 __________

 

Inflationary Recession Is in Place

Banking Solvency Crisis Has Opened First Phase of Monetary Inflation

Hyperinflationary Depression Remains Likely As Early As 2010

__________

  

Overview

The U.S. economy is in an intensifying inflationary recession that eventually will evolve into a hyperinflationary great depression. Hyperinflation could be experienced as early as 2010, if not before, and likely no more than a decade down the road. The U.S. government and Federal Reserve already have committed the system to this course through the easy politics of a bottomless pocketbook, the servicing of big-moneyed special interests, and gross mismanagement.

The U.S. has no way of avoiding a financial Armageddon. Bankrupt sovereign states most commonly use the currency printing press as a solution to not having enough money to cover their obligations. The alternative would be for the U.S. to renege on its existing debt and obligations, a solution for modern sovereign states rarely seen outside of governments overthrown in revolution, and a solution with no happier ending than simply printing the needed money. With the creation of massive amounts of new fiat (not backed by gold) dollars will come the eventual complete collapse of the value of the U.S. dollar and related dollar-denominated paper assets.

What lies ahead will be extremely difficult and unhappy times for many. Ralph T. Foster, in his "Fiat Paper Money" (see recommended further reading at the end of this issue), closes his book’s preface with a particularly poignant quote from a 1993 interview of Friedrich Kessler, a law professor at Harvard and University of California Berkeley, who experienced the Weimar Republic hyperinflation:

"It was horrible. Horrible! Like lightning it struck. No one was prepared. You cannot imagine the rapidity with which the whole thing happened. The shelves in the grocery stores were empty. You could buy nothing with your paper money."

This Special Report updates and expands upon the three-part Hyperinflation Series that began with the December 2006 SGS Newsletter, exploring: (1) the causes and background of the evolving hyperinflation and great depression; (2) why circumstances will differ from the deflationary Great Depression of the 1930s; (3) implications for politics and the financial markets; (4) considerations for individuals and businesses.

The broad outlook has not changed during the last year. More generally, though, developments in the economy and the financial markets have been in line with projections and have tended to confirm the unfolding disaster. Specifically, the current inflationary recession has gained much broader recognition, while the still-unfolding banking solvency crisis has confirmed the Fed’s and the U.S. government’s willingness to spend whatever money they have to create in order to keep the financial system from imploding. While the dollar has taken a heavy hit — down roughly 20% against key currencies from last year — selling of the U.S. currency still has been far short of the outright dollar dumping that eventually will lead to flight to safety outside of the U.S. dollar. That event is important to the shorter-term timing of the pending hyperinflation.

Regular readers may recognize text from last year’s Series, as well as material from various SGS newsletters, but such is the nature of revisions to prior material. Points that may be repeated from earlier newsletters are done so in sequence to help build the arguments explaining the unfolding crisis. Great thanks are extended to the numerous subscribers who offered ideas, questions and materials that have been incorporated in this report. 

 

Defining the Components of a Hyperinflationary Great Depression

Deflation, Inflation and Hyperinflation. Inflation generally is defined in terms of a rise in general prices due to an increase in the amount of money in circulation. The inflation/deflation issues defined and discussed here are as applied to goods and services, not to the pricing of financial assets.

In terms of hyperinflation, there have been a variety of definitions used over time. The circumstance envisioned ahead is not one of double- or triple- digit annual inflation, but more along the lines of seven- to 10-digit inflation seen in other circumstances during the last century. Under such circumstances, the currency in question becomes worthless, as seen in Germany (Weimar Republic) in the early 1920s, in Hungary after World War II and in the dismembered Yugoslavia of the early 1990s.

The historical culprit generally has been the use of fiat currencies — currencies with no asset backing such as gold — and the resulting massive printing of currency that the issuing authority needed to support its system, when it did not have the ability, otherwise, to raise enough money for its perceived needs, through taxes or other means.

Foster (see recommended further reading at the end of this issue) details the history of fiat paper currencies from 11th century Szechwan, China, to date, and their consistent collapses, time-after-time, due to what appears to be the inevitable, irresistible urge of issuing authorities to print too much of a good thing. The United States is no exception, already having obligated itself to liabilities well beyond its ability ever to pay off.

Here are the definitions:

Deflation. A decrease in the prices of goods and services, usually tied to a contraction of money in circulation.

Inflation. An increase in the prices of goods and services, usually tied to an increase of money in circulation.

Hyperinflation: Extreme inflation, minimally in excess of four-digit annual percent change, where the involved currency becomes worthless. A fairly crude definition of hyperinflation is a circumstance, where, due to extremely rapid price increases, the largest pre-hyperinflation bank note ($100 bill in the United States) becomes worth more as functional toilet paper/tissue than as currency.

As discussed in the section Historical U.S. Inflation: Why Hyperinflation Instead of Deflation, the domestic economy has been through periods of both major inflation and deflation, usually tied to wars and their aftermaths. Such, however, preceded the U.S. going off the gold standard in 1933. The era of the modern fiat dollar generally has been one of persistent and slowly debilitating inflation.

Recession, Depression and Great Depression. A couple of decades back, I tried to tie down the definitional differences between a recession, depression and a great depression with the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) and a number of private economists. I found that there was no consensus on the matter, so I set some definitions that the various parties (neither formally nor officially) thought were within reason.

If you look at the plot of the level of economic activity during a downturn, you will see something that looks like a bowl, with activity recessing on the downside and recovering on the upside. The term used to describe this bowl-shaped circumstance before World War II was "depression," while the downside portion of the cycle was called "recession." Before World War II, all downturns simply were referred to as depressions. In the wake of the Great Depression of the 1930s, however, a euphemism was sought for future economic contractions so as to avoid evoking memories of that earlier, financially painful time.

Accordingly, a post-World War II downturn was called "recession." Officially, the worst post-World War II recession was from November 1973 through March 1975, with a peak-to-trough contraction of 5%. Such followed the Vietnam War, Nixon’s floating of the U.S. dollar and the Oil Embargo. The double-dip recession in the early-1980s may have seen a combined contraction of roughly 6%. I contend that the current double-dip recession that began in late-2000 already is rivaling the 1980s double-dip as to depth. (See the Reporting/Market Focus of the October 2006 SGS for further detail.) Please note that the definition for "great depression" below has been revised to a contraction in excess of 25% (from 20% stated in the March 16, 2008 newsletter), in order to be consistent with the usage in last year’s Series.

Here are the definitions:

Recession:Two or more consecutive quarters of contracting real (inflation-adjusted) GDP, where the downturn is not triggered by an exogenous factor such as a truckers’ strike. The NBER, which is the official arbiter of when the United States economy is in recession, attempts to refine its timing calls, on a monthly basis, through the use of economic series such as payroll employment and industrial production, and it no longer relies on the two quarters of contracting GDP rule.

Depression:A recession, where the peak-to-trough contraction in real growth exceeds 10%.

Great Depression:A depression, where the peak-to-trough contraction in real growth exceeds 25%.

On the basis of the preceding, there has been the one Great Depression, in the 1930s. Most of the economic contractions before that would be classified as depressions. All business downturns since World War II — as officially reported — have been recessions. Using the somewhat broader "great depression" definition of a contraction in excess of 20% (instead of 25%), the depression of 1837 to 1843 would be considered "great," as technically would be the war-time production shut-down in 1945.

The current economic contraction is about halfway towards being classified as a "depression," based on my definitions and GDP accounting. As the Great War became World War I with the advent of World War II, so too may the Great Depression become Great Depression I, as the current crisis reaches its full, terrible potential. As with the two world wars, what may become known as Great Depression II had its roots in Great Depression I.

 

Current Environment

Before examining how the current circumstance can evolve from an inflationary recession to a hyperinflationary depression and then great depression, it is worth defining the nature of the current economic and inflation conditions in the United States, and likely near-term developments.

Based on the regular material discussed in the SGS Newsletter, the U.S. economy is in an inflationary recession as will be reported in official statistics. Real (inflation-adjusted) fourth-quarter 2007 GDP, in July’s benchmark revision, and/or first-quarter 2008 GDP should be in contraction, with most underlying economic series showing distressed levels of activity consistent with a recession. Annual CPI inflation is at 4.0% and headed higher. Oil prices remain over $100 per barrel, weakness in the dollar is just beginning to impact the CPI, and the inflationary effects of soaring broad money growth should start to surface around mid-year. Official CPI could be running in double-digits by year-end 2008.

Net of gimmicked methodologies that have reduced CPI inflation reporting and inflated GDP reporting, the U.S. economy has been in a recession since late-2006, entering the second down-leg of a multiple-dip economic contraction, where the first downleg was the recession of 2001 that really began back in late-1999. Annual CPI inflation currently is running around 11.6%, again, facing further upside pressures.  

The current outlook does not exclude further bounces and dips in economic activity. As was seen during the Great Depression, in severe contractions the economy can hit bottom and then bounce briefly until it falls again, finding a new bottom. As discussed in the Depression/Great Depression section, the current economic downturn reflects a structural shift, which increasingly has constrained consumer activity during the last several decades, and which cannot be turned quickly. The current downturn, by my numbers, already is halfway to qualifying as a depression. The evolving depression quickly will move to great depression status, when the hyperinflation hits, as such will be extremely disruptive to the conduct of normal commerce.

The efforts by the federal government and the Federal Reserve to prevent a systemic collapse as a result of the banking solvency crisis has started to spike broad money growth, as measured by the SGS-Ongoing M3 measure, which currently shows a record annual growth rate of 17.3%. While the Fed has not been formally creating new money — yet — by adding to reserves, it has had the effect of creating new money by re-liquefying otherwise illiquid banks, by lending liquid assets versus illiquid assets. As a result, a number of banks have been able to resume more normal functioning, lending money and creating new money supply. As the systemic bailout proceeds, formal money creation will follow and already may be starting to show up in official accounting.

In response to the rapidly deteriorating fundamentals underlying the value of the U.S. dollar, selling of the greenback has been intense, but contained, with brief periods of stability as seen at the moment. In the near future, dollar selling should build towards an extreme, with heavy foreign investment in the dollar fleeing the U.S. currency for safety elsewhere. With the domestic financial markets and U.S. Treasuries so heavily dependent on foreign capital for liquidity, the Federal Reserve — now touted as the formal financial market stabilizer — will be forced increasingly to monetize federal debt. That process will build over time, given the federal government’s effective bankruptcy, as discussed in the section U.S. Government Cannot Cover Existing Obligations. Therein lies the ultimate basis for the pending hyperinflation.

Again, the current circumstance will evolve into a hyperinflationary depression, then great depression. Although such is not likely much before 2010, or after 2018, that financial end game for the current markets will tend to come sooner rather than later and will break with surprising speed when it hits. As discussed later, this likely will not be a deflationary environment as seen during the Great Depression.

What lies ahead for the current year will be severe enough and financially painful enough to affect the outcome of the 2008 presidential election. Historically, the concerns of the electorate have been dominated by pocketbook issues. Prior to gimmicked methodologies making the reporting of disposable personal income largely meaningless, that measure was an excellent predictor of presidential elections.

In every presidential race since 1908, in which consistent, real (inflation-adjusted) annual disposable income growth was above 3.3%, the incumbent party holding the White House won every time. When income growth was below 3.3%, the incumbent party lost every time. Again, with redefinitions to the national income accounts in the last two decades, a consistent measure of disposable income as reported by the government has disappeared. Yet, even with official reporting, the current annual growth in real disposable income is at 2.2%, well below the traditional 3.3% limit.

Accordingly, odds are quite high that the numbers for 2008 will favor an incumbent party loss, i.e. a victory for the Democrats. Where I always endeavor to keep my political persuasions separate from my analyses, for purposes of full disclosure, my background is as a conservative Republican with a libertarian bent.

What follows or coincides politically with a hyperinflationary depression offers a wide variety of possibilities, but the political status quo likely would not continue. Times would be financially painful enough to encourage the development of a third party that could move the Republicans or Democrats to third-party status in the 2010 mid-term or 2012 presidential elections.

 

Historical U.S. Inflation: Why Hyperinflation Instead of Deflation

Fire and Ice

Some say the world will end in fire,
Some say in ice.
From what I’ve tasted of desire
I hold with those who favor fire.
But if it had to perish twice,
I think I know enough of hate
To say that for destruction ice
Is also great
And would suffice.

– Robert Frost

As to the fate of the developing U.S. great depression, it will encompass the fire of a hyperinflation, instead of the ice of deflation seen in the major U.S. depressions prior to World War II. What promises hyperinflation this time is the lack monetary discipline formerly imposed on the system by the gold standard, and a Federal Reserve dedicated to preventing a collapse in the money supply and the implosion of the still, extremely over-leveraged domestic financial system.

The accompanying two graphs measure the level of consumer prices since 1665 in the American Colonies and later the United States. The first graph shows what appears to be a fairly stable level of prices up to the founding of the Federal Reserve in 1913 (began activity in 1914) and Franklin Roosevelt’s abandoning of the gold standard in 1933. Then, inflation takes off in a manner not seen in the prior 250 years, and at an exponential rate when viewed using the SGS-Alternate Measure of Consumer Prices in the last several decades. The price levels shown prior to 1913 were constructed by Robert Sahr of Oregon State University. Price levels since 1913 either are Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) or SGS based, as indicated.

The magnitude of the increase in price levels in the last 50 years or so, however, visually masks in the first graph the inflation volatility of the earlier years. That volatility becomes evident in the second graph, with inflation history shown only through 1960.

What is shown in the second graph is that up through the Great Depression, regular periods of inflation — usually seen around wars — have been offset by periods of deflation. Particular inflation spikes can be seen at the time of the American Revolution, the War of 1812, the Civil War, World War I and World War II.

 

The inflation peaks and the ensuing post-war depressions and deflationary periods tied to the War of 1812, the Civil War and World War I show close to 60-year cycles, which is part of the reason some economists and analysts have been expecting a deflationary depression in the current period. There is some reason behind 30- and 60-year financial and business cycles, as the average difference in generations in the U.S. is 30 years, going back to the 1600s. Accordingly, it seems to take two generations to forget and repeat the mistakes of one’s grandparents. Similar reasoning accounts for other cycles that tend to run in multiples of 30 years.

Aside from minor average annual price level declines in 1944 and 1955, the United States has not seen a deflationary period in consumer prices since before World War II. The reason for this is the same as to why there has not been a formal depression since before World War II: the abandonment of the gold standard and recognition by the Federal Reserve of the impact of monetary policy — free of gold-standard system restraints — on the economy.

The gold standard was a system that automatically imposed and maintained monetary discipline. Excesses in one period would be followed by a flight of gold from the system and a resulting contraction in the money supply, economic activity and prices.

Faced with the Great Depression, and unable to stimulate the economy, partially due to the monetary discipline imposed by the gold standard, Franklin Roosevelt used those issues as an excuse to abandon gold and to adopt close to a fully fiat currency under the auspices of what I call the debt standard, where the government effectively could print and spend whatever money it wanted to.

 

Roosevelt’s actions were against the backdrop of the banking system being in a state of collapse. The Fed stood by twiddling its thumbs as banks failed and the money supply imploded. A depression collapsed into the Great Depression, with intensified price deflation. Importantly, a sharp decline in broad money supply is a prerequisite to goods and services price deflation. Messrs Greenspan and Bernanke are students of the Great Depression period. As did Mr. Greenspan before him, "Helicopter Ben" has vowed not to allow a repeat of the 1930s money supply collapse.

Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke picked up his various helicopter nicknames and references as the result of a November 21, 2002 speech he gave as a Fed Governor to the National Economists Club entitled "Deflation: Making Sure ‘It’ Doesn’t Happen Here." The phrase that the now-Fed Chairman Bernanke likely wishes he had not used was a reference to "Milton Friedman’s famous ‘helicopter drop’ of money."

Attempting to counter concerns of another Great Depression-style deflation, Bernanke explained in his remarks: "I am confident that the Fed would take whatever means necessary to prevent significant deflation in the United States …" As a quick point of clarification, Mr. Bernanke’s actions to address the current banking system’s solvency issues are still in the preventative phase. The money supply is not in collapse, and the Fed has not started dropping cash from helicopters, yet, but the choppers are in the air and remain at the ready.

As expounded upon by Mr. Bernanke, "Indeed, under a fiat (that is, paper) money system, a government (in practice, the central bank in cooperation with other agencies) should always be able to generate increased nominal spending and inflation, even when the short-term nominal interest rate is at zero."

"Like gold, U.S. dollars have value only to the extent that they are strictly limited in supply. But the U.S. government has a technology, called a printing press (or, today, its electronic equivalent), that allows it to produce as many U.S. dollars as it wishes at essentially no cost. By increasing the number of U.S. dollars in circulation, or even by credibly threatening to do so, the U.S. government can also reduce the value of a dollar in terms of goods and services, which is equivalent to raising the prices in dollars of those goods and services. We conclude that, under a paper-money system, a determined government can always generate higher spending and hence positive inflation." The full text of then-Fed Governor Bernanke’s remarks can be found at: http://federalreserve.gov/boarddocs/speeches/2002/20021121/default.htm.

Where Franklin Roosevelt abandoned the gold standard and its financial discipline for the debt standard, eleven successive administrations have pushed the debt standard to the limits of its viability, as seen now in the ongoing threat of possible systemic collapse. The effect of these policies has been a slow-motion destruction of the U.S. dollar’s purchasing power, as seen in the accompanying table, since the gold standard was abandoned in 1933.

Loss of U.S. Dollar Purchasing Power through March 2008

  —-Since January of —-
Versus: 1914 1933 1970
Swiss franc -80.4% -80.4% -76.5%
CPI-U -95.1% -94.0% -82.3%
Gold -97.9% -97.9% -93.4%
SGS-Alternate CPI -98.2% -97.8% -93.6%

 

Note: Gold and Swiss franc values were held constant
by the gold standard versus coins in 1914 and 1933.
Sources: Shadow Government Statistics, Federal Reserve

As discussed in the next section, the limits to the unlimited abuse of the debt standard are particularly evident in the GAAP-based financial statements of the U.S. government, which show the actual federal deficit at $4.0-plus trillion for 2007, alone, with total federal obligations standing at $62.6 trillion. With no ability to honor these obligations, the government effectively is bankrupt.

At such debt levels, the markets soon will recoil from lending Uncle Sam whatever he needs. Major buyers of U.S. Treasuries from outside the United States, including a number of central banks, already are balking. These investors have funded nearly all net U.S. Treasury debt issuance of the last five years, putting to use the excess dollars flushed into the global markets by the United States’ excessive and ever-expanding trade deficit. This practice, however, generated liquidity for the U.S. markets that has helped to depress long-term Treasury yields as well as to boost equity prices, in general.

Although the U.S, government faces ultimate insolvency, it has the same way out taken by most countries faced with bankruptcy. It can print whatever money it needs to create, in order to meet its obligations. The effect of such action is a runaway inflation — a hyperinflation — with a resulting, effective full debasement of the U.S. dollar, the world’s reserve currency. The magnitude of the loss of the U.S. dollar’s purchasing power in the last 75 years now has the potential of being replicated within a few days or weeks. 

In the present environment, the chances for the collapse in money supply needed to generate a consumer price deflation are nil. First, the discipline of the gold standard that helped trigger historical deflations is gone. Second, both from the standpoint of the government’s fiscal irresponsibility and from the Fed’s standpoint of providing the financial system with whatever liquidity is needed to keep it afloat, the U.S. central bank already is pushing broad money growth to new extremes, not containing it.

Shown in the next four graphs are powerful fundamentals that either drive U.S. inflation or reflect market expectations of the longer-term domestic inflation outlook. Oil prices are near historic highs, the dollar is near historic lows, and money growth is at an all-time. The near-term outlook for all three series is for new record levels and for extremely strong upside pressure on U.S. inflation. Accordingly, gold prices should continue moving higher, setting new historic highs.  

 

 

  

U.S. Government Cannot Cover Existing Obligations

The U.S. Treasury publishes annual financial statements of the United States Government, prepared using generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), audited by the General Accountability Office (GAO) and signed off on by Treasury Secretary Paulson.

The statements show that the federal government’s annual fiscal deficit, far from being officially in the low hundreds of billions of dollar — although 2008 numbers rapidly are moving towards the $500 billion mark — is careening wildly out of control, averaging $4.6 trillion dollars per year for the six years through 2007. The difference is in accounting for the net present value, and year-to-year changes in same, for unfunded Social Security and Medicare liabilities.

The government’s finances not only are out of control, but the actual deficit is not containable. Put into perspective, if the government were to raise taxes so as to seize 100% of all wages, salaries and corporate profits, it still would be showing an annual deficit using GAAP accounting on a consistent basis. In like manner, given current revenues, if it stopped spending every penny (including defense and homeland security) other than for Social Security and Medicare obligations, the government still would be showing an annual deficit.

The results summarized in the following table show the various deficit/debt/obligation measures. The official GAAP-based deficit, including the annual change in the net present value of unfunded liabilities for Social Security and Medicare is estimated at more than $4.0 trillion in 2007 versus $4.6 trillion in 2006. The 2007 estimate is based on a consistent year-to-year accounting basis.

Further, contrary to the suggestion of Treasury Secretary Paulson — aside from a weakening economic outlook discussed in the next section — if the annual deficit is beyond containment through standard fiscal actions, then the United States has no way to grow out of this shortfall.

 

 U.S. Government - Alternate Fiscal Deficit and Debt
Reported by U.S. Treasury
       Dollars are either billions or trillions, as indicated.
        Sources: U.S. Treasury, Shadow Government Statistics.

Fiscal
Year (1)
Formal
Cash-
Based
Deficit
($Bil)
GAAP
Ex-SS
Etc.
Deficit
($Bil)
GAAP
With SS
Etc.
Deficit
($Tril)
GAAP
Federal
Negative
Net Worth
($Tril)
Gross
Federal
Debt
($Tril)
Federal
Obilga-
tions(2)
(GAAP)
($Tril)
2007 $162.8 $275.5 (3)$4.0 $57.1 $9.0 $62.6
2006 248.2 449.5 4.6 53.1 8.5 58.2
2005 318.5 760.2 3.5 48.5 7.9 53.3
2004 412.3 615.6 (4)11.0 45.0 7.4 49.5
2003 374.8 667.6 3.0 34.0 6.8 39.1
2002 157.8 364.5 1.5 31.0 6.2 35.4

(1) Fiscal year ended September 30th. (2) Revised to include gross
federal debt, not just "public" debt. (3) On a consistent reporting
basis, net of one-time changes in actuarial assumptions and
accounting, SGS estimates that the GAAP-based deficit for 2007
topped $4 trillion, instead of the gimmicked $1.2 trillion.
(4) SGS estimates $3.4 trillion, excluding one-time unfunded setup
costs of the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement, and
Modernization Act of 2003 (enacted December 2003). Link to the 2007
statements: http://fms.treas.gov/fr/07frusg/07frusg.pdf

The GAAP-accounting is what a U.S. corporation would have to show. The Administration’s rationale as to why Social Security and Medicare should remain off balance sheet runs along the lines that the government always has the option of changing the Social Security and Medicare programs. That said, there clearly is no one in political Washington willing to go public with the concept of eliminating or substantially cutting those programs. Such includes the prospective presidential candidates.  

Consider that given the current financial condition of the government, various politicians are pushing ever further for expensive cradle-to-grave programs for the electorate, ranging from national health insurance to bailouts of mortgaged homeowners at risk of foreclosure. With no full funding available for any new programs, the government again is showing its willingness to spend whatever money it has to create. The intent going forward is inflation — hyperinflation. This circumstance has evolved with the full knowledge of political Washington and the Federal Reserve.

 

As shown in the above graph, U.S. federal obligations are so huge versus the national GDP that the country’s finances look more like those of a banana republic than the world’s premiere financial power and home to the world’s primary reserve currency, the U.S. dollar.

If not for the special position the United States holds in the world, its debt — U.S. Treasuries — likely would be rated as below investment grade, instead of triple-A. Moody’s has even hinted at a longer-term downgrade on Treasury securities. While a three-month Treasury bill should be safe, I would not want to bet on receiving full value on a 10-year Treasury note or 30-year Treasury bond.

Yet, as shown in the following two graphs, most U.S. Treasury issuance has been purchased by investors outside the United States. Not only have these investors been taking a hit in terms of the value of the U.S. dollar, but also they face meaningful default/devaluation risk in the future. It is only a matter of time before this accommodation of foreign investors shifts to flight to safety outside the greenback, and therein will develop the early pressures for the Fed to start becoming the lender of last resort to the federal government.

 

 

 

Depression/Great Depression

The U.S. economy is in a deepening structural change that has resulted from U.S. trade policies that have driven the U.S. manufacturing base offshore. As a result, a large number of related, high paying jobs have been lost to U.S. workers.

As shown in the accompanying graphs, as the U.S. trade deficit has risen to the highest level for any country in history, U.S. average weekly earnings, adjusted for inflation, have fallen. Even using official CPI for deflation, current real earnings are below their peak back in the 1970s. Adjusted for the SGS-Alternate CPI measure, real earnings have been falling since the early 1980s. Also shown are real median incomes for U.S. males versus females, showing declines in recent years, per official government data.

The effect of this structural change has been that most consumers have been unable to sustain adequate income growth beyond the rate of inflation, unable to maintain their standard of living. The only way that personal consumption — the dominant component of GDP — can grow in such a circumstance is for the consumer to take on new debt or to liquidate savings. Both those factors are short-lived and have reached untenable extremes. Debt expansion and savings liquidation both were encouraged by the investment bubbles created by Alan Greenspan; he knew that economic growth could not be had otherwise. Part of what is happening today is payback for those policies. 

This circumstance places both the federal government and the Federal Reserve in untenable positions, where they cannot easily or rapidly address the underlying problems, even if standard economic stimuli were available. From the standpoint of the federal government, traditional fiscal stimulus in the form of tax cuts or increased federal spending have reached their practical limits, with the actual annual budget deficit running out of control at $4.0-plus trillion per year.

From the Fed’s standpoint, it can neither stimulate the economy nor contain inflation. Lowering rates has done little to stimulate the structurally-impaired economy, and raising rates may become necessary in defense of the dollar. Similarly, raising rates will do little to contain a non-demand driven inflation, such as seen in the current circumstance that is so heavily affected by high oil prices.

By the time hyperinflation kicks in, the economy already should be in depression, and the hyperinflation quickly should pull the economy into a great depression. Uncontained inflation is likely to bring normal commercial activity to a halt. Such is consistent with the final graph in this group, which shows household income dispersion at historic highs.

The greater the variance in income, the more negative are the longer term economic implications. A person earning $100,000,000 per year is not going to buy that many more automobiles that someone earning $100,000 per year. The stronger the middle class is, generally the stronger the economy will be. Extremes in income variance usually are followed by financial panics and economic depressions. U.S. Income variance today is higher than it was coming into 1929, and it is nearly double that of any other "advanced" economy. 

 

Hyperinflationary Great Depression

In the United States, the printing presses have not been revved up heavily, yet, but the commitments are in place, as seen in the annual GAAP-based deficit running on average more $4.0 trillion per year. That amount is far beyond the ability of the government to tax or the political willingness of the government to cut entitlement spending. While the inevitable inflationary collapse, based solely on these funding needs, could be pushed well into the next decade, actions already taken likely have set the stage for a much earlier crisis.

The current systemic bailout being worked at all costs by the Federal Reserve and the U.S. government, as well as earlier efforts by the Fed to buy time, have made the circumstance worse. Pushing recent Treasury funding needs on foreign investors — stuck with excess dollars from the ever-expanding U.S. trade deficit — has created a huge dollar overhang in the markets that already has started to crumble. The more the crisis has been pushed into the future, the greater the potential for pending calamity has become.

Milton Friedman and Anna Jacobson Schwartz noted in their classic A Monetary History of the United States that the early stages of the Weimar Republic hyperinflation were accompanied by a huge influx of foreign capital, much as had happened during the U.S. Civil War. The speculative influx of capital into the U.S. at the time of the Civil War inflation helped to stabilize the system, as the recent foreign capital influx to the United States has helped stabilize the equity and credit markets of recent years. Following the Civil War, however, the underlying economy had significant untapped potential and was able to generate strong, real economic activity that covered the spending excesses of the war.

Post-World War I Germany was a different matter, where the country was financially and economically depleted as a penalty for losing the war. Here, after initial benefit, the influx of foreign capital helped to destabilize the system. "As the mark depreciated, foreigners at first were persuaded that it would subsequently appreciate and so bought a large volume of mark assets …" Such boosted the foreign exchange value of the German mark and the value of German assets. "As the German inflation went on, expectations were reversed, the inflow of capital was replaced by an outflow, and the mark depreciated more rapidly … (Friedman p. 76)."

The Weimar circumstance is closer to the current U.S. circumstance, although, in certain aspects, the current situation is worse. Unlike the untapped economic potential of the United States 140 years ago, today’s U.S. economy is languishing in the structural problems of the loss of its manufacturing base and a shift of domestic wealth offshore.

In the early 1920s, foreign investors were not propping up the world’s reserve currency in an effort to prevent a global financial collapse, knowing in advance that they were doomed to take a large hit on their investments in Germany. In today’s environment, both central bank and major private investors know that the dollar is going to be a losing proposition. They either expect and/or hope that they can get out of the dollar in time to lock in their profits, or, primarily in the case of the central banks, that they can forestall the ultimate global economic crisis.

It is this environment that leaves the U.S. dollar open to potentially such a rapid and massive decline, and dumping of U.S. Treasuries, that the Federal Reserve would be forced to monetize significant sums of Treasury debt, triggering the early phases of a monetary inflation. In this environment annual multi-trillion dollar deficits rapidly would feed into a vicious, self-feeding cycle of currency debasement and hyperinflation.

Lack of Physical Cash. The United States in a hyperinflation would experience the quick disappearance of cash as we know it. Shy of the rapid introduction of a new currency and/or the highly problematic adaptation of the current electronic commerce system to new pricing realities, a barter system is the most likely circumstance to evolve for regular commerce. Such would make much of the current electronic commerce system useless and add to what would become an ongoing economic implosion.

Some years back, I happened to be in San Francisco, having dinner with a former regional Federal Reserve Bank president and the chief economist for a large Midwestern bank. Market rumors that day had been that there was a run on a major bank in the City by the Bay. So I queried the regional Fed president as to what would be happening if the rumors were true.

He had had some personal experience with a run on banks in his region and explained how the Fed had a special team designed to handle such a crisis. The biggest problem he had had was getting adequate cash to the troubled banks to cover depositors, having to fly cash in by helicopters to meet the local cash flow needs.

The troubled bank in San Francisco, however, was much larger than the example cited, and the former Fed bank president speculated that there was not enough cash in the vaults of the regional Federal Reserve Bank, let alone the entire Federal Reserve System, to cover a true run on deposits at the major bank.

Therein lies an early problem for a system headed into hyperinflation: adequate currency. Where the Fed may hold roughly $210 billion in currency (sharply increased in the last year) outside of $50 billion in commercial bank vault cash, the bulk of roughly $780 billion in currency outside the banks is not in the United States. Back in 2000, the Fed estimated that 50% to 70% of U.S. dollar cash was outside the system. That number probably is higher today, with perhaps as little as $200 billion in physical cash in circulation in the United States, or roughly 1.5% of M3.

The rest of the dollars are used elsewhere in the world as a store of wealth, or as an alternate currency free of the woes of unstable domestic financial conditions. In Zimbabwe, for example, where something akin to hyperinflation is underway, U.S. dollars are used to maintain some semblance of economic activity, where wages and salaries seriously lag inflation, and goods often are available only on the black market.

Given the extremely rapid debasement of the larger denomination notes, with limited physical cash in the system, existing currency would disappear quickly as a hyperinflation broke.

For the system to continuing functioning in anything close to a normal manner, the government would have to produce rapidly an extraordinary amount of new cash, and electronic commerce would have to be able to adjust to rapidly changing prices.

In terms of cash, new bills of much higher denominations would be needed, but production lead time is a problem. Conspiracy theories of recent years have suggested the U.S. Government already has printed a new currency of red-colored bills, intended for some dual internal and external U.S. dollar system. If such indeed were the case, then there might be a store of "new dollars" that could be released at a 1-to-1,000,000 ratio, or whatever ratio was needed to make the new currency meaningful, but such would not resolve any long-term problems, unless it were part of an overall restructuring of the domestic and global financial and currency systems.

From a practical standpoint, however, currency would disappear, at least for a period of time in the early period of a hyperinflation.

Where the vast bulk of today’s money is not physical, but electronic, however, chances of the system adapting here are virtually nil. Think of the time, work and effort that went into preparing computer systems for Y2K, or even problems with the recent early shift to daylight savings time. Systems would have to be adjusted for variable, rather than fixed pricing, credit card lines would need to be expanded daily, the number of digits used in tallying dollar-denominated transactions would need to be expanded sharply.

While I have been advised that a number of businesses have accounting software that can handle any number of digits, I also noted on a recent cross-country trip that a large number of gas stations have older pumps that cannot register more than two digits’ worth of dollars in their totals or more than $9.99 per gallon of gas.

From a practical standpoint, the electronic quasi-cashless society of today also would shut down early in a hyperinflation. Unfortunately, this circumstance rapidly would exacerbate an ongoing economic collapse.  

Barter System. With standard currency and electronic payment systems non-functional, commerce quickly would devolve into black markets for goods and services and a barter system.

Unlike Zimbabwe, the United States does not have widely available, for circulation, a back-up reserve currency for use in place of a highly-inflated domestic currency. The alternative here is in the traditional monetary precious metals. Gold and silver both are likely to retain real value and would be exchangeable for goods and services. Silver would help provide smaller change for less costly transactions.

Other items that would be highly barterable would include bottles of a good scotch or wine, or canned goods, for example. Similar items that have a long shelf life can be stocked in advance of the problem, and otherwise would be consumable if the terrible inflation never came. Separately, individuals, such as doctors and carpenters, who provide broadly useable services, would have a service to barter.

A note of caution was raised once by one of my old economics professors, who had spent part of his childhood living in a barter economy. He told a story of how his father had traded a shirt for a can of sardines. The father decided to open the can and eat the sardines, but he found the sardines had gone bad. Nonetheless, the canned sardines had taken on a monetary value.

Reserves of the Necessities of Life. Howard J. Ruff, who has been writing about these problems and issues since Nixon closed the Gold window, rightly argues that it will take some time for a barter system to be established, and suggests that individuals should build up a six-month store of goods to cover themselves and their families in the difficult times. Mr. Ruff covers this and many other excellent fundamentals in his new book How to Prosper During the Coming Bad Years in the 21st Century (see recommended further reading at the end of this report).

Financial Hedges. During these times, safety and liquidity remain key concerns for investments, as investors look to preserve their assets and wealth through what are going to be close to the most difficult of times.

In such a circumstance, gold and silver would be primary hedging tools that would retain real value and also be portable in the event of possible civil turmoil. Also, at some point, the failure of the world’s primary reserve currency will lead to the structuring of a new global currency system. I would not be surprised to find gold as part of the new system, structured in there in an effort to sell the system to the public.

Real estate also would provide a basic hedge, but it lacks the portability and liquidity of gold. Having some funds invested offshore — outside of the U.S. dollar — would be a plus in circumstances where the government might impose currency or capital controls.

While equities do provide something of an inflation hedge — revenues and profits get expressed in current dollars — they also reflect underlying economic and political fundamentals. I still look for U.S. stocks to take an ultimate 90% hit, peak-to-trough, net of inflation, during this period. Where all stocks are tied to a certain extent to the broad market — to the way investors are valuing equities — such a large hit on the broad market will tend to have a dampening effect on nearly all equity prices, irrespective of the quality of a given company or a given industry.  

Other Issues. A hyperinflationary depression would be extremely disruptive to the lives, businesses and economic welfare of most individuals. Such severe economic pain could lead to extreme political change and/or civil unrest. What has been discussed here still has not been a comprehensive overview of all possible issues, but rather at least has raised some questions and touched upon some likely consequences. No one can figure out better than you the peculiarities of this circumstance and how you and/or your business might be affected. Using common sense is about the best advice I can give.

These matters will continue to be expanded upon over time in future SGSs, as circumstances and subscriber reactions continue dictate. As always, please feel free to offer your comments or raise your questions by e-mail to johnwilliams@shadowstats.com.

 

Recommended Further Reading

Two particularly valuable books, mentioned elsewhere in the text, are recommended to subscribers:

How to Prosper During the Coming Bad Years in the 21st Century
by Howard J. Ruff
www.rufftimes.com

Fiat Paper Money, The History and Evolution of Our Currency
by Ralph T. Foster
2189 Bancroft Way, Berkeley, CA 94704
Telephone: (510) 845-3015, E-mail: tfdf@pacbell.net

  

Flash Update

Thursday, May 29th, 2008
 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

May 29, 2008

__________

First-Quarter GDI Growth Near Outright Recession

Wall Street Spinmeisters Grasp for Straws as Business Contraction Intensifies

__________

The next regular newsletter should be published over the coming weekend. The SGS-Alternate GDP and monthly Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar index also will be updated on the Alternate Data tab this weekend.
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Market perceptions are being played very carefully by Wall Street’s spinmeisters, as seen in recent fluffy hype involving durable goods orders and new home sales. Ignoring the highly-touted but largely insignificant monthly changes seen in these regularly volatile series, the new orders reporting now has contracted year-to-year for two months straight, an occurrence rarely seen outside of deepening recession. New home sales also showed a deepening, severe annual decline, an occurrence never seen outside of an intensifying economic downturn. Despite the sales pitch being given to the markets that the U.S. economy dodged a recession bullet, only heavily biased series like GDP are showing results that run contrary to the underlying fundamentals. Better quality series continue to show a rapidly deteriorating inflationary recession.

This revised 0.9% annualized real (inflation-adjusted) gain for first-quarter GDP matched consensus forecasts, but the GDP series is the most heavily gimmicked and biased report put out by the federal government. At the same time, the GDI (Gross Domestic Income), which is the theoretical equivalent of the GDP (gross domestic product), was reported to have come within 0.09% quarterly change (not annualized) of showing two consecutive quarters of inflation-adjusted contraction, also known as a recession.

As to the broad picture, once again, underlying fundamentals have not changed, with the long-range outlooks for the U.S. dollar and gold, respectively, about as bearish and bullish as possible. The U.S. economy remains in a rapidly intensifying inflationary recession, while the ongoing banking system solvency/liquidity crisis continues to fester. The eventual implications for the U.S. equity and credit markets remain bleak.

Durable Goods Orders Continue Falling Year-to-Year. Despite the stock market’s heart palpitations over a "less-than-expected" decline, the highly volatile new orders for durable goods showed a deepening recession as of April. New orders fell by a seasonally-adjusted 0.5% (a gain of 1.0% net of revisions), following an unrevised monthly March decline of 0.3%. On a year-to-year basis, April’s new orders fell by 1.7%, versus a revised annual decline of 3.2% (previously a 4.2% drop) in March. Smoothed using a six-month moving average, annual growth (net of inflation) remained increasingly negative and an ongoing recession signal.

The closely followed nondefense capital goods new orders fell by 1.4% for the month of April, reversing the 1.4% (previously 1.5%) gain seen in March. April’s year-to-year change was a decline of 4.7%, following a revised 4.8% (previously 3.3%) drop in March.

Annual Home Sales Collapse Anew. Despite market excitement over a small monthly gain reported in April new home sales, the broad picture could not be much worse. Rebased with annual benchmark revisions, seasonally-adjusted April new home sales rose by 3.3% (unchanged net of revisions) +/- 14% (95% confidence interval), which was not statistically distinguishable from a contraction. The April gain followed a revised 11.0% (previously 8.5%) plunge in March. On a year-to-year basis, however, April new home sales fell at an accelerating annual pace of 42.0%, following a revised 38.2% (previously 36.6%) annual plunge in March.

Increasingly reflecting the impact of foreclosures, existing home sales in April eased by 1.0% (0.8% net of revisions), after a revised 1.8% (previously 2.0%) drop in March. Year-to-year sales fell by 17.5% in April, versus a 19.1% (previously 19.3%) decline in March. Both home sales series tend to confirm the ongoing recession reflected in recent housing starts reporting.

Consumer Confidence Plunges to Lows of 1990/1991 Recession. Consistent with slowing consumer activity evident in housing and retail sales, the Conference Board’s May Consumer Confidence plunged by 8.9% month-to-month, and by 47.3% year-to-year, showing the lowest level and deepest annual contraction seen since the 1990/1991 recession.

GDI Nears Official Recession Reporting. Reflecting the not credible drop reported in March oil imports, as discussed in the May 12th Flash Update, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) reported this morning’s "preliminary" estimate revision of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth rate for first-quarter 2008 GDP at 0.90% (previously 0.60%) +/- 3%, which remained statistically indistinguishable from a meaningful contraction. The new growth rate compares with 0.58% growth estimate for fourth-quarter 2007, and the 4.91% economic boom reported in the third quarter. Annual growth for the first quarter was revised to 2.53% (previously 2.46%) versus 2.46% in the fourth quarter and 2.84% in the third quarter.

The GDP’s first-quarter implicit price deflator (inflation measure) rose at an annualized rate of 2.57%, previously 2.58%, against 2.41% in the fourth quarter and a 1.03% rate in the third quarter.

Today’s report, however, also included the first estimate of first-quarter 2008 Gross Domestic Income (GDI), which is the theoretical income-side equivalent to the GDP’s consumption-side measure. It varies from GDP only by a "statistical discrepancy" account, which is used to balance GDP and GDI. Where the statistical discrepancy widened to a $132.9 billion in the first quarter, from a revised $112.1 (was $139.9 billion) in the fourth quarter, the difference indicated that the GDP was being overstated relative to the GDI.

Close to showing an outright recession, annualized real quarter-to-quarter GDI in the first quarter gained just 0.33%, following a revised annualized contraction of 0.19% (previously 0.98%) in the fourth quarter, and a 1.2% increase in the third quarter. Year-to-year growth slowed to 1.08% in the first quarter, versus 1.29% (previously 1.09%) in the fourth quarter.

Also reported today was the initial estimate of first-quarter 2008 Gross National Product (GNP), where GDP is GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments). Annualized real quarter-to-quarter growth was reported at 1.08%, versus 1.87% in the fourth quarter and a 5.81% increase in third quarter. Year-to-year first-quarter growth was 3.17% versus 3.07% in the fourth quarter.

Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS-Alternate GDP measure suggests that economic reality is much weaker than officially reported. A first-quarter year-to-year contraction of roughly 2.7% would have been more in line with underlying fundamentals, past methodologies and the ongoing recession. Such reflects some bottom-bouncing with the annual contraction somewhat deeper than the 2.4% decline estimated for the fourth-quarter.

Full details on the various economic reporting will be covered in the pending newsletter.

 

__________

 

Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government intervention (particularly in the currency and gold markets), increasing economic data distortions and ongoing systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged.

Publication of the next regular newsletter should be over the coming weekend. Any intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted as needed. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

Flash Update

Thursday, May 22nd, 2008
 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

May 22, 2008

__________

 U.S. Currency Now Backed by Collateralized Debt Obligations

Seasonal Adjustments Used to Eviscerate Reported Inflation

Recession Deepens

__________

 

Best wishes to all for a most enjoyable Memorial Day Weekend! — John Williams

Underlying fundamentals have not changed, with the long-range outlooks for the U.S. dollar and gold, respectively, about as bearish and bullish as possible. The U.S. economy remains in a rapidly intensifying inflationary recession, while the ongoing banking system solvency/liquidity crisis continues to fester. The eventual implications for the U.S. equity and credit markets remain bleak.

Federal Reserve Notes: Sound As The CDOs Backing Them. According to this afternoon’s (May 22nd) reporting by the Fed, U.S. dollar currency in circulation is estimated at $818 billion, the better portion of which circulates outside the geographic confines of the United States. While the U.S. currency has been a fiat currency (not backed by gold) for decades, the Federal Reserve Notes presently in circulation are collateralized by securities held by the Fed. Those securities traditionally are U.S. Treasury securities.

Since the onset of the banking solvency crisis and the establishment of various new lending facilities by the U.S. central bank, however, an increasing portion of the U.S. Treasury securities held as collateral has been lent to troubled financial institutions in exchange for largely illiquid collateralized debt obligations — including mortgage backed securities — that now total in excess of 20% of the collateral backing the Federal Reserve Notes.

 On the money supply front, as expected, the M3 components reported today (M2 and institutional money funds), appear to be surging anew, coincident with the recent expansion of the Term Auction Facility (TAF).

Industrial Production Shows Deepening Recession. Seasonally-adjusted industrial production plunged by 0.7% in April, as reported by the Federal Reserve, following a revised 0.2% (previously 0.3%) increase in March. April’s year-to-year growth ground to a halt, at just 0.2%, down sharply from March’s 1.4%. The series likely will turn negative year-to-year in the next reporting, providing the first annual contraction of this recession.

The seasonally-adjusted first-quarter 2008 production reading contracted at an annualized 0.2% versus the fourth quarter. With production just holding even in May and June, the annualized quarter-to-quarter contraction for the second quarter would be about 3.2%. Legitimate GDP reporting would tend to follow the growth patterns of the quarterly production data. 

Housings Starts Show Ongoing Recession. The regularly-volatile, seasonally-adjusted housing starts rose by a statistically insignificant 8.2% +/- 17% (95% confidence interval) for the month of April, but fell by 30.6% year-to-year, according to the Census Bureau. Such followed the annual benchmark revisions to the series, with the March numbers now showing 13.8% (previously 11.9%) monthly and 36.1% (previously 36.5%) annual declines. The annualized first-quarter 2008 decline was 32.8%, while — assuming May and June reporting held at April levels — the annualized second-quarter decline would narrow to 3.8%.

PPI Inflation Remains Low Thanks to Lack of Food and Energy Inflation!? Consistent with increasing irregularities in the reporting of the government’s most popular economic series (CPI, GDP and employment), the seasonally-adjusted producer price index (PPI) increased by 0.2% (0.7% unadjusted) for the month of April, 6.5% year-to-year, per the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). Such followed 1.1% monthly and 6.9% annual increases in the March reading. April food prices reportedly were unchanged and energy prices declined by 0.2%.

Minimally, the unbelievable numbers were distorted by poor-quality seasonal adjustments, which eventually should reverse (if not revised away). As with the CPI data, however, the actual increases in food and energy prices are far more than can be accounted for by normal seasonal variations, suggesting that other factors — tied perhaps to political or financial-market needs of the Administration and/or Federal Reserve — could be at work.

Week Ahead. Irrespective of any near-term volatility in otherwise soaring oil prices, the levels hit in recent months already assure higher broad inflation readings in the next six months. Separately, Memorial Day likely will cause distorted volatility in the seasonally-adjusted weekly new claims for unemployment numbers, due to the Department of Labor’s general inability to adjust weekly numbers for seasonal variations, adequately.

The "preliminary" estimate revision of first-quarter 2008 GDP is expected to be an upward revision, from 0.6% to about 0.9%. The numbers here are pure fantasy, so I would tend to bet on the consensus forecasts.

Full details on the various economic reporting will be covered in the pending newsletter.

 __________

Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government intervention (particularly in the currency and gold markets), increasing economic data distortions and ongoing systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged.

Publication of the next regular newsletter is targeted for next week (week of May 26th), within several days of the Monday holiday. Any intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted as needed. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

Flash Update

Wednesday, May 14th, 2008
 

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

May 14, 2008

__________

April’s Core Retail Sales Fell 0.3%

Thank Goodness for Seasonal Factors and Collapsing Gasoline Prices

__________

 

An intensifying inflationary recession continues — and the general outlook remains the same — despite increasing irregularities in the reporting of the government’s more popular economic series.

The purported lack of energy inflation in the April CPI was no more credible than the 0.6% growth reported for first-quarter GDP or April’s 20,000 payroll decline. It appears that the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) felt awkward enough publishing a report that showed gasoline prices plummeting by a seasonally-adjusted 2.0% in April that it put out a special boxed statement that had the effect of obfuscating what was being reported in the numbers a little bit.

The BLS stated: "Gasoline prices rose 5.6 percent in April. Compared to a year ago, these prices were up 20.9 percent. Gasoline prices increase seasonally during the first five months of the year, with the largest increases occurring in March and April and decline seasonally for the remainder of the year."

While it sounded like gasoline prices rose, which they did, the statement did not make clear that seasonally-adjusted gasoline prices used in calculating the headline number declined by 2.0% for the month, while it was the unadjusted monthly change with the gain of 5.6%. Of course, the financial media and markets concentrate on the seasonally-adjusted aggregate series, which rose just 0.2% for the month, thanks to the reported weakness in gasoline.

While there is a seasonal pattern to gasoline prices, suggestions that the recent surge in gasoline prices — in tandem with record high oil prices — is more than accounted for by normal seasonal variation simply is not credible. Beyond the adjustment issues, which also have started to mirror the seasonal-factor gimmicks that appear to be spiking the monthly payroll employment numbers (see the Flash Update of May 2nd), the recent benchmark revision to retail sales showed that historical gasoline price inflation had been revised higher over recent years. This suggests there also may have been some parallel historical gasoline inflation understatement in the CPI, but the CPI (officially reported as an unadjusted series) does not get revised.

CPI. Moving further away from common experience, the BLS reported the seasonally-adjusted April CPI-U gained just 0.21% (0.61% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, versus the 0.34% (0.87% unadjusted) gain reported in March. April’s annual CPI inflation softened minimally to 3.94% from March’s 3.98%.

Indeed, seasonal factors are significant in depressing current reported CPI growth. On an annualized basis through April, seasonally-adjusted inflation was running at 2.95%, while unadjusted inflation was running at 6.99%.

One way to avoid seasonal adjustment games is to look at year-to-year changes in the monthly index levels, which should be virtually the same on both an adjusted and unadjusted basis. That was not the case in April. Applying the unadjusted annual change to the adjusted reporting of the year before, the current seasonally-adjusted CPI-U would have been up by the consensus estimate of 0.3%, instead of the lower-than-expected 0.2% reporting result.

Year-to-year annual inflation would resume its upturn in May 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the 0.46% monthly increase seen in May 2007. The actual difference would directly add to or subtract from April’s annual inflation rate of 3.94%.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) — the substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by the inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — was 3.45% in April, down from 3.55% in March.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth held at 7.3% in April, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was roughly 11.5%, versus 11.6% in March. The alternate numbers are not adjusted for any near-term manipulations of the data.

Retail Sales. The Census Bureau reported seasonally-adjusted April retail sales declined by 0.19% (down 0.86% net of benchmark revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), following a 0.20% increase in the re-benchmarked monthly March data. On a year-to-year basis, April retail sales rose 2.03% versus a revised 2.03% (previously 1.97%) in March. The real (inflation-adjusted) monthly change continued negative, as did the real annual change.

Core Retail Sales. Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — were down by 0.3% in April, versus a 0.1% decline in March, against the official aggregate loss of 0.2% in April and gain of 0.2% in March. "Core" retail sales remained negative year-to-year, down 0.3% for April, following a 0.6% loss in March. As with the CPI, imputed gasoline prices actually were reported down for the month.

The retail sales benchmark revision and core analysis, however, also show that the revamped data reflected higher food and energy inflation than previously reported. Where the aggregate April number showed a 0.2% contraction, which was a 0.9% decline net of revisions, the core decline of 0.3% was a decline of 4.2% net of revisions.

Full details on the various economic reporting will be covered in the next newsletter. 

__________

Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government intervention (particularly in the currency and gold markets), increasing economic data distortions and ongoing systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged.

Publication of the next regular newsletter is targeted for around May 26th, with intervening Flash Updates and Alerts posted as needed. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

Flash Update

Monday, May 12th, 2008

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

May 12, 2008

__________

M3 Growth Slowed in April — Still at 1971 High

March Trade Deficit "Improvement" Not Credible

__________

 

Please Note: The SGS-Ongoing M3 table and graph will be updated later today. Due to travel, the usual April retail sales and CPI updates will be combined and posted late Wednesday (May 14th), following the CPI release.
 – Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Slowing M3 Growth May Signal Deteriorating Bank Solvency Circumstance

A deteriorating inflationary recession remains in place, as should be seen in various reporting due later this week. Separately, aside from continued sharply negative anecdotal evidence, other signals of ongoing banking system solvency issues have surfaced. The general outlook is unchanged.

Dip in M3 Growth Rate for April. Based on four weeks of data, the annual growth in April’s seasonally-adjusted monthly average SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate appears to have slowed to roughly 16.4% from 17.4% in March. Such was dominated by annual M2 growth slowing to 6.5% in April, from 7.0% in March, with annual M1 change turning negative by 0.8% in April after a 0.2% gain in March.

Though off the recent historic high growth rate, the current M3 growth remains at the historic high seen before the current period, in June 1971, two months before President Nixon closed the gold window and instituted wage and price controls. The current upside inflation pressures from excessive money growth remain in place.

The last slowing seen in the annual M3 growth rate was in December 2007, when the intensifying banking crisis led to the Fed’s introduction of the Term Auction Facility (TAF) at its discount window. The lending from the TAF was key to the ensuing surge in M3 growth.

There may be similar dynamics at work in the current circumstance, where the Fed found it necessary to expand the TAF from $100 billion to $150 billion, as announced May 2nd. If such is the case, some pickup in broad money growth should be evident in the numbers as they get reported for the current period.

Trade Deficit "Improvement" Will Help GDP Reporting. As of February reporting, the monthly trade balance data suggested an overall deterioration for the first-quarter 2008 net export account in the GDP. The unlikely growth reported for first-quarter GDP, instead, was helped by a reported improvement in net exports.

The just released seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for March was reported to have narrowed to $58.2 billion, from a revised $61.7 billion (previously $62.3 billion) and accordingly will help support a possible upside revision the first-quarter GDP estimate. These data remain far from reliable and may be undergoing some massaging in support of likely rigged GDP numbers.

At least two factors appeared out of whack in the data. First were the prior month’s revisions, which were unusually large from a carryover standpoint. Carryover reflects irregularities in paperwork flows out of the ports to the Commerce Department. Carryover games were used in an outright manipulation of the trade numbers back in 1987 and 1988 in successful efforts to affect U.S. dollar trading (see the Primer Series on www.shadowstats.com). Second were oil imports. Although the average price of imported oil rose from a reported $84.76 per barrel in February to $89.85 in March, the average number of barrels per day imported in March 2008 was 8.986 million, down from 10.460 million in March 2007, where January and February 2008 daily volumes were up from 2007. Such suggests that there may further carryover problems in the works.

Week Ahead. Shy of manipulations, tomorrow’s (Tuesday, May 13th) April retail sales report should continue showing recessionary patterns with monthly and annual contractions, after inflation adjustment. Market expectations seem to favor no change for the month, although underlying fundamentals favor an outright contraction. Expectations are in line with underlying fundamentals for an outright contraction in the April industrial production report (Thursday, May 15th).

Any difference in the change in seasonally-adjusted April 2008 CPI (due Wednesday, May 14th), versus the April 2007 monthly gain of 0.32%, will directly add to or subtract from the March 2008 annual CPI inflation reading of 3.98%. Given current Fed sensitivities, a near-consensus report is likely, although underlying fundamentals would suggest a fairly significant upside surprise.

Full details on the various economic reporting will be covered in the next newsletter.

__________

 

Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government intervention, particularly in the currency and gold markets, and ongoing systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged.

Publication of the next regular newsletter is targeted for around May 26th, with intervening Flash Updates and Alerts posted as needed. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

Flash Update

Friday, May 2nd, 2008

 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

May 2, 2008

__________

Chances of Economic Rebound Now Are Nil

GDP and Jobs Data Appear Rigged

Other Numbers Confirm Intensifying Inflationary Recession

__________

 

Please Note: The SGS-Alternate GDP and Unemployment graphs and tables have been updated and posted for the latest reporting. They are available on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com. The monthly SGS Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar will be updated over the weekend.
 – Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Despite Manipulated Data, the Recession Deepens

Apparently the Administration and the Fed have moved to a rig-the-data mode, in order to avoid appearances of the economy falling into recession. Such games traditionally do not fool Main Street, U.S.A., which has a pretty good sense of what is going on without the help of government statisticians and White House/Fed/Wall Street propagandists. Separately, the reported results literally are meaningless. Based on reporting confidence intervals, both the GDP (0.6% +/- 3.0%) and the payroll results (20,000 +/- 129,000) were statistically indistinguishable from a major contraction or expansion.  

GDP. In line with the analysis in the April 29th SGS Newsletter, rather than report a fairly obvious contraction in first-quarter Gross Domestic Product (GDP) growth, the Bureau of Economic Analysis came up with a 0.58% (+/- 3%) annualized real (inflation-adjusted) quarterly growth rate, slightly above consensus forecasts, and identical to the growth rate reported in the fourth quarter. Thank goodness for an inventory build-up, surging defense spending, consumer purchases of services, and an improved trade deficit that ran counter to other official reporting. An artificially low-inflation rate (2.6% in the first quarter versus 2.4% in the fourth quarter) also helped to mask an otherwise significant quarterly economic contraction.

Year-to-year real GDP held at 2.46% in the first quarter, versus the fourth quarter, while the SGS-Alternate GDP annual growth was estimated to have contracted at a 2.7% in the first quarter versus a 2.3% decline in the fourth quarter.

Employment. The reported fourth consecutive decline in monthly payrolls, as of April, was not as weak as consensus forecasts, but it likely was rigged, too. As has become the standard pattern — with fairly predictable gimmicks — the weakness in the jobs report was understated. Without the monthly seasonal-adjustment restatement ploy (see below), for example, the jobs decline would have been about 62,000, fairly close to the consensus outlook. Without the monthly bias factor, the jobs decline would have been about 277,000.

Even so, the data show continued sharp deterioration in annual growth, and continued to give the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) — official arbiter of U.S. recessions — a timing mark for calling the current recession.

Payroll Survey. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported a seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 20,000 (loss of 28,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for April 2008, following a revised 81,000 (previously 80,000) jobs loss in March. Annual growth in total nonfarm payrolls slowed further to a recessionary 0.28% in April from 0.36% in March.

Bias Adjustment. One element continuing to add upside pressure to the numbers was the monthly bias factor (birth-death model), which was a net addition of 257,000 jobs in April, following a net addition of 142,000 jobs in March. The April add- or bias-factor mindlessly inflated construction jobs by 45,000 and financial activities jobs by 8,000, irrespective of ongoing anecdotal evidence of trouble in those areas. While the biases are added into the not-seasonally-adjusted data, the net changes flow through to the adjusted numbers with limited variation.  

Seasonal-Factor Gimmicks. Year-to-year growth should be virtually identical in both the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series, and applying the unadjusted annual change to the seasonally-adjusted year-ago numbers for March and April suggested that the seasonally-adjusted month-to-month change should have been a contraction of 62,000, instead of 20,000. This reporting gimmick is made possible by the "recalculation" each month of the monthly seasonal factors. If the process were honest, the suggested differences would go in both directions. Instead, the differences almost always show that the seasonal factors are being used to overstate the current month’s relative payroll level, as seen last month, and the month before, and for most other months going back in time.

Household Survey. The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including those of multiple job holders), showed household employment rose by 362,000 in April, after a 24,000 decline in March.

The April 2008 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-insignificant decline to 4.95% +/- 0.23% from 5.08% in March. Unadjusted U.3 fell to 4.8% in April versus 5.2% in March. The broader U.6 unemployment rate rose to an adjusted 9.2% (fell to 8.9% unadjusted) in April, versus 9.1% (9.3% unadjusted) in March. Adjusted for the "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment, as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment measure, rose to 13.1% in April, up from 13.0% in March.

Employment Environment. The milder employment deterioration and unemployment improvement in April ran counter to the trends shown in some of the better-quality employment-environment indicators: March help-wanted advertising hit an historic low, new claims for unemployment insurance continued to surge, and recession-level employment readings were seen again for both March purchasing managers surveys and the April manufacturing survey (non-manufacturing has not been reported yet).

Other Reporting Shows Deepening Downturn. The April 30th benchmark revision to retail sales showed significantly weaker activity than previously reported in late-2006 and early-2007, consistent with the recession staring in late 2006. The March 2008 level was revised lower by 0.6%.

Also confirming an intensifying inflationary recession were two private reports. The Conference Board’s April consumer confidence measure dropped 5.5% for the month, following a 13.7% decline in March, and it was down by 41.4% year-to-year, versus a 39.9% annual loss in March. Consumer confidence tends to be a lagging indicator.

The Institute for Supply Management (ISM) April purchasing managers survey (manufacturing) composite index held at 48.6 (a reading below 50.0 on the ISM diffusion indices means contraction) against March. The new orders index for April held at 46.5, while the employment index fell to 45.4 in April from 49.2 in March. On the inflation front, the prices paid component rose to 84.5 in April from 83.5 in March.

Fed Signals Deepening Banking System Solvency Crisis. There was no clear signal in Wednesday’s FOMC statement that Fed easing was finished. Keep in mind that the Fed’s overriding concern at the moment remains maintaining the viability of the U.S. banking system. Concerns for the economy and inflation (the Pabulum stories fed to investors on FOMC policy) both are secondary issues, at the moment, for the U.S. central banks.

With that in mind, recent press on large U.S. banks raising still further capital, and this morning’s Fed announcement of significantly expanded liquidity accommodations, suggest the worst part of the crisis is far from over. The slower pace of annual growth that is shaping up for April M3 (very roughly 16.6% versus a record 17.4% in March) may have a parallel in the systemic-crises effects in slowing M3 growth in December, when the system last moved into meltdown mode.

Full details on the various economic reporting will be covered in the next newsletter.

__________

Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government intervention, particularly in the currency and gold markets, and ongoing systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged.

Publication of the next regular newsletter is targeted for around May 26th, with intervening Flash Updates and Alerts posted as needed. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

April 2008 Newsletter

Tuesday, April 29th, 2008

 

Issue Number 42

April 29, 2008

__________

 

Inflationary Recession and Banking Crises Intensify

4th-Quarter 2007 Gross Domestic Income Contracted 1.0%

Covert Intervention in Currency and Gold Markets Likely

__________

 

 OVERVIEW — OPENING COMMENTS

Obfuscation and More Obfuscation

Underlying economic and banking system fundamentals rapidly are getting worse, not suddenly better as touted in Wall Street’s fantasies. Another tall tale is of the Fed’s valiant fight against recession, while containing inflation. Now that the economy has been turned, the story goes, the Fed can slowdown or eliminate its easing so as to concentrate on its inflation fight. What nonsense! The Fed’s primary concern remains preventing a systemic financial collapse; everything else is secondary. The Fed has very limited ability at present either to stimulate the economy or to contain inflation, despite severe problems in both areas.

Mr. Bernanke made the decision to sacrifice the U.S. dollar and inflation containment months ago. Any move now to a slower pace of interest rate cutting is due primarily to the targeted fed funds rate nearing its practical lower limit. If the Fed kept cutting rates at the same pace as seen earlier this year, fed funds would be at 0.00% before July.

As will be discussed further, nearly all statistics that underlie GDP suggest a first-quarter contraction, but politics likely will keep the number positive. Recent inflation reporting has been understated, yet market recognition is growing of a serious inflation threat. With oil prices hitting new record highs, the outlook for inflation cannot be good, as explored in this month’s Reporting/Market Focus. Inflation pressures also are in play from food supply disruptions, a weak dollar and excessive growth in the broad money supply.

Nonetheless, the equity markets have rallied, as has the U.S. dollar in conjunction with some gold selling. The equity markets rarely are rational, but the currency markets have been subject to heavy central-bank jawboning, which historically usually has been reinforced with covert market intervention. The gold market, in turn, has been hit with overt intervention. Jawboning and intervention tend to be short-lived in impact. The long range outlook remains dismal for the U.S. dollar and extremely bullish for gold.

Banking Solvency Crisis Continues. Little has changed in terms of the banking solvency/liquidity crisis, except for the passage of some time. The news continues to be bleak, as central banks keep pushing liquidity into the system. As shown in the accompanying graph, the Fed now reports non-borrowed bank reserves at something close to $100 billion. These funds obviously have little to do with banks meeting their reserve requirements, but more generally reflect the Fed’s net lending of cash and assets of approximately $140 billion as a liquidity infusion for troubled banks.

 With the ability to create money and its mandate to protect the banking system, the Fed has both the wherewithal and the will to bailout the financial system. The cost of such salvation, however, will come in the sharp rise of inflation in goods and services, as a monetary inflation starts to kick in. As banks have offered illiquid collateral to the Fed for loans of liquid assets, the re-liquefied banks in turn have been able to act more like solvent banks, making loans and expanding the money supply.

Looking to today’s and tomorrow’s (April 29th and 30th) Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC) meeting, the markets appear to be expecting a 25 basis-point (0.25%) rate cut in the targeted Fed Funds rate to 2.00%, with a possible cessation of rate cuts thereafter. The pace of cuts had to slow down as the fed funds rate otherwise would quickly move to nil, if recent trends were continued.

With Wall Street addicted to rate cuts, stories that there really is not going to be a recession are being used to salve the markets’ interest-rate-cut withdrawal pains. Yet, the economy clearly is in a recession, and despite what games may be played with tomorrow’s first-quarter GDP estimate, there still will be upcoming negative shocks in a number of economic series, as well as likely further negative surprises out of the financial system. What happens to the markets and the pressures on the Fed when the latest current wishful thinking collapses?

Hidden Recessions. Recessions have been hidden by poor-quality GDP data, before, such as the downturns around 1987 and 1995. Even the official recession of 2000 largely has disappeared now, as the result of revisions to GDP data. The current recession certainly has been masked and can be masked further by bad reporting — at least for a while — but the economic contraction eventually should be deep enough and long enough to show up even in official reporting.

  

As shown in the graph above, inflation-adjusted retail sales, smoothed using a three-month moving average, shows the year-to-year change in the key consumer series falling still deeper into recession territory in March. As indicated in the graph following, the help-wanted advertising index hit its lowest level since the series was first calculated near the end of the Truman administration. While some of the historic weakness is due to the shifting of advertisements to the Internet in the last decade, the recent near-term plunge in activity nonetheless reflects a sharp decline in employment activity. 

These and other series, as they may relate to GDP reporting, are detailed in the First-Quarter Underlying Data section. Again, these numbers suggest that a particularly severe recession in terms of depth and duration — one not easily hidden for long — is in the process of unfolding. 

Did Greenspan Put on His Smokey-the-Bear Hat Too Often? I often have compared the necessity and natural occurrence of recessions in the business environment to the necessity of sleep for people. Sleep helps to repair and refresh the body, enabling you to take on fresh challenges in the day ahead. If you go without sleep — especially using stimulants to stay awake — your efficiency drops off markedly and eventually you crash into a deep sleep. One recent evening, I was making that point in conversation with my son, daughter-in-law and grandson out here in beautiful California — an area that has had more than its share of tragic wild fires. More environmentally savvy and sensitive than I, my daughter-in-law suggested that I might want to consider using a wildfire analogy, which upon reflection, indeed I find is a good one, even though I may have added a word or two, here or there, to the text she gave me.

As explained to me, wildfires or forest fires are a natural and healthy part of some wild forest ecosystems.  Naturally occurring fires usually are caused by lightning, and, as part of an undisturbed natural ecosystem, provide a sort of ‘house cleaning’ for the forest. They consume brush and buildup, clear the forest floor for new vegetation, and put nutrients back into the soil, basically fertilizing the soil. Some plants and trees are even triggered by fire to germinate, such as pine cones that open up in the heat and release seeds into the newly refreshed and fertilized earth. Large, established trees can easily weather this sort of cyclic wild fire. 
As civilization has encroached on forestlands, structures, property and human life have been put at risk from fires. Accordingly, it has become commonplace for authorities to put out most wildfires in order to protect life and property, irrespective of risk to same. In turn, those efforts have had unintended consequences. As a result of the disruption of the natural wildfire cycle — where the forest floor never has its regular house cleaning — the leveraged buildup of brush and kindling makes the forest ever more vulnerable to an unnaturally large, fast and wilder fire. Fire risk is increased by carelessness ranging from cigarette butts to campfire ashes, by arson, by poorly structured collateralized debt obligations, etc. 

Each time that a fire is put out by the local authorities or the central bank, it is that much more important that the next one be put out, as the fuel build up would make the next fire that much stronger and dangerous. With this unnatural fuel buildup, it is likely that a wildfire could burn out of control, beyond the capacity of human containment. A fire of this unnatural strength would decimate the forest, because even old, strong, established trees cannot withstand fires of such magnitude. It has even gotten to where some park services — the forests’ regulators — have programs to utilize "controlled burn" fires to safely reduce the fuel load on the forest floor. Even so, fires that have been designed to be controlled have, on occasion, gotten out of hand with disastrous consequences. Still, in most places regulatory oversight is lax. Such is obvious, given the increasing intensity of fire storms seen in each successive fire season of recent years.

In his protracted term as Fed Chairman, Alan Greenspan was noted for encouraging ever more creative bubbles in efforts to forestall financial-market days of reckoning and related severe economic downturns. Further, as top regulator of the banking system, not only did he fail to clear away unnecessary deadwood, but also he actually encouraged the creation of new types of kindling in the form of derivative and structured instruments. Now Ranger Ben is tackling the worst financial wildfire of the last 70 years, fighting hard to save the large established banks.Fortunately for Bernanke, he has the ability to dump whatever water or fire retardant he needs. He can save the big trees, yet lose the forest in the process.

Gross Domestic Income Contracted 1.0% in the Fourth Quarter. Gross Domestic Income (GDI) is the income-side equivalent to the GDP’s consumption-side measure. As in double-entry bookkeeping, both sides should equal each other, with both measures showing the same rates of growth. Such rarely is the case, however, and sometimes the pattern of differences between the two series is suggestive of more than simple reporting inconsistencies. The differences between the two series are resolved mathematically by adding a statistical discrepancy account to the income side, and the discrepancies have been soaring.

The amount of discrepancy (not adjusted for inflation) moved from a negative $40.8 billion in second-quarter 2007, to a positive $84.8 in the third quarter, to a positive $139.9 billion in the fourth quarter. The positive discrepancy means that GDP is being overstated relative to GDI. 

As a result, where third- and fourth-quarter real (inflation-adjusted) growth rates were 4.9% and 0.6% for the GDP, the GDI saw a growth rate of just 1.2% in the third quarter and a contraction of 1.0% in the fourth quarter. Both sets of numbers are supposed be legitimate, but the GDI is showing the economy already to be in contraction. The details here will be updated in a month or two, when the first-quarter GDI is released. 

Pending GDP Manipulation. While the popularly followed Gross Domestic Product measure was reported with 4.9% annualized real growth in the third quarter and with 0.6% growth in the fourth quarter, those numbers were artifacts of data massaging aimed at hiding the current recession. In like manner, data likely will be gimmicked so as to show continued growth in first-quarter 2008 GDP (due tomorrow, Wednesday, April 30th). If so, the manipulation process is about to become much more obvious.

As noted in the April 23rd Flash Update, with President Bush assuring the American people that, "We’re not in a recession, we’re in a slowdown [Reuters, April 22]," it is almost a sure bet that the "advance" estimate of first-quarter GDP growth will not show a contraction but rather likely will at least meet consensus forecasts of 0.4% growth.

Separately, the FOMC is expected to announce tomorrow afternoon (April 30th) the slowing or cessation of its interest rate cuts. According to Wall Street spin, this shift is due at least partially to recession having been avoided. It could be awkward for the Fed to take a less-aggressive stance against recession, if the morning news were to carry the story of an unexpected contraction in first-quarter GDP.

By law, neither the White House nor the Fed is supposed to get an advance look at the GDP data until after the markets close today (April 29th), but political practicality prevents the President or the Fed chairman from being embarrassed by data surprises, and those data surprises most certainly never occur when the numbers are being massaged to meet political or financial-market needs. In any event, at the time of the President’s statement, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) already had a pretty good idea of what it would be reporting.

In the event that first-quarter GDP is reported to have contracted, what follows will help explain why it happened.

First-Quarter Underlying Data Show Contracting Business Activity, Surging Inflation. As explained in the April 23rd Flash Update, and as detailed in the next two tables, the underlying fundamentals that drive GDP not only are suggesting a quarterly contraction in first-quarter GDP but also generally are consistent with what should have been a contraction in fourth-quarter GDP.

The popularly-followed GDP growth rate is reported net of inflation, with the quarter-to-quarter rate of change annualized (raised to the fourth power). All the data in the tables have been prepared in a similar manner, so as to be consistent with and comparable to the reported or expected GDP growth and to the GDP inflation rate (implicit price deflator) used to adjust the GDP for inflation.

Where the consumer accounts for roughly three-quarters of GDP, in personal consumption expenditure and residential investment, the underlying numbers in terms of retail sales and housing starts have been in contraction for at least two quarters. Confirming underlying weakness in the consumer sector are collapsing consumer confidence measures and employment indicators. What is more of a guesstimate in early BEA data compilations — allowing for some gimmicking — is the services consumption area, covering such components as health care, travel and housing.

Business investment usually runs parallel to industrial production, which is in contraction, along with the various new orders measures.

Two months worth of trade data (all the BEA has to work with for the "advance" GDP estimate) suggest a widening of the deficit in net exports in the first quarter versus the fourth quarter.

The remaining GDP components that will have to more than counterbalance the negative components, in order to generate a positive first-quarter GDP number include: the services side of personal consumption expenditure, a buildup of unwanted business inventories and government consumption.

  

 Underlying Data for First-Quarter 2008 GDP

All rates of change are adjusted for inflation and are at a  seasonally adjusted annualized rate (SAAR), based on quarter-to-quarter change, unless otherwise indicated

 

Indicator

4th-Q 2007

1st-Q 2008

 

 

 

 

 

GDP

+0.58%

+0.4%

(Consensus estimate)

 

 

 

 

CONSUMER SPENDING/HOUSING

Retail Sales

-1.34%

-4.15%

 

Consumer Confidence

 

- Conference Board

-45.32%

-50.89%

 

- University of Michigan

-33.23%

-21.71%

 

Employment

 

 

- Payroll Survey

+0.79%

-0.31%

 

- Household Survey

+0.75%

-0.60%

 

- New Claims - Unemployment

+10.66%

+22.56%

(Gain here is a negative)

- Help-Wanted Advertising

-29.39%

-44.37%

 

- NAPM Mfr Employment

-9.59%

-16.59%

 

- NAPM Non-Mfr Employment

+7.20%

-38.72%

 

 

Housing Starts

-38.62%

-34.54%

 

Building Permits

-45.55%

-42.43%

 

Home Sales
- New

-35.05%

-43.03%

 

- Existing

-29.69%

-3.68%

(Reflects increasing foreclosures)

 

 

 

 

INDUSTRY INVESTMENT/MFR

 

Industrial Production

+0.40%

-0.11%

 

New Orders

 

 

- Durable Goods

 

 

     Before Inflation Adjustment

-5.90%

-8.53%

 

     After Inflation Adjustment

-10.44%

-12.29%

 

- Purchasing Managers - Mfr

-27.60%

-17.39%

 

 

 

 

 

NET EXPORTS

 

 

Merchandise Trade Deficit

+6.75%

-1.49%

(Negative number means

- Petroleum Deficit

-16.01%

-12.39%

deteriorating deficit, net of inflation and oil price changes)

 

 

 

 

Notes: (NSA) not seasonally adjusted. (SA) seasonally adjusted. (Purchasing Managers) - ISM purchasing managers survey, (mfr) manufacturing, (non-mfr) non-manufacturing. Trade data were based on February 2008 reporting that will be used in the first-quarter GDP "advance" estimate. All data used here are as used elsewhere in the newsletter, with identical definitions and sources. Consensus estimates are per Briefing.com.

 

 A common gimmick used to boost GDP growth artificially is deflation with underestimated inflation. In theory, the BEA first estimates GDP in nominal terms, not adjusted for inflation. Then each component is deflated by its appropriate inflation measure, with aggregated real (inflation-adjusted) GDP compared with prior periods for estimating growth rates. If too low an inflation rate is used in the deflation process, the real number ends up overstated. From a practical standpoint, the real GDP has to be determined first, in order to have the desired result, with the nominal estimates backed out with appropriate deflators.

For example, in the table below, the 2.4% overall deflation rate was used in determining real fourth-quarter GDP growth of 0.6%. Had the deflator been 0.6% points higher at 3.0%, real GDP growth would have been nil. Differences in monthly inflation of 0.05% and 0.03% are all that stand in the way of respective quarterly contractions for both fourth- and (expected) first-quarter GDP estimates   

    

Underlying Data for First-Quarter 2008 GDP Implicit Price Deflator

All rates of change are at a seasonally adjusted annualized rate (SAAR)
based on quarter-to-quarter change, unless otherwise indicated

 

Indicator

4th-Q 2007

1st-Q 2008

 

 

 

 

 

GDP Implicit Price Deflator

 +2.41%

+3.0%

(Consensus estimate)

 

 

Other Inflation Measures

 

CPI-U

+5.03%

+4.03%

 

PPI

+9.25%

+9.04%

 

Purchasing Mgr - Mfr (NSA)

+26.96%

+96.44%

 

Purchasing Mgr - Non-Mfr (SA)

+59.20%

-3.66%

 

 

 

 

Inflation Precursors

 

 

Oil Price (WTI)(NSA)

+109.66%

+35.14%

 

U.S. Dollar (NSA)

 

 

- Financial-Weighted (SGS)

-15.32%

-8.24%

(Weaker dollar means

- Trade-Weighted (FRB)

-17.89%

-6.89%

higher inflation)

Money Supply - M3 (SGS)

+19.23%

+18.30%

 

Gold Price (NSA)

+79.16%

+91.32%

 

 

 

 

 

Notes: See notes to prior table.

 The point of the above table is to suggest that inflation measured by the implicit price deflator is too low, with a resulting offsetting upside bias in the reported real GDP growth rate. Assuming first-quarter GDP growth comes in on the plus side, odds strongly will favor the use of a too-low implicit price deflator.

Inflation Outlook Remains Grim. With a number of the key inflation measures summarized in the preceding table, the general outlook for broad inflation remains strongly on the upside. Much of what is seen at present is due to rising oil prices, discussed in this month’s Reporting/Market Focus. Food supply distortions also have started to have inflation impact in terms of common experience, but food inflation is not yet fully reported in the official inflation statistics. With inflation pressures coming from commodity price distortions, rather than from strong economic demand, there is little the Fed can to do to help.

Beginning to kick-in are inflation pressures from a weak dollar. Monetary inflation from strong M3 growth likely will start to show up in third-quarter 2008. These factors are not triggering a hyperinflation, yet,  only setting the stage for it, as discussed in the April 8th Hyperinflation Special Report.  

 

The value of the U.S. dollar impacts the pricing of oil, which remains denominated primarily in U.S. dollars, at the moment. When the dollar drops against the yen, for example, the effect is the same as an oil price cut for Japan. Market forces tend to offset that effect, with the price of oil then rising in dollar terms, as a result. There also appears to a longer-term effect that has been in place since the U.S. trade deficit went exponential in the mid-1990s. A major decline or increase in the annual rate of change in the greenback is followed roughly 14 months later by an opposite move in oil prices. 

This is shown in the above graph, where the plot of the U.S. dollar has been shifted 14 months into the future, so as to show the strong negative correlation between the two series. Such suggests that recent dollar weakness may tend to provide some longer-term underpinning to recent sharp oil inflation.

Market Turmoil Is Not Over. With the banking solvency liquidity crisis continuing and with the inflationary recession intensifying, whatever happy stories are being spun on Wall Street will unwind at some point, as increasingly nightmarish scenarios begin to capture market thinking. The underlying fundamentals remain miserable for equities and bonds. A severe and protracted bear market in equities already likely is underway. Fed easings and flight-to-quality have depressed Treasury yields, but inflation and developing U.S. dollar woes eventually will push long-term Treasury yields much higher, a process that already may have started. Recent minor strength/stability in the U.S. dollar and weakness in gold will prove as fleeting as the related central bank jawboning and intervention. Heavy dollar selling and strong gold buying remain good bets in the months ahead.

PLEASE NOTE: A "General background note" provides a broad background paragraph on certain series or concepts. Where the language used in past and subsequent newsletters usually has been or will be identical, month-after-month, any text changes in these sections will be highlighted in bold italics upon first usage. This is designed so that regular readers may avoid re-reading material they have seen before, but where they will have the material available for reference, if so desired.

Alternate Realities. This section updates the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official GDP, unemployment rate and CPI reporting. When a government economic measure does not match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Federal Reserve, White House and Wall Street. In these alternate measures, the effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the pre-Reagan-Era CPI and GDP and the pre-Clinton Era unemployment rate. Methodologies for the GDP and CPI series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS.

 

GDP. The alternate fourth-quarter 2007 GDP growth reflects the "final" estimate, with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate fourth-quarter inflation-adjusted annual growth rate (year-to-year, as opposed to the popularly-touted annualized quarter-to-quarter rate) for GDP was a decline of roughly 2.3% versus the official, slowing year-to-year gain of 2.5%.

General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate GDP numbers tend to show deeper and more protracted recessions than have been reported formally or reflected in related official reporting. Nonetheless, the patterns shown in the alternate data are broadly consistent with the payroll employment and industrial production series (as revised), which are major indicators used by the National Bureau of Economic Research in determining the official timing of U.S. business cycles.

 

Unemployment Rate. Shown are two official seasonally-adjusted unemployment measures, U.3 and U.6, and the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure. All three measures moved higher in March in response to rapidly deteriorating labor conditions, standing respectively at 5.1%, 9.1% and 13.0%, up from 4.8%, 8.9% and 12.8% in February.

U.3 is the popularly followed unemployment rate published by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), while U.6 is the broadest unemployment measure published by the BLS. U.6 is defined as total unemployed, plus all marginally attached workers, plus total employed part time for economic reasons, as a percent of the civilian labor force plus all marginally attached workers. Marginally attached workers include the discouraged workers who survived redefinition during the Clinton Administration. The SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure simply is U.6 adjusted for an estimate of the millions of discouraged workers defined away during the Clinton Administration — those who had been "discouraged" for more than one year.

General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate unemployment series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate numbers are reported from the 1994 series redefinitions forward. It is planned to take the series further back in time.

CPI. March’s annual non-core inflation rates tended to hold at prior-month levels, while the core measures notched higher. Generally, though, annual inflation should continue rising well into 2009, with mounting inflationary pressures reflecting the increasing impact of energy-cost damages in the general economy, combined with pressures from a crumbling dollar and soaring monetary growth.

Outright data manipulation appears to be an ongoing issue, as discussed more broadly elsewhere. Recent food and oil-related price pressures have been reflected only minimally in current reporting, and that increasingly has caused some in the financial media to question the accuracy of official inflation reporting.

 General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate CPI numbers tend to show significantly higher inflation over time, generally reflecting the reversal of hedonic adjustments, geometric weighting and the use of a more traditional approach to measuring housing costs, measures all consistent with the reporting methodology in place as of 1980. Available as a separate tab at the SGS homepage www.shadowstats.com is the SGS Inflation Calculator that calculates the impact of inflation between any two months, 1913 to date, based on both the official CPI-U and the SGS-Alternate CPI series.

 

Eight Levels of Consumer Inflation
Annual Inflation for December 2007 to March 2008

 

 

2007

2008

 

 

Measure

Dec

Jan

Feb

Mar

I.1

Core PCE Deflator (r)

2.2%

2.0%

2.0%

n.a.

I.2

Core Chained-CPI-U

2.1%

2.2%

2.0%

2.1%

I.3

Core CPI-U

2.4%

2.5%

2.3%

2.4%

I.4

PCE Deflator (r)

3.5%

3.5%

3.4%

n.a.

I.5

Chained-CPI-U

3.7%

3.9%

3.7%

3.6%

I.6

CPI-U

4.1%

4.3%

4.0%

4.0%

I.7

Pre-Clinton CPI-U

7.4%

7.6%

7.3%

7.3%

I.8

SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation

11.7%

11.8%

11.6%

11.6%

 

(r) Revised.
Notes: I.1 to I.3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively, of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U. I.4 to I.6 are the same measures with energy and food inflation included. The CPI-U (I.6) is the measure popularly followed by the financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation. I.7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre-Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top series in the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com. I.8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which
reverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so, plus an adjustment for the portion of Clinton-Era geometric weighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic
bookkeeping.

 

 

MARKETS PERSPECTIVE

Partially reversing first-quarter activity, month-to-date April has seen some rebound in the U.S. equity markets and the U.S. dollar, with selling in the precious metals and upside movement in interest rates.

 

Financial-Market Indicators at Year-End 2007, March 31 and April 25, 2008 Closes

 

 

 

 

 

Indicator

Second-Quarter 2008 to Date April 25, 2008

First-Quarter 2008

Fourth-Quarter 2007

 

Level

 QTD/Qtr

Yr/Yr

Level

Qtr/Qtr

Yr/Yr

Level

Qtr/Qtr

Yr/Yr

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equity Market

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DJIA

12,891.86

5.13%

-1.51%

12,262.89

-7.55%

-0.74%

13,264.82

-4.54%

6.43%

S&P 500

1,397.84

5.68%

-6.53%

1,322.70

-9.92%

-6.91%

1,468.36

-3.82%

3.53%

Wilshire 5000

14,089.21

5.68%

-6.76%

13,332.00

-10.44%

-7.48%

14,819.60

-3.53%

3.94%

NASDAQ Comp

2,422.93

6.31%

-4.90%

2,279.10

-14.07%

-5.89%

2,652.28

-1.82%

9.81%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Credit Market (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fed Funds Target

2.25%

0bp

-300bp

2.25%

-200bp

-300bp

4.25%

-50bp

-100bp

3-Mo T-Bill

1.34%

-4bp

-363bp

1.38%

-118bp

-366bp

3.36%

-46bp

-166bp

2-Yr T-Note

2.44%

82bp

-219bp

1.62%

-143bp

-296bp

3.05%

-92bp

-177bp

5-Yr T-Note

3.20%

74bp

-135bp

2.46%

-99bp

-208bp

3.45%

-78bp

-125bp

10-Yr T-Note

3.91%

46bp

-75bp

3.45%

-59bp

-120bp

4.04%

-55bp

-67bp

30-Yr T-Bond

4.61%

31bp

-22bp

4.30%

-15bp

-54bp

4.45%

-38bp

-36bp

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Oil (2)   US$ per Barrel

West Texas Int.

121.57

19.67%

86.69%

101.59

5.81%

54.20%

96.01

17.56%

57.24%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Currencies/Dollar Indices (3) US$/Unit

Pound Sterling

1.9833

-0.11%

-1.04%

1.9855

0.06%

0.72%

1.9843

-2.68%

1.31%

Euro

1.5634

-1.08%

14.56%

1.5805

8.23%

18.18%

1.4603

2.70%

10.65%

Swiss Franc

0.9676

-4.01%

16.40%

1.0080

14.20%

22.23%

0.8827

3.02%

7.64%

Yen

0.0096

-4.15%

13.87%

0.0100

11.88%

17.74%

0.0090

2.92%

6.54%

Canadian Dollar

0.9840

1.11%

9.67%

0.9732

-3.83%

13.34%

1.0120

0.79%

17.92%

Australian Dollar

0.9330

2.17%

11.96%

0.9132

4.06%

12.71%

0.8776

-0.89%

11.31%

Weighted Currency Units/US$   Jan. 1985 = 100

Financial (FWD)

45.10

0.87%

-9.53%

44.71

-5.40%

-10.62%

47.26

-0.92%

-7.64%

Change US$/FX

-0.86%

10.53%

5.70%

11.88%

0.93%

8.27%

Trade (TWD)

51.13

1.07%

-10.05%

50.59

-4.04%

-12.70%

52.72

-1.51%

-10.00%

Change US$/FX

-1.06%

11.17%

4.21%

14.55%

1.54%

10.01%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Precious Metals (4)   US$ per Troy Ounce

Gold

891.50

-4.50%

30.34%

933.50

11.96%

38.97%

833.75

12.21%

31.92%

Silver

16.68

-7.28%

20.96%

17.99

21.88%

34.76%

14.76

8.13%

14.41%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

bp: Basis point or 0.01%. (1) Treasuries are constant maturity yield, US Treasury. (2) Department of Energy. (3) Shadow Government Statistics, FRB (see Dollar Index Section for definitions). (4) London afternoon fix, Kitco.com.

 

With the exception of interest rates, these market movements have been despite continued deterioration in key underlying fundamentals tied to the intensifying inflationary recession — including surging oil prices that are at all-time highs — as well as to the still unfolding banking-solvency crisis and central bank response to same.

Oil prices cannot explode, inflation cannot soar, and economic activity cannot collapse without some consequence in the financial markets. Irrespective of possible massive market intervention, including recent covert and overt interventions in the currency, gold and oil markets, the underlying fundamentals have not changed. Over time, the underlying fundamentals should win out.

General background note: As a general strategy under the current circumstances, looking to preserve wealth and assets needs to be a primary concern, along with the liquidity and safety of investments. The approaching financial maelstrom already has come over the horizon and may be makinglandfall. When it hits, those investors who have taken shelter in cash, gold and outside the U.S. dollar will be the ones with the wealth and assets available to take advantage of the extraordinary investment opportunities that should follow.

U.S. Equities — At subscriber request, I provide the following graph, which shows the year-end value of the Dow Jones Industrial Average both in nominal and real terms, where the inflation adjustment is based on the SGS-Alternate CPI measure. While stocks do tend to move with inflation and provide something of an inflation hedge, they also remain vulnerable to major shifts in the way investors value equities.

 

I contend that stocks already have turned down into what will prove to be a particularly protracted and savage bear market (see the Hyperinflation Special Report). As equities catch-up with the underlying economic, financial and systemic fundamentals, the downside adjustments to stock prices should be quite large over some years, eventually rivaling the 90% decline in equities seen in the 1929 crash and ensuing four years. The decline might have to be measured in real terms, as a hyperinflation eventually will kick in, with the Fed moving to liquefy the system and monetize federal debt. Stocks do tend to follow inflation, since revenues and earnings get denominated in inflated dollars. Hence with a hyperinflation, a DJIA of 100,000 or 100,000,000 could be expected, but such still would be well below today’s levels, adjusted for inflation.

As to more current market conditions, recent market euphoria certainly appears to lack an anchoring in underlying reality. Corporate profits will suffer in the unfolding inflationary recession; the banking solvency crisis — though likely to be resolved over time — still is terribly unsettled; eventual intense dollar selling will lead to dumping of dollar-denominated assets (stocks and bonds), and, in combination with higher inflation, the dollar crisis will push longer-term interest rates significantly higher. Despite ongoing wild gyrations in U.S. equity prices that may continue for some time, the frailties of the financial system and sharply negative economic fundamentals promise an eventual massive downside for the major U.S. stock indices.

U.S. Credit Market — With panicked rate cutting by the Fed in response to the burgeoning banking system solvency crisis and with flight-to-safety in U.S. Treasuries, short-term U.S. Treasury yields plunged in the first quarter, with a sharp steepening of a positively-sloped yield curve. With the Fed now expected to ease by only 25 basis points (0.25%) tomorrow (April 30th), with inflation concerns mounting, and with dollar weakness beginning to discourage some foreign investors, interest rates have backed up in the last month.  

With the 30-year Treasury bond yield at 4.61% — 61 basis points higher than official annual CPI inflation rate — it is the only active Treasury issue that does not suffer a negative real interest rate. With rapidly mounting inflationary pressures, rapid money growth, explosive federal deficit growth (and borrowing needs), and a soon to be seen flight from the dollar that evolves into a flight-to-safety outside the dollar, the longer range outlook continues for long-term Treasury yields to back up by several hundred basis points, approaching a normal spread in long-term Treasuries over inflation. With a normal spread, the current 4.61% yield on the 30-year Treasury bond would be pushing 7.50%.

General background note: At such time as the flight from the dollar becomes a flight-to-safety out of the dollar, U.S. interest rates will be forced higher in a mounting liquidity squeeze resulting from foreign dumping of dollar denominated securities. Increasingly, those assets will have to be absorbed in the U.S. markets, spiking Treasury yields.

U.S. Dollar — Despite recent dollar gyrations that at least partially were encouraged by certain central banks, the underlying fundamentals for the U.S. currency remain abysmal and are deteriorating. The long-term outlook for the dollar remains for a continued massive sell-off, with flight from the dollar eventually evolving into a flight to safety outside the dollar.  

When fundamentals move sharply in directions that normally would trigger heavy dollar selling and gold buying, but early moves in those directions suddenly reverse sharply for no apparent reason, more often than not a central bank has sent a message to those betting against the greenback. Heavy jawboning in support of the dollar, as seen recently from the European Central Bank, often is backed by covert intervention, making the jawboning appear more powerful than it may be in reality. Other banks appear to have been involved in some pro-dollar activity back in March.

Indeed, covert intervention has been a factor in moving the U.S. dollar off its March 17th lows against the Swiss franc and Japanese yen, and in recent days against the April 22nd low against the euro. Whatever the gimmick, jawboning and intervention are short-lived factors, unless underlying fundamentals also have been shifted, or the intervention is in line with, instead of opposed to, market forces.

 

As shown in the above graph, the U.S. dollar continued to fall sharply in March 2008, setting historic lows, but it has rebounded somewhat in April. The latest data points shown for the financial- and trade-weighted indices are as of Friday, April 25th.

General background note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS Newsletter for methodology.

In terms of underlying fundamentals that drive relative currency values, the dollar’s portfolio could not be worse. Relative to major trading partners, the U.S. economy is much weaker; interest rates are lower and anticipated possibly to go lower still; inflation is higher; rising fiscal and trade-balance conditions are horrendous, with the fiscal deficit exploding; and relative political/systemic concerns are rising sharply with President’s and Congress’s approval ratings bottom-bouncing at all-time lows.

Beyond renewed capitulation by the Federal Reserve to the solvency/funding crisis, the proximal trigger for a full dollar panic could come from a bad economic statistic, political missteps by the Administration, negative trade or market developments outside the United States, or a terrorist attack or expansion of U.S. military activity in the Middle-East or South America. When the trigger is pulled, what likely will be broad selling pressure will turn to an outright panicked dumping of the greenback, which should overwhelm any short-lived central bank intervention and roil the domestic financial markets. Generally, the greater the magnitude of the dollar selling, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. capital markets, on top of an otherwise deteriorating systemic crisis.

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics’ Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (FWD) is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For March 2008 the monthly FWD fell by 3.53%, after dropping by 0.80% February. The March 2008 average index level of 44.86 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down by 12.01% from March 2007, while February was down 9.81% from the year before. As of April 25th, the FWD stood at 45.10.

Also down in February was the Federal Reserve’s Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (TWD). The March 2008 average was down by 3.10% from February, which, in turn, had been down 0.67% from January. The March 2008 index level of 50.60 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 13.43% year-to-year, versus an 11.58% annual decline in February. As of April 25th, the TWD closed at 51.13.

Gold — The price of gold has dropped nearly 12% since its record-high London p.m. fix of $1,011.25 per troy ounce on March 17, 2008, but, placing things in perspective, gold is up by 30% from a year ago, while the S&P 500 is down about 7% from a year ago. The long-term outlook for gold remains extremely bullish, with recovery to $1,000-plus levels and higher likely sooner, rather than later, given the extraordinary strength of the underlying fundamentals.

While the gold market remains extremely volatile, the underlying fundamentals generally have improved during the last month, with soaring oil prices, high monetary growth and mounting global political tensions. The weakness in the dollar remains a plus, which will be intensified with renewed, heavy dollar selling.  Occasional profit taking can be expected with sharply rallying assets, but with gold, sharply rallying prices also invite central bank intervention. That has taken place, along with apparent covert intervention aimed at propping the U.S. dollar.

For March (based on Kitco.com), the monthly average London gold afternoon fix was $968.43 versus $922.30 in February. Silver averaged $19.51 per troy ounce in March, up from $17.57 in February. Respective closing prices on April 28th were $890.50 and $16.94 per troy ounce.

Outside of the current period’s March 17th high of $1,011.25, the earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix) of January 21, 1980 still has not been hit in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on inflation through March 2008, the 1980 gold price peak would be $2,333 per troy ounce, based on not-seasonally-adjusted CPI-adjusted dollars, and would be $6,438 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate CPI adjusted dollars.

General background note: Near-term gold price volatility likely will continue and could be significant. Upside price pressures from mounting inflation, a weakening dollar and increasing global political, financial and systemic instabilities, face offsets with bouts of profit taking and with intensified overt and covert central bank interventions in the gold and currency markets, aimed at propping the greenback. Despite any central-bank machinations or intervention, the upside potential for the precious metals remains explosive.

General background note: As discussed in the Hyperinflation Special Report, the eventual collapse of the U.S. dollar — the world’s reserve currency — will force the creation of a new international currency system. Gold likely will be structured into any replacement system, in an effort by those organizing the new currency structure to gain public acceptance.

The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show the March averages, as well as added points for closing prices on April 25th, with gold at $891.50, oil at $121.57 and the Fed’s published noon buying rate for the Swiss franc at $0.9676. Again, all three measures should trade significantly higher in the months ahead.

  

 

REPORTING PERSPECTIVE

The Big Three Market Movers

Nothing has changed but the story from the spinmeisters. U.S. financial system stability and economic and inflation conditions have deteriorated markedly, and little can be trusted in current economic reporting. The stories being told are that the economy will dodge a recession and that the Fed is containing inflation. Mr. Bernanke still needs a stable U.S. currency, particularly under the circumstances of his expanding bailout of the domestic financial system and his otherwise ongoing capitulation to Wall Street pressures, while the Administration’s political needs remain great. With financial circumstances threatening national security, almost anything is possible in the arena of data and market manipulations.

With President Bush advising that the economy is not in recession, how the upcoming "advance" estimate of first-quarter GDP gets reported will be very telling of what is to follow in other key series (see Opening Comments). Absent manipulations, and against market expectations that have moved further away from reality during the last month, most near-term economic reporting still should tend to surprise the markets on the downside, while most inflation reporting still should surprise expectations on the upside.

Employment/Unemployment — As discussed in the April 4th Flash Update, the reported third consecutive decline in monthly payrolls as of March did reinforce some recession outlooks, with first-quarter payroll levels now below those of fourth-quarter 2007. Such gives the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) — official arbiter of U.S. recessions — its first timing mark for calling the current recession. The second timing mark may be industrial production.

Nonetheless, employment data remain severely gimmicked, understating the monthly declines in payroll employment, thanks to the usual statistical shenanigans at the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). Net of gimmicks, the decline in payrolls and the rise in the unemployment rate were statistically significant.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 80,000 (a loss of 147,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for March 2008, following a revised 76,000 (previously 63,000) jobs loss in February. The prior period revisions, however, were stretched further back in time, so that the revised February decline otherwise would have been 130,000. Although, officially, the March decline was statistically indistinguishable from a gain, the apparent decline net of gimmicks and revisions would be a statistically-significant contraction. Annual growth in total nonfarm payrolls slowed further to a recessionary 0.35% in March, from 0.59% in February.

Bias Adjustment. One element continuing to add upside pressure to the numbers was the monthly bias factor (birth-death model), which was a net addition of 142,000 jobs in March, following a net addition of 135,000 jobs in February. The March add-factor mindlessly spiked construction jobs by 28,000 and financial activities jobs by 6,000, irrespective of anecdotal evidence of trouble in those areas.  

Seasonal-Factor Gimmicks. Year-to-year growth should be virtually identical in both the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series, and applying the unadjusted annual change to the seasonally-adjusted year-ago numbers for February and March suggests that the seasonally-adjusted month-to-month change should have been a contraction of 124,000. This reporting gimmick is made possible by the "recalculation" each month of the monthly seasonal factors. If the process were honest, the suggested differences would go in both directions. Instead, the differences almost always suggest that the seasonal factors are being used to overstate the current month’s relative payroll level, as seen last month, and the month before.

Household Survey. The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including those of multiple job holders), showed household employment dropped by 24,000 in March, against a 255,000 decline in February.

The March 2008 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-significant increase to 5.08% +/- 0.23% from 4.81% in February. Unadjusted, U.3 held at 5.2% in March. The broader U.6 unemployment rate rose to an adjusted 9.1% (9.3% unadjusted) in March, versus 8.9% (9.5% unadjusted) in February. Adjusted for the "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment, as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment measure, rose to 13.0% in March, up from 12.8% in February (see the Alternate Reality section).

Employment Environment. The continued and deepening employment decline reported in March, though still far short of reality, continued moving in the same direction suggested by some of the better-quality employment-environment indicators, which also signal contracting jobs for April: March help-wanted advertising hit an historic low, new claims for unemployment insurance continued to surge, and recession-level employment readings were seen again for both March purchasing managers surveys.

Next Release (May 2): Based on continued deterioration in underlying economic activity, the April payroll survey should show continued month-to-month contraction, and the household survey should show a continued rise in the unemployment rate. If the GDP number comes in on the plus side, such would argue for a happy, politicized, better-than-expected number for April payrolls, where current expectations are running around a 75,000 monthly contraction. The number simply can be brought in at whatever level is desired by the Administration.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) — The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) reported the "final" estimate revision of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth rate for fourth-quarter 2007 GDP at 0.58% +/- 3%, which remained statistically indistinguishable from a meaningful contraction. The reported growth was almost unrevised against the "preliminary" estimate of 0.63% and the "advance" estimate of 0.64%, and it was down from the nonsensical growth of 4.91% reported for the third quarter. Annual growth for the fourth quarter reportedly held at 2.46%, in revision, versus the previous estimates of 2.47%, and down from 2.84% in the third quarter.

The GDP’s fourth-quarter implicit price deflator (inflation measure) rose at an annualized rate of 2.41%, revised lower from the previously estimated 2.65%, and versus a 1.03% rate in the third quarter. The lowered inflation rate was needed in order to prevent a downward revision to the 0.6% annualized real GDP growth rate. Artificially-low inflation, when used in deflating the GDP, results in an overstatement of the inflation-adjusted GDP growth. This is a standard reporting gimmick for the series.

The most recent report included alternate GDP measures for the fourth quarter, estimates of Gross National Product (GNP), where GDP is GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments), and Gross Domestic Income (GDI), which is the theoretical income-side equivalent to the GDP’s consumption-side measure.

Annualized real quarter-to-quarter GNP in the fourth quarter was reported up by 1.9%, following a 0.6% increase in third quarter. Year-to-year growth was 3.1% in the fourth quarter versus 3.2% in the third quarter.

As discussed in the Opening Comments, annualized real quarter-to-quarter GDI in the fourth quarter showed an annualized contraction of 1.0%, following a 1.2% increase in third quarter. Year-to-year growth was 1.1% in the fourth quarter. The distortions here are suggestive of the manipulation rampant in the more widely followed GDP number.

General background note: Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS-Alternate GDP measure suggests that economic reality is much weaker than officially reported. A fourth-quarter year-to-year contraction of roughly 2.3% would have been more in line with underlying fundamentals, past methodologies and the ongoing recession (see the graph in the Alternate Realities section of the Opening Comments). Such reflects some bottom-bouncing with the annual contraction little changed from the SGS-Alternate GDP third-quarter estimate.

General background note: Although the GDP report is the government’s broadest estimate of U.S. economic activity, it is also the least meaningful and most heavily massaged of all major government economic series. Published by the BEA, it primarily has become a tool for economic propaganda.

Next Release (April 30): As discussed in the opening comments, based on underlying fundamentals, the "advance" estimate of annualized quarterly real GDP growth for first-quarter 2008 should show a clear quarterly contraction. Yet, political suggestions and market expectations suggest another quarter of weak growth, and the political needs appear very likely to win out here.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) — As discussed in the April 16th Flash Update, energy and food costs in the CPI once again were held artificially low against common experience. With gasoline reported up just 1.3% in March, following a 2.0% contraction in February, the new numbers did not even offset the prior month’s understatement. Food prices reportedly gained just 0.2% in March, following February’s 0.4% increase. Again, even allowing for the BLS’s current reporting methodologies, reported inflation is moving ever lower versus common experience. In like manner, the ongoing inability of energy costs to impact the "non-core" inflation reporting belies common sense and common experience. Oil prices as they relate to the CPI are discussed in this month’s Reporting/Market Focus.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported the seasonally-adjusted March CPI-U (I.6) gained 0.34% (0.87% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, versus the "virtually unchanged" gain of 0.03% (up 0.29% unadjusted) in February. March’s annual CPI inflation eased minimally to 3.98% from February’s 4.03%.

Year-to-year annual inflation would resume its upturn in April 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the 0.32% monthly increase seen in April 2007. The difference would directly add to or subtract from March’s annual inflation rate of 3.98%.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) (I.5) — the substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by the manipulators and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — was 3.55% in March, down from 3.69% in February,

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology (I.7), annual CPI growth held at 7.3% in March, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (I.8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, held at roughly 11.6%. The alternate numbers are not adjusted for near-term manipulations of the data. The eight levels of annual inflation, I.1 to I.8, are detailed in the table in the Alternate Realities section, along with the graph of SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation.

Next Release (May 14): Monthly April CPI inflation should rise sharply, if the depressed energy and food prices reported in February and March are allowed to show anything close to a realistic catch-up. If seasonally-adjusted monthly CPI inflation for April exceeds 0.32%, which it should, then annual CPI inflation will increase by the difference. Fundamental reporting risks generally favor an upside surprise to market expectations, but targeted manipulation, as has been seen recently, remains of high risk.

 

 Other Troubled Key Series

Federal Deficit — The rolling 12-month deficit through March 2008 stood at $215.8 billion versus $203.7 billion in March 2007, compared with the rolling 12-month deficit through February 2008, which stood at $263.9 billion against $192.7 billion in February 2007.

Viewing the change in gross federal debt bypasses several of the regular reporting manipulations and is a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the official, gimmicked deficit reporting. Gross federal debt stood at $9.438 trillion at the end of March 2008, up $80 billion for the month and up $588 billion from March 2008, which in turn was up $479 billion from March 2006. Gross federal debt stood at $9.358 trillion at the end of February 2008, up $120 billion for the month and up $580 billion from February 2007, which in turn was up $508 billion from February 2006.

There is substantial evidence developing of weaker than anticipated tax collections at both the federal and state levels, due to the deepening recession. Such has negative implications both for the deficit and for U.S. Treasury funding needs.

General background note: The federal government’s fiscal 2007 (year-ended September 30th) official accounting-gimmicked deficit narrowed to $162.8 billion from $248.2 billion in 2006. For fiscal year-end 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $9.007 trillion, up by $500 billion from 2006, which was up $574 billion from 2005. As discussed in the December 2007 SGS Newsletter’s Reporting/Market Focus, the GAAP-based deficit for fiscal-year 2007 topped $4 trillion, which remains my best estimate at this time.

General background note: The Bush Administration now projects a gimmicked deficit of $410 billion for fiscal 2008, up from $163 billion in 2007. With no allowance for a recession in the assumptions underlying the deficit projections (the Administration forecasts real 2008 GDP growth at 2.7%), the final 2008 numbers should be much worse than the current Administration estimates. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and have started to reflect the economy’s mounting problems.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance — The trend in annual growth continued to deteriorate at an accelerating pace. On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended April 17th, annual growth rose to 9.9%, up from 6.4% in the 17 weeks ended March 8th. A rising growth trend in new claims is an economic negative.

General background note: More often than not, week-to-week volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly claims numbers is due to the Labor Department’s efforts to seasonally adjust these numbers around holiday periods. The Labor Department has demonstrated an inability to do such adjusting successfully. When the new claims series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings — March’s seasonally-adjusted monthly real earnings rose by 0.2%, thanks again to the unbelievably low CPI inflation reported for the month. The March number followed an unrevised 0.3% monthly increase in February. Annual change in March, however, deepened to a 1.0% contraction, from February’s unrevised 0.8% contraction.

General background note: Gyrations in the poor quality of reported CPI growth account for most month-to-month volatility in this series. Adjusting for the major upside biases built into the CPI-W inflation measure used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series shows the average worker to be under severe financial stress in an ongoing structuralrecession (see the Hyperinflation Special Report of April 8, 2008).

Retail Sales — As discussed and graphed in the Opening Comments, real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales again is confirming a deepening recession in place, with the year-to-year real change in the three-month moving average version of the series turning more negative, and with real quarter-to-quarter contractions intensifying.

As discussed in the April 16th Flash Update, the Census Bureau reported seasonally-adjusted March retail sales increased by 0.15% (up 0.32% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), following a revised 0.36% (previously 0.56%) monthly decline in February. On a year-to-year basis, March retail sales rose 1.97% versus a revised 2.92% (previously 2.58%) in February. The real monthly change continued negative, and the real annual change continued to show a deepening contraction.

Core Retail Sales. Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — were unchanged (plus 0.01%) in March, against the official 0.2% (0.15%) gain, following a revised 0.34% (0.36% official) decline in February. "Core" retail sales turned negative year-to-year, down 0.37% for much, following 0.66% gain in February.

Next Release (May 13 - Benchmark Revisions April 30): Underlying fundamentals suggest ongoing weakness and a likely weaker than expected showing for April retail sales. The monthly and annual changes should continue underwater, after inflation adjustment, consistent with an ongoing recession. Benchmark revisions should show historically weaker retail sales.

Industrial Production – As expected, the benchmark revision lowered historic production levels, with an overall downward revision to February 2008’s index level of 1.8%. The bulk of the downside adjustment was in 2006, when the current recession likely saw its first actual quarterly GDP contraction. Fully reflecting the revisions and March 2008 reporting, seasonally-adjusted first-quarter 2008 industrial production contracted at an annualized 0.1%, after a revamped 0.4% gain (previously a contraction) in fourth-quarter 2007. Manufacturing production fell at an annualized 0.5% in both quarters. 

The quarterly contraction in production may give the NBER its second timing point for calling the current recession, with the first timing point being set by payroll employment reporting

As discussed in the April 16th Flash Update, seasonally-adjusted March industrial production gained 0.3% for the month, after a 0.7% decline in February, with annual production up 1.6% from the year before, versus a 1.1% annual gain in February. The series is showing unusual volatility tied to weather and possibly to systemic support manipulations.

Next Release (May 15): The April production numbers should resume a pattern of ongoing monthly contractions, with the erratic but generally slowing annual growth shortly turning negative. Such would be consistent with the manufacturing contractions signaled by the purchasing managers survey. 

New Orders for Durable Goods — The usually volatile durable goods put in another recessionary performance in March, with new orders falling by a seasonally-adjusted 0.3% (a gain of 0.7% net of revisions), following a revised February decline of 0.9% (previously a drop of 1.7%). On a year-to-year basis, March’s new orders fell by 4.2% versus a 5.5% gain (previously 4.3%) in February. Smoothed using a six-month moving average, annual growth (net of inflation) remained negative and an ongoing recession signal. Average seasonally-adjusted first-quarter new orders contracted at an annualized pace of 8.5% from the fourth quarter, even before adjusting for inflation.

The closely followed nondefense capital goods new orders rose by 1.5% (2.9% net of revisions) in March, after easing by 0.3% (previously down by 1.0%) in February. March’s year-to-year change was a decline of 3.3%, following a 14.1% increase in February.

General background note: Durable goods orders lost its status as a solid leading economic indicator when the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders in 2002.

Trade Balance — As discussed in the April 14th Flash Update, despite significant continued understatement of oil imports (average oil import price was up to $84.76 per barrel in February from $84.09 in January), the seasonally-adjusted February 2008 trade deficit widened to $62.2 billion from a revised $59.0 billion (previously $58.2 billion) in January.

Such was enough beyond market expectations to dampen first-quarter GDP growth, with a quarterly deterioration now likely in the real (inflation-adjusted) next-exports account.

Next Release (May 9): Underlying reality (including sharply rising oil prices) favors further sharp deterioration in the monthly March trade deficit, but the government can play games with this series as long as it wants to play them. Given the potential impact of the series on otherwise shaky currency markets and on GDP reporting, realistic numbers still may not be seen for some time come.

Consumer Confidence — March consumer confidence numbers continued to tumble, and the April reading on consumer sentiment continued in the same trend. For March 2008, the Conference Board Confidence measure plunged by 15.6% for the month, after falling by 12.5% (previously 14.1%) in February. March’s year-to-year change was down by 40.4%, following February’s 31.3% annual decline.

The Reuters/University of Michigan Sentiment measure plunged by 9.9% in April, following declines of 1.9% in March and 9.7% in February. April’s year-to-year decline also continued to deepen, down by 38.1%, following March’s 21.4% decline and February’s 19.7% decline. These lagging, not leading, indicators tend to reflect the tone of the popular financial media and are fully consistent with an ongoing and deteriorating inflationary-recession.

General background note: The Conference Board measure is seasonally adjusted, which can provide occasional, but significant distortion. The adjustment does not make much sense and is of suspect purpose, given that the Conference Board does not release the unadjusted number. The Reuters/Michigan survey is unadjusted. How does one seasonally-adjust peoples’ attitudes? Also, beware the mid-month Consumer Sentiment release from Reuters/University of Michigan. The sampling base is so small as to be virtually valueless in terms of statistical significance.

Short-Term Credit Measures — Annual growth in commercial borrowing continued to reflect mixed pressures from the banking system’s solvency crisis. The declining annual growth for commercial paper outstanding has been offset partially by growth in commercial and industrial bank loans. Consumer credit numbers continue to show softness in annual growth, against upwardly revised annual growth rates.

For seasonally-adjusted consumer credit, which includes credit cards and auto loans, but not mortgages, annual growth was reported at 5.8% in February, against 5.8% (previously 4.5%) in January and against 5.7% (previously 4.1%) in December. In the current environment, where inflation-adjusted growth in income is not adequate to support meaningful growth in the personal consumption component of GDP, GDP growth only can come from temporary debt expansion or savings liquidation. Accordingly, stagnating growth in consumer debt expansion remains an ongoing constraint on economic growth.

Ongoing large revisions in the consumer credit series confirm the Fed’s inability to track bank activities accurately, on a timely basis. Similar issues are evident in the Fed’s quarterly flow-of-founds accounting for the banking system and, to a certain extent, are an exacerbating factor in the current solvency crisis.

Commercial borrowing growth varied sharply, once more. Annual change in March commercial paper outstanding showed a 10.4% contraction, versus a 9.1% contraction February and a 6.0% contraction in January. In contrast, annual growth in March commercial and industrial loans rose by 20.9%, versus 20.3% in February and 21.06% in January. The relative instability in commercial paper is ongoing but somewhat abated, with resultant credit difficulties continuing to inhibit broad business activity and continuing to disrupt banking system stability.

Producer Price Index (PPI) — As discussed in the April 16th Flash Update, the seasonally-adjusted March finished goods PPI rose by 1.1% (1.9% unadjusted), versus February’s 0.3% (0.2% unadjusted) gain. Annual PPI inflation for March rose to 6.9% from 6.4% in February. Seasonally-adjusted intermediate and crude goods in March rose by 2.3% and 8.0%, respectively, against February’s 0.8% and 3.7% increases.

The relationship between changes in oil prices and the PPI are explored in this month’s Reporting/Market Focus. As has been the case for a number of months, the impact of food and energy, by themselves and as felt throughout broad segments of economic activity, remain seriously understated.

Next Release (May 20): Given what appears to have been deliberate understatements of the February and March CPI and PPI inflation rates, the PPI could be subject to further understatement, or could face a catch-up rebound in April, in response to growing questions as to the accuracy of current inflation reporting. With the latter case eventually likely to prevail, and allowing for the regular random volatility of the monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months generally should favor official results coming in well above market expectations, as the effects of oil prices increasingly permeate the broad economy.

  

Better-Quality Numbers

General background note: The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders — The March 2008 manufacturing index remained in recession territory for the second month, notching higher to 48.6 from 48.3 in February. While the Institute for Supply Management (ISM) uses an index reading of 41.1 (in its recently reformulated index) as the break point between recession in the broad economy and expansion, a reading below 50.0 means a contracting manufacturing sector. The 50.0 mark works out still as a solid broad recession signal in my analyses.

The various components of the ISM composite indices are diffusion indices, which are calculated as the percent of positive responses from the ISM survey plus one-half of the neutral or unchanged responses. Hence, a reading below 50.0 indicates a contracting series.

The March new orders index showed a deepening contraction, falling to 46.5 from 49.1 in February. The new orders index has been in actual contraction now since December 2007. Distortions from the seasonal factors calculated by the Department of Commerce can be minimized by viewing the series using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the March new orders index fell by 8.9%, following a 9.5% decline in February. The new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The measure gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 35.5% in April of 2004. As an SGS early warning indicator of a major economic shift, new orders breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, signaling pending recession.

Also of significance, the manufacturing employment component remained in recession territory at 49.2 in March, versus 46.0 in February.

Service Sector Composite Index. This series does not have much meaning related to overall business activity, since new order activity at law firms, dentists, hospitals or fast-food restaurants has little obvious relationship to broad economic activity. With that as background, the March services composite index remained below 50.0, at 49.6 versus 49.3 in February.

Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. Covering the real estate and banking industries, among others, the March employment component remained in contraction territory, holding at 46.9 for the second month. The prices paid component is covered in the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) — As discussed and graphed in the Opening Comments, the Conference Board’s seasonally-adjusted March help-wanted advertising index fell to a record low of 19, the lowest reading since the index was first calculated at the end of President Harry Truman’s term in office.

The March reading was down from 21in February and from 22 in January. Year-to-year change was down 34.5% in March, versus 32.2% in February, with the annual change in the three-month moving average falling by 31.9% versus a 31.2% decline in February. Despite some of the historic weakness in the series being due to the loss of newspaper business to the Internet, the HWA is a solid leading indicator to the broad economy and to the monthly employment report, and it remains indicative of an ongoing, severe deepening in an ongoing recession.

Where the HWA series does not include a measure of on-line advertising, recent indices developed to measure Internet activity have serious definitional problems and still are too young to be meaningful indicators. That said, the Conference Board has reported that annual growth in its on-line measure of help-wanted advertising showed its first year-to-year decline in March (the series was started in May 2006).

Housing Starts — The highly volatile housing numbers continued bottom-bouncing, with March’s seasonally-adjusted housing starts down by 11.9% (down 11.1% net of revisions) +/- 13% (95% confidence interval). This followed a revised monthly decline for February of 0.7% (previously down 0.6%). March’s year-to-year decline widened to 36.5% from a revised 27.7% (was 28.4%) in February, still shy of the 48.6% annual decline seen at the trough of the 1990/1991 recession.

March’s building permits were down 5.8% for the month and 40.9% for the year, against a revised 7.3% (previously 7.8%) monthly decline in February. March new home sales fell by 8.5% month-to-month and by 36.6% year-to-year, following revised respective February declines of 5.3% (was 1.8%) and 31.5% (was 29.8%).

Existing home sales appear to be picking up some upside distortion from mounting foreclosure sales, as discussed in the Flash Update of March 30th. That said, March existing home sales fell by 2.0% month-to-month and by 19.3% year-to-year, following a revised February monthly gain of 2.9% and annual decline of 23.8%.

Also, as discussed in the March 30th Flash Update, there is a large problem as to the use and meaning of sales price data published with both the new and existing sales reports. The reported prices reflect only the mix of those homes that are selling, not the reported sales prices of a constant piece of real estate priced to varying market conditions. If low-priced homes are selling more easily than high priced ones, and such were the reverse of the year before, then a decline in the year-to-year average price would reflect shifting market mix, not the relative drop in the price of the same piece of real estate in the same market, year-to-year.

Inflation Indicators

Money Supply — Annual growth in the seasonally-adjusted SGS-Ongoing M3 is estimated at a record-high 17.4%, up from 17.0% in February, with worrisome implications for a surge in monetary inflation. Outside of the last several months, the prior historic high of 16.4% was seen in June of 1971, prior to President Nixon closing the gold window and imposing wage and price controls. The latest estimates include significant benchmark and accounting revisions published by the Fed during the last month.

For March 2008, annual growth for monthly M1 was an annual gain of 0.2% for the second month, where pre-benchmark revision reporting had the series showing small annual contractions. March M2 annual growth surged anew to 7.0% from 6.6% in February.

Early April reporting, however, has shown some sharp slowing in growth for M2 and the non-M2 components of M3. If the current trends continue, the annual growth in the April average of the SGS-Ongoing M3 could slow to below 17%.

 

               Shadow Government Statistics Ongoing M3 (r)
    (Estimated seasonally-adjusted monthly average, $ Trillions)

 

Feb 06

10.315

 

Sep 06

10.854

 

Apr 07

11.717

 

Nov 07

12.823

 

Mar

10.367

 

Oct

10.980

 

May

11.868

 

Dec

12.931

 

Apr

10.425

 

Nov

11.097

 

Jun

11.947

 

Jan 08

13.088

 

May

10.504

 

Dec

11.230

 

Jul

12.053

 

Feb

13.388

 

Jun

10.575

 

Jan 07

11.320

 

Aug

12.258

 

Mar (p)

13.574

 

Jul

10.673

 

Feb

11.441

 

Sep

12.439

 

 

 

 

Aug

10.757

 

Mar

11.565

 

Oct

12.648

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(r) Revised, based on Federal Reserve benchmark revisions and accounting redefinitions to underlying series. (p) Preliminary.     

NOTE OF CAUTION: The estimates of monthly levels best are used for comparisons with other dollar amounts, such as nominal GDP. While the estimates are based on seasonally-adjusted Federal Reserve data, great significance cannot be read into the month-to-month changes, as was the case when the Fed published the series. The most meaningful way to view the data is in terms of year-to-year change.

 



 

 

General background note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimates, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS Newsletter for methodology. The indicated M3 levels are our best estimate and are provided at specific subscriber request. Keep in mind that regular revisions in the related Fed series affect historical M3. Usually, annual growth rates hold, although levels may shift a little. We have not attempted, nor do we plan to recreate a revised historical series for an M3 monthly-average level going back in time. The purpose of the SGS series was and is to provide monthly estimates of ongoing annual M3 growth. We are comfortable with those numbers and that our estimated monthly growth rates are reasonably close to what the Fed would be reporting, if it still reported M3.

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices — The March 2008 prices paid indices surged anew in both the purchasing managers composite surveys. The indices continued to reflect upside inflation pressures from a variety of factors, including high oil prices and a weaker U.S. dollar, and they continued to signal broad inflation problems ahead.

On the manufacturing side, the March price index exploded to 83.5 from 75.5 in February. On a three-month moving average basis, though, March’s 32.4% year-to-year gain was slightly weaker than February’s 37.6%. The manufacturing price indicator is not seasonally adjusted and, therefore, is generally the better indicator of pricing activity.

On the non-manufacturing side, the seasonally-adjusted March prices diffusion index rose to 70.8 from 67.9 in February. On a three-month moving-average basis, March’s annual gain was 21.1% versus 24.5% in February.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflationary pressure. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising prices.

Oil Prices – With oil currently trading around $120 per barrel, the implications for inflation and real GDP growth remain ominous for the balance of 2008. The strong relationship between oil price changes and broad inflation is examined in this month’s Reporting/ Market Focus.

April’s monthly average price appears likely to come in near $113 per barrel (up roughly 77% year-to-year and 7.0% month-to-month), topping the record-high just set in March. For March 2008, the monthly-average West Texas Intermediate spot price (St. Louis Fed) rose 10.7% to $105.56 per barrel, up from February’s $95.35. Against last year’s average, March’s level was up by 74.3%, compared with February’s 60.9%.

As of Friday, April 25th, West Texas Intermediate closed at $121.57 per barrel, spot, yet another record high, and up by 86.7% from the year before. Oil price movement remains highly volatile, but generally should continue to trend higher and set new highs in the months ahead, despite a deepening U.S. recession and possible global recession. Irrespective of how high oil prices may go, or how much they may fall back in short-lived profit taking, current prices are well above levels that already have put debilitating U.S. inflation into play.

Regardless of any near-term price swings, meaningful upside risks to oil prices remain in place, with lagging impact from the still-unfolding dollar catastrophe (see the Oil vs. Financial-Weighted Dollar graph in the Opening Comments section), ongoing OPEC actions and rumblings, increasingly volatile Middle Eastern tensions, mounting political tensions in South America, and other supply and demand issues.

General background note: In the United States, high oil prices have spiked and will continue to spike basic inflation, and even the gimmicked "core" inflation measures — net of changes in food and energy prices — are beginning to inch higher. Historically high oil prices still are working their way through all levels of U.S. economic activity, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. These broad inflationary pressures will remain intact despite any near-term oil price swings, and "core" inflation eventually should catch-up with full inflation reporting (see this month’s Reporting/Market Focus).

 

 Reporting/Market Focus

Oil Prices Impact Inflation, Despite Wall Street’s Wishful Thinking

With the financial markets largely ignoring oil prices as they push above $120 per barrel, and with current CPI and PPI inflation numbers not fully reflecting the surge in oil prices, it is worth a look at the historical relationship between oil prices and official inflation reporting. It is not likely that what is happening to energy costs will pass unnoticed by consumers or, for that matter, eventually by the financial markets.

Following are three sets of graphs that plot year-to-year change in the price of oil versus various official measures of the consumer price index (CPI-U) and the producer price index (PPI finished goods). The first set of graphs shows annual oil inflation versus annual CPI and PPI inflation, the second shows oil versus annual CPI and PPI energy inflation, and the third shows oil versus annual CPI and PPI inflation ex-energy. The plot of annual oil inflation in each graph has been shifted ahead by the number of months that best shows the overall correlation of oil with the various CPI/PPI measures.

The relationship of oil versus the full CPI and the full PPI reflects the combination of the energy and ex-energy sub-indices, but it is dominated by the energy indices. Visually, there is a fair correlation between annual inflation in oil and annual inflation in the CPI, with the movement in oil tending to be followed two months later by movement in the CPI. The same is true with the PPI, but with a one-month lead time between oil price movements and finished goods inflation. The difference in timing makes some sense, where the PPI supposedly has something of a leading relationship to the CPI.

As could be expected, the CPI and PPI energy measures tend to move most closely with oil, lagging the change in oil inflation by one month, with something close to an 80% correlation.

Perhaps the most interesting graphs are those of oil versus the ex-energy CPI and PPI measures. Where oil price changes affect nearly all levels of U.S. economic activity, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc., eventually these quasi-core inflation measures (food prices are not backed out) should reflect changes in the price of oil.

As shown in the ex-energy graphs, oil price movements tended to explain about 60% of core (ex-energy only) CPI inflation with a six-month lead time, up into the early 1990s. The oil effect has continued in more recent years, but with a muted impact. Against ex-energy PPI, the lead time works out to about 11 months, but the correlation is weaker and the lead time more volatile.

Part of the explanation for the "muted" impact of oil price swings on core CPI is that a dollar’s worth of GDP has become less dependent on oil over time, thanks to increased operating efficiencies and the shifting of GDP away from a manufacturing- to a services-based economy. The muting, however, also may have roots in the various methodical shifts in inflation reporting of the last decade or so, which is being explored further. 

The shown relationships are far from precise and are subject to reporting needs of the moment. The variability in lead time between oil price movement and reflection in official CPI and PPI is great. As a rough guide, on average, surging oil prices in April should have their greatest impact on May PPI and June CPI, with "core" inflation showing some upside reaction in late 2008 into early 2009.

 

 

 

Next Month’s Reporting/Market Focus

For the next month or two, the newsletter’s Reporting/Market Focus will continue to be based on factors deemed of significance to the evolving economic, market and financial-system conditions.

 

___________________________________________

PLEASE NOTE: The next SGS Newsletter is targeted for around May 26th. Intervening Flash Updates and Alerts will continue to be posted in response to key economic or financial-market developments.

Earlier editions of the SGS Newsletter, referenced in the text, can be found on the Archives tab at www.shadowstats.com.

OCCASIONALLY, BRIEF UPDATES ARE COMMUNICATED DIRECTLY BY E-MAIL. IF YOU ARE NOT RECEIVING E-MAIL COMMUNICATIONS FROM US, PLEASE LET US KNOW at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or by using the "Feedback" option on www.shadowstats.com.

 

 

 

 

 

Flash Update

Wednesday, April 23rd, 2008

 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

April 23, 2008

__________

Is The First-Quarter GDP Fix In?

Oil Prices Cannot Double Without Serious Consequences

__________

 

Please Note: In response to the recent, intensified surge in oil prices, the Reporting/Market Focus in the pending SGS Newsletter will review the historical relationship between oil prices and inflation, business activity and the financial markets. As a result, new research and analysis have pushed the posting of the next newsletter to over the coming weekend, likely on Monday, April 28th.
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Reality of Inflation Reporting Deteriorates Markedly

No Recession!?! When President Bush declares, "We’re not in a recession, we’re in a slowdown [Reuters, April 22]," it is almost a sure bet that the "advance" estimate of first-quarter GDP growth — due for release next Wednesday (April 30th) — will not show a contraction. By law, neither the White House nor the Fed is supposed to get an advance look at the GDP data until after the markets close on April 29th, but political practicality prevents the President or the Fed chairman from being embarrassed by data surprises. Those data surprises most certainly never occur when the numbers are being massaged to meet political or financial-market needs. In any event, the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) already has a pretty good idea of what it will be reporting.

As will be shown in the upcoming newsletter, for first-quarter 2008, there is solid evidence of a strong quarter-to-quarter contraction in inflation-adjusted personal consumption and residential construction, which account for roughly 75% of GDP. Business investment (about 12% of GDP) also appears to have contracted in the quarter. That leaves open the potential offsetting economic gains in government consumption, inventory build-up and or improvement in the trade deficit (which actually appears to have deteriorated in the first quarter) to generate positive GDP growth. Whatever gimmicks are used, artificially-low inflation likely will be involved (despite reported first-quarter CPI rising at an annualized 4.3%). Where the GDP growth rate is reported net of inflation, deflating the nominal numbers by a too-low inflation rate results in a too-high real (inflation-adjusted) growth rate.

For fourth-quarter 2007 GDP, annualized real growth was 0.6%. What was remarkable about that number — given that the first report is 90%-plus a guesstimate — is that not only did the "advance" estimate match consensus forecasts exactly, but also that the two subsequent revisions also held at 0.6%. Despite the consensus usually missing the mark on economic data, the BEA tries to target the consensus number in its reporting, at least in its first or "advance" quarterly GDP estimate. Also, subsequent revisions usually are relatively large, as better underlying data become available.

Consensus forecasts for the first-quarter’s annualized GDP growth rate currently are around 0.4%. If the BEA confirms the consensus forecasters’ prescience, once again, such would show a 95% confidence interval around that 0.4% gain of roughly +/- 3%. Such a gain — as with the fourth-quarter’s GDP growth rate — would not be statistically distinguishable from a contraction.    

Unfortunately, the GDP series has been so gutted of reporting integrity over time that it remains little but political propaganda. If the GDP growth rate remains positive in the first quarter, the spinmeisters on Wall Street will have a good time explaining how the economy dodged a bullet.

Oil Prices Nearly Have Doubled in Last Year. With crude oil pushing $120 per barrel, prices are up more than 90% from a year ago. Such means significantly higher consumer inflation over the next six months and intensified selling pressure on the U.S. dollar. Given limits on consumers’ disposable income and constraints on further consumer debt expansion, rising inflation should be reflected in weaker real economic activity (as in a GDP contraction). The environment and underlying fundamentals remain highly bullish for gold, and it is hard to believe that the real-world implications of what is happening will not have some negative impact on Wall Street.

While the oil market remains highly volatile, the long-term trend in oil prices should remain strongly to the upside, despite any near-term profit taking. Some of the likely effects of the current circumstance will be quantified in the upcoming newsletter.

__________

 

Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government intervention, particularly in the currency and gold markets, and ongoing systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged.

Publication of the next regular newsletter is targeted for around Monday, April 28th, with any intervening Flash Updates and Alerts posted as needed. All postings will be

Flash Update

Wednesday, April 16th, 2008
 
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
April 16, 2008
__________

 Inflation Fantasy

Real Retail Sales Contracted an Annualized 4.2% in First Quarter

First-Quarter GDP Contraction Locked In?

 __________

 Please Note: The SGS-Alternate CPI will be updated later today on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com, as will be the Inflation Calculator.
–Best wishes to all, John Williams
 

 

Production, Retail Sales, Housing and Trade Deficit Indicate First-Quarter GDP Contraction

Despite today’s understated March inflation rate, inflation-adjusted, first-quarter 2008 retail sales fell at an annualized quarterly rate of 4.2%, following a 1.3% contraction in the fourth quarter, and a 0.9% gain in the third quarter. Other reporting today showed a 0.1% annualized quarterly contraction in first-quarter industrial production (down 0.5% in manufacturing production) and a 34.5% annualized contraction in first-quarter housing starts (versus a 38.6% annualized contraction in the fourth quarter). With the February trade deficit also indicating likely deterioration for the first quarter, it should be difficult for the Bureau of Economic Analysis to avoid reporting a quarterly contraction in real (inflation-adjusted) first-quarter GDP. Nonetheless, prior GDP fantasies put out by the Bureau of Economic Analysis have been almost as creative as those used in the current CPI underreporting. Indeed, the Administration has the wherewithal to fabricate GDP growth, if it so chooses. The "advance" estimate of first-quarter GDP growth is due out on April 30th. 

On the inflation front, with oil prices still pushing to record highs, with food supply crises spiking food prices, with the dollar still near its all-time low, and with annual M3 growth at an all-time high, the prospects for a let-up in actual inflation pressures, due to recession (already felt) or otherwise, remain close to nil.

CPI Nonsense. Once again, energy and food costs in the CPI were held artificially low against common experience. With seasonally-adjusted gasoline prices reported up just 1.3% in March, following a 2.0% contraction in February, the new numbers did not even offset the prior month’s understatement, per the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). Food prices reportedly gained just 0.2% in March, following February’s 0.4% increase. Again, even allowing for problems with the BLS’s current reporting methodologies, reported inflation is moving away from common experience at an accelerating pace. In like manner, the ongoing apparent inability of energy costs to impact the reported "core" inflation numbers belies common sense and common experience.

The patterns of underreported non-core inflation again were consistent with the March retail sales report (see Flash Update of April 14th). Nonetheless, real retail sales contracted on a monthly, quarterly and annual basis, per the official inflation accounting.

As gimmicked, the BLS reported that the seasonally-adjusted March CPI-U was up by 0.34% (0.87% unadjusted) +/- 0.12%, versus the "virtually unchanged" gain of 0.03% (up 0.29% unadjusted) in February. March’s annual CPI inflation eased minimally to 3.98%, from February’s 4.03%.

Year-to-year annual inflation would resume its upturn in April 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the 0.32% monthly increase seen in April 2007. The difference would directly add to or subtract from March’s annual inflation rate of 3.98%.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) — the substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by the manipulators and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — was up by 3.55% in March, off February’s 3.69% annual inflation pace.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth held at about 7.3% in March, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, held at roughly 11.6%. The alternate numbers are not adjusted for near-term political manipulations of the data.

PPI Inflation Also Remains Understated. The seasonally-adjusted March finished goods Producer Price Index (PPI) reportedly rose by 1.1% (1.9% unadjusted), versus February’s 0.3% (0.2% unadjusted) gain. Annual PPI inflation for March was 6.9%, up from 6.4% in February. Seasonally-adjusted intermediate and crude goods in March rose by 2.3% and 8.0% for the month, respectively, versus February’s 0.8% and 3.7% increases. As with the CPI, the impact of food and energy costs, by themselves, and as felt throughout broad segments of economic activity, remain seriously underreported.

Housing Starts Weaken. The Census Bureau reported that seasonally-adjusted March new home sales fell by 11.6% (11.1% net of revisions) for the month, down 36.5% year-to-year, versus a revised 0.7% (was 0.6%) monthly decline in February, and a revised annual drop of 27.7% (was 28.4%). With first-quarter starts down at an annualized 34.5%, the industry remains in severe contraction.

Industrial Production Contracts in First Quarter. After a benchmark revision that lowered historic production levels, seasonally-adjusted first-quarter 2008 industrial production contracted at an annualized 0.1% after a revamped 0.4% gain (previously a contraction) in fourth-quarter 2007. Manufacturing production fell at an annualized 0.5% in both quarters. Seasonally-adjusted March industrial production gained 0.3% for the month, after a 0.7% decline in February, with annual production up 1.6% from the year before, versus a 1.1% annual gain in February. The series is showing unusual volatility tied to weather and possibly to systemic support manipulations.

The various economic data will be reported on more fully in the upcoming mid-April newsletter.

 __________

Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government intervention and systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged.

Publication of the next regular newsletter is targeted for around Monday, April 21st, with intervening Flash Updates and Alerts posted as needed. All postings will be advised by e-mail.

Flash Update

Monday, April 14th, 2008
 
 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

April 14, 2008

__________

March "Core" Retail Sales Unchanged for Month, Down Year-to-Year

Trade Data Enhance Prospects for 1st-Quarter GDP Contraction

__________

 Please Note: The SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate has been updated for full-month reporting and the latest Federal Reserve data revisions, available on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com.
–Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Annual Real Retail Sales Growth Sinks Deeper into Recession, Down About 2%

The financial markets remain highly vulnerable when they can get bounced around sharply by poor-quality analysis of secondary economic statistics, as has happened in the last week or two. New claims for unemployment insurance usually show sharp week-to-week volatility when the reporting period (or the one preceding) covers a holiday or quasi-holiday such as Good Friday. While the Department of Labor reports the claims data as seasonally adjusted, those adjustments invariably do not work well. In like manner, same store annual sales are not adjusted for holiday or trading day variations in comparative months. In 2007, Easter was in April, but in 2008 it fell in March. Accordingly, March’s "stronger than expected sales" were inflated by the earlier Easter shopping, as was confirmed in the softening rate of annual growth reported in this morning’s seasonally-adjusted March retail sales release.

Retail Sales Increasingly Suffer Net of Inflation. The Census Bureau reported seasonally-adjusted March retail sales increased by 0.15% (up 0.32% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), following a revised 0.36% (previously 0.56%) monthly decline in February. On a year-to-year basis, March retail sales rose 1.97% versus a revised 2.92% (previously 2.58%) in February. The real (inflation-adjusted) monthly change should be negative, while the real annual change continued to show a deepening contraction, down by roughly 2%.

Core Retail Sales. Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — were unchanged (plus 0.01%) in March, against the official 0.2% (0.15%) gain, following a revised 0.34% (0.36% official) decline in February. "Core" retail sales turned negative year-to-year, down 0.37% for March, following a 0.66% gain in February.

CPI Implications.Although increasing once more — after unbelievable monthly declines in February — food and energy price inflation rates for March (roughly 0.3% and 1.1% respectively), implied by the retail sales numbers, still were unbelievably tepid, but they generally were consistent with the soft consensus expectation of 0.3% for Wednesday’s (April 16th) release of March CPI.

Trade Deficit Surges. Despite significant continued understatement of oil imports (average import price was up to $84.76 per barrel in February from $84.09 in January), the seasonally-adjusted February 2008 trade deficit widened to $62.2 billion from a revised $59.0 billion (previously $58.2 billion) in January. Such was enough beyond market expectations to put a damper on first-quarter estimates of GDP growth. With growing official and market talk of a recession, the Administration appears increasingly willing to accept a first-quarter contraction in real GDP. Such, however, remains counter to usual political practice in an election year, and the Bureau of Economic Analysis remains able to bring in reported GDP growth at any level desired (report due April 30th).

March M3 Growth at 17.4%. Incorporating full reporting for March and large revisions just published for M2, annual growth in the average SGS-Ongoing M3 rose to a record 17.4%, from an upwardly revised 17.2% (was 17.0%) in February. With account balances shifting between categories in the various Ms, M2 growth now is slightly weaker than previously reported, up by 7.0% in March, from 6.7% in February, while annual M1 growth has revised into positive territory, up by 0.2% in both March and February.  

Hyperinflation Special Report Errata. The currently posted text for the Hyperinflation Special Report of April 8th has been updated to correct several typos and to revise the text on page 21 as to gasoline pumps not able to pump more than $50 of gas at one time. Indeed, as pointed out by a subscriber, that limit is related primarily to credit card security polices, not to the physical limitations of the pumps. The corrected text reads:

While I have been advised that a number of businesses have accounting software that can handle any number of digits, I also noted on a recent cross-country trip that a large number of gas stations have older pumps that cannot register more than two digits’ worth of dollars in their totals or more than $9.99 per gallon of gas.

Week Ahead. The March PPI and CPI readings, due for release respectively on Tuesday (April 15th) and Wednesday (April 16th), normally would be expected to be quite strong, topping currently soft expectations of roughly 0.4% and 0.3%. Such would be no more than minimal catch-up from the underreporting of food and energy prices in February, forgetting underlying fundamentals that add other upside reporting pressures. Nonetheless, the March retail sales report suggests continued underreporting in the non-core areas, and the Fed certainly would like to see low inflation numbers to counter its overt abandonment of trying to contain inflation.

Both March housing starts and industrial production, due on Wednesday (April 16th), should come in below consensus, with a deepening year-to-year contraction in housing and another month-to-month decline in industrial production.

The various economic data will be reported on more fully in the upcoming mid-April newsletter.

 

__________

 

Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government intervention and systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged.

Publication of the next regular newsletter is targeted for Monday, April 21st, with intervening Flash Updates and Alerts posted as needed. The next Flash Update is planned for Wednesday, April 16th, following release of the March CPI data

Flash Update

Friday, April 4th, 2008
 
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
April 4, 2008
__________

 

Heavily Gimmicked Payroll Contraction Was Much Worse in Reality

Other Key Data Also Confirm Sharply Deteriorating Inflationary Recession

__________

 Please Note: The March SGS Financial-Weighted Dollar and the March SGS-Alternate Unemployment Rate have been updated, and the preliminary SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate will be updated this weekend on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com.The Hyperinflation Special Issue should be posted by Monday, April 7th.
–Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

March Payroll Decline Easily Topped 120,000

When a Fed Chairman begins talking recession, a recession is in place. Chairman Bernanke’s comment on Wednesday that the U.S. economy "even could contract slightly" in the first half of 2008 was more reporting than a prognostication. He certainly had an advance idea of the March employment data that now show a decline in average first-quarter 2008 payrolls versus fourth-quarter 2007, where seasonally-adjusted March 2008 payrolls are down at an annualized 0.7% rate from December 2008.

Despite the bad news in the monthly jobs data, the reported numbers still were overly Pollyannaish, thanks to extreme gimmicking. As anticipated, the industrial production benchmark revisions showed considerably weaker economic activity than previously reported, while the purchasing managers survey again showed a deepening economic contraction and surging inflation.

Also on the inflation front, money supply M2 continued to surge in the latest weekly reporting (up at a seasonally-adjusted, annualized 24.3% in the week ended March 24th), with annual growth in March M3 now a fair bet to top 17.2%, up from the 16.9% historic high set in February. The money supply numbers will be updated over the coming weekend on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com, after tonight’s data releases.

Jobs Data Should Continue Fueling Recession Forecasts. The reported third consecutive decline in monthly payrolls, as of March, will do much to reinforce recession outlooks, but the data remain severely gimmicked, understating the monthly declines in payroll employment, thanks to the usual statistical shenanigans at the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). Net of gimmicks, the decline in payrolls and the rise in the unemployment rate were statistically significant.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 80,000 (a loss of 147,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for March 2008, following a revised 76,000 (previously 63,000) jobs loss in February. The prior period revisions, however, were stretched further back in time, likely aimed at muting the published revision to February changes. The revised February decline otherwise would have been 130,000. Although officially the March decline was statistically indistinguishable from a gain, the apparent decline net of gimmicks and revisions would be a statistically-significant contraction. Annual growth in total nonfarm payrolls slowed further to a recessionary 0.35% in March, from 0.59% in February. Annual payroll growth is likely to turn negative in the next month or two.

Bias Adjustment. One element boosting the numbers was the monthly bias factor (birth-death model), which was a net addition of 142,000 jobs in March, following a net addition of 135,000 jobs in February. The March add-factor mindlessly spiked construction jobs by 28,000 and financial activities jobs by 6,000, irrespective of anecdotal evidence of serious trouble in those areas  

Seasonal-Factor Gimmicks. Year-to-year growth should be virtually identical in both the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series, and applying the unadjusted annual change to the seasonally-adjusted year-ago numbers for February and March suggests that the seasonally-adjusted month-to-month change should have been a contraction of 124,000. This reporting gimmick is made possible by the "recalculation" each month of the monthly seasonal factors. If the process were honest, the suggested differences would go in both directions. Instead, the differences almost always suggest that the seasonal factors are being used to overstate the current month’s relative payroll level, as seen last month and the month before.

Household Survey. The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including those of multiple job holders), showed household employment dropped by 24,000 in March against a 255,000 decline in February.

The March 2008 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically-significant increase to 5.08% +/- 0.23% from 4.81% in February. Unadjusted, U.3 held at 5.2% in March. The broader U.6 unemployment rate rose to an adjusted 9.1% (9.3% unadjusted) in March, versus 8.9% (9.5% unadjusted) in February. Adjusted for the "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment, as estimated by the SGS-Alternate Unemployment measure, rose to 13.0% in March, up from 12.8% in February.

Employment Environment. The continued and deepening employment decline reported in March, though still far short of reality, at least continued moving in the same direction suggested by some of the better-quality employment-environment indicators, with collapsing February help-wanted advertising, surging new claims for unemployment insurance, and recession-level employment readings, again, for both the March purchasing managers surveys.

Industrial Production Takes a Hit in Revision. With the index of industrial production based on average 2002 production equal to 100.0, February 2008 had been reported at 113.7. As of the benchmark revision published on March 28th, February 2008 now stands at 111.9, some 1.6% lower. The bulk of the downside revision was in 2006, the latter part of which is when the current recession began. Further detail of the revisions and implications for the annual benchmark revisions of GDP, due later this year, will be discussed in the next newsletter.

Purchasing Managers Surveys Show Inflation and Recession. The stock market truly is irrational if it rallies sharply on a minor upswing in a still-negative purchasing managers survey (manufacturing in March was 48.6 versus 48.3 in February). The alternatives are that either silly hype can rally these extremely vulnerable markets, or that some analysts have a compulsion (or real need) to explain all market movements in terms of any published news, regardless of actions or market manipulations by major players and/or government/Fed. Both factors likely are at play.

Meaningful numbers out of the purchasing managers manufacturing survey, in terms of the component diffusion indices (a reading below 50 means contraction, 50 and above expansion): new orders fell to 46.5 in March from 49.1 in February, employment rose to 49.2 from 46.0, while prices paid exploded to 83.5 from 75.5. On the services side, employment held at 46.9, while prices paid rose to 70.8 from 67.9. The markets still largely are ignoring evidence of a rapid pick-up in inflation.

Week Ahead. The February trade deficit report on Thursday (April 10th) should show sharp deterioration, based on underlying fundamentals. With the concept of recession gaining some official credibility, perhaps such reporting will be allowed. Given U.S. dollar vulnerability, however, odds still favor continued understatement of the deficit.

The various economic data will be reported on more fully in the upcoming mid-April newsletter.

__________

Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government intervention and systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged.

Publication of the Hyperinflation Special Issue should follow by Monday, April 7th.

Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted as needed. The next regular newsletter is targeted for mid-April.

Flash Update

Sunday, March 30th, 2008
 
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
March 30, 2008
__________
 
Money Growth Continues Surging
Treasury and Fed Confirm Willingness to Create Every Dollar Needed for Systemic Bailout
Cautions on Home Sales/Price Data
 
__________
 
Please Note: The negligible "final" revision to fourth-quarter GDP has been updated in the SGS-Alternate GDP posting on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com.
 

Government/Fed Will Accept Any Cost to Save System

"The Treasury Department will propose on Monday that Congress give the Federal Reserve broad new authority to oversee financial market stability, in effect allowing it to send SWAT teams into any corner of the industry or any institution that might pose a risk to the overall system [New York Times¸ March 29, 2008]." As noted in my various writings over time, however, the Fed already has had and has used such powers in recent decades to save the system, and it has been using same — both overtly and covertly — in the current crisis.

Separately, the Treasury’s proposal "carefully avoids a call for tighter regulation," including actions that could "reduce the power of the Securities and Exchange Commission." The purported pending action not only outlines a formalization of the systemic bailout process but also appears to soften certain regulatory controls and oversights that otherwise might throw up inconvenient warning signals of problems, encouraging the camouflage of mortal flaws already in place in the system.

The U.S. Treasury, in its pending announcement, and the Federal Reserve, in its actions to date, effectively are broadcasting that they will accept any cost in terms of money creation and loss of regulatory integrity in order to save the domestic financial system. The alternative of an imploded financial system, with the resulting disruption to, and chaos in the citizenry’s daily living; the resulting collapse in normal business activity; and resulting social and political upheaval; are unthinkable to the powers that be. Unfortunately, their cures will be just as destructive, if not more so, in the slightly longer term. The government only is buying some time, which has been traditional practice. Yet, as will be explored in the SGS Hyperinflation Special Report due out this week, the current actions taken to stabilize the financial system have set a course for a debilitating inflation, which eventually will feed upon the U.S. government’s effective long-term insolvency and generate a hyperinflationary depression.

Some have raised the issue of moral hazard, with the government’s current actions saving financial institutions from their own bad investment decisions. Lack of a "moral hazard" consideration, though, has been the norm for decades, whenever large banks were at risk. What could be expected from a system where the Fed Chairman is also the madam of the house of ill-repute? Wall Street and most senior politicians have profited heavily from the questionable, but once highly-touted business/investing practices that now have turned sour. Many among the investing public ignored common sense and fed off the related mania hyped by some in the financial media. Some regulators turned a blind eye to obvious problems. As a result, few in officialdom are in an untainted position to offer honest lectures on the virtues of virginity to the bailers or to the crowd being bailed out, and neither the Fed nor the government can afford to become principled at this late date.

Money Supply M3 Growth Continues Rising, Monetary Base Surges At Annualized 20% Pace. With 17 to 19 days of reporting in on the 31 days of March, if the reported M3 components were to hold unchanged for the balance of the month, the SGS-Ongoing M3 monthly-average for March would show annual growth of 17.1%, versus the record growth level of 16.9% seen in February. The growth rate will be higher if the weekly data continue to surge. On a similar basis, annual M2 growth would stand at 7.2%, up from 6.9% in February. The increasing signs of accelerating money growth remain coincident with the Fed’s increasing re-liquefaction of illiquid assets held within the financial system.

For those arguing that the system faces deflation because of no growth or a decline in the monetary base (bank reserves plus currency in circulation), the latest numbers could be disconcerting. For the two weeks ended March 26th, the seasonally-adjusted monetary base rose at an annualized rate of 20.1% from the prior two weeks. The broadest measure M3, however, not the narrowest one, remains the better indicator of looming inflation activity.  

Home Sales Data Cautions. With the March consumer confidence numbers plunging ever deeper into recession territory (Conference Board down 15.6% for the month, down 40.3% year-to-year; University of Michigan down 1.8% for the month, down 21.4% year-to-year), it was not unusual also to see weak homes sales data. February existing and new home sales both fell year-to-year, by 23.8% (versus a 22.0% drop in January) and by 29.8% (versus a revised 29.8% [was 33.9%] drop in January), respectively. It thus was somewhat surprising to see the press hyperventilating over a statistically meaningless 2.9% monthly increase in existing home sales. Problems with significance of the month-to-month sales volume reports and with the meaning of the home sales prices, are addressed below.

The home sales data (both series) are highly volatile and subject to massive revisions on a monthly basis. The seasonal-adjustment process does little to improve overall reporting quality. Accordingly, the month-to-month data are worthless. It is more useful to look at the broad series in terms of year-to-year changes, which, although also volatile, tend to tell a more consistent story. At present, annual growth for these series remains deep in recession territory.

The unusual existing home sales press triggered some questions from subscribers as to whether the existing home sales included rising home foreclosures, and if so, would that distort the picture of regular home sales and sales price activity being reported.

The National Association of Realtors (NAR) generates the report in question and NAR’s sampling would pick up some foreclosures that involved listings with realtors, but not those that were run just as sheriff’s sales. The NAR has no idea as to the proportion of foreclosures in its numbers, but believes the number to be "small."

So the answer to subscribers’ questions is yes, there are some (not all) foreclosures in the numbers, and while those contracts distort results, the level of distortion is not known at this time.

More importantly, there is a large problem as to the use and meaning of sales price data published with both the new and existing sales reports. The reported prices reflect only the mix of those homes that are selling, not the reported sales prices of a constant piece of real estate priced to varying market conditions. If low-priced homes are selling more easily than high priced ones, and such were the reverse of the year before, then a decline in the year-to-year average price would reflect shifting market mix, not the relative drop in the price of the same piece of real estate in the same market, year-to-year.

Durable Goods Continue to Signal Recession. In other reporting, seasonally-adjusted February new orders for durable goods fell by 1.7% (down 1.0% net of revisions) following a revised 4.7% (previously 5.3%) drop in January’s orders. Year-to-year change in February orders was up 4.3%, slightly stronger than official CPI, but still leaving the six-month moving average of this highly volatile series well under water, net of price increases.

The "final" estimate revision to annualized real (inflation-adjusted) fourth-quarter GDP held at 0.6%, with annual growth at 2.5%, which looks on the surface like nothing more than statistical noise against the same numbers in the "advance" and "preliminary" estimates. Games played with inflation numbers that kept the "final" growth estimate from falling to 0.3% or less will be discussed in the upcoming newsletter.

Week Ahead. The big report in the week ahead is Friday’s (April 7th) employment report. Market expectations are for declining payrolls and a rising unemployment rate, and both expectations are reasonable as to direction. Given that the markets are not recognizing the full depth of the current downturn, worse than expected results would be likely if the reporting were honest. In the current environment, however, there are efforts to sell concepts such as "an economic recovery is underway" and "the solvency crisis is over." If the data suddenly turn rosy, the long arm of Fed/Treasury intervention in the markets most likely will be responsible for the misreporting.   

The various economic data will be reported on more fully in the upcoming mid-April newsletter.

 

__________

 

Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government intervention and systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged.

Publication of the Hyperinflation Special Issue should be in the week ahead.

Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted as needed, with the next expected Flash Update due to follow the employment report on Friday, April 7th. The next regular newsletter is targeted for mid-April.

Flash Update

Monday, March 24th, 2008
 
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
March 24, 2008
__________
 

It’s Not Even Close to Being Over

Inflationary Recession and Systemic Solvency Crisis Remain

Gold Buying and Dollar Dumping Still Are Nascent

 

__________

 

With Wall Street, Administration and Federal Reserve spinmeisters — and their shills in the popular financial media — putting out tall tales of miraculous cures to the economic and systemic crises, a Flash Update seemed appropriate, despite the regular monthly lull in significant economic reporting. Instead of signals of an economic turnaround, key data continue to signal deepening inflationary recession. Instead of the systemic crisis being over, what the Fed and the Administration have done — and are doing — is to confirm that the financial system will be bailed out irrespective of how much money has to be created. Such, however, always has been a basic component of the crisis outlook; the Fed never had the option of letting the system fail. Beyond the systemic solvency crisis still having a long way to run and evolve, what the markets are missing is the ultimate cost to the system of any government and Fed beneficence: INFLATION.

My general outlook on the economy and broad markets (long-term, not day-to-day) remains unchanged:

- A deepening inflationary recession that eventually will evolve into a hyperinflationary depression;
- A severe bear market in U.S. equities;
- An eventual sharp spike in long-term U.S. Treasury yields, as the flight from the U.S. dollar evolves into flight to safety outside the dollar;
- Massive selling of the U.S. dollar against the major Western currencies;
- An ongoing strong bull market for gold.

Economic Turns Are Signaled in Advance. An economy the size of that of the United States does not reverse direction overnight or on wishful thinking. As a rough rule of thumb, significant changes to underlying fundamentals that drive business activity take at least nine months to start showing up in economic reporting. Not only have underlying fundamentals not been shifted meaningfully, but neither traditional fiscal nor monetary policy is available at present to help turn the economy. Gross mismanagement of fiscal and monetary policy in recent decades by the federal government and Federal Reserve has eliminated all traditional options.

A number of leading indicators will signal pending changes to economic activity six-to-nine months in advance. These indicators include retail sales, housing starts, the purchasing managers manufacturing survey, new orders for durable goods, help-wanted advertising, and new claims for unemployment insurance, among others. With lead times varying from three months to one year, all these indicators signaled the current recession in advance. In like manner the same indicators will signal in advance a pending economic turnaround, at such time as the appropriate underlying fundamentals are in play.

At present, all these indicators are signaling a deepening recession, not a miraculous, overnight recovery. One note of caution, though, on the pending "final" revision to fourth-quarter GDP: If the annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) growth of 0.6% somehow revises sharply to the upside, most other upcoming economic reporting likely also will be heavily manipulated in an effort to confirm the increasingly touted Bush/Bernanke economic miracle.

Uncontrolled Spending of Fiat Money Leads to Inflation. The depth of the systemic solvency crisis only has been hinted at by the magnitude of the emergency actions taken by the Federal Reserve and other central banks. The heavily publicized problems with certain mortgage-backed securities are spreading/have spread into a wide variety of securitized instruments.

The various central governments and central banks have the wherewithal to bailout the financial system by printing money, and the U.S. already has become the primary bailer here. Where the Fed recently moved to bailout non-depository investment banks, the Fed, in like manner, will have to bailout any institution (i.e., credit insurers), where a failure would threaten systemic stability. The problem is not that the system will collapse, but that the cost of preventing the collapse will help to trigger a devastating inflation.

So far, the Fed’s overt actions have been limited to lending good funds for otherwise illiquid assets held by financial institutions. The flood of liquidity relief has enabled banks to behave more normally, lending money and creating money supply. The result has been record growth in the broad money supply as measured by the SGS-Alternate M3 measure. The latest weekly numbers show continued rapid growth in broad money. As the Fed’s available assets get tied up in the process, actual creation of currency is not far down the road.

The bad news in the ongoing, systemic solvency crisis is no more behind us than is the bad news on the economy, shy of outright manipulation of the data and the news media.

All of the preceding has been covered in earlier newsletters and Flash Updates, which should be referred to for greater detail. Please feel free to contact me at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com any time you have any questions on my outlook or otherwise.

 
__________
 
Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government intervention and systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged. Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted as needed. The next regular newsletter is targeted for mid-April.

Flash Update

Tuesday, March 18th, 2008
 
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
March 18, 2008
__________
Fed Panic Continues in Pursuit of Systemic Salvation

Inflation Understatement Used to Justify Fed Easings?

Industrial Production Plunge Could Set Second Timing-Point for Official Recession

 __________ 

Two Dissenting Votes. The Federal Reserve’s Federal Open Market Committee cut the targeted fed funds rate and discount rate by 75 basis points (0.75%), today, which amounts to a 100 basis-point cut in the discount rate since Sunday morning. Some might argue that February’s inflation reporting was a harbinger of stabilizing inflation and supportive of further sharp easing, but current oil prices promise anything but inflation stability. Interestingly, there were two dissenting votes on the FOMC arguing that the action taken was too aggressive.

Today’s rate capitulation to Wall Street, was on top of Sunday’s emergency liquidity actions, which were the fourth such set of emergency actions in ten days. Beyond a 25 basis-point discount rate cut, Sunday’s policy announcement opened the Fed’s emergency discount window lending to primary dealers (non-depository institutions), as part of the broadening effort to prevent a collapse of the U.S. financial system. All Fed activities to date have been consistent with the view that the U.S. central bank will create whatever money it has to in order to bailout any financial-sector participant, the failure of which otherwise might trigger a systemic collapse. As discussed in the last newsletter, the cost of this systemic salvation will be much higher inflation.

Shy of short-lived market euphoria and/or short-lived intervention in the currency, gold, oil and stock markets — the latter as seen on Monday — the ongoing Fed actions have dismal implications for the U.S. dollar and U.S. equities, and should add significant upside pressure to buying in the gold markets. While the sudden "improvement" in the reported monthly U.S. inflation rates is nonsense, the markets seem to view the data at best as transient, at worst as outright fabrications. 

As With the CPI, the PPI Report Showed Little or No Food or Energy Inflation. The seasonally-adjusted February finished goods PPI rose by the expected 0.3% (0.2% unadjusted), versus January’s 1.0% (0.8% unadjusted) gain. Annual PPI inflation for February fell to 6.4% from 7.4% in January. Seasonally-adjusted intermediate and crude goods in February rose by 0.8% and 3.7% respectively, following January’s 1.4% and 2.5% gains.

As with the February CPI report, however, the PPI report was not credible. Although the monthly February gain was in line with consensus forecasts, both the food and energy inflation components were seriously understated, with foods down by 0.5% and energy up by just 0.8% for the month. At the other end of the spectrum, "core" PPI — net of food and energy costs — was up 0.5% for the month in February, versus 0.4% in January and 0.2% in December.

Industrial Production Drop Sets Up Possible Second Recession Timing Point. Seasonally-adjusted February industrial production tumbled by 0.5% (down 0.4% net of revisions) for the month, following an unrevised 0.1% gain in January. Year-to-year growth slowed to 1.0% in February from 2.3% (was 2.2%) in January. The monthly production decline was broadly based.

Pending benchmark revisions on March 28th should show weaker than previously reported growth for the production series in recent years, with revisions and "redefinitions" stretching back to 1972. Odds favor the March report establishing the second consecutive quarterly contraction for the series. Such would give the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) — official arbiter of U.S. recessions — its second timing point for calling the current recession, with the first timing point being set by recent payroll employment reporting.

Housing Starts Showed Continued Bottom-Bouncing. The highly volatile housing numbers showed increasing bottom-bouncing, with February’s seasonally-adjusted housing starts down by 0.6% +/- 13% (95% confidence interval), but up by 5.2% net of revisions. This followed a revised monthly gain for January of 7.1% (previously 0.8%). February’s year-to-year decline still widened to 28.4% from a revised 23.7% (previously 27.9%) drop in January, well shy of the 48.6% annual decline seen at the trough of the 1990/1991 recession. February’s building permits were down 7.8% (previously down 3.0%) for the month and down 36.5% for the year, against a revised 1.8% monthly decline, and 32.2% (was 33.1%) annual decline in January.

 
__________
 
Continuing market turmoil, central-bank/government intervention and systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged. Flash Updates and Alerts will be posted as needed. The next regular newsletter is targeted for mid-April.

February/March 2008 Newsletter

Sunday, March 16th, 2008
 
Issue Number 40
March 16, 2008
__________

 Irrespective of Any Looming Central Bank or Central Government Interventions or
Other Activity, the Financial-Economic-Systemic Crisis Is Going to Get Much Worse

Fed Abandons Inflation Fight

Depression or Recession Depends on Depth of Downturn

Gold Buying and Dollar Selling Muted by Covert Intervention?

__________
 

OVERVIEW — OPENING COMMENTS

The systemic solvency/liquidity crisis has intensified at an accelerating pace, with three major, emergency Federal Reserve actions seen in the eight days through Friday. As we go to press Sunday afternoon, no new actions have been announced, but circumstances are so unstable that most anything is possible, including massive interventions in the markets as well as unconventional actions by central banks or central governments, coordinated or otherwise. Flash Updates or Alerts will be posted as needed to address developments.

With the ability to create money and its mandate to protect the banking system, the Fed has both the wherewithal and the will to bailout the financial system. The cost of such salvation, however, will come in the sharp rise of inflation in goods and services as a monetary inflation starts to kick in.

Regardless of any official actions, the broad, long-range outlook for a deepening inflationary recession — one that eventually will become a hyperinflationary depression — remains in place, along with a long-range outlook for continued heavy selling of the U.S. dollar and strong buying of gold, a severe bear market in equities, and a spike in long-term U.S. Treasury yields as dollar dumping ultimately turns to flight-to-safety outside the U.S. dollar.

On the economic and inflation fronts, the data are showing a consistent picture of a deepening contraction in business activity, and — with the exception of February’s fudged "no inflation" report — a consistent pattern of rapidly mounting inflationary pressures.

And the Money Keeps Rolling Out in All Directions. Looking to Tuesday’s (March 18th) regularly scheduled Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC) meeting, market participants anticipate a 50 to 100 basis-point (0.50% to 1.00%) rate cut in the targeted fed funds rate to 2.50% to 2.00%. Such is not in spite of the Fed’s recent emergency actions, but largely because the Fed’s panic suggests the severity of the deepening problems within the banking system. Again, the current circumstance is highly volatile.

Going back to Friday, March 14th, per the Federal Reserve Board, "The Federal Reserve is monitoring market developments closely and will continue to provide liquidity as necessary to promote the orderly functioning of the financial system. The Board voted unanimously to approve the arrangement announced by JPMorgan Chase and Bear Stearns this morning."

Thus, through the New York Federal Reserve Bank’s discount window, money was lent to JPMorgan Chase to bailout Bear Stearns, which otherwise was on the verge of collapse.

Further back, on Tuesday, March 12th, the Fed announced the creation of a Term Securities Lending Facility (TSLF), which would lend up to $200 billion of Treasury securities to primary dealers on term basis, and which would accept otherwise illiquid mortgage-backed securities as collateral. The Fed also increased its existing currency swap lines with the European Central Bank and the Swiss National Bank.

That action followed the announcement on Friday, March 7th, that the Fed was increasing the size of the Term Auction Facility (TAF) at its discount window for troubled banks to $100 billion from $60 billion. The Fed also promised a further $100 billion in emergency funding in the form of term repos, which could be structured against otherwise illiquid mortgage-backed securities.

As shown in the accompanying graph, nonborrowed bank reserves had dropped to roughly a negative $20 billion as of the last reporting. Assuming that total bank reserves hold in the low $40 billion range over the next several weeks, nonborrowed bank reserves would drop to roughly a negative $60 billion by April 9th, given the currently announced size of the TAF auctions. Such reflects neither the $100 billion term repos, nor the $200 billion in TSLF lending, which are not counted as borrowed reserves.

On the other hand, the bailout funding for Bear Stearns puportedly was made through the discount window, which would further increase the magnitude of the negative nonborrowed reserves by the cost of that bailout. Those numbers are not reflected in the nonborrowed reserve graph, but the amount should be reflected in the numbers for the two weeks ended March 26th, to the extent the lending remains on the Fed’s books.

As evidenced now by two months of subsequent reporting, money supply growth has surged to a record high in conjunction with the TAF facility. What appears to be happening is that the Fed has been accepting otherwise illiquid assets as collateral in its TAF discount window lending, in turn providing troubled banks with needed liquidity. It is not clear that the Fed is fully neutralizing, or that it wants to neutralize fully, the monetary impact of its solvency-crisis lending.


Clearly, the Fed is lending beyond needed reserve levels, taking in illiquid mortgage backed securities and providing liquidity to the banking system for other purposes. Those other purposes are highlighted now by the Bear Stearns bailout. The added funds, as new or refreshed liquidity, have been spiking money supply measures M2 and M3 (the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate), flowing through in some instances to accounts that have no reserve requirements. One example is the institutional money funds of M3, which stood at over $2.0 trillion in February, up by 50% year-to-year, versus $7.6 trillion in all of M2, which, even at 6.9% annual growth in February, has seen seeing accelerating growth.

M3 Growth at All-Time High. The monthly-average annual growth in the SGS-Ongoing M3 for February was 16.9%, the highest monthly growth rate ever seen for the M3 series (the Federal Reserve’s calculation of the broad money measure dates back to January 1959). As shown in the money supply graph, M3 growth dipped in December, when the banking solvency crisis forced the Fed to introduce the TAF. Growth since then has been accelerating and even has been reflected partially in rising M2 growth (see the money supply section for detail).

Monetary Inflation Pressures Will Mount. The prior record monthly annual growth for M3 was 16.4% in June 1971, and the inflation from excessive money creation at the time was a key factor pressuring the greenback, leading up to President Nixon’s closing the gold window and imposing wage and price controls in August of that year. The current surge in broad money supply growth has equally ominous implications for monetary inflation and dollar pressures during the next nine to 12 months, well into 2009.

Officially, though, such does not bother the Fed, since it contends that neither M3 growth nor a weak dollar have much to do with inflation. Mr. Greenspan and company concluded back in November 2005 that "M3 does not appear to convey any additional information about economic activity that is not already embodied in M2 and has not played a role in the monetary policy process for many years." Since M3 purportedly had no meaning, its reporting was terminated in March 2006.

Perhaps not too coincidentally, the Fed’s announcement of its emergency funding measures on Friday, March 7th, was accompanied by a speech given by Federal Reserve Governor Frederic S. Mishkin concluding that a weak dollar had "fairly small effects on consumer prices." This was despite "Traditional monetary theory regard[ing] excessive money creation as a common source of instability in both the exchange rate and price level. In the presence of large monetary shocks, price inflation and exchange rate depreciation should, therefore, be closely linked."

Mr. Bernanke Abandons the Inflation Fight. Mr. Bernanke and company can ignore such factors as M3 growth and dollar weakness as they rationalize their now aborted inflation fight. Such, however, is intended more as Pablum for Wall Street’s spinmeisters to dish out; it does not reflect the real world. I have argued previously that M3, as the broadest money measure at the time of its dismemberment, had (and still has) the best causal and predictive relationship of any of the money measures to inflation (see the August 2006 SGS Newsletter). As to the U.S. dollar, weakness there has a very direct and major impact on commodity price inflation — particularly oil — and oil inflation permeates the general economy. Then again, Mr. Bernanke concentrates on "core" inflation measures, net of food and energy costs, another source of Pablum for the markets.  

As a separate issue, not too long ago, the debate raging on Wall Street and purportedly at the Fed was whether the Fed should ease to fight recession, or tighten to fight inflation. Not that raising rates would have done much to fight inflation, but the tightening scenario clearly has lost out now, as the Fed largely has given up the pretext of easing to help the economy and instead openly has eased to support the flailing banking system. Faltering broad business activity and rising inflation now are combined into a toxic inflationary-recession that will continue to deepen irrespective of the Fed’s activities.

Recession, Depression and Great Depression. "The United States is in a recession that could be ’substantially more severe’ than recent ones." So began a March 14th Reuters story quoting National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) President Martin Feldstein. Feldstein noted, "The situation is very bad, the situation is getting worse … There is no doubt that this year and next are going to be very difficult years."

The reason I am quoting Feldstein here is that the NBER is the official arbiter of when the United States economy is in recession. His comments were not an official announcement of recession by the NBER’s Business Cycle Dating Committee, but they suggest the direction in which the Committee is heading.

With Feldstein raising the prospects that the current downturn could be the worst U.S. recession since the Great Depression — I fully agree that it will be — it is worth taking a moment to review definitional differences between a recession, depression and a great depression.

A couple of decades back, I tried to tie down the definitional differences with the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), the NBER and a number of private economists. I found that there was no consensus on the matter, so I set some definitions that the various parties (neither formally nor officially) thought were within reason.

If you look at the plot of the level of economic activity during a downturn, you will see something that looks like bowl, with activity recessing on the downside and recovering on the upside. The term used to describe this bowl-shaped circumstance before World War II was "depression," while the downside portion of the cycle was called "recession." Before World War II, all downturns simply were referred to as depressions. In the wake of the Great Depression of the 1930s, however, a euphemism was sought for future economic contractions so as to avoid evoking memories of that earlier, financially painful time.

Accordingly, a post-World War II downturn was called "recession." Officially, the worst post-World War II recession was from November 1973 through March 1975, with a peak-to-trough contraction of 5%. Such followed the Vietnam War, Nixon’s floating of the U.S. dollar and the Oil Embargo. The double-dip recession in the early-1980s may have seen a combined contraction of roughly 6%. I contend that the current double-dip recession that began in late-2000 already is rivaling the 1980s double-dip as to depth. (See the Reporting/Market Focus of the October 2006 SGS for further detail.)

Definitions:

Recession:Two or more consecutive quarters of contracting real (inflation-adjusted) GDP, where the downturn is not triggered by an exogenous factor such as a truckers’ strike. The NBER attempts to refine its timing calls, on a monthly basis, through the use of economic series such as payroll employment and industrial production, and it no longer relies on the two quarters of contracting GDP rule.

Depression: A recession, where the peak-to-trough contraction in real growth exceeds 10%.

Great Depression: A depression, where the peak-to-trough contraction in real growth exceeds 20%.

Rapid Economic Deterioration in Key Data. Already hammered by an onslaught of negative data, a number of analysts jumped into the recession camp in response to the understated drop in February payrolls. With the jobs report, the Administration almost seems to have thrown in the towel, opting to accept recession recognition. Perhaps there have been lessons learned from when the earlier President Bush declared an end to his recession, only to find that the electorate thought he increasingly was out of touch with reality.

Recession signals in the last month or so continued to come from new orders for durable goods, the purchasing managers surveys, initial claims for unemployment, and help wanted advertising. Hints of recession were even seen in annual declines in tax revenues in the monthly federal budget accounting.

Then there is the consumer. February consumer confidence plummeted deep into recession territory, while the housing market remained in serious trouble and retail sales plunged, both on a monthly and on an annual basis, net of inflation.

As shown in the accompanying graph, looking at real (inflation-adjusted) year-to-year change in the three-month moving average of retail sales, the current annual contraction has never been seen outside of a full blown recession, with the possible exception of unusual gyrations in annual growth seen in the months following the 9/11 terrorist attacks and the year following.

The outlook for a hyperinflationary-depression, and how the current circumstance likely will evolve into such a circumstance has been discussed in recent newsletters (see the January SGS Newsletter for a discussion of Mr. Bernanke’s role and background), detailed in a three-part series that began with the December 2006 SGS, and will be updated and expanded upon shortly in the pending Hyperinflation Special Issue, which effectively will supplement the comments in this newsletter.

Inflation Still Shows Mounting Problems Despite Understated February CPI. As discussed in the CPI section, February’s reading of no month-to-month inflation was not credible.Nonetheless, with the Fed abandoning inflation containment, record growth in broad money supply, record high oil prices, a record low in the U.S. dollar and a rapidly widening federal budget deficit all promise much higher inflation and reporting of same in the near future.

As has been noted for the last several SGS Newsletters as to retail sales reporting, the implied inflation data show upside revisions to estimated gasoline and food prices in subsequent months. The same pattern now has been seen in the reporting of the Chain-Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI), the fully substitution-based estimate of monthly consumer inflation.

As shown in the accompanying graph the periods of mid-2006 and late-2007 are showing meaningfully higher inflation, in revision, largely in the food and energy sectors. Since the formal CPI-U never gets revised, CPI inflation will not be altered. The C-CPI, however, has a close counterpart in the Personal Consumption Expenditure (PCE) deflator in the GDP, and parallel revisions there would result in historical downward revisions to previously reported GDP growth, possibly allowing for a later, annual benchmark revision for fourth-quarter 2007 GDP into negative territory, allowing for an official onset of the current recession.

Ongoing Market Turmoil to Parallel Systemic Instabilities. With the systemic liquidity crisis and the inflationary-recession both deteriorating rapidly, the financial markets increasingly are sensing the nightmarish scenario that is unfolding. Underlying fundamentals cannot be turned easily, and a severe and protracted bear market in equities already likely is underway. Fed easings and flight-to-quality have depressed Treasury yields, but inflation and a developing U.S. dollar panic eventually will push long-term Treasury yields much higher.

Given the relative mild response in some markets to the unfolding systemic crisis and panicked Federal Reserve reactions, it looks as though there may have been some covert intervention aimed at dampening dollar selling and gold and oil buying. Such is not unusual for the President’s Plunge Protection Team (PPT), which has intervened openly in those markets at other potentially vulnerable times.

PLEASE NOTE: A "General background note" provides a broad background paragraph on certain series or concepts. Where the language used in past and subsequent newsletters usually has been or will be identical, month-after-month, any text changes in these sections will be highlighted in bold italics upon first usage. This is designed so that regular readers may avoid re-reading material they have seen before, but where they will have the material available for reference, if so desired.

Alternate Realities. This section updates the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting, and — at subscriber request — introduces with this newsletter an alternate measure of the unemployment rate. When a government economic measure does not match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Federal Reserve, White House and Wall Street. In these alternate measures, the effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan-Era GDP and the pre-Clinton Era unemployment rate. The methodologies for the GDP and CPI series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS.

GDP. The alternate fourth-quarter 2007 GDP growth reflects the "preliminary" estimate, with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate fourth-quarter inflation-adjusted annual growth rate (year-to-year, as opposed to the popularly-touted annualized quarter-to-quarter rate) for GDP was a decline of roughly 2.3% versus the official, slowing year-to-year gain of 2.5%.

General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate GDP numbers tend to show deeper and more protracted recessions than have been reported formally or reflected in related official reporting. Nonetheless, the patterns shown in the alternate data are broadly consistent with the payroll employment and industrial production series (as revised), which are major indicators used by the National Bureau of Economic Research in determining the official timing of U.S. business cycles.

Unemployment Rate. At subscriber request, we introduce with this newsletter the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Rate. Shown are two official, seasonally-adjusted unemployment measures, U.3 and U.6, and the SGS Alternate Unemployment Measure. U.3 is the popularly followed unemployment rate published by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), which stood at 4.8% as of February 2008. U.6 is the broadest unemployment measure published by the BLS, defined as total unemployed, plus all marginally attached workers, plus total employed part time for economic reasons, as a percent of the civilian labor force plus all marginally attached workers. Marginally attached workers include the discouraged workers who survived redefinition during the Clinton Administration. The SGS Alternate Unemployment Measure simply is U.6 (at 8.9% as of February), adjusted for an estimate of the millions of discouraged workers defined away during the Clinton Administration — those who had been "discouraged" for more than one year. The SGS-Alternate estimate is 12.8% for February.

Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate unemployment series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate numbers are reported in the for 1994 series redefinitions forward. It is planned to take series further back in time.

CPI. Both the annual non-core and core annual inflation rate measures notched higher in January, but eased back in February with what appears to have been an outright data manipulation, as discussed elsewhere. Generally annual inflation should continue rising well into 2008/2009. Food and oil-related price pressures still have been reflected only minimally in much of the government’s reporting of the non-core inflation, and in the impact on the broader economy. Visibly sharp increases in market prices, however, should make almost impossible for the BLS to pull off another stunt in March, as they appear to have done in February. Mounting inflationary pressures reflect the increasing impact of energy-cost damages in the general economy, combined with pressures from a crumbling dollar and soaring monetary growth.

General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate CPI numbers tend to show significantly higher inflation over time, generally reflecting the reversal of hedonic adjustments, geometric weighting and the use of a more traditional approach to measuring housing costs, measures all consistent with the reporting methodology in place as of 1980. Available as a separate tab at the SGS homepage www.shadowstats.com is the SGS Inflation Calculator that calculates the impact of inflation between any two months, 1913 to date, based on both the official CPI-U and the SGS-Alternate CPI series.

 
Eight Levels of Inflation    Annual Inflation for November 2007 to February 2008                                       2007          2008Measure                                Nov    Dec    Jan    FebI.1 Core PCE Deflator                   2.1%r  2.2%   2.2%   n.a.I.2 Core Chained-CPI-U (r)              2.0%   2.1%   2.2%   2.0%I.3 Core CPI-U                          2.3%   2.4%   2.5%   2.3%I.4 PCE Deflator                        3.6%   3.6%r  3.7%   n.a.I.5 Chained-CPI-U (r)                   3.9%   3.7%   3.9%   3.7%I.6 CPI-U                               4.3%   4.1%   4.3%   4.0%I.7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U                   7.6%   7.4%   7.6%   7.3%I.8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation   11.7%  11.7%  11.8%  11.6%
(r) Revised (see Opening Comments on C-CPI and PCE Deflator).Notes: I.1 to I.3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively,of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE)deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U.I.4 to I.6 are the same measures with energy and food inflationincluded. The CPI-U (I.6) is the measure popularly followed bythe financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation.I.7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre-Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top seriesin the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com.I.8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, whichreverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so,plus an adjustment for the portion of Clinton-Era geometricweighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historicbookkeeping.
 

MARKETS PERSPECTIVE

As shown in the accompanying table, U.S. stocks have continued trending lower; the Treasury yield curve has steepened, with sharply lower short-term yields; while the dollar sell-off has intensified in conjunction with soaring oil and precious metals prices. The U.S. banking-solvency crisis and an inflationary recession have started to open up nightmare scenarios for the traditional U.S. financial markets.        

 

         Financial-Market Indicators at Year-End 2007 and March 14, 2008 Close

 

Indicator      First-Quarter 2008      Fourth-Quarter 2007     Third-Quarter 2007

               To Date: March 14, 2008 Level    Qtr/Qtr Yr/Yr  Level    Qtr/Qtr Yr/Yr

               Level    QTD/Qtr Yr/Yr

 

Equity Market

DJIA          11,951.09  -9.90% -1.50% 13,264.82 -4.54%  6.43% 13,895.63  3.63% 18.98%

S&P 500        1,288.14 -12.27% -7.14%  1,468.36 -3.82%  3.53%  1,526.75  1.56% 14.29%

Wilshire 5000 12,992.93 -12.33% -7.50% 14,819.60 -3.53%  3.94% 15,362.02  1.00% 15.11%

NASDAQ Comp    2,212.49 -16.58% -6.73%  2,652.28 -1.82%  9.81%  2,701.50  3.77% 19.62%

 

Credit Market(1)

Fed Funds Target  3.00%  -125bp -225bp     4.25%  -50bp -100bp     4.75%  -50bp  -50bp

3-Mo T-Bill       1.18%  -218bp -388bp     3.36%  -46bp -166bp     3.82% -100bp -107bp

2-Yr T-Note       1.47%  -158bp -307bp     3.05%  -92bp -177bp     3.97%  -90bp  -75bp

5-Yr T-Note       2.37%  -108bp -207bp     3.45%  -78bp -125bp     4.23%  -69bp  -36bp

10-Yr T-Note      3.44%   -60bp  109bp     4.04%  -55bp  -67bp     4.59%  -44bp   -5bp

30-Yr T-Bond      4.35%   -10bp   34bp     4.45%  -38bp  -36bp     4.83%  -29bp    6bp

 

Oil(2)

US$ per Barrel

West Texas Int.  110.21  14.79% 89.46%     96.01 17.56% 57.24%     81.67 17.39% 29.80%

 

Currencies/Dollar Indices(3)

US$/Unit

Pound Sterling   2.0294  2.27%   4.95%    1.9843 -2.68%  1.31%    2.0389  1.65%  8.94%

Euro             1.5604  6.85%  17.97%    1.4603  2.70% 10.65%    1.4219  5.17% 12.08%

Swiss Franc      0.9929 12.48%  20.52%    0.8827  3.02%  7.64%    0.8568  4.87%  7.13%

Yen              0.0099 11.49%  16.10%    0.0090  2.92%  6.54%    0.0087  7.32%  2.63%

Canadian Dollar  1.0135  1.48%  19.13%    1.0120  0.79% 17.92%    1.0041  8.43% 12.06%

Australian Dlr   0.9371  6.78%  18.86%    0.8776 -0.89% 11.31%    0.8855  4.29% 18.68%

Weighted Currency Units/US$

Jan. 1985 = 100

Financial (FWD)   44.43 -5.93% -12.11%    47.26 -0.92%  -7.64%     47.70 -4.66% -9.14%

  Change US$/FX       6.37%  13.77%         0.93%   8.27%          4.88% 10.06%

Trade (TWD)       50.11 -4.95% -14.42%    52.72 -1.51% -10.00%     53.53 -5.42% -9.10%

  Change US$/FX       5.21%  16.84%         1.54%  10.01%          5.74% 10.01%

    

Precious Metals(4)

US$ per Troy Ounce

Gold           1,003.50 20.36%  56.00%    833.75 12.21% 31.92%    743.00 14.22% 23.99%

Silver            20.41 38.28%  58.34%     14.76  8.13% 14.41%     13.65  8.85% 20.26%

 

bp: Basis point or 0.01%. (1) Treasuries are constant maturity yield, US Treasury.

(2) Department of Energy. (3) Shadow Government Statistics, Federal Reserve Board

(see Dollar Index Section for definitions). (4) London afternoon fix, Kitco.com.

At present, the markets are being driven by the banking-solvency crisis and the Federal Reserve’s response to same. Regardless of possible massive intervention in the markets — recent covert intervention in the currency, gold and oil markets is a strong possibility — the underlying fundamentals will not change. A rapidly intensifying inflationary recession provides limits to any relief rallies in equities seen in response to the Fed or other’s actions. The long-range outlook for a severe bear market in U.S. equities, heavy selling of the U.S. dollar, strong buying of precious metals and an eventual, significant spike in long-term U.S. Treasury yields, remains in place.

General background note: As a general strategy under the current circumstances, looking to preserve one’s wealth and assets needs to be a primary concern, along with the liquidity and safety of investments.

U.S. Equities — Wild gyrations in U.S. equity prices may continue from breaking crisis news to breaking crisis news, interspersed with cheerleading from the Fed, the Administration and intervention from the Plunge Protection Team and others intervening in stock futures to generate phony rallies aimed at sucking in naive and vulnerable investors. Nonetheless, the frailties of the financial system and sharply negative economic fundamentals promise an eventual massive downside to the major U.S. stock indices.

General background note: As the equity markets continue to catch up with the underlying economic and financial fundamentals, the downside adjustments to stock prices should be quite large, eventually rivaling the 90% decline in equities seen in the 1929 crash and ensuing several years. The decline might have to be measured in real terms (net of inflation), as a hyperinflation eventually will kick in as the Fed moves to liquefy the system. Stocks do tend to follow inflation, since revenues and earnings get denominated in inflated dollars. Hence with a hyperinflation, a DJIA of 100,000 or 100,000,000 could be expected, but such still would be below today’s levels, adjusted for inflation.

General background note: The approaching financial maelstrom already has come over the horizon and may be making landfall. When it hits, those investors who have taken shelter in cash, gold and outside the U.S. dollar will be the ones with the wealth and assets available to take advantage of the extraordinary investment opportunities that should follow.

U.S. Credit Market — Ongoing panic by the Fed and expected further easing the week ahead have lowered short-term interest rates, with flight-to-safety in U.S. Treasuries compounding the downside pressure on Treasury yields. With rapidly rising inflationary pressures, rapid money growth, a burgeoning federal deficit, and a soon to be seen flight from the dollar that evolves into a flight-to-safety outside the dollar, the longer range outlook is for long-term Treasury yields to back up several hundred basis points, approaching a normal spread in long-term Treasuries over inflation. With a normal spread, the current 4.35% yield on the 30-year Treasury bond would be well in excess of 7.50%.

General background note: At such time as the flight from the dollar becomes a flight-to-safety out of the dollar, U.S. interest rates will be forced higher in a mounting liquidity squeeze resulting from foreign dumping of dollar denominated securities. Increasingly, those assets will have to be absorbed in the U.S. markets, spiking Treasury yields.

U.S. Dollar — With the U.S. financial system in trouble, with the Fed abandoning its inflation fight, with recognition of the U.S. recession growing rapidly, selling of the U.S. Dollar has intensified sharply against the major Western currencies. The financial- and trade-weighted indices are at all-time lows and still dropping, despite heavy intervention to prop the U.S. currency. Of particular note is the Swiss franc hitting parity with the U.S. Dollar. A particularly sharp decline in the U.S. dollar against the Swiss franc will be a key signal of the developing flight-to-safety outside the dollar.

Where the Fed has opted for inflation as a trade-off in its effort to save the domestic banking system, and it appears ready to slash interest rates again, the lingering terrors of the Weimar Republic’s hyperinflation of the 1920s have been holding the European Central Bank’s interest rate targets relatively high in an effort to contain inflation. Such a dichotomy of interests holds the potential for even more intense and sustained dollar selling, again, with flight from the dollar soon becoming a flight-to-safety outside the dollar. As currency volatility intensifies, so too should sporadic central bank intervention.

In terms of underlying fundamentals that tend to drive currency trading, the dollar’s portfolio could not be worse. Relative to major trading partners, the U.S. economy is much weaker; interest rates are lower and anticipated possibly to go much lower still; inflation is higher and rising fiscal and trade-balance conditions are abysmal with the fiscal deficit is exploding; and relative political/systemic concerns are rising sharply at the same time with President’s and Congress’s approval ratings bottom bouncing at all-time lows.

Beyond further capitulation by the Federal Reserve to the solvency/funding crisis, the proximal trigger for a full dollar panic could come from a bad economic statistic, political missteps by the Administration, negative trade or market developments in Asia, or a terrorist attack or expansion of U.S. military activity in the Middle-East or South America. When the trigger is pulled, current broad selling pressure will turn to an outright panicked dumping of the greenback, which should overwhelm any short-lived central bank intervention and roil the domestic financial markets. Generally, the greater the magnitude of the dollar selling, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. capital markets, on top of the otherwise deteriorating systemic crisis.

 

As shown in the preceding graph, the U.S. dollar continued to fall sharply in February 2008 and into March, setting new historic lows. The latest data points shown for the financial- and trade-weighted indices are as of Friday, March 14th.

General background note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS Newsletter for methodology.

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics’ Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (FWD) is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For February 2008 the monthly FWD fell by 0.80% after dropping by 0.96% in January. The February 2008 average index level of 46.50 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down by 9.81% from February 2007, while January 2008 was down 9.33% from the year before. As of March 14th, the FWD stood at a record-low 44.43.

Also down in February was the Federal Reserve’s Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (TWD). The February 2008 average was down by 0.67% from January, which, in turn, had been down 0.86% from December. The February 2008 index level of 52.22 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 11.58% year-to-year, versus an 11.30% annual decline as of January. As of March 14th, the TWD closed at a record-low 50.11.

Gold — Despite increasing central-bank jawboning and intervention, the price of gold closed (London p.m. fix) at a new record high on March 14th at $1,003.50 in current dollars, above what had been the $1,000 per troy ounce psychological barrier. Outside of the current period, the earlier all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix) of January 21, 1980 still has not been hit in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on inflation through January 2008, the 1980 gold price peak would be $2,313 per troy ounce, based on not-seasonally-adjusted CPI-adjusted dollars, and would be $6,363 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate CPI adjusted dollars. The indication remains that the price of gold — albeit at a nominal high — still faces some catch-up.

For February (based on Kitco.com), the monthly average London gold afternoon fix was $922.30 versus $889.60 in January. Silver averaged $17.57 per troy ounce in February, up from $15.96 per troy ounce in January. Respective closing prices on March 14th were $1,003.50 and $20.41 per troy ounce.

Gold Still Will Be a Buy When It Hits $10,000. One reader suggested that the $10,000 per troy ounce comment suggested in the March 10th Flash Update seemed rather extreme. With the $1,000 per troy ounce level breached, however, it is worth remembering that gold is a traditional store of wealth that enables the preservation of purchasing power that otherwise would be lost to inflation. The long-term "profits" realized in cashing in gold at any given point in time primarily are a measure of the purchasing power otherwise lost by the outright holding of U.S. dollars. The upside for gold is limited only by the downside to the dollar’s purchasing power.

At such time as gold hits $10,000, which I would wager will be much sooner than most people expect, that price, again, will not reflect investment profits in a traditional sense, but rather primarily will reflect the preservation of wealth and the purchasing power lost otherwise by those who kept their assets in dollars. Gold at $10,000 will mean that raging inflation has been in play, and unless inflation has been brought under control, the precious metal’s upside potential then, as now, will remain limited only by the dollar’s downside. As variously discussed in my hyperinflation writings, the downside for the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar effectively is zero.

Near-term gold price volatility likely will continue and could be significant. Upside price pressures from mounting inflation, a weakening dollar and increasing global political, financial and systemic instabilities, face offsets with bouts of profit taking and with intensified overt and covert central bank interventions in the gold and currency markets aimed at propping the greenback. Despite any central-bank machinations or intervention, the upside potential for the precious metals remains explosive.

General background note: As discussed in the Hyperinflation Series (see the December 2006 to March 2007 SGSs and the pending Hyperinflation Special Issue), the eventual collapse of the U.S. dollar — the world’s reserve currency — will force the creation of a new international currency system. Gold likely will be structured into any replacement system, in an effort by those organizing the new currency structure to gain public acceptance.

The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show the February averages as well as added points for closing prices on March 14th, with gold at $1,003.50, oil at $110.21 and the Fed’s published noon buying rate for the Swiss franc at $0.9929. Again, all three measures should trade significantly higher in the months ahead.

 

 

 REPORTING PERSPECTIVE

The Big Three Market Movers

U.S. financial system stability and economic conditions continue to deteriorate rapidly, and, as a result, little can be trusted in current economic reporting. Mr. Bernanke still needs a stable U.S. currency, particularly under the circumstances of his expanded move to bailout the domestic banking system and otherwise his capitulation to Wall Street pressures, while the Administration’s political needs remain great. With financial circumstances threatening national security, almost anything is possible in the arena of data and market manipulations.

Absent manipulation, and against lagging and increasingly realistic market expectations, most near-term economic reporting still should tend to surprise the markets on the downside, while most inflation reporting still should surprise expectations on the upside.

Employment/Unemployment — The reported decline in January payrolls moved a number of analysts into the "recession at hand" camp, but the decline in jobs was understated meaningfully, thanks to the usual statistical shenanigans at the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). With two consecutive monthly contractions now seen in the payroll survey, however, the NBER has one of its trigger points in place for calling the timing of a recession.

Payroll Survey. The BLS reported a seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 63,000 (a loss of 109,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for February 2008, following a revised 22,000 (previously 17,000) jobs loss in January. The decline was statistically indistinguishable from a gain. Annual growth in total nonfarm payrolls slowed further to a recessionary 0.60% in February from 0.72% in January.

Bias Adjustment. One factor adding upside pressure to the numbers was the monthly bias factor (birth-death model), which was a net addition of 135,000 jobs, following a net subtraction of 378,000 jobs in January.

Seasonal-Factor Gimmicks. Year-to-year growth should be virtually identical in both the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series, and applying the unadjusted annual change to the seasonally-adjusted year-ago numbers for January and February suggests that the seasonally-adjusted month-to-month change should have been a contraction of 146,000 (a statistically significant contraction). This reporting gimmick is made possible by the "recalculation" each month of the monthly seasonal factors. If the process were honest, the suggested differences would go in both directions. Instead, the differences almost always suggest that the seasonal factors are being used to overstate the current month’s relative payroll level.

Household Survey. The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including those of multiple job holders), showed household employment dropped by 255,000 in February, against a 540,000 decline in January, which really was a gain of 205,000, after removal of a 745,000 downward effect from population revisions.

The February 2008 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically insignificant decline to 4.81% +/- 0.23% from 4.93% in January. Unadjusted, U.3 narrowed to 5.2% in February from 5.4% in January. The broader U.6 unemployment rate eased to an adjusted 8.9% (9.5% unadjusted) in February from 9.0% (9.9% unadjusted) in January. Adjusted for the "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment is running about 12.8%, as shown in the SGS-Alternate Unemployment Measure, introduced in this month’s Alternate Realities section.

Employment Environment. The continued and deepening employment decline reported in February, though far short of reality, at least moved the same direction suggested by some of the better-quality employment-environment indicators, with collapsing January help-wanted advertising, surging new claims for unemployment insurance, and recession-level employment readings, again, for both the February purchasing managers surveys.

Next Release (April 4): Based on continued deterioration in underlying economic activity, the March payroll survey should show continued month-to-month contraction, and the household survey should show a rebound in the unemployment rate. Nonetheless, given the political season and ongoing financial-market crisis, March reporting, again, simply will be brought in as desired by the Administration.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) — The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) reported the "preliminary" estimate revision of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth for fourth-quarter 2007 GDP at 0.63% +/- 3%, which remained statistically indistinguishable from a meaningful contraction. The reported growth was almost unrevised against the "advance" estimate of 0.64%, and it was down from the nonsensical growth of 4.91% for the third quarter. Annual growth reportedly held at 2.47% in revision, down from 2.84% in the third quarter.

The GDP’s fourth-quarter implicit price deflator (inflation measure) rose at an annualized rate of 2.67%, revised upward from the "advance" estimate of 2.56%, versus a 1.04% rate in the third quarter. In contrast, annualized CPI inflation rose to 4.07% in the fourth quarter from 1.87% in the third quarter. Such suggests understated inflation was used to overstate the fourth-quarter GDP estimate. Artificially-low inflation, when used in deflating the GDP, results in an overstatement of the inflation-adjusted GDP growth.

General background note: Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS-Alternate GDP measure suggests that economic reality is much weaker than officially reported. A fourth-quarter year-to-year contraction of roughly 2.3% would have been more in line with underlying fundamentals, past methodologies and the ongoing recession (see the graph in the Alternate Realities section of the Opening Comments). Such reflects some bottom-bouncing with the annual contraction little changed from the SGS-Alternate GDP third-quarter estimate.

With the numbers too thin to generate alternate GDP measures at this time, the BEA will publish, with the next release, estimates of Gross National Product (GNP), where GDP is GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments), and Gross Domestic Income (GDI), which is the theoretical income-side equivalent to the GDP’s consumption-side measure.

General background note: Although the GDP report is the government’s broadest estimate of U.S. economic activity, it is also the least meaningful and most heavily massaged of all major government economic series. Published by the BEA, it primarily has become a tool for economic propaganda.

Next Release (March 27): Based on underlying fundamentals, the "final" estimate revision of annualized quarterly real GDP growth for the fourth quarter should show an actual quarterly contraction, but such is highly unlikely in an election year. The best bet is for the revised growth rate to remain in positive territory, little changed from the latest estimate.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) — As discussed in the March 14th Flash Update, the BLS reported that the seasonally-adjusted February CPI-U (I.6) was "virtually unchanged" with a gain of 0.03% (up 0.29% unadjusted) +/- 0.12%, versus an increase of 0.39% (0.50% unadjusted) in January. February’s annual CPI inflation eased to 4.03% from January’s 4.28%. Such a result was not believable in a world of rapidly rising food and energy prices. Per Department of Energy price reports, gasoline rose by 0.5% in February, instead of dropping 0.6% as reported by the BLS. The difference in that number alone would have had reported CPI rising by the consensus expectation of 0.3%.

Year-to-year annual inflation would resume its upturn in March 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the 0.46% monthly increase seen in March 2007. The difference would directly add to or subtract from February’s annual inflation rate of 4.03%.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) (I.5) — the substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by the manipulators and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — was 3.69% in February, down from 3.91% in January. Recent revisions to this series are discussed and graphed in the Opening Comments section.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology (I.7), annual CPI growth was about 7.3% in February, down from 7.6% in January. The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (I.8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was roughly 11.6% in February versus 11.8% in January. The eight levels of annual inflation, I.1 to I.8, are detailed in the table in the Alternate Realities section, along with the graph of SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation.

Next Release (April 16): Monthly March CPI inflation should rise sharply, if the depressed energy and food prices reported in February are allowed to show anything close to a realistic catch-up. If seasonally-adjusted monthly CPI inflation for March 2008 exceeds 0.46%, which it should, then annual CPI inflation will increase by the difference. Fundamental reporting risks generally favor an upside surprise to market expectations, but targeted manipulation, as was seen in the February report, still is of high risk given the deteriorating systemic conditions and the Fed’s having abandoned any pretext of trying to contain inflation. While some upside movement in core inflation had started to surface in January reporting, all these numbers now may be held hostage to the Fed’s need to show that inflation is not a problem and hence does not need to be contained.

 Other Troubled Key Series

Federal Deficit — As discussed in the March 13th Flash Update, the officially gimmicked federal deficit deepened significantly in February 2008, to $175 .6 billion for the month, versus $120.0 billion the year before. For the second month, the deterioration in annual monthly comparisons reflected plunging tax receipts as well as surging outlays. That put the rolling 12-month deficit through February 2008 at $263.9 billion versus $192.7 billion in February 2007. Where the annual "improvement" in the deficit at fiscal year-end 2007 (September 30th) stood at $85.4 billion, the differential now has turned into a net deterioration of $55.6 billion.

Viewing the change in gross federal debt bypasses several of the regular reporting manipulations and is a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the official, gimmicked deficit reporting. Gross federal debt stood at $9.358 trillion at the end of February 2008, up $120 billion for the month and up $580 billion from February 2007, which in turn was up $508 billion from February 2006. As of January 31, 2008, the gross federal debt stood at $9.238 trillion, up $9 billion for the month, but it was up by $620 billion from January 2007, which in turn was up by $511 billion from January 2006.

The federal government’s fiscal 2007 (year-ended September 30th) official accounting-gimmicked deficit narrowed to $162.8 billion from $248.2 billion in 2006. For fiscal year-end 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $9.007 trillion, up by $500 billion from 2006, which was up $574 billion from 2005. As discussed in the December 2007 SGS Newsletter’s Reporting/Market Focus, the GAAP-based deficit for fiscal-year 2007 topped $4 trillion, which remains my best estimate at this time.

The Bush Administration now projects a gimmicked deficit of $410 billion for fiscal 2008, up from $163 billion in 2007. With no allowance for a recession in the assumptions underlying deficit the projections (the Administration forecasts real 2008 GDP growth at 2.7%), the final 2008 numbers should be much worse than the current Administration estimates. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and have started to reflect the economy’s mounting problems.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance — The trend in annual growth continued to deteriorate. On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended March 8th, annual growth rose to 6.4%, up from 5.9% in the 17 weeks ended February 2nd. A rising growth trend in new claims is an economic negative.

General background note: More often than not, week-to-week volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly claims numbers is due to the Labor Department’s efforts to seasonally adjust these numbers around holiday periods (such as Martin Luther King’s Birthday and Presidents’ Day). The Labor Department has demonstrated an inability to do such adjusting successfully. When the new claims series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings — February’s seasonally-adjusted monthly real earnings rose by 0.3%, thanks to the unbelievably low 0.0% inflation reported for the month. Such followed an unrevised 0.5% monthly drop in January and a 0.1% decline in December. Annual change in February narrowed to a 0.8% contraction, following a 1.4% fall in January and a 1.0% drop in December.

General background note: Gyrations in the poor quality of reported CPI growth account for most month-to-month volatility in this series. Adjusting for the major upside biases built into the CPI-W inflation measure used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series shows the average worker to be under severe financial stress in an ongoing structuralrecession.

Retail Sales — As discussed and graphed in the Opening Comments, real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales is confirming a recession in place, with the year-to-year real change in the three-month moving average version of the series turning negative.

The Census Bureau reported seasonally-adjusted February retail sales down by 0.56% (down 0.71% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), following a revised 0.43% (previously a 0.33%) gain in January. On a year-to-year basis, February retail sales rose 2.58% versus a revised 4.00% (was 3.85%) in January. Both the monthly and annual changes reflected deepening contractions, net of inflation.

Core Retail Sales. Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 0.55% (a decline of 0.76% net of revisions) for the month of February, after increasing by a revised 0.15% (previously 0.11%) in January. The decline in gasoline and food prices suggested by the retail sales report was confirmed in the February CPI report, but the numbers are not credible as discussed in the CPI section.

Next Release (April 14): Underlying fundamentals suggest ongoing weakness and a likely weaker than expected showing for March retail sales. The annual change should continue underwater after inflation adjustment, consistent with an ongoing recession. Going forward, inflation-adjusted monthly and annual contractions should be quite regular.

Industrial Production – Seasonally-adjusted January industrial production rose by 0.1% (plus 0.2% net of revisions), following a 0.1% gain (previously unchanged) in December. Year-to-year change rose to a 2.2% gain in January, up from 1.7% (previously1.6%) in December.

Next Release (March 17): Look for historical benchmark revisions on March 28th to show weaker than previously reported growth. The February production numbers are expected to start declining, in line with the purchasing managers survey’s manufacturing indicators and with continued real (inflation-adjusted) weakness in new orders for durable goods. Such is reasonable. Monthly contractions in this series should become regular, with the erratic but generally slowing annual growth eventually turning negative.

New Orders for Durable Goods — The usually volatile durable goods orders fell by a seasonally-adjusted 5.3% (down by 6.1% net of revisions) in January, following a revised 4.4% (previously by 5.2%) increase in December. On a year-to-year basis, January’s new orders rose by 3.0% versus 4.2% (previously 5.0%) in December. Smoothed using a six-month moving average, annual growth (net of inflation) remained negative and an ongoing recession signal.

The closely followed nondefense capital goods new orders fell by 8.1% (8.0% net of revisions), after rising by 5.5% (previously 5.4%) in December. January’s year-to-year change was an increase of 14.7%, following a 7.7% increase in December.

General background note: Durable goods orders lost its status as a solid leading economic indicator when the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders in 2002.

Trade Balance — This series appears to be under increasing manipulation with a resulting understatement as to the scope of the trade deficit in goods and services. In particular, the services trade numbers, which largely are guesstimates, have been used to mute partially the deficit reported in goods trading. Oil prices and related trade volume also continue to be understated. The annual numbers for 2007 are reviewed in the Reporting/Market Focus.

That said, the seasonally-adjusted January trade deficit was reported at $58.2 billion, somewhat wider than the revised December deficit of $57.9 billion, but December was revised downward from $58.8 billion. Those numbers should help keep the "final" estimate of fourth-quarter GDP growth above water.

Reflecting "improved" estimates of the services sector, the overall deficit for 2007 was revised to $708.5 billion from the prior month’s estimate of $711.6 billion, narrowed from the reported 2006 deficit of $758.5 billion. The recasting of monthly seasonal adjustments threw the monthly distribution of the 2007 deficit more heavily into the early months of the year, which, fortuitously, again will help the upcoming "final" estimate of fourth-quarter GDP growth.

The value of imported oil still appears to be seriously understated in terms of pricing. The average imported price for oil rose to $84.09 per barrel in January, up from $82.76 in December and $79.65 in November.     

Next Release (April 10): Underlying reality still favors sharp deterioration in the monthly February trade deficit, but the government can play games with this series as long as it wants to play them. Given the impact of the series on the currency markets and on GDP reporting, realistic numbers may not be seen for some time come.

Consumer Confidence — February consumer confidence numbers tumbled both in terms of monthly and annual change. For February 2008, the Conference Board Confidence measure plunged by 14.1% for the month, after falling by 3.6% (previously 3.0%) in January. February’s year-to-year change was down by 32.6%, sinking from January’s 20.8% annual decline.

The University of Michigan Sentiment measure also plunged, down by 9.7% for the month of February, following January’s monthly gain of 3.8%. February’s year-to-year decline also deepened, down by 22.5% in February versus a 19.1% decline in December. These lagging, not leading, indicators tend to reflect the tone of the popular financial media and are fully consistent with an ongoing and deteriorating inflationary-recession.

General background note: The Conference Board measure is seasonally adjusted, which can provide occasional, but significant distortion. The adjustment does not make much sense and is of suspect purpose, given that the Conference Board does not release the unadjusted number. The Michigan survey is unadjusted. How does one seasonally-adjust peoples’ attitudes? Also, beware the mid-month Consumer Sentiment release from the University of Michigan. Its sampling base is so small as to be virtually valueless in terms of statistical significance.

Short-Term Credit Measures — Patterns of annual growth in commercial borrowing continue to reflect pressures from the financial system’s solvency crisis, with the declining annual growth for commercial paper outstanding being offset partially by growth in commercial and industrial bank loans. Consumer credit numbers continue to show softness in annual growth, against downwardly revised annual growth rates.

For seasonally-adjusted consumer credit, which includes credit cards and auto loans, but not mortgages, annual growth was reported at 4.5% in January, against 4.1% (previously 5.5%) in December and against 5.1% (previously 5.6%) in November. In the current environment, where inflation-adjusted growth in income is not adequate to support meaningful growth in the personal consumption component of GDP, GDP growth only can come from temporary debt expansion or savings liquidation. Accordingly, stagnating growth in consumer debt expansion remains an ongoing constraint on economic growth.

The ongoing large revisions in the consumer credit series confirm the Fed’s inability to track bank activities accurately, on a timely basis. Similar issues are evident in the Fed’s quarterly flow-of-founds accounting for the banking system and, to a certain extent, are an exacerbating factor in the current solvency crisis.

Commercial borrowing growth varied sharply, again. Annual change in February commercial paper outstanding showed a 9.1% contraction, versus a 6.2% contraction in January and a 10.1% annual decline in December. In contrast, annual growth in January commercial and industrial loans rose by 20.6%, versus 20.1% in December, and against 19.1% in November. The relative instability in commercial paper continues, though somewhat abated, with resultant credit difficulties placing a major dent in broad business activity and continuing to disrupt banking system stability.

Producer Price Index (PPI) — The seasonally-adjusted January finished goods PPI rose by 1.0% (0.8% unadjusted) following a revised 0.3% decline (previously down by 0.1% and down by 0.4% unadjusted) in December. The December revision reflected recalculations of the monthly seasonal factors and reweighting of components, which tended to throw more reported inflation back into the first half of 2007.

Annual PPI inflation for January rose to 7.4% from 6.3% in December. Seasonally-adjusted intermediate and crude goods rose by 1.4% and 2.5% respectively, after easing by 0.2% and rising by 1.1% (previously 1.0%) in December.

Next Release (March 18): Given what appears to have been a deliberate understatement of the February CPI, one has to favor a downside "surprise" in the February PPI, against market expectations of around 0.3%. Nonetheless, allowing for the regular random volatility of the monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months generally should favor official results coming in well above market expectations, as the effects of oil prices increasingly permeate the broad economy. As with the CPI, the core PPI inflation rate still is long overdue for a meaningfully upside move, but such still may be further delayed by the ongoing financial-market needs of the battered Federal Reserve.

Better-Quality Numbers

General background note: The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

 Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders — As discussed in the January SGS Reporting/Market Focus, the Institute for Supply Management (ISM) impaired slightly the quality of its composite indices in last month’s reweightings of the composite indices components.

As currently published, the February 2008 manufacturing fell into recession territory, dropping below 50.0 to 48.3, versus 50.7 in January. The various components of the ISM composite indices are diffusion indices, which are calculated as the percent of positive responses from the ISM survey plus one-half of the neutral or unchanged responses. Hence, a reading below 50.0 indicates a contracting series.

The February new orders index remained in contraction, at 49.1, down from 49.5 in January. Distortions from the seasonal factors calculated by the Department of Commerce can be minimized by viewing the series using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the February new orders index fell by 9.5%, following a 3.8% decline in January. The new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The measure gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 35.5% in April of 2004. As an SGS early warning indicator of a major economic shift, the new orders measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating a signal of pending recession.

Also of significance, the manufacturing employment component moved deeper into recession territory at 46.0 in February, down from 47.1 in January.

Service Sector Composite Index. This series does not have much meaning related to overall business activity, since new order activity at law firms, dentists, hospitals or fast-food restaurants has little obvious relationship to broad economic activity. With that as background, the February services composite index remained below 50.0, at 49.3, which was up from 44.6 in January.

Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. Covering the real estate and banking industries, among others, the February employment component remained in contraction territory at 46.9, up from to 43.9 in January. The prices paid component is covered in the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) — The Conference Board’s seasonally-adjusted January help-wanted advertising index fell to 21, from 22 in December, tying the historic low reported in November 2007. Year-to-year change was down 32.3% in January, versus 33.3% in December, with the annual growth in the three-month moving average dropping to 31.2% from a 22.6% decline in December. Despite some of the historic weakness in the series due to the loss of newspaper business to the Internet, the HWA is a solid leading indicator to the broad economy and to the monthly employment report, and it still is indicative of a severe deepening in an ongoing recession.

Where the series does not include a measure of on-line advertising, recent indices developed to measure Internet activity have serious definitional problems and still are too young to be meaningful indicators. That said, the Conference Board has reported that annual growth in its on-line measure of help-wanted advertising slowed meaningfully in January and February.

Housing Starts — The housing numbers have started to bottom-bounce, with January’s seasonally-adjusted housing starts up by 0.8% (up 0.6% net of revisions) +/- 10% (95% confidence interval), following a 14.8% (revised from 14.2%) plunge in December starts. January’s level was down by 27.9% year-to-year, well shy of the 48.6% annual decline seen at the trough of the 1990/1991 recession.

Still signaling housing industry problems, January building permits were down 3.0% (down by 1.9% net of revisions) for the month, down 33.1% year-to-year, while new home sales fell 2.8% for the month and 33.9% for the year. January existing home sales eased by 0.4% for the month and were down 23.4% year-to-year.

Inflation Indicators

Money Supply — As graphed and as discussed more extensively in the Opening Comments, the estimate for annual growth in the SGS-Ongoing M3 is a record-high 16.9%, up from 15.5% in January. The current reading tops the prior high growth rate of 16.4% seen in June of 1971, and has ominous implications for a surge in monetary inflation.

For February 2008, annual change for monthly M1 was virtually no change, after a 0.6% decline in January. February M2 annual growth surged to 6.9% from 5.8% in January.

With the caveats expressed below on the following table, here are the monthly-average levels for M3:

Shadow Government Statistics Ongoing M3    (Estimated seasonally-adjusted monthly average, $ Trillions)
Feb 06  10.303    Sep 06  10.855    Apr 07  11.727(r) Nov 07  12.835(r)Mar     10.362    Oct     10.990    May     11.868    Dec     12.927(r)Apr     10.429    Nov     11.102    Jun     11.932(r) Jan 08  13.069(r)May     10.502    Dec     11.227    Jul     12.012    Feb     13.357(p)Jun     10.562    Jan 07  11.315    Aug     12.224    Jul     10.643    Feb     11.430    Sep     12.419(r)    Aug     10.746    Mar     11.565(r) Oct     12.660(r)
      (r)Revised (based on Federal Reserve revisions to underlying series).      (p)Preliminary.      NOTE OF CAUTION: The estimates of monthly levels best are used for       comparisons with other dollar amounts, such as nominal GDP. While       the estimates are based on seasonally-adjusted Federal Reserve data,       great significance cannot be read into the month-to-month changes,       as was the case when the Fed published the series. The most meaningful      way to view the data is in terms of year-to-year change.

 

General background note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimates, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS Newsletter for methodology. The indicated M3 levels are our best estimate and are provided at specific subscriber request. Keep in mind that regular revisions in the related Fed series affect historical M3. Usually, annual growth rates hold, although levels may shift a little. We have not attempted, nor do we plan to recreate a revised historical series for an M3 monthly-average level going back in time. The purpose of the SGS series was and is to provide monthly estimates of ongoing annual M3 growth. We are comfortable with those numbers and that our estimated monthly growth rates are reasonably close to what the Fed would be reporting, if it still reported M3.

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices — The February 2008 prices paid indices remained strong in the purchasing managers composite surveys. The indices reflect upside inflation pressures from a variety of factors, including high oil prices, and continue to signal broad inflation problems ahead.

On the manufacturing side, the February price index eased to 75.5 from 76.0 in January. On a three-month moving average basis, though, February’s 37.6% year-to-year gain was slightly stronger than January’s 37.3%. The manufacturing price indicator is not seasonally adjusted and, therefore, is generally the better indicator of pricing activity.

On the non-manufacturing side, the seasonally-adjusted February prices diffusion index came in at 67.9, down from 70.7 in January. On a three-month moving-average basis, February’s annual gain was 24.5%, versus 26.9% in January.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflationary pressure. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising prices.

Oil Prices – After fluctuating shy of the $100 per barrel mark for months, the price of oil now is trading comfortably on the upside of that old psychological price barrier. For February 2008, the monthly-average West Texas Intermediate spot price (St. Louis Fed) rose 2.6% to $95.35 from January’s $92.95, setting a new all-time monthly-average high. Against last year’s average, February’s level was up by 60.9%, compared with January’s 70.3%. These levels of growth continue to signal ongoing disastrous news is in the offing for official CPI, PPI and GDP annual inflation reporting.

As of Friday, March 14th, West Texas Intermediate closed at $110.21 per barrel, spot, just shy of the prior day’s record high $110.33. Oil price movement remains highly volatile, but generally should trend higher and set new record highs in the months ahead, despite a U.S. and possible global recession. Irrespective of how high oil prices may go, or how much they may fall back in short-lived profit taking, current prices are well above levels that will trigger debilitating U.S. inflation. Regardless of any near-term price swings, meaningful upside risks to oil prices remain in place, from the still-unfolding dollar catastrophe and ongoing OPEC actions and rumblings, as well as from ever-volatile Middle Eastern tensions, mounting political tensions in South America, and other supply and demand issues.

General background note: In the United States, high oil prices have spiked and will continue to spike basic inflation, and even the gimmicked "core" inflation measures — net of changes in food and energy prices — are beginning to inch higher. Historically high oil prices still are working their way through all levels of U.S. economic activity, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. These broad inflationary pressures will remain intact despite any near-term oil price swings, and "core" inflation eventually should catch-up with full inflation reporting.

 

Reporting/Market Focus

Trade Deficit Woes MountDespite Reported Improvement
Trade Deficit Has Cost Over 7 Million
U.S. Jobs

The U.S. trade deficit has been in a downhill spiral since the mid-1990s, but it reportedly improved on an annual basis for 2007, per the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) and the Census Bureau (Census), which share reporting of this key series. Based on the revisions included in the reporting of the January trade deficit, the 2007 deficit in goods and services narrowed to $708.5 billion from a record $758.5 billion in 2006. Such broke out as the merchandise trade deficit narrowing to $815.4 billion in 2007, from $838.3 billion in 2006, and the services sector showing a $106.9 billion surplus in 2007, up from $79.7 billion in 2006. This reporting is of extremely poor quality, but it has helped spike growth in recent GDP reporting. The deficit is reflected in the net exports account, where the trade shortfall is subtracted from GDP. Hence, a narrowing of the deficit adds to reported GDP growth.

 The reporting problems are twofold. First, the services surplus is meaningless, a guesstimate added some years back to offset the deteriorating merchandise sector. While trade in services indeed needs to be counted, the BEA and Census have no way of generating meaningful data. Second, over the last year or two, unusual reporting of oil prices and imports has understated the dollar volume of oil imports, which has had the effect of understating the trade deficit.

Such considerations aside, the annual data published with the December 2007 report show not so happy trade-balance developments with key trading partners. As shown in the accompanying graphs, Communist China remains the country with single largest surplus against the United States, with the U.S. showing a record deficit there of $256.3 billion in 2007, versus $232.6 billion in 2006.

As to NAFTA, conditions also have deteriorated, with the U.S. deficit against Mexico and Canada widening to $138.5 billion in 2007, versus $136.1 billion in 2006. All the deterioration there, however, was against Mexico, where the deficit widened to $74.3 billion from $64.3 billion. The deficit against Canada narrowed for the second year to $64.2 billion from $71.8 billion.

As discussed in previous newsletters, when countries enter into NAFTA-like trade agreements, and none of the parties are at full employment, the trade and manufacturing benefit will shift primarily to the country with the cheapest labor.

Given the current official estimate of nominal net exports in fourth-quarter 2007 at an annual rate of negative $711.3 billion, against nominal GDP (excluding net export accounting) of $14.795 trillion, implies that the ongoing deficit has cost over 7 million jobs, which, coincidentally, is just shy of official unemployment of 7.4 million estimated for fourth-quarter 2007. More importantly, that trade-linked number also accounts for the bulk of discouraged workers and other marginally attached workers who are not counted in the official U.3 unemployment rate. See the Alternate Realities section in the Opening Comments for further information on the unemployment measures.

 Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for March

The Reporting/Market Focus on illegal immigration’s impact on the economy and economic reporting, previously scheduled for the current newsletter, has been pushed back another couple of months, so as to allow for further research. The April Reporting/Market Focus will be decided nearer to the time, based on factors that are tied to the evolving market and financial-system conditions.

 ___________________________________________

NOTICE TO SUBSCRIBERS: As discussed in the March 11th Flash Update, this has become the February/March newsletter. The Hyperinflation Special Issue will follow around March 31st. The April SGS Newsletter is targeted for the week of April 14th. Flash Updates and Alerts will continue to be posted in response to key economic or financial-market developments.
     Going forward, the regular SGS Newsletter will be published 11 to 12 times per year, dated when posted, and will be supplemented irregularly with Special Issues of general interest. As has been the case in recent months, the newsletter also will be supplemented regularly with increasingly frequent Flash Updates and with Alerts as needed.

PLEASE NOTE: Earlier editions of the SGS Newsletter referenced in the text, can be found on the Archives tab at www.shadowstats.com.

OCCASIONALLY, BRIEF UPDATES ARE COMMUNICATED DIRECTLY BY E-MAIL. IF YOU ARE NOT RECEIVING E-MAIL COMMUNICATIONS FROM US, PLEASE LET US KNOW at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or by using the "Feedback" option on www.shadowstats.com.

 



 

 



 

 



 

 



 

Flash Update

Friday, March 14th, 2008
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
March 14, 2008
__________
 
February’s Unchanged CPI Not Credible
 
__________
 
PLEASE NOTE: This morning’s CPI report was of such poor quality to justify a brief Flash Update. The SGS-Alternate CPI on the Alternate Data tab of www.shadows.com, will be updated later today.
 

Artificially Low Energy and Food Inflation Add to Downside CPI Distortion. This morning’s (March 14th) release of "unchanged" February CPI was as close to overt data manipulation from the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) as you get. I even heard a news reporter on radio asking, "How’d they come up with that?" 

How they (the BLS) came up with that was through the use of unbelievably low food and energy inflation. For example, the data show a not-seasonally-adjusted 0.6% decline in gasoline prices for February. The data are supposed to be reflective of a monthly average, not a point in time as used in the Producer Price Index (PPI). Yet, calculating the change in monthly average national gasoline prices, all grades, based on data published by the Depart of Energy shows a monthly gain of 0.5%. The difference with that number, alone, would have brought in the seasonally-adjusted CPI-U at a 0.3% monthly gain, which was the consensus forecast.

What could be the motivation for gimmicking the CPI beyond the usual distortions? With the markets in turmoil, gold pushing $1,000, the U.S. dollar tumbling and the Fed about to ease again, all are helped a little bit by the false data.

These numbers were well planned and did reflect the unusual patterns indicated in yesterday’s Flash Update on the retail sales. Retail sales for February remain negative both month-to-month and year-to-year, net of the gimmicked inflation.

With the preceding as background, here are the hard numbers. The BLS reported that the seasonally-adjusted February CPI-U (I.6) was "virtually unchanged" with a gain of 0.03% (up 0.29% unadjusted) +/- 0.12%, versus an increase of 0.39% in January (0.50% unadjusted). February’s annual CPI inflation eased to 4.03% from January’s 4.28%.

Year-to-year annual inflation will resume its upturn in March 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the 0.46% monthly increase seen in March 2007. The difference would directly add to or subtract from February’s annual inflation rate of 4.03%.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) — the substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by the manipulators and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — was 3.69% in February, down from 3.91% in January.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth was about 7.3% in February, down from 7.6% in January. The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was roughly 11.6% in February versus 11.8% in January.

Continuing market turmoil and systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged. The next communication should be the full newsletter, due for posting on Monday, March 17th or before. More complete analyses follow then. 

Flash Update

Thursday, March 13th, 2008
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
March 13, 2008
__________
 
"Core" Retail Sales down 0.55% versus 0.56% Decline in Full Series
Budget Deficit Surges
 
__________
 

Unusual Retail Sales Report May Be Low-CPI Set-Up. Seasonally-adjusted February retail sales were reported down by 0.56% (down 0.71% net of revisions) +/- 0.6%, this morning, by the Census Bureau. Such was against a revised 0.4% (previously 0.3%) gain in January. Year-to-year change was a 2.6% gain in February versus a revised 4.0% (was 3.9%) increase in January. Net of inflation, both month-to-month and year-to-year changes continue to deepen in negative territory, a classic condition seen during recessions.

Monthly Core Retail Sales Down 0.55%. The February retail sales report showed unbelievable, but small declines in both food and gasoline sales, suggestive of some coming manipulation of the CPI inflation data. It is possible that higher gasoline prices may be beginning to reduce driving activity, but people still will eat. That said, consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — fell by 0.55% (a decline of 0.76% net of revisions) for the month, after rising by a revised 0.15% (previously 0.11%) in January.

Federal Budget Deficit Widened Sharply. Foreshadowing increasingly abysmal fiscal results for the U.S. government, the budget deficit for February 2008 widened to $175.6 billion against $120.0 billion in February 2007. On a 12-month rolling basis through February 2008, that means that the preceding 12-month deficit now has widened to $263.9 billion versus $192.7 billion in February 2007.

Retail Sales Report Suggests Some Downside Reporting Risk to February CPI Expectations. With both gasoline and food sales off in February retail sales reporting, tomorrow’s February CPI report (Friday, March 14th) may be at some risk of a set-up downside surprise against consensus expectations of roughly 0.3%. Underlying fundamentals otherwise still suggest upside risk. Again, any monthly change above or below a 0.17% gain will add directly to or subtract from the 4.28% annual CPI inflation seen in January. As has recently been the case, market displacements are such that political/financial-market manipulations can bring in any CPI number the Administration or Fed would like.

Ongoing market turmoil and systemic shocks remain within the general outlook, which is unchanged. Barring a major surprise in the CPI or other unusual developments, the next communication should be the full newsletter, due for posting on Monday, March 17th or before. More complete analyses follow in that newsletter. 

Flash Update

Tuesday, March 11th, 2008
 
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
March 11, 2008
__________
 
Solvency Crisis Deteriorates
 
__________
 
NOTICE TO SUBSCRIBERS: With this morning’s emergency actions by the major central banks, my February SGS newsletter has become my February/March newsletter to be published over the coming weekend, when the news and market conditions may be a little more passive. As a result, the upcoming newsletter will include February retail sales and CPI. The Hyperinflation Special Issue will follow the week of March 24th. The April SGS newsletter is targeted for the week of April 14th. Flash Updates and Alerts will continue to be posted in response to key economic or financial-market developments.
     Going forward, the regular SGS newsletter will be published 11 to 12 times per year, dated when posted, and will be supplemented irregularly with Special Issues of general interest. The newsletter will be supplemented regularly with increasingly frequent Flash Updates and with Alerts as needed.
     — Best wishes to all, John Williams
 

The Federal Reserve’s announcement today (March 11th) that it will be providing an added $200 billion in liquidity to the system in a coordinated action with other central banks, on top of the $200 billion emergency funding announced by the Fed on Friday (March 7th), again highlights the depth of and the ongoing deterioration in the banking system’s solvency crisis. The good news is the Fed will create whatever dollars it needs to keep the system from imploding. The bad news is the price that will be paid in higher inflation. Despite any relief rallies that seem to be taking place in the equity and dollar markets, the news here has horrendous implications for the dollar and inflation, corresponding positive implications for gold, and likely continued trouble for equities.

Several readers questioned how the temporary auction facility (TAF) lending was spiking money growth, where the Fed purportedly is neutralizing the monetary impact of that activity. First, it is not obvious that the Fed has been so neutralizing the increased TAF lending. Second, what the Fed appears to be doing is lending against otherwise illiquid mortgage backed securities, providing the illiquid banks with liquidity that would allow somewhat normal functioning, including ongoing expansion of the money supply. When the crisis hit in December that triggered the TAF creation, the systemic liquidity crunch caused a dip in the annual money growth rates. As new or "refreshed" liquidity has been pumped into the system, money growth has resumed its upside movement. 

As to the upcoming February retail sales (Thursday, March 13th) and CPI (Friday, March 14th) reports, retail sales are at fair risk of contracting for the month, despite expectations of a month-to-month gain. In any event, monthly and annual change should be negative, net of inflation. Expectations are around 0.3% for the monthly February CPI gain; anything above 0.17% will add directly to the 4.3% annual CPI inflation seen in January. Risk to inflation reporting appears to be on the upside.

More complete analysis follows in the newsletter. 

Flash Update

Monday, March 10th, 2008
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
March 10, 2008
__________
 
Fed Sets Currency Printing Presses at Full Blast
February M3 Growth at Record 16.8%
 
__________
 
PLEASE NOTE: Last Wednesday, I expected the February newsletter would be posted today, March 10th; instead, it now looks like it will be posted sometime tomorrow. Whenever the newsletter is posted, such will be advised immediately by e-mail. Key developments from late last week are touched upon below and are more fully explored in the newsletter.
     The SGS-Ongoing M3 has been updated for 25 to 27 of 29 days of reporting and is available on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com.
     — Best wishes to all, John Williams
 
The Federal Reserve’s announcement Friday morning (March 7th) that it was increasing its term auction facility (TAF) for troubled banks to $100 billion, and that it additionally would offer a further $100 billion in term repos sent two important signals. First, the bank solvency crisis is intense and is deteriorating rapidly. Second, the Fed has revved up the currency printing presses (the electronic version as noted by Mr. Bernanke several years back) and will continue to create whatever money it has to create in order to prevent a systemic implosion.

Assuming the good news is that the Fed indeed has the wherewithal to prevent a systemic collapse, which it technically does, the bad news is that the price paid for same eventually will be uncontainable inflation. The current estimate for annual growth in February’s SGS-Ongoing M3 is at an historic high rate of 16.8%. The recent spike in broad money growth not so coincidentally began with the introduction of the TAF facility.

The news here literally is abysmal for the U.S. dollar and promises much higher gold prices. With a long-term outlook, gold is a buy at $1,000 per troy ounce. It also will be a buy when it hits $10,000 per troy ounce. The outlook for equities and bonds under these circumstances is not good.

The February employment survey included the usual reporting shenanigans, but it seems to be locking in consensus forecasts of a recession. The reported seasonally-adjusted 63,000 jobs loss for February was a decline of 109,000 net of revisions. Net of the monthly seasonal factor adjustment games, jobs dropped by 146,000, and those numbers were before any consideration of the 135,000 positive bias-factor (birth/death model adjustment) added into the change.

Again, more complete analysis follows in the newsletter.  

Alert

Wednesday, March 5th, 2008
 
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
A L E R T
 
March 5, 2008
__________
 
M3 Growth Hits All-Time High
Hints of Systemic Unraveling Suggest Unusual Problems
 
__________
 

PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Ongoing M3, SGS-Financial-Weighted Dollar and SGS-Alternate GDP all have been updated through February, or for the latest reporting, and are available on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com.  
     Due to a sense elevated risk of systemic instability, today’s publication is an Alert. That and a bad cold have pushed the posting of the February SGS newsletter to next Monday, March 10th. Accordingly, the newsletter will include analysis of the February payroll and unemployment data. The Hyperinflation Special Issue will follow very shortly thereafter.
     — Best wishes to all, John Williams

Risks Mount of Non-Traditional Federal Reserve/Treasury Actions

With roughly 18 to 20 of 29 days of reporting in place, the monthly-average annual growth in the SGS-Ongoing M3 for February likely will top 16.7%, setting an all-time high monthly growth rate for the M3 series (the Federal Reserve’s calculation of the broad money measure dates back to January 1959). The prior annual-growth record was 16.4% in June 1971, and the inflation from excessive money growth at the time was a key factor pressuring the U.S. dollar and leading up to President Nixon’s closing the gold window and imposing wage and price controls in August of that year. The current surge in broad money supply growth has equally ominous implications for monetary inflation and dollar pressures during the next nine to 12 months.

The February 2008 estimate of 16.7% annual M3 growth is up sharply from 15.5% in January and 15.1% in December. The narrower M2 annual growth measure likely will top 6.7% in February, up from 5.8% in January and 5.9% in December. The recent rapid growth in broad money coincides with the U.S. central bank’s establishment and expansion of its temporary auction facility (TAF) at the discount window, which was designed to relieve liquidity strains in a solvency-impaired banking system.

The February 2008 M3 estimate will be updated over the weekend on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com, following the Fed’s Friday afternoon statistical releases.

Signs of Deepening Instabilities and a Caution. When President Nixon floated the dollar in 1973, I was forced to become a day-to-day currency trader in a family business that imported chain saws from West Germany for distribution in the United States. Our product was denominated in Deutschemark, and my previous instincts had worked well in calling for dollar devaluations with enough of a warning to hedge our exposures. Over the several years that followed, I found that my instincts in assessing what was going on in the realm of the currencies and related activities by the affected governments served me well in minimizing potential damage to our business from the general decline in the value of the U.S. dollar. They also worked well in my timing and calling for the 1987 stock market crash.

My instincts also have been wrong a number of times, usually in the direction of being overly cautious. I am referring here to gut instinct, where a large variety of factors — often subtle — come into play, get weighed in judgment and result in a heads up that certain things are at an elevated risk of happening. In play at present are the recent movements in key currencies such as the yen and Swiss franc to relative extremes; growing market recognition of the U.S. economy in deepening recession; U.S. inflation and oil and food prices rising sharply; gold pushing $1,000 per troy ounce.

In combination, these factors all are pushing limits never faced before by the Fed. In conjunction with the banking system’s solvency crisis, the market and economic circumstances have the broad financial system facing its greatest risks of instability or outright collapse in modern times.

Rarely do I get into my instincts in the newsletter but mention them now only because they are telling me that something major could be afoot. Given news of the last day or so, there appears to be a somewhat elevated risk of a surprise action by the authorities, and/or in a large downside break in the currency and equity markets. The potential non-traditional government actions discussed at the end of this section are not predictions, just a heads up as to the type of actions that could be considered.

 I have been contending and still contend that the Federal Reserve will spend every dollar it needs to create in order to prevent the financial system from collapsing. A systemic failure is not an option for the Fed, and any needed bailouts will not be limited to large banks, but also will include related establishments such as the credit insurers. Fed Chairman Ben Bernanke has expressed the desire and has the wherewithal and the ability to prevent a systemic collapse, although much of the salvage operation may be covert. Not to do so would promise a deflationary great depression.

Unfortunately, however, the eventual result of the great bailout will be a hyperinflationary great depression, as discussed in the a three-part hyperinflation series beginning in the December 2006 SGS (see Archives tab at www.shadowstats.com) and as will be updated in the pending Hyperinflation Special Issue.

That said, a headline such as, "Gulf investors may not save Citigroup, Dubai executive says [Dow Jones, March 4, 2008]," suggests all is not going as planned in the systemic bailout. While such stories likely are just part of ongoing negotiations, one would expect that the Fed will make sure that Citigroup does not "fail." A major bank failure is not an option for the Fed; it has intervened in the past with troubled major banks, sometimes with forced mergers or acquisitions. Multiple major banks in trouble could force consideration of non-traditional options.

Also, before Congress yesterday, Chairman Bernanke suggested that banks reduce the principal due on defaulted or troubled mortgages so that homeowners would have positive equity in their properties. Bernanke has to know that such is a near-impossibility for mortgages bundled into structured securities, and that suggests he may have something else in mind for the system.

While there no longer is a gold window to be closed, and where the Fed already has pushed beyond its standard options, non-traditional approaches could be under consideration. A couple of years back, Mr. Bernanke noted that the Fed was free to buy up any securities it wanted to in order to provide liquidity to the system. Such could range from equities to troubled mortgage-backed securities. In other places and other times (sometimes in the United States) actions ranging from nationalization of a banking system; to wage and price controls; to capital controls that restrict non-commercial transference of currency from a country, inhibiting flight from the domestic currency; to other options involving more-direct government control of the financial system have been used in efforts to stabilize banks, inflation or currencies.

While all of these concepts generally are bad ideas, and any form of price or capital-flow controls would lead to major financial-market or market-place disruptions, you might want to consider the potential impact on your circumstances if the government decided to make life more difficult for those tempted to raise prices or to move capital outside the United States. While such controls might seem unlikely at present, we are in an election year, and if oil prices keep rising, cries of price gouging at the gas pump will not be far behind. Politicians might respond. Again, these thoughts are just cautions, not formal forecasts of government actions to come.  

Beyond direct market interventions, jawboning, overt and covert bailout operations, and any short-lived gyrations these factors cause in the markets, the general outlook for the months ahead remains for heavy selling of the U.S. dollar, heavy buying of gold, a severe bear market in equities, and a sharp rise in long-term interest rates at such time as flight from the dollar becomes a flight to safety outside the dollar.

Pending February Employment Report. Market expectations appear to be for roughly a 25,000 jobs gain in the February payroll report on Friday (March 7th). Based on underlying economic activity, a month-to-month contraction would be more realistic, with the household survey showing a rebound in the unemployment rate. Nonetheless, given the political season and ongoing financial market distress, an upside revision in January jobs (currently a monthly loss of 17,000), so as to show positive month-to-month change, remains a fair bet. February reporting simply will be brought in as desired by the Administration and/or Fed.

Full updates on recent economic reporting will follow in the February SGS newsletter.

_______________________________________________
The February SGS is targeted for posting March 10th. An e-mail advice will be made of all Newsletter and Flash Update/Alert postings.

CNN Money Interview

Thursday, February 28th, 2008

John Williams is interviewed on CNN by Greg Hunter.   The record growth in M3 is discussed and its implications for future inflation.

Click here or on the image to view the interview.

Greg Hunter and John Williams on screen

Flash Update

Thursday, February 28th, 2008
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
February 28, 2008
__________
 
Recession Will Not Contain the Inflation Problem
Money Growth Appears to be Surging
 
__________
 
PLEASE NOTE: Barring unusual developments in the markets or in current travel, the February SGS newsletter will be posted next Wednesday, March 5th. The still-pending Hyperinflation Special Issue should follow very shortly thereafter.
– Best wishes to all, John Williams
 

Bernanke Remains Focused on Banking System Solvency, or Lack of Same

When inflation is driven by strong economic demand, slowing business activity can help ease inflationary pressures. The current inflation problem, however, is not due to strong demand for goods and services, but rather it is due to commodity supply (oil and food) distortions, a weakening U.S. dollar and accelerating growth in the broad money supply. Accordingly, the current downturn in the economy will not bring meaningful relief from rising prices.

Fed Chairman Bernanke testified before Congress yesterday and is doing so again today, that the slowing economy will take care of the inflation problem, hence, the Fed can concentrate on preventing recession by further cutting the fed funds rate. With both the Fed and Wall Street now tacitly recognizing the inflationary recession, the same pitch on "recession will cure inflation" is being circulated widely in the popular financial media. Irrespective of economic and inflation conditions, however, the Fed’s primary focus and concern remain maintaining the solvency and the functioning of the banking system. Performance on Wall Street is closely tied to that, and such factors dominate Fed policy to the exclusion of serious risks to inflation and U.S. dollar stability. Both the currency and gold markets are reacting appropriately, despite heavy intervention aimed at propping the U.S. dollar and at depressing the price of gold.

In fairness, there is little the Fed can do to stimulate the economy, reduce inflation or salvage the dollar, whereas the U.S. central bank should be able to prevent a collapse of the banking system, on which it is concentrating its efforts.

The economic data of the last week or so consistently signaled recession and mounting inflation pressures. The fourth-quarter GDP revision was nil, with annualized real (inflation-adjusted) quarterly growth at 0.6%, and annual growth at 2.5%, both unchanged from prior reporting. January help-wanted advertising and February consumer confidence both plunged month-to-month and year-to-year, moving deeper into recession territory. Annual contractions in January existing and new home sales also remained deep in recession territory, while the ever volatile new orders for durable goods series not only fell month-to-month in January, but also remained in contraction on an annual basis, net of inflation.

On the inflation front, the upside surge in January PPI offered a mild surprise to the markets, as did the prior week’s CPI number, and both series even showed some firming in energy and food-free "core" inflation. Then there is the money supply.

February M3 Growth Accelerates.  The Fed’s propping of the banking system appears to be spiking broad money growth. If the numbers for the first 11 days of February just hold as they are for the balance of the month, the year-to-year change in February’s monthly average for M2 would surge to 6.6% from 5.8% in January, while the annual growth in the February average for the SGS-Ongoing M3 would jump to a near-record 16.5% from 15.5% in January. Such activity suggests explosive monetary inflation in the year ahead.

Full updates on the above economic reporting will follow in the February SGS newsletter.

 

_______________________________________________

The February SGS is targeted for posting March 5th, and the March SGS is targeted for late in the week of March 24th. An e-mail advice will be made of all Newsletter and Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Wednesday, February 20th, 2008
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
February 20, 2008
__________

Monthly CPI Surge of 0.64% Masked by Seasonal Factor Revisions

January Annual CPI Inflation at 4.28% (11.8% SGS-Alternate)

 __________

 PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Alternate CPI will be updated through January 2008 reporting later today on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowtats.com.
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 Revisions Show Stronger Inflation

Annual revisions resulted in the reporting of a pattern of stronger monthly CPI inflation in the second half of 2007, which also had the effect of reducing January’s reported monthly inflation. Of further significance, particularly as to downside risk for the GDP benchmark revisions in July, the Chained-CPI-U annual growth was revised upwards sharply in 2007.

Except for outright errors, the not-seasonally-adjusted CPI never is revised. The adjusted numbers, however, are changed each year, and the latest revisions lowered the previously reported monthly inflation rates for January through May 2007 and upped reported monthly inflation for June through December 2007 (October’s monthly rate was not changed). One effect of the changed seasonal factors is that the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported the adjusted January CPI-U up by 0.40% (0.50% unadjusted) +/- 0.12%, but the adjusted monthly growth rate for January was up by 0.64% net of the revisions. December now is up by 0.36% (previously 0.30%) for the month. January’s annual CPI inflation rate firmed to 4.28% from December’s 4.08% (unadjusted annual growth was not affected by the revisions).

Year-to-year annual inflation likely will continue its upturn in February 2008 reporting, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the 0.30% monthly increase now seen in February 2007. The difference will directly add to or subtract from January’s annual inflation rate of 4.28%.

As reported, the January CPI continues to show monthly and annual growth in retail under water, net of inflation. January real (net of inflation) average weekly earnings also were reported today as down 0.5% for the month, down 1.4% year-to-year. Both of these results tend to confirm a deepening inflationary recession. 

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U), the substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by the manipulators and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U, was 3.91% in January up from a revised 3.69% (previously 3.41%) in December. The C-CPI generally moves in tandem with the personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflator of the GDP. Any upwards revision to GDP inflation would result in an offsetting downwards revision to real GDP growth.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth was about 7.6% in January, up from 7.4% in December. The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was roughly 11.8% in January, up from 11.7% in December.

Housing Starts Bottom Bounce. The reported 0.8% (0.6% net of revisions) +/- 9.6% seasonally-adjusted gain in January housing starts was statistically indistinguishable from a contraction and was little more than bottom bouncing. Year-to-year change was down by 27.9%.

Further details on current economic reporting follow in the February newsletter.

 

_______________________________________________
The February SGS is targeted for posting in the week of March 3rd. An e-mail advice will be made of its and intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Saturday, February 16th, 2008
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
February 16, 2008

__________

Money Supply Growth Surges Anew

Nonborrowed Reserves Plummet Further

SGS Will Continue Abandoned Government Economic Indicators Service

__________

PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Ongoing M3 annual growth rates have been updated for full-month reporting of January and for the latest Federal Reserve revisions. The new data have been posted to the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowtats.com. Also, please see the ANNOUNCEMENT below as to the SGS continuation of the Department of Commerce’s Economic Indicators Service.
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

Financial Crises Intensify

With New York Governor Eliot Spitzer telling bond insurers that they have less than a week to find new capital, following a failed municipal bond auction, the bond insurer ratings crisis is coming to a head. "Bonds sold by U.S. municipal borrowers with rates set through periodic auctions failed to attract enough buyers as banks including Goldman Sachs Group Inc., and Citicorp Inc. that run the bidding won’t commit their own capital to the debt [Bloomberg, Feb. 13]."

My betting remains that a private investor will enter the fray and save the day, with covert backing of the Fed. Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke cannot afford to have any part of the system fail, and, accordingly will create whatever cash is needed to keep the system afloat. If not resolved, this circumstance offers significant systemic risk.

Directly tied to the above are the solvency problems within the banking system. Bank solvency has been papered over by the Fed with its Term Auction Facility (TAF), but the underlying problems do not seem to be improving.

Nonborrowed Reserves in Freefall. Nonborrowed reserves (see January SGS newsletter) have moved sharply into negative territory in the latest reporting, with the daily average for the two weeks ended February 13th at minus $19.6 billion (not seasonally adjusted). While total reserves of U.S. depository institutions are stable and at normal levels, and the banking system appears functional, lending at the Fed’s discount window through the new term auction facility (TAF) has risen to a record $60 billion. That lending dwarfs total reserves of a seasonally-adjusted $42.1 ($40.9 unadjusted) billion and suggests that the banking system remains unstable in its still-unfolding solvency/liquidity crisis. If the crisis were over, TAF lending would be at zero — not exploding by $20 billion per month — and banks again would be willing to lend to each other in the overnight markets.

A comment by the Federal Reserve Board (February 7, 2008) on the "Recent Declines in Nonborrowed Reserves," goes through the mechanics and arithmetic of why nonborrowed reserves are negative. It does not, however, address the disquieting implications for the financial system of the soaring TAF lending. Following is the Fed’s comment:

"The H.3 statistical release indicates that nonborrowed reserves of depository institutions have declined substantially since mid-December to a level that is now negative. This development reflects the provision of a large volume of reserves through the Term Auction Facility (TAF) and has no adverse implications for the availability of reserves to the banking system.

"By definition, nonborrowed reserves are equal to total reserves minus borrowed reserves. Borrowed reserves are equal to credit extended through the Federal Reserve’s regular discount window programs as well as credit extended through the TAF. To maintain a level of total reserves consistent with the Federal Open Market Committee’s target federal funds rate, increases in borrowed reserves must generally be met by a commensurate decrease in nonborrowed reserves, which is accomplished through a reduction in the Federal Reserve’s holdings of securities and other assets. The negative level of nonborrowed reserves is an arithmetic result of the fact that TAF borrowings are larger than total reserves."

In his Senate testimony on February 14th, however, Mr. Bernanke touched upon some of the underlying bank solvency issues. Cutting through the happy Fed-speak, the problems that led to setting up the TAF and that continue to justify the expanding TAF lending are tied to questions of bank solvency (a.k.a. balance sheet pressures/capacity and liquidity):

"The banking system has been highly profitable in recent years and entered this episode [crisis] with strong capital positions. Some institutions have responded to their recent losses by raising additional capital.  Notwithstanding these positive factors, the unexpected losses and the increased pressure on their balance sheets have prompted banks to become protective of their liquidity and balance sheet capacity and, thus, to become less willing to provide funding to other market participants, including other banks."

Money Supply Growth on the Rise. In tandem with surging TAF lending, late-January and early-February reporting, and benchmark revisions to large time deposits, have upped the estimates on annual growth for recent months for the SGS-Ongoing M3 series. Respective annual growth estimates have revised upward to 15.2% from 15.0% in October 2007, to 15.6% from 15.4% in November, to 15.1% from 15.0% in December, and to 15.5% from 15.2% in January. If the reporting for the first four-to-six days of February held for the month, annual growth would come in around 16%. Accordingly there is some risk for a sharp upside jump in the February M3 annual growth rate, possibly within striking distance of an all-time high.

Economic Data Games. The Department of Commerce (DOC) has decided to shut down its popular economic indicators site "due to budgetary constraints." No data series are being discontinued, but Uncle Sam is making it more difficult for the public to access the data easily, at the same time that a politically uncomfortable recessionary inflation is starting to surface in official reporting. The budgetary reason given for the action appears to be nonsense. As announced below, Shadow Government Statistics will continue to provide the same (and eventually an expanded) link service for no charge to the general public, and we sure do not have available to us the resources available to the Department of Commerce.   

Trade Deficit Likely to Boost 4th Quarter GDP. The large understatement of December’s seasonally-adjusted trade deficit at $58.8 billion, down from $63.1 billion in November, was enough by itself to justify a politically-convenient upside revision to fourth-quarter GDP growth, where the "preliminary" GDP estimate revision is due at month-end. The drop also was enough to make the 2007 annual shortfall less than 2005’s, and, in conjunction with the severe understatement of the deficit since late in 2006, it was enough for a sharp improvement against 2006’s annual trade shortfall. The reported numbers are not so rosy net of the guesstimated surplus reported for the services sector. A full analysis of these increasingly-rigged data will follow in the February SGS newsletter.

Industrial Production Notches Higher. Seasonally-adjusted January industrial production notched higher by 0.1% (0.2% net of revisions), following a revised gain of 0.1% (previously unchanged) in December. January annual growth rose 2.2%, up from 1.7% in December. Despite the reasonably positive report, the series will go through a benchmark revision on March 28th, at which time some current economic weakness likely will get shifted backwards in history and could provide a starting point for a formal recession call.

Week Ahead. Expectations are for roughly a 0.3% monthly increase in the seasonally-adjusted January CPI-U (due Wednesday, February 20th). Such would move annual CPI inflation from 4.1% to about 4.2%, depending on rounding. Political and Fed needs would tend to favor consensus reporting or below, but underlying fundamentals and the retail sales report suggest some upside risk versus the consensus. Also on Wednesday, January housing starts likely will continue to reflect a deepening recession.

Barring any significant surprises or unusual developments, the next Flash Update is planned for the January CPI release on February 20th. Further details on all the news will follow in the February newsletter.

 

ANNOUNCEMENT

Economic Indicators Continued by SGS. The Department of Commerce (DOC) has decided to discontinue its economic indicators service economicindicators.gov (effective March 1st) "due to budgetary constraints." Shadow Government Statistics is pleased to announce that it will provide — at no charge to the public — a continuation of the basic link service heretofore provided by the DOC’s Economics and Statistics Administration.

The existing government service provides links to the Web pages and recent releases of the Bureau of Economic Analysis and the U.S. Census Bureau. We eventually plan to extend the service to other government or quasi-government reporting agencies, including the Bureau of Labor Statistics, the U.S. Treasury and the Federal Reserve, as well as to provide links to other major economic data providers. We plan for the new service to be operational by Wednesday, February 20, 2008, and its activation will be so advised by e-mail.

 

_______________________________________________

The February SGS is targeted for posting around March 3rd. An e-mail advice will be made of its and intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Wednesday, February 13th, 2008
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
February 13, 2008
__________
 
Real Retail Sales Continue Year-to-Year Collapse
Core Retail Sales Up 0.11% for the Month
 
__________
 
Revisions and Inflation Generate January Retail Sales Gain. Despite the Pollyannaish hype being put out to the markets, the January retail sales report confirmed an ongoing recession. The Census Bureau reported seasonally-adjusted January retail sales up by 0.33% (down 0.01% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% (95% confidence interval), following a 0.45% (previously a 0.37%) decline in December. On a year-to-year basis, January retail sales rose 3.85%, against 3.66% (previously 4.08%) in December.
With December annual CPI at 4.1% and with January’s CPI (due Wednesday, February 20th) expected at roughly 0.3% month-to-month, 4.2% year-to-year, real (inflation-adjusted) annual retail sales will have held in negative territory for two consecutive months, an event rarely seen outside of recessions. The reported January monthly gain likely also will evaporate after inflation adjustment.
Monthly Core Retail Sales up 0.11%. Consistent with the Federal Reserve’s predilection for ignoring food and energy prices, "core" retail sales — retail sales net of grocery store and gasoline station revenues — gained 0.11% (a decline of 0.45% net of revisions) for the month, after falling by a revised 0.64% (previously a decline of 0.36%) in December. 
Barring any significant surprises or unusual developments, the next Flash Update is planned for over the coming weekend. Further details on retail sales will follow in the February newsletter.
 
_______________________________________________
The February SGS is targeted for posting around March 3rd. An e-mail advice will be made of its and intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

January 2008 Edition

Monday, February 11th, 2008

Issue Number 39

January 2008

__________

Bernanke Orders Helicopter Deployment
As Fed Lending to Banks Tops Pre-1933 Bank
Holiday

Inflationary Recession Continues to Intensify

Weak Economy Does Not Mean Lower Gold Prices

Perils of Trying to Mimic Bad Government Data
__________

 

OVERVIEW — OPENING COMMENTS

Fed Saves the System — Almost

But for systemic intervention and manipulations by the Federal Reserve, it appears we might be contemplating a collapsed U.S. banking system and a looming deflationary great depression that could have dwarfed the bad times of the 1930s. Such is the good news. The bad news is that with those same systemic interventions, the Fed is locking in a hyperinflationary great depression in the decade ahead, with the turmoil possibly breaking by 2010 or earlier. 

I have contended for some time that the Fed will do everything in its power — create whatever money/liquidity is necessary — to prevent any portion of the financial system from collapsing. The Fed cannot allow any sector to fail, given the heavy interrelationships and leverage built upon leverage within the broad U.S. financial markets and industry. Failure in one area quickly would implode the entire system.

The crisis containment process still is unfolding. For example, some current market concerns center on how or whether bailouts might be worked for major credit insurers. Despite market uncertainties, the Fed has little choice but to back the credit insurers with some form of overt or covert action, such as a hold-harmless arrangement with a major investor, absent viable independent investors/backers. The alternative of letting the major credit insurers fail or suffer significant ratings downgrades would place the stability of the already shaky banking system at risk.

Systemic vulnerabilities involving financial concerns outside the United States and other central banks only complicate the circumstance. No one has been through a crisis of the current magnitude for three-quarters of a century. Coming into the Great Depression the United States was on the gold standard and enjoyed fiscal and trade surpluses, which offered some meaningful policy options to the government. Today’s environment has had the meaningful options fully depleted, leaving only gimmicks and the government’s ability to print money. 

Helicopter Ben Keeps the Banking System Afloat. Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke picked up his various helicopter nicknames and references as the result of a November 21, 2002 speech he gave as a Fed Governor to the National Economists Club entitled "Deflation: Making Sure ‘It’ Doesn’t Happen Here." The phrase that the now-Fed Chairman Bernanke likely wishes he had not used was a reference to "Milton Friedman’s famous ‘helicopter drop’ of money."

What caused the deflation of the 1930s was the insolvency and collapse of the U.S. banking system, with a resulting implosion in the money supply. Attempting to counter concerns of another Great Depression-style deflation, Bernanke explained in his remarks: "I am confident that the Fed would take whatever means necessary to prevent significant deflation in the United States …" As a quick point of clarification, Mr. Bernanke’s current actions still are in the preventative phase. The money supply is not in collapse, and the Fed has not started dropping cash from helicopters, yet, but the choppers are in the air and at the ready.

For anyone interested, the full text of then-Fed Governor Bernanke’s remarks can be found at: http://federalreserve.gov/boarddocs/speeches/2002/20021121/default.htm. A sampling of other comments from Bernanke’s pro-inflation remarks are included here as general background and will be discussed further detail in the upcoming Hyperinflation Special Issue:

"Indeed, under a fiat (that is, paper) money system, a government (in practice, the central bank in cooperation with other agencies) should always be able to generate increased nominal spending and inflation, even when the short-term nominal interest rate is at zero."

"Like gold, U.S. dollars have value only to the extent that they are strictly limited in supply. But the U.S. government has a technology, called a printing press (or, today, its electronic equivalent), that allows it to produce as many U.S. dollars as it wishes at essentially no cost. By increasing the number of U.S. dollars in circulation, or even by credibly threatening to do so, the U.S. government can also reduce the value of a dollar in terms of goods and services, which is equivalent to raising the prices in dollars of those goods and services. We conclude that, under a paper-money system, a determined government can always generate higher spending and hence positive inflation."

Nonborrowed Reserves Turn Negative. Official fluff aside, the Federal Reserve’s primary mission in recent decades has been and continues to be the solvency of the U.S. banking system. Economic growth and inflation containment are secondary concerns for the U.S. central bank, but they remain the factors put forth for public and financial-market consumption to help justify the Fed’s activities and remain the topics around which Wall Street, White House and Federal Reserve spinmeisters weave their yarns.

As discussed in the February 5th Flash Update, nonborrowed reserves of U.S. depository institutions have turned negative for the first time since before the Great Depression (see Federal Reserve Statistical Release H.3 Aggregate Reserves of Depository Institutions and the Monetary Base). In January 2008, the U.S. banking system met its reserves only by borrowing an amount in excess of 100% of total reserves from the U.S. central bank. In December 2007, total borrowings from the Fed topped 36% of total reserves, then the highest proportion seen since 46% in March 1933, when President Franklin Roosevelt declared a "bank holiday" and closed the banks. The ratio shown in the accompanying graph has been calculated using the historical depository institution borrowings and total reserve data available from the St. Louis Federal Reserve’s database. 

 While the banking system remains intact, the crisis is far from over, and there is a price that will be paid for the Fed’s activities in the not too distant future. Current Fed actions and the precedents being set are locking in an eventual hyperinflationary depression, as will be discussed later in the newsletter and the pending Hyperinflation Special Report.

Mr. Bernanke has vowed that the mistakes made by the Federal Reserve in the 1930s, whereby the banking system and the money supply collapsed into a deepening, deflationary Great Depression, would not be repeated. The latest data on bank reserves suggest that something along the lines of an attempted non-repeat of 1933 is underway. Faced with a devil’s choice, the Fed has acted in the last several months with a series of emergency actions to hold the banking system together and to prevent a debilitating implosion in the money supply. As suggested by Mr. Bernanke’s current actions, the Fed appears ready to create whatever money is needed to prevent a collapse of any portion of the financial system.

Bank reserves deposited with the Federal Reserve and held in vault cash are the fractional backing for transactional bank deposits and, along with currency in circulation, form the base for the money supply. On a daily basis, depository institutions, such as banks, have to have adequate reserves on deposit with a Federal Reserve Bank. When one bank has excess reserves on deposit with the Fed, it usually will lend those funds overnight to a bank that is shy the requisite reserves. Such is the fed funds market, and the interest rate at which overnight funds are lent is the highly publicized fed funds rate that currently is targeted by the Federal Reserve’s policy makers on the Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC).

If a bank is troubled — such as having solvency issues — and other banks are not willing to lend it reserves, the problem bank can go to the Federal Reserve’s discount window and borrow the needed reserves, usually pledging high quality assets as collateral. The discount window’s new Term Auction Facility (TAF), established in December, is a "temporary" term — as opposed to overnight — facility, and accepts a broad range of collateral, including mortgage backed securities. Non-borrowed reserves simply are total reserves less total borrowings of depository institutions from the Fed, and those borrowings now exceed total reserves.

While there are a number of factors involved in the reporting of negative nonborrowed reserves, one has to wonder how functional the U.S. banking system would be at present without the TAF. The Fed described the TAF facility in its December 12th pronouncement as helping to "promote the efficient dissemination of liquidity when the unsecured interbank markets [fed funds] are under stress." In other words, the TAF was established because the fed funds market was not operating normally. As confirmed in its February 1st announcement, the Fed said it "intends to conduct biweekly TAF auctions as long as necessary to address elevated pressures in short-term funding markets."

The growing size of the TAF and recent extension of credit to smaller banks suggest that the solvency crisis for banks is spreading. In the February 1st announcement of two auctions (February 11th and 25th) totaling $60 billion, the Fed noted, "To facilitate participation by smaller institutions, the minimum bid size will be reduced to $5 million, from $10 million in the previous auctions."    

Since the publication of the February 5th Flash Update on this topic, I have received a fair amount of communication from subscribers along with other commentaries published on the current circumstance. One prominent analyst suggested that there really was nothing wrong, just business as usual, but then went on to explain effectively how the system ceased functioning normally due to inter-bank solvency concerns, hence the set-up of the TAF. While TAF lending may supplant some Federal Reserve open market transactions and some inter-bank fed funds borrowing (areas not counted as borrowed reserves), those arenas continue to operate. Open market operations by the New York Fed do not appear to have changed radically. Without the TAF, however, the process of supplying banks with adequate short-term funding was and apparently remains dysfunctional, per the Fed’s ongoing assessment.

The TAF seems to be working, at present. Reserve levels are where they are supposed to be, with fed funds trading reasonably close to target, but the underlying crisis that led to the emergency action also appears to be getting worse. How solvent the troubled banks are remains to be seen. With bank borrowings from the Fed exceeding total reserves, it suggests that the Fed’s lending through its discount window is going beyond meeting reserve functions.  

Recession Broke into the Open in 2007. While deterioration in the housing market and the current recession have been exacerbated by the liquidity/solvency crisis that surfaced in third-quarter 2007, the downturns were well underway before the Federal Reserve and the Administration began to panic, and well before consensus economists began talking about a recession possibility. Such is something of a traditional pattern, where broad recognition of recession generally does not follow until the economic contraction has been underway for up to a year, and often where the recession onset can be blamed on some factor other than the real cause. Such was the case in 2001, when the September 11th terrorist attacks received initial blame for a recession that later was timed officially from March 2001. In like manner, the 1990/1991 recession supposedly began when Iraq invaded Kuwait.

Where the "1990/1991" recession was evident in the fourth-quarter 1989, and the "2001" recession was evident in third-quarter 2000, the current downturn was signaled in mid-2005 and evident in third-quarter 2006, although it is likely that the official beginning of the recession will be placed in late-2007. Another distortion common to recession reporting is that the downturn is declared over long before key data like employment and industrial production have begun to recover (see the Reporting/Market Focus of the October 2007 SGS newsletter). As a result, the current downturn really is little more than the second down-leg of a severe and protracted double-dip recession that began back in 2000. With neither traditional fiscal nor monetary stimulus available to help turn economic activity, the current circumstance is likely to evolve into a hyperinflationary depression (see December 2006 SGS and the pending Hyperinflation Special Report).

What has been at work here since before the 1990/1991 recession is the unfolding of a structural economic change. With the debilitating trade policies and trade deficits of recent decades savaging the domestic U.S. manufacturing base and relatively high-paying production jobs, the average U.S. family has found it increasingly difficult to make ends meet. With household incomes unable to keep up with inflation, families that once were supported by one wage earner now rely on multiple wage earners. Unless inflation-adjusted take-home pay sees sustained growth, there cannot be sustained economic growth. Temporary economic spikes can be generated through debt expansion or savings liquidation, but those short-term measures — encouraged by the Greenspan Fed — largely have reached their limits.

With debt built upon debt and leverage built upon leverage, the current financial system is on the brink of implosion, but Mr. Bernanke is fighting hard to prevent any portion of the system from failing. He has the ability and willingness to create whatever amount of dollars is needed to bailout the system.

These actions, however, have moved the dollar towards the brink of the abyss. The extreme trade deficit suffered by the U.S. in recent decades has dumped excessive dollars on the rest of the world. Those holding the greenbacks, in turn, have provided massive liquidity to the U.S. financial markets, absorbing most of the net U.S. Treasury debt issuance of recent years. At risk with the eventual dumping of the dollar is the dumping of foreign held U.S. securities, which in turn would create a further, severe liquidity crisis in the U.S. markets, one the Fed likely would address by entering the markets and buying unwanted U.S. Treasuries. The dollar-selling trigger is at high risk of being pulled at any time, by a number of factors, including excessive accommodation by the Federal Reserve.

Hyperinflationary Depression. Also looming is the effective and ultimate bankruptcy of the U.S. government. With annual GAAP-based deficits running over $4 trillion per year (see the December 2007 SGS Reporting/Market Focus), the government could raise taxes to 100% of wages, salaries and corporate profits, and it still would be in deficit. The current political machine in Washington keeps spending dollars it does not have and producing programs it cannot fund, in order to buy the support of a dumbed-down electorate. On the spending side, severe reductions are needed in Social Security and Medicare, but no one in power has the political courage to address the issues.

Rather than face outright bankruptcy and default on its obligations, the U.S. government likely will follow the precedent of other nations that have been faced with similar spending problems and rev up the currency printing presses, as described by Helicopter Ben. Such promises an eventual hyperinflation, where the largest bank note prior to the inflation (a $100 bill for the United States) becomes worth more as functional wallpaper than as currency. While such a circumstance is likely within the next decade or so, Mr. Bernanke’s current problems and limited options/solutions raise the risk of a hyperinflation as early as 2010. When it does hit, it likely will come quickly and with little warning. In conjunction with a deepening structural contraction the economy, such promises an eventual hyperinflationary depression.

Current Data Already Show an Inflationary Recession. Nearly all key economic releases in the last month or so have confirmed or have been consistent with a deepening inflationary recession. Annualized fourth-quarter GDP growth, net of inflation, was statistically indistinguishable from a severe economic contraction. Inflation-adjusted December retail sales turned negative year-to-year, devastating an industry dependent on the holiday shopping season. Consumer conditions did not look promising in the tanking of annual change in consumer confidence, or in the continuing collapse of the housing data.

Fourth-quarter 2007 Industrial production showed an outright quarter-to-quarter contraction, while the highly volatile new orders for durable goods, after inflation adjustment, remained in year-to-year contraction on a six-month moving-average basis. The purchasing managers survey (old-style as per the table in the Purchasing Managers Survey section and the Reporting/Market Focus) signaled a second month of a contracting manufacturing sector.

In the employment sector, annual change in help-wanted advertising continued to collapse, new claims for unemployment insurance soared, and both purchasing managers surveys showed declining employment. January payrolls contracted, but that likely was aimed at helping to justify the Fed’s panicked rate cuts and could disappear with next month’s revision. Nonetheless, the highly politicized payroll survey suffered downward revisions, as expected, in its annual benchmark revisions (see Reporting/Market Focus). The updated annual growth in nonfarm payrolls is plotted in the accompany graph, and the current annual growth rate of 0.7% has never been seen in a downswing-phase outside of a recession.

On the inflation front, December CPI registered annual inflation of 4.1%, the highest December year-to-year inflation rate since 1990. Oil prices remain shy of $100 per barrel but are extremely inflationary in the current $90-plus per barrel trading environment. Further inflationary pressure is in the works as a result of recent dollar weakness, and dollar selling should intensify sharply.

Broad money growth, as measured by the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate was 15.2% in January 2008. Other than the 15.4% growth seen in November 2007, current M3 growth is the highest since Nixon closed the gold window in August 1971. In a related area, the Bush Administration now projects a fiscal 2008 officially-gimmicked deficit of $410 billion, up from $163 billion in 2007. That estimated widening assumes no recession, so the actual numbers, on the official basis, should be significantly worse.

Ongoing Market Instabilities. The current deteriorating economic fundamentals, combined with the still unfolding banking-system solvency/liquidity crisis create an unfortunate environment for the equity and credit markets. Stocks have entered what should prove to be a severe bear market. While the Fed’s panicked accommodation of banks has lowered short-term rates, rising inflation fears and a looming flight from safety in the dollar offer upside risk to long-term interest rates. Indeed, risks remain high of significant and panicked dollar selling. These underlying fundamentals, however, all are heavily bullish for the gold market, irrespective of any short-term central bank interventions in any of the markets.

PLEASE NOTE: A "General background note" provides a broad background paragraph on certain series or concepts. Where the language used in past and subsequent newsletters usually has been or will be identical, month-after-month, any text changes in these sections will be highlighted in bold italics upon first usage. This is designed so that regular readers may avoid re-reading material they have seen before, but where they will have the material available for reference, if so desired.

Alternate Realities. General background note: This section updates the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting. When a government economic measure does not match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Federal Reserve, White House and Wall Street. In these alternate measures, the effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan-Era GDP. The methodologies for the series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS.

GDP. The alternate fourth-quarter 2007 GDP growth reflects the "advance" estimate, with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate fourth-quarter inflation-adjusted annual growth rate (year-to-year, as opposed to the popularly-touted annualized quarter-to-quarter rate) for GDP was a decline of roughly 2.3% versus the official, slowing year-to-year gain of 2.5%.

General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate GDP numbers tend to show deeper and more protracted recessions than have been reported formally or reflected in related official reporting. Nonetheless, the patterns shown in the alternate data are broadly consistent with the payroll employment and industrial production series (as revised), which are major indicators used by the National Bureau of Economic Research in determining the official timing of U.S. business cycles.

CPI. The annual non-core annual inflation rates eased slightly in December, but should rise anew into 2008. The orchestrated malingering of the so-called "core" inflation rates has started to crumble, as they did notched higher again in December. The PCE inflation measures appear to have been understated so as to help keep real (inflation-adjusted) GDP growth from contracting in the fourth-quarter. Food and oil-related price pressures still have been reflected only minimally in much of the government’s reporting of the non-core inflation, and in the impact on the broader economy. Visibly sharp increases in market prices, however, are making it increasingly difficult for the BLS to mask the mounting inflationary pressures, and the increasing impact of energy-cost damages in the general economy.

 
Eight Levels of Inflation
Annual Inflation for September to December 2007
Measure                                 Sep    Oct    Nov    Dec I.1 Core PCE Deflator                   1.9%   2.0%   2.2%   2.2%I.2 Core Chained-CPI-U                  1.7%   1.8%   2.0%   2.1%I.3 Core CPI-U                          2.1%   2.2%   2.3%   2.4%I.4 PCE Deflator                        2.5%   3.0%   3.6%   3.5%I.5 Chained-CPI-U                       2.3%   3.0%   3.6%   3.4%I.6 CPI-U                               2.8%   3.5%   4.3%   4.1%I.7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U                   6.1%   6.9%   7.6%   7.4%I.8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation   10.4%  11.1%  11.7%  11.7%
Notes: I.1 to I.3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively,of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE)deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U.I.4 to I.6 are the same measures with energy and food inflationincluded. The CPI-U (I.6) is the measure popularly followed bythe financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation.I.7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre-Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top seriesin the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com.I.8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, whichreverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so,plus an adjustment for the portion of Clinton-Era geometricweighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historicbookkeeping.

General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate CPI numbers tend to show significantly higher inflation over time, generally reflecting the reversal of hedonic adjustments, geometric weighting and the use of a more traditional approach to measuring housing costs, measures all consistent with the reporting methodology in place as of 1980. Available as a separate tab at the SGS homepage www.shadowstats.com is the SGS Inflation Calculator that calculates the impact of inflation between any two months, 1913 to date, based on both the official CPI-U and the SGS-Alternate CPI series.

 MARKETS PERSPECTIVE

As shown in the accompanying table, U.S. stocks were up for 2007, but down in the fourth quarter and down since the beginning of 2008. Treasury yields generally have fallen as a result of the Fed’s recent panicked moves, while the dollar has sold off and oil and precious metals prices have soared.

            
        Financial-Market Indicators at Year-End 2007 and January 31, 2008
 
Indicator     First-Quarter 2008       Fourth-Quarter 2007      Third-Quarter 2007
              To Date: 31 Jan 2008     Level    Qtr/Qtr Yr/Yr   Level    Qtr/Qtr Yr/Yr
              Level    QTD/Qtr Yr/Yr
Equity Market
DJIA          12,650.36 -4.63%  0.23%  13,264.82 -4.54%  6.43%  13,895.63  3.63% 18.98%
S&P 500        1,378.55 -6.11% -4.15%   1,468.36 -3.82%  3.53%   1,526.75  1.56% 14.29%
Wilshire 5000 13,896.65 -6.23% -4.09%  14,819.60 -3.53%  3.94%  15,362.02  1.00% 15.11%
NASDAQ Comp    2,389.86 -9.89% -3.01%   2,652.28 -1.82%  9.81%   2,701.50  3.77% 19.62%
Credit Market(1)
Fed Funds Target  3.00% -125bp -225bp      4.25%  -50bp -100bp      4.75%  -50bp  -50bp
3-Mo T-Bill       1.96% -140bp -316bp      3.36%  -46bp -166bp      3.82% -100bp -107bp
2-Yr T-Note       2.17%  -88bp -288bp      3.05%  -92bp -177bp      3.97%  -90bp  -75bp
5-Yr T-Note       2.82%  -63bp -200bp      3.45%  -78bp -125bp      4.23%  -69bp  -36bp
10-Yr T-Note      3.67%  -37bp -116bp      4.04%  -55bp  -67bp      4.59%  -44bp   -5bp
30-Yr T-Bond      4.35%  -10bp  -58bp      4.45%  -38bp  -36bp      4.83%  -29bp    6bp
Oil(2)
US$ per Barrel
West Texas Int.   91.76 -4.43% 57.80%      96.01 17.56% 57.24%      81.67 17.39% 29.80%
Currencies/Dollar Indices(3)
US$/Unit
Pound Sterling   1.9895  0.26%  1.45%     1.9843 -2.68%  1.31%     2.0389  1.65%  8.94%
Euro             1.4841  1.63% 14.18%     1.4603  2.70% 10.65%     1.4219  5.17% 12.08%
Swiss Franc      0.9221  4.46% 14.98%     0.8827  3.02%  7.64%     0.8568  4.87%  7.13%
Yen              0.0094  4.66% 13.38%     0.0090  2.92%  6.54%     0.0087  7.32%  2.63%
Canadian Dollar  0.9982 -1.36% 17.71%     1.0120  0.79% 17.92%     1.0041  8.43% 12.06%
Australian Dlr   0.8968  2.19% 15.87%     0.8776 -0.89% 11.31%     0.8855  4.29% 18.68%
Weighted Currency Units/US$
Jan. 1985 = 100
Financial (FWD)  46.41 -1.80% -10.46%     47.26 -0.92%  -7.64%      47.70 -4.66% -9.14%
  Change US$/FX     —  1.83%  11.68%       —   0.93%   8.27%        —   4.88% 10.06%
Trade (TWD)      51.96 -1.44% -12.47%     52.72 -1.51% -10.00%      53.53 -5.42% -9.10%
  Change US$/FX     —  1.46%  14.25%       —   1.54%  10.01%        —   5.74% 10.01%
Precious Metals(4)
US$ per Troy Ounce
Gold             923.25 10.73% 41.93%     833.75 12.21% 31.92%     743.00 14.22% 23.99%
Silver            16.74 13.41% 25.30%      14.76  8.13% 14.41%      13.65  8.85% 20.26%
bp: Basis point or 0.01%. (1) Treasuries are constant maturity yield, US Treasury.
(2) Department of Energy. (3) Shadow Government Statistics, Federal Reserve Board
(see Dollar Index Section for definitions). (4) London afternoon fix, Kitco.com.

In the week or so since the end of January, stocks declined another several percent, Treasury yields have bounced higher by 10 to 20 basis points, the U.S. dollar as gained a percent or two, and oil and precious metal prices are little changed.

Short-term trends aside, the rapidly deteriorating inflationary recession and broadening bank solvency crisis are terribly bearish for stocks, long-term Treasuries and the U.S. dollar in the year ahead. For gold, the general circumstances could not be much brighter. In this environment, all the markets are subject to extreme volatility and central bank intervention. In the end, however, the underlying fundamentals should prevail.

As a general strategy under the current circumstances, looking to preserve one’s wealth and assets needs to be a primary concern, along with the liquidity and safety of investments.

U.S. Equities — The inflationary recession is at hand, having gained reasonably broad recognition. Such has negative implications for general corporate revenues and profitability. In combination with the still unfolding solvency crisis and a looming tanking of the U.S. dollar, the outlook for stocks is as bleak as it gets. Stocks appear already to have entered what will become a severe bear market in 2008 and beyond.

General background note: As the equity markets catch up with the underlying economic and looming financial fundamentals, the downside adjustments to stock prices should be quite large, eventually rivaling the 90% decline in equities seen in the 1929 crash and ensuing several years. The decline might have to be measured in real terms (net of inflation), as a hyperinflation eventually will kick in as the Fed moves to liquefy the system. Stocks do tend to follow inflation, since revenues and earnings get denominated in inflated dollars. Hence with a hyperinflation, a DJIA of 100,000 or 100,000,000 could be expected, but such still would be below today’s levels, adjusted for inflation.

General background note: The approaching financial maelstrom already has come over the horizon and is hovering nearlandfall. When it hits, those investors who have taken shelter in cash, gold and outside the U.S. dollar will be the ones with the wealth and assets available to take advantage of the extraordinary investment opportunities that should follow.

U.S. Credit Market — The apparent panic by the Fed in its effort to stabilize the banking system has knocked 125 basis points off the federal funds target rate in the last month. In turn, short-term treasury yields have dropped sharply with a meaningful increase in the positive slope of the yield curve.

In an environment of rising inflation, burgeoning federal deficit, soaring money growth and a weak dollar, long-term Treasury yields should be well above 7.50%, not at the 4.43% level as seen last Friday (February 8th). Other than for the 30-year Treasury bond, with a real (inflation-adjusted) yield of about 0.35%, all the other active Treasury issues have negative real yields.  

General background note: At such time as the flight from the dollar becomes a flight-to-safety out of the dollar, U.S. interest rates will be forced higher in a mounting liquidity squeeze resulting from foreign dumping of dollar denominated securities. Increasingly, those assets will have to be absorbed in the U.S. markets, spiking treasury yields. With higher inflation down the road, long-term yields could be expected to rise by more than 300 basis points (3.00%) in the year ahead — with a sharply steepening, positively-sloped yield curve — despite a deepening recession and any further Federal Reserve accommodation.

U.S. Dollar — Dollar selling has been heavy in recent months, with intermittent periods of rebound and likely central intervention in the wake of the Fed’s massive easings and related currency-market concerns. With the economic crisis gaining rapid recognition, and with the next round of bank solvency issues surfacing, U.S. dollar selling pressures should intensify and become more sustained in year ahead, with flight from the dollar increasingly becoming a flight-to-safety outside the dollar. As currency volatility intensifies, so too should central bank intervention.

General background note: Beyond further easing by the Federal Reserve rate or further negative news out of the solvency/funding crisis, the proximal trigger for a full dollar panic could come from a bad economic statistic (some numbers, such as the trade deficit, appear to be massaged in a dollar-friendly manner), political missteps by the Administration, negative trade or market developments in Asia, or a terrorist attack or expansion of U.S. military activity in the Middle-East. When the trigger is pulled, the broad selling pressure should be strong enough to overwhelm short-lived central bank intervention.

General background note: In terms of underlying fundamentals that tend to drive currency trading, the dollar’s portfolio could not be worse. Relative to major trading partners, the U.S. economy is much weaker, interest rates are lower and anticipated possibly to go lower still, inflation is higher, fiscal and trade-balance conditions are abysmal, and relative political concerns are rising sharply at the same time. The President’s approval rating commonly has moved currency trading in the past, and, despite any near-term bouncing, it remains lower than has been seen for any other U.S. President in the post-World War II era. Relative political stability issues are compounded by the presence of a Congress that is hostile to the President, and that is rated even lower by the American people than is the President. Generally, the greater the magnitude of the dollar selling, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. capital markets.

As shown in the preceding graph, the U.S. dollar continued to fall sharply in January 2008. The latest data points shown for financial- and trade-weighted indices are as of January 31st.

General background note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS for methodology.

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics’ Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (FWD) is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For January 2008 the monthly FWD fell by 0.96%, after rising by 1.82% in December. The January 2008 average index level of 46.88 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down by 9.33% from January 2007. December 2007 was down by 7.10% from December 2006. As of January 31st, the FWD stood at 46.41.

Also down in January was the Federal Reserve’s Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (TWD). The January 2008 average was down by 0.86% from December, which, in turn, had been up by 2.06% from November. The January 2008 index level of 52.57 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 11.30% from January 2007, while December 2007 was down 8.90% from December 2006. As of January 31st, the TWD closed at 51.96.

Gold — Despite intermittent central intervention, the price of gold again is just shy of setting a new record high in current dollars. The London afternoon fix on Friday (February 8th) was $916.25 per troy ounce, against the current record of $923.25 set on January 31, 2008. The prior all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix) of January 21, 1980 still has not been hit in terms of inflation-adjusted dollars. Based on inflation through December 2007, the 1980 gold price peak would be $2,294 per troy ounce, based on not-seasonally-adjusted CPI-adjusted dollars, and $6,167 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate CPI adjusted dollars. The suggestion remains that the price of gold — albeit at near a nominal high — still faces some catch-up.

For January (based on Kitco.com), the monthly average London gold afternoon fix was $887.75 versus $803.20 in December. Silver averaged $15.96 per troy ounce in January, up from $14.30 per troy ounce in December.

General background note: While gold price volatility likely will continue, given the combination of rising inflation, weak dollar and increasing global instabilities, it would be very surprising if the price of gold does not break well above $1,000 per troy ounce in the year ahead. Of some risk here, again, remains the possibility of intensified covert or overt central bank intervention in tandem with intensified intervention aimed at muting the effects of dollar selling. Despite any central-bank machinations or intervention, the upside potential for the precious metals remains explosive.

General background note: As discussed in the Hyperinflation Series (see the December 2006 to March 2007 SGSs and the pending Hyperinflation Special Issue), the eventual complete collapse of the U.S. dollar — the world’s reserve currency — will force the creation of a new international currency system. Gold likely will be structured into any replacement system, in an effort by those organizing the new currency structure to gain public acceptance.

The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show the January averages as well as added points for closing prices on January 31st, with gold at $923.25, oil at $91.76 and the Fed’s published noon buying rate for the Swiss franc at $0.9221. Again, all three measures should trade significantly higher in the months ahead.

REPORTING PERSPECTIVE

The Big Three Market Movers

U.S. financial system stability and economic conditions continue to deteriorate rapidly, and, as a result, little can be trusted in current economic reporting. Mr. Bernanke still needs a stable U.S. currency, particularly under the circumstance of his capitulation to Wall Street pressures, and the Administration’s political needs remain great. With financial circumstances on the brink of threatening national security, almost anything is possible in the arena of data and market manipulations.

Absent manipulation, and against lagging and increasingly realistic market expectations, most near-term economic reporting still should tend to surprise the markets on the downside, while most inflation reporting still should surprise expectations on the upside.

Employment/Unemployment — Current annual growth in payrolls is discussed and graphed in the Opening Comments, and the annual payroll benchmark revisions are reviewed in this month’s Reporting/Market Focus. As discussed in the February 1st Flash Update, given the BLS’s ability to report the monthly payroll change at any desired level, the reporting of a small contraction for January has to be viewed as a deliberate political move. Perhaps Treasury Secretary Paulson wanted to keep up the pressure on the FOMC, which seems to have had advance knowledge of the result in its statement announcing the last fed funds rate cut. It would be surprising, however, if the reported contraction survives next month’s reporting and revisions.

Payroll Survey. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported a seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 17,000 (a loss of 393,000 net of revisions and benchmark revisions) +/- 129,000 for January 2008, following a revised 82,000 (previously 18,000) jobs gain in December. The annual benchmark and other revisions knocked 376,000 jobs off the previously-reported seasonally-adjusted December 2007 payroll level. Annual growth in total nonfarm payrolls slowed to a recessionary 0.72% in January from a revised 0.89% (previously 0.92%) in December.

Bias Adjustment. One factor that may have affected the negative monthly result was a revamping of the bias factor (birth-death model), which was a net subtraction of 175,000 jobs in January 2007. At that time, the decline had been offset adequately by a change in seasonal adjustments. For January 2008, the bias factor was revised to subtraction of 378,000. The bias factor for February should swing by nearly 500,000 jobs to the upside, to perhaps a positive 100,000 bias, based on last February’s pre-benchmark revision reporting. 

Seasonal-Factor Gimmicks. Year-to-year growth should be virtually identical in both the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series, and applying the unadjusted annual change to the seasonally-adjusted year-ago numbers generates an adjusted January 2008 payroll level of 138.101 million versus the reported 138.102 million. That does not hold, however, with December, which should have been 138.201 million, instead of the reported 138.119 million. The difference is that seasonally-adjusted January payrolls, using consistent seasonals, would have shown a 100,000 jobs loss for January.

Household Survey. The usually statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including those of multiple job holders), went somewhat in the opposite direction of the payroll survey. Household employment was lower by 540,000 in January, but that really was a gain of 205,000, after removal of a 745,000 downward effect from population revisions.

The January 2008 seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate showed a statistically insignificant decline to 4.93% +/- 0.23% from 4.97% in December. The series also was revised for lowered population estimates. In an unusual divergence, the broader U.6 unemployment rose to an adjusted 9.0% in January, up from 8.8% in December. Adjusted for the "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment still is running about 12.5%.

Employment Environment. The small January employment decline was far short of the type of contraction suggested by the background of the better-quality employment-environment indicators, with collapsing December help-wanted advertising, surging new claims for unemployment insurance, and recession-level employment readings for the January purchasing managers surveys.

Next Release (March 7): Based on underlying economic activity, the February payroll survey also should show a month-to-month contraction, and the household survey should show a rebound in the unemployment rate. Nonetheless, given the political season and ongoing financial market distress, an upside revision in the January data, so as to show positive month-to-month change, is a fair bet. February reporting simply will be brought in as desired by the Administration.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) — The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) reported annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth in fourth-quarter 2007 GDP at 0.64% +/- 3%, which was statistically indistinguishable from a meaningful contraction. The reported growth was down from nonsensical growth of 4.91% for the third quarter. The BEA tries to target consensus forecasts (which were 1.2%) for the advance estimate, since the BEA has to guesstimate more than 90% of the underlying data. The reported result suggests the first-cut estimate actually was a contraction. Any number of bad assumptions currently in place, if altered slightly, would have given that result. Annual growth reportedly slowed from 2.84% to 2.47%.

The GDP’s implicit price deflator (inflation measure) rose at an annualized 2.56% in the fourth quarter versus a 1.04% rate in the third quarter. In contrast, annualized CPI inflation rose to 4.07% in the fourth quarter from 1.87% in the third quarter. Such suggests understated inflation was used in the fourth-quarter GDP estimate. Artificially-low inflation, when used in deflating the GDP, results in an overstatement of the inflation-adjusted GDP growth.

Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS-Alternate GDP measure suggests that economic reality is much weaker than officially reported. A fourth-quarter year-to-year contraction of roughly 2.3% would have been more in line with underlying fundamentals, past methodologies and the ongoing recession (see the graph in the Alternate Realities section of the Opening Comments). Such reflects some bottom bouncing with the annual contraction little changed from the SGS-Alternate GDP third-quarter estimate.

With the numbers too thin to generate alternate GDP measures at this time, the BEA will publish — in conjunction with later revisions — estimates of Gross National Product (GNP), where GDP is GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments), and Gross Domestic Income (GDI), which is the theoretical income-side equivalent to the GDP’s consumption-side measure.

General background note: Although the GDP report is the government’s broadest estimate of U.S. economic activity, it is also the least meaningful and most heavily massaged of all major government economic series. Published by the BEA, it primarily has become a tool for economic propaganda.

Next Release (February 28th): Based on underlying fundamentals, the "preliminary" estimate revision of annualized quarterly real GDP growth for the fourth quarter should show an actual quarterly contraction. Such, however, is highly unlikely in an election year. The best bet is for the revised growth rate to remain in positive territory.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) — As discussed in the January 19th Flash Update, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported the seasonally-adjusted December CPI-U (I.6) up by 0.30% (minus 0.07% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, following November’s 0.80% (0.59% unadjusted) gain. December’s annual CPI inflation eased to 4.08% from November’s 4.31%.

While the year-to-year December inflation of 4.1% (up from 2.5% in 2006) was the highest since 1990, the annual average 2007 CPI inflation dropped to 2.8% from 3.2% in 2006. The differences highlight some of the unusual volatility and reporting patterns seen in the last year.

Year-to-year annual inflation likely will resume its upturn with the January 2008 number, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the 0.17% monthly increase seen in January 2007. The difference will directly add to or subtract from December’s annual inflation rate of 4.08%.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) (I.5) — the substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by the manipulators and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — was 3.41% in December, down from 3.57% in November, but up from 2.36% in December 2006.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology (I.7), annual CPI growth was about 7.4% in December, down from 7.6% in November, but up from up from 5.8% in December 2006. The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (I.8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was roughly 11.7% in December, unchanged from November, and up from 10.0% in December 2006. The eight levels of annual inflation, I.1 to I.8, are detailed in the table in the Alternate Realities section, along with the graph of SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation.

Next Release (February 20): If seasonally-adjusted monthly CPI inflation for January 2008 exceeds 0.17%, which it should, then annual CPI inflation will increase by the difference. Fundamental reporting risks generally favor an upside surprise to market expectations, but targeted manipulation still is of high risk given the deteriorating financial markets and the Fed’s increasingly limited policy options. While some upside movement in core inflation has started to surface, a major uptick still is long overdue.

Other Troubled Key Series

Federal Deficit — As discussed in the January 13th Flash Update, the officially gimmicked federal deficit deepened in the first three months of fiscal 2008. Surging outlays have widened the budget deficit to $105.5 billion versus $82.9 billion for the same period a year before. That puts the rolling 12-month deficit through December 2007 at $187.9 billion versus $211.8 billion in December 2006. The annual "improvement" in the deficit has narrowed to $24 billion in December from $49 billion in November and from $85 billion at fiscal year-end (September 30th), and shortly it will turn to net deterioration.

Viewing the change in gross federal debt bypasses several of the regular reporting manipulations and is a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the official, gimmicked deficit reporting. Gross federal debt stood at $9.229 trillion at the end of December 2007, up $80 billion for the month, up $222 billion for the quarter and up $549 billion from December 2006, which in turn was up $510 billion from December 2005. As of January 31, 2008, the gross federal debt stood at $9.238 trillion, up $9 billion for the month, but it was up by $620 billion from January 2007, which in turn was up by $511 billion from January 2006.

Confirming what already is becoming apparent in the trend of the latest fiscal results, the Bush Administration now projects a gimmicked deficit of $410 billion for fiscal 2008, up from $163 billion in 2007. With no allowance for a recession in the assumptions underlying deficit the projections (the Administration forecasts real 2008 GDP growth at 2.7%), the final 2008 numbers should be much worse than the current Administration estimates.

The federal government’s fiscal 2007 (year-ended September 30th) official accounting-gimmicked deficit narrowed to $162.8 billion from $248.2 billion in 2006. For fiscal year-end 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $9.007 trillion, up by $500 billion from 2006, which was up $574 billion from 2005.

As discussed in the December 2007 SGS newsletter’s Reporting/Market Focus, the GAAP-based deficit for fiscal-year 2007 topped $4 trillion, on a consistent reporting basis. I am still in the process of getting clarification on some of the accounting changes used in the GAAP reporting, but the $4 trillion number remains my best estimate at this time.

Of interest, as discussed in the January 13th Flush Update,was the January 10th Reuters story that, "Moody’s Investors Service said on Thursday the United States’ ‘triple-A’ government bond rating could come under pressure in the very long-term if the Medicare and Social Security programs are not reformed." This appears to be the first time that the top rating given U.S. Treasuries has been threatened due to U.S. fiscal conditions.

Despite the bookkeeping games played by Administration and Congress, the gimmicked deficit should widen significantly in the months ahead, not only due to rapidly rising outlays, but also due to the intensifying recession and related tax receipt declines. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy’s mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance — The trend in annual growth continued to deteriorate. On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended February 2nd, annual growth rose to 5.8%, up from a revised 3.6% (was 3.4%) in the 17 weeks ended December 22nd. A rising growth trend in new claims is an economic negative.

General background note: More often than not, week-to-week volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly claims numbers is due to the Labor Department’s efforts to seasonally adjust these numbers around holiday periods (such as Martin Luther King’s Birthday and the upcoming Presidents’ Day). The Labor Department has demonstrated an inability to do such adjusting successfully. When the new claims series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings — December’s seasonally-adjusted monthly real earnings rose by 0.1%, after dropping by a revised 0.5% (was down 0.4%) in November.  Annual change in December deepened to a 0.9% contraction from the 0.8% decline in November.

General background note: Gyrations in the poor quality of reported CPI growth account for most month-to-month volatility in this series. Adjusting for the major upside biases built into the CPI-W inflation measure used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series shows the average worker to be under severe financial stress in an ongoing structuralrecession.

Retail Sales — As discussed in the January 15th Flash Update, the 2007 holiday shopping season was a bust. Where the seasonally-adjusted December retail sales number was reported down by 0.37% +/- 0.8% for the month, such was after downward revisions to November’s reporting. Net of revisions, December was down by 0.73%, with November’s previously reported gain of 1.22% now standing at 1.05%. The combined November/December retail sales gain of 0.7% was in contraction, net of official CPI-U reporting, with November CPI-U up by 0.8% and December CPI up by 0.3%.

The 4.08% gain reported in year-to-year December retail sales also was more than wiped out by the 4.12% (seasonally adjusted) annual CPI-U inflation.A year-to-year change in real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation) signals recession, and a signal first was generated in this business cycle back in June 2006. An outright contraction in real year-to-year retail sales, as seen in December, is a recession.

Core Retail Sales. Net of grocery store and gasoline station sales, "core" retail sales for December was down by 0.36% (down 1.02% net of revisions), following a revised 0.29% gain in November (previously 0.78%), with reported gains in food prices offsetting reported lower gasoline prices.

An interesting pattern continued to unfold in the food and energy areas of retail sales, where implicit food and energy inflation reflected in the data were understated one month and then revised upward the next month. This can be seen in the December non-core retail growth being down 0.4% versus down 0.7% net of revisions, with the December core being down 0.4% versus down 1.0% net of revisions. While retail sales keep getting revised, the CPI does not get revised from initial reporting (unless there is an outright error in calculation).

Next Release (February 13): Underlying fundamentals suggest a weaker showing than the expected unchanged January retail sales. The data most likely will be underwater after inflation adjustment, as well. Going forward, inflation-adjusted monthly and annual change should turn regularly negative.

Industrial Production – As discussed in the January 19th Flash Update, seasonally-adjusted December industrial production was unchanged (plus 0.1% net of revisions), following a 0.3% gain in November and a 0.5% contraction in October. Production in the fourth quarter showed a seasonally-adjusted annualized contraction of 1.0% versus the third quarter. Year-to-year change eased to 1.6% in December from 2.2% in November.

Back in the days when GDP (or GNP) growth estimates had some meaning, a 1.0% annualized quarterly contraction in industrial production usually would be coincident with a quarterly contraction in GDP. Given current politics and methodological changes of the last two decades or so, reported GDP growth likely will remain in positive territory until after the Presidential election.

Next Release (February 15): Look for January industrial production to contract, despite consensus expectations for a small gain. Such would be consistent with the purchasing managers survey (old style) and recent weakness in new orders for durable goods. Monthly contractions in this series should become regular, with the erratic but generally slowing annual growth eventually turning negative.

New Orders for Durable Goods — The usually volatile durable goods orders rose by 5.2% (5.5% net of revisions) in December, seasonally adjusted, after gaining 0.5% (previously 0.1%) in November. On a year-to-year basis, December’s orders rose by 5.0% versus November’s 0.1% contraction. Smoothed using a six-month moving average, annual growth (net of inflation) remained negative and a recession signal.

The closely followed nondefense capital goods new orders rose by 5.4% for the month in December, after a 5.3% gain in November. December’s annual change was an increase of 7.4%, following November’s 5.7% decline.

General background note: Durable goods orders lost its status as a solid leading economic indicator when the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders in 2002.

Trade Balance — As noted in the January 13th Flash Update, the November trade report showed something of a surprise catch-up in recent underreporting. Though still well shy of reality, the seasonally-adjusted trade deficit widened to $63.1 billion in November from $57.8 billion in October, reflecting rising oil prices.

The value of imported oil still appears to be seriously understated in terms of pricing, despite the November gains. The average imported price for oil rose to $79.65 per barrel in November, up from $72.49 in October.     

Next Release (February 14): Underlying reality favors further deterioration in the monthly trade deficit, but the government can play games with this series as long as it wants to play them. Contrary to underlying fundamentals, a narrowing of the December deficit is expected. That would help generate an upside revision to the fourth-quarter GDP estimate. On the other side, a significant deterioration could push the GDP into a contraction, in revision.

Consumer Confidence — The monthly January consumer confidence measures were mixed in terms of monthly change but continued to show deepening contractions in annual change. For January 2008, the Conference Board Confidence measure sank by 3.0% for the month, after rising 3.2% (previously 0.9%) in December. January’s year-to-year change was down by 20.2%, sinking from December’s 17.6% annual decline.

The University of Michigan Sentiment measure was up by 3.8% in January, following a 0.8% decline in December. January’s year-to-year decline also deepened, down by 19.1% versus December’s 17.7% drop. These lagging, not leading, indicators tend to reflect the tone of the popular financial media and are fully consistent with a deteriorating inflationary recession.

General background note: The Conference Board measure is seasonally adjusted, which can provide occasional, but significant distortion. The adjustment does not make much sense and is of suspect purpose, given that the Conference Board does not release the unadjusted number. The Michigan survey is unadjusted. How does one seasonally-adjust peoples’ attitudes? Also, beware the mid-month Consumer Sentiment release from the University of Michigan. Its sampling base is so small as to be virtually valueless in terms of statistical significance.

Short-Term Credit Measures — Patterns of annual growth in commercial borrowing continue to reflect pressures from the bank solvency crisis, with the sharply declining annual growth for commercial paper outstanding being offset partially by growth in commercial and industrial bank loans. Consumer credit numbers show slightly slowing annual growth, albeit against upwardly revised annual growth rates.

For seasonally-adjusted consumer credit, which includes credit cards and auto loans, but not mortgages, annual growth was reported at 5.5% in December against an upwardly revised 5.6% in November (previously 5.2%) and 5.7% (previously 5.4%) in October.  In the current environment, where inflation-adjusted growth in income is not adequate to support meaningful growth in the personal consumption component of GDP, GDP growth only can come from temporary debt expansion or savings liquidation. Accordingly, stagnating growth in consumer debt expansion remains an ongoing constraint on economic growth. The continuing large revisions in the consumer credit series confirm the Fed’s inability to track bank activities accurately on a timely basis. Similar issues are evident in the Fed’s quarterly flow-of-founds accounting for the banking system.

Commercial borrowing growth varied sharply, once more. Annual change in January commercial paper outstanding showed a 6.2% contraction, which narrowed from a 10.1% decline in December and a 4.5% decline in November. In contrast, annual growth in December commercial and industrial loans rose by 20.2%, after a 19.1% (previously 21.8%) gain in November and 18.4% (previously 18.5%) gain in October. The relative instability in commercial paper continues, with resultant credit difficulties placing a major dent in broad business activity and continuing to disrupt banking system stability.

Producer Price Index (PPI) — The seasonally-adjusted December finished goods PPI declined by 0.1% (down 0.4% unadjusted) after increasing by 3.2% (1.6% unadjusted) in November. Annual PPI inflation for December eased to 6.3% from November’s 7.2%. Seasonally-adjusted intermediate and crude goods eased by 0.2% and rose by 1.0%, respectively for December, after increasing by 3.7% and 8.7% in November.

Next Release (February 26): On February 22nd, revisions to relative importance and seasonal factors will be published, restating history back through 2003. Nonetheless, allowing for the regular random volatility of the monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months generally should favor official results coming in above market expectations, as the effects of oil prices increasingly permeate the broad economy. As with the CPI, the core PPI inflation rate still is long overdue for a meaningfully upside move, but such still may be further delayed by the ongoing financial-market needs of the battered Federal Reserve.

Better-Quality Numbers

General background note: The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders — As discussed in this month’s Reporting/Market Focus, the Institute for Supply Management (ISM) has impaired slightly the quality of its composite indices by altering component weightings so as to better mimic the heavily politicized and otherwise heavily upside-biased reporting of official GDP growth of "recent years." Nonetheless, the individual ISM components maintain their integrity, aside from distortions introduced by the annual seasonal-adjustment revisions calculated by the U.S. Department of Commerce, which also were just published. The problems created by government’s seasonal-adjustment factors largely can be overcome by assessing the data using three-month moving averages.

The various components of the ISM composite indices are diffusion indices, which are calculated as the percent of positive responses from the ISM survey plus one-half of the neutral or unchanged responses. Hence, a reading below 50.0 indicates a contracting series.

Impact of Methodological Change and Seasonal Adjustment Revisions on the 
ISM’s Purchasing Managers Survey (Manufacturing)

                                Dec 2007    Jan 2008     Current Reporting            48.4        50.7     Without Reweighting          48.4        50.9     Without Revised SA           48.0        49.9     Without Reweighting        and Revised SA            47.7        49.7
     Alternate index readings were calculated using weightings and      seasonal-adjustment factors published by the ISM. Readings below     50.0 indicate a contracting manufacturing sector and traditionally     would signal a recession.

As shown in the table above, but for the reweightings and seasonal-factor revisions, the overall January ISM manufacturing index would have indicated a contracting manufacturing sector for a second consecutive month. As reported, however, the January 2008 index rose into positive territory, at 50.7, up from a revised 48.4 (was 47.7) in December. Even with the alterations to the series, an accelerating decline in the broad indices remains a good bet in the next several months, based on general weakness in the overall industrial production and durable goods order series.

The revamped December new orders index remained in contraction for January at 49.5, against 46.9 (previously 45.7) in December. Seasonal-factor distortions can be minimized by viewing the series using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the January new orders index fell by 3.8% on an annual basis versus a 1.7% decline in December. The new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The measure gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 35.5% in April of 2004. As an SGS early warning indicator of a major economic shift, the new orders measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating a signal of pending recession.

Also of significance, the manufacturing employment component moved deeper into recession territory at 47.1 in January, down from 48.7 (previously 48.0) in December.

Service Sector Index. Also revamped as to structure and seasonal factors, the service-sector ISM index now has a composite index, which incorporates business activity as a component. Despite all the excitement in the financial press of the January index signaling recession, the series still does not have much meaning related to overall business activity, since new order activity at law firms, dentists, hospitals or fast-food restaurants has little obvious relationship to broad economic activity, and such has not been altered by the reweightings.

With that as background, the first reporting of the services sector composite index was at 44.6 for January 2008. The ISM did not publish a December number for comparison, but the indicated formulation suggests that December would have been 53.2. The previously dominant "business activity" measure dropped to 41.9 in January from 54.4 (revised from 53.9) in December.

Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. With the covered industries including real estate and banking, the January employment component plunged to 43.9 from 51.8 (previously 52.1) in December. The prices paid component is covered in the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) — The Conference Board’s seasonally-adjusted December help-wanted advertising index bottom-bounced, rising to 22 from the historic low of 21 reported in November. Year-to-year change, however, continued to plummet, down 33.3% in December, versus a 27.6% decline in November. Despite some of the historic weakness in the series due to the loss of newspaper business to the Internet, the HWA is a solid leading indicator to the broad economy and to the monthly employment report, and it still is indicative of a severe deepening in an ongoing recession.

Where the series does not include a measure of on-line advertising, recent indices developed to measure Internet activity have serious definitional problems and still are too young to be meaningful indicators. That said, the Conference Board has reported that its on-line measure of help-wanted advertising fell in January with significant slowdown in annual growth.

Housing Starts — The housing numbers continue to collapse, showing an ongoing and deepening recession. December’s seasonally-adjusted housing starts plunged by 14.2% (down 15.2% net of revisions) +/- 10% (95% confidence interval) for the month, after a 7.9% (previously 3.7%) decline in November. December’s level was down 38.2% from the year before, which is near the trough of the current recession but still shy of the 48.6% annual decline seen at the trough of the 1990/1991 recession.

Also confirming the housing industry problems, December building permits were down 8.1% (7.3% net of revisions) for the month, 34.4% year-to-year, while new home sales fell 4.7% (6.6% net of revisions) for the month and 40.7% for the year. December existing home sales sank 2.2% for the month and were down 22.0% year-to-year.

Inflation Indicators

Money Supply — The Federal Reserve’s recent benchmark revisions to M2 (back into the 1990s) and other components of M3 lowered current reported dollar levels by about 0.3%, but did not alter significantly the reported or estimated annual growth patterns. Based on four weeks of data for January 2008, the SGS-Ongoing M3 of annual growth is estimated at 15.2% for the month, up from 15.0% in December.

M3 Growth Surge Update. Aside from the recent surge in annual M3 growth, the estimated January 2008 growth rate is the highest since 15.8% seen in August 1971 (Nixon’s closing of the gold window); the all-time high annual growth rate for the reported series was 16.4% in June 1971. The current pace of broad-money growth continues to have disturbing inflationary implications.

Following up on subscriber questions and comments on the January 13th Flash Update as to how broad money supply is growing so much faster than the monetary base, indeed part of the issue — as pointed out by one subscriber — is that there are no reserve requirements for banks on nonpersonal time deposits and eurocurrency liabilities, which have grown rapidly.

Several subscribers asked how dollars that already are created and get paid to foreign creditors, add to the money supply when they get recycled through other central banks to the Fed and back into the U.S. system. The dollars disappear from the U.S. system as they are paid out and eventually end up held by other central banks. Initially the Fed adapts and adjusts as necessary to maintain the existing money supply. How and when the dollars are reintroduced to the U.S. system, and whether or not they add to the money supply then is a function of how the Fed handles the foreign central banks’ interests and whether it chooses to neutralize the impact of the reintroduced funds.  

General background note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the SGS Ongoing M3 estimates, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS for methodology. The indicated M3 levels below are our best estimate and are provided at specific subscriber request. Keep in mind that regular revisions in the related Fed series affect historical M3. Usually, annual growth rates hold, although levels may shift a little. We have not attempted, nor do we plan to recreate a revised historical series for an M3 monthly-average level going back in time. The purpose of the SGS series was and is to provide monthly estimates of ongoing annual M3 growth. We are comfortable with those numbers and that our estimated monthly growth rates are reasonably close to what the Fed would be reporting, if it still reported M3. With those caveats on the table, here are the monthly-average levels for M3:

        Shadow Government Statistics Ongoing M3 (r)
(Estimated seasonally-adjusted monthly average, $Trillions)

Feb 06  10.303    Aug 06  10.746    Feb 07  11.430    Aug 07  12.224Mar     10.362    Sep     10.855    Mar     11.566    Sep     12.417Apr     10.429    Oct     10.990    Apr     11.728    Oct     12.643May     10.502    Nov     11.102    May     11.868    Nov     12.817Jun     10.562    Dec     11.227    Jun     11.933    Dec     12.909Jul     10.643    Jan 07  11.315    Jul     12.012    Jan 08  13.030(p)
       (r)Reflects Federal Reserve Benchmark revisions to underlying series.      (p)Preliminary estimate based on three weeks worth of data.      NOTE OF CAUTION: The estimates of monthly levels best are used for       comparisons with other dollar amounts, such as nominal GDP. While       the estimates are based on seasonally-adjusted Federal Reserve data,       great significance cannot be read into the month-to-month changes,       as was the case when the Fed published the series. The most meaningful      way to view the data is in terms of year-to-year change.

Based on roughly four weeks of data for January 2008, annual change for monthly M1 appears to have contracted by 0.9% after a 0.21% decline in December. January M2 annual growth appears to have softened to 5.6% from 5.85% in December.

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices — The January 2008 prices paid indices were strong for the purchasing managers surveys, rallying sharply in the manufacturing sector and easing slightly — but staying historically high — for the services sector. The indices reflect upside inflation pressures from a variety of factors, including high oil prices, and signal broad inflation problems ahead.

On the manufacturing side, the January price index jumped to 76.0 from 68.0 in December. On a three-month moving average basis, January’s 37.3% year-to-year gain was up from December’s 34.1%. The manufacturing price indicator is not seasonally adjusted and, therefore, is generally the better indicator of pricing activity.

On the non-manufacturing side, the seasonally-adjusted January prices diffusion index came in at 70.7, down slightly from December’s 71.5 (previously 72.7). On a three-month moving-average basis, however, January’s annual gain increased to 26.9%, up from a 25.5% increase in December.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflationary pressure. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising prices.

Oil Prices – For the last couple of months or so, oil prices have fluctuated around $90 per barrel, still shy of the $100 per barrel mark, a psychological price barrier that has not been meaningfully broken. For January 2008, the monthly-average West Texas Intermediate spot price (St. Louis Fed) rose 0.8% to $92.50 from December’s $91.73, which was down 3.1% from November’s record high monthly average of $94.62 per barrel. Against last year’s average, January’s level was up by 68.9%, compared with December’s 47.9% and November’s 59.4%. These levels of growth continue to suggest disastrous news still is in the offing for official CPI, PPI and GDP annual inflation reporting.

As of Friday, February 8th, West Texas Intermediate closed at $91.78 per barrel, spot, little changed from $91.76 at the end of January. Oil price movement remains highly volatile, but generally should trend higher and set new record highs in the months ahead, despite growing recognition of a U.S. and possible global recession. Irrespective of how high oil prices may go, or how much they may fall back in short-lived profit taking, current prices are well above levels that will help trigger debilitating U.S. inflation. Regardless of any near-term price swings, meaningful upside risks to oil prices remain in place, both from the still-unfolding dollar catastrophe and ongoing OPEC rumblings, as well as from ever-volatile Middle Eastern and related global political tensions, and other supply and demand issues.

In the United States, high oil prices have spiked and will continue to spike basic inflation, and even the gimmicked "core" inflation measures — net of changes in food and energy prices — are beginning to inch higher. Historically high oil prices still are working their way through all levels of U.S. economic activity, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. These broad inflationary pressures will remain intact despite any near-term oil price swings, and "core" inflation eventually should catch-up with full inflation reporting.

 

Reporting/Market Focus

Payroll Employment Benchmark Revision

Perils of Mimicking Poor-Quality Government Numbers
(ISM and
ADP Data)

Historical Payrolls and Employment Growth Revised Downward. As shown in the accompanying graphs, benchmark revisions to the payroll employment series of the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) showed meaningful downside revisions both in terms of employment level and of year-to-year growth.

With the not-seasonally-adjusted March 2007 payroll survey benchmarked against state unemployment insurance filings of the time, the BLS estimated that March 2007 payrolls had been overstated by 293,000 jobs, which translated into a 284,000 downside revision to the seasonally-adjusted March number. By November 2007, such meant a 440,000 downside revision in the adjusted numbers. December should have been even worse, but as discussed in this month’s employment section, the December number may have been altered so as to keep the month-to-month payroll decline in January 2008 to a minimum.

Annual growth now appears to have slowed more sharply than previously reported, slipping to 0.72% as of January 2008. Growth that low, in a downtrend, has always been tied to a coincident recession.

The third graph shows some of the variability in the month-to-month payroll gain that is so heavily followed by the financial markets. Aside from the historical month-to-month numbers averaging a little less than previously reported (95,000 instead of 111,000 in 2007), the revision patterns showed a tendency for initial reporting (an average of 103,000 in 2007) to be revised upward in the standard two months of revision that follow initial release, exclusive of the benchmark revisions. In general, the BLS estimates a 95% confidence interval around the seasonally-adjusted monthly change of +/- 129,000 jobs.  

With the exception of the benchmark revision one year ago, most recent benchmark revisions have been to the downside, and most have been significant, regardless of direction. The process highlights some of the basic weaknesses in the accuracy of the regular payroll surveying and reporting, and it should raise issues for those in the private sector attempting to make use of the numbers.

ADP, ISM and Efforts at Mimicking Government Data. There was a time — a couple decades back — where it may have made sense for private sector publishers of economic data to attempt to link the reporting of the their series to popularly followed government statistics. If an indicator such as the purchasing managers survey proved to be a good predictor of broad economic activity, as measured by the GNP/GDP, then economists and analysts would come to rely heavily on the significance of the numbers. 

In recent decades, however, some government economic data have been gutted of economic significance thanks to methodological changes that have structured upside biases into the GDP and employment data, and downside biases into inflation reporting. Accordingly, private enterprises attempting to mimic today’s government reporting, unwittingly may be distorting and biasing their own otherwise very good and valuable data. Such enterprises can put out meaningful reports that have the respect of the markets, without having to tie themselves too closely to tainted government data. Two recent cases come to mind: Automatic Data Processing, Inc. (ADP) and the Institute for Supply Management (ISM).

Relatively new to the economic reporting field is ADP, a company that processes a very large number of company payrolls. Their unique database has enabled the creation of ADP’s National Employment Report. Given the quality of the company’s data, the high level of technical and economic skill behind the data analysis, and presumed political neutrality, significant trends should be signaled by the ADP data with a higher accuracy than often are available from the government’s monthly survey.

The issue is that ADP adjusted the reporting of their monthly data in an early effort to mimic the monthly payroll change as reported by the government. Although this move appears to have been quite popular with financial traders, who always look for an edge in anticipating a key market-moving statistic such as the monthly payroll survey change, there can be problems trying to use high quality data to imitate a highly volatile number that is subject to political massaging, birth-death models, etc.

Consider that the government’s monthly payroll gain comes within a +/- 129,000 range 95% of the time, and lies outside that range one time in twenty. If one used 100,000 as a base in 2007 (the average initial jobs gain reported by the BLS in 2007 was 103,000), a range from minus 9,000 to plus 229,000 easily covered all the initial reportings. One could expect results in a given month that would show something close to a random number in that range. If the numbers were random, they are by nature unpredictable. Yet, markets can respond if the monthly change is 10,000 more or less than consensus estimates. When consensus forecasts come close to the actual number, one has to wonder how random the government’s monthly reporting process is in reality.

The ISM has been publishing its purchasing managers survey of manufacturing activity for some years, and the survey has been recognized broadly as a reliable indicator of economic activity. Of particular value is the new orders component of the manufacturing survey, which I have used regularly as a leading indicator of significant economic change. It was one of the first indicators to send out a warning signal in advance of the current economic downturn and has been a much more accurate indicator of current economic activity than official GDP reporting.

On January 18, 2008, the Institute for Supply Management (ISM) announced a reformulation of its purchasing managers index (PMI), where, "The new formula more closely predicts the GDP for the past several years." The ISM explained further that, "In late 2006, ISM asked a group of supply management professionals, educators and leading economists to study the relationship between the PMI Index and GDP (gross domestic product). After extensive study, the revised formula was determined to more closely predict GDP. While the impact of the change is marginal, it does provide a more precise measure than the previous formula."

Therein lies the problem. The ISM recognized a disconnection between the results of its surveys and the ever-rosy recent performance of the GDP. The reaction was to change the ISM series, assuming the GDP was correct. Yet the problem was with the quality of the government’s GDP reporting, not the ISM’s high-quality survey.

Basically the weightings of new orders and production, which had been 30% and 25%, respectively, were changed to the 20% weighting now applied to all series, including employment, supplier deliveries and inventories. Not surprising, the best leading indicator was downgraded because it failed to perform in predicting politically-rigged results of the GDP.

While the reweightings do not alter the broad picture significantly, in conjunction with the new seasonal factors introduced in January, they did prevent the January 2008 index from falling below 50.0 and signaling a contracting manufacturing sector. Such would have happened otherwise, without the reformulated changes (see the Purchasing Managers Survey section in the Better Quality Numbers segment for a detailed table).

Fortunately, the individual series, such as new orders, will continue to be published as usual, along the regular once-per-year revamping of seasonal factors, as determined by the Commerce Department.  

As to GDP, the annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) growth rate come with a 95% confidence interval of +/- 3%. Yet, consensus forecasts often come extremely close to the "advance" or initial estimate. There is nothing random about the reporting of the carefully structured GDP estimates. 

Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for February:

Illegal Immigration’s Impact on the Economy and Economic Reporting

This reporting focus has been pushed back one month to accommodate the analysis of the payroll benchmark revisions and related issues for economic reporting out of the private sector. The number of undocumented aliens in the United States appears to be underestimated, severely, and the impact of the current circumstance will be explored as it affects U.S. economic activity, inflation, living standards, long-range federal fiscal performance and reporting of same, among other issues.

___________________________________________

PLEASE NOTE: Earlier editions of the SGS newsletter referenced in the text, can be found on the Archives tab at www.shadowstats.com.

The February 2008 "Shadow Government Statistics" newsletter is targeted for posting around March 3rd. The Hyperinflation Special Issue should be posted in approximately two weeks.

OCCASIONALLY, BRIEF UPDATES ARE COMMUNICATED DIRECTLY BY E-MAIL. IF YOU ARE NOT RECEIVING E-MAIL COMMUNICATIONS FROM US, PLEASE LET US KNOW at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or by using the "Feedback" option on www.shadowstats.com.

 

 

Flash Update

Tuesday, February 5th, 2008
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
February 5, 2008
__________
 
Mr. Bernanke Dispatches the Helicopters
Solvency and Liquidity Problems Continue
 
__________
 

PLEASE NOTE: The January SGS Newsletter will be published by this weekend. Sometimes a newsletter or related research takes longer to complete than expected, as has been the case here. One of the developing stories in the pending missive is highlighted below.
– Updated SGS-Alternate Data for the GDP, Financial-Weighted Dollar and a preliminary estimate of SGS-Ongoing M3 for January have been posted to the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com.
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

Fed Emergency Actions Are Keeping Banking System Afloat. Irrespective of official fluff, the Federal Reserve’s primary mission has been and remains the solvency of the U.S. banking system. Economic growth and inflation containment are secondary concerns for Fed Chairman Bernanke, but they remain the factors put forth for public and financial-market consumption to help justify the U.S. central bank’s activities and remain the topics around which Wall Street, White House and Federal Reserve spinmeisters weave their yarns.

As to current conditions, consider that nonborrowed reserves of U.S. depository institutions have turned negative for the first time since before the Great Depression (see Federal Reserve Statistical Release H.3 Aggregate Reserves of Depository Institutions and the Monetary Base). In January 2008, the U.S. banking system met its reserves only by borrowing an amount in excess of 100% of total reserves from the U.S. central bank. In December 2007, total borrowings from the Fed topped 36% of total reserves, then the highest proportion seen since 46% in March 1933, when President Franklin Roosevelt declared a "bank holiday" and closed the banks. 

 

Mr. Bernanke has promised not to repeat the mistakes made by the Federal Reserve in the 1930s, whereby the banking system and the money supply collapsed into a deepening, deflationary Great Depression. The latest data on bank reserves suggest that something along the lines of an attempted non-repeat of 1933 is underway. Faced with a devil’s choice, the Fed has acted in the last several months with a series of emergency actions to hold the banking system together and to prevent a debilitating implosion in the money supply. The Fed will create whatever money is needed to prevent a collapse of any portion of the financial system.

While the banking system remains intact, the crisis is far from over, and there is a price that will be paid for the Fed’s activities in the not too distant future. Current Fed actions and the precedents being set are locking in an eventual hyperinflationary depression, as will be discussed in the forthcoming newsletter.

Bank reserves deposited with the Federal Reserve are the fractional backing for bank deposits and, along with currency in circulation, form the base for the money supply. On a daily basis, depository institutions, such as banks, have to have adequate reserves on deposit with a Federal Reserve Bank. When one bank has excess reserves on deposit with the Fed, it usually will lend those funds overnight to a bank that is shy the requisite reserves. Such is the fed funds market, and the interest rate at which overnight funds are lent is the highly publicized fed funds rate that currently is targeted by the Federal Reserve’s policy makers on the Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC).

If a bank is troubled — such as having solvency issues — and other banks are not willing to lend it reserves, the problem bank can go to the Federal Reserve’s discount window and borrow the needed reserves, usually pledging high quality assets as collateral. The discount window’s new Term Auction Facility (TAF), established in December, is a "temporary" term — as opposed to overnight — facility, and accepts a broad range of collateral, including mortgage backed securities. Non-borrowed reserves simply are total reserves less total borrowings of depository institutions from the Fed, and those borrowings now exceed total reserves.

While there are a number of factors involved in the reporting of negative nonborrowed reserves, one has to wonder how functional the U.S. banking system would be at present without the TAF. The Fed described the TAF facility in its December 12th pronouncement as helping to "promote the efficient dissemination of liquidity when the unsecured interbank markets [fed funds] are under stress." In other words, the TAF was established because the fed funds market was not operating normally. As confirmed in its February 1st announcement, the Fed said it "intends to conduct biweekly TAF auctions as long as necessary to address elevated pressures in short-term funding markets."

The growing size of the TAF and recent extension of credit to smaller banks suggest that the solvency/liquidity crisis for banks is spreading. In Friday’s announcement of two auctions (February 11th and 25th) totaling $60 billion, the Fed noted, "To facilitate participation by smaller institutions, the minimum bid size will be reduced to $5 million, from $10 million in the previous auctions."    

Further details will follow in the newsletter.

_______________________________________________

The January SGS is targeted for posting over the weekend of February 9th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Friday, February 1st, 2008
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
February 1, 2008
__________
 
Recession in the Numbers
M3 Growth Appears To Be Firming Again
 
__________
 

PLEASE NOTE: The fourth-quarter GDP and January payroll report and benchmark revisions will be more fully covered in the January SGS newsletter, which is targeted for Monday, February 4th. Updated SGS-Alternate Data for the GDP, Financial-Weighted Dollar and a preliminary estimate of SGS-Ongoing M3 for January will be posted over the weekend to the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com.
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

A quick look at the "advance" estimate of fourth-quarter GDP growth and January payroll data and revisions indicates a rapid surfacing of the inflationary recession that recently has been gaining recognition among Wall Street analysts and consensus economists. With the Fed capitulating to stock-market demands for easing, deterioration in the U.S. dollar should accelerate sharply. The general outlook for the months ahead, however, remains the same, with a deepening inflationary recession, a major bear stock market, heavy selling of the U.S. dollar, heavy buying of gold, and an eventual flight to safety away from the greenback that will spike long-term interest rates (currently negative net of inflation).

GDP Should Have Contracted. The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) reported annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth in fourth-quarter 2007 GDP at 0.64% +/- 3%, which was statistically indistinguishable from a meaningful contraction. The reported growth was down from nonsensical growth of 4.91% for the third quarter. The BEA tries to target consensus forecasts (which were 1.2%) for the advance estimate, since they have to guesstimate more than 90% of the underlying data. The reported result suggests the first-cut estimate actually was a contraction. Any number of bad assumptions currently in place, if altered slightly, would have given that result. Annual growth reportedly slowed from 2.8% to 2.5%. This series is so heavily politicized that it is little more than political propaganda. Underlying reality suggests both the quarterly and annual rates of change should have been negative, as will be discussed in the upcoming newsletter.

With Consistent Seasonal Adjustments, Payrolls Fell by 100,000. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported a seasonally-adjusted jobs loss of 17,000 (a loss of 393,000 net of revisions and benchmark revisions) +/- 129,000 for January, following a revised 82,000 (previously 18,000) jobs gain in December. Given the BLS’s ability to have brought the reported monthly change in at any desired level, the reporting of a small contraction has to be viewed as a deliberate political move. Perhaps Treasury Secretary Paulson wanted to keep up the pressure on the FOMC, which seems to have had advance knowledge of the result. Whether the reported contraction survives next month’s revisions is an open question.

One factor that may have affected the result was a revamping of the bias factor (birth-death model), which was a net subtraction of 175,000 jobs in January 2007. At that time, the decline had been offset adequately by a change seasonal adjustments. For January 2008, the bias factor was revised to subtraction of 378,000.

The annual benchmark and other revisions knocked 376,000 jobs off the previously-reported seasonally-adjusted December 2007 payroll level. Overall annual growth in total nonfarm payrolls slowed to a recessionary 0.72% in January from a revised 0.89% (previously 0.92%) in December.

Year-to-year growth should be virtually identical in both the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series, and applying the unadjusted annual change to the seasonally-adjusted year-ago numbers generates an adjusted January 2008 payroll level of 138.101 million versus the reported 138.102 million. That does not hold, however, with December, which should have been 138.201 million, instead of the reported 138.119 million. The difference is that seasonally-adjusted January payrolls, using consistent seasonals, would have shown a 100,000 jobs loss for January.

As often is the case, the news on the household front went in the opposite direction, with a statistically insignificant decline in the reported seasonally-adjusted January U.3 unemployment rate to 4.93% +/- 0.23% from 4.97% in December. The series was revised for lowered population estimates. In an unusual divergence, the broader U.6 unemployment rose to an adjusted 9.0% in January, up from 8.8% in December. Adjusted for the "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment still is running about 12.5%.

 M3 Growth Is Notching Higher Again. On the inflation front, the preliminary estimate for annual growth in the SGS-Ongoing M3 series for January appears set to notch minimally higher from the 15.0% growth rate in December (see the January 19th Flash Update as to Federal Reserve benchmark revisions).
 Further details will follow in the January SGS newsletter.
_______________________________________________
The January SGS is targeted for posting on Monday, February 4th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Monday, January 28th, 2008
 JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 

FLASH UPDATE

 
January 28, 2008
__________

Outright Recession Reporting Unlikely for 4th-Quarter GDP or January Jobs

Inflation and Dollar Concerns Ignored by Fed

 __________
 

PLEASE NOTE: In order to cover the GDP and employment (including benchmark revisions) reports, the January SGS newsletter has been targeted for posting next Monday, February 4th.
– Best wishes to all, John Williams

The troubled markets of last week reflect the still early stages of a deepening, systemic solvency and liquidity crisis, in conjunction with a deteriorating inflationary recession. Such is implicit not only in the Fed’s panicked interest rate cut last Tuesday (January 22nd) and a subsequent cut that widely is expected out of the Federal Open Market Committee’s regular meeting ending this Wednesday (January 30th), but also by the Administration and Congress’s rapid movement in setting up a gimmicked economic stimulus package. Increasingly ignored are downside implications for the value of the U.S. dollar and upside pressures on U.S. inflation, both of which promise to roil the markets, going forward.

Pocketbook issues tend to dominate voter concerns, and exit polling in the South Carolina primary highlighted the economy as the major issue. Such polling results rarely are seen outside of recessions and run in tandem with the Federal Reserve and the federal government tacitly accepting an in-place economic contraction. With an mounting number of Wall Street analysts openly admitting the possibility of a downturn, one could argue that there is an opportunity in the week ahead for the Administration to take a hit in its key rigged data, without taking much of a bigger political hit than already has been taken.

Both the "advance" estimate of fourth-quarter 2007 GDP growth, due on Wednesday (January 30th), and the January employment report, due on Friday (February 1st), can be brought in showing whatever results are desired by the Administration and/or the Fed. Yet, despite soft consensus expectations for both series, reported contractions in quarterly GDP and monthly payrolls, though reflective of underlying reality, are not likely. Reporting now of outright contractions would only fuel financial-market volatility and increase pressures for ever greater Fed and federal government actions, which otherwise would be counterproductive in efforts to stabilize the U.S. dollar, as discussed in recent writings. Further, the Administration likely still would prefer to avoid having a formal recession declaration from the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) before the 2008 election.

An "advance" estimate of GDP growth is more than 90% guesstimate by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), and the number crunchers there tend to target consensus forecasts. With expectations for annualized real (inflation-adjusted) fourth-quarter growth running around 1.2%, down from 4.9% in the third quarter, reported growth around 1.2% is a fair bet.

The January payroll numbers will include the annual benchmark revisions, which will lower reported payroll levels but will allow any level of monthly change desired by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). Expectations are for a monthly jobs gain of 60,000. A fair bet is that the monthly change will remain in positive territory; otherwise the NBER has its beginning month for formal recession recognition. The unemployment rate is expected to hold at 5.0%, but an upside move is a good possibility.

The pending results already are known by the Administration and the Fed, so look to comments in tonight’s State of the Union Address and Wednesday’s FOMC statement for indications of what lies ahead with these widely followed reports. In other reporting of this week, such as consumer confidence and the purchasing managers survey, look for results that will tend to confirm a deteriorating inflationary recession.

 Further details will follow in the January SGS newsletter.

_______________________________________________

The January SGS is targeted for posting by Monday, February 4th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings

Alert

Tuesday, January 22nd, 2008
  JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

A L E R T

  January 22, 2008
__________

Fed Panic Indicates Mounting Instabilities

Currency, Gold and Oil Market Intervention Highly Likely

__________
 

Mr. Bernanke’s panicked 75 basis point (0.75%) interest rate cut this morning, in the face of what appeared to be a likely troubled open for the U.S. stock market most certainly was done in conjunction with the activities of the Plunge Protection Team (PPT a.k.a. the President’s Working Group on Financial Markets). Beyond manipulation of stock futures contracts, PPT coincident activities in past crises also have involved direct, coordinated central bank intervention aimed at supporting the U.S. dollar and at depressing gold and oil prices. Such appears to be at work as stocks "rally" off their opening lows around 10 a.m. ET.

Bernanke appears to have moved, as Greenspan did in the October 1987 financial panic, to abandon fully the greenback in hopes of propping stocks artificially. Irrespective of what happens in the markets today and tomorrow, there is no happy news in this circumstance, with the U.S. financial system so heavily dependent on foreign capital for liquidity. Beyond the short-term games played by the central banks, the general outlook remains pretty much the same, with a deepening inflationary recession, a major bear stock market, heavy selling of the U.S. dollar, heavy buying of gold, and an eventual flight to safety away from the greenback that will spike long-term interest rates (currently negative net of inflation). What is changing is that the eventual flight to safety away from the greenback is being pulled rapidly into the near future. 

Further details will follow in the January SGS newsletter. 

_______________________________________________
 
 

Posting of the January SGS is targeted for the week of January 28th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

 

Flash Update

Saturday, January 19th, 2008
 
 

JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

 
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
 
January 19, 2008
 
__________
 
 
Gimmicked Stimulus Cannot Reverse Structural Downturn
 
Quarterly Industrial Production Contracted
 
Housing Starts Plunge
 
CPI Scuttled Annual Retail Sales
 
__________
 
 

PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Alternate CPI and Inflation Calculator have been updated through December 2007, and the SGS-Ongoing M3 series has been revised through December 2007, so as to incorporate the Federal Reserve’s benchmark revisions to the still-reported M2money supply series and memorandum items. Both series have been posted to the Alternate Data Series tab on www.shadowstats.com.

– Best wishes to all, John Williams

 

With the Administration and the Fed promising economic stimulus early in an election year, one can be certain that coming economic reporting and financial market developments still hold a number of unhappy surprises. Last week’s data showed further deterioration in the structural, inflationary recession that continues to impair broad U.S. business activity. No quick-fix stimulus gimmick — tax rebate or interest rate cut — will have any lasting or meaningful impact.

In order to have sustainable GDP growth, disposable personal income has to be showing sustained growth net of inflation impact. Otherwise, consumer consumption, which accounts for over two-thirds of GDP, cannot grow on a sustained basis. Although official income reporting in the GDP-related income accounts generally shows positive real (inflation-adjusted) income growth, such is not reality. That consumer take-home pay is not keeping up with inflation can be seen in consumer confidence surveys, and in the annual contractions reported in real average weekly earnings, in summary aggregate income numbers reported by the IRS and in the Census Bureau’s annual income survey. Without basic income growth, short-lived economic growth can be had only from consumers taking on more debt or liquidating savings, but such measures already are at or near their limits and cannot be sustained.

From the standpoint of the Administration and Congress, they have no approach that can address the structural downturn, only gimmicks that might give a very short-lived boost to consumption. With the federal government financially bankrupt in all but name, there also is no funding for such a package. Further, the Fed is limited in what it can do with rate cuts. Mr. Bernanke knows, each time he eases, that he is at risk of triggering a U.S. dollar collapse. It is as if he were blowing up a balloon that held back the dollar dumping. He knows the balloon can burst at any time, and the next puff or rate cut could do it. He does not appear to have the will to resist heavy, counterproductive pressures he is receiving from Wall Street and the Administration.  

The preceding issues have been addressed in various monthly newsletters and will be reviewed anew in the months ahead. The general outlook for the year ahead remains in place: a deepening inflationary recession, a major bear stock market, heavy selling of the U.S. dollar, heavy buying of gold, and an eventual flight to safety away from the greenback that will spike long-term interest rates. 

Last week, beyond the December retail sales and PPI reporting covered in the January 15th Flash Update, the Federal Reserve published its benchmark revision to the monetary aggregates, which had the effect of reducing reported annual growth in recent months, with December 2007 M2 annual growth revising to 5.8% from 6.1%, and with the SGS-Ongoing M3 annual growth estimate revising to 15.0% from 15.2%. As is common with these revisions, however, the general growth patterns remained intact. In other reporting:

Fourth-Quarter Industrial Production Contracted. Back in the days when GDP (or GNP) growth estimates had some meaning, a 1.0% annual quarterly contraction in industrial production usually would be coincident with a quarterly contraction in GDP. Given current politics and methodological changes of the last two decades or so, reported GDP growth likely will remain in positive territory until after the mid-term election.

Seasonally-adjusted December industrial production was unchanged (plus 0.1% net of revisions), following a 0.3% gain in November and a 0.5% contraction in October. Again, the fourth-quarter showed a seasonally-adjusted annualized contraction of 1.0% versus the third quarter. Year-to-year change eased to 1.6% in December from 2.2% in November

Housing Starts Contraction Deepens. Seasonally-adjusted December housing starts fell by 14.2% (15.2% net of revisions) +/- 8.8% (95% confidence interval) on a monthly basis, after a 7.9% decline in November. Year-to-year, December starts were down by 38.2%, just shy of the low of the current recession, but still short of the 50% year-to-year decline seen at the trough of the 1990/1991 recession. November starts were down by 25.0% from the year before.

CPI Inflation Exceeds Retail Sales Growth. Though still shy of reality, the December CPI inflation rate was high enough to take the reported 4.1% annual growth in December retail sales into contraction, net of inflation. Such rarely is seen outside of recessions and is particularly ominous, where retail outlets often make or break their year with holiday sales.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported the seasonally-adjusted December CPI-U up by 0.30% (minus 0.07% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, following November’s 0.80% (0.59% unadjusted) gain. December’s annual CPI inflation eased to 4.08% from November’s 4.31%.

What was fascinating in the financial media’s handling of the annual inflation number was the emphasis on the surge in December year-to-year inflation to 4.1% in 2007 from 2.5% in 2006. Inflation just as easily could have been touted in terms of annual average, where the average 2007 CPI inflation dropped to 2.8% from 3.2% in 2006. That latter case might have raised some credibility issues for the BLS, as well as highlighting unusual patterns in some of last year’s monthly reporting.

Year-to-year annual inflation likely will surge anew in January 2008, dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding the 0.17% increase seen in January 2007. The difference will directly add to or subtract from December’s annual inflation rate of 4.08%.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) — the substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by the manipulators and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — was 3.41% in December, down from 3.57% in November, but up from 2.36% in December 2006.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth was about 7.4% in December, down from 7.6% in November, but up from up from 5.8% in December 2006. The SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was roughly 11.7% in December, unchanged from November, and up from 10.0% in December 2006.

Week Ahead. There are no significant economic reports due for release in the next week. Generally, despite the inflationary recession rapidly gaining recognition, most upcoming reports should continue to surprise economic expectations on the downside and inflation expectations on the upside.

Further details will follow in the January SGS newsletter.

_______________________________________________
 

Posting of the January SGS is targeted for the week of January 28th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Tuesday, January 15th, 2008
 
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
 
January 15, 2008
 
__________
 
 
Retail Sales Revisions Show Sharper Downturn
 
Inflation Irregularities Also Signal Reporting Distortions
 
__________
 
 
 
Holiday Shopping Collapsed. Where the seasonally-adjusted December retail sales number was reported down by 0.37% +/- 0.8% for the month, such was after downward revisions to November’s reporting. Net of revisions, December was down by 0.73%, with November’s previously reported gain of 1.22% now standing at 1.05%. The combined November/December retail sales gain of 0.7% should be in contraction, net of official CPI reporting, with November CPI up by 0.8% plus whatever may be reported tomorrow (January 16th) on December’s CPI. With year-to-year December retail sales reported up by 4.1%, such also should be flat to underwater net of official inflation.
 
Net of grocery store and gasoline station sales, "core" retail sales for December was down by 0.36% (down 1.02% net of revisions), following a revised 0.29% gain in November (previously 0.78%), with reported gains in food prices offsetting reported lower gasoline prices. 
 
An interesting pattern continues to unfold in the food and energy areas, where implicit food and energy inflation reflected in the data appear to be understated one month and then revised upward the next month. This can be seen in the December non-core growth being down 0.4% versus down 0.7% net of revisions, with the December core being down 0.4% versus down 1.0% net of revisions.
 
While retail sales keep getting revised, the CPI does not get revised from initial reporting (unless there is an outright error in calculation). Given the detail of this morning’s retail sales report, which likely reflects understated food and energy costs, and this morning’s December PPI, which definitely understates food and energy costs, there is a pattern in place for soft reporting of tomorrow’s December CPI release.
For December PPI, a seasonally-adjusted monthly decline of 0.1% (an unadjusted 0.4% decline) was reported, after November’s 3.2% boost. Year-to-year PPI eased to 6.3% from 7.2% in November.
 
The inflationary recession continues to deteriorate, with most upcoming reports likely to surprise economic expectations on the downside and inflation expectations on the upside.
 
Further details will follow in the January SGS newsletter.
 
 
_______________________________________________
 
 
Posting of the January SGS is targeted for the week of January 28th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Sunday, January 13th, 2008

 

 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
 
January 13, 2008
 
__________
 
 
Recession Recognition Settles In
 
Moody’s Cautions on U.S. Credit Rating
 
December M3 Growth at 15.2%
 
__________
 
 
 
PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Ongoing M3 series has been updated through December 2007, with details posted on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com.
– John Williams
 
Recession Recognition. In the last week, not only did a number of Wall Street analysts jump on the recession band wagon, but also the Administration began talking of economic stimulus, and Mr. Bernanke appeared to cave in, effectively promising aggressive accommodation. If only the Administration and the Fed had viable options open to them, such as sound fiscal conditions that would allow for a tax cut or increased spending, or stable currency conditions that would allow significant rate cuts. Shy of the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) formally declaring a recession, this is about close as the system comes to acknowledging a recession at hand. Such a circumstance usually happens after a recession has been underway for six-to-nine months, or longer.
 
The general outlook for the year ahead remains in place: a deepening inflationary recession, a major bear stock market, heavy selling of the U.S. dollar, heavy buying of gold, and an eventual flight to safety away from the greenback that will spike long-term interest rates.  
 
A Little Catch Up in the November Trade Deficit. In an otherwise quiet reporting week, the November trade report showed something of a surprise catch up in recent underreporting. Though still well shy of reality, the seasonally-adjusted trade deficit widened to $63.1 billion in November from $57.8 billion in October, reflecting rising oil prices.
 
Officially Gimmicked Federal Deficit Widens. In the first three months of fiscal 2008, surging outlays have widened the budget deficit to $105.5 billion versus $82.9 billion for the same period a year before. That puts the rolling 12-month deficit through December 2007 at $187.9 billion versus $211.8 billion in December 2006. The annual "improvement" in the deficit has narrowed to $24 billion in December from $49 billion in November and from $85 billion at fiscal year-end (September 30th).
 
A better estimate of the government’s operating cash shortfall is seen in increases to gross federal debt, which stood at $9.229 trillion at the end of December. That was up $80 billion for the month, up $222 billion for the quarter and up $549 billion from December 2006, which in turn was up $510 billion from December 2005. Updated analysis of the government’s 2007 GAAP-based financial statement will follow in the January SGS newsletter.
 
Moody’s Caution on U.S. Triple-A Rating.  The SGS Primer on Federal Deficit Reality suggests that consistently applied rating standards (based on GAAP-based accounting of the U.S. fiscal condition) would relegate U.S. Treasuries to junk-bond status. Of some interest, the first signal for a possible ratings shift based on U.S. fiscal conditions was reported by Reuters on January 10th:
 
"Moody’s Investors Service said on Thursday the United States’ ‘triple-A’ government bond rating could come under pressure in the very long-term if the Medicare and Social Security programs are not reformed. ‘These two programs are the largest threats to the long-term financial health of the United States and to the government’s Aaa rating,’ Moody’s analyst Steven Hess said in the agency’s annual report on the United States."
 
M3 Growth Adds to Inflationary Pressures. Annual growth in December’s monthly average of the SGS-Ongoing M3 slowed to 15.2%, off its near-term peak of 15.7% in November, but still at a level that historically has been followed by heavy monetary inflation.
 
Due to continued subscriber questions, this section has been expanded to look more closely at some of the relationships between the various money measures and inflation, including some numbers updated from the December 2007 SGS newsletter. Part of the following commentary may appear in an article to be contributed for public consumption.
 
Growth of broad money supply in the U.S. financial system is a strong indicator of business activity and predictor of inflation. The current 15%-plus level of growth in an ongoing estimate of M3 — the broadest measure of the U.S. money supply — has not been seen since August 1971, when President Richard Nixon closed the gold window. Such foreshadows increasing monetary inflation pressures in the U.S. economy, on top of existing pressures from oil, food and a weakening U.S. dollar. In contrast, recent slow growth in the monetary base is not uncommon under the circumstances and does not foreshadow consumer goods deflation.
 
In an earlier day, when M2 was the broadest money supply measure, it was established as a component in the government’s once index of leading economic indicators (now published by the Conference Board), because of its strong relationship to economic activity. Generally, the broader the liquidity measure, the better is the predictive value of that measure.
 
Traditional money supply measures of recent years have included three levels of aggregation: M1, which generally includes cash and demand deposits (checking accounts); M2, which generally includes M1 plus savings accounts, small time deposits (certificates of deposit less than $100,000) and retail money funds; M3, which generally includes M2 plus large time deposits (jumbo CDs of $100,000 or more), institutional money funds, repos and euro-dollar deposits.
 
A relatively new measure, Money Zero Maturity (MZM), which is calculated by the St. Louis Federal Reserve, includes only cash accounts that have no maturity considerations, specifically M2 less small time deposits plus institutional money funds.
 
Back in March 2006, the Federal Reserve ceased reporting of M3, claiming lack of relevance and bemoaning the excessive cost in producing the series. The reasons given for killing the series appear to be nonsensical. How could small time deposits in M2 be relevant, but not the large time deposits in M3; how could retail money funds in M2 be relevant but not institutional money funds in M3? Separately, the Fed continued to incur the cost of tracking much of the information used to calculate M3.
 
Personally, I believe the Fed did not want the markets to see a pending surge in broad money growth add to inflationary concerns and expectations. Where cash would shift out of M2 into large time deposits and institutional money funds, such would depress M2 growth artificially, while M3 would show the full picture. That partially is what has happened, and therein is part of the benefit of looking at the broadest money measure, as can be seen in the accompanying graph of M3, MZM and M2. At subscriber request, Shadow Government Statistics began estimating ongoing annual growth in M3, which allows for publication of the non-official data that otherwise would not see the light of day.
 
 

Chart 1

 
As the recent banking solvency crisis broke, the Federal Reserve lent money to banks, as needed, and pumped liquidity into the system. Annual growth in the seasonally adjusted the monetary base (Federal Reserve series), which includes bank reserves and the M1 currency component, however, showed seasonally adjusted annual growth in excess of 2.0%, which slowed to 1.5% in December, with the bulk of that growth coming from an unreliable currency number. The currency measure is unreliable because the Fed has no accurate tally of how much currency (perhaps up to two-thirds) is outside the United States. The bank reserves were little changed over the year.
 
So, how can M3 growth be at 15.2% with the monetary base showing annual growth of just 1.5%? The answer lies in a number of factors, including liquidity flowing into the United States from outside the system, the impact of which is within the Fed’s control. The Fed has opted for systemic liquefaction.
 
First for clarification of some relationships, historically, there is a negligible correlation between monthly annual growth of the monetary base and M3 (-14% for 1970 to 2007). A relatively high M3 growth versus low-growth monetary base, though, has been common to most recessions seen since 1970 (1990/1991excepted). The monetary base does have a fairly strong correlation with M1 (68% for 1970 to 2007), but M1 has been in year-to-year contraction since mid-2006, as shown in the accompanying graph of M1 and the monetary base, and also has little predictive value related to inflation.
 

 

 

I have been using the money supply measures in econometric modeling of inflation and economic growth since the early 1980’s. Again, the broadest measure available always has been the best predictor of inflation. The relative size and December 2007 annual growth rates of the various money measures are indicated in the following table.

 

Some Comparative Money Numbers December 2007 (Monthly Average, Seasonally Adjusted)(Sources: Shadow Government Statistics, St. Louis Fed,                 Federal Reserve Board)
         Measure           $Billion   Yr/Yr                                     Change
         SGS-Alternate M3  12,927     +15.2%         MZM                8,111     +12.5%         M2                 7,458      +6.1%         M1                 1,363      -0.2%         Monetary Base        825      +1.5%         Currency (M1)        760      +1.4%

The strong growth in M3 partly reflects still-growing foreign investment in U.S. Treasury securities. The Federal Reserve has control over the nation’s money supply. In terms of spiking broad money growth, the U.S. central bank can take action to inject funds directly into the system, or it can do so on the behalf of others, or sit passively by as others act. By not sterilizing or offsetting the impact of foreign held dollars going into U.S. Treasuries or Agencies, the Fed is setting a policy of inflating money growth just as much as if it were injecting the funds itself. The Fed also has the option of changing reserve requirements, which, at present, enable a deposit of $1,000 to translate into $10,000 after successive relending of the funds that do not have to be held in reserve.

As noted in off-balance sheet items in the Fed’s Factors Affecting Reserve Balances of Depository Institutions (H.4.1 of January 10, 2008), Treasuries and Agencies held by the Fed for other central banks stood at $2.057 trillion for the week ended January 9, 2008, up by $287.0 billion, or 16.2%, from January 10, 2007. That represents a significant influx of liquidity into the U.S. monetary system.

 
As mentioned earlier, also at work in the broader money measures has been cash flowing out of M2 accounts to M3 accounts, such as large time deposits and institutional money funds. In the absence of official M3 reporting, the increasingly popular MZM measure also has shown a rapid pick-up in annual growth, thanks particularly to growth in institutional money funds.
 
Having used broad money growth in economic forecasting, I have found that solid M3 growth signals economic growth some of the time, but often times it does not. Adjusted for inflation, however, M3 growth slowing sharply to the downside, as did happen in the last two years is a reliable leading indicator of an economic contraction.
 
On the inflation front, usually, double-digit broad money growth is followed within a year or two by double-digit increases in consumer costs. Inflation, as used here, means price increases as seen in consumer goods and services. Of course, those events were before many of the methodological changes to the CPI that have resulted in current understatement of CPI reporting. The inflation currently signaled by M3 is not for financial asset inflation, such as in the equity markets. A very short-term leading indicator to financial assets has tended to be M1, which currently is in annual contraction.
 
The present money supply growth levels are consistent with a deteriorating inflationary recession, which only recently has started to gain broad public recognition. 
 
Week Ahead. Look generally for weaker than expected economic data and stronger than consensus inflation in this coming week’s heavy economic release calendar. Both December retail sales (Tuesday, January 15th) and industrial production (Wednesday, January 16th) should show monthly contractions. Strength in November retail sales reflected poor-quality seasonal adjustments for an early Thanksgiving, which shifted some sales into November from December. If December should be positive, look for a downward revision to November’s growth estimate at the same time. It would not be extraordinary for industrial production to contract in tandem with the indicated production contraction in December’s purchasing managers survey.
 
Expectations are for roughly 0.2% monthly gains in both the PPI (Tuesday, January 15th) and CPI (Wednesday, January 16th), but there could be some upside surprises as energy-related costs surface in unexpected areas. The seasonally adjusted monthly December CPI gain has to top 0.45% for December’s annual CPI rate to top November’s 4.31%.   
 
Further details will follow in the January SGS newsletter.
 
 
_______________________________________________
 
 
The target for posting of the January SGS is in the week of January 28th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Sunday, January 6th, 2008
 
 
JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS
 
 
FLASH UPDATE
 
 
January 6, 2008
 
__________
 
 
The Tempest Intensifies
 
December Payrolls Really Contracted
 
U.6 Unemployment Rate Surged to 8.8%
 
Money Growth Remains a Problem
 
__________
 
 
 
BEST WISHES TO ALL FOR A MOST HEALTHY, HAPPY AND PROSPEROUS NEW YEAR!
– John Williams
 
What Difference A New Year Makes. With year-end trading out of the way, add a couple of economic readings suggestive of a deepening inflationary recession and the stock market begins to react as though it has been hit with the stomach flu. The flu, though, likely would be more pleasant, since it usually passes in a couple of days. Factors such as heavy dollar selling, oil pushing to $100, and gold topping its old high of $850, again are signaling that the underlying problems are deep and eventually life-threatening to a financial system stuck in a severe, structural inflationary recession, and dependent on systemic liquidity based on a rigged U.S. dollar and on financial leverage built upon leverage built upon leverage that has started to collapse. Irrespective of near-term volatility in the various markets and any central bank market manipulations, the outlook for the year ahead remains unchanged, with stocks falling into a major bear market, heavy selling of the U.S. dollar, a strong rally in the price of gold, and an eventual sharp spike in long-term interest rates, when U.S. dollar dumping turns into flight for safety away from the dollar.
 
Manufacturing Industry in Contraction. The Purchasing Managers December manufacturing index showed an outright monthly contraction in manufacturing, falling to 47.7 from November’s 50.8. A diffusion index reading below 50.0 is negative by definition, and December new orders fell to 45.7 from 52.6 in November. The manufacturing survey is a highly meaningful predictor of broad economic activity, and these readings are consistent with a recession in the broad economy.
 
The December non-manufacturing survey held above 50.0, but that survey has little predictive value related to the broad economy (see the December SGS newsletter). The employment numbers remained soft to weak, and prices paid components remained strong in both surveys.
 
Payroll Reporting Games Continue. The jobs report fain was heavily manipulated to keep the payroll number positive, albeit a minimal gain of 18,000 nonfarm jobs in December. Politically, it is extremely important for the Bush Administration to keep the monthly jobs changes on the plus side, because a down month or two could provide the timing base needed for the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) to call a recession, and such is not wanted in an election year. As with the month before, the reported monthly payroll gain was statistically indistinguishable from a monthly contraction. Keep in mind that beyond the standard gimmicks highlighted below, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) simply can report any jobs number it desires. The current message from the reporting seems to be that the Administration does not want to show a recession, but it would like Mr. Bernanke to ease further.
 
Payroll Survey. Using the usual seasonal-factor and bias gimmicks, the BLS reported seasonally-adjusted December payrolls up by 18,000 (28,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000, following November’s revised 115,000 jobs gain (previously 94,000). Unadjusted year-to-year payroll growth fell to 0.92% in December, down from 1.10% (previously 1.04%) in November. The regular monthly decline in annual growth — now below 1.0% — has historic parallels seen only during recessions.
 
The reported December employment increase also ran counter to the background of the better employment-environment indicators, with collapsing November help-wanted advertising, surging new claims for unemployment insurance, and recession-level and near-recession-level employment readings, respectively, for the manufacturing and non-manufacturing December purchasing managers surveys.
 
Seasonal-Factor Gimmicks. As discussed regularly in the newsletters, the monthly seasonal factors are readjusted each month as needed, and the BLS can generate any desired result. Using consistently adjusted and unadjusted annual growth rates suggest that December would have shown a 15,000 jobs loss, instead of the reported 18,000 payroll gain.
 
Bias Adjustment. December’s upside bias add-factor (from the birth-death model) was 66,000 in December, versus 51,000 in November, and little changed from the 64,000 used in December 2006. Fortunately for an otherwise troubled financial industry and a minimal overall 18,000 jobs surge, 17,000 jobs were added to financial activities as mindless adjustment. The birth-death model gets revised next month, along with the annual benchmark revision to payroll levels.
 
Household Survey. The statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including those of multiple job holders), showed (after revised seasonal factors) seasonally-adjusted December employment plunging by 436,000, following a 631,000 (previously 696,000) gain in November. The seasonally-adjusted December U.3 unemployment rate jumped to 4.98% +/- 0.23%, a statistically meaningful increase from November’s 4.67% (previously 4.66%) unemployment rate, while unadjusted U.3 rose to 4.8% in December from 4.5% in November. The broader, adjusted November U.6 rate soared to 8.8% in December from 8.4% in November, while unadjusted December U.6 rose to 8.7% from 8.1% in November. Adding back in the "discouraged workers" defined out of existence during the Clinton Administration, the actual unemployment rate is inching higher, running around 12.5%.
 
A repeated note of caution: with annual benchmark, seasonal-factor, bias adjustment and population re-jiggering revisions due in the next employment report, the BLS, can bring in the January payroll and household numbers as desired.
 
Money Supply Growth Pulls Back from Peak. With more than three weeks of reporting in place for December, the annual growth in December’s monthly average of the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate is likely to come in around 15.2%, down from its near-term peak of 15.7% in November. That level, nonetheless, remains one that historically has been highly inflationary. A formal, preliminary estimate will be published next weekend.
 
In a related development, the Fed’s discount window lending to troubled banks continued to soar in the most recent reporting. The daily average loan level jumped to $5.3 billion in the two weeks ended January 2nd, up from $3.8 billion in the preceding two-week period and from $0.2 billion in the period before that. The solvency crisis is likely to deteriorate sharply, now that year-end bookkeeping gimmicks and obfuscation have been settled on.
 
Quiet Week Ahead Except for Trade Data. The only major economic report due in the week ahead is the November trade deficit on Friday (January 11th). Expectations are for minor monthly deterioration, reality should be major monthly deterioration, but the Administration and Fed’s needs for a non-recessionary economy could produce a bogus surprise improvement. Any happy news on the trade not only would be a plus for the greenback, but also would tend to spike the "advance" estimate of first-quarter GDP growth, due at the end of the month. 
 
Further details follow in the January SGS newsletter.
 
 
_______________________________________________
 
 
The target for posting of the January SGS is in the week of January 28th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

December 2007 Edition

Wednesday, January 2nd, 2008

 

 

Issue Number 38

 
December 2007
 
__________
 
 
Actual 2007 Federal Deficit Topped $4.0 Trillion
 
Fed Allows Strongest Money Growth in 36 Years
 
Inflationary Recession Intensifies Sharply
 
System Continues Faltering as Central Banks Juggle Gimmicks
 
Dollar and Gold Breathers Are Proving Short-Lived
 
__________
 
 

 

OVERVIEW — OPENING COMMENTS
 
Solvency Crisis Intensifies as System Careens Towards Economic and Financial Disaster

Pushing the system ever nearer to the brink of the ultimate liquidity crisis, the Fed’s December 11th easing, albeit minimal, played to the Wall Street speculators, not to the increasingly troubled global community holding large quantities of a rapidly-debasing U.S. dollar. Those not-so-happy dollar owners can see the U.S. economy sinking quickly into an inflationary recession, with the U.S. banking system facing a solvency crisis and the U.S. central bank playing games with itself. Such portends very difficult times for the greenback and the U.S. financial markets in 2008. The gold and silver markets, however, will be primary beneficiaries of these troubles.

Aside from the fantasy numbers published for the third-quarter GDP, most reporting of the last month showed troubled business activity, consistent with a deepening recession. While similar data in the month ahead may be used to push the Fed into further easing, equally obvious deterioration on the inflation front may help to offset those pressures. While there is little that the U.S. central bank can do to fight recession or inflation, it still has the option of refraining from further rate cuts in an effort to forestall some of the looming dollar dumping.

Recession Signs Abound. In addition to a couple of consensus economists moving into the recession camp (an occurrence that usually follows the onset of recession by at least six-to-nine months), most economic reports are showing a downturn, as discussed in the various sections.

Not only did annual growth in nonfarm payrolls slow to its cycle low, but new claims for unemployment insurance are rising sharply, the purchasing managers surveys are showing sharp drops in their employment indices, and help-wanted advertising for November collapsed to the lowest level in history, as shown in the accompanying graph.

 

As discussed later, even allowing for the impact of Internet help-wanted services, the current weakness foreshadows what should become a regular decline in monthly payroll reporting, if reporting were honest. 

While recessions rarely hit all regions and industries at the same time, the November industrial production measure suggested a recession-like contraction for the fourth quarter, while the industrial production diffusion indices indicate that most industries have been in recession since mid-2006.

Ongoing weaknesses in housing activity, durable goods orders, consumer confidence measures and real average weekly income all tend to confirm a downturn. Retail sales should join the group in December. 

Real Treasury Yields Turn Negative with Soaring Inflation. With November annual CPI surging to 4.31%, no one at present can beat inflation by buying an active-maturity Treasury security. The 30-year Treasury bond constant maturity yield was 4.45% (real interest rate of 0.14%) on December 31st, and all other maturities were under water in terms of the real or inflation-adjusted yield, using the official inflation numbers. Not only did CPI inflation surge, but annual November PPI jumped to 7.2%.

With oil pushing $100 per barrel, with U.S. dollar selling picking up anew, with the SGS-Ongoing M3 growth at a 36-year high of 15.7%, and with federal deficit widening in 2008 (see the deficit section) and spinning out of control on a GAAP-basis (see this month’s Reporting/Market Focus), the outlook for any near-term containment of inflationary pressures is bleak. 

Fed’s Spiking of Money Supply Growth Can Include a Variety of Options. The most common question I have been asked in recent months is, "Where is the broad money supply growth coming from, where the Fed does not seem to be adding lasting reserves to the system?" The answer partially is in still-growing foreign investment in U.S. Treasury securities.

The Federal Reserve has control over the nation’s money supply. In terms of spiking broad money growth, the U.S. central bank can take action to inject funds directly into the system, or it can do so on the behalf of others, or sit passively by as others act. By not sterilizing or offsetting the impact of foreign held dollars going into U.S. Treasuries, the Fed is setting a policy of inflating money growth just much as if it were injecting the funds itself. 

Treasuries held by the Fed for other central banks stood at $1.196 trillion in October 2007, up 7.5% from the year before. Per U.S. Treasury surveying, U.S. Treasuries held by foreign investors stood at $2.310 trillion in October, up 12.4% from the year before. Of some interest, Asian holdings of Treasuries fell for the year, Japan down 26.3%, South Korea down 22.4%, Taiwan down 7.4% and China down 4.1%. Saving the day, and more than accounting for the annual gain, was a 381% surge ($235 billion) in investment out of the United Kingdom, which could reflect investment from any number of global sources.

 
 

Also at work in the broader money measures has been cash flowing out of M2 accounts to M3 accounts, such as large time deposits and institutional money funds. One money measure that has gained popularity in the official absence of M3 reporting is Money Zero Maturity (MZM), calculated by the St. Louis Federal Reserve. MZM includes only cash accounts that have no maturity considerations, and is M2 less small time deposits plus institutional money funds. Like the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate, MZM has shown a rapid pick-up in annual growth. For the month of November 2007, M2 stood at $7.4 trillion, up 6.2% from the year before, MZM stood at $8.1 trillion, up 12.8%; SGS-Ongoing M3 stood at $11.1 trillion, up 15.7%. Early indications for December, however, suggest some possible minor slowing of M3 growth. 

Get Used to Amounts Expressed in Quadrillions of Dollars, as Solvency Crisis Deepens. When leverage is built upon leverage, eventually some large numbers can result. In publishing its six-month and triennial survey of global outstanding derivatives, the Bank for International Settlements (BIS) showed the June 2007 balance at $516.4 trillion, up by 39.8% from June 2006. With the total notional amount of derivatives outstanding in the global markets now at $0.5 quadrillion, the risks of systemic liquidity implosion are well beyond anything ever seen before. Of course, these estimates are from before the onset of the financial-system solvency crisis.

Central bank behavior in the last month, with the creation of special lending operations and extraordinarily large year-end cash infusions into the system, suggests a level of central bank distress and systemic problems that go beyond current marketplace perceptions. In the United States, renewed problems with commercial paper and soaring discount window borrowings show little improvement in circumstances over the last quarter. With economic fundamentals faltering rapidly, and with nature of troubled assets likely to expand rapidly, some major shocks to the system could loom early in 2008.   

PLEASE NOTE: A "General background note" provides a broad background paragraph on certain series or concepts. Where the language used in past and subsequent newsletters usually has been or will be identical, month-after-month, any text changes in these sections will be highlighted in bold italics upon first usage. This is designed so that regular readers may avoid re-reading material they have seen before, but where they will have the material available for reference, if so desired.

General background note: The U.S. economy is in a protracted and deepening structural recession that will prove to be the second leg of a double-dip recession, which began in 2000/2001. The current downleg was signaled in mid-2005 by a series of leading indicators used for that purpose by SGS. With neither traditional fiscal nor monetary stimulus available to help turn economic activity, the current circumstance is likely to evolve into a hyperinflationary depression (see December 2006 SGS). 

Continuing Market Instabilities. Unsettled bank solvency issues that likely will intensify in the New Year, and rapidly deteriorating inflationary recession conditions, promise a difficult year ahead for the U.S. equity and credit markets. Ahead likely are a major bear market in stocks, a sharp spike in long-term interest rates, heavy selling of the U.S. dollar, and a strong rally in the price of gold.

As U.S. dollar selling and dumping intensify in the year ahead, the greenback’s weakening position will reflect not only movement out of the U.S. currency, but also an unusual flight-to-safety out of the U.S. dollar. This is the circumstance that Mr. Bernanke should fear and should be fighting to prevent. Such eventually will force the Fed to increase rapidly its monetization of U.S. debt and to begin its unavoidable journey down the path towards hyperinflation. 

Alternate Realities. General background note: This section updates the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting. When a government economic measure does not match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Federal Reserve, White House and Wall Street. In these alternate measures, the effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan-Era GDP. The methodologies for the series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS (see Archives page at www.shadowstats.com).

GDP. The alternate third-quarter GDP growth reflects the "final" estimate revision, with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate third-quarter inflation-adjusted annual growth rate (year-to-year, as opposed to the popularly-touted annualized quarter-to-quarter rate) for GDP was a decline of roughly 2.4% versus the official, rising year-to-year gain of 2.8%. 

General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate GDP numbers tend to show deeper and more protracted recessions than have been reported formally or reflected in related official reporting. Nonetheless, the patterns shown in the alternate data are broadly consistent with the payroll employment and industrial production series (as revised), which are major indicators used by the National Bureau of Economic Research in determining the official timing of U.S. business cycles.


 

CPI. The annual non-core annual inflation rates spiked again in November and should continue rising into 2008. While the so-called "core" inflation rates continued their orchestrated malingering, they did notch slightly higher, and most PCE inflation measures were revised higher for recent prior periods. Food and oil-related price pressures continue as problems, due primarily to supply issues, but those pressures still have been reflected only minimally in much of the government’s reporting of the non-core inflation, so far. Continued sharp increases in market prices, however, make it increasingly difficult for the BLS to mask the mounting inflationary pressures, and some spreading of the energy-cost damages has started to surface in the broad reporting.

Eight Levels of Inflation                Annual Inflation for August to November 2007
                                       2007Measure                                Aug    Sep    Oct    NovI.1 Core PCE Deflator                   1.9%r  1.9%r  2.0%r  2.2%I.2 Core Chained-CPI-U                  1.7%   1.7%   1.8%   2.0%I.3 Core CPI-U                          2.1%   2.1%   2.2%   2.3%I.4 PCE Deflator                        1.8%   2.5%r  3.0%r  3.6%I.5 Chained-CPI-U                       1.8%   2.3%   3.0%   3.6%I.6 CPI-U                               2.0%   2.8%   3.5%   4.3%I.7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U                   5.4%   6.1%   6.9%   7.6%I.8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation    9.9%  10.4%  11.1%  11.7%
(r) Revised.Notes: I.1 to I.3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively,of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE)deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U.I.4 to I.6 are the same measures with energy and food inflationincluded. The CPI-U (I.6) is the measure popularly followed bythe financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation.I.7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre-Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top seriesin the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com.I.8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, whichreverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so,plus an adjustment for the portion of Clinton-Era geometric weighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic bookkeeping.
 General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate CPI numbers tend to show significantly higher inflation over time, generally reflecting the reversal of hedonic adjustments, geometric weighting and the use of a more traditional approach to measuring housing costs, measures all consistent with the reporting methodology in place as of 1980. Available as a separate tab at the SGS homepage www.shadowstats.com is the SGS Inflation Calculator that calculates the impact of inflation between any two months, 1913 to date, based on both the official CPI-U and the SGS-Alternate CPI series.

 

 

MARKETS PERSPECTIVE

U.S. stocks were down in the fourth quarter, but up for the year. Treasury yields were lower for the quarter and the year. Such was despite weakness in the dollar, strength in gold and higher oil prices over the same periods. While the formal quarterly and annual financial market review and look at the year ahead will follow in the January newsletter, current financial market conditions remain volatile, in an ongoing state of extreme agitation.

The U.S. economy is in a deepening, severe and sustained structural inflationary recession, saddled with an impotent Fed and a federal government that remains fiscally bankrupt in all but name. At the same time, the banking system is going through a major solvency crisis, largely due to poorly conceived structured financial instruments, which fundamentally were flawed in their modeling. The crisis tied to low quality mortgages should spread to into a wide variety of other instruments in the year ahead.

The central banks, particularly the Federal Reserve, are trying to appease the equity market speculators at the same time that efforts are being made to keep major financial institutions from failing. The Fed’s task is complicated further by the risk of a major drain on U.S. financial market liquidity resulting from a major run on the dollar. 

While the Fed has the wherewithal to prevent the collapse of the banking system, such does not necessarily flow through to the propping of the equity markets or the U.S. dollar. It would be surprising if 2008 does not see massive, global dumping of the U.S. dollar, with attendant large sell-offs in equities and Treasuries, along with a sharp spike in the prices of precious metals. Movements to reduce the U.S. dollar’s reserve-currency status, and use in pricing of key commodities such as oil, likely will gain significant momentum in year ahead, intensifying the other dollar-related problems.

U.S. Equities — The inflationary recession is gaining recognition rapidly, with negative implications for broad corporate revenues and profitability. In combination with the still unfolding solvency crisis and the still pending tanking of the U.S. dollar, the outlook for stocks is bleak, and the recent softness seen in equity prices likely will evolve into a ferocious bear market during the year ahead.

General background note: As the equity markets catch up with the underlying economic and looming financial fundamentals, the downside adjustments to stock prices should be quite large, eventually rivaling the 90% decline in equities seen in the 1929 crash and ensuing several years. The decline might have to be measured in real terms (net of inflation), as a hyperinflation eventually will kick in as the Fed moves to liquefy the system. Stocks do tend to follow inflation, since revenues and earnings get denominated in inflated dollars. Hence with a hyperinflation, a DJIA of 100,000 or 100,000,000 could be expected, but such still would be below today’s levels, adjusted for inflation.

General background note: The approaching financial maelstrom already has come over the horizon and is hovering near landfall. When it hits, those investors who have taken shelter in cash, gold and outside the U.S. dollar will be the ones with the wealth and assets available to take advantage of the extraordinary investment opportunities that should follow.

U.S. Credit Market — Key to the U.S. credit markets remains the global attitude towards the U.S. dollar. For the last quarter or two, U.S. Treasury yields have been depressed by both an ongoing influx of foreign-held dollars into Treasuries, along with the safe-haven effect that traditionally has boosted Treasury prices at times of financial-market or political turmoil.

These circumstances have led to a continued depression of Treasury yields. as discussed earlier,with the constant-maturity yield on a 30-year Treasury bond at 4.45% as of December 31st, and the latest annual CPI inflation at 4.31%, the real (inflation-adjusted) yield is about 0.1% on the long bond, and negative for all the active issues of shorter maturity.

Under current circumstances, the 30-Year Treasury bond normally would be yielding about 7.50%. At such time as the flight from the dollar becomes a flight-to-safety out of the dollar, U.S. interest rates will be forced higher in a mounting liquidity squeeze resulting from foreign dumping of dollar denominated securities. Increasingly, those assets will have to be absorbed in the U.S. markets, spiking treasury yields. With higher inflation down the road, long-term yields could be expected to rise by more than 300 basis points (3.00%) in the year ahead — with a sharply steepening, positively-sloped yield curve — despite a deepening recession and any further Federal Reserve accommodation.

U.S. Dollar — Despite heavy dollar selling in November, the dollar regained its footing some in December, likely in conjunction with manipulation tied to both overt and covert central bank intervention in the gold market that was aimed at suppressing the gold price rally. Both gold and the dollar resumed their fundamentally-driven trends (gold higher, dollar lower) in the last week or so.

With the economic crisis gaining rapid recognition, and with the next round of bank solvency issues likely to surface in the New Year, U.S. dollar selling pressures should intensify and become more sustained in the post-year-end period. The flight from the dollar increasingly should become a flight-to-safety outside the dollar. Accordingly, the Swiss franc likely will be one of the better performing currencies, but weakness in the U.S. currency should remain broadly based against the major Western currencies, with particularly heavy dollar selling in the months ahead, despite any near-term swings induced by central bank intervention.

Potentially exacerbating the circumstance is a mounting move out of the dollar by major Asian economies, as well as the mounting pressures within OPEC to abandon the U.S. currency as the pricing mechanism for oil. The U.S. markets remain particularly vulnerable, at the moment, to "surprises" from those countries that are not so friendly to the United States, or even from those who simply would like to avoid large losses on the dollars they hold. The more the Fed eases, the greater will be the shift out of the U.S. dollar.

Beyond further easing by the Federal Reserve rate or further negative news out of the solvency/funding crisis, the proximal trigger for a full dollar panic could come from a bad economic statistic (some numbers , such as the trade deficit, appear to be massaged in a dollar-friendly manner), political missteps by the Administration, negative trade or market developments in Asia, or a terrorist attack or expansion of U.S. military activity in the Middle-East. When the trigger is pulled, the broad selling pressure should be strong enough to overwhelm short-lived central bank intervention.

General background note: In terms of underlying fundamentals that tend to drive currency trading, the dollar’s portfolio could not be worse. Relative to major trading partners, the U.S. economy is much weaker, interest rates are lower and anticipated possibly to go lower still, inflation is higher, fiscal and trade-balance conditions are abysmal, and relative political concerns are rising sharply at the same time. The President’s approval rating commonly has moved currency trading in the past, and, despite any near-term bouncing, it remains lower than has been seen for any other U.S. President in the post-World War II era. Relative political stability issues are compounded by the presence of a Congress that is hostile to the President, and that is rated even lower by the American people than is the President. Generally, the greater the magnitude of the dollar selling, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. capital markets.

As shown in the following graph, the U.S. dollar continued to fall sharply in November, but bounced back in December. On a monthly basis, through November, the U.S. currency set new lows regularly on both a financial- and trade-weighted basis. The added latest December data points are as of December 31st.

 
 

General background note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS for methodology.

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics’ Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (FWD) is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes.  The series has been re-weighted for November 2007 and going forward, using the latest (April 2007) triennial survey of currency trading as published by the BIS. The earlier FWD levels have not been changed, and the November level was set consistent with the month-to-month change indicated by the October and November data on a reweighted basis.

Based on average daily foreign exchange market turnover in April 2007, the BIS estimates that 86.3% of all global currency transactions involved the U.S. dollar; such was down from 88.8% in April 2001. Of all U.S. dollar trading, 76.4% was accounted for by the top six currencies, used in the SGS Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (weighted as a percent of the top-six total): Euro/EUR (41.36%), Yen/JPY (19.55%), British Pound/GBP (17.77%), Australian Dollar/AUD (8.62%), Swiss Franc/CHF (7.04%) and the Canadian Dollar/CAD (5.66%). In April 2001, the top six currencies accounted for 81.4% of U.S. dollar trading.

 
 

The respective weightings of the six major currencies in U.S. dollar trading are plotted in the above graph. Of some interest is the general downtrend in the weighting of the yen, with irregular gains in the weightings of the euro, pound and Swiss franc, and the steady rise in the relative weighting of the Australian dollar.

For December 2007, the monthly FWD rose by 1.82%, after a decline of 2.09% in November and a decline of 2.29% in October. The December 2007 average index level of 47.33 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down by 7.10% from December 2006. November 2007 was down by 10.15% from November 2006, with October down 9.58% from October 2006. The index again set a new historic monthly-average low in November of 46.49. The November 2007 average would have been 46.45 using the prior weighting scheme. While the U.S currency showed a bounce in December, it again has come under selling pressure in the last week. The FWD stood at 47.42 as of December 31st.

Also setting a successive new all-time monthly-average low in November, and bouncing in December, was the Federal Reserve’s Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (TWD). In December, it rose by 2.06% from November, which was down 2.34% from October. The December 2007 index level of 53.03 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 8.90% from December 2006, following November’s 11.39% decline. As of December 31st, the TWD closed at 52.79.

Gold — As unexpectedly high November inflation numbers were published in mid-December, gold sold off, which was highly suggestive of some covert central bank intervention, in addition to some overt central bank selling of gold. Once again, however, the gold price is on the rise, with the current market closing in on the historic highs. On November 8th, the London afternoon gold fix was set a 27-year high $841.10 per troy ounce, within striking distance of the all-time high of $850.00 (London afternoon fix) of January 21, 1980. In terms of today’s dollars (November 2007), the 1980 gold price peak would be $2,296 per troy ounce, based on CPI adjusted dollars, and $6,078 per troy ounce in terms of SGS-Alternate CPI adjusted dollars. The suggestion remains that the price of gold still faces some catch-up.

As estimated (based on Kitco.com) for December, the monthly average London gold afternoon fix was $803.20, versus November’s record high of $806.25 per troy ounce, and up from $754.60 per troy ounce in October. Silver averaged $14.30 per troy ounce (estimated) in December, versus $14.70 per troy ounce in November and $13.67 per troy ounce in October.

While gold price volatility likely will continue, given the combination of rising inflation, weak dollar and increasing global instabilities, it would be very surprising if the price of gold does not break well above $1,000 per troy ounce in the year ahead. Of some risk here, again, remains the possibility of intensified covert or overt central bank intervention in tandem with intensified intervention aimed at muting the effects of dollar selling. Despite any central-bank machinations or intervention, the upside potential for the precious metals remains explosive.

General background note: As discussed in the Hyperinflation Series (see the December 2006 to March 2007 SGSs), the eventual complete collapse of the U.S. dollar — the world’s reserve currency — will force the creation of a new international currency system. Gold likely will be structured into any replacement system, in an effort by those organizing the new currency structure to gain public acceptance.

The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show November and estimated December averages as well as added points for closing prices on December 31st. As of Monday’s closing prices, gold was at $836.50 (London morning fix) and oil at $96.01 (Friday, December 28th), while the Fed’s published noon buying rate had the Swiss franc at $0.8827. Again, all three measures should trade significantly higher in the months ahead.

 
REPORTING PERSPECTIVE
 
The Big Three Market Movers
 

Rapidly deteriorating systemic and economic conditions are rattling the markets and are leaving the U.S. central bank with increasingly limited policy options. Having provided minimal easing at the last FOMC meeting, Mr. Bernanke still needs a stable U.S. currency and as much support as possible from upcoming economic data. The worse-than-expected November inflation numbers removed some of the easing pressure from the Fed, but if December payrolls show an outright contraction, which they could, then the pressure on the Fed will surge anew for massive accommodation.

Other than daily manipulation, the U.S. dollar largely is beyond the Fed’s control, but that is not the case for upcoming economic reporting. Accordingly, near-term rigging of key U.S. economic data, such as jobs growth, is at high risk, with a likely massaging to the upside for economic reporting. Nonetheless, the reality of an inflationary recession will continue to dominate honest economic reporting.

From the standpoint of party politics and the rapidly nearing primary season, the continued bottom-bouncing of the President’s positive rating generates added pressure on the government’s statistical agencies to add in happy biases to the economic numbers. Where statistical games are being played for both the perceived political needs of the Administration and the increasingly heavy financial-market needs of a severely constrained Federal Reserve, the need for rigged numbers continues to border on what might be considered as national security issues.

Absent manipulation, and against lagging and increasingly realistic market expectations, most near-term economic reporting still should tend to surprise the markets on the downside, while most inflation reporting still should surprise expectations on the upside.

Employment/Unemployment — As discussed in the December 7th Flash Update, the November jobs report was heavily manipulated to bring in the reported 94,000 gain in nonfarm payrolls, as opposed to an outright contraction. The reported gain was statistically indistinguishable from a monthly contraction. Even though slightly stronger than consensus estimates, the data — particularly on close examination — were extraordinarily weak. Beyond the gimmicks discussed below, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) simply can report any jobs number it desires. For example, during the Clinton Administration, the seasonally-adjusted monthly jobs were set to political needs (a target of 250,000 jobs per month at the time), and the BLS just backed into all the other numbers needed to support that. 

Payroll Survey. Using its full suite of identifiable estimation gimmicks, the BLS reported seasonally-adjusted November payrolls up by 94,000 (46,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000, following October’s revised 170,000 gain (previously 166,000). Unadjusted year-to-year payroll growth fell in November to 1.04%, versus October’s revised 1.17% (previously 1.18%). The decline in November annual growth to 1.0% has historic parallels seen only during recessions.

Seasonal-Factor Gimmicks. As discussed regularly in prior newsletters, the monthly seasonal factors are readjusted each month as needed, and the BLS can generate any desired result. Consistently adjusted and unadjusted annual growth rates suggest that November otherwise would have been reported with just a 26,000 payroll gain. Separately, seasonal factor manipulation also is evident in the downward revision to the October payroll levels. Adjusted, October was revised lower by 48,000 jobs, but unadjusted, October’s downward revision was just 8,000. The seasonal readjustments allowed for reporting a net extra 40,000 seasonally-adjusted jobs in November, while the reported October gain increased to 170,000 jobs, thanks to still-earlier period data adjustments.

Unusual Bias Adjustments. November’s upside bias add-factor (from the birth-death model) was 51,000, versus 103,000 in October. Aside from those 51,000 plug-number jobs not being valid, the bias was increased from 36,000 in November 2006, an unusually large adjustment, where the change in bias normally is plus or minus a couple of thousand for the same month in successive years.

Household Survey. The statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including those of multiple job holders), showed seasonally-adjusted November employment soaring by 696,000, after a 250,000 decline in October. The seasonally-adjusted November U.3 unemployment rate was reported at 4.66% +/- 0.23%, down from the 4.73% in October, while unadjusted U.3 rose to 4.5% in November from 4.4% in October. The broader, adjusted November U.6 rate held at 8.4% for the fourth straight month, while unadjusted November U.6 was 8.1%, against 7.9% in October. Net of the "discouraged workers" defined out of existence during the Clinton Administration, the actual unemployment rate continued to run around 12%.

One note of caution, the seasonally-adjusted unemployment rate (as popularly followed) will be subject to revisions at the adjusted level for the last five years, along with the December data due on January 4th.

The reported November employment gain ran counter to the background of the better employment-environment  indicators, with collapsing October and November help-wanted advertising, surging new claims for unemployment insurance, and sharp deterioration to recession-level and near-recession-level employment readings, respectively, for the manufacturing and non-manufacturing November purchasing managers surveys. These labor-market indicators remain consistent with what should be declining payrolls and a rising unemployment rate.

Last year, the December bias factor was an add of 64,000, following November’s 36,000. With November 2007 revised to 51,000, the relative change in the December 2007 bias could be small, but it still would place some upside pressure on December’s payroll results.

Next Release (January 4): Based on underlying economic activity, the December payroll survey should show a month-to-month contraction, despite expectations for a gain of roughly 70,000 jobs. The household survey also should show a sharp jump in the unemployment rate, beyond the expected 0.1% gain, again subject to annual seasonal-adjustment revisions. Given, however, the simplistic spin in the U.S. financial markets that a recession means Fed easing, and given the Fed’s still-indicated reluctance to ease further, data massaging could keep the December results in positive territory and strong enough to help give the U.S. central bank some breathing room.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) — The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) reported its "final" estimate revision of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth for the third quarter of 2007 at 4.91% +/- 3%, versus the "preliminary" estimate of 4.92% and the "advance" estimate of 3.90%, and up from the 3.82% reported for the second quarter.  From the standpoint of year-to-year growth, real GDP grew by 2.84% in the third quarter, versus prior estimates of 2.85% and 2.59%, and up from 1.89% in the second quarter. The latest revision reflected little more than statistical noise.

In its "final" form, the GDP’s implicit price deflator (inflation measure) rose at an annualized 1.04% rate in the third quarter, down from the second quarter’s 2.64%. Artificially-low inflation, used in deflating the GDP, results in overstatement of the inflation-adjusted GDP growth.

If the government’s report on broad economic growth were accurate, then the economy would be booming and enjoying low inflation, not suffering an inflationary recession. Anecdotal evidence and better quality data, however, suggest that Main Street U.S.A. is seeing inflation and a recession, not an economic boom with contained inflation.

Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS-Alternate GDP measure also suggests that economic reality is much weaker than officially reported. A third-quarter annual contraction of roughly 2.4%, little changed from second-quarter performance, would have been more in line with underlying fundamentals, past methodologies and the ongoing recession (see the graph in the Alternate Realities section of the Opening Comments).

The also BEA has published its estimates of two broad alternate GDP measures for the third quarter. Gross National Product (GNP) is the first, where GDP is GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments), and Gross Domestic Income (GDI) is the second, which is the theoretical equivalent to the GDP.

Reflecting the unusual gamesmanship in recent trade reporting, the annualized real growth in third-quarter GNP surged to 5.81%, from 4.01% in the second quarter, and was up 3.24% on a year-to-year basis.

As noted in the December 28th Flash Update, though, the GDI for the third quarter showed annualized real growth of just 1.46%. Again, the GDP and GDI should be equal to each other, with the GDP based on consumption and inventory change, and GDI based on income and net saving. Thanks to a fortuitous and highly unusual swing in the "statistical discrepancy" between the two series, from a negative $40.8 billion in the second quarter to a positive $74.8 billion in the third, the GDP was able to show its amazing and heavily suspect growth.

General background note: Although the GDP report is the government’s broadest estimate of U.S. economic activity, it is also the least meaningful and most heavily massaged of all major government economic series. Published by the BEA, it primarily has become a tool for economic propaganda.

Next Release (January 30): Based on underlying fundamentals, the "advance" estimate of annualized quarterly real GDP growth for the fourth quarter should be in contraction, but such a showing remains unlikely in an election year. Nonetheless, consensus expectations appear to be moving to below 2% growth, a sharp slowing from the third quarter’s nonsensical boom. As usual, the BEA is likely to target the consensus forecast for its advance estimate. As a result, the chances of a reported contraction at the first release are close to nil. Only the spinmeisters on Wall Street, at the Fed, and in the White House, and the targeted severely gullible, however, will believe or purport to believe that there is no recession.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) — As discussed in the December 15th Flash Update, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported the seasonally-adjusted November CPI-U (I.6) up by 0.80% (0.59% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, following October’s 0.29% (0.21% unadjusted) increase. November’s annual CPI inflation surged to 4.31%, up from 3.54% in October, from 2.76% in September and 1.97% in August.

The increase in annual inflation likely will continue in December 2007. Such is dependent on the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeding 0.45%, the amount of monthly increase seen in December 2006. The difference between December 2007 monthly reporting and the prior year’s 0.45% will directly add to or subtract from November’s annual inflation rate of 4.31%.

Annualized year-to-date inflation through the first 11 months of the year was 4.2% adjusted, 4.5% unadjusted. In theory, the adjusted and unadjusted numbers should be the same for the full year. Despite minimal catch-up in accounting for both CPI-U and PPI energy and food inflation, and a minor increase in reporting of so-called "core" inflation, core inflation continues to appear to be closely managed, staying conveniently "contained" for the needs of the Federal Reserve.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) (I.5) — the substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by the manipulators and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U — was 3.57% in November, up from 2.99% in October, and up from 2.31% in September.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology (I.7), annual CPI growth was about 7.6% in November, up from 6.9% in October and 6.1% in September, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (I.8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was roughly 11.7% in November, up from 11.1% in October and 10.4% in September. The eight levels of annual inflation, I.1 to I.8, are detailed in the table in the Alternate Realities section, along with the graph of SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation.

Next Release (January 16): Assuming monthly inflation for December in excess of 0.45%, annual CPI will continue its upturn and likely will continue rising into 2008. Fundamental reporting risks generally favor an upside surprise to market expectations, but targeted manipulation is of high risk, with the Fed increasingly facing no-win policy options. Significant upside movement in core inflation remains long overdue and is highly suspect by its absence.

Other Troubled Key Series

Federal Deficit — The federal government’s fiscal 2007 (year-ended September 30th) official accounting-gimmicked deficit narrowed to $162.8 billion from $248.2 billion in 2006. Yet, as discussed in this month’s Reporting/Market Focus, the GAAP-based deficit for fiscal-year 2007 was reported at $1.2 trillion, down from $4.6 trillion in 2006, with total federal debt/obligations rising to $59.8 trillion in 2007 from $58.6 trillion the year before. The deficit "improvement" was due primarily to one-time changes in actuarial assumptions and accounting that otherwise were not reported on a consistent basis. On a consistent reporting basis, the GAAP-based deficit for 2007 topped $4 trillion. 

Net of accounting for unfunded Social Security and Medicare Obligations, the 2007 GAAP deficit was $275.5 billion versus the officially gimmicked number of $162.8 billion; the same numbers for 2006 were $449.5 billion versus $248.2. On this basis, total federal government debt/obligations were $14.7 trillion in 2007, up from $14.1 trillion in 2006. Those numbers contrast with gross federal debt of $9.0 trillion in 2007 versus $8.5 trillion in 2006. 

Although it lacks the accrual accounting of the GAAP numbers, viewing the change in gross federal debt bypasses several of the regular reporting manipulations and is a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the official, gimmicked deficit reporting. For fiscal year-end 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $9.007 trillion, up by $500 billion from 2006, which was up $574 billion from 2005. For those who like to ignore the government’s obligations to Social Security, etc., for cash borrowed from payroll taxes and used in covering general expenses, the federal debt held by the public was $5.0 trillion in 2007, up by $206 billion from 2006, which in turn was up by $242 billion from 2005. 

In terms of official reporting, though, the deficit is on the rise again early in fiscal 2008. The 12 month rolling, accounting-gimmicked federal deficit for November 2007 was $194.2 billion, widening sharply from $169.1 billion in October, and $162.8 billion in September, but still down versus $242.8 billion in the 12 months ended November 2006. Nonetheless, the annual "improvement" seen in the differential between the 2007 and 2006 numbers narrowed to $49 billion in November from $81 billion in October. 

Gross federal debt totaled $9.149 trillion as of November 30, 2007, up $70 billion from October and up $516 billion from November 2006, which in turn was up by $540 billion from November 2005. Gross federal debt in October 2007 was up $495 billion from October 2006, which in turn was up by $557 billion from October 2005.

The Administration and Congress have been playing bookkeeping games for years and continue to do so. Even so, the gimmicked deficit should continue widening in the months ahead, as government finances begin to suffer from tax revenue losses due to the intensifying recession and relative tax receipt declines after the expiration of recent corporate tax incentives. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy’s mounting difficulties. 

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance — The trend in annual growth has continued to deteriorate. On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended December 22nd, annual growth rose to 3.4%, up from 2,1% in the 17 weeks ended November 17th. An increasing growth trend in new claims is an economic negative.

More often than not, week-to-week volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly claims numbers is due to the Labor Department’s efforts to seasonally adjust these numbers around holiday periods, as seen with the weeks that included Columbus Day, Veteran’s Day and Thanksgiving and as will be seen with the upcoming Christmas and New Year’s reporting. The Labor Department has demonstrated an inability to do such adjusting successfully. When the new claims series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity. 

Real Average Weekly Earnings — November’s seasonally-adjusted monthly real earnings fell by 0.4% versus a 0.3% (previously 0.2%) a decline October.  Annual change in November deepened to 0.8% contraction from the 0.5% decline in October.

General background note: Gyrations in the poor quality of reported CPI growth account for most month-to-month volatility in this series. Adjusting for the major upside biases built into the CPI-W inflation measure used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series shows the average worker to be under severe financial stress in an ongoing structuralrecession. 

Retail Sales — Seasonally-adjusted November retail sales was reported as up by 1.22% (1.44% net of revisions) +/- 0.8%, after increasing by 0.23% (previously 0.16%) in October. Year-to-year growth was reported at 6.27% for November versus 4.98% (previously 5.15%) for October.

Anecdotal evidence suggests that holiday shopping was unusually soft. Yet, helped by the Census Bureau’s inability to adjust adequately for seasonal variations due to an early Thanksgiving, some retail sales appear to have been drawn from December into November reporting. If such were the case, December retail sales either should be particularly weak, or they will be strong only on the back of downward revisions to prior November reporting. 

As discussed in the December 13th Flash Update,also helping the monthly reported November retail sales gain was surging inflation (including some upward revision to past history). Adjusted for CPI inflation, the November retail sales gain was up by 0.4% for the month, up 2.0% on a year-to-year basis.

General background note: Real (inflation-adjusted) year-to-year growth in retail sales below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation) signals recession, and a signal first was generated in this business cycle back in June 2006.  

Core Retail sales. As discussed last month, if the Fed and Wall Street hypesters are going to tout "core" inflation, net of food and energy, at least they should be consistent and go to town over "core" retail sales, net of gasoline station and grocery store sales, which vary primarily based on those otherwise "meaningless" energy and food prices.

November’s "core" retail sales rose by 0.78% (0.63% net of revisions), following October’s 0.05% monthly increase (previously unchanged). 

Next Release (January 15): Where the retail sales series appears to be one series used in trying to assuage market nervousness, such places upside risk on positive massaging of the monthly data, particularly for a report due related to the peak of the holiday shopping season. Nonetheless, there appears to be enough market recognition of reduced holiday season activity to allow for a relatively weak December report in conjunction with any revisions to the November data. Going forward, inflation-adjusted monthly and annual gains should turn regularly negative.

Industrial Production – As noted in the December 15th Flash Update, November’s industrial production showed a recession, despite the reported seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.3%. Such followed a revised contraction of 0.7% (previously 0.5%) in October. Annual growth in November jumped to 2.15% from October’s 1.43% (previously 1.80%). Creating the mirage of growth, here, is a revisions game. 

The November index is below July’s. Based on two out of three months in place for the fourth quarter, the current quarter appears headed for an annualized 1.6% quarter-to-quarter contraction, an unusual change outside of a recession. Historically, such contractions often coincided with a GDP contraction, but that was back in the days when the federal government was willing to recognize a recession.

Separately, the Federal Reserve publishes diffusion indices on the percentage of industries that are growing or contracting. As with the diffusion indices used in the purchasing managers survey, readings of 50.0 and above are viewed as in positive territory. Against the prior month, prior three months and prior six months, the November indices respectively were 40.4, 43.6 and 51.2, suggesting that the majority of industries have been in recession for the last quarter. A look at the time series for these indices, however, would support a contention that much of the economy has been in recession since mid-2006. 

Next Release (January 16): Look for December industrial production to decline anew and for a quarterly contraction, consistent with an ongoing recession. Eventually, monthly contractions in this series should become regular, with the erratic but generally slowing annual growth turning negative.

New Orders for Durable Goods — For November, the usually volatile durable goods orders rose by 0.1%, seasonally adjusted, after having fallen an unrevised 0.4% in October. On a year-to-year basis, November’s orders fell by 0.3% versus October’s 3.0% gain. Both November and October growth rates continued the pattern of annual contraction, after inflation adjustment, deepening the recession signal coming out of this series. 

The closely followed nondefense capital goods new orders rose by 3.8% for the month in November, after falling by 2.5% in October. November’s annual change was an increase of 5.6%, following October’s 0.1% decline.

General background note: Durable goods orders lost its status as a solid leading economic indicator when the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders in 2002. 

Trade Balance — As discussed in the December 15th Flash Update, the trade numbers continue to be targeted for manipulation, with minimal change being used as an inexpensive tool to impact the currency markets in favor of the U.S. dollar. As reported, the seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for October widened to $57.8 billion from September’s $57.1 billion (previously $56.5 billion). The revisions were based on a little catch-up in the regular overstatement of the guesstimated surplus in services trade. While these new numbers indicate the GDP has been weaker than previously reported, related GDP revisions will not be seen until next July’s annual downward revisions to prior GDP growth reports.

The importation of oil still appears to be seriously understated in terms of both pricing and physical volume, although minor catch-up was shown in October. 

Next Release (January 11): Underlying reality favors renewed, severe deterioration in the monthly trade deficit, but the government can play games with this series as long as it wants to play them. Reality continues to suggest negative reporting risk; financial-market manipulation continues to dominate the positive reporting risk.

Consumer Confidence — Although the monthly December consumer confidence measures fluttered after taking big hits in November, annual change continued sinking deeper into recession territory. In December, the Conference Board Confidence measure rose by 0.9%, after dropping 7.8% in November and 4.3% in October. December year-to-year change was down by 19.5%. 

The University of Michigan Sentiment measure was down by 0.8% in December, on top of declines of 5.9% and 3.0% in November and October. December year-to-year change was down by 17.7%.

These lagging, not leading, indicators tend to reflect the tone of the popular financial media and are showing that the inflationary recession is ongoing and deteriorating sharply. 

General background note: The Conference Board measure is seasonally adjusted, which can provide occasional, but significant distortion. The adjustment does not make much sense and is of suspect purpose, given that the Conference Board does not release the unadjusted number. The Michigan survey is unadjusted. How does one seasonally-adjust peoples’ attitudes? Also, beware the mid-month Consumer Sentiment release from the University of Michigan. Its sampling base is so small as to be virtually valueless in terms of statistical significance.

Short-Term Credit Measures — Patterns of annual growth in commercial borrowing have continues to reflect pressures from the bank solvency crisis, with the still-declining annual growth for commercial paper outstanding being countered partially by growth in commercial and industrial bank loans. Consumer credit numbers continue to show no impact. 

For seasonally-adjusted consumer credit, which includes credit cards and auto loans, but not mortgages, annual growth was reported at 5.4% in October against an upwardly revised 5.3% in September (previously 5.1%) and 5.4% in August.  In the current environment, where inflation-adjusted growth in income is not adequate to support meaningful growth in the personal consumption component of GDP, GDP growth only can come from temporary debt expansion or savings liquidation. Accordingly, stagnating growth in consumer debt expansion keeps an ongoing constraint on economic growth.

As an aside, the continued revisions in the consumer credit series reflect the Fed’s inability to track bank activities accurately on a timely basis. Similar issues can be seen in the Fed’s quarterly flow-of-founds accounting for the banking system. 

Commercial borrowing growth varied sharply, again, with annual change in November commercial paper outstanding dropping by 4.5%, after October’s 0.7% gain and September’s 0.8% decline. In contrast, annual growth in November commercial and industrial loans continued rose at an annual rate of 21.8%, up from 18.5% in October and following a 16.9% gain in September. The relative stability seen in October commercial paper started to fall apart anew in November, with the crisis deepening in December. These credit difficulties are placing a major dent in broad business activity.

Producer Price Index (PPI) — The seasonally-adjusted November finished goods PPI jumped by 3.2% (1.6% unadjusted), following October’s severely understated 0.1% (0.1% unadjusted) increase. Annual PPI inflation for November increased to 7.2% from October’s 6.1% and September’s 4.4%. Seasonally-adjusted intermediate and crude goods rose by 3.7% and 8.7%, respectively for the November, after increasing by 0.1% and 2.4% in October. The so-called "core" rate for finished goods rose to 0.4% from 0.0% in October, still well shy of reality. 

Next Release (January 15): Allowing for the regular random volatility of the monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months generally should come in above market expectations, as the effects of rapidly rising oil and food prices continue to permeate the broad economy. As with the CPI, the core PPI inflation rate still is long overdue for a meaningfully upside move, but such may be further delayed by the financial-market needs of the battered Federal Reserve.

 
Better-Quality Numbers

General background note: The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders — Still maintaining its general trend toward showing a recession in manufacturing, the overall November ISM manufacturing index eased to 50.8 from 50.9 in October, with the November employment index collapsing to a contraction level of 47.8 from 52.0 in October. An accelerating decline in the broad series remains a good bet in the next several months, based on continued deterioration in the overall industrial production and durable goods order series. An outright contraction reading in the broad index (below 50.0) is possible as early as the release of the December on January 2nd (today).

The November new orders index inched higher to 52.6 from 52.5 in October. Seasonal-factor distortions, which have been present, usually are overcome by viewing the series using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the November new orders index was up by 1.6% on annual basis versus a 0.2% gain in October.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading below 50.0 indicates contracting new orders. The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004. As an SGS early warning indicator of a major economic shift, the new orders measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating a signal of pending recession.

Service Sector Index. The service-sector ISM index does not have much meaning related to overall business activity, since new order activity at law firms, dentists, hospitals or fast-food restaurants has little obvious relationship to broad economic activity. That said, the overall November services sector index dropped to 54.1 from 55.8 in October. Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. The November employment component eased to 50.8 from 51.8 in October. The surging prices paid component is covered in the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) — As graphed and discussed in the Opening Comments, as well as noted in the December 28th Flash Update, the Conference Board’s seasonally-adjusted November help-wanted advertising index continued to plunge, dropping to 21 from a revised 22 (previously 23) in October, and from 24 in December. The index had hit a near-term peak of 34 in December 2006. The series is a leading indicator to the broad economy and to the monthly employment report.

The November reading was the lowest since the series was started at the end of President Harry Truman’s term in office. Part of the historical decline in recent years has been due to the loss of newspaper advertising to the Internet, but such impact has been relatively small over the last year. November’s reading was down 27.6% from the year before, indicative of a severe deepening in the ongoing recession,

The series does not include a measure of on-line advertising, and recent indices developed to measure Internet activity have serious definitional problems and still are too young to be meaningful indicators. That said, the Conference Board also reported that its on-line measure of help-wanted advertising also fell in November, down by 2.1% from October.

Housing Starts — The housing numbers generally show an ongoing and deepening recession. November’s seasonally-adjusted housing starts fell by 3.7% +/- 10% (95% confidence interval) for the month, after an increase of 4.2% (previously 3.0%) in October. November’s level was down 24.2% from the year before.

Confirming the housing industry problems, the November building permits were down 1.5% for the month, 24.6% year-to-year, while new home sales fell 9.0% (11.1% net of revisions) for the month and were down 34.4% for the year. November existing home sales gained 0.4% (0.6% net of revisions) for the month but fell 20.0% year-to-year.

Inflation Indicators

Money Supply — Questions as to what is generating strong growth in the broad money supply are addressed in this month’s Opening Comments, along with a plot of M2, MZM and M3. Aside from shifts in cash from M2 accounts to M3 accounts, the Fed is not sterilizing massive amounts of dollars from outside the United States that still are flowing into U.S. Treasuries, with the direct Fed policy effect of liquefying the system.

As discussed in the December 15th Flash Update, the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate of annual growth for November rose to 15.7% from 15.3% in October. The November growth rate was the highest since 16.1% in July 1971; the all-time high annual growth rate for the reported series was 16.4% in June 1971. Although early reporting (17 days) for the developing current December average suggests a possible slight slowing of annual growth for the month, the current pace of broad-money growth continues to have disturbing inflationary implications. 

The bulk of the monthly increase in November’s SGS-Ongoing M3 continued to come from the Fed’s reported series on M2, large time deposits and institutional money funds. The pace of annual growth in November reflected a continued deceleration in the pace of increase. Keep in mind that the SGS numbers reflect year-to-year changes and may not necessarily mirror not-seasonally-adjusted week-to-week activity by the Fed.

General background note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the SGS Ongoing M3 estimates, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS for methodology. The indicated M3 levels below are our best estimate and are provided at specific subscriber request. Keep in mind that regular revisions in the related Fed series affect historical M3. Usually, annual growth rates hold, although levels may shift a little. We have not attempted, nor do we plan to recreate a revised historical series for an M3 monthly-average level going back in time. The purpose of the SGS series was and is to provide monthly estimates of ongoing annual M3 growth. We are comfortable with those numbers and that our estimated monthly growth rates are reasonably close to what the Fed would be reporting, if it still reported M3. With those caveats on the table, here are the monthly-average levels for M3:

 
Shadow Government Statistics Ongoing M3  (Estimated seasonally-adjusted monthly average, $ Trillions)
Feb 06  10.349    Aug 06  10.748    Feb 07  11.415    Aug 07  12.239Mar     10.365    Sep     10.865    Mar     11.559    Sep     12.457Apr     10.435    Oct     10.999    Apr     11.732r   Oct     12.686May     10.508    Nov     11.111    May     11.872    Nov     12.856pJun     10.564    Dec     11.227    Jun     11.925Jul     10.642    Jan 07  11.313    Jul     12.011
	(r)Revised. (p)Preliminary.NOTE OF CAUTION: The estimates of monthly levels best are used for comparisons with other dollar amounts, such as nominal GDP. While the estimates are based on seasonally-adjusted Federal Reserve data, great significance cannot be read into the month-to-month changes, as was the case when the Fed published the series. The most meaningful way to view the data is in terms of year-to-year change.

          
Based on November reporting, annual change for monthly M1 contracted by 0.50% after a 0.07% gain in October. November M2 annual growth softened to 6.21% from 6.32% in October.

 

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices — The November prices paid indices rallied sharply for purchasing managers surveys, reflecting upside inflation pressures from a variety of factors, including high oil prices, and signaling broader inflation problems ahead.

On the manufacturing side, the November price index jumped to 67.5 from 63.0 in October. On a three-month moving average basis, November’s 17.3% gain was up sharply from October’s 2.2%. The manufacturing price indicator is not seasonally adjusted and, therefore, is generally the better indicator of pricing activity.

On the non-manufacturing side, the seasonally-adjusted November prices diffusion index soared to 76.5 from October’s 63.5. On a three-month moving-average basis November’s annual change jumped to a 22.7% gain, up from a 3.0% increase in October.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflationary pressure. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising prices.

Oil Prices – For the last month or so, oil prices have fluctuated shy of the $100 per barrel mark, a psychological price barrier that could fall at any time. For November, the monthly-average West Texas Intermediate spot price (St. Louis Fed) jumped 9.8% from October to a record high monthly average of $94.62 per barrel. Against last year’s average, November’s level was up by 59.4%, compared with October’s 46.4% gain. A preliminary estimate of December’s average price level is $91.52, down 3.3% from November, but up 47.6% from the year before. These levels of growth suggest disastrous news should continue to be in the offing for official CPI, PPI and GDP annual inflation reporting.

As of Friday, December 28th, West Texas Intermediate closed at $96.01 per barrel, spot. Oil price movement remains highly volatile, but broadly continues trending higher, and likely will set further record highs in the months ahead. Irrespective of how high oil prices may go, or how much they may fall back in short-lived profit taking, current prices are well above levels that will help trigger debilitating U.S. inflation. Regardless of any near-term price swings, meaningful upside risks to oil prices remain in place, both from the unfolding dollar catastrophe and continued OPEC rumblings, as well as from ever-volatile Middle Eastern and related global political tensions, and other supply and demand issues.

Regardless of cause, high oil prices have spiked and will continue to spike basic inflation. Even the gimmicked "core" inflation measures — net of changes in food and energy prices — are beginning to inch higher, despite heavy political massaging of this data. The historically high oil prices still are working their way through all levels of U.S. economic activity, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. These broad inflationary pressures will remain intact despite any near-term oil price swings, and "core" inflation eventually should catch-up with full inflation reporting .

 

Reporting/Market Focus

 GAAP Financial Statements of the U.S. Government for Fiscal Year 2007

On December 17th, The U.S. Treasury released the annual Financial Statements of the United States Government for fiscal year 2007 (year-ended September 30th), prepared using generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), audited by the General Accountability Office (GAO) and signed off on by Treasury Secretary Paulson.

The statements still show that the federal government’s fiscal woes continue to careen wildly out of control. Based on my estimate of the 2007 GAAP-based deficit exceeding $4.0 trillion (see discussion below), the term "out of control" is not used loosely. If the government were to raise taxes so as to seize 100% of all wages, salaries and corporate profits, it still would be showing an annual deficit using GAAP accounting on a consistent basis.

Separately, the GAO still refuses to express an opinion on the financial statements, with three government agencies out of 24 earning GAO disclaimers: Department of Defense, Department of Homeland Security and Department of State, which accounted for 25% of net costs in 2007. The GAO referenced "serious financial management problems at the Department of Defense." With the exception of a qualified opinion on the statements for the Department of Agriculture, the opinions on all other agency statements were unqualified.

The results summarized in the following table show the various deficit/debt/obligation measures. The official GAAP-based deficit, including the annual change in the net present value of unfunded liabilities for Social Security and Medicare narrowed to $1.2 trillion in 2007 from $4.6 trillion in 2006. Much of the reported reduction in the deficit, however, was due to a one-time legislative-related accounting change in Medicare Part B that likely will be reversed, and, in any event, needs to be viewed on a consistent year-to-year accounting basis. Further, other one-time actuarial assumption and accounting changes need to be reported on a consistent basis for annual results to be comparable. Similar circumstances in 2004 had the reported deficit at $11.0 trillion, which was $3.4 trillion (SGS estimate) net of one-time changes to the Medicare system.

My final estimate for the actual 2007 GAAP-based deficit, and basis for same, will be published in the next several weeks, as research still is necessary to work through significant obfuscation. On a consistent year-to-year basis, I currently estimate the 2007 deficit will exceed $4.0 trillion, meaningfully. Separately, as the numbers stand, total 2007 federal obligations of $59.8 trillion represent 520% of U.S. GDP.

As noted in the Flash Update of December 18th, one example of the involved accounting issues is seen in Note 22 of the financial statements on Medicare, under "SMI Part B Physician Update Factor:"

"The projected Part B expenditure growth reflected in the accompanying 2007 Statement of Social Insurance is significantly reduced as a result of the structure of physician payment updates under current law. In the absence of legislation, this structure would result in multiple years of significant reductions in physician payments, totaling an estimated 41 percent over the next 9 years. Reductions of this magnitude are not feasible and are very unlikely to occur fully in practice. For example, Congress has overridden scheduled negative updates for each of the last 5 years in practice. However, since these reductions are required in the future under the current-law payment system, they are reflected in the accompanying 2007 State of Social Insurance as required under GAAP. Consequently, the projected actuarial present values of Part B expenditure shown in the accompanying 2007 Statement of Social Insurance is likely understated [my emphasis]."

Since this was handled differently in last year’s accounting, the change reduced the reported relative deficit. The difference would be $4.4 trillion, per the government, if physician payment updates were set at zero.

With Social Security and Medicare liabilities ignored, the GAAP deficits for 2007 and 2006 were $275.5 billion and $449.5 billion, respectively. Those numbers contrast with the otherwise formal and accounting-gimmicked cash-based deficits of $168.8 billion (2007) and $248.2 billion (2006). Here, too, changes in actuarial assumptions reduced net costs for the Department of Veterans Affairs from $113.8 billion in 2006 to $59.4 billion in 2007. Consistent year-to-year reporting is needed in order to have consistent year-to-year comparisons of the results.

 
U.S. Government - Alternate Fiscal Deficit and Debt                    Reported by U.S. Treasury
       Dollars are either billions or trillions, as indicated.          Sources: U.S. Treasury, Shadow Government Statistics.                                                               Total        Formal      GAAP      GAAP       GAAP                 Federal        Cash-      Ex-SS    With SS     Federal     Gross     Obilga-Fiscal  Based       Etc.      Etc.     Negative    Federal    tions(2)Year   Deficit    Deficit   Deficit    Net Worth     Debt      (GAAP)(1)    ($Bil)     ($Bil)    ($Tril)    ($Tril)     ($Tril)    ($Tril)—–  ——     ——     ——     ——      ——     ——2007   $162.8     $275.5      $1.2(3)   $54.3       $9.0       $59.82006    248.2      449.5       4.6       53.1        8.5        58.22005    318.5      760.2(r)    3.5       48.5        7.9        53.32004    412.3      615.6      11.0(4)    45.0        7.4        49.52003    374.8      667.6       3.0       34.0        6.8        39.12002    157.8      364.5       1.5       31.0        6.2        35.4
(1)Fiscal year ended September 30th.(2)Revised to include grossfederal debt, not just "public" debt.(3)On a consistent reportingbasis, net of one-time changes in actuarial assumptions andaccounting, SGS estimates that the GAAP-based deficit for 2007 topped $4 trillion. (4)SGS estimates $3.4 trillion, excluding one-time unfunded setup costs of the Medicare Prescription Drug,Improvement, and Modernization Act of 2003 (enacted December 2003).(r)Revised.Link to the statements: http://fms.treas.gov/fr/07frusg/07frusg.pdf

 

 

Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for January:
 

Illegal Immigration’s Impact on the Economy and Economic Reporting

 The number of undocumented aliens in the United States appears to be underestimated, severely. The impact of the current circumstance will be explored in terms of its impact on and implications for U.S. economic activity, inflation, living standards, long-range federal fiscal performance and reporting of same, among other issues.
 
___________________________________________
 

PLEASE NOTE: The January 2008 "Shadow Government Statistics" newsletter will be a special year-end review and year-ahead assessment, currently is targeted for the week of January 28th. It should be accompanied the Hyperinflation Special Issue.

OCCASIONALLY, BRIEF UPDATES ARE COMMUNICATED DIRECTLY BY E-MAIL. IF YOU ARE NOT RECEIVING E-MAIL COMMUNICATIONS FROM US, PLEASE LET US KNOW at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or by using the "Feedback" option on www.shadowstats.com

 

 

Flash Update

Friday, December 28th, 2007


JOHN WILLIAMS’ SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

December 28, 2007
__________

Economic Data Take Successive Hits
Help-Wanted Advertising Plunges to Lowest Level Ever

__________

PLEASE NOTE. From our webmaster: In the past week we have installed new web-server software, and you will notice a few small changes to the layout and in particular the login process. We have made this change to allow us to expand the site more easily and to offer more features. We shall advise you of these as they are "released."
From John Williams: This Flash Update touches upon the economic news of the last week or so, in advance of the December newsletter, which I anticipate posting before the rapidly approaching New Year. The government’s financial statements included some unexpected obfuscation, through which I am working. Separately, I have been happily distracted by my grandchildren, family and friends, while at the same time watching the raw beauty of a Winter storm churning the Atlantic off the Outer Banks of North Carolina. Unfortunately, what continues to churn in the markets and the economy will not be a thing of raw beauty in 2008.
– We extend to you our best wishes for a most healthy, happy and prosperous New Year, John

The general outlook remains unchanged. As the markets twist in anticipation of year-end financial reporting, the central banks have expanded their games, with U.S. commercial paper outstanding again in a tailspin, and with troubled-bank borrowing from the Fed’s discount window soaring anew. To the extent the central banks have been boosting the U.S. dollar’s value and dampening the price of gold, underlying fundamentals appear to be regaining an upper hand as this update goes to press.
Although the pace of broad money supply growth may slow slightly in December, such remains at a level that historically has been followed by debilitating inflation. Despite games the Fed is playing with day-to-day open-market operations, it is not sterilizing the still-heavy influx of foreign-held dollars into U.S. Treasuries, which is the same thing for the Fed as pumping liquidity into the system. This issue will be explored in the forthcoming newsletter.
On the economic front, the news has been consistently to the downside, except for the "final" revision estimate of third-quarter GDP, which left annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth at a booming 4.9%. Of some interest, the Gross Domestic Income (GDI) for the third quarter showed annualized real growth of just 1.5%. The GDP and GDI are theoretical equals, with the GDP based on consumption and inventory change and GDI based on income and net saving. Thanks to a fortuitous and highly unusual swing in the "statistical discrepancy" between the two series, from a negative $40.8 billion in the second quarter to a positive $74.8 billion in the third, the GDP was able to show growth that challenges credibility.
In times of honest reporting (not the current condition), the plunge in November help-wanted advertising and surging new claims for unemployment insurance would foreshadow a decline the upcoming December payroll employment and a surge in the unemployment rate, due next Friday (January 4th). The Conference Board’s November help-wanted advertising dropped to 21 from a revised 22 (previously 23) in October. The reading was the lowest since the series was started at the end of President Harry Truman’s term in office. Part of the historical decline is due to the loss of newspaper advertising to the Internet, but such impact has been relatively small over the last year. November’s reading was down 27.6% from the year before, indicative of a severe deepening in the ongoing recession,
In other reporting, continued annual decline in real (inflation-adjusted) new orders for durable goods suggested ongoing recession. Recession indications were seen also in ongoing miserable housing data, anecdotal evidence of an unusually weak holiday shopping season, and the continued collapse of consumer confidence on a year-to-year basis.
Further details follow in the December SGS newsletter.

_______________________________________________

The target for posting of the December SGS is for before the New Year. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Tuesday, December 18th, 2007
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

A L E R T

December 18, 2007

__________

Actual 2007 U.S. Federal Deficit at $1.2 Trillion, $5.6-Plus Trillion on Consistent Basis

__________


PLEASE NOTE: This Alert highlights certain summary numbers released Monday on the U.S. government's 2007 GAAP-based bottom line. A more complete analysis will follow in the December 2007 SGS newsletter, which is targeted for late in the Christmas week. -- Best wishes to all for the most joyous of holiday seasons, John Williams

The U.S. Treasury released today the annual financial statements of the U.S. government for 2007, prepared using generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), audited by the GAO, and signed off on by Treasury Secretary Paulson. The statements show that the federal government's fiscal woes continue to careen wildly out of control. The term "out of control" is not used loosely. If the government were to raise taxes so as to seize 100% of all wages, salaries and corporate profits, it still would be showing an annual deficit using GAAP accounting on a consistent basis.

The results summarized in the following table show that the GAAP-based deficit, including the annual change in the net present value of unfunded liabilities for Social Security and Medicare narrowed to $1.2 trillion in 2007 from $4.6 trillion in 2006. The reported reduction in the deficit, however, was due to a one-time legislative-related accounting change in Medicare Part B that likely will be reversed, and, in any event, needs to be viewed on a consistent year-to-year accounting basis.

On a consistent basis, year-to-year, I estimate the 2007 deficit at $5.6 trillion, or worse, based on the government's explanation of the process and cost estimates.

From Note 22 of the financial statements, under "SMI Part B Physician Update Factor:"

"The projected Part B expenditure growth reflected in the accompanying 2007 Statement of Social Insurance is significantly reduced as a result of the structure of physician payment updates under current law. In the absence of legislation, this structure would result in multiple years of significant reductions in physician payments, totaling an estimated 41 percent over the next 9 years. Reductions of this magnitude are not feasible and are very unlikely to occur fully in practice. For example, Congress has overridden scheduled negative updates for each of the last 5 years in practice. However, since these reductions are required in the future under the current-law payment system, they are reflected in the accompanying 2007 State of Social Insurance as required under GAAP. Consequently, the projected actuarial present values of Part B expenditure shown in the accompanying 2007 Statement of Social Insurance is likely understated (my emphasis)."

Since this was handled differently in last year's accounting, the change reduced the reported relative deficit. The difference would be $4.4 trillion, per the government, if physician payment updates were set at zero. I used that estimate, tentatively, for the estimates of consistent year-to-year reporting, but such likely will be updated in the full analysis that follows in the December SGS.

With Social Security and Medicare liabilities ignored, the GAAP deficits for 2007 and 2006 were $275.5 billion and $449.5 billion, respectively. Those numbers contrast with the otherwise formal and accounting-gimmicked cash-based deficits of $168.8 billion (2007) and $248.2 billion (2006).



----------------------------------------------------------------------- U.S. Government - Alternate Fiscal Deficit and Debt Reported by U.S. Treasury Dollars are either billions or trillions, as indicated. Sources: U.S. Treasury, Shadow Government Statistics. ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Formal GAAP GAAP GAAP Total Cash- Ex-SS With SS Federal Gross Federal Fiscal Based Etc. Etc. Negative Federal Obligations Year* Deficit Deficit Deficit Net Worth Debt (GAAP) ----------------------------------------------------------------------- ($Bil) ($Bil) ($Tril) ($Tril) ($Tril) ($Tril) ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 2007 $162.8 $275.5 $ 1.2** $54.3** $9.0 $55.8** 2006 248.2 449.5 4.6 53.1 8.5 54.6 2005 318.5 760.2r 3.5 48.5 7.9 50.0 2004 412.3 615.6 11.0*** 45.0 7.4 46.4 2003 374.8 667.6 3.0 34.0 6.8 36.2 2002 157.8 364.5 1.5 31.0 6.2 32.7 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- * Fiscal year ended September 30th. ** Estimated minimal $5.6 trillion deficit, negative net worth of $58.7 trillion, obligations of $60.4 trillion, excluding one-time legislative issues and accounting for same tied to Medicare Part B (see link below). *** Estimated at $3.4 trillion, excluding one-time unfunded setup costs of the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement, and Modernization Act of 2003 (enacted December 2003). r - Revised prior-period data as shown in the 2007 Report.

Link to 2007 report: http://fms.treas.gov/fr/07frusg/07frusg.pdf Current numbers derived from document page 3 (Table 1, with Social Insurance Exposures, Closed Group, added in as liabilities on the balance sheet, and pages 102, 103 (note on SMI Part B Physician Update Factor).



Further details follow in the December SGS newsletter.

_______________________________________________


The target date for the posting of the December SGS is for late in the Christmas week. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Saturday, December 15th, 2007


JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

December 15, 2007

__________

Annual CPI Inflation at 4.3% (SGS-Alternate CPI 11.7%), PPI at 7.2%

Industrial Production Suggests Fourth-Quarter Contraction

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The November SGS-Alternate CPI and the November SGS-Ongoing M3 (based on full-month reporting) have been posted on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com. An Alert should follow on Monday, December 17th, or on the 18th, depending on timing of the data release for the U.S. government's 2007 GAAP-based financial statements, and the vagaries of a major winter storm complicating travel plans. The target for the December newsletter has been moved to late in the Christmas week to allow for the unexpected in the next several days. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

One way, perhaps, to quell rampant speculation of pending Fed easings is to report rising inflation. A problem for the Fed -- and for a Wall Street entrenched in a simplistic view that the Fed keeps the system in balance only by raising rates to fight inflation, or by lowering rates to stimulate the economy -- is that both inflation and recession reared their ugly heads in last week's economic reporting. Contrary to market hype, the Fed's primary concern has to be and remains the maintenance of dollar stability. Fed Chairman Bernanke already has fingers on both hands plugging leaks in the dike. Although he is trying to prevent a flood of dollar dumping that would drain the U.S. markets of liquidity, tanking stocks and boosting interest rates, the dike is springing more leaks than Mr. Bernanke has fingers. At the same time, the global bank solvency crisis appears to be deepening and spreading. My general outlook is not changed and will be updated in the December SGS.

Perversely, and probably with a little covert help from central banks, gold slid some on last week's economic news, while the dollar rallied. Higher inflation and a weaker economy usually mean a weaker dollar and stronger gold. Maybe the dollar rallied on the perception that the Fed now is less likely to ease, but such makes little sense in terms of why the Fed purportedly is less likely to ease: surging inflation. The fundamentals remain in play for a much weaker U.S. dollar against the major Western currencies, and for much higher gold prices.

Some highlights of last week's inflation/business activity reporting:

CPI-U Inflation at 4.3%. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported the seasonally-adjusted November CPI-U up by 0.80% (0.59% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, following October's 0.29% (0.21% unadjusted) increase. November's annual CPI inflation exploded to 4.31%, up from 3.54% in October, 2.76% in September and 1.97% in August. The reported surge in annual inflation followed by a day the reporting of annual PPI inflation in November of 7.2% (see Flash Update of December 13th).

The increase in annual inflation will continue in December 2007, if the seasonally-adjusted monthly gain exceeds 0.45%, the amount of increase seen in December 2006. The difference between December 2007 monthly reporting and the 0.45% will directly add to, or subtract from, November's annual inflation rate of 4.31%.

Annualized year-to-date inflation through the first 11 months of the year was 4.2% adjusted, 4.5% unadjusted. In theory, the adjusted and unadjusted numbers should be the same for the full year. Despite minimal catch-up in accounting for both CPI-U and PPI energy and food inflation, and minor increases in reporting of so-called "core" inflation, core inflation continued to appear to be closely managed, staying conveniently "contained" for the needs of the Federal Reserve.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) -- the substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by the manipulators and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U -- was 3.57% in November, up from 2.99% in October, and up from 2.31% in September.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual CPI growth was about 7.6% in November, up from 6.9% in October and 6.1% in September, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was roughly 11.7% in November, up from 11.1% in October and 10.4% in September.

Annual M3 Growth at 15.7%. The SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate of annual growth for November rose to 15.7% from 15.3% in October. The November growth rate was the highest since 16.1% in July 1971; the all-time high annual growth rate for the reported series was 16.4% in June 1971. The seasonally-adjusted monthly average level for November was estimated at $12.856 trillion, up from $12.686 trillion in October. The current pace of broad-money growth continues to have disturbing implications for inflation.

The better part of the monthly increase in November’s M3 continued to come from the Fed’s reported series on M2, large time deposits and institutional money funds. The pace of annual growth in November also reflected an ongoing deceleration in the pace of increase.

Industrial Production Suggests Contraction. Industrial production is suggestive of a recession, despite the reported seasonally-adjusted monthly gain of 0.3% in November. Such followed a revised contraction of 0.7% (previously 0.5%) in October. Annual growth in November jumped to 2.15% from October's 1.43% (previously 1.80%). The game here is in the revisions. The November index still is below July's. Based on two out of three months in place for the fourth quarter, the current quarter appears headed for an annualized quarter-to-quarter contraction of roughly 1.6%, an unusual change outside of recession. Further abnormalities will be examined in the December SGS.

Trade Data Still Miss Worst of Oil Pricing. The trade numbers continue to be targeted for manipulation, with reported minimal deterioration being used as an inexpensive tool to impact the currency markets in favor of the U.S. dollar. As reported, the seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for October widened to $57.8 billion from September's $57.1 billion (previously $56.5 billion). The accompanying revisions were based on a minimal correction to the regular overstatement of the guesstimated surplus in services trade. While these new numbers indicate the GDP has been weaker than previously reported, related GDP revisions are not likely until next July's annual revision. Separately, the importation of oil still appears to be seriously understated in terms of both pricing and physical volume, although minor catch-up was shown in October.

Further details follow in the December SGS newsletter.

_______________________________________________


The target date for the posting of the December SGS is for late in the Christmas week. An e-mail advice will be made of its and intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Thursday, December 13th, 2007
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

December 13, 2007

__________

November "Core" Retail Sales Gained 0.78% versus 1.22% Non-Core

Prior Food and Energy Inflation Revised Higher

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Alternate CPI will be posted be later tomorrow (Friday) on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com, following the release of November CPI data. A Flash update over the coming weekend will highlight this week's economic reporting, including the CPI. An Alert will follow on Monday, December 17th, or on the 18th, depending on timing of the data release for the U.S. government's 2007 GAAP-based financial statements. The December newsletter remains targeted for late next week. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

Helped by the Census Bureau's inability to adjust adequately for seasonal variations due to an early Thanksgiving, some retail sales were drawn from December into November and were not adjusted. Also helping the monthly retail sales gain was surging inflation (including some upward revision to past history), the toll from which should be available more fully in tomorrow's CPI report. With that as background, the seasonally-adjusted November retail sales number was reported this morning as up by 1.22% (1.44% net of revisions) +/- 0.8%, after increasing by 0.23% (previously 0.16%) in October. Year-to-year growth was reported at 6.27% for November versus 4.98% (previously 5.15%) for October.

As discussed last month, if the Fed and Wall Street hypesters are going to tout "core" inflation, net of food and energy, at least they should be consistent and go to town over "core" retail sales, net of gasoline station and grocery store sales, which vary primarily based on those otherwise "meaningless" energy and food prices.

November's "core" retail sales rose by 0.78% (0.63% net of revisions), following October's 0.05% monthly increase (previously unchanged).

Of great interest, please note that the non-core gain of 1.22% was 1.44% net of revisions, while the core gain of 0.78% was 0.63% net of revisions. This means that the upward revision to retail sales was more than accounted for by upside revisions to gasoline and food prices. The CPI, however, does not get revised. So, will the November CPI pick up more inflation because of the prior revisions, or will the month-to-month data be the primary concern, irrespective of better information now available. I would bet on the latter circumstance.

There still appears to be an understatement of both food and energy inflation in play. While this morning's PPI report showed seasonally-adjusted monthly November PPI up by 3.2% against October's 0.1%, with some catch-up in energy prices, the food category showed no price increase for the month. As to tomorrow's release of the November CPI, again, any seasonally-adjusted monthly gain beyond 0.05% will add directly to October's annual inflation rate of 3.54%.

The slight widening in the October trade deficit and other recent reporting will be touched upon this weekend, as will the Fed's easing and the loan auctioning plan that is being coordinated with other central banks. The global bank solvency crisis appears to be deepening and spreading. My general outlook is not changed.

Further details also will follow in the December SGS newsletter.

_______________________________________________


The target date for the posting of the December SGS is for late next week. An e-mail advice will be made of its and intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Friday, December 7th, 2007


JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

December 7, 2007

__________

Gimmicks Mask November Payroll Contraction

SGS-Ongoing M3 Annual Growth Rises Again in November

Official CPI Annual Inflation Could Break 4% Next Week

Fed Action/Inaction Will Not Alter Fundamentals Meaningfully

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The preliminary estimate of November SGS-Ongoing M3 will be posted over the weekend on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com. Barring unusual developments, the next Flash Update will be next Thursday, with November's "core" retail sales, followed by a more extensive Flash Update over the weekend with November's CPI details. An Alert is scheduled for Monday, December 17th, reporting summary results of the 2007 GAAP-based Financial Statements of the U.S. Government, dependent on the actual data release, now scheduled for the 17th. The December SGS monthly newsletter currently is targeted for late in the December 17th week. -- Best wishes to all for the most joyous of holiday seasons! John Williams

Fed's Quandary Remains


The November jobs report was heavily manipulated to bring in the reported 94,000 gain in nonfarm payrolls, as opposed to an outright contraction. The reported gain was statistically indistinguishable from a monthly contraction. Even though slightly stronger than consensus estimates, the data -- particularly on close examination -- were weak enough to add pressure in favor of some form of Fed accommodation at the December 11th FOMC meeting. Offsetting such pressures are surging inflation and risks to the U.S. dollar. The markets widely expect an easing, so the odds have to favor such. There likely would be dissent, however, where such a move is little more than pandering to the instant-gratification needs of a highly irrational stock market and its manipulators. Dollar selling and flight to gold should intensify.

Irrespective of what the Fed does, the impact likely will be seen primarily in short-term financial market gyrations, not in any long-term benefit. If the Fed eases, the stock market shortly will be pressing for another interest-rate fix, in an unending and intensifying no-win situation for the Fed.

The more the Fed eases, the more quickly heavy U.S. dollar selling will mount. A rate cut will not boost economic activity, and it will not resolve bank solvency issues. Further, with the U.S. markets so heavily dependent on foreign capital for liquidity, Fed easings increasingly become counterproductive for the U.S. markets and economy, as foreign investors flee dollar-denominated assets. In the now less-likely case that the Fed does not ease, the longer term outlook would be the same. Over the short-term, though, the financial-market gyrations might be more negative for stocks, and the U.S. central bank might buy several weeks of less-intense dollar dumping.

BLS Used Full Suite of Gimmicks on November Jobs. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported seasonally-adjusted November payrolls up by 94,000 (46,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000, following October's revised 170,000 gain (previously 166,000). Unadjusted year-to-year payroll growth fell in November to 1.04%, versus October's revised 1.17% (previously 1.18%). The decline in November annual growth to 1.0% has historic parallels seen only during recessions. This employment report was not credible and showed indications of heavy manipulation aimed at keeping jobs growth positive but still weak enough to pressure the FOMC towards an easing.

Seasonal-Factor Gimmicks. As discussed regularly in the SGS newsletter, with monthly seasonal factors being readjusted each month as needed, the BLS can generate any desired result. Consistently adjusted and unadjusted annual growth rates suggest that November otherwise would have been reported with just a 26,000 payroll gain. Separately, seasonal factor manipulation also is evident in the downward revision to the October payroll levels. Adjusted, October was revised lower by 48,000 jobs, but unadjusted, October's downward revision was just 8,000. The seasonal readjustments allowed for reporting a net extra 40,000 seasonally-adjusted jobs in November, while the reported October gain increased to 170,000 jobs, thanks to still-earlier period data adjustments.

Unusual Bias Adjustments. November's upside bias add-factor (from the birth-death model) was 51,000, versus 103,000 in October. Aside from those 51,000 plug-number jobs not being valid, the bias was increased from 36,000 in November 2006, an unusually large adjustment, where the change in bias normally is plus or minus a couple of thousand.

In the statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including those of multiple job holders), seasonally-adjusted November employment soared by 696,000, after having fallen by 250,000 in October. The seasonally-adjusted November U.3 unemployment rate was reported at 4.66% +/- 0.23%, down from the 4.73% reported for October, while unadjusted U.3 rose to 4.5% in November from 4.4% in October. The broader adjusted November U.6 rate held at 8.4% for the fourth month, while unadjusted November U.6 was 8.1% against 7.9% in October. Net of the "discouraged workers" defined out of existence during the Clinton Administration, the actual unemployment rate continued to run around 12%.

The November employment gain was against a countervailing background of tumbling October help-wanted advertising, rising new claims for unemployment insurance, and sharp deterioration to recession level and near-recession level employment readings, respectively, for the manufacturing and non-manufacturing November purchasing managers surveys. These labor-market indicators remain consistent with what should be increasing distress evident in the official jobs and unemployment reporting.

November M3 Growth Roughly 15.8%. Based on data for 26 of the 30 days in November, the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate should be close to 15.8% annual growth in the November monthly average, up from 15.3% in October. The November annual growth is the highest since July 1971 and is approaching the series' historic high of 16.4% reported for June 1971. The preliminary estimate will be finalized after this afternoon's report of large-time deposits and will be updated on the SGS Alternate Data Series tab (www.shadowstats.com) this weekend.

Week Ahead: 4% Official Inflation? With the FOMC action out of the way and the economy in an intensifying inflationary recession, most economic data in the week ahead could be on the soft side of expectations:

The October trade deficit (Wednesday, December 12th) is due for some catch-up reporting of oil prices and imports, or it will face rapidly increasing credibility issues. Accordingly, there is some risk on an unexpected deficit surge, despite recent heavy manipulation of the series.

November retail sales (Thursday, December 13th) will be helped by an early Thanksgiving, which will take some business from December's results. Nonetheless, any gain likely will be more than offset by related inflation, with sales down month-to-month on an inflation-adjusted basis.

If November industrial production (Friday, December 14th) shows a second, consecutive monthly contraction, which it should, recession speculation will intensify, as this indicator is one used by the NBER in calling recessions.

On the inflation front, the Fed will have pushed to dampen inflation reporting, if it eases on the 11th. Nonetheless expectations are for a 0.6% monthly increase in the November CPI-U (Friday December 14th). With the November 2006 up by just 0.05% on a seasonally-adjusted basis, any gain in November pretty much will add directly to October's annual CPI inflation of 3.54%. Such opens the potential for reported annual November CPI inflation breaking above 4%. Due to the November 2006 PPI gaining 1.6%, on a monthly basis, a similar surge in annual wholesale inflation for the November 2007 PPI (Thursday, December 13th) is problematic.

Further detail will follow in the December SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


The December SGS is targeted for late in the week of December 17th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Sunday, December 2nd, 2007
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

December 2, 2007

__________

What Is Scaring The Fed?

GDP Numbers Are Utter Nonsense

Other Data Show Tumbling Economy

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The November SGS-Alternate Dollar and the SGS-Alternate GDP Series have been updated and posted on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com. The Financial-Weighted Dollar weightings have been revised to reflect the latest triennial currency survey by the Bank for International Settlements (BIS). Details will be covered in the December SGS newsletter. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

The Fed Seems Scared. So much for speculation that there might have been a vestigial spine among the most senior members of the Federal Reserve Board. The Fed either is fully corrupt -- pandering to the needs of Wall Street manipulators -- or it sees something terribly frightening about to happen in the financial system. Given the people involved and the background of financial and economic conditions, there likely is an unhappy combination of both factors at play.

Up through last Tuesday, Fed governors were putting out the message that there was no further easing planned at the December 11th FOMC meeting. Then, Fed Vice Chairman Donald Kohn gave speech on Wednesday, and Chairman Ben Bernanke followed up with a speech on Thursday. The markets swallowed the hyped-up spiel that the Fed was going to ease and maybe by 50 basis points (0.50%). The speeches indicated that the Fed remained flexible and was watching conditions closely. There was nothing obvious in the language used that the Fed had reversed its no-easing stance.

The tip-off came in a Financial Times article, the day of Kohn's speech, with the happy news that, "analysts close to the Fed believe vice-chairman Don Kohn will use a speech today to pull the US central bank back from its confrontation with the markets over the outlook for the economy and interest rates." This information was leaked. Granted, Mr. Greenspan used to plant stories in the U.S. press to help the sometimes misguided U.S. markets, but this story appears to have been leaked ahead of time for some traders, with stocks rallying strongly the day before the speech. Of course, stocks soared on activation of the gimmick.

Last week also saw some U.S. dollar rebound, along with sharp selling of gold and oil. All three markets likely were helped along by some Fed/Plunge Protection Team guidance and support (the Fed/PPT can manipulate in any market they choose). Irrespective of any central bank shenanigans, the outlook remains sharply on the downside for the greenback against the major Western currencies, and on the upside for both gold and oil.

The problem for the Fed remains that the underlying difficulties have not changed, and any central easing will do little to spur business activity, while intensifying dollar dumping. There are enough concerned Fed governors to provide significant dissension at an FOMC meeting aimed at lowering rates, and Bernanke knows it. He waffled with his comments this week, and he may waffle further, as renewed heavy dollar selling -- which will come -- will seriously impair domestic liquidity at a time that the system is reeling from issues of solvency among a number of large U.S. financial institutions.

Employment Numbers May Play Role. This Friday's employment report could be used to decide or at least to try selling any forthcoming rate action or lack of same. Fundamentally, the numbers should be horrible; October help-wanted advertising sank anew, while jobless claims continued to rise. Treasury Secretary Paulson would use such to put the screws to the Fed. Likely, Bernanke already has a sense of what the November labor surveys showed; perhaps that even triggered the waffling. Despite last week's games playing, however, the Fed likely would prefer to see a strong number, which then could be used to attempt pulling back from the brink, at least temporarily. What actually gets reported on Friday for the payroll change and unemployment rate should be heavily politicized.

GDP Nonsense. If GDP were the guide, jobs would be soaring. The "preliminary" estimate revision for real (inflation-adjusted) annualized third-quarter GDP growth showed the economy booming along at a 4.92% rate, revised from 3.90%, with year-to-year change revising to 2.85% from 2.59%. As suggested in the last newsletter, these numbers indeed were meaningless as indicators of economic activity and only served a function useful to White House, Fed and Wall Street spin doctors.

Durable Goods, Housing, Etc. Sink Again. Consider this further indication of the quality of the data coming from the government's statistical propaganda mills. Despite the National Association of Realtors' estimate that existing homes fell in October by 1.2% for the month and by 20.7% year-to-year, new home sales in October rose by 1.7% for the month, according the Census Bureau. This happened only because of a 9.3% downward revision to the prior month's level, which also erased a previously reported 4.8% monthly gain for September.

In addition to faltering background labor indicators, other reporting last week was consistent with a deepening recession. October new orders for durable goods fell by a seasonally-adjusted 0.4% for the month, but gained 3.1% year-to-year. That, however, was a contraction after inflation adjustment. The Conference Board's November consumer confidence measure fell by 8.3% for the month, and by 17.1% year-to-year.

The economy already is in recession, but few in the markets or politics are willing to admit it. Such is normal in this phase of a downturn. Mr. Bernanke certainly is aware of the business contraction, but he is afraid to admit that he should keep interest rates relatively high in an effort to hold the dollar and to prevent a systemic meltdown. The Fed continues in a no-win situation.

A Flash Update will follow Friday's employment data release, with further details in the December SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


The December SGS is targeted for late in the week of December 17th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

November 2007 Edition

Monday, November 26th, 2007

 

Issue Number 37

 
November 26, 2007
 
__________
 
 
Inflation Surges as Economic Activity Plunges
 
System Nears Abyss and Fed Moves to Sit on Its Hands Again
 
Dollar and Gold Movements Are Just Beginning
 
__________
 

 
OVERVIEW -- OPENING COMMENTS
 

Wall Street Pushes Hard for Interest Rate Fix That Cannot Work and May Not Happen

 

In fairness, there is little that Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke can do, except to play out a losing hand. It was a hand laid off on him by Alan Greenspan, aided and abetted by the U.S. Congress and recent Administrations. As dependent as a drug addict on his next fix, the U.S. stock market is addicted to interest rate cuts, and the pressures on the Fed for another fix are tremendous. Yet, the Fed continues to signal, as clearly as it signals such things, that there is no rate cut coming.

Accordingly, upcoming data likely will be used to paint a picture of strong enough business activity for the Fed not to have to ease. This will be accompanied by Fed officials jawboning, hinting at real inflation concerns and down-playing real recession fears. As the December 11th FOMC meeting nears, if market expectations still are for a rate cut, as they are now, then Mr. Bernanke will face a tough decision: cave in to market pressures or pull the rug out from under the stock market. Complicating the picture may be possible political pressures from the Administration. Mr. Bernanke is not so stupid as to believe that "the dollar does not matter," irrespective of the pabulum he must feed the markets. If he does believe it, he should not be Fed Chairman. Such, however, does not preclude members of the Bush Administration from using the faux dollar argument in favor of an interest-rate fix for the stock market. Since the Administration can control the reporting of the economic statistics, a particularly weak November jobs report might signal a major rift between the Fed and the Administration. Regardless, the next two weeks will be very telling, where the new Fed Chairman will have a chance to salvage some his credibility in the global markets or risk triggering the financial Armageddon over which both he and Alan Greenspan have had recurring nightmares.
 

A Clash of Monsters. The Fed is a privately owned corporation dedicated to maintaining the profitability and solvency of the U.S. banking system. Guidance from the federal government as to maintaining sustainable economic growth and containing inflation are secondary concerns, to which the Fed pays significant public lip service. The simplistic view put forth by the Wall Street is that the Fed can raise rates to contain inflation or cut rates to stimulate the economy. The Fed can do neither at present, despite there being both recession and inflation problems. Further, the U.S. central bank faces a severe profitability/solvency problem within its base banking system.

The economy is in a long-term structural contraction that cannot be stimulated by low interest rates. Unless growth in consumer income can be sustained at a pace greater than that of inflation -- which it cannot at present -- then there can be no sustained growth in the economy. Short-lived economic growth has been generated by debt expansion or savings liquidation, areas to which Alan Greenspan pandered with his stock-market and housing bubbles.

From the inflation standpoint, commodity price distortions are the drivers behind current pricing problems, although monetary policy and a weak dollar are starting to add their own upside pressures. Unlike inflation driven by strong economic demand, commodity supply problems generally do not respond to interest rate hikes.

Beyond all the gimmicks tied to maintaining appearances, what the Fed faces is a banking system crisis, recession and inflation, with the U.S. financial markets extremely dependent on foreign capital for liquidity. Serious movement out of the dollar has started and threatens to turn explosive. Such threatens liquidity in the U.S. financial markets, and can act as a selling trigger for both the equity and credit markets. Indeed, the dollar does matter.

What exacerbated recent dollar selling were Mr. Bernanke's rate cuts. He knows the dangers of a systemic financial meltdown that could result from something as simple as a further easing. Yet, he is cornered by the uncontrollable greed of an interest-rate-addicted Wall Street, a monster created over the decades by Alan Greenspan's Pavlovian conditioning. Greenspan also helped to create another monster over the decades from dollar and fiscal neglect. This sleeping giant is the excessive foreign holdings of U.S. dollar-denominated instruments. Both the Greenspan monsters now are active and about to clash. Bernanke is the one who has to try to avoid the conflict, get the demons back in their cages or otherwise referee the fight. Facing the challenge with his hands tied behind his back, the Fed Chairman faces a no-win situation, a conflict that cannot have a happy ending.

Banking Crisis Deepens. Although the recent hemorrhaging in the commercial paper market appeared to have stabilized in October, commercial paper outstanding resumed its plunge in the first two weeks of November. Also, the latest reporting on troubled-bank borrowing from the Federal Reserve's discount window is on the rise, again, net of seasonal borrowings. More than doubling, average daily borrowings rose to $479 million in the two weeks ended November 21st, up from $191 million in the prior period.

Anecdotal evidence of severe problems within the banking industry continues, with stories abounding of troubled institutions and instruments, and of back-door actions taken by worried central banks. As the U.S. recession deepens, the problems with structured financial instruments will widen quickly, extending far beyond the issues with problem mortgages. The Federal Reserve can be expected to spend every dollar it needs to create in order to maintain the solvency and stability of the domestic banking system.

Recession Deepens. Putting aside the nonsensical political propaganda being published under the guise of GDP reporting (surging economic activity), most recent economic reporting showed a deepening recession. Political/financial-market manipulation of economic data appears centered on the GDP, the trade deficit, payroll employment and retail sales, as discussed in the related sections. Even with the overstatement of retail sales, however, month-to-month gain turned into contraction for October, net of official CPI reporting.

Industrial production took a big hit in October, with all industry groups down, except for aerospace and transportation. Real weekly earnings fell, while new claims for unemployment insurance rose and consumer confidence/sentiment plunged. The purchasing managers manufacturing index eased in October, nearing a recession level, while the production component confirmed the contraction seen in the Fed's industrial production series. On the housing front, the picture remained bleak as discussed in this month's Reporting/Market Focus.

Bias Factor Creates 60% of Reported New Jobs. As to employment, despite overstated monthly payroll growth that seems aimed at relieving the FOMC of some easing pressures, annual growth continued at recession-signal levels in October. As suggested by the following graph, however, much of the reported monthly jobs growth simply is not there, in reality.

 

 

A monthly payroll bias factor was added into the monthly jobs creation process in the 1980s, after it was discovered that Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) mistakenly had understated jobs growth coming out of the double-dip recession early in that decade. The error was blamed on the undetected creation of some small companies. The additional 150,000 jobs or so add-on per month was called a bias factor, and simply was a plug number aimed at inflating reported monthly jobs growth in perpetuity.

In an effort to legitimize the bias factor in recent years, the BLS went through extensive modeling to come up with its replacement "birth/death model" of companies and their employees. While that gussied-up and redistributed some of the bias numbers by month, they still remained mindless plug numbers used to goose the monthly jobs data.

Where the process never was designed to handle an economic downturn (those things just do not happen any more in official government reporting), consider the bias components in October's reported payroll employment. Of the 166,000 seasonally-adjusted monthly payroll gain, 102,000 were bias factor (103,000 unadjusted). On an unadjusted basis, the aggregate bias included gains of 14,000 jobs in construction and 25,000 in financial activities. 

Again, these plug numbers are mindless. The BLS would do better to go back to its old system of just adding so many jobs per month. Then it would appear only to be manipulative, not stupid, as well.

As to impact, of the 2,515,000 jobs reported created since the BLS's benchmark revision of May 2006, 1,543,000 jobs, or 60%, were created by the bias factor. Only 981,000 showed up in actual BLS surveying of U.S. employers. That is an average actual monthly jobs-creation pace of 58,000, which is not enough to keep the economy above water.  

Inflation Surges. As expected, annual CPI and PPI inflation surged in October, as annual comparisons moved against periods of overstated energy-price reductions in 2006. The pattern should continue to certain extent in November's reporting. Despite ongoing underreporting of inflation, for October, annual CPI jumped to 3.5% from 2.8% in September, while annual PPI inflation soared to 6.1% from 4.4% in September. "Core" inflation rates continue to appear heavily massaged, in order to forestall market recognition of further conflicts for the Fed.

With oil pushing $100 per barrel and food prices soaring, inflation pressures are not about to abate. Such is particularly true with the U.S. dollar under major selling pressure, and with the SGS-Ongoing M3 measure showing 15.3% annual growth, a level not seen since President Nixon closed the gold window in August 1971.

PLEASE NOTE: A "General background note" provides a broad background paragraph on certain series or concepts. Where the language used in past and subsequent newsletters usually has been or will be identical, month-after-month, any text changes in these sections will be highlighted in bold italics upon first usage. This is designed so that regular readers may avoid re-reading material they have seen before, but where they will have the material available for reference, if so desired.

General background note: The U.S. economy is in a protracted and deepening structural recession that will prove to be the second leg of a double-dip recession, which began in 2000/2001. The current downleg was signaled in mid-2005 by a series of leading indicators used for that purpose by SGS. With neither traditional fiscal nor monetary stimulus available to help turn economic activity, the current circumstance is likely to evolve into a hyperinflationary depression (see December 2006 SGS).

Increasing Market Turmoil. With gold and oil prices pushing higher, at or near historic highs, with the various dollar indices setting successive new lows, with systemic liquidity risks being openly discussed in the popular financial media, U.S. equity prices appear to have entered something of a sporadic downturn.

While recent market movements may reverse sharply in profit taking, the dollar and gold movements still have a long way to go, as does an eventual sell-off in equities. The only positive movement afoot is that U.S. Treasury yields have continued lower, with the Treasury market continuing to absorb flight-to-safety capital movements. It is this circumstance that will change and that has to concern Mr. Bernanke about his December 11th activities.

At some point, U.S. dollar selling and dollar dumping will reflect not just a movement out of the U.S. currency, but an unusual flight-to-safety out of the U.S. dollar. This is the circumstance at risk with another easing. This is the circumstance that eventually will force the Fed to increase rapidly its monetization of U.S. debt and to begin its unavoidable journey down the path towards hyperinflation.

Alternate Realities. General background note: This section updates the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting. When a government economic measure does not match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Federal Reserve, White House and Wall Street. In these alternate measures, the effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan-Era GDP. The methodologies for the series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS (see Archives page at www.shadowstats.com).

GDP. The alternate third-quarter GDP growth reflects the "advance" estimate, with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate third-quarter inflation-adjusted annual growth rate (year-to-year, as opposed to the popularly-touted annualized quarter-to-quarter rate) for GDP was a decline of roughly 2.3% versus the official, rallying year-to-year gain of 2.6%.

General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate GDP numbers tend to show deeper and more protracted recessions than have been reported formally or reflected in related official reporting. Nonetheless, the patterns shown in the alternate data are broadly consistent with the payroll employment and industrial production series (as revised), which are major indicators used by the National Bureau of Economic Research in determining the official timing of U.S. business cycles.

 

CPI. The annual non-core annual inflation rates spiked again in October and should continue rising in November, while the so-called "core" inflation rates continued their orchestrated malingering, notching slightly higher. Food and oil-related price pressures increasingly are a problem, due primarily to supply issues, but those pressures have been reflected only minimally in much of the government's reporting of the non-core inflation, so far. Continued sharp increases in market prices, however, will make it increasingly difficult for the BLS to mask the mounting inflationary pressures.

 

Eight Levels of Inflation

Annual Inflation for July to October 2007

 
                                        2007
Measure                                 Jul    Aug    Sep    Oct
I.1 Core PCE Deflator                   1.9%   1.8%   1.8%   n.a.
I.2 Core Chained-CPI-U                  1.8%   1.7%   1.7%   1.8%
I.3 Core CPI-U                          2.2%   2.1%   2.1%   2.2%
I.4 PCE Deflator                        2.1%   1.8%   2.4%   n.a.
I.5 Chained-CPI-U                       2.1%   1.8%   2.3%   3.0%
I.6 CPI-U                               2.4%   2.0%   2.8%   3.5%
I.7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U                   5.7%   5.4%  6.1%   6.9%
I.8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation   10.1%   9.9% 10.4%  11.1%
 
Notes: I.1 to I.3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively,
of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE)
deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U.
I.4 to I.6 are the same measures with energy and food inflation
included. The CPI-U (I.6) is the measure popularly followed by
the financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation.
I.7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre-
Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top series
in the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com.
I.8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which
reverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so,
plus an adjustment for the portion of Clinton-Era geometric weighting
that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic bookkeeping.
 
 
 General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate CPI numbers tend to show significantly higher inflation over time, generally reflecting the reversal of hedonic adjustments, geometric weighting and the use of a more traditional approach to measuring housing costs, measures all consistent with the reporting methodology in place as of 1980. Now available as a separate tab at the SGS homepage www.shadowstats.com is the SGS Inflation Calculator that calculates the impact of inflation between any two months, 1913 to date, based on both the official CPI-U and the SGS-Alternate CPI series.


MARKETS PERSPECTIVE
 

Global financial markets are in an ongoing state of extreme agitation, with the globally-dominant U.S. economy, financial markets and financial system all in increasing states of instability. As a result, the U.S. dollar -- the world's primary reserve currency -- has come under heavy selling pressure. Partially in response, oil and gold prices have soared. U.S. Treasuries continue to take something of their traditional safe-haven status, but that can turn quickly, particularly if Mr. Bernanke appears to place determination of Federal Reserve policy in the hands of Wall Street speculators. Despite what may be near-term extreme volatility in the various trading arenas, the long-term outlook for the U.S. markets remains for a severe sell-off in equities, a sharp spike in long-term interest rates, severe selling of the U.S. dollar against the major Western currencies, and a massive rally in the price of gold. 

General background note: The U.S. economy remains in a severe and sustained structural inflationary recession, saddled with an impotent Fed and a federal government that is fiscally bankrupt in all but name. In combination, these factors offer the worst of all environments to the financial markets. Ahead lie higher long-term interest rates and much lower U.S. equity prices. On the plus side is the outlook for gold, which provides a solid hedge against many of the problems that have started to surface. Key to the near-term movements of these markets remains the fate of the U.S. dollar, which likely has started a major downside move.

U.S. Equities -- The U.S. equity markets have begun to soften, but they still remain well removed from rationality and continue to be spiked and roiled by the gimmicks and rantings of Wall Street's hypesters. As discussed in the Opening Comments, the Fed may be approaching its Day of Reckoning with the December 11th FOMC meeting. If not then, that day is not far off.

General background note: As the equity markets catch up with the underlying economic and looming financial fundamentals, the downside adjustments to stock prices should be quite large, eventually rivaling the 90% decline in equities seen in the 1929 crash and ensuing several years. The decline might have to be measured in real terms (net of inflation), as a hyperinflation eventually will kick in as the Fed moves to liquefy the system. Stocks do tend to follow inflation, since revenues and earnings get denominated in inflated dollars. Hence with a hyperinflation, a DJIA of 100,000 or 100,000,000 could be expected, but such still would be below today's levels, adjusted for inflation.

General background note: The approaching financial maelstrom already has come over the horizon and now is nearing landfall. When it hits, those investors who have taken shelter in cash, gold and outside the U.S. dollar will be the ones with the wealth and assets available to take advantage of the extraordinary investment opportunities that should follow.

U.S. Credit Market -- Key to the U.S. credit markets remains the global attitude towards the U.S. dollar. At such time as the flight from the dollar becomes a flight-to-safety out of the dollar, U.S. interest rates will be forced higher in a mounting liquidity squeeze resulting from foreign dumping of dollar denominated securities. Increasingly, those assets will have to be absorbed in the U.S. markets, depressing prices of equities, bonds, etc.

General background note: Credit market activity has continued to be dominated by the still unfolding liquidity crisis and general financial-market and global-political instabilities that have fostered continued flight-to-safety effects. Over time, inflation traditionally has been the dominant force behind interest rate movements. The worsening inflation outlook and mounting flight from the dollar both favor higher long-term interest rates, with a steepening, positively-sloped yield curve.

U.S. Dollar -- The selling pressure against the U.S. dollar has intensified, but pressures have shifted in recent weeks with the heaviest selling having been against the Japanese yen, Swiss franc and the euro. As flight from the dollar increasingly becomes a flight-to-safety outside the dollar, the Swiss franc likely will be one of the better performing currencies. Dollar weakness, however, should remain broadly based, against the major Western currencies, with heavy dollar selling still ahead, despite any near-term volatility or central bank intervention.

Potentially exacerbating the circumstance are continued stories of the central banks of Communist China and other Asian central banks moving out of the greenback, and mounting pressures within OPEC to abandon the U.S. dollar as the pricing mechanism for oil. The U.S. markets remain particularly vulnerable, at the moment, to "surprises" from those countries that are not so friendly to the United States, or even from those who simply would like to avoid large losses on the dollars they hold. The more the Fed eases, the greater the shift will be out of the U.S. dollar.

General background note: Outside of further Federal Reserve rate cuts or additional major negative news out of the liquidity/funding crisis, the proximal trigger for a full dollar panic could come from a bad economic statistic (statistics appear increasingly to be massaged in a dollar-friendly manner), political missteps by the Administration, negative trade or market developments in Asia, or a terrorist attack or even the increasingly likely expansion of U.S. military activity in the Middle-East. When the trigger hits, the broad selling pressure should be strong enough to overwhelm short-lived central bank intervention.

General background note: In terms of underlying fundamentals that tend to drive currency trading, the dollar's portfolio could not be worse. Relative to major trading partners, the U.S. economy is much weaker, interest rates are lower and anticipated possibly to go lower still, inflation is higher, fiscal and trade-balance conditions are abysmal, and relative political concerns are rising sharply at the same time. The President's approval rating commonly has moved currency trading in the past, and, despite any near-term bouncing, it remains lower than has been seen for any other U.S. President in the post-World War II era. Relative political stability issues are compounded by the presence of a Congress that is hostile to the President, and that is rated even lower by the American people than is the President. Generally, the greater the magnitude of the dollar selling, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. capital markets.

As shown in the following graph, the U.S. dollar continued to fall sharply in October and so far in November, regularly setting new record lows on both a financial- and trade-weighted basis. The added latest November data points are as of November 23rd.

 

 

General background note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS for methodology.

U.S. Dollar Indices The Shadow Government Statistics' Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (FWD) is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For October 2007, the monthly dollar average fell by 2.39% after a decline of 1.63% in September. The October 2007 average index level of 47.43 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 9.85% from October 2006, with September down 6.95% from the year before. The index again has set a new historic monthly-average low. The downward trend continued in November, with the index at 46.32 as of November 23rd.

Also setting a successive new all-time monthly-average low, October's level of the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (TWD) was down 2.61% from September, which, in turn, was down by 2.07% from August. The October 2007 index level of 52.14 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 10.23% from October 2006, against September's 6.96% annual rate of decline. As of November 23rd, the TWD closed at 51.93.

Gold -- On November 8th, the London afternoon gold fix was set a 27-year high $841.10 per troy ounce, within striking distance of the all-time high of $850.00 of January 21, 1980. As noted in the November 19th Flash Update, we are -- at subscriber request -- publishing estimates of the January 1980 gold price peak (London afternoon fix) of $850.00 per troy ounce in terms of today's dollar. The thinking behind the request was that since central bank intervention and manipulation have been used to depress the price of gold over time, what could have been expected in terms of the current gold price if inflation were truly and fully reflected.

As can be determined using the Inflation Calculator referenced in the Alternate Realities section, inflation-adjusted peak gold would be $2,283 per troy ounce based on October 2007 CPI dollars, and $6,030 per troy ounce in terms of October 2007 SGS-Alternate CPI dollars. The suggestion is that the price of gold still faces some catch-up.

As of Friday (November 23rd), London gold closed at $815.25 per troy ounce, with silver at $14.55. For October, the monthly-average gold price (London afternoon fix per Kitco.com) averaged a record high $754.60 per troy ounce, versus $712.65 per troy ounce in September. Silver averaged $13.67 per troy ounce in October, versus $12.83 in September.

Soaring oil prices, soaring inflation, collapsing dollar and intensifying global political uncertainties all are fodder for the gold market, and the price of gold has rallied, as might be expected. While gold price volatility likely will continue, prices generally should move higher in the months ahead. Of some risk here remains the possibility of covert or overt central bank intervention in tandem with intervention aimed at muting the effects of dollar selling. Despite any central-bank machinations or intervention, the upside potential for the precious metals remains explosive, and eventual new record high prices loom.

General background note: As discussed in the Hyperinflation Series (see the December 2006 to March 2007 SGSs), the eventual complete collapse of the U.S. dollar -- the world's reserve currency -- will force the creation of a new international currency system. Gold likely will be structured into any replacement system, in an effort by those organizing the new currency structure to gain public acceptance.

The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show October averages as well as added points for closing prices on November 23rd. As of Friday's closing prices, gold was at $815.25 and oil at $98.18, while the Fed’s published noon buying rate had the Swiss franc at $0.9069. Again,all three measures should trade significantly higher in the months ahead.
 

 
 

 


 

REPORTING PERSPECTIVE

 
The Big Three Market Movers
 

Recognition of rapidly deteriorating systemic problems and increasingly unstable financial markets explains the Fed's almost openly balking at further rate cuts. Mr. Bernanke needs a stable U.S. currency and as much support as possible from upcoming economic data. The dollar largely is beyond the Fed's control, now, but that is not the case for upcoming economic reporting. Accordingly, near-term rigging of key U.S. economic data is at high risk, with a likely bias to the upside for reports of economic growth and to the downside with the inflation numbers. Nonetheless, the reality of a recessionary economy beset by inflation problems will continue to dominate honest economic reporting.

Also, the continued tanking and bottom-bouncing of the President's positive rating generates added pressure on the government's statistical agencies to add in happy biases to the economic numbers. Where statistical games are being played for both the perceived political needs of the Administration and the increasingly heavy financial-market needs of severely constrained Federal Reserve, the need for rigged numbers continues to border on what might be considered as national security issues.

Nonetheless, absent manipulation, and against lagging and still largely distorted market expectations, most near-term economic reporting should tend to surprise the markets on the downside, while most inflation reporting should surprise expectations on the upside.

Employment/Unemployment -- As discussed in the November 2nd Flash Update, the Bureau of Labor Statistics reported seasonally-adjusted October payrolls up by 166,000 (156,000) net of revisions +/- 129,000, following September's revised 96,000 gain (previously 110,000). Unadjusted year-to-year payroll growth notched higher in October to 1.18%, up from September's revised 1.17% (previously 1.19%). Once, again, the report was not credible and was highly suggestive of manipulation aimed at reducing pressure on the Federal Reserve to ease further.

As discussed in previous newsletters, with monthly seasonal factors being readjusted each month as needed, the BLS can generate any desired result. Consistent adjusted and unadjusted annual growth rates suggest that October otherwise would have been reported as a 123,000 gain.

Also, as discussed and graphed in this month's Opening Comments, October's monthly upside bias factor was 103,000. With the November 2006 bias dropping to 36,000 from 108,000 in October 2006, this add-on gimmick will tend to reduce November 2007's monthly payroll gain. This in an environment where the

BLS has announced that the next benchmark revision will show that unadjusted March 2007 payrolls were overstated by roughly 297,000 jobs. That means the currently reported levels will be revised downward by perhaps 500,000 as the BLS models readjust history.

In the statistically-sounder household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including those of multiple job holders), seasonally-adjusted October employment plunged by 250,000, after having risen by 463,000 in September. The seasonally-adjusted October U.3 unemployment rate was reported at 4.73% +/- 0.23%, little changed from the 4.70% reported for September, while unadjusted U.3 eased to 4.4% in October from 4.5% in September. The broader October U.6 rate held at an adjusted 8.4% but eased to 7.9% from 8.0% in September. Net of the "discouraged workers" defined out of existence during the Clinton Administration, the actual unemployment rate continues to run around 12%.

The October employment gain was against a background of bottom-bouncing help-wanted advertising, rising new claims for unemployment insurance, and weak, but mixed employment numbers in the October purchasing managers surveys (see respective sections). These background numbers remain consistent with continued weakness in official jobs and unemployment reporting.

Next Release (December 7): Based on underlying economic activity, the November payroll survey should show intensifying economic weakness, with the household survey indicating a rising unemployment rate. Given the simplistic spin in the U.S. financial markets that a recession means Fed easing, and given the Fed's indicated reluctance to ease further, however, data massaging likely will keep the November results strong enough to help give the U.S. central bank some breathing room. Such assumes that the Fed can call the numbers. If the dollar-doesn't-matter Administration is calling the numbers, a weak jobs report could be used to pressure the Fed for another cut.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) -- The "advance" estimate of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth for the third quarter of 2007 was 3.90% +/- 3%, per the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), up slightly from the 3.82% reported for the second quarter.  From the standpoint of year-to-year growth, real GDP grew by 2.59% in the third quarter, up from 1.89% in the second quarter.

Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS-Alternate GDP measure suggests economic reality is much weaker than officially reported. A third-quarter annual contraction of roughly 2.3%, the same as in the second quarter, would have been more in line with underlying fundamentals and past methodologies (see the graph in the Alternate Realities section of the Opening Comments).

The "advance" results show stronger than average economic growth, but the numbers still are utter nonsense, in terms of underlying economic fundamentals. Keep in mind that at least 90% of the GDP in the advance estimate is guesstimated. From a political standpoint for the Fed and the Administration, of course, the numbers make good sense, sending the message that times are good and further Fed easing is not necessary.

The nominal (not adjusted for inflation) numbers, though, show a pattern of slowing growth. Annualized third-quarter growth slowed to 4.67% from 6.56% in the second quarter. The reason that "real" growth increased, of course, is that annualized inflation, as reflected by the GDP deflator, sank to 0.77% in the third quarter from 2.64% in the second quarter. The weaker the inflation rate used to deflate the GDP growth, the stronger will be the resulting inflation-adjusted growth.

Recognizing that the data in the "advance" estimate are of such poor quality, the BEA avoids further embarrassment by not publishing its estimates of two broad alternate GDP measures for another month or two. Gross National Product (GNP) is the first, where GDP is GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments), and Gross Domestic Income (GDI) is the second, which is the theoretically-equivalent income number that matches the GDP's consumption number.

General background note: Although the GDP report is the government's broadest estimate of U.S. economic activity, it is also the least meaningful and most heavily massaged of all major government economic series. Published by the BEA, it primarily has become a tool for economic propaganda.

Next Release (November 29): The "preliminary" estimate revision of annualized quarterly real GDP growth for the third quarter should be showing a contracting economy, but that thanks to a false improvement to the trade data reported for September and October, expectations are for the "advance" 3.9% growth rate to revise sharply upward, into boom territory. Only the spinmeisters on Wall Street, at the Fed and in the White House, along with the severely gullible, will believe or purport to believe such propaganda. Those results certainly would help the FOMC argue that it does not need to ease further at this point in time.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) -- The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported the seasonally-adjusted CPI-U (I.6) up by 0.29% (0.21% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, following September's 0.27% (0.28% unadjusted) increase. Against last year's overestimation of falling energy prices, annual CPI inflation surged to 3.54% in October, up from 2.76% in September and 1.97% in August.

That monthly surge in annual inflation likely will continue in November 2007. Where the adjusted November 2006 CPI was reported up just 0.05% for the month, any monthly increase in November 2007 CPI beyond 0.05% will add directly to October's annual inflation rate of 3.54%.

Annualized year-to-date inflation through the first ten months of the year was 3.6% adjusted, 4.3% unadjusted. The accounting for both CPI-U and PPI inflation once again was suspiciously shy in the areas of energy and food inflation, and reporting of so-called "core" inflation continues to appear to be managed, staying conveniently placid for the needs of the Federal Reserve.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) (I.5) -- the substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by the manipulators and inflation apologists as the replacement for the CPI-U, and which has no relationship whatsoever to a cost of living measure that reflects maintaining a constant standard of living -- was 2.99% in October, up from 2.31% in September.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology (I.7), annual CPI growth was about 6.9% in October, up from 6.1% in September, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (I.8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was roughly 11.1% in October, up from 10.4% in September. The eight levels of annual inflation, I.1 to I.8, are detailed in the table in the Alternate Realities section, along with the graph of SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation.

Next Release (December 14): Assuming some ongoing pick-up in monthly inflation for November, annual inflation should spike for a third month and generally continue rising into 2008. Seasonally-adjusted, monthly CPI-U rose by just 0.05% in November 2006. Accordingly, any monthly reporting above or below that for the pending release of November 2007 CPI will add or subtract directly to or from the current annual CPI-U inflation rate. Reporting risks generally favor an upside surprise to market expectations, barring targeted manipulation. Significant upside movement in core inflation remains long overdue and is highly suspect by its absence.

 
Other Troubled Key Series

Federal Deficit -- The 12 month rolling, accounting-gimmicked federal deficit through October 2007 was $169.1 billion, up from $162.8 billion in September, but still down versus $250.2 billion in the 12 months ended October 2006. With the debt ceiling increased, gross federal debt totaled $9.079 trillion as of October 31, 2007, up $72 billion from September and up $495 billion from October 2006, which in turn was up by $557 billion from October 2005.

General background note: The federal government's fiscal 2007 (fiscal year-end September 30th) accounting-gimmicked deficit narrowed to $162.8 billion from $248.2 billion in 2006. The U.S. Treasury's financial statement for 2007 (due mid-December), prepared based on generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), likely will show an actual deficit in excess of $4 trillion (it was $4.6 trillion in 2006, up from $3.5 trillion in 2005.

General background note: Although it lacks the accrual accounting of the GAAP numbers, the change in gross federal debt bypasses several of the reporting manipulations and is a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the official, gimmicked deficit reporting. As of fiscal year-end 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $9.007 trillion, up by $500 billion from 2006, which was up $574 billion from 2005.

General background note: The Administration and Congress continue playing bookkeeping games. Even so, the gimmicked deficit should widen in the next 12 months, as government finances begin to suffer from tax revenue losses due to the intensifying recession and relative tax receipt declines after the expiration of recent corporate tax incentives. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy's mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance -- The trend in annual growth has continued to deteriorate. On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended November 17th, annual growth rose to 2.1%, versus the 17 weeks ended October 20th, where annual growth was 1.0%. An increasing growth trend in new claims is an economic negative.

General background note: More often than not, week-to-week volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly claims numbers is due to the Labor Department's efforts to seasonally adjust these numbers around holiday periods, as seen most recently with the week that included Columbus Day, and as seen anew surrounding Veteran’s Day and the upcoming Thanksgiving holiday reporting. The Labor Department has demonstrated an inability to do such adjusting successfully. When the new claims series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings -- October's seasonally-adjusted monthly real earnings fell by 0.2% versus September. September was virtually unchanged in revision, having been reported up by 0.1%, initially. Annual change in October turned negative for the first time since May 2006, as annual CPI inflation surged in some catch-up reporting.

General background note: Gyrations in the poor quality of reported CPI growth account for most month-to-month volatility in this series. Adjusting for the major upside biases built into the CPI-W inflation measure used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series shows the average worker to be under severe financial stress in an ongoing structural recession.

Retail Sales -- October's seasonally-adjusted monthly retail sales rose by 0.16% (unchanged net of revisions) +/- 0.9% (95% confidence interval), after a 0.65% (previously 0.58%) monthly gain in September. Net of reported CPI inflation, October sales contracted by 0.13%. On a year-to-year basis, October retail sales were up by 5.15% before inflation and by 1.61% after inflation, compared with respective annual growth numbers for September of 4.86% and 2.10%. Once again, the October data appear to have been inflated in an effort to soften pressure on the Fed for another easing.

Mixed reports on the Thanksgiving weekend shopping are less than robust. While an early Thanksgiving may draw business from December, the holiday season is not likely to be a strong one for retailers.

General background note: Real (inflation-adjusted) year-to-year growth in retail sales below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation) signals recession, and a signal first was generated in this business cycle back in June 2006. 

Core Retail Sales. As discussed in the November 14th Flash Update, if the Fed and Wall Street hypesters are going to tout "core" inflation, net of food and energy, at least they should be consistent and go to town over "core" retail sales, net of gasoline station and grocery store sales, which vary primarily based on those otherwise meaningless energy and food prices. In a recessionary inflation, where food and energy prices are major inflation components, related retail sectors will tend to show sales increases, but due to rising prices, not due to stronger demand.

Accordingly, "core" October retail sales was unchanged from September. We will update this series regularly -- at least for a while -- at subscriber request.

Next Release (December 13): While the retail sales series appears to be one used in trying to assuage market nervousness, such places upside risk on positive massaging of the monthly data, particular for a report due at the peak of the holiday shopping season. Nonetheless, November retail sales eventually should prove to have been much weaker than expected, and an ongoing monthly contraction, net of inflation, still should be evident.

Industrial Production -- Seasonally-adjusted industrial production plunged by 0.5% in October, across all industry groups, except for aerospace and transportation. This followed a revised 0.2% gain in September (previously reported at 0.1%). Annual growth in October slowed to 1.80% from September's 2.1% (previously 1.90%).

If the October production numbers hold in revision, the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), official arbiter of U.S. recessions, may have its first number locked in for timing the current recession.

Next Release (December 14): Look for November industrial production to decline further, setting a pattern of contraction, barring data massaging. Eventually, monthly contractions in this series should become regular, with the rapidly slowing annual growth turning negative.

New Orders for Durable Goods -- The series has not been updated since the October newsletter was published. Accordingly, the following text is little changed from last month. The October release is due on November 28th (Wednesday).

For September, the usually volatile durable goods orders fell by 1.7% (down by 2.3% net of revisions), seasonally adjusted, after having fallen by 5.3% in August (previously a 4.9% monthly drop). On an annual basis, durable goods orders declined by 8.4%, showing an ongoing pattern common for this series during recessions. The year-to-year change in the inflation-adjusted, six-month moving average of the series is in contraction.

The closely followed nondefense capital goods new orders rose by 4.4% for the month in September, after falling by 12.2% in August. September's annual change was a decline of 12.0%.

General background note: Durable goods orders lost its status as a solid leading economic indicator when the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders in 2002.

Trade Balance -- The trade numbers again appear to have been targeted for manipulation, with a false improvement reported in the trade deficit being used as an inexpensive tool to impact the currency markets in favor of the U.S. dollar. Beyond the usual gimmicks with the services surplus, the importation of oil appears to be seriously understated in terms of both pricing and physical volume. Against the monthly movement in market prices, which the reported average oil import price started to follow when oil prices began falling-off late last year, the September 2007 oil import price appears shy by about 8%. The difference would have added roughly $1.6 billion to the September deficit, without addressing the 4% decline in monthly, and 6% decline in annual, reported physical oil imports.

As reported, the seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for September narrowed to $56.5 billion from a revised $56.8 billion (previously $57.6 billion) in August. Those results will help boost the "preliminary" estimate revision to third-quarter GDP growth.

Next Release (December 12): Underlying reality favors renewed, severe deterioration in the monthly trade deficit, but the government can play games with this series as long as it wants to play them. With some comments in the popular press in the last month about the lack of oil inflation in the trade numbers, perhaps the oil prices will be addressed in the October report. Reality stands behind the negative reporting risk; financial-market manipulation continues to dominate the positive reporting risk.

Consumer Confidence -- The October consumer confidence measures took hits in terms of both monthly and annual change. In October, the Conference Board Confidence measure fell by 3.9% for the month, 9.0% year-to-year. The University of Michigan Sentiment measure was down 3.0% in October and was down 13.6% year-to-year. On a smoothed, three-month moving-average basis, Confidence and Sentiment measures were down by 3.4% and 5.1%, respectively.

In the first reporting of November results, the Michigan Sentiment measure tumbled 5.9% for the month, and was down by 17.4% year-to-year (down 5.1% on a three-month moving-average basis).  

These lagging, not leading, indicators tend to reflect the tone of the popular financial media and are showing that the inflationary recession has deteriorated sharply.

General background note: The Conference Board measure is seasonally adjusted, which can provide occasional, but significant distortion. The adjustment does not make much sense and is of suspect purpose, given that the Conference Board does not release the unadjusted number. The Michigan survey is unadjusted. How does one seasonally-adjust peoples' attitudes? Also, beware the mid-month Consumer Sentiment release from the University of Michigan. Its sampling base is so small as to be virtually valueless in terms of statistical significance.

Short-Term Credit Measures -- Patterns of annual growth in commercial borrowing have been shifted by the liquidity crisis, with the somewhat stabilized sharp fall-off in annual growth for commercial paper outstanding being countered partially by growth in commercial and industrial bank loans. Consumer credit numbers continue to show no impact.

For seasonally-adjusted consumer credit, which includes credit cards and auto loans, but not mortgages, annual growth was reported at 5.1% in September against an upwardly revised 5.2% in August (previously 4.8%) and 5.1% (previously 4.8%)  in July.  In the current environment, where inflation-adjusted growth in income is not adequate to support meaningful growth in the personal consumption component of GDP, GDP growth only can come from temporary debt expansion or savings liquidation. Accordingly, stagnating growth in consumer debt expansion keeps an ongoing constraint on economic growth.

Commercial borrowing growth varied sharply, again, with annual change in October commercial paper outstanding showing 0.7% growth, after September’s 0.8% decline, and August’s 4.7% and July’s 21.7% gains. In contrast, annual growth in October commercial and industrial loans continued to increase, up at an annual rate of 18.6%, following a 16.9% gain in September and a 13.4% gain in August. The relative stability seen in October commercial paper has started to fall apart anew in November. These credit difficulties will place a major dent in broad business activity.

Producer Price Index (PPI) -- The seasonally-adjusted October finished goods PPI rose by 0.1% (0.1% unadjusyed), following a 1.1% (1.0% unadjusted) jump in September. Even so, annual PPI inflation for October rose to 6.1% from 4.4% in September. Seasonally-adjusted intermediate and crude goods rose 0.1% and 2.4%, respectively for the month, after increasing by 0.4% and 0.1% in September.

The weak October PPI number was due partially to a nonsensical 0.8% decline in October energy prices, while oil prices continued soaring past successive record highs.

Next Release (December 13): Despite the regular random volatility of the monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months generally should come in above market expectations, as the effects of rapidly rising oil and food prices permeate the broad economy. As with the CPI, the core PPI inflation rate still is long overdue for an upside surprise, but such may be further delayed by the financial-market needs of the battered Federal Reserve.

 
 
 
Better-Quality Numbers

General background note: The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders -- Maintaining its trend toward showing a recession in manufacturing, the overall October ISM manufacturing eased to 50.9 from 52.0 in September, with the October employment index notching higher to 52.0 from 51.7 in September. Nonetheless, the production measure plunged into recession territory, dropping to 49.6 in October from 54.6 in September. An accelerating decline in the broad series remains a good bet in the next several months, based on further declines in annual activity in a variety of underlying series. For example, the Fed's monthly industrial production measure plunged in October (consistent with the ISM production series), and durable goods orders are generating a recession signal.

The October new orders index dropped to 52.5 from 53.4 in September. Seasonal-factor distortions, which have been present, usually are overcome by viewing the series using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the October new orders index slowed to a 0.2% annual gain from September’s 1.1% increase.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading below 50.0 indicates contracting new orders. The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004. As an SGS early warning indicator of a major economic shift, the new orders measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating a signal of pending recession.

Service Sector Index. The service-sector ISM index does not have much meaning related to overall business activity, since new order activity at law firms, dentists, hospitals or fast-food restaurants has little obvious relationship to broad economic activity. That said, the overall October services sector index rose to 55.8 from 54.8 in September. Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. The October employment component eased to 51.8 from 52.7 in September. The prices paid component is covered in the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) -- The help-wanted advertising index has not been updated since the October newsletter was published. Accordingly, the following text is unchanged from last month. The October index is due for release on November 29th (Thursday).

The Conference Board reported that seasonally-adjusted help-wanted advertising bottom bounced in September after hitting a five decade low in August. September's reading of 24.0 notched up from August's 23.0 nadir. Even allowing for the advertising volume lost to the Internet in recent years, the current weakness is severe enough to signal a deepening problem in the employment sector. The September number was down 17.2% from the year before, versus August's 23.3% annual contraction.

Viewed on a three-month moving-average basis, September's year-to-year contraction was 20.0% versus 20.4% in August. The series still indicates rapidly deteriorating employment conditions. Where the index never recovered from the 2000/2001 recession, its renewed and ongoing plunge has signaled a new and rapid contraction in economic activity. Continued deterioration remains likely in the months ahead.

Housing Starts -- The housing data are revisited in this month's Reporting/Market Focus, and a deepening recession is evident, despite ongoing monthly volatility in key monthly series. October's seasonally-adjusted housing starts rose by 3.0% +/- 10% (95% confidence interval) for the month, after a decline of 11.4% (was 10.2%) in September. October's level was down 24.5% from the year before.

The monthly gain was attributed to gains in starts for multi-family dwellings, one-family homes were down by 7.3% for the month. Nonetheless, these numbers are so volatile and subject to revision that one month's data simply are not reliable. Also, one cannot rule out an attempt at the Census Bureau to make the numbers in this damaged sector look a little better.

The just-released building permits for October were down 6.6% for the month, 24.5% year-to-year.

Previously confirming ongoing weakness in the housing sector, but not updated since the last newsletter, were September year-to-year contractions of 19.1% for existing home sales and 23.3% for new home sales. The new home sales number reflected an extraordinary 7.5% down revision to the prior month's level, which had the effect of making the monthly change look like a gain.

Inflation Indicators

Money Supply -- The SGS Ongoing M3 estimate of annual growth for October rose to 15.3% from 14.7% in September. The October growth rate is the highest since August 1971, when Richard Nixon closed the gold window. The current pace of growth has increasingly disturbing inflationary implications.

 

The bulk of the monthly increase in October’s SGS-Ongoing M3 came from the Fed’s reported series on M2, large time deposits and institutional money funds. The pace of annual growth in October reflected a minor deceleration in the pace of increase. Keep in mind that the SGS numbers reflect year-to-year changes and may not necessarily mirror not-seasonally-adjusted week-to-week activity by the Fed.

General background note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the SGS Ongoing M3 estimates, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS for methodology. The indicated M3 levels below are our best estimate and are provided at specific subscriber request. Keep in mind that regular revisions in the related Fed series affect historical M3. Usually, annual growth rates hold, although levels may shift a little. We have not attempted, nor do we plan to recreate a revised historical series for an M3 monthly-average level going back in time. The purpose of the SGS series was and is to provide monthly estimates of ongoing annual M3 growth. We are comfortable with those numbers and that our estimated monthly growth rates are reasonably close to what the Fed would be reporting, if it still reported M3. With those caveats on the table, here are the monthly-average levels for M3:

 

           Shadow Government Statistics Ongoing M3 (r)

 (Estimated seasonally-adjusted monthly average, $ Trillions)

 
Feb 06  10.349    Aug 06  10.748    Feb 07  11.415    Aug 07  12.239 
Mar 10.365 Sep 10.865 Mar 11.559 Sep 12.457
Apr 10.435 Oct 10.999 Apr 11.733 Oct 12.686(p)
May 10.508 Nov 11.111 May 11.872
Jun 10.564 Dec 11.227 Jun 11.925
Jul 10.642 Jan 07 11.313 Jul 12.011

(r)Revised based on FRB revisions to component numbers. (p)Preliminary. NOTE OF CAUTION: The estimates of monthly levels best are used for comparisons with other dollar amounts, such as nominal GDP. While the estimates are based on seasonally-adjusted Federal Reserve data, great significance cannot be read into the month-to-month changes, as was the case when the Fed published the series. The most meaningful way to view the data is in terms of year-to-year change.


Based on October reporting, annual growth for monthly M1 remained slightly on the plus side, up by 0.07%, after September’s 0.40% gain. October M2 annual growth eased to 6.33% from 6.72% in September. Data for the first two weeks of November suggest some further slowing of annual M2 growth, but continued surges in non-M2 large time deposits and institutional money funds indicate the November annual SGS-Ongoing M3 is likely to show a further increase in annual growth.

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices -- The October prices paid indices were mixed, likely for the last time, for a while, as they still are not reflective of the ongoing surge in oil prices, which looms in the upcoming data. The levels, however, remain high and in inflation territory, suggestive of ongoing inflation issues in both purchasing managers surveys.

On the manufacturing side, the October price index surged to 63.0 from 59.0 in September. On a three-month moving average basis, October’s 2.2% gain sharply reversed September's annual decline of 29.1%, thanks to sharp oil price declines last year. The manufacturing price indicator is not seasonally adjusted and, therefore, is a generally the better indicator of pricing activity.

On the non-manufacturing side, the seasonally-adjusted October prices diffusion index eased to 63.5 from September’s 66.1. On a three-month moving-average basis October’s annual change also jumped to a gain, up 3.0% following September’s 8.0% decline.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflationary pressure. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising prices.

Oil Prices – Oil prices have continued to soar, setting successive monthly average highs. As we go to press oil is trading near $100 per barrel, a psychological price barrier that could fall at any time. That said, for October, the monthly-average West Texas Intermediate spot price (Department of Energy) jumped 7.8% from September to a record high monthly average of $86.20 per barrel. Against last year's average, October’s level was up by 46.4%, compared with September’s 25.1% gain , and with August's 0.9% annual decline. Such just does not suggest happy news in the offing for annual CPI inflation.

As of Friday, November 23rd, West Texas Intermediate closed at $98.18 per barrel. Oil price movement remains highly volatile, but broadly continues trending higher, and should continue setting new daily record highs. Irrespective of how high oil prices may go, or how much they may fall back in short-lived profit taking, current prices are an absolute disaster for pending U.S. inflation. Regardless of any near-term price swings, meaningful upside risks to oil prices remain in place, both from the intensifying dollar catastrophe and related OPEC rumblings, as well as from ever-volatile Middle Eastern political tensions.

General background note: Whether from supply and demand, geo-political or currency pressures, oil prices will remain at highly inflationary levels and will continue as a major contributing factor to U.S. inflation woes. Historically high oil prices still are working their way through all levels of U.S. economic activity, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. These broad inflationary pressures will remain intact despite any near-term oil price volatility. Although these pressures may be slow to surface in government reporting of the so-called "core" inflation measures, thanks to creative data massaging, they eventually will surface.


 
Reporting/Market Focus

Revisiting U.S. Housing Data -- Worst Downturn Since Early 1980s?

When broad U.S. housing data were last featured in the Reporting/Market Focus (June 2006 SGS), we noted that the housing starts series was "near generating a recession signal," although the downturn increasingly was evident in the home sales numbers. Subsequently, all the major housing indicators have signaled recession, with the level of the government's real (inflation-adjusted) residential investment series (a GDP account) turning down as of first-quarter 2006, as the result of a benchmark revision.

It is important to keep in mind that the current recession already was unfolding before the housing numbers began their terrible tumble, and that the housing problems were in play well before the leveraged junk mortgages brought the solvency of the banking/financial system into question. Accordingly, the current financial system disarray did not trigger the recession, it only exacerbated the circumstance.

As can be noted in a number of graphs that follow, the currently reported annual performance of housing starts, home sales and residential investment are rivaling but not yet exceeding the downturn seen in the early 1990s. There are indications, however, the current circumstance may come to rival the downturn of the early 1980s -- often considered the worst economic contraction of the post-World War II era -- or worse. Consider the expectations of U.S. home builders.

Of interest is the housing market index (HMI), published by the National Association of Home Builders and Wells Fargo. The index is like the purchasing managers survey, in that it is a diffusion index, where a reading of 50 or above indicates as positive housing market climate, as viewed by home builders. The readings for the HMI and its three sub-components, as of November 2007 were: the HMI at 19, current sales at 18, future sales (next six months) at 15, traffic of prospective buyers at 17. The November HMI held even with the October reading, which was lowest since the official beginning of the monthly series in 1985.

As shown in the preceding HMI graph, however, the Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) publishes the HMI or its components back to 1979 on an annual basis. SGS has estimated the HMI for 1979 to 1984, based on the weighting of the components series in the early series, and has estimated 2007 based on the 11 months reported so far for the year. Indeed, all the measures for 2007 appear to be headed for their lowest readings since before the early 1990s recession, which means builders are looking at the weakest environment they have seen since the early 1980s double-dip recession.

Due to a certain amount of random volatility in the housing numbers, the graphs of the monthly series are shown with data smoothed on a three-month moving-average basis. The pattern in each of these charts is consistent; the extent of the current reported downturn in housing is about as bad as it got in the 1990s recession. There is nothing in hand, however, to suggest the weak housing environment has run its course.

Indeed, with the problems surrounding adjustable rate mortgages (ARM), foreclosures and bank solvency still are unfolding, the current circumstance not only likely will degrade to an early 1980s environment as suggested by the home builders' outlook, but also the potential exists for something worse, a 1930s-style depression in housing activity. A look at these graphs again in six months may tell the story.

  

 
 


Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for December:
GAAP Financial Statements of the U.S. Government for Fiscal Year 2007
 

Due in mid-December, this report from the U.S. Treasury promises to show an actual fiscal 2007 federal deficit in the trillions of dollars, not the $163 billion reported in the gimmicked, official cash-based deficit. Details will be reviewed and placed in historical and economic/financial-market perspective.

 
 
___________________________________________
 
 

PLEASE NOTE: The December "Shadow Government Statistics" newsletter currently is targeted for the week of December 17th, following the release of the GAAP-based government financial statements. Timing will be refined as the day nears. Postings on the Web site of monthly newsletters, interim Flash Updates and Alerts are advised immediately by e-mail.

The long-delayed Hyperinflation Special has evolved to include significant new material, beyond the original Hyperinflation series. The special edition now is planned as a supplement to the special year-end issue due in January 2008.

OCCASIONALLY, BRIEF UPDATES ARE COMMUNICATED DIRECTLY BY E-MAIL. IF YOU ARE NOT RECEIVING E-MAIL COMMUNICATIONS FROM US, PLEASE LET US KNOW at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or by using the Feedback option on www.shadowstats.com.

 

Flash Update

Monday, November 19th, 2007
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

November 19, 2007

__________

Annual Inflation Surge Should Continue

Inflation-Adjusted (SGS)Peak Gold Price Is $6,030

__________


PLEASE NOTE: Despite good intentions and a nearly finished missive, the November SGS newsletter will not be out today. Given this week's Thanksgiving Holiday, and pending housing data releases that will enhance the timeliness of this month's Reporting/Market Focus on the housing industry, the newsletter will be put out over the coming holiday weekend. Based on subscriber request, we are pleased to introduce an Inflation Calculator that enables one to calculate the relative inflation-adjusted value of a given price for any month in the last 94 years, in terms of any other month in that period, using both the official BLS CPI-U as well as the SGS-Alternate CPI. The calculator is available at www.shadowstats.com under the "Inflation Calculator" tab. The October SGS-Alternate CPI and the updated October SGS Ongoing M3 both have been posted on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com. -- Best wishes to all for a very Happy Thanksgiving! John Williams

October Annual CPI Inflation Jumps to 3.5%. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported the seasonally-adjusted CPI-U up by 0.29% (0.21% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, following September's 0.27% (0.28% unadjusted) increase. Against last year's overestimation of falling energy prices, annual CPI inflation surged to 3.54% in October, up from 2.76% in September and 1.97% in August. With the adjusted November 2006 CPI reported up just 0.05% for the month, any monthly increase in November 2007 CPI beyond 0.05% will add directly to October's annual inflation rate.

October's CPI inflation was enough to turn the monthly 0.2% October retail sales growth into a 0.1% contraction, after adjustment for inflation.

Annual inflation for the substitution-based Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) was 2.99%, up from September's 2.31%.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology, annual inflation was about 6.9%, up from 6.1% in September, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (1980 methodology) showed October's annual inflation at roughly 11.1%, versus 10.4% in September.

Gold Price Still Well Shy of Inflation-Adjusted Peak. At subscriber request, we are publishing estimates of the January 1980 gold price peak (London afternoon fix) of $850.00 per troy ounce in terms of today's dollar. The thinking behind the request was that since central bank intervention and manipulation have been used to depress the price of gold over time, what could have been expected in terms of the current gold price if inflation were truly and fully reflected.

As can be determined using the Inflation Calculator referenced in the opening note, inflation-adjusted peak gold would be $2,283 per troy ounce based on October 2007 CPI dollars, and $6,030 per troy ounce in terms of October 2007 SGS-Alternate CPI dollars. The suggestion is that the price of gold still faces some catch-up.

Further details will follow in the November SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


The November SGS will be posted over the Thanksgiving weekend. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Wednesday, November 14th, 2007


JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

November 14, 2007

__________

October "Core" Retail Sales Unchanged

Data Massaging Gets Worse as Energy Prices Collapse(?)

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Alternate CPI will posted be later tomorrow (Thursday) on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com, following the release of October CPI data. Barring extraordinary developments, no further Flash Updates are anticipated prior to the November newsletter, which is targeted for posting over this weekend/Monday. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

The seasonally-adjusted October retail sales number was reported this morning as up by 0.16% (unchanged net of revisions) +/- 0.7%, after increasing by 0.65% (previously 0.58%) in September. Year-to-year growth was reported at 5.15% for October, versus 4.86% in September.

If the Fed and Wall Street hypesters are going to tout "core" inflation, net of food and energy, at least they should be consistent and go to town over "core" retail sales, net of gasoline station and grocery store sales, which vary primarily based on those otherwise meaningless energy and food prices. So, this month we offer "core" October retail sales, which was unchanged from September.

There does appear, however, to be an understatement of both food and energy inflation in play. Despite successive months of exploding oil and food prices, the seasonally-adjusted October PPI was up by a subdued 0.1% (0.7% unadjusted) for the month, helped by a fortuitous 0.8% contraction in energy prices. Food inflation was up an understated 1.0%. Annual PPI inflation for October, however, spiked to 6.1% from 4.4% in September.

Whatever happens with tomorrow's October CPI release, any monthly change that is more positive than a 0.4% contraction (last October's seasonnaly-adjusted monthly change), will add directly to last month's annual inflation rate of 2.8%, by the differential.

Further details will follow in the November SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


The target date for the posting of the November SGS is for over this weekend/Monday.

Flash Update

Friday, November 9th, 2007


JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

November 9, 2007

__________

October M3 Growth Breaks to New 36-year High

Trade Numbers Again Appear Massaged

Beware Next Week's Surge in Annual Inflation!

The System Begins to Crack

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Ongoing M3, based on roughly four weeks of data for October will be updated over the weekend on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

With the dollar tanking and oil and gold at or pushing record highs, the worst of all worlds has started to settle in on the U.S. financial markets: an inflationary recession, a hamstrung Fed, and former foreign fuelers of U.S. financial market liquidity starting to dump the dollar. Beyond any short-term and short-lived central-bank intervention in these markets, which always is a possibility, the system has started to falter. One key signal that has yet to surface, though, is the dumping of long-term U.S. Treasuries. Treasuries still are acting as something of a traditional safe haven. When the flow turns out of the Treasuries and U.S. dollar for safe haven elsewhere, circumstances will begin to turn nasty, quickly.

SGS-Ongoing M3 Annual Growth Tops 15%. Subject to tonight's release of the large time deposits at commercial banks for the last week in October, the SGS-Ongoing M3 estimate of October annual growth tentatively is at 15.2%, the highest level since August 1971 (closing of the gold window), up from 14.7% in September and 13.9% in August. The formal preliminary estimate will be posted over the weekend at the Alternate Data tab of www.shadowstats.com. If the current estimate holds, the pace of increase in the monthly annual growth rate will have slowed, but with growth at dangerously inflationary levels.

Trade Numbers Remain Politicized. The September trade deficit was reported in such a manner as to help the U.S. dollar, not to hurt it. Continued severe understatement of oil import activity helped to reduce the seasonally-adjusted September trade shortfall to $56.5 billion from a revised $56.8 billion (previously 57.6 billion) in August. These numbers remain nonsense, as will be discussed in the upcoming newsletter, and promise some upside revision to the otherwise unbelievable estimate of third-quarter GDP growth.

Week Ahead -- CPI Surge Next week's data will begin to show an inflation toll. Not only are both the randomly volatile PPI (Wednesday, November 14th) and the CPI (Thursday, November 15th) at fair risk of topping expectations for October, but also, because of relatively weak oil price effects last year, year-to-year or annual inflation will spike. For example, to the extent that month-to-month seasonally-adjusted CPI inflation tops last year's 0.4% decline, the difference will add directly to the annual inflation rate. If consensus expectations of a 0.3% CPI monthly gain are met, that means that roughly 0.7% would be added to September's 2.8% annual inflation, or a level of 3.5% (the precise measure will vary depending on rounding).

Also due is October retail sales (Wednesday, November 14th), which, barring direct manipulation, likely will disappoint already soft expectations. Further, if not otherwise gimmicked, monthly change is a good bet to be negative, after inflation adjustment, with real annual growth below 1.8%, patterns consistent with an ongoing recession.

Further details will follow in the November SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


The current target date for the posting of the November SGS is for next weekend, so as to include the October CPI data. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Friday, November 2nd, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - Nov. 2, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

November 2, 2007

__________

Data Appear Massaged as Market Manipulation Tool

October Payrolls Fortuitously Show No Need for Further Easing

Household Employment Plunges by 250,000

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Alternate Dollar Indices have been updated on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com. Barring unusual developments, this morning's Flash Update is published in lieu of one this weekend.

-- Best wishes to all, John Williams


Further Nonsense in Key Data. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported today that the seasonally-adjusted October payroll employment rose by 166,000 (156,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000, after September’s revised 96,000 (previously 110,000) gain. Year-to-year change for October was 1.18%, up a notch from September’s 1.17%, but down from 1.23% in August.

These numbers are no more believable than were the fudged GDP data, but they do happily confirm to the markets that the Fed does not need to ease again. In fact the Fed did not need to ease on Wednesday, but that would have savaged the stock market too much? In the current environment, key data continue to appear to be managed, as a tool for financial-market support operations.

The monthly bias factor was an add-on of 103,000, and the seasonal factors were altered, again. If the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted growth rates were handled consistently, the October payroll change would been reported at 123,000.

The statistically-sounder household survey (number of people employed instead of the number of jobs), showed employment down by 250,000 jobs for the month, after gaining 463,000 jobs the month before. The seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate rose to 4.73% +/- 0.23% in October from 4.70% in September. Unadjusted U.3 eased to 4.4% in October from 4.5% in September, while the broader U.6 held at 8.4% adjusted, but eased to 7.9% from 8.0% unadjusted. Net of the discouraged workers defined out of existence during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment holds around 12%.

Purchasing Managers Survey Shows Slowing Manufacturing, Rising Inflation. Moving in tandem with a deteriorating inflationary recession, the October purchasing managers manufacturing survey index (ISM) eased to 50.9 from 52.0 in September. As a diffusion index, a reading below 50 indicates a contraction. The October prices paid index, however, jumped to 63.0 from 59.0 in September. The new orders index eased to 52.5 from 53.4, while the employment index firmed slightly to 52.0 from 51.7.

Production, however, showed an outright contraction, plunging to 49.6 in October from 54.6 in September. Such should be something of a precursor to the behavior of the Fed's October industrial production measure.

October Dollar Indices at New Lows. The U.S. dollar's recent tumble took its toll on the monthly averages for the SGS Financial-Weighted Dollar and the Fed's Trade-Weighted Dollar, with both measures setting new historic lows. Both indices are set at January 1985 = 100.00.

The October FWD average was 47.43, down 2.39% for the month and down 9.85% year-to-year. The index reading at month-end also was a low, at 46.81.

The October TWD average was 53.20, down 2.61% for the month and down 10.23% year-to-year. Again the index reading at month-end was a new low, at 52.26.

Next Week. The September Trade deficit is the only major economic release due in the week, ahead on November 9th (Friday). Underlying fundamentals would suggest a significant deterioration, but intense pressures against the U.S. dollar favor ongoing massaged results, which apparently have become the norm in the last several months, bringing in consensus or better results.

Further detail will follow in the November SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


The current target date for the posting of the November SGS is for late in the week of November 12th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and all intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Wednesday, October 31st, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - Oct. 31, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

October 31, 2007

__________

Fed Action Likely Foreshadows Jobs Report

GDP Report Fundamentally Was Nonsense

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Alternate GDP has been updated on the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com. Also, the PDF of the monthly newsletter has been posted to the Web site. Going forward, both the html and PDF versions will be posted at the same time. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

Formally and legally, neither the White House nor the Federal Reserve Chairman is supposed to receive the employment data until after 4:30 p.m. ET of the day before the public release of the information. Such, however, did not prevent Alan Greenspan from getting an early heads-up, and Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke likely is no different. Fed chairmen do not like to be embarrassed or open to unnecessary criticism, as might be the case with an easing today and a strong October jobs report on Friday, or no easing today and miserable jobs outlook.

Today, the Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC) lowered the targeted federal funds rate by 25 basis points (0.25%) to 4.50%, in line with market expectations and suggestive of a soft upcoming jobs report. Wording of the FOMC statement, however, was such as to dampen expectations of further easing. That could indicate that the jobs report will not be shockingly bad, as underlying reality might otherwise suggest.

Thank Goodness for Lower Inflation! Today's "advance" estimate of annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) growth in the third-quarter GDP was 3.90%, up from 3.82% in the second quarter, per the Bureau of Economic Analysis. From the standpoint of year-to-year growth, real GDP grew by 2.59% in the third quarter, up from 1.89% in the second quarter. As suggested by the SGS-Alternate GDP, an annual third-quarter contraction of roughly 2.3%, the same as in the second quarter, is more in line with underlying fundamentals.

Historically, the official results would be considered strong growth, but the numbers are utter nonsense, in terms of underlying economic fundamentals. Keep in mind that at least 90% of the GDP in the advance estimate is guesstimated. From a political standpoint for the Fed and the Administration, of course, the numbers make good sense, sending the message that times are good and further Fed easing is not necessary.

The nominal (not adjusted for inflation) numbers tell a different story. There, annualized third-quarter growth slowed to 4.67% from 6.56% in the third quarter. The reason that "real" growth increased is that annualized inflation, as reflected by the GDP deflator, sank to 0.77% in the third quarter from 2.64% in the second quarter. The message simply is, "So Mr. Businessman, you may think your sales are slowing, but that is only because your rate of inflation is falling so rapidly." Try convincing Main Street U.S.A. of that!

Further detail will follow in a likely Flash Update over the coming weekend and in the November SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


The current target date for the posting of the November SGS is for late in the week of November 12th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and all intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

October 2007 Edition

Monday, October 29th, 2007
JWSGS - October 2007 EDITION - Oct. 29, 2007

Printer Friendly PDF Version (300kB)


JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Issue Number 36

October 29, 2007

__________

Inflation Indicators Surge While Recession Signals Mount

Anticipated Fed Easing Pummels Real-World Markets

Dollar Tanks, Oil and Gold Soar and Funding Crisis Continues

__________


OVERVIEW -- OPENING COMMENTS

Wall Street's Pollyannas Ignore Darkening Fundamentals


With all-time high oil prices topping $90 per barrel, with the U.S. dollar indices at record lows and under selling pressure, and with the SGS-Ongoing M3 annual growth at a 36-year high of 14.7%, the near-term inflation outlook is turning about as bleak as it gets. On the economic front, annual growth in new orders for durable goods, housing and employment all are generating new, or confirming prior, recession signals. This is despite overstatement of some recent economic activity in the employment data apparently aimed at removing some pressures on the Fed to ease. Nevertheless, the markets are expecting a quarter-point fed funds rate cut on Wednesday. The Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC) most likely will follow market expectations, in that it has had some hand in setting the consensus outlook, and the U.S. central bank likely will look to be as non-disruptive to the markets as possible. Even so, current expectations already are roiling the currency markets. Any rate cut beyond consensus could prove particularly disruptive for the U.S. dollar. At some point -- and that point may have been reached -- Fed easing will become counterproductive, pummeling domestic U.S. liquidity. Where Wall Street, Administration and Fed efforts appear to be concentrated on continued artificial propping of equity prices, a dollar-induced liquidity crunch would hit both the equity markets and the credit markets hard. Despite increasing volatility in this unsettled environment, the stock market has held up remarkably well, so far. Gold and dollar prices already are at levels that risk inviting short-lived central bank interventions.

A week ago last Friday -- the 20th anniversary of the 1987 stock market crash -- I had a leisurely shoe shine at the BART (subway) station in San Francisco's financial district. As I received one of the better shoe shines of my life, the bootblack regaled me with stories of his stock market exploits. As shoe enhancement progressed, a former stockbroker and homeless acquaintance of the bootblack interrupted us, bemoaning the news that the Dow was down by 200 (it closed down 367 for the day). The circumstance brought to mind the tales of how both Joseph Kennedy and Bernard Baruch had decided to get out of the stock market before the 1929 crash, based on their bootblack, Patrick Bologna, giving stock tips. Kenneth Fisher’s 100 Minds That Made The Market quoted Baruch as explaining, "When beggars and shoeshine boys, barbers and beauticians can tell you how to get rich it is time to remind yourself that there is no more dangerous illusion than the belief that one can get something for nothing."

As discussed in this month's Reporting/Market Focus, liquidity crises of various forms, in combination with structural economic changes, have been the most common contributing triggers for U.S. economic contractions since the founding of the Republic. As was also seen at the onset of the Great Depression, today's still-unrecognized recession was not caused by current liquidity disruptions, only exacerbated by them.

Although the recent hemorrhaging of commercial paper outstanding appears to have been stabilized, the funding problems within the system still are surfacing, to wit, the Fed appears ready to meet market demands for another rate cut. As the recession deepens, the problems with structured financial instruments will extend far beyond the issues with problem mortgages.

Enhanced Recession Signals. Three economic series are highlighted this month in terms of their historical relationships to recessions. Despite the often discussed reporting problems with payroll employment, the official data are showing annual growth that always has been followed by a recession. As shown in the accompanying graph, every time annual growth has slowed to 1.2% a recession has followed, The September 2007 annual growth slowed to that level, last seen (when growth was slowing) in February 2001, the month before the official onset of the 2001 recession. The graph also suggests that the recovery from that downturn was the weakest since the first-leg of the double-dip recession in the early-1980s, and back then they did not have the bias factor (birth-death model). I'll contend that what the United States currently is experiencing is the second-leg of a double-dip recession that began in 2000,



Annual growth in housing starts has been signaling recession for some time, but given the heavy press surrounding the housing market and mortgage problems, the graph is repeated and updated here, showing year-to-year change on a monthly basis. Looking at the monthly data, as opposed to the three-month moving average published a couple of months back, highlights the sharp move shown in September reporting. Current growth patterns remain the weakest seen since the 1990/1991 recession.





Then there is the new orders for durable goods series, which took an 8.4% hit on an annual basis for September. This monthly series is highly volatile and best viewed on a six-month moving average basis.

With annual growth adjusted for inflation (official CPI-U is used as opposed to the even more useless GDP component deflator), annual change for the series has been negative since the beginning of the year. Such is consistent with a recessionary environment. Where the current series is not fully consistent over time, similar relationships with recessions were evident in earlier versions of the durable goods orders series.

In other reporting over last month, retail sales and the improvement in the trade deficit were overstated, industrial production slowed in revision, the purchasing managers surveys slowed, consumer confidence sank and help-wanted advertising bottom bounced. Most upcoming series, shy of any data massaging, should tend to come in on the low side of market expectations.

Inflation Surge Looms. Oil is the single most important commodity in terms of its potential impact on broad inflation. It permeates economic activity. The price of oil is notoriously volatile and making new highs as we go to press. Irrespective of any near-term pull backs, oil prices are high enough to start spiking full (as opposed to "core") inflation measures over the next several months. Oil price increases of the last couple of years still are working their way fully into the economy.

Some of the oil-driven inflation effects will be seen quickly, and the timing is poor for CPI reporting. As with the September CPI-U, which saw annual inflation jump to 2.8% from 2.0% in August, due partially to a CPI contraction in September 2006, October 2007 will see a further spike against a continued period of CPI contraction one year ago. The surge in PPI likely will continue in October, as well,

Also promising higher inflation is broad money growth, with the SGS-Ongoing M3 annual growth estimated at a 36-year high 14.7%. Added pricing pressure will come from the weakening dollar. On a more positive note, the fiscal 2007 cash-based federal deficit was reported at $162.8 billion, down from $248.2 billion in 2006. Those numbers, however, are gimmicked, and the Treasury's financial statements due out in December will tell a much darker story, using generally accepted accounting principles.

PLEASE NOTE: A "General background note" provides a broad background paragraph on certain series or concepts. Where the language used in past and subsequent newsletters usually has been or will be identical, month-after-month, any text changes in these sections will be highlighted in bold italics upon first usage. This is designed so that regular readers may avoid re-reading material they have seen before, but where they will have the material available for reference, if so desired.

General background note: The U.S. economy is in a protracted and deepening structural recession that will prove to be the second leg of a double-dip recession, which began in 2000/2001. The current downleg was signaled in mid-2005 by a series of leading indicators used for that purpose by SGS. With neither traditional fiscal nor monetary stimulus available to help turn economic activity, the current circumstance is likely to evolve into a hyperinflationary depression (see December 2006 SGS).

Market Turmoil Continues. With the ongoing liquidity crisis and rising oil prices, U.S. dollar selling has intensified and the price of gold has rallied. Despite any near-term violent swings in oil or gold prices, those general broad upside trends likely will persist over the longer term. Treasury yields generally have softened, due primarily to flight-to-safety issues, while the equity markets have seen increased volatility and vulnerability to negative surprises. Eventually, dollar selling will create a domestic U.S. liquidity crisis that should impact the credit and equity markets negatively. If the Fed eases, as expected, or more than expected, such should contribute to the pressures on the greenback.

Alternate Realities. General background note: This section updates the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting. When a government economic measure does not match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Federal Reserve, White House and Wall Street. In these alternate measures, the effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan-Era GDP. The methodologies for the series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS (see Archives page at www.shadowstats.com).

GDP. The alternate second-quarter GDP growth reflects the "final" estimate revision, with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate second-quarter inflation-adjusted annual growth rate (year-to-year, as opposed to the popularly-touted annualized quarter-to-quarter rate) for GDP was a decline of roughly 2.3% versus the official year-to-year gain of 1.9%.



General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate GDP numbers tend to show deeper and more protracted recessions than have been reported formally or reflected in related official reporting. Nonetheless, the patterns shown in the alternate data are broadly consistent with the payroll employment and industrial production series (as revised), which are major indicators used by the National Bureau of Economic Research in determining the official timing of U.S. business cycles (see this month's Reporting/Market Focus).

CPI. The annual non-core annual inflation rates spiked in September and are due to spike again October, while the so-called "core" inflation rates continue their orchestrated malingering. Food and oil-related price pressures increasingly are a problem, due primarily to supply issues, but those pressures have been avoided in much of the government's reporting of the non-core inflation, so far. Continued sharp increases in market prices, however, suggests the pick-up in reporting inflation should accelerate in the next several months.


                          Eight Levels of Inflation
                   Annual Inflation for June to September 2007


2007 Measure Jun Jul Aug Sep
I.1 Core PCE Deflator 1.9% 1.9% 1.8% n.a. I.2 Core Chained-CPI-U 1.8% 1.8% 1.7% 1.7% I.3 Core CPI-U 2.2% 2.2% 2.1% 2.1% I.4 PCE Deflator 2.3% 2.1% 1.8% n.a. I.5 Chained-CPI-U 2.3% 2.1% 1.8% 2.3% I.6 CPI-U 2.7% 2.4% 2.0% 2.8% I.7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U 6.1% 5.7% 5.4% 6.1% I.8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation 10.3% 10.1% 9.9% 10.4%

Notes: I.1 to I.3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively, of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U. I.4 to I.6 are the same measures with energy and food inflation included. The CPI-U (I.6) is the measure popularly followed by the financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation. I.7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre- Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top series in the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com. I.8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which reverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so, plus an adjustment for the portion of Clinton-Era geometric weighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic bookkeeping.




General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate CPI numbers tend to show significantly higher inflation over time, generally reflecting the reversal of hedonic adjustments, geometric weighting and the use of a more traditional approach to measuring housing costs, measures all consistent with the reporting methodology in place as of 1980.



MARKETS PERSPECTIVE


The market instabilities that intensified in response to the systemic liquidity crisis, and the resulting Federal Reserve emergency accommodation, have continued. Fed accommodation is expected to continue in the days ahead. The systemic and economic problems, however, are structural and not fixed as simply as the markets' spinmeisters would like to believe. Fed accommodation will not resolve the current problems. Those problems will not disappear, and pressures for further easing by the Fed will be ongoing. Ongoing, that is, until either the dollar sell-off forces a reconsideration, or until Mr. Bernanke owns up to the truth and just says "no' to Wall Street.

The following table shows how various financial indicators fared in the third quarter of 2007 and in subsequent trading through October 26th. In general, the currencies, oil and precious metals have been consistently strong, rivaling the equity indices.

            
      Financial-Market Indicators at Quarter-End and October 26, 2007 Close


26 Oct 2007 and Third-Quarter 2007 Second-Quarter 2007 Change versus Level Qtr/Qtr Yr/Yr Level Qtr/Qtr Yr/Yr 30 Sep 2007

Equity Market
DJIA 13,806.70 -0.64% 13,895.63 3.63% 18.98% 13,408.62 8.53% 20.25% S&P 500 1,535.28 0.56% 1,526.75 1.56% 14.29% 1,503.35 5.81% 19.53% Wilshire 5000 15,518.12 1.02% 15,362.02 1.00% 15.11% 15,210.65 5.56% 18.38% NASDAQ Comp 2,804.19 3.80% 2,701.50 3.77% 19.62% 2,603.23 7.50% 19.85%

Credit Market(1) Fed Funds Target 4.75% 0bp 4.75% -50bp -50bp 5.25% 0bp 25bp 3-Mo T-Bill 3.96% 14bp 3.82% -100bp -107bp 4.82% -22bp -19bp 2-Yr T-Note 3.77% -20bp 3.97% -90bp -75bp 4.87% 29bp -29bp 5-Yr T-Note 4.04% -19bp 4.23% -69bp -36bp 4.92% 38bp -18bp 10-Yr T-Note 4.41% -18bp 4.59% -44bp -5bp 5.03% 38bp -12bp 30-Yr T-Bond 4.68% -15bp 4.83% -29bp 6bp 5.12% 28bp -7bp

Spot Oil(2) US$ per Barrel West Texas Int. 91.87 12.49% 81.67 17.39% 29.80% 69.57 12.21% -5.96%

Currencies/Dollar Indices(3) US$/Unit Pound Sterling 2.0514 0.61% 2.0389 1.65% 8.94% 2.0063 1.92% 8.50% Euro 1.4390 1.20% 1.4219 5.17% 12.08% 1.3520 1.22% 5.80% Swiss Franc 0.8601 0.39% 0.8568 4.87% 7.13% 0.8170 -0.93% 0.06% Yen 0.0088 0.84% 0.0087 7.32% 2.63% 0.0081 -4.72% -7.20% Canadian Dollar 1.0396 3.54% 1.0041 8.43% 12.06% 0.9404 8.43% 4.85% Australian Dollar 0.9163 3.48% 0.8855 4.29% 18.68% 0.8491 4.78% 14.39% Weighted Currency Units/US$ Jan. 1985 = 100 Financial (FWD) 47.04 -1.38% 47.70 -4.66% -9.14% 50.03 -0.99% -4.12% Change US$/FX -- 1.40% -- 4.88% 10.06% -- 1.00% 4.30% Trade (TWD) 52.55 -1.83% 53.53 -5.42% -9.10% 56.60 -2.33% -3.13% Change US$/FX -- 1.86% -- 5.74% 10.01% -- 2.39% 3.23%

Precious Metals(4) US$ per Troy Ounce Gold 779.15 4.87% 743.00 14.22% 23.99% 650.50 -1.70% 6.03% Silver 14.07 3.08% 13.65 8.85% 20.26% 12.54 -6.07% 17.20%

bp: Basis point or 0.01%. (1) Treasuries are constant maturity yield, US Treasury. (2) Department of Energy. (3) Shadow Government Statistics, Federal Reserve Board (See Dollar Index Section for definitions). (4) London afternoon fix, Kitco.com.


General background note: The U.S. economy remains in a severe, structural inflationary recession, saddled with an impotent Fed and a federal government that is fiscally bankrupt in all but name. In combination, these factors offer the worst of all environments to the financial markets. Ahead lie higher long-term interest rates and much lower U.S. equity prices. On the plus side is the outlook for gold, which provides a solid hedge against many of the problems that have started to surface. Key to the near-term movements of these markets remains the fate of the U.S. dollar, which appears to have started a major downside move.

U.S. Equities -- The equity markets have remained generally positive, despite increased turmoil. The economic and financial fundamentals are deteriorating, and weakening earnings should suffer further with declining business activity. Stocks still could go on to further new highs or crash from current levels, but eventually they are headed much lower than they are now. Serious U.S. dollar selling pressure could become a major factor in the market.

General background note: As the equity markets catch up with the underlying economic and looming financial fundamentals, the downside adjustments to stock prices should be quite large, eventually rivaling the 90% decline in equities seen in the 1929 crash and ensuing several years. The decline might have to be measured in real terms (net of inflation), as a hyperinflation eventually will kick in as the Fed moves to liquefy the system. Stocks do tend to follow inflation, since revenues and earnings get denominated in inflated dollars. Hence with a hyperinflation, a DJIA of 100,000 or 100,000,000 could be expected, but such still would be below today's levels, adjusted for inflation.

General background note: The approaching financial maelstrom already has come over the horizon and now is nearing landfall. When it hits, those investors who have taken shelter in cash, gold and outside the U.S. dollar will be the ones with the wealth and assets available to take advantage of the extraordinary investment opportunities that should follow.

U.S. Credit Market -- Recent credit market activity has continued to be dominated by the still unfolding liquidity crisis and general financial-market and global-political instabilities that have fostered continued flight-to-safety effects. Over time, inflation traditionally has been the dominant force behind interest rate movements. The worsening inflation outlook and mounting flight from the dollar both favor higher long-term interest rates, with a steepening, positively-sloped yield curve.

U.S. Dollar -- The Fed's last round of rate cuts and market expectations for a further easing on October 31st have taken an increasing toll on the foreign exchange value of the U.S. currency. Selling has been heavy enough to invite central bank intervention, but if the dollar is being supported artificially, the action so far has been covert.

Potentially exacerbating the circumstance are recent stories of Communist China threatening the use of their dollar sales "nuclear option," of Iran requesting that Japanese buyers pay for oil purchases in yen, of the Saudis looking to de-link from the U.S. dollar. The U.S. markets remain particularly vulnerable, at the moment, to "surprises" from those countries that are not so friendly to the United States, or even from those who simply would like to avoid large losses on the dollars they hold. Accordingly, reports of slowing official foreign investment in U.S. Treasuries likely signal a major investment shift already underway. The more the Fed eases, the greater the shift will be out of the U.S. dollar.

Outside of further Federal Reserve rate cuts or additional major negative news out of the liquidity/funding crisis, the proximal trigger for a dollar panic could come from a bad economic statistic (statistics appear increasingly to be massaged in a dollar-friendly manner), political missteps by the Administration, negative trade or market developments in Asia, or a terrorist attack or even the increasingly likely expansion of U.S. military activity in the Middle-East. When the trigger hits, the broad selling pressure should be strong enough to overwhelm short-lived central bank intervention.

General background note: In terms of underlying fundamentals that tend to drive currency trading, the dollar's portfolio could not be worse. Relative to major trading partners, the U.S. economy is much weaker, interest rates are lower and anticipated possibly to go lower still, inflation is higher, fiscal and trade-balance conditions are abysmal, and relative political concerns are rising sharply at the same time. The President's approval rating commonly has moved currency trading in the past, and, despite any near-term bouncing, it remains lower than has been seen for any other U.S. President in the post-World War II era. Relative political stability issues are compounded by the presence of a Congress that is increasingly hostile to the President, and that is rated even lower by the American people than is the President. Generally, the greater the magnitude of the dollar selling, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. capital markets.

As shown in the following graph, the U.S. dollar fell sharply in September and so far in October, regularly setting new record lows on both a financial- and trade-weighted basis. The added latest October data points are as of October 26th.



General background note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS for methodology.

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics' Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (FWD) is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For September 2007, the monthly dollar average fell by 1.83% after rising by 0.29% in August. The September 2007 average index level of 48.59 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 6.95% from September 2006, with August down 4.71% from the year before. The index has set a new historic monthly-average low, breaking below the prior low of 48.98 in April 1995. The October 26th index close was 47.04.

Also setting a new all-time monthly-average low, September's level of the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (TWD) was down 2.07% from August, which, in turn, was unchanged from July. The September 2007 index level of 54.62 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 6.96% from September 2006, against August's 4.51% decline from the year before. As of October 26th, the TWD closed at 52.55.

Gold -- As of Friday (October 26th), London gold closed at $779.15 per troy ounce, with silver at $14.07. For September, the monthly-average gold price (London afternoon fix per Kitco.com) averaged $712.65 per troy ounce, against August's $665.41 per troy ounce. Silver averaged $12.40 per troy ounce versus $12.36 in August.

Gold price volatility continues, generally soaring to the upside. Of some risk here remains the possibility of covert or overt central bank intervention in tandem with intervention aimed at muting the effects of dollar selling. Despite any central-bank machinations or intervention, the upside potential for the precious metals remains explosive, new record high prices loom.

General background note: As discussed in the Hyperinflation Series (see the December 2006 to March 2007 SGSs), the eventual complete collapse of the U.S. dollar -- the world's reserve currency -- will force the creation of a new international currency system. Gold likely will be structured into any replacement system, in an effort by those organizing the new currency structure to gain public acceptance.





The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show September averages as well as added points for closing prices on October 26th. As of Friday's closing prices, gold was at $779.15, oil at $91.87 and the Swiss franc at $0.86. All three measures should trade significantly higher in the months ahead.



REPORTING PERSPECTIVE


The Big Three Market Movers


The Fed continues to face a troubled financial system and unstable markets. Despite Wall Street pressures for further easing by the U.S. central bank, Mr. Bernanke has to be painfully aware of the risks he faces with intensified selling of the U.S. dollar. Therein lies the primary motivation for any near-term rigging of key U.S. economic data, with a likely bias to the upside for reports of economic growth. Nonetheless, the reality of a recessionary economy beset by inflation problems will continue to dominate honest economic reporting.

Also, the continued bottom bouncing of the President's positive rating adds pressure on the statistical agencies to generate upside numbers on economic growth and downside numbers on inflation. Where statistical games are being played for both the perceived political needs of the Administration and the increasingly heavy financial-market needs of an impotent Federal Reserve, the need for rigged numbers continues to border on what might be considered as national security issues.

Absent manipulation, and against lagging and still largely distorted market expectations, most near-term economic reporting should tend to surprise the markets on the downside, while most inflation reporting should continue to surprise expectations on the upside.

Employment/Unemployment -- As discussed in the October 7th Flash Update, the Bureau of Labor Statistics reported seasonally-adjusted September payrolls up by 110,000 (228,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000, with August gaining 89,000 in revision, after an initial report of a 4,000 jobs loss. The report was not credible and was highly suggestive of a move to take some easing pressure off the Federal Reserve. Nonetheless, unadjusted year-to-year payroll growth slowed to 1.19% in September, from 1.23% in August. Consistent adjusted and unadjusted annual growth rates, in combination with the massive revision, suggest September would have shown a gain of 142,000. As discussed in previous newsletters, with monthly seasonal factors being readjusted each month as needed, the BLS can generate any desired result.

Nonetheless, as discussed and graphed in the Opening Comments, annual payroll growth is signaling a recession. In terms of slowing jobs growth, the last time annual payroll growth slowed to 1.2% was in February 2001, the month before the official onset of the 2001 recession. Yet annual growth already is even weaker, since these data were released along with a BLS announcement that the next benchmark revision will show that unadjusted March 2007 payrolls were overstated by roughly 297,000 jobs. That means the currently reported levels will be revised downward by perhaps 500,000 as the BLS models readjust history.

In the household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including those of multiple job holders), seasonally-adjusted employment rose by 463,000 in September, following a 316,000 employment decline in August. The seasonally-adjusted September U.3 unemployment rate was reported at 4.70% +/- 0.23%, up from 4.64% in August, while unadjusted U.3 eased to 4.5% in September from 4.6% in August. The broader U.8 rate held at an adjusted 8.4% in September and fell to 8.0% from 8.4%, unadjusted. Net of the "discouraged workers" defined out of existence during the Clinton Administration, the actual unemployment rate continues to run around 12%.

The September employment gain was against a background of bottom-bouncing help-wanted advertising, rising new claims for unemployment insurance, and weak, but mixed employment numbers in the September purchasing managers surveys (see respective sections). These background numbers remain consistent with continued weakness in official jobs and unemployment reporting.

Keep in mind that the payroll data have been boosted by 1,118,000 jobs in the last 12 months by the addition of regular bias factors, a.k.a. the birth/death model. September's bias was to the upside by 17,000 jobs Including 6,000 in the financial and 12,000 in the construction sectors. This bias system never has been adjusted to handle a recession, where the biases likely would turn negative. Accordingly, in the current recessionary environment, the payroll data are being significantly overstated versus underlying reality. Where the October 2006 bias factor jumped to 108,000 from 13,000 in September 2006, such suggests some upside pressure on the October 2007 payroll estimate.

Next Release (November 2): The October payroll survey should show intensifying economic weakness but likely will be massaged towards market expectations, or higher. Expectations seem to be set for a payroll gain below 100,000, with the unemployment rate unchanged; an outright payroll contraction would be more credible, along with rising unemployment. If the numbers come in unusually strong, as they did in September, what most likely will be at work is manipulation, as a cheap form of market intervention aimed at discouraging further speculation of Fed easing and at helping to prop the U.S. dollar.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) -- The "final" estimate revision of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth for the second quarter of 2007 was 3.82% +/- 3%, per the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), down slightly from the 3.95% reported in the "preliminary" estimate, but still up from the "advance" estimate of 3.38%. The second quarter's gain rebounded from 0.60% in the first quarter, while second-quarter year-to-year growth revised to 1.89% from the "preliminary" 1.92% and from the "advance" 1.78%, and was up from 1.55% in the first quarter. In general, the revision was little more than statistical noise.

On the inflation front, the second-quarter GDP deflator helped to spike real growth, with annualized inflation of just 2.64% in revision, previously 2.68% and 2.69%, against the 4.23% inflation pace estimated for the first quarter.

The BEA also published its revised estimates of two broad alternate GDP measures, Gross National Product (GNP), where GDP is GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments), and Gross Domestic Income (GDI), which is the theoretically-equivalent income number that matches the GDP's consumption number. Annualized quarterly real growth in second-quarter GNP revised to 4.01% from 3.96%, up from 0.66% in the first quarter, while second-quarter GDI revised to 4.46% from 4.38%, versus 1.17% in the first quarter.

General background note: Although the GDP report is the government's broadest estimate of U.S. economic activity, it is also the least meaningful and most heavily massaged of all major government economic series. Published by the BEA, it primarily has become a tool for economic propaganda. Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS-Alternate GDP measure suggests economic reality is much weaker than officially reported. Alternate year-to-year annual contractions continue, with an annual 2.3% contraction in the second quarter deepening from the 2.2% decline in the first quarter (see the graph in the Alternate Reality section of the Opening Comments).

Next Release (October 31): The "advance" estimate of annualized quarterly real GDP growth for the third quarter could weaken slightly, per market expectations. Reality would be a quarterly contraction, but financial-market and political considerations favor a happy upside surprise.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) -- The BLS reported the seasonally-adjusted September CPI-U (I.6) up by 0.27% (up 0.28% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval) for the month, compared with a drop of 0.14% (down 0.18% unadjusted) in August.

Annual inflation jumped to 2.76% in September, from 1.97% in August. Annualized year-to-date inflation through the first nine months of the year was 3.6% adjusted, 4.4% unadjusted. The accounting for both CPI-U and PPI inflation again was suspiciously shy in the areas of energy and food inflation, and reporting of so-called "core" inflation continues to appear to be managed, staying conveniently placid for the needs of the Federal Reserve.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) (I.5) -- the substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by the manipulators as the replacement for the CPI-U, and which has no relationship whatsoever to a cost of living measure that reflects maintaining a constant standard of living -- was 2.31% in September, up from 1.86% in August.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology (I.7), annual CPI growth was about 6.1%, up from 5.4% in August, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (I.8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was roughly 10.4% in September, up from 9.9% in August. The eight levels of annual inflation, I.1 to I.8, are detailed in the table in the Alternate Reality section, along with the graph of SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation.

Next Release (November 15): Assuming some pick-up in monthly inflation for October, annual inflation should spike again and continue rising into 2008. Seasonally-adjusted, monthly CPI-U fell by 0.4% in October 2006. Accordingly, any monthly reporting above or below that for the pending release of October 2007 CPI will add or subtract directly to or from the current annual CPI-U inflation rate. Reporting risks generally favor an upside surprise to market expectations, barring targeted manipulation. The renewed upside movement in core inflation remains long overdue and is highly suspect by its absence.


Other Troubled Key Series


Federal Deficit -- The federal government's fiscal 2007 (fiscal year-end September 30th) accounting-gimmicked deficit narrowed to $162.8 billion from $248.2 billion in 2006. The U.S. Treasury's financial statement for 2007 (due mid-December), prepared based on generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), likely will show an actual deficit in excess of $4 trillion (it was $4.6 trillion in 2006, up from $3.5 trillion in 2005.

Although it lacks the accrual accounting of the GAAP numbers, the change in gross federal debt bypasses several of the reporting manipulations and is a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the official, gimmicked deficit reporting. As of fiscal year-end 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $9.007 trillion, up by $500 billion from 2006, which was up $574 billion from 2005.

General background note: The Administration and Congress continue playing bookkeeping games. Even so, the gimmicked deficit should widen in the next 12 months, as government finances begin to suffer from tax revenue losses due to the intensifying recession and relative tax receipt declines after the expiration of recent corporate tax incentives. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy's mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance -- The trend in annual growth has continued to firm (an economic negative). On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended October 20th, annual growth rose to 1.0%, versus the 17 weeks ended September 15th, where annual growth was 0.5%.

General background note: More often than not, week-to-week volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly claims numbers is due to the Labor Department's efforts to seasonally adjust these numbers around holiday periods, as seen most recently with the week that included Columbus Day. The Labor Department has demonstrated an inability to do such adjusting successfully. When the new claims series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings -- September's seasonally-adjusted monthly real earnings rose by 0.1%, following a 0.5% gain in August. Annual growth eased to 1.3% in September from 2.1% in August.

General background note: Gyrations in the poor quality of reported CPI growth account for most month-to-month volatility in this series. Adjusting for the major upside biases built into the CPI-W inflation measure used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series shows the average worker to be under severe financial stress in an ongoing recession.

Retail Sales -- September's seasonally-adjusted retail sales rose by 0.58% (up 0.68% net of revisions +/- 0.9% (95% confidence interval), after August sales gained 0.30% (previously 0.28%). Net of reported CPI inflation, September sales were up by 0.31% On a year-to-year basis, September retail sales were up by 5.01% before inflation and by 2.55% after inflation, compared with respective annual growth numbers for August of 3.80% and 1.83%. The September data appear to have been inflated in an effort to soften pressure on the Fed for another easing.

General background note: Real (inflation-adjusted) year-to-year growth in retail sales below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation) signals recession, and a signal first was generated in this business cycle back in June 2006.

Next Release (November 14): Not only should October retail sales tumble anew, below expectations, but higher October inflation should generate real contractions on a monthly and possibly also on a year-to-year basis.

Industrial Production -- Seasonally-adjusted industrial production rose by 0.1% in September, following a revised unchanged August reading (previously a monthly gain of 0.2%). Annual growth in September eased to 1.90% from August's 1.98% (previously 1.69%).

Next Release (November 16): Look for October industrial production to decline, moving into a pattern of contraction, barring data massaging. Eventually, monthly contractions in this series should become regular, with the rapidly slowing annual growth turning negative.

New Orders for Durable Goods -- For September, the usually volatile durable goods orders fell by 1.7% (down by 2.3% net of revisions), seasonally adjusted, after having fallen by 5.3% in August (previously a 4.9% monthly drop). On an annual basis, durable goods orders declined by 8.4%, showing an ongoing pattern common for this series during recessions. As discussed and graphed in this month's Opening Comments, the year-to-year change in the inflation-adjusted, six-month moving average of the series is in contraction.

The closely followed nondefense capital goods new orders rose by 4.4% for the month in September, after falling by 12.2% in August. September's annual change was a decline of 12.0%.

General background note: Durable goods orders lost its status as a solid leading economic indicator when the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders in 2002.

Trade Balance -- Again lacking credibility in an environment where the Fed would like to support the U.S. dollar any way possible, the seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for August narrowed to $57.6 billion from a revised $59.0 billion (previously $59.2 billion), despite picking up some of the recent surge in oil imports.

Games still are being played with data, and the current trade shortfall remains well shy of reality. Continued trade deficit underreporting may be intended to help the dollar some, with Bernanke abandoning the U.S. currency as Greenspan did in 1987. Historically, such as in 1987/1988, disruptions of import paper flows have been used to adjust initial trade deficit reporting. Revisions next year should tell the story.

Next Release (November 9): Underlying reality favors renewed deterioration in the monthly trade deficit, soon, possibly with the September number, barring ongoing manipulation. Reporting risk generally remains on the negative side of consensus forecasts. The months ahead should see a pattern of regularly increasing deficits that soon will be setting new records.

Consumer Confidence -- September and October consumer confidence measures have taken hits due to the mounting financial market and economic uncertainties. In September, the Conference Board Confidence measure fell 5.5% for the month, 5.8% year-to-year. The University of Michigan Sentiment measure was unchanged for September; it fell by 3.0% in October and was down 5.1% year-to-year. The October Conference Board measure will be published on October 30th.

These lagging, not leading, indicators tend to reflect the tone of the popular financial media and are showing renewed concern as to faltering business activity.

General background note: The Conference Board measure is seasonally adjusted, which can provide occasional, but significant distortion. The adjustment does not make much sense and is of suspect purpose, given that the Conference Board does not release the unadjusted number. The Michigan survey is unadjusted. How does one seasonally-adjust peoples' attitudes? Also, beware the mid-month Consumer Sentiment release from the University of Michigan. Its sampling base is so small as to be virtually valueless in terms of statistical significance.

Short-Term Credit Measures -- Patterns of annual growth in commercial borrowing have been altered by the liquidity crisis, with a sharp fall-off in annual growth for commercial paper outstanding being countered somewhat by a rise in commercial and industrial bank loans. Consumer credit numbers show no impact, so far.

For seasonally-adjusted consumer credit, which includes credit cards and auto loans, but not mortgages, annual growth held at a soft 4.8% in August, same as in July, down from 5.0% in June. In the current environment, where inflation-adjusted growth in income is not adequate to support meaningful growth in the personal consumption component of GDP, GDP growth only can come from temporary debt expansion or savings liquidation. Accordingly, stagnating growth in consumer debt expansion keeps an ongoing constraint on economic growth.

Commercial borrowing growth varied sharply, again, with annual growth in September commercial paper outstanding showing a 0.8% decline, down from a 4.7% gain in August and a 21.7% gain in July. In contrast, annual growth in commercial and industrial loans rose to 16.5%, after 12.9% annual gains in both August and July. The problems in commercial paper, though somewhat stabilized, will place a dent in broad business activity.

Producer Price Index (PPI) -- The seasonally-adjusted September finished goods PPI rose by 1.1% (1.0% unadjusted) after declining by 1.4% (down by 1.4% unadjusted) in August. Annual PPI in September doubled to 4.4% from August's 2.2%. Seasonally-adjusted intermediate and crude goods rose 0.4% and 0.1%, respectively for the month, after declining by 1.2% and 2.0% in August.

Next Release (November 14): Despite the regular random volatility of the monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months generally should come in above market expectations, partially as a result of the rapid rise in the price of oil. As with the CPI, the core PPI inflation rate still is long overdue for an upside surprise, but such may be further delayed by the financial-market needs of the battered Federal Reserve.


Better-Quality Numbers


General background note: The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders -- Continuing to catch up and maintaining its trend toward showing a recession in manufacturing, the overall September ISM manufacturing eased to 52.0 from 52.9 in August, with the September employment index notching to 51.7 from 51.3 in August. Accelerating decline in the broad series is a good bet in the next several months, based on further declines in annual activity in a variety of underlying series.

The September new orders index dropped to 53.4 from 55.3 in August. Seasonal-factor distortions, which have been present, usually are overcome by viewing the series using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the September new orders index was up by just 1.1% versus a 3.3% gain in August.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading below 50.0 indicates contracting new orders. The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004. As an SGS early warning indicator of a major economic shift, the new orders measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating a signal of pending recession.

Service Sector Index. The service-sector ISM index does not have much meaning related to overall business activity, since new order activity at law firms, hospitals or fast-food restaurants has little obvious relationship to broad economic activity. That said, the overall September services sector index fell to 54.8 from August's 55.8. Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. The September employment component rebounded to 52.7 from 47.9 in August. The prices paid component is covered in the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) -- The Conference Board reported that seasonally-adjusted help-wanted advertising bottom bounced in September after hitting a five decade low in August. September's reading of 24.0 notched up from August's 23.0 nadir. Even allowing for the advertising volume lost to the Internet in recent years, the current weakness is severe enough to signal a deepening problem in the employment sector. The September number was down 17.2% from the year before, versus a 23.3% annual contraction August.

Viewed on a three-month moving-average basis, September's year-to-year contraction was 20.0% versus 20.4% in August. The series still indicates rapidly deteriorating employment conditions. Where the index never recovered from the 2000/2001 recession, its renewed and ongoing plunge has signaled a new and rapid contraction in economic activity. Continued deterioration remains likely in the months ahead.

Housing Starts -- September's seasonally-adjusted housing starts fell by 10.2% +/- 10% (95% confidence interval) for the month, after a decline of 3.2% (was 2.6%) in August. As discussed and graphed in this month's Opening Comments, September's level was down 30.8% from the year before, beginning to reflect the impact of the subprime mortgage crisis and suggestive of an intensifying recession.

Confirming ongoing weakness in the housing sector, year-to-year contractions in September were 25.9% for building permits, 19.1% for existing home sales and 23.3% for new home sales. The new home sales number reflected an extraordinary 7.5% down revision to the prior month's level, which had the effect of making the monthly change look like a gain.

Inflation Indicators

Money Supply -- The SGS Ongoing M3 estimate of annual growth for September showed annual growth at 14.7%, up from 13.9% in August. The September growth rate is the highest since November 1971, two months after Richard Nixon closed the gold window. The current pace of growth has disturbing inflationary implications.

Some subscribers have asked where the M3 growth is being seen. Some growth reflects the shifting of certain commercial paper funding to commercial bank loans (see the Short-Term Credit section). Some reflects movement out of M2 into M3 accounts. Some reflects liquefaction actions by the Fed, including handling other foreign central bank investments in U.S. Treasuries.

Keep in mind that our numbers reflect year-to-year changes and may not necessarily mirror not seasonally adjusted week-to-week activity by the Fed. Among the M3-related components, as reported by the Fed, seasonally-adjusted large time deposits at commercial banks have risen by roughly $95 billion in the most recent four weeks, where institutional money funds have picked up about $70 billion in the same period.



General background note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the SGS Ongoing M3 estimates, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS for methodology. The indicated M3 levels below are our best estimate and are provided at specific subscriber request. Keep in mind that regular revisions in the related Fed series affect historical M3. Usually, annual growth rates hold, although levels may shift a little. We have not attempted, nor do we plan to recreate a revised historical series for an M3 monthly-average level going back in time. The purpose of the SGS series was and is to provide monthly estimates of ongoing annual M3 growth. We are comfortable with those numbers and that our estimated monthly growth rates are reasonably close to what the Fed would be reporting, if it still reported M3. With those caveats on the table, here are the monthly-average levels for M3:

            Shadow Government Statistics Ongoing M3
  (Estimated seasonally-adjusted monthly average, $ Trillions)


Feb 06 10.349 Jul 06 10.643 Dec 06 11.228 May 07 11.877 Mar 10.366 Aug 10.750 Jan 07 11.318 Jun 11.930 Apr 10.436 Sep 10.867 Feb 11.419 Jul 12.014 May 10.509 Oct 11.002 Mar 11.563 Aug 12.243 Jun 10.565 Nov 11.112 Apr 11.738 Sep 12.461

September’s preliminary estimate is based on full-month reporting. NOTE OF CAUTION: The estimates of monthly levels best are used for comparisons with other dollar amounts, such as nominal GDP. While the estimates are based on seasonally-adjusted Federal Reserve data, great significance cannot be read into the month-to-month changes, as was the case when the Fed published the series. The most meaningful way to view the data is in terms of year-to-year change.


Based on the September data, annual growth for monthly M1 turned to the plus side by 0.40%, after being down by 0.15% in August, while September M2 annual growth rose to 6.72% from 6.58% in July.

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices -- The September prices paid indices were mixed and still not reflective of the ongoing surge in oil prices, which should show up in the next month or so. The levels, however, remain high and in inflation territory, suggestive of ongoing inflation issues in both purchasing managers surveys.

On the manufacturing side, the September price index eased to 59.0 from 63.0 in August. On a three-month moving average basis, September's annual change was down by 29.1%, following August's 14.0% drop. The manufacturing price indicator is not seasonally adjusted and, therefore, is a generally the better indicator of pricing activity.

On the non-manufacturing side, the seasonally-adjusted September prices diffusion index jumped to 66.1 from August's 58.6. On a three-month moving-average basis September's annual change was a decline of 8.0% after August's 14.3% drop.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflationary pressure. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising prices.

Oil Prices -- For the month of September, the monthly-average West Texas Intermediate spot price (Department of Energy) jumped 10.4% from August to a record high $79.93 per barrel. Against last year's average, September's level was up by 25.1%, compared with August's 0.9% annual decline.

As of Friday, October 26th, West Texas Intermediate closed at another all-time high of $91.87. Price movement remains highly volatile, but broadly is trending higher, and should continue setting new daily record highs, with $100 oil being widely touted in the market place. Even current levels, however, are an absolute disaster for pending U.S. inflation. Regardless of any near-term price swings, meaningful upside risks to oil prices remain in place, both from the intensifying dollar weakness and related OPEC rumblings, and from ever-volatile Middle Eastern political tensions.

General background note: Whether from supply and demand, geo-political or currency pressures, oil prices will remain at highly inflationary levels and will continue as a major contributing factor to U.S. inflation woes. Historically high oil prices still are working their way through all levels of U.S. economic activity, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. These broad inflationary pressures will remain intact despite any near-term oil price volatility. Although these pressures may be slow to surface in government reporting of the so-called "core" inflation measures, they will surface.


Reporting/Market Focus (October 2007) -- Some Perspective on Historical U.S. Economic Downturns and Financial Market Panics


The table that follows is an updated version of one I published 15 years ago, covering the history of economic downturns in the United States. It also covers most of the notable financial panics, which also were associated with business contractions. The notable exception is the 1987 stock market crash, discussed later.

Prior to the Great Depression, economic contractions generally were called depressions. Recession, which is the down-phase of a depression, is the euphemism for an economic downturn, which came into use post-World War II.

The main body of the table represents about as close to an official or consensus picture that I can put together. The second portion of the table gives a slightly different SGS Version.

   United States of America - Economic Contractions, 1784 to Date


President Peak-to-Trough Months Change Nature Background When It Began Of Cycle In GNP


Pre- 1784 to 1789 48 Severe Str/Liq Post-Revolution. No Constitution central authority, lack of sound money, excessive trade deficit.

Jefferson 1807 to 1810 24 -20% Exg European war blocked shipments of goods to the United States.

Madison 1815 to 1821 60 -15% Str/Liq Post-War of 1812. Debt excesses led to currency inflation, then debt/liquidity collapse and severe deflation.

Van Buren 1837 to 1843 60 -25% Liq/Str Excess debt and currency inflation fueled by speculative lending out of England. U.S. crop failure and English banking crisis led to debt and liquidity collapse.

Polk 1847 to 1848 12 -4% Exg Post-Mexican War. Effect of severe European depression was offset partially by raised expectations from discovery of gold in California.

Buchanan-I Jun 1857 18 -12% Liq Banking crisis and to Dec 1858 liquidity collapse.

Buchanan-II Oct 1860 8 -10% Str Tied to secession to June 1861 movement.

Lincoln/ Apr 1865 32 -13% Str/Liq Post-Civil War. Retire- A Johnson to Dec 1867 ment of greenbacks and English Panic.

Grant-I June 1869 18 -5% Str/Liq Secondary downturn to Dec 1870 following Civil War. "Black Friday" panic from Gould & Fiske's efforts to corner the gold market.

Grant-II Oct 1873 65 -15% Liq/Str Over-building of rail- to Mar 1879 roads. Over-extension of debt. Foreign funding collapse with Vienna Panic of 1873. Collapse of savings banks. Fear of currency debasement.

Arthur Mar 1882 38 -12% Liq French Panic of 1882. to May 1885 Collapse of commodity prices. Silver and stock panics of 1884.

Cleveland-I Mar 1887 13 -4% Liq Government paid off to Apr 1888 debt, forcing reduction of circulating banknotes.

B Harrison Jul 1890 10 -3% Liq Baring Panic in England to May 1891 forced liquidation of foreign holdings of U.S. stocks.

Cleveland-II Jan 1893 17 -16% Liq Failure of Reading to Jun 1894 Railroad triggered panic.

Cleveland-III Dec 1895 18 -15% Liq/Inv Lack of confidence in to Jun 1897 currency system.

McKinley Jun 1899 18 -4% Liq German stock market panic to Dec 1900 of 1899.

T Roosevelt-I Sep 1902 23 -10% Liq/Inv Temporary layoffs. "Rich to Aug 1904 Man's Panic" of 1903/04.

T Roosevelt-II May 1907 13 -15% Liq/Exg 1906 San Francisco earth- to Jun 1908 quake. March 1907 panic and banking crisis.

Taft Jan 1910 24 -5% Exg Increasing government to Jan 1912 regulation of railroads and trusts.

Wilson-I Jan 1913 23 -13% Exg/Liq Collapse of foreign to Dec 1914 markets, loss of foreign liquidity as World War I broke out. Stock market closed.

Wilson-II Aug 1918 7 -5% Str Post-World War I. Over- to Mar 1919 production of war goods, not enough jobs.

Wilson-III Jan 1920 18 -9% Inv/Liq Commodity inflation/ to Jul 1921 deflation, sugar scandal.

Harding May 1923 14 -4% Inv Inventory lay-offs. to Jul 1924

Coolidge Oct 1926 13 -2% Inv/Liq Real estate bust. Bank to Nov 1927 failures. Automobile over-production.

Hoover Aug 1929 43 -33% Str/Liq The Great Depression. to Mar 1933 Collapse of debt excesses from 1920s and liquidity crisis. Stock crash. Banking collapse. Industrial restructuring as long-term aftershock of Panama Canal construction and World War I. Permanent job loss. Overbuilding. Extreme income variance.

F Roosevelt-I May 1937 13 -18% Str Second-dip of Great to Jun 1938 Depression.

F Roosevelt-II Feb 1945 8 -21% Str Post-World War II. Start to Oct 1945 of conversion to peace- time economy.

Truman Nov 1948 11 -2% Inv Residual post-war to Oct 1949 reconversion, recoil from excess post-war production.

Eisenhower-I Jul 1953 10 -3% Inv Post-Korean War. to May 1954

Eisenhower-II Aug 1957 8 -3% Str Delayed post-war downturn to Apr 1958 ended with Sputnik.

Eisenhower-III Apr 1960 10 -1% Inv/Exg 105-day steel strike. to Feb 1961

Nixon-I Dec 1969 11 -1% Inv Cyclical blow-off of to Nov 1970 "Guns and Butter" era.

Nixon-II Nov 1973 16 -5% Str/Exg Post-Vietnam War. Oil to Mar 1975 Liq embargo. Aftermath of wage and price controls and U.S. dollar flotation.

Carter Jan 1980 6 -3% Liq Disruption from credit to Jul 1980 card controls.

Reagan Jul 1981 16 -3% Inv Inflationary environment to Nov 1982 that led to high interest rates.

Bush Sr Jul 1990 8 -2% Inv/Exg Started with Iraq invading to Mar 1991 Kuwait and ended with Gulf War I, as consumer pulled back and then returned. (See SGS Version: Bush Sr.)

Bush Jr Mar 2001 8 less Liq Driven by collapse in to Nov 2001 than stock-market bubble. 1% (See SGS Version: con- Clinton-II.) trac- tion

SGS VERSION Since 1981

Reagan-I Jul 1981 16 -3% Inv Inflationary environment to Nov 1982 that led to high interest rates.

Reagan-II 4th-Q 1986 11 -1% Str/Liq (See text.) to 3rd-Q 1987

Bush Sr 4th-Q 1989 42 -4% Str/Liq (See text.) to 2nd-Q 1993

Clinton-I 1995 9 -1% Str (See text.)

Clinton-II 3rd-Qtr 2000 36 -4% Liq/Str (See text.) to 3rd-Qtr 2003

Bush Jr 3rd-Qtr 2006 12+ -4%+ Str/Liq (See text.) to (ongoing)
________________________

Notes:

All estimates of timing and depth are approximate. GNP is used throughout for consistency; GDP is GNP net of international transactions in factor income (interest and dividends).

Nature of contraction: Structural (Str), Liquidity (Liq), Inventory (Inv), Exogenous (Exg).

Various sources have been combined:

Peak-to-Trough: Before 1857 - Business Cycles and Forecasting, Elmer C. Bratt (Bratt), 1940. 1857 and after - National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) as published on their Web site (http://www.nber.org/cycles.html/).

Months: Before 1857 - Bratt, 1857 and after - NBER.

Depth, Nature and Background: Percentage change shown is the approximate peak-to-tough decline in economic activity as measured in constant-dollar GNP. 1784 to 1937 - Bratt, 1790 to 1987 - Ameritrust, Cleveland, Ohio (estimated as a percent variation from a projected economic trend line), 1867 to 1960 - A monetary History of the United States, 1867-1960, Milton Friedman and Anna Jacobson Schwartz, 1963, 1900 to 1995 - Albert Sindlinger, Sindlinger & Co., Wallingford, Pennsylvania, 1920 to 1993 - Center for International Business Cycle Research, Columbia Business School, 1929 to date - Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), full period and SGS Version - www.shadowstats.com.


Structural Changes and Liquidity Problems Dominate Economic History. Major economic and financial market upheavals usually reflect a confluence of factors. Leading up to the Great Depression, for example, the U.S. manufacturing sector had been in contraction as result of the loss of production after World War I and after the completion of the Panama Canal. The U.S. economy already was in contraction prior to the 1929 stock crash, but it was the liquidity implosion that followed the financial panic, combined with the structural change in the economy, which enabled the scope and depth of the Great Depression.

Starting with the loss of the U.S. manufacturing base to offshore facilities in the 1970s, the U.S. economy began a long-term structural change that still is ongoing and that has provided a base for many of the economic difficulties since the 1980s. With a confluence of factors ranging from accelerating dollar weakness to a period of economic weakness, the issues came to a head with the stock-market crash and liquidity panic of 1987. Alan Greenspan was the new Fed chairman, and he decided to abandon any support of the U.S. dollar in favor of stabilizing and salvaging the domestic financial markets and financial services industry.

Gerald Corrigan of the New York Fed, the entity that usually handled the various financial markets for the Federal Reserve Board, led the initial charge. Though never officially confirmed, the New York Fed worked an arrangement with a major New York investment house to buy stock futures on the second day of the stock crash, with the effect of rallying the market and bringing it back to life. Out of this action evolved the present day Plunge Protection Team, which still is active in managing unstable or disorderly financial market conditions.

The Fed did everything it could to forestall a further day of reckoning that loomed because of ever increasing trade and fiscal imbalances, along with an increasing dependence on foreign capital for the liquidity of the U.S. markets. Due to Greenspan papering over these issues, the same problems now are at uncontainable levels that threaten basic stability of the U.S. financial system and eventually the very existence of the U.S. dollar as the world’s reserve currency.

As the structural economic changes intensified, the average U.S. consumer found it increasingly difficult to make ends meet. An additional family member might end up working, but even that failed to keep the average household ahead of inflation. The difference in consumption was made up in debt expansion, which ultimately is an unsustainable process.

Without sustained growth in real (inflation-adjusted) income, there cannot be sustained economic growth. Aware of that, Greenspan helped to fuel a stock-market bubble, which had the short-lived result of fueling wealth-effect consumption. When that bubble burst and helped to trigger the 2000 recession, he tried the same gimmick with home prices. Such enabled increased home equity lending, but the bubble burst there now is exacerbating the current downturn.

The problem now is that there is little further the Fed can gimmick. A long-delayed day of reckoning is nearing, and its impact on the financial markets and economic activity will not be pretty.


Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for November -- Home Sales


With home sales and related construction activity such a hot topic in the current environment, the various related economic series will be revisited and the developing circumstance assessed.

___________________________________________


PLEASE NOTE: The Hyperinflation Summary Report still is pending and may be released in conjunction with the November newsletter. The November "Shadow Government Statistics" newsletter currently is targeted for the week of November 12th, likely a day or two after the CPI release on November 15th. Postings on the Web site of monthly newsletters, interim Flash Updates and Alerts are advised immediately by e-mail.

OCCASIONALLY, BRIEF UPDATES ARE COMMUNICATED DIRECTLY BY E-MAIL. IF YOU ARE NOT RECEIVING E-MAIL COMMUNICATIONS FROM US, PLEASE LET US KNOW at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or by using the Feedback option on www.shadowstats.com.

Flash Update

Sunday, October 21st, 2007
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

October 21, 2007

__________

Watch the Greenback!

__________


PLEASE NOTE: Due to my being somewhat under the weather, the October newsletter most likely will be posted on Wednesday. This Flash Update reviews a couple of interesting developments in advance of the full monthly missive. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

Last week saw some tumbling in stock prices and the foreign exchange value of the U.S. dollar, along with ongoing rallies in gold and oil prices. Those general trends still have substantial ways to go, but the dollar, gold and oil prices all are at relative levels that traditionally might invite heavy intervention by central governments or central banks. The rapidly weakening U.S. currency and successive record highs in the oil price promise a sharp pick-up in inflation, a mounting outflow of investment funds from the U.S. financial system and a resulting intensification of the still-festering liquidity crisis. The movement in gold reflects the increasing awareness of these problems by global investors.

The G7 communiqué offered an opportunity for the major Western powers to jawbone the circumstance, but none was taken. To the extent that any overt or covert intervention surfaces in the next several trading days, its impact should prove fleeting, as usually is the case. Although interventions often have been mounted to burn speculators, others have been designed to keep changes orderly. The market movements here have been broad, driven by extraordinarily strong underlying fundamentals, and likely already have been tempered by a certain amount of covert central bank activity.

Market hypesters and tipsters now are zeroing in on the next FOMC meeting, and a split in consensus -- whether or not the Fed will ease on October 31st -- is in play, with more than the usual nonsense being tossed around. For example, new claims for unemployment insurance rose from 309,000 in the week ended October 6th to 337,000 in the week ended October 13th. The big gain was hyped as a sign of recession and imminent Fed easing. Anyone who follows those numbers knows that the change in any given week is meaningless, and that big changes are likely in weeks containing holidays, because the Department of Labor cannot properly seasonally adjust for such a circumstance. The October 13th week included Columbus Day, when a number of state unemployment offices were closed.

As has been the case for some time, the Fed faces conflicting economic and inflation pressures. Not only is the economy going into recession, but it already is in one. The U.S. economy also faces significant inflation pressures from oil and food prices, a weakening dollar and explosive money supply growth. Yet, lower rates will do little to stimulate the economy, and higher rates will do little to counter inflation that, so far, primarily is driven by a commodity (oil) supply distortion.

The U.S. dollar's behavior remains the basic determinant of both the near-term and long-term outlooks for the markets. The primary concern for the Fed has to be the prevention of a financial-market meltdown, and the risks of such an event are the highest since before the 1987 crash. The fundamentals underlying those risks, ranging from extreme systemic leverage to extreme U.S. financial market dependence on foreign capital for liquidity, are unparalleled on an historic basis. Keeping investors in the greenback is key to maintaining market stability. Accordingly, rather than giving Wall Street another quick fix with a rate cut, my betting is that Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke will hold off on further easing on October 31st, with an eye to helping stabilize the U.S. dollar.

Whatever Fed action looms, the market expectations likely will be prepped in advance, so as to minimize any negative financial-market responses. Unfortunately for Mr. Bernanke, he is in a no-win situation, where the underlying problems should have been addressed 20 years ago, not patched over with successive monetary or financial-market gimmicks. Accordingly, I would place the odds on the Bernanke-Paulson market salvation team avoiding a massive financial-market catastrophe within the next year at well below 20%. Even now, severe financial-market turmoil could start at any time, with little warning, likely in tandem with heavy selling of the U.S. dollar.

Full details will follow in the October SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


The target for the October SGS has been moved to Wednesday, October 24th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Wednesday, October 17th, 2007


JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

October 17, 2007

__________

Annual CPI Jumps to 2.8% in September, Pre-Clinton at 6.1%, SGS Alternate at 10.4%

__________


PLEASE NOTE: Following is a brief summary of recent data releases, in advance of the full monthly newsletter. The SGS-Alternate CPI for September has been updated on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

The seasonally-adjusted September CPI-U rose 0.27% +/- 0.12% (0.28% unadjusted), following August's adjusted 0.14% (0.18%) decline. Annual CPI inflation for September jumped to 2.76% from 1.97% in August. Annualized year-to-date CPI inflation is 3.6% seasonally adjusted, 4.4% unadjusted.

The annual Pre-Clinton CPI inflation (based on 1990 methodologies) rose to an estimated 6.1% in September from 5.4% in August, while the annual SGS-Alternate CPI (based on 1980 methodologies) rose to an estimated 10.4% in September from 9.9% in August.

The substitution-based C-CPI-U, which has no relationship to the cost of living needed to maintain a constant standard of living, showed annual inflation in September of 2.31%, up from 1.86% in August.

With oil and food prices generally and persistently trending higher, the concept of looking at "core" inflation on an annual basis remains meaningless, except for those at the Fed, in the Administration and on Wall Street who continue trying to mislead the public and investors as to actual inflationary pressures. Where oil prices, in particular, eventually permeate most areas of business costs, the continued reporting of no pick-up in core inflation strongly suggests that the data are being managed so as to generate such a result.

The housing starts growth rates (down 10.2% for September and down 30.8% for the year) were somewhat below expectations, but could not be too surprising, given the uncertain impact of the magnitude of the mortgage market upheaval last month. The 0.1% gain in September industrial production was in line with consensus, although there were some net downward revisions to prior production history.

Full details will follow in the October SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


The October SGS is targeted for over the coming weekend/Monday, so as to include today's September CPI and housing starts data. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Sunday, October 14th, 2007


JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

October 14, 2007

__________

Gimmicked Data Appear Aimed at Reducing Pressures on Fed for Another Easing

September M3 Annual Growth Hit 14.7%

Watch Out for CPI Annual Inflation Surge!

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Ongoing M3 for September (based on full-month reporting and recent data revisions) has been updated on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

Market Fears Drive Fed Activity and Economic Reporting


Twenty years ago this coming week, a new Federal Reserve Chairman faced a financial panic that included the worst one-day stock market crash ever seen in the U.S. markets. Alan Greenspan had become the U.S. central banker in August of 1987, raised rates in September in an effort to bolster the flailing U.S. dollar, and the markets crashed in October. The crash was due to an extraordinary confluence of factors, some of which were of Mr. Greenspan's making, some of which were of Treasury Secretary James Baker's making, and some of which came to a head after festering for decades. Whatever one may think of the former Fed chairman, his actions following the panic did help to contain it and likely side-stepped a total financial-market meltdown, at that time. As will be discussed in greater detail in the upcoming October SGS, those same actions, however, also underlie and ultimately set-up the even greater crisis faced by current Fed Chairman Ben Bernanke. The roiling of the U.S. dollar market following the Fed's recent easing is why the Fed now likely will try to avoid further interest rate cuts. At risk is the financial-market meltdown that Alan Greenspan carried for so long in his nightmares. The liquidity crisis still is unfolding, the economy remains in a deteriorating inflationary recession, and the Fed has few if any viable options open to it. One tool remaining in the Fed's and Administration's arsenal of financial market manipulating gadgets, however, is the rigging of key economic reporting. It was used back in 1987; it appears to be in play, today.

With this circumstance in mind, last week's Flash Update indicated, "Underlying reality would suggest a larger trade deficit (Thursday, October 11), a weaker retail sales change (Friday, October 12), and a stronger PPI (Friday, October 12) than consensus expectations. If the Fed's concerns in the still unfolding liquidity crisis indeed are tempered by fears of U.S. dollar dumping, both the trade and retail data will be particularly vulnerable to 'positive' massaging." That appears to be what happened.

When the liquidity crisis hit in August and September, it acted as a stall mechanism in already slowing economic activity. Accordingly, it is incredible (as in unbelievable) that reported economic activity jumped in the early reporting of that period. What seems to be at work here is an effort to remove pressure from the U.S. central bank to ease at the end of this month and to reinforce the relative positive impact of such inaction on the value of the U.S. dollar (albeit short-lived). Look for eventual revisions to the September jobs data and retail sales that will reflect more accurately at least a brief acceleration to the downside in business activity.

Seasonally-adjusted September retail sales gained 0.6% (0.8% net of revisions) +/- 0.6% for the month, after a 0.3% monthly gain in August. Underlying reality suggests a possible upside surprise to the September CPI, which could wipe out much of the reported sales gain, after adjustment for pricing increases. Year-to-year change in September retail sales was a gain of 5.0% versus 3.8% in August, also before any inflation adjustments.

Further lacking credibility was the monthly trade deficit report. The seasonally-adjusted August shortfall of $57.6 billion was down from July’s revised $59.0 billion (previously reported at $59.2 billion), despite surging oil imports (both in terms of price and physical volume). The average crude oil price in August was up to $68.09 per barrel, from $65.56 in July, still somewhat shy of current prices that are well over $80 per barrel. These recent "too good to be true" reports will get a more detailed review in the upcoming newsletter.

On the inflation front, the seasonally-adjusted September PPI rose by a stronger than expected 1.1% (1.0% unadjusted) for the month, against a 1.4% contraction for August. Annual PPI inflation jumped to 4.4% in September, up from 2.2% in August.

As to the happy news that the gimmicked federal deficit for fiscal year 2007 was just $162.8 billion, versus $248.2 billion in 2006, keep in mind that the gross federal debt rose by $500.7 billion in the same fiscal 2007, to $9.008 trillion, and that the financial statements for the year will show a deficit based on generally accepted accounting principles likely well in excess of $4 trillion, come mid-December. Then there was September M3.

Broad Money Growth Hit 14.7% in September. Based on the full month's reporting of underlying data and the Federal Reserve's recent revisions to same, estimated year-to-year growth in the SGS-Ongoing M3 measure rose to 14.7% in September, up from 13.9% in August. The reading, indeed, was at its highest since November 1971, in the wake of the U.S. dollar crisis, when President Richard Nixon closed the gold window.

For those who follow the SGS estimates of M3 level, here are the updated and revised, seasonally-adjusted monthly averages since February 2006. They are subject to all the caveats published along with them in the regular monthly newsletter. In trillions of dollars:

Feb 06  10.349    Jul 06  10.643    Dec 06  11.228    May 07  11.877
Mar     10.366    Aug     10.750    Jan 07  11.318    Jun     11.930
Apr     10.436    Sep     10.867    Feb     11.419    Jul     12.014
May     10.509    Oct     11.002    Mar     11.563    Aug     12.243
Jun     10.565    Nov     11.112    Apr     11.738    Sep     12.461


Annual M2 growth for September was 6.7%, up from 6.6% in August, with M1 up by 0.3% on an annual basis. The M1 growth was against a 0.2% contraction in August and was the first annual gain seen since July 2006.

Week Ahead. Underlying reality again would suggest weaker than consensus results for industrial production (Tuesday, October 16) and for housing starts/building permits (Wednesday, October 17), and a stronger CPI (Wednesday, October 17). With the vulnerability of the U.S. dollar to massive selling pressure apparently moving more toward center stage of Fed concerns, however, both the industrial production and housing numbers will be particularly vulnerable to "positive" massaging.

September CPI Caution Consensus forecasts are for seasonally-adjusted month-to-month CPI inflation of 0.2% for September. A variety of factors, including gasoline sales in the retail sales report, suggests a higher number. Regardless, the monthly CPI dropped 0.5% in September 2006. That means that a consensus monthly gain of 0.2% would add roughly 0.7% to the annual CPI inflation, taking it from 2.1% in August to 2.8% or so in September, a 33% increase, depending on the actual September monthly gain.

Further details will follow in the October SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


The October SGS is targeted for late this week, or over next weekend, so as to include the September CPI and housing starts data. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Sunday, October 7th, 2007
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

October 7, 2007

__________

Market Mania Fueled by Data Touts

M3 Annual Growth Highest Since November 1971

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Ongoing M3 for September (based on 24 days of 30 days of reporting) has been updated on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

A Day at the Races


Some years back, I would go to the horse races at Garden State Park, along with my father -- who loved the horses -- and our favorite restaurateur, a wonderful character known as Steve. Steve always bet on tips. He'd get a tip from the valet parking attendant, from the fellow who sold pencils with the racing programs, from the headwaiter servicing the parterre boxes, etc. I remember once Steve having bought $100-win tickets on five horses (they were not long shots) in a seven horse race, and he lost. He also, on occasion, had some big winners, but over time, the races were a money-losing proposition for Steve. My father's selections were based on analyzing a number of factors ranging from past performance to whether the horse was foaming at a certain part of its anatomy; he also looked at the picks of various touts he respected to see what he might be missing. Occasionally, he had some big winners, and he tended to come out a little ahead over time.

Listening to the daily Wall Street touts, who attempt to hype stock market-mania based on the latest economic data, brings Steve and his horse-race betting to mind. In the case of the monthly payroll report, the race does get fixed, on occasion, while a great deal of the touting takes place after the race already has been run. What is remarkable is that this particular number, if honestly reported, is random in nature and of no significance until it exceeds 129,000 as either a gain or a loss. Even then, it is in the wrong direction 1-in-20 times, based on the government's 95% confidence interval.

A potentially serious issue is that the Bureau of Labor Statistics can bring in the monthly payroll gain anywhere it wants to, and the Administration knows that a number in a certain range -- that can be dismissed as statistical noise or revised away the next month -- will move the markets as effectively as a Federal Reserve policy action. Accordingly, when I suggested last month that the 4,000 jobs loss reported for August was designed to help push the Fed into its easing, one indeed has to wonder what is going on in the background, when August revised to an 89,000 jobs gain in the September report. One might read the current September 110,000 jobs "gain" as a sign the Fed can hold steady at the next meeting, rather than taking action that would tumble the U.S. dollar further. Then, again, if the numbers are honest, which I do not believe, these speculations are just over random statistical noise.

With stock indices at historic highs, the equity markets look as good to me now as Steve's betting on five horses to win in a seven a horse race: not much likely upside potential and some very meaningful downside potential.

That said, the BLS reported seasonally-adjusted September payrolls up by 110,000 (228,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000, with August gaining 89,000 in revision, after an initial report of a 4,000 jobs loss. Unadjusted year-to-year payroll growth slowed to 1.19% in September, from 1.23% in August. Consistent adjusted and unadjusted annual growth rates, in combination with the massive revision, suggest September would have shown a gain of 142,000. Again, with monthly seasonal factors being readjusted each month as needed, the BLS can generate any desired result.

These data were released along with a Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) announcement that the next benchmark revision will show that unadjusted March 2007 payrolls were overstated by roughly 297,000 jobs. That means the currently reported levels will be revised downward by perhaps 500,000 as the BLS models readjust history.

In the household survey, which counts the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs (including those of multiple job holders), seasonally adjusted employment rose by 463,000 in September, following a 316,000 employment decline in August. The seasonally-adjusted September U.3 unemployment rate was reported at 4.70% +/- 0.23%, up from 4.64% in August, while unadjusted U.3 eased to 4.5% in September from 4.6% in August. The broader U.8 rate held at an adjusted 8.4% in September and fell to 8.0% from 8.4%, unadjusted. Net of the "discouraged workers" defined out of existence during the Clinton Administration, the actual unemployment rate continues to run around 12%.

Keep in mind that the payroll data have been boosted by 1,118,000 jobs in the last 12 months by the addition of regular bias factors, a.k.a. the birth/death model. September's bias was to the upside by 17,000 jobs. This bias system never has been adjusted to handle a recession, where the biases likely would turn negative. Accordingly, in the current recessionary environment, the payroll data are being significantly overstated versus underlying reality.

As noted on Friday, these jobs data from the BLS are nearly worthless as economic indicators and remain highly suspect, given the global financial markets in ongoing crisis and given the positive ratings of U.S. President and Congress hitting historic nadirs. The reported numbers continued to run counter to better-quality employment indicators such as new claims for unemployment and the collapsing help-wanted advertising index.

M3 Growth at 36-Year High. Based on roughly 24 days of 30 days of reporting, the preliminary estimate of year-to-year growth in the SGS-Ongoing M3 measure hit 14.6%, up from 13.9% in August, and at the highest reading since November 1971. That was two months after Richard Nixon closed the gold window in August of 1971.

Annual M2 growth for September was about 6.8%, up from 6.7%. Part of the relative gain in M3 last month appears to be a movement of cash into larger time deposits and such, as market perceptions have shifted towards a further easing by the Fed. The SGS estimate will be finalized after next week's reporting.

Week ahead. Underlying reality would suggest a larger trade deficit (Thursday, October 11), a weaker retail sales change (Friday, October 12), and a stronger PPI (Friday, October 12) than consensus expectations. If the Fed's concerns in the still unfolding liquidity crisis indeed are tempered by fears of U.S. dollar dumping, both the trade and retail data will be particularly vulnerable to "positive" massaging.

Further details will follow in the October SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


The October SGS is targeted for posting during the week of October 15th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Friday, October 5th, 2007
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

October 5, 2007

__________

September Jobs Data Cannot Be Believed

September M3 Annual Growth Likely to Top 14.5%

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Alternate GDP and the monthly SGS Financial-Weighted Dollar tables and graphs have been updated on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

This morning's update offers a couple of thoughts on the September jobs report. A full Flash Update with more detailed analysis will follow over the weekend.

The nonsensical 110,000 +/- 129,000 surge in seasonally-adjusted September payrolls, was a gain of 228,000 net of prior-period revisions. The reported monthly gain still was statistically indistinguishable from an outright monthly contraction. The August change was revised from an initial loss of 4,000 jobs to a gain of 89,000.

These data were released in the context of a Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) announcement that the next benchmark revision will show that March 2007 payrolls were overstated by roughly 297,000 jobs.

The seasonally-adjusted September U.3 unemployment rate was reported at 4.70% +/- 0.23%, up from 4.64% in August.

These data from the BLS are nearly worthless as economic indicators and are highly suspect, given the global financial markets in ongoing crisis and given the positive ratings of U.S. President and Congress hitting historic nadirs. The reported numbers continue to run counter to better-quality employment indicators such as new claims for unemployment and the collapsing help-wanted advertising index.

On the inflation front, based on early data, September's SGS Ongoing M3 appears likely to show annual growth of 14.5% to 14.6%, up from 14.0% in August.

Further detail will follow this weekend and in the October SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


The October SGS is targeted for posting during the week of October 15th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

September 2007 Edition

Sunday, September 23rd, 2007


JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Issue Number 35

September 23, 2007

__________

Bernanke's Tap Dancing on the Dollar Landmine Triggers Detonation

The Dollar Matters, and Its Sell-Off Is Just Beginning

It's Inflation and[ Recession, Not Inflation or Recession

Manic Stocks Ignore Dollar, Oil and Gold

Key Economic Reporting Massaged as Liquidity Crisis Deepens

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The August CPI and SGS-Alternate CPI measures have been posted to the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com.

Over the next week or so, I shall be relocating from Whitehouse Station, New Jersey to Oakland, California. Once set up in Oakland (anticipated for early in the first week of October), the new telephone number and other particulars, etc., will be advised in a separate e-mail.

Along with the new circumstance will come new features for your SGS subscription. It is planned for the October monthly newsletter to be available in PDF format for easier viewing and printing, in addition to the current html format. Updates on economic and market developments will become more frequent, so as to be more timely in addressing current "hot topics." Again, many thanks to all for your ongoing business, support and interest.

Best wishes, John Williams



OVERVIEW -- OPENING COMMENTS

The Problems Are Just Beginning


An old-fashioned bank run in the U.K.? The U.S. and Canadian dollars at parity? Saudi Arabia considering a break with the U.S. Dollar? If you tap dance on a land mine long enough, odds favor an unhappy ending. A good dancer can buy time, and Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke bought about as much time as he could, having been set up by his predecessor with irreconcilable economic and financial problems. Bernanke might have forestalled the unfolding dollar crisis a bit further with just a 25 basis point cut in the fed funds target, but the 50 basis point move opened Bernanke's Box of U.S. Dollar and inflation unthinkables. The reality is ugly, and like Pandora -- who opened a jar unleashing a variety of evils upon the world -- Mr. Bernanke will find it very difficult, if not impossible, to push his newly activated nightmares back into the box. With both recession and inflation woes in place for some time, the inflationary recession is deteriorating at an accelerating pace, exacerbated, not triggered, by the still unfolding systemic liquidity crisis.

That the liquidity crisis continues can be seen in the following graph of weekly commercial paper outstanding. After a week's slower pace of collapse, the week ended September 19th showed a resumption of the ongoing pace of collapse that helped to trigger the first discount rate cut back on August 17th.



"The dollar and deficit do not matter," has been a staple of Fed and Washington political wisdom since the days of President Richard Nixon and Federal Reserve Chairman Arthur Burns. Federal Reserve Chairman Alan Greenspan followed that advice in the wake of the 1987 stock market crash and prevailed. Perhaps Chairman Bernanke thought it was worth trying the traditional escape one more time. More likely, though, Bernanke was seeing a much more severe threat to the systemic collapse than the markets perceived, when he cut both the federal funds and discount rates by 50 basis points. The reaction in currencies, gold and Treasuries was foreseeable; the U.S. system never has faced such a crisis with its markets so heavily dependent on foreign capital for liquidity. The Fed chairman likely knew exactly what he was doing and anticipated how the markets would respond. Accordingly, the post-easing price movements in both gold and currencies likely were muted by covert central bank activity. Intervention rarely has lasting impact, and as intervention subsides, fundamental dollar selling and gold buying should begin to accelerate.

Even so, after a generation of official abuse, the greenback has set record lows on a trade-weighted and financial-weighted basis, and selling pressures have pushed the U.S. currency over the edge, looking down into an abyss where the bottom is a functionally worthless currency. In particular, covert central bank intervention appears to be propping the dollar against the Japanese yen. Accordingly, a sudden drop in the U.S. dollar against the yen may signal the onset of particularly heavy fundamental dollar selling, as the greenback's day of reckoning approaches.

Then, of course, there is the U.S. stock market, the most irrational of the domestic markets. Wall Street has been spinning the hype that the Fed's actions will solve the liquidity problems and reinvigorate the economy. Stock prices have rallied. Therein lies the great fraud perpetrated on the American public that "the dollar doesn't matter."

With news radio on in the background as I write this missive, I just heard a story of how Americans -- living on or near border with Canada -- are finding on recent cross-border shopping trips that their U.S. dollars have lost 30% of their purchasing power in the last three years. That is the equivalent of an annual U.S. inflation rate of roughly 10%, which, not so coincidentally, is reasonably close to our annual SGS-Alternate CPI measures.

Indeed, as shown in the Markets Perspective section, U.S. stocks have rallied by 7.6% to 9.0% since the August discount rate cut, including 3.1% to 3.5% gains since last week's easing. In the same periods, the Canadian dollar rallied by 7.5% and 3.0%, nearly offsetting the U.S. stock gains, while the Australian dollar rallied by 10.1% and 3.9%. A holder of Australian dollars, who was lucky enough to buy into U.S. equities before the Fed's initial action, has lost money.

Then there is gold -- the traditional inflation hedge -- that rallied by 11.3% and 2.5% for the same periods. The dollar's declines against other currencies, contrasted with stock market gains, are likely to cross over as well, shortly. For average U.S. consumers, who have all of their assets denominated in greenbacks, their global purchasing power has taken roughly a 4% hit in the last month, the equivalent of an annualized pace of inflation of 57% to 69%, depending on whether one is looking at the financial-weighted or trade-weighted U.S. dollar.

That the average consumer has been experiencing declining purchasing power in recent years should be of no surprise to Main Street U.S.A. Some details on median incomes and income dispersion, as published by the Census Bureau, confirm same, based on official CPI reporting and as discussed in this month's Reporting/Market Focus.

Confluence of Worst-Case Inflation Factors. Further hits to consumer purchasing power are promised by other developments surrounding the liquidity and dollar crises. A weak dollar tends to spike the prices of imports. That even applies to some dollar-denominated imports such as oil. A drop in the dollar means lower effective oil import prices for non-dollar importers. Market forces tend to balance that out, with the differential putting upside pressures on oil prices. Also, oil producers find the purchasing power of their dollar-denominated export income reduced by a weak dollar. That puts pressure on oil exporters to abandon the dollar and increases speculation of same. Partially as result, oil prices are at record highs. The combination of dollar woes and intensifying global political risks in the Middle East suggest much higher oil prices still ahead. Higher energy costs already are in place for U.S. consumers, and odds favor those pressures getting much worse.

As the Fed liquefied a domestic financial system in crisis, money supply growth spiked, with the August monthly average SGS-Ongoing M3 up by 14.0% year-to-year, versus the 13.0% annual gain seen in July (see Money Supply section). The weekly M2 numbers and published non-M2 M3 components now are jumping all over the place, often in different directions on a seasonally-adjusted or unadjusted basis (we use the seasonally adjusted). Nonetheless, the August gains appear to be holding, on either basis, but September's annual M3 growth is up in the air at the moment. In any event, the August growth level was at a 34-year high, a level that usually would be a precursor to rising inflation.

Against this background, the August CPI and PPI both were reported with seasonally-adjusted monthly contractions and slowing annual growth. Even with gimmicked reporting, the pattern is a fair bet to reverse sharply in the next several months.

Despite Some Distorted Numbers, Business Activity Keeps Tumbling. The weak August payroll number was foreshadowed by plunging help-wanted advertising and higher new claims for unemployment. Nonetheless, the reporting of the small payroll decline may have been a deliberate Administration ploy to pressure the Fed into an easing that increasingly was deemed to be a political necessity.

As shown in the accompanying graph, July help-wanted advertising fell to its lowest level since 1958. While part of the downward shift in newspaper ads is due to the rapid, somewhat offsetting growth of online advertising in recent years, the recent plunge in ads shows a significant deterioration in current employment conditions, irrespective of Internet activities.



Most August data reflect no or limited impact from the liquidity crisis that broke in the latter half of the month. Nonetheless, retail sales, industrial production, housing starts, the trade deficit, consumer confidence and the purchasing managers survey generally showed activity consistent with an ongoing slowdown/recession.

PLEASE NOTE: A "General background note" provides a broad background paragraph on certain series or concepts. Where the language used in past and subsequent newsletters usually has been or will be identical, month-after-month, any text changes in these sections will be highlighted in bold italics upon first usage. This is designed so that regular readers may avoid re-reading material they have seen before, but where they will have the material available for reference, if so desired.

General background note: The U.S. economy is in a protracted and deepening structural recession that will prove to be the second leg of a double-dip recession, which began in 2000/2001. The current downleg was signaled in mid-2005 by a series of leading indicators used for that purpose by SGS. With neither traditional fiscal nor monetary stimulus available to help turn economic activity, the current circumstance is likely to evolve into a hyperinflationary depression (see December 2006 SGS).

Market Turmoil Likely to Intensify. The Fed took its best shot at stabilizing the system, but, as feared, those actions tended to destabilize the U.S. dollar and inflation fears. In turn, those factors should intensify and likely will turn back on the U.S. equity and credit markets, exacerbating a self-feeding destructive cycle in an extraordinarily unstable and over-leveraged system. The ultimate evolution of current dollar selling into a true dollar rout and dumping panic remains key to the unfolding of these developments. Gold should shine in such a circumstance.

Alternate Realities. General background note: This section updates the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting. When a government economic measure does not match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Federal Reserve, White House and Wall Street. In these alternate measures, the effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan-Era GDP. The methodologies for the series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS (see Archives page at www.shadowstats.com).

GDP. The alternate second-quarter GDP growth reflects the "preliminary" estimate revision, with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate second-quarter inflation-adjusted annual growth rate (year-to-year, as opposed to the popularly-touted annualized quarter-to-quarter rate) for GDP was a decline of roughly 2.3% versus the official year-to-year gain of 1.9%.



General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate GDP numbers tend to show deeper and more protracted recessions than have been reported formally or reflected in related official reporting. Nonetheless, the patterns shown in the alternate data are broadly consistent with the payroll employment and industrial production series (as revised), which are major indicators used by the National Bureau of Economic Research in determining the official timing of U.S. business cycles.

CPI. The annual non-core annual inflation rates eased again in August, while the so-called "core" inflation rates remained relatively stronger. Food and oil-related price pressures increasingly are a problem, due primarily to supply issues, but those pressures have been avoided in much of the government's reporting of the non-core inflation, so far. Recent sharp increases in market prices suggest this trend in monthly reporting should reverse in the next month or two.


                             Eight Levels of Inflation
                      Annual Inflation for May to August 2007


2007 Measure May Jun Jul Aug
I.1 Core PCE Deflator 2.0% 1.9% 1.9% n.a I.2 Core Chained-CPI-U 1.9% 1.8% 1.8% 1.7% I.3 Core CPI-U 2.2% 2.2% 2.2% 2.1% I.4 PCE Deflator (r) 2.4% 2.3% 2.1% n.a. I.5 Chained-CPI-U 2.3% 2.3% 2.1% 1.8% I.6 CPI-U 2.7% 2.7% 2.4% 2.0% I.7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U 6.1% 6.1% 5.7% 5.4% I.8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation 10.3% 10.3% 10.1% 9.9%

Notes: I.1 to I.3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively, of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U. I.4 to I.6 are the same measures with energy and food inflation included. The CPI-U (I.6) is the measure popularly followed by the financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation. I.7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre- Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top series in the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com. I.8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which reverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so, plus an adjustment for the portion of Clinton-Era geometric weighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic bookkeeping.




General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate CPI numbers tend to show significantly higher inflation over time, generally reflecting the reversal of hedonic adjustments, geometric weighting and the use of a more traditional approach to measuring housing costs, measures all consistent with the reporting methodology in place as of 1980.

MARKETS PERSPECTIVE


In response to a horrific systemic liquidity crisis, the Federal Reserve cut the discount rate, on loans made to distressed banks, by 50 basis points on August 17th. On September 18th, the Fed cut the discount rate by another 50 basis points and lowered the targeted fed funds rate the same amount to 4.75%. The hypesters on Wall Street have been spinning this "good news" in hopes of pushing stock prices to new highs on speculation of a saved economy and on hopes of credit flowing freely once again. The systemic problems, however, are structural, not as superficial as the markets' spinmeisters, and the rest of the world has started to respond accordingly.

The following table shows how various financial indicators have fared since the Fed's actions.

            
        Financial-Market Indicators versus Fed Activity


21 Sep 2007 Change from Change from Closing 16 Aug 2007 17 Sep 2007 Price/Level Pre-Discount Pre-Fed Funds Rate Cut & 2nd Discount Rate Cuts Equity Market
DJIA 13,820.19 +7.59% +3.11% S&P 500 1,525.75 +8.11% +3.35% Wilshire 5000 15,338.93 +8.43% +3.37% NASDAQ Comp 2,671.22 +8.99% +3.47%

Credit Market(1) 3-Mo T-Bill 3.74% -5 bp -41 bp 2-Yr T-Note 4.06% -2 bp -2 bp 5-Yr T-Note 4.31% +5 bp +10 bp 10-Yr T-Note 4.64% +4 bp +16 bp 30-Yr T-Bond 4.89% -3 bp +17 bp

Oil(2) US$ per Barrel West Texas Int. 83.36 +17.39% +3.46%

Currencies/Dollar Indices(3) US$/Unit Pound Sterling 2.0208 +1.91% +1.45% Euro 1.4076 +5.03% +1.56% Swiss Franc 0.8522 +3.75% +1.18% Yen 0.0088 -1.36% -0.68% Canadian Dollar 0.9992 +7.45% +2.99% Australian Dollar 0.8650 +10.05% +3.87% Weighted Currency Units/US$ Jan. 1985 = 100 Financial (FWD) 48.18 -3.70% -1.45% Trade (TWD) 53.93 -4.26% -1.66%

Precious Metals(4) US$ per Troy Ounce Gold 737.00 +11.29% +2.50% Silver 13.47 +8.94% +6.99%

bp -- Basis point or 0.01%. (1) Constant maturity yield, U.S. Treasury. (2) Department of Energy. (3) Shadow Government Statistics, Federal Reserve Board (See Dollar Index Section for definitions). (4) London afternoon fix, Kitco.com.


As discussed earlier, the "boom" in stocks was relative to the perspective of the currency of the domicile of the investor.

While the back-up in long-term interest likely reflects mounting inflation concerns, the change largely offset the flight-to-quality concerns that had lowered the same rates after August 16th. Long-term rates still are shy of the highs seen earlier this year.

Oil and precious metals boomed, while the dollar tanked, except against the yen. Significant selling pressure against the yen should be an early indicator of the dollar sell-off moving into a much more severe phase.

Two months ago, I noted, "little action can be expected from the Fed, until either a dollar panic or systemic liquidity issues force its hand. The Fed otherwise remains hamstrung, unable with its impaired monetary tools either to contain a commodity-driven inflation or to stimulate a structurally damaged economy. Unfortunately, signs of both risk cases -- dollar selling and possible systemic liquidity issues -- are starting to surface."

Last month, I added that, "The systemic liquidity crisis should continue blossoming for at least the next several weeks, with the dollar-panic risk case likely to kick in soon. At such time as the 'flight-to-safety' switches from into to out of the dollar and Treasuries, stocks and bonds will sell off heavily." The liquidity crisis has triggered Fed action, and the U.S. dollar is starting to hit back with a counteraction. The circumstance continues to evolve with the markets still playing out a very dangerous game.

General background note: The U.S. economy remains in a severe, structural inflationary recession, saddled with an impotent Fed and a federal government that is fiscally bankrupt in all but name. In combination, these factors offer the worst of all environments to the financial markets. Ahead lie higher long-term interest rates and much lower U.S. equity prices. On the plus side is the outlook for gold, which provides a solid hedge against many of the problems that have started to surface. Key to the near-term movements of these markets remains the fate of the U.S. dollar, which appears to have started a major downside move.

U.S. Equities -- After hitting all-time highs a couple of months back, and then selling off some, most U.S. stock indices have gyrated in increasingly volatile and unstable markets. Underlying fundamentals remain weak, but the markets are manic, driven by the latest story to be spun out of Wall Street. Stocks could go on to new highs or crash from current levels, but eventually are headed much lower than they are now. Net selling pressure should tend to mount as U.S. dollar selling turns serious.

General background note: As the equity markets catch up with the underlying economic and looming financial fundamentals, the downside adjustments to stock prices should be quite large, eventually rivaling the 90% decline in equities seen in the 1929 crash and ensuing several years. The decline might have to be measured in real terms (net of inflation), as a hyperinflation eventually will kick in as the Fed moves to liquefy the system. Stocks do tend to follow inflation, since revenues and earnings get denominated in inflated dollars. Hence with a hyperinflation, a DJIA of 100,000 or 100,000,000 could be expected, but such still would be below today's levels, adjusted for inflation.

General background note: The approaching financial maelstrom already has come over the horizon and now is nearing landfall. When it hits, those investors who have taken shelter in cash, gold and outside the U.S. dollar will be the ones with the wealth and assets available to take advantage of the extraordinary investment opportunities that should follow.

U.S. Credit Market -- Recent credit market activity remains dominated by the still unfolding liquidity crisis, and the markets will continue to gyrate accordingly. "Flight to quality" issues appear to have been overwhelmed by mounting market fears that inflation will not be contained, at least for the foreseeable future. Softer economic data ahead may fuel speculation of further, near-term Fed easings, but increasing U.S. dollar weakness can and eventually is likely to frustrate further Fed actions.

The dollar decline appears to have started, and general selling of the greenback can become severe at any time. Inflation problems also will worsen markedly, not only from the dollar pressures, but also from accelerating money growth and rising oil and food prices. These factors all should underpin higher long-term interest rates. As a result, six months to a year from now, I expect long-term interest rates will be much higher than they are now, with a sharp, positively-sloped yield curve.

U.S. Dollar -- The Fed's recent interest rate activity has intensified selling of the U.S. dollar against the major currencies, except for the Japanese yen. In prior crises, when the Fed knew that certain planned actions would affect the markets, preemptive, covert interventions were prepared and carried out to keep the markets orderly. Except against the yen, where the effort appears to have been to prop up the greenback, the effort seems to have kept the selling orderly, so far. Nonetheless, market sentiment now runs strongly against the dollar, and intensified, panicked selling can break at any time.

Potentially exacerbating the circumstance are recent moves by Communist China to threaten use of their dollar sales "nuclear option" (see Alert of August 12th), by Iran requesting that Japanese buyers pay for their oil purchases in yen, and now by press stories that the Saudis are looking to de-link from the U.S. dollar. The U.S. markets remain particularly vulnerable, at the moment, to "surprises" from those countries that are not so friendly to the United States, or even from those who simply would like to avoid large losses on the dollars they hold. Accordingly, reports of slowing official foreign investment in U.S. Treasuries could be signaling a major investment shift already underway.

Beyond further Federal Reserve missteps, or further major negative surprises out of the liquidity crisis, the proximal trigger for a dollar panic could come from a bad economic statistic, political missteps by the Administration, negative trade or market developments in Asia, or a terrorist attack or even increasingly likely military action against Iran. When it hits, the broad selling pressure should be strong enough to overcome short-lived central bank intervention.

General background note: In terms of underlying fundamentals that tend to drive currency trading, the dollar's portfolio could not be worse. Relative to major trading partners, the U.S. economy is much weaker, interest rates are lower and anticipated possibly to go lower still, inflation is higher, fiscal and trade-balance conditions are abysmal, and relative political stability is at a nadir. The President's approval rating commonly has moved currency trading in the past, and, despite any near-term bouncing, it remains lower than has been seen for any other U.S. President in the post-World War II era. Relative political stability issues are compounded by the presence of a Congress that is increasingly hostile to the President, and that is rated even lower by the American people than is the President. Generally, the greater the magnitude of the dollar selling, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. capital markets.

As shown in the following graph, the U.S. dollar held about even in August versus July, holding at or near all-time lows on both a financial- and trade-weighted basis. The added September 21st data points show current levels below the August averages.



General background note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS for methodology.

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics' Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (FWD) is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For August 2007, the monthly dollar average rose by 0.29% after falling by 2.03% in July. The August 2007 average index level of 49.40 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 4.71% from August 2006, with July down 6.08% from the year before. The index's historic monthly-average low was 48.98 in April 1995, has been broken in the last week, with the September 21st closing level now at 48.18.

Holding at its all-time monthly-average low, August's level of the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (TWD) was unchanged versus July, which was down 1.80% versus June. The August 2007 index level of 55.78 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 4.51% from August 2006, against July's 5.41% decline from the year before. As of September 21st, the TWD closed at 53.93.

Gold -- As of Friday (September 21st), London gold closed at $737.00 per troy ounce, with silver at $13.47. For August, the monthly-average gold price (London afternoon fix per Kitco.com) averaged $665.41 per troy ounce, against July's $665.30 per troy ounce. Silver averaged $12.36 per troy ounce in August, down from $12.91 in July.

Gold price volatility continues, but generally, the price movement has turned to the upside during the still-breaking systemic liquidity crisis. Highly suspect here remains the possibility of covert central bank intervention in tandem with intervention aimed at muting the effects of dollar selling. Despite central-bank machinations or intervention, the upside potential for the precious metals remains explosive, new record high prices loom.

General background note: As discussed in the Hyperinflation Series (see the December 2006 to March 2007 SGSs), the eventual complete collapse of the U.S. dollar -- the world's reserve currency -- will force the creation of a new international currency system. Gold likely will be structured into any replacement system, in an effort by those organizing the new currency structure to gain public acceptance.





The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show August averages as well as added points for closing prices on September 21st. As of Friday's closing prices, gold was trading around $737, oil at over $83 and the Swiss franc above $0.85. All three measures should trade significantly higher in the months ahead.


REPORTING PERSPECTIVE


The Big Three Market Movers


With the Fed facing tumultuous markets, the August inflation reports, in particular, showed unusual results, suggestive of some manipulation aimed at soothing a potentially market-disruptive easing. The bulk of the other major economic reports, however, generally have continued coming in on the soft side of expectations.

Financial-market sentiment has moved towards inflation and perhaps a bit away from recession, thanks to perceptions of overly aggressive Fed easing, but the reality of a recessionary economy beset by inflation problems will continue to dominate honest economic reporting.

With the President's positive rating continually bottom bouncing and with a distraught Fed still trying to contain an expanding systemic meltdown, recent and upcoming releases of major series have been, and likely will continue to be, subject to some manipulation, as mentioned above. Statistical games are being played for both the perceived political needs of the Administration and the increasingly heavy financial market needs of an impotent Federal Reserve. We are looking now at moves that continue to border on national security issues.

Absent manipulation, and against lagging and still largely distorted market expectations, most near-term economic reporting should tend to surprise the markets on the downside, while most inflation reporting should tend to surprise expectations on the upside.

Employment/Unemployment -- The August payroll report still appears to have been a set-up to push the Fed into an easing. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) easily could have shown a month-to-month gain, instead of a small monthly decline, if it wanted to. It also could have shown the much weaker growth that is inherent in the underlying numbers, but the intent here seems to have been not to scare the markets too terribly, just to push consensus forecasts into the recession camp and Mr. Bernanke into a rate cut.

Keep in mind that the payroll survey is based on the pay period (household survey is based on the week) including August 12th. Anyone who worked at all in that period is considered employed, hence the August data do not reflect any meaningful change due to the liquidity crisis, which just was beginning to come to a head at that time. The September report should pickup any resulting carnage in the financial services industry.

Seasonally-adjusted August nonfarm payrolls fell by 4,000 (down by 85,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for the month, following a revised 68,000 (previously 92,000) gain in July, and a revised 69,000 (previously 126,000) gain in June. Annual growth slowed sharply from 1.31% in July to 1.12% in August.

Once again, applying consistent, not-seasonally-adjusted year-to-year change to the seasonally-adjusted numbers yielded weaker than advertised payroll result. Applying August's unadjusted annual growth rate to the adjusted numbers yields an adjusted monthly August payroll plunge of 82,000. Interestingly, where similar analysis last month suggested a 47,000 consistent gain, versus official initial reporting of 92,000, July's seasonal factors were revised so as to be consistent. On that basis, July's reported growth now is 69,000, higher than my estimate only because of other revisions in June.

The statistically-sounder household survey showed seasonally-adjusted employment tumbling by 316,000 for August, following a 30,000 decline in July. The seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate held at 4.64% +/- 0.23% in August, versus 4.65% in July. Unadjusted August U.3 fell to 4.6% from 4.9% in July, while the broader U.6 measure eased to 8.4% from 8.6% (unadjusted) but rose to 8.4% from 8.3% (adjusted). Net of the "discouraged workers" defined out of existence during the Clinton Administration, the traditional unemployment rate continues to run around 12%.

The August employment gain was against a background of plunging help-wanted advertising, rising new claims for unemployment insurance and weaker employment numbers in the August purchasing managers surveys (see respective sections). These background numbers remain consistent with continued weakness in official jobs and unemployment reporting.

The monthly bias factor (birth/death model) in August was an add-on of 120,000, compared with 122,000 a year ago. The add-ons continue to be mindless, such as the 15,000 upside bias in construction, which was the same factor as the year before. Where the September 2006 bias factor was 13,000, such suggests some added downside pressure on the September 2007 payroll estimate.

Next Release (October 5): The September payroll survey should show intensifying economic weakness but likely will be massaged towards market expectations. Financial market instabilities are likely to continue, and rigged numbers can be used as an inexpensive form of market intervention. In like manner, reality should be an increase in the unemployment rate, barring manipulations.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) -- The "preliminary" estimate revision of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth for the second quarter of 2007 was 3.95% +/- 3%, per the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), up from initial reporting of 3.38%. The second quarter's gain rebounded from 0.60% in the first quarter, while year-to-year growth revised to 1.92%, up from an initial second-quarter estimate of 1.78%, and up from 1.55% in the first.

On the inflation front, the GDP deflator in the second quarter helped to spike real growth, with annualized inflation of just 2.68% in revision (originally 2.69%) against the 4.23% inflation pace estimated for the first quarter.

The BEA also published its first estimates of two broad alternate GDP measures, Gross National Product (GNP), where GDP is GNP net of trade in factor income (interest and dividend payments), and Gross Domestic Income (GDI), which is the theoretically-equivalent income number that matches the GDP's consumption number. Annualized quarterly real growth in second-quarter GNP was 3.96%, up from 0.66% in the first quarter, while second-quarter GDI was 4.38% versus 1.17% in the first quarter.

Although the GDP report is the government's broadest estimate of U.S. economic activity, it is also the least meaningful and most heavily massaged of all major government economic series. Published by the BEA, it primarily has become a tool for economic propaganda. Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS-Alternate GDP measure suggests economic reality is much weaker than officially reported. Alternate year-to-year annual contractions continue, with an annual 2.3% contraction in the second quarter deepening from the 2.2% decline in the first quarter (see the graph in the Alternate Reality section of the Opening Comments).

Next Release (September 27): The "final" estimate revision of annualized quarterly real GDP growth for the second quarter could weaken slightly, if the new trade data were accounted for accurately. Politics and financial market sensitivities, however, argue in favor of revisions no greater than normal statistical noise.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) -- The BLS reported the seasonally-adjusted August CPI-U (I.6) down by 0.14% (down 0.18% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval) for the month, compared with a gain of 0.13% (down by 0.03% unadjusted) in July.

Annual inflation eased to 1.97% in August from 2.36% in July. Annualized year-to-date inflation through August was 3.67% adjusted, 4.58% unadjusted. The accounting for both CPI-U and PPI inflation again was suspiciously shy in the area of energy and food inflation. For example, the CPI gasoline was down by 4.9% for the month, while the retail sales report suggested a decline of 2.4%, enough of a difference to wipe out most of the reported monthly CPI decline.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) (I.5) -- the substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by the manipulators as the replacement for the CPI-U -- was 1.85% in August versus 2.08% in July.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology (I.7), annual CPI growth was about 5.4% in August, down from 5.7% in July, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (I.8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was roughly 9.9% in August, against 10.1% in July. The eight levels of annual inflation, I.1 to I.8, are shown in the table in the Alternate Reality section, along with the graph of SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation.

Next Release (October 17): Assuming some pick-up in monthly inflation for September, annual inflation should spike next month and continue rising into 2008. Seasonally-adjusted, monthly CPI-U fell by 0.5% in September 2006. Accordingly, any monthly reporting above or below that for the pending release of September 2007 CPI will add or subtract directly to or from the current annual CPI-U inflation rate. Reporting risks generally favor an upside surprise to modest market expectations, barring targeted manipulation. A renewed upside movement in core inflation remains long overdue.


Other Troubled Key Series


Federal Deficit -- General background note: The federal government's fiscal 2006 (fiscal year-end September 30th) deficit, prepared based on generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), widened to $4.6 trillion from 2005's $3.5 trillion. Those numbers dwarfed the officially-gimmicked 2006 federal budget deficit of $248.2 billion, which was down $70.8 billion from 2005's $318.5 billion (see the December SGS).

General background note: Although it lacks the accrual accounting of the GAAP numbers, the change in gross federal debt bypasses several of the reporting manipulations and is a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the official, gimmicked deficit reporting. As of fiscal year-end 2006, the gross federal debt stood at $8.507 trillion, up $574 billion from 2005, which in turn was up $554 billion from 2004.

For the rolling 12 months through August 2007, the gimmicked deficit was $218.2 billion versus $269.0 billion in August 2006, compared with the rolling deficits of $165.8 billion in July 2007 and $255.4 billion in July 2006. The gap in the year-to-year rolling deficits narrowed sharply in August.

For August 30, 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $8.990 trillion, up $58 billion from July and up $486 billion from August 2006, which in turn was up $573 billion from August 2005. For July 31, 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $8.932 trillion, up $64 billion from June and up $488 billion from July 2006, which in turn was up $557 billion from July 2005.

General background note: The Administration and Congress continue playing bookkeeping games. Even so, the gimmicked deficit should widen in the next 12 months, as government finances begin to suffer from tax revenue losses due to the intensifying recession and relative tax receipt declines after the expiration of recent corporate tax incentives. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy's mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance -- The trend in annual growth in initial claims has reversed, strengthening on a relative year-to-year basis and turning marginally positive (an economic negative). On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended September 15th, annual change was growth of 0.5%, versus the 17 weeks ended August 11th, where annual change was a contraction of 1.7%.

General background note: More often than not, week-to-week volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly claims numbers is due to the Labor Department's efforts to seasonally adjust these numbers around holiday periods, such as Easter, Memorial Day, July 4th and Labor Day. The Labor Department has demonstrated an inability to do such adjusting successfully. When the new claims series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings -- Reflecting the artificial monthly decline in reported August CPI, August's seasonally-adjusted monthly real earnings rose by 0.5% against a 0.1% decline in July. Annual growth rose to 2.1% in August versus a 1.3% gain in July.

General background note: Gyrations in the poor quality of reported CPI growth account for most month-to-month volatility in this series. Adjusting for the major upside biases built into the CPI-W inflation measure used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series shows the average worker to be under severe financial stress in an ongoing recession.

Retail Sales -- August's seasonally-adjusted retail sales rose by 0.28% (up 0.40% net of revisions) +/- 0.9% (95% confidence interval), thanks to reportedly strong auto sales. Little impact from the unfolding liquidity crisis would have made it into the August report. Retail sales in July increased by a revised 0.49% (previously up by 0.29%). Net of inflation, August sales were up by 0.42%, but there was a disconnect in related gasoline price reporting, and the government's numbers are not to be believed.

On a year-to-year basis, August retail sales were up by 3.74% before inflation and by 1.77% after inflation, compared with respective annual growth numbers for July of 3.56% and 1.20%.

General background note: Real (inflation-adjusted) year-to-year growth in retail sales below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation) signals recession, and a signal first was generated in this business cycle back in June 2006.

Next Release (October 12): Not only should September retail sales tumble anew, below expectations, but higher September inflation should generate real contractions on a monthly and possibly also on a year-to-year basis.

Industrial Production -- Seasonally-adjusted industrial production rose by 0.2% in August, against a revised 0.5% (was 0.3%) gain in July. A surge in heat-related utility usage helped to spike not only the utility index, but also the manufacturing index (still down 0.3%), where key components of production are estimate based on utility consumption. Annual growth in August held at 1.69%, the same as in July (previously 1.38%).

Next Release (October 16): Look for September industrial production to decline, moving once again into a pattern of contraction. Eventually, monthly contractions in this series should become regular, with the rapidly slowing annual growth turning negative.

New Orders for Durable Goods -- For July, the usually volatile durable goods orders rose by 5.9% (6.2% net of revisions), on a seasonally-adjusted basis, after rising a revised 1.9% (previously up 1.4%) in June. On an annual basis, durable goods orders rose a reasonably healthy 4.7%.

The closely followed nondefense capital goods new orders rose by 5.8% on top of a 6.4% gain in June. Gains were much softer after aircraft orders, which tend to be stretched out over time, with an ex-aircraft gain of 2.2% in July versus a 0.1% contraction in June. July's annual growth rate for total nondefense capital goods was 16.2%.

General background note: Durable goods orders lost its status as a solid leading economic indicator when the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders in 2002.

Trade Balance -- The seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for July narrowed to $59.2 billion, but it widened net of revisions. Originally reported at $58.1 billion, the June deficit was revised to $59.4 billion, along with revised larger deficits in the entire January to June 2007 period. For the first six months of 2007, the seasonally adjusted deficit now stands at $355.3 billion, against last month's estimate of $352.7 billion.

The difference was a re-estimation of the guesstimates used in the reporting of the services surplus, numbers that are little better than fudge factors. Although the new data widened both the first- and second-quarter deficits, and correspondingly should have weakened reported GDP in those periods, the first-quarter GDP is inviolate until nest July's annual revisions. What happens to the second-quarter GDP's "final" estimate remains to be seen.

That said, games still are being played with data, and the current trade shortfall remains well shy of reality. Continued trade deficit underreporting may be intended to help the dollar some, with the Fed abandoning the greenback. Historically, such as in 1987/1988, disruptions of import paper flows have been used to adjust initial trade deficit reporting. Something like that appears to be in play at the moment. Revisions next year should tell the story.

Next Release (October 11): Underlying reality favors renewed deterioration in the August monthly trade deficit, barring ongoing manipulation. Reporting risk generally remains on the negative side of consensus forecasts. The months ahead should see a pattern of regularly increasing deficits that shortly, again, will be setting new records.

Consumer Confidence -- August consumer confidence declined sharply, only partially reflecting the breaking liquidity crisis. The Conference Board's Confidence measure fell 6.2% for the month, with the three-month moving average up by 3.1% year-to-year. The University of Michigan's Sentiment measure plunged by 7.7% for the month, with the three-month moving average growth easing to 3.0%.

These lagging, not leading, indicators tend to reflect the tone of the popular financial media and show renewed concern of faltering business activity.

General background note: The Conference Board measure is seasonally adjusted, which can provide occasional, but significant distortion. The adjustment does not make much sense and is of suspect purpose, given that the Conference Board does not release the unadjusted number. The Michigan survey is unadjusted. How does one seasonally-adjust peoples' attitudes? Also, beware the mid-month Consumer Sentiment release from the University of Michigan. Its sampling base is so small as to be virtually valueless in terms of statistical significance.

Short-Term Credit Measures -- Patterns of annual growth in consumer and commercial borrowing have been disrupted by the liquidity crisis, with a sharp fall-off in annual growth for commercial paper outstanding in August. The ongoing crisis in commercial paper on a weekly basis is discussed and shown in the graph in this month's Opening Comments. Problems were not apparent in August reporting of commercial and industrial loans, and the early impact on consumer credit will not be seen until August or September reporting of that series.

Annual growth eased to 4.8% in July, from 5.1% in June, for seasonally-adjusted consumer credit, which includes credit cards and auto loans, but not mortgages. In the current environment, where inflation-adjusted growth in income (see this month's Reporting/Market Focus) is not adequate to support meaningful growth in the personal consumption component of GDP, GDP growth only can come from temporary debt expansion or savings liquidation. Accordingly, stagnating growth in consumer debt expansion places an ongoing constraint on economic growth. Benchmark revisions show overall consumer credit to be about 0.4% less than previously reported.

Commercial borrowing growth varied sharply, with annual growth in August commercial paper outstanding dropping to 4.7% from 21.7% in July. Annual growth in commercial and industrial loans held at 12.8% in August, the same as in July. Solid growth in the commercial credit measures can signal credit needs tied either to rising sales and receivables/inventory, or to slowing sales and slowing collections and involuntarily rising inventories. The forced slowing of growth in commercial paper outstanding, however, will place definite constraints on broad business activity.

Producer Price Index (PPI) -- Falling in line the Fed's need for weak inflation numbers, the seasonally-adjusted August finished goods PPI plunged by 1.4% (down by 1.4% unadjusted), thanks to "collapsing" energy prices. Such contrasted with the 0.6% (0.7% unadjusted) surge in July's PPI. Annual PPI in August fell to 2.2% from July's 4.0% reading. Also reflecting the sharp contraction in energy prices, seasonally-adjusted intermediate and crude goods fell by 1.2% and 2.0%, respectively, versus increases of 0.6% and 1.2% in July. The accounting for both PPI and CPI-U inflation, however, remains well shy of reflecting actual food and energy inflation.

Next Release (October 12): Despite the regular random volatility of the monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months generally should come in above market expectations. As with the CPI, the core PPI inflation rate still is long overdue for an upside surprise, but such may be further delayed by the financial-market needs of a battered Federal Reserve.


Better-Quality Numbers


General background note: The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders -- Playing further catch up and continuing its trend toward showing a recession in manufacturing, the overall August ISM manufacturing index fell to 52.9 from 53.8 in July, with the August employment index at 51.3 versus 50.2 in July. Continued decline in the broad series is a good bet in the next several months, based on declining annual activity in a variety of underlying series.

The August new orders index eased to 55.3 from 57.5 in July. Seasonal-factor distortions, which have been present, usually are overcome by viewing the series using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the August new orders index was up by 3.3% versus a 5.7% gain July.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading below 50.0 indicates contracting new orders. The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004. As an SGS early warning indicator of a major economic shift, the new orders measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating a signal of pending recession.

Service Sector Index. The service-sector ISM index does not have much meaning related to overall business activity, since new order activity at law firms, hospitals or fast-food restaurants has little obvious relationship to broad economic activity. That said, the overall August services sector index held at 55.8, the same level as in July. Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. The August employment component plummeted to a recessionary 47.9 from July's 51.7. The prices paid component is covered in the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) -- As discussed and graphed in this month's Opening Comments, the Conference Board reported that help-wanted advertising plunged still again, to 25 in July, from 26 in June and down from 27 in May, down from 29 in April, down from 34 in December, hitting its lowest level since 1958. Even allowing for the advertising volume lost to the Internet in recent years, the current weakness is severe enough to signal a deepening problem in the employment sector. The July number was down 19.4% from the year before, versus an 18.8% annual contraction June.

Viewed on a three-month moving-average basis, July's year-to-year change was a contraction of 18.8% versus 17.2% in June. The series still indicates rapidly deteriorating employment conditions. Where the index never recovered from the 2000/2001 recession, its renewed and ongoing plunge has signaled a new and rapid contraction in economic activity. Continued deterioration remains likely in the months ahead.

Housing Starts -- August's seasonally-adjusted housing starts fell by 2.6% +/- 10% (95% confidence interval) for the month, after a revised 6.9% (previously 6.1%) monthly decline in July. Year-to-year, August starts were down by 19.1% (+/- 7.1%), the data still reflect little impact of the mortgage-related liquidity that broke in the latter part of the month.

Confirming ongoing weakness in the housing sector, August building permits were down 5.9% for the month and 24.5% for the year. August data on homes sales are due in the week ahead.

Inflation Indicators

Money Supply -- The SGS Ongoing M3 estimate of annual growth for the August average surged to 14.0% from 13.0% in July. The increase reflects liquidity crisis factors as discussed in this month's Opening Comments. The current pace of growth has disturbing inflationary implications.



General background note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the SGS Ongoing M3 estimates, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS for methodology. The indicated M3 levels below are our best estimate and are provided at specific subscriber request. Keep in mind that regular revisions in the related Fed series affect historical M3. Usually, annual growth rates hold, although levels may shift a little. We have not attempted, nor do we plan to recreate a revised historical series for an M3 monthly-average level going back in time. The purpose of the SGS series was and is to provide monthly estimates of ongoing annual M3 growth. We are comfortable with those numbers and that our estimated monthly growth rates are reasonably close to what the Fed would be reporting, if it still reported M3. With those caveats on the table, here are the monthly-average levels for M3:

      Shadow Government Statistics Ongoing M3
  (Estimated seasonally-adjusted monthly average)


Current Yr Before Month $ Tril $ Tril % Yr/Yr

Mar 07 11.541 10.347 11.5% Apr 11.719 (r) 10.417 12.5% May 11.861 (r) 10.490 13.1% Jun 11.916 (r) 10.547 13.0% Jul 12.001 (r) 10.624 13.0% Aug 12.229 (p) 10.732 14.0%

(p) August's preliminary estimate is based on full-month reporting. (r) Revised.

NOTE OF CAUTION: The estimates of monthly levels best are used for comparisons with other dollar amounts, such as nominal GDP. While the estimates are based on seasonally- adjusted Federal Reserve data, great significance cannot be read into the month-to-month changes, as was the case when the Fed published the series. The most meaningful way to view the data is in terms of year-to-year change.


Based on the August data, annual growth for monthly M1 fell by 0.36%, versus a 0.28% contraction in July, while August M2 annual growth rose to 6.68% from 6.15% in July.

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices -- The August prices paid indices were slightly softer, again, still not reflecting the continuing surge in oil prices that should show up next month. The levels, however, remain high and in inflation territory, suggestive of ongoing inflation issues in both purchasing managers surveys.

On the manufacturing side, the August price index eased to 63.0 from July's 65.0. On a three-month moving average basis, August's annual change was down by 14.0%, following July's 12.1% drop. The manufacturing price indicator is not seasonally adjusted and, therefore, is a generally better indicator of pricing activity.

On the non-manufacturing side, the seasonally-adjusted August prices diffusion index also softened again, to 58.6 from July's 61.3. On a three-month moving-average basis August's annual change was a decline of 14.3% following July's decrease of 11.2%.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflationary pressure. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising prices.

Oil Prices -- For the month of August, the monthly-average West Texas Intermediate spot price (Department of Energy) eased by 2.4% to $72.39 per barrel from $74.18 in July. Against last year's average, August's level was down by 0.9%, versus July's year-to-year decline in average monthly price of just 0.3%.

As of Friday, September 21st, West Texas Intermediate closed at an all-time high of $83.36. Price movement remains highly volatile, but broadly is trending higher, and should continue setting new daily record highs. Continued, meaningful upside risks to oil prices remain in play, both from the intensifying dollar weakness and related OPEC rumblings, and from ever-volatile Middle Eastern political tensions. One can hope that the worst of the hurricane season has passed, but that still could be in play, too.

General background note: Whether from supply and demand, geo-political or currency pressures, oil prices will remain at highly inflationary levels and will continue as a major contributing factor to U.S. inflation woes. Historically high oil prices still are working their way through all levels of U.S. economic activity, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. These broad inflationary pressures will remain intact despite any near-term oil price volatility. Although these pressures may be slow to surface in government reporting of the so-called "core" inflation measures, they will surface.




Reporting/Market Focus (September 2007) -- Annual Income Variance Analysis


The Census Bureau's Income, Poverty, and Health Insurance Coverage in the United States: 2006 was published in late August. I regularly ignore the heavily politicized reporting tied to poverty, as it has little meaning in the real world, but I do look at detail on reported income variance and income levels, which can be of significance.

Without getting into broader philosophical issues, income variance is a long-term (multi-year) indicator of economic activity. The more extreme it gets, the worse the economy and the financial markets eventually will become. Looking at two simplified markets with one man making $100,000,000 per year or 1,000 men making $100,000 per year, there will tend to be more speculative financial markets in the first case, but more automobiles will be sold in the second case. The system tends to be self-adjusting when income variance reaches an extreme, with the speculative market bubble eventually bursting and income and economic activity tending to get redistributed.

As shown in the following graph, income dispersion remains at an historic high, well beyond any level seen before the onset of the Great Depression. The mean logarithmic deviation of income actually declined to 0.543 in 2006 from 0.545 in 2005, but such is a statistically meaningless difference.



Curiously, the estimates of the 1929 peak variance were topped in the years before the 1987 stock crash. The extreme increase in income dispersion since 1987 was thanks largely to the policies of former Fed Chairman Greenspan, but it also has opened prospects of potentially unparalleled financial-market turmoil in the next several years.

Also found in the Poverty Report are a variety of income measures. As shown in the next two graphs, real (inflation adjusted) median income, which is the income level for the middle person in a survey, has been in annual decline for men since 2003, and for women since 2002. The patterns show a declining standard of living in the last three to four years and are much more consistent with an ongoing recession than the reported booming economy.





Keep in mind that these numbers use the woefully inadequate CPI numbers published by the Bureau of Labor Statistics. I shortly will explore various income measures over time using both official inflation and the SGS-Alternate CPI-U.

The good news is that real median household income rose for the second year in 2006. How could men and women have declining income and households have rising income? It is all in how one plays with the population statistics, and therein is a topic for a not-too-distant Reporting/Market Focus that will tie these games to the unemployment report, on the back of which this survey was conducted.



Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for October -- A Perspective on Historical Financial Market Panics


With the squirrelly season upon us, a review of historical financial-market panics could be of some interest as the current systemic turmoil plays out.

___________________________________________


PLEASE NOTE: The Hyperinflation Summary Report still is pending, likely to be published in the third week of October. The October "Shadow Government Statistics" newsletter is targeted for the week of October 15th, allowing for some settling in to the new location in Oakland, California. Postings on the Web site of monthly newsletters, interim Flash Updates and Alerts are advised immediately by e-mail.

OCCASIONALLY, BRIEF UPDATES ARE COMMUNICATED DIRECTLY BY E-MAIL. IF YOU ARE NOT RECEIVING E-MAIL COMMUNICATIONS FROM US, PLEASE LET US KNOW at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or by using the Feedback option on www.shadowstats.com.

Flash Update

Monday, September 17th, 2007


JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

September 17, 2007

__________

Inflationary Recession Deepens

System is as Vulnerable as at Any Time Since 1929 to 1933

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Ongoing M3 series for August, based on full-month, reporting has been updated and posted to the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

Fed Easing Remains Likely to Match Expectations


This Flash Update provides a brief summary of last week's developments in advance of more complete analysis in the September newsletter, which should be published by the end of the coming weekend.

In the realm of the ongoing liquidity crisis, there have been some signs of lessening tensions, such as a somewhat slower pace of collapse in commercial paper outstanding, or the Fed having better luck pushing the effective fed funds rate towards the official 5.25% target rate (see accompanying graph), Nonetheless, the U.S. and global financial systems remain as vulnerable to extreme crisis as they have been at any time since the troubled 1929 to 1933 period.



Indicating the thinness of systemic stability, non-seasonal discount window borrowings jumped to a daily average of $2.018 billion during the two weeks ended September 12th, up from $1.301 billion in the two weeks ended August 29th, and up from just $6 million in the two weeks prior. Also, press reports over the weekend suggest mounting public distress as to banking liquidity in the United Kingdom.

With the spread between target and effective fed funds somewhat narrowed in the last week, the Fed still effectively has eased by 25 basis points (0.25%) since cutting the discount rate by 50 basis points a month ago. With the markets looking for at least a 25 basis point rate cut at tomorrow's FOMC meeting, it would be extraordinary if the U.S. central bank did not move to meet market expectations. Accordingly, I would look for the 25 basis point cut that already is in place. No easing, or a cut of 50 basis points or more, could be terribly disruptive to stocks and/or the U.S. dollar, reactions that only would confound the Fed's effort to stabilize a still highly unstable system.

On the economic front, Wall Street's spinmeisters were working hard last week. The heavily touted "only" 4,000 gain in new jobless claims was distorted in usual fashion by the Labor Department's inability to seasonally adjust weekly numbers around major holidays. In this case it was Labor Day. Claims deterioration has resumed in the last month or so and continues.

In general, it will be September reporting that should start showing the economic damage from the breaking of the liquidity crisis. Both retail sales and industrial production for August came in below expectations, but the July trade deficit did not improve quite as advertised. Due to six months of downward revisions to the guesstimated services surplus, the deficit was meaningfully wider in both the first and second quarters than previously reported. The first-quarter GDP, which now should be weaker as a result, cannot be changed until next year's annual revisions. There is a small possibility, however, that the data will trigger a downward revision in the upcoming second-quarter GDP "final" estimate.

For the week ahead, PPI (Tuesday, September 18th) and CPI (Wednesday, September 19th) inflation rates for August are expected to be flat to minus. While underlying risk is to the upside of expectations, weak inflation numbers would be a plus to the FOMC, which would prefer not to ease into strengthening inflation numbers. August housing starts, due Wednesday, September 19th, could show some intensifying weakness as a result of then mounting mortgage problems.

The financial system remains in flux and remains highly vulnerable to even minor negative surprises. Beyond unhappy implications from oil and brewing global political circumstances, the better-quality, more-independent economic numbers, in particular, hold a number of downside surprises in the month or two ahead.

Additional detail will follow in the September SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


The September SGS is targeted for posting on or before September 23rd. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Sunday, September 9th, 2007
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

September 9, 2007

__________

Consistently-Adjusted August Payrolls Plunged 82,000

Annual M3 Growth Hit 14% in August

Inflationary Recession Still Befuddles a Fed Set to Ease

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Ongoing M3 series for August has been updated and posted to the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

Recession Recognition Gains Political Correctness


When the popular media and consensus economists start talking recession, usually an economic downturn already has been underway for a year or so. The 2000 recession gained rapid recognition following 9-11, but the terrorist attacks did not trigger the downturn. The recession had been in place for over a year; the attacks only deepened an ongoing contraction. In like manner, the current recession has been underway for well over a year, but it was not triggered by the liquidity crisis that erupted in August, only intensified by it. The impact of the liquidity problems still will not show up in most economic data until next month. The exceedingly weak August payroll survey was conducted before the crisis had much impact. What appears to have happened was that someone in the Administration decided to recognize the recession and released weak numbers either to force or to help accommodate the Fed in justifying an imminent easing. Yet, there also is a worsening inflation problem, with high oil and food prices, a weakening U.S. dollar and exploding money supply growth. And, then, there also is the threat of U.S. dollar dumping with the U.S. financial markets dependent on foreign capital for liquidity.

Market speculation following, the jobs report, moved towards a Fed easing. As a result, the U.S. dollar came under selling pressure and the price of gold rose. Therein is the problem for the U.S. central bank. Fed Chairman Bernanke's dollar fears likely are why this weekend's big media stories assuring a coming Fed rate cut were interspersed with occasional stories to the effect that an easing is no sure thing. While inflation remains an issue, the big problem for the Fed is the greenback, and the financial media largely are ignoring that. There are those in the Administration, too, who do not think the dollar counts.

The construct of the jobs report suggests a deliberately negative rendition of August employment was put forth. In turn, that probably indicates that Treasury Secretary Paulson, Administration political hacks and Wall Street want a rate cut, now, with corresponding increased pressure on Mr. Bernanke to ease. However the game plays out, dollar selling increasingly will intensify, and the U.S. financial markets will suffer the consequences, with sharply higher long-term interest rates and sharply lower equity prices, while gold should continue to boom.

In any event, the unofficial easing continues, with the Fed either unwilling or unable to hit its 5.25% formal fed funds target most of the time, as shown in the accompanying graph.



Since the Fed already has eased effectively by 25 basis points, and since the politicians now are lining up for lower rates, odds should favor a formal Fed easing of 25 basis points at the September 18th FOMC meeting, if not before. Mr. Bernanke will be hoping for a muted currency response, and heavy central bank intervention, covert or otherwise, will be likely in an effort to assure same. The Fed and Treasury will work hard on market expectations before the FOMC gathering. Whatever the evolved pre-FOMC consensus becomes, that likely will be the Fed's action, designed to be as minimally disruptive to the markets as possible.

Employment Reporting Pushed into Recession Mode. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) easily could have shown a month-to-month gain in August payrolls, instead of a small decline, if it wanted to. It also could have shown the much weaker growth that is inherent in the underlying reported numbers, but the intent here seems to have been not to scare the markets too terribly, just to push consensus forecasts into the recession camp and the Fed into an easing. Also aimed at tempering market reaction, the unemployment rate was held unchanged.

These numbers do not reflect the impact of August's liquidity crisis. The payroll survey is based on the pay period (household survey is based on the week) including August 12th. Anyone who worked at all in that period is considered employed. Hence, the data do not reflect any meaningful change due to the liquidity turmoil, which just was beginning to come to a head at that time. The September jobs report, in theory, should begin picking up any carnage in the financial services industry resulting from the liquidity problems.

Seasonally-adjusted August nonfarm payrolls fell by 4,000 (down by 85,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for the month, following a revised 68,000 (previously 92,000) gain in July, and a revised 69,000 (previously 126,000) gain in June. Annual growth has tumbled sharply from 1.47% in June, to 1.31% in July, to 1.12% in August.

As with the last several payroll reports, applying consistent, not-seasonally-adjusted year-to-year change to the seasonally-adjusted numbers yields a weaker than advertised payroll result. Applying August's unadjusted annual growth rate to the adjusted numbers yields an adjusted monthly August payroll plunge of 82,000. Interestingly, where similar analysis last month suggested a 47,000 consistently adjusted monthly gain for July, versus official initial reporting of 92,000, July's seasonal factors were revised in the August report so as to be consistent. On that basis, July's reported growth now is 68,000, higher than my estimated correction, but that only is because of other revisions made to June's data.

The statistically-sounder household survey showed seasonally-adjusted employment tumbling by 316,000 for August, following a 30,000 decline in July. The seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate held at 4.64% +/- 0.23% in August, versus 4.65% in July. Unadjusted August U.3 fell to 4.6% from 4.9% in July, while the broader U.6 measure eased to 8.4% from 8.6% (unadjusted) but rose to 8.4% from 8.3% (adjusted). Net of the "discouraged workers" defined out of existence by the Clinton Administration, the traditional unemployment rate continues to run around 12%.

The monthly bias factor (birth/death model) in August was an add-on of 120,000, compared with 122,000 a year ago. The add-ons continue to be mindless, such as the 15,000 upside bias in construction, which was the same factor as the year before. Where the September 2006 bias factor was 13,000, such suggests some added downside pressure on the September 2007 payroll estimate.

Purchasing Managers Surveys Mixed. The ISM purchasing managers manufacturing survey eased from 53.8 in July to 52.9 in August. New orders fell from 57.5 to 55.3, with employment rising from 50.2 to 51.3. The non-manufacturing survey held even at 55.8 in August, but employment plummeted from 51.7 in July to 41.7 in August, possibly showing some early liquidity crisis impact. The related prices paid indices showed somewhat softened inflation pressures.

August M3 Annual Growth Hits 14%. On the inflation front, as discussed in the preceding Alert and Flash Update, the Fed's emergency l1quefaction of the financial system has spiked money supply growth. Based on 27 of 31 days of reporting, annual M2 growth rose to 6.7% (a four-year high) in August from 6.1% in July, and SGS-Ongoing M3 estimated annual growth rose to 14.0% (a 34-year high) in August from 13.0% in July. Final August estimates, based on full-month reporting, will be posted to the Alternate Data Series tab next weekend.

Week Ahead: Most data for August will show limited if any impact from recent financial market turmoil. In turn, September numbers should reflect initial impact on business activity. Against expectations of little change, the July trade deficit should widen sharply in Tuesday's (September 11th) report. Relatively strong expectations for Friday's (September 14th) August retail sales and industrial production likely will be disappointed on the downside. The trade number, however, is particularly vulnerable to political manipulations, given U.S. dollar vulnerabilities.

Additional detail will follow in the September SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


With relocation to the San Francisco Bay Area pending in the weeks ahead, the September SGS is targeted for the week of September 17th. An e-mail advice will be made of its and any intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Alert

Thursday, September 6th, 2007
ALERT - Sep. 6, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

A L E R T

September 6, 2007

__________

Money Supply Growth Explodes

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Ongoing M3 data will be posted this weekend along with publication of a Flash Update. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams


Fed Liquefaction Pushes August M3 Growth Towards 14%


This afternoon's money supply release showed seasonally-adjusted M2 for the week-ended August 27th up by $64.9 billion to $7.400 trillion. M2 now has risen by $111.1 billion for the last two weeks, rising at an annualized fortnight growth rate of 48.2%.

Depending on the large time deposit numbers due for release on Friday (tomorrow) afternoon, annual M3 growth for August could jump to 14.0%, up from July's 13.0%, and up from my early August estimate of 13.6% made last week.

Despite the Fed coming close to its formal 5.25% fed funds target in the last couple of days, the liquidity crisis continues, and the financial markets remain extremely unstable and dangerous. Once again, watch the dollar!

Additional detail will follow this weekend.

___________________________________________


With relocation to the San Francisco Bay Area pending in the weeks ahead, the September SGS now will be targeted for the week of September 17th. An e-mail advice will be made for it and intervening Flash Update/Alert postings.

Flash Update

Sunday, September 2nd, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - Sep. 2, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

September 2, 2007

__________

Systemic Liquefaction Boosts M3 Growth to 34-Year High

Ongoing Extreme Income Variance Reported for 2006

Financial System Remains Highly Unstable

Phony GDP Satisfied Fed and Administration Needs

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Alternate GDP and August monthly average SGS-Alternate U.S. Dollar Series have been updated and posted to the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com. The SGS-Ongoing M3 data will be posted next weekend, when 27 of 31 days of data will be available. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams


Chairman Bernanke Keeps Tap Dancing on That (Dollar) Landmine


The liquidity crisis continues, and the financial system is groaning under the strain. In the weeks ended August 15th, 22nd and 29th, respectively, seasonally-adjusted (unadjusted is little different) commercial paper outstanding plunged by $91 billion, $90 billion and $63 billion. As other Federal Reserve reporting starts covering the crisis period, key data are showing some impact of Fed actions. For example, seasonally-unadjusted discount window borrowings by banks, following the Fed's heavily touted discount window actions, jumped from a daily average of $6 million in the two weeks ended August 15th, to $1.301 billion in the two weeks ended August 29th. M2 jumped a seasonally-adjusted $43.6 billion in first reporting of the week ended August 20th, up at an annualized growth rate of 36.4%. That, combined with sharp increases in non-M2 components of M3, indicates a spike in annual growth for the SGS-Ongoing M3 August measure, discussed below. Also, the Fed still seems to be enforcing an informal 25-basis-point cut in the fed funds rate, per the accompanying graph. On the recession front, the phony 4.0% GDP growth was reported as expected. At the same time, help-wanted advertising -- a much more reliable economic indicator -- plunged to a 49-year low. Through all this, the U.S. dollar remained relatively stable last week. Such tranquility should prove short-lived.



As shown above, the Fed has hit its announced 5.25% federal funds rate target only twice (Monday and Tuesday last week) since cutting the discount rate three weeks ago. Able to attain an effective fed funds rate of only 5.00% in the last three business days, it still appears as though the U.S. central has eased 25 basis points in all but formal declaration of same.

The inflationary recession is ongoing. On the inflation front, pricing pressures are being felt from surging money supply growth, a weakening U.S. dollar and commodity price problems ranging from food to energy, all areas that are happily and formally ignored or obfuscated by the Fed.

M3 Growth at 34-Year High. Based on reporting for 20 of 31 days for August, and assuming reported component levels for the week-ended August 20th do not change meaningfully in the balance of August reporting, the SGS-Ongoing M3 measure will show annual growth for the month of roughly 13.6%, up from 13.0% in July 2007, and at its highest level since July 1973. In addition to the surge in reported seasonally-adjusted M2 in the latest week, non-M2 components of M3 spiked sharply, coincident with the Fed's liquefaction of the system in crisis. For example, in the week ended August 20th, institutional money funds soared at an annualized rate of 174.5%, while a broad measure of large time deposits (week-ended August 22nd) jumped at an annualized rate of 24.6%.

U.S. Dollar Little Changed in August. Both the Shadow Government Statistics Financial-Weighted Dollar (FWD) and the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted Dollar (TWD) remained near or at historic lows, on average, in August. Based on January 1985 = 100, the FWD inched higher to 49.40 in August, up by 0.29% from July, but it was down 4.71% year-to-year. The TWD was unchanged at 55.78 for the month of August, down by 4.51% year-to-year.

GDP "Booms." On the economic front, the "No need for a Fed Funds cut here" upward revision in the "preliminary" estimate of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) second-quarter GDP growth to 4.0% (3.95%) +/- 3% from the "advance" estimate of 3.4% (3.38%) was just what the doctor (Bernanke) ordered. As discussed in the August newsletter, the GDP number primarily has become political propaganda. The revised second-quarter number still is down at an annualized pace of 0.3% from the first quarter's "final" estimate, before last month's benchmark revisions.

Help-Wanted Advertising (HWA) and Consumer Confidence Falter. Tumbling downhill since a near-term peak in December 2006, seasonally-adjusted July help-wanted advertising dropped to 25, down from 26 in June, and at the lowest level since before Ike (president Eisenhower) was halfway through his second term. While the advent of the Internet has weakened this series in recent years, the current downturn in HWA has been severe enough to signal a deepening recession and a meaningful fall-off in current employment activity.

August consumer confidence (Conference Board) and sentiment (University of Michigan) measures tumbled by 6.2% and 7.7%, respectively, from July even though both surveys did not reflect much of the impact from the public breaking of the liquidity crisis.

Income Variance Continues Signaling Systemic Collapse. One of the few good quality leading indicators, with multi-year lead times, is income variance. As will be detailed in the September newsletter's "Reporting/Market Focus," the various 2006 measures published last week, in the 2006 Poverty Report, hit or stayed near record readings, levels that far exceed the income variance seen before the Great Depression and the 1987 financial panic. This was despite some official monkeying with underlying income numbers. For example, the report showed that inflation-adjusted median income in 2006 declined for both the average working man and woman, for the third year, but it rose for the average household for the second year. Thank goodness for games that can be played with population statistics!

Week Ahead: The August jobs report is due for release on Friday (September 7th). Underlying indicators, such as July's help-wanted advertising and purchasing managers surveys -- both of which tend to lead the jobs report -- suggest a weaker-than-consensus payroll number and a continued upturn in the unemployment rate. Given the Fed's apparent reluctance to cut the fed funds rate, formally, the U.S. central bank likely favors a stronger report, one that would remove pressure to ease, at the same time helping to support the dollar. Given the severity of the current crisis, I would bet on pressures from the Fed generating happier-than-expected numbers.

Additional detail will follow in the September SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


With relocation to the San Francisco Bay Area pending in the weeks ahead, the September SGS -- currently targeted for the September 10th week -- could slip a week to include the release of August CPI. Any such shift would be advised in an Alert/Flash Update next weekend, along with the updated August M3 estimate. An e-mail advice will be made of all postings, including any intervening Flash Updates/Alerts.

Alert

Sunday, August 26th, 2007


JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

A L E R T

August 26, 2007

__________

Effective Fed Funds Target is 4.75%/5.00%

Bernanke's Tactics Not Working Well

Financial Tempest's Eye Wall Stalls Temporarily Shy of Landfall

Rigged Data Provide Inexpensive Market Intervention

__________


PLEASE NOTE: As a point of clarification, the terrible financial tempest that I see breaking is one where massive dollar selling will trigger or exacerbate a major sell-off in U.S. stocks and bonds. Never before have the U.S. markets faced such a severe structural economic downturn or such heavy dependence on foreign capital for liquidity. Not only is the Fed impotent in such a structural shift that also is impeded by a commodity-driven inflation, but also federal fiscal policy has limited impact, where the miscreants in Washington already have embraced uncontainable fiscal excesses.

Where the Fed may find itself spending and creating whatever money it will take to keep the banking system afloat, and where the Fed may have to monetize U.S. Treasury debt dumped by foreign investors, those actions will help set the stage for the coming hyperinflation. Nonetheless, as described in the three-part hyperinflation series that began with the December 2006 SGS, and that will be reiterated in the still-pending Hyperinflation Summary piece, the onset of hyperinflation remains most likely at least several years in the future. When it does hit, however, it should unfold rapidly.

-- Best wishes to all, John Williams


Beware The Dollar


Fed Chairman Bernanke's efforts to stabilize the U.S. financial system have met with minimal success that should prove short-lived. On the plus side has been temporary relative stability in the equity market, aided by extraordinary jawboning and data manipulation, along with market manipulations of the Working Group on Financial Markets (a.k.a. the Plunge Protection Team) as indicated by Treasury Secretary Paulson. On the downside, the liquidity crisis appears not to be contained.

Obviously planted stories in the financial media have touted the Fed's "clever" new approach to liquidity crisis management and how it addresses "moral hazard." Having the Fed address moral hazard in the financial markets is like having a whorehouse madam lecture her girls on the virtues of virginity. Moral hazard is not a primary concern to the Fed when the system is at risk.

The planted stories also explain how there is no need to cut the targeted Fed Funds rate. While there are good reasons not to cut the Fed Funds rate, suggesting it will not happen is ludicrous when the Fed already has done it, as shown below. The Fed Funds shell game is aimed at balancing the needs of short-term Wall Street hype, deemed necessary to goose the stock market, against an extremely serious need to prevent a massive U.S. dollar sell-off. With the economy in an inflationary recession, with the greenback showing new cracks in the last several days, and with the stock market just a month away from squirrelly season, the negative turmoil in the financial markets hardly has begun.

There was a time -- not so many years back -- when the markets had to deduce Federal Reserve policy based on the central bank's behavior. The Fed did not announce its target rate, it just shifted the target and the markets caught on quickly. In something of a throwback to that earlier era, a quick look at the graph below shows that the Fed has shifted the effective Federal Funds rate target lower by 25 to 50 basis points, from the official 5.25%, to within a general range of 4.75% to 5.00%. In the 11 trading days since the discount rate cut, the effective Fed Funds rate has averaged 4.84%.



As to ignoring "moral hazard," the Fed will not let the banks or any major part of the financial system fail, because the system itself would collapse. There is no moral hazard issue for the Fed when the basic system is in danger; whatever liquidity is needed will be provided.

Still, despite the infusion of over $1 trillion in liquidity into the global banking system by a number of central banks during the last two weeks, anecdotal evidence continues to indicate ongoing, major systemic disruptions, with some hard evidence of same surfacing once again in Fed data. For the second week in a row (week-ended August 22nd), commercial paper outstanding declined by roughly $90 billion or 4% (seasonally adjusted), with the decline seen primarily in asset-backed paper. In the week before, the decline had been fairly evenly spread across the categories.

Other Fed reporting in the week ahead should be quite interesting, showing for the first time discount window borrowings and weekly money supply numbers for the beginning of the crisis period.

I ask the forbearance of long-time subscribers on the repetition of the following story. Back in 1989, I retained a mass psychologist to explain why the great stock-market crashes had occurred in October and November. His explanation was that people had a vestigial squirreling instinct. As the signs of winter approach, squirrels hide their acorns and people suddenly become more careful and conservative with their money. Squirrelly season is about one month off.

Aside from signs of an early winter, the missing element in the unfolding crisis remains the U.S. dollar. When major selling of the U.S. currency begins, a massive global liquidity crisis should ensue or be exacerbated, with major sell-offs in both the U.S. equity and bond markets. Flight to safety will be out of the U.S. dollar and U.S. Treasuries and into other traditional safe-haven vehicles such as gold or the Swiss franc. On Friday, the dollar was at its weakest against most major currencies since the discount-window policy shifts, except against the yen, where it still was down from pre-crisis levels.

Beyond any near-term covert central bank currency intervention, rigged economic data or other machinations imposed on the markets, the proximal trigger for the dollar's sell-off could be any one of a number of factors ranging from an official Fed easing to expanded U.S. military activity in the Middle East. Dollar selling is likely to start with little warning and should accelerate rapidly.

Near-Term Economic Data Manipulation May Have Moved to the Fore. As discussed in the last newsletter, the improvement in the June trade data appeared rigged in an effort to help relieve selling pressure on the U.S. dollar. That particular series has been used before. Near-term data manipulation is a very easy and inexpensive way of salving troubled financial markets.

Last week's reporting of two particularly volatile series showed happy upside surprises that played into a stock-market rally. While regular volatility could explain the good news, the results have to be somewhat suspect, given the extreme dangers present in the financial system. The economy certainly did not turnaround in July, and the liquidity crisis should have taken a further noticeable bite out of activity in August.

Seasonally-adjusted new orders for July durable goods rose by 5.9% (6.2% net of revisions) for the month, following a 1.9% increase in June, with July's annual growth at a strong 9.3%. Nondefense capital goods orders rose by 5.8% for the month, 16.2% on an annual basis.

Seasonally-adjusted new home sales for July gained 2.8% (4.3% net of revisions) for the month, following June's 4.0% decline. Annual change in July narrowed to a 10.2% contraction from a 21.2% drop the month before.

With data manipulation a cheap form of market intervention, economic releases of the month ahead should determine if a new and gimmicked reporting pattern is in place for the popular government data.

Week Ahead: Thanks to the suspect June trade data, the "preliminary estimate" revision to second-quarter GDP growth should be to the upside, taking the initial annualized quarterly real growth rate of 3.4% close to or above market expectations of roughly 4.0% (or a "No need for a Fed Funds cut here" result).

Additional detail will follow in the September SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


The September "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter remains targeted for the week of September 10th. An e-mail advice will be made of all postings, including intervening Flash Updates/Alerts.

August 2007 Edition

Sunday, August 19th, 2007
JWSGS - August 2007 EDITION - Aug. 19, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Issue Numbers 34

August 19, 2007

__________

Terrible Financial Tempest Nears Landfall

Fear of Bank Runs Appeared to Force Bernanke into His Tap-Dancing-on-the-Dollar-Landmine Routine

Deteriorating Inflationary Recession Promises Greater Liquidity Woes

Key Reporting Appears Shifted to "Let's Not Hurt the Markets" Mode

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The SGS-Alternate CPI measure and SGS-Ongoing M3 (based on full-month data) for July have been posted to the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com. Best wishes to all -- John Williams


OVERVIEW -- OPENING COMMENTS


The systemic liquidity crisis began running out of control last week, with stories of a run on a major bank. Keep in mind that there is not enough physical cash in the system to handle a major bank run in the traditional sense (see March 2007 SGS). Circumstances became dire enough to force Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke into publicly visible actions, announcing a 50-basis-point cut in the discount rate and starting to play a three-card monte game with the federal funds rate. Stocks rallied Friday in response, but the Fed's actions have set the stage for a massive dollar sell-off, which can frustrate lower market rates. With the economy in a deepening, inflationary recession, and with the first major Atlantic hurricane of the season within striking range of Gulf of Mexico energy infrastructure, financial-market turmoil likely has only just begun to unfold.

Bank Runs and Commercial Paper Woes Shake the Fed. The Fed issued two statements on Friday (August 17th). First, was the announced cut from 6.25% to 5.75% for the discount rate cut, which is the interest rate charged by the central bank to troubled banks borrowing at the discount window. The "temporary changes" to the Fed's primary credit discount window facility also included "term financing for as long as 30 days, renewable by the borrower" -- versus the usual overnight lending -- and an emphasis on the "broad range of collateral for discount window loans, including home mortgages and related assets."

With its primary responsibility of maintaining the liquidity and solvency of the banking system, the Fed ostensibly made these moves to assure liquidity to any banks that needed it. Yet, the Fed could have done all that sub rosa, without signaling to the public that systemic problems had reached crisis levels. Accordingly, the moves appear to have been aimed more at reassuring depositors that their banks would remain liquid.

The Fed's discount window announcements followed a collapse in the commercial paper market and a day of press reports of a run on Countrywide Bank, a federal savings bank with "more than $107 billion in assets." In addition, rumors of troubled commercial banks had started to surface.

On Friday afternoon, following the Fed's morning actions, Countrywide issued a press release, with bank president Tim Wennes emphasizing, "It is important for Countrywide Bank's valued customers to know that the highly publicized issues related to the mortgage market do not impact the safety of FDIC insured deposits at Countrywide Bank."

The release added: "Bank representatives are trained experts in helping customers structure their accounts to maximize the FDIC protections available to them." The release also mentioned that the bank "continued to receive 'investment-grade' ratings by the three major credit rating agencies."

With due respect to the banking strategists who structured that press release, if I had deposits in excess of FDIC limits, that press release would have me moving my cash out of that bank as soon as possible. It would be quite surprising if any bank runs or stories and rumors of same have yet run their course.

Also reflecting liquidity stresses, commercial paper outstanding collapsed an unprecedented 4.1% for the week-ended August 15th (seasonally adjusted, with similar movement in the unadjusted series), with total outstandings dropping by $89.1 billion, from $2,223.5 billion to $2,132.4 billion.

The Fed's second announcement on Friday was an implicit shift in outlook to a weaker economy and to an easing bias. "Financial market conditions have deteriorated, and tighter credit conditions and increased uncertainty have the potential to restrain economic growth," noted the Fed. Temporarily dropping "inflation" from its vocabulary, the U.S. central added that, "... downside risks to growth have increased appreciably."

Market sentiment shifted immediately to an easing at the next FOMC meeting, along with further rate cuts in the year ahead. There are, however, major complicating factors to such a simplistic and Pollyannaish view.



First, the Fed already has eased -- at least tacitly -- as shown in the graph above. The effective federal funds rate has been between 25 and 75 basis points below target for the last week.

Second, inflation is as much problem as it was a week ago. The myths that the Fed's primary missions are to contain inflation and promote sustainable economic growth -- goals that supposedly can be met simply with respective tightening or easing policies -- will fall to the reality of a banking system in trouble. The inflation fight was just trumped by one liquidity crisis. The stimulate-the-economy fight is likely to be abandoned in the even greater liquidity crisis that looms with a massive dollar sell-off.

Indeed, the third complicating factor is the U.S. Dollar, which has been sitting at the edge of the abyss for some time. The Fed's actions most likely will trigger massive dumping of the greenback. Central bank intervention can provide short-lived mitigation, and the dollar has had mixed pressures from flight-to-quality issues and some unwinding of the yen carry trade. Exacerbated by perceptions of U.S. interest rates headed lower, however, liquidity flight shortly should shift to be out of the U.S. dollar and dollar-denominated assets. A plunge in the greenback's value combined with U.S. financial market dependence on foreign capital for liquidity would make significant or protracted easing by the Fed a difficult, if not counter-productive, task.

Systemic liquidity problems will get much worse as the effects of the still largely unrecognized recession take their toll on a variety of carefully structured securities and investment/hedging instruments. The crisis should intensify sharply when the dollar's sell-off begins. Despite the trillions of dollars in electronic "cash," if the banking crisis expands and there are any major physical runs on banks, it is conceivable that a cash shortage could force a short-term banking holiday. Despite all assurances of adequate liquidity in the system, the impact likely would not be a happy one for the financial markets.

Economic Problems Persist. Although the "advance" estimate of second-quarter real (inflation-adjusted) GDP growth rebounded to above average, it contracted by an annualized 0.9%, net of the annual revisions (see Reporting/Market Focus). Retail sales, industrial production and new orders for durable goods were soft. The employment report and help-wanted advertising were much worse than expected, as were the purchasing managers surveys. The annual decline in housing deepened, again.



As shown in the graph of the three-month moving average of annual change in housing starts, the recent decline in starts remains the weakest since the 1990/1991 recession.

The trade deficit, however, showed a healthy but highly suspect narrowing in June. As reported, the numbers suggest there will be some upside revision to the already heavily bloated estimate of second-quarter GDP growth. More importantly, though, the "good" trade report helped support the dollar when such was needed. The trade data easily are manipulated by altering the paperwork flows of monthly exports and imports. Such was done following the 1987 panic and Alan Greenspan's abandonment of the dollar, in an effort to help stabilize and turn the U.S. dollar to the upside. Such was accomplished in early 1988 in conjunction with extraordinarily massive central bank dollar-support intervention.

PLEASE NOTE: A "General background note" provides a broad background paragraph on certain series or concepts. Where the language used in past and subsequent newsletters usually has been or will be identical, month-after-month, any text changes in these sections will be highlighted in bold italics upon first usage. This is designed so that regular readers may avoid re-reading material they have seen before, but where they will have the material available for reference, if so desired.

General background note: The U.S. economy is in a protracted and deepening structural recession that will prove to be the second leg of a double-dip recession, which began in 2000/2001. The current downleg was signaled in mid-2005 by a series of leading indicators used for that purpose by SGS. With neither traditional fiscal nor monetary stimulus available to help turn economic activity, the current circumstance is likely to evolve into a hyperinflationary depression (see December 2006 SGS).

Inflation Problems Persist. With annual M3 growth holding at 13% in June, along with a generally weakening dollar, near-record-high oil prices and sharply spiking food costs, contained inflation is not in the offing. Standard PPI inflation was stronger than expected, standard CPI was weaker than expected. In the both instances, though, food costs clearly were understated. Despite "unexpected" moves in the full inflation measures, the gimmicked "core" concept -- spun so strongly by Wall Street hypesters -- keeps coming in at or below consensus forecasts. That circumstance strongly suggests those numbers are being massaged.

Market Turmoil Likely to Increase. The markets are in turmoil with extreme daily stock-market volatility and flight to quality issues impacting the dollar, gold and interest rates. Key to near-term activity is what happens to the U.S. dollar. If it begins a significant sell-off, as I expect, that will frustrate any easing attempts by the Fed, boost long-term interest rates and bolster gold, while meaningfully tanking equities. Chances that the liquidity crisis has run its course are close to nil.

Alternate Realities. General background note: This section updates the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting. When a government economic measure does not match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Federal Reserve, White House and Wall Street. In these alternate measures, the effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan-Era GDP. The methodologies for the series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS (see Archives page at www.shadowstats.com).

GDP. The alternate second-quarter GDP growth reflects the "advance" estimate, with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate second-quarter inflation-adjusted annual growth rate (year-to-year, as opposed to the popularly-touted annualized quarter-to-quarter rate) for GDP was a decline of roughly 2.3% versus the official year-to-year gain of 1.8%. These numbers incorporate the annual revisions published on July 27th, which are reviewed in this month's Reporting/Market Focus.



General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate GDP numbers tend to show deeper and more protracted recessions than have been reported formally or reflected in related official reporting. Nonetheless, the patterns shown in the alternate data are broadly consistent with the payroll employment and industrial production series (as revised), which are major indicators used by the National Bureau of Economic Research in determining the official timing of U.S. business cycles.

CPI. The annual non-core annual inflation rates eased somewhat in July, while the so-called "core" inflation rates held at June's levels. Food and oil-related price pressures remain a problem, due primarily to supply issues, but those pressures have been avoided in much of the government's reporting of the non-core inflation, so far. Both core and regular annual inflation reporting should rise sharply in the months ahead.


                             Eight Levels of Inflation
                      Annual Inflation for April to July 2007


2007 Measure Apr May Jun Jul
I.1 Core PCE Deflator (r) 2.1% 2.0% 1.9% n.a. I.2 Core Chained-CPI-U 2.0% 1.9% 1.8% 1.8% I.3 Core CPI-U 2.3% 2.2% 2.2% 2.2% I.4 PCE Deflator (r) 2.3% 2.4% 2.3% n.a I.5 Chained-CPI-U 2.3% 2.3% 2.3% 2.1% I.6 CPI-U 2.6% 2.7% 2.7% 2.4% I.7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U 6.0% 6.1% 6.1% 5.7% I.8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation 10.2% 10.3% 10.3% 10.1%

(r) Revised upwardly in annual revisions of July 27/31. Notes: I.1 to I.3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively, of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U. I.4 to I.6 are the same measures with energy and food inflation included. The CPI-U (I.6) is the measure popularly followed by the financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation. I.7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre- Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top series in the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com. I.8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which reverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so, plus an adjustment for the portion of Clinton-Era geometric weighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic bookkeeping.




General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate CPI numbers tend to show significantly higher inflation over time, generally reflecting the reversal of hedonic adjustments, geometric weighting and the use of a more traditional approach to measuring housing costs, measures all consistent with the reporting methodology in place as of 1980.

MARKETS PERSPECTIVE


Last month, I noted, "little action can be expected from the Fed, until either a dollar panic or systemic liquidity issues force its hand. The Fed otherwise remains hamstrung, unable with its impaired monetary tools either to contain a commodity-driven inflation or to stimulate a structurally damaged economy. Unfortunately, signs of both risk cases -- dollar selling and possible systemic liquidity issues -- are starting to surface."

The systemic liquidity crisis should continue blossoming for at least the next several weeks, with the dollar-panic risk case likely to kick in soon. At such time as the "flight-to-safety" switches from into to out of the dollar and Treasuries, stocks and bonds will sell off heavily.

General background note: The U.S. economy remains in a severe, structural inflationary recession, saddled with an impotent Fed and a federal government that is fiscally bankrupt in all but name. In combination, these factors offer the worst of all environments to the financial markets. Ahead lie higher long-term interest rates and much lower U.S. equity prices. On the plus side is the outlook for gold, which provides a solid hedge against many of the problems that have started to surface. Key to the near-term movements of these markets remains the fate of the U.S. dollar, which appears to be near a major downside move.

U.S. Equities -- After hitting all-time highs a month ago, most U.S. stock indexes have sold off fairly sharply. The burgeoning liquidity problems have generated increasing volatile and generally negative market activity. Underlying fundamentals are not likely to improve for some time.

General background note: As the equity markets catch up with the underlying economic and looming financial fundamentals, the downside adjustments to stock prices should be quite large, eventually rivaling the 90% decline in equities seen in the 1929 crash and ensuing several years. The decline might have to be measured in real terms (net of inflation), as a hyperinflation eventually will kick in as the Fed moves to liquefy the system. Stocks do tend to follow inflation, since revenues and earnings get denominated in inflated dollars. Hence with a hyperinflation, a DJIA of 100,000 or 100,000,000 could be expected, but such still would be below today's levels, adjusted for inflation.

General background note: The approaching financial maelstrom already has come over the horizon and now is nearing landfall. When it hits, those investors who have taken shelter in cash, gold and outside the U.S. dollar will be the ones with the wealth and assets available to take advantage of the extraordinary investment opportunities that should follow.

U.S. Credit Market -- Recent credit market activity has been dominated by the still unfolding liquidity crisis, and the markets will continue to gyrate accordingly. Some "flight to quality" has pushed down long-term Treasury yields, while Fed actions have raised market expectations of an imminent easing.

Confounding any efforts to force a protracted period of lower interest rates likely will be a severe decline in the U.S. dollar, and that can break at any moment. Inflation problems also will worsen markedly, frightening the already battered markets. As a result, six months to a year from now, I expect long-term interest rates will be much higher than they are now, with a sharp, positively-sloped yield curve.

U.S. Dollar -- With the Fed rumbling about easing and already tacitly targeting a lower fed funds rate, the U.S. dollar is poised for a major sell-off. At times of disorderly markets, central banks are noted for covert intervention in various markets, particularly the currency markets. Such intervention, however, usually proves to be short-lived. In the matter of a week, the timeframe for a likely massive hit on the greenback has moved much closer, perhaps within the next week or two, depending how market conditions break.

[Following paragraph text corrected from original posting] Opening the markets for an across-the-board dollar rout, the dollar tumbled against the yen in the last week or so, due to the unwinding of the carry trade, while the greenback held even or strengthened slightly against most other major currencies.

Potentially exacerbating the circumstance are recent moves by Communist China to threaten use of their dollar sales "nuclear option" (see Alert of August 12th), and by Iran requesting that Japanese buyers pay for their oil purchases in yen. The U.S. markets are particularly vulnerable, at the moment, to "surprises" from those countries that are not so friendly to the United States, or even from those who simply would like to avoid large losses on the dollars they hold.

The fundamentals underlying the U.S. currency remain extraordinarily negative, as discussed below, and have been upped a significant notch by the systemic liquidity crisis and the Fed's response to same. A full blown dollar crisis can break with little or no warning.

Beyond Federal Reserve missteps, or major negative surprises out of the liquidity crisis, the proximal trigger for a dollar panic could come from a bad economic statistic, political missteps by the Administration, negative trade or market developments in Asia, or a terrorist attack or even still-likely military action against Iran. When it hits, the broad selling pressure should be strong enough to overcome any short-lived central bank intervention.

General background note: In terms of underlying fundamentals that tend to drive currency trading, the dollar's portfolio could not be worse. Relative to major trading partners, the U.S. economy is much weaker, interest rates are lower and promised to go lower still, inflation is higher, fiscal and trade-balance conditions are abysmal, and relative political stability is at a nadir. The President's approval rating commonly has moved currency trading in the past, and, despite any near-term bouncing, it remains lower than has been seen for any other U.S. President in the post-World War II era. Relative political stability issues are compounded by the presence of a Congress that is increasingly hostile to the President. Generally, the greater the magnitude of the dollar selling, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. capital markets.

As shown in the following graph, the U.S. dollar weakened in July, setting or approaching new record lows on both a financial- and trade-weighted basis. The added August 17th data points show current levels at or slightly above the July averages.



General background note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS for methodology.

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics' Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (FWD) is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For July 2007, the monthly dollar average fell by 2.03% after a monthly gain of 0.11% in June. The July 2007 average index level of 49.25 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 6.08% from July 2006, with June down 4.11% from the year before. The index's historic monthly-average low was 48.98 in April 1995.

Dropping to another all-time monthly-average low, July's level of the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (TWD) fell 1.80% versus June, which was down by 0.34% from May. The July 2007 index level of 55.78 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 5.41% from July 2006, against June's 3.16% decline from the year before.

Gold -- As of Friday (August 17th), gold was trading around $658 per troy ounce and silver around $11.70. For July, the monthly-average gold price (London afternoon fix per Kitco.com) averaged $665.30 per troy ounce, against June's $655.49 per troy ounce. Silver averaged $12.91 per troy ounce in July, down from $13.14 in June.

Gold price volatility continues but generally, price movement has been mixed during the breaking systemic liquidity crisis. Highly suspect here is the possibility of covert central bank intervention. At such time as the U.S. dollar begins its massive sell-off, gold and silver likely will spike sharply to the upside. Indeed, despite central-bank machinations or intervention, the upside potential for the precious metals remains explosive, new record high prices loom.

General background note: As discussed in the Hyperinflation Series (see the December 2006 to March 2007 SGSs), the eventual complete collapse of the U.S. dollar -- the world's reserve currency -- will force the creation of a new international currency system. Gold likely will be structured into any replacement system, in an effort by those organizing the new currency structure to gain public acceptance.





The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show July averages as well as added points for closing prices on August 17th. As we go to press, gold is trading around $658, oil is around $72 and the Swiss franc is around $0.83. Look for all three measures to trade significantly higher in the months ahead.


REPORTING PERSPECTIVE


The Big Three Market Movers


With the financial markets in turmoil, recent CPI and trade reporting, in particular, showed unusual results, suggestive of some manipulation aimed at soothing unfortunate market pressures. The bulk of the other major economic reports, however, generally have continued coming in on the soft side of expectations.

Friday's Fed statements helped move financial-market sentiment towards recession, and increasingly towards the view of a recessionary economy beset by inflation problems. The full extent of the economy's plight, however, is far from having broad recognition.

With the President's positive rating still bottom bouncing and with a nervous Fed trying to contain an expanding systemic meltdown, recent and upcoming releases of major series have been, and likely will continue to be, subject to some manipulation, as mentioned above. Statistical games are being played for both the perceived political needs of the Administration and the increasingly heavy financial market needs of an impotent Federal Reserve. We are looking now at moves that border on national security issues.

Absent manipulation, and against lagging and still largely distorted market expectations, most near-term economic reporting should tend to surprise the markets on the downside, while most inflation reporting should tend to surprise expectations on the upside.

Employment/Unemployment -- The seasonally-adjusted July nonfarm payrolls rose by 92,000 (84,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for the month. June payrolls were up a revised 126,000 (previously 132,000). Annual growth slowed sharply from 1.47% in June to 1.34% in July.

As noted in the August 5th Alert, the only thing surprising about the July employment and unemployment report was that the rigging was not set to show stronger numbers. Most of the following commentary is repeated from that Alert.

As with other recent monthly reports, applying consistent not-seasonally-adjusted year-to-year change to the seasonally-adjusted numbers yielded lower than advertised jobs growth. Applying July's unadjusted annual growth rate, to the adjusted numbers, yields an adjusted monthly July payroll increase of 47,000, about half of the official 92,000 gain.

The statistically-sounder household survey, showed employment down by 30,000 for the month, with the seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate rising to 4.65% +/- 0.23% in July, from 4.53% in June. Unadjusted U.3 rose to 4.9% from 4.7% in June, while the broader U.6 measure rose to 8.6% from 8.5% (unadjusted) and to 8.3% from 8.2% (adjusted). Net of the "discouraged workers" defined out of existence during the Clinton Administration, traditional unemployment continues to run around 12%.

The payroll data appear to be under careful management, as seen in the most recent revisions and seasonal-adjustment gimmicks. In revision, the unadjusted total nonfarm payrolls in May and June moved higher, respectively, by 32,000 (138,623 to 138,655) and by 34,000 (139,127 to 139,161). What is unusual is that the adjusted series were nearly unchanged in revision, down by 2,000 in May (137,906 to 137,904) and down by 8,000 in June (138,038 to 138,030). Normally, the changes in the unadjusted series would flow through to the adjusted series with little variation. Where revisions to the data come in on an unadjusted basis, seasonal adjustments for May and June were altered so as to maintain something close to the original reporting level. Why, still remains a question, but the data have been carefully adjusted to maintain someone's reporting agendum.

The July employment gain was against a background of plunging help-wanted advertising, slightly positive movement in new claims for unemployment insurance and weaker employment numbers in the July purchasing managers surveys (see respective sections). These background numbers remain consistent with continued weakness in official jobs and unemployment reporting.

The monthly bias factor (birth/death model) in July was an add-on of 26,000, compared with 21,000 a year ago. Where the August 2006 bias factor was 122,000, such suggests some upside pressure on the August 2007 payroll estimate.

Next Release (September 7): The August payroll survey should show underlying economic weakness and disappoint market expectations. Financial market instabilities, however, would tend to favor a massaged number that could be deemed a positive for the markets. In like manner, reality should be an ongoing rise in the unemployment rate, barring manipulations.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) -- The "advance" estimate of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth for the second quarter of 2007 was 3.38% +/- 3%, matching consensus forecasts (the Bureau of Economic Analysis has been known to target consensus forecasts with its advance guesstimate), but well beyond credibility for this most politicized of economic series. The second quarter's gain rebounded from 0.60% in the first quarter, while year-to-year growth jumped to 1.78% in the second quarter, up from 1.55% in the first.

These numbers reflected significant annual revisions (see this month's Reporting/Market Focus). The changes were sharp enough on the downside that net of revisions, annualized second quarter GDP showed a contraction of 0.86% and annual growth was up by 1.1%.

On the inflation front, the GDP deflator in the second quarter helped to spike real growth, with annualized inflation of just 2.69% against the 4.23% inflation pace estimated for the first quarter. Generally, historical deflator estimates were revised so as to show meaningfully higher inflation than had been previously reported.

Although the GDP report is the government's broadest estimate of U.S. economic activity, it is also the least meaningful and most heavily massaged of all major government economic series. Published by the BEA, it primarily has become a tool for economic propaganda. Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS-Alternate GDP measure suggests economic reality is much weaker than officially reported. Alternate year-to-year annual contractions continue, with an annual 2.3% contraction in the second quarter deepening from the 2.2% decline in the first quarter (see the graph in the Alternate Reality section of the Opening Comments).

Next Release (August 30): The "preliminary" estimate revision of annualized quarterly real GDP growth for the second quarter should show even stronger growth, given the nonsense published with the reported narrowing of the June trade deficit.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) -- The BLS reported the seasonally-adjusted July CPI-U (I.6) up by 0.13% (down by 0.03% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval) for the month, compared with a 0.19% (0.19% unadjusted) gain in June. Annual inflation eased to 2.36% in July from 2.69% in June. Annualized year-to-date inflation through July was 4.56% adjusted, 5.60% unadjusted. The accounting for both CPI-U and PPI inflation was suspiciously shy in the area of food inflation, against significant anecdotal evidence to the upside.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) (I.5) -- the substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by the manipulators as the replacement for the CPI-U -- was 2.08% in July, versus 2.32% in June.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology (I.7), annual CPI growth was about 5.7% in July versus 6.1% in June, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (I.8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was roughly 10.1% in July versus 10.3% in June. The eight levels of annual inflation, I.1 to I.8, are shown in the table in the Alternate Reality section, along with the graph of SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation.

Next Release (September 19): Annual inflation generally will continue rising into at least the early part of 2008. Seasonally-adjusted, monthly CPI-U increased by 0.3% in August 2006. Any monthly reporting above or below that for the pending release of August 2007 CPI will add or subtract directly to or from the current annual CPI-U inflation rate. Reporting risks generally favor an upside surprise to modest market expectations. A renewed upside movement in core inflation remains long overdue.


Other Troubled Key Series


Federal Deficit -- General background note: The federal government's fiscal 2006 (fiscal year-end September 30th) deficit, prepared based on generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), widened to $4.6 trillion from 2005's $3.5 trillion. Those numbers dwarfed the officially-gimmicked 2006 federal budget deficit of $248.2 billion, which was down $70.8 billion from 2005's $318.5 billion (see the December SGS).

General background note: Although it lacks the accrual accounting of the GAAP numbers, the change in gross federal debt bypasses several of the reporting manipulations and is a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the official, gimmicked deficit reporting. As of fiscal year-end 2006, the gross federal debt stood at $8.507 trillion, up $574 billion from 2005, which in turn was up $554 billion from 2004.

For the rolling 12 months through July 2007, the gimmicked deficit was $165.8 billion versus $255.4 billion in July 2006, compared with the rolling deficits of $162.7 billion in June 2007 and $275.5 billion in June 2006. The gap in the year-to-year rolling deficits has continued to narrow.

For July 31, 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $8.932 trillion, up $64 billion from June and up $488 billion from July 2006, which in turn was up $557 billion from July 2005. For June 30, 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $8.868 trillion, up $39 billion from May and up $448 billion from June 2006, which in turn was up $584 billion from June 2005.

General background note: The Administration and Congress continue playing bookkeeping games. Even so, the gimmicked deficit should widen in the next 12 months, as government finances begin to suffer from tax revenue losses due to the intensifying recession and relative tax receipt declines after the expiration of recent corporate tax incentives. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy's mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance -- Annual growth in initial claims has continued to soften, turningd marginally negative (an economic positive). On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended August 11th, annual change was a contraction of 1.7%, versus the 17 weeks ended July 14th, where annual growth was 0.1%.

General background note: More often than not, week-to-week volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly claims numbers is due to the Labor Department's efforts to seasonally adjust these numbers around holiday periods, such as Easter, Memorial Day, July 4th and Labor Day. The Labor Department has demonstrated an inability to do such adjusting successfully. When the new claims series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings -- July's seasonally-adjusted monthly real earnings fell by 0.1% after a revised 0.6% (was 0.5%) gain in June. Annual growth held at 1.3% for both July and June.

General background note: Gyrations in the poor quality of reported CPI growth account for most month-to-month volatility in this series. Adjusting for the major upside biases built into the CPI-W inflation measure used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series shows the average worker to be under severe financial stress in an ongoing recession.

Retail Sales -- July's seasonally-adjusted retail sales rose by 0.29% (up 0.59% net of revisions) +/- 0.9% (95% confidence interval), after declining by a revised 0.72% (previously down 0.89%). With monthly CPI up by 0.13%, seasonally-adjusted monthly retail sales were up by roughly 0.1% after inflation. What is unusual. though, is that the increases in food and restaurant sales -- largely due to food inflation -- were not reflected fully in the CPI. Fully reflected, CPI inflation would have been higher and real retail sales growth would have been negative. Increasingly, retail sales are reflecting relative strength due to rising prices, and the real retail sales number will become more important in assessing the strength of consumer spending.

On a year-to-year basis, July retail sales were up by 3.25% before inflation and by just 0.89% after inflation, compared with respective annual growth numbers for June of 4.01% (previously 3.77%) and 1.32%.

General background note: Real (inflation-adjusted) year-to-year growth in retail sales below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation) signals recession, and a signal first was generated in this business cycle back in June 2006.

Next Release (September 14): August retail sales should come in below market expectations, barring manipulation, and increasingly below the rate of inflation on both a monthly and a year-to-year basis.

Industrial Production -- Seasonally-adjusted industrial production rose by 0.3% (0.4% net of revisions) in July, against a revised 0.6% (was 0.5%) in June. Despite the intermittent monthly gains, annual growth continues to slow to recessionary levels. Annual growth from February through July has slowed as follows: February 2.88%, March 2.25%, April 1.91%, May 1.77%, June 1.44%, July 1.38%.

Next Release (September 14): Look for August industrial production to move once again towards a pattern of contraction, shy of any utility surge from unseasonably hot weather. Eventually, monthly contractions in this series should become regular, with the rapidly slowing annual growth turning negative.

New Orders for Durable Goods -- For June, the usually volatile durable goods orders gained 1.4% for the month, on a seasonally-adjusted basis, after falling a revised 2.3% (was down 2.8%) in May. As noted in the July 29th Alert, June's new orders were down 0.5%, net of Boeing's successful launch of the 787, where production from the orders will be stretched out over years, instead of one month. On an annual basis, durable goods orders fell a recessionary 0.6%

The closely followed nondefense capital goods new orders rose by 4.6% after falling 5.8% in May. Again, they were down in June net of aircraft orders. June's annual growth rate for nondefense capital goods was 5.5%.

General background note: Durable goods orders lost its status as a solid leading economic indicator when the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders in 2002.

Trade Balance -- The seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for June narrowed to $58.1 billion, with May's reading revising to $59.2 billion (previously $60.0 billion). The June detail showed higher oil imports, based both on higher prices and higher physical volume, but the current trade shortfall remains well shy of reality.

The latest data promise some upside revision to second-quarter GDP growth, and also helps the dollar, with the Fed starting to look like it is abandoning the greenback. Historically, such as in 1987/1988, disruptions of import paper flows have been used to adjust initial trade deficit reporting. Something like that appears to be in play at the moment. Revisions next year should tell the story.

Next Release (September 11): Odds favor renewed deterioration in the July monthly trade deficit, barring ongoing manipulation. Reporting risk generally remains on the negative side of consensus forecasts. The months ahead should see a pattern of regularly increasing deficits that shortly, again, will be setting new records.

Consumer Confidence -- July confidence measures rose, and Wall Street hypesters trumpeted the highest Conference Board reading in six years. That, of course, was in the middle of the last formal recession. Like help-wanted advertising, consumer confidence never recovered from the last economic downturn.

Indeed, July consumer confidence rose, with the Conference Board's Confidence measure up 6.9% for the month, and the three-month moving average up by 2.9% year-to-year. The University of Michigan's Sentiment measure rose by 6.0% for the month, with the three-month moving average up by 6.2% year-to-year.

These lagging, not leading, indicators tend to reflect the tone of the popular financial media and recently have suggested that the economy has continued to falter. Wait until you see the numbers for August! The current financial crisis will not play out well for these series.

General background note: The Conference Board measure is seasonally adjusted, which can provide occasional, but significant distortion. The adjustment does not make much sense and is of suspect purpose, given that the Conference Board does not release the unadjusted number. The Michigan survey is unadjusted. How does one seasonally-adjust peoples' attitudes? Also, beware the mid-month Consumer Sentiment release from the University of Michigan. Its sampling base is so small as to be virtually valueless in terms of statistical significance.

Short-Term Credit Measures -- Patterns of annual growth in consumer and commercial borrowing were mixed through June/July, with consumer credit growth slowing in contrast to generally stronger commercial borrowing. As noted in the Opening Comments, however, commercial paper outstanding plunged in the August 15th week as part of the unfolding liquidity crisis.

Annual growth has held at 5.0% for April, May and June, for seasonally-adjusted consumer credit, which includes credit cards and auto loans, but not mortgages. In the current environment, where inflation-adjusted growth in income is not adequate to support meaningful growth in the personal consumption component of GDP, GDP growth only can come from temporary debt expansion or savings liquidation. Accordingly, stagnant consumer debt expansion places a constraint on economic growth.

Commercial borrowing growth, however, continued to be strong on a year-to-year basis before the liquidity crunch hit, with annual growth in commercial paper outstanding rising at 18.8% in July versus 19.6% in June. Annual growth in commercial and industrial loans was 12.8% in July, up from 12.3% in June. Solid growth in the commercial credit measures can signal credit needs tied either to rising sales and receivables/inventory, or to slowing sales and slowing collections and involuntarily rising inventories, but the mid-August liquidity crisis quickly could negatively impact business activity.

Producer Price Index (PPI) -- Rebounding beyond market expectations, the July finished goods PPI rose by a seasonally-adjusted 0.6% (0.7% unadjusted), versus a decline of 0.2% (down 0.4% unadjusted) in June. Annual PPI in July rose to 4.0% from June's 3.3%. Seasonally-adjusted intermediate and crude goods rose by 0.6% and 1.2% in July, against gains of 0.5% and 0.3% in June. The accounting for both PPI and CPI-U inflation, however, was suspiciously shy in the area of food inflation, against significant upside anecdotal evidence.

Next Release (September 18): Despite the regular random volatility of the monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months generally should come in above market expectations. As with the CPI, the core PPI inflation rate still is long overdue for an upside surprise.


Better-Quality Numbers


General background note: The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders -- Playing some catch up and resuming its trend toward showing a recession in manufacturing, the overall July ISM manufacturing index fell to 53.8 from 56.0 in June, with the July employment index down to 50.2 from June's 51.1. Continued decline in the broad series is a good bet in the next several months, based on declining annual activity in a variety of underlying series.

The July new orders index backed off to 57.5, from June's 60.3. Seasonal-factor distortions, which have been present, usually are overcome by viewing the series using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the July new orders index was up by 5.7% versus a 5.1% gain June.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading below 50.0 indicates contracting new orders. The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004. As an SGS early warning indicator of a major economic shift, the new orders measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating a signal of pending recession.

Service Sector Index. The service-sector ISM index does not have much meaning related to overall business activity, since new order activity at law firms, hospitals or fast-food restaurants has little obvious relationship to broad economic activity. That said, the overall July services sector index also declined in July, to 55.8 from June's 60.7. Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. The July employment component plunged to 51.7 from 55.0 in June. The prices paid component is covered in the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) -- The Conference Board reported that help-wanted advertising plummeted still again, to 26 in June, down from 27 in May, closing in on an all-time low. Even allowing for the advertising volume lost to the Internet in recent years, the current weakness is enough to signal a deepening problem in the employment sector. The June number was down 18.8% from the year before, compared with an 18.2% drop in May.

Viewed on a three-month moving-average basis, June's year-to-year change was a contraction of 17.2% versus May's 18.3%. The series still indicates rapidly deteriorating employment conditions. Where the index never recovered from the 2000/2001 recession, its renewed and ongoing plunge has signaled a new and rapid contraction in economic activity. Continued deterioration remains likely in the months ahead.

Housing Starts -- As discussed again in this month's Opening Comments, ongoing weakness in the housing starts remains in place, with an updated graph showing annual growth on a three-month moving-average basis.

July's seasonally-adjusted housing starts fell by 6.1% +/- 10% (95% confidence interval) for the month, after a revised 2.1% (previously 2.3%) monthly gain in June. Year-to-year, July starts were down by 20.9% (+/- 7.1%), versus a drop of 19.4%% in June.

Confirming ongoing weakness in the housing sector, July building permits were down 2.8% for the month and 22.6% for the year. In June reporting, new home sales were down 22.3% year-to-year, while June existing home sales were down 11.4% at an annual rate.

Inflation Indicators

Money Supply -- The money supply comments move into the Inflation Indicators section this month, given their import in that area. The SGS Ongoing M3 estimate of annual growth for the July average came in at 13.0%, the same as in June. That pace of growth remains uncomfortably high in terms of its inflationary implications.



General background note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the SGS Ongoing M3 estimates, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS for methodology. The indicated M3 levels below are our best estimate and are provided at specific subscriber request. Keep in mind that regular revisions in the related Fed series affect historical M3. Usually, annual growth rates hold, although levels may shift a little. We have not attempted, nor do we plan to recreate a revised historical series for an M3 monthly-average level going back in time. The purpose of the SGS series was and is to provide monthly estimates of ongoing annual M3 growth. We are comfortable with those numbers and that our estimated monthly growth rates are reasonably close to what the Fed would be reporting, if it still reported M3. With those caveats on the table, here are the monthly-average levels for M3:

      Shadow Government Statistics Ongoing M3
  (Estimated seasonally-adjusted monthly average)


Current Yr Before Month $ Tril $ Tril % Yr/Yr

Mar 07 11.541 10.347 11.6% Apr 11.722 (r) 10.417 12.5% May 11.864 (r) 10.490 13.1% Jun 11.919 10.547 13.0% Jul 12.004 10.624 13.0%

(p) July's preliminary estimate is based on full-month reporting. (r) Revised.

NOTE OF CAUTION: The estimates of monthly levels best are used for comparisons with other dollar amounts, such as nominal GDP. While the estimates are based on seasonally- adjusted Federal Reserve data, great significance cannot be read into the month-to-month changes, as was the case when the Fed published the series. The most meaningful way to view the data is in terms of year-to-year change.


Based on the July data, annual growth for monthly M1 fell by 0.28%, versus a 0.70% contraction in June, while July M2 annual growth held at 6.15%, the same as in June.

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices -- The July prices paid indices were slightly softer, again, still not reflecting the recent surge in oil prices. The levels, however, remain high and in inflation territory, suggestive of ongoing inflation issues in both purchasing managers surveys.

On the manufacturing side, the July price index eased to 65.0 from June's 68.0. On a three-month moving average basis, July's annual change was down by 12.1%, following June's 5.8% drop. The manufacturing price indicator is not seasonally adjusted and, therefore, is a generally better indicator of pricing activity. Keep in mind that the oil market was particularly strong at this time last year.

On the non-manufacturing side, the seasonally-adjusted July prices diffusion index softened again, to 61.3 from June's 65.5. On a three-month moving-average basis July's annual change was a decline of 11.2% following June's decrease of 9.2%.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflationary pressure. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising prices.

Oil Prices -- For the month of July, the monthly-average West Texas Intermediate spot price (Department of Energy) rose 9.9% to $74.18 per barrel from $67.48 in June. Against last year's record high oil price, July's year-to-year decline in average monthly price was just 0.3%, narrowed from June's 4.9% contraction. Price movement remains highly volatile, but generally is trending higher, and shortly should settle above the new daily record high price level set in the last month.

Meaningful upside risks to oil prices remain in play, both from the looming peak in the hurricane season and ever-volatile Middle Eastern political tensions. Hurricane Dean, the first major storm of the season, is in striking range of Gulf of Mexico energy infrastructure. As we go to press, forecasts have the storm moving well south of Houston, but storms can shift quickly and unexpectedly. Other storms, and attendant increased financial market speculation of risk, are likely in the next month or so.

General background note: Global political conditions continue to favor a further sharp spike in oil prices in the months ahead, irrespective of any ongoing games-playing by the Administration and OPEC. Overhanging the market remains the potential for a change in the dollar-based pricing of oil, particularly as dollar selling intensifies. Where dollar weakness is the equivalent of an oil price cut for oil purchasers denominated in an appreciating currency, market forces tend to push dollar-based oil prices higher, and that exacerbates inflation problems in the United States. Even worse, if oil pricing were shifted to something other than the U.S. currency, as appears to be happening between Iran and Japan (see U.S. Dollar section), U.S. inflationary pressures would be even more intense, since any drop in the dollar would be reflected directly as an increase in the price of foreign oil for U.S. consumption.

General background note: Whether from supply and demand, geo-political or currency pressures, oil prices will remain at highly inflationary levels and will continue as a major contributing factor to U.S. inflation woes. Historically high oil prices still are working their way through all levels of U.S. economic activity, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. These broad inflationary pressures will remain intact despite any near-term oil price volatility. Although these pressures may be slow to surface in government reporting of the so-called "core" inflation measures, they will surface.


Reporting/Market Focus (August 2007) -- Annual GDP Revisions and the SGS Alternate Measure


Once again, and as estimated by SGS, annual GDP revisions have shown that previously reported GDP growth was overstated meaningfully. The current revisions out of the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) reflect some of the downside benchmark revisions made to such series as retail sales, industrial production and housing. This continuing pattern of successive downward revisions over the years also tends to show some of the regular upside growth bias built into the GDP series.

Nonetheless, current and historical reported U.S. economic growth rates of recent years still remain heavily overstated, due largely to methodological "innovations" that have generated these and other upside biases in the official series. The Shadow Government Statistics Alternate GDP measure continues to approximate historical annual GDP with those biases removed (see the "Alternate Realities" section and Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com for the latest plot and data, and the August 2006 SGS Newsletter for methodology). Given that the official 2007 annual revisions were in the normal scope of the previous SGS analysis, the SGS alternate growth estimates are unrevised.

The first set of graphs are as shown in the July 29th Alert. Prior GDP reporting is shown as the thin red lines, and the revisions, as well as the new "advance" second-quarter GDP estimate, as the thick blue lines. The first graph shows GDP growth on a year-to-year basis, the second graph shows it on an annualized quarterly basis.





The third graph shows the regular pattern of downward revision to GDP annual growth from initial reporting to the latest revision or estimate.



The successive annual GDP revisions are represented by the bars for each quarter, moving left to right in chronological order. With few exceptions, each revision has resulted in lowered growth than previously reported or previously revised.

The current annual revision only starts with first-quarter 2004. The revision patterns suggest downside surprises await the period of GDP growth during the now almost defunct 2000 recession. Those revisions have to wait for the five-year benchmark revisions, when the base inflation year is revised. At that time, all the accounts will be updated back to 1929. The next such revision is scheduled for 2009, when the base inflation adjustment year will be changed from 2000 to 2005. At that time, the 2000 recession should be recognized as having been much longer and deeper than previously reported. Full reporting of the current downturn may wait until 2014 or 2019, at which point newly reported quarterly contractions in 2006 and 2007 would be considered ancient history.

The "good" news out of the most revision is that the much-ballyhooed negative U.S. saving rate disappeared. While economic growth was revised lower, income generally, and quite questionably, was revised higher. Lower consumption and higher income lead to a higher saving rate. Such indeed would be good news if the series, which is the residual of two worthless series, was not meaningless itself, even in revision.

A final note, in terms of revisions that were not made: Included in that area are contentions in a recent Business Week article "The Real Cost of Offshoring" (June 18, 2007, page 29). I was asked by several subscribers to look at the analysis. Author Michael Mandel contended that inflation reported on U.S. imports of offshore products from Communist China, etc. was overstated and should be reduced. Since imports are subtracted from GDP, and lowering inflation inflates real growth, real GDP growth would be revised downward, perhaps significantly.

As best I can figure it, there is an offset in the BEA's bookkeeping, double-entry and otherwise. A downward revision to import inflation, by itself, indeed would reduce reported real GDP growth. Yet, cheaper imported goods also would reduce the cost of those goods either in inventories or in personal consumption expenditure numbers, etc., which get added into GDP. Those changes largely would offset the effects of the cheaper imports. Aggregate real GDP growth would hold about the same, unchanged in net revision.

Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for September -- Annual Income Variance Analysis


The extreme variance in the current distribution of U.S. income and wealth has received considerable press, recently. The government's annual estimate of this long-range indicator of economic and financial activity is due for late-August release in conjunction with the annual Poverty Report. The latest data and implications of same will be examined. Last year's report showed income distribution at its most extreme since before the 1929 stock market crash and the Great Depression. It is not likely that the situation has improved.

___________________________________________


PLEASE NOTE: The Hyperinflation Summary Report still is pending and will follow soon. The September "Shadow Government Statistics" newsletter is targeted for the week of September 10th. Postings on the Web site of monthly newsletters, interim Flash Updates and Alerts are advised immediately by e-mail.

OCCASIONALLY, BRIEF UPDATES ARE COMMUNICATED DIRECTLY BY E-MAIL. IF YOU ARE NOT RECEIVING E-MAIL COMMUNICATIONS FROM US, PLEASE LET US KNOW at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or by using the Feedback option on www.shadowstats.com.


Alert

Sunday, August 12th, 2007
ALERT - Aug. 12, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

A L E R T

August 12, 2007

__________

Systemic Liquidity Problems Turn Ugly

Communist China Fires First Dollar Salvo

Given Deepening Recession, Financial Market Woes Are Just Beginning

July M3 Growth Holds at 13%

__________


The SGS-Ongoing M3 series for July has been posted on the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

Last week saw extraordinary developments, with a widening systemic liquidity crisis forcing central banks to reaffirm their statuses as lenders of last resort. At the same time, Communist China fired its first serious salvo against U.S. financial market dependence on foreign capital, and Washington appears to have capitulated to early demands. With the U.S. economy in a deteriorating, inflationary recession, and with Mr. Bernanke possibly facing his two other worst nightmares at the same time, one can make the case that the negative turmoil in the U.S. financial markets and for the U.S. dollar are just beginning.

China Threatens Its Dollar "Nuclear Option."What friends we have in Communist China! Just as the Western markets erupted anew with escalating liquidity crises, "China threatens 'nuclear option' of dollar sales," ran the headline in last Wednesday's Daily Telegraph. Well-timed to trigger or exacerbate a financial panic or crash, China threatened to dump potentially a trillion U.S. dollars from foreign currency reserves onto the open market. The threat ostensibly was made to thwart any U.S. trade sanctions against China for its blatant, anti-competitive currency manipulations.

Despite cries of "absurd" from U.S. Treasury Secretary Paulson, and "foolhardy" by President Bush, the President held an unscheduled news conference later that day where he reassured Mr. Paulson's Beijing Buddies that China's interests were protected. According to the New York Times (Aug. 9), "Mr. Bush ... said he would oppose legislation aimed at punishing China for its economic practices, including its efforts to control the value of its currency to encourage cheaper exports."

Today (Aug. 12), an Associated Press article noted: "China sought Sunday to dampen speculation it will conduct a massive sell-off of U.S. dollar holdings, with a central bank official saying the dollar remains a mainstay of its foreign exchange reserves."

So, China-handler Treasury Secretary Paulson, appears to have cut some sort of a short-term deal to assuage China's dollar dumping instincts. Such accommodation likely will be short-lived, however, as dollar selling will intensify otherwise, causing China further loss from its dollar holdings.

One cannot impute to the Chinese Communists either the political inanities and shortsightedness of the Washington establishment, or the short-term greed so rampant on Wall Street. Dealing with a culture that views a 10-year planning horizon as short-term, there likely is much more at work here than has surfaced. Last week, China said "jump," and George Bush and Henry Paulson appeared to jump. The commands and responses will get much trickier as the markets unravel further and as global political circumstances become more unstable, particularly when Taiwan comes into play.

My days involved in trading currencies extend back to the pre-floating-dollar era. Then, the bets would ride on looming currency devaluation or revaluation. Frequently, the final signal for a pending move was a formal denial by a central bank or banker that no change would be made. Today's soothing dollar statement out of China has the foul odor of one of those old "let's see if we can fool the markets one more time" statements that central banks used to make.

Also keep in mind that China's antics may have done significant other damage to the U.S. dollar's prospects. Many holders of greenbacks outside the United States realize that their holdings will suffer heavy losses when dollar dumping begins. Where no one wants to be the last one out the door, the biggest player has just publicly opened the door a crack and it smells the fresh air outside.

Fed's Job Is To Support The Banking System. Central bank statements sometimes run along the lines of Friday's (Aug. 10) Fed announcement:

"The Federal Reserve is providing liquidity to facilitate the orderly functioning of financial markets.

"The Federal Reserve will provide reserves as necessary through open market operations to promote trading in the federal funds market at rates close to the Federal Open Market Committee's target rate of 5-1/4 percent. In current circumstances, depository institutions may experience unusual funding needs because of dislocations in money and credit markets. As always, the discount window is available as a source of funding."

The Fed, along with the European Central Bank, and the central banks of Australia, Canada and Japan infused the global banking system with more than $130 billion on Friday, making clear to the markets that they stood as lenders of last resort to their markets.

Despite the popular hype that the Federal Reserve's primary function is to control inflation or to maintain sustainable economic growth -- areas over which the Fed has limited control -- this bank-owned corporation's actual primary function is to maintain the health and liquidity of the banking system. The jawboning and liquidity infusion are signals of deteriorating conditions in the markets.

As outlined in recent newsletters, the Fed has been hamstrung as to policy in terms of fighting inflation and stimulating the economy. While action could be justified in both areas, the conflicting tightening and loosening policies would have been ineffective, and the Fed knew it. Accordingly, the U.S. central bank was holding policy steady and managing market expectations of policy so as to avoid a feared market meltdown.

Two risk cases were posited, one where systemic liquidity problems could force a systemic liquefaction, and easing. The second risk case was a dumping of foreign held U.S. dollars and dollar assets. Given the U.S. financial markets' dependence on foreign capital for liquidity, the Fed would have to tighten, raising interest rates in defense of the dollar. The first risk case is in play, and the second is not far behind.

As to the mounting liquidity issues, there is a recession in place that no one in the financial markets or regulatory system was even willing to consider, at least publicly. That recession, however, promises credit quality issues in asset-backed and collateralized instruments (see the July SGS) that will dwarf the subprime mortgage problems. Those other problems may be surfacing already. At least that is the way the Fed is behaving.

Despite protestations to the contrary, it would not take much more of a crisis for the Fed to be pushed into an easing. The Fed will do everything in its power, including pumping every dollar it can print into the system, to preserve the banking system, and to prevent a major bank failure(s).

The one factor that could be holding the Fed back from easing, is fear of what might happen to the dollar. Back in 1987, Alan Greenspan gave thumbs down to the dollar, lowering rates and flooding the system with liquidity following the 1987 financial panic. Ben Bernanke faces a circumstance where the liquidity of the U.S. financial markets is now so heavily dependent on foreign holdings of dollars that ignoring the greenback is no longer a viable option, at least within the bounds of normal operations for the current financial markets and currency system.

The currency markets have been relatively stable in the last week or so, as has the gold market, but there have been disquieting twitches. Flight to safety has not yet begun to be out of the dollar, but that will happen soon enough. It even could be triggered by a Fed easing, which quickly could be rescinded. Therein would begin Mr. Bernanke's final nightmare, having to raise rates to stem the dollar's collapse while already embroiled in a systemic liquidity crisis. Unfortunately, there is no easy way out for the Fed.

The lender of last resort appears doomed at some point to abandon the dollar, to monetize the dumped Treasuries and to start down the path to an eventual hyperinflation and full debasement of the U.S. Currency. That story is being updated in the still-pending Hyperinflation Summary Document.

July Ongoing M3 Annual Growth Holds at 13%. In a week quiet in terms of major economic reporting, a late surge of weekly growth in M2, large time deposits and institutional money funds kept the estimated monthly average annual M3 growth at 13.0% for July, the same as in June, and up from last week's preliminary estimate of 12.8%. Where the monthly estimate is based on 30 out of 31 days for key components, a revised estimate will be published next weekend.

Week Ahead. Look for growth in retail sales (Monday) and housing starts (Thursday) to be weaker than consensus, and for deterioration in the trade deficit (Tuesday) to be worse than expected. Pressures already may be in place to "improve" the reported deficit with Communist China. On the inflation front, both the PPI (Tuesday) and the CPI (Wednesday) are fair bets to top already weak expectations. If financial markets remain in turmoil, pressures also will intensify to bring the numbers in on the happy side of expectations in the month or two ahead.

Additional detail will follow in the August SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


This Alert would have been part of the August SGS's opening comments, but it was published tonight for the sake of timeliness in a volatile and changing market environment. Considering the preceding, and given a week ahead of likely continued stress in financial market activity and the heavy economic calendar over the next several days, the August "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter now is targeted for the end of the coming week through August 20th. An e-mail advice will be made of the posting of same and any further intervening Flash Updates/Alerts.

Flash Update

Sunday, August 5th, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - Aug. 5, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

August 5, 2007

__________

July Jobs Report Shows Managed Numbers

July Annual M3 Growth Notches Lower to 12.8%

July Financial-Weighted Dollar at All-Time Low

Systemic Problems Begin to Surface

__________


The SGS-Alternate Dollar series database has been updated for the July averages and posted (Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com). July's SGS Ongoing M3 will be posted next weekend, when full-month data are available. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

Last week saw mounting financial-market stress as an increasing number of firms indicated losses from or difficulties with mortgage- and asset-backed securities and collateralized-debt obligations. Circumstances are exacerbated by an intensifying inflationary recession, and market disorders should get much worse. It would not be surprising if the Fed found itself being called upon, or felt the need, to provide some systemic liquefaction. Still missing from the unfolding crisis, however, remains heavy flight from the U.S. dollar, which will come sooner rather than later. So far, flight to safety and quality has been into the dollar and into Treasury securities, but that will become a flight out of the greenback, particularly if the Fed moves to liquefy the system. Then, pressures on the U.S. central bank will shift heavily in favor of raising interest rates to defend the dollar. On the economic front, last week's data showed not only weakening business conditions, but also indications of data manipulation in the payroll survey.

July Jobs Report Was Massaged. The only thing surprising about the July employment and unemployment report was that the rigging was not set to show stronger numbers. The seasonally-adjusted July nonfarm payrolls rose by 92,000 (84,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 for the month. June payrolls were up a revised 126,000 (previously 132,000). Annual growth slowed sharply from 1.47% in June to 1.34% in July.

As with other recent monthly reports, applying consistent not-seasonally-adjusted year-to-year change to the seasonally-adjusted numbers yielded lower than advertised jobs growth. Applying July's unadjusted annual growth rate to the adjusted numbers yields suggestes an adjusted monthly July payroll increase of 47,000, about half of the official 92,000 gain.

The statistically-sounder household survey, showed employment down by 30,000 for the month, with the seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate rising to 4.65% +/- 0.23% in July from 4.53% in June. Unadjusted U.3 rose to 4.9% from 4.7% in June, while broader U.8 measure rose to 8.6% from 8.5% (unadjusted) and to 8.3% from 8.2% (adjusted).

The payroll data appear to be under careful management, as seen in the most recent revisions and seasonal-adjustment gimmicks. In revision, the unadjusted total nonfarm payrolls in May and June were revised higher, respectively, by 32,000 (138,623 to 138,655) and by 34,000 (139,127 to 139,161). What is unusual is that the adjusted series were nearly unchanged in revision, down by 2,000 in May (137,906 to 137,904) and down by 8,000 in June (138,038 to 138,030). Normally, the changes in the unadjusted series would flow through to the adjusted series with little variation. Where revisions to the data came in on an unadjusted basis, seasonal adjustments for May and June were altered so as to maintain something close to the original reporting level. Why, remains a question, but the data have been carefully adjusted to maintain someone's reporting agendum.

Purchasing Managers Survey for July Reverses Recent Strength. Both the manufacturing and service-sector versions of the ISM's Purchasing Managers Survey took solid hits in July, dropping to 53.8 from 56.0 and to 55.8 from 60.7. Of some meaning, manufacturing new orders declined to 57.5 from 60.3, while employment declined for both series, to 50.2 from 51.1 (manufacturing) and to 51.7 from 55.0 (services). The prices paid indices also were a little softer, but both series remained in inflationary territory, above 60.0.

Inflationary Pressures Intensify. Beyond the high level of oil prices, broad measures of the dollar are at record lows, and annual M3 growth remains near a highly inflationary 13%. While the Fed's major currencies trade-weighted dollar (TWD) has hit successive monthly lows in past months, dominated by the heavy weighting of the Canadian dollar in that series, the SGS financial-weighted dollar (FWD) had been hovering above its record low, until July. The FWD is weighted by respective currency trading volume, instead of by the merchandise trade weightings used in the TWD. Accordingly, weakness in the FWD is a better indicator of pressure on the U.S. financial markets.

In July, the monthly average FWD fell to a record low of 49.25 (January 1985 = 100.00), down 2.03% from June, and down 6.08% from the year before. The July TWD also fell to a record low, 55.78 (January 1985 = 100.00), down 1.80% from June, and down 5.41% from the year before.

July Ongoing M3 Growth Remained Close to 13%. Lack of acceleration in M2 annual growth and softer large time deposits contributed to a slight slowing in the annual growth rate for the preliminary estimate of monthly average July M3 to roughly 12.8%, from 13.0% in June and 13.1% in May. Estimated July M2 annual growth held at 6.1% in July and June, down from 6.3% in May, while annual growth in large time deposits slowed to roughly 13% from 18% in May. A final July M3 estimate and updated data file will be posted around August 11th.

Additional detail will follow in the August SGS newsletter.

___________________________________________


The August "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter is targeted for the week of August 13th, due to vacation this week. An e-mail advice will be made of same and intervening Flash Updates/Alerts.

Alert

Sunday, July 29th, 2007
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

A L E R T

July 29, 2007

__________

Reported GDP Rebound was Politically Convenient

2nd-Quarter GDP Contracted 0.9% Net of Revisions

Signs of Imploding Economy Mount

Oil Price a Penny Shy of Record

Stock Market Swoon Foreshadows Much Worse

__________


The SGS-Alternate GDP series database has been updated for the "advance" second-quarter report and annual revisions and posted (Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com). The SGS-Alternate GDP series itself, however, has not been revised, yet. It is subject to minor changes, given the government's restated data, to be addressed in the next newsletter's "Reporting/Market Focus." -- Best wishes to all -- John Williams

The U.S. financial markets will face massive and possibly panicked sell-offs in stocks, bonds and the U.S dollar, along with an explosive rally in the price of gold. Timing remains the issue, but this week's break in stock-market psychology has moved the odds strongly and solidly in favor of looming market meltdowns within a six-to-nine month horizon. Circumstances remain fluid enough, though, that given the right confluence of negative factors -- as discussed below -- the markets could spiral into the abyss at anytime, including within the next week or so. Faced with short-term financial-market and political pummeling, President George Bush sought a breather with the second-quarter GDP numbers. He and his spinmeisters boasted of U.S. economic growth rebounding to 3.4%, from the first quarter's 0.6%, but the improved numbers were just figments of the imaginations of officials at the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA). Other reporting showed rapidly deteriorating business activity, while inflation prospects took a new blow.

Accompanying last week's stock-market selling were supposed flights-to-quality in the U.S. dollar and U.S. Treasuries. Indeed, except for selling against the yen, the dollar tended to gain ground, as gold sold off and as Treasury yields flattened out. Keep in mind that each of these markets is subject to central bank manipulation, covert or otherwise, particularly in times of financial stress.

At such time as a true financial panic might hit, flight will be out of the dollar and dollar-denominated assets (including stocks and bonds), and into the stronger major currencies and gold. Watch the dollar, it will be driving the other markets. When dollar dumping begins in earnest, no amount of intervention will have lasting impact.

As noted in the last newsletter, the fundamentals underlying the U.S. currency remain extraordinarily negative. While general movement against the dollar has begun, heavy dollar selling has not hit, yet. The timing of the ultimate move against the greenback remains uncertain, but the crisis likely will come sooner (next several months), rather than later, with little or no warning.

The proximal trigger for a dollar panic likely will involve a confluence of negative factors or surprises. Those could include a bad economic statistic, political missteps by the Administration or a central bank, a major systemic failure, negative trade or market developments in Asia, oil price problems, or a terrorist attack or even still-likely military action against Iran. Again, when it hits, the broad selling pressure against the U.S. currency should be strong enough to overcome any short-lived central bank intervention.

GDP. Not hyped in yesterday's post-GDP White House/Wall Street/popular financial media love-fest were the significant downward revisions made to previously reported GDP growth (regular annual GDP revisions) published along with the second-quarter GDP. Annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) growth for second-quarter 2007 was indicated at 3.38%, up from 0.60% in the first quarter, and where annual growth came in at 1.78%, up from 1.55% in the first quarter. Please note, though, that last month's weak "final" estimate revision showed first-quarter annual growth at 1.91% -- before revisions -- a rate that was stronger then than the second quarter's "booming" 1.78% annual growth rate is now.

In fact, net of the revisions, second-quarter GDP contracted at an annualized quarterly rate of 0.86%. As suggested in recent SGS newsletters, previously reported GDP growth was revised downward significantly (the revisions were planned so as to affect only first-quarter 2004 and later), and none of the quarterly numbers turned negative in after the restatement.





The above graphs show the prior GDP reporting as the thin red lines, and the revisions, as well as the new "advance" second-quarter GDP estimate, as the thick blue lines. The first graph shows GDP growth on a year-to-year basis, the second graph shows it on an annualized quarterly basis.

The revisions will be more fully explored in the upcoming August 2007 "SGS Reporting/Market Focus." Briefly, the lower real GDP reflected both downward revisions to nominal GDP, as well as, prior to fourth-quarter 2006, upward revisions the GDP deflator (inflation). Income revisions were mixed, revising upward in 2004 and 2005, and downward in 2006. Gimmicked changes on the income side resulted from games played with corporate profits as well as with the rental income homeowners' purportedly have been paying themselves.

Back on Main Street, U.S.A., real retail sales contracted in the second quarter, new orders for durable are showing negative annual real growth, housing continues to collapse, and help-wanted advertising sank anew, to its lowest level since 1958. These factors all suggest a weakening second quarter, not a politically comfortable rebound.

In constructing the "advance" estimate for a quarter's GDP, the BEA has little in hard numbers and is 90% to 95% in guesstimation mode. That gives the Bureau extraordinary latitude in coming up with its first guess. Usually, the BEA targets consensus forecasts as the best estimate of reality, and, not so coincidentally, the consensus going into Friday's release was 3.4%.

The purported economic rebound was hoped to be a help to the Administration and the financial markets, but the first President Bush learned painfully how the public can view rigged GDP numbers as an indication of the President's being out of touch with reality. The current President Bush is at risk of a similar fate, but he is not up for re-election as was his father.

New Orders for Durable Goods. Running counter to the relative strength in second-quarter GDP, the 1.4% monthly gain reported for June durable goods orders left the series down by 0.6% year-to-year. Net of the impact of Boeing's successful launch of the 787 (the benefit from which gets spread out over years, not just one month), June's new orders were down by 0.5% for the month, and down by 2.5% for the year.

Using a six-month moving-average, annual growth for regularly volatile durable goods orders had been in steady decline from last September (then up 7.4%) to February 2007 (up 2.4%), but then it dropped below 1.0% for every month from March through June, respectively a contraction of 0.1%, and gains of 0.2%, 0.6% and 0.3%. These levels are underwater after inflation adjustment and are consistent with a deteriorating economy, not a rebound.

Help-Wanted Advertising. June's help-wanted index dropped to 26 from 27 in May. June's reading is the lowest since July 1958, and is just 2 points above the series' all-time low of 24 seen in April and May of 1958. Allowing for the movement of ads away from newspapers to the Internet, the annual decline of 18.8% still signals a deepening economic contraction and a deteriorating labor market.

Housing and Consumer Confidence. Despite a 6.0% monthly jump in the University of Michigan's consumer sentiment measure, housing data continued to fall both month-to-month and year-to-year. June existing home sales fell 3.8% for the month and 11.4% for the year, while new home sales were down 6.6% for the month and dropped 22.3% at an annual pace.

Oil Prices. Oil (West Texas Intermediate spot) closed at $77.02 per barrel on Friday, just a penny shy of the record-high close of July 14, 2006, which was the only time prior to Friday that the price closed above $77.00. Unfortunately the current trading is not in the context of extreme market conditions.

With political risks in the Middle East high and rising, with the hurricane season about to kick in with whatever Mother Nature is going to throw at the Gulf of Mexico's energy-related facilities this year, and with the U.S. dollar generally under selling pressure, not only is the risk to oil prices sharply to the upside, but also inflation pressures in the United States are receiving a sharp spike, with meaningful further upside risk.

Week Ahead: July Payrolls. While prior-period catch-up and related series such, as help-wanted advertising, would suggest weaker-than-consensus payrolls and unemployment, political and financial conditions argue strongly for rigged numbers on the strong side of market expectations.

Additional detail will follow in the August SGS newsletter. The upcoming "Reporting/Market Focus" will cover the GDP annual revisions and update the SGS-Alternate GDP.

___________________________________________


The August "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter is targeted for the week of August 13th. An e-mail advice will be made of same and intervening Flash Updates/Alerts.

June / July 2007 Edition

Monday, July 23rd, 2007
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Issue Numbers 32 & 33

July 23, 2007

__________

U.S. Dollar Woes Broaden Rapidly

Systemic Liquidity Shows Some Cracks

Bernanke Makes Case For Fudging Inflation Data as Fed Fumbles Its Figures

Oil Pushes Record Highs as Economy Continues Tanking

Stock Market Turmoil, Dollar Sell-Off and Gold Boom Move Ever Closer

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The SGS Ongoing M3 (based on full-month data and corrected for Fed reporting errors) and the SGS June Alternate CPI have been posted to the Alternate Data tab at www.shadowstats.com. Details on schedules for upcoming newsletters are noted at the end of the regular text. Best wishes to all -- John Williams




OVERVIEW -- OPENING COMMENTS


Against the backdrop of intensifying inflationary recession, the dollar has started taking some early and heavy blows. The sub-prime mortgage difficulties have gained media prominence, but they are just the beginning of difficulties for mortgage and other asset-backed securities. Meanwhile, the Fed keeps sitting on its hands, whistling a tune that inflation is not a problem so long as the public does not see it. At the same time, the U.S. central bank appears to be having trouble tracking the balance sheets of commercial banks. With ongoing annual M3 growth at 13%, alternate CPI at 10.3% and alternate GDP down about 2.2%, apparent complacency by the Fed and euphoria in the record-topping and increasingly volatile equity markets are surreal. Growing recognition of the disconnection between government numbers and economic reality should have even the Wall Street Pollyannas a little bit on edge, as heavy dollar selling and a booming gold market begin moving perhaps a little too close for comfort.

Economic Problems Resurface as One-Month Turnarounds Disappear in Revision. Reporting on business activity in the last month broadly showed slowing or contracting economic activity. Annual growth in retail sales, industrial production, new orders for durable goods, housing starts and help-wanted advertising all were consistent with an unfolding recession.

Revised, annualized first-quarter real GDP growth of 0.7% was seen in conjunction with a 0.3% annualized contraction in Gross Domestic Investment (GDI), the theoretical income-side equivalent of GDP.

The purchasing managers survey continued to be marginally positive in June, suggesting something along the lines of stagnation in manufacturing activity. Other economic data, however, indicate that further survey changes will be downhill from here.

Although the June employment data were in line with market expectations, prior-period revisions showed higher levels of employment than previously indicated. There are games being played with the employment data that suggest an agendum by the Administration for something other than accurate reporting. Looking at the finer detail in the unemployment rate, the seasonally-adjusted series showed almost a 0.1% increase, which did not surface in the summary numbers due to a fortunate rounding.

One pattern of data revision that has been seen recently in key series is a strong initial report, followed by subsequent downward revisions. Looking at housing starts, for example, as shown in the first graph, the April gain that was touted by the markets a harbinger of better times for the industry, revised away in May and June reporting. Likewise, June's small gain is likely to disappear next month.






The second graph shows the monthly volatility in the annual growth patterns of the housing starts series. The swings remain well within recession range.

Fed Games and Central Banking Data Problems. Inflation will be fine, so long as the public does not catch on to there being a problem. Such was the gist of a July 10th speech given by Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke to fellow academics at a National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) function.

Inflation expectations are key to the development of an inflation problem, he argued. If the public expects inflation, individuals are inclined to participate in inflationary actions, such as trying to get pay raises. Fortunately, noted the Fed Chairman, inflation expectations were contained at the moment.

Keep in mind that Mr. Bernanke considers himself to be an academic, and thus he does not have to deal with the real world all the time. Could Fed efforts to contain the public's inflation expectations explain the silliness of the Fed's trying to sell as the best inflation measure the concept of core inflation, based on a substitution-weighted index, such as the core personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflator? Could the effort to obfuscate public recognition of an inflation problem have encouraged the gimmicking and underreporting of CPI inflation?

Contrary to Mr. Bernanke's wishful thinking, Main Street U.S.A. already recognizes inflation as an issue, but the Fed Chairman cannot see that in the gimmicked numbers he likes to review.

The Fed's shaky numbers, however, go well beyond the CPI. I was not kidding when noting in the July 1st Flash Update that, "The Fed seems to be having trouble counting time deposits."

Here is a special notice posted by the Federal Reserve Board on July 20th, related to its publication "H.8 Assets and Liabilities of Commercial Banks in the United States:"

Supplementary Information Regarding Balance Sheet Data for July 11, 2007

The seasonally adjusted data released on July 13, 2007 -- both the H.8 statistical release and the associated historical data -- were based inadvertently on a set of newly estimated seasonal factors. These seasonal factors did not represent our final estimates and should not have been published.

In today's H.8 statistical release and in the associated historical data, we have restored the previous set of seasonal factors... We will publish newly estimated seasonal factors when they have been finalized.


These "corrections," however, were a great deal more than restated seasonals, since all the large time deposit numbers revised downward, even further than previously. Seasonal readjustments would have had mixed impact, since in the old world of statistically seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series, both sets of numbers had to add up to the same total over the period of a year. Of course, maybe the Fed has created an innovative generation of seasonals that create enhanced annual results.

On a more serious front, the Fed remains hamstrung -- unable to fight recession or inflation -- and worried about mounting selling pressure on the dollar and systemic liquidity problems. Possible systemic liquidity problems appear to be an increasing concern; the dollar is addressed separately.

Debt upon Debt, Leverage upon Leverage, The Subprime Problems are Symptoms of Bigger Issues. My friend Bill King (The King Report, www.mramseyking.com) has aptly described the financial statisticians, who construct investment-grade securities out of otherwise low-quality or high-risk instruments, as modern day alchemists. Medieval alchemists tried to change base metals into gold, with little success. The modern financial magicians also have their problems.

Whether mortgage-backed securities, asset-backed securities, collateralized debt obligations or related derivatives, statistical models have been used to structure a wide variety of credit instruments and other assets into investment vehicles with desired credit ratings.

Several years back, the International Monetary Fund (IMF) noted with mixed concern and enthusiasm the ability of certain financial industries -- particularly banks -- to repackage their business (credit) risks into investment packages that enabled other industries to take on banking risks they had not had before and perhaps did not fully understand.

A problem with some of the statistical models used in packaging various credit risks (see this month's Reporting/Market Focus), is that poor quality modeling or faulty underlying assumptions have left some instruments open to greater risk of default than otherwise might have been advertised. For example, the literature shows modeling of default risks on some corporate debts that takes no account of the business cycle. Yet, the historical patterns of corporate defaults are heavily correlated with business activity. Defaults rise during recessions.

Where the total credit instruments structured into these investment vehicles may exceed $10 trillion, related derivative instruments that leverage these securities still are a small part of a much broader derivatives market that encompasses about $415 trillion -- on a notional basis per the Bank for International Settlements (BIS) -- covering risks including those tied to currencies, interest rates, equities, commodities as well as credit defaults.

Each level of statistical modeling or instrument creation may result in added leverage on the underlying assets and/or may open new risks unrecognized by the investor, due to modeling limitations. The ultimate test of the stability of the existing system and underlying models would be a severe economic downturn, accompanied by heavy dollar selling. I believe those events already are in the works. The difficulties tied to sub-prime mortgage lending suggest that some of the potential difficulties already have started to surface.

The graphs below were intended to put some big numbers into perspective. The first shows the problem (versus GDP) with current U.S. federal obligations, which have been taken on deliberately by government officials who knew there was no way to pay for them, except possibly through a hyperinflation that would fully debase the U.S. dollar. Though not directly related to the statistical financial modeling discussed here, the issues will become important as dollar selling intensifies, and as the Fed moves to liquefy the domestic financial system in response to derivatives or credit/asset-backed securities crises. The numbers also had been requested by a subscriber.

The second graph is intended to help put the notional size of the derivatives market into perspective. The potential for devastating impact from a small mistake can be quite large.





PLEASE NOTE: A "General background note" provides a broad background paragraph on certain series or concepts. Where the language used in past and subsequent newsletters usually has been or will be identical, month-after-month, any text changes in these sections will be highlighted in bold italics upon first usage. This is designed so that regular readers may avoid re-reading material they have seen before, but where they will have the material available for reference, if so desired.

General background note: The U.S. economy is in a protracted and deepening structural recession that will prove to be the second leg of a double-dip recession, which began in 2000/2001. The current downleg was signaled in mid-2005 by a series of leading indicators used for that purpose by SGS. With neither traditional fiscal nor monetary stimulus available to help turn economic activity, the current circumstance is likely to evolve into a hyperinflationary depression (see December 2006 SGS).

Inflation Precursors Turn Nasty. On the inflation front, although both CPI and PPI reporting in June were tempered by apparent games playing with food prices, underlying food and energy prices are soaring and will work there way into official reporting in the month's ahead. As with energy prices, the Bureau of Labor Statistics is slow to pick up rising prices, but quite fast -- sometimes anticipatory -- in picking up any downturn in prices.

Darkening the inflation outlook, the estimated annual growth in SGS Ongoing M3 held at 13% in June, suggesting upside monetary pressures on prices. Further, the recent accelerating downturn in the U.S. dollar also will add some upside pricing pressures on imports. Rising domestic prices otherwise make it competitively easier for importers to pass along their higher costs.

Early-July Markets Feel Some Foreshocks. Despite ongoing record highs in key stock indices, and relatively benign currency and precious metals markets in the second quarter, early-July trading has shown serious deterioration in the greenback on top of spiking oil and gold prices. Much more of the same will unfold in the months ahead.

The deteriorating inflationary recession, combined with nascent selling pressure against the U.S. dollar, foreshadows the worst of all worlds for the U.S. equity and credit markets. At some point, equity prices will fall sharply, while major currencies outside the dollar, and gold and silver prices, will benefit as well as feed into the unfolding financial turmoil.

Alternate Realities. General background note: This section updates the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting. When a government economic measure does not match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Federal Reserve, White House and Wall Street. In these alternate measures, the effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan-Era GDP. The methodologies for the series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS (see Archives page at www.shadowstats.com).

GDP. The alternate first-quarter GDP growth reflects the "final" estimate revision, with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate first-quarter inflation-adjusted annual growth rate (year-to-year, as opposed to the popularly-touted annualized quarter-to-quarter rate) for GDP was a decline of roughly 2.2% versus the official year-to-year gain of 1.9%. The series is subject to annual revisions due on July 27th. Those revisions and the SGS-Alternate GDP will be reviewed in next month's Reporting/Market Focus.



General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate GDP numbers tend to show deeper and more protracted recessions than have been reported formally or reflected in related official reporting. Nonetheless, the patterns shown in the alternate data are broadly consistent with the payroll employment and industrial production series (as revised), which are major indicators used by the National Bureau of Economic Research in determining the official timing of U.S. business cycles.

CPI. The annual non-core annual inflation rates have held at May levels, and the core rates also have been unchanged or down a notch so far in June reporting. Inflation in food-related products is picking up sharply, largely due to supply distortions. Oil prices remain volatile and generally are pushing towards record levels. Beyond related higher energy and material costs increasingly permeating broad economic activity, gasoline prices remain high due to supply problems. Both core and regular annual inflation reporting should rise sharply in the months ahead.


                             Eight Levels of Inflation
                      Annual Inflation for March to June 2007


2007 Measure Mar Apr May Jun
I.1 Core PCE Deflator* 2.1% 2.0% 1.9% n.a. I.2 Core Chained-CPI-U 2.1% 2.0% 1.9% 1.8% I.3 Core CPI-U 2.5% 2.3% 2.2% 2.2% I.4 PCE Deflator* 2.3% 2.2% 2.3% n.a. I.5 Chained-CPI-U 2.5% 2.3% 2.3% 2.3% I.6 CPI-U 2.8% 2.6% 2.7% 2.7% I.7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U 6.2% 6.0% 6.1% 6.1% I.8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation 10.2% 10.2% 10.3% 10.3%

* Historical series subject to annual revisions on July 27th. Notes: I.1 to I.3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively, of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U. I.4 to I.6 are the same measures with energy and food inflation included. The CPI-U (I.6) is the measure popularly followed by the financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation. I.7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre- Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top series in the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com. I.8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which reverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so, plus an adjustment for the portion of Clinton-Era geometric weighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic bookkeeping.




General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate CPI numbers tend to show significantly higher inflation over time, generally reflecting the reversal of hedonic adjustments, geometric weighting and the use of a more traditional approach to measuring housing costs, measures all consistent with the reporting methodology in place as of 1980.


MARKETS PERSPECTIVE


The general outlook for the financial markets remains unchanged: heavy sell-offs in U.S. equities as a major bear market unfolds, heavy selling in the U.S. dollar, rising domestic long-term interest rates (despite any short-term flight-to-quality issues), and spiking precious metals prices. The timing of these events remains uncertain, but recent activity suggests they are nearing rapidly. This is despite strong equity markets and a flat currency and gold markets in the second quarter, as detailed below. For the quarter, however, long-term interest rates did rise, pushing the yield curve to a more-normal positive slope.


              Quarterly Financial-Market Indicators at Quarter-End


Second-Quarter 2007 First-Quarter 2007 Level Q/Q Yr/Yr Level Q/Q Yr/Yr Equity Market
DJIA 13,408.62 8.53% 20.25% 12,354.35 -0.87% 11.21% S&P 500 1,503.35 5.81% 19.53% 1,420.86 0.18% 9.73% Wilshire 5000 15,210.65 5.56% 18.38% 14,409.27 1.06% 9.53% NASDAQ Comp 2,603.23 7.50% 19.85% 2,421.64 0.26% 3.50%

Credit Market(1) 3-Mo T-Bill 4.82% -22 bp -19 bp 5.04% 2 bp 41 bp 2-Yr T-Note 4.87% 29 bp -29 bp 4.58% -24 bp -24 bp 5-Yr T-Note 4.92% 38 bp -18 bp 4.54% -16 bp -28 bp 10-Yr T-Note 5.03% 38 bp -12 bp 4.65% -6 bp -21 bp 30-Yr T-Bond 5.12% 28 bp -7 bp 4.84% 3 bp -6 bp

Oil(2) US$ per Barrel West Texas Int. 69.57 12.21% -5.96% 62.00 1.54% -7.75%

Currencies/Dollar Indices(3) US$/Unit Pound Sterling 2.0063 1.92% 8.50% 1.9685 0.51% 13.20% Euro 1.3520 1.22% 5.80% 1.3374 1.34% 10.17% Swiss Franc 0.8170 -0.93% 0.06% 0.8247 0.57% 7.14% Yen 0.0081 -4.72% -7.20% 0.0085 1.24% -0.07% Canadian Dollar 0.9404 8.43% 4.85% 0.8673 1.06% 1.21% Weighted Currency Units/US$ Jan. 1985 = 100 Financial (FWD) 50.03 -0.99% -4.12% 50.53 -1.25% -7.57% Trade (TWD) 56.60 -2.33% -3.13% 57.95 -1.08% -5.29%

Precious Metals(4) US$ per Troy Ounce Gold 650.50 -1.70% 6.03% 661.75 4.71% 13.70% Silver 12.54 -6.07% 17.20% 13.35 3.49% 13.52%

bp -- Basis point or 0.01%. (1) Constant maturity yield, Federal Reserve Board. (2) Department of Energy. (3) Shadow Government Statistics, Federal Reserve Board (See Dollar Index Section for definitions). (4) London afternoon fix, Kitco.com.


The U.S. dollar may have started to spiral slowly into the abyss, with the financial-weighted dollar easing by 2.3% as of July 20th, versus the end of June. At the same time, oil prices are pushing towards last year's record highs (up 8.9% since June 30th), and gold has rallied by 4.8%. At such time as dollar selling intensifies, any flight-to-quality relief in long-term rates will prove fleeting.

Add in a stymied Fed looking at a mounting inflationary recession, and the longer term outlook for U.S. stocks cannot be good, irrespective of ongoing market irrationality.

General background note: The U.S. economy remains in a severe, structural inflationary recession, saddled with an impotent Fed and a federal government that is fiscally bankrupt in all but name. In combination, these factors offer the worst of all environments to the financial markets. Ahead lie higher long-term interest rates and much lower U.S. equity prices. On the plus side is the outlook for gold, which provides a solid hedge against many of the problems that have started to surface. Key to the near-term movements of these markets remains the fate of the U.S. dollar.

U.S. Equities -- After rallying to a record 14,000, the Dow Jones Industrial average closed Friday at 13,851, up 3.3% from June 30th, slightly ahead of broad dollar weakness, but lagging the change in gold over the same time period.

At such time as the equity markets eventually catch up with the underlying economic and looming financial fundamentals, the downside adjustments to stock prices should be quite large, eventually rivaling the 90% decline in equities seen in the 1929 crash and ensuing several years. The decline might have to measured in real terms (net of inflation), as a hyperinflation eventually will kick in as the Fed moves to liquefy the system. Stocks do tend to follow inflation, since revenues and earnings get denominated in inflated dollars. Hence with a hyperinflation, a DJIA of 100,000 or 100,000,000 could be expected, but such still would be below today's levels adjusted for inflation.

General background note: The approaching financial maelstrom already has come over the horizon. When it hits, those investors who have taken shelter in cash, gold and outside the U.S. dollar will be the ones with the wealth and assets available to take advantage of the extraordinary investment opportunities that should follow.

U.S. Credit Market -- As discussed in recent months, little action can be expected from the Fed, until either a dollar panic or systemic liquidity issues force its hand. The Fed otherwise remains hamstrung, unable with its impaired monetary tools either to contain a commodity-driven inflation or to stimulate a structurally damaged economy. Unfortunately, signs of both risk cases -- dollar selling and possible systemic liquidity issues -- are starting to surface.

Rising inflation usually means upside pressure on long-term interest rates, and relative to short-term rates. The inflow of foreign liquidity to the markets had kept long-term rates flat and had inverted the yield curve (short-term yields higher than long-term yields) for some time. That changed in the last quarter, with longer term yields rising and the Treasury yield curve resuming a positive slope as shown in the accompanying graph.



As market nervousness gels over the unfolding economic and financial nightmare, there may some further flight-to-quality buying of U.S. Treasuries. That phenomenon will have a limited lifespan, as flight to quality/safety increasingly will take the form of assets held outside the United States and denominated in something other than the U.S. dollar.

U.S. Dollar -- Through June, the U.S. dollar gained against most of the major currencies, except against the Canadian dollar. U.S. dollar trading in July, however, has started to show meaningful weakness across the board with the major currencies.

Exacerbating the circumstance, perhaps, has been the move by Iran to have Japanese buyers pay for their oil purchases in yen, rather than dollars. Other oil suppliers increasingly will be under pressure to do something similar, just as a measure of financial self-preservation. Such movement not only would intensify dollar selling pressures, but also would magnify domestic U.S. oil-related inflation.

The fundamentals underlying the U.S. currency remain extraordinarily negative, as discussed below. While movement against the dollar has begun, heavy dollar selling has not hit, yet. The timing of the ultimate move against the dollar remains uncertain. The crisis still likely will come sooner (next several months), rather than later, with little or no warning.

The proximal trigger for a dollar panic likely will be a surprise and could come from a bad economic statistic, political missteps by the Administration or a central bank, negative trade or market developments in Asia, or a terrorist attack or even still-likely military action against Iran. When it hits, the broad selling pressure should be strong enough to overcome any short-lived central bank intervention.

General background note: In terms of underlying fundamentals that tend to drive currency trading, the dollar's portfolio could not be worse. Relative to major trading partners, the U.S. economy is much weaker, interest rates are lower, inflation is higher, fiscal and trade-balance conditions are abysmal, and relative political stability is at a nadir. The President's approval rating commonly has moved currency trading in the past, and it is at the lowest level seen in the post-World War II era. Relative political stability issues are compounded by the presence of a Congress hostile to the President. Generally, the greater the magnitude of the dollar selling, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. capital markets.

As shown in the following graph, U.S. dollar trading again was mixed in June, setting a new low on a trade-weighted basis. The added July 20th data point shows the downside movement of the indices so far in July.



General background note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS for methodology.

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics' Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (FWD) is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For June 2007, the monthly dollar average rose by 0.11%, after gaining 0.26% in May. The June 2007 average index level of 50.27 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 4.11% from June 2006, with May down 3.19% from the year before. The index's historic monthly-average low was 48.98 in April 1995. The July 20th level of the index had declined to 48.88.

Dropping to another all-time monthly-average low, June's level of the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (TWD) fell by 0.34%, following May's 0.84% drop. The June 2007 index level of 56.80 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 3.16% from the year before, against May's 2.78% annual decline. As of July 20th, the TWD stood at 55.42.

Once again, the variance of the gain in the FWD versus the decline in the TWD can be explained by the sharp monthly decline of the U.S. dollar against the Canadian dollar, where the latter receives a much heavier weighting in the TWD.

Gold -- As of Friday, gold was trading around $682 per troy ounce and silver around $13.30. For June, however, the monthly-average gold price (London afternoon fix per Kitco.com) averaged $665.49 per troy ounce against May's $666.86. Silver averaged $13.14 per troy ounce in June, down from $13.15 in May.

High gold price volatility continues but generally is trending higher. Despite central-bank manipulations and intervention, the upside potential for the precious metal remains explosive, particularly as heavy dollar selling begins. Look for new monthly and daily highs in the months ahead.

General background note: As discussed in the Hyperinflation Series (see the December 2006 to March 2007 SGSs), the eventual complete collapse of the U.S. dollar -- the world's reserve currency -- will force the creation of a new international currency system. Gold likely will be structured into any replacement system, in an effort by those organizing the new currency structure to gain public acceptance.





The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show June averages as well as added points for closing prices on July 20th. As we go to press, gold is trading above $680, oil is over $75 and the Swiss franc is over $0.83. Look for all three measures to trade significantly higher in the months ahead.


REPORTING PERSPECTIVE


The Big Three Market Movers


The bulk of major economic reports continue coming in on the soft side of expectations, while inflation results generally have remained at the upper end of expectations. The occasional countertrend reports tend to lose their strength in later revisions, as discussed in the Opening Comments concerning housing starts.

Financial market sentiment increasingly has settled into the concept of a stagnant or recessionary economy beset by inflation problems. Even so, the full extent of the economy's plight is far from broad recognition. With the President's positive rating still bottom bouncing and setting new record lows, and with the Fed fearful of a market meltdown, recent and upcoming releases of major series have been, and likely will continue to be, subject to some massaging for both the perceived political needs of the Administration and the heavy financial market needs of an impotent Federal Reserve Board.

General background note: Against lagging and still largely distorted market expectations, most near-term economic reporting will tend to continue surprising the markets on the downside, while most inflation reporting should continue to surprise the markets on the upside.

Employment/Unemployment -- Seasonally-adjusted June payrolls were reported up by 132,000 (207,000 net of revisions), once again not much outside the 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000, following a revised 190,000 (previously 157,000) gain in May. Annual growth for June was reported at 1.45%, down from 1.46% in May, which previously had been reported with year-to-year growth of 1.39%.

As discussed in the July 11th Flash Update, recent misreporting patterns resumed with massive prior-period revisions and unusual seasonal-adjustments distorting the June employment report. With the BLS re-jiggering its seasonal factors each month, the range of potentially gimmicked reporting is great. Nonetheless, year-to-year change in the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series should be the same, and based on June's unadjusted annual growth rate, the seasonally-adjusted jobs increase should have been 107,000 instead of 132,000.

Contributing to the overstatement of June's payroll figures, the monthly fudge or bias factor (birth/death model) created 156,000 jobs that were added to the unadjusted number for good measure. That number flows through to the seasonally-adjusted data with minimal variation. The bias factors never are adjusted for a recessionary environment, always assuming ongoing growth. For example, 25,000 construction jobs were added to employment last June, and 26,000 construction jobs were fudged into the count this June, despite the obvious deterioration in the 2007 construction environment.

Additionally, the reported 16,500 June jobs gain in the educational sector suggests that, as is the case more often than not, the BLS had problems properly seasonally adjusting for the effect of the end of the school year.

The household survey counts those who are employed, while the payroll survey counts the number of jobs. The household survey showed seasonally-adjusted June employment up by 197,000, with seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment increasing to 4.53% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval) in June, from 4.46% in May. Unadjusted U.3 rose to 4.7% in June from 4.3% in May. The broader, seasonally-adjusted U.6 unemployment rate held at 8.2% in June, but rose on an unadjusted basis to 8.5% from 7.9% in May. Net of the "discouraged workers" defined out of existence during the Clinton Administration, traditional unemployment continues to run around 12%.

The June employment gain was against a background of plunging help-wanted advertising, less economically-negative new claims for unemployment insurance and flat to weaker employment numbers in the June purchasing managers surveys (see respective sections). These background numbers remain consistent with continued weakness in official jobs and unemployment reporting.

Next Release (August 3): The July payroll survey should resume a pattern of falling back to the soft side of market expectations. Look for the unemployment rate to continue pushing higher, entering a period of fairly regular upturns.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) -- The "final" estimate revision to annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth for the first quarter of 2007 was little more than statistical noise taking the previously reported 0.6496% to 0.6873 +/- 3%, which still was statistically indistinguishable from a quarterly contraction. The first-quarter's minimal growth was down sharply from the fourth quarter's reported 2.45%. Measured year-to-year, annual GDP growth in the first quarter revised to 1.91% from 1.90%, and down from 3.13% in the fourth quarter. Despite being labeled a "final" estimate, the first-quarter's growth rate is subject to further revision in the annual revision due on July 27th.

Nominal growth actual notched higher, but that largely was offset by an upward revision to the first quarter's implicit price deflator, reflecting annualized inflation of 4.2%, versus prior reporting of 4.0%, and up from 1.7% in the fourth quarter.

A Michael Mandel June 18, 2007 Business Week article "The Real Cost of Offshoring" makes the case that the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) understates import inflation, creating -- of all things -- "Phantom GDP." Normally, understated inflation boosts reported GDP, but since imports get subtracted from GDP, the effect is reversed in aggregate GDP reporting. This concept will be addressed in next month's Reporting/Market Focus that will assess the annual GDP revisions and review the SGS-Alternate GDP.

General background note: Although the GDP report is the government's broadest estimate of U.S. economic activity, it is also the least meaningful and most heavily massaged of all major government economic series. Published by the BEA, it primarily has become a tool for economic propaganda. Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS-Alternate GDP measure suggests economic reality is much weaker than officially reported. Alternate year-to-year annual contractions continue, with an annual 2.2% contraction in the first quarter deepening from the 1.5% decline in the fourth quarter (see the graph in the Alternate Reality section in the Opening Comments).

As to revised official estimates for real, annualized, quarterly first-quarter growth in gross national product (GNP) and gross domestic income (GDI), first-quarter real GNP -- GDP net of the international flows in factor income (interest and dividend payments) -- was revised upward to show an annualized quarterly rate of 0.76% versus initial reporting 0.40%, and down from 3.49% in the fourth quarter.

First-quarter real GDI -- the supposedly equivalent income side of GDP -- contracted at a revised annualized rate of 0.28% versus the initially reported contraction of 0.32%, following the fourth quarter's 4.47% gain.

Next Release (July 27): It would be surprising if the "advance" estimate of annualized quarterly real GDP growth for the second quarter were not substantially weaker than consensus forecasts currently touted at about 3.4%, but this indeed is the most heavily politicized and massaged of all the major series, and the times are very difficult politically.

Nonetheless, the annual revisions to GDP will restate historical economic growth from first-quarter 2004 to date, and those restatements should result in lowered growth rates for the last two years or so. Underlying series ranging from retail sales and housing to industrial production have already led the way. Somehow, those changes likely will avoid showing any quarterly contractions in real GDP, irrespective of quarterly contractions shown in series such as industrial production.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) -- The BLS reported the seasonally-adjusted June CPI-U (I.6) up by 0.19% (0.19% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval) for the month, following May's increase of 0.67% (0.61% unadjusted) and April's gain of 0.42% (0.65% unadjusted). Annual inflation held at 2.69% in June and May, up from 2.57% in April. Annualized year-to-date inflation through June was 5.00% adjusted, 6.60% unadjusted.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) (I.5) -- the substitution-based series that increasingly gets touted by the manipulators as the replacement for the CPI-U -- was 2.32% in June, versus 2.33% in May and against 2.35% in April.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology (I.7), annual CPI growth was about 6.1% in June and May, up from 5.9% in April, while the SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (I.8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, held at roughly 10.3% in June and May, versus 10.2% in April. The eight levels of annual inflation, I.1 to I.8, are shown in the table in the Alternate Reality section, along with the graph of SGS-Alternate Consumer Inflation.

Next Release (August 15): Annual inflation generally will continue rising into at least the fourth quarter of 2007. Seasonally-adjusted, monthly CPI-U increased by 0.39% in July 2006. Any monthly reporting above or below that for the pending release of July 2007 CPI will add or subtract directly to or from the current annual CPI-U inflation rate. Reporting risks favor an upside surprise to modest market expectations. A renewed upside movement in core inflation also has become long overdue.


Other Troubled Key Series


Federal Deficit -- General background note: The federal government's fiscal 2006 (fiscal year-end September 30th) deficit, prepared based on generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), widened to $4.6 trillion from 2005's $3.5 trillion. Those numbers dwarfed the officially-gimmicked 2006 federal budget deficit of $248.2 billion, which was down $70.8 billion from 2005's $318.5 billion (see the December SGS).

General background note: Although it lacks the accrual accounting of the GAAP numbers, the change in gross federal debt bypasses several of the reporting manipulations and is a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the official, gimmicked deficit reporting. As of fiscal year-end 2006, the gross federal debt stood at $8.507 trillion, up $574 billion from 2005, which in turn was up $554 billion from 2004.

For the rolling 12 months through June 2007, the gimmicked deficit was $162.7 billion versus $275.5 billion in June 2006, compared with the rolling deficits of $169.7 billion in May 2007 and $273.1 billion in May 2006. For the rolling 12 months through April 2007, the gimmicked deficit was $144.9 billion versus $265.7 billion in April 2006. The gap in the year-to-year rolling deficits has started to narrow.

For June 30, 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $8.868 trillion, up $39 billion from May and up $448 billion from June 2006, which in turn was up $584 billion from June 2005. For May 31, 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $8.829 trillion, up $472 billion from May 2006, which in turn was up $579 billion from May 2005.

General background note: The Administration and Congress continue playing bookkeeping games. Even so, the gimmicked deficit should widen in the next 12 months, as government finances begin to suffer from tax revenue losses due to the intensifying recession and relative tax receipt declines after the expiration of recent tax incentives. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy's mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance -- Annual growth in initial claims has continued to soften (an economic positive) but has remained marginally in positive territory (an economic negative). On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended July 14th, annual growth was 0.1%, down from 2.7% for the 17 weeks ended May 26th.

General background note: More often than not, week-to-week volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly claims numbers is due to the Labor Department's efforts to seasonally adjust these numbers around holiday periods, such as Easter, Memorial Day, July 4th and Labor Day. The Labor Department has demonstrated an inability to do such adjusting successfully. When the new claims series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings -- June's seasonally-adjusted monthly real earnings rose by 0.5%, after declining by 0.4% in May and by 0.5% in April. Annual growth notched higher to 1.3% in June, from 1.2% in May and 0.9% in April.

General background note: Gyrations in the poor quality of reported CPI growth account for most month-to-month volatility in this series. Adjusting for the major upside biases built into the CPI-W inflation measure used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series shows the average worker to be under severe financial stress in an ongoing recession.

Retail Sales -- June's seasonally-adjusted retail sales declined by 0.89% (down 1.04% net of revisions) +/- 0.9% (95% confidence interval), largely reversing the 1.52% gain (previously 1.40%) reported in May, and following a 0.32% decline in April. With monthly CPI up by 0.19%, seasonally-adjusted monthly retail sales were down by roughly 1.08% after inflation. Increasingly, retail sales are reflecting relative strength due to rising prices, and the real retail sales number will become more important in assessing the strength of consumer spending.

On a year-to-year basis, June retail sales were up 3.77% before inflation and just 1.08% after inflation, compared with respective annual growth numbers for May of 4.98% and 2.29%.

General background note: Real (inflation-adjusted) year-to-year growth in retail sales below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation) signals recession, and a signal first was generated in this business cycle back in June 2006.

Next Release (August 13): July retail sales, once again, should come in below market expectations, and below the rate of inflation on both a monthly and possibly a year-to-year basis.

Industrial Production -- Seasonally-adjusted industrial production rose by 0.5% (0.6% net of revisions) in June, following May's revised 0.1% decline (previously unchanged), and April's 0.4% increase. Despite the intermittent monthly gains, annual growth continues to slow to recessionary levels. Annual April growth of 1.76% (previously 1.88%) slowed to 1.74% In May and to 1.37% in June.

Next Release (August 15): Look for July industrial production to move once again towards a pattern of contraction. Eventually, monthly contractions in this series should become regular, with rapidly slowing annual growth turning negative.

New Orders for Durable Goods -- For May, the usually volatile durable goods orders fell by 2.8% (down 2.2% net of revisions) on a seasonally-adjusted basis, after a revised 1.1% gain (previously 0.6%) in April. May's annual change was up by only 0.3%, clearly a contraction after inflation, following April's revised 5.2% gain (previously 4.7%). On a three-month moving-average annual basis, the annual change was 0.5%, following a 0.2% increase in April. Again these growth rates are negative net of inflation and continue to be suggestive of less-than-robust economic activity.

The closely followed nondefense capital goods new orders tumbled by 8.3% in May, for the month, following April's revised 0.1% (previously 0.8%) decline. May's annual growth rate for nondefense capital goods was 1.4%, which also was below the rate of inflation.

General background note: Durable goods orders lost its status as a solid leading economic indicator when the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders in 2002.

Trade Balance -- The seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for May 2007 was reported at $60.0 billion, up from a revised $58.7 billion (previously $58.5 billion) in April, but down from $62.4 billion in March. The May detail showed some increase in oil imports, based both on higher prices and higher physical volume, but the current trade shortfall remains well shy of reality.

Next Release (August 14): Odds continue to favor continued deterioration in the monthly trade deficit, recovering further from recent understatement. Reporting risk generally remains on the negative side of consensus forecasts, and a sharp June deterioration would suggest a downside revision to the upcoming second-quarter advance GDP estimate to be published on August 27th. The months ahead should see a pattern of regularly increasing deficits that shortly, again, will be setting new records.

Consumer Confidence -- June confidence measures declined both on a monthly basis, with annual growth dropping or slowing. The Conference Board's June Consumer Confidence fell by 4.2% month-to-month, following May's revised 2.1% (previously 1.6%) increase. June's annual change was a 1.4% decline (down 0.38% on a three-month moving-average basis), following May's 3.6% gain (0.3% on a three-month moving-average basis).

For June, the University of Michigan's Consumer Sentiment fell by 3.4% for the month, versus May's 1.4% increase. June's year-to-year change slowed to 0.5% (3.7% on a three-month moving-average basis) from May's 11.6% (3.3% on a three-month moving-average basis).

The drop in these lagging, not leading, indicators tends to reflect the tone of the popular financial media and suggests the economy has continued to falter.

General background note: The Conference Board measure is seasonally adjusted, which can provide occasional, but significant distortion. The adjustment does not make much sense and is of suspect purpose, given that the Conference Board does not release the unadjusted number. The Michigan survey is unadjusted. How does one seasonally-adjust peoples' attitudes? Also, beware the mid-month Consumer Sentiment release from the University of Michigan. Its sampling base is so small as to be virtually valueless in terms of statistical significance.

Short-Term Credit Measures -- Patterns of annual growth in consumer and commercial borrowing remain mixed, with consumer credit growth slowing in contrast to generally stronger commercial borrowing.

Annual growth slowed for seasonally-adjusted consumer credit, which includes credit cards and auto loans, but not mortgages. Year-to-year growth of 4.7% in May was down from 4.8% in April and 5.1% in March. In the current environment, where inflation-adjusted growth in income is not adequate to support meaningful growth in the personal consumption component of GDP, GDP growth only can come from temporary debt expansion or savings liquidation. Accordingly, slowing consumer debt expansion places a constraint on economic growth.

Commercial borrowing growth, however, continued to be strong on a year-to-year basis, with annual growth in commercial paper outstanding jumping to 21.0% in June from 19.6% in May. Annual growth in commercial and industrial loans was 12.3% in June, up from 11.6% in May and 12.2% in April. Solid growth in the commercial credit measures can signal credit needs tied either to rising sales and receivables/inventory, or to slowing sales and slowing collections and involuntarily rising inventories.

Producer Price Index (PPI) -- Stretching credibility more than usual, the June finished goods PPI fell by a seasonally-adjusted 0.2% (down 0.4% unadjusted), against a May gain of 0.9% (1.2% unadjusted) and an April of 0.7% (1.0% unadjusted). Annual PPI in June eased back to 3.3% from 4.4% in May. Seasonally-adjusted intermediate and crude goods rose 0.5% and 0.3% in June, after being up by 1.1% and 2.0% in May.

What particularly seems to be running counter to overwhelming anecdotal evidence is the reported 0.8% decline in food prices. As an aside, we have had communication from a person formerly involved in the PPI's preparation, who advises of directions received and pressures applied to not report or to moderate the reporting of large price increases that would show up in certain politically sensitive commodities.

Next Release (August 14): Despite the regular random volatility of the monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months generally should come in above market expectations. As with the CPI, the core PPI inflation rate is long overdue for an upside surprise.


Better-Quality Numbers


General background note: The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders -- The overall June ISM manufacturing index again gained minimally, rising to 56.0 from May's 55.0 and February's 54.7. At work here appears possibly to be a dead-cat bounce in the manufacturing sector activity, although there may still be poor-quality seasonal factors (supplied by the Commerce Department) at work. The June employment index, however, fell again, to 51.1, from May's 51.9 and April's reading of 53.1. Renewed decline in the broad series is a good bet in the next several months, based on declining annual activity and growth in durable goods orders orders, retail sales, housing and industrial production.

The June new orders index rose to 60.3, from May's 59.6. Seasonal-factor distortions usually are overcome by viewing the series using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the June new orders index was up by 5.1%, versus a decline of 0.6% in May.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading below 50.0 indicates contracting new orders. The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004. As an SGS early warning indicator of a major economic shift, the new orders measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating a signal of pending recession.

Service Sector Index. The service-sector ISM index does not have much meaning related to overall business activity, since new order activity at law firms, hospitals or fast-food restaurants has little obvious relationship to broad economic activity. That said, the overall June services sector index rose minimally to 60.7, from 59.7 in May. Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. The June employment component was marginally higher at 55.0 versus 54.9 in May. The prices paid component is covered in the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) -- The Conference Board reported that help-wanted advertising plunged to 27 in May, down from 29 in April, setting a new 50-year low. Even allowing for the advertising volume lost to the Internet in recent years, the current weakness is enough to signal a deepening problem in the employment sector. The May number was down 18.2% from the year before, compared with a 14.7% drop in April.

Viewed on a three-month moving-average basis, May's year-to-year change was a contraction of 18.3%, versus April's 19.1%. The series still indicates rapidly deteriorating employment conditions. Where the index never recovered from the 2000/2001 recession, its ongoing renewed plunge has signaled a new and rapid contraction in economic activity. Continued deterioration remains likely in the months ahead.

Housing Starts -- As discussed in this month's Opening Comments, ongoing weakness in the housing starts remains in place, with graphs highlighting recent monthly reporting revisions and showing the year-to-year change in the series (last newsletter's graph showed annual change on a three-month moving-average basis).

June seasonally-adjusted housing starts rose by 2.3% +/- 10% (95% confidence interval) for the month, after revised 3.4% and 0.4% monthly declines in May and April. Year-to-year, June starts were down 19.4% (+/- 7.1%), versus a drop of 26.2% in May, and were down 21.5% on a three-month moving average basis.

Confirming ongoing weakness in the housing sector, June building permits were down 7.5% +/- 1.2% for the month and 25.2% +/- 1.2% year-to-year. In May reporting, new home sales were down 15.8% +/- 11% (95% confidence interval) year-to-year, while May existing home sales were down 10.3% at an annual rate.

Money Supply -- As discussed in the Opening Comments, the Fed has been redefining and revising some its commercial bank asset series, making mistakes in the process. The effect, subject to further revisions in Federal Reserve reporting, has been to slow the pace of recently reported M2 annual growth (May revised from 6.7% to 6.3%). On a parallel but lesser basis, the SGS Ongoing M3 estimates of annual growth were revised (May revised from 13.3% to 13.1%). The changes in annual M3 growth rates, however, are not meaningful and do not alter the picture of roughly 13% June annual growth in the Fed's no-longer-reported broad money measure, contrasted with the reported 6.1% annual M2 growth for June.



General background note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the SGS Ongoing M3 estimates, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS for methodology. The indicated M3 levels below are our best estimate and are provided at specific subscriber request. Keep in mind that regular revisions in the related Fed series affect historical M3. Usually, annual growth rates hold, although levels may shift a little. We have not attempted, nor do we plan to recreate a revised historical series for an M3 monthly-average level going back in time. The purpose of the SGS series was and is to provide monthly estimates of ongoing annual M3 growth. We are comfortable with those numbers and that our estimated monthly growth rates are reasonably close to what the Fed would be reporting, if it still reported M3. With those caveats on the table, here are the monthly-average levels for M3:

      Shadow Government Statistics Ongoing M3
  (Estimated seasonally-adjusted monthly average)


Current Yr Before Month $ Tril $ Tril % Yr/Yr

Mar 07 11.541 (r) 10.347 (r) 11.6% Apr 11.723 (r) 10.417 (r) 12.5% May 11.865 (r) 10.490 (r) 13.1% Jun 11.919 (p) 10.547 (r) 13.0%

(p) June's preliminary estimate is based on full-month reporting, reflecting Fed revisions and redefinitions of the last month and corrections to same. (r) Revised. There would be prior period-revisions before March 2006, but there also would be no significant change in annual growth rates, which have been left intact from earlier calculations for the months before March 2007.

NOTE OF CAUTION: The estimates of monthly levels best are used for comparisons with other dollar amounts, such as nominal GDP. While the estimates are based on seasonally- adjusted Federal Reserve data, great significance cannot be read into the month-to-month changes, as was the case when the Fed published the series. The most meaningful way to view the data is in terms of year-to-year change.


Based on the revised and full-month June data, annual growth in June for monthly M1 fell by 0.7%, versus a 0.6% contraction in May, while June M2 annual growth was 6.1%, down from 6.3% in May.

Inflation Indicators

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices -- The June prices paid indices were slightly softer, not yet reflecting the recent surge in oil prices. The levels, however, remain high and in inflation territory, suggestive of ongoing inflation issues in both purchasing managers surveys.

On the manufacturing side, the June price index eased to 68.0 from May's 71.0. On a three-month moving average basis, June's annual change was down by 5.8%, after May's 2.6% decline. The manufacturing price indicator is not seasonally adjusted and, therefore, is a generally better indicator of pricing activity. Keep in mind that the oil market was particularly strong at this time last year.

On the non-manufacturing side, the seasonally-adjusted June prices diffusion index softened to 65.5 from May's 66.4. On a three-month moving-average basis June's annual change was a decline of 9.2%, following May's 4.4% drop.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflationary pressure. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising prices.

Oil Prices -- As of July 20th, oil was trading over $75 per barrel, pushing the record high of $77.03 seen just about a year ago, on July 14, 2006. The current oil price contrasts with $69.57 at the end of June.

For the month of June, the monthly-average West Texas Intermediate spot price (Department of Energy) rose 6.3% to $67.48 per barrel from $63.46 in May. Against last year's particularly high oil prices, June's year-to-year decline in average monthly price was 4.9%, narrowed from May's 10.5% price drop. Price movement remains highly volatile, but generally is trending higher.

Meaningful upside risks to oil prices remain in play, both from the hurricane season and ever-mounting Middle Eastern political tensions. Forecasts for a particularly active hurricane season have not panned out, yet, but the season peak still is ahead, while oil and gasoline prices started the season at levels already at or above those seen post-Katrina.

General background note: Global political conditions continue to favor a further sharp spike in oil prices in the months ahead, irrespective of any ongoing games-playing by the Administration and OPEC. Overhanging the market remains the potential for a change in the dollar-based pricing of oil, particularly as dollar selling intensifies. Where dollar weakness is the equivalent of an oil price cut for oil purchasers denominated in an appreciating currency, market forces tend to push dollar-based oil prices higher, and that exacerbates inflation problems in the United States. Even worse, if oil pricing were shifted to something other than the U.S. currency, as appears to be happening between Iran and Japan (see U.S. Dollar section), U.S. inflationary pressures would be even more intense, since any drop in the dollar would be reflected directly as an increase in the price of foreign oil for U.S. consumption.

General background note: Whether from supply and demand, geo-political or currency pressures, oil prices will remain at highly inflationary levels and will continue as a major contributing factor to U.S. inflation woes. Historically high oil prices still are working their way through all levels of U.S. economic activity, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. These broad inflationary pressures will remain intact despite any near-term oil price volatility. Although these pressures may be slow to surface in government reporting of the so-called "core" inflation measures, they will surface.


Reporting/Market Focus (June/July 2007) -- Misused Statistical Models and Resulting Market Misperceptions


The problem using statistical models to simulate or forecast economic activity, or to simulate or predict default risks, is tied largely to simplifying assumptions that have to be made, and to inaccurate numbers that get plugged into the models. When the limiting factors are not fully appreciated, the results of that modeling can have such a limited relationship to the real world as to be not only useless, but also financially dangerous to those relying on them.

Consider econometric forecasting. Some decades back, the Wharton School developed a wonderful model that simulated the U.S. economy, with something like 30,000 equations that had to be solved simultaneously. The model's value was in answering "What if?" types of questions. For example, if taxes were raised, what would that do to the economy next year? While the model could provide an indication of net impact, it could not predict the level of economic activity with any accuracy.

Nonetheless, this new tool soon was called into service as a forecasting model -- which it was not -- going well beyond the "What if?" If one wanted to forecast interest rate levels a year out, one first had to forecast what inflation would be the next year. If the inflation assumption were off, so also would be the interest rate forecast. To the extent the model was accurate, its forecasts could only be as good as the underlying assumptions made by the forecaster. Further, if the forecaster knew what the next year's inflation rate was going to be, he or she really did not need the model to figure out what would happen to interest rates.

The lack of forecast accuracy, however, did not dissuade the U.S. Government, the Federal Reserve and Corporate America from adopting such models for economic and business forecasting. The use of similar modeling today is so widespread that it partially explains the closeness of some consensus forecasts (often wrong) that come out of U.S. industry.

There have been ways of forecasting key data with reasonable accuracy, using single-equation formulas to predict a certain factor, where the formulas used leading indicators with enough lead-team to avoid having to rely on underlying assumptions. The growing problem with such models, however, has been the rapid deterioration in recent years of the quality of government statistics that would be used in such modeling.

Then there are simplifying assumptions. Financial models that do not allow for or otherwise assume away the possibilities of a major economic downturn, massive sell-offs in equities and the U.S. dollar, or significant spikes in long-term interest rates, have potential vulnerability to downside surprises, at such time as the economic and financial environments eventually unfold in a not so happy manner.


Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for August -- Annual GDP Revisions


GDP growth of recent years should be revised to the downside in this year's annual revision, based on already published benchmark revisions to key underlying series covering economic segments such as retail sales, industrial production and housing. The new data -- due for release on Friday, July 27th -- will be assessed, including within the context of the SGS Alternate GDP. Summary numbers and an initial assessment will be published in an Alert over the weekend following the data release.
Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for September -- Annual Income Variance Analysis


The extreme variance in the current distribution of U.S. income and wealth has received considerable press, recently. The government's annual estimate of this long-range indicator of economic and financial activity is due for late August release in conjunction with the annual Poverty Report. The latest data and implications of same will be examined. Last year's report showed income distribution at its most extreme since before the 1929 stock market crash and the Great Depression. It is not likely that the situation has improved.

___________________________________________


PLEASE NOTE: This month's double-issue catches up the newsletter date with the calendar, and affected subscriptions have been extended one month to adjust for same. The Hyperinflation Summary Report still is pending and will follow shortly.

The August "Shadow Government Statistics" newsletter is targeted for the week of August 13th, due to vacation in the prior week. The September newsletter will be targeted for the week of September 10th. There will be at least two intervening Flash Updates between each newsletter. Postings on the Web site of monthly newsletters, interim Flash Updates and Alerts are advised immediately by e-mail.

OCCASIONALLY, BRIEF UPDATES ARE COMMUNICATED DIRECTLY BY E-MAIL. IF YOU ARE NOT RECEIVING E-MAIL COMMUNICATIONS FROM US, PLEASE LET US KNOW at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or by using the Feedback option on www.shadowstats.com.


Flash Update

Wednesday, July 11th, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - July 11, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

July 11, 2007

__________

Revision and Seasonal-Adjustment Games Help Obfuscate Employment Reality

__________


The SGS Ongoing M3 Data Series has been updated for June's preliminary estimate, based on 25 days worth of data. The full-month estimate will be posted this coming weekend and discussed in the newsletter. The June/July newsletter is planned now for posting on July 16th, along with the Hyperinflation Summary. All postings will be advised by e-mail. -- Best wishes to all -- John Williams

Consistent Seasonals Suggest 107,000 June Jobs Gain (Not 132,000)


To maintain the reported 2,000,000 (exact) annual jobs growth in place for revised seasonally-adjusted May 2007 payrolls, monthly jobs gain reporting needs to be targeted by the Bush Administration at 167,000 per month. In contrast, the Clinton Administration targeted 250,000 per month (3,000,000 per year) for an extended period of time. Perhaps for fear of rattling the credit markets, however, initial monthly reporting typically has been "understated" over the last year or so, followed in subsequent months by major upward revisions to prior reporting. If this pattern is not a machination of the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), and if the later numbers are accurate, not fabrications, the BLS would do well to suspend its initial reporting of these numbers, rather than to continue misleading the public and the markets with such poor quality reporting.

Massive prior-period revisions and unusual seasonal-adjustments distorted the June employment report. Seasonally-adjusted June payrolls were reported up by 132,000 (207,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000 (95% confidence interval), following a revised 190,000 (previously 157,000) gain in May. With the BLS re-jiggering its seasonal factors each month, the range of potentially gimmicked reporting is great. Nonetheless, year-to-year change in the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series should be the same, and based on June's unadjusted annual growth rate, the jobs increase should have been 107,000 instead of 132,000. Annual growth for June was reported at 1.5% seasonally adjusted, 1.4% unadjusted.

Adding to the malleability of the reporting, June's fudge or bias factor (birth/death model) created 156,000 jobs that were added to the unadjusted number for good measure. That number flows through to the seasonally-adjusted data with minimal variation. The bias factors never are adjusted for a recessionary environment, always assuming ongoing growth. For example, 25,000 construction jobs were added to employment last June, and 26,000 construction jobs were fudged this June, despite the obvious deterioration in the 2007 construction environment.

Further, the reported 16,500 June jobs gain in the educational sector suggests that, as usually is the case, the BLS had problems properly seasonally adjusting for the effect of the end of the school year.

The household survey counts those who are employed, or not, while the payroll survey counts the number of jobs. Even allowing for the reported 7.5 million individuals holding multiple jobs, the two series are irreconcilable by the BLS. The household survey showed seasonally-adjusted June employment up by 197,000, with seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment increasing to 4.53% +/- 0.2% in June, from 4.46% in May. Unadjusted U.3 rose to 4.7% in June from 4.3% in May.

The broader, seasonally-adjusted U.6 unemployment rate held at 8.2% in June, but rose on an unadjusted basis to 8.5% from 7.9% in May. Net of the "discouraged workers" defined out of existence during the Clinton Administration, traditional unemployment continues to run around 12%.

Other economic reporting last week was light, except for some continuing strength in the purchasing managers surveys, which will be discussed in detail in the upcoming newsletter.

Ongoing M3 Growth at 13% for June. Based on 25 days of reporting in June and the major revisions to small time deposits (M2) and large time deposits (M3) discussed in the July 1st Flash Update, year-to-year growth for June M3 is estimated at 13.0%, down from 13.1% in May. June M2 annual growth is estimated at 6.2%, down from 6.3% in May, and June M1 annual change is estimated at a 0.9% contraction, down from a 0.8% contraction in May.

Updating the revision data from the prior Flash Update: annual M2 growth rates for March, April and May, respectively, were 6.1%, 6.5% and 6.7%, before revision, and 5.6%, 6.1% and 6.3%, after revision, with the preliminary June estimate at 6.2%. Annual SGS Ongoing M3 growth rates for March, April and May, respectively, were 11.7%, 12.8% and 13.3%, before the M2 and large time deposit revisions, and 11.5%, 12.5% and 13.1% after, with June coming in at a preliminary 13.0%. Estimates of the revised M3 monthly average levels will be published with the full-month data in the upcoming newsletter.

___________________________________________


The June/July "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter should be posted on July 16th. An e-mail advice of same will be sent.

Flash Update

Sunday, July 1st, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - July 1, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

July 1, 2007

__________

Recession Signals Deepen as Inflation Pressures Mount

__________


The SGS Alternate Data Series have been updated for the "final" first-quarter GDP, for the June U.S. dollar measures, and for money supply revisions affecting ongoing M3 (see comments in text -- the June preliminary estimate is due on July 9th). The Hyperinflation Summary is nearing completion, and the June/July SGS newsletter will follow in the week of July 9th. All postings will be advised by e-mail. -- Happy 4th of July to all! John Williams

Help-Wanted Advertising Falls to New Cycle and 50-Year Lows


May's help-wanted advertising index plummeted to 27, from 29 in April, hitting new cycle and 50-year lows. After allowing for the Internet's siphoning meaningful volume away from the print media, the renewed plunge in the current data still signals a sharp weakening in current economic activity and could be a harbinger of weaker-than-expected June employment data due for release on July 6th. There were no happy surprises in other economic releases last week. On the price front, ongoing M3 annual growth for June looks like it was close to matching May's pace, while oil prices moved higher, again, and the Fed fretted a little more openly about its inflation worries.

GDP Revision Was Statistical Noise. Annualized, seasonally-adjusted quarterly growth in first-quarter GDP revised to 0.6873% +/- 3% in the "final" estimate, up from 0.6496% in the "preliminary" estimate, a change that was little more than statistical noise. Annual growth revised to 1.91% from the previously-reported 1.90%. While nominal growth was boosted slightly through the use of a gimmicked narrowing of the trade deficit (net exports account), such was offset by an increase in the GDP implicit price deflator (annualized inflation rate) from 4.0% to 4.2%.

Of some significance, historical GDP from 2004 to date will go through an annual revision on July 27th, along with the release of the "advance" estimate of second-quarter GDP. While prior history will show weaker economic growth than previously reported, it is a fair bet that the distribution of the revisions somehow will avoid creating a heretofore unreported quarterly GDP contraction.

Second Leg of June Consumer Confidence Falls. Following June's Conference Board measure turning negative on both a monthly and annual basis, the University of Michigan sentiment measure also declined for the month, dropping 3.4%. Year-to-year change on a monthly basis slowed to 0.5% from the prior month's 11.6% gain, but the three-month moving average change was a gain of 3.7%, up from 3.3% the month before. As lagging indicators of economic activity, these measures of consumer outlook confirm that the economy has been in trouble.

Durable Goods Orders Annual Growth Remains in Recession Territory. Seasonally-adjusted May durable goods orders declined by 2.8% (2.3% net of revisions) for the month, following a 1.1% increase in April (previously 0.6%). On an annual basis, orders were up by just 0.3% from the year before, which was a contraction after adjustment for inflation. New orders for nondefense capital goods fell by 8.3% for the month, following April's 0.1% decline, with annual change a gain of 1.4%.

M2 Revisions Take Notch Out of Ongoing M3 Growth. The Fed seems to have trouble counting time deposits. Downward revisions to large time deposits (greater than $100,000) during the last month have been significant, historically, but have had no meaningful impact on near-term annual M3 growth. The revisions to small time deposits, however, have reduced recent reported annual M2 growth. Where M3 is built upon M2, that has impacted M3, but not significantly.

Annual M2 growth rates for March, April and May, respectively, were 6.1%, 6.5% and 6.7%, before revision, and 5.6%, 6.1% and 6.3%, after revision. Annual SGS Ongoing M3 growth rates for March, April and May, respectively, were 11.7%, 12.8% and 13.3%, before the M2 revisions, and 11.4%, 12.5% and 13.1% after.

For June, two and a half weeks of reporting suggest the monthly annual growth rate will hold about 13%, which reflects some unusual downside volatility in the weekly, large time deposit estimates. A formal, preliminary estimate for June will be published on the Alternate Data Series tab on July 9th, and in the upcoming newsletter.

Week ahead: Odds favor a downside surprise in June payroll growth and an upside surprise in the unemployment rate. The wild card in the June report always is the Bureau of Labor Statistics' inability to adjust the data for shool-year seasonal variations.

Further details will follow in the newsletter.

___________________________________________


The June/July "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter should be posted during the week of July 9th, following the release of the June employment data on the preceding Friday. An e-mail advice of same will be sent.

Flash Update

Tuesday, June 26th, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - June 26, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

June 26, 2007

__________

Last Month's Unusual Housing "Surge" Evaporates

__________


This short Flash Update covers the limited economic releases of the last week, primarily housing statistics. The economic calendar for the balance of this week will be covered in a Flash Update over the coming weekend, and the Hyperinflation Summary likely will be published at that time, as well. The June/July SGS newsletter will follow in the week of July 9th. All postings will be advised by e-mail. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

Fed Remains Hamstrung Despite Mounting Dollar and Systemic Liquidity Risks


Sporadic and irregular "positive" economic reports of the last month are proving fleeting, as I suggested, with some numbers revising sharply to the weak side. The housing numbers, for example, look again like they are in the middle of deepening recession.

The best of the leading housing indicators is housing starts, where May's seasonally-adjusted starts fell by 2.1% (down 3.5% net of revisions) for the month, following April's 1.0% gain, previously reported as a 2.5% gain. Year-to-year change in May was a contraction of 24.2%, compared with April's milder 17.3% decline (previously a 16.1% drop). On a three-month moving-average basis, May's annual sales were down by 22.0% against April's 24.1% decline.

Last month, headlines were made by April's soaring new home sales. The housing downturn was over, trumpeted Wall Street. Unfortunately, the data released today confirmed the re-softening environment. May's seasonally-adjusted new home sales declined by 1.6% (a 6.7% drop net of revisions), following a 12.5% revised April gain (initially reported at 16.2%). May's year-to-year decline stood at 15.8%, against April's revised 15.2% contraction, which originally was reported at 10.6%.

May's seasonally-adjusted existing new home sales declined by 0.3% for the month, following April's 2.3% monthly drop, and were down by 10.3% for the year.

Although a lagging economic indicator, declining consumer confidence generally is not viewed as a positive sign for housing. June's Conference Board measure turned negative on both a monthly and annual basis, down 4.2% from May, which was up 2.1% in revision, and June was down 1.4% from the year before, after a 3.6% gain in May.

The counterbalancing concerns of inflation and a softening economy are likely to keep the Fed's hands tied come Thursday's FOMC policy announcement. Despite mounting risks of a major dollar sell-off, and despite increasing concerns of a liquidity crisis tied to the sub-prime mortgage debacle, nothing actionable in formal policy has come before the U.S. central bank, yet. Upside risks to Fed rate action remain tied to the greenback's likely sell-off, while downside risk remains tied to any systemic liquidity crisis.

Further details will follow in the newsletter.

___________________________________________


The June/July "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter should be posted during the week of July 9th, following the release of the June employment data. An e-mail advice of same will be sent.

Flash Update

Sunday, June 17th, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - June 17, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

June 17, 2007

__________

Alternate CPI Notches up to 10.3% Annual Inflation

May M3 Annual Growth at 13.3%

Industrial Production Falters, Retail Sales Get Seasonal-Factor Boost

__________


The SGS Alternate Consumer Price Measure has been updated for May, and the May SGS Ongoing M3 growth has been revised based on full monthly data, with both series posted to the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

Inflationary Recession Deteriorates Anew


With May CPI and PPI topping expectations, and with industrial production faltering, the combination of inflation and recession -- a disquieting concept for the financial markets -- is not about to disappear. Inflation factors appear to have been rattling the credit markets recently, but the rise in long-term U.S. rates likely reflects more of a waning foreign enthusiasm for buying U.S. Treasuries, than it does expectations of a pending U.S. economic boom. Any such expectations should disappear along with downside surprises in economic reporting of the next month or two.

M3. With a full month of underlying data in place, the SGS Ongoing M3 estimate of annual growth was in line with the preliminary estimate of 13.3%, up from 12.8% in April. For those who use the estimate of the seasonally-adjusted monthly average level, the levels estimated for May, April and March, respectively, were $11.933 trillion, $11.791 trillion and $11.610 trillion.

CPI and PPI. The seasonally-adjusted May CPI-U rose 0.67% (0.61% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval) for the month, following April's 0.42% (0.65% unadjusted) gain. Annual inflation (unadjusted) notched higher to 2.69% from 2.57% in April. Restated to Pre-Clinton (1990) methodologies, annual inflation was roughly 6.0%; restated to Pre-Reagan (1980) methodologies (SGS Alternate Measure), annual inflation in May was about 10.3% versus 10.2% in April.

Updating last month's calculations, on a seasonally-adjusted basis the annualized rate of CPI inflation for May versus December was 5.51%. The same number on an unadjusted basis was 7.47%. These numbers give a hint of where the annual inflation numbers are headed. Straight inflation remains far from contained.

The Chained-CPI-U (the fully substitution-based index being groomed to takeover for the CPI-U) showed May annual inflation of 2.33% against 2.35% in April.

The seasonally-adjusted May PPI also was worse than expected, up by 0.9% (1.2% unadjusted), following April's 0.7% adjusted gain. Annual inflation jumped to 4.1% in May from 3.2% in April. Intermediate goods in May rose by 1.1% for the month, crude goods were up by 2.0%.

Industrial Production. Seasonally-adjusted May industrial production was on the downside of flat (down by 0.03%) and was down by 0.3% net of revisions. The previously-reported April monthly gain of 0.7% was revised to a gain of 0.4%. Importantly, May's annual growth continued to sink into recession territory, to 1.6%. While that was the same level as current April reporting, April initially was reported up by 1.9%.

Retail Sales. Likely boosted by seasonal-factor distortions tied to the timing of Easter, May retail sales rose by 1.4% (1.6% net of revisions) +/- 0.8% (95% confidence interval) following a revised 0.1% decline in April (previously a drop of 0.2%). Annual growth for May was 5.0% versus 3.1% in April. Those same numbers net of CPI-U inflation were 2.37% and 0.54%. Look for retail sales to fall back in June as the seasonals reverse.

Week Ahead: Housing Starts. The May housing starts release on Tuesday (June 19th) is at fair risk of surprising market expectations on the downside, with a monthly contraction. If the economy indeed is as weak as most indicators suggest, those series that have seen recent, sporadic gains (such as April's housing starts) will reverse as weather and seasonal distortions run their courses.

Further details will follow in the newsletter.

___________________________________________


The June/July "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter should be posted during the week of July 9th. An e-mail advice of same will be sent.

May 2007 Edition

Wednesday, June 6th, 2007
JWSGS - MAY 2007 EDITION - June 6, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Issue Number 31

June 6, 2007

__________

GDP Contracted Net of Nonsensical Personal Consumption Surge

Seasonal Factor Distortions Boosted Payrolls Again

M3 Growth at 33-Year High

Fed Remains Impotent

Stock Market Turmoil, Dollar Sell-Off and Gold Boom Just Matter of Time

__________


PLEASE NOTE: Targeted for publication on June 25th is a Special Supplement on Hyperinflation that includes updated material along with an edited compilation of SGS materials published over time, including the recent Hyperinflation Series. Added will be new material from readers' reactions, questions and observations related to the recent Series. Please feel free still to offer any comments or raise your questions in the next week or so by e-mail to johnwilliams@shadowstats.com. Also, please read the note at the end of this month's edition on timing for the June/July SGS (targeted July 9th) and newsletter timing going forward. Updated SGS Ongoing M3 annual growth rates, U.S. Dollar measures and the SGS Alternate GDP were posted to the Alternate Data Series tab of www.shadowstats.com on June 2nd. Best wishes to all -- John Williams

OVERVIEW -- OPENING COMMENTS


Last month's key data generally showed a worsening inflationary recession. Relative monthly strength, reported for several indicators of business activity, were not too meaningful. Where the affected numbers are highly volatile, of suspect quality or subject to unusual seasonal factors, countertrend reporting usually is just a one-month aberration. Changes in economic direction are foreshadowed by shifts in leading indicators, not by shifts in coincident or lagging indicators, and most of the better indicators continue to confirm a deepening economic contraction. On the inflation front, annualized CPI inflation, year-to-date April, is running 4.8% to 7.4% (seasonally adjusted or unadjusted). Annual growth in the SGS Ongoing M3 has broken above 13%, rivaling levels seen before the severe 1973/1975 inflationary recession.

Slowing Economy. The revised first quarter's 0.6% annualized real (inflation-adjusted) GDP growth (0.4% Gross National Product growth, 0.3% contraction in supposedly GDP-equivalent Gross Domestic Income), with a 95% confidence interval of +/- 3%, was statistically indistinguishable from a contraction.

In fact, any minor corrections to the clearly flawed reporting would have generated the first formal quarterly GDP contraction of the current recession. For example, real retail sales, as reported by the St. Louis Federal Reserve, grew at an annualized quarterly rate of 2.4% in the first quarter, but the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) estimate of related components in GDP showed 5.3% growth. The hot consumption items included surging auto sales (not commonly recognized by the auto industry) and surging furniture and household equipment sales for all those new homes that are not being built. The difference is a swing from 0.6% growth to a 0.2% contraction.

Historical reporting patterns would favor some added downside restatement in the next GDP revision. Further, next month's annual revisions would be a solid bet for generating two quarters of contracting real GDP growth, if the data were honest. Somehow, though, this most highly politicized of series is likely to show its revised weaker historic growth distributed through recent past history so as to avoid the reporting of any quarterly contractions.

In other reporting, housing remains in trouble, although monthly gains in starts and new home sales stirred some wishful market thinking of an upturn. As shown below, the three-month moving-average annual change in housing starts remains deep in recession territory.



Plunging building permits and annual contractions in new and existing home sales suggest there has been no shift in the underlying housing fundamentals.

There was an outright contraction in April retail sales. Monthly gains in industrial production and durable goods orders were tempered by not-so-positive trends in annual change.

May payrolls surprised market expectations on the upside, thanks largely to seasonal factor distortions. Help-wanted advertising contracted in April, and although recent new claims for unemployment have shown a less-negative economic trend, the economic negative remains.

The improvement seen in the purchasing managers manufacturing survey in April and May, should prove fleeting, if indeed the data are being warped by poor quality seasonal factors, as I suspect. If the manufacturing series continues to gain in the next couple of months, such would be suggestive of perhaps a proverbial "dead cat bounce" in the manufacturing sector.

PLEASE NOTE: A "General background note" provides a broad background paragraph on certain series or concepts. Where the language used in past and subsequent newsletters usually has been or will be identical, month-after-month, any text changes in these sections will be highlighted in bold italics upon first usage. This is designed so that regular readers may avoid re-reading material they have seen before, but where they will have the material available for reference, if so desired.

General background note: The U.S. economy is in a protracted and deepening structural recession that will prove to be the second leg of a double-dip recession, which began in 2000/2001. The current downleg was signaled in mid-2005 by a series of leading indicators used for that purpose by SGS. With neither traditional fiscal nor monetary stimulus available to help turn economic activity, the current circumstance is likely to evolve into a hyperinflationary depression (see December 2006 SGS).

Market Concerns Shifting Towards Inflation Risk. On the inflation front, both the CPI and PPI showed solid monthly inflation gains that have been tempered by heavy seasonal adjustments in the first half of 2007, while annual inflation was somewhat softer in April. Oil prices remain strong and gasoline prices may be peaking, temporarily, close to record highs. Mounting tensions in the Middle East and the onset of the hurricane season offer meaningful upside risks to energy costs.

M3 Growth Invites Unfortunate Historical Comparisons. Barely beating out the annual M3 growth rate of 13.2% in November 2001's post-terrorist attacks liquefaction, May 2007's annual M3 growth rate of 13.3% is the highest since August 1973 (see this month's Money Supply section and the Reporting/Market Focus on M3).

Money growth had soared in the early 1970s as the failing U.S. dollar caused Nixon to abandon the U.S. currency's last link to gold in 1971, and to float the greenback early in 1973. The 13.3% M3 growth in August 1973 actually was in a downtrend.



As of August 1973, the U.S. dollar had declined 23% against the Deutschemark since the beginning of the year. Vice President Spiro Agnew's resignation, the Arab-Israeli war and the Arab oil embargo were just two months away. Already starting to unfold was a severe inflationary recession. Richard Nixon's popularity as President would hit its historic nadir in October 1973 -- not during Watergate -- a feat exceeded on the downside only recently by the historic low ratings given to President Bush.

The overall 4.9% peak-to-trough contraction in Gross National Product, during the recognized November 1973 to March 1975 recession, officially is the worst downturn of the post-World War II era. At the time of the 13.3% M3 growth in August 1973, official CPI inflation was 7.4%. Inflation would peak at 12.3% in December 1974, near the end of the 1973/1975 recession.

A variety of factors combined to create the particularly difficult economic environment in the 1970s, and excessive money growth was one of them. A number of factors also have combined to create the current untenable conditions in the economy and financial markets. In the early 1970s, however, trade largely was in balance, the U.S. was not yet a net-debtor nation and the federal budget deficit was containable. Today, any way the twin deficits are viewed, they are out of control, the largest ever seen for a major country, and the U.S. is the world's largest net-debtor nation.

As an aside, the depth of the 1973/1975 recession was exceeded by the combination of the successive declines in the 1980 and 1981/1982 double-dip recession, which also was inflationary.

Muted-to-Exuberant Market Reactions. Responding to these less-than-happy factors during the last month: the U.S. dollar generally was a little stronger, except for its notable ongoing decline against the Canadian dollar; gold and oil prices softened minimally; the Treasury yield curve flattened out and actually now shows a net positive slope; and stocks continued their mindless bubbling.

An inflationary recession combined with eventual massive selling pressure against the U.S. dollar is the worst of all worlds for the U.S. equity and credit markets. Benefiting from the coming turmoil should be gold and silver prices.

Alternate Realities. General background note: This section updates the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting. When a government economic measure does not match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Federal Reserve, White House and Wall Street. In these alternate measures, the effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan-Era GDP. The methodologies for the series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS (see Archives page at www.shadowstats.com).

GDP. The alternate first-quarter GDP growth reflects the "preliminary" estimate revision, with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate first-quarter inflation-adjusted annual growth rate (year-to-year, as opposed to the popularly-touted annualized quarter-to-quarter rate) for GDP was a decline of roughly 2.2% versus the official year-to-year gain of 1.9%.



General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate GDP numbers tend to show deeper and more protracted recessions than have been reported formally or reflected in related official reporting. Nonetheless, the patterns shown in the alternate data are broadly consistent with the payroll employment and industrial production series (as revised), which are major indicators used by the National Bureau of Economic Research in determining the official timing of U.S. business cycles.

CPI. The annual inflation measures eased a notch or two in April. Oil prices have been volatile, but remained high and generally are trending higher. Beyond related higher energy and material costs increasingly permeating broad economic activity, gasoline prices continue to spike due to supply problems. Both core and regular annual inflation reporting should rise sharply in the months ahead.

                             Eight Levels of Inflation
                  Annual Inflation for December 2006 to April 2007


2007 Measure Jan Feb Mar Apr I.1 Core PCE Deflator 2.2% 2.4% 2.1% 2.0% I.2 Core Chained-CPI-U 2.3% 2.4% 2.1% 2.0% I.3 Core CPI-U 2.7% 2.7% 2.5% 2.3% I.4 PCE Deflator 1.9% 2.3% 2.3%r 2.2% I.5 Chained-CPI-U 1.9% 2.2% 2.5% 2.3% I.6 CPI-U 2.1% 2.4% 2.8% 2.6% I.7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U 5.4% 5.7% 6.2% 6.0% I.8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation 9.9% 10.0% 10.2% 10.2%

Notes: I.1 to I.3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively, of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U. I.4 to I.6 are the same measures with energy and food inflation included. The CPI-U (I.6) is the measure popularly followed by the financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation. I.7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre- Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top series in the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com. I.8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which reverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so, plus an adjustment for the portion of Clinton-Era geometric weighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic bookkeeping.




General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate CPI numbers tend to show significantly higher inflation over time, generally reflecting the reversal of hedonic adjustments, geometric weighting and the use of a more traditional approach to measuring housing costs, measures all consistent with the reporting methodology in place as of 1980.



MARKETS PERSPECTIVE


The general outlook for the markets remains unchanged. Ongoing equity market strength keeps moving away from reality, with an ultimate heavy sell-off and protracted bear market looming at some point not too far down the road.

The U.S. dollar remains on the edge of the abyss, with only the element of timing an issue as to when the greenback begins a terrible downward spiral. Coincident with that selling will be a liquidation of dollar denominated assets held outside the United States, along with a corresponding spike in U.S. interest rates and sell-off in equities.

Benefiting from this market turmoil should be gold, one of the better hedges against all the economic displacements that are continuing to unfold.

In this environment, with the U.S. financial markets dependent on foreign capital for liquidity, the Fed has its hands tied. Chairman Bernanke keeps giving the markets mixed signals and positive spins, where the best the Fed can hope for is to forestall, for as long as possible, a likely financial market meltdown.

The potential for a U.S. dollar sell-off remains the primary risk to the Fed raising interest rates. With market liquidity at stake, defense of the dollar will outweigh considerations of a faltering economy, at least initially. Only the threat of a systemic domestic financial collapse is likely to push the Fed to an easing stance in the near-term.

General background note: The U.S. economy remains in a severe, structural inflationary recession, saddled with an impotent Fed and a federal government that is fiscally bankrupt in all but name. In combination, these factors offer the worst of all environments to the financial markets. Ahead lie higher long-term interest rates and much lower U.S. equity prices. On the plus side is the outlook for gold, which provides a solid hedge against many of the problems that have started to surface. Key to the near-term movements of these markets remains the fate of the U.S. dollar.

U.S. Equities -- The Dow Jones Industrial Average and other popular equity indices keep hitting historic highs, while the underpinning fundamentals push historic negative extremes. When reality catches up with delusion, the downside adjustments to stock prices should be quite large.

General background note: The approaching financial maelstrom already has come over the horizon. When it hits, those investors who have taken shelter in cash, gold and outside the U.S. dollar will be the ones with the wealth and assets available to take advantage of the extraordinary investment opportunities that should follow.

U.S. Credit Market -- As discussed last month, little action can be expected from the Fed, until either a dollar panic or systemic liquidity issues force its hand.

Rising inflation usually means upside pressure on long-term interest rates and relative to short-term rates. The inflow of foreign liquidity to the markets has kept long-term rates flat and has inverted the yield curve (short-term yields higher than long-term yields) for some time.

That changed in the last month, with the yield curve actually resuming a more-normal net positive slope as suggested by the following graph of the relative constant-maturity yields on the three-month Treasury bill and 10-year Treasury note.



While the change, to a certain extent, may reflect shifting market expectations, it also may reflect a developing shift in foreign investor activity. Once the dollar dumping begins, the long-term yields should spike relatively sharply with an increasingly positive slope to the yield curve.

U.S. Dollar -- The U.S. dollar gained against most of the major currencies last month, except against the Canadian dollar, where the exchange rate appears headed for a parity not seen for three decades.

Despite the extraordinarily negative fundamentals discussed below, heavy dollar selling has not hit, yet. The timing of the move against the dollar remains uncertain, but it likely will come sooner (next several months), rather than later, with little or no warning. The proximal trigger may be a surprise, but likely will come from a universe of bad economic statistics, missteps by the Administration or a central bank, negative trade or market developments in Asia, or a terrorist attack or even still-likely military action against Iran. Broad selling pressure should be strong enough to overcome any short-lived central bank intervention.

General background note: In terms of underlying fundamentals that tend to drive currency trading, the dollar's portfolio could not be worse. Relative to major trading partners, the U.S. economy is much weaker, interest rates are lower, inflation is higher, fiscal and trade-balance conditions are abysmal, and relative political stability is at a nadir. The President's approval rating commonly has moved currency trading in the past, and it is at the lowest level seen in the post-World War II era. Relative political stability issues are compounded by the presence of a Congress hostile to the President. Generally, the greater the magnitude of the dollar selling, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. capital markets.

As shown in the following graph, the U.S. dollar trading was mixed in May, setting a new low on a trade-weighted basis.



General background note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS for methodology.

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics' Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (FWD) is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For May 2007, the monthly dollar average rose by 0.26%, after declining 1.76% in April. The May 2007 average index level of 50.22 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 3.19% from May 2006, with April 2007 down 7.49% from the year before. The index's historic low was 48.98 in April 1995.

Dropping to a new all-time low, however, May's monthly average of the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (TWD) fell by 0.84%, after April's 1.67% decline. The May 2007 index level of 56.99 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 2.78% from the year before, against April's 4.78% annual decline.

The variance of the gain in the FWD versus the decline in the TWD can be explained by the sharp monthly decline of the U.S. dollar against the Canadian dollar, where the latter receives a much heavier weighting in the TWD.

Gold -- The monthly-average gold price (London afternoon fix per Kitco.com) averaged $666.86 per troy ounce in May, following April's all-time high average of $679.37. The minor monthly decline was despite stories of mounting central bank gold sales. Silver averaged $13.15 per troy ounce in May, down from $13.74 in April.

While high price volatility is common with gold trading, and despite central-bank manipulations and intervention, the upside potential for the precious metal remains explosive, particularly when heavy dollar selling begins. Still, look for new monthly and daily highs in the months ahead.

General background note: As discussed in the Hyperinflation Series (see the December 2006 to March 2007 SGSs), the eventual complete collapse of the U.S. dollar -- the world's reserve currency -- will force the creation of a new international currency system. Gold likely will be structured into any replacement system, in an effort by those organizing the new currency structure to gain public acceptance.





The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show April averages. As we go to press, gold is trading around $670, oil is around $65 and the Swiss franc is near $0.82. Look for all three measures to trade significantly higher in the months ahead.



REPORTING PERSPECTIVE


The Big Three Market Movers


Most major economic reports now are coming in on the soft side of expectations, while inflation results generally have been at the upper end of expectations. Nonetheless, there have been several recent reports such as April jobs and new home sales that had their monthly gains hyped into economic turnarounds. As discussed in the Opening Comments and in the sections ahead, spurious countertrend reports tend to be one-month aberrations. The economy does not turn quickly, and certainly not without major upside shifts in key leading indicators.

Nonetheless, market sentiment increasingly has settled into the possibility of a mix of recession and inflation, although the full extent of the economy's plight is far from broad recognition. With the President's positive rating still bottom bouncing at a record low, and with the Fed fearful of a market meltdown, recent and upcoming releases of major series have been, and likely will continue to be, subject to some massaging for both the perceived political needs of the Administration and the heavy financial market needs of an impotent Federal Reserve Board.

General background note: Against lagging and still largely distorted market expectations, most near-term economic reporting will tend to continue to surprise the markets on the downside, while most inflation reporting should continue to surprise the markets on the upside.

Employment/Unemployment -- Seasonally-adjusted May payroll employment was reported up by 157,000 (147,000 net of revisions) not much outside the 95% confidence interval of +/- 129,000. The May increase followed a revised April gain of 80,000 (previously 88,000). Annual growth in May payrolls notched higher to 1.39% from 1.36% in April, the lowest level since the closing days of the last recession.

Once again, the monthly payrolls appear to have been boosted by the use of inappropriate seasonal factors. Where the monthly year-to-year changes in both the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series should be the same, applying the base unadjusted growth rates to the adjusted series would have shown monthly gains in April and May of 26,000 and 146,000, respectively, for a total of 172,000. Such compares with the reported gains of 80,000 and 157,000, or a total of 237,000 for the two months.

The jobs number also was supported by a positive monthly fudge or bias factor (now called the birth-death adjustment, which overestimates employment growth during recessions). May's bias factor of 203,000 (up from 201,000 in May 2006) was down from 271,000 in April. The June 2006 bias was 166,000.

From the statistically-sounder household survey, seasonally-adjusted May employment coincidentally also gained 157,000 (the two series are not reconcilable), after employment fell by 468,000 in April. This number reflects the change in the number of people who have at least one job, versus the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs.

Also from the household survey, the seasonally-adjusted May U.3 unemployment was 4.46% +/- 0.23%, virtually unchanged from April's 4.45%. On an unadjusted basis, U.3 held at 4.3% in May. The broader U.6 rate on an unadjusted basis also held at 7.9% in May, with the seasonally-adjusted U.6 rate holding at 8.2% in May against April. Net of "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment continues to run about 12%.

The May employment data were against a background of declining help-wanted advertising, somewhat less economically-negative new claims for unemployment insurance and a weaker showing in the May purchasing managers survey manufacturing employment component, although the services component improved (see respective sections). These background numbers remain consistent with continued weakness in official jobs and unemployment reporting.

Next Release (July 6): The June payroll survey should swing back to the weak side of expectations. Look for the unemployment rate to enter a period of fairly regular upturns.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) -- The "preliminary" estimate revision of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth for the first quarter of 2007 was 0.6496% +/- 3%, down from an initial estimate of 1.26%, and still statistically indistinguishable from a quarterly contraction. One has to go to the unpublished third decimal point in the GDP estimates to come up with annualized growth of 0.6%, otherwise it calculates out to 0.7%. The first-quarter's tepid growth was down sharply from the fourth quarter's reported 2.45%. Measured year-to-year, annual GDP growth in the first quarter slowed to 1.90% from an initial estimate of 2.06%, and from 3.13% in the fourth quarter.

An understated adjustment for the widened trade deficit and a liquidation of inventories provided the bulk of the downward revision. That was partially offset by an upward revision to personal consumption that had no relationship to underlying reality. As discussed in the Opening Comments, that one factor, among others, made the difference between growth and contraction.

GDP inflation held its strong initial gain, with the first quarter's implicit price deflator reflecting annualized inflation of 4.0% versus the previously reported 3.97%, and up from 1.67% in the fourth quarter.

Although the GDP report is the government's broadest estimate of U.S. economic activity, it is also the least meaningful and most heavily massaged of all major government economic series. Published by the BEA, it primarily has become a tool for economic propaganda. Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS Alternate GDP measure suggests economic reality is much weaker than officially reported. Alternate year-to-year annual contractions continue, with an annual 2.2% contraction in the first quarter deepening from the 1.5% decline in the fourth quarter (see the graph in the Alternate Reality section in the Opening Comments).

Official estimates for real, annualized, quarterly first-quarter growth in gross national product (GNP) and gross domestic income (GDI) were published along with the "preliminary" GDP.

First-quarter real GNP -- GDP net of the international flows in factor income (interest and dividend payments) -- was up at an annualized quarterly rate of just 0.40%, down from 3.49% in the fourth quarter.

First-quarter real GDI -- the supposedly equivalent income side of GDP -- actually contracted by 0.32%, following the fourth quarter's 4.47% gain.

Next Release (June 28): Usually the "final" estimate revision of first-quarter 2007 GDP would be little more than statistical noise. When there is such a sharp first revision, however, the second often takes it a little further in the same direction. Then there are the annual revisions due on July 27th. While prior-period growth most certainly will revise lower, as discussed in recent SGS newsletters, political massaging should keep a quarterly contraction from surfacing.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) -- The BLS reported the seasonally-adjusted April CPI-U (I.6) up by 0.42% (0.65% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval) for the month, following March's 0.61% (0.91% unadjusted) monthly inflation gain. Annual inflation eased back to 2.57% in April from 2.78% in March. Annualized year-to-date inflation through April was 4.81% adjusted, 7.44% unadjusted.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) (I.5) -- the substitution-based series that appears destined to replace the CPI-U -- was 2.35% in April versus 2.46% in March.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology (I.7), annual CPI growth was about 5.9% in April, down from 6.2% in March, while the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (I.8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, held at roughly 10.2% in April. The eight levels of annual inflation, I.1 to I.8, are shown in the table in the Alternate Reality section, along with the graph of SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation.

Next Release (June 15): Annual inflation generally will continue rising into at least the third quarter of 2007. Seasonally-adjusted, monthly CPI-U increased by 0.55% in May 2006. Any monthly reporting above or below that for the pending release of May 2007 CPI will add or subtract directly to or from the current annual CPI-U inflation rate. Reporting risks favor an upside surprise to modest market expectations. A renewed upside movement in core inflation also is overdue.


Other Troubled Key Series


Federal Deficit -- General background note: The federal government's fiscal 2006 (fiscal year-end September 30th) deficit, prepared based on generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), widened to $4.6 trillion from 2005's $3.5 trillion. Those numbers dwarfed the officially-gimmicked 2006 federal budget deficit of $248.2 billion, which was down $70.8 billion from 2005's $318.5 billion (see the December SGS).

General background note: Although it lacks the accrual accounting of the GAAP numbers, the change in gross federal debt bypasses several of the reporting manipulations and is a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the official, gimmicked deficit reporting. As of fiscal year-end 2006, the gross federal debt stood at $8.507 trillion, up $574 billion from 2005, which in turn was up $554 billion from 2004.

For the rolling 12 months through April 2007, the gimmicked deficit was $144.9 billion versus $265.7 billion in April 2006, compared with the rolling deficits of $203.7 billion in March 2007 and $326.8 billion in March 2006. For May 31, 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $8.829 trillion, up $472 billion from May 2006, which in turn was up $579 billion from May 2005. For April 30, 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $8.840 trillion, up $484 billion from April 2006, which in turn was up $591 billion from April 2005.

General background note: The Administration and Congress continue playing bookkeeping games. Even so, the gimmicked deficit should widen this year, as government finances suffer increasingly from tax revenue losses due to the intensifying recession and relative tax receipt declines after the expiration of recent tax incentives. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy's mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance -- Annual growth in initial claims has softened (an economic positive) but has continued in positive territory (an economic negative). On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended May 26th, annual growth was 2.7%, down from 6.4% for the 17 weeks ended April 28th.

General background note: More often than not, week-to-week volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly claims numbers is due to the Labor Department's efforts to seasonally adjust these numbers around holiday periods, such as Easter and Memorial Day. The Labor Department has demonstrated an inability to do such adjusting successfully. When the new claims series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings -- April's seasonally-adjusted real earnings declined by 0.5%, following March's revised 0.1% gain (previously a 0.1% drop). Annual growth slowed to 0.9% in April from 1.6% in March.

General background note: Gyrations in the poor quality of reported CPI growth account for most month-to-month volatility in this series. Adjusting for the major upside biases built into the CPI-W inflation measure used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series shows the average worker to be under severe financial stress in an ongoing recession.

Retail Sales -- April's seasonally-adjusted retail sales declined by 0.23% (plus 0.13% net of revisions) +/- 0.9% (95% confidence interval), following 0.97% growth (previously 0.68%) in March. With monthly CPI up by 0.42% in April, not only were seasonally-adjusted monthly retail sales down by roughly 0.65% after inflation, they were 0.3% below the sales of December 2006.

On a year-to-year basis, April retail sales were up 3.17% before inflation and just 0.60% after inflation, compared with respective annual growth numbers for March of 4.37% and 1.59%.

General background note: Real (inflation-adjusted) year-to-year growth in retail sales below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation) signals recession, and a signal first was generated in this business cycle back in June 2006.

Next Release (June 13): May retail sales should come in below relatively strong market expectations and below the rate of inflation on both a monthly and possibly a year-to-year basis.

Industrial Production -- Seasonally-adjusted industrial production rose by 0.7% (0.4% net of revisions) in April, following March's revised 0.3% decline (previously a 0.2% drop). Despite the monthly gain, with prior period revisions in place, April's annual growth slowed to a near-recessionary 1.88%, down from 2.07% in March.

Next Release (June 15): Look for June industrial production to move again towards a pattern of contraction. Eventually, monthly contractions in this series should become regular, with annual growth turning negative.

New Orders for Durable Goods -- For April, the usually volatile durable goods orders gained 0.6% (1.4% net of revisions) on a seasonally-adjusted basis, and revisions this time were from the annual benchmark, which had negligible impact in the aggregate. March now shows a 5.0% gain (previously 3.4%). April's annual change was a gain of 4.7%. On a three-month moving-average annual basis, though, change was a 0.3% contraction, following a 0.8% contraction in March, still suggestive of less-than-robust economic activity.

The closely followed nondefense capital goods news orders fell by 0.8%, following March's 11.4% (previously 11.7%) month-to-month jump. April's annual growth rate for nondefense capital goods was 11.0%.

General background note: Durable goods orders lost its status as a solid leading economic indicator when the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders in 2002.

Trade Balance -- The seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for March 2007 was reported at $63.9 billion, up from a revised $57.9 billion (previously $58.4 billion) in February. While, the March deterioration reflected some catch-up from underreporting of recent months, the March deficit remains shy of reality. The unexpected trade deterioration was a factor in the downside "preliminary" revision to first-quarter GDP.

Next Release (June 8): Odds favor the April trade deficit showing continued deterioration, recovering further from recent understatement. Reporting risk generally remains on the negative side of consensus forecasts, and a surprise sharp deterioration would dampen early expectations of second-quarter GDP growth. The months ahead should see a pattern of regularly increasing deficits that once again will be setting new records.

Consumer Confidence -- May confidence measures rose both on a monthly and annual basis. The Conference Board's May Consumer Confidence rose by 1.6% month-to-month, after a revised 1.8% drop (was down 3.9%) in April. May's annual change was a gain of 3.2% (slowing to a 0.2% gain on a three-month moving-average basis).

For May, the University of Michigan's Consumer Sentiment rose by 1.4%, following a 1.5% decline in April. May's year-to-year change was a gain of 11.6% (firming to a 3.3% gain on a three-month moving-average basis).

The bounce in these lagging, not leading, indicators tends to reflect more the tone of the popular financial media, rather than any turn in economic activity.

General background note: The Conference Board measure is seasonally adjusted, which can provide occasional, but significant distortion. The adjustment does not make much sense and is of suspect purpose, given that the Conference Board does not release the unadjusted number. The Michigan survey is unadjusted. How does one seasonally-adjust peoples' attitudes? Also, beware the mid-month Consumer Sentiment release from the University of Michigan. Its sampling base is so small as to be virtually valueless in terms of statistical significance.

Short-Term Credit Measures -- Patterns of annual growth in consumer and commercial borrowing were mixed, though generally stronger, in the most recent reporting.

Seasonally-adjusted consumer credit (which includes credit cards and auto loans but not mortgages) grew by 0.6% in the month of March, with annual growth picking up to 5.1% from 4.6% in February. In the current environment, where inflation-adjusted growth in income is not adequate to support meaningful growth in the personal consumption component of GDP, GDP growth only can come from temporary debt expansion or savings liquidation. Even with a minor pick-up in activity, still-restrained consumer debt expansion places constraint on economic growth.

Commercial borrowing remains strong on a year-to-year basis, with annual growth in commercial paper outstanding rising to 19.6% in May from 17.7% in April. Annual growth in commercial and industrial loans was 11.7% in April, slightly easier than the 12.7% in March. Solid growth in the commercial credit measures can signal credit needs tied either to rising sales and receivables/inventory, or to slowing sales and slowing collections and involuntarily rising inventories.

Producer Price Index (PPI) -- April finished goods PPI rose a seasonally-adjusted 0.7% (1.0% unadjusted), versus March's 1.0% (1.4% unadjusted). Annual PPI in April held at 3.2%, same as in March. Annualized seasonally-adjusted April PPI inflation for the last three months was a hardly-tepid 12.7%. Seasonally-adjusted intermediate and crude goods rose 0.9% and fell 1.5%, respectively, for the month of April.

Next Release (June 14): Despite the random volatility in monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months should continue to exceed market expectations. The core PPI inflation rate is overdue for an upside surprise.


Better-Quality Numbers


General background note: The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders -- The overall May ISM manufacturing index gained minimally to 55.0 from February's 54.7. At work here still appears to be largely the poor-quality seasonal factors supplied by the Commerce Department. The May employment index, however, fell back to 51.9 from April's reading of 53.1. If bad seasonal factors indeed are in play, as I suspect, the series should see some meaningful weakness in the next couple of months. Otherwise, continued gains in the index would be suggestive of some bounce in activity, albeit from impaired levels.

The May new orders index rose to 59.6 from April's 58.5. Seasonal-factor distortions are overcome by viewing the series using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the May new orders index was down 0.6% versus the 6.5% decline in April.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading below 50.0 indicates contracting new orders. The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004. As an SGS early warning indicator of a major economic shift, the new orders measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating a signal of pending recession.

Service Sector Index. The service-sector ISM index does not have much meaning related to overall business activity, since new order activity at law firms, hospitals or fast-food restaurants has little obvious relationship to broad economic activity. That said, the overall May services sector index rose to 59.7 from 56.0 in April. Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. The May employment component was up, increasing to 54.9 from April's 51.9. The prices paid component is covered in the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) -- The Conference Board reported that help-wanted advertising fell to 29 in April, along with a downward revision to March's reading from 30 to 29. The April number was down 14.7% from the year before, with some of the unusual-weather distortions of recent months resolved with revision.

Viewed on a three-month moving-average basis, April's year-to-year change was a contraction of 19.1%, versus March's revised 19.3% (was 15.7%). The series still indicates rapidly deteriorating employment conditions. Where the index never recovered from the 2000/2001 recession, its ongoing renewed plunge has signaled a new and rapid contraction in economic activity. Continued deterioration remains likely in the months ahead.

Housing Starts -- As shown in the graph in the Opening Comments, the three-month moving average annual 23.4% contraction for April housing starts remains deep in recession territory. April seasonally-adjusted starts rose by 2.5% +/- 13.3% (95% confidence interval) on a monthly basis, after a 2.7% gain in March. The current numbers reflect the impact of annual benchmark and seasonal-adjustment revisions. The year-to-year April 2007 change was a contraction of 16.1%, versus 24.1% in March, with the improvement an artifact of a plunge in the April 2006 numbers. The series continued to signal an ongoing recession.

In addition to April's plunge in building permits (which I do not use usually, because of long-term historical inconsistencies), the homes sales data have tended to confirm the housing contraction and recession. Keep in mind that these series are highly volatile on a month-to month basis. In April reporting, new home sales were up 16.2% +/- 16% (95% confidence interval) but still were down 10.6% from April 2006. April existing home sales fell 2.6% for the month and were down 10.7% for the year.

Money Supply -- As discussed and shown in the Opening Comments, annual growth in the SGS Continuing M3 appears to have increased to a 33-year high, at 13.3% in May, up from 12.8% in April. Money supply M3 is also revisited in this month's Reporting/Market Focus.

Based on three weeks worth of underlying data, the May annual growth estimate is preliminary, and although it reflects higher growth than the month before, the pace of gain reflects some deceleration following April's accelerating rate of growth. Barring a significant shift in the four-week numbers, the next update on May M3 will follow with the upcoming June 17th Flash Update, when full monthly data will be available.



General background note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the ongoing SGS estimates of M3, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS for methodology. The indicated M3 levels below are our best estimate and are provided at specific subscriber request. Keep in mind that regular revisions in the related Fed series affect historical M3. Usually, annual growth rates hold, although levels may shift a little. We have not attempted, nor do we plan to recreate a revised historical series for an M3 monthly-average level going back in time. The purpose of the SGS series was and is to provide monthly estimates of ongoing annual M3 growth. We are comfortable with those numbers and that our estimated monthly growth rates are reasonably close to what the Fed would be reporting, if it still reported M3. With those caveats on the table, here are the monthly-average levels for M3:

      Shadow Government Statistics Ongoing M3
  (Estimated seasonally-adjusted monthly average)


Current Yr Before Month $ Tril $ Tril % Yr/Yr

Jan 07 11.352 10.225 11.03% Feb 11.459 10.331 10.92% Mar 11.610 10.396 11.67% Apr (r) 11.791 10.455 12.77% May (p) 11.924 10.528 13.26%

(p) May 2007 is estimated based on three weeks of data. NOTE OF CAUTION: The estimates of monthly levels best are used for comparisons with other dollar amounts, such as nominal GDP. While the estimates are based on seasonally- adjusted Federal Reserve data, great significance cannot be read into the month-to-month changes, as was the case when the Fed published the series. The most meaningful way to view the data is in terms of year-to-year change.


Based on three weeks of data for May, annual growth in May for monthly M1 fell by 1.4%, versus a 0.2% contraction in April, while May M2 annual growth was 6.6%, up from 6.5% in April.

Inflation Indicators

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices -- The May prices paid indices were mixed in movement but remained high in inflation territory, suggestive of ongoing inflation issues in both purchasing managers surveys.

Still generally moving with oil price changes, the price index movements have remained volatile. On the manufacturing side, the May price index notched back to 71.0 from April's 73.0. On a three-month moving average basis, May's annual change was down by 2.6% versus April's 1.5% decline. The manufacturing price indicator is not seasonally adjusted and, therefore, is a better indicator of pricing activity. Keep in mind that the oil market was particularly strong at this time last year.

On the non-manufacturing side, the seasonally-adjusted May prices diffusion index jumped to 66.4 from 63.5 in April. On a three-month moving average basis, however, May's annual change moved into negative territory, down 4.4%, versus April's gain of 2.7%.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflationary pressure. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising prices.

Oil Prices -- The monthly-average West Texas Intermediate spot price (Department of Energy) eased to $63.46 per barrel in May from $63.97 in April. Against last year's particularly high oil prices, year-to-year change continued to weaken, with May's average price down 10.5% at an annual pace, where April's average was down 8.2%. Price movement remains volatile, with current oil prices trading slightly above May's average.

Meaningful upside risks to oil prices remain in play, both from the hurricane season and ever-mounting Middle Eastern political tensions. Forecasts remain for a particularly active hurricane season, while oil and gasoline prices have started the season at levels already at or above those seen post-Katrina.

General background note: Global political conditions still continue to favor a sharp spike in oil prices in the months ahead, irrespective of any ongoing games-playing by the Administration and OPEC. Overhanging the market remains the potential for a change in the dollar-based pricing of oil, particularly as dollar selling intensifies. Where dollar weakness is the equivalent of an oil price cut for oil purchasers denominated in an appreciating currency, market forces tend to push dollar-based oil prices higher, and that exacerbates inflation problems in the United States. Even worse, if oil pricing were shifted to something other than the U.S. currency, U.S. inflationary pressures would be even more intense, since any drop in the dollar would be reflected directly as an increase in the price of foreign oil for U.S. consumption.

General background note: Whether from supply and demand, geo-political or currency pressures, oil prices will remain at highly inflationary levels and will continue as a major contributing factor to U.S. inflation woes. Historically high oil prices still are working their way through all levels of U.S. economic activity, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. These broad inflationary pressures will remain intact despite any near-term oil price volatility. Although these pressures may be slow to surface in government reporting of the so-called "core" inflation measures, they will.


Reporting/Market Focus (May 2007) -- Money Supply M3 Revisited


The first anniversary the Federal Reserve's abandonment of M3 reporting passed recently without much fanfare. Ostensibly, the series was abandoned due to its lack of relevance and high cost of preparation. Neither reason given has much merit, which leaves open the question as to why the series was abandoned. Given the historically high annual growth currently seen in the SGS Ongoing M3 reporting, is it possible that the U.S. central bank did not want the domestic and global markets to contemplate the significance of what was then (March 2006) looming double-digit growth in the broad money measure?

As to reporting, annual growth in the still-reported M2 now is 7%, and the non-M2 components of M3 are averaging about 25%. The two dominant non-M2 components, large time deposits and institutional money funds still are reported weekly by the Fed in some usable form. With most of the needed data still being reported, how much can the Fed be saving by not publishing the full series?

As to relevance, of course, part of the issue may be tied to the meaningfulness or quality of the underlying economic series (GDP, CPI, etc.) that are being assessed against M3. The graph below shows growth in M3 and SGS Ongoing M3 plotted versus the CPI-U and the SGS Alternate Consumer Price Measure.



In the post-1987 liquidity panic era, annual M3 growth has a negative 40% correlation with annual CPI-U inflation, suggesting that higher M3 growth leads to lower inflation. Wait until the Wall Street hypesters start spinning that one! In contrast, M3 has a positive 71% correlation with the SGS inflation measure, suggesting that higher M3 growth has some relationship to higher inflation.

The Federal Reserve has been in a long-term liquidity trap, where pumping up of the money supply generally has not stimulated normal economic growth in the post-1987 era. Excessive liquidity did help to build stock-market and housing bubbles, which helped boost economic growth from the standpoint of a perceived wealth effect and extraordinary debt expansion.

The Fed's pushing on string, however, never addressed the underlying structural collapse in economic activity, the long-term decline in inflation-adjusted household income, with a meaningful portion of the U.S. manufacturing base moving offshore. Therein lies the heart of the current economic crisis. Without a new gimmick from the Fed aimed at somehow buying more time, the economy is foundering based on negative fundamentals that cannot be turned quickly (as in decades), and certainly not with excessive money supply pumping. Without sustainable real income growth there can be no sustainable economic growth.

The Fed can hide whatever numbers it chooses, the government can massage its economic statistics as much as it wants, but the underlying reality of a deteriorating inflationary recession remains in place. What the politicians are missing is that Main Street U.S.A., which tends to vote its pocketbook, does not believe the gimmicked data and has an amazingly good sense as to what is going on. The reference there was to Main Street not Wall Street.


Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for June/July -- Hyped Economic Myth of the Moment


With hyped stories unfolding irregularly on the various economic reports during the last month, including jobs reporting, CPI and housing, the June/July Reporting/Market Focus will zero-in on a popular economic myth of the moment as press time nears.

___________________________________________


PLEASE NOTE: The June/July "Shadow Government Statistics" newsletter is targeted for the week of July 9th, which will allow for both the analysis of the June employment data and the quarter-end financial results. The timing of the week following the employment report release seems to be the most practical in terms of having the timely and comprehensive key data in the various analyses, and that schedule will be adhered to as much as possible, going forward. There will remain at least two intervening Flash Updates covering key data the weekend after release.

In order to get the newsletter month back in sync with the calendar, subscription expirations will be adjusted to cover the one month pick up in calendar timing. Postings on the Web site of monthly newsletters, interim Flash Updates and Alerts are advised immediately by e-mail.

OCCASIONALLY, BRIEF UPDATES ARE COMMUNICATED BY E-MAIL. IF YOU ARE NOT RECEIVING E-MAIL COMMUNICATIONS FROM US, PLEASE LET US KNOW at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or by using the Feedback option on www.shadowstats.com.

Flash Update

Monday, May 28th, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

May 28, 2007

__________


Housing and Durable Goods Consistent with Faltering Economy

Downside Data Likely in Week Ahead

 __________


With the "final" first-quarter GDP revision, May employment and a first estimate of M3 for May all available at the end of the coming week, I have targeted the May SGS newsletter around the Monday following (June 4th), so as to address those developments. Updated Alternate Data Series postings will be made for the GDP, the monthly U.S. Dollar, and M3 (based on three weeks of data) on June 2nd.  
Best wishes to all -- John Williams


Wall Street Hypesters Fan False Hopes of Economic Turn


On Thursday, regularly-volatile new home sales were reported up 16.2% for the month of April, and Wall Street's spinmeisters went to town. The hypesters who tried to weave that isolated and volatile number into a housing recovery story would be comfortable working for the propaganda ministry of the average totalitarian state.

Up front, the jump in monthly new home sales was not meaningful, reflecting little more than normal high monthly volatility and an annual benchmark revision. The gain of 16.2% (14.3% net of revisions) barely fell outside the 95% statistical confidence interval of +/- 15.8%, which means that 1-in-20 times the monthly reporting error would be expected to be greater than 15.8%. Also, the benchmark revision goosed the current number with relative downward revisions to prior periods. The Census Bureau can come up with any monthly change it wants when the prior-period seasonal adjustments are published, as they were with the April data.

The most meaningful way of looking at the new home sales numbers is in terms of year-to-year change, preferably on a three-month moving-average basis, so as to temper the random monthly volatility. April's annual change was reported at a contraction of 10.6%, and down 18.9% on a three-month moving-average basis. The same numbers for March were contractions of 25.0% and 23.7%, respectively.

April existing home sales, reported Friday by the National Association of Realtors, were down by 2.6% (2.1% net of revisions) for the month, 10.7% for the year.

Also among last week's light economic reporting was a monthly gain of 0.6% (1.4% net of revisions) in April's new orders for durable goods. This is another highly volatile series in terms of month-to-month change. Annual change on a three-month moving-average basis narrowed to a 0.3% contraction from a 0.8% contraction in March, annual changes more consistent with a contracting rather than expanding economy.

Key indicators and anecdotal evidence continue to suggest a much weaker economy than commonly viewed by the markets. Accordingly most upcoming reporting should come in below expectations.

Consensus forecasts are for the 1.3% annualized real (inflation-adjusted) quarterly growth rate for first-quarter GDP to be cut nearly in half in Thursday's (May 31st) revision. While such is a reasonable expectation, the growth rate may be getting too close to zero to be stomached by the Bureau of Economic Analysis. A 0.7% annualized growth rate is less than 0.2% quarter-to-quarter. The difference between GDP growth and contraction at that level is little more than statistical noise.

Friday's (June 1st) May jobs growth and unemployment rate are more likely than the GDP to disappoint market expectations.

Full details will follow in the newsletter.

___________________________

May's "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter should be posted about June 4th. An e-mail advice of same will be sent. 

Flash Update

Sunday, May 20th, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - May 20, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

May 20, 2007

__________

Alternate CPI Holds at 10.2% Annual Inflation

Industrial Production and Housing Data Show Faltering Economy

__________


The SGS Alternate Consumer Price Measure has been updated for April and posted to the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

Annualized Year-to-Date CPI Shows Serious Inflation

There was little startling in last week's economic reporting, net of some major revisions and usual seasonal-factor distortions. The inflationary recession continues, and data in the weeks ahead should confirm ongoing deterioration.

CPI. The seasonally-adjusted April CPI-U rose 0.42% (0.65% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% for the month, following March's 0.61% (0.91% unadjusted) gain. Annual inflation (unadjusted) eased to 2.57% in April, from 2.78% in March. Restated to Pre-Clinton (1990) methodologies, annual inflation was roughly 5.9%; restated to Pre-Reagan (1980) methodologies (SGS Alternate Measure), annual inflation in April held at about 10.2% (10.18% April, 10.24% March).

The Chained-CPI-U (the fully substitution-based index being groomed to takeover for the CPI-U) showed April annual inflation of 2.35% against 2.46% in March.

Seasonal adjustment of the CPI never has been a particularly meaningful exercise, but it does allow for the massaging of the month-to-month adjusted number that causes the markets to gyrate. The Bureau of Labor Statistics even reports the number standardly on an unadjusted basis, to wit, the opening text in the April 2007 CPI report is:

"The Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers (CPI-U) increased 0.6% in April, before seasonal adjustment ..."

The seasonally-adjusted 0.4% does not get mentioned until the fourth paragraph, under a subheading, along with the "core" inflation number, where those data are formulated into a financial-market antidepressant.

The BLS uses seasonal factors to understate monthly inflation from January through May, with payback usually seen in the latter part of the year. Consider that on an adjusted basis the annualized rated of CPI inflation for April versus December was 4.81%. The same number on an unadjusted basis was 7.44%. Even at a 4.81% annualized rate, the market hype of "contained inflation" remains utter nonsense.

Industrial Production. Seasonally-adjusted April industrial production gained 0.7% (0.4% net of revisions) following March's 0.3% (previously 0.2%) contraction. Reflecting the prior-period revisions, however, annual growth in production slowed to 1.88% in April -- the weakest showing since the series came out of the last recession -- down from 2.07% in March.

Housing Starts. The annual benchmark revision was background to the seasonally-adjusted 2.5% +/- 11.3% monthly gain in April housing starts. The annual pace of contraction narrowed to 16.1% from 24.1% in March, as the series went against the prior year's extraordinary monthly and annual growth plunges. Annual change on a three-month moving average basis was a 23.4% contraction, narrowed from a 31.0% drop in March. Collapsing building permits suggest there has been no change in housing fundamentals.

Further details will follow in the newsletter.

___________________________________________

May's "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter should be posted during the week of May 28th. An e-mail advice of same will be sent.

Flash Update

Saturday, May 12th, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - May 12, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

May 12, 2007

__________

Annual M3 Growth Accelerates to 12.8%

Retail Sales and Trade Deficit Take Hits, as PPI Booms.

__________


Money supply data for the full month of April, including the SGS Ongoing M3 measure, have been posted to the Alternate Data Series tab at www.shadowstats.com. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

Fed Hints at Inflationary Recession


Comments from the U.S. central bank usually are couched in such cautious and careful language as to make a Wall Street attorney blush. Removing the regular platitudes as to likely economic expansion and inflation moderation in the coming quarters, the crux of the May 9th FOMC statement went: "Economic growth slowed in the first part of this year and the adjustment in the housing sector is ongoing. ... the Committee's predominant policy concern remains the risk that inflation will fail to moderate as expected." That is as close as the Fed will get to acknowledging a recessionary inflation, until well after the fact of broad market recognition. Last week's economic reporting further moved market expectations towards the unthinkable combination of a contracting economy beset by high inflation.

Growth Falters Anew. Seasonally-adjusted April retail sales contracted 0.2% (a 0.1% gain net of revisions) +/- 0.7% for the month, following a 1.0% (previously 0.7%) gain in March. With annual growth slowing to 3.2% in April from a revised 4.4% (previously 3.8%), and with annual CPI-U inflation at 2.8% in March, annual inflation and retail sales growth easily could cross in the next month or two. Such would mean not only an ongoing real (inflation-adjusted) monthly retail sales contraction, but also the annual contraction in real retail sales usually seen in deepening economic downturns.

The seasonally-adjusted March trade deficit widened to $63.9 billion from a revised $57.9 billion (was $58.4 billion) in February. The March number reflected some catch up from recent underreporting of oil prices and oil imports. While the monthly shortfall still was well shy of reality, it was enough worse than expectations to place downside pressure on the upcoming "preliminary" estimate revision of first-quarter GDP growth. First-quarter GDP growth was reported initially at 1.3%.

Inflation Outlook Intensifies. Depressed again by seasonal adjustments, the seasonally-adjusted producer price index (PPI) for April finished goods rose by a monthly 0.7% (1.0% unadjusted). March PPI was up 1.0% (1.4% unadjusted). Seasonally adjusted and annualized for the last three months of change, PPI inflation is running at a 12.7% pace. Still, those Wall Street hypesters who never saw a core-inflation rate they didn't like, described the current inflation as moderate and contained. Annual PPI inflation held at 3.2% for the month.

With full data in for April, the monthly average SGS Ongoing M3 was up 12.8% year-to-year, showing a sharp acceleration in growth from March's 11.7% pace, as discussed in the last newsletter. The best estimate of the seasonally-adjusted monthly average level is $11.790 trillion (first estimated as $11.798 trillion based on three weeks worth of data), up from $11.610 trillion in March.

Once again, even though the reported numbers approximate the seasonally-adjusted monthly-average M3 levels, subscribers are cautioned against using the monthly levels for month-to-month comparisons. The data are estimated using seasonally-adjusted components, as published and adjusted by the Fed, wherever possible, but there also are modeled numbers (albeit of reasonably small magnitude) included in the monthly totals. The monthly level estimates best are used for comparison with other dollar levels, such as GDP ($13.633 trillion in nominal terms for the first quarter), or in calculating year-to-year change. Year-to-year measures tend to bypass any issues related to seasonal adjustments and month-to-month change.

As one subscriber suggested, you can calculate the annualized month-to-month change for April and find that it topped 20%, or that the rate of growth for the last three months of M3 annualized out at over 16%. While these numbers tend to confirm a pattern of rapidly accelerating growth, my confidence in the adjusted monthly change is not high enough to use that precise number, raised to the 12th power, as a headline. In fairness, though, I was never that comfortable with the same seasonally-adjusted measures when the Federal Reserve published them. I am quite comfortable, however, with the estimates of SGS Ongoing M3 year-to-year rates of change.

Upcoming Week. Market expectations for the monthly April CPI-U (Tuesday, May 15th) are around 0.5%. Reporting risk generally is to the upside of expectations, given underlying reality, but the BLS has to be under heavy pressure to bring in a below-consensus number, particularly for the "core" rate that appears to be anticipated at about 0.2%.

Further details will follow in the newsletter.

___________________________________________


May's "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter should be during the week of May 28th. An e-mail advice of same will be sent.

April 2007 Edition

Monday, May 7th, 2007
JWSGS - APRIL 2007 EDITION - May 7, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Issue Number 30

May 7, 2007

__________

April Payroll Contraction Appears to Have Been Masked

M3 Growth Surges to 9-11 Liquefaction Levels and Worse

Mounting Inflationary Recession Has Hobbled Fed

Intensifying Dollar Sell-Off and Gold Boom Loom

__________


PLEASE NOTE: Reader comments on the Hyperinflation Series have been significant. Those reactions and observations will be published in a follow-up hyperinflation section in the May SGS. Please feel free still to offer your comments or raise your questions by e-mail to johnwilliams@shadowstats.com. Also, this month, in response to subscriber demand, we publish our estimates of the seasonally-adjusted monthly average levels of M3. With a number of caveats, the detail will be found in the Money Supply section of the Reporting Perspective. The updated annual M3 growth rates and U.S. Dollar measures have been posted to the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. Best wishes to all -- John Williams


OVERVIEW -- OPENING COMMENTS


Knees would be knocking audibly in the credit markets, if the Fed still reported M3 growth. Annual growth (SGS Ongoing M3 series) accelerated sharply in April to 12.9%, from 11.7% in March. The last time annual M3 growth approached 13%, the Fed was liquefying the financial system in the wake of the 9-11 terrorist attacks. Before that, the year was 1981 and official annual CPI inflation was running about 10%. If 10% inflation sounds familiar, that is roughly the level of annual CPI inflation that would be reported today using the CPI methodologies of 1980. Exacerbating the financial catastrophe that slowly is unfolding for the U.S. markets, the economy is in a deepening recession and the U.S. dollar has begun suffering nascent selling pressures. In terms of monthly averages, gold already is at an all-time high, and the trade-weighted dollar is at an all-time low. Out of touch with reality, the Dow Jones Industrial Average keeps bouncing to new highs.

As evident in the accompanying graph, the increase in annual M3 growth has started to show marked acceleration. There is little evidence of net neutral Fed policy here; liquidity is being pumped in to the system. This growth reflects not only acceleration in underlying annual M2 growth, but also 20%, plus or minus, annual growth in the non-M2 components. While this activity will do little to help the economy, it will enhance the prospects for higher inflation. The April growth rate is based on three weeks-plus of data. The final estimate for April M3 will be published next weekend, when full underlying data for the month will be available.



General background note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the ongoing SGS estimates of M3, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS for methodology.

The current M3 annual growth is within several percentage points of its all-time high (since the Fed estimates began in 1960). Once beyond that, the modern U.S. monetary system will be in uncharted waters. Growth peaks generally have been seen around recessions, with the Fed trying to stimulate the economy, or at times when the Fed was attempting to salve the financial markets.

Peak M3 growth of 16.4% was seen in June 1971, with annual CPI inflation at 4.6%. Wage and price controls and the final U.S. abandonment of any link of the dollar to gold followed in August 1971. The next M3 peak was at 12.4% in May 1978 followed by 13.0% in December 1981. Gold prices peaked in January 1980, and annual CPI inflation hit its peak of 14.8% in March 1980. CPI fell below 10% as 1981 closed out.

The Fed again began flooding the system with liquidity as the stock-market bubble burst in 2000 and 2001, but the pace of M3 growth accelerated in response to the financial-system disruptions surrounding the 9-11 terrorist attacks. M3 hit its near-term annual growth peak of 13.3% in November 2001, a level that easily could be topped in the next month or two. M3 growth above 14% would be the highest since 1973, which was followed shortly by 10-plus percent CPI inflation.

A Hobbled Fed. The Fed's Federal Open Market Committee has a meeting this week, and no change in the targeted federal funds rate is anticipated for the pending Wednesday-afternoon statement. Once again, the Fed likely will meet market expectations as much as possible, so as to be non-disruptive. The Fed faces both inflation and recession, with little ability to counter either circumstance.

Raising interest rates can help contain inflation, when inflation is being driven by strong economic demand. The current pricing problems are related to commodity supply distortions, which will be exacerbated by mounting dollar weakness and rapidly-growing broad money supply.

Lowering interest rates can help a faltering economy, during the downleg of a normal business cycle, but this is not a normal business cycle. The downturn reflects a long-term structural change that has shifted much of the U.S. manufacturing base and wealth offshore. The result has been impaired real (inflation-adjusted) income growth, growth that has not been able to keep up with inflation.

Without sustainable real income growth, there can be no sustainable real economic growth. Short-term boosts to economic activity can be had through the expansion of debt and the liquidation of savings, but both those options are short-lived and currently are pushing against their practical limits.

Never has the Fed faced such severe economic difficulties with the financial markets so heavily dependent on foreign capital for liquidity. Foreign investors are flush with dollars from the extraordinarily massive U.S. trade deficit. It is the liquidation and repatriation of those dollars and dollar-denominated assets that has the Fed scared. Once that process starts, the U.S. central bank will have little choice but to boost interest rates, at least initially, in defense of the dollar and irrespective of domestic economic conditions.

Only the threat of a systemic domestic financial collapse is likely to push the Fed to an easing stance. That, however, will be the beginning of the process that eventually will trigger a hyperinflation. Indeed, the basic elements for a dollar collapse and an eventual hyperinflationary environment in the United States remain locked in place (see the Hyperinflation Series in the December 2006 to March 2007 SGSs).

The Economy Slows. The past month generally has been one of downside economic surprises for the financial markets. First-quarter GDP growth slowed to 1.3% from 2.5%, real retail sales were flat, industrial production contracted, annual housing growth was the worst it had been since the bottom of the last recession, help-wanted advertising sank, new claims for unemployment insurance rose, employment growth was weak as unemployment rose, consumer confidence measures fell and new orders for durable goods showed a sharp annual contraction. The only "positive" numbers were a small improvement in the trade deficit and some pickup in the purchasing managers surveys, but those series appeared to have unusual reporting quality issues.

Shown below is the pattern of real, annual growth in new orders for durable goods. To adjust for the sharp monthly volatility of the series, a six-month moving average has been used. The CPI-U was used for deflation, as the GDP component deflators are of much worse quality than is the CPI. So adjusted, annual durable goods change has turned negative in a manner generally seen only in recessions, although not all of the suggested recessions are recognized formally as such.



The series has other problems, such as the cessation of reporting of semiconductor orders in 2002. Nonetheless, the annual contraction in the series is consistent with the deepening recession indicated in other economic measures, such as retail sales and housing.

PLEASE NOTE: A "General background note" provides a broad background paragraph on certain series or concepts. Where the language used in past and subsequent newsletters usually has been or will be identical, month-after-month, any text changes in these sections will be highlighted in bold italics upon first usage. This is designed so that regular readers may avoid re-reading material they have seen before, but where they will have the material available for reference, if so desired.

General background note: The U.S. economy is in a protracted and deepening structural recession that will prove to be the second leg of a double-dip recession, which began in 2000/2001. The current downleg was signaled in mid-2005 by a series of leading indicators used for that purpose by SGS. With neither traditional fiscal nor monetary stimulus available to help turn economic activity, the current circumstance is likely to evolve into a hyperinflationary depression (see December 2006 SGS).

Inflation Surges. On the inflation front, price increases, as measured in the GDP, surged at an annualized 4.0% in the first quarter, up from a 1.7% inflation rate in the fourth quarter. Annual PPI inflation for April jumped to 3.2% from 2.5%, while annual April CPI inflation rose to 2.8% from 2.4%.

Gasoline prices have been rising due to short-term supply disruptions, and oil prices have been holding above $60 per barrel. With hurricane season less than a month away, and the with the Middle East remaining the proverbial powder keg amidst other global political tensions, risks to oil prices -- and correspondingly to inflation -- remain sharply on the upside. Also adding to upside inflation pressures are intensifying selling of the U.S. dollar and accelerating broad money growth.

The Current Environment Is Not Conducive to Stable Financial Markets. As the inflationary recession increasingly has gained market recognition, selling of the U.S. dollar and buying of gold have picked some momentum. The credit and equity markets appear to have been relatively immune to the unfolding crisis, so far.

An inflationary recession, compounded by dollar dumping, is about as bad a nightmare as the stock and credit markets can face. The big question is in the uncertain timing of the big break in the dollar. These circumstances, however, can evolve very quickly, with little or no warning. The outlook for gold in this environment remains bright.

Alternate Realities. General background note: This section updates the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting. When a government economic measure does not match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Federal Reserve, White House and Wall Street. In these alternate measures, the effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan-Era GDP. The methodologies for the series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS (see Archives page at www.shadowstats.com).

GDP. The alternate first-quarter GDP growth reflects the "advance" estimate, with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate first-quarter inflation-adjusted annual growth rate (year-to-year, as opposed to the popularly-touted annualized quarter-to-quarter rate) for GDP was a decline of roughly 2.1% versus the official gain of 2.1%.



General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate GDP numbers tend to show deeper and more protracted recessions than have been reported formally or reflected in related official reporting. Nonetheless, the patterns shown in the alternate data are broadly consistent with the payroll employment and industrial production series (as revised), which are major indicators used by the National Bureau of Economic Research in determining the official timing of U.S. business cycles.

CPI. While the gimmicked annual core inflation measures eased in March, annual inflation in the standard inflation measures continued to rebound. Oil prices have remained volatile, but generally have been trending higher. Beyond related higher energy and material costs increasingly permeating broad economic activity, gasoline prices are spiking due to supply problems. Both core and regular annual inflation reporting should rise sharply in the months ahead.

                             Eight Levels of Inflation
                  Annual Inflation for December 2006 to March 2007


2006 2007 Measure Dec Jan Feb Mar I.1 Core PCE Deflator 2.1% 2.2% 2.4% 2.1% I.2 Core Chained-CPI-U 2.3% 2.3% 2.4% 2.1% I.3 Core CPI-U 2.6% 2.7% 2.7% 2.5% I.4 PCE Deflator 2.2% 1.9% 2.3% 2.4% I.5 Chained-CPI-U 2.4% 1.9% 2.2% 2.5% I.6 CPI-U 2.5% 2.1% 2.4% 2.8% I.7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U 5.8% 5.4% 5.7% 6.2% I.8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation 10.0% 9.9% 10.0% 10.2%

Notes: I.1 to I.3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively, of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U. I.4 to I.6 are the same measures with energy and food inflation included. The CPI-U (I.6) is the measure popularly followed by the financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation. I.7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre- Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top series in the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com. I.8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which reverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so, plus an adjustment for the portion of Clinton-Era geometric weighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic bookkeeping.




General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate CPI numbers tend to show significantly higher inflation over time, generally reflecting the reversal of hedonic adjustments, geometric weighting and the use of a more traditional approach to measuring housing costs, measures all consistent with the reporting methodology in place as of 1980.


MARKETS PERSPECTIVE


With certain measures showing gold at an all-time high and the U.S. dollar at an all-time low, some financial-market segments have begun to pick up on what has started to unfold before the public. With Wall Street's vested interest in touting the stock and bond markets, and with Wall Street dominating the popular financial media, the full scope of issues and the implications for the markets from an inflationary recession, a weakening U.S. dollar and an uncontained GAAP-based annual federal deficit of $4.6 trillion still are not widely discussed.

Ahead lie a sharp decline in equity prices, a sharp spike in long-term interest rates, a heavy sell-off in the U.S. dollar and soaring gold prices. The proximal trigger for all this remains likely to be the dollar and its accelerating demise.

General background note: The U.S. economy remains in a severe, structural inflationary recession, saddled with an impotent Fed and a federal government that is fiscally bankrupt in all but name. In combination, these factors offer the worst of all environments to the financial markets. Ahead lie higher long-term interest rates and much lower U.S. equity prices. On the plus side is the outlook for gold, which provides a solid hedge against many of the problems that have started to surface. Key to the near-term movements of these markets remains the fate of the U.S. dollar.

U.S. Equities -- Up, up and away soars the Dow Jones Industrial Average, along with other popular equity indexes. Current stock-market euphoria reminds me of a bunch of drunken partygoers who have made the decision to watch and ride out a Category-5 hurricane from a beach house on a barrier island, with the eye of the storm bearing down on them. There even may be a partygoer or two who thinks he can make it to the mainland just in time, even though the bridges already are beginning to wash out.

The approaching financial maelstrom already has come over the horizon. When it hits, those investors who have taken shelter in cash, gold and outside the U.S. dollar will be the ones with the wealth and assets available to take advantage of the extraordinary investment opportunities that will follow.

U.S. Credit Market -- Little action can be expected from the Fed, until either a dollar panic or systemic liquidity issues force its hand. With rising inflation, pressure should be on the upside for long-term interest rates, but the inflow of foreign liquidity to the markets has kept long-term rates flat.

When the tidal surge from dollar dumping hits, however, longer term yields will spike, as underlying Treasury securities get dumped.

U.S. Dollar -- As discussed below, the trade-weighted dollar has hit an all-time low, and the financial-weighted dollar is only a couple of percent behind. Nonetheless, heavy dollar selling has not hit, yet. The move against the dollar likely will come quickly, with little or no warning. The proximal trigger could range from a bad economic statistic, a misstep by the Administration or a central bank, or a negative trade development in Asia, to a terrorist attack or even a still-likely military action against Iran. Whatever sets off the selling, it is a good bet to come within the next several months. Broad selling should be heavy enough to overcome any short-lived central bank intervention.

General background note: In terms of underlying fundamentals that tend to drive currency trading, the dollar's portfolio could not be worse. Relative to major trading partners, the U.S. economy is much weaker, interest rates are lower, inflation is higher, fiscal and trade-balance conditions are abysmal, and relative political stability is at a nadir. The President's approval rating commonly has moved currency trading in the past, and it is at the lowest level seen in the post-World War II era. Relative political stability issues are compounded by the presence of a Congress hostile to the President. Generally, the greater the magnitude of the dollar selling, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. capital markets.

As shown in the following graph, the U.S. dollar moved lower again in April, setting a new low on a trade-weighted basis.



General background note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS for methodology.

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics' Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (FWD) is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For April 2007, the monthly dollar average fell by 1.76% after a 1.11% decline in March. The April 2007 average index level of 50.09 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 7.49% from April 2006, following an annual rate of decline of 7.41% in March. The index's historic low was 48.98 in April 1995.

Dropping to an all-time low, April's monthly average of the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (TWD) fell by 1.67%, after March's 1.02%.

The April 2007 index level of 57.47 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 4.78% from the year before, against March's annual decline of 4.44%.

General background note: The biggest difference between the FRB and the SGS series is the much heavier weighting of the Canadian dollar in the TWD versus the FWD.

Gold -- The monthly-average gold price (London afternoon fix per Kitco.com) hit an all-time high of $679.37 per troy ounce in April 2007. That beat out the prior monthly-average high of $676.51 in May 2006, when daily trading set a high of $725.00, and the previous high of $675.31 in January 1980, when daily trading hit an all-time high of $850.00.

In like manner, silver had a good month, showing its strongest monthly average in more than two decades, at $13.74 per troy ounce.

Although the nature of gold trading is such that high volatility likely will continue, as will sporadic central-bank manipulation and intervention, the upside potential remains explosive, particularly when heavy dollar selling begins. Look for new monthly and daily highs in the months ahead.

General background note: As discussed in the Hyperinflation Series (see the December 2006 to March 2007 SGSs), the eventual complete collapse of the U.S. dollar -- the world's reserve currency -- will force the creation of a new international currency system. Gold likely will be structured into any replacement system, in an effort by those organizing the new currency structure to gain public acceptance.








The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show April averages. As we go to press, gold is trading shy of $690, oil is under $64 and the Swiss franc is near $0.825. Look for all three measures to trade significantly higher in the months ahead.


REPORTING PERSPECTIVE


The Big Three Market Movers


Most economic reports now are coming in on the soft side of expectations, while inflation results generally have been at the upper end of expectations. Accordingly, market sentiment increasingly has shifted towards the heretofore "unthinkable" combination of recession and inflation. Nonetheless, the full extent of the economy's difficulties is far from being recognized fully. With the President's positive rating setting a new record low, and with the Fed fearful of a market meltdown, recent and upcoming releases of major series have been, and likely will continue to be, subject to massaging for both the perceived political needs of the Administration and the heavy financial market needs of an impotent Federal Reserve Board.

General background note: Against lagging and still largely distorted market expectations, most near-term economic reporting will continue to surprise the markets on the downside, while most inflation reporting should continue to surprise the markets on the upside.

Employment/Unemployment -- Seasonally-adjusted April payroll employment was reported up by 88,000 (62,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000, a gain that was statistically indistinguishable from a contraction. The April increase followed a revised March gain of 177,000 (previously 180,000). Annual growth in April payrolls slid to 1.37%, the lowest level since the closing days of the last recession, down from 1.46% in March.

Based on prior-period revisions, skewed seasonal factors and an enhanced bias factor, the April data appear to have been massaged so as to avoid showing a monthly payroll contraction. Reversing the pattern of most recent months, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) reported major downward (instead of upward) revisions to previously published data, and seasonal factors became skewed again. Where the monthly year-to-year changes in both the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series should be the same, applying the base unadjusted growth rates to the adjusted series would have reduced the monthly jobs gain from 88,000 to just 32,000.

The jobs number also was boosted by an overly positive monthly fudge or bias factor (now called the birth-death adjustment, which overestimates employment growth during recessions) of 317,000. That was an increase of 46,000 in the monthly bias factor against the 271,000 used for April 2006. The May 2006 bias eased to back to 201,000.

Further, from the statistically-sounder household survey, seasonally-adjusted April employment plunged by 468,000, after rising by 335,000 in March. This number reflects the change in the number of people who have at least one job, versus the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs.

Also from the household survey, the seasonally-adjusted April U.3 unemployment rate rose to 4.45% +/- 0.23% from 4.40% in March, a change that was statistically indistinguishable from a drop in the unemployment rate. On an unadjusted basis, U.3 narrowed to 4.3% in April from March's 4.5%. The broader U.6 rate on an unadjusted basis fell to 7.9% in April, from 8.3% in March, while the seasonally-adjusted U.6 rate rose to 8.2% in April, from March's 8.0%. Net of "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment continues to run about 12%.

Against a background of declining help-wanted advertising, rising new claims for unemployment insurance and stronger showings in the April purchasing managers survey employment components (see respective sections), continued weakness remains likely in official jobs and unemployment reporting.

Next Release (June 1): The May payroll survey also should be weaker than consensus forecasts. Look for a continued uptrend in the unemployment rate.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) -- The "advance" estimate of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth for the first quarter of 2007 was 1.26% +/- 3%, and statistically was indistinguishable from a quarterly contraction. First-quarter growth was down sharply from the fourth quarter's reported 2.45% growth and was the weakest showing since the end of the last recession. Measured year-to-year, annual GDP growth in the first quarter slowed to 2.06% from 3.13% in the fourth quarter.

GDP inflation soared, with the first quarter's implicit price deflator reflecting annualized inflation of 3.97%, up from 1.67% in the fourth quarter.

The slowing economic growth reflected a widening in the trade deficit, net of oil price changes, but such still was shy of reality. Where residential investment contracted, personal consumption expenditure was up at a 2.7% annualized pace. The latter measure was much stronger than indicated by weakening retail sales. The mid-year GDP annual benchmark revision remains likely to introduce major downside revisions to both recent and current GDP reporting.

Although the GDP report is the government's broadest estimate of U.S. economic activity, it is also the least meaningful and most heavily massaged of all major government economic series. Published by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), it primarily has become a tool for economic propaganda. Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS Alternate GDP measure suggests economic reality is much weaker than officially reported. Alternate year-to-year annual contractions continue, with an annual 2.1% contraction in the first quarter deepening from the 1.5% decline in fourth-quarter 2006 GDP (see the graph in the Alternate Reality section in the Opening Comments).

Official estimates for real, annualized, quarterly first-quarter growth in gross national product (GNP) and gross domestic income (GDI) were not published, given the known vagaries of the "advance" estimate.

Next Release (May 31): Barring surprises to the March trade deficit, the "preliminary" estimate revision to first-quarter 2007 GDP should come in weaker than consensus forecasts, reflecting deteriorating underlying economic fundamentals. A worse-than-expected widening of the trade deficit would add to the downside revision pressures.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) -- The BLS reported the seasonally-adjusted March CPI-U (I.6) up by 0.61% (0.91% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval) for the month, following February's 0.40% (0.54% unadjusted) gain. Annual inflation rose to 2.78% in March, up from 2.42% in February. Annualized three months inflation through March was 4.71% adjusted, 7.23% unadjusted.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) (I.5) -- the substitution-based replacement series for CPI-U as increasingly touted by the "see-no-inflation crowd" -- also increased, up to 2.46% in March from 2.18% in February.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton (1990) methodology (I.7), annual CPI growth was about 6.2% in March, up from 5.7% in February. The SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (I.8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies back to 1980, was 10.2% in March, up from 10.0% in February.

The eight levels of annual inflation, I.1 to I.8, are shown in the table in the Alternate Reality section, as is the plot of the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation number.

Next Release (May 15): Annual inflation generally will continue rising into at least the third quarter of 2007. Seasonally-adjusted, monthly CPI-U increased by 0.6% in April 2006. Any monthly reporting above or below that for the pending release of April 2007 CPI will add or subtract directly to or from the current annual CPI-U inflation rate. Reporting should be on the upside of market expectations, with renewed upside movement in core rates.


Other Troubled Key Series


Federal Deficit -- General background note: The federal government's fiscal 2006 (fiscal year-end September 30th) deficit, prepared based on generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), widened to $4.6 trillion from 2005's $3.5 trillion. Those numbers dwarfed the officially-gimmicked 2006 federal budget deficit of $248.2 billion, which was down $70.8 billion from 2005's $318.5 billion (see the December SGS).

General background note: Although it lacks the accrual accounting of the GAAP numbers, the change in gross federal debt bypasses several of the reporting manipulations and is a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the official, gimmicked deficit reporting. As of fiscal year-end 2006, the gross federal debt stood at $8.507 trillion, up $574 billion from 2005, which in turn was up $554 billion from 2004.

For the rolling 12 months through March 2007, the gimmicked deficit was $203.7 billion versus $326.8 billion in March 2006, compared with the rolling deficits of $192.7 billion in February 2007 and $312.6 billion in February 2006. For April 30, 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $8.840 trillion, up $484 billion from April 2006, which in turn was up $591 billion from April 2005. As of March 2007, the gross federal debt was $8.850 trillion, up $479 billion from March 2006, which in turn was up $594 billion from March 2005.

General background note: The Administration and Congress continue playing bookkeeping games. Even so, the gimmicked deficit should widen this year, as government finances suffer increasingly from tax revenue losses due to the intensifying recession and relative tax receipt declines after the expiration of recent tax incentives. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy's mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance -- Annual growth in initial claims has continued to increase (an economic negative) in tandem with job market deterioration. On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended April 28th, annual growth was 6.4%, up from 5.5% for the 17 weeks ended March 31st.

General background note: More often than not, week-to-week volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly claims numbers is due to the Labor Department's efforts to seasonally adjust these numbers around holiday periods, such as Easter and Memorial Day. The Labor Department has demonstrated an inability to do such adjusting successfully. When the new claims series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings -- March's seasonally-adjusted real earnings declined by 0.1%, following February's revised unchanged reading (previously a 0.3% drop). Annual growth slowed to 1.6% in March from a revised 1.8% (was 1.5%) in February. Reported (and revised) sharp increases to monthly average hourly earnings and hours worked are highly suspect.

General background note: Gyrations in the poor quality of reported CPI growth account for most month-to-month volatility in this series. Adjusting for the major upside biases built into the CPI-W inflation measure used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series shows the average worker to be under severe financial stress in an ongoing recession.

Retail Sales -- March's seasonally-adjusted retail sales rose by 0.68% (0.28% net of revisions) +/- 0.9% (95% confidence interval), following 0.50% growth (previously 0.08%) in February. With monthly CPI up by 0.61% in March and 0.40% in February, monthly sales barely were beating inflation and, in fact, were down minimally for the quarter. With all the growth puff in retail sales coming from downward revisions to prior reporting, the St. Louis Fed shows March 2007 retail sales on the downside of flat versus December 2006.

On a year-to-year basis, March retail sales were up 3.8% before inflation adjustment and up 1.0% after inflation adjustment, compared with respective annual growth numbers for February of 3.5% and 1.1%

General background note: Real (inflation-adjusted) year-to-year growth in retail sales below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation) signals recession, and a signal first was generated in this business cycle back in June 2006.

Next Releases (May 11): April retail sales should continue coming in below market expectations and below the rate of inflation on both a monthly and year-to-year basis.

Industrial Production -- Seasonally-adjusted industrial production fell by 0.2% in March, after a revised 0.8% gain in February (previously reported at 1.0%). The March data continued reflecting aftershocks of the unusual weather of the several months, with a 7.0% plunge in utility usage offsetting a 7.6% gain the month before.

Annual growth slowed further to 2.3% in March, down from 3.0% in February. For the first quarter, however, production nearly regained all the losses that had been reported in the fourth quarter.

Next Release (May 16): Look for April industrial production to contract again. Monthly contractions in this series should become regular, with annual growth turning negative.

New Orders for Durable Goods -- As discussed and shown in the graph in this month's Opening Comments, the inflation-adjusted annual growth in the six-month moving average of new orders for durable goods has reached a level that usually is seen during a recession.

For the month of March 2007, the usually volatile durable goods orders rose by 3.4% on a seasonally-adjusted basis, following a 2.4% (was 2.5%) increase in February. On a year-to-year basis, however, orders plunged 3.1%, even before inflation adjustment, and that was against a 0.7% contraction in February.

The closely followed nondefense capital goods orders surged in March by 11.7% month-to-month, following a 9.8% (previously 9.5%) gain in February. March's annual growth rate for nondefense capital was 3.9%, against February's 3.1% gain.

General background note: Durable goods orders lost its status as a solid leading economic indicator when the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders in 2002.

Trade Balance -- The seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for February 2007 was reported at $58.4 billion, down from $58.9 billion (previously $59.2 billion) in January. The "improvement" was more than accounted for by a reported decline in oil prices and oil import volume, although oil prices should have risen, not fallen, in the latest reporting. The distorting effect of inconsistent oil price reporting on the monthly trade data (as touched upon in last month's SGS) will be a topic in an upcoming Reporting/Market Focus.

Next Release (May 10): The March trade deficit finally should show some rebound, from recent understatement, with a long-delayed boost in reported oil prices. Reporting risk generally remains on the upside of consensus forecasts. The months ahead should see a pattern of regularly increasing deficits that once again will be setting new records. A significant surprise to consensus forecasts would impact the revision to first-quarter GDP (a bigger deficit means weaker GDP and vice versa).

Consumer Confidence -- April confidence measures declined both on a monthly and annual basis. The Conference Board's April consumer confidence dropped 3.9% month-to-month, after a 2.7% decline in March. April's annual change was a contraction of 5.3% (a 1.1% gain on a three-month moving average basis).

For April, the University of Michigan's consumer sentiment declined by 1.5%, following a 3.2% drop in March. April's year-to-year change was a decline of 0.3% (a 1.4% gain on a three-month moving average basis).

The slowing and negative annual growth in these lagging, not leading, indicators continues to show that the economy has been in trouble.

General background note: The Conference Board measure is seasonally adjusted, which can provide occasional, but significant distortion. The adjustment does not make much sense and is of suspect purpose, given that the Conference Board does not release the unadjusted number. The Michigan survey is unadjusted. How does one seasonally-adjust peoples' attitudes? Also, beware the mid-month Consumer Sentiment release from the University of Michigan. Its sampling base is so small as to be virtually valueless in terms of statistical significance.

Short-Term Credit Measures -- Annual growth in consumer and commercial borrowing continued mixed in the most recent reporting. Some measures of bank loan delinquencies and charge-offs are discussed in this month's Reporting/Market Focus. This section will update those quarterly data as they become available.

Seasonally-adjusted consumer credit (which includes credit cards and auto loans but not mortgages) had not been updated when this newsletter was written. Consumer credit grew by just 0.1% in the month of February, with annual growth at 4.5%, following 4.4% in January and 4.6% in December. In the current environment, where inflation-adjusted growth in income is not adequate to support meaningful growth in the personal consumption component of GDP, GDP growth only can come from temporary debt expansion or savings liquidation. Consumer debt expansion has stalled on a monthly basis, suggesting a major constraint on economic growth.

Commercial borrowing remains strong on a year-to-year basis, although annual growth in commercial paper outstanding slowed to 17.7% in April, from 19.3% in March. Annual growth in commercial and industrial loans was 12.7% in March, down from 13.1% in February. Where solid growth in the commercial credit measures can signal credit needs tied either to rising sales and receivables/inventory, or to slowing sales and slowing collections and involuntarily rising inventories. Slowing growth usually is a sign of slowing economic activity.

Producer Price Index (PPI) -- March finished goods PPI rose a seasonally-adjusted 1.0% (1.4% unadjusted) versus February's 1.3% (1.1% unadjusted). Annual PPI inflation jumped to 3.2% in March from February's 2.5%. Seasonally-adjusted intermediate and crude goods rose 1.0% and 3.2%, respectively, for the month of March.

Next Release (May 11): Despite the random volatility in monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months remains likely to exceed market expectations. In particular, April's core inflation rate is subject to an upside surprise.


Better-Quality Numbers


General background note: The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders -- The overall April ISM manufacturing index rebounded to 54.7 from March's 50.9. At work here still appears to be largely the poor-quality seasonal factors supplied by the Commerce Department. The April employment index rebounded as well, rising to 53.1 from March's contraction reading of 48.7.

The April new orders index also jumped, rising to 58.5 from March's 51.6. Seasonal-factor distortions are overcome by viewing the series using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the April new orders index fell by 6.5% compared with the 13.0% annual contraction reported as of March.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading below 50.0 indicates contracting new orders. The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004. As an SGS early warning indicator of a major economic shift, the new orders measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating a signal of pending recession.

Service Sector Index. The service-sector ISM index does not have much meaning related to overall business activity, since new order activity at law firms, hospitals or fast-food restaurants has little obvious relationship to broad economic activity. That said, the overall April services sector index rose to 56.0 from 52.4 in March. Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. The April employment component notched higher to 51.9 from March's 50.8. The prices paid component is covered in the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) -- The Conference Board reported that help-wanted advertising fell to 30 in March from 31 in February. The March number was down 18.9% from the year before and still may be suffering from unusual-weather distortions.

Viewed on a three-month moving average basis, March's year-to-year change was a contraction of 18.4%, versus February's 15.7%. The series still indicates rapidly deteriorating employment conditions. Where the index never recovered from the 2000/2001 recession, its ongoing renewed plunge has signaled a new and rapid contraction in economic activity. Continued deterioration remains likely in the months ahead.

Housing Starts -- Although seasonally-adjusted March housing starts rose by 0.8% (down 0.5% net of revisions) +/- 13.3% (95% confidence interval) on a monthly basis, after a 7.6% (previously 9.0%) gain in February, annual growth tanked. The year-to-year March 2007 change was a contraction of 25.9%, or a plunge of 30.6% on a three-month moving average basis. Such was the lowest reading since the weakest levels of the last recession. The series continued to signal an intensifying recession.

Homes sales data have tended to confirm the housing contraction and deepening recession. In March reporting, new home sales were up 2.4% +/- 14%, but were down year-to-year by 23.5%. March existing home sales fell 8.4% for the month and 11.3% year-to-year.

Money Supply -- Annual growth in the SGS Continuing M3 appears to have jumped to 12.9% in April from 11.7% in March. The April estimate is based on three weeks worth of underlying data and is subject to revision next week. The annual growth rates and their significance are discussed and shown in the graph in the Opening Comments.

At subscriber request, we are publishing here our estimates of the levels of M3 used in calculating the annual M3 growth. This is done to help those who need an approximate M3 measure to compare with nominal GDP, for example. Although the levels are estimates of monthly averages and are based on underlying seasonally adjusted data, little significance should be attached to the implied month-to-month changes. Those data were not particularly significant when the Fed published them, and they sure are not now.

Further, the indicated level is our best estimate, but regular revisions in the related Fed series (such as the one just published for M2) affect historical M3. Usually, annual growth rates hold, although levels may shift a little. We have not attempted, nor do we plan to recreate a revised historical series for an M3 monthly-average level going back in time (except as done below). The purpose of the SGS series was and is to provide monthly estimates of ongoing annual M3 growth. We are comfortable with those numbers and that our estimated monthly growth rates are reasonably close to what the Fed would be reporting, if it still reported M3.

With those caveats on the table, here are the monthly-average levels for M3:



Shadow Government Statistics Ongoing M3 (Estimated seasonally-adjusted monthly average)

Current Yr Before Month $Trillion $Trillion %Yr/Yr

Feb 06 10.331 9.523 8.49% Mar 10.396 9.558 8.77% Apr 10.455 9.612 8.77% May 10.528 9.665 8.93% Jun 10.588 9.726 8.86% Jul 10.669 9.766 9.25% Aug 10.778 9.871 9.19% Sep 10.893 9.959 9.38% Oct 11.026 10.037 9.86% Nov 11.141 10.083 10.49% Dec 11.258 10.154 10.87% Jan 07 11.352 10.225 11.03% Feb 11.459 10.331 10.92% Mar 11.609 10.396 11.67% Apr(p) 11.798 10.455 12.85%

(p) April 2007 is estimated based on 3-plus weeks of data. NOTE OF CAUTION: The estimates of monthly levels best are used for comparisons with other dollar amounts, such as nominal GDP. While the estimates are based on seasonally- adjusted Federal Reserve data, great significance cannot be read into the month-to-month changes, as was the case when the Fed published the series. The most meaningful way to view the data is in terms of year-to-year change.



Based on three weeks-plus of data on April, annual growth in April for monthly M1 fell by 0.4%, versus a 1.1% contraction in March, while annual April M2 growth was 6.6%, up from 6.1% in March. The monetary aggregates will be revisited in next month's Reporting/Market Focus.

Inflation Indicators

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices -- The April prices paid indices rose again, suggesting an intensifying inflation environment reflected in both purchasing managers surveys.

In continued line with oil price changes, the price index movements have remained volatile. On the manufacturing side, the April price index soared to 73.0 from 65.5 in March. On a three-month moving average basis, April's annual change was down by 1.5% versus March's 8.5% contraction. The manufacturing price indicator is not seasonally adjusted and therefore is a better indicator of pricing activity.

On the non-manufacturing side, the seasonally-adjusted April prices diffusion index rose to 63.5 from 63.3 in March. On a three-month moving average basis, however, April's annual change moved into positive territory, up 2.7%, following March's decline of 12.0%.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflationary pressure. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising prices.

Oil Prices -- The monthly-average West Texas Intermediate spot price (Department of Energy) rose to $63.97 in April, up 5.6% from March's average of $60.56. Year-to-year price change continued to weaken, though, with April's average down 8.2% from the year before, where March's average price was down 3.7%. Price swings remain volatile, with current oil prices trading slightly below April's average.

Risk to oil prices remains on the upside, both from the pending onset of the 2007 hurricane season, and ongoing Middle Eastern political tensions. Forecasts are for a particularly active hurricane season, although similar forecasts did not pan out in 2006. Nonetheless, oil and gasoline prices appear headed for post-Katrina levels, even before the first storm starts moving on the Gulf of Mexico.

General background note: Global political conditions still continue to favor a sharp spike in oil prices in the months ahead, irrespective of any ongoing games playing by the Administration and OPEC. Overhanging the market remains the potential for a change in the dollar-based pricing of oil, particularly as dollar selling intensifies. Where dollar weakness is the equivalent of an oil price cut for oil purchasers denominated in an appreciating currency, market forces tend to push dollar-based oil prices higher, and that exacerbates inflation problems in the United States. Even worse, if oil pricing were shifted to something other than the U.S. currency, U.S. inflationary pressures would be even more intense, since any drop in the dollar would be reflected directly as an increase in the price of foreign oil for U.S. consumption.

General background note: Whether from supply and demand, geo-political or currency pressures, oil prices will remain at highly inflationary levels and will continue as a major contributing factor to U.S. inflation woes. Historically high oil prices still are working their way through all levels of U.S. economic activity, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. These broad inflationary pressures will remain intact despite any near-term oil price volatility. Although these pressures may be slow to surface in government reporting of the so-called "core" inflation measures, they will.
Reporting/Market Focus (April 2007) -- Loan Delinquency/Default Rates as Predictors/Indicators of Business Activity


Troubled economic times usually lead to mounting quality problems for consumer and commercial loans. While the history of such series is limited, current measures of the health of consumer lending are showing deterioration, although the signal given is a lagging, not a leading indicator.

The data for the graphs are for loan delinquencies and charge-offs at all commercial banks, seasonally adjusted, and as published by the Federal Reserve Board.



The heavier line shows spikes in credit card charge-offs tied to problems generated in the last recession and from the impact of the enactment of the 2005 bankruptcy law. Following a surge in bankruptcies designed to circumvent the new law, both delinquencies and charge-offs have been rising throughout 2006. Such indicates that roughly 7.9% of consumer credit card debt was in trouble as of year-end 2006.



Mortgages are more likely to become delinquent than to be charged off, as consumers often have had the option of selling or refinancing the property in question, in order to satisfy the mortgage. That said, mortgage delinquencies have been on the rise since the end of 2004, reaching 1.9% as of the end of 2006.

In terms of consumer liquidity, the rapidly spreading and deepening crisis reported in the popular press as to subprime and unconventional mortgages promises tightened credit standards and less liquidity for consumers. These issues, however, have yet to show meaningfully in the Fed's data.

The Short-Term Credit Measures section will update the available loan quality numbers as they become available on a quarterly basis. First-quarter 2007 data should show a marked deterioration with the subprime problem in hand. At such time as commercial lending starts to falter, those loan-quality issues will be addressed as well.


Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for May -- The Monetary Aggregates: Revisiting M3


The first anniversary has just passed of the Federal Reserve's abandonment of M3 reporting. What happened and is happening are explored with the benefit of a year's hindsight.

___________________________________________


May's "Shadow Government Statistics" newsletter is targeted for release at the end of the month (week of May 28th). Newsletter timing will be refined and announced in intervening Flash Updates. Postings on the Web site of monthly newsletters, interim Flash Updates and Alerts are advised immediately by e-mail. OCCASIONALLY, BRIEF UPDATES ARE COMMUNICATED BY E-MAIL. IF YOU ARE NOT RECEIVING E-MAIL COMMUNICATIONS FROM US, PLEASE LET US KNOW at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or by using the Feedback option on www.shadowstats.com.

Flash Update

Sunday, April 29th, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - Apr. 29, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

April 29, 2007

__________

Key Dollar Measure Hits All-Time Low

First-Quarter GDP Growth of 1.26%, GDP Deflator at 3.97%

Business Activity Tumbles as M3 Growth and Inflation Fears Soar

__________


PLEASE NOTE: The April SGS Newsletter is planned for posting next Monday, following the release of the April jobs data, along with final numbers on certain monthly measures, including an early estimate on April M3. The updated SGS Alternate GDP has been posted on the Alternate Data page; the April U.S. dollar measures should be posted on Thursday. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

Inflationary Recession Can Trigger Massive Dollar Selling


The trade-weighted U.S. dollar hit a record low last week, as the markets increasingly recognized the downturn in economic activity, in conjunction with rising inflation that the Fed seems to be "fighting" with accelerating broad money growth. The faltering fundamentals for the greenback included the ongoing bottom-bouncing of the President's approval rating. The U.S. currency is at the precipice and shortly could come under massive selling pressure. Dollar dumping would create turmoil in the domestic U.S. markets, pressuring long-term interest rates to the upside and equity prices to the downside. Never before have the U.S. markets faced an economic crisis while being so heavily dependent on foreign capital for liquidity.

U.S. Dollar Measures. The Federal Reserve Board's Major Currency Trade-Weighted Dollar Index (March 1973 = 100) set an all-time daily low of 78.99 on April 25th, 0.3% lower than the prior record low of 79.22 on April 19, 1995. The April monthly average also will set a record monthly low of about 79.9 (or 57.49 reset to January 1985 = 100).

Most dollar measures, however, have not set new lows. The Shadow Government Statistics Financial-Weighted Dollar Index (January 1985 = 100) -- where the key currencies are weighted based on respective currency trading volumes instead of merchandise trade activity -- is still 2.5% above its record monthly low of 48.98 in April 1995. The dollar also is roughly 6% above its all-time low against the Swiss franc. A variety of new downside records for the U.S. currency likely will be broken in the weeks and months ahead.

M3 Growth Soars. With just over two weeks of data available, the annual rate of growth in the monthly average April M3 appears likely to end up in the 12.4% to 12.8% range, up from 11.6% in March. Once again, the growth in the SGS Ongoing M3 Measure is built on the back of surging M2 growth.

Signs of Impaired Business Activity. Last week's economic reports, as highlighted below, were fairly consistent in signaling a slowing economy with rising inflation.

The "advance" estimate of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth in first-quarter GDP slowed to 1.26% +/- 3%, down from 2.45% in the fourth quarter, while annual growth eased to 2.06% in the first quarter, down from 3.13% in the fourth. The SGS Alternate GDP annual rates of change were a 2.1% contraction in the first quarter, versus a 1.5% decline in the fourth quarter.

Suggesting inflationary recession issues, official GDP inflation soared, with the first-quarter's implicit price deflator showing annualized inflation of 3.97%, up from 1.67% in the fourth quarter.

New orders for durable goods plunged 2.1% on a year-to-year basis, the first major annual decline in the series since the end of the last recession.

Confirming the ongoing sharp fall-off in housing activity, March existing home sales were down 8.4% month-to-month and 11.3% year-to-year. While March new home sales were reported up by 2.6% +/- 14%, year-to-year sales plummeted by 23.5%.

Related to home sales prospects as well as to job market conditions, both the Conference Board's consumer confidence and the University of Michigan's consumer sentiment measures for April fell on a monthly as well as an annual basis.

Upcoming Jobs Report. Market expectations for Friday's (May 4th) employment/unemployment report appear to be running around 100,000 new jobs, with a slight increase in the unemployment rate. Supporting data are weakening and suggest worse-than-expected results. The supporting series include rising new claims for unemployment insurance, continued declines in March help-wanted advertising, and March's purchasing managers survey employment readings near or below recession levels.

With all this happy news, the Dow Jones Industrial Average continues making new highs. Further details will follow in the newsletter.

___________________________________________


April's "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter should be posted on or about May 7th. An e-mail advice of same will be sent.

Flash Update

Sunday, April 22nd, 2007


JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

April 22, 2007

__________

Annual Inflation Soars as Economic Indicators Continue to Tank

With Deepening Inflationary Recession, Weakening Dollar and Strengthening Gold, Equities Boom?

__________


Updated estimates of March SGS Ongoing M3 and the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure have been posted on the Alternate Data Pages -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

"Contained" Annual Inflation Jumps 0.4% in March


Leave it to Wall Street's perverted spinmeistering to hype a 0.4% surge in annual CPI inflation as good news. The hype, of course, surrounded a reported 0.2% decline in so-called "core" inflation, which is relevant only to those poor souls living in the gray twilight of existence, where they consume neither food nor energy. Nonetheless, combined with ongoing weak economic data, general selling pressure against the U.S. dollar and upside movement in the price of gold, the happy inflation hype has been enough to push the Dow Jones Industrial Average to new highs. While the trends in weakening data and U.S. dollar and strengthening gold will tend to intensify, mounting irrationality in equities trading has set up those markets to be turned on their heads.

This Flash Update provides a brief summary of key, recent economic reporting, prior to a more complete accounting in the forthcoming monthly newsletter:

March M3 Growth at 11.6%. Annual growth in M3 (SGS Ongoing Measure as detailed on the Alternate Data Page) rose to 11.6%, up from 10.9% in February. Much of the increased growth mirrored a parallel rise in official M2 reporting, where March annual growth rose to 6.1% from 5.6% in February.

Alternate Annual CPI Inflation at 10.2%. The BLS reported seasonally-adjusted March CPI-U with a monthly gain of 0.61% (0.91% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval), up from February's 0.37% (0.53% unadjusted) gain. Annual inflation was reported at 2.78% for March, up from 2.42% in February.

Adjusted to Pre-Clinton Era methodologies, annual inflation was about 6.2%, up from 5.7% in February. Reset to the methodologies of 1980, the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure rose to 10.2% in March, up from 10.0% in February.

Seasonally-adjusted March PPI rose 1.0% (1.4% unadjusted) for the month, following a 1.3% increase in February. Annual PPI inflation jumped to 3.2% in March from 2.5% in February.

Real Retail Sales Flat. Seasonally-adjusted retail sales rose by 0.68% +/- 0.9% (95% confidence interval) for the month, from a revised 0.50% (previously 0.1%) gain in February. With monthly March CPI up by 0.61%, real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales growth was minimal for the month.

Historically, annual real growth in retail sales (using official CPI-U for deflation) of 1.8% or less has signaled looming recession. Although the recession signal was given about a year ago, current reporting remains consistent with a contracting GDP. Annual real growth was 0.98% in March, following 1.10% in February and 0.13% in January.

Housing Starts Approach Trough of 1990/1991 Recession. Seasonally-adjusted housing starts rose by 0.8% (down by 0.5% net of revisions) +/- 1.3% (95% confidence interval), after a 7.6% gain (previously 9.0%) in February. On an annual basis, housing starts fell by 25.9%.

For this volatile monthly series, annual change is best viewed on a three-month moving-average basis. So viewed, March annual change was down 30.6%, versus a 29.1% contraction in February. The March reading was the weakest seen since the trough of the housing series in the 1990/1991 recession.

Industrial Production Contracts. Seasonally-adjusted industrial production fell by 0.2% in March after a revised 0.8% increase in February (previously a 1.0% gain) and a 0.4% contraction (previously a 0.3% drop) in January. With continued gyrations in unseasonable weather throwing off seasonal adjustments, March utility usage fell by 7.0% after gaining 7.6% in February. Annual industrial production growth slowed to 2.3% in March, from 3.0% in February.

For the quarter-ended March, however, the seasonally-adjusted series almost recouped its quarterly contraction seen in fourth-quarter 2006.

Oil Reporting Continues Disrupting Trade Data. The seasonally-adjusted trade deficit as of February reportedly shrank to $58.4 billion from $58.9 billion (previously $59.1 billion) in January. The "improvement" was more than accounted for by the reported 2.9% decline in oil prices and a 12.5% drop in daily physical volume of oil imports. In recent months (particularly when oil prices declined), trade reporting had shifted to showing immediate impact of oil prices in the imported data, but not so in February, where market prices were up about 8.6%.

Employment Indicator Weakens. An increase in new claims for unemployment insurance is a negative economic indicator and usually a precursor to deteriorating employment/unemployment reporting by the BLS. Year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average of the series had risen to 7.1% as of the April 14th week, up from 5.5% as of the March 31st week.

Upcoming GDP. Markets are expecting this Friday's (April 27) reporting of the "advance" estimate of real, first-quarter 2007 annualized GDP growth to show a reduced pace of growth at somewhere around 2%, down from the fourth quarter's reported 2.5%. Where the expectations of slowing growth are reasonable, reported growth should be even weaker than expected and would reflect a contraction, if it were to be close to reality. Unfortunately, this series remains little more than political propaganda.

Further details on the above will follow in the newsletter.

___________________________________________


My apologies to Teddy Roosevelt for paraphrasing some of his classic language in the opening paragraph. April's "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter currently is targeted for the week of April 30th.

March 2007 Edition

Monday, April 9th, 2007
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Issue Number 29

April 9, 2007

__________

Inflationary Recession Deepens as Markets Sense a Problem

No Risk of U.S. Economy Being at Full Employment

March Annual M3 Growth Jumps to 11.6%

Foreign Investors Shunning Treasuries?

Handling Hyperinflation in a Near-Cashless Society

Dollar Sell-Off and Gold Boom Still Lie in Offing

__________


Introduced this month is the use of "General background notes," which provides a general background paragraph on certain series or concepts, but where the language used in past and subsequent newsletters usually has been or will be identical, month after month. Any text changes in these sections, going forward, will be highlighted in bold italics upon first usage. This is designed so that regular readers may avoid re-reading material they have seen before, but where they will have the material available for reference, if so desired. Best wishes to all -- John Williams


OVERVIEW -- OPENING COMMENTS


Despite continued rapid deterioration in the current inflationary recession, and despite growing market recognition of the intractable difficulties with both inflation and business activity, there are those on Wall Street who just seem unable to accept the concept of inflation without a strong economy. Give the markets a stronger-than-expected employment report, and rumblings start of "full employment" triggering a round of wage inflation and Fed tightenings.

Inflation is a problem -- due to oil, dollar and monetary issues -- but not due to strong economic demand. With consumer liquidity squeezed dry, there is no risk of the economy overheating. With actual unemployment around 12%, there is no risk of inflation pressures from the economy being at full employment. Within various skill sets and/or regions, there may be high demand for certain employees, but nationally, labor market conditions appears to be bleak.

A first cut on monthly average M3 for March indicates annual growth jumped to 11.6% for the month, up from 10.9% in February. The hard estimate will published in the Alternate Data section this coming weekend.

The Federal Reserve's recent signals have been pretty clear that it is not about to change policy, unless forced to by outside circumstances. With the U.S. central bank impotent in terms of its ability to contain inflation or to stimulate the economy, the next likely move by the Fed remains a tightening designed to counter a still-looming massive sell-off of the U.S. dollar.

Indeed, the basic elements for a dollar collapse and an eventual hyperinflationary environment in the United States remain locked in place. Discussed in this month's Reporting/Market Focus is the latest status of foreign holdings of U.S. Treasury securities. Based on questionable data, foreign funding of net U.S. Treasury issuance appears to have slowed, but holdings nonetheless remain at extraordinarily dangerous levels. Separately, the United States increasingly has been moving to a cashless society. Living with and surviving hyperinflation in such a system is discussed in this month's third installment on the pending hyperinflation crisis.

The Economy. On the business front, retail sales, housing starts, industrial production, new orders, the purchasing managers survey and consumer confidence all have signaled a deepening economic contraction in recent reporting.

Of the above series, housing starts is the one with the longest lead time to broad economic activity. For those touting the housing downturn as being over and as not having impact on the rest of the economy, consider the following. If a new house is not built, the requisite lumber, wiring, other building materials and labor will not be used. The carpeting, appliances and other furnishings that would have been bought for the new house will not be bought, etc. The affected areas of production, retail sales and employment already are in trouble and will be getting worse as a result of the housing downturn.

Although March's employment report topped market expectations, the jobs outlook remains bleak, as confirmed in supporting series such as new claims for unemployment, help-wanted advertising and the employment components of the purchasing managers surveys.

Fourth-quarter GDP growth, initially reported at an annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) rate of 3.5%, slowed to 2.2% in its first revision and held close to that (2.5%) in its second revision, despite the intervening publication of major downward revisions to recent historical growth in industrial production, new home sales and retail sales (see next section). The annual GDP benchmark revisions later this year will be adjusted for those factors. There is some risk of recent quarters of GDP growth -- particularly the fourth quarter of 2006 -- being reported as having contracted in revision, on an inflation-adjusted basis.

In terms of consumer and systemic liquidity, the rapidly spreading and deepening crisis with subprime and unconventional mortgages and loans promises intensified strangulation of consumer liquidity, as well as potential systemic liquidity crises for the broad financial system. A systemic liquidity crisis is the most likely scenario for triggering an otherwise unlikely easing by the Fed.

General background note: The U.S. economy is in a protracted and deepening structural recession that will prove to be the second leg of a double-dip recession, which began in 2000/2001. The current downleg was signaled in mid-2005 by a series of leading indicators used for that purpose by SGS. With neither traditional fiscal nor monetary stimulus available to help turn economic activity, the current circumstance is likely to evolve into a hyperinflationary depression (see December 2006 SGS).

Retail Sales Show Unfolding Recession. Retail sales accounted for one-third of GDP in 2006. Specifically, retail sales represented 47% of personal consumption expenditure, which, in turn, was 70% of GDP. When retail sales falter, the rest of the economy follows.

With household incomes not keeping up with inflation, the only factors keeping the personal-consumption end of the economy afloat have been short-term fixes: debt expansion and/or liquidation of savings. The intensifying credit/liquidity crisis for consumers is just beginning and will hit retail sales hard. The saving rate already is negative and likely at historic lows.

Even so, the accompanying graphs of current activity do not tell a happy story for the U.S. economy. The first graph reflects the monthly level of retail sales, adjusted for CPI-U inflation by the St. Louis Fed. The plot shows the series both before and after the March 29th benchmark revision. The benchmark showed weaker sales than previously had been reported, with 2006 retail sales down 0.8% from where they had been before. Allowing for variations tied to the severe hurricane season of 2005, the level of real retail sales -- one-third of the GDP -- has been broadly stagnant since mid-2005.



The second graph shows year-to-year change in the revised, real retail series. Aside from monthly (and related year-later) gyrations surrounding the 2001 terrorist attacks, current annual growth remains at levels, and is following patterns, that always have been accompanied by recession.



Inflation. On the inflation front, both the straight and "core" CPI and PPI measures recently have been topping market expectations. Also tickling financial-market inflation concerns have been rising oil and food prices, overly strong M3 growth and nascent dollar weakness. Even the FOMC pronounced in its March 21st statement that its "predominant policy concern remains the risk that inflation will fail to moderate as expected."

With the Middle East remaining the proverbial powder keg amidst other global political tensions, risks to oil prices -- and correspondingly to inflation -- remain on the upside. U.S. dollar selling risks have been heightened somewhat by expanding U.S. trade confrontations with Communist China.

Financial Markets. The unfortunate combination of a weak economy and rising inflation began taking its toll on the financial markets in first-quarter 2007. For the last 12 months, investors who held precious metals, or who just kept British pounds as cash in their wallets, did better than they would have done investing in the Dow Jones Industrial Average. It is not that the holders of pounds or gold really made money in terms of dollars, but rather that they maintained the purchasing power otherwise lost by the dollar.

The ultimate driver for the markets remains the fate of the U.S. currency. At such time as the dollar sell-off commences, U.S. interest rates should spike, equity prices should tumble and precious metals should soar anew. The big question is in the uncertain timing.

General background note: Current inflation pressures result largely from commodity supply distortions, not from strong economic demand. Accordingly, current inflation is not particularly responsive to any Fed efforts to slow economic activity. With the GAAP-based U.S. federal budget deficit increasing at an uncontainable $4.6 trillion per year and federal net obligations in excess of $50 trillion, the U.S. government faces eventual bankruptcy (see December 2006 SGS). With the U.S. financial markets so heavily dependent on foreign capital for liquidity, this leaves the U.S. financial markets vulnerable to extreme volatility, as the system approaches a period of hyperinflationary depression.

Alternate Realities. General background note: This section updates the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting. When a government economic measure does not match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Federal Reserve, White House and Wall Street. Effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan-Era GDP. The methodologies for the series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS (see Archives page at www.shadowstats.com).

GDP. The alternate fourth-quarter GDP growth reflects the "final" estimate revision, with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate fourth-quarter inflation-adjusted annual growth rate (year-to-year, as opposed to the popularly-touted annualized quarter-to-quarter rate) for GDP was a decline of roughly 1.5% versus the official 3.1% gain.



General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate GDP numbers tend to show deeper and more protracted recessions than have been formally reported or reflected in related official reporting. Nonetheless, the patterns shown in the alternate data are broadly consistent with the payroll employment and industrial production series (as revised), which are major indicators used by the National Bureau of Economic Research in determining the official timing of U.S. business cycles.

CPI. The gimmicked annual core inflation in January did not show the annual dip seen in the full inflation measures, while both full and core inflation measures picked up in February. Oil prices have remained volatile, but at high levels, and related higher energy and material costs increasingly are permeating broad economic activity. Both core and regular inflation reporting annual should trend higher in the months ahead.

                             Eight Levels of Inflation
                Annual Inflation for November 2006 to February 2007


2006 2007 Measure Nov Dec Jan Feb
I.1 Core PCE Deflator 2.1%r 2.1%r 2.2%r 2.4% I.2 Core Chained-CPI-U 2.3% 2.3% 2.3% 2.4% I.3 Core CPI-U 2.6% 2.6% 2.7% 2.7% I.4 PCE Deflator 1.9% 2.2%r 1.9%r 2.3% I.5 Chained-CPI-U 1.9% 2.4% 1.9% 2.2% I.6 CPI-U 2.0% 2.5% 2.1% 2.4% I.7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U 5.4% 5.8% 5.4% 5.7% I.8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation 9.4% 10.0% 9.9% 10.0%

r - Revised. Notes: I.1 to I.3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively, of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U. I.4 to I.6 are the same measures with energy and food inflation included. The CPI-U (I.6) is the measure popularly followed by the financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation. I.7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre- Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top series in the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com. I.8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which reverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so, plus an adjustment for the portion of Clinton-Era geometric weighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic bookkeeping.




General background note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. The Alternate CPI numbers tend to show significantly higher inflation over time, generally reflecting the reversal of hedonic adjustments, geometric weighting and the use of a more traditional approach to measuring housing costs, measures all consistent with the reporting methodology in place as of 1980.


Living with Hyperinflation: Cash Alternatives in a Cashless Society


This is the final installment in a series of three articles on the greatest threat facing the U.S. economy and financial markets: hyperinflationary depression. The first article (December SGS) explored why the system faces hyperinflation instead of deflation. Last month's (January/February) SGS looked at how the crisis could break, along with approaches to preserving wealth and assets in the turbulent times ahead. The current article explores day-to-day consequences of living with hyperinflation.

The United States in a hyperinflation would experience the quick disappearance of cash as we know it. Shy of the rapid introduction of a new currency and/or the highly problematic adaptation of the current electronic commerce system to new pricing realities, a barter system is the most likely circumstance to evolve for regular commerce. Such would make much of the current electronic commerce system useless and add to what would become an ongoing economic implosion.

Where Did All the Currency Go? Some years back, I happened to be in San Francisco, having dinner with a former regional Federal Reserve Bank president and the chief economist for a large Midwestern bank. Market rumors that day had been that there was a run on a major bank in the City by the Bay. So I queried the regional Fed president as to what would be happening if the rumors were true.

He had had some personal experience with a run on banks in his region and explained how the Fed had a special team designed to handle such a crisis. The biggest problem he had had was getting adequate cash to the troubled banks to cover depositors, having to fly cash in by helicopters to meet the local cash flow needs.

The troubled bank in San Francisco, however, was much larger than the example cited, and the former Fed bank president speculated that there was not enough cash in the vaults of the regional Federal Reserve Bank, let alone the entire Federal Reserve System, to cover a true run on deposits at the major bank.

Therein lies an early problem for a system headed into hyperinflation: adequate currency. Where the Fed may hold roughly $30 billion in currency outside of $50 billion in commercial bank vault cash, the bulk of roughly $770 billion in currency outside the banks is not in the United States. Back in 2000, the Fed estimated that 50% to 70% of U.S. dollar cash was outside the system. That number probably is higher today, with perhaps as little as $150 billion in physical cash present in the United States, or roughly 0.009% of M3.

The rest of the dollars are used elsewhere in the world as a store of wealth, or as an alternate currency free of the woes of unstable domestic financial conditions. In Zimbabwe, for example, where something akin to hyperinflation is underway, U.S. dollars are used to maintain some semblance of economic activity, where wages and salaries seriously lag inflation, and goods often are available only on the black market.

My fairly crude definition of hyperinflation is a circumstance, where, due to rising prices, the largest pre-hyperinflation bank note becomes worth more as toilet paper/tissue than as currency. With limited physical cash in the system, existing currency would disappear quickly as a hyperinflation broke.

For the system to continuing functioning in anything close to a normal manner, the government would have to produce rapidly an extraordinary amount of new cash, and electronic commerce would have to be able to adjust to rapidly changing prices.

In terms of cash, new bills of much higher denominations would be needed, but production lead time is a problem. Conspiracy theories of recent years have suggested the U.S. Government already has printed a new currency of red-colored bills, intended for some dual internal and external U.S. dollar system. If such indeed were the case, then there might be a store of "new dollars" that could be released at a 1-to-1,000,000 ratio, or whatever ratio was needed to make the new currency meaningful, but such would not resolve any long-term problems, unless it were part of an overall restructuring of the domestic and global financial and currency systems.

From a practical standpoint, however, currency would disappear, at least for a period of time in the early period of a hyperinflation.

Where the vast bulk of today's money is not physical, but electronic, however, chances of the system adapting here are virtually nil. Think of the time, work and effort that went into preparing computer systems for Y2K, or even problems with the recent early shift to daylight savings time. Systems would have to be adjusted for variable, rather than fixed pricing, credit card lines would need to be expanded daily, the number of digits used in tallying dollar-denominated transactions would need to be expanded sharply.

From a practical standpoint, the electronic quasi-cashless society of today also would shut down early in a hyperinflation. Unfortunately, this circumstance rapidly would exacerbate an ongoing economic collapse.

Barter System. With standard currency and electronic payment systems non-functional, commerce quickly would devolve into black markets for goods and services and a barter system.

Unlike Zimbabwe, the United States does not have widely available, for circulation, a back-up reserve currency for use in place of a highly-inflated domestic currency. The alternative here is in the traditional monetary precious metals. Gold and silver both are likely to retain real value and would be exchangeable for goods and services. Silver would help provide smaller change for less costly transactions.

Other items that would be highly barterable would include bottles of a good scotch or wine, or canned goods, for example. Similar items that have a long shelf life can be stocked in advance of the problem, and otherwise would be consumable if the terrible inflation never came. Separately, individuals, such as doctors and carpenters, who provide broadly useable services, would have a service to barter.

A note of caution was raised once by one of my old economics professors, who had spent part of his childhood living in a barter economy. He told a story of how his father had traded a shirt for a can of sardines. The father decided to open the can and eat the sardines, but he found the sardines had gone bad. Nonetheless, the canned sardines had taken on a monetary value.

Other Issues. A hyperinflationary depression would be extremely disruptive to the lives, businesses and economic welfare of most individuals. Such severe economic pain could lead to extreme political change and/or civil unrest. What has been discussed here has not been intended as a comprehensive overview of possible issues, but rather to at least raise some questions and touch upon some likely consequences. These matters will be expanded upon over time in the SGS, as circumstances and subscriber reactions dictate. Please feel free to offer your comments or raise your questions by via our Contact Form on www.shadowstats.com.


MARKETS PERSPECTIVE


The just-ended quarter showed stock indices flattening out, along with slowing annual growth. Gold, silver and the British pound put in the strongest showings of any of the tracked measures. Of significance, all three measures tended to preserve the purchasing power that otherwise was lost by the U.S. dollar over the last year.

                  Quarterly Financial-Market Indicators at Quarter-End


First-Quarter 2007 Fourth-Quarter 2006 Level Q/Q Yr/Yr Level Q/Q Yr/Yr Equity Market
DJIA 12,354.35 -0.87% 11.21% 12,463.15 6.71% 16.29% S&P 500 1,420.86 0.18% 9.73% 1,418.30 6.17% 13.62% Wilshire 5000 14,409.27 1.06% 9.53% 14,257.50 6.53% 13.90% NASDAQ Comp 2,421.64 0.26% 3.50% 2,415.29 6.81% 9.52%

Credit Market(1) 3-Mo T-Bill 5.04% 2 bp 41 bp 5.02% 13 bp 94 bp 2-Yr T-Note 4.58% -24 bp -24 bp 4.82% 10 bp 41 bp 5-Yr T-Note 4.54% -16 bp -28 bp 4.70% 11 bp 35 bp 10-Yr T-Note 4.65% -6 bp -21 bp 4.71% 7 bp 32 bp 30-Yr T-Bond 4.84% 3 bp -6 bp 4.81% 4 bp na

Currencies(2) US$/Unit Pound 1.9685 0.51% 13.20% 1.9586 4.65% 13.95% Euro 1.3374 1.34% 10.17% 1.3197 4.02% 11.44% Swiss Franc 0.8247 0.57% 7.14% 0.8200 2.53% 7.81% Yen 0.0085 1.24% -0.07% 0.0084 -0.87% -0.96%

Precious Metals(3) US$ per Troy Ounce Gold 661.75 4.71% 13.70% 632.00 5.47% 23.20% Silver 13.35 3.49% 13.52% 12.90 11.69% 46.09%

bp - Basis point or 0.01%. na -- 30-Year Treasury bond was reintroduced in February 2006. (1) Constant maturity yield, Federal Reserve Board. (2) Federal Reserve Board. (3) London afternoon fix, Kitco.com.


The markets still seem to favor a Fed easing, but recognition of a stymied U.S. central bank has been growing among a number of financial analysts.

Key to what lies ahead is the timing of the likely dollar sell-off. The fundamentals stacked against the greenback have never been worse. When the dollar dumping begins, the other markets will be put in play in a manner that eventually will shake the foundations of the global financial system.

General background note: The U.S. economy remains in a severe, structural inflationary recession, saddled with an impotent Fed and a federal government that is fiscally bankrupt in all but name. In combination, these factors offer the worst of all environments to the financial markets. Ahead lie higher long-term interest rates and much lower U.S. equity prices. On the plus side is the outlook for gold, which provides a solid hedge against many of the problems that have started to surface. Key to the near-term movements of these markets remains the fate of the U.S. dollar.

U.S. Equities -- While the stock market indices remain far removed from underlying reality, they did show some temperance in the first quarter. Eventually, as the recession pummels earnings, as inflation increases beyond expectations, as dollar selling kicks in and interest rates spike, stocks should tank. Again, though, these markets have not been close to sanity for a long time.

U.S. Credit Market -- A discussed earlier, the Fed has signaled inaction for a while, due to stated minimal economic concerns and continued inflation worries. Where the economy is faltering and inflation is rising, the condition of the U.S. dollar is likely to dominate Fed considerations.

With the U.S. credit markets so heavily dependent on foreign capital for liquidity, likely heavy selling of the greenback will tend to spike long-term interest rates and could force the Fed into its next rate move: a tightening aimed at U.S. dollar defense.

While market expectations of the Fed's next action on interest rates may swing wildly with changing economic expectations, the U.S. dollar's behavior remains the primary concern. The U.S. economic and political systems are in trouble, and that will pressure the greenback to the downside.

U.S. Dollar -- Despite sporadic selling bouts, major dollar selling has yet to begin. Massive dollar dumping looms, however, and could hit at any time, with no advance warning. It could be triggered by any number of factors ranging from negative trade developments with Communist China, to increasingly negative economic reports, to political embarrassments for the Federal Reserve or Administration, to a terrorist attack or even a still-likely military action against Iran. Whatever sets off the selling, the turn in the U.S. currency still is a good bet to come within the next several months. Broad selling should be heavy enough to overcome any short-lived central bank intervention.

General background note: In terms of underlying fundamentals that tend to drive currency trading, the dollar's portfolio could not be worse. Relative to major trading partners, the U.S. economy is much weaker, interest rates are lower, inflation is higher, fiscal and trade-balance conditions are abysmal, and relative political stability is near an all time low. The President's approval rating commonly has moved currency trading in the past. Current conditions are the worst seen in the post-World War II era, compounded by the presence of a Congress to the President. Generally, the greater the magnitude of the dollar selling, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. capital markets.

As shown in the following graph, the U.S. dollar moved lower in March.



General background note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS for methodology.

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics' Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (FWD) is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For March 2007, the monthly dollar average fell by 1.11%, after a 0.28% decline in February. The March 2007 average index level of 50.99 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 7.12% from March 2006, following an annual rate of decline of 6.04% in February.

Also tanking, March's monthly average of the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (TWD) fell by 1.02%, after a 0.36% decline in February.

The March 2007 index level of 58.45 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 4.44% from the year before, against February's annual decline of 3.50%.

General background note: The biggest difference between the FRB and the SGS series is the much heavier weighting of the Canadian dollar in the TWD versus the FWD.

Gold -- The price of gold has continued trending higher, but the upside potential remains explosive, particularly when heavy dollar selling begins.

The nature of gold trading is such that high volatility likely will continue, as will sporadic central-bank manipulation. Jawboning as to selling gold is a popular ploy by central bankers, but they know very well that they should be increasing their gold holdings, not liquidating them.

General background note: As discussed in the Hyperinflation Series, the eventual complete collapse of the U.S. dollar -- the world's reserve currency -- will force the creation of a new international currency system. Gold likely will be structured into any replacement system in an effort by those organizing the new currency structure to gain public acceptance.





The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show March averages. As we go to press, gold is trading around $673, oil is under $64 and the Swiss franc is trading near $0.82. Look for all three measures to trade significantly higher before mid-year.


REPORTING PERSPECTIVE

The Big Three Market Movers


With most of the December/January weather abnormalities out of the system, market sentiment has begun shifting back towards a combination of recession and inflation. Nonetheless, beyond the short-term data distortions, recent and upcoming releases of the major series are, and likely will continue to be, subject to massaging for both the perceived political needs of the Administration and the heavy financial market needs of the Federal Reserve Board.

General background note: The reality of the deteriorating, underlying inflationary recession increasingly is surfacing in the popularly followed economic series. Against lagging and still largely distorted market expectations, most near-term economic reporting will surprise the markets on the downside, while most inflation reporting should surprise the markets on the upside.

Employment/Unemployment -- Seasonally-adjusted March payroll employment was reported up by 180,000 (212,000 net of revisions) +/- 129,000. The March increase followed a revised February gain of 113,000 that initially had been reported at 97,000. Though March payrolls were stronger than expected by the markets, annual growth in March slowed to 1.46%, its slowest pace in nearly three years, following February's 1.51% annual growth rate.

As has been the ongoing pattern for a number of months, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) continued with major upward revisions to previously published data. Nothing appeared to be extraordinarily out of whack with the March payroll seasonal factors, other than possible lingering weather effects. Underlying data reported with help-wanted advertising, new claims for unemployment insurance and the employment components of the purchasing managers series, however, all have continued signaling contractions in current payroll reporting.

The jobs number was boosted by a positive monthly fudge or bias factor (now called the birth-death adjustment, which overestimates employment growth during recessions) of 128,000. For April of last year, that factor increased to 271,000, suggesting some further upside pressure on next month's payroll reporting.

From the household survey, seasonally-adjusted March employment rose by 335,000, after contracting by 38,000 in February. This number reflects the number of people who have at least one job, versus the payroll survey that counts the number of jobs.

Also from the household survey, the seasonally-adjusted March U.3 unemployment rate purportedly narrowed to 4.40% +/- 0.23% from 4.49% in February, a change that was statistically indistinguishable from an increase in the unemployment rate. On an unadjusted basis, U.3 narrowed to 4.5% in March from February's 4.9%. The broader U.6 rate on an unadjusted basis fell to 8.3% in March from 8.7% in February, where the seasonally-adjusted U.6 rate declined to 8.0% from February's 8.1%. Net of "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment continues to run about 12%.

Next Release (March 4): The April payroll survey should be weaker than expected, despite the ongoing increase in the bias factor. Look, too, for the unemployment rate to rise anew.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) -- The "final" estimate revision of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth for fourth-quarter 2006 was 2.45% +/- 3%, versus the preliminary estimate of 2.22% and the advance estimate of 3.47%. Growth still was up from the third quarter's 1.96% pace and the second-quarter's 2.56%, but it was down from the first quarter's 5.58%. Measured fourth-quarter 2006 over fourth-quarter 2005, real growth revised to 3.13% from the last estimate of 3.07%, little more than statistical noise.

The downside revisions suggested by parallel, intervening revisions in production, housing and retail sales did not materialize. Such opened the mid-year GDP annual benchmark revision to likely, major downside changes.

The official estimates for real, annualized, quarterly fourth-quarter growth in gross national product (GNP) and gross domestic income (GDI) finally were published. GNP growth was unusually strong at 3.49%, up from 1.76% in the third quarter. This suggests some unusual games playing with data on foreign holdings of U.S. financial assets (see this month's Reporting/Market Focus). GDI growth was 3.37% in the fourth quarter, following a 0.29% contraction in the third quarter. Variability in the GDI series is due to changes in the level of statistical discrepancy between the consumption-side GDP measure and the income-side GDI, which, in theory, should be equal to each other.

While the GDP report is the government's broadest estimate of U.S. economic activity, it is also the least meaningful and most heavily massaged of all major government economic series. Primarily it has become a tool for economic propaganda.

Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS Alternate GDP measure suggests economic reality is much weaker than officially reported, with a year-to-year annual contraction of roughly 1.5% for fourth-quarter 2006 GDP, the same as the third quarter's 1.5% (see the graph in the Alternate Reality section in the Opening Comments).

Next Release (April 27): Partially reflecting deteriorating underlying economic activity, the "advance" estimate of first-quarter 2007 GDP should come in below what otherwise should be relatively positive consensus forecasts.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) -- The Bureau of Labor Statistics reported the seasonally-adjusted February CPI-U (I.6) up by 0.40% (0.54% unadjusted) +/- 0.12% (95% confidence interval) for the month, following January's 0.17% gain (0.40% unadjusted). Annual inflation rose to 2.42% in February, from January's 2.08%.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) (I.5) -- the presumed eventual substitution-based replacement series for CPI-U -- was 2.2% in February, versus 1.9% in January.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton methodology (I.7), annual CPI growth was about 5.7% in February, up from 5.4% in January. The SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (I.8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies of recent decades, was 10.0% in February, up from January's 9.9%.

The eight levels of annual inflation, I.1 to I.8, are shown in the table in the Alternate Reality section, as is the plot of the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation number.

Next Release (April 17): Annual inflation still is far from peaking, but it will take some months into 2007 to regain its recent high annual rates. Seasonally-adjusted, monthly CPI-U increased by 0.3% in March 2006. Any monthly reporting above or below that for the pending release of March 2007 CPI will add or subtract directly to or from the annual CPI-U inflation rate. Reporting likely is to be on the upside of market expectations. Upside movement in core rates, in particular, will tend to surprise the markets.


Other Troubled Key Series


Federal Deficit -- As discussed in the December SGS, the federal government's fiscal 2006 (fiscal year-end September 30th) deficit, prepared based on generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), widened to $4.6 trillion from 2005's $3.5 trillion. Those numbers dwarfed the officially-gimmicked 2006 federal budget deficit of $248.2 billion, which was down $70.8 billion from 2005's $318.5 billion.

Though still lacking the accrual accounting of the GAAP numbers, the change in gross federal debt is a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the gimmicked deficit reporting. As of fiscal year-end 2006, the gross federal debt stood at $8.507 trillion, up by $574 billion from 2005, which in turn was up $554 billion from 2004.

For the rolling 12 months through February 2007, the gimmicked deficit was $192.7 billion versus $312.6 billion in February 2006, compared with rolling deficits of $191.9 billion and $307.3 billion in January of 2007 and 2006. For March 31, 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $8.850 trillion, up by $479 billion from March 2006, which in turn was up by $594 billion from March 2005. As of February 28, 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $8.778 trillion, up by $508 billion from February 2006, which in turn was up by $557 billion from February 2005. As of January 31, 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $8.708 trillion, up by $511 billion from January 2006, which in turn was up by $568 billion from January 2005.

General background note: The Administration and Congress continue playing bookkeeping games. Even so, the gimmicked deficit should widen this year, as government finances suffer increasingly from tax revenue losses due to the intensifying recession and relative tax receipt declines after the expiration of recent tax incentives. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy's mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance -- Annual change in initial claims has continued rising into positive territory (an economic negative) in tandem with job market deterioration. On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended March 31st, annual growth rose to 5.5%, compared with 3.9% for the 17 weeks ended February 10th.

General background note: More often than not, week-to-week volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly claims numbers is due to the Labor Department's efforts to seasonally adjust these numbers around holiday periods. The Labor Department has demonstrated an inability to do such adjusting successfully. When the new claims series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings -- February's seasonally-adjusted real earnings fell by 0.3%, following a 0.3% decline in January. Annual growth slowed to 1.5% in February, from 2.2% in January.

General background note: Gyrations in the poor quality of reported CPI growth account for most month-to-month volatility in this series. Adjusting for the major upside biases built into the CPI-W inflation measure used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series shows the average worker to be under severe financial stress in an ongoing recession.

Retail Sales -- Still wobbling from weather distortions, February's seasonally-adjusted retail sales rose by 0.1% +/- 0.9% (95% confidence interval) (zero growth net of revisions), following zero growth in January. With CPI up by 0.4% in February and by 0.2% in January, 2007 has started off with negative inflation-adjusted retail sales growth. Net of inflation, first-quarter retail sales are on track to show a quarterly real contraction, an event rarely seen outside of recession. Net of inflation, annual growth in February retail sales was 0.8%, against 0.1% in January.

Based on the March 29th benchmark revision, seasonally-adjusted February retail sales still were up 0.1% for the month. Revised retail sales levels from the benchmark revision as well as historical detail of year-to-year change on a monthly basis are shown in the graphs in this month's Opening Comments.

General background note: Real (inflation-adjusted) year-to-year growth in retail sales below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation) signals recession, and a signal first was generated in this business cycle back in June 2006.

Next Releases (April 16): March retail sales, due for release on April 16th, should continue coming in below market expectations and below the rate of inflation. Inflation-adjusted growth likely will be negative for the first quarter versus the fourth quarter.

Industrial Production -- As noted in the Flash Update of March 18th, seasonally-adjusted industrial production rose by 1.0% in February, following a 0.3% contraction in January (previously reported as a 0.5% contraction). These monthly numbers, however, continued gyrating in the aftershocks of the unusual weather of the last three months. February utility usage surged by 6.7% in the month, for example, which should have been close to zero if the weather and seasonal adjustments were moving in tandem. With similar distortion, annual growth as of February rose to 3.4% from 2.7% in January.

Revisions to fourth-quarter industrial production left that quarter's seasonally-adjusted annualized quarterly contraction at 1.25%, a deeper tumble than the 0.78% reported last month, and suggestive of eventual downside revision to fourth-quarter GDP.

Next Release (April 14): Look for monthly industrial production to resume contraction in March. Monthly contractions in this series shortly should become regular.

New Orders for Durable Goods -- The usually volatile durable goods orders rose in February by 2.5% (1.5% net of revisions), after a 9.3% (previously 7.8%) January plunge. February's orders fell by 0.3% from the year before, following January's 3.2% annual gain. Annual growth in durable goods orders has held at or near recessionary levels for five months.

The closely followed nondefense capital goods orders rose by 9.5% in February, following January's 19.1% (previously 19.9%) fall. February's annual growth rate for nondefense capital goods orders was down 6.9%, following January's 6.2% gain.

General background note: Durable goods orders lost its status as a solid leading economic indicator when the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders.

Trade Balance -- As discussed in Flash Update of March 11th, the seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for January 2007 was reported at $59.2 billion, down from $61.5 billion in December (previously reported as $61.2 billion). For all of 2006, the annual deficit revised to $765.3 billion, from initial reporting of $763.6 billion, up from $716.6 billion in 2005. The handling of reported oil imports and related pricing, however, has resulted in distortions to reporting of the 2006 trade deficit, the purported January deficit and related GDP measures.

The Bureau of Economic Analysis/Census Bureau release shows seasonally-unadjusted crude oil imports up by 6.3% year-to-year in January, 5.7% attributable to physical oil import volume and 0.6% attributable to higher oil prices. Somehow, that translated to a seasonally-adjusted annual contraction of 1.9% in the aggregate trade statistics for petroleum products, before adjustment for inflation, and to a 1.3% gain after inflation adjustment. That could happen only with a 3.2% drop in prices used in the deflation process, not the 0.6% gain shown in the raw data.

The difference is that with the year-to-year oil imports handled on a consistent basis, petroleum imports would have been higher in January by about $2.1 billion, which would have taken the total monthly January deficit to $61.3 billion, virtually unchanged versus $61.5 billion in December.

The oil-pricing distortions are much more severe, however, where the full extent of the increase in oil prices during the last two years never made it into the imported-oil pricing. For example, January 2006 oil averaged $51.93 per barrel in the trade data, versus a market average of $65.10. In January 2007, the trade data oil was at $52.23, against a market average of $54.57. This circumstance suggests that the 2006 trade deficit is understated sharply and that the corresponding 2006 GDP is overstated.

Next Release (April 13): The February trade deficit should show some rebound from ongoing recent understatement, assuming oil import prices catch-up with the markets. Reporting risk remains on the upside of consensus forecasts. The months ahead should see a pattern of regularly increasing deficits that once again will be setting new records by mid-year 2007.

Consumer Confidence -- March confidence measures declined on a monthly basis, following mixed results in February. The Conference Board's March consumer confidence dropped 3.6% month-to-month, after a 0.9% (initially 2.1%) gain in February and a 0.2% increase in January. For March the University of Michigan's consumer sentiment declined by 3.2%, after February's 5.8% drop and January's 5.7% increase.

On a three-month moving-average basis for March, year-to-year change in confidence was up by 3.7%, versus 5.8% in February, while annual growth in sentiment slowed to 3.7% from 3.9% in February. The slowing annual growth in these lagging, not leading, indicators continues to show that the economy has been in trouble.

General background note: The Conference Board measure is seasonally adjusted, which can provide occasional, but significant distortion. The adjustment does not make much sense and is of suspect purpose, given that the Conference Board does not release the unadjusted number. The Michigan survey is unadjusted. How does one seasonally-adjust peoples' attitudes? Also, beware the mid-month Consumer Sentiment release from the University of Michigan. Its sampling base is so small as to be virtually valueless in terms of statistical significance.

Short-Term Credit Measures -- Annual growth in consumer and commercial borrowing continued mixed in the most recent reporting.

Seasonally-adjusted consumer credit (which does not include mortgages) grew by just 0.1% in the month of February, with annual growth at 4.5%, following 4.4% in January and 4.6% in December. In the current environment, where inflation-adjusted growth in income is not adequate to support meaningful growth in the personal consumption component of GDP, GDP growth only can come from temporary debt expansion or savings liquidation. Consumer debt expansion has stalled on a monthly basis, suggesting a major constraint on economic growth.

Commercial borrowing remains strong on a year-to-year basis. Annual growth in commercial paper outstanding was 19.3% in March, up from 18.6% in February and 18.3% in January, but still down from December's 21.5%. Annual growth in commercial and industrial loans was 13.0% in February, down from 13.4% in January, and down from 14.6% in December. Where solid growth in the commercial credit measures can signal credit needs tied either to rising sales and receivables/inventory, or to slowing sales and slowing collections and involuntarily rising inventories. Slowing growth usually is a sign of slowing economic activity.

Producer Price Index (PPI) -- Seasonally-adjusted February finished goods rose a seasonally-adjusted 1.3% (1.1% unadjusted), after a 0.6% drop (0.8% gain unadjusted) in January. Annual PPI inflation rose to 2.5% in February from 0.2% in January. Seasonally-adjusted intermediate and crude goods rose 1.1% and 8.9% respectively for the month of February.

Next Release (April 13): Despite random volatility in monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months remains likely to exceed market expectations. In particular, March's core inflation rate is subject to an upside surprise.


Better-Quality Numbers


General background note: The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders -- The overall March ISM manufacturing index sank anew to 50.9 from 52.3 in February. The February reading had bounced above the 50.0 recession/expansion dividing line from 49.3 in January. The March employment component once again sank into recession territory at 48.7, down from 51.1 in February and lower than January's 49.5 reading. Recent seasonal factor distortions appear to be working their way out of the system.

The March new orders index rose fell back to 53.0 from February's 54.9, but still was higher than January's 50.3, where, again, bad seasonals may have been altering the reported story. Seasonal-factor distortions are overcome by viewing the series using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the March new orders index fell by 13.0% compared with annual contractions of 11.2% in February and 13.6% in January.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading below 50.0 indicates contracting new orders. The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004. As an SGS early warning indicator of a major economic shift, the new orders measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating a signal of pending recession.

Service Sector Index. The service-sector ISM index does not have much meaning related to overall business activity, since new order activity at law firms, hospitals or fast-food restaurants has little obvious relationship to broad economic activity. That said, the overall March services sector index fell to 52.4, from 54.3 in February and 59.0 in January. Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. The March employment component fell to 50.8 from 52.2 in February and was lower than January's 51.7 reading. The prices paid component is covered in the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) -- The Conference Board reported that help-wanted advertising fell to 31 in February from 32 in January, following a reading of 34 in December that initially had been reported at 33. The February number was down 20.5% from the year before. Even so, this series seems to have been distorted to the upside in December and January by recent weather abnormalities.

Viewed on a three-month moving average basis, February's year-to-year change was a contraction of 15.7%, versus January's 16.7% drop and December's 19.3% contraction. Despite short-term volatility, the series still indicates rapidly deteriorating employment conditions. Where the index never recovered from the 2000/2001 recession, its recent plunge signaled a renewed and rapid contraction in economic activity. Continued near-term deterioration remains likely in the months ahead.

Housing Starts -- For the month, seasonally-adjusted February housing starts rose 9.0% +/- 13.3% (95% confidence interval included 0), after falling by 14.3% in January. Year-to-year change was a contraction of 28.5%, compared to a 38.2% decline in January.

Due to the volatility of the data -- particularly from recent weather distortions -- the numbers for annual change best are viewed on a three-month moving-average basis. So calculated, the February year-to-year drop was 28.8%, compared with 28.2% in January, the worst reading since the depths of the 1990/1991 recession. The series continued to signal an intensifying recession.

Related data tend to confirm the housing contraction and deepening recession. In reporting as of January, fourth-quarter 2006 new home sales grew at an annualized quarterly rate of 13.5%. After the February revisions, the quarter was down at annualized pace of 2.6%, a big enough shift to add to eventual downside revision pressure to fourth-quarter GDP growth.

Seasonally-adjusted February new home sales fell 3.9% (9.5% net of revisions) for the month, and were down 18.3% year-to-year. That followed a revised 15.8% monthly contraction in January (was 16.6%) with a revised 24.8% (was 20.1%) year-to-year plunge. Seasonally-adjusted existing home sales in February rose by 3.9% for the month, after a 2.7% increase in January, but February sales still were down 3.6% for the year, compared with a 4.6% decline in January. Since new home sales data are based on contract signings, where existing home sales data are based on closings, the latter series still was working on activity from December 2006.

Money Supply -- Annual growth in the SGS Continuing M3 appears to have jumped to 11.6% in March, at first estimate, after having eased back a notch in February to 10.9%. January annual growth was 11.0%. The Continuing M3 growth rates are strong enough that they would be creating some discomfort in the credit markets, if they still were published by the Federal Reserve. The graph reflects the estimates through February. The formal March money supply numbers will be published on the Alternate Data page this coming weekend.



General background note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the ongoing SGS estimates of M3, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS for methodology.

Before inflation adjustment, seasonally-adjusted February M1 and M2 respectively fell by 0.9% and rose by 0.4% for the month, after monthly increases of 0.4% and 0.9% in January. On a monthly basis, seasonally-adjusted M3 was up roughly 1.0% in February, after a 0.8% increase in January.

Annual growth in February for monthly M1 fell by 1.2%, versus a 0.5% contraction in January, while annual February M2 growth was 5.6%, following 5.5% in January. Net of distorted annual CPI inflation, real annual growth rates for February M1 and M2 remained consistent with the ongoing recession, with February's M1 and M2 year-to-year rates of change down by roughly 3.5% and up 3.1%, respectively. On a three-month moving-average basis, the February inflation-adjusted annual rates of change were down 3.0% and up 3.0%, growth rates that still were underwater using the old-style CPI.

Inflation Indicators

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices -- The March prices paid indices rose sharply, penetrating more deeply into inflationary territory in both purchasing managers surveys.

In line with oil price changes, the price index movements have remained volatile. On the manufacturing side, the March price index jumped to 65.5 from 59.0 in February and from 53.0 in January. On a three-month moving average basis, March's annual change was down by 8.5% versus February's 16.8% contraction and January's 23.7% drop.

On the non-manufacturing side, the March prices diffusion index jumped to 63.3 from 53.8 in February and versus 55.2 in January. On a three-month moving average basis, March's annual change was a decline of 12.0%, following respective annual contractions of 16.8% and 18.7% in February and January.

General background note: Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflationary pressure. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising prices.

Oil Prices -- The monthly-average West Texas Intermediate Spot (Department of Energy) rose to $60.56 in March, up from $59.26 per barrel in February and $54.57 in January. Where the March average price was down 3.7% from the year before -- close to February's annual decline of 3.8% -- such was a smaller annual contraction than the 16.7% seen in January. Highly volatile prices continue, with current oil prices currently trading below $64 per barrel and likely to average above March's average level.

Middle Eastern political tensions once again are on the rise. Global political conditions still continue to favor a sharp spike in oil prices in the months ahead, irrespective of any ongoing games playing by the Administration and OPEC. Overhanging the market remains the potential for a change in the dollar-based pricing of oil. Dollar weakness has started to resurface coincidentally with the circumstances in Iran and North Korea heating up.

As noted in earlier newsletters, where dollar weakness is the equivalent of an oil price cut for oil purchasers denominated in an appreciating currency, market forces tend to push dollar-based oil prices higher, and that exacerbates inflation problems in the United States. Even worse, if oil pricing were shifted to something other than the U.S. currency, U.S. inflationary pressures would be even more intense, since any drop in the dollar would be reflected directly as an increase in the price of foreign oil for U.S. consumption.

General background note: Whether from supply and demand, geo-political or currency pressures, oil prices will remain at highly inflationary levels and will continue as a major contributing factor to U.S. inflation woes. Historically high oil prices still are working their way through all levels of U.S. economic activity, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. These broad inflationary pressures will remain intact despite any near-term oil price volatility. Although these pressures may be slow to surface in government reporting of the so-called "core" inflation measures, even the gimmicked core measures have started to show persistently high rates of price increases that should be adding to the distress of the U.S. financial markets. also, as confirmed in recent reporting, downside oil price movements are picked up more quickly and fully by the BLS in its inflation measures than are upside movements. Nonetheless, the general trend in both CPI and PPI reporting -- at both the aggregate and core levels -- will be to the upside through at least the next six months.

Reporting/Market Focus (March 2007) -- Federal Reserve's Flow of Funds and Foreign Holdings of U.S. Treasuries


A key concern for the U.S. financial markets is foreign willingness to continue holding U.S. dollar-denominated assets, particularly U.S. Treasuries, in an environment where most investors and central banks recognize that the dollar broadly is overvalued against most other major Western currencies. The latest flow of funds data are murky in this area, although there is some suggestion that foreign investors consumed a smaller portion of net Treasury issuance in 2006 than was seen in 2004 and 2005.

In recent newsletters, I have raised questions as to the quality of statistical reporting at the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (FRB), separate from the elimination of M3 reporting. In particular, unusual patterns and revisions have shown up in Flow of Funds (FOF) reporting -- accounts that show the sources and uses of cash and credit within the U.S. financial system and economy. Some of these anomalies are explored as they relate to foreign holdings of Treasury securities. The problems, however, are widespread in FOF accounting.

Consider the following example. The FRB's fourth-quarter 2006 FOF report (released March 8, 2007) showed the year-end 2005 level of U.S. Treasuries held by the "Rest of World," or foreign investors, at $1,993.8 billion, versus $1,803.5 billion at year-end 2004, an annual increase of $190.3 billion, using simple arithmetic.

The annual change reported in the flow tables, however, showed an increase of $287.1 billion for year-end 2005 over year-end 2004, a greater increase by $96.8 billion! Similar patterns in are seen in prior years.

In theory, the two approaches should come up with the same amount of change. Indeed with FOF showing the total level of Treasuries (public debt) outstanding increasing from $4,370.7 billion at year-end 2004 to $4,678.0 billion at year-end 2005, both the level differential and the flow number are the same at $307.3 billion. Unlike a number of other FOF accounts, there is no formal "discrepancy" category to balance out otherwise unbalanced bookkeeping. So where is the difference?

A similar analysis of Treasury holdings by U.S. Households shows the year-end 2005 level of $563.4 billion was down by $1.9 billion, but the flows showed an annual decline of $98.8 billion, a direct offset to the "Rest of World" discrepancy.

The FRB was helpful in explaining the matter. There is no error in the reporting, but rather some issues with the underlying source data, which in this case are provided by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), which also publishes the heavily politicized GDP report. Separate data are used for tracking flows and levels, and they do not agree. When the flows are balanced out, all unresolved differences fall into the "Households" account, which is not surveyed separately. As to which numbers best reflect foreign purchases of U.S. Treasuries, the Fed indicated the flows probably were better, while the levels were better in indicating the total amount held by foreign interests.

Accordingly, the two following graphs show alternate realities as reported by the FRB. In the first graph, foreign buying of U.S. Treasuries accounted for 69% of net Treasury issuance in 2003, 96% in 2004, and 93% in 2005 and then dropped back to 77% in 2006. A slowing in foreign purchases of U.S. Treasuries is evident in the "preferred" flow-based numbers. Of course, foreign purchases rose from 62% of net Treasury issuance in 2005, to 77% in 2006 using the difference-in-level approach. The current identical readings for 2006 will disappear when the BEA revises its base data later in the year.

The latest quarterly data are not any more meaningful than the annual tallies. Fourth-quarter 2006 flows, which are seasonally adjusted at an annualized rate, show the Rest of World net acquisition of Treasuries at $279.9 billion or 177.5% of net issuance of $157.7 billion. On the change-in-level basis, where the numbers are not seasonally adjusted, the Rest of World net acquisition of Treasuries was $70.0 billion ($280 billion annualized) or 119.7% of net issuance of $58.5 billion ($234 billion annualized).





Of course, if annual foreign debt holdings really increased by the amounts indicated in the flow-based numbers, then the level data should be higher. The second graph shows the difference starting just with the level reported for year-end 2002. The lower line, which represents reported level, would be the "preferred" Fed approach. The upper line shows the levels implied by adding on the annual flows.

These problems, exacerbated with major discrepancies of a similar nature in other accounts, suggest the FOF numbers have limited meaning and usefulness. Accordingly, we will not provide regular quarterly analyses of the data, except to highlight unusual issues in government reporting or to use a very rough and broad estimate of key numbers.

No Big Deal?! A subscriber brought my attention to a March 26th Reuters story on Fed Chairman Ben Bernanke's comments on how China's accumulation of U.S. debt is not a problem. From a letter to Sen. Richard Shelby of Alabama:

(1) "Because foreign holdings of U.S. Treasury securities represent only a small part of total U.S. credit market debt outstanding, U.S. credit markets should be able to absorb without great difficulty any shift of foreign allocations ..."

(2) "And even if such a shift were to put undesired upward pressure on U.S. interest rates, the Federal Reserve has the capacity to operate in domestic money markets to maintain interest rates at a level consistent with our economic goals ..."

As to point (1), any foreign holdings of U.S. credit market instruments thrown into the U.S. market are on the margin, and represent two full years of regular credit-market borrowing, to the extent the FOF numbers can be believed. Foreign holdings also are not insignificant in the Treasuries' market. Rest of World holdings of U.S. Treasuries likely are somewhere between 44% and 55% of the total, depending on the numbers used, and Communist China purportedly holds somewhere close to half the total of those foreign holdings.

As to point (2), this where the Federal Reserve accelerates monetizing the federal debt and initiating the early phases of the hyperinflation.


Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for April -- Loan Delinquency/Default Rates as Predictors of Business Activity


Troubled economic times usually parallel mounting quality problems with consumer and commercial loans. Historical relationships and the current circumstance will be explored.

___________________________________________


April's "Shadow Government Statistics" newsletter is targeted for release at the end of the month, so as to include the "advance" estimate of first-quarter 2007 GDP due for release on April 27th. Newsletter timing will be refined and announced in intervening Flash Updates. Postings on the Web site of monthly newsletters, interim Flash Updates and Alerts are advised immediately by e-mail. OCCASIONALLY, BRIEF UPDATES ARE COMMUNICATED BY E-MAIL. IF YOU ARE NOT RECEIVING E-MAIL COMMUNICATIONS FROM US, PLEASE LET US KNOW by using the Contact Form on www.shadowstats.com.

Flash Alert

Tuesday, April 3rd, 2007
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

April 3, 2007

__________

Inflationary Recession Continues to Deepen

Retail Sales Running About 0.8% Lower in Revision

Negligible "Final" GDP Revision Indicates Pending Major Downside Annual Revision

__________


NOTE ON UPDATED NEWSLETTER TIMING: The March Shadow Government Statistics Newsletter will be published in the week ahead, along with the third installment on hyperinflation. Today's quick update is intended to reconfirm the general outlook and to touch upon the GDP and retail sales revisions of last week. I apologize for the unexpected delay in the monthly missive. The April newsletter is targeted for month end. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

March Jobs Data Should be Soft


The inflationary recession continues to deepen, with economic reporting generally surprising markets on the downside of expectations and inflation surprising markets on the upside. Last week, Fed Chairman Bernanke felt it necessary to clarify that the Fed still has a problem with inflation, despite slowing business activity. Inflation concerns have not been helped by mounting tensions in the Middle East or by rising oil and gasoline prices.

In combination, the contraction in manufacturing jobs shown in the March purchasing managers survey, plus increasing jobless claims, are consistent with a weaker-than-expected employment report for March, due for release on Friday.

Last week's Flash Update predicted a downward revision to GDP growth in the "final" fourth-quarter estimate, based on recent major downward revisions to industrial production and new home sales in the quarter, as well as a likely downward revision to retail sales in the pending benchmark revision. Instead, the GDP revision was little more than the statistical noise normally seen in the third estimate of a quarter's growth, with "preliminary" annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) GDP growth revising from 2.22% to 2.45%. The straight upward revision of 0.06% -- before the magic of annualization -- was small enough to leave the year-to-year growth rate unrevised at 3.1%.

Even so, last week's annual benchmark revision to retail sales did show lower historical growth than previously published. For 2006, for example, the level of sales was reduced by 0.8% from prior reporting, the equivalent of roughly 0.3% in annual GDP growth.

The impact of related series revisions to GDP now has been relegated to the regular mid-year annual GDP benchmark revision. The potential for meaningful downside revisions to recently reported GDP growth is in place

Further details will follow in the newsletter.

___________________________________________


March's "Shadow Government Statistics" should be posted within a week.

Flash Update

Tuesday, March 27th, 2007
__________

Major Revisions to Housing, Retail Sales and Production Promise Lower GDP Growth

__________


The March SGS Newsletter will be published in the next several days, with timing complicated a bit by travel. Its posting will be advised by e-mail. Since the newsletter will not be out before the GDP's "final" release for the fourth quarter, on Thursday, March 29th, this update is intended to review the outlook for the GDP revision in light of recent revisions to underlying data. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams


Fourth-Quarter GDP Subject to Further Downward Revision


Where the annualized quarterly fourth-quarter GDP inflation-adjusted growth rate revised from 3.5% in its "advance" reporting, to 2.2% in its "preliminary" reporting, further downward revision is likely in Thursday's "final" reporting, due to significant revisions in underlying economic series. Usually, third GDP revision is just statistical noise, and the markets appear to be expecting no net revision at present.

Yesterday's revisions to new home sales in the fourth quarter were extraordinarily large. What had been annualized quarterly growth of 13.5% versus the third quarter, revised to a 2.6% contraction. While currently reported fourth-quarter GDP already shows a contraction in residential investment, these numbers suggest an even greater contraction is likely to be reported in the upcoming GDP revision.

As noted in last week's Flash Update, the most recent monthly revisions to fourth-quarter industrial production left that quarter's seasonally-adjusted annualized quarterly contraction at 1.25%, a deeper tumble than the 0.78% reported the prior month.

Further complicating available data, March 29th sees the publication of the annual benchmark revision to retail sales. Historical sales likely will be revised to lower levels than previously reported and would be available for inclusion in the upcoming GDP revision.

While the impact of the above mentioned series on GDP reporting could be delayed until the mid-year annual GDP benchmark revision, and while this is the most heavily politicized of the major economic series, odds favor some of effects of the underlying revisions to bring in a noticeable downside revision to the fourth-quarter GDP growth rate, rather than the no revision looked for by consensus forecasts. When the annual GDP benchmark revision is published, the quarterly GDP could be reported in contraction.

Details on the GDP reporting will follow in the newsletter.

___________________________________________


March's "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter will be posted by early next week at the latest.

Flash Update

Sunday, March 18th, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - Mar. 18, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

March 18, 2007

__________

Resurging Inflation Again Sinks Real Retail Sales

__________


The March SGS Newsletter is targeted for Monday 26th. The SGS Alternate Data tab (www.shadowstats.com) has been updated for the SGS Alternate Consumer Price Measure for February 2007, while Continuing M3 has been revised for February, based on data for the full month. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams


Inflationary Recession Intensifies


In advance of next week's newsletter, last week's CPI, PPI, retail sales and industrial production releases added some new detail to the continuing deterioration in current economic and inflation conditions. Indeed, as the markets may be beginning to understand, a weak economy and rising inflation can happen together.

Inflation Surge. Surprising the markets on the upside, the producer price index (PPI) rose a seasonally-adjusted 1.3% (1.1% unadjusted) in February after a 0.6% drop (0.8% gain unadjusted) in January. Annual PPI inflation rose to 2.5% in February from 0.2% in January. Intermediate and crude goods rose 1.1% and 8.9% respectively for the month of February.

Also surprising the markets, seasonally-adjusted consumer price index (CPI-U) gained 0.4% (0.5% unadjusted) in February, following a 0.2% (0.3% unadjusted) increase in January. Annual CPI inflation rose to 2.4% in February from 2.1% in January. Annual inflation in the Chain-Weighted CPI-U (C-CPI-U) rose to 2.2% in February from 1.9% in January.

Net of methodological gimmicks that have been used in recent decades to dampen the reporting of inflation, February's Pre-Clinton CPI annual inflation (based on 1990 methodology) was 5.7%, while the SGS Alternate Consumer Price Measure (based on 1980 methodology) was 10.0%.

Troubled Retail and Production Statistics. While seasonally-adjusted industrial production rose by 1.0% in February, following a 0.3% contraction in January (previously reported as a 0.5% contraction), the monthly numbers continued gyrating in the aftershocks of the unusual weather of the last three months. February utility usage surged by 6.7% in the month, for example, which should have been close to zero if the weather and seasonal adjustments were moving in tandem. With similar distortion, annual growth as of February rose to 3.4% from 2.7% in January.

More importantly, revisions to fourth-quarter industrial production now leave that quarter's seasonally-adjusted annualized quarterly contraction at 1.25%, a deeper tumble than the 0.78% reported last month, and suggestive of some further downside revision to fourth-quarter GDP in the upcoming "final" estimate.

Seasonally-adjusted retail sales rose by 0.1% in February (zero growth net of revisions), following zero growth in January. With CPI up by 0.4% in February and by 0.2% in January, 2007 has started off with negative real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales growth. Net of inflation, first-quarter retail sales are on track to show a quarterly real contraction, an event rarely seen outside of recession. Net of inflation, annual growth in February retail sales was 0.8%, against 0.1% in January (annual real growth below 1.8% is a recession indicator).

Further details follow in the next newsletter.

___________________________________________


March's "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter is targeted for publication by Monday, March 26th.

Flash Update

Sunday, March 11th, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - Mar. 11, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

March 11, 2007

__________

Likely Reality in Troubled Economic Data: February Payrolls Contracted January Trade Deficit Did Not Shrink

February M3 Annual Growth at 10.9%

__________


The SGS Alternate Data page for Continuing M3 has been updated for February 2007, based on data for the four weeks ended February 27/28. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams


Data Quality Deterioration Deepens


With financial-market speculation moving back to a "recession or growth" focus, poor-quality reporting of heavily followed economic data does a disservice to the investing public. This is particularly true when Wall Street hypesters weave related stories that have little relationship to reality, but that happen to help sell certain financial products. The government would do well to delay its publication schedule by a full month for key economic data that usually suffer heavy revision. In the trade-off between quality and timeliness of reporting, little would be lost, since first estimates of the payroll and GDP data, for example, usually are worthless.

As to underlying reality, the economy remains in a deepening recession, inflation is not under control, and the potential for a massive dollar sell-off leaves the traditional U.S. financial markets vulnerable to disorderly and negative trading. Key economic releases of the last week have not been inconsistent with this outlook.

Monthly February Payrolls Likely Contracted. Seasonally-adjusted February payroll employment was reported up by 97,000 +/- 129,000, a change that was statistically indistinguishable from a contraction. The February gain followed a revised January gain of 146,000 that initially had been reported at 111,000. Annual growth in February slowed meaningfully to 1.49% from 1.67% in January.

Despite the massive benchmark revisions and corrections to prior data published last month, the Bureau of Labor Statistics continued with major upward revisions to previously published data, with the February jobs gain at 152,000 net of those adjustments. Nonetheless, the monthly February data were weak enough suggest a monthly contraction.

Year-to-year change in the monthly data should be the same on both a seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted basis, but such was not the case in February. Using the unadjusted annual growth rates, the consistent seasonally-adjusted monthly February payroll gain was just 67,000 +/- 129,000.

Considering (1) that the jobs number was boosted by a positive swing of 293,000 jobs in the monthly fudge or bias factor (now called the birth-death adjustment, which overestimates employment growth during recessions); (2) that the household survey showed a monthly employment contraction of 152,000; and (3) that annual change in the 17-week moving average of new jobless claims as of March 3rd was up 5.9% (positive change here is an economic negative) against 3.9% just three weeks before, and the four-week moving average is up 10.8% year-to-year; odds favor the +/- 129,000 margin of error taking February monthly jobs change reality into a contraction.

Also from the household survey, the seasonally-adjusted February U.3 unemployment rate reportedly narrowed to 4.49% +/- 0.23% from 4.59% in January, a change that was statistically indistinguishable from an increase in the unemployment rate. On an unadjusted basis, U.3 narrowed to 4.9% in February from January's 5.0%. The broader U.6 rate on an unadjusted basis fell to 8.7% in February from 9.1% in January, the seasonally-adjusted U.6 rate declined to 8.1% from 8.3%. Net of "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment continues to run about 12%.

Oil Price Reporting Shenanigans Distort Trade Data. The seasonally-adjusted monthly trade deficit for January 2007 was reported at $59.2 billion, down from $61.5 billion in December (previously reported as $61.2 billion). For all of 2006, the annual deficit revised to $765.3 billion, from initial reporting of $763.6 billion, up from $716.6 billion in 2005. The handling of reported oil imports and related pricing, however, has resulted in distortions to reporting of the 2006 trade deficit, the purported January deficit and related GDP measures.

The Bureau of Economic Analysis/Census Bureau release shows seasonally-unadjusted crude oil imports up by 6.3% year-to-year in January, 5.7% attributable to physical oil import volume and 0.6% attributable to higher oil prices. Somehow, that translated to a seasonally-adjusted annual contraction of 1.9% in the aggregate trade statistics for petroleum products, before adjustment for inflation and to a 1.3% gain after inflation adjustment. That could happen only with a 3.2% drop in prices used in the deflation process, not the 0.6% gain shown in the raw data.

The difference is that with the year-to-year oil imports handled on a consistent basis, petroleum imports would have been higher in January by about $2.1 billion, which would have taken the total monthly January deficit to $61.3 billion, virtually unchanged versus $61.5 billion in December.

The oil-pricing distortions are much more severe, however, where the full extent of the increase in oil prices during the last two years never made it into the imported-oil pricing. For example, January 2006 oil averaged $51.93 per barrel in the trade data versus a market average of $65.10. In January 2007, the trade data oil was at $52.23, against a market average of $54.57. This circumstance suggests that the 2006 trade deficit is understated sharply and that the corresponding 2006 GDP is overstated.

Continuing M3 Annual Growth at 10.9% in February. The year-to-year change in the SGS estimation of Continuing M3 backed off slightly to 10.9% in February from 11.0% in January, with M3 up more than $1.1 trillion in the last twelve months. The minor annual slowing in growth was due to a relative surge in the year-ago number, as opposed to any slackening of the month-to-month pace of growth in February. The pace of annual M3 growth is high enough that it normally would be exacerbating financial-market inflations concerns, if the Fed still reported the series.

Further details follow in the next newsletter.

___________________________________________


March's "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter is targeted for late in the week of March 19th.

Flash Update

Sunday, March 4th, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - Mar. 4, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

March 4, 2007

__________

Recession Continues to Barrel Along

Market Disquiet Mounts As "Nesting Season" Nears

__________


The SGS Alternate Data pages for the CPI, GDP and U.S. Dollar have been updated. The CPI tables now include monthly index levels for the SGS-Alternate Consumer Price Measure (please see comments in the Inflation section below). -- Best wishes to all, John Williams


Deepening Recession Helps Trigger Greenspan Waffle and Market Wobble


When consensus economic forecasters start to talk of recession, usually a downturn has become a certainty, with economic activity already having contracted for at least six-months to a year. Wall Street economists, and Administration and Federal Reserve officials, typically are the last to talk of the politically unthinkable, for fear of negative reactions they might trigger in the financial markets. The game is afoot.

Prior to his extended stint as head of the U.S. central bank, Alan Greenspan was noted more for his political skills than his ability as an economic forecaster. Nonetheless, in retirement, he has moved back into the consensus economic forecaster field. In an unusually bold move last Monday, the former Fed Chairman opined that a U.S. recession was possible by year-end 2007. After some ensuing stock-market turmoil, Greenspan hedged that he did not think a recession was "probable."

That said, the panic that hit the U.S. stock market on Tuesday afternoon has not been explained satisfactorily. Granted that the Dow Jones Industrial Average had suffered early Tuesday from the heavy selling in Asia and perhaps from Greenspan's comments or the weak durable goods orders, but that all was old news by the time of the market disruption. With no proximal news accompanying the heavy, panicked selling, the late-afternoon incident gave the impression of someone having major liquidity problems.

On Wednesday, Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke assured Congress that the President's Working Group on Financial Markets (a.k.a. the "Plunge Protection Team") was on the job. Accordingly, some of the positive market pressures seen at various times from late Tuesday through Friday most likely were at least partially orchestrated by those protectors of financial-market stability.

With the DJIA down 533 points for the week, Treasury-note yields eased slightly, as did the U.S. dollar, particularly against the Japanese yen. Oil prices generally firmed, while the price of gold was down.

In contrast, massive stock selling -- driven by dollar dumping and accompanied by soaring gold prices -- would not be as easy for the Plunge Protection Team to contain. Last week's events, however, appear to have rattled stock-market confidence, and with fundamentals favoring an eventual dollar-driven sell-off, risks of disorderly markets have increased markedly.

Stock market crashes rarely, if ever, happen at historic highs. Instead, the major panics -- such as seen in 1929 and 1987 -- followed market peaks by a month or two with mounting selling pressures. As noted in earlier newsletters, some years back, I retained the services of a mass psychologist in an effort to explain why October/November seemed to be the favored season for stock market crashes. His explanation was that humans have a vestigial squirreling instinct that kicks in as winter nears. He also noted that a vestigial nesting instinct kicked in at a six-month offset to the squirreling season -- in the April/May timeframe -- when the markets also would be more vulnerable to panics.

Unusual Weather Patterns Still Playing Out in Data. Economic reports of the last week or so generally have shown a deepening recession, but there have been some indicators still fluttering from the impact of unusual weather patterns and related poor-quality seasonal adjustments.

For example, on the heels of the devastating January housing starts data, seasonally-adjusted January new home sales plunged by 16.6% for the month and by 20.1% year-to-year. Seasonally-adjusted existing home sales in January, however, rose by 3.0% for the month, but still were down 4.3% for the year. Since new home sales data are based on contract signings, where existing home sales data are based on closings, the latter series still is working on activity from December 2006.

Also mixed were consumer confidence measures. The Conference Board's February consumer confidence gained 2.1% month-to-month, while the University of Michigan's consumer sentiment fell by 5.8%. The Conference Board measure is seasonally adjusted, which does not make much sense and is of suspect purpose, given that the Conference Board does not release the unadjusted number. The Michigan survey is unadjusted. How does one seasonally-adjust peoples' attitudes?

It's like the old story of three government statisticians who went deer hunting. The first shoots at a buck and misses him to the left. The second shoots but misses by a like amount to the right. The third statistician works on his calculator for a minute and, then, instead of shooting, jumps up and down in jubilation, shouting, "Hey, seasonally adjusted, we got him!"

Although the manufacturing purchasing managers survey bounced above 50.0 (recession/expansion dividing line) in February, along with its employment measure, seasonal distortions also appear to be at work. The prices paid component, which is not seasonally adjusted, surged from 53.0 to 59.0.

On the employment front, help-wanted advertising fell to 32 in January from an upwardly revised 34 (was 33) in December. The January number was down 15.8% from the year before. Even so, this series seems to have been distorted to the upside by the weather abnormalities. Also, year-to-year, unemployment claims have continued to soar in recent weeks, an economic negative.

February's employment report (due Friday, March 9th) is at risk of showing weaker jobs growth and higher unemployment than suggested by already tepid consensus forecasts. Reflecting a deepening recession, monthly payrolls shortly should begin contracting month-to-month.

Seasonally-adjusted new orders for durable goods fell by 7.8% (8.1% net of revisions) in January, following a 2.8% gain in December. Year-to-year change was 4.0%. Nondefense capital goods contracted by 19.9% for the month, following a 10.5% gain in December, with annual growth at 0.8%. Although these series are highly volatile on a monthly basis, they are nearing an overall recession signal, which will be discussed in the next newsletter.

Finally, the "preliminary" estimate revision to the seasonally-adjusted, annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) growth in fourth-quarter GDP was revised to 2.22% +/- 3% (statistically indistinguishable from a contraction for the third consecutive quarter) from the "advance" estimate of 3.47%. Annual growth, measured fourth quarter to fourth quarter, was 3.07% (revised from 3.38%) and now is lower than the 3.15% seen in fourth-quarter 2005. In terms of annual average GDP growth, 2006 now stands at 3.30% (revised from 3.38%) versus 3.22% in 2005.

Although the downside revision was unusually large, the numbers remain of such poor quality as to be meaningless. The growth patterns, however, remain weak enough to allow for subsequent annual benchmark revisions to show a recession in place as of the second quarter of 2006. The SGS-Alternate GDP now is estimated as showing an annual real contraction of 1.5% in the fourth quarter versus a similar 1.5% in the third quarter.

The official GDP estimates for the fourth quarter still are too crude for the Bureau of Economic Analysis to estimate gross national product (GNP) or gross domestic income (GDI) growth rates for the fourth quarter.

Inflation. The seasonally-adjusted January CPI was reported up by roughly 0.2% (0.3% unadjusted), with annual inflation at roughly 2.1% versus 2.5% in December. While the Bureau of Labor Statistics went to three decimal points with the new index-level reporting, it did not restate any prior periods on the same basis, where index levels were rounded to the nearest decimal point. As a result, annual growth rates will be less precise or consistent until the BLS gets around to reporting January 2008 data. Distressing to the inflation gimmickers, the annual "core" CPI rate rose to 2.7% from 2.6% in December.

Annual inflation for the Chain Weighted CPI-U was 1.9% in January, versus 2.4% in December.

Annual inflation reflected in January's personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflation measure was 2.0%, versus 2.3% in December, while the "core" PCE was 2.3% in January, versus 2.2% in December. Again, the "core"-number concept has started to backfire.

Adjusted for all the methodological gimmicks since 1980, the SGS-Alternate Consumer Price Measure shows annual inflation at 9.9%, down from 10.0% in December.

A Note on Alternate CPI Index Levels The levels posted for the SGS Alternate Consumer Price Measure on the Alternate Data tab are not seasonally adjusted, and there is no plan to adjust them. Like consumer confidence, prices are what they are. Inflation is viewed most meaningfully on a year-to-year basis, instead of dealing with a heavily-massaged, seasonally-adjusted monthly number. While there are some seasonal variations, such as companies tending to raise prices effective January 1st, or the Bureau of Labor Statistics usually implementing methodological changes in January, most uses of the CPI measure are based on the not-seasonally-adjusted year-to-year change.

Further details follow in the next newsletter.

___________________________________________


March's "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter is targeted for the week of March 19th.

January/February 2007 Edition

Tuesday, February 20th, 2007
JWSGS - JANUARY/FEBRUARY 2007 EDITION - Feb. 20, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Issue Number 27 & 28

February 20, 2007

__________

Economic Activity in Rapid Decline as Miracle Recovery Fades

Central Bank Dollar Holdings Exacerbate Hyperinflation Risk

Stock Market Euphoria Misses Economic/Political Realities

Dollar Sell-Off, Gold Boom Lie Ahead



__________


A standard monthly recapitulation of the full, broad economic and financial-market outlook, based on the current and prior newsletters, will be constructed for next month's newsletter. Once set, any monthly changes to that text will be highlighted so that regular readers may avoid re-reading material they have seen before, but they will have the material available for reference, if so desired. This SGS newsletter was put to bed before the release of the January CPI release on February 21st -- John Williams


OVERVIEW -- OPENING COMMENTS


An upside blip in economic reporting from unseasonably good weather spiked some December economic data, and market expectations for the economy soared. The U.S. economy, however, does not turn quickly without warning, and early January data showed the recession not only to be very much in place, but also to be deepening rapidly. Although inflation will continue to rise without a further oil price spike, sudden indications of renewed possible terrorist attacks and rumblings of a possible U.S. attack on Iran hold the potential for a rekindled surge in oil prices. Under these circumstances, the U.S. financial markets remain in peril, with higher interest rates, lower equity prices, heavy dollar selling and significant gold buying on the horizon.

Confirming the recession, much weaker than expected growth surfaced in the most recent reporting of housing starts, retail sales, industrial production, the purchasing managers manufacturing survey, annual growth in durable goods orders, new claims for unemployment insurance, and employment. Conditions in the labor and the nature of the benchmark revisions to payroll employment are explored in this month's Reporting/Market Focus.

All the key SGS leading indicators have generated recession signals in the last year and a half, and those signals now all are deepening as the downturn accelerates. Industrial production appears ready to join the group as a coincident indicator.

With President Bush's positive ratings sinking to the lowest level ever seen in the history of such polling, which started after World War II, the Administration has been trying to push its economic "successes" as an offset to rising public discomfort with the Iraq War.

On the plus side for the economy, shortly following the President's economic good news blitz, was an unbelievable upturn reported for fourth-quarter GDP growth. The growth was dominated by a bogus trade deficit improvement that since has been discredited by a surge in the December trade deficit.

Some other headlines came out of the GDP/income reporting as to the personal saving rate falling to its lowest level since the depths of the Great Depression. While that undoubtedly is the circumstance, the GDP report is of such poor quality that it cannot be relied upon to tell the story.

Inflation reporting rebounded in December, but it likely will see softer annual inflation in January, thanks to continued swings in oil prices. Nonetheless, the outlook for inflation is for a significant upswing in the months ahead, regaining last year's annual inflation highs by mid-year, irrespective of any further upside movement in oil prices.

Helping to fuel price inflation is the rising growth in the broadest money supply measure, M3, which by our reckoning now is at a five-year high of 11.0%. A looming sell-off in the dollar also will tend to spike prices, in addition to the long-term effects of high oil prices that still are surfacing in higher prices for an increasing number of goods and services.

In some form of political accommodation with United States, the Saudis recently have put forth a variety of statements on oil production and the oil markets that clearly have been intended to dampen oil prices. At the same time, the U.S. has been putting forth a number of stories on the Iranian nuclear program and on Iranian involvement against U.S. troops in Iraq. These stories are unsubtle suggestions that some form of U.S. attack on Iran could be near. In the last several days, stories also have surfaced of Al Qaida regaining control of its network. Whatever is in the works likely is not going to be good news for those rooting for lower prices and lower inflation.

The combination of a contracting economy and rising inflation have the Fed uncomfortable, and there is little the U.S. central bank can do to alleviate the situation, as discussed in this month's Markets Perspective.

Reported Annual Trade Deficit at Record. Unfortunately, the quality of reporting for the U.S. trade deficit is of increasingly suspect quality. The December report included the annual numbers for 2006, where the total deficit for goods and services hit a record $763.6 billion, up from $716.7 billion in 2005 and $611.3 billion in 2004. Of the 2006 total, a goods deficit of $836.1 billion partially was offset by a $72.5 billion surplus in services.




One problem with the numbers is that the services surplus is just a plug guesstimate -- with no hard numbers behind it -- unlike the goods deficit, which has a significant paper trail. As shown in the graphs above, the services surplus started to take off in mid-2004 and has been softening the blow of the widening goods deficit ever since. Its primary use is as a reporting gimmick. Consider, for example, when the Department of Commerce publishes the U.S. trade balance by region, it does so only for goods. The services numbers are not real.

On a goods only basis, the 2006 deficit widened to $818.1 billion from $787.5 billion in 2005. The largest component of that was with Communist China, with a 2006 deficit of $232.5 billion versus a $201.5 billion deficit in 2005.

Red China sits with an increasing stockpile of U.S. dollar reserves, while its relationship with the United States turns increasingly adversarial. Such does not hold out positive prospects for the U.S. dollar.

In another trade coup, the U.S. trade deficit with NAFTA widened in 2006 to $136.9 billion, versus $128.9 billion in 2005. The deficit deterioration was due to a surging deficit with Mexico, which increased to $64.1 billion in 2006 from $49.7 billion the year before. The deficit with Canada actually narrowed.

The trade deficit with OPEC widened to $104.9 billion in 2006, versus $92.9 billion in 2005.

The deficit with Japan increased to $88.4 billion in 2006, versus $82.5 billion in 2005.

Shy of trade swings tied to big oil price changes, the overall trade picture remained bleak in 2006, with the U.S. showing only a limited number of small surpluses in global trade. This is one of the key structural economic problems facing the United States.

A Dumbed-Down Public and Interest Rate Options. A systemic problem in the United States that partially accounts for the particularly low quality of most politicians elected to national office, and for the sometimes blind public and financial-media acceptance of Wall Street hype, has been the dumbing-down of the U.S. public in the post-World War II era.

While being interviewed for a network nightly news program ten years ago, I was cautioned that the language used for broadcast was aimed at the intellect of a 10-year old. Recently, I was similarly advised by a different national network news program that my language should be suitable for a fourth grader (9-year old). Consider that those who watch the national evening news programs likely are better educated than average.

What triggers the above comments is the inability of the popular financial media to consider more than two interest rate circumstances. In the first case, the economy is strong, and inflationary pressures mean the Fed will have to tighten in order to fight rising prices. In the second case, the economy is weak, and inflation will not be a problem, so the Fed has to ease so as to stimulate the economy.

Aside from the painful reality that the U.S. central bank currently has no ability either to fight inflation or to stimulate the economy, such thinking does not allow for the current circumstance of a slowing/recessionary economy with inflation and currency problems. This thinking also explains some wild mood swings in the markets from a little weather distortion in economic statistics.

Raising rates to tame inflation works when prices are being driven higher by strong demand. In the current circumstance, however, inflation is being driven by non-demand factors spiking oil prices and increasingly will be fueled by a weakening dollar. In an environment where the economy is in a long-term structural contraction, where lack of adequate real (inflation-adjusted) income growth is acting as a major constraint on personal consumption, no amount of easing or money supply expansion can produce sustainable economic growth.

The Fed continues to salve the markets with platitudes and varying stories on contained inflation and stable business conditions, which are aimed at avoiding the looming financial-market meltdown. Once U.S. dollar selling begins in earnest, though, the Fed will have little choice but to "tighten" -- at least briefly -- in defense of the dollar. Unlike the 1987 financial panic, when the Fed abandoned the greenback's defense in order to salvage the U.S. stock market, no one, including Mr. Bernanke has had do deal with a U.S. recession unfolding in an environment where the financial markets are so heavily dependent on foreign capital for liquidity.

While the standard two interest rate scenarios are nice fodder for a gullible public, the Federal Reserve's next rate action likely will be a rate hike in defense of the dollar, even though U.S. economic growth will be tanking.

Alternate Realities. This section updates the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting. When a government economic measure does not match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Federal Reserve, White House and Wall Street.

Effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan-Era GDP. The methodologies for the series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS (see Archives page at www.shadowstats.com).

GDP. The alternate fourth-quarter GDP growth reflects the "advance" estimate revision, with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate fourth-quarter inflation-adjusted annual growth rate (year-to-year, as opposed to the popularly-touted annualized quarter-to-quarter rate) for GDP was a decline of roughly 1.4% versus the official 3.4% gain.



[Note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com.]

Please note that the Alternate GDP numbers tend to show deeper and more protracted recessions than have been formally reported or reflected in related official reporting. Nonetheless, the patterns shown in the alternate data are broadly consistent with the payroll employment and industrial production series (as revised), which are major indicators used by the National Bureau of Economic Research in determining the official timing of U.S. business cycles.

CPI. The gimmicked annual core inflation held even in December, as regular inflation reporting continued to rebound. Oil prices remain high, and despite recent downside oil price volatility, higher energy and material costs continue permeating broad economic activity. Both core and regular inflation reporting annual should trend higher in the months ahead, despite any short-term swings in upcoming the January annual data.

                          Eight Levels of Inflation
               Annual Inflation for October to December 2006


2006 Measure Oct Nov Dec Avg I.1 Core PCE Deflator 2.4% 2.2% 2.2% 2.2% I.2 Core Chained-CPI-U 2.5% 2.3% 2.3% 2.3% I.3 Core CPI-U 2.7% 2.6% 2.6% 2.5% I.4 PCE Deflator 1.5% 1.9% 2.3% 2.8% I.5 Chained-CPI-U 1.6% 1.9% 2.4% 2.9% I.6 CPI-U 1.3% 2.0% 2.5% 3.2% I.7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U 4.7% 5.4% 5.8% 6.4% I.8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation 8.9% 9.4% 10.0% 10.2%

Notes: I.1 to I.3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively, of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U. I.4 to I.6 are the same measures with energy and food inflation included. The CPI-U (I.6) is the measure popularly followed by the financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation. I.7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre- Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top series in the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com. I.8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which reverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so, plus an adjustment for the Clinton-Era geometric weighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic bookkeeping.




[Note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com.]


How Hyperinflationary Depression Could Break and Hedging Against Same


This is the second in a series of articles on the greatest threat facing the U.S. economy and financial markets: hyperinflationary depression. Last month's SGS explored why the system faces hyperinflation instead of deflation. The current SGS looks at how the crisis could break and explores approaches to preserving wealth and assets in the turbulent times ahead. The next SGS will discuss business operations in, and day-to-day living with, hyperinflation.

The economic downturn already underway in the United States is an inflationary recession that could evolve into a hyperinflationary depression by the end of the decade.

In terms of hyperinflation, the circumstance envisioned is not one of double- or triple- digit inflation, but more along the lines of seven to 10 digit inflation seen in other circumstances during the last century. Under these circumstances, the currency becomes worthless, as seen in Germany (Weimar Republic) in the early 1920s, in Hungary after World War II and in the dismembered Yugoslavia of the early 1990s

The historical culprit generally has been massive printing of currency that the involved government needed to support its system, when it did not have the ability to raise the money through taxes or other means.

In the United States, the printing presses have not been revved up heavily, yet, but the commitments are in place, as seen in the annual GAAP-based deficit for 2006 of $4.6 trillion, up from $3.5 trillion in 2005 (see the December 2006 SGS Reporting/Market Focus). That amount is far beyond the ability of the government to tax and is increasing sharply each year. While the inevitable inflationary collapse based solely on these funding needs could be pushed well into the next decade, actions already taken may have set the stage for an earlier crisis.

Efforts at buying time have made the circumstance worse. By pushing recent Treasury funding needs on foreign investors -- stuck with excess dollars from the ever-expanding U.S. trade deficit -- has created a huge dollar overhang in the markets. The more the crisis has been pushed into the future, the greater the potential for pending calamity has become.

Milton Friedman and Anna Jacobson Schwartz noted in their classic A Monetary History of the United States that the early stages of the Weimar Republic hyperinflation was accompanied by a huge influx of foreign capital, much as had happened during the U.S. Civil War. The speculative influx of capital into the U.S. at the time of the Civil War inflation helped to stabilize the system, as the recent foreign capital influx to the United States has helped stabilize the equity and credit markets of recent years. Following the Civil War, however, the underlying economy had significant untapped potential and was able to generate strong, real economic activity that covered the spending excesses of the war.

Post-World War I Germany was a different matter, where the country was financially and economically depleted as a penalty for losing the war. Here, after initial benefit, the influx of foreign capital helped to destabilize the system. "As the mark depreciated, foreigners at first were persuaded that it would subsequently appreciate and so bought a large volume of mark assets ..." Such boosted the foreign exchange value of the German mark and the value of German assets. "As the German inflation went on, expectations were reversed, the inflow of capital was replaced by an outflow, and the mark depreciated more rapidly ... (Friedman p. 76)."

The Weimar circumstance is closer to the current U.S. circumstance, although, in certain aspects, the current situation is worse. Unlike the untapped economic potential of the United States 140 years ago, today's U.S. economy is languishing in the structural problems of the loss of its manufacturing base and a shift of domestic wealth offshore.

In the early 1920s, foreign investors were not propping up the world's reserve currency in an effort to prevent a global financial collapse, knowing in advance that they were doomed to take a large hit on their investments in Germany. In today's environment, both central bank and major private investors know that the dollar is going to be a losing proposition. They either expect and/or hope that they can get out of the dollar in time to lock in their profits, or, primarily in the case of the central banks, that they can forestall the ultimate global economic crisis.

It is this environment that leaves the U.S. dollar open to potentially such a rapid and massive decline, and dumping of U.S. Treasuries, that the Federal Reserve would be forced to monetize significant sums of Treasury debt, triggering the early phases of a monetary inflation. In this environment annual multi-trillion dollar deficits rapidly would feed into a vicious, self-feeding cycle of currency debasement and hyperinflation.

In such a circumstance, gold would be a primary hedging tool that would retain real value and also be portable in the event of possible civil turmoil. Real estate also would provide a basic hedge, but would lack the portability and liquidity of gold. Having some funds invested offshore would be a plus in circumstances where the government might impose currency or capital controls.

From the standpoint of day-to-day survival, something of a barter system likely would develop, where items such as cases of scotch might hold particular value.

This whole area will be explored in greater depth in next month's newsletter.


MARKETS PERSPECTIVE


Market expectations on future Fed policy have changed twice, so far this year, as unusual weather patterns bloated indications of December business activity, alleviating rapidly building recession concerns. Those concerns returned quickly, though, as January data more than reversed the earlier misleading happy story of some of December's numbers. We still look for the Fed's next action to be an increase in short-term interest rates aimed at stabilizing the U.S. currency.

The U.S. economy remains in a severe, structural inflationary recession, saddled with an impotent Fed and a federal government that is fiscally bankrupt in all but name. In combination, these factors offer the worst of all environments to the financial markets. Ahead lie higher long-term interest rates and much lower U.S. equity prices. On the plus side is the outlook for gold, which provides a solid hedge against many of the problems that have started to surface. Key to the near-term movements of these markets remains the fate of the U.S. dollar.

The fundamentals stacked against the greenback have never been worse. When the dollar dumping begins, the other markets will be put in play in a manner that eventually will shake the foundations of the global financial system.

U.S. Equities -- The various stock market indices remain far removed from underlying reality, with the Dow Jones Industrial Average (DJIA) regularly pushing on to a new historic highs. Threats to the current market's euphoria remain in the unfolding recession, higher interest rates and heavy dollar selling.

That the stock market is so irrational is not unusual. What is unusual is the severity of the negative underlying fundamentals. I continue to expect the major indices to suffer heavy selling and large declines before year-end 2007. A fair-market value for the DJIA based on historical price/earnings norms and current circumstances would be around 8,500, down about a third from its current level. Of course, a market in heavy sell-off rarely stops at fair value.

U.S. Credit Market -- Long-term interest rates tended to gyrate 10 to 20 basis points around the economic recovery/renewed recession outlook speculation of the last month or so, but the yield curve on Treasuries remained inverted throughout, adding some confirmation to our point that the inversion is due more to massive foreign buying of Treasuries in recent years than to recessionary expectations.

Accordingly, the key to a major upside movement in long-term yields remains a highly likely major sell-off in the U.S. dollar. With several Asian central banks suggesting the time to move out of the dollar is it hand, any dumping of foreign U.S. Treasury holdings would have the immediate impact of spiking interest rates, particularly at the long end of the yield curve.

While expectations of the Fed's next action on interest rates may swing wildly with rapidly changing economic expectations, the U.S. dollar's behavior remains the primary concern. The U.S. economic and political systems are in trouble, and that will pressure the greenback to the downside. The Fed's next action still remains a likely spike in interest rates in defense of the dollar.

U.S. Dollar -- As market speculation briefly moved away from a looming U.S. recession, the U.S. dollar rallied some in response. With market speculations on the economy now reversing, slight selling pressure on the U.S. currency has resumed.

The pending major dollar sell-off could hit at any time with no advance warning. It could be triggered by any number of factors ranging from a negative economic report, to a political embarrassment for the Federal Reserve or Administration, to a terrorist attack or even military action against Iran. Whatever the trigger, it is likely to come within the next couple of months. When it comes, broad selling should be heavy enough to overcome short-lived interventions by certain Asian central banks. Central banks outside the U.S. have been holding off liquidating their dollar reserves, though the desire to liquidate is strong. There is mounting risk of some related central bank dollar dumping.

In terms of underlying fundamentals that tend to drive currency trading, the dollar's portfolio could not be worse. Relative to major trading partners, the U.S. economy is much weaker, interest rates are lower, inflation is higher, fiscal conditions are abysmal, and relative political stability is near an all time low. The President's approval rating commonly has moved currency trading in the past. Current conditions are the worst seen in the post-World War II era, compounded by the presence of a Congress to the President.

Generally, the greater the magnitude of the dollar selling, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. capital markets. As shown in the following graph, however, the U.S. dollar moved higher in January, riding out the unseasonably pleasant weather.



[Note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS for methodology.]

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics' Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (FWD) is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For January 2007, the monthly dollar average rose by 1.48%, after a 1.53% decline in December. The January 2007 average index level of 51.71 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 4.50% from January 2006, following an annual rate of decline of 7.55% in December.

Also rebounding, January's monthly average of the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (TWD) rose by 1.82%, after a 0.73% decline in December.

Please note the FRB's TWD has been re-weighted, reducing December's level by 0.1%, from 58.29 to 58.21 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00). The January 2007 monthly average index of 59.27 was down 2.28% from the year before, against December's annual decline of 5.56%.

The stronger performance of the FRB versus the SGS series continues to be due to a much heavier weighting of the Canadian dollar in the TWD versus the FWD. The U.S. dollar has continued to strengthen against its Canadian counterpart.

Gold -- The price of gold has trended higher in recent months, but the precious metal's upside will be almost unbounded as the U.S. dollar tumbles, and certainly as the greenback begins its terminal slide.

Nonetheless, gold price volatility is likely to remain high, particularly with potential central-bank manipulation, including talk of gold sales. Still, central banks know well that they should be increasing their gold holdings, not liquidating them.

As discussed in the ongoing Hyperinflation Series, the eventual complete collapse of the U.S. dollar -- the world's reserve currency -- will force the creation of a new international currency system. Gold likely will be structured into any replacement system in an effort by those organizing the new currency structure to gain public acceptance.




The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show January averages. As we go to press, gold is trading around $660, oil is shy of $60 and the Swiss franc is shy of $0.81. Look for all three measures to trade significantly higher in before mid-year.


REPORTING PERSPECTIVE


The Big Three Market Movers


Recent economic reporting has been distorted by unusual weather conditions in December and early January. As discussed in the Opening Comments, market sentiment turned overnight from an economy headed in into recession to an economy experiencing renewed vigor. The economy's downturn, however, did not change, and perceptions are turning just as quickly back to recession as the distortions reverse in January data. Beyond short-term data disruptions, recent and upcoming releases of the major series are, and likely will be, subject to massaging for both the perceived political needs of the Administration and the financial market needs of the Federal Reserve Board.

Nonetheless, the reality of the deteriorating, underlying inflationary recession once again will surface in the popularly followed economic series. Against lagging and distorted market expectations, most near-term economic reporting will surprise the markets on the downside, while most inflation reporting should surprise the markets on the upside.

Employment/Unemployment -- Employment conditions remain bleak, despite strong upside revisions to payroll levels. This month's Reporting/Market Focus reviews the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) annual benchmark revisions to the payroll survey along with other, more-independent indicators of the labor market. The benchmark revisions highlight the meaninglessness of the monthly payroll reporting, over which Wall Street hyperventilates so regularly. What follows here are the specifics of the December 2006 January 2007 reported monthly results.

The BLS reported seasonally-adjusted January payrolls up by 111,000 (1,044,000 net of revisions -- see Reporting/Market Focus) +/- 129,000, following December's revised gain of 206,000 (previously 167,000). On an unadjusted, year-to-year basis, annual payroll growth slowed sharply in January to 1.61% from 1.70% in December. Please note we now are using the BLS's 95% confidence interval for monthly employment change of +/- 129,000 jobs, instead of the previous 90% confidence interval of +/- 106,000, given the rapidly increasing magnitude of recent revisions, pre-benchmark.

The January 2007 payroll growth included a 175,000 downside bias provided by the net birth/death model. Although the BLS ceased publishing its bias factors for the pre-March 2006 (benchmark month) period, February usually sees the bias factors swing to the upside, and all biases have been upped in response to the benchmark problems. Accordingly, the biases will place upside pressure on February reporting.

The consistency of the household survey, which counts the number of people who have a job, as opposed to the number of jobs counted in the payroll survey, just went through its annual demolition. Due to changes in the assumed U.S. population, all the household data were revamped, but the BLS no longer provides a bridge in the reporting. It does not show what the reporting would have been on a consistent basis.

So, although the household survey reported seasonally-adjusted employment of 145,957,000 in January 2007, whether that was higher or lower than December's 145,926,000, on a consistent basis, is unknown by the public.

Similarly, although the unemployment portion of the household data showed the seasonally-adjusted January U.3 unemployment rate at 4.59% +/- 0.23% (95% confidence interval), one cannot tell if that is higher or lower than December's 4.48%, on a consistent basis. With a like caveat, unadjusted U.3 was 5.0% in January, 4.3% in December. The unadjusted broader U.6 measure was 9.1% in January, 7.8% in December. Adjusted U.6 was 8.3% in January, 8.0% in December. Including the long-term "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton administration, total unemployment remains roughly 12%.

The latest report was against a background of ongoing collapse of annual growth in help-wanted advertising, rapidly intensifying weakness in new claims for unemployment insurance and very weak purchasing managers employment indices (see the respective sections).

Next Release (March 9): The payroll survey should be weaker than expected in February, despite the upside bias swing, along with a rise in the unemployment rate. It will be interesting to see if the massive prior-period upward revisions continue, or if that recent pattern was just a ruse to bloat the base underneath the benchmark revision so as to boost historic jobs creation claims by the Administration. Going forward, payrolls, like production, should begin to show monthly contractions, consistent with the deepening recession.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) -- The "advance" estimate revision of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth for fourth-quarter 2006 was 3.47% +/- 3%, up from the third quarter's 1.96% and the second-quarter's 2.56%, but it was down from the first quarter's 5.58%. Measured fourth-quarter 2006 over fourth-quarter 2005, real growth was 3.38%, up from 3.15% in 2005. For the year of 2006, average real GDP growth also was 3.38%, up from 3.22% in 2005.

With the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) now jiggering the trade data, nearly half the reported fourth-quarter GDP growth was attributable to the supposed narrowing of the inflation-adjusted trade deficit (net exports). Our separate analysis of the data shows a best-case outcome of an unchanged real trade deficit for the quarter, before allowing for the reported "unexpected" sharp deterioration in the December trade deficit. The December trade information was not available when the "advance" estimate was made. Further, government trade calculations in the GDP were aided by seasonal shifts applied only to the constant-dollar trade numbers and by sharp increases in fourth-quarter "residuals," where the proffered data just do not add up.

While the GDP report is the government's broadest estimate of U.S. economic activity, it is also the least meaningful and most heavily massaged of all major government economic series. Primarily it has become a tool for economic propaganda.

Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS Alternate GDP measure suggests economic reality is much weaker than officially reported, with a year-to-year annual contraction of roughly 1.4% for fourth-quarter 2006 GDP, slightly narrowed from the third quarter's 1.5%, and down from a 0.3% decline in fourth-quarter 2005 over fourth-quarter 2004 GDP (see the graph in the Alternate Reality section in the Opening Comments). For the year of 2006, average change in real Alternate SGS GDP was a contraction of 1.1%, versus a 0.5% contraction for 2005.

The GDP inflation rate (deflator) in the fourth quarter fell to 1.54%, versus 1.88% in the third quarter. Such reflects the violent moves in oil prices, and actually was more realistic for once than the CPI's annualized 0.79% quarterly contraction.

The "advance" release is too much of a guesstimate for the BEA even to try to guess the alternate GDP measures: the broader Gross National Product (GNP) and the theoretically-equivalent Gross Domestic Income (GDI). The GNP and GDI estimates will follow in the revisions of the next month or two.

Next Release (February 28): The "preliminary" estimate revision of fourth-quarter 2006 GDP should come in below the "advance" estimate, given subsequent weakness in trade and production reporting.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) -- The BLS initially reported the seasonally-adjusted December CPI-U up by 0.55% (0.15% unadjusted) for the month, following November's unchanged reading (down 0.15% unadjusted). Subsequently, the BLS published its annual seasonal adjustment revisions, and the December CPI then was up by 0.45% following November's new 0.05% increase. What on a seasonally adjusted basis had been an annualized quarterly CPI contraction of 2.1% in fourth-quarter 2006, suddenly narrowed to a contraction of 0.79%. The numbers did not get any more realistic, however, the new seasonals just shifted the patterns of change around a little within the year.

Keep in mind that the unadjusted CPI-U (I.6) never is revised (except for the occasional reporting error). Accordingly, annual inflation initially reported for December 2006 at 2.54% remained 2.54%, compared with December 2005 annual inflation of 3.42%. Average 2006 inflation was 3.23% versus 3.39% in 2005.

The eight levels of annual inflation, I.1 to I.8, are shown in the table in the Alternate Reality section, as is the plot of the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation number.

The "experimental" Chained Consumer Price Index (C-CPI-U), the fully substitution based CPI that presumably is the eventual replacement for current CPI reporting, showed annual inflation (I.5) of 2.36% in December, up from 1.92% in November. Annual average C-CPI-U inflation for 2006 was 2.90% versus 2.81% in 2005.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton methodology (I.7), annual CPI growth was about 5.8% in December, up from 5.4% in November. The SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (I.8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies of recent decades, was 10.0% in December, up from 9.4% in November. For 2006, the Average Annual SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure was 10.2%, the strongest reading since 1981.

Next Release (February 21): Annual inflation has not peaked, but it will take some months into 2007 to regain its recent high annual rates. With seasonally-adjusted CPI-U rising 0.6% in monthly January 2006 CPI reporting, any monthly reporting above or below that for the imminent CPI release of January 2007 will add or subtract directly to or from the annual CPI-U inflation rate. With consensus forecasts around 0.1% for monthly inflation, annual inflation likely will have taken a 0.4% to 0.5% hit in January.

Reporting surprises for inflation still should come in on the upside of weak expectations, both for full as well as core numbers. Increasingly reflecting the slow process of oil prices permeating nearly all levels of business activity, upside movement in core rates, in particular, will tend to shock the markets.

Also due with the pending January CPI release is a BLS shift to reporting of the CPI to three decimal points, instead of the current one. While such will increase the apparent precision of various reported percentage changes, it will do nothing in terms of improving the overall accuracy of the methodologically-impaired consumer price measure.


Other Troubled Key Series


Federal Deficit -- As discussed in the December SGS, the federal government's fiscal 2006 (fiscal year-end September 30th) deficit, prepared based on generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), widened to $4.6 trillion from 2005's $3.5 trillion. Those numbers dwarfed the officially-gimmicked 2006 federal budget deficit of $248.2 billion, which was down $70.8 billion from 2005's $318.5 billion.

Though still lacking the accrual accounting of the GAAP numbers, the change in gross federal debt is a better indicator of actual net cash outlays by the federal government than is the gimmicked deficit reporting. As of fiscal year-end 2006, the gross federal debt stood at $8.507 trillion, up by $574 billion from 2005, which in turn was up $554 billion from 2004.

For the rolling 12 months through January 2007, the gimmicked deficit was $191.9 billion, versus $307.3 billion in January 2006, compared with rolling deficits of $209.2 billion and $319.7 billion in December of 2007 and 2006. As of January 31, 2007, the gross federal debt stood at $8.708 trillion, up by $511 billion from January 2006, which in turn was up by $568 billion from January 2005. As of December 31, 2006, the gross federal debt stood at $8.680 trillion, up by $510 billion from December 2005, which in turn was up by $574 billion from December 2004.

Despite the bookkeeping games played by the Administration and Congress, even the gimmicked deficit should widen this year, as government finances suffer increasingly from tax revenue losses due to the intensifying recession and relative tax receipt declines after the expiration of recent tax incentives. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy's mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance -- Annual change in initial claims has soared into positive territory (an economic negative) due to the continued sharp deterioration in recent numbers. New claims, averaged over the last four weeks (ended February 10th), are up 11.2% from last year, but year-ago comparisons using the 17-week moving average still are dampened by the trailing effects of last year's devastating hurricanes passing through the data. On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended February 10th, annual change rose into positive territory, up 3.9%. Such contrasts with the 17-week average decline of 6.9% as of December 23rd. Current growth patterns are graphed and discussed further in this month's Reporting/Market Focus.

More often than not, week-to-week volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly numbers is due to the Labor Department's efforts to seasonally adjust these numbers around holiday periods. The Labor Department has demonstrated an inability to do such adjusting successfully. When the new claims series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings -- December's seasonally-adjusted real earnings fell by 0.1%, following a revised November gain of 0.3% (previously 0.2%). Annual growth slowed to 2.1% in December, from 2.7% (previously 2.6%) in November.

Gyrations in the poor quality of reported CPI growth account for most month-to-month volatility in this series. Adjusting for the major upside biases built into the CPI-W inflation measure used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series shows the average worker to be under severe financial stress in an ongoing recession.

Retail Sales -- A weather-distorted series, seasonally-adjusted January retail sales basically were flat, down by 0.01% +/- 0.7%, versus December. December retail sales were up 0.9% (unrevised) from November, which was up 0.6% from October (initially 1.0%). Of some note, January gasoline station sales were down by 0.7% from December, suggesting negligible dampening of January CPI from gasoline prices.

Real (inflation-adjusted) year-to-year growth in retail sales below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation) signals recession, and a signal first was generated in this business cycle back in June 2006. Before inflation adjustment, January 2007 growth plunged to 2.9%, from a weather-spiked reading of 5.7% in December. With December annual CPI at 2.5%, and market expectations for January annual CPI at 2.0%, real annual retail sales growth rapidly is nearing negative territory, an event usually seen only in the depths of a recession.

Next Releases (March 13, 29): February retail sales again should come in below expectations, generally mirroring the recession. Inflation-adjusted growth should be negative on a monthly basis, with annual real growth also moving into contraction territory. A benchmark revision is due on March 29th. Look for historical retail sales growth to be weaker in revision.

Industrial Production -- Even with the December and January numbers subject to weather distortions, industrial production has begun settling into a recessionary pattern, consistent with the below-50 readings in the November and January purchasing managers manufacturing surveys (see related section).

Initially reported at a monthly gain of 0.4%, seasonally adjusted December production revised upwards to 0.5% in January reporting, but such was in conjunction with downward revisions to prior months. As a result, the seasonally-adjusted annualized quarterly contraction in fourth-quarter 2006 production revised from 0.55% to a more severe contraction of 0.78%, consistent with what often would be a coincident contraction in GDP.

Assuming that a portion of December's production gain was a weather distortion, the 0.5% decline reported for January's seasonally-adjusted monthly change likely reversed some of the earlier misstatement. Annual growth in January production slowed to 2.6%, from 3.0% in December and 3.3% in November

Next Release (March 16): Look for industrial production to contract again in February, confirming the recession. Monthly contractions in this series shortly will become regular.

New Orders for Durable Goods -- The usually volatile durable goods orders rose in December by a seasonally-adjusted by 3.1% (3.6% net of revisions), after a 3.2% (previously 1.9%) November increase. December's orders rose 2.0% from the year before, after November's annual gain of 0.6% (revised from 0.3%), a near-recessionary level for a third month.

The closely followed nondefense capital goods orders rose by 9.0% for the month of December, following November's 0.3% (previously 0.2%) decline. December's annual growth rate for nondefense capital goods orders was down a recessionary 9.5%, following November's 7.6% decline.

Durable goods orders lost its status as a solid leading economic indicator when the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders.

Trade Balance -- Certain the key 2006 annual trade statistics are graphed and discussed in the Opening Comments section. What follows here focuses on the regular monthly reporting.

The seasonally-adjusted monthly December trade deficit widened to $61.2 billion, topping consensus forecasts. The November deficit revised to $58.1 billion from its initial reporting of $58.2 billion. The December accounting reflected a small increase in oil prices and a continued sharp plunge in the physical volume of imported oil.

The larger-than-expected December deficit suggests some looming downward adjustment to growth in the "preliminary estimate" revision to fourth-quarter GDP, due on February 28th.

For 2006, the reported goods and services deficit widened to $763.6 billion from $716.7 billion in 2005.

Next Release (March 9): The January trade deficit should show some further rebound from understatement in the latter part of 2006, likely topping consensus forecasts. Despite interim bumps from gyrating oil prices, the months ahead will see a pattern of regularly increasing deficits that once again will be setting new records by mid-year 2007.

Consumer Confidence -- January confidence measures rose for the month but annual growth trends slowed. The Conference Board's January consumer confidence -- adjusted by the usual suspect seasonal factors -- rose by 0.3%, after a revised 4.5% increase in December. The unadjusted University of Michigan's consumer sentiment rose by 5.7% in January after declining by 0.4% in December.

On a diminishing year-to-year basis into December, the damage done to confidence in 2005 by the severe hurricane season largely was responsible for the gains seen in late-2006 annual growth patterns. On a three-month moving-average basis for January, annual growth in the Conference Board's measure eased to 5.4% from 11.5% in December, while annual growth in the University of Michigan's number slowed to 6.2% from 12.2% in December. These lagging, not leading, indicators still show the economy has been in trouble.

Beware the mid-month Consumer Sentiment release from the University of Michigan. Its sampling base is so small as to be virtually valueless in terms of statistical significance.

Short-Term Credit Measures -- Despite annual growth in consumer credit notching higher, monthly growth in revolving credit (credit cards) was flat in December, suggesting less-than-robust holiday sales. Annual growth in short-term commercial credit continued strong, albeit at somewhat slower growth rates.

Seasonally-adjusted consumer credit grew by 0.3% for the month of December, with annual growth up 4.6%, following 4.5% in December and 4.3% in November. In the current environment, where inflation-adjusted growth in income is not adequate to support meaningful growth in the personal consumption component of GDP, sustained GDP growth can be supported temporarily by debt expansion or savings liquidation. Consumer debt expansion has stalled on a monthly basis, though, suggesting a major constraint on economic growth.

Annual growth in commercial paper outstanding remained strong in January at 18.3%, down from December's 21.5% but still higher than November's 17.8%. Annual growth in commercial and industrial loans also was solid but slowed somewhat to 13.3% in January, down from 14.8% in December and 15.1% in November. Strong growth in the commercial credit measures can signal credit needs tied either to rising sales and receivables/inventory, or to slowing sales and slowing collections and involuntarily rising inventories.

Producer Price Index (PPI) -- Partially reflecting oil-price gyrations, the re-weighted and re-seasonally-adjusted January finished goods PPI fell by 0.6% (down 0.2% unadjusted), versus December's 0.9% gain. The 2.0% inflation surge in November was redefined to 1.8%. January's annual PPI inflation eased to 0.2% from 1.1% in December and 0.9% in November. Seasonally-adjusted January intermediate goods fell by 0.7% for the month (up 0.5% in December), while crude goods dropped by 6.3% (up 2.8% in December).

Next Release (March 15): Despite oil price swings and an innate random volatility in monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months remains likely to exceed overly-depressed expectations. February core inflation, in particular, is subject to an upside surprise for consensus forecasts, despite the rapid deterioration in reporting quality.


Better-Quality Numbers


The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders -- Despite the overall January purchasing managers manufacturing index showing a contracting manufacturing sector -- consistent with recession -- the January new orders index fell by 3.1% to 50.3, holding just above the official contraction level. With the unreliable government-generated seasonal factors revised for prior history, the December new orders index stood at 51.9, up from 49.7 in November.

Seasonal-factor distortions are overcome by viewing the series using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the January new orders index fell by 13.6%, against contractions of 12.7% in December and 13.6% in November.

The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004. As an SGS early warning indicator of a major economic shift, the new orders measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating a signal of pending recession.

Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading below 50.0 indicates contracting new orders.

The overall January ISM manufacturing index dropped to 49.3 from December's 51.4 and November's upwardly revised 49.9. Again, an index level below 50.0 indicates a contracting manufacturing sector. The January employment component moved to 49.5, from 49.4 in December and 48.9 in November, showing continued contraction in manufacturing employment. The series is graphed and further discussed in this month's Reporting/Market Focus.

The service-sector ISM index does not have much meaning related to overall business activity, since new order activity at law firms, hospitals or fast-food restaurants have little obvious relationship to broad economic activity. That said, the overall January services index rose to 59.0 from December's level of 56.7.

Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. The January employment component eased to 51.7 from 53.2 in December. The prices paid component is covered in the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) -- The Conference Board keeps publishing major monthly revisions in its help-wanted advertising index, raising a question, once again, of reporting quality. November and October had been reported at 30, but both were revised to 29, leaving three consecutive months' readings at levels last seen during the Eisenhower Administration. Against that, December surged by 13.8% to 33, the highest reading since June. At work in December possibly was a weather-related distortion, which will become evident one way or the other within the next couple of months.

Viewed on a three-month moving average basis, December's year-to-year change was a contraction of 20.2% versus November's annual change trough of a 23.0% decline. The series still indicates rapidly deteriorating employment conditions, which are graphed and discussed further in this month's Reporting/Market Focus. Where the index never recovered from the 2000 recession, its recent, deepening plunge signals a renewed and rapid contraction in economic activity.

Housing Starts -- Seasonally-adjusted January housing starts plunged by 14.3% +/- 7.1% for the month, with year-to-year change collapsing by 37.8% +/- 5.2%. The January numbers likely suffered some from the relatively stronger December data that had been enhanced by mild weather and borrowed some business from January. Month-to-month, December was up 5.0%, versus a 5.9% gain in November, with year-to-year change down 17.9% in December, against a 26.6% decline in November.

Due to the volatility of the data and the occasional weather distortions, the numbers for annual change best are viewed on a three-month moving-average basis. So calculated, the January year-to-year drop was 27.9%, the worst reading since the depths of the 1990/1991 recession. The series continues to signal an intensifying recession.

In related data, respective rates of annual contraction for December new- and existing-home sales were 11.0% and 7.9%. Although the annual rates of change were less negative than in the prior month, indicated activity likely will drop sharply in January, reflecting the weather distortions and remaining consistent with a sharp economic downturn.

Money Supply -- Annual growth in the SGS Continuing M3 hit 11.0% in January, up from 10.8% in December. Helped by rising M2 growth, January's annual M3 growth was at a five-year high. Growth has been increasing steadily since the near-term trough of 4.6% in March 2005. If M3 growth still were published by the Federal Reserve, financial market concerns of excessive liquidity creation would be even more highly vocalized than they are at present. The same would be true for inflation concerns.



[Note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the ongoing SGS estimates of M3, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS for methodology.]

Before inflation adjustment, seasonally-adjusted January M1 and M2 respectively rose by 0.4% and 0.9% for the month, after a respective 0.4% decline and 0.6% increase in December. Month-to-month M3 change was approximately 0.8% for January and 1.0% in December.

Annual growth in January for monthly M1 fell by 0.5%, versus a 0.6% contraction in December, while annual M2 growth rose to 5.5% from 5.3%. Net of distorted annual CPI inflation, real annual growth rates for January M1 and M2 remained consistent with the ongoing recession, with January's M1 and M2 year-to-year rates of change down by roughly 2.5% and up 3.4%, respectively. On a three-month moving-average basis, the January inflation-adjusted annual rates of change were down 2.6% and up 3.0%, levels that still were underwater using the old-style CPI.

Inflation Indicators

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices -- Although the January prices paid indices remained in inflationary territory for both purchasing managers surveys, the monthly shifts were mixed. The different signals likely result from the non-seasonal adjustment of prices in the manufacturing survey versus the seasonal adjustment of prices in the non-manufacturing survey. Not only are the seasonal factors provided by the Commerce Department of little value, but also they get revised at this time of year, with the effect of changing past history.

In line with oil price changes, price index movements have been volatile. On the manufacturing side, the January price index rose to 53.0 from 47.5 in December, which was down from 53.5 in November. On a three-month moving average basis, January's annual change was down by 23.7%, against December's decline of 33.3% and November's drop of 30.0%.

On the non-manufacturing side, the January prices diffusion index eased to 55.2 from 59.7 in December and against 57.2 in November. On a three-month moving average basis, January's annual change was a decline of 18.7%, versus a 21.3% drop in December and 20.3% fall in November.

Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflationary pressure. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising prices.

Oil Prices -- The monthly-average West Texas Intermediate Spot (St. Louis Fed) fell to $54.57 per barrel, down 12.0% from $62.03 in December, which, in turn, had been up 4.5% from November's $59.37. The January average was down 16.7% from the year before, against December's 4.4% annual increase and November's 1.8% annual gain. High volatility remains the norm, with February oil prices up from January, where they fell sharply last year. Recent trading has been on either side of $60.00 per barrel, with the nearby contract closing around $58 on today.

As discussed in the Opening Comments, global political conditions favor a sharp spike in oil prices in the months ahead, irrespective of any games playing by the Administration and the Saudis. Also remaining in play is the dollar-based pricing of oil, which would be threatened in the event of a likely massive sell-off in the U.S. dollar. Where dollar weakness is the equivalent of an oil price cut for oil purchasers denominated in an appreciating currency, market forces tend to push dollar-based oil prices higher, and that exacerbates inflation problems in the United States. If oil pricing were shifted to something other than the greenback, inflationary pressures would be even more intense, as any drop in the dollar would be reflected directly as an increase in the price of oil for U.S. consumption.

Whether from supply and demand, geo-political or currency pressures, oil prices will remain at highly inflationary levels and will continue as a major contributing factor to U.S. inflation woes. Historically high oil prices still are working their way through all levels of U.S. economic activity, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc.

These broad inflationary pressures will remain intact despite any near-term oil price volatility. Although these pressures may be slow to surface in government reporting of the so-called "core" inflation measures, even the gimmicked core measures will start to show persistently high rates of price increases that should distress the U.S. financial markets.

As confirmed in recent reporting, downside oil price movements are picked up more quickly and fully by the BLS in its inflation measures than are upside movements. Nonetheless, the general trend in both CPI and PPI reporting -- at both the aggregate and core levels -- will be to the upside through at least the third quarter of 2007.

Please note that the guide to background articles and to prior monthly Reporting/Market Foci -- previously published here, prior to the Reporting/Market Focus section -- has been removed from the newsletter and added to the Archives Page at www.shadowstats.com.

Reporting/Market Focus (January/February 2007) -- Payroll Employment and Alternate Measures Indicate Bleak Labor Market


Despite a one-time sharp boost to payroll levels, relative monthly and annual jobs performance remained near-recessionary. Further, other more-independent indicators of labor conditions already are showing a recession to be in place.

The release of the January 2007 payroll survey included the annual benchmark revision, which added 754,000 jobs to the seasonally-adjusted March 2006 employment level. With the BLS's revision methodology, such translated into an upward revision of 933,000 to the previously reported December 2006 payrolls.

Even so, the resulting report of a 111,000 monthly gain in seasonally-adjusted January payrolls was statistically indistinguishable from a contraction, and annual growth -- albeit higher than before the revisions -- slowed meaningfully from 1.7% in December to 1.6% in January.

The annual benchmark revision is based on a comparison of the prior year's March (2006 in the current case) payroll estimates, as regularly surveyed, against a universe of payroll employment as estimated from employers' state unemployment insurance filings. The benchmarking process never has worked particularly well because of basic surveying flaws and the way the BLS handles non-responses from major firms or their surrogates (payroll processing firms) in the surveys. Nonetheless the 2006 comparisons suggested an unusually large difference, and one that was in a politically embarrassing direction for the BLS. Employment growth purportedly had been understated.

Blamed for the "needed" revisions were inadequate bias factors (birth/death model) and problems in measuring Katrina-related employment effects. So the monthly bias factors -- designed to compensate for the creation of jobs by non-reporting new companies -- are likely to be revised upwards by roughly 300,000, in aggregate, to 1,300,000 per year. The biggest problem with the bias factors is that they never have been designed to account properly for a recessionary environment, where aggregate biases should be negative, accounting for companies going out of business.

As to the other issues, the BLS still does not understand the reporting problems it had along the Gulf Coast in the wake of 2005's extraordinarily severe hurricane system. That particular statistical quagmire likely never will be resolved.



Has there been a double-counted benchmark revision? In the months prior to the benchmark revision, monthly revisions regularly threw large amounts of new employment growth into past history. Such is shown in the graph above, where the original monthly gain is shown against the final monthly gain reported before the benchmark revision and after the benchmark revision. In the last six months of 2006, an extra 300,000 jobs were created in prior period revisions. Keep in mind that the benchmark monthly changes are after the overall upward benchmark revision had boosted employment levels by nearly 1,000,000 jobs as of January 2007, on top of the previously boosted statistics.

What appears to have been at work here is the puffing of jobs created by the Administration, prior to the November election, without tickling inflation concerns. Whether this pattern continues in the next several months will be quite telling as to what the Administration is doing.




The two graphs above show the results of the benchmark revisions on both the level and year-to-year change in seasonally-adjusted nonfarm payrolls. Even with the revised reporting, relative recent employment has been slowing sharply.

It is the story shown by the revised year-to-year growth patterns in the payroll data that can be compared with other harder or more-independent measures of employment activity.



New claims for unemployment insurance, on a 17-week moving average, are surging, which is an economic negative (please note the scale of annual growth is inverted in the graph). The prior surge was tied to the effects of Katrina and the other severe hurricanes of 2005. Somehow, the hurricane effects largely were missed and then further tempered in the benchmark revisions to the payroll data.



Although help-wanted advertising never recovered from the 2000 recession, annual growth -- based on a three-month moving average -- has fallen deep into new recession territory during the last year.



In the last several months, the employment component of the manufacturing purchasing managers survey has had a reading below 50.0, indicating contracting employment. Such is consistent with recession.

The various sections for each of the above indicators discuss current readings. Beyond the payroll data and the related troubled surveying, biases and built-in guesstimates, credibility for new claims comes from the paper trail behind it. Separately, help-wanted advertising and the purchasing managers survey are compiled independent of BLS oversight.


Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for March -- Federal Reserve's Flow of Funds and Manipulated Data


Scheduled initially for January, this Reporting/Market Focus on the Federal Reserve's Flow of Funds Accounts (FOF) has been shifted to the March newsletter, coincident with the 2006 annual FOF data due to be published at that time. Questionable statistical practices at the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System go well beyond the elimination of M3 reporting. Unusual patterns and revisions have shown up in recent quarterly FOF reporting that shows the sources and uses of cash and credit within the U.S. financial system and economy. These anomalies, and significance of same, are explored.

___________________________________________


March's "Shadow Government Statistics" newsletter is targeted for release during the week of March 19th. Its posting on the Web site, as well as all interim Flash Updates and Alerts, will be advised immediately by e-mail. OCCASIONALLY, BRIEF UPDATES ARE COMMUNICATED BY E-MAIL. IF YOU ARE NOT RECEIVING E-MAIL NOTIFICATIONS, PLEASE LET USE KNOW at johnwilliams@shadowstats.com or use our feedback option on the site.

Flash Update

Wednesday, February 14th, 2007
Retail Sales Annual Growth Nears Zero/ Newsletter Update

January retail sales were down a seasonally-adjusted 0.01% from December, with year-to-year growth plunging to 2.29% in January, from a weather-inflated 5.69% in December. Importantly, December CPI inflation was 2.54%, but that would drop to roughly 2.0% in January, if market expectations for January's seasonally-adjusted monthly CPI change of 0.1% are met. Even with 2.0% official January inflation, that takes annual real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales to under 0.3%, a level not usually seen outside of recession. Indeed, that would be the lowest level seen since annual contractions in the final stages (late 2002, early 2003) of the 2000 recession.

Yesterday, the seasonally-adjusted December trade deficit widened to $61.2 billion from a revised $58.1 billion in November. The deterioration was enough to offer some downside pressure on the next revision to fourth-quarter GDP growth.

In combination, these two reports will help dispel the notion that the economy is enjoying a sudden, miraculous rebound. Regardless of resulting market hype, the Fed's next move likely will be a tightening, not because of an overheating economy, but because of market abandonment of the heavily over-priced U.S. dollar.

Most upcoming economic reports should continue dampening the economic-recovery myth. Details will follow in the still-pending monthly newsletter.

Barring protracted loss of power from today's ice storm in the New York City area, the January/February newsletter will be published by next Tuesday. The latest missive will include significant new material and has been complicated in timing by unexpected travel and seasonal maladies.

Best wishes to all,

John

Walter J. "John" Williams
www.shadowstats.com
(908) 534-8223

Flash Update

Sunday, February 4th, 2007
M3 Growth Hits 11%, December Jobs Revised Upward by 933,000

The SGS Alternate Data pages have been updated for M3, GDP and the U.S. Dollar. Based on three weeks of reporting through January 22nd, annual M3 growth hit 11.0% in January, helped by rising M2 growth.

The Alternate GDP shows ongoing recession with 4Q06 annual real (inflation-adjusted) change at minus 1.4% versus minus 1.5% in 3Q06. Official reporting was 3.4% for 4Q06. Wednesday's commentary mistakenly noted a decline in inventory growth had boosted the GDP number, a decline in inventory growth subtracts from GDP growth.

The January employment report may have been weaker than consensus at a monthly gain of 111,000 +/- 106,000 -- viewed in isolation the monthly numbers were quite weak -- yet the overall report was far from weak and increasingly removed from reality.

Thanks to Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) methodology, the upside benchmark revision of 754,000 jobs to the seasonally-adjusted March 2006 employment level translated into an upward revision of 933,000 to the previously reported December 2006 payrolls.

Blamed for the "needed" revision were inadequate bias factors (birth/death model) and problems in measuring Katrina-related employment effects. So the bias factors are being revised upwards, and the BLS still does not understand the reporting problems it has had along the Gulf Coast. Annual jobs growth now was 1.7% in December (slowed to 1.6% in January) against last month's December reporting of 1.4%.

Emphasizing the lack of BLS credibility, the increase in the U.3 unemployment rate to 4.6% in January from 4.5% in December was meaningless, because the numbers were not comparable and consistently prepared. The BLS updated its population estimates last month. There was a time when the BLS showed before and after numbers so that the effects of revisions could be seen.

Further detail on all of the above follows in next week's newsletter.

Best wishes to all,

John

Walter J. "John" Williams www.shadowstats.com

Flash Update

Wednesday, January 31st, 2007
The seasonally-adjusted, annualized real (inflation-adjusted) fourth-quarter GDP growth rate of 3.47% +/- 3% was up from 1.96% in the third-quarter; fourth-quarter 2006 year-to-year growth was 3.38% versus 2.96% in the third quarter and against 3.15% for fourth-quarter 2005. Annual average growth for 2006 also was 3.8% up from 3.22% in 2005. About half the quarterly growth rate was accounted for by an unbelievable reduction in net exports, with another quarter of the growth reflected in reduced inventory change. While the trade deficit has narrowed recently, that has been due to lower oil prices, not to reduced physical volume of the deficit. Presumably it is the latter measure that is reported in the "inflation-adjusted" GDP.

This Friday's (February 3) release of January payroll employment faces three, major unusual factors that could distort growth. First, the January payroll survey was early enough in the month to show continued benefit from the unusually mild weather that continued briefly into the New Year. Second, the monthly bias factor swings sharply to the downside in January from December. Last year, the bias moved from a positive 63,000 in December 2005 to a minus 193,000, or a negative swing of 256,000 jobs. Although the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) has improved its seasonal adjustment process significantly in accommodating this swing, there still is some downside bias built into the results.

Finally, the pending release will adjust recent history for the annual benchmark revision, with a promised upward revision of 810,000 jobs to the seasonally-unadjusted March 2006 payroll level. Such gives the BLS the ability to generate any level of jobs growth that it desires for January. Despite underlying economic reality favoring a weak number, with the sudden "economic recovery" beginning to fade as rapidly as it appeared, almost anything is possible. My betting leans towards a result on the upside of expectations, with an upward revision to the bias factor and warm weather winning out. If the January report is "positive," then the February jobs report is at high risk of exacerbating what then will be new recession fears.

Further details of the GDP and employment reporting will follow in the next newsletter.

Next Newsletter

When we first published the Shadow Government Statistics newsletter, it regularly came out in the week following the release of the monthly jobs data. Over time, publication has inched later in the month to the point that we now have come full circle. The January newsletter will be published next week as the January/February 2007 edition. All subscribers and those in the renewal process, as of today, are having their subscriptions automatically extended by one-month to accommodate and reflect this.

E-Mail Notifications

With the increasing use of spam-filters, we are concerned that some of you may not be receiving our email notifications which are sent whenever a new piece is posted on the site.

This Flash Update has been emailed to all subscribers and so if you do not receive it, would you please let me know by emailing me at shadowstats@hotmail.com?.

Best wishes to all,

John

Walter J. "John" Williams

Flash Update

Sunday, January 21st, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - Jan. 21, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

January 21, 2007

__________

Weather Distorts Data

4th-Quarter Production Contracts

Annual Alternate Inflation at 25-Year High

M3 Growth Continues to Accelerate

__________


The SGS Alternate Data pages for the CPI and the ongoing M3 have been updated. The CPI includes the annual averages for 2006. In response to popular demand, we shortly will be publishing unadjusted monthly index levels for the SGS Alternate Consumer Price Measure. The M3 file reflects the Federal Reserve's annual benchmark revisions to M1 and M2. -- Best wishes to all, John Williams

Economic Activity Has Not Turned Positive


December's unusual weather patterns appear to have distorted monthly growth to the upside not only for payrolls -- touched upon in the prior Flash Update -- but also for retail sales, industrial production and housing starts. Actual economic activity does not turn quickly or sharply without advance indications. Continued distortions are likely, with the data swinging back the other way in the next couple of months. That said, the inflationary recession has continued to deteriorate.

On the economic front, most of the skewed, seasonally-adjusted 0.88% (+/- 0.7%) monthly gain in December retail sales was due to a downward revision in the level of November sales. Net of revisions, December retail sales were up just 0.27%, well shy of the 0.55% gain reported in December's seasonally-adjusted CPI. Of course. real (inflation-adjusted) growth in December's retail sales was 0.35%, as reported.

The skewed 0.4% monthly gain in December's industrial production followed a downward revision to November's growth, from an initial 0.2% gain to a 0.1% contraction. Consistent with declining economic activity, seasonally-adjusted average industrial production for the fourth quarter fell at an annualized 0.55% pace from the third quarter, where the third quarter was up 4.04% from the second, and the second was up 6.52% from the first. Annual growth for December slowed to 3.7% from 4.7% in November.

Seasonally-adjusted housing starts showed skewed monthly gains in November and December of 6.4% and 4.5%, respectively, but annual change was down 26.2% and 18.0% for the same months in this volatile series. On a three-month-moving-average basis, annual change was down 24.1% in December, versus a 24.6% contraction in November, a contraction consistent with a deep and ongoing recession.

The seasonally-adjusted November trade deficit narrowed to $58.2 billion, from $58.8 billion in October, thanks to a continued, exaggerated decline reported for the prices of petroleum products. Net of those price changes, the goods deficit widened. It is the inflation-adjusted deficit that is used in GDP calculations. At such time as oil prices stabilize in the trade reporting, the deficit will surge anew to record highs.

The money supply measures M1 and M2 went through their annual revisions. As noted by the Fed, "For both M1 and M2, the revisions decreased growth in the first half of 2006 and increased it in the second half." Since M2 represents about 60% of M3, the same pattern applied with the no-longer-published broad measure. The updated SGS Ongoing M3 Measure was up year-to-year by 10.8% in December, versus a 10.5% gain in November, and the growth appears to be accelerating further in January. Such normally would be tickling the financial markets' inflation concerns.

On the inflation front, both the PPI and CPI showed some catch-up, slightly topping market expectations for December. Seasonally-adjusted PPI rose 0.9% for the month, following a 2.0% gain in November. Annual PPI inflation rose to 1.1% in December from 0.9% in November.

The seasonally-adjusted December CPI gained 0.55% (0.15% unadjusted) after being reported as unchanged in November. Unadjusted, year-to-year December CPI was up 2.54% versus 1.97% in November. The annual average inflation rate for 2006 was 3.23%, slightly lower than the 3.39% in 2004, which was the highest annual inflation rate since 1991.

Net of the methodological gimmicks added to CPI reporting in recent decades, annual inflation for the SGS Alternate Consumer Price Measure was 10.0% in December, up from 9.4% in November. The average alternate inflation rate for all of 2006 was 10.2%, up from 10.1% in 2005, and at its highest level since 1981.

Recent actions by the Saudis to talk down oil prices is suggestive not only of some unusual global political factors at play, but also of some possible looming perils for the global markets. Further details follows in the January SGS.

___________________________________________


January's "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter is targeted for month-end release.

Flash Update

Sunday, January 7th, 2007
FLASH UPDATE - Jan. 7, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

FLASH UPDATE

January 7, 2007

__________

December Payroll Growth Understated But Not Credible

Unusual Weather Patterns Promise Major Data Distortions


__________


Is Bureau of Labor Statistics Playing Games with the Credit Market?


Highly unusual reporting and revision patterns for the jobs data were seen again, for December. Employment conditions are close to showing a recession, but each month the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) keeps filling in prior periods with levels of upside revisions that are unprecedented outside of the annual benchmark revisions. The revisions are unusual enough for the BLS to have published a statement last month proclaiming that the changes were not unprecedented. Something very strange is going on in the reporting. Whatever it is, it more likely is tied to data manipulation than to accurate economic reporting. All questions may be answered when the annual benchmark revision is published next month. An upside revision already has been announced, and the employment universe for the year ahead will be set up by the January numbers.

While the payroll numbers were weak, but still unbelievably high, there was no obvious smoking gun in the report that showed the gimmick. The payrolls dropped by 206,000, before seasonal adjustment, so the gains were all thanks to the adjustments. That said, though, the internal data suggested that the reported adjusted growth should have been even stronger.

Even though the 167,000 gain in December's seasonally-adjusted nonfarm payrolls was tepid in nature, it was somewhat above consensus expectations, and the U.S. markets tumbled as hopes for a Fed easing were diminished, somewhat. What would the markets have done with the 226,000 gain that could have been reported?

There are ongoing serious problems with the seasonal adjustments made to the payroll data. Where year-to-year changes in both the seasonally-adjusted and unadjusted series should be virtually identical, they have not been recently and were not in December. Applying the just-reported, unadjusted annual respective November and December growth rates of 1.3487% and 1.4025%, to the seasonally adjusted reporting of 2005 indicates the adjusted monthly jobs gain should have been about 226,000. While such would have roiled the markets even further, that growth rate still would have been considered sub-par in the halcyon Clinton days, when the politically-controlled monthly jobs growth was set at 250,000.

The reported December gain of 167,000 +/- 106,000, was 196,000 net of revisions. The previously reported gain of 132,000 in November revised to 154,000, as the pattern of heavy upward revisions to prior-period data continued.

These unusual revision patterns suggest a possible effort to mask indications of otherwise non-existent economic strength from the ever-sensitive credit markets. If these numbers are being so manipulated, it likely involves either the Fed and/or the now market-savvy Treasury Department, not the traditional political hypesters in the Administration.

The historical seasonal-factor revision to the household survey took place with the December data. On the new basis, the seasonally-adjusted December U.3 unemployment rate held at 4.48% +/- 0.2% for the second month, with the unadjusted U.3 holding at 4.3%. The adjusted and unadjusted broader U.6 unemployment rates also held at 8.0% and 7.8%, respectively. As with the payroll series, the seasonal-factor changes for the household series are being used to throw current "strength" into prior periods.

Despite the twisted jobs reporting, help-wanted advertising and new claims for unemployment continued to show sharply deteriorating employment conditions. Even the gains shown in the seasonally-adjusted December purchasing managers surveys remained very soft in the employment arena.

Seasonal adjustments of monthly economic data can be terribly misleading in the best of times. Most government efforts at such adjustments are well intentioned, but do not work well when seasonal patterns are not usual. This Flash Update is being written on January 6th in central New Jersey, and I have the air conditioner running. December was snowless here for the first time in more than a century. In contrast, Denver has been hit by successive and unusually debilitating snowstorms. Both circumstances disrupt normal commerce in ways that the government cannot possibly adjust for in its economic guesstimates. Accordingly, do not be surprised with unusually screwy growth patterns being reported for series like industrial production and retail sales, etc.

Unlike the employment series, where the seasonal factors can be gimmicked monthly, most series will show periods of catch-up from seasonal distortions, since most series, in theory, total to the same level year, adjusted or unadjusted.

Further detail follows in the January SGS.

___________________________________________


January's "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter is targeted for month-end release.

December 2006 Newsletter

Tuesday, January 2nd, 2007
DECEMBER 2006 EDITION - Jan. 2, 2007

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Issue Number 26

January 2, 2007

__________

Recession Recognition Likely in 2007

Dollar Poised for 30% Plunge

Dollar, Debt Monetization and Oil Prices Boost Inflation Outlook

Gold Easily Could Top $1,000

Fed to Tighten in Dollar Defense?

Equities and Bonds to Suffer

Hyperinflationary Depression Likely by 2010


__________


OVERVIEW -- OPENING COMMENTS


The U.S. economy and financial markets face significant peril in 2007, with the dollar sitting on the brink of a major collapse. The positive 2006 U.S equity markets and reasonably tranquil credit markets belie the pending turmoil that already has been set in motion by a rapidly deepening inflationary recession and exacerbated by the de facto long-term insolvency of the U.S. government.

Financial concerns in the year ahead should become dominated by growing recognition of a severe structural recession that is beyond traditional remedies, high inflation against which the Fed will appear impotent, and a sharp loss in the foreign exchange value of the U.S. currency. In conjunction with the inflation woes, the dollar crisis will lead to significant loss in the greenback's global purchasing power.

This environment will not be a healthy one for equity and bond prices, as the dollar's weakness increasingly will mirror the flight of foreign capital and liquidity from the U.S. markets. On a financial-weighted basis, the dollar has the potential to lose more than 30% of it value. Gaining from these difficulties will be the precious metals, particularly gold, which has the potential easily to push above $1,000 per troy ounce in the year ahead. Enhancing the demand for that safe-haven metal likely will be continued deterioration in the U.S. and global political environment.

Ultimately, the current circumstance will evolve into a hyperinflationary depression. Although such is not likely until the end of the decade, that financial end game for the current markets will tend to come sooner rather than later and will break with surprising speed when it hits. As discussed below, this is not likely to be a deflationary depression.

What lies ahead for 2007 and 2008 will be severe enough and financially painful enough to affect the outcome of the 2008 presidential election. Historically, the concerns of the electorate have been dominated by pocketbook issues. Prior to gimmicked methodologies making the reporting disposable personal income worthless, that measure was an excellent predictor of presidential elections.

In every presidential race since 1908, in which consistent, real (inflation-adjusted) annual disposable income growth was above 3.3%, the incumbent party holding the White House won every time. When income growth was below 3.3%, the incumbent party lost every time. Again, with redefinitions to the national income accounts in the last two decades, a consistent measure of disposable income as reported by the government has disappeared, but odds are quite high that the numbers for 2008 would favor an incumbent loss, i.e. a victory for the Democrats. Where I always endeavor to keep my political persuasions separate from my analyses, for purposes of full disclosure, my background is as a conservative Republican with a libertarian bent.

What follows or coincides politically with a hyperinflationary depression offers a wide variety of possibilities, but the political status quo likely would not continue. Times would be financially painful enough to encourage the development of a third party that could move the Republicans or Democrats to third-party status in the 2012 election.

Recession Recognition Likely in 2007. The 2005 to 2008 recession is getting worse, and continues to be reflected in a number of key economic series, ranging from retail sales to the purchasing managers survey, which showed an outright decline in November manufacturing activity. The various employment indicators remain in deterioration, while payroll growth broadly remains statistically indistinguishable from contraction.

The U.S. economy is in a deepening and protracted recession that likely will endure through 2007 and into at least 2008. With recent economic history properly accounted for, this downturn is the second leg of a double-dip recession that began with the downturn in 2000. The economic contraction is structural in nature, driven by the loss of production jobs to offshore manufacturing facilities in recent decades.

The effect of this structural change is that most consumers are unable to sustain adequate income growth beyond the rate of inflation. The only way that personal consumption -- the dominant component of GDP -- can grow in such a circumstance is for the consumer to take on new debt or liquidate savings. Both those factors are short-lived and have reached untenable extremes.

The federal government and the Federal Reserve also are in untenable positions, with standard economic stimuli unavailable. From the standpoint of the federal government, traditional fiscal stimulus in the form of tax cuts or increased federal spending have reached their practical limits with the actual annual budget deficit running out of control at $4.6 trillion per year (see this month's Reporting/Market Focus).

From the Fed's standpoint, it can neither stimulate the economy nor contain inflation. Holding or lowering rates will do little to stimulate the structurally-impaired economy, and raising rates may become necessary in defense of the dollar. Similarly, raising rates will do little to contain a non-demand driven inflation, such as seen in the current circumstance that is so heavily affected by high oil prices.

Under such circumstance, this protracted inflationary recession is deepening with few, if any prospects of a looming turnaround. It is the worst of all worlds for the U.S. dollar and the domestic equity and credit markets.

Inflationary Pressures Will Mount. While annual CPI inflation began its rebound in November, official reporting still meaningfully understated the CPI level due to the continued overzealous counting of energy deflation that already had run its course. More in line with reality was a sharp monthly rebound in the PPI, as well as rising price indices in the both the manufacturing and non-manufacturing purchasing managers surveys.

Of some concern, annual M3 growth is accelerating, picking up to 10.8% in December from 10.4% in November. Such is enough to begin raising issues of inflationary pressures from excessive monetary growth.

Further, Although the U.S. dollar has seen only minor selling pressure, so far, a major sell-off looms, and with that also will come significant inflationary pressures.

By mid-year, annual CPI inflation once again will be pushing 5%, assuming no further sharp spikes in oil prices and no massive dollar sell-off. Oil and dollar problems would accelerate the rise in reported inflation and increase its scope in the year ahead.

Alternate Realities. This section regularly covers the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting. When a government economic measure does not match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Fed and Wall Street.

Effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan-Era GDP. The methodologies for the series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS.

GDP. The alternate third-quarter GDP growth reflects the "final" estimate revision, with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate third-quarter inflation-adjusted annual (year-to-year) GDP growth rate is a decline of roughly 1.5% versus the official 3.0% gain.



[Note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com.]

CPI. The gimmicked annual core inflation rates eased again, slightly, in November, as regular inflation reporting began to rebound. With high oil prices continuing to permeate broad economic activity, both core and regular inflation reporting annual should resume/continue their upside movements with the December data.

                          Eight Levels of Inflation
               Annual Inflation for September to November 2006


Measure Sep Oct Nov I.1 Core PCE Deflator 2.4% 2.4% 2.2% I.2 Core C-CPI 2.7% 2.5% 2.3% I.3 Core CPI-U 2.9% 2.7% 2.6% I.4 PCE Deflator 1.9%r 1.5% 1.9% I.5 C-CPI 2.2% 1.6% 1.9% I.6 CPI-U 2.1% 1.3% 2.0% I.7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U 5.2% 4.7% 5.4% I.8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation 9.4% 8.9% 9.4%
Notes: I.1 to I.3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively, of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U. I.4 to I.6 are the same measures with energy and food inflation included. The CPI-U (I.6) is the measure popularly followed by the financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation. I.7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre- Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top series in the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com. I.8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which reverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so, plus an adjustment for the Clinton-Era geometric weighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic bookkeeping.




[Note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com.]


Hyperinflationary versus Deflationary Depression


This is the first in a series of articles on the greatest threat facing the U.S. economy and financial markets, a hyperinflationary depression. The current SGS explores why the system faces hyperinflation instead of deflation. The January SGS will discuss how the crisis could break and explores approaches to preserving wealth and assets in the turbulent times ahead. The February SGS will discuss business operations in, and day-to-day living with, a hyperinflation.

Fire and Ice

Some say the world will end in fire,
Some say in ice.
From what I've tasted of desire
I hold with those who favor fire.
But if it had to perish twice,
I think I know enough of hate
To say that for destruction ice
Is also great
And would suffice.


-- Robert Frost

As to the fate of the developing U.S. great depression, it will encompass the fire of a hyperinflation, instead of the ice of deflation seen in the major U.S. depressions prior to World War II. What promises hyperinflation this time is the lack monetary discipline formerly imposed by the gold standard and a Federal Reserve dedicated to preventing a collapse in the money supply and the implosion of an extremely over-leveraged domestic financial system.

The differences between recession, depression and great depression are defined here, because meaningful definitions have not been published otherwise. Before World War II, all economic contractions were called depressions. A "recession" was the down-leg of a depression, and became a post-World War II euphemism for depression, when the economy contracted for at least two consecutive quarters. While no one involved in the GDP reporting or recession determination process has had to define what might be considered a "depression" since then, I have found common ground with other economists in defining the terms by the magnitude of economic contraction.

From peak to trough in the economic cycle, an inflation-adjusted decline in GDP of less than 10% is considered a recession. A decline of 10% or more is a depression, and a decline of 25% or more is a great depression. On that basis, there has been the one Great Depression. Most of the economic contractions before that were depressions. All business downturns since World War II -- as officially reported -- have been recessions.

Shown below are two graphs measuring the level of consumer prices since 1665 in the American Colonies and later the United States. We have published the first graph before. It shows what appears to be a fairly stable level of prices up to the founding of the Federal Reserve in 1913 and Franklin Roosevelt's abandoning of the gold standard in 1933. Then, inflation takes off in a manner not seen in the prior 250 years, and at an exponential rate when viewed using the SGS Alternate Measure of Consumer Prices in the last several decades. The price levels shown prior to 1913 were constructed by Robert Sahr of Oregon State University. Price levels since 1913 either are Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) or SGS based, as indicated.






The magnitude of the increase in price levels in the last 50 years, however, visually masks in the first graph the inflation volatility of the earlier years. That volatility becomes evident in the second graph, with inflation history shown only through 1960.

What is shown in the second graph is that up through the Great Depression, regular periods of inflation -- usually seen around wars -- have been offset by periods of deflation. Particular inflation spikes can be seen at the time of the American Revolution, the War of 1812, the Civil War, World War I and World War II.

The inflation peaks and the ensuing post-war depressions and deflationary periods tied to the War of 1812, the Civil War and World War I show close to 60-year cycles, which is part of the reason some economists and analysts have been expecting a deflationary depression in the current period. There is some reason behind 30- and 60-year financial and business cycles, as the average difference in generations in the U.S. is 30 years, going back to the 1600s. Accordingly, it seems to take two generations to forget and repeat the mistakes of one's grandparents. Similar reasoning accounts for other cycles that tend to run in multiples of 30 years.

Aside from minor average annual price level declines in 1944 and 1955, the United States has not seen a deflationary period in consumer prices since before World War II. The reason for this is the same as to why there has not been a formal depression since before World War II: the abandonment of the gold standard and recognition by the Federal Reserve of the impact of monetary policy on the economy.

The gold standard was a system that automatically imposed and maintained monetary discipline. Excesses in one period would be followed by a flight of gold from the system and a resulting contraction in the money supply, economic activity and prices.

Faced with the Great Depression, and unable to stimulate the economy partially due to the monetary discipline imposed by the gold standard, Franklin Roosevelt used those issues as an excuse to abandon gold and to adopt close to a fully fiat currency under the auspices of what I call the debt standard, where the government effectively could print and spend whatever money it wanted to.

Roosevelt's actions were against the backdrop of the banking system being in a state of collapse. The Fed stood by twiddling its thumbs as banks failed and the money supply imploded. A depression collapsed into the Great Depression, with intensified price deflation. Importantly, a sharp decline in broad money supply is a prerequisite to goods price deflation. Messrs Greenspan and Bernanke are students of the Great Depression period and, as Fed Chairmen, respectively vowed not to allow a repeat of the 1930s money supply collapse.

Where Franklin Roosevelt abandoned the gold standard and its financial discipline for the debt standard, eleven successive administrations have pushed the debt standard to the limits of its viability. This is particularly evident in the GAAP-based financial statements of the U.S. government, which show the actual federal deficit at $4.6 trillion for 2006 alone, up from $3.5 trillion in 2005, with total federal obligations standing at $54.6 trillion (see this month's Reporting/Market Focus). With no ability to honor these obligations, the government effectively is bankrupt.

At such debt levels, the markets soon will recoil from lending Uncle Sam whatever he needs. Major buyers of U.S. Treasuries from outside the United States, such as Communist China, already are balking. These investors have funded nearly all net U.S. Treasury debt issuance of the last four years, putting to use the excess dollars flushed into the global markets by the United States' excessive and ever-expanding trade deficit. This practice, however, generated liquidity for the U.S. markets that has helped to depress long-term Treasury yields as well as to boost equity prices.

Although the U.S, government faces ultimate insolvency, it has the same way out taken by most countries faced with bankruptcy. It can print whatever money it needs to create, in order to meet its obligations. The effect of such action is a runaway inflation -- a hyperinflation -- with a resulting, effective full debasement of the U.S. dollar, the world's reserve currency.

In the present environment, the chances for the collapse in money supply needed to generate a consumer price deflation are nil. First, the discipline of the gold standard that helped trigger historical deflations is gone. Second, both from the standpoint of the government's fiscal irresponsibility and from the Fed's standpoint of providing the financial system with whatever liquidity is needed to keep it afloat, the U.S. central bank will be pushing broad money growth to new extremes, not containing it.

Please note: The usual Summary of Current Outlook is excluded this month, because the broad outlook largely is reviewed within the current text. Going forward, this section will be reconstituted next month and then repeated and updated each month following. Any monthly revisions to the text, however, will be highlighted, so that regular readers will have the option of not rereading text they have seen before. Nonetheless, the general outlook rarely changes. As a result, the repetition of some regular themes is necessary and will be found in the general text.


MARKETS PERSPECTIVE


The 2006 U.S. financial markets were distorted meaningfully by excessive dollar investing from outside the United States. This process is likely to reverse in 2007, tanking stocks, spiking interest rates, and pummeling the dollar. Indeed, key to the outlook is what happens to the U.S. dollar. I expect the greenback to be under massive selling pressure in the year ahead.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average, S&P 500, Wilshire 5000 and NASDAQ Composite showed respective annual gains of 16.3%, 15.9%, 13.9% and 9.5% as of year-end 2006. Those returns were against an actual (SGS Alternate) annual inflation rate of about 10%, a 13% gain in the Pound Sterling, a 23% gain in gold and a 46% gain in silver.

So, the stock indices generally kept up with or topped inflation, but they barely kept up with the dollar's declining purchasing power against the pound. Equities lagged sharply the return on precious metals.

Other than for the Fed's further tightening of 100 basis points in the year -- before "pausing" -- interest rates were unusually stable, ending the year with a negatively sloped yield curve (short-term yields higher than long-term yields). The constant-maturity yield on the 3-month Treasury bill moved from 4.08% at year-end 2005, to 5.10% at mid-year 2006 and held at 5.10% at year-end. For the same periods, the 10-year yield move from 4.39% to 5.15% to 4.70%.

As background to the above, the economy fell into deepening recession, while inflation moved to multi-year highs. Both problems largely were ignored by the equity and credit markets, while the inflation and economic difficulties played into the developing pressures favoring gold and hurting the dollar.

Some would contend that the inverted yield curve resulted from market anticipation of the unfolding recession, but the yield curve also has been depressed recently through periods of reportedly strong GDP growth.

What has been at work here is the heavy funding of U.S. Treasuries by foreign investors in recent years. Unwanted dollars glutting the global markets from the ongoing explosive growth in the U.S. trade deficit have been used by accommodating foreign central banks to buy nearly all net debt issuance by the U.S. Treasury in the last several years. Such has kept the U.S. markets flush with liquidity, U.S. long-term interest rates low, and U.S. equities heavily over-priced.

The markets have gotten so out of touch with reality that the yield spread on junk bonds over the "risk-free" Treasuries has narrowed beyond reason, especially if the economy is going into a recession, as an increasing number of analysts on Wall Street anticipate.

With rumblings from central banks as to how they would like to reallocate their currency reserves out of the U.S. dollar, the halcyon days of 2006 are not likely to survive long into the New Year.

U.S. Equities -- Stocks face a number of negative fundamentals, ranging from a recession that will decimate earnings, to higher interest rates that should follow from dollar and inflation problems. The equity markets are the least rational of those followed. I expect the major indices to suffer heavy selling and large declines before year-end 2007.

U.S. Credit Market -- Long-term interest rates did not rise as I predicted during the second half of 2006, but the outlook for higher long-term yields and a return to a positively sloped yield curve remain in play.

Reported inflation levels remain high enough to support traditional long-term yields 200 to 300 basis points above current levels. Look for yields to spike in tandem with heavy selling of the U.S. dollar.

Some in the markets are anticipating a Fed easing early in the New Year to counter the obvious slowing in economic activity. While that would be the expected Fed response, such a move is unlikely and would be short-lived if taken. More likely, the Fed's next move will be to raise interest rates in an effort to stabilize the dollar. Never before has the U.S. central bank faced a dollar crisis with the U.S. financial markets so heavily dependent on foreign capital for liquidity. Therein lies a big problem for the Fed and the equity and the credit markets.

U.S. Dollar -- Recent dollar selling has been relatively minor against what lies ahead. A major sell-off in the greenback is key to the looming breaks in the U.S. equity and credit markets. On a financial-weighted basis, the greenback should end 2007 down at least 30% from current levels, particularly against the Swiss franc, the British pound and the euro, in that order.

With such extremely negative, underlying dollar fundamentals, near-panic selling and disorderly markets remain a good possibility. Driving relative currency values are relative economic activity, trade balance, inflation, interest rates, government financial conditions and political stability. Each factor, including a U.S. recession, an extreme trade deficit, rising inflation, a Fed "pause," an uncontained fiscal crisis, and low Presidential approval ratings, suggests an atmosphere conducive to the heavy dumping of U.S. dollars.

Most of these negative fundamentals have been in place for some time. Dollar selling, however, has been contained as excess dollar inventories and selling pressures have built to the bursting point. When the dollar selling breaks, and that is just a matter of time, the selling will be massive and the currency movements extreme, despite any central bank intervention aimed at stabilizing the dollar's pace of decline. The currency crisis can break without any further warning. As to a trigger, shocks loom in economic and financial reporting, global political developments and the activities of various central bank.

Generally, the weaker the dollar, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. capital markets. As shown in the following graph, the U.S. dollar has continued inching lower in recent months.




[Note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS for methodology.]

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics' Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (FWD) is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For December, the monthly dollar average fell by 1.55%, after a 1.66% drop in November. The December 2006 average index level of 50.94 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 7.57% from December 2005, following an annual rate of decline of 6.70% in November.

Moving in the same direction, December' monthly average of the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (TWD) fell by 0.76% for the month, following November's 1.09% decline. December's level of 58.29 (base month of January 1985 = 100.00) was down 5.63% from the year before, against November's annual decline of 5.73%.

The bigger hit taken recently by the SGS series continues to be due to a much lighter weighting of the Canadian dollar in the FWD versus the TWD. The U.S. dollar has done relatively better against is Canadian counterpart.

Gold -- With the gold price averaging around $630 per troy ounce in December, the precious metal remains poised to strike to new highs in the New Year. While price volatility likely will remain extremely high, the underlying fundamentals in terms of dollar weakness, inflation and political instability all should be boosting the precious metals early in 2007.

As mentioned earlier, market concerns as to the Fed's intentions on inflation and debt monetization increasingly will come into play as the greenback faces heavy selling pressures. Underlying fundamentals easily cold push gold above the $1,000 mark in the year ahead, but its longer term outlook is for much higher prices.

Central manipulation, including talk of central gold sales, will mount rapidly as gold prices rise, occasionally slamming gold investors. Yet, central banks know well that they should be increasing their gold holdings, not liquidating them.

As discussed in previous SGS newsletters, and as will be further detailed in the Hyperinflation Series in the months ahead, the eventual complete collapse of the U.S. dollar -- the world's reserve currency -- will force the creation of a new international currency system. In order to gain public acceptance of a new system, gold is likely to be structured at the heart of it.





The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show December averages. As we go to press, gold is trading above $630, oil is over $61 and the Swiss franc is at $0.82. Look for all three measures to trade significantly higher in the first half of 2007.



REPORTING PERSPECTIVE


The Big Three Market Movers


While election-year political pressures on the statistical system have passed, needs have shifted heavily over to the Federal Reserve in its efforts to prevent a financial-market and financial-system meltdown. Accordingly, upcoming releases of the major series still will be subject to massaging for the perceived needs of the markets. Nonetheless, the reality of the underlying inflationary recession has become increasingly evident in the popularly followed economic series. Against lagging market expectations, though, most near-term economic reporting will continue to surprise the markets on the downside, while most inflation reporting should surprise the markets on the upside.

Employment/Unemployment -- As discussed in the December 11th Flash Update, the BLS reported seasonally-adjusted November payrolls up by 132,000 (134,000 net of revisions) +/- 106,000, following October's revised gain of 79,000 (previously 92,000). Once again, unusual upward revisions were thrown into prior period reporting. On a year-to-year basis, annual payroll growth slowed sharply to 1.3% in November from 1.5% in October.

The November 2006 payroll growth included a 29,000 upside bias provided by the net birth/death model. In November 2005, the bias was 21,000, and that increased to 63,000 in December, suggesting slight upside bias pressure on the December 2006 reporting.

The household survey, which counts the number of people who have a job, as opposed to the number of jobs counted in the payroll survey, reported a seasonally-adjusted employment gain of 277,000. That number that cannot be reconciled with the payroll data.

The unemployment portion of the household data showed the seasonally-adjusted November U.3 unemployment rate at 4.47% +/- 0.2%, up from 4.42% in October. Unadjusted U.3 rose to 4.3% from 4.1%, while the unadjusted broader U.6 measure rose to 7.8% from 7.6%. Adjusted U.6 eased to 8.0% from 8.1%. Including the long-term "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton administration, total unemployment remains roughly 12%.

The latest report was against a background of an ongoing collapse of growth in help-wanted advertising, intensifying weakness in new claims for unemployment insurance and weak purchasing managers employment indices (see the respective sections).

Next Release (January 5): While the payroll survey should be weaker than expected in December, the household survey will include annual revisions to seasonal factors related to unemployment reporting. Such allows any level of unemployment that the BLS cares to report.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) -- The "final" estimate revision of annualized real growth for third-quarter 2006 reflected little more than statistical noise, revising to 1.96% +/- 3% from 2.21% in the "preliminary" estimate, but still up from the initial reporting of 1.58%. Second-quarter growth was 2.56%, where first quarter growth was 5.58%. The growth estimates for the latest two quarters were statistically indistinguishable from contractions, allowing, with increasingly likely revisions, for eventual formal recession reporting with numbers already in place from the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA).

In terms of annual growth, the third-quarter's reported pace revised to 2.96% from 3.02% (initially 2.86%), down from 3.51% in the second quarter. Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS Alternate GDP measure suggests economic reality is much weaker, with a year-to-year annual contraction of still roughly 1.5% for the third-quarter GDP, deepening from a 1.0% drop in the second quarter (see the graph in the Alternate Reality section of the Overview -- Opening Comments).

The GDP inflation rate (deflator) in the third quarter remained understated at 1.88%, revised from 1.77% (initially 1.83%), versus 3.30% in the prior quarter, despite annualized seasonally-adjusted CPI in the third-quarter of 2.94% and of 4.97% in the second quarter.

Growth rates in the alternate GDP measures, the broader Gross National Product (GNP) and the theoretically-equivalent Gross Domestic Income (GDI), also were revised. Third-quarter annualized real GNP growth revised to 1.76% from an initial estimate of 1.91%, down from 2.34% in the second quarter. GNP includes trade flows in factor income (interest and dividend payments) and tends to be hurt by the net-debtor status of the United States.

GDI, which is the income-side equivalent of the consumption-driven GDP, grew at a revised annualized real rate of 3.21% (initially 3.43%) in the third quarter, up from a 0.47% contraction in the second quarter.

Next Release (January 31): The "advance" estimate of fourth-quarter 2006 GDP should be weaker than the third-quarter's showing and to the downside of market expectations, despite what surely will be an exaggerated low level of inflation used to deflate the quarterly growth rate.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) -- As discussed in the December 16th Alert, the BLS reported the seasonally-adjusted November CPI-U was unchanged (down 0.15% unadjusted) from October, following October's 0.49% adjusted monthly drop. Of significance, seasonally-adjusted gasoline fell by 1.6%. In conjunction with the retail sales report, this suggests an understatement of gasoline inflation in the CPI by 3.9% in November, and a corresponding overall 0.2% understatement of the CPI, which is about how much the CPI came in below market expectations.

On a year-to-year basis, annual CPI-U inflation (I.6) rose to 1.97% in November from 1.31% in October. The eight levels of annual inflation, I.1 to I.8, are shown in the table in the Alternate Reality section, as is the plot of the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation number.

The "experimental" Chained Consumer Price Index (C-CPI-U), the fully substitution based CPI that presumably is the eventual replacement for current CPI reporting, showed annual inflation (I.5) of 1.92% in November, up from 1.56% in October. The annual C-CPI-U inflation dropped below that of the CPI-U after two months of topping the popular measure. Nonetheless, the unusual reporting here highlights a problem in the gimmicked CPI-U weightings.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton methodology (I.7), annual CPI growth was about 5.4% in November, up from 4.7% in October. The SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure (I.8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies of recent decades, was 9.4% in November, up from 8.9% in October.

Next Release (January 18): Inflation has not peaked, but it will take several months into 2007 to regain its recent high annual rates. With seasonally-adjusted CPI-U down by 0.1% in monthly December 2005 CPI reporting, any monthly reporting above that for December 2006 will add directly onto the annual CPI-U inflation rate.

Inflation surprises still should come in on the upside of weak expectations, both for full as well as core numbers. Increasingly reflecting the slow process of oil prices permeating nearly all levels of business activity, upside movement in core rates, in particular, will tend to shock the markets.


Other Troubled Key Series


Federal Deficit -- As discussed in this month's Reporting/Market Focus, the federal government's fiscal 2006 (fiscal year-end September 30th) deficit, prepared based on generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), widened to $4.6 trillion from 2005's $3.5 trillion. Such was nearly 19-times the level of the officially-gimmicked 2006 federal budget deficit of $248.2 billion, which was down $70.8 billion from 2005's $318.5 billion.

As a separate measure from the GAAP-based numbers (on an accrual basis) and the official deficit reporting (on a cash basis), the change in gross federal debt is a fair indicator of actual net cash outlays by the government. As of fiscal year-end 2006, the gross federal debt stood at $8.507 trillion, up by $574 billion from 2005, which in turn was up $554 billion from 2004.

For the rolling 12 months through November 2006, the gimmicked deficit was $242.8 billion versus $333.6 in November 2005. As of November 30, 2006, the gross federal debt stood at $8.633 trillion, up by $536 billion from November 2005, which in turn was up $573 billion from November 2004.

Even the official federal deficit should inflate this year, as government finances suffer increasingly from tax revenue losses due to the intensifying recession and relative tax receipt declines after the expiration of recent tax incentives. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy's mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance -- Annual change in initial claims continued moving into less-negative territory (an economic negative) due to sharp deterioration in recent numbers. New claims averaged over the last eight weeks are up 1.5% from last year, but year-ago comparisons using the 17-week moving average still are distorted by last year's effects of Hurricane Katrina passing through the data. On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended December 23rd, annual change narrowed to a 6.9% decline, from a 7.7% drop as of the November 18th week.

More often than not, week-to-week volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly numbers is due to the Labor Department's efforts to seasonally adjust these numbers around holiday periods. The Labor Department has demonstrated an inability to do such adjusting successfully. When the new claims series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings -- Spiked minimally by a 0.2% monthly CPI understatement, November's seasonally-adjusted real earnings rose by 0.2% against October's distorted 1.3% gain. Similarly biased annual growth slowed to 2.6% in November from 3.2% in October.

Variations in the poor quality of reported CPI growth account for most month-to-month volatility in this series. Allowing for the major upside biases built into the CPI-W inflation measure used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series continues to signal ongoing severe financial strain on U.S. households and continuing recession.

Retail Sales -- As discussed in the December 16th Alert, the Census Bureau switched to its new sampling for estimating retail sales. On the new basis, seasonally-adjusted November retail sales rose by 1.0% plus or minus a wider error margin of 0.8%, formally 0.7%, and following a revised October decline of 0.1% that had been restated on the new basis to a contraction of 0.4%, against an old basis initial reporting of a 0.2% drop. Of note, gasoline station sales rose by 2.3% from October, suggesting that a like increase in gasoline prices should have been reflected in the November CPI. That did not happen.

When inflation-adjusted year-to-year growth in retail sales falls below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation), such signals recession. That signal was generated in June 2006. Before inflation adjustment, November growth was up 5.6% from the year before, a 3.6% real growth rate net of the heavily understated annual CPI growth.

Next Release (January 12): December retail sales should come in below expectations, generally reflecting the recession and a less-than-robust holiday shopping season. Inflation-adjusted growth should be negative on a monthly basis, with annual real growth also slowing sharply.

Industrial Production -- As discussed in the December 16th Alert, the Fed went through its annual benchmark revision to industrial production, and found, as it usually does, that production activity in recent years had been weaker than previously reported. Such suggests an eventual downward revision to growth rates of the last several years as currently reported for the GDP.

The seasonally-adjusted 0.2% monthly gain for November industrial production followed a flat October that previously had been up by 0.2%. November annual growth slowed to 3.8%.

Although the manufacturing sector was in contraction, per the November purchasing managers survey, such did not show up in the Fed's survey. Watch out for possible distortions to the December industrial production number from the unusually mild weather in the Northeast.

Next Release (January 17): Look for industrial production to contract in December, reflecting the recession, the purchasing managers survey, and utility usage distortions from unusual December weather patterns. Monthly contractions in this series shortly should become regular.

New Orders for Durable Goods -- The highly volatile durable goods orders rebounded in November by a seasonally-adjusted 1.9% (2.0% net of revisions), after a revised 8.2% (was 8.3%) decline in October. November's orders were up just 0.3% from the year before, a near-recessionary level for a second month.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders were down 0.2% in November, following October's 14.8% drop (previously down 15.6%). November's annual growth rate for nondefense capital goods orders was down a recessionary 7.7%.

Durable goods orders lost its status as a solid leading economic indicator when the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders.

Trade Balance -- As discussed in the December 16th Alert, the unbelievable $5.4 billion monthly decline in the seasonally-adjusted October trade deficit to $58.9 billion from September's $64.3 billion was more than accounted for by a plunge in reported oil import prices, without which, the trade deficit would have risen to $64.9 billion. The problem with the report was that accelerated reporting of dropping oil prices for imports already had fully accounted for the recent decline in oil prices.

Of significance to the "advance" estimate of fourth-quarter 2006 GDP, which is commonly reported net of inflation, this deficit "narrowing" due to prices will really be a negative, instead of a positive, for the government's GDP growth estimate.

Next Release (January 10): The November trade deficit should rebound some from October's understatement, rising beyond consensus forecasts. The months ahead will see a pattern of regularly increasing deficits that once again will be setting new records before second-quarter 2007.

Consumer Confidence -- December confidence measures again were mixed. The Conference Board's November consumer confidence -- adjusted by suspect seasonal factors -- rose by 3.5%, after a revised 0.2% increase in November. The unadjusted University of Michigan's consumer sentiment declined by 0.4%, following a 1.6% drop in November.

On a year-to-year basis into November, the damage done to confidence in 2005 by the severe hurricane season largely was responsible for the near-term gains seen in annual growth patterns. On a three-month moving-average basis for December, annual growth in the Conference Board's measure eased to 11.2% from 16.7% in November, while the University of Michigan number was up by 12.2%, versus a 16.5% gain in November. These lagging, not leading, indicators still are suggesting that the economy is in trouble.

Short-Term Credit Measures -- Annual growth in consumer credit showed some problems, particularly against the backdrop of what was the beginning of the holiday shopping season. Short-term commercial credit measures, however, remained strong, holding double-digit percentage annual growth.

Growth in seasonally-adjusted consumer credit declined by 0.1% for the month of October, with annual growth easing to 4.2%, from a revised 4.3% (was 3.7%) in September. Without real (inflation-adjusted) growth in personal income, growth in the real personal consumption component of GDP cannot be supported, except by debt expansion or savings liquidation. Consumer debt expansion, though increasing on an annual basis, has stalled on a monthly basis, suggesting a serious constraint on economic growth.

Annual growth in commercial paper outstanding remained strong in November at 17.8%, up from October's 17.6%. Annual growth in commercial and industrial loans slowed slightly to 15.0% in November from a revised 15.4% (was 14.9%) in October. Strong growth in the commercial credit measures can signal credit needs tied either to rising sales and receivables/inventory needs, or to slowing sales and slowing collections and involuntarily rising inventories.

Producer Price Index (PPI) -- Running somewhat counter to the serious understatement of monthly CPI inflation, the seasonally-adjusted November finished goods PPI jumped by 2.0% (0.8% unadjusted). At work appears to be a much needed catch up in the annual seasonal distortions (adjustments) published by the BLS. November's increase offset October's 1.6% monthly decline (down 1.2% unadjusted), but still was shy of recovering levels seen before September's 1.3% drop (down by 1.1% unadjusted). November's annual PPI inflation rebounded to a gain of 0.9% following October's 1.6% contraction. Seasonally-adjusted November intermediate goods rose by 0.7% for the month, while crude goods exploded by 15.7%.

Next Release (January 17): Despite the large component of random volatility in monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months generally will exceed still-depressed expectations. December reporting, should continue a general upside trend in monthly and annual PPI reporting. Core inflation also should resume offering upside surprises to consensus forecasts, despite the increasingly poor quality of reporting.


Better-Quality Numbers


The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders -- The key November index components fell to outright contraction levels (below 50.0) for the first time since 2003. For example, November new orders fell 6.5% to 48.7 from 52.1 in October. As an SGS early warning indicator of a pending major economic shift, the new orders measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating a signal of pending recession.

Distortions from suspect seasonal-adjustment factors from the Commerce Department are overcome by viewing the series using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the November new orders index fell by 13.7% following October's 9.0% contraction. The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004.

Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading below 50.0 indicates contracting new orders.

Moving in tandem with new orders, production and employment, the overall November ISM manufacturing index dropped to 49.5 from October's 51.2. An index level below 50.0 indicates a contracting manufacturing sector. The November employment component moved to 49.2 from October's 50.6 reading.

The service-sector ISM index does not have much meaning related to overall business activity, since new order activity at law firms, hospitals or fast-food restaurants have little obvious relationship to broad economic activity. That said, the overall November services index rose to 58.9 from October's level of 57.1.

Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. The November employment component notched higher to 51.6 from 51.0 from 53.6 in October. The prices paid component is covered in the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) -- The November help-wanted advertising index held at 30, the same as in October, but September's initial reading of 30 revised to 29, the lowest level seen since Sputnik was first orbiting Earth.

The series indicates rapidly deteriorating employment conditions. While the index never recovered from the 2000 recession, its recent, deepening plunge -- annual change is down 21.3% on a three-month moving average basis -- signals a renewed and rapid contraction in economic activity.

Housing Starts -- Although seasonally-adjusted November housing starts rose by 6.7% +/- 10.1% for the month, annual change plunged by 25.5%, following October's 27.3% decline. The annual change on a three-month moving-average basis has declined to a year-to-year drop of 24.3%, the worst reading since the depths of the 1990/1991 recession. Such continued to generate an intensifying recession signal.

In related data, respective rates of annual contraction for November new- and existing-home sales were 15.3% and 10.5%. Although the annual rates of change were less negative than in October, the indicated activity remained consistent with a sharp economic downturn.

Money Supply -- Annual growth in M3 accelerated to 10.8% in December, up from an upwardly revised 10.4% in November. The increasing upturn in M3 growth would be enough to begin tickling inflation concerns in the financial markets, if only the Fed were still reporting M3. The reported M3 growth is per the SGS Continuing M3 Series reporting, with December's number estimated on three weeks of data. The upward revision to November's initial annual growth estimate of 10.1% reflected upward revisions to Federal Reserve reporting of M2 and large time deposits at commercial banks.




[Note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the ongoing SGS estimates of M3, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS for methodology.]

The December data are based on three weeks of data for the month. Before inflation adjustment, monthly seasonally-adjusted December M1 and M2 respectively fell an estimated 0.9% and rose by 0.5%, after a respective 0.5% decline and 0.5% increase in November, and 0.8% and 0.9% gains in October. Month-to-month M3 change was approximately 1.1% for December and 1.0% in November.

Annual growth in December for monthly M1 fell by 1.0%, versus a 0.5% contraction in November, while annual M2 growth rose held at 5.1%. Net of still-distorted annual CPI inflation, real annual growth rates for December M1 and M2 remained consistent with the ongoing recession, with December's M1 and M2 year-to-year rates of change down by roughly 3.1% and up 2.9%, respectively. On a three-month moving-average basis, the December inflation-adjusted annual rates of change were down 2.4% and up 3.1%, levels that still were underwater using the old-style CPI.

Inflation Indicators

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices -- In line with surging PPI reporting, but counter to the soft monthly data on the CPI, the pricing components of both purchasing managers surveys rose sharply. On the manufacturing side, the November prices paid diffusion index jumped 13.8% to a reading of 53.5 from October's 47.0. On a three-month moving average basis, November's annual change was down by 30.0% versus October's 19.4% contraction.

On the non-manufacturing side, the November prices diffusion index rose 7.1% to 55.6 from 51.9 in October. On a three-month moving average basis, November's annual change was down by 29.6% against October's annual 17.6% decline.

Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflationary pressure. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising inflation.

Oil Prices -- The monthly-average West Texas Intermediate Spot (St. Louis Fed) rose to $59.37 per barrel in November, up 0.8% from October's $58.88. The November average was up 1.8% from the year before, against October's annual 5.6% rate of decline. Oil generally traded above $60.00 per barrel in December, with the nearby contract closing at $61.05 on Friday. The December monthly average will be up both on month-to-month and year-to-year bases.

Spot oil prices will continue to gyrate, but generally will move higher in the year ahead. Such reflects OPEC manipulations aimed at price support and Middle East tensions that are mounting anew, now that the election has passed. Further, gone are annual price change comparisons against the market distortions of a year ago from the devastating 2005 hurricane season.

Also in play is the dollar-based pricing of oil. U.S. Dollar weakness is the equivalent of an oil price cut for oil purchasers denominated in an appreciating currency. Market forces tend to balance out such matters by pushing dollar-based oil prices higher. Even worse for the U.S. markets, though, is the developing trend of pricing oil in something other than dollars. Where Iran has moved to euro pricing, other OPEC members will not be far behind if the dollar faces heavy selling in the New Year.

Despite recent extreme volatility, oil prices will remain at highly inflationary levels and will continue as a major contributing factor to the United States' inflation problems. The historically high oil prices still are working their way through all levels of U.S. economic activity, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. Cost pressures already have only just started to show up in the so-called "core" inflation measures. Again, these broad inflationary pressures will remain intact despite any near-term oil price volatility.

Please note that while downside oil price movements are picked up more quickly and fully by the BLS in its inflation measures than are upside movements, the general trend in both CPI and PPI reporting -- at both the aggregate and core levels -- will be to the upside at least through mid-2007.


Background Material/Reporting Coverage


The coverage and available prior material are detailed below for various series. Data reported with a less-than-monthly frequency also are updated here or in the Reporting/Market Focus.

Quarterly/Annual Reporting -- Most series analyzed are published on a monthly or weekly basis. Followed economic/market series that are published with less-than-monthly frequency include:

Annual:

* Financial Statements of the United States Government (see the Supplement to December 2005 SGS; latest analysis is the SGS Alert of December 16, 2006 and the current Market/Reporting Focus for the December 2006 SGS).

* Income Variance/Dispersion (most recent analysis was is in the September 2006 SGS; next analysis is due September 2007).

Quarterly:

* Flow of Funds Accounts of the United States (the most recent analysis was in the October 2006 SGS; the next analysis is due in the January 2007 SGS).

Reporting/Market Foci -- The various economic and financial-market series are being addressed in a monthly "Reporting/Market Focus," with this month's analysis covering the 2006 GAAP-based financial statements of the U.S. Government. Employment, GDP, CPI and the Federal Deficit separately are explored in the background article "A Primer on Government Economic Reports," available on the Home page of www.shadowstats.com.

The series detailed so far in the Reporting Foci or background articles are listed below. The referenced SGS publications are available on the Archives page of www.shadowstats.com.

* Consumer Confidence (November 2004 SGS).
* Consumer Price Index (an original background article [updated October 2006], October 2005 SGS, alternate numbers introduced August 2006 SGS).
* Credit Measures, Short-Term (August 2005 SGS).
* Durable Goods, New Orders for (May 2006 SGS).
* Employment/Unemployment (an original background article, alternate measures (April 2005 SGS).
* Federal Deficit (an original background article, update in the Alert of July 7, 2005, update in Supplement to December 2005 SGS, update in Alert of December 16, 2006 and the December 2006 SGS).
* Gross Domestic Product (an original background article, alternate numbers introduced August 2006).
* Help Wanted Advertising (January 2006 SGS).
* Housing Starts and related housing statistics (June 2006 SGS, November 2006).
* Income Variance/Dispersion (September 2005 SGS, September 2006 SGS).
* Industrial Production (January 2005 SGS).
* Money Supply (Part I / SGS Early Warning System - May 2005 SGS, Part II - June 2005 SGS, M3 update November 2005 Supplement, M2 update March 2006 SGS, M3 continuing series introduced August 2006).
* Producer Price Index (April 2006 SGS).
* Productivity (October 2006 SGS).
* Purchasing Managers Survey (February 2006 SGS).
* Retail Sales (March 2005 SGS).
* SGS Early Warning System (May 2005 SGS, June 2005 SGS).
* Trade Balance (December 2004 SGS).
* Unemployment Insurance, Initial Claims for (February 2005 SGS).
* U.S. Dollar Indices, Financial- and Trade-Weighted (July 2005 SGS).


Reporting/Market Focus (December 2006) -- U.S. Government's Fiscal Condition Continues Its Collapse


The text of the December 16, 2006 Alert related to the government's GAAP-based 2006 financial statements is repeated below. The following paragraph is added for clarification purposes:

The U.S. Treasury heavily reported the rapidly increasing shortfalls in the unfunded liabilities for Social Security and Medicare in its financial statements, but referred to the liabilities as off balance sheet. The actual $4.6 trillion deficit for 2006 is calculated with those numbers on balance sheet, as the year-to-year change in the negative net worth of the federal government shown in the table below.

That accounting is what a U.S. corporation would have to show. The Administration's rationale as to why Social Security and Medicare should remain off balance sheet runs along the lines that the government always has the option of changing the Social Security and Medicare programs. That said, there clearly is no one in political Washington willing to go public with the concept of eliminating or substantially cutting those programs.

December 16th Alert on the 2006 Financial Statement of the United States Government:

2006 GAAP-Based Federal Deficit Jumps to $4.6 Trillion Total Federal Obligations at $54.6 Trillion


Yesterday, the U.S. Treasury published its annual generally-accepted-accounting-principles (GAAP) basis financial statement, signed off on by Treasury Secretary Henry M. Paulson, Jr. The consolidated statements show that the actual annual federal deficit for fiscal year ended September 30, 2006 was $4.6 trillion, up from $3.5 trillion in 2005. Total federal obligations at year-end were $54.6 trillion, up from $50.0 trillion in 2005.

The actual deficit number was nearly 19-times the size of the gimmicked "official" deficit for 2006 of $248 billion. Total obligations were 4.2-times annual U.S. GDP.

The above GAAP numbers include accounting for the year-to-year change in the net present value of unfunded liabilities in social insurance programs such as Social Security and Medicare. The Treasury notes that these liabilities are "not considered liabilities on the balance sheet." While Treasury has pushed for such an accounting standard for the federal government, it would not have a choice as to reporting these obligations if it were a corporation such as General Motors.

Net of the obligations for Social Security and Medicare, the GAAP-based deficit narrowed to $450 billion in 2006 from $760 billion 2005. Such is not credible give the bookkeeping for Katrina relief and the Iraq War. While these numbers likely involve some accounting shenanigans -- as did the last reported annual deficit decline in the 2004 -- the method is not obvious given a quick review of the 172-page document. The issue will be looked at more closely in the December SGS. Nonetheless the published estimates are roughly double the "official" deficits reported for 2005 and 2006.

The 2006 GAAP statement can be found on the Treasury's Web site, under Financial Management Services at: http://www.fms.treas.gov/fr/index.html

   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
          U.S. Government - Alternate Fiscal Deficit and Debt
                       Reported by U.S. Treasury
          Dollars are either billions or trillions, as indicated.
           Sources: U.S. Treasury, Shadow Government Statistics.
   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
           Formal      GAAP      GAAP       GAAP                   Total
           Cash-      Ex-SS    With SS     Federal     Gross      Federal
   Fiscal  Based       Etc.      Etc.     Negative    Federal  Obligations
   Year*  Deficit    Deficit   Deficit    Net Worth     Debt       (GAAP)
   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
          ($Bil)     ($Bil)    ($Tril)    ($Tril)     ($Tril)     ($Tril)
          ------     ------     ------     ------      ------      ------
   2006   $247.7     $449.5     $ 4.6      $53.1       $8.5        $54.6
   2005    318.5      760.3r      3.5       48.5r       7.9         50.0r
   2004    412.3      615.6      11.0r**    45.0r       7.4         46.4r
   2003    374.8      667.6       3.0r      34.0r       6.8         36.2
   2002    157.8      364.5       1.5       31.0r       6.2         32.7
   -----------------------------------------------------------------------
   * Fiscal year ended September 30th.
   ** Estimated at $3.4 trillion, excluding one-time unfunded setup
   costs of the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement, and
   Modernization Act of 2003 (enacted December 2003).
   r - Revised prior-period data as shown in the 2006 Report.
   -----------------------------------------------------------------------


The GAAP numbers in the above table are derived from or published in the tables on pages 3, 6 and 13 of the Report,

As usual, the Government Accountability Office (GAO) -- formerly the General Accounting Office -- would not certify the statement, due to "material weaknesses in financial reporting" (page 27). The GAO, which uses a less expensive definition (on an open versus closed group basis) than the Treasury in its Social Security and Medicare numbers, noted (page 28): "that the Federal government's fiscal exposures total approximately $50 trillion as of September 20, 2006, an increase of about $4 trillion over September 30, 2005, and up from about $20 trillion as of September 30, 2000.

As noted in SGS analyses of prior years' statements, the current GAAP-based deficit is beyond containment in the present environment. Severe political constraints limit any meaningful reduction of the Social Security and Medicare programs, while addressing the issue with taxes is impossible. If federal income taxes were adjusted to as to seize 100% of all salaries and wages earned in the United States, the government's operations still would be in deficit. Contrary to the suggestion of Treasury Secretary Paulson, the United States cannot grow its way out this shortfall. The problem is out of control.


Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for January -- Fudged Flow of Funds Accounts?


Questionable statistical practices at the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System go well beyond the elimination of M3 reporting. Unusual patterns and revisions are showing up in the Fed's Flow of Funds Accounts that show the sources and uses of cash and credit within the U.S. financial system and economy. These anomalies are explored.

___________________________________________


January's "Shadow Government Statistics" newsletter is targeted for release near the end of the month. Its posting on the Web site, as well as all interim Flash Updates and Alerts, will be advised immediately by e-mail.

Flash Update

Saturday, December 30th, 2006
New Year Faces Financial Peril/Year-End Newsletter by January 2nd

The team here at Shadow Government Statistics extends to all best wishes for a very happy, healthy and prosperous New Year!

Enjoying the early-Spring-like weather of New Jersey, I am finishing the December/Year-End SGS newsletter that will be posted on the Web site by January 2nd. Updated Alternate Data for M3, the trade- vs. financial-weighted U.S. dollar and the "final" estimate of third-quarter GDP already have been posted.

Although estimated on three weeks worth of data, December M3 and an upward revision to November's annual growth show a pattern of accelerating growth in the formerly broadest of U.S. monetary aggregates. Therein is a hint of what will be one of the major, ongoing market concerns in 2007: inflation. The other key economic features of the year ahead will be a deepening, structural recession, and a U.S. government fiscal disaster careening out of control.

Where 2006 closed out the year with higher equity prices and somewhat higher interest rates, it also saw a significant surge in the price of gold and the early stages of a major weakening of U.S. dollar. The U.S. equity and credit face bleak prospects in 2007, with strong upside potential for gold and a massive downside potential for the U.S. dollar.

As well as assessing current economic and financial conditions, the forthcoming newsletter will look at the prospects of the current circumstance evolving into a hyperinflationary depression as opposed to a deflationary depression.

While the preceding probably does not qualify as holiday cheer, the good news is that forewarned, much can be done to preserve assets and liquidity. Once the financial storm has passed, extraordinary investment opportunities will abound.

Details follow in the newsletter.

Again, Happy New Year!

John

Walter J. "John" Williams www.shadowstats.com

Alert

Saturday, December 16th, 2006
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

A L E R T

December 16, 2006

__________

2006 GAAP-Based Federal Deficit Jumps to $4.6 Trillion

Total Federal Obligations at $54.6 Trillion

Energy Pricing Gimmicks Distort CPI and Trade Deficit


__________


The SGS-Alternate Measure of Consumer Inflation has been updated on the Alternate Data page. The December SGS is targeted for month-end publication, and it will be slimmed down some, the same material but with less repetition of major points, per subscriber suggestion. The coming issue will focus on the risks of hyperinflation versus deflation. Best wishes to all for a most joyous holiday season! -- John Williams


2006 Financial Statement of the United States Government


Yesterday, the U.S. Treasury published its annual generally-accepted-accounting-principles (GAAP) basis financial statement, signed off on by Treasury Secretary Henry M. Paulson, Jr. The consolidated statements show that the actual annual federal deficit for fiscal year ended September 30, 2006 was $4.6 trillion, up from $3.5 trillion in 2005. Total federal obligations at year-end were $54.6 trillion, up from $50.0 trillion in 2005.

The actual deficit number was nearly 19-times the size of the gimmicked "official" deficit for 2006 of $248 billion. Total obligations were 4.2-times annual U.S. GDP.

The above GAAP numbers include accounting for the year-to-year change in the net present value of unfunded liabilities in social insurance programs such as Social Security and Medicare. The Treasury notes that these liabilities are "not considered liabilities on the balance sheet." While Treasury has pushed for such an accounting standard for the federal government, it would not have a choice as to reporting these obligations if it were a corporation such as General Motors.

Net of the obligations for Social Security and Medicare, the GAAP-based deficit narrowed to $450 billion in 2006 from $760 billion 2005. Such is not credible give the bookkeeping for Katrina relief and the Iraq War. While these numbers likely involve some accounting shenanigans -- as did the last reported annual deficit decline in the 2004 -- the method is not obvious given a quick review of the 172-page document. The issue will be looked at more closely in the December SGS. Nonetheless the published estimates are roughly double the "official" deficits reported for 2005 and 2006.

The 2006 GAAP statement can be found on the Treasury's Web site, under Financial Management Services at: http://www.fms.treas.gov/fr/index.html

U.S. Government - Alternate Fiscal Deficit and Debt
Reported by U.S. Treasury
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
       Dollars are either billions or trillions, as indicated.
        Sources: U.S. Treasury, Shadow Government Statistics.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
        Formal      GAAP      GAAP       GAAP                   Total
        Cash-      Ex-SS    With SS     Federal     Gross      Federal
Fiscal  Based       Etc.      Etc.     Negative    Federal  Obligations
Year*  Deficit    Deficit   Deficit    Net Worth     Debt       (GAAP)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
       ($Bil)     ($Bil)    ($Tril)    ($Tril)     ($Tril)     ($Tril)
       ------     ------     ------     ------      ------      ------
2006   $247.7     $449.5     $ 4.6      $53.1       $8.5        $54.6
2005    318.5      760.3r      3.5       48.5r       7.9         50.0r
2004    412.3      615.6      11.0r**    45.0r       7.4         46.4r
2003    374.8      667.6       3.0r      34.0r       6.8         36.2
2002    157.8      364.5       1.5       31.0r       6.2         32.7
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
* Fiscal year ended September 30th.
** Estimated at $3.4 trillion, excluding one-time unfunded setup
costs of the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement, and
Modernization Act of 2003 (enacted December 2003).
r - Revised prior-period data as shown in the 2006 Report.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------


The GAAP numbers in the above table are derived from or published in the tables on pages 3, 6 and 13 of the Report,

As usual, the Government Accountability Office (GAO) -- formerly the General Accounting Office -- would not certify the statement, due to "material weaknesses in financial reporting" (page 27). The GAO, which uses a less expensive definition (on an open versus closed group basis) than the Treasury in its Social Security and Medicare numbers, noted (page 28): "that the Federal government's fiscal exposures total approximately $50 trillion as of September 20, 2006, an increase of about $4 trillion over September 30, 2005, and up from about $20 trillion as of September 30, 2000.

As noted in SGS analyses of prior years' statements, the current GAAP-based deficit is beyond containment in the present environment. Severe political constraints limit any meaningful reduction of the Social Security and Medicare programs, while addressing the issue with taxes is impossible. If federal income taxes were adjusted to as to seize 100% of all salaries and wages earned in the United States, the government's operations still would be in deficit. Contrary to the suggestion of Treasury Secretary Paulson, the United States cannot grow its way out this shortfall. The problem is out of control. Further detail follows in the December SGS.

Last Week's Unusual Economic Reporting


Trade. The unbelievable $5.4 billion monthly decline in the seasonally-adjusted October trade deficit to $58.9 billion from September's $64.3 billion was more than accounted for by an equally preposterous plunge in reported oil import prices, which was on top of price declines in the prior two months that more than accounted for oil's recent drop. Without the phony oil price decline, the trade deficit would have risen to $64.9 billion. Of significance, since the reported GDP is adjusted for inflation, this deficit "narrowing" should really be a negative, instead of a positive, for the government's estimate of real (inflation-adjusted) fourth-quarter economic growth.

Retail Sales. The Census Bureau switched to a new sample for its retail sales estimates, which will be discussed in the December SGS. On the new basis, seasonally-adjusted November retail sales rose by 1.0% plus or minus a wider error margin of 0.8%, formally 0.7%, and following a revised October decline of 0.1% that had been restated on the new basis to a contraction of 0.4% against an old basis initial reporting of a 0.2% drop. November was up 5.6% from the year before. Of note, gasoline station sales rose by 2.3% from October, suggesting a like increase in gasoline prices.

Consumer Price Index. The seasonally-adjusted November CPI-U was unchanged from October, (down 0.15% unadjusted), following October's 0.49% adjusted monthly drop. Of significance, seasonally-adjusted gasoline fell by 1.6%. In conjunction with the retail sales report, this suggests an understatement of gasoline inflation by 3.9% in November, and a corresponding 0.2% understatement of the CPI, which is about how much the CPI came in below market expectations. On a year-to-year basis, annual CPI inflation rose to 1.97% in November, up from 1.31% in October. Annual inflation for the SGS Alternate Measure was 9.4% in November, up from 8.9% in October.

Industrial Production. The Fed went through its annual benchmark revision to industrial production, finding that growth in recent years had been weaker than previously report. The seasonally adjusted 0.2% gain for November follows a flat October that previously had been up by 0.2%. Annual growth now has slowed to 3.8%

Ongoing deterioration in the inflationary recession continues. More complete details follow in the December SGS.

___________________________________________


December's "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter is targeted for month-end release.

Flash Update

Monday, December 11th, 2006
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Flash Update

December 11, 2006

__________

M3 Growth Tops 10%

Inflation Signals Turn Higher Again

First Post-Election Jobs Data Show Slowing Economy


__________


The ongoing SGS M3 series and the monthly averages on the FRB trade-weighted and SGS financial-weighted dollars have been updated on the Alternate Data page. Assuming the U.S. Treasury publishes its 2006 Financial Report of the U.S. Government (GAAP-based accounting) as planned on December 15th, an Alert covering same will be published next weekend. -- John Williams

Economic releases of the last week or so continued showing a rapidly deepening recession, along with early confirmation of inflation resuming its upward trend. Beyond ongoing softness in the dollar and some upside movement in oil prices threatening inflation, broad money supply growth is accelerating to the upside.

October consumer credit showed a seasonally-adjusted monthly contraction, one that surprised market expectations and bode poorly for booming holiday sales.

The manufacturing purchasing managers survey (ISM) dropped below the contraction/growth index level of 50.0, to 49.5 in November from 51.2 in October. Such was the first time the series had indicated an outright contraction in manufacturing since April 2003, when the economy was coming out of what will prove to have been the first dip of a severe double-dip recession. Readings below 50.0 usually coincide with recessions and often indicate looming downturns in the Federal Reserve's industrial production series.

All the ISM measures are diffusion indices, where a reading below 50.0 indicates a contraction. Among the more important component measures, new orders fell to 48.7 from 52.1, and employment dropped to 49.2 from 50.8. Of interest, the prices paid component reversed direction and rose to 53.5 from 47.0.

The November non-manufacturing survey, which has little value as an economic indicator (see November SGS), rose to 58.9 from 57.1. Its employment measure, however, remained weak at 51.6 versus 51.0 the prior month, and its inflation measure also turned higher, coming in at 55.6 versus 51.9 in October.

Further on the employment front, the October help-wanted-advertising index (HWA) "rose" to 30 from a downwardly revised 29 in September. August and September readings of 30 had been the lowest since the Kennedy Administration. The revamped September reading of 29 shifts the superlatives back to the Eisenhower Era.

Against the weak ISM and HWA measures, one could have expected a more miserable November employment report than the Bureau of Labor Statistics provided, but the economic release still showed a weakening economy.

Seasonally-adjusted November payrolls rose by 132,000 (134,000 net of revisions) +/- 106,000, following October's revised gain of 79,000 (previously 92,000), with unusual upward revisions again thrown into prior periods. On a year-to-year basis, jobs growth slowed sharply from 1.5% to 1.3%.

The household survey showed a post-election increase in the unemployment rate, along with an employment gain of 277,000. The seasonally-adjusted November U.3 unemployment rate rose to 4.47% +/- 0.2 from 4.15% in October. Unadjusted U.3 rose to 4.3% from 4.1%, while the unadjusted broader U.6 measure rose to 7.8% from 7.6%. Adjusted U.6 eased to 8.0% from 8.1%. Corrected for the finagling the Clinton Administration did in defining away the existence of most "discouraged workers," actual unemployment continues to hold around 12%.

As to inflation concerns, the upturns in the ISM inflation indices and the pending rebounds in annual CPI and PPI inflation, soon will begin rattling the credit markets and Fed watchers. One factor that also should be making its way shortly into the inflation debate is the accelerating pace of growth in the old broad money supply M3. Most serious economists do not buy the Federal Reserve's excuses for ceasing the reporting of M3. The ongoing SGS series shows annual M3 growth jumping to 10.1% in November, up from 9.7% in October.

___________________________________________


Further detail will follow in December's "Shadow Government Statistics" monthly newsletter, targeted for release at the end of the month. Further details will be advised in next weekend's Alert.

Economic releases of the last week or so have confirmed a deepening recession, along with early confirmation of inflation resuming its upward trend.

November 2006 Newsletter

Wednesday, November 29th, 2006
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Issue Number 25

November 29, 2006

__________

Dollar Selling Will Threaten Credit and Equity Markets

Economic Activity Continues to Crumble

Distorted Inflation Plunge Bottoms Out

Gold Prices to Rebound Further



__________


OPENING COMMENTS


The broad outlook for a deepening inflationary recession continued to intensify last month, at the same time that domestic and global political tensions increased sharply. Main Street U.S.A. dumped the Republican controlled Congress for a variety of reasons, not least of which were rapidly deteriorating pocketbook issues. Reflecting a growing market awareness of these problems, the U.S. dollar has come under some selling pressure. When the current minor selling turns massive, the foreign-capital-dependent domestic markets will face a terrible liquidity squeeze, with resulting interest rate spikes and equity selling. Gold should do well under the circumstances.

Tumbling economic activity was reflected in the continued contraction in retail sales and housing starts, as well as soft industrial production, a declining purchasing managers survey (manufacturing), falling durable goods orders and troubled employment data. In particular, annual change in housing starts -- using a three-month moving average -- has fallen to its deepest decline since the depths of the 1990/1991 recession, as shown in the graph.



This month's Reporting/Market Focus conducts a reality check on the "housing bubble" prices against the SGS alternate consumer inflation measure.

On the inflation front, annual CPI inflation was battered in both September and October by falling energy prices and year-ago comparisons with conditions resulting from a particularly severe hurricane season. The drop in gasoline prices was overdone in the October CPI, and the year-ago comparisons are about to reverse. Accordingly, reported inflation will rise in the months ahead, as will market concerns for same.

In terms of deteriorating global political conditions, look for the Iran nuclear issue to come to the fore again, shortly. As a sampling of some of the significant developments breaking the surface a little, consider Russia's sending air defense systems to Iran. Such highlights how the major global powers are arrayed dangerously against each other. Also Communist China hinted that it was looking to move away from the U.S. dollar in terms of its currency reserve holdings. Of course it is, and it will. The comment helped to trigger some selling of the greenback. Much heavier dollar dumping eventually will follow.

Alternate Realities. In general, if a government economic measure does match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Fed and Wall Street. This section regularly covers the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting. The methodologies for the series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS. Effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan-Era GDP.

The alternate third-quarter GDP growth reflects the "preliminary" estimate with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate third-quarter inflation-adjusted annual (year-to-year) GDP growth rate is a decline of roughly 1.5% versus the official 3.0% gain.





[Note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com.]

Of some comfort to the low-inflation hypesters -- those continually touting "core" inflation -- the gimmicked annual core inflation rates eased slightly in October, despite high oil prices continuing to permeate broad economic activity. Both the annual "core" and regular inflation reporting should resume their upwards movements with November data.
                          Eight Levels of Inflation
                 Annual Inflation for August to October 2006


Measure Aug Sep Oct I.1 Core PCE Deflator 2.5% 2.4% n.a. I.2 Core C-CPI 2.7% 2.7% 2.5% I.3 Core CPI-U 2.8% 2.9% 2.7% I.4 PCE Deflator 3.2% 2.0% n.a. I.5 C-CPI 3.4% 2.2% 1.6% I.6 CPI-U 3.8% 2.1% 1.3% I.7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U 7.0% 5.2% 4.7% I.8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation 10.1% 9.4% 8.9%

Notes: I.1 to I.3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively, of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U. I.4 to I.6 are the same measures with energy and food inflation included. The CPI-U (I.6) is the measure popularly followed by the financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation. I.7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre- Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top series in the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com. I.8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which reverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so, plus an adjustment for the Clinton-Era geometric weighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic bookkeeping.






[Note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com.]


Updated Summary of Current Outlook


In general, the broad economic outlook has not changed, but the financial markets are starting to show signs of recognition of some serious economic issues. A deepening recession with uncontained inflation remains the overwhelming threat to financial-market stability. Underlying economic reality should gain broader recognition, quickly, as the accelerating deepening of the 2005 to 2007 (likely 2008) inflationary recession continues to surface in near-term reporting.

A contracting economy, inflation and risks of intensifying dollar selling are upon us and continue to offer the worst of all environments for the equity and credit markets. On the bright side, of course, is the gold market, where the traditional inflation-hedge and flight-to-safety/quality vehicle will continue earning its keep -- shy of irregular volatility -- as the dollar weakens, inflation accelerates and the global political situation continues its deterioration.

The Shadow Government Statistics' Early Warning System (EWS) was activated in May 2005 and signaled the onset of a formal recession in July 2005. The EWS looks at historical growth patterns of key leading economic indicators in advance of major economic booms and busts and sets growth trigger points that generate warnings of major upturns or downturns when predetermined growth limits are breached. Since the beginning of 2005, when a number of key indicators had been holding near or at their fail-safe points, seven of those indicators have moved beyond those levels, signaling a recession.

Retail sales, help-wanted advertising and housing starts generated such signals in recent months. Once beyond their fail-safe points, these indicators never have sent out false alarms, either for an economic boom or bust.

The false economic boom massaged into first-quarter GDP reporting was a precursor to the overstatement of, albeit slowing, second- and third-quarter GDP growth. The reported annualized real growth rates of 2.6% and 2.2% for the second and third quarters both should have been contractions. Irrespective of underlying reality, negative GDP did not surface in regular government reporting before the November election. With the election now in the past, negative reporting still could be seen in the next couple of quarters, and there remains the possibility that the recent quarters could turn negative after benchmark revisions. The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) eventually should time the downturn to mid- or late-2005. Stories of discussions of a possible Recession Dating Committee meeting already have surfaced.

Whether or not there is a recession increasingly has become a hot topic in the popular financial media. Those Wall Street economists who act as shills for the market will keep up their "strong growth is just around the corner" hype regardless of any and all evidence to the contrary.

From the standpoint of common experience, this downturn will be considered the second leg of a double-dip recession, not an independent contraction as will be claimed officially.

Most economic data have softened, with the trend accelerating. Regular monthly contractions are near for both payroll employment and industrial production, although political gimmicking can keep the official payroll and production data afloat for a while longer. Significant deterioration also will be seen in corporate profits and federal tax receipts, despite any near-term volatility to the contrary. Depressed tax receipts will combine with negligible fiscal discipline and ongoing war spending to accelerate deterioration in the federal finances.

This general outlook is predicated on economic activity that already has taken place and does not consider any risks from exogenous factors such as renewed terrorist activity in the United States, world war, major natural disasters or a financial panic.

Market perceptions of the downturn in business activity have increased sharply. As expectations begin to anticipate weak data, traditional expectations also are being lowered for inflation, regardless of the ongoing oil problem. Despite short-lived gyrations in the CPI, stagflation seems to have gained a solid foothold in some consensus thinking. Still, consensus forecasts generally will tend to be surprised on the downside for economic reports and on the upside for inflation reports, for some time to come.

The roots of the current difficulties are structural in nature. A consumer starved of income growth and overburdened with debt cannot sustain the real growth in consumption needed to keep GDP growth in positive territory. The income weakness is a direct result of the loss of a significant manufacturing base to offshore locations and the ensuing explosive, perpetual growth of the U.S. trade deficit.

Exacerbating economic and financial woes will be unusually high inflation during this contraction. Gold prices already have signaled inflation and other difficulties. Fueled by high oil prices, weakness in the U.S. dollar and accelerating Fed monetization of federal debt, inflation will not be brought under control simply by weakness in economic demand. Instead, persistently high prices only will serve to intensify the recession, making it exceptionally long and protracted. Ongoing inflation woes and dollar problems will maintain upside pressure on long-term interest rates, reversing what still is an inverted yield curve that some view as a recession signal.

Faltering economic activity and mounting inflation have created a nightmarish conundrum for the political operatives at the Federal Reserve. Recent soft economic numbers and high inflation had been spun as "conflicting data," but, again, despite near-term CPI volatility, an inflationary recession is in play, and there is little the Fed can do about it. The recent two-month lull in inflation was due to factors well outside the domain of Federal Reserve activity.

The hype given to the investing public -- that a weak economy means low inflation and interest rates -- cannot work in the current environment. Any conflicts that arise are not in the economic data but in simplistic views on economic activity espoused by Wall Street, or in the statistical manipulation goals of the politicians. Those latter issues explain Fed Chairman Bernanke's continued tap dancing on the inflation and economic outlook. Such is anchored in putting a positive spin on an impossible situation and avoiding a financial-market meltdown for as long as possible. The markets have been reasonably cooperative, so far.

In the present circumstance, inflation driven by robust economic demand would be a happy event, but such is not to be. Rather, the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar is being lost to wasting diseases, eroded by foreign exchange weakness in the trade-deficit plagued greenback, malfeasance in domestic fiscal and monetary policies, and external disruptions such as cartel-orchestrated high prices in oil. All the latter factors are in play.

>From the Federal Reserve's perspective, at present, mixed signals are the best that can be offered to the markets. Despite mounting speculation of a Fed easing to counter the recession, the Fed's allowing for the possibility of renewing the faux "tightening" helps support the dollar and signals Mr. Bernanke's devotion to keeping inflation under control. The Fed's soon-to-be short-lived "pause" in hiking interest rates signals Mr. Bernanke's devotion to maintaining solid economic growth.

While the games playing may keep market sentiment gyrating for a while, the Fed is in an untenable position. Raising rates will do little to contain a non-demand driven inflation, while holding or lowering rates will do little to stimulate the structurally-impaired economy. The current "pause" in the Fed's raising short-term interest rates likely will not survive the end of 2006 or early 2007, due to the soon-to-be-seen pressures of a collapsing U.S. dollar.

From the standpoint of the federal government, traditional economic stimuli in the form of tax cuts or increased federal spending have reached their practical limits with the current budget-deficit excesses.

Due to the inability of the government or central bank to stabilize this environment, risks of the current situation evolving into a hyperinflationary depression are extraordinarily high. Such a development involving the world's reserve currency would lead to a collapse of the current global currency system. In order to regain public confidence, monetary authorities likely would structure gold into the base of any new international currency system.

The unfolding inflationary recession is the worst of all worlds for the financial markets. Particularly hard hit will be the U.S. dollar, with significant downside moves looming for both equity and bond prices. Despite recent extreme volatility, the price of gold is headed much higher. At such time as the system re-stabilizes, post-crisis, there will be exceptional investment opportunities for those who have been able to preserve their wealth, capital and liquidity.


MARKETS PERSPECTIVE


Market hype has the Fed moving to an easing stance early next year, in order to help counter a possible recession. The U.S. economy, however, has never gone into a recession so heavily dependent on foreign capital for liquidity. If selling pressure against the U.S. dollar becomes heavy, the Fed will have little option but to raise interest rates to defend the U.S. currency, since the coincident dumping of U.S. dollars will drain liquidity from the U.S. markets and savage both equity and credit market prices. If the Fed should ease, or the markets come to expect that, such will add to dollar selling pressures.

Unlike 1987, when Mr. Greenspan abandoned the dollar by slashing rates in order to prop stocks, the dollar will be the controlling force behind the markets, this time. The outcome will not be a happy one for equities or credit-market instruments, irrespective of whatever machinations the U.S. central bank goes through. While inflation pressures and intensifying dollar weakness soon will start to shift market expectations towards looking for rate hikes, such is not likely before the December 12th FOMC meeting. The several meetings following, however, are an open question.

The economy has crashed, and there is not much the Federal Reserve can or could have done about it. The deepening recession should show up in generally weaker-than-expected corporate profits. Middle Eastern tensions are ready to mount anew, along with renewed upside pressure on the price of oil. If this happens, the recent rebound in gold would tend to accelerate.

The U.S. dollar remains key to financial-market conditions, and recent selling pressures easily can turn into massive dollar dumping. In terms of the broad financial market picture in the weeks and months ahead, the U.S. dollar should sell off sharply on a trade-weighted basis, particularly against the Swiss franc. As a partial result of the mounting dollar and inflation difficulties, the domestic yield curve will turn positive and steepen sharply, due primarily to rising long-term interest rates. This is a trend that will flow through into the New Year.

The combination of softer profits, a weak dollar and higher interest rates likely will not play out happily for equities. Renewed concerns tied to the dollar, inflation and global instabilities, however, suggest an upbeat year-end for the precious metals, despite any near-term volatility.

Equities -- The stock market continues to do well, despite short-term volatility tied to dollar issues. As usual, the market hype is extraordinary, with expectations of a passive-to-accommodative Fed, contained inflation, still a soft economic landing and a relatively tranquil global and domestic political circumstance. Most of these props underlying equity-market irrationality will be short-lived.

Recession is gaining credence, the dollar is becoming unusually vulnerable and domestic and global politics rarely have been so unstable. Particularly damaging to current market conditions will be the terrible dollar tumble ahead. Liquidity problems resulting from that will tend to push long-term yields higher and equity prices much lower. The dollar's sell-off already may have begun. Major dollar dumping could begin at any time with little warning.

Credit Markets -- Interest rates will head higher. Contrary to all the hoopla over lower oil and gasoline prices, inflation has not peaked. Annual CPI will begin rebounding in November from the hits it took in September and October. While the economy indeed is in recession, the Fed is more likely to be hiking rates to defend the U.S. dollar and ostensibly to fight inflation, than to be lowering rates as a faux economic stimulus. Barring a stock-market crash, the U.S. central bank is not likely to be shifting to a short=lived easing stance to stimulate the stock market or the economy.

Underlying fundamentals continue to indicate that long-term interest rates are headed sharply higher by the end of the year and into 2007. This move in rates will be dominated by rebounding inflation, by a weakening dollar and by foreign investors increasingly moving their assets out of dollar-denominated instruments. Long rates are being driven by the dollar, not inflation, at the moment, but both the dollar and inflation will be key in the rate spike ahead.

A number of factors drive interest rate movements, including economic activity, inflation, credit demand, political stability and relative dollar strength and accompanying cash inflows and outflows from abroad. The recession will offer major downside pressure on rates, but inflation and the dollar will provide the dominant upside pressures on rates.

The yield curve on Treasuries has developed an even more negative slope, with slightly lower yields since the last newsletter. The constant-maturity 10-year yield is at 4.54% (was 4.70%), with the 3-month bill yield at 5.05% (was 5.12%). An added couple of hundred basis points at the long-end still will do a great deal towards flipping the yield curve to a fairly normal positive slope. The inverted yield curve is tied more to the heavy foreign purchases of U.S. Treasuries than it is to recessionary expectations, and recent selling pressure on the dollar has not affected that area, yet. It will, though.

U.S. Dollar -- On average, the U.S. dollar strengthened in October but softened in November and has seen some selling pressure in the last week or so. The U.S. recession and inflation problems are gaining broader recognition outside the United States, and Communist China again is making noises about not wanting to hold so many dollar in its foreign currency reserves. Circumstances have not been helped by the ongoing "pause" in Fed policy, market speculation of Fed easing next year, or the Democratic takeover of Congress.

Mr. Greenspan's talking up the euro as an alternate reserve currency to the U.S. dollar, last month, has gained some play in the markets, but the euro remains something of a mongrel dog. The luster of what once was the German mark as been mixed with currencies such as the French franc and Italian lira. While the euro may take on an increasing role as a reserve currency, it is not likely to supplant the existing role of the British pound in that area. As a flight-to-safety/quality currency versus the U.S. Dollar, the Swiss franc remains the primary candidate.

Very negative and disorderly markets await the greenback. As the downturn in the value of the U.S. currency begins to accelerate, fallout in the U.S. credit and equity markets should not be pleasant.

Underlying fundamentals remain so bad, they only could be marginally worse. Driving relative currency values are relative conditions in domestic economic activity, inflation, interest rates, government financial conditions and political stability. Though not fully recognized, all these factors for the United States -- relative to its major trading partners -- are negative. The U.S. economy is in a recession that is gaining recognition; inflation is spiking, despite the near-term September/October gyrations; and interest rates are rising abroad, while the Fed -- at least temporarily -- has stopped raising rates at home. The actual U.S. federal deficit is beyond containment, promising an eventual hyperinflationary environment. Further, the President's low approval rating (and related Republican loss of Congress) is at a level that has crashed the greenback in the past.

Timing is uncertain, but the break in the dollar finally may have started. It should come quickly, with little if any advance warning. Serious shocks loom in U.S. economic and fiscal data (December GAAP statement) and deteriorating domestic politics. New record lows for the dollar still are likely before the end of the year, if not early in 2007, despite any overt or covert supportive intervention by any central bank(s). At some point, certain Asian central banks even could be encouraging the dollar selling.

Generally, the weaker the dollar, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. equity and capital markets. As shown in the following graph, the U.S. dollar still is trending lower.





[Note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS for methodology.]
U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics' Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (FWD) is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For October, the monthly dollar average gained 0.75% after a 0.74% increase in September. November's average, however looks like it will be down about 1.5% from October, with the current level (November 28) at 51.10, against October's average of 52.62.

In the same directions, October's monthly average of the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index (TWD) rose by 0.94% after September's 0.52% gain. The November monthly average should be down about 1% against October. November's average year-to-year change should be down by about 5.7%, against October and September's respective annual declines of 3.05% and 2.55%. with the current level (November 28) at 57.94, against October's average of 59.38.

The bigger hit seen recently against the SGS series is due to a much lighter weighting of the Canadian dollar in the FWD versus the TWD. The U.S. dollar has done relatively better against is Canadian counterpart.

Gold -- After averaging around $630 per troy ounce in July and August, the gold price tumbled in September, averaging just below $600 per troy ounce. Where October trading averaged below September's level, the precious metal has rebounded sharply in November, currently trading shy of $640 per troy ounce. The long-term outlook for gold remains highly positive.

As a hedge against currency problems and inflation, and as the preferred safe-haven vehicle, the price of gold generally should move higher and set new historical highs in the months ahead, despite any near-term volatility. The currency and inflation issues are chronic and will continue to deteriorate sharply in the next several months, and before an ultimate collapse in the global currency system. Such does not prevent interim wild price gyrations, however, particularly if central banks think they see an opportunity to slam the price of gold.






The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show the softer October averages, with estimated November averages showing some firming. As we go to press, gold is trading just below $640, oil is shy of $60 and the Swiss franc is about $0.83.



REPORTING PERSPECTIVE


The Big Three Market Movers


With the election over, and an economically flailed Main Street U.S.A. throwing control of Congress to the Democrats, some of the political pressures that contributed to distortions of near-term reporting have passed. While upcoming releases of the major series still will be subject to massaging for the perceived needs of the financial markets, generally, the reality of the underlying inflationary recession increasingly should become evident in the popularly followed economic series.

Of particular note, the heavily overstated reduction in annual CPI inflation for September and October, in turn, temporarily has exaggerated growth in certain constant-dollar or "real" measures we report on, such as real wages and inflation-adjusted retail sales and money supply growth. Those distortions will begin to reverse with the reporting of November's CPI.

Employment/Unemployment -- While the October payroll gain of 92,000 was below market expectations, unusual prior-period revisions and a highly-publicized drop in the unemployment rate gave the Bush Administration the positive economic spin it had planned for the final days before the mid-term election. With election pressures gone, any reporting pressures now will be primarily tied to financial-market needs, at least for the near-term.

As reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the popularly-followed seasonally-adjusted U.3 unemployment rate declined to 4.42% +/- 0.2%, from 4.58% in September, a change that was statistically indistinguishable from an increase in unemployment. On an unadjusted basis, U.3 declined to 4.1% in October from 4.4% in September.

The unemployment rate U.3, however, usually moves with the less-followed but broader U.6 unemployment rate. Unadjusted U.6 held steady at 7.6%, while the seasonally-adjusted U.6 unemployment rate rose to 8.1% in October, from 8.0% in September. Since U.6 is less subject to public attention and, accordingly, to manipulation, it is the more credible number and suggests an actual upturn in the narrower October U.3 unemployment rate. Including the long-term "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton administration, total unemployment remains roughly 12%.

The household survey also showed a seasonally-adjusted gain in October employment of 437,000, following September's reported 271,000 increase. That reflects the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey, which reflects the number of jobs, where individuals can hold more than one job. The household and payroll survey results officially are irreconcilable.

The seasonally-adjusted October gain in payroll employment was 92,000 +/- 106,000, which was statistically indistinguishable from a contraction. Yet, October was up by an extraordinary 231,000, net of revisions. September's previously reported 51,000 jobs gain nearly tripled in revision to 148,000.

The monthly bias factor (birth/death model), added for good measure into the jobs report for October, was upped to 73,000 from 57,000 in October 2005. That means that the 92,000 gain reported in October was just 19,000 net of the bias gimmick. Last year's bias for November was a positive 21,000, down from October's 57,000, suggesting relatively minimal impact on the forthcoming November labor report.

The revisions, however, were extraordinary, for the second month in a row. They had the effect of boosting total jobs created by the Bush Administration over time, without rattling the credit markets too much with the current month's gain. Much of the revised gain was in education, as the BLS suddenly picked up a large number of teachers who somehow had not shown up in initial September reporting.

Also, as has been the recent pattern, the seasonal factors have been unusual. When properly adjusted, the year-to-year change in the seasonally-adjusted and not-seasonally-adjusted series should be virtually identical. Based on the revisions to the data. The unadjusted level of September payrolls was revised upward by 184,000, but the adjusted levels lost out again, only revising upward by 139,000.

Nonetheless, year-to-year changes in September and October adjusted payrolls were unusually inflated versus the unadjusted numbers. Adjusted versus unadjusted annual growth rates for September and October were 1.483% versus 1.408% and 1.469% versus 1.425%. The difference is that instead of respective monthly gains now of 148,000 and 92,000 for September and October, the gains would have been 126,000 and 60,000. For the two months combined, the current gain of 240,000 would have been 186,000 with consistent seasonals.

The latest report was against a background of an ongoing collapse of growth in help-wanted advertising, renewed weakness in new claims for unemployment insurance and weak purchasing managers employment indices (see the respective sections).

Next Release (December 8): With the mid-term election no longer an issue, the unemployment rate should rebound and jobs growth should slow meaningfully in the months ahead. Look for the November labor report to be weaker than market expectations.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) -- Helped by the questionable drop reported in the September trade deficit, the "preliminary" estimate revision of annualized real growth for third-quarter 2006 came in at 2.21% +/- 3%, up from the initial reporting of 1.58%, but still down from 2.56% in the second quarter and 5.58% in the first quarter. The third-quarter growth estimate still is indistinguishable from a contraction, as was the reported growth in the second quarter. Such allows, with possible revisions, for eventual formal recession reporting with numbers already in place from the Bureau of Economic Analysis.

In terms of annual growth, the third-quarter's reported pace revised to 3.02% (initially 2.86%), down from 3.51% in the second quarter. Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS Alternate GDP measure suggests economic reality is much weaker, with a year-to-year annual contraction of roughly 1.5% for the third-quarter GDP, deepening from a 1.0% drop in the second quarter (see the graph in the Alternate Reality section of the Opening Comments).

The GDP inflation rate (deflator) in the third quarter remained understated at a revised 1.77% (initially 1.83%) versus 3.30% in the prior quarter, despite annualized seasonally-adjusted CPI in the third-quarter of 2.94% and of 4.97% in the second quarter.

Alternate measures of GDP growth, in terms of the broader Gross National Product (GNP) and the theoretically-equivalent Gross Domestic Income (GDI), also were released with the revision. Third-quarter annualized real GNP growth slowed to 1.91% from 2.34% in the second quarter. GNP includes trade flows in factor income (interest and dividend payments) and tends to be hurt by the net-debtor status of the United States.

GDI, which is the income-side equivalent of the consumption-driven GDP, grew at an annualized real 3.43% in the third quarter, up from a 0.47% contraction in the second quarter. The statistical discrepancy between the GDI and GDP has been gyrating for the last several quarters.

Next Release (December 21): The "final" estimate revision to third-quarter 2006 GDP should be little more than statistical noise.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) -- The BLS reported the seasonally-adjusted October CPI-U fell by 0.49% (down by 0.54% unadjusted), versus a 0.49% decline (down by 0.49% unadjusted) in September. On a not-seasonally-adjusted basis, October's annual inflation rate (I.6) was 1.31%, down from September's 2.06%. The eight levels of annual inflation, I.1 to I.8, are shown in the table in the Alternate Reality section, as is the plot of the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation number.

The "experimental" Chained Consumer Price Index (C-CPI-U), the fully substitution based CPI that presumably is the eventual replacement for current CPI reporting, showed annual inflation (I.5) of 1.56% in October, down from 2.17% in September. What remains extraordinary and exceptional here is that annual C-CPI-U inflation not only has topped the CPI-U for the second month, but the difference is accelerating. There remains a problem in the gimmicked CPI-U weightings.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton methodology (I.7), annual CPI growth was about 4.7% as of October, against 5.2% in September. The SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure (I.8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies of recent decades, shows annual inflation at 8.9% in October.

As discussed in the Opening Comments, September and October inflation rates have taken a double hit from the year-ago effects of Katrina, as well as the recent drop in gasoline prices. As usual, the CPI picked more than the actual drop in energy related prices. With average monthly gasoline prices down 12.5% from a year ago, per retail sales reporting, the 18.3% annual decline in gasoline prices reported in the October CPI seems a little overdone, overstating the CPI decline by 0.24%. Such, however, has been a consistent reporting bias over time. Rising energy prices are slow to be picked up in CPI reporting and rarely are fully accounted for, while falling energy prices tend to be picked up immediately and often go beyond what has happened.

With seasonally-adjusted CPI-U down 0.7% and 0.1% in monthly November and December 2005 CPI reporting, those same months in 2006 will be inclined to show sharp increases in annual CPI inflation.

Next Release (December 15): Inflation has not peaked, but it will take several months to regain its recent high annual rates, starting with the November report. Unless the BLS can come up with a monthly CPI drop in excess of 0.7% in November, the Katrina-distorted plunge in annual CPI and the effects of dropping gasoline prices have run their course. Last year, November CPI dropped by 0.7%. Any monthly change in November 2006 that is more positive than that will push the annual CPI rate higher by a like amount.

Generally, inflation surprises should come in on the upside of weak expectations, tied particularly to core numbers, which will continue to firm. They increasingly are reflecting the slow process of oil prices permeating nearly all levels of business activity.


Other Troubled Key Series


Federal Deficit -- The officially-gimmicked 2006 federal budget deficit (fiscal year ended September 30th) was $248.2 billion (revised from initial reporting $247.7 billion), down $70.8 billion from 2005's $318.5 billion (revised from $318.8 billion). Despite the misleading reporting, the amount of debt taken on by the federal government showed worsening annual fiscal deterioration. Further, reporting based on generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) -- due for release on December 15th -- also should show deterioration, with the actual 2006 deficit in excess of $3.5 trillion.

Separate from the GAAP-based numbers and official deficit reporting, the change in gross federal debt is a fair indicator of actual net cash outlays by the government. As of fiscal year-end 2006, the gross federal debt stood at $8.507 trillion, up by $574 billion from 2005, which in turn was up $554 billion from 2004.

For the rolling 12 months through October 2006, the gimmicked deficit was $250.2 billion versus $308.4 in October 2005, a narrowing annual decline of $58.2 billion. As of October 31, 2006, the gross federal debt stood at $8.584 trillion, up by $557 billion from 2005, which in turn was up $597 billion from 2004.

Going forward, the official federal deficit will inflate, as government finances suffer increasingly from tax revenue losses due to the intensifying recession and relative tax receipt declines after the expiration of recent tax incentives. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy's mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance -- Annual change in initial claims moved into slightly less-negative territory (an economic negative) due to deterioration in recent numbers. While new claims over the last month have been virtually unchanged from last year, year-ago comparisons using a 17-week moving average still are distorted by last year's effects of Hurricane Katrina passing through the data. On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended November 18th, annual change narrowed to a 7.7% decline, from an 8.3% drop as of the October 21st week.

Usually, the volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly numbers is due partially to the seasonal-adjustment process. When the series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings -- Spiked again by the distorted collapse in CPI reporting, October's seasonally-adjusted real earnings soared 1.3% for the month, following September's 1.0% gain. October's real earnings also jumped by 3.2% from the year before, following September's 2.3% gain. If these numbers were real, the Republicans might have held on to Congress. The "improvement," however, all was tied to year-ago CPI comparisons that were distorted by the effects of Hurricane Katrina and BLS gimmicked reporting of energy prices. Those effects and distortions will start to reverse in November's reporting.

Volatility in this series comes primarily from variations in reported CPI growth. Allowing for the biases built into the CPI-W series used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series still signals ongoing severe financial strain on U.S. households and continuing recession.

Retail Sales -- October's seasonally-adjusted retail sales fell by 0.2% +/- 0.7% (down 0.7% net of revisions) for the month, well below market expectations, again. Retail sales in September were down a revised 0.8% (down 0.3% after the negative September CPI inflation), a change initially reported as a 0.4% contraction. Net of gimmicked CPI inflation, the October change was up a tepid 0.2%.

When inflation-adjusted year-to-year growth in retail sales falls below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation), such signals recession. The signal was generated in June. Before inflation adjustment, October's annual growth was 4.5%, down from September's 5.2%. Net of Katrina-dampened annual inflation, October's annual growth was 3.2% against 3.1% in September. That number will sink with next month's rebound in annual CPI inflation.

Next Release (December 13): November retail sales also should come in below expectations, generally reflecting declining economic activity and a less-than-robust start to the holiday shopping season. Inflation-adjusted growth should be negative on a monthly basis, with annual real growth also slowing sharply.

Industrial Production -- Seasonally-adjusted October production gained 0.2%, following September's 0.6% plunge. As often happens, the gain was aided by a weather distorted surge in utilities. Despite an upward revision to the index level, year-to-year growth slowed in October to 4.8% from September's upwardly revised 5.8% (was 5.6%.)

Next Release (December 14): Look for industrial production to contract in November, increasingly mirroring the recession. Such would surprise market expectations on the downside. Tentatively due on December 11th, the annual revision to the series likely will show a weaker economy since 2004 than previously has been reported.

New Orders for Durable Goods -- The highly volatile durable goods orders plunged in October by a seasonally-adjusted 8.3% (7.4% net of revisions), after jumping a revised 8.7% (previously up 7.8%) in September. While much of the decline was a reversal of the aircraft order surge seen in the prior month, orders still fell by 1.7% ex-transportation. October's orders were up just 2.6% from the year before, a near-recessionary level if the pattern held for several months.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders fell by 15.6% in October, following September's revised 24.7% (previously 21.9%) gain. Where the monthly volatility here also was exacerbated by changes in aircraft orders, October orders still were down 5.1% ex-aircraft. October's annual growth rate for all nondefense capital goods orders was 9.4%.

At one time, durable goods orders was a solid leading indicator of broad economic activity, when smoothed using a six-month moving average. After the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders, however, the series' predictive ability suffered a serious setback.

Trade Balance -- Surprising the markets, the September trade deficit showed an unusually sharp narrowing and helped boost the "preliminary"-estimate revision to third-quarter GDP.

The seasonally-adjusted trade deficit narrowed to $64.3 billion from $69.0 billion in August. While the "improvement" could be explained by the reported decline in oil imports -- half tied to price, half tied to volume -- this is one of those numbers that has a terrible odor to it. There were unusual carry-over revisions (related to paperwork flow through the Customs Service), as well as possible seasonal-factor distortions from last-year's Katrina effects on the Port of New Orleans. Regardless, the deficit will rebound sharply in the months ahead, setting new records. Of some note, as with the CPI, the trade numbers suddenly seem to be anticipating price cuts that have not taken place yet.

Next Release (December 12): The October trade deficit should rebound some from September's understatement, surging beyond consensus forecasts. The months ahead will see a pattern of the deficit regularly setting new records.

Consumer Confidence -- November confidence measures eased after a mixed October showing. The Conference Board's November consumer confidence fell by 2.1%, following a 0.8% decline in October and a 6.7% increase in September. The Conference Board number is subject to suspect seasonal adjustment. The unadjusted University of Michigan's consumer sentiment fell by 1.6% in November, following gains of 9.6% in October and 4.1% in September.

On a year-to-year basis, the damage done to confidence in 2005 by the severe hurricane season largely is responsible for the near-term gains seen in current annual growth patterns. On a three-month moving-average basis for November, annual growth in the Conference Board's measure increased to 15.8%, up from 11.9% in October, while the University of Michigan number gained 16.5%, following October's 8.7% increase. These lagging, not leading, indicators still are suggesting that the economy is in recession.

Short-Term Credit Measures -- Annual growth in short-term commercial credit measures remained strong, holding double-digit percentage annual growth, while annual growth in consumer credit remained below average and softened again.

Growth in seasonally-adjusted consumer credit remained sub-par in September, with annual growth easing to 3.7%, from a revised 3.9% (was 3.4%) in August. Without inflation-adjusted growth in income, growth in real personal consumption can be supported over the short-term only by debt expansion or savings liquidation. Consumer debt expansion -- though moving -- remains soft enough to constrain economic growth significantly.

Annual growth in commercial paper outstanding remained strong in October at 17.6%, although that was down from September's annual pace of 19.6%. Annual growth in commercial and industrial loans notched higher to 14.9% in October, from a revised 14.8% in September (previously 14.9%). Rising sales can fuel short-term credit needs, but so too can slowing sales, slowing collections and rising inventories.

Producer Price Index (PPI) -- Continuing to suffer annual distortions due to Katrina effects, as well as being subject to the overly-aggressive logging of energy-related price declines by the BLS, the seasonally-adjusted October finished goods PPI fell by 1.6% (down 1.2% unadjusted), following September's 1.3% drop (down by 1.1% unadjusted). October's annual PPI inflation dropped to a decline of 1.6% from September's 0.9% gain. Seasonally-adjusted September intermediate goods fell by 1.1% for the month, while crude goods were down by 10.5%.

The decline in PPI inflation was exaggerated by highly unusual seasonal adjustments and by highly-publicized hedonic adjustments to new model light trucks. Current PPI reporting has passed into the realm of the nonsensical.

Next Release (December 19): Despite the large component of random volatility in monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months should top artificially depressed expectations. November reporting, in particular, should reverse the decline in annual PPI inflation. "Core" inflation should continue offering upside surprises to consensus forecasts, despite reporting games played by the BLS.


Better-Quality Numbers


The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders -- The October new orders component fell 3.9% to 52.1 from September's unchanged level of 54.2. As an SGS early warning indicator of a pending major economic shift, this measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating a signal of pending recession.

The Commerce Department provides suspect seasonal factors for the series, and the resulting adjusted monthly numbers can be misleading in the reporting of month-to-month change. This problem is overcome by using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the October new orders index fell by 9.0%, following September's 6.8% contraction. The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004.

Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising new orders.

The overall October ISM manufacturing index dropped to 51.2 from September's 52.9. An index level of 50.0 divides a growing versus contracting manufacturing sector. The October employment component moved to 50.8, up from September's contraction-territory of 49.4.

The service-sector ISM index does not have much meaning related to broad economic activity. Unlike its older counterpart, the manufacturing survey, if service companies such as law firms, hospitals or fast-food restaurants have "increased orders," that does not necessarily mean that economic activity is increasing. That said, the overall services index rose to 57.1 from 52.9 in September.

Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. The October employment component dropped to 51.0 from 53.6 in September. The prices paid component is covered in the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) -- The series has not been updated since the last SGS. Showing rapidly deteriorating employment conditions, the September help-wanted advertising index held at 30, the same as the revised August reading.

The September and August readings were the lowest seen since early 1961. The index was last lower than this during the Eisenhower Administration, in October 1958. While the series never recovered from the 2000 recession, its recent plunge -- annual change is down 18.6% on a three-month moving average basis -- is signaling a renewed and rapid contraction in economic activity.

Housing Starts -- Annual change continues to deteriorate. Seasonally-adjusted October housing starts fell by 14.6% +/- 7.6% for the month, following a revised 4.9% (was 5.9%) gain in September. With October's year-to-year change down by 27.4%, following September's 19.4% contraction, the annual change on a three-month moving-average basis now stands at a year-to-year drop of 22.2%, the worst reading since the depths of the 1990/1991 recession. Such is generating an intensifying recession signal.

Further, in related data, with respective rates of annual contraction for October new- and existing-home sales at 25.4% and 11.5%, respectively, activity remains consistent with a sharp economic downturn.

Money Supply -- Despite underreporting of annual CPI inflation, real annual growth rates for October M1 and M2 remain consistent with the ongoing recession, while the nominal (not-inflation-adjusted) annual growth in M3 -- as estimated by the SGS Continuing M3 Series -- not only remains strong enough to fuel inflation concerns, but also is accelerating.

Annual growth in October for monthly M1 fell by 0.4%%, versus a 1.1% contraction in September, while annual M2 growth rose to 4.8% from 4.4%. The SGS Continuing M3 Series for October gained 9.6% from the year before, rising from September's 9.2% gain. The October annual growth was the highest seen in more than four years, since March 2002.





[Note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the ongoing SGS estimates of M3, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS for methodology.]

Before inflation adjustment, monthly seasonally-adjusted October M1 and M2 rose by 0.8% and 0.9%, respectively, following a 0.9% decline and 0.2% increase in September. Month-to-month M3 change was approximately 1.2% for October, up from 0.9% in September.

Adjusted for the distorted CPI inflation, October's M1 and M2 year-to-year rates of change were down 1.8% and up 3.4%, respectively. On a three-month moving-average basis, the October inflation-adjusted annual rates of change were down 3.4% and up 2.1%, levels that still remain well underwater using the old-style CPI.

Inflation Indicators

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices -- Declining oil prices continued hitting the purchasing managers surveys. On the manufacturing side, the October prices paid diffusion index plunged to 47.0 from September's 61.0, a reading showing declining inflationary pressure. On a three-month moving average basis, October's annual change was down by 19.4% against September's 12.4% gain.

On the non-manufacturing side, the October prices paid diffusion index declined to 51.9 from 56.6 in September, still on the rising side of inflation. On a three-month moving average basis, October's annual change was down by 17.6% against September's annual 5.2% decline.

Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflation activity. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising inflation.

Oil Prices -- The monthly-average West Texas Intermediate Spot (St. Louis Fed) dropped to $58.88 per barrel in October, down 7.8% from September's $63.87. Nonetheless, oil prices persist at extraordinarily inflationary levels, despite October's average being down 5.6% from the year before, after September having been down by 2.6% on the same basis.

Annual price comparisons for September and October are against the oil-price spike seen last year from hurricane impact. Current trading is holding just shy of $60 per barrel, which is above last November's average level of $58.30.

Spot prices will continue to gyrate and can be expected to be on the rise again shortly, now that the November election has passed. With OPEC cutting production, with Middle Eastern tensions about to explode anew, and with intensifying dollar weakness likely to put upside pressure on dollar-denominated oil prices, current market pricing likely will prove to be close to a near-term bottom for a while.

Despite recent extreme near-term price volatility, high oil prices will remain a major contributing factor to the inflation side of the current inflationary recession. Oil prices remain extremely high, and still are working their way through the system. Oil price changes permeate costs throughout the economy, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. Cost pressures already have passed significantly into the so-called "core" inflation sectors. Reporting of same should pick up despite any near-term easing of oil prices.

Oil price volatility affects CPI and PPI reporting. Downside oil price movements are picked up more quickly and fully by the BLS in its inflation measures than are upside movements. This pattern has started to show in monthly trade deficit reporting, too. These distortions were particularly evident in the September and October CPI and PPI. Even as currently understated, though, CPI and PPI inflation will rebound sharply now, in the post-election months, tending to be stronger than commonly predicted for the next several quarters, partially as a result of the persistency of the high oil prices.


Background Material/Reporting Coverage


The coverage and available prior material are detailed below for various series. Data reported with a less-than-monthly frequency also are updated here or in the Reporting/Market Focus.

Quarterly/Annual Reporting -- Most series analyzed are published on a monthly or weekly basis. Followed economic/market series that are published with less-than-monthly frequency include:

Annual:

* Financial Statements of the United States Government (most recent analysis was a Supplement to December 2005 SGS; next analysis is due as a Supplement to the December 2006 SGS). * Income Variance/Dispersion (most recent analysis was is in the September 2006 SGS; next analysis is due September 2007).

Quarterly:

* Flow of Funds Accounts of the United States (the most recent analysis was in the October 2006 SGS; the next analysis is due in the January 2007 SGS).

Reporting/Market Foci -- The various economic and financial-market series are being addressed in a monthly "Reporting/Market Focus," with this month's analysis running a reality check on housing-bubble home prices. Employment, GDP, CPI and the Federal Deficit separately are explored in the background article "A Primer on Government Economic Reports," available on the Home page of www.shadowstats.com.

The series detailed so far in the Reporting Foci or background articles are listed below. The referenced SGS publications are available on the Archives page of www.shadowstats.com.


* Consumer Confidence (November 2004 SGS).
* Consumer Price Index (an original background article [updated October 2006], October 2005 SGS, alternate numbers introduced August 2006 SGS).
* Credit Measures, Short-Term (August 2005 SGS).
* Durable Goods, New Orders for (May 2006 SGS).
* Employment/Unemployment (an original background article, alternate measures (April 2005 SGS).
* Federal Deficit (an original background article, update in the Alert of July 7, 2005, update in Supplement to December 2005 SGS).
* Gross Domestic Product (an original background article, alternate numbers introduced August 2006).
* Help Wanted Advertising (January 2006 SGS).
* Housing Starts and related housing statistics (June 2006 SGS, November 2006).
* Income Variance/Dispersion (September 2005 SGS, September 2006 SGS).
* Industrial Production (January 2005 SGS).
* Money Supply (Part I / SGS Early Warning System - May 2005 SGS, Part II - June 2005 SGS, M3 update November 2005 Supplement, M2 update March 2006 SGS, M3 continuing series introduced August 2006).
* Producer Price Index (April 2006 SGS).
* Productivity (October 2006 SGS).
* Purchasing Managers Survey (February 2006 SGS).
* Retail Sales (March 2005 SGS).
* SGS Early Warning System (May 2005 SGS, June 2005 SGS).
* Trade Balance (December 2004 SGS).
* Unemployment Insurance, Initial Claims for (February 2005 SGS).
* U.S. Dollar Indices, Financial- and Trade-Weighted (July 2005 SGS).



Reporting/Market Focus (November 2006) -- Reality Check on Home Prices


At subscriber request, SGS is addressing the issue as to how much of the bubble in housing prices really might be accounted for by inflation. Issues on quirks in trade data, previously mentioned as this month's Reporting/Market Focus, will be addressed in a later publication.

Real Estate Remains An Inflation Hedge. A subscriber mentioned a recent article by a fine economist, where it was argued that home prices, adjusted for inflation, had risen in a manner not seen since before 1900. Further, that left room for a large decline in home prices, which in turn would be a primary recession trigger. With the National Association of Realtors (NAR) just reporting the October median existing home sales price down by 3.5% from a year ago, one could argue that process was underway.

Where the analysis looked at the median prices for existing homes, as published by the NAR, and the CPI as published by the BLS, our subscriber rightly argued that the home prices picture might not be so bad if the series were deflated by the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure.

Having looked at the numbers, here are some thoughts on the issues raised. The economy is in recession and was in recession before the housing decline started. The weakness in the housing industry certainly will exacerbate the decline in the national economy. Some of the bigger economic problems tied to the housing bubble were the adjustable-rate and low-quality mortgages issued during the housing and refinancing boom. Defaults already are rising sharply, and consumer liquidity is getting pummeled as a result.

Housing prices certainly have risen sharply in recent years, and areas that had the most speculative buying likely will be subject to the most severe price adjustments.

Assuming for a moment that the median sales price of an existing home is the appropriate housing price measure to deflate, the official CPI is not the instrument with which to deflate it.

In theory, the CPI measures housing costs, but it has not done so adequately since the early 1980s, when housing cost measurements were switched to owner's equivalent rent (what the government estimates you would pay yourself to rent your own home) from home sales prices. The SGS Alternate CPI is corrected for that change.

Looking at the average annual median existing home prices from 2001 to 2005, home prices rose by 43.4% for the four intervening years. For the same period, the SGS Alternate CPI rose by 40.6%. What that indicates is that on average, over time, real estate is a solid hedge against inflation. Real estate does not have the liquidity or portability of gold, but it can be used as an effective inflation hedge.

Still, there are heavily overvalued properties out there that will take a price hit or sit on the market for an extended period. Nonetheless, in a hyperinflationary environment, which looms eventually, even today's overvalued real estate will act as a significant store of wealth.


Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for December -- Financial Statements of the U.S. Government, Fiscal Year 2006 GAAP Accounting


The December Reporting/Market Focus will cover the annual GAAP accounting on the U.S. Government's financial condition. Due for release on December 15th, the financial report's results will be summarized as a separate Alert.

___________________________________________


December's "Shadow Government Statistics" is targeted for release in the week between Christmas and New Year's, with a specific date to be advised closer to publication. The posting of the next SGS newsletter on the Web site, as well as all interim Flash Updates and Alerts, will be advised immediately by e-mail.

Flash Update

Monday, November 20th, 2006
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Flash Update

November 20, 2006

__________

Exaggerated Gas Price Drop Pushes Inflation Reporting to Nadir

M3 Growth Hits Four-Year High

Economic Activity Continues to Crumble

Post-Election Environment Set for Rebounding Inflation and Deepening Recession


__________


With the full newsletter due in a week, this will be a brief update touching upon some of the more significant reporting of the last two weeks. The Alternate Data pages for the CPI and continuing M3 have been updated for the October numbers. Best wishes to all for a Happy Thanksgiving! -- John Williams

The inflationary recession is picking up momentum. The various special factors that have depressed near-term inflation reporting have run their course, while economic data ranging from retail sales to housing continue to signal plummeting economic activity. Such is not a happy environment for the traditional financial markets.

With average monthly gasoline prices down 12.5% from a year ago, per retail sales reporting, the 18.3% annual decline in gasoline prices reported in the October CPI seems a little overdone, overstating the CPI decline by 0.24%. Such, however, has been a consistent reporting bias over time. Rising energy prices are slow to be picked up in CPI reporting and rarely are fully accounted for, while falling energy prices tend to be picked up immediately and often go beyond what has happened.

The seasonally-adjusted monthly October CPI-U was reported down 0.5% for the second month, with annual growth dropping to 1.3% from 2.1% in September, adjusted back to pre-Clinton methodology, annual inflation dropped to 4.7% and the SGS alternate measure of consumer prices (early 1980s methodology) eased to 8.9% from 9.4%.

Highly unusual again was the Chained-CPI-U -- published by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) as the probable substitution-based index for the geometrically-weighted and gimmicked CPI-U -- outpacing the CPI-U. From August through October, annual CPI-U inflation has dropped from 3.8% to 2.1% to 1.3%, while annual C-CPI-U inflation has declined from 3.4% to 2.2% to 1.6% and now shows higher inflation than the currently official series. Distortions from geometric weighting are skewing the inflation reporting.

Unless the BLS can come up with a monthly CPI drop in excess of 0.7% in November, the Katrina-distorted plunge in annual CPI and the effects of dropping gasoline prices have run their course. Last year, November CPI dropped by 0.7%. Any monthly change in November 2006 that is more positive than that will push the annual CPI rate higher by a like amount. The rebound in inflation reporting starts with the next monthly report.

Beyond threats from oil prices and U.S. dollar weakness, increasing growth in the broad money supply should become a hot topic, fueling inflation speculation in the financial markets, irrespective of Mr. Bernanke's protestations to the contrary. While the Fed no longer publishes M3 growth, our continuing M3 measure showed annual growth in October of 9.6%, up from 9.2% in September, and at its highest level since March 2002. Also, the gimmicked 2007 fiscal deficit started off with a widening deficit in October.

The election went against the Republicans, and the problems were much more than the hyped hysteria surrounding the Iraq War. Among other issues, the economy is tanking and Main Street U.S.A. can see it. Seasonally-adjusted October retail sales dropped again, down 0.2%, following September's revised 0.8% plunge, which also was more than the reported monthly inflation decline. Seasonally-adjusted October housing starts fell 14.6% for the month and were down 27.4% from the year before. More importantly, the annual decline in the three-month moving average fell to 22.2%, its lowest level since the depths of the 1990/1991 recession.

The September trade deficit, however, showed an unusually sharp narrowing, one that should help the "preliminary"-estimate revision to third-quarter GDP. The seasonally-adjusted trade deficit narrowed to $64.3 billion from $69.0 billion in August. While the "improvement" could be explained by the reported decline in oil imports -- half tied to price, half tied to volume -- this is one of those numbers that has a terrible odor to it. There were unusual carry-over revisions (related to paperwork flow through the Customs Service), as well as possible seasonal-factor distortions from last-year's Katrina effects on the Port of New Orleans. Regardless, the deficit will rebound sharply in the months ahead, setting new records.

Then, there are those dropping oil prices. As with the CPI, the trade numbers suddenly seem to be anticipating price cuts that have not taken place yet. This intensifying quirk in economic reporting with be explored in depth in the upcoming newsletter.

Any markets that read the current environment as bullish for stocks, bonds or the U.S. dollar could be described at present as "irrational."

___________________________________________


Further detail will follow in November's "Shadow Government Statistics," targeted for release on Monday, November 27, 2006, following the Thanksgiving holiday.

Flash Update

Monday, November 6th, 2006
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

A L E R T

November 6, 2006

__________

October Jobs Data Appear Rigged

Unemployment Drop Statistically Indistinguishable from Increase

Jobs Gain Statistically Indistinguishable from Decline


__________


For purposes of full disclosure, my background is as a conservative Republican with a Libertarian bent. Shadow Government Statistics is not a political newsletter, but rather one dedicated to accurate economic and financial reporting. Irrespective of who is in office, I do my best to tell it as it is. -- John Williams

"WASHINGTON, Nov. 3 -- Republicans seized on a drop in the unemployment rate to assert on Friday that tax cuts were invigorating the economy, highlighting just four days before the election an issue that party strategists are counting on to off-set bad news about the war." So opened the lead article in Saturday's New York Times.

Bill Clinton's Labor Secretary Bob Reich discussed in his memoirs how polling surveys had shown that if you overstated economic growth, you could fool enough people possibly to swing a close election.

With continued Republican control of both the House and the Senate at risk, the Bush Administration had both the motive and the opportunity to manipulate the October labor report in its favor, to generate a reported five-year low in the unemployment rate. Beyond the reported gain in jobs and drop in unemployment being statistically indistinguishable from a drop in jobs and a gain in unemployment (based on BLS 95% confidence intervals), were the data rigged? While there is no smoking gun, a strong odor of cordite permeates the air. The level of pre-orchestrated hype and a wide variety of unusual reporting characteristics in the October labor data argue strongly in favor of manipulation.

Up front, there is nothing illegal about rigging economic reporting. The only prosecutable offense to my knowledge is if an individual (i.e. in the White House, Federal Reserve), who is outside the reporting agency (the Bureau of Labor Statistics in this instance), gets access to the data before 4:30 p.m. Eastern Time the day before release. There could be an interesting story here for someone in terms of when the Republican "party strategists" began counting on the data in question to offset the political pressures from the Iraq War.

The October employment report came against the background of rapidly declining economic activity in September, as seen in retail sales and industrial production. September help-wanted advertising, which leads October employment, crashed. New claims for unemployment insurance, net of annual comparisons to the impact of Hurricane Katrina, was little changed, and the purchasing managers October employment indices were little improved.

Our comments in the last newsletter as to the upcoming employment report: "The political needs of the Administration remain great in this last major economic release before the election, and risk remains high of political massaging. Happy news remains a fair bet, regardless of any miserable underlying reality and other indications that would suggest a possible jobs loss."

In general, both the payroll survey data (jobs growth) and household survey data (unemployment) are of poor reporting quality. As a result, the employment growth in the payroll survey often is sharply at odds with the household survey, as seen in the October report. Also, since the BLS began readjusting the seasonal-adjustment factors every month, the BLS has been able to report pretty much whatever it wanted to. Recent reporting has tended to show soft jobs growth, which pleased the credit markets, and improving unemployment, which has been a theoretical plus on the political front. Such was the pattern seen in October.

Payroll Survey. Here is how the numbers were reported. The seasonally-adjusted October gain in payroll employment was 92,000 +/- 108,000, which was statistically indistinguishable from a contraction. Yet, October was up by an extraordinary 231,000, net of revisions. September's previously reported 51,000 jobs gain nearly tripled in revision to 148,000.

The monthly bias factor (birth/death model), added for good measure into the jobs report for October, was upped to 73,000 from 57,000 in October 2005. That means that the 92,000 gain reported in October was just 19,000 net of the bias gimmick.

The revisions, however, were extraordinary, for the second month in a row. They had the effect of boosting total jobs created by the Bush Administration over time, without rattling the credit markets too much with the current month's gain. Much of the revised gain was in education, as the BLS suddenly picked a large number of teachers who somehow had not shown up in initial September reporting.

Also, as has been the recent pattern, the seasonal factors have been unusual. When properly adjusted, the year-to-year change in the seasonally-adjusted and not-seasonally-adjusted series should be virtually identical. Based on the revisions to the data. The unadjusted level of September payrolls was revised upward by 184,000, but the adjusted levels lost out again, only revising upward by 139,000.

Nonetheless, year-to-year changes in September and October adjusted payrolls were unusually inflated versus the unadjusted numbers. Adjusted versus unadjusted annual growth rates for September and October were 1.483% versus 1.408% and 1.469% versus 1.425%. The difference is that instead of respective monthly gains now of 148,000 and 92,000 for September and October, the gains would have been 126,000 and 60,000. For the two months combined, the current gain of 240,000 would have been 186,000 with consistent seasonals.

Household Survey. The household survey showed a seasonally-adjusted gain in employment of 437,000. That reflects the number of people with jobs, as opposed to the payroll survey, which reflects the number of jobs, where individuals can hold more than one job.

The popularly-followed U3 unemployment rate in October declined to 4.42% +/- 0.2%, from 4.58% in September, a change that was statistically indistinguishable from an increase in unemployment. On an unadjusted basis, U3 declined to 4.1% in October from 4.4% in September.

Unemployment rate U3, however, usually moves with the less-followed but broader U6 unemployment rate. Unadjusted U6 held steady at 7.6%, while the seasonally-adjusted U6 unemployment rate rose to 8.1% in October, from 8.0% in September. Since U6 is less subject to attention and, accordingly, to manipulation, it is the more credible number and suggests an upturn in October unemployment.

Politically, the Administration needed something dramatic in these numbers, like "a five-year low in unemployment." Aside from the number being ridiculous against the background of other economic data that show a deepening recession, Wall Street is going to start raising an equally absurd concept, that of the economy nearing full employment. Such a concept would pressure the Fed to raise rates. Accordingly, look for the unemployment rate to rebound sharply in the next report.

As to the election, Main Street U.S.A. usually has a pretty sense of how it is doing and usually does not believe the government's numbers, when they vary too far from reality. Betting on bogus jobs numbers to turn Republican prospects is a real long-shot, regardless of Bob Reich's polling studies.

___________________________________________


Further detail will follow in November's "Shadow Government Statistics," targeted for release on Monday, November 27, 2006, following the Thanksgiving holiday. There will be at least one other intervening Flash Update.

October 2006 Newsletter

Monday, October 30th, 2006
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Issue Number 24

October 30, 2006

__________

Collapsing Economic Activity Shows Accelerating Recession

Twisted Inflation Plunge Will Reverse Post-Election

Is Fed Controlling Manipulations?

U.S. Productivity Has Been Falling Since NAFTA

Stock Market Euphoria Should Falter as Gold and Oil Prices Rebound

Major Dollar Selling and Higher Interest Rates Still in Offing


__________



OPENING COMMENTS


The broad outlook for a deepening inflationary recession remains in place. The drop-off in economic activity indicated by recent reporting is nothing short of extraordinary. Recession speculation should increase markedly. Also, the plunge in CPI inflation was to be expected, given the recent drop in energy prices and year-ago comparisons with hurricane effects. While the inflation downturn will be very short-lived, economic activity is going to get a great deal worse.

With the completion of the election cycle next Tuesday, pressures for immediate political gratification from economic reporting will abate and financial-market concerns will move to center stage in economic reporting. Financial-market issues may have been more of a recent driving force behind the reporting of key data than I expected, as discussed below. Keep in mind that for the parts of the electorate, financial-market stability also is an important issue. Consider recent historic highs in the Dow Jones Industrial Average, for example.

Nevertheless, despite any gimmicked reporting and happy propaganda out of Washington, the economy is weakening and in enough trouble to give political incumbents trouble. That should be bad news for Republican hopes of maintaining control of Congress.

Collapsing Economic Activity. The reported weakness in retail sales, industrial production, housing, help-wanted advertising, the purchasing managers survey and GDP, and the record level of the monthly trade deficit, were near catastrophic in some instances.

Economic series such as employment, industrial production and retail sales, which took hits last year from Hurricane Katrina, should have shown sharp increases in annual growth. Instead these series showed slowing annual growth or minimal gains, while the monthly changes were much weaker than consensus forecasts: production and retail sales had sharp monthly declines; employment was well below expectations. These September reports look like they had taken a hit greater than that seen in the impact of last year's devastating hurricanes, only there were no natural catastrophes to account for the devastation.

Also taking new plunges in terms of level or annual growth were the various housing series and help-wanted advertising. As shown in the following graph, help-wanted advertising now has hit a low that has not been broken since Sputnik opened the Space Age.



The series is suggestive of the official 2000 recession and the current circumstance as being two downlegs in a double-dip recession.

Also moving lower -- with employment already at a recession level -- the purchasing managers manufacturing index looks like it finally is about to break below 50.0, confirming a contracting manufacturing sector.

The August trade deficit exploded anew, and it did some damage to GDP reporting. The government's advance estimate of third-quarter real (inflation-adjusted) growth slipped to 1.6% from 2.6% in the second quarter, the weakest annualized growth reported since first-quarter 2003. As discussed later, both the second and third quarters now have growth rates that are statistically indistinguishable from contraction. Eventually, revisions should take those quarters negative, providing a clear recessionary pattern even as reported by the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA).

The current sharp decline in underlying economic activity is enough to have a number of consensus economists starting to look for a real GDP contraction.

Inflation Twists and Turns. On the inflation front, the CPI reporting was unusually twisted, showing flaws in methodological gimmicks introduced during the Clinton Administration, in addition to some of the more-regular games playing.

While the sharp monthly and annual declines in September CPI were due to declining energy prices and year-ago comparisons with hurricane-induced price spikes, those patterns will reverse before year-end.

The Bush II Administration also showed its hand in these data, once again picking up declining energy prices in CPI reporting much more rapidly than it has when energy prices were rising.

The strangest reporting, though, involved the CPI-U and C-CPI-U. The first measure is the widely followed CPI number, which has its components aggregated using a geometric weighting. With a geometric weighting, a lower price automatically increases a components weight. The CPI no longer is a fixed market basket of goods with an arithmetic weighting, as it had been when the CPI became popular as a cost-of-living adjustment measure in early labor union contracts.

The second measure is the chain-weighted CPI that eventually is going to replace the CPI. As discussed in the SGS background article on inflation (see home page www.shadowstats.com), the weightings in this index are based on actual purchase patterns of consumers, and weightings shift as consumers substitute hamburger for more expensive steak.

In theory, the C-CPI inflation always should be weaker than the original CPI, and also supposedly the current CPI. Yet, in September's reporting, the C-CPI showed annual inflation of 2.17%, which was higher than the CPI's 2.06%. This was the first such occurrence. What went awry? The difference is in the weighting. The CPI's geometric weighting, which never had a good basis in theory, appears to be working somewhat better than anticipated in artificially reducing inflation.

Rumblings on Fed Data Manipulation. It is not just the March 2006 elimination of M3 reporting, or the extraordinary revisions to the Fed's Flow of Funds Data discussed in this month's Reporting/Market Focus, or the unusual reporting patterns that surfaced earlier this year in industrial production. There are stories surfacing of Federal Reserve phone calls to the Census Bureau directing how certain economic series should be reported.

Up front, we cannot confirm the accuracy of these stories, yet. They are mentioned as a heads-up to subscribers that some of what has been going on in recent economic reporting may be more closely tied to Fed efforts to manipulate the financial markets -- to prevent a financial panic -- than they were to aiding Republican election prospects. Such manipulations may fall under the purview of the much-maligned Plunge Protection Team (PPT). The PPT, which was created by President Reagan after the 1987 crash, has been receiving a fair amount of press recently. It is controlled primarily by the Treasury Secretary (recent head of Goldman Sachs) and the Fed Chairman. We hope to have more detail next month, or in an intervening Alert.

Alternate Realities. In general, if a government economic measure does match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Fed and Wall Street. This section regularly will cover the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting. The methodologies for the series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS. Effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan-Era GDP.

The alternate third-quarter GDP growth reflects the "advance" estimate with many of the methodological gimmicks of recent decades removed. The alternate third-quarter inflation-adjusted annual (year-to-year) GDP growth rate is a decline of roughly 1.5% versus the official 2.9% gain.



[Note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com.]

Of continued discomfort to the low-inflation hypesters -- those continually touting "core" inflation -- the gimmicked annual core inflation rates keep notching higher, month after month, as oil prices continue to permeate broad economic activity.
                          Eight Levels of Inflation
                   Annual Inflation for June to August 2006


Measure Jul Aug Sep I-1 Core PCE Deflator 2.3%r 2.5% n.a. I-2 Core C-CPI 2.5% 2.7% 2.7% I-3 Core CPI-U 2.7% 2.8% 2.9% I-4 PCE Deflator 3.4% 3.2% n.a I-5 C-CPI 3.5% 3.4% 2.2% I-6 CPI-U 4.1% 3.8% 2.1% I-7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U 7.3% 7.0% 5.2% I-8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation 10.9% 10.1%r 9.4%

(r) Revised. Notes: I-1 to I-3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively, of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U. I-4 to I-6 are the same measures with energy and food inflation included. The CPI-U (I-6) is the measure popularly followed by the financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation. I-7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre- Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top series in the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com. I-8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which reverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so, plus an adjustment for the Clinton-Era geometric weighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic bookkeeping.




[Note: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com.]



Updated Summary of Current Outlook


In general, the broad economic outlook has not changed, but the financial markets -- particularly equities -- are increasingly irrational. As a result, a deepening recession with uncontained inflation will threaten financial-market stability. Underlying economic reality should gain broader recognition quickly as the accelerating deepening of the 2005 to 2007 (likely 2008) inflationary recession continues to surface in reporting of the next several months.

A contracting economy, inflation and risks of intensifying dollar selling are upon us and continue to offer the worst of all environments for the equity and credit markets. On the bright side, of course, is the gold market, where the traditional inflation-hedge and flight-to-safety/quality vehicle will continue earning its keep -- shy of irregular volatility -- as the dollar weakens, inflation accelerates and the global political situation continues to deteriorate.

The Shadow Government Statistics' Early Warning System (EWS) was activated in May 2005 and signaled the onset of a formal recession in July 2005. The EWS looks at historical growth patterns of key leading economic indicators in advance of major economic booms and busts and sets growth trigger points that generate warnings of major upturns or downturns when predetermined growth limits are breached. Since the beginning of 2005, when a number of key indicators had been holding near or at their fail-safe points, seven of those indicators have moved beyond those levels, signaling a recession.

Retail sales, help-wanted advertising and housing starts generated such signals in the last several months. Once beyond their fail-safe points, these indicators never have sent out false alarms, either for an economic boom or bust.

The false economic boom massaged into first-quarter GDP reporting was a precursor to the overstatement of, albeit slowing, second- and third-quarter GDP growth. The reported annualized real growth rates of 2.6% and 1.6% for the second and third quarters both should have been contractions. Irrespective of underlying reality, negative GDP did not surface in regular government reporting before the November election. Negative reporting still could be seen in the next couple of quarters, and there remains the possibility that the recent quarters could turn negative after benchmark revisions. The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) eventually should time the downturn to mid- or late-2005. Stories of discussions of a possible Recession Dating Committee meeting already have surfaced.

Whether or not there is a recession increasingly is a hot topic in the popular financial media. Those Wall Street economists who act as shills for the market will keep up their "strong growth is just around the corner" hype regardless of any and all evidence to the contrary.

>From the standpoint of common experience, this downturn will be considered the second leg of a double-dip recession, not an independent contraction as will be claimed officially.

Most economic data have softened, with the trend accelerating. Regular monthly contractions are near for both payroll employment and industrial production, although political manipulation can keep the official payroll and production data afloat for a while longer. Significant deterioration also will be seen in corporate profits and federal tax receipts, despite any near-term volatility to the contrary. Depressed tax receipts will combine with negligible fiscal discipline and ongoing war spending to accelerate deterioration in the federal finances.

This general outlook is predicated on economic activity that already has taken place and does not consider any risks from exogenous factors such as renewed terrorist activity in the United States, world war, major natural disasters or a financial panic.

Market perceptions of the downturn in business activity are increasing sharply. As expectations begin to anticipate weak data, traditional expectations also are being lowered for inflation, despite the obvious ongoing oil problem. Worsening stagflation, however, seems to have gained a good foothold in some consensus thinking. Still, consensus forecasts generally will tend to be surprised on the downside for economic reports and on the upside for inflation reports, for some time to come.

The roots of the current difficulties are structural in nature. A consumer starved of income growth and overburdened with debt cannot sustain the real growth in consumption needed to keep GDP growth in positive territory. The income weakness is a direct result of the loss of a significant manufacturing base to offshore locations and the ensuing explosive, perpetual growth of the U.S. trade deficit.

Exacerbating economic and financial woes will be unusually high inflation during this contraction. Gold prices already have signaled inflation and other difficulties. Fueled by high oil prices, weakness in the U.S. dollar and accelerating Fed monetization of federal debt, inflation will not be brought under control simply by weakness in economic demand. Instead, persistently high prices only will serve to intensify the recession, making it exceptionally long and protracted. Ongoing inflation woes and dollar problems will maintain upside pressure on long-term interest rates, reversing what still is an inverted yield curve that some view as a recession signal.

Faltering economic activity and mounting inflation have created a nightmarish conundrum for the political operatives at the Federal Reserve. Soft economic numbers and high inflation had been spun as "conflicting data," but an inflationary recession is in play, and there is little the Fed can do about it. The recent one-month lull in inflation was due to factors well outside the domain of Federal Reserve activity.

The hype given to the investing public -- that a weak economy means low inflation and interest rates -- cannot work in the current environment. Any conflicts that arise are not in the economic data but in simplistic views on economic activity espoused by Wall Street, or in the statistical manipulation goals of the politicians. Those latter issues explain Fed Chairman Bernanke's continued tap dancing on the inflation outlook. Such is anchored in putting a positive spin on an impossible situation and avoiding a financial-market meltdown for as long as possible. The markets have been reasonably cooperative, so far.

In the present circumstance, inflation driven by robust economic demand would be a happy event, but such is not to be. Rather, the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar is being lost to wasting diseases, eroded by foreign exchange weakness in the trade-deficit plagued greenback, malfeasance in domestic fiscal and monetary policies, and external disruptions such as cartel-orchestrated price surges in oil. All the latter factors are in play.

>From the Federal Reserve's perspective, at present, mixed signals are the best that can be offered to the markets. Allowing for the possibility of renewing the faux "tightening" signals Mr. Bernanke's devotion to keeping inflation under control. The Fed's soon to be short-lived "pause" in hiking interest rates signals Mr. Bernanke's devotion to maintaining solid economic growth. While the games playing may keep market sentiment gyrating for a while, the Fed is in an untenable position. Raising rates will do little to contain a non-demand driven inflation, while holding or lowering rates will do little to stimulate the structurally-impaired economy. The current "pause" in the Fed's raising short-term interest rates likely will not survive the end of 2006 or early 2007.

>From the standpoint of the federal government, traditional economic stimuli in the form of tax cuts or increased federal spending have reached their practical limits with the current budget-deficit excesses.

Due to the inability of the government or central bank to stabilize this environment, risks of the current situation evolving into a hyperinflationary depression are extraordinarily high. Such a development involving the world's reserve currency would lead to a collapse of the current global currency system. In order to regain public confidence, monetary authorities likely would structure gold into the base of any new international currency system.

The unfolding inflationary recession is the worst of all worlds for the financial markets. Particularly hard hit will be the U.S. dollar, with significant downside moves looming for both equity and bond prices. Despite recent extreme volatility, the price of gold is headed much higher. At such time as the system re-stabilizes, post-crisis, there will be exceptional investment opportunities for those who have been able to preserve their wealth, capital and liquidity.



MARKETS PERSPECTIVE


The Federal Reserve keeps playing its games, trying to be non-disruptive to the financial markets. Matching market expectations, the FOMC held rates steady, again, last week, but the "pause" will prove to have a very limited life span in the months ahead. Renewed inflation pressures and intensifying dollar weakness could have the markets looking for rate hikes as early as the December 12th FOMC meeting, and very likely at the meeting or two that follow.

The drop in inflation largely will reverse by year-end, just given catch-up on the year-ago distortions. With the economy tumbling, ongoing hype of a cleverly orchestrated soft landing should vanish quickly. The economy has crashed, and there is not much the Federal Reserve can or could have done about it. The deepening recession should show up in generally weaker-than-expected corporate profits. Post-election Middle Eastern tensions are likely to mount, along with renewed upside pressure on the price of oil. If this happens, gold would rebound at the same time.

In terms of the broad financial market picture through year-end, the U.S. dollar should sell off sharply on a trade-weighted basis and particularly against the Swiss franc. As a partial result of the mounting dollar and inflation difficulties, the domestic yield curve will turn positive and steepen sharply, due primarily to rising long-term interest rates. This is a trend that will flow through into the new year.

The combination of softer profits, a weak dollar and higher interest rates likely will not play out happily for equities. Renewed concerns tied to the dollar, inflation and global instabilities suggest an upbeat year-end for the precious metals, despite recent mixed pressures.

Equities -- The stock market generally has done well recently, with the Dow Jones Industrial Average making historical highs. That said, most other indices, though gaining sharply, still are shy of their all-time highs. In particular, the Dow Jones Wilshire 5000 -- the broadest index available on U.S. stocks -- is still more than 6% shy of the mark.

Nonetheless, the market hype is extraordinary, with expectations of a passive-to-accommodative Fed, contained inflation, a soft economic landing and a relatively tranquil global and domestic political circumstance. None of these props underlying equities will be long-lived.

News on the hard economic landing already is breaking, and the election still looks like a losing proposition for the market-favored Republicans. The timing on the reversal of other factors should follow the election, but they could break sooner.

Particularly damaging to current market irrationality will be the terrible dollar tumble ahead. Liquidity problems resulting from that will tend to push long-term yields higher and equity prices much lower. The dollar's sell-off could begin at any time with little warning.

Credit Markets -- Contrary to all the hoopla over lower oil and gasoline prices, inflation is far from peaking, although the CPI took a heavy hit in September. Inflation concerns will return after the election. By early 2007, the Fed will be looking at further interest rate hikes in defense of the U.S. dollar and ostensibly to fight inflation. Barring a stock-market crash, the U.S. central bank will not be shifting to an easing stance to stimulate the stock market or the economy.

For those who think otherwise, consider that the FOMC had in hand the September inflation data and knew of the pending unusually weak GDP growth at the time of last week's meeting. Still, the inflation cautions remained in the press release.

Underlying fundamentals continue to indicate that long-term interest rates are headed sharply higher by the end of the year and into 2007. This move in rates will be dominated by rising inflation, by a weakening dollar and by foreign investors increasingly moving their assets out of dollar-denominated instruments. Long rates are being driven by the dollar, not inflation, at the moment, but both the dollar and inflation will key in the rate spike ahead.

A number of factors drive interest rate movements, including economic activity, inflation, credit demand, political stability and relative dollar strength and accompanying cash inflows and outflows from abroad. The recession will offer major downside pressure on rates, but inflation and the dollar will provide the dominant upside pressures on rates.

The yield curve on Treasuries has turned slightly more negative, with higher yields since the last newsletter. The constant maturity 10-year yield is at 4.70%, with the 3-month bill yield at 5.12%, levels that overall are about 5 to 20 basis points higher than one month ago. An added couple of hundred basis points at the long end still will do a great deal towards flipping the yield curve to a fairly normal positive slope. The inverted yield curve is tied more to the heavy foreign purchases of U.S. Treasuries than it is to recessionary expectations.

U.S. Dollar -- On average, the U.S. dollar strengthened in September and early October, but appears to be on the brink of faltering anew, as the U.S. recession and inflation problems gain broader recognition outside the United States. Circumstances have not been helped by the ongoing "pause" in Fed policy, and the election still likely to threaten Republican control of Congress is not a dollar plus. Then you have Mr. Greenspan in the wings talking up the euro as an alternate reserve currency to the U.S. dollar.

The dollar's potential tumble keeps getting pushed back, but very negative and disorderly markets await the greenback. As the downturn in the value of the U.S. currency begins in earnest and then accelerates, fallout in the credit and equity markets should not be pleasant.

Underlying fundamentals remain so bad, they only could be marginally worse. Driving relative currency values are relative conditions in domestic economic activity, inflation, interest rates, government financial conditions and political stability. Though not fully recognized, all these factors for the United States -- relative to its major trading partners -- are negative. The U.S. economy is in a recession that is gaining recognition; inflation is spiking, despite the near-term September gyration; and interest rates are rising abroad, while the Fed -- at least temporarily -- has stopped raising rates at home. The actual U.S. federal deficit is beyond containment, promising an eventual hyperinflationary environment. Further, the bounce in the President's approval rating was short-lived, and it is at a level that has crashed the greenback in the past.

Timing is uncertain, but the break in the dollar should come quickly, with little if any advance warning. Serious shocks loom in U.S. economic and fiscal data (December GAAP statement) and deteriorating domestic politics. New record lows for the dollar still are likely before the end of the year, if not early in 2007, despite any overt or covert supportive intervention by any central bank(s). At some point, certain Asian central banks even could be encouraging the dollar selling.

Generally, the weaker the dollar, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. equity and capital markets. As shown in the following graph, the U.S. dollar still is trending lower in terms of year-to-year change.



[Note: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS for methodology.]

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics' Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For September, the monthly dollar average rebounded by 0.74% following a 1.15% decline in August. September's year-to-year change was a decline of 2.02%, narrowed from August's 2.85% drop.

In the same directions, September's monthly average of the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index gained 0.52% after falling by 0.93% in August. September's year-to-year decline of 2.55% moderated further from August's 3.48%.

As we go to press, the dollar indices in October generally have been stronger than the September averages. Nonetheless, some selling pressure has developed in the last several days.

Gold -- After averaging around $630 per troy ounce in July and August, the gold price tumbled in September, averaging just below $600 per troy ounce. October trading has averaged below September's level, but the precious metal has rebounded recently, trading just shy of $600 as we go to press. The long-term outlook for gold remains highly positive.

As a hedge against currency problems and inflation, and as the preferred safe-haven vehicle, the price of gold generally should move higher and set new historical highs in the months ahead, despite any near-term volatility. The currency and inflation issues are chronic and will deteriorate sharply in the next several months and before an ultimate collapse in the global currency system. Such does not prevent interim wild price gyrations, however, particularly if central banks think they see an opportunity to slam the price of gold.





The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs show softer September averages. As we go to press, gold is trading just shy of $600, oil is around $60 and the Swiss franc is about $0.80.



REPORTING PERSPECTIVE



The Big Three Market Movers


As the election passes, so too will some of the political pressures that have contributed to distortions of near-term reporting. Upcoming releases of the major series still will be subject to massaging for the perceived needs of the financial markets. Separately, most of the heavy annual and seasonally-adjusted monthly distortions from last year's hurricanes effects should pass with the September data, but some effects will linger through the publication of the October numbers. Distortions to initial claims for unemployment insurance will linger for another several months.

Employment/Unemployment -- September's 51,000 payroll gain surprised the markets on the downside, while the magnitude of increase was marginal for the sixth straight month. The "improved" unemployment rate, however, remained a political positive, as the labor numbers once again sent mixed signals intended to please both the credit markets and the electorate.

As reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the popularly followed seasonally-adjusted U-3 unemployment rate eased insignificantly in September to 4.58% +/- 0.2% from 4.69% in August. Unadjusted September U-3 dropped to 4.4% from 4.6%, while the broader unadjusted U-6 moved from 8.3% to 7.6%, and the adjusted U-6 eased from 8.4% to 8.0%.

Including the long-term "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton administration, total unemployment remains roughly 12%. The household survey also showed seasonally-adjusted September employment (those people with at least one job) up by 271,000, following a 250,000 gain in August.

For September, the payroll survey's seasonally-adjusted gain of 51,000 (113,000 net of revisions) remained well within the published reporting error of +/-108,000. This followed an upwardly revised August gain of 188,000 (was 128,000). Annual growth in unadjusted September employment was 1.27%, down from 1.34% in August, and down from the near-term peak of 1.71% in August 2005.

A year ago September, Hurricane Katrina devastated the Gulf Coast. While the BLS now shows monthly payroll growth slowing from 175,000 in August 2005 to 48,000 in September 2005, the BLS never reported the bulk of lost jobs. Even so, looking at August 2006 and September 2006 against that year ago period, one would expect that a growing economy would spike the relative annual jobs growth for September. With September 2006 being compared to an artificially-depressed period, however, growth did not increase; it softened instead.

The unusual numbers did not end there. When data are seasonally adjusted properly, year-to-year growth in the adjusted and unadjusted monthly data should be virtually identical. In September, they were not. The unadjusted annual growth rates detailed above, when applied to the seasonally-adjusted numbers, indicate that monthly payrolls should not have risen by 51,000 in September, but rather they should have fallen by 40,000.

September's payroll gain of 51,000 included a positive bias of 28,000 jobs in the "net birth/death" adjustment, a fudge factor that was little changed down the 50,000 used for September 2005. The fudge factor should be little changed in October (it was a 57,000 gain in October 2005).

The latest report was against a background of an ongoing collapse of growth in help-wanted advertising, Katrina-improved growth in new claims for unemployment insurance and weak purchasing managers employment indices (see the respective sections).

Adding to the extraordinary features of the September jobs report, the BLS announced that its annual benchmark revision for March 2006, to be revised and reported with the January 2007 jobs data, would be an addition of roughly 810,000 payroll jobs. Although historical revisions have been worse, the BLS announced that it "currently is researching possible sources for this larger-than-normal expected benchmark revision."

The benchmarking process has been seriously flawed for years, and this change is not credible. Consider that the involved period encompasses the missing of several hundred thousand jobs lost along the Gulf Coast. If a cause for the "undercount" cannot be found, the solution will be to add roughly 67,000 to 100,000 extra jobs a month to the birth-death bias factors, so as to overstate jobs growth even further, on a regular basis. Remember, the only political sin for a government statistical agency is to underestimate economic growth or to overestimate inflation.

Next Release (November 3): The political needs of the Administration remain great in this last major economic release before the election, and risk remains high of political massaging. Happy news remains a fair bet, regardless of any miserable underlying reality and other indications that would suggest a possible jobs loss.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) -- The "advance" estimate of annualized real growth for third-quarter 2006 GDP fell to 1.58% +/- 3%, down from the "final" estimate of 2.56% for the second quarter, and down from 5.58% in the first quarter. The third-quarter growth estimate was indistinguishable from a contraction, as was the reported growth in the second quarter. Such allows, with possible revisions, for eventual formal recession reporting with numbers already in place from the Bureau of Economic Analysis.

The latest growth estimate did not fully account for the deterioration in trade or for the proper level of inflation. Yet, relative to second-quarter growth, the deterioration was realistic. Where ultimately the second-quarter should revise to a quarterly contraction, the third quarter would revise to a relatively deeper contraction.

In terms of annual growth, the third-quarter's pace slowed to 2.86% from 3.51% in the second quarter. Adjusting for methodological distortions built into GDP reporting over time, the SGS Alternate GDP measure suggests economic reality is much weaker, with a year-to-year annual contraction of roughly 1.5% for the third-quarter GDP, deepening from a 1.0% drop in the second quarter (see the graph in the Alternate Reality section of the Opening Comments).

The GDP inflation rate (deflator) in the third quarter remained understated at 1.83% versus 3.30% in the prior quarter, despite annualized seasonally-adjusted CPI in the second-quarter of 2.94% and of 4.97% in the second quarter.

Alternate measures of GDP growth, in terms of the broader Gross National Product (GNP) and the theoretically-equivalent Gross Domestic Income, will not be available until the next report, at the earliest.

Next Release (November 29): The "preliminary" estimate revision for third-quarter 2006 GDP should tend toward an even weaker report, barring major revisions to underlying data.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) -- The BLS reported the seasonally-adjusted September CPI-U fell by 0.49% (down by 0.49% unadjusted), following August's 0.25% (0.20% unadjusted) increase. On a not-seasonally-adjusted basis, September's annual inflation rate (I-6) was 2.06%, down from 3.82% in August. The eight levels of annual inflation, I-1 to I-8, are shown in the table in the Alternate Reality section, as is the plot of the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation number.

The "experimental" Chained Consumer Price Index (C-CPI-U), the fully substitution based CPI that presumably is the eventual replacement for current CPI reporting, showed annual inflation (I-5) of 2.17% in September, down from 3.42% in August. What is extraordinary and exceptional here is that annual C-CPI-U inflation has topped the CPI-U for the first time ever. There is a problem in the gimmicked CPI-U weightings (see the Opening Comments).

Adjusted to pre-Clinton methodology (I-7), annual CPI growth was about 5.2% as of September, against 7.0% in August. The SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure (I-8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies of recent decades, shows annual inflation at 9.4% in September versus 10.1% (revised from 10.8%) in August.

As discussed in the Opening Comments, September inflation rates took a double hit from the year-ago effects of Katrina, as well as the recent drop in gasoline prices. As usual, the CPI picked more than the actual drop in energy related prices, while the pick-up usually is quite lagged when the movement is to the upside in energy costs. With seasonally-adjusted CPI-U down 0.7% and 0.1% in monthly November and December 2005 CPI reporting, those same months in 2006 will be inclined to show sharp increases in annual CPI inflation.

Next Release (November 16): Inflation has not peaked, but it will take several month's to regain its recent high annual rates. Nonetheless, surprises still should come in on the upside of weak expectations, tied particularly to core numbers, which continue to firm. They increasingly are reflecting the slow process of oil prices permeating nearly all levels of business activity.

Despite short-term volatility, annual inflation will remain high and should continue to accelerate to the upside, particularly in November. Pressures will continue not only from the ongoing and lagged effects of oil prices, but also from a weak U.S. dollar. Seasonally-adjusted monthly inflation was up 0.25% for October 2005, which means that monthly October 2006 inflation above or below that level will move the reported annual inflation rate in tandem.



Other Troubled Key Series


Federal Deficit -- As discussed in the Flash Update, the official 2006 federal budget deficit (fiscal year ended September 30th) was reported at $247.7 billion, down $71.0 billion from 2005's $318.7 billion. Despite the gimmicked reporting, the amount of debt taken on by the federal government showed worsening annual fiscal deterioration. Further, reporting based on generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) -- due for release in mid-December -- also should show deterioration, with the actual 2006 deficit in excess of $3.5 trillion.

The improvement in the accounting-gimmicked number was due to corporate tax relief on repatriated profits, which, in turn triggered heavy activity and a resulting short-lived surge in corporate tax revenues. The tax surge had nothing to do with strong economic activity.

Separate from the GAAP-based numbers and official deficit reporting, the change in gross federal debt is a fair indicator of actual net cash outlays by the government. As of fiscal year-end 2006, the gross federal debt stood at $8.507 trillion, up by $574 billion from 2005, which in turn was up $554 billion from 2004.

Going forward, the official federal deficit will inflate, as government finances suffer tax revenue losses from the intensifying recession and relative tax receipt declines after the expiration of the tax incentives. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy's mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance -- Annual change in initial claims moved into more-negative territory (an economic positive) due to year-ago comparisons with the effects of Hurricane Katrina. On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended October 21st, annual change widened to an 8.3% decline, from a 6.2% drop as of the September 16th week.

Usually, the volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly numbers is due partially to the seasonal-adjustment process. When the series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

It is worth noting that the annual changes on a weekly basis are near zero, and the year-ago impacts from the hurricanes are working their way through the 17-week moving average. By the end of November, the year-ago growth patterns should resume annual deterioration in unemployment claims, once again.

Real Average Weekly Earnings -- September's seasonally-adjusted real earnings soared by 1.0% for the month, after a 0.4% drop (revised from a 0.5% decline). September's real earnings also jumped by 2.2% from the year before, following August's 0.3% gain. The "improvement" all was tied to year-ago CPI comparisons that were distorted by the effects of Hurricane Katrina. Those effects and distortions will reverse in the months ahead.

Volatility in this series comes primarily from variations in reported CPI growth. Allowing for the biases built into the CPI-W series used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series still signals ongoing severe financial strain on U.S. households and continuing recession.

Retail Sales -- As discussed in the Flash Update, September's seasonally-adjusted retail sales fell by 0.4% +/- 0.7% (down 0.5% net of revisions) for the month, well below market expectations. Retail sales in August gained 0.1% (previously 0.2%) from July. Net of heavily understated CPI inflation, September's sales were up by a tepid 0.1%

When inflation-adjusted year-to-year growth in retail sales falls below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation), such signals recession. The signal was generated in June. Before inflation adjustment, September's annual growth was 5.5%, down from August's 6.4%. Net of Katrina-dampened annual inflation, September's annual growth was 3.4% against 2.6% in August.

Next Release (November 14): October retail sales also should come in below expectations, reflecting declining economic activity. Inflation-adjusted growth should remain negative on a monthly basis, with annual growth generally continuing to slow.

Industrial Production -- Surprising market expectations on the downside, seasonally-adjusted September production plunged by 0.6%, following an unchanged August that previously had shown a 0.1% decline versus July. Year-to-year growth in September was 5.6%, up from 4.8% (previously 4.7%) in August.

Next Release (November 16): Look for industrial production to contract again in October, increasingly mirroring the recession. Such would surprise market expectations, once again, on the downside.

New Orders for Durable Goods -- The highly volatile durable goods orders jumped by a seasonally-adjusted 7.8% (8.1% net of revisions), after declining by a revised 0.1% (previously down 0.5%) in August. As sometimes happens, virtually all the gain came from a spike in irregular aircraft orders, with new orders for the month, ex-transportation, were up just 0.1%. September's orders were up 11.4% from the year before, against August's 4.2% gain.

Also spiked by aircraft orders, the widely followed nondefense capital goods orders exploded by 21.9% for the month, after a revised 2.2% decline in August (previously down by 3.5%). September's annual growth rate was up 31.3%.

At one time, durable goods orders was a solid leading indicator of broad economic activity, when smoothed using a six-month moving average. After the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders, however, the series' predictive ability suffered a serious setback.

Trade Balance -- Surprising the markets, and dampening the advance estimate of third-quarter GDP growth, the seasonally-adjusted August 2006 trade deficit surged to a new monthly record of $69.9 billion, from the prior record set in July of $68.0 billion. As noted in the recent Flash Update, the excuse proffered by Wall Street's spinmeisters was that the deteriorating deficit was just due to rising oil prices. As with similar claims for July deficit, the hype was terribly misleading. In July, a reduction in dollar oil imports actually dampened the exploding deficit.

For August, the $1.9 billion deficit increase could be attributed fully to oil, but not to oil prices. Higher oil prices accounted for $0.4 billion of imports, while the increase in the physical volume of oil imports accounted for $1.5 billion of imports.

August oil imports (both physical and dollar volume) rose to the highest level, ever. As Middle Eastern tensions rise anew, post-election, the U.S. economy will be more vulnerable to disruptions in foreign oil supply than at any time in the past.

The spike in the August deficit may have suffered some seasonal-factor distortions due the year-ago impact of Katrina on traffic through the Port of New Orleans, but those factors do not apply to the current reported oil imports, which are based on the not-seasonally-adjusted daily rate of activity.

Next Release (November 9): The September trade deficit should continue the widening trend, and upcoming deficit reports will surge beyond consensus forecasts, regularly setting new records. Any unusually large swing in the September data should impact the preliminary-estimate revision of third-quarter GDP, where unexpected trade deterioration would soften the reported GDP growth rate and vice versa.

Consumer Confidence -- September confidence measures rose somewhat, thanks to lower gasoline prices, and annual growth soared against the Katrina-dampened sentiments of a year ago. The Conference Board's September consumer confidence rose by 4.3%, which did not offset August's 6.4% drop. The September number is subject to suspect seasonal adjustment. The unadjusted University of Michigan's consumer sentiment increased by 4.2%, which followed August's 3.2% decline.

On a three-month moving-average basis for September, annual growth in the Conference Board's measure turned positive, up 5.1%, against a 0.9% decline in the prior month, while the University of Michigan number was down 4.0%, following August's 10.7% decline. These lagging, not leading, indicators are signaling that the economy remains in recession.

The just-reported October University of Michigan consumer sentiment measure increased by 9.6% for the month. The positive trend in the monthly confidence numbers should reverse with November's reporting.

Short-Term Credit Measures -- Annual growth in short-term commercial credit measures remained strong, with mixed growth patterns, holding double-digit percentage annual growth, while annual growth in consumer credit remained below average and softened again.

Growth in seasonally-adjusted consumer credit remained sub-par in August, with annual growth easing to 3.4%, down from a revised 4.3% (was 3.7%) in July. Without inflation-adjusted growth in income, growth in personal consumption can be supported over the short-term only by debt expansion or savings liquidation. Consumer debt expansion -- though moving -- is soft enough to act as an increasing constraint on economic growth.

Annual growth in commercial paper outstanding in September jumped to 19.6%, versus 17.4% in August. Annual growth in commercial and industrial loans eased slightly to 14.9% in September from 15.2% in August. Rising sales can fuel short-term credit needs, but so too can slowing sales, slowing collections and rising inventories.

Producer Price Index (PPI) -- The seasonally-adjusted September finished goods PPI fell by 1.3% (down by 1.1% unadjusted), after August's 0.1% (0.1% unadjusted) increase. September's annual PPI inflation dropped to 0.9 from 3.7% in August. Seasonally-adjusted September intermediate goods fell by 1.4% for the month, while crude goods were down by 3.4%. Beyond the sharp drop in oil prices, the monthly inflation numbers again were depressed partially by irregular seasonal adjustment factors that were suggestive of some political tampering.

Next Release (November 14): Despite the large component of random volatility in monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months, including October, should top depressed expectations. "Core" inflation, in particular, should continue offering upside surprises to consensus forecasts, despite reporting games played by the BLS.



Better-Quality Numbers


The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders -- The September new orders held even with August at 54.2, after August's decline of 3.4%. As an SGS early warning indicator of a pending major economic shift, this measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating a signal of pending recession.

The Commerce Department provides suspect seasonal factors for the series, and the resulting adjusted monthly numbers can be misleading in the reporting of month-to-month change. This problem is overcome by using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the September index fell by 6.8%, following August's 2.8% contraction. The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004.

Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising new orders.

The overall September ISM manufacturing index dropped to 52.9 from 54.5 in August. An index level of 50.0 divides a growing versus contracting manufacturing sector. The September employment component plunged into contraction territory at 49.4, down from August's 54.0.

The service-sector ISM index does not have much meaning related to broad economic activity. Unlike its older counterpart, the manufacturing survey, if service companies such as law firms, hospitals or fast-food restaurants have "increased orders," that does not necessarily mean that economic activity is increasing. That said, the overall services index also dropped sharply, to 52.8 from 57.0.

Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. The September employment component rose to 53.6 from 51.4 in August. The prices paid component is covered under the Inflation Indicators.

Help-Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) -- Signaling a rapidly intensifying economic downturn, the September help-wanted advertising index held at 30, the same as the revised August reading. August initially had dropped to 31, down from 32 in July, which in turn was down from 34 in June. September's reading was down from 37 in September 2005.

The September and August readings are the lowest seen since early 1961. The index was last lower than this during in Eisenhower Administration in October 1958, as shown in the graph in the Opening Comments. While the series never recovered from the 2000 recession, its recent plunge -- annual change is down 18.6% on a three-month moving average basis -- is signaling a renewed and rapid contraction in economic activity.

Housing Starts -- Annual change remains deeply negative, despite the high volatility in monthly reporting. Seasonally-adjusted September housing starts rose by 5.9% in the month, following a revised 4.9% decline in August. With September's year-to-year change down by 17.9%, following August's 15.4% contraction, the annual change on a three-month moving-average basis now stands at a year-to-year drop of 17.4%, which is generating an intensifying recession signal.

Further, in related data, with respective rates of annual contraction for September new- and existing-home sales both at 14.2%, activity remains consistent with a sharp economic downturn.

Money Supply -- Despite revisions to the historical series, real annual growth rates for September M1 and M2 remain consistent with the ongoing recession, while the nominal (not-inflation-adjusted) annual growth in M3 -- as estimated by the SGS Continuing M3 Series -- not only remains strong enough to fuel inflation concerns, but also is showing signs of accelerating.

Annual growth in September for monthly M1 fell by 1.1%, versus a 0.5% contraction in August, while annual M2 growth eased to 4.4% from 4.6%. The SGS Continuing M3 Series for September gained 9.2% from the year before, up slightly from 9.1% in August and matching the recent peak growth seen in July. If the trends for the first three weeks reported for October continue, annual growth would rise to about 9.4% for the month, setting a new four-year high.



[Note: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the ongoing SGS estimates of M3, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS for methodology.]

Before inflation adjustment, monthly seasonally-adjusted M1 and M2 fell by 0.9% and rose by 0.2%, respectively, in September, following a 0.2% decline and 0.3% increases in August. The seasonally-adjusted monthly gain for M3 in September was roughly 0.9%.

Adjusted for CPI inflation, September's M1 and M2 year-to-year rates of change were down 3.1% and up 2.2%, respectively. On a three-month moving-average basis, the September inflation-adjusted annual rates of change were down 3.7% and up 1.2%, levels that remain well underwater using the old-style CPI.


Inflation Indicators

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices -- Declining oil prices showed up in the purchasing managers surveys. On the manufacturing side, the September prices paid diffusion index dropped to 61.0 from August's 73.0, a reading still indicative of strong inflationary pressure. On a three-month moving average basis, September's annual growth was up by 12.4%, against August's 40.9%.

On the non-manufacturing side, the September prices paid diffusion index dropped to 56.6 from August's 72.4, a level signaling minor inflationary pressure. On a three-month moving average basis, September's annual change was down 5.2%, against August's 11.5% gain.

Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflation activity. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising inflation.

Oil Prices -- West Texas Intermediate Spot (St. Louis Fed) dropped to $63.87 per barrel in September, down 13.7% from August's $73.05 per barrel. Nonetheless, oil prices persist at extraordinarily inflationary levels, despite September's average being down 2.6% from the year before, after August having been up 12.4% on the same basis.

Annual price comparisons for September are against the oil-price spike seen last year from hurricane impact. Recent oil prices have been relatively soft due efforts by the Administration to dampen Middle Eastern tensions before the November 7th election. Even so, OPEC has moved to cut production in an effort to firm oil prices. Trading so far in October has been just under $60, about the same level as seen in October of last year, but prices have pushed higher in recent days.

Spot prices will continue to gyrate and can be expected to be on the rise again shortly after the November election, if not before. Middle Eastern political tensions are likely to intensify once again from the standpoint of U.S. policy, following the election. Further production action by OPEC is a good bet, if existing market forces do not maintain prices well above the $60 per barrel mark.

Despite recent extreme near-term price volatility, high oil prices will remain a major contributing factor to the inflation side of the current inflationary recession. Oil prices remain extremely high, and still are working there way through the system. Oil price changes permeate costs throughout the economy, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. Cost pressures already have passed significantly into the so-called "core" inflation sectors. Reporting of same should pick up despite any near-term easing of oil prices.

Oil price volatility affects CPI and PPI reporting. Downside oil price movements tend to be picked up more quickly and fully by the BLS in its inflation measures than are upside movements. This was particularly evident in the September CPI and PPI. Even as currently understated, though, CPI and PPI inflation will rebound sharply in the post-election months, tending to be stronger than commonly predicted for the next several quarters, partially as a result of the persistency of the high oil prices.


Background Material/Reporting Coverage


The coverage and available prior material are detailed below for various series. Data reported with a less-than-monthly frequency also are updated here or in the Reporting/Market Focus.

Quarterly/Annual Reporting -- Most series analyzed are published on a monthly or weekly basis. Followed economic/market series that are published with less-than-monthly frequency include:

Annual:

* Financial Statements of the United States Government (most recent analysis was a Supplement to December 2005 SGS; next analysis is due as a Supplement to the December 2006 SGS). * Income Variance/Dispersion (most recent analysis was is in the September 2006 SGS; next analysis is due September 2007).

Quarterly:

* Flow of Funds Accounts of the United States (the most recent analysis is in this month's Reporting/Market Focus; the next analysis is due January 2007 SGS).

Reporting/Market Foci -- The various economic and financial-market series are being addressed in a monthly "Reporting/Market Focus," with this month's analysis examining Quarterly Flow of Funds Accounts and Productivity. Employment, GDP, CPI and the Federal Deficit separately are explored in the background article "A Primer on Government Economic Reports," available on the Home page of www.shadowstats.com.

The series detailed so far in the Reporting Foci or background articles are listed below. The referenced SGS publications are available on the Archives page of www.shadowstats.com.

* Consumer Confidence (November 2004 SGS).
* Consumer Price Index (an original background article [updated October 2006], October 2005 SGS, alternate numbers introduced August 2006 SGS).
* Credit Measures, Short-Term (August 2005 SGS).
* Durable Goods, New Orders for (May 2006 SGS).
* Employment/Unemployment (an original background article, alternate measures (April 2005 SGS).
* Federal Deficit (an original background article, update in the Alert of July 7, 2005, update in Supplement to December 2005 SGS).
* Gross Domestic Product (an original background article, alternate numbers introduced August 2006).
* Help Wanted Advertising (January 2006 SGS).
* Housing Starts and related housing statistics (June 2006 SGS).
* Income Variance/Dispersion (September 2005 SGS, September 2006 SGS).
* Industrial Production (January 2005 SGS).
* Money Supply (Part I / SGS Early Warning System - May 2005 SGS, Part II - June 2005 SGS, M3 update November 2005 Supplement, M2 update March 2006 SGS, M3 continuing series introduced August 2006).
* Producer Price Index (April 2006 SGS).
* Productivity (October 2006 SGS).
* Purchasing Managers Survey (February 2006 SGS).
* Retail Sales (March 2005 SGS).
* SGS Early Warning System (May 2005 SGS, June 2005 SGS).
* Trade Balance (December 2004 SGS).
* Unemployment Insurance, Initial Claims for (February 2005 SGS).
* U.S. Dollar Indices, Financial- and Trade-Weighted (July 2005 SGS).




Reporting/Market Focus (October 2006) -- Flow of Funds Shenanigans The Productivity "Miracle"


Quarterly Update: Federal Reserve Flow of Funds Accounts. If you have an intractable economic problem, you can try to make it go away by altering or eliminating key data series. If the economy is damaged by a "free trade" agreement, just redefine GDP methodology and spike productivity growth. If the government wants to reduce cost-of-living adjustments for Social Security recipients, without going public on the effort, just reduce reported CPI. If the central bank is going to be spiking the broad money supply, just eliminate M3 reporting. If there is a problem with foreign investors holding too much Treasury debt, just define them away.

We noted when first publishing the Federal Reserve's Flow of Funds Data three months ago that it was subject to the foibles of the national income (NIPA) accounts, including GDP. So long as the GDP methodology stays constant, the relative flow changes should have some significance. The GDP methodology, however, has been altered and so has the reported flow of funds.

From those same people who took away M3, now comes a revision in the flow of funds that helps make another problem start to fall of the financial markets' radar screen. The methodological issues will be addressed in November's Reporting/Market Focus.

In recent methodological revisions to the services sector of the trade data, the Bureau of Economic Analysis made the balance of payments problem appear less significant than it had been. If the net flow of cash to the rest of the world is reduced on an historical basis, however, that means the rest of the world does not hold as many dollars as previously thought. If that is the case, then the flow of funds data have to be adjusted.

Correcting for the "improved" trade data, the Federal Reserve adjusted its flow-of-funds numbers. As a result, the Rest of World category's total assets at the end of 2005 was revised from $11,106.9 billion to $11,029.4 billion, a drop of $77.5 billion.

Somehow, that translated to Rest of World holdings of U.S. Treasury securities dropping from $2,196.8 billion to $1,993.8 billion, a decline of $203.0 billion. Fortunately, however, U.S. Treasury debt issuance is not vulnerable yet to creative revisions. So, if the total level of Treasury issuance stayed the same, who bought the Treasuries the that Rest of World no longer owns?

Thank goodness for U.S. households! Their holdings of U.S. Treasuries as of year-end 2005 revised from $368.8 billion to $551.5 billion, increasing by an incredible 50%, or $182.7, which is exactly 90.0% of the reduction in the Rest of World category.

Personally, I get nervous when I see too many exact numbers in government data that have zeros in them, although that does happens at random. It almost looks like someone said, "Let's allocate 90% of the Treasuries lost by the Rest of World to the Household category."







The graphs shown above reflect the revisions and a pattern of dampening growth in U.S. dependence on foreign capital. While the series still shows a serious problem that will trigger an eventual collapse in the financial system, the reliability of the data has been seriously compromised by the latest revisions, and the numbers simply are not credible.

The new data imply reductions in the recent net foreign acquisition of U.S. Treasuries as a percent of Treasury issuance. Previous numbers showed foreign investors acquiring enough net Treasuries to account for 101.1%, 96.5% and 84.5%, respectively, of net Treasury debt issuance in 2004, 2005 and the 12 months ended June 2006. The new proportions are, respectively, 80.0%, 61.9% and 37.4%.

If the Fed's new numbers were accurate, the dollar would be much weaker, and long-term Treasury yields would be much higher. The data are not accurate.

Productivity. When the Fed Chairman touts an economic miracle, it almost certainly means that officials have been playing with their numbers, not that the Deity has intervened in the economy.

Subscribers occasionally ask why SGS does not cover the quarterly U.S. productivity numbers. The answer is that those numbers are of such poor quality that they hardly are worth wasting computer memory storage on them. Where the Federal Reserve and recent administrations have patted each other on the back tied to the heavily touted productivity "miracle," SGS looks at current and historical productivity adjusted for some of the same methodological gimmicks that have been built into GDP and inflation reporting over the decades.

Contrary to one of Wall Street's favorite myths, productivity is not improving economic and business conditions year after year. While productivity gains are obvious in many areas of business, productivity for the broad economy has been in decline since the miracle of NAFTA.

Productivity broadly is measured as output per hour of all persons. The series is published quarterly and updated monthly by the Bureau of Labor Statistics. Generally, productivity is a measure of production, divided by a measure of labor. The production measure used is a stripped down version of the GDP. It excludes government, non-profit institutions and private households, which leaves about 78% of the GDP intact. The labor measures are based on the sampling done for the household survey of employment, adjusted for the same eliminations as production. Neither of the two series is of good quality, so it is difficult to expect a ratio of the two data sets to have much meaning.

The graph below plots the officially reported level of productivity per year, with 1980 set at 100, along with an SGS alternate version.



The top line reflects the reported productivity miracle; the bottom is the rough SGS estimate, adjusted for removing methodological gimmicks that were added over time. Of some interest, the SGS line turns down after the signing of the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) late in 1992. NAFTA went into effect the first of 1994.

Why would this or any such treaty purportedly designed to stimulate the U.S. economy drive productivity lower? Simply put, the academic imbeciles, who sold the concept, forgot to emphasize to those who bought the concept, that both parties entering into such an agreement had to be at full employment in order to realize mutual benefit.

The end result has been an explosive growth in new trade deficits with Mexico and Canada. As to productivity, consider eliminating the jobs of highly skilled production workers and machinists and turning them into hamburger flippers. It is hard to imagine how that translates into a productivity miracle.

Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for November - Reality Checks on Trade Data and Personal Income


With the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System and Bureau of Economic Analysis monkeying with reporting of the broad trade data, increasing obfuscation in the numbers has become evident. Historical economic growth patterns are being altered, as is current reporting.

Separately, GDP reporting is heavily dependent on personal income data. The Bureau of Economic Analysis massages the data almost beyond recognition. Not surprisingly, the government's reporting fantasies do not tie into hard data published by the Internal Revenue Service.

The games playing with these numbers will be examined against alternate, more-reliable statistics.

___________________________________________


November's "Shadow Government Statistics" is targeted for release on Monday, November 27, 2006, following the Thanksgiving holiday. The monthly newsletter usually is scheduled each month for the Wednesday following the release of the CPI report, but the schedule is subject to change. Final publication date will be noted on the home page of shadowstats.com at the top of the "Latest Monthly Commentary" column. The posting of the next SGS newsletter on the Web site, as well as all Flash Updates and any Alerts, will be advised immediately by e-mail.

Flash Update

Monday, October 16th, 2006
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Flash Update

October 16, 2006

__________

Observations on Trade, Budget and Retail Sales Data -- Un-hyped

__________


Give Wall Street a bad number, and a positive spin will be generated. Contrary to the popular financial-media hype last week, the news on the trade deficit, the budget deficit and retail sales could not have been much worse. If you like the "core inflation concept," you will love the "core trade deficit" and "core retail sales."

TRADE DEFICIT. The seasonally-adjusted August 2006 trade deficit widened to a new monthly record of $69.9 billion from the prior record of $68.0 billion just the month before, in July. Once again, the excuse was the deteriorating deficit was just due to rising oil prices. Once again, such claims were terribly misleading. In July, a reduction in dollar oil imports actually dampened the exploding deficit.

For August, the $1.9 billion deficit increase could be attributed fully to oil, but not to oil prices. Higher oil prices accounted for $0.4 billion of imports, while the increase in the physical volume of oil imports accounted for $1.5 billion of imports.

August oil imports (both physical and dollar volume) rose to the highest level, ever. The United States is a month or two (post-election) from re-escalating Middle Eastern tensions, with the economy more heavily dependent on foreign oil than at any time in the past.

Even if Wall Street is going to start touting a "core" trade deficit, net of energy, the news here is dismal for the U.S. dollar, inflation, the markets and for third-quarter GDP. It is a big plus for gold.

In the days when underlying economic activity drove GDP reporting, such explosive trade deficit increase in the first two months of a quarter would topple the pending "advance" estimate of quarterly GDP growth. While the current circumstance suggests a softer initial estimate of third-quarter GDP at the end of this month, the statistical release comes out the week before the election.

BUDGET DEFICIT. The Bush Administration is basking in the news of a fiscal-year 2006 federal budget deficit of $247.7 billion, down $71.0 billion from 2005's $318.7 billion. The improvement was due to corporate tax relief on repatriated profits, which triggered heavy activity and a resulting short-lived surge in corporate tax revenues. The tax surge had nothing to do with economic activity.

Putting the Administration's good news in perspective, gross federal debt closed out fiscal 2006 at $8.507 trillion, up by $574 billion from 2005, which in turn was up $554 billion from 2004. Despite the gimmicked reporting, the amount of debt taken on showed worsening annual fiscal deterioration. Reporting based on generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) -- due for release in about two months -- also should show deterioration, with the actual 2006 deficit in excess of $3.5 trillion.

RETAIL SALES. September retail sales fell by 0.4% from August, but such was sold as good news, because the decline in gasoline sales more than accounted for the drop. Here, again, the "core" concept has been extended to retail sales. Of course, Wall Street was not denigrating retail sales when surging sales were being lifted by rising gasoline sales in prior months.

The news shows a continuing rapid decline in economic activity. The problem is two-fold. First, total monthly retail sales declined and even may be down after inflation-adjustment. Second, year-to-year change dropped to 5.5% in September from 6.4% in August.

Keep in mind that September's annual growth is against last year's economic devastation of Hurricane Katrina! Like the unbelievable numbers shown in the September payroll report, retail sales growth should have shown a relative spike against last year, if the economy were experiencing anything close to normal economic growth.

CAUTION. The economy is showing unusually negative economic activity that may force recession recognition much sooner that the Administration would like (still not before the election). The September CPI should drop quite sharply, both month-to-month and year-to-year, due to declining gasoline prices and the year-ago seasonal effects from, and annual comparisons with, Katrina's distortions. Those numbers will start reversing next month.

Further details on all of the preceding will follow in the regular October SGS.

___________________________________________


October's "Shadow Government Statistics" is scheduled for release on Wednesday, October 25, 2006. The posting of the next SGS, as well as any Interim Updates or Alerts, will be advised immediately by e-mail.

Flash Update

Monday, October 9th, 2006
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

A L E R T

October 9, 2006

__________



Political Manipulation of Labor Data Kicks into High Gear

September Payrolls Fell 40,000 Using Consistent Seasonal Adjustments

Help-Wanted Advertising Plunges Again

__________


Please note that the SGS Ongoing M3 and Alternate GDP and Dollar measures have been updated on the Alternate Data tab of the home page www.shadowstats.com.

The broad outlook for a deepening inflationary recession remains in place. The September employment report showed severe deterioration, despite a number of reporting gimmicks. Beyond any reporting shenanigans, economic growth has been moving rapidly to the downside in economic releases of the last week or so. Faced with an electorate that is in economic pain, the Bush Administration has tried to make the bad numbers disappear for a while, but the results have been mixed, so far. This is despite the comparative annual boosts starting to show up in data from the effects of last year's terrible hurricane season. The heavily touted annual gain in September retail stores sales is a prime example of such an effect.

Moving into the realm of the unbelievable, the Administration claims that it inadvertently understated jobs growth in the year ended March 2006 by 810,000. This may give George Bush bragging rights as to having created more jobs, but, like his father claiming an early end to the 1990 recession, the President is at risk of appearing to voters as being out of touch with economic reality.

Employment/Unemployment. Seasonally-adjusted September payrolls rose in the month by 51,000 +/- 106,000, after August's 188,000 gain (previously 128,000). Aside from being statistically indistinguishable from a monthly contraction, the September reading was the sixth that averaged below 120,000. That said, the September payroll numbers had several strange features.

Unusual, but of as yet undetermined significance, the unadjusted August payroll level was revised upward by an unusually large 99,000, but only 62,000 of that showed up in the seasonally adjusted August number. The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) readjusts the seasonal factors each month, which allows it to report most anything it wants to report, but here is where the September data simply go awry.

Keep in mind that a year ago September, the Gulf Coast was devastated by Hurricane Katrina. While the BLS now shows monthly payroll growth slowing from 175,000 in August 2005 to 48,000 in September 2005, the BLS never reported the bulk of lost jobs. Even so, looking at August 2006 and September 2006 against that year ago period, one would expect that a growing economy would spike the relative annual jobs growth for September. With September 2006 being compared to an artificially-depressed period, however, growth did not increase; it softened instead.

On a not-seasonally-adjusted basis, August 2006 payrolls were up 1.34% against last year, while September 2006 was up by only 1.27%! This means that without a devastating hurricane, September took a relatively bigger hit in 2006 than it did in 2005. September 2006 annual growth was consistent with a hit from something worse than Katrina, but there was no hit other than a deepening recession. Since these jobs numbers are, in theory, unadjusted, one cannot blame the shockingly-weak results on bad seasonal factors.

When data are seasonally adjusted properly, year-to-year growth in the adjusted and unadjusted monthly data should be virtually identical. In September, they were not. The unadjusted annual growth rates detailed above, when applied to the seasonally-adjusted numbers, indicate that monthly payrolls should not have risen by 51,000 in September, but rather they should have fallen by 40,000! So how did jobs rise by 51,000?

Somehow the seasonally-adjusted annual growth rates ended up as 1.323% and 1.325%, respectively, for August and September 2006. Even with adjusted annual growth holding at the same level in September as August -- instead of September spiking against Katrina's impact -- the data suggest something close to collapsing economic activity.

The problem here likely is that the monthly data have become about as worthless as the quarterly GDP series. My speculation is that someone at the BLS realized too late that they were going to have consistency problems with the payroll data related to Katrina and last year's other hurricanes. Last minute revisions and unusual seasonals were used to generate positive jobs growth for September, while keeping the annual growth rate from falling. What was seen was not normal or regular reporting. One does not have consistency problems with honest data. Whatever was gimmicked was not done well.

Adding to the extraordinary nature of the September jobs report, the BLS announced that its annual benchmark revision for March 2006, to be revised and reported with the January 2007 jobs data, would be an addition of roughly 810,000 payroll jobs. Although historical revisions have been worse, the BLS announced that it "currently is researching possible sources for this larger-than-normal expected benchmark revision."

The benchmarking process has been seriously flawed for years, and this change is not credible. Consider that the involved period encompasses the missing of several hundred thousand jobs lost along the Gulf Coast. If a cause for the "undercount" cannot be found, the solution will be to add roughly 67,000 to 100,000 extra jobs a month to the birth-death bias factors, so as to overstate jobs growth even further, on a regular basis. Remember, the only political sin for a government statistical agency is to underestimate economic growth or to overestimate inflation.

On a happier, voter-friendly front, the household survey showed the seasonally-adjusted unemployment rate easing to 4.58% +/- 0.2% in September, from 4.69% in August, a statistically insignificant decline, but nonetheless in time for the election. U-3, on an unadjusted basis, eased to 4.4% in September from 4.6% in August. The broader U-6 rate was an adjusted 8.0% in September, down from 8.4% in August. Adjusting for the impact of the elimination of the counting of millions of discouraged workers, defined away by the Clinton Administration, the broadest, traditional unemployment rate remains about 12%.

Help Wanted Advertising Index. Confirming the extremely bleak employment picture, the August help wanted advertising index dropped to 31, from 32 in July, and from 34 in June. The August level is the lowest reading since April 1961. If the index drops another point, comparisons will shift from the Kennedy Administration to the Eisenhower Administration. While the series never recovered from the 2000 recession, its recent plunge -- annual change is down 15.7% on a three-month moving average basis -- is signaling a renewed contraction in economic activity.

GDP. The "final" estimate revision of seasonally-adjusted annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) GDP to 2.56% from 2.90% had little obvious relationship to underlying economic activity. The changes primarily were in inventories fudge factor. Parallel GNP growth slowed to 2.34% from 2.60%. This series remains more a tool of political propaganda than an indicator of economic activity.

Inflation. In Mr. Bernanke's fantasy world, where the core rate of inflation used in deflating the appropriate portion of personal consumption expenditure (PCE) is the ideal measure of price changes, the news was not good. While the aggregated PCE annual deflation rate eased to 3.2% in August from 3.4% in July, the core rate increased to 2.5% from 2.3%. It seems that energy prices are beginning to permeate the broad spectrum of economic activity.

Other Numbers. August new orders for durable goods were down 0.5% for the month, with annual growth slowing to 3.6% from 10.3% in July. Annual money supply growth in September was weaker for M1 and M2, but the SGS estimate of M3 annual growth showed a minimal increase to roughly 9.2%, from 9.1% in August.

CAUTION. As discussed in the last newsletter, September economic and inflation data will be skewed both by year-ago Katrina effects and likely pre-election political manipulation. Economic data will tend to spike, and inflation will fall, sharply. The process will reverse in post-election reporting. Further details on all of the preceding will follow in the regular October SGS.

___________________________________________


October's "Shadow Government Statistics" is scheduled for release on Wednesday, October 25, 2006. The posting of the next SGS, as well as any Interim Updates or Alerts, will be advised immediately by e-mail.

September 2006 Newsletter

Monday, September 25th, 2006
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Issue Number 23

September 25, 2006

__________

Upsides for Inflation and Gold Have Not Yet Been Touched

Business Downturn Accelerates

Poverty Report Suggests GDP Reporting Fraud

Katrina and Pre-Election Manipulations Distort Current Numbers

Dollar Selling and Higher Interest Rates in Offing


__________


OPENING COMMENTS


The economy's crash landing was evident in most economic reporting of the last month and has been getting increased press in the popular media. On the plus side, volatile oil and related gasoline prices have enjoyed a short-term decline -- just in time for the election -- but inflation problems are only beginning. Despite unusual reporting distortions that will surface in the next two months, the broad outlook for a deepening inflationary recession continues. While these conditions remain bearish long-term for the U.S. equity and credit markets and for the U.S. dollar, they remain extremely bullish for gold.

It would be quite surprising if the election went well for the Republicans. The electorate votes pocketbook issues more than any other, and the problems go much deeper than gyrating gasoline prices. Most voters know how they are doing, without the benefit of advice from gimmicked government data. Wall Street favors the Republicans, so a poor showing for the GOP should be a negative for equity prices.

Note of Caution. The economy remains in a deteriorating inflationary recession, but two non-economic conditions are likely to lead to major distortions in the economic reports for the next several months.

First, with post-Labor Day electioneering underway, the White House is under heavy pressure to generate positive economic news. While the news on underlying economic fundamentals broadly is not good, a great deal of reporting flexibility within the Administration's statistical agencies allows for significant reporting shenanigans. Direct manipulation of key economic data appears to be well entrenched and should continue at least into the November election.

Second, a year ago, Hurricanes Katrina, Rita and Wilma devastated parts of the Gulf Coast and Florida. The storms' early economic effects not only will distort year-to-year economic comparisons, but also the seasonal-adjustment factors used in calculating month-to-month changes.

While investors and the markets would do well to go into data hibernation for the next quarter, that will not happen. Unusual data releases may have unusual market impacts. The underlying reality of an inflationary recession in play will remain, however, with the data reconfirming same in the post-election environment.

Faltering Economic Data. Monthly contractions and slowing or contracting annual growth patterns surfaced in real (inflation-adjusted) retail sales, industrial production, real average weekly earnings, the purchasing managers survey, durable goods orders, consumer confidence, housing and help-wanted advertising. The trade deficit surged to a new monthly record. Contrary to financial media hype, however, the sharp increase in the deficit was not driven by oil prices. Also, payroll growth remained minimal, with annual growth falling off at an accelerating pace. Details are discussed in the respective sections






The downturn in housing is getting worse, quickly. Housing starts were down at an annual pace of 19.8% in August, an annual drop of 15.3% on a three-month moving average basis, which is shown in the graph above. Annual declines in home sales are mirroring the fall-off in housing starts.

The only really positive economic report in the last month was the unbelievable upward revision to second-quarter GDP growth. With annualized real GDP growth now at 2.9%, official recent growth has been only slightly below average. GDP reporting, though, has been reduced to the status of political propaganda, as discussed in this month's GDP, Alternate Reality and the Reporting/Market Focus sections.

Perhaps the Reporting/Market Focus is the most disquieting section this month, where the data from the latest poverty report show that income dispersion hit a record high in 2005 (higher than pre-Great Depression). Such a reading foreshadows an economic/financial disaster. Further, annual declines reported in inflation-adjusted median and average household income for 1999 to 2004 -- patterns consistent with reporting from the Internal Revenue Service -- indicate that the strong GDP growth rates of the last several years cannot be accurate.

As an aside, the Census Bureau provided detail for a column written by Floyd Norris in The New York Times (August 19, 2006) indicating that annual inflation-adjusted contractions in car dealer sales of more than two-percent (currently down 2.4%) always signal recession (usually one that already is underway). It certainly is unusual for the Census Bureau to get involved publicly in such analysis, and likely involves the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), official arbiter of recessions. This could be an early indication that declaration of a new official recession is under consideration.

Inflation and Gold Outlooks Remain Strong "Are you still bullish on gold?" asked a subscriber following a particularly grueling day in the commodity markets. Gold was down below $600 per troy ounce (as it still is), having traded above $700 just a few months back. My answer to the question was a resounding yes. The fundamental outlook for gold remains unaltered -- as bullish as it could be -- despite any fleeting flutterings in oil prices or pre-election political hype.

The view here has to be to the long-term circumstance, not to day-to-day price swings, which indeed can be wild. Gold prices historically have had periods of high volatility, and central banks do what they can to encourage downside price movement when an opportunity arises. That said, all the underlying fundamentals that drove gold to recent highs remain in play, with no hope of turning around.

Contributing to short-term gold-price volatility, U.S. inflation has been driven heavily by oil prices over the last year or so. The recent decline in oil prices, combined with year-ago comparisons to the inflation spike that followed Hurricane Katrina, promises a sharp one-time drop in inflation reporting in the month ahead. The decline will be mitigated by the increasing penetration of higher oil costs into the non-energy sectors of the economy. Other inflationary pressures increasingly will be seen from weakness in the U.S. dollar and increased Federal Reserve monetization of federal debt.

The decline in oil prices to the $60 per barrel range is not likely to last. Current pricing has been helped by eased political tensions in the Middle East, which are a direct reflection of Administration pre-election policies, as well as by a fortuitously mild hurricane season so far for the Gulf of Mexico. Look for Middle Eastern tensions to revive right after the election, or sooner, if U.S. opponents decide to stir things up. The hurricane season still has over a month to run.

Consider, too, that $60 oil was unthinkable at the beginning of 2005. Now OPEC is suggesting that oil below $60 is unthinkable.

Among longer-term considerations, the U.S. dollar has been soft in recent trading, but it still has not faced its looming, protracted and massive sell-off. The election likely will not be a good one for the Republicans, despite any positive rating boost President Bush is getting from the pre-election decline in gasoline prices. The actual fiscal U.S. condition remains one of undeclared bankruptcy. The financial markets remain like a house of cards built upon financial leverage, upon leverage, upon leverage. The world's central bankers are aware of the underlying reality and recognize their limited abilities to contain the financial and economic crises ahead.

Simply put, the intractable U.S. economic and financial conditions and the increasingly unstable global political conditions have not changed. In like manner, our outlook for a protracted, continuing U.S. economic downturn, mounting inflationary pressures and increasing financial-market instabilities have not changed.

Rather than trying to peg the upside price potential of gold at a certain level, gold's price potential should be viewed in terms of the number of digits: three figure (price in hundreds of dollars), four figure (thousands of dollars), five figure (tens of thousands), etc. The untenable fiscal, financial and global political conditions in place for the United States could generate six- or seven-figure prices, or even much higher, within a decade, possibly by the end of the current decade. The upside is only limited by the inverse relationship to the fathomless pit into which the U.S. dollar's purchasing power has been tumbling at an accelerating pace.

Alternate Realities. In general, if a government economic measure does match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Fed and Wall Street. This section regularly will cover the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of official CPI and GDP reporting. The methodologies for the series are discussed in the August 2006 SGS. Effects of gimmicked methodological changes have been removed from the official series so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience, as embodied by the post-World War II CPI and the pre-Reagan era GDP.

Of some discomfort to the low-inflation hypesters -- those continually touting "core" inflation -- even the gimmicked annual core inflation rates are on the upswing.

                          Eight Levels of Inflation
                   Annual Inflation for June to August 2006


Measure June July August I-1 Core PCE Deflator 2.3%r 2.4% n.a. I-2 Core C-CPI 2.4% 2.5% 2.7% I-3 Core CPI-U 2.6% 2.7% 2.8% I-4 PCE Deflator 3.5% 3.4% n.a. I-5 C-CPI 3.7% 3.5% 3.4% I-6 CPI-U 4.3% 4.1% 3.8% I-7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U 7.4% 7.3% 7.0% I-8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation 11.0% 11.0% 10.8%

(r) Revised. Notes: I-1 to I-3 reflect the core inflation rates, respectively, of the substitution-based personal consumption expenditure (PCE) deflator, the Chained-CPI-U and the geometrically-weighted CPI-U. I-4 to I-6 are the same measures with energy and food inflation included. The CPI-U (I-6) is the measure popularly followed by the financial press, when the media are not hyping core inflation. I-7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (Pre- Clinton Era as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top series in the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com. I-8 reflects the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which reverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so, plus an adjustment for the Clinton-Era geometric weighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic bookkeeping.





(NOTE: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate CPI series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com.)

The alternate second-quarter GDP growth reflects the downward revisions from retail sales and trade reporting that somehow were missed in the official "preliminary estimate." The alternate second-quarter inflation-adjusted annual GDP growth rate is a decline of 1.0% versus the official 3.6% gain.




(NOTE: Historical data on both the official and SGS-Alternate GDP series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com.)



Updated Summary of Current Outlook


In general, the broad economic outlook has not changed, and the financial markets increasingly are concerned over developing signs of both uncontained inflation and a developing recession. Indeed, the 2005 to 2007 (likely 2008) inflationary recession continues to deepen.

A contracting economy, inflation and risks of intensifying dollar selling are upon us and continue to offer the worst of all environments for increasingly less-Pollyannaish financial markets. The exception of course is the gold market, where the traditional inflation-hedge and flight-to-safety/quality vehicle will continue earning its keep -- shy of irregular volatility -- as the dollar weakens, inflation accelerates and the global political situation continues to deteriorate.

The Shadow Government Statistics' Early Warning System (EWS) was activated in May 2005 and signaled the onset of a formal recession in July 2005. The EWS looks at historical growth patterns of key leading economic indicators in advance of major economic booms and busts and sets growth trigger points that generate warnings of major upturns or downturns when predetermined growth limits are breached. Since the beginning of 2005 a number of key indicators had been holding near or at their fail-safe points. Seven indicators now have moved beyond those levels, signaling a recession.

Retail sales, help-wanted advertising and housing starts generated such signals in the last several months. Once beyond their fail-safe points, these indicators never have sent out false alarms, either for an economic boom or bust.

The false economic boom massaged into first-quarter GDP reporting was a precursor to the overstatement of second-quarter GDP growth. The reported annualized real growth of 2.9% should have been a contraction. Irrespective of underlying reality, negative GDP growth is not likely to surface in regular government reporting until after the November election. Such is helped by rampant political manipulation of many key numbers. The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) eventually should time the downturn to mid-2005 and announce same also sometime after the election, so as not to be deemed politically motivated in its timing.

Whether or not there is a recession increasingly is a hot topic in the popular financial media, with politics helping to fuel the debate as the election nears. Those Wall Street economists who act as shills for the market will keep up their "strong growth is just around the corner" hype regardless of any and all evidence to the contrary.

From the standpoint of common experience, this downturn will be considered the second leg of a double-dip recession, not an independent contraction as will be claimed officially.

Most economic data have softened, with the trend accelerating. Regular monthly contractions are near for both payroll employment and industrial production, although political manipulation and weather distortions can keep the official payroll and production data afloat for a while longer. Significant deterioration also will be seen in corporate profits and federal tax receipts, despite any near-term volatility to the contrary. Depressed tax receipts will combine with negligible fiscal discipline and ongoing war spending to accelerate deterioration in the federal finances.

This general outlook is predicated on economic activity that already has taken place and does not consider any risks from exogenous factors such as renewed terrorist activity in the United States, world war, major natural disasters or a financial panic.

Market perceptions of the downturn in business activity are increasing sharply. As expectations begin to anticipate weak data, traditional expectations also are being lowered for inflation, despite the obvious oil problem. Worsening stagflation, however, seems to have gained a good foothold in some consensus thinking. Still, consensus forecasts generally will tend to be surprised on the downside for economic reports and on the upside for inflation reports, for some time to come.

The roots of the current difficulties are structural in nature. A consumer starved of income growth and overburdened with debt cannot sustain the real growth in consumption needed to keep GDP growth in positive territory. The income weakness is a direct result of the loss of a significant manufacturing base to offshore locations and the ensuing explosive, perpetual growth of the U.S. trade deficit.

Exacerbating economic and financial woes will be unusually high inflation during this contraction. Gold prices already have signaled inflation and other difficulties. Fueled by high oil prices, weakness in the U.S. dollar and accelerating Fed monetization of federal debt, inflation will not be brought under control simply by weakness in economic demand. Instead, persistently high prices only will serve to intensify the recession, making it exceptionally long and protracted. Ongoing inflation woes and dollar problems will maintain upside pressure on long-term interest rates, reversing what currently is an inverted yield curve that some view as a recession signal.

Faltering economic activity and mounting inflation have created a nightmarish conundrum for the political operatives at the Federal Reserve. Soft economic numbers and high inflation are being spun as "conflicting data", but an inflationary recession is in play, and there is little the Fed can do about it.

The hype fed to the investing public -- that a weak economy means low inflation and interest rates -- cannot work in the current environment. Any conflicts that arise are not in the economic data but in simplistic views on economic activity espoused by Wall Street, or in the statistical manipulation goals of the politicians. Those latter issues explain Fed Chairman Bernanke's continued tap dancing on the inflation outlook. Such is anchored in putting a positive spin on an impossible situation and avoiding a financial-market meltdown before November 7th. The markets have been reasonably cooperative, so far.

In the present circumstance, inflation driven by robust economic demand would be a happy event, but such is not to be. Rather, the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar is being lost to wasting diseases, eroded by foreign exchange weakness in the trade-deficit plagued greenback, malfeasance in domestic fiscal and monetary policies, and external disruptions such as cartel-orchestrated price surges in oil. All the latter factors are in play.

From the Federal Reserve's perspective, at present, mixed signals are the best that can be offered to the markets. Allowing for the possibility of renewing the faux "tightening," signals Mr. Bernanke's devotion to keeping inflation under control. The Fed's "pause" in hiking interest rates signals Mr. Bernanke's devotion to maintaining solid economic growth. While the games playing may keep market sentiment gyrating for a while, the Fed is in an untenable position. Raising rates will do little to contain a non-demand driven inflation, while holding or lowering rates will do little to stimulate the structurally-impaired economy. The current "pause" in the Fed's raising short-term interest rates likely will not survive the election by much more than a month.

From the standpoint of the federal government, traditional economic stimuli in the form of tax cuts or increased federal spending have reached their practical limits with the current budget-deficit excesses.

Due to the inability of the government or central bank to stabilize this environment, risks of the current situation evolving into a hyperinflationary depression are extraordinarily high. Such a development involving the world's reserve currency would lead to a collapse of the current global currency system. In order to regain public confidence, monetary authorities likely would structure gold into the base of any new international currency system.

The unfolding inflationary recession is the worst of all worlds for the financial markets. Particularly hard hit will be the U.S. dollar, with significant downside moves looming for both equity and bond prices. Despite recent extreme volatility, the price of gold is headed much higher. At such time as the system re-stabilizes, post-crisis, there will be exceptional investment opportunities for those who have been able to preserve their wealth, capital and liquidity.



MARKETS PERSPECTIVE


The Federal Reserve keeps playing its games, trying to be non-disruptive to the financial markets. Matching market expectations, the FOMC held rates steady last week, and likely will do so next month, just prior to the election. Typically the Central Bank avoids policy moves in the weeks leading up to an election. Post-election is a different story. Renewed inflation pressures and intensifying dollar weakness could have the markets looking for rate hikes as early as the December 12th FOMC meeting.

Improved inflation numbers in the next month will be short-lived and will not be a result of any Federal Reserve policy, just volatile oil prices and year-ago disaster comparisons. With the economy tumbling, ongoing hype of a cleverly orchestrated soft landing should begin to disappear, soon. The economy has crashed, and there is not much the Federal Reserve can or could have done about it. The deepening recession should show up in generally weaker-than-expected corporate profits.

In terms of the broad financial market picture through year-end, the U.S. dollar should sell off sharply on a trade-weighted basis and particularly against the Swiss franc. As a partial result of the mounting dollar and inflation difficulties, the domestic yield curve will turn positive and steepen sharply, due primarily to rising long-term interest rates.

The combination of softer profits, a weak dollar and higher rates likely will not play out happily for equities. Renewed concerns tied to the dollar, inflation and global instabilities suggest an upbeat year-end for the precious metals, despite recent selling.

Equities -- The stock market generally has done well recently, given expectations of a passive fed, contained inflation, a soft economic landing, a relatively tranquil Middle East and, so far, a quiet hurricane season. None of the props underlying equities will be long-lived, other than possibly the good hurricane season.

The hard economic landing already is breaking, and the election should not go well for the market-favored Republicans. The timing on the reversal of other factors should follow the election, but they could break sooner.

Particularly damaging to current market euphoria will be the terrible dollar tumble ahead. Liquidity problems resulting from that will tend to push long-term yields higher and equity prices much lower. The dollar's sell-off could begin at any time with little warning.

As mentioned last month (please forgive the repetition here which is for the benefit of recent subscribers), fall is at hand, and the squirreling season is upon us. I once retained a mass psychologist in an effort to explain why stock market crashes tended to take place in October and November. His answer was that humans had a vestigial squirreling instinct. As the squirrels start gathering acorns for the winter, so too do investment strategies among humans sometimes go through a shift.

Credit Markets -- Contrary to all the hoopla over lower oil and gasoline prices, inflation is far from peaking, although the CPI will take a heavily publicized hit next month. Inflation concerns will return after the election. By early 2007, the Fed will be looking at further interest rate hikes in defense of the U.S. dollar. Barring a stock-market crash, it will not be shifting to an easing stance to stimulate the stock market or the economy.

Underlying fundamentals still indicate that long-term interest rates are headed sharply higher by the end of the year and into 2007. This move in rates will be dominated by rising inflation, by a weakening dollar and by foreign investors increasingly moving their assets out of dollar-denominated instruments.

A number of factors drive interest rate movements, including economic activity, inflation, credit demand, political stability and relative dollar strength and accompanying cash inflows and outflows from abroad. The recession will offer major downside pressure on rates, but inflation and the dollar will provide the dominant upside pressures on rates.

Since the last newsletter, the yield curve on Treasuries has turned slightly more negative, with the constant maturity 10-year yield at 4.65% and the 3-month bill at 4.92%, overall about 20 basis points lower. An added couple of hundred basis points at the long end would do a great deal towards flipping the yield curve to a fairly normal positive slope.

U.S. Dollar -- On average, the U.S. dollar weakened in August, with renewed selling pressure in the last week or so. The "pause" in Fed policy has been a factor, where inflation pressures generally are moving rates to the upside outside the United States.

The dollar's tumble has just begun, with very negative and disorderly markets awaiting the greenback. As the downturn in the value of the U.S. currency accelerates, fallout in the credit and equity markets should not be pleasant.

Underlying fundamentals are so bad, they only could be marginally worse. Driving relative currency values are relative conditions in domestic economic activity, inflation, interest rates, government financial conditions and political stability. Though not fully recognized, all these factors for the United States -- relative to its major trading partners -- are negative. The U.S. economy is in recession, inflation is spiking and interest rates are rising abroad, while the Fed -- at least temporarily -- has stopped raising rates at home. The actual U.S. federal deficit is beyond containment, promising a hyperinflationary environment at some time. Further, despite a short-term bounce in the President's approval rating, it still is at a level that has crashed the greenback in the past.

Timing is uncertain, but the break in the dollar should come quickly, with little if any advance warning. Serious shocks loom in U.S. economic and fiscal data and deteriorating domestic politics. New record lows for the dollar are likely before the end of the year, despite any overt or covert supportive intervention by any central bank(s). At some point, certain Asian central banks even could be encouraging the dollar selling.

Generally, the weaker the dollar, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. equity and capital markets. As shown in the following graphs, the U.S. dollar appears to have entered a selling phase.





(NOTE: Historical data on both dollar series are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the July 2005 SGS for methodology.)

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics' Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For August, the monthly dollar average declined 1.15%, after July's 0.03% gain. August's year-to-year change was a decline of 2.85%, after a drop of 3.54% in July.

In the same directions, August's monthly average of the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index fell by 0.93%, after increasing by 0.51% in July. August's year-to-year decline of 3.48% moderated slightly from July's 4.31% year-to-year contraction.

As we go to press, where the dollar indices in September generally have been stronger than the August averages, some selling pressure has developed in the last week.

Gold -- After averaging around $630 per troy ounce in July and August, the gold price tumbled below $600 per troy ounce into the $570 range earlier in September, and has rebounded some in the last week to around $590. As discussed in the opening comments, the long-term outlook for gold remains highly positive.

As a hedge against currency problems and inflation, and as the preferred safe-haven vehicle, the price of gold generally should move higher and set new historical highs in the months ahead, despite any near-term volatility. The currency and inflation issues are chronic and will deteriorate sharply before an ultimate collapse in the global currency system. Such does not prevent interim wild gold price gyrations, however, particularly if central banks think they see an opportunity to tarnish gold's image. One of the alluring features of the precious metal, of course, is that is does not tarnish.






The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs are little changed, reflecting monthly averages through August. As we go to press, gold is trading around $590, oil around $60 and the Swiss franc around $0.81.





REPORTING PERSPECTIVE


The Big Three Market Movers


As cautioned in this month's Opening Comments, near-term reporting of economic performance will have less than usual relevance to actual underlying activity. Upcoming reporting of the major series often will be determined by political need rather than by the economic factors that should drive the results. Separately, many results will suffer heavy annual and seasonally-adjusted monthly distortions, as the effects of last year's devastating hurricanes once more roil the data. The first obvious effects are noted under initial claims for unemployment insurance.

Employment/Unemployment -- August's 128,000 payroll increase again was in line with diminished expectations, but its magnitude was marginal for the fifth straight month. The "improved" unemployment rate, however, was a political positive, as the employment data once more sent mixed signals intended to please both the credit markets and the electorate.

As reported by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the popularly followed seasonally-adjusted U-3 unemployment rate eased insignificantly in August to 4.69%+/-0.2% from 4.75% in July. Unadjusted August U-3 dropped to 4.6% from 5.0%, while the broader adjusted U-6 moved from 8.5% to 8.4%, and the unadjusted U-6 eased from 8.8% to 8.3%.

Including the long-term "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton administration, total unemployment remains roughly 12%. The household survey also showed seasonally-adjusted August employment (those people with at least one job) up by 250,000, after being down by 34,000 in July.

For August, the payroll survey's seasonally-adjusted gain of 128,000 (146,000 net of revisions) remained close to the published reporting error of +/-108,000. This followed an upwardly revised July gain of 121,000 (was 113,000). Annual growth in unadjusted August employment was 1.26%, down from the near-term peak of 1.71% in August 2005.

August's payroll gain of 128,000 included a positive bias of 121,000 jobs in the "net birth/death" adjustment, a fudge factor that was little changed from the 125,000 used for August 2005. The fudge factor softens in September (it was a 50,000 gain in September 2005), which could place some downside reporting pressure on next month's payrolls.

The September data will be measured against year ago numbers that were affected by Hurricane Katrina. Since Katrina's full impact never showed up in the official payroll or unemployment reporting of the time, it will be interesting to see how the current numbers are handled by the BLS.

The latest report was against a background of continued collapsing growth in help-wanted advertising, rising new claims for unemployment insurance and weak purchasing managers employment indices (see the respective sections).

Next Release (October 6): The political needs of the Administration remain great and should have particular impact on the September report, which is the most politically sensitive -- in terms of timing -- before the November election. Separately, the data could be distorted to the upside by year-ago Katrina comparisons and related distortions to seasonal factors. Happy news is a reasonably good bet, regardless of any miserable underlying reality.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) -- The "preliminary" estimate of annualized real growth for second-quarter 2006 GDP was 2.90% +/-3.0%, revised upward from an initial estimate of 2.46%, and down from 5.58% in the first quarter. As revised, the growth rate still was statistically indistinguishable from a contraction.

Likely as a result of political considerations, negative revisions and reporting in related retail sales and trade deficit that would have reduced the reported second-quarter GDP appear to have been ignored. As discussed in prior newsletters, quarterly growth would have been negative in the second quarter but for the unusual reporting of quarterly inflation changes.

Annual real second-quarter GDP growth revised to 3.60% from an initial 3.49%, still down from 3.69% in the first quarter.

Initial reporting on the broadest national income measure, Gross National Product (GNP), was published. GNP includes trade flows in interest and dividend payments that are lacking in GDP. Annualized real second-quarter GNP growth was 2.58% in initial reporting. The difference between reported GNP and GDP growth rates is economic damage done by the net-debtor status of the United States versus the rest of the world.

Final sales -- GDP net of inventory changes -- revised to a gain of 2.3% from 2.0% in the second quarter, down from 5.6% in the first quarter.

The GDP inflation rate (deflator) in the second quarter incredibly held at a revised 3.34% (originally 3.30%) versus 3.26% in the prior quarter, despite explosive growth in quarterly CPI inflation.

GDP reporting remains primarily a tool of political propaganda and usually has little or no relationship to underlying economic reality. Given the long-term upside methodological biases built into the GDP, an annual rate of contraction of 1.0% would have been closer to reality for the second quarter. Detail of the SGS-Alternate GDP is shown in Alternate Reality section of the Opening Comments.

Next Release (September 28): The "final" estimate revision for second-quarter 2006 GDP should be little more than statistical noise.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) -- The BLS reported the seasonally-adjusted August CPI-U rose by 0.25% (0.20% unadjusted), following July's 0.44% (0.30% unadjusted) increase. On a not-seasonally-adjusted basis, August's annual inflation rate (I-6) was 3.82%, down from July's 4.15%. The eight levels of annual inflation, I-1 to I-8, are detailed in the table in the Alternate Reality section.

The CPI-W (wage earners), which usually follows the CPI-U (all urban consumers), gained 0.4% for the month, contrasted with the 0.2% CPI-U gain. While rounding accounted for part of the difference, there is a suggestion of some unusual seasonal factor adjustments for the CPI-U. The CPI-W is used in calculating annual cost-of-living adjustments (third quarter average annual inflation) for Social Security. With the drop pending in September annual inflation, this year's adjustment could be around 3.6% to 3.7%, down from last year's 4.1%.

The "experimental" Chained Consumer Price Index (C-CPI-U), the fully substitution based CPI that presumably is the eventual replacement for current CPI reporting, showed annual inflation (I-5) of 3.42% in August, versus 3.52% in July.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton methodology (I-7), annual CPI growth was about 7.0% as of August, against 7.3% in July. The SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure (I-8), which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies of recent decades, shows annual inflation at 10.8% in August, versus 11.0% in July.

Annual Core CPI-U inflation rate (I-3), which excludes the necessities of food and energy, rose to 2.8% in August, up from 2.7% in July. In contrast, the SGS Base CPI-U annual inflation rate, which includes only the necessities, held at 4.4% in August for the third straight month. The SGS rate, however, still suffers the standard CPI-U methodological understatement.

Next Release (October 18): Inflation has not peaked, but it likely will take a double hit in the next report, from lower oil prices and year-ago comparisons with the effects of the Katrina disaster. Nonetheless, surprises still should come in on the upside of weak expectations, tied particularly to core numbers, which already have started to firm. Increasingly, they should reflect the slow process of oil prices permeating nearly all levels of business activity.

Despite short-term volatility, annual inflation will remain high and should continue to accelerate to the upside, following September's hit. Pressures will continue not only from the ongoing and lagged effects of oil prices, but also from a weak U.S. dollar. Seasonally-adjusted monthly inflation was up 1.22% for September 2005, which means that monthly September 2006 inflation above or below that level will move the reported annual inflation rate in tandem.


Other Troubled Key Series


Federal Deficit -- As discussed in prior newsletters, the official, accounting-gimmicked 2005 deficit (fiscal year ended September 30th) was $318.5 billion, but it was eleven times higher -- at $3.5 trillion -- on a GAAP basis, per the U.S. Treasury (see the December 2005 SGS Supplement for detail). The official, accounting-gimmicked deficit for 2004 was $412.8 billion.

The gimmicked 2006 deficit will come in below the 2005 number. This improved deficit is little more than statistical noise in the big picture and appears due largely to special, short-lived corporate tax breaks on repatriation of foreign profits. That arrangement stimulated a significant, one-time surge in corporate tax receipts, which had no relationship to underlying economic activity. The "narrowing" deficit is not due to booming economic activity and likely will be more than offset in GAAP-based detail to be released in December.

As of August 2006, the 11th month in fiscal 2006, the twelve-month rolling accounting-gimmicked deficit was $268.6 billion, up from $255.4 billion in July, and against $328.0 billion in August 2005.

Separate from the GAAP-based numbers and official deficit reporting, the change in gross federal debt is a fair indicator of actual net cash outlays by the government. As of fiscal year-end 2005, the gross federal debt was $7.933 trillion, up $554 billion from September 2004, which, in turn, was up by $596 billion from September 2003.

The gross federal debt as of August 31, 2006 was $8.515 trillion, up $7 billion from July and up $588 billion from August 2005, which, in turn, was up $576 billion from August 2004.

Going forward, the official federal deficit will inflate, as government finances suffer tax revenue losses from the intensifying recession and relative tax receipt declines after the expiration of the tax incentives. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts (based on consistently applied tax policies) remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy's mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance -- Annual change in initial claims again moved at an accelerating pace into less negative territory (an economic negative) through the reporting of the September 2nd week, but it reversed in the next two reports due to the year-ago impact of Hurricane Katrina. On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended September 2nd, annual change narrowed to a 2.2% decline from August 5th's 2.8% decline. For the September 16th week, however, the annual decline had fallen to 6.2% as the initial reporting from the effects of Hurricane Katrina worked into the year-ago numbers.

Usually, the volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly numbers is due partially to the seasonal-adjustment process. When the series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such generally is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings -- August's seasonally-adjusted real earnings plunged by 0.5% for the month, after an unchanged level in July (revised from a 0.1% decline). August's real earnings, however, were up 0.3% from the year before, following a 0.1% decline in July.

Volatility in this series comes primarily from variations in reported CPI growth. Allowing for the biases built into the CPI-W series used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series signals ongoing severe financial strain on U.S. households and continuing recession. As a note of interest, August CPI-W was up by 0.4% for the month, against a 0.2% increase for the CPI-U.

Retail Sales -- August's seasonally-adjusted monthly increase in retail sales of 0.2% (0.1% net of revisions) +/-0.7%, followed an unrevised 1.4% gain in July. Net of CPI inflation, August sales were down less than 0.1%, the third monthly decline in four months.

When inflation-adjusted year-to-year growth in retail sales falls below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation), such signals recession. The signal was generated in June. Before inflation adjustment, August's annual growth was 6.7%, up from July's 4.8%. Net of inflation, August's annual growth was 2.7%, up from July's 0.6%. The same numbers in a three-month moving average were 1.4% for August, down from 1.6% in July.

Next Release (October 13): September retail sales should come in below expectations, reflecting declining economic activity. Inflation-adjusted growth should remain negative on a monthly basis, with annual growth generally continuing to slow.

Industrial Production -- With some relief in the abnormally hot weather, distortions from utility usage reversed, and seasonally-adjusted August production declined by 0.1%, following an unrevised 0.4% gain in July. June's utility-distorted 0.8% production surge, however, revised upward to 1.1%. Year-to-year change in August was up by 4.7%, off July's growth rate of 5.3% (revised from 4.9%).

Keep in mind that unseasonably hot weather spikes not only utility usage, but also reported production in a number of manufacturing categories, where activity is estimated by electricity consumption. Turn up the air conditioning in a computer factory, and the Federal Reserve thinks computer production is on the rise.

Next Release (October 17): Look for industrial production increasingly to mirror the recession, with regular monthly contractions and a pattern of slowing annual growth setting in. Such will surprise market expectations on the downside. With the return to more normal temperature patterns, September reporting could offer some downside shocks.

New Orders for Durable Goods -- Volatile durable goods orders declined in July, with seasonally-adjusted orders down by 2.4% (2.0% net of revisions), following a revised June gain of 3.5% (previously 3.1%). July's orders were up 11.1% from the year before.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders inched higher by 0.2% in July, after a revised 2.1% gain in June (previously up by 1.3%). July's annual growth rate was up 11.6%.

At one time, durable goods orders was a solid leading indicator of broad economic activity, when smoothed using a six-month moving average. After the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders, however, the series' predictive ability suffered a serious setback.

Trade Balance -- Returning to a more normal pattern, July's seasonally-adjusted trade deficit widened to a record $68.0 billion from $64.8 billion in June. Contrary to Wall Street hype, the deterioration was not tied to oil. Oil imports actually were down for the month.

In terms of physical volume, July oil imports dropped by 5.9% for the month to 10,373,000 barrels per day, a measure that covers the most significant portion of trade-related seasonal adjustment. Oil import prices averaged $64.84 per barrel, up by 4.5% from June. The combination showed the July daily average dollar value of oil imports to have been 1.7% lower than in June. With oil removed, the monthly July deficit would have been roughly $68.4 billion, instead of $68.0 billion.

Despite sporadic manipulation and other occasional volatility, there is little question that the trade deficit remains in a phase of meaningful deterioration.

Next Release (October 12): The August trade deficit should continue the widening trend. Upcoming deficit reports will surge beyond consensus forecasts and regularly set new records.

Consumer Confidence -- August consumer confidence measures plunged, with annual growth in negative territory for both series. The Conference Board's August consumer confidence plummeted by 7.2%, after July's revised increase of 1.5% (was 1.0%), while the University of Michigan's consumer sentiment fell by 3.25, following July's 0.2% decline.

On a three-month moving-average basis for August, annual growth in the Conference Board's measure turned negative, down 1.1%, against a 1.3% gain in the prior month, while the University of Michigan number was down 10.7%, following July's 11.0% decline. These lagging, not leading, indicators are signaling that the economy remains in a deepening recession.

Short-Term Credit Measures -- Annual growth in short-term commercial credit measures remains strong, holding double-digit percentage annual growth, while annual growth in consumer credit remains below average.

Growth in seasonally-adjusted consumer credit remained sub-par in July, with annual growth easing to 3.7%, down from a revised 3.9% (was 3.5%) in June. Without growth in income (see this month's Reporting/Market Focus), growth in personal consumption can be supported over the short-term only by debt expansion or savings liquidation. Consumer debt expansion -- though moving -- is still soft enough to act as a constraint on economic growth.

Annual growth in commercial paper outstanding in August moved higher, again, standing at 17.5% versus 17.0% in July. Annual growth in commercial and industrial loans also increased, up 15.3% in August, against 13.5% in July and 14.0% in June. Rising sales can fuel short-term credit needs, but so too can slowing sales, slowing collections and rising inventories.

Producer Price Index (PPI) -- The seasonally-adjusted August finished goods PPI rose just 0.1% (0.1% unadjusted) following a like 0.1% (0.2% unadjusted) gain in July. August's annual PPI inflation dropped to 3.7% from July's 4.2%. Seasonally-adjusted August intermediate goods rose by 0.4% for the month, while crude goods were up 2.2%. The monthly inflation numbers were depressed partially by irregular seasonal adjustment factors that were suggestive of some political tampering.

Next Release (October 17): Despite a large component of random volatility in monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months, including September, should top depressed expectations. "Core" inflation, in particular, should offer upside surprises to consensus forecasts, despite reporting games played by the BLS. Nonetheless, the September reading will pick up effects from lower oil prices, and the monthly number for finished goods likely still will be a weak one.


Better-Quality Numbers


The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey: Manufacturing New Orders -- The August new orders index declined by 3.4% to 54.2, after July's drop of 3.1%. This measure breached its fail-safe point in mid-2005, generating an SGS early warning indicator of pending recession.

The Commerce Department provides suspect seasonal factors for the series, and the resulting adjusted monthly numbers can be misleading in the reporting of month-to-month change. This problem is overcome by using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the August index fell by 2.8%, following July's 0.8% contraction. The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004.

Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising new orders.

The overall August ISM manufacturing index eased to 54.5 from 54.7 in July. An index level of 50.0 divides a growing versus contracting manufacturing sector. The August employment component jumped to 54.0 from July's 50.7 reading.

The service-sector ISM index does not have much meaning related to broad economic activity. Unlike its older counterpart, the manufacturing survey, if service companies such as law firms, hospitals or fast-food restaurants have "increased orders," that does not necessarily mean that economic activity is increasing. That said, the overall services index rose to 57.0 in August, from 54.8 in July.

Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. The August employment component fell by 5.7% to 51.4, from 54.5 in July. The prices paid component is covered under the Inflation Indicators.

Help Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) -- The July help-wanted advertising set a new 45-year low at 32. June's initial reading of 33 was revised upward to 34. Although this series never recovered from the last recession -- it has just bottom bounced and rolled -- with the annual contraction in the three-month moving average dropping to 13.0% from a revised 10.4% (previously 12.2%) in June, it continues to generate a deepening signal for fresh economic contraction.

Housing Starts -- As discussed and graphed in the opening comments, housing starts are tumbling dramatically. Seasonally-adjusted August housing starts fell 6.0% for the month, following a 3.3% decline in June and a 6.1% drop in May. With August's year-to-year change down by 19.8%, following July's 14.4% contraction, the annual change on a three-month moving-average basis now stands at a year-to-year drop of 15.3%, which is generating an intensifying recession signal.

In related data, plunging respective rates of annual contraction in July of 21.6% and 11.2% for new- and existing-home sales, also are consistent with a sharp economic downturn.

Money Supply -- Real annual growth rates for M1 and M2 remain consistent with the ongoing recession, while the nominal (not-inflation-adjusted) annual growth in M3 -- as estimated by the SGS Continuing M3 Series -- remains strong enough to fuel inflation concerns.

Annual growth in August for monthly M1 fell by 0.6%, versus a 0.2% gain in July, while annual M2 growth eased to 4.7% from 4.9%. The SGS Continuing M3 Series for August was up 9.1% from the year before, down slightly from an upwardly revised 9.2% in July. Annual growth rates in large time deposits and institutional money funds -- the two largest non-M2 components of M3 -- topped 20% and 13%, respectively.



(NOTE: Historical annual growth data for the money supply series, including the ongoing SGS estimates of M3, are available for download on the Alternate Data page of www.shadowstats.com. See the August 2006 SGS for methodology.)

Before inflation adjustment, monthly seasonally-adjusted M1 and M2 fell by 0.3% and rose by 0.3%, respectively, in August, following 0.2% and 0.3% increases in July. The seasonally-adjusted monthly gain for M3 in August was roughly 1.0%, up from 0.7% in July.

Adjusted for CPI inflation, August's M1 and M2 annual year-to-year rates of change were down 4.3% and up 0.8%, respectively. On a three-month moving-average basis, the August inflation-adjusted annual rates of change were down 4.2% and up 0.7%, levels that remain well underwater using the old-style CPI.

Inflation Indicators

Purchasing Managers Surveys: Prices Paid Indices -- On the manufacturing side, the August prices paid diffusion index softened to 73.0 from July's 78.5, a reading still indicative of intense inflationary pressure. On a three-month moving average basis, August's annual growth was up by 40.9% from the year before, compared with July's 47.8%.

On the non-manufacturing side, the August prices paid diffusion index eased to 72.4 from July's 74.8, also at a level signaling intense inflationary pressure. On a three-month moving average basis, August's annual growth was up by 11.5%, a slightly softer pace than July's 16.9%.

Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflation activity. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising inflation.

Oil Prices -- West Texas Intermediate Spot (St. Louis Fed) eased back in August, averaging $73.05 per barrel, down 1.8% from July's record average of $74.41 per barrel. Oil prices persist at extraordinarily inflationary levels, with August's average up 12.4% from the year before, after July's annual gain of 26.8%. Oil prices through mid-September have sold off sharply, trading somewhat above +ACQ-60 per barrel as we go to press. That, combined with the year-ago oil price surge from Katrina, promises a short-lived reversal in annual oil price change for September.

Spot prices will continue to gyrate and can be expected to be on rise again shortly after the November election, if not before. Middle Eastern political tensions are likely to intensify once again from the standpoint of U.S. policy, following the election. Threats to oil production in the Gulf of Mexico from hurricanes remain a possibility for another month or so. Separately, OPEC members are suggesting that $60 is a price floor that might be enforced through production cut backs.

Despite continuing near-term price volatility, high oil prices will remain a major contributing factor to the inflation side of the current inflationary recession. Oil prices remain extremely high, and still are working their way through the system. Oil price changes permeate costs throughout the economy, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. Cost pressures already have passed significantly into the so-called "core" inflation sectors. That pattern should accelerate despite any near-term easing of oil prices.

Oil price volatility affects CPI and PPI reporting. Downside oil price movements tend to be picked up more quickly and fully by the BLS in its inflation measures than are upside movements. Even as currently understated, CPI and PPI inflation will tend to be stronger than commonly predicted for the next six-to-nine months, partially as a result of the persistency of the high oil prices.

Background Material/Reporting Coverage


Quarterly/Annual Reporting -- Most series analyzed are published on a monthly or weekly basis. Followed economic/market series that are published with less-than-monthly frequency include:

Annual:

- Financial Statements of the United States Government (most recent analysis was a Supplement to December 2005 SGS; next analysis is due as a Supplement to the December 2006 SGS).

- Income Variance/Dispersion (most recent analysis is the current September 2006 SGS - next analysis is due September 2007).

Quarterly:

- Flow of Funds Accounts of the United States (most recent analysis: July 2006 SGS - next analysis is due October 2006 SGS).

Reporting/Market Foci -- The various economic and financial-market series are being addressed in a monthly "Reporting/Market Focus," with this month's analysis examining the annual Income Variance reporting. Employment, GDP, CPI and the Federal Deficit separately are explored in the background article "A Primer On Government Economic Reports," available on the Home page of www.shadowstats.com.

The series detailed so far in the Reporting Foci or background articles are listed below. The referenced SGS publications are available on the Archives page of www.shadowstats.com.

- Consumer Confidence (November 2004 SGS).

- Consumer Price Index (an original background article, October 2005 SGS, alternate numbers introduced August 2006 SGS).

- Credit Measures, Short-Term (August 2005 SGS).

- Durable Goods, New Orders for (May 2006 SGS).

- Employment/Unemployment (an original background article, alternate measures (April 2005 SGS).

- Federal Deficit (an original background article, update in the Alert of July 7, 2005, update in Supplement to December 2005 SGS).

- Gross Domestic Product (an original background article, alternate numbers introduced August 2006).

- Help Wanted Advertising (January 2006 SGS).

- Housing Starts and related housing statistics (June 2006 SGS).

- Income Variance/Dispersion (September 2005 SGS, September 2006 SGS).

- Industrial Production (January 2005 SGS).

- Money Supply (Part I / SGS Early Warning System

- May 2005 SGS, Part II - June 2005 SGS, M3 update November 2005 Supplement, M2 update March 2006 SGS, M3 continuing series introduced August 2006).

- Producer Price Index (April 2006 SGS).

- Purchasing Managers Survey (February 2006 SGS).

- Retail Sales (March 2005 SGS).

- SGS Early Warning System (May 2005 SGS, June 2005 SGS).

- Trade Balance (December 2004 SGS).

- Unemployment Insurance, Initial Claims for (February 2005 SGS).

- U.S. Dollar Indices, Financial- and Trade-Weighted (July 2005 SGS).


Reporting/Market Focus (September 2006) -- Income Variance Data Signal Economic Troubles Ahead and Household Income Numbers Suggest GDP Fraud


Income variance is a long-term driver and indicator of economic activity. Another record high -- well in excess of the level seen before the 1929 stock crash and Great Depression -- was reported as part of the Census Bureau's just-released Income, Poverty, and Health Insurance Coverage in the United States: 2005

For the leading economic indicators analyzed monthly in SGS, lead times to broad economic activity range between three and nine months. One indicator, however, signals broad trends in liquidity and economic activity three to eight years in advance: income variance/dispersion.

Income variance, also known as dispersion, measures the distribution of household income from very low levels to extremely high levels. The more income is distributed in the extreme ranges, the higher is income dispersion; the more income is distributed in the middle income brackets, the lower is the income dispersion. Extremely high levels of income dispersion have tended to precede great economic and financial catastrophes. Those events, in turn, have tended to redistribute income towards the middle, in something of a self-correcting cycle.

The 1986 variance in U.S. household income, which led the 1987 stock crash, was at the highest level estimated in modern times for the United States, topping the high seen before the 1929 stock crash and the ensuing Great Depression. The income variance level fell following the 1987 crash, but recovered the 1986 level in 1992. The Census Bureau's estimate of 2005 income dispersion was 31.0% higher than the pre-1987-crash level.

The distribution of wealth and income provides the fundamental structure for all economies. Where income drives consumption, shifts in income distribution impact economic activity. When income distribution shifts away from extremes, a greater portion of the consuming public is in the middle-income bracket, consumption becomes more broadly based, and the economy booms.

Consider, for example, that someone earning $10 million per year likely will buy fewer automobiles than 100 people each earning $100,000 per year.

As income distribution shifts toward extremes, variance and dispersion rise, consumption becomes less broadly based and the economy turns down. A shift in income distribution leads to a structural shift in economic activity, such as currently is underway.

The current distribution of income in the United States has developed in something of a free-market system, with government modification in the form of tax, monetary, welfare, labor and antitrust policies. Without getting into the merits of various forms of modification, and without getting into the larger philosophical questions of wealth distribution, shifts in income variance can be shown to have significant long-term impact on general economic activity.

Our analysis shows a leading relationship between the level of income dispersion and annual growth in systemic liquidity, not adjusted for inflation. This is one reason why the Federal Reserve sometimes finds itself pushing on a string when it tries to stimulate economic activity through money supply growth (as it covertly is doing at present with M3). As shown in the following graph of inflation-adjusted household income vs. income dispersion, income variance was at an all-time extreme as of 2005.



The measure used here is the mean logarithmic deviation of income as published by the Census Bureau in its annual poverty report. There are a variety of income dispersion/variance measures, but they all show the same basic pattern: U.S. income variance is at an unprecedented level that portends a major break in the economic/financial system.

Also reported in the poverty report were estimates of inflation-adjusted average and median (meaning the middle measure) household income levels for 2005. Of some note, as shown in the graphs below, both average and median household income contracted each year from 1999/2000 through 2004, with a suspect rebound in 2005. The earlier years are consistent with data from the Internal Revenue Service. Reality for 2005 eventually will come from IRS reporting.





When real household income is in contraction, so too, usually, is the economy. This suggests that the one-year 2001 recession was much deeper and longer than proclaimed officially, lasting from 2000 through 2004. The unbelievable 2005 income gains likely were a pre-election gimmick worked by "re-weightings" that will revise away next year as IRS data become available. If so, these data will tend to confirm a longstanding SGS contention that the current recession is the second leg of a double-dip recession (see GDP graph in Alternate Reality section). The combination of negative annual growth in household income and the accompanying spike in income dispersion, as shown in the first graph, is a particularly ominous pairing.

Sustained economic growth is possible only in the event of sustained income growth. Debt growth and asset liquidation can buy only short-lived boosts in consumption. Nonetheless, Mr. Greenspan tried his best to gain time in stimulating stock-market and housing bubbles. The respective bubble bursts have helped in timing severe downlegs in the current double-dip recession.

The household income data cannot possibly support reported GDP growth of recent years, suggesting there is an ongoing reporting fraud at the Bureau of Economic Analysis.

Allowing for growth in the number of households, 2004 aggregate inflation-adjusted household income grew by just 0.9%, and 2005 (accepting the reported gain in average household income) was up by 2.3%, annual rates of growth well below annual official GDP growth that has held above 3.0% for the same years. Sustained GDP growth well above real income growth is not possible. Consumption growth fueled only by debt growth and asset liquidation has practical limits. These numbers indicate that reported GDP growth has been systematically and significantly overstated.

These numbers from the Census Bureau also show the system to be continuing at the brink of instability and unable to sustain the phony positive GDP growth reported by the Bureau of Economic Analysis.

As to poverty, the measures of same reported in this survey are poorly defined and manipulated by frequent methodological revisions. As a result, the poverty numbers are of no value. This situation is exacerbated by every-other report coming out two months before national elections.


Upcoming Reporting/Market Focus for October - The Productivity Miracle/Fraud


Subscribers often ask why SGS does not cover the quarterly U.S. productivity numbers. The answer is that those numbers are even more worthless than the GDP data. Where the Federal Reserve and recent administrations have patted each other on the back tied to the heavily touted productivity miracle, SGS will assess current and historical productivity and attempt to debunk a favorite Wall Street myth.

Also, second-quarter 2006 Flow of Funds will be analyzed in a separate section. Have the first quarter's early trends of foreign investors moving out of U.S. Treasuries and other financial instruments intensified? The answer appears to be not yet.


------------


October's "Shadow Government Statistics" is targeted for release on Wednesday, October 25, 2006. The monthly newsletter tentatively is scheduled for the Wednesday following the release of the monthly CPI report, but the schedule is subject to change. Final publication date will be noted on the home page of shadowstats.com at the top of the "Latest Monthly Commentary" column. The posting of the next SGS newsletter on the Web site, as well as all Flash Updates and any Alerts, will be advised immediately by e-mail.

Flash Update

Tuesday, September 5th, 2006
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Flash Update

September 5, 2006

__________

Recession Surfaces Despite Manipulation of GDP Data

Help-Wanted Advertising and Consumer Confidence Plunge Anew

Poverty Survey Suggests the 2001 Recession Never Ended

__________


IMPORTANT NOTICE: Regular scheduling of the monthly "Shadow Government Statistics" has been shifted for a final time to the Wednesday following the week of the monthly CPI release. Such will assure that the monthly data, charts and assessments are based on the latest published inflation information. Accordingly, September's regular issue now will be published on Wednesday, September 20th. At least one Flash Update will be interspersed between the monthly missives. -- John Williams

While Wall Street tries to spin a soft-landing tale for the economy -- thanking Mr. Bernanke's genius -- a number of reports already are showing scattered wreckage from the crash landing.

GDP. That does not mean the spin-doctors at the Administration's statistical bureaus have not been trying to hide reality. The only positive news recently has been that the "preliminary" revision to the second-quarter GDP showed annualized quarterly real (inflation-adjusted) growth of 2.90%, up from initial reporting of 2.46%.

Despite negative revisions and reporting in related retail sales and trade deficit numbers, the related GDP components improved in revision. Gross National Product (GNP), which is broader than the GDP measure that lacks the trade flows in interest and dividend payments, rose 2.58% in initial reporting. The difference in GNP and GDP reporting is damage done by the net debtor status of the United States versus the rest of the world.

Employment/Unemployment. On the downside, August payroll jobs growth remained marginal for the fifth straight month, up just 128,000 (146,000 net of revisions), after July's 121,000 gain (previously 113,000). Annual payroll growth has slowed from 1.71% in August 2005 to 1.26% in August 2006.

In the household survey, employment contracted for the second month, down by 86,000 in August on top of a July drop of 34,000. Seasonally-adjusted unemployment U-3 eased insignificantly from 4.75% +/-0.20% to 4.69%. Unadjusted U-3 dropped from 5.0% to 4.6%, while the broader adjusted U-6 moved from 8.5% to 8.4%, and the unadjusted U-6 eased from 8.8% to 8.3%.

It was difficult for members of the financial press to give this report a positive spin, but generally they did.

Other Numbers. July help-wanted advertising dropped to 32, a new 45-year low and down 17.9% from July 2005. Both the Conference Board and University of Michigan confidence/sentiment numbers plunged in August (down 5.6% and 8.0% respectively), with both series down year-to-year and signaling that the recession has been deepening. The purchasing managers August manufacturing survey softened slightly.

Poverty Report. The big surprise came in the 2005 Poverty Report. While the poverty number does not come close to measuring poverty, the Census Bureau's estimates of annual median (middle) and mean (average) household income numbers, and income dispersion usually are of interest.

Income dispersion hit a new high in 2005 (higher than pre-Great Depression). The greater income dispersion is, the weaker will be the economy over the next several years (see the September 2005 SGS).

Further, after revisions, inflation-adjusted median household income declined for five years, before turning up in 2005, while mean household income had declined for four years before the reported 2005 upturn. The economy is not expanding if household income is contracting. These numbers now show that the U.S. economy was in recession from 1999 until at least 2004, and the 2005 data are highly suspect.

Although the 2001 recession has been revised away in GDP reporting, the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), official arbiter of recessions, still classifies the contraction as a recession contained within the 2001 calendar year. Nevertheless, rumblings at the NBER of a possible new recession are beginning to be heard.

Further details on all of the preceding will follow in the regular September SGS.

___________________________________________


September's "Shadow Government Statistics" is scheduled for release on Wednesday, September 20, 2006. The posting of the next SGS, as well as any Interim Updates or Alerts, will be advised immediately by e-mail.

August 2006 Newsletter

Monday, August 21st, 2006
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Issue Number 22

August 21, 2006

__________

Inflationary Recession Deteriorated Sharply in Second Quarter

Alternate Measures: Consumer Inflation Hits 11% with Annual GDP Growth Down 0.8%

July M3 Annual Growth at 9.1%

Fed's Pause Will Prove Short-Lived

Heavy Dollar Selling and Interest Rate Spike Loom


__________


Introduced this month are the Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) alternate measures of Consumer Inflation and Gross Domestic Product, as well as a continuing series for estimated growth in M3 Money Supply -- abandoned by the Federal Reserve in March. While these different measures are graphed and discussed in the opening comments, the underlying methodologies are described in this month's Reporting/Market Focus. Separately, data for the SGS versions of the M3, GDP and CPI series are available for subscriber download through the Alternate Data tab on www.shadowstats.com. -- John Williams



OPENING COMMENTS


The Federal Reserve's Open Market Committee "paused" in its string of rate hikes, citing moderating economic growth and hopes for moderating inflation. With the economy in a deepening inflationary recession, the Fed once more is feeding pabulum to the financial markets in an effort to fend off disorderly declines in the U.S. dollar and in the equity and credit markets.

In response, both the equity and credit markets have rallied. Further, a new Wall Street spin is being generated that inflation has peaked and that the Fed might start easing next year. The greenback, however, has not been buying all the super-hype, and therein lies the mechanism for triggering a resumption of the Fed's so-called tightening. At least initially, Mr. Bernanke should move to defend the dollar against the coming onslaught, in an effort to moderate the drain of liquidity from the U.S. markets.

Inflation is far from peaking, and interest rates are going to spike sharply. In a related manner, the run-up in oil prices is not over, and the price of gold has a tremendous upside move ahead of it. The ceasefire in Lebanon is far from the end of conflict in the Middle East, and the terror plot against the airlines -- uncovered in London -- also is not likely the last incident in the realm of the unthinkable.

What the activity of the last month has highlighted is how quickly some circumstances can change. Unfortunately, the intractable U.S. economic and financial condition and increasingly unstable global political conditions will not change for the better, quickly. In like manner, our outlook for a protracted, continuing U.S. economic downturn, mounting inflationary pressures and increasing financial-market instabilities will not change rapidly, either.

All of this brings us back to Mr. Bernanke, who has the unenviable job of having to juggle all these issues in such a manner so as to forestall inevitable market instabilities as long as possible. In the realm of juggling, the lengthy string of interest rate hikes, which just ended, was not accompanied by the expected tightening of monetary policy.

Although annual growth in the M1 money supply measure has been vacillating around zero, M2 has growth has remained in the 4% to 5% range, and M3 growth has continued to rise. While the Fed ceased publishing M3 back in March, Shadow Government Statistics has developed a continuing series of estimated annual M3 growth.



The new M3 series (see Reporting/Market Focus for methodology) shows an ongoing increase in annual growth for this broadest of money supply measures. With M3 growth at 9.1% in July, it is at its highest level since March 2002, when money growth was slowing from its 2001 peak of 13.3%. Then, the Fed was trying to offset the liquidity impact of the bursting stock-market bubble.

In the current circumstance, the Fed is pushing on the proverbial string. Rapid M3 growth is not stimulating economic activity. It is, however, helping to add upside pressure on inflation. Raising rates will do little to contain inflation that is driven by commodity supply problems (such as with oil). If the current inflation problem were based on strong economic demand, the rates might help, but such is not the case. On the other hand, overly aggressive pumping up of the broad money supply actually will add to inflation pressures, despite soft economic demand, which is the case.

Annual growth in key economic data continued to collapse in the reporting of the last month, while official annual CPI inflation remained above four percent. The SGS Alternate GDP measure shows a deepening and protracted recession, while the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure is at a 25-year high.

Key Economic Indicators Keep Tumbling. As discussed in the Flash Update of July 24th, deteriorating growth in retail sales and housing starts locked in recession signals last month, and those growth patterns have shown continued decline in the latest reporting. Monthly growth in July payroll employment remained statistically indistinguishable from no change/contraction for a fourth month, while help-wanted advertising continued at a 45-year low, and other employment indicators continued to signal a softening jobs market. Recent strength in industrial production has been tied to unusually severe, nationwide heat waves. For a number of factories, increased air conditioning usage gets counted by the Fed as a spike in production.

The official June/July inflation readings have been slow to pick up the recent surge in oil prices, as is typical in such reporting. August should reflect some catch up, regardless of current downside volatility in crude oil prices.

The Alert of July 28th showed GDP manipulation, where the use of incredibly low GDP inflation rates prevented a quarterly contraction in real (inflation-adjusted) growth. Generally, the lower the inflation rate used to deflate GDP, the higher will be the reported real growth. Regardless, the 2.5% second-quarter GDP growth rate, which presently is statistically indistinguishable from an outright contraction, should face some downward revision based on the latest revisions to and reporting of retail sales and the monthly trade deficit (see the respective reporting sections).

The GDP series is the most heavily politicized of the popular government economic reports. In conjunction with the annual GDP revisions, Shadow Government Statistics this month introduces an alternate measure of estimated annual real GDP growth (see the Reporting/Market Focus section for methodology and further detail).



Incorporating the downside revisions to recent annual real GDP growth, the SGS series not only shows the 2000/2001 recession to have been much deeper and longer than officially reported, but also that the current downturn is just the second leg of a double-dip recession.

Special Consumer Inflation Focus. Subscriber questions increasingly have centered on issues with consumer inflation and various measures of the same. The following table shows the current status of a variety of inflation measures. Where the Bureau of Labor Statistics regularly reports on six unemployment measures, ranging from U-1 to U-6, SGS now will report regularly on eight inflation measures, ranging from I-1 to I-8.

                          Eight Levels of Inflation
                    Annual Inflation for May to July 2006


Measure May June July I-1 Core PCE Deflator 2.2% 2.4% n.a. I-2 Core C-CPI 2.2% 2.4% 2.5% I-3 Core CPI-U 2.4% 2.6% 2.7% I-4 PCE Deflator 3.4% 3.5% n.a. I-5 C-CPI-U 3.4% 3.7% 3.5% I-6 CPI-U 4.2% 4.3% 4.1% I-7 Pre-Clinton CPI-U 7.3% 7.4% 7.3% I-8 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation 10.8% 11.0% 11.0%


The key is how you define consumer inflation. I operate on the premise that the post-World War II CPI concept of inflation measured based on a fixed-basket of goods -- a measure of the changes in prices related to maintaining a constant standard of living -- was a reasonable, meaningful and useful approach for most consumers (see the CPI background article on the home page{LINK}).

Some years back, then Fed Chairman Alan Greenspan began making public noises about how the CPI overstated inflation. Where the fixed-basket of goods approach would measure the cost of steak, year after year, Mr. Greenspan argued that if steak went up in price, people would buy more hamburger meat, mitigating the increase in their cost of living. The fact that switching the CPI concept to a substitution-based basket of market goods from a fixed-basket violated the original intent, purpose and concept of the CPI, never seemed to be a concern to those in Washington. Artificially reducing reported CPI inflation would have a variety of benefits, beginning with reduction of the budget deficit due to the cutting of cost-of-living adjustments for Social Security payments.

Accordingly, geometric weighting was introduced to the CPI reporting methodology, which had the effect of mimicking a substitution basis. Since the revised CPI still did not show as low an inflation rate as a fully substitution-based index would, Mr. Greenspan began focusing the Fed's inflation targeting and measurement on the inflation rate used to deflate personal consumption expenditure (PCE) in the GDP. Such was a substitution-based measure.

More recently, the BLS introduced the Chained CPI-U (C-CPI-U) as an experimental substitution-based inflation index, which closes follows PCE inflation.

Yet, as oil prices began their current uptrend, substitution-based inflation reporting still was not low enough for the former Fed Chairman, as he began embracing the concept of "core" inflation, inflation net of food and energy price changes. Eliminating bothersome price increases in energy and food products -- such as seen with oil at present -- would make the Fed's job of containing reported inflation all the easier.

In general, if a government economic measure does match common public experience, it has little use outside of academia or the spin-doctoring rooms of the Fed and Wall Street. The two SGS measures included in the above table have gimmicked methodological changes removed from the reporting so as to reflect more accurately the common public experience as embodied by the post-World War II CPI.

In summary, measures I-1 to I-3 reflect the core inflation rates respectively of the substitution based PCE and C-CPI-U measures and the geometrically weighted CPI-U. Measures I-4 to I-6 are the same measures with energy and food inflation included. The CPI-U (I-6) is the measure popularly followed by the financial press, when it is not involved in hyping core inflation.

I-7 is the CPI-U with the effects of geometric weighting (as estimated by SGS) reversed. This is the top series in the CPI graph on the SGS home page www.shadowstats.com.

The eighth measure (I-8) reflects the new SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which reverses the methodological gimmicks of the last 25 years or so, plus an adjustment for the geometric weighting that is not otherwise accounted for in BLS historic bookkeeping.



The July 2006 SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure shows inflation at a 25-year high of 11.0%. The methodology is discussed in the Reporting/Market Focus section.

The following graph shows the relative impact of the historical methodological changes to the CPI-U and as removed with the SGS alternate measure. The graph shows that inflation was contained in a self-correcting process before the founding of the Federal Reserve in 1913 and the abandonment of the gold standard in 1933.



This graph plots the level of consumer prices during the last 341 years. Data for the period 1665 to 1913 were estimated by Robert Sahr of Oregon State University, using the research of John J. McCusker of Trinity University, San Antonio, Texas. The continuing line that takes the lower track (1913 to 2006) is the official reporting of the annual-average CPI-U by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), with June 2006 used for 2006. The line that tracks to the upside represents official CPI-U reporting net of methodical changes used during the last 25 years to suppress inflation reporting. This SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure is estimated by a reverse engineering of BLS estimates used in constructing Consumer Price Index Research Series Using Current Methods (CPI-U-RS) plus SGS estimates of the 1990s switch from arithmetic to geometric weighting, as applied to the official CPI-U estimates.



Updated Summary of Current Outlook


In general, the broad economic outlook has not changed, and the financial markets increasingly are concerned over developing signs of both uncontained inflation and a developing recession. Indeed, the 2005 to 2007 (perhaps 2008) inflationary recession continues to deepen.

A contracting economy, inflation and risks of intensifying dollar selling are upon us and continue to offer the worst of all environments for increasingly less-Pollyannaish financial markets. The exception of course is the gold market, where the traditional inflation-hedge and flight-to-safety/quality vehicle will continue earning its keep as the dollar weakens, inflation accelerates and the global political situation continues to deteriorate.

The Shadow Government Statistics' Early Warning System (EWS) was activated in May 2005 and signaled the onset of a formal recession in July 2005. The EWS looks at historical growth patterns of key leading economic indicators in advance of major economic booms and busts and sets growth trigger points that generate warnings of major upturns or downturns when predetermined growth limits are breached. Since the beginning of 2005 a number of key indicators had been holding near or at their fail-safe points. Seven indicators now have moved beyond those levels, signaling a recession.

Retail sales, help-wanted advertising and housing starts generated such signals in the last two months. Once beyond their fail-safe points, these indicators never have sent out false alarms, either for an economic boom or bust.

The false economic boom massaged into first-quarter GDP reporting was a precursor to the overstatement of second-quarter GDP growth. The reported annualized real growth of 2.5% should have been a contraction. Irrespective of underlying reality, negative GDP growth is not likely to surface in regular government reporting until after the November election. Such is helped by rampant political manipulation of many key numbers. The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) eventually should time the downturn to mid-2005 and announce same also sometime after the election, so as not to be deemed politically motivated in its timing.

Whether or not there is a recession will be a hot topic in the popular financial media, with politics helping to fuel the debate as the election nears. Those Wall Street economists who act as shills for the market will keep up their "strong growth is just around the corner" hype regardless of any and all evidence to the contrary.

From the standpoint of common experience, this downturn will be considered the second leg of a double-dip recession, not an independent contraction as will be claimed officially.

Most economic data have softened, with the trend accelerating sharply. Regular monthly contractions are near for both payroll employment and industrial production, although political manipulation and weather distortions can keep the official payroll and production data afloat for a while longer. Significant deterioration also will be seen in corporate profits and federal tax receipts, despite any near-term volatility to the contrary. Depressed tax receipts will combine with negligible fiscal discipline and ongoing war spending to accelerate deterioration in the federal finances.

This general outlook is predicated on economic activity that already has taken place and does not consider any risks from exogenous factors such as renewed terrorist activity in the United States, world war, major natural disasters or a financial panic.

Market perceptions of the downturn in business activity are increasing sharply. As expectations begin to anticipate weak data, traditional expectations also are being lowered for inflation, despite the obvious oil problem. Worsening stagflation, however, seems to have gained a good foothold in some consensus thinking. Still, consensus forecasts generally will tend to be surprised on the downside for economic reports and on the upside for inflation reports, for some time to come.

The roots of the current difficulties are structural in nature. A consumer starved of income growth and overburdened with debt cannot sustain the real (inflation-adjusted) growth in consumption needed to keep GDP growth in positive territory. The income weakness is a direct result of the loss of a significant manufacturing base to offshore locations and the ensuing explosive, perpetual growth of the U.S. trade deficit.

Exacerbating economic and financial woes will be unusually high inflation during this contraction. Gold prices already signal inflation and other troubles. Fueled by high oil prices, weakness in the U.S. dollar and accelerating Fed monetization of federal debt, inflation will not be brought under control simply by weakness in economic demand. Instead, persistently high prices only will serve to intensify the recession, making it exceptionally long and protracted. Ongoing inflation woes and dollar problems will maintain upside pressure on long-term interest rates, reversing what currently is an inverted yield curve that some view as a recession signal.

Faltering economic activity and mounting inflation have created a nightmarish conundrum for the political operatives at the Federal Reserve. Soft economic numbers and high inflation are being spun as "conflicting data," but an inflationary recession is in play, and there is little the Fed can do about it.

The hype fed to the investing public -- that a weak economy means low inflation and interest rates -- cannot work in the current environment. Any conflicts that arise are not in the economic data but in simplistic views on economic activity espoused by Wall Street, or in the statistical manipulation goals of the politicians. Those latter issues explain Fed Chairman Bernanke's continued tap dancing on the inflation outlook. Such is anchored in putting a positive spin on an impossible situation and avoiding a financial-market meltdown before November 7th, but the markets have not been overly cooperative.

In the present circumstance, inflation driven by robust economic demand would be a happy event, but such is not to be. Rather, the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar is being lost to wasting diseases, eroded by foreign exchange weakness in the trade-deficit plagued greenback, malfeasance in domestic fiscal and monetary policies, and external disruptions such as cartel-orchestrated price surges in oil. All the latter factors are in play.

From the Federal Reserve's perspective, at present, mixed signals are the best that can be offered to the markets. Allowing for the possibility of renewing the faux "tightening," signals Mr. Bernanke's devotion to keeping inflation under control. The Fed's "pause" in hiking interest rates signals Mr. Bernanke's devotion to maintaining solid economic growth. While the tap dancing may keep market sentiment gyrating for a while, the Fed is in an untenable position. Raising rates will do little to contain a non-demand driven inflation, while holding or lowering rates will do little to stimulate the structurally-impaired economy.

From the standpoint of the federal government, traditional economic stimuli in the form of tax cuts or increased federal spending have reached their practical limits with the current budget-deficit excesses.

Due to the inability of the government or central bank to stabilize this environment, risks of the current situation evolving into a hyperinflationary depression are extraordinarily high. Such a development involving the world's reserve currency would lead to a collapse of the current global currency system. In order to regain public confidence, monetary authorities likely would structure gold into the base of any new international currency system.

The unfolding inflationary recession is the worst of all worlds for the financial markets. Particularly hard hit will be the U.S. dollar, with significant downside moves looming for both equity and bond prices. Despite recent extreme volatility, the price of gold is headed much higher. At such time as the system re-stabilizes, post-crisis, there will be exceptional investment opportunities for those who have been able to preserve their wealth, capital and liquidity.



MARKETS PERSPECTIVE


The key financial markets remain in "transition" and are anticipating lower inflation and interest rates, and stronger corporate profit performance, than will come to pass. In terms of the broad financial market picture through year-end, the U.S. dollar should sell off sharply on a trade-weighted basis, particularly against the Swiss franc. As a partial result of the mounting dollar and inflation difficulties, the domestic yield curve will turn positive and steepen sharply, due particularly to rising long-term interest rates. The combination of the weak dollar and higher rates should not play out happily among equities. Concerns tied to the dollar, inflation and global instabilities suggest an upbeat year-end for the precious metals.

As to Federal Reserve policy, dollar and inflation woes are good bets to trigger renewed hikes in the targeted federal funds rate, before 2007. What drives present-day Fed policy is an effort to avoid -- at least to delay as long as possible -- a global financial panic and currency-system collapse. As with the recent "pause" in rate hikes, the Fed's actions are designed to placate the financial markets as much as possible and do not encompass a planning horizon much beyond a week or two. Accordingly, the Fed most likely will focus on the dollar as a policy guide, resuming rate hikes when they are deemed necessary to keep the dollar from entering freefall.

Equities -- The stock market continues to prove that it is the least rational of the financial markets, with the Dow Jones Industrial Average moving to a three-month high as we go to press.

Other than as something of a mirror of excessive inflation, stock prices are relatively strong despite underlying fundamentals that are miserable. The economy remains in an inflationary recession, and that concept has started to gain recognition among a growing number of analysts. Implications are for declining corporate profits and competing investment opportunities in the credit market as interest rates rise. With a terrible dollar tumble ahead, investment opportunity competition also will be had from assets denominated in something other than U.S. dollars, as well as from gold.

Once again, fall is approaching, and the squirreling season is almost upon us. I once retained a mass psychologist in an effort to explain why stock market crashes tended to take place in October and November. His answer was that humans had a vestigial squirreling instinct. As the squirrels start gathering acorns for the winter, so too do investment strategies among humans sometimes go through a shift.

When the dollar takes its major tumble, and foreign holdings of dollar assets get dumped at a near-panicked rate, the ensuing U.S. liquidity crisis should be enough to take stock prices to relative levels that only could be viewed as nightmarish by the Pollyanna crowd. Such could happen anytime, with no warning; the current circumstance also could linger beyond year-end.

Credit Markets -- Contrary to developing hype, inflation has not peaked, and the Fed's next move likely will be further interest rate hikes in defense of the U.S. dollar, instead of a shift to easing in 2007. Oil prices and inflation movement should soon dispel the latest Wall Street sales pitch.

Underlying fundamentals still indicate that long-term interest rates are headed sharply higher by the end of the year. This move in rates will be dominated by rising inflation, by a weakening dollar and by foreign investors increasingly moving their assets out of dollar-denominated instruments.

A number of factors drive interest rate movements, including economic activity, inflation, credit demand, political stability and relative dollar strength and accompanying cash inflows and outflows from abroad. Flight-to-safety concerns and anti-inflation hype, as seen at present, will have short-lived dampening impacts on treasury yields, but it is the recession that will offer major downside pressure on rates. An expectation of some slowing growth is why consensus forecasts still are for a relatively stable interest-rate environment.

The yield curve on Treasuries recently has turned even more negative, with the constant maturity 10-year yield at 4.87% and the 3-month bill at 5.07%. An added couple of hundred basis points at the long end will do a great deal towards flipping the yield curve to a fairly normal positive slope.

U.S. Dollar -- On average, the U.S. dollar held its own in July, relative to June, but selling pressure has picked up again in August. The shift in Fed policy away from raising interest rates has been a factor, especially where inflation pressures generally are moving rates to the upside outside the United States.

The dollar's tumble has just begun, with very negative and disorderly markets awaiting the greenback. As the downturn in the value of the U.S. currency accelerates, fallout in the credit and equity markets should not be pleasant.

Underlying fundamentals are so bad, they only could be marginally worse. Driving relative currency values are relative conditions in domestic economic activity, inflation, interest rates, government financial conditions and political stability. Though not fully recognized, all these factors for the United States -- relative to its major trading partners -- are negative. The U.S. economy is in recession, inflation is spiking and interest rates are rising abroad, while the Fed -- at least temporarily -- has stopped raising rates at home. The actual U.S. federal deficit is beyond containment, and, barring short-term variations with international tensions, the President's popularity rating is the lowest recorded in the 70-year history of such surveying.

Timing is uncertain, but the break in the dollar should come quickly, with little if any further advance warning. Serious shocks loom in U.S. economic and fiscal data and deteriorating domestic politics, and heavy selling pressure against the U.S. currency could intensify at any time. New record lows for the dollar are likely before the end of 2006, despite any overt or covert supportive intervention by any central bank(s).

Generally, the weaker the dollar, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. equity and capital markets.

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics' Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For July, the monthly dollar average gained just 0.03% after June's 1.07% gain. July's year-to-year change turned increasingly negative, down 3.54% after June's 1.78% decline.

In the same directions, but more heavily influenced by the U.S. dollar's monthly gain relative to the Canadian dollar, July's monthly average of the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index rose by 0.51% following June's 1.10% gain. July's year-to-year contraction, however, deepened to 4.31%, after June's 3.86% drop.

The relative strength in the financial- versus trade-weighted dollar, though somewhat muted, still remains at a level that usually precedes a major dollar sell-off.

Gold -- The roller coaster ride in the price of gold -- from May's near-term top of over $720 per troy ounce to below $570 in mid-June and then up again -- has slowed down, with trading in the lower six-hundreds. The recent stall undoubtedly reflects some short-term easing of oil price prices and a lull in Middle East tensions, but those conditions are not likely to last long. Inflation and dollar weakness already are weighing upon the global financial system, and a sudden increase in global political stability does not loom in the foreseeable future. The fundamentals that are so negative for the U.S. dollar and the equity and credit markets, are fuel for gold buying.

As a hedge against currency problems and inflation, and as the preferred safe-haven vehicle, the price of gold generally should move higher and set new historical highs in the months ahead. The currency and inflation issues are chronic and will deteriorate sharply before an ultimate collapse in the global currency system. Such does not prevent interim wild gold price gyrations, however, particularly if central banks think they see an opportunity to tarnish gold's image. One of the alluring features of the precious metal, of course, is that is does not tarnish.





The updated gold versus oil and Swiss franc graphs are little changed, other than for some upside movement in the average prices of gold and oil during July. All the political gimmicks, spin doctors and statistical manipulations still are not fooling a number of investors. In the gold versus Swiss franc chart, again, look for the Swiss franc ultimately to move higher to meet the gold line, not the other way around.



REPORTING PERSPECTIVE


The Big Three Market Movers
This month's Opening Comments reviewed the continued deterioration in the inflationary recession. Conflicting pressures on the great manipulators continue and will continue -- the Administration needs to keep the economy looking healthy enough to satisfy voters, while keeping the financial markets' inflation concerns low enough to make it through the election without major sell-offs in equities and bonds. Direct manipulation of key economic data appears to be well entrenched and should continue at least into the November election.

With the President's ratings continuing to bottom bounce and roll at historic lows, near-term economic reporting will remain gimmicked and managed. As a result, reported economic performance will continue having less than usual relevance to actual underlying activity, and upcoming reporting of the major series often will be determined by political need rather than by the economic factors that should drive the results.

Employment/Unemployment -- July's 113,000 payroll gain again was well shy of market expectations, again, and the unemployment rate even increased, as discussed in the August 8th Flash Update. The message from the BLS played to the Administration's needs to salve the inflation-rattled credit markets, not so much towards selling the Bush Administration's jobs creating performance.

The popularly followed seasonally-adjusted unemployment rate U-3 for July rose to 4.75% from June's 4.60%, an increase that was inside the published +/- 0.2% error margin. The unadjusted U-3 unemployment rose to 5.0% from June's 4.8%, and the broader U-6 unemployment measure rose to 8.8% from 8.7% in June. July's seasonally-adjusted U-6 rose to 8.5% from 8.4%.

Including the long-term "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton administration, total unemployment remains roughly 12%. The household survey also showed seasonally-adjusted July employment (those people with at least one job) down by 34,000, after June's 387,000 increase.

For July, the payroll survey's seasonally-adjusted gain of 113,000 (124,000 net of revisions) held close to the published reporting error of +/- 108,000 for the fourth straight month. This means the reported July gain was statistically indistinguishable from negligible monthly growth. The July increase followed an upwardly revised June gain of 124,000 (was 121,000). Annual growth in unadjusted July employment continued easing, down to 1.30% from 1.39% in June.

July's payroll gain of 113,000 included a negative bias of 57,000 jobs in the "net birth/death" adjustment, a fudge factor that was reduced from the minus 72,000 used for July 2005. The fudge factor swings back into positive territory in August (it was a 125,000 gain in August 2005), which could add some upside reporting pressure to next month's payrolls.

The latest report was against a background of continued collapsing growth in help-wanted advertising, rising new claims for unemployment insurance and weak July purchasing managers employment indices (see the respective sections).

Next Release (September 1): The political needs of the Administration remain great and will continue to offset the impact of sharply slowing economic activity in the employment data, even more so in the unemployment data.

While underlying reality would suggest further downside surprises to August payroll reporting, some sort of improvement will be needed before the election. Given a swing in the August birth-death numbers back into positive territory, that upside surprise could be in the August payroll report.

Unemployment appears to be the ongoing vehicle for the politicians' good news, and, with appropriate massaging, still should see some pre-election improvement, irrespective of diverging reality.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) -- The "advance" estimate of annualized real (inflation-adjusted) growth for second-quarter 2006 GDP was 2.46% +/- 3.0%, down from 5.58% in the first quarter. As reported, the growth rate was statistically indistinguishable from a contraction.

As discussed in the SGS Alert of July 29th{LINK}, quarterly growth would have been negative but for the unusual reporting of quarterly inflation changes. Also, as expected, previously reported GDP growth suffered downward revisions back to 2003, as a benchmark revision backed out some of the previously gimmicked numbers. The net benchmark changes were shown in graphs in the referenced Alert.

As detailed in the Opening Comments and the Reporting/Market Focus, the SGS Alternate GDP measure has been introduced this month. The alternate measure shows annual GDP growth already to be in contraction.

That said, annual real GDP growth, per official reporting, slowed to 3.49% in the second quarter, down from 3.69% in the first quarter.

Final sales -- GDP net of inventory changes -- gained 2.0% in the second quarter, down from 5.58% in the first quarter.

The GDP inflation rate (deflator) in the second quarter incredibly held at 3.30% versus 3.26% in the prior quarter, despite explosive growth in quarterly CPI inflation.

GDP reporting generally is used as political propaganda and usually has little or no relationship to underlying economic reality. Given the long-term upside methodological biases built into the GDP, an annual rate of contraction of 0.8% would have been closer to reality.

Next Release (August 30): The "preliminary" estimate for second-quarter 2006 GDP could show a downward revision, based on recent retail sales and trade deficit reporting and revisions. Nonetheless, politics would favor some upside adjustment. More than any other series, forthcoming GDP numbers likely will be dominated by the political needs of the Administration.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) -- The focus of this month's Opening Comments is consumer inflation and the introduction of the Shadow Government Statistics Alternate CPI measure (methodology discussed in the Reporting/Market Focus). The opening table of eight consumer inflation measures will become a regular feature of this section.

Also, the BLS has announced it will begin publishing the CPI to three decimal places, starting with January 2007. While this will generate more precise measurements of monthly and annual official CPI changes, it will do nothing to improve overall CPI accuracy or relevance.

The BLS reported the seasonally-adjusted June CPI-U up by 0.44% (0.30% unadjusted), following June's 0.20% (0.29% unadjusted) and May's 0.45% (0.50% unadjusted). On a not-seasonally-adjusted basis, July's annual inflation rate was 4.15%, against 4.32% in June and 4.17% in May.

The "experimental" Chained Consumer Price Index (C-CPI-U), the fully substitution based CPI that presumably is the eventual replacement for current CPI reporting, showed annual inflation of 3.52% in July, versus 3.77% in June and 3.44% in May.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton methodology, annual CPI growth was about 7.3% as of July, versus 7.4% and 7.3% respectively for June and May. The SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure, which reverses gimmicked changes to official CPI reporting methodologies of recent decades, shows annual inflation at 11.0% in July, versus 11.0% and 10.8% in June and May.

Annual Core CPI-U inflation rate, which excludes the necessities of food and energy, rose to 2.7% in July, up from 2.6% in June and 2.4% in May. In contrast, the SGS Base CPI-U annual inflation rate, which includes only the necessities, held at 4.4% versus 4.4% in June and 4.6% in May. The SGS rate, however, still suffers the standard CPI-U methodological understatement.

Next Release (September 15): Inflation has not peaked, and the August CPI generally should surprise soft consensus forecasts on the upside. "Core" inflation has started to firm and increasingly should reflect the effects of staggering oil prices permeating all levels of the economy.

Despite short-term volatility, annual inflation will remain high and should continue to accelerate to the upside as the year progresses, with increasing upside pressures seen not only from oil prices, but also from a weak U.S. dollar. Seasonally-adjusted monthly inflation was 0.56% for August 2005, which means that monthly August 2006 inflation above or below that level will move the reported annual inflation rate in tandem.





Other Troubled Key Series


Federal Deficit -- As discussed in prior newsletters, the official, accounting-gimmicked 2005 deficit (fiscal year ended September 30th) was $318.5 billion, but it was eleven times higher -- at $3.5 trillion -- on a GAAP basis, per the U.S. Treasury (see the December 2005 SGS Supplement for detail). The official, accounting-gimmicked deficit for 2004 was $412.8 billion.

The Administration is touting a projected decline for the gimmicked 2006 number to $295.8 billion from 2005's $318.5 billion. This change is little more than statistical noise in the big picture and appears due to accounting games and to special short-lived tax breaks that stimulated corporate tax receipts. The "narrowing" deficit is not due to booming economic activity.

As of July 2006, the tenth month in fiscal 2006, the twelve-month rolling accounting-gimmicked deficit was $255.4 billion, down from $275.5 billion in June, and against $319.1 billion in July 2005.

Separate from the GAAP-based numbers and official deficit reporting, the change in gross federal debt is a fair indicator of actual net cash outlays by the government. As of fiscal year-end 2005, the gross federal debt was $7.933 trillion, up $554 billion from September 2004, which, in turn, was up by $596 billion from September 2003.

The gross federal debt as of July 31, 2006 was $8.444 trillion, up $24 billion from June and up $557 billion from July 2005, which, in turn, was up $571 billion from July 2004.

Going forward, the official federal deficit will inflate, as government finances suffer tax revenue losses from the intensifying recession and relative tax receipt declines after the expiration of the tax incentives. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy's mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance -- Annual change in initial claims again moved at an accelerating pace into less negative territory (an economic negative). On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended August 5th, annual change narrowed to a 2.8% decline from July 8th's 4.8% decline.

The volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly numbers is due partially to the seasonal-adjustment process. When the series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such usually is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings -- July's seasonally-adjusted real earnings declined by 0.1% for the month, after a 0.5% increase in June (revised from 0.6%) and a 0.7% decline in May. July's real earnings also were down 0.1% from the year before, versus an unchanged June and May's annual 0.2% contraction. Both monthly and annual growth rates should continue deteriorating in August, in tandem with upside moves in reported inflation.

Volatility in this series comes primarily from variations in reported CPI growth. Allowing for the biases built into the CPI-W series used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series signals ongoing severe financial strain on U.S. households and continuing recession.

Retail Sales -- While July retail sales showed a monthly upturn, annual growth continued to collapse, generating a deepening recession signal. Downward revisions to second-quarter data also suggest a possible downward revision in the upcoming "preliminary" estimate of second-quarter 2006 real GDP growth.

July's seasonally-adjusted monthly increase of 1.4% (1.1% net of revisions) +/- 0.7% followed a revised 0.4% decline in June (previously a 0.1% decline). Net of CPI inflation, July sales were up 1.0%, following June's 0.6% decline. With prior-period revisions, inflation-adjusted retail sales contracted at an annualized quarterly pace of 1.5% in the second quarter, versus an initially reported decline of 1.2%. This change -- in conjunction with negative revisions to the monthly trade data -- raises a fair risk of a downside revision to second-quarter GDP reporting.

When inflation-adjusted year-to-year growth in retail sales falls below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation), such signals recession. Before inflation adjustment, July's annual growth slowed to 4.8% from June's 5.4%. Net of inflation, July's annual growth was 0.7%, down from June's 1.1%, indicating a deepening recession signal. The recession signal was first generated last month, as discussed in the Flash Update of July 24th.

Next Release (September 14): August retail sales should come in below softening expectations, reflecting declining economic activity. Real (inflation-adjusted) growth should remain negative on a monthly basis, with annual growth continuing to slow.

Industrial Production -- Distorted by unusually hot weather, seasonally-adjusted July production gained 0.4%, following a 0.8% surge in June and no change in May. Unseasonably hot weather -- as seen recently -- spikes not only utility usage (up 2.0% in July), but also reported production in a number manufacturing categories, where activity is estimated by electricity consumption. Turn up the air conditioning in a computer factory, and the Federal Reserve thinks computer production is on the rise. Year-to-year change in July was up by 4.9% from 4.4% in both June and May.

Next Release (September 15): Look for industrial production increasingly to mirror the recession, with regular monthly contractions and a pattern of slowing annual growth setting in. Such will surprise market expectations on the downside. As the unusual heat waves subside, August and September reporting should start to offer some downside shocks.

New Orders for Durable Goods -- Volatile durable goods orders recovered in June with seasonally-adjusted orders gaining 3.1% (3.6% net of revisions) for the month, following May's revised 0.3% gain (previously a 0.8% decline). June's annual growth rate picked up to 6.2% from 5.9% in May.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders also rose in June, up by 1.3%, after May's unrevised 1.9% decline.

At one time, durable goods orders was one of the better leading indicators of broad economic activity, when smoothed using a six-month moving average. After the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders, however, the series' predictive ability suffered a serious setback.

Trade Balance -- As discussed in the SGS Alert of June 12th, trade deficit reporting is being manipulated. The phony trade numbers are being used to help support a faltering U.S. currency and have been used to prop GDP reporting. Nonetheless, the June data showed a negative twist for economic reporting.

The reported improvement in June's seasonally-adjusted trade deficit to $64.8 billion from May's $65.0 billion, actually reflected a meaningful deterioration. The June "improvement" was only after May's $63.8 billion deficit was revised to $65.0 billion. The change was unusually large and suggests further unconscionable manipulations resulting from the recent annual revisions. The June reporting revisions were bad enough to result in some downward revisions to the upcoming "preliminary" estimate of second-quarter 2006 GDP growth.

Despite the manipulations, there is little question that the trade deficit remains in a phase of meaningful deterioration.

Next Release (September 12): Contrary to likely consensus expectations for a minor monthly change, the July trade deficit should widen sharply. Despite near-term manipulations, upcoming deficit reports will surge beyond consensus forecasts and regularly set new record monthly deficits in the months ahead.

Consumer Confidence -- July consumer confidence measures were reasonably flat but continued sinking on an annual basis. The Conference Board's July consumer confidence index rose by 1.0%, after a 0.7% increase in June, while the University of Michigan's May consumer sentiment eased by 0.2%.

On a three-month moving-average basis for July, annual growth in the Conference Board's measure slowed to 1.8% from 4.3% in the prior month, while the University of Michigan number was down 11.0%, following June's 7.1% decline. These lagging, not leading, indicators are signaling that the economy remains in recession.

Short-Term Credit Measures -- Annual growth in short-term credit measures for businesses remains powerful, holding double-digit annual percentage growth, while annual growth in consumer credit picked up a little steam in June.

Growth in seasonally-adjusted consumer credit remained sub-par, but showed some improvement in the most recent reporting. Annual growth rose to 3.5% in June, up from 2.9% in May. Without growth in income, growth in personal consumption can be supported over the short-term only by debt expansion or savings liquidation, and consumer debt expansion -- though moving -- is still tepid enough to contain economic growth.

Annual growth in commercial paper outstanding in July notched higher to 17.0% from June's 16.8%. Annual growth in commercial and industrial loans also inched higher to 13.8% in June, up from 13.7% in May. Rising sales can fuel short-term credit needs, but so too can slowing sales, slowing collections and rising inventories.

Producer Price Index (PPI) -- The seasonally-adjusted July finished goods PPI rose just 0.1% (0.2% unadjusted), following June's 0.5% (0.3% unadjusted) gain and May's 0.2% (0.4% unadjusted) increase. July's annual PPI inflation fell back to 4.2% from June's 4.9% and May's 4.5%. Seasonally-adjusted July intermediate goods rose by 0.5% for the month, while crude goods were up 3.1%.

Next Release (September 19): Despite a large component of random volatility in monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months, including August, should top depressed expectations. "Core" inflation, in particular, should offer upside surprises to consensus forecasts despite reporting games played by the BLS.

Purchasing Managers Survey (Non-Manufacturing) -- Reporting on this series has been combined with the manufacturing series under the Better-Quality Numbers.



Better-Quality Numbers


The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey - Manufacturing New Orders -- The July new orders index declined by 3.1% to 56.1 after June's increase of 7.8% to 57.9. This measure breached its fail-safe point a year ago, generating an SGS early warning indicator of pending recession.

The Commerce Department provides suspect seasonal factors for the series, and the resulting adjusted monthly numbers can be misleading in the reporting of month-to-month change. This problem is overcome by using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the July index fell by 0.8% versus June's 3.3% increase. The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004.

Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising new orders.

The overall July ISM manufacturing rose to 54.7 from 53.8 in June. An index level of 50.0 divides a growing versus contracting manufacturing sector. The July employment component rose to 50.7 from June's contraction-territory reading of 48.7.

The service-sector ISM index does not have much meaning related to broad economic activity. Unlike its older counterpart, the manufacturing survey, if service companies such as law firms, hospitals or fast-food restaurants have "increased orders," that does not necessarily mean that economic activity is increasing. That said, the overall services index fell again in July, down by 5.3% from June to 54.8.

Both the services employment and prices paid components, however, have some meaning. The July employment component rose by 4.8% to 54.5. The prices paid component is covered under the Inflation Indicators.

Help Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) -- The June help-wanted advertising held at May's 45-year low of 33. Although this series never recovered from the last recession -- just bottom bouncing and rolling -- with the annual contraction in the three-month moving average sinking to 12.2% from 8.7% in May, it is sending out a deepening signal for fresh economic contraction.

Housing Starts -- As discussed in the July 24th Flash Update, seasonally-adjusted June housing starts fell 5.3%, after a 6.6% gain May. With year-to-year change down by 11.0%, the annual change on a three-month moving-average basis fell to a 9.0% decline, which generated a recession signal. The pattern continued in July reporting, with starts down by 2.5% from June, which in turn was revised to a 5.7% monthly decline. July's three-month moving-average year-to-year change dropped to a 9.6% contraction, reaffirming the recession signal.

In related data, respective annual contractions in June of 11.1% and 8.9%, for both new and existing home sales, also are consistent with a deepening recession.

Money Supply -- Real annual growth rates for M1 and M2 remain consistent with a recession, while the nominal (unadjusted) annual growth in M3 -- as estimated by the SGS Continuing M3 Series (see this month's Opening Comments and Reporting/Market Focus) -- has been strong enough to raise inflation concerns.

Annual growth in July for monthly M1 was up 0.2% versus a 0.4% contraction in June, while annual M2 growth held at 4.9%. Both measures remained in deepening-recession territory.

Before inflation adjustment, monthly M1 and M2 rose by 0.2% and 0.3%, respectively, in July, versus June's 1.7% contraction and 0.5% gain. Adjusted for CPI inflation, June's M1 and M2 annual year-to-year rates of change were down 3.7% and up 0.8%, respectively. On a three-month moving-average basis, the July inflation-adjusted annual rates of change were down 3.5% and up 0.7%, levels that remain well underwater using the old-style CPI.

This month, the Greenspan/Bernanke version of three-card monte comes to an end. The broader, but no longer officially visible, annual M3 growth has continued to spike, up 9.1% year-to-year per the SGS Continuing M3. The new M3 series showed a level of annual growth that should be raising the hackles of the inflation-jittery financial markets. Seasonally-adjusted monthly M3 gains appear to have averaged 0.6% to 0.7% since the series was discontinued in March. While the Fed may have been pushing interest rates higher, it never was tightening. The U.S. central bank continues to flood the system with liquidity.

Inflation Indicators

Purchasing Managers Surveys - Prices Paid Indices -- On the manufacturing side, the July prices paid diffusion index rose to 78.5 from June's 76.5, a reading indicative of intense inflationary pressures. On a three-month moving average basis, July's annual growth continued to explode, up 47.8% from the year before versus annual growth of 25.3% in June and 6.4% in May.

On the non-manufacturing side, the July prices paid diffusion index rose to 74.8 from 73.9, also at a level signaling intense inflation pressures. On a three-month moving average basis, July's annual growth was up by 16.9%, a slightly softer pace than June's 18.0%.

Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid components of the purchasing managers surveys are reliable leading indicators of inflation activity. The measures are diffusion indices, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising inflation.

Oil Prices -- West Texas Intermediate Spot (St. Louis Fed) soared anew in July to a new record average of $74.41 per barrel, up 4.9% from June's $70.96. Oil prices persist at extraordinarily inflationary levels, with July's average price up 26.8% from the year before, after June's annual gain of 26.1%. Oil prices through mid-August trading gyrated around July's average with shifting news on supply disruptions and Middle Eastern tensions. With a temporary cessation to hostilities in Lebanon, oil prices are trading in the low seventies as we go to press.

Spot prices will continue to gyrate. Despite continuing near-term price volatility, high oil prices will remain a major contributing factor to the inflation side of the current inflationary recession. Oil price changes permeate costs throughout the economy, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. Cost pressures already have passed significantly into the so-called "core" inflation sectors. With confirmation of same surfacing in official reporting, Wall Street's and the Fed's core-inflation scam has started to fall apart.

Oil price volatility affects CPI reporting. Downside oil price movements tend to be picked up more quickly and fully by the BLS in its inflation measures than are upside movements. Even as currently understated, CPI and PPI inflation should be much stronger than commonly predicted for the next six-to-nine months, partially as a result of the persistently high oil prices.



Background Material/Reporting Coverage


Quarterly/Annual Reporting -- Most series analyzed are published on a monthly or weekly basis. Followed economic/market series that are published with less-than-monthly frequency include:

Annual:
* Financial Statements of the United States Government (most recent analysis was a Supplement to December 2005 SGS; next analysis is due as a Supplement to the December 2006 SGS).
* Income Variance/Dispersion (most recent analysis was September 2005 SGS; next analysis is due September 2006).

Quarterly:
* Flow of Funds Accounts of the United States (most recent analysis: July 2006 SGS; next analysis is due October 2006 SGS).

Reporting/Market Foci -- The various economic and financial-market series are being addressed in a monthly "Reporting/Market Focus," with this month's analysis examining Shadow Government Statistics' alternate GDP and CPI measures in addition to a reintroduction of money supply M3. Employment, GDP, CPI and the Federal Deficit separately are explored in the background article "A Primer On Government Economic Reports," available on the Home page of www.shadowstats.com.

The series detailed so far in the Reporting Foci or background articles are listed below. The referenced SGS publications are available on the Archives page of www.shadowstats.com.


* Consumer Confidence (November 2004 SGS).
* Consumer Price Index (an original background article, October 2005 SGS, alternate numbers introduced August 2006 SGS).
* Credit Measures, Short-Term (August 2005 SGS).
* Durable Goods, New Orders for (May 2006 SGS).
* Employment/Unemployment (an original background article, alternate measures (April 2005 SGS).
* Federal Deficit (an original background article, update in the Alert of July 7, 2005, update in Supplement to December 2005 SGS).
* Gross Domestic Product (an original background article, alternate numbers introduced August 2006).
* Help Wanted Advertising (January 2006 SGS).
* Housing Starts and related housing statistics (June 2006 SGS).
* Income Variance/Dispersion (September 2005 SGS).
* Industrial Production (January 2005 SGS).
* Money Supply (Part I / SGS Early Warning System - May 2005 SGS, Part II - June 2005 SGS, M3 update November 2005 Supplement, M2 update March 2006 SGS, M3 continuing series introduced August 2006).
* Producer Price Index (April 2006 SGS).
* Purchasing Managers Survey (February 2006 SGS).
* Retail Sales (March 2005 SGS).
* SGS Early Warning System (May 2005 SGS, June 2005 SGS).
* Trade Balance (December 2004 SGS).
* Unemployment Insurance, Initial Claims for (February 2005 SGS).
* U.S. Dollar Indices, Financial- and Trade-Weighted (July 2005 SGS).



Reporting/Market Focus (August 2006) -- SGS Alternate Data
Money Supply M3 Continuation
Alternate Consumer Inflation at 11.0%
Alternate GDP Shows Annual Contraction


In response to subscriber demand, SGS has introduced and published in downloadable form on the www.shadowstats.com Alternate Data page, three alternate economic series. The SGS Continuing M3 is an estimate of growth in an ongoing version of the now defunct broad money supply series. The SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation and Alternate Gross Domestic Product estimates attempt to provide historical series that more closely track economic reality and common experience than do current, official government reports.

Continuing Money Supply M3. The Federal Reserve discontinued publishing M3, its broadest measure of the money supply, on March 23, 2006. The SGS continuing series estimates year-to-year change in the monthly average of seasonally-adjusted M3. The results are shown in a graph in the Opening Comments.

M3 consists of M2 plus institutional money funds, large-denomination time deposits, repurchase agreement liabilities and eurodollar holdings at foreign branches of U.S. banks.

More than 70% of the non-M2 components of M3 are accounted for by institutional money funds and large time deposits. The Fed has continued reporting institutional money funds as a memorandum item in its H.6 report on Money Stock Measures.

Large time deposits at commercial banks is reported regularly in the Fed's H.8 report on Assets and Liabilities of Commercial Banks. These numbers allow modeling of a good estimation of the large time deposit number used in M3 calculations.

Representing less than 30% of non-M2 components of M3 and less than 10% of total M3, the repos and eurodollars are being modeled by SGS econometric models. They will be updated, along with large time deposits, as benchmarking information becomes available in the quarterly flow of funds accounts. Accordingly, published SGS M3 growth rates are subject to revision, as are the still-published M1 and M2 series as published by the Fed. Nonetheless, the bulk of the M3 estimation is solid and should allow the production of annual M3 growth estimates that are representative of Fed activity, as well as representative of what the Fed still likely follows with its own unpublished estimates of M3.

SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation Measure. As discussed in the October 2005 SGS, the BLS publishes a "current methods" CPI that restates historical CPI reporting for methodological changes made to the series since the early 1980s. By reverse engineering the series, it is possible to calculate what the BLS estimates the different changes to CPI reporting have added or subtracted to reported annual inflation. With nearly all of the changes resulting in reduced CPI inflation, one would have to add 3.6% to current annual CPI reporting to approximate what inflation would have been, based on the older methodology. This BLS series, however, allocates only 0.2% to the annual effect of the changeover to geometric weighting in the 1990s.

SGS estimates show that net effect of the geometric weighting change is roughly 3.1% CPI reduction in terms of present impact. According 2.9% (3.1% - 0.2%) is added on top of the other adjustments. The SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation measure has been calculated over time, adjusting for the effects of all the methodological changes on annual not-seasonally-adjusted CPI-U inflation, as well as using a three-month moving average centered on the month in question. The latest month is published as is and then is revised with the publication of the next month's reporting.

Given the timing issues of when the BLS recognizes such factors as rising energy prices, the process eliminates some the unnecessary short-term volatility in the reporting. The results are shown in a graph in the Opening Comments.

Since the adjustment process is largely additive to existing reporting, the alternate series tends to show the same general up and down patterns of the underlying official CPI-U. The July 2006 annual rate of the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation is 11.0%, which is reasonably close to rough estimates of the fully independent SGS inflation series that still is under development.

Shadow Government Statistics Alternate Gross Domestic Product Measure. Over time, the GDP series has strayed from reality, based on methodological changes often tied to the deflation process. The SGS Alternate GDP is an estimate of the historical series net of those changes, and other changes, where quantifiable, that I have been able to identify. The results are shown in a graph in the Opening Comments. The series is far from perfect. The unofficial recession of 1986 is almost there. The shallow 1995 downturn is in place, while the 2000/2001 recession is much longer and deeper than officially reported and already has started into a double-dip. In official reporting, the 2000/2001 recession has been revised away.

This series is an attempt to approximate reality, and often is adjusted as an additive function on top of the current GDP series. Accordingly, most of the ups and downs tend to move with each other in both the SGS and official series.

Separately in the works is an independent GDP measure based on a regression analysis of underlying economic series of known good quality. The patterns in that series should be close to what is shown here. As with the SGS Alternate Consumer Inflation series, the three-quarter moving average on annual growth rates is used to smooth insignificant variations in growth that often result from reporting games playing.


Upcoming "Reporting/Market Focus" for September -- Income Variance/Dispersion


Income variance is a long-term driver and indicator of economic activity. Another record high -- well in excess of the level seen before the 1929 stock crash and Great Depression -- is expected as part of the Census Bureau's latest poverty report.



Expanded Shadow Government Statistics Services


You may have noted ongoing changes to our Web site (www.shadowstats.com). Alternate Data are now available for subscriber download. Current postings include historical detail of unique SGS alternate series on the CPI and GDP, as well as a continuing series for Money Supply M3.

The last month also saw the introduction of Flash Updates, which highlight important new data and provide a quick summary update to the most recent newsletter. Flash Updates are distinct from Alerts, which address unusual circumstances -- such as overt manipulations -- or breaking news.

The needs and desires of you, the subscriber, will continue to help shape the scope and content of SGS going forward. Please let us know (e-mail: shadowstats@hotmail.com) what you would like to see included regularly in the newsletter. We will accommodate your wishes as best we can.

Best wishes to all,

John Williams

___________________________________________


September's "Shadow Government Statistics" is scheduled for release on Wednesday, September 13, 2006. Any rescheduling will be noted on the home page of shadowstats.com at the top of the "Latest Monthly Commentary" column. Beginning with the September newsletter, regularly scheduled posting of the newsletter shifts to the second Wednesday of the month. This often will coincide will the prior regular posting schedule of the Wednesday following the Friday release of the employment statistics.

The posting of the next SGS on the Web site, as well as Flash Updates and any Alerts, will be advised immediately by e-mail.

Flash Update

Monday, August 7th, 2006
JWSGS - FLASH UPDATE - Aug. 7, 2006

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Flash Update

August 7, 2006

__________

Employment Growth Remains Indistinguishable from Contraction

Federal Deficit Reality Surfaces in Popular Media

__________


The employment data are beginning to act recession-like, and that normally would put the Fed into an easing mode. Yet, as evidence grows of slowing/falling economic activity, evidence of accelerating inflation is mounting, too. There is little the central bank can do to contain inflation or to stimulate the economy. Accordingly, Fed considerations and activity will be dominated by efforts to maintain stability in the financial markets and the U.S. dollar. If market expectations strongly are for the Fed to hold rates unchanged, that is what the Fed will do. Any "pause," however, will be just that. Efforts to support the dollar with higher interest rates will be needed, soon.

With July's seasonally-adjusted monthly payrolls reported up by a below-consensus 113,000 (124,000 net of revisions), official monthly employment growth has been on the cusp of statistical significance (+/- 106,000 jobs) for four straight months. June's initially-reported gain of 121,000 revised to 124,000, which followed May and April gains of 100,000 and 112,000, respectively. Unadjusted, July's annual employment growth eased to 1.30%, down from 1.39% in June and the near-term peak of 1.57% in March.

The household survey showed some catch-up in reporting, with seasonally-adjusted July employment (the number of people working versus the number of jobs as reported in the payroll survey) falling by 34,000, after a 387,000 gain the month before. The seasonally-adjusted July unemployment rate (U-3) rose to 4.75% from June's 4.60%, an increase within the +/- 0.2% margin of error. Unadjusted U-3 was 5.0% in July, up from 4.8% in June. U-6, the broadest unemployment measure published, rose to 8.5% in July from 8.4% in June, adjusted, and from 8.7% to 8.8% unadjusted. Net of the elimination of the counting of 90% of discouraged workers implemented during the Clinton Administration, actual unemployment remains around 12%.

Politics still is understating the economic weakness that is surfacing in the employment and household surveys. The current numbers were against a continued background of weakening private employment statistics. Seasonal-adjustment and bias-factor games are contributing to that circumstance.

Further details will follow in the regular August SGS.


$3.5 Trillion Federal Deficit Becomes USA TODAY Cover Story


Many thanks to subscribers who e-mailed comments and links to two recent articles on federal deficit reality. The dire nature of the problem appears to be going public. The actual federal deficit has been running around $3.5 trillion per year (instead of the official number that is about one-tenth of that), based on generally accepted accounting principles -- GAAP accounting -- as used in the corporate world. The largest accounting issue is unfunded liabilities for Social Security and Medicare.

First was Laurence J. Kotlikoff's "Is the United State Bankrupt?" (pdf) published in the Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis Review for July/August 2006 . Second was Dennis Cauchon's "What's the real federal deficit?" in the August 3rd USA TODAY.

Mr. Kotlikoff argues that "the United States is going broke," but that it can stave off bankruptcy through "radical reform of U.S. financial institutions." I argue that the there is no practical political or fiscal approach to staving off bankruptcy. While there likely will be no formal default on U.S. Treasuries, the printing presses will be revved up to print as much money as needed, and the situation will be resolved in an ultimate hyperinflation.

The USA TODAY article shows GAAP accounting results before 2001, but the earlier "prototype" data are not directly comparable to the 2001 and later reporting, due to accounting and actuarial changes. Otherwise, the data shown are as we have published previously.

Mr. Cauchon notes that "The Bush administration opposes including Social Security and Medicare in the audited deficit. Its reason: Congress can cancel or cut the retirement programs at any time, so they should not be considered a government liability for accounting purposes."

I would not bet a great deal of money on Congress canceling or cutting Social Security and Medicare.

Both articles are daring and worthy ventures putting previously unthinkable concepts before the public. Of course, John Crudele of the New York Post was the groundbreaking reporter, having written articles exposing these issues for a number of years.

My full comments on this problem were covered in the December 19, 2005 SGS Supplement on the government's financial reporting, and the earlier July 7, 2005 update on Federal Deficit Reality, available in the archives.

___________________________________________


August's "Shadow Government Statistics" is scheduled for release on Wednesday, August 16, 2006. The posting of the next SGS, as well as any Interim Updates or Alerts, will be advised immediately by e-mail.

Alert

Friday, July 28th, 2006
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

A L E R T

July 29, 2006

__________

GDP Manipulation

Second-Quarter GDP Contracted 0.5% Net of Unusual Inflation Gimmicks

2003 to 2005 GDP Growth Restated with Broad Downward Revisions

__________


Planned initially as a Flash Update -- designed to cover regular results from economic reporting discussed in the newsletter -- this brief commentary has been upgraded to an Alert because of the unusually-overt manipulation of second-quarter GDP reporting. -- John Williams

The "advance" estimate of annualized seasonally-adjusted real (inflation-adjusted) growth in second-quarter 2006 Gross Domestic Product (GDP) was reported at a below-consensus 2.5%, down from the first quarter's unrevised 5.6%. Due to an unconscionable manipulation of the inflation data, those results masked a quarterly contraction that likely was in excess of 0.5%. A contraction would be consistent with the current, though officially unrecognized, recession. Please note that this contraction is before any adjustment for the upside methodological biases built into existing GDP reporting.

As discussed in the July 17th SGS, a quarterly contraction in second-quarter inflation-adjusted retail sales growth was going to make it difficult for the Bureau of Economic Analysis to come up with positive GDP growth in the second quarter. The gimmick used to produce the 2.5% gain (still shy of a 3.0% consensus expectation) was an old one, an understatement in quarterly inflation used for deflating the GDP number.

In theory, GDP growth first is estimated in current dollars and then deflated for inflation effects. In reality, the needed politically-correct real growth rate appears to be determined first, with the needed deflation rate a residual factor that rarely has any relationship to reality.

If the GDP inflation rate (implicit price deflator) is understated, real GDP growth is overstated by a like amount. The just-published data show both the annualized first- and second-quarter deflation rates to be identical, at 3.3%.

In contrast, the annualized first- and second-quarter seasonally-adjusted CPI inflation rates were 2.2% and 5.0%, respectively, a quarterly surge of 2.8% in annualized inflation. While there are serious problems with CPI understatement, and the CPI is narrower in scope than the GDP deflator, the GDP deflator generally should move in tandem with the CPI.

Given the structural differences between the GDP and CPI universes, the indication from the CPI reporting is that the second-quarter GDP deflator should have been in excess of 6.3%. That difference not only would have resulted in a GDP contraction greater than 0.5%, but also could have done serious damage to the bond market and expectations of Mr. Bernanke's next action.

Benchmark Revisions


As expected, previously reported GDP growth was revised downwardly throughout the 2003 to 2005 period. Not surprisingly, most of the revisions were tied to partially correcting previously understated GDP deflation. As to total GDP level at year-end 2005, the downward revision was 0.3% before inflation, 0.8% after inflation. By year, annual average growth rates were reduced from 2.7% to 2.5% for 2003, from 4.2% to 3.9% for 2004 and from 3.5% to 3.2% for 2005. Growth still remains seriously overstated.

Most components of GDP growth deteriorated in revision, except for the gimmicked improvement in the services sector of the trade deficit, as discussed in the June 12th Alert. The biggest area of correction was in business investment in computers. Such is both surprising and encouraging, because the broad under-deflation of computer sales as been one of the larger methodological distortions in historic GDP reporting.





The above graphs detail the net annual and quarterly revisions. Further details will follow in the regular August SGS.

___________________________________________


August's "Shadow Government Statistics" is scheduled for release on Wednesday, August 18, 2006. The posting of the next SGS, as well as any Flash Updates or Alerts, will be advised immediately by e-mail.

Flash Update

Monday, July 24th, 2006
JWSGS - FLASH UPDATE - Jul. 24, 2006

JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Flash Update July 24, 2006

__________

Housing, Retail and CPI Data Confirm Recession Signals

__________


This is the first of many Shadow Government Statistics (SGS) Flash Updates. Distinct from an SGS Alert, which addresses unusual or breaking circumstances, a Flash Update provides a quick, interim, summary of developments that had been anticipated or discussed in the prior regular newsletter. -- John Williams

Two key series -- Retail Sales and Housing Starts -- have generated solid recession warning signals, based on reports published last week. Once generated, such signals always have been followed by the signaled contracting or booming economy.

The June CPI showed the 0.20% monthly gain expected by consensus forecasters, which translated into an unadjusted 4.32% annual rate of inflation. Those numbers locked-in both a 1.2% annualized real (inflation-adjusted) second-quarter retail sales contraction, and the annual retail sales growth rate moving below the 1.8% fail-safe level, as discussed in the July 17th newsletter.

Real retail sales contracted by 0.3% in June and were up just 1.6% year-to-year. The quarterly retail sales contraction, in particular, should create something of a reporting problem for the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) with this coming Friday's GDP reporting. The BEA will endeavor to bring in second-quarter GDP growth stronger than consensus estimates, which are hovering above three percent. Nonetheless, the heavily-politicized GDP number is not likely to let down the Administration, coming into the mid-term election.

The highly volatile housing starts series showed a 5.3% monthly contraction in June, which translated into an 11.0% annual decline. Most importantly, though, the three-month moving average year-to-year change fell to a 9.0% contraction, a steeper decline than seen at any point before or during the last official recession. In line with the July 17th newsletter's observations, this series generated the expected recession warning signal.

Federal Reserve Chairman Bernanke warned in last week's Congressional testimony of slowing economic growth, and he claimed that inflation was contained or would be contained by slowing business activity. The economy more properly could be described as coming in for an immediate crash landing. Contained inflation, however, remains a wishful fantasy of Fed and Wall Street spinmeisters.

Further details will follow in the regular August SGS.

___________________________________________


August's "Shadow Government Statistics" is scheduled for release on Wednesday, August 18, 2006. The posting of the next SGS, as well as any Interim Updates or Alerts, will be advised immediately by e-mail.

July 2006 Newsletter

Monday, July 17th, 2006
JOHN WILLIAMS' SHADOW GOVERNMENT STATISTICS

Issue Number 21

July 17, 2006

__________

Second-Quarter Real Retail Sales Contract 1.3%

Employment Indicators Plunge

As Inflation Soars, Fed President Suspects CPI Understatement

Federal Deficit "Improvement" Little More Than Statistical Noise And Accounting Gimmicks

Worst of Times Unfolding for U.S. Equity And Credit Markets


__________


Douglas R. Gillespie, Sr., founder and principal of Gillespie Research Associates, died suddenly but peacefully on June 14th. An obituary is included in the closing portion of this month's newsletter.

We welcome his subscribers who join us this month. Doug's information often offered a happy and unique complement to ours, and Shadow Government Statistics -- in addition to its regular fare -- is expanding to fill part of the void created by Doug's absence. In particular, the Markets Perspective section will address the shifting fundamentals underlying the equity, credit, currency and gold markets. Also, this month's Reporting/Market Focus explores the Federal Reserve's Flow of Funds Accounts and reporting for first-quarter 2006 as it relates to foreign investment in U.S. assets. Details of further and upcoming changes are discussed in this month's closing comments. -- John Williams
__________


Collapsing economic activity and mounting inflation dominated last month's economic reporting. An inflationary recession is in play, and there is little the Administration or the Fed can do about it. This has created a nightmarish scenario for the financial markets.

At the same time, international tensions have escalated to the point where risk of a conventional world war is the highest it has been in 61 years. With U.S. economic and global political conditions unraveling so rapidly, underlying fundamentals do not get much worse for the equity and credit markets, nor much better for gold. Circumstances are fluid and disorderly markets are possible with little or no warning. The U.S. dollar faces severe selling pressure in the near future, although political flight-to-safety effects are providing the greenback with temporary, albeit short-lived, support. The timing of the dollar's demise ultimately will determine the timing of the fate of the other markets.

Economic Indicators Tumble. Confirming a sharp slowdown in business activity, retail sales and help-wanted advertising both plunged and generated recession warning signals in the last month. Housing starts is on the brink of doing so with its next report. All this is in conjunction with downturns in most key business indicators, with industrial production surprising the markets with a monthly contraction. Month-to-month downturns also were reported in durable goods orders, the purchasing managers surveys, the trade deficit and real earnings, while annual growth continued sinking for consumer confidence and real (inflation-adjusted) money supply. Details are discussed in the respective series' sections.



The collapse seen in key employment indicators is particularly striking. While the above graph was included in last month's opening comments, the updated plot includes a further two-point plunge in May help-wanted advertising, which took the index below its recent recession low, to a level not seen in 45 years. The decline, which is a leading indicator to national employment, was mirrored in tumbling June employment indices in the purchasing managers surveys. In particular, the manufacturing index indicated an outright employment contraction, with the index at its lowest reading since the end of the last recession. The jobs downtrend also was confirmed by rising new claims for unemployment insurance.

Monthly payroll employment gains reported in the last two months have been statistically indistinguishable from no growth or outright contraction. But for political massaging, the monthly data would be turning down.

Also a shock to the markets, a June retail sales contraction confirmed the recession with annual, inflation-adjusted growth falling below its warning threshold level of 1.8% (pending a highly likely June CPI result on the plus side of a 0.3% contraction). Assuming the June CPI matches minimal consensus expectations of a 0.2% gain, real retail sales actually contracted at a 1.3% annualized rate in the second quarter.

Where retail sales represent roughly half of the GDP's personal consumption account, and personal consumption represents roughly 70% of GDP, the first quarter's reported GDP boom should have wilted some in the second quarter. Arguing for continued boom is the political manipulation of GDP reporting going into the mid-term election.

On the brighter side of the economy, the Administration happily is touting surging tax revenues and a declining budget deficit, as prepared using the standard cash-based gimmicked accounting, where social security and similar taxes are counted as revenues without offsetting liabilities. The "improvement" is little more than statistical noise and bad accounting.

While tax revenues are higher, almost across the board, the actual deficit is not narrowing. As projected, last year's accounting-gimmicked deficit of $319 billion now is expected to narrow to $296 billion for fiscal 2006. The $23 billion improvement is just 0.7% of the GAAP-based deficit, which is running close to $3.5 trillion.

The federal spending shortfall, however, is getting worse, not better. While the 12-month rolling gimmicked deficit as of June 2006 was $276 billion, down from $336 billion in June 2005, the actual annual increase in gross federal debt was $584 billion in June 2006 versus $562 billion the year before. The difference is in accounting manipulations. As to the factors behind increased tax revenues, eventual detail should show that special factors tied to regulatory or tax changes are at work, not a booming economy. The tax receipt gains should prove to be short-lived.

CPI Understatement Suggested by Fed President. "U.S. inflation may be worse than what is showing up in government data .." opened the June 16th Associated Press dispatch by Kelly Olsen, citing comments by St. Louis Federal Reserve President William Poole:

"... Poole said that more attention should be paid to informal sources of information in addition to official data to determine the true extent of inflationary pressure. "'Statistical studies to detect pass-through from recent energy price increases have failed to show significant effects in U.S. price data,' he said in an address to the [monetary policy] conference. 'But stories about widespread pass-through are becoming increasingly common.' "'We may face more inflation pressure than currently shows up in formal data,' Poole said, emphasizing that his objective was 'to make a general point and not to conduct a full analysis of the current situation.'"

Not surprisingly, Poole's comments were qualified as not necessarily reflecting official positions of the Federal Reserve System.

That said, annual inflation reported for May surged to 4.2% from 3.6% in April for the CPI, while annual PPI inflation jumped to 4.5% from 4.0%. With oil prices continuing at record-high levels, rising inflation is locked-in for the next six-to-nine months. As suggested by Mr. Poole, anecdotal evidence of oil-driven inflation crossing into nonsensical "core" inflation is overwhelming and should begin surfacing with a vengeance in official reporting.

For those who are new to the SGS, "core" inflation is described as nonsensical, here, since it excludes the costs of food and energy, commodities that account for a goodly portion of most consumers' living expenses. The "core" concept originally was introduced as way of viewing monthly inflation changes, net of distortions from unusual monthly volatility in food or energy prices. Now the measure is used by Wall Street and the Fed on an annual basis to proclaim low and contained inflation. Annual "core" inflation, however, has no practical use or meaning other than as tool of political convenience and propaganda.

Global Dangers and Distortions. One area regularly pursued by SGS is the examination of risks, particularly where there is or may be an interconnection of not so obvious issues. Communist China keeps surfacing in such analyses.

As discussed variously in this month's Reporting/Mmarket Focus on the Flow of Funds and the U.S. dollar outlook, foreign holdings of U.S. Treasuries present a liquidity threat to various markets. China is a large holder of these instruments and could throw the U.S. markets into turmoil if it decided to stop pouring its trade-surplus dollars into U.S. Treasuries, or, worst case, to dump its holdings. Nonetheless, there have been rumblings of the Chinese monetary authority starting to do exactly that.

A common Wall Street response to the potential of such actions is that it could not happen, because the Chinese are so dependent on trade with the United States. Therein lies a shortfall in market perceptions. One cannot impute to the Chinese the greed and immediate-gratification needs so rife within the Wall Street psyche. The contrast in cultures is vast. On Wall Street, long-range strategic planning typically is measured in terms of one or two quarters. In Washington, D.C., it is measured in terms of the next opinion poll or, longer range, until the next election, which never is more than two years away. In Beijing, long-range strategic planning begins at the 50-year mark; otherwise it is considered short-term in nature.

Commodity bulls sometimes cite the strong Chinese economy as a contributing factor to strong global demand for copper and oil. Alternate analyses suggest some Chinese stockpiling of inventories for war is a contributing factor, too.

Then there is the somewhat unusual behavior of North Korea. In the last month or so, ongoing threats of nuclear war and missile tests have created a high level of discomfort in Japan and predictable huffing and puffing in the United States. It is not credible that North Korea's actions have taken place without the full support -- albeit covert -- of Communist China.

Then there is war in the Middle East. U.S. troops are in Iraq and Afghanistan, on one border with Syria and two borders with Iran. At the same time Israeli forces are engaged in leveling Lebanon, a conflict that easily could expand to a regional war. A war, with Israel backed by the United States and the United Kingdom, against Syria and Iran backed by Russia and China, is fraught with danger of rapid global escalation and unforeseen consequences.

One possible result: With the U.S. forces stretched thin in a multi-front war in the Middle East, Communist China invades and takes Taiwan, and North Korea moves on South Korea. Under such circumstances would China continue to refrain from dumping their dollars and creating havoc in the Western financial markets?

Of course, current market concerns over the possible expansion of Middle East fighting have centered on oil supply disruptions. If the conflict expands, global consequences will stretch well beyond who ends up controlling Middle Eastern oil. The question remains open as to what else is in play here. One can hope for global political tensions to subside.


Updated Summary of Current Outlook


In general, the broad economic outlook has not changed, but the financial markets now are recognizing early signs of both uncontained inflation and a possible recession. Indeed, the 2005 to 2007 (perhaps 2008) inflationary recession continues to deepen.

A contracting economy, inflation and risks of intensifying dollar selling are upon us and continue to offer the worst of all environments for increasingly less-Pollyannaish financial markets. The exception is the gold market, where the traditional inflation-hedge and flight-to-safety/quality vehicle is earning its keep. The recent sharp deterioration in the global political situation exacerbates the outlook; it does not alter it.

The Shadow Government Statistics' Early Warning System (EWS) was activated in May 2005 and signaled the onset of a formal recession in July 2005. The EWS looks at historical growth patterns of key leading economic indicators in advance of major economic booms and busts and sets growth trigger points that generate warnings of major upturns or downturns when predetermined growth limits are breached. Since the beginning of 2005 a number of key indicators had been holding near or at their fail-safe points. Six indicators now have moved beyond those levels, signaling a recession.

Retail sales and help-wanted advertising generated such signals in the last month. Once beyond their fail-safe points, these indicators never have sent out false alarms, either for an economic boom or bust. The housing starts series appears ready to generate such a signal in the next month.

With a false economic boom massaged into first-quarter GDP reporting, negative GDP growth is not likely to surface in regular government reporting until after the November election, given the rampant political manipulation of most key numbers. The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) eventually should time the downturn to mid-2005 and announce same also sometime after the election, so as not to be deemed politically motivated in its timing. Of some interest will be the upcoming (July 28th) annual revisions to the GDP that should show a weaker 2005 economy than previously reported.

Whether or not there is a recession will be a hot topic in the popular financial media, with politics helping to fuel the debate as the election nears. Those Wall Street economists who act as shills for the market will keep up their "strong growth is just around the corner" hype regardless of any and all evidence to the contrary.

From the standpoint of common experience, this downturn will be considered the second leg of a double-dip recession, not an independent contraction as will be claimed officially.

Most economic data have softened, with the trend accelerating sharply. Regular monthly contractions are near, if not already in place for both payroll employment and industrial production, although political manipulation can keep the official payroll and production data afloat for a while longer. Significant deterioration also will be seen in corporate profits and federal tax receipts, despite any near-term volatility to the contrary. Depressed tax receipts will combine with negligible fiscal discipline and ongoing war spending to accelerate deterioration in the federal finances.

This general outlook is predicated on economic activity that already has taken place and does not consider any risks from exogenous factors such as renewed terrorist activity in the United States, world war, major natural disasters or a financial panic.

Market perceptions of the downturn in business activity are increasing sharply. As expectations begin to anticipate weak data, traditional expectations also will be lowered for inflation, despite the obvious oil problem. Even so, worsening stagflation seems to have gained a good foothold in some consensus thinking. Still, consensus forecasts generally will tend to be surprised on the downside for economic reports and on the upside for inflation reports, for some time to come.

The roots of the current difficulties are structural in nature. A consumer starved of income growth and overburdened with debt cannot sustain the real (inflation-adjusted) growth in consumption needed to keep GDP growth in positive territory. The income weakness is a direct result of the loss of a significant manufacturing base to offshore locations and the ensuing explosive, perpetual growth of the U.S. trade deficit.

Exacerbating economic and financial woes will be unusually high inflation during this contraction. Gold prices already signal inflation and other troubles. Fueled by high oil prices, weakness in the U.S. dollar and accelerating Fed monetization of federal debt, inflation will not be brought under control simply by weakness in economic demand. Instead, persistently high prices only will serve to intensify the recession, making it exceptionally long and protracted. Ongoing inflation woes and dollar problems will maintain upside pressure on long-term interest rates, inhibiting the traditional flattening of the yield curve expected with an economic downturn.

The faltering economic activity and mounting inflation have created a nightmarish conundrum for the political operatives at the Federal Reserve. Soft economic numbers and high inflation are being spun as "conflicting data," but an inflationary recession is in play, and there is little the Fed can do about it.

The pabulum fed to the investing public -- that a weak economy means low inflation and interest rates -- cannot work in the current environment. Any conflicts that arise are not in the economic data but in simplistic views on economic activity espoused by Wall Street, or in the statistical manipulation goals of the politicians. Those latter issues explain Fed Chairman Bernanke's recent tap dancing on the inflation outlook. Such is anchored in putting a positive spin on an impossible situation and avoiding a financial-market meltdown before November 7th, but the markets have not been particularly cooperative.

In the present circumstance, inflation driven by robust economic demand would be a happy event, but such is not to be. Rather, the purchasing power of the U.S. dollar is being lost to wasting diseases, eroded by foreign exchange weakness in the trade-deficit plagued greenback, malfeasance in domestic fiscal and monetary policies, and external disruptions such as cartel-orchestrated price surges in oil. All the latter factors are in play.

From the Federal Reserve's perspective, at present, mixed signals are the best that can be offered to the markets. Indications of further faux "tightening" are given to signal Mr. Bernanke's devotion to keeping inflation under control. Alternate suggestions that the Fed at least will pause in hiking interest rates signal Mr. Bernanke's devotion to maintaining solid economic growth. While the tap dancing may keep the markets guessing and gyrating for a while, the Fed is in an untenable position. Raising rates will do little to contain a non-demand driven inflation, while lowering rates will do little to stimulate the structurally-impaired economy.

From the standpoint of the federal government, traditional economic stimuli in the form of tax cuts or increased federal spending have reached their practical limits with the current budget-deficit excesses.

Due to the inability of the government or central bank to stabilize this situation, risks of the current situation evolving into a hyperinflationary depression are extraordinarily high. Such a development involving the world's reserve currency would lead to a collapse of the current global currency system. In order to regain public confidence, monetary authorities likely would structure gold into the base of any new international currency system.

The unfolding inflationary recession is the worst of all worlds for the financial markets. Particularly hard hit will be the U.S. dollar, with significant downside moves looming for both equity and bond prices. Despite recent extreme volatility, the price of gold is headed much higher. At such time as the system re-stabilizes, post-crisis, there will be exceptional investment opportunities for those who have been able to preserve their wealth, capital and liquidity.

MARKETS PERSPECTIVE


In his final "Market Thoughts" of May 30th, Doug Gillespie wrote of the key financial markets being in "transition." In general, he was looking for equity prices, bond prices and the U.S. dollar to transition to much lower values. He suggested that intensified weakness in the dollar would "create an objective for bullion of an upside test of the old highs (very general area of $700 to $725) in rather short order."

Doug combined technical and fundamental analysis along with his keen political instincts to provide short-term timing for the markets with a consistency better than anyone else I have known. I am not going to attempt to time the markets, except on rare occasions where a confluence of factors strongly increases the odds of a major move or turning point. Instead, the SGS will focus on the fundamentals underlying the financial markets, both perceived and not recognized. Ultimately, the fundamentals should drive market activity and pricing.

At present, those underlying economic and financial fundamentals strongly support Mr. Gillespie's market thoughts, with little other than flight-to- safety/quality issues providing short-term boosts to the dollar and bond prices. Ahead lie much lower equity, bond and U.S. dollar values and a much higher gold price.

One factor moving the markets in recent more-peaceful times, has been speculation over pending actions by the Federal Reserve. Last month's economic data showed a sharp slowdown in business activity in conjunction with continued acceleration in inflation. Since the Federal Reserve can neither contain current inflation nor stimulate the economy into sustainable economic growth, speculation over defunct or non-existent Fed strategies to handle either problem is a fruitless effort by market participants.

What drives present-day Fed policy is an effort to avoid -- at least to delay as long as possible -- a global financial panic and currency-system collapse. Accordingly, Fed actions are designed to placate the financial markets as much as possible and do not encompass a planning horizon much beyond a week or two. As discussed in this month's Reporting/Market Focus on the flow of funds account, foreign investors have started to pull back from Treasuries. Accordingly, the Fed most likely will focus on the dollar as a policy guide, continuing to raise rates so long as such is deemed necessary to keep the dollar from entering freefall.

Novice Fed Chairman Alan Greenspan pursued such a policy in September 1987, which he abandoned the next month after the stock market crashed. The current circumstance is one of similarly-conflicting policies aimed at maintaining a highly precarious and unstable balance between currency and stock market stability.

Equities -- The stock market is the least rational of financial markets, but it does provide something of a long-term hedge against inflation. As shown in the accompanying graph of year-end closes of the Dow Jones Industrial Average, deflated by the SGS Standard CPI (the way the CPI was calculated in the 1970s as detailed in the October 2005 SGS), the DJIA has held its own against that pernicious eroder of dollar value. While off its 1999 peak, the inflation-adjusted June 2006 DJIA is almost as high as it was at year-end 1965.



Other than inflation, the fundamentals underlying the U.S. equity markets are not good. The economy is in recession and interest rates are rising. Implications are for declining corporate profits and competing investment opportunities in the credit market. With a terrible dollar tumble ahead, investment opportunity competition also will be had from assets denominated in something other than U.S. dollars, as well as from gold, which is a better inflation hedge than the DJIA over the long haul.

In terms of the latest trailing four quarters of DJIA earnings, Friday's closing Dow of 10,739 reflected a price/earnings ratio of roughly 20-to-1. Where the historic norm is about 14-to-1, that suggests a reasonable market value 30% below the present level, at about 7,500. The market, however, tends to overshoot with its movements, so something well below 7,500 eventually is a good bet; the only question is when. Earnings should fall, due to the recession, but such can be muted by inflation that tends to increase revenues, etc.

As stated earlier, the equity market rarely is rational. When the dollar takes its major tumble, and foreign holdings of dollar assets get dumped at a near-panicked rate, the ensuing U.S. liquidity crisis should be enough to take stock prices to relative levels that only could be viewed as nightmarish by the Pollyanna crowd. Such could happen anytime, with no warning; the current circumstance also could linger beyond year-end.

Nonetheless, upside potential on equities would appear to be limited, particularly against the relative safety of increasingly high Treasury yields and the sharp upside potential of currencies such as the Swiss franc.

Two versions of corporate earnings/profits are shown below, and the general topic will be addressed in a future Reporting/Market Focus.

The top chart shows the year-to-year change in quarterly as well as trailing four quarters DJIA earnings. In line with common experience, earnings turned negative in the last recession, bouncing back in late-2003, early-2004, but then turning negative again in 2005, in line with the current recession. The sharp rebound shown in the quarterly data for first-quarter 2006 is a positive sign for the economy, but future quarters likely will tell a different story.





In contrast, the bottom graph shows year-to-year after tax profits on both a quarterly and trailing four quarters basis for nonfinancial corporations, as reported in conjunction with the GDP. Not too surprisingly, the numbers show the impact of the last recession, but suggest booming growth in place since 2002. As to one of the series being closer to reality, the DJIA wins out over Bureau of Economic Analysis estimates, any time.

Credit Markets -- Long-term interest rates are headed sharply higher by the end of the year. This move in rates will be dominated by rising inflation, by a weakening dollar and by foreign investors increasingly moving their assets out of dollar-denominated instruments (see Reporting/Market Focus).

A number of factors drive interest rate movements, including economic activity, inflation, credit demand, political stability and relative dollar strength and accompanying cash inflows and outflows from abroad. Flight-to-safety concerns, as seen at present, will have short-lived dampening impacts on treasury yields, but it is the recession that will offer major downside pressure on rates. Expectations of some slowing growth is why consensus forecasts are for a relatively stable environment.

Nonetheless, the consensus likely is wrong, as usual. The economic consensus on long-term interest rate direction (six months ahead), as published by the Wall Street Journal in its semi-annually survey, historically has been wrong about 80% of the time. SGS econometric models, built on leading indicators of interest rate movement, have a track record of getting the six-month direction of rates right 80% of the time.

The WSJ estimate at mid-year 2006 actually was for a slight increase in the 10-year Treasury note yield, from 5.15% at the end of June to 5.24% at the end of December (range 4.25% to 6.00%). While we predict the same direction, nine basis points of movement is virtually unchanged. More likely will be a year-end yield in excess of 7.00%, possibly 8.00%. The consensus is missing the depth of the dollar and inflation problems, as well as the depth of the economic downturn. Again, the former issues will dominate credit-market action.

As to the Fed, policy and comments will continue to flip-flop like a fish out of water and dying. Near-term pressures from the global markets likely will keep the U.S. central bank tightening at least once or twice more. Any "pause" will be just that, as dollar issues will keep Mr. Bernanke tap dancing for the foreseeable future.

U.S. Dollar -- While the U.S. dollar had begun to stumble into early-June, it averaged out on the plus side for the month. Dollar trading, to a certain extent, fluctuated with gyrating market speculations on Federal Reserve policy. Little the Fed does -- including massive intervention -- will keep the dollar afloat for other than brief interludes.

Early-July trading has held around average June levels, with the greenback spiking modestly in recent days as a result of flight-to-safety concerns generated by mounting global political tensions. Nonetheless, very negative and disorderly markets await the greenback. The dollar's tumble has just begun.

Underlying fundamentals are so bad, they only could be marginally worse. Driving relative currency values are relative conditions in domestic economic activity, inflation, interest rates, government financial conditions and political stability. Though not fully recognized, all these factors for the United States relative to its major trading partners are negative. The U.S. economy is in recession, inflation is spiking and interest rates are rising abroad, while the Fed is pressured to stop raising rates at home. The actual U.S. federal deficit is beyond containment, and, barring short-term variations with international tensions, the President's popularity rating is the lowest recorded in the 70-year history of such surveying.

Timing is uncertain, but the break in the dollar should come quickly, with little if any further advance warning. Serious shocks loom in U.S. economic and fiscal data and deteriorating domestic politics, and heavy selling pressure against the U.S. currency could intensify at any time. New record lows for the dollar are likely before the end of 2006, despite any overt or covert supportive intervention by any central bank.

Generally, the weaker the dollar, the greater will be the ultimate inflation pressure and liquidity squeeze in the U.S. equity and capital markets.

U.S. Dollar Indices. The Shadow Government Statistics' Financial-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index is based on dollar exchange rates weighted for respective global currency trading volumes. For June, the monthly dollar average gained 1.18% after a 4.25% drop in May. June's year-to-year change turned increasingly negative, down 1.73% after May's 0.54% decline.

In the same directions, June's monthly average of the Federal Reserve's Major Currency Trade-Weighted U.S. Dollar Index rose by 1.10%, following May's 3.89% loss. June's year-to-year contraction was 3.86%, after May's 3.07% drop. The relative strength in the financial- versus trade-weighted dollar, though somewhat muted, still remains at a level that usually precedes a major dollar sell-off.

Gold -- Since topping $720 per troy ounce in mid-May, the price of gold has been on a roller coaster ride, plunging below $570 in mid-June, with the likely encouragement of some central banks, and reclaiming $660 as we go to press in mid-July. The fundamentals that are so negative for the U.S. dollar and the equity and credit markets, are fuel for gold buying.

As a hedge against currency problems and inflation, and as the preferred safe-haven vehicle, the price of gold generally should move higher and set new historical highs in the months ahead. The currency and inflation issues are chronic and will deteriorate sharply before an ultimate collapse in the global currency system. Such does not prevent interim wild gold price gyrations, however, particularly if central banks think they see an opportunity to tarnish gold's image. One of the alluring features of the precious metal, of course, is that is does not tarnish.





Despite the June downswing in the price of gold, the updated graphs on bullion, oil and the Swiss franc suggest that all the political gimmicks, spin doctors and statistical manipulations still are not fooling a number of investors. In the gold versus Swiss franc chart, look for the Swiss franc to move higher to meet the gold line, not the other way around.

REPORTING PERSPECTIVE


The Big Three Market Movers

This month's opening comments review the sharp turn in many business statistics to the downside. Conflicting pressures on the great manipulators continue -- they need to keep the economy looking healthy enough to satisfy voters, while keeping the financial markets' inflation concerns low enough to make it through the election without major sell-offs in equities and bonds. Hence, there appears to be a continuation of the reporting of soft jobs growth, while conflicting unemployment news remains relatively happy. Direct manipulation of key economic data appears to be well entrenched and should continue at least into the November election.

With the President's ratings continuing to bottom bounce and roll at historic lows, near-term economic reporting will remain gimmicked and managed. As a result, reported economic performance will continue having less than usual relevance to actual underlying activity, and upcoming reporting of the major series will be determined primarily by political need rather than by the economic factors that should drive the results.

Employment/Unemployment - June's 121,000 payroll gain again was well shy of market expectations. Fortunately for the Administration, the unemployment rate held. The continued mixed messages from the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) play both to the Administration's needs to salve the inflation-rattled credit markets (weak payrolls) and to the political needs of the Administration (low unemployment).

The popularly followed seasonally-adjusted unemployment rate U-3 for June eased slightly to 4.60% from May's 4.65%, a decline that was well inside the published +/- 0.2% error margin. The unadjusted U-3 unemployment rose to 4.8% from May's 4.4%, and the broader U-6 unemployment measure rose to 8.7% from 7.9% in May. June's seasonally-adjusted U-6 rose to 8.4% from 8.2%. Including the long-term "discouraged workers" defined away during the Clinton administration, total unemployment remains roughly 12%. The household survey also showed seasonally-adjusted June employment (those people with at least one job) up by 387,000, versus a 288,000 gain in May.

For June, the payroll survey's seasonally-adjusted gain of 121,000 (124,000 net of revisions) was close to the published reporting error of +/- 108,000. This means the reported June gain was statistically indistinguishable from negligible monthly growth. The June increase followed an upwardly revised May gain of 92,000 (was 75,000). Annual growth in unadjusted June employment eased to 1.37% from May's 1.43%.

June's payroll gain of 121,000 included a positive bias of 175,000 jobs in the "net birth/death" adjustment, a fudge factor that was little changed from the 176,000 used for June 2005. The fudge factor swings into negative territory in July (it was a 72,000 contraction in July 2005), which should add some downside reporting pressure to next month's payrolls.

The difference between the household survey's gain of 387,000 and the payroll survey's 121,000 increase has received some press in the last week. After adjusting for definitional differences, the BLS never has been able to reconcile the two survey results to within 1,000,000 jobs at the total employment level. The problem remains that neither report is meaningful at levels of change that normally cause wild gyrations in the financial markets.

June reporting was remarkably free of gimmicked seasonal factors, and the usual distortions from misadjusting June education employment also were absent. Aside from a 175,000 upside fudge factor and any unofficial number doctoring, the report was unusually clean.

The latest report, however, was against a background of collapsing May help-wanted advertising, rising new claims for unemployment insurance and plummeting June manufacturing and non-manufacturing purchasing managers employment indices (see the respective sections).

Next Release (August 4): The political needs of the Administration remain great and will continue to offset the impact of sharply slowing economic activity in the employment data, even more so in the unemployment data.

While underlying reality would suggest further downside surprises to July payroll reporting in the form of an outright monthly contraction, some sort of improvement will be needed before the election. Given a swing in the July birth-death numbers into negative territory, that upside surprise to reduced consensus expectations is more likely for the August payroll report. Nonetheless, it will be interesting to see how July's payrolls will be structured so as to show a seasonally-adjusted gain.

Unemployment appears to be the ongoing vehicle for the politicians' good news, and, with appropriate massaging, should hold the current unemployment rate level, with some further improvement seen before the election, irrespective of diverging reality.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) -- The "final" revised estimate of annualized inflation-adjusted growth for first-quarter 2006 GDP was a little beyond the realm of statistical noise, aided by inflation and trade-deficit games playing (see the SGS Alert of June 12 on trade manipulation). Growth revised to 5.64% from 5.31% in the "preliminary" estimate and up from 4.82% in the "advance" report. Reported first-quarter growth has rebounded strongly into economic-boom territory from the fourth quarter's tepid 1.65% pace of growth.

The first quarter's reported year-to-year growth revised to 3.68% from 3.59%, up from the fourth-quarter's 3.22%, and now slightly above the third quarter's 3.64%. Final sales -- GDP net of inventory changes -- revised to 5.92% from 5.48%, up from the fourth quarter's 0.25% contraction.

The GDP inflation rate (deflator) was cut to 3.13% from 3.30%, in revision, down from the prior quarter's 3.47%. The lowered inflation estimate accounted for half of the upside revision in real GDP growth. Fortunately for the Administration, the GDP appears to be immune to the effects of exploding oil prices.

This "final" estimate, however, is something of a misnomer, as it and all growth estimates back to the beginning of 2003 will be restated in an annual revision on July 28th, published along with the "advance" estimate of second-quarter GDP. Look for earlier growth to be restated to the downside. Redistributing current economic weakness into the past makes it easier for the Bureau of Economic Analysis to show stronger GDP growth in the last two quarters running up to the mid-term election.

Revisions to alternate first-quarter GDP measures, Gross National Product (GNP) and Gross Domestic Income (GDI) highlighted some of the reporting distortions in the system. GNP, which is GDP plus the net trade balance in factor income (interest and dividend payments), showed annualized, inflation-adjusted first-quarter growth of 6.18%, revised upward from 5.18%, contrasted with 0.72% in the fourth quarter. The revision and large quarterly growth swing is an artifact of the revamping of and methodological shifts in the reporting of the services side of the trade deficit. These changes have been designed to narrow the reported trade deficit and to increase reported GDP/GNP growth.

GDI, the theoretical income-side equivalent of the consumption-based GDP, showed revised annualized inflation-adjusted first-quarter growth of 6.82% versus the 5.47% initially reported, and up from 1.89% in the fourth quarter. The greater growth rate is due to a reported narrowing of the statistical discrepancy between the GDP and GDI from $58.0 billion in the fourth quarter, to $33.0 billion in the first estimate of first-quarter GDI, and to $23.0 in the revised estimate. One could hope this reflects improved bookkeeping pending in the annual revisions.

GDP reporting generally is used as political propaganda and usually has little or no relationship to underlying economic reality. Given the long-term upside methodological biases built into the GDP, an annual growth rate slightly into negative territory still would have been closer to reality.

Next Release (July 28): The "advance" estimate for second-quarter 2006 GDP should show a contraction, based on contracting real retail sales and underlying weakness in other key economic variables. Yet something slightly in excess of relatively strong market expectations is the likely politicized result. At least the consensus expects some slowing of growth, but nothing smelling of possible recession will surface before the November election.

GDP estimates back to the beginning of 2003 generally face downward revision in the annual revisions also due on July 28. Again, more than any other series, the GDP numbers likely will continue to be dominated by the political needs of the Administration.

Consumer Price Index (CPI) -- The BLS reported the seasonally-adjusted May CPI-U up by 0.45% (0.50% unadjusted) following April's 0.60% (0.85% unadjusted) increase. Beyond regular seasonal adjustments continuing to depress CPI reporting, a pattern that should reverse in July, the BLS re-jiggered the seasonal factors a little further, and that underreported adjusted CPI by 0.1% from where it would have been otherwise.

Aside from whether the CPI even should be seasonally adjusted (BLS opening comments in the CPI report always formally present the series as not seasonally adjusted), year-to-year change should be the same regardless of the seasonality games. Applying May's unadjusted year-to-year inflation to the adjusted series yields a monthly adjusted CPI increase of 0.55% instead of the 0.45% reported.

May's annual inflation rate rose to 4.17% from April's 3.55%. As mentioned in prior newsletters, reported annual CPI inflation is surging in May and June, due to last year's underreporting. July also should rise sharply as negative seasonal factors start to reverse.

The "experimental" Chained Consumer Price Index (C-CPI-U), the fully substitution based CPI that presumably is the eventual replacement for current CPI reporting, showed annual inflation of 3.44% in May, up from 3.09% in April.

Adjusted to pre-Clinton methodology, annual CPI growth was about 7.3% as of March, while the SGS Standard CPI, net of all the methodology changes of the last 30 years that were designed to suppress inflation reporting, stood at 8.1%.

Annual Core CPI-U inflation rate, which excludes the necessities of food and energy, rose to 2.4% in May from April's 2.3%. In contrast, the SGS Base CPI-U annual inflation rate, which includes only the necessities, rose to 4.6% in May, up from up 3.8% in April. The SGS rate, however, still suffers the standard CPI-U methodological understatement.

Next Release (July 19): The June CPI generally should surprise minimal consensus forecasts on the upside. "Core" inflation increasingly should reflect the effects of staggering oil prices permeating all levels of the economy.

Despite short-term volatility, annual inflation will remain high and should continue to accelerate to the upside as the year progresses, with increasing upside pressures seen not only from oil prices, but also from a weak U.S. dollar. Seasonally-adjusted monthly inflation was reported at a minus 0.1% for June 2005, which means that monthly June 2006 inflation above or below that level will move the reported annual inflation rate in tandem.


Other Troubled Key Series


Federal Deficit -- As discussed in prior newsletters, the official, accounting-gimmicked 2005 deficit (fiscal year ended September 30th) was $318.5 billion, but it was eleven times higher -- at $3.5 trillion -- on a GAAP basis, per the U.S. Treasury (see the December 2005 SGS Supplement for detail). The official, accounting-gimmicked deficit for 2004 was $412.8 billion.

The Administration is touting a projected decline for the gimmicked 2006 number to $295.8 billion from 2005's $318.5 billion. As discussed in the opening comments, this change is little more than statistical noise in the big picture and is due to accounting games, not booming economic activity.

As of June 2006, the ninth month in fiscal 2006, the twelve-month rolling accounting-gimmicked deficit was $275.5 Billion, up from $273.1 billion in May and $265.7 billion in April, and against $335.5 billion in June 2005.

Separate from the GAAP-based numbers and official deficit reporting, the change in gross federal debt is a fair indicator of actual net cash outlays by the government. As of fiscal year-end 2005, the gross federal debt was $7.933 trillion, up $554 billion from September 2004, which, in turn, was up by $596 billion from September 2003.

The gross federal debt as of June 30, 2006 was $8.420 trillion, up $63 billion from May and up $584 billion from June 2005, which, in turn, was up $562 billion from June 2004.

Going forward, the official federal deficit will inflate, as government finances suffer tax revenue losses from the intensifying recession. While GDP growth estimates can be gimmicked, incoming tax receipts remain an independent estimate of underlying economic reality and eventually will reflect the economy's mounting difficulties.

Initial Claims for Unemployment Insurance -- Annual change in initial claims again rose into less negative territory (an economic negative). On a smoothed basis for the 17 weeks ended July 8th, annual change narrowed to a 4.8% decline from May 27th's 5.5% decline.

The volatility of the seasonally-adjusted weekly numbers is due partially to the seasonal-adjustment process. When the series is viewed in terms of the year-to-year change in the 17-week (four-month) moving average, however, such usually is a fair indicator of current economic activity.

Real Average Weekly Earnings - May's real earnings fell by 0.7% from April, as CPI reporting played a little catch up. April's previous monthly gain of 0.2% was revised upward to 0.3%. May's real earnings also were down 0.2% from the year before, following April's annual gain of 0.4%. Both monthly and annual growth rates should continue deteriorating in June, in tandem with upside moves in reported inflation.

Volatility in this series comes primarily from variations in reported CPI growth. Allowing for the biases built into the CPI-W series used in deflating the average weekly earnings, annual change in this series signals ongoing severe financial strain on U.S. households and continuing recession.

Retail Sales - As discussed in the opening comments, real (inflation-adjusted) June retail sales not only triggered a formal recession signal, but also dragged the second-quarter 2006 real sales into contraction.

June's seasonally-adjusted 0.1% (+/- 0.7%) decline, before inflation adjustment, was the third month in the last five where sales contracted after the effects of inflation had been removed. May's unrevised 0.1% increase turned into a 0.3% decline after May's CPI rose by 0.4%. Core inflation has no relevance here, where food and energy account for more than 30% of retail sales. As first reported, April's gain of 0.5% fell by 0.1%, adjusted for the 0.6% jump in April CPI. April retail sales, however, have revised to a gain of 0.8%, which is a gain of 0.2% net of inflation. Nonetheless, average real retail sales in the second quarter declined at an annualized pace of 1.3% from the first quarter's average

When inflation-adjusted year-to-year growth in retail sales falls below 1.8% (using the official CPI-U for deflation), such signals recession. Almost certainly, this happened in June. June's year-to-year retail sales were up 5.9%, following May's 7.6% annual growth. As long as this Wednesday's seasonally-adjusted June CPI puts in a stronger showing than a 0.3% contraction, inflation-adjusted June growth will be below 1.8%.

Next Release (August 11): July retail sales should come in well below expectations, once more, reflecting declining economic activity. Real (inflation-adjusted) growth should remain negative on a monthly basis, with annual growth continuing to soften.

Industrial Production -- Seasonally-adjusted May production surprised consensus expectations with a 0.1% monthly contraction. Such was consistent with an unfolding recession. Recent upside distortions from utility usage still were present, but were less severe. April's overall 0.8% production surge remained intact, even though recently reported production levels were reduced in semi-annual revisions. May 2006 production was up 4.3% versus the year before, down from April's 4.7% annual gain.

Next Release (July 17): Look for industrial production to mirror the recession, with increasingly regular monthly contractions and a pattern of slowing annual growth. Such will surprise market expectations on the downside. Accordingly, look to today's June release for continued downside shock.

New Orders for Durable Goods - Durable goods orders fell for a second month, with May's seasonally adjusted new orders down 0.8% (down 0.7% net of revisions) following April's revised 4.7% decline (previously 4.8%). May's annual growth rate slowed to 5.1% from 6.7% in April.

The widely followed nondefense capital goods orders also fell in May, by 1.9%, following April's 6.3% drop (previously reported as a 6.0% decline).

At one time, durable goods orders was one of the better leading indicators of broad economic activity, when smoothed using a six-month moving average. After the semi-conductor industry stopped reporting new orders, however, the series' predictive ability suffered a serious setback.

Trade Balance - As discussed in the SGS Alert of June 12th, the reporting of the March trade deficit was manipulated to show an artificially low trade shortfall, based on a pending one-time change to trade levels that were published along with the April trade data. The phony trade improvement was used to help support a faltering U.S. currency and as a basis for generating booming growth and upward revisions to reported inflation-adjusted first-quarter GDP.

The gimmicked and guesstimated trade in services suddenly is showing a surplus surge, and that has helped contain the April and May deficits. This series appears to have fallen victim to intensifying political manipulation of the market-sensitive series.

May's seasonally-adjusted trade deficit rose to $63.8 billion from April's revised trade shortfall of $63.3 (was $63.4) billion, and both months were up from the rigged March deficit of $61.9 billion. The revised, benchmark seasonally-adjusted record monthly trade deficit is $66.6 billion as of October 2005. Despite the manipulations, there is little question that the trade deficit remains in a phase of meaningful deterioration.

Next Release (August 10): Contrary to consensus expectations for a minor monthly change, the June trade deficit should widen sharply. While the level of reported deficits as been reduced through benchmark revisions and methodological revisions to service-sector reporting, upcoming deficit reports will surge beyond consensus forecasts and regularly set new record monthly deficits in the months ahead.

Consumer Confidence - June consumer confidence measures showed some monthly bounce but sank on an annual basis. The Conference Board's June consumer confidence index rose by 1.0%, after falling by 4.6% in May (previously down 6.0%), while the University of Michigan's May consumer sentiment rebounded to 7.3%, after falling 9.5% in May.

On a three-month moving-average basis for June, annual growth in the Conference Board's measure slowed to 4.4% from 6.1% in the prior month, while the University of Michigan number was down 7.1% after the May's 4.4% decline. These lagging, not leading, indicators still are signaling that the economy remains in recession.

Short-Term Credit Measures -- Annual growth in short-term credit measures for businesses remains strong, holding double-digit annual percentage growth, while annual growth in consumer credit remains unusually soft at 2.5%.

Seasonally-adjusted consumer credit remained in serious slowdown. Preventing meaningful monthly growth, annual growth has remained soft, at 2.8% in May, following 2.4% year-to-year growth in April and 2.5% in March. Without growth in income, growth in personal consumption can be supported over the short-term only by debt expansion or savings liquidation, and consumer debt expansion has ground to a halt.

Annual growth in commercial paper outstanding in June came in at 16.8%, only slightly below May's powerful 17.5% annual rate of increase. Annual growth in commercial and industrial loans inched higher to 13.7% in May, up from 13.0% in April. Rising sales can fuel short-term credit needs, but so too can slowing sales, slowing collections and rising inventories.

Producer Price Index (PPI) -- The seasonally-adjusted May finished goods PPI rose by 0.2% (0.4% unadjusted), following April's 0.9% (1.0% unadjusted) gain. May's annual PPI inflation rose to 4.5% from April's 4.0%.

Next Release (July 18): Despite a large component of random volatility in monthly price variations, PPI inflation reporting over the next six-to-nine months should continue topping market expectations, which are in the 0.3% range for June. "Core" inflation, in particular, should offer upside surprises to consensus forecasts.

Purchasing Managers Survey (Non-Manufacturing) -- The overall index fell again in June, down by 5.2% to 57.0, after May's 4.6% decline. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading above 50.0 indicates a growing service economy, in theory. Both the employment and prices paid components have some meaning.

The June employment component tumbled by 10.3% to 52.0 from 58.0 in May, suggesting a sharp deterioration in the service sector employment environment.

The prices paid component diffusion index is a general indicator of inflationary pressures. The June index eased back to 73.9 from May's 77.5, still generating an intense inflation signal. On a three-month moving average basis, June's annual growth soared to 18.0% from May's 8.4%.

There is nothing unusually wrong with this survey of the service industry, except it does not have much meaning related to broad economic activity. Unlike its older counterpart, the manufacturing survey, if service companies such as law firms, hospitals or fast-food restaurants have "increased orders," that does not necessarily mean that economic activity is increasing.

Better-Quality Numbers


The following numbers are generally good-quality leading indicators of economic activity and inflation that offer an alternative to the politically-hyped numbers when the economy really is not so perfect. In some instances, using a three-month moving average improves the quality of the economic signal and is so noted in the text.

Economic Indicators

Purchasing Managers Survey (Manufacturing) - New Orders -- The June new orders index rose 7.8% to 57.9, after May's 6.8% decline to 53.7. This measure breached its fail-safe point a year ago, generating an SGS early warning indicator of pending recession.

The Commerce Department provides suspect seasonal factors for the series, and the resulting adjusted monthly numbers can be misleading in the reporting of month-to-month change. This problem is overcome by using year-to-year change on a three-month moving average basis. On that basis, the June index increased by 3.3%, versus May's 3.6%. The index gradually has notched lower from its peak annual growth of 42.6% in April of 2004.

Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the new orders component of the purchasing managers survey is a particularly valuable indicator of economic activity. The index is a diffusion index, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising new orders. The overall June ISM index continued a softening trend, down to 53.8 in June from 54.4 in May. An index level of 50.0 divides a growing versus contracting manufacturing sector. The June employment index fell into contraction territory, at 48.7, down from 52.9 in May.

Help Wanted Advertising Index (HWA) - As discussed in the opening comments, the May help-wanted advertising index plunged by two points (5.7%) to 33, the lowest level since July 1961. Such was the second two-point plunge in as many months. The latest index reading breaks below the lowest level seen in the last recession. Although this series ever recovered from the last recession -- just bottom bouncing and rolling -- with the annual contraction in the three-month moving average sinking to 8.7% from 6.7% in April, it is sending out a fresh signal for economic contraction.

Housing Starts -- Seasonally-adjusted May housing starts rose 5.0% after declining by 5.5% in April. Beyond the regular monthly reporting volatility, however, annual change on a three-month moving-average basis remained negative, down 3.0% in May versus a 2.9% decline April. As discussed in the June SGS, reporting for June should push the series into generating a recession signal. The May three-month moving-average annual growth rates for both existing and new home sales continue to indicate a contracting economy.

Money Supply -- Annual growth for monthly M1 turned to a 0.1% contraction after a 1.7% gain in May, while annual M2 growth notched higher to 4.8% from 4.7%. Both measures are in deepening-recession territory. Therein remains the beauty of the Greenspan/Bernanke version of three-card monte. The broader, but no longer visible, annual M3 growth continues to spike, somewhere over 9.0%, a level that should be raising the hackles of the inflation-jittery financial markets.

While the Fed may be pushing interest rates higher, it still is not tightening. The U.S. central bank continues to flood the system with liquidity Such should be visible in next month's Reporting/Market Focus with the introduction of an new alternate measure of M3.

Before inflation adjustment, monthly M1 and M2 declined by 1.8% and rose by 0.4%, respectively, in June, versus May's 0.2% and 0.3% gains. Adjusted for CPI inflation, June's M1 and M2 annual year-to-year rates of change were down 4.3% and up 0.3%, respectively, versus down 2.2% and up 0.7% in May. On a three-month moving-average basis, the June inflation-adjusted annual rates of change were down 2.7% and up 0.7%, levels that remain well underwater using the old-style CPI.

Inflation Indicators (Please note that the U.S. Dollar section has been moved to the Market Perspectives/Currencies section.)

Purchasing Managers Survey (Manufacturing) - Prices Paid -- The June prices paid diffusion held reasonably flat at 76.5 versus 77.0 in May, a reading still indicative of intense inflationary pressures. On a three-month moving average basis, June's annual growth exploded to 25.3%, up from May's 6.4%.

Published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM), the prices paid component of the purchasing managers survey is a reliable leading indicator of inflation activity. The measure is a diffusion index, where a reading above 50.0 indicates rising inflation.

Oil Prices -- West Texas Intermediate Spot (St. Louis Fed) notched minimally higher to a new record average in June of $70.96 per barrel, up from May's $70.94 average. Oil prices persist at extraordinarily inflationary levels, with June's average price up 26.1% from the year before, after May's annual gain of 42.4%. Oil prices in early-July trading again were on the rise, with Middle Eastern tensions pushing prices towards $80 per barrel as we go to press.

Spot prices will continue to gyrate. Despite ongoing near-term price volatility, high oil prices will remain a major contributing factor to the inflation side of the current inflationary recession. Oil price changes permeate costs throughout the economy, ranging from transportation and energy costs, to material costs in the plastics, pharmaceutical, fertilizer, chemical industries, etc. Cost pressures already have passed significantly into the so-called "core" inflation sectors. With confirmation of same surfacing in official reporting, Wall Street's and the Fed's core-inflation scam has started to fall apart.

Oil price volatility affects CPI reporting. Downside oil price movements tend to be picked up more quickly and fully by the BLS in its inflation measures than are upside movements. Even as currently understated, CPI and PPI inflation should be much stronger than commonly predicted for the next six-to-nine months, partially as a result of the persistently high oil prices.

Background Material/Reporting Coverage


Quarterly/Annual Reporting -- Most series analyzed are published on a monthly or weekly basis. Followed economic/market series that are published with less-than-monthly frequency include:

Annual:
* Financial Statements of the United States Government (most recent analysis was a Supplement to December 2005 SGS; next analysis is due as a Supplement to the December 2006 SGS).
* Income Variance/Dispersion (most recent analysis was September 2005 SGS; next analysis is due September 2006).


Quarterly:
* Flow of Funds Accounts of the United States (most recent analysis: current SGS; next analysis is due October 2006 SGS).

Reporting/Market Foci -- All series eventually will be addressed in a monthly "Reporting/Market Focus," with this month's analysis examining the Federal Reserve's Flow of Funds Accounts. Employment, GDP, CPI and the Federal Deficit are explored in the background article "A Primer On Government Economic Reports", available on the Home page of www.shadowstats.com.

The series detailed so far in the Reporting Foci or background articles are listed below. The referenced SGS publications are available on the Archives page of www.shadowstats.com.

* Consumer Confidence (November 2004 SGS).
* Consumer Price Index (an original background article and October 2005 SGS).
* Credit Measures, Short-Term (August 2005 SGS).
* Durable Goods, New Orders for (May 2006 SGS).
* Employment/Unemployment (an original background article, alternate measures (April 2005 SGS).
* Federal Deficit (an original background article, update in the Alert of July 7, 2005, update in Supplement to December 2005 SGS).
* Gross Domestic Product (an original background article).
* Help Wanted Advertising (January 2006 SGS).
* Housing Starts and related housing statistics (June 2006 SGS).
* Income Variance/Dispersion (September 2005 SGS).
* Industrial Production (January 2005 SGS).
* Money Supply (Part I / SGS Early Warning System - May 2005 SGS, Part II - June 2005 SGS, M3 update November 2005 Supplement, M2 update March 2006 SGS).
* Producer Price Index (April 2006 SGS).
* Purchasing Managers Survey (February 2006 SGS).
* Retail Sales (March 2005 SGS).
* Trade Balance (December 2004 SGS).
* Unemployment Insurance, Initial Claims for (February 2005 SGS).
* U.S. Dollar Indices, Financial- and Trade-Weighted (July 2005 SGS).



Reporting/Market Focus (August 2006) -- Flow of Funds Accounts of the United States


While still funding the bulk of net U.S. Treasury and corporate debt issuance, foreign investors appear to have started a meaningful pullback in the buying of U.S. Treasuries. Such is the conclusion of an examination of the first-quarter 2006 flow of funds analysis released in June 2006 by the Federal Reserve.

The quarterly flow of funds accounts published by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (Z.1), reports on all the major sources and uses of cash and debt flows within the U.S. economy and against the rest of the world. The numbers actually tie into the U.S. National Income and Product Accounts (NIPA), such as the GNP/GDP. Of particular interest, the flows show major factors that affect the liquidity of the credit markets, including flows to and from investors outside the United States.

While the system is subject to some of the same foibles as GNP/GDP reporting, many of the problems with the broadest measure of U.S. economic activity are related to the deflation process, where the nominal or current-dollar numbers are deflated to the real or constant-dollar numbers. The flow of funds numbers use only the unadjusted data.

Where both the NIPA and flow of funds data are based on something akin to double-entry bookkeeping (consumption versus offsetting income numbers for NIPA, sources versus uses for the flow of funds), the two sides of the ledger rarely equal each other, and balance is achieved using a statistical discrepancy account.

That said, here is how some of the more interesting flows were reported on a not-seasonally-adjusted basis as of first-quarter 2006.





The two graphs above show the net foreign holdings of U.S. financial assets, as of year-end for the years through 2005, and as of quarter-end for first-quarter 2006. The top graph is expressed in trillions of dollars, the bottom as a percent of U.S. GDP, just to give the numbers a little scope. Net foreign holdings of U.S. financial assets rose to $6.3 trillion (or roughly 48% of GDP!) as of the end of first-quarter 2006. While the pace of growth appears to have slowed in the graphs, that is only because of the use of the first-quarter's number against 2005 and earlier annual numbers. At an annualized pace, the first-quarter number is growing at a somewhat higher pace than the 30% growth rate seen for all of 2005.



In the above graph, however, please note the foreign holdings of U.S. Treasuries as a